JP2022087232A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of improving the player's interest in playing a game.

SOLUTION: Identification information for indicating the result of a discrimination performed by discrimination means on the basis of information stored in storage means is dynamically displayed on display means, and when the identification information is displayed in a mode to show a specific determination result on the display means, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by privilege game execution means. Performance execution means executes a performance on the basis of a result of discrimination made by the discrimination means on the information stored in the storage means by pre-discrimination means. Of the information stored in the storage means, number information except the information corresponding to the performance executed by the performance execution means is suggested, thus causing an effect that the player's interest in playing the game can be improved.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a winning game when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of these gaming machines are designed to improve the interest of the player's game by making it possible to execute a plurality of games having different degrees of advantage for the player and playing a game aiming at a winning game in various games. be.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2001-038007

However, there is a need for further improvement in interest.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball and an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry means of the game ball entering the ball entry means. A storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, a discrimination means capable of discriminating based on the information stored in the storage means, and a discrimination by the discrimination means. When the identification information is displayed in a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the result on the display means and a mode for showing the specific determination result on the display means. It has a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player, and can execute the determination based on the information stored in the storage means before the determination by the determination means. Corresponds to the effect executed by the effect execution means among the information stored in the pre-determination means, the effect execution means capable of executing the effect based on the determination result by the pre-determination means, and the storage means. It has a suggestion means capable of suggesting suggestive information for indicating a number of information other than the information discriminated by the prior discriminant means.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, an entry means capable of entering a game ball, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry means, and the acquisition means. To show a storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the above-mentioned storage means, a discrimination means capable of discriminating based on the information stored in the storage means, and a discrimination result by the discriminating means. It is advantageous to the player when the dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means and when the identification information is displayed on the display means in a manner for showing the specific determination result. A privileged game executing means capable of executing a privileged game, and a pre-determining means capable of executing discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means before being discriminated by the discriminating means. , The effect execution means capable of executing the effect based on the determination result by the pre-determination means, and the pre-discrimination corresponding to the effect executed by the effect execution means among the information stored in the storage means. It has suggestive means capable of suggesting suggestive information for showing numerical information other than the above-mentioned information determined by the means.

This has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the effect displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the ending of the jackpot game in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content during the probability change in the first embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the second special symbol is non-variable after the start of the hit fluctuation of the first special symbol in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents when the second special symbol is non-variable, and (b) is the first embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of a small hit by the 2nd special symbol in RUSH in a form. (A) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the second special symbol is changing after the start of the hit change of the first special symbol in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents when the second special symbol is changing. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content when the 2nd special symbol stopped the fluctuation during the hit variation of the 1st special symbol in a form. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a state in which the result of the variation display of the first special symbol is a jackpot A during RUSH in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a state in which the RUSH in the first embodiment is shown. It is a figure which showed an example of the state that the result of the variation display of the 1st special symbol became a jackpot C or a jackpot D. (A) is a diagram showing the card forgetting warning screen in the first embodiment, and (b) to (d) are timing charts showing the timing of displaying the card forgetting warning screen in the first embodiment. be. It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the game flow of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the ROM of the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit random number table, and (c) is a schematic diagram. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the random number table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit type selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of the variation pattern selection table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of a normal table schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving / probability variation table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the latent probability table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the stop display mode selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the additional effect selection table. It is a block diagram of the electric structure of the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) to (c) are explanatory views explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surfaces B to D. (A) to (c) are explanatory views explaining the back surface E. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol change start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation execution processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation stop processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol change start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 deviation variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in a main control unit. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation execution process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 disengagement stop process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the through-gate passage processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prize processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the stop type command reception process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the state command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the hit-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot related processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the small hit-related processing which is executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the remaining number update process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the temporary stop-related processing executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation resumption processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process for special figure 1 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process for special figure 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the various counter update processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (A) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. It is a flowchart which showed the ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the rush inrush command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the additional effect command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (A) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in the display control device. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the jackpot C is won in the probable change state in the second embodiment. FIG. 1 is a relationship diagram between the game content of the special figure 1 game and the grant privilege after the probability change state in the second embodiment is set. (A) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the second special symbol is changing when the hit symbol of the first special symbol in the second embodiment is stopped, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents when the second special symbol is stopped. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of the 2nd special symbol stop while the hit symbol stop of the 1st special symbol in a form. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the ROM of the main control unit in the 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the jackpot type selection 2 table schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the loss type selection table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of 2 tables for time saving and probability change schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol change stop process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol determination period setting process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the fixed time executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol motion stop processing 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol determination period setting process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the remaining number update process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the temporary stop-related process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the resumption process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the symbol determination-related processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the various counter update process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 1 is a relationship diagram between the game content of the special figure 1 game and the grant privilege after the probability change state in the third embodiment is set. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the end of the jackpot in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the first variation after the jackpot. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the third variation after the jackpot in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the fourth variation after the jackpot in the third embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the third variation after the jackpot in the case where the third variation after the jackpot in the third embodiment is a jackpot, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the third variation after the jackpot, and (b) is between the first to third fluctuations after the jackpot. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content of the 2nd change after the big hit when the special figure 1 small hit is won. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the structure of the ROM of the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 3 table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit random number 3 table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit type selection 3 table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 3 table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection 3 table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation 3 table, and (c) is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the probability variation A table schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probabilistic B table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probabilistic C table, and (c) is a probabilistic D table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of 3 tables for latent accuracy schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the probabilistic staging selection table schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the deviation processing of special figure 1 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows 1st special symbol change stop process 3 executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 disengagement stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the prize information-related processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot related process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the big hit end processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process for probability variation executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the special figure 1 jackpot is won during the probability change state in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is the flow when the time is shortened during the probability change state. It is a timing chart shown. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the RUSH rush due to the arrival of the reduced number of times in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is the RUSH in the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation in the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content to notify. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents when the fall lottery is won during the latent state in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a special figure during the latent state in the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display screen at the time of winning a big hit in 2. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content in super RUSH in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the ROM of the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 4 table in the 4th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a fall lottery table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a latent mode selection table, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a fall lottery table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the notification selection table schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows 1st special symbol change stop processing 4 executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol change stop processing 4 executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the state command process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the latent mode setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the fall effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the small hit-related process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the fall notification processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 4 for special figure 1 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 4 for special figure 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the variable winning device for small hits. It is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device for small hits. It is an operation diagram which saw the variable winning device for small hits from the back side. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the special figure 1 jackpot is won during the probability change state in the fifth embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the game in the case of short-time digestion in the probable change state in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content at the time of a small hit in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content during the small hit game. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents when the ball passes through the fall gate during the small hit game in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content when the ball passes through the fall gate during the small hit game. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content when it did not pass. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the end of the small hit, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content in the latent state (invincible mode). It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 5 table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the operation scenario storage area. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit entrance passage processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fall gate passing processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the state command process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the hit | related process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the ball passing-related processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the ROM of the main control unit in the sixth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit state flag, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit state flag. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation condition determination process which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows 1st special symbol change start processing 6 executed by MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol change start process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric accessory opening / closing process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a round execution process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot interruption processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing an ending execution process executed by the MPU in the main control unit according to the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 7th Embodiment. It is an enlarged view which expanded the flow path unit in 7th Embodiment. (A) is a plan view schematically showing the ball flow when the electric accessory is in the closed state (buried state) in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a plan view schematically showing the electric accessory in the closed state (buried state). ) Is a perspective view schematically showing the ball flow in the case of. (A) is a plan view schematically showing the ball flow when the electric accessory is in the open state (protruding state) in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a plan view schematically showing the electric accessory in the open state (protruding state). ) Is a perspective view schematically showing the ball flow in the case of. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content at the time of hitting the second symbol in the time-saving state in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is the second ball entrance in the time-saving state in the seventh embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content when a ball enters the ball. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents when the result of the special drawing 2 lottery is out of order in the time saving state in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents in the time saving state in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of display contents when a sphere is flowing down a delay passage during a change in Special Figure 2. FIG. 2A is a diagram showing an example of display contents when a sphere is flowing down a normal passage during special drawing 2 fluctuation in a time-saving state in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 2B is a diagram showing an example of display contents. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of passing V during a small hit game in a form. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display contents in the case where V did not pass during the small hit game in the time saving state in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is the figure showing as the time saving state in the seventh embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content when the time saving state A is set. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control unit according to the seventh embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the configuration of the RAM of the main control unit according to the seventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 7 table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 1 random number table, (c). Is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number 7 table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 7 table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the variation pattern 7 table schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first time-saving fluctuation pattern table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second time-saving fluctuation pattern table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the opening scenario 7 table schematically. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine in the seventh embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the game at the time of passing a small hit V in the 7th embodiment. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device according to the seventh embodiment in the seventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the content of the delay passage state flag schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving number update process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V entrance passage processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V passing process executed by the MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric accessory opening / closing process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 7 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the hit | related process 7 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the small hit start processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the time saving effect-related processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the end time processing per ordinary figure executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 7 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process for special figure 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the ball passage monitoring process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a front view of the gaming board of the pachinko machine in the eighth embodiment. (A) is a plan view schematically showing the case where the opening / closing door 3650f of the second attacker 3650 in the eighth embodiment is in the open state, and (b) is the second attacker 3650 in the eighth embodiment. It is a top view schematically showing the case where the opening / closing door 3650f of the door is in the closed state. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in 8th Embodiment, and is the schematic diagram which shows the flow of the ball to the 2nd attacker schematically. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in 8th Embodiment, and is the schematic diagram which schematically shows the flow of the ball to the 2nd entrance. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents during the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot C in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a ball during the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot C in the eighth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of entering a ball into the 2nd ball entrance. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display contents of the ending screen of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot C in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is the figure after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot C in the eighth embodiment. 2 is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the screen during the game. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display contents when the special figure 2 small hit is won in the normal state in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is the figure which showed the big hit H in the special figure 2 in the eighth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of winning. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents during the special figure 2 game in the time-saving state in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is the end of the final special figure change in the time-saving state in the eighth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content of time. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine in the eighth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control unit in the eighth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the random number 8 table per first in the eighth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the 1st type selection 8 table in 8th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the operation scenario 8 table in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the contents of each scenario type in the eighth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the random number 8 table per 2nd in the 8th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the variation pattern selection 8 table in the 8th Embodiment schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the 8 tables for normal / latent probability in the 8th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the 8 tables for time saving / probability variation in the 8th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in the above. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 8th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the eighth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the reserved ball number-related processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the reduction processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the small hit control process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 9th Embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol jackpot determination process 9 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the ninth embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing a time saving end process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the ninth embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing a game state update process 9 executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol change stop processing 9 executed by MPU in the main control device in 9th Embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol jackpot determination process 9 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol change stop processing 9 executed by MPU in the main control device in 9th Embodiment. It is a front view of the gaming board of the pachinko machine in the tenth embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the stop screen of the jackpot symbol in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is an example of the display content during the symbol determination period in the jackpot C in the tenth embodiment. It is a figure which showed. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the ROM of the main control device in the tenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the random number 10 table per second schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the jackpot type selection 10 table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the specific winning operation pattern table schematically. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the RAM of the main control device in the tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process which is executed by the MPU in the main control device in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 10 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 10 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation stop processing 10 executed by MPU in the main control device in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the specific ball entry process which is executed by the MPU in the main control device in 10th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of the tenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the effect content in the modification of the 7th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a random number 11 table 202ja for high probability in the modified example of the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a second hit for low probability in the modified example of the seventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed the random number 11 table 202jb. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process 11 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the modification of 7th Embodiment. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 11 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modified example of the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary figure effect setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 7th Embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display contents when the special figure 2 small hit is won in the latent state in the modified example of the 4th embodiment, and (b) is the modified example of the 4th embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content in the case of being elected out of the special figure 2 in the latent state in. (A) is a figure showing an example of the jackpot content suggestion effect in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, and (b) shows an example of the effect result of the jackpot content suggestion effect in the modified example of the fourth embodiment. It is a figure. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, and (b) is the schematic diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the modified example of the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of RAM schematically. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the suggestion mode selection table in the modification of the 4th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the suggestion staging selection table in the modification of the 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 11 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot-related process 11 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit-related process 11 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process 11 for special figure 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion mode setting process which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the liquid crystal display execution management process 11 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 4th Embodiment. (A) shows an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the ending effect executed during the ending period of the jackpot game in which the probability change state or the time saving state is set after the jackpot ends in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 3B is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the probabilistic state before the river breakthrough effect is executed and the time saving state in the eleventh embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 at the start of the river breakthrough effect in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the river breakthrough effect in the eleventh embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 when it succeeded in breaking through a river in 1 and was notified of the continuation of a chance zone. (A) shows an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the case where the river breakthrough effect succeeds in breaking through the river and the transition to the latent state (RUSH) is notified in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 3B is an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the case where the river breakthrough effect fails to break through the river and the transition to the normal state is notified in the eleventh embodiment. It is a figure shown. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing the transition of the gaming state and the staging mode when the chance zone is set after the end of the big hit in the eleventh embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the small hit effect of the second special symbol suggesting that the lottery result of the first special symbol is likely to be a big hit is executed. It is a figure which showed an example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit random number table in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the small hit random number table in the eleventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the jackpot type selection table in eleventh embodiment schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving / probability variation table in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the latent probability table in the eleventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the RAM of the main control device in eleventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine in the eleventh embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the eleventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the eleventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit effect selection table in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the winning sound selection table in the eleventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in eleventh embodiment. 11 is a flowchart showing a second winning process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the state command processing 12 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in eleventh embodiment. 11 is a flowchart showing a small hit related process 12 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process 12 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving medium-time production setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process 12 for special figure 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in eleventh embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the twelfth embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the normal mode in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the probability variation number in the normal mode in the twelfth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 in the case of transitioning to a normal state after a lapse of time. (A) is an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the preparatory state from the transition to the consecutive villa mode to the actual acquisition of the prize ball in the twelfth embodiment. In the twelfth embodiment, (b) shows a case where a game ball enters the second entrance in the prepared state and a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery. 3 It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the symbol display device 81. In (a), in the twelfth embodiment, the reserved ball of the first special symbol at the time of transition from the normal mode to the consecutive villa mode is removed, and the second special symbol is drawn twice in succession during the preparation mode. It is a figure which showed the time-dependent change of the staging mode in the case which became out of place and became a small hit in the third lottery of the second special symbol, and (a) is a figure which showed the time-dependent change from the normal mode to the consecutive villa mode in the twelfth embodiment. It is a figure which showed the time-dependent change of the effect mode in the case where the reserved ball of the 1st special symbol at the time of transition to is the lottery result corresponding to "big hit D12". (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control unit in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the first random number table in the twelfth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit random number table in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic showing the contents of the variation pattern scenario table in the twelfth embodiment. It is a figure. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table in the twelfth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the table for probable change / latent start in the twelfth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the table for time saving start in the twelfth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal start table in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RUSH table in the twelfth embodiment. It is a figure. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine in the twelfth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol jackpot determination process 13 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twelfth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 deviation variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twelfth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 executed by MPU in the main control device in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol change stop process 13 executed by MPU in the main control device in 12th Embodiment. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 disengagement stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twelfth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation display setting process 13 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the twelfth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing an effect mode setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the twelfth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing a ceiling effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing a normal effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the twelfth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing a variation display setting process 13 for special figure 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the preparation state setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the second random number table in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the table for probable change / latent start in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation process 14 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 13th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of the thirteenth embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed the flow path of the game ball in the state which the electric accessory is closed in the modification of the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is the figure which showed the electric role in the modification of thirteenth embodiment. It is a figure which showed the flow path of a game ball in a state where an object is open. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 14th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the variation pattern scenario table in 14th Embodiment schematically. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table in the 14th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the probability change A table in 14th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the probability variation B table in 14th Embodiment schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the ordinary table in 14th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine in the 14th embodiment. It is a front view of the gaming board of the pachinko machine in the fifteenth embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing the flow path of the game ball in the time-saving state in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) shows the flow path of the game ball in the latent state in the fifteenth embodiment. It is a figure. In the fifteenth embodiment, it is a figure which showed the transition of the game state and the effect mode at the time of winning the jackpot of the 1st special symbol during the probability change state. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 at the start of fluctuation per special figure 1 in the probabilistic change state in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) is the figure which showed the fifteenth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the number of time reductions elapses during the jackpot fluctuation. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the second random number table in the fifteenth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving / probability variation table in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the latent probability table in the fifteenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device when the river breakthrough effect in the modified example of the eleventh embodiment is started. It is a front view which shows typically the game board of the pachinko machine in 16th Embodiment. It is a transition diagram schematically showing the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine in the 16th embodiment. (A) and (b) are timing charts showing the game content and the production mode of the series of effects in the 16th embodiment. (A) and (b) are timing charts showing the game content and the final variation effect effect mode in the 16th embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the display content displayed on the third symbol display device in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is displayed on the third symbol display device in the 16th embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the production mode of the normal figure fluctuation effect. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode in which a normal figure variation effect is executed in the main display area of the third symbol display device in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode in which the normal figure variation effect is executed. It is a figure which showed an example of the effect mode of the screen per ordinary figure displayed on the 3rd symbol display device. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode at the time of special 2 winning during special 1 change displayed on the third symbol display device in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode at the time of special 2 winning, and (b) is the figure in the 16th embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the effect mode of the special 2 changing effect (challenge game) displayed on the 3rd symbol display device. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when a small hit is won by the special 2 variation displayed on the third symbol display device in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode in the 16th embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the effect mode when the big hit is acquired in the small hit displayed on the 3rd symbol display device. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode at the time of special 2 winning during special 1 non-variation displayed on the third symbol display device in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode at the time of special 2 winning. It is a figure which showed an example of the effect mode in the case of winning a small hit by the special 2 variation displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the above. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode at the time when one second has elapsed from the start of the game per normal figure displayed on the third symbol display device in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode. It is a figure which showed an example of the effect mode when a ball did not win a prize in a 2nd prize opening during a game per game displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the above. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode at the time when 3 seconds have passed from the start of the small hit game displayed on the third symbol display device in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode in the 16th embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the effect mode when a ball did not win a prize in a V winning opening during a small hit game displayed on the 3rd symbol display device. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the 16th embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of an aspect. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode in a time-saving state displayed on the third symbol display device in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the third symbol display device in the 16th embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the effect mode of the display time saving final variation. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode of the first half effect of the time saving final variation displayed on the third symbol display device in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode of the third symbol in the 16th embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the effect mode of the latter half effect of the time saving final variation displayed on a display device. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode showing the effect result of the latter half effect of the time saving final variation displayed on the third symbol display device in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode showing the effect result of the latter half effect. It is a figure which showed an example of the result display mode of the time saving final variation effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in the above. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode at the time of hitting the special 2 after the end of the time reduction displayed on the third symbol display device in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode in the 16th embodiment. 3 It is a figure which showed an example of the result display mode of the time saving final variation effect displayed on a symbol display device. It is a figure which showed an example of the effect mode which shows the end of a time saving state displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in 16th Embodiment. It is a figure which showed the outline of various counters in 16th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the main control unit in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is one of the contents of the RAM of the main control unit in the 16th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the part schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the first random number 16 table in the 16th embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the special symbol 1 random number 16 table in the 16th embodiment. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a special symbol 2 random number 16 table in the 16th embodiment, and (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a random number 16 table per ordinary symbol. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection 16 table in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 16 table in the 16th embodiment. FIG. 2C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 16 table in the 16th embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the table for selecting the type per normal figure in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is the opening of the electric accessory based on the type per normal figure and the game state. It is a figure which showed the operation content. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the small hit type selection 16 table in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the special figure 1 small hit type selection 16 table in the 16th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the special figure 2 small hit type selection 16 table in the 16th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal map variation pattern selection table in the 16th embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a variation pattern 16 table in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a normal variation pattern 16 table in the 16th embodiment. be. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the time saving variation pattern 16 table which is a part of the variation pattern selection table in the 16th embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the 16th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the variation pattern selection 16 table in the 16th embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the variation pattern selection 16 table for the time saving final in the 16th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process 16 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 16 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start processing 16 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving update process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start setting process 16 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process 16 executed by MPU in the main control device in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process 16 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing 16 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process 16 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the general drawing look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V entrance passage processing 16 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V passing process 16 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 16 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 16 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 16th Embodiment. 16 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 16 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the 16th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize information command processing 16 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning situation determination process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation pattern command processing 16 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 16th Embodiment. 16 is a flowchart showing a hit-related command process 16 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the 16th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot-related command processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 16th Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a small hit-related command process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 16th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal small hit process to be executed. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit process for a series of productions executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the stop command processing 16 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process 16 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 16th Embodiment. 16 is a flowchart showing a variation effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 16th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process for a general drawing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 16th Embodiment. 16 is a flowchart showing a time saving effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 16th embodiment. 16 is a flowchart showing a hit variation effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 16th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process 16 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 16th Embodiment. 16 is a flowchart showing a series of effect update processes executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the 16th embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing an update process during a game per game executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart in the voice lamp control device in the 16th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the update process during a small hit game executed by MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the final variation effect update process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 16th Embodiment. It is a front view which shows typically the game board of the pachinko machine in 17th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode during the time reduction final variation in the 17th embodiment, and (b) is an effect during the support time displayed on the third symbol display device in the 17th embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of an aspect. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of ROM of the main control device in 17th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a table for selecting a type per normal figure in the 17th embodiment, and (b) is an electric combination based on the type per normal figure and the gaming state in the 17th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the opening operation contents of an object schematically. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the variation pattern 17 table for normal use in the 17th embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the normal map fluctuation pattern table in the 17th embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the normal map fluctuation pattern table for time saving A in the 17th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the fluctuation pattern of the normal map for time saving B in the 17th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing 17 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process 17 for a general drawing executed by the MPU in the main control device in 17th Embodiment. It is a front view schematically showing the game board of the pachinko machine in 18th Embodiment. It is an enlarged view schematically enlarged the right side game area of the game board of the pachinko machine in 18th Embodiment. It is an enlarged view schematically enlarged the right side game area of the game board of the pachinko machine in 18th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are timing charts schematically showing the flow of production of the pachinko machine in the eighteenth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the eighteenth embodiment, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the eighteenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the variation pattern 18 table in the 18th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the normal variation pattern 18 table in the 18th embodiment. be. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal map variation pattern selection 18 table in the 18th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the stop command processing 18 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 18th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process 18 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 18th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the set effect setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 18th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal figure set effect setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 18th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process 18 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 18th Embodiment. It is a figure which showed the setting method of a series of productions in 18th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 19th embodiment, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the 19th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the general diagram scenario table in the 19th embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the flow which the scenario 2 per a normal figure is set as a series of staging scenarios in 19th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the flow which the scenario 4 per a normal figure is set as a series of production scenarios in 19th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize information command processing 19 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 19th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the series | staging determination process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 19th Embodiment. 19 is a flowchart showing a hit-related command process 19 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the 19th embodiment. 19 is a flowchart showing a command process related to a normal figure executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device according to the nineteenth embodiment. 19 is a flowchart showing a variation effect setting process 19 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 19th embodiment. 19 is a flowchart showing a constantly monitoring effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the nineteenth embodiment. 19 is a flowchart showing a variation effect setting process 19 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 19th embodiment. 19 is a flowchart showing a series of staging prediction setting processes executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the nineteenth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 20th embodiment, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the 20th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the final variation effect table in the 20th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the winning final table in the 20th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the final table for disengagement in 20th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the final effect variable setting table in the 20th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the hit setting table in the 20th embodiment. .. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the setting table for disconnection in 20th Embodiment. 20 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 20 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the twentieth embodiment. 20 is a flowchart showing a winning information command process 20 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the twentieth embodiment. 20 is a flowchart showing a final winning process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the twentieth embodiment. 20 is a flowchart showing a time saving effect setting process 20 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the twentieth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the final variation effect update process 20 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 20th Embodiment. It is a front view which shows typically the game board of the pachinko machine in 21st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a right-handed notification screen in the first notification mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the 21st embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a right-handed notification screen in the first notification mode, and FIG. It is a figure which showed an example of the right-handed notification screen in the 2nd notification mode displayed on the symbol display device. It is a front view schematically showing the game board of the pachinko machine in the 22nd Embodiment. It is a figure which schematically showed the flow of the production of the pachinko machine in the 22nd embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 23rd embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a display area of the third symbol display device in the 23rd embodiment, and (b) is a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the 23rd embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the rear mode in which the expectation of the probability change state is low among the rear modes displayed by the third symbol display device in the 23rd embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the back mode which the expectation degree of a probable change state is high among the back modes displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 23rd Embodiment. Among the rear mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the 23rd embodiment, an example of the display mode of the rear mode in which the continuation of the probabilistic state is confirmed at least until all the reserved balls at the start of the fluctuation are digested is shown. It is a figure. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode at the start of the probability change continuation suggestion effect displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 23rd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of an attack pattern with a low expectation in the probability change continuation suggestion effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the 23rd embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of an attack pattern with a low expectation. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the attack pattern of high expectation degree in the probability change continuation suggestion effect displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams schematically showing the transition of the state after the end of the probabilistic jackpot in the 23rd embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during execution of the pressing stop effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the 23rd embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode during execution, and (b) is a diagram showing the third symbol in the 23rd embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in the case where a player performs the first operation (press) with respect to a PUSH button during execution of a press stop effect displayed on a display device. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during execution of the chance charge fanning effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the 23rd embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during execution of the chance charge fanning effect, and (b) is a diagram showing a third in the 23rd embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in execution of the chance charge effect which is executed after the stop of a chance charge symbol in a symbol display device. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the end of the chance charge effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the 23rd embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode at the end of the chance charge effect, and (b) is a diagram showing the third symbol in the 23rd embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of consumption of a spirit gauge displayed by a display device. (A) to (c) are diagrams schematically showing changes over time in the effect mode during execution of the variable display effect in which the press stop effect is set in the 23rd embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode during execution of the interrupt continuous striking effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the 23rd embodiment. (A) It is a figure which schematically showed the output mode of the voice while the continuous hitting operation with respect to a PUSH button is performed during the execution of the interrupt continuous hitting effect in 23rd Embodiment, (b) is a figure which showed the 23rd embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically the correspondence relationship between the execution timing of the continuous hitting operation, and the subtraction number of a monster in the execution of the interrupt continuous hitting effect in a form. (A) to (c) are diagrams schematically showing changes over time in the effect mode of the variable display effect in which the interrupt continuous striking effect is set in the 23rd embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the hold batch change effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the 23rd embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode when the player presses the PUSH button during execution of the hold batch change effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the 23rd embodiment. be. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 23rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the structure of various counters in 23rd Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control unit in the 23rd embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control unit in the 23rd embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special symbol jackpot random number 23 table in the 23rd embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the ordinary hit random number 23 table in the 23rd embodiment. (C) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the fall lottery table in the 23rd embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the jackpot type selection 23 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 23rd embodiment, and (b) is the special figure 1 jackpot 23 in the 23rd embodiment. It is the figure which showed the rule contents of the table schematically, and (c) is the figure which showed the rule contents of the special figure 2 jackpot 23 table in the 23rd embodiment schematically. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 23 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 23rd embodiment, and (b) is the variation pattern selection 23 table in the 23rd embodiment. It is a figure which schematically showed the regulation contents of the constituent ordinary table. It is a figure which schematically showed the regulation contents of the probability variation / time saving table which constitutes the variation pattern selection 23 table in 23rd Embodiment. It is a figure which showed schematically the transition method of the state in 23rd Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the 23rd embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the 23rd embodiment. be. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the back mode lottery table in 23rd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the pending change lottery table in the 23rd embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the specified contents of the change point calculation table in the 23rd embodiment. It is a figure. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the batch change lottery table in the 23rd embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the specified contents of the chance charge lottery table in the 23rd embodiment. It is a figure. It is a figure which schematically showed the definition content of the continuation suggestion effect selection table in 23rd Embodiment. It is a figure which schematically showed the provision content of the interrupt continuous hit lottery table in 23rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the audio output device in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing 23 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start processing 23 executed by MPU in the main control device in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process 23 executed by MPU in the main control device in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process 23 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing 23 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process 23 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 23 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process 23 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing 23 executed by MPU in the main control device in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process 23 executed by MPU in the main control device in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality processing 23 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process 23 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pressing stop effect processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the interrupt continuous hitting effect processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the batch change effect processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the charge consumption processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pressing detection process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the stop operation detection process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous hit operation detection process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the change operation detection process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 23rd Embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 23 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the 23rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize information command processing 23 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 23rd Embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a hold notice lottery process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 23rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit-related command processing 23 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process 23 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation effect setting process 23 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation suggestion effect setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the back mode lottery process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect mode selection process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 23rd Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the main process executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the 23rd embodiment, and (b) is a command executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the 23rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the interrupt process. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process which is executed by MPU in the voice output device in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the continuous tapping sound command processing executed by MPU in the voice output device in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the interruption command processing executed by the MPU in the voice output device in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the audio setting process which is executed by the MPU in the audio output device in 23rd Embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode at the time of a long press effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the 24th embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the voice mode and the display mode when the long press is continuously performed during the long press effect in the 24th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing schematically. In the 24th embodiment, it is a figure schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the voice mode and the display mode when the press is interrupted in the middle of the long press effect. FIGS. (A) and (b) are diagrams schematically showing the correspondence between the transition of the number of gauges and the elapsed time during the long press effect in the 24th embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the voice mode and the display mode during the execution of the probability change continuation suggestion effect in the 24th embodiment, and (b) is the figure showing the probability change in the 24th embodiment. It is a figure which schematically showed the correspondence relation between the voice mode and the display mode when the hold becomes 0 during execution of a continuation suggestion effect. In the 24th embodiment, it is a figure schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the voice mode and the display mode when a big hit is won during the execution of the probability change continuation suggestion effect. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 23 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 24th embodiment, and (b) is the block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 23 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 24th embodiment. It is a figure which schematically showed the regulation contents of the set suggestion effect table. (A) is a block diagram showing the structure of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 24th embodiment, and (b) is a reproduction speed selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 24th embodiment. It is a figure which showed the regulation contents of. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in 24th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process 24 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 24th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the long press effect process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 24th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the long press execution process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 24th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the long press start processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 24th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo-variation setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 24th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process 24 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 24th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation effect setting process 24 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 24th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process during suggestion effect performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 24th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the interrupt command processing executed by the MPU in the voice output device in 24th Embodiment. In the modified example of the 24th embodiment, it is a figure schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the voice mode and the display mode when the hold becomes 0 during the execution of the continuation suggestion effect. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during a continuous hit waiting period displayed by the third symbol display device in the 25th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode during the continuous hit waiting period, and (b) is a diagram showing the third symbol display device in the 25th embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode during the continuous hitting period displayed by. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the internal value displayed by the third symbol display device in the 25th embodiment reaches the upper limit, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the internal value reaches the upper limit, and (b) is a diagram showing the third symbol in the 25th embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode when the difference between the display value and the internal value displayed by a display device is 3 or more. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode after the lapse of the continuous hitting period displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 25th Embodiment. It is a figure which schematically showed the flow of the continuous hitting effect in 25th Embodiment. It is a figure which schematically showed the effect pattern at the time of one set of the scenario during the continuous hit effect in 25th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows another pattern of the effect pattern at the time of one set of the scenario during the continuous hitting effect in 25th Embodiment. It is a figure which schematically showed another pattern of the effect pattern at the time of the scenario 2 set during the continuous hitting effect in 25th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the voice lamp control apparatus in 25th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the internal scenario table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device according to the 25th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the voice lamp control device according to the 25th embodiment. It is a figure which schematically showed the regulation contents of the push lottery table set in the ROM of. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the upper limit value selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 25th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the voice lamp control in the 25th embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the difference upper limit value selection table set in the ROM of a device. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in 25th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the continuous hitting effect setting flag set in the RAM of the voice lamp control apparatus in 25th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process 25 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 25th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous hitting effect processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 25th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd continuous hitting effect processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 25th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd continuous hitting effect processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 25th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pressing detection process 25 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 25th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous hit operation detection process 25 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 25th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect mode selection process 25 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 25th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the basic effect mode selection process 25 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 25th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode when the first operation valid period is set as the jackpot medium effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the 26th embodiment. b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a second operation valid period displayed by the third symbol display device in the 26th embodiment is set. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode when the first operation valid period is set as the jackpot medium effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the 26th embodiment. b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the second operation valid period displayed by the third symbol display device in the 26th embodiment is set. It is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the jackpot during the jackpot game executed during the jackpot game in the 26th embodiment. It is a figure which schematically showed the effect pattern at the time of one set of the scenario during the continuous hit effect in the 26th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the voice lamp control apparatus in 26th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the transition timer start timing table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device according to the 26th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the transition timer start timing table, and (b) is the voice lamp according to the 26th embodiment. It is a figure which shows schematically the regulation contents of the effect number selection table set in the ROM of a control device. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the 26th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process 26 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 26th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous hitting effect processing 26 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 26th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd continuous hitting effect processing 26 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 26th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous hit operation detection process 26 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 26th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit-related command processing 26 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 26th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hitting effect setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 26th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the round effect setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 26th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hitting effect end setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 26th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode when the effect is variable in the continuous striking effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the 27th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the display mode in the 27th embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode after the variable invalid period in the continuous hitting effect displayed by the 3rd symbol display device. 27 is a timing chart showing the contents of various effects executed in response to operations on the operation means during the continuous hitting effect in which the operation valid period is set in the 27th embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the structure of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 27th embodiment, and (b) is the button display mode selection set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 27th embodiment. It is a figure which showed the regulation contents of the table schematically. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in 27th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process 27 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 27th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer processing during production which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 27th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous hit operation detection process 27 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 27th Embodiment. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a normal operation process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the 27th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the operation process during production which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 27th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 28th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode during a small hit variation of the latent state special figure 1 displayed by the third symbol display device in the 28th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing a display mode. 28 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the invincible mode in the embodiment and during the special figure 2 disadvantageous jackpot fluctuation. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode after the number of special figure fluctuations of the latent probability state displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 28th Embodiment exceeded 50 times. (A) is a block diagram showing the structure of the ROM of the main control unit in the 28th embodiment, and (b) is a random number 28 table per first set in the ROM of the main control unit in the 28th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the rule contents schematically, and (c) is a figure which shows typically the rule contents of the small hit random number 28 table set in the ROM of the main control device in 28th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the jackpot type selection 28 table set in the ROM of the main control device in 28th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the small hit type selection 28 table set in the ROM of the main control device in 28th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 28 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 28th embodiment, and (b) is the variation pattern selection 28 table in the 28th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the predetermined content schematically of the 1st latent probability table which constitutes, (c) is the figure which schematically shows the specified content of the 2nd latent probability table which constitutes the variation pattern selection 28 table in 28th Embodiment. It is a figure shown as a target. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the fluctuation pattern scenario table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control apparatus in 28th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 28th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control apparatus in 28th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol change start processing 28 executed by MPU in the main control device in 28th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 28 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 28th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 deviation variation processing 28 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 28th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection process 28 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 28th Embodiment. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 deviation pattern selection process 28 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 28th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation execution process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 28th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol change stop processing 28 executed by MPU in the main control device in 28th Embodiment. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 disengagement stop process 28 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 28th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit process 28 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 28th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process 28 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 28th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process 28 for special figure 1 which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 28th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process 28 for special figure 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 28th Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 latent process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the 28th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect mode setting process 28 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 28th Embodiment. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing various counter update processes 28 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the 28th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit-related process 28 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 28th Embodiment. It is a front view of the gaming board of the pachinko machine in the 29th embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 29 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 29th embodiment, and (b) is the variation pattern selection 29 table in the 29th embodiment. It is a figure which schematically showed the regulation contents of the 1st latent probability 29 table which constitutes. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control apparatus in 29th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 29 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 28th Embodiment. 29 is a flowchart showing a variation display setting process 29 for special figure 1 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device according to the 29th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning opening discriminating process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 29th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode during the time reduction final variation displayed by the third symbol display device in the thirtieth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode during the time saving final variation, and (b) is a diagram showing a third embodiment in the thirtieth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode when the total stock was consumed during the time saving final fluctuation displayed by a symbol display device. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode when the stock is not used during the time saving final fluctuation displayed by the third symbol display device in the thirtieth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing. , 30 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the special stock is consumed during the time saving final fluctuation displayed by the third symbol display device in the thirtieth embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode of the latter half of the time saving final fluctuation displayed by the third symbol display device in the thirtieth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode in the latter half of the time saving final variation, and (b) is a diagram showing a third embodiment in the thirtieth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the revival jackpot in the latter half of the time saving final fluctuation displayed by a symbol display device. FIG. 2 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of an effect executed in the final variation of FIG. 2 during the time saving state in the thirtieth embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the thirtieth embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the thirtieth embodiment. be. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the character selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the thirtieth embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the character selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device according to the thirtieth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the character selection table, and (b) is a diagram showing the voice lamp control device according to the thirtieth embodiment. It is a figure which schematically showed the regulation contents of the display icon selection table set in the ROM of. It is a flowchart which shows the final variation effect update process 30 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in thirtyth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st period effect setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 30th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd period effect setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 30th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd period effect setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 30th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 30 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in thirtyth embodiment. It is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the effect executed in the time saving final variation in the 31st embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the voice lamp control apparatus in 31st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows schematically the specified contents of the notification period selection 31 table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control apparatus in 31st Embodiment. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a final variation effect update process 31 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the 31st embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 87, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 12) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses 16a is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 12) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending unit 40 is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and a general prize. A port 63, a first ball entry port 64, a second ball entry port 640, a variable winning device 65, an out port 66, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled to form an inner frame 12 (the peripheral portion thereof). It is attached to the back side of (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood made by laminating thin plate materials, and is formed so that the player cannot see various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first entry opening 64, the second entry opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged in a game board. It is fixed from the front side of 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 12) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center.

A first symbol display device 37 (37A, 37A,) provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display along the outer peripheral surface of the outer rail 62 on the upper right side of the front view of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2). 37B) is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 (37A, 37B) displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12), and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Will be. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 (37A, 37B) indicates whether the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64 (upper first ball entry port 64b1, lower first ball entry port 64b2). It is configured to be used properly according to whether or not the ball has entered the second entry port 640. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 2, but in the present embodiment, the upper first ball entry port 64b1 and the lower first ball entry port 64b2 are provided as a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol. In the following description, when both the upper first ball entry port 64b1 and the lower first ball entry port 64b2 are shown, the term of the first ball entry port 64 will be simply used for explanation.

Specifically, when the ball enters the first entry port 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, while when the ball enters the second entry port 640, the ball enters the second entry port 640. The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic state, the time saving state, or the normal state by the lighting state, and indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the lighting state. Indicates whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable change jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, a missed symbol, or a small hit symbol by the lighting state, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state. , The 7-segment display device displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and the error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors suggests various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a ball is entered in either the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 15R time reduction jackpot, and 2R time reduction jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to (sets) a probability variation state in which the maximum number of rounds is a high probability state of a special symbol and a high probability state of a normal symbol after a jackpot of 15 rounds. There, "2R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a probability variation state in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 2 rounds. Further, the "15R time saving jackpot" is a time saving state in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the low probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol are changed for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 50 times). ) It is a jackpot to be set, and "2R time saving jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is set to a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 50 times) after the jackpot of 2 rounds. ..

Further, the "high probability state of the special symbol" is a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, in other words, a state of the game in which the transition to the special gaming state is easy. The "high probability state of the normal symbol" is a state in which the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased, in other words, a state of the game in which the electric accessory 64a is easily released.

In addition, in the gaming state (probability change state, time saving state) in which the "high probability state of the normal symbol" is set, not only the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) increases, but also the lower first entrance ball opening 64b2 As the time for opening the electric accessory 64a associated with the above, a longer time is set as compared with the gaming state (latent state, normal state) in which the "low probability state of the normal symbol" is set. When the electric accessory 64a is in the open state (open state), the ball is moved to the lower first entry port 64b2 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 64a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy to win a prize. Therefore, during the probable change state or the time saving state, the ball can easily win a prize in the lower first entry slot 64b2, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

It should be noted that, in the probable change state or the time saving state, the opening time of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entry port 64b2 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, once. The change may be made so that the number of times that the electric accessory 64a is opened by hitting is increased from the normal state. In addition, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed in the probabilistic change state or the time saving state, and the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entry port 64b2 is opened at the time when the electric accessory 64a is opened and the electric accessory is hit once. At least one of the number of times the 64a is opened may be changed. In addition, the time during which the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entry port 64b2 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 64a is opened at one time are not changed during the probability change state or the time saving state. It may be changed so that only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased as compared with the normal state.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are triggered by the entry of a ball into either the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 (starting winning). A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays a variable display of the third symbol (decorative symbol) while synchronizing with the variable display, and a sphere to the through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs that variablely display a normal symbol (second symbol) with a passage as a trigger is provided.

Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 12), for example, the upper, middle, and lower three. Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the decorative third symbol is dynamically displayed so as to correspond to the dynamic display of the first symbol (special symbol) displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the third symbol is dynamically displayed. By configuring the display mode to notify the player, the display mode during the dynamic display period is unified with respect to the dynamic display of the first symbol (special symbol) whose operation is controlled by the main control device 110. For example, even if the processing load of the main control device 110 is reduced by repeatedly turning on and off in 0.1 second increments), the movement of the third symbol set by the voice lamp control device 113 By variably setting the target display mode based on, for example, the lottery result of the first symbol (special symbol), it is possible to suggest to the player that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit (first). The effect mode using the three symbols) can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device lights the "○" symbol and the "×" symbol as normal symbols (second symbol (not shown)) alternately for a predetermined time each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67. It is a variable display. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entry port 64b2 is provided. It is configured to be in the operating state (operated to the open state) for a predetermined time.

The time required to display the fluctuation of the second symbol is shorter in the high probability state (probability change state, time saving state) of the normal symbol than in the low probability state (normal state, latent state) of the normal symbol as the game state. Is set to be. As a result, during the high-probability state of the normal symbol, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than in the low-probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entrance ball opening 64b2.

Therefore, during the probabilistic change state and the time saving state, it is possible to set the game state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the lower first entry slot 64b2. In this embodiment, the dynamic display mode of the third symbol and the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 are set depending on whether the probabilistic state is set as the gaming state or the time saving state is set. The same display mode is set as the background mode displayed on the screen, and it is configured to make it difficult for the player to grasp the current game state. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of guessing the current game situation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the dynamic display mode of the third symbol and the background mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 are the same in a plurality of gaming states in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. It is configured to set the display mode of. Therefore, when the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is unified, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping what the current gaming state is depending on the operating status of the electric accessory 64a. be able to.

It should be noted that, in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the hit probability is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 64a per hit are increased. 1 When the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball entry port 64b2, the time required for the variation display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is set shorter than in the normal state in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state. Further, the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 64a per hit may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side (right area) of the variable display device unit 80. The through gate 67 is configured so that a part of the balls launched on the game board can pass through the balls flowing down the game board. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is not correct. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol hold lamps are provided for the maximum number of hold lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be two or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment will be briefly described. In the first embodiment, a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol), a probabilistic state (a high probability state of a special symbol and a high probability state of a normal symbol), and a time saving state (special). Four gaming states are provided: a low-probability state of the symbol and a high-probability state of the normal symbol) and a latent state (a high-probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol). Then, the latent state is configured to be the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

That is, when the latent state is set, the variable time for showing the lottery of the second special symbol, which is more likely to be a lottery result more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol, is set in another game state. By stipulating that the lottery be shorter than when it is done, the lottery that is advantageous to the player can be executed most efficiently.

In the first embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol. The first specific winning opening 65a of the winning device 65 is opened for a predetermined period (1.5 seconds × 1 time, 0.2 seconds × 6 times, or 0.06 seconds × 8 times). For this reason, in the lottery of the second special symbol, even if the jackpot is not won, there are many chances to get the ball into the first specific winning opening 65a and win the prize ball. It is more advantageous than the lottery. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification of the explanation, the result of the lottery in which the first specific winning opening 65a is opened will be referred to as a "small hit".

In the lottery of the second special symbol, in addition to the big hit, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened even if it becomes a small hit, so that the prize ball is in a latent state where the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short. Can continue to increase. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that it will be in a latent state. In a general gaming machine, the probabilistic state is the most advantageous gaming state, but in the present embodiment, the latent probabilistic state is more advantageous than the probabilistic state, so that a novel game property can be provided.

Further, in the first embodiment, the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous). A variable method is adopted). As a result, even if the variable display of one special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the other special symbol can be executed without waiting for the end of the variable display, so that the lottery of the special symbol can be executed more efficiently. can. In addition, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating at the same time, if one of them stops fluctuating with a stop symbol of a big hit or a small hit, the other fluctuating display shows the remaining fluctuation time or lottery. Regardless of the result, the stop symbol is displayed as a stop. As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem that the other variable display is fixedly displayed as a hit or a small hit during the execution of the big hit or the small hit, and the big hit or the small hit is started in duplicate.

Here, with reference to FIG. 2, various configurations provided in the game area in the first embodiment and the flow of balls launched toward the game area will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 of the present embodiment is configured to divide the game area into a left side area and a right side area by a variable display device unit 80 arranged in the center of the game area. ..

In the present embodiment, the launched ball does not pass through the foul ball prevention valve 68 until the operation handle 51 is rotated 20 degrees (clockwise) from the initial position (state in which the player is not rotating). The ball is fired with a degree of firing intensity. Therefore, the launched ball finally flows back in the launch path formed between the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 61 and becomes a foul ball. The foul ball that flows backward and flows down passes through the start position of the launch flow path (the lower left end of the outer rail 62 shown in FIG. 2) and communicates with the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 1). (Not shown) flows down and is recirculated to the upper plate 17. With this configuration, even if a foul ball is generated when the player operates the operation handle 51 to launch the ball with a desired firing intensity, the foul ball remains in the firing path and the game is played. It is possible to suppress the hindrance to.

Next, when the operation amount (rotation amount) of the operation handle 51 is in the range of 20 to 80 degrees from the initial position (the state in which the player is not rotating), the ball is launched with a firing intensity sufficient to flow down the left side region described above. In the range of 81 degrees to 120 degrees (81 degrees to 120 degrees, which is the maximum rotation amount of the operation handle 51), the ball is launched with a firing intensity sufficient to flow down the right side region described above.

That is, the present embodiment is configured so that the area where the ball flows down can be changed based on the operation amount of the operation handle 51, that is, based on the operation of the player. Further, although details will be described later, in the first embodiment, when a gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set as the gaming state, the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is set so that the ball flows down the left side region. Instead of playing a game that is adjusted (hereinafter referred to as a left-handed game), a game that is performed by adjusting the operation amount of the operation handle 51 so that the ball flows down the right area (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game) is performed. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, the player may maintain the operation handle 51 rotated to the upper limit (rotated 120 degrees) while the gaming state advantageous to the player is set. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the player play an appropriate game.

Next, the left side region of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. Details will be described later, but in the first embodiment, the game state is a normal state (special symbol low probability state: normal symbol low probability (normal) state) and a time saving state (special symbol low probability state: normal symbol high probability (time saving). ) State), probabilistic state (special symbol high probability (probability) state: normal symbol high probability (time saving) state), latent state (special symbol high probability (probability) state: normal symbol low probability (normal) state) Is configured to be set. In addition, the big hit game state executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is won in the big hit and the small hit game state executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is won in the small hit are set. It is configured.

Among them, when the normal state, the time saving state, and the probable change state are set as the game state, the variable display device unit 80 is used to perform a left-handed game in which the ball is made to flow down to the left side area of the game board 13. A right-handed game in which the player is guided to the game method using the display screen of the provided third symbol display device 81, and when the latent state is set, the ball is made to flow down to the left area of the game board 13. The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used to guide the player to the game method. Further, during the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the player's game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) is guided according to the game state before the winning.

As a guidance method for each game method (left-handed game, right-handed game), for example, a game method suitable for the current game state may be configured to be displayed at all times, or only when the game method is switched after switching. It may be configured to display the game method. Further, when a game method (left-handed game in this embodiment) that is easily set for a long period of time is regarded as a normal game among the left-handed game and the right-handed game, and a game method other than the normal game (right-handed game) is performed. The game method may be constantly guided and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the guide display may not be performed when the left-handed game is to be performed.

When there are two types of game methods to be selected by the player as in the present embodiment, the other game method can be guided by not displaying the display mode for guiding one game method. That is, it is possible to guide a plurality of game methods depending on whether or not one display mode is displayed. In this embodiment, the display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used to guide the player to the game method, but the present embodiment is not limited to this. As described above, by not displaying a specific display mode, a configuration for notifying the player of the game method may be used, or a configuration for notifying the player using voice or a lamp may be used.

A through gate 67 and a general winning opening 63 are arranged in the left side region of the game board 13. Further, at the lower position of the variable display device unit 80, an upper first ball entry port 64b1 is provided so that a ball flowing down the left side region can enter the ball. A lower first ball entry port 64b2 to which an electric accessory 64a is attached is provided at a position below the upper first ball entry port 64b1. In this electric accessory 64a, when the ball is won in the normal symbol (second symbol) lottery executed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the ball enters the lower first entrance slot 64b2. It is configured to variably move from a closed state (first state) where the ball is difficult (impossible) to an open state (second state) where the ball can easily (possibly) enter the lower first entry port 64b2. ing.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) can be executed (the change of the special figure 1 is not executed, and the big hit game and the small hit game are executed. When a ball enters the upper first entry port 64b1 or the lower first entry opening 64b2 in a state where the ball has not been entered), the lottery shown in FIG. 1 is executed. That is, the entry of a ball into the upper first entry port 64b1 or the lower first entry opening 64b2 is an opportunity for executing the lottery of the first special symbol.

In addition, in a state in which the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) cannot be newly executed (a state in which the change in special figure 1 has already been executed, or a big hit game or a small hit game has been executed). When a ball enters the upper first entry port 64b1 or the lower first entry opening 64b2, it has a storage means for storing the right of the ball to enter, up to a predetermined number (4). ing.

Therefore, even while the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) is being executed, the player can be made to continue playing the game, so that the operation of the game can be improved. In this embodiment, only the storage means for storing the right of the ball to enter and the first special symbol are provided.

80% of the balls flowing down the left side area by the left-handed game pass through the through gate 67, and about 8% of the fired balls (8 out of 100 balls) enter the upper first entrance 64b1. A spherical flow path is formed by a plurality of structures such as nails and windmills so as to make a sphere. Further, when the electric accessory 64a is in the closed state, about 0% of the balls enter the lower first entry port 64b2, and when the electric accessory 64a is in the open state, the lower first entry port 64a. The ball flow path is formed so that the number of balls entering 64b2 is about 25%. That is, it is difficult for a ball to enter in the order of the lower first entry port 64b2 (electric accessory 64a open state), the upper first entry port 64b1, and the lower first entry port 64b2 (electric accessory 64a closed state). It is configured to be.

As described above, the upper first entry slot 64b1 and the lower first entry opening 64b2 are configured to give the player a privilege of paying out a prize ball in addition to the privilege of executing the lottery of the first special symbol. It is configured to pay out four prize balls to the player every time one ball is inserted. In this embodiment, the same number (4) prize balls are given regardless of whether the ball enters the upper first entry port 64b1 or the lower first entry opening 64b2. However, the prize balls may be set to different numbers for each of them.

On the other hand, in the right side region of the game board 13, a second entrance slot 640 and a first variable winning device 65 are provided. The second entry port 640 is configured so that the lottery of the second special symbol is executed when the ball enters, and a plurality of balls are entered so that about 50% of the balls flowing down the right area enter. A spherical flow path is formed by nails. Here, the ball that did not enter the second entrance 640 flows down toward the first variable winning device 65 provided below the right side region.

Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the present embodiment, in the state where the normal state is set as the gaming state, the time (variable time) from the execution of the lottery of the second special symbol to the display of the lottery result is long. In the state where the fluctuation time of the time (10 minutes) is set and the latent state is set, the short fluctuation time (1 second) is set.

That is, when the normal state is set as the game state, the right-handed game is performed rather than the ball being inserted into the first entrance 64 in order to perform the left-handed game and execute the lottery of the first special symbol. It is easier to put the ball in the second entrance 640 in order to execute the lottery of the second special symbol, but the game efficiency is improved because the fluctuation time for a long time (10 minutes) is set. It gets very bad. Therefore, in the normal state, the player plays a left-handed game and executes a lottery for the first special symbol.

In addition, since the second entry port 640 is set with one prize ball, a right-handed game is performed in a state where the normal state is set, and a ball fired in a right-handed game at a rate of about 50%. Even if the ball is inserted into the second entry port 640, the number of balls does not increase.

Further, when the time saving state or the probabilistic change state is set as the gaming state, the normal symbol becomes a high probability state, and the electric accessory 64a is easily released. However, since the through gate 67, which triggers the lottery of the normal symbol for opening the electric accessory 64a, is provided only in the left side region, the lower first entry port 64b2 makes it easier for the ball to enter than in the normal state. It is configured to allow the player to perform a left-handed game in order to allow the ball to enter the ball.

On the other hand, in the state where the latent probability state is set as the gaming state, the normal symbol becomes a low probability state and the electric accessory 64a becomes difficult to open, and as described above, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short. Since the fluctuation time of (1 second) is set, it is an appropriate game to perform a right-handed game and execute a lottery of the second special symbol. Here, in the first embodiment, only the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to win a small hit (winning probability of about 1/2). When a small hit is won, the first variable winning device 65 is opened for a predetermined period (for example, 1.5 seconds) as a small hit game, and 10 for one ball that has entered the first variable winning device 65. It is configured so that individual prize balls are awarded.

That is, when the latent state is set as the game state, the player continuously executes the right-handed game to draw a second special symbol aiming at winning a small hit, and a small hit game. Can be executed continuously.

As shown in FIG. 2, a second variable winning device 650 is arranged at the lowermost part of the game area. The second variable winning device 650 operates so that the rotary door 650f operates toward the front side when a big hit is won by a special symbol lottery, and the ball is in an open state in which a ball can win a prize in the second specific winning opening 650a. Is to be done. The second variable winning device 650 is configured so that a ball that has flowed down the left side region by a left-handed game and a ball that has flowed down the right side area by a right-handed game can be evenly entered. Therefore, when the jackpot game in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened is executed, the gaming method before the jackpot game is executed may be continuously executed, and the gaming method may be performed for the player. Can be suppressed from being complicatedly changed.

When a ball enters the above-mentioned first entry port 64 (upper first entry opening 64b1 and lower first entry opening 64b2), a first entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13. ) Is turned on, a big hit lottery is performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12) due to the turning on of the first ball entrance switch, and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A. Is done.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the second entrance 640, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, which is caused by the on of the second entrance switch. A big hit lottery is made by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, the first entry port 64 is a winning opening in which four balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, and the second entry opening 640 is a winning opening in which one ball is paid out when a ball enters. It is one of the winning openings paid out as a prize ball. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the upper first entry port 64b1 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the first entry port 64. Was made the same (both 4) and different from the number of prize balls (1) to be paid out when the ball entered the 2nd entrance 640, but the ball entered the upper 1st entrance 64b1. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the lower first entry slot 64b2 may be different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the lower first entry slot 64b2.

In this case, for example, the number of prize balls in the upper first entry port 64b1 is set to four, and the number of prize balls in the lower first entry opening 64b2 is set to two, so that a normal state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter is set. In this case, the privilege for the ball entering the upper first entry port 64b1 is increased, and the ball is more likely to enter when a specific game state (probability change state, time saving state) is set. Even if a ball frequently enters the 1 entry slot 64b2, the player may not be allowed to acquire an excessive prize ball, and the number of prize balls in the upper 1st entry slot 64b1 is 4 and the lower 1st. The number of prize balls in the entry port 64b2 may be set to 5, so that a large privilege can be given to the player when a specific game state (probability change state, time saving state) is set.

Further, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the second entry port 640 (for example, both are 5). It may be configured as (pieces).

An electric accessory 64a is attached to the lower first ball entry port 64b2. The electric accessory 64a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 64a is in a closed state (regulated state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the lower first entry port 64b2. There is. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display (normal symbol lottery) of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory The 64a is in the open state (allowable state), and the ball can easily enter the lower first entry port 64b2.

As described above, in the probabilistic state and the time-saving state, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than in the normal state, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short, so that the variation display of the second symbol is performed. In, the symbol "○" is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 64a is in the open state (allowable state) increases. Further, during the probable change state or the time saving state, the time for opening the electric accessory 64a is also longer than that in the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball can easily enter the lower first entry port 64b2 in the probable change state or the time saving state as compared with the normal state.

As described above, the lower first entry port 64b2, that is, the entry port to which the electric accessory 64a is attached, is in a state where the ball can easily enter according to the set gaming state (first state). It is possible to set a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter (second state). That is, from the viewpoint of the ease of entering the ball, the first state is an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the second state is a disadvantageous gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player (more disadvantageous than the first state). Will be.

Here, when the ball enters the first entry port 64 (when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed) and when the ball enters the second entry opening 640 (the lottery of the second special symbol). The probability of winning a jackpot is the same, and if a low probability state of a special symbol is set, a lottery that wins a jackpot is executed with a predetermined low probability (for example, 1/280). When the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the lottery that becomes a big hit is executed with a predetermined high probability (for example, 1/30) that is easier to win than the low probability state. However, the type of jackpot selected (set) in the case of a jackpot is set to be different between the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment sets the method of launching the ball (game method) to the player as "left-handed (left-handed game)" and "right" according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. It can be changed to "hit (right-handed game)". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit for the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win (win) in any of the winning openings (entry openings) 63, 64b1, 64b 2, 65a, 640, 650a is shown through the out opening 66. You will be guided to the ball discharge channel. The out port 66 is arranged below the lower first ball entry port 64b2. In the first embodiment, the game area has one out port 66, but other configurations may be used, and two or more out ports 66 may be provided.

By providing a plurality of out ports 66 in this way, it is necessary to form a ball flow path for finally consolidating the balls launched in the game area to one place (the place where the out ports 66 are arranged). Since it is eliminated, the degree of freedom in arranging various devices constituting the game area can be increased. Specifically, for example, it is preferable to provide an out port dedicated to the ball flowing down the left side region and an out port dedicated to the ball flowing down the right side region. Further, when a plurality of out ports are provided, it is preferable to provide a notification means for notifying the player that the ball entry port is an out port. As a result, a situation occurs in which no privilege is given even though the ball enters the ball entry port (actually the out port) provided in the game area, which suppresses the player from being uncomfortable. be able to.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is provided with a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 to pay out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol (decorative symbol dynamically displayed corresponding to the dynamic display of the first symbol) is composed of nine types of main symbols with numbers "1" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of numbers "1" to "9" on the rear symbols that imitate various animals. Specifically, for example, the number "1" is attached to the rear design imitating an elephant, and the number "2" is attached to the rear design imitating a lion. By forming the third symbol in a display mode in which the rear symbol and the number are associated with each other in this way, the display mode of the rear symbol is displayed to the player even during the dynamic display of the third symbol (the rear symbol is displayed. The type of the 3rd symbol can be roughly grasped by the color, outline, size, etc.), and when the 3rd symbol is stopped and displayed, the number attached to the rear symbol can be identified to ensure the type of the 3rd symbol. Can be grasped.

In the first embodiment, the combination of the rear symbol and the number forming the third symbol is not changed, but the combination of the rear symbol, the display mode, and the number may be changed. good. With this configuration, it is possible to display a lottery result different from the lottery result (type of the third symbol) predicted by the player while the third symbol is dynamically displayed, and the player can be displayed. On the other hand, it is possible to provide a game that does not get tired. Further, by setting the combination pattern of the rear symbol and the number as the third symbol to be regularly changed according to, for example, the lottery result of the special symbol or the set gaming state, the third symbol can be used. It is possible to improve the prediction accuracy of the game content based on the display mode (combination of the rear symbol and the number) that is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of making the prediction.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed, and the variable display is completed. It is configured to generate a jackpot later. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned. Further, in the present embodiment, a small hit is won as a lottery result of a special symbol, and when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the main symbol is a specific combination (for example, "341"). Is stopped and displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, the lottery result is made easy for the player to understand by making the combination of the main symbols to be stopped and displayed different according to the lottery result of the special symbol, but the present invention is limited to this. Without this, for example, the same main symbol may be stopped and displayed depending on whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and about 3/4 of the upper side is the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. Approximately 1/4 of the lower side is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows L1, L2, and L3, which are upper, middle, and lower, are displayed. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, and the symbol rows L1 to L3 are scrolled in the left-right direction (usually from the right to the left) with a periodicity and displayed in a variable manner. Is done. In particular, in the upper symbol row L1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row L2 and the lower symbol row L3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the three columns of left, middle, and right for each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. The vertical line on the left side of the main display area Dm, the vertical line in the middle stage, and the vertical line on the right side are set as effective lines V1 to V3, respectively. In addition, the downward-sloping diagonal line and the upward-sloping diagonal line in the main display area Dm are set as effective lines V4 and V5, respectively. In each game, the third symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) on the effective lines V1 to V5 in the order of the upper symbol row L1 → the lower symbol row L3 → the middle symbol row L2. This stop display state is held for at least 1 second. In this way, by displaying the stopped 3rd symbol for a certain period (1 second or more), whether or not the player is a combination of the 3rd symbols corresponding to the jackpot (the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot). It is possible to prevent overlooking (whether or not there is). Further, if a combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main symbols) is aligned on the effective lines V1 to V5 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot movie (opening effect) is displayed as a jackpot.

In addition, if the combination of the third symbols displayed as stopped is a combination corresponding to the disconnection and there is a reserved ball, after the stop display (confirmed display) for 1 second, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is displayed. Is started. If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest incoming balls in time.

On the other hand, if the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) for 1 second in the state where the reserved ball does not exist, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. .. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters either the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed (confirmed display), a demo effect (customer waiting demo screen) indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. ..

It is rare that the player does not enter the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 even though the player has continuously fired the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). In most cases, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) because the player has quit the game, and the pachinko machine 10 has not played the game at all. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. As a result, the player who is trying to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demo effect. On the other hand, if a new ball enters the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the ball corresponds to the new ball entry. The variable display of the third symbol is executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm. The sub-display area Ds is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed among the balls entered in the first entry port 64. In the present embodiment, the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 while the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol is performed by the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37). In this case, the number of balls entered is held up to 4 times, and the number of held balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. The number of reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is currently suspended. In this embodiment, only the variable display of the first special symbol can be held, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not stored on hold. Therefore, in the sub-display area Ds, only the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed.

In the display screen shown using FIG. 4A, the sub-display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm, and the third symbol is dynamically displayed (variable display) in the main display area Dm. The effect (variable effect) including the above is executed, and the advance notice effect, the display of the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like are executed in the sub-display area Ds. It is not necessary to form each area shown in 1. For example, when the player is watching the effect for suggesting whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the display area of the sub display area Ds is used. It may be configured to perform a powerful effect by reducing (erasing) and enlarging the display area of the main display area Dm. On the other hand, when the effect of changing the display mode of the reserved symbol or the game guidance explaining the future game content is emphasized and executed in the sub display area Ds, the display area of the main display area Dm is reduced and the sub By enlarging the display area of the display area Ds, it may be configured to perform an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

Further, depending on the set game state and the effect mode being executed, an area for displaying the number of reserved symbols in the main display area Dm and an area for executing the advance notice effect may be formed, or a sub-area may be formed. The display area Ds may be provided with an area for executing the variable display of the third symbol.

Next, an example of the display content actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 4 (b). On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols and sub-symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. Further, on the right side and the left side of the display area Dm, three parts of the main symbol and three parts of the sub symbol are displayed. These show the lottery result of the first special symbol in the normal state. Further, in the upper central portion of the main display area Dm, a small area Dm1 for displaying the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed. In this small area Dm1, variation display of three third symbols having a simple aspect composed of only the numbers "1" to "9" is executed. Even in this small area Dm1, the big hit is started by stopping and displaying the three third symbols composed of the same numbers. It should be noted that the display of the third symbol showing the lottery result of the second special symbol in a simpler manner than the third symbol showing the lottery result of the first special symbol is basically displayed in the normal state and the probable change state. This is because the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, and the lottery for the second special symbol is rarely executed.

Therefore, the game result is displayed more clearly by configuring the variable display of the first special symbol, which is mainly executed, to be displayed in a larger display area. In the following description, the variation display of the special symbol mainly executed in each game state (the variation display of the first special symbol is applicable in the normal state and the probabilistic state) is referred to as the main variation, and in each game state. The variable display of the special symbol that is rarely executed when the regular game method is performed (in the normal state or the probabilistic state, the variable display of the second special symbol is applicable) is called a sub-variation.

Further, as will be described in detail later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the state where the probability variation state is set, it is a long period (up to 10 minutes). The variable display (dynamic display) is executed, and the gaming state is configured to shift from the probable change state to the latent state at the timing when the variable display is started. Then, during the period in which the latent state is set (the period from the execution of the variable display that becomes the jackpot to the end of the variable display and the start of the jackpot game), the second special symbol is drawn. It is configured to execute a game aiming at a small hit. Therefore, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, the variation display of the second special symbol becomes the main variation, and the variation display of the first special symbol becomes the sub-variation.

In the small area Ds1 in the sub-display area Ds, the same number of reserved symbols imitating the face of a bird are displayed as the number of reserved balls of the first symbol. This reserved symbol is subjected to an effect of entering the inside of the house displayed on the right side in the small area Ds1 at the start of the variable display based on the corresponding reserved ball. As a result, the player can easily understand that the variable display corresponding to the reserved ball has started. Further, in the small area Ds1, a notice effect is sometimes performed such that the reserved symbol performs a special operation or another character appears.

In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times. It may be set to the following or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the ball entering the second ball entry port 640 may be configured to be holdable. Further, instead of displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1, the reserved ball number is different by a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the flow of the variable display effect of the third symbol in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 5 is a timing chart schematically showing the game state of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment and the content of the variation display effect executed in response to the variation status of each special symbol. Here, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be briefly described. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a variable display (dynamic display) for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol and a variable display (dynamic display) for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol. ) And can be executed at the same time (in parallel).

Then, when the probability variation state (high probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) is set and the variation display corresponding to the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed, the high probability state of the normal symbol is executed. Is configured to shift to a low-probability state, and the gaming state shifts from a probabilistic state to a latent state. While this latent state is set, the variable display (dynamic display) period for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol is set short, so that many lottery of the second special symbol can be executed. It will be a period that can be done (Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Advantageous Period).

In the present embodiment, since the small hit is configured to be won with a probability of about 1/2 in the lottery of the second special symbol, the small hit is set during the period when the latent state is set as the game state. The small hit game that is executed when the player wins the game is frequently executed, and the game state is advantageous to the player who can win many prize balls (special figure 2 advantageous state).

As described above, the period in which the latent probability state is set in the present embodiment (special figure 2 variable advantageous period) is during the variable display period (dynamic display period) of the first special symbol won by the jackpot in the probable change state. Since (special figure 1 big hit is changing), the big hit game is executed when the special figure 2 advantageous state ends. In this way, since a plurality of states (special figure 2 advantageous state, jackpot game state) that are advantageous to the player are continuously set, the player is continuously given various benefits. Can be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is won by one special symbol (special figure 2) and the small hit game is executed, the fluctuation of the other special symbol (special figure 1) is interrupted (variation display period). The measurement is interrupted), and when the small hit game is completed, the measurement of the interrupted fluctuation display period is restarted. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 variable advantage period from being subtracted during the small hit game, and therefore, regardless of the number of small hit games executed during the special figure 2 variable advantageous period. It is possible to provide the player with a certain special figure 2 variable advantageous period.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of one special symbol (special figure 1), the other special symbol (special figure 2) that is changing is stopped and displayed. It is configured to be forcibly stopped with. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a small hit game is executed during a big hit game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control content for the change of the other special symbol is different depending on the lottery result of one special symbol. Specifically, if the lottery result of one special symbol is a big hit (a lottery result that can give the player the first privilege), the change of the other special symbol means that the lottery result is out of order. If it is stopped and displayed in the display mode shown and the lottery result of one special symbol is a small hit (a lottery result that can give the player a second privilege different from the first privilege), the other special symbol changes. Is stopped until the grant of the second privilege is completed (until the small hit game is completed), and is restarted after the grant of the second privilege is completed. In addition, if the lottery result of one special symbol is out of order, the change of the other special symbol is executed as it is.

With this configuration, the lottery content (lottery result, period until the lottery result is displayed) of the other special symbol can be changed based on the lottery result of one special symbol, and the player's It is possible to provide various playability.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a lottery result that can give a privilege to the player, the control content for the change of the other special symbol is changed according to the content of the privilege. Therefore, for example, in the case of a lottery result that gives the player the most advantageous privilege (big hit game), the lottery result corresponding to the change of the other special symbol being executed is the lottery result that gives the privilege. Even so, the fluctuation is forcibly stopped so that the lottery result is out of order, the player is suppressed from being given excessive benefits, and the lottery result (small hit) with less benefits given than the big hit game. In the case of, in order to prevent the privilege based on the lottery of the other special symbol from being given during the small hit game without changing the lottery result corresponding to the change of the other special symbol being executed, the variable display is performed. It is possible to interrupt only the measurement of the period.

Therefore, in a state where a plurality of special symbols (Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2) are fluctuating at the same time, the player is given the least advantageous privilege, and thus the most advantageous privilege to be given later is given. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the player is not able to do so, and it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, a short-term (0.5 second) variable display period is set as the variable display period of the second special symbol (special figure 2). It is configured so that small hit games can be performed frequently. Then, the condition for setting the latent state as the gaming state is the condition where the latent state is set, and the condition for ending the latent state is the condition for winning the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol while the probability changing state is set. Is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot, and the jackpot game is executed. Therefore, the jackpot game is executed after the end of the first advantageous period, which is advantageous to the player who frequently executes the small hit game. The second game period will be set. Therefore, since the first advantageous period and the second advantageous period that are advantageous to the player can be continuously set, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game so that the first advantageous period is set.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 9, the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in each gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, when the jackpot gaming state is set as the gaming state, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 displays, for example, a round of the jackpot game currently being executed as the content of the jackpot game. A round number display mode for indicating the number, an acquisition amount display mode for indicating the number of acquired balls, and a type for suggesting the type of the jackpot game being executed (the number of rounds, the game state set after the jackpot game is completed). The number of jackpots won in the period in which the non-normal state (probability change state, latent state, time saving state) is continuously set without setting the normal state as the suggestion display mode and the game state (so-called consecutive chan number). ) Etc. are displayed. The jackpot game display mode is displayed.

Then, at the timing when the jackpot game ends (see FIG. 5A), when the jackpot type this time is the jackpot type (for example, jackpot A) in which the probability change state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot game ends, the figure. As shown in 6 (a), an effect mode (chance zone mode) aiming at setting a latent probability state advantageous to the player is displayed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 6A, the display contents of the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 6A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 6A, on the ending screen of the jackpot game, the comment "Chance zone entry !!" indicating that the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. Then, in the main display area Dm, the character 811 displayed during the period in which the probability change state or the latent probability state is set is displayed. This character 811 is configured so as not to appear (not displayed) during the period in which the normal state is set, and the player is in the period in which the character 811 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is designed to be in a game state that is advantageous to the player (a game state that is more advantageous than the normal state).

With this configuration, the player can grasp the outline of the currently set gaming state by grasping whether or not the character 811 is displayed on the display screen, so that the game is easy to understand. Can be provided.

In addition, the comment "Aim for RUSH !!" is displayed to aim at setting the latent state in the main display area Dm. Further, in the guidance display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, the character "left-handed" is displayed as a guidance display mode for causing the player to perform a left-handed game. As a result, it is possible to easily make the player know that the left side game aiming at the left side area is performed when the probability change state is set. In the present embodiment, the second variable winning device 650, which is opened during the jackpot game, has both a ball fired by the left-handed game (a ball flowing down the left side region) and a ball fired by the right-handed game. , Characters (“left-handed”, “right-handed”) displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 during the jackpot game, which are arranged at positions where prizes can be won (downstream position of the game area (see FIG. 2)), that is, , The game method to be guided during the jackpot game is configured to be variable according to the game state before the jackpot game is executed.

Specifically, when the game state when the jackpot is won is determined and it is determined that the game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state) in which the left-handed game is guided, it is displayed as a guidance display during the jackpot. When "left-handed" is displayed and it is determined that the right-handed game is in the guided game state (latent state), "right-handed" is displayed as the guidance display during the jackpot. As a result, when the jackpot game is executed, it is possible to save the player the trouble of changing the game method.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the special figure 1 display area Dm1 for displaying the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol and the special figure 2 display area for displaying the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol are displayed. Dm2 is formed, and according to the example shown in FIG. 6A, "777" is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 as a display mode corresponding to the jackpot game currently being executed (during the ending screen display). It is displayed. In the special figure 2 display area Dm2, "-" is displayed as a non-variable display mode indicating that the second special symbol is not variablely displayed.

In the present embodiment, if the special symbol has never been variablely displayed after the power is turned on, the above-mentioned non-variable display mode is displayed. By displaying this non-variable display mode, it is possible for the player to predict the past game history (variation history of the special symbol).

Although the present embodiment is configured to display the non-variable display mode described above, the present embodiment is not limited to this, and is configured to display a predetermined display mode (initial display mode) indicating deviation. It is also good, or when it is determined that the elapsed period since the last variable display was executed exceeds a predetermined period (for example, 30 minutes), the display displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 and the special figure 2 display area Dm2. The mode may be configured to be variably displayed in the initial display mode or the non-variable display mode.

Returning to FIG. 5, the explanation will be continued. In the state in which the probabilistic state is set as the game state (see FIG. 5B), the game state is such that the lottery of the first special symbol can be easily executed by the left-handed game. That is, in the probabilistic state, since the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the electric accessory 64a is easily opened, and the ball is easily entered into the lower first entry port 64b2.

The contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in this probabilistic state will be described with reference to FIG. 6 (b). FIG. 6B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the display screen in the probable change state. As shown in FIG. 6B, the comment "in the chance zone" indicating that the current gaming state is in the probable changing state is displayed so as to scroll horizontally (from right to left) in the sub-display area Ds. Scroll.

Then, in the main display area Dm, an effect that the character 811 moves (runs) in the horizontal direction (from left to right) is displayed. Then, "left-handed" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3, and a changing display indicating that the first special symbol is changing is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. Even at this point, the second special symbol is not newly changed from the state shown in FIG. 6 (a) (because the ball is not entered into the second entrance 640 by the right-handed game). , The non-variable display mode "-" is continuously displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a plurality of operation display patterns of the character 811 are stored in the probabilistic state, and the lottery result (hit / fail determination result) of the first special symbol in the probabilistic state is stored. The operation display pattern of the character 811 is set differently according to the situation. This makes it possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol will win the jackpot in the probable change state.

After the display screen shown in FIG. 6 (b) is displayed, when the variable display for showing that the lottery result of the first special symbol has won the big hit is executed, the display shown in FIG. 7 (a) is executed. The screen is displayed. FIG. 7A is a schematic diagram showing the display contents displayed when the variable display in which the jackpot is won is started in the probable change state. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the gaming state shifts from the probabilistic state to the latent state at the timing when the variation display indicating that the first special symbol has won the jackpot is started during the probable change state. It is configured as follows.

Therefore, since the gaming state shifts to a state advantageous for the player (latent state) at the timing when the change of the first special symbol starts, the change of the first special symbol in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 of the display screen. While the variable display mode indicating that the display is being executed is displayed, the display mode of the effect symbol 813 (display mode of "333") for indicating that the game state has changed to the player is stopped. Will be done. As a result, the player can be made to think that the game state has changed from the probable state to the latent state because the effect symbol 813 is stopped and displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, since the display mode similar to the display mode of the third symbol is used as the effect symbol display mode, the stop-displayed effect symbol display mode is a display for showing the lottery result of the special symbol. It can be thought of as an aspect.

This embodiment is configured so that a large number of small hit games can be executed by frequently executing the variable display of the second special symbol during the period in which the latent probability state is set. Therefore, at least during the period in which the latent probability state is set, "right-handed" for indicating the right-handed game to the player is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "RUSH rush !! Right-handed" is displayed to indicate that the latent state is set as the game state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect symbol displayed in the main display area Dm is stopped and displayed without changing the effect mode of the special figure 1 display area Dm1 at the start of the change of the first special symbol won by the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the game state has changed according to the lottery result of the staging pattern.

Then, while the right-handed game is continuously executed in the latent state (during the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol), when the small hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, it is shown in FIG. 7 (b). As you can see, the effect mode for showing that the small hit was won is displayed. Here, the display contents when the latent probability state is set will be described with reference to FIG. 7 (b). FIG. 7B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the display screen in the latent state.

According to FIG. 7B, if a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol while the latent state is set (in RUSH), the first special symbol is in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. A variation display mode for suggesting that is in fluctuation (big hit fluctuation) is displayed, and a display mode "341" indicating that a small hit has been won is displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2. ..

Then, the treasure box 812 displayed as the effect mode in RUSH is opened, and "V" for indicating a small hit is displayed as the effect symbol 813 for indicating the game result from the inside. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the small hit is won by the second special symbol during the latent state (RUSH) and the small hit game is executed.

In this embodiment, the first variable winning device 65, which is rotated when a small hit is won, is provided in the right side region, and the game can be played by the same game method (right-handed) as in the latent state. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, even if the small hit game is frequently executed during the latent state, the player only has to continue the right-handed game, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game. can.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the probability variation state, the latent probability state is set from the start of the jackpot fluctuation, and the latent probability state is set. Is set so that the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be efficiently performed.

Therefore, at the same time as the latent state is set, the player is notified of the period during which the latent state is set (based on the setting of the latent state) (FIG. 7 (a)). ))reference.

However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed at the same time, the first special symbol is also the second in the state where the probabilistic state is set. Both special symbols may fluctuate.

In such a case, even if the display mode indicating that the latent state (RUSH) is set at the timing when the latent state is set is displayed (see FIG. 7A), the second is currently changing. Until the special symbol stops fluctuating, the lottery for the second special symbol cannot be executed in the latent state, and there is a problem that the small hit game is not executed forever even in the RUSH state. There was a risk.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the condition for transition to the latent probability state is satisfied (when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol during the probability change state), the change status of the second special symbol (whether or not there is a change, (Fluctuating remaining period) is determined, and the timing for notifying that the RUSH state has been set is different based on the determination result.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 5 and 8, when the transition condition to the latent probability state is satisfied (when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol during the probability change state), the second special symbol ( The content of the production when the special figure 2) is fluctuating will be explained. As shown in FIG. 5, if the second special symbol is changing at the time when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started in the state where the probability change state is set (see (c) of FIG. 5), the probability change A "super chance zone" with a higher expectation that the RUSH state is set is displayed rather than a "chance zone" for indicating the state.

Here, the display contents of the display screen in the "super chance zone" will be described with reference to FIG. 8A. FIG. 8A is a diagram when the change in which the jackpot is won in the first special symbol is executed during the second special symbol change in the probable change state. In other words, this "super chance zone" is a state in which the latent state is set as the game state, but the variation display of the second special symbol executed before the latent state is set is displayed. It is a display mode which shows the state which is not finished.

When the "super chance zone" is set, a comment indicating that the sub-display area Ds is "in the super chance zone" is displayed. Then, in the main display area Dm, the character 811 is displayed in a mode in which the character 811 is moving at a higher speed than in FIG. 6B, and the character 811 moving at a high speed is configured to easily find the treasure box 812.

Then, a "variable display mode" for indicating that the first special symbol is changing is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, and a latent state is set in the special figure 2 display area Dm2. The "variation display mode" that has been changing since the previous time is displayed.

Returning to FIG. 5, the explanation will be continued. The display screen of the "super chance zone" shown in FIG. 8A is displayed until the timing at which the special figure 2 fluctuation executed over the timing of shifting the gaming state from the probable change state to the latent probable state ends. When the special figure 2 fluctuation is completed (see FIG. 5 (d)), the “RUSH” rush screen for notifying the player that the “RUSH” has been rushed is displayed (see FIG. 8 (b)).

Here, with reference to FIG. 8B, the contents of the screen that has entered the “RUSH” via the “super chance zone” will be described. FIG. 8B is a schematic diagram schematically showing a screen that has entered the “RUSH” via the “super chance zone”. As shown in FIG. 8B, in the main display area Dm, the effect symbol 813 is displayed from the treasure box 812, and a display mode for notifying the player that the player has entered "RUSH" is displayed. Then, "right-handed" that guides the game method during the rush game is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. At this point, the special figure 1 display area Dm1 displays a variation display mode for suggesting that the first special symbol is changing (big hit fluctuation), and the special figure 2 display area Dm2 shows an deviation. The display mode "346" is stopped and displayed.

Returning to FIG. 5, the explanation will be continued. During the rush game (during RUSH), that is, during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, a game in which a lottery of the second special symbol in which a variation pattern with a short variation time is set by performing a right-handed game is frequently performed. Is executed. Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in the present embodiment, in a state where one special symbol wins a big hit (including during a big hit change), the other special symbol can be won by lottery. It is configured so that there is no such thing. Therefore, in the lottery of the second special symbol during the rush game, the lottery result is either a small hit or a miss. Then, in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is configured to win a small hit with a high probability (about 1/2).

Therefore, during the rush game, the game of winning the small hit with a probability of 1/2 and acquiring the prize ball by the small hit game will continue until the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol is completed. That is, even if the lottery of the second special symbol is frequently executed during the rush game, the jackpot is not won by the lottery of the second special symbol, so the jackpot fluctuation period of the first special symbol is fully used. A rush game can be provided.

Then, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is completed (see FIG. 5 (f)), a screen corresponding to the jackpot type won this time is displayed (see FIGS. 9 (a) and 9 (b)). Here, the display screen at the end of the rush game (when the big hit fluctuation is stopped in Special Figure 1) will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 (a) and 9 (b).

9 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the display contents when a big hit (big hit A (see FIG. 16 (a))) which is advantageous for the player is set, and is a diagram schematically showing FIG. 9 (b). Is a diagram schematically showing the display contents when a jackpot (big hit D (see FIG. 16A)), which is disadvantageous to the player, is won.

As shown in FIG. 9 (a), at the timing when the third symbol (“777”) for indicating that the jackpot A (see FIG. 16 (a)) was won is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. In the special figure 2 display area Dm2, the third symbol of "346" indicating the deviation is forcibly stopped and displayed. Then, the effect symbol 813 (“super V”) indicating that the jackpot advantageous to the player has been won is displayed from the treasure box 812, and the comment “Congratulations” is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In this case, the character "right-handed", which is the same game method as in the latent state, is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3.

On the other hand, in FIG. 9 (b), at the timing when the third symbol (“666”) for indicating that the jackpot D (see FIG. 16 (a)) was won is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. In the special figure 2 display area Dm2, the third symbol of "346" indicating the deviation is forcibly stopped and displayed. Then, a staging pattern 813 (“end?”) Showing that the player has won a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player is displayed from the treasure box 812, and a comment “Please return to left-handed” is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. Will be done. In this case, in order to indicate to the player that the rush game has ended, the character "left-handed", which is the same game method as in the normal state, is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3.

Note that FIG. 9 (b) shows the display screen when the jackpot D (see FIG. 16 (a)) is won, but the jackpot C (see FIG. 16 (a)) is won, that is, the jackpot D. The same jackpot game is executed, but the same display screen is displayed even if the jackpot set after the jackpot ends is won, which is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot D, and is restored at the end of the jackpot game. As a production, it is configured to execute a production in which a right-handed game is performed. As a result, it is possible to provide a player with an unexpected effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 10, a card forgotten warning screen to be displayed to the player will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is necessary to insert a card (valuable medium) into a card unit installed along with the pachinko machine 10 in order to borrow a ball used for a game. In such a pachinko machine 10, when a player wins many prize balls by a game, he / she forgets to insert the card into the card unit and forgets to take the card at the end of the game. I had something to do.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the card forgetting warning screen (see FIG. 10A) is configured to be displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of a big hit game in which a prize ball can be won). This can prevent the player from forgetting to take the card. Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to set a jackpot that makes it easy to win a prize ball and a jackpot that is difficult to win a prize as a jackpot game, and further, it is possible to set a game state in which a small hit game can be frequently executed in a short period of time. The timing for displaying the card forgotten warning screen can be set according to the game result (cumulative number of prize balls in a predetermined period).

Here, with reference to FIG. 10A, the display contents of the card forgotten warning screen will be described. FIG. 10A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the card forgetting warning screen. In this way, the operation when removing the card from the card unit is displayed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10, and the comment "Please be careful not to forget to remove the card" is displayed. ..

Next, the display timing of the card forgotten warning screen will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 (b) to 10 (d). FIG. 10 (b) shows the case where the first jackpot is "big hit A (see FIG. 16 (a))", that is, the jackpot that can give a lot of prize balls to the player in one jackpot game is won. It is a timing chart showing the display timing of the card display (card forgotten warning display), and in FIGS. 10 (c) and 10 (d), the first big hit is "big hit A (see FIG. 16 (a))". That is, it is a timing chart showing the display timing of the card display (card forgetting caution display) when a big hit that can give a lot of prize balls to a player in one big hit game is won.

As shown in FIG. 10B, if the first jackpot (the jackpot won when the normal state is set as the gaming state) is jackpot A, a sufficient number of prize balls is given during the jackpot. Since it will be granted, the card display will be executed during the ending period (ED) of the jackpot.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10 (c) and 10 (d), when the first big hit is the big hit C, a sufficient number of prize balls cannot be given to the big hit, and the player cannot give a sufficient number of prize balls. Since there is a possibility of borrowing a ball using a card, the card display is not displayed on the end screen of the first big hit (big hit C).

In such a state, in the present embodiment, the period from the first big hit to the setting of the normal state again is set as the advantageous continuation period, and the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period is accumulated, and the accumulated result is It is configured to execute the card display on the condition that the predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) is reached as the card display execution condition.

That is, if small hit games occur continuously after the end of big hit C and the number of prize balls during the advantageous continuation period exceeds a predetermined amount, the card is displayed on the ending screen of the small hit game. (See FIG. 10 (c)), when the number of prize balls during the advantageous continuation period exceeds a predetermined amount due to repeated execution of the jackpot C, the card is displayed on the ending screen of the jackpot game. (See FIG. 10 (d)).

<Regarding the transition of the gaming state in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a method of shifting from one gaming state to another gaming state for four types of gaming states set in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment.

First, a method of shifting the gaming state when staying in the normal state will be described. As described above, in the normal state, the lottery frequency of the special symbol tends to be higher when the game is played with the left-handed than when the game is played with the right-handed, so that the left-handed is more advantageous for the player. This is because when a left-handed hit is made, it becomes easier to enter the upper first ball entry port 64b1. As described above, in the lottery of the first special symbol executed based on the ball entering the first ball entry port 64, the small hit is not drawn, so the ball is held endlessly unless it becomes a big hit. It will be in a disadvantageous state that continues to decrease. In this normal state, there is a possibility of shifting to another gaming state only when a big hit occurs. As the jackpot types that can be won in the lottery of the first special symbol, four types of jackpots A to D are provided. Details of these jackpot types will be described later with reference to FIG. 16 (a).

As shown on the left side of FIG. 11, when the jackpots A and C are determined at a total rate of 65% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state ST1, after the jackpot ends, the center of FIG. 11 It shifts to the probability change state ST2 shown in. Further, when the jackpot D is determined at a rate of 10% when the jackpot is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state ST1, the time saving state ST3 shown on the right side of FIG. 11 is entered after the jackpot ends. .. On the other hand, when the jackpot B is determined at a rate of 25% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the normal state is set again as the game state after the jackpot ends (the normal state is looped). do).

In the normal state, it is normal to play a game aiming at the upper first entrance 64b1 by hitting left, but the player intentionally hits right and the ball enters the second entrance 640. As a result of a part of the ball hitting to the left entering the second entrance 640, there is a possibility that a big hit will be obtained in the second special symbol lottery. In this embodiment, there are three types of jackpots (big hits EG) as the jackpot types set when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol, and the jackpot of the second special symbol is won in the normal state. When the jackpots E and F are determined at a total rate of 65%, the probability change state ST2 is entered after the jackpot ends, and when the jackpot G is determined at a rate of 35%, the normal state is the game state after the jackpot ends. Is set again (loops the normal state).

In this way, if a big hit is achieved by the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state, there is a possibility that the time saving state will be more advantageous than the normal state at a rate of 10% (big hit D). If a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state, the possibility of shifting to the time saving state becomes zero. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the demerit when the irregular game method of executing the lottery of the second special symbol is performed by right-handing in the normal state, it is possible to suppress the irregular game. Further, in the lottery of the second special symbol executed in the normal state, since the fluctuation pattern having the fluctuation time for a long time (10 minutes) is set, the game efficiency is the case where the left-handed game is performed. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the demerit when the irregular game method of executing the lottery of the second special symbol is performed by right-handing in the normal state.

Next, a method of shifting the gaming state when staying in the probabilistic state will be described. As described above, in the probabilistic state, the lottery frequency of the special symbol tends to be higher when the game is played with the left-handed than when the game is played with the right-handed as in the normal state, so the left-handed is more advantageous for the player. Will be. In the probabilistic state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is higher than in the normal state, so that it is advantageous compared to the normal state, but disadvantageous compared to the latent state. When the probability change state ST2 is set, the process shifts to the latent state SP1 when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won (the change in the jackpot of the special figure 1 starts).

In the probabilistic state, the game is aimed at the lower first ball opening 64b2 provided below the upper first ball opening 64b1 while aiming at the upper first ball opening 64b1 by hitting left as in the normal state. Will do. That is, since the high probability state of the normal symbol is set during the probability change state, the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entry port 64b2 can be easily opened. Therefore, it becomes a gaming state in which the lottery of the first special symbol is easier to be executed than in the normal state.

In the probabilistic state configured in this way, a left-handed game is usually performed to execute a lottery for the first special symbol, but a ball enters the second entrance 640 and the second special symbol is used. There is a possibility that it will be a big hit by lottery. In this case, when the jackpots E and F are determined at a total rate of 65% when the jackpot of the second special symbol is won, the probability change state ST2 is set again after the jackpot ends and is determined at a rate of 35%. When the jackpot G is reached, the time saving state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot ends.

That is, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in the probabilistic state, it is possible to shift to the latent probable state which is most advantageous to the player, while the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. If this is the case, the possibility of shifting to the latent state becomes zero. Therefore, it is possible to increase the demerit when the irregular game method of executing the lottery of the second special symbol is performed by right-handing in the probabilistic state, and it is possible to suppress the irregular game.

Next, a method of shifting the gaming state when staying in the latent state will be described. As described above, in the latent probability state, unlike the normal state and the probability change state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shortened, so that the lottery of the second special symbol can be efficiently performed by playing the game by hitting right. .. Therefore, right-handed is more advantageous for the player than left-handed.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won in the state where the probability change state is set (first transition condition), and when the jackpot C is won in the state where the probability change state and the time saving state are set. It has two transition conditions (second transition condition), and when the first transition condition is satisfied, the latent state is set before the jackpot game is started, that is, during the jackpot fluctuation of the special symbol. When the setting is made and the second transition condition is satisfied, the latent state is set after the jackpot game is completed.

With this configuration, the timing at which the game state (latent state) that is most advantageous to the player is set can be set before or after the jackpot game, so that the player can play a variety of games. Can provide sex.

Further, when the first transition condition is satisfied, the period in which the latent probability state is set becomes the jackpot fluctuation period of the first special symbol, so that the period in which the latent probability state is set can be determined in advance. Therefore, it is possible to easily create an effect to be executed during the latent state in advance (at the time of setting the latent state) according to the period in which the latent state is set.

In addition, if the jackpot C is won by the lottery of the first special symbol in the state where the probability variation state is set, the latent probability state can be set before or after the jackpot game, so that the player can be set. It is possible to provide unexpected playability.

Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used for main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is provided with a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37A, 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate 65f of a variable winning device 65. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing to the right side as a shaft and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 issues various commands to these via the input / output port 205. Send a control signal.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 420, 530, 630.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. Notify the display control device 114 by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 such as a variation effect of the third symbol is produced. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are combined. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a period sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 13 to 21, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described. First, the details of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12) provided in the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

In the main control device 110, main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device (not shown). To execute. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 13) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 13, a counter or the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform a jackpot lottery, setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and drawing the display result of the second symbol display device. used.

For the setting of the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot (and small hit) lottery and the jackpot type (big hit symbol) are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for the above, the fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting the fluctuation pattern, and the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1 are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Further, the small hit type counter C5 is used for selecting the small hit type. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 52). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although the details will be described later, in the RAM 203, each counter for the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second ball entry port 640, in which each counter value is stored for the ball entry to the first ball entry port 64, is stored. A second special symbol execution area 203b in which the value is stored is provided. In the present embodiment, the first ball entry port 64 is provided with up to four reserved balls. Therefore, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 during the period when the special symbol can be drawn, such as when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner or when the special symbol is not in the jackpot game, each counter value is changed. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and when a ball enters the second entry port 640, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b. After that, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is moved to the execution area provided in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and the first special symbol is variablely displayed (dynamically). Various settings and control processes for displaying) are executed. Further, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b is used as it is for various settings and control processing for variable display of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, during the period when the lottery of the first special symbol is impossible, such as during the variable display of the first special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the ball wins the first entry slot 64. When the number of reserved balls in the first ball entry port 64 is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment), each counter value is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Will be done. Further, when the number of reserved balls for the first ball entry port 64 is the upper limit value (4 pieces in this embodiment) or more, each counter value or the like is not acquired and the prize ball (4 pieces in this embodiment) is not acquired. Only the prize ball) is treated as an invalid ball paid out to the player. In addition, the ball entered the second entrance 640 during the period when the lottery of the second special symbol is impossible, such as during the variable display of the second special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In this case, only the prize balls (two prize balls in this embodiment) are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player without acquiring each counter value or the like.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is set to 4 with respect to the first ball entry port 64, but the number is not limited to this, and may be less than 4 (for example, 3). It may be more than 4 (for example, 8). Further, a configuration in which an upper limit value is not provided may be used. Further, in the present embodiment, the ball entering the second ball opening 640 (variation display based on the lottery of the second special symbol) is not held, but the holding storage is possible as in the case of the first ball opening 64. It may be configured.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 479) and reaches the maximum value (for example, 479 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 479) and then 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 479, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 479. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 52).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing. The value of the random number that becomes the big hit of the special symbol is defined in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 15A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the first random number counter C1. When the value matches the value of the random number that is the big hit specified in the first random number table 202a, it is determined to be the big hit of the special symbol. Further, the value of the random number that becomes the small hit of the special symbol is defined in the small hit random number table 202b (see FIG. 15B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 15A. The first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a hit in each game state is set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15A, when the game state is a low probability state (normal state, time saving state) of the special symbol, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. , It is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is any of "7, 8", and if it is any of "7, 8", it is determined to be a big hit.

Further, when the game state is a high probability state (probability change state, latent state) of the special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is It is determined whether it is within the range of "0 to 5", and if it is within the range of "0 to 5", it is determined to be a big hit. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, out of the random number counters having a total number of 480, two values are defined as values for discriminating as a jackpot in the low probability state of the special symbol, so that the low probability state of the special symbol is specified. The jackpot probability at the time is 1/240. On the other hand, the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol is 1/80.

Next, the small hit random number table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (b). The small hit random number table 202b is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a small hit is set in a special symbol lottery. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15B, the lottery for the first special symbol does not specify a random number value as a small hit. That is, the lottery for the first special symbol does not result in a small hit. On the other hand, in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is within the range of "212 to 432" regardless of the gaming state, and the range of "212 to 432" is determined. If it is inside, it is determined that it is a small hit.

Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is a random number that is a small hit, the first symbol. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the display device 37 is the one at the time of a small hit of the special symbol.

On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first random number. 1 The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of a big hit of a special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 479. As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, there are two values of the random number counter C1 per first, which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number value "7, 8" is the first hit as described above. It is stored in the random number table 202a. In this way, while the total number of random numbers is 480, the total number of random numbers that become big hits is 2, so the probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol is "1/240". On the other hand, in the high probability state of the special symbol, there are four values of the first random number counter C1 which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number values "0 to 5" are the first random number table as described above. It is stored in 202a. In this way, while the total number of random numbers is 480, the total number of random numbers that become big hits is 6, so the probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol is "1/80".

Further, as described above, there are 221 values of the first random number counter C1 which is a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the random number values "212 to 432" are stored in the small hit random number table 202b. ing. Since the total number of random numbers that are small hits is 221 while the total number of random numbers is 480, the probability of being a small hit of a special symbol is "221/480" (about 46%).

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The value of the first type counter C2 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit, the big hit type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A). It becomes. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG. 16 (a).

The small hit type counter C5 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the small hit type (small hit) is based on the value of the small hit type counter C5 and the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16B). A to C) will be selected. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG. 16 (b).

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, reach the maximum value (that is, 198), and then return to 0. The variation type counter CS1 determines the variation pattern of 1 from the set variation pattern selection table 202f. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also a counter for determining the fluctuation time. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 52) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202f (see FIGS. 17 to 19) storing a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random value value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided inside.

The variation pattern selection table 202f defines a plurality of data tables for selecting variation patterns (see FIGS. 17 to 19). A plurality of variation pattern selection tables according to the gaming state are set in the variation pattern selection table 202f, and a variation pattern selection table is set for each of the variation pattern selection tables according to the winning / failing determination result. Details of each variation pattern selection table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 232, the maximum value (that is, 232) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start port (through gate) 67. At that time, it is acquired and stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that is a hit of the normal symbol is defined in the second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 15C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and is the value of the second hit random number counter C4. However, when it matches the value of the random number that is the hit specified in the second hit random number table 202c, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol (second symbol). The details of the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (c).

FIG. 15C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202c. In this second hit random number table 202c, there are 11 random number values that can be hit by the normal symbol in the low probability state (in the normal state, in the latent state) of the normal symbol as the game state, and the range is "0 to 10". ". Since the total number of random numbers that can be hit by the second random number counter C4 is 233, the total number of random numbers that can be hit is 11, so the probability of hitting a normal symbol is "11/233".

On the other hand, in the high probability state (probability change state, time saving state) of the normal symbol, there are 232 random values that can be hit by the normal symbol, and the range is "0 to 231". Since the total number of random numbers that can be hit by the second random number counter C4 is 233, the total number of hit random numbers is 232, so the probability of hitting a normal symbol is "232/233". As described above, in the present embodiment, the random value that is the hit of the normal symbol is configured to have a difference of about 20 times between the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol. There is. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entry port 64b2 when the normal symbol hits are also higher than the low probability state of the normal symbol. The probability state is configured to be more advantageous (it is easier for the ball to enter the lower first entry port 64b2).

When the sphere passes through the normal start port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed for 3 seconds in the second symbol display device. Then, in the low probability state of the normal symbol, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is within the range of "0 to 10", it is determined to be a hit, and the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed. Later, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the lower first ball entry port 64b2 is opened only "1 second x 2 times". On the other hand, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 231", it is determined to be a hit, and the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed. Later, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the lower first ball entry port 64b2 is opened only "1 second x 2 times". In this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the normal electric accessory, and the number of times of opening may be appropriately changed as long as the playability is not impaired.

The normal figure variation type counter CS2 is configured as a loop counter in which 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 198, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198), the counter returns to 0. When the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol variation pattern table 202g (see FIG. 20) for selecting the variation pattern of the normal symbol based on the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2. ) Is specified in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. The details of the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202g will be described later with reference to FIG. 20.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 198), and is updated once for each timer interruption process (see FIG. 31). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 52).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 20. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the present embodiment. In the ROM 202, in addition to the first hit random number table 202a, the small hit random number table 202b, and the second hit random number table 202c already described above, the big hit type selection table 202d, the small hit type selection table 202e, and the variation pattern selection At least a table 202f and a normal map variation pattern table 202g are provided.

First, the details of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 16A. The jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A) is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored for each type of special symbol, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is , It is specified in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the big hit type selection table 202d, and the first hit. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the type counter C2 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 16A, "big hit A" is associated with the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 24". Is stipulated. This "big hit A" has 15 rounds, and a big hit game for opening the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is set. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 25 counter values are "big hit A", so if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit A" is determined. The ratio is 25% (25/100).

When "Big hit A" is selected, the probability change state is set at the end of the big hit (the probability change flag 203g is set to ON) regardless of the game state when the big hit is won, and the number of time reductions of 10,000 times is set. It is set (a value of 10000 is set in the time saving counter 203f). That is, after the end of "big hit A", the probability change state is set until the next big hit is won.

"Big hit A" is one of the big hit types with the largest number of rounds, so it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. Further, since the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the hit probability of the normal symbol are set to be higher than those in the normal state, the gaming state is such that the game can be played more advantageous than the normal state. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the latent state is configured so as to be easier to give a privilege advantageous to the player than the probable change state, and among a plurality of gaming states, the latent state is next to the latent state. It becomes a favorable game state.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "25 to 49", "big hit B" is associated and defined. This "big hit B" is the one in which the same big hit game as the above-mentioned "big hit A" is executed, the number of rounds is 15, and the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is opened. The game is set. After the end of the "big hit B", the probability variation flag 203g is set to off, and the time saving counter 203f is configured to have a different value depending on the gaming state at the time of winning.

When the game state at the time of winning the big hit is the normal state, the value of "0" is set in the time saving counter 203f, and when the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit is the time saving state or the probability change state, the time saving counter 203f is set. A value of "100" is set. In other words, if the "big hit B" is won while the normal state is set, the normal state is set after the big hit ends, whereas if the "big hit B" is won during the time saving state, the normal state is set. , The time saving state (100 times) is set after the big hit ends. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 25 counter values are "big hit B", so if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit B" is determined. The ratio is 25% (25/100).

"Big hit B" is one of the big hit types with the largest number of rounds like "Big hit A", so it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained, but the high probability state of the special symbol is not set after the big hit is over. , It is a big hit type that is more disadvantageous than "Big hit A".

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 89", "big hit C" is associated and defined. This "big hit C" has two rounds, and a big hit game for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is opened even in the small hit game executed when the small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. It is configured so that it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the case where the "big hit C" is won and the case where the "small hit" is won.

With such a configuration, when the hit game in which the first attacker is opened is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the big hit game is executed or the small hit game is executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the player is configured to be in a latent state (RUSH state) in which the small hit game can be frequently executed during the big hit fluctuation period of the first special symbol. 1 The game is played while expecting that the hit game in which the attacker is released is a small hit game. That is, it is possible to provide a novel game property by providing a game period in which the player does not normally execute the jackpot game most desired by the player.

After the end of the "big hit C", the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON, and the time saving counter 203f is configured to have a different value depending on the gaming state at the time of winning. When the game state at the time of winning the big hit is the normal state, the value of "10000" is set in the time saving counter 203f, and when the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit is the time saving state or the probability change state, the time saving counter 203f is set. A value of "0" is set. That is, when the "big hit C" is won in the state where the normal state is set, the probable change state is set after the end of the big hit, whereas the "big hit C" is won during the probable change state or the time saving state. If so, the latent state is set after the jackpot ends.

In this way, in the game state when the jackpot is won, even if the jackpot is of the same type, the game state set after the jackpot ends is configured to be different, so that the player simply aims to win the jackpot. Not only that, it is possible to pay attention to the set game state, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the latent probability state is set as the gaming state, the gaming state is configured to be the most advantageous to the player, and the probability changing state is set as a condition for setting this latent probability state. There are two setting conditions: the first setting condition where the jackpot fluctuation of the special symbol is started when is set, and the second setting condition where the jackpot C is won when the probability variation state and the time saving state are set. is doing. That is, it is configured so that the degree of expectation (probability) in which the latent probability state is set differs depending on the game state when the jackpot is won. By configuring in this way, it is possible to gradually increase the expectation of the player to set a game state that is advantageous to the player according to the progress of the game (according to the set game state). It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter value that becomes "big hit C" is 40, so if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit C" is determined. The ratio is 40% (40/100). "Big hit C" is one of the big hit types with a smaller number of rounds and a shorter opening operation period than the above-mentioned "Big hit A" and "Big hit B", so it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. However, depending on the game state at the time of winning the big hit, it is set after the big hit because it is the only type of big hit that can set the latent state that is most advantageous to the player as the game state set after the big hit ends. In terms of the game state, it is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than "big hit A" and "big hit B".

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "90 to 99", "big hit D" is associated and defined. This "big hit D" has two rounds, and a big hit game (same as "big hit C") for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set.

After the end of the "big hit D", the probability change flag 203g is set to off, and the value of "0" is set to the time saving counter 203f. That is, when the "big hit C" is won, the normal state is set after the big hit ends. Since this "big hit D" has the same big hit game content as the above-mentioned "big hit C", the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is configured to operate in the same open operation as the small hit game. ing.

After the end of "Big hit D", since the normal state is set as described above, the fluctuation display (big hit fluctuation) that won "Big hit D" in the state where the probability change state is set is displayed. When executed, the jackpot game is executed after the small hit game is frequently performed during the jackpot fluctuation, and then the normal state is set.

That is, in the latent state (RUSH state) when the "big hit D" is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the normal state after the "big hit D" in which the same opening operation as the small hit game is set is completed. Is set, it is possible to make the player think that the latent state in which the jackpot game is executed has ended.

Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter value that becomes "big hit D" is 10, so if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit D" is determined. The ratio is 10% (10/100). "Big hit D" is one of the big hit types with a smaller number of rounds and a shorter opening operation period than the above-mentioned "Big hit A" and "Big hit B", so it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. It becomes. Further, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the normal state is set after the jackpot ends, which is disadvantageous in terms of the gaming state set after the jackpot. That is, it is the most disadvantageous jackpot type.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment has four jackpot types (“big hit A” to “big hit D”) as jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1). There is. Among them, in two jackpot types (“big hit A” and “big hit B”), a jackpot game is executed in which the second attacker (second variable winning device 650), which is opened only during the jackpot game, is targeted for opening. In the other two jackpot types (“big hit C” and “big hit D”), the jackpot game is executed by targeting the first attacker (first variable winning device 65), which is the same as the small hit game.

That is, in the first embodiment, as a big hit of a special symbol, a main big hit game (“big hit A”, “big hit B”) for the purpose of getting a player to win a prize ball, and a variable game state. ("Big hit C", a sub-big hit game for the purpose of making it difficult for a player to know whether or not a big hit has been won (making it difficult to determine whether a small hit game is a big hit game). "Big hit D") and is configured to be feasible.

Further, in the present embodiment, since it is not a big hit game but a game in which a player can get a prize ball by a small hit game, it is difficult to obtain a large amount of prize balls during the big hit game. Even so (even if a jackpot game in which only a small amount of prize balls can be obtained is executed depending on the jackpot type), a jackpot game aimed at changing the game state while suppressing discomfort to the player is performed. Can be set.

On the other hand, as the type of jackpot by the lottery of the second special symbol, "big hit E" is defined in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 4". This "big hit E" has 15 rounds, and a big hit game for opening the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is set. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, five counter values are "big hit E", so if a big hit is obtained in the second special symbol lottery, "big hit E" is determined. The ratio is 5% (5/100).

When "Big hit E" is selected, the probability change state is set at the end of the big hit (the probability change flag 203g is set to ON) regardless of the game state when the big hit is won, and the number of time reductions of 10,000 times is set. It is set (a value of 10000 is set in the time saving counter 203f). That is, after the end of "big hit E", the probability change state is set until the next big hit is won.

"Big hit E" is one of the big hit types with the largest number of rounds, so it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. Further, since the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the hit probability of the normal symbol are set to be higher than those in the normal state, the gaming state is such that the game can be played more advantageous than the normal state. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the latent state is configured so as to be easier to give a privilege advantageous to the player than the probable change state, and among a plurality of gaming states, the latent state is next to the latent state. It becomes a favorable game state.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "5 to 64", "big hit F" is associated and defined. This "big hit F" has two rounds, and a big hit game for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter value that becomes "big hit F" is 60, so if a big hit is obtained in the second special symbol lottery, "big hit F" is determined. The ratio is 60% (60/100).

When "Big hit F" is selected, the probability change state is set at the end of the big hit (the probability change flag 203g is set to ON) regardless of the game state when the big hit is won, and the number of time reductions of 10,000 times is set. It is set (a value of 10000 is set in the time saving counter 203f). That is, after the end of "big hit F", the probability change state is set until the next big hit is won.

Since "big hit F" is one of the big hit types with the smallest number of rounds, it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. Further, since the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the hit probability of the normal symbol are set to be higher than those in the normal state, the gaming state is such that the game can be played more advantageous than the normal state. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the latent state is configured so as to be easier to give a privilege advantageous to the player than the probable change state, and among a plurality of gaming states, the latent state is next to the latent state. It becomes a favorable game state.

A "big hit G" is associated with a range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "65 to 99". This "big hit G" has two rounds, and a big hit game for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter value that becomes the "big hit G" is 35, so if a big hit is achieved in the second special symbol lottery, the "big hit G" is determined. The ratio is 35% (35/100).

When "Big hit G" is selected, the normal state is set at the end of the big hit (the probability variation flag 203g is set to off) regardless of the game state when the big hit is won, and the number of time reductions of 0 times is set. It is set (a value of 0 is set in the time saving counter 203f).

Since "big hit G" is one of the big hit types with the smallest number of rounds, it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. Further, since the game state set after the big hit is the normal state, it is disadvantageous in terms of the game state set after the big hit. That is, it is the most disadvantageous jackpot type.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the case where the big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the case where the big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2). The points that the probability change flag 203g is set to ON after the big hit is 65% (65/100) are the same, but the ratio that 15 rounds are set as the big hit game (50% in Special Figure 1). , Special figure 2 is 5%), Ratio at which the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is selected as the opening target (Special figure 1 is 50%, Special figure 2 is 5%), Game state at the time of big hit winning The rate at which a value of 10000 is set in the time saving counter 203f after the end of the jackpot when is in the time saving state or the probabilistic state (that is, the high probability state of the normal symbol) (special figure 1 is 25%, special figure 2 is 65%). Is configured to be different.

In this way, by making the contents of the big hit game and the game state after the big hit different according to the type of the special symbol won by the big hit, it is possible to provide various game characteristics to the player, and the game can be played. It is possible to improve the interest.

In this embodiment, the above-mentioned contents are configured to be different depending on the type of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only a part of the above-mentioned contents may be configured to be different. It is good, and other than the above-mentioned contents, for example, by setting the number of rounds of the jackpot game that can be set only for the jackpot type corresponding to the special figure 1 (for example, 7 rounds), the set number of rounds may be different. , The ratio of setting the probability variation flag 203g to ON may be different.

Further, on condition that the ball has passed through a specific area (for example, an area where the ball winning in the second variable winning device 650 can pass) during the big hit game, the probability change flag 203g is set to ON after the big hit is completed. In the gaming machine configured in the above, the probability that the ball passes through the specific area may be different between the jackpot type corresponding to the special figure 1 and the jackpot type corresponding to the special figure 2. Further, the data table for selecting the variation pattern for showing the lottery result in each game state set after the big hit may be configured to be different depending on the big hit type.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16A, in the present embodiment, both the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) and the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) can win a prize in one round game. Although the upper limit value is set to "10", the upper limit value may be different between the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) and the second attacker (second variable winning device 650). In addition, the upper limit of the opening operation in the round game may be different depending on the winning jackpot type (or the type of the special symbol won in the jackpot).

Next, the details of the small hit type selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 16 (b). The small hit type selection table 202e is a data table referred to for determining the type of small hit when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2). In the small hit type selection table 202e, the corresponding small hit type is defined for each range of values of the small hit type counter C5.

As shown in FIG. 16B, "small hit A" is defined in association with the range in which the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "0 to 93". This "small hit A" is a small hit type in which the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state only once for 1.5 seconds during the small hit game.

Of the 100 random values that the small hit type counter C5 can take, 94 are random values that become "small hit A", so if a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, "small hit A" Is determined at 94% (94/100).

Further, in the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "94 to 98", "small hit B" is defined in association with it. This "small hit B" is a small hit type that sets an open state for 0.2 seconds x 6 times during a small hit game. Of the 100 random values that the small hit type counter C5 can take, 5 are random values that become "small hit B", so if a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, "small hit B" Is determined at 5% (5/100).

Further, the value "99" of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with "small hit C". This "small hit C" is a small hit type that sets an open state of 0.06 seconds x 8 times during a small hit game. Of the 100 random values that the small hit type counter C5 can take, one random value is "small hit C", so if a small hit is obtained by a special symbol lottery, it will be "small hit C". The ratio is 1% (1/100).

Next, the details of the variation pattern selection table 202f will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19. As described above, in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f, a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the fluctuation display is defined from the value (random value value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

As shown in FIG. 17, the variation pattern selection table 202f is a normal table 202f1 for determining a variation pattern (variation time) in a normal state, and a time reduction / probability variation for determining a variation pattern in a time reduction state and a probability variation state. At least a table 202f2 and a latent table 202f3 for determining a variation pattern in the latent state are included. The specific contents of these tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19. In each of the tables shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the fluctuation time is expressed in milliseconds, but in the following description, the fluctuation time is expressed in seconds for easy understanding.

First, the normal table 202f1 will be described with reference to FIG. The normal table 202f1 is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is in the normal state. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table 202f1. As shown in FIG. 18, the normal table 202f1 has a random number value (variation type) for determining the type (variation time) of the fluctuation pattern for each type of the special symbol and the stop type (win / fail determination result) of the special symbol. The counter value of the counter CS1) is specified.

Specifically, as a fluctuation pattern determined when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, a normal reach (20 seconds) is associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 50". Super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "51 to 100", super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "101 to 150", and super reach is associated with the range of "151 to 198". C (30 seconds) is associated.

On the other hand, when the first special symbol is lost in the lottery and the normal table 202f1 is referred to, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (value set in the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d). The correspondence between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the selected variation pattern changes according to the above. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 18, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is within the range of 0 or 1, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is long in the range of "0 to 70". The deviation pattern (12 seconds) is associated with the deviation pattern, and the deviation normal reach (20 seconds) is associated with the range of "71 to 150". Further, as the value of the variation type counter CS1, the out-of-range super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "151 to 170", and the out-of-range super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "171 to 198". Has been done.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 2 or 3, the fluctuation pattern of a short deviation (8 seconds) corresponds to the range of "0 to 70" as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. As the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern of long deviation (12 seconds) is associated with the range of "71 to 130", and the deviation pattern of normal reach (20 seconds) is associated with the range of "131 to 170". ing. Further, as the value of the variation type counter CS1, the out-of-range super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "171 to 185", and the out-of-range super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "186 to 198". Has been done.

The process of selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol with reference to the normal table 202f1 (see S505 of FIG. 35) is from the process of subtracting the reserved ball of the first special symbol (see S303 of FIG. 33). Is also executed later. Therefore, the normal table 202f1 is not referred to when there are four reserved balls.

As described above, when the number of reserved balls is small (0 or 1), it becomes easier to select a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time as compared with the case where the number of reserved balls is large (2 or 3). With this configuration, when the number of reserved balls is small, it is possible to secure time for storing the reserved balls and make the variable display less likely to be interrupted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from getting tired of the game. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is large, it becomes difficult to accumulate the reserved balls because the fluctuation time is shortened. Can be prevented (suppressed) from entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel that he / she has lost.

On the other hand, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed and the normal table 202f1 is referred to, 600 seconds (10 minutes) is set as the fluctuation time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the long variation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1. When the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, the small hit long variation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1. When the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order, the out-of-order long variation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1. As a result, when the right-handed hit is performed in the normal state and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the fluctuation time of 600 seconds is set each time, so that the game efficiency is significantly worse than the left-handed hit. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a right-handed hit is normally performed.

Next, the details of the time saving / probability variation table 202f2 will be described with reference to FIG. 19 (a). The time reduction / probability change table 202f2 is a table referred to when a variation pattern is selected when a high probability state (that is, a time reduction state or a probability change state) of a normal symbol is set as a game state.

As shown in FIG. 19 (a), the time reduction / probability variation table 202f2 is used to determine the type (variation time) of the fluctuation pattern for each type of the special symbol and the stop type (win / fail determination result) of the special symbol. A random value (counter value of the variable type counter CS1) is specified. The time saving / probability variation table 202f2 is different from the normal table 202f1 described above with reference to FIG. 18 so that different fluctuation patterns are not selected according to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. is doing.

That is, when the normal state is set as the game state, it is difficult to always secure the reserved ball of the first special symbol because the game is aimed at the upper first entry slot 64b1 while performing the left-handed game. There is a possibility that there will be a period in which the lottery for the first special symbol is not executed (the first special symbol has not changed). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small, the normal table 202f1 is configured so that the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time can be easily selected. As a result, in the normal state, the state in which the variation display of the first special symbol is not executed continues for a long time, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game.

On the other hand, the time-saving / probability-changing table 202f2 shown in FIG. 19A is in a time-saving state or a probability-changing state in which a left-handed game is performed and a game in which a ball is inserted into the lower first entry port 64b2 is performed. The data table to be referenced. During this time-saving state and the probable change state, the electric accessory 64a is frequently released, so that the game state is such that the reserved ball of the first special symbol can be easily stored.

In this way, when the gaming state in which the reserved balls of the first special symbol can be easily stored is set, it varies when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small as in the above-mentioned normal table 202f1. If a configuration is added that makes it easier to select a variation pattern with a long time, the first special symbol (special symbol 1) variation that is executed when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is reduced by taking a break from the game. The fluctuation time of the game becomes long, and it becomes difficult to play the game efficiently during the time saving state and the probable change state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the variable pattern table (time reduction / Probability variation table 202f2) so that the fluctuation pattern selected by the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol does not differ (the fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is not selected when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small). ) It is configured. As a result, it is possible to efficiently execute the game in the time-saving state and the probable change state.

Further, as will be described in detail later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a state where the probability change state is set, the probability change state is changed to the latent state at the timing when the jackpot fluctuation starts. It is configured to move to. Specifically, when the first special symbol (special figure 1) is drawn in a state where the probability change state is set and the lottery result (win / fail judgment result) is a big hit, the time saving / probability change table 202f2 is displayed. With reference, when the hit special fluctuation (600 seconds) is selected, the gaming state becomes the latent state while the hit special fluctuation (600 seconds) is being executed, and when the hit special fluctuation ends, the special figure 1 The special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with a combination indicating that the lottery result is a big hit, and the big hit game is started.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be capable of executing lottery and variation display at the same time, while the latent state is set (special variation per special figure 1). (While is being executed), the lottery of the second special symbol can be performed. In addition, in the present embodiment, the variation display period (variation time) for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol is defined as a short period (1 second) only in the latent state, and only the second special symbol. It is configured to win a small hit. With this configuration, the player is allowed to frequently draw the second special symbol while the latent state is set (while the special variation of the special figure 1 is being executed). Can win many prize balls.

As described above in FIG. 19A, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot of the special figure 1 is won in the state where the probability variation state is set, 60 seconds to 600 depending on the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. It is configured so that the fluctuation time of seconds is set, and this fluctuation time directly becomes the duration of the latent state. Therefore, as a lottery result of the special symbol, the player can pay attention not only to the result of whether or not the jackpot is won (win / fail judgment result) but also to the selected fluctuation pattern (variation time). It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

On the other hand, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed and the time saving / probability variation table 202f2 is referred to, 60 seconds (1 minute) is set as the variation time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, a long variation (60 seconds) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1. 2 When the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the small hit long fluctuation (60 seconds) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1, and the second When the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the out-of-order long variation (60 seconds) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1. As a result, when a right-handed hit is performed in a time-saving state or a probable change state and a lottery for the second special symbol is executed, a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is set each time, so that the game efficiency is extremely higher than that of a left-handed hit. Getting worse. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a right-handed player is hit in a time-saving state or a probable change state.

Next, the details of the latency table 202f3 will be described with reference to FIG. 19 (b). The latent probability table 202f3 is a table referred to when selecting a variation pattern when a latent probability state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set as a gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 19 (b), the latent probability table 202f3 is a disorder for determining the type (variation time) of the fluctuation pattern for each type of the special symbol and the stop type (win / fail determination result) of the special symbol. Numerical values (counter values of the variable type counter CS1) are specified. It should be noted that the latent probability table 202f3 is configured so that different fluctuation patterns are not selected according to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, similarly to the time saving / probability variation table 202f2 described above.

The latent probability table 202f3 is used when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol (special figure 2) during the period during which the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 1 is executed during the probability change state, or during the time saving state or the probability change state. When winning a jackpot, which is a jackpot type of "big hit C", and selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) to be executed after the jackpot game is completed. Referenced.

The latent probability table 202f3 is selected when a big hit is obtained in the first special symbol lottery with respect to the contents specified in the time saving / probability variation table 202f2 described above with reference to FIG. 19 (a). The difference is that the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 specified for each fluctuation pattern is different, and the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern selected in the lottery of the second special symbol is different. Everything else is the same. Detailed description of the same element will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 19B, as the fluctuation pattern determined when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 corresponds to the range of "0 to 39" and the normal fluctuation (60). Seconds) are associated, super fluctuations (180 seconds) are associated with the range of "40 to 119", and special fluctuations (600 seconds) are associated with the range of "120 to 198".

On the other hand, when the lottery of the first special symbol is missed and the latent probability table 202f3 is referred to, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (value set in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d). ) And the out-of-middle fluctuation (30 seconds) are associated with each other regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

When the lottery of the second special symbol is executed and the latent probability table 202f3 is referred to, 1 second is set as the fluctuation time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the hit short variation (1 second) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1. 2 When the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the small hit short variation (1 second) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1, and the second When the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the out-of-order short variation (1 second) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1. As a result, a large number of lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed in the latent state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the details of the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202g will be described. As described above, the normal symbol variation pattern table 202g is a table referred to for selecting a normal symbol variation pattern when a lottery for ordinary symbols is executed. As shown in FIG. 20, in the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202g, the range of the value of the normal map fluctuation type counter CS2 and the fluctuation pattern (variation time) are displayed for each game state at the time when the lottery of the normal symbols is executed. Is specified in association with.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 20, when the gaming state is a normal state, a latent state, that is, a low probability state of a normal symbol, the entire range of possible values of the normal figure variation type counter CS2 ( A fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is associated with 0 to 198). Further, even when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2.

On the other hand, when the game state is a time saving state or a probabilistic state, that is, a high probability state of a normal symbol, the value of the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 fluctuates in the range of "0 to 198" with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds. Patterns are associated.

In the first embodiment, a plurality of variations of the fluctuation pattern are provided only in the latent state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even in the normal state or the probabilistic state, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol may have a variation, and when the lottery of the normal symbol is executed in the latent state, the fluctuation time is 2 of 1 second or 3 seconds. Any of the types may be set, and the fluctuation time is not limited to two types, and a larger fluctuation time may be selectably configured. The more variation there is in the fluctuation time, the more difficult it is for the player to predict the fluctuation time, so that it is possible to make the player make a continuous right-handed strike more reliably during the latent state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set based on the game state and the value of the acquired normal symbol fluctuation type counter CS2, but in addition to that, it is based on the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol. You may use a configuration in which the fluctuation time is changed, a configuration in which the fluctuation time is changed based on the number of lottery of special symbols, or a configuration in which the fluctuation time of a normal symbol is set by a method in which the above-mentioned various configurations are combined. Specifically, 1 second is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol from the transition of the gaming state to the latent state until the lottery of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), and thereafter (for example, 50 times). , 51 times to 100 times) may be configured so that 3 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol.

In this way, the number of special symbol fluctuations (first special symbol, second special symbol) since the end of the previous jackpot is measured, and the variation time corresponding to the measurement result is selected and executed. , It is possible to make the player play the game with a sense of expectation so that a more advantageous fluctuation time (for example, a short fluctuation time) is executed more during the period when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. can.

In addition, while the lottery for the even number of special symbols is being executed after the game state shifts to the latent state, 1 second is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and other than that (odd number), It may be configured so that 3 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of a normal symbol. In this way, by configuring to change the fluctuation time of the normal symbol based on the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to predict the fluctuation time, so that it is more reliable during the latent state. It is possible to make a continuous right-handed hit. In this case, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is longer (longer than the case where the lottery of the special symbol is executed) when the lottery of the special symbol is not executed, or the special symbol is configured to be longer. It may be configured so that the smaller the number of lottery pending and stored, the longer the fluctuation time of the normal symbol.

Further, when setting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol based on the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol, it is preferable to configure so that the longer the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is, the easier it is to select. With this configuration, the pachinko machine 10 is adjusted so that the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is hard to be accumulated, and the pachinko machine 10 is adjusted so that the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is easy to be accumulated. It is possible to make the number of ordinary symbol lottery uniform.

Next, the details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing a configuration of RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 21, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol execution area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d, and a normal symbol holding ball. Number counter 203e, time reduction counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, special figure 1 big hit flag 203h, special figure 2 big hit flag 203i, winning state storage area 203j, small hit flag 203k, special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m, special figure 2 fluctuation It has at least a time counter 203n, a big hit medium flag 203o, a small hit medium flag 203p, a special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s, a normal figure short fluctuation flag 203t, a winning counter 203u, a special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v, and other memory areas 203z. ing.

The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area (first special symbol execution area) and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these is held. Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the small hit type counter C5, and the variable type counter CS1 is stored in the area.

More specifically, the value of each counter is acquired at the timing when the ball enters the first entry port 64 (starting prize), and the acquired data is obtained in four holding areas (holding first area to ~. Among the vacant areas of the reserved 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is the execution area. It is shifted (moved) to, and a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is performed based on each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having a smaller area number. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data shift is performed only for the holding area (holding second area to holding fourth area) in which the winning data is stored.

The second special symbol execution area 203b stores a determination value (counter value) for executing a special symbol lottery, similarly to the first special symbol execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. In the second special symbol execution area 203b, each counter value acquired at the timing when the start winning to the second entrance 640 is detected is stored.

Similar to the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area (ordinary symbol holding ball execution area) and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). ) And. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, at the timing when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is the four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). ) Is stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th) in the vacant area. That is, similarly to the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the winning order is maintained and the data corresponding to the winning is stored. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the reserved first area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is the execution area. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area after being shifted (moved) to, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty, so that it is stored in another hold area as in the case of the 1st special symbol hold ball storage area 203a. A shift process is performed in which the winning data is packed into a holding area that is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d displays the variation of the special symbol (first symbol display device 37,) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the third symbol display device 81 (variation display performed by the symbol display device 81) up to four times. The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. Is added by 1 (see S1704 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S303 in FIG. 33).

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of reserved balls N1 of the variation display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S304 in FIG. 33, FIG. 47). See S1705). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 displays the variation held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of reserved balls itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is reserved in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number of balls deviates from the number of balls, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e sets the number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times of holding the variable display in the normal symbol M) is set to zero, and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases as the ball passes through the through gate 67. Each time, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S1904 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed.

When the sphere passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved sphere counter 203e (the number of holding times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. , The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (see S1905 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S1903: No. in FIG. 49). reference).

The time saving counter 203f is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time saving state. At this time reduction counter 203f, a value corresponding to the winning jackpot type is set after the jackpot ends. Then, the time reduction counter 203f is subtracted by 1 in the game state update process executed immediately after setting the start of the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (see S308 in FIG. 36). When the lottery of the normal symbol is performed, if the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time reduction state, and the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol is executed with reference to the table for high probability time. .. On the other hand, if the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 0, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the normal state, and the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol is executed with reference to the table for low probability time.

The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol is set, and when it is set to ON, it indicates that the special symbol is in the high probability state. That is, when the probability variation flag 203g is set to on, the game state is a probability variation state (special symbol: high probability state, normal symbol: high probability state) or a latent probability state (special symbol: high probability state, It means that one of (normal symbol: low probability state) is set.

This probability variation flag 203g is set to ON at the end of the jackpot when the winning jackpot type is a jackpot for setting the probability variation state or the latent probability state after the jackpot ends (S2402: Yes in FIG. 54). 54 S2403). Then, when the symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit is stopped and displayed, it is set to off (see S806 in FIG. 38).

In this embodiment, as described above, the high-probability state of the special symbol is set based on the jackpot winning of the special symbol, and the high-probability state of the special symbol is continued until the next jackpot is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the special symbol after the high probability state of the special symbol (special symbol high probability state) is set as the special symbol high probability end condition for terminating the high probability state of the special symbol. When the number of fluctuations (number of fluctuations in the special figure) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), the probability variation flag 203g may be set to off. In this case, in order to set the timing to turn off the probability change flag 203g, a storage means for storing the number of special figure fluctuations as the special figure high probability end condition in advance and a storage means after the special figure high probability state is set are set. End determination to determine whether the number of special figure fluctuations measured by the measuring means and the special figure fluctuation number measured by the measuring means satisfy the special figure fluctuation number (special figure high probability end condition) stored in the storage means. Means and means may be provided.

Further, a plurality of special figure high-accuracy end conditions are prepared, for example, the special figure 1 high-accuracy end condition and the variation of the second special symbol that can be satisfied based only on the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol in the special-figure high-accuracy state. Various special figure 2 high probability end conditions that can be established based only on the number of times, and lottery end conditions that can be established when the lottery result of the special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a lottery result of winning a small hit). The special figure high probability end condition may be facilitated, and the probability change flag 203 g may be set to off when any of the special figure high probability end conditions is satisfied.

The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on entering the first ball entry port 64 matches the jackpot determination value at the start of fluctuation. It is a flag set to (see S407 in FIG. 34). The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to off when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (S806 in FIG. 38).

When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol ends while the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is on, the process of forcibly stopping the second special symbol with the off symbol is executed (see S804 in FIG. 38). .. As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem in which one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit while the other is being executed.

The special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on the entry into the second entry port 640 matches the jackpot determination value at the start of fluctuation. It is a flag set to (see S1007 in FIG. 40). The special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to off when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (S1506 in FIG. 45).

When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol ends while the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is on, the process of forcibly stopping the first special symbol with the off symbol is executed (see S1004 in FIG. 40). .. As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem in which one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit while the other is being executed.

The winning state storage area 203j is a storage area for storing information indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state (if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 and the probability variation flag 203g is off), the normal state is set in the winning state storage area 203j. "00H" is stored as information indicating. On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a probability change state (if the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more and the probability change flag 203g is on), the probability change state is shown in the winning state storage area 203j. "01H" is stored as information. Further, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the latent state (if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 and the probability change flag 203g is on), the latent state is set in the winning state storage area 203j. "02H" is stored as the information to be shown.

The information stored in the winning state storage area 203j is retained until the end of the jackpot, and is referred to when setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends (see S2404 in FIG. 54).

The small hit flag 203k is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on the entry into the second entry port 640 matches the small hit determination value at the start of fluctuation. This is a flag to be set (see S1102 in FIG. 41). The small hit flag 203k is set to off when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit (see S1605 in FIG. 46). When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol ends with the small hit flag 203k turned on, the fluctuation of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (the counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the special symbol is subtracted). The process of stopping) is executed (see S1603 in FIG. 46). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a problem that a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol and the big hit is started during the small hit while the small hit of the second special symbol is being executed. can.

The special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m and the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n are counters for measuring the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, and are the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When the fluctuation pattern of the symbol is selected, the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern is set. Whether or not the fluctuation time of each special symbol has ended is determined by the timing results of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m and the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n.

The jackpot flag 203o is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot is being hit. If the jackpot flag 203o is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot, and if it is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot. This jackpot middle flag 203o is set to on when the start of the jackpot is set. On the other hand, it is set to off in the jackpot end processing executed at the end of the jackpot.

The small hit middle flag 203p is a flag indicating whether or not the small hit is in progress. If the small hit medium flag 203p is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a small hit, and if it is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is not in a small hit. The small hit medium flag 203p is set to on when the start of the small hit is set (see S1606 in FIG. 46). On the other hand, it is set to off at the end of the small hit (see S2512 in FIG. 55).

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to win a small hit only for the second special symbol, and when the small hit is won (when the small hit medium flag 203p is set to ON), the second special symbol is won. 1 It is configured to interrupt the variable display of special symbols. That is, among the multiple types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), one special symbol (second special symbol) is selected by lottery to win a small hit, and the small hit medium flag 203p is set to ON. In this state, since the variable display of the other special symbol (first special symbol) does not end, the player can be made to pay attention to the small hit game and play the game. Further, during the small hit game, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from ending and the big hit game from starting.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is a flag indicating that the fluctuation of the first special symbol is the period from the stop display (confirmed display) of the jackpot stop symbol to the start of the jackpot. When the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to on, the execution of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided even if there is a new entry to the second entry opening 640. (See S901: Yes in FIG. 39). This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to on when the second special symbol is forcibly stopped by a missed symbol (see S802 in FIG. 38), and the process for executing the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided. If so, it is set to off (S902 in FIG. 39).

The normal symbol short fluctuation flag 203t is a flag for indicating that the fluctuation of the normal symbol (second symbol) was a short fluctuation (variation for 3 seconds), and is set to on to indicate the normal symbol (second symbol). It shows that the short change of the symbol) has been executed. The normal symbol variation flag 203t determines that the timing for setting the variation time of the normal symbol in the normal symbol variation processing (see S106 in FIG. 48) is in the time reduction state (time reduction) (S1811: Yes in FIG. 48). ), It is set to on when the fluctuation time (short fluctuation) of 3 seconds is set (S1814 in FIG. 48), and it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) has elapsed (S1816 in FIG. 48: Yes), it is referred to when it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol (second symbol) is a hit (S1818: Yes in FIG. 48) (S1819 in FIG. 48).

Here, when it is determined that the normal figure short fluctuation flag 203t is set to ON (S1819: Yes in FIG. 48), it is determined whether the current state is in the time saving state (time saving in progress) (S1821 in FIG. 48). ), When it is determined that the time saving state is in progress (S1821: Yes in FIG. 48), an opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a (FIG. 48 S1822). The short variation flag 203t is set to off after being determined to be on in the normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 48) (S1820 in FIG. 48).

In this way, when the game state at the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol (second symbol) (when the fluctuation time is set) and when the electric accessory 64a opening operation is set after the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) has elapsed. Since the opening operation (long opening) that is advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a only when both the gaming state and the time saving state are set, a plurality of gaming states (normal state) are set. By changing the normal symbol (lottery) that is executed across the time saving state), it is possible to surely prevent the electric accessory 64a from opening for a long time, which is an advantageous privilege for the player (long of the electric accessory 64a). It is possible to prevent the player from being excessively provided with the opening).

The winning counter 203u is a counter that counts the number of balls that have won (winned) into the first specific winning opening 65a in the round of the small hit game. When the value of the winning counter 203u becomes 10, which is the upper limit value, it is determined that the end condition of the round is satisfied, and the round is ended (see S2706 in FIG. 57). In each round of big hits, even if the value of the winning counter 203u is less than 10, the round is ended when the round period set for the round is reached. The value of the winning counter 203u is incremented by 1 each time a ball is detected in the first specific winning opening 65a during the round validity period of the small hit. Also, the value is reset to 0 at the end of each round.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, the above-mentioned winning counter 203u is not limited to the small hit game, but also counts the number of balls that have won the second specific winning opening 650a in each round during the big hit game. It is also used for.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the period for opening the first specific winning opening 65a is set to 1.5 seconds as the game content of the small hit game, and the end condition of the round established by the number of winnings is set to 10. is doing. That is, the valid period (1.5 seconds) of the round game elapses by the time 10 balls are won in the first specific winning opening 65a during the small hit game (until the round end condition for the number of winnings is satisfied). It will be. Therefore, since the period of the small hit game can be fixed, the effect straddling the small hit game (the period from the start of the change of one special symbol to the end of the change of the other special symbol via the small hit game). It is possible to predetermine the production period of a series of productions to be performed. Therefore, the fluctuation timing of the special symbol and the execution timing of the effect can be easily synchronized, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is a flag indicating a period for stopping the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1, and when it is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped. When the state set to on is set to off, the update (subtraction) of the stopped fluctuation time is restarted.

This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to be turned on when the change of the second special symbol (special figure 2) whose lottery result is a small hit is stopped (S1602 in FIG. 46), and the special symbol change processing (FIG. 32) (see S202 in FIG. 32). As a result of reference, when it is set to ON, the process of updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the special figure 1 is executed in the same manner as during the change (S203 in FIG. 32). That is, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped, but the fluctuation display is continuously executed in the first symbol display device 37. Will be. As a result, it is possible to notify that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped by setting the temporary stop flag 203v of the special figure 1 to ON. Then, when it is determined that it is set to on in the first special symbol variation executing process (see FIG. 37) (S701: Yes in FIG. 37), it is set to off (S703 in FIG. 37).

In addition, in this embodiment, since only the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be able to win the small hit, the special symbol whose variation display is temporarily stopped based on the winning of the small hit is the first special. Only symbols are available, but if the lottery for the first special symbol is configured so that a small hit can be won, even if the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is provided to temporarily stop the variation display of the second special symbol. good.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a big hit, it is based on the fact that one special symbol is stopped in the combination indicating the big hit (based on the execution of the big hit game). ), The process of forcibly stopping the variable display of the other special symbol, and if the lottery result of one special symbol is a small hit, one special symbol is stopped by the combination indicating the small hit. Based on this, the variable display of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (stopped until the small hit game is completed).

That is, it is configured so that the variable display of the other special symbol can be processed in various modes according to the lottery result of one special symbol. With this configuration, the lottery result of one special symbol becomes the most advantageous game result (for example, big hit) for the player, and while the variable display for showing the game result is being executed, the other The special symbol (the lottery result is a small hit) is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to prevent the big hit from being erased by the small hit.

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is provided with various flags, counters, and the like. Based on the various tables provided in the ROM 202 and the flags, counters, and the like provided in the RAM 203, the basic functions of the pachinko machine 10 and the novel state transition shown in FIG. 11 can be realized.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23, details of the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 22A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 22A, the ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a, a stop display mode selection table 222b, and an additional effect selection table 222c.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, the voice lamp control device 113 is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110, and the rough variation content (variation time, variation type (reach, deviation, etc.) indicated by the variation pattern command) is shown. ), It is used to determine the content of the detailed variable display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This makes it possible to determine a wider variety of variation modes. Here, one of a plurality of types of variation mode is determined by lottery with respect to the rough variation content instructed by the main control device 110.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 19A, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol in the state where the probability variation state is set, the fluctuation time is 60 seconds per normal fluctuation and fluctuation. A fluctuation pattern command corresponding to either a super fluctuation with a time of 180 seconds or a special fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 600 seconds is output from the main control device 110, and the fluctuation pattern command (variation time) received by the voice lamp control device 113. The variable effect corresponding to the information indicating) will be set.

Here, as a variation effect corresponding to the special variation (600 seconds), the first 60 seconds is the first stage effect mode (for example, the effect of defeating the first enemy), and the second period is 60 seconds to 180 seconds. A variable effect is set to execute the stage effect mode (for example, the effect of defeating the second enemy) and execute the third stage effect mode (effect of defeating the third enemy) in a period of 180 to 600 seconds. As a variation effect corresponding to the variation (180 seconds), the first stage effect mode (for example, the effect of defeating the first enemy) is executed for the first 60 seconds, and the second stage effect mode is executed for a period of 60 seconds to 180 seconds. A variable effect that executes (for example, an effect of being defeated by a second enemy) is set, and as a variable effect corresponding to the normal variation (60 seconds), the first 60 seconds is the first stage effect mode (for example, the first enemy). A variable effect is set to execute the effect) to be defeated.

In this way, by setting the effect mode so as to divide the variation effect to be executed corresponding to the stage of the variation time that can be set as the lottery result of the special symbol, the variation pattern set this time for the player. It is possible to entertain the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while predicting which type the is, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

In addition, in the case of executing the above-mentioned variable effect, the remaining time display mode for allowing the player to grasp the remaining time for the effect period set as each stage (for example, the timing at which the effect mode can shift to the next stage). It may be configured to display an effect mode) in which the remaining time until is displayed as a countdown. As a result, the player can be made to know in advance at least the period during which the fluctuation effect is continuously executed (the period during which the latent state is continuously set), so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. can.

In addition, multiple types of enemies that appear during the variable effect are provided, and the degree of expectation that the variable effect will shift to the next stage according to the type of enemy that appears (the rate at which the effect mode that wins the enemy is selected) and , It is preferable to configure it so that it is possible to suggest the content of the jackpot game executed after the end of the current fluctuation display and the game state set after the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, in this case, for example, when enemy A is displayed as the enemy type, if the fluctuation pattern set this time is a hit super fluctuation (180 seconds), the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player is If it indicates that it is selected and the fluctuation pattern is a hit special fluctuation (600 seconds), it may be configured to indicate that a jackpot type other than the most advantageous jackpot type for the player is selected. With this configuration, the effect mode (type of enemy) of the variable effect can be determined by combining a plurality of elements that determine whether or not to give a privilege advantageous to the player. The effect can be further enhanced.

In the stop display mode selection table 222b, the latent state is set as the game state, and the period during which the small hit game can be frequently executed (hereinafter referred to as the rush period) is set by the lottery of the second special symbol. It is a data table referred to when selecting the stop display mode (see FIGS. 7A and 8B) of the effect symbol for notifying a person. The stop display mode selection table 222b is configured to select different stop display modes according to the jackpot type won in the lottery of the first special symbol and the length of the rush period to be executed.

Here, the contents of the stop display mode selection table 222b will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 23 (a). FIG. 23A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the stop display mode selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 23A, the stop display mode selection table 222b predicts the degree of advantage of each jackpot type (number of rounds, gaming state set after the jackpot game) and the length of the rush period. It is stipulated that the stop display mode of the effect symbol is set so as to be possible.

Specifically, among the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the jackpot type "big hit A", which is the most advantageous to the player, is won, and the remaining time storage area 223p (the length of the rush period) is set. When the information stored in the area for storing the indicated information) is "0 to 60 seconds", that is, the rush period is within 60 seconds, the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 39". , The stop display mode "111" is defined, the stop display mode "111" is defined in the range of "40 to 79", and the stop display mode "666" is defined in the range of "80 to 99". ..

In addition, the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) that won the "big hit A" is "61 seconds to 300 seconds", that is, the rush period is 61. If it is within ~ 300 seconds, the stop display mode "111" is defined in the range of "0 to 39" for the acquired effect counter 223h, and the stop display mode "333" is defined in the range of "40 to 79". Is specified, the stop display mode "333" is specified in the range of "80 to 99", and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing the information indicating the length of the rush period) is specified. When "301 seconds or more", that is, when the rush period is 301 seconds or more, the stop display mode "777" is defined in the range where the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is "0 to 39", and "40 to 79". The stop display mode "777" is defined in the range of "80 to 99", and the stop display mode "VVV" is defined in the range of "80 to 99".

Then, among the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the jackpot type "big hit B", which is disadvantageous to the player, is won, and the remaining time storage area 223p (information indicating the length of the rush period is stored). When the information stored in the area) is "0 to 60 seconds", that is, the rush period is within 60 seconds, the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 39", and the stop display mode is "222" is defined, the stop display mode "444" is defined in the range of "40 to 79", and the stop display mode "666" is defined in the range of "80 to 99".

In addition, the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) that won the "big hit B" is "61 seconds to 300 seconds", that is, the rush period is 61. If it is within ~ 300 seconds, the stop display mode "444" is defined in the range of "0 to 39" for the acquired effect counter 223h, and the stop display mode "666" is defined in the range of "40 to 79". Is specified, the stop display mode "111" is specified in the range of "80 to 99", and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is specified. When "301 seconds or more", that is, when the rush period is 301 seconds or more, the stop display mode "111" is defined in the range where the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is "0 to 39", and "40 to 79". The stop display mode "333" is defined in the range of "80 to 99", and the stop display mode "333" is defined in the range of "80 to 99".

Finally, among the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the second most advantageous jackpot type "big hit C" or the most unfavorable jackpot type "big hit D" is won and the rest. When the information stored in the time storage area 223p (the area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is "0 to 60 seconds", that is, when the rush period is within 60 seconds, the acquired effect counter 223h The stop display mode "444" is defined in the range of "0 to 39", the stop display mode "666" is defined in the range of "40 to 79", and the stop display mode "666" is defined in the range of "80 to 99". The stop display mode "444" is specified.

In addition, the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) that is won in "Big hit C" and "Big hit D" is "61 seconds to 300 seconds", that is, When the rush period is within 61 to 300 seconds, the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is defined in the range of "0 to 39", the stop display mode "666" is defined, and the value is in the range of "40 to 79". The stop display mode "111" is defined, and the stop display mode "111" is defined in the range of "80 to 99", and is stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period). When the information is "301 seconds or more", that is, the rush period is 301 seconds or more, the stop display mode "333" is defined in the range where the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is "0 to 39". , The stop display mode "777" is defined in the range of "40 to 99".

As described above, in the present embodiment, the length of the rush period and after the end of the rush period are determined by the stop display mode of the effect symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing when the rush period is started. It is configured to suggest the content of the jackpot to be executed (big hit type) to the player. As a result, the player can predict the future game content by grasping the stop display mode of the effect symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is stipulated that the stop display mode of the staging symbol has a predetermined rule, and specifically, the stop display mode of the staging symbol is "even symbol", "odd symbol", and the like. It is stipulated that the benefits given to the player increase in the order of "777" and "VVV" (the rush period becomes longer, and the jackpot type becomes more advantageous). By giving a predetermined rule to the stop display mode of the staging symbol in this way, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Further, since the jackpot type and the length of the rush period are combined to select the stop display mode of the effect symbol, for example, the stop display mode "111" of the effect symbol is most advantageous to the player. Since it is stipulated that only when the jackpot type "big hit A" is set, it is selected even if the rush period is within 60 seconds, if "111" is displayed, the player In contrast to the novel gameplay that wants the rush period to end in 60 seconds, that is, the playability that normally wants a longer rush period, the jackpot type and the length of the rush period are combined. By displaying the stop display mode, it is possible to add a game property that is opposite to the normal game result (short rush period).

In addition, when "VVV" is displayed as the stop display mode of the staging symbol, it means that the player has selected the most advantageous one for both the jackpot type and the length of the rush period. On the other hand, you can play the game with confidence.

In the present embodiment, the timing for selecting the stop display mode of the effect symbol by referring to the stop display mode selection table 222b according to the game state (timing for stopping and displaying the effect symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81) is set. It is configured to be different. Specifically, whether or not the second special symbol is changing at the time when the latent probability state is set (when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol starts in the state where the probability change state is set). If it is determined that the second special symbol has not changed, that is, if the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed immediately after the latent probability state is set, the jackpot change of the first special symbol occurs. It is configured to stop and display the staging symbol based on the start.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol is fluctuating at the time when the latent probability state is set (when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started while the probability variation state is set), That is, unless the variable display of the second special symbol currently being executed is completed, if the lottery of the second special symbol cannot be executed in the state where the latent state is set, the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is displayed. It is configured to stop and display the staging symbol based on the timing when is finished.

With this configuration, it is possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol with the latent state set immediately after the staging symbol is stopped and displayed and the rush period is started, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. It is possible to play a game in a latent state without giving it.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is said that the second special symbol is changed at the time when the latent probability state is set (when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started in the state where the probability change state is set). In the case of determination, the length of the rush period from the timing when the variation display of the second special symbol being executed ends is determined, and if the determination result is within a predetermined time, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed. It is configured not to execute (the effect indicating that the rush period has started). As a result, the rush period ends if the small hit game is executed even though the effect symbol is stopped and displayed to notify that the rush period has started (the rush game has started). Can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, since the start of the rush period (rush game) is configured to be displayed by a staging symbol similar to the third symbol, it is as if the third symbol corresponds to the special symbol. It is possible to make the player think that the rush game has been executed based on the fact that the symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, even if the length of the rush period is within a predetermined time and the staging symbol is not stopped and displayed, it is possible to suppress giving a great sense of discomfort to the player.

In the present embodiment, as described above, as the timing for stopping and displaying the staging symbol, the second special being executed at the timing when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started or the timing when the latent state is set. Although the timing at which the variation display of the symbol is stopped is used, the effect symbol may be configured to be stopped and displayed at a timing other than this, and is stored in, for example, the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. If the winning information command indicating the winning information is analyzed and it is determined in advance that the jackpot fluctuation will be executed in the next fluctuation, immediately before the jackpot fluctuation is executed (the third symbol in the pre-variation of the jackpot fluctuation). May be configured to stop and display the effect symbol at the timing when is stopped and displayed). With this configuration, the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed immediately after the latent state is set.

In this way, when using a configuration in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed before the jackpot fluctuation is executed and the notification that the rush game is started is used, the second input is performed from the timing when the effect symbol is stopped and displayed. When a game aiming at the ball mouth 640 (right-handed game) is performed, it is preferable to configure so that the lottery of the second special symbol is not executed before the next jackpot fluctuation is started. As a result, as a result of performing a right-handed game based on the fact that the staging symbol is stopped and displayed, the second is before the latent probability state is set (before the jackpot fluctuation is started), that is, during the probability change state. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a lottery for a special symbol is executed and the period during which the rush game is executed is shortened.

The additional effect selection table 222c is used when selecting an effect mode (additional effect mode) for resuming the variable display of the first special symbol that has been temporarily stopped due to winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery. The data table to be referred to is configured so that a different additional effect mode (treasure box (see FIG. 7B)) is selected according to the residual fluctuation time of the first special symbol after resumption. Here, the contents specified in the additional effect selection table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 23 (b).

FIG. 23B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the additional staging selection table 222c. As shown in FIG. 23B, in the additional effect selection table 222c, different additional effect types are selected based on the period information stored in the residual variation time information storage area 223o and the additional effect counter 223i. The data content is defined as such, and the player predicts the remaining variation time (remaining period of the rush period) of the first special symbol by executing the additional effect mode corresponding to the selected additional effect type. It is configured to get.

Specifically, when the remaining fluctuation time (period information stored in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o) is the period A (less than 5 seconds), the value of the acquired additional effect counter 223i is "0 to 99". "None" is specified in the range of "100 to 198", and "Additional effect A" is specified in the range of "100 to 198". Further, when the remaining fluctuation time (period information stored in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o) is the period B (5 seconds to 60 seconds), the value of the acquired additional effect counter 223i is "0 to 99". The additional effect type "additional effect A" is defined in the range of "100 to 198", and the "additional effect B" is defined in the range of "100 to 198". When the remaining fluctuation time (period information stored in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o) is the period C (60 seconds or more), the value of the acquired additional effect counter 223i is in the range of "0 to 99". The additional effect type "additional effect B" is defined, and "additional effect C" is specified in the range of "100 to 198".

Here, when the "additional effect A" is set, the display mode of the treasure box 812 (see FIG. 7B) displayed during the rush period is changed to a tattered display mode. By grasping the tattered display mode, the player can predict that the rush period is short. Further, when "additional effect B" is set, the treasure box 812 (see FIG. 7B) in the normal display mode is displayed, and when "additional effect C" is set, the treasure box 812 in the normal display mode is displayed. A gorgeous display mode is set. If "None" is selected, the effect of not displaying the treasure box 812 is set during the remaining rush period.

In the additional effect selection table 222c (FIG. 23 (b)) shown in the present embodiment, an example in which the remaining fluctuation time of the rush period and the additional effect type are completely associated with each other is shown, but the present invention is limited to this. With a small probability, for example, "additional effect C" is set when the period B is set, and "additional effect A" or "none" is set when the period C is set. Is also good. As a result, it is possible to perform an unexpected effect on the player.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the compound game information in which the rush period and the jackpot type are combined is played in the stop display mode of the effect symbol displayed at the timing when the latent state is reached and the rush game is started. It is configured to provide the player with game information indicating the remaining period of the rush period by providing additional effects during the rush period. As a result, the player can comprehensively discriminate between the stop display mode of the staging symbol executed as the compound game information and the staging mode of the additional staging, so that more detailed game contents can be predicted.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 22 (b). FIG. 22B is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d, a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e, and a special figure 1 stop. Type selection flag 223f, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g, effect counter 223h, additional effect counter 223i, state setting area 223j, remaining time reduction number area 223k, special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m, special figure. 2 Fluctuation time counter 223n, remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o, remaining time storage area 223p, card notification flag 223q, card notification possible flag 223s, rush display flag 223t, prize ball counter 223u, power supply At least the disconnection flag 223y and the other memory area 223z are provided.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until the processing for the command is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read / written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 60) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process performs the command determination process. , The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores winning information. In the pachinko machine 10, when the starting prize for the first ball opening 64 is detected in the main control device 110, the first winning random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 acquired according to the starting winning. From each value of the small hit type counter C5 and the variable type counter CS1, various information (whether or not, the big hit type in the case of a big hit, the fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the starting prize is drawn is obtained. It is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and various predicted information is notified from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win / fail, big hit type in case of big hit, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and the winning information. Is stored in the winning information storage area 223b. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 areas (1st to 4th areas). Will be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the more the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is a variation effect (variation display) of the first special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is reserved by the main control device 110. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol up to four times for each type of special symbol.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c sets the number of reserved balls as a special symbol. It is designed to be managed for each type of.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the ball into the first ball entry port 64, or in the main control device 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command. , Stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (see S4212 in FIG. 60). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d.

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223c, and holds the first special symbol after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the ball number counter 223c, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, it holds the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the ball number symbol is displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is changed while synchronizing with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 may also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. can. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e receive the fluctuation pattern command of the first special symbol and the fluctuation pattern command of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110, respectively. It is turned on (see S4206 and S4209 in FIG. 60) and turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S5102 and S5108 in FIG. 69). When the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e are turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

When the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g receive the stop type command of the first special symbol and the stop type command of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110. (See S4301 in FIG. 61), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S5112 in FIG. 69). When the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is turned on, the stop type is changed based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type). It is determined.

The effect counter 223h is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The effect counter 223h is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198. For example, each time the main process (see FIG. 59) is executed, the value is incremented by 1 and updated. Will be done.

The additional effect counter 223i is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The additional effect counter 223i is composed of a 1-byte loop counter updated in the range of 0 to 198. For example, the value is incremented by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 59) is executed. Will be updated.

The state setting area 223j is a storage area in which information corresponding to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is stored. In this state setting area 223j, every time a state command output from the main control device 110 is received, information corresponding to the state of the pachinko machine 10 indicated by the state command is stored (see S4405 in FIG. 62). .. More specifically, the state setting area 223j is allocated with a 2-bit storage area, and whether or not it is a high-probability state of a special symbol or whether or not it is a high-probability state of a normal symbol in order from the high-order bit. A value indicating whether or not is stored. For example, if the value of the state setting area 223j is "11B", it means that it is a probabilistic state (high probability state of special symbol and high probability state of normal symbol), and if it is "10B", it means latent. It means that it is a probable state (a high-probability state of a special symbol and a low-probability state of a normal symbol). On the other hand, if it is "00H", it means that it is a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol and a low probability state of a normal symbol).

By updating the state setting area 223j in response to the state command output from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 can accurately grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10.

The remaining time reduction area 223k is a storage area for storing the remaining number of times in the high probability state of the normal symbol. The remaining time reduction number area 223k is updated to the number of times notified by the remaining time reduction number command output every time the value of the time reduction counter 203f is updated in the main control device 110 (see S4802 in FIG. 66). As a result, the value stored in the remaining time reduction number area 223k can be updated in synchronization with the value of the time reduction counter 203f of the main control device 110, so that the remaining time reduction number grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 can be determined. It can be matched with the actual number of time reductions updated by the main controller 110.

The special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m and the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n indicate the corresponding fluctuation time when each fluctuation display is set (executed) in the fluctuation display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 69). Each time a value is set and various counter update processes (see S4111 in FIG. 72) are executed, each value is decremented by 1 (see S5402 and S5404 in FIG. 72). The period from the reception of the special figure 1 temporary stop command to the reception of the special figure 1 restart command is when various counter update processes (see S4111 in FIG. 72) are executed. Also, the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is configured so as not to be subtracted by 1.

Then, when calculating the remaining fluctuation time in the temporary stop-related processing (see S4220 in FIG. 67) that is executed when it is determined that the temporary stop-related command has been received in the command determination processing (see S4112 in FIG. 60). It is referenced (see S4903 in FIG. 67).

The remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o is a storage area for storing information indicating the remaining period of the rush period, that is, the remaining time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol. In this residual fluctuation time information storage area 223o, remaining period information (period A to period C) for indicating the residual fluctuation time of the temporarily stopped first special symbol variation display is set, and the temporarily stopped first special The remaining period information stored when setting the additional effect when restarting the variable display of the symbol is referred to.

The card notification flag 223q is a flag for indicating whether or not the card forgetting warning screen (see FIG. 10A) is displayed (notified), and is turned on when the card forgetting warning screen is displayed. Set.

The card notification possible flag 223s is a flag for indicating whether or not the card forgetting warning screen (see FIG. 10A) can be displayed (notified), and the card forgetting warning screen can be displayed. It is set to on when the above conditions are met.

The rush displayed flag 223t is a flag for indicating whether or not the rush game has started in the state where the latent state is set, and is a rush entry screen (FIG. 7) indicating that the rush game has started. (A), see FIG. 8 (b)) is set to on.

The prize ball number counter 223u is a counter for continuously measuring the number of prize balls after the jackpot game is started, and is a prize ball during a period in which a game state advantageous to the player is continuously set. The numbers are configured to be cumulative. Specifically, in the hit-related processing (S4216 in FIG. 63), when it is determined that the prize ball command has been received (S4505: Yes in FIG. 63), the value corresponding to the received prize ball command is added (S). S4506 in FIG. 63).

As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to acquire a large amount of prize balls not only in the big hit game but also in the small hit game, the pachinko machine 10 is small according to the value of the prize ball counter 223u. It is configured so that the card forgotten warning display can be executed after the end of the winning game or after the end of the big hit game in which a small number of rounds is set.

The power cutoff flag 223y is a flag used for determining whether or not there is a momentary power failure. The power cutoff flag 223y is set to be turned on before the power cutoff process is executed after receiving the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S4117 in FIG. 59). After that, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all the information in the RAM 223 disappears after a certain period of time (100 milliseconds). Therefore, when the power cutoff flag 223y is on (see 4008: Yes in FIG. 58) in the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 58), it is constant after the power cutoff flag 223y is set to on. This is the case where the voice lamp control device 113 is started up before the lapse of time (100 milliseconds), that is, when there is a momentary power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 has not disappeared, and unnecessary information (or information that has become incomplete due to the disappearance of only a part of the information) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. In some cases, the information in the work area of RAM 223 is cleared (see S4009 in FIG. 58). As a result, the processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so that each processing of the voice lamp control device 113 can be operated normally.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and the number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches it, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure, the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by 1. When the MPU 231 executes the instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory generally has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, high-speed reading is possible for the data on the second and subsequent pages, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-consecutive data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 described later of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and is, for example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to read and write data to and from the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b has one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in one bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. The process of transferring one page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a in the NOR type ROM 234d, specifically, the first program stored in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be executed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and also specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM 234d is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (command code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after the address "0000H" is specified, and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The program storage area of the work RAM 233 for each fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is programmed so that the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 73) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a is stored, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 30) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. By expanding the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 75 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes an image drawing process for the next frame, and also executes a process of displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays an image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, the NAND flash memory facilitates a large capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 by the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display a third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is held without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area for storing the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the game is started by the player while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the upper first entry port 64b1 or the lower first. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a variable image at power-on, which displays the result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 by a variable effect when a ball entering the ball entry port 64b2 is detected.

When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 73).

Here, a variation image when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. 25. In FIG. 25, immediately after the power is turned on by the display control device 114, the power is turned on by the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234. It is explanatory drawing explaining the time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the main image area 235a at power-on, and the main image at power-on shown in FIG. 25 (a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is the instruction command for starting the variation, is received, the display control device 114 displays FIG. 25 (b). On the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, the image of the "x" symbol that fluctuates when the power is turned on is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the fluctuation period. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image shown in FIG. 25 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the variation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", it is shown in FIG. 25 (c). The displayed image is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball is detected in the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2. If this is the case, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 25 (b) and 25 (c) are drawn. Is instructed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 so as to be alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This makes it possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball is detected in the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is set to the third. It can be immediately displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 24, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 26, the range of the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be described. FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a range of four types of rear images and a rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image, and FIG. 26 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing " FIG. 26B shows the back side A corresponding to the "city stage", and the back sides B to D corresponding to the "forest stage", the "river stage", and the "sky stage", respectively. .. Further, FIG. 27 is shown with respect to the back surface E corresponding to the “island stage”.

As shown in FIG. 26, as the rear image corresponding to each of the rear surfaces A to D, an image that is horizontally longer than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A to D (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured so that the back image is continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a'are composed of an image corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The rear image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

When the change of the back type is decided based on the back type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to "city stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "empty stage", MPU231 will be First, the area between the position a and the position a'of the corresponding rear image is set as the initial position of the display area, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image of the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and further displayed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the position a and the position c so as to flow toward the left.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27, the rear image on the back surface E has a third symbol in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) → ... In FIG. 27 with the passage of time. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, on the back surface E, the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed in a fixed position. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color tone of the sky image spreading on the mountain changes with the passage of time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage", the rear image shown in FIG. 27 (a) is displayed as the initial rear image of the rear surface E. In the rear image shown in FIG. 27 (a), an orange sky indicating a morning glow is displayed. Then, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the back image shown in FIG. 27B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 27 (b), a bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black with the lapse of time, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, the back image shown in FIG. 27 (c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 27 (c), a black sky indicating the night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually begins to turn white from black and then changes to orange. Then, after the lapse of a predetermined time, the back image shown in FIG. 27 (a) is returned, and the back images of FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (c) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 again.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 26A, the back surface A corresponding to the city stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 in which all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d are stored. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is played without changing the stage while the initial stage "city stage" is displayed, so the image data on the back A corresponding to the frequently displayed "city stage" is displayed. By making all of them resident in the rear image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the "forest stage", the back surface C corresponding to the "river stage", and the back surface D corresponding to the "empty stage" are a part of the back surface as shown in FIG. 26 (b). That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Further, the back surface E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 27 (a), and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (b) excluding FIG. 27 (b) is obtained after the power is turned on. It is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and is resident in the start-up process.

Here, in order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to make the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images, but if this is done, the resident video RAM 235 will be resident. As a result, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image first displayed when the stage is changed is the range from the position a to the position a'(or the range of FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (b)). ), And the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 27 (a) and 27 (b)) is transferred to the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Since the character ROM 234 is configured to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, when the stage change is decided by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial positions of the back surfaces B to D can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone changes with the passage of time. It can be displayed while making it. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a part of the range of images is stored in the back surfaces B to D, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, on the rear surfaces B to D, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is directed from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. While scrolling, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b'to the image at the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b'to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b'to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Similarly, on the back surface E, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the images of FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. While the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 27 (b) to 27 (c) and 27 (c) to (a) can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, FIG. 27 (a). ) To (b) are set. As a result, while displaying the images of FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (b), the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 27 (b) to (c) and 27 (c) to (a) are normally used. Since it can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images of FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Using the image data corresponding to the rear image, the images of FIGS. 27 (b) to (c) and 27 (c) to (a) are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time. be able to.

In the back surfaces B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 24) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

Further, in the rear surfaces B to D, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the images between the positions b'and b. Image data to be stored is duplicated. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image controller 237 is controlled. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so that the image between the positions a and c flows toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 24, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, is resident. As a result, when performing a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37 after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640, the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variation effect is not immediately started.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", the main symbol consisting of the rear symbol such as a wooden box, the rear symbol and the character such as the furoshiki, the helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the above is also resident. These image data are used for the demo effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. Be done. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed according to various productions, and the data corresponding to these are displayed in the character design area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but is resident. By reading the image data resident in advance in the character symbol area 235e of the video RAM 235, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. Notify the display control device 114 by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 has an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the process of displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used to draw the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a rear image change flag 233w, a rear image discrimination flag 233x, a demo display flag 233y, and a definite display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and an opening effect. , A display data table corresponding to the round effect, ending effect, and demo effect is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A or jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening staging is a staging for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state and the large opening that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round staging will start from now on. It is a production to notify the player of the number of rounds to be performed. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special gaming state.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the game is not performed on the pachinko machine 10.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α-blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is larger than 100%, the sprite will be displayed enlarged from the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed reduced from the standard size. Will be done.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as effects that express the insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is specified for each address. It should be noted that one or a plurality of information regarding the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are obtained with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type is the back A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "city stage", "forest stage", "river stage", "sky stage", and "island stage"). Information is described that specifies whether to display either one or to display a rear image different from the rear images A to E. Further, as the back surface type, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to E, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to E is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A to E as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to E, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In this embodiment, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not the display should be performed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the rear image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be specified as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the lapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the third symbol can be the variation symbol in the previous variation effect or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110. By managing by the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variablely displayed at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 29). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address "02F0H" in which the "End" information is described is made to correspond to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table. The drawn contents are described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 30) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable staging images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of staging images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, is resident among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the image data of the sprite used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 29). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data for which the transfer should be started does not exist at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data for which the transfer should be started does not exist corresponding to the address. All data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 29).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 29, in the example of FIG. 29). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is the display data table. If a transfer data table corresponding to the above exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 30) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 29, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified in the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Bull data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be always stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not to display the power-on images (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) shown in FIGS. 25 (a) to 25 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 73) (see S6005 in FIG. 73). Then, at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 85 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 75 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 75 (b)) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. See S6309 in 75 (b)). On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 85 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 85 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the content of the image drawing instruction for the user. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 30) described later that describes drawing instructions is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Null data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to the later drawing list (see FIG. 30) that describes the content of the image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 moves the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 75 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 84) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 30) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 30, a rear image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Design 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as the symbol 1). In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and the image controller 237 includes various types. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. Processing is performed, composition processing with other sprites is performed according to the α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to the color information, and filtering processing is performed by the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 has a drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and other contents of an image to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can be used according to the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Hold ball number symbol 1, hold ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol 1).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 performs the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list contains this transfer data information, the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information to create an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 75 (b). ) Is executed, the time counting counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 in FIG. 82). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "Off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 86). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 86). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as "drawing target buffer") that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 87).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when the value is "1", it is set to "0". It is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see S6306 in FIG. 75 (b)) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The rear image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the rear image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the rear image is changed, and if it is off, it means that the change is not performed. The rear image change flag 233w is set to on when the rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 81 (a)). Further, the rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 86), and is set to off when the rear image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 86). As a result, it is possible to display the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command and the effect mode change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

The rear image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set rear image type. This flag is composed of, for example, 1 byte, and each back type is associated with each bit. If any bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the rear surface A is set. When the rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to on for the rear image discrimination flag 233x (FIG. 81 (a). ) S7002). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back type can be easily specified.

The demo display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not the demo is being produced. If the demo display flag 233y is on, it means that the demo is being produced, and if it is off, it means that the demo is not being produced. This demo display flag 233y is set to on when the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (see S7221 in FIG. 82), and the demo display data table is set. It is set to off when other display data tables other than are set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 77 (a), S6705 in FIG. 78 (a), S6805 in FIG. 78 (b). , See S6905 in FIG. 79). With this demo display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demo is currently being produced.

The confirmation display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the confirmation display effect is being executed. Here, the definite display effect indicates an effect in which the stop symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the fluctuation pattern. If the definite display flag 233z is on, it means that the definite display effect is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the definite display effect is not in progress. The confirmation display flag 233z is set to on when the confirmation display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (S7214 in FIG. 82), and is other than the confirmation display data table. Set off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 77 (a), S6705 in FIG. 78 (a), S6805 in FIG. 78 (b), FIG. See S6905 in 79). With this confirmation display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the current confirmation display effect is in progress.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 31 to 57. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When it reaches 479,99,232,99, respectively, it clears to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C4, and C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, the start winning process associated with winning the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32 to 47.

After executing the start winning process (S105), a process for displaying on the second symbol display device (not shown) and a process for passing the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 are performed normally. The symbol variation process is executed (S106). The details of the normal symbol variation processing (S106) will be described later with reference to FIG. 48. After the normal symbol variation process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to determine whether to turn on / off the firing. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

First, with reference to FIG. 32, the contents of the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation processing (S104). When the special symbol variation process (S104) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current is a big hit or a small hit (S201), and when it is determined that the current is a big hit or a small hit (S201: Yes). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S202). In the process of S202, it is determined whether the subtraction of the variable time of the other special figure during the change is interrupted by the stop display of one special figure with the symbol indicating the hit. If it is determined in the process of S202 that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S202: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the temporarily stopped special figure is updated. (S203), that is, the process of continuing the variable display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed for the special figure in which the subtraction of the variable time is interrupted, and this process is terminated. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the special figure fluctuation has not been forcibly stopped.

On the other hand, in the processing of S201, when it is determined that the present is a big hit or a small hit (S201: No), is the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m larger than 0 (that is, the special figure 1 changes)? (S204), and if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is not larger than 0 (0) (S204: No), the first special symbol fluctuation start processing is performed. (S208) is executed, and then the process proceeds to S209, which executes the variation processing related to the special figure 2. The details of the first special symbol change start processing (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG. 33.

In the process of S204, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203 m is larger than 0 (S204: Yes), the first special symbol variation executing process (S205) is executed. The first special symbol variation in-execution process (S205) executes the process in the special figure 1 variation, and a detailed description thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 37.

After finishing the first special symbol variation in-execution process (S205), it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the variation time (whether the variation time counter 203m in the special figure 1 is 0) (S206), and the variation time is determined. If it is determined that the end timing is reached (S206: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S207) is executed, and then the process proceeds to S209. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S206 that it is not the end timing of the fluctuation time (S206: No), the processing of S207 is skipped and the process proceeds to S209.

In the processes of S209 to S213, the same processes as those of S204 to S207 executed for the special figure 1 are executed. When the processing of S209 is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is larger than 0 (that is, whether the special figure 2 is changing) (S209), and the special figure 2 change. If it is determined that the value of the time counter 203n is not larger than 0 (0) (S209: No), the second special symbol variation start process (S210) is executed, and then this process ends. The details of the second special symbol change start processing (S210) will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

On the other hand, in the process of S209, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is larger than 0 (S209: Yes), the second special symbol variation executing process (S211) is executed. This second special symbol variation executing process (S211) executes the process during the special figure 2 variation, and will be described later with reference to FIG. 44.

After finishing the second special symbol fluctuation executing process (S211), it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the fluctuation time (whether the fluctuation time counter 203n in the special figure 2 is 0) (S212), and the fluctuation time is set. If it is determined that the end timing is reached (S212: Yes), the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S213) is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S212, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the fluctuation time (S212: No), the process of S213 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the first special symbol variation start process (S208), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change start processing (S208).

In the first special symbol change start processing (S208), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is acquired (S301), and the value of the acquired first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d (N1). ) Is greater than 0 (S302). In the process of S302, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is used. After subtracting 1 (S303), a hold ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the hold ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d after the subtraction is set (S304). ..

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol hold ball number counter of the RAM 223. Store in 223c. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d.

When the processing of S304 is completed, the data of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is then shifted to the previous data (S305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

When the process of S305 is completed, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is then executed (S306). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 34, but the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. This is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not a jackpot is a jackpot based on the set gaming state.

When the processing of S306 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing is next executed (see FIG. 35). Although the details will be described later, this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) is a variation type counter stored in the execution area of the first special symbol winning / failing determination result and the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. This is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on the value of CS1.

When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) is completed, the game state update process is then executed (S308). The details of this game state update process (S308 in FIG. 36) will be described later, but the state of the pachinko machine 10 by updating the state of the probability change flag 203 g and the value of the time saving counter 203f, which indicate the state of the pachinko machine 10. It is a process for updating. When the process of S308 is completed, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S302 that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S302: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, regarding the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), which is one process of the first special symbol change start process (FIG. 33, S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. explain. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, whether or not the jackpot is won in the other special symbol lottery during the period in which the fluctuation display (big hit fluctuation) in which the jackpot is won in one of the special symbols is executed. It is configured so that no discrimination is made.

In other words, in a state where it is confirmed that the jackpot game will be executed after a predetermined period (after the fluctuation time has elapsed) by one special symbol lottery, the jackpot will be won by the other special symbol lottery, and multiple times in a short period of time. It is configured to prevent the jackpot from being won and giving excessive benefits.

In this way, the process of acquiring various counter values is performed in the same manner as in the normal special symbol lottery, the determination based on the various counter values acquired in the process is skipped, and the outlier symbol is set. It is possible to respond quickly to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired (S401). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S402). That is, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in a high probability state (probability change state, latent probability state). When it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is on (that is, the probability variation state of the special symbol) (S402: Yes), the random number value that becomes the jackpot specified in the first random number table 202a for high probability time. And whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer matches, and the determination result (lottery result) is acquired (S403). On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S402 that the probability variation flag 203g is off (that is, it is a low probability state of the special symbol) (S402: No), the first random number table 202a for the low probability time is displayed. It is determined whether or not the specified random number value that becomes a big hit and the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer match, and the lottery result is acquired (S404).

Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag 202i is on (S405). If it is determined that it is not on (that is, it is off) (S405: No), it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in S403 or S404 is a big hit (S406), and if the lottery result is a big hit (S406). S406: Yes), the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON for the first special symbol (S407), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to the jackpot (S408). Then, based on the acquired value of the hit type counter, the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S409), and the value corresponding to the current gaming state is set in the winning state storage area. It is stored in 203j (S410), 1 is set in the time saving counter 203f (S411), and this processing is terminated.

Here, by setting the value of the time reduction counter 203f to 1 in the processing of S411, the first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see S306 in FIG. 34) in the first special symbol fluctuation start processing (see S208 in FIG. 33). In the game state update process (S308) executed later than the above, the high probability state of the normal symbol can be shifted to the low probability state. As a result, when a jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol, it is possible to set a low probability state of the normal symbol at the timing when the jackpot fluctuation starts. Therefore, it is possible to shift the probabilistic state to the latent probable state by winning the jackpot of the first special symbol while the probabilistic state is set.

Further, by performing the process of setting the value of the time reduction counter 203f to 1 in the process of S411, the process of shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state on condition that the jackpot is won, and the special symbol. Both the process of shifting the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state and the process of shifting the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state on condition that the number of fluctuations of the above reaches a predetermined number of times can be executed by using the game state update process (S308). As a result, even when a plurality of conditions for terminating the high-probability state of the normal symbol are provided, it is possible to prevent the processing of the main control device 110 from becoming complicated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S405, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is on (S405: Yes), or in the processing of S406, when it is determined that the lottery result is out of order (S406: No), the out-of-order symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S412), and then this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S208 in FIG. 33), will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 35), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 34), the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot, that is, the first. 1 It is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is set (S501). Here, the determination as to whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is on. The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON in the process of S407 in the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34).

When it is determined in the process of S501 that the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S501: Yes), the first obtained in the process of S401 in the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34). Based on the value of the per-type counter C2, the jackpot type is determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A) (S502), and the process proceeds to S503.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S501 that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of order (that is, the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is off) (S501: No), the processing of S502 is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S503.

In the process of S503, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (S503). Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 17 to 19) according to the gaming state is read out (S504), and the process proceeds to S505. The gaming state is determined based on the state of the probability change flag 203g and the value of the time reduction counter 203f. In the process of S505, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S505), and then the special figure 1 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern (S505). S506).

When the processing of S506 is completed, the special figure 1 stop type command indicating the stop symbol is set (S507), then the change start of the first special symbol is set by the first symbol display device 37 (S508), and the processing of S505 is completed. A value indicating the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in 1 is set in the fluctuation time counter 203m in Special Figure 1 (S509), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a game state update process (S308), which is one process of the first special symbol change start process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this game state update process (S308). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the state of the probability change flag 203g, which is a condition for setting the gaming state, and the value of the time saving counter 203f, only the value of the time saving counter 203f is updated at the start of the change of the special symbol. In addition, in the game state update process (see FIG. 36), which is one of the first special symbol change start processes (see FIG. 33), the process of updating the value of the time saving counter 203f is configured to be executed.

The probability variation flag 203g, which will be described in detail later, is set to off when the jackpot fluctuation ends and the special symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed (when the jackpot game is executed). It is configured as follows.

That is, one of the two conditional elements (the state of the probability change flag 203g and the value of the time reduction counter 203f) referred to when setting the game state is updated at the start of the change of the special symbol, and the other conditional elements. By making it possible to update when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, it is possible to easily diversify the gaming state set by combining the two conditional elements. In addition, since it is possible to set a specific gaming state (for example, latent state) only during the period from the start to the end of the change of the special symbol, it is advantageous for the player only during the predetermined period. It is possible to set the game state.

When the game state update process (see FIG. 36) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203f is larger than 0 (S601). If it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 0 (S601: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203f is larger than 0 (S601: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S602), and the remaining time saving number command indicating the value of the time saving counter 203f is set. (S603). Next, it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 0 (S604), if it is determined to be 0 (S604: Yes), and then it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S605). ). Here, when it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is set to ON (S605: Yes), it is a probability change state (that is, a latent state) in which the time saving game is not given, so that the latent state is indicated. A status command is set (S606), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S605, when it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is not set to ON (S605: No), since it is a normal state, a state command indicating the normal state is set (S607), and this process is performed. To finish.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S604 that the value of the time reduction counter 203f is not 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is.

In this embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set until the next big hit of the special symbol is won (until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination indicating the big hit). In addition to this, for example, a probability change counter is provided in place of the probability change flag 203 g, and the value of the probability change counter is subtracted each time a change of a special symbol is executed, and the value of the probability change counter becomes 0. In some cases, it may be configured to shift the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state.

When such a configuration is used, the game state update process (S308) shown with reference to FIG. 36 is set as the game state update process at the start of the special figure change, and separately at the timing when the change display of the special symbol ends. By providing the game state update process when the special symbol fluctuation is stopped to update the value of the probability change counter, the process of determining whether to end the high probability state of the special symbol and whether to end the high probability state of the normal symbol It is possible to execute the process of determining whether or not at a different timing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the content of the first special symbol variation executing process (S205) executed in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. I will explain. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation executing process (S205). In the first special symbol variation executing process (S205), when the subtraction of the variation time of the special figure 1 is interrupted, the process of restarting the subtraction and the process of subtracting the variation time are executed.

When the first special symbol variation executing process (S205) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S701). Here, a case where this process is executed with the temporary stop flag 203v of Special Figure 1 set to ON will be briefly described. As described above, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to on when the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a hit (small hit) while the special figure 1 is changing. Then, when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON, the jackpot middle flag 203o is set to ON in the process, so that the timer interrupt executed every 2 milliseconds by the main controller 110 is performed. When the process loops and the next special symbol variation process (FIG. 32) is executed (after 2 milliseconds when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON), the process of S201 is a big hit. Therefore, the first special symbol variation executing process (S205) is not executed. Then, when the big hit game (or small hit game) is completed and it is determined in the process of S201 that the game is not during the big hit (or during the small hit), the first special symbol variation executing process (S205) is executed. It will be. With this configuration, the big hit (or small hit) game is in the state where the first special symbol change executing process (S205) is executed while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON. It is configured so that it is the timing to restart the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation, which has been completed and the subtraction of the fluctuation time has been suspended.

Returning to FIG. 37, the explanation will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S701 that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S701: Yes), then the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command is set (S702), and the special figure 1 provisional stop flag 203v is set. The stop flag 203v is set to off (S703), and the process proceeds to S704. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S701 that the temporary stop flag 203v in FIG. 1 is not set to on (set to off) (S701: No), the processing of S702 and S703 is skipped and S704 is performed. Move to the processing of.

In the process of S704, the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203 m is decremented by 1 and updated (S704), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S705), and the present process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207), which is one of the special symbol variation processing (S104 in FIG. 32), will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207).

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON for the first special symbol (special figure 1) (S801). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to on for the first special symbol (S801: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to on (S802), and the special figure is set. 2 A special figure 2 indicating that the fluctuation stop flag 203s is turned on is set (S803). Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed with a detached symbol (S804).

When the processing of S804 is completed, the jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S805), and the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h, the probability variation flag 203g, and the time saving counter 203f are reset (S806). Next, the jackpot middle flag 203o is set to ON (S807), and the process proceeds to S808.

On the other hand, in the process of S801, if the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to off for the first special symbol (S801: No), the processes of S802 to S807 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S808.

In the process of S808, a special figure 1 confirmation command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the first special symbol is confirmed and stopped is set (S808). After that, a process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is variablely displayed by the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S809), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the first special symbol stop process (S207), the process (S802 to S809) of stopping the variation display with the symbol showing the determination result of the first lottery game is executed. Further, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a big hit (S801: Yes), the process of forcibly stopping the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner (S803, S804) is executed.

In the first embodiment, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed by the jackpot symbol, the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is forcibly stopped and displayed by the off symbol. It is not limited to. For example, at the time when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol may be interrupted (temporarily stopped). Then, after the jackpot of the first special symbol is completed, the variable display of the second special symbol may be restarted. As a result, it is possible to produce a natural aspect as compared with the case where the engine is forcibly stopped due to disengagement. Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot scenario is set in the process of S805 based on the game state stored in the winning state storage area 203j in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34). For example, a jackpot scenario is set in the process of S805 based on the game state stored in the winning state storage area 203j in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) using the opening period of the jackpot game. You may try to do it.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the contents of the second special symbol change start process (S210) executed in the special symbol change process (FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol change start processing (S210). In the second special symbol change start processing (S210), a process for starting the change of the special figure 2 is executed. It should be noted that, in response to the above-mentioned processing related to the change of the first special symbol with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46, the object of the change is simply changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. The detailed description of the element will be omitted.

In the second special symbol change start processing (S210), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 change stop flag 203s is set to ON (S901). When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to on (S901: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to off (S902), and this process is terminated. As described above, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is a flag that is set to be turned on while displaying the stop of the second special symbol with the stop symbol corresponding to the deviation when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol ends. .. That is, if the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is on, it means that the jackpot is started, so that the fluctuation start of the second special symbol should not be set. Therefore, when the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is turned on in the processing of S901, the main processing is terminated as it is without executing each processing of S902 to S907 for setting the fluctuation start.

On the other hand, in the process of S901, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to off (that is, not set to on) (S901: No), the second special symbol execution area 203b Data (various counter values) are acquired (S903). Next, based on the data acquired in the process of S903, it is determined whether or not there is the acquired data (S904). That is, when it is determined that there is no data in the second special symbol execution area 203b (S904: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S903, when it is determined that there is data (S904: Yes), the second special symbol jackpot determination process for executing the jackpot determination of the second special symbol based on each stored counter value is performed. Execute (S905). The details of the second special symbol jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40.

After the processing of S905 is completed, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process for selecting the variation pattern is executed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol and the data acquired in the process of S903 (S906). .. The details of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906) will be described later with reference to FIG. 42. After the process of S906 is completed, the above-mentioned game state update process (see FIG. 36) is executed (S907), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, regarding the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905), which is one process of the second special symbol change start process (S210 in FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. explain. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905).

In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905), the same process as the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) is executed, so that the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) is performed. The differences between the above will be mainly explained.

When the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905) is executed, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b is acquired (S1001). Then, the processes of S1002 to S1004 for acquiring the lottery result of whether or not it is a big hit are executed based on each acquired counter value and the state of the probability variation flag 203g. Each of these processes differs from the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) except that the counter value used for the lottery (determination) is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b. Control is executed.

When the processing of S1003 or S1004 is completed, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S1005). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is not set to ON (S1005: No), it is determined whether or not the acquired lottery result is a jackpot (S1006), and it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot. (S1006: Yes) executes the processes of S1007 to S1010 for setting the lottery result of the second special symbol as a big hit, and ends this process. In each of these processes S1007 to S1010, the same process as each process of S407 to S410 for setting the lottery result of the first special symbol to the jackpot is executed in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34), respectively. Will be done.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1005 that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S1005: Yes), or if the lottery result of the second special symbol acquired in the processing of S1006 is not a jackpot. If it is determined (S1006: No), the special figure 2 deviation variation processing for setting the small hit of the second special symbol or the stop symbol corresponding to the deviation is executed (S1011), and this processing is terminated. The details of the special figure 2 deviation variation processing (S1011) will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this special drawing 2 deviation processing (S1011).

In the special figure 2 deviation variation processing (S1011), first, it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in the processing of S1003 or S1004 of FIG. 40 is a small hit of the second special symbol (S1101), and the lottery result is a small hit. (S1101: Yes), the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1102), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to the small hit (S1103). Then, the small hit symbol indicating the small hit type corresponding to the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is set as the stop symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S1104), and the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1101 that the lottery result is out of order (S1101: No), the out-of-order symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1105), and then. This process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906), which is one of the second special symbol variation start processes (S210 in FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Will be explained. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906).

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906 in FIG. 42), first, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b (S1201). Next, in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905 in FIG. 40), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the jackpot of the second special symbol is set. (S1202). Here, the determination as to whether or not the jackpot is a big hit is determined by whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is turned on for the second special symbol. The special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON in the process of S1007 in the above-mentioned second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40).

In the process of S1202, when it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is set (S1202: Yes), the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 17 and 19) corresponding to the current gaming state is read out. (S1203). Then, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S1001 in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40) described above, the jackpot from the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A). The type is determined (S1204).

When the processing of S1204 is completed, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S1205), and then the special figure 2 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern. (S1206). Then, the process proceeds to S1208.

On the other hand, in the process of S1202, when it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is not set (S1202: No), the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (S1207) is executed, and the process of S1208 is performed. Transition.

In the process of S1208, a special figure 2 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (S1208). Next, the first symbol display device 37 sets the variation start of the second special symbol (S1209), and the value indicating the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the processing of S1205 is set in the special figure 2 variation time counter 203n (S1209). S1210), this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the special FIG. 2 deviation pattern selection process (S1207) will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 deviation pattern selection process (S1207).

In the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (S1207 in FIG. 43), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (S1301). Here, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1301). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is on (S1301: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b (S1302). Then, the small hit type is selected based on the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5 and the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16B) (S1303).

Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 17 to 19) corresponding to the current gaming state is read (S1304), and the variation pattern of the small hit corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is read from the read variation pattern selection table. Is selected (S1305). After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command indicating the selected small hit fluctuation pattern is set (S1306), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1301, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a small hit (that is, it is out of order) (S1301: No), the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the current gaming state (FIG. 17 and FIG. 19) are read (S1307), and an outlier variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S1308). After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is set (S1309) based on the selected deviation pattern, and the present process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the second special symbol variation executing process (S211), which is one of the processes in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Explain the contents. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation executing process (S211). In the second special symbol variation executing process (S211), when the subtraction of the variation time of the special figure 2 is interrupted, the process of restarting the subtraction and the process of subtracting the variation time are executed.

When the second special symbol change execution processing (S211) is executed, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is subtracted by 1 and updated (S1401), and the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. Is updated (S1402), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the contents of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S213). The second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S213) executes the processing for stopping the fluctuation of the special figure 2.

When the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S213) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to on (S1501), and the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to on. (S1501: Yes), a special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating the stop of the special figure 1 fluctuation is set (S1503). Next, when the processing of S1503 is completed, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed with a detached symbol (S1504). Next, a jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S1505), and the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i, the probability variation flag 203g, and the time saving counter 203f are reset (S1506). Next, the jackpot middle flag 203o is set to ON (S1507), and the process proceeds to S1509.

In the process of S1509, a special figure 2 confirmation command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the second special symbol is confirmed and stopped is set (S1509). After that, a process of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol that is variablely displayed by the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1510), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1501, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is not set to ON (S1501: No), the special figure 2 disengagement stop process is executed (S1508), and the above-mentioned S1509 and S1510 are executed. Process is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, a special figure 2 out-of-order stop process (S1508), which is one process of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S213 in FIG. 45), will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the special drawing 2 disengagement stop process (S1508). In this special figure 2 loss stop process (S1508), when the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is other than a big hit (small hit, miss), the special figure 2 indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a small hit, the process for temporarily stopping the change of the special figure 1 being executed is executed.

In the special figure 2 disengagement stop process (S1508), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1601). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1601: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S1602). Next, a special figure 1 temporary stop command indicating that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is turned on is set (S1603).

When the processing of S1603 is completed, a small hit scenario based on the selected small hit type is set (S1604). After that, the small hit flag 203k is set to off (S1605), and the small hit medium flag 203p is set to on (S1606).

When the processing of S1606 is completed, the special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the second special symbol is set (S1607). After that, the second special symbol, which is variablely displayed by the first symbol display device 37, is stopped to change at the small hit symbol (S1608), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1601 that the small hit flag 203k is off (that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order) (S1601: No), the second special symbol is fixedly stopped. A special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to do so is set (S1609). After that, the second special symbol that is variablely displayed by the first symbol display device 37 is deviated and stops variable at the symbol (S1610), and this process is terminated.

As described above, since the control of the variation display between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is independently and can be executed in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are varied at the same time. It can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to execute a lottery game with more special symbols within a predetermined time, and it is possible to increase the probability that the player will be given a big hit within the predetermined time. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

In this embodiment, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be configured to be variablely displayed in a state where the temporary stop or the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted. In such a case, the temporarily stopped special symbol is stopped in a display mode or a notification mode in which the player can know that the temporary stop is in progress, so that the player loses the lottery game that was in the middle of the variable display. You can know that you haven't done so, and you can play big hit games with confidence.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, a start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105 in FIG. 47) determines whether or not a game ball has entered (winned) in the first entry opening (first starting opening) 64, and if it has entered (winning), it is suspended. This is a process of storing each of the acquired counter values in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a up to the upper limit number (up to four in the first ball entry port 64). Further, when each counter value acquired based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, it is based on each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. , A process of predicting a hit / fail determination result, a selected fluctuation pattern, or the like is executed in advance. Hereinafter, the start winning process (S105) will be described.

In the start winning process (S105), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the first entry port 64 (starting winning), which is the first starting opening (S1701). Here, the determination is made using the detection result of the first ball entry switch (not shown) that detects the ball entry into the first ball entry port 64. When it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64 (there was a start prize) (S1701: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S1702). ). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703). It is determined whether this is less than 4, which is the upper limit of the number of reserved balls for the first ball entry port 64 (that is, whether the number of reserved balls is stored up to the upper limit). If it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (S1704). A hold ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the number of hold balls is set (S1705). Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 which are various counter values is read (acquired) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 is read. Each is reserved (stored) in the storage area of the corresponding number of reserved balls (S1706).

Next, based on each stored counter value, the hit / fail determination result of the first special symbol, the determined hit type, and the fluctuation pattern are predicted (S1707). Then, a winning information command including the predicted winning / failing determination result of the first special symbol, the winning type, and the fluctuation pattern is set (S1708), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins a prize in the first start opening (first entry opening) 64 and is newly reserved and stored, the winning / failing determination result is based on the reserved storage information. Is determined before the start of fluctuation and notified to the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, the display mode of the hold ball can be changed (for example, the color of the hold ball can be changed to a different color than usual) based on the hold-stored hit / fail determination result, or before the change starts. It is possible to display a notice symbol or the like and perform an effect of suggesting a winning / failing determination result to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and the variation display and variation time of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83, the lower first ball entry port 64b2. This is a process for controlling the opening operation, opening time, and the like of the electric accessory 64a accompanying the above.

In this normal symbol variation processing (S106 in FIG. 48), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S1801). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entrance ball opening 64b2 is performed while the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the hit. Includes what is being done. As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S1801: Yes), a new normal symbol change (lottery) cannot be started (executed), so that it is as it is. This process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S1801: No), then whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (normal symbol is changing). When it is determined (S1802) and it is determined that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is not changing (normal symbol changing) (S1802: No), that is, even if the normal symbol is currently hit, the normal symbol changes. If it is determined that there is no such state, that is, it is possible to start (execute) a new normal symbol change (lottery), data (random number per second) is stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. It is determined whether or not the counter C4 value) is stored (S1804), and if the data is not stored (S1804: No), the lottery for normal symbols cannot be executed, so this process is terminated as it is. ..

On the other hand, in the process of S1804, when it is determined that the data is stored in the execution area (S1804: Yes), the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. (S1807). Then, based on the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S1807 and the random number table 202c per ordinary symbol (second), the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is a hit is acquired (S1808). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c. As described above, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 10", it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit and the normal symbol is hit. When the high probability state is set, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 231", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "232", it is determined to be a hit. It is determined that the design is out of the ordinary pattern.

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S1808 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S1809), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S1809: Yes), it is a hit. (S1810), and the process proceeds to S1811. In the process of S1810, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "○" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

On the other hand, in the process of S1809, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S1809: No), the display mode at the time of out of alignment is set (S1812), and the process proceeds to S1811. In the process of S1812, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S1811.

When the processing of S1810 or S1812 is completed, in the processing of S1811, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol (S1811), and the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol. When it is determined that the condition is (S1811: Yes), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device is set to 3 seconds (S1813), and then the normal symbol short fluctuation flag 203t is set to ON. (S1814), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol (it is the low probability state of the normal symbol) (S1811: No), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device. Is set to 10 seconds (S1815), and this process is terminated.

The short fluctuation flag 203t of the normal symbol set to be turned on in the process of S1814 is a configuration for temporarily storing the game state at the timing when the lottery of the normal symbol is executed, and the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped. It is displayed and referred to when setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a. As a result, it is possible to change the opening operation content of the electric accessory 64a according to which gaming state the normal symbol change (lottery) start timing and the opening operation timing of the electric accessory 64a are.

In the present embodiment, the game state at the start (execution) timing of the fluctuation (lottery) of the normal symbol is configured to be temporarily stored by using a dedicated flag, but other configurations may be used. For example, when it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol is a hit in the game state storage means that can always store the currently set game state, the game state when the lottery of the normal symbol is executed is determined. It may be configured to provide a storage area for temporary storage. Furthermore, a means for always storing the period in which the normal state is set is provided, and the period stored in the means (the period in which the normal state is set) is compared with the timing when the lottery of the normal symbol is performed. By doing so, it may be configured so that the gaming state at the timing when the lottery of ordinary symbols is performed can be determined. That is, the configuration may be such that a storage means capable of storing the currently set gaming state and a storage means capable of storing at least the gaming state set at a predetermined timing in the past are provided.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1802 that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S1802: Yes), the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S1816). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S1810 or the process of S1812 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

If it is determined in the process of S1813 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S1816: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1816, if it is determined that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S1816: Yes), then the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S1817). In the processing of S1817, the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win, and if the display mode is set by the processing of S1810, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighting display) in the second symbol display device. ) Is set to be done. On the other hand, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is out of order and the display mode is set by the processing of S1812, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. Is set. The period during which the second symbol is stopped and displayed is longer than the period during which one part of the blinking display (alternate display of "○" and "×") indicating that the second symbol is changing is turned on. It is configured to be (confirmed display). This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp that the second symbol has been stopped and displayed.

When the stop display is set by the process of S1817, and then the second symbol display update process (S2208 of FIG. 52) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed, the variable display in the second symbol display device is executed. Is completed, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S1810 or the process of S1812.

After finishing the processing of S1817, next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation processing (S106) (this lottery result). However, it is determined whether or not it is a hit of a normal symbol (S1818). If it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S1818: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S1818: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the short fluctuation flag 203t of the normal figure is set to ON (S1819).

In the process of S1819, when it is determined that the normal figure short fluctuation flag 203t is not set on (set to off), that is, the gaming state at the timing when the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol this time is started is When it is determined that the state is normal (S1819: No), the opening time of the electric accessory 64a is set to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S1824), and the process proceeds to S1823. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S1819, when it is determined that the normal figure short fluctuation flag 203t is set to ON, that is, it is determined that the gaming state at the timing when the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol this time is started is the time saving state. If this is the case (S1819: Yes), the short fluctuation flag 203t is set to off (S1820), and then it is determined whether the current gaming state is the time saving state (time saving) (S1821).

In the process of S1821, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the time saving state (S1821: No), the gaming state at the timing when the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol this time is started is the normal state, and the current gaming state (S1821: No). Since the timing for setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a) is in the normal state, the opening period of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entry port 64b2 is set to 0.2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set. It is set to once (S1824), and the process proceeds to S1823.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the time saving state (S1821: Yes), the timing at which the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol this time is started, and the current gaming state (opening operation of the electric accessory 64a). (Timing to set) is both in a short time state, so the opening period of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entry port 64b2 is set to 2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (electric accessory). The long opening operation of 64a is set) (S1822), and the process proceeds to S1823.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the lottery (variation) of the ordinary symbol is executed, the timing at which the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a executed based on the winning of the ordinary symbol is set, and the timing are set. Only when both of them are in the time saving state, the opening operation (long opening) which is advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a.

With this configuration, it is possible to strictly set the conditions under which the opening operation that is advantageous to the player is set. Therefore, for example, a lottery of ordinary symbols is performed in a state where the normal state is set as the game state (for example). Even if the time reduction state is set before the fluctuation time (10 seconds) of the normal symbol is set after the execution of the fluctuation) is executed and the winning is won, the long opening is set as the operation of the electric accessory 64a. There is no such thing. Similarly, in the change of the normal symbol (lottery) executed in the state where the time saving state is set, the winner is won, and the normal state is set as the game state until the change of the normal symbol stops. Even in this case, the long opening of the electric accessory 64a is not set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous privilege (long opening of the electric accessory 64a).

Further, since it is possible to prevent the electric accessory 64a from being opened for a long time in a state where the normal state is set as the game state, it is easy to execute a lottery of a special symbol (second special symbol) advantageous to the player. The period can be limited to the time saving state. In this embodiment, the game state is determined between the timing when the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol is started and the timing when the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a is set, and the game state is set at each timing. The above-mentioned configuration is used as the configuration for setting the opening operation content of the electric accessory 64a based on the above, but other configurations may be used.

For example, the opening operation that is disadvantageous to the player only when both the timing when the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol is started and the timing when the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a is set are in the normal state (S1824 in FIG. 48). (Opening operation set in S1822) may be set (short opening is set), and long opening (opening operation set in S1822 in FIG. 48) may be set in other states. With this configuration, a privilege (long opening) that is advantageous to the player is provided even for normal symbol fluctuations that are executed during the period before and after the time saving state, which is the gaming state that is advantageous to the player, is set. Therefore, it is possible to make the time saving state more advantageous to the player.

In this way, while the time saving state is set as the game state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is very short, "10 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case where the normal state is set, and further. Since the opening period of the lower first entry port 64b2 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", it is easy for the ball to enter the lower first entry port 64b2. Become. In this embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed, the time saving state is configured to end, so that the normal state is reached during the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the small hit game is executed, the time reduction state is continuously set unless the time reduction end condition is satisfied, so that the small hit state is executed while the time reduction state is set. During the winning game, the first variable winning device 65 is opened and the electric accessory 64a is opened for a long time in the small hit game, and a plurality of winning openings (first specific winning opening 65a, lower first winning opening) are opened. It will be a specific period during which it will be easier for the ball to enter 64b2).

By using such a configuration, for example, instead of the configuration of the game board 13 shown in FIG. 2, an electric accessory 64a and a lower first ball entry port 64b2 are arranged above the first variable winning device 65. , It is preferable to configure the ball to enter two winning openings (specific winning opening 65a, lower first entry opening 64b2) during the small hit game, whereby the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the small hit game. Can be increased, and it becomes possible to give more advantageous benefits to the player.

Returning to FIG. 48, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S1820, the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entry port 64b2 is set (S1823), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64a is set by the process of S1823, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S2206) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed, the opening / closing of the electric accessory is performed. The control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S1824 or the process of S1822 are completed.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, and the game ball has passed. If there is, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process (S107 in FIG. 49), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S1901). Here, the passage of the game ball at the normal entry port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S1901: Yes), the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203e (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S1902). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S1903).

Whether the game ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S1901: No), or even if the game ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol reserved ball count counter If the value (M) of 203e is not less than 4 (S1903: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S1901: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S1903: Yes), it is normal. The value (M) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is added by 1 (S1904).

When the processing of S1904 is completed, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) described above is set to the empty holding area (holding first) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the first area (S1905) of the area (4th area on hold), and this process is terminated. In the process of S1905, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 1, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special symbol is set to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery based on the first special symbol. Therefore, the state in which the ball can enter the lower first entry slot 64b2 provided by winning the lottery result of the normal symbol (second symbol) is an advantageous gaming state as compared with the normal gaming state. ..

By indicating the timing at which such a gaming state is provided based on the preliminary determination result of the normal drawing, the player can play the game without overlooking the gaming state which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. In addition, when the effect is performed using such a pre-judgment result of the normal figure, not only the effect based on the result of the hit / miss judgment of the normal figure but also the electric accessory 64a when the normal figure is judged to be a hit is opened. It is good to perform a production that suggests the timing. By doing so, in the normal game state, the game is performed aiming at the game area on the left side of the game board 13, and the lower first entry slot 64b2 (the entry slot to which the electric accessory 64a is attached) is the game board 13. Even if it is arranged on the right side of the game, it is possible to switch to a game aiming at the right side of the game board 13 (so-called right-handed) before the electric accessory 64a opens, which is a normal game state. However, there is an effect that the possibility that the ball enters the lower first entry port 64b2 can be increased.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power disconnection occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S2001) as a setting of the power supply disconnection occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 51), first, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed (S2101). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S2102). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S2103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch (see FIG. 12) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S2104), and if it is turned on (S2104: Yes), the process shifts to S2110. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch (see FIG. 12) is not turned on (S2104: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2105), and if it is not stored (S2105). S2105: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S2110 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S2106), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S2107: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and even in such a case, the process is transferred to S2110. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S2110, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S2110). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S2111, S2112) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch (FIG. 12). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 12) is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 initialization process (S2111, S2112) is executed.

Further, the initialization process (S2111, S2112) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S2111, S2112), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S2111), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S2112). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S2113.

On the other hand, the RAM erase switch (FIG. 12) is not turned on (S2104: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S2105: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. If there is (S2107: Yes), the power cutoff occurrence information is cleared while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S2108). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff is transmitted (S2109), and the process proceeds to S2113. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S2113). After that, the state of the probability change flag 203g and each value of the time saving counter 203f are read (S2114), and a state command is set based on the read counter value (S2115). When the processing of S2115 is completed, the interrupt is permitted (S2116), and the process proceeds to the main processing described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the counter update process and the power cutoff process are roughly classified.

In the main processing, first, in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is input to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side. ) Is executed (S2201).

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S2202). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S2203) and executed. The jackpot control process is executed (S2204). The jackpot control process (S2204) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 53, but a process for setting the operation of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 in the jackpot game is executed.

After the big hit control process (S2204) is executed, the small hit control process (S2205) is executed. This small hit control process (S2205) will be described later with reference to FIG. 55. After that, the electric accessory opening / closing process is executed (S2206). In this electric accessory opening / closing process (S2206), the opening / closing process of the electric accessory 64a is executed. After that, the display update process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S2207).

Next, the display update process of the second symbol (for example, the symbol of “◯” or “×”) by the second symbol display device is executed (S2208). Briefly, on condition that the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device is used. The variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is carried out. Then, a lottery for the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is carried out based on the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is in the winning state, the electric accessory 64a is released for a predetermined time.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2209), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S2209: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S2210). If a predetermined time (4 ms) has already passed (S2210: Yes), the process is shifted to S2201 and each process after S2201 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S2210: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S2211, S2212).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S2211). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479, 232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S2202 (S2212).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S2201 to S2208 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and is displayed variable. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the process of S2209, if the power off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2209: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing shown in FIG. 50 has been executed, the processing at the time of power cutoff after S2213 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S2213), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S2214). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S2215), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S2216), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S2209 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S2201 to S2208, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S2211 and S2212 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cutoff state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S2201. That is, the process can be started from the process of S2201 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S2101). By setting a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S2201. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S2204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S2204). This jackpot control process (S2204) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 52), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and the first specific prize is won. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large open mouth) 65a and the second specific winning mouth 650a.

In the jackpot control process (S2204), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot scenario is set (S2301). If it is determined that the jackpot scenario has not been set (S2301: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2301 that the jackpot scenario is set (S2301: Yes), the jackpot scenario is updated (S2302), and it is determined whether it is the timing to start the opening of the jackpot scenario (S2303). .. More specifically, in the processing of S2302, 1 is added to the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown), and in the processing of S2303, the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown) starts the opening of the jackpot scenario. Determine if the value corresponds to.

In the process of S2303, if it is determined that it is the timing of the opening start (big hit start) of the jackpot scenario (S2303: Yes), the jackpot opening command is set (S2304), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the opening start timing of the jackpot scenario (S2303: No), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2305).

In the process of S2305, if it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2305: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process for setting the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 650a during the jackpot is executed (S2305: Yes). S2306), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2305 that it is not the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2305: No), then it is determined whether the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S2305: No). S2307). Here, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are won in total while the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is open, or the first. When the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a has elapsed for a predetermined time (30 seconds), it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied (S2307: Yes), the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a currently open in the process of S2308 is set to be closed. This process ends. The discrimination process from S2305 to S2307 described above is repeatedly executed for the number of rounds of the jackpot set in the jackpot scenario.

On the other hand, in the process of S2307, when it is determined that the round end condition of the currently executed round is not satisfied (S2307: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S2309), and the ending effect is produced. If it is the start timing of (S2309: Yes), the ending command for big hit is set (S2310), and this process is terminated. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the process of S2309, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2309: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S2311). Here, the end timing of the jackpot indicates a case where the execution period of the ending effect has elapsed. If it is determined in the process of S2311 that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S2311: Yes), the jackpot end process for setting the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is executed (S2312), and this process is terminated. The details of this jackpot end process (S2312) will be described later with reference to FIG. 54. On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the jackpot (S2311: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the jackpot end process (S2312), which is one of the jackpot control processes (S2204 in FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. As described above, this jackpot end process (S2312) is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end processing (S2312).

In the jackpot end process (S2312), first, the game state at the time of winning is specified based on the state storage area 203j at the time of winning (S2401). Next, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a probability variation jackpot (a jackpot type in which the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON after the jackpot game ends) (S2402). Here, in the process of S2402, the determination is performed based on the jackpot type set this time. In the process of S2402, if it is determined that the current jackpot is a probability variation jackpot (S2402: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S2403), and the process proceeds to S2404. On the other hand, in the process of S2402, if it is determined that the current jackpot is not a probabilistic jackpot (S2402: No), the process of S2403 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2404. As a result, a low probability state of the special symbol is set as the game state after the big hit.

Next, the value corresponding to the game state at the time of winning read by the process of S2401 and the jackpot type is set in the time reduction counter 203f (S2404). Specifically, when "big hit A" is set as the big hit type, "10000" is set to the value of the time reduction counter 203f in order to continue the high probability state of the normal symbol until the next big hit, and "big hit B". Is set, "100" is set in the value of the time reduction counter 203f in order to continue the high probability state of the normal symbol until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 100 times.

After finishing the processing of S2404, the jackpot middle flag 203o is set to off, and the winning state storage area 203j is cleared (S2405). After that, a state command corresponding to the set game state is set (S2406), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot type of the jackpot won this time and the gaming state at the time of winning are determined, and two conditional elements for setting the gaming state after the jackpot game ends. It is configured to set the contents of (probability change flag 203g, time reduction counter 203f). Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to both the jackpot type of the winning jackpot and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot.

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, a small hit control process (S2205), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the contents of this small hit control process (S2205).

In the small hit control process (S2205), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit scenario is set (S2501). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the process of S1604 of the special figure 2 out-of-order stop process (see FIG. 46) is executed and the small hit scenario is set. If the small hit scenario is not set in the process of S2501 (S2501: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the small hit scenario is set in the process of S2501 (S2501: Yes), the small hit scenario is updated (S2502), and it is determined whether it is the timing to start the opening of the small hit scenario (S2503). More specifically, in the processing of S2502, 1 is added to the counter value of the small hit scenario counter (not shown), and in the processing of S2503, the counter value of the small hit scenario counter (not shown) is the small hit scenario. Determine if the value corresponds to the opening start of.

In the process of S2503, if it is determined that it is the timing to start the opening of the small hit scenario (S2503: Yes), the opening command for the small hit is set (S2504), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening start of the small hit scenario (S2503: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing of the round start of the small hit scenario (S2505).

If it is determined in the process of S2505 that it is the timing to start the round of the small hit scenario (S2505: Yes), the small hit operation setting process is executed (S2506), and this process is terminated. The details of the small hit operation setting process (S2506) will be described later with reference to FIG. 56. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing of the round start of the small hit scenario (S2505: No), then it is determined whether the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S2507). Here, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined number (for example, 5) of balls are won in total while the specific winning opening 65a is open, or when the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a elapses for a predetermined time. If so, it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied.

If it is determined in the process of S2507 that the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S2507: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed in the process of S2508, and this process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round end condition of the specific winning opening 65a is not satisfied (S2507: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending effect (S2509).

If it is determined in the process of S2509 that it is the timing to start the ending effect (S2509: Yes), the ending command for small hits is set (S2510), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the process of S2509, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2509: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the small hit (S2511). Here, the end timing of the small hit indicates the case where the execution period of the ending effect has elapsed.

If it is determined in the process of S2511 that it is the end timing of the small hit (S2511: Yes), the small hit medium flag 203p is set to off (S2512), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the small hit (S2511: No), the second winning process is executed (S2513), and this process is terminated. The details of this second winning process (S2513) will be described later with reference to FIG. 57.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, a small hit operation setting process (S2506), which is one process in the small hit control process (S2506 in FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the contents of this small hit operation setting process (S2506).

In the small hit operation setting process (S2506), first, the opening scenario in which the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the small hit to be started is set is read (S2601). The opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a is set by the data read in the process of S2601 (S2602), and this process is terminated.

In this way, since each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends in the middle. Problems can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the details of the second winning process (S2513), which is one process in the small hit control process (S2506 in FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the second winning process (S2513). This second winning process (S2513) is executed in the small hit control process (see FIG. 55), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to the winning of the specific winning opening 65a.

In this second prize processing (S2513), first, it is determined whether or not the present is the round valid period (S2701). Here, the round valid period is a period in which the round game is set, that is, a period from the setting of the specific winning opening 65a to the end of the interval period (5 seconds). In the process of S2701, if the round is not valid (S2701: No), the winning counter 203u is reset (S2702), and this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2701 if it is determined that the current round validity period is (S2701: Yes), then it is determined whether or not a prize has been detected in the specific winning opening 65a (S2703), and the specific winning opening 65a is reached. If no winning is detected (S2703: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the winning of the specific winning opening 65a is detected in the process of S2703 (S2703: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning counter 203u to update (S2704). Then, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter 203u is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (5 in the present embodiment) (S2705), and if the value of the winning counter 203u is equal to or lower than the upper limit value (5 in the present embodiment) ( S2705: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter 203u is the upper limit value (5 in this embodiment) or more (S2705: Yes), the closing of the specific winning opening 65a (opening / closing plate 65f1 attached to the special winning opening 65f1) is set (S2706). Next, the small hit scenario is updated to the end of the round (S2707), and this process ends.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 58 to 72, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power cutoff processing flag is turned on, the power cutoff process of S4117 (see FIG. 59) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "momentary power failure") in this start-up process. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 59, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff occurrence information from the main control device 110 (see S4114 in FIG. 59), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S4117. Before the execution of the power cutoff process, the power cutoff processing flag is turned on, and after the power cutoff process is completed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power cutoff process of S4117 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power cutoff process in progress flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S4002: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S4117 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power cutoff process of S4116 was completed after the momentary power failure occurred, or it was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the data is transferred to S4008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and the voice lamp control device 113 is being executed during the power-off processing of S4117. MPU221 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power cutoff process is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, it is confirmed whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S4006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff flag 223y is turned on (S4008). The power cutoff flag 223y is turned on when the power cutoff process of S4117 is executed (see S4116 in FIG. 59). That is, since the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off process of S4117 is executed, the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag 223y turned on at the moment of the start-up process. This is the case where the power failure is started after the power failure of S4117 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), after clearing the work area of the RAM in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4009) and setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010), the state The state setting area 223j is updated based on the command (S4011). Next, interrupt permission is set (S4012), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S4008 is reached with the power cutoff flag 223y turned off is that the start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, for example, so that the process of S4004 to S4006 is followed by S4008. This is the case when the process is reached or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power cutoff command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S4010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010).

It should be noted that the reason for skipping the clearing process of S4009 is that when the processing of S4008 is reached via the processing of S4004 to S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S4004. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S4101 was executed (S4101), 1 millisecond. If the above time has not passed (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4112 without performing the processes of S4102 to S4111. In the process of S4101, it is the process related to the display (effect) that S4102 to S4111 determine whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S4112 and the variation display setting process of S4113 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S4112 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception omission of the command transmitted from the main controller 110, and by executing the processing of S4113 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing. Based on this, the settings related to the variable display effect can be made without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4103 to S4113 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S4101: Yes). S4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process proceeds to the process of S4105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is a display control device as a command. It is transmitted to 114.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process to set to perform the production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

After the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S4108), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S4109, the liquid crystal display execution management process is executed (S4110). After that, the process proceeds to S4111. In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal display effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

After the processing of S4110, various counter update processings are executed (S4111), and the process proceeds to the processing of S4112. Details of the various counter update processes will be described later with reference to FIG. 72.

After that, the command determination process (S4112) that performs the process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S4113. The details of this command determination process (S4112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 60.

In the process of S4113, in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed by the display control device 114. The variable display setting process, which is a process set for transmission to the user, is executed (S4113). The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 69.

When the processing of S4113 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S4113 (S4114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S4116), and the power-off process is executed (S4117). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (S4118), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power cutoff occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4114 (S4114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4115: No), the process returns to the process of S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4115: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S4112). This command determination process (S4112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. .. Hereinafter, the details of the command determination process (S4112) will be described.

In the command determination process (S4112), first, from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read and analyzed, and a special figure is drawn from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4201). If it is determined that either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4201: Yes), the stop type command reception process is executed (S4202), and this process is terminated. The details of this stop type command reception process (S4202) will be described later with reference to FIG. 61.

On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the special figure 1 stop type command nor the special figure 2 stop type command has been received in the processing of S4201 (S4201: No), whether or not the state command has been received from the main controller 110. Is determined (S4203). If it is determined that the status command has been received (S4203: Yes), the status command process is executed (S4204), and this process is terminated. The details of this state command processing (S4204) will be described later with reference to FIG. 62, but the gaming state (normal state, probable change state, latent probability) of the pachinko machine 10 based on the state command output from the main control device 110. The process of setting the state) to the state setting area 223j is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S4203, when it is determined that the state command has not been received (S4203: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation pattern command has been received (S4205). Here, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol.

In the process of S4205, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4205: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4206) and received. Special Figure 1 The variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (S4207), and this process is terminated. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that can be identified as the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and is stored in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 69) described later. , When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the first special symbol and the display mode of the variation display effect of the first special symbol (setting the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol). If you do).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received (S4205: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4208). The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol.

When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has been received in the processing of S4208 (S4208: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4209) and the received special figure 2 is received. FIG. 2 The variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (S4210), and this process is terminated. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that can be identified as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is stored in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 69) described later. , When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the second special symbol and the display mode of the variation display effect of the second special symbol (setting the variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol). If you do).

In the process of S4208, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4208: No), it is determined whether or not the reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4211). When it is determined that the hold ball number command has been received (S4211: Yes), the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 included in the received hold ball number command (that is, the first). The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated according to the extracted counter value (the number of reserved balls in the variable display of the special symbol) ( S4212), this process is terminated. Since the present embodiment does not have a configuration for holding and storing the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the reserved ball number counter 223c of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is set in the processing of S4212. Only the update process is executed.

Here, since the hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64, every time there is a starting winning, the process of S4212 , The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the start is started. If the hold ball number command is notified based on the winning, the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected, and the first special symbol hold ball number of the main control device 110 is corrected. It can be adjusted to the value of the counter 203d.

Further, in the process of S4211 when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S4211: No), it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4213). When it is determined that the winning information command has been received in the processing of S4213 (S4213: Yes), the information of the received winning information command (whether or not the special symbol lottery is successful, the winning type, and the variation pattern) is the corresponding winning information. It is set in the storage area 223b (S4214), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4213, when it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S4213: No), it is determined whether or not the winning related command has been received from the main control unit (S4215). If it is determined that the hit-related command has been received in the process of S4215 (S4215: Yes), the hit-related process is executed (S4216), and this process is terminated. The details of the hit-related process (S4216) will be described later with reference to FIG. 63, but as a result of the lottery of the special symbol, the production corresponding to the big hit game or the small hit game executed when the big hit or the small hit is won. This is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute the display.

On the other hand, in the process of S4215, when it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S4215: No), it is determined whether or not the remaining time reduction command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4217). If it is determined in the process of S4217 that the command for the number of remaining time reductions has been received (S4217: Yes), the remaining number of times update process (S4218) is executed. The details of this remaining number update process (S4218) will be described with reference to FIG. 66, but for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 based on the remaining time reduction command output from the main control device 110. The process of setting the contents of the effect display is executed.

In the process of S4217, when it is determined that the command for the number of remaining time reductions has not been received (S4217: No), it is determined whether or not the temporary stop related command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4219). If it is determined in the process of S4219 that a temporary stop-related command has been received (S4219: Yes), the temporary stop-related process is executed (S4220), and this process ends. The details of the temporary stop-related process (S4220) will be described later with reference to FIG. 67, but the process of determining the remaining time of the special figure fluctuation time when the special figure 1 temporary stop command or the special figure 2 temporary stop command is received. And, when the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command or the special figure 2 fluctuation restart command is received, the process of setting the effect (additional effect) to be executed by the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S4219, if it is determined that the temporary stop related command has not been received (S4219: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S4221), and this process is terminated. In the processing of S4221, if the other command is a command used in the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is performed. Is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114.

As described above, in the command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 60) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment, the process of determining whether a state command has been received (see S4203 in FIG. 60) is performed. , It is configured before the process of determining whether or not the variation pattern command of each special symbol has been received (see S4205 and S4208 in FIG. 60).

With this configuration, when the fluctuation pattern command and the status command are output from the main controller 110 at the same time, that is, in the first special symbol variation start processing of the main controller 110 (see S208 in FIG. 33). Then, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 33) is executed, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is set, and in the game state update process (see S308 in FIG. 33) executed thereafter, the game is played. Even when a state command indicating that the state has changed is set, the game state currently set on the voice lamp control device 113 side can be determined before the special figure 1 variation pattern command.

Therefore, when the jackpot in Special Figure 1 is won with the probability variation state set and the latency state is set during the jackpot fluctuation, the voice lamp control device 113 side is said to have set the latency state. A variation effect (see FIG. 7A) corresponding to a variation pattern command that causes a jackpot variation in the determined state can be easily set.

In addition, unlike the configuration of the present embodiment, when the processing according to the fluctuation pattern command is executed before the discrimination processing of the state command, the probability change is different from the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation described above. Only the information indicating that the jackpot has been won by the first special symbol lottery in the state is received first, and the variable display according to the received content is set. Therefore, it becomes difficult to execute the fluctuation display indicating that the latent probability state is set at the same time as the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started. Since the fluctuation display indicating that the latent state is set is delayed in this way, the timing of notifying the player to perform the right-handed game is delayed, which makes the player uncomfortable. The problem of giving is raised.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, on the main control device 110 side, the process of changing the game state after the jackpot hit / fail determination (see S306 in FIG. 33) and the variation pattern setting (S307 in FIG. 33). (Game state update process (S308 in FIG. 33)) is executed, whereas the voice lamp control device 113 first executes a process for determining the current game state (S4204 in FIG. 60), and then executes the process. It is configured to set the fluctuation display corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Therefore, even though the latent state is set, it is possible to surely prevent the variable display corresponding to the previous game state from being set and executed.

Further, it is necessary to specify the output order of various commands on the main control device 110 side by configuring the voice lamp control device 113 side to specify the reception order of various commands output from the main control device 110. Can be reduced. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Next, the stop type command reception process (S4202) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this stop type command reception process (S4202). This stop type command reception process (S4202) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. Hereinafter, the details of the stop type command reception process (S4202) will be described.

In the stop type command reception process (S4202), first, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received in response to the received command, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f is set to ON, and the special figure 2 is set. When the stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON (S4301). Next, the stop type (big hit A to big hit G, small hit A to small hit C, missed, missed reach, etc.) is extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command (S4302). End the process.

The stop type extracted in S4302 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is the second special symbol. It is identifiable that it is a stop type. As a result, even if the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) start to change at the same time, it is possible to manage the stop types respectively, and to execute an appropriate change display. Can be done.

Next, the state command process (S4204) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this state command processing (S4204). This state command process (S4204) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. Hereinafter, the details of the state command processing (S4204) will be described.

In this state command process (S4204), when the process of setting the current game state to the state setting area 223j is executed based on the state command output from the main control device 110, and the game state shifts to the latent state. In addition, the process for setting the effect for notifying the player that the latent state is set (chance zone effect (see FIG. 6B)) and the game state have shifted to the normal state. In this case, processing for clearing various flags and counters used to display the card forgotten warning screen (see FIG. 10A) is executed.

In the state command processing (S4204), first, the game state before receiving the state command is determined from the value of the state setting area 223j provided in the RAM 223 (S4401). That is, it is determined in which game state the state command was received. Next, it is determined whether the gaming state before receiving the state command is the latent state (S4402). When it is determined that the gaming state before receiving the state command is not the latent state (S4402: No), it is determined whether the received command is a state command indicating the transition to the latent state (S4403). In the process of S4403, when the received command is a state command indicating the transition to the latent state (S4403: Yes), the latent notification effect for notifying the entry of the latent state is set (S4404). Then, the value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the received state command is stored in the state setting area 223j (S4405), and the process proceeds to S4406.

On the other hand, in the processing of 4402, when it is determined that the gaming state before receiving the state command is the latent state (S4402: Yes), each processing of S4403 and S4404 is skipped, and the processing of S4405 is executed. The process proceeds to S4406. Further, in the process of S4403, if the received command is not a state command indicating the transition to the latent state (S4403: No), the processes of S4404 and S4405 are skipped and the process proceeds to S4406.

Next, it is determined whether the received command is a state command indicating the transition to the normal state (S4406). If it is determined that the received command is not a state command indicating the transition to the normal state (S4406: No), the processing of S4407 to S4410 is skipped, the processing of S4411 described later is executed, and this processing is terminated. .. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received command is a state command indicating the transition to the normal state (S4406: Yes), it is determined whether the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4407). When it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4407: Yes), the value of the prize ball counter 223u is cleared to 0 (S4408), the card notification flag 223q, and the card notification possible flag. 223s, the rush displayed flag 223t is set to off (S4409). Next, the contents of the remaining variable time information storage area 223o and the remaining time storage area 223p are cleared (S4410), and the values corresponding to the game states notified by the other state commands are stored in the state setting area 223j (S4411). This process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4407, if it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is set to off (S4407: No), the processing of S4408 and S4409 is skipped, the processing of S4410 and S4411 is executed, and the present invention is performed. End the process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, a hit-related process (S4216), which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit-related process (S4216). In this hit-related process, a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to a big hit game or a small hit game, which is executed when a big hit or a small hit is won as a result of a special symbol lottery. This is to be performed, and processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 when a big hit or a small hit is won is executed.

In addition, when a prize ball number command for indicating the number of prize balls acquired during a winning game (big hit game, small hit game) is received, the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command is accumulated and accumulated. Based on the result, a process for displaying the card forgotten warning screen (see FIG. 10A) is executed.

In the hit-related process (S4216), first, it is determined whether the command received by the command determination process (see FIG. 60) has received the jackpot-related command (S4501). If it is determined that the received command is a jackpot-related command (S4501: Yes), the jackpot-related process is executed (S4502), and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 64, the jackpot-related process (S4502), which is one of the hit-related processes (S4216 in FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot related process (S4502). In the jackpot-related processing, processing is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won, and when the jackpot is won, the main control device is used. Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from 110 is executed.

In the jackpot-related process (S4502), first, it is determined whether or not the hit-related command received by the hit-related process (S4216) has received the jackpot start command (S4601). When the jackpot start command is received (S4601: Yes), the jackpot start command for display is set (S4602), and this process is terminated. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S4601, when it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4601: No), it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S4603). When the round number command is received (S4603: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the round number (S4604), and this process is terminated. In the present embodiment, since the main control device 110 transmits information indicating the number of rounds as a round number command, the display round number command is set based on the received round number command. In order to reduce the amount of command data transmitted from the control unit 110, the voice lamp control unit is configured to transmit information indicating that a new round has started from the main control unit 110 as a round update command. When a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of 113, a round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of received round update commands is provided, and the current round is performed on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the value of the round number accumulation counter. It may be configured to calculate the number and set the display round number command.

On the other hand, in the process of S4603, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S4603: No), it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S4605). If it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S4605: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ending command has been received (S4605: Yes), the display ending command is set (S4606), and it is determined whether the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4607). If it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4607: Yes), a display ending command that does not include the card notification is set (S4608). That is, a process for preventing the display mode of FIG. 10A from being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4607, when it is determined that the card notified flag 223q is not set to on (that is, it is off) (S4607: No), the jackpot type this time is jackpot A or jackpot B. (S4609). When it is determined that the jackpot type this time is jackpot A or jackpot B (S4609: Yes), a display ending command including card notification is set (S4610), and the card notification flag 223q is set to ON. (S4611). That is, a process for displaying the display mode of FIG. 10A on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot type this time is not jackpot A or jackpot B (S4609: No), it is determined whether the card notification enable flag 223s is set to ON (S4612). When it is determined that the card notification possible flag 223s is set to on (S4612: Yes), the card notification possible flag 223s is set to off (S4613), and the above-mentioned processes S4610 to S4611 are executed. End the process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4612 that the card notification possible flag 223s is not set to ON (S4612: No), the process of S4608 described above is executed, and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the jackpot-related process (S4502 in FIG. 64), as various display modes to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game, the game information (opening, opening, In addition to the process of setting the display contents of the ending and the number of rounds), the process of displaying or not displaying the card forgotten warning screen (see FIG. 10A) is configured to be executed.

This card forgetting warning screen is a card (borrowing a ball) to the player when the player wins a predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) of prize balls in a winning game (big hit game, small hit game). This is a notification mode for calling attention not to forget the valuable medium used at the time. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned card is used when the number of prize balls acquired in the period from the normal state to the jackpot and the transition to the normal state again (continuation advantageous period) satisfies the condition that the predetermined amount can be reached. It is configured to display the forgetfulness alert screen.

Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 64, the jackpot (big hit A,) that can easily obtain a prize ball exceeding a predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) in the jackpot (first hit) won in the normal state. If the jackpot B) is won, the card notification that displays the card forgotten warning screen is executed at the end of the jackpot game, and if the other jackpots (big hit C, jackpot D) are won, the card notification is executed. It is configured not to.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a player who has not won a predetermined amount of prize balls from displaying a card forgotten warning screen, and can continue to borrow balls while playing a game. It is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the big hit game, a game state (latent state) in which the small hit game can be easily executed can be set. Therefore, by repeating the small hit game, the player can set the game state (latent state). A predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) of prize balls may be obtained. Therefore, the number of prize balls acquired by the player during the advantageous continuation period (the number of prize balls paid out during the advantageous period) is accumulated, and if the cumulative result exceeds a predetermined amount (250 shots), the execution is performed at that time. The card forgetting warning screen is displayed on the ending screen of the big hit game or the small hit game. As a result, it is possible to display the card forgotten warning screen for the player at an appropriate timing.

Further, in the present embodiment, the card forgetting warning screen is notified only once during one advantageous continuation period. As a result, the card forgetting warning screen is frequently displayed, and it is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable. The method of displaying the card forgotten warning screen is not limited to the content of the present embodiment. For example, a measuring means for measuring the advantageous continuation period is provided, and the elapsed period since the previous card forgetting warning screen is displayed. If the number exceeds a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes), the card forgotten warning screen may be displayed again. In this case, since the card forgotten warning screen is displayed once (because the display conditions for displaying the card forgetting warning screen are already satisfied), during the special symbol change period (for example, during the advantageous continuation period). When a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds or more is selected), it is preferable to display the card forgetting warning screen.

With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the current game situation by using the fixed concept of the player that the card forgetting warning screen is displayed after the big hit game is completed. Further, as a method of achieving the same effect, the big hit game may display the card forgetting warning screen by using the opening period of the small hit game.

Returning to FIG. 63, the description will be continued. In the process of S4501, when it is determined that the received command is not a jackpot-related command (S4501), it is determined whether the received command has received the small hit-related command (S4503). If it is determined that the received command is a small hit related command (S4503: Yes), the small hit related process (S4504) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 65, a small hit-related process (S4504), which is one process in the hit-related process (S4216 in FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit related process (S4504). In the small hit-related processing, processing is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the small hit game executed when the small hit is won, and when the small hit is won. , Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 is executed.

In the small hit-related process (S4504), first, it is determined whether or not the hit-related command received by the hit-related process (S4216) has received the small hit start command (S4701). When the small hit start command is received (S4701: Yes), the small hit start command for display is set (S4702), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4701 when it is determined that the received command is not the small hit start command (S4701: No), it is determined whether the ending command has been received (S4703). If it is determined that the received command is not the ending command (S4703: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received command is the ending command (S4703: Yes), the display ending command is set (S4704), and it is determined whether the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4705). .. If it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4705: Yes), a display ending command that does not include card notification is set (S4706), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4705, when it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is not set to ON (S4705: No), it is determined whether the card notification enable flag 223s is set to ON (S4707). When it is determined that the card notification possible flag 223s is set to on (S4707: Yes), the card notification possible flag 223s is set to off (S4708), and the display ending command including the card notification is set (S4707: Yes). S4709), the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4710), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4707, the card notification possible flag 223s is not set to ON (S4707: No), the above-mentioned process of S4706 is executed, and this process is terminated.

As described above, in this embodiment, even in a small hit game that does not meet the display conditions for displaying the card forgetting warning screen in one game, after winning the big hit in the normal state, If the cumulative value of the number of prize balls acquired during the game period (advantageous continuation period) until the normal state is set again satisfies the display condition (for example, the number of acquired prize balls reaches 250), a small hit It is configured to display the card forgotten warning screen even after the game is over. As a result, it is possible to display the card forgotten warning screen for the player at an appropriate timing.

Returning to FIG. 63, the description will be continued. In the process of S4503, when it is determined that the received command is not a small hit related command (S4503: No), it is determined whether or not the prize ball command has been received (S4505). If it is determined that the received command is not a prize ball command (S4505: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is a prize ball command (S4505: Yes), the value corresponding to the received command is added to the value of the prize ball counter 223u (S4506), and then the card. It is determined whether the notified flag 223q is set to ON (S4507). When it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is not set to ON (S4507: No), it is determined whether the value of the prize ball number counter 223u added in the processing of S4506 is 250 or more (S4508). When it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter 223u after addition is 250 or more (S4508: Yes), the card notification enable flag 223s is set to ON (S4509), and the display prize ball number command is set. (S4510), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S4507 that the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4507: Yes), or in the processing of S4508, the prize ball number counter 223u after addition is less than 250. If it is determined (S4508: No), the process of S4509 described above is skipped, the process of S4510 is executed, and the present process is terminated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is determined that the normal state is set by the state command processing (see S4204 in FIG. 62), and the value of the prize ball counter 223u is cleared. The number of prize balls corresponding to the prize ball number command received during the period up to (advantageous continuation period) is configured to be accumulated by the prize ball number counter 223u. Then, at the end of the winning game (big hit game, small hit game), the card forgetting warning screen is displayed according to the value of the prize ball counter 223u (at the ending screen display timing).

As a result, for example, when the jackpot (first hit) that triggers the setting of the advantageous continuation period is jackpot C (a jackpot in which it is difficult to obtain a predetermined amount (250 shots) of prize balls in one jackpot game). Can display a card forgotten warning screen when a small hit game is won during the advantageous continuation period, or when a big hit C is won again.

Next, the remaining number of times update process (S4218) will be described with reference to FIG. 66. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the contents of the remaining number update process (S4218). This remaining number update process (S4218) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the remaining time reduction command is executed from the main control device 110. Is received, a process of updating the contents set in the remaining time reduction frequency area 223k, the remaining variable time information storage area 223o, and the remaining time storage area 223p is executed.

In the remaining number update process (S4218), first, it is determined whether or not the remaining time reduction command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4801). If it is determined that the command for the number of remaining hours has not been received (S4801: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S4801, when it is determined that the remaining time reduction command has been received (S4801: Yes), the display time reduction command corresponding to the received command is set (S4802), and this processing is terminated.

Next, the contents of the temporary stop-related processing (S4220) will be described with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the contents of the temporary stop-related process (S4220). In this temporary stop-related process (S4220), a process of determining the remaining time of the special figure fluctuation time when the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received, and a third symbol display device when the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command is received. The process of setting the effect (additional effect) to be executed in 81 is executed.

When the temporary stop-related process (S4220) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop command has been received (S4901), and if it is determined that the command has not been received (S4901: No), the variable restart process is performed. (S4902) is executed. The details of the fluctuation resumption processing (S4902) will be described later with reference to FIG. 68. On the other hand, in the process of S4901 when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop command has been received (S4901: Yes), the remaining fluctuation time of the currently set fluctuation pattern is calculated (S4903). Then, it is determined whether the residual variation time calculated by the process of S4903 is less than 2 seconds (S4904), and if it is determined to be less than 2 seconds (S4904: Yes), the residual variation is in the residual variation time information storage area 223o. A period A indicating that the time is short is set (S4905), and the process proceeds to S4902.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4904, when it is determined that the residual fluctuation time is not less than 2 seconds (2 seconds or more) (S4904: No), then the residual fluctuation period is 2 seconds or more and more than 15 seconds. If it is determined whether the time is short (S4906), and if it is 2 seconds or more and less than 15 seconds (S4906: Yes), the period B indicating that the residual fluctuation time information storage area 223o is the normal residual fluctuation time. Is set (S4907), and the process proceeds to S4902.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S4906 that the remaining variation time is not less than 15 seconds (exceeding 15 seconds) (S4906: No), it indicates that the residual variation time is long in the residual variation time information storage area 223o. The period C is set (S4908), and the process proceeds to S4902. In this way, the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) that is executed when the special map fluctuation resumes is calculated at the timing when the special map fluctuation is interrupted (the subtraction of the special map fluctuation time is interrupted), and the period corresponds to that period. By setting the information to be performed, it is possible to execute an effect (additional effect) suitable for the remaining variation time without delay at the timing of restarting the special figure variation.

In the present embodiment, if the period information (period A to period C) set in the residual fluctuation time information storage area 223o corresponding to the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) executed when the special figure fluctuation resumes is different. However, the selection of each period information is not limited to this, and for example, the shorter the remaining time, the easier it is to select the period A, and the longer the remaining time, the easier it is to select the period C. The ratio may be configured to be different according to the remaining time, or the remaining period may be divided at predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) intervals, and the periods A to C may be distributed in order for each division. It may be configured.

With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the relationship between the additional effect executed based on the period information set in the residual variation time information storage area 223o and the residual variation time. It can provide the enjoyment of predicting fluctuation time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the contents of the fluctuation resumption processing (S4902) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation restart process (S4902). This variation resumption process (S4902) executes a process of setting an additional effect to be executed when the special figure 1 variation resumption command is received.

When the variation restart process (S4902) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation restart command has been received (S5001), and if it is determined that the command has not been received (S5001: No), this process is terminated. .. On the other hand, in the process of S5001, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command has been received (S5001: Yes), then the remaining fluctuation time information stored in the residual fluctuation time information storage area 223o is read out (S5002). ), The additional effect type is determined from the additional effect selection table 222c based on the read-out residual fluctuation time information and the additional effect counter 223i (S5003). Next, the display additional effect command corresponding to the read additional effect type is set (S5004), the information set in the residual variation time information storage area 223o is cleared (S5005), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the special figure change is interrupted, the special figure change is restarted after the normal effect (the effect display executed when the special figure change is started) is completed. A shaking effect that swings and displays the third symbol is executed during the period until the pattern is changed, and when the special figure change is restarted, an additional effect corresponding to the special figure change period (remaining change period) after the restart is executed. However, other configurations may be used.

For example, an effect period determining means for determining a normal effect period in which a normal effect is executed is provided, and when it is determined by the effect period determination means that the normal effect period has ended, an additional effect is executed. May be good. With such a configuration, since the normal effect and the additional effect can be continuously executed, it is possible to provide a more suitable effect display for the player. Further, in this case, an error may occur between the end timing of the additional effect period in which the additional effect is executed and the special figure fluctuation period after the restart, but the additional effect is continuously executed during the error period. Alternatively, a shaking effect for displaying the third symbol in a swinging manner may be executed. Further, an error period discriminating means for discriminating the length of the error period is provided, and when the error period discriminating means determines that the error period is a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) or more, the additional effect is executed again. It may be configured as follows.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the variation display setting process (S4113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S4113). This variation display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 69) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. As described above, the variation display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 69) is performed on the first or special figure 2 variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on this, a variable pattern command for display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set, and a process of transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop types (big hit A to big hit G), a process of setting a display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

In the variation display setting process (S4112), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5101). When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is off (S5101: No), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S5107 is started. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S5101: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off (S5102). Next, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (S5103). When it is determined that the current gaming state is the latent state (S5103: Yes), the variation display setting process for special figure 1 (S5104) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 70, the details of the variation display setting process (S5104) for the special figure 1, which is one process in the variation display setting process (S4113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. do. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation display setting process (S5104) for the special figure 1. In this special figure 1 variation display setting (S5104), when the current gaming state is the latent state, the first special symbol is displayed based on the special figure 1 variation pattern command received from the main control device 110. A process of setting a latent fluctuation pattern command and transmitting it to the display control device 114 is executed.

In the variation display setting process for special figure 1 (S5104), first, the variation time corresponding to the extracted variation pattern is read (S5201), and the value corresponding to the variation time read out in the process of S5201 is sub-special figure 1. The fluctuation time counter is set to 223 m (S5202). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5203). When it is determined that the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is 0 (S5203: No), the display rush inrush command is set (S5204), and the rush displayed flag 223t is set to ON (S5205). ). On the other hand, in the process of S5203, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation counter in FIG. 2 is larger than 0 (S5203: Yes), the process of S5204 and S5205 described above is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S5206. Next, based on the extracted variation pattern, a latent variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is set (S5206), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. When it was determined in the process of S5103 that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S5103: No), it was extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command in the process of S4205 of the command determination process (see FIG. 60). The variation pattern in the variation display effect of the first special symbol is acquired from the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223, and the variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is generated (S5105). The display variation pattern command of the first special symbol is configured to be able to identify whether it is a display variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol or a variation pattern command of the second special symbol. Specifically, if the upper 2 bits of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command having a 2-byte configuration is "10", it indicates that it corresponds to the first special symbol, and if it is "01", it indicates that it corresponds to the second special symbol. It is configured to indicate that it corresponds to.

The variable pattern command for display of the first special symbol set in the process of S5104 or S5105 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process of the main process (see FIG. 59) (see FIG. 59). It is transmitted to the display control device 114 by S4102). By receiving the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the display control device 114 corresponds to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed.

With the setting of the variable pattern command for display of the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set variable pattern command for display is consumed (that is, the variable corresponding to the reserved ball of the first special symbol). The data corresponding to the first special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted in accordance with the setting of the display) (S5106).

Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5107). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is not on (that is, off) (S5107: No), the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110. Therefore, the process of S5111 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S5107: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off (S5108). Next, the process of the variable display setting process for special figure 2 (S5109) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 71, a variation display setting process (S5109) for special figure 2, which is one process in the variation display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 69), will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 variation display setting process (S5109).

In the variation display setting process for special figure 2 (S5109), first, in the process of S4210 of the command determination process (see FIG. 60), the variation time corresponding to the extracted variation pattern is read out (S5301), and the read variation is performed. The value corresponding to the time is set in the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n (S5302). Next, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (S5303). When it is determined that the state is latent (S5303: Yes), it is determined whether the rush displayed flag 223t is on (S5304). When it is determined that the rush displayed flag 223t is not on (S5304: No), the remaining time stored in the remaining time storage area 223p is read out (S5305). Next, it is determined whether the remaining time read in the process of S5305 is less than 1 second (S5306). If it is determined that the remaining time is less than 1 second (S5306: Yes), the process of S5307 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5308.

On the other hand, in the process of S5306, when it is determined that the remaining time read out is 1 second or more (S5306: No), the display rush rush command is set (S5307), and the rush displayed flag 223t is set to ON. (S5308). Next, based on the extracted variation pattern, a latent variation pattern command for displaying the second special symbol is set (S5309), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5303 that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S5303: No), or when it is determined in the process of S5304 that the rush display flag 223t is set to ON. (S5304: Yes), the process of S5305 to S5308 described above is skipped, the process of S5309 is executed, and the present process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the state where the latent state is set in the state setting area 223j, when the variable display of the first special symbol is set, that is, the latent state during the jackpot fluctuation period. When it is determined whether the second special symbol (special figure 2) is changing and it is determined that the special figure 2 is not changing when the fluctuation display corresponding to the first special symbol change is set. Is configured to set a rush rush command as an effect mode of variable display. That is, it is configured to display a screen (see FIG. 7A) for notifying the player that the rush has entered the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing when the target special figure 1 change is executed. is doing.

On the other hand, when setting the fluctuation display corresponding to the first special symbol fluctuation in which the jackpot fluctuation period is in a latent state, it is determined whether the second special symbol (special figure 2) is changing, and the special symbol is used. When it is determined that 2 is in a fluctuating state, as an effect mode of the fluctuating display, a screen showing that the state is in a latent state (see FIG. 6B) without setting the display rush rush command is displayed. It is configured to be displayed.

As a result, if a right-handed game is performed when a screen for setting a display rush rush command and notifying the player that the rush has been rushed (see FIG. 7A) is displayed, the game is immediately performed. It is possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol in the latent state, and it is possible to provide the player with a comfortable game.

Further, when setting the fluctuation display corresponding to the first special symbol fluctuation in which the jackpot fluctuation period is in the latent state, it is determined whether the second special symbol (special figure 2) is changing, and the special figure 2 is determined. If it is determined that the fluctuation is in progress, the fluctuation of the special figure 2 during the fluctuation may be forcibly terminated so that a new fluctuation of the special figure 2 can be executed.

It should be noted that the setting timing of the display rush rush command when the game state shifts to the latent state during the fluctuation of Special Figure 2 is not limited to the content of the present embodiment, and the player is provided with a game that does not feel uncomfortable. It suffices if the configuration is such that For example, if it is determined that the fluctuation of the special figure 2 that is changing has ended at the timing when the latent state is set, the display rush inrush command may be set, or the change may be made at the timing when the latent state is set. It may be configured to discriminate the remaining time until the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation in the figure 2 and set the display rush rush command when the discriminant result becomes a predetermined time (1 second). In this case, the predetermined time to be set is required from the time when the player operates the operation handle 51 to the time when the right-handed game is started until the ball launched by the right-handed game enters the second entrance 640. The time may be shorter than the period, and may be appropriately set according to the configuration of the game board 13.

Returning to FIG. 69, the explanation will be continued. The variable pattern command for display of the second special symbol set in the process of S5109 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed by the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59). It is transmitted to the control device 114. By receiving the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol, the display control device 114 corresponds to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed. Then, in the winning information storage area 223b, the data corresponding to the second special symbol is shifted (S5110).

Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON (S5111). When it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is not set to on (that is, it is off) (S5111: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is on (S5111: Yes), the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f is on. Sets the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f to off, and sets the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g to off when the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is on (S5112).

In the process of S4201 of the command determination process (see FIG. 60), the stop type extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command is set (S5113), and this process is terminated. When the extracted stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, the display special figure 1 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set based on the stop type. If the extracted stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, a display special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set based on the stop type. .. The special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command notified from the main control device 110 notifies the big hit type when a big hit occurs, and notifies even when the determination result is out of order. Will be done. When the determination result is out of order, the out-of-order symbol is set without referring to the stop type.

Next, with reference to FIG. 72, various counter update processes (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the various counter update processes (S4111). The various counter update processes (S4111 in FIG. 72) are one of the main processes (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and are the values of the various counters provided in the RAM 223. This is the process to execute the update.

In the various counter update processes (S4111), first, it is determined whether the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5401). When it is determined that the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5401: Yes), the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is subtracted by 1 (S5402). On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5401 that the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is not larger than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S5401: No), the processing of S5402 is skipped and S5403 is skipped. Move to the processing of. Next, it is determined whether the value of the sub-special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is larger than 0 (S5403). When it is determined that the value of the sub-special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is larger than 0 (S5403: Yes), the value of the sub-special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is subtracted by 1 (S5404).

Next, the value of the sub-special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m and the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n are read out (S5405), and the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is read from the value of the sub-special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m. The remaining time is calculated by subtracting the value of (S5406). The remaining time calculated in the process of S5406 is stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (S5407), the values of other various counters are subtracted by 1 (S5408), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5403, when it is determined that the value of the sub-special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is not larger than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S5403: No), the above-mentioned S5404 to S5407 are skipped. , S5408 process is executed, and this process is terminated.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 73 to 87, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 73, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is set in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs initially processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR type ROM 234d has a high speed because a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it can sufficiently store not only image data but also a control program and the like, while controlling. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to the predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S6001 in FIG. 73) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is completed and the boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S6001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, in the display control device 114. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 74, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S6102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. It may execute the process set in 231a. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S6101. And S6102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. 1 It may be stored in the program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the process of S6103 to S6105 may be executed without performing the process of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary staging unit in the MPU 231, which is possible after the boot process, earlier.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 73. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct to execute the display process. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes a start address and a final address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, transfer destination information (here, resident video RAM 235), and a transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of this register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6003, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S6004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 85 (a)) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 85 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75 (b)), the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) (not shown) is simply drawn. The command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 75 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying the image on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. By using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, so that the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, there was a ball entry (starting prize) into the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640, and the start instruction of the variable effect was given. When the main control device 110 passes through the voice lamp control device 113, that is, when the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the fluctuation image at power-on is immediately displayed during the fluctuation effect period, and a simple fluctuation is performed. You can produce. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, and it takes time to transfer the flash memory. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery is possible. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S6005, the interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 75 (a). FIG. 75A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 75 (b). FIG. 75B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. The command determination process (S6302) is executed so that the display device 81 can display the image, and then the display setting process (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. If the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81.

In the display setting process (S6303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), which are determined by the task process (S6304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 29 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list (S6306). The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 87.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / rear out reach, complete out) is set. The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed to shift to the process of S6304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 76, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then the command. For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). Then, if there is a variable pattern command for display (S6404: Yes), the variable pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 77 (a). FIG. 77A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S6405). This fluctuation pattern command processing (S6405) executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed in the main control device 110 at a distance of several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly for display. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counting counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6505, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S6502e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 as the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 76. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a stop type command for display (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 77 (b). FIG. 77B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (one of big hit A to G, small hit A to C, reach off, and complete off) indicated by the display stop type command. (S6601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is used. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is set. Set it on (S6603) and return to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-mentioned task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is completely out of order. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete deviation is set by the process of S6602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 will have a "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out of order". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 is completely disengaged. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408), and the display is performed. If there is an opening command for (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (a). FIG. 78 (a) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command process executes the process corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command processing, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and the time data is set in the timekeeping counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command (S6410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (b). FIG. 78B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. Set to the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command process executes the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6903). S6904). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6905), the ending command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display rush inrush command among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and the display is performed. If there is a rush rush command (S6414: Yes), the rush rush command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the rush inrush command process (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 80 (a). FIG. 80A is a flowchart showing the rush inrush command process. This rush rush command process executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rush rush command processing, first, a rush rush display data table corresponding to the display mode of the rush rush effect indicated by the display rush rush command is determined, and the determined rush rush display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. Then, it is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6931). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6932).

Next, based on the rush inrush display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6931, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6934). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6935), the rush inrush command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display rush rush command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an additional effect command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and the additional effect is performed. If there is a command (S6416: Yes), the additional effect command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the additional effect command processing (S6417) will be described with reference to FIG. 80 (b). FIG. 80B is a flowchart showing additional effect command processing. This additional effect command process executes the process corresponding to the additional effect command for display received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the additional effect command processing, first, an additional effect display data table corresponding to the display mode of the additional effect indicated by the additional effect command for display is determined, and the determined additional effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. , Set to the display data table buffer 233d (S6951). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6952).

Next, based on the additional effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6951, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6954). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6955), the additional effect command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6416, if it is determined that there is no additional display effect command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6418), and the rear surface is determined. If there is an image change command (S6418: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S6419), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S6419) will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag 233w for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (S7001). ). Then, among the bits of the rear image discrimination flag 233x provided for each rear image type (rear surface A, B), the bit corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is set to ON, and other bits are set. The bit corresponding to the rear image type of is set to off (S7002), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag 233w set by the process of S7001 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is changed from the rear image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S7002. Identify.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display either the back surface A or B according to the back surface type of the rear image specified in the display data table, the rear image discrimination flag 233x set by S7002 is used. The type of back image to be displayed at that time is specified, and the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored ( (Whether it is a resident video RAM 235 or a normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 76. In the processing of S6418, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S6418: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6420), and there is an error command. If (S6420: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6421), and the process returns to S6401 processing.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S6421) will be described with reference to FIG. 81 (b). FIG. 81B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S7102), and the error command is used. Ends the process and returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S7102 is determined and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the error discrimination flag corresponding to all the error types indicated by each error command is set to ON in the process in S7102. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 76. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S6416 (S6420: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S6422), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

In the processing of S6401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), The processing of S6402 to S6422 is executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6422 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75B) is also processed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment processing, only the commands required to display the power-on image, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are used from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 77 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and for other commands, Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 77 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6501. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the process of writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 82, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7201: No). ), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, the processes of S7202 to S7204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S7202), S7203 to S7204 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to and all the error discrimination set to ON is set. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S7301).

In the task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 82. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is turned off (S7203: No), the process proceeds to the process of S7205.

In S7205, the pointer update process is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 84. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the respective values are sequentially started from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the process of S7401, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is ". Determination (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), the pointer 233f is updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. It means that.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S7403), and if it is a demo display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7405), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demo effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S7403: No). S7406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawing contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 82. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task processing (S6304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S7206 together with the warning image developed earlier, and each sprite is specified. , Display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and other parameters required for drawing are determined.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the definite display flag 233z is on. (S7209).

As a result, if the definite display flag 233z is off (S7209: No), it is the timing to produce the definite display because the definite display has not been produced yet. Therefore, first, the definite display data table is displayed in the data table buffer 233d. (S7210), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the definite display data table is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after the confirmation display flag 233z indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final symbol display effect of the stopped symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing content can be set as such. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the confirmed display data table, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Further, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. A wide variety of staging images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S6304), from the start of the fluctuation until the predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S7215, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the definite display flag 233z is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag 233y is on (S7216). If the demo display flag 233y is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the timekeeping counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that a certain period of time has passed since the end of the final display effect. After the lapse of time, a process for displaying the demo effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demo display flag 233y indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. ..

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing contents can be set to.

In the process of S7216, if the demo display flag 233y is on (S7216: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is performed as it is. It ends and returns to V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75 (b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table that specifies that the image of the above is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 85A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 85 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, off as a result of the processing of S7501 (S7501: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 85 (b). FIG. 85B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S7601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S7601: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7602). In the process of S7602, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S7602 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7602: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7603. Further, as a result of the processing of S7601, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S7603: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 describes the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S7603 (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S7605), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 75 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) (see S7501: No in FIG. 85 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 86, a normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the display setting process (S6303) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702), and if it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is stored from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source final address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7703) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

Further, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S7702: No), the processes of S7703 and S7704 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S7706 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7706: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7707. Further, as a result of the processing of S7705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S7705: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707), and if the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7709). If the rear image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag 233w is set to off (S7710), it is provided for each rear image type. Among the rear image discrimination flags 233x, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7711). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag 233x in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (transfer destination). The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The discrimination in the processing of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the stored state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the stored state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is a normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If, as a result of the processing of S7713, the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7713 (S7713: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 includes the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the given address. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of S7714, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal transfer setting processing is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that became the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined by the task process (S6304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and a drawing list (see FIG. 30) is generated from the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305) (S7801). That is, in the processing of S7801, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). Then, the specified stored RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. do. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address is read out from the character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. Then, in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the image expanded in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed in parallel at the same time. be able to.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the processing of S7802 (S7803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when the value is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 75 (b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

In the first embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in the state where the variation display of 1 is executed, the other variation display may be configured to be infeasible. Then, if there is a reserved ball, the starting prize may be changed in order from the oldest reserved ball. With this configuration, control can be simplified and the processing load can be reduced.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol) and the probabilistic state (high probability state of the special symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol). Four gaming states are provided: a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbol and high probability state of normal symbol) and latent state (high probability state of special symbol and normal state of normal symbol). There is. Then, the latent state is configured to be the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

That is, when the latent state is set, the variable time for showing the lottery of the second special symbol, which is more likely to be a lottery result more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol, is set in another game state. By stipulating that the lottery be shorter than when it is done, the lottery that is advantageous to the player can be executed most efficiently. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel playability in which the player is expected to set the latent state.

Specifically, in the lottery of the second special symbol, in addition to the big hit, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened even if the prize is small, so that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short. In the state, the prize balls can be continuously increased. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that it will be in a latent state. In a general gaming machine, the probabilistic state is the most advantageous gaming state, but in the present embodiment, the latent probabilistic state is more advantageous than the probabilistic state, so that a novel game property can be provided.

Further, in the first embodiment, the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous). A variable method is adopted). As a result, even if the variable display of one special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the other special symbol can be executed without waiting for the end of the variable display, so that the lottery of the special symbol can be executed more efficiently. can. In addition, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating at the same time, if one of them stops fluctuating with a stop symbol of a big hit or a small hit, the other fluctuating display shows the remaining fluctuation time or lottery. Regardless of the result, the stop symbol is displayed as a stop. As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem that the other variable display is fixedly displayed as a hit or a small hit during the execution of the big hit or the small hit, and the big hit or the small hit is started in duplicate.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set, the variable display corresponding to the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed. , The high-probability state of the normal symbol shifts to the low-probability state, and the gaming state shifts from the probabilistic state to the latent state. While this latent state is set, the variable display (dynamic display) period for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol is set short, so that many lottery of the second special symbol can be executed. It will be a period that can be done (Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Advantageous Period).

In the present embodiment, since the small hit is configured to be won with a probability of about 1/2 in the lottery of the second special symbol, the small hit is set during the period when the latent state is set as the game state. The small hit game that is executed when the player wins the game is frequently executed, and the game state is advantageous to the player who can win many prize balls (special figure 2 advantageous state).

As described above, the period in which the latent probability state is set in the present embodiment (special figure 2 variable advantageous period) is during the variable display period (dynamic display period) of the first special symbol won by the jackpot in the probable change state. Since (special figure 1 big hit is changing), the big hit game is executed when the special figure 2 advantageous state ends. In this way, since a plurality of states (special figure 2 advantageous state, jackpot game state) that are advantageous to the player are continuously set, the player is continuously given various benefits. Can be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is won by one special symbol (special figure 2) and the small hit game is executed, the fluctuation of the other special symbol (special figure 1) is interrupted (variation display period). The measurement is interrupted), and when the small hit game is completed, the measurement of the interrupted fluctuation display period is restarted. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 variable advantage period from being subtracted during the small hit game, and therefore, regardless of the number of small hit games executed during the special figure 2 variable advantageous period. It is possible to provide the player with a certain special figure 2 variable advantageous period.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of one special symbol (special figure 1), the other special symbol (special figure 2) that is changing is stopped and displayed. It is configured to be forcibly stopped with. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a small hit game is executed during a big hit game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control content for the change of the other special symbol is different depending on the lottery result of one special symbol. Specifically, if the lottery result of one special symbol is a big hit (a lottery result that can give the player the first privilege), the change of the other special symbol means that the lottery result is out of order. If it is stopped and displayed in the display mode shown and the lottery result of one special symbol is a small hit (a lottery result that can give the player a second privilege different from the first privilege), the other special symbol changes. Is stopped until the grant of the second privilege is completed (until the small hit game is completed), and is restarted after the grant of the second privilege is completed. In addition, if the lottery result of one special symbol is out of order, the change of the other special symbol is executed as it is.

With this configuration, the lottery content (lottery result, period until the lottery result is displayed) of the other special symbol can be changed based on the lottery result of one special symbol, and the player's It is possible to provide various playability.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a lottery result that can give a privilege to the player, the control content for the change of the other special symbol is changed according to the content of the privilege. Therefore, for example, in the case of a lottery result that gives the player the most advantageous privilege (big hit game), the lottery result corresponding to the change of the other special symbol being executed is the lottery result that gives the privilege. Even so, the fluctuation is forcibly stopped so that the lottery result is out of order, the player is suppressed from being given excessive benefits, and the lottery result (small hit) with less benefits given than the big hit game. In the case of, in order to prevent the privilege based on the lottery of the other special symbol from being given during the small hit game without changing the lottery result corresponding to the change of the other special symbol being executed, the variable display is performed. It is possible to interrupt only the measurement of the period.

Therefore, in a state where a plurality of special symbols (Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2) are fluctuating at the same time, the player is given the least advantageous privilege, and thus the most advantageous privilege to be given later is given. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the player is not able to do so, and it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, a short-term (0.5 second) variable display period is set as the variable display period of the second special symbol (special figure 2). It is configured so that small hit games can be performed frequently. Then, the condition for setting the latent state as the gaming state is the condition where the latent state is set, and the condition for ending the latent state is the condition for winning the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol while the probability changing state is set. Is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot, and the jackpot game is executed. Therefore, the jackpot game is executed after the end of the first advantageous period, which is advantageous to the player who frequently executes the small hit game. The second game period will be set. Therefore, since the first advantageous period and the second advantageous period that are advantageous to the player can be continuously set, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game so that the first advantageous period is set.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the probability variation state, the latent probability state is set from the start of the jackpot fluctuation, and the latent probability state is set. Is set so that the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be efficiently performed.

Therefore, at the same time as the latent state is set, the player is notified of the period during which the latent state is set (based on the setting of the latent state) (FIG. 7 (a)). ))reference.

However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed at the same time, the first special symbol is also the second in the state where the probabilistic state is set. Both special symbols may fluctuate.

In such a case, even if the display mode indicating that the latent state (RUSH) is set at the timing when the latent state is set is displayed (see FIG. 7A), the second is currently changing. Until the special symbol stops fluctuating, the lottery for the second special symbol cannot be executed in the latent state, and there is a problem that the small hit game is not executed forever even in the RUSH state. There was a risk.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the condition for transition to the latent probability state is satisfied (when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol during the probability change state), the change status of the second special symbol (whether or not there is a change, (Fluctuating remaining period) is determined, and the timing for notifying that the RUSH state has been set is different based on the determination result.

Specifically, when the condition for transition to the latent state is satisfied, the RUSH state is set when it is determined that the new second special symbol change is feasible. It is configured. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the change of the new second special symbol is not started and the small hit game is not executed even though the notification that the RUSH state has been set is notified.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the condition for transition to the latent state is satisfied, the period from the state in which the new change of the second special symbol can be executed to the end of the latent state is determined. If the determined period is less than the predetermined period, the RUSH state is not notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the big hit game from being started without the small hit game being executed even though the notification that the RUSH state has been set is notified.

In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the probabilistic state, the high probability state of the normal symbol is changed to the low probability state at the time when the jackpot fluctuation starts, so that the game state is set. If the probability state is set and the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the high probability state of the normal symbol does not shift to the low probability state at the start of the jackpot fluctuation. , It is configured to continue the probabilistic state even during the jackpot fluctuation. With this configuration, it is possible to provide different playability depending on the type of special symbol.

Not limited to the configuration of this embodiment, even if a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery in the probabilistic state, the high probability state of the normal symbol is changed to the low probability state at the time when the jackpot fluctuation starts. It may be configured to set the latent probability state as the game state by shifting to, or only when a specific jackpot type is set among a plurality of jackpot types, it is normal at the time when the jackpot fluctuation starts. It may be configured to set the latent state as the game state by shifting the high probability state of the symbol to the low probability state.

Furthermore, the number of jackpots won during the advantageous continuation period is measured, and when the measurement result reaches a predetermined number of times, the high-probability state of the normal symbol is shifted to the low-probability state at the time when the jackpot fluctuation starts. It may be configured to set the latent probability state as the game state.

In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the probability change state, the latent state is set at the time when the jackpot fluctuation starts and the period until the jackpot fluctuation ends. However, the period until the end of the jackpot fluctuation corresponding to the predicted winning information is not limited to this, for example, based on the prediction that the jackpot will be won in the start winning process (see FIG. 47) (see FIG. 47). Multiple fluctuation periods) It may be configured to set the latent state.

In the present embodiment, when the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is selected in the state where the latent probability state is set, the fluctuation pattern table is always constant regardless of the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol during the latent probability state setting. (See FIG. 19B) is used, but the configuration is not limited to this, and for example, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the latent probability state is set reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times). It is also possible to provide a discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the discriminating means have been performed, and to make the data table for selecting the variation pattern different based on the discriminating result of the discriminating means.

Specifically, when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol has not reached a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), the fluctuation of the second special symbol is performed by referring to the data table in which the average fluctuation time is about 2 seconds. When the number of times reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), it is preferable to refer to a data table in which the average fluctuation time is about 1 second. As a result, more small hit games can be provided to the player when a fluctuation pattern in which a long fluctuation time is set is selected as the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, the latent probability state is set during the jackpot fluctuation in the probability change state, but in addition to this, the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific deviation or a small hit. The latent probability state may be set during the fluctuation display in the case, or the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol is out of a specific range or becomes a small hit reaches a predetermined number of times during the probability change state. If this is the case, the latent state may be set.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 111. In the above-mentioned first embodiment, when the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set, the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1). In addition, the gaming state during the jackpot fluctuation is set as the latent probability state, and the small hit game is easily executed when the latent probability state is set. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the first embodiment described above, the gaming state can be changed during the symbol determination period (the period during which the first symbol is stopped and displayed) for displaying the lottery result of the special symbol. It is configured to let you. That is, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the state where the probability variation state is set, the start timing of the symbol confirmation period (the first symbol indicating the big hit) in which the lottery result is displayed is displayed. Is configured to set the latent state as the game state at the timing when is stopped and displayed).

Further, the second embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that a different symbol determination period is set based on the lottery result of the special symbol. With this configuration, the length of the period in which the latent state that is advantageous to the player is set can be made different according to the length of the set symbol determination period. Further, as compared with the configuration in which the latent state is set corresponding to the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the period during which the special symbol is fluctuating) as in the first embodiment described above, the symbol confirmation period (special) of the special symbol is obtained. Since the configuration in which the latent probability state is set corresponding to the period in which the symbol is stopped) is used, it is possible to simplify the display mode corresponding to the special symbol in the state in which the latent probability state is set. , The control of the pachinko machine 10 can be simplified.

Further, in the first embodiment described above, once the probabilistic state is set, the probabilistic state is maintained until the next big hit is won, but in the second embodiment, the special symbol jackpot is used. Even if the player is not elected, the probability change state is terminated when the predetermined end condition (the number of special symbol fluctuations after the probability change state is set reaches the predetermined number of times (50 times)) is satisfied. It differs in that it is configured in. With such a configuration, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game for a player for shifting to a latent state during a period in which a probable change state is set.

Here, the flow of the game in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 88. FIG. 88 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of the game when a specific jackpot (big hit C) is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in a state where the probability variation state is set. .. As shown in FIG. 88, in the second embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the state where the probability variation state is set, the jackpot game starts from the timing when the jackpot fluctuation stops (see FIG. 88 (c)). The latent state is set in the period until it is executed (symbol confirmation period).

Then, in the state where the latent probability state is set, the game for causing the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed as in the first embodiment described above. Further, if the small hit of the special figure 2 is won during the symbol confirmation period of the special figure 1, the measurement (subtraction) of the symbol confirmation period of the special figure 1 is interrupted during the period in which the small hit game is executed. ing. In addition, in the second embodiment, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order or a small hit, a different symbol determination period is set according to the lottery result. As a result, the player desires that a long period be set as the symbol determination period as the lottery result (lottery result of winning the jackpot) of the special figure 1 corresponding to the period in which the latent state is set. In the state where the latent state is set, it is desired that a short period is set as the symbol determination period in order to execute more lottery of the special figure 2.

That is, in the second embodiment in which the symbol confirmation period is different according to the lottery result, a long symbol confirmation period is desired and a short symbol confirmation period is desired according to the game state and the type of special symbol. Can be provided to the player. Further, in the second embodiment, different symbol determination periods are set for the same fluctuation pattern in which the same fluctuation display can be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from predicting the symbol confirmation period in advance due to the variable display content of the special symbol, and which symbol confirmation period is set for this special symbol lottery. It is possible to make it difficult to understand until the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed. In addition, since it has the above-mentioned configuration, it has a variation effect (an effect mode executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81) that is executed corresponding to one variation time (variation pattern). Since it is configured to set multiple types of symbol confirmation periods, the time required for one special symbol lottery (after the special symbol lottery is performed, the next special symbol lottery can be performed. Even when the time until) is set in a complicated manner, it is possible to unify the variable staging.

In the example described with reference to FIG. 88, the flow of the game when the jackpot of Special FIG. 1 is won when the probability variation state is set, that is, when the number of remaining time reductions is 47 times is shown. It is configured so that the latent state is set from the time when the jackpot fluctuation stops. In addition to this, when the jackpot of Special Figure 1 is won at the timing when the probability change state ends (the value of the probability change counter 203aa becomes 0) (for example, the 50th special figure lottery after the probability change state is set). Is configured so that the latent state is set from the timing when the jackpot fluctuation starts.

With this configuration, in the state where the probability variation state is set, the advantageous period of different length is set based on the timing of winning the jackpot of the special figure 1. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while requesting that the player win the jackpot at the timing when a long advantageous period is set, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, the gaming state set for the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) executed when the probability change state is set will be described with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing the relationship between the content of the special figure 1 game and the given score after the probability change state is set.

As shown in FIG. 89, in the second embodiment, the game state is variably set based on the lottery result of the special symbol lottery executed in the state where the probability variation state is set and the number of lottery (number of special figure fluctuations). It is configured to do. Specifically, in the second embodiment, the probability change state is continuously set until the number of lottery (variation number) of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (50 times) without winning the jackpot. If the jackpot is won while the number of lottery (number of fluctuations) of the special symbol is 1 to 49, the symbol that shows the probability change state and the jackpot is stopped and displayed during the jackpot fluctuation. The latent state is set during the confirmation period. As a result, the player is given a latent state game (RUSH game) during the symbol determination period and a jackpot game after the latent state ends as a privilege.

Next, when the number of lottery (number of fluctuations) of the special symbol is the 50th jackpot, the latent state is set during the jackpot fluctuation and during the symbol determination period. As a result, the player is given a latent state game (RUSH game) from the jackpot fluctuation to the end of the symbol confirmation period and a jackpot game after the end of the latent state as a privilege. That is, in the second embodiment, in the state where the probability change state is set, the transition condition (big hit winning) to the latent state is set in the state where the specific condition (specific lottery number (50th)) is satisfied. When it is satisfied, the player is configured to be given a privilege which is more advantageous than the case where the transition condition to the latent state is satisfied when the specific condition is not satisfied.

Then, when the number of lottery of the special symbol exceeds 50 times, the predetermined probability variation number is reached, and the normal state is set as the game state. If a jackpot is won during this normal state, the normal state continues during the fluctuation of the special symbol and during the symbol confirmation period, and the jackpot game is executed.

On the other hand, if the number of lottery (number of fluctuations) of the special symbol is out of the range from the 1st to the 49th after the probability variation state is set, the probability variation state is changed during the change of the special symbol and during the symbol confirmation period. If it continues and it is off at the 50th time, the latent state is set during the change of the special symbol and during the symbol confirmation period, so the latent state from the special symbol change to the end of the symbol confirmation period. The game (RUSH game) becomes feasible.

Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the second embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit with respect to the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the probable change state and the symbol confirmation period, it is not a big hit (missing). , Small hit), it is configured so that a long time is easier to select. For example, when the lottery result of a special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation time is "60 seconds to 180 seconds". The fluctuation time of "" is selected, and the symbol confirmation period of "5 seconds to 150 seconds" is selected as the symbol confirmation period. The fluctuation time of "0.5 seconds to 150 seconds" is selected as the fluctuation time, and the symbol confirmation period of "0.2 seconds to 1.5 seconds" is selected as the symbol confirmation period.

With this configuration, the lottery result of the special symbol and the latent state game (RUSH game) can be played for a maximum of 330 seconds (when a big hit is won with the 50th special figure change number) according to the number of lottery, and the minimum. It can be provided to the player with a range of 5 seconds (when the jackpot is won in the 1st to 49th special figure fluctuations). Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting how long the latent state of this time will continue.

Further, in the present embodiment, regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol, when the number of times of special symbol lottery (number of fluctuations) after the probability change state is set becomes the 50th time, the special symbol is being changed and the special symbol is changing. , Since the latent state is set during the symbol confirmation period, even if the jackpot is not won during the probable change state, the latent state game (RUSH game) is played against the player. Can be provided. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to experience the latent state game (RUSH game) than the configuration of the first embodiment in which the latent state game (RUSH game) is provided only when the jackpot is won. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player gets tired of the game because he / she cannot experience the latent state game (RUSH game) even though he / she has played the game for a long time.

Further, in the present embodiment, the latent state is set when the latent state is set based on the winning of the jackpot during the probable change state, and the latent state is set longer than the latent state is set without winning the jackpot. It is configured to be easy. As a result, the longer the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed, the easier it is to execute the jackpot game after the latent state game (RUSH game) is completed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player in the latent state game (RUSH game) play the game while expecting the jackpot game to be executed.

In addition, unlike the configuration of the present embodiment described above, in a part of the case where the latent state is set without winning the big hit, it is equivalent to the case where the latent state is set based on the winning of the big hit. Or, set the fluctuation time and the symbol confirmation period corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol other than the big hit (missing, small hit) so that the latent state game (RUSH game) of a longer length is executed. Is also good. As a result, it is possible to provide a player with a situation in which it may be advantageous not to win a big hit in a special symbol lottery, and it is possible to provide a surprising game.

In the present embodiment, as described above, it is easy to set a long latent state when a big hit is won during the probable change state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the latent probability is not limited to this, and the big hit is not won during the probable change state. When the state is set, it may be configured so that a long latent state is set. In this case, for example, the probability of change (the number of lottery of special symbols whose probability change state is continuously set (number of fluctuations)) is 50, and the probability of big hit in the probability change state, that is, the high probability state of the special symbol is 1/20. It is preferable to set to, so that a long latent state is set when the result of the lottery of the special symbol is missed 50 times in a row (about 7%).

Next, among the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the display contents different from the above-described first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 90. In the second embodiment, unlike the first embodiment described above, the latent probability state is set during the symbol determination period, and therefore, a special figure 1 for the effect content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The display mode of the display area Dm1 or the special figure 2 display area Dm2 is different from the above-described first embodiment. FIG. 90A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents in the latent state. As shown in FIG. 90 (a), in the second embodiment, since the latent probability state is set during the period when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), the latent probability state is set. The display of the effect mode (super chance zone display) indicating the state in which the change of the second special symbol is executed across the timing is displayed, and the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. It differs from the display screen of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 8A) in that the second symbol for showing is executed during the period when the stop display (confirmed display) is displayed. Since the other display elements are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the example shown in FIG. 90 (a), the display mode (“777”) of the third symbol for indicating that the first special symbol (special figure 1) has won the big hit is stopped and displayed. It shows that the latent probability state is set based on the fact that the jackpot is won in the first special symbol during the probability change state. In the example shown in FIG. 90 (a), since the special figure 1 display area Dm1 in which the third symbol is displayed in a display mode that can be visually recognized by the player is formed, the player can see the special figure 1 display area. By grasping the display mode of the third symbol displayed on Dm1 and the effect mode indicating that the latent state displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 has been set, the flow of the future game will be related. The game can be performed in a state in which information (information on whether or not the jackpot game is executed after the latent state game is completed) is acquired in advance.

Further, in the second embodiment, when the latent probability state is set based on the jackpot winning of the first special symbol, the fall lottery (special symbol) is performed when the special symbol is drawn during the latent probability state. The lottery for shifting the high-probability state to the low-probability state) is not performed. Therefore, by identifying the display mode of the third symbol displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, it is possible to grasp whether or not the current latent state is an advantageous latent state that is advantageous to the player. You can play the game with confidence.

In the second embodiment, the third symbol is displayed so that the player can easily identify the lottery result of the special symbol, but the lottery result of the special symbol is not limited to this. In order to make it difficult for the player to identify, the display area may be reduced, or the display area other than the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a light emitting body attached to the game board 13 or a light emitting body other than the third symbol display device 81) may be provided. A configuration such as a liquid crystal display device) may be used for display. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand what triggered the latent state to be set, so that the jackpot game is executed after the latent state game (RUSH game) is completed. It is possible to play the game while predicting whether or not the fall lottery is being executed during the latent state game (RUSH game).

Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol is displayed from the time when the third symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 until the final display period (symbol confirmation period) elapses. It is configured to stop completely without changing it, but it is not limited to this as long as it notifies the player that the special symbol is currently in the final display period (symbol finalization period), for example. During the final display period, the variable display of the third symbol is stopped, but the display mode (color) of the third symbol may be gradually changed, or the third symbol may be configured to be indistinguishable by the player. The design may be configured to swing.

In addition, for the player, a new lottery (variation) of the special symbol is made because the right of the special symbol lottery to be newly executed has not been acquired, whether the player is currently in the confirmed display period (design confirmation period). ) May not be executed, it may be configured to set a display mode for allowing the player to identify, for example, "confirmed display" or "waiting" in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. The command of "" may be displayed, or the display mode (color, design) of the third symbol may be changed between "confirmed display" and "waiting". With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent erroneous recognition that a new lottery is not started even in the state of having the reserved memory during the definite display period.

Next, with reference to FIG. 90 (b), the display contents at the time of entering the latent state game (RUSH game) in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 90B is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the latent state game (RUSH game) is entered. As shown in FIG. 90 (b), in the present embodiment, since the latent state is set during the period when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), the latent state game (RUSH game) is performed. The effect mode indicating rushing is executed during the period in which the second symbol for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. In that respect, it differs from the display screen of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 8B). Since the other display elements are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 96. In the second embodiment, the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed from the first embodiment described above, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. It differs in that it is done. Other points are the same as those in the first embodiment, the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 91 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 91, in the ROM 202 of the second embodiment, the big hit type selection table 202aa is replaced with the big hit type selection table 202d, and the small hit type selection table 202a is replaced with the small hit type selection table 202ab. Is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the variation pattern selection table 202ac is provided instead of the variation pattern selection table 202f, and the deviation type selection table 202ad is provided.

The jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa is different from the jackpot type selection table 202d of the first embodiment described above in that the type of the jackpot type is changed, and various counters (time reduction counter 203f, probability variation counter 203aa) set after the jackpot ends. , The fixed time counters 203ad and 203ae) are different from each other in that the value of the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type is changed. Here, the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 92.

FIG. 92 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 92, the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa is defined by the same jackpot operation content as the jackpot type defined in the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A) of the first embodiment described above. For each jackpot type, the values of the time reduction counter 203f, the probability variation counter 203aa, the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad, and the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae are specified.

Specifically, when the jackpot type (big hit A1 to jackpot A3) in which the same jackpot operation content as that of the jackpot A in the jackpot type selection table 202d of the first embodiment described above is executed is selected (winning the jackpot). When the game state is the normal state or the latent state, the value of "100" is set in the time saving counter 203f, and the value of "50" is set in the time saving state and the probable change state. Therefore, it is specified that the value of "50" is set in the probability variation counter 203aa.

Furthermore, as the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol, it is stipulated that the jackpot A1 is set to "5 seconds", the jackpot A2 is set to "60 seconds", and the jackpot A3 is set to "150 seconds". The jackpot A1 is defined in the range where the value of the counter C2 (0 to 99) is "0 to 19", the jackpot A2 is defined in the range of "20 to 23", and the jackpot A3 is defined in the range "24". That is, in the second embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to the jackpot A (big hits A1 to A3) is executed in 25% of the cases where the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and 80% (20 / 20 /) of them. It is stipulated that 25) is the jackpot D, 16% (4/25) is the jackpot A2, and 4% (1/25) is the jackpot A3.

That is, in the present embodiment, even if the jackpot in which the most advantageous jackpot game is executed for the player is won, the short symbol confirmation period is set as the period (symbol confirmation period) for stopping and displaying the lottery result to the player. If selected, the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed will be shortened. Therefore, for the special symbol lottery, the player can pay attention not only to whether or not the player has won the big hit, but also to the length of the symbol determination period, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the second embodiment, a configuration is used in which the symbol determination period is associated with the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a lottery for selecting the jackpot operation content (big hit type) and a lottery. The lottery for selecting the symbol fixing period and the lottery may be configured to be executed independently. In this case, since a plurality of symbol determination periods can be combined for a plurality of jackpot types, it is possible to provide game playability that is difficult for the player to predict.

Next, similarly to the above-mentioned jackpots A1 to A3, jackpots B1 to B3, jackpots C1 to C3, and jackpots D1 to D3 are defined, respectively.

Specifically, when the jackpot type (big hit B1 to jackpot B3) in which the same jackpot operation content as that of the jackpot B in the jackpot type selection table 202d of the first embodiment described above is executed is selected (winning the jackpot). When the game state is the normal state or the latent state, the value of "0" is set in the time saving counter 203f, and the value of "100" is set in the time saving state and the probable change state. Therefore, it is specified that the value of "0" is set in the probability variation counter 203aa. Further, as the symbol determination period of the special symbol, it is stipulated that the jackpot B1 is set to "5 seconds", the jackpot B2 is set to "60 seconds", and the jackpot B3 is set to "150 seconds".

Next, the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab will be described with reference to FIG. 93 (a). FIG. 93A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 93 (a), the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab has each small hit type (small) with respect to the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16 (b)) of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the hit A to the small hit C) are further subdivided and defined. Other than that, it is the same as the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16B). The detailed description of the same element will be omitted.

Specifically, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is in the range of "0 to 9" as the small hit type in which the small hit operation (opening operation) corresponding to the small hit A of the first embodiment described above is executed. , "Small hit A1" with a symbol confirmation time of "0.2 seconds" is in the range of "10 to 89", and "Small hit A2" with a symbol confirmation time of "0.5 seconds" is "90 to 93". "Small hit A3" with a symbol confirmation time of "1.5 seconds" is specified in the range of ".

Then, as the small hit type in which the small hit operation (opening operation) corresponding to the small hit B of the first embodiment described above is executed, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is determined in the range of "94 to 95". "Small hit B1" with a time of "0.2 seconds" is in the range of "96 to 97", and "Small hit B2" with a symbol confirmation time of "0.5 seconds" is in the value of "98". A "small hit B3" with a fixed time of "1.5 seconds" is specified. Further, as the small hit type in which the small hit operation (opening operation) corresponding to the small hit C of the first embodiment described above is executed, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is set to "99" and the symbol determination time is "1. A small hit operation (opening operation) of "5 seconds" is specified.

Next, the contents of the deviation type selection table 202ad will be described with reference to FIG. 93 (b). This out-of-order type selection table 202ad is referred to for selecting the out-of-order type when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, and is different in correspondence with the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5. The fixed time is specified.

In the present embodiment, the same counter value (value of the small hit type counter C5) is used depending on whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit or a miss because the lottery result of the special symbol cannot be duplicated. ) To select the type. As a result, the number of counters included in the main control device 110 can be reduced. The configuration is not limited to the above-mentioned configuration, and different counters may be used depending on whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit or a miss.

FIG. 93B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the deviation type selection table 202ad. As shown in FIG. 93 (b), the symbol type (off type) having a symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds to 1.5 seconds corresponding to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a small hit. It is specified corresponding to the value of the type counter C5.

As described above, in the second embodiment, it is possible to set the lottery results of big hit, small hit, and miss as the lottery result of the special symbol, and further, it is possible to set a different symbol confirmation time for each lottery result. It is configured in. Thereby, even if the lottery results of the special symbols are the same, different symbol confirmation times can be set.

Here, for example, when the lottery result of a special symbol is a big hit and the latent probability state is set during the symbol confirmation period, a long time (for example, 150 seconds) is selected as the symbol confirmation time. , Since the period in which the latent state is set can be lengthened, it can be advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the longer the symbol confirmation time is selected, the smaller the number of games per unit time (the number of special symbol lottery), which is disadvantageous to the player.

Further, of the second special symbol (special diagram 2) when the latent state is set during the period in which the special symbol indicating that the lottery result of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is a big hit is stopped and displayed. In the latent state game (RUSH game) in which the lottery is executed, when the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a small hit or a miss, a long symbol confirmation time is selected, and a predetermined latent state is selected. Since the number of special figure 2 lottery that can be executed during the period (the symbol confirmation period of special figure 1) is reduced, it is disadvantageous to the player.

In this way, since the degree of advantage of the set symbol determination period can be changed according to the lottery result of the special symbol, it is possible to provide the player with a novel playability.

In the present embodiment, by changing the symbol determination period of the special symbol, the period in which the latent state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is set is changed, and the game is executed during the latent state. By varying the number of special symbol lottery, the degree of advantage provided to the player is different, but other configurations may be used, for example, a big hit in a special symbol lottery. Only when the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol indicating that the player has won is longer than the predetermined period, the player may be configured to have a privilege of displaying a preferable image, or the music played during the jackpot game may be provided. The selection operation may be configured to be feasible during the symbol determination period.

Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the contents of the time saving / probability variation 2 table 202ac2 will be described. FIG. 94 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving / probability variation 2 table 202ac2 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 94, the time reduction / probability variation 2 table 202ac2 has a variation pattern corresponding to the special figure 1 with respect to the time reduction / probability variation table 202f2 (see FIG. 19A) of the first embodiment described above. They differ in that they have different lengths. Other than that, it is the same as the time saving / probability variation table 202f2 (see FIG. 19A). The detailed description of the same element will be omitted.

That is, in the present embodiment, the latent probability state is set during the stop display period (symbol confirmation period) of the special symbol when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery (lottery of special figure 1) during the probability change state. Therefore, the variation display period of the special figure 1 in the probabilistic state is configured to be shorter than that of the first embodiment.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 95. FIG. 95 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 95, in the second embodiment, the probability variation counter 203aa is provided in place of the probability variation flag 203g, the special figure 1 symbol determination flag 203ab, and the special figure 2 The difference is that the symbol 203ac, the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad, and the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae are added. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

The probability variation counter 203aa is a counter for continuing the number of lottery of special symbols executed in the high probability state (latent state, probability variation state) of the special symbol, and is a period during which the lottery of the special symbol is executed with high probability. It is for showing.

The probability variation counter 203aa is a value specified according to the winning jackpot type at the timing when the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON in the jackpot end processing (see S2312 in FIG. 54) of the first embodiment described above. 92) is set, the value is referred to in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98) (S451 in FIG. 98), and the jackpot lottery according to the value set in the probability variation counter 203aa is performed. It is executed (see S403 and S404 in FIG. 98). It is also referred to when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the same manner (see S953 in FIG. 102).

Then, the value is decremented by 1 at the timing when the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol (Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2) has elapsed, and is reset to 0 at the timing when the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol won by the jackpot has elapsed. ..

The special figure 1 symbol confirmation flag 203ab is a flag for indicating that the first special symbol (special figure 1) is stopped and displayed, and when it is set to on, the stop display of the special figure 1 is displayed. It indicates that it is during the period (during the symbol confirmation period). This special symbol 1 symbol confirmation flag 203ab is set to on in the first special symbol determination period setting process (see S852 in FIG. 100) (see S2802 in FIG. 100), and the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see FIG. 99). See S257). Then, when it is determined that the symbol determination period has elapsed (S853: Yes in FIG. 99), it is set to off.

The special figure 2 symbol confirmation flag 203ac is a flag for indicating that the second special symbol (special figure 2) is stopped and displayed, and when it is set to on, the stop display of the special figure 2 is displayed. It indicates that it is during the period (during the symbol confirmation period). The special figure 2 symbol fixing flag 203ac sets the target special symbol type from the first special symbol (special figure 1) to the second special symbol (special figure) with respect to the above-mentioned special figure 1 symbol fixing flag 203ab. The only difference is that it has been changed to 2), and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad and the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae are counters for measuring the symbol fixing period of the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2). , When the first special symbol (special diagram 1) or the second special symbol (special diagram 2) 1 is stopped and displayed, a value indicating the current symbol determination period is set in the corresponding counter. Then, in the process during the fixed time (see S860 in FIG. 101) that is periodically executed, the value of the counter is subtracted, and the values of the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad and the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae become 0. In this case, the process of ending the symbol determination period of the special symbol is executed.

In the second embodiment, different symbol determination periods are set according to the type for showing the lottery result of the special symbol (see FIGS. 92 and 93). Then, the latent state is set as the game state during this symbol determination period.

Next, the information stored in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 96, in the RAM 223 of the second embodiment, in addition to the electrical configuration of the first embodiment described above, the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa, the special figure 2 confirmation counter 223ab, and the remaining confirmation time information storage area The difference is that 223ac and the confirmation flag 223ad are added.

The special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is a counter for measuring a period (symbol confirmation period) for stopping and displaying the first special symbol, and is a symbol confirmation period of the first special symbol (special figure 1) from the main control device 110. When a confirmation command including information for indicating the above is received, the value corresponding to the symbol confirmation period of the special figure 1 is set.

The value set in the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is periodically subtracted by various counter update processes 2 (see FIG. 111) executed every 1 millisecond. In the second embodiment, the latent state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is configured to be set during the symbol determination period of the special symbol (first special symbol). 1 By managing the value of the confirmation counter 223aa, it is possible to set the remaining period information indicating the remaining period in which the latent probability state is continuously set.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the small hit of the second special symbol is won during the symbol confirmation period of the special figure 1 (during the latent state game), the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa during the small hit game. Is configured to interrupt the process of subtracting. Therefore, since the symbol determination period of the special figure 1 is not subtracted while the small hit game is being executed, the lottery of the second special symbol can be appropriately executed during the symbol determination period.

In addition to the configuration of the second embodiment described above, a process of accumulating the period during which the subtraction process of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is suspended may be provided. Specifically, a small hit game counter is provided to measure the period during which the small hit game is being executed, and the small hit game counter is used to continuously set the small hit game during the latent state. It may be configured to calculate the cumulative period of It may be configured to calculate the cumulative period during the small hit game in the latent state continuously set by using the medium counter.

In this way, by calculating the cumulative interruption information accumulating the period during which the subtraction process of the symbol determination period of Special Figure 1 is interrupted, the result of the current latent state game (RUSH game) is notified to the player. Can be done. Further, as a detailed game result of the latent state game (RUSH game), the cumulative number of acquired balls acquired during the latent state game (RUSH game), the cumulative number of small hits won, and the above-mentioned interruption accumulation Based on the information and the game result indicating whether or not there are more benefits acquired than the design value (or more than the past history), and whether or not the number of balls acquired is large for the number of small hits won. It may be configured to notify the player of the game result shown and the game result indicating whether or not the interruption cumulative information is long with respect to the number of winning small hits. Further, it may be configured to simply notify the cumulative number of acquired balls, the cumulative number of small hits, and the cumulative interruption information.

The special figure 2 confirmation counter 223ab is a counter for measuring the period (symbol confirmation period) for stopping and displaying the second special symbol, and is the symbol confirmation period of the second special symbol (special figure 2) from the main control device 110. When a confirmation command including information for indicating the above is received, the value corresponding to the symbol confirmation period of the special figure 2 is set. The specific contents are the same as those of the above-mentioned special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa, except that the measurement target is the symbol confirmation period of special figure 2 instead of the symbol confirmation period of special figure 1, and the details thereof are the same. The explanation is omitted.

The remaining fixed time information storage area 223ac determines the remaining time (remaining fixed time) of the symbol fixed period at the time when the subtraction process of the symbol fixed period of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is interrupted (temporary stop of special figure 1). It is a data area for storing the remaining fixed time information to be shown. In the second embodiment, an effect mode for restarting the subtraction process of the symbol confirmation period is set based on the remaining confirmation time information stored in the remaining confirmation time information storage area 223ac. As a result, it is possible to predict the period until the latent state ends by grasping the effect mode executed when the small hit game ends and the subtraction process of the symbol determination period is restarted.

When it is determined that the temporary stop related command has been received in the command determination process 2 (see S4162 in FIG. 106) of the voice lamp control device 113 in the remaining fixed time information storage area 223ac (S4219: Yes in FIG. 106). The remaining fixed time information (period A to period C) set in the temporary stop-related process 2 (see S4253 in FIG. 108) to be executed is stored (see S4956, S4958, and S4959 in FIG. 108). Then, it is read when setting the effect mode when restarting the subtraction process of the symbol determination period in the restart process (see S4952 in FIG. 109) executed in the temporary stop-related process 2 (see S4253 in FIG. 108). It is issued (see S5002 and S5052 in FIG. 109) and is referred to when determining an additional effect type (see S5003 and S5053 in FIG. 109).

Since the information for indicating the remaining period of the latent state game is notified when various notification conditions are satisfied in this way, the remaining period of the symbol determination period, that is, the latent state game is It is possible to acquire information indicating the remaining period that can be executed by grasping the production mode of various effects executed during the latent state. Therefore, the player can be made to pay close attention to the effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the second embodiment, the remaining period of the symbol determination period, that is, the remaining period during which the latent state game can be executed is divided into predetermined ranges, and the remaining period information for indicating the divided ranges is provided by the player. By configuring to notify the player, the player is configured to roughly grasp the remaining period of the latent state game and to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the specific remaining period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the player may be configured to notify the player of the specific remaining period in seconds.

The confirmation flag 223ad is a flag for indicating that the special symbol is in the stop display period (symbol confirmation period), and is set to ON when the special symbol is in the stop display period (symbol confirmation period). The flag. The confirmation flag 223ad is configured to be set to ON even if either the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2) is in the symbol confirmation period. There is.

The confirmation flag 223ad is executed when it is determined that the symbol confirmation related command has been received in the command determination process 2 (see S4162 in FIG. 106) of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4254: Yes in FIG. 106). It is set to on in related processing (see S4255 in FIG. 110) (see S5077 in FIG. 110). Then, when it is determined in the temporary stop-related process 2 (see S4253 in FIG. 108) that the special figure 1 temporary stop command has been received (see S4951 in FIG. 108), the fluctuation state of the special figure 1 is during the symbol determination period. It is referred to to determine whether or not it is (see S4953 in FIG. 108). Further, when it is determined that the special figure 1 restart command has been received in the restart process (S4952 in FIG. 109) executed in the temporary stop-related process 2 (see S4253 in FIG. 108), it is also determined (S5001: Yes in FIG. 109). , It is referred to in order to determine whether or not the fluctuation state of the special figure 1 is in the symbol determination period (see S5051 in FIG. 109).

As described above, in the second embodiment, at the time when the small hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) (when the small hit game is executed) or at the time when the small hit game is completed. It is determined whether the fluctuation state of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is in the fluctuation display period or the symbol confirmation period, and based on the determination result, the special figure 1 is temporarily stopped (variation display period, It is configured to set the processing when the subtraction of the symbol fixing period is interrupted) and the effect mode when restarting the special figure 1 (restarting the subtraction of the variable display period and the symbol fixing period).

With this configuration, processing is appropriately executed regardless of the fluctuation state of the first special symbol (special figure 1) at the timing when the small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2). can do.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the second embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 105. The control process of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment replaces the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 32) with respect to the control process of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment described above. (See FIG. 97), instead of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34), the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see FIG. 98), instead of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 38). The second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see FIG. 102) and the second special symbol variation stop process instead of the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (see FIG. 99) and the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40). The second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see FIG. 103) is executed instead of (see FIG. 45), and the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 2 (see FIG. 105) is executed instead of the special figure 2 disengagement stop process (see FIG. 46). The difference is that the first special symbol fixing period setting process (see FIG. 100) and the second special symbol fixing period setting process (see FIG. 104) are newly added. Other than that, the same processing is executed. The same processing is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, among the contents of the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the second embodiment, the points that are significantly different from the first embodiment described above will be briefly described. In the first embodiment described above, the latent state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is configured to be set during the variable display period of one of the special symbols (special figure 1). More specifically, in the state where the probabilistic state is set, the latent state is set during the variable display period of the special symbol won by the jackpot, and the latent state game (RUSH game) is played until the variable display period ends. It was configured to execute and execute the jackpot game immediately after the variable display period ended. As a result, it is possible for the player to continuously perform two different privilege games (a game in which a small hit occurs frequently in a latent state and a big hit game), and the player can play many games in a short period of time. It was possible to give the privilege of.

Further, since the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed in the state before the jackpot game is executed, the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed with peace of mind. In other words, even if the game result on the first half side is not good, by setting the big hit game, which generally gives the player a larger privilege than the small hit game, on the second half side of two consecutive privilege games. , It was possible to enthusiastically acquire benefits in the game (big hit game) executed on the latter half side.

In addition, since the latent state game (RUSH game) is configured to be performed during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation, it is possible to set in advance the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed. can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed for an unexpectedly long time and an excessive privilege is given to the player.

In addition, the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed varies according to the fluctuation pattern selected when the jackpot is won. In other words, since it is configured to determine whether or not the jackpot game is executed and the length of the game period of the latent state game (RUSH game) by one lottery of the special symbol, the latent state game ( The processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced as compared with the case where the processing using the dedicated selection table is executed in order to preset the length of the game period of the RUSH game).

However, in the configuration of the first embodiment described above, since the gaming period of the latent state game (RUSH game) is determined only by the fluctuation pattern (variable time) of the special symbol, the latent state game In order to prepare a plurality of game periods of (RUSH game), it is necessary to prepare a plurality of fluctuation patterns (variation times) in advance, which may put pressure on the data area for storing the fluctuation patterns.

Therefore, in the second embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the first embodiment described above, the period during which the special symbol is stopped and displayed (symbol confirmation period) is also the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed. In addition, the length of the symbol determination period is different depending on the symbol type based on the lottery result of the special symbol.

With this configuration, the game period of the latent state game (RUSH game) can be set by adding (combining) the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the symbol confirmation period, so that the latent state can be set. It is possible to set a plurality of patterns for the game period of the game (RUSH game) with a small amount of data.

Further, even in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) during the latent state game (RUSH game), a different symbol confirmation period is set according to the lottery result, so that it is set. Depending on the symbol determination period, the number of lottery of the special figure 2 executed during the predetermined latent state game (RUSH game) period (variable display time of the special figure 1) can be made different.

That is, in the lottery of the first special symbol that sets the game period of the latent state game (RUSH game), it is desired that a longer symbol confirmation period is set, and the latent state game (RUSH game). In the second special symbol lottery that is repeatedly executed during the game, it is a game that requires a shorter symbol determination period to be set, and the novelty is that different lottery results are desired depending on the special symbol type that is the target of the lottery. It is possible to provide a player with a certain playability.

Further, in the second embodiment, a process for shifting the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state (subtraction process of the time reduction counter 203f) is executed at the start of the change of the special symbol, and the high-probability state of the special symbol is executed. Is configured to be executed at the end of the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol (subtraction process of the probability variation counter 203aa) for shifting to the low probability state, and the high probability state of the special symbol is set. When the number of fluctuations (lottery) of the special symbol reaches the predetermined number of times (50 times), the high probability state of the special symbol is shifted to the low probability state, and the special symbol is set in the high probability state. When the number of fluctuations (number of lottery) of the symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (50 times), the high-probability state of the normal symbol can be changed to the low-probability state.

That is, when the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set and the number of fluctuations (lottery count) of the special symbol reaches 50 times, the fluctuation (50th variation). ) Is started, the gaming state shifts to the latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), and the timing when the fluctuation (50th fluctuation) ends (end of symbol confirmation period). At times), the gaming state can be changed to the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol).

With this configuration, even if the jackpot is not won, the latent state can be set only for a predetermined specific period (50th fluctuation period (including the symbol confirmation period)). , It is possible to make it easier for the player to experience the latent state game (RUSH game).

First, the special symbol variation processing 2 (S154) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 97. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation processing 2 (S154). The special symbol variation process 2 (S154) replaces the first special symbol variation stop process (S207) in that the processes of S251 and S252 are added to the special symbol variation process (S104) in the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263) is executed instead of the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257) and the second special symbol variation stop process (S213).

In the special symbol variation processing 2 (S154), when it is determined in the processing of S204 that the value of the special diagram 1 variation time counter 203m is 0 (S204: No), the special symbol 1 symbol determination flag 203ab is turned on. It is determined whether it is set (S251). When it is determined that the special figure 1 symbol determination flag 203ab is set to ON (S251: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257) is executed, and the process proceeds to S209. The details of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S257) will be described later with reference to FIG. 99. On the other hand, in the process of S251, when it is determined that the special figure 1 symbol determination flag 203ab is set to off (S251: No), the first special symbol change start process (S208) is executed, and S209 is performed. Move to processing.

When it is determined in the above-mentioned processing of S206 that the value of the fluctuation time counter 203m in FIG. 1 is not 0 (greater than 0) (S206: No), or when the processing of S208 and S257 is executed, the special feature is next. FIG. 2 It is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time counter 203n is larger than 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is not larger than 0 (0) (S209: No), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 symbol fixing flag 203ac is set to ON. (S252).

In the process of S252, when it is determined that the special figure 2 symbol determination flag 203ac is not set to ON (S252: No), that is, by the process of S209 and S252, the present is the second special symbol (special figure 2). If it is determined that neither the variation display nor the symbol confirmation period is in effect, the second special symbol variation start process is executed in order to newly start the variation of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) (S210), and then the book. End the process. Since the processing content of the second special symbol change start processing (S210) is the same as that of the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, in the process of S252, when it is determined that the special figure 2 symbol fixing flag 203ac is set to ON (S252: Yes), that is, the present is during the symbol fixing period of the second special symbol (special figure 2). If it is determined that the above is the case, the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S263) is executed, and this process is terminated. The details of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S263) will be described later with reference to FIG. 103.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S356) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S356). In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S356), the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is larger than 0 in place of the process of S402 with respect to the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) in the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the process (S451) for determining whether or not the product is executed is executed.

That is, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, when the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the high probability state of the special symbol is continued until the jackpot of the special symbol is won. A probability variation flag 203g was used to indicate that the state is in a high probability state, but in the second embodiment, as a condition for ending the high probability state of the special symbol, a jackpot winning of the special symbol (first end condition) is used. In addition, it has a second end condition that is satisfied when the number of fluctuations (number of lottery) of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times). Therefore, the probability variation counter 203aa is used to measure the number of fluctuations (number of lottery) of the special symbol during the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set. This probability variation counter 203aa is for measuring the number of fluctuations (number of lottery) of the special symbol until the above-mentioned second end condition is satisfied, and the value is updated based on the execution of the special symbol lottery. It is configured to be.

Even if the configuration is other than the present embodiment, it may be any configuration as long as it can determine whether or not the above-mentioned second end condition is satisfied. For example, the probability variation flag 203 g used in the first embodiment and the second embodiment are used. The probability variation counter 203aa used in the embodiment may be used, or a variation count counter for always measuring the variation count (lottery count) of the special symbol regardless of the gaming state is provided, and the setting status of the probability variation flag 203g and the setting status of the probability variation flag 203g are provided. It may be configured to determine the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the probabilistic state based on the number of updates of the fluctuation count counter.

Further, in the second embodiment, the number of changes of the special symbol, that is, the number of changes of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the number of changes of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are added to the total number of times. The end condition (second end condition) for ending the probabilistic state is set, but it is not limited to this, and only the number of changes (number of lottery) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is measured. FIG. 1 A fluctuation count counter and a special figure 2 fluctuation counter that measures only the fluctuation count (lottery count) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are provided, and the fluctuation count (lottery count) of each special symbol is provided. It may be configured to set each end condition (end condition for ending the probability change state).

Further, in the second embodiment, as the end condition for ending the high probability state (for example, the probabilistic state) of the special symbol, in addition to the first end condition based on the jackpot winning of the special symbol, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol The second end condition is set based on (number of lottery times), but other end conditions may be set. For example, the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific lottery result other than the big hit (for example, a small hit). A third end condition that is satisfied when the number of times that the number of times has reached a predetermined number of times may be set. Further, the third end condition may be set for the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol, respectively.

In addition, a timekeeping counter is provided to measure the time when the high probability state of the special symbol is set, and the fourth end condition that is satisfied when the timekeeping counter clocks the predetermined time and the high probability state of the special symbol are set. A fifth end condition that can be established based on the lottery result of the ordinary symbol executed in the state of being executed and the number of lottery may be provided.

Further, when any of the plurality of termination conditions described above is satisfied, the timing for shifting the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state is set to a timing other than the timing used in the second embodiment. It is also good, for example, immediately before starting the lottery of the special symbol, immediately after the lottery of the special symbol is executed, the timing of starting the fluctuation of the special symbol, or the predetermined time after the fluctuation of the special symbol is started (for example,). The timing when 5 seconds have passed, the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol has stopped, the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second) has elapsed since the special symbol was stopped and displayed, and the stop display period of the special symbol (design confirmed). It may be configured to shift at any timing of the end timing of the period).

By providing a plurality of end conditions for ending the high-probability state of the special symbol and a timing for ending the high-probability state of the special symbol when the end condition is satisfied, it is special for the player. Since it is possible to make it difficult to understand how long the high-probability state of the symbol will continue and at what timing (at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, at the stop of fluctuation, at the end of the symbol confirmation period), the player is nervous. It is possible to play a game while giving a feeling.

Since the other processes of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S356) are the same as those of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257), which is one of the processes in the special symbol variation process 2 (S154) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the second embodiment. Will be explained. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S257). The first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257) is a process (S851 to S858) executed during the symbol determination period of the special symbol with respect to the first special symbol variation stop process (S207) in the above-described first embodiment. , S860) is different from the point that the content of the reset process when the first special symbol (special figure 1) won the jackpot is stopped and displayed is different. Since other processes are the same as the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S207), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, returning to FIG. 97, the conditions under which the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S257 in FIG. 99) is executed will be described. In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S257 in FIG. 99), a process of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol, a process of setting a period for stopping and displaying the special symbol (symbol confirmation period), and a process of setting the set symbol confirmation. The process of measuring the period and various execution processes corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol after the symbol determination period has elapsed are configured to be executed.

Therefore, in the process of S206 of FIG. 97, that is, the timing of stopping the change of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the process of determining whether or not it is the timing to end the change of the first special symbol (special figure 1). (The value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is 0) (S206: Yes in FIG. 97), and the processing of S251, that is, the present is the first special symbol (special figure 1). When it is determined that the stop display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is being performed (the special figure 1 symbol confirmation flag 203ab is set to on) in the process of determining whether or not the stop display is in progress. (S251: Yes in FIG. 97) is executed.

Returning to FIG. 99, the explanation will be continued. In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S257), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 1 symbol determination flag 203ab is set to ON (S851). Here, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 has elapsed and the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257) is executed in order to stop and display the special figure 1, that is, in the process of S206 of FIG. 97. When the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257) is executed because the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is determined to be 0, the special figure 1 symbol confirmation flag 203ab is set to ON. Therefore, in the process of S851, it is determined that the special figure 1 symbol confirmation flag 203ab is not set on (set to off) (S851: No), and the first special symbol confirmation period setting process is executed. (S852).

In the first special symbol confirmation period setting process (S852), the process is executed to set the period (symbol confirmation period) for stopping and displaying the special symbol. Here, with reference to FIG. 100, the first special symbol determination period setting process, which is one of the processes in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. (S852) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol determination period setting process (S852). In the first special symbol confirmation period setting process (S852), the process of setting the confirmation time (symbol confirmation period) and setting the command to be transmitted to the first symbol display device 37, and the current first special symbol (special symbol). When the lottery result of 1) is a big hit, the process for shifting the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state is executed.

In the second embodiment, as a condition for shifting the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state (time-saving end condition), when the jackpot of the special symbol is won (first time-saving end condition), the normal symbol is used. When the number of fluctuations (lottery number) of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) in the state where the high probability state of is continuously set (second time reduction end condition), two time reduction ends. If the condition is satisfied and the above-mentioned first time reduction end condition is satisfied, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (the start timing of the symbol confirmation period), and the second When the two-time reduction end condition is satisfied, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol is started (the timing when the lottery of the special symbol is executed). ..

In this way, multiple conditions (time-saving end conditions) that trigger the transition of the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state are provided, and the transition timing to the low-probability state is different depending on the established time-saving end condition. By configuring to, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set at what timing for the player playing the game in the game state (time saving state, probability change state) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict whether or not the game will shift to the game state (normal state, latent state), it is possible to always pay attention to the game content and provide a game that does not get tired.

In the second embodiment, the state of the normal symbol is changed according to the above-mentioned contents, but other configurations may be used, for example, immediately before starting the lottery of the special symbol or the special symbol. Immediately after the lottery is executed, the timing to start the fluctuation of the special symbol, the timing to elapse a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, the timing to stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, etc. , It is configured to shift at any timing of the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second) has elapsed from the stop display of the special symbol or the end timing of the stop display period (symbol confirmation period) of the special symbol. May be.

In the first special symbol confirmation period setting process (S852), first, a value indicating the confirmation time (symbol confirmation time) corresponding to the stopped symbol is set in the special figure 1 confirmation time counter 203ad (S2801). In the second embodiment, the fixed time corresponds to each type selected in various tables (big hit type selection 2 table 202aa, small hit type selection 2 table 202ab, loss type selection table 202ad) used in the lottery of special symbols. Since (symbol confirmation period) is specified, a value indicating the confirmation time (symbol confirmation period) corresponding to the type stopped and displayed this time is set in the special figure 1 confirmation time counter 203ad. Specifically, for example, if the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot and the jackpot type selected using the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa (see FIG. 92) is the jackpot A3, it is confirmed. Since 150 seconds is specified as the time (design confirmation period), a value indicating 150 seconds is set in the special figure 1 confirmation time counter 203ad.

Next, the special figure 1 symbol determination flag 203ab is set to on (S2802), and it is determined whether the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to on (S2803). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S2803: Yes), that is, it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol for which the confirmation time (symbol confirmation time) is set is a jackpot. If so, the value of the time saving counter 203f is reset in order to shift the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state (S2804). On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is not set to ON (S2803: No), the processing of S2804 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2805. As a result, only when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the low probability state of the normal symbol can be set at the timing of stopping and displaying the special symbol.

In addition, for example, when the jackpot of the special symbol is won (first time reduction end condition), the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (number of lottery) is a predetermined number of times (the number of lottery) in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is continuously set. For example, when the time (50 times) is reached (second time reduction end condition) and when the two time reduction end conditions are satisfied based on the same special symbol lottery, it is determined whether or not the first time reduction end condition is satisfied. Since the process of determining whether or not the second time-saving end condition is satisfied is prioritized over the process of performing, the special symbol jackpot is won when setting the symbol determination period of the special symbol. Even in this case, the processing of S2804 will be skipped.

After executing the process of S2803 or S2804, it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is larger than 0 in the process of S2805 (S2805). When it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203aa is larger than 0 (S2805: Yes), a state command indicating the latent probability state is set (S2806), and the process proceeds to S2808. On the other hand, in the process of S2805, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is 0 (S2805: No), a state command indicating a normal state is set (S2807), and the process proceeds to the process of S2808. After executing the process of S2806 or S2807, the special figure 1 confirmation command is set (S2808). Next, the fluctuation of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S2809), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 99, the explanation will be continued. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 symbol fixing flag 203ab is set to ON in the processing of S851 (S8511: Yes), that is, the present is during the symbol fixing period of the first special symbol (special figure 1). If it is determined that there is, the process of S852 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S853. In the special symbol variation process 2 (see S154 in FIG. 97), it is determined that the special symbol 1 symbol determination flag 203ab is set to ON (S251: Yes in FIG. 97), and the first special symbol variation stop process 2 is performed. When (see S257 in FIG. 99) is executed, it is determined that the special figure 1 symbol determination in progress flag 203ab is set to ON in the process of S851.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad is 0 (S853). That is, it is determined whether or not the present is the timing when the symbol determination period of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) has elapsed. Here, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 confirmation time counter 203ad is not 0 (1 or more), that is, it is determined that the present is in the symbol confirmation period of the first special symbol (special figure 1). In the case (S853: No), the process during the fixed time (S860) is executed, and the present process is terminated. This fixed time processing (S860) executes a process of updating the elapsed time of the symbol fixed period, or updates the elapsed time of the symbol fixed period that has been temporarily stopped based on the execution of the small hit game. The process for resuming the process is executed, and the detailed contents thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 101.

On the other hand, in the process of S853, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad is 0 (S853: Yes), that is, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the fixed time (design fixed period). , Special figure 1 symbol fixing flag 203ab is set to off (S854). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is larger than 0 (S855). When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is larger than 0 (S855: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is subtracted by 1 (S856). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is 0 (S855: No), the processing of S856 is skipped and the process proceeds to S857. In the process of S857, a state command corresponding to the values of the time saving counter 203f and the probability variation counter 203aa is set (S857).

By executing the process of S856 described above, in the present embodiment, after the stop display period of the special symbol has elapsed (after the symbol determination period has elapsed), the process of subtracting the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is executed and subtracted. When the value of the subsequent probability variation counter 203aa becomes 0, the high probability state of the special symbol is configured to shift to the low probability state. As a result, the probability variation end condition (condition for shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state) that is satisfied when the number of fluctuations (lottery number) of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times) is satisfied. In this case, the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the stop display period of the special symbol has elapsed, so that the special symbol is high during the variable display period of the target special symbol and during the symbol confirmation period. It can be a stochastic state. Therefore, for example, even if the above-mentioned probability change end condition is satisfied due to the change (lottery) of the first special symbol, the probability state of the special symbol is high during the change display period of the first special symbol and the symbol confirmation period. The second special symbol change (lottery) can be executed in the state where is set.

To specifically explain the content of the state command set in the process of S857 described above, when the value of the time saving counter 203f is larger than 0 (when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set), the probability variation counter When the value of 203aa is larger than 0, a state command indicating that the gaming state is in the probabilistic state is set, and when the value of the probabilistic counter 203aa is 0, it indicates that the gaming state is in the time saving state. The status command is set. Further, when the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 (when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set) and the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is larger than 0, the gaming state is the latent state. When the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is 0, the state command indicating that the gaming state is the normal state is set.

Further, in the process of S857, when the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is larger than 0 (1 or more), the value of the probability variation counter 203aa, that is, the residual probability variation count command is set as information indicating the residual probability variation count. The state command and the residual probability variation number command set in the process of S857 are output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (see S2201 of FIG. 52) of the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 52). Will be done. The voice lamp control device 113 receives various commands output from the main control device 110, and executes a process corresponding to the command received in the command determination process 2 (see S4162 in FIG. 106). As a result, the current gaming situation can be appropriately determined on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when the first time saving end condition (condition that is satisfied when a big hit is won) is satisfied, the high probability state of the normal symbol is low-probability at the stop display timing of the special symbol. If the second time reduction end condition (condition that is satisfied according to the number of changes in the special symbol (number of lottery)) is satisfied after shifting to the state, the high probability state of the normal symbol is lowered at the start timing of the change of the special symbol. When the probability state is entered and the probability change end condition (the first probability change end condition that is satisfied when a big hit is won, the second probability change end condition that is satisfied according to the number of changes of the special symbol (lottery number)) is satisfied. Is configured to shift the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state at the end timing of the stop display period (symbol confirmation period) of the special symbol.

With this configuration, the period in which the latent state that is advantageous to the player as the game state is set can be different depending on the time-saving end condition that is established. As a result of the lottery of special symbols, it is possible not only to expect a big hit or not, but also to expect that the length of the period in which an advantageous gaming state is set becomes longer.

Next, the special figure 1 fixed period end command is set (S858), and the same processing as the processing of S801 to S805 in the above-described first embodiment is executed. Next, the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h and the probability variation counter 203aa are reset (S859), the jackpot middle flag 203o is set to ON (S807), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101, a process during a fixed time (S257 in FIG. 99), which is a process in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257 in FIG. 99) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the second embodiment ( S860) will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the contents of the processing (S860) during the fixed time.

In the process during the fixed time (S860), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S2901). This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to be turned on when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol and the lottery result is stopped and displayed (see S1602 in FIG. 46). Then, during the period in which the small hit game is being executed, the first special symbol variation stop process 2 is not executed in the process of S201 of the special symbol variation process 2 (see S154 of FIG. 97). That is, in the process of S2901 of the process during the fixed time (see S860 of FIG. 101), it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON only after the small hit game is completed. Only when the variation processing 2 (see S154 in FIG. 97) is executed.

Therefore, if it is determined in the processing of S2901 that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S2901: Yes), the special figure 1 restart command is set (S2902), and the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is set. Set 203v to off (S2903) and shift to S2904. That is, in the process of S2901 when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S2901: Yes), the small hit game is executed because the small hit game is finished. The process of S2902 and S2903 is executed in order to restart the update process of the symbol fixing period that has been temporarily stopped.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2901 that the temporary stop flag 203v in FIG. 1 is not set to on (set to off) (S2901: No), the processing of S2902 and S2903 is skipped and S2904 is performed. Move to the processing of.

In the process of S2904, the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad is decremented by 1 and updated (S2904), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S2905), and the present process is terminated.

Next, the second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S953) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 102. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S953). In the second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S953), the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is changed to the process of S1002 with respect to the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905 in FIG. 40) in the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the process (S1051) for determining whether the value is larger than 0 is executed. Since other processes are the same as the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S903), detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, since the content of the process executed in S1051 described above is the same as the content executed in S451 of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98) described above, the details thereof are detailed. The explanation is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S263), which is one of the processes in the special symbol variation process 2 (S154) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. Will be explained. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S263). The second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263) adds the processes of S1551 to S1563 to the second special symbol variation stop process (see S213 in FIG. 45) in the first embodiment described above, and S1506. The difference is that the process of S1560 is provided instead of the process of S1509 and the process of S1509 and S1510 is deleted. Since other processes are the same as the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S213 in FIG. 45), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S263), the symbol determination period elapses after the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, similarly to the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99) described above. The process up to this is executed, and the difference is that the control target is changed from the first special symbol (special figure 1) to the second special symbol (special figure 2). Of the various processes executed in the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263), the control target is simply the various processes of the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99) described above. The detailed description will be omitted for the processing in which the symbol types are different.

In the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S263), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 2 symbol determination flag 203ac is set to ON (S1551). If it is determined that the special figure 2 symbol determination flag 203ac is set to ON (S1551: Yes), the processing of S1552 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1553. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1551 that the special figure 2 symbol fixing flag 203ac is set to off (S1551: No), the second special symbol fixing period setting process (S1552) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 104, the second special symbol which is one of the processes in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see S263 in FIG. 103) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the second embodiment. The fixed period setting process (S1552) will be described. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol determination period setting process (S1552). In the second special symbol fixing period setting process (S1552), the symbol type targeted for the process executed in the above-mentioned first special symbol fixing period setting process (see S852 in FIG. 100) is set to the first special symbol. To the second special symbol, the command to be set is the special symbol 2 confirmation command corresponding to the second special symbol, and the symbol type to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the second special symbol. Only the differences are made, and the other processing contents are the same. Therefore, the content of the first special symbol determination period setting process (see S852 in FIG. 100) described above will be referred to, and a detailed description of this process will be omitted.

Returning to FIG. 103, the description will be continued. After executing the process of S1551 or S1552, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae is 0 (S1553), and the value of the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae is not 0 (that is,). When it is determined (S1553: No), the value of the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae is updated (S1562), and the display of the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S1563). ), End this process.

The process of S1563 updates the display of the second special symbol that has already been stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, the symbol is lit and displayed (including a display that blinks at a high speed to the extent that the player recognizes that the symbol is lit) in order to indicate that the special symbol is stopped by the first symbol display device 37. Therefore, in the process of S1563, an instruction for lighting the second special symbol is output to the first symbol display device 37.

In the case of using the configuration in which the special symbol is continuously lit during the symbol determination period as in the present embodiment, for example, the second special symbol determination period setting process (see S1552 in FIG. 104). In the process of S3009, an instruction for stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol (stop display) is output, and at the same time, information indicating a period for stopping and displaying (design confirmation period) is also output, and a predetermined period (symbol confirmation) is output. During the period), the second special symbol may be configured to be lit and displayed in advance. With this configuration, it is not necessary to execute the process for updating the display contents of the first symbol display device 37 each time in the process executed in a short cycle, so that the processing load of the main control device 110 Can be reduced.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae is 0 (S1553: Yes), the special figure 2 symbol fixing flag 203ac is set to off (S1554). Next, when it is determined whether the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to on (S1555) and when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to off (S1555: No), the probability variation counter 203aa It is determined whether or not the value of is greater than 0 (S1556).

When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is larger than 0 (S1556: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is subtracted by 1 (S1557), and the process proceeds to S1558. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1555 that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S1555: Yes), or when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is 0 in the processing of S1556. (S1556: No) skips the process of S1557 and shifts to the process of S1558.

In the process of S1558, a state command corresponding to the values of the time reduction counter 203f and the probability change counter 203aa is set (S1558), then the special figure 2 confirmation period end command is set (S1559), and then the first embodiment described above is performed. The same processing of S1501 to S1505 as above is executed. Here, in the process of S1501, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is not set to on (set to off) (S1501: No), the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 2 (S1561) is determined. ) Is executed to end this process.

Further, when the processing of S1505 is completed, next, the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to off, the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is reset (S1560), and the same processing of S1507 as that of the first embodiment described above is executed. Then, this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 105, the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 2 (S) which is one of the processes in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S263) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment ( S1561) will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 2 (S1561). The special figure 2 disengagement stop process 2 (S1561) in the second embodiment is different from the special figure 2 disengagement stop process (S1508) in the first embodiment in that the processes S1607 to S1610 are not executed. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 111. The control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment is a command determination process 2 instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 59) with respect to the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment described above. (See FIG. 106), the various counter update processes 2 (see FIG. 111) are executed instead of the various counter update processes (see FIG. 72), and the other processes are the same. Specifically, the processing executed when various commands output by changing the control content executed by the main control device 110 from the first embodiment and the various additions from the second embodiment are performed. A process to update the value of the counter has been added.

First, the command determination process 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 106. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 2 (S4162). The command determination process 2 (S4162) differs from the command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 60) in the above-described first embodiment in that the processes S4251 to S4255 are added. Since other processes are the same as the command determination process (S4112) in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the command determination process 2 (S4162) is executed, first, the same processes of S4201 to S4216 as the command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 60) in the first embodiment described above are executed. Then, in the process of S4215, when it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S4215: No), then it is determined whether or not the remaining number-related command has been received (S4251). ).

Here, as the command related to the remaining number of times, the remaining time reduction command (set by the process of S603 in FIG. 36) indicating the remaining number of times (the number of remaining fluctuations of the special symbol) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is continuously set is set. There is a residual probability variation number command (command set by the process of S857 in FIG. 99) indicating the remaining number of times (the number of remaining fluctuations of the special symbol) in which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set. If it is determined that the command related to the remaining number of times has been received (S4251: Yes), the remaining number of times update process 2 (S4252) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 107, the remaining number update process 2 (S4252), which is one process in the command determination process 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described. .. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the contents of the remaining number update process 2 (S4252). The remaining number update process 2 (S4252) is different in that the processes S4851 to S4852 are added to the remaining number update process (S4218) in the first embodiment described above. Specifically, it differs in that a process for transmitting a command for displaying the residual probability variation number to the display control device 114 is added.

In the remaining number update process 2 (S4252), first, it is determined whether or not the remaining time reduction command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4801). When it is determined that the remaining time reduction command has been received (S4801: Yes), the display remaining time reduction command corresponding to the command is set (S4802). On the other hand, if it is determined that the command for the number of remaining time reductions has not been received (S4801: No), the process of S4802 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S4851. Next, it is determined whether or not the residual probability variation number command has been received (S4851). When it is determined that the residual probability variation count command has been received (S4851: Yes), the display residual probability variation count command corresponding to the command is set (S4852), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the residual probability variation number command has not been received (S4851: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Returning to FIG. 106, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4251 that the remaining number-related command has not been received (S4251: No), it is determined whether or not the temporary stop-related command has been received (S4219). Here, the temporary stop-related command includes the special figure 1 temporary stop command (see S1603 in FIG. 46) that is set when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v for temporarily stopping the first special symbol is set to ON. And the variable display of the first special symbol that has been temporarily stopped, or the special figure 1 restart command (see S2902 in FIG. 101) that is set when the stop display is restarted. If it is determined that the temporary stop-related command has been received (S4219: Yes), the temporary stop-related process 2 (S4253) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 108, a temporary stop-related process 2 (S4253), which is one process in the command determination process 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described. .. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the contents of the temporary stop-related process 2 (S4253). The temporary stop-related process 2 (S4253) is different from the temporary stop-related process (S4203) in the first embodiment described above in that a process for calculating the remaining fixed time is added.

In this temporary stop-related process 2 (S4253), when the variation display of the first special symbol or the elapsed time of the stop display is temporarily interrupted (temporary stop), the temporarily stopped first special symbol is displayed. Processing is performed for the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variable display mode or the effect mode corresponding to the stop display mode. In the temporary stop-related process 2 (S4253), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4951). If it is determined that the temporary stop command has not been received (S4951: No), the restart process (S4952) is executed and the present process is terminated. The details of the restart process (S4952) will be described later with reference to FIG. 109. On the other hand, in the process of S4951, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop command has been received (S4951: Yes), that is, the variation display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is performed with the execution of the small hit game, or If it is determined that it is the timing to temporarily stop the stop display, then it is determined whether the confirmation flag 223ad is set to ON (S4953). Here, when it is determined that the confirmation flag 223ad is set to ON (S4953: Yes), the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (during the symbol confirmation period), so that the set symbol confirmation time is set. The remaining time of (the symbol confirmation time of the first special symbol) is calculated (S4954), and the process proceeds to S4955.

In the process of S4954, the remaining time of the set symbol confirmation time is calculated by reading the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa, that is, the value indicating the remaining time of the symbol confirmation time of the first special symbol. Next, it is determined whether the remaining time of the symbol determination time calculated in the process of S4954 is less than 2 seconds (S4955). If it is determined that the remaining time is less than 2 seconds (S4955: Yes), a period A indicating that the remaining fixed time is short is set in the remaining fixed time information storage area 223ac (S4956), and the process of S4952 is executed. Then, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4955, when it is determined that the remaining time is not less than 2 seconds (2 seconds or more) (S4955: No), then the remaining time is 2 seconds or more and less than 60 seconds. (S4957). In the process of S4957, when it is determined that the remaining time is 2 seconds or more and less than 60 seconds (S4957: Yes), it is determined that the remaining fixed time information storage area 223ac has a normal remaining fixed time. The indicated period B is set (S4958), the process of S4952 is executed, and the present process is terminated.

When it is determined in the process of S4957 that the remaining time is not less than 60 seconds (60 seconds or more) (S4957: No), it indicates that the remaining confirmation time is long in the remaining confirmation time information storage area 223ac. The period C is set (S4959), the process of S4952 is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4953, when it is determined that the confirmation flag 223ad is set to off (S4953: No), that is, when it is determined that the present is in the variable display period of the first special symbol, The process for calculating the remaining variation time of the first special symbol (see S4903 to S4908) executed in the temporary stop-related process of the first embodiment described above (see S4220 in FIG. 67) is executed, and the process of S4952 is executed. Move to. Since the process for calculating the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol (see S4903 to S4908) is the same as that of the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 109, a restart process (S4952), which is a process in the temporary stop-related process 2 (S4253) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the contents of the restart process (S4952).

In the second embodiment, in addition to the variable display of the first special symbol (during the variable display period), the second special symbol can be changed (lottery) even during the stop display (during the symbol confirmation period). Since it is configured, when the small hit game is executed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol, the stop display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped (subtraction of the symbol confirmation period is temporarily suspended). It is configured as follows. Further, at the timing when the small hit game is completed, the stop display of the first special symbol is restarted (the subtraction of the symbol confirmation period is restarted). Therefore, in the second embodiment, the situation of the first special symbol when the variable display or the stop display of the first special symbol is restarted is determined, and the effect mode after the restart is set based on the determination result. It is configured to do.

In the restart process (S4952), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 restart command has been received (S5001). If it is determined that the special figure 1 restart command has not been received (S5001: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 restart command has been received (S5001: Yes), it is determined whether or not the confirmation flag 223ad is set to ON (S5051). When it is determined that the confirmation flag 223ad is set to ON (S5051: Yes), that is, when the timing of receiving the special figure 1 restart command is during the stop display of the first special symbol, the remaining confirmation Based on the reading (S5052) of the remaining fixed time information stored in the time information storage area 223ac, the read remaining fixed time information and the additional effect counter 223i, the additional effect type is determined from the additional effect selection 2 table 222aa (). S5053), an additional display command corresponding to the additional effect type determined in the process of S5053 is set (S5054), and the information set in the remaining fixed time information storage area 223ac is cleared (S5055). Then, the fixing flag 223ad is set to off (S5056), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5051, when it is determined that the confirmation flag 223ad is set to off (S5051: No), that is, the timing at which the special figure 1 restart command is received is in the variation display of the first special symbol. In some cases, the same processing of S5002 to S5005 as the fluctuation resumption processing of the first embodiment described above (S4902 in FIG. 68) is executed, and this processing is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 106, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4219 that the temporary stop-related command has not been received (S4219: No), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination-related command has been received (S4254). If it is determined that the symbol confirmation-related command has been received (S4254: Yes), the symbol confirmation-related process (S4255) is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the symbol confirmation related command has not been received (S4254: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S4221), and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 110, a symbol determination-related process (S4255), which is one process in the command determination process 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the contents of the symbol determination related process (S4255).

In the symbol confirmation-related processing (S4255), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 confirmation command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S5071). When it is determined that the special figure 1 confirmation command has been received (S5071: Yes), the display special figure 1 confirmation command corresponding to the received command is set (S5072). Next, the value corresponding to the received command is set in the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa (S5073), and the process proceeds to S5074. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5071 that the special figure 1 confirmation command has not been received (S5071: No), the processes of S5072 and S5073 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S5074.

In the process of S5074, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received (S5074). When it is determined that the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received (S5074: Yes), the display special figure 2 confirmation command corresponding to the received command is set (S5075), and the value corresponding to the received command is specified. 2 Set to the confirmation counter 223ab (S5076), set the confirmation flag 223ad to ON (S5077), and end this process. On the other hand, in the process of S5074, if it is determined that the special figure 2 confirmation command has not been received (S5074: No), the process of S5075 and S5076 is skipped as it is, the process of S5077 is executed, and this process is terminated. do.

Next, various counter update processes 2 (S4161) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 111. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the contents of various counter update processes 2 (S4161).

In the various counter update processes 2 (S4161), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is larger than 0 (S5451). When it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is larger than 0 (S5451: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is subtracted by 1 (S5452). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is 0 (S5451: No), the processing of S5452 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S5453. In the process of S5453, it is determined whether or not the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5453). When it is determined that the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5453: Yes), the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is subtracted by 1 (S5454), and the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa And the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is read out (S5455). Next, the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is subtracted from the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa read in the process of S5455 to calculate the remaining time (S5456). Next, the processes of S5407 and S5408 are executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5453, when it is determined that the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is 0 (S5453: No), the processes of S5454 to S5456 and S5407 are skipped, and the process of S5408 is executed. , End this process.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 135. The second embodiment described above is configured so that the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) fluctuate at the same time as in the first embodiment described above (so-called). , Simultaneous fluctuation type), so that a large number of small hit games (RUSH games) can be executed by executing the lottery (variation) of Special Figure 2 during the period when the latent state is set as the game state. Was configured in.

Furthermore, as a condition for setting the latent probability state (condition for enabling the RUSH game), the first probability change end that is established when a big hit is won in the lottery of Special Figure 1 in the state where the probability change state is set. A condition and a second probability change end condition that is satisfied when the number of changes (lottery number) of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (50 times) are set, and if the first probability change end condition is satisfied, a big hit is won. When the period (symbol confirmation period) in which the special symbol (special figure 1) indicating that the item has been stopped is stopped and displayed is in the latent state and the second probability change end condition is satisfied, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be in a latent state during the period (variable display period) and the symbol confirmation period.

In addition, the length of the symbol confirmation period is different depending on the lottery result of the special symbol, and the symbol confirmation period is set longer when the jackpot is won than when the jackpot is not won. It was configured as follows.

In addition, if a big hit is won in the lottery of one special symbol (special figure 1), an invalid lottery that does not win the big hit in the lottery of the other symbol (special figure 2) will be executed. It was configured so that the value related to the condition for changing the game state was not updated by this invalid lottery. Specifically, during the period when the jackpot is won in the lottery of special figure 1 (during the variable display period of the special symbol winning the jackpot and during the symbol confirmation period), the lottery of special figure 2 is executed. Even if this is done, the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is configured so as not to be updated (subtracted).

In the second embodiment configured in this way, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the special figure 1 in the state where the probability variation state is set, the period during which the jackpot game for the jackpot winning is executed (variable display). Until the period (period, symbol confirmation period) ends, the value of the probability change counter 203aa will not be updated (subtracted) no matter how many times the fluctuation (lottery) of special figure 2 is executed, so special figure 2 can be relieved. Was able to carry out the fluctuations of.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the types of probability change end conditions are increased as compared with the above-mentioned second embodiment, and the period in which the latent probability state is set is longer than that of the above-mentioned second embodiment. is doing. Specifically, as the probability change end condition, the probability change end condition (third probability change end condition) is satisfied when a small hit is won in the special figure 1 in the state where the probability change state is set, and the third probability change end condition is satisfied. When the probability change end condition is satisfied, the game state is configured to shift from the probability change state to the latent state when the small hit game is started.

Further, the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set (value of the probability variation counter 203aa) and the period in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (value of the time reduction counter 203f) are made the same (for example, "4". ”), When the probability change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set and the jackpot is not won, the game state shifts from the probability change state to the normal state. It is configured in.

That is, in the third embodiment, while the probabilistic state (high probability state for both special symbol and normal symbol) is set, a small hit is won by the lottery of special figure 1, and the normal symbol is moved to the low probability state. By shifting, the period from the start timing of the small hit game to the setting of the low probability state of the special symbol can be set as the latent state.

With this configuration, it is possible to change the period during which the latent state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is continuously set according to the timing of winning a small hit in the lottery of Special Figure 1. .. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more interested in the lottery result of the special symbol, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not get tired of.

Further, in the third embodiment, when a big hit is won in the final variation in which the probability variation state ends, a variation pattern having a long variation time is easily selected. As a result, even if the final fluctuation of the probabilistic state is reached without winning a small hit, the latent probable state can be set for a long time, so that the player can play the game with expectations until the end. Can be made.

Here, with reference to FIG. 112, the types of benefits given based on the game content of the special figure 1 in the probabilistic state in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 112 is a schematic diagram summarizing the relationship between the game content and the grant privilege of the special figure 1 game after the probability change state is set. As shown in FIG. 112, in the present embodiment, the probability change state is set in a predetermined period (4 fluctuations of the special symbol) after the end of the jackpot, and the number of fluctuations during the probability change state (after the jackpot). The content of the privilege given to the player is made different according to the number of changes in the special figure) and the lottery result of the special figure.

Specifically, in the first and second special figure 1 fluctuations (special figure 1 lottery) after the probability change state is set, if the lottery result (lottery result of special figure 1) is a big hit, there are many players. In addition to the jackpot game in which the prize ball can be obtained, the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating that the special figure 1 is a jackpot (symbol confirmation period). ) Is set. In addition, when the lottery result (lottery result of special figure 1) is a small hit, the small hit game is executed based on the lottery result of special figure 1 as the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed. After that, it is stipulated that the period (symbol confirmation period) until the number of special symbol changes after the big hit reaches 4 times is set.

That is, when a small hit is won in the first special figure 1 lottery after the end of the big hit, the timing at which the small hit game is started (the timing at which the first special symbol change is stopped and the small hit game is executed). ) To the end of the fourth special figure change after the end of the jackpot, the latent state game (RUSH game) is set. Therefore, as the period in which the latent state (RUSH state) is set, the longest period can be set, which is the "ultra-long". In addition, if the lottery result (lottery result of special figure 1) is out of the first and second special figure 1 fluctuation (special figure 1 lottery) after the probability change state is set, no privilege is given to the player. Is not given.

In the third special figure 1 fluctuation (special figure 1 lottery) after the probability change state is set, the latent probability state is set under the same conditions as the first and second times after the probability change state is set as described above. It is composed. Here, if the small hit is won, in addition to the small hit game, the period until the end of the fourth special figure change is set as the latent state, so after the above-mentioned probability change state is set. Compared to the case where a small hit is won in the 1st and 2nd special figure 1 fluctuation (special figure 1 lottery), the period in which the latent state is set is shorter.

Further, in the third embodiment, as the number of special figure 1 fluctuations (special figure 1 lottery) after the probabilistic change state is set increases during the probabilistic change state, the fluctuation having a longer fluctuation time when the jackpot is won. It is configured so that the pattern can be easily selected. Therefore, it is easier to lengthen the period in which the latent probability state is set as compared with the case where the jackpot is won in the first and second special figure 1 fluctuations (special figure 1 lottery) after the above-mentioned probability change state is set. be able to.

Next, in the fourth special figure change (special figure lottery) after the probability change state is set, that is, in the special figure final change in the probability change state, the special figure change is started regardless of the result of the special figure lottery. The period from to the end (until after the symbol confirmation period has elapsed) is set as the latent state. In the third embodiment, it is easy to set a long fluctuation time when a big hit is won in the final fluctuation of the special map in the probabilistic state (the fourth special map fluctuation after the probabilistic change state is set). The length of the period in which the latent state is set is "long".

If the jackpot is not won due to the final change of the special figure in the probable change state, the normal state is set after the symbol confirmation period elapses, and the fifth and subsequent special figure lottery is executed.

<Regarding the content of the staging display in the third embodiment>
In the third embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 112, the period in which the latent state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is set differs depending on the transition condition (probability change end condition) that is satisfied. In the probable change state, the possibility that the latent state is set and the suggestion effect (bingo game) for suggesting the timing when the latent state is set to the player are executed. It is composed.

Therefore, with reference to FIGS. 113 to 115, the display contents of the suggestion effect (bingo game) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment will be described. Among the elements displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the same elements as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 113 (a), the display contents of the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game in which the probability change state is set will be described. FIG. 113A is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display screen at the end of the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 113 (a), in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the special figure 1 display area Dm1 and the special figure 2 display area are the same as those in the second embodiment described above. Dm2 and a guide display area Dm3 are formed, and in addition, a special figure 1 hold number display area Dm4 showing the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 and a special figure 2 hold number display area Dm5 showing the number of hold balls in special figure 2. , Are formed.

FIG. 113A shows the end screen of the jackpot game executed based on the special figure 1 jackpot, and shows that the lottery result of the special figure 1 is a jackpot in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. The stop display mode “777” of the third symbol is displayed, and “−” indicating that the special figure 2 variation is not executed is displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2. Further, in the guidance display area Dm3, the characters "left-handed" are displayed to indicate that the jackpot game was performed in the left-handed game.

In the third embodiment, the game content (right-handed or left-handed) displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 during the jackpot game is the same as the game content at the time of the jackpot winning, as in the second embodiment described above. It is configured to be. That is, the state shown in FIG. 113 (a) is a big hit won during the left-handed game.

Further, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, a bingo card 820 used in a probabilistic state set after the end of the jackpot game is displayed. Here, the suggestion effect (bingo game) executed in the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, Bingo is used as a suggestion effect to suggest to the player whether or not the latent probability state is set or whether or not the jackpot is won during the period when the probability change state is set. The game is configured to run.

In this bingo game, a bingo card 820 (see FIG. 113 (a)) in which arbitrary numbers are arranged for nine squares (vertical 3 x horizontal 3) is displayed on the jackpot end screen (ending screen). , Numbers are announced based on the lottery of Special Figure 1 executed in the state where the probability change state is set, and the number is announced to the player based on the announced number and the arrangement of the numbers described on the Bingo card 820. An effect suggesting a game result (lottery result of special figure 1) is executed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 113 (b) to 115, display contents (effect contents) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during execution of the bingo game will be described. When the bingo game is started (when the special figure 1 fluctuation in the probability change state is started), the display shown in FIG. 113 (b) is executed. FIG. 113 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents displayed when the special figure 1 fluctuation (first time) is executed after the jackpot ends.

As shown in FIG. 113 (b), when the special figure 1 change (first time) is executed, a display mode indicating that the special figure 1 is changing is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. .. Then, "3" is displayed in the special figure 1 reserved number display area Dm4, and it is subtracted (updated) from the value ("4") shown in FIG. 113 (a) due to the fluctuation of the special figure 1. Shows.

Further, in the lower left area of the main display area Dm, the number "1" is displayed as the lottery result 821 of the bingo game based on the lottery result of this time (special figure 1 fluctuation (first time)), and the lower right area. Displays the remaining number display 822 indicating the remaining number "last 3" of the bingo game. Here, for example, an example of the effect in the case where the special figure 1 fluctuation (fourth time) in the probable change state is a big hit will be described with reference to FIG. 114.

FIG. 114 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the bingo game during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 fluctuation (third time) when the special figure 1 fluctuation (fourth time) in the probability change state is a big hit. , FIG. 114 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents during the change of the special figure 1 change (fourth time). In the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 112, in the final variation of the probabilistic state (special figure 1 variation (fourth time)), the latent state is set at the timing when the variation display of the special figure 1 is started. During the latent state, the latent state game (RUSH game) in which the lottery of the special figure 2 is executed by the right-handed game is executed.

Therefore, in order to have the player immediately perform a right-handed game immediately after the final change of the probability change state is executed (after the symbol confirmation period of the special figure 1 change (third time) has elapsed), the latent state is changed. The effect result (displaying two rows of bingo) for notifying that it is set is before the special figure 1 change (4th time) in which the latent state is set (during the special figure 1 change (3rd time)). It is configured to be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to set the latent probability state in a state in which the player fully understands that the latent probability state is set.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in the third embodiment, if the big hit or the small hit is not won in the lottery of the special figure 1 in the final change of the probable change state (when it is out of order), it is short. The fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time (1 second) is selected, and the effect result (bingo two-row alignment display) for notifying that the latent state is set in the bingo game is not displayed. .. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the notification to the player that the latent state is actually set for a short time, and to execute the failure effect of the bingo game. Further, when the latent state for a short period of time is set, the guide display area Dm3 does not display that the player is to perform the right-handed game, so that the annoyance to the game can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 114 (a), the description will be continued. In FIG. 114 (a), the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 fluctuation (third time) is performed, and the lottery result “1” of the special figure 1 fluctuation (first time) and the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation (second time) are performed. "8" is displayed on the left side of the main display area Dm as the past history 823, and "5" is displayed as the lottery result 821 this time. Then, in the Bingo card 820, the squares corresponding to "1", "8", and "5" displayed in this bingo game are changed to "cross marks", and two rows of lines are formed and displayed. ..

Further, "double bingo" is displayed as a situation display mode 824 indicating the current situation, and a comment of "super lucky" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In this way, by notifying the player that the bingo game was successful during the change before the special figure 1 change (4th time) that actually wins the jackpot, the player can be directed. It is possible to provide a period of successful satisfaction and to notify in advance that it is necessary to perform a right-handed game from the next fluctuation.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a comment notifying that the right-handed game is performed from the next fluctuation (a comment notifying that the right-handed game condition is satisfied (the condition for setting the latent state is satisfied)). "It's about to be a right-handed game" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, but the player is notified in advance of the timing when the latent state is set, that is, the timing when the right-handed game is performed. For example, the remaining period until the end of the special figure 1 fluctuation (third time) (the remaining period obtained by adding the remaining fluctuation display period of the special figure 1 fluctuation (third time) and the symbol fixing period) is calculated. A calculation means may be provided, and information based on the calculation result of the calculation means (information for indicating the residual fluctuation period of the special figure 1 variation (third time)) may be notified to the player.

In the third embodiment, when the ball is entered into the second entry opening 640 in a state where the probability change state is set as the gaming state (when the start condition of FIG. 2 is satisfied), the ball is entered into the second entry opening 640. It is configured so that a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time (0.5 seconds to 1 second) is set regardless of the lottery result. As a result, if the right-handed game is performed in the state where the probability change state is set and the fluctuation (lottery) of the special figure 2 is executed, the probability change state is set for the period during which the latent probability state can be set. Since the left-handed game is extremely short compared to the case where the left-handed game is performed in the state and the fluctuation (lottery) is executed in the special figure 2, the right-handed game in the probable change state can be regarded as a disadvantageous game for the player. .. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an act of intentionally performing an irregular game different from the displayed content in the probabilistic state in which "left-handed" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 of the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the ball is entered into the second entry opening 640 in a state where the probability change state is set as the gaming state (when the start condition of FIG. 2 is satisfied). ) Is configured to set a variation pattern with a short variation time (0.5 seconds to 1 second) regardless of the lottery result, but the variation is not limited to this, and the variation in Special Figure 2 during the probability variation state is not limited to this. The time may be configured as a fluctuation time (for example, 120 seconds) extremely longer than the fluctuation time in FIG. 1.

With this configuration, for example, when the right-handed game is performed in a state where the probability change state is set while ignoring the progress content of the suggestion effect (bingo game) executed by the third symbol display device 81. In addition, since the special figure 2 fluctuation for a long time (for example, 120 seconds) is executed, even if the latent state is set after that (for example, the fluctuation of the special figure 1 fluctuation (fourth time) in which the jackpot is won). Even if the display is started), since the special figure 2 change is being executed, a new latent state game (a game that executes the special figure 2 change while the latent state is set) is newly performed. It can be difficult to execute.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the latent probability state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is set based on the fluctuation period of the special symbol (special figure 1) and the symbol determination period, the latent probability state is set. The longer the period from when is set (the predetermined special figure 1 fluctuation starts) to the end of the executing special figure 2 fluctuation, the longer the period during which the special figure 2 fluctuation in the latent state can be executed (latent probability). The state game period) becomes shorter. Further, when a sufficient time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the setting of the latent probability state in order to surely prevent the special figure 2 fluctuation from being executed in the state where the probability change state is set. Similarly, when the right-handed game is started from, the latent state game period is shortened. Therefore, in order to grasp the timing of executing the right-handed game, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed to the player. You can watch the contents displayed on the screen.

Then, when the right-handed game is performed during the latent state and the special figure 2 variation is executed, the effect display during the RUSH game (latent state game) shown in FIG. 114 (b) is displayed by the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed on the display screen of. FIG. 114 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the fourth special figure change is a big hit after the end of the big hit (after setting the probability change state). In the present embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, when the latent state is set, the latent state game (RUSH game) in which the variation (lottery) of the special figure 2 is executed by the right-handed game is performed. That is, in the latent state, the right-handed game is an advantageous game, and the left-handed game is a disadvantageous game.

In the display screen shown in FIG. 114 (b), in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, the guide display area Dm3 is "right-handed", and the special figure 1 display area Dm1 is changed to the special figure 1 (4). The display mode indicating that the change of the special figure 2 is in progress, and the display mode indicating that the change in the special figure 2 is being executed are displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2. Is displayed with "0" indicating that there is no reserved number of special figure 1, and "0" indicating that there is no reserved number of special figure 2 is displayed in the special figure 2 reserved ball number display area Dm5.

During the period when this RUSH game is being executed, the character 811 imitating a rabbit runs from the left to the right and opens the treasure box 812 found on the way (the same effect as the first embodiment). Is displayed in the main display area Dm, and in the sub display area Ds, the character "RUSH in progress" indicating that the latent state game (RUSH game) is in progress is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the current latent state game (RUSH game) is in progress.

In FIGS. 113 to 114 described above, when the second probability change end condition that is satisfied based on the number of changes of the special symbol is satisfied as the probability change end condition for ending the probability change state, that is, the final change of the probability change state (4). An example of the display screen when the latent state is set by the special figure change) was explained. In the third embodiment, as a probability change end condition (a condition for shifting a high probability state of a normal symbol to a low probability state) for ending the probability change state (shifting the probability change state to the latent probability state), the first Probability change end condition (probability change end condition established based on big hit winning), second probability change end condition (probability change end condition established based on the number of changes of special symbol), third probability change end condition (established based on small hit winning) It has a probability change end condition), and is configured to shift the gaming state from the probability change state to the latent state when any of the end conditions is satisfied.

Next, with reference to FIG. 115 (a), the display displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the first probability variation end condition is satisfied before the second probability variation end condition described above is satisfied. Explain the contents. FIG. 115A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents executed during the third special figure change in the case where the third special figure change is a big hit after the big hit (after the probability change state is set). It is a figure.

In the third embodiment, when the first probability change end condition (winning the jackpot of the special symbol) is satisfied, the special symbol for indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot is stopped and displayed. It is configured so that the latent state is set during the period until the stop display ends (the symbol confirmation period). Therefore, since the probability variation state is continuously set during the variation display period of the special figure 1 (during the variation of the special figure), in the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 115 (a), the special figure 1 display area Dm1 is special. A display mode indicating that FIG. 1 is in variable display is displayed, and “left-handed” is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. Then, "4" is displayed in the lottery result 821, and the bingo card 820 is displayed in a display mode indicating that a line has been established.

Further, although detailed description is omitted, in the third embodiment, when the above-mentioned first probability variation end condition is satisfied and the latent probability state is set during the symbol determination period of the special symbol, it becomes a target. It is configured so that different numbers can be displayed multiple times as the lottery result 821 of the bingo game during the variable display period of the special symbol, and the information for showing the final result of this bingo game is notified to the player step by step. It is configured to do.

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 115 (a), the special figure 1 shows a state in which a single row of lines is established during the variable display. For example, the type of the jackpot won this time is a long symbol confirmed. In the case of a jackpot type (for example, jackpot C) in which a period (for example, 300 seconds) is set, a different number as the lottery result 821 of the bingo game during the remaining period until the variable display of the special figure 1 ends. (For example, "5") is newly displayed, and the effect that the result of the bingo game is "establishment of two rows of lines" is executed.

In this way, the result of the bingo game (the number of established lines) is configured to be variable a plurality of times during the variable display of the special symbol. As a result, the content of the privilege (RUSH game, jackpot game) given to the player at the end of this special symbol change can be grasped with the passage of the change display period of the special symbol. 3 The effect content displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 81 can be continuously watched.

In addition, if the type of jackpot won this time is a jackpot type (for example, jackpot A) in which a short symbol confirmation period (for example, 5 seconds) is set, the result of the bingo game (number of established lines) does not change. A number (for example, "3") may be displayed, and the result of the bingo game may be configured to be "a row of lines established".

By configuring in this way, while unifying the number of lottery results 821 displayed by the bingo game (the number of numbers displayed in the past history 823), the result of the bingo game (number of established lines) and the special symbol It is possible to associate the content of the privilege (amount of privilege) given after the end of the variable display of. Therefore, since the player can pay attention to the content and the result of the bingo game, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the third embodiment, the number of lottery results 821 displayed during the bingo game (the number displayed in the past history 823) is unified regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol, and the result of the bingo game. We have shown an effect that makes the player excited about whether or not (the number of established lines) will increase, but it is not limited to this, for example, the content of the privilege (amount of privilege) given after the variable display of the special symbol ends. , The number of lottery results 821 displayed during the bingo game (the number of numbers displayed in the past history 823) may be associated with each other. As a result, it is possible to give a privilege that is advantageous to the player when a large number is displayed as the lottery result 821 during the bingo game, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 115 (b), the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the third probability change end condition is satisfied will be described. FIG. 115B schematically shows an example of the display content executed during the second special figure change when the second special figure change is a small hit after the big hit (after setting the probability change state). It is a schematic diagram.

The third embodiment is configured so that the timing at which the latent probability state is set differs depending on the type of the probability change end condition that has been established. Specifically, when the first probability change end condition is satisfied, the period (target symbol) from the time when the stop display of the corresponding special symbol is started to the end of the stop display (until the jackpot game is started). When the symbol confirmation period) is set as the latent state and the second probability change end condition is satisfied, from the time when the variation display of the corresponding special symbol is started to the end of the stop display of the corresponding special symbol. The period (variation display period of the target symbol and the symbol confirmation period) is set as the latent state. That is, regardless of which of the above-mentioned first probability change end condition and second probability change end condition is satisfied, the latent probability state is set within the period of the special symbol 1 change.

On the other hand, if the third probability change end condition is satisfied, a small hit is won in any of the multiple (4 times) special figure 1 fluctuations that can be executed within the period in which the probability change state is set. In addition, the latent state is set in the period from the time when the stop display of the special symbol indicating that the lottery result is a small hit is started to the end of the stop display of the special symbol which is the final change of the probability change state. .. That is, if a small hit is won in the special figure lottery (first special figure lottery) executed immediately after the probability change state is set, the special symbol indicating the result (small hit) of the first special lottery is stopped. After being displayed, after the 2nd to 4th special symbol lottery period (variable display period and symbol confirmation period), until the stop display of the special symbol indicating the result of the 4th special symbol lottery is completed (multiple times) The latent state will be set during the special figure fluctuation period).

As shown in FIG. 115 (b), when the third probability change end condition is satisfied, "ALL" for all numbers is displayed in the lottery result 821, and 8 lines (all lines) are satisfied. The Bingo card 820 is displayed in the display mode indicating. Then, "341" indicating that a small hit has been won is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, and "right" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 to indicate that the latent state game (RUSH game) has started. Hitting "is displayed.

Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the third embodiment, whether or not the first probability change end condition or the second probability change end condition is satisfied is a special figure variation (special figure lottery) in which each probability change end condition is satisfied. ) Is determined before the execution (preliminary determination), whereas the third probability change end condition is configured not to perform the preliminary determination.

By configuring in this way, the progress content of the suggestion effect (bingo game) displayed over a plurality of special symbol fluctuations executed during the period in which the probability change state is set is completed by the first probability change. Since it can be set according to the condition or whether or not the second probability change end condition is satisfied, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player, and when the third end condition is satisfied. Since the suggestive effect shown in FIG. 115 (b) is executed, it is possible to provide an unexpected effect.

In the third embodiment, the presence or absence of the first probability change end condition and the second probability change end condition is determined in advance, and the presence or absence of the third probability change end condition is not determined in advance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, only the second probability variation end condition that is satisfied based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol may be configured to be preliminarily determined.

In addition, as the above-mentioned prior determination, at the end of the jackpot (during the ending period of the jackpot game), the special figure 1 stored on hold is determined in advance, and the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 stored on hold. It is configured to determine whether or not the information corresponding to the lottery result is included, and to change the combination of numbers displayed on the bingo card 820 based on the determination result.

With this configuration, there is no sense of discomfort with respect to the number of special figure fluctuations executed before winning the jackpot and the amount of benefits given to the player by winning the jackpot (Bingo). The game) can be run. In addition, by allowing the player to grasp the numbers displayed on the Bingo card 820, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the future game results in advance.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 116 to 124, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed from the second embodiment described above, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. It differs in that it is done. Other points are the same as those in the second embodiment, the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 116 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 116, the first hit random number table 202a is replaced with the first hit random number 3 table 202ba, the small hit random number table 202b is replaced with the small hit random number 3 table 202bb, and the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa is replaced with. The above-mentioned first is that the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc is replaced with the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab, the small hit type selection 3 table 202b is provided, and the variation pattern selection 2 table 202ac is replaced with the variation pattern selection 3 table 202be. 2 It is different from the embodiment.

The first random number 3 table 202ba is a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol with respect to the first random number table 202a (similar to the first embodiment and see FIG. 15A) of the second embodiment described above. The difference is that the range of the value of the first random number counter C1 determined to be the above and the range of the value of the first random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit in the high probability state of the special symbol are changed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 117 (a), the contents specified in the first random number 3 table 202ba will be described. FIG. 117A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 3 table 202ba. As shown in FIG. 117 (a), when the game state is a low probability state (normal state, time saving state) of the special symbol, the first obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is determined whether the value of the hit random number counter C1 is any of "0 to 9", and if it is any of "0 to 9", it is determined to be a big hit.

Further, when the game state is a high probability state (probability change state, latent state) of the special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is It is determined whether it is within the range of "0 to 99", and if it is within the range of "0 to 99", it is determined to be a big hit. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, out of the random number counters having a total number of 480, 10 values are defined as values for discriminating as a jackpot in the low probability state of the special symbol. The jackpot probability in the low probability state is 1/48. On the other hand, the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol is 1 / 4.8.

The small hit random number 3 table 202bb is the first special symbol (special figure 1) with respect to the small hit random number table 202b of the second embodiment described above (similar to the first embodiment and see FIG. 15B). The difference is that the lottery has also been changed to win a small hit. Here, with reference to FIG. 117 (b), the contents specified in the small hit random number 3 table 202bb will be described. FIG. 117 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit random number 3 table 202bb. As shown in FIG. 117 (b), in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is any of "10 to 14". If it is any of "10 to 14", it is determined that it is a small hit.

In the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the same contents as the above-mentioned small hit random number table 202b (see FIG. 15 (b)) are defined, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. That is, the third embodiment is different from the above-mentioned second embodiment in that it is configured so that a small hit can be won even in the lottery of the first special symbol. Then, in the third embodiment, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in a state where the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set, it is normal. It is configured to execute a process of shifting the high-probability state of the symbol to the low-probability state, that is, a process of shifting the gaming state from the probabilistic state to the latent probabilistic state.

With this configuration, it is possible to increase the opportunity to shift the game state to the latent state during the probabilistic state, so that the player who is executing the game during the probable change state is enthusiastically playing the game. Can be done.

As shown in FIG. 117 (b), in the third embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the special symbol (1/48 (see FIG. 117 (a))). , The probability of winning the small hit of the first special symbol (1/32 (see FIG. 117 ((b))) is higher. Since the latent probability state is set based on the small hit winning with a higher probability than the case where the latent probability state is set based on the winning, the player who is executing the game in the probabilistic changing state. On the other hand, both the latent state game (RUSH game) and the jackpot game are executed, but only the game aiming at the big hit winning, which is difficult to win, and the latent state game (RUSH game) are executed, and the jackpot winning is higher than the jackpot winning. It is possible to play both a game aiming for a small hit that is easy to win and a game that aims to win a small hit.

In the third embodiment, the probability of winning the small hit of the special figure 1 is configured to be higher than the probability of winning the big hit of the special figure 1 in the high probability state of the special symbol, but the present invention is limited to this. It may be configured to be lower than the jackpot winning probability of the special figure 1 in the high probability state. For example, the probability of winning the small hit of the special figure 1 may be set to a low probability of 1/480. good. With this configuration, in the state where the probability change state is set, if the small hit is won before the big hit, the big hit game is not executed and the latent state game (RUSH game) is performed. Since it can be executed, it is possible to provide a player with a surprising game.

The jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc is different from the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa of the second embodiment described above in that the type of the jackpot type is changed, and various counters (time reduction counter 203f, probability variation counter) set after the jackpot is completed. The difference is that the contents of the fixed time counters 203ad and 203ae) are changed and the value of the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type is changed. Here, the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 118.

FIG. 118A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118 (a), the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc is the jackpot operation content of each jackpot type defined in the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16 (a)) of the first embodiment described above. The jackpot operation contents in which only the number of rounds executed for each jackpot are different are specified, and for each jackpot type, the time reduction counter 203f, the probability variation counter 203aa, the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad, and the special figure 2 fixed time are specified. The value of the counter 203ae is specified.

Specifically, in the jackpot A whose symbol type is set corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) is "0 to 49". It is defined in the range, and the jackpot operation content in which the round game for opening the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is executed for two rounds (2R) and the value of "4" in the time saving counter 203f are set. It is specified that the value of "4" is set in the probability variation counter 203aa and the value indicating "5 seconds" is set in the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad.

The jackpot B whose symbol type is set corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1) is defined by the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) in the range of "50 to 96". The jackpot operation content in which the round game for opening the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is executed for two rounds (2R), the value of "4" in the time saving counter 203f, and the value of "4" in the probability variation counter 203aa are ". It is specified that the value of "4" is set to the value indicating "100 seconds" in the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad.

The jackpot C whose symbol type is set corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1) is defined by the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) in the range of "97 to 99". The jackpot operation content in which the round game for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is executed for two rounds (2R), the value of "4" in the time saving counter 203f, and the value of "4" in the probability variation counter 203aa are ". It is specified that the value of "4" is set to the value indicating "300 seconds" in the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad.

Further, the jackpot D whose symbol type is set corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2) is defined in the range where the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) is "0 to 64". The jackpot operation content in which the round game for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is executed for two rounds (2R) and the value of "4" in the time saving counter 203f are the probability variation counter 203aa. The value of "4" is specified in the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad so that a value indicating "0.5 seconds" is set.

The jackpot E whose symbol type is set corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2) is defined by the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) in the range of "65 to 99". The jackpot operation content in which the round game for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is executed for two rounds (2R), the value of "4" in the time saving counter 203f, and the value of "4" in the probability variation counter 203aa are ". It is specified that the value of "4" is set to the value indicating "1 second" in the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad.

As described above, in the third embodiment, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set higher than that in the second embodiment described above, making it easier to win the jackpot, and a privilege given to the player in the jackpot game ( It is configured so that the number of prize balls) is reduced. With this configuration, the amount of benefits given to the player (prize ball) depending on the result of whether or not the latent state is set and the length of the period in which the latent state is continuously set. Since the number) can be greatly varied, it is possible to provide a player with a novel playability.

The small hit type selection 3 table 202bd is the content of the small hit type set when the special figure 1 is won with respect to the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16B) described above. It differs in that it is specified by adding. Here, the small hit type selection 3 table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 118 (b).

FIG. 118B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 3 table 202b in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118 (b), the small hit type selection 3 table 202b has a symbol type “Special Figure 1” with respect to the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16 (b)) of the first embodiment described above. It differs from the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16 (b)) in that the small hit D is added as the small hit type corresponding to the above, and other than that, the small hit type selection table 202e (FIG. 16 (b)). The detailed description of the same element will be omitted.

In the small hit type selection 3 table 202b, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol (special figure 1), the first attacker (first variable prize) is used regardless of the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5. A small hit game in which the opening operation of opening the device 65) for 0.02 seconds is executed once is specified. That is, when the small hit is won in the lottery of the special figure 1, the small hit game in which it is difficult for the player to win the prize ball in the small hit game is executed.

That is, in the third embodiment, the small hit winning of the special figure 1 is not the purpose of giving a privilege (prize ball) to the player by the small hit game, but is an opportunity to set the latent state as the game state. It is an object. As a result, if the small hit of Special Figure 1 is won in the state where the probability change state is set, the right-handed game is executed immediately after the effect of notifying that fact (see FIG. 115 (b)) is executed. Even if it does, the small hit game has already ended (because it takes longer for the ball launched by the right-handed game to reach the right area than the small hit game period), so the latent state is smooth. A game (RUSH game) can be executed.

Further, when the small hit of the special figure 1 is won in the normal state, the small hit game can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort. In this embodiment, since the opening time of the first variable winning device 65 by the small hit game is set as short as 0.02 seconds, if the small hit of Special Figure 1 is won in the normal state, the player wins. Even if the game method is changed from the left-handed game to the right-handed game (when the special symbol indicating the small hit winning is stopped and displayed), the ball is changed to the first variable winning device 65 during the small hit game. Since it is difficult to win a prize, when the small hit of the special figure 1 is won in the normal state, the effect and guidance to emphasize that the small hit is won on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is configured so that the display of "right-handed" that guides the right-handed game is not executed in the display area Dm3.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from performing annoying game operations. It should be noted that a notification means may be provided to notify that the small hit of Special Figure 1 has been won in the normal state, or right-handed display even when the small hit game based on the special figure 1 small hit winning in the normal state is in progress. May be configured to execute.

The variation pattern selection 3 table 202be replaces the time saving / probability variation table 202f2 referred to when the probability variation state is set with respect to the variation pattern selection table 202f of the first embodiment described above. Is different in that the latent probability 3 table 202be2 is provided in place of the latent probability table 202f3 that is referred to when the latent probability state is set.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection 3 table 202be will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 to 121. FIG. 119 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the variation pattern selection 3 table 202be. As shown in FIG. 119 (a), in the third embodiment, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the same normal table 202f1 as the first embodiment described above is referred to, and the probability change state is changed. If it is set, the probability variation 3 table 202be1 is referred to, and if the latency state is set, the latency 3 table 202be2 is referred to.

In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 118 (a), the value of the time saving counter 203f and the value of the probability variation counter 203aa are configured to be the same after the end of the jackpot, so that the probability variation counter is the same. Since the gaming state (that is, the time saving state) in which the value of 203aa becomes 0 and the value of the time saving counter 203f becomes a value larger than 0 is not set, the variation referred to when the time saving state is set. It does not have a pattern selection table.

Next, the contents of the probability variation 3 table 202be1 will be described with reference to FIG. 119 (b). FIG. 119 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation 3 table 202be1. As described above with reference to FIG. 118 (a), the third embodiment is configured so that the probabilistic state is always set for the special symbol 4 fluctuations when the jackpot is won. Then, in the state where the probability variation state is set, the variation pattern (variation pattern) is referred to according to the number of special symbol fluctuations (number of special symbol fluctuations) after the end of the jackpot and the lottery result of the special symbol. Fluctuation time) is configured to be selected.

With this configuration, the latent state is determined according to the timing (number of times the special figure changes) when the condition for setting the latent state as the game state (big hit winning or small hit winning in Special Figure 1) is established. It is possible to make the period (special figure fluctuation time) to be set different. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention not only to the lottery result of the special symbol but also to the number of fluctuations in the special symbol, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Specifically, when the symbol type of the special symbol is special diagram 1 and the lottery result is "big hit", when the number of special symbol changes after the end of the big hit is "1 to 2 times". , "Probability change A table 202bea (probability change A)" is referred to, "probability change B table 202be (probability change B)" is referred to in the case of "3 times", and "probability change C" is referred to in the case of "4 times". It is specified that "Table 202 bec (probability variation C)" is referred to. In addition, when the lottery result is "small hit, miss", and when the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the big hit is "1 to 3 times", refer to "Probability change A table 202bea (probability change A)". In the case of "4 times", it is stipulated that "probability change C table 202 bec (probability change C)" is referred to.

Further, when the symbol type of the special symbol is special diagram 2, the "probability variation D table 202bed (probability variation D)" is referred to regardless of the lottery result and the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the big hit. It is stipulated in.

Next, the contents specified in the various probability variation tables (probability variation A table 202be to probability variation D table 202bed) referred to in the probability variation 3 table 202be1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 (c) to 120. .. FIG. 119 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the probability variation A table 202bea, and FIG. 120 (a) schematically shows the contents specified in the probability variation B table 202bea. It is a schematic diagram, FIG. 120 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the probability variation C table 202be, and FIG. 120 (c) is defined in the probability variation D table 202bed. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents schematically.

As shown in FIG. 119 (c), in the probability variation A table 202bea, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0" as the variation pattern determined when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). The jackpot variation 1 (1 second) is associated with the range of "99", the jackpot variation 2 (2 seconds) is associated with the range of "100 to 197", and the jackpot variation 3 (300 seconds) is associated with the value of "198". ) Is associated. In addition, when a small hit or a loss is won in the lottery of Special Figure 1, the small hit variation 1 (1 second) or the loss variation 1 (1 second) is associated regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 120 (a), in the probability variation B table 202be, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0" as the variation pattern determined when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). The jackpot variation 1 (1 second) is associated with the range of "99", the jackpot variation 2 (2 seconds) is associated with the range of "100 to 149", and the jackpot variation 3 (1 second) is associated with the range of "150 to 198". 300 seconds) is associated.

As shown in FIG. 120 (b), in the probability variation C table 202be, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0" as the variation pattern determined when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). The value of "1" is associated with the jackpot fluctuation 1 (1 second), the value of "1" is associated with the jackpot fluctuation 2 (2 seconds), and the jackpot fluctuation 3 (300 seconds) is associated with the range of "2 to 198". It is associated. In addition, when a small hit is won in the lottery of Special Figure 1, the small hit fluctuation 2 (240 seconds) is associated regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and when the lottery is won, the fluctuation type counter is associated. The deviation variation 1 (1 second) is associated with the value of CS1 regardless of the value.

As shown in FIG. 120 (c), in the probability variation D table 202bed, as a variation pattern determined when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. The big hit fluctuation 1 (1 second) is associated, and if the small hit is won, the small hit fluctuation 4 (0.5 seconds) is associated regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. , The deviation variation 4 (0.5 seconds) is associated with the variation type counter CS1 regardless of the value.

Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the contents specified in the latent probability 3 table 202be2 will be described. FIG. 121 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the latent probability 3 table 202be2. As shown in FIG. 121, in the third embodiment, a fluctuation pattern in which a long fluctuation time is set when the lottery of the special figure 1 is executed is selected in a state where the latency state is set. It is configured to be.

Here, in the third embodiment, in the state where the probability change state is set, the latent probability state is set when a small hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery, so that the latent probability is set. In order for the fluctuation pattern to be selected with reference to the table 202be2, it is necessary to win a small hit by the lottery of the special figure 1 during the probability change state.

As described above, in the third embodiment, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is selected by referring to different tables according to the number of special symbol fluctuations in the state where the probability variation state is set. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to both the lottery result of the special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (the number of fluctuations after the probability variation state is set) that is the result of the lottery.

Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 122. FIG. 122 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 122, the RAM 203 of the third embodiment adds the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba and the special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb to the RAM 203 of the second embodiment described above. It differs in that. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is a flag for indicating that a small hit has been won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and is set to on to draw the special figure 1. It shows that you won a small hit. This special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to be on for a period from when the small hit is won in the lottery of special figure 1 until the small hit game is executed.

The special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb is a flag for indicating that the small hit game is executed based on the small hit winning of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and is set to ON. , It is shown that the small hit game based on the small hit winning of the special figure 1 is executed. In the third embodiment, when the small hit game based on the small hit winning of the special figure 1 is started in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the high probability state of the normal symbol is changed to the low probability state. It is configured to execute the process of migrating to.

The special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb is determined when it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to ON in the special figure 1 disengagement stop process (see S871 in FIG. 128) (S3201 in FIG. 128). : Yes), set to on (S3207 in FIG. 128), and when it is determined in the small hit control process 3 (see S2255 in FIG. 129) that it is the timing to start the small hit (see S2503 in FIG. 129), refer to. (S2551 in FIG. 129).

Next, when it is determined in the process of S2551 of FIG. 129 that it is set to ON (S2551: Yes in FIG. 129), that is, the small hit game this time is won in the lottery of Special Figure 1. When it is determined that the small hit is executed based on the above, the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to 0. Then, when it is determined by the small hit control process 3 (see S2255 in FIG. 129) that it is the end timing of the small hit (S2511: Yes in FIG. 129), it is set to off.

Next, with reference to FIG. 123 (a), the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 123 (a) shows the voice lamp control device according to the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of ROM 222 of 113 schematically. As shown in FIG. 123 (a), the ROM 222 of the third embodiment has a probability variation effect selection table 222ba instead of the additional effect selection table 222c with respect to the ROM 222 of the second embodiment (first embodiment) described above. It is different in that it is provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the probability variation effect selection table 222ba will be described with reference to FIG. 124. FIG. 124 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the probability variation effect selection table 222ba. This probability variation effect selection table 222ba is a data table for selecting the final aspect of the suggestion effect (bingo game) described with reference to FIGS. 113 (b) to 115 (a), and is a big hit. The final mode is defined based on the number of fluctuations (the number of fluctuations in the special figure after the end of the jackpot) and the types of jackpots that can be won.

Specifically, when the number of jackpot winning fluctuations is "2", that is, when the jackpot is won again in the second special symbol change after the jackpot ends, the winning jackpot types are "big hit A" and "big hit B". If it is, the effect mode that establishes one row (line) in Bingo is set, and if it is "Big hit C", the effect mode that establishes three rows (lines) in Bingo is set.

If the number of jackpot winning fluctuations is "3", that is, if the jackpot is won in the third special symbol change after the jackpot ends, if the winning jackpot types are "big hit A" and "big hit B". , It is stipulated that an effect mode in which two rows (lines) are established in Bingo is set, and in the case of "big hit C", an effect mode in which three rows (lines) are established in Bingo is set.

Finally, when the number of jackpot winning fluctuations is "4", that is, when the jackpot is won in the fourth special symbol change (the final fluctuation of the special symbol in which the probability change state is set) after the jackpot ends, the winning jackpot type If is "Big hit A", an effect mode in which two rows (lines) are established in Bingo is set, and if "Big hit B", an effect mode in which three rows (lines) are established in Bingo is set, and "Big hit C". If so, it is stipulated that the production mode in which all rows (lines) are established in Bingo is set.

Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the third embodiment, when the jackpot is won by the first special symbol change after the jackpot ends, the display screen at the end of the jackpot (normally, a bingo card). On the screen on which 820 is displayed (see FIG. 113), a special display screen for informing that the latent state is set after the end of the big hit is displayed.

On this special display screen, an image congratulating the player is displayed in the main display area Dm, and "right-handed" for guiding the right-handed game is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. As a result, at the end of the big hit game, it is possible to perform a game (right-handed game) suitable for the game state (latent state) after the big hit game ends, so that the period in which the latent state is set is fully set. It can be utilized to execute a lottery game of the second special symbol (special figure 2).

In the third embodiment, the display screen at the end of the big hit is configured to display the special display screen when the big hit is won by the first special symbol change after the end of the big hit. The timing of displaying the special display screen may be any timing as long as it is during the jackpot game, it may be the timing when the jackpot game is started, or it may be the timing when a predetermined round game in the jackpot game is executed. In this case, when the jackpot is won in the normal state, it corresponds to the special symbol change executed next among the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b by the time the round game of the jackpot game is started. A pre-determination means for preliminarily determining whether or not the winning information (winning information corresponding to the first special symbol change after the end of the jackpot) includes information indicating that the jackpot is won is provided, and the pre-determination by the pre-determination means is provided. As a result, when the information indicating that the jackpot is won is included, "right-handed" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 and the right-handed game is performed in order to perform the jackpot game in the right-handed game. When the effect mode for displaying is configured to be executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 and the information indicating that the jackpot is won is not included, the guidance display area Dm3 is set to "left". It is good to configure it to display "hit".

With this configuration, when a jackpot is won in a normal state (a gaming state in which a left-handed game is performed), the jackpot game is determined by the display mode of the guidance display area Dm3 that guides the game method during the jackpot game. It is possible to predict the content of the game after the end. Since the same configuration of the game board 13 as in the first embodiment is used in the present embodiment, the left-handed game is performed when the jackpot game for opening the second variable winning device 650 is executed. It is configured so that the ratio of the ball winning the second variable winning device 650 does not change between the case and the case where the right-handed game is performed. Therefore, even if a configuration is used in which the game method (right-handed, left-handed) during the jackpot game is changed based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b, it is disadvantageous to the player during the jackpot game. Does not provide a situation.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the ending command has been received in the jackpot-related process 3 (see S4552 in FIG. 132) (S4605: Yes in FIG. 132), the jackpot end process (see S4651 in FIG. 133) is executed. By determining whether or not there is winning information for winning a jackpot in the winning information (winning information in Special Figure 1) stored in the winning information storage area 223b (see S5605 in FIG. 133), the jackpot game is in progress. The newly generated winning information is also targeted for discrimination, and is configured so that more winning information can be discriminated. However, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b (winning information in Special Figure 1) A timing other than this embodiment may be set as a timing for determining whether or not there is winning information for winning a jackpot. For example, a timing at which a jackpot game is started or a specific number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds) may be set. The timing at which the game is reached or the timing at which a specific round game (the first round game) is completed may be set as the timing for executing the determination.

Next, with reference to FIG. 123 (b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 123 (b) shows the voice lamp control device according to the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of RAM 223 of 113 schematically. As shown in FIG. 123 (b), the RAM 223 of the third embodiment is provided with the residual probability variation number area 223ba, the look-ahead per-read flag 223bb, and the residual variation number counter 223bc with respect to the ROM 222 of the second embodiment described above. It differs in that. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The remaining probability variation number area 223ba is a storage area for storing the variation number in which new winning information can be set as a special symbol variation that can be executed during the probability variation state. A value obtained by subtracting the number of winning information already stored in the winning information storage area 223b in the jackpot end processing (see S4651 in FIG. 133) is set in the residual probability variation number area 223ba (S5604 in FIG. 133). .. Then, in the prize information related processing (see S4271 in FIG. 131), the set value is referred to (see S5504 in FIG. 131), and when the set value is larger than 0, that is, during the probability change state. When the winning information corresponding to the executeable special symbol change can be newly received (S5504; Yes in FIG. 131), the look-ahead process (the information hits the winning information) is executed as the special symbol change executed during the probabilistic change state. (Process for determining whether or not it is included) is executed (S5505 in FIG. 131), and then the set value is subtracted by 1 (S5507 in FIG. 131).

In this way, the probability change state is set by using the residual probability change number area 223ba to determine whether or not it is possible to set new winning information as a special symbol variation that can be executed during the probability change state. It is possible to determine whether or not the newly received winning information in the state corresponds to the special symbol change executed during the probability change state. Therefore, since the probabilistic effect executed in the probabilistic state can be set only based on the winning information corresponding to the special symbol variation executed in the probabilistic state, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The look-ahead hit flag 223bb is a flag for indicating that there is winning information that has been won in the jackpot of the special symbol, and by being set to on, among the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b. Indicates that the winning information corresponding to the jackpot is included in.

This look-ahead hit flag 223bb determines that in the jackpot end processing (see S4651 in FIG. 133), there is winning information indicating that the jackpot has been won in the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b. If this is the case (S5605: Yes in FIG. 133), it is set to ON (S5606 in FIG. 133). Further, in the prize information-related processing (see S4271 in FIG. 131), it is determined that the prize information received this time corresponds to the special symbol change executed during the probability change state (S5504: Yes in FIG. 131). It is also set to ON (see S5506 in FIG. 131) even when it is determined that the winning information includes winning information indicating that the jackpot is won (S5505: Yes in FIG. 131).

Then, it is referred to in the probability variation variation display setting process (see S5151 in FIG. 135), and when the look-ahead flag 223bb is not set to ON (S5702: No in FIG. 135) and when it is set to ON (S5702: No in FIG. 135). The process is executed so that a different effect mode can be set in S5702: Yes) in FIG. 135.

The remaining fluctuation number counter 223bc is for counting the number of remaining special figure fluctuations until the jackpot is won, and is stored in the winning information storage area 223b in the jackpot end processing (see S4651 in FIG. 133). When the winning information includes the winning information for winning the jackpot (S5605: Yes in FIG. 133), the value corresponding to the number of changes in the special symbol until the special symbol corresponding to the winning information for winning the jackpot changes. Is set (see S5607 in FIG. 133). Then, when it is determined in the variation display setting process 3 (see S4173 in FIG. 134) that the variation display in the probability variation state is set (see S5103 in FIG. 134), the probability variation variation display setting process (see S5151 in FIG. 135) is executed. In (see), when it is determined that the special symbol for which the variation display is set this time is the pre-variation of the special symbol corresponding to the winning information for winning the jackpot (the next time is the jackpot variation) (S5703: Yes in FIG. 135). ), An effect mode using the probability variation effect selection table 222ba is set.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 125 to 129, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. The control process of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment is different from the control process of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment described above, instead of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see FIG. 98). 1 Special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (see S376 in FIG. 125), first special symbol fluctuation stop process 3 (see S277 in FIG. 127) instead of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see FIG. 99), small hit control The difference is that the small hit control process 3 (see FIG. 129) is executed instead of the process (see FIG. 55). Other than that, the same processing is executed. In addition, in the above-mentioned second embodiment, since the same processing as that of the first embodiment is executed, the part where the detailed description is omitted will be described with reference to the figure used for the description of the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, the parts where the same processing as that of the second embodiment described above is executed are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 125, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (S376) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (S376). Since the third embodiment is configured to win a small hit by the lottery of the special figure 1, the first special symbol big hit determination process 3 (S376) is the first special in the above-mentioned second embodiment. The difference is that the content of the process to be executed when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is not a big hit is different from the symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98). is doing. Other than that, they are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (S376) is executed, the same process as the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see FIG. 98) is executed, and in the process of S406, this fluctuation is a jackpot. If it is determined that this is not the case (S406: No), the special figure 1 deviation variation processing (S471) is executed, and this processing is terminated. This special figure 1 deviation variation processing (S471) is executed when it is determined that the lottery result of special figure 1 is other than a big hit, and it is determined whether or not a small hit is won, and the determination is made. It executes the process corresponding to the result.

Next, with reference to FIG. 126, the special figure 1 deviation processing (S471), which is one of the processes in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (S376) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. ) Will be explained. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 deviation processing (S471). This special figure 1 deviation variation processing (S471) executes a process for displaying a small hit symbol or an deviation symbol on the first symbol display device 37, and targets the second special symbol (special diagram 2). The difference is that the target special symbol is changed from the special figure 2 to the special figure 1 with respect to the processing content of the special figure 2 deviation change processing (S1011 of FIG. 41) to be executed.

In the special figure 1 deviation variation processing (S471), first, it is determined whether or not the execution data acquired from the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is a small hit (S3101). When it is determined that the execution data is a small hit (S3101: Yes), the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to ON (S3102), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to the small hit (S3103). ). Next, the small hit symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S3104), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S3101, when it is determined that the execution data is not a small hit (out of order) (S3101: No), the out-of-order symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set. (S3105), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 3 (S277) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 3 (S277). The first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 3 (S277) is a case where the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a big hit with respect to the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S257 in FIG. 99) in the second embodiment described above. That is, in the process of S801, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is off (S801: No), the special figure 1 disengagement stop process (S871) is executed. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 128, it is executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment. The special figure 1 disengagement stop process (S871), which is one of the processes in the first special symbol change stop process 3 (S277), will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 disengagement stop process (S871). In the special figure 1 out-of-order stop process (S871), when the lottery result of the special figure 1 is a small hit, a process for starting the small hit game is executed.

In the special figure 1 disengagement stop process (see S871 in FIG. 128), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to ON (S3201). When it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to on (S3201: Yes), the change of the special figure 2 during the change is stopped and displayed by the lottery result indicating the forcible deviation. Special figure 2 The fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON (S3202).

Then, a special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is turned on is set (S3203), and the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a deviated symbol (S3204). Next, a small hit scenario based on the selected small hit type is set (S3205), the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to off (S3206), and the special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb is turned on. Set (S3207) and end this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S3201, when it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is not set to on (that is, the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of order) (S3201: No), the book is as it is. End the process.

With this configuration, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the change in special figure 2 that is changing can be forcibly stopped, so that the small hit game can be performed. It is possible to facilitate the execution of the new special figure 2 fluctuation during the latent state set at the start timing. In the third embodiment, when the small hit of the special figure 1 is won, the process of forcibly stopping the change of the special figure 2 being executed in the display mode indicating that the lottery result is out of order is used. Not limited to this, for example, it is configured to interrupt the measurement of the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation so that the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation during the execution is not progressed during the period in which the small hit game is being executed. You may.

Next, with reference to FIG. 129, it is executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment. The small hit control process 3 (S2255) will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit control process 3 (S2255). The small hit control process 3 (S2255) differs from the small hit control process (S2205) in the first embodiment described above in that the processes S2551 and S2552 are added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the small hit control process 3 (S2255), when it is determined in the process of S2503 that it is the timing to start the small hit (S2503: Yes), that is, the small hit scenario updated by the process of S2502 starts the small hit. If the content indicates, an opening command is set (S2504), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb is set to ON (S2551). When it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb is set to ON (S2551: Yes), the time saving counter 203f is set to 0 (S2552), and this processing is terminated.

The third embodiment is configured so that both the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) can win a small hit, of which the small hit of special figure 1 can be won. The value of the time saving counter 203f is set (cleared) to 0 only when the winning is won.

That is, as a condition for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol (the state where the value of the time reduction counter 203f is larger than 0), the small hit winning of the special figure 1 (the start of the small hit game based on the small hit winning of the special figure 1). Is set. With this configuration, it is possible to terminate the high-probability state of a normal symbol under conditions other than the case where the special symbol is changed for a predetermined number of times. Therefore, in the state where the probabilistic state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set, the latent probabilistic state (high probability state of any special symbol) is advantageous to the player at any timing (any special symbol lottery). Since it is possible to shift to a high-probability state of a special symbol and a low-probability state of a normal symbol, it is possible to make the player always enthusiastically play the game.

Further, in the third embodiment, the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set is configured to be until the lottery (variation) of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (4 times). Therefore, the shorter the period from the setting of the probability change state to the winning of the small hit in the lottery of the special figure 1, the more the number of lottery of the special symbol that can be executed during the probability change state can be increased. Therefore, the player can be made to play the game more enthusiastically.

In addition, in the third embodiment, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special diagram 2), the high probability state of the normal symbol is not terminated. As a result, even if the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of Special Figure 2 is set higher than the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of Special Figure 1, in the state where the probability variation state is set, Special Figure 2 It is possible to suppress a situation in which a right-handed game is performed in order to execute the lottery.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2551 that the special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb is not set to ON (S2551: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when a big hit is won by lottery of a special symbol, the probability change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is always after the end of the big hit game. Is configured to be set for a predetermined period (4 special symbol fluctuations), and various transition conditions (latent state transition state) that shift the high-probability latent state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state during the probabilistic state. Is configured to set the latent probability state, which is a game state advantageous to the player.

Then, in the third embodiment, as the latent probability transition condition, the first latent probability transition condition that is satisfied when a big hit is won during the probability change state, and a predetermined period (special symbol variation 4) in which the probability change state is set. When the second latent probability transition condition that is established when the final change of (times) is executed and the small hit is won in the lottery of the specific special symbol (first special symbol (special figure 1)) in the probability change state. It has a third latent transition condition that is satisfied. In this way, by configuring the latent state to be set under various conditions, it is possible to provide the player with a playability that does not get tired of.

Further, the plurality of latent probability transition conditions described above are configured so that the period in which the latent probability state is set after being satisfied is different, and when the first latent probability transition condition is satisfied, the jackpot is indicated. If the latent state is set during the symbol confirmation period when the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the second latent transition condition is satisfied, the latent symbol is latent during the fluctuation period of the target special symbol fluctuation and during the symbol confirmation period. When the probability state is set and the third latent probability transition condition is satisfied, the probability change state is started from the timing when the target small hit game is executed (the timing when the first variable winning device 65 is opened as the small hit game). It is configured to be set until the timing when the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol corresponding to the final fluctuation of is completed.

With this configuration, in order to perform a game to set the latent state during the probable change state, it is not just aiming at the latent state, but also a game for the opportunity to set the latent state. Since the person can be watched, the game can be played more enthusiastically.

Further, in the third embodiment, the symbol determination period of the special symbol is configured to be different according to the lottery result of the special symbol. Further, the variation display period (variation time) for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is configured to be different according to the number of times the special symbol is changed after the probability variation state is set.

Specifically, the lottery result of the special symbol that satisfies the first latent probability transition condition, that is, if the big hit is won in the special symbol lottery, the symbol confirmation period is 5 seconds to 300 seconds depending on the lottery result. It is configured to be set within the range of. With this configuration, even if the player determines that the first latent probability transition condition is satisfied (even if the special symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed), the symbol determination period set after that is set. Since it is not possible to easily determine the length of the game, it is possible to play the game while expecting that a long period is set as the period in which the latent state is continuously set.

In addition, when the above-mentioned second latent transition condition is satisfied, the latent state is set by the lottery result of the special symbol variation (final variation in the probabilistic state) corresponding to the establishment of the second latent transition condition. The length of the period to be set is greatly different. For example, in the final fluctuation in the probabilistic state, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the length of the period set as the latent state is set. It is configured so that it is less than or equal to the fluctuation time (including the same) of the special figure 2 fluctuation executed during the latent state. With this configuration, if the final fluctuation of the probabilistic state is out of the range, the latent probability state is temporarily set internally, but the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed during the latent probability state, and it is small. It is possible to set a disadvantageous latent state that is disadvantageous to a player who makes it impossible (difficult) to acquire a winning game.

When the above-mentioned disadvantageous latent state is set, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 does not execute the effect mode for notifying that the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed. It is preferable not to notify the player that the latent state is set.

In the present embodiment, as described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of the final fluctuation of the probability change state, the disadvantageous latent probability state is set. For example, the lottery result of the special symbol is set. In some cases where is out of order, a long symbol determination period (for example, 100 seconds that can be set when the lottery result is a big hit) is set, or the lottery result of a special symbol is out of order. As the fluctuation pattern (variation time) selected for, 300 seconds, which can be set when the lottery result is a big hit, may be set to be configurable.

With this configuration, even if a big hit or a small hit is not won during the probabilistic state, it is possible to set a latent probable state that is advantageous to the player, so expectation is given until the end of the probable change state. You can play games while playing. In addition, by making the set symbol confirmation period and fluctuation pattern the same as the period (time) that can be set when the jackpot is won, it is expected that the jackpot game will be executed after the latent state ends. be able to.

In the above-mentioned example, when the latent state game (RUSH game) is performed by setting the length of the symbol determination period to the same length as when the jackpot is won, the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed. It is preferable to stop and display the special symbol (third symbol) in a display mode that is difficult for the player to grasp. As a result, the lottery result of the special symbol this time is determined at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the motivation to play during the latent state game.

Further, in the third embodiment, the length of the period in which the latent probability state is set differs depending on the timing when the first latent probability transition condition is satisfied. Specifically, it is configured so that the latent probability state becomes longer and easier to be set as the number of special symbol fluctuations in the probability change state increases. As a result, as the number of special symbol fluctuations in the probabilistic state increases, that is, as the number of special symbol fluctuations that can be executed during the probabilistic change state decreases, it becomes easier to set a latent state that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to make the player want to win the jackpot as soon as possible (to establish the first latent probability transition condition), or to win the jackpot just before the end of the probability change state, which improves the interest of the game. Can be made to. In addition, when a big hit is won in the final change of the probability change state, that is, when both the first latent probability transition condition and the second latent probability transition condition are satisfied in one special symbol change (lottery). Since the latent state is set from the period when the jackpot fluctuation starts, it is possible to provide the latent state for a longer period.

In the present embodiment, the longer the establishment of the first latent transition condition is delayed, the easier it is to set the latent state for a long period of time. However, in addition to this, a specific number of fluctuations (for example, for example). It may be configured so that the longest latent state period is set when the number of fluctuations is an even number or when the jackpot is won in the third), or the first latent transition condition is satisfied as soon as possible. It may be configured so that the latent state can be easily set for a long period of time.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 to 135. The control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment is a command determination process instead of the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 106) with respect to the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment described above. 3 (see FIG. 130), jackpot-related processing 3 (see FIG. 132) instead of jackpot-related processing (see FIG. 64), variable display setting processing 3 (see FIG. 134) instead of variable display setting processing (see FIG. 69). The difference is that the prize information related processing (see FIG. 131), the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 133), and the variation display processing for probability variation (see FIG. 135) are added, and the other processing is the same. Will be executed. The same processing is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the command determination process 3 (S4172) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 130. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 3 (S4172). The command determination process 3 (S4172) is different from the command determination process 2 (S4162) in the second embodiment described above in that the process of S4271 is executed instead of the process of S4214. Since other processes are the same as the command determination process 2 (S4162) in the second embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, a winning information-related process (S4271), which is one process in the command determination process 3 (S4172) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment, will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information-related processing (S4271).

In the winning information-related processing (S4271), first, the information indicating the gaming state stored in the state setting area 223j is read out (S5501). Next, in the process of S5501, it is determined whether or not the read gaming state (that is, the current gaming state) is in the probable change (S5502). When it is determined that the read game state is in the probable change (S5502: Yes), the value of the residual probability change number area 223ba is read out (S5503). Next, in the process of S5503, it is determined whether the value of the read residual probability variation number area 223ba is larger than 0 (S5504). When it is determined that the value of the residual probability variation number area 223ba is larger than 0 (S5504: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is information in the winning information received this time (S5505). When it is determined that there is hit information in the winning information (S5505: Yes), the look-ahead hit flag 223bb is set to ON (S5506). On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no hit information in the winning information (S5505: No), the processing of S5506 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5507.

Next, the value of the residual probability variation number area 223ba is subtracted by 1 (S5507), the information of the received winning information command is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b (S5508), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5502, when it is determined that the read game state is not in the probable change (S5502: No), or in the process of S5504, when it is determined that the value of the residual probability variation number area 223ba is 0. (S5504: No), a display winning command corresponding to the received winning information is set (S5509), the above-mentioned processing of S5508 is executed, and this processing is terminated.

Next, the jackpot-related process 3 (S4552) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 132. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot related process 3 (S4552). The jackpot-related process 3 (S4552) executes the above-mentioned S4608 or S4611 process for the jackpot-related process (S4502) in the first embodiment described above, and then executes the jackpot end process (S4651). It differs in that. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the jackpot end processing (S4651), which is one of the jackpot-related processing 3 (S4552) executed by the MPU221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment, will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end processing (S4651).

In the jackpot end processing (S4651), first, all the information stored in the winning information storage area 223b is read out (S5601). Next, it is determined whether or not there is winning information (S5602). If it is determined that there is no winning information (S5602: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is winning information (S5602: Yes), the number of winning information determined in the process of S5602 is subtracted from the probability variation setting number (n = 4) (S5603). Next, in the process of S5603, the subtracted value is set in the residual probability variation number area 223ba (S5604).

Next, it is determined whether or not the read information has hit information (S5605). If it is determined that the read information has winning information (S5605: Yes), is the winning information included in the winning information corresponding to the next variation (that is, the first variation executed after the jackpot game ends)? Is determined (S5606). In the process of S5606, when it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the next fluctuation contains the winning information (S5606: Yes), the player is notified that the latent state is set immediately after the big hit is completed. A special effect mode for this is set (S5607), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the next fluctuation does not include the winning information (S5606: No), the look-ahead hit flag 223bb is set to ON (S5608), and the winning information including the winning information changes. The number of special figure fluctuations up to this point is set in the remaining fluctuation number counter 223bc (S5609), the ending command for display including the bingo game display mode is set (S5611), and this process is terminated.

Further, in the process of S5605, when it is determined that there is no information in the read state (S5605: No), the probability variation setting number (n = 4) is set in the remaining fluctuation number counter 223bc (S5610), and the above-mentioned S5611 Process is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the variation display setting process 3 (S4173) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 3 (S4173). The variation display setting process 3 (S4173) determines that the current gaming state is not the latent state in the process of S5103 with respect to the variation display setting process (S4113) in the first embodiment described above (S5103). : No), the difference is that the probability variation variation display setting process (S5151) is executed. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 135, the probability variation variation display setting process (S5151), which is one process in the variation display setting process 3 (S4173) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. explain. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the contents of the probability variation variation display setting process (S5151). In the probabilistic variation display setting process (S5151), when the current gaming state is the probabilistic variation state, the variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is based on the special figure 1 variation pattern command received from the main control unit 110. Is set, and the process of transmitting to the display control device 114 is executed.

In the probability variation variation display setting process (S5151), first, it is determined whether or not the current variation is a small hit (S5701). When it is determined that the fluctuation this time is a small hit (S5701: Yes), an effect mode such that it becomes all bingo, that is, an effect mode as shown in FIG. 114 (b) is set (S5709), and S5710. Move to processing. On the other hand, in the process of S5701 when it is determined that the current fluctuation is not a small hit (S5701: No), it is determined whether the look-ahead hit flag 223bb is set to ON (S5702). When it is determined that the look-ahead flag 223bb is set to ON (S5702: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the residual variation count counter 223bc is 2, that is, whether the residual variation count is 2. S5703). When it is determined that the value of the remaining fluctuation number counter 223bc is 2 (S5703: Yes), the winning information corresponding to the next fluctuation is read from the winning information storage area 223b (S5704).

Next, based on the winning information read in the process of S5704 and the number of fluctuations, the effect mode is set from the probability variation effect selection table 222ba (S5705). Next, the look-ahead flag 223bb is set to off (S5706), the residual probability variation number area 223ba and the residual variation number counter 223bc are reset (S5707), and the process proceeds to S5710. On the other hand, in the processing of S5702, when it is determined that the look-ahead hit flag 223bb is not set to ON (S5702: No), or in the processing of S5703, when it is determined that the value of the remaining fluctuation number counter 223bc is not 2. (S5703: No), an effect mode in which Bingo cannot be established is set (S5708), the value of the remaining fluctuation number counter 223 bc is subtracted by 1 (S5711), and the process proceeds to S5710.

Next, the extracted variation pattern command and the display variation pattern command corresponding to the effect mode set in any of S5705, S5708, and S5709 are set (S5710), and this process is terminated.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 160. Each of the above-described embodiments is configured so that the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) fluctuate at the same time (so-called simultaneous fluctuation type), and the game state is latent. A large number of small hit games (RUSH games) are executed by executing the lottery (variation) of the special figure 2 during the period when the state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) is set. It was configured to be possible.

Then, the latent probability state once set is the first latent probability end condition established based on the start of the jackpot game, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. It was configured to end when any of the second latent probability end conditions that are satisfied based on the above is satisfied.

In the above-described first to third embodiments configured in this way, for example, when the first latent probability end condition is satisfied, the latent probability gaming state (as the first advantageous game that is advantageous to the player) ( Since the RUSH game) is executed until just before the big hit game, which is the second advantageous game, is started, it is possible for the player to continuously execute a plurality of different advantageous games, and the player can play the game. Was able to give a feeling of satisfaction.

However, in each of the above-described embodiments, after the probabilistic state (high probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) is set, the latent probability state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) is set. The probability change end condition to be shifted to is configured so that multiple types can be set, but since only the above two types are used for the probability probability end condition to end the latent probability state, it is latent for the player. There is a problem that the period for which the probability state continues is easily predicted.

In response to such a problem, in the fourth embodiment, every time a special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) is executed, a lottery is performed to shift (fall) the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state. (Hereinafter referred to as a fall lottery) is configured to be executed, and a low probability state of a special symbol is set when the fall lottery is won.

With this configuration, it is possible to solve the problem that the player can easily predict the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set, which is an advantageous game that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to play a game while expecting that the latent state game (RUSH game) will continue for a long time.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, during the period (special figure variation display period) in which the variation display (special figure variation display) for displaying that the jackpot is won in one special symbol is executed, the other Even if the lottery of the special symbol is executed, the lottery result of the fall lottery is invalid.

As a result, if the latent state is set by satisfying the first probability change end condition (probability change end condition that is established based on the jackpot winning), the latent state game (RUSH) executed during the latent state is set. In the game), since the fall lottery can be invalidated, the latent probability state game (RUSH game) can be made into an advantageous latent state game (super RUSH game) that can be executed for a long period of time.

On the other hand, if the latent state is set by satisfying the second probability change end condition (the probability change end condition that is satisfied based on the number of changes of the special symbol), the fall lottery is executed during the latent state. Therefore, since there is a risk that the latent state will end early based on winning the fall lottery, the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed is the above-mentioned advantageous latent probability. It can be a normal latent state game that tends to be shorter than a state game.

Here, with reference to FIG. 136, the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 during the probable change state in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 136 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a transition method of four types of gaming states set in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, the transition content of the gaming state when the fall lottery is won is added to the method of transitioning the gaming state in the pachinko machine 10 used in the first embodiment described above, and each transition. The difference is that the elements until the condition (predetermined condition) is satisfied and the transition ratio that shifts at the time of winning the jackpot are changed, and other than that, they are the same. Detailed description of the same element will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 136, in the fourth embodiment, the fall lottery for shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state is executed, and the fall lottery is performed during the probability change state. If you win, you will move to the time saving state, and if you win the fall lottery during the latent state, you will move to the normal state.

With this configuration, in order to set the latent probability state, which is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, the probability variation state (high probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) is set. In the state, the condition for shifting the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state (for example, time-saving number of times digestion) is higher than the condition for shifting the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state (winning of the fall lottery). It needs to be established first.

Therefore, whether or not the latent state is set is determined according to the timing at which the transition condition of each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol) is satisfied, so that the player can pay attention to the game content and the game. It is possible to improve the interest of. Further, although details will be described later, in the fourth embodiment, the game method to be executed is the same (left-handed game) in the probability change state and the time saving state, and the effect content displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is configured to be the same. Therefore, even if the fall lottery is won before the transition condition of the normal symbol (the condition of shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state) is satisfied, it is difficult for the player to grasp that fact. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the flow in which the latent probability state is set and the flow of the game in the latent probability state will be described. FIG. 137 (a) is a timing chart schematically showing the flow when the special figure 1 jackpot is won (when the first probability change end condition is satisfied) during the probability change state, and FIG. 137 (b) is a timing chart. It is a timing chart schematically showing the flow when the number of time reductions becomes 0 during the probability change state (when the second probability change end condition is satisfied).

As shown in FIG. 137 (a), in the fourth embodiment, in the state where the high probability state (probability variation state or latent probability state) of the special symbol is set, the high probability state of the special symbol is changed to the low probability state. The lottery (falling lottery) for shifting to is configured to be performed every time the lottery (variation) of the special symbol is executed, and when the jackpot is won during the probability change state (first probability change end condition). Is set to), it is configured to be set as a fall lottery invalid period in which the fall lottery is not executed.

On the other hand, when the latent probability state is set based on the satisfaction of the second probability change end condition, the fall lottery is valid even during the latent probability state game (RUSH game) as shown in FIG. 137 (b). Since it is executed, the latent state is shifted to the normal state based on the fact that the fall lottery is won before the special figure 1 change is completed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the first probability change end condition is satisfied, the latent probability state game (RUSH game) which is more advantageous than the case where the second probability change end condition is satisfied can be executed.

<Regarding the contents of the staging display in the fourth embodiment>
In the fourth embodiment, in addition to the effect content executed in the first embodiment described above as the effect content executed during the probability change state, the player is suggested (notified) the opportunity to set the latent probability state. There is a difference between the effect for this purpose and the effect for suggesting (notifying) that the fall lottery was won during the latent state game (RUSH game).

Here, with reference to FIGS. 138 to 140, the contents of the effect added by the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 138 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the effect for suggesting that the latent probability state game (RUSH game) is set by satisfying the second probability change end condition (reaching the number of time reductions). FIG. 138 (b) schematically shows the content of the effect for suggesting that the latent probability state game (RUSH game) is set by satisfying the first probability change end condition (big hit winning). It is a schematic diagram.

As shown in FIGS. 138 (a) and 138 (b), in the present embodiment, the player has an opportunity to set the latent state according to the display mode of the effect symbol 813 displayed when the treasure box 812 is opened. When the display mode of "444" is displayed as the effect symbol 813, it is notified that the second probability change end condition (reaching the number of time reductions) has been satisfied, and " When the display mode of "Super RUSH" is displayed, it is configured to notify that the first probability change end condition (big hit winning) has been satisfied.

In the fourth embodiment, the player is notified of the trigger for setting the latent probability state by the display mode of the effect symbol 813 displayed as the effect result during the probability change state. A configuration other than the above may be used. For example, a plurality of display modes having different selection ratios may be provided according to the type of probability variation end condition established as the display mode of the displayed effect symbol 813. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting which probabilistic end condition is satisfied.

Here, with reference to FIG. 139 (a), the display contents when the fall lottery is won during the latent state game (RUSH game) will be described. FIG. 139 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents when the fall lottery is won during the latent state game (RUSH game). In the fourth embodiment, the fall lottery is executed every time the special figure lottery start condition for executing the special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) is satisfied, and the special figure lottery start condition is satisfied. It is configured to execute the fall lottery during the period from the time when the big hit lottery is executed, that is, before the big hit lottery is executed.

Therefore, when the fall lottery is won, as shown in FIG. 139 (a), the latent state game (RUSH game) is displayed while the special symbol (special figure 1) corresponding to the fall lottery is variablely displayed. Is notified to indicate that the game has ended, and it is suppressed that a new special figure 2 change is executed after the fall lottery is won (after the game state shifts from the latent state to the normal state). In addition, the display mode of the guidance display area Dm3 is variably displayed from "right-handed" to "left-handed" while the special symbol (special figure 1) corresponding to the winning of the fall lottery is variablely displayed. After the fall lottery is won (after the gaming state shifts from the latent state to the normal state), it is suppressed that the new special figure 2 fluctuation is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 139 (b), the content of the effect executed when the jackpot is won during the latent state game (RUSH game) will be described. FIG. 139 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the effect content executed when a big hit is won during the latent state game (RUSH game).

Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the contents of the effect during the advantageous latent state game (super RUSH game), which is advantageous to the player among the latent state games (RUSH game), will be described. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when the latent probability state is set based on the satisfaction of the first probability change end condition, the fall lottery is invalidated during the setting period of the latent probability state. The treasure box 812 is configured so that the lottery invalid period is set, and the fact that the game is in the advantageous latent state game (super RUSH game) is displayed in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The number of displays is increased, and the comment "in super RUSH" indicating that the sub-display area Ds is in the advantageous latent state game is displayed.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 to 146. First, with reference to FIG. 141, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like use the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, drawing the display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. The difference is that the fall lottery counter C6, which is used when determining the lottery result of the fall lottery, is added to each of the above-described embodiments.

The fall lottery counter C6 is a loop counter whose value is updated in the range of "0 to 239", and is updated at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31), and is also updated. Some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 52), and the updated values are stored in a counter buffer (fall lottery counter buffer) set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203.

The value of the fall lottery counter C6 is referred to in the fall lottery executed when the high probability state of the special symbol is set (when the probability variation flag 203g is set to on), and is acquired. When it is determined that the value of the fall lottery counter C6 is a determination value predetermined in the fall lottery table 202cc, the high probability state of the special symbol shifts to the low probability state (falls).

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 142, the ROM 202 of the fourth embodiment is provided with the jackpot type selection 4 table 202ca instead of the jackpot type selection table 202d for the ROM 202 of the first embodiment described above, and a fall lottery. The difference is that the table 202cc is provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection 4 table 202ca will be described with reference to FIG. 143. FIG. 143 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the jackpot type selection 4 table 202ca. As shown in FIG. 143, in the fourth embodiment, when the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed, the operation content (operation scenario) for always opening the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is It differs from the above-mentioned first embodiment in that it is set. Further, as the number of rounds of the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won, the operation content (operation scenario) is set so that the jackpot game of at least 5 rounds or more is executed, which is the same as the first embodiment described above. Is different.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, the operation content executed during the small hit game is to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether the special symbol has won the big hit or the small hit. A jackpot game in which the same movement content as the (motion scenario) (a concept including a difference that is difficult for the player to discriminate) is executed, and a latent state is set, which is a game state in which the player has an advantage. While it was difficult to understand the timing and the timing of the end, in the fourth embodiment, the player can easily determine whether the jackpot is won or the small hit is won (in the jackpot game). By making the operation content different from the operation content of the small hit game, the player can easily distinguish it).

In this way, by making the player easily determine whether the big hit game is executed or the small hit game is executed, the number of small hit games executed during the latent state game (RUSH game) can be easily determined. Can be grasped by.

Next, the fall lottery table 202cc will be described with reference to FIG. 146 (a). FIG. 146 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the fall lottery table 202cc. The fall lottery table 202cc is a data table in which the determination value of the above-mentioned fall lottery counter C6 is stored. The value of the fall lottery counter C6 acquired when the ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 (at the time of the start winning) is any of the values specified in the fall lottery table 202cc. When it matches the judgment value of, it is set to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol (to fall).

More specifically, four determination values of "43,107,195,222" are defined as determination values for determining a fall in a high probability state of a special symbol. Here, the fall lottery counter C6 is a loop counter whose value is updated in the range of "0 to 239". Of the 240 possible values of the fall lottery counter C6, there are four judgment values that are determined to fall, so the probability of falling (shifting to the low probability state of the special symbol) in the probabilistic state of the special symbol. Is 1/60 (4/240).

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the probability of winning a big hit in a high probability state of a special symbol is set to be 6/480 (see FIG. 15A), and a small hit is won in the lottery of the special figure 2. The probability of this is 221/480 (see FIG. 15 (b)). That is, the probability of winning the fall lottery is slightly higher than the probability of winning the jackpot. That is, in the fourth embodiment, in the state where the latent probability state is set, it is configured so that it is easy to win in the order of small hit, fall, and big hit.

The winning rates of the big hit, the small hit, and the fall in the high probability state of the special symbol are not limited to those shown in the present embodiment, and the ease of winning may be different. For example, the fall probability (probability of winning the fall lottery) is set to be lower than the jackpot probability, and the jackpot game and the small hit game are repeatedly enjoyed until the fall is won in the latent state. Alternatively, the small hit probability and the fall probability are set to be almost the same (for example, the small hit probability 1/3, the fall probability 1/4), and a special symbol lottery is performed during the latent state. It may be a playability that makes the player excited every time it is played. Also, even if the fall probability is set high (for example, 1/2) and the special symbol lottery can be executed with the latent probability set only when the fall is not made in the first fall lottery. good.

In the fall lottery table 202cc in the present embodiment, only the determination value for determining whether or not the special symbol has fallen in the high probability state is specified, and the determination value for the low probability state of the special symbol is specified. It has not been. This is because it is a waste of processing to determine whether or not to shift to the low-probability state of the special symbol when the special symbol is already in the low-probability state.

In the fourth embodiment, the fall lottery table 202cc and the regularly updated fall lottery counter C6 are compared to shift from the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol (fall). ) Whether or not is determined. That is, the timing of transition from the latent state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) to the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) can be randomized. .. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the timing at which the latent state ends during the latent state game (RUSH game) performed during the period in which the latent state is set.

In the present embodiment, a lottery (determination) is made as to whether or not to shift (fall) from the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol, but it is a lottery (determination) to shift to another state. ) May. For example, whether or not to shift from the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state of the normal symbol may be determined by a lottery (special symbol lottery) executed for each change of the special symbol. As a result, it is possible to randomly determine how long the high-probability state of the normal symbol lasts, so that the probabilistic state (high-probability state of the special symbol, high-probability state of the normal symbol) is changed to the latent state (high-probability state of the special symbol). , It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing of shifting to the low probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, during the period in which the probabilistic state is set, the game can always be played while expecting that the latent probable state is set. Further, for example, it may be configured so that whether or not to shift from the low probability state of the special symbol to the high probability state of the special symbol can be drawn.

Next, with reference to FIG. 144, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 144 shows the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown schematically. As shown in FIG. 144, the RAM 203 of the fourth embodiment is different from the RAM 203 of the first embodiment described above in that the state update restriction flag 203ca is provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The state update restriction flag 203ca is a flag for indicating that the update of various parameters corresponding to various conditions for shifting the game state is restricted, and is various when it is set to ON. It indicates that the parameter update is restricted. In the fourth embodiment, when the state update limit flag 203ca is set to ON, the process of updating the value of the time saving counter 203f is skipped.

This state update restriction flag 203ca is when it is determined in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see S386 in FIG. 147) that the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) (S406 in FIG. 147). : Yes), or when it is determined in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see S975 in FIG. 150) that the jackpot is won by the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) (S1006: Yes in FIG. 150). ) Is set to on (S487 in FIG. 147, S1077 in FIG. 150).

Further, when it is referred to in the game state update process 4 (see S388 in FIG. 149) (see S651 in FIG. 149) and it is determined that it is set to ON (S6511: Yes in FIG. 149), the time saving counter 203f The process of updating (subtracting) the value, that is, the process of updating the parameter (number of time reductions) corresponding to the condition for shifting the gaming state is skipped. Then, when it is determined in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (see S287 in FIG. 148) that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to on (S801: Yes in FIG. 148), it is set to off. (See S871 in FIG. 148). Similarly, when it is determined in the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (see S293 in FIG. 151) that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S1501: Yes in FIG. 151), it is also turned off. It is set (S1571 in FIG. 151).

That is, in the fourth embodiment, when a jackpot is won by any of a plurality of special symbols (special figure 1 and special figure 2), the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to on, and the special symbol won by the jackpot is set. It is configured so that the gaming state is not changed during the period when the variable display of is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 145 (a), the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 145 (a) shows the voice lamp control device according to the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of ROM 222 of MPU 221 of 113 schematically. As shown in FIG. 145 (a), the ROM 222 of the fourth embodiment is different from the ROM 222 of the first embodiment described above in that the latent mode selection table 222ca and the fall notification selection table 222cc are provided. is doing. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The latent mode selection table 222ca is a data table referred to when selecting an effect mode (latent mode) of an effect (latent effect) for notifying the player that the latent state has been set. .. In this latent mode selection table 222ca, a plurality of effect modes (a trigger for setting a latent probability state (a trigger for winning a big hit, a trigger for reaching the number of time reductions (time reduction omission)) and a mode setting effect counter 223ca to be described later are associated with each other. The effect mode) is defined, and it is possible to suggest to the player an opportunity to set the latent probability state depending on the effect mode of the selected latent probability effect.

Next, the detailed contents defined in the latent mode selection table 222ca will be described with reference to FIG. 146 (b). FIG. 146 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the latent mode selection table 222ca. As shown in FIG. 146 (b), when the information included in the state command received from the main control device 110 is the jackpot latent state, the value of the mode setting effect counter 223ca acquired. "Invincible mode" is defined in the range of "0 to 49", "normal mode B" is defined in the range of "50 to 89", and "normal mode A" is defined in the range of "90 to 99". ing.

When the information included in the state command received from the main control device 110 indicates that the latent state of this time is the time-saving latent probability state, the value of the acquired mode setting effect counter 223ca is "0 to 49". "Normal mode A" is defined in the range, "normal mode B" is defined in the range of "50 to 89", and "normal mode B" is defined in the range of "90 to 99".

The fall notification selection table 222cc is a data table for selecting a notification mode for notifying (suggesting) the player that the fall lottery has been won, and the time saving state (high probability state of the normal symbol) continues. The notification mode is selected based on the value of the remaining time reduction area 223k indicating the remaining period set and the value of the fall notification effect counter 223cf.

The fourth embodiment is executed by the game method (left-handed game) and the third symbol display device 81 depending on whether the probabilistic state is set as the game state or the time saving state is set. It is configured so that the various display modes are the same. With this configuration, the player cannot easily determine whether the current state is a probable change state or a time saving state. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, since the fall lottery is executed, the time is shortened at random timing in the state where the probabilistic state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set. The state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is configured to be set.

Then, when the high probability state of the normal symbol shifts to the low probability state while the probability change state is set, the gaming state shifts from the probability change state to the latent state, which is advantageous to the player. While the probability state game (RUSH game) is executed, when the high probability state of the normal symbol shifts to the low probability state in the state where the time reduction state is set, the game state changes from the time reduction state to the normal state. Move to the state.

Here, the specific contents of the fall notification selection table 222cc will be described with reference to FIG. 146 (c). FIG. 146 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fall notification selection table 222cc. As shown in FIG. 146 (c), the fall notification selection table 222cc is associated with the number of remaining time reductions (information on the remaining time reduction number area 223k) at the time of winning the fall and the value of the fall notification effect counter 223cf. The notification mode is specified.

Specifically, when the fall winning timing is 0 for the remaining time reduction number (when the information stored in the remaining time reduction number area 223k indicates 0 remaining time reduction number), that is, the high probability of the normal symbol. When the fall lottery is won due to the fluctuation that the state ends, "confirmed notification" is defined regardless of the value of the acquired fall notification effect counter 223cf. Then, when the fall winning timing is 1 to 49 in the number of remaining time reductions, that is, when the period in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set has passed more than half, the acquired fall notification effect counter 223cf is used. "Suggestion notification" is defined in the range of "0 to 49" or "90 to 99", and "confirmed notification" is defined in the range of "50 to 89". When the number of remaining time reductions is 50 to 98, that is, when the period in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set remains more than half, the value of the acquired fall notification effect counter 223cf is "0 to 89". "Suggestion notification" is specified in the range of "90 to 99", and "confirmed notification" is specified in the range of "90 to 99".

Here, when "confirmed notification" is selected as the notification mode, the player has fallen to a notification mode in which the player can easily grasp that the fall lottery has been won, for example, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. A notification mode is set such as displaying to that effect (for example, displaying "sorry") or notifying that the fall lottery has been won by voice or the emission color of the decorative member.

Further, when "suggestion notification" is selected as the notification mode, a notification mode (for example, display of "pinch") for notifying the player that there is a possibility of winning the fall lottery is set. .. Although detailed description is omitted, this "suggestion notification" is configured to be set when the notification condition is satisfied even when the fall lottery is not won. With this configuration, the "suggestion notification" is executed regardless of whether the fall lottery is actually won or not.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the remaining period (remaining time reduction) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is continuously set as the mode of the notification (suggestion) effect of whether or not the fall lottery has been won. It is configured to be set based on the period), and it is configured so that the longer the remaining time is, the more difficult it is to set the "confirmed notification". Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player knows that he / she has won the fall lottery with a long remaining time, and the motivation for playing during the remaining time is reduced.

Further, the setting frequency of "suggestion notification" set when the fall lottery is not won may be configured to be variable based on the length of the remaining time short period. For example, the longer the remaining time short period, the more the fall. It is preferable to configure it so that "suggestion notification" can be easily set when the lottery has not been won. This makes it possible to change the possibility of actually winning the fall lottery when the "suggestion notification" is executed, based on the length of the remaining short period, so that the "suggestion notification" is executed. It is possible to make the player predict whether or not the fall lottery will be won while discriminating between the frequency (number of times) to be played and the number of times the remaining time is shortened, and to improve the interest of the game. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 145 (b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 145 (b) shows the voice lamp control device of the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of RAM 223 of MPU 221 of 113 schematically. As shown in FIG. 145 (b), the RAM 223 of the fourth embodiment has the mode setting effect counter 223ca, the latent mode storage area 223cc, and the number of small hits with respect to the RAM 223 of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the counter 223cc, the fall flag 223cd, the time saving notification flag 223ce, and the fall notification effect counter 223cf are provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The mode setting effect counter 223ca is a counter used when selecting the latent mode using the latent mode selection table 222ca. It is updated repeatedly in the range of 0 to 99. Although not shown, it is updated by 1 each time the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed.

The latent mode storage area 223cc is a storage area for storing the currently set latent mode, and the latent mode determined in the latent mode setting process (see S4451 in FIG. 154) is stored (set). (See S5804 in FIG. 154). Then, it is referred to in the variation display setting process 4 for special figure 1 (see S5171 in FIG. 159) (see S5251 in FIG. 159), and the variation pattern command for display is set (see S5252 in FIG. 159). Similarly, it is referred to in the variation display setting process 4 for special figure 2 (see S5175 in FIG. 160) (S5351 in FIG. 160), and the variation pattern command for display is set (S5352 in FIG. 160). The information (latent mode information) stored (set) in the latent mode storage area 223cc is when it is determined by the state command process 4 (see S4281 in FIG. 153) that the gaming state has shifted to the normal state. (See S4454 in FIG. 153).

The small hit count counter 223cc is a counter for measuring the number of small hits won during the latent state, and the small hit start command is issued in the small hit related process 4 (see S4574 in FIG. 156) during the latent state. Upon reception, the value is incremented by 1 (see S4752 in FIG. 156). Then, it is referred to when determining the number of small hits won during the latent state (S4753 in FIG. 156). In the present embodiment, the small hit count display 825 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on the value of the small hit count counter 223 cc, and the small hit is displayed during the period when the latent state is set. When the number of winnings reaches a predetermined number of times (a multiple of 10), the remaining time in the latent state is displayed.

The fall flag 223cd is a flag for indicating that the fall lottery has been won during the probability change state, and is set to ON to indicate that the fall lottery has been won.

The time saving notification flag 223ce wins the fall lottery during the probability change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol), and goes to the time saving state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol). It is a flag for indicating that a fall notification effect (an effect executed when a definite notification is selected in the fall notification selection table 222cc) for notifying the player of the transition has been executed. By setting it to ON, the fall notification effect is set.

The fall notification effect counter 223cf is a counter used when selecting the notification mode of the fall lottery using the fall notification selection table 222cc. It is updated repeatedly in the range of 0 to 99. Although not shown, it is updated by 1 each time the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 147 to 151. The control process of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment is different from the control process of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment described above, in place of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34). Special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see FIG. 147), first special symbol fluctuation stop process 4 (see FIG. 148) instead of the first special symbol change stop process (see FIG. 38), game state update process (see FIG. 36). Instead of the game state update process 4 (see FIG. 149), the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40) is replaced by the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see FIG. 150), and the second special symbol change stop process. The difference is that the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (see FIG. 151) is executed instead of (see FIG. 45). Other than that, the same processing is executed. The same processing is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 147. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386). The first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386) shifts from the probability variation state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol with respect to the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) in the first embodiment described above (S306). The difference is that a process for executing a lottery for whether or not to make the player fall is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386), first, the data of the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired (S401). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is on (S481). When it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is on (S481: Yes), since the jackpot of the second special symbol is being executed, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is off (S481: No), it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g is on, that is, whether or not the probability variation is in progress (S482). When it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is off, that is, the probability change is not in progress (S482: No), the process proceeds to S404.

On the other hand, in the process of S482, when it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is on, that is, when it is determined that the probability change is in progress (S482: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the fall lottery table 202cc. (S483). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the fall lottery counter C6 matches any of the determination values (random value) defined in the fall lottery table 202cc (that is, the value corresponding to the fall) (S484). ), If it is determined that the value does not correspond to the fall (S484: No), the process proceeds to S403.

On the other hand, in the process of S484, when it is determined that the value of the fall lottery counter C6 matches any of the determination values (random value) specified in the fall lottery table 202cc (value corresponding to the fall) ( S484: Yes), by setting the probability variation flag 203g to off, the probabilistic variation state of the special symbol is shifted (falls) to the low probability state of the special symbol (S485). Then, a fall command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the transition (fall) has occurred from the probabilistic state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol is set (S486), and the process proceeds to S404. Transition. Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the data in the execution area this time is a big hit in the processing of S406 (S406: Yes), after the processing of S407 to S411 is executed, the state update restriction flag 203ca is executed. Is set to on (S487), and this process ends.

By executing the special symbol change start process 4 (S386), a lottery for whether or not to shift (fall) to the low probability state of the special symbol and a lottery for whether or not the special symbol is a big hit are easily executed. be able to. In this embodiment, as the order of processing in the probabilistic state of the special symbol, a lottery (falling lottery) is first executed to determine whether or not to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol, and then the special symbol is a big hit. It was configured to execute a lottery as to whether or not it would be, but the processing order is not limited to this. The big hit lottery may be executed first, and then the fall lottery may be performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 148, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (S287) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (S287). The first special symbol change stop process 4 (S287) executes the processes S801 to S805 for the first special symbol change stop process (S207) in the above-described first embodiment, and then sets the state update restriction flag 203ca. The difference is that the process (S871) to be set to off is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the game state update process 4 (S388) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 149. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the contents of the game state update process 4 (S388). The game state update process 4 (S388) adds a process (S651) for determining whether or not the state update restriction flag 203ca is on to the game state update process (S308) in the first embodiment described above. It's different. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the game state update process 4 (S388), first, it is determined whether or not the state update limit flag 203ca is on (S651). If it is determined that the state update restriction flag 203ca is on (S6511: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S651 that the state update restriction flag 203ca is not on (S6511: No), the process proceeds to the process of S601.

Then, after executing the processes of S601 to S604, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag 203g is on (that is, whether or not the probability change is in progress) in the process of S605 (S605). When it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is on (S605: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is on (S652). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is on (S652: Yes), a status command indicating the jackpot latency state is set (S653), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S652, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is not on (S652: No), a state command indicating the time saving latent probability state is set (S654), and this process is terminated. ..

Next, the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S975) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 150. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S975). The second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S975) shifts from the probability variation state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol with respect to the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905) in the first embodiment described above. The difference is that a process for executing a lottery for whether or not to make the player fall is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, with reference to FIG. 147, in contrast to the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386), a process of shifting the target of the change from the first special symbol to the second special symbol is performed. Since it is only executed, the detailed explanation is omitted.

Next, the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (S293) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 151. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (S293). The second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (S293) executes the S1501 and S1503 to S1506 for the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S213) in the first embodiment described above, and then sets the state update restriction flag 203ca. The difference is that a process (S1571) to be set to off is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 152 to 160, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. The control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment is a command determination process 4 instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 60) for the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment described above. (See FIG. 152), the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 157) is executed instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 69), and the other processes are the same. The same processing is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the command determination process 4 (S4182) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 152. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 4 (S4182). When the command determination process 4 (S4182) determines that the status command has been received from the main control device 110 in the process of S4203 with respect to the command determination process (S4112) in the first embodiment described above (S4203: No), the difference is that the state command process 4 (S4281) is executed instead of the state command process (S4204). Since other processes are the same as the command determination process (S4112) in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 153, the state command process 4 (S4281), which is one of the command determination processes 4 (S4182) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the contents of the state command process 4 (S4281). The state command process 4 (S4281) determines that the latent mode setting process (S4451) is added to the state command process (S4204) in the first embodiment described above, and whether or not a command related to a fall has been received. The difference is that processing is added. Since other processes are the same as the state command process (S4204) in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the state command process 4 (S4281), if it is determined that the command received this time is a state command indicating the transition to the latent state (S4403: Yes), the latent mode setting process (S4451) is executed. The details of the latent mode setting process (S4451) will be described later with reference to FIG. 154. Next, the value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the state command is stored in the state setting area 223j (S4405), and the process proceeds to S4452. On the other hand, in the process of S4403, when it is determined that the command received from the main control device 110 this time is not a state command indicating the transition to the latent state (S4403: No), a fall command is issued from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not the command has been received (S4452). If it is determined that the fall command has been received (S4452: Yes), the fall effect setting process is executed (S4453). The details of the fall effect setting process (S4453) will be described later with reference to FIG. 155. On the other hand, in the process of S4452, if it is determined that the fall command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S4452: No), the process of S4453 is skipped and the process of S4406 is executed. Next, after executing the processing of S4406 to S4411, the latent mode storage area 223cc, the small hit count counter 223cc, the fall flag 223cd, and the time saving notified flag 223ce are cleared (S4454), and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 154, the latent mode setting process (S4451), which is one process in the state command process 4 (S4281) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, will be described. .. FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the contents of the latent mode setting process (S4451).

In the latent mode setting process (S4451), first, the type of the state command received from the main control unit 110 this time is read out (S5801). Next, the latent mode is determined using the latent mode selection table 222ca (see FIG. 146 (b)) based on the received state command and the value of the mode setting effect counter 223ca (S5802). Next, in the process of S5802, the display latent mode command corresponding to the determined latent mode is set (S5803), and the determined latent mode is set in the latent mode storage area 223cc (S5804). Next, the latent probability notification effect for notifying the entry of the latent probability state is set (S5805), the value corresponding to the game state notified by the state command is stored in the state setting area 223j (S5806), and this process is terminated. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 155, a fall effect setting process (S4453), which is one process in the state command process 4 (S4281) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fall effect setting process (S4453).

In the fall effect setting process (S4453), first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (S5901). When it is determined that the current gaming state is the latent state (S5901: Yes), the latent probability notification effect for notifying the end of the latent state is set (S5902), and the state command received from the main control device 110. The value corresponding to the game state notified by is stored in the state setting area 223j (S5903), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5901 when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S5901: No), then the remaining time reduction number is 99 or more, that is, the remaining time reduction area 223k. It is determined whether or not the value stored in is 99 or more (S5904). When it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is 99 or more (S5904: Yes), the time reduction notification effect for notifying the entry of the time reduction state is set (S5905), and the time reduction notification flag 223ce is set to ON (S5906). .. On the other hand, in the process of S5904, when it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is not 99 or more (S5904: No), the process of S5905 and S5906 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S5907. Next, the fall flag 223cd is set to ON (S5907), the value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the state command received from the main control device 110 is stored in the state setting area 223j (S5908), and this processing is terminated. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 156, the small hit related process 4 (S4574) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit related process 4 (S4574). The small hit-related process 4 (S4574) differs from the small hit-related process (S4504) in the first embodiment described above in that a process for displaying the remaining time information is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the small hit-related process 4 (S4574), first, when it is determined that the small hit start command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4701: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is in the latent state. (S4751). When it is determined that the current gaming state is the latent state (S4751: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the small hit count counter 223cc (S4752). Next, it is determined whether the value of the small hit count counter 223cc is a multiple of 10 (S4753). When it is determined that the value of the small hit count counter 223cc is a multiple of 10 (S4753: Yes), the information stored in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o is read out (S4754). A display time information command indicating the remaining time information is set (S4755), then a display small hit start command is set (S4702), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S4751 when it is determined that the player is not in the latent state (S4751: No), or in the processing of S4753, when it is determined that the value of the small hit count counter 223cc is not a multiple of 10 (S4751: No). S4753: No), S4702 processing is executed, and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 157, the variation display setting process 4 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 4 (S4183). The variation display setting process 4 (S4183) replaces the variation display setting process (S5104) for the special figure 1 with respect to the variation display setting process (S4113) in the first embodiment described above, and is a variation display setting process for the special figure 1. 4 (S5171), the variation display setting process 4 (S5175) for the special figure 2 is executed instead of the variation display setting process (S5109) for the special figure 2, and the fall notification process (S5173) is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the variation display setting process 4 (S4183), first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d in FIG. 1 is ON (S5101). When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S5101: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off (S5102). Next, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (S5103). When it is determined that the current gaming state is the latent state (S5103: Yes), the variation display setting process 4 (S5711) for special figure 1 is executed, and the first special symbol in the prize information storage area 223b is executed. The corresponding data is shifted (S5106). The details of the variation display setting process 4 (S5711) for the special figure 1 will be described later with reference to FIG. 159.

On the other hand, in the process of S5103, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S5103: No), it is determined whether or not the fall flag 223cd is on (S5172). If it is determined that the fall flag 223cd is on (S5172: Yes), the fall notification process (S5173) is executed. The details of the fall notification process (S5173) will be described later with reference to FIG. 158. Next, based on the extracted variation pattern, the variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is set (S5105), and the process proceeds to the process of S5106 described above. Next, the process executed for the special figure 1 of S5171 to S5173 is executed by changing the target to the special figure 2.

Here, with reference to FIG. 158, a fall notification process (S5173), which is a process in the variation display setting process 4 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fall notification process (S5173).

In the fall notification process (S5173), first, it is determined whether or not the time saving notification flag 223ce is on (S8001). When it is determined that the time reduction notified flag 223ce is on (S8001: Yes), a latent variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is set based on the extracted variation pattern (S8009), and this processing is performed. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time reduction notification flag 223ce is off (S8001: No), the information of the remaining time reduction frequency area 223k is read out (S8002). Next, the fall notification mode is determined using the fall notification selection table 222cc based on the number of remaining time reductions read in the processing of S8002 and the value of the fall notification effect counter 223cf (S8003). Next, in the process of S8003, it is determined whether the determined notification mode is the definite notification mode (S8004). When it is determined that the mode is the definite notification mode (S8004: Yes), the time saving notification flag 223ce is set to off (S8005), and the fall flag 223cd is set to off (S8006). Next, a time saving notification effect for notifying the entry of the time saving state is set (S8007), the above-mentioned processing of S8009 is executed, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S8004 that the determined notification mode is not the definite notification mode (S8004: No), a display fall notification command corresponding to the fall notification mode determined in the processing of S8003 is set (S8004: No). S8008), the process of S8009 described above is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 159, the variation display setting process 4 (for special figure 1), which is one of the processes in the variation display setting process 4 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment ( S5171) will be described. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation display setting process 4 (S5711) for the special figure 1. The variation display setting process 4 (S5711) for the special figure 1 executes the processes of S5201 to S5205 for the variation display setting process (S5104) for the special figure 1 in the above-described first embodiment, and then performs the process of S5206. Instead, read out the latent mode stored in the latent mode storage area 223cc (S5251), and based on the extracted variation pattern and the latent mode, the latent variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is executed. The difference is that the process of setting (S5252) is executed. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 160, the variation display setting process 4 (for special figure 2), which is one of the processes in the variation display setting process 4 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment ( S5175) will be described. FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation display setting process 4 (S5175) for the special figure 2. The variation display setting process 4 (S5175) for the special figure 2 executes the processes of S5301 to S5308 with respect to the variation display setting process (S5109) for the special figure 2 in the above-described first embodiment, and then performs the process of S5309. Instead, read out the latent mode stored in the latent mode storage area 223cc (S5351), and based on the extracted fluctuation pattern and latent mode, the latent fluctuation pattern command for displaying the second special symbol. The difference is that the process of setting (S5352) is executed. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, the fourth embodiment has a configuration in which a fall lottery is performed for each of the above-mentioned first embodiments to shift the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state based on the lottery result. Therefore, in the state where the probabilistic state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set, at what timing the time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) It can be difficult for the player to predict whether or not the transition will occur.

In addition, if the player wins the fall lottery during the probability change state and shifts to the time saving state, the player will enter the latent probability state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), which is a game state advantageous to the player. Since it becomes difficult to shift (it is harder to shift than the probability change state), once the probability change state is set, the latent probability state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set. You can play the game while being thrilled not to win the fall lottery before.

Further, in the present embodiment, the same game method (left-handed game) is performed depending on whether the probability change state is set or the time saving state is set. It is possible to make it more difficult to grasp whether the game state is a probable change state or a time saving state.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, if the fall lottery is won immediately after the probabilistic state is set (for example, the first special symbol change), the player is notified that the probabilistic state has been set. There is another possibility that the latent state will be set because it is configured to execute the effect mode (time saving notification effect) that makes it appear as if the time saving state was set from the beginning (after the end of the big hit). It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable that the probability change state higher than that of the game state has ended in a short period of time.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, a production that suggests to the player the possibility of winning the fall lottery during the probability change state (suggestion notification) and a production that notifies the player that the fall lottery has been won (confirmed notification). ) And, are made feasible, and the selection ratio between the suggestion notification and the definite notification is configured to be different based on the number of residual fluctuations of the special symbol that can be continuously set in the probabilistic state. Specifically, the larger the number of residual fluctuations in the probabilistic state, the more difficult it is to execute the definite notification. As a result, it is possible to recognize that the transition from the probabilistic change state to the time saving state is performed in the state where the remaining number of fluctuations remains large, and it is possible to suppress the player's motivation to play. In addition, the effect of notifying the suggestion is configured to be executed even when the fall lottery has not been won.

In this embodiment, the above-mentioned suggestion notification or definite notification is configured to cause the player to determine whether the current gaming state is a probabilistic state or a time-saving state. Other configurations may be used, for example, a fluctuation pattern of a special symbol (variation time) that can be selected only during the probable change state, or a special symbol fluctuation pattern (variation time) that can be selected only during the time saving state. It may be configured so that the player predicts the current gaming state according to the variation pattern of the special symbol to be provided and executed. In this case, the contents of the fluctuation pattern dedicated to the probabilistic change state and the fluctuation pattern dedicated to the time saving state do not differ greatly, but it is preferable to provide the fluctuation pattern with an error of about 1 second, for example. As a result, the current gaming state can be notified to the player by an error of the variation display time of a slight sense of incongruity, so that the variation display of the special symbol to be executed can be strongly consciously watched. Further, in this case, one second of the error may be used, for example, in the period until the fluctuation of the third symbol is started on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, whereby the fluctuation start timing of the third symbol may be used. However, the current game state can be notified to the player due to a slight sense of incongruity that the game is slower or faster than usual, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the fourth embodiment, the lottery result of the fall lottery due to the other special symbol change (lottery) is invalidated during the period when the jackpot change is executed in one special symbol. .. As a result, for example, due to the establishment of the first latent probability transition condition that is established based on the jackpot winning of Special Figure 1, the second special without winning the fall lottery during the period when the latent probability state is set. It will be possible to continue receiving the lottery for the design (Special Figure 2). Therefore, it is possible to set a latent state that is more advantageous (easily continued for a long time) than the latent state set by the establishment of other latent transition conditions.

In the fourth embodiment, when the special symbol change (lottery) is executed, the fall lottery is also executed. That is, it is configured to execute the fall lottery when the execution condition of the special symbol change (lottery) is satisfied, but it is not limited to this, for example, a specific entrance (for example, the first entry). The ball entered the ball opening 64, the second entrance opening 640, and the general winning opening 63), the ball passed through the through gate 67, and the execution conditions for the normal symbol change (lottery) were satisfied. , The special symbol, or the normal symbol stop display timing, or the elapsed timing of the symbol confirmation period may be the trigger for executing the fall lottery, and when the execution condition of the special symbol change (lottery) is satisfied, the fall lottery is performed. It may be configured to determine whether or not to execute and execute the fall lottery based on the determination result. This makes it difficult for the player to understand when the fall lottery is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from easily detecting the timing of winning the fall lottery.

In the fourth embodiment, every time a fall lottery is executed, the presence or absence of a fall is determined with the same probability, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is easy to fall in a fall lottery (winning). It may be configured to provide a high-probability state (easy) and a low-probability state (difficult to win). In this case, for example, based on the jackpot type, a high probability variation state and a low probability variation state are provided as probability variation states set after the jackpot is completed, and in the high probability variation state, a low probability state of the fall lottery is set and the probability variation is low. In the state, a high probability state of the fall lottery may be set. Further, the state of the fall lottery (high probability state, low probability state) may be changed based on the number of special symbol fluctuations (lottery) executed after the probability change state is set. For example, the probability change state may be changed. The predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 10 times) after the state is set is configured so that the high probability state of the fall lottery that is easy to win the fall lottery is set, and then the low probability state of the fall lottery is set. May be.

With such a configuration, it is possible to set a period in which it is easy to fall from the probable change state and a period in which it is difficult to fall, so that it is possible to provide the player with a sharp playability. Further, in the present embodiment, when the fall lottery is won, the process of shifting the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state is executed. A process of shifting the high-probability state to the low-probability state may be executed. Further, in the fourth embodiment, when the fall lottery is won, the high probability state of the special symbol is shifted to the low probability state. For example, the high probability state of the special symbol is changed to the medium probability state (the jackpot probability is high). It may be configured to shift to a state (lower than the probability state and higher than the low probability state), and may not shift to the medium probability state unless the fall lottery is won.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the contents of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 to 179. In the fourth embodiment described above, the fall lottery for shifting the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state (to make it fall) is executed. With this configuration, the period during which the high-probability state of the special symbol continues can be different depending on the lottery result of the fall lottery, so that the player can have the high-probability state of the special symbol for a long period of time. It was possible to play the game while expecting it to continue.

However, in the configuration of the fourth embodiment described above, since the fall lottery is executed every time the special symbol lottery (variation) is executed, the player decides whether or not the fall lottery is executed by his / her own intention. It was not possible to make a selection, which could lead to a decrease in motivation for playing. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, a winning device (variable winning for small hits) in which a ball can be won during a small hit game executed when the lottery result of a special symbol becomes a predetermined lottery result (small hit). Device) 2650 is provided, and when it is detected that a ball has passed in the area (flow path) through which the ball won in the small hit variable winning device 2650 can pass, the high probability state of the special symbol is changed to the low probability state. The fall gate 2650e3 (see FIG. 164) is configured to be provided.

With this configuration, as in each of the above-described embodiments, the latent state in which the small hit game is frequently executed based on the special figure 2 lottery (high probability state of special symbol, low probability of normal symbol). In the state), it is possible to select whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol falls depending on whether or not the player fires during the small hit game.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the operation content (opening operation pattern) of the small hit game to be executed is configured to be different depending on the type (small hit type) when the small hit is won. Depending on the opening operation pattern to be performed, the rate at which the ball winning the small hit variable winning device 2650 passes through the fall gate 2650e3 during the small hit game is configured to be different.

By configuring in this way, the content of the small hit game to be executed is predicted in order to prevent the high probability state of the special symbol from falling and to perform the game aiming at the acquisition of the privilege (prize ball) by the small hit game. It is possible to let the player select a game while letting the player select a game.

In addition, as in the fourth embodiment described above, in the latent state set during the period when one special symbol is executing the jackpot fluctuation, a small hit is won in the other special symbol fluctuation (lottery). Even if the ball passes through the fall gate 2650e3, the high-probability state of the special symbol does not shift to the low-probability state.

As a result, in the state where the latent probability state is set, the advantageous latent probability state in which the high probability state of the special symbol does not fall (difficult) and the high probability state of the special symbol are more likely to fall than the advantageous latent probability state. It is possible to set the unfavorable probability state.

<Regarding the configuration of the game board in the fifth embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 to 164. In the fifth embodiment, the configuration of the right side region of the game board 13 is different from the configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 2), instead of the first variable winning device 65. The point that the variable winning device for small hits 2650 is provided and the point that the winning device (variable winning device for small hits 2650) that is opened during the small hit game is provided on the upstream side of the second entrance 640. Is different.

Here, the configuration of the game board 13 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 161. A variable winning device for small hits 2650 is provided in the right area of the game board 13. This variable winning device for small hits 2650 has a plurality of flow paths through which the winning ball flows (a flow path for causing the high probability state of the special symbol to fall into the low probability state, and a high probability state of the special symbol in the low probability state). The winning ball is configured to flow down a different flow path according to the timing at which the ball wins in the variable winning device for small hits 2650.

The internal structure of the variable winning device for small hits 2650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 162 to 164. Next, the structure of the variable winning device for small hits 2650 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 162. FIG. 162 is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device for small hits 2650.

As shown in FIG. 162, the small hit variable winning device 2650 is combined with the opening forming member 2650b arranged so as to project toward the front side of the game board 13 and the back side of the opening forming member 2650b, and is combined with the small hit. The base member 2650c for screwing the variable winning device 2650 to the game board 13 and the LED are lit from the back side of the base member 2650c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 arranged on the back side of the base member 2650c. An LED board 2650d in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged, a back cover body 2650e that sandwiches the LED board 2650d with a base member 2650c, and a small hit winning opening (small hit) formed in the opening forming member 2650b. Winning port) An opening / closing unit 2650f having an opening / closing door 2650f1 for opening / closing 2650a, a flow path cover body 2650g that is combined on the back side of the back cover body 2650e to form a flow path, and a back cover body 2650e and a flow path. A switching member 2650h that protrudes into the flow path formed by the cover body 2650g and switches the flow path of the game ball, a link member 2650i that is locked to the switching member 2650h, and a flow path cover body 2650g are arranged on the back surface side. The back cover body 2650j, the flow path solenoid 2650k fixed to the back side of the back cover body 2650j to operate the link member 2650i, and the flow path solenoid 2650k are covered from the back side and attached to the back cover body 2650j with screws. It is composed of a fixing cover body 2650 m for fixing.

FIG. 163 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device for small hits 2650. FIG. 163 (c) is a top view of the variable winning device for small hits 2650, and FIG. 163 (b) is a sectional view taken along line Lb-Lb of the variable winning device for small hits 2650. As shown in FIG. 163 (b), the small hit variable winning device 2650 is formed with a small hit winning opening (small hit winning opening) 2650a, which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The small hit winning opening (small hit winning opening) 2650a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and a game ball passing through the opening is guided to the left in FIG. 163 (b). The bottom surface is formed so as to be inclined to the lower left. At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 2650a1 composed of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 2650c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 2650a1 is guided to the distribution flow path formed on the back surface side of the back cover body 2650e shown in FIG. 163 (b).

As shown in FIG. 163 (b), the opening of the small hit winning opening (small hit winning opening) 2650a can be opened by the opening / closing door 2650f1 having a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side. It is variable to an open state and a closed state where it is impossible to enter the ball (difficult to enter the ball). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 2650f1 so that the ball can roll over the upper part of the opening / closing door. Further, in the open state, the opening / closing door 2650f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the small hit winning opening (small hit winning opening) 2650a by being retracted to the inside of the base member 2650c (inside the game board 13). ing.

With this configuration, when the opening of the small hit variable winning device 2650 is closed, the ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 2650f1 of the small hit variable winning device 2650 to enter the second ball. It is configured to be guided to the mouth 640 side, and during the right-handed game (during the latent state), the ball can be entered into the second entrance 640 while the right-handed game is being performed. This makes it possible to reduce the time and effort required to change the game method to a left-handed game during a latent state in which a small hit game is frequently executed. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

Further, in the open state, the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball flows down can be configured as the opening of the small hit variable winning device 2650, so that more game balls can be efficiently used as the small hit winning opening (small). Winning prize opening) It is possible to win a prize within 2650a. Therefore, the ball can be reliably won by the variable winning device for small hits 2650 during the small hit game, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 163 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in FIG. 163 (b). As shown in FIG. 163 (a), the magnetic sensor 2650c1 having the detection port 2650a1 is fixed to the base member 2650c so that the detection port 2650a1 is tilted toward the distribution flow path side of the back cover body 2650e.

Next, with reference to FIG. 164, a configuration will be described in which the sphere guided to the distribution flow path of the back cover body 2650e is distributed to the normal discharge flow path 2650e1 and the special discharge flow path 2650e2, which will be described later.

FIG. 164A is a rear view of the back cover body 2650e showing a state in which the switching member 2650h is operated so that the ball is distributed to the special exhaust flow path 2650e2. As shown in FIG. 164 (a), the switching member 2650h has a locking hole 2650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 2650i is inserted and a guide piece 2650h2 for guiding the ball, and is provided in the flow path cover body 2650g. It is rotatably supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 2650 g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 2650 h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 2650 h is rotated into the distribution flow path from the back surface side of the flow path cover body 2650 g. It is configured so that it can be placed as possible.

As shown in FIG. 164 (a), the sphere guided into the distribution flow path from the detection port 2650a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 2650h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge flow path 2650e2. .. The special discharge flow path 2650e2 flows down the fall route through which the inflowing ball passes through the fall gate (fall switch) 2650e3 and the second normal discharge flow path 2650e5 branched from the special discharge flow path 2650e2, and flows down the second normal discharge flow path 2650e5. 2 Normal switch) A fall switch 2650e3 or a second normal switch 2650e6 that is configured to have a second normal route that passes through 2650e6 and can detect the passage of a ball that has flowed into the special discharge flow path 2650e2. After being detected, it is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball.

Here, the details will be described later, but in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, when the above-mentioned fall switch 2650e3 detects a ball during the small hit game, that is, when the ball passes through the fall route, a special symbol is provided. The high-probability state of is configured to shift (fall) to the low-probability state. That is, the fall gate (fall switch) 2650e3 is configured as a trigger for shifting the special symbol from the high probability state to the low probability state. Further, the switching member 2650h is a flow path (special discharge flow path 2650e2) that can pass through the fall gate (fall switch) 2650e3 as a flow path of the ball that has won the small hit variable winning device 2650 during the small hit. It is for setting any flow path (normal discharge flow path 2650e1) that cannot (difficultly) pass through the gate (fall switch) 2650e3, and by setting the flow path solenoid 2650k to ON. The ball that has won the small hit variable winning device 2650 is configured to switch the flow path so as to flow down the special discharge flow path 2650e2 (see FIG. 164 (a)).

In the pachinko machine 10 used in the present embodiment, the flow path solenoid 2650k is set to off during normal game play, and the ball winning the small hit variable winning device 2650 has a special discharge flow path 2650e2. It is configured to flow down. Therefore, when an illegal state such as the opening / closing door 2650f1 of the variable winning device for small hits 2650 is opened to win a ball even though the small hit game is not being executed, the illegally won ball is a fall switch. It is configured to pass through 2650e3.

In this way, the state in which the flow path solenoid 2650k is set to off is set to a state in which the pachinko machine 10 is maintained for a long period of time, and further, the flow path configuration (variable winning device for small hits 2650) that is disadvantageous to the player By adopting a flow path configuration in which the winning ball can pass through the fall switch 2650e3), the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed, and a penalty can be imposed on the game in which the illegal game is performed.

In this way, since it is determined whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol ends depending on the flow route in which the ball winning in the variable winning device for small hit 2650 flows down during the small hit game, the game is also played during the small hit game. It is possible to improve the interest of the person. It should be noted that the small hit winning opening (small hit winning opening) 2650a of the small hit variable winning device 2650 passes through the entrance of the special discharge flow path 2650e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 2650h2 of the switching member 2650h). The required time consists of at least 1 second.

Further, at the end of the normal discharge flow path 2650e1, a discharge confirmation switch (normal switch) 2650e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a sphere is provided. Thereby, whether or not all the winning balls are discharged in the small hit variable winning device 2650 can be determined by the total number of ball detections of the normal switch 2650e4, the second falling switch 2650e6, and the falling switch 2650e3. That is, the number of balls detected by the ball winning switch 2650c1 (the number of balls won in the variable winning device for small hits 2650) and various switches (normal switch 2650e4, second falling switch 2650e6, falling switch) provided in the three discharge areas. By comparing the number of balls detected by each of the 2650e3) (the number of balls ejected from the variable winning device for small hits 2650), it is determined whether or not the balls remain in the variable winning device for small hits 2650. can do.

The end timing of the small hit game (the end condition of the small hit game (when a predetermined number (10 pieces) of prizes are given to the small hit variable winning device 2650, or the opening scenario of the small hit variable winning device 2650) If all the game balls that have entered the variable winning device for small hits 2650 have not been discharged at the timing when the small hit ending period that is executed after) is established), the variable for small hits is variable. It is preferable to determine that the abnormality is inside the winning device 2650, notify the abnormality to the outside, or stop the game so that the jackpot game or the normal game is not started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from progressing in a state where an abnormality has occurred in a part of the pachinko machine 10 and a secondary abnormality has occurred.

In this way, the ball that has won the small hit winning opening (small hit winning opening) 2650a of the small hit variable winning device 2650 is detected by the ball winning switch 2650c1, and based on this, the prize ball (book) is given to the player as a privilege. In the embodiment, 10 prize balls are paid out for one ball prize, and whether the ball passes through the fall switch 2650e3 by using the detected ball (passed through the ball prize switch 2650c1). By configuring it so that it can be sorted, it is possible to determine whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol ends during the small hit game. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated area for shifting the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state separately from the variable winning device for small hits 2650, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

Next, the flow of the game in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 165 and 166. First, with reference to FIG. 165, the flow of the game when the jackpot of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is won in the state where the probabilistic state is set as the game state will be described. FIG. 165 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the special figure 1 jackpot is won during the probability change state.

As shown in FIG. 165, in the fifth embodiment, if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the special figure 1 in a state where the probability variation state is set as in the fourth embodiment described above, the jackpot is latent during the jackpot fluctuation. The state is configured to be set (see FIG. 165 (a)). Then, during the period when the latent probability state is set (during special figure 1 big hit fluctuation), the small hit game is performed by performing a right-handed game in order to execute the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2). It is configured to execute a latent state game (RUSH game) that is frequently executed.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result after winning the jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol during the jackpot fluctuation period of one special symbol (for example, special figure 1). The period up to) is configured so that the jackpot will not be won in the lottery of the other special symbol (for example, special figure 2). As a result, during the jackpot fluctuation period of one special symbol (for example, special figure 1), the jackpot is won by lottery of the other special symbol (for example, special figure 2), and based on the jackpot winning of the other special symbol. By starting the jackpot game, it is possible to prevent the period in which the latent probability state is set from being shortened. That is, in the fifth embodiment, the latent state game (RUSH game) is surely performed during the latent state setting period (for example, the jackpot fluctuation time of the special figure 1) set in advance when the latent state is set. ) Can be executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in a state where the high probability state of the special symbol is set, during the jackpot fluctuation period of one special symbol (for example, special symbol 1) (after winning the jackpot by lottery of the special symbol). , The period until the big hit game is executed based on the lottery result), even if the ball passes through the fall switch 2650e3 in the variable winning device for small hits 2650, the high probability state of the special symbol becomes the low probability state. It is configured to be a period during which there is no transition (fall invalid period).

Therefore, if the latent probability state is set during the special figure 1 fluctuation that is won by the jackpot, the special figure 1 fluctuation period becomes the fall invalid period, so that the high probability state of the special symbol ends. It is possible to execute a latent state game (RUSH game) without worrying about it. Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the present embodiment, the latent state is set based on the jackpot winning in Special Figure 1 (the latent state is set based on the establishment of the first latent transition condition). It is configured to determine whether or not to execute an invincible effect (see FIG. 169) that notifies the player of what has been done.

By configuring to execute this invincible effect (see FIG. 169), it is possible to easily make the player know that the fall invalid period is set in the currently set latent state, so that the player can be informed. It is possible to play a latent state game (RUSH game) with peace of mind. Further, in the fifth embodiment, even in the latent state in which the fall invalid period is set, the above-mentioned invincible effect may not be executed. With this configuration, in the latent state game in which the invincible effect (see FIG. 169) is not executed, the fall invalid period may actually be set, so that the ball is made small during the small hit game. When the winning variable winning device 2650 is won, the rate of falling can be reduced.

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation elapses (see FIG. 165 (b)), the high-probability state of the special symbol shifts to the low-probability state. If the small hit game is not executed at this timing, the big hit game is started. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 165, if the small hit game is executed at the timing when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation has elapsed, the start of the big hit game is postponed until the small hit game is completed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with a game that is difficult to understand because the big hit game is started during the execution of the small hit game.

The same gaming state (normal state) as during the jackpot game is set for the interruption period from the lapse of the fluctuation time of the special hit 1 jackpot fluctuation shown in FIG. 165 to the start of the jackpot game. In the fifth embodiment, if the small hit game is executed at the timing when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation has elapsed, the start of the big hit game is interrupted (postponed) until the small hit game is completed. ), But it is sufficient to control so that the small hit game and the big hit game are not executed at the same time. For example, the small hit game is executed at the timing when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation has elapsed. If so, it may be configured to forcibly end the running small hit game.

Further, although detailed description is omitted, in this embodiment as well as in each of the above-described embodiments, a small hit is won with one special symbol (special figure 2), and the small hit game is executed. During the period, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol (special figure 1) is interrupted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the latent probability state (advantageous latent probability state) set based on the jackpot winning of Special Figure 1 is set as the fall invalid period, so that a special symbol is given to the player. It is possible to entertain the latent state game (RUSH game) without worrying about the end of the high probability state of. Further, the small hit game started during the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed to the end.

Next, with reference to FIG. 166, the flow of the game when the predetermined number of time reductions is exhausted in the state where the probability change state is set as the game state will be described. FIG. 166 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when all the time reduction times are exhausted during the probability change state.

As shown in FIG. 166, in the fifth embodiment, since the subtraction of the time reduction number is performed at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, the value of the counter (time reduction counter 203f) for continuously setting the time reduction state is set. When it becomes 0, the latent probability state is set from the execution special figure 1 fluctuation (see FIG. 166 (a)). As shown in FIG. 166, the latent state set by digesting a predetermined number of time reductions is configured so that the fall lottery during the latent state period is effectively determined. Therefore, in the small hit game executed during the latent state game (RUSH), there is a possibility that the high probability state of the special symbol will be terminated by the ball that has been won by the variable winning device (variable winning device for small hit 2650). There is a disadvantageous probability state.

<Regarding the content of the production performed in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 167 to 169, the characteristic effect contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fifth embodiment will be described. It should be noted that the mode of the effect executed during the probability change state in order to suggest whether or not the latent probability state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is set is the effect described in each of the above-described embodiments. Since it is the same as the embodiment, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 167 (a), the effect content displayed when a small hit is won in a state where the latent probability state is set will be described. FIG. 167 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents when a small hit is won in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 167 (a), the special figure 1 display area Dm1 displays a display mode indicating that the first special symbol (special figure 1) is variablely displayed, and the special figure 2 display area Dm2 displays a display mode. Displays a display mode (“341”) indicating that the second special symbol (special figure 2) has won a small hit. Then, in the guidance display area Dm3, "right-handed" for guiding the game method in the latent state is displayed.

Then, in the main display area Dm, the character 811 is displayed in a display mode for notifying that the small hit has been won, and the character "GET" is displayed. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "The small hit game will start" indicating that the small hit game is started is displayed.

When the small hit game is started, the display screen of FIG. 167 (b) is displayed. FIG. 167 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents during the small hit game. According to the figure shown in FIG. 167 (b), the display mode shown in FIG. 167 (a) described above, that is, the display showing that the special figure 1 is variablely displayed, is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. Although the aspect is displayed, in reality, the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is interrupted during the small hit game. In addition, unlike the display mode shown in FIG. 167 (b), the state in which the special figure 1 is appropriately variable-displayed (the state in which the variable time is subtracted) and the variable display in the special figure 1 are interrupted. It may be configured so that the display mode displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 is different from that in the state (the state in which the fluctuation time is not subtracted).

Then, in the main display area Dm, the effect mode in which the character 811 runs from the left direction to the right direction and the treasure box 812 appears from the traveling direction is displayed. In the present embodiment, the effect of opening the treasure box 812 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed during the small hit game, and the effect of this time is determined by the display mode of the effect symbol 813 appearing from the treasure box 812. It is configured to notify the player of the result of the winning game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 168 (a) and 168 (b), display contents for showing the game result of the small hit game in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 168 (a) shows the display content when the ball is won by the variable winning device for small hits 2650 during the small hit game, the fall switch 2650e3 detects the ball, and the high probability state of the special symbol ends. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example.

In FIG. 168 (a), the effect symbol 813 indicating the “cross mark” is displayed from the treasure box 812, and the character 811 shifts from the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state during the small hit game. It is displayed in the failure display mode shown. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment indicating that the latent state game (RUSH game) ends and the game method returns to the left-handed game is displayed. That is, the game state is latent by shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state during the latent state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) in which the RUSH game is performed. In order to shift from the state to the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), a comment for executing the left-handed game is displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

On the other hand, in FIG. 168 (b), an effect symbol 813 indicating “V” is displayed from the treasure box 812, and a display mode for notifying the player that the RUSH game is continuously executed (that is, left). The character 811 is displayed in the display mode (display mode) running from to the right.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect corresponding to the game result during the small hit game executed during the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed by the third symbol display device 81. The player can easily grasp the progress of the latent state game (RUSH game) only by grasping the effect content executed by the third symbol display device 81.

In the present embodiment, the ball winning the small hit variable winning device 2650 during the small hit game is the probability change switch 2650e3 according to the type of the small hit game executed during the latent state game (RUSH game). The ratio (possibility) of flowing down the special discharge flow path 2650e2 provided with the above is different.

Therefore, for example, on the display screen at the time of winning the small hit shown using FIG. 167 (a), the player selects whether or not to make the variable winning device for small hit 2650 win the ball in the small hit game this time. It is configured to display comments (for example, "RUSH ends if you are unlucky with a small hit", "Stop launching if you are uneasy"), and the character displayed when you win a small hit. The display mode of 811 may be configured to be variable depending on whether or not the small hit type won this time is a small hit that makes it easy to end the latent state game (RUSH game).

With this configuration, the player can select whether or not to make the small hit variable winning device 2650 win the ball during the small hit game. Further, in the fifth embodiment in which the latent probability state is set only for a predetermined period (special figure 1 fluctuation time), the number of small hit games that can be executed during the latent probability state is limited, so that the player On the other hand, it is possible to play a game while thinking about whether to acquire a privilege (prize ball) during a small hit game or to avoid the end of a latent state game (RUSH game), which is a novel game. Can provide sex.

Further, even if it is configured to notify the player of the type of the small hit game being executed by the display mode of the treasure box 812 displayed on the display screen during the small hit game shown with reference to FIG. 167 (b). Well, for example, the smaller the type of small hit that is being executed is the type of small hit that makes it easier to end the latent state game (RUSH game), the better it is configured so that the old and tattered treasure chest 812 is displayed. It is preferable to display a comment according to the display mode of the treasure box 812. Further, the display mode displayed during the small hit game is more specific than the content suggesting the small hit type (RUSH game continuation expectation degree) won this time to the player when the small hit is won. It is advisable to configure the player to be notified of such (highly reliable) content.

With this configuration, for the player who has selected whether or not to make the small hit variable winning device 2650 win the ball in this small hit game based on the display screen displayed at the time of winning the small hit. Since it is possible to show a more specific RUSH continuation expectation degree, it is possible for the player himself to predict whether or not the selected game content is correct for the player.

In this case, in particular, it was emphasized that the RUSH game was a small hit type in which it was difficult for the player who chose not to win the ball in the variable winning device for small hits 2650 to finish the RUSH game even if the ball was won. It is good to configure it so that it can be notified. Specifically, the small hit type determining means for determining the type of the small hit game this time, and whether or not the ball has won the small hit variable winning device 2650 within a predetermined period from the start of the small hit game. (Or a means for determining that the right-handed game has been executed after the small hit winning) is provided, and the determination result by the small hit type determination means is the small hit type in which the RUSH game is difficult to end. In this case, if it is determined that the ball has not won the small hit variable winning device 2650 within a predetermined period from the start of the small hit game, it is better to fire the ball in this small hit game. It is advisable to provide a display means to display a fanning comment (for example, "I should have fired a ball", "Weakling") indicating that it was acquired.

As a result, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the ball was not won by the variable winning device for small hits 2650, so that the player can be positively notified of the loss during the small hits game. The variable winning device 2650 can be prompted to win a ball. In other words, when the RUSH game ends by having the variable winning device for small hits 2650 win a ball, the game shows that the selection was unsuccessful based on the game result, even if the fanning by the staging was not executed. Although the player can be aware of it, the player who chooses not to win the ball in the small hit variable winning device 2650 cannot be aware of whether or not the selection result of this time is advantageous, so the selection result is selected by the display means. By displaying the evaluation of, the player can easily grasp whether or not this selection is successful.

Further, a display mode for notifying the player who has selected not to win the ball in the variable winning device for small hits 2650 that the small hit type this time is the small hit type in which the RUSH game is likely to end. (For example, "Stop firing and get a big correct answer", "I have a good intuition") may be displayed, and even if the small hit type this time is a small hit type in which the RUSH game is likely to end. In this small hit game, you may display a fan comment (for example, "I should have fired the ball", "Weakling") indicating that you could get the privilege by firing the ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 169, the display content of the effect of notifying that the fall invalid period is set in the latent probability state (advantageous latent probability state) will be described. FIG. 169 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display content displayed at the end of the small hit in the advantageous latent probability state. As shown in FIG. 169, when the currently set latent state is the advantageous latent state in which the fall invalid period is set, the same latent mode setting process as the above-described fourth embodiment (FIG. 154). When the invincible mode is set as the current latent mode in (see S4451), the effect mode (“invincible mode”” indicating that the latent state currently set for the player is the advantageous latent state. ) Is displayed.

When the character 811 enters the invincible mode, the display mode of the character 811 becomes a display mode dedicated to the invincible mode (a display mode in which an aura is wrapped around the display mode). Then, "lucky point x 0" is displayed as the cumulative display mode 819 of the number of balls that have passed through the fall gate 2650e3 during the invincible mode. This cumulative display mode 819 corresponds to a command indicating the number of balls detected by the fall switch 2650e3 output from the main control device 110 (a command indicating the number of falls if the fall invalid period is not set). The numbers are displayed. As a result, it is possible to easily inform the player of the situation in which the invincible mode has worked in favor of the player.

Although not shown in the figure of FIG. 169, the small hit number display 825 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be displayed in the above-described fourth embodiment, and the small hit number display 825 may be displayed. And the cumulative display mode 819 may be displayed together. In addition, the non-game number measuring means for measuring the number of small hit games in which the player did not make the ball win in the small hit variable winning device 2650, and the number of times measured by the non-game number measuring means are displayed on the display means. It may be configured to do so.

With this configuration, for example, for all the small hit games executed during the latent state game (RUSH game), the number of small hit games in which the player has executed the game and the player can play the game. Since it is possible to easily grasp the number of small hit games that have not been executed, it can be used as a reference for future RUSH games.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the fifth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 170 to 173. First, the contents of ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 170. FIG. 170 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 170, the ROM 202 of the fifth embodiment is provided with the small hit type selection table 202da instead of the small hit type selection table 202e for the ROM 202 of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the operation scenario storage area 202db is added. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the small hit type selection 5 table 202da will be described with reference to FIG. 171. FIG. 171 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the small hit type selection 5 table 202da. The fifth embodiment is configured to win a small hit only for the second special symbol (special figure 2), and when the small hit is won in the lottery of the special figure 2, the small hit type selection 5 table The small hit type is selected with reference to 202da.

In the small hit type selection 5 table 202da, the corresponding small hit type is defined for each range of the value of the small hit type counter C5, and as shown in FIG. 171 (a), the value of the small hit type counter C5. However, in the range of "0 to 14", "small hit A" is defined in association with each other. This "small hit A" is a small hit type in which the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state for 1.5 seconds after the opening period of 1.5 seconds has elapsed during the small hit game. After the opening state of 1.5 seconds has elapsed, an ending period of 0.5 seconds is set, but since this ending period is the same for all small hit types, FIG. 171 (a) shows. Omit.

Further, in the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "15 to 59", "small hit B" is defined in association with it. This "small hit B" is performed after the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state (first open setting) for 0.1 seconds after the opening period of 0.5 seconds has elapsed during the small hit game. It is a small hit type that sets the open state for 1.4 seconds (second open setting) after an interval period of 1 second. After the second opening setting, an ending period of 0.5 seconds is set, but since this ending period is the same for all small hit types, it is omitted in FIG. 171 (a).

In the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "60 to 79", "small hit C" is defined in association with each other. This "small hit C" is obtained after the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state (first open setting) for 0.5 seconds after the opening period of 0.1 seconds has elapsed during the small hit game. It is a small hit type that sets an open state for 0.1 seconds (second open setting) after an interval period of 1 second. After the second opening setting, an ending period of 0.5 seconds is set, but since this ending period is the same for all small hit types, it is omitted in FIG. 171 (a).

In the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "80 to 99", "small hit D" is defined in association with each other. This "small hit D" is performed after the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state (first open setting) for 0.5 seconds after the opening period of 0.1 seconds has elapsed during the small hit game. , It is a small hit type that sets the open state for 1 second (second open setting) after an interval period of 0.3 seconds. After the second opening setting, an ending period of 0.5 seconds is set, but since this ending period is the same for all small hit types, it is omitted in FIG. 171 (a).

The operation scenario storage area 202db is a data area in which the operation scenario of the flow path solenoid 2650h during the small hit game is stored in advance, and the flow path solenoid 2650h performs the same operation regardless of the type of small hit to be executed. One operation scenario is set to execute.

Here, the contents of the operation scenario stored in the operation scenario storage area 202db will be described with reference to FIG. 171 (b). FIG. 171 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the operation scenario defined in the operation scenario storage area 202db. As shown in FIG. 171 (b), the operation scenario storage area 202db defines an operation scenario set according to the start timing of the small hit game.

Specifically, it is stipulated that the flow path solenoid 2650h is set to off until 1.4 seconds have passed from the start timing of the small hit, and from 1.4 seconds after the start of the small hit to the end of the small hit. It is specified that the flow path solenoid 2650h is set to ON during the period of. The operation scenario in which the operation content of the flow path solenoid 2650h is defined is a scenario in which a value is incremented by 1 each time the main processing of the main control device 110 executed every 4 milliseconds is executed. It is managed by a counter (not shown).

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the small hit type selected and the flow path solenoid determine whether or not the ball winning the small hit variable winning device 2650 flows down the special discharge flow path 2650e2. It is configured to be variably set according to the operation scenario of 2650h. Further, the ball flowing down the special discharge flow path 2650e2 is branched into a ball passing through the fall gate 2650e3 and a ball not passing through (second normal switch 2650e6) by the internal structure of the variable winning device for small hits 2650. It is configured in.

Specifically, in the small hit game in which "small hit A" is set as the small hit type, the opening period (1.5 seconds) is the period in which the flow path solenoid 2650h is set to off (1 from the start of the small hit). Since it is set longer than (4 seconds), the ball does not pass through the fall route, and the small hit game that is most advantageous to the player who is set to have a long opening period is executed.

In the small hit game in which "small hit B" to "small hit D" are set as the small hit types, the first opening period is the timing at which the winning ball can pass through the fall route. Further, "small hit C" and "small hit D" have a short opening period of 0.1 seconds (shorter than "small hit B"), and. Since the first opening period is as long as 0.5 seconds (because it is longer than "small hit B"), it is a small hit game in which the ball easily passes through the fall route.

In addition, "small hit C" is the most disadvantageous small for the player because the period in which the first attacker (first variable winning device) 65 is released in one opening operation is as short as 0.6 seconds. It will be a winning game. In the fifth embodiment, it takes about 0.5 seconds for the ball launched by the right-handed game to win the small hit variable winning device 2650 and reach the distribution flow path distributed by the flow path solenoid 2650h. It is configured so that the symbol determination period of the special symbol at the time of winning a small hit is 0.5 seconds.

Therefore, the small hit game is started by stopping the right-handed game immediately after the third symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 167 (a)). At this point, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a ball fired before stopping the right-handed game wins the small hit variable winning device 2650.

Next, the contents of ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 172. FIG. 172 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 172, the RAM 203 of the fifth embodiment is different from the RAM 203 of the fourth embodiment in that the small hit winning counter 203da, the fall passage counter 203db, and the passage flag 203dc are added. is doing. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The small hit winning counter 203da is a counter for measuring the number of balls won in the small hit variable winning device 2650 during the small hit game, and passes through the balls in the small hit entrance passing process (see S171 in FIG. 174). When it is determined that the timing when the sensor (ball detection switch 2650c1) is on is during the opening period of the small hit winning opening 2650a (S3302: Yes in FIG. 174), the value is added by 1 and after the addition. The winning number command corresponding to the information indicating the value of is set (S3305 in FIG. 174). Then, when it is determined in the small hit control process 5 (see S2271 in FIG. 176) that it is the end timing of the small hit game (S2511: Yes in FIG. 176), the value of the counter is cleared (FIG. 176). S2571).

Although detailed description will be described later, in the fifth embodiment, the latent state continues on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the winning number command set corresponding to the value of the small hit winning counter 203da. The number of balls won in the variable winning device for small hits 2650 is accumulated during the set period. As a result, the number of winning balls in one latent state game (RUSH game) can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, as described above, the player has the game property of selecting whether or not the ball is to be won by the variable winning device for small hits 2650 during the small hit game. Depending on the selection content of the player, the cumulative value of the number of balls won by the variable winning device for small hits 2650 may differ greatly even if the number of small hit games is the same. Therefore, detailed game results can be provided by displaying the number of balls won in the variable winning device for small hits 2650 instead of the number of times the small hit game is executed.

In addition, both the number of balls won in the above-mentioned variable winning device for small hits 2650 and the number of times the small hit game is executed are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or a prize is won during one small hit game. The average value of the number of balls may be displayed, or the number of winnings may be displayed as a winning history for each small hit type of the executed small hit game.

The fall passage counter 203db is a counter for measuring the number of balls that have passed through the fall gate 2650e3 during the small hit game, and the fall switch 2650e3 detects the balls in the fall gate passing process (see S172 in FIG. 175). (S3402: Yes in FIG. 175), the value is added by 1 (S3403 in FIG. 175), and the pass number command is set with the information corresponding to the added value (S3404 in FIG. 175). Then, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit game (S2511: Yes in FIG. 176), the value of the counter is cleared (S2571 in FIG. 176).

In the present embodiment, when the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to on, that is, when the advantageous latent probability state is set, the number of balls that have passed through the fall route is always counted. .. As a result, when the "invincible mode" is set as the latent probability mode, the high-probability state of the special symbol shifts to the low-probability state when it is not in the advantageous latent probability state (fall route). The number of balls played can be notified to the player (see the cumulative display mode 819 in FIG. 169).

The pass flag 203dc indicates that the fall switch 2650e3 has detected the ball when the fall switch 2650e3 has detected the ball effectively (when the state update limit flag 203ca is set to off). This flag is set to ON to indicate that the fall switch 2650e3 has detected a ball.

This pass flag 203dc is used when it is determined in the fall gate passage process (see S172 in FIG. 175) that the ball has passed through the fall gate 2650e3 and the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to off (S3405 in FIG. 175). : No), set to on (see S3408 in FIG. 175). Then, when the passing flag 203dc is set to ON, the process of determining whether or not a new ball has passed the falling gate 2650e3 in the falling gate passing process (see S172 in FIG. 175) is skipped. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the process for dropping the high-probability state of the special symbol is executed a plurality of times during one small hit game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 173, the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 173 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 173, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment has a winning number counter 223da and a passing number counter 223db with respect to the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment described above. And are different in that they are added, and they are the same except for that. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The winning number counter 223da is a counter for measuring the number of balls won in the small hit variable winning device 2650 during the small hit game, and is the main control device 110 in the ball passing related processing (see S4582 in FIG. 179). When it is determined that the winning number command has been received from (S8101: Yes in FIG. 179), the value is incremented by 1, and the information corresponding to the added value is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Set a number command (see S8106 in FIG. 179).

Then, when the gaming state shifts from the latent state to the normal state, the value of the counter is cleared. That is, the winning number counter 223da is a ball that has won the small hit variable winning device 2650 in a plurality of small hit games executed until the latent state is set once the latent state is set. It is configured so that the numbers can be accumulated and measured.

The pass count counter 223db is a counter for measuring the number of balls that have passed through the fall gate 2650e3, and is determined to have received the pass count command from the main control device 110 in the ball pass-related processing (see S4582 in FIG. 179). In this case (S8107: Yes in FIG. 179), the value is added by 1 when the latent probability state this time is the advantageous latent probability state (see S8110 in FIG. 179).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 to 176. The control process of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment is a small hit control process 5 (see FIG. 55) instead of the small hit control process (see FIG. 55) for the control process of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the small hit entrance passage process (see FIG. 174) and the fall gate passage process (see FIG. 175) are executed. Other than that, the same processing is executed. The same processing is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 174, the small hit entrance passage process (S171) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit entrance passing process (S171).

In the small hit entrance passage process (S171), first, it is determined whether or not the ball passage sensor is on (S3301). If it is determined that the ball passage sensor is not on (S3301: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball passing sensor is on (S3301: Yes), it is determined whether the small hit winning opening is in the opening period (S3302). If it is determined that the winning opening for small hits is being opened (S3302: Yes), a command for passing through the small hit entrance is set (S3303). The small hit entrance passage command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is directed to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201. Will be sent. 1 is added to the value of the small hit winning counter 203da (S3304). Next, in the process of S3304, a winning number command is set based on the value of the small hit winning counter 203da after addition (S3305), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3302, if it is determined that the winning opening for small hits is not open (S3302: No), an error command is set (S3306), and the flow path solenoid is set to off (S3307). , End this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 175, the fall gate passing process (S172) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fall gate passing process (S172).

In the fall gate passing process (S172), first, it is determined whether or not the passing flag 203dc is on (S3401). If it is determined that the pass flag 203dc is on (S3401: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the passage flag 203dc is not on (S3401: No), it is determined whether or not there is passage in the fall gate (S3402). If it is determined that there is no passage through the fall gate (S3402: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a passage in the fall gate (S3402: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the fall passage counter 203db (S3403), and the number of passages is based on the value of the fall passage counter 203db after the addition. Set the command (S3404). Next, it is determined whether or not the state update restriction flag 203ca is on (S3405). If it is determined that the state update restriction flag 203ca is on (S3405: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the state update restriction flag 203ca is not on (S3405: No), it is determined whether or not the fall gate passage is in the valid period (S3406). When it is determined that the fall gate passage is in the valid period (S3406: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is set to off (S3407) and the passage flag 203dc is set to on (S3408). Next, a fall command is set (S3409), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3406, if it is determined that the fall gate passage is not in the valid period (S3406: No), an error command is set (S3410), and this process is terminated.

Next, the small hit control process 5 (S2271) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 176. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit control process 5 (S2271). When the small hit control process 5 (S2271) determines that it is the timing of the end of the small hit in the process of S2511 with respect to the small hit control process (S2205) in the first embodiment described above (S2511: No. ) The difference is that the values of the small hit winning counter 203da and the fall passing counter 203db are cleared (S2571), and the passing flag 203dc is set to off (S2572). Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 177 to 179, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. The control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment is a state command process instead of the state command process (see FIG. 62) for the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment described above. 5 (see FIG. 177), the hit-related process 5 (see FIG. 178) is executed instead of the hit-related process (see FIG. 63), the ball passage-related process (see FIG. 179) is different, and the other processes are the same. Is executed. The same processing is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the state command process 5 (S4921) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 177. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the contents of the state command process 5 (S4921). The state command process 5 (S4921) executes the process of S4411 for the state command process 4 (S4281) in the fourth embodiment described above, and then replaces the process of S4444 with the latent mode storage area 223 kb, small. The difference is that a process (S4471) for clearing the winning number counter 223cc, the winning number counter 223da, the passing number counter 223db, the fall flag 223cd, and the time saving notified flag 223ce is added. Since other processes are the same as the state command process 4 (S4281) in the fourth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the hit-related process 5 (S4292) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 178. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit-related process 5 (S4292). The hit-related process 5 (S4292) differs from the hit-related process (S4216) in the fourth embodiment described above in that a process related to ball passage is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the hit-related process 5 (S4292), if it is determined that the prize ball command has not been received from the main control device 110 in the process of S4505 (S4505: No), it is determined whether or not the ball passage-related command has been received. (S4581). If it is determined that the ball passage-related command has been received (S4581: Yes), the ball passage-related process (S4582) is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball passage related command has not been received (S4581: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 179, a ball passage-related process (S4582), which is one process in the hit-related process 5 (S4922) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ball passage-related processing (S4582).

In the ball passage-related processing (S4582), first, it is determined whether or not the winning number command has been received from the main control device 110 this time (S8101). When it is determined that the winning number command has been received (S8101: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter 223da (S8102), and the latent mode stored in the latent mode storage area 223cc is read out. Execute (S8103). Next, it is determined whether the latent mode read in the process of S8103 is the invincible mode (S8104). When it is determined that the mode is not invincible (S8104: No), a suggestion effect suggesting the end of the latent state is set (S8105), a winning number command for display is set (S8106), and this process is terminated. .. On the other hand, in the process of S8104, when it is determined that the read latent mode is the invincible mode (S8104: Yes), the process of S8105 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S8106.

On the other hand, in the process of S8101 when it is determined that the winning number command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S8101: No), it is determined whether or not the passing number command has been received (S8107). When it is determined that the pass count command has been received (S8107: Yes), the value stored in the state setting area 223j is read out (S8108). Next, in the process of S8108, it is determined whether or not the read value is a value indicating the time saving latency (S8109). When it is determined that the read value is not a value indicating the time saving latency (S8109: No), 1 is added to the value of the pass count counter 223db (S8110). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8109 that the read value is not a value indicating the time saving latency (S8109: Yes), the process of S8110 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S8111.

Next, the latent mode stored in the latent mode storage area 223 cab is read out (S8111). Next, it is determined whether the latent mode read in the process of S8111 is an invincible mode (S8112). When it is determined that the mode is not invincible (S8112: No), a suggestion effect suggesting the end of the latent state is set (S8113), a display pass count command is set (S8114), and this process is terminated. .. On the other hand, in the process of S8112, if it is determined that the read latent mode is the invincible mode (S8112: Yes), the process of S8113 is skipped, the process of S8114 is executed, and the present process is terminated.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the operation content (opening operation pattern) of the small hit game to be executed differs depending on the type (small hit type) when the small hit is won. Depending on the opening operation pattern to be executed, the rate at which the ball winning the small hit variable winning device 2650 passes through the fall gate 2650e3 during the small hit game is configured to be different.

By configuring in this way, the content of the small hit game to be executed is predicted in order to prevent the high probability state of the special symbol from falling and to perform the game aiming at the acquisition of the privilege (prize ball) by the small hit game. It is possible to let the player select a game while letting the player select a game.

In addition, as in the fourth embodiment described above, in the latent state set during the period when one special symbol is executing the jackpot fluctuation, a small hit is won in the other special symbol fluctuation (lottery). Even if the ball passes through the fall gate 2650e3, the high-probability state of the special symbol does not shift to the low-probability state.

As a result, in the state where the latent probability state is set, the advantageous latent probability state in which the high probability state of the special symbol does not fall (difficult) and the high probability state of the special symbol are more likely to fall than the advantageous latent probability state. It is possible to set the unfavorable probability state.

In each of the above embodiments, the process of updating the value of the time reduction counter 203f (process of subtracting the number of time reductions) is the timing at which the variation of the special symbol is started (for example, the first special symbol variation start process (see S208 in FIG. 33)). ), So that the first special symbol change (lottery) and the second special symbol change (lottery) can be executed at the same time in a gaming machine for a predetermined number of times. , It is configured to execute a time-saving game (a game in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is set), but for example, when setting 100 to the value of the time-saving counter 203f (when setting 100 times of time-saving). ), There is a problem that the period from the start of the 100th special symbol change to the start of the 101st special symbol change becomes a non-time saving state (low probability state of a normal symbol).

During the period when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the lottery (variation) that is advantageous to the player can be executed even in the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol different from the special symbol. The period from the start of the 100th special symbol change to the start of the 101st special symbol change, that is, the period from the start of the number of special symbol changes exceeding the predetermined time reduction number. There is a problem that the player is uncomfortable due to the setting of the non-time saving state.

However, if the process of updating the value of the time reduction counter 203f (the process of subtracting the number of time reductions) is configured to be updated at the timing when the variation display of the special symbol ends (the timing when the symbol confirmation period ends), In a gaming machine that can simultaneously execute the first special symbol change (lottery) and the second special symbol change (lottery), the time saving state sets the special symbol change (lottery) more than a predetermined number of times. There was a problem that it was executed in the state where it was done.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the time saving end condition is applied to the special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) corresponding to the special symbol lottery (100th time saving) executed when the value of the time saving counter 203f becomes 0. (1st time reduction end condition) is set, and the time reduction end condition (2nd time reduction end condition) is also set for the other special symbol (for example, the 2nd special symbol), and the set two time reduction end conditions are set. Of these, it may be configured to end the time saving state based on the time saving ending condition that is satisfied earlier.

Specifically, when a predetermined period (for example, 100 times of time reduction) is set as the period for which the time reduction state is set, the special symbol change corresponding to the final change of the time reduction state (for example, the 100th time reduction) ends. The first time-saving end condition that is satisfied as a result, and the second time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the condition for starting a new special symbol change (for example, the 101st special symbol change) that is newly executed after a predetermined period is satisfied are satisfied. And, if the first time reduction end condition is satisfied first, that is, by the time the 101st special symbol change is started, the 100th special symbol change period (or symbol confirmation period) has ended. In that case, the time saving state is terminated at that point.

On the other hand, when the second time reduction end condition is satisfied before the first time reduction end condition is satisfied, that is, before the 100th special symbol change period (or symbol determination period) ends (special). If the condition for starting the 101st special symbol change is satisfied (during the symbol change), the time saving state may be terminated before the 101st special symbol lottery is executed.

With this configuration, the maximum period can be achieved while preventing the special symbol fluctuation (lottery) from being executed more than a predetermined number of times in the state where the time saving state is set as the game state. It can be set as a time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to set a state advantageous to the player as long as possible as a normal symbol lottery (variation).

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the probability variation counter 203aa for measuring the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set and the time reduction counter 203f for measuring the period in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set are provided. However, in each of the above embodiments, the time saving counter is used instead of the process of interrupting the subtraction of the probability variation counter 203aa (the process of interrupting (skipping) the measurement). A process of interrupting the subtraction of 203f may be applied, or vice versa.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 194. In the second embodiment described above, the so-called simultaneous fluctuation type pachinko machine 10 capable of simultaneously executing the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol, and further. It was configured to change the gaming state during the symbol determination period (the period during which the first symbol is stopped and displayed) for displaying the lottery result of the special symbol. That is, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the state where the probability variation state is set, the start timing of the symbol confirmation period (the first symbol indicating the big hit) in which the lottery result is displayed is displayed. Was configured to shift from the probable change state to the latent state at the timing when the stop is displayed).

With this configuration, the second special symbol in the latent state during the symbol confirmation period of special figure 1 (the period from the stop display of the first symbol indicating the jackpot to the execution of the jackpot game). (Special figure 2) It was possible to execute the game and improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the second embodiment described above, in order to prevent a situation in which the jackpot game and the lottery game of the special symbol are performed at the same time and the player cannot concentrate on the jackpot game, the jackpot game is performed. (From the time when the opening period of the jackpot game is set to the end of the ending period of the jackpot game), the special symbol change (lottery) is not executed. In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, since the lottery (variation) of the special symbol is not executed during the jackpot game, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game. However, since the special symbol lottery (variation) is not performed during all the periods during the jackpot game, the period for executing the special symbol lottery is limited, and the game efficiency (number of special symbol lottery executions per unit time) decreases. There was a problem of doing it.

On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, even during the period from the execution of the jackpot game to the start of the round game (opening period of the jackpot game), the special symbol change on the side that has not won the jackpot changes. It is configured to be executed. Specifically, for example, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol and the jackpot game corresponding to the winning jackpot is started (when the opening period of the jackpot game is set), during the opening period. It is configured to execute the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol.

That is, even during the jackpot game, the round game in which the ball can be entered by the jackpot game (the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is in an open state in which it is easy to enter the ball). During the period other than the game) (for example, the opening period, the interval period, and the ending period), the special symbol lottery can be executed. With this configuration, the jackpot game can be watched during the round game in the jackpot game, and the special symbol fluctuation can be watched during the other period, so that the player can be provided with an efficient game.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the jackpot is not won in the special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from providing an excessive jackpot game. In addition, in the present embodiment, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is wrong (other than the big hit), a small amount of privilege (prize ball) can be won in the small hit that can be given to the player. ing. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so that the probability of winning a small hit is different. Therefore, the degree of advantage between the second special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game of the first special symbol and the first special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game of the second special symbol can be different.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment>
Here, the electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 182. FIG. 180 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 180, the ROM 202 of the sixth embodiment is different from the ROM 202 of the second embodiment described above in that the open scenario table 202ea is added, and the other elements are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The open scenario table 202ea is a data table in which the game contents during the big hit game or the small hit game (hereinafter referred to as the hit game) are stored, and the scenario of the executed hit game is according to the hit type. It is remembered. Specifically, the length of the period (opening period) from the start of the winning game to the start of the first round game, the length of the round game period, and the variable winning state that is opened in the round game. The type of device, the number of times a round game is executed, the length of the inter-round game (interval period), and the length of the ending period set after all the round games are completed are stored.

The information (contents of the winning game) read out for executing the winning game corresponding to the winning big hit or small hit may be predetermined, and the open scenario table 202ea is used as in the present embodiment. Information may be stored, or the method used in each of the above-described embodiments may be adopted.

Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 181. FIG. 181 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the main control device 110RAM 203 according to the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 181, the RAM 203 of the sixth embodiment has a jackpot state flag 203ea, a small hit state flag 203eb, a special figure variable variable flag 203ec, and a jackpot interruption flag 203ed with respect to the RAM 203 of the second embodiment described above. , The difference is that the special figure fluctuation prohibition flag 203ee is added.

The jackpot status flag 203ea is for indicating the status during the jackpot game, and the type of the special symbol that won the jackpot and the current jackpot game status (during the opening period, during the round game, during the interval period, and the ending period). It is a flag referred to when determining which of the middle). Here, the contents of the jackpot state flag 203ea will be described with reference to FIG. 182 (a). FIG. 182 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot state flag 203ea. As shown in FIG. 182 (a), the jackpot state flag 203ea is composed of a 1-byte storage area, and is configured so that the gaming state can be specified by the state of the lower 4 bits.

Specifically, the special symbol that won the jackpot this time is the first special symbol (special diagram 1), and during the opening period (OP) of the jackpot game, the lower 4 bits are "0001" (FIG. 182 (a). ) Is described as "01"), the lower 4 bits are "0010" (described as "02" in FIG. 182 (a)) during the round game (round), and the lower 4 bits are described during the inter-round game (interval). The 4 bits are "0011" (described as "03" in FIG. 182 (a)), and the lower 4 bits are "0100" (described as "04" in FIG. 182 (a)) during the ending period (ED). Become.

The special symbol that won the jackpot this time is the second special symbol (special diagram 2), and during the opening period (OP) of the jackpot game, the lower 4 bits are "0101" (in FIG. 182 (a), "" 05 ”), and during the round game (round), the lower 4 bits are“ 0110 ”(described as“ 06 ”in FIG. 182 (a)), and during the inter-round game (interval), the lower 4 bits are. It becomes "0111" (described as "07" in FIG. 182 (a)), and the lower 4 bits become "1000" (described as "08" in FIG. 182 (a)) during the ending period (ED).

Further, when the jackpot game is not executed (when the jackpot middle flag 203o is set to off), the lower 4 bits are set to "0000" as the initial state. The jackpot state flag 203ea is configured to update its value according to the updated jackpot scenario in the jackpot control process 6 (see S2272 in FIG. 188) executed during the jackpot game, and is a winning state. The jackpot state flag 203ea is updated based on the information stored in the storage area 203j, that is, the type of the special symbol won in the jackpot and the content (big hit game state) indicated by the updated jackpot scenario.

As described above, since the value of the jackpot state flag 203ea is configured to be updated based on the jackpot scenario, for example, a means for storing the updated content of the jackpot status flag 203ea and the stored content thereof. A means for determining (past history) may be provided, and a configuration may be used in which the presence or absence of an abnormality in the jackpot game is determined based on the determination result of the past history of the jackpot state flag 203ea. Specifically, for example, from the values that can be set when a big hit is won by the lottery of Special Figure 1 (values of "01" to "04" shown in FIG. 182 (a)), the big hit by the lottery of Special Figure 2 When it is determined that the value has been updated to the value that can be set when the player wins the game (the value of "05" to "08" shown in FIG. It is preferable to configure it to notify an abnormality. As a result, it is possible to accurately determine that the player has played an illegal game during the jackpot game.

In this embodiment, the value of the jackpot state flag 203ea is configured to be variable according to the execution content of the jackpot control process 6 (see S2272 in FIG. 188), but the current jackpot game status can be determined. Any configuration may be used, for example, a means for determining whether or not the current jackpot is being hit, a means for detecting the open state of the variable winning device (first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650), and the like. May be configured to set the value of the jackpot state flag 203ea based on the discrimination (detection) result of each means, or the content of the image displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be discriminated. The current jackpot game situation may be determined based on the determination result of the means.

Then, when the value set in the jackpot state flag 203ea is updated, a state command for indicating to that effect is set and output to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 determines the current jackpot game status by receiving a status command for indicating that the value set in the jackpot status flag 203ea has been updated, and various production modes according to the jackpot game status. Is set.

In the sixth embodiment, the special symbol type won by the jackpot is also determined as the jackpot game situation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol type may not be determined. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of types for classifying the jackpot game situations.

The small hit state flag 203eb is for indicating the state during the small hit game, and which is the current small hit game status (during the opening period, during the round game, during the interval period, during the ending period). This is a flag that is referred to when determining. Here, the contents of the small hit state flag 203eb will be described with reference to FIG. 182 (b). FIG. 182 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit state flag 203eb. As shown in FIG. 182 (b), the small hit state flag 203eb is composed of a 1-byte storage area, and is configured so that the gaming state can be specified by the state of the lower 2 bits.

Specifically, during the opening period (OP) of the small hit game, the lower 2 bits become "01" (described as "01" in FIG. 182 (b)), and during the round game (round), the lower 2 bits become. Is "10" (described as "02" in FIG. 182 (b)), and the lower two bits are "11" (described as "03" in FIG. 182 (b)) during the ending period (ED). When the small hit game is not executed (when the small hit medium flag 203p is set to off), the lower two bits are "00" (described as "00" in FIG. 182 (b)). ..

In the present embodiment, since the round game is configured to be executed only once as the small hit game, the value for indicating the interval period is deleted from the above-mentioned big hit state flag 203ea, and the first 1 Since it is configured so that the small hit is not won in the lottery of the special symbol, the value for determining the type of the special symbol won in the small hit is also deleted. The value of the small hit state flag 203eb is configured to be set according to the update content of the small hit scenario to be updated in the small hit control process 6 (see S2273 in FIG. 193), and the small hit state flag is set. When the value of 203eb is updated, a status command for indicating the value of the updated small hit state flag 203eb is set and output to the voice lamp control device 113.

The voice lamp control device 113 grasps the current small hit game situation by receiving a state command including information for indicating the value of the small hit state flag 203eb, and displays an effect mode according to the current situation. Set.

The special symbol changeable flag 203ec is a flag for indicating whether the current situation is in a state where a new special symbol change can be executed, and is turned on when a new special symbol change can be executed. It is set.

The jackpot interruption flag 203ed is a flag for suspending the update of the jackpot scenario during the jackpot game, and is set to be turned on when the update of the jackpot scenario is interrupted. The jackpot interruption flag 203ed is set to on, for example, when the lottery result of the special symbol executed during the opening period of the jackpot game becomes a small hit and the jackpot game is executed.

In the sixth embodiment, a new special symbol lottery (variation) is executed in a part of the state during the jackpot game (a state in which the round game is not executed), and the special symbol lottery is performed. If a small hit is won, the small hit game is executed. During this small hit game, the big hit interruption flag 203ed is set to on so that the big hit scenario is not updated.

With this configuration, for example, even if a small hit is won during the opening period of the big hit game, the small hit game can be reliably executed without starting the round game of the big hit. In addition, even if a small hit is won within a predetermined period such as the opening period of the big hit, many small hit games are executed because the opening period of the big hit is not subtracted (update of the big hit scenario). You can enthusiastically play the game.

In the sixth embodiment, when the small hit game is executed during the big hit game, the update of the big hit scenario is interrupted and the small hit game is surely executed, but the present invention is limited to this. Without interrupting the update of the jackpot scenario, for example, the jackpot game is forcibly terminated based on the timing at which the jackpot round game is executed, or the jackpot game is completed until the jackpot round game is completed. May be configured to be temporarily interrupted.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, since the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is set to be on based on the timing at which the small hit game is executed, the jackpot scenario is updated during the fluctuation time of the special symbol won by the small hit. Will be done. As a result, in addition to winning a small hit during the big hit game, the player can be made to play the game while expecting that a fluctuation pattern in which the shortest fluctuation time is set is set. On the other hand, the contents of the special symbol lottery (variation) can be closely watched.

In this case, regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol variation executed this time at the timing when the variation of the special symbol is started, it is preferable to execute the variation time suggestion notification suggesting the set variation time. As a result, it is possible to indicate to the player whether or not a short fluctuation time has been set, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the next special symbol lottery can be executed immediately by setting a short fluctuation time. That is, the fluctuation time suggestion notification is a notification indicating whether or not the lottery result is advantageous to the player without indicating whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a hit or a miss (hit or fail determination result).

In addition to the configuration of the sixth embodiment, for example, the big hit interruption flag 203ed may be set to ON based on the timing when the special symbol change won in the small hit is executed. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem that the round game of the big hit is executed while the special symbol change in which the small hit is won is being executed, and the player is provided with a game that is difficult to understand.

Further, in order to solve the above-mentioned problem, a means for determining the remaining period of the opening period of the jackpot game and a means for determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol are provided, and this special symbol lottery (variation) is the opening period. If it is determined that the special symbol lottery will end within the opening period, an effect mode will be set based on the lottery result (win / fail determination result) of the special symbol lottery, and if it is determined that the special symbol lottery (variation) will not end within the opening period. , The effect mode corresponding to the case where the lottery result (win / fail determination result) of the special symbol lottery is out of order may be set. With this configuration, even if the lottery result of the special symbol change that was forcibly terminated by executing the big hit round game is a small hit, the special symbol change without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. Can be stopped.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the sixth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 183 to 194. The control process of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment replaces the special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see FIG. 97) with respect to the control process of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment described above. Instead of the first special symbol change start process (see FIG. 33), the first special symbol change start process 6 (see FIG. 185) and the second special symbol change start process (see FIG. 39) are used instead of the process 6 (see FIG. 183). Instead, the second special symbol change start process 6 (see FIG. 186), the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 188) instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 53), and the jackpot end process instead of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 54). The point where the small hit control process 6 (see FIG. 193) is executed instead of the process 6 (see FIG. 192) and the small hit control process (see FIG. 55), the fluctuation condition discrimination process (see FIG. 184), and the round execution process (see FIG. 184). 189) and the small hit end process (see FIG. 194) are added. Other than that, the same processing is executed. The same processing is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the special symbol variation processing 6 (S181) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 183. FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation processing 6 (S181). In the special symbol variation processing 6 (S181), the variation condition determination process (S291) is added to the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 97) of the second embodiment described above, that is, the first special symbol variation start process. The first special symbol change start process 6 (see FIG. 185) is replaced with (see FIG. 33), and the second special symbol change start process 6 (see FIG. 186) is replaced with the second special symbol change start process (see FIG. 39). It differs in that it executes. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the special symbol variation processing 6 (S181), first, the variation condition determination process (S291) is executed. The details of the fluctuation condition determination process (S291) will be described later with reference to FIG. 184. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure variable flag 203ec is on (S292). If it is determined that the special figure variable flag 203ec is not on (S292: No), the process proceeds to S202. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure variable flag 203ec is on (S292: Yes), the process proceeds to S204.

Next, with reference to FIG. 184, the variation condition determination process (S291), which is one of the processes in the special symbol variation process 6 (S181) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation condition determination process (S291).

In the variation condition determination process (S291), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure variation prohibition flag 203ee is on (S3501). When it is determined that the special figure change prohibition flag 203ee is on (S3501: Yes), the special figure changeable flag 203ec is set to off (S3506), and the process proceeds to S3507. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation prohibition flag 203ee is not on (S3501: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot medium flag 203o is on (S3502). When it is determined that the jackpot middle flag 203o is on (S3502: Yes), the information set in the jackpot state flag 203ea is read out (S3503). Next, in the process of S3503, it is determined whether or not the read information of the jackpot state flag 203ea is "01" or "05". That is, it is determined whether it is the opening period of the jackpot (S3504). When it is determined that the read information is "01" or "05" (S3504: Yes), the special figure variable flag 203ec is set to ON (S3505), and the process proceeds to S3507. On the other hand, in the processing of S3504, when it is determined that the read information is not "01" or "05" (S3504: No), the special figure variable flag 203ec is set to off (S3506), and the processing of S3507. Move to.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit medium flag 203o is not on (S3502: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit medium flag 203p is on (S3507). When it is determined that the small hit middle flag 203p is off (S3507: No), the special figure variation flag 203ec is set to ON (S3512), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3507, when it is determined that the small hit medium flag 203p is on (S3507: Yes), the information set in the small hit state flag 203eb is read out (S3508). Next, it is determined whether or not the information of the small hit state flag 203eb read in the process of S3508 is "01" (S3509). When it is determined that the information is "01" (S3509: Yes), the special figure variable flag 203ec is set to ON (S3510), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the read information is not "01" (S3509: No), the special figure variable flag 203ec is set to off (S3511), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 185, the first special symbol variation start process 6 (S293), which is one of the processes in the special symbol variation process 6 (S181) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment. Will be explained. FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol change start processing 6 (S293). The first special symbol variation start process 6 (S293) is different in that the information of the jackpot state flag 203ea is read out from the first special symbol variation start process (S208 in FIG. 33) in the second embodiment. .. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the first special symbol change start processing 6 (S293), first, the information set in the jackpot state flag 203ea is read out (S391). Next, it is determined whether or not the information set in the jackpot state flag 203ea is "00" or "05". That is, it is determined whether it is the opening period of the jackpot of the second special symbol or the execution period of the jackpot (S392). If it is determined that the information set in the jackpot state flag 203ea is "00" or "05" (S392: Yes), the process proceeds to S301. On the other hand, when it is determined that the information set in the jackpot state flag 203ea is neither "00" nor "05" (S392: No), this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 186, the second special symbol variation start process 6 (S294), which is one of the processes in the special symbol variation process 6 (S181) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment. Will be explained. FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol change start processing 6 (S294). The second special symbol variation start process 6 (S294) reads out the information of the jackpot state flag 203ea for the second special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 39) in the second embodiment, and reads the information of the jackpot state flag 203ea, and the jackpot of the first special symbol. Add a process to determine whether it is the opening period or the round period of. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the second special symbol change start processing 6 (S294), first, the information set in the jackpot state flag 203ea is read out (S971). Next, it is determined whether or not the information set in the jackpot state flag 203ea is "00" or "01". That is, it is determined whether it is the opening period of the jackpot of the first special symbol or the execution period of the jackpot (S972). When it is determined that the information set in the jackpot state flag 203ea is "00" or "01" (S972: Yes), the process proceeds to S901. On the other hand, if it is determined that the information set in the jackpot state flag 203ea is not "00" or "01" (S972: No), the process of S902 is executed and the present process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 187, the electric accessory opening / closing process 6 (S2271) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing the contents of the electric accessory opening / closing process 6 (S2271).

In the electric accessory opening / closing process 6 (S2271), first, it is determined whether or not there is an opening setting (S3601). When it is determined that there is an open setting (S3601: Yes), the solenoid of the corresponding attacker is set to ON (S3602), the jackpot status flag 203ea is set to the corresponding value (S3606), and this process is terminated. do. On the other hand, in the process of S3601 when it is determined that there is no open setting (S3601: No), it is determined whether or not there is a closed setting (S3603). When it is determined that there is a closing setting (S3603: Yes), the solenoid of the corresponding attacker is set to off (S3604), the process of S3606 is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3603, when it is determined that there is no closing setting (S3603: No), it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the closing scenario (S3605). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the closing scenario (S3605: Yes), the process of S3606 is executed and the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3605 that it is not the end timing of the closing scenario (S3605: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, the jackpot control process 6 (S2272) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 188. FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 6 (S2272).

In the jackpot control process 6 (S2272), first, when it is determined in the process of S2301 that the jackpot scenario is set (S2301: Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is on (S2351). .. If it is determined that the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is on (S2351: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is not on (S2351: No), the jackpot scenario is updated (S2302).

Next, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the jackpot (S2302). When it is determined that it is the start timing of the big hit (S2303: Yes), the opening command is set (S2304), the value corresponding to the big hit state flag 203ea is set (S2352), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2303, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the start of the big hit (S2303: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S2305). If it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S2305: Yes), the round execution process (S2353) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 189, a round execution process (S2353), which is one process in the jackpot control process 6 (S2272) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the contents of the round execution process (S2353).

In the round execution process (S2353), first, it is determined whether or not the present time is the start timing of the first round (S3701). If it is determined that it is the start timing of the first round (S3701: Yes), the jackpot interruption process is executed (S3702), and the process proceeds to the process of S3703. The details of the jackpot interruption process (S3702) will be described later with reference to FIG. 190. On the other hand, in the process of S3701 when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the first round (S3701: No), the value corresponding to the jackpot state flag 203ea is set (S3703), and the process corresponding to the jackpot scenario is set. (S3704), and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 190, a jackpot interruption process (S3702), which is one process in the round execution process (S2353) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot interruption process (S3702).

In the big hit interruption process (S3702), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit medium flag 203p is on (S3801). When it is determined that the small hit middle flag 203p is on (S3801: Yes), the big hit interruption flag 203ed is set to on (S3802), the big hit interruption command is set (S3803), and the process proceeds to S3805. .. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3801 that the small hit medium flag 203p is not on (S3801: No), an opening command indicating the start of a small hit is set (S3804), and the process proceeds to S3805.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m or the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is larger than 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is changing (S3805). When it is determined that the special symbol is changing (S3805: Yes), the corresponding special symbol is stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (S3806), the special symbol fluctuation prohibition flag 203ee is set to ON (S3807), and this End the process. On the other hand, in the process of S3805, when it is determined that the special symbol is not changing (S3805: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Returning to FIG. 188, the explanation will be continued. On the other hand, in the process of S2305, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S2305: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the round (S2307). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the round (S2307: Yes), the closing of the specific winning opening is set (S2308), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2307, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the round (S2307: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of the end of the operation of the special electric power (S2354). When it is determined that it is the timing of the end of the operation of the special electric power (S2354: Yes), the ending execution process (S2355) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 191, an ending execution process (S2355), which is one process in the jackpot control process 6 (S2272) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending execution process (S2355).

In the ending execution process (S2355), first, a value corresponding to the jackpot state flag 203ea is set (S3901), an ending command is set (S3902), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 188, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S2354, when it is determined that it is not the operation end timing of the special electric power (S2354: No), it is determined whether it is the operation end timing of the combined operation device (S2356). When it is determined that it is the operation end timing of the combined operation device (S2356: Yes), the jackpot end process 6 (S2357) is executed to end this process. On the other hand, in the process of S2356, if it is determined that it is not the operation end timing of the combined operation device (S2356: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, the jackpot end process 6 (S2357) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 192. FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end process 6 (S2357). In the jackpot end process 6 (S2357), after setting the status command for the jackpot end process (S2312 in FIG. 54) of the second embodiment described above (S2406), the jackpot status flag 203ea is set to "00". The difference is that the process (S2451) is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the small hit control process 6 (S2272) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 193. FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit control process 6 (S2272). In the small hit control process 6 (S2272), a process of setting a value corresponding to the small hit state flag 203eb is added to the small hit control process (S2205 in FIG. 55) of the second embodiment described above. The difference is that the small hit end process (S2584) is executed instead of the process of S2512. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the small hit control process 6 (S2272), when it is determined that it is the timing to start the small hit in the process of S2503 (S2503: Yes), the opening command is set (S2504), and the small hit state flag 203eb is supported. The value to be set is set (S2581), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2503, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the small hit (S2503: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the small hit round (S2505). When it is determined that it is the start timing of the small hit round (S2505: Yes), the small hit operation setting process (S2506) is executed, the value corresponding to the small hit state flag 203eb is set (S2582), and this process is performed. To finish.

Then, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that it is the ending timing in the processing of S2509 (S2509: Yes), the ending command is set (S2510), and the value corresponding to the small hit state flag 203eb is set (S2509: Yes). S2583), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2509, if it is determined that it is not the ending timing (S2509: No), it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the small hit (S2511). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (S2511: Yes), the small hit end process (S2584) is executed to end this process.

Here, with reference to FIG. 194, a small hit end process (S2584), which is one process in the small hit control process 6 (S2272) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit end process (S2584).

In the small hit end process (S2584), first, it is determined whether the big hit interruption flag 203ed is on (S2591). When it is determined that the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is on (S2591: Yes), the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is set to off (S2592), and the special figure fluctuation prohibition flag 203ee is set to on (S2593). Next, the update value of the big hit scenario is subtracted by 1 (S2594), the small hit medium flag 203p is set to off (S2595), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2591 that the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is not on (S2591: No), the processes of S2592 to S2594 are skipped, the process of S2595 is executed, and the present process is terminated.

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the special symbol change on the side that has not won the jackpot even during the period from the execution of the jackpot game to the start of the round game (opening period of the jackpot game). Is configured to be executed. Specifically, for example, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol and the jackpot game corresponding to the winning jackpot is started (when the opening period of the jackpot game is set), during the opening period. It is configured to execute the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol.

That is, even during the jackpot game, the round game in which the ball can be entered by the jackpot game (the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is in an open state in which it is easy to enter the ball). During the period other than the game) (for example, the opening period, the interval period, and the ending period), the special symbol lottery can be executed. With this configuration, the jackpot game can be watched during the round game in the jackpot game, and the special symbol fluctuation can be watched during the other period, so that the player can be provided with an efficient game.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the jackpot is not won in the special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from providing an excessive jackpot game. In addition, in the present embodiment, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is wrong (other than the big hit), a small amount of privilege (prize ball) can be won in the small hit that can be given to the player. ing. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so that the probability of winning a small hit is different. Therefore, the degree of advantage between the second special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game of the first special symbol and the first special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game of the second special symbol can be different.

<7th Embodiment>
Next, the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 195 to 233. In each of the above-described embodiments, the jackpot game is executed only when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a specific area 650V is provided in the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 opened during the small hit game, and the ball passes through the specific area 650V during the small hit game. It is configured so that a big hit (so-called per 2 types) game is executed.

In addition, as will be described in detail later, as a path for the ball to flow down toward the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 opened during the small hit game, the first flow in which the ball is difficult to pass through the specific area 650V. The road ta (see FIG. 196) and the second flow path tb (see FIG. 196) in which the sphere easily passes through the specific region 650V are provided. As a result, the player pays close attention to which flow path the ball flows down during the small hit game. Therefore, since the player can be interested in the movement of the ball flowing down on the game board 13, the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the ball is distributed to the above-mentioned first flow path ta or the second flow path tb by the opening / closing operation of the electric accessory 3640a, so that the operation of the electric accessory 3640a It is also possible to make the player interested in. Further, when the ball flows down the second flow path tb that easily passes through the specific region 650V, the ease of winning the ball in the V winning device 650 is configured to be different according to the fluctuation time of the special symbol. ing.

Further, the change time of the special symbol to be set is configured to be different depending on the set game state and the winning small hit type. With this configuration, when a small hit corresponding to a big hit that is given a time saving state after the big hit game is won, the game state (advantageous time saving) that makes it easier for the ball to pass through the specific area 650V and the big hit end. When a small hit corresponding to a big hit to which a time saving state is given later is won, a gaming state (unfavorable time saving) that makes it easy for the ball to pass through the specific area 650V can be set.

Then, in the present embodiment, by using the above-mentioned advantageous time saving and disadvantageous time saving configurations, once a big hit is won (first hit), at least three big hits including the first hit are executed. It is configured so that the gaming state favorable to the player continues. By making it possible to set a game state in which it is guaranteed that the jackpot game is executed a plurality of times in this way, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the detailed configuration will be described later with reference to FIGS. 196 to 198, but in the seventh embodiment, the second special symbol is configured to win a small hit by lottery, and the second special symbol is won. The electric accessory 3640a is configured to operate so that the ball can easily enter the second entrance 3640, which is an opportunity to execute the lottery. Then, the electric accessory 3640a shifts to the closed state based on the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 3640a entering the second entry port 3640, and at that time, it flows down on the electric accessory 3640a. The ball is configured to be distributed to the first flow path ta and the second flow path tb according to the position (upstream side, downstream side) where the ball has flowed down.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the ball located on the downstream side of the ball flow path on the electric accessory 3640a is configured to be distributed to the second flow path tb which is advantageous to the player, and continuously. When the ball is launched, it is configured so that the ball can easily flow into the second flow path tb.

Therefore, in order to allow the ball to flow into the second flow path tb while the lottery for the second special symbol is being executed, it is necessary to continuously shoot the ball toward the game area of the game board 13. .. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an act of obtaining an advantageous result by firing the ball at a predetermined timing.

Here, the configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 195. FIG. 195 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 195, the seventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above in that the structure of the right side region of the game board 13 is significantly different.

Specifically, a point where the flow path unit 660 is provided in the right side region of the game board 13, a point where a second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 is provided below the flow path unit 660, and a second variable A point that a specific area 650v that can provide a big hit game based on the passage of a ball is provided in the winning device (V winning device) 650, and a second variable winning device provided in the lower center of the game board 13. The difference is that 650, the second ball entry port 640, and the lower first ball entry port 64b2 to which the electric accessory 64a is attached are deleted. Other configurations are the same as those of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) of the first embodiment described above, and the same configurations are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the configuration of the flow path unit 660 will be described with reference to FIGS. 196 to 198. FIG. 196 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the flow path unit 660, and FIG. 197 (a) is a plan view schematically showing a ball flow when the electric accessory 3640a is in a closed state (buried state). Therefore, FIG. 197 (b) is a perspective view schematically showing the ball flow when the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state (buried state). FIG. 198 (a) is a plan view schematically showing the ball flow when the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state (protruding state), and FIG. 198 (b) shows the electric accessory 3640a. It is a perspective view which shows typically the ball flow in the open state (protruding state).

To explain the term indicating the variable state of the electric accessory 3640a used in the seventh embodiment, the closed state of the electric accessory 3640a is a flow path for allowing the ball to enter the second entry port 3640. It is a term used to indicate a state in which (a flow path formed on the electric accessory 3640a) is closed, that is, a state in which the electric accessory 3640a is embedded in the game board 13, and is a functional expression. As a stipulation, the term restricted state (a state in which the ball is restricted from entering the second entry port 3640) may be used.

Further, the open state of the electric accessory 3640a is a state in which the flow path for allowing the ball to enter the second entry port 3640 (the flow path formed on the electric accessory 3640a) is open, that is, electric. It is a term used to indicate a state in which the accessory 3640a protrudes from the game board 13, and as a functional expression, a term of an allowable state (a state in which a ball is allowed to enter the second entrance 3640). May be used.

As shown in FIG. 196, the flow path unit 660 forms a first passage 660a forming the first flow path ta and a second flow path tb as a ball passage for flowing the ball toward the V winning device 650. It has a second passage 660b, and further, a first inflow port 661 into which a ball flowing down substantially in the center of the right side region flows in, and a ball flowing in from the first inflow port 661 flows down toward the electric accessory 3640a. The first taxiway 661a (see FIG. 197 (b)), the second inflow port 662 through which the ball flowing down the left side of the right side region flows in, and the ball flowing in from the second inflow port 662 pass through the through gate 67. The third passage 660c is allowed to flow down toward the lower region of the game board 13, the third inflow port 663 into which the ball flowing down on the right side of the right side region flows in, and the ball flowing in from the third inflow port 663 is flown into the game board 13. It is composed of an out port 66 for discharging to the outside.

The sphere flowing down the right region is a flow path unit while varying the flow path by a plurality of nails arranged above the flow path unit 660 (for example, a nail 660k (see FIG. 195) which is a flow path variable member). It is configured to reach 660, with about 55% of the spheres flowing down the right region flowing into the first inlet 661, about 40% into the second inlet 662, and about 5% into the third. It is configured to flow into the inflow port 663. The above-mentioned distribution ratio shows an average value when a right-handed game is performed. For example, among the firing intensities capable of a right-handed game, the ball continues to be fired at the weakest firing intensity. In this case, the proportion of balls flowing into the second inflow port 662 increases. By allowing the player to control the firing intensity in the right-handed game in this way, the inflow ratio to each inflow port arranged in the flow path unit 660 can be changed, so that the player can change the firing intensity. It can provide the enjoyment of varying the firing intensity so that a favorable game is performed.

Further, the ball flowing down the second inlet 662 is configured to be distributed to two flow paths formed in the depth direction of the pachinko machine 10, and is distributed to the front flow path (about 90). %) Flows down the third passage 660c provided with the through gate 67, and the balls (about 10%) distributed to the back passage (not shown) flow into the out port 66, and the pachinko machine 10 It is configured to be discharged to the outside. As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the position close to both ends of the electric accessory 3640a that is opened when the lottery result of the normal symbol is a hit (formed when the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state). An out port 66 is arranged (a partition wall for partitioning the space from the out port 66 is arranged) at a position close to each of the upstream end and the downstream end of the ball flow path.

With this configuration, the player can easily understand the movable range of the electric accessory 3640a that is operated when the hit game of the normal symbol is executed, so that the electric accessory 3640a during the hit game can be easily understood. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the opening operation of.

In the schematic diagram shown with reference to FIG. 196, the partition wall for partitioning the space between the out port 66 and the movable region of the electric accessory 3640a is in contact with the electric accessory 3640a, but in reality, it is in contact with the electric accessory 3640a. , It is configured so that a gap of less than half a sphere is generated. As a result, even if the opening operation of the electric accessory 3640a is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to prevent the electric accessory 3640a or the partition wall from being damaged by friction. Further, since the size of the gap is less than half the size of the sphere, it is possible to prevent the sphere from spilling downward from the gap.

Next, the ball flow of the right-handed game when the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state (buried state) will be described with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197. As shown in FIG. 196, the ball flowing in from the first inflow port 661 flows down toward the electric accessory 3640a, but when the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state (buried state), it is on the electric accessory 3640a. It flows down to the first passage 660a provided below the first taxiway 661a (see FIG. 197 (b)) without flowing down. The first passage 660a is a passage in which the first passage ta is formed. The first flow path ta is configured so that the time required for the ball to pass is about 0.5 seconds, and the ball is V-winned in a shorter time than the ball flowing down the second flow path tb, which will be described later. The device 650 can be reached.

In addition, most of the balls flowing into the second inflow port 662 pass through the through gate 67 regardless of the state of the electric accessory 3640a, and are on the front side of the second passage 660b described later. It flows down the third passage 660c formed (on the front side from the viewpoint of the player looking at the pachinko machine 10 from the front) and is discharged to the lower region of the game board 13. Further, a part (about 10%) of the balls flowing into the second inflow port 662 passes through the fourth passage (not shown) provided on the back side of the third passage 660c and flows into the out port 66.

In this way, by constructing a plurality of ball passages using the space in the depth direction of the game board 13, the flow path through which the balls flow can be three-dimensionally formed, so that the game area of the game board 13 can be formed. It is possible to configure more ball passages in a limited range, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing a ball flow that does not get tired of the player.

Similar to the second inlet 662 described above, the ball that has entered the third inlet also passes through the out port 66 and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 regardless of the state of the electric accessory 3640a. .. Here, the structure of the upper surface (lower surface of the ball flow) of the electric accessory 3640a will be described with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197 (a). As shown in FIG. 196, the electric accessory 3640a is configured so that a downward inclination is formed from the upper right direction to the lower left direction when the pachinko machine 10 is viewed from the front, and the upper surface of the electric accessory 3640a is formed. The ball that has reached is configured to flow down the upper surface of the electric accessory 3640a from the upstream side (upper right side) to the downstream side (lower left side) by its own weight.

The upper surface of the electric accessory 3640a is provided with a delay member for delaying the flow speed at which the ball flows down the upper surface. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 197 (a), the first delay member 3641 and the second delay member 3642 are provided, and the ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 3640a is the first delay member 3461. The ball enters the second entry port 640 provided on the lower end side of the flow end of the electric accessory 3640a while in contact with the second delay member 3642. In this embodiment, the installation member 3643 is provided as a delay member for delaying the flow speed of the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 3640a.

The installation member 3644 is directly attached to the flow path unit 660 instead of the electric accessory 3640a. Therefore, it is always arranged at a fixed position without being involved in the operation of the electric accessory 3640a. The delay member for delaying the flow speed of the ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 3640a is provided in the first delay member 3461, the second delay member 3642, and the flow path unit 660 attached to the electric accessory 3640a. When the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state (protruding state) (see FIG. 198 (a)) by being composed of the attached installation member 3644, the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 3640a meanders. It functions as a flow path forming means for making the electric accessory 3640a, and when the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state (buried state) (see FIG. 197 (a)), it is impossible for the ball to flow down on the electric accessory 3640a. It can function as a flow suppression means that makes it (difficult).

Here, the above-mentioned flow suppressing means will be specifically described. When the electric accessory 3640a is in a closed state (see FIG. 197 (a)), that is, in a state where it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entry port. As shown in FIG. 197 (a), since the electric accessory 3640a is embedded in the back side of the game board 13, the first delay member 3641 on the electric accessory 3640a is on the game board 13 side. Will be located in. As a result, the distance ct between the first delay member 3641 and the installation member 3643 becomes narrower (the distance (about 5 mm) so that the ball cannot pass between the first delay member 3641 and the installation member 3644. Become). Similarly, the distance td between the second delay member 3642 and the installation member 3644 is also such that the ball cannot pass through (about 7 mm).

As a result, even if the ball is illegally placed on the electric accessory 3640a while the electric accessory 3640a is closed, the ball enters the second entrance 3640. It can be suppressed. Further, when the electric accessory 3640a is set to the open state (protruding state), it is not necessary to bury each delay member on the electric accessory 3640a inside the gaming board 13, so that the electric accessory 3640a is to be embedded. The opening of the game board 13 to be provided can be narrowed, and it is possible to prevent dust and dirt from entering the inside of the pachinko machine 10 from the opening of the game board 13.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, even when the electric accessory 3640a is closed, the electric accessory 3640a is not completely embedded in the game board 13, but is partially (first delay member 3461, first). 2 The state in which the delay member 3642) is exposed is configured to be the closed state of the electric accessory 3640a. As a result, even when the electric accessory 3640a is located in the closed state, the player can easily grasp at which position the electric accessory 3640a is arranged. Further, since each delay member provided on the electric accessory 3640a is exposed, how the ball flows down on the electric accessory 3640a when the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state (protruding state). It is possible to let the player know whether to do it.

That is, in the seventh embodiment, the movement of the ball (ball flow on the electric accessory 3640a) that can be executed when the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state is in a state where the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state. Since the player can be made to grasp in advance, it is possible to prevent the player from actually opening the electric accessory 3640a and overlooking the state in which the ball flows down on the electric accessory 3640a.

On the other hand, when the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state (protruding state), as shown in FIG. 198, a ball that has flowed into the first inflow port 661 and has flowed down the first taxiway 661a is on the electric accessory 3640a. To reach. Then, the upper surface of the electric accessory 3640a is inclined and meanders along the shape of each delay member while flowing down toward the second entry port 3640.

Here, when the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state (protruding state), the spherical flow path formed on the electric accessory 3640a will be described with reference to FIG. 198 (a). Is formed with a meandering ball flow path until the ball discharged from the first guideway 661a reaches the second entry port 3640. The time for the sphere to pass through this meandering spherical flow path is about 2 seconds, and it passes through the flow path (flow path upstream portion ZA) from the discharge port of the first taxiway 661a to the inner side of the first delay member 3641. It takes about 0.8 seconds to pass through the flow path (downstream part ZB of the flow path) from the back side of the first delay member 3641 to the second entry port 3640. It is configured to be seconds.

In the present embodiment, the operation end condition of the electric accessory 3640a is the first normal electric end condition and the second, which are satisfied when the elapsed time from the operation to the open state (protruding state) is 3 seconds. The second normal power end condition, which is satisfied when one ball enters the ball entry port 3640, is set, and when any of the normal power end conditions is satisfied, the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state. It is configured to operate to (buried state).

The ball staying on the electric accessory 3640a when the electric accessory 3640a operates from the open state (protruding state) to the closed state (buried state) is the first passage 660a, which is desired below the electric accessory 3640a. Alternatively, it is configured to fall into any of the second passages 660b. That is, the moving distance (moving distance in the depth direction) when operating the electric accessory 3640a from the open state (protruding state) to the closed state (buried state) is at least one ball (11 mm) or more. In the present embodiment, the moving distance of the electric accessory 3640a is set to be 15 mm, which is larger than one ball (11 mm) and smaller than two balls (22 mm).

With this configuration, when the electric accessory 3640a is closed, the ball located on the electric accessory 3640a can be reliably dropped downward, and the two balls are pachinko. Since the machines 10 do not continuously fall in the depth direction, it is possible to prevent ball clogging from occurring inside the first passage 660a and the second passage 660b.

The sphere staying in the flow path upstream portion ZA (see FIG. 198 (a)) of the meandering spherical flow path stays in the first passage 660a and in the flow path downstream portion ZB (see FIG. 198 (a)). The sphere is configured to fall into the second passage 660b. In this embodiment, due to the inertia acting on the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 3640a, the ball moves from the open state (protruding state) to the closed state (buried state) at a speed at which the ball falls directly below. It is configured as follows.

In the seventh embodiment, the electric accessory 3640a is in an open state (protruding state), and the ball is located between the second delay member 3642 and the second entry port 3640. When the ball moves to the closed state (buried state), the ball collides with the second delay member 3642 moving toward the second entry port 3640 and enters the second entry port 3640. It is composed. As described above, depending on the position of the ball on the electric accessory 3640a, the operation of moving the electric accessory 3640a from the open state to the closed state is defined as a guiding operation for guiding the ball to the second entry port. be able to.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be capable of firing 100 balls per minute, and when 100 balls are fired per minute in a right-handed game, the ratio of one ball to every two balls is about one. A ball flows into the first inflow port 661. That is, since the balls fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds flow into the first inflow port 661 at a rate of one in two balls, the interval at which the balls flow into the first inflow port 661 is about 1.2 on average. It will be seconds.

And, as described above, since the downstream portion ZB of the flow path is configured to take 1.2 seconds for the ball to pass through, when the above-mentioned second normal power termination condition is satisfied, that is, the second ball entry port. When the electric accessory 3640a operates in the closed state (buried state) due to the ball entering the 3640, and the ball is continuously launched into the right-handed area, the second entry port 3640 Since the electric accessory 3640a operates in a closed state while the ball that has flowed into the first inflow port 661 next to the ball that has entered the ball is located in the downstream portion ZB of the flow path, the ball is placed in the second passage 660b. It can be made easy to fall.

On the other hand, when the game is played with the timing of intentionally launching the ball, it is difficult for another ball to fall into the second passage 660b with the ball entering the second entry port 3640. can do. Therefore, in order to allow the ball to enter the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650, which is advantageous to the player, it is possible to encourage the ball to be continuously fired.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the time saving state is set as the gaming state, 3 seconds is set as the first normal power ending condition of the electric accessory 3640a as described above, but the gaming state is the normal state. In this case, the first normal train end condition is set to 0.2 seconds. This 0.2 seconds is set to be shorter than the time (0.8 seconds) required to flow down the upstream portion of the meandering spherical flow path formed on the electric accessory 3640a. Even if the right-handed game is performed during the normal state, the ball will not be allowed to enter the second entrance 3640. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the privilege of being given an advantageous privilege to a player who plays an inappropriate game such as playing a right-handed game during a normal state.

In addition, since it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down to the second passage 660b, the ball is allowed to flow down to the second passage 660b with the V winning device 650 opened by some method to reach the specific area 650V. It is possible to suppress cheating by passing the ball.

In the present embodiment, the ball passes through the second passage 660b, which is advantageous to the player, for the right-handed game in the normal state or the player who does not continuously perform the right-handed game in the time-saving state. The second passage 660b is provided on the downstream side of the electric accessory 3640a in order to make it difficult to make the electric accessory 3640a, but the second passage 660b may be provided on the upstream side of the electric accessory 3640a without limitation. Further, the number of passages for receiving the balls that have fallen from the electric accessory 3640a may be three or more, or a plurality of receiving ports for the balls that have fallen from the electric accessory 3640a are provided, and each receiving port is used in the V winning device 650. It may be configured so that the probability of passing through the specific region 650V is different. Further, a plurality of passages through which the ball that has fallen from the electric accessory 3640a can pass through the specific area 650V are provided, and the time required for each passage to reach the specific area 650V (time required for winning the V winning device 650). May be configured to be different.

Returning to FIG. 195, the explanation will be continued. A first variable winning device 65 is provided below the flow path unit 660. Similar to the first embodiment described above, the first variable winning device 65 is opened when a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery. In addition, 90% of the balls launched in the right-handed game during the jackpot game (balls that flowed into the first inflow port 661 (50%) and balls that flowed into the second inflow port 662 (40%)) Since both are configured to win a prize in the first variable winning device 65, even if the flow path unit 660 is provided on the upstream side (upper side) of the first variable winning device 65, the jackpot game can be smoothly executed. Can be done. Further, since the sphere that has flowed into the first inflow port 661 and the sphere that has flowed into the second inflow port 662 flow down different flow paths and reach the first variable winning device 65, a plurality of spheres can be simultaneously placed on the first variable winning device 65. 1 It is possible to easily make the variable winning device 65 win a prize.

<Regarding the content of the production in the 7th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 199 to 202, the playability of the seventh embodiment will be briefly described before the characteristic effects performed in the seventh embodiment are described. In the seventh embodiment, when a big hit is won by a special symbol lottery, or a small hit is won by a special symbol lottery, the ball is passed through a specific area (specific area 650V) during the small hit game. In some cases, the jackpot game is configured to be executed (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type).

Further, in the lottery of the first special symbol, the small hit is not won, and only in the lottery of the second special symbol, the small hit is won. The second ball entry port 3640, which triggers the execution of the lottery for the second special symbol, is configured so that the ball can be thrown in only when the time saving state is set as the game state. Then, when the jackpot game is executed, the time saving state is set at a predetermined rate after the jackpot is completed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 195) is configured to open in the small hit game, and the ball is passed through a specific area 650V provided in the V winning device 650. It has a difficult first flow path (first passage 660a) and a second flow path (second passage 660b) that is easy to pass through, and it is possible to change which flow path the ball flows down according to the game content. Is configured to allow

Further, the seventh embodiment has an advantageous small hit in which the time saving state is set after the end of the correspondingly set big hit game, and a disadvantageous small hit in which the time saving state is not set. It is configured to change the fluctuation time set according to it. In addition, as a time saving state, when the advantageous small hit is won, it is easy to put the ball in the specific area 650V, and when the disadvantageous small hit is won, it is easy to put the ball in the specific area 650V. It is configured to be able to set the time saving state.

In the present embodiment, the second passage (second passage 660b) capable of flowing the ball toward the specific region 650V in the V winning device 650 based on the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol It is configured to set the state in which the ball can flow down, and is configured to change the fluctuation time of the special symbol set at the time of winning the small hit between the advantageous time saving state and the disadvantageous time saving state. Then, in the state where the advantageous time saving state is set, the ball flowing down the second flow path wins the V winning device 650 when the advantageous small hit is won, and the second flow path is won when the disadvantageous small hit is won. The variation time of the special symbol corresponding to each small hit type is set so that the ball flowing down the ball does not win the V winning device 650.

With this configuration, when the advantageous time saving state is set, the ball does not pass through the specific area 650V even if the disadvantageous small hit is won, so the time saving state is set across the big hit game. be able to. That is, in the case of winning the jackpot (first hit) in which the advantageous time saving state is set after the jackpot ends in the lottery of the first special symbol, the jackpot game is executed at least twice (three times including the first hit). be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 199 (a), the effect executed when the normal symbol (second symbol) is won in the time saving state will be described. FIG. 199 (a) is a display screen showing an example of an effect executed when a normal symbol (second symbol) is won in a time-saving state. As shown in FIG. 199 (a), while the time saving state is set, the character "right-handed" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 in order to allow the player to perform the right-handed game. A symbol for showing the lottery result of the normal symbol is displayed in the variable region Dm5.

The symbol displayed in the normal symbol fluctuation region Dm5 is variablely displayed in accordance with the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol (second symbol) executed when the sphere passes through the through gate 67 (see FIG. 195). This is a display mode for showing the result of the lottery this time, in synchronization with the timing at which the fluctuation of the normal symbol (second symbol) is stopped. FIG. 199 (a) shows a display mode “display mode imitating two circles” indicating that the lottery result of the normal symbol (second symbol) is a hit. In the embodiment, when the lottery result of the normal symbol (second symbol) is out of order, the "display mode imitating two cross marks" is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol fluctuation area Dm5, and the normal symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed. ) Is being displayed, the "display mode in which the circle mark and the cross mark are alternately and variablely displayed" is displayed in the normal figure fluctuation area Dm5.

Then, as shown in FIG. 199 (a), when a winner is won in the regular drawing lottery, a character 811 imitating a rabbit crosses the bridge 851 and heads for the race venue 852. In this production, the ball is made to flow down on the electric accessory 3640a operated to the closed state (protruding state) based on the winning in the normal drawing lottery, and the ball is made to enter the second entrance 3640. It shows a game, and the operating state of the electric accessory 3640a is expressed by using the erected state of the bridge 851 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the ball enters the second entrance 3640. The display content is set so as to express whether or not the character 811 reaches the race venue 852.

In this way, by performing an effect reminiscent of actual game playability using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to inform the player of complicated game playability in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in the state of FIG. 199 (a), neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol has started to change, and it is in either the special figure 1 display area Dm1 or the special figure 2 display area Dm2. A display mode indicating that no special symbol change has been performed is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "preparing for the race" are displayed, suggesting the content of the future production.

Here, to briefly explain the flow of the effect content executed during the time saving state in the present embodiment, it is executed based on the fact that the ball is passed through the through gate 67 in the state where the time saving state is set. If a winner is won in the ordinary symbol lottery (general drawing lottery), as shown in FIG. A production corresponding to the game of entering the ball (a production toward the race venue) is executed.

Then, when the ball enters the second entrance 3640 and the change of the second special symbol is started, the character 811 reaches the race venue and the race effect shown in FIG. 199 (b) described later is executed. To. The content of this race effect depends on the lottery result (win / fail judgment result, fluctuation time) of the second special symbol being executed and the inflow situation of the ball into the second passage 660b where the ball can easily enter the specific area 650V. Is set.

After that, when the ball passes through the specific area 650V in the small hit game, the effect that the character 811 is the first place as a result of the race is executed (see FIG. 201 (b)). In this way, each game executed in the time-saving state, that is, a game in which a normal symbol is won, a game in which a ball is inserted into the second entrance 3640, and a small hit is won by a lottery for the second special symbol. It is possible to notify the player of the game result of the game for passing the ball to the specific area 650V during the game to be caused and the small hit game by using a series of effects. Therefore, since the player can grasp the game result by seeing the effect (race effect) executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. ..

Here, the display screen during the race production will be returned to FIG. 199 (b) to continue the explanation. The display shown in FIG. 199 (a) was executed, that is, the normal symbol (second symbol) was won during the time saving state, and the electric accessory 3640a was variably operated to the open state (allowable state). When the ball flows down on the electric accessory 3640a and enters the second entrance 3640, the race start screen shown in FIG. 199 (b) is displayed.

On the race start screen, a display mode in which the character 811 imitating a rabbit executes a race with a rival 860 imitating a turtle is displayed. The state shown in FIG. 199 (b) is a state in which the first second special symbol change is executed after the time saving state is set, and the second special symbol (special symbol) is set in the special figure 2 fluctuation region Dm2. A display mode (dynamic display mode) indicating that FIG. 2) is being displayed in a variable manner is displayed, and the characters "race entry remaining 9 times" are displayed in the remaining time reduction notification area Dm6 as the remaining time reduction count. .. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "goal in the first place" are displayed in order to guide the production result of the race effect corresponding to the game result that is advantageous to the player.

Next, when the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed during the time saving state and the lottery result is out of order, the screen shown in FIG. 200 (a) is displayed. In FIG. 200A, the stop display mode of "3, 4, 6" indicating that the lottery result of the special figure 2 is out of order is displayed in the special figure 2 fluctuation area Dm2, and the main display area Dm. , An effect mode indicating that the race effect has ended (a display mode in which the character 811 falls into the river and cannot reach the goal) is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "expected next time" are displayed to indicate that the change in the special figure 2 this time was not a game result advantageous to the player and that the time saving state continues. ..

On the other hand, when the lottery of the special figure 2 is a win, the screen shown in FIG. 200 (b) or FIG. 201 (a) is displayed. As described above with reference to FIG. 196, in the present embodiment, the ball passage is configured so that two flow paths for flowing the ball toward the V winning device 650 which is opened at the time of winning a small hit are formed. The time required to reach the V winning device 650, which is opened during the small hit game, is configured to differ depending on which flow path the ball passes through. Further, the ease of passing the ball to the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 is configured to be different depending on the flow path through which the ball passes.

Therefore, during the special symbol fluctuation when the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is won by lottery, the flow path in which the ball is flowing toward the V winning device 650 is detected, and the detection result is obtained. It is configured to make the production mode different based on the above. Specifically, when the ball flows down the second passage (delayed passage) 660b which is advantageous to the player during the small hit fluctuation of the special figure 2, the effect mode shown in FIG. 200 (b) is displayed. FIG. 201 (a) shows a case where the ball flows down the first passage (normal passage) 660a which is disadvantageous to the player during the small hit fluctuation of FIG. 2 (when the ball does not flow down the second passage 660b). The production mode is displayed.

In FIG. 200 (b), in order to show that the ball easily passes through the specific area 650V in the small hit game executed after the special figure 2 fluctuation during execution is stopped and displayed, the main display is as a race effect. An effect is executed in which the character 811 runs ahead of the rival 860 in the area Dm. Then, the display mode of the character 811 is changed to a display mode different from the normal display mode (display mode wearing an aura), and the player is notified that there is a high possibility that the character 811 will be the first place in this race production. In order to do so, the characters "Speed UP" are displayed. In addition, the characters "Great Chance" are also displayed in the sub-display area Ds as a comment to indicate that the character 811 is likely to be the first in the race production this time.

On the other hand, in FIG. 201 (a), as a race effect, an effect mode in which the character 811 and the rival 860 aim for a goal while developing a dead heat is displayed. In this way, even if the lottery results of the second special symbol (special diagram 2) are the same small hit type, it is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 due to the difference in the flow path through which the ball flows. Since it is possible to make the player predict whether or not the game result will be advantageous to the player by making the effect mode different, it is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to make the player interested in the contents of a series of productions (race productions).

Then, when the ball passes through the specific area 650V during the small hit game, that is, when it is confirmed that the big hit game is executed after the small hit game is completed, the effect mode shown in FIG. 201 (b) is displayed. Will be done.

On the other hand, when the ball does not pass through the specific area 650V during the small hit game, the rival 860 scores a goal before the character 811 in the production mode shown in FIG. 202 (a), that is, in the race production. The effect mode to be performed is displayed.

Further, although detailed description will be described later, in the present embodiment, the first time saving state (time saving state A) which is advantageous to the player as the time saving state and the second time saving state which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first time saving state. The state (time saving state B) can be set, and when the time saving state A (first time saving state) is set, the small hit type corresponding to the big hit game in which the time saving state is given is set. The ball is configured to pass through the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 only when the player wins the game.

That is, in the state where the time saving state A is set, when the big hit game is executed based on the small hit winning, the time saving state which is advantageous to the player is surely set after the big hit game is completed. is doing.

Therefore, in the seventh embodiment, in order to suggest (notify) to the player that the time saving state A has been set, the effect mode shown in FIG. 202 (b) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to be displayed. FIG. 202B is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the time saving state A is set.

As shown in FIG. 202 (b), when the time saving state A is set, an effect mode in which the seabed race in which the background showing the seabed is set is executed is set. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "If you win the race, a luxurious prize is confirmed !?" is displayed, which suggests that the time saving state is set again after the big hit game is completed. By suggesting that the time saving state A is set by changing the background when the race is executed in this way, it is possible to set a staging mode that is easy for the player to understand, and at the same time, during the actual race. Since the effects can be shared, the amount of image data used to set the effect mode can be reduced.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, a plurality of background images other than the normal background and the above-mentioned seabed background can be set as the background of the effect during the race. For example, the desert. You can set a background that imitates a tree, a background that imitates a tree sea, or a background that imitates an urban area. Then, each background has a different ratio set according to the currently set time saving state (time saving state A, time saving state B). As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting which is the currently set time saving state based on the background type set as the background of the effect during the race.

Further, a special measuring means for measuring the number of times the time saving state A is continuously set is provided, and the setting can be made only when the number of times the time saving state A is continuously set reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times). A background may be provided. This provides a sense of security that the time saving state is set to be advantageous to the player, and can provide a sense of superiority by notifying the surrounding players that the game result is special. ..

Although the characteristic effect mode executed in the seventh embodiment has been described above, the above-mentioned contents are merely examples, and other effect modes may be displayed. For example, in the effect example described with reference to FIGS. 199 to 202, an effect example in which an effect mode corresponding to the game result is set is shown, but the effect is not limited to this, and the effect mode is easily set by the game result. May be configured to be different.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the state where the effect mode shown in FIG. 199 (b) is displayed, that is, in the state where the ball enters the second entry port 3640 during the time saving state (the variation in FIG. 2 is started). , The display mode of the rival 860 may be variably set based on the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery, for example, an advantageous small hit (small hit A) which is advantageous to the player in the special figure 2 lottery. Rival 860 is displayed depending on whether the player wins, the disadvantaged small hit (small hit C), which is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous small hit, or the non-winning (winning out of) small hit. It may be configured so that the type of the character set as an aspect is different.

With this configuration, when the special figure 2 fluctuation starts, the player is provided with information that can predict the future game content, that is, the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery and the winning small hit type. Can be provided.

In addition, when the effect mode (display mode) suggesting the lottery result of the special figure 2 variation is displayed (set) at the time when the special figure 2 variation is started, the content of the displayed effect mode is grasped. However, there arises a problem that the action of continuing the game is performed only when the lottery result is favorable to the player, but in the present embodiment, when the ball is continuously entered into the second entrance 3640, the ball is continuously inserted. It is configured so that it is difficult to pass the ball to the specific area 650V during the small hit game unless the ball is fired.

As a result, even if the effect mode (display mode) suggesting the lottery result of the special figure 2 change is displayed (set) at the time when the special figure 2 change is started, the display mode is confirmed and then the display mode is displayed. Since it is possible to prevent the player from determining whether or not to make the V winning device 650 win the ball during the small hit game, the above-mentioned problem can be solved.

In addition, since the race shown in FIG. 199 (b) can be started from the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation is started, the period during which the race is executed (the period during which the effect is executed during the race) can be lengthened. The staging effect can be enhanced. Specifically, since the fluctuation period of the special symbol can be included in the production execution period during the race, for example, winning the winning (big hit, small hit) by the special symbol lottery is longer than the case of losing. By configuring the variable period so that it is easy to set, it is possible to make the player think that the longer the effect execution period during the race is, the more the player wins, and the longer the period to execute the effect. As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect of suggesting that the player has won the prize (hit suggestion effect).

Further, in the present embodiment, after the discrimination by the discrimination means (special figure 2) is executed during the period from the start of the special figure 2 variation to the end of the small hit game, the discrimination result is a predetermined discrimination result. Using the specific game (small hit game) executed in the case of (small hit), the character 811 is configured to execute the effect of racing (see FIGS. 199 (b) to 202 (a)). , The value (information) for indicating the remaining time reduction number displayed in the remaining time reduction notification area Dm6 (the remaining number of times excluding the special figure change currently being executed) at the start of the race (see FIG. 199 (b)) is raced. It is configured to be continuously displayed until the end (FIG. 202 (a)), that is, until the end of the small hit game executed after the end of the special figure variation (special figure 2 variation).

In this way, even if the special figure fluctuation is completed and the small hit game is executed, the player can understand the effect during the race by configuring the display mode of the remaining time reduction notification area Dm6 so as not to change. It can be easily notified.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the race is performed using one special figure change (lottery) and the period until the small hit game is completed when the small hit is won in the special figure lottery. Since it is configured to execute the middle production, there is a problem that the production execution period during the race is significantly different based on the result of the special drawing lottery. That is, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the small hit game is not executed, so that the period during which the small hit game is executed cannot be included in the during-race production execution period, and the during-race production is executed. There was a problem that the period was shortened.

Further, in the present embodiment, at least a lottery result of a special symbol and a game result of a small hit game are included as elements for branching the effect mode of the effect during the race. (For example, see FIGS. 200 (b) and 201 (a)) cannot be provided to the player, and the player gets tired of the game before he / she can enjoy various effects. There was a risk that the problem would occur.

In order to solve such a problem, for example, in a part of the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the fluctuation time is longer than that in the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, specifically. , The deviation pattern (variation pattern for Gase production) in which the fluctuation time set when the small hit is won and the (same) fluctuation time similar to the total time of the small hit game time are set. It is configured to be configurable, and when this variation pattern for Gase production is set, as a production during the race, a small hit is won as if it were a special symbol variation, and the ball does not pass through the specific area 650V during the small hit game. It is preferable to configure it so as to set an effect mode (see FIG. 202 (a)) that indicates that. As a result, even if a small hit is not won in the special drawing lottery, the player can experience the production mode set at the end of the production during the race.

In addition, if a big hit is won in the special drawing lottery, the same fluctuation time as the fluctuation time set when the small hit is won is set, and the first round of the big hit game and the small hit are set. It is advisable to set the opening operation of the jackpot game so that the game and the game have the same opening operation mode. As a result, even if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery, the effect during the race can be executed, so that the player is provided with an effect mode in which the effect result of the effect during the race is advantageous to the player. Can be made easier.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect during the race is executed using the period (special figure fluctuation period, small hit execution period) set based on one special symbol lottery. Without limitation, it may be configured to execute the effect during the race using a period set based on a plurality of special symbol lottery. With such a configuration, for example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is continuously out of order, it is possible to execute the effect during the race by using the continuous special symbol fluctuation period.

Therefore, even if the fluctuation time set when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order is set to be shorter than that when the lottery result of the special symbol is a hit, it is set at the end of the production during the race. The production mode can be provided to the player. In addition, in order to set one effect mode using a plurality of deviation variations, the effect mode for indicating to the player that the lottery of the special symbol was out of order is made to correspond to each special figure lottery. Compared to the case of setting, it is possible to reduce the number of times the effect of notifying the player that the special drawing lottery is out is executed.

The contents of the effect when the time saving state is set have been described above, but in addition to that, for example, by the lottery of the first special symbol, the jackpot type in which the time saving state A is set is won after the big hit game is completed. In some cases, it may be configured to execute a special suggestion effect for notifying that fact. For example, instead of the display mode of the third symbol that is normally stopped and displayed, a special display mode of "VVV" is used. 3 The symbol may be stopped and displayed. As a result, it is possible to promptly notify the player that a game state advantageous to the player is set, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind for a long period of time.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the 7th embodiment>
Here, the electrical configuration in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 203 to 213. FIG. 203 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 203 (a), the ROM 202 of the seventh embodiment has a random number 7 table 202fa per first, a type selection 7 table 202fb per first, a random number 7 table 202fc per second, and a variation pattern 7 table 202fd. It has a small hit type selection 7 table 202fe and an open scenario 7 table 202ff. It should be noted that the configuration (table) having the same name as the electrical configuration used in any of the above-described embodiments (the same name except for "7" attached to make it identifiable that it was used in the seventh embodiment). ) Is the same as each of the above-described embodiments in terms of its use, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The first random number 7 table 202fa is a data table used for the same purpose as the first random number table 202a used in each of the above-described embodiments, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first hit. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the big hit set by the random number 7 table 202fa, it is determined as the big hit of the special symbol. Further, the first random number 7 table 202fa is provided with two types, a special symbol 1 random number table 202fa1 for the first special symbol and a special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2 for the second special symbol, and is a big hit. Although the number of random numbers is the same, the value of the random number that is a small hit is set only in the special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2 for the second special symbol (see FIG. 204). In this way, by making the number of random numbers that become small hits different (setting only one), the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery can be a privilege (big hit or small hit) for the player. ) The degree of expectation for grant can be different.

Here, the contents of the first random number 7 table 202fa will be described with reference to FIG. 204. FIG. 204 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the first random number 7 table 202fa, and FIG. 204 (b) is the contents specified in the special symbol 1 random number table 202fa1. FIG. 204 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2. In the first random number 7 table 202fa, a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a big hit and a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a small hit are set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is a table.

Specifically, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, the special symbol 1 random number table 202fa1 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 204 (b), in the special symbol 1 random number table 202fa1, "0 to 4" among the values of the first random number counter C1 is defined as the jackpot determination value, and the other values are other than the jackpot. It is specified as a judgment value of (that is, out of order). Then, in the lottery of the first special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 is determined, and when the value is any of "0 to 4", it is determined to be a big hit.

When the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 204 (c), in the special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2, "0 to 4" among the values of the first random number counter C1 are defined as jackpot determination values, and "5 to 504" is small. It is defined as a hit determination value, and "505 to 999" is defined as a determination value other than that (that is, a deviation). Then, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 is determined, and when the value is any of "0 to 4", it is determined to be a big hit, and it is determined to be any of "5 to 504". In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit.

The first hit type selection 7 table 202fb is a data table used for the same purpose as the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 14) used in each of the above-described embodiments, and is a value of the first hit type counter C2. Is configured to refer to the first hit type selection 7 table 202fb to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is won. Here, the contents of the first type selection 7 table 202fb will be described with reference to FIG. 205.

FIG. 205A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the first type selection 7 table 202fb. As shown in FIG. 205 (a), in the present embodiment, the special figure 1 jackpot type used when determining the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired at the time of the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). It has a selection table 202fb1 and a special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202fb2 used for determining the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired at the time of lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2). .. As a result, the jackpot type when the jackpot is won by the lottery of Special Figure 1 and the jackpot type when the jackpot is won by the lottery of Special Figure 2 are different, or each of a plurality of types of jackpot types is selected. Since the ratios can be different, it is necessary to provide the player with different game characteristics between the game using the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the game using the second special symbol (special figure 2). It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202fb1 used at the time of the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) will be described with reference to FIG. 205 (b). FIG. 205 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202fb1. As shown in FIG. 205 (b), in the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is any of "0 to 9", the jackpot type is "big hit A", and any of "10 to 49". If it is, the jackpot type is "big hit B", and if it is any of "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit C".

"Big hit A" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 15 rounds (R) as a big hit game, and the game state after the big hit is set to the time saving state (actual time saving number of times is 10 times). Then, as the time saving state set after the end of the big hit, "time saving A" which is advantageous to the player is set. This "big hit A" has a large number of rounds of big hit games, and the game state after the big hit is set to "time saving A" which is more advantageous among the time saving states which are advantageous for the player, so "big hit A" is , The most advantageous jackpot type for players. Of the 100 counter values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 10 are random values for which "big hit A" is selected, so the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a big hit. When it becomes, the ratio that "big hit A" is selected is 10%.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the time saving state is set, it is an opportunity of the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) which is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 lottery). It is configured so that the ball can easily enter the second ball entry port 3640, and the number of lottery (variation number) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure) in a time-saving state. When the number of lottery (number of fluctuations) of 2) and the total number of times (total number of times) reaches 100, or the number of lottery (number of fluctuations) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) reaches 10 times. If this is the case, the time saving state is configured to end.

With this configuration, even if the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1), which is disadvantageous to the player, is executed immediately after the time saving state is set, the lottery for the special figure 2 is performed a specified number of times ( Since it is possible to execute the game 10 times, the player can play the game with peace of mind. As a result, for example, when the total number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 and the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 in the time saving state reaches the specified number of times (10 times), the time saving state is configured to end. In order to prevent the special figure 1 fluctuation (lottery) from being executed when the time saving state is set after the big hit ends, a game in which the holding of the special figure 1 is not secured (a game in which the ball is not continuously fired). (So-called stop-and-shoot game)) can be prevented from being executed, and the operation of the game can be improved.

"Big hit B" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 5 rounds (R) as a big hit game and the game state after the big hit is set to the time saving state (the number of times shortening is 10 times). Then, as the time saving state set after the end of the big hit, "time saving B" which is disadvantageous to the player is set. This "big hit B" has a smaller number of rounds of the big hit game than the above-mentioned "big hit A", but the game state after the big hit is set to a time saving state which is advantageous for the player, so that the big hit is advantageous for the player. However, a "time saving B" that is more disadvantageous to the player is set than the time saving state "time saving A" that is set when the "big hit A" is won.

That is, the jackpot B is an advantageous jackpot in which the time saving state is set after the jackpot ends, but the number of rounds of the jackpot game and the type of the time saving state set after the jackpot end are more games than the above-mentioned "big hit A". It will be disadvantageous to the person. That is, "big hit B" is a big hit type that is more disadvantageous than the above-mentioned "big hit A". Of the 100 counter values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 40 are random values for which "big hit B" is selected, so the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a big hit. When it becomes, the ratio that "big hit B" is selected is 40%.

"Big hit C" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 5 rounds (R) as a big hit game and the game state after the big hit is set to the normal state (non-time saving state). Since the number of rounds is small and the normal state is set after the big hit, "big hit C" is a big hit type that is disadvantageous to the player. Of the 100 counter values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 50 are random values for which "big hit C" is selected, so the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a big hit. When it becomes, the ratio that "big hit C" is selected is 50%.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot game (big hit) of 15 rounds (R) is performed at a rate of 10% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). After the end, the time saving A) is selected, and the jackpot game of 5 rounds (R) (time saving B after the end of the jackpot) is selected at a rate of 40%. That is, a jackpot in which the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game shifts to the time saving state is selected at a rate of 50%.

In this embodiment, as the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player, the number of rounds executed during the jackpot game is the largest (15 rounds (R)), and the time saving state that is advantageous after the jackpot is completed (time saving A). ) Is set, the number of rounds (5 rounds (R)) executed during the jackpot as the jackpot type that is advantageous to the player, and the type of the time saving state set after the jackpot ends. However, the jackpot type "big hit B", which is more disadvantageous to the player than the "big hit A", and the jackpot type "big hit C", which is the most disadvantageous to the player because the time saving state is not set after the jackpot ends, are set. Although it is configured to be possible, other jackpot types may be configured to be configurable. For example, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is the largest (15 rounds (R)), and "time saving B" is set as the time saving type. The number of jackpot types and the number of rounds of the jackpot game are small (5 rounds (R)), but the number of jackpot types and the number of rounds of the jackpot game where "time saving A" is set as the time saving type is the largest (15 rounds (R)). )), It may be possible to set the jackpot type in which the time saving state is not set.

In addition, as a concept of whether or not the set jackpot type is advantageous to the player, the number of rounds of the jackpot game as in the present embodiment and the gaming state set after the jackpot is completed are comprehensively combined. The concept of advantage / disadvantage may be defined based only on the number of rounds of the jackpot game, or the concept of advantage / disadvantage may be defined based only on the game state set after the end of the jackpot. The concept may be defined.

Next, with reference to FIG. 205 (c), the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202fb2 used at the time of the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) will be described. FIG. 205 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202fb2. As shown in FIG. 205 (c), in the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is any of "0 to 89", the jackpot type is "big hit D" and the random number value is "90 to 99". It is stipulated that the jackpot type in the case of any of "" is "big hit E".

"Big hit D" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 15 rounds (R) as a big hit game, and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the time saving state (actual time saving number of times 10 times). Then, as the time saving state set after the end of the big hit, "time saving A" which is advantageous to the player is set. That is, this "big hit D" is a big hit type having the same contents as the above-mentioned "big hit A", and is the big hit type that is most advantageous to the player. Of the 100 counter values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 90 are random values for which "big hit D" is selected, so the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a big hit. When it becomes, the ratio that "big hit D" is selected is 90%.

"Big hit E" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 15 rounds (R) as a big hit game, and the game state after the big hit is set to the time saving state (actual time saving number of times is 10 times). Then, as the time saving state set after the end of the big hit, "time saving B", which is more disadvantageous to the player than "time saving A", is set. That is, this "big hit E" is a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous than the above-mentioned "big hit D". Of the 100 counter values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 10 are random values for which "big hit E" is selected, so the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a big hit. When it becomes, the ratio that "big hit E" is selected is 10%.

That is, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, a big hit game of 15 rounds (R) is executed, and further, a time saving state is always set after the big hit is completed. ing. As a result, the jackpot game that is more advantageous to the player is provided by winning the jackpot in the special figure 2 lottery than by winning the jackpot in the special figure 1 lottery. 2 The lottery with special symbols is more advantageous to the player.

In the present embodiment, the number of types of jackpots is five, but the number is not limited to four, or four or less, or six or more may be provided. Further, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured so that different jackpot types are selected even if the values of the same first hit type counter C2 are used. By configuring in this way, for example, when a big hit with the second special symbol is made, by setting a big hit type in which a larger number of rounds is executed, the hit with the second special symbol becomes more a player. You can expect it. Therefore, it is possible to make the hit in the high-probability game state more advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the taste of the game in the high-probability state. Therefore, the player can be strongly reminded that he / she wants to shift to the high probability state, and the game can be played for a longer time.

In addition, the type of the jackpot type selected for the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the selection rate (distribution rate) of each jackpot type are made the same, and the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type. It may be configured so that only the range is different. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent act of acquiring the value of the first type counter C2 by aiming at a specific counter value from being executed in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The second random number 7 table 202fc is a data table used for the same purpose as the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 14) used in each of the above-described embodiments, and is the value of the second random number counter C4. With reference to the second random number 7 table 202fc, it is determined whether or not there is a winning.

In the present embodiment, as in each of the above-described embodiments, there is a low probability time of the normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and a high probability time (normal) in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol is higher than that of the low probability time. The number of values corresponding to the hits is set differently depending on the period during which the symbol is in a shortened state). In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be hit different, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability time of the normal symbol and the high probability time of the normal symbol.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, a plurality of operation patterns (open operation patterns) of the electric accessory 3640a, which is executed when a normal symbol (second symbol) is won, can be set. As a result, the timing of opening the electric accessory 3640a can be changed based on the hit of the normal symbol (second symbol), so that the timing of opening the electric accessory 3640a (the ball is inserted into the second entrance 3640). It is possible to suppress the game of firing the ball at the timing when the ball can be made).

Here, the contents of the second random number 7 table 202fc will be described with reference to FIG. 206 (a). FIG. 206A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the second random number 7 table 202fc. As shown in FIG. 206 (a), in the second random number 7 table 202fc, "A per normal figure", "B per normal figure", and "off" can be set as the second hit type. The second hit type is defined based on the game state (high probability state or low probability state of the normal symbol) and the acquired value of the second random number counter C4.

Specifically, when the game state is a low probability state (normal state) of a normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is set to "0" and "A per normal figure" is defined, and "1". "B per normal figure" is specified in, and "off" is specified in the range of "2 to 99". When the game state is a high probability state (time saving state) of a normal symbol, "A per normal figure" is defined in the range where the value of the second random number counter C4 is "0 to 79", and "80". "B per normal figure" is specified in the range of "to 98", and "off" is specified in "99".

That is, in the seventh embodiment, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set as the game state, the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is 2% (2/100). Therefore, if a winner is won, "A per Fuzu" and "B per Fuzu" are selected at a rate of 50%.

When the game state is a high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol, the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is 99% (99/100), and the winning is won. In this case, "A per Fuzu" is selected at a rate of about 80% (80/99), and "B per Fuzu" is selected at a rate of about 20% (20/99). is doing.

That is, in the seventh embodiment, the high probability state of the normal symbol is configured to have a higher probability of winning than the low probability state of the normal symbol, and at the time of winning, the "normal figure" is used. It is configured so that "hit A" can be easily selected. In this way, by making the hit probability and the hit type of the normal symbol (second symbol) different according to the game state, the game is performed while expecting that a more advantageous game state is set for the player. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the operation pattern of the electric accessory 3640a at the time of winning the second symbol is configured to be different depending on the gaming state and the hit type, and the second symbol is in the low probability state of the normal symbol. It is more advantageous for the player to win the second symbol in the high probability state of the normal symbol than to win the second symbol, that is, to enter the ball into the second entrance 3640. It is configured so that an operation pattern that is easy to make is set. As a result, it is set as a condition for giving a privilege advantageous to the player to win the prize during the high probability state of the normal symbol.

Here, with reference to FIG. 206 (a), the contents of the operation pattern of the electric accessory 3640a executed during the high probability state of the normal symbol will be described. In the seventh embodiment, different operation patterns are set according to the winning type, and when "A per normal figure" is set during the high probability state, the opening period is 0. When the operation pattern of 1 second (S), the opening period is 2 seconds (S), and the ending period is 3.5 seconds (S) is executed and "B per normal figure" is set, the opening period is 0.1. An operation pattern of seconds (S), an opening period of 2.5 seconds (S), and an ending period of 3 seconds (S) is executed.

Then, regardless of which operation pattern is executed, if one ball enters the second entrance 3640 while the electric accessory 3640a is in the opening operation (opening period is being set), the closing condition is satisfied. This is established, and the closing operation of the electric accessory 3640a is executed. That is, in the seventh embodiment, as a condition for terminating the open state of the electric accessory 3640a, a condition that is satisfied when a predetermined opening period is reached and a predetermined number are the second entrances. The conditions that are satisfied when the ball enters 3640 are set. As a result, when a winning prize is won in the lottery of the second symbol (ordinary symbol), a large number of balls enter the second entrance 3640, and the player is given an excessive privilege (prize ball). It is possible to prevent the award from being lost.

Further, regardless of which operation pattern is executed, the ending period is set to be equal to or longer than the period (3 seconds) in which the ball flows down the second passage (delayed passage) 660b. Therefore, even if the player wins consecutively in the game, if the player wins the small hit by the special figure 2 lottery executed based on the previous game, the next game will be held during the small hit game. It is possible to surely suppress the situation where the ball flowing down the second passage 660b wins the V winning device 650 based on the normal drawing.

In this embodiment, by using the above-described configuration, the ball does not pass through the specific area 650V during the small hit game at an unintended timing based on a plurality of consecutive game results (general map lottery results). It is configured so that an appropriate game is executed, but the ball is not limited to this, and the ball passes through a specific area 650V during a small hit game, for example, when a player wins a game in succession. It may be configured to be easy to do. In this case, for example, the hit type (normal) in which the opening period (0.1 seconds), the opening period (2 seconds), and the ending period (0.1 seconds) are set as the hit type for the second hit (per normal figure). C) per figure can be set, and if the player wins again in the next normal figure change that wins C per normal figure, it flows into the second passage 660b during the hit game corresponding to the next normal figure change. The ball may be configured to pass through the specific area 650V during the small hit game won in the special figure 2 lottery executed based on the normal figure C.

With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a player with an unexpected game, and thus it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, when such playability is adopted, an effect during the race (FIG. 200 (b)) is executed in correspondence with C per the normal figure, and then an effect of losing the race once (FIG. 202 (a)). After executing (see), if it is detected by the delayed passage entry switch 660e1 that the ball has flowed into the second passage 660b based on the following normal drawing, the revival effect after losing the race is executed. It is good to configure it like this. As a result, it is possible to perform an unexpected effect corresponding to the unexpected game for the player.

Further, a general map pre-determination means capable of preliminarily discriminating the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired when passing through the through gate 67 is provided, and as a pre-discrimination result corresponding to the reserved and stored general map winning information, When it is determined that the Fuzu winning information that wins C per Fuzu and the Fuzu winning information that wins per Fuzu are stored in a row, it is possible to handle multiple consecutive Fuzu winnings. It may be configured to execute the effect (continuous effect). In this way, by executing the pre-reading process of the Fuzu winning information, it is possible to set the effect in a state where the lottery result of the Fuzu lottery (second symbol lottery) is determined in advance, so that the effect is high. Can be executed.

In the seventh embodiment, the electric accessory 3640a is opened for a period in which the ball can be inserted into the second entrance 3640 as a winning game executed when the player wins the game. It is configured so that only the hit game is executed, but the ball is not limited to this, and for example, the ball cannot be made to enter the second entrance 3640, but the ball is made to flow into the second passage 660b. The electric accessory 3640a may be configured to be open for a period of time (for example, 1 second).

The variation pattern 7 table 202fd is a data table used for the same purpose as the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 14) used in each of the above-described embodiments. A fluctuation pattern in which different fluctuation times are set is defined according to the result of the lottery and the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern 7 table 202fd will be described with reference to FIGS. 207 and 208. FIG. 207 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern 7 table 202fd, and FIG. 208 (a) is defined in the variation pattern table 202fd2 for the first time saving defined by the variation pattern 7 table 202fd. FIG. 208 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the second time saving fluctuation pattern table 202fd3 defined by the fluctuation pattern 7 table 202fd. It is a figure.

Next, the contents of the first time saving variation pattern table 202fd2 will be described with reference to FIG. 208 (a). The first time saving variation pattern table 202fd2 is a variation pattern table referred to when the time saving state A (time saving A) is set as the gaming state, and is a second time saving variation pattern table 202fd3 (time saving) described later. In the case of winning a small hit (for example, small hit C) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the variable pattern table referred to when the state B (time saving B) is set, the V winning device 650 The fluctuation time is defined so that the fluctuation time that makes it difficult for the sphere to pass through the specific region 650V can be easily set.

Here, to specifically explain the contents specified in the first time saving variation pattern table 202fd2, if the type of the special symbol is special figure 1 and the lottery result is out of order, the acquired variation type counter CS1 Regardless of the value of, if "ultra-short deviation" (variation time 0.5 seconds) is specified as the fluctuation pattern and the lottery result is a big hit, it is the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1. "Ultra short hit" (variation time 0.5 seconds) is specified. That is, when the time saving state A (time saving A) is set, that is, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in a state where the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed, it is always 0.5 seconds. It is configured so that the fluctuation pattern is set.

When the type of the special symbol is special figure 2 and the lottery result is out of order, the variation pattern is "ultra-short deviation" (variation time 0.5 seconds) regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. ) Is specified, and if the lottery result is small hit A or small hit B, "long small hit" (variation time 3 seconds) is specified as the fluctuation pattern, and if the lottery result is small hit C, "short small hit" is specified as the fluctuation pattern. (Variation time 0.5 seconds) ”is specified. Further, when the lottery result is a big hit, when the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149", "short jackpot (variation time 1 second)" is defined as the fluctuation pattern. When the range is in the range of "150 to 198", "medium jackpot (variation time 30 seconds)" is defined as the fluctuation pattern.

With this configuration, when the first time reduction variation pattern table 202fd2 is referred to, that is, when the time reduction A is set as the gaming state, the variation pattern with a variation time of 3 seconds is set small. When the hit A or the small hit B is won, the ball is configured to easily pass through the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650. On the other hand, when the small hit C in which the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is set is won, immediately after the ball enters the second entry slot 3640 (the lottery of the second special symbol is executed). Since the small hit game is executed immediately after), the opening operation of the V winning device 650 is completed before the ball flowing down the second flow path tb is discharged from the second flow path tb. Can make it difficult for the player to pass through the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650.

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, after the end of the big hit game executed based on the passage of the ball through the specific area 650V during the small hit game corresponding to the small hit C, the player is in a gaming state. It is configured so that a disadvantageous normal state is set, and after the end of the big hit game executed based on winning other small hits (small hit A, small hit B), the game state is set. It is configured so that a time saving state (time saving A or time saving B) that is advantageous to the player is set.

In this way, when the time reduction A is set as the game state, the variation pattern is set with reference to the first time reduction variation pattern table 202fd2, and the small hit that is advantageous to the player depending on the set variation pattern. When the type is won, the big hit game via the small hit game is easily executed, so that it is easy to continuously set an advantageous game state even after the end of the next big hit game, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Can be done.

Next, the contents of the second time saving variation pattern table 202fd3 will be described with reference to FIG. 208 (b). FIG. 208 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second time saving variation pattern table 202fd3. The second time saving variation pattern table 202fd3 is a variation pattern table referred to when the time saving B is set as the gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 208 (b), the second time saving variation pattern table 202fd3 is set when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery with respect to the above-mentioned first time saving variation pattern table 202fd2. The difference is that the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is different, and the other factors are the same.

Specifically, when the lottery result is small hit A, "long and small hit" (variable time 3 seconds) is defined as the fluctuation pattern, and when the lottery result is small hit B, "short small hit" (variable time) is defined as the fluctuation pattern. 0.5 seconds) is specified, and in the case of small hit C, when the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 169", the fluctuation pattern is "long and small hit" (variation time 3 seconds). ) Is specified, and when the range is in the range of "170 to 198", "short hit" (variation time 0.5 seconds) is specified as the fluctuation pattern.

That is, when the second time saving variation pattern table 202fd3 is referred to, that is, in the state where the time saving B is set as the game state, the lottery of the second special symbol is easier to be executed than in the normal state, but it is a small hit. Since the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time of 3 seconds is set when C is won, the normal state is more likely to be set as the game state after the end of the next big hit game than the state in which the above-mentioned time reduction A is set. Become.

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol, in which the jackpot game is more likely to be executed based on the lottery result than the first special symbol, is set as the game state. It is possible to set a time saving state that is easier to execute, and as a time saving state, a gaming state (time saving A) in which a gaming state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player after the end of the next big hit is easily set again, and a game state (time saving A) where the next big hit ends. It is possible to set a game state (time reduction B) in which a game state (time reduction state) that is later advantageous to the player is more difficult to set than the time reduction A.

With this configuration, when the game state (time saving A) that is most advantageous to the player is set, the game state shifts to the normal state only by executing one jackpot game. Since this can be suppressed, the player can be made to play the game with peace of mind. Further, even when the time reduction B which is more disadvantageous to the player than the time reduction A is set, the probability that the time reduction A is set after the jackpot game is completed is higher than when the normal state is set. Therefore, it is possible to make the player enthusiastically play the game aiming at setting the time saving A.

Further, as shown in FIG. 208 (b), in the seventh embodiment, even when the small hit C in which the normal state is set as the game state is won after the big hit game is completed, the ball is the V winning device 650. Since it is configured so that a fluctuation pattern that is difficult to pass through the specific region 650V (a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds) can be selected, not only the winning result of the small hit but also the flow of the ball Can also make players interested. In this case, for example, it is preferable to notify the player that the small hit C has been won, and then perform an effect of inciting whether or not the ball passes through the specific area 650V. With this configuration, the ball does not pass through the specific area 650V even though the player wins a disadvantageous small hit, so that a gaming state disadvantageous to the player is set. It is possible to make the player aware that it was possible to avoid the problem, and it is possible to provide a feeling of satisfaction.

Further, a means for measuring the number of times the small hit is won (the number of times the small hit C is won), which is disadvantageous to the player, is provided, and the number of times the big hit game based on the small hit C is avoided (the small hit of the small hit C). The number of times the ball did not pass through the specific area 650V during the game) may be displayed. As a result, it is possible for the player to specifically understand that it was possible to avoid a situation in which a disadvantageous gaming state is set for the player, and whether the currently set gaming state is the time saving A. It is possible to make it easier for the player to predict whether the time is shortened B.

In the seventh embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 208 (a) and 208 (b), as described above, the data table (variation pattern) referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol according to the set time saving state. By making the table) different, when a small hit that is advantageous to the player is won, the game state in which the ball easily passes through the specific area 650V (time reduction A) and the game state in which it is difficult to pass (time reduction B) can be obtained. It is configured to be configurable. In other words, when a small hit that is disadvantageous to the player is won, a game state in which the ball easily passes through the specific area 650V (time reduction B) and a game state in which it is difficult to pass (time reduction A) can be set. ing.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, a game state in which the ball easily passes through the specific area 650V at the time of winning a small hit and a game in which the ball is difficult to pass, depending on the type of the time saving state (time saving A, time saving B) set. The state and is configured to be configurable. More specifically, when the time saving A is set as the gaming state, the first time saving variation pattern table 202fd2 is referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol. When selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol with reference to the first time saving variation pattern table 202fd2, 90% at the time of winning the small hit (100% at the time of winning the small hit A and 100 at the time of winning the small hit B). %) Is configured to set the fluctuation time during which the sphere can pass through the specific region 650V.

On the other hand, when the time reduction B is set as the gaming state, the second time reduction variation pattern table 202fd3 is referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol. When selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol with reference to the second time saving variation pattern table 202fd3, about 28.5% at the time of winning the small hit (100% at the time of winning the small hit A and winning the small hit C). It is configured so that the fluctuation time during which the sphere can pass through the specific region 650V is set in (about 85% of the time).

That is, in the seventh embodiment, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) set at the time of winning the small hit is configured to be different according to the type of the set time saving state, and is specified at the time of winning the small hit. The region 650V is configured so that the rate at which the variation pattern through which the sphere can pass is selected is different. Therefore, the probability of executing the big hit game based on the small hit winning can be different depending on the type of the time saving state to be set.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, as a transition condition (time reduction end condition) for shifting the time reduction state to the normal state, it is set as a transition condition that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 10 times, so that the time reduction is performed. When the time saving B is set as the type of the state, it is more difficult to execute the big hit game at the time of winning the small hit, so that the transition condition can be easily satisfied.

In the seventh embodiment, as described above, it is easy for the ball to pass through the specific area 650V at the time of winning the small hit, which is advantageous for the player, and the time is shortened so that the ball easily passes through the specific area 650V at the time of winning the small hit. The time saving A, which is a state, and the time saving B, which makes it easy for the ball to pass through the specific area 650V at the time of winning a small hit, and makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the specific area 650V at the time of winning a small hit. , But is not limited to this, for example, a small hit type is set to one, and a fluctuation pattern in which a ball can pass through a specific area 650V at the time of winning a small hit is simply set. The fluctuation pattern table to be referred to may be different depending on the type of the set time saving state so that only the ratio is different.

Further, the transition condition (time reduction end condition) for shifting the time reduction state to the normal state may be set differently according to the type of the time reduction state to be set. For example, the time reduction state advantageous to the player may be set. When (for example, time reduction A) is set, the time reduction end condition (for example, the time reduction end condition that is satisfied with a small number of special symbol fluctuations) is more likely to be established than the time reduction state (for example, time reduction B) that is disadvantageous to the player). May be set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the degree of expectation that the jackpot game will be executed during the period in which the time saving state is set to be significantly different depending on the type of the set time saving state. Even if is set, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game aiming at a big hit game.

Further, since the expected game content can be different depending on the type of the time saving state to be set, specifically, the time saving end condition is easily satisfied, and the specific area 650V is obtained when the small hit is won. When the time saving state is set so that the ball can easily pass through, it is expected that the small hit will be won during the time saving state, the time saving end condition is difficult to be satisfied, and the specific area 650V is hit at the time of the small hit winning. When a time saving state is set in which it is difficult for the player to pass, the player can expect the ball to pass through the specific area 650V in the small hit won during the time saving state, so that the player gets tired of the game early. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

The small hit type selection 7 table 202fe is a data table used for the same purpose as the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 14) used in each of the above-described embodiments, and when a small hit is won, the data table is used. It is referred to when selecting a small hit type, and is configured so that a different small hit type is selected according to the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5.

Here, the contents of the small hit type selection 7 table 202fe will be described with reference to FIG. 206 (b). FIG. 206 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the small hit type selection 7 table 202fe. As shown in FIG. 206 (b), in the small hit type selection 7 table 202fe, three types of small hits A to C are selected as the small hit types of the second special symbol according to the value of the small hit type counter C5. Is stipulated as. Specifically, when the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any of "0 to 19", the small hit type is "small hit A (10R real time reduction 10 times big hit when passing V)". If it is any of "20 to 89", the small hit type is "small hit B (10R real time reduction 10 times big hit when passing V)", and if it is any of "90 to 99". The small hit type is "small hit C (10R time saving no big hit when passing V)".

Then, when the jackpot based on the winning of "small hit A" is completed, "time saving A" is set as the game state, and when the jackpot based on the winning of "small hit B" is completed, "time saving B" is set as the gaming state. Then, when the big hit based on the winning of the "small hit C" is completed, the "normal state" is set as the game state.

Here, for each small hit type (small hit A to small hit C), when the ball passes through the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 in the small hit game, it is executed after the small hit game is completed. The type of jackpot game is set. In the case of "small hit A", the 10R real time reduction 10 times big hit is set, and after the small hit A is executed, the big hit in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 10 round (R) open state is executed. After that, 10 time-saving games (a period until the special symbol changes 100 times in total or the second special symbol changes 10 times) are set as the time-saving state.

Further, in the case of "small hit B", 10 rounds (R) of 10 rounds of real time reduction big hits are set, and after the small hit B is executed, the variable winning device 65 is set to the 10 rounds (R) open state. The jackpot is executed, and then 10 time-saving games (the period until the special symbol changes 100 times in total or the second special symbol changes 10 times) are set as the time-saving state. It is configured in. In the case of "small hit C", a 10R time saving no big hit is set, and after the small hit C is executed, the big hit in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 10 round (R) open state is executed. After the jackpot game, the time saving state is not set, but the normal state is set.

In this way, the content of the big hit game executed after the small hit game and the game state set after the big hit game can be different depending on the selected small hit type.

Specifically, "small hit A" has a large number of rounds executed in the big hit game (10R), and a time saving state (time saving A) that is most advantageous to the player after the big hit game is set is set. , The small hit B is set as the most advantageous small hit for the player, and the small hit B has a large number of rounds executed in the big hit game (10R) and is set to be the same as the small hit A described above, but the big hit game. Since the time saving state set later is set to "time saving B" in which the time saving A is more disadvantageous to the player than the time saving A, it is set as a small hit which is more disadvantageous than the small hit A. "Small hit C" is set as the most disadvantageous small hit for the player because the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is large (10R), but the time saving state is not set after the big hit game.

In the present embodiment, regardless of the type of the winning small hit, the big hit game executed when the ball passes through the specific area 650V during the small hit game is configured to be a round game of 10 rounds (R). By doing so, the player can easily grasp the type of the small hit won this time by grasping the number of round games (number of rounds) executed as the big hit game during the big hit game executed by the small hit opportunity. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a different number of rounds of big hit games may be set for each small hit type. As a result, the degree of advantage for each small hit type can be greatly different, so that the player can be expected to win the most advantageous small hit type while playing the game.

In the present embodiment, as the end condition of the time saving state, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is 10 times (first end condition), or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is. A total of 100 times (second end condition) is set. With this configuration, when the jackpot is won with the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol being 1 or more and the time saving state is set after the jackpot ends, the first special symbol (special figure 1) is set after the jackpot ends. ) Is executed, but the time saving state does not end. Further, when the change of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed, the above-mentioned second end condition is satisfied and the time saving state can be terminated. Therefore, any special symbol (second) during the time saving state can be terminated. The special symbol) can be reliably changed a predetermined number of times.

Next, the winning type won during the time saving state (during the high probability state of the normal symbol) and the ball flow to the second entrance 3640 will be described with reference to FIG. 196. As described above with reference to FIG. 196, in the seventh embodiment, the electric accessory 3640a is changed to a protruding state (see FIG. 198) by winning the game and moving the electric accessory 3640a onto the electric accessory 3640a. Is constructed so that the ball can easily enter the second entry port 3640.

Then, when the closing condition of the electric accessory 3640a is satisfied, the electric accessory 3640a executes the closing operation, and the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 3640a at that time is provided directly under the electric accessory 3640a. It flows into the first flow path ta or the second flow path tb. Here, the sphere that has flowed down the first flow path ta reaches the V winning device 650 provided below the flow path unit 660 after a flow period of 0.5 seconds, and the sphere that has flowed down the second flow path tb. Reaches the V winning device 650 after a flow period of 3 seconds.

Next, a case where a ball enters the second entry port 3640 as a closing condition of the electric accessory 3640a will be described. When the closing condition of the electric accessory 3640a is satisfied by the ball entering the second entrance 3640, the electric accessory 3640a is closed and the second special symbol lottery is executed. .. Then, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol is determined according to the lottery result of the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, it is possible to set an advantageous time reduction (time reduction A) that is advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous time reduction (time reduction B) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous time reduction, and the time reduction is set. It is configured so that different fluctuation patterns are set according to the state.

In the open scenario 7 table 202ff, the game content (open scenario) of the winning game (big hit game, small hit game) executed when the winning (big hit, small hit) is won in the special symbol lottery is the winning type. It is a data table defined in correspondence with, and when a hit is won, the open scenario corresponding to the set hit type is read and the hit game is executed.

Here, the contents of the open scenario 7 table 202ff will be described with reference to FIG. 209. FIG. 209 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the open scenario 7 table 202ff. This open scenario 7 table 202ff is a winning device (variable winning device) in which a ball can be entered in a privilege game (big hit game, small hit game) executed when the lottery result of a special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. Operation data (opening scenario) for differentiating the opening operation of 65, V winning device 650) according to the winning type (big hit type, small hit type) is specified.

In this way, the winning device (variable winning device 65, V winning device 650) and the opening operation content (opening scenario) that are opened according to the winning result (big hit or small hit) and the winning type (big hit type, small hit type). ) Can be set differently to set the degree of advantage of the award game in multiple stages, so even after winning a big hit or a small hit, it is possible to entertain the player with which type of hit was won. can.

In the open scenario 7 table 202ff, the start interval period during the winning game corresponding to the winning type (big hit type, small hit type) (the period from the start of the winning game to the first opening operation of the winning device). ), The opening operation mode of the winning device (type of winning device to be opened, the number of seconds of one opening operation (round game), the total number of opening operations (number of rounds)), and the interval period between rounds (between rounds). The period during which the winning device set for the game is closed) and the end interval period (the period from the end of all round games to the end of the winning game (until the start of a new special symbol change is allowed). Period)) and are specified respectively.

Specifically, the winning type corresponds to "big hit A, D, E", the start interval period is "2 seconds", and the opening operation mode of the winning device is "variable winning device 65" for "15 rounds". The opening operation mode for opening "continuously 29 seconds" as one round game is defined as "1 second" as the interval period between rounds and "4 seconds" as the end interval period. Therefore, if the jackpot type is a jackpot of jackpots A, D, and E, a jackpot game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for 15 rounds is executed, and a large number of prize balls are paid out to the player. It will be a big hit game. Further, when the jackpot type is jackpot A or D, the jackpot A or D is the most advantageous for the player because it is a jackpot in which a time saving state is set, which is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player after the jackpot game is completed. It will be a big hit with the privilege.

Next, the winning type corresponds to the jackpots B and C, and the start interval period is "2 seconds", and the opening operation mode of the winning device is "variable winning device 65" as "5 rounds" and one round game. The opening operation mode for opening "continuously for 29 seconds" is defined as "1 second" as the interval period between rounds and "4 seconds" as the end interval period. Therefore, if the jackpot type is a jackpot of jackpots B and C, a jackpot game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for 5 rounds is executed, and the jackpots A, D, and E are given to the player. It is a jackpot game in which about 1/3 of the prize balls of the corresponding jackpot game are paid out.

Next, the hit type corresponds to the small hits A to C, and the start interval period is "0.1 seconds", and the "V winning device 650" is opened to the "first round" as the opening operation mode of the winning device. When the ball passes through the specific area 650V (V passes) during the opening operation of the first round (including 0.5 seconds set as the ball handling time after the opening operation is completed), "variable". The winning device 65 is opened to the "2nd to 11th rounds", and as one round game, the 1st round is "continuously open for 1.5 seconds" and the 2nd to 11th rounds are "continuously open for 29 seconds". The opening operation mode is defined as "5 seconds" after the end of the first round, "1 second" as the interval period between rounds, and "4 seconds" as the end interval period. That is, in the seventh embodiment, when the ball passes through the specific area 650V during the small hit game, the big hit game for 10 rounds is executed thereafter.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the jackpot game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened is executed from the first round, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the above-mentioned small hit is executed. A jackpot type (for example, jackpot Z) in which the same opening scenario as the hits A to C is set may be provided. With this configuration, when the big hit Z is set, the V winning device 650 is operated in the same open operation mode as the small hit in the first round, so this special for the player. It is possible to make it difficult to tell whether a big hit or a small hit was won by the design.

In this case, since the jackpot game has already been executed, even if the ball does not pass through the specific area 650V while the V winning device 650 is open in the first round of the jackpot Z. The second and subsequent round games will be executed. Therefore, when the big hit game in which the same opening operation mode as the small hit game is set is executed, the effect shown in FIG. 201 (b) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Good to configure. As a result, the result of this game can make the player think that the big hit game was executed by the ball passing through the specific area 650V during the small hit game.

Further, since the effect shown in FIG. 201 (b) can be executed depending on whether the specific area 650 V is actually passed during the small hit game and the case where the big hit Z is won, the effect result in the effect during the race. As a result, it is possible to increase the proportion of the effect result (see FIG. 201 (b)) that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the production during the race.

It should be noted that the case where the jackpot type (for example, the jackpot Z) in which the same opening operation mode as the small hit game is set is won and the case where various small hits are won are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In order to make it difficult for the player to identify the lottery result by the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 showing the lottery result of the special symbol so that the same effect mode is executed as the variable display (variable effect). The stop display timing of the special symbol and the stop display timing of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be different, or the stop display timing of the special symbol and the stop display timing of the third symbol may be synchronized. In order to make it more difficult for the player to identify the display of the third symbol in the stop display timing or the period before and after it, the display mode and the display area may be changed, or the stop display timing of the special symbol may be changed. It is preferable to switch the symbol for effect displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 from the third symbol to the normal symbol for effect corresponding to the variable display of the ordinary symbol. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lottery result from being easily grasped in the stop display mode of the third symbol whether it is a small hit or a big hit.

Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 203 (b). FIG. 203B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 203 (b), the RAM 203 of the seventh embodiment has a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d, a time saving medium total counter 203fa, and a jackpot start flag 203fb. It has a big hit medium flag 203o, a small hit start flag 203fc, a small hit medium flag 203p, a V passing big hit type storage area 203fd, a V flag 203fe, a time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff, a V passing flag 203fg, and other memory areas 203z. .. It should be noted that the configuration (flag) having the same name as the electrical configuration used in any of the above-described embodiments (the same name except for "7" attached to make it identifiable that it was used in the seventh embodiment). , Counter, area) is the same as each of the above-described embodiments in terms of its use, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The time-saving / medium-time total counter 203fa is a counter for totaling the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol executed during the time-saving state and counting up to 100 times. The time-shortening-medium total counter 203fa is set to 0, which is the initial value when the jackpot is won (see S10018 in FIG. 215), and is set to 100 at the end of the jackpot (see S10614 in FIG. 222). Then, 1 is subtracted each time the change of the special symbol ends during the time saving state (see S10202 in FIG. 217). The value of the time-saving / medium-time total counter 203fa is referred to when determining whether or not the end condition of the time-saving state is satisfied, and when it is determined that the counter value has been subtracted to 0 (S10207 in FIG. 217). : Yes), the normal state is set as the gaming state (S10208 in FIG. 217).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the time saving state reaches 100 times (first end condition), or the second special symbol in the time saving state. It is configured so that the time saving state ends when any of the conditions that the number of fluctuations of the symbol reaches 10 times (second end condition) is satisfied, and whether or not the first end condition is satisfied. The time-saving and medium-time total counter 203fa is used to determine. The value of the time saving / middle total counter 203fa is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the remaining time saving number command (see S10205 in FIG. 217). The remaining time reduction number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the time reduction / medium total counter 203fa is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 is the number of remaining fluctuations until the first end condition of the time saving state is satisfied by the remaining time saving number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the time saving medium total counter 203fa is changed. Can be obtained. As a result, the number of remaining time reductions managed by the game state storage area 223fe of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the actual number of remaining time reductions counted by the time reduction / medium total counter 203fa of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise and the like. Even if it does, the deviation can be corrected by the next received command for the number of remaining hours.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of remaining time reductions based on the remaining time reduction number command, but the remaining time reduction number command corresponding to the value of the time reduction / middle total counter 203fa described above, that is, the first time reduction state. Information indicating the number of remaining fluctuations until the end condition is satisfied is not transmitted to the display control device 114. This is because, in the case of performing a normal game, the time saving state is configured to shift to the normal state by satisfying the second ending condition of the time saving state, and the first ending condition is The second end condition is satisfied in a state where the number of remaining fluctuations until the establishment is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the situation where the time saving state ends is suppressed.

The jackpot start flag 203fb is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the jackpot game. When the fluctuation of the special symbol whose lottery result is determined to be a big hit is stopped, the big hit start flag 203fb is set to ON (S10017 in FIG. 215). When it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203fb is on and it is determined that the jackpot start timing is reached, it is set to off (S10603 in FIG. 222). The jackpot start flag 203fb is set to off in the initial state, and is configured to be backed up and the state immediately before the power cut is maintained when a power cut or the like occurs.

The jackpot middle flag 203o is a flag indicating that the jackpot game is in progress. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a big hit is stopped (S10017 in FIG. 215). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (when it is determined that the game of the number of rounds corresponding to the set jackpot type has been completed), it is set to off (S10617 in FIG. 222). This jackpot middle flag 203o is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is retained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of the power failure or the like when a power failure or the like occurs. It is configured to. The jackpot medium flag 203o has the same function as the jackpot medium flag 203o used in the above-described first embodiment.

The small hit start flag 203fc is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the small hit game. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped (S10304 in FIG. 218). When it is determined that the small hit start flag 203fc is on and it is determined that it is the start timing of the small hit game, it is set to off (S10703 in FIG. 223). This small hit start flag 203fc is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure occurs is backed up and held. It is configured to be.

The small hit medium flag 203p is a flag indicating that the small hit game is in progress. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped (see S10304 in FIG. 218). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (when it is determined that the game of the set number of rounds of the small hit has ended), it is set to off (see S10717 in FIG. 223). This small hit medium flag 203p is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure occurs is backed up and held. It is configured to be.

The V-passing jackpot type storage area 203fd is a switch for detecting that the ball that has won the V-winning device 650 has passed through the specific area 650V (the ball has passed through the specific area 650V) when the small-hit game is being executed. This is a storage area in which data for determining the jackpot type set in) (not shown) is stored. In the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203fd, when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit stops, the data value corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the determined small hit type is stored (FIG. 218). S10302). When a sphere flows down a specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 and the sphere is detected by the detection switch, the V flag 203fe corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the data value stored in the V passing jackpot type storage area 203fd. Is configured to be turned on. At the end of the small hit game, the data value stored in the V-passing big hit type storage area 203fd is configured to be cleared. This V-passing jackpot type storage area 203fd is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure occurs is backed up. It is configured to be held by.

When the ball flows down the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 during the small hit game and the ball is detected by the detection switch, the V flag 203fe is changed to the big hit type corresponding to the type of the small hit game being executed. The corresponding flag is set to on. At the end of the small hit game, it is determined whether or not the V flag 203fe is on (see S10712 in FIG. 223), and when it is determined that the V flag 203fe is on (S10712: Yes in FIG. 223), it is turned on. The jackpot type to be executed is determined based on the set flag, and the start of the corresponding jackpot game (opening scenario based on the jackpot type) is set (S10713 in FIG. 223). This V flag 203fe is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is maintained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of the power failure or the like when a power failure or the like occurs. It is configured as follows.

The time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol executed during the time saving state up to 10 times. At this time, the time-saving medium-special 2 counter 203ff is set to 0, which is the initial value when the jackpot is won (see S10018 in FIG. 215), and is set to 10 at the end of the jackpot (see S10614 in FIG. 222). Then, when the change of the second special symbol is completed during the time saving state, 1 is subtracted (see S10204 in FIG. 217). The value of the time reduction medium special 2 counter 203ff is referred to when determining whether or not the end condition of the time reduction state is satisfied, and when it is determined that the counter value has been subtracted to 0 (FIG. 217). S10206: Yes), the normal state is set as the gaming state (S10208 in FIG. 217).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the time saving state reaches 100 times (first end condition), or the second special symbol in the time saving state. It is configured so that the time saving state ends when any of the conditions that the number of fluctuations of the symbol reaches 10 times (second end condition) is satisfied, and whether or not the second end condition is satisfied. In order to determine, the time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff is used. The value of the time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the remaining time saving number command (see S10205 in FIG. 217). The remaining time reduction number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the time reduction medium special 2 counter 203ff is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the remaining time reduction number based on the remaining time reduction number command, but the remaining time reduction number command corresponding to the value of the above-mentioned time reduction medium special 2 counter 203ff, that is, the time reduction state first. 2 It is configured to transmit information indicating the number of remaining fluctuations until the end condition is satisfied to the display control device 114. This is because, when a normal game is being performed, the time saving state is configured to shift to the normal state by satisfying the second end condition of the time saving state, and the player is asked to do so. This is to provide an easy-to-understand game by displaying the number of remaining fluctuations until the end of the time saving state on the third symbol display device 81.

The V-passing flag 203fg is a flag used to determine the state in which the V-flag 203fe is set to ON during the small hit game, and is set to ON when the V-flag 203fe is set to ON. Will be done. In the present embodiment, it is set to ON in the V passing process (see FIG. 221) corresponding to the ball that first passes through the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 during the small hit game (S10507 in FIG. 221).

Then, in the V-pass processing (see FIG. 221), it is determined whether the V-pass flag 203fg is set to ON (S10501 in FIG. 221), and if it is determined to be set to ON (S10501: Yes in FIG. 221). ), The processing of S10502 to S10508 among the V-passing processing (see FIG. 221) is configured to be skipped. As a result, when a plurality of balls pass through the specific area 650V during one small hit game (when the detection switch (not shown) capable of detecting the balls passing through the specific area 650V detects a plurality of balls). ), Only the V-passing process corresponding to the first detected ball will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the process executed during the small hit game, and the V passage command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 a plurality of times, so that the V passage management on the voice lamp control device 113 side is complicated. Can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 210 and 211, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 210 is a transition diagram schematically showing the flow of the gaming state after that based on the lottery result of the special symbol, and FIG. 211 is a schematic diagram of the operation flow of various devices executed during the small hit game. It is a timing chart shown as a target.

In the seventh embodiment, a normal state in which a left-handed game in which a ball is launched aiming at the left side area of the game board 13 (see FIG. 195) is performed and a lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed, and a game board. It is possible to set a time-saving state in which a right-handed game in which a ball is launched aiming at the right side area of 13 and a lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed, and the first is higher than the lottery for the first special symbol. 2 The lottery of special symbols is configured to make it easier to execute the jackpot game.

Further, as the time saving state, either the time saving state A (time saving A) which is advantageous to the player or the time saving state B (time saving B) which is more disadvantageous to the player than the time saving state A is set. ing. Here, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed in the state where the time saving state A (time saving A) is set, the normal state is not set (difficult to be) after the jackpot game is completed. There is. With this configuration, once the time saving state A (time saving A) is set, the normal state is not set as the game state unless at least two big hit games are executed, so that the time saving state that is advantageous for the player can be set. Can be built.

As shown in FIG. 210, in the state where the normal state is set, the game is executed by the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and if the big hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery, the big hit is won. If the time-saving jackpot is "big hit A" (10% of the jackpot), the time-saving state A (time-saving A) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends, and it is "big hit B" (40% of the jackpot). In that case, the time saving state B (time saving B) is set as the game state after the big hit game ends, and in the case of "big hit C" (50% of the big hit), the normal state is set as the game state after the big hit game ends. To.

In addition, when the special figure 2 lottery is executed during the normal state and the big hit is won or the big hit game is executed based on the small hit winning, the normal state is set after the big hit game is completed. It is configured. As a result, it is possible to suppress the act of illegally executing the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) during the normal state.

In the state where the time saving state A (time saving A) is set, the special figure 2 lottery is mainly executed. In this special figure 2 lottery, as explained with reference to FIG. 205 (c), when a big hit is won, the time saving state is always set after the big hit game is completed, so that the time saving state A (time saving A) If a big hit is won, the normal state is not set after the big hit game is over.

Further, even if a small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, the fluctuation pattern specified in the first time saving fluctuation pattern table 202fd2 referred to during the time saving state A (time saving A) is set. When the small hit type "small hit C" in which the normal state is set after the big hit game is won, the ball does not pass through the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650. Therefore, when the time saving state A (time saving A) is set, a plurality of big hit games can be executed until the game state is set to the normal state again. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the advantageous gaming state is immediately terminated even though the advantageous gaming state is set to be advantageous to the player, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. can.

In the state where the time saving state A is set, when the time saving end condition is satisfied (when the special figure 2 variation is executed 10 times), the time saving state ends and the normal state is set. However, in the short time state, there is a probability of winning a small hit with a probability of about 1/2, and 80% of the small hit games that can pass the ball to a specific area 650V are executed, so continue. As long as the normal game is performed, the jackpot game can be executed before the time saving end condition is satisfied. On the other hand, in order to pass the ball through a specific area 650V when a specific small hit type is won, when a game in which the right-handed game is not continuously performed is executed, the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 2 is reduced to 10 times. By reaching it, it is possible to shift to the normal state. As a result, a penalty can be imposed on the player who has performed an inappropriate game during the time saving state.

If the small hit A (20%) is won while the time saving state A (time saving A) is set, the time saving state A (time saving A) is performed again after the big hit game based on the small hit winning is executed. Is set and when the small hit B (70%) is won, the time saving state B (time saving B) is set after the big hit game based on the small hit winning is executed. If the small hit C (10%) is won, a short fluctuation time (0.5 seconds) is set as shown in FIG. 208 (a), so that the specific area 650V is set during the small hit game. The ball never passes.

Further, when the jackpot is won in the state where the time saving state B (time saving B) is set, the jackpot D (90%) and the jackpot E (10%) are the same as the time saving state A (time saving A) described above. Is set. Further, when the small hit is won, the second time saving fluctuation pattern table 202fd3 (see FIG. 208 (b)) is referred to, and the ball is configured to pass through the specific region 650V in the small hit A or the small hit C. ing.

Therefore, when the small hit A (20%) is won, the time saving state A (time saving A) is set after the big hit game based on the small hit winning is executed, and when the small hit C is won, the time saving state A (time saving A) is set. After the big hit game based on the small hit win is executed, the normal state is set. Further, as in the time saving state A (time saving A), when the time saving end condition is satisfied (when the special figure 2 variation is executed 10 times), the time saving state ends and the normal state is set. It is composed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 211, the flow of operations of various devices during the small hit game will be described. FIGS. 211 (a) to 211 (f) are diagrams schematically showing the flow of various configurations during the small hit game. As shown in FIGS. 211 (a) to 211 (f), when the special figure variation display in which a small hit is won is executed by the control process of the main control device 110, the display control device 114 displays the third symbol display device 81. An effect during the race (see FIGS. 199 (b) to 202 (a)) is executed on the screen. Then, when t1 (0.1 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the small hit game, the V winning opening solenoid (not shown) is driven for 1.5 seconds according to a predetermined scenario (see FIG. 209).

A ball flowing down a specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 is detected by a detection switch (not shown), and is detected within 4 seconds (V valid period t5) from 1 second after the start of the small hit game. When the switch detects the ball, the big hit game is executed after the small hit game ends, and when the opening period t6 (2 seconds) elapses after the big hit game starts, the first round game starts and the specific winning opening 65a is released.

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the normal state, the time saving state A, and the time saving state B can be set as the gaming state, and the time saving state A is set and the time saving state B is set. It is configured so that the data table to be referred to when setting the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is different depending on the case where it is done.

When the time saving state A is set, if the player wins a small hit (small hit C) that is disadvantageous to the player, the ball does not pass through the specific area 650V during the small hit game. It is configured so that the fluctuation pattern is set. Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 196, when the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed in the time saving state, the flow path (second flow) capable of passing through the specific region 650V. The fluctuation time (0.5 seconds) set when the small hit C is won, rather than the period (3 seconds) required for the ball to flow down the path tb) and pass through the second flow path tb. ) And the time (1.6 seconds) from the start of the small hit game to the end of the opening period of the V winning device 650 are configured to be shorter.

Further, when the time saving state B is set, if a small hit (small hit C) that is disadvantageous to the player is won, the ball fluctuates so that the ball can pass through the specific area 650V during the small hit game. It is configured so that the pattern is set. With this configuration, even if the time saving state is set as the game state, if the degree of advantage to the player is significantly different only by changing the data table referred to when setting the fluctuation pattern. Can be made.

<About the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 212 and 213, the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 212 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 212, the RAM 223 of the seventh embodiment has a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d, a fluctuation start flag 223fa, a stop type selection flag 223fb, an effect counter 223h, and a SW effective time. It has a storage area 223fd, a fluctuation time counter 223fd, a game state storage area 223fe, a delay passage state flag 223ff, a length fluctuation flag 223fg, a second ball entry flag 223fh, a middle flag 223fi per normal figure, and another memory area 223z. Since the configuration (flag, counter, area) having the same name as the electrical configuration used in any of the above-described embodiments is the same as each of the above-described embodiments in terms of its use, detailed description thereof will be omitted. ..

The variation start flag 223fa is a flag for indicating that information (variation pattern command) indicating that the variation of the special symbol is started is received, and is set to ON when the variation of the special symbol is started. It is a thing. This fluctuation start flag 223fa is based on the information included in the fluctuation pattern command received by the voice lamp control device 113, and whether the current special symbol variation is the variation of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) or the second special symbol. It is configured so that it can be determined whether it is a fluctuation in (Special Figure 2).

Specifically, the variation start flag 223fa receives the special figure 1 variation start flag 223fa1 which is set to be on when the variation pattern command indicating the special figure 1 variation is received, and the variation pattern command indicating the special figure 2 variation. It is formed from the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fa2, which is set to be on when the command is performed.

Then, when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (S12001: Yes in FIG. 226), the variation start flag 223fa corresponding to the symbol type information included in the received variation pattern command is set to ON. (See S12002 in FIG. 226), it is set to off when the variation display in the third symbol display device 81 is set (see S5102 or S5108 in FIG. 231). When any of the variation start flags 223fa is set to on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is the command output process (S4102 in FIG. 225) of the main process (see FIG. 225) executed by the MPU 221. Inside, it is transmitted toward the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223fb is a flag for indicating that a command (stop type command) including information for indicating the stop type of the current special symbol change has been received from the main control device 110, and is a flag for indicating that the main control device 110 has received the command (stop type command). It is set to on when a stop type command transmitted from is received (see S12005 in FIG. 226), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S5112 in FIG. 231). .. When the stop type selection flag 223fb is set to on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

The game state storage area 223fe is an area for storing the game state corresponding to the state command when the state command related to the game state is received from the main control device 110. By referring to the information (game state) stored in the game state storage area 223fe, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to identify the current game state. In the present embodiment, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is stored in the game state storage area 223fe when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like because the data is erased when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. The information indicating the current gaming state is also deleted. However, in the present embodiment, since the state command is set in the start-up process (see FIG. 51) of the main control device executed after the power is turned on (S2115 in FIG. 51), the game state storage area 223fe is immediately after the power is restored. Information indicating the game state that was set before the power was cut off will be stored in. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the voice lamp control device 113 can always identify the gaming state.

The state command output from the main control device 110 is received when it is determined by the command determination process 7 of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S4182 in FIG. 226) whether or not it has been received, and when it is determined that the command has been received. The game state included in the state command is configured to be stored in the game state storage area 223fe, but in FIG. 226, the processing content is processed according to other commands (S12019 in FIG. 226). The process is included in (see), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The delayed passage state flag 223ff is a flag for determining the state of the sphere flowing down the second flow path (delayed flow path) tb in the flow path unit 660. Here, the contents of the delayed passage state flag 223ff will be described with reference to FIG. 213. FIG. 213 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the delayed passage state flag 223ff. As shown in FIG. 213, the delay passage state flag 223ff is composed of a storage area of 1 byte, and is configured so that the ball flow state of the delay passage can be specified by the state of the lower 4 bits.

Specifically, the delayed passage entry switch 660e1 that detects the ball that has flowed into the second passage (delayed passage) 660b is set to off, and the delayed passage discharge that detects the ball that has flowed out from the second passage (delayed passage) 660b. When the switch 660e2 is set to off, that is, when the ball does not pass through the second passage (delayed passage) 660b, the lower 4 bits become "0001" (described as "00" in FIG. 213). When the delayed passage entry switch 660e1 is set to on and the delayed passage discharge switch 660e2 is set to off, that is, when the ball is passing through the second passage (delayed passage) 660b, the lower 4 bits. Is "0010" (described as "01" in FIG. 213), the delay passage entry switch 660e1 is set to off, and the delay passage discharge switch 660e2 is set to on, that is, the second passage (delay passage). ) In the state where the ball is ejected from the inside of 660b, the lower 4 bits are "0011" (described as "02" in FIG. 213).

Here, the delay passage entry switch 660e1 and the delay passage discharge switch 660e2 are both composed of a proximity sensor capable of detecting a ball flowing down the second passage tb formed in the second passage 660b, and are the targets. It is configured to be turned on when an object is detected continuously for a predetermined period. Then, it is configured to be set to off when the object is not detected for a predetermined period.

Here, when the setting status of the lower 4 bits of the delayed passage state flag 223ff is the above-mentioned "0001", "0010", and "0011", the ball normally flows down the second passage (delayed passage) 660b. Since it is a state that can be set to, it is determined to be a normal ball flow state.

On the other hand, the delayed passage entry switch 660e1 is set to ON and the delayed passage discharge switch 660e2 is also set to ON, that is, the ball flows into the second passage (delayed passage) 660b and the ball is discharged. In the state where the state is detected at the same time, the lower 4 bits become "0011" (described as "03" in FIG. 213), and the delay passage entry switch 660e1 becomes an abnormal state (described as "-" in FIG. 213). In the state where the delay passage discharge switch 660e2 is set to ON, that is, in the state where the sensor for detecting the ball flow condition of the second passage (delay passage) 660b is out of order, the lower 4 bits are "0100" (FIG. In 213, it is described as "04"), and it is determined that the ball is in an abnormal flow state.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 214 to 224.

FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 according to the seventh embodiment. This timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds instead of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment.

Of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 214) in the seventh embodiment, in each of the processes S101 to S103, S105, S107, S110, and S111, the timer interrupt processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 31), respectively. The same processing as each processing of S101 to S103, S105, S107, S110, and S111 is executed.

Further, in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 214), when the processing of S103 is completed, the processing is for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81. The special symbol variation process 7 for setting the variation pattern of the above is executed (S191), and then the process proceeds to the process of S105. The details of the special symbol variation processing 7 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 215 to 218.

After the process of S105 is executed, the normal symbol variation process 7 (S192), which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S192), and then the process proceeds to the process of S107. The details of the normal symbol variation processing 7 will be described later with reference to FIG. 219. After executing the process of S107, the process of passing through the V entrance accompanying the entry of the ball into the V winning device 650 is executed (S193). After that, the V passing process executed when the ball winning the V winning device 650 passes through the specific area 650V is executed (S194), and then the process proceeds to the process of S110. The details of the V inlet passing process and the V passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 220 and 221.

That is, in the seventh embodiment, when the ball passes through the specific area 650V provided in the V winning device 650 during the small hit game, the process for executing the big hit game after the small hit game is completed (2). As the seed-based execution process), a V-entrance pass process (S193 in FIG. 214) and a V-pass process (S194 in FIG. 214) are provided, a process related to fluctuation of the first symbol (special symbol), and a second symbol (S). It differs from the above-mentioned first embodiment in that the detailed contents of the processing relating to the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol) are different.

Next, the special symbol variation processing 7 (S191) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 215. FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation processing 7 (S191). This special symbol variation processing 7 (S191) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 214) in the seventh embodiment, and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 is performed. , This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, in the special symbol variation processing 7 (see S191 of FIG. 215) in the seventh embodiment, there is also a place where the same processing as the special symbol variation processing (see S104 of FIG. 32) in the above-mentioned first embodiment is executed. However, for convenience of explanation, different reference numerals are given to the processes having the same contents. It should be noted that, of course, the modified contents described in each of the above-described embodiments can be applied to the elements having the same processing contents.

In the special symbol variation processing 7 (S191 in FIG. 215) in the seventh embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the present is a big hit of the special symbol (S10001). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S10001: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S10001: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S10002), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If it is determined that this is not the case (S10002: No), it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the second entry port 3640 (S1003).

When it is determined that the ball has entered the second entry port 3640 (S1003: Yes), the second entry command is set (S10004), the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the stop. Each value of the type selection counter C3 and the small hit type counter C5 is stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area (S10005). Next, the first symbol display device 37 executes the special symbol variation start process 7 for starting the variation display (S10011). The special symbol change start process 7 will be described later with reference to FIG. 216.

On the other hand, in the process of S1003, when it is determined that the ball has not entered the second entry port 3640 (S1003: No), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired. (S10006). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S10007). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (not larger than 0) (S10007: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (not 0) (S10007: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (N1). ) Is subtracted by 1 (S10008), and a hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S10009). Here, the set reserved ball number command is configured to include information for indicating that the command is for indicating the reserved ball number of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and is the main control. The hold ball number command set by the external output process (see S2201 in FIG. 52) executed in the main process of the device 110 (see FIG. 52) is output to the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, the current number of reserved balls can be grasped on the voice lamp control device 113 side for each type of special symbol.

After the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S10009, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S10010). After that, the process of S10011 is executed.

Further, in the process of S10002, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S10002: Yes), the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S10012). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If it is determined that has not elapsed (S10012: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S10012, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S10012: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S10013). The display mode of the stop symbol is preset by the special symbol variation start process 7 (S10011) described later with reference to FIG. 216. When this special symbol change start process 7 is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, depending on the value of the first random number counter C1, it is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit or a miss, and if it is a special symbol big hit, the first hit type counter. The jackpot type (big hits A to C) is determined according to the value of C2.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37. If it is a small hit, the red LED is turned on, and if it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S10013 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing 7 is displayed. , It is determined whether it is a big hit of a special symbol (S10014). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot of a special symbol (S10014: Yes), an opening scenario of a specific winning opening is set (S10015) based on the jackpot type, and then the start of the jackpot is set (S10016). Next, the jackpot start flag 203fb and the jackpot medium flag 203o are set to ON (S10017), the value of the time reduction / medium total counter 203fa and the value of the time reduction / medium special 2 counter 203ff are set to 0 (S10018), and S10019. Move to processing. In the process of S10019, a stop command is set (S10019), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S10014, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S10014: No), the time saving number update process (S10020) is executed to determine whether or not the current lottery result is a small hit. (S10021). The details of this time reduction update process (S10020) will be described later with reference to FIG. 217.

In the process of S10021, if it is determined that the lottery result this time is a small hit (S10021: Yes), the small hit start setting process is executed (S10022). Next, the process of S10019 is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S10021, if it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a small hit (S10021: No), the small hit start setting process (see S10022) is skipped, the process of S10019 is executed, and this process is completed. do.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed and it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit, the time reduction number update process (S10020) is executed, and then the current lottery result is obtained. It is configured to determine whether it is a small hit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it is configured to execute the time saving number update process (S10020) after executing the small hit start setting process (S10022). You may. Further, for example, when the time reduction number update process is executed and it is determined that the time reduction number ends by the special symbol variation process this time, and the lottery result of the special symbol this time is out of order, the execution timing of the time reduction number update process is performed. If the time saving state is terminated at (special symbol symbol stop timing) and the lottery result of this special symbol is a small hit, the time saving state may be terminated at the timing when the small hit game ends. .. This makes it possible to set the time saving state until just before the start of the next special symbol change. Further, even if a small hit is won in the final fluctuation of the time saving state, the small hit game can be executed in the state where the time saving state is set.

Next, the special symbol change start processing 7 (S10011) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 216. FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start processing 7 (S10011). This special symbol variation start process 7 (S10011) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 215) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214), and is the first special symbol holding ball storage area. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of 203a, a lottery (win / fail judgment) of "special symbol big hit", "special symbol small hit" or "special symbol omission" is performed, and the first symbol is performed. This is a process to be executed when setting information necessary for determining an effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of a variation effect performed by the display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol fluctuation start processing 7 (S10011), first, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, And, each value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired (S10101). Next, the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number 7 table 202fd corresponding to the acquired special symbol type (S10102). Specifically, in the case of a lottery of the first special symbol based on the entry into the first entry port 64, the value of the random number counter C1 per first and the special symbol 1 random number table 202fa1 (see FIG. 204 (b)). The random number value stored in is compared to determine whether or not it is a big hit, and if it is a lottery of the second special symbol based on the entry into the second entry opening 3640, the value of the first random number counter C1. And the random number value stored in the special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2 (see FIG. 204 (c)) are compared to determine a big hit or a small hit.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a big hit (S10103). When it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S10103: Yes), the big hit type is acquired based on the first hit type selection 7 table 202fa corresponding to the acquired special symbol type (S10104). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S10101 is compared with the random number value stored in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202fb1 or the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202fb2. It is determined what type of jackpot is among the jackpots (big hits A to E) of the five types of special symbols (see FIGS. 205 (b) or (c)).

In the seventh embodiment, the determination value determined to be a big hit is the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the determination value is not limited to the same, and different random values may be used. With this configuration, the random number value determined to be out of order in the first special symbol is configured to be determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and the bias of the jackpot can be suppressed.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the number is not limited to this, and the jackpot is defined for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The number of determined random numbers may be set differently. By configuring in this way, the probability of a big hit can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol having the higher jackpot probability, the player It is possible to have expectations for a big hit.

Then, the display mode at the time of normal jackpot corresponding to the special symbol type and the jackpot type is set (S10105). In this process of S10105, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37A) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A to E). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A to E) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

After that, the jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S10106), and the process proceeds to S10113. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S10106, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. Specifically, among the acquired special symbol type, the lottery result, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, and each variation pattern table of the variation pattern 7 table 202fd, the current game. The fluctuation time of the symbol variation is determined by comparing the values specified in the data table corresponding to the state (see FIG. 207).

In the process of S10113, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S10106 is set (S10113). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S10105 is set (S10114). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and are executed in the main process (see FIG. 52) of the main controller 110 in the external output process (S2201). Inside, it is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can set the variation display mode (effect mode) of the third symbol according to the variation pattern (variation time) and the stop type of the special symbol. When the processing of S10114 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing 7 (S191).

On the other hand, if the lottery result is not a big hit (S10103: No), then it is determined whether the lottery result is a small hit (S10107). When it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S10107: Yes), the small hit type is acquired based on the small hit type selection 7 table 202fe (S10108). More specifically, the value of the small hit type counter C5 acquired in the processing of S10101 is compared with the random number value specified in the small hit type selection 7 table 202fe, and the small hits (small) of three types of special symbols are compared. Among the hits A to C), it is determined what the small hit type is (see FIG. 206 (b)).

In addition, in this 7th embodiment, since it is configured so that a small hit is not won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), when the small hit is won in the lottery of the special symbol. Is not executing the process of determining the type of the special symbol won in the small hit because it is determined that the lottery of the special symbol this time is the lottery of the second special symbol. If any of the second special symbols is configured to win a small hit, after determining that the small hit has been won, a process of determining the type of the special symbol corresponding to the current lottery is performed, and the determination is made. It is preferable to configure the process to select the small hit type according to the result. With this configuration, it is possible to set different small hit types depending on whether the small hit is won with the first special symbol or the small hit with the second special symbol, and the game playability. Can have a width. In addition, the types of small hits that can be set when a small hit is won between the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not changed, and the selection ratio of each small hit type may be different. good.

Next, the display mode at the time of a small hit corresponding to the small hit type is set (S10109), and the small hit fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S10110). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the small hit symbol is determined. It should be noted that the processing executed in S10110 differs from the processing content of S10106 described above in that the lottery result of the target special symbol is changed to a small hit instead of a big hit, but the set variation. Since the subsequent processing executed for the pattern (for example, the processing for outputting to the voice lamp control device 113) is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, when the lottery result is not a small hit in the process of S10107 (S10107: No), the display mode at the time of disengagement corresponding to the special symbol is set (S10111). After that, the fluctuation pattern at the time of off is determined based on the number of reserved balls (S10112). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. Next, the processes of S10113 and S10114 described above are executed, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process 7.

In this embodiment, in the special symbol change start processing 7 (see S10011 in FIG. 216), the lottery result of the special symbol is configured to be determined in the order of "big hit", "small hit", and "missing". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to give priority to "off". Such a configuration is effective for reducing the number of determinations that are repeatedly executed in various processes of the main control device 110 because the lottery result that is most likely to appear as the lottery result of the special symbol is "missing". It becomes.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, in the special symbol variation start process 7 (see S10011 in FIG. 216), the variation pattern command and the stop type command are configured to be set in the same process. The pattern command and the stop type command may be configured to be set at different timings. Further, even if the settings are made within the same process, the stop type command is output after a predetermined period in which the variation pattern command is output so that the timing of output to the voice lamp control device 113 is not the same. You may.

Next, with reference to FIG. 217, the time saving number update process (S10020) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing the time reduction number update process (S10020). This time reduction number update process (S10020) is executed in the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 215) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214), updates the time reduction number, and sets the game state to the normal state. It is a process for.

In the time reduction number update process (S10020), first, it is determined whether the value of the time reduction / medium total counter 203fa is larger than 0 (S10201). When it is determined that the value of the time reduction / medium total counter 203fa is not larger than 0 (0), (S10201: No), that is, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal state, the time reduction number is updated. Since there is no need, this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction / medium total counter 203fa is larger than 0 (S10201: Yes), that is, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the time reduction state, the number of time reductions is updated (subtracted). Processes (S10202 to S10209) for executing the process of (S10202 to S10209) are executed.

In the process of S10202, the value of the time-saving / medium-time total counter 203fa is subtracted by 1 (S10202), and then it is determined whether or not the current special symbol change is the change of the second special symbol (special figure 2) (S10203). When it is determined that the current fluctuation is the second special symbol (special figure 2) (S10203: Yes), the value of the time-saving medium-time special 2 counter 203ff is subtracted by 1 (S10204), and the process proceeds to S10205. On the other hand, in the process of S10203, if it is determined that the current variation is not the second special symbol (the first special symbol) (S10203: No), the process of S10204 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S10205.

In the process of S10205, a remaining time reduction number command indicating the value of the time reduction medium counter (time reduction medium total counter 203fa and time reduction medium special 2 counter 203ff) changed by the calculation is set (S10205). The remaining time reduction command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) of the first embodiment. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113.

After that, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff is 0 (S10206), and if it is determined that the value of the time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff is not 0 (S10206: No), then the time saving middle It is determined whether the value of the total counter 203fa is 0 (S10207). If it is determined in the process of S10207 that the value of the time-saving / medium-time total counter 203fa is not 0 (S10207: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S10206, it was determined that the value of the time saving / medium special 2 counter 203ff was 0 (S10206: Yes), or in the processing of S10207, it was determined that the value of the time saving / medium total counter 203fa was 0. In the case (S10207: Yes), the gaming state is set to the normal state (S10208), the values of the time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff and the time saving medium total counter 203fa are both set to 0 (S10209), and this processing is terminated. ..

As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state are set, and when any of the time saving ending conditions is satisfied, the process of ending the time saving state (normal state). It is configured to execute the process of setting. Specifically, when the number of special symbol fluctuations (total number of fluctuations), which is the sum of the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol during the time reduction state, reaches a predetermined number, that is, the time reduction. The value (for example, 100) set in the time saving / medium summing counter 203fa when the state is set is subtracted every time the special symbol change is executed, and the time saving end condition is satisfied when the value becomes 0. When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times in the time saving state, that is, the value (for example, 10) set in the time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff when the time saving state is set is the second. 2 Special symbol (Special 2) The time reduction state is terminated when one of the time reduction end condition, which is subtracted each time the fluctuation is executed and the value becomes 0, is satisfied. It is configured to do.

With this configuration, the lottery for the second special symbol, in which the lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) while the time saving state is set. ) It can be surely executed. In the present embodiment, the configuration has the above-mentioned two time reduction end conditions, but the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more time reduction end conditions may be set. Further, in the jackpot winning of the special symbol that triggers the setting of the time saving state, the value for satisfying the time saving end condition may be different depending on the type of the winning jackpot. Further, in the present embodiment, the time saving state is terminated when any one of the plurality of time saving end conditions is satisfied, but the time saving state is not limited to this, and for example, three time saving conditions are satisfied. The end condition may be set in advance, and the time reduction state may be terminated when two of the time reduction end conditions are satisfied. By setting the conditions for ending the time saving state in a complicated manner in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp how long the time saving state (advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player) will continue. It is possible to play a game with a sense of tension.

Further, as described above, when a plurality of time reduction end conditions are set, a value corresponding to the time reduction end condition that is most likely to be satisfied is used as an effect of notifying the player of the period until the time reduction state ends. All you have to do is execute the effect of notifying. In the present embodiment, in the state where the time saving state is set, the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is executed by the right-handed game, so that the remaining time saving number notification executed during the time saving state is notified. Is configured to notify the value until the time saving end condition that is satisfied based on the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special drawing 2) is satisfied among a plurality of time saving ending conditions (FIG. 199 (b). ) Remaining time reduction notification area Dm6).

Next, with reference to FIG. 218, the small hit start setting process (S10022) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing the small hit start setting process (S10022). This small hit start setting process (S10022) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 215) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214), and is a small hit type (small hits A to C). ), This is a process for setting the start of the small hit game (the game content (operation scenario) of the small hit game to be executed this time).

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, when the small hit game is started, the V winning device 650 is changed to an open state in which a ball can win (easily), and the ball winning the V winning device 650 is changed. By passing through the specific area 650V, the big hit game is executed after the small hit game is completed.

That is, in the game state in which the small hit game is executed, the ball can be won in the V prize device 650 (the prize ball can be obtained), and the big hit game is executed as compared with the normal game state. It is configured to be in an advantageous state with a high probability.

In the small hit start setting process (S10022), first, an opening scenario (operation scenario) corresponding to the small hit type is set (S10301). This operation scenario is set by referring to the open scenario 7 table 202ff based on the small hit type set by referring to the small hit type selection 7 table 202fe at the time of winning the small hit.

After that, the jackpot type corresponding to the small hit type is set in the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203fd (S10302). More specifically, the big hit type (big hit D to E) at the time of passing V is determined based on the small hit type and the small hit type selection 7 table 202fe. As described above with reference to FIG. 206 (b), if the small hit type is small hit A, it is determined that the big hit type when passing V is "10 rounds, 10 times big hit, time saving A", and the small hit is made. If the type is small hit B, it is determined that it is "10 rounds, 10 times of time reduction, and time reduction B", and if the type of small hit is C, it is determined that it is "10 rounds, no time reduction, big hit" (FIG. 206). See (b)).

Next, the start of the small hit is set based on the small hit type (S10303), and the small hit start flag 203fc and the small hit medium flag 203p are set to ON (S10304). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 219, the normal symbol variation processing 7 (S192) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation processing 7 (S192). This normal symbol variation process 7 (S192) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device and the second entry port 3640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 3640a.

In the seventh embodiment, a plurality of hit types can be set as the hit types of the normal symbol (second symbol), and the operation pattern (opening scenario) of the electric accessory 3640a according to the set hit types. Is configured to be different. As a result, when the normal symbol is won, the electric accessory 3640a can be opened and closed in a plurality of operation patterns, which makes it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the electric accessory 3640a is operating. be able to.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, it is easier for the ball to enter the second entry port 3640 in the state where the electric accessory 3640a is operating (it is easier to enter the ball than in the state where the electric accessory 3640a is not operating). ), And the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 3640a at the timing when the operation of the electric accessory 3640a ends differs depending on the flow position (first flow path ta, second flow path). It is configured to be discharged to tb) (see FIGS. 195 to 198).

The ball flowing down the second flow path tb is configured to easily pass through the specific region 650V in the V winning device 650 during the small hit game than the ball flowing down the first flow path ta. .. As described above, in the present embodiment, the ease of entering the ball into the second entry port 3640 can be changed by changing the opening operation content of the electric accessory 3640a (second entry). Set the first open state where the ball is easy to enter the mouth 3640 and the second open state where the ball is harder to enter the second entry port 3640 than the easy entry state), and enter the specific area 650V. The ease of passage of the sphere can be changed (the first lead state in which the sphere easily passes to the specific region 650 V, and the second guide state in which the sphere is more difficult to pass to the specific region 650 V than the first guide state. Can be set).

That is, in the seventh embodiment, a plurality of hit types can be set as the hit types of the normal symbol (second symbol), and the operation pattern (opening scenario) of the electric accessory 3640a according to the set hit types. By making it different, it is possible to make the ease of satisfying each condition different for each of the plurality of conditions for having a privilege for the player, so that one variable means ( It is possible to make the player more interested in the operation content of the electric accessory 3640a).

As a configuration for differently satisfying a plurality of game conditions in this way, a configuration other than the configuration of the seventh embodiment may be used. For example, a variable means in which a plurality of operation patterns are set may be electrically used. Instead of the accessory 3640a, a winning device (for example, a variable winning device 65) in which an operation pattern is set at the time of winning a big hit may be used.

In the normal symbol variation processing 7 (S192), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S801). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second entrance 3640 is performed. In the middle of being included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S801: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S801: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S802), and the second symbol display device is used. If the display mode is not changing (S802: No), then it is determined whether data (value of the random number counter C4 per second) is stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area (S803).

In the process of S803, when it is determined that the data is not stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area, that is, the condition for newly starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol (second symbol) is not satisfied (S803: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball possible area, that is, when it is determined that the condition for newly starting the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is satisfied (S803). : Yes), then, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area is acquired (S804).

Then, based on the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S804 and the second random number 7 table 202fc, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S805). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number 7 table 202fc. As described above, when the current game state is a high probability state (time saving state) of a normal symbol, if the value of the random number counter C4 per second is in the range of "0 to 79", it is A per normal figure. If it is in the range of "80 to 98", it is determined that it is B per normal figure, and if it is a value of "99", it is determined that it is out of range. Further, when the current gaming state is a low probability state (normal state) of a normal symbol, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is "0", it is determined that the value is A per normal symbol. If it is a value of "1", it is determined that it is B per normal figure, and if it is "2 to 99", it is determined that it is out of order (see FIG. 206 (a)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S805 is a hit of the normal symbol (A per normal symbol or B per normal symbol) (S806), and it is determined that the lottery result is a hit of the normal symbol. If it is determined (S806: Yes), the display mode at the time of hit is set (S807), and the process proceeds to S809. In the process of S807, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed so that the hit type can be identified as the stop symbol (stop display mode) of the second symbol. To set.

On the other hand, in the process of S806, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary symbol (S806: No), the display mode at the time of the out of place is set (S808). In the process of S808, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S809.

When the processing of S807 or S808 is completed, in the processing of S809, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol (S809), and the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the normal symbol (S809). If it is (time saving state) (S809: Yes), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device is set to 3 seconds (S810), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol (S809: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S811), and this process is performed. finish.

In the seventh embodiment, when the time saving state is set, a shorter fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the second symbol than when the time saving state is not set (when the normal state is set). It is configured as follows. As a result, the number of lottery of the second symbol per unit time can be increased in the time-saving state as compared with the normal state, so that the time-saving game can be efficiently executed.

In the seventh embodiment, when the time saving state is set, the probability of hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) is higher than that in the normal state, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set. By shortening the length and making it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 3640 in the operation pattern of the electric accessory 3640a, the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. However, it suffices if the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is more easily executed in the time-saving state than in the normal state. For example, the time-saving state is better than the normal state. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) may be shorter, and the other items may be the same. It may be the same, or the operation pattern of the electric accessory 3640a may be made easier for the ball to enter the second entry port 3640 in the time saving state than in the normal state, and other than that, it may be the same.

On the other hand, in the process of S802, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S802: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed. (S812). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S810 or the process of S811 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device.

In the process of S812, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S812: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S812, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S812: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S813). In the processing of S813, the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win, and if the display mode is set by the processing of S807, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighting display) in the second symbol display device. ) Is set to be done. On the other hand, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is out of order and the display mode is set by the processing of S808, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. Is set. When the stop display is set by the process of S813, the second symbol display is displayed when the second symbol display update process (see S2208) of the main process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment is executed next. The variation display in the device is completed, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S807 or the process of S808.

Next, when the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current normal symbol (the current lottery result) is a hit of the normal symbol (S814). If the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S814: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S814: Yes), it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol (S815).

In the processing of S815, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol (S815: No), the opening period of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second entrance 3640 is 0.2 seconds. At the same time, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S816), and the process proceeds to S818. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (time saving state) of a normal symbol (S815: Yes), a command for hitting a normal figure is set (S851), and the hit type set this time and the current game state are set. The operation pattern of the corresponding electric accessory 3640a is set (S817), and the process proceeds to S818.

In the process of S818, the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second ball entry port 3640 is set (S818), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 3640a is set by the process of S818, the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S2206) of the main process (see FIG. 52) of the main control device 110 is executed. The opening / closing control of the object is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S816 or the process of S817 are completed.

Next, the V inlet passage process (S193) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 220. FIG. 220 is a flowchart showing this V inlet passing process (S193). This V entrance passage process (S193) is a flowchart showing the V inlet passage process (S193) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214).

In the V entrance passing process (S193), first, it is determined whether or not the ball passing sensor (not shown) for detecting that the ball has won the V winning device 650 is on (S10401). This ball passage sensor is a detection means that is turned on when a ball has passed. Specifically, it is composed of proximity sensors arranged close to the ball flow path so that the period required for the ball to flow down the detection area of the ball passage sensor is a predetermined period (for example, 30 milliseconds). This proximity sensor is configured to turn on (output an on signal) when it continuously detects an object for 30 milliseconds. As a result, for example, even if a state in which a ball is detected at intervals of less than 30 milliseconds appears due to noise generated in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to suppress a problem that the state is determined to be a state in which the ball has passed. can do.

If it is determined in the process of S10401 that the ball passage sensor is not on (S10401: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S10401, when it is determined that the ball passing sensor is on (S10401: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V winning device 650 is in the opening period (S10402).

In the process of S10402, when it is determined that the V winning device 650 is in the opening period (S10402: Yes), the V entrance passage command is set (S10403), and this process is terminated. The V inlet passage command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) of the main controller 110. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V entrance passage command, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the balls that have passed through the V entrance, and transmits a command for causing the display control device 114 to execute an effect based on the V entrance passage. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect during the small hit game based on the entry of the ball into the V winning device 650.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the V winning device 650 is not in the opening period (S10402: No), it means that the ball has won the V winning device 650 even though it is not a small hit game, so an error command is set. (S10404), and then this process is terminated.

Next, the V-passing process (S194) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 221. FIG. 221 is a flowchart showing the V-passing process (S194). This V-passing process (S194) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214) in the seventh embodiment.

In the V-passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the V-passing flag 203fg is on (S10501). If it is determined in the process of S10501 that the V passage flag 203fg is ON (S10501: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S10501, when it is determined that the V passage flag 203fg is not on (S10501: No), it is determined whether or not the V passage is present (S10502). That is, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the V winning switch 650e3 of the V winning device 650. In the process of S10502, if it is determined that V has not passed (S10502: No), this process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S10502, if it is determined that V passage is present (S10502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V passage is valid (S10503). If it is determined that the V-passing valid period is in progress (S10503: Yes), the V-passing jackpot type value stored in the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203fd is acquired (S10504), and the acquired V-passing jackpot is acquired. The V flag 203fe corresponding to the type is set to ON (S10505). Then, the V passage command is set (S10506).

Next, the V-passing flag 203fg is set to ON (S10507), and then the time-saving / medium-time total counter 203fa and the time-saving / medium-special 2 counter 203ff are set to 0 (S10508), and the present processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S10503, if it is determined that the V passage valid period is not in effect (S10503: No), an error command is set (S10509), and this process is terminated. If the ball passes through the V winning switch 650e3 when it is not in the V valid period, it is considered that the ball is illegally won in the V winning switch 650e3. In this case, by setting an error command in the process of S10505, an error output is executed and a fraudulent act can be found.

Next, the jackpot control process 7 (S2282) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 222. FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 7 (S2282). This jackpot control process 7 (S2282) is executed in place of the jackpot control process (S2204) in the main process (see FIG. 52), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, it responds to the jackpot. It is a process for executing various effects and opening or closing the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650).

In the jackpot control process 7 (see FIGS. 222 and S2282), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S10601). Specifically, if the jackpot start flag 203fb is set to ON by the process of S10017 of the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 215), it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S10601, when the big hit of the special symbol is started (S10601: Yes), the opening command is set (S10602). Then, the jackpot start flag 203fb is set to off (S10603), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S10601, if the jackpot of the special symbol is not started (S10601: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S10604). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S10604, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S10604: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S10604, if it is determined that the special symbol is in the big hit (S10604: Yes), the process of S10605 is executed. In the process of S10605, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S10605). If it is determined in the process of S10605 that it is the start timing of a new round (S10605: Yes), the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the specific winning opening 65a or based on the opening scenario 7 table 202ff) The V winning opening 650a) of the V winning device 650 is opened (S10606), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S10607). After setting the round number command, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 in the first embodiment. Inside, it is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display round number command according to the round number to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

Although the details will be described later, in the seventh embodiment, when the continuous jackpot is executed, the display round number command according to the cumulative number of rounds is transmitted in the voice lamp control device 113. Become. Therefore, the cumulative number of rounds in the continuous jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the player can be made aware that the jackpot has continued for a long time, so that the player's interest can be improved.

On the other hand, in the process of S10605, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S10605: No), the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) It is determined whether the closing condition is satisfied (S10608). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650), or , When a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 in total) are won in the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 650, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the process of S10608, if the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is satisfied (S10608: Yes), the corresponding winning opening is satisfied. The opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed (S10609), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is not satisfied (S10608: No), the ending effect is started. It is determined whether it is the timing (S10610). The start timing of the ending effect is the start timing of the ending effect when the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed after the 15th round and the waiting time (3 seconds in the present embodiment), which is the ball ejection time, has elapsed. To determine as.

If it is determined in the process of S10610 that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S10610: Yes), the ending command is set (S10611), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 in the first embodiment. Then, it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S10610, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S10610: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect (S10612). If it is determined in the process of S10612 that it is not the end timing of the ending effect (S10612: No), the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S10612, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S10612: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special game being executed is the jackpot C (S10613). In the process of S10613, if it is determined that the hit is not C (5R time saving no big hit) (S10613: No), 100 is set in the time saving medium total counter 203fa and 10 is set in the time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff (S10614). The process proceeds to S10615. On the other hand, in the process of S10613, if it is determined that the hit is C (5R time saving no jackpot) (S10613: Yes), the process of S10614 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S10615.

In the process of S10615, a state command corresponding to the state after the big hit is set (S10615). Then, the end of the jackpot is set (S10616), the jackpot middle flag 203o is set to off (S10617), and then this process is terminated.

Next, the small hit control process 7 (S2283) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 223. FIG. 223 is a flowchart showing the small hit control process 7 (S2283). This small hit control process 7 (S2283) is executed in place of the small hit control process (S2205) in the main process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment, and the pachinko machine 10 is in a small hit state with a special symbol. In this case, various effects are executed according to the small hit, and the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened or closed. It is a process.

In the small hit control process 7 (S2283 in FIG. 223), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit of the special symbol is started (S10701). Specifically, if the small hit start flag 203fc is set to ON, it is determined that the small hit of the special symbol is started. In the process of S10701, when the small hit of the special symbol is started (S10701: Yes), the opening command is set (S10702). Then, the small hit start flag 203fc is set to off (S10703), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S10701, if the small hit of the special symbol is not started (S10701: No), it is determined whether the small hit of the special symbol is in progress (S10704). As for the small hits of the special symbols, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the small hits of the special symbols (including during the small hit game of the special symbols). Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the small hit game of the special symbol. In the process of S10704, if it is not during the small hit of the special symbol (S10704: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S10704, if it is determined that the special symbol is in the small hit (S10704: Yes), the process of S10705 is executed. In the process of S10705, it is determined whether or not it is the V winning opening opening timing (S10705). In the process of S10705, when it is determined that it is the V winning opening opening timing (S10705: Yes), the corresponding V winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened based on the opening scenario 7 table 202ff. (S10706), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S10705, if it is not the V winning opening opening timing (S10705: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the corresponding V winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is satisfied (S10707). .. Specifically, the closing condition is satisfied when the opening scenario set corresponding to the small hit game is completed, or when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 in total) are won in the V winning device 650. To determine.

If it is determined in the processing of S10707 that the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is satisfied (S10707: Yes), the corresponding winning opening (V winning opening of the V winning device 650) is determined. The mouth 650a) is closed (S10708) to end this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is not satisfied (S10707: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S10709). In the process of S10709, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S10709: Yes), the ending command is set (S10710), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 in the first embodiment. Then, it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the S10709 process, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S10709: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect (S10711). If it is determined in the process of S10711 that it is not the end timing of the ending effect (S10711: No), the present process is terminated.

In the process of S10711, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S10711: Yes), it is determined whether the V flag 203fe is set to ON (S10712), and the V flag 203fe is not set to ON. If it is determined that (S10712: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V flag 203fe is set to ON (S10712: Yes), an opening scenario based on the jackpot type corresponding to the content of the V flag 203fe is set (S10713), the jackpot start flag 203fb, and the jackpot. The medium flag 203o is set to on (S10714), the V flag 203fe is set to off (S10715), the V passage flag 203fg is set to off (S10716), and the small hit medium flag 203p is set to off (S10717). , End this process.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process 7 (S2281) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 224. FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing the electric accessory opening / closing process 7 (S2281). This electric accessory opening / closing process 7 (S2281) is a process executed in place of the electric accessory opening / closing process (S2207) in the main process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment.

In the electric accessory opening / closing process 7 (S2281), first, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing control setting of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second entrance 3640 is being set (S10801). If it is determined that the opening / closing control setting of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second entry port 3640 is not being set (S10801: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the opening / closing control setting of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second entrance 3640 is being set (S10801: Yes), the opening timing of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second entry 3640 is set. It is determined whether or not there is (S10802). When it is determined that it is the opening timing of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second entrance 3640 (S10802: Yes), the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second entry 3640 is opened (S10803), and the electric accessory is electric. The accessory release command is set (S10804), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S10802, if it is determined that it is not the opening timing of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second entry port 3640 (S10802: No), then the electric combination attached to the second entry port 3640 It is determined whether or not the closing timing of the object 3640a is reached (S10805). When it is determined that it is the closing timing of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second entrance 3640 (S10805: Yes), the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second entry 3640 is closed (S10806), and the electric accessory is electric. The accessory closing command is set (S10807), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the closing timing of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second entrance 3640 (S10805: No), then the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second entry 3640 is controlled. It is determined whether or not it is the end timing of (S10809). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the open / close control of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second entry port 3640 (S10809: Yes), the end command per normal figure is set (S10810), and then this process is terminated. do. Further, in the process of S10809, even if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second ball entry port 3640 (S10809: No), this process is terminated.

<Control processing executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 225 to 233, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the seventh embodiment will be described. First, the main process in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 225. This main process is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 59) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is the main process (and the figure) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment). It is a process for performing the same process as (see 59).

Of the main processes (see FIG. 225) in the seventh embodiment, in each of the processes S4101 to S4111 and S4114 to S4118, the main process (see FIG. 59) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively. The same processes as those of S4101 to S4111 and S4114 to S4118 are executed. Further, in the main process (see FIG. 225) in the seventh embodiment, the effect update process is executed after the process of S4111 is executed (S4181). This effect update process (S4181) is for performing a process for changing the content of the effect (already set variable display) currently being executed during the effect execution.

After executing the process of the effect update process (S4181), the command determination process 7 that performs the process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S4182). The details of this command determination process 7 will be described later with reference to FIG. 226.

Next, the process proceeds to S4183. In the process of S4183, the variable display setting process 7 is executed (S4183). In the variation display setting process 7 (S4183), a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. .. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process 7 (S4183) will be described later with reference to FIG. 231.

Then, after executing the variation display setting process 7 (S4183), the ball passage monitoring process is executed (S4184). The details of this ball passage monitoring process (S4184) will be described later with reference to FIG. 233.

Further, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the process of S4101 this time was executed (S4101), and if 1 msec or more has not elapsed (S4101: No). ), The process shifts to the process of S4182 without performing the processes of S4102 to S4111, S4181.

Next, the command determination process 7 (S4182) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 226. FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 7 (S4182). This command determination process 7 (S4182) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 225) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. do. Further, in this process, when the winning information command is received from the main control device 110, the third symbol display device 81 also determines to start the continuous advance notice effect.

In the command determination process 7 (S4182), first, the first command received from the main control unit 110 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and changed from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not a pattern command has been received (S12001). When the variation pattern command is received (S12001: Yes), the variation start flag 223fa of the symbol type corresponding to the received variation pattern command is set to ON (S12002), and the variation pattern type is set from the received variation pattern command. Is extracted (S12003), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process 7 (see FIG. 231) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command is not received (S12001: No), it is then determined whether or not the stop type command is received from the main control device 110 (S12004). Then, when the stop type command is received (S12004: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223fb of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S12005), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S12006), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process 7 (see FIG. 231) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S12004: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S12007). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S12007: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 ( The number of holdings N1) of the variation display in the special symbol is extracted and stored in the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 (S12008). Further, in the process of S12008, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223d is set. After the processing of S12008 is completed, the process returns to the main processing.

Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize) or when a special symbol lottery is performed. Therefore, every time a start winning prize is detected, or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 is set by the processing of S12008 in the main control device 110. It can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d. Therefore, even if the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the starting prize is won. At the time of detection or lottery of a special symbol, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 may be corrected to match the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d of the main control device 110. can. When the process of S12008 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S12007, if the reserved ball number command has not been received (S12007: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S12009). When it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S12009: Yes), the winning information based on the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223b (S12010), and then the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, in the process of S12009, when it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S12009: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning-related command has been received (S12011), and the winning-related command is received. If it is determined that the command has been performed (S12011: Yes), the hit-related process 7 is executed (S12012), and this process is terminated. In this hit-related process 7 (S12012), the third symbol display device 81 is made to execute the effect display corresponding to the big hit game or the small hit game that is executed when the big hit or the small hit is won as a result of the lottery of the special symbol. This is to perform processing for the purpose, and processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 when a big hit or a small hit is won is executed.

Here, the contents of the hit-related process 7 (S12012) will be described with reference to FIG. 227. FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit-related process 7 in the seventh embodiment. When this hit-related process (S12012) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot start command has been received (S12101). When it is determined that the jackpot start command has been received (S12101: Yes), the jackpot start command for display is set (S12102), and this process ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 225) executed by the MPU 221 in the seventh embodiment. ), It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S12101: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S12103). When it is determined that the round number command has been received in the process of S12103 (S12103: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the number of rounds (S12104), and this process ends. In the seventh embodiment, since the information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted from the main control unit 110 as the number of rounds command, the number of rounds command for display is set based on the received number of rounds command. , In order to reduce the amount of command data transmitted from the main control unit 110, when the configuration is such that information for indicating that a new round has been started from the main control unit 110 is transmitted as a round update command, voice is used. When a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of the lamp control device 113, a round number storage counter for accumulating the number of received round update commands is provided, and the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the value of the round number storage counter. It may be configured to calculate the current number of rounds and set a display round number command.

In the process of S12103, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S12103: No), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot end command has been received (S12105). When it is determined that the jackpot end command has been received in the process of S12105 (S12105: Yes), the display jackpot end command is set (S12106), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S12105 that the big hit end command has not been received (S12105: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit start command has been received (S12107).

If it is determined in the process of S12107 that the small hit start command has been received (S12107: Yes), the small hit start process is executed (S12108), and this process ends. Further, the details of this small hit start process (S12108) will be described later with reference to FIG. 228.

Here, the contents of the small hit start process (S12108) will be described with reference to FIG. 228. FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit start process in the seventh embodiment. When this small hit start process (S12108) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the long variation flag 223fg provided in the RAM 223 is on (S12201), and it is determined that the long variation flag 223fg is on. In the case (S12201: Yes), the value of the delay passage state flag 223ff is read out (S12202). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the delayed passage state flag 223ff is "01" (S12203). In the process of S12203, when it is determined that the value of the delay passage state flag 223ff is "01" (S12203: Yes), a small hit start command for display indicating a small hit with a high V expectation is set (S12204). After that, the process returns to the hit-related process 7.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the length variation flag 223fg is not on in the processing of S12201 (S12201: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S12205. Further, even when it is determined in the process of S12203 that the value of the delay passage state flag 223ff is not "01" (S12203: No), the process proceeds to the process of S12205.

In the process of S12205, a display small hit start command indicating a normal small hit is set (S12205), and then the process returns to the hit-related process 7.

Returning to FIG. 227, the explanation will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S12107 that the small hit start command has not been received (S12107: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit end command has been received (S12109). In the process of S12109, if it is determined that the small hit end command has been received (S12109: Yes), a display small hit end command is set (S12110) in order to execute an effect suggesting the end of the small hit game. This process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S12109, when it is determined that the small hit end command has not been received (S12109: No), it is determined whether or not the V inlet passage command has been received (S12111). If it is determined that the V entrance passage command has been received in the processing of S12111 (S12111: Yes), the display V entrance passage command is set (S12112), and this processing is terminated. Further, in the process of S12111, when it is determined that the V entrance passage command has not been received (S12111: No), it is determined whether the V passage command has been received next (S12113).

In the process of S12113, when it is determined that the V passing command has been received (S12113: Yes), a display V effect command for showing an effect based on the ball entering the V switch 650e3 of the V winning device 650 is set (S12113: Yes). S12114), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S12113 that the V passage command has not been received (S12113: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Returning to FIG. 226, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S12011, if it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S12011: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop command has been received (S12013). When it is determined that the stop command has been received (S12013: Yes), the stop display of the third symbol is set (S12014), and then it is determined whether or not the long variation flag 223fg is on (S12015). If it is determined that the long variation flag 223fg is on (S12015: Yes), the long variation flag 223fg is set to off (S12016), and then the process returns to the main process. If it is determined in the process of S12015 that the length variation flag 223fg is not on (S12015: No), the process of S12016 is not executed and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop command has not been received in the process of S12013 (S12013: No), then it is determined whether or not the time saving effect-related command has been received (S12017). If it is determined that the time saving effect-related command has been received (S12017: Yes), the time saving effect-related process is executed (S12018), and then the process returns to the main process. The details of the time saving effect-related processing (S12018) will be described later with reference to FIG. 229. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving effect-related command has not been received in the process of S12017 (S12017: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S12019), and then the process returns to the main process.

Next, the contents of the time saving effect-related processing (S12018) will be described with reference to FIG. 229. FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving effect-related processing (S12018). The time saving effect-related process (S12018) is a process executed in the command determination process 7 (see FIG. 226) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment.

When the time saving effect-related processing (S12018) is executed, first, the gaming state stored in the game state storage area 223fe is read (S12301), and then it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state (S12302). ). If it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state (S12302: No), this processing is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the command determination processing 7 (S4182 in FIG. 226).

On the other hand, in the process of S12302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S12302: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the command per normal figure is received (S12303), and the normal symbol is used. If it is determined that the hit command has been received (S12303: Yes), the current normal figure hit type is analyzed based on the received normal figure hit command (S12304), and the time saving effect corresponding to the normal figure hit type is executed. The display time saving effect start command for this is set (S12305), the middle flag 223fi is set to ON (S12306), and then the process returns to the command determination process 7.

On the other hand, in the process of S12303, when it is determined that the command per normal figure has not been received (S12303: No), then it is determined whether or not the second ball entry command has been received (S12307). When it is determined that the second ball entry command has been received (S12307: Yes), the second ball entry flag 223fh is set to ON (S12308), and the display effect command for updating the time saving effect is set (S12309). After that, the process returns to the command determination process 7.

On the other hand, in the process of S12307, when it is determined that the second ball entry command has not been received (S12307: No), then it is determined whether or not the end command has been received (S12310). If it is determined that the normal map per end command has been received (S12310: Yes), the normal map per end process is executed (S12311), and then the process returns to the command determination process 7. If it is determined that the end command has not been received in the process of S12310 (S12310: No), the process returns to the command determination process 7 as it is. Further, the details of the end-time processing (S12311) per drawing will be described later with reference to FIG. 230.

Next, the contents of the end-time processing (S12311) per drawing will be described with reference to FIG. 230. FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing the contents of the end processing (S12311) per normal figure. The end-of-life processing (S12311) is a processing executed in the time saving effect-related processing (see FIG. 229) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment.

When the end-of-life processing (S12311) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the second entry flag 223fh is on (S12401). If it is determined that the second entry flag 223fh is on (S12401: Yes), the second entry flag 223fh is set to off (S12402), and the process proceeds to S12404. If it is determined that the second ball entry flag 223fh is not on (S12401: No), a display effect command for ending the time saving effect is set (S12403), and the process proceeds to S12404.

In the process of S12404, the middle flag 223fi is set to off (S12404), and then this process is terminated and the process returns to the time saving effect-related process (S12018 in FIG. 229).

Next, with reference to FIG. 231, the variation display setting process 7 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 231 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process 7 (S4183). This variation display setting process 7 (S4183) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 225) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment, and the variation effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81. Is generated and set as a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the variation display setting process 7 (S4183), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation start flag 223fa1 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5101). Then, when it is determined that the variation start flag fa1 in FIG. 1 is not on (that is, is off) (S5101: No), the variation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so that the variation pattern command is not received from S5107. Move to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag fa1 is on (S5101: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag fa1 is set to off (S5102), and then the display control device 114 is notified. A display variation pattern command is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S5181). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started. When the processing of S5181 is completed, the data in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S5182), and the process shifts to the processing of S5107.

In the process of S5107, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag fa2 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5107). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag fa2 is not on (that is, it is off) (S5107: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so that the fluctuation pattern command is not received from S5111. Move to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag fa2 is on (S5107: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag fa2 is set to off (S5108), and then the fluctuation display setting process 7 for the special figure 2 is set. Is executed (S5183). The details of the variation display setting process 7 (S5183) for the special figure 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. 232. When the processing of S5183 is completed, the data corresponding to the second special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S5110), and the process shifts to the processing of S5111.

In the process of S5111, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag fb1 or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag fb2 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5111). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag fa1 or the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag fa2 is not on (that is, is off) (S5111: No), the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. Since there is no state, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag fa1 or the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag fa2 is on (S5111: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag fa1 or the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag fa2 is set to off. Then, the display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command is set based on the stop type extracted from the command (S5113), and then this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 232, the variation display setting process 7 (S5183) for special figure 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 232 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process 7 (S5183) for the special figure 2. The variation display setting process 7 (S5183) for the special figure 2 is a process executed in the variation display setting process 7 (see FIG. 231) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment. be.

In the variation display setting process 7 (S5183) for the special figure 2, first, the game state stored in the game state storage area 223fe provided in the RAM 223 is read (S12501), and then the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol. It is determined whether or not it is (S12502). When it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S12502: No), the corresponding display variation pattern command is set (S12510), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S12502, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S12502: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a big hit (S12503). If it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S12503: Yes), a display variation pattern command corresponding to the big hit is set (S12504), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S12503, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a big hit (S12503: No), then it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a small hit (S12505). If it is determined that the lottery result is not a small hit (S12505: No), a variation pattern command indicating the end of the time saving effect is set (S12506), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S12505, when it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S12505: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the small hit is a long variation (S12507). When it is determined that the variation pattern of the small hit is a long variation (S12507: Yes), the long variation flag 223fg is set to ON (S12508), and the process proceeds to S12509. On the other hand, in the process of S12507, if it is determined that the variation pattern of the small hit is not a long variation (S12507: No), the process of S12508 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S12509.

In the process of S12509, a display variation pattern command corresponding to a small hit is set (S12509), and then this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 233, the ball passage monitoring process (S4184) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing this ball passage monitoring process (S4184). This ball passage monitoring process (S4184) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 225) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment, and the variation effect is produced in the third symbol display device 81. In order to execute the command, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

In the ball passage monitoring process (S4184), first, it is determined whether or not the delayed passage entry switch (not shown) is on (S12601). When it is determined that the delayed passage entry switch is on (S12601: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the middle flag 223fi provided in the RAM 223 is on (S12602). If it is determined that the middle flag 223fi is not on (that is, it is off) per normal figure (S12602: No), the process proceeds to S12611.

In the process of S12602, when it is determined that the middle flag 223fi is on (S12602: Yes), the value of the delayed passage state flag 223ff is read out (S12603), and then the value of the delayed passage state flag 223ff is ". It is determined whether or not it is "00" (S12604). When it is determined that the value of the delayed passage state flag 223ff is "00" (S12604: Yes), the value of the delayed passage state flag 223ff is set to "01" (S12605), and the process proceeds to S12610. If it is determined in the process of S12604 that the value of the delay passage state flag 223ff is not 00 (S12604: No), the process of S12605 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S12610.

On the other hand, in the process of S12601, if it is determined that the delayed passage entry switch is not on (that is, it is off) (S12601: No), then whether or not the delayed passage discharge switch (not shown) is on. (S12606). If it is determined that the delayed passage discharge switch is not on (that is, it is off) (S12606: No), this process is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the delayed passage discharge switch is on (S12606: Yes), the value of the delayed passage state flag 223ff is read (S12607), and then whether or not the value of the delayed passage state flag 223ff is "01". Is determined (S12608). It is determined that the value of the delayed passage state flag 223ff is "01" (S12608: Yes), the value of the delayed passage state flag 223ff is set to "02" (S12609), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S12608 that the value of the delayed passage state flag 223ff is not "01" (S12608: No), the process proceeds to the process of S12610. In the process of S12610, a value corresponding to the delay passage state flag 223ff is set (S12610), an error command is set (S12611), and then this process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a specific area 650V is provided in the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 opened during the small hit game, and the ball sets the specific area 650V during the small hit game. It is configured so that a big hit (so-called per 2 types) game is executed by passing through.

In addition, as a path for the ball to flow down toward the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 opened during the small hit game, the first flow path ta (see FIG. 196) in which the ball is difficult to pass through the specific region 650V. ) And a second flow path tb (see FIG. 196) in which the sphere easily passes through the specific region 650V. As a result, the player pays close attention to which flow path the ball flows down during the small hit game. Therefore, since the player can be interested in the movement of the ball flowing down on the game board 13, the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the ball is distributed to the above-mentioned first flow path ta or the second flow path tb by the opening / closing operation of the electric accessory 3640a, so that the operation of the electric accessory 3640a It is also possible to make the player interested in. Further, when the ball flows down the second flow path tb which easily passes through the specific region 650V, the ease of winning the ball in the V winning device 650 is configured to be different according to the fluctuation time of the special symbol. ing.

Further, the change time of the special symbol to be set is configured to be different depending on the set game state and the winning small hit type. With this configuration, when a small hit corresponding to a big hit that is given a time saving state after the big hit game is won, the game state (advantageous time saving) that makes it easier for the ball to pass through the specific area 650V and the big hit end. When a small hit corresponding to a big hit to which a time saving state is given later is won, a gaming state (unfavorable time saving) that makes it easy for the ball to pass through the specific area 650V can be set.

Then, in the present embodiment, by using the above-mentioned advantageous time saving and disadvantageous time saving configurations, once a big hit is won (first hit), at least three big hits including the first hit are executed. It is configured so that the gaming state favorable to the player continues. By making it possible to set a game state in which it is guaranteed that the jackpot game is executed a plurality of times in this way, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the ball is configured to win a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the ball goes to the second entrance 3640, which is an opportunity to execute the lottery of the second special symbol. The electric accessory 3640a is configured to operate so that the ball can be easily entered. Then, the electric accessory 3640a shifts to the closed state based on the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 3640a entering the second entry port 3640, and at that time, it flows down on the electric accessory 3640a. The ball is configured to be distributed to the first flow path ta and the second flow path tb according to the position (upstream side, downstream side) where the ball has flowed down.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the ball located on the downstream side of the ball flow path on the electric accessory 3640a is configured to be distributed to the second flow path tb which is advantageous to the player, and continuously. When the ball is launched, it is configured so that the ball can easily flow into the second flow path tb.

Therefore, in order to allow the ball to flow into the second flow path tb while the lottery for the second special symbol is being executed, it is necessary to continuously shoot the ball toward the game area of the game board 13. .. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an act of obtaining an advantageous result by firing the ball at a predetermined timing.

In the seventh embodiment, a ball flowing down the second flow path tb, that is, a ball distributed to a flow path advantageous to the player by the opening operation of the electric accessory 3640a, is directed toward the V winning device 650. Although it is configured to flow down, it may be configured so that a ball that has flowed down a flow path that is advantageous to the player can enter the general entry port 63. As a result, many prize balls can be provided to the player.

Further, a valve member that can be changed into a first state in which the ball can pass through the specific area 650V and a second state in which it is difficult to pass is provided in the V winning device 650, and the V winning is obtained when the valve member is in the first state. The variable time for winning the device 650 and the variable time for winning the V winning device 650 in the second state may be changed according to the set time saving state.

Further, instead of the V winning device 650, a V attacker that is opened during the jackpot game is provided, and a probabilistic state (high probability state of a special symbol) is given by the ball passing through a specific area in the V attacker. It may be applied to the pachinko machine 10.

<8th Embodiment>
Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 234 to 259. In the first embodiment described above, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (in parallel), and the game state is set. When the latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set, it is easy to execute the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol, and it is based on the lottery result of the second special symbol. It was configured to generate small hit games frequently.

In this way, when the latent state is set as the game state, that is, in the low probability state of the normal symbol, in order to frequently generate the small hit game in the lottery of the second special symbol, the low probability state of the normal symbol is also obtained. It was necessary to use a configuration in which the lottery of the second special symbol could be easily executed even in the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) in which is set. Further, in order to prevent the lottery of the second special symbol from being frequently executed in the normal state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol set in the normal state is long (for example, 10 minutes). It was necessary to set a fluctuation pattern.

In this way, if the second special symbol whose lottery is easily executed is configured to execute a long fluctuation time, the player mistakenly executes the lottery of the second special symbol. , The next special symbol lottery is not executed until the fluctuation pattern is completed, which hinders the game. Therefore, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, the first special symbol lottery (variation) and the first It was configured so that the lottery (variation) of 2 special symbols could be executed at the same time (in parallel).

On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, the execution trigger of the second special symbol is during the big hit game or during the small hit game executed in the low probability state (normal state, latent state) of the normal symbol. It is configured so that the ball can (easily) enter the second entry port 640. As a result, the lottery of the second special symbol can be prevented from being executed unless the winning game (big hit game, small hit game) is executed. Therefore, as in the first embodiment described above, the lottery of the first special symbol is performed. Even if you do not use a configuration that executes (variation) and lottery (variation) of the second special symbol at the same time (in parallel), a small hit game based on the lottery of the second special symbol only during the latent state. Can be generated frequently. Therefore, the control process of the gaming machine can be simplified.

Furthermore, depending on the type of winning (big hit, small hit), it is possible to set a hit type in which the ball easily enters the second entry port 640 and a hit type in which it is difficult to enter. If you win a hit (big hit, small hit), not only the size of the privilege (number of prize balls) that can be obtained during the winning game, but also the ball enters the second entrance 640 during the winning game. It is possible to make the player interested in whether or not.

In addition, in the eighth embodiment, the ball enters the second entrance 640 depending on whether the player wins in the lottery of the first special symbol or wins in the lottery of the second special symbol. It is configured so that the ratio of easy-to-use hit types is set differently. Specifically, it is easier to set the hit type in which the ball is more likely to enter the second entrance 640 when the second special symbol is won than when the first special symbol is won. It is composed.

With this configuration, once the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) has been transferred to a state in which the lottery can be executed, the lottery for the special figure 2 can be continued and easily executed. Even though the advantageous game mode advantageous to the player (mode in which the lottery of Special Figure 2 can be executed) is set, the advantageous game mode is immediately terminated, which causes discomfort to the player. Can be suppressed.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to have a higher probability of winning (big hit, small hit) than the lottery of the first special symbol. Specifically, in the lottery of the first special symbol, only the big hit (1/400 at low probability) is set without winning the small hit, whereas in the lottery of the second special symbol, the big hit is won. The probability of (1/400 at low probability) is the same as the above-mentioned first special symbol, but it is set to win a small hit (300/400). As described above, in the eighth embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol is set so that the probability of winning the small hit is higher in the lottery of the second special symbol than in the lottery of the first special symbol. The lottery of the second special symbol is configured so that it is easier to win a win (big hit, small hit) than.

As a result, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640, it is possible to win a hit (big hit, small hit) with a high probability. The winning game based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be frequently executed in a short period of time.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, it is configured so that the winning game in which the ball is easily entered into the second entrance 640 is executed with a higher probability when the small hit is won than when the big hit is won. is doing. As a result, when a small hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, it is possible to easily execute the lottery of the second special symbol again after the winning game is completed.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the right to execute the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2 hold) is configured to be able to store a plurality (4 pieces) (hold memory) according to the winning type. Therefore, the opening operation pattern of the winning game is defined so that the number of cards that can be held and stored during one winning game is different.

With such a configuration, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game in order to secure more reserved memory by one hit game. Here, in the eighth embodiment, the second opening / closing door 3650f attached to the second attacker 3650, which is opened in the hit game, is opened (a state in which the ball can be guided to the second specific winning opening 3650a). A flow path in which a part of the ball spilled from the second opening / closing door 3650f can enter the second entry port 640 when the ball is changed to the closed state (the state in which the ball cannot be guided to the second specific winning opening 3650a). It is configured to pass through. In this way, the ball that could not enter the second attacker 3650, which is opened during the hit game, can enter the second entry port 640, so that the ball can enter the second attacker 3650 during the hit game. 2 The player can be made to pay close attention to the movement of the ball to be entered into the specific winning opening 3650a and the movement of the ball to be entered into the second entry opening 640.

Here, the configuration of the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 234. FIG. 234 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 234, the eighth embodiment is different from the configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above in that the structure of the right side region of the game board 13 is significantly different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 234, a first attacker (variable winning device) 650a is provided above the right side region of the game board 13, and a second attacker 3650 is provided at a substantially central position in the right side region. A point, a point where a guide passage 3660 is provided below the second attacker 3650, and a point where a second entry port 640 with an electric accessory 640a is provided at a position where the outlet of the guide passage 3660 faces. , Is very different. Other configurations are the same as those of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) of the first embodiment described above, and the same configurations are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 234, a ball flow during a right-handed game in the gaming machine of the present embodiment will be briefly described. During normal times (except during the game when the second attacker 3650 is opened), the ball launched toward the right area of the game board 13 by the right-handed game has the open / close door 3650f in the closed state (buried state). It passes through and flows down to enter the general entrance 63 while passing through the game area on the right side of the guidance passage 3660.

The general entrance 63 (general entrance 63 arranged on the right side of the second entrance 640) is provided with one prize ball as a privilege given when the ball enters. There is. Therefore, even if the right-handed game is performed in the normal state, the number of balls does not increase.

On the other hand, during the hit game in which the second attacker 3650 is opened, the opening / closing door 3650f is in an open state (protruding state), that is, a state in which a ball can flow down on the opening / closing door 3650f toward the second specific winning opening 3650a. In the case of, the ball fired by the right-handed game flows down on the opening / closing door 3650f and wins a prize in the second specific winning opening 3650a. Then, the closing condition of the second attacker 3650 (the elapse of the predetermined opening period or the number of balls winning the second specific winning opening 3650a reaches the predetermined upper limit winning number) is satisfied, and the opening / closing door 3650f is satisfied. Is configured to flow into the guide passage 3660 when the ball flowing down the downstream side of the opening / closing door 3650f is changed to the closed state (buried state).

That is, in the eighth embodiment, even if the right-handed game is performed in the normal time (except during the hit game in which the second attacker 3650 is opened), the ball flow path capable of entering the second ball entry port 640. It is configured so that the sphere does not flow down in the guide passage 3660 in which the ball is formed. With this configuration, unless the second attacker 3650 is opened by the winning game, the ball that has flowed down in the guidance passage 3660 will not enter the second entrance 640, so that the second special symbol is drawn. Can be limited in time.

Further, a through gate 67 is arranged between the opening / closing door 3650f and the inlet of the guide passage 3660 so that the ball flowing into the guide passage 3660 passes through the through gate 67 and then flows into the guide passage 3660. It is configured in. The guide passage 3660 is configured so that the period required for the sphere to flow down the guide passage is about 2.5 seconds. In this way, the ball flowing down the flow path that can enter the second entry port 640 is configured to always pass through the through gate 67, and reaches the second entry port 640 from the through gate 67. By configuring the time to be constant (about 2.5 seconds), whether the ball passing through the guidance passage 3660 enters the second entrance 640 according to the set fluctuation time of the normal symbol. Whether or not it can be easily changed.

Here, in the eighth embodiment, the fluctuation time of the set normal symbol is different depending on the set gaming state. Specifically, a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is set in the low probability state (normal state, latent state) of the normal symbol, and a fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds is set in the high probability state (time saving state, probability variation state) of the normal symbol. Is configured to be set. As a result, when the ball passes through the guidance passage 3660 when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the ball easily enters the second entry port 640, and the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. When the ball passes through the guidance passage 3660 when it is set, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the second entry port 640.

Next, with reference to FIG. 235, the configuration of the opening / closing door 3650f of the second attacker 3650 according to the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 235 (a) is a plan view schematically showing the opening / closing door 3650f in the open state (protruding state), and FIG. 235 (b) shows the opening / closing in the closed state (buried state). It is a top view which shows the door 3650f schematically. As shown in FIG. 235 (a), the opening / closing door 3650f of the present embodiment is formed from the upper right upper surface 3650y1 of the opening / closing door 3650f to the upper surface 3650f1 of the opening / closing door 3650f along the inclination of the opening / closing door 3650f (see FIG. 234). It is configured to flow out toward the second specific winning opening 3650a.

A first delay member 3650fa, a second delay member 3650fb, and a third delay member 3650fc are provided so that the ball meanders on the upper surface 3650f1 of the opening / closing door 3650f, and the flow period during which the ball flows down the opening / closing door 3650f is 1. It is configured to be .2 seconds. This flow period (1.2 seconds) is shorter than the period (1.5 seconds) for maintaining the open state when the second attacker 3650 is opened by the hit game (big hit B, big hit C, small hit). It is configured to be. With this configuration, the ball can be won in the second specific winning opening 3650a in the hit game in which the second attacker 3650 is opened.

In this embodiment, when the hit game in which the second attacker 3650 is opened is executed, the opening operation scenario is set so that the ball can win the second specific winning opening 3650a in all the hit games. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, as an opening operation scenario set during a winning game, an opening operation scenario in which a ball easily wins a prize in the second specific winning opening 3650a and an opening operation scenario in which the ball flows into the guidance passage 3660. It may be configured to set an easy open operation scenario.

In this case, for example, as an opening operation scenario of the second attacker 3650, a period (for example, 0. It is preferable to specify the opening operation scenario so that 5 seconds) is a period during which the opening / closing door 3650f is maintained in the open state when the opening operation is performed. When the opening operation scenario defined in this way is set, it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the second specific winning opening 3650a during the winning game, and the ball flowing down the upper surface 3650f1 of the opening / closing door 3650f flows into the guidance passage 3660. It becomes easier to do.

Thereby, for example, when the upper limit number of balls to win the second specific winning opening 3650a and the opening upper limit period of the opening / closing door 3650f are set as the end condition of the winning game, the second specific winning opening 3650a Since the opening operation that makes it difficult for the ball to win a prize is executed, the winning game can be continued for a long period of time. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of balls flowing into the guide passage 3660 during one hit game, and it is possible to acquire more special figure 2 hold memory.

Next, when the closing condition of the opening / closing door 3650f is satisfied, the state shown in FIG. 235 (a) is changed to the closed state (buried state) shown in FIG. 235 (b). In this state, the ball located at the downstream position ZD passes through the through gate 67, and the ball located at the upstream position ZC also passes through the right side region of the guide passage 3660.

As described above, in the eighth embodiment, the time for the upper surface sphere of the opening / closing door 3650f to flow down is 1.2 seconds (upstream position ZC is 0.5 seconds, downstream position ZD is 0.7 seconds). The opening / closing door 3650f is configured to be opened for 1.5 seconds in one small hit game. As a result, when the ball that has flowed down first wins the second attacker 3650 and is detected by the detection switch 3650Z, the next ball can be positioned at the downstream position ZD. Therefore, when the small hit game is executed, the ball can be reliably passed through the guidance passage 3660.

In addition, instead of the configuration of this embodiment, the following configuration may be used. That is, the position of the detection switch 3650Z for detecting the ball winning in the second attacker 3650 is positioned on the back side of the second attacker 3650 (the position of the modified example of FIG. 235), and from the opening of the second attacker 3650 to the detection switch 3650Z. The distance ZE may be configured so that it takes 0.3 seconds for the ball to pass. With this configuration, even if the distance of the opening / closing door 3650f is shortened, the ball that flows down next can be reliably positioned at the downstream position ZD.

Furthermore, a plurality of opening patterns of the opening / closing door 3650f that are effective in the small hit game are prepared, and a small hit game in which the opening period during which the ball can pass through the through gate 67 is set is possible without winning the second attacker 3650. It may be configured in. That is, it is possible to execute the game for making the second attacker 3650 win the ball and the game for acquiring the reserved memory of the special figure 2 by using the small hit game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 236 and 237, the ball flow in the right region of the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 236 is a schematic diagram showing the ball flow when the second attacker 3650 is in the open state (protruding state), and FIG. 237 is a sphere when the second attacker 3650 is in the closed state (buried state). It is a schematic diagram which showed the flow.

As shown in FIG. 236, when the opening / closing door 3650f is in the open state (protruding state), all the balls launched by the right-handed game are received by the opening / closing door 3650f (the right area of the game board 13). The opening / closing door 3650f is arranged so as to shield the door. With this configuration, when the hit game in which the second attacker 3650 is opened is executed, the ball can be easily won in the second specific winning opening 3650a simply by performing the right-handed game.

When the opening / closing door 3650f is located in the open state (protruding state), the opening / closing door 3650f shields the inflow port of the guide passage 3660 so that the ball cannot flow into the guide passage 3660 (difficult). It is configured in. That is, in the eighth embodiment, the opening / closing door 3650f, which is opened by the hit game, has a function for facilitating the winning of the ball into the second specific winning opening 3650a, and regulates the flow of the ball into the guidance passage 3660. It is used as a means to have a function for.

Next, when the opening / closing door 3650f is in the closed state (buried state), the ball launched into the right-handed area in the right-handed game flows down the area on the right side of the guidance passage 3660 (see the arrow in FIG. 237). .. Here, in the eighth embodiment, the ball that has flowed down the right-handed area by the right-handed game executed when the opening / closing door 3650f is in the closed state (buried state) cannot flow into the guide passage 3660 (difficulty). (To be).

Specifically, in the right side area of the game board 13, the nail K1 planted above the opening / closing door 3650f is planted below the opening / closing door 3650f to form the inflow port of the guide passage 3660. It is configured to be located on the right side (right side from the viewpoint of FIG. 237) by a distance Kz (about 10 mm) from the nail K2. Then, the distance between the nail K1 and the nail K2 in the height direction is configured to be one sphere (about 15 mm). With this configuration, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball that has flowed down the right side of the nail K1 due to the right-handed game from flowing into the inlet of the guide passage 3660 formed on the left side of the nail K2.

Further, regarding the arrangement position of the second specific winning opening 3650a in which the ball flowing down to the lower end of the opening / closing door 3650f can win a prize, the distance in the height direction is shorter than the distance in the width direction with the nail K1. Therefore, when the opening / closing door 3650f is in the closed state (buried state), the ball does not win in the second specific winning opening 3650a. In this embodiment, the opening operation of the opening / closing door 3650f is configured to change the state in which the ball can win the second specific winning opening 3650a and the state in which the ball cannot win (difficult). A configuration other than the above may be used. For example, a variable member that can be changed between an open position for opening the opening of the second specific winning opening 3650a and a closing position for closing the opening is provided with the second specific winning opening 3650a and the opening / closing door 3650f. The variable member may be variably controlled so as to be provided between the lower end portion of the flow and the variable member so as to be variable in synchronization with the opening operation of the opening / closing door 3650f.

In this case, for example, when the opening / closing door 3650f is in the closed state (buried state), that is, when the ball does not win the second specific winning opening 3650a, the variable member is variable so as to be located in the closed position. Controlled so that the variable portion is located in the open position when the opening / closing door 3650f is in the open state (protruding state), that is, in the state where the ball is allowed to win in the second specific winning opening 3650a. Variable control is good. As a result, it is possible to more reliably prevent a situation in which the ball wins the second specific winning opening 3650a at an unintended timing.

Further, when the configuration of the above-mentioned example is used, it is preferable to use one drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) to drive the variable member and the open / close door 3650f. As a result, the two members can be easily driven with regularity. Further, it is preferable to delay the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing door 3650f by a grace period in consideration of the flow time of the ball so that the variable member can be changed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a ball that has flowed down to the downstream end of the opening / closing door 3650f from being unable to win a prize in the second specific winning opening 3650a due to the variable operation of the variable member.

Next, the ball flow when the opening / closing door 3650f is changed to the closed state (buried state) while the ball is flowing down the upper surface 3650f1 (see FIG. 235 (a)) of the opening / closing door 3650f will be described with reference to FIG. 237. do. As shown in FIG. 237, a nail K2 is planted below the opening / closing door 3650f and near the position of the downstream side 1/3 of the opening / closing door 3650f, and the flow differs between the right side and the left side of the nail K2. The road is formed. Therefore, the ball flowing down the range of the upstream side 2/3 of the opening / closing door 3650f flows down the area on the right side of the guide passage 3660 when the opening / closing door 3650f is changed to the closed state (buried state). On the other hand, the ball flowing down the range of the downstream side 1/3 of the opening / closing door 3650f passes through the through gate 67 when the opening / closing door 3650f is changed to the closed state (buried state), and the guide passage 3660. Inflow to.

The guide passage 3660 used in the eighth embodiment is formed in a meandering shape in order to lengthen the time (flow time) until the ball reaches the second entry port 640, and the inflow of the guide passage 3660. It is configured so that the time required for the ball to flow down the flow path ty from the position 3661a to the discharge position 3661b is about 2.5 seconds.

Then, when the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 and has flowed down the flow path ty reaches the second entry port 640, if the electric accessory 640a is open, the ball enters the second entry port 640 and is electrically operated. If the accessory 640a is closed, the ball does not enter the second entry port 640 and flows down toward the out opening 66.

In the present embodiment, the first attacker (variable winning device) 650a is provided above the right side region, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first attacker (variable winning device) 650a may be provided below the guidance passage 3660. As a result, the balls flowing down the plurality of flow paths can enter the first attacker (variable winning device) 650a at the same timing.

Further, a delay member for delaying the flow velocity of the ball may be provided on the lower surface of the ball flow of the guide passage 3660 used in the present embodiment.

<Regarding the content of the production in the eighth embodiment>
Next, the characteristic effects performed in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 238 to 241. In the eighth embodiment, the right of the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2 hold memory) is easily acquired during the period in which the hit game (big hit game, small hit game) is being executed. Therefore, the lottery for the second special symbol is configured so that it is easier to win a small hit than the lottery for the first special symbol. That is, in the state where the normal state is set, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed by the left-handed game, the jackpot is won, and when the jackpot game is started, the right-handed game is executed and the game is released in the jackpot game. A game in which the attacker to be operated (1st attacker 650a, 2nd attacker 3650) is made to win a ball to obtain a prize ball (privilege), and at the same time, the right to draw the second special symbol (special figure 2 hold memory) is acquired. Is done.

Then, when the special figure 2 hold memory is acquired during the winning game, the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed after the winning game is completed, and the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a big hit or a small hit. If so, the winning game is executed again. In the eighth embodiment, since the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to win a small hit with a high probability, once the lottery of the special figure 2 is executed, the lottery of the special figure 2 is repeatedly executed. It becomes a game state that is easy to play.

Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, an effect is executed to suggest to the player whether or not the lottery of the special figure 2 is executed (whether or not the lottery of the special figure 2 is shifted to a feasible state). It is configured to be done. As a result, the player can play the game while checking the content of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the hit game (the hit action in which the second attacker 3650 is opened) is executed, the special figure 2 hold memory can be acquired. Therefore, first, FIG. 238. As shown in (a), the effect of urging the acquisition of the special figure 2 hold memory is executed during the execution of the hit game (the hit operation in which the second attacker 3650 is opened). FIG. 238 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the jackpot game when the second attacker 3650 wins the jackpot C, which is the jackpot that is opened.

As shown in FIG. 238 (a), when the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot C is started, in order to guide the player to perform the right-handed game during the jackpot game, the guidance display area Dm3 is set to " Right-handed "is displayed. Then, in the main display area Dm, the effect that the character 811 collects the key 871 is executed. The key 871 is set in an effect mode so that the number corresponding to the number of reserved storages of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is collected, and the character 811 collects a large number of keys 871. This is to suggest (notify) to the player that the number of reserved memories in FIG. 2 is large.

Then, in the main display area Dm, a comment "Collect the treasure key" for explaining the game nature of the production is displayed. The details will be described later, but in the present embodiment, the key for acquiring the reserved memory of the special figure 2 during the big hit game (collecting the key 871) and collecting the lottery result of the special figure 2 executed after the big hit game is completed. The treasure box 873 (see FIG. 239) is opened by using 871, and the effect of notifying the player of the contents of the treasure box 873 is executed.

Further, in the lower position of the main display area Dm, an acquisition display area Dm12a in which a value related to the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game is additionally displayed and a round number display area Dm12b indicating the current number of round games are formed. .. In the example shown in FIG. 238 (a), since the jackpot game has just started, "0000" is displayed in the acquisition display area Dm12a, and the prize ball is not acquired during the jackpot game. Is shown. Then, "Round 1" is displayed in the round number display area Dm12b.

Further, in the production during the jackpot game, the acquired display areas Dm10a to Dm10d for notifying the player of the number of collected keys 871 are formed at the right position of the main display area Dm. In the effect executed in the present embodiment, one key 871 is collected for each acquisition of the reserved memory of the special figure 2, so that the acquired display areas Dm10a to Dm10d have a maximum. It is configured so that four keys 871 are displayed. The acquired display areas Dm10a to Dm10d are also display areas for showing the number of reserved balls in FIG.

Further, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "Continue to hit right" for showing the game content to the player is also displayed, and a second guidance display area formed below the guidance display area Dm3 is displayed. A diagram schematically showing the configuration near the second entrance 640 is displayed on the Dm11. As described above, in the present embodiment, since it is configured so that it is easier to acquire the hold memory of the special figure 2 by continuously firing the ball, other effects are performed so as not to provide a disadvantageous game to the player. A comment for showing the game content is displayed in a display mode (display mode in which the size of characters is increased) that is emphasized more than the display mode used in. As described above, by using the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds to explain in detail the game content aimed at during the jackpot game, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Then, after the display of FIG. 238 (a) is executed, the jackpot game is executed, and when the reserved memory of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is acquired, the effect content shown in FIG. 238 (b) is obtained. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 238 (b) is a schematic diagram showing a part of the effect content displayed when the ball enters the second entrance 640 during the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 238 (b), when a ball enters the second entrance 640 during the jackpot game, the ball enters the second entrance 640 in the main display area Dm (special feature). An effect indicating that the key 871 has been collected is executed as an effect for notifying the player (that the reserved memory of FIG. 2 has been acquired), and a comment of "Congratulations" is displayed.

Further, in the acquired display area Dm10a, the key 871 is displayed to indicate that one key 871 has been acquired. Further, in the second guide display area Dm11, a specific effect is displayed at a position imitating the second entry port 640 in order to visually notify the player that the ball has entered. Then, in the acquisition display area Dm12a, "00085" is displayed as the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game, and in the round number display area Dm12b, "2" indicating that the current is the second round is displayed. There is.

Then, when the jackpot game is completed, the screen shown in FIG. 239 (a) is displayed. FIG. 239 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed during the ending period of the jackpot game. During this ending period, the notification mode (display mode 872 indicating that two keys have been collected) for notifying the player of the total number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 acquired during the current jackpot game is the main display. In addition to being displayed in the area Dm, a comment of "continue right-handed" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds to indicate that the right-handed game is continued even after the jackpot game is completed.

Further, in order to allow the player to continuously perform the right-handed game even after the jackpot game is completed, as a display mode of the guide display area Dm3, a display mode of the guide display area Dm3 during the jackpot game (FIG. 238 (a). ) More emphasized display mode is set. As a result, it is possible to reliably notify the player that the right-handed game must be continued even after the jackpot game is completed.

After that, when the jackpot game ends and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed, the key 871 collected during the jackpot game is used as shown in FIG. 239 (b). The effect of opening the treasure chest 873 is executed. FIG. 239 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect executed when the special figure 2 variation is executed after the jackpot game is completed.

Since FIG. 239 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed, the fluctuation display indicating that the second special symbol (special figure 2) is being displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2. The aspect is displayed. Then, an effect using one of the two keys 871 (holding special figure 2) collected during the jackpot game is executed. Therefore, the number of keys 871 displayed in the acquired display areas Dm10a to Dm10d is reduced from two at the end of the jackpot to one.

In addition, while the continuous production is being executed from the big hit game, the acquisition display area Dm12a is always displayed, and when the small hit is won by the special figure 2 lottery, the second attacker 3650 is acquired by winning the ball. Information on the number of prize balls won is also displayed in addition. As a result, the number of balls acquired during the period (advantageous period) in which the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be executed can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, the round number display area Dm12b is also continuously displayed in the same manner as the acquisition display area Dm12a described above, and the characters “round extra” are displayed while the game based on the variation in FIG. 2 is being performed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the advantageous state is set to be extended even after the jackpot game is completed.

In the present embodiment, the character "Round Extra" is displayed for the game period in which the special figure 2 variation can be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the special figure 2 variation can be displayed. A totaling means is provided to add up the number of prize balls acquired during the feasible game period, and the total number of prize balls obtained by the totaling means is the prize balls that can be obtained in one round game executed during the jackpot game. When it is determined that the number has been reached, the number of rounds displayed during the big hit game may be added by 1, or the small hit won during the game period in which the special figure 2 fluctuation can be executed. A small hit number measuring means for measuring the number of times is provided, and when the number of small hits measured by the small hit number measuring means reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), the number of rounds displayed during the big hit game. May be configured to add 1 to.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the jackpot game is being executed for an extended period of time. Further, in this case, it is preferable to configure the key 871 to perform the effect of opening the treasure box 873 (see FIG. 239 (b)) even while the jackpot game is being executed. As a result, it becomes difficult to determine whether or not the current jackpot game is in progress from the executed effect, so that it is possible to prevent the player from easily predicting the previous game.

If a small hit is won while the effect shown in FIG. 239 (b) is being executed, the treasure box 873 is opened and the contents of the treasure box 873 are exposed as shown in FIG. 240. FIG. 240 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect content displayed when a small hit is won when the normal state is set as the game state.

In the present embodiment, when the low probability state (normal state, latent state) of the normal symbol is set as compared with the case where the high probability state (probability change state, time saving state) of the normal symbol is set as the game state. Is configured so that it is easier to acquire the special figure 2 hold memory during the small hit game. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 240 (a), since the small hit is won in the state where the normal state is set, it is shown that the small hit game in which the special figure 2 hold memory can be acquired is executed. "V" is displayed as a display mode of the contents of the treasure box 873.

In addition to "V", there are multiple display modes indicating the contents of the treasure box 873. For example, if the lottery result of special figure 2 is out of order, "x" is displayed, and the lottery result of special figure 2 is reserved for special figure 2. If it is a small hit that is difficult to acquire memory, a display mode imitating "?" Is set. In addition, a pre-discrimination process for preliminarily discriminating the winning information of the second special symbol stored on hold is executed, and the discrimination result of the pre-discrimination process is a big hit or a player in the hold information stored on hold. If it is a determination result indicating that there is a small hit that is advantageous to Using the display mode showing the lottery result of the special figure 2, the display mode suggesting that the big hit or the small hit that is advantageous to the player is included in the hold information stored in the hold is set. It may be configured.

Here, if a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player as a result of the variation in Special Figure 2, that is, a jackpot in which a high probability state (for example, a time saving state) of a normal symbol is set after the jackpot game is completed, FIG. 240 As shown in (b), a display mode imitating a "skull" is set as a display mode showing the contents of the treasure box 873.

Further, even if it is configured to change the display mode of the key 871 and the display mode of the treasure box 873 based on the lottery result of the special figure 2 executed this time and the preliminary determination result for the hold information stored on hold. At best, for example, as shown in FIG. 241 (a), a display mode (a rusted key and a tattered treasure chest) suggesting that the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order may be displayed. As a result, the player can predict the lottery result of this special symbol before opening the treasure box 873, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

After each of the effects shown in FIGS. 238 (a) to 241 (a) described above is repeatedly executed, when the key 871 disappears (when the reserved memory of the special figure 2 disappears), the advantageous period advantageous to the player ends. Therefore, the ending screen shown in FIG. 241 (b) is displayed. On this ending screen, a value indicating the number of prize balls acquired during this advantageous period (a period in which the jackpot game period and the special figure 2 variable period are fused) (value displayed in the acquisition display area Dm12a) and a small hit The number of times you have won is displayed. Then, the display mode of the guidance display area Dm3 for guiding the player to return the game method to the left-handed game is variably displayed in "left-handed", and "return to left-handed" in the sub-display area Ds. Display the comment.

In this embodiment, the display mode of the guidance display area Dm3 is changed so that the game method is switched from the right-handed game to the left-handed game at the timing when the reserved memory of the special figure 2 disappears, not at the transition timing of the game state. ing. That is, in the state where the time saving state is set as the game state, if there is a special figure 2 hold, the right-handed game is guided, and if there is no special figure 2 hold, the left-handed game is guided. ing. As a result, the player can play an appropriate game without playing a disadvantageous game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 242, the flow of transition of each gaming state in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 242 is a transition diagram showing the flow of transition of each gaming state in the seventh embodiment. In the seventh embodiment, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 244, there are five types of jackpots (big hits A to E) set when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and the second It has three types of jackpots (big hits F to H) that are set when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery.

Then, the jackpot type set at the time of winning the jackpot, the gaming state set at the time of winning the jackpot, and the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game are configured to be different. With such a configuration, it is possible to change each game state in a complicated manner in the game executed by the pachinko machine 10, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In addition, the quasi-advantageous gaming state is set by providing a gaming state (quasi-advantageous gaming state) that is easy to shift to the advantageous gaming state (latent probability state) that is most advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is difficult to shift to. If this is the case, the player can be made to continue playing the game, so that the operation of the game can be enhanced.

As shown in FIG. 242, at the time when the game is started by the pachinko machine 10, the game of drawing the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed in a state where the normal state is set as the game state. Then, when the jackpot of Special Figure 1 is won, the probability change state is set with a probability of 65% (big hit A, B win), the time saving state is set with a probability of 25% (big hit E win), and the probability of 10%. The normal state is set (big hit C, D wins).

If the jackpot C is won (5%), the second attacker 3650 operates in a part of the jackpot game, so that it is possible to acquire the hold memory of the special figure 2 during the jackpot game. ..

Therefore, among the cases where the jackpot whose normal state is set after the jackpot game is won, the jackpot D (5%) is executed again by the game in which the lottery of the special figure 1 is performed, and the jackpot C (5%) is the jackpot C (5%). The game of drawing the lottery of the special figure 2 is executed. Then, the special figure 2 wins a small hit with a probability of about 75%, and in the small hit game executed in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol, the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is stored during the small hit game. Since it is configured so that it can be acquired, when the lottery of the special figure 2 is executed in the normal state, the special figure 2 game can be continuously executed as long as the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is not extinguished. Become.

If the normal state is set as the game state and the jackpot is won in the lottery of Special Figure 2 to be executed, the probability change state is set with a 30% probability (big hit F win) and the probability is 35%. The latent state is set (big hit G win), and the time saving state is set with a 35% probability (big hit H win).

Next, when the probability change state is set, since the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is assumed that the small hit is won in the lottery of special figure 2 executed based on the hold storage of special figure 2. However, it is configured so that the new reserved memory of Special Figure 2 cannot be acquired (difficult) during the small hit game. Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, the probability variation state is a game state that is more advantageous than the time saving state because the jackpot winning probability of the special symbol is high, but the state having the hold memory of the special figure 2 is special. Even if a small hit is won in the lottery of FIG. 2, since the new reserved memory of the special figure 2 cannot be acquired, the gaming state is disadvantageous to the player.

In the state where the probability change state is set, if the jackpot is won in the lottery shown in Special Figure 1, the probability change state is set again with a 35% probability (big hit A win), and the latent probability state is set with a 30% probability (the probability of winning the jackpot A). Big hit B wins), a normal state is set with a 10% probability (big hits C and D wins), and a time saving state is set with a 25% probability (big hit E wins). Then, if the jackpot is won in the lottery of Special Figure 2, the probability change state is set again with a probability of 30% (big hit F win), the latent probability state is set with a probability of 35% (big hit G win), and 35%. The time saving state is set with probability (big hit H winning).

Next, when the latent probability state is set, since the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the small hit is won in the lottery of special figure 2 executed based on the hold storage of special figure 2. In this case, it is configured so that a new reserved memory of special figure 2 can be acquired during the small hit game. Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, the latent probability state is a state in which the probability of winning a big hit of a special symbol is high and the memory of holding the special figure 2 is held, and the small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery. Since the new reserved memory of Special Figure 2 can be acquired, the gaming state is most advantageous to the player.

If you win a big hit in the lottery shown in Special Figure 1 while the latent state is set, the latent state is set again with a probability of 65% (big hits A and B won), and the normal state is set with a probability of 10%. It is set (big hit C, D wins), and the time saving state is set with a 25% probability (big hit E wins). Then, when a big hit is won in the lottery of Special Figure 2, a probability change state is set with a probability of 65% (big hit F, G win), a latent state is set with a probability of 35% (big hit G win), and 35%. The time saving state is set with the probability of (big hit H winning).

Finally, when the time saving state is set, since the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is assumed that the small hit is won in the lottery of special figure 2 executed based on the hold storage of special figure 2. However, it is configured so that the new reserved memory of Special Figure 2 cannot be acquired (difficult) during the small hit game. Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, in the time saving state, the probability of winning the big hit of the special symbol is low, and in the state of having the hold memory of the special figure 2, even if the small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, it is new. Since the reserved memory of the special figure 2 cannot be acquired, the gaming state is most disadvantageous to the player.

If the jackpot is won in the lottery shown in Special Figure 1 in the state where the time saving state is set, the probability change state is set with a probability of 65% (big hit A and B wins), and the normal state is set with a probability of 10% (the jackpot A and B wins). (Big hit C, D win), the time saving state is set again with a 25% probability (Big hit E win). Then, if a jackpot is won in the lottery of Special Figure 2, a probability change state is set with a probability of 30% (big hit F win), a latent state is set with a probability of 35% (big hit G win), and a probability of 35%. The time saving state is set again with (Big hit H winning).

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the state where there is no hold memory of the special figure 2, the ball cannot be newly entered into the second entrance 640 regardless of the game state. ing. Further, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is configured so as not to change between the high-probability state and the low-probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, in the state where there is no hold memory of the special figure 2, even if the state of the normal symbol is changed, the advantage to the player does not change.

That is, in the state where the fluctuation (lottery) of the special symbol 1 is executed, the low probability state (normal state, time saving state) of the special symbol has the same degree of advantage, and the high probability state (probability variation state, latent state) of the special symbol. (Probability state) is a more advantageous gaming state than the low probability state of the special symbol because the jackpot probability of the special symbol is high.

Further, in the state where the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is present, the new reserved memory of the special figure 2 cannot be acquired in the high probability state of the normal symbol, so that the high probability state of the normal symbol (probability change state, time saving state). The low-probability state (normal state, latent state) of the normal symbol is more advantageous to the player than the normal symbol. Therefore, the most advantageous gaming state for the player is the latent state, and the most unfavorable gaming state is the time saving state.

Further, when the ratio of shifting to the most advantageous latent state for the player when the jackpot is won is explained, the ratio of the latent state set based on the lottery of Special Figure 1 is the most probable state. High (30%). Therefore, the probabilistic state becomes a quasi-advantageous gaming state in which the most advantageous advantageous gaming state (latent probability state) is likely to shift.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the eighth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 243 to 250. FIG. 243 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 243 (a), the ROM 202 of the eighth embodiment has a first random number 8 table 202ga, a first type selection 8 table 202gb, a second random number 8 table 202gc, and a variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd. , Has an operation scenario 8 table 202ge. It should be noted that the configuration (table) having the same name as the electrical configuration used in any of the above-described embodiments (the same name except for "8" attached to make it identifiable that it was used in the eighth embodiment). ) Is the same as each of the above-described embodiments in terms of its use, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 243 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 243 (a), the ROM 202 of the eighth embodiment has a first random number 8 table 202ga, a first type selection 8 table 202gb, a second random number 8 table 202gc, and a variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd. , Has an operation scenario 8 table 202ge. It should be noted that the configuration (table) having the same name as the electrical configuration used in any of the above-described embodiments (the same name except for "8" attached to make it identifiable that it was used in the eighth embodiment). ) Is the same as each of the above-described embodiments in terms of its use, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The first random number 8 table 202ga is a data table used for the same purpose as the first random number table 202a used in each of the above-described embodiments, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first hit. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the big hit set by the random number 8 table 202ga, it is determined as the big hit of the special symbol.

Further, in this first random number 8 table 202ga, the number of random numbers to be a big hit is defined to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but only the lottery of the second special symbol is a small hit. The value of is specified (see FIG. 243 (b)). In this way, by making the number of random numbers that are small hits different (setting only for one special symbol), the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are a privilege for the player ( Expectations for granting (big hit or small hit) can be different.

Here, the contents of the first random number 8 table 202ga will be described with reference to FIG. 243 (b). FIG. 243 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first random number 8 table 202ga. In this first random number 8 table 202ga, a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a big hit and a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a small hit are defined in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is a data table and is referred to when the lottery result is acquired in the special symbol change start processing 8 (see FIG. 252) (see S11003 and S11004 in FIG. 252).

The first random number 8 table 202ga (see FIG. 243 (b)) is a data table in which the correspondence between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the lottery result is defined. Specifically, in the low probability state of the special symbol, "0 to 1" is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be a big hit (see 202ga1 in FIG. 243 (b)), and it is determined that the first special symbol is out of order. “2 to 399” is defined as the range of determination values to be determined (see 202ga2 in FIG. 243 (b)).

Further, "2 to 99" is defined as a range of judgment values determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202ga2 in FIG. 243 (b)), and the determination value determined to be a small hit of the second special symbol. The range is defined as "100 to 399" (see 202ga3 in FIG. 243 (b)). Further, in the high probability state (probability change state) of the special symbol, "0 to 19" is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be a big hit (see 202ga4 in FIG. 243 (b)), and the first special symbol is out of alignment. “20 to 399” is defined as the range of determination values to be determined (see 202ga5 in FIG. 243 (b)). Further, "20 to 99" is defined as a judgment value for determining that the second special symbol is out of alignment (see 202ga5 in FIG. 243 (b)), and "100" is determined as a small hit for the second special symbol. ~ 399 ”is specified (see 202ga6 in FIG. 243 (b)).

When the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on the start winning matches with any of the judgment values corresponding to the jackpot specified in the first random number 8 table 202ga (see FIG. 243 (b)). In addition, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, and if it matches any of the determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 244, the contents of the first type selection 8 table 202 gb will be described. FIG. 244 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the first type selection 8 table 202 gb. In the eighth embodiment, there are five types of jackpots (big hit A to jackpot E) set when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and the second special symbol (special figure 2). There are three types of jackpots (big hit F to jackpot H) that are set when a jackpot is won in the lottery, and the open operation scenario (operation scenario) set during the jackpot game according to the jackpot type. , The game state set after the jackpot game is over is different.

Specifically, when the symbol type won by the jackpot is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the determination value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 34", the jackpot type is "big hit A". Is set. This "big hit A" is a 10-round probability variation big hit, and the operation A is set as an open operation scenario (operation scenario). The specific contents specified in the operation scenario will be described later using the operation scenario 8 table 202ge shown in FIG. 245.

Further, in this embodiment, it is stipulated that the game state set after the end of the big hit game differs depending on the game state at the time when the big hit is won. If the "big hit A" is won, the big hit is won. The game state of is a normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol), or time saving state (low probability of special symbol). If it is a state (high probability state of a normal symbol), a probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends, and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a latent state (high probability state of a special symbol, low probability state of a normal symbol). For example, it is stipulated that the probability state is set after the jackpot game is completed.

When the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is "35 to 64", "big hit B" is set as the jackpot type. This "big hit B" is a game in which the same big hit game as the above-mentioned "big hit A" is executed (a big hit game in which the operation A is set as an open operation scenario (operation scenario) in a 10-round probability variation jackpot). The game state set after the jackpot game ends is different.

Specifically, when the "big hit B" is won, the game state at the time of the big hit is the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) or the time saving state (low probability of the special symbol). If it is a state (high probability state of a normal symbol), a probabilistic state is set after the jackpot game ends, and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a probabilistic state (high probability state of a special symbol, high probability state of a normal symbol), or If it is a latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), it is stipulated that the latent state is set after the big hit game is completed.

In this way, by providing a jackpot type in which the game content (operation scenario) of the jackpot game is the same and the game state set after the jackpot game is different is provided, the jackpot is hit against the player who is executing the jackpot game. It is possible to prevent the game state set after the end of the game from being grasped in advance (by the time the jackpot game ends). Further, by making it difficult to predict the game state set after the jackpot game ends depending on the game content of the jackpot game, for example, a suggestion effect for suggesting the game state set after the jackpot game ends to the player is being performed during the jackpot game. It is advisable to provide a means for executing the suggestion effect. With this configuration, the player pays close attention to the suggestion effect executed by the suggestion effect execution means, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in this case, a suggestion effect setting for setting the effect mode of the suggestion effect executed during the jackpot game based on the game state set after the end of the jackpot game and the game content of the jackpot game is provided. It is good to configure it to. Specifically, the game content of the jackpot game and the game state set after the jackpot game is completed are ranked in the order that is advantageous to the player, and each rank corresponding to the jackpot type won this time is fused ( It is preferable to configure one of a plurality of staging modes to be set based on the added value (information). As a result, as the jackpot game progresses (as the game content of the jackpot game becomes clear), it becomes easier to predict the game state set after the jackpot game ends based on the effect mode of the suggestion effect to be executed. It is possible to have the player pay close attention to the suggestive effect for a long period of time during the jackpot game, and the effect of the effect can be further enhanced.

When the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is "65 to 69", "big hit C" is set as the jackpot type. This "big hit C" is a game in which a big hit game of 10 rounds is executed in the same manner as the above-mentioned "big hit A", but the contents of the set operation scenarios are different, and the first attacker 650 and the second attacker are different. It is a big hit in which the scenario of the operation B in which the game content for opening both of the 3650 is defined is set. Then, it is a normal jackpot in which a low probability of a special symbol is set as a gaming state after the jackpot game is completed.

Specifically, when the "big hit C" is won, the game state at the time of winning the big hit is the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol), the probabilistic state (high probability state of the special symbol, Normal symbol high probability state), time saving state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol high probability state), or latent state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol low probability state), that is, jackpot winning Regardless of the game state at that time, it is stipulated that the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends.

Next, when the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is "70 to 74", "big hit D" is set. In this "big hit D", the operation scenario of the operation A is set so that the game content of the big hit game is the same as the above-mentioned "big hit A". And, like the above-mentioned "big hit C", it is a normal big hit in which a low probability of a special symbol is set as a game state after the big hit game is completed.

Specifically, when the "big hit D" is won, the game state at the time of winning the big hit is the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol), the probabilistic state (high probability state of the special symbol, Normal symbol high probability state), time saving state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol high probability state), or latent state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol low probability state), that is, jackpot winning Regardless of the game state at that time, it is stipulated that the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends.

When the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is "75 to 99", "big hit E" is set. This "big hit E" is a game in which the same big hit game as the above-mentioned "big hit D" is executed (a big hit game in which the operation A is set as an open operation scenario (operation scenario) in a normal jackpot for 10 rounds). Only the game state set after the jackpot game ends is different from the "big hit D".

Specifically, when the "big hit E" is won, the game state at the time of winning the big hit is the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol), the probabilistic state (high probability state of the special symbol, Normal symbol high probability state), time saving state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol high probability state), or latent state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol low probability state), that is, jackpot winning Regardless of the game state at the time, it is stipulated that the time reduction state is set after the jackpot game ends.

On the other hand, when the symbol type won by the jackpot is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the determination value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 29", "big hit F" is set as the jackpot type. To. This "big hit F" is a big hit game with the same game content as the above-mentioned "big hit A", that is, a 10-round probability variation big hit, and the operation A is set as an open operation scenario (operation scenario). Then, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), probability change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol), time saving state (special symbol). Low probability state, high probability state of normal symbol) or latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), that is, probabilistic change after the end of the big hit game regardless of the game state at the time of winning the big hit. It stipulates that the state is set.

When the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is "30 to 64", "big hit G" is set. This "big hit G" is a two-round probability variable jackpot in which a two-round jackpot game is executed, and an operation scenario of operation C in which the game content for opening the second attacker 3650 is defined is set. When the "big hit G" is won, the game state at the time of winning the big hit is the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol), and the probabilistic state (high probability state of the special symbol, normal symbol). If it is a high-probability state) or a short-time state (low-probability state of special symbol, high-probability state of normal symbol), the latent state (high-probability state of special symbol, low-probability state of normal symbol) is set after the big hit game is completed. It is stipulated that if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a latent state, the probability change state is set after the jackpot game is completed.

Finally, when the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is "65 to 99", "big hit H" is set. This "big hit H" is a 10-round normal big hit in which the operation scenario of the operation A is set so that the big hit game having the same game content as the above-mentioned "big hit D" is executed. When the "big hit H" is won, the game state at the time of winning the big hit is the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol), and the probabilistic state (high probability state of the special symbol, normal symbol). High probability state), time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol), or latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), that is, the game at the time of big hit winning Regardless of the state, it is stipulated that the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends.

Here, in the present embodiment, in the state where the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed (the state where the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is secured), the low probability state (normal state, latent state) of the normal symbol Is configured so that it is possible to provide a game that is more advantageous to the player than when the high probability state (probability change state, time saving state) of the normal symbol is set.

Specifically, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, it is configured to win a small hit with a probability of about 75%, and if the small hit is won, the second attacker 3650 (opening / closing door 3650f) is configured. ) Is configured to open. Then, the second attacker 3650 is opened by the small hit game, so that a state in which the ball easily flows into the guide passage 3660 (see FIG. 243) through the through gate 67 is provided. When the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the fluctuation time (2 seconds) of the normal symbol suitable for the time until the ball passing through the through gate 67 reaches the second entry port 640 is set. Therefore, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is configured to easily enter the second entry port 640.

On the other hand, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (0.1) is shorter than the time until the ball passing through the through gate 67 reaches the second entry port 640. Seconds), specifically, a game per game (electric accessory 640a) executed based on the fact that the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 has passed through the through gate 67 by the time the ball has passed through the second entrance 640. The fluctuation time is set so short that the opening operation) is completed. Therefore, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is configured to be difficult to enter the second entry port 640.

With this configuration, the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol during the small hit game can be made different according to the game state set when the small hit is won. If a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set during the big hit game, so the second special regardless of the game state set when the big hit is won. It is possible to easily acquire the reserved memory of the symbol.

The operation scenario 8 table 202ge is a table that defines the operations of the first attacker 650 and the second attacker 3650 when the gaming state is a big hit or a small hit. The operation scenario 8 table 202ge defines the operation content and whether or not the special figure 2 hold acquisition during the operation is possible for each scenario type.

Here, the contents of the operation scenario 8 table 202ge will be described with reference to FIG. 245 (a). FIG. 245 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the operation scenario 8 table 202ge. The operation scenario 8 table 202ge defines a jackpot game in which the first attacker 650 is opened for 10 rounds when the jackpot is a jackpot and the scenario type is A. Therefore, when the scenario A is set, the second attacker 3650 is not opened, so that the reserved memory of the special figure 2 cannot be newly acquired during the jackpot game. Next, when the scenario type is B in the jackpot, the jackpot game in which the second attacker 3650 is released for 1 to 2 rounds and the first attacker 650 is released for 3 to 10 rounds is specified. There is. Therefore, when the scenario B is set, the second attacker 3650 is opened, so that the reserved memory of the special figure 2 can be newly acquired during the jackpot game.

Next, when the scenario type is C in the jackpot, the jackpot game in which the second attacker 3650 is opened for 1 to 2 rounds is specified. Therefore, when the scenario C is set, the second attacker 3650 is opened, so that the reserved memory of the special figure 2 can be newly acquired during the jackpot game. In the case of a small hit, the second attacker 3650 is opened for one round. Therefore, the reserved memory of the special figure 2 can be newly acquired during the small hit game.

Here, with reference to FIG. 245 (b), the contents of each scenario defined in the operation scenario 8 table 202ge will be described. FIG. 245 (b) is a diagram showing the contents of each scenario. As shown in FIG. 245 (b), when scenario A is set, 2 seconds is set as the opening period (OP period) of the jackpot game, and the first attacker 650 is set for 30 seconds or as one round game. It will be open until the number of winnings reaches 10. When one round game is completed, an interval period of 2 seconds is set, and a scenario in which the next round game is executed is set. Then, when the 10th round game is completed, 4 seconds is set as the ending period (ED period), and when the ending period elapses, the jackpot game ends.

When scenario B is set, 2 seconds is set as the opening period (OP period) of the jackpot game, and one round game is executed three times to open the second attacker 3650 for 1.5 seconds. It is set until the number of winnings reaches 3 balls. When one round game is completed, an interval period of 2 seconds is set, and a scenario in which the next round game is executed is set. Then, when the interval period after the second round game elapses, the first attacker 650 is released as the third round game for 30 seconds or until the number of winnings reaches 10. When the 10th round game is completed, 4 seconds is set as the ending period (ED period), and when the ending period elapses, the jackpot game ends.

When scenario C is set, 0.5 seconds is set as the opening period (OP period) of the jackpot game, and one round game is executed three times to open the second attacker 3650 for 1.5 seconds. Alternatively, it is set until the number of winnings reaches three. When one round game is completed, an interval period of 2 seconds is set, and a scenario in which the next round game is executed is set. Then, when the second round game is completed, 4 seconds is set as the ending period (ED period), and when the ending period elapses, the jackpot game ends.

In the scenario set during the small hit game, 0.5 seconds is set as the opening period (OP period) of the small hit game, and one round game opens the second attacker 3650 once for 1.5 seconds. It is executed or set until the number of winnings becomes one ball. When one round game is completed, 4 seconds is set as the ending period (ED period), and when the ending period elapses, the jackpot game ends.

As described above, in the eighth embodiment, a part of the big hit game (big hit B, big hit C) and the hit game for opening the second attacker 3650 in the small hit game are configured to be executed. There is. Therefore, the ball can be passed through the through gate 67 during the hit game, and the ball can be entered into the second entry port 640. Further, as shown in FIG. 245 (b), in the case of opening the second attacker 3650 in the big hit game, the number of times the second attacker 3650 is opened is larger than in the case of opening the second attacker 3650 in the small hit game. Since the number is set to be large, in one hit game, the big hit game can allow more balls to enter the second entrance 640 than the small hit game.

Further, as described above, in the eighth embodiment, when the high probability state (time saving state, probability variation state) of the normal symbol is set, even if the ball is passed through the through gate 67, the guide passage 3660 It is configured so that the ball that has flowed down cannot enter the second entrance 640 (it becomes difficult), and when a big hit game is executed, a low probability state of a normal symbol is set, and a small hit game is performed. When it is executed, the small hit game is configured to be executed in the game state at the time of winning the small hit. Therefore, the big hit game is a hit game in which it is easier to put the ball into the second entrance 640 than the small hit game.

The second random number 8 table 202 gc is a data table used for the same purpose as the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 15) used in each of the above-described embodiments, and is a value of the second random number counter C4. With reference to the second random number 8 table 202 gc, the presence or absence of a winning is determined.

Here, the contents of the second random number 8 table 202 gc will be described with reference to FIG. 246. FIG. 246 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the second random number 8 table 202 gc. The second random number 8 table 202 gc (see FIG. 246) is a data table in which the hit determination value of the normal symbol is defined (stored). Specifically, "0 to 237" is defined as a determination value for hitting the normal symbol in the normal state of the normal symbol (see 202 gc1 in FIG. 246). Further, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, "0 to 238" is defined as a determination value for hitting the normal symbol (see 202 gc3 in FIG. 246). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, refer to the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired based on the passage of the ball through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 and the second random number 8 table 202 gc. However, it is judged whether or not it is a hit of a normal symbol.

Further, "238,239" is defined as a determination value that is out of the normal symbol in the normal state of the normal symbol (see 202 gc2 in FIG. 246). Further, "239" is defined as a determination value that is out of the normal symbol in the high probability state of the normal symbol (see 202 gc4 in FIG. 246).

The variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd is a data table used for the same purpose as the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 14) used in each of the above-described embodiments. A fluctuation pattern in which different fluctuation times are set is defined according to the result of the lottery and the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd will be described with reference to FIGS. 247 and 248. FIG. 247 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd, and FIG. 248 (a) is defined in the normal / latent 8 table 202gd1 defined by the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents shown, and FIG. 248 (b) schematically shows the contents specified in the time saving / probability variation 8 table 202gd2 specified by the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd. It is a schematic diagram.

Here, the contents of the normal / latent 8 table 202gd1 will be described with reference to FIG. 248 (a). The normal / latent 8 table 202gd1 is a variation pattern table that is referred to when the normal state / latent state is set as the gaming state, and is a time saving / probability changing 8 table 202gd2 (time saving state) described later. , Or the fluctuation pattern table referred to when the probability variation state is set), it is easier to set the fluctuation time so that the ball can easily pass through the second entry port 640 or the second attacker 3650. The fluctuation time is specified as follows.

To specifically explain the contents specified in the normal / latent 8 table 202gd1, if the type of the special symbol is special figure 1 and the lottery result is out of order, the value of the acquired variable type counter CS1 is used. Regardless of the fluctuation pattern, if "off fluctuation" (variation time 30 to 120 seconds) is specified and the lottery result is a big hit, the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 99". As a fluctuation pattern, "per normal fluctuation" (variation time 30 seconds) is defined. On the other hand, "hit super fluctuation" (variation time 60 seconds) is defined for the range of "100 to 179", and "hit special fluctuation" (variation time) is defined as the fluctuation pattern for the range of "180 to 198". 120 seconds) is specified.

When the type of the special symbol is special figure 2 and the lottery result is out of order, "out-of-order variation" (variation time 5 seconds) is defined as the variation pattern regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. If the lottery result is a small hit, "small hit fluctuation" (variation time 5 seconds) is defined as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1, and if the lottery result is a win, it is acquired. Regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, "hit fluctuation" (variation time 5 seconds) is defined as the fluctuation pattern. That is, in the special figure 2 game in the normal / latent state, the fluctuation time is set to 5 seconds regardless of the lottery result.

Next, with reference to FIG. 248 (b), the contents specified in the time saving / probability variation 8 table 202gd2 will be specifically described. If the type of the special symbol is special figure 1 and the lottery result is out of order, the fluctuation pattern is "out of middle fluctuation" (variation time 30 to 60 milliseconds) regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1. If the lottery result is a big hit and the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 39", "hit normal fluctuation" (variation time 30 milliseconds) is defined as the fluctuation pattern. .. In the case of "40 to 119", "per super fluctuation" (variation time 60 milliseconds) is specified. In the case of "120 to 198", "hit special fluctuation" (variation time 120 milliseconds) is defined as the fluctuation pattern.

Then, when the type of the special symbol is special figure 2 and the lottery result is out of order, the variation pattern is "out-of-order short variation" (variation time 1 millisecond) regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. Is specified, and if the lottery result is a small hit, "small hit short fluctuation" (variation time 1 millisecond) is specified as a fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1, and the lottery result is a win. In this case, "hit short variation" (variation time 1 millisecond) is defined as the variation pattern regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. That is, in the special figure 2 game in the time saving state or the probable change state, the fluctuation time is set to 1 millisecond regardless of the lottery result.

Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 249. FIG. 249 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 249, the RAM 203 of the eighth embodiment has a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203ga, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, and a first special symbol holding ball. Number counter 203d, 2nd special symbol holding ball number counter 203gb, normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e, probability variation flag 203g, fluctuation time counter 203gc, big hit medium flag 203o, small hit medium flag 203p, round end flag 203gd, other memory area It has 203z. Since the configuration (flag, counter, area) having the same name as the electrical configuration used in any of the above-described embodiments is the same as each of the above-described embodiments in terms of its use, detailed description thereof will be omitted. ..

The other memory area 203z of the present embodiment has a data area capable of storing the currently set gaming state, and has a high probability state, a low probability state, or a high probability of a normal symbol of a special symbol. The state and the low-probability state can be memorized, and the condition until each state ends (shifts to another state) and the current status for the condition can be updated. Since the specific contents are the same as the control processing for the probability change flag, the probability change counter, and the time reduction counter in each of the above-described embodiments, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The second special symbol holding ball storage area 203ga differs from the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the second special symbol. More specifically, each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the second entrance 640, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number 1). Among the vacant areas (1 area to 4th area on hold), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203ga is the execution area. It is shifted (moved) to, and a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is performed based on each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having a smaller area number. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data shift is performed only for the holding area (the second holding area to the fourth holding area) in which the winning data is stored.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203 gb is a counter that counts reserved balls based on winning a prize in the second entry opening 640, and is the same as the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d in other configurations. Since there is, the detailed explanation is omitted.

The fluctuation time counter 203 gc is a counter for counting the fluctuation time. In the fluctuation time counter 203gc, a counter value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern selection 8 table 202gd is set (see S11011 in FIG. 252). Further, the fluctuation time counter 203 gc is subtracted by 1 in the special symbol fluctuation process 8 (see FIG. 251) (see S10914 in FIG. 251), and whether the fluctuation time has elapsed based on the value of the fluctuation time counter 203 gc. Is determined.

Next, with reference to FIG. 250, the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 250 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 250 (a), since the ROM 222 of the tenth embodiment has the same electrical configuration as that of the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted. FIG. 250 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 250 (b), the RAM 223 of the tenth embodiment has a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c, a second special symbol holding ball number counter 223ga, and a fluctuation start flag 223fa. It has a stop type selection flag 223fb, a fluctuation time counter 223fd, a game state storage area 223fe, a jackpot effect extension flag 223gb, and other memory areas 223z. Since the configuration (flag, counter, area) having the same name as the electrical configuration used in any of the above-described embodiments is the same as each of the above-described embodiments in terms of its use, detailed description thereof will be omitted. ..

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga is a counter that counts reserved balls based on winning a prize in the second entrance 640, and is the same as the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c in other configurations. Since there is, the detailed explanation is omitted.

The jackpot effect extension flag 223 gb is a flag for indicating that the effect during the jackpot game (see FIG. 238 (a)) is continuously executed even after the jackpot game ends, and continues even after the jackpot game ends. It is set to ON when it is determined to execute (extend the jackpot effect). This jackpot effect extension flag 223 gb is turned on when a command indicating an increase in the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is received from the main control device 110 (S12806 in FIG. 257), and the received command has the number of reserved balls. It is turned off when it is determined that the command indicates that it is 0 (S12906 in FIG. 258). When the jackpot effect extension flag 223 gb is turned on, the jackpot extension effect is executed after the jackpot game (see FIG. 239 (a)).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the eighth embodiment>
Next, the special symbol variation processing 8 (S9001) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 251. FIG. 251 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing 8 (S9001). This special symbol variation processing 8 (S9001) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display are performed. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in the device 81.

In this special symbol variation processing 8, first, it is determined whether or not the present is a big hit or a small hit of the special symbol (S10901). Specifically, it is determined whether any of the big hit medium flag 203o and the small hit medium flag 203p is on. As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the special symbol is in the big hit or the small hit (S10901: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S10901, when it is determined that the special symbol is neither a big hit nor a small hit (S10901: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S10902). When it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S10902: No), the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203gb (number of holdings of variation display based on the second special symbol lottery N2). Is acquired (S10903). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203 gb is larger than 0 (S10904). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203 gb is not 0 (S10904: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203 gb is subtracted by 1 (S10905) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203 gb is set (S10906). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203 gb from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the second special symbol hold ball number counter of the RAM 223. Store in 223ga.

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S10906, the data stored in the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203ga is shifted (S10907). In the process of S10907, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203ga is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. The data is shifted and the process proceeds to S10913.

On the other hand, in the process of S10904, when the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203 gb is 0 (S10904: No), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d (of the first special symbol). The number of holdings N1) of the variation display based on the lottery is acquired (S10908), and it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the acquired first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S10909).

In the process of S10909, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S10909: No), both the first special symbol and the second special symbol start to change newly. Since it is in a state where it cannot be done, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S10909, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S10909: Yes), the number of first special symbol reserved balls The value (N1) of the counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S10910), and the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S10911). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol hold ball number counter of the RAM 223. Store in 223c.

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S10911, the data stored in the first special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is shifted by the same method as the process of S10907 (S10909), and the process is transferred to S10913. Transition. In the process of S10913 executed after the process of S10907 or S10912, the special symbol variation start process 8 for starting the variation display is executed in the first symbol display device 37 (S10913), and this process is terminated. The details of this special symbol change start processing 8 will be described later with reference to FIG. 252.

In the process of S10902, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S10902: Yes), the value of the fluctuation time counter 203 gc is updated by subtracting 1 (S10914), and the updated fluctuation time counter. Based on the value of 203 gc, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S10915). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time counter 203 gc updated in the process of S10914 becomes 0. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If has not passed (S10915: No), the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S10916), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S10915, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S10915: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S10917). The display mode of the stop symbol is preset by the special symbol change start process 8 (S10913) described later with reference to FIG. 252. When the special symbol variation start process 8 (S10913) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it corresponds to the value of the first hit type counter C2. One of the jackpots A to H is determined.

After the processing of S10916 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing 8 is displayed. , It is determined whether it is a big hit of a special symbol (S10918). If the result of this lottery is a special symbol jackpot (S10918: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is set to off (S10919), the start of the special symbol jackpot is set (S10920), and the process proceeds to S10921. do. When the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the process of S10919, when the jackpot control process (S1004) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed, it branches to S1101: Yes and the opening command is set. (S1102). As a result, the jackpot effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S10918, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S10918: No), the process of S10919 and S10920 is skipped and the process is transferred to S10921.

In addition, in the special symbol variation processing 8 (see S9001 in FIG. 251) in the eighth embodiment, the technical idea and the control content for displaying the special symbol stopped for a predetermined period as in the second embodiment described above are described. It may be configured to be added. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the lottery result of the specific symbol in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, the special symbol change start process 8 (S10913) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 252. FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start processing 8 (S10913). This special symbol variation start process 8 (S10913) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 8 (see FIG. 251) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and is the first special symbol holding ball storage area. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of 203a and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203ga, a lottery (win / fail judgment) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol omission" is performed, and the first 1 This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variation pattern) of a variation effect performed by the symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol change start processing 8, first, the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203ga. Each value of C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (S11001).

Next, the probability change flag 203g is read out to determine whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state (S11002). In the process of S11002, if the probability variation flag 203g is on, it is determined that the special symbol is in the probability variation state, and if the probability variation flag 203g is off, it is determined that the special symbol is in the low probability state (not the probability variation state). When it is determined in the processing of S11002 that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic state of the special symbol (S11002: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S11001 and the first value for high probability. Based on the winning random number 8 table 202ga, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S11003). After acquiring the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S11005.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S11002 that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the probabilistic state (it is in the low probability state of the special symbol) (S11002: No), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S11001 is used. , Based on the first random number 8 table for low probability (see FIG. 243 (b)), the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S11004). After acquiring the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S11005.

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S11003 or S11004 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S11005), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S11005: Yes). Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S11001, the display mode at the time of a big hit is set (S11006).

In this process of S11006, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A to H). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A to H) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S11007). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S11007, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd (see FIG. 247), and the variation pattern (variation) corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is compared. Time) is decided.

On the other hand, in the process of S11005, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (including a small hit) (S11005: No), the display mode at the time of the off (small hit) is set (S11008). In the process of S11008, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off (small hit) symbol, and the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area. 3. As the stop type to be displayed on the symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is a front-back off reach, a reach other than the front-back off, a complete off, or a small hit.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a probabilistic state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S11001 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. And set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", set the reach out of front and back. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", set the reach out of front and back.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection (small hit) is determined (S11009). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off (small hit) symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S11007, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd, and the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is compared. Determine (variation time).

When the processing of S11007 or the processing of S11009 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the process of S11007 or the process of S11009 is set (S11010). Next, the counter value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the current fluctuation pattern is set in the fluctuation time counter 203 gc (S11011). Then, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S11006 or S11008 is set (S11012). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203, and are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 52). When the processing of S11012 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing 8.

In the special symbol change start processing 8 (see S10913 in FIG. 252) of the eighth embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit (S11005: Yes in FIG. 252), it is not a big hit (missing or missing). In the case of (small hit) (S11005: No in FIG. 252), the processing content to be executed is configured to be different, but as used in any of the above-described embodiments, it is determined that the hit is not a big hit. In some cases, a control process is executed for the loss, and the lottery result is configured to determine whether the lottery result is a loss or a small hit. It may be configured so that the processing contents to be executed are different. Since the detailed contents of the control process executed in this case are the same as those of each of the above-described embodiments, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the start winning process 8 (S9002) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 253. FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 8 (S9002). This start winning process 8 (S9002) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 and the second ball opening 640. Then, when there is a start prize, it is a process for executing the hold process of the value indicated by various counters.

When the start winning process 8 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first entry port 64 (S11101). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entry port 64 (S11101: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of holding the variable display in the special symbol N1) is acquired (. S11102). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S11103).

Then, whether or not the ball has won a prize in the first entry port 64 (S11101: No), or even if the ball has a prize in the first entry port 64, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d. If (N1) is not less than 4 (S11103: No), the process proceeds to S11107. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S11101: Yes) and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S11103: Yes), the first special The value (N1) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is added by 1 (S11104). Then, a hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S11105).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol hold ball number counter of the RAM 223. Store in 223c.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S11105, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) described above. Each value is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S11106), and the process is transferred to S11107. .. In the process of S11106, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

In the process of S11107, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the second entrance 640 (S11107). Also in this process, similar to the process of S1111, the ball entering the second ball entry port 640 is detected over the three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the second entrance 640 (S11107: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203 gb (the number of reserved balls N2 of the variation display in the special symbol) is acquired ( S11108), it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203 gb is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S11109).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the second ball entrance 640 (S11107: No), or even if there is a prize in the second ball slot 640, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203 gb is If it is determined that the value is not less than 4 (that is, 4) (S11109: No), the process proceeds to S11113. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the second entrance 640 (S11107: Yes) and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203 gb is less than 4 (S11109: Yes), the second special 1 is added to the value (N2) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203 gb (S11110). Then, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203 gb changed by the calculation is set (S11111).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203 gb from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the second special symbol hold ball number counter of the RAM 223. Store in 223ga.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S1111, the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in the processing of S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above are set. , The second special symbol holding ball storage area 203ga of the RAM 203 is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) (S11112), and the process proceeds to S11113. In the process of S11112, as in the process of S11106, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203ga is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

In the process of S11113, a pre-reading process for pre-reading whether or not the result is obtained from various counter values acquired based on the start winning is executed (S11113), and this process is terminated. The details of this look-ahead process will be described with reference to FIG. 254.

FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing the look-ahead process (S11113). In this look-ahead process (S11113), first, it is determined whether or not a new ball has been detected for the first ball opening 64 or the second ball opening 640 in the starting winning process 8 (see FIG. 253). If no new ball has been detected (S11201: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a new ball has been detected in the process of S11201 (S11201: Yes), then whether the number of reserved balls corresponding to the detected ball is the upper limit value (that is, 4). Whether or not it is determined (S11202), and if it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S11202: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S11202 that the number of reserved balls is less than the upper limit value (S11202: No), whether or not the timing of starting the variation display based on the incoming ball is the probable change state of the special symbol. (S11203). In the process of S1123, it is determined whether or not the game is in the probable change state according to the current gaming state and the look-ahead result of the reserved ball held before the current entry. Specifically, if the reserved ball does not include a big hit, the current game state and the timing to start the variation display based on the newly detected ball are the same, so that the current game state is a probable change state. It is determined that. In addition, if a jackpot is included in the reserved ball, the game state may be changed according to the type of jackpot. Specifically, if the probabilistic jackpot is suspended, it shifts to the probabilistic state after the jackpot, and if the normal jackpot is suspended, it shifts to the normal state after the jackpot. Taking these factors into consideration, it is determined whether or not the start timing of the variation display based on the ball entry detected this time is in the probable change state.

In the process of S1123, if it is determined that the start time of the fluctuation based on the ball entry detected this time is the probabilistic state of the special symbol (S1123: Yes), the type of the ball entry port that detected the ball entry and the high probability time. Based on the first random number 8 table 202ga for the game, the lottery result based on the current entry is acquired (S11204), and the process is shifted to S11206. On the other hand, when it is determined that the start of the fluctuation is in the low probability state of the special symbol (S1123: No), the type of the entry port where the entry is detected and the first random number 8 table 202ga for the low probability are displayed. Based on the above, the lottery result based on the current entry is acquired (S11205), and the process is shifted to S11206.

In the processing of S11206 executed after the processing of S11204 or S11205, the winning information command is set based on the type of the entrance that detected the current entry and the lottery result acquired in the processing of S11204 or S11205. (S11206), this process is terminated. The winning information command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 52) described later. It is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the type of the winning ball notified by the winning information command and the lottery result in the winning information storage area 223a.

Next, the normal symbol variation processing 8 (S9003) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 255. FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process 8 (S9003). This normal symbol variation process 8 (S9003) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the second ball entry are performed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the mouth 640.

In the normal symbol variation processing 8 (S9003), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S1130 1). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is performed. In the middle of being included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S11301: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S11301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S11302), and the second symbol display device is used. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S11302: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e (number of holdings of variable display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S11303). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S11304), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S11304 :). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S11304: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S11305).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S11306). In the process of S11306, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S11307).

Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the high probability state (time saving state) (S11308). In the process of S11308, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the high probability state based on the information possessed by the other memory area 203z of the RAM 203.

When it is determined in the processing of S11308 that the normal symbol is in a high probability state (S11308: Yes), the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S11307 and the second random number 8 for high probability. Based on the table 202 cc (see FIG. 246), the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is a hit is acquired (S11309). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number 8 table 202 gc for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 238", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "239", it is out of the normal symbol. (See FIG. 246).

If it is determined in the process of S11308 that the normal symbol is not in the high probability state (S11308: No), the process proceeds to the process of S11310. In the processing of S11310, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit game of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol. Based on the value of C4 and the second random number 8 table 202 gc for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S11310). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number 8 table 202 gc for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 237", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "238,239", the normal symbol is out of order. (See FIG. 246).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S11309 or S11310 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S11311), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S11311: Yes). The display mode at the time of hit is set (S11312). In the process of S11312, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the normal symbol is in the time saving state (high probability state) (S11314), and if it is the normal symbol time saving state (high probability state) (S11314: Yes), the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is performed. The fluctuation time of is set to 0.1 seconds (S11315), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (high probability state) (S11314: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 2 seconds (S11316), and this process is performed. finish.

Further, in the process of S11302, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S11302: Yes), whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S11317). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S11315 or the process of S11316 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

If it is determined in the process of S11317 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S11317: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S11317, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S11317: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S11318). In the processing of S11318, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the processing of S11312, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) in the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is out of order and the display mode is set by the processing of S11313, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to. When the stop display is set by the process of S11318, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed next, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. When the process is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S11313 or the process of S11318.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, is the lottery result (current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process a hit of the ordinary symbol? Is determined (S11319). If the result of this lottery is a hit of a normal symbol (S11319: Yes), then it is determined whether the normal symbol is in the time saving state (high probability state) (S11320), and in the time saving state (high probability state). If not (S11320: No), the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 and the number of times of opening are set to "0.9 seconds x 1 time" (S11321), and the process is performed in S11323. Move to. On the other hand, in the processing of S11320, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving (high probability state) (S11320: Yes), the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 and the opening time. The number of times is set to "1 second x 1 time" (S11322), and the process shifts to S11323.

In the process of S11323, the opening time determined in the process of S11321 or S11322 and the opening / closing control start of the number of times of opening are set (S11323), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S11323, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed, the electric accessory 640a The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S11321 or the process of S11322 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S11319, if the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S11319: No), each process of S11320 to S11323 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the eighth embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 256 to 259. The control process of the voice lamp control device 113 of the eighth embodiment is different from the control process of the seventh embodiment described above in that the content of the command determination process is changed. Since the other elements are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted. For convenience of explanation, different reference numerals may be given to the same processes as those in the above-described embodiments, but the processes having the same name are used for the same purpose.

First, the command determination process 8 (S4191) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 256. FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 8 (S4191). This command determination process 8 (S4191) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. It is a process to do.

In the command determination process 8, first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control unit 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and a variation pattern command is issued from the main control unit 110. It is determined whether or not the command has been received (S12701). In the process of S12701, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S12701: Yes), the variation start flag 223fa provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S12702), and the variation pattern type is selected from the received variation pattern command. Is extracted (S12703), and this process is terminated. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 52) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, in the process of S12701, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S12701: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S12704). Then, when the stop type command is received (S12704: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223fb of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S12705), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S12706). End the process. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S12704, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S12704: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S12707). .. Then, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S12707: Yes), the reserved ball number related process is executed (S12708), and this process is terminated. The details of the reserved ball number-related processing (S12708) will be described later with reference to FIG. 257.

Here, the reserved ball number command is issued from the main control device 110 when a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640, or when a special symbol lottery is performed. Since it is transmitted, every time a start winning prize is detected, or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c and the second special of the voice lamp control device 113 are processed by the processing of S12708. The value of the symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga can be matched with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb. Therefore, due to the influence of noise and the like, the values of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223ga of the voice lamp control device 113 are the first special symbol holding ball number counters of the main control device 110. Even if the values deviate from the values of 203d and the second special symbol holding ball counter 203gb, the first special symbol holding ball counter 223c and the second special symbol holding ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 are used when the start winning prize is detected or when the special symbol is drawn. The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga can be modified to match the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb of the main controller 110.

When the process of S12708 is executed, the display holding ball for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223ga. A few commands are set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S12707, if it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S12707: No), then it is determined whether or not the status command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S12709). Then, when it is determined that the state command has been received (S12709: Yes), the data in the game state storage area 223fe is updated according to the received command (S12710). As a result, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 can easily grasp the change.

On the other hand, in the process of S12709, if it is determined that the status command has not been received (S12709: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received (S12711). If it is determined in the process of S12711 that the winning information command has been received (S12711: Yes), the information corresponding to the received winning information command is set in the winning information storage area 223b (S12712), and this processing is terminated.

In the process of S12711, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S12711: No), then the commands related to the hit (big hit, small hit) (opening command, round number command, ending command for each hit). ) Is received (S12713). Then, when it is determined that the command related to the hit has been received (S12713: Yes), the hit-related process 8 for executing the control corresponding to the type of the command related to the hit is executed (S12714). This process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S12713, if it is determined that the command related to the jackpot has not been received (S12713: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S12715), and this process is terminated. In the processing of S12715, if the other command is a command used in the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is performed. Is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 257, a process related to the number of reserved balls (S12708), which is one process in the command determination process 8 (S4191) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing this reserved ball number related process (S12708).

In the reserved ball number-related process (S12708), first, it is determined whether or not a special figure 2 related command, that is, a command related to the reserved ball number of the second special symbol (special figure 2) has been received (S12801). When it is determined that the special figure 2 related command has been received (S12801: Yes), it is determined whether or not the received special figure 2 related command is a command indicating an increase in the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 (S1282). If it is determined that the command indicates an increase (S12802: Yes), the information in the game state storage area 223fe is read out (S12803). Next, it is determined whether the read information of the game state storage area 223fe is in the big hit or in the small hit (S12804). When it is determined that the jackpot is in progress or the small hit is in progress (S12804: Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot effect extension flag 223 gb is on (S12805). When it is determined that the jackpot effect extension flag 223 gb is off (S12805: No), the jackpot effect extension flag 223 gb is set to on (S12806) in order to set the extension of the effect executed during the jackpot. A jackpot extension effect is set (S12807), and the process proceeds to S12808. On the other hand, in the process of S12805, when it is determined that the jackpot effect extension flag 223 gb is on (S12805: Yes), it is not necessary to set the jackpot extension effect, so the process of S12806 to S12807 is skipped and the process of S12808 is performed. Move to processing.

With this configuration, if the reserved memory of special figure 2 is acquired during the winning game, the special figure 2 fluctuation (lottery) is executed after the big hit game is completed. You can set a jackpot extension effect. That is, since the effect executed after the end of the winning game is set based on the presence or absence of the reserved storage of the special figure 2 instead of the game state set after the end of the winning game, it is specified as in the eighth embodiment. Since it is possible to easily set the effect mode corresponding to the lottery (variation) of the special figure 2 that can be executed only under the conditions, it is possible to execute the effect that is easy for the player to understand.

In S12808, the key display mode (display mode of the acquired display areas Dm10a to Dm10d) corresponding to the command received this time is set (S12808). Next, the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received command and stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga (S12810), and the process proceeds to S12811. On the other hand, in the processing of S12804, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not a big hit or a small hit (S12804: No), an error command is set (S12809), and the process proceeds to S12810. ..

On the other hand, in the processing of S1282, if it is determined that the command related to the special figure 2 received this time is not a command indicating an increase (S12802: No), the processing at the time of decrease is executed (S12813), and the process proceeds to the processing of S12811. do.

Here, with reference to FIG. 258, a reduction processing (S12813), which is one of the reserved ball number-related processing (S12708) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing this reduction processing (S12813).

In the reduction processing (S12813), first, the number of reserved balls is extracted from the command received this time and stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga (S12901). Next, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, whether the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga is 0 (S12902). In the process of S12902, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga is 0 (S12902: Yes), it is the timing of the end of the jackpot. A display effect command indicating the end of the extra round is set (S12903). Next, a display instruction command indicating left-handedness is set (S12904). Next, the right-handed command is set to off (S12905), the jackpot effect extension flag 223 gb is set to off (S12906), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S12902, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S12902: No), the key display mode corresponding to the number of reserved balls is set (S12907). This process ends.

Returning to FIG. 257, the explanation will be continued. When any of the processes of S12801, S12810, or S12813 is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S12811. In the process of S12811, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 related command is received (S12811). In the process of S12811, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 related command is received (S12811). When it is determined that the special figure 1 related command has been received (S12811: Yes), the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received command and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (S12812), and this processing is terminated. do. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command related to the special figure 1 has not been received (S12811: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the contents of the hit-related process 8 (S12714) will be described with reference to FIG. 259. FIG. 259 is a flowchart schematically showing the contents of the hit-related process 8 (S12714). The hit-related process 8 (S12714) is executed when a hit-related command (command related to a big hit or a small hit) is received.

When the hit-related process 8 (S12714) is executed, first, it is determined whether the hit-related command received this time is a jackpot-related command (S12151), and if it is determined to be a jackpot-related command (S12151: Yes). , Set the corresponding display command (S12152), and end this process. The various display commands set in the process of S12152 are set by the same process as the process executed when the jackpot related command is received in the command determination process executed in each of the above-described embodiments. Therefore, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, in the process of S12151, if it is determined that the hit-related command received this time is not a jackpot-related command (S12151: No), then it is determined whether the hit-related command received this time is a small hit start command. (S12107), if it is determined that the command is a small hit start command (S12107: Yes), the small hit start process 8 is executed (S12158), and this process is terminated.

In the small hit start process 8 (S12158), the content of the display command set for the process executed in the small hit start process 7 (S12108) of the seventh embodiment described above is set to the height of the normal symbol. The difference is that the display command executed when the probability state is set and the display command executed when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set are discriminated and set. Other than that, they are the same, so detailed description will be omitted.

In the processing of S12107, if it is determined that the hit-related command received this time is not the small hit start command (S12107: No), then it is determined whether the small hit end command has been received (S12109), and the small hit end. If it is determined that the command has not been received (S12109: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S12109, when it is determined that the small hit end command has been received (S12109: Yes), then the small hit medium flag 203p is set to off (S12153), and then the second special symbol holding ball. It is determined whether the value of the number counter 223ga is larger than 0 (S12154). That is, in the process of S12154, the presence / absence of the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is determined at the timing when the small hit game is completed.

In the process of S12154, if it is determined that the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga is larger than 0 (S12154: Yes), the special figure 2 variation is executed after the small hit game is completed, so this process is performed as it is. To finish. On the other hand, in the process of S12154, when it is determined that the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga is not larger than 0 (0) (S12154: No), then the jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is turned on. It is determined whether or not it is set to (S12155), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S12155: Yes), the jackpot effect extension flag 223 gb is set to off (S12156), and this process is terminated.

As a result, if the special figure 2 fluctuation is not executed after the small hit game ends, that is, if the reserved memory of the special figure 2 cannot be acquired during the small hit game, the big hit extension effect is executed after the small hit game ends. It can be prevented from being done. Although detailed description is omitted, when the small hit end command is received in the hit-related process 8 (S12109: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga is 0 (S12154: No), the end screen of the big hit extension effect (see FIG. 241 (b)) is displayed at the end of the small hit game. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the player that the jackpot extension effect will end.

As described above, in the eighth embodiment, the second special symbol is executed during the big hit game or the small hit game executed in the low probability state (normal state, latent state) of the normal symbol. It is configured so that the ball can (easily) enter the second entry port 640, which serves as an opportunity. As a result, the lottery of the second special symbol can be prevented from being executed unless the winning game (big hit game, small hit game) is executed. Therefore, as in the first embodiment described above, the lottery of the first special symbol is performed. Even if you do not use a configuration that executes (variation) and lottery (variation) of the second special symbol at the same time (in parallel), a small hit game based on the lottery of the second special symbol only during the latent state. Can be generated frequently. Therefore, the control process of the gaming machine can be simplified.

Furthermore, depending on the type of winning (big hit, small hit), it is possible to set a hit type in which the ball easily enters the second entry port 640 and a hit type in which it is difficult to enter. If you win a hit (big hit, small hit), not only the size of the privilege (number of prize balls) that can be obtained during the winning game, but also the ball enters the second entrance 640 during the winning game. It is possible to make the player interested in whether or not.

In addition, in the eighth embodiment, the ball enters the second entrance 640 depending on whether the player wins in the lottery of the first special symbol or wins in the lottery of the second special symbol. It is configured so that the ratio of easy-to-use hit types is set differently. Specifically, it is easier to set the hit type in which the ball is more likely to enter the second entrance 640 when the second special symbol is won than when the first special symbol is won. It is composed.

With this configuration, once the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) has been transferred to a state in which the lottery can be executed, the lottery for the special figure 2 can be continued and easily executed. Even though the advantageous game mode advantageous to the player (mode in which the lottery of Special Figure 2 can be executed) is set, the advantageous game mode is immediately terminated, which causes discomfort to the player. Can be suppressed.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to have a higher probability of winning (big hit, small hit) than the lottery of the first special symbol. Specifically, in the lottery of the first special symbol, only the big hit (1/400 at low probability) is set without winning the small hit, whereas in the lottery of the second special symbol, the big hit is won. The probability of (1/400 at low probability) is the same as the above-mentioned first special symbol, but it is set to win a small hit (300/400). As described above, in the eighth embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol is set so that the probability of winning the small hit is higher in the lottery of the second special symbol than in the lottery of the first special symbol. The lottery of the second special symbol is configured so that it is easier to win a win (big hit, small hit) than.

As a result, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640, it is possible to win a hit (big hit, small hit) with a high probability. The winning game based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be frequently executed in a short period of time.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, it is configured so that the winning game in which the ball is easily entered into the second entrance 640 is executed with a higher probability when the small hit is won than when the big hit is won. is doing. As a result, when a small hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, it is possible to easily execute the lottery of the second special symbol again after the winning game is completed.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the right to execute the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2 hold) is configured to be able to store a plurality (4 pieces) (hold memory) according to the winning type. Therefore, the opening operation pattern of the winning game is defined so that the number of cards that can be held and stored during one winning game is different.

With such a configuration, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game in order to secure more reserved memory by one hit game. Here, in the eighth embodiment, the second opening / closing door 3650f attached to the second attacker 3650, which is opened in the hit game, is opened (a state in which the ball can be guided to the second specific winning opening 3650a). A flow path in which a part of the ball spilled from the second opening / closing door 3650f can enter the second entry port 640 when the ball is changed to the closed state (the state in which the ball cannot be guided to the second specific winning opening 3650a). It is configured to pass through. In this way, the ball that could not enter the second attacker 3650, which is opened during the hit game, can enter the second entry port 640, so that the ball can enter the second attacker 3650 during the hit game. 2 The player can be made to pay close attention to the movement of the ball to be entered into the specific winning opening 3650a and the movement of the ball to be entered into the second entry opening 640.

It should be noted that the inflow detecting means for detecting that the sphere has flowed into the flow path (guidance passage 3660) through which the sphere can flow when a specific condition is satisfied as in the seventh embodiment described above, and the sphere from the flow path. It is possible to provide an emission detecting means for detecting that the shavings have been discharged, and an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode based on the detection result of each detection means, or based on the detection result of each detection means. It is also possible to provide an operation limiting means for limiting the game operation.

<9th embodiment>
Next, the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 260 to 266. In the first embodiment described above, the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) are configured to be dynamically displayable at the same time (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous). Variable type). Further, in order to efficiently execute the discrimination of the special symbol, it is possible to set a game state (high probability state of the normal symbol) in which the electric accessory 64a is easily released, and the high probability state of the normal symbol (for example, a time saving state). Was configured to continue for a predetermined period (for example, the period until the number of times (time reduction number) of special symbol discrimination (variation) reaches 100 times after the end of the big hit).

In the above-mentioned first embodiment, since the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are configured to be able to execute the discrimination (variation) at the same time (in parallel), the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is determined in advance as described above. In order to prevent the setting from being longer than the predetermined period, refer to it when determining the period for continuing the high probability state of the normal symbol at the timing when the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol starts. It is configured to update the time saving information (for example, the time saving counter 203f) (see FIG. 36).

As described above, in the first embodiment, since the time saving information is updated at the timing when the fluctuation of each special symbol is started, the number of times the special symbol is discriminated (variated) in the simultaneous fluctuation type gaming machine. Even if the number of time reductions is set based on the above, it is possible to prevent the time reduction state from being set beyond the predetermined number of time reductions.

However, in the configuration of the first embodiment, in the simultaneous fluctuation type gaming machine, the period in which the time saving state is set is shortened depending on the discrimination (variation) timing of each special symbol, which causes discomfort to the player. There was a problem.

Specifically, for example, as the determination (variation) of the first special symbol, the determination (variation) of the second special symbol, that is, immediately after the special symbol variation at the 100th rotation (the final round of the time reduction) is executed. , When the 101st special figure change is executed, the time saving state can be terminated at the timing when the 100th special figure change is executed (immediately before the 101st special figure change is executed). Although it does not cause discomfort to the player, if the special figure change at the 101st rotation is not executed while the special figure change at the 100th rotation (the final time reduction number of times) is executed, for example, the 100th rotation. In the case where the special figure change of the 101st rotation is started after the special figure change of the 100th rotation is completed, the time saving state ends at the timing when the special figure change of the 100th rotation is executed. There was a problem that the player was uncomfortable with the state of the normal symbol during the change of the special symbol.

On the other hand, in the ninth embodiment, the time saving end condition is satisfied when the special figure fluctuation number (for example, 100 times) is set as the time saving ending condition for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol. The end timing of the special figure change (for example, the special figure change at the 100th rotation) and the start timing of the special figure change (for example, the special figure change at the 101st rotation) that is executed first after the time saving end condition is satisfied. It is configured to make it possible to discriminate between and, and to end the time saving state based on the timing to be executed first among any of the timings.

With such a configuration, the high probability state of the normal symbol can be set for a longer time, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that causes discomfort to the player.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, the timing at which the special figure change at the 101st rotation is executed is configured so that the timing at which the condition for executing the special figure change at the 101st rotation is satisfied can be determined, and the 101st rotation is executed. It is configured so that the time saving state ends before the special symbol is discriminated. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the time saving state from being set within the range exceeding the predetermined number of time saving times, and the lottery of the special symbol being executed in the time saving state.

In this embodiment, the end timing of the special figure change in which the time saving end condition is satisfied and the timing in which the special figure change is executed next to the special figure change in which the time saving end condition is satisfied are satisfied first. It is configured to end the time saving state based on the timing, but is not limited to this, for example, the time saving is based only on the timing when the special figure change is executed next to the special figure change in which the time saving end condition is satisfied. It may be configured to terminate the state.

With this configuration, for example, when there is a vacant period between the end of the 100th rotation special map change and the execution of the 101st rotation special map change, that is, the 100th rotation special map. When the demo screen (standby screen) is displayed after the fluctuation is completed, the time saving state can be continued even during the vacant period, so that the game state advantageous to the player (high probability state of the normal symbol) is further improved. Can be set longer.

In this case, when a game for passing a ball through the through gate 67 for starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol is performed, the ball launched by the game enters the ball for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol. It is preferable to configure the game area of the game board 13 so that the ball can enter the mouth. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a game in which only the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started without starting the fluctuation of the special symbol.

Furthermore, if a winner is won by discriminating a normal symbol (lottery), the electric accessory 64a is released so that the ball can easily enter the ball entry means for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game of executing only the determination (lottery) of the normal symbol from continuing for a long period of time.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, when a winning prize is won in a lottery of ordinary symbols, the electric accessory 64a is opened and a ball enters the lower first entry slot 64b2. Although it is configured to be easy (see Fig. 2), it is not an entrance for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol as an entrance for the ball to easily enter by opening the electric accessory 64a. , A predetermined number of prize balls may be given based on the ball entering.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the ninth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 260. The ninth embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that the content specified in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is changed, and the other electrical configurations are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted. FIG. 260 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the RAM 203 included in the main control device 110 of the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 260, the RAM 203 of the ninth embodiment is different from the RAM 203 of the first embodiment described above in that the time saving end wait flag 203ha is added.

The time saving end wait flag 203ha is a flag for indicating that it is a waiting state for ending the time saving state, and is set to on when it is a waiting state for ending the time saving state. In the ninth embodiment, a plurality of timings (time saving end timings) for ending the time saving state are set based on the number of times the special symbol changes (the number of times the special symbol changes), and any of the plurality of time saving ending timings is set. It is configured so that the time saving state ends when one of the timings is reached.

Then, when a state (standby state) in which a plurality of time saving end timings can be established is reached, the time saving end waiting flag 203ha is set to ON. Specifically, in the main control device 110, in the first special symbol change start process (see S208 in FIG. 33) and the second special symbol change start process (see S210 in FIG. 39), the game state update process (S308). ) Is executed in place of the game state update process 9 (see S396 in FIG. 263), and when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 (S604: Yes), it is set to ON (see S691). ).

Next, when the special symbol fluctuation stop processing (first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 9 (see S297 in FIG. 264), second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 9 (see S298 in FIG. 266)) is executed, or newly. When the special symbol is discriminated (1st special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (see S395 in FIG. 261)), it is referred to in the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (see S991 in FIG. When the flag 203ha is set to on, the time saving end process for ending the time saving state (see S492 in FIG. 262) is executed, and the time saving end waiting flag 203ha is set to off (S11404).

With this configuration, when the time reduction end wait flag 203ha is set to on (that is, the standby state), when any time reduction end timing arrives, it is sure to correspond to each timing. Can execute the time saving end processing. Further, since the time saving end waiting flag 203ha is set to off when the time saving end processing (see S492 in FIG. 262) is executed, it is surely prevented that the time saving end processing is executed in duplicate at a plurality of timings. can do.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the ninth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 261 to 266. The control process of the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment is the first special in place of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) with respect to the control process of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment described above. The symbol jackpot determination process 9 (see FIG. 261), the game state update process 9 (see FIG. 263) instead of the game state update process (see FIG. 36), and the first special symbol change stop process (see FIG. 38). 1 Special symbol fluctuation stop processing 9 (see FIG. 264), 2nd special symbol jackpot determination processing 9 (see FIG. 265) instead of the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 40), 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 40) The difference is that the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 9 (see FIG. 266) is executed instead of (see FIG. 45), and the time saving end process (see FIG. 262) is added. Other than that, the same processing is executed. The same processing is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (S395) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 261. FIG. 261 is a flowchart showing the details of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S395). The ninth embodiment is different in that the processes of S491 and S492 are added to the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (S395), after acquiring the data of the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (S401), is the time saving end wait flag 203ha turned on, that is, this time? It is determined whether the fluctuation start is the timing of the time reduction end (S491). When it is determined that the timing of the time reduction end is reached (S491: Yes), the time reduction end process is executed (S492), and the process proceeds to the process of S402. The details of the reduced working hours processing (S492) will be described later with reference to FIG. 262. On the other hand, in the process of S491, when it is determined that the time reduction end wait flag 203ha is not on, that is, it is determined that the current fluctuation start is not the timing of the time reduction end, the process proceeds to the process of (S491: No) S402.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not it is the timing of the end of the time reduction before acquiring the lottery result of the special symbol. By configuring before acquiring the lottery result in this way, it is possible to set the time reduction as the game state until the end of the fluctuation which is the timing of the end of the time reduction.

Next, the time saving end processing (S492) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 262. FIG. 262 is a flowchart showing the details of the time saving end processing (S492). In the time reduction end process (S492), a process for setting the game state after the time reduction end is executed.

In the time saving end processing (S492), first, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag 203g is on (S11401). When it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is on (S11401: Yes), a state command indicating the latent probability state is set (S11402), and the process shifts to S11404. On the other hand, in the process of S11401, when it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is not on (S11401: No), a state command indicating a normal state is set (S11403), and the process shifts to S11404. In the process of S11404, the time saving end wait flag 203ha is set to off (S11404), and the present process is terminated.

Next, the game state update process 9 (S396) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 263. FIG. 263 is a flowchart showing the details of the game state update process 9 (S396). In the ninth embodiment, it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 after the value of the time saving counter 203f is subtracted (S602) with respect to the game state update process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment. In this case (S604: Yes), the difference is that a process (S691) for setting the time saving end wait flag 203ha to ON is added.

Next, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 9 (S297) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 264. FIG. 264 is a flowchart showing the details of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 9 (S297). The ninth embodiment is different in that the processes of S891 and S892 are added to the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see S207 of FIG. 38) in the first embodiment. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 9 (S297), after the fluctuation of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S809), is the time saving end wait flag 203ha turned on, that is, the current fluctuation? It is determined whether or not the stop timing of is the timing of the time reduction end (S891). If it is determined in the process of S891 that the time saving end wait flag 203ha is off (S891: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S891 that the time saving end wait flag 203ha is on, the time saving end process for ending the time saving state is executed (S892), and this process is terminated. The time saving end process (S892) is the same as the time saving end process (see S492 and FIG. 262) executed in the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (see FIG. 261). Since it is not too much, the detailed explanation is omitted here.

Regarding the second special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (see FIG. 265) and the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 9 (see FIG. 266), the first special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (see FIG. 261) and the second special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (see FIG. 261), respectively. 1 Make the same changes to the special symbol fluctuation stop processing 9 (see FIG. 264) (addition of control processing to execute the time saving end processing (see FIG. 262) when the time saving end waiting flag 203ha is on). Since it is only there, the detailed explanation will be omitted.

As described above, in the ninth embodiment, the time saving end condition is set when the special figure variation number (for example, 100 times) is set as the time saving ending condition for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol. The end timing of the special figure change (for example, the special figure change at the 100th rotation) and the special figure change (for example, the special figure change at the 101st rotation) that is executed first after the time saving end condition is satisfied. It is configured so that the start timing and the start timing can be discriminated, and the time saving state is terminated based on the timing to be executed first among any of the timings.

With such a configuration, the high probability state of the normal symbol can be set for a longer time, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that causes discomfort to the player.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, the timing at which the special figure change at the 101st rotation is executed is configured so that the timing at which the condition for executing the special figure change at the 101st rotation is satisfied can be determined, and the 101st rotation is executed. It is configured so that the time saving state ends before the special symbol is discriminated. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the time saving state from being set within the range exceeding the predetermined number of time saving times, and the lottery of the special symbol being executed in the time saving state.

In this embodiment, the end timing of the special figure change in which the time saving end condition is satisfied and the timing in which the special figure change is executed next to the special figure change in which the time saving end condition is satisfied are satisfied first. It is configured to end the time saving state based on the timing, but is not limited to this, for example, the time saving is based only on the timing when the special figure change is executed next to the special figure change in which the time saving end condition is satisfied. It may be configured to terminate the state.

With this configuration, for example, when there is a vacant period between the end of the 100th rotation special map change and the execution of the 101st rotation special map change, that is, the 100th rotation special map. When the demo screen (standby screen) is displayed after the fluctuation is completed, the time saving state can be continued even during the vacant period, so that the game state advantageous to the player (high probability state of the normal symbol) is further improved. Can be set longer.

In this case, when a game for passing a ball through the through gate 67 for starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol is performed, the ball launched by the game enters the ball for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol. It is preferable to configure the game area of the game board 13 so that the ball can enter the mouth. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a game in which only the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started without starting the fluctuation of the special symbol.

Furthermore, if a winner is won by discriminating a normal symbol (lottery), the electric accessory 64a is released so that the ball can easily enter the ball entry means for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game of executing only the determination (lottery) of the normal symbol from continuing for a long period of time.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, when a winning prize is won in a lottery of ordinary symbols, the electric accessory 64a is opened and a ball enters the lower first entry slot 64b2. Although it is configured to be easy (see Fig. 2), it is not an entrance for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol as an entrance for the ball to easily enter by opening the electric accessory 64a. , A predetermined number of prize balls may be given based on the ball entering.

<10th Embodiment>
Next, the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 267 to 278. Each of the above-described embodiments has two types of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol), and when the lottery of each special symbol results in a specific lottery result (for example, a big hit or a small hit). , The privilege game (big hit game, small hit game) for operating the variable winning device (for example, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650) was configured to be executed.

In this way, when the privilege game is executed according to the lottery of the special symbol, the privilege game is executed when the lottery result becomes a specific lottery result, so that the lottery result becomes a specific lottery result. Although it was possible to give a sense of satisfaction to the player, even if the lottery of the special symbol is executed multiple times, there is a possibility that the lottery result may not be a specific lottery result, and the lottery of the special symbol may not be obtained. It was not possible to give any privilege to the player who executed.

On the other hand, in the tenth embodiment, the variable winning device (for example, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650) is activated when it is determined that the ball has entered. A ball means (specific entry port 4640 (see FIG. 267)) is provided. In this way, by configuring the variable winning device to operate only when the ball enters the specific ball entry means, a privilege is directly given to the player's game content (ball launch result). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being dissatisfied.

Here, with reference to FIG. 267, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment will be described. The configuration of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment is the same as the configuration of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above, with the second ball slot 640 and the first variable winning device 65. , The electric accessory 64a and the lower first ball entry port 64b2 are deleted, and a ball entry port 464 is provided in place of the upper first ball entry port 64b1, and a specific entry port 4640 and its specific entry port are newly provided. It is different in that the specific accessory 4640a attached to the 4640 and the small attacker 4650 are provided. Other configurations are the same, and detailed description of the same configuration will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 267, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, the left side region (the region on the left side of the front view of the variable display device unit 80) and the left side region of the gaming region formed on the game board 13 Devices related to the game are concentrated in the lower area (the area on the lower side of the front view of the variable display device unit 80) where the ball fired in the game flows down, and the player is made to shoot the ball in the left area. It is configured to play a left-handed game.

Specifically, a through gate 67 is provided on the upstream side of the left side region, and a ball entry port 464, a specific ball entry port 4640, a small attacker 4650, and a second variable winning device 650 are provided in the lower area in order from the top. Has been done. Here, the flow of the game when the left-handed game is performed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.

Most of the balls launched by the left-handed game pass through the through gate 67 and flow down toward the lower region. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, the normal symbol discrimination (lottery) is executed based on the detection of the passage (detected by a detection switch (not shown)). In the present embodiment, when a hit of a normal symbol is won, a hit game in which the specific accessory 4640a described later is released is executed.

Of the balls that have reached the lower region, the entry port 464 is arranged so that one out of every 20 balls enters the entry opening 464. When it is detected that a ball has entered the ball entry port 464 (detected by a detection switch (not shown)), a lottery for a special symbol (first special symbol) is executed based on the detection. In addition, four prize balls are awarded to the player for each entry. Then, the ball that has not entered the entry port 464 flows down toward the specific entry port 4640, the small attacker 4650, and the second variable winning device 650 provided below the entry port 464.

Here, the specific entry port 4640 is a specific accessory that is a variable means that can be changed between a closed state that makes it difficult for the ball to enter and an open state that makes it easier for the ball to enter than the closed state. A 4640a is attached, and it is configured so that the ease of entering the ball differs depending on the variable situation of the specific accessory 4640a. The specific accessory 4640a is variably controlled by a variable control means (ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the main control device 110 (see S106 in FIG. 48)) so that the state changes according to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol. Therefore, when the ball is won by a lottery of a normal symbol executed based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, the ball is easily opened to enter the specific entry port 4640. Variable control.

Although detailed description will be described later, in the present embodiment, the specific accessory 4640a is likely to be in the open state (high probability state of the normal symbol) and the open state rather than the high probability state of the normal symbol. It is configured to be able to set a difficult state (low probability state of normal symbol), but even if the low probability state of normal symbol is set, the ball enters the specific entry port 4640. It is configured to get.

Returning to FIG. 267, the explanation will be continued. If the specific accessory 4640a is in the open state at the timing when the ball that did not enter the entry port 464 reaches the specific entry port 4640, the ball enters the specific entry port 4640 and is specified. When the accessory 4640a is in the closed state, it passes over the specified accessory 4640a in the closed state and flows down toward the small attacker 4650.

When a ball enters the specific entry slot 4640, a lottery for a special symbol (first special symbol) is executed, and one prize ball is awarded for each prize. In the present embodiment, a maximum of four special symbol (first special symbol) lottery rights executed when a ball enters the specific entry port 4640 can be reserved.

In the tenth embodiment, a plurality of nails are planted on the game board 13, and a ball flowing down the game area is guided by the plurality of nails to a position where various devices in the lower area are arranged. Flow down to. Further, in the lower region, a device provided below the number of balls guided toward the device provided on the upper side (for example, the ball entry port 464) (for example, the second variable winning device 650). ) Is configured to be larger in number of spheres guided towards.

Specifically, among the balls launched by the left-handed game, about 1 in 4 balls is guided to a position where the ball can enter the entrance 464 (upper position of the entrance 464), and 5 of them are guided. About 1 ball (that is, about 1 ball out of 20 balls launched by the left-handed game) is configured to enter the ball entrance 464.

Then, one of the balls launched by the left-handed game is guided to the specific entry port 4640 and the small attacker 4650. Despite being guided to a position where the ball can enter the ball entry port 464 (above the ball entry port 464), the specific ball entry port 4640 flows down without entering the ball entry port 464. It includes a ball and a ball that could not be guided to the entry port 464 at the stage of flowing down the left side region. Finally, the second variable winning device 650 is configured to guide almost all of the balls fired by the left-handed game.

Further, in the tenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 267, it is possible to perform a right-handed game, and the ball launched by the right-handed game is larger than the ball fired by the left-handed game. , The ball entry port 464, the specific ball entry port 4640, and the small attacker 4650 are difficult to be guided, and the second variable winning device 650 is configured to be guided at the same rate.

In this way, by making the ease of entering each ball entrance different depending on the position where the player launches the ball, it is possible to make the player play the game while competing for skill. It is possible to prevent people from getting bored early.

It should be noted that the configuration of the game board 13 provided in the tenth embodiment is not limited, and for example, it is easier to guide the ball to the small attacker 4650 by performing the right-handed game than by performing the left-handed game. It may be configured in. As a result, the player can be made to play a game in which the game method (left-handed, right-handed) can be changed according to the game result (whether or not the ball has entered the specific entry port 4640). Can be enthusiastically played.

Returning to FIG. 267, the explanation will be continued. The small attacker 4650 is provided with a small opening / closing door 4650a, which is a variable means that can be changed between a closed state that makes it difficult for the ball to enter and an open state that makes it easier for the ball to enter than the closed state. The small opening / closing door 4650a is configured so that the ease of entering the ball differs depending on the variable state. The small opening / closing door 4650a has a specific variable control means (specific ball entry process executed by the main control device 110 (see S196 in FIG. 278) so that the state changes when a ball enters the specific entry port 4640. )) Is variably controlled. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the value of the counter (first hit type counter C2) that is randomly updated when the ball enters the specific entry port 4640, and the set game. The opening pattern of the small opening / closing door 4650a is configured to be different depending on the state.

Specifically, the period (opening standby time) from when the ball enters the specific entry port 4640 until the small opening / closing door 4650a is opened is configured to be different. As a result, for example, in a gaming state (for example, a normal state) in which a long period (opening standby time) from when the ball enters the specific entry port 4640 until the small opening / closing door 4650a is opened is set, the unit time is set. It is possible to suppress the number of winning balls to the small attacker 4650 at the time of hitting, and it is easy to set a short period from when the ball enters the specific entry port 4640 until the small opening / closing door 4650a opens (for example, a gaming state). In the latent state), the number of balls won in the small attacker 4650 per unit time can be increased.

In the tenth embodiment, when a ball wins a small attacker 4650, 10 prize balls are given to one winning ball, and the above-mentioned entry slot 464 or a specific entry is provided. It is configured so that more prize balls are given than the ball mouth 4640. Therefore, by varying the number of balls winning the small attacker 4650 per unit time according to the gaming state, for example, the number of balls fired to the player by winning the ball to the small attacker 4650 is larger than the number of balls fired. It is possible to give the number of balls as a prize ball.

With this configuration, in addition to the game based on the lottery of the special symbol, the player can be made to play the game based on the ball entering the specific ball entry means (specific entry port 4640). It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Finally, the ball that did not win the small attacker 4650 also flows down toward the second variable winning device 650 provided below the small attacker 4650. The second variable winning device 650 is a variable means (operated during the jackpot game) that operates when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, as in the first embodiment described above. Since the detailed contents are the same as those of the above-described first embodiment, the detailed description thereof will be omitted. The balls that do not win in the second variable winning device 650 flow into the out port 66 formed at the lowermost position of the gaming area of the gaming board 13, and are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

In the present embodiment, the ball can be fired to the right side area of the game area (right-handed game is possible), but the game is not limited to this, and for example, a game in which the ball is fired to the right handle area of the game area. The right side area may be completely eliminated so that (right-handed game) becomes infeasible. Further, in the tenth embodiment, all the games (from the games in the normal state) can be executed only by the left-handed game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a through gate 67 or a specific entry port is used. The 4640 may be provided in the right side region and configured to change the game content according to the game state.

<Regarding the content of the production in the tenth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 268, a characteristic effect performed in the tenth embodiment will be described. In the tenth embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, the period (fixed period) from when the special symbol for indicating that the jackpot has been won is stopped and displayed until the jackpot game is executed is the jackpot type. It is stipulated to be different according to.

Then, in the tenth embodiment, the game state (latent state) in which the small attacker 4650 is easily released is set during the fixed period. That is, a game (so-called small hit RUSH) in which the small attacker 4650 is continuously opened is configured to be feasible by using a special symbol fixing period for indicating that the big hit has been won.

With this configuration, the small hit RUSH can be executed before the big hit game is executed. Since the technical idea of executing the small hit RUSH before the big hit game is executed is the same as the second embodiment described above, a detailed explanation thereof and a derivation that can be conceived based on this technical idea. The plan and the alternative plan are the same as those in the second embodiment described above, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the tenth embodiment, the same special symbol determination period as in the above-mentioned second embodiment is used as the period for executing the small hit RUSH, but the period is not limited to this, and the small hits are small in each of the above-described embodiments. The period used for frequently performing the winning game may be used. For example, as in the sixth embodiment described above, the period from the start of the jackpot game to the start of the round game (opening period) may be used. Furthermore, based on the lottery results of special symbols. The latent probability state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) may be set as the gaming state, and the small hit RUSH may be executed during the latent probability state.

Returning to FIG. 268, the description will be continued. FIG. 268 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, and FIG. 268 (b) is an execution during the symbol determination period of the special symbol. It is a figure which showed an example of the effect screen to be performed.

As shown in FIG. 268 (a), when the jackpot of the special symbol is won, "777" is stopped and displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, and "left-handed" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. Is displayed. In the present embodiment, since the left-handed game is configured to be executed in all the game states, "left-handed" is always displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. When the same game method (left-handed) is always executed as in the present embodiment, the guide display area Dm3 is displayed because the player does not need to change the game method. It may be configured not to.

Then, the character 811 is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the comment "Aim for RUSH" indicating to the player that the game period for frequently opening the small attacker 4650 starts is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of "entering the chance zone" indicating that a gaming state advantageous to the player has been set is displayed.

In the tenth embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, when a special symbol jackpot is won in a probabilistic state (high probability state of a special symbol, high probability state of a normal symbol), the special hit is won. It is configured so that the latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set during the determination period of the symbol. Then, when the gaming state is set to the latent state, an operation pattern is set in which the period (opening standby time) from when the ball enters the specific entry port 4640 until the first attacker 650 is opened is short. Since the game is configured to be easy, the game (RUSH game) that can increase the number of winning balls to the small attacker 4650 per unit time for the player ends the confirmation period of the special symbol. Will be executed.

Further, in the tenth embodiment, the fixing period of the special symbol is configured to be different depending on the winning jackpot type. Therefore, if the jackpot type with a long fixed period of the special symbol is won, the period during which the RUSH game can be executed can be lengthened, which is advantageous to the player.

Here, in each of the above-described embodiments, the stop display mode of the third symbol for indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot is set, and whether or not the game content during the jackpot game is advantageous to the player ( It is configured to be set according to whether or not the privilege (number of prize balls) that can be given to the player during the jackpot game is large or small) and the gaming state set after the jackpot game is completed is advantageous to the player. For example, when a big hit that is advantageous to the player is won, the stop display mode of the third symbol is set to the same odd number (for example, "777"), which is not advantageous to the player (disadvantageous). When the big hit is won, the stop display mode of the third symbol is configured to be set by the same even number (for example, "222").

On the other hand, in the tenth embodiment, as the stop display mode of the third symbol, whether or not the game content during the above-mentioned jackpot game is advantageous to the player (can be given to the player during the jackpot game). In addition to whether or not the privilege (number of prize balls) is large or small) and the game state set after the jackpot game is completed are advantageous to the player, whether or not the length of the symbol confirmation period is advantageous to the player. It is configured to be set accordingly.

With this configuration, by grasping the stop display mode of the third symbol, the RUSH game executed before the big hit game, the big hit game, the game state set after the big hit game ends, and the three game contents can be obtained. You can play games while predicting. In this case, for example, when the period in which the RUSH game is executed (design confirmation period), the game content of the jackpot game, and the game state set after the jackpot game ends are all advantageous to the player. It is preferable to provide a stop display mode (for example, "VVV") of the third symbol which is set only in. As a result, it is possible to make the player play the game while giving a feeling of satisfaction to the player.

Further, the stop display mode of the third symbol may be configured to be changed at predetermined timings. For example, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, it is shown that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. Among the stop display modes, a stop display mode (for example, "222") indicating that the jackpot is disadvantageous to the player is set, and then "777" during the symbol confirmation period (RUSH game), during the jackpot game. It may be configured to change the stop display mode of the third symbol so as to indicate that the player has gradually won a jackpot advantageous to the player, such as "VVV".

With this configuration, the player can be made to pay attention to the effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 while expecting that the stop display mode of the third symbol is variable. Further, in the present embodiment, the size of a plurality of benefits given to the player based on the jackpot winning is combined to set the stop display mode of the third symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each benefit is not limited to this. The size may be displayed in different modes.

For example, the type of the stop display symbol (number) of the third symbol is set according to the game state set after the jackpot game is completed, and the size of the third symbol is changed and set according to the game content during the jackpot game. However, the color of the third symbol may be changed and set according to the length of the symbol fixing period. As a result, it is possible to notify the player in detail of the content of the game to be executed in the future.

Further, in the tenth embodiment, when the latent state is set as the game state during the symbol confirmation period, the efficient RUSH game is executed, but the normal state is set during the symbol confirmation period. In that case, that is, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state and the jackpot is won, the inefficient RUSH game is executed. Therefore, when setting the stop display mode based on the length of the symbol confirmation period as the stop display mode of the third symbol, the stop display mode of the third symbol set based on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is variable. It is good to configure it so that it will. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the content of the game to be executed in the future in an easy-to-understand manner.

When the symbol determination period is entered after the display of FIG. 268 (a), the display screen shown in FIG. 268 (b) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 268 (b), during the period during which the RUSH game is being executed, "in the chance zone" is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the remaining period display mode for indicating the remaining period of the symbol determination period. "Remaining time 30 seconds" is displayed. This remaining period display mode is configured to update the number of seconds displayed according to the elapsed time, and notifies the player of the remaining period of the chance zone (design confirmation period). Further, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "Aim for a small attacker" is displayed to indicate the game content during the chance zone (during the symbol confirmation period).

The number of seconds displayed in this remaining period display mode may be set so as to indicate all of the remaining remaining period when entering the chance zone, or a period (seconds) shorter than the set symbol confirmation period. May be set to indicate, and a new number of seconds may be added to the number of seconds in the remaining period display mode displayed according to the passage of time. In addition, it is set to indicate a period (number of seconds) shorter than the set symbol confirmation period, and after the set period has elapsed, the remaining period display mode is set to "? Seconds", and the remaining period is the player. You may not understand it.

Further, in the tenth embodiment, the remaining period display mode is set so as to indicate the remaining period of the symbol fixing period in seconds, but it is possible to make the player understand that the remaining period is decreasing. Any aspect can be used, for example, the character 811 may be configured to suggest the remaining period by using an animation until it is caught by the enemy, or the period until the container containing the liquid is emptied may be used. It may be configured to suggest the remaining period. In this way, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the remaining period by using an animation showing the process of the story instead of the number of seconds.

<About the electrical configuration in the tenth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 269 to 273. The tenth embodiment is different from the second embodiment described above in that the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the contents of the RAM 203 are different from each other. The other electrical configurations are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 269 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 269, in the tenth embodiment, the small hit random number table 202b, the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab, and the out-of-type selection table 202ad are deleted from the ROM 202 in the second embodiment described above. , The second hit random number table 202ia is replaced with the second hit random number 10 table 202ia, and the jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib is provided instead of the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa, and a new specific ball entry operation pattern table 202ic is added. Is different.

The second hit random number 10 table 202ia is a second hit determined to be a hit in a state where a low probability state of a normal symbol is set with respect to the above-mentioned second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 15 (c)). The difference is that the range of the random number counter C4 is different, and the other points are the same. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents specified in the second random number 10 table 202ia will be described with reference to FIG. 270. FIG. 270 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the random number 10 table 202ia per second. As shown in FIG. 270, in the second random number 10 table 202ia, there are 231 random numbers that can be hit by the normal symbol in the low probability state (during the normal state and the latent state) of the normal symbol as the game state. , The range is "0 to 230". While the total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 233, the total number of winning random numbers is 231. Therefore, the probability of winning a normal symbol is "231/233".

On the other hand, in the high probability state (probability change state, time saving state) of the normal symbol, there are 232 random values that can be hit by the normal symbol, and the range is "0 to 231". Since the total number of random numbers that can be hit by the second random number counter C4 is 233, the total number of hit random numbers is 232, so the probability of hitting a normal symbol is "232/233". As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the random number value that is a hit of the ordinary symbol is configured to have a high probability (231/233) even for the low probability state of the ordinary symbol.

With this configuration, even in the gaming state (normal state, latent state) in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the gaming state (probability change state, time saving) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. Even if it is in the state), it is possible to easily win the prize in the lottery of ordinary symbols. In addition, since the high probability state of the normal symbol is configured so that the probability of winning is slightly higher than the low probability state of the normal symbol, the high probability of the normal symbol is higher than the low probability state of the normal symbol. It is configured so that the state is more advantageous. Further, the opening pattern of the specific accessory 4640a executed in the winning game executed when the winning is won is in the high probability state of the normal symbol as compared with the case of winning in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol. Since an open pattern is set in which it is easier for the ball to enter the specific entry port 4640 if the player wins the game, the high probability state of the normal symbol is more advantageous than the low probability state of the normal symbol. There is. It should be noted that the opening pattern of the specific entry port 4640 executed in the hit game of the normal symbol is not the state of the normal symbol (high probability state, low probability state) when the winning is won by the lottery of the normal symbol, but the winning game. It may be configured to be set according to the state of the normal symbol (high probability state, low probability state) at the time of executing.

The jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib is a data table for selecting a jackpot type when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, and is the same as the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa of the second embodiment described above. A plurality of jackpot types are defined in association with the value of the per-type counter C2.

Here, with reference to FIG. 271, the contents of the jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib will be described in detail. FIG. 271 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib. The same elements as those specified in the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa used in the second embodiment described above (for example, the time reduction counter 203f and the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad) are designated by the same reference numerals. And the detailed explanation is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 271, the jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib defines a plurality of jackpot types in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2, and is set in the time saving counter 203f for each jackpot type. The value to be set, the setting status of the probability change flag 203g, and the value set in the fixed time counter 203ad are specified.

Specifically, in the jackpot type (big hit A1 to jackpot A3) of the jackpot A in which the round game of 15 rounds is executed, the time saving counter 203f is set regardless of the game state when selected (when the jackpot is won). It is specified that the value of "10000" is set, and the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON. That is, when the jackpot A (big hit A1 to A3) is selected as the jackpot type, the probabilistic state (high probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) is set until the next jackpot is won. It stipulates. In the tenth embodiment, "10000" is set as the value of the time saving counter 203f in order to continue the high probability state of the normal symbol until the next big hit is won, but the present invention is limited to this. However, for example, a flag that is set to be on until the next big hit may be used.

Furthermore, as the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol, it is stipulated that the jackpot A1 is set to "5 seconds", the jackpot A2 is set to "60 seconds", and the jackpot A3 is set to "150 seconds". The jackpot A1 is defined in the range where the value of the counter C2 (0 to 99) is "0 to 19", the jackpot A2 is defined in the range of "20 to 23", and the jackpot A3 is defined in the range "24". That is, in the tenth embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to the jackpot A (big hits A1 to A3) is executed in 25% of the cases where the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and 80% (20 / 20 /) of them. It is stipulated that 25) is the jackpot A1, 16% (4/25) is the jackpot A2, and 4% (1/25) is the jackpot A3.

That is, in the tenth embodiment, even if the jackpot in which the most advantageous jackpot game (15 rounds of jackpot game) is executed is won, the lottery result is stopped and displayed to the player (design). If a short symbol confirmation period is selected as the confirmation period), the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed will be shortened. Therefore, for the special symbol lottery, the player can pay attention not only to whether or not the player has won the big hit, but also to the length of the symbol determination period, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the tenth embodiment, a configuration is used in which the symbol determination period is associated with the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a lottery for selecting the jackpot operation content (big hit type) and a lottery. The lottery for selecting the symbol fixing period and the lottery may be configured to be executed independently. In this case, since a plurality of symbol determination periods can be combined for a plurality of jackpot types, it is possible to provide game playability that is difficult for the player to predict.

Next, similarly to the above-mentioned jackpots A1 to A3, jackpots B1 to B3, jackpots C1 to C3, and jackpots D1 to D3 are defined, respectively.

Specifically, when the jackpot B (big hit B1 to jackpot B3) is set, the game content (5-round game) of the jackpot game, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the jackpot A, is selected (the jackpot is won). The value of "10000" is set in the time saving counter 203f when the gaming state of (when) is the normal state (low probability state of the normal symbol), and the value of "10" is set in the case of the time saving state and the probability change state. It is specified that the probability change flag 203g is set to ON.

That is, if the jackpot B is won, the jackpot game that is more disadvantageous than the jackpot A is executed, but if the game state is set to a time saving state or a probability change state, the player is asked after the jackpot game is completed. It is stipulated to be able to provide a state in which an advantageous gaming state can be set (a gaming state in which the high probability state of the special symbol is high until the next big hit and the high probability state of the normal symbol ends in 10 special symbol fluctuations). There is. Therefore, the jackpot A and the jackpot B are jackpots in which the jackpot A is more advantageous as the content of the jackpot game, but the jackpot B may be more advantageous as the game state set after the jackpot ends.

Furthermore, it is stipulated that the jackpot B1 is set to "30 seconds", the jackpot B2 is set to "90 seconds", and the jackpot B3 is set to "120 seconds" as the symbol determination period of the special symbol. The jackpot B1 is defined in the range of the counter C2 (0 to 99) in the range of "25 to 29", the jackpot B2 is defined in the range of "30 to 44", and the jackpot B3 is defined in the range of "45 to 49". There is.

That is, in the tenth embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to the jackpot B (big hits B1 to B3) is executed in 25% of the cases where the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and 20% (5 / 5 /) of them. It is stipulated that 25) is the jackpot B1, 60% (15/25) is the jackpot B2, and 20% (5/25) is the jackpot B3. Here, to explain the symbol fixing period that can be set in the case of the jackpot A and the symbol fixing period that can be set in the case of the jackpot B, the maximum value of the symbol fixing period of the jackpot A is larger than that of the jackpot B. Although it is stipulated to be longer, it is stipulated that the average value of the symbol fixing period set for the jackpot B is longer than that for the jackpot A.

In this way, the jackpot type (high risk high return) where the maximum value of the symbol confirmation period that can be set is large but the average value is small, and the jackpot type that the maximum value of the symbol confirmation period that can be set is small but the average value is large. (Low risk low return) is provided and the symbol confirmation period is set based on the selected jackpot type, so that the symbol confirmation period is set rather than completely randomly set. On the other hand, it is possible to make the player think that there is some kind of rule. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the game.

In this embodiment, the tendency of the symbol determination period that can be set according to the big hit type big classification (big hit A to big hit C) is different, but the tendency is not limited to this, and each big hit type big classification (big hit type). A high-risk, high-return symbol determination period selection group and a low-risk, low-return symbol determination period selection group may be provided within the jackpot A to jackpot C). In addition, even though the average value (expected value) of the symbol confirmation period that can be set is the same, from among a plurality of symbol confirmation period selection groups in which the maximum value and the minimum value of the symbol confirmation period that can be set are different. The player may be configured to be able to select a desired symbol determination period selection group, and may be configured to set the symbol determination period using the symbol determination period selection group selected by the player.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 271. As described above, in the present embodiment, the ratio of the jackpot type (big hit A1 to jackpot B3) in which the probability variation flag 203g is set to on after the jackpot game is completed, the so-called probability variation jackpot, is 50% (50/100) of the whole. For the remaining 50%, a jackpot type that sets the probability variation flag 203g to off after the jackpot game is completed, so-called normal jackpot, is selected.

Specifically, when the jackpot C (big hit C1 to jackpot C3) in which the game content (15 rounds game) of the same jackpot game as the jackpot A described above is set is selected (when the jackpot is won). It is stipulated that the value of "50" is set in the time reduction counter 203f regardless of the game state, and the probability variation flag 203g is stipulated to be set to off.

That is, when the jackpot C is won, the jackpot game that is advantageous to the player is executed as in the jackpot A, but the high probability state of the special symbol is not set after the jackpot game is completed, and the time reduction state of 50 times is performed. Is specified to be set. Therefore, the jackpot C is executed as a jackpot game that is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot B described above, but the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot is a jackpot that is more disadvantageous than the jackpot A and the jackpot B described above. It is a type.

Furthermore, it is stipulated that the jackpot C1 is set to "5 seconds", the jackpot C2 is set to "60 seconds", and the jackpot C3 is set to "150 seconds" as the symbol determination period of the special symbol. The jackpot C1 is defined in the range where the value of the counter C2 (0 to 99) is "50 to 54", the jackpot C2 is defined in the range of "55 to 64", and the jackpot C3 is defined in the range "65 to 74". There is.

That is, in the tenth embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to the jackpot C (big hits C1 to C3) is executed in 25% of the cases where the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and 20% (5 / 5 /) of them. It is stipulated that 25) is the jackpot C1, 40% (10/25) is the jackpot C2, and 40% (10/25) is the jackpot C3. Here, the jackpot C is defined so that the type of symbol determination period (5 seconds, 60 seconds, 150 seconds) that can be set is the same as that of the jackpot A described above, but the selection ratio is different. It is stipulated that the average value (expected value) of the symbol fixing period that can be set is higher than that of the jackpot A. As a result, the jackpot C is a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous than the jackpot A in terms of the content of the jackpot game and the game state set after the jackpot game ends, but the jackpot C is a jackpot with respect to the symbol confirmation time in which the RUSH game is executed. It is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than A.

Finally, in the jackpot D (big hit D1 to jackpot D3) in which the game content (5-round game) of the same jackpot game as the jackpot B described above is set, the game state when selected (when the jackpot is won). Regardless of this, it is specified that the value of "50" is set in the time reduction counter 203f, and the probability variation flag 203g is set to off.

That is, if the jackpot D is won, the jackpot game that is disadvantageous to the player is executed as in the jackpot B, and after the jackpot game is completed, the game state that is disadvantageous to the player is set as in the jackpot C. Has been done. Therefore, the jackpot D is the jackpot type that is most disadvantageous to the player among the above-mentioned jackpot types.

Furthermore, it is stipulated that the jackpot D1 is set to "30 seconds", the jackpot D2 is set to "90 seconds", and the jackpot D3 is set to "120 seconds" as the symbol determination period of the special symbol. The jackpot D1 is defined in the range where the value of the counter C2 (0 to 99) is "75 to 84", the jackpot D2 is defined in the range of "85 to 94", and the jackpot D3 is defined in the range "95 to 99". There is.

That is, in the tenth embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to the jackpot D (big hits D1 to D3) is executed in 25% of the cases where the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and 40% (10 / 10 /) of them. It is stipulated that 25) is the jackpot D1, 40% (10/25) is the jackpot D2, and 20% (8/25) is the jackpot D3. Here, the jackpot D is defined so that the type of symbol determination period (30 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds) that can be set is the same as that of the jackpot B described above, but the selection ratio is different. It is stipulated that the average value (expected value) of the symbol fixing period that can be set is lower than that of the jackpot B.

As described above, the jackpot D is a jackpot type that is most disadvantageous to the player in any of the jackpot game content, the game state set after the jackpot game ends, and the symbol determination time in which the RUSH game is executed.

The specific ball entry operation pattern table 202ic is a data table in which the content of the opening operation of the small attacker 4650 executed when the ball enters the specific ball entry port 4640 is defined, and the small attacker 4650 is released. The opening operation content of the small attacker 4650 is defined according to the value of the first type counter C2 and the gaming state at the time when the ball enters.

Here, with reference to FIG. 272, the contents specified in the specific ball entry motion pattern table 202ic will be described. FIG. 272 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the specific ball entry motion pattern table 202ic. As shown in FIG. 272, in the tenth embodiment, the operation content of the small attacker 4650 is defined to be the same regardless of the game state, and the game state and the value of the first type counter C2 are set. It is stipulated that the open waiting time differs depending on the situation.

Specifically, as the operation content of the small attacker 4650, an opening operation in which the opening / closing door 4650a of the small attacker 4650 is opened once is set, and the opening operation is such that the opening time reaches 1.5 seconds. Continue until the number of winning balls reaches 10. The ending period in which the opening operation is completed and the opening / closing door 4650a is closed is specified to be set for 0.5 seconds.

Next, the gaming state is the normal state, the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 89", the open waiting time is defined as "normal 1" of 20 seconds, and the opening standby time is defined in the range of "90 to 98". , "Normal 2" with an opening waiting time of 2 seconds is specified, and "normal 3" with an opening waiting time of 0.5 seconds is specified for the value of "99". Further, when the game state is a time saving state or a probable change state, the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 39", and the opening standby time of 10 seconds is defined as "time saving 1", and "40 to 89". In the range of "", "time reduction 2" with an opening waiting time of 5 seconds is specified, and in the values of "90 to 99", "time saving 3" with an opening waiting time of 2 seconds is specified. Further, the gaming state is the latent state, the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 89", and the open waiting time of 0.5 seconds is defined as "latent 1", and "90 to 97". In the range of "", "latent probability 2" with an opening waiting time of 0.2 seconds is defined, and in the values of "98 to 99", "latent probability 3" with an opening waiting time of 2 seconds is defined.

As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the opening waiting time is configured to be significantly different depending on the gaming state, and when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the ball is placed on the small attacker 4650. Even if the ball enters, the player's ball does not increase, but on the other hand, when the latent state is set as the game state, the small attacker 4650 is frequently opened, so that the player's possession You can increase the number of spheres.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 273. FIG. 273 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 203 in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 273, the RAM 203 of the tenth embodiment has a second special symbol execution area 203b, a special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i, and a small hit with respect to the RAM 203 of the second embodiment described above (see FIG. 95). Flag 203k, special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s, normal figure short fluctuation flag 203t, winning counter 203u, probability variation counter 203aa, special figure 2 symbol confirmation flag 203ac, special figure 2 confirmation time counter 203ae Is deleted, and the probability change flag 203g, the specific entry flag 203ia, and the specific entry invalid flag 203ib are added. Since the other elements are the same as the RAM 203 of the second embodiment described above, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, since the probability variation flag 203g has the same contents as the RAM 203 (see FIG. 21) of the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The specific entry flag 203ia is a flag for indicating that the ball has entered the specific entry port 4640, and is set to ON when it is determined that the ball has entered the specific entry port 4640. It is a thing. The specific ball entry flag 203ia causes a ball to enter the specific ball entry port 4640 in the specific ball entry process (see S196 in FIG. 278) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 274) of the main control device 110. When it is determined that the operation has been performed (S11501: Yes in FIG. 278), it is set to ON (see S11505 in FIG. 278).

Then, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (see S395 in FIG. 276), it is determined whether or not it is set to on (see S496 in FIG. 276), and if it is determined to be on (see FIG. 276). S496: Yes), a process for forcibly removing the lottery result of the first special symbol executed this time is executed (see S412 in FIG. 276). Then, it is set to off when the specific ball entry operation is completed.

As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the small attacker 4650 is configured to be opened when the ball enters the specific entry port 4640, and the specific entry for opening the small attacker 4650. When the operation scenario is set, the process of forcibly removing the lottery result of the first special symbol so as not to be a big hit is executed. As a result, since the jackpot of the first special symbol is not won during the period when the small attacker 4650 is open, it is possible to prevent the operation of opening the small attacker 4650 from being executed in duplicate. .. Furthermore, in order to make the variable ball entry means (small attacker 4650, second variable winning device 650), which is in a state where it is difficult for the ball to enter in the normal state (closed state), into a state in which the ball can easily enter (open state). It is possible to prevent the control of the above from being executed at the same time (overlapping).

The specific entry invalid flag 203ib is for indicating a period (specific entry invalid period) in which the operation of opening the small attacker 4650 is not performed when the ball enters the specific entry port 4640. It is set to on when the specific ball entry invalid period is set.

When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 10 (see S296 in FIG. 277), the specific ball entry invalid flag 203ib is determined to be on (S801: Yes in FIG. 277). ), Set to on (see S892 in FIG. 277). Then, in the specific ball entry process (S196 in FIG. 278), when the setting status is determined (S11502 in FIG. 278) and it is determined that the specific ball entry invalid flag 203ib is set to ON (S11502 in FIG. 278: Yes), the process of setting the specific ball entry motion scenario (S11504 in FIG. 278) is skipped. As a result, it is possible to prevent the small attacker 4650 from being opened based on the ball entering the specific entry port 4640 during the period during which the jackpot game is being executed.

<Regarding the control process in the tenth embodiment>
Here, the control process in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 274 to 278. In the tenth embodiment, since the configuration of the second special symbol is deleted and the configuration of the specific entry port 4640 is added to the second embodiment described above, the content of the control process to be executed is also included. The difference is that the control process related to the lottery (discrimination) of the second special symbol is deleted, and the control process executed when the ball enters the specific entry port 4640 is added. In addition, the control processing is different due to the difference in the control processing described above.

Specifically, instead of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment described above, the timer interrupt process 10 (see FIG. 274) is replaced with the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 97). The special symbol variation process 10 (see S195 in FIG. 275) is replaced with S154), and the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (see S395 in FIG. 276) is replaced with the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98). The point of executing the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 10 (see S296 of FIG. 277) instead of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see S257 of FIG. 99), and the specific ball entry process (see FIG. 278). It differs in that S196) of the above is added. Other than that, the same processing is executed. The same processing is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition to the above-mentioned contents, the specific contents of the control process (for example, the processing contents related to the second special symbol change) may be changed according to the configuration of the tenth embodiment. Other than the above-mentioned parts, the difference is that the corresponding processing is simply deleted, which can be easily conceived by a person skilled in the art, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 274, the contents of the timer interrupt process 10 executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 274 is a flowchart showing the contents of the timer interrupt process 10 in detail. In the tenth embodiment, the subroutine of the special symbol variation process 10 (S195) is executed instead of the special symbol variation process 2 (S154) for the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) in the second embodiment. The difference is that the subroutine of the specific ball entry process (S196) is executed. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the timer interrupt process 10 is executed, the processes S101 to S103 are executed in the same manner as the timer interrupt process described above, and then the special symbol variation process 10 (S195) is executed. In the special symbol variation processing 10 (S195), the above-mentioned special symbol variation processing 2 (see FIG. 97) can be made to execute a new special symbol variation and a point that the variation processing related to the second special symbol is deleted. The difference is that the processing content for determining whether or not it is possible has been changed. The detailed contents of the special symbol variation processing 10 (S195) will be described later with reference to FIG. 275.

Returning to FIG. 274, the explanation will be continued. When the special symbol variation process 10 (S195) is completed in the timer interrupt process 10, the same processes of S105 to S108 as in the above-mentioned special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 97) are executed, and then the specific ball entry is performed. After executing the process (S196), another process (S109) is executed to end this process.

Here, the specific ball entry process (S196) is a process executed when the ball enters the specific ball entry port 4640 (see FIG. 267), and the ball enters the specific ball entry port 4640. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the small attacker 4650 is opened, or whether or not the current entry is effectively handled, and a process for making a setting based on the determination result is performed. Specifically, the detailed contents of the specific ball entry process (S196) will be described later with reference to FIG. 278.

Next, the contents of the special symbol variation processing 10 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 275. FIG. 275 is a flow chart showing the control contents of the special symbol variation processing 10 (S195) in the tenth embodiment. When this special symbol variation process 10 (S195) is executed, it is first determined whether the current gaming state is during a big hit or during a specific ball entry (S295). In the process of S295, when it is determined that the jackpot middle flag 203o is set to on, it is determined that the current jackpot is in progress, and when it is determined that the specific entry flag 203ia is set to on. It is determined that the current ball is in the specific ball.

In the process of S295, when it is determined that the current gaming state is a big hit or a specific ball entry (S295: Yes), the special figure variation process 2 of the second embodiment described above (see S154 of FIG. 97). The same process of S202 and S203 is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S295, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not during the big hit or the specific ball entry (S295: No), the special figure variation process 2 of the second embodiment described above (S154 in FIG. 97). The same processing of S204, S205, S206, and S251 as in (see) is executed.

Then, in the process of S251, when it is determined that the special figure 1 symbol determination flag 203ab is not set to on (set to off), the first special symbol change start process 10 (S297) is executed. , End this process. The first special symbol variation start process 10 (S297) is the first special symbol variation start process (S208 in FIG. 33) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see S154 in FIG. 97) in the second embodiment described above. The difference is that the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (see S395 in FIG. 276) is executed instead of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 34). Since the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (see S395 in FIG. 276) is the same except for this, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the processing of S206, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is 0 (S206: Yes), or in the processing of S251, the special figure 1 symbol determination flag 203ab is set to ON. When it is determined that the case is true (S251: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 10 (S296) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (S395) will be described with reference to FIG. 276. FIG. 276 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (S395). In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (S395), the present is a high probability state of the special symbol with respect to the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98) of the above-mentioned second embodiment described above. When determining whether or not to refer to the probability variation flag 203g instead of the probability variation counter 203aa and whether or not to execute the lottery (big hit determination) of the first special symbol this time, special figure 2 It differs in that it refers to the specific entry flag 203ia instead of the jackpot flag 203i. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are described in detail later with the same reference numerals.

When the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (S395) is executed, first, the same process of S401 as in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98) of the second embodiment described above is performed. After that, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S495). When it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON in the processing of S495, since the current state is the high probability state of the special symbol, the lottery result of this time is based on the first random number table 202a for the high probability time. (S403).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is not set to ON in the processing of S495, since the current state is the low probability state of the special symbol, this time based on the first random number table 202a for the low probability time. The lottery result is acquired (S404). Next, when the processing of the above-mentioned S403 or S404 is completed, it is determined whether or not the specific entering ball flag 203ia is set to ON (S496), and when it is determined that it is set to ON (S496: Yes). That is, when it is determined that the ball has entered the specific entry port 4640 and the specific entry operation is being executed, the processing (S407 to S410) based on the determination of the special symbol being executed (big hit determination) is skipped. Then, after executing the same processing of S412 as the first special symbol jackpot determination processing 2 (see S356 of FIG. 98) of the second embodiment described above, this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S496, when it is determined that the specific ball entering flag 203ia is not set on (set to off) (S496: No), the first special symbol of the second embodiment described above is described. The same processes of S406 to S410 as in the jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98) are executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 277, the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 10 (S296) will be described. FIG. 277 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 10 (S296). The first special symbol variation stop process 10 (S296) deletes the update process related to the probability variation counter 203aa with respect to the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (see S257 of FIG. 99) of the second embodiment described above. A control to set a status command according to the setting status of the time reduction counter 203f and the probability change flag 203g has been added, and the content of the processing executed when the first jackpot flag 203h is set to ON has been partially changed. It is different in that it was done.

Specifically, when the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 10 (S296) is executed, first, the same S851 as the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99) of the second embodiment described above is executed. -The process of S854 is executed. Further, even when it is determined in the processing of S853 that the value of the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad is not 0 (1 or more) (S853: No), the first special symbol fluctuation stop of the second embodiment described above is performed. The process (S860) during the same fixed time as the process 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99) is executed.

When the processing of S854 is completed, next, a state command corresponding to the setting status of the time saving counter 203f and the setting status of the probability change flag 203g is set (S891), and then it is shown that the determination period of the first special symbol has ended. Special figure 1 for this purpose Set the command for ending the fixed period (S858). After that, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S801), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S801: Yes), the specific ball entry invalid flag 203ib is set to ON. (S892), a specific entry invalid command is set to indicate that the specific entry invalid flag 203ib is set to ON (S893). The command set here is the voice lamp control device by the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) of the main control device 110 in the same manner as the command set in the other control processes of the main control device 110. It is output to 113. By receiving the specific ball entry invalid command, the voice lamp control device 113 determines the period during which the specific ball entry operation is not executed even if the ball enters the specific ball entry port 4640, and the third is based on the determination result. The display mode displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 81 can be variably set.

When the process of S893 is completed, the same processes of S805 and S807 as those of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see S257 of FIG. 99) of the second embodiment described above are then executed to end this process. In the present embodiment, a process (S894) for setting the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h and the probability variation flag 203g to off is provided between the processing of S805 and the processing of S807, but the processing of S894 is provided. Since the target of the processing executed for the probability variation counter 203aa in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99) of the second embodiment described above is only changed to the probability variation flag 203g, the details thereof. Explanation is omitted.

Next, the contents of the specific ball entry process (S196) will be described with reference to FIG. 278. FIG. 278 is a flowchart showing the contents of the specific ball entry process (S196). This specific ball entry process (S196) is executed by the timer interrupt process 10 (see FIG. 274) that is repeatedly executed every 2 milliseconds in the main control device 110, and is executed at the specific ball entry port 4640. When it is determined that the ball has entered, various processes are executed.

Specifically, when the specific ball entry process (S196) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (ball entry) in the specific ball entry port 4640 (S11501). In the process of S11501, determination is executed with reference to the detection result of the detection switch (not shown) for detecting that the ball has entered the specific entry port 4640. In the process of S11501, if it is determined that there is no winning (winning) of the ball to the specific entry port 4640 (S11501: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S11501, when it is determined that the ball has won (winned) in the specific entry opening 4640 (S11501: Yes), then it is determined whether the specific entry invalid flag 203ib is set to ON. (S11502), when it is determined that the ball is set to ON (S1152: No), that is, during a period in which the specific ball entry operation based on the ball winning (winning) to the specific entry port 4640 is not executed. If there is, this process is terminated as it is. If it is determined in the process of S11502 that the specific ball entry invalid flag 203ib is not set to on (set to off) (S1152: No), then, based on the specific ball entry operation pattern table 202ic. , The specific ball entry pattern this time is determined (S11503).

Here, the contents executed in the process of S11503 will be described. As described above with reference to FIG. 272, the specific ball entry operation pattern table 202ic has a plurality of specific ball entry patterns (specific ball entry patterns) corresponding to the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 and the current gaming state. The operation scenario pattern) is specified, and in the process of S11503, the current game state is read from the game state information stored in the other memory area 203z of the RAM 203, and the value of the first type counter C2 is set. By acquiring it, the specific ball entry pattern this time is determined.

After finishing the process of S11503, next, the specific entry motion scenario corresponding to the determined specific entry pattern is set (S11504), and the specific entry flag 203ia is set to ON (S11505). Then, a specific ball entry command for indicating that the specific ball entry operation scenario is in the set period is set (S11506), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the tenth embodiment, since the specific entry port 4640 for executing the operation of opening the small attacker 4650 when the ball enters is provided, the ball is directed to the player. It is possible to make it easier to watch the flow situation of.

In addition, the period (waiting period) from when the ball enters the specific entry port 4640 until the small attacker 4650 is opened is set to the gaming state set when the ball enters the specific entry port 4640. Since it is configured to be different depending on the game state, it is possible to set a state in which the small attacker 4650 is easy to open and a state in which it is difficult to open the small attacker 4650 according to the game state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the currently set game state, and thus it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the tenth embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, the game is played during the period (symbol confirmation period) in which the third symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit is stopped and displayed. It is configured so that an advantageous gaming state (latent state) that is advantageous to the player is set, and when a ball enters the specific entry port 4640 while this advantageous gaming state is set, another It is configured so that the opening operation is set so that the period (waiting period) from when the ball enters the specific entry port 4640 to when the small attacker 4650 is opened is shorter than the state in which the game state is set. There is.

As a result, the jackpot of the special symbol is won, and the period from the stop display of the symbol (special symbol, the third symbol) for showing the lottery result to the start of the jackpot game, that is, the jackpot to the player. During the period from the notification of winning to the actual start of the big hit game, it is possible to frequently execute a special game in which the small attacker 4650 can be released.

In the tenth embodiment, the small attacker 4650 is easily released during the period (symbol confirmation period) in which the third symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit is stopped and displayed (latent probability). The state) is set, but a gaming state (latent state) in which the small attacker 4650 is easily released may be set at other timings, for example, the above-mentioned first. As in the first embodiment, it may be set during the variable display of the special symbol to indicate that the jackpot has been won, or as in the sixth embodiment described above, the round game is started after the jackpot game is started. It may be set to the period until it is executed (the opening period of the jackpot game). Further, it may be set to only one of the above-mentioned periods, or may be set by combining a plurality of periods.

Further, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, even if it is configured to execute a special game that can open the small attacker 4650 frequently before notifying the player that the lottery result of this time is a big hit. good. With this configuration, it is possible to predict that the jackpot game will be executed after the end of the special game due to the execution of the special game, so that the interest of the game can be improved. ..

Further, in the case where the special game and the jackpot game are continuously executed as in the tenth embodiment, at least a part of the display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It is good to configure it so that it is a series of productions that straddle the special game and the jackpot game. In this case, for example, the period during which the special game can be executed, that is, the information regarding the length of the symbol determination period set this time, the information regarding the game content (number of rounds) of the jackpot game, and the game set after the jackpot game ends. It is advisable to set the above-mentioned production mode of the series of effects based on the information regarding the state. As a result, it will be executed in the future based on the game content (game content of the special game, game content of the jackpot game) executed while the series of effects is displayed, and the effect content of the series of effects being displayed. It is possible to make the player predict the content of the game.

Further, in the case where the jackpot game is continuously executed after the end of the special game as in the tenth embodiment, the special game and the jackpot game are notified to the player as one jackpot game. You may set the effect mode to be performed. With this configuration, the content of the jackpot game in the production can be a combination of the setting content of the special game and the setting content of the jackpot game, so that the game content of one jackpot game can be combined. Can be set in various ways.

In the tenth embodiment, when the final display period of the special symbol indicating the jackpot winning ends (elapses), the jackpot game is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the special symbol When the ball passes through a specific area while the fixed display period has elapsed, the jackpot game is configured to be executed, and from the time when the fixed display period of the special symbol has passed until the ball passes through the specific area. The small attacker 4650 may be configured to set a gaming state (latent state) in which it is easy to open during the period.

<About the modified example of the tenth embodiment>
Here, a modified example of the tenth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIG. 279. In this modification, the starting gate 670 is provided at a position where a ball flowing down the left side region of the game board 13 (the left side region of the front view of the variable display device unit 80) can pass through the tenth embodiment described above. And, the point that the arrangement position of the specific entry port 4640 and the small attacker 4650 is changed is different. The other configurations are the same as those of the tenth embodiment, the same configurations are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the tenth embodiment described above, when the jackpot of the special symbol is won, the special symbol is variablely displayed for a predetermined period set as the variable display period, and the special symbol is set as the symbol confirmation period after the predetermined period elapses. It was configured to execute the jackpot game after displaying the suspension for a period. On the other hand, in this modification, after the special symbol is stopped and displayed for a specific period set as the symbol fixing period after the lapse of a predetermined period, the jackpot game is executed based on the ball passing through the start gate 670. It is configured in.

Then, in the period from the stop display of the special symbol to the execution of the jackpot game, that is, the total period of the symbol confirmation period and the start period until the ball passes through the start gate 670 after the symbol confirmation period has elapsed. , The advantageous gaming state (latent state) that is advantageous to the player is set.

According to the present modification configured as described above, it is possible to set an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player for a period other than a predetermined predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting the player to continue the advantageous game state for a longer period of time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 279, in this modification, the position where the ball launched to execute the special game in which the small hit attacker 4650 wins the ball, that is, the ball launched by the left-handed game can pass. Is provided with a starting gate 670. This makes it possible to prevent the special game from being performed without passing the ball through the starting gate 670 during the starting period described above.

Further, in this modification, the time from when the ball passes through the start gate 670 until the second variable winning device 650 is opened by the jackpot game is the time for the ball passing through the starting gate 670 to be the second variable winning device 650. It is configured to be shorter than the time required to reach. As a result, when the ball that has passed through the starting gate 670 reaches the second variable winning device 650, the second variable winning device 650 can be opened, so that the jackpot game can be efficiently performed. can.

As shown in FIG. 279, in this modification, a plurality of nails planted in the game board 13 are configured to change the flow direction of the ball, and the flow direction passes through the start gate 670. Since the ball is configured to pass through the start gate 670 when the direction is changed, it is difficult for the player to understand how long the start period will continue, and the game area of the game board 13 is set. It was possible to make the player interested in the flow of individual balls flowing down, but since the flowing direction of the balls is irregularly changed by multiple nails, the starting period continues for a long time. In some cases, it ended immediately.

Therefore, in the game area of the game board 13, the flow direction of the ball can be regularly distributed to the first direction and the second direction in the area where the ball can flow toward the start gate 670. A sphere flowing down the other flow path (second direction flow path) is directed toward the start gate 670 rather than one flow path (first direction flow path) distributed by the distribution means. It may be configured so that it can easily flow down.

With this configuration, it is possible to give a predetermined regularity to the flow of the ball flowing down the game area of the game board 13, so that the ball immediately passes through the start gate 670 during the start period. It is possible to prevent the situation that the situation occurs.

<About the modified example of the 7th embodiment>
Next, a modification of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 280 to 284. In the above-mentioned seventh embodiment, the ball enters the second entrance 3640 and the V winning device 650 is opened during the small hit game by one hit game of the second symbol (ordinary symbol). It was configured so that the presence or absence of the passage of the sphere to the specific region 650V in the inside could be set.

On the other hand, in this modification, in addition to the configuration of the seventh embodiment described above, the ball enters the second entrance 3640 and is small by the hit game of a plurality of second symbols (ordinary symbols). The difference is that it is possible to set whether or not the ball has passed through the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 which is opened during the winning game. Further, a maximum of four values of the second random number counter C4 that can be acquired by passing through the through gate 67 can be held and stored. Since the detailed configuration and control contents for holding and storing the second random number counter C4 are the same as those in the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 280, the content of the effect peculiar to the present modification executed by using the configuration of the present modification will be described. FIG. 280 schematically shows an example of a revival effect executed when the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is continuously won and the ball can pass through the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650. It is a schematic diagram.

As shown in FIG. 280, when the revival effect is executed, the character 811 is revived from the losing effect in the above-mentioned in-race effect using FIG. 202 (a), and the effect of winning is executed. During this revival production, a production in which the rival character 860 and the goal of the production during the race are skipped and the character 811 runs violently is executed in the main display area Dm. Here, the conditions under which the revival effect is executed will be briefly explained. In this modification, a predetermined hit game is executed in a state where the time saving state is set, and immediately after that, a normal state is set (in the next normal drawing lottery executed without a gap). When a specific winning game is executed, a ball enters the second entrance 3640 by the previously executed winning game, and the small winning game is won in the special figure 2 lottery executed based on the entry. During the hit small hit game, the ball that has flowed into the second passage 660b (see FIG. 195) due to the next hit game is configured to be able to pass through the specific region 650V, and such a state occurs. The possible state, that is, the result of the continuous drawing lottery (the result of preliminarily determining the winning information of the drawing included in the holding of the drawing) is a specific winning result, and each winning result The above-mentioned case where the game state at the time of executing the based hit game satisfies a predetermined condition, and the ball flows into the second passage 660b in at least the next (second) hit game among the continuous hit games. The resurrection production that was done is executed.

In this way, it is possible to provide a game result advantageous to the player (a state in which the ball passes through a specific area 650V during a small hit game) based on a plurality of normal drawing lottery, which is surprising to the player. It is possible to provide a certain game, and it is possible to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage. Further, by making it possible to execute an unexpected effect (revival effect) in correspondence with the above-mentioned unexpected game, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 281, the electrical configuration provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of this modification will be described. It should be noted that this modification is a modification of the above-mentioned seventh embodiment, and the basic electrical configuration is the same as that of the seventh embodiment. Here, only the configuration different from the above-described 7th embodiment will be described, and the other description will be omitted. FIG. 281 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the high probability second random number 11 table 202ja, and FIG. 281 (b) is a low probability second random number 11 table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents specified in 202jb schematically.

As shown in FIG. 281 (a), the second random number 11 table 202ja for high probability is referred to when the hit / fail determination of the second symbol is executed in the high probability state of the normal symbol, and has been described above. In the process of acquiring the lottery result (see S805 of FIG. 219) in the ordinary symbol variation process 7 (see S192 of FIG. 219) of the seventh embodiment, the currently set gaming state is the high probability state of the ordinary symbol. Referenced in some cases.

The second random number 11 table 202ja for high probability is different in that the second hit type (type per normal figure) is increased from the seventh embodiment described above. Specifically, C per normal figure is defined in the range where the value of the second random number counter C4 is "80 to 98". It should be noted that the second hit type, A per normal figure and B per normal figure, are the same as the above-mentioned seventh embodiment except that the corresponding range of the value of the second random number counter C4 is different. Therefore, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the selected second hit type (normal figure hit type) is set so that the operation content of the hit action executed is different according to the gaming state set at the timing when the hit action is executed. ..

The hit operation of A per normal figure and B per normal figure, which is executed in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, is omitted because it is the same as the seventh embodiment described above, but C per normal figure. The hitting motion is that the opening period is 0.1 seconds, the opening period is 2.5 seconds, the ending period is 1 second, and one ball enters the second entrance 3640 during the opening period. The operation is executed when the opening period ends.

That is, in the above-mentioned seventh embodiment, by setting the ending period of the time (3 seconds) or more required for the sphere to pass through the second passage 660b, based on the special figure 2 variation due to one normal drawing. During the executed small hit game, the ball flowing down to the second passage 660b based on other hits is configured so as not to pass through the specific area 650V, whereas the hit of the present variant is hit. In the hit game (hit motion) corresponding to C, the ending period is set shorter than the time required for the ball to pass through the second passage 660b (3 seconds) (0.1 seconds), and is usually executed immediately after. Based on the result of the lottery, the ball flowing into the second passage 660b can pass through the specific area 650V during the small hit game.

Specifically, when the special figure 2 lottery is executed by the winning action based on the C winning per normal figure, the next normal figure lottery can be executed 0.1 seconds after the start of the special figure 2 lottery, and then the next. If you win A per Fuzu by the Fuzu lottery, and the ball enters the second entrance 3640 in the shortest time (1.3 seconds) during the A per Fuzu, the C per Fuzu executed earlier The ball will flow into the second passage 660b 1.4 seconds after the special figure 2 lottery based on the above is started.

In such a case, the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery executed by the winning action based on the C winning per drawing is a small hit, and when the small hit game is executed, the normal drawing is performed during the small hit game. It is possible to construct a state in which the ball flowing into the second passage 660b can pass through the specific region 650V based on the winning A.

As described above, in this modified example, by winning a predetermined hit type (A, B per normal figure) immediately after winning a specific hit type (C per normal figure), a plurality of normal hits are hit. It is possible to provide a gaming state (passing the ball to a specific area 650V during a small hit game) that is advantageous to the player by the special drawing 2 lottery executed straddling the second passage and the flow of the ball to the second passage 660b. ..

The second random number 11 table 202jb for low probability is referred to when the hit / fail determination of the second symbol is executed in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, and the ordinary symbol variation process 7 of the above-mentioned seventh embodiment is used. In the process of acquiring the lottery result (see S805 of FIG. 219) in (see S192 of FIG. 219), it is referred to when the currently set gaming state is a low probability state of a normal symbol.

This low-probability second random number 11 table 202jb is different from the above-mentioned seventh embodiment in that different normal electric operation patterns are defined according to the second hit type (normal figure hit type). There is. Specifically, A per normal figure is defined in the range where the value of the second random number counter C4 is "0 to 19". If the game state when the winning action is executed is a low probability state, the winning game has an opening period of 0.1 seconds, an opening period of 1 second, and an ending period of 0.1 seconds. Is specified to be executed.

Further, B is defined for the value of the second random number counter C4 of "20". If the game state when the winning action is executed is a low probability state, the winning game with an opening period of 2 seconds, an opening period of 0.2 seconds, and an ending period of 3 seconds is executed. The value of the random number counter C4 per second is specified to be "21", and C per normal figure is specified. If the game state when the winning action is executed is a low probability state, the winning game with an opening period of 2 seconds, an opening period of 0.2 seconds, and an ending period of 3 seconds is executed. It is stipulated to be done. Then, "off" is defined in the range where the value of the random number counter C4 per second is "22 to 99".

Here, if a normal symbol is set to a low-probability state and a normal symbol is won, the winning game is electric only for a period during which the ball cannot enter the second entrance 3640. Although the accessory 3640a is configured so as not to be released, the opening period of the electric accessory 3640a is set to be long (1 second) only for the hit game based on the normal figure A. When this opening period of 1 second is set, the ball flows down on the electric accessory 3640a and flows down to a position facing the second passage 660b (see FIG. 198).

Then, when the opening period elapses for 1 second, the electric accessory 3640a is closed, the ball flows into the second passage 660b, and flows down toward the out port 66 as it is. In the normal state, since the ball does not enter the second entrance 3640, the V winning device 650 is not opened.

In this way, in the hit game executed in the low probability state of the normal symbol, the operation pattern (normal electric operation pattern) of the electric accessory 3640a is changed according to the set second hit type (normal symbol hit type). By making the passage through which the ball flows different, for example, it is possible to make the first variable winning device 65, which is opened during the jackpot game, win a ball that has passed through a plurality of passages. , It is possible to win multiple balls at once.

Further, in this modification, a hit game based on the normal symbol C is executed in a state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, and immediately after that, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set and the normal symbol hits A. When the corresponding hit game is executed, the ball that has flowed down the second passage 660b by the hit game corresponding to the normal figure hit A in the low probability state is based on the normal figure hit C executed in the high probability state. It is configured to be able to pass through a specific area 650V during the small hit game executed.

As a result, it is possible to execute a big hit game based on a small hit game even though the normal symbol has once moved to a low probability state, so that it is possible to provide a player with a surprising game. At the same time, it is possible to make the player enthusiastically play the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 282, the contents of the control process executed by the main control device 110 in this modification will be described. FIG. 281 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process 11. The through gate passing process 11 is acquired (stored) when the sphere passes through the through gate 67 with respect to the through gate passing process (see S107 in FIG. 49) executed by the seventh embodiment described above. The difference is that the process of determining (predicting) the game result in advance based on the values of various counters is executed.

When the through-gate passage process 11 (S157) is executed, first, the same processes of S1901 to S1905 as the through-gate passage process (see S107 of FIG. 49) executed by the seventh embodiment described above are executed, and then the processes of S1901 to S1905 are executed. Based on the counter value stored by the process of S1905, the winning / failing of the lottery of the ordinary symbol and the type of the normal symbol are predicted (S1951). Then, a general map winning information command including information indicating the predicted success / failure and the normal map hit type is set (S1952), and this process is terminated.

The detailed contents of the processes executed in S1951 and S1952 are those in which the targets of the processes of S1707 and S1708 of the start winning process (S105 of FIG. 47) executed for the special symbol are replaced with ordinary symbols. Therefore, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 283 and 284, the contents of the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in this modification will be described. FIG. 283 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 11. The command determination process 11 is a command (see S4182 in FIG. 226) that indicates the prize information of the normal symbol in addition to the prize information of the special symbol as the prize information with respect to the command determination process 7 (see S4182 of FIG. 226) executed by the seventh embodiment described above. The difference is that the process for determining that the Fuzu winning information command) has been received (see S12051) and the process executed when the Fuzu winning information command is received (see S12052) have been added. Are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 283, when it is determined that the winning information-related command (winning information command, general drawing winning information command) has been received (S12051: Yes), it is based on the received winning information command (general drawing winning information command). The winning information is stored in the winning information storage area 223b (S12010). Here, the winning information storage area used in this modification is configured to be able to store received winning information not only in the holding ball storage area of the special symbol but also in the holding ball storage area of the normal symbol. Then, when the processing of S12010 is completed, the normal drawing effect setting processing (S12052) is executed, and this processing is terminated.

Next, the contents of the normal drawing effect setting process (S12052) will be described with reference to FIG. 284. The normal symbol effect setting process (S12052) determines each information stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (see FIG. 21) based on the received general map winning information command, and a specific condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied, the process for specifying that the special effect can be executed is executed.

When the normal map effect setting process (S12052) is executed, first, it is determined whether the prize-related information received this time is the normal map prize information command (S13001), and if it is the normal map prize information command, the command is used. It is determined whether or not the information indicating C is included in the high-accuracy command (S13002). If it is determined in the process of S13002 that the information indicating C per the high-accuracy normal figure is included (S13002: Yes), the normal figure C winning flag is set to ON (S13003), and this process is terminated.

This Fuzu C winning flag is set to be turned on when the information (command) indicating C per high-accuracy Fuzu is received, and is set to Off the next time the Fuzu winning information command is received. It is a thing. As a result, it is possible to discriminate the received Fuzu winning information command after the Fuzu winning that indicates C per high-accuracy Fuzu.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S13002 that the information indicating C per high-accuracy normal map is not included (S13002: No), it is determined whether the information indicating A per low-accuracy normal map is included (S13002: No). (S13004), if it is determined that the item is not included (S13004: No), the winning flag of the normal figure C is set to off (S13007), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S13004 that the information indicating A per low-accuracy normal figure is included (S13004: Yes), it is determined whether the normal figure C winning flag is set to on (S13005), and it is turned on. If it is determined that it has been set (S13005: Yes), the special effect possible information is set in the corresponding Fuzu winning information (S13006), the Fuzu C winning flag is set to off, and this process ends.

If it is determined that the process is not set to ON in the process of S13005 (S13005: No), the process is terminated as it is. As a result, it is possible to predict in advance that A per low-accuracy map will be executed next to the high-accuracy map C, and it is possible to set a special effect according to the prediction result.

In addition, as in this modification, when giving a privilege that is advantageous to the player across the high probability state and the low probability state of the normal symbol, for example, the number of times the small hit is won (small hit). It is preferable to configure it so as to end the high probability state of the normal symbol based on the number of times the game is executed). As a result, the first general drawing lottery is executed in a high probability state, and the special drawing 2 lottery is executed by the winning game to win a small hit. Then, at the timing when the small hit game is executed, the high-probability state of the normal symbol is shifted to the low-probability state.

Since the high probability state of the normal symbol is still set at the timing when the special figure 2 lottery is executed, the next normal figure lottery is executed in the high probability state. Then, after the variation time when the small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, the winning game based on the next general drawing lottery is executed after the start timing of the small hit game to be executed. Set the fluctuation time of the fluctuation of the normal map in the stochastic state. With this configuration, the winning game based on the next general drawing lottery can be easily executed with the operation pattern in the low probability state.

<Modified example of the fourth embodiment>
Next, a modification of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 285 to 296. Among the above-described embodiments, in the embodiment using the technical idea of the first embodiment, the first is in the state where the probabilistic state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set. When a big hit is won by lottery of a special symbol (special figure 1), the game state during the jackpot fluctuation is set to be a latent state, and when the latent state is set, the second special symbol (2nd special symbol) By facilitating the lottery of the special figure 2), the small hit game is easily executed.

In the embodiment configured in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a game (so-called RUSH game) in which a small hit game is frequently generated by using the period during the big hit fluctuation of FIG. Since it is possible to continuously provide a plurality of different privilege games (RUSH game, jackpot game) to a player, the player can be more motivated to aim for a jackpot winning game. It is possible to improve the interest of.

Further, in the first embodiment described above, the jackpot winning of the special symbol is duplicated, and the jackpot is won in the lottery of the special figure 1 in order to prevent the player from being given an excessive privilege. In the lottery of Special Figure 2 executed during the jackpot fluctuation, the jackpot is not won. As a result, even if the special figure 2 lottery is executed a plurality of times during the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 1, the big hit of the special figure 2 will not be won. Therefore, the period from the end of the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 1 to the start of the jackpot game (the jackpot fluctuation period of the special figure 1) can be set as the RUSH game period.

In addition, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, it is stipulated that the length of the fluctuation time (minimum 60 seconds, maximum 600 seconds) that can be set when the jackpot of Special Figure 1 is won is set to have a range (minimum 60 seconds, maximum 600 seconds). 19 (b)), in the state where the probabilistic state is set as the game state, when the jackpot of the special figure 1 is won, that is, when the RUSH game is executed, FIG. 7 (a) is shown. As described above with reference to the above, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to stop and display the effect symbol 813 for suggesting the current jackpot fluctuation period. Then, the display of the effect symbol 813 which is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 1 starts according to the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 set this time and the type of the winning jackpot. It was configured to change the mode.

In this way, the player is configured to stop and display the effect symbol 813 on the third symbol display device 81 so as to suggest the length of the set special symbol fluctuation time instead of determining whether the special symbol lottery is successful or not. On the other hand, the display mode of the symbols stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 could be more interesting, and the effect of the effect could be enhanced.

However, in the above-mentioned production of the first embodiment, it is executed at the time when the jackpot fluctuation of FIG. 1 starts (at the time when the RUSH game starts), the length of the current RUSH game period, or after the end of the RUSH game. Since the content of the jackpot game is suggested to the player, there is a risk that the game motivation during the RUSH game may be reduced depending on the suggested content. Specifically, for example, a short fluctuation period (for example, 60 seconds) is set as the RUSH period (special figure 1 fluctuation period), and the winning jackpot type is more disadvantageous to the player than the other jackpot types. In the case of the type (for example, jackpot D), the jackpot winning of the special figure 1 this time is a lottery result that is not so advantageous to the player by grasping the display mode of the stopped-displayed effect symbol 813. There was a problem that the interest of the game during the RUSH period was lowered.

Here, if the display mode of the staging symbol 813 is configured so as not to be related to the length of the RUSH game period or the content of the jackpot game executed after the end of the RUSH game, the above-mentioned problem will occur. However, it is not an effective measure because it eliminates the enjoyment of predicting future game development (RUSH game period and jackpot game content) based on the display mode of the staging symbol 813.

On the other hand, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the lottery result (variable time, jackpot game content) of the changing special figure 1 is based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the variable period of the special figure 1. , The game state set after the jackpot game ends) is configured to execute the suggestion effect. Then, the effect mode of the suggestion effect is changed depending on the result (presence or absence of a hit) of the special figure 2 lottery executed during the variable period of the special figure 1 and the number of times.

With this configuration, the more the special figure 2 lottery is executed during the change period of the special figure 1, the easier it is to predict the lottery result of the special figure 1 that is changing. During the period, the player can be enthusiastically executed the special figure 2 lottery.

Further, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the RUSH game is executed by the special figure 2 lottery during the variable period of the special figure 1 in which the latent probability state is set, as in the first embodiment described above. Therefore, it is possible to more enthusiastically execute the special figure 2 lottery during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1.

It should be noted that the modified example of the fourth embodiment is a modification of the fourth embodiment using the configuration of the first embodiment described above, in which a part of the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed and the execution is performed. It is different from the point that the production mode to be performed is changed, and the other elements are configured to be the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the content of the production in the modified example of the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 285 and 286, a characteristic effect performed in the modified example of the fourth embodiment will be described. In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, during the RUSH game period (during the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation period in which the latent state is set), the lottery of the special figure 1 jackpot this time is based on the lottery of the special figure 2. It is configured to be different from the above-described fourth embodiment in that a suggestion effect for suggesting a result is executed.

In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, as the suggestion effect, the effect of suggesting the game content corresponding to the winning jackpot type and the game state set after the jackpot game is completed to the player is executed. ing. Then, in order to show the lottery result of the special figure 2, the display mode of the third symbol stopped and displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2 of the third symbol display device 81, the combination of numbers, and the combination of numbers can be changed, or during the RUSH period. The suggestion effect is executed by changing the effect mode of the RUSH middle effect (the effect of displaying the effect symbol 813 from the treasure box 812) showing the result of the special figure 2 lottery.

Next, an example of the actual production content will be described. Here, 110 seconds is set as the jackpot fluctuation time in Special Figure 1, 15 rounds of round games are executed as the jackpot game, and after the jackpot is completed, a probability change state that is advantageous to the player is set (big hit (big hit (big hit (big hit (big hit)). An example of winning the 15R probability change)) will be described. FIG. 285 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a small hit is won during the RUSH period, and FIG. 285 (b) is displayed when a loser is won during the RUSH period. It is a figure which showed an example of the display screen.

As shown in FIG. 285 (a), in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the remaining time of the current RUSH game period is displayed on the display screen (FIG. 7 (b)) of the first embodiment described above. The remaining time display 851 and the small hit number display 825 indicating the number of times a small hit was won during the current RUSH game period are different in that they are configured to be displayed, and are otherwise the same. .. The same elements (display contents) are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 285 (a) shows the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 10 seconds after the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation, and the remaining time display 851 is “100 seconds”, that is. A value obtained by subtracting 10 seconds that have already passed from the fluctuation time of 110 seconds is displayed, and "1" indicating that the number of small hits won during the RUSH game period is one is displayed on the small hit number display 825. There is. Since the value of the small hit number display 825 is configured to be updated (1 addition) at the timing when the small hit game is started, the state shown in FIG. 285 (a) is already 1. It indicates the state in which the second small hit is won (stopped and displayed) while the small hit game is being executed.

Next, the content of the effect related to the suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. 286 (b). FIG. 286 (b) shows a display screen when the lottery result of the special figure 2 is out of order. In this symbol 286 (b), "95 seconds" is displayed as the remaining time display 851. In this modification, as in the first embodiment described above, the variation time of the variation in Special Figure 1 is not subtracted during the period during which the small hit game is being executed. Therefore, FIG. 286 ( The state shown in b) is a state in which the small hit game is completed from the state shown in FIG. 286 (a) described above, and 5 seconds have elapsed thereafter. Therefore, the value of the small hit number display 825 is added by 1 from FIG. 286 (a), and "2" is displayed.

As described above, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the display mode (display mode of the third symbol or the effect symbol 813) for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery executed during the RUSH game period is used. Therefore, it is configured to suggest the result of the special figure 1 lottery currently being displayed in a variable manner to the player.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 285 (b), as a suggestion display mode, a stop display mode (Kanji) of the third symbol for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 which is stopped and displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2. Is different from the normal stop display mode (display mode shown in FIG. 285 (b)), or as the effect symbol 813 displayed from the treasure box 812, if it is different from the normal display mode. A gorgeous display mode is displayed.

In this way, by configuring so as to suggest the lottery result of the special figure 1 by using the display mode for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2, the lottery result of the special figure 2 and the lottery result of the special figure 1 can be obtained. , Can be discriminated by the display mode of one symbol, so that the player can be more interested in the display mode of the symbol that is stopped and displayed.

Further, as will be described in detail later, the smaller the remaining period of the RUSH game period, the easier it is to set the effect mode in which the lottery result of the special figure 1 is easily determined as the suggestion mode. Therefore, in any period during the RUSH game period, by executing the special figure 2 lottery, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game in order to grasp the lottery result of the special figure 1 in advance.

Next, the production content of the jackpot content suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. 286. As described above with reference to FIG. 285, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the symbol (third symbol or effect symbol 813) for showing the result of the special drawing 2 lottery executed during the RUSH game period. The display mode is configured to display a suggestion display mode in which the display mode is changed according to the lottery result of the special figure 1 during the variable display. In addition to this, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the lottery result of the special figure 2 executed during the RUSH game period (for example, the number of small wins has reached 10 times). In the case), the jackpot content suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result of the special figure 1 is configured to be executed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds).

As a result, the player enthusiastically executes the special figure 2 lottery while expecting that the jackpot content suggestion effect is executed during the RUSH game period, so that the operation of the game can be improved.

Here, the specific contents of the production will be described. FIG. 286 (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents displayed during the jackpot content suggestion effect, and FIG. 286 (b) is an example of display contents in which the effect result of the jackpot content suggestion effect is displayed. It is a figure which showed. In FIG. 286 (a), "10" is displayed as the small hit number display 825. Then, in order to notify the player that the number of small hits reaches 10 times is the execution timing (establishment condition) of the big hit content suggestion effect, the display mode of the small hit number display 825 is changed to a normal display mode (a normal display mode). A highlighting mode different from that of FIG. 285 (b) is displayed.

Further, when the jackpot content suggestion effect is executed, the next jackpot notice 865 is displayed in the lower left of the main display area Dm as a notification mode for notifying the game of the outline of the effect currently being executed, and the main display area Dm. Three treasure chests (treasure chest 812, treasure chest 860, treasure chest 870) are displayed. Of these three treasure chests, the treasure chest 812 is used to display the effect symbol 813 for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 as described above with reference to FIG. 285.

Then, the treasure box 860 suggests to the player whether or not the gaming state after the end of the next jackpot (after the end of the jackpot based on the currently variable display 1) is a gaming state advantageous to the player ( It is used for notification), and is displayed in a display mode with the characters "certain" to indicate that fact. In addition, the treasure box 870 is used to suggest (notify) the content (number of rounds, etc.) of the next big hit game to the player, and the letter "R" is added to indicate that fact. It is displayed in the displayed mode. As a result, even if a plurality of treasure chests are displayed in the main display area Dm, the player can easily grasp which treasure chest suggests (notifies) what, thus providing an easy-to-understand effect. can do.

In the sub-display area Ds, a display of "RUSH in progress" to indicate that the current RUSH game period is in progress and a comment of "Open the box with the power of V" to guide the jackpot content suggestion effect are displayed. Will be done. As shown in FIG. 286 (a), this jackpot content suggestion effect is executed independently of the effect for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 (the effect using the treasure box 812). During the period when this jackpot content suggestion effect is being executed, the jackpot content suggestion effect is prioritized (emphasized) and displayed over the effect for showing the lottery result of Special Figure 2. There is. Specifically, the treasure box (treasure box 860, treasure box 870) used for the jackpot content suggestion effect is displayed in a larger display mode than the treasure box (treasure box 812) used for the effect for showing the lottery result of Special Figure 2. It is configured to be. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the jackpot content suggestion effect.

Then, at the timing of showing the effect result of the jackpot content suggestion effect, the treasure chest 860 and the treasure chest 870 are opened as shown in FIG. 286 (b), and the display mode showing the content of the next jackpot is displayed from the inside. In the example shown in FIG. 286 (b), the treasure box 860 is opened and the character "lucky" is displayed as the game state suggestion display 861, and the treasure box 870 is opened and the character "odd number" is displayed as the round number suggestion display 871. To.

Further, the effect result of the jackpot content suggestion effect executed during one RUSH game period is displayed as a history on the suggestion history display 880. In this modification, the execution condition of the jackpot content suggestion effect can be satisfied multiple times during one RUSH game period, and the reliability of the suggestion content increases as the number of executions of the jackpot content suggestion effect increases. It is configured to be high (to make it easier for the player to grasp the actual lottery result).

By using the suggestion history display 880 in the present modification configured as described above and displaying the effect result of the jackpot content suggestion effect as a history, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect. Further, the suggestion history display 880 has a plurality of stages of display modes (“cross mark”, “triangle mark”, “circle mark”) based on the effect result of the jackpot content suggestion effect and the actual special figure 1 lottery result. Because it is configured to display The result can be notified.

In this modification, the display mode of the suggestion history display 880 is changed according to the effect result of the one-time jackpot content suggestion effect, but the display mode is not limited to this, for example, once. The suggestion history display 880 may be configured to have a specific display mode only when the jackpot content suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times during the RUSH game period and each effect result is a specific combination. With this configuration, even if the first jackpot content suggestion production is a production result that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a production result that suggests that the number of round games is a small jackpot), the next time. The game can be enthusiastically performed so that the jackpot content suggestion effect is executed.

The details will be described later, but the display content (display mode) showing the effect result of this jackpot content suggestion effect includes a strong suggestion display that is easy for the player to predict, and a weak suggestion display that is harder to predict than the strong suggestion display. Is configured to be set, based on the lottery result of Special Figure 1, the display mode of the suggestion history display 880 (the effect result of the jackpot content suggestion effect that has already been executed), and the number of executions of the jackpot content suggestion effect. The selection ratio between the strong suggestion display and the weak suggestion display is different. Further, only when a specific condition is satisfied, the effect of confirming the content of the next big hit and the effect of a privilege different from the suggestion of the content of the big hit are executed.

With this configuration, the player who has almost determined the next jackpot content by the already executed jackpot content suggestion effect will continue to enthusiastically establish the conditions for establishing the jackpot content suggestion effect. You can play a game.

In this modification, the treasure box (treasure box 812) used for the effect of showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 and the treasure box (treasure box 860, treasure box 870) used for the jackpot content suggestion effect are separated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one treasure box may be used to perform an effect for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 and an effect for suggesting the contents of the jackpot. In this case, it is preferable to configure the effect mode of the jackpot content suggestion effect to be variable so that the timing of displaying the effect symbol 813 and the timing of displaying the effect result of the jackpot content suggestion effect are different. As a result, even if one treasure box is used, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect, and it is possible to make the player think that the lottery of the special figure 2 is being executed more than the actual one.

Further, in this modification, a plurality of elements (number of round games and game state after the end) for showing the contents of the jackpot are individually displayed as the production result of the jackpot content suggestion effect. Not limited to this, only one of them may be configured to be displayed as the effect result of one big hit content suggestion effect. In this case, the player may be configured to be able to select which element the jackpot content suggestion effect is to be executed.

Further, in this modification, the effect results for a plurality of elements (the number of round games and the game state after the end) for showing the jackpot content as the effect result of the jackpot content suggestion effect are displayed at the same time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display may be configured to be displayed at a different timing. In this case, even if the element that results in a lottery result that is advantageous to the player and the element that results in a lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player are determined, and the element to be displayed first is determined based on the determination result. good. Specifically, it is preferable to configure so that the elements that result in the lottery that is advantageous to the player are displayed later. As a result, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game so that the player can perform many jackpot content suggestion effects.

In addition, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, as a result of the special figure 2 lottery during one RUSH game period, the big hit is based on the number of times the small hit is won and the number of times the special figure 2 lottery is executed. It is configured so that the execution condition of the content suggestion effect is satisfied, but in addition to this, for example, it is suggested that the number of times that the special figure 2 lottery is won out has reached a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). It may be set as an execution condition of the effect. As a result, even if the result of the special figure 2 lottery is a lottery result (missing) that is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation to play. Further, not only the result of the special figure 2 lottery during one RUSH game period but also the execution condition of the jackpot content suggestion effect may be set so as to straddle a plurality of RUSH game periods. With this configuration, even after the content of the next jackpot game is found to be disadvantageous to the player, the motivation is to facilitate the execution of the jackpot content suggestion effect during the next RUSH game period. It is possible to play a game in a targeted manner.

Further, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, it is configured to suggest a plurality of elements (the number of round games and the game state after the end) for showing the big hit contents as the production result of the big hit contents suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an effect result in which the above-mentioned plurality of elements are fused may be suggested. In addition, the remaining period of the RUSH game period is configured so that the player cannot grasp it, and as a result of the effect of the jackpot content suggestion effect, the remaining period of the RUSH game period, that is, the remaining variation time of the special figure 1 is suggested. It may be configured.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the modified example of the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 287 to 289, the electrical configuration in the modified example of the fourth embodiment will be described. The modified example of the fourth embodiment is different from the fourth embodiment described above in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. Other points are the same as those in the fourth embodiment, the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 287 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the modified example of the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 287 (a), it differs from the above-described fourth embodiment in that the suggestion mode selection table 222ja is provided and the suggestion staging selection table 222jb is provided.

The suggestion mode selection table 222ja is a second special symbol (special figure 2) in the RUSH game executed when the latent state is set as the game state during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 1). It is referred to when setting a suggestion mode that suggests the lottery content (big hit game content, game state set after the big hit game) of the special figure 1 during the jackpot fluctuation by using the effect mode for showing the lottery result of. Data table.

Here, the contents specified in the suggestion mode selection table 222ja will be described with reference to FIG. 288. FIG. 288 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the suggestion mode selection table 222ja. As shown in FIG. 288, the suggestion mode selection table 222ja corresponds to the acquired value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb, the remaining time information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p, and the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc. It is specified that a plurality of suggestion modes are selected.

In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the suggestion mode is not set as the type of the suggestion mode defined in the suggestion mode selection table 222ja, and the suggestion content is weak, that is, the player draws a special figure 1 lottery. "Weak suggestion" that makes it difficult to determine the lottery result (big hit content) and "Strong suggestion" that makes it easier for the player to determine the lottery result (big hit content) of the special figure 1 lottery than "weak suggestion" are stipulated. When "normal" is selected as the suggestion mode, a normal effect mode (see FIG. 285 (a)) is displayed as an effect mode for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery.

Further, when "suggestion weak" is selected as the suggestion mode, for example, the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery cannot be specifically determined by the player, but is the lottery result advantageous to the player? An effect mode (see FIG. 285 (b)) that suggests whether or not it is displayed is displayed. Further, when "suggestion strength" is selected as the suggestion mode, for example, the suggestion mode to the extent that the player can specifically discriminate the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery (for example, the lottery result of the special figure 2 is shown. The effect mode for this purpose is configured to display the number of rounds executed in the winning jackpot game and the suggestion mode with identification information for indicating the game state set after the jackpot game is completed). .. As described above, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, since the suggestion mode selection table 222ja is configured to select one type from a plurality of suggestion mode types having different suggestion degrees, the RUSH game period. It is possible to enthusiastically play the game so that the suggested mode is displayed multiple times.

To specifically explain the specified contents for the plurality of suggested mode types described above, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation count counter 223jb is "1 to 5", and the remaining time information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p is If it is "within 10 seconds", "normal" is specified regardless of the range of the value of the acquired suggestion effect counter 223jc, and if the remaining time information is "11 seconds to 90 seconds", it is acquired. The value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc is defined as "normal" in the range of "0 to 89" and "weak suggestion" in the range of "90 to 99". When the remaining time information is "91 seconds or more", "normal" is defined regardless of the range of the acquired suggestion effect counter 223jc value.

Further, when the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation frequency counter 223jb is "6 to 39" and the remaining time information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p is "within 10 seconds", the acquired suggestion effect counter is obtained. "Normal" is defined in the range of "0 to 59" for the value of 223jc, "strong suggestion" is defined in the range of "60 to 89", and "weak suggestion" is defined in the range of "90 to 99". ing. When the remaining time information is "11 seconds to 90 seconds", the acquired suggestion effect counter 223jc value is "normal" in the range of "0 to 89" and "weak suggestion" in the range of "90 to 99". Is stipulated. When the remaining time information is "91 seconds or more", "normal" is defined in the range of the acquired suggestion effect counter 223jc value of "0 to 59" or "90 to 99", and "60". "Weak suggestion" is defined in the range of "~ 89".

In addition, when the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation frequency counter 223jb is "40 or more" and the remaining time information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p is "within 10 seconds", the acquired suggestion effect counter. "Normal" is defined in the range of "0 to 59" for the value of 223jc, and "strong suggestion" is defined in the range of "60 to 99". When the remaining time information is "11 seconds to 90 seconds", the acquired suggestion effect counter 223jc value is "suggestion weak" in the range of "0 to 89" and "suggestion weak" in the range of "90 to 99". "Strong" is stipulated. When the remaining time information is "91 seconds or more", "suggestion strength" is defined regardless of the value of the acquired suggestion effect counter 223jc value.

As described above, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the larger the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb is, the more the lottery of the special figure 1 during the jackpot fluctuation is made according to the above-mentioned provisions of the suggestion mode selection table 222ja. Since the content can be easily grasped by the player, the player can be made to execute the special figure 2 lottery as much as possible.

Further, when the value of the fluctuation frequency counter 223jb in FIG. 2 is "1 to 5", indicating that the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p is within the remaining time of 10 seconds, it is a suggestion mode. Is configured so that is not selected. That is, in the state where the RUSH game is being executed, if the number of special drawing 2 lottery is small and the remaining time is short, it is possible that the RUSH game is not actively performed, so that the jackpot to be executed later The suggestion mode is difficult to select in order to prevent the player from easily suggesting the content of the game. With this configuration, the special figure 2 lottery can be enthusiastically executed in order to quickly grasp the lottery result of the special figure 1 which is currently changing.

In addition, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the larger the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb during the RUSH game period, the easier it is to select the suggestion mode that the player can easily discriminate. ing. With this configuration, the player can be made to play the game more enthusiastically.

In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the suggestion mode is selected based on the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation frequency counter 223jb and the information of the remaining time storage area 223p, but the present invention is limited to this. Without this, for example, the ratio in which the suggestion mode is selected may be changed according to the lottery result of the special figure 1 during the change. ) May be configured so that the suggestion mode is more easily selected than when the jackpot type (for example, jackpot D), which is more disadvantageous to the player than the jackpot A, is won. Further, in this case, when the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation frequency counter 223jb is a predetermined value (for example, 39) or less, the ratio at which the suggestion mode is selected is set to be the same (including the same concept including some errors). When it is larger than a predetermined value (for example, 39), the suggestion mode may be selected at a different rate. With this configuration, the player can be made to play the game more enthusiastically.

Further, in this modification, the suggestion mode is displayed so as to suggest the content of the next big hit game to the player based on the display content, but the suggestion is not limited to this. The frequency at which the mode is displayed is changed according to the winning jackpot type (the jackpot game to be executed), and the content of the next jackpot game is suggested to the player according to how many times the suggested mode is displayed. It may be configured.

The suggestion mode selection table 222ja is a suggestion mode setting process (FIG. 295) executed when it is determined in the variation display setting process 11 for special figure 2 (see S5195 in FIG. 294) that the latent probability state is set. When the suggestion mode is selected, the display mode corresponding to the set variation pattern of the special figure 2 and the selected suggestion mode type is set (see FIG. 295). See S14204). As a result, when the variation pattern of the corresponding special figure 2 is out of alignment, it is suggested that the display mode of the symbol (third symbol, effect symbol 813) indicating that the lottery result of the special figure 2 is out of alignment is selected. Since it can be variably displayed in the display mode corresponding to the mode, it is possible to provide the player with the notification of the lottery result of the special figure 2 and the suggestion of the lottery result of the special figure 1 at once. can.

Returning to FIG. 287 (a), the description will be continued. The suggestion effect selection table 222jb is a second special symbol (special figure 2) during the RUSH game executed when the latent state is set as the game state during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 1). When the lottery result of is satisfied with the predetermined conditions, it is referred to when setting a suggestion effect suggesting the lottery contents (big hit game contents, game state set after the big hit game is completed) of the special figure 1 during the big hit fluctuation. It is a data table.

Here, with reference to FIG. 289, the contents specified in the suggestion effect selection table 222jb will be described. FIG. 289 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the suggestion effect selection table 222jb. As shown in FIG. 289, the suggestion effect selection table 222jb was won by the acquired value of the small hit count counter 223cc, the suggested information stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja, and the lottery of the special figure 1. It is stipulated that a plurality of suggestion effects are selected in correspondence with the information indicating the jackpot type and the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc.

In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, as the type of the suggestion effect defined in the suggestion effect selection table 222jb, "failure" in which the suggestion effect is not executed and the suggestion content are weak, that is, the player draws a special figure 1 lottery. "Weak suggestion" that makes it difficult to determine the lottery result (big hit content), and "Strong suggestion" that makes it easier for the player to determine the lottery result (big hit content) of the special figure 1 lottery than "weak suggestion". On the other hand, it is suggested that "confirmation" to notify the lottery result (big hit content) of the special figure 1 lottery and "privilege effect" to be executed when the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery has already been notified to the player. "Pounding production", which is a fanning production that does not include content, is stipulated.

The suggestion effect selection table 222jb is determined when it is determined in the small hit-related process 11 (see S14574 in FIG. 292) that the execution condition of the suggestion effect (the number of small hit wins is a multiple of 10) is satisfied (FIG. 292). S4753: Yes) When it is determined in the suggestion effect setting process (see S14001 in FIG. 293) that the remaining time of the RUSH game period is 5 seconds or more (S14102: Yes in FIG. 293), the suggestion effect is executed. Referenced for (S14106 in FIG. 293).

When "Failure" is selected as the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect is executed (although the display screen of FIG. 286 (a) is displayed), but the effect ends without opening the treasure chests 860 and 870. Is executed. That is, the effect that does not suggest the lottery result of the special figure 1 to the player is executed. When "weak suggestion" or "strong suggestion" is selected as the suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 286 (b), the treasure chests 860 and 870 are opened as the effect result of the suggestion effect, and the lottery result of Special Figure 1 is selected. A comment (game state suggestion display 861, round number suggestion display 871) suggesting (big hit content) appears. The content of this comment is variably set according to the suggestion effect type selected as the suggestion effect.

When "confirmed" is selected as the suggestion effect, the effect of notifying the lottery result of the special figure 1 is executed from the treasure chests 860 and 870 as the effect result of the suggestion effect. In this modified example, "determination" is selected as the suggestion effect only when the lottery result is most advantageous to the player.

Further, when the "privilege effect" is set as the suggestion effect, an effect that is difficult to see elsewhere (for example, an effect in which the character wears a special costume to congratulate the player) is executed. As a result, even a player who has already grasped the contents of the next big hit during the RUSH game period can be enthusiastically played to continuously execute the suggestion effect.

In addition, when the "pounding effect" is set as the suggestion effect, the effect result suggesting the jackpot content to the player is not displayed as in the above-mentioned failure effect, but the treasure chests 860 and 870 (see FIG. 286 (b)). ) Is executed until the opening effect. In this way, as an effect in which the effect result suggesting the jackpot content to the player is not displayed (gase effect), the process of executing the same effect mode as the effect in which the effect result suggesting the jackpot content to the player is displayed is executed. By making it possible to set a different staging effect, the player can pay attention to the content of the suggestion effect until the end.

In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, a plurality of effect modes (comment contents displayed from each treasure box) are stored corresponding to the types of suggestion effect modes selected by using the suggestion effect selection table 222jb. It has means (not shown), and one effect mode is set from a plurality of effect modes stored in the storage means. Thereby, it is possible to provide the player with a wider range of suggestion effects than the number of suggestion effect types defined in the suggestion effect selection table 222jb. Further, the suggestion effect history displayed on the suggestion history display 880 of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 displays the display mode corresponding to the type of the suggestion effect mode selected by using the suggestion effect selection table 222jb. It is configured to be done. As a result, even if a wide range of suggestion effects are executed, the suggestion effect history can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner after the suggestion effects are executed.

To specifically explain the above-mentioned provisions for the plurality of suggested effect types, when the value of the small hit count counter 223 cc is "10", that is, when the execution condition of the suggested effect is satisfied for the first time during the RUSH game period. , Suggested information is not stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja (“-”), and the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc is in the range of “0 to 59” regardless of the jackpot type of Special Figure 1. "Failure" is stipulated, and "weak suggestion" is stipulated in the range of "60 to 99".

When the value of the small hit count counter 223cc is "20", the suggested information is not stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja ("-"), that is, the value of the small hit count counter 223cc is "10". When "Failure" is selected in the suggestion effect executed in the case of "", the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc is "weak suggestion" in the range of "0 to 59" regardless of the jackpot type in Special Figure 1. Is specified, "strong suggestion" is specified in the range of "60 to 89", and "failure" is specified in the range of "90 to 99".

On the other hand, when the suggested information is stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja (“Yes”), that is, when the value of the small hit count counter 223cc is “10”, the suggestion effect is “suggested”. When "weak" is selected, "failure" is defined in the range where the jackpot type in Special Figure 1 is "A" and the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc is "0 to 59", and "60 to 89". "Strong suggestion" is defined in the range of "90 to 99", and "failure" is defined in the range of "90 to 99". Further, the jackpot type in Special Figure 1 is "B to D", "failure" is defined in the range where the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc is "0 to 89", and "suggestion" is defined in the range of "90 to 99". "Strong" is stipulated.

When the value of the small hit count counter 223cc is "30", the suggested information is not stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja ("-"), that is, the value of the small hit count counter 223cc is "10". , And when "Failure" is selected in the suggestion effect executed when "20", the jackpot type in Special Figure 1 is "A" and the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc is "0 to". "Strong suggestion" is defined in the range of "59", and "weak suggestion" is defined in the range of "60 to 99". Further, the jackpot type of the special figure 1 is "B to D", and the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc is defined as "weak suggestion" in the range of "0 to 99".

On the other hand, when "suggested weak" (yes, weak) is stored as suggested information in the suggested information storage area 223ja, the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc is "0" regardless of the jackpot type in Special Figure 1. "Strong suggestion" is defined in the range of "59", and "failure" is defined in the range of "60 to 99". Further, when "suggested strong" (yes, strong) is stored as suggested information in the suggested information storage area 223ja, the jackpot type in Special Figure 1 is "A, B", and the suggestion effect counter 223jc. "Failure" is defined in the range of "0 to 59", "confirmed" is defined in the range of "60 to 89", and "failure" is defined in the range of "90 to 99". Further, when the jackpot type of the special figure 1 is "C, D", "failure" is defined regardless of the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc.

When the value of the small hit count counter 223cc is "40" or more and is a multiple of 10, "confirmed" is stored as suggested information in the suggested information storage area 223ja, and the special feature is When the jackpot type in FIG. 1 is "A, B", "privilege effect" is specified in the range of suggestion effect "0 to 99", and in all other cases, "pounding effect" is specified. Has been done.

In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, it is set as the execution condition of the suggestion effect that the value of the small hit count counter 223 cc becomes a predetermined value (a multiple of 10), but other matters are set as the execution condition of the suggestion effect. You may set it. Further, in this modification, the suggestion effect is configured to be able to be executed a plurality of times during one RUSH game period, and the suggestion effect having a lower suggestion degree than the suggestion effect executed in the past is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player with the suggestive staging to the end.

Next, with reference to FIG. 287 (b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the modified example of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 287 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the modified example of the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 287 (b), the fourth implementation described above is provided in that the suggested information storage area 223ja, the special figure 2 fluctuation frequency counter 223jb, the suggestion effect counter 223jc, and the suggestion effect in-progress flag 223jd are provided. It is different from the form.

The suggested information storage area 223ja is a data area for temporarily storing the contents of the executed suggestion effect (see FIG. 286), and is a suggestion effect executed during one RUSH game period. The history can be stored. In this suggested information storage area 223ja, information indicating the suggestion effect mode selected in the suggestion effect setting process (see S14001 in FIG. 293) is stored (S14108 in FIG. 293), and when the next suggestion effect mode is selected. The information stored in is read out (S14104 in FIG. 293). Then, the stored information is cleared at the timing when the RUSH game ends (the timing when the jackpot game starts) (see S4692 in FIG. 291). Further, the suggestion history display 880 is displayed based on the information stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja.

The special figure 2 change number counter 223jb is a counter for measuring the change number (lottery number) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) executed during the RUSH game period, and is a change display setting for special figure 2. In process 11 (see S5195 in FIG. 294), when it is determined that the latency state is set (S5303: Yes in FIG. 294), the value of the counter is updated by 1 (see S5393 in FIG. 294). The value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb is referred to when setting the suggestion mode showing the lottery result of the special figure 1 during the change by using the effect mode for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 (FIG. 295). (See S14201). Then, the value of the counter is cleared at the timing when the RUSH game ends (the timing when the big hit game starts) (see S4691 in FIG. 291).

The suggestion effect counter 223jc is a counter referred to when selecting the above-mentioned suggestion mode or suggestion effect, and is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 99. Although not shown, it is updated by 1 each time the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. Since the detailed configuration is the same as that of the staging counter 223h described above, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The suggestion effect in progress flag 223jd is a flag for indicating that the suggestion effect is being executed, and is set to be on while the suggestion effect is being executed. This suggestion staging flag 223jd is set to ON when the suggestion staging setting process (see S14001 in FIG. 293) is executed (S14109 in FIG. 293). Then, it is referred to in the variation display setting process 11 for special figure 2 (see S5195 in FIG. 294) (see S5391 in FIG. 294). Here, if it is determined that the suggestion effect is in progress (S5391: Yes in FIG. 294), a special display variation pattern command for the variation effect of the special figure 2 is set in parallel with the suggestion effect (FIG. See S5394 of 294). When this display variation pattern command is set, the variation effect of the aspect shown in FIG. 286 (the effect having a lower effect than the suggestion effect) is executed. Then, in the liquid crystal display effect execution management process 11 (see S4160 in FIG. 296), when it is determined that it is the timing to end the suggestion effect (S14302: Yes), it is set to off (see S14303 in FIG. 296).

<Regarding the control process in the modified example of the fourth embodiment>
Next, the control process in the modified example of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 290 to 296. In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the command determination process 11 (see FIG. 290) is replaced with the command determination process 4 (see S4182 in FIG. 152) for the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment described above. S14182) is replaced with the jackpot-related process (see S4502 in FIG. 64), and the jackpot-related process 11 (see S4592 in FIG. 291) is replaced with the small hit-related process 4 (see S4574 in FIG. 156). 11 (see S14574 in FIG. 292) is replaced with the variation display setting process 4 for special figure 2 (see S5175 in FIG. 160), and the variation display setting process 11 for special figure 2 (see S5195 in FIG. 294) is executed as a liquid crystal display. The liquid crystal display execution management process 11 (see S4160 in FIG. 296) is executed instead of the management process (see S4110 in FIG. 59), the suggestion effect setting process (see S14001 in FIG. 293), and the suggestion mode setting process (see FIG. 295). The difference is that (see S5392) is added. Other than that, the same processing is executed. The same processing is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the command determination process 11 (S14182) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the modified example of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 290. FIG. 290 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 11 (S14182). The command determination process 11 (S14182) determines that the command determination process 4 (see S4182 in FIG. 152) in the fourth embodiment described above has received a hit-related command from the main control unit 110 in the process of S4215. In some cases (S4215: Yes), the hit-related process 11 (S14574) is executed instead of the hit-related process (S4216). Since other processes are the same as the command determination process 4 (S4182) in the fourth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the hit-related process 11 executed in S14574 replaces the jackpot-related process (see S4502 in FIG. 64) executed when a jackpot-related command is received with respect to the above-mentioned hit-related process (S4216). The difference is that the related process 11 (S4592 in FIG. 291) is replaced with the small hit related process 4 (see S4574 in FIG. 156), and the small hit related process 11 (S14574 in FIG. 292) is executed. Since they are the same, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 291, a hit-related process, which is one process in the command determination process 11 (see S14182 in FIG. 290) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the modified example of the fourth embodiment. The jackpot-related process 11 (see S4592 in FIG. 291) executed in 11 (see S14574) will be described. FIG. 291 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot related process 11 (S4592). The jackpot-related process 11 (S4592) differs from the jackpot-related process (S4502 in FIG. 64) in the fourth embodiment described above in that the content of the process executed when the jackpot start command is received is changed. , Other than that, the same process is executed. Detailed description of the elements of the same processing content will be omitted.

When the jackpot-related process 11 (S4592) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start command has been received (S4601), and if it is determined that the jackpot start command has been received (S4601: Yes), the jackpot for display is started. A command is set (S4602), then the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation count counter 223jb is cleared (S4691), and the information stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja (suggestion effect executed during the RUSH game period). (History information) is cleared (S4692), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received in the processing of S4601 (S4601: No), the same processing of S4603 to S4613 as the above-mentioned jackpot-related processing (S4502 in FIG. 64) is executed. End the process.

That is, in the jackpot-related process 11 (S4592), at the start timing of the jackpot, a process of initializing each parameter temporarily stored during the RUSH game executed before the start of the jackpot is executed. As a result, even if the RUSH game is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to reliably suppress that the effect mode during the RUSH game is set based on the information on the past RUSH game.

In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, since the RUSH game is configured to be executed during the jackpot fluctuation of FIG. 1, the end of the RUSH game and the start of the jackpot game are at the same timing. The initialization process of each parameter temporarily stored during the RUSH game is set as the start timing of the jackpot game, but the start timing is not limited to this, and a determination means for determining that the RUSH game has ended is provided and the determination means It may be configured to execute the initialization process of each parameter when it is determined that the RUSH game is completed. Further, since the condition that the RUSH game can be executed is the case where the latent state is set as the game state, it is determined that the determination result of the game state determination means for determining the current game state is not the latent state. In some cases, it may be configured to execute the initialization process of each parameter temporarily stored during the RUSH game.

Further, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the initialization process of each parameter is executed every time one RUSH game is completed, but the RUSH game is played again within a predetermined period after the big hit game. When it is executed, it may be configured so that the information (value) of each parameter can be continuously updated. As a result, it is possible to enthusiastically perform the game even if the RUSH game is continuously executed a plurality of times. In this case, an elapsed period determining means for determining whether or not a predetermined period (for example, a period until the number of executions of the special figure lottery is performed 30 times) has elapsed after the end of the jackpot game is provided, and the elapsed period determining means is provided. It may be configured to execute the initialization process of each parameter when the elapse of a predetermined period is determined by.

Next, with reference to FIG. 292, a hit-related process which is one of the command determination processes 11 (see S14182 in FIG. 290) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the modified example of the fourth embodiment. The small hit-related process 11 (see S14574 in FIG. 292) executed in 11 (see S14574) will be described. FIG. 292 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit related process 11 (S14574). The small hit-related process 11 (S14574) changes the content of the process executed when the small hit start command is received with respect to the small hit-related process 4 (S4574 in FIG. 156) in the above-described fourth embodiment. Other than that, the same processing is executed. Detailed description of the elements of the same processing content will be omitted.

When the small hit related process 11 (S14574) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the small hit start command has been received (S4701), and when it is determined that the small hit start command has been received (S4701: Yes), the above-mentioned The same processes of S4741 to S4753 as in the small hit-related process 4 of the fourth embodiment (see S4574 in FIG. 156) are executed, and in the process of S4753, it is determined that the value of the small hit count counter 223cc is a multiple of 10. If this is the case (S4753: Yes), the suggestion effect setting process is executed (S14001). After that, the small hit start command for display is set (S4702), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4701 that the small hit start command has not been received (S4701: No), S4703 which is the same as the small hit related process 4 of the fourth embodiment described above (see S4574 in FIG. 156). -The process of S4710 is executed, and this process is terminated.

The suggestion effect setting process executed in the process of S14001 is a process for setting the effect mode of the suggestion effect. That is, the above-mentioned process of S4753 serves as a determination means for determining whether or not the execution condition for executing the suggestion effect is satisfied. In this modification, the value of the small hit count counter 223cc is set to be a predetermined value (a value that is a multiple of 10) as an execution condition for executing the suggestion effect, but other elements are used as the execution condition. It may be set, for example, it may be set as an execution condition that the number of special figure 2 lottery executed while the latent state is set is a predetermined value (for example, a value that is a multiple of 20). good. In this case, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb may be read out and determined.

Further, in this modification, since the suggestion effect is set based on the number of small hits won during the latent state (during the RUSH game period), the small hit-related process 11 (S14574) sets the suggestive effect. Although it is configured to have a process (S14001), if the execution conditions of the suggestion effect are different, the corresponding process may be configured to have the suggestion effect setting process. Further, when a plurality of suggestion effect execution conditions are set, if one suggestion effect execution condition is satisfied, the other suggestion effect execution conditions are within a predetermined period (for example, the number of lottery of special figure 2 is 5 times). It is advisable to provide a limiting means for limiting the establishment within the period until reaching (or 30 seconds). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a plurality of different suggestion staging execution conditions from being satisfied in a short period of time and the suggestion staging from occurring frequently. In addition, when the above-mentioned limiting means is provided, it is preferable to change the effect mode of the suggestion effect based on the order in which the plurality of suggestion effect execution conditions are established. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested not only in executing the suggestion effect but also in which suggestion effect execution condition is satisfied, so that the effect of the effect can be further enhanced. ..

As the execution condition of the suggestion effect executed during the RUSH game period, the cumulative value of the number of lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the number of small hit wins, and the number of missed wins is set to a predetermined value. In addition to the cumulative value condition that can be satisfied when the game is reached, a continuous winning condition that can be satisfied when the number of consecutive winnings in the outlier reaches a predetermined value (for example, 5 times) may be set. Further, an operation condition that is satisfied when a specific operation is executed on the operation means (frame button 22) that can be operated by the player may be provided. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to actively operate the operating means during the RUSH game period, so that the motivation to participate in the game can be increased. Further, the execution condition of the suggestion effect may be satisfied based on the game result other than the special figure 2 lottery executed during the RUSH game period. For example, the number of balls entered into the ball entrance is predetermined. When the number is reached, or when the number of reserved memories has reached the upper limit, the number of balls (so-called over-winning balls) that have entered the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 has reached a predetermined number. In that case, the execution condition of the suggestion effect may be satisfied.

Next, with reference to FIG. 293, the contents of the suggestion effect setting process (S14001 in FIG. 293) executed in the small hit-related process 11 (see S14574 in FIG. 292) will be described. FIG. 293 is a flowchart showing the contents of the suggestion effect setting process (S14001). In this suggestion effect setting process, a process for setting an effect mode of the suggestion effect executed during the RUSH game period is executed.

When the suggestion effect setting process (S14001) is executed, first, the time information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p, that is, the remaining time of the RUSH game period is acquired (S14101), and the acquired time information is 5 seconds. It is determined whether it indicates a longer time than (S14102). Here, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the suggestion effect for 5 seconds is configured to be executed. Therefore, if it is determined in the process of S14102 that the remaining period of the RUSH game period is 5 seconds or less, the RUSH game period ends at the end timing of the suggestion effect, so that the new suggestion effect is not executed. It is configured as follows.

In this modification, the time of the suggestion effect is fixed to 5 seconds, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the suggestion effect of a plurality of effect times may be executed. In this case, the effect time of the suggestion effect to be executed first is determined, then it is determined whether or not the remaining period of the RUSH game period is longer than the determined effect time, and the suggestion effect is executed based on the determination result. It may be configured to determine the presence or absence of. Further, the remaining period of the RUSH game period may be determined first, and the suggestive effect may be set from the effect time that can be executed within the remaining period.

If it is determined in the process of S14102 that the remaining time is 5 seconds or less (S14102: No), the present process is terminated because there is no period during which the suggestion effect can be executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining time is longer than 5 seconds (S14102: Yes), then the value of the small hit count counter 223cc is read out (S14103), and the information stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja (S14102). Information indicating the type of suggestion effect already executed during the current RUSH game period) is read (S14104), and then the lottery result of the currently executing special figure 1 lottery stored in the winning information storage area 223b is shown. Information (information indicating the jackpot type) is acquired (S14105).

Next, the effect mode of the suggestion effect to be executed this time is selected using the suggestion effect selection table 222jb based on the information acquired (read out) in the processes of S14103 to S14105 (S14106), and the selected suggestion effect mode is selected. A corresponding display suggestion effect command is set (S14107). Here, in this modification, a plurality of effect modes are set for the suggestion effect mode selected in the process of S14106, and the process of S14107 corresponds to the selected suggestion effect mode. A display suggestion effect command corresponding to one effect mode is set from the plurality of effect modes (S14107).

Then, when the processing of S14107 is completed, the information indicating the suggestion effect mode selected this time is stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja (S14108), the suggestion effect in progress flag 223jd is set to ON (S14109), and this processing is terminated. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 294, the contents of the variation display setting process 11 (S5195) for the special figure 2 will be described. FIG. 294 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation display setting process 11 (S5195) for the special figure 2. The variation display setting process 11 (S5195) for the special figure 2 is a process for setting a variation effect corresponding to the variation pattern of the special figure 2, and is a process for setting the variation display for the special figure 2 of the fourth embodiment described above. A point of adding a process of setting a variation pattern command for display when a suggestion effect is executed and a process of setting a suggestion mode during the RUSH game period to the process of process 4 (S5175 in FIG. 160). Is different, and the others are the same. The same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the variation display setting process 11 (S5195) for the special figure 2 is executed, first, the same S5301 to S5351 as the variation display setting process 4 for the special figure 2 (S5175 in FIG. 160) of the fourth embodiment described above is executed. Execute the process. Then, when the processing of S5351 is completed, it is determined whether or not the suggestion effecting flag 223jd is set to ON (S5391). In the process of S5391, when it is determined that the suggestion effect in progress flag 223jd is not set on (set to off), that is, when it is determined that the suggestion effect is not executed (S5391: No). The same process of S5352 as the variable display setting process 4 for special figure 2 (S5175 of FIG. 160) of the fourth embodiment described above is executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S5392.

On the other hand, in the process of S5391, when it is determined that the suggestion effect in-progress flag 223jd is set to ON (S5391: Yes), the second special symbol (special figure) is based on the extracted variation pattern and latency mode. The latent probability fluctuation pattern command during the suggestion effect for display in 2) is set (S5394), and the process proceeds to S5393. That is, in the latent state, the variation effect of the special figure 2 is set differently depending on whether the suggestion effect is executed or not. Specifically, when the suggestion effect is not executed, the variation effect of the special figure 2 is executed using the entire main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 285 (a)). On the other hand, when the suggestion effect is executed, in order to emphasize the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect is executed using most of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the remaining part is used. The variation effect of FIG. 2 is executed (see FIG. 286 (a)).

With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the most notable effect in an easy-to-understand manner. In this modification, as described above, the display command set by the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be different depending on whether or not the suggestion effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. , The same display command is set, and the area for displaying the variation effect of the special figure 2 is changed based on the display command received by the display control device 114 and the presence / absence of execution of the suggestion effect. Is also good. As a result, when only the display position (the size of the display mode) is changed without changing the content of the variable effect shown in FIG. 2 depending on the presence or absence of the suggestive effect, the control load of the voice lamp control device 113 is applied. It can be easily reduced.

When the process of S5352 is completed, the suggestion mode setting process (S5392) is executed, then the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation frequency counter 223jb is added by 1 (S5393), and this process is terminated. In the process of S5392, a process for setting a suggestion mode for suggesting the result of the special figure 1 lottery being executed (during change) is executed by using the special figure 2 variation effect of this time.

In this modification, as described above, when the suggestion staging flag 223jd is set to ON, the suggestion mode setting process (S5392) is not executed. That is, during the period in which the effect suggesting the lottery result (big hit content) of the special figure 1 is being executed by the suggestion effect, the lottery result (big hit content) of the special figure 1 is suggested by using the variable effect of the special figure 2. It is configured so that the production is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a plurality of suggestive effects from being generated at the same time and providing a player with an incomprehensible effect.

Next, the content of the suggestion mode setting process (S5392) will be described with reference to FIG. 295. FIG. 295 is a flowchart showing the contents of the suggestion mode setting process (S5392). When the suggestion mode setting process (S5392) is executed, first, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb is read out (S14201), and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the remaining fluctuation time of special figure 1 is obtained. Information) is read out (S14202), and the current production mode is selected using the suggestion mode selection table 222ja based on the counter value read out in the process of S14201 and the stored information read out in the process of S14202 (S14203). ). Then, a display command corresponding to the set variation pattern command and the selected effect mode is set (S14204), and this process is terminated.

With this configuration, when setting the variation effect of the special figure 2, it is possible to set the suggestion mode for suggesting the lottery result of the special figure 1 by using the variation effect of the special figure 2. It is possible to notify (suggest) a plurality of information (lottery result of special figure 2 and lottery result of special figure 1) to the player with one variable effect, and it is possible to make the player pay attention to the variable effect. can. In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, as the suggestion mode using the variation effect of the special figure 2, the suggestion mode (see FIG. 285 (b)) for varying the display mode of the effect symbol 813 and the suggestion mode of the third symbol. Although a stop display mode for showing the result of the special figure 2 lottery such as a suggestion mode for varying the display mode (see FIG. 285 (b)) is used, the suggestion is not limited to this, and the suggestion is made using the mode in the variable display. Aspects may be set. For example, the lottery result of the special figure 1 can be suggested by changing the background color when the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner, or the display mode of the treasure box 812 in which the effect symbol 813 is stored can be changed. By making it possible, the lottery result of the special figure 1 may be configured to be suggestive. Further, not only the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but also the voice output device 226 provided on the pachinko machine 10 and the lamp display device 227 can be used to suggest the lottery result of the special figure 1. You may. Specifically, the sound output during the period when the variable display of the special figure 2 is executed can be changed, or the light emission mode of the lamp during the period when the variable display of the special figure 2 is executed can be changed. By doing so, the lottery result of the special figure 1 may be configured to be suggestive.

Next, the contents of the liquid crystal display execution management process 11 (S4160) will be described with reference to FIG. 296. FIG. 296 is a flowchart showing the contents of the liquid crystal display effect execution management process 11 (S4160). In the liquid crystal display effect execution management process 11 (S4160), the suggestion effect is given to the liquid crystal display effect execution management process (S4110) executed in the main process (see FIG. 59) of the audio lamp control device 113 of the fourth embodiment described above. The difference is that a process for determining whether or not is in the execution period of is added, and the other points are the same.

The above-mentioned liquid crystal display effect execution management process (see S4110 in FIG. 59) will be briefly described. To constantly determine the effect period of each effect set by the voice lamp control device 113 and the update period of the effect being executed. The process is executed. Specifically, the timekeeping means (timer) possessed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 and the set effect scenario (running effect scenario) are constantly managed, and the running effect is terminated. A process for managing the timing and the timing for switching the effect mode is executed.

When the liquid crystal display execution management process 11 (S4160) is executed, first, it is determined whether the suggestion effect in-progress flag 223jd is set to on (S14301), and if it is determined to be set to off (S14301:). No), the process shifts to S14304. On the other hand, in the process of S14301, when it is determined that the suggestion effect in-progress flag 223jd is set to ON (S14301: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is the suggestion effect end timing (S14302). If it is determined in the process of S14302 that it is the end timing of the suggestion effect (S14302: Yes), the suggestion effect in progress flag 223jd is set to off (S14303), and the process shifts to S14304. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S14302 that it is not the end timing of the suggestion effect (S14302: No), the process of S14303 is skipped and the process is shifted to S14304. In the process of S14304, other liquid crystal display effect execution management is executed (S14304), and this process is terminated.

Explaining the processing of S14302, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the suggestion effect for 5 seconds is configured to be executed, and the elapsed time from the timing when the suggestion effect is executed is set as the voice lamp control device. The measurement is performed using the time measuring means of the MPU 221 of 113, and the determination is executed based on the measurement result. It should be noted that any process other than the above-mentioned processing may be used as long as it is a process capable of determining the end timing of the suggestion effect. Is set, and the value of the counting means becomes a value indicating the passage of 5 seconds, so that the end timing of the suggestion effect may be determined.

As described above, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the change is based on the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) executed during the change of the first special symbol (special figure 1). Since the suggestion effect for suggesting (notifying) the lottery result of the special figure 1 to the player can be executed, it is possible to make the player predict the lottery result of the special figure 1 in advance. .. Therefore, the staging effect can be enhanced.

Further, since the above-mentioned suggestion effect is executed by using the variable effect for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2, the lottery result of the special figure 2 and the lottery result of the special figure 1 are combined into one effect. Since it is possible to suggest (notify) to the player with, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, since the suggestion effect is executed when the lottery result of the special figure 2 satisfies a predetermined condition, the player can be enthusiastically executed the special figure 2 lottery. In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the suggestion effect is more easily executed as the lottery of the special figure 2 is executed, so that the player's motivation to play can be further enhanced.

That is, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) executed during the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) suggests the lottery result of the special figure 1. It is configured to have both a role of satisfying the execution condition of the suggestion effect and a role of executing the suggestion effect. As a result, the player can be interested in whether the suggestion effect using the variable display of the special figure 2 is executed or the suggestive effect different from the variable display of the special figure 2 is executed.

Further, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, as the effect mode of the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect (suggestion strength) that makes it easy for the player to predict the lottery result of the special figure 1 and the lottery of the special figure 1 rather than the suggestion effect. Since the suggestion effect (weak suggestion), which is difficult to predict the result, is configured to be at least configurable, it is possible to pay attention to the effect mode of the suggestion effect. Further, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the suggestion effect can be executed a plurality of times during one special figure change period, and the lottery of the special figure 1 increases as the number of times the suggestion effect is executed increases. It is configured so that it is easy to set a suggestion effect (suggestion strength) that makes it easy to predict the result. As a result, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game so that the player can perform more suggestive effects.

In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the above-mentioned suggestion effect is executed based on the special figure 2 lottery during the change of the special figure 1, but a plurality of lottery that can be executed at the same time is used. For example, the above-mentioned suggestion effect may be executed based on the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) during the special symbol 1 change, or the special symbol (second symbol) during the normal symbol (second symbol) change may be executed. A suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result of a normal symbol may be executed based on the lottery of 1 symbol). Further, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be configured to execute a suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 based on the normal symbol lottery while the special figure 2 is changing at the same time.

In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the lottery of the special figure 1 is configured to suggest the contents of the big hit won based on the special figure 2 lottery during the big hit fluctuation. In addition, it may be configured to suggest the residual variation time of the special figure 1. Further, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, when one of the special symbols has won the jackpot (including during the change of the jackpot winning), the other special symbol is drawn by lottery. It is configured not to win the jackpot. Therefore, since the special figure 2 lottery executed during the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation does not win the big hit, even if the lottery result (big hit content) of the special figure 1 is suggested, the big hit game different from the suggested content. It is possible to suppress the situation in which (the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot won in the special figure 2 lottery) is executed.

In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the suggestion effect is executed based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the special figure 1 change in which the jackpot is won, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The suggestion effect may be executed based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the special figure 1 fluctuation that has not won the big hit. As a result, it is possible to make the player think that the changing special figure 1 has won the jackpot by executing the suggestion effect.

Further, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the state where the probability variation state is set, the latent probability state is set during the jackpot fluctuation, as in the case of the fourth embodiment described above. It is configured so that the lottery of 2 can be easily executed. As a result, the special figure 2 lottery can be executed more during the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation, so that it is possible to easily provide the player with a suggestion effect. Further, in the state where the latent probability state is set, it becomes easy to win a small hit different from the big hit in the special figure 2 lottery, so that it is possible to make it easier to execute the special figure 2 lottery more positively.

In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the jackpot game of the special figure 1 provides a suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result of the special figure 1 based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 1. Although it is configured to be executed by the time it is started, the suggestion effect may be executed during a period other than this. For example, the technique of this modification is applied to the sixth embodiment described above, and the special figure 1 It may be configured to suggest the lottery result of the special figure 1 (the content of the big hit game or the game state set after the big hit game is completed) based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the big hit game.

Further, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the suggestion effect is executed based on the special figure 2 lottery only during the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special figure 1 is not limited to this. It may be configured to execute the suggestion effect based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the deviation fluctuation of. Thereby, when the suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to entertain the player whether or not the changing special figure 1 lottery is a big hit.

In the modification of the fourth embodiment described above, a suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result of the special figure 1 based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the change of the special figure 1 is added to the fourth embodiment. Although an example is shown, the suggestive effect used in the modified example of the fourth embodiment may be configured to be added to the above-mentioned other embodiments, for example, to be added to the above-mentioned third embodiment. It may be configured in.

In the third embodiment, a probability change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set after the end of the jackpot, and a predetermined transition condition (big hit winning, jackpot winning,) is set in the state where the probability variation state is set. When the small hit winning and the 4th lottery of the special symbol are established, the latent probability state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) is set as the predetermined end condition (4th lottery result of the special symbol). Is stopped and displayed) is set so that the period until it is established is set.

When the above-mentioned suggestion effect is executed in the third embodiment configured in this way, the special figure 1 is based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the special figure 1 fluctuation in which the latent probability state is set. It is preferable to configure not only the lottery result but also the suggestion effect suggesting the opportunity (transition condition) for which the latent state is set.

That is, in the third embodiment, a plurality of transition conditions in which the latent probability state is set are defined, and the period in which the latent probability state is set differs depending on the established transition condition. Since the specific contents are described above with reference to FIG. 112, the description thereof will be omitted. Further, according to the configuration used in the third embodiment, the player is transferred to the latent state this time until the change in Special Figure 1 in which the condition for transitioning to the latent state is satisfied is stopped and displayed. It was not possible to inform what was the opportunity.

Therefore, by adding the suggestive staging described by using the modified example of the fourth embodiment to the configuration of the third embodiment, during the variation of Special Figure 1 in which the condition for transition to the latent state is satisfied. It is possible to suggest the lottery result of the special figure 1 that is changing based on the executed special figure 2 lottery. With this configuration, the player can predict the trigger for the transition to the latent state this time by seeing the suggestion effect to be executed.

That is, it is possible to set a first gaming state (for example, a latent state) that is advantageous to the player as a gaming state and a second gaming state (for example, a probabilistic state) that is more disadvantageous than the first gaming state. When the transition condition of is satisfied, the transition from the second game state to the first game state is possible, and the special figure 2 change executed during the change of the special figure 1 when the first game state is set. Based on (lottery), it is preferable to configure a suggestion effect for suggesting to the player what the transition condition for which the first game state was set this time was.

In the modified example of the fourth embodiment described above, the small hit game (RUSH game) is frequently executed by executing the lottery of the special figure 2 during the big hit fluctuation of the special figure 1 (during the RUSH game period). , In a configuration in which a prize ball can be given to a player without executing a jackpot game, the lottery result of special figure 1 based on the lottery of the special figure 2 (big hit game content, game state after the big hit game, special figure) Since the suggestion effect suggesting (1) the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation) is configured to be feasible, the special figure 2 lottery during the RUSH game period can have a plurality of meanings. Specifically, by the special figure 2 lottery executed during the RUSH game period, the lottery result advantageous to the player as the lottery result of the changing special figure 1 while expecting a small hit winning to obtain a prize ball. It can be expected that the suggestion effect suggesting that the above is executed.

In this configuration, for example, if one of the plurality of meanings of the special figure 2 lottery is disadvantageous to the player, the other is controlled to be advantageous to the player. good. Specifically, for example, as a result of the special figure 2 lottery, a small hit with a long fluctuation time (for example, a small hit A) and a small hit with a shorter fluctuation time than the small hit A (small hit B) can be set. do. In this case, in order to execute many small hit games within the limited period of the RUSH game period, it is necessary to select many lottery results having a short fluctuation time as the lottery results of the special figure 2. That is, when the above-mentioned small hit A is won, the lottery result is more disadvantageous to the player than when the small hit B is won.

In such a case, it is preferable to configure the device so that the suggestion effect is more easily executed when the small hit A is won than when the small hit B is won. As a result, when the result of the special figure 2 lottery that is disadvantageous to the player is obtained, it is possible to easily provide another added value (suggestion effect), so that the player's willingness to play is significantly reduced. It can be suppressed.

In addition to the above-mentioned example, for example, a first small hit game that is advantageous to the player as a game mode of the small hit game executed when the small hit is won, and a player rather than the first small hit game. It is possible to set a second small hit game in which a small hit game that is disadvantageous to the player is executed, and it is easy to provide another added value (suggestion effect) when the small hit game that is disadvantageous to the player is won. It may be configured so that

<11th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 297 to 316. In the above-mentioned first embodiment, when the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set, the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1). In addition, the gaming state during the jackpot fluctuation is set as the latent probability state, and the small hit game is easily executed when the latent probability state is set.

On the other hand, in the eleventh embodiment, and in the case where the time saving state of the normal symbol ends first (when the number of time saving times ends) in the probabilistic state, and in a part of the case where the jackpot is won, an advantageous latent state. It is configured to shift to. In addition, in a game state other than the latent probability state, even if a big hit is made, the rate at which the latent probability state is set is configured to have an extremely low probability (for example, 5%), so that other games are played. Most of the transitions from the state to the latent state are when the time saving state of the normal symbol ends in the probabilistic state.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the case where the probability change jackpot is won again in the relatively advantageous time saving state or the probability change state is set after the jackpot ends, as compared with the case where the probability change jackpot is won in the disadvantageous normal state. It is configured so that the end condition of the time saving state is easily satisfied in the probabilistic state (a small number of time saving is easy to be set). As a result, even if the time saving state of the normal symbol cannot be ended (that is, it cannot be transferred to the latent state) and the probability change jackpot is won, the state is changed to the latent state. Since there is a high possibility that it will be easier, it is possible to further improve the expectation of the player for the latent state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above is that the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main control device 110 are partially changed. The configuration of ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been partially changed, and the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. The point is that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 has been partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the gaming state in the eleventh embodiment will be briefly described. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 306, but in the eleventh embodiment, four types of gaming states are provided. That is, a normal state that is most disadvantageous to the player, a time-saving state that has a higher degree of advantage than the normal state, a probabilistic state that has a higher degree of advantage than the time-saving state, and a latent state that is most advantageous to the player are provided. ing.

In the time saving state (probability change state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol), as in the first embodiment, the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entrance ball opening 64b2 is easily released, and the lower first Since it becomes easier to enter the ball into the ball entry port 64b2, by performing the left-handed game, it becomes possible to efficiently execute the lottery of the first special symbol as compared with the normal state. That is, since the number of game balls to be launched and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the entry into the lower first entry opening 64b2 or the like are substantially the same, the first special symbol is not reduced. Form an advantageous state in which the lottery can be executed. In addition, the probabilistic state (probability change state of the special symbol and the time reduction state of the normal symbol) is the time reduction state of the normal symbol and the probability of becoming a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol is higher than the time reduction state. It will be even more advantageous. Further, in the latent probability state (probability change state of the special symbol and normal state of the normal symbol), the fluctuation time when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed is significantly shorter than that of the other gaming states (10 minutes). → 1 second) When the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, there is a high probability (59/60) of a small hit (a type of loss, and the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is specified. Since the lottery result will be open for a period and give an opportunity to win a prize ball), just by executing a right-handed game aiming at the second entry opening 640, the game ball will move to the first specific winning opening 65a. It will be an extremely advantageous game state in which it is possible to enter the ball frequently and continue to win the prize ball.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 297 to 301, a characteristic hobby effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, when the time saving state ends in the relatively advantageous probability change state, the configuration shifts to the most advantageous latent state. For this reason, in the probabilistic state, rather than becoming a big hit in the special symbol lottery, it is possible to shift to the latent state by continuously losing the special symbol lottery over the set number of time reductions. It is possible to provide a novel playability that makes people expect more strongly. Therefore, in the eleventh embodiment, when the state shifts to the probabilistic state, the display effect is configured to perform an effect suggesting the remaining number of lottery until the state shifts to the latent state. As a result, when the player shifts to the probabilistic state, the player can check the guideline of the remaining number of lottery until the transition to the latent state by simply checking the third symbol display device 81. Convenience can be improved.

First, with reference to FIG. 297 (a), in the eleventh embodiment, a display mode of the ending effect executed in the ending period of the jackpot game in which the probability change state or the time saving state is set after the jackpot ends will be described. As shown in FIG. 297 (a), when the ending effect in the eleventh embodiment is executed, the upper center (above the character 811 imitating a rabbit) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is relative to the display screen. A display area HR1 is formed in which the characters "RUSH is confirmed if a maximum of three rivers are breached !?" are displayed. From this display content, the player can easily understand that the transition to the RUSH (latent state) is confirmed when the character 811 breaks through a maximum of three rivers. Since the other display contents are the same as the display contents of the ending effect in the first embodiment (see FIG. 6A), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the eleventh embodiment, a jackpot type (big hit A11, jackpot H11) that directly shifts to the latent probability state (RUSH) after the end of the jackpot is also provided. Although not shown, when the jackpot type is used, the latent state (RUSH) entry is notified during the ending period.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 297 (b) to 299, a display effect executed during the time saving state of the normal symbol (that is, during the probabilistic change state or the time saving state) in the eleventh embodiment will be described. .. The details will be described later, but while the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, the time saving state of the normal symbol is terminated every time the special symbol lottery is executed a specific number of times (25 times or 15 times). The player decides whether to move to the most advantageous latent state, to end the time saving state of the normal symbol and to move to the most disadvantageous normal state, or to continue (maintain) the time saving state of the normal symbol. The effect of suggesting (notifying) is executed. That is, a river breakthrough effect (see FIGS. 298 and 299) that can suggest (notify) the gaming state after the end of the fluctuation is executed depending on whether or not the character 811 breaks through the river. The cycle in which the river breakthrough effect is executed is set to the number of fluctuations at which the time saving state may end. That is, when it becomes a big hit in the normal state and the probability change state or the time reduction state of the normal symbol is set, any one of 25 times, 50 times, or 75 times is set. Further, when the probability change state or the time reduction state becomes a big hit and the probability change state is set, any one of 10, 25 times, or 40 times is set. By executing the river breakthrough effect every time the number of fluctuations that may end the time saving state is reached, the game is expected to be notified of the transition to the latent state each time the river breakthrough effect is executed. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

First, with reference to FIG. 297 (b), an effect mode (display mode) before the river breakthrough effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 297 (b), until the river breakthrough effect is executed, the effect of the character 811 running toward the right in the front view is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Further, a horizontally long substantially rectangular display area HR2 is formed in the right direction of the front view of the character 811. In this display area HR2, characters (display mode) indicating (suggesting) the number of lottery of the remaining special symbols until the character 811 reaches the next river are displayed. Note that FIG. 297 (b) illustrates a state in which the characters "20 times remaining until the first river" are displayed. With this display content, it is easy for the player to understand that it is an opportunity to shift to an advantageous latent state by being continuously out of the lottery for 20 more special symbols. Can be done. Since other display contents are the same as the chance zone mode (see FIG. 6B) in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Here, the "chance zone" in the eleventh embodiment indicates a state while the time saving state of the normal symbol is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 298 (a), the display contents at the start of the river breakthrough effect will be described. FIG. 298 (a) is a diagram showing a display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the start of the river breakthrough effect. As shown in FIG. 298 (a), when the river breakthrough effect is started, the effect that the character 811 discovers the river image KG imitating the river is executed. In addition, the characters "Arrive at the first river !! Jump over the river !!" are displayed for the display area HR1 formed (displayed) at the upper part of the display screen. From these display contents, it is possible to easily understand that the time saving state of the normal symbol may end (that is, the number of time saving times elapses) in the fluctuation. That is, it is possible to make the player understand that there is a possibility of shifting to an advantageous latent state and a possibility of shifting to a disadvantageous normal state. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the river breakthrough effect and perform the game.

FIG. 298 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the river breakthrough is successful and the continuation of the time saving state (chance zone) of the normal symbol is notified in the river breakthrough effect. As shown in FIG. 298 (b), when the success is notified by the river breakthrough effect, the character 811 jumps and the effect of landing on the opposite bank of the river image KG is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 298 (b), a signboard image 815 imitating a signboard is displayed at the destination (opposite bank) that jumps over the river. The signboard image 815 is displayed to suggest (notify) the privilege caused by the character 811 jumping over (breaking through) the river image KG. FIG. 298 (b) illustrates a case where the character "continue" is displayed, which indicates that the time saving state of the normal symbol continues (the number of time saving times remains) even after the next fluctuation display. Further, as the signboard image 815 is displayed, the characters "First river breakthrough !! Chance zone continuation !!" are displayed for the display area HR1 formed in the upper center of the screen. From these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the time saving state of the normal symbol continues to shift to the next variable display. Therefore, by continuing the deviation until the next river breakthrough production, it is possible to play the game while having a sense of purpose to get a chance to shift to the latent state, which improves the player's interest in the game. Can be made to. If the time saving state of the normal symbol continues, the lottery result of the special symbol will be out of order. Therefore, in the small area Dm1 for displaying the lottery result of the first special symbol, the third symbol of the combination indicating the deviation (for example, the combination of "8", "1", and "5") is displayed.

It should be noted that there is a time lag (for example, 1) between the time when the character 811 succeeds in jumping over the river image KG and the time when the signboard image 815 is displayed (that is, a privilege for breaking through the river is suggested). Seconds) are configured to occur. As a result, the player can be expected to be notified of the transition to the latent state (RUSH) as a privilege of jumping over the river image 811 for this one second. Therefore, every time the river breakthrough effect is successful, it is possible to strongly expect that the latent state is notified for at least one second, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

FIG. 299 (a) shows a display in the case where the river breakthrough is successful and the transition to the latent state (RUSH) is notified (the time saving state of the normal symbol is terminated in the probability change state) in the river breakthrough effect. It is a figure which showed an example of an embodiment. As shown in FIG. 299 (a), even when the transition to the latent state is notified, the character 811 is similarly notified of the continuation of the time saving state of the normal symbol (see FIG. 298 (b)). Will jump over the river image KG and land on the opposite bank. On the other hand, when the transition to the latent state is notified, the characters "RUSH" are displayed on the signboard image 815, and "First river breakthrough !! RUSH" is displayed on the display area HR1. The text "Rush !!" is displayed. In addition, the characters displayed in the small area Dm3 are switched to "right-handed", and the display contents of the sub-display area Ds are switched to the display contents of "RUSH rush !! Right-handed !!". From these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the state has shifted to the most advantageous latent state (RUSH) and that the right-handed game should be performed.

FIG. 299 (b) shows an example of a display mode in the case where the river breakthrough effect fails and the transition to the normal state (the time saving state of the normal symbol is terminated in the time saving state) is notified. It is a figure shown. As shown in FIG. 299 (b), when the transition to the normal state is notified, the character 811 jumps toward the opposite bank of the river image KG, but cannot jump over the river image KG and the river image KG. The effect of falling toward is executed. In addition, the characters "breakthrough failure ... chance zone end ..." are displayed for the display area HR1, and the characters "chance zone end !!" are displayed for the sub-display area Ds. To. From these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the state has shifted to a disadvantageous normal state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 300, in the eleventh embodiment, a game in which a chance zone is set after the end of the big hit (that is, a probability change state or a time saving state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit). The transition of the state and the production mode will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 300 (a), the transition of the gaming state and the effect mode when the jackpot C11 is won in the normal state will be described. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 303, but in the jackpot C11, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the probable change state, and the time reduction number is set to 50 times and the probability change number is set to 100 times. It is a type. In other words, if the special symbol lottery is missed 50 times in a row after the big hit ends, unless the big hit is won after that, an advantageous latent state until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times after the big hit ends. It is a big hit of the kind that becomes.

As shown in FIG. 300 (a), when the jackpot C11 is won in the normal state, the time saving state of the normal symbol continues until the lottery of 50 special symbols is executed after the end of the jackpot, and the 50th special At the timing when the lottery of the symbol is executed, the time saving state of the normal symbol is terminated and the normal state of the normal symbol is set. On the other hand, the probabilistic state of the special symbol continues even if the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times or more (until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times at the maximum). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 300 (a), as an effect mode, the river breakthrough effect (FIG. 298) in which the continuation is notified during the execution of the variation display based on the execution of the 24th special symbol lottery. (B)) is executed, and the river breakthrough effect (see FIG. 299 (a)) in which the transition to the latent state is notified during the execution of the variation display based on the execution of the 49th special symbol lottery. ) Is executed. Then, after that, the RUSH effect indicating that the latent state is in effect is executed in the same display mode as in the first embodiment (see FIG. 7B). In the case of a probability variation jackpot (big hit D11) in which the number of time reductions is set to 25, the transition to the latent state is notified by the first river breakthrough effect. On the other hand, when the number of time reductions is set to 75 times and the probability variation jackpot (big hit B11) is reached, the continuation of the time reduction state (chance zone) of the normal symbol is notified in the first and second river breakthrough productions, 3 The transition to the latent state is notified in the third river breakthrough effect (the river breakthrough effect executed in the variable display based on the execution of the 74th special symbol lottery).

Next, with reference to FIG. 300 (b), the transition of the gaming state and the effect mode when the jackpot F11 is won in the normal state will be described. Here, the jackpot F11 is a jackpot type in which the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set to the time reduction state and the number of time reductions is set to 50 times. In other words, it is a type of jackpot that becomes a disadvantageous normal state after that, if it is missed in the special symbol lottery 50 times in a row after the jackpot ends.

As shown in FIG. 300 (b), when the jackpot F11 is won in the normal state, the time saving state of the normal symbol continues until the lottery of 50 special symbols is executed after the end of the jackpot, and the 50th special symbol. At the timing when the lottery of the symbol is executed, the time saving state of the normal symbol is ended and the normal state of the normal symbol is set. In addition, the state of the special symbol is maintained in the low probability state of the special symbol from the end of the big hit. Therefore, the game state shifts to the normal state by executing the 50th special symbol lottery after the end of the big hit. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 300 (b), as an effect mode, the river breakthrough effect (FIG. 298) in which the continuation is notified during the execution of the variation display based on the execution of the 24th special symbol lottery. (B)) is executed, and during the execution of the variation display based on the execution of the 49th special symbol lottery, the river breakthrough effect (see FIG. 299 (b)) in which the river breakthrough fails. It is executed and the transition to the normal state is notified. Then, after that, the normal effect for the normal state is executed. In the case of a normal jackpot (big hit G11) in which the number of time reductions is set to 25, the transition to the normal state is notified by the first river breakthrough effect. On the other hand, when the normal jackpot (big hit E11) in which the number of time reductions is set to 75 times is reached, the continuation of the time reduction state (chance zone) of the normal symbol is notified in the first and second river breakthrough productions, 3 The transition to the normal state is notified in the third river breakthrough effect (the river breakthrough effect executed in the variable display based on the execution of the 74th special symbol lottery).

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, when the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set to the probabilistic state or the time saving state, each time the number of fluctuations at which the time saving state of the normal symbol may end is reached, the river By executing the breakthrough effect, whether the time saving state of the normal symbol continues, the time saving state of the normal symbol ends and shifts to the latent state, or the time saving state of the normal symbol ends and shifts to the normal state. It is configured to periodically notify (every 25 times or every 15 times the lottery of special symbols) whether or not to do so. By configuring in this way, while the chance zone (normal symbol time saving state) is set, the player can play the game with one pleasure that the next river breakthrough effect will be executed. Can be done. In addition, at least until the next river breakthrough production, it is possible to realize a novel playability that is desired to be continuously out of the lottery of special symbols. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Furthermore, by configuring the configuration so that there is a possibility of shifting to the normal state due to failure of the river breakthrough production, the continuation of the time saving state was notified in the river breakthrough production (shifting to the latent state even though the river was broken through). Even if it wasn't), it can be made to think that it is better than being notified of the normal state. That is, even if the latent state is not notified, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged.

Next, with reference to FIG. 301, the small hit effect that can be executed in the latent state in the eleventh embodiment will be described. Here, in the eleventh embodiment, a plurality of effects having different modes are provided as the small hit effect, and when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the lottery of the first special symbol being changed is performed. Performed to suggest results. In the latent state, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the time saving state of the normal symbol is mainly terminated in the probable change state in which the reserved balls of the first special symbol are easily accumulated, and the first special symbol is executed. This is the case when the state shifts to the latent state while possessing the reserved ball of the symbol. In this case, the game ball enters the second entrance 640 while the variable display based on the reserved ball of the first special symbol that has been suspended is being executed, so that the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. The variable display of the second special symbol is executed in duplicate. The lottery result of the first special symbol can be suggested by the small hit effect when the lottery of the second special symbol is a small hit.

FIG. 301 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a small hit effect (small hit effect for high expectation) suggesting that the lottery result of the first special symbol is likely to be a big hit. When the small hit effect for high expectation is executed, as shown in FIG. 301, the effect symbol 816 in a flashy display mode as compared with the effect symbol 813 in the normal small hit effect (see FIG. 7B). Is displayed. As shown in FIG. 301, in this effect symbol 816, the character color "V" for indicating a small hit is set to a character color (yellow) different from the character color (black) in the effect symbol 813, and " The effect around the letter "V" gives it a flashy look. With these display modes, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the small hit effect different from the normal small hit effect (see FIG. 7B) has been executed, so that the big hit is achieved. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the matter.

Although not shown, in the eleventh embodiment, in addition to the normal small hit effect (small hit effect for low expectation) and the small hit effect for high expectation, the expectation is medium. There is also a small hit effect (small hit effect for medium expectations). With this configuration, the second special symbol is likely to be executed in duplicate during the period when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are likely to overlap, such as immediately after the transition to the latent state. It is possible to realize a novel playability that predicts the lottery result of the first special symbol depending on the type of the small hit effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Here, conventionally, a gaming machine that executes a variable display effect of a symbol for showing the lottery result every time a lottery result of a special symbol is executed is widely known. In the conventional gaming machine, the player's interest is improved by executing various entertainment effects suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol during the execution of the symbol variation display effect. However, in a gaming machine having specifications capable of simultaneously executing a plurality of variable display effects, there is a problem that while paying attention to the effect mode associated with one variable display, the effect mode in the other variable display effect is overlooked. There was a point. In particular, in a gaming machine of a type in which one variation display is displayed in a mode that is easier to see than the other, it becomes difficult to confirm the effect mode in the variation display of the other (the side that is difficult to see), and the other variation display effect. However, there is a problem that the player may be confused when the big hit is started while the player is not paying attention to it.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment, the variation display of the second special symbol, which is mainly executed in the latent state, is prioritized (visually recognized) over the variation display of the first special symbol, which is difficult to execute. If the variation display of the first special symbol is executed together with the display (in an easy mode), the lottery of the first special symbol is performed by the small hit effect of the second special symbol (the effect mode accompanying the variation display). The structure suggests the result. With this configuration, it is possible to confirm the degree of expectation that will be a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol only by paying attention to the effect mode accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, the lottery result of the first special symbol, which is being executed at the same time, suggests the degree of expectation that the lottery result is a big hit, depending on the display mode in the small hit effect of the second special symbol. Not limited. For example, it may be configured to suggest the lottery result of the first special symbol depending on the effect mode of the effect executed during the variable display of the second special symbol. Further, for example, it is also possible to suggest (notify) the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol will be a big hit depending on the display mode of the variable display of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device. good. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest the result of the variable display effect on the side that is difficult to see to the player just by checking the variable display effect on the side that is easy to see, so that the effect that is easier to understand is realized. can do. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved.

<Electrical configuration of the eleventh embodiment>
Next, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 302 to 304. The ROM 202 in the eleventh embodiment has the specified contents of the first random number table 202a and the specified contents of the small hit random number table 202b with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 15A). The difference is that the specified contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d and the specified contents of the variation pattern selection table 202f are partially changed. Since the other configurations are the same as the configurations of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 15A), detailed description thereof will be described later.

First, the details of the first random number table 202a provided in the ROM 202 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 302 (a). FIG. 302A is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first random number table 202a. The first random number table 202a in the eleventh embodiment is the same as the first random number table 202a in the first embodiment (see FIG. 15A), in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is a data table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a hit in each game state is set.

As shown in FIG. 302 (a), the first hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 302 (a)) in the eleventh embodiment shows a random number value (counter value) determined to be a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol. ), While two of "7, 8" are specified, eight random numbers (counter value) of "0 to 7" are determined to be big hits in the high probability state (probability change state) of the special symbol. Random number value is specified. Therefore, in the eleventh embodiment, the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1/240 (2/480), and the jackpot probability in the probability variation state of the special symbol is 1/60 (1/480).

Next, the small hit random number table 202b in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 302 (b). FIG. 302 (b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the small hit random number table 202b in the eleventh embodiment. Similar to the small hit random number table 202b (see FIG. 15B) in the first embodiment, the small hit random number table 202b is set with a random number value (counter value) determined to be a small hit in the special symbol lottery. It is a table that has been set. As shown in FIG. 302 (b), in the small hit random number table 202b in the eleventh embodiment, the random number value to be a small hit is not defined for the lottery of the first special symbol. That is, in the lottery of the first special symbol, the small hit is not won. On the other hand, for the lottery of the second special symbol, 472 random numbers (counter values) of "8 to 479" are defined in association with each other. Therefore, in the eleventh embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, a small hit is obtained with a probability of 59/60 (472/480). That is, in the eleventh embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the latent state, it becomes a big hit or a small hit. Therefore, the degree of advantage of the latent state can be further increased.

Next, with reference to FIG. 303, the details of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 303 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d. Similar to the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A) in the first embodiment, the jackpot type selection table 202d in the eleventh embodiment has a determination value for determining the jackpot type for each type of special symbol. It is a data table stored in.

As shown in FIG. 303, in the jackpot type selection table 202d in the eleventh embodiment, seven jackpot types of "big hit A11" to "big hit G11" are shown as the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1). Is stipulated. On the other hand, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, three jackpot types of "big hit H11" to "big hit J11" are defined.

As shown in FIG. 303, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4", while the jackpot type is "big hit A11". It is specified in association with each other. This "big hit A11" is a type of jackpot (8 rounds probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds and the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends. It should be noted that whether or not the time saving state of the normal symbol is set is variable according to the game state at the time of winning the big hit. More specifically, when the "big hit A11" is won in the normal state, the time saving state, and the probability change state, the time saving state of the normal symbol is not set (0 is set in the value of the time saving counter 203f). That is, if the "big hit A11" is won in the normal state, the time saving state, and the probabilistic state, the state shifts to the most advantageous latent state. At this time, since the number of probability changes is set to 100 (100 is set in the probability change counter 203j), at the maximum, from the end of "big hit A11" to the execution of 100 special symbol lottery. For the time being, a favorable latent state continues. On the other hand, when the "big hit A11" is won in the latent state, the number of time reductions is set to 50 (50 is set to the value of the time reduction counter 203f), so after the big hit ends, a lottery of special symbols can be performed at the maximum. Is a relatively advantageous probabilistic state until it is executed 50 times. Therefore, the "big hit A11" is the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of the gaming state when winning in a gaming state other than the latent probability state. On the other hand, if you win in the latent state, it will be a relatively advantageous jackpot type in terms of the gaming state (it is more disadvantageous than the jackpot type in which the latent probability state is set, but it is more advantageous than the jackpot type in which the time saving state is set. Become).

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, 5 are the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit A11", so the lottery for the first special symbol In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit A11" is determined is 5% (5/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 303, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "5 to 14" and "big hit B11" as the jackpot type. This "big hit B11" is a type of jackpot (8 rounds probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds and the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends. If the "big hit B11" is won in the normal state, the number of time reductions is set to 75 times, while if the "big hit B11" is won in the time reduction state and the probable change state, the number of time reductions is set to 40 times. Will be done. That is, if the "big hit B11" is won in the normal state, the time saving state, and the probable change state, the state shifts to a relatively advantageous probable change state. On the other hand, when the "big hit B11" is won in the latent probability state, the number of time reductions is set to 0, so that the gaming state after the big hit is the most advantageous latent state. Therefore, the "big hit B11" is a big hit type that is relatively advantageous in terms of the gaming state when winning in a gaming state other than the latent probability state. On the other hand, if the player wins in the latent state, it will be the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of the game state.

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, 10 are the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit B11", so the first special symbol lottery. In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit B11" is determined is 10% (10/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 303, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "15 to 69" and "big hit C11" as the jackpot type. This "big hit C11" is a type of jackpot (8 rounds probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds and the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends. If you win the "big hit C11" in the normal state, the number of time reductions is set to 50 times, while if you win the "big hit C11" in the time reduction state and the probable change state, the number of time reductions is set to 25 times. Will be done. That is, since a smaller number of time reductions is set as compared with the case where the "big hit B11" is won in the above three game states, it becomes easier to shift to the latent state (normal symbols are continuously removed until the time reduction state ends. It will be easier to make it). Therefore, in the normal state, the time saving state, and the probable change state, the "big hit C11" is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than the "big hit B11". On the other hand, when the "big hit B11" is won in the latent probability state, the number of time reductions is set to 0, so that the gaming state after the big hit is the most advantageous latent state. Therefore, the "big hit C11" is the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of the gaming state when winning in the latent state.

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, 55 are the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit C11", so the first special symbol lottery. In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit C11" is determined is 55% (55/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 303, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined as "70 to 79", and "big hit D11" is associated with the jackpot type. This "big hit D11" is a type of jackpot (8 rounds probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds and the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends. If the "big hit D11" is won in the normal state, the number of time reductions is set to 25, while if the "big hit D11" is won in the time reduction state and the probable change state, the number of time reductions is set to 10 times. Will be done. That is, since the number of time reductions is set to be smaller than when the "big hit B11" or "big hit C11" is won in the above three game states, it becomes easy to shift to the latent state (the time reduction state of the normal symbol ends). It becomes easier to make the disconnection continuous). Therefore, in the normal state, the time saving state, and the probable change state, the "big hit D11" is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than the "big hit B11" and the "big hit C11". On the other hand, when the "big hit D11" is won in the latent probability state, the number of time reductions is set to 0, so that the gaming state after the big hit is the most advantageous latent state. Therefore, the "big hit D11" is the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of the gaming state when winning in the latent state.

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, 10 are the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit D11", so the first special symbol lottery. In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit D11" is determined is 10% (2/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 303, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "80, 81", and the jackpot type is defined as "big hit E11". This "big hit E11" is a type of big hit (8 rounds normal big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds, and after the end of the big hit is set to the low probability state of the special symbol. If the "big hit E11" is won in the normal state, the number of time reductions is set to 75, while if the "big hit E11" is won in the time reduction state, the probable change state, and the latent state, the number of time reductions is set. It is set to 100 times. The time saving state is a kind of jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player because it only shifts to the normal state (it does not shift to the advantageous latent state) even if the time saving number of times elapses.

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, two are random values (counter values) associated with the "big hit E11", so the first special symbol lottery. In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit E11" is determined is 2% (2/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 303, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined as "82 to 98", and "big hit F11" is associated with the jackpot type. This "big hit F11" is a type of big hit (8 rounds normal big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds, and after the end of the big hit is set to the low probability state of the special symbol. If the "big hit F11" is won in the normal state, the number of time reductions is set to 50, while if the "big hit F11" is won in the time reduction state, the probable change state, and the latent state, the number of time reductions is set. It is set to 100 times. Therefore, the "big hit F11" is a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous than the "big hit E11" in the normal state, and is a jackpot with the same degree of advantage as the "big hit E11" in the time saving state, the probable change state, and the latent state. ..

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, 17 are random values (counter values) associated with the "big hit F11", so the first special symbol lottery. In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit F11" is determined is 17% (17/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 303, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "99", and the jackpot type is defined as "big hit G11". This "big hit G11" is a type of big hit (8 rounds normal big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds, and after the end of the big hit is set to the low probability state of the special symbol. If the "big hit G11" is won in the normal state, the number of time reductions is set to 25, while if the "big hit G11" is won in the time reduction state, the probable change state, and the latent state, the number of time reductions is set. It is set to 100 times. Therefore, the "big hit G11" is a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous than the "big hit E11" and the "big hit F11" in the normal state, and the "big hit E11" and the "big hit F11" in the time saving state, the probable change state, and the latent state. It is a big hit with the same degree of advantage.

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, one is the random number value (counter value) associated with the "big hit G11", so the first special symbol lottery. In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit G11" is determined is 1% (1/100).

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, as the jackpot of the first special symbol, the probability variation jackpot (“big hit B11” to A "big hit D11") and a normal jackpot ("big hit E11" to "big hit G11") in which 75, 50, and 25 time reductions are set are provided. That is, the timing at which the time saving state of the normal symbol ends is set to three patterns of 75 times, 50 times, and 25 times after the end of the big hit. With this configuration, after the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, it shifts to the latent state every time the lottery of the special symbol is executed 25 times, 50 times, and 75 times. Can be expected. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the ratio of jackpots in which the number of time reductions is set to 25 is usually extremely low (1%). Therefore, since it is difficult to determine the jackpot type that is most disadvantageous to the player (the number of time reductions is small and there is no possibility of shifting to the latent state), it is possible to prevent the player from becoming too disadvantageous. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation for the game from being lowered. Further, the ratio of the normal jackpot (big hit E11) in which the number of time reductions is set to 75 is also configured to be relatively low (2%). As a result, when the number of time reductions exceeds 50 times (that is, when the continuation is notified by the second river breakthrough effect), the expectation of being in a probable change state can be improved. Therefore, even if the transition to the latent state is not notified in the second river breakthrough effect (that is, even if the continuation is notified), the expectation for the next (that is, the third) river breakthrough effect is higher. Can be improved.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the case where the probability change jackpot is won (that is, the consecutive villas) is less than the case where the jackpot is won in the normal state (that is, the so-called first hit) in the time saving state or the probability change state. The configuration is such that the number of time reductions is set. That is, it is configured so that the end condition of the normal symbol in the time-saving state is more easily established when the probability-changing jackpot is won in the time-saving state or the probability-changing state than when the probability-changing jackpot is won in the normal state. In other words, it is more likely that the person who wins the probability change jackpot during the time saving state of the normal symbol will shift to the latent state. As a result, the player can feel as if he / she is approaching the latent state as the jackpot is won in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. ..

If a normal jackpot is won in a time-saving state or a probability change state, 100 times are set as the number of time-savings regardless of the jackpot type. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of advantage in the case of a normal jackpot that is disadvantageous in the time saving state or the probable change state (that is, does not shift to the latent probable state even if the end condition of the time saving state of the normal symbol is satisfied). Therefore, in both the case of a probable change jackpot and the case of a normal jackpot, the degree of advantage can be increased when a so-called consecutive villa occurs rather than when the so-called first hit occurs. It is possible to further improve the expectation of the player in such a case.

Further, as shown in FIG. 303, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 74", and the jackpot type is "big hit H11". Is specified in association with each other. This "big hit H11" is a type of jackpot (16 rounds probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 16 rounds and the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends. If the "big hit H11" is won in a state other than the latent state, the number of time reductions is set to 100, while if the "big hit H11" is won in the latent state, the number of time reductions is set to 0. Set. That is, if the "big hit H11" is won in a game state other than the latent state, the game state after the big hit is set to the probable change state, while if the "big hit H11" is won in the latent state, after the big hit is finished. The game state of is set to the latent state.

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, 75 are the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit H11", so the second special symbol lottery. In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit H11" is determined is 75% (75/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 303, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "75 to 79" and "big hit I11" as the jackpot type. This "big hit I11" is a type of jackpot (16 rounds probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 16 rounds and the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends. If the "big hit I11" is won in a state other than the latent state, the number of time reductions is set to 100, while if the "big hit I11" is won in the latent state, the number of time reductions is 50 times. Set. That is, when the "big hit I11" is won, the gaming state after the big hit is set to the probable change state regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning.

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, the random values (counter values) associated with the "big hit I11" are five, so the second special symbol lottery. In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit H11" is determined is 5% (5/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 303, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "80 to 99" and "big hit J11" as the jackpot type. This "big hit J11" is a type of big hit (16 rounds normal big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 16 rounds, and after the end of the big hit is set to the low probability state of the special symbol. If the "big hit J11" is won in a state other than the latent state, the number of time reductions is set to 0, while if the "big hit J11" is won in the latent state, the number of time reductions is 100 times. Set. That is, if the "big hit J11" is won in a game state other than the latent state, the normal state is set after the big hit ends, while if the "big hit J11" is won in the latent state, the game state after the big hit ends is set. It is set to the time saving state.

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, 20 are the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit J11", so the second special symbol lottery. In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit J11" is determined is 20% (20/100).

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol in the game state other than the latent probability state, the game state after the big hit is relatively disadvantageous. .. This is intended to suppress an irregular game method in which a right-handed game is performed and a lottery for the second special symbol is executed even though the game is not in a latent state. That is, if the same gaming state as the latent probability state is set in the jackpot of the second special symbol won in the game state other than the latent probability state, the lottery of the second special symbol is intentionally performed by right-handed. Depending on the game method to be executed, the player will shift to the most advantageous latent state at a high rate of 75%, which will be excessively advantageous to the player. On the other hand, in the eleventh embodiment, even if a right-handed game is performed in a game state in which a left-handed game should be performed and a big hit is obtained, there is no possibility of shifting to the latent state (that is, the number of time reductions). Since the probabilistic state) is set or the most unfavorable normal state is set, it is disadvantageous for the player to win the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery. .. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in which a right-handed game is performed in a game state in which a left-handed game should be performed.

Next, the details of the variation pattern selection table 202f according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 304. Similar to the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 17) in the first embodiment, the variation pattern selection table 202f determines the variation pattern (variation time) of the variation display from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1. It is a data table for doing. In the eleventh embodiment, among the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f, the provisions of the time saving / probability variation table 202f2 and the latent probability table 202f3 are partially changed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 304 (a), the time reduction / probability variation table 202f2 in the eleventh embodiment is more than the time reduction / probability variation table 202f2 (see FIG. 19 (a)) in the first embodiment. It is configured so that the fluctuation time is shortened (10 to 20 seconds) when the first special symbol is hit. Further, as the fluctuation pattern at the time of the deviation of the first special symbol, an deviation short variation with a fluctuation time of 1 second, an deviation middle fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds, and an deviation super fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds are provided. There is. As a result, it is possible to improve the game efficiency in the time saving state and the probable change state, and to diversify the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection. Further, since the average fluctuation time is shorter than that in the normal state (see FIG. 18), it is possible to improve the game efficiency in the game state in which the time reduction state of the normal symbol is set. As for the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol, 60 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result as in the first embodiment. As a result, when a right-handed game is performed in a time-saving state or a probable change state in which a left-handed game should be performed, the game efficiency can be deteriorated. It is possible to suppress the game method.

Further, as shown in FIG. 304 (b), in the latent probability table 202f3j in the eleventh embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol is the same as the time saving / probability variation table 202f2. On the other hand, for the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol, a fluctuation pattern for 1 second is set regardless of the lottery result. Therefore, when the player shifts to the latent state and performs the right-handed game, the small hit game is executed at a relatively short interval (about 1 second interval), so that the first specific winning opening 65a is frequently opened. , You can get prize balls frequently. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of advantage of the player in the latent state.

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, in the latent state, the jackpot probability becomes high, and the first specific winning opening 65a is opened at 1-second intervals, which is an extremely advantageous gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play the game with one goal of shifting to the latent state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 305, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 305 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 according to the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 305, in the configuration of the RAM 203 in the eleventh embodiment, a probability variation counter 203ja is added to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 21) in place of the probability variation flag 203g. It differs in that.

The probability variation counter 203ja is a counter for counting the number of lottery of the remaining special symbols until the probability variation state of the special symbol ends. If the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is 1 or more, it indicates that the special symbol is in the probability variation state, and if the value is 0, it indicates that the special symbol is in the low probability state. The initial value of the probability variation counter 203ja is set to 0, and the value is set to 0 when the jackpot is won. If the winning jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot, a value of 100 is set at the end of the probabilistic jackpot. Further, while the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is 1 or more, the value is decremented by 1 and updated every time a new special symbol lottery is executed (see S623 in FIG. 310). When the lottery of the special symbol is executed, the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is referred to to determine whether or not it is in the probability variation state, and a table for determining the jackpot (first random number for high probability). Either a table or a random number table per first for low probability times) is selected.

Next, with reference to FIG. 306, the method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10 realized by performing control based on various tables defined in ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in RAM 203. explain. FIG. 306 is a diagram showing a method of transitioning the state of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 306, the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment is roughly divided into four gaming states. That is, the normal state shown in the upper part of FIG. 306, the probabilistic state shown in the center left side of FIG. 306, the time saving state shown in the center right side of FIG. It is provided.

As described above, the normal state indicates a low probability state of the special symbol and a normal state of the normal symbol, the probability of becoming a big hit is low, and the electric accessory 64a is difficult to be released (the game ball is lower). 1 It is difficult to enter the ball into the ball entry port 64b2), which is the most disadvantageous game state for the player. Further, as described above, the probabilistic state indicates the probabilistic state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol, the probability of a big hit is high, and the lower first entrance is performed by performing a left-handed game. Since the game ball frequently enters the 64 (the electric accessory 64a is frequently released), the game state is relatively advantageous for the player. In addition, the time saving state indicates a low probability state of a special symbol and a time saving state of a normal symbol, and although the jackpot probability is low, by performing a left-handed game, the lower first is the same as the probability change state. Since the game ball frequently enters the ball entry port 640, a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is formed. Further, as described above, the latent probability state indicates the probabilistic state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, and when the jackpot probability is high and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. Since the set fluctuation time is significantly shorter than the other three game states (60 seconds → 1 second), the second special symbol lottery can be efficiently executed by performing a right-handed game. Can be done. Then, as described above, in the lottery of the second special symbol, a small hit is won with a high probability (59/60), and the first specific winning opening 64a is opened. The game balls frequently enter the two entry openings 640 and the first specific winning opening 64a, forming an extremely advantageous gaming state in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained without going through a big hit. Therefore, the latent state is the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 306, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal state to another state only when a big hit occurs. Specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 306, when the jackpot A11, which is the jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 5% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), it is latent after the jackpot ends. Move to a certain state. Therefore, when the jackpot A11 is reached, it directly shifts to the most advantageous latent state. Therefore, in the normal state, the jackpot A11 is the type of jackpot that is most pleasing to the player. In addition, if any of the jackpots B11 to D11, which is the jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 75% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), it will be in a relatively advantageous probability change state after the jackpot ends. Transition. Further, when the jackpot of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and any of the jackpots E11 to G11 determined at a rate of 20% is selected as the jackpot type, the time is shortened after the jackpot ends. As described above, when the probabilistic state and the time saving state are set as the game states after the jackpot ends, it is configured so that it becomes difficult to recognize which game state is set (which game state). However, the structure is such that the river breakthrough effect is executed at the same timing). Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the result of the river breakthrough effect and perform the game.

In addition, as shown on the left side of the center of FIG. 306, there is a possibility of shifting from the probabilistic state to another state in the case of a big hit or when the time saving state of the normal symbol ends. be. Specifically, it becomes a big hit in the probability change state, and when the big hit A11 determined at a rate of 5% is selected, it shifts to an advantageous latent state after the end of the big hit. Further, when the jackpots E11 to G11 determined at a rate of 20% are selected, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the time saving state. On the other hand, if the time saving state of the normal symbol ends before the jackpot is won, it shifts to the most advantageous latent state. On the other hand, when the jackpot type of the first special symbol is one of the jackpots B11 to D11 determined at a rate of 75%, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the probable change state again ( Loop the probabilistic state). In other words, in the probabilistic state, even if you win the jackpot, it will shift to the advantageous latent state only with a low probability (5% ratio), so it is better to let the player pass the time reduction number of times. You can feel that it is easy to shift to the state. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel playability in which the deviation is expected to be continuous over the set number of time reductions. As mentioned above, the transition is based on winning the probability change jackpot in the probability variation state or the time saving state, rather than the probability variation state (the probability variation state that transitioned after the first hit) that was transferred based on winning the probability variation jackpot in the normal state. It is configured so that the average value of the set number of time reductions is smaller in the probable change state (probability change state that shifts after the occurrence of the consecutive villas). That is, while the average number of time reductions set at the time of the first hit is 50 times, the average number of time reductions set at the time of the occurrence of the consecutive villas is 25 times. Therefore, it is easier to pass the number of time reductions when the consecutive villas occur, so even if the jackpot is won before the number of time reductions elapses in the probability change state and the probability change state is looped. Since there is a high possibility that the number of time reductions (small number of time reductions) that facilitates the transition to the latent state is set, the disappointment of the player can be alleviated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation for the game from being lowered.

Further, as shown on the right side of the center of FIG. 306, there is a possibility of shifting from the time saving state to another state in the case of a big hit or when the time saving state of the normal symbol ends. be. Specifically, when the jackpot is a big hit in the time saving state and the jackpot A11 determined at a rate of 5% is selected, it shifts to an advantageous latent state after the jackpot ends. Further, when the jackpots B11 to D11 determined at a rate of 75% are selected, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the probable change state. On the other hand, if the time saving state of the normal symbol ends before the jackpot is won, it shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state. On the other hand, when the jackpot type of the first special symbol is one of the jackpots E11 to G11 determined at a rate of 20%, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the time saving state again ( Loop the time saving state). In other words, in the time saving state, even if the number of time saving times of the normal symbol elapses, it shifts to the disadvantageous normal state, so it is advantageous to win the jackpot. As described above, it is difficult to distinguish whether the time saving state of the normal symbol is set or the probability variation state is set from the content of the effect, so the time saving state is set. In the meantime, it can be expected to be in a probable state. That is, it can be expected that the number of time reductions of the normal symbol will elapse. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 306, from the latent probability state to another state, there is a possibility of shifting to another gaming state not only when a big hit occurs but also when the number of probability changes has elapsed. Specifically, in the latent state, a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, and when the big hit I11 determined at a rate of 5% is selected, the probability change state is entered after the big hit is completed. Further, when the jackpot J11 determined at a rate of 20% is selected, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the time saving state. On the other hand, if the number of probable changes ends before the jackpot is won, the state shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state. On the other hand, if the jackpot H11 is determined at a rate of 75% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the latent state again ( Loop the latency state). In other words, in the latent state, by winning the jackpot before the number of probability changes elapses, a high rate (75% rate) of the advantageous latent state is looped, so that after shifting to the latent state. Can be made to play the game while expecting to be a big hit.

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, it is possible to realize the playability in which the deviation is expected to be continuous in the probabilistic state, while the playability is expected to be a big hit in the latent state. can do. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 307 (a), the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 307 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 222 in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 307 (a), the configuration of the ROM 222 in the eleventh embodiment has a small hit effect selection table 222ja and a prize for the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 22 (a)). It differs from the sound selection table 222jb in that it is added.

The small hit effect selection table 222ja is a data table referred to for selecting the type of the small hit effect during the execution of the small hit game when the small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. As described above, when the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are executed in duplicate (simultaneously), such as immediately after the transition to the latent state, this small hit effect is performed. Depending on the type, the lottery result of the first special symbol can be suggested. The details of the small hit effect selection table 222ja will be described later with reference to FIG. 308 (a).

The winning sound selection table 222jb is a data table referred to for selecting a winning sound to be output when a winning is detected for the specific winning opening 65a during the execution of the small hit game. In the eleventh embodiment, the lottery result of the first special symbol can be suggested (notified) even by the winning sound output during the small hit game. As a result, not only the small hit effect but also the winning sound can be paid attention to the game, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. The details of the winning sound selection table 222jb will be described later with reference to FIG. 308 (b).

Next, the details of the small hit effect selection table 222ja described above will be described with reference to FIG. 308 (a). FIG. 308 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the small hit effect selection table 222ja. As shown in FIG. 308 (a), in the small hit effect selection table 222ja, the type of winning information of the first special symbol (data stored in the storage area corresponding to the first special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b). The range of the counter value of the effect counter (effect lottery counter) 223h and the effect mode of the small hit effect are defined in association with each other.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 308 (a), when data indicating a jackpot is stored in the execution area as the winning information of the first special symbol (that is, the fluctuation of the first special symbol during execution). (When the display is a big hit), the value of the effect counter 223h is defined in association with the normal effect mode (see FIG. 7 (b)) with respect to the range of "0 to 69", and is defined as "70 to 89". The range of "90 to 99" is defined in association with the effect mode for medium expectation, and the range of "90 to 99" is associated with the effect mode for high expectation (see FIG. 301). There is. Therefore, the percentages of the normal effect mode, the effect mode for medium expectation, and the effect mode for high expectation selected during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol are 70% (70/100) and 20%, respectively. (20/100), and 10% (10/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 308 (a), when data indicating a jackpot is stored in an area other than the execution area as the winning information of the first special symbol (the jackpot is included in the reserved ball of the first special symbol). When the data indicating the out-of-order super fluctuation is stored in the execution area (when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol being executed is out of the super-variation), the value of the staging counter 223h is "0 to 84". A normal effect mode (see FIG. 7B) is associated with the range of, and an effect mode for medium expectation is associated with the range of “85 to 97”. An effect mode for high expectations (see FIG. 301) is defined in association with the range of "98,99". Therefore, when the reserved ball of the 1st special symbol contains a big hit, or when the out-of-order super fluctuation of the 1st special symbol is being executed, the normal effect mode, the effect mode for medium expectation, and the high effect mode are used. The percentages at which the effect mode for expectation is selected are 85% (85/100), 13% (13/100), and 2% (2/100), respectively. That is, the selection ratio of the effect mode for high expectation and the effect mode for medium expectation is lower than that in the case where the jackpot of the first special symbol is changing, and the selection ratio of the normal effect mode is increased. Has been done. Therefore, if the variation display of the first special symbol is executed at the time when the effect mode for high expectation or the effect mode for medium expectation is executed, the variation display of the first special symbol indicates a big hit. It can be expected more strongly that it is a variable display for. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the small hit effect and perform the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 308 (a), when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is not executed, the out-of-order super fluctuation is not executed, and the jackpot is not included in the reserved ball of the first special symbol. The value of the effect counter 223h is defined in association with a normal effect mode (see FIG. 7B) with respect to the range of "0 to 94", and with respect to the range of "95 to 98". The effect mode for medium expectation is defined in association with each other, and the effect mode for high expectation (see FIG. 301) is associated with "99". Therefore, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is not executed, the missed super fluctuation is not executed, and the jackpot is not included in the reserved ball of the first special symbol, the normal production mode and the medium expectation degree The proportions of which the effect mode for high expectation and the effect mode for high expectation are selected are 95% (95/100), 4% (4/100), and 1% (1/100), respectively. That is, the selection ratio of the production mode for high expectation and medium expectation compared to the case where the jackpot fluctuation or the missed super fluctuation of the first special symbol is being executed or the jackpot is included in the hold. Is configured to decrease and the selection ratio of the normal production mode increases. Therefore, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed at the time when the effect mode for high expectation or the effect mode for medium expectation is executed, or when the reserved ball of the first special symbol exists. , The game can be played with the expectation that the variable display during execution will be a big hit, or that the big hit is included in the hold. Therefore, every time a small hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is possible to realize a game property in which the lottery result of the first special symbol is predicted from the effect mode of the small hit effect. Can be improved.

Here, conventionally, a gaming machine that executes a variable display effect of a symbol for showing the lottery result every time a lottery result of a special symbol is executed is widely known. In the conventional gaming machine, the player's interest is improved by executing various entertainment effects suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol during the execution of the symbol variation display effect. However, in a gaming machine having specifications capable of simultaneously executing a plurality of variable display effects, there is a problem that while paying attention to the effect mode associated with one variable display, the effect mode in the other variable display effect is overlooked. There was a point. In particular, in a gaming machine of a type in which one variation display is displayed in a mode that is easier to see than the other, it becomes difficult to confirm the effect mode in the variation display of the other (the side that is difficult to see), and the other variation display effect. However, there is a problem that the player may be confused when the big hit is started while the player is not paying attention to it.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment, the variation display of the second special symbol, which is mainly executed in the latent state, is prioritized (visually recognized) over the variation display of the first special symbol, which is difficult to execute. If the variation display of the first special symbol is executed together with the display (in an easy mode), the lottery of the first special symbol is performed by the small hit effect of the second special symbol (the effect mode accompanying the variation display). The structure suggests the result. With this configuration, it is possible to confirm the degree of expectation that will be a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol only by paying attention to the effect mode accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, the lottery result of the first special symbol, which is being executed at the same time, suggests the degree of expectation that the lottery result is a big hit, depending on the display mode in the small hit effect of the second special symbol. Not limited. For example, it may be configured to suggest the lottery result of the first special symbol depending on the effect mode of the effect executed during the variable display of the second special symbol. Further, for example, it is also possible to suggest (notify) the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol will be a big hit depending on the display mode of the variable display of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device. good. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest the result of the variable display effect on the side that is difficult to see to the player just by checking the variable display effect on the side that is easy to see, so that the effect that is easier to understand is realized. can do. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved.

Next, the details of the winning sound selection table 222jb will be described with reference to FIG. 308 (b). As described above, the winning sound selection table 222jb is a data table referred to for selecting a winning sound to be output when a winning is detected for the specific winning opening 65a during the execution of the small hit game. As shown in FIG. 308 (b), in the winning sound selection table 222jb, the effect counter is displayed for each type of winning information in the execution area of the first special symbol (variation type of the variation display of the first special symbol being executed). (Production lottery counter) The range of the counter value of 223h and the type of winning sound (one of three types of normal sound, chance sound, and confirmed sound) are defined in association with each other. The normal sound is relatively short and is composed of a plain voice (for example, the voice of "charin"), and the chance sound is longer than the normal sound and is composed of a flashy voice (for example, "jakin"). It is composed of voice), and the definite sound is composed of the most flashy voice among the three types (for example, the voice "docker"). Although details will be described later, the fixed sound is a special sound that is output only when the game ball enters (wins) the first specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 308 (b), when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is being executed, a normal sound is generated as a winning sound with respect to the value of the effect lottery counter 223h in the range of "0 to 79". It is defined in association with each other, and a chance sound is associated with the range of "80 to 98" as a winning sound, and a definite sound is associated with "99" as a winning sound. Therefore, when a prize is detected for the first specific winning opening 65a during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the ratios of the normal sound, the chance sound, and the confirmed sound are 80% and 19%, respectively. And 1%. As mentioned above, the definite sound is a special sound that is selected only during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation. Therefore, when the definite sound is output, it is possible to give great joy to the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 308 (b), when the out-of-order super fluctuation of the first special symbol is being executed, the value of the staging lottery counter 223h is set as a winning sound in the range of "0 to 89". Normal sounds are associated with each other, and chance sounds are associated with the range of "90 to 99" as winning sounds. On the other hand, the value of the effect counter 223h is not associated with the fixed sound. Therefore, when a prize is detected for the first specific winning opening 65a during the execution of the out-of-order super fluctuation of the first special symbol, the ratio of the normal sound, the chance sound, and the confirmed sound being output is 90% and 10%, respectively. , And 0%. That is, the ratio of the chance sound being output decreases (about half) and the ratio of the normal sound being output increases as compared with the case of the jackpot fluctuation. Then, there is no possibility that a definite sound is output.

Further, as shown in FIG. 308 (b), when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is not executed or the off-super fluctuation is not executed, the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 94". Therefore, a normal sound is associated and defined as a winning sound, and a chance sound is associated and defined as a winning sound in the range of "95 to 99". On the other hand, the value of the effect counter 223h is not associated with the fixed sound. Therefore, when a prize is detected for the first specific winning opening 65a during the execution of the out-of-order super fluctuation of the first special symbol, the ratio of the normal sound, the chance sound, and the confirmed sound being output is 95% and 5%, respectively. , And 0%. That is, the output ratio of the chance sound is further reduced and the output ratio of the normal sound is increased as compared with the case where the off-super fluctuation is being executed. Therefore, when the chance sound is output, it is possible to improve the expectation that the jackpot fluctuation is being executed. Further, since the confirmation sound is output, it is confirmed that the jackpot fluctuation is being executed, so that the player can have great joy. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention not only to the small hit effect but also to the winning sound output during the small hit game, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 307 (b), the details of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 307 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 according to the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 307 (b), the configuration of the RAM 223 in the eleventh embodiment has a fluctuation count counter 223ja and an initial hit flag with respect to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 22 (b)). It differs from 223jb in that it is added.

The fluctuation number counter 223ja is a counter for counting the fluctuation number (lottery number) of the special symbol. The initial value of the fluctuation count counter 223ja is set to 0, and the value is incremented by 1 each time the fluctuation display effect starts (that is, each time a fluctuation pattern command is received from the main controller 110). (See S5121 and S5125 in FIG. 314). Further, it is reset to 0 at the end of the big hit (see S4422 in FIG. 312). In the gaming state (probability change state, time saving state) in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, it is determined whether or not the river breakthrough effect can be executed by referring to the value of the fluctuation number counter 223ja (S5132, S5133 in FIG. 315). reference).

The first hit flag 223jb is a flag indicating whether or not the time saving state of the normal symbol set after the first hit is set. If this first hit flag is on, it means that it is during the time saving state of the normal symbol set after the first hit, and if it is off, it means that it is not the time saving state after the first hit. In the time saving state of the normal symbol, this first hit flag 223jb is referred to every time the start timing of the variation display effect of the special symbol is reached, and whether it is the time saving state after the first hit or the time saving state after the occurrence of the consecutive villas. It is determined whether or not there is. Then, if the time is shortened after the first hit, the river breakthrough effect is set at the start of the 24th, 49th, and 74th variation display after the end of the big hit (see S5132 in FIG. 315). On the other hand, if the time is shortened after the occurrence of the consecutive villas, the river breakthrough effect is set at the start of the variation display of 9, 24, and 39 times (S5133 in FIG. 315). As described above, this is the number of fluctuations (special) in which the time saving state of the normal symbol may end between the time saving state of the normal symbol set after the first hit and the time saving state of the normal symbol set after the consecutive villas. This is because the number of lottery of symbols) is different.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 309 to 311, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 309, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 12 (S321) in the eleventh embodiment will be described. The first special symbol jackpot determination process 12 (S321) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment, and is a process executed in place of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34). Similar to the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34), based on the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, based on the set gaming state, This is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not it is a jackpot.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 12 (see FIG. 309) in the eleventh embodiment, the control content is changed by providing the probability change counter 203ja instead of the probability change flag 203g in the first embodiment. More specifically, in each process of S401, S403 to S410, S412 in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 12 (see FIG. 309) in the eleventh embodiment, the first special symbol jackpot in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S401, S403 to S410, S412 of the determination processing (see FIG. 34) is executed. Further, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 12 (see FIG. 309) in the eleventh embodiment, when the process of S401 is completed, the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is a value larger than 0 (that is, a value of 1 or more). If it is determined whether or not (S421) and it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is larger than 0 (S421: Yes), the process is shifted to S403. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is 0 in the processing of S421 (S421: No), the processing is shifted to S404.

Although the illustration is omitted, the control content of the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40) is also changed in the same manner.

Next, the details of the game state update process 12 (S322) in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 310. FIG. 310 is a flowchart showing the game state update process 12 (S322) in the eleventh embodiment. The game state update process 12 (S322) is a process executed in place of the game state update process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment, and is different from the game state update process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment. Similarly, it is a process for updating the state of the pachinko machine 10 by updating various flags and counters indicating the state of the pachinko machine 10.

In the game state update process 12 (S322) in the eleventh embodiment, the control content is changed by providing the probability change counter 203ja instead of the probability change flag 203g in the first embodiment. More specifically, in each of the games S601 to S604, S606, and S607 of the game state update process 12 (S322) in the eleventh embodiment, the game state update process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 36). The same processes as those of S601 to S604, S606, and S607 are executed.

Further, in the game state update process 12 (see FIG. 310) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S604 that the value of the time reduction counter 203f is a value larger than 0 (S604: Yes), then the probability change If it is determined whether or not the value of the counter 203ja is larger than 0 (S621) and it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is larger than 0 (S621: Yes), the process is shifted to S606. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is 0 (S621: No), the process shifts to S607.

Further, in the game state update process 12 (see FIG. 310) in the eleventh embodiment, when the process of S606 or S607 is completed, it is nextly determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is larger than 0. (S622), if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is greater than 0 (that is, a value of 1 or more) (S622: Yes), then the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is subtracted by 1 and updated. (S623), the residual probability change number command indicating the value of the probability change counter 203ja after the update is set (S624). When the processing of S624 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203ja after the update by the processing of S623 has become 0 (S625), and if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203ja has become 0 ( S625: Yes), a state command indicating that the state has shifted to the normal state is set (S626), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is 0 in the processing of S622 (S622: No), and when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is not 0 in the processing of S625. Terminates this process as it is.

Next, the details of the second winning process 12 (S2521) in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 311. FIG. 311 is a flowchart showing the second winning process 12 (S2521) in the eleventh embodiment. The second winning process 12 (S2521) is a process executed in place of the second winning process (see FIG. 57) in the first embodiment, and is different from the second winning process (see FIG. 57) in the first embodiment. Similarly, it is a process for performing control according to the winning of the first specific winning opening 65a detected during the execution of the small hit game.

Of the second prize processing 12 (see FIG. 311) in the eleventh embodiment, in each process of S2701 to S2707, each process of S2701 to S2707 of the second prize process (see FIG. 57) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process is executed. Further, in the second winning process 12 (see FIG. 311) in the eleventh embodiment, when the processing of S2704 is completed, the voice lamp control indicates that the winning of the first specific winning opening 65a is detected during the execution of the small hit game. A small hit winning command for notifying the device 113 is set (S2711), and the process shifts to S2705.

The small hit winning command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the small hit winning command, the voice lamp control device 113 refers to the winning information of the first special symbol and the value of the effect counter 223h, and wins a prize from the winning sound selection table 222jb (see FIG. 308 (b)). Select a sound and set the output of the selected winning sound. Thereby, the result of the variable display of the first special symbol can be suggested by the type of the winning sound every time the winning to the first specific winning opening 65a occurs in the small hit game of the second special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 312 to 316, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described. First, the state command process 12 (S4231) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 312. The state command process 12 (S4231) in the eleventh embodiment is a process executed in place of the state command process (see FIG. 62) in the first embodiment, and is a state command process (see FIG. 62) in the first embodiment. ), This is a process for setting the current gaming state in the state setting area 223j based on the state command output from the main control device 110.

Of the state command processes 12 (see FIG. 312) in the eleventh embodiment, in each of the processes S4401 to S4406, S4410, and S4411, the state command processes in the first embodiment (see FIG. 62) S4401 to S4406, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S4410 and S4411 is executed. Further, in the state command processing 12 (see FIG. 312) in the eleventh embodiment, after the processing of S4401 is completed, whether or not the current state command is a state command for indicating the gaming state after the end of the big hit. (S4421), and if it is determined that the command is a state command for indicating the game state after the end of the big hit (S4421: Yes), the value of the fluctuation count counter 223ja is reset to 0 (S4422).

When the processing of S4422 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot (the gaming state determined in the processing of S4401) is the normal state (S4423), and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state. If it is determined to be (S4423: Yes), the first hit flag 223jb is set to ON (S4424), and the process shifts to S4436. On the other hand, in the processing of S4423, if it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit is not the normal state (S4423: No), the first hit flag 223jb is set to off (S4425), and the processing shifts to S4426. ..

In the process of S4426 executed after the process of S4424 or S4425, the value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the state command is set in the state setting area 223j (S4426), and the process shifts to S4402. On the other hand, in the process of S4421, if it is determined that the state command received this time is not a state command for indicating the game state after the end of the big hit (S4421: No), each process of S4422 to S4426 is skipped. The process shifts to S4402.

By executing this state command process 12 (see FIG. 312), whether the jackpot is the first hit (the jackpot won in the normal state) or the consecutive villa (the jackpot won in the game state other than the normal state). Accordingly, the first hit flag 223jb can be appropriately updated. Therefore, the river breakthrough effect (see FIGS. 298 and 299) can be executed at an appropriate timing (the number of fluctuations at which the time saving state of the normal symbol may end).

Next, with reference to FIG. 313, the details of the small hit-related process 12 (S4521) in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 313 is a flowchart showing the small hit-related process 12 (S4521) in the eleventh embodiment. The small hit-related process 12 (S4521) is a process executed in place of the small hit-related process (see FIG. 65) in the first embodiment, and is the same as the small hit-related process (see FIG. 65) in the first embodiment. Similarly, it is a process for executing control according to the type of command related to the small hit.

Of the small hit-related processes 12 (see FIG. 313) in the eleventh embodiment, the processes S4701 to S4710 are the processes of S4701 to S4710 of the small hit-related processes (see FIG. 65) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process is executed. Further, in the small hit related process 12 (see FIG. 313) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined that the small hit start command has not been received from the main control device 110 in the process of S4701 (S4701: No), Next, it is determined whether or not the small hit winning command has been received (S4721), and if it is determined that the small hit winning command has been received (S4721: Yes), then the winning sound selection table 222jb (FIG. 308 (b)). Read (see) (S4722), select the winning sound corresponding to the data of the execution area of the first special symbol and the value of the effect counter 223h from the winning information storage area 223b, and set the output (S4723). ), End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S4721, if it is determined that the small hit winning command has not been received (S4721: No), the process is shifted to S4703.

Next, the variation display setting process 12 (S4121) in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 314. The variable display setting process 12 (S4121) is a process executed in place of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 69) in the first embodiment, and is different from the variable display setting process (see FIG. 69) in the first embodiment. Similarly, in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed based on the first or special diagram 2 variation pattern command received from the main control device 110. This is a process for setting a variation pattern command for use and transmitting the command to the display control device 114.

Of the variation display setting processes 12 (see FIG. 314) in the eleventh embodiment, in each of the processes S5101, S5102, S5106-S5108, and S5110 to S5113, the variation display setting process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 69), respectively. ), The same processes as those of S5101, S5102, S5106 to S5108, and S5110 to S5113 are executed. Further, in the variation display setting process 11 (see FIG. 314) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223d in FIG. 1 is turned on in the process of S5101 (S5101: Yes), then the variation is performed. The value of the number-of-times counter 223ja is updated by adding 1 (S5121), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off (S5102).

When the processing of S5102 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the current state is the time saving state of the normal symbol (S5122). In the process of S5122, it is determined whether or not the data set (stored) in the state setting area 223j is the data indicating either the probabilistic state or the time saving state. In the process of S5122, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S5122: Yes), the time saving medium effect setting process for setting the effect mode (for example, the river breakthrough effect) in the normal symbol time saving state is executed. Then (S5123), the process shifts to S5106. The details of the time-saving and medium-time effect setting process (S5123) will be described later with reference to FIG. 315.

On the other hand, in the process of S5122, when it is determined that the time saving state of the normal symbol is not (S5122: No), the first special symbol display mode showing the variation display mode according to the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern command is shown. A variation pattern command is set (S5124), and the process shifts to S5106.

Further, in the variation display setting process 12 (see FIG. 314) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S5107 that the variation start flag 223e in FIG. 2 is ON (S5107: Yes), then the variation is performed. The value of the number-of-times counter 223ja is updated by adding 1 (S5125), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off (S5108). Next, instead of the variation display setting process for special figure 2 (see FIG. 71) in the first embodiment, the variation display setting process 12 for special figure 2 is executed (S5126), and the process shifts to S5110. The details of the variation display setting process 12 (S5126) for the special figure 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. 316.

Next, with reference to FIG. 315, the details of the above-mentioned time-saving and medium-time effect setting process (S5123) will be described. As described above, the time-saving and medium-time effect setting process (S5123) is a process for setting the effect mode in the time-saving state of the normal symbol. When this time-saving and medium-time effect setting process (S5123) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the first hit flag 223jb is on (S5131), and if it is determined that the first hit flag 223jb is on (S5131). : Yes), then determine whether the value of the fluctuation count counter 223ja is any of 24, 49, and 74 (that is, whether it is the execution timing of the river breakthrough effect after the first hit). (S5132). In the process of S5132, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223jb is any of 24, 49, and 74 (S5132: Yes), the process for setting the effect mode of the river breakthrough effect (S5134 to Each process of S5137) is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S5132, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223jb is different from any of 24, 49, and 74 (S5132: No), it means that it is not the execution timing of the river breakthrough effect. Therefore, the process for setting the effect mode of the river breakthrough effect (each process of S5134 to S5137) is skipped, and the process is shifted to S5139.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first hit flag 223jb is off in the processing of S5131 (S5131: No), whether the value of the fluctuation count counter 223ja is any of 9, 24, and 39. (That is, whether or not it is the execution timing of the river breakthrough effect after the occurrence of the consecutive villas) is determined (S5133). In the process of S5133, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223ja is any of 9, 24, and 39 (that is, it is the execution timing of the river breakthrough effect after the occurrence of the consecutive villas) (S5133: Yes), the process for setting the effect mode of the river breakthrough effect (each process of S5134 to S5137) is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S5133, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223ja is not any of 9, 24, and 39 (that is, it is not the execution timing of the river breakthrough effect after the occurrence of the consecutive villas) (S5133: No), the process for setting the effect mode of the river breakthrough effect (each process of S5134 to S5137) is skipped, and the process shifts to S5139.

In the process for setting the effect mode of the river breakthrough effect (each process of S5134 to S5137), first, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining time reductions is 1 (S5134), and the number of remaining time reductions is not 1 (2). If it is determined (S5134: No), it is decided to execute the river breakthrough effect in the mode indicating the continuation of the chance zone (see FIG. 298 (b)) (S5135), and the process is shifted to S5139. do. On the other hand, in the process of S5134, when it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is 1 (S5134: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a probable change state (S5136). In the process of S5136, if it is determined that the gaming state is the probable change state (S5136: Yes), it means that the state shifts to the latent state at the start of the next fluctuation. The execution of the effect (see FIG. 299 (a)) is determined (S5137), and the process shifts to S5139. On the other hand, in the process of S5136, when it is determined that the state is not in the probable change state (that is, the time saving state) (S5136: No), it means that the state shifts to the normal state at the start of the next fluctuation. The execution of the river breakthrough effect (see FIG. 299 (b)) in the mode of failing to break through is determined (S5138), and the process is shifted to S5139. In the process of S5139, the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern command (S5139), and this process is terminated.

By executing this time saving medium effect setting process (see FIG. 315), while the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, the river breakthrough effect is executed every time the number of fluctuations at which the time saving state may end is reached. can do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 316, the details of the above-mentioned variation display setting process 12 (S5126) for the special figure 2 will be described. The variation display setting process 12 (S5126) for the special figure 2 is a process executed in place of the variation display setting process for the special figure 2 (see FIG. 71) in the first embodiment, and is a process executed in place of the variation display setting process for the special figure 2 (see FIG. 71). Similar to the variation display setting process for 2 (see FIG. 71), this is a process for setting the variation display mode of the second special symbol.

Of the special figure 2 variation display setting process 12 (see FIG. 316) in the eleventh embodiment, in each of the processes S5301 to S5303 and S5309, the variation display setting process for the special figure 2 in the first embodiment (FIG. The same processes as those of S5301 to S5303 and S5309 of (see 71) are executed. Further, in the variation display setting process 12 for special figure 2 (see FIG. 316) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S5303 that the current gaming state is the latent state (S5303: Yes), then , It is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol this time is a small hit (S5311). If it is determined in the process of S5311 that the lottery result is a small hit (S5311: Yes), the small hit effect selection table 222ja (see FIG. 308 (a)) is read out (S5312), and the winning information storage area 223b is displayed. The effect mode corresponding to the data corresponding to the first special symbol and the value of the effect counter 223h is specified (S5313). Next, a variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol indicating the specified effect mode is set (S5314), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5311, if it is determined that the lottery result this time is not a small hit (S5311: No), the process is shifted to S5309.

By executing this variation display setting process 12 for special figure 2 (see FIG. 316), every time a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is being executed according to the effect mode of the variation display effect indicating the small hit. , Or the result of the lottery of the first special symbol on hold can be suggested. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment is configured to shift to the latent probability state as the number of time reductions elapses in the probability change state. In the latent state, there is a high probability that a small hit will be won and the first specific winning opening 65a will be opened frequently (the chance to win a prize ball will be frequently obtained), and a comparison will be made when a big hit is made. Since the same state is repeated (looped) at a high rate, a very advantageous gaming state is formed for the player. For this reason, in the probabilistic state, it is possible to realize a novel playability in which the game is played with one goal of shifting to the latent probable state after the normal symbol has passed the time reduction number of times. You can improve your interest. Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the probability change jackpot is won in the probability change state or the time saving state rather than the probability change state (the probability change state shifted after the first hit) based on the winning of the probability change jackpot in the normal state. It is configured so that the average value of the set number of time reductions is smaller in the probable change state (probability change state in which the transition is made after the occurrence of the consecutive villas). That is, the probability change state set at the time of the occurrence of the consecutive villas is more likely to satisfy the transition condition to the latent probability state than the probability change state set at the time of the first hit. It is configured so that it is easy to make it. Therefore, it is easier to pass the number of time reductions when the consecutive villas occur, so even if the jackpot is won before the number of time reductions elapses in the probability change state and the probability change state is looped. Since there is a high possibility that the number of time reductions (small number of time reductions) that facilitates the transition to the latent state is set, the disappointment of the player can be alleviated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation for the game from being lowered.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, when the gaming state after the end of the big hit is set to the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the river breakthrough effect is produced every time the number of fluctuations that the time saving state of the normal symbol may end is reached. By executing, whether the time saving state of the normal symbol continues, the time saving state of the normal symbol ends and shifts to the latent state, or the time saving state of the normal symbol ends and shifts to the normal state. Is periodically (every 25 times or every 15 times the lottery of special symbols is performed). By configuring in this way, while the chance zone (normal symbol time saving state) is set, the player can play the game with one pleasure that the next river breakthrough effect will be executed. Can be done. In addition, at least until the next river breakthrough production, it is possible to realize a novel playability that is desired to be continuously out of the lottery of special symbols. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Furthermore, by configuring the configuration so that there is a possibility of shifting to the normal state due to failure of the river breakthrough production, the continuation of the time saving state was notified in the river breakthrough production (shifting to the latent state even though the river was broken through). Even if it wasn't), it can be made to think that it is better than being notified of the normal state. That is, even if the latent state is not notified, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment, it is output when the effect mode during the small hit fluctuation of the second special symbol and the winning of the first specific winning opening 65a are detected during the execution of the small hit game. Depending on the type of winning sound, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the result of the other special symbol variation (variation display of the first special symbol) will be a big hit. Here, conventionally, a gaming machine that executes a variable display effect of a symbol for showing the lottery result every time a lottery result of a special symbol is executed is widely known. In the conventional gaming machine, the player's interest is improved by executing various entertainment effects suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol during the execution of the symbol variation display effect. However, in a gaming machine having specifications capable of simultaneously executing a plurality of variable display effects, there is a problem that while paying attention to the effect mode associated with one variable display, the effect mode in the other variable display effect is overlooked. There was a point. In particular, in a gaming machine of a type in which one variation display is displayed in a mode that is easier to see than the other, it becomes difficult to confirm the effect mode in the variation display of the other (the side that is difficult to see), and the other variation display effect. However, there is a problem that the player may be confused when the big hit is started while the player is not paying attention to it. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment, the variation display of the second special symbol, which is mainly executed in the latent state, is prioritized (visually recognized) over the variation display of the first special symbol, which is difficult to execute. If the variation display of the first special symbol is executed together with the display (in an easy mode), the lottery of the first special symbol is performed by the small hit effect of the second special symbol (the effect mode accompanying the variation display). The structure suggests the result. With this configuration, it is possible to confirm the degree of expectation that will be a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol only by paying attention to the effect mode accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, the lottery result of the first special symbol, which is being executed at the same time, suggests the degree of expectation that the lottery result is a big hit, depending on the display mode in the small hit effect of the second special symbol. Not limited. For example, it may be configured to suggest the lottery result of the first special symbol depending on the effect mode of the effect executed during the variable display of the second special symbol. Further, for example, it is also possible to suggest (notify) the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol will be a big hit depending on the display mode of the variable display of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device. good. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest the result of the variable display effect on the side that is difficult to see to the player just by checking the variable display effect on the side that is easy to see, so that the effect that is easier to understand is realized. can do. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, the number of probable changes is 100, but the number of probable changes is not limited to 100, and may be arbitrarily determined. By reducing the number of probable changes, the degree of advantage for the player is reduced, so that gambling can be suppressed. On the other hand, by increasing the number of probability changes, the degree of advantage in the most advantageous latent state can be further increased, so the game should be played with a stronger expectation of shifting to the latent state. Can be done. Similarly, the number of time reductions can be arbitrarily determined. By reducing the number of time reductions, it becomes easier to shift from the probable change state to the latent state, so that it can be more advantageous for the player, and by increasing the number of time reductions, it becomes difficult to shift to the latent state. It is possible to suppress gambling.

In the eleventh embodiment, it is easy to shift to the latent state depending on whether it is the first hit (the big hit won in the normal state) or after the occurrence of the consecutive villas (the big hit won in the state other than the normal state). (Easy to satisfy the end condition of the time saving state of the normal symbol) was made different, but it is not limited to this. For example, as the number of consecutive villas increases, the number of time reductions set after the end of the big hit may decrease. As a result, even if it is not possible to shift to the latent state, the player can feel as if he / she is approaching the latent state every time a consecutive villa occurs. You can improve your interest. In the eleventh embodiment, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, the "big hit A11" is determined at a rate of 5%, and an advantageous latent state is set after the big hit is completed. In this sense, it can be said that even in the configuration of the eleventh embodiment described above, the possibility of shifting to the latent state increases as the number of consecutive villas increases.

In the eleventh embodiment, when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol in the latent state, an effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the big hit of the first special symbol is changing is executed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to indicate the degree of expectation, which is a jackpot type that shifts to the latent state. As a result, it is possible to improve the expectation that the advantageous latent state will continue, and thus it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Further, it may be configured to notify (suggest) the degree of expectation that the jackpot is not included in the hold at the time of transition to the latent state during the variation effect of the second special symbol. That is, even if the state has shifted to the latent state, if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, the latent state may be terminated relatively early, which may disappoint the player. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player does not want to win the jackpot of the first special symbol in the latent state. Therefore, by making the configuration suggesting that the jackpot is not included in the hold, it is possible to make the player understand that the latent state is not terminated at least by the jackpot of the first special symbol. It is possible to expect a person to maintain a latent state for a long time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Furthermore, conversely, the degree of expectation (pinch degree) for being a pinch that normally wins a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol in the latent state is set during the variable production of the second special symbol (and during the small hit game). It may be configured to notify (suggest). With this configuration, when a production with a high degree of pinch is executed, the game can be played with a sense of tension, so that the game can be sharpened. In this case, when a specific type of small hit game is started by the lottery of the second special symbol, the variation display of the first special symbol may be forcibly stopped by the deviation. That is, it may be configured so that the life of the latent state can be extended by converting the normal jackpot into an outlier. With this configuration, a specific type of small hit game is executed after the effect with a high degree of pinch is executed, so that the player can have a great sense of relief. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<12th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 317 to 339. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment described above, the latent probability state is configured as an advantageous gaming state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed and the small hit game is frequently executed. In addition, it is expected that the deviation will continue for the number of time reductions set in the probabilistic state by assuming that the time saving state of the normal symbol ends in the probabilistic state in most of the cases of transitioning to the latent probability state. It was configured to make it possible to realize a novel playability.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment, the normal state is configured as an advantageous gaming state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed and the small hit game is frequently executed, and the latent state is established. Was configured as the most unfavorable gaming state. Then, by ending the number of probable changes in the latent probable state, the configuration is set to shift to the most advantageous normal state. That is, in the twelfth embodiment, it is possible to directly shift from the most unfavorable gaming state to the most advantageous gaming state without going through a jackpot. With this configuration, it is possible to play a game with one goal of passing the number of probable changes in the most unfavorable latent state.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment is that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. The configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been partially changed. The point is that the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, 11 It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the eleventh embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the gaming state in the twelfth embodiment will be briefly described. As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, the normal mode is configured as the most advantageous gaming state, and the latent probability state is configured as the most disadvantageous gaming state. Further, the time saving state and the probable change state are configured as a gaming state having a higher degree of advantage than the latent probable state. Since the special specification that the normal state becomes advantageous is adopted, in the explanation of the transition, the advantageous normal state will be referred to as "ream villa mode". Further, the disadvantageous latent state is referred to as "normal mode", and the relatively advantageous probabilistic state and the time-saving state are referred to as "chance mode A" and "chance mode B", respectively.

Next, with reference to FIG. 317, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 317, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the twelfth embodiment is based on the board surface structure (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13 in the eleventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above. The upper first ball entry port 64b1 and the lower first ball entry port 64b2 have been deleted, and a central first ball entry port 64c is provided instead. Further, below the central first ball entry port 64c, a small attacker 4650 that is opened when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol is provided. Since the small attacker 4650 is surrounded by nails and the central first winning opening 64c on the left, right, and above, it is extremely difficult to insert a game ball during the small hit opening period of the first special symbol. .. In the twelfth embodiment, the small hit of the first special symbol is provided because the game ball enters the second entrance 640 in a state other than the consecutive villa mode, and the second special symbol is long. This is because it is installed for the purpose of forcibly ending the long fluctuation when the fluctuation is made, and it is not for winning the prize ball. That is, even if the second special symbol fluctuates for a long time, it is configured to win a small hit with a high probability (475/480) when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed. With the start of, the second special symbol that has been fluctuating for a long time can be forcibly stopped by the off-stop symbol. Therefore, even if the ball enters the second entrance 640 in a game state other than the consecutive villa mode and the long fluctuation of the second special symbol is started, it can be easily long by returning to the left-handed game. The fluctuation can be terminated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 317, on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in the game board 13, a second entry port (through gate) 67 and a right first entry ball provided downstream of the through gate 67 are provided. The upper surface of the right electric accessory 64ra that can open and close the upper surface of the mouth 64r and the right first ball entry port 64r, and the upper surface of the right electric accessory 64ra while the right electric accessory 64ra is closed. A second entry port 640, which is provided at a position where a game ball that has passed through the above can enter, is provided. As shown in FIG. 317, the flow path of the game ball so that only the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can reach the second entry port 640 with the right electric accessory 64ra closed. Is set. That is, almost all the game balls that have passed through the through gate 67 enter the right first entrance 64r even if the right electric accessory 64ra is hit right in the time-saving state of the normal symbol that tends to be open. Since the ball is thrown, the game ball cannot be entered into the second entrance 640. With this configuration, it is possible to proceed with the right-handed game even in the probable change state (chance mode A) and the time saving state (chance mode B).

Further, as shown in FIG. 317, in the game board 13 in the twelfth embodiment, the second variable winning device 650 is deleted, and only the first variable winning device 65 is provided. As a result, the first variable winning device 65 is opened in both cases of a big hit and a small hit of the second special symbol. That is, the chance mode A and the chance mode B in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, the most advantageous consecutive villa mode in which a small hit is frequently generated by entering the game ball into the second entrance 640, and It is configured so that all jackpot states can be advanced by hitting right. In other words, all states other than the most disadvantageous gaming state (latent state) for the player (state that is advantageous in some respect for the player) can be advanced by right-handed. As a result, it is possible to separate the right-handed game into an advantageous state and the left-handed game into a disadvantageous state, so that it is possible to realize a game that is easier for the player to understand.

Since the normal state of the normal symbol is set during the jackpot game, if a right-handed game is performed in an attempt to win a prize ball by entering the first specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot, almost all Four or more game balls enter the second entrance 640, and the number of reserved balls becomes the upper limit. As a result, after the jackpot game is completed, the second special symbol is almost started to change. However, as described above, by executing the lottery of the first special symbol, it is possible to make a small hit with a high probability and forcibly end the fluctuation display of the second special symbol by the deviation, so that after the big hit ends. Even if a game state other than the normal state is set as the game state of the above and the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the game can be advanced without any problem.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 318 to 320, various characteristic staging effects in the twelfth embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 318, an example of the effect mode in the normal mode (latent state) will be described. As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, the number of probable changes is elapsed in the latent probability state, so that the mode directly shifts to the most advantageous consecutive villa mode (normal state). Therefore, in the normal mode, the effect aiming at the latent state is executed. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 318 (a), the effect of the character 811 imitating a rabbit climbing a rocky mountain is executed. In addition, the characters "Aim to the Top!" Are displayed in the display area HR1 formed above the character 811 climbing the rocky mountain, and the normal mode is displayed in the display area HR2 formed on the right side of the character 811. The display content suggesting the remaining number of fluctuations until the end of (the number of probable changes has elapsed) is displayed. In the example of FIG. 318 (a), the case where the character "remaining 50 m" is displayed in the display area HR2 is illustrated. The remaining meter display up to the summit is subtracted by 1 m each time the fluctuation display is executed, so that the remaining meter (distance) up to the summit is displayed for the player in the consecutive villa mode. It is easy to understand that it is the remaining number of fluctuations until the transition.

FIG. 318 (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the number of probable changes has passed in the normal mode (they have been continuously disengaged over 100 probable changes in the latent state). As shown in FIG. 318 (b), when the number of probable changes has elapsed and the mode shifts to the consecutive villa mode, the effect that the character 811 reaches the top of the rocky mountain is executed, and the display area HR1 is "topped". "Arrival !!" is displayed. Further, the characters "remaining 0 m" are displayed on the display area HR2. From these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the mode has been changed to the consecutive villa mode.

FIG. 319 (a) shows the state (preparation) between the transition to the consecutive villa mode and the state in which the prize ball can actually be obtained (until the small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol). It is a figure which showed the display mode in a state). As shown in FIG. 319 (a), in the ready state, the character "right-handed" is displayed in the small area Dm3, and the display area HR1 is "started RUSH by right-handed !!". Is displayed. In addition, the characters "Preparing for RUSH" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. From these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the player enters the RUSH state in which the prize ball can be obtained by hitting right.

As shown in FIG. 319 (a), when the mode shifts to the continuous villa mode, the small area Dm1 is switched to the display area for performing the variable display of the second special symbol. That is, in the twelfth embodiment, the small area Dm1 is configured as a display area for displaying the variable display of the special symbol mainly executed in each gaming state. Further, the small area Dm2 for displaying the variation display of the other special symbol is a display area relatively smaller than the small area Dm1 on the lower right side of the sub display area Ds (in a mode that is difficult for the player to see). )Is displayed. As a result, regardless of the game state, it is possible to visually recognize the variable display of the special symbol on the side to be executed mainly by checking only the small area Dm1, so that the convenience of the player can be improved. In addition, the small area Dm1 can be focused on by displaying the variation display on the side different from the execution side in a mode that is difficult to visually recognize. That is, it is possible to easily make the player understand which is the variable display on the side to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide playability that is easy for the player to understand.

FIG. 319 (b) shows an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the game ball enters the second entrance 640 in the prepared state and a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery. It is a figure which showed. As shown in FIG. 319 (b), when the ball enters the second entrance 640 in the ready state and a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, "RUSH starts!" For the display area HR1! "Is displayed, and the character" RUSH rushes !! "is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. Further, the treasure box 812 is enlarged and displayed in the central portion of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. From these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the state in which the prize ball can be obtained (RUSH) has been started in the consecutive villa mode. Therefore, it is possible to realize playability that is easy for the player to understand.

In the twelfth embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is halved. That is, even if the game ball enters the second entrance 640, there is a relatively high possibility that the ball will simply come off (the probability of coming off is about 1/2). In the twelfth embodiment, if the second special symbol is lost in the lottery in the prepared state, the prepared state is continued as it is. That is, the configuration is such that the start of RUSH is not notified until the small hit is won and the prize ball is actually obtained. As a result, even though the start of RUSH has been notified, the state in which the prize ball cannot be obtained continues, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied.

Further, in the twelfth embodiment, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of one special symbol, a configuration is adopted in which the lottery of the other special symbol executed during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation is forcibly removed. ing. For this reason, when the reserved ball of the first special symbol exists at the time of shifting from the normal mode to the consecutive villa mode, and the variable display of the first special symbol started at the same time as the start of the consecutive villa mode is a big hit. Will always be missed in the second special symbol lottery while the jackpot fluctuation is being executed. That is, if the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol starts at the time of shifting to the ready state, the right-handed game is continuously performed, and even if the lottery of the second special symbol is continuously executed, it is missed. By continuing (not winning a small hit), the preparation state will continue for a long time (until the big hit fluctuation ends). As described above, since the small hit probability of the second special symbol is 1/2, the expectation that the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol is being executed can be improved as the deviation continues in the prepared state. More specifically, for example, in the prepared state, the possibility that the disengagement is continuous four times or more is about 6%, and the possibility that the disengagement is continuous six times or more is about 1%. Therefore, even if the lottery of the second special symbol is missed in the prepared state, the player's expectation for the big hit can be improved, so that the player's interest in the game in the prepared state can be further improved. ..

In the twelfth embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is set to 1/2, but the probability is not limited to this, and the probability of a small hit may be arbitrarily determined. .. For example, the small hit probability is increased so that when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed as in the eleventh embodiment, the small hit is almost (for example, with a probability of 59/60). May be good. In this configuration, if the deviation occurs even once in the prepared state, the expectation that the changing first special symbol is a big hit can be improved, so that the second special symbol is removed in the prepared state. It is possible to improve the interest of the player in the case of. Also, the higher the probability of a small hit, the shorter the preparation status (the average number of lottery times from the transition to the consecutive villa mode to the winning of the small hit will be smaller), so after shifting to the consecutive villa mode , It is possible to shorten the period until the ball is secured by the prize ball. That is, since the prize ball can be given to the player earlier, the player's interest in the game can be improved. On the other hand, the small hit probability may be lowered so that it is likely to come off during the preparation state. With such a configuration, the deviations are likely to be continuous, so that the expectation that the first special symbol is undergoing a jackpot fluctuation can be held more frequently. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 320, changes over time in the staging mode before and after the ready state (before and after the start of RUSH) in the twelfth embodiment will be described. First, referring to FIG. 320 (a), the reserved ball of the first special symbol at the time of transition from the normal mode to the consecutive villa mode is removed, and the second special symbol is drawn twice during the preparation mode. The time-dependent change of the effect mode in the case of continuous loss and a small hit in the third lottery of the second special symbol will be described.

As shown in FIG. 320 (a), in the twelfth embodiment, the 99th special symbol lottery is executed in the normal mode (the latent state in which the probability variation number of 100 times is set), as described above. The effect of reaching the top of the rocky mountain (see FIG. 318 (b)) is performed. Then, the 100th variation display of the special symbol is started, and the display mode (see FIG. 319 (a)) indicating the preparation state is switched to, and the player is notified to perform the right-handed game. When the game ball is made to enter the second entrance 640 by right-handed during this preparation state, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the small area Dm1. Then, as shown in FIG. 320, the display indicating the preparation state is continued during the two deviation fluctuations of the second special symbol, and the third variation display (small hit variation) of the second special symbol is started. At that point, the display mode (see FIG. 319 (b)) indicating the RUSH entry is set. In addition, at the start of the small hit game, the deviation fluctuation of the first special symbol that was being changed is forcibly stopped and displayed. After that, the RUSH display is continued until the consecutive villa mode ends. In addition, in the twelfth embodiment, since the consecutive villa mode is set to the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol), the advantageous consecutive villa mode is advantageous unless a big hit is won. continue. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel playability in which the game is played with the expectation that the jackpot will not be won over the longest possible number of lottery.

Next, with reference to FIG. 320 (b), the time-lapse of the effect mode when the reserved ball of the first special symbol at the time of transition from the normal mode to the consecutive villa mode is the lottery result corresponding to the “big hit D12”. Explain the changes. Here, the "big hit D12" is a type of big hit in which a time saving state is set in which the number of time saving times is two times after the end of the big hit. In other words, after the jackpot is over, it is a type of jackpot that shifts to the consecutive villa mode by losing consecutively in a maximum of two special symbol lottery, and it is relatively easy to shift to the consecutive villa mode (game). It's a kind of jackpot. In the twelfth embodiment, the transition to the consecutive villa mode is notified only when the variable display corresponding to the "big hit D12" is started at the time of the transition to the consecutive villa mode, and the other first special When the jackpot of the symbol (which is relatively difficult to shift to the consecutive villa mode) is suspended, the jackpot winning is notified without notifying the transition to the consecutive villa mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged because the consecutive villa mode ends without winning a small hit even once, despite the shift to the consecutive villa mode.

As shown in FIG. 320 (b), when the mode shifts to the consecutive villa mode and the change display of the first special symbol corresponding to the "big hit D12" is started, the second start during the execution of the big hit change. The variable display of the special symbol is all off. Therefore, while the jackpot fluctuation is being executed, the deviations will be continuous, and the more the deviations are continuous, the higher the expectation for the player that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is being executed. Can be made to. In the twelfth embodiment, if a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the consecutive villa mode, a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is set. On the other hand, if the lottery for the second special symbol is missed, a fluctuation time of 1 second is set with high probability. Therefore, if the period from the transition to the consecutive villa mode until the game ball enters the second entrance 640 and the institution that confirms and displays the lottery result of the second special symbol are taken into consideration, the jackpot will fluctuate. During (10 seconds), the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed about 5 times. The probability of losing 5 times in a row in the lottery of the 2nd special symbol is low (about 3%) when the jackpot of the 1st special symbol is not changing. It is possible to strengthen the player's confidence that it is changing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game in the prepared state.

<Electrical configuration in the twelfth embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 321 (a). FIG. 321 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 321 (a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment is a variation pattern scenario with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 (see FIG. 14) in the eleventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above. The difference is that the table 202ka has been added. Further, the ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment is also different in that a part of the first random number table 202a, a part of the small hit random number table 202b, and a part of the variation pattern selection table 202f are changed. is doing.

The variation pattern scenario table 202ka is a data table referred to for selecting a table for determining a variation pattern from the variation pattern selection table 202f. When the lottery of the special symbol is executed, the variation pattern scenario table 202ka is referred to, the variation pattern table of 1 is selected from the variation pattern selection table 202f, and the variation pattern is determined based on the selected variation pattern table. Will be done. The details of this fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ka will be described later with reference to FIG. 322 (b).

First, the configuration of the first random number table 202a defined (stored) in the ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 321 (b). FIG. 321 (b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first random number table 202a in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 321 (b), in the first hit random number table 202a in the twelfth embodiment, the random number value (counter value) determined to be a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol is "0 to 3". Four random number values (counter values) are specified. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 321 (b), five random value values (counter values) of "0 to 4" are defined as random number values (counter values) determined to be big hits in the high probability state of the special symbol. ing.

Therefore, the probability of winning a big hit when the special symbol lottery is executed in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1/120 (4/480), while the special symbol lottery is performed in the high probability state of the special symbol. The probability of a big hit when executed is 1/96 (5/480). The change in the jackpot probability in the twelfth embodiment is intended to prevent the consecutive villa mode from becoming excessively advantageous and the normal mode from becoming excessively disadvantageous to the player. .. That is, when the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol is low (for example, in the case of 1/240 which is the same as the eleventh embodiment), once the transition to the consecutive villa mode is performed, the transferred consecutive villa mode is difficult to end. This is an excessive advantage for the player, which may be disadvantageous to the hole. In addition, when the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol is high (for example, in the case of 1/60 which is the same as the eleventh embodiment), the probability variation number is elapsed in the normal mode (over 100 special symbol lottery). Since the possibility of continuous disengagement is low, the probability of shifting to the consecutive villa mode is extremely low. As a result, there is a risk that the player will be excessively disadvantaged, and there is a possibility that the game on the pachinko machine 10 will be avoided. Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment, the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol is increased to prevent it from becoming excessively advantageous when shifting to the consecutive villa mode, and the high probability state of the special symbol is suppressed. The jackpot probability in is lowered to prevent the normal mode from becoming excessively disadvantageous.

Next, the details of the small hit random number table 202b in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 322 (a). FIG. 322 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the small hit random number table 202b in the twelfth embodiment. In the small hit random number table 202b in the twelfth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 322 (a), the random number value (counter value) determined to be a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is "5 to 479". 475 random number values are specified. On the other hand, 240 random number values of "240 to 479" are defined as random number values (counter values) determined to be small hits in the lottery of the second special symbol.

That is, in the twelfth embodiment, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, the small hit is won with a high probability (probability of 475/480). This is because, as described above, when the game ball enters the second entrance 640 in a state other than the consecutive villa mode and the second special symbol makes a long fluctuation, the long fluctuation is caused. This is to forcibly terminate it. That is, when the long fluctuation of the second special symbol is executed, by executing the lottery of the first special symbol, it becomes almost a small hit and the long fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped at the start of the small hit. It can be displayed. Therefore, even if the ball enters the second entrance 640 in a game state other than the consecutive villa mode and the long fluctuation of the second special symbol is started, it can be easily long by returning to the left-handed game. The fluctuation can be terminated.

In addition, by setting the small hit probability of the second special symbol to 1/2 (240/480), the lottery of the second special symbol in the preparatory state is configured to be missed at a relatively high rate. As a result, if the misses are continuous in the prepared state, the small hit is forcibly set to miss because the big hit fluctuation of the 1st special symbol is executed, probably because it was missed in the lottery of the 2nd special symbol. It can be difficult to understand if it is done. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel playability in which the expectation of a big hit of the special symbol on the other side (that is, the first special symbol) becomes higher as the second special symbol is continuously disengaged in the prepared state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, the details of the variation pattern scenario table 202ka in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 322 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ka in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 322 (b), the variation pattern scenario table 202ka shows the correspondence between the number of lottery of special symbols after the end of the jackpot (or after clearing the RAM) and the selected variation pattern for each of the previous jackpot types. Is stipulated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 322 (b), when the previous jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot, the number of lottery of special symbols is in the range of 1 to 99 times, and the probabilistic / latent The table 202f11 for a certain start is specified in association with each other. The details of the probabilistic / latent start table 202f11 will be described later with reference to FIG. 324. On the other hand, the RUSH table 202f14 is defined in association with the range in which the number of lottery is 100 or more. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 326 (b), but when the variation pattern is selected with reference to the RUSH table 202f14, a short variation time (1 second or 10) is used as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. The fluctuation pattern of (seconds) will be selected. Therefore, the lottery of the second special symbol is continuously executed in a short period only by performing the right-handed game, and forms an advantageous state in which a small hit is won with a high probability (1/2).

Further, as shown in FIG. 322 (b), when the previous jackpot type is a normal jackpot, the special symbol lottery count is in the range of 1 to 99 times, and the time saving start table 202f12 Is specified in association with each other. The details of the time-saving start table 202f12 will be described later with reference to FIG. 325. On the other hand, the RUSH table 202f14 (see FIG. 326 (b)) is associated with the range in which the number of lottery is 100 or more.

Further, as shown in FIG. 322 (b), in the state where the jackpot has never been won (so-called the state after clearing the RAM), the number of lottery of the special symbol is in the range of 1 to 99 times. , The normal start table 202f13 is specified in association with each other. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 326 (a), but the normal start table 202f13 has a relatively long fluctuation time regardless of the lottery result when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed ( It is a table in which a long fluctuation (of 60 seconds) is set. As a result, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized by clearing the RAM and put into a normal state, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from being in the same state as the consecutive villa mode which is advantageous to the player. In other words, like a general gaming machine, it can be set to a disadvantageous state for the player when the initialization is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being in an advantageous state immediately after the initialization and inflicting an unexpected disadvantage on the hole. On the other hand, the RUSH table 202f14 (see FIG. 326 (b)) is defined in association with the range in which the number of lottery of special symbols is 100 or more. Therefore, even after initializing the pachinko machine 10, the operation is the same as in the normal mode except for the jackpot probability (the operation of shifting to the consecutive villa mode by continuously losing the lottery of 100 special symbols). be able to. Therefore, the state after initialization becomes excessively disadvantageous for the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from avoiding the game by the pachinko machine 10, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. ..

Regarding whether or not the state is after the RAM is cleared (initialized) in the 14th embodiment, for example, is the RAM 203 won at least once after the RAM is cleared? It is configured so that it can be discriminated by providing a flag (first winning flag) indicating whether or not it is. If the first winning flag is off, it is judged to be the normal state after initialization, and if the number of fluctuations is within the range of 1 to 99 times, the normal start table 202f13 is referred to and 100 times. In the above range, a variation pattern scenario in which the RUSH table 202f14 is referred to is set. On the other hand, by winning the jackpot, the first winning flag is set to on, so that the scenario in which the normal start table 202f13 is not referred to is set thereafter.

Next, with reference to FIG. 323, the details of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 323 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 323, in the twelfth embodiment, six jackpot types of "big hit A12" to "big hit F12" are defined as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. Further, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, two jackpot types of "big hit G12" and "big hit I12" are defined.

As shown in FIG. 323, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4", while the jackpot type is "big hit A12". It is specified in association with each other. This "big hit A12" is a type of big hit (8 rounds probable change jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds and the chance mode A (probability change state) is set after the end of the big hit. This chance mode A continues until a maximum of 100 special symbol lottery is executed after the jackpot ends, and after 100 times, the mode shifts to the consecutive villa mode. Therefore, the "big hit A12" is a relatively advantageous jackpot type in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot ends.

Further, as shown in FIG. 323, "big hit B12" is defined as a big hit type in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "5 to 49". This "big hit B12" has two rounds of big hits, and after the big hit ends, it is set to the normal mode (latent state) or the chance mode A (probable change state) (two rounds probable change big hit). Is. More specifically, when the "big hit B12" is won in the normal mode or the consecutive villa mode, the normal mode is set to be disadvantageous after the end of the big hit, while the "big hit B12" is set in the time saving state or the probable change state. If this happens, the chance mode A is set to be relatively advantageous after the jackpot ends. Therefore, the "big hit B12" is relatively advantageous when it is won in the chance mode A or the chance mode B, but it is relatively disadvantageous in the normal mode or the consecutive villa mode.

Further, as shown in FIG. 323, "big hit C12" is defined as a big hit type in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 69". This "big hit C12" has two rounds of jackpot, and is a type of jackpot (two-round probability variable jackpot) that is set to the most disadvantageous normal mode (latent state) after the end of the jackpot. That is, the "big hit C12" is the jackpot type that is the most disadvantageous in terms of the gaming state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 323, for the value of the first hit type counter C2 being "70", "big hit D12" is defined in association with the jackpot type. This "big hit D12" is a type of big hit (8 rounds normal big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds and the chance mode B (time saving state) is set after the end of the big hit. This chance mode B ends when the lottery of two special symbols is executed after the end of the big hit (the number of time reductions is set to 2). In other words, it is an advantageous jackpot type that is extremely easy to shift to the consecutive villa mode because it shifts to the consecutive villa mode by losing the lottery of the special symbol twice in a row at the maximum.

Further, as shown in FIG. 323, for the value of the first hit type counter C2 being "71 to 74", "big hit E12" is defined in association with the jackpot type. This "big hit E12" is a type of jackpot (two rounds normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is two and the chance mode B (time saving state) is set after the jackpot ends. This chance mode B is set to 50 times when the "big hit E12" is won in the normal mode or the latent mode, while 25 times is set when the "big hit E12" is won in the time saving state or the probable change state. Will be done. Chance mode B has a lower jackpot probability than chance mode A, and shifts to the consecutive villa mode by elapses the number of time reductions, which is advantageous for the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 323, for the value of the first hit type counter C2 being "75 to 99", "big hit F12" is defined in association with the jackpot type. This "big hit F12" is a type of jackpot (two rounds normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is two and the chance mode B (time saving state) is set after the jackpot ends. The number of time reductions in the chance mode B set after the end of the "big hit F12" is set to be larger than the number of time reductions in the chance mode B set after the end of the "big hit E12". Therefore, the chance mode B after the end of the "big hit F12" is in a disadvantageous state in which it is difficult to elapse the number of time reductions.

On the other hand, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 69", and the jackpot type is "big hit G12". ing. This "big hit G12" is a type of big hit (8 rounds probable change jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds and the chance mode A (probability change state) is set 100 times after the end of the big hit. Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "70 to 99" in association with "big hit I12" as the jackpot type. This "big hit I12" is a type of jackpot (8 rounds normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 and the chance mode B (time saving state) is set twice after the end of the jackpot. As mentioned above, while it is extremely easy to pass two time reductions, it is relatively difficult to continuously disengage over 100 probabilistic states, so the "big hit I12" is better. However, it can be said that it is a big hit of a type (that is, an advantageous type) that is easier to shift to the consecutive villa mode than the "big hit G12".

As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, the number of time reductions is set to at least two times without providing a normal jackpot (a jackpot that directly shifts to the consecutive villa mode after the end of the jackpot). .. By configuring the gaming state after the jackpot to end so as not to directly set the normal state, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from being in the same state as when it is initialized. That is, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes long, and the game must be advanced by hitting the left side (a state in which the fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the normal start table 202d13 described later). It is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern by referring to the time-saving start table 202f12. That is, it can be configured to immediately shift to the RUSH state when the number of time reductions elapses. Therefore, while suppressing the state at the time of initialization of the pachinko machine 10 from being excessively advantageous to the player, the jackpot type (the number of time reductions is two times) is substantially equivalent to directly shifting to the consecutive villa mode. Type) can be provided. In addition, since the normal symbol is in a low probability state during the jackpot game, it becomes difficult to release the right electric accessory 64ra, and as a result, the game ball frequently goes to the second entrance 640 during the jackpot game. Enter the ball. That is, at the same time as the end of the jackpot game, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, and the long variation of the second special symbol is started. Therefore, when the number of time reductions is set to 2, the first number of time reductions is consumed at the same time as the end of the jackpot. By hitting the right to enter the game ball into the right first entrance 64r during the long fluctuation of the second special symbol, a small hit is made with a high probability, and the long fluctuation of the second special symbol is deviated. It can be forcibly terminated. Therefore, when the number of time reductions of two times is set, it is possible to shift to the consecutive villa mode with only one start winning prize substantially after the end of the big hit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 324, the details of the above-mentioned probabilistic / latent start time table 202f11 will be described. FIG. 324 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the probabilistic / latent start table 202f11. As shown in FIG. 324, the probability change / latent start start table 202f11 defines the correspondence between the game state at the time of executing the special symbol lottery and the variable pattern that can be selected for each type of special symbol. Has been done. More specifically, in the latent state (normal mode), a longer fluctuation time is selected as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol than in the probability variation state (chance mode A). As a result, in the normal mode in which the left-handed game is performed, the variable display mode can be diversified, while in the chance mode A, the game efficiency can be improved.

On the other hand, with respect to the second special symbol, a long variation of 60 seconds is set regardless of the variation type and the gaming state. As a result, when the second special symbol is changed in the gaming state other than the consecutive villa mode, the gaming efficiency is remarkably increased. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a game ball is launched aiming at the second entrance 640 in a state other than the consecutive villa mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 325, the details of the above-mentioned time-saving start table 202f12 will be described. FIG. 325 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time-saving start table 202f12. As shown in FIG. 325, when the time saving start table 202f12 is referred to in order to select the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, it is relatively short (1 second to 20 seconds) in the time saving state (chance mode B). ) Fluctuation time is selected. Thereby, the game efficiency in the chance mode B can be improved. On the other hand, in the normal state (ie, after the number of time reductions has elapsed), a very short (0.1 second or 10 second) variation time is selected. As a result, after the end of the big hit is set to the time saving state, and after the number of time saving has elapsed (after shifting to the consecutive villa mode), if the holding ball of the first special symbol remains, the holding ball is held in an extremely short time. Is digested.

On the other hand, for the second special symbol, a long fluctuation of 60 seconds is set while the time reduction state continues, and a short fluctuation time of 10 seconds or 1 second is set after the time reduction state elapses, regardless of the fluctuation type. Set. As a result, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a game ball is launched aiming at the second entrance 640 in a game state other than the consecutive villa mode. In addition, after shifting to the consecutive villa mode, it is possible to form an extremely advantageous state in which the lottery of the second special symbol and the small hit game are repeated in a short time. Therefore, since the game can be performed with the goal of allowing the number of time reductions to elapse, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned normal start table 202f13 will be described with reference to FIG. 326 (a). FIG. 326 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time-saving start table 202f13. As shown in FIG. 326 (a), when the normal start table 202f13 is referred to in order to select the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, a relatively long fluctuation time (7 seconds to 90 seconds) is selected. .. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the variable display mode in the state where the left-handed game should be performed as in the latent state.

On the other hand, for the second special symbol, a long fluctuation of 60 seconds is set regardless of the fluctuation type. As a result, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a game ball is launched aiming at the second entrance 640 in a game state other than the consecutive villa mode.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned RUSH table 202f14 will be described with reference to FIG. 326 (b). FIG. 326 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the RUSH table 202f14. As shown in FIG. 326 (b), when the RUSH table 202f13 is referenced to select the variation pattern of the first special symbol, a very short variation time (0.1 or 10 seconds) is selected. .. Also, when the RUSH table 202f14 is referred to for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol, a short variation time (1 second or 10 seconds) is selected. This makes it possible to further increase the degree of advantage after shifting to the RUSH state (continuous villa mode).

Next, with reference to FIG. 327, the method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10 realized by performing control based on various tables defined in ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in RAM 203. explain. FIG. 327 is a diagram showing a method of transitioning the state of the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 327, the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment is roughly divided into four modes (gaming states). That is, the normal mode (latent state) shown in the upper part of FIG. 327, the chance mode A (probability changing state) shown in the center left side of FIG. 327, and the chance mode B (time saving state) shown in the center right side of FIG. 327. And the continuous villa mode (normal state) shown in the lower part of FIG. 327.

As described above, the normal mode indicates the probable change state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, the probability of becoming a big hit is high, and the right electric accessory 64ra is difficult to be released (the game ball is on the right). 1 It is difficult to enter the ball into the ball entry port 64r), which is the most disadvantageous game state for the player. Further, as described above, the chance mode A indicates a probabilistic state of the special symbol and a time-saving state of the normal symbol, has a high probability of a big hit, and is the first right-handed ball by performing a right-handed game. Since the game ball frequently enters the mouth 64r (the electric accessory 64ra is frequently opened), the game state is relatively advantageous for the player. Further, the chance mode B indicates a low probability state of the special symbol and a time saving state of the normal symbol, and although the jackpot probability is low, by performing a right-handed game, the right-hand th is similar to the probability change state. Since the game ball frequently enters the 1 entry port 640r, a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal mode is formed. Further, as described above, the consecutive villa mode indicates a low probability state of the special symbol and a normal state of the normal symbol, and the fluctuation time set when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed is executed. , Since it is significantly shorter than the other three game states (60 seconds → 1 second), the lottery of the second special symbol can be efficiently executed by performing the right-handed game. Then, as described above, in the lottery of the second special symbol, a small hit is won with a high probability (1/2), and the first specific winning opening 64a is opened. The game balls frequently enter the two entry openings 640 and the first specific winning opening 64a, forming an extremely advantageous gaming state in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained without going through a big hit. Therefore, the consecutive villa mode is the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 327, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal mode to another state when a big hit occurs and when a specified number of probable changes have passed. Specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 327, when the jackpot A12, which is the jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 5% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), there is a chance after the jackpot ends. Move to mode A. In addition, if any of the jackpots D12 to F12, which is the jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 30% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the chance mode B is relatively advantageous after the jackpot ends. And migrate. Further, after the normal mode is set, the predetermined probability variation number (100 times) is elapsed, so that the mode directly shifts to the most advantageous consecutive villa mode (without going through a big hit). On the other hand, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is obtained and the jackpot B12 or the jackpot C12, which is determined at a rate of 65% as the jackpot type, is determined, the normal mode is set again after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in the normal mode, it is more advantageous to pass the specified probability variation number than to become a big hit, so that the player can be expected to continuously lose the specified number of times. .. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

As shown on the left side of the center of FIG. 327, there is a possibility of shifting from the chance mode A (probability change state) to another state when a big hit occurs or when the specified number of probability changes has passed. Specifically, as shown on the left side of the center of FIG. 327, when one of the jackpots D12 to F12, which is the jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 30% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined). Shifts to the relatively advantageous chance mode B after the jackpot ends. Further, after the chance mode A is set and the specified number of lottery times (100 times) elapses, the mode directly shifts to the most advantageous consecutive villa mode (the number of probable changes and the number of time reductions end at the same timing). ). Further, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is obtained and the jackpot C12 determined as the jackpot type at a rate of 20% is determined, the normal mode is set after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, if either the jackpot A12 or the jackpot B12, which is the jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 50% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the chance mode A is resumed after the jackpot ends. (Loops chance mode A). Therefore, in chance mode A, even if a big hit occurs, it becomes difficult to shift to the disadvantageous normal mode (the rate at which chance mode A is set increases), so the big hit is made before the number of probability changes elapses. Even if you win (the mode could not be switched to the consecutive villa mode), you can prevent the player from being discouraged. In the chance mode A, as in the normal mode, the jackpot probability is relatively high (1/96), so it is relatively difficult to pass the probability variation number. Therefore, in the chance mode A, it is possible to realize the playability that expects both the winning of the jackpot and the continuous loss, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as shown on the right side of the center of FIG. 327, there is a possibility of shifting from the chance mode B (probability change state) to another state when a big hit occurs or when a specified number of time reductions has elapsed. Specifically, as shown on the right side of the center of FIG. 327, when either the jackpot A12 or B12, which is the jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 50% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined). After the big hit, the player shifts to the relatively advantageous chance mode A. Further, after the chance mode A is set, the specified number of time reductions (any of 2, 25, 50, and 100) is allowed to directly shift to the most advantageous consecutive villa mode. .. Further, when the jackpot of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and the jackpot C12 determined as the jackpot type at a rate of 20% is determined, a disadvantageous normal mode is set after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, if either the jackpot A12 or the jackpot B12, which is the jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 30% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the chance mode B is resumed after the jackpot ends. (Loops chance mode B). Therefore, in the chance mode B, as in the chance mode A, it becomes difficult to shift to the disadvantageous normal mode even if a big hit occurs (the rate at which the chance mode A is set increases), so that the number of time reductions elapses. Even if you win the jackpot before you do (it was not possible to shift to the consecutive villa mode), you can prevent the player from being discouraged. Further, in the chance mode B, the jackpot probability is relatively low, and the number of time reductions may be set to 50 or less. Therefore, compared to the chance mode A and the normal mode, the jackpot is not directly involved. There is a high probability that you will move to the consecutive villa mode. Therefore, at the time of shifting to the chance mode B, it is possible to make the player feel that there is a high possibility of shifting to the consecutive villa mode, so that the player's expectation for the consecutive villa mode can be improved.

Further, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 327, there is a possibility of shifting from the consecutive villa mode (normal state) to another state only when a big hit occurs. Specifically, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 327, when the jackpot G12, which is the jackpot of the second special symbol and is determined at a rate of 70% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the comparison is made after the jackpot ends. It shifts to the advantageous chance mode A. In addition, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is determined and the jackpot I12, which is determined at a rate of 30% as the jackpot type, is determined, the chance mode is easier to shift to the consecutive villa mode than the chance mode A after the jackpot ends. Move to B. If the jackpot I12 is reached, the number of time reductions is set to 2 times. Therefore, if the chance mode B is set after the jackpot I12, the time reduction number is almost elapsed and the mode is returned to the consecutive villa mode. Can be migrated. Therefore, it can be said that the jackpot I12 is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than the jackpot G12. As described above, in this consecutive villa mode, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is significantly shorter than that of the other modes, and the second special symbol is drawn with a high probability (1/2 probability). Because it is a hit, just by playing a right-handed game, the lottery of the second special symbol based on the entry into the second entry opening 640 and the small hit period (during the opening period of the first specific winning opening 65a) It is possible to frequently generate a prize in the first specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, until the big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is possible to continue to acquire the prize ball based on the ball entering the first specific winning opening 65a (that is, a large amount of prizes can be obtained only by continuing to hit right. Form a very favorable playing state (where it is possible to acquire a ball). As described above, in the normal state of transition based on the initialization of the pachinko machine 10, a long fluctuation (60 seconds) is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, so that the normal mode is used. It also forms a disadvantageous gaming state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being overly advantageous to the player by initializing the pachinko machine 10 and giving an unexpected disadvantage to the hall.

As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, the configuration is such that four modes (game state) of the normal mode, the chance mode A, the chance mode B, and the consecutive villa mode are switched back and forth. As a result, the game playability changes each time the mode is changed, so that the game can be sharpened. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 328. FIG. 328 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 328, the RAM 223 in the twelfth embodiment has the winning flag 223ka, the preparing flag 223kb, and the RUSH with respect to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the eleventh embodiment (see FIG. 307 (b)). It differs from the medium flag 223kc in that it is added.

The winning flag 223ka is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 has won the jackpot at least once since the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 was turned on. If this winning flag 223ka is on, it means that the jackpot has been won at least once after the power is turned on, and if it is off, it means that the jackpot has not been won even once after the power is turned on. Means. When the game state is the normal state at the start of the fluctuation, the state of the winning flag 223ka is referred to, and if it is off, the normal state after the power is turned on (that is, long as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol). It is determined that it is in a disadvantageous state where fluctuations are set), and the effect for the normal mode is executed (while the number of special drawing lottery is less than 100), while if it is on, the effect for the consecutive villa mode is executed. To execute.

The ready state flag 223 kb is a flag for indicating whether or not it is in the ready state. If it is on, it means that it is in the ready state (see FIG. 319 (a)), and if it is off, it means that it is in the ready state. Means not. In the normal state, the preparation state flag 223kb is referred to to determine whether or not the preparation state has already been completed (switched to the display in RUSH), and the preparation state effect is executed. Decide whether to perform the RUSH state effect.

The RUSH middle flag 223kc is a flag for indicating whether or not it is in the consecutive villa mode, and if it is on, it means that it is in the consecutive villa mode, and if it is off, it means that it is not in the consecutive villa mode. In the normal state, the flag 223 kb in the ready state and the flag 223 kb in the RUSH state are referred to to determine which state to set the effect mode.

Whether or not the ceiling effect executing flag 223kd is executing an effect mode (top arrival effect) in which the character 811 reaches the top of the rocky mountain, which is executed with the probability variation number or the time reduction number remaining 1. It is a flag indicating whether or not. If the ceiling effect executing flag 223 kd is on, it means that the summit reaching effect (see FIG. 318 (b)) is being executed, and if it is off, it means that the summit reaching effect is not being executed. do. When the symbol stop timing is reached while the ceiling effect executing flag 223 cd is on, the mode shifts to the continuous villa mode and the preparation state is set.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the twelfth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 329 to 333, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 329, the details of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 13 (S331) in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 329 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process 13 (S331) in the twelfth embodiment. The first special symbol jackpot determination process 13 (S331) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 12 (see FIG. 309) in the eleventh embodiment, and is a process executed in place of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 12 (see FIG. 309). Similar to the symbol jackpot determination process 12 (see FIG. 309), based on the set game state based on the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. This is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not it is a jackpot.

Of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 13 (see FIG. 329) in the twelfth embodiment, in each of the processes S401, S403 to S410, S412, and S421, the first special symbol jackpot determination process in the eleventh embodiment, respectively. The same processes as those of S401, S403 to S410, S412, and S421 of 12 (see FIG. 309) are executed.

Further, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 13 (see FIG. 329) in the twelfth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S406 that the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a jackpot, then a small hit. (S431) is executed to determine whether or not the player has won the prize, and to execute the process corresponding to the determination result, and the process is terminated. This special figure 1 deviation variation processing (S431) will be described with reference to FIG. 330.

FIG. 330 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 deviation processing (S431). In this special figure 1 deviation variation processing (S431), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit (S3111), and when it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S3111: Yes). ), The special figure 1 small hit flag for indicating that the small hit of the first special symbol is changing is set to on (S3112), and then the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to the small hit (S3113). ). Then, a small hit symbol is set as the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S3114), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S3111, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a small hit (that is, it is out of order) (S3111: No), the first symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37. As a special symbol, an out-of-order symbol is set (S3115), and this process is terminated. This special figure 1 deviation variation process (see FIG. 330) is a control process added by making the configuration so that a small hit can be won when the first special symbol is lost in the lottery.

Next, with reference to FIG. 331, the details of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 (S332) in the twelfth embodiment will be described. The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 (S332) in the twelfth embodiment is executed in place of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 35) in the eleventh embodiment (and the first embodiment). As in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 35), the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol and the variation type stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. This is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on the value of the counter CS1.

Of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 (see FIG. 331) in the twelfth embodiment, in each of the processes S501 to S503 and S505 to S509, the eleventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) is used. 1 The same processes as those of S501 to S503 and S505 to S509 of the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 35) are executed. Further, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 (see FIG. 331) in the twelfth embodiment, when the process of S503 is completed, the variation pattern scenario table 202ka (see FIG. 322 (b)) is then read out. The variation pattern selection table according to the previous jackpot type and the number of special drawing lottery is read out (S521). Specifically, if the previous jackpot is a probability variation jackpot and the number of special figure lottery is 99 or less, the latent probability / probability variation start table 202f11 (see FIG. 324) is read as a variation pattern selection table. If the previous jackpot is a normal jackpot and the number of special drawing lottery is 99 or less, the time-saving start table 202f12 (see FIG. 325) is read out as the variation pattern selection table. Further, if the pachinko machine 10 has not been won a big hit even once after the initialization of the pachinko machine 10 and the number of special drawing lottery is 99 times or less, the normal start table 202f13 (FIG. 326 (FIG. 326). a) Read). On the other hand, when the number of special drawing lottery is 100 or more, the RUSH table 202f14 (see FIG. 326 (b)) is read out as the fluctuation pattern selection table regardless of the type of the previous jackpot. When the processing of S521 is completed, the processing is transferred to S505.

By executing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 (see FIG. 331), the variation pattern can be selected with reference to the variation pattern selection table according to the previous jackpot type and the number of special symbol lottery. Therefore, the fluctuation pattern can be diversified. In addition, the degree of advantage differs between the normal state set based on the initialization of the pachinko machine 10 and the normal state shifted from other profitable gaming states, and after the initialization, it is different from that of a general gaming machine. Similarly, while the state can be set to be disadvantageous to the player, the normal state shifted through other gaming states can be formed as the most advantageous gaming state to the player. Although the illustration is omitted, in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 42), the variation pattern scenario table 202ka is also referred to (that is, the previous jackpot type and the number of special figure lottery). It is modified to read the variation pattern selection table (according to).

Next, with reference to FIG. 332, the details of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 13 (S221) in the twelfth embodiment will be described. The first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 13 (S221) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 38) in the eleventh embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is the first. Similar to the special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 38), this is a process for setting the stop display of the first special symbol.

Of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 13 (see FIG. 332) in the twelfth embodiment, in each of the processes S801 to S809, the first special symbol fluctuation stop process in the eleventh embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively. The same processing as each processing of S801 to S809 of (see FIG. 38) is executed. Further, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 13 (see FIG. 332) in the twelfth embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is off in the processing of S801 (S801: No), the first 1 Special figure for setting the stop symbol of the special symbol 1 The loss stop process is executed (S821), and this process is terminated. The details of the special drawing 1 disengagement stop processing (S821) will be described with reference to FIG. 333.

FIG. 333 is a flowchart showing the special drawing 1 disengagement stop process (S821). In this special figure 1 missed stop processing (S821), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 small hit flag is on (S3211), and when it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag is on (S3211 :. Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to on (S3212), and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to on (that is, the forced stop of the second special symbol is set). Special figure 2 for this purpose, the fluctuation stop command is set (S3213). Next, in the first symbol display device 37, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed by the off symbol (S3214), and the small hit scenario corresponding to the current small hit type is set (S3215). Then, the special figure 1 small hit flag is set to off (S3216), and the small hit medium flag 203p is set to on (S3217) to end this process. On the other hand, in the process of S3211, if it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag is off (S3211), there is no possibility of forcibly stopping the variation display of the second special symbol or starting the small hit. Therefore, this process is terminated as it is.

By executing this special figure 1 loss stop process (see FIG. 333), when a small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the change display of the second special symbol is removed at the same time as the small hit symbol is stopped. It can be forcibly stopped and displayed with. Therefore, in a state where the long variation of the second special symbol is being executed, the long variation of the second special symbol can be forcibly terminated only by executing the lottery of the first special symbol and winning the small hit.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 334 to 339, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described. First, the variation display setting process 13 (S4121) in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 334. The variation display setting process 13 (S4121) is a process executed in place of the variation display setting process 12 (see FIG. 314) in the eleventh embodiment, and the variation display setting process 12 (see FIG. 314) in the eleventh embodiment. ), The first special symbol or the second special symbol is based on the first or special figure 2 variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81. This is a process for setting a display variation pattern command and transmitting the command to the display control device 114.

Of the variation display setting process 13 (see FIG. 334) in the twelfth embodiment, in each process of S5101, S5102, S5106-S5108, S5110 to S5113, S5121, and S5125, the variation display setting process in the eleventh embodiment, respectively. The same processes as those of S5101, S5102, S5106 to S5108, S5110 to S5113, S5121, and S5125 of 12 (see FIG. 314) are executed. Further, in the variation display setting process 13 (see FIG. 334) in the twelfth embodiment, when the process of S5102 is completed, the effect mode corresponding to the variation type of the first special symbol notified by the variation pattern command is set. The effect mode setting process for this is executed (S5141), and the process shifts to S5106. The details of this staging mode setting process (S5141) will be described later with reference to FIG. 335.

Further, in the variation display setting process 13 (see FIG. 334) in the twelfth embodiment, when the process of S5108 is completed, the variation display setting process 12 for special figure 2 (see FIG. 316) in the eleventh embodiment is next. Instead, the variation display setting process 13 for special figure 2 is executed (S5412), and the process shifts to S5110. The details of the variation display setting process 13 (S5142) for the special figure 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. 338.

Further, in the variation display setting process 13 (see FIG. 334) in the twelfth embodiment, when the process of S5113 is completed, the preparation state setting process for setting the preparation state (see FIG. 319 (a)) is executed next. Then (S5143), this process is terminated. The details of this preparation state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 339.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned effect mode setting process (S5141) will be described. As described above, this effect mode setting process (S5141) is a process for setting an effect mode according to the variation type of the first special symbol notified by the variation pattern command. In this staging mode setting process (S5141), first, it is determined whether or not it is in the normal state (consecutive villa mode) (S13101), when it is determined that it is not in the normal state (S13101: No), and then in the time saving state. It is determined whether or not it is (chance mode B) (S13102). In the process of S13102, when it is determined that the time is not shortened (S1302: No), it means that the state is the latent state (normal mode) or the probable change state (chance mode A), and the number of probable changes of 100 times has elapsed. Since it means that there is no possibility of shifting to the consecutive villa mode unless it is made to do so, it is next determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation number counter 223ja is 99 (S13103).

If it is determined in the process of S13103 that the value of the fluctuation count counter 223ja is 99 (S13103: Yes), the ceiling effect for selecting the final variation display effect before shifting to the consecutive villa mode. The setting process is executed (S13104), and the process is transferred to S13111. On the other hand, in the process of S13102, when it is determined that the gaming state is the time saving state (S13102: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the remaining time saving number is 1 (S13105), and the remaining time saving number is 1. If so, the same process as the ceiling effect setting process (S13104) described above is executed (S13110), and the process is transferred to S13111. On the other hand, in the processing of S13105, when it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is not 1 (S13105: No), and in the processing of S13103, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223ja is not 99 (S13103: No). Since there is no possibility of shifting to the continuous villa mode, the effect mode corresponding to the fluctuation type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command is determined (S13106), and the processing is shifted to S13111.

On the other hand, in the process of S13101, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal state (S13101: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the winning flag 223ka is on (S13107), and the winning is won. When it is determined that the completed flag 223ka is on (S13107), the normal effect setting process for setting the effect mode for the normal state is executed (S13108), and the process shifts to S13111. The details of this normal effect setting process (S13108) will be described later with reference to FIG. 337.

On the other hand, in the process of S13107, when it is determined that the winning flag 223ka is off (S13107: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation count counter 223ja is 99 (S13109), and the fluctuation is performed. If it is determined that the value of the number-of-count counter 223ja is 99 (S13109), the ceiling staging setting process (S13110) is executed to shift the process to S13111. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S13109 that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223ja is not 99 (S13109: No), the processing is shifted to S13108.

In the processing of S13111 executed after any of the processing of S13104, S13106, S13108, and S13110, a display variation pattern command indicating the effect mode determined by any of the processing of S13104, S13106, S13108, and S13110 is set. (S13111), this process is terminated.

Next, the details of the ceiling effect setting process (S13104, S13110) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 336. As shown in FIG. 336, in the ceiling effect setting process (S4131), first, the data of the execution area corresponding to the first special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b is read (S13201), and the data of the read execution area is read. Is determined whether or not the data corresponds to the jackpot (S13202), and if it is determined to be the jackpot (S13202: Yes), the effect mode corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command (to notify the jackpot). (S13203), and the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S13202, when it is determined that the data read from the execution area is not the data indicating a big hit (S13202: No), then, in the winning information storage area 223b, the first special symbol is reserved. The data in one area is read (S13204), and it is determined whether or not the read data in the reserved first area is the data corresponding to the jackpot. That is, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won immediately after shifting to the consecutive villa mode. In the process of S13205, if it is determined that the data in the reserved first area is a jackpot (S13205: Yes), then the data indicates the jackpot D12 (that is, after the jackpot ends, in a relatively short time (2). It is determined whether or not it is a jackpot type that shifts to the consecutive villa mode (by losing the lottery of special symbols in a row) (S13206), and if it is determined that it is not a jackpot D12 (S13206: No). , 10 seconds (that is, the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation in the consecutive villa mode) is added to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed this time, and the jackpot production of the production mode (that is, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol for two times) The straddling jackpot effect) is determined (S13207), and this process is terminated. That is, in the twelfth embodiment, when it is determined by the look-ahead that the jackpot fluctuation of a jackpot type other than the jackpot D12 starts immediately after the start of the consecutive villa mode, the transition to the consecutive villa mode (see FIG. 318 (b)). ) Is not notified, and the effect mode is executed as if a big hit was won just before the consecutive villa mode. With this configuration, despite the transition to the consecutive villa mode, the big hit will start without enjoying the small hit game even once, and it will prevent the player from feeling disappointed. can do.

On the other hand, in the processing of S13205, when it is determined that the data in the reserved first area of the first special symbol is not the data indicating the jackpot (S13205: No), and in the processing of S13206, the data in the reserved first area is the jackpot D12. When it is determined that the data indicates (S13206: Yes), the effect mode (see FIG. 318 (b)) at which the character 811 reaches the top of the rocky mountain is determined (S13208), and the ceiling effect executing flag 223 dd is turned on. Set to (S13209) to end this process.

By executing this ceiling effect setting process (see FIG. 336), the pre-reading result of the lottery result of the first special symbol at the time of shifting to the consecutive villa mode (normal state) (the number of time reductions or the number of probability changes has ended). Depending on the situation, it is possible to suitably set whether or not the summit reaching effect (see FIG. 318 (b)) can be executed.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned variation display setting process 13 (S5143) for the special figure 2 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 338. As described above, the variation display setting process 13 (S5143) for the special figure 2 is a process executed in place of the variation display setting process 12 for the special figure 2 (see FIG. 316) in the eleventh embodiment. When the variation display setting process 13 for special figure 2 (see FIG. 316) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the RUSH middle flag 223 kc is on (S13401), and the RUSH middle flag 223 kc is off. If it is determined (S13401: No), then the variation display mode of the second special symbol corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S13402), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S13401, when it is determined that the RUSH middle flag 223kc is on (S13401: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the preparation state flag 223kb is on (S13403), and the preparation state is prepared. When it is determined that the middle flag 223 kb is off (S13403: No), it means that the preparation state is completed in the consecutive villa mode, so that it is for the consecutive villa mode corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command. The effect mode is determined (S13404), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S13403, when it is determined that the preparation state flag 223kb is on (that is, the preparation state is in progress) (S13403: Yes), then the variation pattern command notifies the variation type of the small hit. It is determined whether or not it is (S13405), and if it is determined that the variation type of the small hit is notified (S13405: Yes), the preparation state flag 223kb is set to off (S13406), and the effect of this variation display effect is produced. As an aspect, an effect mode (see FIG. 319 (b)) for notifying the RUSH rush is determined (S13407), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S13405, when it is determined that the fluctuation type is not a small hit (S13405: No), it means that the preparation state continues at least until the fluctuation is completed, so that the fluctuation pattern The effect mode for the preparation state corresponding to the variation type indicated by the command is determined (S13408), and this process is terminated.

By executing this variation display setting process 13 for special figure 2 (see FIG. 338), the situation when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed (in the state of preparation or in the state where the RUSH rush has been notified). Depending on whether it is in a state other than the continuous villa mode), it is possible to perform an appropriate mode of staging.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned preparation state setting process (S5144) will be described with reference to FIG. 339. As described above, this preparation state setting process (S5144) is a process for setting the preparation state (see FIG. 319 (a)). In this preparation state setting process (S5144), first, it is determined whether or not the ceiling effect executing flag 223kd is on (S13501), and if it is determined that it is off (S13501: No), the state shifts to the preparation state. Since there is no possibility of causing this, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S13501, when it is determined that the ceiling effect executing flag 223kd is on (S13501: Yes), the ceiling effect executing flag 223kd is set to off (S13502), and the display mode during RUSH preparation (S13502). (See FIG. 319 (a)) is set (S13503). Next, both the RUSH middle flag 223 kb and the ready state flag 223 kb are set to ON (S13504), and this process ends.

By executing this preparation state setting process (see FIG. 339), it is possible to set the display mode of the preparation state from the time when the mode shifts to the consecutive villa mode.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment, the normal state is set as an advantageous gaming state (consecutive villa mode) in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed and the small hit game is frequently executed. It was configured and the latency state was configured as the most unfavorable normal mode. Then, by ending the number of probable changes in the normal mode, the configuration is such that the mode shifts to the most advantageous consecutive villa mode. In other words, it is possible to shift from the most unfavorable gaming state to the most advantageous gaming state directly without going through a big hit. With this configuration, in the most unfavorable normal mode (latent state), it is possible to play a game with the goal of allowing the number of probable changes to elapse.

Here, conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that shifts to a relatively advantageous normal state by setting the latent probability state to the most disadvantageous gaming state and ending the probability variation number in the latent probability state. However, in the conventional gaming machine, it is easier to give an advantageous time saving state after the end of the big hit when the big hit is made in the normal state than when the big hit is made in the latent state. , It is configured so that the normal state is more advantageous, and while staying in the normal state (that is, until the jackpot is won), it forms a disadvantageous state in which the number of balls to be held is likely to decrease. It was a thing. In other words, even if the number of probable changes elapses in the latent state and the state shifts to the normal state, it is not advantageous for the player at that time, and since it is necessary to win the jackpot, it is necessary to win the jackpot from the latent state. Even if the player directly shifts to the normal state without going through the above, there is a problem that the player does not feel satisfied and it is difficult to improve the player's interest.

On the other hand, in the twelfth embodiment, by ending (elapsed) the number of probability changes in the disadvantageous normal mode (latent state), the mode directly shifts to the most advantageous consecutive villa mode (normal state). did. In other words, even if you do not win the jackpot, you can easily continue to win prize balls intermittently just by continuing the right-handed game. With this configuration, when the number of probable changes can be completed, the player can have a greater sense of satisfaction and accomplishment, and thus the player's interest in the game can be improved. Can be done.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment, the normal state set by initializing the pachinko machine 10 and the normal state shifted by ending the probability change number or the time reduction number in other gaming states. Therefore, the player's degree of advantage is different. That is, a different variation pattern selection table is referred to between the normal state set by initialization and the normal state shifted via another gaming state (to the variation pattern scenario corresponding to the gaming state set after the jackpot ends). Refer to the fluctuation pattern selection table based on). With this configuration, the normal state set by initializing the pachinko machine 10 while forming the normal state shifted through other gaming states as the most advantageous gaming state for the player, can be obtained. It can be formed as a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. In other words, as with a general gaming machine, it can be set to a state that is disadvantageous to the player when it is initialized, so it will be in a state that is advantageous to the player immediately after initialization, and it will be in the hall. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent unexpected disadvantages. Further, in the twelfth embodiment, even in the normal state shifted after the initialization, when the number of lottery of the special symbol becomes 100 times or more, the state is configured to be the most advantageous for the player. ing. Therefore, even after initializing the pachinko machine 10, the operation is the same as in the normal mode except for the jackpot probability (the operation of shifting to the consecutive villa mode by continuously losing the lottery of 100 special symbols). be able to. Therefore, the state after initialization becomes excessively disadvantageous for the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from avoiding the game by the pachinko machine 10, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. ..

Further, the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment is configured to notify as a preparation state from the transition to the consecutive villa mode to the first winning of a small hit in the second special symbol lottery. When it becomes possible to win a prize ball (that is, when a small hit fluctuation is started), it is configured to notify that an advantageous state (RUSH state) has been reached. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being dissatisfied with the situation in which the prize ball cannot be obtained for a long time even though the RUSH state is notified. Further, in the twelfth embodiment, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of one special symbol, a configuration is adopted in which the lottery of the other special symbol executed during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation is forcibly removed. ing. For this reason, when the reserved ball of the first special symbol exists at the time of shifting from the normal mode to the consecutive villa mode, and the variable display of the first special symbol started at the same time as the start of the consecutive villa mode is a big hit. Will always be missed in the second special symbol lottery while the jackpot fluctuation is being executed. That is, if the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol starts at the time of shifting to the ready state, the right-handed game is continuously performed, and even if the lottery of the second special symbol is continuously executed, it is missed. By continuing (not winning a small hit), the preparation state will continue for a long time (until the big hit fluctuation ends). As a result, it is possible to realize a novel playability that the expectation that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is being executed can be improved as the deviations continue in the prepared state.

In the twelfth embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is set to 1/2, but the probability is not limited to this, and the probability of a small hit may be arbitrarily determined. .. For example, the small hit probability is increased so that when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed as in the eleventh embodiment, the small hit is almost (for example, with a probability of 59/60). May be good. In this configuration, if the deviation occurs even once in the prepared state, the expectation that the changing first special symbol is a big hit can be improved, so that the second special symbol is removed in the prepared state. It is possible to improve the interest of the player in the case of. Also, the higher the probability of a small hit, the shorter the preparation status (the average number of lottery times from the transition to the consecutive villa mode to the winning of the small hit will be smaller), so after shifting to the consecutive villa mode , It is possible to shorten the period until the ball is secured by the prize ball. That is, since the prize ball can be given to the player earlier, the player's interest in the game can be improved. On the other hand, the small hit probability may be lowered so that it is likely to come off during the preparation state. With such a configuration, the deviations are likely to be continuous, so that the expectation that the jackpot of the first special symbol is being changed can be held more frequently. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the twelfth embodiment, basically, when the number of probable changes or the number of time reductions is completed, the mode is changed to the consecutive villa mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the end of the jackpot, a jackpot of a type in which the direct consecutive villa mode is set may be provided. In this case, if the jackpot of the type in which the direct consecutive villa mode is set is won, the RUSH table 202f14 may be referred to immediately after the jackpot ends. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a type of jackpot that directly shifts to the consecutive villa mode after the jackpot ends, while suppressing the excessive advantage after the pachinko machine 10 is initialized. It is possible to pay attention to the type of jackpot and play the game. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game. In addition, as a condition for shifting to the consecutive villa mode, for example, when the probability change state is continuously won a specific number of times (for example, 5 times) and the probability change jackpot is won again, the game state after the jackpot is forcibly changed to the normal state. It may be configured to be set to. That is, a so-called probability variation limit function may be installed. With this configuration, even if you win consecutive probabilistic jackpots in the disadvantageous normal mode, you can feel as if you are approaching the consecutive villa mode, so the player's motivation for the game. Can be enhanced.

In the twelfth embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that a dedicated fluctuation pattern table is referred to in the initial state so that the initial state of the pachinko machine 10 is not excessively advantageous. It may be configured to be a mode. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player want to start playing the pachinko machine 10 immediately after the opening of the hall in the expectation that it has been initialized, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be increased. Can be improved.

In the twelfth embodiment, the more the number of misses in the second special symbol lottery continues during the preparation state, the higher the expectation that the first special symbol lottery will be a big hit. In addition to this, the configuration may be such that an effect of indicating the number of consecutive deviations during the preparation state (that is, indicating the degree of expectation during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol) is executed. Specifically, for example, the background color on the display screen in the ready state may change in the order of blue → green → red → rainbow color every time the disengagement occurs twice in succession. With such a configuration, even a player who does not know the use of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment can easily understand that the continuous deviation of the second special symbol is better. Therefore, it is possible to realize playability that is easy for the player to understand.

<13th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 340 to 344. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment described above, the normal state is set to an advantageous gaming state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed and the small hit game is frequently executed, while the latent state is set to the latent state. It is configured to be the most disadvantageous gaming state for the player. In addition, by assuming that the number of probable changes has ended in the latent state in most of the cases of transitioning to the normal state, it is expected that the deviation will continue over the number of probable changes set in the unfavorable latent state. It was configured to make it possible to realize a novel playability.

On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, two game states, a latent state and a normal state, are configured as an advantageous game state in which a small hit game is frequently executed, while a probable change state and a time-saving state are set as a game. It is configured as a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the person. As a result, in a general gaming machine, a disadvantageous state can be set while the time saving state is set, which is advantageous, and a state in which the time saving state is not set can be set as an advantageous state, so that the time saving state ends. It is possible to realize a novel playability in which a game is played in the hope that it will be played.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment is that the board structure of the game board 13 is the board structure of the game board 13 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 2). ), The configuration of ROM 202 of the main controller 110 has been partially changed, and the control process executed by MPU201 of the main controller 110 has been partially changed. be. The twelfth regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the twelfth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the mode in the thirteenth embodiment will be briefly described. In the thirteenth embodiment, the normal state is configured as the most advantageous state, and the latent state is also configured as a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, although the degree of advantage is lower than that of the normal state. On the other hand, the probabilistic state and the time saving state are configured as a disadvantageous game state in which the game should be advanced by the left-handed game. It can be said that the time-saving state is more advantageous for the player because the time-saving state is easier to shift to the most advantageous normal state than the probability change state. In the thirteenth embodiment, the most unfavorable probability change state is referred to as a normal mode, the time saving state is referred to as a chance mode, and the latent probability state advantageous to the player is referred to as a consecutive villa mode A, and the player. The most advantageous normal state for the user is referred to as a consecutive villa mode B. As in the twelfth embodiment described above, in the normal state set based on the initialization of the pachinko machine 10, only the long variation is selected when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. , Forming a disadvantageous situation where it is necessary to play a game by hitting left.

<Electrical configuration in the thirteenth embodiment>
First, the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 340 to 342. Here, the ROM 202 in the thirteenth embodiment has the specified contents of the first random number table 202a, the specified contents of the second random number table 202c, and the jackpot type selection table 202d with respect to the ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment. The specified contents and the specified contents of the variation pattern selection table 202f are partially changed. First, with reference to FIG. 238 (a), the configuration of the first random number table 202a defined (stored) in the ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment of the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 321 (b) describes the first random number table 202a in the twelfth embodiment.

FIG. 340 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first random number table 202a. As shown in FIG. 340 (a), in the first hit random number table 202a in the thirteenth embodiment, the random number value (counter value) determined to be a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol is "0 to 3". Four random number values (counter values) are specified. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 340 (a), eight random number values (counter values) of "0 to 7" are defined as random number values (counter values) determined to be big hits in the high probability state of the special symbol. ing.

Therefore, the probability of winning a big hit when the special symbol lottery is executed in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1/120 (4/480), while the special symbol lottery is performed in the high probability state of the special symbol. The probability of a big hit when executed is 1/60 (8/480). The change in the jackpot probability in the thirteenth embodiment is performed in order to further enhance the superiority of the normal state. That is, by configuring it so that it is easy to win a big hit in the latent state, it is difficult for the latent state to continue for a long time. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with a stronger expectation that the state of frequently winning small hits will shift to the normal state where it is easy to continue for a long time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, the details of the second random number table 202c in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 340 (b). FIG. 340 (b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the second random number table 202c in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 340 (b), in the second hit random number table 202c in the thirteenth embodiment, the random number value (counter value) determined to be a hit of the normal symbol in the low probability state of the normal symbol is "0". Is stipulated. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 340 (b), two random number values (counter values) of "0, 1" are used as random value values (counter values) determined to be hits of the normal symbol in the time saving state of the normal symbol. It is stipulated.

That is, in the thirteenth embodiment, even in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, the ordinary symbol is configured to hit only with a low probability. As a result, even if a left-handed game is performed in a time-saving state or a probable change state, it is difficult for the electric accessory 64a to be released, so that the game ball hardly enters the lower first entrance ball opening 64b2. Therefore, since it is necessary to execute the lottery of the first special symbol by inserting the game ball into the upper first entrance port 64b1 by the left-handed game, it is disadvantageous that the number of balls held is easily reduced in the probable change state and the time saving state. It becomes a game state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 341, the details of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 341 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 341, in the thirteenth embodiment, seven jackpot types of "big hit A13" to "big hit G13" are defined as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. Further, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, three jackpot types of "big hit H13" to "big hit J13" are defined.

As shown in FIG. 341, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4", while the jackpot type is "big hit A13". It is specified in association with each other. This "big hit A13" has 8 rounds of big hits, and is a type of big hits (8 rounds probability variable big hits) that is set to the consecutive villa mode A (latent state) after the end of the big hits. As described above, since the consecutive villa mode A is a game state in which a small hit game is frequently executed just by hitting right, the "big hit A13" is compared in terms of the game state after the big hit is completed. It will be a favorable jackpot type.

Further, as shown in FIG. 341, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "5 to 9" and "big hit B13" as the jackpot type. This "big hit B13" has 8 rounds of big hits, and is a type of big hit (2-round probable change big hit) that is set to the most disadvantageous normal mode (probability change state) after the end of the big hit. Since the number of time reductions set after the end of the "big hit B13" is set to 25, it is relatively easy to end the number of time reductions. By terminating the number of time reductions, the mode A is set to the continuous villa mode A until the number of probable changes (100 times) is completed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 341, "big hit C13" is defined as a big hit type in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "10 to 29". This "big hit C13" has two rounds of jackpot, and is a type of jackpot (two-round probabilistic jackpot) that is set to the most disadvantageous normal mode (probability change state) after the end of the jackpot. In the normal mode after the "big hit C13" is completed, the number of time reductions is set to 50, so that it is more difficult to shift to the consecutive villa mode A than the "big hit B13". Therefore, the "big hit C13" is a type of jackpot that is more disadvantageous than the "big hit B13".

Further, as shown in FIG. 341, for the value of the first hit type counter C2 being "30 to 74", "big hit D13" is defined in association with the jackpot type. This "big hit D13" is a type of big hit (two rounds probable change jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is two rounds and the normal mode (probability change state) is set after the end of the big hit. In the normal mode after the "big hit D13" is completed, the number of time reductions is set to 75, so that it is more difficult to shift to the consecutive villa mode A than the "big hit C13". Therefore, the "big hit D13" is a type of jackpot that is more disadvantageous than the "big hit B13" and the "big hit C13".

Further, as shown in FIG. 341, for the value of the first hit type counter C2 being "75", "big hit E13" is defined in association with the jackpot type. This "big hit E13" is a type of big hit (8 rounds normal big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds and the chance mode (time saving state) is set after the end of the big hit. In the chance mode set after the "big hit E13" is completed, the number of time reductions is set to 2, so it is extremely easy to end the number of time reductions. When the number of time reductions ends in the chance mode, the mode shifts to the most advantageous consecutive villa mode B (normal state), so that the "big hit E13" is the most advantageous jackpot among the jackpot types of the first special symbol.

Further, as shown in FIG. 341, for the value of the first hit type counter C2 being "76 to 80", "big hit F13" is defined in association with the jackpot type. This "big hit F13" is a type of big hit (two rounds normal big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is two rounds and the chance mode (time saving state) is set after the end of the big hit. Since the number of time reductions in the chance mode set after the end of the "big hit F13" is set to 50 times, it is more difficult to shift to the consecutive villa mode B than the "big hit E13". Therefore, the "big hit F13" is a type of jackpot that is more disadvantageous than the "big hit E13". In addition, in the chance mode, the jackpot probability is low, and by ending the number of time reductions, it directly shifts to the most advantageous consecutive villa mode B, so it is better than the "big hit B13" to "big hit D13" that shift to the normal mode. It can be said that it is an advantageous (easy to shift to consecutive villa mode B) jackpot type. Further, if we focus only on the point that the jackpot probability is low, it can be said that it is more disadvantageous than "big hit B13" to "big hit D13".

Further, as shown in FIG. 341, for the value of the first hit type counter C2 being "81 to 99", "big hit G13" is defined in association with the jackpot type. This "big hit G13" is a type of jackpot (two rounds normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is two and the chance mode (time saving state) is set after the jackpot ends. Since the number of time reductions in the chance mode set after the end of the "big hit G13" is set to 75, it is more difficult to shift to the consecutive villa mode B than the "big hit E13" or the "big hit F13". .. Therefore, the "big hit G13" is a type of big hit that is more disadvantageous than the "big hit E13" and the "big hit F13".

On the other hand, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), "big hit H13" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the range of "0 to 24" in the value of the first hit type counter C2. ing. This "big hit H13" is a big hit (8 rounds probability variation big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds and the game state after the big hit is set to the consecutive villa mode A or the normal mode. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 341, when the "big hit H13" is won in the consecutive villa mode B (normal state), the consecutive villa mode A (latent state) is set after the big hit ends, while the consecutive villa mode A (latent state) is set. If the "big hit H13" is won in the normal mode (probability change state), chance mode (time saving state), and consecutive villa mode A (latent state), the normal mode is set after the big hit ends.

Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "25 to 74" in association with "big hit I13" as the jackpot type. This "big hit I13" is a big hit (8 rounds probability variation big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds and the game state after the big hit is set to the consecutive villa mode A or the normal mode. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 341, if the "big hit H13" is won in the consecutive villa mode A (latent state) or the consecutive villa mode B (normal state), the consecutive villa mode A (submarine) is after the end of the big hit. On the other hand, if the "big hit H13" is won in the normal mode (probable change state) or the chance mode (time saving state), the normal mode is set after the big hit ends.

Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "75 to 99" in association with "big hit J13" as the jackpot type. This "big hit J13" is a type of big hit (8 rounds normal big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds and the game state after the big hit is set to the chance mode. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 341, when the "big hit J13" is won in the consecutive villa mode B, the number of time reductions is set to 2 times, so that an advantageous state in which the number of time reductions is extremely easy to end is formed. .. Further, if the "big hit J13" is won in the consecutive villa mode A, 75 times is set as the number of time reductions, and if the "big hit J13" is won in the normal mode or the chance mode, 100 times is set as the number of time reductions.

In addition, in the normal mode and the chance mode, when a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol, setting 100 times as the number of time reductions is the second entry by the right-handed game in the game state where the left-handed game should be performed. This is to suppress an irregular game method aiming at the ball mouth 640. As described above, in the thirteenth embodiment, the gaming state which is disadvantageous to the player is formed while the time saving state of the normal symbol is set. Therefore, in the normal mode or the chance mode, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, the time saving state of the disadvantageous ordinary symbol continues for a long time (100 times), which is anomalous to the player. It can make you feel like you don't want to play a game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in which a right-handed game is performed in a game state in which a left-handed game should be performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 342, the probabilistic / latent start time table 202f11 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. The probabilistic / latent start table 202f11 in the thirteenth embodiment is a lottery of the first special symbol in the latent state with respect to the probabilistic / latent start table 202f11 (see FIG. 324) in the twelfth embodiment. As the fluctuation pattern selected when is executed, only the fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds or 10 seconds) is selected, and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the latent state. The difference is that only the variation pattern with a short variation time (1 second or 10 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern selected in this case. In this change, the latent state in the twelfth embodiment is a normal mode that is disadvantageous to the player, whereas the latent state in the thirteenth embodiment is configured as a continuous villa mode A that is advantageous to the player. It is due to what I did.

Next, with reference to FIG. 343, a method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10 realized by performing control based on various tables defined in ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in RAM 203. explain. FIG. 343 is a diagram showing a method of transitioning the state of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 343, the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment is roughly divided into four modes (gaming states). That is, the normal mode (probability change state) shown in the upper part of FIG. 343, the chance mode (time saving state) shown in the center of FIG. , The continuous villa mode B (normal state) shown on the lower right side of FIG. 343 is provided.

As described above, the normal mode indicates the probable change state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol, and the probability of becoming a big hit is high, and the electric accessory 64a is more easily released than the normal state of the normal symbol. However, the probability of being released is low, and the game ball rarely enters the lower first entry port 64b2. Therefore, since it is necessary to advance the game by allowing the game ball to enter the upper first entry port 64b1 by the left-handed game, a game state disadvantageous to the player is formed. Further, as described above, the chance mode indicates a low probability state of the special symbol and a time saving state of the normal symbol, and although it is necessary to proceed with the left-handed game as in the normal mode, it is normal. Since it is easier to shift to the most advantageous consecutive villa mode A than the mode, it is a gaming state with a higher degree of advantage than the normal mode. Further, the consecutive villa mode A indicates a probable change state of the special symbol and a normal state of the normal symbol, and by performing the right-handed game, an advantageous game state in which the small hit game is frequently executed is obtained. Form. Further, the consecutive villa mode A indicates a low probability state of the special symbol and a normal state of the normal symbol, and is an extremely advantageous game in which the small hit game is frequently executed as in the consecutive villa mode A. Form a state.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 343, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal mode to another state when a big hit occurs and when a specified number of probable changes have passed. Specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 343, when the jackpot A13, which is the jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 5% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), it is continuous after the jackpot ends. Shift to Zhuang mode A. In addition, if any of the jackpots E13 to G13, which is the jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 25% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the chance mode is relatively advantageous after the jackpot ends. Transition. Further, after the normal mode is set, the predetermined probability variation number (100 times) is elapsed, so that the mode A is directly shifted to the consecutive villa mode A, which is advantageous to the player (without going through a big hit). On the other hand, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is obtained and the jackpots B13 to C13, which are determined at a rate of 70% as the jackpot type, are determined, the normal mode is set again after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in the normal mode, it is more advantageous to pass the specified probability variation number than to become a big hit, so that the player can be expected to continuously lose the specified number of times. .. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, as shown in the center of FIG. 343, there is a possibility of shifting from the chance mode to another state when a big hit occurs or when a specified number of time reductions has elapsed. Specifically, as shown in the center of FIG. 343, when the jackpot A13, which is the jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 5% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), it is continuous after the jackpot ends. Shift to Zhuang mode A. In addition, if any of the jackpots B13 to D13, which is the jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 70% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the mode shifts to the disadvantageous normal mode after the jackpot ends. .. Furthermore, after the chance mode is set, the specified number of time reductions (any of 2, 25, 50, 75, and 100) is allowed to pass to the most advantageous consecutive villa mode B for the player. And move directly (without going through the jackpot). On the other hand, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is obtained and the jackpots E13 to G13, which are determined at a rate of 25% as the jackpot type, are determined, the chance mode is set again after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in the chance mode, even if it becomes a big hit, the rate of maintaining the status quo or falling to the disadvantageous normal mode becomes extremely high, so it is more advantageous to let the specified number of times shortened than to become a big hit. It is easy to become. Therefore, since it is possible to expect the player to have continuous deviations over a predetermined number of time reductions, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Further, as shown on the lower left side of FIG. 343, there is a possibility of shifting from the consecutive villa mode A to another state when a big hit occurs or when a predetermined probability change number has passed. Specifically, as shown on the lower left side of FIG. 343, when the jackpot H13, which is the jackpot of the second special symbol and is determined at a rate of 25% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), after the jackpot ends. Move to the disadvantageous normal mode. In addition, when the jackpot of the second special symbol becomes a jackpot and the jackpot J13 determined at a rate of 25% is selected (determined) as the jackpot type, the mode shifts to the disadvantageous chance mode after the jackpot ends. Furthermore, after the consecutive villa mode A is set, the specified number of probable changes (100 times after the end of the previous jackpot) elapses, so that the player can directly go to the consecutive villa mode B (without going through the jackpot), which is most advantageous for the player. )Transition. On the other hand, when the jackpot of the second special symbol becomes a jackpot and the jackpot I13 determined as the jackpot type at a rate of 50% is determined, the consecutive villa mode A is set again after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in the consecutive villa mode A, the prize ball can be won while staying in the consecutive villa mode, and in the case of a big hit, it becomes easier to loop in the same mode, which is advantageous for the player. It becomes. Furthermore, if the number of probable changes can be passed, the mode shifts to the most advantageous consecutive villa mode B, so that even if a big hit or a series of misses (small hits) occurs, the player will be in an advantageous state. Form.

Further, as shown on the lower right side of FIG. 343, there is a possibility of shifting from the consecutive villa mode B to another state only when a big hit occurs. Specifically, as shown on the lower right side of FIG. 343, when the jackpot H13 and I13, which are the jackpots of the second special symbol and are determined at a rate of 75% as the jackpot type, are selected (determined), the jackpots are selected. After the end, the mode shifts to the consecutive villa mode A, which is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the jackpot of the second special symbol becomes a jackpot and the jackpot J13 determined at a rate of 25% as the jackpot type is determined, the chance mode is set after the jackpot ends. In the chance mode set after the end of the jackpot J13, the number of time reductions is set to 2, so that the number of time reductions can be almost completed and the mode can be shifted to the consecutive villa mode B. Therefore, it is a jackpot type that is more pleasing to the player than the jackpots H13 and I13 that shift to the consecutive villa mode A. In this way, in the consecutive villa mode B, the prize ball can be won while staying in the consecutive villa mode, and in the case of a big hit, there is a possibility of shifting to the normal mode which is disadvantageous to the player. Since there is no such thing, it is very advantageous for the player.

<Control processing of the main control device in the thirteenth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 344, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 344 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation processing 14 (S121) in the thirteenth embodiment. This ordinary symbol variation process 14 (S121) is a process executed in place of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 48) in the twelfth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is a process executed in place of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 48). Similar to the process (see FIG. 48), the process for displaying in the second symbol display device (not shown) and the process for accompanying the passage of the sphere at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 are performed. It is a process for.

Of the ordinary symbol variation processing 14 (see FIG. 344) in the thirteenth embodiment, the twelfth implementation is performed in each of the processes S1801, S1802, S1804, S1807 to S1810, S1812, S1814, S1816 to S1818, S1821, and S1823, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S1801, S1802, S1804, S1807 to S1810, S1812, S1814, S1816 to S1818, S1821, and S1823 of the ordinary symbol variation processing (see FIG. 48) in the embodiment (and the first embodiment) is executed. Will be done.

Further, in the normal symbol variation processing 14 (see FIG. 344) in the thirteenth embodiment, after the processing of S1810 or S1812 is completed, 60 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (S1831), and the processing is performed. Move to S1814. That is, in the thirteenth embodiment, a long fluctuation time is set regardless of the lottery result of the normal symbol and the game state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the chance that the electric accessory 64a is released even in the probabilistic state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set or in the time saving state.

Further, in the normal symbol variation processing 14 (see FIG. 344) in the thirteenth embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S1821 that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (S1821: No), the electric accessory 64a is opened. The time and the number of times are set to "0.1 seconds x 1 time" (S1832), and the process shifts to S1823. On the other hand, in the process of S1821 when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S1821: Yes), the opening time and the number of times of the electric accessory 64a are set to "0.2 seconds x 1 time". (S1833), the process shifts to S1823. As described above, in the thirteenth embodiment, even in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long (60 seconds) and the opening time of the electric accessory 64a is also short. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the first entry port 64b2. Therefore, the gaming state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set can be set to a disadvantageous state for the player.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, two gaming states, a latent state and a normal state, are configured as an advantageous gaming state in which a small hit game is frequently executed. Here, conventionally, by executing the lottery of the second special symbol in the latent probability state, it is configured to win a small hit with a high probability, and the latent probability state is more advantageous than the probabilistic change state. Has been proposed. That is, a gaming machine equipped with an advantageous state (so-called small hit RUSH function) in which a prize ball can be won without winning a big hit has been proposed. However, in such a conventional gaming machine, even if the machine shifts to an advantageous state other than the latent state such as the probable change state, the player feels satisfied unless it shifts to the latent state (small hit RUSH state). It was difficult to hold. On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, as the so-called small hit RUSH state, two types of states having different degrees of advantage are provided, and the small hit RUSH state (ream villa mode A) having a relatively low degree of advantage is set. The configuration is such that migration is relatively easy. With this configuration, it is possible to form the pachinko machine 10 that allows the player to experience the small hit RUSH state relatively easily, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Modified example of the thirteenth embodiment>
Next, a modification of the above-mentioned thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 345 and 346. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, it is easy to execute a lottery of the second special symbol having a high probability of winning a small hit in two types of gaming states, a latent state and a normal state (variation time of the second special symbol). Formed as a short) advantageous condition. That is, just by continuously hitting the right side, small hits of the second special symbol occur frequently, and the first specific winning opening 65a is frequently opened, so that the prize ball can be won even if the big hit is not won. It was configured to form an advantageous state that could be acquired continuously (intermittently).

On the other hand, in the modified example of the thirteenth embodiment, by playing the game aiming at the first ball entrance 64b1 by the left-handed game, the small hit of the first special symbol frequently occurs and the small hit By playing a game aiming at the second entry opening 640 by a right-handed game and an advantageous state (latent state) in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the second specific winning opening 650a opened during the game. A configuration in which small hits of the second special symbol frequently occur and an advantageous state (normal state) in which the game ball is easily entered into the second specific winning opening 650a opened during the small hit game is provided. And said. That is, by performing a left-handed game, an advantageous state (latent state) in which a prize ball can be obtained intermittently (continuously) without winning a big hit, and by performing a right-handed game. , An advantageous state (normal state) in which prize balls can be obtained intermittently (continuously) without winning a big hit, and two types are provided. Further, the small hit probability of the first special symbol (for example, 1/5) is set to be lower than the small hit probability of the second special symbol (for example, 59/60), so that the normal state can be obtained. It is configured so that it is in a more advantageous state in which it is easier to obtain a prize ball than in a latent state.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the thirteenth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment is that the small hit probability is changed and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64aj is changed. The point is that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 has been changed. With reference to FIGS. 345 and 346, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 of this modification will be described.

As shown in FIG. 345, the game board 13 in this modified example is provided with an electric accessory 64aj in place of the electric accessory 64a provided incidentally to the lower first entrance ball opening 64b2. Drink differently. Similar to the electric accessory 64a in the thirteenth embodiment (and the first embodiment), the electric accessory 64aj is in a closed state (normally, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the lower first entry port 64b2). The open state (second state), which makes it easier for the game ball to enter the lower first entry port 64b2 compared to the closed state when the first state) is formed and a hit is made by lottery of a normal symbol. To form. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 346, but in this modified example, even if the open state is set, the game ball hardly enters the lower first entry port 64b2. In this modified example, the first special winning opening 65a is configured to be opened when a big hit is made or when a small hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the lottery of the first special symbol is made. The second specific winning opening 650a is configured to be opened when a small hit is made.

Next, the correspondence between the state of the electric accessory 640aj and the flow path of the game ball will be described with reference to FIG. 346. First, with reference to FIG. 346 (a), the flow path of the game ball in the state where the electric accessory 64aj is closed will be described. As shown in FIG. 346 (a), in a state where the electric accessory 64aj is closed, the game ball flowing down from above toward the electric accessory 64aj collides with (interferes with) the electric accessory 64aj, resulting in a path. The second variable winning device was changed (variable), and the route was changed by flowing down to the right side of the second variable winning device 650 (path Ka1) or colliding with (interfering with) the electric accessory 64aj. It flows directly toward the second variable winning device 650 (path Ka3) without flowing down toward 650 (path Ka2) or colliding (interfering) with the electric accessory 64aj. That is, in the state where the electric accessory 64aj is closed, it is not possible to enter the ball into the lower first entry slot 64b2, but it is relatively easy to reach the second variable winning device 650. Therefore, in the latent state where the normal state of the normal symbol is set (the electric accessory 64aj is difficult to be released), the probability that the lottery of the first special symbol is executed by performing the left-handed game is 1/5. When the second specific winning opening 650a is opened, it becomes possible to relatively easily enter the game ball into the second specific winning opening 650a. When the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the latent state, a long fluctuation is set regardless of the lottery result, so even if the right-handed hit is continuously performed, there is little merit for the player ( Although you will win a small hit, it will be difficult to win a prize ball because the interval between small hit games will be long).

Further, FIG. 346 (b) is a diagram showing a flow path of the game ball in a state where the electric accessory 64aj is open. As shown in FIG. 346 (b), in the state where the electric accessory 64aj is opened, the game ball flowing down from above the electric accessory 64aj collides with (interferes with) the electric accessory 64aj and the flow path is changed. Even if it is changed, it is less likely to be reflected in the direction of the second variable winning device 650 (paths Kb1, Kb2). Further, since the electric accessory 64aj is opened, the area of the region formed between the electric accessory 64aj and the lower first ball entry port 64b2 becomes wider, so that the lower first one interferes with a nail or the like. It becomes relatively easy for a game ball to enter the ball entry port 64b2 (for example, about 1 in 200 balls). It should be noted that, only because it is easier to enter the ball than in the closed state, it is configured as a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter as compared with the time-saving state of the normal symbol in other embodiments. Therefore, in the probabilistic state or the time saving state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter both the lower first entry opening 64b2 and the second specific winning opening 650a, so that the first special symbol Every time the lottery is executed, even though the second specific winning opening 650a is opened with a probability of 1/5, it is a disadvantageous state that the game ball cannot be entered into the second specific winning opening 650a. To form. In this modification, a fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds is set each time the game ball passes through the through gate 67 in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and the game is hit with a high probability (for example, 232/233). In the case of a hit, the electric accessory 64aj is released for 2.5 seconds. That is, by performing the left-handed game, the operation repeats the fluctuation for 0.1 second and the opening for 2.5 seconds. In other words, the electric accessory 64aj is almost left open. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second specific entry port 650a in the time saving state or the probable change state.

As described above, in the modified example of the thirteenth embodiment, the second specific winning opening 650a is closed by the electric accessory 64aj which is opened when the normal symbol hits, so that the time saving state and the probable change state are obtained. Even if you hit the left side and get a small hit, it is difficult to win the prize ball. As a result, only when a left-handed strike is made in the normal state of the normal symbol (a state in which the electric accessory 64aj is difficult to open) and a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, the game is played to the second specific winning opening 650a. It is possible to form an advantageous state in which the ball is easy (possible) to enter. In other words, it is configured to form a relatively advantageous state by hitting left in the latent state. Therefore, it is possible to form an advantageous state in which the prize ball is easily obtained by hitting the left side and an advantageous state in which the prize ball is easily obtained by hitting the right side, so that the game method can be diversified. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Further, in this modification, the degree of advantage is different between the latent state in which it is easy to acquire the prize ball by hitting left and the normal state in which it is easy to acquire the prize ball by hitting right (if the frequency of acquiring the prize ball is different). It has a structure. As a result, the game can be sharpened, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In this modification, the probability of a small hit of the second special symbol is higher than the probability of a small hit of the first special symbol, so that the lottery of the first special symbol is mainly executed in the latent state. , The normal state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed is configured to be more advantageous, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to making the small hit probability different depending on the type of special symbol, for example, in the small hit of the first special symbol, in one small hit game than in the small hit of the second special symbol. By configuring so that the number of game balls that can be won is likely to decrease, it may be configured so that the normal state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed is more advantageous. In addition, instead of or in addition to these, the number of prize balls based on the entry into the second specific winning opening 650a, which is opened when the first special symbol is a small hit, is the second special symbol small hit. By making the number of prize balls smaller than the number of prize balls based on the entry into the first specific winning opening 65a, which is opened in the case of, the normal state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed is more advantageous. It may be configured as. By applying these modifications, the degree of advantage can be changed in a more multifaceted manner, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the thirteenth embodiment and its modifications, the normal state is configured to be more advantageous than the latent state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the latent state may be configured to be more advantageous than the normal state.

<14th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 347 to 341. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, in two types of gaming states, a normal state and a latent state, an advantageous state in which a prize ball by a small hit is easily obtained is formed. In addition, the degree of advantage between the normal state and the latent state is different, and the normal state is configured to be more advantageous than the latent state, thereby realizing a sharp playability.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 14th embodiment, as in the 1st embodiment, only the latent probability state is configured as an advantageous gaming state in which it is easy to obtain a prize ball by a small hit. Further, in the 14th embodiment, the degree of advantage (easiness of obtaining a prize ball) is changed according to the number of lottery of special symbols executed in the latent state. More specifically, as the latent state, the most advantageous state (latent state A) in which the lottery of the second special symbol having a high probability of winning a small hit (for example, the probability of 59/60) is easily executed, There are two types of states: a state in which the probability of winning a small hit is low (for example, a probability of 1/5) and the degree of advantage is lower than the latent state A in which the lottery of the first special symbol is likely to be executed (latent state B). It was configured to be able to switch. As a result, even in an advantageous latent state in which the small hit game is likely to be executed, the degree of advantage can be further changed, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the 14th embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the 13th embodiment is that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the main control device 110. The configuration of the ROM 202 is partially changed, and other configurations are the same as the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the thirteenth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 347, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the 14th embodiment will be described. FIG. 347 is a front view of the game board 13 in the 14th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 347, the game board 13 in the 14th embodiment has an upper first entrance for the game board 13 with respect to the configuration (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13 in the 13th embodiment (and the first embodiment). Instead of 64b1 and the lower first ball entry port 64b2, a central first ball entry port 64c with a central electric accessory 64ca is provided. Instead of the second ball entry port 640, the distribution device 6400D The point where is provided, and the arrangement of the second variable winning device 650, which is opened when a big hit or a small hit of the first special symbol is made, is moved to the right side of the board, and a game fired by left-handed. The change is that the upper left side is blocked by multiple nails so that the ball is difficult to enter. The reason why the arrangement of the second variable winning device 650 was changed is that the small hit is won with a relatively high probability (probability of 1/5) by the lottery of the first special symbol, so the game state (submarine) in which the left-handed game should be performed. The purpose is to prevent the game ball from entering the second variable winning device 650 in a game state other than the probability state), which is advantageous to the player.

Like the electric accessory 64a in the thirteenth embodiment, the electric accessory 64ca attached to the central first ball entry port 64c is opened when it hits a normal symbol. Therefore, in the time-saving state or the probable change state in which the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set, the game ball can easily enter the central first entrance ball opening 64c, so that the holding ball is less likely to be consumed. Therefore, the game efficiency is improved in the time saving state and the probable change state, which is advantageous for the player.

The distribution device 6400D is configured to be able to distribute (enter) the entered game ball to either the first entry port 6400D1 or the second entry port 6400D2 provided inside. There is. The first ball entry port 6400D1 is configured as a ball entry port that triggers a lottery of the first special symbol, similarly to the central first ball entry port 64c. On the other hand, the second entry slot 6400D2 is configured as an entry slot that triggers a lottery for the second special symbol. Further, as shown in FIG. 347, the game ball that has entered is received inside the distribution device 6400D, and the received game ball is sent to either the first entry slot 6400D1 or the second entry slot 6400D2. A distribution member 6400Da is provided. The distribution member 6400Da is provided with receiving portions on the left and right sides thereof that can receive a ball flowing down from above. In the distribution member 6400Da, the receiving portion on the right side is located directly under the opening of the distribution device 6400D (the position where the game ball can enter), and the receiving portion on the left side is the opening of the distribution device 6400D. There are two possible arrangements, one that comes directly under. FIG. 347 illustrates an arrangement in which the right receiving portion is directly below the opening.

If the game ball that has entered the distribution device 6400D through the opening is received by the right receiving portion while the receiving portion on the right side is located directly below the opening, the game is played. As a result of the distribution member 6400a rotating clockwise around the shaft 6400Db due to the weight of the sphere, the receiving portion on the left side is arranged to be directly below the opening. Further, since the receiving portion on the right side is tilted in the lower right direction in the front view due to the rotation, the game ball rolls along the tilt and flows down in the lower right direction of the distribution member 6400Da. That is, it flows down in the direction of the second entry port 6400D2 and enters the second entry port 6400D2.

On the other hand, when the game ball that has entered the distribution device 6400D is received by the left side receiving part in a state where the receiving part on the left side is directly below the opening, the weight of the game ball is heavy. As a result, the distribution member 6400Da rotates counterclockwise with the shaft 6400Db as the rotation axis, and as a result, the receiving portion on the right side is arranged to be directly below the opening. Further, since the receiving portion on the left side is tilted in the lower left direction in the front view due to the rotation, the game ball rolls along the tilt and flows down in the lower left direction of the distribution member 6400Da. That is, it flows down in the direction of the first ball entry port 6400D1 and enters the first ball entry port 6400D1. Therefore, each time the game ball enters the distribution device 6400D, the ball can be alternately distributed to the first entry port 6400D1 and the second entry port 6400D2.

The details will be described later, but in the 14th embodiment, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol tends to be shorter in the latent state (the small hit of the first special symbol starts during the fluctuation of the second special symbol). By doing so, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol tends to be shorter (first) between the state (latent state B) in which the fluctuation of the second special symbol is likely to be forcibly stopped due to the deviation. Either a state (latent state A) in which a small hit of the second special symbol is started during the fluctuation of the special symbol, so that the event that the fluctuation of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped due to the deviation is likely to occur). The configuration is such that the state is set. That is, in the latent state, the lottery of the first special symbol that wins the small hit with a probability of 1/5 is mainly executed, and the lottery of the second special symbol that wins the small hit with the probability of 59/60 is mainly executed. The configuration is such that two types of states, the state to be executed and the state to be executed, are provided. Along with this, the variable display on the game board 13 is configured so that both the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed only by right-handing in the latent state. A distribution device 6400D capable of alternately distributing game balls to the first ball entry port 6400D1 and the second ball entry port 6400D2 is provided in the area on the right side of the device unit 80.

<Electrical configuration in the 14th embodiment>
Next, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 according to the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 348 to 352. Here, in the ROM 202 in the 14th embodiment, the configurations of the jackpot type selection table 202d, the variation pattern selection table 202f, and the variation pattern scenario table 202ka are partially changed from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 13th embodiment. It differs in that it is. Since other configurations are the same as the configurations of ROM 202 in the thirteenth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the details of the variation pattern scenario table 202ka in the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 348. As shown in FIG. 348, in the variation pattern scenario table 202ka in the 14th embodiment, when the previous jackpot type is jackpot A14 or G14, the number of lottery of special symbols is in the range of 1 to 99 times. Therefore, as the variation pattern selection table, the probability variation A table 202f21 is defined in association with each other. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 350, the probability variation A table 202f21 is one of the tables that can be referred to while the probability variation state of the special symbol is set, and this table is referred to in the latency state. And, while forming the most advantageous state in which the small hit game of the second special symbol is easily executed, when this table is referred to in the probabilistic state, the game efficiency is higher in the left-handed than in the right-handed. Form a relatively advantageous gaming state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 348, the normal table 202f23 is defined as a variable pattern selection table in association with the range in which the number of lottery of special symbols is 100 or more. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 352, but when the normal table 202f23 is referred to, a right-handed hit is executed in the normal state to form an extremely disadvantageous state in which the game efficiency is deteriorated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 348, when the previous jackpot type is any of the jackpots B14, D14, and F14, the probability variation B table is obtained for the range of the number of lottery of special symbols from 1 to 99 times. 202f22 is specified in association with each other. The probability change B table 202f22 is one of the tables that can be referred to while the probability change state of the special symbol is set, and when this table is referred to in the latent state, the small hit game of the first special symbol is made. On the other hand, when this table is referred to in the probabilistic state, the left-handed player forms a relatively advantageous gamed state in which the game efficiency is higher than that of the right-handed player. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 348, a normal table 202f23 (see FIG. 352) is defined as a variation pattern selection table in the range where the number of lottery of special symbols is 100 or more. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 348, when the previous jackpot type is jackpot C14, the probability variation B table 202f22 (see FIG. 351) corresponds to the range in which the number of lottery of special symbols is 1 to 24 times. It is specified by attaching it, and the probability variation A table 202f21 (see FIG. 350) is specified in association with the range of 25 to 99 times. The probability change B table 202f22 is one of the tables that can be referred to while the probability change state of the special symbol is set, and when this table is referred to in the latent state, the small hit game of the first special symbol is made. On the other hand, when this table is referred to in the probabilistic state, the left-handed player forms a relatively advantageous gamed state in which the game efficiency is higher than that of the right-handed player. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 348, a normal table 202f23 (see FIG. 352) is defined as a variation pattern selection table in the range where the number of lottery of special symbols is 100 or more. ..

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 348, when the previous jackpot type is a normal jackpot, the normal table 202f23 (see FIG. 352) is defined in association with each other regardless of the number of lottery of special symbols. There is.

As described above, in the 14th embodiment, the latent probability state is determined depending on whether the probability variation A table 202f21 is referred to or the probability variation B table 202f22 is referred to (that is, according to the previous jackpot type). The configuration is such that the degree of advantage in the case of becomes variable. That is, in the latent state, the small hit game based on the lottery of the first special symbol, which has a relatively low degree of advantage, is easily executed (latent state B), and the small hit game based on the lottery of the second special symbol. It is possible to form two types of states, a state that is easy to execute (latent state A) and a state that is easy to execute. Therefore, since it is possible to form more states in which the player has different degrees of advantage, the game can be diversified and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 349, the details of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the 14th embodiment will be described. FIG. 349 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d.

As shown in FIG. 349, in the 14th embodiment, five jackpot types of "big hit A14" to "big hit E14" are defined as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. Further, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, three jackpot types of "big hit F14" to "big hit H14" are defined.

As shown in FIG. 349, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4", while the jackpot type is "big hit A14". It is specified in association with each other. This "big hit A14" has 8 rounds of big hits, and is set to the most advantageous latent state A (the latent state in which the small hit game of the second special symbol is easily executed) after the end of the big hit. It is a big hit (8 round probability change big hit). Since the latent state A is the most advantageous gaming state, the "big hit A14" is the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of the gaming state after the end of the jackpot.

Further, as shown in FIG. 349, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "5 to 19" and "big hit B14" as the jackpot type. This "big hit B14" has 8 rounds of big hit, and when it is won in a game state other than the latent state, it is set to a relatively advantageous probable change state after the end of the big hit, while the latent state. This is a type of jackpot (8-round probability variation jackpot) that is set to the latent probability state B (advantageous state in which the small hit game of the first special symbol is easily executed) after the jackpot ends. When the probability change state is set after the end of the "big hit B14", the latent state B is set until the probability change number (100 times) is completed by elapsed (finished) the number of time reductions. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 349, "big hit C14" is defined as a big hit type in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "10 to 29". This "big hit C14" has 8 rounds of big hit, and when it is won in a game state other than the latent state, it is set to a relatively advantageous probable change state after the end of the big hit, while the latent state. This is a type of jackpot (8-round probability variable jackpot) that is set to the latent state A (the most advantageous state in which the small hit game of the second special symbol is easily executed) after the end of the jackpot. After the end of the "big hit C14", the special symbol lottery is executed 25 times, so that the latent state A shifts to the latent state B having a low degree of advantage (see FIG. 348). Further, when the probability change state is set after the end of the "big hit B14", the latent state B is set until the probability change number (100 times) is completed by elapsed (finished) the number of time reductions. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 349, "big hit D14" is defined as a big hit type in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "70 to 79". This "big hit D14" has 8 rounds of big hit, and when it is won in a game state other than the latent state, it is set to a relatively advantageous probabilistic state after the end of the big hit, while the latent state. This is a type of jackpot (8-round probability variation jackpot) that is set to the latent probability state B (advantageous state in which the small hit game of the first special symbol is easily executed) after the jackpot ends. When the probability change state is set after the end of the "big hit D14", the latent state B is set until the probability change number (100 times) is completed by elapsed (finished) the number of time reductions. .. Here, if the "big hit D14" is won in a game state other than the latent probability state, the number of probability changes is set to be smaller than that of the "big hit B14" and the "big hit C14", so that the transition to a more advantageous latent state is established. It is possible to give the player a strong sense of expectation for what to do. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 349, "big hit E14" is defined as a big hit type in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "80 to 99". This "big hit E14" is a type of big hit (8 rounds normal big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds and the time saving state is set to 100 times after the end of the big hit. Since the time saving state in the 14th embodiment is more disadvantageous than the probable change state, the "big hit E14" is the most disadvantageous jackpot among the jackpot types of the first special symbol.

On the other hand, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), "big hit F14" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the range of "0 to 4" in the value of the first hit type counter C2. ing. This "big hit F14" has 16 rounds of big hits, and when it is won in a gaming state other than the latent state, it is set to a relatively advantageous probable change state after the end of the big hit, while the latent state. This is a type of jackpot (16-round probability variable jackpot) that is set to the latent probability state B (an advantageous state in which the small hit game of the first special symbol is easily executed) after the jackpot ends. Since the probability change state set after the end of the "big hit F14" is set to 100 times as the number of time reductions, the probability change state of the special symbol ends at the same time as the end of the number of time reductions. Therefore, if the "big hit F14" is won in a gaming state other than the latent probability state, there is no possibility of shifting to an advantageous latent probability state. This is intended to suppress anomalous gaming methods in which right-handed strikes are performed in a gaming state other than the latent state.

Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "5 to 79" in association with "big hit G14" as the big hit type. This "big hit G14" has 16 rounds of big hits, and when it is won in a game state other than the latent state, it is set to a relatively advantageous probabilistic state after the end of the big hit, while the latent state. This is a type of jackpot (16-round probability variation jackpot) that is set to the latent state A (the most advantageous state in which the small hit game of the second special symbol is easily executed) after the end of the jackpot. Since the probability variation state set after the end of the "big hit G14" is set to 100 times as the number of time reductions, as with the "big hit F14", it is an irregular state in which a right-handed strike is performed in a gaming state other than the latent probability state. It is possible to suppress the game method.

Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "80 to 99" in association with "big hit H14" as the jackpot type. This "big hit H14" has 16 rounds of big hits, and when the player wins in a game state other than the latent state, it is set to the most disadvantageous normal state after the big hit, while in the latent state. If you win, it is a type of jackpot (16 rounds normal jackpot) that is set to a time-saving state after the jackpot ends. In addition, when the "big hit H14" is won in a game state other than the latent state, the most disadvantageous normal state is set to suppress the irregular game method of hitting right in the game state other than the latent state. This is to plan.

Next, the details of the probabilistic A table 202f21 in the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 350. FIG. 350 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the probability variation A table 202f21. As shown in FIG. 350, the probability variation A table 202f21 defines the correspondence between the gaming state at the time of executing the special symbol lottery and the variable pattern that can be selected for each type of special symbol. More specifically, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 in the probabilistic state, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is shorter than when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more. Become. Further, in the latent probability state, as in the case where the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more in the probability change state, only the long variation of the first special symbol is selected.

On the other hand, for the second special symbol, a long fluctuation of 600 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result in the probabilistic state, while a short fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds to 1 second is set in the latent state. Set. As a result, when the game ball continuously enters the distribution device 6400D by hitting right in the probable change state, the game ball is alternately distributed to the first entry port 6400D1 and the second entry port 6400D2. , The number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 1 or more, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol become long, and the game efficiency becomes extremely poor. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a right-handed strike is performed in a probabilistic state. On the other hand, if a right-handed ball is hit in the latent state, the ball enters the first ball opening 6400D1 and the second ball opening 6400D2 alternately. And the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in duplicate. However, as shown in FIG. 350, in the latent state, the long fluctuation of the first special symbol is set, while the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 1 second or less, so that the right-handed game is continued. By doing so, the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed more frequently than the lottery of the first special symbol. That is, it forms an advantageous state in which only the small hits of the second special symbol are continuously won. Therefore, the latent state A that is most advantageous to the player is formed.

Next, the details of the probability variation B table 202f22 in the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 351. FIG. 351 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the probability variation B table 202f22. As shown in FIG. 351, the probability variation B table 202f22 is configured so that the variation pattern selected in the probability variation state is exactly the same as the probability variation A table 202f21 (see FIG. 350). As a result, when the game ball continuously enters the distribution device 6400D by hitting right in the probabilistic state in which the scenario in which the fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the probability change B table 202f22 is set, the probabilistic change is used. As in the case where the A table 202f21 is referred to, the game balls are alternately distributed to the first entry port 6400D1 and the second entry opening 6400D2, and as a result, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 1 or more. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol become long, and the game efficiency becomes extremely poor. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a right-handed strike is performed in a probabilistic state.

Further, in the latent state, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 1 second or less, while the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to a long fluctuation of 600 seconds regardless of the lottery result of the second special symbol. Will be done. As a result, when right-handed in the latent state, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol for 1 second or less and the long fluctuation of the second special symbol are executed in duplicate, so the right-handed game is continued. By doing so, the lottery of the first special symbol can be executed more frequently than the lottery of the second special symbol. That is, it forms an advantageous state (latent state B) in which only small hits of the first special symbol are continuously won. The probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is 1/5, whereas the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is 59/60. The frequency at which the small hit game is executed is lower than that in the latent state A. That is, the latent state B forms a state in which the degree of advantage is lower than that of the latent state A. Therefore, in the latent probability state, it is advantageous for the player that the variation pattern is determined by referring to the probability variation A table 202f21 (see FIG. 350).

Next, the details of the normal table 202f23 in the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 352. FIG. 352 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the normal table 202f23. As shown in FIG. 352, the normal table 202f23 is configured so that the same fluctuation time as the fluctuation pattern selected in the probability variation state is selected. That is, by executing the lottery of the first special symbol by left-handed, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time of 20 seconds or less is set, while in the normal state, the time saving state, and the probable change state, right-handedness is continued. As a result, the game balls are alternately distributed to the first entry port 6400D1 and the second entry opening 6400D2, and as a result, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 1 or more, and the first special symbol changes. The time and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol become long, and the game efficiency becomes extremely poor. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a right-handed strike is performed in a state other than the latent state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 343, a method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10 realized by performing control based on various tables defined in ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in RAM 203. explain. FIG. 341 is a diagram showing a method of transitioning the state of the pachinko machine 10 in the 14th embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 341, the pachinko machine 10 of the 14th embodiment is roughly divided into five states. That is, the normal state shown on the upper left side of FIG. 341, the time saving state shown on the upper right side of FIG. 341, the probabilistic state shown in the center of FIG. , And the latent probability state A shown on the lower right side of FIG. 341 are provided.

The normal state indicates a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol, and the probability of becoming a big hit is low (1/240), and the most unfavorable gaming state in which the electric accessory 64a is difficult to be released. To form. Further, the time saving state indicates a low probability state of a special symbol and a time saving state of a normal symbol, and although the probability of becoming a big hit is low (1/240), the electric accessory 64a is easily released, so the left. By hitting, a relatively advantageous gaming state is formed in which the game can be played without reducing the number of balls held. In addition, the probabilistic state indicates the probabilistic state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol, and the probability of becoming a big hit is high (1/80), and the electric accessory 64a is easily released, so that it is left-handed. By performing the above, a game state that is more advantageous than the time-saving state in which the game can be played without reducing the number of balls held is formed. Further, the latent state A and the latent state B indicate the probabilistic state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, and the probability of becoming a big hit is high (1/80), and the electric accessory 64a Is a game state that is difficult to open. In addition, in the latent probability state B, since the small hit game of the first special symbol is easily executed by hitting right, the second specific winning opening 650a where the game ball can be entered by hitting right is reached. A game ball is inserted relatively frequently (every time the lottery of the first special symbol is executed about 5 times) to form an advantageous state in which a prize ball can be obtained. On the other hand, in the latent state A, as described above, the small hit game of the second special symbol is easily executed by hitting right, so that the first specific prize can be entered by hitting right. It forms a state more advantageous than the latent state B in which a prize ball can be obtained by frequently entering the mouth 65a (almost every time the lottery of the second special symbol is executed).

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 341, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal state to another state only when a big hit occurs. Specifically, as shown on the upper left side of FIG. 341, when the jackpot A14, which is the jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 5% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), after the jackpot ends. It shifts to the most advantageous latent state A. In addition, if any of the jackpots B14 to D14, which is the jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 75% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), it will be in a relatively advantageous probability change state after the jackpot ends. Transition. Further, when the jackpot E14, which is the jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 20% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the time is shortened after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in the normal state, by winning the big hit, the state always shifts to an advantageous state as compared with the normal state, so that the game can be played with the expectation that the big hit will be achieved.

Further, as shown on the upper right side of FIG. 341, there is a possibility of shifting from the time saving state to another state not only when a big hit occurs but also when the number of time saving times is completed. Specifically, as shown on the upper right side of FIG. 341, when the jackpot A14, which is the jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 5% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), after the jackpot ends. It shifts to the most advantageous latent state A. In addition, if any of the jackpots B14 to D14, which is the jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 75% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), it will be in a relatively advantageous probability change state after the jackpot ends. Transition. Further, after the time saving state is set, the predetermined time saving number (100 times) elapses (ends), so that the normal state, which is the most disadvantageous for the player, is directly (without going through the jackpot). On the other hand, when the jackpot of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and the jackpot E14 determined at a rate of 20% as the jackpot type is determined, the time saving state is set again after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in the time saving state, when a big hit occurs, the game state shifts to a more advantageous gaming state, or at least the current gaming state (time saving state) is maintained, while the number of time saving times ends. If this happens, it will shift to a disadvantageous normal state, so it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the jackpot will be won before the time saving state ends.

Further, as shown in the center of FIG. 341, there is a possibility of shifting from the probabilistic state to another state when a big hit occurs or when a specified number of time reductions has passed. Specifically, as shown in the center of FIG. 341, when the jackpot E14, which is the jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 20% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the probability changes after the jackpot ends. It shifts to a time saving state that is more disadvantageous than the state. Further, when the jackpot A14, which is the jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 5% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the state shifts to the most advantageous latent state B after the jackpot ends. Furthermore, after the probabilistic change state is set, the specified number of time reductions (10 times, 25 times, or 50 times) is allowed to elapse, so that the player can directly enter the consecutive villa mode A (without a big hit), which is relatively advantageous for the player. To). On the other hand, when it becomes a jackpot of the first special symbol and any of the jackpots B14 to D14 determined at a rate of 75% as the jackpot type is determined, the probability change state is set again after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in the probabilistic state, the rate of transitioning to a more advantageous state in the case of a big hit is low (5% rate), while the end of the time saving state surely leads to a more advantageous latent state. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel playability that is more strongly expected to end the time saving state.

In addition, as shown on the lower left side of FIG. 341, the latent state B shifts to another state not only when a big hit occurs, but also when the specified number of probability changes (100 times after the end of the big hit) is completed. there is a possibility. Specifically, as shown on the lower left side of FIG. 341, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is selected (determined) and the jackpots A14 and C14, which are determined at a rate of 55% as the jackpot type, are selected (determined), the jackpot is selected. After the end, it shifts to the most advantageous latent state B. In addition, when the jackpot of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and the jackpot E14 determined at a rate of 20% is selected (determined) as the jackpot type, the time shift to a disadvantageous time saving state after the jackpot ends. Further, when the number of probable changes (100 times after the end of the big hit) is completed, the state shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state. On the other hand, when the jackpot B14 and D14, which are the jackpots of the first special symbol and are determined at a rate of 25% as the jackpot type, are selected (determined), the latent state B is set again after the jackpot ends. To. Therefore, in the latent probability state B, it is possible to realize the playability in which the jackpot is expected to be won before the probability change number ends and the state shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state.

Further, as shown on the lower right side of FIG. 341, the latent state A shifts to another state not only when a big hit occurs but also when the specified probability change number (100 times after the end of the big hit) is completed. there is a possibility. Specifically, as shown on the lower right side of FIG. 341, when the jackpot F14, which is the jackpot of the second special symbol and is determined at a rate of 5% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), after the jackpot ends. It shifts to the latent state A, which has a relatively low degree of advantage. In addition, when the jackpot H14, which is the jackpot of the second special symbol and is determined at a rate of 20% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), it shifts to a disadvantageous time saving state after the jackpot ends. Further, when the number of probable changes (100 times after the end of the big hit) is completed, the state shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state. On the other hand, when the jackpot of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and the jackpot G14 determined at a rate of 75% is selected (determined) as the jackpot type, the latent state A is set again after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in the latent state A, the most advantageous latent state A is highly probable by winning the jackpot before the probability change number ends and the transition to the most disadvantageous normal state ends. It forms a very advantageous gaming state that loops at a rate of 75%).

As described above, in the 14th embodiment, there are two types of games, a latent state A and a latent state B, as an advantageous state in which a prize ball can be obtained by a small hit game without going through a big hit. It was configured to provide a state. Both of these states are composed of latent probability states (probability change state of special symbol and normal state of normal symbol), and by making the fluctuation pattern scenario different, the lottery of the second special symbol with high small hit probability is biased. It is configured to form a latent state A that is executed (biasedly) and a latent state B that is executed biasedly (biased) to the lottery of the first special symbol having a low small hit probability. With this configuration, it is possible to realize different game characteristics (a game property in which more prize balls can be obtained and a game property in which it is difficult to obtain prize balls) in one latent state. It is possible to improve the interest of the person. Further, unlike the thirteenth embodiment described above, the latent state can be set as the most advantageous gaming state and the normal state can be formed as the most unfavorable gaming state. There is no need to make any difference in control between the state and the normal state that shifts through other gaming states. Therefore, the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In the 14th embodiment, the normal state is configured as the most disadvantageous gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as in the thirteenth embodiment, the normal state may be configured as one of the advantageous states in which the small hit game is easily executed. That is, in addition to the latent state A and the latent state B, the normal state may also be a state advantageous for the player. With such a configuration, the number of advantageous states increases, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the 14th embodiment, when the number of reserved balls of the 2nd special symbol is 1 or more in a state other than the latent state, a long variation is always set as the variation pattern of the 1st special symbol. It is not limited to this. For example, when switching from a right-handed game to a left-handed game, such as immediately after the end of a big hit or when the number of probable changes has elapsed in the latent state, the first special symbol lottery for a specific number of times (for example, 4 times) is performed. Even if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more, the long fluctuation may not be set (the fluctuation time of 20 seconds or less is set). That is, as a fluctuation pattern scenario, when the fluctuation display executed for the first time after the end of the jackpot or the 100th time after the end of the jackpot is the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the fluctuation pattern is not limited to the situation of the reserved ball. It may be configured to set a scenario in which a fluctuation time of 20 seconds or less is selected. Further, in this case, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is extremely short (for example, 0.1 seconds) within the range of 5 times or less after the end of the big hit and 100 to 105 times after the end of the big hit. You may. With this configuration, after the jackpot ends and before the variation display of the first first special symbol ends, the reserved ball of the second special symbol can be set to 0, so that the regular game method can be used. Despite this, it is possible to prevent both the first special symbol and the second special symbol from being in a disadvantageous state of undergoing long fluctuations.

In the 14th embodiment, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more in a state other than the latent state, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is lengthened, so that the state is other than the latent state. The configuration is such that the game efficiency is deteriorated when the right-handed game is performed in the game state, and the irregular game method in which the right-handed game is performed in a state other than the latent state is suppressed, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. For example, in a state other than the latent probability state, the first special symbol may be configured to perform a long fluctuation when the total number of reserved balls is 5 or more. When the regular game method (left-handed game) is performed in a state other than the latent state, only the reserved balls of the first special symbol are accumulated, so that the maximum number of reserved balls is four. On the other hand, if an irregular game method of hitting right in a game state other than the latent state is performed, the game ball enters the first ball opening 6400D1 and the second ball opening 6400D2 alternately, as a result. The number of reserved balls exceeds five. Therefore, by continuing right-handedness, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol form an extremely unfavorable gaming state in which long fluctuations occur. It is possible to suppress the method. At first glance, the number of reserved balls will be 4 or less by stopping right-handed when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started and restarting right-handed when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is completed. It seems that the method of playing the game by adjusting to is established. However, when this method is performed, as the number of lottery of the first special symbol increases, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol that undergoes long fluctuation regardless of the lottery result and the number of reserved balls increases, so that the first special symbol At the time when the lottery is performed four times, the number of reserved balls is almost four. Therefore, after that, the first special symbol also has a long fluctuation, which forms a disadvantageous state in which the game efficiency is remarkably poor. As a result, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a right-handed strike is performed in a state other than the latent state.

In the 14th embodiment, the probability of the first special symbol being a small hit is made higher than the probability of the first special symbol being a small hit, so that the lottery of the first special symbol is mainly executed. The probability state A, in which the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed, is configured to be more advantageous than the above, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to making the small hit probability different depending on the type of special symbol, for example, in the small hit of the first special symbol, in one small hit game than in the small hit of the second special symbol. By configuring so that the number of game balls that can be won is likely to decrease, the probability state A in which the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed may be configured to be more advantageous. .. In addition, instead of or in addition to these, the number of prize balls based on the entry into the second specific winning opening 650a, which is opened when the first special symbol is a small hit, is the second special symbol small hit. By reducing the number of prize balls based on the entry into the first specific winning opening 65a, which is opened in the case of, the latent state A in which the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed is more advantageous. It may be configured to be. By applying these modifications, the degree of advantage can be changed in a more multifaceted manner, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<15th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 354 to 359. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the probabilistic state (special symbol) is set by ending the time saving state in the state where the probabilistic state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set. In the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol (low probability state of the normal symbol) is set, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the gaming state during the jackpot fluctuation is the latent state. It was configured to be (an advantageous state in which a small hit game is easily executed). Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment described above, the number of time reductions is completed before the number of probability changes in the probability change state, so that the probability change state is changed to the latent state (an advantageous state in which the small hit game is easily executed). It was configured to migrate.

On the other hand, in the fifteenth embodiment, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the probable change state, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation, so that the number of time reductions is reduced. Was subtracted so that it is possible to shift to the latent state during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation. That is, it is configured so that it is possible to form an advantageous state in which the small hit game is easily executed even during the execution of the big hit fluctuation. Further, by adopting the same state transition as in the eleventh embodiment, the gaming state after the end of the big hit is more likely to be more advantageous in the latent probability state than in the probability change state. As a result, when the remaining time until the end of the big hit fluctuation is short (even if the small hit game becomes easy to be executed, the big hit game is started with almost no execution of the small hit game). Even if there is, it is possible to make the player think that he wants to finish the number of time reductions. Therefore, it is possible to realize the playability of positively executing the lottery of the second special symbol during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation.

The pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment in terms of configuration, that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and that the main control device 110 The point is that the configuration of ROM 202 has been partially changed. The eleventh implementation of other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the form. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the eleventh embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 354 and 355, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. 354 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 in the fifteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 354, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth embodiment has a right region (right-handed game) of the game board 13 with respect to the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment described above. The difference is that the composition of the area where the ball launched by the ball flows down) is different. Further, the difference is that the central first ball entry port 64c is provided in place of the upper first ball entry port 64b1 and the lower first ball entry port 64b2.

As shown in FIG. 354, a ball path ZK1 through which a game ball can flow down (pass) is formed in the right region of the game board 13, and a through gate 67 and a variable winning device 1650 are formed in order from the upstream side of the ball path ZK1. , A second entrance 640 to which the electric accessory 640a is attached, and a variable winning device for small hits 2650 which is opened during the small hit game are arranged. Further, above the second entrance 640, a right first entrance 64r is provided, which triggers a lottery for the first special symbol when a game ball enters. The first entry port 64r on the right of the game ball flowing down the ball path ZK1 is at a position where it is difficult for the game ball that has rolled along the ball path ZK1 to enter (interference with the ball path ZK1 and other game balls). ) Is provided at a position where the ball can enter only when the ball is played. Therefore, 90% or more of the game balls hit to the right enter the second entrance 640, or pass through the second entrance 640 to the small hit variable winning device 2650 or the out opening 66. Enter the ball. The ratio of game balls entering the right first entrance 64r is about 1 in 20.

The variable winning device 1650 arranged in the ball path ZK1 is a device that opens and closes according to a predetermined opening scenario when a big hit is won in a lottery of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). The opening / closing door 1650f is variable between the specific winning opening 1650a, the open state in which the ball can enter the specific winning opening 1650a, and the closed state in which it is more difficult (impossible) to enter the ball than the open state. And, every time one ball enters during the jackpot game, 15 balls are paid out as prize balls.

The second entry port 640 has an opening formed so as to cut out a part of the lower surface of the ball flow of the ball path ZK1, and each time one ball enters, one prize ball is used. The ball is configured to be paid out. Further, as in the first embodiment described above, it is configured to trigger a lottery (variation) of the second special symbol. The opening of the second ball entry port 640 is covered with the electric accessory 640a, and it is more difficult (not possible) to enter the electric accessory 640a in the open state in which the ball can enter and in the open state. By variably controlling the closed state to be possible), the ease of entering the ball can be made different.

In the state where the electric accessory 640a covers the opening of the second entry port 640 (closed state), the ball flowing down the ball path ZK1 passes over the electric accessory 640a and goes to the downstream side of the ball path ZK1. It is configured to flow down. That is, in the ball path ZK1, the game ball that flows down to the downstream side of the second entry port 640 is a game ball that did not enter (cannot) enter the second entry port 640.

Of the ball path ZK1, the ball flowing down on the downstream side of the second entrance 640 reaches the small hit variable winning device 2650. The small hit variable winning device 2650 is composed of a small hit winning opening 2650a and an opening / closing door 2650f for covering the opening of the small hit winning opening 2650a, and the small hit winning opening 2650a is a ball path. It has an opening formed so as to cut out a part of the lower surface of the ball flow of ZK1, and is configured so that 10 balls are paid out as prize balls each time one ball enters. ..

This variable winning device for small hits 2650 operates during a small hit game executed when a small hit is won in a special symbol (second special symbol) lottery, and the opening / closing door 2650f is predetermined. By opening the ball in the open scenario, the ball is variably controlled into an open state in which the ball can enter and a closed state in which the ball is more difficult (impossible) to enter than the open state. In the fifteenth embodiment, as in the eleventh embodiment described above, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, a small hit is won with a high probability (for example, 59/60). ..

In the closed state where the opening / closing door 2650f closes the small hit winning opening 2650a, the ball flowing down the ball path ZK1 passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 2650f and flows down toward the out opening 66. .. The upper surface (ball passage surface) of the opening / closing door 2650f is provided with a delay means for delaying the flow of the ball, and is configured to take one second for the ball to pass over the opening / closing door 2650f. .. By providing this delay means, it is possible to secure the required ball transit time in a smaller space. Although detailed description is omitted, in the fifteenth embodiment, as a delay means, the door is opened and closed so as to have a ball passage having a high friction resistance (friction coefficient) (higher friction resistance than the other ball passage surfaces of the ball path ZK1). An uneven portion on the upper surface of the door 2650f is formed so that the ball can get over it.

As the delay means, a ball delay passage (for example, a passage in which the ball path is zigzag-folded) is formed by devising the structure of the ball passage surface, or a ball delay passage is formed by devising the material of the ball passage surface. Anything can be used as long as it forms a shape or delays the passage time for the sphere to pass through a predetermined section.

Further, a ball launched by a left-handed game (a game aimed at the left area (left area) of the variable display device unit 80) enters each winning opening (ball entry opening) provided in the above-mentioned ball path ZK1. Nails are planted below the game board 13 (below the first ball entrance 64 and to the right) as a regulating member (regulating means) for regulating the spillage. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with different games for the right-handed game and the left-handed game, so that it is possible to provide the player with a game that does not get tired (hard to get tired). ..

Next, the details of the ball flow in the right region in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 355. FIG. 355 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a ball flow in a state in which a time saving state or a probable change state is set as a game state, and FIG. 355 (b) is a schematic diagram in which a latent probable state is set as a game state. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the ball flow in the state which is being done.

The ball path ZK1 of the game board 13 of the fifteenth embodiment has a ball passing time from the through gate 67 to the second entry port 640 (until the ball passing through the through gate 67 reaches the second entry port 640). The time required) is configured to be 0.5 seconds. Further, the ball passing time on the electric accessory 640a covering the second entry port 640 (the time required for the ball to pass (flow) from the upstream end to the downstream end of the electric accessory 640a) is set to 1 second. is doing.

Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the fifteenth embodiment, when the high probability state (time saving state, probability variation state) of the normal symbol is set as the gaming state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.1 seconds. It is configured to set a time of about 0.4 seconds, that is, a time shorter than the ball passing time from the through gate 67 to the second entry port 640. Further, when a winner is won by a lottery of ordinary symbols, the opening operation of 0.2 seconds is executed twice with a closing period of 0.8 seconds. That is, it is configured to execute an opening operation in which a closing period shorter than the time (1 second) for the ball to pass over the electric accessory 640a is set.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 355 (a), when the right-handed game is played when the time saving state is set as the game state, most of the balls enter the second entrance 640. Further, in the fifteenth embodiment, since the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set in less than half of the ball passing time (0.5 seconds) from the through gate 67 to the second entry port 640, the normal symbol is set. Even if one lottery is held in which the result of the lottery is out of order, by winning the next lottery, the ball that caused the out-of-lottery can be entered into the second entrance 640. can.

On the other hand, when the low probability state (normal state, latent state) of the normal symbol is set as the game state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 3 to 5 seconds, that is, from the through gate 67 to the second entrance. It is configured so that a time longer than the ball passing time (0.5 seconds) up to 640 is set. Further, if a winner is won by a lottery of ordinary symbols, the opening operation for 0.04 seconds is executed once. That is, the ball is configured to be able to enter the second entry port 640 for only 0.04 seconds for a period of 3 to 5 seconds.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 355 (b), when the right-handed game is played when the latent state is set as the game state, most of the balls do not enter the second entrance 640. The ball will flow down toward the small hit winning device 2650. In the fifteenth embodiment, the time for the ball to pass on the electric accessory 640a is set to 1 second, and the ball is set to be fired once every 0.6 seconds. Therefore, by continuously performing the right-handed game, one ball is configured to always stay on the electric accessory 640a.

With this configuration, if a winner is won in the lottery of the normal symbol, the ball can be surely entered into the second entrance 640 and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the lottery of the second special symbol is not executed in the gaming state (probability change state, time saving state, latent probability state) in which the hitting game is executed. As described above, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, a small hit is won with a high probability, so in the latent state, the game ball is entered into the second entrance 640 at intervals of 3 to 5 seconds. It is possible to obtain a prize ball by inserting a game ball into the small hit winning device 2650. That is, the small hit game is frequently executed by the lottery of the second special symbol, and the prize ball based on the small hit is frequently obtained, forming an advantageous state. On the other hand, in the time-saving state or the probable change state, almost all the game balls hit to the right enter the second entrance 640 (or the right first entrance 64r), so that the small hit game is frequently executed. However, it becomes extremely difficult for the game ball to reach the small hit winning device 2650 during the execution period of the small hit game. Therefore, in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the game ball can only be efficiently entered into the second entry port 640 (or the right first entry opening 64r), and thus the submarine state is reached. The degree of advantage is lower than the probability state (it becomes difficult to win the prize ball).

Next, with reference to FIG. 356, various operations when a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol during the probabilistic state, which is a characteristic operation in the fifteenth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 356 is a timing chart schematically showing the game state of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth embodiment and the content of the variation display effect executed in response to the variation status of each special symbol. Here, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment will be briefly described. Similar to each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a variable display (dynamic display) for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol and a variable display for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol. (Dynamic display) and can be executed at the same time (in parallel).

As shown in FIG. 356, the chance zone display (see FIG. 297 (b)) is set as the effect mode in the probabilistic state. Also, during the probabilistic state, as described above, most of the game balls launched by right-handed hitting enter the second entrance 640, and rarely (for example, at a rate of 1 in 20) to the right. Enter the ball into the first entry port 64r. Therefore, during the probability change state, the number of time reductions is basically subtracted by executing the lottery of the second special symbol. In addition, if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol during the probability change state, the probability change state is looped at a rate of about 75% and the time is shortened at a rate of 20%, as in the eleventh embodiment described above. It is configured to transition (fall) to. In other words, even if a big hit occurs in the probable change state, it is unlikely that the state will shift to an advantageous latent probable state. You can have them play the game with a stronger expectation. Even if the game ball enters the right first entry slot 64r and the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, the small hit will not be won, but in the probable change state, as described above. Since it is extremely difficult to insert the game ball into the small hit winning device 2650, the variation of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol are executed in duplicate (simultaneously), thereby shortening the time. It is possible to give the player the impression that the number of times can be subtracted more. Therefore, in the probabilistic state, the more the game ball enters the right first entry port 64r, the more the player can have the impression that the player is approaching the latent state. It is possible to improve the interest in.

Then, in a state in which a probabilistic state (high probability state of a special symbol, high probability state of a normal symbol) is set, when the number of time reductions ends, as described above, the state shifts to a more advantageous latent state and frequently. The small hit game of the second special symbol is executed, and a very advantageous state is formed in which the game ball can be easily won by the small hit winning device 2650. In the latent state, when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, the player will not win a small hit, so the player will have the impression that the remaining number of probability changes is unnecessarily subtracted once. It can be subtracted. Therefore, in the probabilistic state, it is possible to realize the playability that the game ball is expected to enter the right first entrance 64r more, whereas in the latent state, the right first entrance 64r can be realized. It is possible to realize the playability that makes it expected that the game ball does not enter. That is, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the role of the right first ball entry port 64r (whether or not the ball entry port is preferable or not) can be switched according to the game state. ..

Further, in the fifteenth embodiment, by making the opening control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 different for each game state, the variation display of the second special symbol can be displayed even in the time saving state or the probable change state. It was mainly configured to be executed. That is, even if the lottery of the first special symbol is executed without setting the long variation of the second special symbol in the time saving state or the probable change state as in the eleventh embodiment described above, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. Even if it is done, it is configured so that a relatively short fluctuation time is set. As a result, in the probabilistic state, the playability aiming at the most advantageous latent state is realized by digesting the number of time reductions by the lottery of the second special symbol. By adopting this configuration, it is possible to realize the playability of digesting the time saving number of times of the second special symbol during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 356, in the state where the probabilistic state is set as the game state, it is easy to execute the lottery of the second special symbol by the right-handed game, and the rate is relatively low (for example, the fired game ball). At a rate of 1/20), the lottery for the first special symbol will also be executed. That is, in the probabilistic state, since the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the electric accessory 640a is easily opened, the game ball is easily entered into the second entrance 640, and a small hit. It forms a gaming state in which it becomes difficult for the gaming ball to enter the winning device 2650. In this probable change state, if the lottery of the first special symbol becomes a big hit, as shown in FIG. 356, during the big hit change, only the lottery of the second special symbol is executed by right-handed. In the fifteenth embodiment, if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol in the probable change state, a long fluctuation of 600 seconds is executed. During the big hit change in this probable change state, the change display of the first special symbol is interrupted every time a small hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol. As a result, it is possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol a plurality of times during the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, during the execution of the jackpot variation of the first special symbol, it is possible to execute the variation display of the second special symbol for the remaining number of time reductions. In this case, since the jackpot of the first special symbol is changing (the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is on), the lottery of the second special symbol does not win the jackpot more than once (the lottery result is missed or It will be a small hit). Therefore, while the long fluctuation of the first special symbol is being executed, there is no possibility that the lottery of the second special symbol will result in a big hit and a probable change state or a time saving state will be set. This makes it possible to reliably subtract the number of time reductions each time the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, which is an extremely advantageous state. In addition, as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, 90% or more is set to the fluctuation time of 1 second, so by continuously executing right-handed during the long fluctuation of the first special symbol, the long fluctuation Regardless of the number of time reductions at the start of, it is possible to end the number of time reductions during long fluctuations. During the execution of the jackpot fluctuation (long fluctuation) of the first special symbol, the super chance zone effect (see FIG. 357) described later is executed. That is, by executing the right-handed strike and ending the time reduction number of times, the effect mode for showing the transition to the advantageous latent state is executed.

As shown in FIG. 356, during the execution of the super chance zone effect (that is, during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol in the probabilistic state), the lottery of the second special symbol is performed until the number of time reductions elapses (ends). When executed, the gaming state is changed from the probabilistic state to the latent state. That is, the state in which it is difficult to reach the game ball to the small hit winning device 2650 shifts to the state in which it is easy to reach the small hit winning device 2650. Therefore, until the big hit is started, it is possible to enjoy the advantageous game in which the small hit game can be frequently won and the prize ball based on the prize in the small hit winning device 2650 can be obtained. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. After shifting to the latent state, the RUSH effect (see FIG. 7B) is executed as in the first embodiment and the like. Further, by starting the jackpot after the latent state is reached, the gaming state (number of time reductions) after the jackpot ends can be set with reference to the latent state. In other words, it is possible to treat as a jackpot winner in a latent state where the rate of looping the same state is high (at a rate of 75%, the latent state is set again after the big hit ends), so the end of the big hit. It can be configured so that there is a high possibility that the latent state will continue even afterwards. Therefore, when the super chance zone production is started, the player's interest in the game can be improved. If you get a big hit in the lottery of the 2nd special symbol, it is difficult to enter the right 1st entrance 64r even if you hit right, and the fluctuation time of the big hit fluctuation of the 2nd special symbol is also Because it is short, it is difficult to digest the remaining number of time reductions by the lottery of the first special symbol. Therefore, during the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol, the normal jackpot effect is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 357, a characteristic effect in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. First, the super-chance zone effect will be described with reference to FIG. 357 (a). This super chance zone effect is an effect executed during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol in the probable change state. When this super chance zone effect is executed, the character 811 discovers the carrot images NG1 to NG3 that imitate the carrot, and at the same time, "Discover the carrot !! Eat up!" For the display area HR1. Is displayed. Further, the characters "remaining 15 lines" are displayed on the display area HR2. Further, the characters "Entering the super chance zone !!" are displayed for the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, it is possible to easily understand that the character 811 is more advantageous to the player by eating up all the carrots shown in the carrot image. In the fifteenth embodiment, after the super chance zone effect is started, the effect that the character 811 eats one carrot is executed every time the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. This makes it easy for the player to understand that the remaining number of time reductions and the remaining number of carrots are linked (synchronized). In other words, it is easy to understand that by eating all the carrots, you will move to a latent state. Therefore, it is possible to realize a staging mode that is easy for the player to understand.

In the probabilistic state, if the character 811 can eat the carrot (the number of time reductions has ended) before the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol ends, as shown in FIG. 357, the display area HR1 However, the characters "Completed !! RUSH start !!" are displayed, and the characters "0 remaining" are displayed for the display area HR2. In addition, the characters "RUSH rush !!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the player has entered (shifted) into the most advantageous latent state (RUSH state).

In the fifteenth embodiment, as a super chance zone effect, the character 811 eats one carrot for each change, so that the remaining number of lottery until the latent state is reached can be suggested. However, it is not limited to this. The embodiment is not limited to this embodiment as long as it can suggest the remaining number of times. For example, as in the twelfth embodiment, the remaining number of time reductions is suggested by the height of climbing the rocky mountain (the remaining distance to the summit). It may be configured to be used.

In the fifteenth embodiment, as the super-chance zone effect, an effect suggesting the remaining number of lottery until the end of the time saving number is executed, but instead of or in addition to this, the first special symbol It may be configured to execute an effect (for example, a countdown display of the remaining time) suggesting the remaining time until the jackpot fluctuation ends. By constructing in this way, it is possible to play the right-handed game more seriously in an attempt to end the time reduction number before the suggested remaining time elapses, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. Can be made to.

<Electrical configuration in the fifteenth embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 358 and 359. First, the details of the second random number table 202c in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 358. As shown in FIG. 358, in the second hit random number table 202c in the fifteenth embodiment, the random number value (counter value) determined to be a hit of the normal symbol in the low probability state of the normal symbol is "0 to 230". 230 random number values (counter values) are specified. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 358, 231 random number values (counter values) of "0 to 231" are defined as random number values (counter values) determined to be hits of the normal symbol in the time saving state of the normal symbol. There is.

That is, in the fifteenth embodiment, both in the time saving state of the normal symbol and in the normal state of the normal symbol, each time the through gate 67 is passed, the normal symbol is almost hit. As a result, regardless of whether the right-handed game is played in the time-saving state or the probable change state, or the right-handed game is performed in the latent probable state, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened to the second. It is possible to form a state in which the ball can enter the ball entry port 640. As described above, in the time saving state and the probabilistic state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol becomes short and the opening time becomes long, while in the latent state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol becomes long and the opening time becomes short. .. As a result, almost all the game balls that have reached the second entrance 640 can be entered into the second entrance 640 in the time saving state or the probability change state. On the other hand, in the latent state, the game ball easily passes through the second ball opening 640 while the second ball opening 640 is closed, so that the game ball enters the small hit winning device 2650. It becomes easier to do. Therefore, it is possible to form a state that is more advantageous to the player than the time saving state or the probable change state.

Next, the time saving / probability variation table 202f2 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 359 (a). FIG. 359 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time saving / probability variation table 202f2. As shown in FIG. 359 (a), when the time saving / probability variation table 202f2 in the fifteenth embodiment becomes a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is long per 600 seconds regardless of the value of the variable type counter CS1. While the fluctuation is set, if the lottery of the first special symbol is missed, the deviation middle fluctuation for 10 seconds is set. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 359 (a), as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol, a relatively short fluctuation pattern of 1 second to 20 seconds is defined in association with each other. As a result, if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol in the probable change state, it is possible to continuously execute only the lottery of the second special symbol by continuing right-handed striking. Therefore, by continuously hitting the right in the probable change state, the lottery of the second special symbol can be performed at relatively short intervals, and the number of time reductions can be exhausted. Therefore, it is possible to easily shift to the most advantageous latent state during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation.

Next, the latent probability table 202f3 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 359 (b). FIG. 359 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the latency table 202f3. As shown in FIG. 359 (b), in the latent probability table 202f3 in the fifteenth embodiment, a long fluctuation of 600 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol regardless of the lottery result, while the second As the fluctuation time of the special symbol, a relatively short fluctuation time of 20 seconds or less is specified. Therefore, it forms a more advantageous gaming state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is more likely to be executed than in the latent probability state or the probability change state. That is, since only the small hit game of the second special symbol is executed and the chances of entering the small hit winning device 2650 increase, the right until the probability variation number ends or the big hit is reached. Form a game state in which it is possible to continue to acquire a large number of prize balls by hitting.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment, by performing a right-handed strike in the probabilistic state and the time-saving state, the second game ball is suppressed from reaching the small hit winning device 2650. The board surface configuration and the control of the electric accessory 640a in the time-saving state are configured so that the lottery of the special symbol can be easily executed. On the other hand, in the latent state, by hitting right, the game ball is configured to form an advantageous game state in which the game ball enters the second entrance 640 and the small hit winning device 2650 in a well-balanced manner. .. That is, in the game state other than the normal state, the game ball is configured to proceed with the game mainly by executing the lottery of the second special symbol, and the game ball is transferred to the small hit winning device 2650 in the state other than the latent state. It is configured to prevent the ball from entering. With such a configuration, in a game state other than the normal state, it is possible to realize an easy-to-understand game property in which the game progresses by lottery of the second special symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth embodiment, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the probable change state, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation, thereby shortening the time. The number of times is subtracted so that it is possible to shift to the latent state during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation. That is, it is configured so that it is possible to form an advantageous state in which the small hit game is easily executed even during the execution of the big hit fluctuation. Furthermore, by configuring it so that it is possible to digest the time saving state and shift to the latent state during the execution of the big hit fluctuation, when the big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, it becomes the latent state. It becomes easy to start the jackpot from. That is, since the gaming state after the end of the big hit can be set with reference to the latent state, it can be configured so that the latent state is likely to be continued even after the end of the big hit. .. As a result, regardless of the remaining number of times in the time saving state, we have realized extremely special and novel playability that continues right-handed even during the jackpot fluctuation with the aim of ending the time saving number during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol. can do. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the fifteenth embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern selection table (time reduction / probability variation table 202f2) common to the time reduction state and the probability variation state, but the configuration is not limited to this. do not have. For example, in the case of a time saving state, the fluctuation time may be shortened when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol. This is because there is no merit for the player even if the number of time reductions is exhausted in the time reduction state.

In the fifteenth embodiment, when a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol in the probable change state, only a long fluctuation of 600 seconds is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an arbitrary fluctuation time is set. You may. The shorter the fluctuation time, the higher the possibility that the jackpot will start before the number of time reductions is completed even if the lottery of the second special symbol is continuously executed during the probability change state. When the jackpot fluctuation of the symbol is executed (when the super chance zone production is started), the game can be played with a feeling of tension. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. On the other hand, the longer the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the easier it is to end the number of time reductions during the jackpot fluctuation, so when the super chance zone is started, it gives a sense of security. You can play a game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Modified example of the eleventh embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the eleventh embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIG. 360. In the eleventh embodiment described above, the river breakthrough effect (see FIGS. 298 and 299) is executed every time the number of times of time reduction reaches the number of lottery that may elapse (end). In addition to this, in this modified example, the river breakthrough effect is configured to be executed as an effect suggesting that the jackpot was won during the chance zone (the time saving state of the normal symbol). In addition, at the start of the river breakthrough effect, the privilege (reward) that can be given to the player when the river is broken through is notified in advance. As a result, it is possible to give the player a wider sense of expectation.

First, with reference to FIG. 360 (a), a display mode at the start of the river breakthrough effect in this modified example will be described. FIG. 360 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the river breakthrough effect executed at the number of lottery times where the number of time reductions may end. As shown in FIG. 360 (a), in the river breakthrough effect in this modified example, the privilege (reward) given to the player when the river is breached in the current river breakthrough effect is displayed for the display area HR1. It is configured to be. The example of FIG. 360 (a) illustrates a case where it is notified that RUSH will be given as a privilege (shift to a latent state) by successfully breaking through the river. That is, it indicates a state in which the characters "reaching the first river !! RUSH by breaking through! Ending by falling ..." are displayed for the display area HR1. From this display content, it is possible to make the player understand that the player will enter the RUSH by breaking through the river, so that the player can be made to pay more attention to the result of the river breakthrough effect. In addition to the example of FIG. 360 (a), for example, the suggestion content of "continue by breaking through! End by falling ..." and the suggestion content of "big hit by breaking through! End by falling ..." are provided. There is. In this way, by giving variation to the suggestion content, it is possible to make the player's expectation for the river breakthrough effect different according to the suggestion content. For example, in the case of the display content of "RUSH by breaking through! Ending by falling ...", there is a big difference in the degree of advantage between the case of breaking through and the case of falling, so it is expected to break through more strongly. Can be done. In addition, if the display content is "Big hit with breakthrough! End with fall ...", either the big hit happened by chance or the number of time reductions ends at the timing when the number of time reductions may end. Therefore, it can be made to feel that the possibility of being a big hit is low. Therefore, even if the time saving state ends, the shock can be alleviated. Further, by executing the effect of breaking through the river in this display mode, it is possible to give a great surprise and joy to the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In this modification, as described above, the river breakthrough effect can be executed even at the timing when the time saving state is unlikely to end. That is, it is configured so that the river breakthrough effect is executed in the case of a big hit and a part of the case of the off (for example, 1/100 in the case of the off). The display mode in this case will be described with reference to FIG. 360 (b). FIG. 360 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode in the river breakthrough effect performed in a part of the case of a big hit and the case of a miss. As shown in FIG. 360 (b), when there is no possibility that the number of time reductions will end, the river image KG in a form thinner than the normal river breakthrough effect is displayed. In addition, the characters "Ogawa found !! If you jump over, big hit or continue !!" are displayed for the display area HR1. From these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the breakthrough of the river itself is confirmed. In the case of a big hit, the big hit is notified when the river breaks through, while in the case of a miss, the continuation is notified.

As described above, in this modification, even if a big hit occurs during the chance zone, the big hit is notified by the river breakthrough effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give a sense of unity to the production in the chance zone. Therefore, it is possible to realize a staging mode that is easier for the player to understand. Further, in this modification, at the start of the river breakthrough effect, the privilege (reward) given when the river is broken through is notified in advance. With this configuration, the player's expectation for the river breakthrough effect can be changed according to the content of the privilege, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, at the start of the river breakthrough effect executed in the case of a big hit or a miss, the big hit type in the case of a big hit and the number of time reductions set after the big hit may be suggested. More specifically, for example, four characters, white, green, and red, are provided as the character color of "big hit". In the case of white, the possibility of a normal big hit is high, and in the case of green, the possibility of a probable big hit. If it is high and red, it may be configured so that it is a probable change jackpot and the possibility of a small number of time reductions (0 or 10 times) is high (that is, it is easy to shift to a latent state). With this configuration, when green characters or red characters are displayed, it is possible to play the game with a stronger expectation that a big hit will be notified, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. be able to.

<16th Embodiment>
Next, the 16th embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 361 to 423. The same elements as those of the above-described embodiments will be repeatedly described for convenience of explanation. Further, for convenience of explanation, the contents described in each of the above-described embodiments may be duplicated with different reference numerals. Specifically, in each of the above-described embodiments, each control process is described by adding an S reference numeral, but in the present embodiment, the C reference numeral is attached to the description, and the same process can also be described. , Give a different number and explain again. The contents described in each of the above-described embodiments are applied to the parts where detailed explanations of the same elements as those described in the above-described embodiments are omitted.

In the gaming machine of the 16th embodiment, a jackpot game (design jackpot game) is executed by winning a jackpot by a special symbol lottery as an opportunity to execute a privilege game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player. A small hit is won by the opportunity (first opportunity) and a lottery of a special symbol, and the game ball is opened in a specific area (open operation during the small hit game) in the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 361). The jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed based on the passage through the V region (not shown) provided in the above (second trigger), and the jackpot game has two triggers.

With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a jackpot game at various occasions, so that it is possible to provide a game with improved game playability. Further, in the 16th embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is configured so as to be easier to win a small hit than the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). Then, during the time saving state, which is a game state that can be set after the end of the big hit game, the lottery of the special figure 2 is easily executed. As a result, when the time saving state is set, the jackpot game can be more easily executed than when the normal state is set. That is, the lottery of the special figure 1 is mainly executed in the normal state, whereas the lottery of the special figure 2 is mainly executed in the time saving state, so that the above-mentioned second opportunity can be easily established. .. Therefore, since the time saving state can be set to the gaming state which is advantageous to the player, the player can be enthusiastically played with the aim of setting the time saving state.

In addition, in the 16th embodiment, in the state where the normal state is set, the period in which the lottery of the special figure 2 is likely to be executed can be temporarily displayed. A detailed explanation will be described later with reference to FIG. 361, but when a specific hit (long open hit) is won by a normal symbol lottery in a normal state, the electric accessory 640a is used for a long period of time (1.5 seconds). It is configured to be open, and a period during which the ball can easily enter the second entrance (winning opening) 640, which is the trigger for executing the special drawing 2 lottery, is set. As a result, the player who is playing the game in the normal state can also execute the special figure 2 lottery, so that the game can be played without executing the special figure 2 lottery (without shifting to the time saving state). It is possible to suppress getting bored with.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the continuation condition (end condition) of the time saving state set after the end of the big hit game, at least the first condition (for example, the special figure 2 variation is executed 5 times during the time saving state, or the small hit game is performed. End) and the second condition (for example, the cumulative total of special figure 1 fluctuation and special figure 2 fluctuation) during the time saving state, which is easier to continue (difficult to end) than the first condition. It is configured so that it can be set to execute once or end the small hit game). Then, there are cases where the V jackpot game is executed based on the special figure 2 lottery executed in the normal state and cases where the V jackpot game is executed based on the special figure 2 lottery executed in the time saving state. The setting ratio of the continuation condition (end condition) of the state is different. Specifically, after the end of the V jackpot game executed based on the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state is more than after the end of the V jackpot game executed based on the special figure 2 lottery in the time saving state. , It is configured so that the continuation condition (end condition) that the time saving state is easy to continue (difficult to end) can be easily set.

With this configuration, the player can be interested not only in the lottery result of the special symbol (special symbol) but also in the game state when the special symbol lottery is executed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, in the 16th embodiment, as described above, a gaming state (normal state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the time saving state is set, as compared with the case where the gaming state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set. Is configured so that it is easier to set a time saving state that is easier to continue after the end of the V jackpot game. Therefore, the player can be enthusiastically played the game regardless of whether the normal state is set or the time saving state is set.

In addition, in the 16th embodiment, a maximum of 4 prize information of the 2nd special symbol (Special Figure 2) can be stored and stored, and the lottery result of the final change of the special figure 2 in the time saving state is shown. It is configured to notify the player of the pre-reading result of the winning information of the special figure 2 which is held and stored by using the variation effect. That is, as a result of the effect of the variation effect executed during the time saving state, in addition to the lottery result of the special figure variation, the special figure 2 lottery executed after the gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state (to the normal state). It is configured to notify the result of the lottery for the winning information of the special figure 2 which is held and stored at the time of the transition. With this configuration, if the effect result of the variable effect is an effect result indicating that a hit (for example, a small hit) has been won, whether the small hit winner this time was won in a short time state or a normal state. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether or not the player has won.

Further, as described above, in the 16th embodiment, the big hit game (V big hit game) executed via the small hit game in the case where the small hit is won in the time saving state and the case where the small hit is won in the normal state. The ease of continuing the time saving state set after the end of) is different. Specifically, the special figure in the normal state is better when the small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery. It is configured so that it is easier to set a continuation condition (end condition) that makes it easier to continue (difficult to end) in a time-saving state than when a small hit is won in two lottery, and further, after shifting to the normal state. When the pre-reading result corresponding to the special figure 2 lottery to be executed is the determination result that the small hit in which the time saving state is easy to continue is won, the variation effect showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 final change in the time saving state is used. , The look-ahead result (the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 lottery executed after shifting from the time saving state to the normal state) is configured to be notified.

With this configuration, when it is notified that a small hit has been won by the fluctuation effect executed during the time saving state, the ratio of the winning small hit is the small hit that the time saving state is likely to continue. Can be enhanced. Here, in recent gaming machines (for example, pachinko machine 10), a ratio in which a gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, a time saving state or a probable change state) is set after the jackpot game is completed in order to improve the soundness of the game. By setting the (so-called continuation rate) low (for example, 65% or less), the gambling of the game may be suppressed. In such a gaming machine, for example, even if a hit (for example, a big hit or a small hit) is won in a state where an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is set, the advantageous gaming state is again set after the winning game is completed. Since the set ratio is suppressed, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to give a sense of expectation to the hit notification effect during the advantageous gaming state.

On the other hand, in the 16th embodiment, in the hit notification effect (variable effect) executed during the advantageous gaming state (time saving state), the winning (small hit) is won during the advantageous gaming state (time saving state). In addition to the notification of, in the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 lottery executed after shifting from the advantageous gaming state (time saving state) to the disadvantageous gaming state (normal state), if the small hit that the time saving state is easy to continue is won in advance. It is also configured to notify when it is determined. As a result, it is possible to increase the winning ratio of small hits in which the time saving state is likely to continue when the hit notification effect is executed during the advantageous gaming state (time saving state), and the player's expectation for the hit notification effect during the advantageous gaming state. You can enhance the feeling.

Further, in the 16th embodiment, the final variation of the time saving state (special figure 2 variation) or the special figure 2 variation executed after the end of the time saving state (after the transition to the normal state) (residual feature existing at the time of transition to the normal state). It is configured to execute a variation effect that makes it difficult for the player to understand which of the special figure 2 variations corresponding to the hold in FIG. 2) was won. Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the 16th embodiment, in addition to the lottery result of the fluctuation, after the end of the time saving state (after the transition to the normal state) by the fluctuation effect executed corresponding to the final fluctuation period of the time saving state. It is configured to notify the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 fluctuation (the special figure 2 fluctuation corresponding to the remaining special figure 2 hold that exists at the time of transition to the normal state), and after the end of the time saving state (after the transition to the normal state). The fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation to be executed (the special figure 2 fluctuation corresponding to the remaining special figure 2 hold existing at the time of transition to the normal state) is set to a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the short-time fluctuation ends. Up to, it is configured to display the effect result of the variation effect executed corresponding to the final variation period in the time saving state. In this way, the final change in the time saving state and the special figure 2 change executed after the end of the time saving state (after the transition to the normal state) (the special figure 2 change corresponding to the remaining special figure 2 hold existing at the time of the transition to the normal state). By executing a series of effects using the period during which, and displaying the effect results of the series of effects across multiple variations, this series of effects corresponds to which special figure variation. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the result of the special drawing lottery is notified.

First, the configuration of the game board 13 in the 16th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 361. An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 12) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 361) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 361) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 361) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable change jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or an off symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors suggests various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

The first winning opening 64 is arranged below the variable display unit 80. The variable display unit 80 is arranged so as to divide the game area on the game board 13 to the left and right, and the left side of the variable display unit 80 is the left flow path through which the game ball can flow down, and the right side of the variable display unit 80 is the game. A right flow path through which the sphere can flow is formed. The game ball that has flowed down the left channel is configured so as not to flow down the right channel. The first winning opening 64 is arranged at a position where both the game ball flowing down the left channel and the game ball flowing down the right channel can enter.

The second winning opening 640 is arranged at a position where the game ball flowing down the right flow path is easier to enter than the game ball flowing down the left flow path. The second winning opening 640 has a horizontally long rectangular opening formed in the game board 13, and a flow path through which the game ball can flow down is formed in the opening, and the ball enters the opening. A photo sensor for detecting a game ball is provided. An electric accessory 640a is attached to the front side of the opening as a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate capable of closing the opening, and the variable opening / closing plate is used as an axis to drive the opening / closing to the front side. It is equipped with an open port solenoid (not shown). The opening of the second winning opening 640 is normally closed so that the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win. When the normal symbol (second symbol) hits, the opening solenoid is driven to tilt the electric accessory 640a downward in the front, and the open state where the ball can easily win the opening of the second winning opening 640 is temporarily held. It operates so as to repeat the open state and the normally closed state a predetermined number of times determined by the gaming state.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R time reduction (99 times) jackpot (big hit AA) and 7R time reduction set corresponding to the first special symbol that is variablely displayed when the first winning opening 64 is won. (5 times) jackpot (big hit AB) and 7R time reduction (1 time) jackpot (big hit AC) are available. In addition, the 15R time reduction (99 times) jackpot (big hit AD) and the 12R time reduction (99 times) jackpot (big hit AE) that are set corresponding to the second special symbol that is variablely displayed when the second winning opening 640 is won. ), 7R time saving (99 times) jackpot (big hit AF) is prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, "15R time reduction (99 times) jackpot (big hit AA)" means that the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is changed 99 times after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, 99 times. During the period until the second fluctuation is stopped, the lottery probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) shifts to the high probability state, and the time-saving gaming state in which the short fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is easily selected is set. It's a big hit. "7R time reduction (5 times) jackpot (big hit AB)" means that the special symbol (1st special symbol or 2nd special symbol) is changed 5 times after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 7 rounds, and the 5th fluctuation. A big hit in which the lottery probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) shifts to the high probability state and the short fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is easily selected in the short game state until the stop. Is. In addition, in "7R time reduction (1 time) jackpot (big hit AC)", the lottery probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is the period from the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 7 rounds until the 5th fluctuation stops. It is a big hit that shifts to a high probability state and sets a time-saving gaming state in which a short fluctuation time of a normal symbol (second symbol) is easily selected.

During the reduced working hours (during the reduced working hours game state), not only the probability of hitting the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, as compared with the normal time. A long time is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the time reduction, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, during the time reduction, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric accessory 640a per hit. You may make a change to increase the number of times that is opened more than usual. Further, during the time reduction, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and at least the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and the number of times when the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit. One may be changed. In addition, during the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times for opening the electric accessory 640a per hit are not performed, and only the probability of winning the second symbol is calculated. , It may be changed so that it is up compared to the normal time.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is triggered by the winning (starting winning) of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and the variation of the third symbol is synchronized with the variation display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The second symbol is variablely displayed triggered by the passage of a ball of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") for displaying and a normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs is provided. Further, in the variable display unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 12), for example, the upper, middle, and lower three. Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device 83 includes a symbol of "○" and a symbol of "x" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. Is to be displayed in a variable manner by alternately lighting the above for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in operation (open) only.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the time reduction than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the time reduction, the winning lottery (the number of variation display of the second symbol) can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, during the time reduction, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second prize opening 640. When a ball enters the second winning opening 640, four balls are paid out to the player as prize balls on the upper plate 17, so that the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640. , The game can be played while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held by the player, and the investment for lending additional balls can be suppressed, while the lottery of special symbols can be performed in a short period of time. ..

It should be noted that, during the time reduction, the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 during the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a for each hit. In the case of, the time required for the variation display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, and the electric function for one hit may be set. The opening time and the number of opening times of the object 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board in the areas of the left side flow path and the right side flow path of the variable display unit 80, respectively, and among the balls fired on the game board, the left side and the right side of the game board. It is configured so that a part of the ball flowing down and can pass through. When the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is not correct. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is suspended up to a total of 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol reservation lamp. It is also lit and displayed (not shown). Four second symbol hold lamps are provided for the maximum number of hold lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4 times, but is set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You may. Further, the number of assembly of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 12), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A. In the present embodiment, the prize ball is not paid out when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, but the prize ball is not limited to this, and for example, a predetermined number of balls such as one ball is used. It may be configured to pay out the prize ball.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which four balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second prize opening 640 may be configured as five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state, making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the electric accessory is displayed. The 640a is in an open state, and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

As described above, during the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. Therefore, the symbol "○" in the variation display of the second symbol is displayed. Is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal time. Therefore, during the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is easier to win in the second winning opening 640 than in the normal time.

In the 16th embodiment, a through gate 67 through which a ball can pass is formed in a middle course portion (left side of the variable display unit 80) in the left game area. As a result, the lottery of the normal symbol (normal diagram) is executed even while the player is performing the game (left-handed game) in which the ball is made to flow down to the left game area. Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the present embodiment, if a specific normal symbol is won while the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) is set as the gaming state, It is configured so that a game per game in which a ball can be easily entered into the second winning opening 640 is executed.

In this way, by configuring the period (state) in which the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640 during the normal state can be provided, the special figure 2 lottery is used without shifting the gaming state to the time saving state. It is possible to provide a player with a game property, that is, a game property in which a big hit game is executed based on a small hit winning. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player who has been playing the game in the normal state for a long time from getting tired of the game without experiencing the game performance using the special figure 2 lottery.

In addition, as a game in the normal state, a game aiming for a big hit in a lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) executed based on the winning of the ball to the first winning opening 64, and a ball to the through gate 67. Since it is possible to simultaneously execute the game aiming at the big hit by the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) based on the passage of the above, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the normal state.

It should be noted that the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot, a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 (lottery corresponding to the second special symbol) and becomes a jackpot (big hit AD, jackpot AE, jackpot AF). In this case, the game state in which the time reduction is 99 times (a high probability state of the normal symbol is set until the special symbol is changed 99 times) is given at a rate of 100% as the game state after the jackpot game is completed. Is set. Then, when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 (it becomes a big hit in the lottery corresponding to the first special symbol), the big hit to which the time-saving game state of 99 times is given is the big hit AA (big hit). It is configured so that the jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 is selected. With this configuration, in the normal gaming state (a state in which the time reduction is not given in the low probability gaming state), the ball is easier to win in the first winning opening 64 than in the second winning opening 640. A jackpot (big hit AA) in which the number of fluctuations of 99 special symbols (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol) is given as a condition for ending the time-saving gaming state by winning a game ball in 1 winning opening 64 If the selected ratio is set low and the time reduction is given and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640, if a big hit is made with the second special symbol, the time reduction state is easily continued. Can be configured as follows. Therefore, it is possible to increase the value of being given a time saving.

In the 16th embodiment, a through gate 67, a second winning opening 640 (electric accessory 640a), a variable winning device 65, and a V winning device 650 are arranged in the right game area, and a lottery of ordinary symbols (normal figures) is provided. The game in which the game is performed, the game in which the second special symbol (special figure 2) is drawn, and the game in which the winning game (big hit game, small hit game) is performed can be executed by a right-handed game. There is. This eliminates the need for the player to change the firing direction of the ball (direction of the left game area, direction of the right game area) during the period in which the game in the time-saving state, the small hit game, and the big hit game are repeatedly executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from being complicatedly changed in the firing direction and to play the game comfortably. Further, in the 16th embodiment, when a gaming state (time saving state, small hit gaming state, big hit gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than when the normal state is set as the gaming state is set. In addition, since it is configured to perform a right-handed game, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the player is in an advantageous state during the right-handed game.

The V winning device 650 is a winning device that is opened when a small hit game is executed, and can be changed into an open state in which a ball can win in the V winning opening 650a and a closed state in which it is difficult to win. It has a winning door 650b. The V winning door 650b is configured so that a ball flow path is formed on the upper surface of the V winning door 650b when it is located in the closed state, and is fired by a right-handed game while the V winning device 650 is in the closed state. The ball is configured to flow down the upper surface of the V winning door 650b toward the variable winning device 65. In addition, a specific area (V area) (not shown) is provided inside the V winning opening 650a, and the ball winning the V winning opening 650a during the small hit game (including the ball handling period after the small hit game is completed). Is configured to execute a jackpot game when the player passes through a specific area (V area).

Since the configuration of the specific area (V area) provided in the V winning device 650 is a well-known and general technique in the art, detailed description thereof will be omitted, but for example, in the V winning device 650. A plurality of flow paths through which the sphere can pass may be provided so that only the sphere that has passed through the specific flow path can pass through the specific region (V region), or the sphere flowing down in the V winning device 650 may be configured. A distribution member that distributes the flow direction, for example, a distribution member that is constantly driven according to a predetermined rule from the time the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, or a distribution member that is constantly driven according to a predetermined rule after the jackpot game is started. A member or a distribution member that is constantly driven according to a predetermined rule after the start of a specific number of round games of the jackpot game is provided, and the ball distributed by the distribution member passes through the specific area (V area). If this is the case, the jackpot game may be executed.

Further, a plurality of types of small hit games to be executed when a small hit is won are provided. For example, a small hit game in which a ball easily passes through a specific area (V area) in the V winning device 650 during the small hit game. A small hit type to be executed and a small hit type in which a small hit game in which a ball is difficult to pass through a specific area (V area) may be executed may be configured to be configurable. In this case, the opening pattern of the V winning door 650b is different depending on the type of the winning small hit, and when the small hit game in which the ball is difficult to pass through the specific area (V area) is executed, the V winning opening 650a is executed. The opening pattern of the V winning door 650b, which makes it difficult for the ball to enter, is set, or the ball is distributed to other than the specific area (V area) by the distribution member provided in the V winning device 650. The opening pattern of the V winning door 650b may be set so that the ball reaches the distribution member at the timing. In addition, as a small hit game executed based on the small hit winning, a small hit game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened to operate instead of the V winning device 650 is configured to be configurable, and the small hit game is executed. In that case, it may be configured so that the sphere cannot physically pass through the specific area (V area) in the V winning device 650.

The variable winning device 65 is a winning device that is opened during a big hit game, and has a winning door 65b that can be changed into an open state in which a ball is easy to win in a specific winning opening 65a and a closed state in which it is difficult to win a ball. Have. The winning door 65b is configured so that a ball flow path is formed on the upper surface of the winning door 65b when it is located in the closed state, and the ball fired by the right-handed game while the variable winning device 65 is in the closed state. Is configured to flow down the upper surface of the winning door 65b toward the out port 66.

<About the game characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 in the 16th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 362, the game characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment will be described. FIG. 362 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of the game of the 16th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 362, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment, the gaming state is a normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) and a time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, It is configured so that one of the high-probability states of ordinary symbols) is set.

Then, if a left-handed game is performed during the normal state and a big hit is won (big hit probability 1/250) in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the time saving state is always set after the big hit game is completed. Here, the setting contents of the time saving state set when the special figure 1 jackpot is won during the normal state will be described. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 381, but if the special figure 1 jackpot is won during the normal state, one of the three jackpot types is set, and each jackpot type is set. Different time saving end conditions are specified. The time reduction end condition is a condition for ending the time reduction state, and when the time reduction end condition is satisfied, the game state shifts from the time reduction state to the normal state.

When the special figure 1 jackpot is won in the normal state, the number of changes of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the number of changes of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are 99 times as shown in FIG. 362. The jackpot type (big hit AA) for which the time saving end condition is satisfied is set at a rate of 1%, and the time saving ending condition is set when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special figure 2) reaches 5 times. The jackpot type (big hit AB) that holds is set at a rate of 15%, and the jackpot type (big hit AC) that satisfies the time saving end condition when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special figure 2) reaches one. It is configured to be set at a rate of 84%. In other words, if the special figure 1 jackpot is won during the normal state, the time saving state is always set after the jackpot game ends, but it is easy to continue the time saving state according to the set jackpot type (time saving end). Conditions) are different.

Although the details will be described later, in the 16th embodiment, since it is configured so that a maximum of 4 winning information of the special figure 2 can be held and stored, one time saving is set as a time saving end condition. Even if this is the case, the time saving state is set while the first special figure 2 fluctuation is being executed (until the first special figure 2 fluctuation is stopped), and the electric accessory 640a is easily released. Since it is in a state, it is possible to easily store the winning information of the special figure 2 on hold. Therefore, even if the time saving end condition of one time saving is set, the winning information of the special figure 2 (holding of the special figure 2) is stored on hold during the period in which the special figure 2 fluctuation in the time saving state is executed once. By performing the game to make the player perform the special figure 2 fluctuation after shifting from the time saving state to the normal state, it is possible to execute the special figure 2 fluctuation up to four times. With such a configuration, when a big hit is won, a large number of special figure 2 lottery can be executed, so that it is easy for the player to experience the big hit game via the small hit winning.

On the other hand, if a special small hit is won (small hit probability 1/500) in the special figure 1 lottery during the normal state, the ball is executed by passing through a specific area (V area) during the small hit game. After the jackpot game is over, the time saving state is always set. Specifically, the small hit type () in which the time saving end condition is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special figure 2) reach 99 times. The small hit type (small hit AB) is set at a rate of 10%, and the time saving end condition is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special figure 2) reaches 5 times. The small hit type (small hit AC) that satisfies the time saving end condition when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special figure 2) reaches one is set at a ratio of 50%. It is configured in.

As described above, in the 16th embodiment, when the jackpot is won (when the symbol jackpot is won) by the special figure 1 lottery executed in the state where the normal state is set, the small hit is won. The end of the big hit game regardless of whether the ball passes through a specific area and the big hit game is executed (V big hit) or the big hit game is executed during the small hit game. It is configured so that the time saving state is set later, and even if it is a big hit game executed based on the special figure 1 lottery, the ease of continuing the time saving state is made different depending on the execution opportunity of the big hit game. There is. As described above, among the execution opportunities of the big hit game, in the case of the execution opportunity that is easy to be established (the big hit winning by the special figure 1 lottery), the average number of continuations of the time saving state set after the end of the big hit game is 2.58 times. In the case of an execution opportunity that is difficult to be established (small hit winning by special figure 1 lottery), the average number of continuations of the time saving state set after the end of the big hit game is 12.4 times.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of execution triggers for the jackpot game, by associating the ease of establishing the execution trigger with the ease of continuing the advantageous gaming state (time saving state) that can be set after the establishment. Even if the jackpot game is executed by the execution opportunity of, the player can have a sense of expectation.

In the 16th embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 361, the lottery of the normal symbol (normal figure) is executed even while the left-handed game in the normal state is being executed. , It is configured so that there is a 1/10 chance of winning a prize. Then, a game per game (game per long opening) that opens the electric accessory 640a for a long period of time (1.5 seconds) is configured to be executed at a rate of 1/100 of the case where the player wins the game. There is. That is, a state (game per long opening) in which the special figure 2 lottery can be executed is set with a probability of about 1/1000 of the normal figure lottery executed while the normal state is set.

When a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 during the game per long opening, the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state is executed. Here, the flow of the game when a big hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state will be described with reference to FIG. 362. In the 16th embodiment, the probability of winning a big hit is set to be the same (1/250) in the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery. If the jackpot is won in the special figure 2 lottery, the time is shortened when the number of changes in the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the number of changes in the second special symbol (special figure 2) reach 99 times. Any of the jackpot types (big hit AD to AF) for which the end condition is satisfied is set (see FIG. 381). That is, in the normal state, of the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery having the same jackpot probability, it is difficult to establish the execution opportunity of the special figure lottery (it is difficult to win the ball in the corresponding start winning opening). Is configured so that it is easier to set a time saving state in which it is difficult to satisfy the time saving end condition after the end of the big hit game. With this configuration, when a winning game is won by the regular drawing lottery and the long open winning game is executed (1/1000), the player can be enthusiastically executed the special drawing 2 lottery. can.

Next, the flow of the game when a small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state will be described. In this embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the special figure 2 lottery (about 1 / 7.1) is higher than the probability of winning a small hit in the special figure 1 lottery (1/500). It is configured (see FIG. 380). Then, after the end of the big hit game executed by the ball passing through the specific area (V area) during the small hit game, the time saving state is always set. Specifically, the small hit type () in which the time saving end condition is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special figure 2) reach 99 times. The small hit AD) is set at a rate of 40%, and the small hit type (small hit AE) that satisfies the time saving end condition when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special figure 2) reaches 5 is 60%. It is configured to be set at the ratio of. That is, in the normal state, the average number of continuations in the time-saving state set via the small hit of the special figure 2 lottery is 42.6 times, and the big hit game is executed via the small hit of the special figure 1 lottery in the normal state. It becomes easier to set a time saving state in which the time saving end condition is hard to be satisfied (easy to continue).

In this way, in the game in the normal state, although there is a low probability, if the game is won by the regular drawing lottery and the long open winning game is executed (1/1000), the big hit is won by the special drawing lottery. By configuring it so that it is easy to set a time saving state that is advantageous to the player, the player who is playing in the normal state is allowed to play a game aiming for a big hit or a small hit in the special figure 1 lottery. With the winning of the figure lottery as an opportunity, it is possible to play a game aiming at a big hit or a small hit in the special figure 2 lottery.

Further, as shown in FIG. 361, a position where a ball launched into the game area (a ball flowing down the left game area) can pass when a left-handed game is performed in order to win a ball in the first winning opening 64. Since the through gate 67 is arranged in the above, a game in which the special figure 1 lottery is performed and a game in which the normal figure lottery is performed without changing the firing direction of the ball for the player who is playing in the normal state. Can be done in parallel.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the more the jackpot game is executed at the opportunity that is difficult to be established, the easier it is to set the time saving state that is advantageous to the player. It may be configured so that it is easier to set a time saving state that is advantageous to the player when the big hit game is executed in, or a specific predetermined opportunity (for example, a small hit winning in the special figure 1 lottery) may be set. ) May be configured so that when the jackpot game is executed, it is easy to set a time saving state that is advantageous to the player.

When the ball does not pass through the specific area (V area) during the above-mentioned small hit game (small hit game executed when the small hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery or the special figure 2 lottery). (In the case of non-V winning), the normal state is set after the small hit game is completed (corresponding to the flow shown by the dotted line in FIG. 361). As a result, it is possible to prevent an excessive privilege from being given to a player who plays an illegal game in which the ball is not intentionally entered into a specific area (V area) while the small hit game is being executed. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 362, the flow of the game when the time saving state is set will be described. In the present embodiment, when the time saving state is set, the electric accessory 640a is easily released, and the ball is easily won in the second winning opening 640. Therefore, a right-handed game in which the special figure 2 lottery is mainly executed is executed. To.

This time saving state is configured to continue until the predetermined time saving end condition is satisfied, and to shift to the normal state when the time saving end condition is satisfied. This time saving end condition is configured so that different conditions are set according to the big hit type set for the big hit won in the special drawing lottery or the small hit type set for the winning small hit. There is. Specifically, regardless of which hit type (big hit type, small hit type) is set, the common time-saving end condition set as a common condition and the correspondence in which different conditions are set according to the hit type. The time reduction end condition is stipulated, and the common time reduction end condition includes the first end condition that is satisfied at the time of winning the big hit (at the start of the big hit game), the second end condition that is satisfied at the end of the small hit game, and the time reduction. The third end condition that is satisfied when the number of special symbol (special figure) changes executed during the state (cumulative number of special figure 1 changes and special figure 2 changes) reaches 99 is set. Corresponding time reduction end conditions include a short end condition that is satisfied when the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 2 that is executed during the time reduction state is 1, and a middle end condition that is satisfied when the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 2 is 5 times. Conditions are set according to the hit type.

As described above, the corresponding time saving end condition exists at the time when the time saving state is set, for example, because the ending condition is set based on the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 mainly changed during the time saving state. Even if the special figure 1 change is executed during the time saving state based on the hold storage of the special figure 1 change, the corresponding time saving end condition is not satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the time saving state from ending without executing the special figure 2 lottery even though the time saving state advantageous to the player is set. Further, since the response time reduction end condition is satisfied based on the number of special figure 2 fluctuations, the number of special figure 2 fluctuations executed during the time reduction state can be easily specified, and the player can play. It is possible to suppress the provision of excessive benefits (special figure 2 lottery).

In the 16th embodiment, the common time saving end condition and the corresponding time saving end condition can be set as the time saving end condition with the above-mentioned contents, but the setting contents are not limited to those of the present embodiment. For example, in the 16th embodiment, as the end condition for the small hit game defined as the common time saving end condition, the end condition is set when the number of times the small hit game is executed becomes a specific number of times (for example, 3 times). It may be configured to be satisfied, or the end condition related to the small hit game may be set as the corresponding time saving end condition, and the number of executions of the small hit game in which the end condition related to the small hit game is satisfied may be different depending on the hit type. It may be configured. Further, in the present embodiment, regardless of the small hit type set at the time of winning the small hit, the second end condition is satisfied when the small hit game is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the second end condition may be satisfied when the small hit game corresponding to a specific small hit type is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the second end condition is satisfied when the small hit game is completed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second end condition is satisfied at the start of the small hit game (when the small hit is won). May be configured so that is satisfied.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing when the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the small hit winning in the time saving state, so that the player can feel nervous about how long the time saving state will continue. You can play a game.

Returning to FIG. 362, the flow of the game during the time saving state will be described. If the jackpot is won in the special figure 2 lottery during the time saving state, the number of changes in the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the number of changes in the second special symbol (special figure 2) are the same as in the normal state. One of the jackpot types (big hit AD to AF) in which the time saving end condition is satisfied when the number reaches 99 times is set (see FIG. 381). That is, only the common time-saving end condition is set as the time-saving end condition.

On the other hand, if a small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery during the time saving state, after the big hit game executed via the small hit winning is completed, in addition to the above-mentioned common time saving end condition, the small hit type is selected. The time saving state in which the corresponding time saving end condition is set is set. Specifically, a small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery during the time saving state, and after the big hit game executed via the small hit winning is completed, the special figure 2 changes as a response time saving end condition at a rate of 10%. The number of times is set to 5 times, and the response time reduction end condition is not set at a rate of 90% (actually 99 times are set).

As described above, in the 16th embodiment, the setting ratio of the end condition (time reduction end condition) of the time saving state set after the end of the big hit game based on the small hit winning of the special figure 2 lottery is set to the game state at the time of the small hit winning. It is more difficult to establish the time saving end condition if you win the small hit in the special figure 2 lottery during the normal state than if you win the small hit in the special figure 2 lottery during the time saving state. (The time saving end condition is not set) It is configured so that the time saving state can be easily set.

With this configuration, for example, a small hit is won by the special figure 2 lottery that is stored on hold when the time saving state, which is an advantageous gaming state that makes it easy to execute the special figure 2 lottery, ends and the normal state is entered. By doing so, it becomes easy to set a time saving state that is advantageous to the player, so that it is possible to enthusiastically play the game in order to acquire a large amount of the reserved memory of the special figure 2 until just before the time saving state ends.

Although a detailed description will be described later, in the present embodiment, the variation effect (final variation effect) executed in response to the final variation in the time reduction state (special figure 2 variation in which the corresponding time reduction end condition is satisfied) is used. In addition to the variable lottery result, the pre-reading result of the winning information of the special figure 2 stored on hold is also notified. With this configuration, it is possible to notify the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery up to 5 times as the effect result of the final variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to set the probability that the winning (small hit winning, big hit winning) will be notified as the effect result of the final variable effect higher than the variable effect that notifies only the lottery result of one special figure 2 lottery. This makes it possible for the player to pay close attention to the content of the production.

In addition, since the lottery results (including the look-ahead result) of the special figure 2 lottery in the time saving state and the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state are notified at once, the winning is won by this final fluctuation production. When is notified, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the winning special figure 2 lottery is the special figure 2 lottery in the time saving state or the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state. With this configuration, as in the present embodiment, when the time saving end condition is set at a different ratio according to the game state at the time of the small hit winning, the big hit executed based on the current small hit winning. It is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping what kind of time reduction state is set after the end of the game by the effect mode (effect timing) of the variable effect.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a short-time (0.5 second) fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation executed after the transition from the time-reduced state to the normal state. As the variation effect of the short-time variation, the effect result of the final variation effect described above is displayed. As a result, even if the final variation effect executed in response to the final variation in the time-saving state is configured to notify the pre-reading result of the winning information of the special figure 2 stored on hold, the pre-reading result is the target. The final variation effect can be continuously displayed until the variation of the special figure 2 is completed. Then, when the special figure 2 fluctuation corresponding to the special figure 2 remaining hold after the end of the time saving state (the special figure 2 change in the normal state) ends (when the special figure 2 hold storage number becomes 0), the special figure 1 lottery is performed. A left-handed game aimed at execution is performed.

As described above, in the 16th embodiment, even when the normal state is set, the predetermined condition is satisfied (by winning the long opening in the general drawing lottery). The special figure 2 lottery is configured to be able to be executed, and the special figure 2 lottery is configured so that the probability of winning a small hit is higher than that of the special figure 1 lottery. As a result, in the normal state, it is possible to have the player perform a game in which the special figure 1 lottery is executed in parallel with the game in which the special figure 1 lottery is executed by aiming at the first winning opening 64. Can be improved.

<About the flow of production in the 16th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 363 to 377, the characteristic effect contents executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment, when the normal state is set, the variation effect corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1 is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. If a long open hit is won in the pachinko lottery during the execution of the special figure 1 fluctuation, the pachinko variation effect is displayed so as to interrupt the variation effect of the special figure 1 variation. Has been done.

Here, in the Fuzu fluctuation production, a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 after a game per Fuzu (opening of the electric accessory 640a) from the start timing of the Fuzu fluctuation, and the winning ball corresponds to the winning ball. Special Figure 2 A small hit is won due to fluctuations, and it is executed as part of a series of effects using the period until the big hit game is executed based on the small hit winning.

Here, in recent years, the electric accessory 640a is opened for a long period of time (for example, for 1.5 seconds) during a normal state (low probability state of a special symbol, low probability state of a normal symbol). There is a method in which the lottery contents of the general drawing lottery are set so that the winner can be won, and the special drawing lottery (for example, the special drawing 2 lottery) which is temporarily advantageous in the normal state is executed. In such a gaming machine, a player who has been playing a game in a normal state for a long period of time can be made to execute an advantageous special drawing lottery, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, in such a gaming machine, the result of the normal map lottery is executed by the time when the normal map fluctuation effect for showing the lottery result of the normal map fluctuation is executed and the winning game per long opening is executed for the player. An effect that can provide the enjoyment of predicting There is also.

However, in recent gaming machines that perform only the normal map variation effect that can notify the player that the winning game per long opening is executed, the variation effect of the special figure 2 lottery acquired by the winning game and the above-mentioned The special figure 2 lottery was executed because the privilege given to the player by the winning game per long opening, that is, the winning game per long opening was executed, which is not related to the normal drawing fluctuation effect. There was a problem that it was not possible to inform the fact in an easy-to-understand manner, and it was not possible to enhance the effect of the normal map fluctuation effect.

On the other hand, in the 16th embodiment, a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 after a game per game (opening of the electric accessory 640a) from the start timing of the fluctuation of the normal figure, and the winning ball is used. It is configured to execute a series of effects by using the period until the big hit game is executed based on the small hit winning by the corresponding special figure 2 fluctuation. As a result, by executing a series of effects, the flow of the game until the jackpot game is executed can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner based on the lottery result of the general drawing lottery, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. can.

Here, in the case of executing the above-mentioned series of effects, when the ball is won in the second winning opening 640 during the hit game per long opening of the normal figure, that is, while the electric accessory 640a is open for a long period of time. In addition, there arises a problem that the timing at which the special figure 2 fluctuation based on the prize is started differs greatly depending on the fluctuation state of the special figure 1 fluctuation. Specifically, for example, when the special figure 1 fluctuation is being executed at the time when the ball is won in the second winning opening 640, and the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation is 120 seconds. , The period (waiting period) from when the ball is won in the second winning opening 640 to when the special figure 2 fluctuation is started is 120 seconds. If a series of productions are continuously executed in such a situation, there is a problem that the production mode of the series of productions is delayed and the player gets tired of the productions.

In response to such a problem, in the 16th embodiment, when the above-mentioned waiting period is 60 seconds or more, the series of effects is pseudo-finished and then the series of effects is simulated again. It is configured so that the aspect is set. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the production mode of a series of productions is delayed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 363, the flow of the variation effect related to the special map variation and the variation effect related to the normal map variation executed in the normal state will be described. FIG. 363 (a) shows a flow of the effect executed when the waiting period from when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 to when the special figure 2 fluctuation starts is less than a predetermined period (less than 60 seconds). 363 (b) shows a timing chart showing that the waiting period from when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 to when the special figure 2 fluctuation starts is a predetermined period or more (60 seconds or more). It is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect executed in the case.

As shown in FIG. 363 (a), the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed until the variation corresponding to the long opening of the normal map (long opening variation) is executed by the fluctuation of the normal map. A variation effect (special 1 effect) corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1 is executed using the entire surface of. Here, with reference to FIG. 365 (a), the display screen of the variation effect corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1 will be described. FIG. 365 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a variation effect (special diagram 1 variation effect) corresponding to the special figure 1 variation. As shown in FIG. 365 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is vertically partitioned between the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds, and is formed in the upper right of the front view in the main display area Dm. Small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are formed (on the upper right side when viewed from the center of the main display area Dm). The small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are areas in which identification information (fourth symbol) for showing the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is in progress (changing) and the lottery result) is displayed. The fourth symbol (special figure 1 fourth symbol) for showing the lottery status of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is displayed in the small display area Dm1, and the lottery status of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is displayed. The fourth symbol (special figure 2 fourth symbol) for indicating the above is configured to be displayed in the small display area Dm2.

By providing the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 in this way, the lottery status of the special symbol can be displayed. Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is shown in a display mode using numbers, and the fourth symbol is variablely displayed in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (FIG. 365). In (a), it is displayed by a downward arrow) to indicate the situation where the special symbol is fluctuating, and by stopping and displaying the fourth symbol in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (see FIG. 368 (a)). ), It is configured to show the lottery result of the special symbol, but the figure is not limited to this, and for example, the figure can be displayed by using a display mode imitating the figure as the fourth symbol or a display mode showing a plurality of colors. It is configured to show the lottery result of the special symbol by showing that the special symbol is changed depending on the display mode to be deformed or the display mode to change the color, and by stopping and displaying the display mode showing the specific symbol or color. You may.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is in progress (changing) and the lottery result), but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be configured to notify only whether or not the special symbol is in the lottery (changing). Further, as shown in FIG. 365 (a), in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol display area (small display areas Dm1, Dm2) in which the fourth symbol for showing the lottery status of the special symbol is displayed is mainly displayed. An example of forming the fourth symbol display area on the upper right side of the area Dm is shown, but the position and size of the fourth symbol display area are determined according to the effect mode of the variable effect executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm. You may make it different.

Specifically, in the variation effect executed using the entire surface of the main display area Dm, it is possible to understand whether the variation effect being executed corresponds to the special figure 1 variation or the special figure 2 variation. When an effect mode for making it difficult is set, it is preferable to change the fourth symbol display area (small display areas Dm1 and Dm2) so that the player cannot easily see them. Further, for example, by switching the position of the display area of the fourth symbol corresponding to each special symbol or displaying only one of the display areas, the player sees the display mode of the fourth symbol display area. It may be configured so that the type of the special symbol being executed cannot be easily determined only by itself. With this configuration, the type of special symbol currently being executed is grasped by the display mode of the fourth symbol display area, and the effect of the variable effect executed in the main display area Dm is reduced. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

As described above, it is notified that the special symbol is changed depending on the display mode of the fourth symbol display area corresponding to the period in which the special symbol (special symbol) is fluctuating, but the fluctuating special symbol is used. When the variable display is configured in a display mode in which it is difficult to determine the type, the result of the corresponding special figure fluctuation (lottery) and the special figure type can be notified by the stop display mode after the variation display ends. For example, when the red stop display mode is displayed as the display mode (stop display mode) of the fourth symbol displayed as a stop display, the fourth symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 (special 1 fourth) is preferable. When the blue stop display mode is displayed in the symbol), it may be configured to notify that it is the fourth symbol (special 2 fourth symbol) corresponding to the special figure 2.

With such a configuration, the area in which the variation effect is executed is limited by the fourth symbol display area, and it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered. In this case, the fourth symbol display area is deleted from the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the variable display of the fourth symbol is displayed by using the light emitting means (LED or the like) provided in the variable display device unit 80. It is good to configure it to execute.

Further, a small display area Dm1a is formed in the vicinity (left side) of the small display area Dm1, and a display mode showing the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is displayed. Further, a small display area Dm2a is formed in the vicinity (left side) of the small display area Dm2, and a display mode showing the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is displayed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 365 (a) described later, in the reserved number display area (small display area Dm1a, Dm1b), the number of reserved balls of each special figure is displayed in a numerical display mode. Although it is configured to be displayed, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to display a display mode using a color or a symbol so that the number of reserved balls in the acquired figure can be identified.

A small display area Dm4 is formed in the upper left of the front view (from the center of the main display area Dm toward the upper left) in the main display area Dm. In this small display area Dm4, a guidance display mode for guiding the player in the direction in which the ball is launched (game direction) is displayed (see FIG. 366 (b)).

In the 16th embodiment, the small display area Dm4 is used as the guide display area. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp to which area of the game board 13 the ball should be fired only by visually recognizing the guidance display mode displayed in the guidance display area Dm4. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

In this guidance display area (small display area Dm4), a "right-handed" display mode for guiding the player to perform a right-handed game and a left-handed game to be performed by the player are performed. The display mode of "left-handed" for guiding the fact and the display mode of "right-handed" are configured to be displayed, and the display mode of "right-handed" is a gaming state in which the right-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, It is displayed during the time saving state, the big hit game, and the small hit game, and the display mode of "left-handed" is configured to be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after the right-handed game is completed. ing. Further, even when it is detected that the left-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, the right-handed game is being executed during the normal state, the left-handed game is "left-handed" for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). It is configured so that the display mode is displayed.

Returning to FIG. 365 (a), the description will be continued. Although detailed description will be omitted, the above-mentioned small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a are the results of preliminarily determining the winning information stored in the holding in addition to the values for indicating the number of holding balls of the corresponding special symbol (pre-reading result). ) Is configured to display a display mode capable of suggesting and notifying the player. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player play the game while having expectations for the game to be executed in the future (the lottery result of the special symbol stored on hold).

Further, a small display area Dm3 is formed below the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2. This small display area Dm3 is an area in which identification information for indicating the lottery status of the normal symbol (normal figure) (whether or not the lottery is in progress (changing) and the lottery result) is displayed, and is normal. The fourth symbol (the fourth symbol of the ordinary figure) for showing the lottery status of the symbol (the ordinary figure) is configured to be displayed in the small display area Dm3.

In addition, a small display area Dm3a is formed in the vicinity of the small display area Dm3, and the number of reserved balls of a normal symbol is displayed. In the small display area Dm3a described above, in addition to the value for indicating the number of reserved balls of the corresponding normal symbol, the result (look-ahead result) of preliminarily determining the winning information stored in the reserved state can be suggested and notified to the player. It is configured to display various display modes. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player play the game while having an expectation for the game to be executed in the future (the lottery result of the normal symbol stored on hold).

Further, a sub-display region Ds is formed below the main display region Dm. As shown in FIG. 365 (b), the sub-display area Ds is configured to display a comment for the content of the game being executed. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game. The sub-display area Ds may be used for another purpose. For example, information for indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol shown in the small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a may be displayed in the sub-display area Ds. It may be configured.

In this case, for example, the sub-display area Ds may be configured to display a hold display mode (for example, a hold symbol display mode consisting of a circle) for individually indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol. Then, it is preferable to configure the player so that the number of reserved balls of the current special symbol can be grasped by the number of displayed holding display modes. Further, it is preferable to determine in advance the winning information corresponding to each special symbol stored on hold, and to change the corresponding hold display mode based on the determination result.

With this configuration, the game is played with the expectation that a big hit will be won in the lottery of the special symbols corresponding to the reserved symbols whose display mode is changed among the reserved symbols that may exist in a plurality. Can be made. Further, unlike the present embodiment, since it is configured to display the reserved symbols corresponding to the individual reserved storage numbers, the display mode for showing the game result that may be advantageous to the player among the plurality of reserved symbols. It is possible to set the result display to easily display the variable reserved symbol display.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition, the game result suggestion mode for suggesting the game result (lottery result of each symbol) to the player and the content of the effect display executed in the main display area Dm are shown. An effect explanation mode for explaining, a frame button-related display mode for showing the timing of operating the frame button 22 and the operation result, and a hit-related information display mode for displaying information about the jackpot game are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. It is configured to be displayed, and the ratio of the display area between the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds is set to be different depending on the content to be displayed in the sub display area Ds.

In addition, when the combination of the third symbol displayed as stopped is a combination corresponding to the deviation and the holding ball exists, the third symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second in the display mode indicating that the lottery result is out. After that, the confirmation is displayed, and then the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started. If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest incoming balls in time.

On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second in the state where the reserved ball does not exist, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state is until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or the ball wins the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demo effect indicating that the game has not been executed is displayed. Even though the player fires the ball continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), there is no winning (ball winning) in either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. In rare cases, when the third symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the player has quit the game, and the pachinko machine 10 has not played the game at all. Due to that.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. As a result, the player who is trying to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demo effect. On the other hand, if a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the new winning is executed. Will be done.

In FIG. 365 (a), for convenience of explanation, the small display area (guidance display area) Dm4 is shown to be displayed in the main display area Dm, but the game method (direction) is shown to the player. When the display mode to be guided is not displayed, the small display area Dm4 itself is not displayed. In this way, in a state where it is not necessary to guide the game method (direction), by deleting the display area in which the guidance display area is displayed, an area for displaying another display mode (for example, a variable effect display mode) can be displayed. Since it can be made wider, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Returning to FIG. 363 (a), the description will be continued. When the sphere passes through the through gate 67 and the normal long open variation is executed while the special figure 1 variation is being executed, a part of the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed. (See point A in FIG. 363 (a)). The display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of the point A in FIG. 363 (a) will be described later with reference to FIG. 365 (b).

After that, when the fluctuation time of the normal map long open fluctuation elapses for a predetermined time, the special map fluctuation effect displayed in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the display area of the normal map variation effect The process of switching the size is executed, the normal map variation effect is executed using the entire surface of the main display area Dm, and the special map variation effect is executed in a part of the main display area Dm (FIG. 363 (a)). See point B). The display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of the point B in FIG. 363 (a) will be described later with reference to FIG. 366 (a).

In the present embodiment, the timing for switching the size of the display area between the special map variation effect and the normal map variation effect is set to be 10 seconds after the start of the normal map variation effect. Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the present embodiment, a variation time of 10 seconds is set in a part of the case where the result of the general drawing lottery is out of order, and the 10-second normal drawing is set. Even when the deviation variation is set, the normal map variation effect (see FIG. 365 (b)) is configured to be executed.

With this configuration, when the normal map fluctuation effect is executed based on the normal map deviation variation (10 seconds), the display area between the special map variation effect and the normal map variation effect is not switched, and the normal map variation effect is not switched. The effect that the variable effect ends is executed. Therefore, after the normal map variation effect is executed, the display area between the special map variation effect and the normal map variation effect is switched and displayed (see FIG. 366 (a)), so that the normal map variation effect being executed is normal. Figure It is possible to increase the degree of expectation, which is a long open fluctuation.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the normal map long open fluctuation elapses, the game per normal map (long open game) is executed, and the display screen during the game per normal map is displayed (see point C in FIG. 363 (a)). .. The display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of the point C in FIG. 363 (a) will be described later with reference to FIG. 366 (b).

Here, the display contents of the normal map fluctuation effect executed based on the normal map variation will be described with reference to FIGS. 365 (b) to 366 (b). FIG. 365 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect content displayed immediately after the start of the normal map variation effect (see the point A in FIG. 363 (a)). As shown in FIG. 365 (b), when the normal map variation effect is executed, a small display area Dm5 is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm (in the lower right direction when viewed from the center of the main display area Dm). , The normal map fluctuation production is started.

That is, the small display area Dm5 is a normal map variation effect display area on which the normal map variation effect is executed. Then, as a normal figure fluctuation effect, the character 851 finds the treasure box 852 and approaches the treasure box 852. In the state shown in FIG. 365 (b), since the special figure 1 fluctuation and the normal figure fluctuation are being executed, the display mode (FIG.) showing that the special figure 1 is variablely displayed in the small display area Dm1. In 365 (b), "displayed by a downward arrow") is displayed, and in a display mode indicating that the normal map is variablely displayed in the small display area Dm3 (in FIG. 365 (b), "downward" is displayed. Displayed by "arrow") is displayed.

Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "Treasure chest found !! Chance when you reach it !!" are displayed as a comment to indicate that the normal map fluctuation effect has been executed and the content of the normal map variation effect. .. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner what kind of effect the normal map variation effect executed in a part of the main display area Dm should be developed in the future.

After that, when 10 seconds have passed from the start of the normal map fluctuation effect, the display screen shown in FIG. 366 (a) is displayed. FIG. 366 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect content displayed immediately after the display area of the normal map variation effect is switched (see point B in FIG. 363 (a)). As shown in FIG. 366 (a), when 10 seconds have passed from the start of the normal map variation effect, the normal map variation effect is executed using the entire main display area of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the first The variable display effect of the special symbol (special figure 1) is displayed in the small area Dm6 formed in a part (lower left part) of the main display area Dm. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of "great chance" indicating that the normal map fluctuation effect has progressed (indicating that the result of the normal map lottery was not an out-of-normal fluctuation) is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 365 (b) and 366 (a), a variable effect for showing the lottery results of a plurality of symbol lottery (special figure lottery, general figure lottery) (special figure variable effect, general figure variable effect). By varying the size of the display area in which each variation effect is executed according to the suggestion status of the lottery result of each symbol lottery, a lottery of a plurality of symbol lottery is performed for the player. It is possible to notify that the variation effect for showing the result is being executed at the same time, and to inform in an easy-to-understand manner which variation effect should be watched depending on the size of the display area in which each variation effect is executed. can.

Although not shown, if the executed normal-figure fluctuation effect is an out-of-normal fluctuation (10 seconds), the small display area Dm5 gradually becomes smaller from the display screen of FIG. 365 (b), and finally. The effect that the small display area Dm5 is not displayed is executed, and the player is notified that the lottery result of the normal map lottery corresponding to the current normal map fluctuation effect is out of order. In this way, when the normal map fluctuation effect is executed based on the normal map deviation variation, only the normal map variation effect using a display area smaller than the special map variation display effect is executed, so that the normal map variation effect is executed. The figure variation effect does not interfere with the special figure variation effect.

That is, according to the above-mentioned example, the deviation (normal map deviation fluctuation (10 seconds)) is selected as the effect result of the normal map fluctuation effect (result of the normal map lottery that triggered the execution of the normal map variation effect). During the possible period, that is, the period from the start of the normal map variation effect to the elapse of 10 seconds, the special map variation effect and the normal map variation effect can be obtained by executing the display mode shown in FIG. 365 (b). The player is notified that the variation effect is being executed at the same time, and when 10 seconds have passed since the start of the variation effect, the effect result of the variation effect (the usual trigger for executing the variation effect). Since there is no possibility that the out-of-drawing (variation out of the normal drawing (10 seconds)) is selected as the result of the drawing lottery), the possibility that the drawing drawing is successful this time is high. Therefore, FIG. 366 (a). As shown in the above, a display mode in which the display area of the normal map variation effect is large (larger than the display area in which the special map variation effect is executed) is executed.

As a result, there is a high possibility that the lottery result that is advantageous to the player as the lottery result of the normal map fluctuation effect, that is, the lottery result in which the game is executed when the electric accessory 640a is opened for a long time, the normal map change. Since the display area in which the effect is executed can be enlarged, it is possible to make the player appropriately pay attention to the normal figure variation effect. Further, for example, when the normal map fluctuation effect is executed based on the normal map deviation variation (10 seconds), the normal map variation is executed in a display area smaller than the special map variation effect (see FIG. 365 (b)). Since it ends only with the production, it does not interfere with the visibility of the special figure fluctuation production. In addition, regardless of the lottery result of the normal map lottery, the size of the display area at the start of the normal map fluctuation effect is unified. It is possible to prevent the result from being predicted by the player.

In the 16th embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 365 (b) and 366 (a), the display area in which the normal map variation effect is executed is larger than the display area in which the special figure variation effect is executed. A small display area (small display area Dm5 (see FIG. 365 (b))) and a display area larger than the display area (small display area Dm6 (see FIG. 366 (a)) on which the special figure variation effect is executed (FIG. 366). (See)) and two sizes are provided, but the size is not limited to this, and three or more sizes of the display area for the normal map variation effect may be provided. For example, the special figure variation effect may be provided. A display area as large as the display area in which is executed may be used.

Further, in the 16th embodiment, the display area in which the normal map fluctuation effect is executed is gradually enlarged as the normal map variation effect progresses, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal map variation effect is not limited to this. The display area in which the variation effect is executed may be reduced from the initial range (see FIG. 365 (b)) and then varied to the size of the final range (see FIG. 366 (a)). .. By configuring in this way, it is possible to continue the normal map variation effect while making the player think that the normal map variation effect will end, so that it is possible to provide an unexpected effect. can.

Further, in the 16th embodiment, when the special figure variation effect and the normal map variation effect are executed at the same time, the player pays attention by changing the size of the display area in which each variation effect is executed. Although it is configured to indicate a power variation effect, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the mode of the display area in which each variation effect is executed (for example, the color of the outer shell of the display area or the color of the background of the display area). Variable mode) and audio output mode corresponding to each variable effect (for example, output only the audio corresponding to one variable effect, or change the output level (volume) of the audio corresponding to each variable effect. By setting the output mode), the player may be configured to pay attention to any one of the plurality of variation effects.

In addition, in the 16th embodiment, the range of the display area in which the normal map variation effect is executed is changed according to the progress status (elapsed time) of the normal map variation effect. Without limitation, for example, the range of the display area in which the normal map variation effect is executed is changed based on the operation content for the operation means (for example, the frame button 22) that can be operated by the player, and the normal map variation is performed. A variable range of the display area in which the normal map variation effect is executed may be set based on the progress status (elapsed time) of the effect and the lottery result (win / fail determination result) of the normal map lottery. ..

With this configuration, for the player who wants to quickly grasp the lottery result of the normal map lottery during the normal map fluctuation production, the normal map lottery is based on the range of the display area that can be changed based on the operation of the operating means. A display area where the normal map fluctuation effect is executed by not operating the operation means for the player who wants to grasp the normal map lottery result with the effect result of the normal map variation effect. It is possible to execute the normal map fluctuation effect without changing the range of.

Then, when the fluctuation time of the regular opening fluctuation has elapsed and it is displayed that the lottery result of the regular drawing lottery is a long opening hit, then the long opening hit is executed, and it is shown in FIG. 366 (b). The display screen is displayed. FIG. 366 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed when the game is won per long opening and the game is executed per long opening.

As shown in FIG. 366 (b), when the character 851 opens the treasure box 852 in the main display area Dm when the normal figure long opening is won, the character 851 opens the treasure box 852 and is shown to have won the normal figure long opening from the treasure box 852. The effect that the capsule 853 of the above appears is executed. Then, in the small display area Dm3, a display mode (indicated by "three circles" in the figure) for indicating that the result of the general drawing lottery is a long open hit is displayed, and in the small display area Dm4. , "Right-handed" is displayed in order to make the second winning opening 640 play a game (right-handed game), and in the small display area Dm5, the position where the ball is won by the right-handed game is visually displayed. As a guide display mode for notifying, a guide map schematically showing a part of the right game area (near the second winning opening 640) of the game board 13 is displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 366 (b), since the special figure 1 fluctuation is being executed even while the normal figure long open per game is being executed, the special figure 1 is changing in the small display area Dm1. The special figure 1 fourth symbol is displayed in the display mode indicating that the special figure variation effect is reduced in the small display area Dm6 formed on the lower left side of the main display area Dm (display of FIG. 366 (a)). It is displayed smaller than the screen). In this way, even if the size of the display area in which the normal map variation effect is executed is not changed, the display area in which the special map variation effect is executed is executed by reducing the display area in which the special map variation effect is executed. On the other hand, since the display area in which the normal map variation effect is executed can be made relatively large, the effect content of the normal map variation effect can be made more conspicuous for the player.

Then, a comment of "Challenge GET" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds to notify the player that the normal map fluctuation effect is further developed. Here, in the 16th embodiment, in a part of the case where the lottery result of the Fuzu lottery is a hit, the fluctuation time is the same as the fluctuation time (60 seconds) set at the time of winning per the Fuzu long opening. It is configured so that the short opening fluctuation (60 seconds) is set. When the normal map fluctuation effect is executed in response to this normal map short opening variation, the normal map variation effect proceeds until the same display mode as the display screen shown in FIG. 366 (b) is displayed, and the treasure box From 852, an effect of displaying the deviation mode for showing that the lottery result of the general drawing lottery is deviation is executed.

That is, when a hit is won in the general drawing lottery and the short opening operation is executed as a winning game, the electric accessory 640a is configured to be opened to the extent that the ball cannot win the second winning opening 640. ing. In this case, even if the right-handed game is executed, the ball cannot be won in the second winning opening 640 (it is difficult), so that the comment of "right-handed" is not displayed in the small display area Dm4. ..

In this embodiment, as a winning game (a game in which the electric accessory 640a is opened) that is executed when a winning game is won in the regular drawing lottery, a long opening winning game in which a ball can be won in the second winning opening 640. It is configured to be able to execute two types of winning games, one is a short open winning game that makes it difficult to win a ball in the second winning opening 640, but it is not limited to this, and three or more types of winning games can be executed. For example, as a long opening winning game in which a ball can be won in the second winning opening 640, a winning game in which the opening timing and opening time of the electric accessory 640a are different can be executed. good.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the opening timing of the electric accessory 640a during the long open game, so that the ball is fired only at a predetermined timing during the hit game. 2 It is possible to suppress the game of winning a ball in the winning opening 640. Further, in order to achieve the same effect, for example, the execution timing of the normal map variation effect (the timing of displaying the display mode for notifying that the game per normal map is started) may be configured to be different. .. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the second winning opening 640 to grasp the ball launch timing that can be won based on the effect mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 363 (a), the flow of the production will be described. When a right-handed game is performed and the ball wins the second winning opening 640 while the game is being executed (see point C in FIG. 363 (a)), the display mode indicating that fact is the third. It is displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 81. The display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of the point C in FIG. 363 (a) will be described later with reference to FIG. 367 (a).

Here, in the 16th embodiment, the special figure 1 change for showing the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 change for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery are simultaneously (in parallel). ) It cannot be executed, and it is configured to preferentially execute the special figure 2 change over the special figure 1 change.

Therefore, if the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed at the time when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 during the game per normal figure, the winning information of the special figure 2 is reserved and stored, and the special figure 1 being executed is executed. During the period until the fluctuation ends (waiting period), the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation is waited for. After that, when the execution of the special figure 1 change is completed, the special figure 2 change based on the winning information stored on hold is preferentially executed, and the special figure 2 which has advanced the above-mentioned normal figure change effect effect mode. The variation effect is executed (see point D in FIG. 363 (a)). The display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of the point D in FIG. 363 (a) will be described later with reference to FIG. 367 (b).

After that, when the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is completed and the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the small hit winning (see the point E in FIG. 363 (a)), the special drawing 2 for showing the small hit winning is shown. Fluctuation production is executed. The display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of the point E in FIG. 363 (a) will be described later with reference to FIG. 368 (a). Then, when the ball passes through a specific area (V gate (V area)) provided in the V winning device 650 while the small hit game is being executed (see point F in FIG. 363 (a)), the small hit game is executed. A display mode indicating that the big hit game is executed after the hit game is completed is displayed (see FIG. 368 (b)).

Here, with reference to FIGS. 367 (a) to 368 (b), the third symbol is executed until the normal figure long open hit game is executed during the normal state and the big hit game is executed based on the hit game. The contents of the effect executed on the display screen of the display device 81 will be described.

In the 16th embodiment, a series of games (normal figure fluctuation, normal figure hit, special figure 2 fluctuation, special figure 2 small hit) from the execution of the normal figure long open fluctuation to the execution of the big hit game (normal figure fluctuation, normal figure hit, special figure 2 small hit). , A game that is executed in the flow of a big hit), it is configured to execute a series of productions with a story. Specifically, the player is informed that the production content of the normal map variation effect described with reference to FIGS. 365 (b) to 366 (b) progresses, and the jackpot game is executed depending on the progress status of the production. It is possible to suggest.

With this configuration, a series of effects is used to determine whether or not an execution trigger that is more complicated than the execution trigger that is established when the jackpot is won in the special symbol (special symbol) lottery as the execution trigger of the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

FIG. 367 (a) shows that the ball has won a prize in the second winning opening 640 in the state shown in FIG. 366 (b), that is, in the state in which the game per long opening executed during the special figure 1 fluctuation is being executed. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the display screen for demonstrating that. As shown in FIG. 367 (a), when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the game per long opening, the capsule 853 is broken, suggesting the content of the game to be executed from the capsule 853 in the future. A ticket 854 with a "challenge game" as an aspect is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of "challenge game GET" notifying that the challenge game will be executed in the future is displayed.

Here, according to the example shown in FIG. 367 (a), since the special figure 1 change is being executed, the special figure 2 change is immediately executed based on the fact that the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. The winning information of the special figure 2 will be put on hold and stored without being performed. Therefore, in the small display area Dm2a, "1" indicating that one prize information of the special figure 2 has been acquired is displayed. Then, when the special figure 1 change executed in the state of FIG. 367 (a) is completed, the special figure 2 change is started, and the challenge game is started on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. (See FIG. 367 (b)).

FIG. 367 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display screen during a challenge game. As shown in FIG. 367 (b), when the special figure 2 variation is executed during the execution of the series of effects, the challenge game is started. This challenge game is an effect executed in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and as shown in FIG. 367 (a), a plurality of result display modes 861a for showing the effect result. ~ 861e are rotated in order, and the result display modes 861a to 861e, which are stopped and displayed in the result display area 860, are executed as the effect of this time.

In the 16th embodiment, as the result display mode, the result display mode 861a with a “cross” to indicate that the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery is “missing” and the “small hit”. The result display mode 861d with "V" to indicate that, the result display mode 861c with "777" to indicate that it is a "big hit", and the lottery result of the special figure 2 are not notified. It has a result display mode 861b with a “?” And a result display mode 861e with a “NEXT” indicating that the challenge game is executed again.

Here, in the result display mode 861b in which "?" Is added as the effect result of the challenge game, the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery is any of "big hit", "small hit", and "missing". In the challenge game, the effect of not notifying the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery is executed. Even when the result display mode 861b is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860, "right-handed" is displayed in the small area Dm4.

With this configuration, when the result display mode 861b is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860 as the effect result of the challenge game, the right-handed game is performed without grasping the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery. Therefore, whether the ball launched by the right-handed game wins the V winning device 650 which is opened during the small hit game, or the variable winning device 65 which is opened during the big hit game. Do you win the second prize opening 640 that is opened during the game per normal figure, or you do not win the special figure hit (big hit, small hit) and the regular figure hit, and you do not win any prize opening It is possible to improve the fun of the game because it is possible to determine whether or not the ball is flowing down while observing the actual flow behavior of the ball.

In the 16th embodiment, when the result display mode 861b is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860, the player cannot grasp the effect result of the challenge game, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the result display mode 861b is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860, the display mode of the result display mode 861b is changed to notify the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery as the effect result of the challenge game. You may be able to do it.

With this configuration, during the execution of the challenge game, it is possible to inform the game which special figure 2 lottery result corresponds to the result display mode 861b in an incomprehensible manner, and the challenge game ends. Then, the effect result of this challenge game, that is, the lottery result of the special figure 2 can be notified to the player.

Further, the result display mode 861e (“NEXT display”) shown in FIG. 367 (b) is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860 when the challenge game is executed again. In the 16th embodiment, when a plurality of winning information of the special figure 2 is acquired during the game per long opening, the lottery of the special figure 2 continues until the big hit or the small hit is won in the lottery of the special figure 2. Is executed. In this case, for example, if the lottery result of the first special figure 2 lottery is out of order, the second special figure 2 lottery is continuously executed, so that the challenge is executed in response to the change of the first special figure 2. As a result of the game effect, the result display mode 861e is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860, and the second special figure 2 variation is started. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the first special figure 2 lottery is a hit (big hit, small hit), any one of the result display modes 861b to 861d for showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860. To.

With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a production (challenge game) corresponding to the number of winning information of the special figure 2 acquired during the game per long opening without discomfort. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the variable time set in the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state is the variable time corresponding to one challenge game (10 seconds) and the variable time corresponding to two times (20 seconds). ) And are configurable, and when the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery is out of order, the fluctuation time of 20 seconds is more difficult to be selected than the fluctuation time of 10 seconds.

As a result, if the challenge game is executed twice with one special figure 2 fluctuation effect, it is possible to set a high possibility of winning (big hit, small hit) in the special figure 2 lottery. .. Further, when the result display mode 861e to which "NEXT" is attached by the challenge game is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860 and the challenge game is executed again, the second challenge game is one special figure 2. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the game was executed within the fluctuation time or straddled the two special figure 2 fluctuations.

Since the state shown in FIG. 367 is the state in which the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed, the special figure 1 fluctuation that was fluctuating at the time shown in FIG. 367 (a) is out of the small display area Dm1. The display mode "451" is stopped and displayed, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol is displayed in the display mode (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure) indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation is being executed in the small display area Dm2. It is displayed. Further, since the special figure 2 variation was executed using the prize information of the special figure 2 which was reserved and stored at the time shown in FIG. 367 (a), “0” is displayed as the value displayed in the small display area Dm2a. It is displayed.

Then, as a series of effects, the special figure 2 variation effect is executed using the display area in which the normal figure variation effect was executed, so that the special figure variation effect (special figure 1 variation effect) is executed in FIG. 367 (a). The small display area Dm6 that has been set is deleted from the main display area Dm. Further, in the small display area Dm4, the characters "right-handed" for causing the player to perform a right-handed game are continuously displayed, and in the sub-display area Ds, the effect of this challenge game is to be fueled. The comment "What will come out?" Is displayed.

According to the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 367 (b), the small display areas Dm1 to Dm3 and Dm1a to Dm3a are displayed in a visible size in order to explain the current gaming situation. In reality, it is displayed in a display mode that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. As a result, it is possible to further enhance the effect of the effect mode (challenge game) executed in the continuous main display area Dm.

Further, as described above, the state shown in FIG. 367 (b) is a state in which the game per long opening of the normal figure is completed and the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed, so that the state is provided in the right game area at that timing. None of the winning openings (second winning opening 640, specific winning opening 65a, V winning opening 650a) is in a state where it is not easy to win a ball. However, until just before the state shown in FIG. 367 (b), it is easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 by the normal long open hit game, for example, a small hit by the special figure 2 lottery being executed. If you win, or if you win a big hit, it will be easy for the ball to win in the V winning opening 650a or the specific winning opening 65a.

In this way, even if the right-handed game in which the ball is made to flow down to the right-handed game area is not an advantageous game method for the player, the right-handed game is continuously performed. By displaying the characters "right-handed" in the small display area Dm4, the troublesomeness of the player frequently switching between the right-handed game and the left-handed game is eliminated, and the switching operation of the game method is delayed, for example. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the right-handed game cannot be performed in the state where the small hit game is executed, and the ball cannot be won in the V winning opening 650a during the small hit game.

In the present embodiment, for the reason described above, when the right-handed game can be executed with a predetermined interval (the period during which the variation in Special Figure 2 is executed), the small display area Dm4 is continuously performed even during the predetermined interval. Although it is configured to display the character "right-handed" in, the character "right-handed" is displayed in the small display area Dm4 only when the right-handed game is actually advantageous to the player. It may be configured to be displayed, or a state in which the right-handed game is actually advantageous to the player (general figure long open hit period, small hit game period) and a period between the states (special figure 2 variation). The characters "right-handed" may be displayed in the small display area Dm4 in different display modes.

With this configuration, players who are not accustomed to the game can continuously play right-handed games, and the game situation that is disadvantageous to the player (during the small hit game, the ball is placed in the V winning opening 650a). (Situations in which a prize cannot be won) is unlikely to occur, and a skilled player can be made to select a game method according to the display mode of "right-handed" displayed in the small display area Dm4. Therefore, it is possible to play a game according to the skill of the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, with respect to the display content displayed when the result display mode 861d with "V" as the effect result of the challenge game is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860, that is, when the small hit is won, FIG. 368 ( This will be described with reference to a). FIG. 368 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a small hit winning is notified in a challenge game.

As shown in FIG. 368 (a), when the special figure 2 fluctuation is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating a small hit, the special figure 2 fourth symbol is displayed in the display mode “341” indicating the small hit winning in the small display area Dm2. Is displayed, and the result display mode 861d is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860. Then, a comment of "small hit GET !!" indicating that the small hit has been won is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, and the player aims at the small display area Dm7 of the main display area Dm during the small hit game. As a guidance display mode for visually guiding the V winning device 650, a schematic diagram in which the vicinity of the V winning device 650 is enlarged and displayed is displayed.

Then, when the ball passes through a specific area (V gate (V area)) in the V winning opening 650a during the small hit game, it is notified that the right to execute the big hit game is acquired after the end of the small hit game. The display screen shown in FIG. 368 (b) is displayed as the display screen of. FIG. 368 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen displayed when the right of the big hit game is acquired during the small hit game.

As shown in FIG. 368 (b), the character "777" indicating that the jackpot game is executed is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the sub-display area Ds congratulates the player with "big hit !! Congratulations!" ! ”Comment is displayed.

As described above, in the 16th embodiment, the normal map fluctuation effect (see FIG. 365 (b)) is executed when the normal symbol (normal map) starts to fluctuate per long opening in the normal state. , The game per-figure effect (see FIG. 366 (b)) performed during the per-figure game in which the electric accessory 640a is opened, and the second winning opening 640 is awarded a ball during the per-figure game. The special figure 2 hold acquisition effect (see FIG. 367 (a)) executed when the prize information of the special figure 2 is acquired, and the special figure 2 variation effect executed when the special figure 2 variation (lottery) is started. (Refer to FIG. 367 (b)), Small hit winning effect indicating that a small hit was won in the special figure 2 fluctuation (lottery) (see FIG. 368 (a)), and the right of the big hit game was acquired during the small hit game. Since the small hit in-game effect (see FIG. 368 (b)) to be executed in the case is configured to be executed as a series of effects with a story, the big hit is established when a plurality of conditions are satisfied. In the pachinko machine 10 having an opportunity to execute a game, the game performance can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Returning to FIG. 363, the explanation will be continued. As described above, according to the flow of the game shown in FIG. 363 (a), by executing the series of effects, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. Among them, depending on the game state when the ball is won in the second winning opening 640, it may not be possible to inform the player of the progress of the game in an easy-to-understand manner in the above-mentioned series of staging modes.

Specifically, at the timing of the point C in FIG. 363 (a), since the special figure 1 change is being executed, the start timing of the special figure 2 change is a predetermined period (the remaining period of the special figure 1 change during execution). A series of staging modes in which a display screen (see FIG. 367 (a)) is displayed when the player is on standby is used. When the ball is won in the second winning opening 640, the special figure 2 fluctuation is immediately started. Therefore, when the above-mentioned production mode of the series of effects is used, the display screen of FIG. 366 (b) is directly transferred to the display screen of FIG. 367 (b), and each of the effects executed as a series of effects is executed. There was a problem that the relevance of the production was weakened.

Therefore, in the 16th embodiment, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation is executed at the timing when the winning information of the special figure 2 is acquired during the period when the series of effects is being executed, and the determination result is used. Based on this, it is configured to change the effect mode after acquiring the winning information of the special figure 2. Here, the content of the effect when the change in the special figure 1 is not executed at the timing when the winning information of the special figure 2 is acquired during the period in which the series of effects is being executed will be described with reference to FIG. 369.

FIG. 369 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen displayed when the winning information of the special figure 2 is acquired while the special figure 1 is not changing, and FIG. 369 (b) is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen displayed when the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery executed based on the winning information acquired in FIG. 369 (a) is a small hit.

As shown in FIG. 369 (a), when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 in the state where the special figure 1 change is not executed, the special figure 2 change starts immediately, so that the change in FIG. 366 (b) is taken. By the effect shown in the above, the effect that the character 851 destroys the capsule 853 appearing from the treasure box 852 by using the hammer 851aa is executed. Then, when the timing at which the fluctuation of the special figure 2 stops is reached, the display screen shown in FIG. 369 (b) is displayed. FIG. 369 (b) is an example of a display screen displayed when the special figure 2 change executed based on the ball winning the second winning opening 640 while the special figure 1 change is non-variable is stopped. It is a schematic diagram shown schematically.

As shown in FIG. 369 (b), when the variation of the special figure 2 is stopped, an effect is executed in which the result display mode 855 showing the lottery result of the variation of the special figure 2 appears from the capsule 853. In the example shown in FIG. 369 (b), since the lottery result of the variation of the special figure 2 is a small hit, the result display mode 855 with “V” indicating the small hit winning is displayed. The display mode of the result display mode 855 is configured to be variable according to the lottery result of the variation of the special figure 2. Specifically, the effect result of the challenge game shown in FIG. 367 (b) is shown. Since it is the same as the display mode shown, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, during a series of productions, if a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 during the special figure 1 fluctuation, the production in which the capsule 853 appears from the treasure box 852 corresponds to the normal drawing period (first stage). (Direction), and the production to acquire the ticket 854 from the capsule 853 corresponds to the special figure 2 hold acquisition period (remaining fluctuation period of special figure 1) (second stage production), and the challenge game production changes to special figure 2. While the production mode is set so as to correspond to the period (third stage production), if the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 during the non-variable special figure 1, the capsule 853 from the treasure box 852 The effect mode is set so that the effect of appearing corresponds to the normal period (first stage effect), and the effect of destroying the capsule 853 corresponds to the special figure 2 variable period (second stage effect). It is composed.

In this way, by configuring it so that different production modes can be set depending on the game situation during the series of production, depending on whether the waiting period of special figure 2 fluctuation occurs or not, the player feels uncomfortable. It is possible to execute an easy-to-understand series of effects without any problems.

Returning to FIG. 363, the flow of the production will be described. In the series of effects described above with reference to FIGS. 365 to 369, the contents of the effects that can be displayed when a normal game is executed while the series of effects are being executed have been described. Specifically, the content of the effect when the ball normally wins the second prize opening 640 during the long open game, and the content of the effect when the ball wins the V prize opening 650a during the small hit game. I explained.

Here, the content of the effect to be executed when the normal game is not executed in the state where the series of effect is executed will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 370, the contents of the effect when the ball does not win the second winning opening 640 during the game per long opening of the normal figure will be described. FIG. 370 (a) schematically shows an example of a display screen displayed when a ball has not won a prize in the second winning opening 640 when one second has elapsed from the start of the game per long opening. FIG. 370 (b) is a schematic diagram shown, which is displayed when the game per game for long opening of the normal figure is completed without the ball winning the second winning opening 640 during the game for the long opening of the normal figure. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display screen schematically.

As shown in FIG. 370 (a), the capsule 853 rolls away from the character 851 in the main display area Dm until the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the game per long opening. At the same time as the execution, the comment "Hurry !! Hurry !!" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds to alert the second winning opening 640 to hurry to win the ball. In addition, it is possible that the player is not playing the right-handed game as a factor that causes the ball not to win the second winning opening 640 even after the game has passed for a predetermined period. The "right-handed" guidance display mode displayed in the small display area Dm4 is displayed in a display mode that is emphasized more than usual (in FIG. 370 (a), the outer shell of the small display area Dm4 is displayed by a double line). Will be done. In addition, the voice output device 226 also outputs a voice for notifying that the right-handed game is to be performed.

In the 16th embodiment, as a game per long opening, the electric accessory 640a is opened for 1 second, and then the electric accessory 640a is opened again for 0.5 seconds after a closing period of 1.5 seconds. It is configured so that a winning game (opening operation) is executed. Therefore, when one second has passed from the start of the game per the long opening of the normal figure, the caution screen shown in FIG. 370 (a) is displayed, and if the player who notices the display plays the right-handed game, the latter half of the game is performed. It is configured so that the ball can be won in the second winning opening 640 during the opening period (0.5 seconds). As a result, it is possible to provide a player who has played a right-handed game after visually recognizing the display content of the alert screen to have an opportunity to win a ball in the second winning opening 640.

After that, when the game time (3 seconds) per the long opening of the normal figure elapses without the ball winning in the second winning opening 640, the series of effects is completed as shown in FIG. 370 (b). An effect indicating that is executed. As shown in FIG. 370 (b), the character 851, which cannot acquire the capsule 853 and is regrettable, is displayed in the main display area Dm, and "end" indicating that the series of effects is completed in the sub display area Ds. Comment is displayed. Further, in the small display area Dm4, the character of "left-handed" for executing a normal game for executing the special figure 1 lottery in the normal state is displayed. With this configuration, if a normal game (a game that causes the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the game per the long opening of the normal figure) is not executed in the middle of the series of production, the series of production will be performed. Since the ending effect is executed, for example, it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations due to the series of effects progressing to the end without acquiring the winning information of Special Figure 2. ..

Next, as the content of the effect to be executed when the normal game is not executed in the state where the series of effects is executed, the ball does not win the V winning opening 650a during the small hit game, or is specified. The content of the effect when the area (V gate (V area)) is not passed will be described with reference to FIG. 371. FIG. 371 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen displayed when the ball has not won the V winning opening 650a when 3 seconds have passed from the start of the small hit game. FIG. 371 (b) schematically shows an example of a display screen displayed when the small hit game is completed without the ball winning the V winning opening 650a during the small hit game. It is a figure.

As shown in FIG. 371 (a), if a ball has not won a prize in the V winning opening 650a when 3 seconds have passed from the start of the small hit game, a small formed in a part of the main display area Dm. In the display area Dm8, the characters "Last 5 seconds !!" are displayed as the remaining period information for indicating the remaining period of the small hit game, and a countdown display is executed in which the value decreases with the passage of time. Then, in the main display area Dm, a situation is displayed in which the display mode for showing the game result of the small hit game is wrapped in smoke. Further, as in FIG. 370 (a) described above, the highlighting mode in which the guidance of the right-handed game is emphasized is displayed in the small display area Dm4, and the sub-display area Ds is currently in the small hit game. , The comment "Small hit !! Hurry !!" is displayed to indicate that the game is to be played in a hurry.

Then, when the small hit game is completed without winning the ball in the V winning opening 650a during the small hit game, a screen is displayed in which the same series of effects as in FIG. 370 (b) described above is completed (FIG. 371 (FIG. 371). b) See). As described above, when the situation where the series of effects is completed occurs at each time point of the series of effects, the data capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by using the same image data. In addition, since it cannot be displayed when a normal game is played, it is unlikely that the same image data is reused for the player even if the same image data is used. It is a thing.

Returning to FIG. 363, the explanation will be continued. Depending on the fluctuation status of the special figure 1 during the series of effects, a state in which the waiting period for the change in the special figure 2 is set and a state in which the waiting period is not set occur. Fig. 2 A new problem arose even when the waiting period for fluctuation was set.

That is, the waiting period of the special figure 2 fluctuation is set corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation during execution, and the winning timing of the ball to the second winning opening 640 is the special figure. It is set regardless of the fluctuation timing of 1. Further, since the length of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 varies, for example, there is a possibility that the waiting period of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 during a series of productions exceeds 100 seconds. In such a situation, if the display screen (see FIG. 367 (a)) showing the waiting period for the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is continuously displayed, the same display mode is continuously displayed for 100 seconds. There is a problem that the player feels uncomfortable and the series of productions is delayed and the production effect is reduced.

On the other hand, in the 16th embodiment, when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 during the series of productions, the presence or absence of the special figure 1 fluctuation and the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation are determined. FIG. 1 When the remaining fluctuation time of fluctuation is a predetermined time (60 seconds) or more, a special series of effects is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 363 (b), the flow of the game when the special series of effects is executed will be described. In FIG. 363 (b), the period from when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the game per chart to when the special figure 2 change is executed (the remaining change period of the special figure 1 during execution) is 60 seconds. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the effect (special series effect) executed in the above case. The detailed description of the same elements as the flow shown in FIG. 363 (a) will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 363 (b), when a series of effects (normal map fluctuation effect) is executed based on the normal map long open variation, the special figure 1 variation (indicated as special 1 variation in the figure) is shown in the special figure 1. The long deviation fluctuation (special 1 long fluctuation (disengagement)) is executed, and when the ball enters the second winning opening 640 during the game per normal long opening, the remaining period of the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed When it is determined that is 60 seconds or more, the series of effects being executed is pseudo-disengaged and ends with the effect (see point G in FIG. 363 (b)). After that, when the remaining time of the special figure 1 long deviation fluctuation during execution reaches 10 seconds, a pseudo series of effects is executed, and a challenge game is executed according to the start timing of the special figure 2 fluctuation (see FIG. 367 (b)). Is set (see point H in FIG. 363 (b)).

Here, with reference to FIG. 372, the contents of the above-mentioned special series of effects will be described. FIG. 372 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the point G in FIG. 363 (b). As shown in FIG. 363 (b), when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed at the time when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 is 60 seconds or more, the small display area Dm2a is displayed. Despite the state in which "1" indicating that one prize information of Special Figure 2 is reserved and stored is displayed, the end screen indicating that the series of effects has been completed is displayed in the main display area Dm. To.

After that, as a special series of effects, once the series of effects is completed, the special figure variation effect corresponding to the execution of the special figure 1 variation is executed until the remaining time of the special figure 1 variation reaches 10 seconds. Then, when the remaining time of the special figure 1 fluctuation reaches 10 seconds (when the timing at which the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed 10 seconds later), the display mode shown in FIG. 372 (b) is displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 364, the contents of the effect executed in the time-saving state in the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment will be described. FIG. 364 schematically shows the flow of the effect executed when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery in the normal state and the time saving state (once) is set after the jackpot game is completed. FIG. 364 (b) is a timing chart, in which a small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery during the time saving state, and the time saving state (5 times) is set after the end of the big hit game executed based on the small hit. It is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the effect executed in the case of.

As shown in FIG. 364 (a), there is a special figure 1 hold (hereinafter, also referred to as a special 1 hold) at the time when the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and the special figure 2 hold (hereinafter, both the special 2 hold). If there is no such thing, that is, if the jackpot is won by the game that executes the special figure 1 lottery (left-handed game), the special figure 2 lottery is executed by performing the right-handed game during the time saving state. Also, before, all the special figure 1 lottery stored on hold is configured to be executed.

Specifically, it is executed in a state where the time saving state is set rather than the normal figure fluctuation time (the normal figure fluctuation time set in the high probability state of the normal symbol) which is executed in the state where the time saving state is set. The fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is configured to be shorter. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the progress of the game in the time-saving state while holding the special figure 1 hold. Therefore, while various effects are being executed in the time-saving state, the special figure 1 variation, which is more difficult to win a small hit than the special figure 2 variation, is executed, and the effect balance of the various effects is lost. It can be suppressed.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the 16th embodiment, when the special figure 1 lottery is executed during the time saving state, 0.2 seconds regardless of the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery. It is configured so that the fluctuation time is set. Then, the jackpot game end screen indicating the end of the jackpot game is configured to be displayed until a predetermined period (3 seconds) elapses from the end of the jackpot game or until the special figure 2 variation is executed. ing.

Therefore, after the end of the big hit game, the period during which the special figure change (special figure 1 change) based on the special figure 1 hold already acquired at the start of the big hit game is executed (when the number of special figure 1 hold is 4, about 1). Seconds), a display mode indicating the end of the jackpot game is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. With such a configuration, it is possible to digest the special figure 1 hold without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

In addition, in the above-mentioned special figure 1 change (special figure 1 change executed immediately after the end of the big hit game), if the big hit is won or the small hit that can pass V is won, the big hit game is played again from the big hit game end screen. The display screen inside is configured to be displayed, and game information indicating the contents of the jackpot game (for example, information on the number of rounds indicating the number of rounds executed during one jackpot game, or acquisition during one jackpot game). Game information showing the cumulative value with the game information of the previous jackpot game is set as the acquired ball number information indicating the number of balls that have been set, and the display mode corresponding to the set game information is displayed. ing.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the multiple jackpot games are as if they were one jackpot game, so that the second jackpot game (the period during which the jackpot game end screen is displayed) The variation display mode (short time (0.2 seconds) variation) that makes it difficult for the player to identify the special map variation (special map 1 variation) corresponding to the newly executed jackpot game), and the variation of the third symbol. Even if it is executed with (no display), it does not give a sense of discomfort to the player.

In addition, since the upper limit of the value that can be displayed as the game information of one big hit game can be increased, the player can have a stronger expectation for the big hit winning. Further, in the 16th embodiment, since the right-handed game is configured to be an appropriate game for both the big hit game and the game in the time saving state, the big hit game is internally completed and the time saving state is set. During the special figure 1 variable period (during the special figure 1 variable period in which the jackpot game end screen is displayed), the characters "right-handed" are displayed in the small display area Dm4 of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. To. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from determining whether the current game is a big hit game or a time saving state depending on the display mode of the small display area Dm4 on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment is configured so that the special figure 2 hold is given priority over the special figure 1 hold. Therefore, in the state where the time saving state is set, for example, even if the player makes a mistake in the game operation and acquires the special figure 1 hold in the state where the special figure 2 hold is present, the special figure 1 is held until the special figure 2 hold disappears. The special figure change (special figure 1 change) based on the hold is not executed. And, as long as the right-handed game is continuously executed during the time saving state, the special figure 2 hold is configured so as not to disappear. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special figure 1 fluctuation from being unnecessarily executed during the time saving state.

Further, in the 16th embodiment, as the corresponding time saving end condition which is a part of the time saving ending condition for ending the time saving state, the ending condition which is satisfied based on the number of executions of the variation in Special Figure 2 is set. , Even if the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed a predetermined number of times (up to 4 times) after the jackpot game ends, the game status until the corresponding time saving end condition is satisfied is updated based on the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 fluctuation. There is no such thing.

As described above, in the 16th embodiment, the special figure 2 variation is configured to be executed in preference to the special figure 1 variation, and the special figure 2 variation is executed in the state where the time saving state is set. It is configured so that the special figure 1 fluctuation is changed for a short time during the period when the special figure 1 is not held, so that the special figure 1 hold is eliminated during the time saving state. FIG. 2 It may be configured to be executed with priority over the fluctuation.

When "Special Figure 2 fluctuation once" is set as the response time reduction end condition after the jackpot game ends, the special Figure 2 fluctuation change period executed during the time reduction state is used. The time saving final variation effect is executed in the effect mode corresponding to the lottery result and the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold acquired during the time saving state.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 373 to 377, the contents of the effect executed during the time saving state in the 16th embodiment will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment, as the effect during the time saving state, the first time saving variation effect set in response to the special figure 2 variation other than the special figure final variation in the time saving state and the special effect. It is configured to execute the second time saving fluctuation effect set in response to the special figure 2 fluctuation which is the final fluctuation of the figure.

Then, in the first time saving variation effect, a variation effect for showing the lottery result of the variation is executed, and in the second time reduction variation effect, the lottery result of the variation and the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold are shown. Fluctuation production is executed. First, with reference to FIG. 373 (a), the display contents of the first time reduction variation effect will be described. FIG. 373 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents in the variation effect during the time saving state. The display content shown in FIG. 373 (a) is a display screen when the first special figure 2 variation is executed in the time reduction state in which the time reduction number “5 times” is set.

As shown in FIG. 373 (a), in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the characters of "time saving mode" for indicating that the current time saving state is displayed are displayed, and the rabbit is displayed. While the imitated character 851 is running, an effect of getting any one of the lottery result modes 871a to 871c showing the result of the special figure lottery is executed. In the 16th embodiment, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 386, the character 851 tries to obtain the lottery result modes 871a to 871c according to the fluctuation time set during the time reduction state (excluding the time reduction final variation). The get effect is configured to be executed multiple times during one variable period, and as the number of get effects executed during one variable period increases, the lottery result of this special figure variation is the player. It is configured so that the probability that it is a lottery result that is advantageous to the player is high. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player pay close attention not only to the effect result of each get effect but also to the number of times the get effect is executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the small display area Dm4, the character "right-handed" for guiding the game method during the time saving state is displayed, and in the sho display area Dm20, the "last 4" indicating the period until the time saving state ends. The characters "Times" are displayed. That is, it is notified that the time saving state will end when the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed four times later. In the 16th embodiment, a plurality of time saving end conditions that are satisfied based on the number of times the special figure changes can be set, but the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 has a plurality of time saving ending conditions. , It is configured to display the remaining period until the time saving end condition that is most likely to be satisfied is satisfied.

With this configuration, all of the multiple time-saving end conditions that exist are displayed, and the period until all the displayed time-saving end conditions are satisfied (remaining period) is displayed most. It is possible to inform the player of the easy time saving end condition in an easy-to-understand manner. Further, when the ease of satisfying the time saving end conditions overlaps, it may be configured to display all the overlapping time saving end conditions, or only one of the overlapping time saving end conditions is displayed. It may be configured to do so.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 373 (a), as the lottery result modes 871a to 871c, the first lottery result mode 871a with "777" indicating a big hit winning and the "V" indicating a small winning winning are shown. The attached second lottery result aspect 871b and the third lottery result aspect 871c with a “cross mark” indicating the deviation are displayed, and each time the get effect is executed, the character 851 is selected by one of the lottery. An action is performed in which the result aspects 871a to 871c are acquired but cannot be acquired, and finally any of the lottery result aspects 871a to 871c is acquired and the effect of notifying the lottery result of the variation is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a lottery result suggestion mode with a “chance” indicating that there is a high expectation of acquiring the lottery result modes 871a and 871b showing a lottery result that is advantageous to the player in the get effect. Or, the effect number suggestion mode with "next" indicating the remaining number of times the get effect is executed is displayed, and the character 851 executes the get effect to acquire the lottery result suggestion mode and the effect count suggestion mode. It may be configured.

With this configuration, the character 851 can execute the action of acquiring one of the display modes a plurality of times during one variable display effect, so that the player is prevented from getting tired of the effect. be able to. In addition, since it is possible to predict the lottery result of the current special figure change in the middle of the special figure change period, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to the production and improve the interest of the game.

Further, on the display screen shown in FIG. 373 (a), a display mode for showing the remaining number of executions of the variation in the special figure 2 as the remaining period in which the time saving state is set is displayed in the small display area Dm20. Not limited to, for example, a display mode for showing the remaining time for which the time reduction state is set based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 may be displayed, or the get effect executed during the time reduction state this time may be displayed. You may display the display mode for showing the remaining number of times. Furthermore, the remaining number of executions of the special figure 2 fluctuation at the time when the time reduction state is set, that is, the time reduction end condition (special figure 2 fluctuation number) set in the time reduction state this time, and the special figure executed during the time reduction state. 2 The display mode indicating the number of fluctuations may be configured to be displayed on the display screen.

Next, with reference to FIG. 373 (b), the display contents of the time saving final variation effect (second time saving variation effect) executed by the final variation in the time saving state will be described. FIG. 373 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents displayed in the first half period of the time saving final variation effect. In the 16th embodiment, as a variation effect on the time saving final variation, a hold ball acquisition effect for causing the player to acquire the special figure 2 reserved ball, a lottery result of the variation, and a look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold are obtained. The second time-saving fluctuation effect for notifying the player of the game and the time-saving final variation effect are enabled, and the hold ball acquisition effect is executed during the first half period (for example, 5 seconds) of the time-saving final variation effect, and the second half period (for example, for example). , 25 seconds) is configured to execute the second time reduction effect.

When the reserved ball acquisition effect is executed in the first half period of the time saving final variation effect, as shown in FIG. 373 (b), "Gather the characters!" Explaining the playability of the first half period in the sub-display area Ds! Is displayed, and an effect of gathering ally characters around the character 851 is executed in the main display area Dm. In FIG. 373 (b), a state in which the ally character 851a imitating a “turtle” and the ally character 851b imitating an “elephant” are gathered is displayed. Then, in the small display area Dm20, the character "last" is displayed in order to notify the player that the special figure change this time is the final change in the time saving state.

This ally character 851 is variably displayed in association with the number of acquired special figure 2 reserved balls, and since "2" is displayed in the small display area Dm2a, in FIG. 373 (b), it is displayed. Since it shows a state in which two special figure 2 holds have been acquired, it means that two ally characters 851 are gathered. Then, in the small display area Dm7, a set history display displayed in the order in which the gathered ally characters 851 are gathered is displayed, and "turtle" is displayed as the first history 872a and "elephant" is displayed as the second history 872b. ..

In this small display area Dm7, the set history display is displayed, and the display order here is associated with the digestion order of the special figure 2 hold, and the ally character used in the second time reduction effect described later. Based on the type of 851 and the display order of the set history display, for example, in the case of winning, it is possible to suggest which special figure 2 hold is won.

Then, when the number of special 2 hold balls reaches the upper limit value (4 pieces) during the execution of the hold ball acquisition effect, it is shown that the number of special figure 2 hold balls has reached 4 as shown in FIG. 374 (a). The effect mode is displayed. Specifically, around the character 851, a new ally character 851c imitating a "snake" and an ally character 851d imitating a "lion" have increased, and a total of four ally characters 851a to 851d have been added. The gathered production is displayed. Further, in the small display area Dm21, a "snake" is displayed in the third history 872c and a "lion" is displayed in the fourth history 872d, and the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 has reached the upper limit in the sub-display area Ds. The comment "All-Member Assembly !!" is displayed. As described above, during the execution of the reserved ball acquisition effect, the number of set of ally characters 851 is associated with the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2, so that the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is in the small display area Dm2a. "4" indicating that it is the upper limit value (4 pieces) is displayed.

After that, the first half period of the time reduction final variation effect elapses, and when the second half period is reached, the second time reduction variation effect shown in FIG. 374 (b) is started. FIG. 374 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display content (second time reduction variation effect) displayed when the latter half period of the time reduction final variation effect is started. As shown in FIG. 374 (b), in the second time reduction effect, one of the ally characters acquired in the first half of the time reduction final variation effect challenges the mission, notifies the winning of the winning mission, and fails the mission. The effect of notifying the non-winning is executed. Then, the effect result of the second time reduction variation effect is configured to reflect up to the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 hold acquired at the time when the first half period of the time reduction final variation effect elapses. ..

According to the example shown in FIG. 374 (b), the mission effect using the ally character 851a imitating the "turtle" is executed as the mission effect executed as the second time reduction effect. Here, the content of the mission effect to be executed (“tolerate falling rocks” in FIG. 374 (b)) is configured so that a plurality of patterns can be set, and the content of the mission effect and the type of the selected ally character 851. And, depending on, the degree of expectation of mission success is different. With this configuration, the player can be interested not only in the effect result of the second time reduction effect but also in the effect process until the effect result is displayed.

Then, when the mission production is successful, the mission success production is executed as shown in FIG. 375 (a). In the example shown in FIG. 375 (a), the first special figure 2 hold (the next special figure 2 hold), that is, the change in the first special figure 2 after the transition to the normal state. Since winning a small hit is pre-read and the pre-reading result is used as the production result of the second time-saving fluctuation production, as shown in FIG. 375 (a), the mission succeeds as the production result of the second time-saving fluctuation production. At the fluctuation stop timing of the time reduction final fluctuation displayed, the display mode of "351" indicating that the result of the special figure 2 lottery this time is out of order is displayed in the small display area Dm2.

After that, as shown in FIG. 375 (b), there is a change in the special figure 2 in which the small hit is won while the pseudo symbol "VVV" for notifying that the winner is won in the main display area Dm is oscillated. Until the end, a notification screen for notifying the player of the effect result of the second time reduction effect is displayed. At the time of FIG. 375 (b), the normal state is set as the game state, and since the special figure 2 is changing (during non-big hit game, non-small hit game), the right-handed game is actually performed. Is in a state where it is not possible to play a game that is advantageous to the player, but since the small hit game is executed immediately after that, the "right-handed" that continuously guides the right-handed game from the time-saving state. The display is displayed in the small display area Dm4. As a result, it is possible to perform a smooth game without causing the player to perform an act of changing the firing direction of the ball.

Then, when the special figure 2 change based on the winning information stored in the first special figure 2 hold is stopped and displayed at the time when the second time saving fluctuation effect is executed, it is shown in FIG. 376 (a). As you can see, the display mode for displaying the small hit winning to the player is displayed, and in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is "777" for indicating the small hit type set in this small hit winning. It is displayed in the display mode.

On the other hand, when the failure effect is set as the effect result of the mission effect described above with reference to FIG. 374 (b) (when the lottery result of the change and the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold are both out of order) ), The mission failure effect shown in FIG. 376 (b) is displayed, and then the time saving state end screen shown in FIG. 377 is displayed until the special figure 2 fluctuation corresponding to the special figure 2 hold is completed in the normal state. Is displayed.

Although the details will be described later, at the timing when the first half period of the time saving final fluctuation effect ends, the special figure 2 hold has not reached the upper limit value, and the second time saving variation effect is started (the second time saving effect). (After the effect result of the variation effect is set), if a new special figure 2 hold is acquired, the newly acquired special figure 2 will be acquired at the first special figure 2 variation start timing in the normal state after the end of the time saving final variation. If the look-ahead process is executed for the hold in FIG. 2 (the special figure 2 hold that is not reflected in the effect result of the second time reduction effect) and the result of the look-ahead process is a winning, the display of FIG. 377 is performed. An effect is executed in which the small hit winning screen (see FIG. 376 (a)) is suddenly displayed from the screen.

Next, the configuration of the counter buffer in the 16th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 378. FIG. 378 is a diagram schematically showing the configurations of various counters in the 16th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 378, in the 16th embodiment, the stop type counter C3 is added to the counter buffer (see FIG. 13) in the first embodiment described above, and the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area is added. 203la, special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203lb, stop type selection counter storage area for storing the value of stop type selection counter C3, and variation type counter for storing the value of variation type counter CS1. To store the value of the second hit type counter storage area and the second variable type counter CS2 for storing the value of the second hit type counter C6 in the point where the storage area is provided and the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203 lc. The point that the second variation type counter storage area was provided, and the point that the configuration of the special symbol hold ball execution area and the normal symbol hold ball execution area were changed according to the counter value stored in each hold ball storage area. , Is different. Since the other elements are the same, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 99, reach the maximum value (that is, 99), and then return to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed by the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach other than front and back" (for example, 98,99), and "reach other than front and back" (for example, range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops outside the front and back of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop (effect) patterns with "complete deviation" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where reach does not occur are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the timing at which the ball wins the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203la or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203lb of the RAM 203.

From the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high-probability time and a special symbol for low-probability time, and a range of random value values set for each stop type of deviation according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability times where the range of random value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is wide, 0 to 89, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and "completely off" is easily selected. In this table, the "front-back off reach" is narrowed to 98,99 and the "front-back off reach" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select "front-back off reach" or "front-back off reach". Further, in the low probability state, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entry port 64, which is a low probability state. The table for is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "completely off".

In this stop type selection table, the range of random value corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than front and rear deviation" is widened to 80 to 97, and "reach other than front and rear deviation" is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach displays with a long effect time, so that the ball entry time to the first entry port 64 can be secured, and the variation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It will be easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of random value corresponding to the stop type of "reach before and after" is set to 98,99.

The value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process of the main controller in this embodiment), and the normal symbol of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the sphere passes through the through gate 67. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203 lc. The value of the random number that is the hit of the normal symbol is defined in the random number 16 table 202 lc (see FIG. 380 (d)) provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. When the value of the second hit random number counter C4 matches the value of the random number that is the normal symbol specified in the random number 16 table 202 lc per normal symbol, it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol.

Here, with reference to FIG. 380 (d), a random number 16 table 202 lc per ordinary symbol will be described. The random number 16 table 202lc per ordinary symbol is a table in which random numbers (judgment values) determined to be hit in each game state (high probability state of ordinary symbol, low probability state of ordinary symbol) are set in the lottery of ordinary symbols. Is. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 380 (d), when the gaming state is the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the lottery of the normal symbol. Is within the range of "5 to 28", and if it is within the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be a normal figure. Further, when the gaming state is a high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is within the range of "5 to 204" in the lottery of the normal symbol. If it is within the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal figure.

That is, in the 16th embodiment, in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol, the winning is won with a probability of 1/10, and in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol, the probability is 5/6. It is configured to win the prize. And, although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the normal state, the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as a game per normal symbol with a probability of 1/100 when the normal symbol hit (per normal symbol) is won. It is configured so that an easy long open hit game is executed. In addition, during the time saving state, the long open hit game is always executed when the player wins the game.

With this configuration, even in the normal state, it is possible to execute a winning game in which the ball can be won in the second winning opening 640 with a probability of 1/1000, so that the normal state can be executed. To have a player who is playing the game simultaneously execute a game in which the special figure 1 lottery is executed and a game in which the special figure 2 lottery is executed (a game aiming at a specific winning in the general drawing lottery). Can be done.

The second variation type counter CS2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 999, reach the maximum value (that is, 999), and then return to 0. The second variation type counter CS2 determines the variation pattern of 1 from the set variation pattern selection table 202lf. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this normal map fluctuation pattern, and the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is also a counter for determining the fluctuation time. The value of the second variation type counter CS2 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 403) of the main control device 110 is executed, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The normal diagram variation pattern selection table 202lf (see FIG. 384), which stores a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the second variation type counter CS2, is the main control device 110. It is provided in the ROM 202 of.

Returning to FIG. 378, the description will be continued. In the 16th embodiment, the variable type counter storage area is provided in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203la and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203lb, and the winning information stored in the reserved memory is stored in advance (the special symbol changes). By discriminating (before), the fluctuation pattern (variation time) that is actually executed is configured to be pre-readable. With this configuration, it is possible to determine the timing at which the special symbol change corresponding to the winning information of the special symbol stored on hold is executed.

Further, in the 16th embodiment, the winning information of the ordinary symbol, that is, the first random number counter used in the winning lottery of the ordinary symbol as the type of each counter value acquired when the ball passes through the through gate 67. It is used when setting the C2, the second variation type counter CS2 used when determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol, and the type of the winning game per normal symbol.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 379 (a), the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the 16th embodiment will be described. FIG. 379 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the 16th embodiment. The ROM 202 includes a first random number 16 table 202la, a first hit type selection 16 table 202lb, a normal symbol random number 16 table 202lc, a variation pattern 16 table 202le, a small hit type selection 16 table 202lb, and a big hit scenario. At least 16 tables 202 hl, a small hit scenario 16 table 202 li, a normal figure per type selection 16 table 202 ld, and a normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202 lf are provided.

The first random number 16 table 202la is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a hit in each game state is set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

First, with reference to FIG. 380, the contents specified in the random number 16 table 202la per first will be described. FIG. 380 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 16 table 202la. As shown in FIG. 380 (a), the first random number 16 table 202la is the special symbol 1 random number 16 table 202la1 referred to at the time of the winning lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and the second special symbol. It has a special symbol 2 random number 16 table 202la2 that is referred to when the winning lottery of (Special Figure 2) is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 380 (b), the contents specified in the special symbol 1 random number 16 table 202la1 will be described. FIG. 380 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special symbol 1 random number 16 table 202la1. As shown in FIG. 380 (b), "big hit" is defined in the range where the value of the first random number counter C1 is "0 to 3", and "small hit" is defined in "10, 11". That is, in the 16th embodiment, the probability of winning a big hit in the lottery of FIG. 1 is 1/250, and the probability of winning a small hit is 1/500.

Next, with reference to FIG. 380 (c), the contents specified in the special symbol 2 random number 16 table 202la2 will be described. FIG. 380 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special symbol 2 random number 16 table 202la2. As shown in FIG. 380 (c), "big hit" is defined in the range where the value of the first random number counter C1 is "0 to 3", and "small hit" is defined in "10 to 149". That is, in the 16th embodiment, the probability of winning a big hit in the lottery of FIG. 2 is 1/250, and the probability of winning a small hit is about 1 / 7.1.

That is, in the 16th embodiment, the same big hit probability is set in the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery, and the small hit probability is configured to be higher in the special figure 2 lottery. As described above, in the 16th embodiment, since the small hit winning is configured to be a trigger for executing the big hit game, the special figure 2 lottery is easier to execute the big hit game than the special figure 1 lottery. It will be a drawing lottery.

In the 16th embodiment, as described above, the same jackpot probability is set for the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery are set. You may set a different jackpot probability from the lottery. In addition, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability are set to constant values regardless of the gaming state, but the probability is not limited to this, and the probability of winning the jackpot or the small hit increases depending on the gaming state (high probability state). It may be configured to set a high probability state of a special symbol) and a low probability state of a low probability state (low probability state of a special symbol).

The first hit type selection 16 table 202lb is a data table for determining the type of the jackpot game for the first special symbol. The special figure 1 jackpot type selection 16 table 202lb1 and the type of the jackpot game for the second special symbol are determined. Special figure 2 big hit type selection 16 table 202lb2 which is a data table for this is set respectively.

First, the contents of the first type selection 16 table 202lb will be described with reference to FIG. 381 (a). FIG. 381 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first type selection 16 table 202lb. As shown in FIG. 381 (a), the first hit type selection 16 table 202lb includes the special figure 1 big hit type selection 16 table 202lb1 referred to when the big hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery, and the special figure 2 lottery. It has a special figure 2 jackpot type selection 16 table 202lb2, which is referred to when a jackpot is won in.

Here, with reference to FIG. 381 (b), the contents specified in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 16 table 202lb1 will be described. FIG. 381 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 16 table 202lb1. In the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment, when a big hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery, three types from big hit AA to big hit AC are set so as to be selected by the value of the first hit type counter C2. There is. Specifically, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is defined as "0", "big hit AA (15R time reduction 99 times jackpot)" is defined as the jackpot type, and "big hit AB" is defined in the range of "1 to 15". (7R time reduction 5 times big hit) "is specified, and" big hit AC (7R time reduction 1 time big hit) "is specified in the range of" 16 to 99 ".

That is, in the normal state where the left-handed game is performed and the special figure 1 lottery is executed, if a big hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery, the time saving state is always set (granted) after the big hit game is completed. There is. Then, it is configured so that the end condition of the time saving state is set differently according to the set jackpot type.

Specifically, when the jackpot AA is set as the jackpot type, only the above-mentioned common time saving end condition is set, so the winner (big hit or small hit) is won in the special map lottery, or the special map changes. The time saving state continues until (the sum of the special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation) reaches 99 times. In the 16th embodiment, a right-handed game is performed in which the special figure 2 lottery is executed during the time saving state. In the special figure 2 lottery, the probability of winning a big hit is 1/250 and the probability of winning a small hit is 1 /. Since it is set to 7.1, for example, when the time saving state based on the jackpot AA is set, the special figure fluctuation becomes a predetermined number of times (99 times) without winning in the special figure 2 lottery. The probability of reaching is 0.01% or less. Therefore, when the jackpot AA is selected, the game state is substantially set to the time saving state until the next jackpot game is executed.

Next, when the jackpot AB is set as the jackpot type, in addition to the above-mentioned common time-saving end condition, "the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 fluctuation is 5 times" is set as the corresponding time-saving end condition. Therefore, the probability that the special figure fluctuation reaches a predetermined number of times (5 times) without winning in the special figure 2 lottery (the probability that the corresponding time saving end condition is satisfied and the time saving state ends) is about 46%. .. That is, when the jackpot AB is set, that is, when the special figure 2 fluctuation number of times 5 times is set as the time saving end condition, the probability of winning (continuous chan probability) by the time the time saving ending condition is satisfied is It will be about 54%.

When the jackpot AC is set as the jackpot type, in addition to the above-mentioned common time-saving end condition, "special figure 2 fluctuation number of times is 1" is set as the corresponding time-saving end condition. Therefore, the probability that the special figure fluctuation reaches a predetermined number of times (once) without winning in the special figure 2 lottery (the probability that the corresponding time saving end condition is satisfied and the time saving state ends) is 85%. That is, when the jackpot AC is set, that is, when the special figure 2 variation number of times is set once as the time saving end condition, the probability of winning (continuous chan probability) by the time the time saving ending condition is satisfied is It will be about 15%.

As described above, the degree of advantage (probability of consecutive chan) of the set time saving state is configured to be different according to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won in Special Figure 1, and the jackpot AA. Is the most advantageous jackpot type, then the jackpot AB is the advantageous jackpot type, and the jackpot AC is the most disadvantageous jackpot type.

In addition, the number of round games executed as jackpot games is also specified to be different depending on the jackpot type, so that the jackpot AA is "15R", the jackpot AB, and AC are "7R" round games. It is stipulated in. As the number of round games increases in one jackpot game, the number of balls that the player can acquire (the number of prize balls) increases. Therefore, in terms of the jackpot games to be executed, the jackpot AA is the most player. It will be an advantageous jackpot type.

In the 16th embodiment, the jackpot type (big hit AA) having the highest probability of consecutive chans is configured to execute the jackpot game with the largest number of rounds (15R), but the present invention is not limited to this. The jackpot type with the highest probability of consecutive chans and the jackpot type in which the jackpot game with the largest number of rounds is executed may be different.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the most advantageous gaming state different according to the gaming situation. For example, if a jackpot is won just before the amusement park is closed, a jackpot type that can win more prize balls in one jackpot game than a jackpot type that is given (set) a time saving state with a high probability of consecutive chans. Is a more advantageous jackpot type, and if the pachinko machine 10 has a limit value for the number of times the time saving state is set across the jackpot game, one jackpot game in the jackpot winning just before reaching the limit. The jackpot type that can win many prize balls is the more advantageous jackpot type. On the other hand, for example, when the number of consecutive chans (the number of times a jackpot game is executed without shifting to the normal state even once) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times), a privilege (for example, valuable) is given to the player. In the pachinko machine 10 to which the image) can be given, if the player is trying to acquire the privilege, the jackpot type to which the time saving state with a high probability of consecutive chan is given (set) is the more advantageous jackpot type.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned consecutive-chan probability indicates the probability of winning based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the time saving state, but in the 16th embodiment, the special figure 2 lottery is performed in a predetermined number. It is configured so that it can be stored on hold up to (4 pieces). Therefore, even after the time saving end condition is satisfied and the state shifts to the normal state, the special figure 2 lottery can be executed by the number of special figure 2 hold (remaining special figure 2 hold number) stored in the hold. Special figure 2 It is configured so that it is possible to aim for a small hit by lottery. As described above, in the 16th embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit by the special figure 2 lottery is set to a high probability of about 1 / 7.1, so that the remaining special figure 2 hold number (maximum 4) is set. By the special figure 2 lottery of the corresponding number of times, it becomes possible to sufficiently aim at the small hit winning.

Specifically, when the number of remaining special figures 2 held is 1, the probability of winning a small hit (pull-back probability) in the special figure 2 lottery based on the remaining special figure 2 hold is about 14%, and the remaining special figure 2 is held. 2 When the number of holdings is 2, the pullback probability is about 28.5%, and when the number of remaining special figures 2 is 3, the pullback probability is about 39.6%, and the number of remaining special figures 2 holding balls. When there are four, the pullback probability is about 49%.

In this way, the special figure 2 lottery is configured to be memorable on hold, and the special figure 2 lottery based on the remaining special figure 2 hold is executed even after the transition from the time saving state to the normal state. Regardless of the result of the special figure 2 lottery during the time saving state, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game in order to acquire the special figure 2 hold until the end of the time saving state. Therefore, the operation of the game can be improved.

In addition, once the time saving state is set, the game period during the time saving state (continuous chan period) described above and the period during which the special figure 2 lottery based on the remaining special figure 2 hold in the normal state is executed (pull back). Since it is possible to aim for a small hit win in the special figure 2 lottery in the two periods (period) and, even though the time saving state is set, the special figure game is never executed. It is possible to reduce the probability of shifting to a normal state aiming at one lottery, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the 16th embodiment, the small hit is won by the special figure 2 lottery during the time saving state, and the big hit game (ream-chan big hit game) is executed based on the small hit winning during the normal state. Special Figure 2 It is configured so that it is easier to set a time saving state that is advantageous to the player when a small hit is won in a lottery and a big hit game (pull-back big hit game) is executed based on the small hit winning. .. As a result, even if the consecutive chan period has passed, the player can be made to play the game while expecting to win a small hit during the pullback period, so that the player is prevented from getting bored with the game early. can do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 381 (c), the contents specified in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 16 table 202lb2 will be described. FIG. 381 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 16 table 202lb2. In the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment, when a big hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, three types from big hit AD to big hit AF are set so as to be selected by the value of the first hit type counter C2. There is. Specifically, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 19", and "big hit AD (15R time reduction 99 times big hit)" is defined as the jackpot type, and the range is "20 to 69". "Big hit AE (12R time reduction 99 times big hit)" is specified, and "Big hit AF (7R time reduction 99 times big hit)" is specified in the range of "70 to 99".

That is, when a big hit is won by the special figure 2 lottery, an advantageous game state is set in which the time saving state continues until the special figure fluctuation reaches 99 times after the end of the big hit game. As a result, in the special figure 2 lottery, which is executed less frequently than the special figure 1 lottery, it is advantageous for the player when the big hit is won, which is set to be three times or more lower than the probability of winning the small hit. It is possible to reliably provide a gaming state. Therefore, for a player who has a special experience of winning a big hit in the special figure 2 lottery, a game that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a setting of one time reduction) is set, and the player's motivation to play is motivated. It is possible to suppress a significant decrease.

It should be noted that each jackpot type specified in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 16 table 202lb2 is also executed during one jackpot game according to the jackpot type, as in the above-mentioned special figure 1 jackpot type selection 16 table 202lb1. The number of round games is different, and it is stipulated that the round games of "15R" for jackpot AD, "12R" for jackpot AE, and "7R" for jackpot AF are executed. The larger the number of round games in one jackpot game, the larger the number of balls (prize balls) that the player can acquire. Therefore, the jackpot AD is most advantageous to the player in terms of the jackpot game to be executed. It will be a big hit type.

Next, with reference to FIG. 380 (d), the contents of the random number 16 table 202 lc per ordinary symbol will be described. FIG. 380 (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the random number 16 table 202 lc per ordinary symbol.

As shown in FIG. 380 (d), in the random number 16 table 202 lc per ordinary symbol, the values referred to when the lottery per ordinary symbol is executed in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol and the normal in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol. The value to be referred to when executing the lottery per figure is specified. Specifically, in the low probability state of the normal symbol, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is in the range of "5 to 28". "Hit" is defined, and in the high probability state of the normal symbol, "hit" is defined in the range where the value of the second random number counter C4 is "5 to 204".

The 16 table 202ld for selecting the type per normal symbol is a data table for selecting the type per normal symbol, and when the normal symbol (normal diagram) lottery is executed with reference to the random number 16 table 202 lc per the ordinary symbol and the winning is won. It is referred to in. In the 16th embodiment, as a game per game executed when a player wins a game in a low probability state of a normal symbol, an electric accessory 640a is used so that a ball can win a prize in the second winning opening 640. A long open hit game that is opened and a short open hit game that opens the electric accessory 640a so that the ball is more difficult to win in the second winning opening 640 than the long open hit game are configured to be feasible. Therefore, different winning games are executed according to the type of winning game selected at the time of winning.

Here, with reference to FIG. 382, the contents specified in the type selection 16 table 202ld per drawing will be described. FIG. 382 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the type selection 16 table 202ld per general drawing. As shown in FIG. 382 (a), the 16 table 202ld for selecting the type per normal figure has two types of types per normal figure (2 types) according to the probability state of the normal symbol and the value of the acquired second type counter C6. It is configured so that A per normal figure and B) per normal figure are selected.

Specifically, the probability state of the normal symbol is the low probability state (low probability of the normal figure), and the value of the acquired second hit type counter C6 is defined as "0" and "A per normal figure" is defined. "B per normal figure" is specified in the range of "1 to 99". Further, the probability state of the normal symbol is the high probability state (high probability of the normal figure), and the value of the acquired second hit type counter C6 is defined as "A per normal figure" in the range of "0,1". "B per normal figure" is specified in the range of "2 to 99".

Next, the relationship between the type per map selected in the table 202ld and the game state at the time when the game per map is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 382 (b). do. FIG. 382 (b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the type of normal drawing and the opening operation content of the electric accessory 640a based on the game state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment, a lottery for hitting a normal symbol (normal figure) is executed according to a game state set at a timing for executing a winning lottery for a normal symbol (normal figure change start timing), and a winning lottery is executed. If the game is won, the game content per pachinko game is set according to the game state set at the timing of executing the game per pachinko machine (timing to stop the fluctuation of the pachinko machine). That is, since the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment is configured to shift the gaming state according to the lottery status and the fluctuation status of the special symbol (special symbol), it is independent of the special symbol lottery game. In the executed pachinko lottery game, different game states are set depending on the timing of executing the pachinko lottery and the timing of executing the pachinko game executed when the pachinko machine is won in the lottery. There is a case.

For example, if the normal figure lottery is executed during the special figure change (time reduction final change) in the state where the time saving end condition is satisfied, the random number 16 tables 202 lc per normal symbol is in a high probability state (normal figure height). The winning lottery is executed using the judgment value specified in (Probability). Then, in the case of winning, the fluctuation of the normal map is stopped after a predetermined fluctuation time of the normal map (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, and then the game per normal map is executed. Here, when the time saving final change ends during the normal drawing change and the game state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state, the normal state is set as the game state at the timing when the game per normal figure is executed. It will be.

In such a case, if the game mode of the game per normal map is set according to the game state set at the time when the normal map lottery is executed, the normal state is set even though the normal state is set. There is a problem that the game per game (game per long open) that is executed during the time saving state is executed as the game per game, and the player is provided with an excessively advantageous privilege (special figure 2 lottery). there were.

On the other hand, in the 16th embodiment, the game state set at the timing of executing the game per normal figure is determined, and the content of the game per normal figure is set based on the determination result. As in the above-mentioned example, when the gaming state shifts to the normal state during the fluctuation of the normal map, the game per normal map corresponding to the low probability state of the normal symbol can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous privilege (special figure 2 lottery).

Specifically, when A per normal figure is selected (set) as the type per normal figure, the game state set at the execution timing of the game per normal figure (when the electric accessory 640a is open). Regardless of, the game is executed per the long opening of the Fuzu. On the other hand, when B per normal figure is selected (set) as the type per normal figure, the game state set at the execution timing of the game per normal figure (when the electric accessory 640a is open) is a normal symbol. If it is in the low probability state (low probability of the normal figure), the game per open of the short open of the normal figure is executed, and if it is in the high probability state of the normal symbol (high probability of the normal figure), the game per long open of the normal figure is executed. Is stipulated as.

Here, we will explain the contents of the winning game, which is the game per game, the game per game with the long opening of the game, and the game with the game short with the game. The game per normal figure long opening is a game per game in which the electric accessory 640a is opened (positioned in the open state) for a long period of time so that the ball can easily win a prize in the second winning opening 640, and is 0.1. After a second closed state (opening period), the electric accessory 640a is opened for 1 second (first opening period), and then after a 1.5 second closed state (standby period), it is opened again for 0.5 seconds. (Second opening period) A game is executed per normal figure. The flow of this opening operation is stipulated in a scenario per game that is not shown, and when a game per game is executed, a scenario per game corresponding to the type and game state of the game is set and the main control is performed. By periodically updating the scenario for hitting a normal figure in the main process of the device 110, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed in accordance with the above-mentioned flow of the game for hitting a normal figure.

In addition, in the 16th embodiment, when the game per long opening of the normal figure is executed, two opening periods are set so as to secure a period in which the ball can win a prize in the second winning opening 640. is doing. Then, of the two opening periods, when the first opening period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the second winning opening 640, and the determination result is that the ball has not won the second winning opening 640. In the case of determining that, a caution screen (see FIG. 370 (a)) for alerting the player to play a game in which the ball is won in the second winning opening 640 is configured to be displayed. There is.

With this configuration, a player who is unaware that the game per long open (right-handed game) has been executed in the state where the normal state is set (the state in which the left-handed game is being performed). On the other hand, it is possible to notify the player to execute the right-handed game again, and it is possible to prevent the player from having an unfavorable game result. Further, in the 16th embodiment, the second opening operation (0.5 seconds) is performed after a waiting period of a predetermined period (1.5 seconds) after the caution screen (see FIG. 370 (a)) is displayed. It is configured to be executed.

This waiting period (1.5 seconds) is set to be longer than the time (about 0.5 seconds) until the ball launched by the player performing a right-handed game reaches the second winning opening 640. Has been done. As a result, it is possible for the player who has executed the right-handed game after seeing the display of the caution screen (see FIG. 370 (a)) to easily make the second winning opening 640 win the ball.

Further, in the 16th embodiment, when the scenario per game is updated with the passage of time and the scenario indicating the end is reached, the game per game is terminated, and the second prize is won during the game per game. Two types of end conditions for each play are set, in which the game is ended when the number of balls won in the mouth 640 reaches a predetermined number (for example, one).

Then, when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the first opening period and when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the second opening period, the ball wins the second winning opening 640. It is configured so that the notification mode for showing that it has been done is different. Specifically, if the ball wins the second prize opening 640 during the second opening period, there is a high possibility that the proper game (right-handed game) has not been executed from the start stage of the game per normal figure. , It is configured to display the game explanation (comment such as "Be sure to hit right during the game per game with the long opening of the game") so that the game can be played properly at the next game per game. This makes it possible to inform the player of the game content in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, since the above-mentioned game explanation is not notified to the player who has won the ball in the second winning opening 640 during the first opening period, the player repeatedly notifies the game content that has been grasped, and the game is played. It is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation.

On the other hand, in the game per opening of the normal figure short, the game per game in which the electric accessory 640a is opened for 0.1 seconds is executed after the closed state (opening period) of 0.1 seconds. The flow of this opening operation is stipulated in a scenario per game that is not shown, and when a game per game is executed, a scenario per game corresponding to the type and game state of the game is set and the main control is performed. By periodically updating the scenario for hitting a normal figure in the main process of the device 110, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed in accordance with the above-mentioned flow of the game for hitting a normal figure.

Since the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is as short as 0.1 seconds, the above-mentioned game per opening of the normal figure is a game per game in which the ball cannot be substantially made to win the second winning opening 640. .. Further, as shown in FIG. 382 (b), this game per normal figure short opening is a game per game that is executed only in the low probability state (low probability of the normal figure) of the normal symbol, and is described above. As you can see, the game per Fuzu short is executed 0.2 seconds after the game is started, so the game per game is executed while the player is executing the left-handed game. Even if the right-handed game is played, the game per hit is completed by the time the ball fired in the right-handed game reaches the second winning opening 640 (0.5 seconds). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the game per open short.

It should be noted that the electric accessory 640a may be configured so that the ball cannot win the second winning opening 640 during the game per open short of the normal figure. For example, the electric accessory 640a may be configured by the electric accessory 640a. In the open state, the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a is configured so that the sphere can flow down from one end side to the other end side, and only the ball flowing out from the other end side of the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a can win a prize. It is preferable to arrange the second winning opening 640 at the position so that the period during which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a is at least 0.5 seconds. With this configuration, when the game is executed per the short opening of the normal figure, the ball that flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a during the period (0.1 seconds) in which the electric accessory 640a is in the open state. Cannot reach the other end side, so that it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from winning the second winning opening 640.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment, the winning game content of the game per game is set according to the game state set at the timing when the game per game is executed. Therefore, for example, if you win a game in a short time (high probability state), you will win a game with a high probability, and the game per game based on the winning game will be in a normal state (low probability). Even if it is executed in the state), it is possible to make it difficult for the game to be executed per the long opening of the normal figure.

As shown in FIG. 382 (a), in the 16th embodiment, the ratio of the type per normal figure (A per normal figure) in which the game is executed per the long open of the normal figure is selected regardless of the gaming state. Is different between the low probability state of the normal symbol (low probability of the normal symbol) and the high probability state of the normal symbol (high probability of the normal symbol). At the time of probability, it is configured to be selected with a probability of 2%. With this configuration, the player wins the game when the probability is low, and wins the game when the game is high, rather than when the game is played when the game is low. It is possible to increase the probability that the game per long open of the normal figure will be executed when the game is executed per game when the accuracy of the figure is low. Therefore, even if a configuration is used in which the game content of the game per normal figure is set according to the game state at the timing when the game per normal figure is executed, the game is executed when the time saving state is changed to the normal state. It is possible to increase the probability that the game per game becomes a game per long open game, and it is possible to make the player pay close attention to which game content the game per game is executed.

The variation pattern 16 table 202le is a data table referred to when selecting a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol, and is a value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, a special symbol type, and a special symbol lottery ( Various fluctuation patterns (variation time) are selected based on the lottery result of the special drawing lottery) and the set game state. Since the basic technical idea of the variation pattern 16 table 202le is the same as that of each of the above-described embodiments or the various variation patterns used in each embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted. The description will be continued focusing on the characteristic contents of the variation pattern 16 table 202le used in the embodiment.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern 16 table 202le will be described with reference to FIG. 385 (a). FIG. 385 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the variation pattern 16 table 202le. As shown in FIG. 385 (a), the variation pattern 16 table 202le is referred to when the gaming state is the normal state and the normal variation pattern 16 table 202le1 is referred to when the gaming state is the time saving state. The time-saving variation pattern 16 table 202le2 is provided, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected using the data table corresponding to the gaming state set when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol.

Next, the contents of the normal variation pattern 16 table 202le1 included in the variation pattern 16 table 202le will be described with reference to FIG. 385 (b). FIG. 385 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the normal fluctuation pattern 16 table 202le1. As shown in FIG. 385 (b), the variation pattern 16 table 202le has the symbol type of the special symbol, the number of times the special symbol has changed since the normal state was set, the lottery result of the special symbol, and the acquired variation type counter. Different fluctuation patterns are defined depending on the value of CS1.

As described above, in the 16th embodiment, when the normal state is set as the game state, the game in which the special figure 1 lottery is mainly executed is configured, and the second special symbol (2nd special symbol ( As a pattern in which the lottery of the special figure 2) is executed, a pattern in which the special figure 2 lottery corresponding to the special figure 2 hold stored at the end of the time saving state is executed and a long opening hit in the normal figure lottery. There is a pattern in which a special figure 2 lottery is executed based on a ball winning in the second winning opening 640 during a game per long opening.

Further, in the 16th embodiment, as a variation effect corresponding to the final variation in the time-saving state, a time-saving final variation effect capable of notifying the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold stored at the start of the time-saving final variation is executed. It is configured in. Then, the effect result of the time reduction final variation effect is continuously displayed until the special figure 2 variation executed (in the normal state) after the time reduction state ends.

The variation pattern 16 table 202le corresponds to the special figure 2 lottery executed during the number of special symbol variations 1 to 4 as the variation pattern of the second special symbol (special figure 2) variation executed in the normal state. The fluctuation pattern is configured to be a special fluctuation pattern.

Specifically, if the first special symbol change after the normal state is set is the special figure 2 change, and if the lottery result of the special figure 2 change is "off", the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 "Short miss A (0.5 seconds)" is selected regardless of the value of, and in the case of "hit (big hit, small hit)", "short hit A (2 seconds)" is selected. In addition, if the second special symbol change after the normal state is set is the special figure 2 change, and if the lottery result of the special figure 2 change is "off", the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is used. Regardless, "Short off A (0.5 seconds)" is selected, and in the case of "Hit", "Short hit B (1.5 seconds)" is selected, and the special symbol change after the normal state is set. If the third time is a special figure 2 fluctuation, and if the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation is "off", "short deviation A (0.5 seconds)" regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1. Is selected, and in the case of "hit", "short hit C (1 second)" is selected. Then, if the fourth special symbol change after the normal state is set is the special figure 2 change, and if the lottery result of the special figure 2 change is "off", the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is used. Regardless, "short hit A (0.5 seconds)" is selected, and in the case of "hit", "short hit D (0.5 seconds)" is selected.

With this configuration, if the number of special figure 2 holds is the maximum number (4) at the end of the time saving state, the special figure 2 lottery corresponding to the special figure 2 hold will be won (small hit). , The period until the prize is won (the period during which the second special symbol (special figure 2) is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the hit) and the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery corresponding to the special figure 2 hold are all. It is possible to unify the period until it comes off to 2 seconds.

Therefore, for example, regardless of whether there is winning information in the special figure 2 hold or not, simply controlling the result display for 2 seconds after the end of the time saving final fluctuation makes the player feel uncomfortable. It is possible to execute the special figure 2 fluctuation in the normal state without giving. In addition, it is possible to unify the timing at which the identification information indicating the winning is stopped and displayed (2 seconds after the normal state is set), regardless of the number of winnings in the special figure 2 hold. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know how many special figures 2 are held to win the prize.

Further, as shown in FIG. 385 (b), when the number of special symbol fluctuations is "5 times or more" as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation in the normal state, the number of special figure 2 reserved at the end of the time saving state. Since it is a special figure 2 lottery that is executed based on the fact that the game is executed per the long opening of the normal figure in the normal state and the ball wins in the second winning opening 640, the above-mentioned series of productions is performed. A variation pattern (variation (10 seconds)) for properly executing the above is selected, and based on the selected variation pattern, a display mode for indicating that the present is the special figure 2 variation period during a series of effects ( The effect mode) is set.

Next, the contents of the time saving variation pattern 16 table 222ee2 referred to when the time saving state is set will be described. FIG. 386 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a variation pattern of a special drawing lottery executed when a time saving state is set.

In the 16th embodiment, when the time saving state is set, the special drawing 2 lottery, which tends to give a lottery result advantageous to the player with respect to the special drawing 1 lottery, is more likely to be executed than the normal state, so that the time saving state is set. When set, a right-handed game for executing the special figure 2 lottery is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 361, the game board 13 is configured so that it is difficult for the ball to win the first winning opening 64, which is the trigger for executing the special figure 1 lottery, when the right-handed game is performed. Therefore, the special figure 1 lottery executed during the time saving state in which the right-handed game is executed is executed based on the special drawing 1 hold already acquired at the end timing of the jackpot game in which the time saving state is set. It will be one lottery.

Specifically, in the state where the jackpot is won in the state where the normal state is set and the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game (the time saving initial setting state), the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. If the special figure 2 hold cannot be obtained because the easy game is not performed and the special figure 1 hold is held at that time, the special figure 1 lottery will be executed.

In this case, as the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special figure 1 lottery executed during the period until the special figure 2 lottery is executed in the time reduction initial setting state, the fluctuation time for a long time (for example, 60 seconds) is used. If it is set, there is a problem that the special figure 2 change cannot be executed until the special figure 1 change is completed, and the game in the time saving state cannot be smoothly performed.

On the other hand, in the 16th embodiment, a short time (0.2 seconds) is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation executed during the time saving state. As a result, even if the time saving state is set while the maximum number (4) of the special figure 1 hold is secured, the special figure 1 change can be executed without disturbing the special figure 2 change.

Further, in the 16th embodiment, the end screen of the jackpot game is configured to be continuously displayed even after the jackpot game is completed until the special figure 2 variation is executed. As a result, it is possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to understand that the fluctuation of Special Figure 1 fluctuates in a short time during the time saving state. Further, when the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery executed during the time saving state is a big hit, the end screen of the big hit game continuously displayed is configured to shift to the big hit game screen.

The normal map fluctuation pattern selection table 202lf is a data table that is referred to when selecting a fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a normal symbol fluctuation (normal map fluctuation), and is a game state at the time when the normal symbol fluctuation is executed. It is configured so that a different fluctuation pattern (variation time) is selected based on the lottery result of the normal map fluctuation and the acquired value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2.

Here, the contents of the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202lf will be described with reference to FIG. 384. FIG. 384 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the normal map fluctuation pattern selection table 202 lf. As shown in FIG. 384, in the 16th embodiment, as the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation, a short fluctuation (2 seconds) in which a short fluctuation time is set and a long fluctuation in which a fluctuation time longer than the short fluctuation is set are set. (30 seconds to 60 seconds) and is configured to be selected.

Then, when the long fluctuation is selected as the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation, the normal map fluctuation effect is executed. In addition, in the 16th embodiment, only during the period in which the normal state in which it is difficult to win the long opening of the normal figure is set, the fluctuation effect of the normal figure to suggest that the winning is won in the long opening of the normal figure is executed. Therefore, long fluctuations (30 seconds to 60 seconds) are specified only in the data table referenced during the normal state.

Specifically, if the game state at the time when the normal figure change is executed is the normal state (low probability state of the normal symbol) and the lottery result of the normal figure change is "A per normal figure", the acquisition is obtained. The value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is "Public map long fluctuation A (30 seconds)" in the range of "0 to 499", and "Public map long fluctuation B (60 seconds)" in the range of "500 to 999". However, if the lottery result of the normal map fluctuation is "B per normal map", the value of the acquired second fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 999". A (2 seconds) "is specified. In addition, when the lottery result of the normal map fluctuation is "off", the value of the acquired second fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 996", and the "normal map short fluctuation A (2 seconds)" is set to ". "997,998" defines "Fuzu long fluctuation A (30 seconds)", and "999" defines "Fuzu long fluctuation B (60 seconds)". On the other hand, when the gaming state at the time when the normal figure change is executed is the time saving state (high probability state of the normal symbol), regardless of the lottery result of the normal figure change and the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2. "Public map short fluctuation A (2 seconds)" is specified.

As described above, in the 16th embodiment, when the lottery result of the normal map fluctuation is "A per normal map", that is, when the normal map long opening hit, the normal map long fluctuation is the normal map long fluctuation time. It is configured to be easy to select. Therefore, it is possible to expect the player to win the Fuzu long opening by executing the Fuzu fluctuation effect. Further, it is configured so that a different fluctuation time (30 seconds or 60 seconds) can be selected as the long fluctuation in which the normal map fluctuation effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the period from the execution of the normal map fluctuation effect to the start of the game per long opening of the normal map. Therefore, for example, when the normal map variation effect is started. It is possible to make it difficult for the game of stopping the firing of the ball, waiting for the lapse of a specific period (for example, 60 seconds), and then firing the ball again.

In addition, although it is slight, even if the lottery result of the normal map fluctuation is out of order, the normal map long fluctuation is selected, so even if the normal map fluctuation effect is executed, it is normal. Figure It is possible to leave the possibility that the player has not won the long opening. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player to the end of the normal drawing fluctuation production.

In the 16th embodiment, the long fluctuation (30 seconds or 60 seconds) is always selected when the "A per Fuzu", which is the long opening of the Fuzu, is won. Not limited to this, for example, "short fluctuation" or "middle fluctuation" (10 to 15) that is longer than "short fluctuation" and shorter than "long fluctuation" in some cases when "A per normal figure" is won. Seconds) may also be configured to be selectable. If a variation pattern other than "long variation" is selected, it is preferable to configure it so that the normal map variation effect is not executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to execute the game per long opening of the game without executing the staging of the game, so that it is possible to provide the player with a game that is unexpected. It is possible to predict the execution timing of the game per long opening of the normal figure and make it difficult to perform the game of firing the ball according to the predicted timing.

Further, in the 16th embodiment, when the lottery result of the normal figure fluctuation is "B per normal figure" in which the "game per normal figure short" is executed as the game per normal figure, "long fluctuation" is selected. It is configured not to be executed, but it is not limited to this, and it may be configured so that "long fluctuation" is selected.

The small hit type selection 16 table 202 lg is a data table referred to when selecting a small hit type set when a small hit is won in a special drawing lottery.

Here, with reference to FIG. 383, the small hit type selection 16 table 202 lg will be described. FIG. 383 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small hit type selection 16 table 202 lg, and FIG. 383 (b) is a schematic diagram of the contents specified in the special figure 1 small hit type selection 16 table 202 lg1. FIG. 383 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special figure 2 small hit type selection 16 table 202 lg2.

As the small hit type of the first special symbol, three types of small hit AA, small hit AB, and small hit AC are set so as to be selected by the value of the small hit type counter C5. Specifically, when the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any of "0 to 39", the small hit type is "small hit AA (7R time reduction 5 times big hit when passing V)". Will be. That is, the value of "0 to 39" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value. When the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any of "40 to 49", the small hit type is "small hit AB (7R time reduction when passing V, 9 times big hit)". That is, the value of "40 to 49" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value. Then, when the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any of "50 to 99", the small hit type is "small hit AC (no 2R time reduction when passing V)". That is, the value of "50 to 99" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value.

Here, in the small hit AA and the small hit AB, the type of the big hit game to be executed after the game ball enters the V winning opening 650 in the small hit game is set. Further, the small hit AC is a small hit in which the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening 650 in the small hit game. In the case of the small hit AA, the 7R time saving 5 times big hit is set, and after the small hit AA is executed, the big hit in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state is executed, and then the time saving game state is 5 It is configured to set a time-saving game (a period until the special symbol is changed five times and stopped and displayed). Further, in the case of the small hit AB, the 7R time reduction 99 times big hit is set, and after the small hit AB is executed, the big hit game in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 7R open state is executed, and after the big hit game, the big hit game is executed. It is configured so that five time-saving games (the period until the special symbol change is executed five times and stopped and displayed) are set.

Then, in the case of the small hit AC, the 2R time saving no big hit is set, and after the small hit AC is executed, the big hit game in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 2R open state is executed, and after the big hit game, the big hit game is executed. The time-saving game state is not set, and the normal game state is set. In this way, the small hit AB is executed the same number of rounds as the small hit AA in the big hit game, but the time saving game state after the big hit game is 99 times, which is the largest number compared to other small hit types ( Since the period until the special symbol is changed 99 times and stopped and displayed) is set, it is set to be the most advantageous small hit for the player. Then, in the small hit AA, the same number of rounds as the small hit AB is executed in the big hit game, but the time-saving game state after the big hit game is completed is 5 times (the change of the special symbol is executed 5 times). Since the period until the stop display is displayed) is set, the small hit is disadvantageous to the player when compared with the small hit AB. Further, the small hit AC has two rounds in the big hit game, and further, the time-saving game state is not set as the game state after the big hit game is completed, and the normal game state is set, which is the most disadvantageous for the player. It is a small hit type.

FIG. 383 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 small hit type selection 16 table 202lb2. As the small hit type of the second special symbol, the above-mentioned two types of small hit AD and small hit AE are set so as to be selected by the value of the small hit type counter C5. Specifically, when the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state, the small hit type when the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any of "0 to 9" is "small hit AD". (When passing V, 15R time reduction 99 times big hit) ". That is, the value of "0 to 9" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value. When the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any of "10 to 99", the small hit type is "small hit AE (7R time reduction 5 times big hit when passing V)". That is, the value of "10 to 99" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value.

Further, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the small hit type when the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any of "0 to 39" is "small hit AD (passing V). Time 15R time reduction 99 times big hit) ”. That is, the value of "0 to 39" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value. Further, when the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any of "140 to 99", the small hit type is "small hit AE (7R time reduction 5 times big hit when passing V)". That is, the value of "40 to 99" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value.

Here, in the small hit AD and the small hit AE, the type of the big hit game to be executed after the game ball enters the V winning opening 650 in the small hit game is set. In the case of the small hit AD, the 15R time saving 99 times big hit is set, and after the small hit AD is executed, the big hit in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 15R open state is executed, and then 99 as the time saving game state. It is configured to set a time-saving game (a period until the special symbol is changed 99 times and stopped and displayed). Further, in the case of the small hit AE, the 7R time reduction 5 times big hit is set, and after the small hit AE is executed, the big hit game in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 7R open state is executed, and then the variable winning is executed. A jackpot in which the device 65 is set to the 5R open state is executed, and then 5 time-saving games (a period until the special symbol change is executed 5 times and stopped is displayed) are set as the time-saving game state. It is configured.

In this way, regarding the small hit type for the second special symbol, when the V winning opening 650 is won more than the small hit type for the first special symbol, the small hit in which the time-saving gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set is set. The rate at which the type is selected is set high. As a result, when the time saving game state is set, the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed, and the probability of being determined as a small hit is higher than that of the lottery of the first special symbol. By determining that it is a small hit and winning the V winning opening 650, it is possible to easily execute the big hit game in which the time saving game state is set again. As a result, the jackpot game can be given to the player while the time-saving game state is continued, and the value of the time-saving game state can be further increased.

In this embodiment, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are determined to be small hits and the variable display is stopped, the LED corresponding to the small hit type of the first symbol display device 37 is lit and displayed. It is configured to be. Therefore, when the player is in the time-saving game, he / she wants to perform the game so that the more advantageous jackpot game (the jackpot game in which the time-saving game state is set) is executed by effectively using the remaining time-saving number of times. .. Then, the small hit game type displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is determined, and only when the small hit type is not given the time-saving game state, the launch of the game ball is stopped and the V entry port 650a is reached. There is a risk that a game method that is disadvantageous to the game store side, in which the game is played so that the game ball does not enter, is executed. However, in the present embodiment, the V winning door 650b is set to the open state for 1.6 seconds 0.1 seconds after the variation display determined to be a small hit in the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. In the configuration of the present embodiment, which is fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds and takes 2 seconds to reach the V entry port 650a, the game ball is fired after confirming the first symbol display device 37. Therefore, it is difficult to enter the ball into the V entry port 650a, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are determined to be small hits, the fluctuation is stopped, and the right-handed notification is the third symbol display device 81. It seems that it is difficult to enter the game ball into the V entrance 600a in the small hit game in all the small hit types unless the game ball is immediately launched to the right side area and the game is performed. It is configured in. As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of the game method, which is significantly disadvantageous to the game store side.

The jackpot scenario 16 table 202hl is a data table in which the jackpot scenario in which the operation contents during the jackpot game are set is specified, and the opening period of the jackpot game (the first round game is executed after the jackpot game is started). The jackpot type is the period until the game is played), the round period (the maximum period during which one round game is set), and the interval period between rounds (the period from the end of the round game to the start of the next round game). It is stipulated corresponding to.

The small hit scenario 16 table 202li is a data table in which a small hit scenario in which the operation content during the small hit game is set is set.

The jackpot scenario 16 table 202hl and the jackpot scenario 16 table 202li have the contents specified in each scenario for the jackpot scenario table 202aa and the jackpot scenario table 202ab of the above-mentioned A1 embodiment. The only difference is that it corresponds to the content of the big hit game or the small hit game executed in the embodiment, and the other points are the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the 16th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 379 (b). The RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the 16th embodiment has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203 la, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203 lb, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203 lc, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203 ld, and a special. Symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203le, normal symbol hold ball number counter 203 lf, time saving medium counter 203 lg, big hit start flag 203 hl, big hit medium flag 203 li, small hit start flag 203 lg, small hit medium flag 203 lk, V passing place big hit type value 203 lm , V flag 203 ln, and other memory area 203 ln.

As shown in FIG. 378, the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203la has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has. , Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type counter C5 acquired based on winning the first ball opening 64 is stored. ..

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting prize), each value of each counter C1 to C3, C5 is acquired, and the acquired data is the four holding areas (4 holding areas (starting winning). Among the vacant areas (holding 1st area to holding 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203la are transferred to the execution area. A determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having a smaller area number. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203la, the data is shifted only in the reserved area (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203lb is different only in that the counter values acquired for winning the second winning opening 640 are stored for the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203la. Since the configurations of the above are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Similar to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203 la or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203 lb, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203 lb has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). ) And. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the sphere passes through either the left or right through gate 67, and the acquired data is obtained in four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). ) Is stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th) in the vacant area. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203la, the winning order is maintained and the data corresponding to the winning is stored. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203 lc is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203la, the prizes stored in the other hold areas are won. The shift process is performed to pack the data of the above into the holding area which is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is a variable display (first symbol) of the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting prize). 3 This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the symbol display device 81 (variation display) up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. 1 is added (see C304 in FIG. 394). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see C210 in FIG. 390).

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203ld (the number of reserved balls N in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the special symbol 1 reserved ball count command (C211 in FIG. 390, FIG. 394). See C305). The special symbol 1 reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 changes the number of balls held in the main control device 110 by the special symbol 1 hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203ld is changed. The value of the displayed number of reserved balls itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual reserved ball in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol (reserved symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203le is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld in that the number of reserved balls is stored in the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the detailed description thereof will be omitted. When the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203le is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the special symbol 2 reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203lf sets the number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203lf is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203 lf is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed.

If the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203 lf (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the sphere passes through either the left or right through gate 67, the second random number counter C4 A value is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203 lc. On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203 lf is 4 when the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203 lc.

The time-saving medium counter 203 lg is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time-saving gaming state. A counter value corresponding to the number of time reductions is set in the time reduction medium counter 203 lg, and by subtracting one by one at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol stops, the time reduction until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol set in the time reduction game state ends. It is configured to set the game state.

The jackpot start flag 203hl is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the jackpot game. When the fluctuation of the special symbol whose lottery result is determined to be a big hit is stopped, the big hit start flag 203hl is set to ON (see FIG. 390: C219). When it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203hl is on and it is determined that the jackpot start timing is reached, it is set to off. The jackpot start flag 203hl is set to off in the initial state, and is configured to be backed up and maintain the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is turned off.

The jackpot middle flag 203li is a flag indicating that the jackpot game is in progress. The change of the special symbol whose determination result is a big hit is stopped, and it is set to ON at the timing when the big hit game is started (FIG. 404: C1203). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (when it is determined that the game of the number of rounds corresponding to the set jackpot type has been completed), it is configured to be set to off. This jackpot middle flag 203li is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is retained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of the power failure or the like when a power failure or the like occurs. It is configured to.

The small hit start flag 203lj is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the small hit game. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose judgment result is a small hit is stopped. When it is determined that the small hit start flag 203lj is on and it is determined that it is the start timing of the small hit game, it is set to off. This small hit start flag 203lj is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure occurs is backed up and held. It is configured to be.

The small hit medium flag 203 lk is a flag indicating that the small hit game is in progress. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose judgment result is a small hit is stopped. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (when it is determined that the game of the set number of rounds of the small hit has ended), it is configured to be set to off. This small hit medium flag 203lk is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure occurs is backed up and held. It is configured to be.

The jackpot type value 203 lm when passing through V is a memory for storing data for determining the jackpot type that is set when a ball wins in the V winning opening 650 within the V valid period when the small hit game is executed. It is an area. As the jackpot type value 203 lm when passing through V, the data value corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the determined jackpot type is stored when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped. When a ball wins in the V winning opening 650 during the V valid period, the V flag 203ln corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the data value stored in the jackpot type value 203lm at the time of passing V is set to ON. ing. At the end of the small hit game, the data value stored in the big hit type value 203 lm when passing through V is configured to be cleared. This V-passing jackpot type value 203 lm is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure occurs is backed up. It is configured to be held by.

The V flag 203ln is set to turn on the flag corresponding to the big hit type corresponding to the type of the small hit game being executed when the ball enters the V winning opening 650 during the V valid period in the small hit game. The flag. By determining whether or not this V flag 203ln is on at the end of the small hit game, it is identified that there was a prize in the V winning opening 650 during the V valid period, and the flag set to on. The type of jackpot to be executed is determined and the start of the corresponding jackpot game is set. This V flag 203ln is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is maintained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of the power failure or the like when a power failure or the like occurs. It is configured as follows.

The special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203ll is a counter for measuring the fluctuation number of the second special symbol, and a specific counter value is set when the time saving state is set. Then, when the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed during the time saving state, the counter value is subtracted, and when the counter value after subtraction becomes 0, the time saving state ends. That is, the special figure 2 fluctuation frequency counter 203ll is referred to when determining whether or not to end the time saving state, and constitutes a part of the time saving ending condition set in plurality.

In the 16th embodiment, the counter value set in the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203 ll is configured to be different depending on the winning jackpot type. This makes it possible to make the ease of ending the time-saving state different depending on the type of jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested not only in whether or not the jackpot is won, but also in the set jackpot type.

Next, with reference to FIG. 387, the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the 16th embodiment will be described. FIG. 387 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 16th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 387 (a), the ROM 222 in the present embodiment is provided with at least the variation pattern selection 16 table 222la.

First, the contents of the variation pattern selection 16 table 222la will be described with reference to FIG. 388. FIG. 388 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 16 table 222la, and FIG. 388 (b) is a variation pattern selection 16 table 222la having a time saving final variation pattern selection 16 table. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content specified in 222la3.

As shown in FIG. 388 (a), the variation pattern selection 16 table 222la has three variation pattern selection tables in association with the gaming state and the variation state. Specifically, the gaming state is in the normal state. The normal variation pattern selection 16 table 222la1 referred to in a certain case, the time reduction variation pattern selection 16 table 222la2 referred to in the time saving state, and the time saving final use referred to in the case of the final variation in the time saving state. It has a variation pattern selection 16 table 222la3 and.

The above-mentioned variation pattern selection 16 table 222la1 for normal use and the variation pattern selection 16 table 222la2 for time saving have the same technical concept as the variation pattern selection table described in each of the above-described embodiments or embodiments. It is a data table in which a display variation pattern (effect mode) corresponding to a variation pattern (variation time, lottery result, symbol type) included in the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 is selected. , The detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The time saving final variation pattern selection 16 table 222la3 is referred to when selecting the final variation in the time saving state, that is, the effect mode of the variation effect for the special figure variation when the time saving end condition is satisfied by executing the variation. In addition to the symbol type and lottery result of the fluctuation, the special figure 2 holding ball number (value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223 lc) and the presence / absence of a hold inside (winning information storage area 223la) It is configured so that a different variation pattern (effect mode) is selected based on the determination result of whether or not the winning information indicating the winning is included in the winning information stored in.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 388 (b), when the time reduction final variation is the special figure 1, that is, among the time reduction end conditions, one of the common time reduction end conditions is "99 times of special figure fluctuations". If the special figure change when "" is established is the special figure 1 change, "the final time saving for special figure 1" is selected as the change pattern regardless of the lottery result of the change and the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2. Will be done.

Next, when the time saving final change is the special figure 2, the lottery result (win / fail judgment result) of the change is "hit", and the special figure 2 reserved ball number is "0", the change pattern is "time saving final". If "A" is selected, the number of balls held in Special Figure 2 is "1, 2", and the winning information indicating a hit is included in the holding of Special Figure 2, "Final A in a short time" is selected as the fluctuation pattern. If the winning information indicating the winning is not included in the special figure 2 hold, "time saving final B" is selected as a fluctuation pattern.

Then, if the lottery result (win / fail judgment result) of the change is "win", the number of balls held in special figure 2 is "3", and the winning information indicating the hit is included in the hold of special figure 2, the change occurs. If "time saving final C" is selected as the pattern and the winning information indicating a hit is not included in the special figure 2 hold, "time saving final D" is selected as a variation pattern.

On the other hand, when the time saving final change is in Special Figure 2, the lottery result (hit / fail judgment result) of the change is "missing", and the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is "0", the change pattern is "time saving final E". Is selected, the number of balls held in Special Figure 2 is "1, 2", and if the winning information indicating a hit is included in the reserved ball in Special Figure 2, "Time saving final B" is selected as the fluctuation pattern. If the winning information indicating a hit is not included in the special figure 2 hold, "time saving final F" is selected as a fluctuation pattern.

In addition, if the lottery result (win / fail judgment result) of the change is "missing", the number of balls held in special figure 2 is "3", and the winning information indicating a hit is included in the holding of special figure 2, it changes. If "time saving final D" is selected as the pattern and the winning information indicating a hit is not included in the special figure 2 hold, "time saving final E" is selected as a variation pattern.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 16th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 387 (b). FIG. 387 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the 16th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 387 (b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 16th embodiment includes the winning information storage area 223 la and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223 lb in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113. , Special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223 lc, fluctuation start flag 223 ld, stop type selection flag 223 le, effect counter 223 lf, SW effective time counter 223 lg, state storage area 223 hl, series effect flag 223 li, pseudo series effect flag 223 lg, time saving final variation Flag 223 lk, small hit caution flag 223 ll, non-variable winning flag 223 lm, special figure fluctuation time counter 223 ln, normal figure fluctuation time counter 223 lo, continuous continuous effect flag 223 lp, series effect counter 223 lq, and other memory area 223 z are provided at least. There is.

The prize information storage area 223la has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and prize information is stored in each of these areas. From the information stored in the winning information storage area 223la, the lottery result of the reserved ball or the like can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 before the fluctuation starts.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223 lb is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld of the main control device 110. ), Which is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the variable effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld stored in the RAM 203l of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223 lb is used to hold the first special symbol. It is designed to manage numbers.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the first winning opening 64, or in the main control device 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and held. When the number of balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203ld after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203ld of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command. Special symbol 1 Stored in the reserved ball count counter 223lb. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223 lb according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol 1 hold ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203ld.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223 lb is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223 lb, and the stored special symbol 1 hold ball number. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223 lb, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the hold ball number value indicated by the command, that is, the hold ball corresponding to the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223 lb of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the numerical symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223 lb is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203 ld of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223 lc stores the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223 lb based on the reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. Since it is different only in that it is done, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The variation start flag 223ld is turned on when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. When the variation start flag 223ld is turned on, the variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223le is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see C2105 in FIG. 406), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See C4007 in FIG. 415). When the stop type selection flag 223le is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

The effect counter 223 lf is a counter used for advance notice effect and various lottery. It is updated repeatedly in the range of 0 to 198. Although not shown, it is updated by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed.

The SW effective time counter 223 lg is a storage area in which the period for which the frame button 22 is determined to be valid is stored.

The state storage area 223hl is a storage area for temporarily storing the current gaming state, and stores information included in the state command output from the main control device 110. In the present embodiment, in the state storage area 223hl, information indicating a game state (normal state, time saving state), information indicating a time saving end condition in the time saving state, and a winning type (big hit type, set when a big hit is won). It is configured to store information indicating the small hit type). Then, the effect mode is variably set based on various information stored in the state storage area 223hl.

Further, although detailed description is omitted, the state storage area 223hl is configured to temporarily store the game state set in the past in addition to the information indicating the current game state. With this configuration, it is possible to execute changes based on the transition state of the gaming state (which gaming state has transitioned to which gaming state).

The series effect flag 223li is a flag for indicating that the execution condition of the series effect is satisfied, and is set to be turned on when the execution condition of the series effect is satisfied. Here, in the present embodiment, in the normal state, when a series of effects is set as the variation pattern of the winning special figure lottery, or when a long variation of the normal symbol is executed, the execution condition of the series of effects is executed. Is configured to hold.

The series effect flag 223li is used when a series effect is set (see C4207 in FIG. 417) or in a hit variation effect setting process (see C4112 in FIG. 419) in the normal drawing effect setting process (see C4112 in FIG. 417). When a series of effects is set (C4402: Yes in FIG. 419), it is set to ON (C4208 in FIG. 417, C4403 in FIG. 419), and in the small hit related command processing (see C3504 in FIG. 412 (a)). , C3701 in FIG. 412 (a), which is referred to when setting the effect mode during the small hit game. Further, it is referred to when determining whether or not a new series of staging can be executed in the variable staging setting process (C4004 in FIG. 416) and the staging setting process for normal drawing (see C4117 in FIG. 417). Then, in the series effect update process (see C4503 in FIG. 421), it is set to off when it is determined that the continuous execution condition of the series effect is not satisfied (see C4613 in FIG. 421).

As described above, in the present embodiment, a series of effects are executed by a plurality of triggers (special drawing lottery, general drawing lottery). Even in such a configuration, by using the series effect flag 223li, it is possible to prevent the series effect from being set (executed) in duplicate.

The pseudo series effect flag 223lj is a flag for indicating that the lottery result of the special figure variation is out of order and the execution condition of the series effect is satisfied, and the series effect is set as the variation effect of the special figure out-of-figure variation. It is set to on if. This pseudo-series effect flag 223lj is set to have a lower priority than the above-mentioned series-effect flag 223li, and when the same series-effect is being executed, the series-effect flag 223li is set to ON. , It is configured so that different effect setting processes are executed depending on the case where the pseudo series effect flag 223lj is set to ON.

Specifically, when the series effect flag 223li is set to ON in the effect setting process for normal drawing (see C4117 in FIG. 417) (for example, the series effect is executed as the hit variation effect of the special figure variation). Case) is configured so that a new series of effects is not executed even when the fluctuation of the normal map satisfies the execution condition of the series of effects, whereas the pseudo series of effects flag 223lj is set to ON. (For example, when a series of effects is executed as an out-of-order variation effect of the special figure variation), the normal map variation satisfies the execution condition of the series effect, and the special condition is satisfied. In this case, a new series of effects (special series of effects) can be executed (see C4211 in FIG. 417).

In this way, in a state where the same series of effects is being executed, a process of executing a new series of effects based on the execution trigger of the series of effects being executed (a process of replacing the effect mode of the series of effects being executed). Since it is possible to change whether or not to perform it, it is possible to diversify the production contents of the series of productions. Further, since the effect mode of the series effect is replaced only when the effect result that is more advantageous to the player than the effect result of the series effect being executed can be displayed, the effect mode of the series effect being executed is replaced. It is possible to make the player watch a series of effects while expecting that the number will change.

The time saving final fluctuation flag 223lk is a flag for indicating that the current special map fluctuation is the final fluctuation in the time saving state, and is set to ON when the current special map fluctuation is the final fluctuation in the time saving state. .. By setting the time saving final variation flag 223 lk to ON, it is possible to set the effect mode for the time saving final variation.

The small hit caution flag 223ll is a flag indicating that the ball has not passed through a specific area even after a predetermined period has elapsed during the small hit game, and is a predetermined period (1 second) after the small hit game is started. Is set to on when the sphere has not passed through a specific area even after the passage of time. Then, when the small hit caution flag 223 ll is set to ON, a guidance display mode (see FIG. 371 (a)) for causing the right-handed game to be performed during the small hit game is displayed. Then, it is set to off at the timing when the small hit game ends.

The non-variable winning flag 223 lm is a flag for indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation is not executed when the ball passes through the through gate 67 in the normal state, and is a flag when the ball passes through the through gate 67. Special figure 1 Set to ON when the fluctuation is not executed. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to perform a left-handed game in a normal state, to win a ball in the first winning opening 64, and to execute a special drawing 1 lottery. Then, a fuzu lottery is executed based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 provided in the left game area, and when the lottery result of the fuzu lottery is a fuzu long opening, the electric accessory 640a Since the game per long opening is executed, a right-handed game is performed in order to make the second winning opening 640 win the ball.

That is, when the game is normally performed, the special figure 1 variation is executed at the timing when the ball is passed through the through gate 67. On the other hand, for example, in a state where the normal state is set, when a game is performed in which the ball is passed through the through gate 67 provided in the right game area of the game board 13, the ball is passed through the through gate 67. It means that the special figure 1 fluctuation is not executed at the timing of making it. Here, as the board surface configuration of the game board 13 of the 16th embodiment, the ball fired by the left-handed game is fired by the right-handed game rather than the ratio of passing through the through gate 67 provided in the left game area. The ratio of the ball passing through the through gate 67 provided in the right game area is higher.

In this way, in the case of performing a right-handed game and performing a malicious game that attempts to execute only the Fuzu lottery in the normal state, even if the player wins the long opening by the Fuzu lottery, the Fuzu It is configured so that the fluctuation effect is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for a player who plays a right-handed game in a normal state to understand the timing at which the game is executed per the long opening of the normal figure.

The special figure fluctuation time counter 223ln and the normal figure fluctuation time counter 223lo are counters for measuring each symbol fluctuation time, and when the symbol fluctuation is executed, a value corresponding to the current fluctuation time is set. To. Then, the value is periodically subtracted in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113. By using the values of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223ln and the normal map fluctuation time counter 223lo, it is possible to determine the remaining time of each symbol fluctuation time during the symbol fluctuation.

The continuous continuous effect flag 223 lp is a continuous continuous effect (see FIG. 363 (b)) that is executed when the waiting period of the change in the special figure 2 is a predetermined period (30 seconds) or more during the period during which the series effect is being executed. ) Is set, and is set to ON when a continuous series of effects is executed.

The series effect counter 223lq is a counter for updating the effect scenario of the series effect, and when the series effect is set, a value corresponding to the effect period of the series effect executed this time is set, and the value is set. , It is updated by the staging update process 16 (see C3112 in FIG. 420) which is periodically executed in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113. The series production counter 223lq is set with a value for indicating the period until the series production is completed to the end (the production in which the jackpot game is executed (see FIG. 368 (b)) is executed). It is configured, and the effect mode is set according to the updated counter value. Then, during the execution of the series of effects, the effect end condition (for example, the condition that is satisfied when the ball does not win the second winning opening 640 during the game per normal figure and the special figure 2 hold cannot be obtained) is satisfied. Then, when the series of effects is terminated, the effect mode for indicating the end of the series of effects is set, and the value of the series of effects counter 223 lq is reset to 0.

The re-read-ahead flag 223lr is a flag for indicating that the pre-reading process needs to be executed again for the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223la, and it is necessary to execute the pre-reading process again. If set to on. In the 16th embodiment, as the variation effect corresponding to the final special figure variation in the time saving state, the variation effect (time saving final variation effect) in which the effect mode based on the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold is set is executed. Therefore, the look-ahead process is executed for the special figure 2 hold that has already been acquired at the specific timing of the final special figure change period, and the effect mode corresponding to the look-ahead result is set.

The above-mentioned re-read-ahead flag 223lr is set to on and turned on when the final special figure change is being executed and a new special figure 2 hold is acquired after the lapse of a specific timing of the final special figure change period. In this case, at the execution timing of the special figure 2 change in the first rotation after the end of the time saving state, the look-ahead process for the special figure 2 hold is executed again, and the change effect based on the result of the look-ahead process is executed.

The holding upper limit flag 223ls is a flag for determining whether the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 has reached the upper limit value (4), and is when the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 reaches the upper limit value (4). Set to on. Then, it is referred to when setting the effect mode of the time saving final variation effect. Specifically, in the 16th embodiment, as a fluctuation effect corresponding to the final special figure change in the time-saving state, a holding ball for acquiring the special figure 2 hold during the first period of the final special figure change period. The acquisition effect can be executed, and the time-saving final variation effect for showing the lottery result of the variation and the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold can be executed during the second period after the first period. When the hold upper limit flag 223 ls is set to on at the start of the first period, the time saving final variation effect is executed using the first period and the second period. ..

With this configuration, it is possible to execute an effect (holding ball acquisition effect) for a player who has already acquired the special figure 2 hold up to the upper limit to acquire a new special figure 2 hold. For a game that can be suppressed and that the special figure 2 hold is always obtained close to the upper limit value, that is, a player who continuously executes a right-handed game, the execution period of the time-saving final variation effect is lengthened. Can be set. Therefore, the player can be made to play the game continuously, and the operation of the game can be improved.

The executed flag 223 lt is a flag for indicating that the time-saving final variation effect is executed as the variation effect corresponding to the final special figure variation, and is usually executed from the second period of the time-saving final variation period. The time saving final variation effect is set to be turned on when it is executed from the first period set before the second period. That is, at the start of the first period of the time-saving final fluctuation period, the number of special figures 2 held has reached the upper limit, and the time-saving final fluctuation effect (the effect using the first period and the second period) during the first period. Is set to on when it is determined to execute, and it is determined whether the executed flag 223lt is set to on at the start of the second period, and when it is determined to be set to on, the second Since the effect mode to be executed during the period is set, the process of setting a new effect mode is skipped. Then, it is set to off when a stop command corresponding to the time saving final fluctuation is received.

The special 2 winning flag 223lu is a flag for indicating that the ball has won a prize in the second winning opening 640 during the game per normal figure (during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a), and is during the game per normal figure (during the game per normal figure). This is set to ON when a ball wins a prize in the second winning opening 640 during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a). This special 2 winning flag 223lu is set when it is determined in the in-game update process (see FIG. 422 (a)) that a ball has won a prize in the second winning opening 640 (C4701 in FIG. 422 (a)). Yes), set to on (see C4705 in FIG. 422), and referenced in the series effect update process (see C4503 in FIG. 421) to determine whether to continue the series of effects (see FIG. 421). 421 C4608). If it is determined in the processing of C4608 that it is not set to on (set to off) (C4608: No in FIG. 421), the special figure 2 variation is not executed, and the end condition of the series of effects is satisfied. Therefore, the process (C4612) for terminating the series of effects is executed.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the 16th embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 389 to 405. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process 16 and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the operation is started. The processing and the main processing will be described. In the 16th embodiment, the contents described in each of the above-described embodiments are also described in duplicate with different reference numerals for convenience of explanation, but the contents will be described in each of the above-described embodiments. The contents described in each of the above-described embodiments are applied to the parts where detailed explanations are omitted for the same elements as those described above. Further, the technical idea described in each of the above-described embodiments is naturally applied to the 16th embodiment, and the modified examples and additional examples described in each of the above-described embodiments are also applied to the 16th embodiment. Of course, it is applied to the embodiment.

FIG. 389 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process 16 executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process 16 is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt processing 16, first, reading processing of various winning switches is executed (C101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (C102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, the small hit type counter C5, and the second hit type counter C6 are updated (C103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, the small hit type counter C5, and the second hit type counter C6 are each added by 1. At the same time, when those counter values reach the maximum values (999,99,239,239,99,99, respectively in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C6 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the special symbol variation process 16 for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (C104). .. After that, the start winning process 16 accompanying the winning (starting winning) to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 is executed (C105). The details of the special symbol variation process 16 and the start winning process 16 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 390 to 395.

After executing the start winning process 16 (C105), the normal symbol variation process 16 which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device is executed (C106). The details of the normal symbol variation processing 16 will be described later with reference to FIG. 396. After the normal symbol variation process 16 is executed, the through gate passage process 16 accompanying the passage of the sphere at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is executed (C107). The details of the through gate passing process 16 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 397 and 398.

After executing the through gate passing process 16, the V inlet passing process 16 is executed (C108), and then the V passing process 16 (C109) is executed. Here, details of the V-entrance pass processing 16 and the V-pass process 16 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 399 and 400.

After executing the V-passing process 16 (C109), the launch control process is executed (C110), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (C111), and the timer interrupt process 16 is terminated. .. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to determine whether to turn on / off the firing. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, the special symbol variation processing 16 (C104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 390. FIG. 390 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing 16 (C104). This special symbol variation processing 16 (C104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing 16 (see FIG. 389), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the first symbol are displayed. 3 This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed by the symbol display device 81.

In this special symbol variation processing 16, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being hit (C201). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and special. It includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the big hit game of the symbol. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (C201: Yes), the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) cannot be executed, so the present process is terminated as it is.

If it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (C201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is changing (during the special symbol changing) (C202), and the first symbol is displayed. If the display mode of the devices 37a and 37b is not changing (during special symbol change) (C202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 203le (number of pending times of variable display in the special symbol N2) is acquired ( C203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203le is larger than 0 (C204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203le is not 0 (C204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203le is subtracted by 1 (C205), and the value is changed by calculation. A hold ball number command (special figure 2 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203le is set (C206). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (C1001) of the main process (see FIG. 403) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203ld and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203le from the hold ball number command, and the extracted values are used in the RAM 223. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223 lb and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223 lc, respectively.

After the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is set by the process of C206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203 lb is shifted (C207). In the process of C207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203 lb is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b execute the special symbol variation start processing 16 for starting the variation display (C213). The special symbol change start process 16 will be described later with reference to FIG. 391.

On the other hand, in the process of C204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203le is 0 (C204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is determined. The value is acquired (C208), and it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is larger than 0 (C209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is 0 (C209: No), that is, when there is no reserved ball for newly starting the special symbol variation, this process is performed as it is. To finish.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is not 0 (C209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is subtracted (C210) and processed by C210. A hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the changed (subtracted) special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203ld is set (C211). After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the process of C211th, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203la is shifted (C212). After that, the process of C213 is executed, and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the 16th embodiment, when the new special symbol variation (special symbol variation) is executed, the special symbol 2 is preceded by the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter (N1). Special symbol 2 When it is determined that the value of the reserved ball number counter (N2) is larger than 0, the value of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is determined. It is configured to execute the process for starting the special symbol change (special symbol change) (special symbol change start process 16 (see C213)). As a result, the second special symbol can be changed with priority over the first special symbol.

Further, in the process of C202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is changing (C202: Yes), the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it has been done (C214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (C214: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C214, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (C214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbols of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is set (C215). .. The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process 16 (C213) described later with reference to FIG. 391. When this special symbol change start process 16 is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203 la or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203 lb. Will be done. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and if the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is used. Depending on the jackpot AA, jackpot AB, jackpot AC, jackpot AD, jackpot AE, or jackpot AF, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the small hit is according to the value of the small hit type counter C5. One of AA, small hit AB, small hit AC, small hit AD, small hit AE, and small hit E is determined.

In this embodiment, the display mode (lighting mode) of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is configured to notify the player of the lottery result (determination result of each type of counter) of the special symbol this time. If the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, and if it is a small hit, the red LED is turned on and the case is off. The red LED and the green LED are turned on.

When the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot and the jackpot AA is determined, a blue LED is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b to indicate the jackpot AA (for example, the alphabet "a"). When the jackpot AB is determined, the light is turned on in an embodiment indicating the jackpot AB (for example, an embodiment imitating the alphabet "b"), and when the jackpot AC is determined, the jackpot AC is determined. It is lit in a mode indicating AC (for example, a mode imitating the alphabet "c"), and when a jackpot AD is determined, it is lit in a mode indicating a jackpot AD (for example, a mode imitating the alphabet "d"). Let me.

Further, even when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the red LED is displayed for each small hit type (small hit AA, small hit AB, small hit AC, small hit) as in the case of winning the above-mentioned big hit. It is turned on in an manner corresponding to AD, small hit AE and small hit E). The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped. Further, in the present embodiment, a mode (color corresponding to the lottery result of a special symbol) showing the content of each hit type so that the player can grasp each hit type (big hit type or small hit type) determined as described above. , The mode formed from the lighting mode corresponding to each hit type) is configured to light the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, but other configurations may be used, for example, a lottery result or Even when the determined hit types are different, the same lighting mode may be used as the lighting mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b.

Further, in the present embodiment, by confirming the lighting mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, it is possible to grasp the lottery result of the special symbol this time and the determined winning type. However, other configurations may be used, and for example, it may be configured to display that the lottery results of the special symbols are different in a lighting mode divided to the extent that the player can discriminate. ..

After the processing of C215 is completed, it is determined whether the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol corresponding to the variable display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is a big hit of the special symbol (this lottery result). C216). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot with a special symbol (C216: Yes), a jackpot scenario is set based on the jackpot type (C217), and then the jackpot type determined in this jackpot is corresponded to the jackpot. The start setting (big hit setting such as 15 rounds) is executed (C218).

When the jackpot scenario is set in the process of C217, the jackpot scenario table corresponding to the current jackpot type is set among the jackpot scenario tables defined in the jackpot scenario table 202hl.

After finishing the processing of C218, next, the big hit start flag 203hl and the big hit medium flag 203li are set to on (C219), the value of the time saving medium counter 203lg is set to 0 (C220), and the stop command is set (C225). ), End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of C216, if it is determined that the lottery result this time is not a big hit (C216: No), the time saving update process is executed (C221). The details of this time saving update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 392, but when the time saving state is set, various parameters for satisfying the time saving end condition (second special symbol (special figure 2)). The process of updating the number of fluctuations and the total number of fluctuations of the special symbol) is executed. After executing the processing of C221, it is determined whether the lottery result of this time is a small hit (C222), and if it is determined to be a small hit (C222: Yes), the small hit start setting process 16 (C223) is executed. Then, the above-mentioned C225 process is executed later, and this process is terminated. The details of the small hit start setting process 16 (C223) will be described later with reference to FIG. 393.

On the other hand, in the process of C222, if it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is not a small hit (out of place) (C222: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

As described above, in the 16th embodiment, the time saving update process is configured to be executed at the timing when the special symbol change is completed (the timing when the special symbol change time has elapsed). With this configuration, for example, when "Special Figure 2 variation number 1 time" is set as the corresponding time saving end condition that is a part of the time saving end condition, the time saving state is set and the special figure 2 variation is executed. Even if it is done, the period until the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is stopped can be shortened, so that the period for acquiring the special figure 2 hold can be secured.

In addition, the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the 16th embodiment, and may be configured to execute the time saving update process at the start of the change of the special symbol. In this case, the period for one change of the special figure 2 is secured as the time saving state. In order to do so, it may be configured to set "Special Figure 2 Number of fluctuations 2 times" as the response time reduction end condition.

Next, the special symbol change start process 16 (C213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 391. FIG. 391 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start processing 16 (C213). This special symbol variation start process 16 (C213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 16 (see FIG. 390) of the timer interrupt process 16 (see FIG. 389), and is a process executed in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area. "Special symbol big hit", "special symbol small hit", or "special symbol miss" based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area of 203la and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203lb. This is a process for performing a lottery (hit / fail determination) and determining an effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol change start processing 16, first, the first random number counter stored in the common execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area (special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203la, special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203lb). Each value of C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the small hit type counter C5, and the variable type counter CS1 is acquired (C231). Next, the lottery result of the special symbol is drawn based on the special symbol jackpot random number table (special symbol 1 random number 16 table 202la1, special symbol 2 random number 16 table 202la2) corresponding to the special symbol type (special symbol 1, special symbol 2). Acquire (C232) and move to the process of C233.

Specifically, when the special symbol variation executed in this process is the first special symbol (special diagram 1), the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is used as the value of the special symbol 1 random number 16 table 202la1 (Fig. 1). Compare each of the four random numbers set in 380 (b)) one by one. As described above, four random numbers "0 to 3" are set as the random number values that are the jackpots of the first special symbol, and the acquired values of the random number counter C1 per first hit and the random numbers that are the jackpots. If it matches the numerical value, it is determined that it is a big hit of a special symbol. Similarly, the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 and the random number value "10, 11" which is a small hit set in the special symbol 1 random number 16 table 202la1 (see FIG. 380 (b)) are two. If they match, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same determination value determined to be a big hit, but the determination value is not limited to the same, and different random values may be used. With this configuration, the random number value determined to be out of order in the first special symbol is configured to be determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and the bias of the jackpot can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the number is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are determined to be jackpots. The number of random numbers may be set differently. By configuring in this way, the probability of a big hit can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol having the higher jackpot probability, the player It is possible to have expectations for a big hit.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so that the number of determination values determined to be small hits is different. With this configuration, the probability that the lottery result will be a small hit can be different depending on the type of special symbol, and the player is motivated to execute the lottery with the special symbol with the higher probability of small hit. It is possible to play a game in a targeted manner.

In this embodiment, the first random number 16 table 202la is set so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol win a small hit, but only one of the special symbols is a small hit. The first random number 16 table 202la may be set so as to win the prize. Specifically, the special symbol 1 random number 16 table 202la1 corresponding to the first special symbol is not set with a random number value that is a small hit of the special symbol, and the special symbol 2 random number 16 table 202la2 corresponding to the second special symbol is set. Only it is good to set a random number value that is a small hit of a special symbol. With such a configuration, the privilege (small hit game) that can be given to the player can be different according to the type of the special symbol, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot of the special symbol is made to correspond to the predetermined range (0 to 3) of the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and the type of the special symbol is set within the other range (4 to 999). However, as other configurations, for example, a part of the range (for example, 0 to 2) that is a big hit in the first special symbol is set to a small hit in the second special symbol. It may be set as a hit range.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value of the first random number counter C1 and the first random number 16 table 202la are used to draw a special symbol (big hit, small hit, miss). As another configuration, a lottery of special symbols may be performed using a plurality of winning random number tables. For example, whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit using the first random number table. If the lottery result using the first random number table is not a big hit, the second random number table is used to determine whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit. It may be configured. By performing the lottery of the special symbol using a plurality of random number tables in this way, the lottery result of the special symbol can be set more randomly, and the fraudulent act of manipulating the lottery result of the special symbol can be suppressed. ..

In the present embodiment, the value of the first random number counter C1 is used when the lottery of the special symbol is performed, but other configurations may be used, for example, the value of a plurality of random number counters and the first hit. A special symbol may be drawn using the random number 16 table 202la. In this case, for example, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit based on the value of the first random number counter, and the lottery result of the special symbol is small based on the value of the second random number counter. It may be configured to determine whether or not it is a hit.

Returning to FIG. 391, the explanation will be continued. In the processing of C233, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of C232 is a big hit of the special symbol (C233). If it is determined that the jackpot is a special symbol (C233: Yes), the jackpot type is acquired based on the first hit type selection 16 table 202lb corresponding to the special symbol type corresponding to this special symbol lottery (C233: Yes). C234), the display mode at the time of jackpot corresponding to the special symbol and the jackpot type is set (C235), the jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (C236), and the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined this time is used. The corresponding variation pattern command is set (C243), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of C233, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (C233: No), then it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small hit (C237), and it is a small hit. (C237: Yes), the small hit type is acquired based on the small hit type selection 16 table 202 lg according to the special symbol type corresponding to this special symbol lottery (C238), and the special symbol and small are obtained. The display mode for small hits corresponding to the hit type is set (C239), the small hit fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (C240), and the fluctuation corresponding to the small hit fluctuation pattern determined this time is determined. A pattern command is set (C243), and this process ends.

Further, in the processing of C237, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit (C237: No), that is, when it is determined that the current lottery result is out of order, the outlier corresponding to the type of the special symbol. The time display mode is set (C241), the variation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined based on the number of reserved balls (C242), and the variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern at the time of disconnection determined this time is set (C243). This process ends.

Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the fluctuation pattern is determined regardless of the number of reserved balls, whereas the special symbol is determined. If the lottery result is out of the question, the fluctuation pattern is configured to be different depending on the number of reserved balls. Specifically, the larger the number of reserved balls at the timing when the special symbol variation start process 16 (C213) is executed, the easier it is to determine the variation pattern with a short variation time. As a result, the period until the lottery result of the special symbol does not give the player a privilege and the lottery result (missing) is displayed can be shortened as the number of reserved balls increases, so that it is executed per unit time. In order to increase the number of lottery of special symbols to be performed, the player can be enthusiastically played in order to always secure a large number of reserved balls. In addition, when it is not possible to secure a large number of reserved balls, it is possible to lengthen the time for changing one special symbol, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the special symbol does not change during the game. It is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from being reduced.

In the present embodiment, the variation pattern is configured to be different based on the number of reserved balls at the timing when the process of the special symbol variation start process 16 (C213) is executed, but other than that, for example, the special symbol is configured. Even if it is configured to shorten the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation pattern being executed on the condition that the number of reserved balls becomes a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more while the fluctuation is in progress. good. With this configuration, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game in order to secure a large number of reserved balls even while the special symbol is fluctuating.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is different based on the number of reserved balls only when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, but even when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the reserved balls are held. The fluctuation pattern may be different based on the number, or the fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time may be easily determined as the number of reserved balls increases. Further, the number of reserved balls referred to when determining the fluctuation pattern may be a value obtained by adding the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, or the first special symbol and the first. Of the two special symbols, only the value of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol on which the special symbol variation start processing is preferentially executed may be used, or the special symbol on the side subject to the special symbol variation start processing executed this time may be used. Only the value of the number of reserved balls of the symbol may be used.

Next, the time saving update process (C221) will be described with reference to FIG. 392. FIG. 392 is a flowchart showing the time saving update process (C221).

In the time saving update process (C221), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving medium counter 203 lg of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (C251). The time-saving / medium-time counter 203 lg is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of the normal symbol. If the value of the time-saving / medium-time counter 203 lg is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 has a high normal symbol. It indicates that it is in a probability state, and if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203 lg is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state of a normal symbol. In the 16th embodiment, two gaming states can be set. Specifically, two gaming states can be set: a normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) and a time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol). It is configured in. That is, in the present embodiment, the probability state of the special symbol is always constant, and only the probability state of the normal symbol can be variably set. Therefore, a time-saving state may be used as a term indicating a high-probability state of a normal symbol, and a normal state may be used as a term indicating a low-probability state of a normal symbol.

When the value of the time reduction counter 203 lg is 0 (C251: No), since the time reduction state is not set, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter 203 lg is 1 or more (C251: Yes), that is, when it is determined that the current state is in the time reduction state, the value of the time reduction counter 203 lg is subtracted by 1 (C252). Next, it is determined whether or not the current special figure change is a change of the second special symbol (special figure 2) (C253). If the current special figure fluctuation is the fluctuation of special figure 2 (C253: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation count counter 203ll is subtracted by 1 (C254), and the remaining time reduction command indicating the values of various counters is set. Then (C255), the process proceeds to C256.

In the process of C255, a command for the number of remaining time reductions indicating the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203 lb and the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203 ll is set. The remaining time reduction command set here is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 as a part of the state command indicating the game state by the external output process (see C1001 in FIG. 403) of the main process (see FIG. 403) described later. It is output. On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when it is determined that the status command (remaining time reduction command) has been received by the command determination process 16 (see C3113 in FIG. 406), it is included in the received command (C3212 in FIG. 406). Information is extracted and the current game state (remaining time reduction number) is stored in the state storage area 223hlh. As a result, the remaining period of the time saving state currently set by the voice lamp control device 113 can be predicted (determined), and the effect mode can be set according to the remaining period of the time saving state.

In this embodiment, each time the time saving update process (see C221 in FIG. 392) is executed, the main control device 110 is configured to output the remaining time saving number command for indicating the remaining time saving number. , Not limited to this, for example, to output a time saving end condition command to indicate the time saving end condition set at the time when the time saving state is set (when the jackpot game ends) to the voice lamp control device 113. The number of times a command (variation pattern command) indicating a special figure variation output from the main controller 110 side is received after extracting the time reduction end condition from the time reduction end condition command received on the voice lamp control device 113 side. May be accumulated, and it may be configured to determine whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the accumulated value. With such a configuration, the processing load on the main control device 110 side can be reduced.

In the processing of C253, if the variation of the special figure this time is not the variation of the special figure 2 (C253: No), the processing of C254 and C255 is not performed, and the process proceeds to the processing of C256.

In the process of C256, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203 lg is 0 (C256). When the value of the time reduction counter 203 lg is 0 (C256: Yes), it means that the time reduction end condition (common time reduction end condition) is satisfied. Therefore, it is determined whether the corresponding time reduction end condition is satisfied among the time reduction end conditions. The value of the special figure 2 fluctuation count counter 203 ll is reset to 0 (C257), and the process proceeds to C260.

In the process of C256, if the value of the time reduction counter 203 lg is not 0 (C256: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation frequency counter 203 ll is 0 (C258). Special figure 2 When the value of the fluctuation count counter 203ll is 0 (C258: Yes), it means that the time reduction end condition (corresponding time reduction end condition) is satisfied. The value of the time-saving / medium-time counter 203 lg for determining is reset to 0 (C259), and then the process proceeds to C260. On the other hand, if the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation count counter 203ll is not 0 in the processing of C258 (C258: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

In the process of C260, the game state is set to the normal state (C260), the state command indicating the normal state is set (C261), and then this process is terminated.

As described above, the time saving update process (C221 in FIG. 392) is a plurality of time saving end conditions (part of the common time saving end condition and a part of the common time saving end condition) that can be satisfied based on the number of changes of the special symbol among the time saving end conditions. It is configured so that the establishment status of the corresponding time reduction end condition) can be discriminated, and when any of the time reduction end conditions is satisfied, the value of the parameter for satisfying the other time reduction end condition is also reset. As a result, no matter which parameter value the time saving end condition is satisfied with, the state after the time saving state is ended can be unified.

In the present embodiment, as the time saving end condition, the common time saving end condition (first end condition, small hit that is established at the time of winning the big hit) is set in common regardless of the time saving state set based on any big hit type. It is set according to the second end condition that is satisfied after the end of the game, the third end condition that is established when the number of special figure fluctuations (cumulative total of special figure 1 and special figure 2) reaches 99 times, and the jackpot type. It is configured to set the corresponding time saving end condition (special figure 2 condition that is satisfied when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number), but the condition for ending the time saving state is not limited to this. For example, a small hit end condition that is satisfied when the number of small hit winnings reaches a predetermined number of times or when the number of times a specific small hit type is selected reaches a predetermined number of times may be set. In this case, the small hit end condition may be set as the common time reduction end condition, or may be set as the corresponding time reduction end condition. In addition, when an end lottery means for drawing a lottery as to whether or not to end the time saving state based on the execution of the special symbol change (special figure change) is provided, and the lottery result of the end lottery means is the lottery result for ending the time saving state. In addition, it may be configured to end the time saving state.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the time saving state ends, so that the player can be made to execute the game in the time saving state while giving a feeling of excitement. .. In addition, when a predetermined continuation condition (for example, a condition that is satisfied when a lottery result indicating a specific deviation is obtained as a lottery result of a special symbol) is satisfied during the time reduction state, various parameters related to the time reduction end condition are set for a predetermined period. It may be configured not to be updated. Furthermore, only in the time saving state set when a specific jackpot type is selected, until a predetermined period elapses after the time saving state is set (for example, until the number of special map fluctuations reaches 30 times). It may be configured so that various parameters related to the time saving end condition are not updated. With such a configuration, it is possible to surely set a period in which the time saving state continues, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Further, a discriminating means capable of discriminating that the ball did not win the V winning opening 650a even though the small hit game was executed is provided, and the ball does not win the V winning opening 650a by the discriminating means. It may be configured to set the time saving forced end condition that is satisfied when it is determined that the case has occurred as the common time saving end condition. With this configuration, the small hit type set when the small hit is won is discriminated, and the discriminant result is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a ball in a specific area in the V winning opening 650a). When it is determined that it is a jackpot game that is disadvantageous to the player when passing through (a jackpot game with a small number of rounds or a jackpot game in which a game state (time saving state) advantageous to the player is not set after the end). It is possible to impose a penalty on a player who performs an illegal game such as aiming for the next small hit winning without firing a ball during the small hit game.

Next, the small hit start setting process 16 (C223) will be described with reference to FIG. 393. FIG. 393 is a flowchart showing the small hit start setting process 16 (C223). In this small hit start setting process 16 (C223), a scenario for opening and closing a solenoid (V inlet solenoid) 209 for opening the V winning door 650b when a small hit is won in a special symbol lottery is set. The process is executed.

In the small hit start setting process 16 (C223), first, a scenario (hit scenario) corresponding to the set small hit type is set based on the small hit scenario 16 table 202li (C291). Next, the small hit type corresponding to the small hit type determined as the big hit type value at the time of passing V is set (C292), the start of the small hit corresponding to the small hit type is set (C293), and the small hit medium flag 203 lk. Is set to on (C294), and this process ends.

Next, the start winning process 16 (C105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 394. FIG. 394 is a flowchart showing a start winning process 16 (C105) executed in the timer interrupt process 16 (see FIG. 389) in the present embodiment. This start winning process 16 (C105) is executed in the timer interrupt process 16 (see FIG. 389), and the first ball opening (winning opening) 64 or the second winning opening (winning opening) 640 is won. It is a process for determining the presence or absence of (starting prize), acquiring various random number counters when there is a starting winning, and executing the hold processing of the value.

When the start winning process 16 (see C105 in FIG. 394) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first entry (winning opening) 64 (starting winning) (C301). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port (winning opening) 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball opening (winning opening) 64 (C301: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld (the number of holdings of the variation display in the special symbol N1) is set. Acquire (C302). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (C303).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball opening (winning opening) 64 (C301: No), or even if there is a winning in the first ball opening (winning opening) 64, the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter. If the value (N1) of 203ld is not less than 4 (C303: No), the process proceeds to C307. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening (winning opening) 64 (C301: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is less than 4 (C303: Yes). The value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is added by 1 (C304). Then, a hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203ld changed by the calculation is set (C305).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (C1001) of the main process (see FIG. 403) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203ld from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223lb of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of C305, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated by C103 of the timer interrupt processing 16 (see FIG. 389) described above. , The second hit random number counter C4, the small hit type counter C5, and the variable type counter CS1 are set in the empty hold area (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203la of the RAM 203. Store in the first area (C306). In the process of C306, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, in the processes of C307 to C312, the same process is executed for the winning of the second ball entrance (winning opening) 640 for the processes of C301 to C306. The only difference is that the hold processing for the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed for the winning of the second ball opening (winning opening) 640, and the other processing is the same. The explanation is omitted. Then, when it is determined in the processing of C307 that the ball has not won the second entry opening (winning opening) 640 (C307: No), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203le is less than 4. If not (C309: No), the look-ahead process 16 is executed after the process of C312 (C313). After that, this process ends.

Next, the look-ahead process 16 (C313) will be described with reference to FIG. 395. FIG. 395 is a flowchart showing the look-ahead process 16 (C313). When the look-ahead process 16 (C313) is executed, it is first determined whether or not there is a new prize (C321). If there is no new prize (C321: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if there is a new prize (C321: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the prize is a prize of the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) (C322).

In the processing of C322, if it is determined that the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (special drawing 1) (C322: Yes), the starting winning processing 16 (see C105 of FIG. 394) is processed by C306 or C312. Using the acquired various counter values, special symbol 1 random number 16 table 202la1 (see FIG. 380 (b)), special figure 1 big hit type selection 16 table 202lb1 (see FIG. 381 (b)), and special figure 1 small hit type selection. 16 The lottery result, the big hit type and the small hit type are acquired based on the table 202 lg1 (see FIG. 383 (b)) (C323), and the process proceeds to C325.

On the other hand, in the processing of C322, if it is determined that the winning is the winning of the second special symbol (special figure 2) (C322: No), the special symbol 2 random number 16 table 202la2 (see FIG. 380 (c)), special The lottery result, the big hit type and the small hit type are acquired based on FIG. 2 big hit type selection 16 table 202lb2 (see FIG. 381 (c)) and special figure 2 small hit type selection 16 table 202lb2 (see FIG. 383 (c)). (C324), the process proceeds to C325. In the process of C325, a winning information command including information for indicating each lottery result (big hit determination result, big hit type, small hit determination result, small hit type) acquired in the above-mentioned C323 or C324 process is set ( C325). Then, this process is terminated.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the look-ahead process 16 (see C313 in FIG. 395) in the 16th embodiment, when the special figure change based on the corresponding winning information is executed in addition to the above-mentioned look-ahead result. The set fluctuation pattern (variation time) is also configured so that it can be discriminated in advance. Specifically, it is configured to acquire the value of the variation type counter CS1 by the process of C306 or C312 of the start winning process 16 (see C105 of FIG. 394), and C323 of the look-ahead process 16 (see C313 of FIG. 395). Alternatively, in the processing of C324, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined in advance based on the variation pattern 16 table 202le (see FIG. 385), and the determination result is included in the winning information in the processing of C325. There is. As a result, it is possible to predict at what timing (after how many seconds) the special figure change corresponding to the winning information stored on hold is executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

Next, the normal symbol variation processing 16 (C106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 396. FIG. 396 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation processing 16 (C106). This normal symbol variation process 16 (C106) is executed in the timer interrupt process 16 (see FIG. 389), and the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a are executed. It is a process for controlling such things.

In the normal symbol variation processing 16, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (C601). The hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol) includes the process in which the display indicating the hit is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 and the process in which the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is performed. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (C6011: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (C601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (C602), and the second symbol display device is used. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (C602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203 lf (number of holdings of variable display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (C603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203 lf is larger than 0 (C604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203 lf is 0 (C604 :. No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203 lf is not 0 (C604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203 lf is subtracted by 1 (C605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203 lc is shifted (C606). In the process of C606, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203 lc is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203 lc is acquired (C607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203 lg of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (C608). The time-saving / medium-time counter 203 lg is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal symbol. If the value of the time-saving / medium-time counter 203 lg is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal symbol. If the value of the time reduction counter 203 lg is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

When the value of the time reduction counter 203 lg is 1 or more (C608: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time reduction state of the normal symbol, so it is acquired by the processing of C607. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the random number 16 table 202 lc per normal symbol for high probability (see FIG. 380 (d)), the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (C609). ). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number 16 table 202 lc per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a hit of a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", it is determined to be a hit. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 380 (d)).

In the processing of C608, when the value of the counter 203 lg during the time reduction is 0 (C608: No), the process proceeds to the processing of C610. In the processing of C610, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so that the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of C607 is low. Based on the random number 16 table 202 lc per ordinary symbol for probability time (see FIG. 380 (d)), the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is a hit is acquired (C610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number 16 table 202 lc per ordinary symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a hit of a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,29 to 239", it is determined. It is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (see FIG. 380 (d)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of C609 or C610 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (C611), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (C611: Yes). Next, the type per normal figure (A per normal figure, B per normal figure) is set using the 16 table 202ld for selecting the type per normal figure (C612). Specifically, the value of the second hit type counter C6 is compared with the random number value stored in the type selection 16 table 202ld per normal figure. As described above, when the current gaming state is the time saving state (high probability state of the normal figure), if the value of the second hit type counter C6 is in the range of "0,1", it is A per normal figure. If it is in the range of "2 to 99", it is determined that the value is B per normal figure (see FIG. 382 (a)). Alternatively, when the current gaming state is the normal state (low probability state of the normal figure), if the value of the second hit type counter C6 is in the range of "0", it is determined that the game is A per normal figure, and " If it is in the range of "1 to 99", it is determined that the value is B per normal figure (see FIG. 382 (a)).

Next, the display mode at the time of hitting based on the setting result of C612 is set (C613), and the process proceeds to C615. In the process of C613, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). On the other hand, in the processing of C611, if it is determined that the normal symbol is not a hit (C611: No), it is the case that the current normal symbol lottery (normal symbol lottery) is out, so the display mode at the time of the out is set. (C614), the process proceeds to C615.

In the processing of C615, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203 lg is 1 or more (C615), and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203 lg is 1 or more (C615: Yes), the normal figure variation pattern selection table 202 lf Of these, the normal map fluctuation time (2 seconds) is set using the specified content corresponding to the time saving state (normal map high accuracy) (C617), and then this process is terminated. In the processing of C615, when the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203 lg is 0 (C615: No), the specified content corresponding to the normal state (low accuracy of the normal figure) in the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202 lf is used. The figure fluctuation time (2 to 60 seconds) is set (C616), and then various contents set in this process (value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203 lf, the lottery result of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol). ) Is set (C623), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of C602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (C602: Yes), whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. Is determined (C618). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of C616 or the processing of C617 before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of C618, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (C618: No), the process proceeds to C623 and the present process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of C618, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (C618: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (C619). In the processing of C619, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the processing of C613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) in the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is out of order and the display mode is set by the processing of C614, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to. When the stop display is set by the process of C619, and then the second symbol display update process (see C1008) of the main process (see FIG. 403) is executed, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. When the process is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of C613 or the process of C614.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process 16 is a hit of the ordinary symbol. (C620). If the result of this lottery is a hit of a normal symbol (C620: Yes), the opening pattern of the electric accessory is set according to the type of the normal symbol and the game state (C621), and the opening / closing control process of the electric accessory is set. (C622), then, the process proceeds to C623, a command for indicating the content of the game per game set by the process of C621 is set, and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of C621, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see C1006) of the main process (see FIG. 403) is executed, the electric accessory 640a The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time set in the processing of C616 or the processing of C617 is completed. On the other hand, in the processing of C620, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (C620: No), the processing of C621 and C622 is skipped, the process shifts to the processing of C623, and the out-of-ordinary fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped. Set the command indicating, and end this process.

Next, the through gate passing process 16 (C107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 397. The through gate passing process 16 (C107) determines whether or not a sphere has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, and when the sphere has passed, the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 is used. This is a process for acquiring and holding.

Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (C431). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (C4311: Yes), the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203 lf (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (C432). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203 lf is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (C433).

Whether the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (C4311: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203 lf If the value (M) is not less than 4 (C433: No), the process proceeds to C437. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 and the value (M) of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203 lf is less than 4 (C433: Yes), the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203 lf The value (M) of (M) is added by 1 (C434), and the normal figure reserved ball number command is set (C435). Then, the second random number counter C4 updated by C103 of the timer interrupt processing 16 described above, the value of the second hit type counter C6, and the second updated by the processing of C1002 of the main processing (see FIG. 403) described later. The value of the variation type counter CS2 is stored in the first area (C436) of the empty hold area (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203 lc of the RAM 203, and the process proceeds to C437. ..

When storing the value of the second random number counter C4 in the first area of the empty hold area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203 lc, the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203 lf is referred to, and the value is used. If it is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

In the process of C437, the normal map look-ahead process is executed (C437), and then the present process is terminated. The details of this normal symbol look-ahead processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 398, but it is based on each counter value stored in the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203 lc corresponding to the acquired normal map hold in the C436 process. Then, by the time the normal symbol change (normal figure change) is executed, the process of determining the lottery result and the change pattern of the normal symbol hold is executed in advance.

Next, with reference to FIG. 398, a normal map look-ahead process (C437) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described. FIG. 398 is a flowchart showing a normal map look-ahead process (C437) executed in the through gate passage process 16 (see FIG. 397).

In the normal map look-ahead processing (C437), first, a random number 16 table 202 lc per normal symbol (see FIG. 380 (d)), a type selection 16 table 202 ld per normal symbol (see FIG. 382 (a)), and a normal map variation pattern. The lottery result is acquired based on the selection table (C451), the winning information command for indicating each lottery result is set (C452), and then this process is terminated. The winning information command set here (the winning information command indicating the look-ahead result of the general drawing) is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 as the main process described later (see FIG. 403). ) In the external output process (C1001), the information is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether the received winning information command is the winning information command related to the special figure fluctuation or the winning information command related to the normal figure fluctuation, and stores the corresponding winning information storage area 223la. .. The prize information stored here is the lottery result of the symbol change at the timing before the symbol change (special figure change or normal figure change) corresponding to the prize information command is actually executed. Refer to when setting the suggestion effect.

Next, the V inlet passage process 16 (C108) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 399. FIG. 399 is a flowchart showing the V inlet passage process 16 (C108) executed in the timer interrupt process 16 (see FIG. 389).

In the V entrance passage processing 16 (C108), it is first determined whether or not the current is a hit game (small hit game) (C501), and if the current is not a hit game (small hit game) (C501). : No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current is a hit game (small hit game) (C501: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the V winning opening is open, that is, whether or not the small hit game is in progress. (C502). In the process of C502, if it is determined that the V winning opening opening period is in progress (C502: Yes), a V entrance passage command is set (C503), and this process is terminated. If it is determined that the game is not in the small hit game (C502: No), the ball wins in the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 even though the game is not a small hit game, so an error command is set. (C504), and this process is terminated.

The V inlet passage command set in the process of C503 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (C1001) of the main process (see FIG. 403) executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V entrance passage command, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the game balls that have passed through the V entrance, and transmits a command for executing the effect based on the V entrance passage to the display control device 114. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect during the small hit game based on the winning of the V winning device 650.

Next, the V-passing process 16 (C109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 400. FIG. 400 is a flowchart showing the V-passing process 16 (C109) executed in the timer interrupt process 16 (see FIG. 389).

When the V-passing process 16 (C109) is executed, it is first determined whether or not there is V-passing, that is, whether or not the ball has won a prize in a specific region (V gate (V region)) in the V winning opening 650a (C601). If it is determined that the prize has not been won (C6011: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the prize has been won (C6011: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current V valid period is in effect (C602). In the processing of C602, when the progress of the small hit scenario set during the small hit game is within a specific period, it is determined that the V valid period is in progress, and in other cases, it is not in the V valid period. To determine.

In the processing of C602, if it is determined that the V valid period is in progress (C602: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current small hit game is in progress (C603), and if it is in the small hit game (C603). : Yes), acquire the V-passing jackpot type value corresponding to the small hit type of this small hit game (C604), set the V flag corresponding to the jackpot type to ON (C605), and set the time saving medium counter 203 lg. It is set to 0 (C606), the variation counter 203ll of the special figure 2 is set to 0 (C607), and the process proceeds to C608.

That is, in the processes of C604 to C607, the process for executing the big hit game is executed based on the fact that the game ball wins the V winning opening 650a during the small hit game. On the other hand, in the processing of C603, when it is determined that the small hit game is not in progress (C603: No), it is not necessary to perform a new processing for executing the big hit game, so the processing of C604 to C607 is skipped. , C608 shifts to processing.

In the process of C608, a V-pass command is set (C608), and this process is terminated. The V passage command set here is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the same manner as other commands set in the control process of the main control device 110. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V passage command, for example, when the V passage command is received during the small hit game, the V challenge executed during the small hit game is successful, and the small hit game is followed. , Perform an effect to show that the jackpot game is executed. Further, when the V passing command is received during the big hit game, the same effect as when the V passing command is received during the small hit game is executed. On the other hand, when the V passing command is not received at a predetermined timing during the small hit game, a disappointing effect indicating that the ball did not pass through the specific area during the small hit game is executed.

In the present embodiment, only a command (V passing command) for indicating that the ball has won (passed) a specific area in the V winning opening 650a is set, but the V winning opening 650a is used for a game. It may be configured to set a command (for example, a V non-passing command) for indicating that the ball has not won a prize. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can perform an appropriate effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, by using the above-mentioned configuration, it is possible to quickly determine that the game ball is clogged in the V winning device 650.

On the other hand, in the process of C602, if it is determined that the current period is not in the V valid period (C602: No), an error command is set (C609), and this process is terminated. By performing the processing of C609, a state in which the game ball wins the V winning opening 650a outside the V valid period, that is, when a game in which the game ball is illegally won the V winning opening 650a is performed, or the V winning opening is performed. It is possible to promptly notify the outside when a defect (ball jam, etc.) occurs in the ball flow path in the mouth 650a.

Next, the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 401. FIG. 401 is a flowchart showing the contents of the NMI interrupt process. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (C801). That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 402. FIG. 402 is a flowchart showing the contents of the start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (C901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (C902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (C903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 122 provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (C904), and if it is turned on (C904: Yes), the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side is used. A payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 (C912). On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (C904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (C905), and if it is not stored (C905: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, in this case as well, the payout initialization device 111, which is the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side, is initialized. Send a command (C912).

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (C905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (C906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (C907: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, so in order to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side. A payout initialization command is sent (C912). The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213 (C913), sets an initial value, and can start payout control of the game ball. Will be. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process is executed. Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the initialization process of the RAM 203 is similarly executed (C914). After that, the process proceeds to C910. In the RAM initialization process, the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0, and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on, the power off occurrence information is stored, and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (C907: Yes), the data is backed up to the RAM 203. Clear the power outage occurrence information while retaining the data (C908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff is transmitted (C909). Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

Then, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 (C910), and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects (C911). Next, the interrupt is permitted and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 403, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 403 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of C1001 to C1008 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of C1011 and C1012 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 403), first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process 16 (see FIG. 389), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) of is executed (C1001). Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is prize detection information detected by the switch reading process of C101 in the timer interrupt process 16 (see FIG. 389), and if there is prize detection information, the number of acquired balls is calculated for the payout control device 111. Send the corresponding prize ball command. In addition, various commands set in the special symbol variation processing 16 (see FIG. 390), the start winning processing 16 (see FIG. 394), the V entrance passage processing 16 (see FIG. 399), and the V passage processing 16 (see FIG. 400) are executed. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, the ending command set in the jackpot control process 16 (see FIG. 404), and various commands set in the small hit control process 16 (see FIG. 405) described later are sent to the voice lamp control device 113. Send. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the values of the variable type counter CS1 and the second variable type counter CS2 are updated (C1002). Specifically, various variable type counters (variable type counter CS1 and second variable type counter CS2) are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the various variation type counters are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Although detailed description is omitted, in the 16th embodiment, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is used when referring to the variation pattern of the special symbol variation (special symbol variation), and the value of the second variation type counter CS2 is used. The value is usually used when referring to the fluctuation pattern of the symbol fluctuation (normal chart fluctuation). Then, the special map fluctuation and the normal map fluctuation are configured to be executed by the establishment of a separate and independent opportunity. As a result, even if the timing to update the values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the second fluctuation type counter CS2 and the contents to be updated are synchronized, the counter values used when actually executing each symbol variation are synchronized. No. Therefore, the processing content in the main control device 110 can be simplified without affecting the game.

Not limited to this, the process of updating the values of various variable type counters may be configured so as not to be synchronized. For example, the value of one variable type counter may be executed every time the main process is executed a predetermined number of times. It may be configured to update only the value of the other variable type counter every time it is executed a specific number of times different from the predetermined number of times described above. By making the update contents of the various variable type counters different in this way, it is possible to suppress that the value of the other variable type counter is determined based on the acquired value of one variable type counter.

Further, in the 16th embodiment, the fluctuation type counter CS1 referred to when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation and the second fluctuation type counter CS2 referred to when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the normal map fluctuation are used. It is provided separately and is configured to update each counter value periodically, but the variation pattern is not limited to this, and is not limited to this, for example, based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. May be configured to select.

When the variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 are updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (C1003), and then when the special symbol is in the jackpot state. , The jackpot effect is executed, and the jackpot control process 16 for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (C1004). In the jackpot control process 16, the special winning opening 65a is opened by opening the winning door 65b for each round in the jackpot state, and the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed, or a ball is placed in the specific winning opening 65a. Determine if you have won the specified number. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process 16 (C1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 403), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process 16 (see FIG. 389). Further, the details of the jackpot control process 16 will be described later with reference to FIG. 404.

Next, the small hit control process 16 (C1005) is executed. The small hit control process 16 (C1005) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 405. After that, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port (winning opening) 640 is executed (C1006). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of C622 of the normal symbol variation process 16 (see FIG. 396), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of C616 or the processing of C617 in the normal symbol variation processing 16 are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is executed (C1007). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the processing of C236, the processing of C240, or the processing of C242 of the special symbol variation start processing 16 (see FIG. 391), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed. , The first symbol display device 37a, 37b starts. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is used. Turns off and turns on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. Turns off and the red LED turns on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the C236 process, the C240 process, or the C242 process of the special symbol variation start process 16 (see FIG. 391) is completed, the variation time is completed. The change display executed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is terminated, and the stop symbol (first) is set in the display mode set by the processes of C235, C239 and C241 of the special symbol change start process 16 (see FIG. 391). 1 symbol) is displayed as a stop display (lighting display) on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (C1008). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of C616 or the process of C617 of the normal symbol variation process 16 (see FIG. 396), the variation display is started in the second symbol display device. do. As a result, in the second symbol display device, variable display is performed in which the symbol of "○" and the symbol of "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of C619 of the normal symbol change process 16 (see FIG. 396), the second symbol display device is executed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the processing of C613 or the processing of C619 of the normal symbol variation processing 16 (see FIG. 396) after ending the variation display. indicate.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (C1009), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (C1009: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (C1010). If the predetermined time has already passed (C1010: Yes), the process is shifted to C1001 and each process after C1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (C1010: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (C1011, C1012).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (C1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 are updated by the same method as the processing of C1002 (C1012).

Here, since the execution time of each process of C1001 to C1008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, various variable type counters can be updated at random.

In a configuration in which the variable type counter CS1 and the second variable type counter CS2 are updated as in the 16th embodiment, in order to make the update timings of the various variable type counters different, for example, in the main process C1002. In the process, any variation type counter may be updated, and in the process of C1012, only one variation type counter (for example, the variation type counter CS1) may be updated.

Further, in the processing of C1009, if the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (C1009: Yes), the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after C1013 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (C1013), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (C1014). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (C1015), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (C1016), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of C1009 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in C1001 to C1008, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of C1011 and C1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cutoff state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of C1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of C1001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer has a predetermined value (in the process of initial setting). By setting the initial value), it is possible to start from the process of C1001. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process 16 (C1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 404. FIG. 404 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 16 (C1004). This jackpot control process 16 (C1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 403), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and the variable winning device is used. This is a process for opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a of 65.

In the jackpot control process 16 (C1004), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start flag 203hl is on (C1201). This jackpot start flag 203hl is set to ON in the processing of C219 of the special symbol variation processing 16 (see C104 of FIG. 390). If it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203hl is on (C1201: Yes), the opening command is set (C1202), the jackpot middle flag 203li is set to on, and the jackpot start flag 203hl is set to off (C1203). After that, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of C1201, when it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203hl is off (C1201: No), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot middle flag 203li is on (C1204).

If it is determined that the jackpot middle flag 203li is off in the processing of C1204 (C1204: No), this processing is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203li is on (C1204: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current time is the start timing of a new round (C1215). If it is determined in the processing of C1205 that the current time is the start timing of a new round (C1205: Yes), the specific winning opening corresponding to the number of rounds is set to be opened (C1206) (opening / closing of the specific winning opening 65a). The specific winning opening solenoid is set to be turned on so that the door 65b is in the open state), then a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (C1207), and then this process is terminated.

The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output process (C1001) of the main process (see FIG. 403) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the 16th embodiment, when a plurality of jackpot games are executed in a state where a predetermined continuous condition is satisfied, the number of rounds executed during the plurality of jackpot games is accumulated. The cumulative number of rounds is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Then, this cumulative number of rounds determines whether or not the continuous condition is satisfied when a command indicating that the jackpot game has started (winning the jackpot) is received on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and is continuous. If it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the value of the cumulative number of rounds counter is updated based on the newly received number of rounds command without clearing the value of the cumulative number of rounds counter that accumulates the received rounds command. However, the cumulative number of rounds is displayed in a display mode showing the update result.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the jackpot games executed consecutively are one jackpot game, so that the player is set with one jackpot game. You can show a lot of maximum number of rounds. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while having a sense of expectation for the size of the privilege (the number of prize balls) provided by one big hit game.

In the present embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to execute the process of determining whether or not the continuous condition is satisfied and the process of accumulating the number of rounds, but the cumulative rounds are not limited to this. A part of the process for executing the number display may be configured to be executed on the main control device 110 side. For example, as a continuous condition for executing the cumulative round number display, it is executed after the jackpot game is completed. A continuous condition is set that is satisfied when the jackpot game is executed within a predetermined number of times of the special figure fluctuation (for example, 5 times of the special figure 2 fluctuation), and the cumulative number of rounds of the jackpot game is measured on the main control device 110 side. A cumulative round count counter is provided, and a command indicating the value of the cumulative round count counter is set as a round count command. Then, when the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed five times after the jackpot game is completed, the value of the cumulative round number counter is cleared.

With this configuration, if the continuous condition is satisfied when the jackpot game is executed, the value obtained by accumulating the number of rounds of the previous jackpot game is set as the value of the cumulative round number counter. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the round number display mode to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on the round number (cumulative round number) information included in the command. Only by itself, the cumulative number of rounds can be notified to the player.

In addition, other conditions may be set as continuous conditions for cumulatively displaying the number of rounds executed in a plurality of jackpot games. For example, even after the jackpot game ends, a predetermined period (for example, special figure 2 variation) may be set. (Period until 10 seconds have passed since the end of the jackpot game) When the jackpot game is executed during the period when the jackpot game end screen that is continuously displayed is displayed ( For example, the jackpot game is executed during the period that is satisfied (when the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery) or the specific gaming state (for example, the time saving state) is set as the gaming state. It may be configured to set the condition that is satisfied when it is done. In addition, both the value of the above-mentioned cumulative round number counter (cumulative number of rounds) and the number of rounds of the current jackpot game (number of single rounds) are displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It may be configured.

In the process of C1205, if it is determined that the current time is not the start timing of a new round (C1205: No), then it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the specific winning opening is satisfied (C1208). When it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening is satisfied (C1208: Yes), the specific winning opening is closed (the special winning opening solenoid 65f2 is turned off so that the opening / closing door 65b of the specific winning opening 65a is closed. (C1209), and then the process is terminated. In the process of C1208, when it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening is not satisfied (C1208: No), then it is determined whether or not the present is the start timing of the ending effect (C1210). If it is determined that the current time is the start timing of the ending effect (C1210: Yes), the ending command is set (C1211), and then this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of C1208 that the closing condition is satisfied, the closing condition is cleared, and it is not determined that the closing condition is satisfied again in the next and subsequent jackpot control processes.

On the other hand, in the process of C1210, when it is determined that the present is not the start timing of the ending effect (C1210: No), it is determined whether or not the present is the end timing of the ending effect (C1212). If it is determined that the current time is the end timing of the ending effect (C1212: Yes), the time reduction end condition corresponding to the jackpot type is set to the time reduction medium counter 203 lg and the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203 ll (C1213), and the jackpot type is set. A state command corresponding to the later game state is set (C1214), the end of the jackpot is set (C1215), and then this process is ended.

Here, the values set to the values of each counter in the processing of C1213 are different depending on the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game being executed (see FIGS. 381 and 383), and the jackpot type AA and the jackpot are different. When the types AD to AF are set, "99" is set in the time saving medium counter 203 ll, and "-" indicating that the time saving number counter 203 ll is not set is set in the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203 ll. As a result, after the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot type AA, the corresponding time-saving end condition that is established based on the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 2 is not set as the time-saving end condition, and the common time-saving end condition (big hit winning, small hit game) is not set. End, the number of special map fluctuations reaches 99 times) will be set.

When the jackpot AB is set as the jackpot type, "99" is set in the time reduction / medium counter 203 lg, "5" is set in the special figure 2 fluctuation frequency counter 203ll, and when the jackpot AC is set, the time reduction / medium counter. "99" is set in 203 lg, and "1" is set in the special figure 2 fluctuation frequency counter 203 ll.

Further, when the big hit game is executed based on the small hit winning, the value of the big hit type corresponding to the set small hit type is referred to, and as shown in FIG. 383, the small hit is configured. At the end of the big hit game based on the small hit winning with the types AA and AE set, "99" is set in the time saving medium counter 203 lg and "5" is set in the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203 ll, and the small hit types AB and AD are set. At the end of the big hit game based on the small hit winning in which is set, "99" is set in the time saving medium counter 203 lg, and "-" indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203 ll is not set is set. On the other hand, at the end of the big hit game based on the small hit winning in which the small hit type AC is set, "0" is set in the time saving medium counter 203 lg and "0" is set in the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203 ll.

On the other hand, in the process of C1212, if it is determined that the current time is not the end timing of the ending effect (C1212: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, the small hit control process 16 (C1005) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 405. FIG. 405 is a flowchart showing the small hit control process 16 (C1005). This small hit control process 16 (C1005) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 403), and a command setting for executing various effects according to the small hit on the voice lamp control device 113 and a V prize are won. This is a process for controlling the operation of the V winning solenoid for opening and closing the V winning door 600b attached to the mouth 650a.

In the small hit control process 16 (C1005), first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the small hit game (C1301). In the process of C1301, it is determined whether the small hit scenario set in the process of C291 of the small hit start setting process 16 (see C223 in FIG. 393) is the content indicating the start of the small hit game. When it is determined that it is the start timing of the small hit game (C1301: Yes), the small hit opening command is set (C1302), the small hit medium flag 203 lk is set to ON (C1303), and the operation for small hit is performed. Set the start of the scenario (C1304), and then end this process.

On the other hand, in the process of C1301, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the small hit game (C1301: No), then it is determined whether or not the small hit medium flag 203 lk is on (C1305). If it is determined that the small hit middle flag 203 lk is off (C1305: No), it means that the small hit game is not currently in progress, so this process is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the small hit medium flag 203 lk is on in the processing of C1305 (C1305: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the small hit game (C1306). If it is determined that it is not the end timing of the small hit game (C1306), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of C1306, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit game (C1306: Yes), the small hit medium flag 203 lk is set to off (C1307), and the value of the time saving medium counter 203 lg is reset to 0. (C1308), it is determined whether the V flag 203ln is set to ON (C1309). As described above, in the 16th embodiment, "0" is set as the value of the time saving medium counter 203 lg after the end of the small hit game regardless of whether or not the ball has passed the specific area during the small hit game. It is configured as follows.

By this process of C1308, one condition of the time saving end condition (common time saving end condition) is set. That is, when the small hit game is executed during the time saving state, the time saving state ends at the same time as the end of the small hit game. Therefore, for example, the running small hit game is disadvantageous to the player during the time saving state. During the small hit game, so that the big hit game based on the running small hit game is not executed when it is determined that the small hit type (for example, the small hit type in which the big hit game that is disadvantageous to the player can be executed) is determined. It is possible to suppress a game in which the ball is not fired (the ball is not passed through a specific area).

In the 16th embodiment, the value of the time saving medium counter 203 lg is always set (reset) to "0" when the small hit game is completed, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. When a small hit game based on a specific small hit type is executed, the value of the time saving medium counter 203 lg may be set (reset) to "0" after the small hit game is completed.

If it is determined that the V flag 203ln is off in the processing of C1309 (C1309: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V flag 203ln is on (C1309: Yes), then the start of the jackpot corresponding to the data in the jackpot type storage area is set (C1310), and the V flag 203ln is set to off. (C1311), and then this process is terminated.

Since all the small hit games are set as one round game in this embodiment, unlike the big hit scenario in which the operation control of the big hit game is executed, the process of setting the command related to the number of rounds and the interval period (round). Although it does not have a scenario corresponding to the interval period), when a small hit game having a plurality of rounds is provided, a scenario similar to the big hit scenario used in the above-mentioned big hit game may be set.

Further, in the present embodiment, the small hit scenario is set for the period during which the small hit game is executed. For example, after the small hit game is completed, until a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses. You may set a small hit scenario for the interval. With this configuration, for example, it is possible to set the V-passing valid period until 1 second has elapsed after the end of the small hit game. Therefore, it is possible to set a period set across different gaming states by one scenario, and there is an effect that the capacity of control processing can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the V winning opening 650a in the small hit game, the big hit game corresponding to the preset big hit type corresponding to the small hit is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type may be determined by acquiring the value of the first hit type counter C2 based on the detection of the game ball by the V winning opening 650a.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the 16th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 406 to 421, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. Of the control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the 16th embodiment, the detailed description and illustration of the parts that execute the same processes as those of the above-described embodiments are omitted. do.

Further, regarding the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment, various counters are used in the main processing (see FIG. 59) in the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment described above. After executing the update process (S4111), the effect update process 16 (see C3112 in FIG. 420) to be described later is executed, and the command determination process 16 (see S4112 in FIG. 59) is replaced with the command determination process 16 (see C3112 in FIG. 59). C3113), the variation display setting process 16 (C3114 in FIG. 415) is executed instead of the variation display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 59), and the illustration is omitted. Since the same processing is executed for the other processing in the main processing, the same reference numerals as those of the main processing (see FIG. 59) in the first embodiment are assigned, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the 16th embodiment, as shown in FIG. 363, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the special symbol variation effect according to the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) and the normal symbol variation (normal symbol variation) are performed. ) Is configured to be feasible.

Then, the normal map variation effect is configured to be executed as a series of effects in which a series of effects is executed across the normal map fluctuation period, the normal map per game period, the special figure 2 variable period, and the small hit game period. There is. With this configuration, the game when a specific Fuzu hit (per Fuzu long opening) is won by the Fuzu lottery, that is, the ball wins the second prize opening 640 during the game per Fuzu long opening. A special figure 2 lottery executed based on the winning is won, and the big hit game is executed by the ball passing through a specific area in the V winning opening 650a during the small hit game. The flow can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner depending on the production mode of the series of effects.

In addition, since the execution period of the above-mentioned series of effects greatly differs depending on the game situation (whether or not there is a change in Special Figure 1) at the time when the ball is won in the second winning opening 640 during the game per the long opening of the Fuzu, the Fuzu It is configured to set different production modes according to the game situation (presence or absence of change in Special Figure 1) at the time when the ball is won in the second winning opening 640 during the long opening game. That is, if the special figure 1 change is executed at the time when the ball is won in the second winning opening 640 during the game per the normal figure long opening, the special figure 2 change is completed after the running special figure 1 change is completed. Is executed, so that the effect mode is set according to the length of the residual fluctuation period (waiting period) of the special figure 1 fluctuation. Specifically, if the waiting period is less than the predetermined period, an effect mode corresponding to the normal series of effects is set, and if the waiting period is longer than the predetermined period, the series of effects is pseudo-finished and being executed. When the residual fluctuation period (waiting period) of the special figure 1 fluctuation reaches a specific period, a continuous series of effects is set to execute the series of effects in a pseudo manner again. In this way, by configuring the production mode of the series of effects to be variably set according to the length of the waiting period, it is possible to provide a series of effects that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player. It is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game because the execution period of the effect becomes unnecessarily long.

On the other hand, if the special figure 1 fluctuation is not executed at the time when the ball is won in the second winning opening 640 during the game per Fuzu long opening, the special figure 2 immediately after the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. Since the variation is executed, a shortened series of effects that is shorter than the normal series of effects is set.

That is, the 16th embodiment is configured so that when the normal state is set as the game state, the game for executing the special figure 1 lottery is performed by the left-handed game, and the above-mentioned series of effects is It is executed when the lottery result of the normal drawing lottery (the lottery executed based on the passing of the ball through the through gate 67) is a specific lottery result (per the normal drawing long opening). Therefore, while the series of effects is being executed, there is a high possibility that the special figure 1 variation is being executed. Therefore, a normal series of effects includes a normal figure fluctuation period, a normal figure per game period, a waiting period (a period of waiting until the end of the executing special figure 1 change), a special figure 2 variable period, and a small hit game period. It is executed across straddling, and it is configured to change the production content according to the stage of transitioning each period.

Here, if the special figure 1 fluctuation is not executed at the time when the ball is won in the second winning opening 640 during the game per normal drawing long opening, the waiting period is out of each period in which the above-mentioned series of effects is executed. Since this does not occur, the special figure 2 variable period will be set after the game period per normal figure has elapsed. While such a state can occur, the same production mode is used regardless of the game situation (whether or not there is a change in Special Figure 1) at the time when the ball is won in the second winning opening 640 during the game per long opening. If it is set, an unnecessary effect (for example, an effect indicating that the waiting period is in progress even though the waiting period is not set) is executed, which may lead to a decrease in the effect. ..

On the other hand, in the 16th embodiment, if the special figure 1 fluctuation is not executed at the time when the ball is won in the second winning opening 640 during the game per the long opening of the normal figure, the above-mentioned waiting period is performed. It is configured so that a series of productions in which the productions are skipped are executed. In addition, when skipping from the normal game period to the special figure 2 variable period so that the effect of the effect is not reduced even if the effect of the waiting period is skipped, the effect mode does not give the player a sense of discomfort. Is configured to be set. With this configuration, it is possible to inform in an easy-to-understand manner the normal map variation effect (series effect) executed based on the lottery result of the general map lottery.

Further, in the 16th embodiment, as shown in FIG. 364, as a variable effect showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery in the time saving state, the first suggestion effect suggesting and notifying only the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery. In addition to the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery, the second is to notify the suggestion including the determination result of the preliminary determination which determines the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery corresponding to the winning information included in the special figure 2 hold. It is configured to be feasible with suggestive staging.

Specifically, it is determined whether the special figure variation (special figure 2 variation) executed this time is the final variation in the time saving state in the time saving state, and the determination result is not the final variation (time saving final variation). If it is determined that the first suggestion effect (see FIG. 373 (a)) described above is executed as the variation effect corresponding to the variation in the special figure 2, and if it is determined that the final variation is a time saving, the special figure 2 is performed. The above-mentioned second suggestion effect (see FIGS. 373 (b) to 375 (a)) is executed as the variation effect corresponding to the variation.

With this configuration, in the variation effect corresponding to the time reduction final fluctuation, the special figure 2 lottery executed during the time reduction state and the special figure 2 lottery executed after the end of the time reduction state (after the transition to the normal state) Since the second suggestion effect based on the lottery result (preliminary determination result) of, is executed, the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery executed after the time saving state ends for the player is executed as if during the time saving state. Since the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery can be reminded, the winning probability (big hit probability, small hit probability) in the time saving state can be reminded to be higher than the actual set value.

In addition, it is easy to set an effect mode (successful effect mode shown in FIG. 375 (a)) indicating winning in a dedicated effect (for example, the mission effect shown in FIG. 374 (b)) executed during the time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the dedicated effect.

Further, in the 16th embodiment, the variation time (normal state) of the special figure 2 variation (the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the special figure 2 hold stored at the end of the time reduction state) executed after the time reduction state ends). It is configured so that a short fluctuation time (0.5 seconds) is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation executed during the fluctuation period, and the time reduction final fluctuation is supported during the fluctuation period of the special figure 2 fluctuation. The result of the second suggestion effect to be executed is displayed. With this configuration, as the second suggestion effect, when the success effect is executed based on the fact that the winning information indicating the winning (small hit) winning is included in the special figure 2 hold, the small winning special is won. FIG. 2 The second suggestion effect can be continuously executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player until the fluctuation is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the 16th embodiment, the effect period of the variation effect executed in response to the time saving final variation is divided into a plurality of effect periods, and each effect period is configured to be used for different purposes. Specifically, during the first period from the execution of the final time-saving fluctuation to the lapse of a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), the player acquires a large number of special figure 2 hold by the end of the fluctuation. It is configured to execute the effect (hold acquisition effect) for making the effect, and to execute the above-mentioned second suggestion effect during the second period set after the first period.

Then, the effect mode of the second suggestion effect executed during the second period of the time reduction final variation is the special figure 2 at a specific timing (for example, the end timing of the first period) before the second period is set. It is configured to be set based on the number of holds and the result of prior determination.

With this configuration, even if the time saving state ends (when the lottery result of the time saving final fluctuation is out of order), the special figure 2 lottery can be executed a maximum number of times (4 times) during the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game that is disadvantageous to the player.

As described above, in the 16th embodiment, the hold acquisition effect and the second suggestion effect are executed in the time saving final variation. This executes the hold acquisition effect during the special figure 2 change executed before the time reduction final change, and acquires the upper limit number (4) of the special figure 2 hold while the hold acquisition effect is being executed. Even so, when the special figure 2 change is executed as the time saving final change, the special figure 2 hold is subtracted, so that the player is made to execute the special figure 2 lottery a maximum number of times (4 times) during the normal state. This is to solve the problem of not being able to do.

In the 16th embodiment, as the second suggestion effect executed in the time saving final change, a plurality of special figure 2 lottery (special figure 2 lottery and special figure 2 hold) to be the target of the effect are supported. The lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery) is configured to set an effect mode for suggesting to the player whether or not the winning is included, but the effect is not limited to this. It may be configured to set an effect mode for suggesting and notifying the player of the number of winning lottery results included in the plurality of special figure 2 lottery. In this case, for example, as an effect mode of the second suggestion effect, it is a normal effect mode of the second suggestion effect that at least one winning prize is included in the plurality of special figure 2 lottery to be produced. It is also possible to set a special effect mode that can notify the player earlier than that, and to execute the hit number suggestion effect that suggests and notifies the player of the winning number in the special effect mode. In this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of security by promptly notifying the player that the winning is included, and to entertain the production that suggests how many winnings are included. can.

First, the command determination process 16 (C3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 406. FIG. 406 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 16 (C3113). This command determination process 16 (C3113) is a process executed in place of the command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 60) in the first embodiment, is executed in the main process (see FIG. 59), and is the main control. This is a process for executing control according to the type of command received from the device 110.

In the command determination process 16, first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the winning information command is issued from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not the command has been received (C3201). Then, when it is determined that the winning information command has been received (C3201: Yes), the winning information command processing 16 is executed (C3202), and this processing is terminated.

Here, the winning information command processing 16 (C3202) will be described with reference to FIG. 407. FIG. 407 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information command processing 16 (C3202). The prize information command process 16 (C3202) is a process executed when a prize information command is received from the main control device 110 in the command determination process 16 (C3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, a process for storing the information included in the received winning information command in the corresponding area (reserved storage area corresponding to the winning information command) in the winning information storage area 223la provided in the RAM 223 is executed.

The information included in the winning information command includes information on the winning / failing judgment result, information on the stop type, information on the fluctuation pattern, and the symbol type (special figure 1, special figure 2, general figure) to which the current winning information corresponds. The information is for the winning ball, but other information may be included. For example, the winning information about the ball that has already won the prize (the winning information command was received in the past) may be included. Further, although detailed description will be omitted, in the 16th embodiment, the main control device 110 is configured to set a winning information command for indicating a look-ahead result of a normal symbol (see FIG. 398). In the prize information storage area 223la, in addition to the area for storing the prize information of the special symbol, the prize information storage area of the ordinary symbol is also formed.

When the prize information command process 16 (C3202) is executed, first, the received prize information command information (look-ahead information) is stored in the corresponding prize information storage area 223la (C3401), and the prize status determination process (C3402) is performed. Run. As described above, the prize information storage area 223la has a maximum of four prize information commands for the first special symbol (special figure 1) and a maximum of four prize information commands for the second special symbol (special figure 2). It is configured to store up to 4 prize-winning commands for ordinary symbols, for a total of 12 prize-winning information commands, and the prize-winning information commands are stored in the designated storage area according to the order in which the prize-winning information commands are received. ..

Here, the winning status determination process (C3402) will be described with reference to FIG. 408. FIG. 408 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning status determination process (C3402). This winning status determination process (C3402) is a process executed in the winning information command processing 16 (C3202) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is the winning information of the normal symbol (normal figure). It is determined that the game state at the time when the command is received is determined, a process for setting a different effect mode based on the determination result, and an appropriate game (left-handed game) is performed in the normal state. Is executed.

In the winning status determination process (C3402), first, it is determined whether or not there is a Fuzu prize (whether the winning information command received this time is a command corresponding to the Fuzu) (C3451). If it is determined that the prize is not a regular prize (C3451: No), the process proceeds to the process of C3458 described later. If it is determined that the prize is a normal figure (C3451: Yes), then the current gaming state is read out from the state storage area 223hl provided in the RAM 223 (C3452), and it is determined whether the gaming state is the normal state. (C3453). When it is determined that the gaming state is not the normal state (C3453: No), that is, when it is determined that the game state is the time saving state, this processing is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the winning information command processing 16.

On the other hand, in the process of C3453, when it is determined that the gaming state is the normal state (C3453: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) is currently changing (C3454). ). Here, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation is currently in progress by determining whether the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223ln corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation is larger than 0. When it is determined that the current is not during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (C3454: No), the normal figure change is executed while the special figure 1 change is not executed during the normal state, so that the RAM 223 is used. The provided non-variable winning flag 223 lm is set to ON (C3455), and the process proceeds to C3458.

By setting the non-variable winning flag 223lm to ON in the processing of C3455, it is possible to memorize that the winning information command of the normal figure was received during the normal state and during the special figure 1 non-variable state. By determining the setting status of the non-variable winning flag 223 lm when the normal map fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the winning information command of the normal map is received, the special figure 1 at the time of winning the regular map (passing through gate 67) It is possible to set different variation effect modes according to the variation situation.

In the 16th embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 406, a process to be executed when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process 16 (C3113) of the voice lamp control device 113 (C3203 in FIG. 406). It is configured to execute the process (C3201, C3202 in FIG. 406) to be executed when the winning information command is received with priority over C3204).

Here, in the external output process (C1001 of FIG. 403) of the main process (see FIG. 403) of the main control device 110, the prize information command for the general figure prize and the variation pattern command for each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol). And, even if they are output in the same process, specifically, if a general map prize is generated while the normal map fluctuation is not executed, the timer interrupt process of the main controller 110 (Fig.) The winning information command is set in the processing of C105 (see 389), and the variation pattern command is set in the processing of C104 of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 389) executed next (after 2 milliseconds). .. Then, a command that can be output to the voice lamp control device 113 is output in the process (external output process) of C1001 of the main process (see FIG. 403) of the main control device 110 that is executed every 4 milliseconds. Therefore, depending on the execution timing of the timer interrupt process and the execution timing of the main process, the winning information command for the general drawing prize and the fluctuation pattern command are output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the same processing. There is.

In such a case, in the 16th embodiment, in the command determination process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see C3113 in FIG. 406), the winning information command process 16 (C3202 in FIG. 407) and the variation pattern command process 16 (FIG. 406). Since the processing is executed in the order of C3204) of 409, even if the winning information command and the fluctuation pattern command are output at the same time from the main control unit 110, when the fluctuation pattern of the normal map fluctuation is set, it is non-variable. It can be used for discrimination without missing the setting status of the winning flag 223 lm.

In the process of C3454, if it is determined that the current fluctuation of the special figure 1 is in progress (C3454: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is 30 seconds or more (C3456). .. If it is determined that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is not 30 seconds or more (C3456: No), the process proceeds to C3458.

In the process of C3456, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is 30 seconds or more (C3456: Yes), a display command indicating a look-ahead effect corresponding to the winning information is set (C3457), and then C3458. Move to the processing of.

When the process shifts to the processing of C3458, it is determined whether the winning information command received this time is the winning information command corresponding to the first special symbol (special drawing 1) (C3458), and it is determined that it is the winning information command of special drawing 1. If it is (C3458: Yes), then it is determined whether the non-variable winning flag 223 lm is set to ON (C3459), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (C3459: Yes), it is not. The variable time winning flag 223 lm is set to off (C3460), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C3458, if it is determined that the winning information command received this time is not the winning information command of FIG. 1 (C3458: No), it is determined whether the information indicating that the left-handed game is being performed is received. Determine (C3461). In the process of C3461, for example, it is determined whether or not the winning information indicating the winning of the ball to each winning opening (general winning opening 63) provided in the left gaming area of the game board 13 is received.

When it is determined that the left-handed game is detected in the processing of C3461 (C3461: Yes), the process proceeds to the above-mentioned processing of C3459, and when it is determined that the left-handed game is not detected (C3461: No), This process ends as it is.

As described above, in the 16th embodiment, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variation is executed at the time when the general figure winning (the ball passes through the through gate 67), and the special figure 1 variation is executed. If it is determined that there is no such thing, the non-variable winning flag 223 lm for indicating to that effect is set to ON. In addition, when the non-variable winning flag 223lm is set to ON and information indicating that the special figure 1 winning or the left-handed game is being performed is received, the non-variable winning flag 223lm is set to off. It is configured to do.

Then, as will be described in detail later, when the normal map long fluctuation is executed with the non-variable winning flag 223 lm set to ON, a variation effect (series effect) corresponding to the normal map long variation is performed. It is configured not to be executed.

With this configuration, the game situation in which the normal state is set and the normal map fluctuation is executed without performing the left-handed game (through gate provided in the right-handed game area by the right-handed game). It is possible to determine the game situation in which the ball is passed through the 67, and in that case, it is possible not to execute the variation effect corresponding to the long variation of the normal map (the effect suggesting that the game per normal map is executed). ..

Further, in the 16th embodiment, even when the left-handed game is properly executed, depending on the winning condition of the ball to the first winning opening 64, the special figure 1 is performed at the timing when the general drawing prize is generated. Since the fluctuation may not be executed, the non-variable winning flag 223lm, which is set to be on at the time of winning a regular figure, can be set to off by a left-handed game. As a result, for example, the left-handed game is executed within a predetermined period from the winning of the Fuzu to the start of the Fuzu fluctuation, so that the variation effect corresponding to the Fuzu long fluctuation (the game per Fuzu is executed). It is possible to normally execute the effect) that suggests that it will be done. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the setting of an effect mode that is disadvantageous to the player who is performing an appropriate game.

As long as it is possible to determine that an appropriate game (left-handed game in a normal state) is being performed, the configuration is not limited to the configuration of the 16th embodiment described above, and for example, a rotation operation of the operation handle 51 is performed. It may be configured so that it can be determined whether the left-handed game is executed based on the resistance value (launch intensity) of the variable resistor that detects the amount or the rotation operation amount by the change of the electric resistance, or the game board 13 A detection means for detecting the passage of a ball is provided in a part of the left game area (upstream area where most of the balls flowing down the left game area pass), and the left-handed game is executed based on the detection result in the detection means. It may be configured so that it can be determined whether or not it is.

Further, in the 16th embodiment described above, a configuration for determining whether or not a left-handed game is being executed is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration for determining whether or not a right-handed game is being executed is used. When a predetermined normal map fluctuation (normal map long fluctuation) is executed while it is determined that the right-handed game is being executed, a variation effect corresponding to the normal map long fluctuation (game per normal map) is performed. May be configured to limit the execution of the effect) that suggests that is executed. In this case, as a configuration for determining that the right-handed game is being executed, when it is detected that the ball has passed through a predetermined area (for example, through gate 67) provided in the right-handed game area. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects a configuration that determines that a right-handed game is being executed, a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51, or a rotation operation amount (rotation position) by a change in electrical resistance. It may be configured so that it can be determined whether or not the right-handed game is executed based on the resistance value (launch intensity).

Further, in the 16th embodiment, it is configured to determine whether or not the player is performing an appropriate game during the period from the winning of the normal map to the start of the fluctuation of the normal map. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a long period (discrimination target period) used for determining whether or not an appropriate game is being executed may be set. In this case, for example, a game status storage means capable of temporarily storing the game status is provided, and the game status (past history) of whether or not the player is performing a left-handed game is stored in the game status storage means. It is preferable to configure it so that at the timing of winning the Fuzu, it is determined whether or not the Fuzu is won during an appropriate game based on the game situation stored in the game situation storage means.

Further, as a winning information command (Public map winning information command) set when a Pymph prize is won, a winning information command (left Ping figure) indicating that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 arranged in the left game area. The voice lamp control device 113 distinguishes between the winning information command) and the Fuzu winning information command (right Fuzu winning information command) indicating that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 arranged in the right game area. It is possible to configure it, and based on the type of the received Fuzu winning information command and the game situation, the execution restriction of the variation effect (the effect that suggests that the game per Fuzu is executed) corresponding to the Fuzu long variation. May be configured to be variable.

Returning to FIG. 407, the explanation will be continued. It is determined whether or not there is special 2 hit information as the information (look-ahead information) included in the winning information command received this time (C3403). If it is determined that there is no special 2 hit information in the processing of C3403 (C3403: No), the process proceeds to the processing of C3406. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is special 2 hit information (C3403: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the time saving final fluctuation flag 223 lk provided in the RAM 223 is on (C3404). If it is determined that the time saving final fluctuation flag 223 lk is off (C3404: No), the processing of C3405 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of C3406.

If it is determined that the time saving final fluctuation flag 223 lk is on in the processing of C3404 (C3404: Yes), the information indicating the notification is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223la (C3405), and then the process proceeds to C3406. do.

In the process of C3406, an effect mode related to other winning information is set (C3406), a display command for indicating the set effect mode is set (C3407), and then this process is terminated and the process returns to the command determination process 16.

In the present embodiment, the specific effect set at the beginning of the variation display (for example, the specific effect executed 5 seconds after the start of the variation (specific effect C)) is set in another period (for example, the variation). It is stipulated that the effect shows that the jackpot expectation is higher than the specific effect) that is executed 20 seconds after the start. That is, it is stipulated that the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the jackpot winning of the special symbol is easier to select the fluctuation pattern in which the specific effect C can be executed.

As a result, when the suggestion effect is executed across a plurality of fluctuation displays, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player to win the jackpot in the fluctuations from the next time onward. Furthermore, it is possible to enthusiastically store the reservation of the special symbol so that the suggestion effect that straddles a plurality of fluctuations is executed.

In this embodiment, as described above, the winning information included in the received winning information command and the timing at which the winning information command is received (the remaining period of the variable display during execution) are used to straddle a plurality of variable displays. Is used to determine whether or not to execute the suggestion effect, but other configurations may be used. For example, the suggestion effect is based on the timing at which the prize information command is received (the remaining period of the variable display during execution). It may be configured to execute a precursor effect as a suggestion effect and set a specific effect at the timing of starting the next variation display when it is determined whether or not to execute. , A specific effect is set based on the operation content of the player's frame button 22 during the period in which the precursor effect is being executed (a specific effect that is the target of the suggestion effect is set from a plurality of specific effects). Is also good. With this configuration, the suggestion effect is produced based on the game situation (the lottery result of the next variation, the variation pattern, or the operation content to the operation means (frame button 22)) after the suggestion effect is started. Aspects can be set. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the staging as compared with the configuration in which the staging mode of the suggestive staging is determined in advance and then executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, as an example of executing the suggestion effect across a plurality of fluctuation displays, a variable display being executed and a variable display to be executed next time based on the winning information won during the variable display are displayed. Although the suggestion effect used is explained, the present invention is not limited to this, and any configuration may be used as long as the suggestion effect is executed across a plurality of variable displays. For example, the winning information won during the variable display is executed one after another. In the case of the variable display, the suggestion effect may be executed so as to straddle the variable display that is executed one after another from the variable display that is being executed, or the variable display that is executed next time is executed one after another. The suggestion effect may be executed so as to straddle the variable display. In this case, it is determined whether to set the timing for executing the suggestion effect to the running variation display or the next variation display based on the timing when the winning information command is received (the remaining period of the variation display during execution). It is good to provide a means to do so.

The winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223la is referred to when selecting the contents of various effects set by the voice lamp control device 113, and for example, the holding display area in which the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is displayed. In Dn4, in order to suggest a hold display (holding symbol) corresponding to the winning information indicating the jackpot, a holding change notice effect for changing the display mode of the holding display is set, or a special symbol corresponding to the winning information indicating the jackpot is set. It is referred to when setting a continuous notice effect that expects a big hit as an effect of a special symbol whose fluctuation starts before.

Further, in the 16th embodiment, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223la is referred to at the time of winning the jackpot, during the jackpot game, and at the end of the jackpot, and the winning information indicating the jackpot is included in the hold. It is configured to determine whether or not it is (whether or not there is a villa on hold), and to set the effect during the big hit game or after the big hit is finished based on the judgment result. In addition, even in the continuous production executed during the probability change state, the production content is configured to be selected based on the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223la.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, when an effect (look-ahead effect) referring to the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223la is executed, a flag indicating that fact (pre-reading effect) For example, if the look-ahead effecting flag) is set to on and the look-ahead effecting flag is set to on, when a new winning information command is received, the winning information included in the winning information command is included. It is configured so that a new look-ahead effect based on information is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the problem that a plurality of look-ahead effects are continuously executed without a gap and give a sense of discomfort to the player.

In addition, a control other than the above-mentioned contents for solving the above-mentioned problem may be used. For example, a priority rank is given to a plurality of pre-reading effects set based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223la. A look-ahead effect with a higher priority rank is compared with the priority rank of the look-ahead effect that is given and currently executed and the priority rank of the look-ahead effect that can be set based on the prize information included in the new prize information command. May be controlled to execute. In this case, if it is determined that the priority rank of the new look-ahead effect is higher, the look-ahead effect switching notification for notifying the player that the pre-reading effect being executed ends in the middle is executed. After that, a new look-ahead effect is executed, or a new look-ahead effect is executed after changing the effect mode of the pre-reading effect being executed to a shortened look-ahead effect mode earlier than the initially set end timing. You may.

In addition, as the priority rank of the look-ahead effect, the higher the expectation that the jackpot is won, the higher the priority rank so that the priority rank of the look-ahead effect corresponding to the winning information indicating that the jackpot is won is the highest. It is good to set so that is high. As a result, when the pre-reading effect being executed ends in the middle, the player can have a sense of expectation for the jackpot, and the new pre-reading effect to be executed next can be watched.

Return to FIG. 406 to continue the explanation. If it is determined in the process of C3201 that the winning information command has not been received (C3201: No), then it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command has been received from the main control unit 110 (C3203). If it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (C3203: Yes), the variation pattern command process 16 is executed (C3204), and then the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted in the variation pattern command process 16 is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to in the variation display setting process 16 (see FIG. 415) described later in order to determine a detailed display mode of the variation pattern. .. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type. Further, in the 16th embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to set a variation pattern for a special symbol (special symbol) and a variation pattern for a normal symbol (normal symbol). It is determined whether the received fluctuation pattern command is for a special figure or a normal figure, and processing based on the determination result is also executed.

Here, the variation pattern command process 16 (C3204) will be described with reference to FIG. 409. FIG. 409 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern command process 16 (C3204). This variation pattern command process 16 (C3204) is a process executed when a variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 in the command determination process 16 (C3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. Is.

In the variation pattern command processing 16 (C3204), first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is a special figure variation pattern command (C3301). If it is determined that the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is not the special figure variation pattern command (C3301: No), the processing of C3302 and C3303 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the processing of C3304. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is a special figure fluctuation pattern command (C3301: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223ld for the special figure provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (C3301: Yes). C3302), the variation pattern is extracted from the received variation pattern command for special figure (C3303), and then the process proceeds to C3304.

In the process of C3304, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is a variation pattern command for normal drawing (C3304). If it is determined that the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is not a variation pattern command for normal drawing (C3304: No), the processes of C3305 and C3306 are skipped, and the process returns to the command determination process 16.

On the other hand, in the process of C3304, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is a fluctuation pattern command for normal drawing (C3304: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223ld for normal drawing provided in RAM 223 is provided. Is set to on (C3305), a variation pattern is extracted from the received variation pattern command for normal drawing (C3306), and then this process is terminated and the process returns to the command determination process 16.

Return to FIG. 406 to continue the explanation. In the process of C3203, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (C3203: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3205). Then, when the stop type command is received (C3205: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223le of the RAM 223 is set to ON (C3206), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (C3207), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process 16 (see FIG. 415) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of C3205, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (C3205: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3208). Then, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command is received (C3208: Yes), the reserved ball number is extracted from the received reserved ball number command, and the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) is extracted. The value included in the hold ball number command received from the special symbol hold ball number counter or the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203 lf of the normal symbol is stored (C3209), and then the process returns to the main process. Specifically, when the reserved ball number command received this time is the reserved ball number command corresponding to the special symbol 1, from the received reserved ball number command, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld of the main controller 110 is used. The value (the number of holdings N1 of the variation display in the special symbol 1) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223lb provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113. On the other hand, when the reserved ball number command received this time is the reserved ball number command corresponding to the special symbol 2, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203le of the main controller 110 (special) from the received reserved ball number command. The number of holdings N2) of the variation display in the symbol 2 is extracted, and this is stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223 lc provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113.

Return to FIG. 406 to continue the explanation. In the processing of C3208, if it is determined that the reserved ball count command has not been received (C3208: No), then it is determined whether or not a hit-related command has been received (C3210), and if a hit-related command has been received, it is determined. (C3210: Yes), the hit-related command process 16 (C3211) is executed, and after the hit-related command process 16 (C3211) is completed, this process is terminated.

Here, the contents of the hit-related command process 16 (C3211) will be described with reference to FIG. 410. FIG. 410 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit-related command process 16 (C3211). The hit-related command process 16 (C3211) is a process executed in the command determination process 16 (C3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. In the hit-related command processing 16, first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot-related command has been received from the main control device 110 (C3501). Then, when it is determined that the jackpot-related command has been received (C3501: Yes), the jackpot-related command process is executed (C3502), and then the process proceeds to the C3503 process.

Here, the contents of the jackpot-related command processing (C3502) will be described with reference to FIG. 411. FIG. 411 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot-related command processing (C3502). The jackpot-related command process (C3502) is a process executed in the hit-related command process 16 (C3211) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. In the jackpot-related command processing (C3502), first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main control unit 110 (C3601). Then, when it is determined that the opening command has been received (C3601: Yes), the opening command process for display is executed (C3602), and then the process proceeds to C3608.

The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. Upon receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts the opening effect on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of C3601, when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (C3601: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (C3603). Here, when the round number command is received (C3603: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (C3604), and then the display round number command according to the round number extracted this time is set. (C3605), and then the process proceeds to C3608. The display round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, although detailed description is omitted, in the 16th embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed in a state where a predetermined continuous condition is satisfied, the round game executed in the previous jackpot game is performed. The number is configured to accumulate and display the number of round games of the jackpot game executed this time. Specifically, a period flag is set for a period in which the time saving state is set and a period in which the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed after the time saving state is changed to the normal state. Then, when the jackpot game is started, it is determined whether the period flag is set to on, and if it is determined that the period flag is set to on, the number of round games executed in the previous jackpot game is determined. The number of rounds of this jackpot game is cumulatively displayed in (number of rounds).

On the other hand, in the process of C3603, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (C3603: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3606). Then, when it is determined that the ending command has been received (C3606: Yes), the display ending command is set (C3607), and then the process proceeds to C3608. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. Upon receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 starts the ending effect on the third symbol display device 81.

If it is determined that the ending command has not been received in the processing of C3606 (C3606: No), the process proceeds to the processing of C3608. In the processing of C3608, processing corresponding to other commands is executed (C3608), this processing is terminated, and the process returns to the hit-related command processing 16.

Returning to FIG. 410, the explanation will be continued. In the process of C3501, when it is determined that the jackpot related command has not been received from the main controller 110 (C3501: No), then it is determined whether or not the small hit related command has been received from the main controller 110. (C3503). Then, when it is determined that the small hit related command has been received (C3503: Yes), the small hit related command process is executed (C3504), and then the process proceeds to the C3505 process.

Here, the contents of the small hit-related command processing (C3504) will be described with reference to FIG. 412 (a). FIG. 412 (a) is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit related command process (C3504). The small hit-related command process (C3504) is a process executed in the hit-related command process 16 (C3211) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. In the small hit-related command processing (C3504), first, it is determined whether or not the series production flag 223li provided in the RAM 223 is on (C3701). When it is determined that the series effect flag 223li is off (not on) (C3701: No), the normal small hit process is executed (C3702), and then this process is terminated and the process returns to the hit-related command process 16. ..

As described above, in the 16th embodiment, the effect mode when the small hit game is executed is variably set according to whether or not the small hit game execution timing is in a series of effects. .. That is, when the small hit game is executed during the series of effects, the small hit game effect (see FIG. 370) is configured to be executed as a part of the series of effects. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand effect.

Here, the contents of the normal small hit process (C3702) will be described with reference to FIG. 412 (b). FIG. 412 (b) is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal small hit process (C3702). The normal small hit process (C3702) is a process executed in the small hit related command process (C3504) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. In the normal small hit process (C3702), first, it is determined whether or not a small hit start command has been received from the main control device 110 (C3801). Then, when it is determined that the small hit start command has been received (C3801: Yes), the small hit start command for display is set (C3802), and then this process is terminated and the process returns to the small hit related command process.

If it is determined that the small hit start command has not been received in the processing of C3801 (C3801: No), then it is determined whether or not the small hit end command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3803). .. When it is determined that the small hit end command has been received (C3803: Yes), the small hit end command for display is set (C3804), and then this process is terminated and the process returns to the small hit related command process.

In the process of C3803, when it is determined that the small hit end command has not been received (C3803: No), then it is determined whether or not the V passage command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3805). If it is determined that the V-pass command has been received (C3805: Yes), the display V-pass command is set (C3806), and then this process is terminated and the process returns to the small hit-related command process.

Returning to FIG. 412 (a), the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of C3701 that the series effect flag 223li is on (C3701: Yes), the small hit game this time is a small hit game executed during the series production, so the small hit process for the series effect is performed. It is executed (C3703), and then this process is terminated and the process returns to the hit-related command process 16.

Here, the contents of the series of small hit processing for directing (C3703) will be described with reference to FIG. 413. FIG. 413 is a flowchart showing the contents of the series of small hit processing for directing (C3703). The small hit process for a series of effects (C3703) is a process executed in the small hit related command process (C3504) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. In the small hit process for a series of effects (C3703), first, it is determined whether or not a small hit start command has been received from the main control device 110 (C3901). Then, when it is determined that the small hit start command has been received (C3901: Yes), the series production hit start command is set (C3902), and then this process is terminated and the process returns to the small hit related command process.

In the process of C3901 when it is determined that the small hit start command has not been received (C3901: No), then it is determined whether or not the V passage command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3903). When it is determined that the V-pass command has been received (C3903: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the small hit caution flag 223ll provided in the RAM 223 is on (C3904). If it is determined that the small hit caution flag 223ll is off (C3904: No), a V effect command for displaying a series of effects is set (C3905), and then this process is terminated and the process returns to the small hit related command process.

Here, the small hit caution flag 223 ll allows the ball to pass through the specific area in the V winning opening 650a even after a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed even though the small hit game is being executed. A flag that is set on if it is not present. In the 16th embodiment, since the game board 13 is configured so that the period required for the ball launched by performing the right-handed game to reach the V winning device 650 is about 1 second, it is a small hit. When a right-handed game is performed based on the fact that the game has been executed, the small hit caution flag 223 ll is configured not to be set to ON.

On the other hand, if the player is playing a left-handed game without noticing that the small hit game is being executed, or if the number of balls to be fired during the small hit game is intentionally reduced (including 0), an inappropriate game is performed. If so, the ball may not pass through the specific area in the V winning opening 650a 3 seconds after the start of the small hit game, so the small hit caution flag 223ll is turned on. It will be easier to set. When this small hit caution flag 223ll is set to ON, the highlight guidance display (see FIG. 371 (a)) for causing the player to perform a right-handed game is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Will be done. Further, even when the ball passes through the specific area in the V winning opening 650a, different display modes are set depending on whether the small hit caution flag 223ll is set to on or off. For example, if a V-pass command is received while the small hit caution flag 223 ll is set to ON, a guidance effect is provided to promptly perform a right-handed game in the next small hit game. Is executed.

In the processing of C3904, if it is determined that the small hit caution flag 223ll is on (C3904: Yes), a special V effect command for displaying a series of effects is set (C3906), and then this process is terminated and the small hit is performed. Return to related command processing. The special V effect command for displaying a series of effects set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221. Inside, it is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the special V effect command for displaying a series of effects, the display control device 114 indicates that the timing at which the ball passed V in this small hit game was delayed as part of the series of effects in the third symbol display device 81. The V effect including the effect mode (for example, the comment "Let's hit right from earlier next time") is started.

On the other hand, in the process of C3903, when it is determined that the V passage command has not been received (C3903: No), then it is determined whether or not the small hit end command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3907). ). If it is determined that the small hit end command has been received (C3907: Yes), then it is determined whether or not there is a V passage (C3908), and if it is determined that there is a V passage (C3908: Yes), a series of effects is produced. The small hit end command for display is set (C3909), then the small hit caution flag 223ll is set to off (C3912), this processing is terminated, and the process returns to the small hit related command processing.

On the other hand, in the process of C3908, when it is determined that there is no V passage (C3908: No), a display command indicating the end of the series effect is set (C3910), and the series effect flag 223li is set to off (C3911). The small hit caution flag 223ll is set to off (C3912), and then this processing is terminated and the process returns to the small hit related command processing.

That is, if the ball does not pass through the specific area in the small hit game during the series of effects, the effect result indicating the occurrence of the big hit game cannot be displayed as the effect result of the series of effects. An effect mode (see FIG. 371 (b)) indicating failure) is set. Further, even when it is determined that the small hit end command has not been received in the processing of C3907 (C3907: No), this processing is ended and the process returns to the small hit related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 410, the explanation will be continued. In the process of C3503, if it is determined that the small hit related command has not been received from the main control device 110 (C3503: No), then whether or not the normal figure hit related command has been received from the main control device 110 is determined. Determine (C3505). Then, when it is determined that the command related to the normal figure has been received (C3505: Yes), the display command corresponding to the command related to the normal figure is set (C3506), and then this process is terminated and the command is determined. Return to process 16.

Returning to FIG. 406, the explanation is continued. In the process of C3210, when it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received from the main controller 110 (C3210: No), then it is determined whether the status command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3212). If it is determined that the status command has been received (C3212: Yes), the current game status is extracted from the received command and stored in the status storage area 223hl (C3213), and the status command for display is set (C3214). After that, this process is terminated.

In the processing of C3212, if it is determined that the status command has not been received (C3212: No), then it is determined whether the stop command has been received (C3215), and if the stop command has been received (C3215: Yes). ), The stop command process 16 (C3216) is executed, and after the stop command process 16 is completed, this process is terminated.

Here, the contents of the stop command process 16 (C3216) will be described with reference to FIG. 414. FIG. 414 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop command process 16 (C3216). The stop command process 16 (C3216) is a process executed in the command determination process 16 (C3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. In the stop command processing 16, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure stop command has been received (C3951), when it is determined that the special figure stop command has been received (C3951: Yes), and then the special figure fluctuation time counter. The value of 223ln is reset to 0 (C3952), and it is determined whether the pseudo series effect flag 223lj is set to ON (C3953).

If it is determined in the processing of C3953 that the pseudo-series effect flag 223lj is set to ON (C3953: Yes), the stop command received this time executes a series of effects as a variation effect of the deviation deviation variation. Since it is a fluctuation, the pseudo series effect flag 223lj is set to off (C3954), and the process proceeds to S3955. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of C3953 that the pseudo-series effect flag 223lj is not set to ON (C3953: No), the processing of C3954 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of C3955.

In the processing of C3955, it is determined whether the time saving final fluctuation flag 223 lk is set to ON (C3955), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (C3955: Yes), the read-ahead flag is set to ON (C3956). ), Set the time saving final fluctuation flag to off (C3957), and end this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of C3955 that the time saving final fluctuation flag 223 lk is not set to ON (C3955: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Returning to FIG. 406, the explanation is continued. If it is determined in the processing of C3215 that the stop command has not been received from the main control unit 110 (C3215: No), the processing corresponding to the received command is executed (C3217), and this processing is terminated. .. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. Set the command so that it is sent to the device 114.

By this processing, it is possible to set a command for making various settings to the display control device 114 based on the command output from the main control device 110.

Next, the variation display setting process 16 (C3114) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 415. FIG. 415 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 16 (C3114). This variation display setting process 16 (C3114) replaces the variation display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 59) in the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. In order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

The variation display setting process 16 (C3114) of the 16th embodiment is configured to set a variation pattern command for displaying a normal symbol for the variation display setting process used in each of the above-described embodiments. , The content of the variable staging that is set is changed, and the other elements (technical ideas) are the same. The same element (technical idea) as the variable display setting process used in each of the above-described embodiments will not be described in detail.

In the variation display setting process 16 (C3114), first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223ld provided in the RAM 223 is on (C4001). In the processing of C4001, either the variation start flag 223ld for special figures or the variation start flag 223ld for normal drawings in the processing of C3302 and C3305 of the variation pattern command processing 16 (see C3204 in FIG. 409) described above. Determines if is set to on.

Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223ld is not on (that is, the fluctuation start flag 223ld for the special figure and the fluctuation start flag 223ld for the normal drawing are both off), the main control is performed (C4001: No). Since the variation pattern command has not been received from the device 110, the process proceeds to C4006. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223ld is on (C4001: Yes), the corresponding fluctuation start flag 223ld is set to off (C4002), and then C3303 of the fluctuation pattern command process 16 (see FIG. 409). And in the process of C3306, the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (C4003), and the variation effect setting process is executed (C4004). The details of the variable staging setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 416.

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type and the variation pattern set in the variation effect setting process (C4004 in FIG. 416), a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is generated. Is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (C4005). After that, the process proceeds to C4006. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

In the process of C4006, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223le provided in the RAM 223 is on (C4006). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223le is not on (that is, it is off) (C4006: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variable display is displayed. End the setting process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223le is on (C4006: Yes), the corresponding stop type selection flag 223le is turned off (C4007), and then in the command determination process 16 (C3207 in FIG. 406). , The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (C4008). Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (C4009), and the process proceeds to C4010. In the process of C4010, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (C4010). After that, this process is terminated. When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

Next, with reference to FIG. 416, the variation effect setting process (C4004) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 416 is a flowchart showing this variation effect setting process (C4004). This variation effect setting process (C4004) is a process executed in the variation display setting process 16 (see FIG. 415) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is a process of varying effect of a special symbol. Alternatively, a process for setting a variation effect mode of a normal symbol is executed.

In the variation effect setting process (C4004), first, it is determined whether or not the variation effect setting process of this time sets the variation effect of the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) (C4101). In this C4101 process, when it is determined that the special figure variation start flag 223ld is set to ON in the C4001 process of the variation display setting process 16 (see C3114 in FIG. 415), the current variation effect setting process is performed. Is determined to set the fluctuation effect of the special figure fluctuation. Here, if it is determined that the special map variation effect is not set (the normal map variation effect is set) (C4101: No), the normal map effect setting process is executed (C4117), and then this process is terminated. .. The details of the normal drawing effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 417, but when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, the normal drawing change executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The process for setting the effect mode of the variation effect based on the above is executed.

In the process of C4101, when it is determined that the special figure variation effect is set (C4101: Yes), the information indicating the game state stored in the state storage area 223 hlh is read out (C4102), and the current game state is the normal state. It is determined whether or not there is (C4103). If it is determined that the current gaming state is not the normal state (time saving state) (C4103: No), the time saving effect setting process is executed (C4104), and then the process proceeds to C4116. The time saving effect setting process (C4104) is a process for setting the effect mode of the variable effect executed in the time saving state. The time saving effect setting process (C4104) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 418.

On the other hand, in the process of C4103, when it is determined that the gaming state is the normal state (C4103: Yes), it is determined whether the re-read-ahead flag 223lr is set to on (C4105), and the re-read-ahead flag 223lr is turned on. When it is determined that the setting is made (C4105: Yes), that is, the fluctuation effect this time is a variation effect corresponding to the special figure variation of the first rotation after the time reduction state ends, and the time reduction state is in progress. If there is a special figure 2 hold for which the look-ahead result is not reflected in the time-saving final variation effect executed by the time-saving final variation among the special figure 2 hold acquired in, the prize is stored in the prize information storage area 223la. From the information (winning information corresponding to special figure 2), the winning information (winning information corresponding to special drawing 2) for which the look-ahead processing has not been executed is extracted (C4106), and the winning information is included in the extracted winning information. It is determined whether or not there is winning information including (C4107).

In the process of C4107, if it is determined that there is winning information including winning information (C4107: yes), a display command for replacing the result display mode of the time saving variation effect with the revival winning display mode is set (C4108). , The re-read-ahead flag 223lr is set to off (C4109), and the process proceeds to C4110. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of C4105 that the re-look-ahead flag 223lr is not set to ON (C4105: No), the current variation effect setting process is executed at the timing of changing the result display mode of the time reduction effect. Since the processing is not performed, the processing of C4106 to C4109 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the processing of C4110. Further, in the processing of C4107, if it is determined that there is no winning information including the winning information in the extracted winning information (C4107: No), the current variation effect setting process changes the result display mode of the time saving effect. Although it is the timing to make it, since the condition for changing the result display mode (including the hit of the new look-ahead result) is not satisfied, the processing of C4108 is skipped, the processing of C4109 is executed, and the processing of C4110 is executed. Move to.

In the processing of C4110, it is determined whether or not the present is within the extended display period of the time saving variation effect executed during the time saving state (C4110), and the game result within the extended display period, that is, during the time saving state is displayed. If it is determined that the end screen (see FIG. 377) is displayed (C4110: Yes), the present process is terminated without setting the variation effect corresponding to the variation. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not within the extended display period (C4110: No), then, based on the fluctuation pattern acquired in the process of C4003 in FIG. 415, is the current fluctuation pattern a hit fluctuation pattern? Is determined (C4111).

In the process of C4111, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is a hit variation pattern (C4111: Yes), the hit variation effect setting process is executed (C4112), and then the process proceeds to the C4116 process. In this hit variation effect setting process (C4112), a process of determining whether or not to execute a series of effects as the special figure variation effect of this time and a series of effects when the series of effects are executed as the normal figure variation effect The effect result is replaced and the process is executed. The hit variation effect setting process (C4112) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 419.

On the other hand, in the processing of C4111, when it is determined that the current variation pattern is not a hit variation pattern (C4111: No), then it is determined whether or not the series production flag 223li is on (C4113). If it is determined that the series effect flag 223li is on (C4113: Yes), the process proceeds to C4116.

In the process of C4113, when it is determined that the series effect flag 223li is off (C4113: No), it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is the variation pattern of the series effect based on the extracted variation pattern (C4113: No). C4114). If it is determined that the current variation pattern is not the variation pattern of the series of effects (C4114: No), the process proceeds to C4116.

On the other hand, in the processing of C4114, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern of this time is the fluctuation pattern of the series of effects (C4114: Yes), the pseudo series of effects flag 223lj is set to ON (C4115), and then the process of C4116 is performed. Transition.

In the process of C4116, the special figure variation time counter 223ln is set (C4116), and then this process is terminated and the process returns to the variation display setting process 16.

Next, with reference to FIG. 417, the staging setting process (C4117) for normal drawing executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 417 is a flowchart showing this staging setting process for normal drawing (C4117). This normal-figure staging setting process (C4117) is executed in the variable staging setting process (see FIG. 416) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is a variable staging based on the normal map variation. The process for setting (series of effects) is executed.

In the normal drawing effect setting process (C4117), first, the current game state is read (C4201) from the state storage area 223hl provided in the RAM 223, and it is determined whether or not the read current game information is the normal state. (C4202). If it is determined that the current game information is not in the normal state (C4202: No), this process is then terminated.

In the process of C4202, when it is determined that the current game information is in the normal state (C4202: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time is 30 seconds or more (C4203). If it is determined that the fluctuation time is not 30 seconds or more (C4203: No), the present process is terminated thereafter. When it is determined that the fluctuation time is 30 seconds or more (C4203: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the series effect flag 223li is on (C4204).

If it is determined in the process of C4204 that the series effect flag 223li is on (C4204: Yes), the present process is terminated thereafter. On the other hand, when it is determined that the series effect flag 223li is off (C4204: No), then it is determined whether or not the non-variable winning flag 223lm is on (C4205), and the non-variable winning flag 223lm is determined. When it is determined that is off (C4205: No), then it is determined whether or not the pseudo series effect flag 223lj is on (C4206). When it is determined that the pseudo series effect flag 223lj is off (C4206: No), the series effect is set (C4207), the series effect flag 223li is set on (C4208), and then this process is terminated.

In the process of C4206, when it is determined that the pseudo series effect flag 223lj is on (C4206: Yes), a normal map variation pattern corresponding to the remaining period of the special map variation time is set (C4209), and then this process is performed. To finish.

On the other hand, in the process of C4205, when it is determined that the non-variable winning flag 223 lm is on (C4205: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the special figure variation time counter 223 ln is larger than 0 (C4210). ), When it is determined that the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223ln is not larger than 0 (0) (C4210: No), when the normal figure fluctuation is executed while the special figure fluctuation is not executed. Therefore, this process is terminated as it is without setting the normal map fluctuation effect for showing the lottery result of the normal map variation.

In the 16th embodiment, the normal map variation effect is not set when the special map variation is not executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the normal map variation effect is defined as normal. May be configured to execute the normal map fluctuation effect to be executed at different timings, and based on the executed normal map variation effect, the electric accessory 640a is opened for a long time according to the lottery result of this normal map lottery. The timing may be configured so that it is difficult for the player to easily determine the timing.

In the processing of C4210, when it is determined that the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223ln is larger than 0 (C4210: Yes), the special series effect is set (C4211), and the series effect flag 223li is set to ON (C4212). ), After that, this process is terminated.

As described above, in the 16th embodiment, when the fluctuation time of the normal map is a predetermined time (30 seconds) or more, it is based on the execution status of the series of effects and the status of the special map fluctuation during execution. It is configured to set the normal map fluctuation effect (normal map effect). With this configuration, when the effect of easily notifying the player of the lottery result advantageous to the player is executed as the special figure variation effect for displaying the lottery result of the special figure variation, the normal drawing effect is the effect. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the special figure fluctuation effect is hindered, and it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 418, a time saving effect setting process (C4104) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 418 is a flowchart showing this time saving effect setting process (C4104). This time saving effect setting process (C4104) is executed in the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 416) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

In the time saving effect setting process (C4104), first, it is determined whether or not the current special figure change is the change of the special figure 2 (C4301). If it is determined that the change in the special figure this time is not the change in the special figure 2 (C4301: No), the present process is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the current special figure change is the change of the special figure 2 (C4301: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current special figure change is the time-saving final change (C4302). If it is determined that the special figure change this time is not the time-saving final change (C4302: No), this process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the special figure fluctuation this time is the time saving final fluctuation (C4302: Yes), the time saving final fluctuation flag 223lk is set to ON (C4303), and the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223la is read out. (C4304), a variation pattern of the final variation is set based on the lottery result of the variation and the lottery result included in the winning information (C4305), and then this process is terminated.

Next, the hit variation effect setting process (C4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 419. FIG. 419 is a flowchart showing this hit variation effect setting process (C4112). This hit variation effect setting process (C4112) is executed in the variation effect setting process (see FIG. 416) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

In the hit variation effect setting process (C4112), first, it is determined whether or not the series effect flag 223li is on (C4401). When it is determined that the series effect flag 223li is off (C4401: No), then it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is the variation pattern of the series effect (C4402). If it is determined that the current variation pattern is not the variation pattern of the series of effects (C4402: No), the present process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the current variation pattern is a variation pattern of a series of effects (C4402: Yes), the series effect flag 223li is set to ON (C4403), and then this process is set.

On the other hand, in the process of C4401, when it is determined that the series effect flag 223li is on (C4401: Yes), the fluctuation stop timing and the series effect branch timing are analyzed (C4404), and then the result can be replaced. It is determined whether or not there is (C4405). If it is determined that the result cannot be replaced (C4405: No), this process is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the result can be replaced (C4405: Yes), a display replacement command indicating a variation pattern for replacing the effect result of the series of effects is set (C4406), and then this process is terminated.

Next, the effect update process 16 (C3112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 420. FIG. 420 is a flowchart showing the effect update process 16 (C3112). This effect update process 16 (C3112) is executed in the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the 16th embodiment, and is controlled based on the elapsed time regardless of the fluctuation of the special symbol. This is a process for setting the effect.

When the effect update process 16 (C3112) is executed, first, the values of various fluctuation time counters are updated (C4501), and then it is determined whether or not the series effect flag 223li is on (C4502). When it is determined that the series effect flag 223li is off (C4502: No), then it is determined whether or not the pseudo series effect flag 223lj is on (C4504). If it is determined that the pseudo series effect flag 223lj is off (C4504: No), the process proceeds to C4505.

In the process of C4502, when it is determined that the series effect flag 223li is on (C4502: Yes), and in the process of C4504, when it is determined that the pseudo series effect flag 223lj is on (C4504: Yes), a series of processes is performed. The effect update process is executed (C4503), and then the process proceeds to the C4505 process. Further, the details of the series of effect update processing will be described later with reference to the processing of FIG. 421.

In the process of C4505, it is determined whether or not the time saving final fluctuation flag 223 lk is on (C4505). If it is determined that the time saving final variation flag 223 lk is on (C4505: Yes), the final variation effect update process is executed (C4506), and the process proceeds to the process of C4507.

On the other hand, in the process of C4505, if it is determined that the time saving final fluctuation flag 223 lk is on (C4505: Yes), another effect update process is executed (C4507), and then this process is terminated.

Next, a series of effect update processes (C4503) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 421. FIG. 421 is a flowchart showing this series of staging update processing (C4503). This series of effect update process (C4503) is executed in the effect update process 16 (see FIG. 420) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

In the series effect update process (C4503), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the series effect counter is 0 (C4601). If it is determined that the value of the series effect counter is not 0 (C4601: No), the value of the series effect counter is updated (C4603), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the series effect counter is 0. (C4604). If it is determined that the value of the series effect counter is not 0 (C4601: No), the process proceeds to C4605. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the series effect counter is not 0 (C4604: Yes), the series effect flag 223li is set to ON (C4612), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of C4601, when it is determined that the value of the series effect counter is 0 (C4601: Yes), a value corresponding to the current series effect is set in the series effect counter (C4602), and the process proceeds to C4605. Transition.

In the process of C4605, it is determined whether or not the game is currently being played per normal figure (C4605). If it is determined that the current game is being played per game (C4605: Yes), the update process during the game per game is executed (C4606), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of C4605, if it is determined that the game is not currently being played per normal figure (C4605: No), then it is determined whether or not the game per normal figure is completed (C4607). It is determined whether or not the game is completed per normal figure (C4607). If it is determined that the game per normal figure has not been completed (C4607: No), the process proceeds to C4609. When it is determined that the game per normal figure is completed (C4607: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the special 2 winning flag is on (C4608). If it is determined that the special 2 winning flag is off (C4608: No), the series production flag 223li is set to on (C4612), and then this process is terminated. If it is determined that the special 2 winning flag is on in the processing of C4608 (C4608: Yes), the process proceeds to the processing of C4609.

In the process of C4609, it is determined whether or not the game is currently in a small hit (C4609). If it is determined that the current small hit game is in progress (C4609: Yes), the small hit game in-game update process is executed (C4610), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of C4609, if it is determined that the current small hit game is not in progress (C4609: No), a display command corresponding to the value of the series effect counter is set (C4611), and then this process is performed. finish.

Next, with reference to FIG. 422, the contents of the game-per-game update process (C4606) executed in the series of effect update processes (see C4503 in FIG. 421) will be described. FIG. 422 is a flowchart showing the contents of the in-game update process (C4606) per normal map. In this update process during game per map (C4606), the player is alerted when the ball does not win the second winning opening 640 for a predetermined period even though the game is being played per map. The process to do is executed.

When the in-game update process (C4606) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the second winning opening 640 (C4701), and it is determined that the ball has not won the second winning opening 640. If this is the case (C4701: No), then it is determined whether or not one second has passed from the start of the game per normal figure (C4702). Here, if it is determined that 1 second has elapsed (C4702: Yes), a display alert command is set (C4703), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of C4702, if it is determined that it is not the timing when one second has elapsed from the start of the game per game (C4702: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Here, when the display alert command is set in the process of C4703, the alert screen for making the second winning opening 640 win the ball by the end of the game per normal figure (see FIG. 370 (a)). ) Is displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, as a game per game, when the game per game long opening is executed, the electric accessory 640a is opened for 1 second, and after a closing period of 1.5 seconds, it is 0.5 again. It is configured so that a game per game that opens the electric accessory 640a for a second is executed. Then, the caution screen shown in FIG. 370 (a) is displayed one second after the start of the game per normal figure. With this configuration, when a player who sees the alert screen plays a right-handed game, the ball fired by the right-handed game can easily win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

On the other hand, in the process of C4701 when it is determined that the ball has won a prize in the second winning opening 640 (there was a special 2 winning) (C4701: Yes), a display command for indicating the special 2 winning is set ( C4704), the special 2 winning flag 223lu is set to ON (C4705), and this process is terminated. Here, when a display command is set in the process of C4704, a display mode for notifying the special 2 prize is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the special 2 prize has occurred in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, the content of the small hit in-game update process (C4610) will be described with reference to FIG. 422 (b). FIG. 422 (b) is a flowchart showing the contents of the update process (C4610) during the small hit game. In this small hit game renewal process (C4610), it is determined whether the ball has passed through a specific area in the V winning opening 650a during the small hit game, and a predetermined period (3 seconds) has been set since the small hit game was started. When the ball has not passed through the specific area in the V winning opening 650a even though the lapse has passed, a process for alerting the player is executed.

When the small hit game update process (C4610) is executed, first, it is determined whether the small hit caution flag 223ll is set to on (C4751), and it is determined that the small hit caution flag 223ll is not set to on. If so (C4751: No), then it is determined whether 3 seconds have passed from the start of the small hit game (C4752). If it is determined that 3 seconds have passed since the small hit game (C4752: Yes), it is determined whether the ball has passed through the specific area in the V winning opening 650a (C4753), and the ball has not passed. When it is determined that (C4753: No), the small hit caution flag 223 ll is set to ON (C4754), the display alert command is set (C4755), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit caution flag 223ll is already set to ON in the processing of C4751 (C4751: Yes), it is determined that 3 seconds have not passed from the start of the small hit game in the processing of C4752. (C4752: No), if it is determined that the ball has passed through a specific area in the V winning opening 650a in the processing of C4753 (C4753: Yes), the processing of C4754 and C4755 is skipped and this processing is performed. finish.

Next, the contents of the final variation effect update process (C4506) will be described with reference to FIG. 423. FIG. 423 is a flowchart showing the contents of the final variation effect update process (C4506). In this final variation effect update process (C4506), a process for setting a variation effect corresponding to the final variation in the time saving state is executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, as the variation effect during the time saving state, in addition to the first suggestion effect that suggests only the variation result (lottery result) of the variation, the variation result (lottery result) of the variation, and the special figure. The second suggestion effect that suggests the pre-reading result of the two hold and the second suggestion effect are configured to be feasible, and the second suggestion effect is configured to be executed in the final change in the time saving state.

Further, in the final variation of the time saving state of the present embodiment, there is also a hold acquisition effect for encouraging the player to acquire the special figure 2 hold up to the upper limit value (4 pieces) during the period when the time saving state is set. It is configured to be feasible, and the hold acquisition effect is executed in the first half of the change period of the final change, and the second suggestion effect (time saving final change effect) is executed in the second half period. Then, the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 hold acquired at the end timing of the first half period is reflected in the effect result of the second suggestion effect.

With this configuration, after the player has acquired many special figure 2 holds, the second suggestion effect (time saving final variation effect) that reflects the look-ahead result for the acquired special figure 2 hold is executed. Therefore, it is possible to easily set an effect mode indicating winning as an effect mode of the time-saving final variation effect, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

In addition, if the number of acquired special figure 2 reserved balls is equal to or greater than the upper limit (4) at the timing until the hold acquisition effect is executed (the start timing of the first half period), the hold acquisition effect is executed. It is configured to execute the second suggestion effect from the first half period without letting it. As a result, a useless effect for the player, that is, a hold acquisition effect for acquiring the special figure 2 hold even though the number of special figure 2 hold balls has already reached the upper limit is executed. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the content of the production. Further, by executing the second suggestion effect from the first half period, the effect period of the second suggestion effect can be lengthened, so that the second suggestion effect more interesting can be executed. Then, since the player can be enthusiastically played the game (right-handed game) in order to execute the second suggestion effect rich in interest, the operation of the game can be improved.

The final variation effect update process (C4506 in FIG. 423), which will be described with reference to FIG. 423, corresponds to the final variation in the time-saving state updated by the process of C4501 in the effect update process 16 (see C3112 in FIG. 420). The elapsed period of the final variation effect (elapsed period of the variation in FIG. 2) to be executed is determined, and the process based on the determination result is executed. When executed in the final variation effect update process (C4506), first, it is determined whether the current timing is the waiting period elapsed timing (C4801), and if it is determined to be the waiting period elapsed timing (C4801: Yes). Next, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 (value of the counter for the number of reserved balls in the special symbol 2 is 223 lc) is "4" which is the upper limit value (C4802).

In the process of C4802, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is "4" (C4802: Yes), the reserved upper limit flag 223 ls is set to ON (C4803), and this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of C4802, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is not "4", that is, "3" or less (C4802: No), the holding upper limit flag 223ls is not set to ON. This process ends.

In the processing of C4801, if it is determined that the current time is not the waiting period elapsed timing (C4801: No), then it is determined whether the current time is the first period start timing (C4804), and the first period start timing is used. If it is determined to be present (C4804: Yes), it is determined whether the hold upper limit flag 223ls is set to ON (C4805), and if it is determined to be set to ON, that is, at the start timing of the first period. Special Figure 2 When it is determined that the predetermined number (4) of the reserved balls is secured (C4805: Yes), the time reduction effect using the first period and the second period as the time reduction final variation effect. (C4806), the hold upper limit flag 223 ls is set to off, the executed flag 223 lt is set to on (C4808), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of C4805, when it is determined that the hold upper limit flag 223 ls is not set to ON (C4805: No), the holding ball number acquisition effect for acquiring the special figure 2 hold up to the upper limit value (4) is performed. The display effect command to be shown is set (C4809), and this process is terminated as it is. With this configuration, it is possible to change the effect mode of the effect executed during the first period according to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 at the time when the waiting period elapses, and to provide the player with various effects. can do.

In the processing of C4804, if it is determined that the current time is not the start timing of the first period (C4804: No), then it is determined whether the current time is the start timing of the second period (C4810), and the second period is started. When it is determined that it is the start timing (C4810: Yes), it is determined whether the executed flag 223lt is set to ON (C4811).

Here, when it is determined that the executed flag 223 lt is set to ON, that is, when it is determined that the effect mode of the effect to be executed during the second period is set at the start timing of the first period. (C4811: Yes) Since it is not necessary to newly set the effect mode, the executed flag 223 lt is set to off (C4812), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of C4811 that the executed flag 223lt is not set to ON (C4811: No), the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223la is read out (C4813), and the change is made. A display effect command indicating a time reduction variation effect based on the lottery result (hit determination result), the pre-reading result (preliminary determination result) included in the read winning information, and the display effect command (C4814) are set, and this process is terminated.

In this way, the effect mode based on the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold is not the execution timing of the time reduction final variation but the timing after the lapse of a predetermined time after the execution of the time reduction final variation (the timing when the second period is set). By setting, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223 lc) that is subtracted when the fluctuation is executed is re-added to the look-ahead result of special figure 2 hold. Based on the effect mode can be set. Therefore, since the number of pre-reading special figure 2 hold can be increased, it is possible to easily display the effect result indicating a hit in the effect (time saving final variation effect) executed during the second period. The staging effect can be enhanced.

In the process of C4810, when it is determined that the present is not the start timing of the second period (C4810: No), then it is determined whether the present is the end timing of the second period (C4815). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the second period (C4815: Yes), it is determined whether a new special 2 hold has been acquired during the second period (C4816), and whether a new special 2 hold has been acquired is determined. If it is determined (C4816: Yes), the re-read-ahead flag 223lr is set to ON (C4817), and this process is terminated.

Here, to explain the content of the process executed by C4816, a storage area corresponding to each symbol hold is formed in the winning information storage area 223la, and in the present embodiment, the first special symbol (special symbol) is formed. The number of the storage area for 1), the storage area for the second special symbol (special figure 2), and the storage area for the normal symbol (normal figure) correspond to the upper limit reserved storage number (4 pieces) of each symbol. It is formed. Then, each storage area has been referenced to indicate whether or not the look-ahead information included in the winning information command output from the main control device 110 and the look-ahead result have been referred to when various effects are set by the voice lamp control device 113. It is configured to store information.

That is, in the processing of C4816, whether or not a new special 2 holding is stored in the winning information storage area 223la in addition to the special figure 2 holding (special 2 holding) referred to by the processing of C4806 or C4814 is stored in each storage area. It is determined based on the presence or absence of the stored referenced information, and the look-ahead information is described and referenced in the storage areas (4 pieces) corresponding to the special figure 2 hold (special 2 hold) of the prize information storage area 223la. When it is determined that there is a storage area in which information is not stored, it is determined that there is a new special 2 hold.

Then, by setting the re-look-ahead flag 223lr to ON in the processing of C4817, the special figure 2 is held again as a variation effect corresponding to the next special figure change (the first special figure change after the end of the time reduction). A variable effect based on the look-ahead result of is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of C4816, when it is determined that there is no new special 2 hold (C4816: No), all of the currently acquired special figure 2 hold is pre-read, and the second step is based on the pre-reading result. Since this is the case when the time reduction final variation effect is being executed during the period, a display effect result command indicating the result of the time reduction variation effect is set (C4818), and this process is terminated. If it is determined in the process of C4815 that it is not the end timing of the second period (C4815: No), then a display command corresponding to other update contents is set (C4819), and this process is terminated. In the processing of C4819, the setting of the effect mode based on the elapsed period of the final variation effect, the update setting of the remaining period display mode for indicating the remaining period of the final variation, and the elapsed period display mode for indicating the elapsed period of the final variation. The update setting of the above, the setting of the operation display mode executed based on the operation of the operation means (frame button 22) by the player during the final change, and the like are executed.

<17th Embodiment>
Next, the 17th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 424 to 431. In the 16th embodiment described above, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is configured to be storable up to four, and the special figure 2 is reserved when the time saving state ends and the normal state is entered. For (maximum 4 pieces), the special figure 2 lottery was configured to be executed with the lottery probability in the normal state.

Further, the above-mentioned 16th embodiment is configured so that the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state is more likely to have a lottery result advantageous to the player than the special figure 2 lottery in the time saving state. At the end of the game, he was enthusiastic to play a game in order to get a lot of special figure 2 hold.

In the 16th embodiment described above, the maximum number of special figure 2 holds can be easily obtained only by continuously performing the right-handed game during the final fluctuation of the time saving state, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. However, it was not possible to make a difference in the number of special figure 2 lottery that can be executed after the end of the time saving state, and further technical improvement was required.

On the other hand, in the 17th embodiment, the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is set to "1", and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation executed during the time saving state is short. The period in which the time can be easily selected can be set according to the type of the time saving state and the number of special map fluctuations during the time saving state, and further, the winning game period is set as a game per normal figure executed during the time saving state. It is configured so that multiple types of long open games can be set. Further, as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation executed after the end of the time saving state, a state in which a short-time fluctuation (0.1 second fluctuation) can be easily set can be set.

With this configuration, the number of special figure 2 lottery that can be executed after the end of the time saving state (after the normal state is set) can be made different depending on how various game conditions are satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player what kind of game condition is satisfied at the end of the time saving state.

First, with reference to FIG. 424, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 17th embodiment will be described. FIG. 424 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment. The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the 17th embodiment is different from the game board of the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment described above in that the configuration of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is changed. Is different, and the others are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 424, in the 17th embodiment, a closed state in which it is difficult for a ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640 (displayed by a solid line in FIG. 424) and an open state in which a ball is easily won (indicated by a dotted line in FIG. 424). And, a variable electric accessory 640a is provided. The electric accessory 640a facilitates winning a plurality of balls into the second winning opening 640 when the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 361) of the 16th embodiment described above is in an open state. It is configured in. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the period from passing through the electric accessory 640a in the open state to winning the prize in the second winning opening 640 is configured to be different depending on the flow condition of the ball. For example, a ball that flows down along a structure having a second winning opening 640 and reaches the vicinity of the base of the electric accessory 640a (the structure side having the second winning opening 640), and a tip portion of the electric accessory 640a (second). A ball that has reached the vicinity of the structure having the winning opening 640), and the ball flowing period required from being located in a flowing position where the second winning opening 640 can be won to winning the second winning opening 640. The difference between the two is larger than 0.1 seconds.

With this configuration, it is possible to easily make the ball win the second winning opening 640 by providing a time difference of 0.1 seconds or more during the game per game in which the electric accessory 640a is positioned in the open state. can. Details will be described later, but in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation when the normal state is set as the gaming state is configured so that the fluctuation time of 0.1 second at the shortest is set. There is.

That is, in the present embodiment, the special figure 2 variation can be executed in a shorter variation time than the generation time lag of the plurality of winning balls during one game per normal map. Therefore, even if a plurality of balls win the second winning opening 640 during one game per game, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the special drawing 2 lottery for the number of times according to the number of winnings.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 424, a time lag of a winning ball is generated depending on which part of the electric accessory 640a the ball reaches with respect to the electric accessory 640a located in the open state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a plurality of openings (first opening, second opening) communicating with the second winning opening 640 are provided, and the ball flowing into each opening is the second winning opening 640. It is configured so that the period until reaching is different by at least 0.1 seconds or more, and further, it is configured to execute a game per game in which each opening is opened in one game per game. Is also good.

With this configuration, the period until the ball that has passed through the first opening and the ball that has passed through the second opening reach the second winning opening 640 during the game per game at approximately the same timing. Since it is possible to make the numbers different, it is possible to more reliably execute the special figure 2 lottery for the number of times according to the number of winnings.

Further, in this case, an electric accessory 640a may be provided for each opening, or one electric accessory 640a may be configured to shift a plurality of openings to an open state and a closed state. ..

<Regarding the content of the production performed by the pachinko machine 10 in the 17th embodiment>
Next, the display contents of the display screen in the 17th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 425. In the present embodiment, when a predetermined game condition is satisfied at the end timing of the time reduction state, a state (support state) in which the special figure 2 lottery can be easily executed is set for a predetermined period even after the end of the time reduction state. Therefore, in the final variation of the time reduction state (time reduction final variation effect), a suggestion effect suggesting that the support state is set after the end of the time reduction is executed.

FIG. 425 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed in the time saving final variation effect during the final variation in the time saving state. As shown in FIG. 425 (a), in the 17th embodiment, unlike the 16th embodiment described above, a variation effect (first suggestion) for showing the lottery result of the variation even in the final variation in the time saving state. Since the effect) is executed, the same effect screen as the variation effect (see FIG. 373 (a)) executed in response to the non-final variation in the time saving state of the 16th embodiment described above is displayed. The same elements as those of the display screen of the 16th embodiment described above (see FIG. 373 (a)) are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the 17th embodiment, it is suggested that the support state is set after the end of the time saving in addition to the lottery result aspects 871a to 871c for the display screen (see FIG. 373 (a)) of the 16th embodiment described above. The difference is that the state suggestion mode 871d with the word "support" is displayed. This state suggestion mode 871d is configured to be easily displayed each time the end of the time reduction state approaches, and when the lottery result of the time reduction final variation is out of order and the support state is set after the end of the time reduction state, the state suggestion mode 871d is configured. An effect mode is set in which the character 851 gets the state suggestion mode 871d. If the lottery result of the final variation in time reduction is a hit, an effect mode for obtaining the lottery result modes 871a to 871b indicating the win is set.

When the support state is set after the time saving state ends, the display screen shown in FIG. 425 (b) is displayed. FIG. 425 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display content displayed during the support state. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the game per normal figure won during the time saving state is the game per long opening, and the game per long opening is continuously executed even after the end of the time saving state, and during the normal state. The support state is set when the ball can win the second winning opening 640.

During this support state, although it is a normal state, "right-handed" is highlighted in the small display area Dm4 because the ball can win the second winning opening 640. Then, in the small display area Dm31, a guidance display mode for visually informing the player that the game of winning the ball in the second winning opening 640 is performed is displayed, and the support state is set in the sub-display area Ds. A "Support time rush" comment is displayed to indicate that it has been done.

Further, in the small display area Dm6, the third symbol corresponding to the change in the special figure 2 being executed is displayed in a variable manner, and the information indicating the number of changes in the special figure 2 executed during the current support state is displayed in the small display area Dm30. Is displayed as "Support count". In the example shown in FIG. 425 (b), since the first special figure 2 variation is executed after the support state is set, “support count × 1” is displayed. In the main display area Dm, an effect that the character 851 tries to stand up is executed, and a comment of "Ganbare" is displayed. During this support state, a short variation (0.1 second variation) can be executed as a special figure 2 variation, and in some cases, a large number of special figure 2 variations are executed. If a winner is won in the special figure 2 fluctuation during the support state, the effect that the character 851 stands up is executed.

<About the electrical configuration of the 17th embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 426 to 429. In the present embodiment, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is changed with respect to the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment described above, and the upper limit of the number of reservations in FIG. 2 is set to 1. The difference is that the configuration of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203lb and the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203le of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is changed due to the change, and the other points are the same. Is. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, the detailed description of the difference between the RAM 203 and the RAM 203 will be omitted.

FIG. 426 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the 17th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 426, with respect to the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, 6 tables 202fd per normal figure are replaced with 5 tables 202ld of random numbers per normal figure, and variation pattern 17 tables 202me are replaced with variation pattern 16 table 202le. Instead of the normal map fluctuation pattern selection table 202 lf, the normal map fluctuation pattern selection 17 table 202 mf is provided, and is the same except for the provision. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 427 (a), the contents of the type selection 17 table 202md per general map will be described. FIG. 427 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the type selection 17 table 202md per general drawing. In the 17th embodiment, as shown in FIG. 427 (a), the above-mentioned type per normal figure is provided in that A per normal figure, B1 per normal figure, and B2 per normal figure are provided. It is different from the selection 16 table 202ld.

Specifically, the probability state of the normal symbol is the low probability state (low probability of the normal figure), and the value of the acquired second hit type counter C6 is defined as "0" and "A per normal figure" is defined. "B1 per normal figure" is defined in the range of "1 to 50", and "B2 per normal figure" is defined in the range of "51 to 99". Further, the probability state of the normal symbol is the high probability state (high probability of the normal figure), and the value of the acquired second hit type counter C6 is defined as "A per normal figure" in the range of "0,1". "B1 per normal figure" is defined in the range of "2 to 50", and "B2 per normal figure" is defined in the range of "51 to 99".

Next, the relationship between the per-figure type selected in the per-figure type selection 17 table 202md and the game state at the time when the per-figure game is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 427 (b). do. FIG. 427 (b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the type of normal drawing and the opening operation content of the electric accessory 640a based on the game state.

In the 17th embodiment, "B1 per normal figure" and "B2 per normal figure" are provided in place of "B per normal figure" as the type per normal figure in the 16th embodiment described above. Although it is different, the opening operation content of the electric accessory 640a with respect to the "Public drawing B1" of the present embodiment is the same as the opening operation content of the "Public drawing B" of the 16th embodiment described above. The detailed description thereof will be omitted.

If the type per normal figure is "B2 per normal figure" and the game state at the time when the game per normal figure is released is the time saving state (high accuracy of the normal figure), the game per normal figure is "long". The opening operation of "opening B" is executed. When this "long opening B" is set, a game per game is executed in which the electric accessory 640a is opened for 1.5 seconds after a closed state (opening period) of 0.1 seconds. The flow of this opening operation is stipulated in a scenario per game that is not shown, and when a game per game is executed, a scenario per game corresponding to the type and game state of the game is set and the main control is performed. By periodically updating the scenario for hitting a normal figure in the main process of the device 110, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed in accordance with the above-mentioned flow of the game for hitting a normal figure.

That is, in the 17th embodiment, if a player wins a game during a time saving state, one of "long open A" and "long open B" is executed as a game per long open game. To. Regardless of which game per game is executed, the period during which the electric accessory 640a is open is the same as 1.5 seconds, and if the game per game is executed during the time saving state, any game is executed. Even if the game is executed per second, it is configured so that the player can be provided with the same privilege.

However, in "long open A" and "long open B", the period during which the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (a state in which it is easy to win a ball in the second winning opening 640) after the game is started. Is different, and when "Long Open A" is set, 2.6 seconds (including the opening period of 0.1 seconds) to 3.1 seconds after the start of the game per game. It is configured to open the electric accessory 640a in the open state during the period of.

Therefore, if the opening operation of "long opening A" is executed just before the end of the time saving state, the opening operation of "long opening B" is executed at the same timing. It is possible to make it easier for the electric accessory 640a to be in the open state after the time saving state is completed and the normal state is set, as compared with the case of winning.

Next, with reference to FIG. 428, the contents of the normal variation pattern 17 table 202me1 included in the variation pattern 17 table 202me will be described. FIG. 428 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the normal variation pattern 17 table 202me1, and is a schematic diagram showing the above-mentioned conventional variation pattern 16 table 202le1 (see FIG. 385 (b)) of the 16th embodiment described above. ), The content selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is different, and other than that, it is the same. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

In the 17th embodiment, according to the type of time saving state (time saving A, time saving B) set after the end of the big hit, the special figure is executed until the number of times the special figure changes after the end of the big hit reaches a predetermined number of times. 2 The fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the fluctuation is configured to be different.

Specifically, when the time reduction A (time reduction 1 time or time reduction 99 times) is set as the time reduction state, the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game is in the normal state within the range of "1st to 99th times". When the special figure 2 fluctuation in the above figure 2 is executed, the "short fluctuation (10 seconds)" is set regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the result of the special figure 2 lottery, and the "100th to 151st times" In the range, regardless of the value of the variable type counter CS1, if the result of the special figure 2 lottery is "off", "ultra-short miss (0.1 seconds)" is "hit (big hit, small hit)". Is set to "long hit (20 seconds)", and in the range of "152nd and subsequent times", "short fluctuation (10 seconds)" is set regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the result of the special figure 2 lottery. It is stipulated to be done.

Here, in the 17th embodiment, as in the 16th embodiment described above, a plurality of time saving end conditions (common time saving end condition, corresponding time saving ending condition) are set as the time saving ending condition for ending the time saving state. For example, even in the time saving state in which 99 times of time saving is set (the time saving state in which the corresponding time saving end condition established when the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 fluctuation reaches 99 times is set). , When the small hit game is executed, the ball does not pass through the specific area in the V winning opening 650a during the small hit game, and the big hit game is not executed, the common time saving end condition is satisfied and the time saving state ends. It is configured to do. Therefore, even if the time reduction of 99 times is set, there is a possibility that the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state will be executed when the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the big hit shifts to the second time.

As shown in FIG. 428, when the time reduction A is set, the fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds is 0.1 seconds when the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed when the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the jackpot is “100 to 151st”. Is configured to be set. In other words, if the time reduction state is set and the race is completed 99 times without winning, a variation time of 0.1 seconds is set as the variation time for the special figure 2 hold stored at that time. Will be done. In addition, when the game per game is executed so as to straddle the end timing of the time saving state, the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the normal state, and the special figure 2 fluctuates with a fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds. Is executed, even if a plurality of balls win the second winning opening 640 during the game per game, the special figure 2 variation of the number of times according to the number of winnings is easily executed. ..

On the other hand, when the time reduction state of one time reduction is set, the fluctuation time of 10 seconds is set as the special figure 2 variation even when the game per normal figure is executed so as to straddle the end timing of the time reduction state. Because it is set, even if a plurality of balls win the second winning opening 640 during the game per normal figure, the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed only the number of times up to the memory number of the special figure 2 hold. is doing.

In addition, when the time reduction B (time reduction state in which the time reduction 5 times is set) is set, the special figure 2 fluctuation in the normal state is within the range of "1st to 5th times" after the jackpot game is completed. When is executed, "short fluctuation (10 seconds)" is set regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the result of the special figure 2 lottery, and the fluctuation type is set in the range of "6th to 20th". Regardless of the value of the counter CS1, if the result of the special figure 2 lottery is "off", it is "ultra-short off (0.1 seconds)", and if it is "hit (big hit, small hit)", it is "long hit (long hit). "20 seconds)" is set, and in the range of "21st and subsequent times", "short fluctuation (10 seconds)" is set regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the result of the special figure 2 lottery. Has been done.

As described above, in the present embodiment, of the three time reduction states (1 time reduction, 5 time reductions, 99 time reductions) in which different time reduction end conditions are set, the time reduction state in which 5 time reductions are set is used. When the time saving state ends and the normal state is set by reaching the specified number of time reductions in the two types of time saving states, that is, the time saving state in which 99 times of time saving is set. The special figure 2 fluctuation of 1 second is configured to be feasible.

Then, as described above, the 0.1 second set as the special figure 2 variation is from the continuous opening period (0.5 seconds, 1 second, 1.5 seconds) of the electric accessory 640a in the game per long opening of the normal figure. Because it is short, it is possible to execute many special figure 2 fluctuations by making a plurality of balls win the second winning opening 640 in one game per normal figure long opening.

Therefore, the ease of executing the special figure 2 lottery after the end of the time reduction state can be made different depending on the set time reduction state and the established time reduction end condition. Therefore, the time reduction state is given to the player. It is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to play when the game is completed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the time saving state of one time saving is set, the special figure 2 change is executed within the period in which the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game becomes "100 to 151". In that case, that is, the timing at which the special figure 2 lottery is executed by winning the normal figure long opening while the left-handed game in the normal state is being executed after the time reduction state of one time reduction is completed. When the number of changes in the special figure after the end of the jackpot game is "100 to 151", a short change of 0.1 seconds is executed if the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery is out of order. Therefore, it is possible to execute the special figure 2 fluctuation multiple times at the time of winning the normal figure long opening.

With this configuration, it is possible to set a period during which the special figure 2 lottery can be advantageously executed not only after the end of the time saving state but also when the normal state is won by the long opening of the normal figure. On the other hand, it is possible to play a game in a normal state while being aware of the number of fluctuations in the special figure, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, a player who has been playing for a long period of time can grasp the contents of the previous time reduction state (number of time reductions), and further, the special figure 2 lottery is advantageous in winning the normal state long opening. Since it is possible to predict the number of special map fluctuations that can be executed (the number of special map fluctuations after the end of the big hit game) and it is possible to play the game more advantageously than other players, the willingness to continue playing the game. Can be enhanced.

In the 17th embodiment, when a specific time reduction state is set and the time reduction state is terminated by the satisfaction of the specific time reduction end condition, the fluctuation time of the variation in Special Figure 2 is short (0. It is configured so that the fluctuation pattern of 1 second) is selected, but it is not limited to this, and it is a short time (0.1 second) depending on the timing of winning the normal long opening of the normal figure. A range in which the fluctuation pattern is selected may be separately provided. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the special figure 2 lottery can be advantageously executed when the player wins the long opening of the Fuzu, so that the interest of the game can be improved. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation is configured to be selected based on the type of the time saving state and the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the big hit game, but the present invention is limited to this. However, for example, the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation may be selected based on the type of the time reduction state and the number of variations of the special figure after the time reduction state ends. With this configuration, regardless of which time reduction end condition the time reduction state ends, it becomes possible to select the same fluctuation pattern as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation after the end of the time reduction state, which is safe for the player. You can play the game with your heart.

Further, when the same type of time saving state is set, different fluctuation patterns may be selected. For example, a plurality of time saving types in which 5 times of time saving are set as the time saving state are provided, and a plurality of them. Of the time saving types in the above, the special figure 2 variation for a short time (0.1 seconds) may be executed only when a specific time saving type is set. As a result, when the time saving state is set (when the remaining time saving number is grasped), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the game content after the time saving state ends.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the variable time of 0.1 seconds is set as the state (support state) in which the special figure 2 lottery is advantageously executed. It may be configured so that the fluctuation time shorter than the opening time of the accessory 640a is set, and a plurality of types of fluctuation times (for example, 0.2 seconds and 0.3 seconds in addition to 0.1 seconds) may be set. It may be configured so that one fluctuation time is selected from among them. With this configuration, the number of special figure 2 lottery that can be executed during the support state depends on the length of the special figure 2 fluctuation time set in the state where the special figure 2 lottery is advantageously executed (support state). Is variable, so that the player can pay attention to the content of the game during the support state.

Next, the contents of the normal map variation pattern selection 17 table 202mf will be described with reference to FIG. 429. FIG. 429 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal map variation pattern selection 17 table 202mf, and FIG. 429 (b) is a normal diagram for time saving A possessed by the normal map variation pattern selection 17 table 202mf. FIG. 429 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the variation pattern table 202mf2, and FIG. 429 (c) is defined in the variation pattern table 202fe3 for the time saving B of the variation pattern selection 17 table 202mf. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents.

As shown in FIG. 429 (a), the normal map variation pattern selection 17 table 202mf is the normal map variation pattern table 202mf1 referred to when the normal state is set as the gaming state, and the time saving state is " It has a time saving A normal map fluctuation pattern table 202mf2 that is referred to when "time saving A" is set, and a time saving B normal map fluctuation pattern table 202mf3 that is referred to when "time saving B" is set. is doing.

Since the content specified in the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202mf1 is the same as the content referred to in the normal state (normal map low accuracy) of the normal map variation pattern selection table 202lf in the 16th embodiment described above. , The detailed description thereof will be omitted. On the other hand, the normal map fluctuation pattern table referred to in the time saving state (high accuracy of the normal map) is set with respect to the normal map fluctuation pattern selection table 202lf of the 16th embodiment described above, and the type of the time saving state and the jackpot. The difference is that the normal map fluctuation patterns selected based on the number of special map fluctuations after the end are configured to be different.

Here, with reference to FIG. 429 (b), the contents specified in the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202mf2 for time saving A will be described. The normal map fluctuation pattern table 202mf2 for the time saving A is a data table referred to when the time saving state is set to "time saving A", that is, once or 99 times, and is a data table of FIG. 429. As shown in (b), various normal map fluctuation patterns (variation times) are defined based on the number of special map fluctuations after the end of the jackpot and the acquired value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2.

Specifically, the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the jackpot is "1 to 98 times", and the value of the acquired second fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 629", that is, "short fluctuations (short fluctuations). "2 seconds)" is specified in the range of "630 to 999", and "ultra-short fluctuation (0.1 seconds)" is specified, and the number of special figure fluctuations is "99 times", and the acquired second "Ultra-short fluctuation (0.1 seconds)" is specified in the range of the fluctuation type counter CS2 "0 to 709", and "medium fluctuation (10 seconds)" is specified in the range of "710 to 989". In the range of "990 to 999", "short fluctuation (2 seconds)" is defined.

That is, in the time reduction final fluctuation when the time reduction of 1 time is set, 63% is configured to select 2 seconds and 37% selects 0.1 seconds as the normal map fluctuation pattern, and the time reduction of 99 times is set. In the case, the time saving final variation is configured to select 71% for 0.1 seconds, 28% for 10 seconds, and 1% for 2 seconds as the normal map variation pattern. Here, the shorter the fluctuation time is set as the normal map fluctuation pattern, the easier it is for the game per normal map to be executed so as to straddle the end timing of the time reduction state. In the time saving state in which the time saving 99 times is set, it is possible to easily set the state (support state) in which the ball is easily won in the second winning opening 640 after the time saving state ends.

On the other hand, when the number of special map fluctuations is "99", the normal map fluctuation time of 10 seconds is selected with a probability of 28%, and the 10-second normal map fluctuation time is selected. In that case, it becomes difficult to execute the game per normal figure so as to straddle the end timing of the time saving state. Further, in the present embodiment, when the time reduction end condition is set to 99 times, the normal map fluctuation time during execution of the special figure variation (99th special map variation) in which the time reduction end condition is satisfied is set as another. Since it is configured so that the normal map fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds is easier to select than the period of, the normal map fluctuation of 0.1 seconds is continuously executed without executing the final fluctuation in the time saving state. By making it possible, it is possible to make it difficult to play a game in which an excessive privilege (a prize ball paid out by winning a ball in the second winning opening 640) is performed.

In addition, the game board 13 is set so that the special figure change set as the time saving final change and the normal figure change are set at different moments, and one of the execution moments can be established by the ball launched by the right-handed game. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to perform a game in which the normal map change (variation per normal figure) is executed according to the end timing of the special figure change.

Next, with reference to FIG. 429 (c), the contents specified in the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202mf3 for time saving B will be described. The normal map fluctuation pattern table 202mf3 for time saving B is a data table referred to when “time saving B”, that is, 5 times of time saving is set as the type of time saving state, and is shown in FIG. 429 (c). As mentioned above, various normal map fluctuation patterns (variation time) are defined based on the number of special map fluctuations after the end of the jackpot and the acquired value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2.

Specifically, the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the jackpot is "1 to 4 times", and the value of the acquired second fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 629", that is, "short fluctuations (short fluctuations). "2 seconds)" is specified in the range of "630 to 999", and "ultra-short fluctuation (0.1 seconds)" is specified. 2 “Ultra-short fluctuation (0.1 second)” is specified regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS2. Since the time saving state is set to 5 times at the maximum, the value corresponding to the 6th and subsequent times of the special figure fluctuation is not set.

As described above, when the time reduction state of 5 times is set, the normal map fluctuation is always executed with the fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds during the time reduction final fluctuation. Therefore, it becomes easy to execute the game per normal figure so as to straddle the end timing of the time saving state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol can be set differently according to the type of the time reduction state (time reduction A, B) set. The time saving type (time saving B) in which 5 times of time saving is set makes it easy to set the state (support state) in which the special figure 2 lottery is most easily executed after the time saving state ends, and then 99 times of time saving and 1 time of time saving. It is configured in the order of.

As a result, when the condition for executing the jackpot game is not satisfied during the time saving state, a privilege (support state) can be given to the player, and further, the privilege is given according to the type of the set time saving state. By making the grant probability different, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this embodiment, when the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation is selected, or when the fluctuation pattern of the normal map fluctuation is selected, the number of special map fluctuations after the jackpot game is completed is configured to be referred to. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to select each fluctuation pattern by referring only to the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 fluctuation, or to refer to the number of fluctuations of the normal map fluctuation. You may. Further, it may be configured to select each fluctuation pattern by referring to the condition in which the set time saving end condition is satisfied.

Further, in the present embodiment, when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation, or when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the normal map fluctuation, the special figure fluctuation number after the end of the big hit game is configured to be referred to. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the variation pattern table used when selecting each variation pattern may be changed based on the small hit type won during the time saving state, or after the small hit game is completed. It may be configured to select each fluctuation pattern based on the number of fluctuations in the special map and the number of fluctuations in the normal map.

<Regarding the control process in the 17th embodiment>
Next, the contents of the control process in the 17th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 430 and 431. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol variation process 17 (see C136 in FIG. 430) is executed instead of the normal symbol variation process 16 (see C106 in FIG. 396) for the 16th embodiment described above, and the main control. The contents of the data table referred to in the various discrimination processes in the apparatus 110 (see FIGS. 426 to 429) are different, and the other points are the same. The same control processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, regarding the points where the contents of the referenced data table have been changed and the various processing contents that are changed in response to the changes in the contents of the referenced data table, the numerical values have simply been changed, which is technically ideological. Are the same, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the normal symbol variation processing 17 (C136) will be described with reference to FIG. 430. FIG. 430 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol variation processing 17 (C136). When the ordinary symbol variation process 17 (C136) is executed, the same processes of C601 to C611 as those of the ordinary symbol variation process 16 (see C106 of FIG. 396) of the 16th embodiment described above are executed, and in the process of C611, If it is determined that the lottery for the normal symbol this time is a win (C611: Yes), the type per normal symbol is set by referring to the table 202md of the selection 17 table for the normal symbol (C641), and the hit time (normal). The display mode (at the time of hitting the figure) is set (C613), and the process proceeds to C642. On the other hand, in the process of C611, if it is determined that the winning lottery of the normal symbol this time is out of order (C611: No), the display mode at the time of out of order is set (C614), and the process proceeds to C642.

In the processing of C642, the current normal map fluctuation pattern is set based on the normal map fluctuation pattern selection 17 table (C642), and the command corresponding to each setting content (winning lottery winning / fail judgment, normal map fluctuation pattern) is set. (C623), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of C602, when it is determined that the current figure is currently changing (C602: Yes), C618 to the same as the normal symbol change process 16 of the 16th embodiment described above (see C106 of FIG. 396). The process of C623 is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 of the 17th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 431. The control processing content of the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment replaces the control processing of the voice lamp control device 113 of the 16th embodiment described above with the staging setting process for normal drawing (see C4117 of FIG. 417). The difference is that the effect setting process 17 for normal drawing (see C4167 in FIG. 431) is configured to be executed. The other control processes are the same, and detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

FIG. 431 is a flowchart showing the contents of the staging setting process 17 (C4167) for normal drawing. As shown in FIG. 431, in the normal drawing effect setting process 17 (C4167), the above-mentioned normal drawing effect setting process (see C4117 in FIG. 417) is executed during the special figure final fluctuation period in the time saving state. The difference is that the processing for setting the effect mode is added, and the other parts are the same. The same control processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the normal drawing effect setting process 17 (C4167) is executed, the same processes of C4201 to C4212 as those of the normal drawing effect setting process (see C4117 of FIG. 417) of the 16th embodiment described above are executed, and this process is executed. To finish. Further, in the processing of C4202, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the normal state (C4202: No), then it is determined whether the current state is in the final change of the time saving state (C4251), and the final change. If it is determined that there is no inside (C4251: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of C4251 when it is determined that the current time-saving state is in the final fluctuation (C4251: Yes), the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223ln is acquired, and the remaining period of the special figure fluctuation being executed is calculated. Extract (C4252).

Then, if it is determined whether the end timing of the special figure change during execution is during the game per normal figure long (C4253), and if it is determined that the game is in progress per the normal long open opening (C4253: Yes), the time is shortened this time. Since the game per long opening of the normal figure is executed to straddle the state end timing, a display command is set to suggest that the special figure 2 fluctuation zone (support state) is set after the end of the time reduction (C4254). , End this process. When the display command is set by the process of C4254, the display command is output to the display control device 114 in the same process as the other display commands, and the effect screen shown in FIG. 425 (a) is the third symbol. It is displayed on the display screen of the display device 81.

In the process of C4253, if it is determined that the long release is not performed at the end time reduction timing (C4253: No), the present process is terminated as it is. In the present embodiment, it is configured to end the main process as it is when it is determined that the long release is not performed at the time saving end timing in the process of C4253 (C4253: No). The time saving state was the time saving state (for example, time saving B) where it was easy to set the support state, but the support state was not set because the execution timing of the special figure fluctuation and the normal figure fluctuation was bad, in the first place, the support state. It may be configured to provide a means for determining whether or not a time saving state (for example, time saving A) that is difficult to set is set, and to display a display mode capable of notifying (suggesting) the determination result to the player. .. In addition, a means for determining whether or not the final change in the time-saving state has ended at the end timing of the current normal map change and the end timing of the game per normal map executed based on the current normal map change. If it is determined that the final change in the time-saving state has not ended at the end timing of the current normal map change and the end timing of the game per normal map executed based on the current normal map change, that is the case. It may be configured to suggest (notify) the discrimination result.

As described above, the 17th embodiment is the same as the 16th embodiment described above, in the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) rather than the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 lottery). It is set so that it is easier to win a small hit, and when the time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set as the game state, the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state, It is configured so that the special figure 2 lottery is easier to be executed than when the low probability state of the normal symbol) is set. Then, a ball is won in the V winning opening 650a which is in an open state during the small hit game, and when the ball passes through a specific area (V gate), the execution opportunity of the big hit game is established. ..

Then, as the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the first ending condition (condition that is satisfied when the number of times of special figure change (number of times of change of special figure 2) reaches the specified number of times (for example, 5 times)) and When the first end condition is satisfied by having at least the second end condition (a condition that is satisfied when a specified number of small hits (for example, once) is won by a special drawing lottery during the time saving state). It is configured so that it is possible to give an advantageous state to the player. Specifically, during the special map fluctuation in which the first end condition is satisfied, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is extremely short (normal map fluctuation time 0.1 seconds), and many during one special map fluctuation period. It is configured so that the fluctuation of the normal map can be executed.

As a result, when the time saving state ends based on the condition that the first end condition is satisfied, the fluctuation period of the normal map fluctuation to be executed is shortened by the final fluctuation of the time saving state (special figure final change). be able to. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the game per long opening of the Fuzu during the final change of the time saving state (final change of the special figure), and by extension, the time saving state ends during the execution of the game per long opening of the Fuzu, which is normal. Even after the state is set, it is possible to facilitate the continuation of the game per long opening.

That is, in the present embodiment, the special figure 2 lottery is executed in the state where the time saving state (1 time, 5 times, 99 times) is set, and the first privilege (small hit winning (small hit winning probability about 1 /). 7)) In the case where a predetermined number of special figure 2 lottery is executed without winning a small hit in the special figure 2 lottery executed during the time saving state while playing a game aiming to be granted. It is configured so that a second privilege (a period during which a short fluctuation is executed as a normal fluctuation) different from the first privilege is given. With this configuration, the player can be given a privilege that is advantageous to the player regardless of whether the small hit is won or not as the game result (special figure 2 lottery result) during the time saving state. Can improve the motivation to play.

Further, in the present embodiment, the period during which the short variation is executed as the normal map variation is set during the execution period of the special map final variation in a specific time saving state (for example, 5 times of time reduction). At the end of the time saving state, it is possible to easily acquire the number of reserved storages of the second special symbol (special figure 2) up to the upper limit (4). Further, by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal map, it is possible to increase the ratio of the period in which the electric accessory 1640a is open per unit time, so that the game per normal map is being executed (electric role). The normal state can be easily set in the state where the object 1640a is open or the state where the electric accessory 1640a is left open).

As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to be won in the second winning opening 1640 even after the normal state is set. Therefore, when the second privilege is given, it is better than when the second privilege is not given. Many special figure 2 lottery can be executed, and the player can enthusiastically play the game.

The pachinko machine 10 in the 17th embodiment has a ball entering from a first state (closed state) in which it is difficult for the ball to enter during a specific game (for example, a small hit game). A specific ball entry means (V winning opening 650a) that can be changed to a second state (open state) that is easy to play is provided, and a ball that has entered the specific entry means (V winning opening 650a) is a specific area (V gate). It is configured so that the big hit game is executed based on the passing of the ball, but the ball enters the V winning opening 650a which is opened when the small hit game is executed. In this case, the technique described in the present embodiment may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 in which the player is given the privilege of paying out a predetermined number of prize balls. Even in this case, the special figure 2 lottery is configured so that the probability of winning a small hit is higher than that of the special figure 1 lottery, which is advantageous to the player when the above-mentioned second privilege is given. It is possible to provide a gaming state.

Further, in the 17th embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 429, the period in which the above-mentioned second privilege is granted is the period in which the final change in the time reduction state is executed (the specific time reduction end condition is set. However, the period is not limited to this, and for example, when the time reduction 99 times is set, the number of special map fluctuations immediately after the time reduction state is set (for example, the number of special map fluctuations after the time reduction state is set) is set. The second benefit is given during the period (1 to 5 times) or after a predetermined period has elapsed since the time reduction state was set (for example, the period in which the number of special map fluctuations after the time reduction state was set is 45 to 50 times). As given, the contents specified in the normal map variation pattern selection 17 table 202mf may be configured. Further, for the time saving state in which the same time saving end condition is set, a plurality of time saving types may be provided, and the period for which the second benefit is granted may be different depending on the set time saving type. good.

With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand when the second privilege is granted when the time saving state is set, so it is expected that the second privilege will be granted. It is possible to play a game in a short time state while letting it play.

<About the modified example of the 17th embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the above-mentioned 17th embodiment will be described. In the 17th embodiment described above, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the time saving state, that is, when a specific time saving state (time saving state of 5 times shortening) is set, the fifth special figure change is executed. , The advantageous game in which a short-time (0.1 second) fluctuation time is easily selected as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal figure) is configured to be executed, and the time-saving state is about to end or immediately after the time-saving state ends. In, the ball was configured to be easy to win in the second winning opening 640. Then, in the above-mentioned 17th embodiment, as shown in FIG. 424, when the second winning opening 640 to which the electric accessory 640a is attached is provided in the right game area of the game board 13, the right-handed game is executed. The two winning openings 640 can be won, but the first winning opening 64 is configured so that the ball cannot be won.

On the other hand, in this modification, when the lower position of the second winning opening 640 provided in the right game area, specifically, the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state, the ball fired by the right-handed game. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the game board 13 in which the first winning opening 64 is arranged is used at a position where the ball fired by the right-handed game is difficult to win. ing. Since the other configurations of the game board 13 are the same as those of the 17th embodiment described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in this modification, the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) change in the order in which the acquired information is acquired (the order in which the ball wins in the corresponding winning opening). It is different from the above-mentioned 17th embodiment in that it is configured to execute (lottery) and that the configuration for holding and storing the acquired information of the special figure 2 is deleted. Since the other contents are the same as those of the 17th embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this modified example configured in this way, the second privilege (a game period in which a short time (0.1 second) is easily set as the normal figure fluctuation time) is given during the time saving state, and it is normal during the game per normal figure. When the state is set, the ball fired by the right-handed game can easily win the second winning opening 640, and it can be difficult to win the first winning opening 64. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation during the normal state. On the other hand, when the normal state is set at a timing other than during the normal game, the ball fired by the right-handed game is likely to win the first winning opening 64. Further, since it does not have a configuration for storing the hold of the special figure 2, even if the ball wins the second winning opening 640 while the special figure 1 change is being executed, the special figure 2 change occurs. It is configured not to be executed.

That is, in this modification, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a serves as a guiding means for guiding the ball to the second winning opening 640 and a limiting means for limiting the winning of the ball to the first winning opening 64. It is configured to work. With this configuration, the second privilege is given to the player when the time saving state ends and the normal state is set depending on whether the second privilege is given or not. The benefits can be greatly different. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting that the second privilege is given.

<18th Embodiment>
Next, the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 432 to 443. In the 16th embodiment described above, a series of effects can be executed as a variable effect executed based on the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the lottery result of the normal symbol, and the series of effects is executed. In that case, it is difficult to understand whether the execution opportunity of this series of productions is a special drawing lottery or a general drawing lottery, and it is configured to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the production result (lottery result). (See FIG. 363).

However, the notification mode (small display area Dm4 of the main display area Dm) for changing the game method from the left-handed game to the right-handed game depending on the hit game to be executed (normal figure hit game, small hit game, big hit game). Depending on the timing at which the display mode) is displayed, there is a risk that it may be determined which symbol lottery is based on this series of effects.

On the other hand, in the 18th embodiment, any of the symbol lottery is performed by the special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery) or the normal symbol lottery (general symbol lottery). However, the notification mode (display mode of the small display area Dm4 of the main display area Dm) for changing the game method from the left-handed game to the right-handed game at the same timing can be displayed. Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration of the 18th embodiment and the control contents will be described. The details of the same contents as those of the 16th embodiment described above will be omitted.

<Regarding the game board configuration in the pachinko machine 10 of the 18th embodiment>
First, the configuration of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 18th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 432 to 434. The game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 18th embodiment has a different structure of the right game area from the structure of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment described above (see FIG. 361). , Other than that, it is the same. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 432 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 18th embodiment. In the eighteenth embodiment, each winning opening in which a ball flowing down a right-handed game area by a player performing a right-handed game can win a prize by each hit game (a normal hit game, a small hit game, a big hit game). The time to reach (second winning opening 640, V winning opening 650a, specific winning opening 65a) is configured to be different. Specifically, the ball launched by the right-handed game is the second winning opening 640. It is configured so that the time to reach the special winning opening 650a is about 4 seconds, the time to reach the V winning opening 650a is about 2 seconds, and the time to reach the specific winning opening 65a is about 6 seconds.

Here, the configuration of the right side gaming area of the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 432 to 434. As shown in FIG. 432, a distribution means 700 capable of distributing balls to a plurality of ball paths is provided above the right game area, and the balls distributed by the distribution means 700 are the first path 701. And the second path 702 are configured to be alternately distributed.

The first path 701 is formed by a meandering ball passage, and is configured to take about 3 seconds for the ball to pass through the first path 701. Then, the ball that has passed through the first path 701 reaches the upper surface of the flow path unit provided with the variable winning device 65 and the electric accessory 640a. The flow path unit is configured so that its upper surface is inclined downward toward the out port 66, and as a part of the flow path formed on the upper surface thereof, an electric accessory 640a and a winning door 65b are provided. It is provided. When both the electric accessory 640a and the winning door 65b are closed, the ball flowing down the upper surface of the flow path unit flows out from the lowermost end (the end on the out port 66 side) of the upper surface of the flow path unit and is out. It is configured to flow into the mouth 66.

It is configured so that the time required for the ball passing through the first path 701 to reach the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a is about 1 second, and further, the ball flow on the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a (the ball flow on the upper surface of the flow path unit). A delay member for delaying the flow of the sphere is provided on the surface forming the path) so that the time required for the sphere to flow down on the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a is about 2 seconds. It is composed. Here, in the eighteenth embodiment, a meandering flow path in which the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a meanders in the depth direction so that the sphere does not flow down in a straight line is configured on the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a. This makes it possible to delay the flow of the sphere.

On the other hand, the sphere distributed to the second path 702 by the distribution means 700 flows into the opening 704a of the passage channel on a straight line formed in the depth direction of the first path, and is provided near the exit of the passage channel. It is configured to flow down toward the V winning opening 650a, and the ball launched by the right-handed game reaches the V winning opening 650a in about 2 seconds.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, each winning opening (No. 1) in which the ball fired by the right-handed game can be won by each hit game (normal hit game, small hit game, big hit game). 2 The time to reach the winning opening 640, the V winning opening 650a, and the specific winning opening 65a) is configured to be different. Specifically, the ball launched by the right-handed game reaches the second winning opening 640. The time to reach the V winning opening 650a is about 2 seconds, and the time to reach the specific winning opening 65a is about 6 seconds.

With this configuration, it is possible to confirm in order which winning opening the ball fired by the right-handed game wins, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. Further, although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the special figure fluctuation time is set to be different between the case where the small hit is won and the case where the big hit is won, and each winning game is executed. Immediately after that, in order to hit the ball and win a prize in the winning opening opened by the game, it is configured to give a notification to guide the right-handed game during the special figure fluctuation time. Then, regardless of whether the small hit is won or the big hit is won, the set effect is executed after the special figure fluctuation is started, and the notification for guiding the right-handed game is performed at the same timing when the specific time has passed. ing. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player determines the result of the lottery this time depending on the timing at which the notification for guiding the right-handed game is performed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the player wins the long opening of the game by the lottery, the execution timing of the set effect is set so as to notify the right-handed game at a specific timing of the set effect. It is composed. With this configuration, even if the set effect is executed and the notification to guide the right-handed game is given, it is difficult for the player to understand which hit game the effect result of this set effect indicates. It can be done and the effect of production can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 435, a series of effects used as variable effects of each symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, ordinary symbol) in the 18th embodiment, and right-handed to guide the right-handed game. The relationship with the display timing of the notification will be explained. FIG. 435 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the execution effect (notification) in each symbol variation.

As shown in FIG. 435, in the present embodiment, the effect (series effect) is executed for a predetermined period (54 seconds) after the symbol change is started, and then the guidance notification for guiding the right-handed game to the player is performed. (Right-handed notification) is executed. Then, when the player executes the right-handed game based on the execution of the guidance notification, the balls launched by the right-handed game are opened according to the lottery result of the symbol change executed this time. It is configured to win a prize in the winning opening (second winning opening 640, V winning opening 650a, specific winning opening 65a).

Specifically, if a series of effects (54 seconds) is executed based on the special figure 1 fluctuation (60 seconds) in which the jackpot is won, right-handed 54 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (during special figure 1 fluctuation). Notification is executed. Then, the big hit game is started at the timing when the ball launched by the right-handed game reaches the specific winning opening 65a (6 seconds after the right-handed game is performed).

In addition, if a series of effects (54 seconds) is executed based on the special figure 1 fluctuation (58 seconds) in which the small hit is won, right-handed notification is given 54 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (during special figure 1 fluctuation). Is executed. Then, the small hit game is started at the timing when the ball launched by the right-handed game reaches the V winning opening 650a (4 seconds after the right-handed game is performed). In this embodiment, when the ball wins the V winning opening 650a during the small hit game, the ball always passes through the V gate, and the ball wins the V winning opening 650a during the small hit game. If so, the big hit game is configured to start 2 seconds after the start of the small hit game. As a result, depending on whether the jackpot is won by the special figure 1 fluctuation or the small hit, the staging mode of the fluctuating staging (series staging) executed from the start of the fluctuating and the guidance notification for guiding the right-handed game. In addition to the execution timing of, it is possible to make the same from the start of fluctuation to the timing of starting the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which hit game the effect result of this variable effect (set effect) indicates, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

Furthermore, if a series of effects (54 seconds) is executed based on the winning normal map fluctuation (54 seconds), a right-handed notification is executed 54 seconds after the fluctuation starts (when the normal map fluctuation stops). Will be done. Then, at the timing when the ball launched by the right-handed game reaches the second winning opening 640 (two seconds after the right-handed game is performed), the normal game is started. Even when a series of effects are executed based on this fluctuation of the normal map, the start timing of the big hit game via the normal map game is determined by the case where the big hit is won in the above-mentioned special figure 1 lottery, and the case where the small hit is won. It is configured so that it can be the same. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which hit game the effect result of this variable effect (set effect) indicates, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, at a plurality of timings of the period from the execution of the guidance notification (right-handed notification) for guiding the right-handed game to the start of the jackpot game (right-handed ball flow period), this time. It is configured to be able to execute a failure effect for notifying that the effect result of is a failure (the jackpot game is not executed). Specifically, the failure notification timing is set 2 seconds, 4 seconds, and 6 seconds after the right-handed notification is executed.

That is, although detailed description and illustration are omitted, in some cases where the result of the special drawing 1 lottery is out of order, the fluctuation pattern is configured to set the fluctuation time of 56 seconds, 58 seconds, and 60 seconds. , When the fluctuation pattern is selected, the same fluctuation effect as the above-mentioned content is executed, and the failure notification is executed at the timing when the fluctuation time has elapsed. The failure notification timing described above is based on the timing at which it is determined that the ball could not be won in the second winning opening 640 during the game per game, and the ball was made to win in the second winning opening 640. It is configured to coincide with the timing at which the lottery result of the special figure 2 variation to be executed is notified, or the timing at which the small hit is won as a result of the special figure 2 lottery and the small hit game ends.

With this configuration, the special figure 1 lottery result is a series of staging that is executed when the result is out of order, and a series of staging that is executed based on the winning of the per-figure. In the game process after the game, it is possible to make the same as the effect mode set when the jackpot game is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which hit game the effect result of this variable effect (set effect) indicates, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, even if the jackpot is won by the special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure fluctuation of 60 seconds is executed, the above-mentioned failure notification is executed or not. It is configured to perform the fanning effect of. In this case, since the special figure 1 big hit is internally won, as a result of the fanning effect, a success effect mode for notifying the player that the player will not fail is set and executed as the effect.

In this way, by executing the fanning effect, it is possible to reduce the difference in the effect mode between the series of effects in which the failure notification is actually executed and the series of effects in which the failure notification is not executed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which hit game the effect result of) indicates, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In addition, since it is possible to make the player watch the effect (effect executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81), this effect is based on the ball flow situation in the right game area. It can be difficult to determine in advance what the result is.

<About the electrical configuration in the 18th embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 436 to 438. The present embodiment differs from the above-described 16th embodiment in that the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. Other than that, they are the same. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the 18th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 436 (a). FIG. 436 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the 18th embodiment. In the present embodiment, the variation pattern 18 table 202ne is provided in place of the variation pattern 16 table 202le, and the variation pattern selection 18 table 202nf is provided in place of the variation pattern selection table 202lf in place of the 16th embodiment described above. They differ in that they are the same, otherwise they are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the fluctuation pattern 18 table 202ne will be described with reference to FIG. 437. FIG. 437 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern 18 table 202ne. As shown in FIG. 437 (a), the variation pattern 18 table 202ne has a variation pattern 18 table 202ne1 for normal use and a variation pattern 16 table 202le2 for time saving, and is usually compared to the 16th embodiment described above. The contents of the fluctuation pattern table referenced when the state is set are different.

Here, the contents of the normal fluctuation pattern 18 table 202ne1 will be described with reference to FIG. 437 (b). FIG. 437 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the normal fluctuation pattern 18 table 202ne1. As shown in FIG. 437 (b), the normal variation pattern 18 table 202ne1 has a first special symbol (see FIG. 385 (b)) with respect to the conventional variation pattern 16 table 202le1 of the 16th embodiment described above. The contents specified in the data table referred to when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1) are different, and the data referred to when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol (special figure 2). The contents specified in the table are the same. The detailed description of the same content will be omitted.

In the normal variation pattern 18 table 202ne1, regardless of whether the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit", a dedicated variation pattern (variation time) for executing the set effect. ) Is selected. Specifically, when the lottery result in Special Figure 1 is "out of order", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "short" in the range of "0 to 139". "Out of line (7 seconds)" is in the range of "140 to 179", "Out of line (30 seconds)" is in the range of "180 to 189", and "Short set production (30 seconds)" is in the range of "190 to 194". "Various super reach (60 seconds)" is specified in the range, and "set staging (60 seconds)" is specified in the range of "195 to 198".

When the lottery result of Special Figure 1 is "big hit", the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 29", and "various normal reach (30 seconds)" is in the range of "30 to 39". "Short set effect (30 seconds)" is specified in the range of "40 to 179", "Various super reach (60 seconds)" is specified in the range of "40 to 179", and "Set effect (60 seconds)" is specified in the range of "180 to 198". When the lottery result is "small hit", the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is "small" in the range of "0 to 99" and "various super reach (60 seconds)" in the range of "100 to 198". "Hit set production (56 seconds)" is specified.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern for executing the set effect is selected at a predetermined ratio regardless of the lottery result of the special figure 1. Then, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) set as the set effect is different between the time of winning the small hit and the time of winning the big hit. Specifically, when the big hit is won, the variable time of 60 seconds can be selected as the set effect, and when the small hit is won, the variable time of 56 seconds can be selected as the set effect. That is, the fluctuation time of the set effect at the time of winning the small hit is set to be 4 seconds shorter than the fluctuation time of the set effect at the time of winning the big hit.

Here, as described later with reference to FIG. 432, in the game board 13 of the present embodiment, when the right-handed game is executed, the ball reaches the V winning opening 650a which is in the open state during the small hit game. The time required for the ball to reach the specific winning opening 65a (about 6 seconds), which is open during the jackpot game, is set to be 4 seconds longer than the time required for the game (about 2 seconds). .. Then, as will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the set effect (60 seconds) is executed, 54 seconds after the set effect is executed, regardless of the set variation time (special figure variation time). It is configured to execute a notification for guiding a right-handed game (right-handed notification).

With this configuration, the timing from the execution of the set effect to the execution of the right-handed notification can be the same for both the big hit win and the small hit win, so the player can be informed of the effect result of the set effect. It can be confusing. Furthermore, a right-handed notification is given 54 seconds after the set effect is executed, and when the player plays a right-handed game based on the right-handed notification, the special figure lottery result that triggers the execution of the set effect this time. Whichever (big hit, small hit) is, the ball fired by the right-handed game can be won in any of the winning openings in the open state.

Next, the contents of the normal map variation pattern selection 18 table 202nf will be described with reference to FIG. 438. FIG. 438 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the normal map variation pattern selection 18 table 202nf. As shown in FIG. 438, in the normal map fluctuation pattern selection table 202nf, the normal map variation pattern selection table 202 lf (see FIG. 384) of the 16th embodiment described above defines the normal map long variation B (60 seconds). The difference is that the long fluctuation C (58 seconds) of the normal figure is specified in the above range, and the other points are the same. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

As shown in the normal map fluctuation pattern selection 18 table 202nf, the game state is the normal state (normal map low accuracy), the result of the normal map lottery is A per normal map, and the value of the acquired second variation type counter CS2 is "500". The value of the acquired second variation type counter CS2 fluctuates in the range of "800 to 999" because the result of the ordinary map lottery is out of the range of "~ 999" and the game state is the normal state (low accuracy of the normal map). As a pattern, "Fuzu long fluctuation C (58 seconds)" is specified.

Then, when the normal figure long variation C is selected, the set effect can be executed. That is, even when the set effect is executed based on the long variation C of the normal figure, the right-handed notification is executed 54 seconds after the set effect is executed. Then, when the player plays a right-handed game based on the right-handed notification, the fired ball is configured to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

By configuring in this way, the timing from the execution of the set effect to the execution of the right-handed notification can be made the same for the big hit win, the small hit win, and the normal figure win, so that the set effect can be given to the player. It is possible to make it difficult to understand the production result of. Furthermore, 54 seconds after the set effect is executed, a right-handed notification is given, and when the player plays a right-handed game based on the right-handed notification, the symbol lottery result that triggers the execution of this set effect is obtained. Regardless of which one (big hit, small hit, normal hit), any of the winning openings (specific winning opening 65a, V winning opening 650a, second winning opening) that opens the ball fired by the right-handed game. You can win a prize in 640).

Further, in the present embodiment, the special figure hold and the normal figure hold are pre-read, and the start timing of the special figure change is a predetermined period (for example, 70 seconds) when the special figure lottery does not win the prize. When it is determined that the winning is won in the general drawing lottery after a predetermined range period (for example, 58 seconds to 62 seconds later) from the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, and it is the timing to execute the winning long open winning game. It is configured to execute the set effect from the start timing of the special figure change, and 54 seconds after the set effect executed from the start timing of the special figure change is started, the right-handed notification corresponding to the game per long open of the normal figure Is configured to run.

In this way, the set effect can be executed by pre-reading the content of the special figure change and the content of the normal figure change and determining that the set effect can be executed at any of the symbol change start timings. The frequency with which the effect is executed can be increased, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In addition, since the effect result of the set effect executed at the start timing of the special figure change can indicate the winning of the normal figure long opening, it is possible to make the player play a game having a character other than that.

The relationship between the start timing of the set effect and the execution timing of the right-handed notification does not deviate significantly. For example, the execution timing of the right-handed notification executed 54 seconds after the normal set effect is executed is set. It may be shifted to around a few seconds (2 seconds), and in reality, 58 seconds after the execution of the set effect is executed, the ball fired by the right-handed game will be the timing to win the prize opening, but the set effect is Right-handed notification may be executed 54 seconds after the execution. By allowing a slight deviation in this way and enabling the set effect to be executed, it becomes easier to establish the conditions under which the set effect can be executed, and the effect of the set can be enhanced.

Further, in the present embodiment, the set effect is executed at the start timing of the symbol change, but the present invention is not limited to this, and if the execution condition for the set effect described above is satisfied, for example, a special figure. It may be configured to execute the set effect while the fluctuation is being executed. In this case, it is preferable to display a pseudo stop display mode for making the player think that the special figure variation has ended before the set effect is executed. As a result, the player can execute the set effect that is started from the middle of the execution of the special figure variation without any discomfort.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 18th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 436 (b). The present embodiment differs from the 16th embodiment described above in that the effect prohibition flag 223na is added, and is the same except for the addition. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The effect prohibition flag 223na is a flag for prohibiting the setting of a new set effect, and is set to ON when the setting of the new set effect is prohibited. In this embodiment, in addition to the period during which the set effect is executed, the set effect is not executed even during the period during which a specific super reach effect (including deviation) is executed based on the fluctuation of the special figure. , The effect prohibition flag 223na is set to on even during the period when a specific super reach effect is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from being reduced due to the fact that the running effect (particularly, the effect with a high expectation of hitting) is switched to the set effect in the middle.

<Regarding the control process in the 18th embodiment>
Next, the contents of the control process in the 18th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 439 to 443. In the 18th embodiment, with respect to the control processing contents in the 16th embodiment described above, the main control device 110 has various discrimination processes (hit discrimination process, etc.) and various selection processes (hit type selection process, variation pattern selection process, etc.). Because the data table referred to in) is different, the processing results are different, and the specific processing to be executed based on the processing results (processing to set commands, processing to store processing results, etc.) Although the contents are different, the technical idea is the same, so the detailed explanation is omitted.

Further, in the control process of the voice lamp control device 113, the stop command process 18 (see C3246 in FIG. 439) is replaced with the stop command process 16 (see C3216 in FIG. 414), and the variable display setting process 16 (see C3114 in FIG. 415) is used. ) Is replaced with the variable display setting process 18 (see C3144 in FIG. 440), and the effect update process 16 (see C3112 in FIG. 420) is replaced with the effect update process 18 (see C3142 in FIG. 443). is doing. Other than that, they are the same, and detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

First, the contents of the stop command process 18 (C3246) will be described with reference to FIG. 439. FIG. 439 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop command process 18 (C3246). As shown in FIG. 439, the stop command process 18 (C3246) differs from the above-mentioned stop command process 16 (see C3216 in FIG. 414) in that the effect prohibition flag 223na setting process is added, and other than that. Are the same. The same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the stop command process 18 (C3246) is executed, first, the same processes of C3951 to C3956 as the above-mentioned stop command process 16 (see C3216 in FIG. 414) are executed, and then the stop command this time is the effect prohibition flag. When it is determined whether the target fluctuation is stopped when 223na is set to on (C3971), and when it is determined that the target fluctuation is stopped (C3971: Yes), the effect prohibition flag 223na is turned off. Set (C3972) and end this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of C3971 that it does not indicate the stop of the target fluctuation (C3972: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, the contents of the variable display setting process 18 (C3144) will be described with reference to FIG. 440. FIG. 440 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 18 (C3144). As shown in FIG. 440, the variation display setting process 18 (C3144) adds a process for setting the effect mode of the set effect to the variation display setting process 16 (see C3114 in FIG. 415) described above. The difference is that the process of setting the effect prohibition flag 223na to ON when the acquired fluctuation pattern is super reach is added, and the other points are the same. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

When the variation display setting process 18 (C3144) is executed, the same processes of C4001 to C4004 as those of the variation display setting process 16 (see C3114 in FIG. 415) are executed, and then the set effect setting process (C4041) is executed. Run. This set effect setting process (C4041) will be described later with reference to FIG. 441, but it is determined whether the current variation display setting process is executed based on the special map variation or the normal map variation. Then, based on the determination result, it is determined whether or not the execution condition of the set effect is satisfied, and when the execution condition of the set effect is satisfied, the process for setting the effect mode of the set effect is performed. Will be executed.

Returning to FIG. 440, the explanation will be continued. After finishing the processing of C4041, it is next determined whether the fluctuation pattern acquired this time is super reach (C4042), and if it is determined to be super reach (CS24042: Yes), the effect prohibition flag 223na is set to ON. (C4043), a display variation pattern command is set (C4044), and the same processes of C4006 to C4010 as the above-mentioned variation display setting process 16 (see C3114 of FIG. 415) are executed to end this process. On the other hand, in the processing of C4042, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern acquired this time is not super reach (C4042: No), the processing of C4043 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of C4044.

Next, the contents of the set effect setting process (C4041) will be described with reference to FIG. 441. FIG. 441 is a flowchart showing the contents of the set effect setting process (C4041). In the set effect setting process (C4041), a process for setting the set effect is executed at the start timing of the special figure variation or the normal map variation.

When the set effect setting process (C4041) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal state (C4901), and when it is determined that the current game state is not the normal state (time saving state), it is determined (C4901). , Since it is not in the game state to execute the set effect, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the state is normal (C4901: Yes), the variation display setting process 18 this time (see C3144 in FIG. 440) sets the variation display of the special figure variation (sets the effect). If it is determined whether it is a process (C4902) and it is determined that the process is to set the variation display of the special figure variation (C4902: Yes), the process of C4003 of the variation display setting process 18 (see C3144 in FIG. 440). It is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern acquired in is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the set effect (C4903).

If it is determined in the processing of C4903 that the fluctuation pattern does not correspond to the set effect (C4903: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern corresponds to the set effect (CS24903: Yes), then it is determined whether the effect prohibition flag 223na is set to ON (C4904), and it is determined that it is not set to ON. If so (C4904: No), it is determined whether or not the current time is a long fluctuation per normal figure (C4905).

In the processing of C4905, when it is determined that the current is long fluctuation per normal figure (C4905: Yes), the value of the normal figure fluctuation time counter 223lo is compared with the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223ln (C4905: Yes). C4906), it is determined whether the remaining period of the normal map fluctuation is shorter than the current special map fluctuation time (C4907). Then, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation time is longer (C4907: No), the prize information of the normal symbol stored in the prize information storage area 223la is read (C4908), and the read prize information is included. If it is determined whether there is winning information corresponding to the long fluctuation of the normal figure (C4909) and if it is determined that there is winning information corresponding to the long fluctuation of the normal figure (C4909: Yes), the set production according to the fluctuation pattern of this time is performed. Is set (C4910), the effect prohibition flag 223na is set to ON (C4911), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of C4909, if it is determined that there is no long fluctuation in the normal figure in the winning information read in the processing of C4908 (C4909: No), this processing is terminated as it is. If it is determined in the processing of C4907 that the remaining period of the normal map fluctuation is longer (C4907: Yes), a set effect is set according to the normal map fluctuation stop timing (C4912), and the effect prohibition flag 223na is turned on. (C4920), and this process ends.

It should be noted that, in the processing of C4905, the state in which it is determined that the long fluctuation per normal figure is in progress, that is, the long fluctuation per normal figure is determined even though it is determined that the effect prohibition flag 223na is not set to ON in the processing of C4904. The case is, for example, a case where the super reach effect is executed as the variation effect of the special map variation at the start timing of the long variation per normal map being executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the processing of C4909 is provided, and when there is a long fluctuation in the winning information, the set effect is set. With this configuration, if it is determined that there is a long variation in the normal map in the winning information, the long variation in the normal map is executed during the execution of the set effect based on the special map variation, so the set effect is executed. The fluctuation of the normal map is executed multiple times in a short period of time. For example, by executing the game per short of the normal map, the set effect of this time is the set effect executed based on the variation of the special map. It is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the information. In this embodiment, the processing of C4909 is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a set effect may be set.

Further, in the set effect set in the processing of C4912, the set effect is executed not at the start timing of the special figure change but at the timing according to the normal figure change stop timing, so that the normal figure long opening is performed as the effect result of the set effect. You will be notified of the hit. If the remaining period of the normal map fluctuation at the start of the special map fluctuation is shorter than the period (15 seconds) in which the set effect effect mode can be executed, the set effect is not set and the normal map long opening is performed. It is preferable to configure it so that a dedicated production mode indicating a hit is set. As a result, it is possible to reliably notify the player that he / she has won the long opening of the Fuzu.

On the other hand, in the processing of C4904, when it is determined that the effect prohibition flag 223na is set to ON (C4904: Yes), or in the processing of C4905, it is determined that the long fluctuation is not per normal figure (C4905:). No) acquires the lottery result of the currently executed Fuzu lottery (C4913), determines whether or not the Fuzu hit (Fuzu long open hit) is won (C4914), and Fuzu hit (Fuzu). If it is determined that the player has not won (per long opening) (or the general drawing lottery has not been executed) (C4914: No), the process proceeds to the above-mentioned C4910 process.

In the processing of C4914, if it is determined that the winning is won per normal figure (C4914: Yes), then it is determined whether the special figure fluctuation this time is a hit fluctuation (C4915), and it is determined that it is a hit fluctuation. If this is the case (C4915: Yes), the value of the normal map fluctuation time counter 223lo is compared with the value of the special map fluctuation time counter 223ln (C4916), and the remaining period of the normal map fluctuation is from the current special map fluctuation time. Is also short (C4917). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation time of the special map fluctuation is shorter than the remaining period of the normal map fluctuation during execution (C4917: Yes), the set effect executed for the normal map fluctuation is performed this time. It is set to the set effect showing the lottery result of the special figure change (C4918), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of C4915, when it is determined that the current special map fluctuation is not a hit fluctuation (C4915), or in the processing of C4917, the fluctuation of the current special map fluctuation rather than the remaining period of the running normal map fluctuation. If it is determined that the time is longer (C4917: Yes), this process ends without setting the set effect corresponding to the current special figure change.

Further, in the process of C4902, if it is determined that the current variation display setting process 18 (see C3144 in FIG. 440) is the process of setting the variation display of the normal symbol (C4902: No), the normal figure set effect setting. The process is executed (C4919), and the present process is terminated.

Here, the contents of the normal drawing set effect setting process (C4919) will be described with reference to FIG. 442. FIG. 442 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal drawing set effect setting process (C4919). When the normal figure set effect setting process (C4919) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current fluctuation pattern is a set effect (C5001), and if it is determined to be a set effect (C5001: Yes), the next In addition, it is determined whether or not the effect prohibition flag 223na is set to ON (C5002).

If it is determined that the effect prohibition flag 223na is not set to ON in the processing of C5002 (C5002: No), a set effect according to the current fluctuation pattern is set (C5003), and the effect prohibition flag 223na is set to ON. (C5004), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of C5002, when it is determined that the effect prohibition flag 223na is set to ON (C5002: Yes), it is determined whether the fluctuation of the normal map this time is a hit variation (variation per long opening) ( In C5005), if it is determined that the fluctuation is per long opening (C5005: Yes), the result of the special drawing lottery being executed is acquired (C5006), and it is determined whether the variation is per special figure (C5007). That is, it is determined whether or not the effect prohibition flag 223na is set to ON based on the fluctuation of the special figure.

In the processing of C5007, when it is determined that it is not a special figure hit (C5007: No), then the value of the normal figure fluctuation time counter 223lo and the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223ln are compared (C5008). If it is determined whether the current normal map fluctuation time is shorter than the remaining time of the special map fluctuation during execution (C5009), and if it is determined that the current normal map fluctuation time is shorter (C5009: Yes), it is being executed. A replacement effect (set effect) for notifying the normal figure lottery result (per long opening) is set by the special figure effect (set effect executed based on the special figure fluctuation) (C5010), and this process is completed. do. On the other hand, in the processing of C5007, when it is determined that the special map fluctuation during execution is a hit variation (C5007: Yes), or in the processing of C5009, the remaining of the special map variation during execution of the current normal map variation time. If it is determined that the time is longer than the time (C5009: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the contents of the staging update process 18 (C3142) will be described with reference to FIG. 443. FIG. 443 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect update process 18 (C3142). As shown in FIG. 443, the effect update process 18 (C3142) is a right-handed notification process when a set effect is executed for the effect update process 16 (see C3112 in FIG. 420) of the 16th embodiment described above. It differs in that it is added. Other than that, they are the same, and detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

When the effect update process 18 (C3142) is executed, first, the same processes of C4501 to C4506 as the effect update process 16 (see C3112 of FIG. 420) of the 16th embodiment described above are executed. Then, when it is determined that the time saving final variation flag 223 lk is not set to ON in the processing of C4505 (C4505: No), or when the final variation effect update process (C4506) is completed, the set effect is executed. (C4541). In the process of C4541, when the set effect is executed, the determination is performed by referring to the value of the effect time measurement counter (not shown) set to measure the effect time.

If it is determined in the processing of C4541 that the set effect is being executed (measurement of the effect time measurement counter is being performed) (C4541: Yes), is it the timing when 54 seconds have elapsed since the set effect was started? (C4542), if it is determined that the timing has passed 54 seconds (C4542: Yes), a display guidance command indicating a right-handed game is set (C4543), and the process proceeds to C4507. After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of C4541, when it is determined that the set effect is not being executed (C4541: No), or in the processing of C4542, when it is determined that the timing does not elapse 54 seconds (C4542: No). , The process proceeds to the process of C4507 without performing the process of C4543, and then the present process is terminated.

In the effect update process 18 (C3142) shown in FIG. 443, the right-handed game is configured to show the right-handed game at the elapsed timing of 54 seconds from the start of the effect only when it is determined that the set effect is being executed. However, in reality, it is configured to set a display guidance command to indicate a right-handed game even at other timings. Although specific illustration is omitted, for example, as shown in the normal variation pattern 18 table 202ne1 in FIG. 437 (b), when the set effect of 30 seconds is set, the set effect is executed. A display guidance command for indicating a right-handed game is set at the timing when 24 seconds have elapsed from. Further, when the effect result of the set effect being executed is replaced in the middle, a display guide command for indicating the right-handed game may be set at a further different timing. As a result, the right-handed game is notified at a timing different from the usual timing, so that it is possible to provide a player with an unexpected effect.

<19th Embodiment>
Next, the 19th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 444 to 456. The 19th embodiment is different from the 16th embodiment described above in that the method of setting the effect mode of the series of effects is different. First, a method of setting a series of effects according to the 16th embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIG. 444. FIG. 444 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of a series of staging settings in the 16th embodiment described above.

As shown in FIG. 444, in the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, there is a case where a winning figure is won (a winning figure is a long opening) and a case where a big hit or a small hit is won in the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery. A series of effects can be set, and the effect data of the series of effects is divided into a plurality of scenario types and stored.

Specifically, the scenario 1 corresponding to the effect mode (see FIGS. 365 (b) and 366 (a)) executed during the normal map fluctuation and the effect mode (FIG. 366) executed during the game per normal map. Scenario 2 corresponding to (b)), and scenario 3 corresponding to the staging mode (see FIG. 369 (a)) executed when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the game per game. It is executed when the period (waiting period) from when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the game per scenario until the special drawing 2 lottery based on the winning ball is executed is 10 to 30 seconds. Scenario 3-1 corresponding to the effect mode (see FIG. 367 (a)), scenario 4 corresponding to the effect mode (see FIG. 367 (b)) executed during the variation of the special figure 2, and the small hit game. In scenario 5 corresponding to the effect mode (see FIG. 368 (b)) executed in the above, and the effect mode (see FIGS. 370 (b) and 371 (b)) executed when the series of effects ends in the middle. The corresponding scenario 7 and is stored.

Then, when a big hit or a small hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery, a series of effects using a plurality of effect data are collectively set in correspondence with the corresponding change pattern command of the special figure 1 fluctuation. There is. Specifically, if a big hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery, a variable effect (series effect) in which the above-mentioned effect data from scenario 1 to scenario 5 are set collectively is executed, and a small hit is made in the special figure 1 lottery. If the winner is selected, the variable effect (series effect) in which the effect data of the above-mentioned scenarios 1 to 4 are collectively set is configured to be executed.

On the other hand, in the series of effects set based on the winning of the general figure, each scenario that constitutes the series of effects is set individually, and the next scenario is set for one scenario based on the establishment of the scenario transition condition. It is configured in. Specifically, in the case where the Fuzu long opening hit is won by the Fuzu lottery, if the execution condition of the series production is satisfied, the scenario 1 indicating the start of the series production is set, and the Fuzu long opening hit is set. When the indicated stop command is received, scenario 2 is then set. In addition, in the 16th embodiment, there is a case where the scenario 1 is set (so-called ghosting effect) in a state where the scenario 1 is not won in the long opening of the normal figure, and in that case, the elapsed time of the scenario 1 ends. , The series of production ends.

Next, when the production mode corresponding to the scenario 2 is executed during the game per the long opening of the normal figure and the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the special figure 2 (special 2) winning command indicating that fact is issued. A notification mode indicating that the sphere has won the second winning opening 640 is displayed on a layer different from the display layer output from the main control device 110 and executing the series of effects (sub-display area of FIG. 367 (a)). See Ds). Then, when the special figure 2 winning command is received, the scenario 3 is set. If the ball does not win the second winning opening 640 during the period in which the scenario 2 is set, the scenario 7 is set in order to end the series of effects, and the end screen of the predetermined period (3 seconds) is displayed. Is displayed.

In the 16th embodiment described above, the period until the special figure 2 lottery is executed when the ball enters the second winning opening 640 during the transition to the scenario 3, that is, during the game per game (waiting period). However, it is determined based on the fluctuation status of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and different scenarios are set according to the length of the waiting period. Specifically, if the waiting period is less than 10 seconds, scenario 3 (see FIG. 369 (a)) is set, and if the waiting period is 4 to 30 seconds, scenario 3-1 (see FIG. 367 (a)) is set. See) is set. Here, if the waiting period is 30 seconds or more, a special series of effects (continuous series of effects) in which the series of effects being executed is pseudo-terminated (scenario 7 is set) and the series of effects is started again after a predetermined period has elapsed. Is executed (see FIG. 372). Further, when the scenario 3-1 is set, the effect mode corresponding to the scenario 3-1 is continuously displayed until the scenario transition condition is satisfied.

Next, when the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is received with scenario 3 or scenario 3-1 set, the transition condition to the next scenario is satisfied, and scenario 4 is set. Scenario 4 is set until the special figure 2 stop command indicating the stop of the special figure 2 fluctuation is received, and the effect mode having the same length as the fluctuation time (15 seconds) of the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed. .. Then, when the special figure 2 stop command is received, if the change in the special figure 2 indicates a hit, the process proceeds to scenario 5. On the other hand, if the change in the special figure indicates an deviation, the process proceeds to scenario 7 and the series of processes is terminated.

Here, in the present embodiment, the same fluctuation time is set regardless of whether the special figure 2 fluctuation being executed is a small hit or a big hit in the state where the scenario 4 is set, and the transition to the scenario 5 is performed. However, it is not limited to this, for example, when a big hit is won by the special figure 2 fluctuation in the normal state, the small hit fluctuation time (15 seconds) and the small hit game time (10 seconds) are the fluctuation times. ) And the total of 25 seconds of fluctuation time is set, and scenario 4 is shifted to scenario 5 during the jackpot fluctuation of special figure 2, and the jackpot is matched with the stop timing of the jackpot fluctuation of special figure 2. It may be configured so that the game is executed.

If scenario 5 is set when the variation in the special figure 2 is a small hit, the effect mode corresponding to the scenario 5 is executed until the V passage command is received during the small hit game or until the small hit game is completed. When the V passage command is received, the notification mode indicating that effect is displayed on a layer different from the display layer on which the series of effects is executed, and the game shifts to the jackpot game. On the other hand, if the V-passing command has not been received after the small hit game period (10 seconds) has elapsed, the process proceeds to scenario 7 in order to end the series of effects.

As described above, in the 16th embodiment, when executing a series of effects based on the variation of the special figure 1, a series of effect scenarios are collectively set in correspondence with the variation pattern of the variation of the special figure 1 and are usually used. When executing a series of effects based on the fluctuation of the figure, the effect mode of the series of effects is updated according to the degree of establishment of the transition condition according to each scenario. Therefore, in the case of executing a series of effects in the same effect mode, if the update of the effect mode is confirmed, the process of setting the series effect can be simplified, and the update content of the effect mode changes depending on the game situation. In that case, the production mode can be flexibly changed according to each game situation.

In the 16th embodiment, when the series of effects is executed based on the drawing lottery, the scenario of the series of effects is set individually, but the scenario is not limited to this, for example, the drawing. Of the series of effects executed based on the lottery, the portion where the update of the effect mode is confirmed may be configured to collectively set a plurality of scenarios. This makes it possible to simplify the process of setting a series of effects.

The method of setting a series of effects in the 16th embodiment described above with reference to FIG. 444 sets a series of effects when the series of effects is executed in the same effect mode and the update of the effect mode is confirmed. In addition to simplifying the processing, when the update content of the effect mode is variable depending on the game situation, the effect mode can be flexibly changed according to each game situation, but the length of the waiting period is increased. Since the only staging mode that can be variably set according to the situation is the staging mode corresponding to scenario 3, the player feels uncomfortable as compared with the staging mode based on other scenarios of the series of staging executed in a predetermined period. There was a problem.

Here, in order to solve the above-mentioned problem, in the 19th embodiment, when the normal figure change is executed, the change state of the special symbol (first special symbol) during the game per normal figure is predicted. Based on the prediction result, it is configured to set the production mode of a series of effects corresponding to the fluctuation of the normal map. That is, when the normal map fluctuation is executed, the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation executed this time, the normal map lottery result, and the game time (maximum time) of the game per normal map are calculated and used as the calculation result. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 change currently being executed ends during the game per normal figure, and the effect mode of a series of effects corresponding to the normal figure change is set based on the determination result. is doing.

With this configuration, for example, the change end timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation during execution is later than the period during which the ball can win the second winning opening 640, that is, the game period (maximum period) per normal figure. In this case, it is possible to predict the timing (length of the waiting period) at which the special figure 2 fluctuation can be executed at the time when the normal figure fluctuation is executed. Thereby, as various effect modes executed during the waiting period, it is possible to set an effect mode based on the length of the waiting period. Therefore, with respect to the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, since the period that can be variably set can be lengthened among the production modes of the series of effects according to the length of the waiting period, the series according to the length of the series of effects. It is possible to facilitate the execution of the production.

<About the electrical configuration in the 19th embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the 19th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 445 and 446. The 19th embodiment is different from the 16th embodiment described above in that a partial configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 and a partial configuration of the RAM 223 are changed. Specifically, the difference is that a series of effect scenario tables 222oa is added to ROM 222, and a middle flag 223oa, an effect scenario storage area 223ob, and a constant monitoring flag 223oc are added to RAM 223. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the 19th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 445 (a). FIG. 445 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the 19th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 445 (a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 19th embodiment is different from the 16th embodiment in that a series of staging scenario tables 222oa is added.

The series of effect scenario table 222oa is a data table in which the effect mode of the series of effect to be executed corresponding to the progressing game situation is defined. Here, with reference to FIG. 446, the contents of the normal map scenario table 222oa1 in which the continuous effect scenario set based on the normal map variation is defined will be described in the series of directing scenario table 222oa.

FIG. 446 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the series of staging scenario tables 222oa. Note that FIG. 446 shows only the characteristic contents of the 19th embodiment (the production scenario of the series of effects set based on the fluctuation of the normal map) among the contents specified in the series of production scenario table 222oa. Therefore, the description and description of the same contents as those of the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, that is, the contents of the production mode of the series of effects set corresponding to the fluctuation period of the special figure fluctuation, are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 446, in the 19th embodiment, when setting the production mode of a series of effects based on the fluctuation of the normal map, it is possible to set a plurality of scenarios per normal figure (scenarios 1 to 4 per normal figure). It is configured to set different scenarios per normal map based on the result of the first prediction (prediction about the length of the waiting period that can occur during the execution of a series of effects) that is executed when the normal map fluctuates. It is composed.

Specifically, when it is determined whether or not the first special symbol (special figure 1) is changing at the start of the change of the normal figure that was won per long opening of the normal figure, and it is determined that the special figure 1 is changing. In addition, the remaining period of the change in Special Figure 1 during execution is determined. Next, the game period of the game per Fuzu long opening executed based on the current Fuzu variation is compared with the remaining period of the executing Tokuzu 1 variation, and the end timing of the executing Tokuzu 1 variation is determined. It is determined whether it is later than the end time of the game per Fuzu long opening executed based on the current fluctuation of the Fuzu, and if it is determined to be later, it is special from the end time of the game per Fuzu long opening. FIG. 1 The waiting period until the fluctuation is completed (special figure 2 the period until the fluctuation can be executed) is determined. Then, it is configured to set a scenario per drawing corresponding to the length of the waiting period determined by the above-mentioned processing.

With this configuration, it is possible to predict in advance the length of the waiting period in which the special figure 2 fluctuation will not be executed at the start of the fluctuation of the normal map, so it depends on the length of the waiting period. It is possible to execute a series of effects in the same effect mode.

In the above-mentioned first prediction, when the special figure 1 change is not being executed at the start timing of the normal figure change, or the end timing of the special figure 1 change being executed is longer than the game period per the normal figure long. If it is before, since the waiting period cannot be predicted in advance, only the production mode of the series of effects corresponding to the normal map fluctuation time is set at the start of the normal map fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 446, the series of staging scenario table 222oa defines a plurality of scenarios per normal map set based on the prediction result of the first prediction executed at the start of the normal map fluctuation, and the first prediction. As a prediction result of, if the waiting period (special figure 2 waiting period) is "less than 2 seconds", "scenario 1 per normal figure" is set, and if it is "more than 2 seconds and less than 30 seconds", It is stipulated that "scenario per map 2" is set, and "scenario 3 per map" is set when it is "30 seconds or more". Further, when the prediction result of the first prediction is "unpredictable", it is stipulated that "scenario 4 per normal figure" is set.

Here, the contents of each scenario will be explained. When "Scenario 1 per normal figure" is set, "Scenario 1" is set to "During the change of the normal figure", "Scenario 2" is set to "During the game per normal figure", and "Variation of the special figure 2" as the production mode of the series of effects. The content of the scenario is defined so that the production mode corresponding to "Scenario 3" is set in "Medium". That is, when the "scenario 1 per figure" is set, that is, when the waiting period for the special figure 2 is short, the effect mode indicating the game per the normal figure is shown without setting the effect mode dedicated to the special figure 2 waiting period. A series of effects is executed, which shifts from the above to the effect mode showing the variation of the special figure 2.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from performing an effect that is difficult for the player to understand by setting the effect mode indicating the special figure 2 waiting period for a short period (for example, 0.5 seconds). Can be done. In addition, in this embodiment, when the scenario 1 per the normal figure is set, the special figure 2 waiting period of less than 2 seconds occurs when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the game per the long opening of the normal figure. It is configured so that the effect mode that can be set during the game is continuously set, but the effect is not limited to this, and the special figure 2 changes during the special figure 2 waiting period of less than 2 seconds. It may be configured to set the effect mode which can be set in.

When "Scenario 2 per normal figure" is set, "Scenario 1" is set to "During the change of the normal figure", "Scenario 2" is set to "During the game per normal figure", and "Variation of the special figure 2" as the production mode of the series of effects. The content of the scenario is defined so that the production mode corresponding to "scenario 3" is set in "waiting" and "scenario 4" is set in "special figure 2 changing". That is, when the "scenario 2 per normal figure" is set, that is, when the special figure 2 waiting period exists for a predetermined period, the effect mode dedicated to the special figure 2 waiting period is set.

With this configuration, when the special figure 2 waiting period occurs for a predetermined period, it is possible to execute a series of effects that do not give the player a sense of discomfort (a feeling of delay). Further, in the present embodiment, when "scenario 1 per normal figure" is set, "scenario 3" set to "during special figure 2 fluctuation" is set, and when "scenario 2 per normal figure" is set. Is configured to correspond to "Special Figure 2 Standby". With this configuration, it is possible to set an effect mode for transitioning from "scenario 2" to "scenario 3" as a series of effects regardless of the presence or absence of the special figure 2 waiting period. Therefore, it is possible to execute a series of effects that do not give a sense of discomfort to the player.

Next, when "Scenario 3 per Fuzu" is set, "Scenario 1" is set to "During the change of the Fuzu", "Scenario 2" is set to "During the game per Fuzu", and "Special" as the production mode of the series of effects. The contents of the scenario are defined so that the production mode corresponding to "Scenario 2" and "Scenario 3" is set in "Standing for change in FIG. 2" and "Scenario 4" is set in "During change in special figure 2". That is, when the "scenario 3 per normal figure" is set, that is, when the waiting period for the special figure 2 is equal to or longer than the predetermined period, the period during which the corresponding "scenario 2" is set during the game per normal figure is set. It is configured to be longer than other normal scenario.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the player think that even if the special figure 2 waiting period is long, that one period is during the game per normal figure. Therefore, it is difficult to think that the special figure 2 waiting period is long. In addition, since the effect mode (scenario 2) corresponding to the game per game is displayed for a long period of time, the game per game is executed for a long time instead of the special figure 2 waiting period for the player. You can make me think that it has been done.

In addition, when "Scenario 4 per Fuzu" is set, it is not possible to predict the fluctuation status of the fluctuation of Special Figure 1 during the game per long opening of Fuzu, so "Usu" is set. Only "Scenario 1" corresponding to "Figure is changing" is set, and this process is terminated. When "scenario per scenario 4" is set, it is determined whether the scenario transition condition is satisfied at the scenario switching timing as in the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, and the scenario based on the determination result is set. It is configured as follows.

Further, even if a different scenario for hitting a normal figure is set as a scenario for hitting a normal figure, the same effect mode is set during the small hit game and the big hit game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 447 and 448, a flow in the case where the scenario per normal figure 2 is set as a series of effects of the 19th embodiment will be described. FIG. 447 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow when the scenario 2 per normal figure is set as a series of effects.

As shown in FIG. 447, the first prediction process for determining the length of the waiting period (special figure 2 waiting period) is executed at the time when the fluctuation of the normal map is executed. Then, when the waiting period "20 seconds" is determined as the processing result of the first prediction process, the staging data corresponding to the "scenario per scenario 2" defined in the series of staging scenario table 222oa at the start of the staging fluctuation of the staging map. Is set and stored in the effect scenario storage area 223ob, which will be described later. Then, based on the passage of time, a series of effects is executed in an effect mode corresponding to the effect data stored in the effect scenario storage area 223ob.

In this way, when the future game content can be predicted at the start of the fluctuation of the normal map, a plurality of effect data (scenarios) are set together to set the effect mode of the series of effects. Processing can be simplified.

Next, with reference to FIG. 448, a flow in the case where the scenario 4 per normal figure is set as a series of effects will be described. FIG. 448 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow when the scenario 4 per normal figure is set as a series of effects.

As shown in FIG. 448, the first prediction process for determining the length of the waiting period (special figure 2 waiting period) is executed at the time when the fluctuation of the normal map is executed. Then, when it is determined that the stop timing of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 being executed as the processing result of the first prediction process is earlier than the stop timing of the fluctuation per normal figure, the length of the waiting period can be predicted. Since it is impossible, the processing result of the first prediction process is determined to be "unpredictable", and at the start of the fluctuation of the staging map, the staging data corresponding to the "scenario 4 per staging map" defined in the series of staging scenario table 222oa. Is set.

That is, according to the example shown in FIG. 448, a new period from when the execution of the special figure 1 fluctuation is stopped until the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the game per long opening of the normal figure. Special Figure 1 Since it is not possible to predict whether or not the fluctuation will be executed, it is not possible to predict the length of the waiting period. In such a case, at the start of the fluctuation of the normal map, only the production mode (scenario 1) during the period corresponding to the fluctuation of the normal map is set as the effect mode of the series of effects, and when the fluctuation of the normal map is stopped (at the start of the normal map hit). ), The second prediction process is executed.

The second prediction process is for determining the length of the waiting period again when the fluctuation of the normal map is stopped (at the start of hitting the normal map), and the length of the waiting period cannot be determined in the first prediction process. This is the process that is executed when In this second prediction process, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed when the normal map fluctuation is stopped (when the normal map is started), and if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation is in progress, the executing feature is executed. FIG. 1 The length of the waiting period is determined by comparing the remaining period of the fluctuation with the game period of the game per long opening of the normal figure. Then, based on the determination result, the effect mode of the series of effects is set based on the contents specified in the series of effect scenario table 222oa.

As shown in FIG. 448, when the waiting period cannot be predicted even in the second prediction process (when the special figure 1 fluctuation is not executed at the timing when the second prediction process is executed), Even at this point in time, since the waiting period cannot be determined, the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation or the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation during the game per normal figure (game per game with long open of the normal figure) is constantly monitored. The constant monitoring process for this is executed. Then, if it is determined by the constant monitoring process that the special figure 2 change is executed before the new special figure 1 change is executed, the special figure 2 changes correspond to the start of the special figure 2 change. The effect mode (scenario 3) corresponding to the fluctuation is set.

As described above, in the 19th embodiment, when setting the production mode of the series of effects to be executed based on the fluctuation of the normal map, the waiting period in which the irregular period is set according to the game situation is set. It is configured to predict the length and execute a series of effects according to the prediction result. With this configuration, even if a long waiting period is set during the period in which the series of effects is executed, it is possible to provide the player with a series of effects that does not give a sense of discomfort.

Further, in the 19th embodiment, since the waiting period is predicted at the timing when the series of effects is executed, the series of effects executed before the time when the waiting period is actually set is set. The effect mode can be variably set according to the length of the waiting period. Therefore, among the production modes of the series of productions, it is possible to execute a series of productions without a sense of discomfort, as compared with the case where only the production mode set corresponding to the waiting period is changed according to the length of the waiting period. ..

Further, in the 19th embodiment, in the state where the waiting period is set, it is possible to set an effect mode indicating that the period is other than the waiting period (for example, the game period per normal figure). It can be difficult to understand that a long waiting period is set for the player. In the 19th embodiment, as in the 16th embodiment described above, since the right-handed game is configured to be performed during the series of staging, whether or not the present is the waiting period depends on the game method. It can be difficult for the player to discriminate.

In addition, in the 19th embodiment, when it is difficult (impossible) to predict the length of the waiting period at the start of the fluctuation of the normal map, the waiting period is again at a different timing (game start timing per normal map). It is configured to execute a process for predicting the length of the (second prediction process). In this way, by providing a plurality of timings for predicting the length of the waiting period in the period until the waiting period is set, the prediction accuracy for the length of the waiting period can be improved.

In addition, in the process of predicting the waiting period, the waiting period is configured to be constantly monitored only when the waiting period cannot be predicted, and the waiting period is supported based on the result of the constant monitoring. Since it is configured to set the effect mode to be performed, it is possible to simplify the process for setting the effect mode of the series of effects.

In the 19th embodiment, in the process for predicting the waiting period (first prediction process, second prediction process), the length of the waiting period is determined by using the remaining variation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed. It is configured to predict (discriminate), but is not limited to this, for example, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223la is pre-read, and the next is based on the pre-reading result. The length of the waiting period may be predicted by using the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation executed in 1.

With this configuration, for example, as in the example shown in FIG. 448, when the stop timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation during execution is before the start timing of the game per normal figure, that is, during execution. If the start condition of the special figure 2 change (the winning of the ball to the second winning opening 640) cannot be satisfied at the end of the special figure 1 change, the change time of the special figure 1 change to be executed next is set. It is possible to look ahead and predict the length of the waiting period based on the look-ahead result. Therefore, the prediction accuracy for the length of the waiting period can be improved.

Further, in the 19th embodiment, similarly to the 16th embodiment described above, the special figure 2 variation is configured to be executed in preference to the special figure 1 variation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation may be configured to be executed according to the winning order of the balls to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and the special figure 2 variation may be prioritized. Then, the special figure 1 variation may be configured to be executed.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the 19th embodiment>
Next, the contents of each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the 19th embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 449 to 456. In the present embodiment, for the 16th embodiment described above, the winning information command processing 19 (see FIG. 449) is executed instead of the winning information command processing 16 (see FIG. 407), and a series of effect discrimination processing (see FIG. 449). (See 450), the hit-related command process 19 (see FIG. 451) instead of the hit-related command process 16 (see FIG. 410), and the hit-related command process (see FIG. 452). A point to be executed, a point to execute the variation effect setting process 19 (see FIG. 453) instead of the variation effect setting process 16 (see FIG. 415), and a point to execute the effect setting process during constant monitoring (see FIG. 454). And, at the point where the variable effect setting process 19 (see FIG. 455) is executed instead of the effect setting process for normal drawing (see FIG. 417), and the point where the series of effect prediction setting process (see FIG. 456) is executed. They are different and otherwise the same. The same control processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, regarding the points where the contents of the referenced data table have been changed and the various processing contents that are changed in response to the changes in the contents of the referenced data table, the numerical values have simply been changed, which is technically ideological. Are the same, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the winning information command processing 19 (C3242) will be described with reference to FIG. 449. FIG. 449 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information command processing 19 (C3242) executed in the 19th embodiment. In this prize information command process 19 (C3242), a process (series effect determination process (series effect determination process)) is executed when a prize information command is received during a series of effect execution for the above-mentioned prize information command process 16 (see FIG. 407). The difference is that C3441))) is added in FIG. 450, and the other points are the same. Therefore, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the winning information command processing 19 (C3242) is executed, the same processing of C3401 to C3405 as the winning information command processing 16 (see FIG. 407) of the 16th embodiment described above is executed, and then the special processing of C3403 is performed. If it is determined that there is no 2 hit information (C3403: No), the process of C3441 is executed. In the process of C3441, a series of effect determination processes are executed (C3441). Details of this series of staging determination process (C3441) will be described later with reference to FIG. 450.

After executing the process of C3441, the processes of C3406 and C3407 are executed, and then the present process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the series of staging determination processing (C3441) will be described with reference to FIG. 450. FIG. 450 is a flowchart showing the contents of a series of effect determination processes (C3441) executed in the winning information command process 19 (FIG. 449) in the 19th embodiment. In this series of effect determination process (C3441), it is determined whether or not the series of effects is currently being executed, and when it is determined that the series of effects is being executed, the type of the winning command received this time (Special Figure 1, Special Figure 1). 2. The process corresponding to the general figure) is executed.

When the series effect determination process (C3441) is executed, first, the value of the series effect counter 223 lq is acquired (C5101), and then it is determined whether the value of the series effect counter 223 lq is 0 (C5102). The series effect counter 223lq acquired in the process of C4101 is set with a value corresponding to the effect period when the series effect is executed, is subtracted (updated) in the effect update process executed periodically, and is a counter value. Is configured to end the series of effects when becomes "0". That is, in the process of C5102, it is determined whether or not a series of effects is being executed.

In the process of C5102, when it is determined that the value of the series effect counter 223 lq is not larger than 0 (0) (C5102: No), since the series effect is not currently being performed, various display modes during the series effect execution. The process of C5103 to C5110 for setting is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of C5111.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the series production counter 223lq is larger than 0 (C5102: Yes), the series production is being executed. It is determined whether the command is related to (C5103), if it is determined that the special 2 prize is won (C5103: Yes), the information of the staging scenario storage area 223ob is read (C5104), and then the constant monitoring flag 223oc is turned on. It is determined whether or not there is (C5105). If it is determined that the constant monitoring flag 223oc is off (C5105: No), the process proceeds to C5108.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the constant monitoring flag 223oc is on (C5105: Yes), that is, in the production period in which the series of productions of this time is executed, the waiting period in which the execution of the special figure 2 variation is waited is in advance. If the situation is unpredictable, the waiting period is calculated (C5106).

Here, the calculation contents executed in the process of C5106 will be described. Since the processing of C5106 is the processing executed when the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 winning (special 2 winning) is received, the present time is the second winning opening 640 (the starting winning opening of the special drawing 2 variation). The ball wins a prize, and the condition that is a part of the execution opportunity of the special figure 2 fluctuation is satisfied. In the present embodiment, the special figure 1 change and the special figure 2 change are not executed at the same time (overlapping), and the special figure 2 change has priority over the special figure 1 change. Is configured to be executed.

That is, when the special figure 1 change is executed at the present time, the special figure 2 change corresponding to the winning information command received this time is executed after the execution of the special figure 1 change is completed. Therefore, the remaining time of the special figure 1 fluctuation currently being executed is extracted using the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223ln, and the extraction result is calculated as a waiting period. If the special figure 1 change is not executed at this time, the special figure 2 change corresponding to the winning information command received this time will be executed immediately, so "0" is set as the waiting period. ..

In this embodiment, the number of balls to be won in the second winning opening 640 is set to one during the execution of one series of effects (during the game per one Fuzu long opening). Therefore, when a prize information command indicating a special figure 2 prize (special 2 prize) is received in the process of C5103, the process for calculating the waiting period is always executed. Without limitation, for example, when configuring so that two or more balls can be won in the second winning opening 640 (during a game per one Fuzu long opening) during one series of effects. Is set to turn on a flag (calculated flag) indicating that the waiting period has been calculated in the processing of C5106, and after determining that the constant monitoring flag 223oc is on in the processing of C5105 (C5105: Yes). , It is configured to determine whether the calculated flag described above is set to ON, and if the calculated flag is set to ON, the processing of C5106 and C5107 is skipped and the process proceeds to C5108. It is good to configure it like this.

With this configuration, even if a plurality of balls win the second winning opening 640 and receive the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 winning multiple times while the series of effects is being executed. Since the waiting period can be calculated only based on the prize information command indicating the special figure 2 prize received first, it is possible to suppress the execution of unnecessary processing. That is, in the present embodiment, the period from the timing when the special figure 2 is first won during the execution of the series of effects to the execution of the change in the special figure 2 is set as the waiting period, and the effect mode according to the length of the waiting period. By setting, even if the period during which the special figure 2 fluctuation is not executed (waiting period) is long even though the special figure 2 is won, the effect is executed in the middle of the series of effects (during the waiting period). Since it is configured to prevent the effect to be executed from being delayed and the effect of the effect from being reduced, a plurality of balls win the second winning opening 640 while the series of effects is being executed. However, even if the prize information command indicating the special figure 2 prize is received multiple times, the process of calculating the length of the waiting period based on the prize information command indicating the special figure 2 prize received from the second time onward is unnecessary. Processing.

In addition, as in the present embodiment, in the case of configuring to calculate the waiting period every time the prize information command indicating the special figure 2 prize is received during the period in which the series of effects is being executed, the special feature is first. Fig. 2 When a prize information command indicating a prize is received, it is sufficient to determine whether or not the variation in Special Figure 1 is executed, and if it is being executed, the remaining period, and calculate the waiting period. When a prize information command indicating a special figure 2 prize is received, it is determined whether the special figure change during execution is a special figure 1 change or a special figure 2 change, and if the special figure 1 change is being executed, it is determined. , The waiting period may be calculated based on the remaining period of the change in the special figure 1 being executed and the prize information command indicating the special figure 2 winning previously received.

In this case, the lottery result of the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the prize information command indicating the special figure 2 prize received earlier is pre-read, and if the pre-reading result is out of order, the prize indicating the special figure 2 prize received this time is obtained. The waiting period is the remaining period until the special figure 2 fluctuation corresponding to the information command is executed, that is, the total period of the remaining period of the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed and the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation to be executed next. It is good to configure it to be set as. With this configuration, it is possible to set the period during which the deviation fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed as the waiting period, so that it is difficult for the player to understand that the deviation was won in the special figure 2 lottery. can.

Return to FIG. 450 and continue the explanation. In the process of C5108, a display command corresponding to the special figure 2 winning is set (C5108), and the process proceeds to the process of C5109. In the process of C5108, a display command indicating that the special figure 2 has won is set. The display commands set here include, for example, a direct display mode for directly displaying that the special figure 2 has been won, and a display indicating the remaining period until the special figure change corresponding to the winning is executed. A mode, that is, an indirect display mode that indirectly displays that a prize has been won in Special Figure 2 is displayed.

In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned direct display mode and indirect display mode can be set by using the display command corresponding to the special figure 2 prize, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. , The effect mode may be set based on the lottery result of the variation, or may be configured based on the length of the waiting period of the series of effects. In addition, the notification mode indicating that the ball has won the second winning opening 640 first during the series of production and the notification mode indicating that the ball has won the second winning opening 640 after the second time are different. Is also good.

Next, in the process of C5109, it is determined whether the ball winning in the V winning opening 650a has passed through the specific region (V region) (whether there was a V winning) (C5109). If it is determined that the ball that has won the V winning opening 650a has passed the specific area (V area) (C5109: Yes), a display command corresponding to the V winning is set (C5110), and the process proceeds to C5111. .. If it is determined that the ball that has won the V winning opening 650a has not passed through the specific region (V region) (C5109: No), the process proceeds to C5111.

In the process of C5111, an effect mode related to other winning information is set (C5111), a display command for indicating the set effect mode is set (C51112), and then this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the hit-related command process 19 (C3261) will be described with reference to FIG. 451. FIG. 451 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit-related command process 19 (C3261) executed in the 19th embodiment. In this hit-related command process 19 (C3261), the effect mode in each period of the series of effects is set based on the execution of the game per game during the period in which the series of effects is being executed.

When the hit-related command process 19 (C3261) is executed, the same processes of C3501 to C3504 as the hit-related command process 16 (see FIG. 410) of the 16th embodiment described above are executed, and the main control is performed in the process of C3505. If it is determined that the command related to the normal figure is received from the device 110 (C3505: Yes), the command process related to the normal figure is executed (C3551), and then this process is terminated. The details of this per-figure related command processing (C3551) will be described later with reference to FIG. 452.

Next, with reference to FIG. 452, the contents of the command processing (C3551) related to the normal drawing will be described. FIG. 452 is a flowchart showing the contents of the per-figure related command processing (C3551) executed in the 19th embodiment. This hit-related command process (C3551) is executed when a hit-related command related to a normal figure is received (C3505: Yes in FIG. 451), and the start timing and end of the game per normal figure. At the timing, various processes for setting the effect mode of the series of effects are executed.

In the command processing related to the normal figure (C3551), first, it is determined whether or not the opening command is received from the main control device 110 (C5201). Then, when it is determined that the opening command has been received (C5201: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the series effect counter 223 lq is larger than 0, that is, whether the series effect is currently being executed (C5202). .. If it is determined that the value of the series effect counter 223lq is not larger than 0 (C5202: No), the opening command processing for display is executed (C5203), the middle flag 223oa per normal figure is set to ON, and the C5215 Move to processing.

The display opening command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is a command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the 16th embodiment. Is transmitted toward the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts the opening effect on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of C5202, when it is determined that the value of the series effect counter 223 lq is larger than 0 (C5202: Yes), the information stored in the effect scenario storage area 223ob is read (C5205), and then the effect scenario. It is determined whether or not the information stored in the storage area 223ob is scenario 4 per normal figure (C5206).

Here, in the staging scenario storage area 223ob, information indicating a scenario per normal map set in a series of staging prediction setting process (C4251 in FIG. 456) performed when the normal map fluctuation (pull-out lottery) is executed is stored. In the processing of C5206, when it is determined that the scenario is "scenario per scenario 4 (see FIG. 446)", which is a scenario per scenario in which the effect mode corresponding to the period during the game per map is not set. , The process for setting the effect mode during the game per scenario in the series of effects is executed.

In the process of C5206, if it is determined that the information stored in the staging scenario storage area 223ob is not scenario 4 per normal figure (scenarios 1 to 3 per normal figure) (C5206: No), the normal figure has already been made. Since the effect mode during the winning game is set, that is, in the series of effect prediction setting process (C4251 in FIG. 456) performed when the normal map fluctuation (normal map lottery) is executed, the normal map per game is being played in advance. Since it is the case that the effect mode corresponding to the period of is set, the process of C5207 to C5210 is skipped without setting the effect mode corresponding to the period during the game per normal drawing in this process. ) Move to the processing of C5204.

On the other hand, in the processing of C5206, when it is determined that the information stored in the effect scenario storage area 223ob is scenario 4 per normal figure (C5206: Yes), the special figure fluctuation time counter (special figure 1 fluctuation time counter). The value of 223 ln is compared with the game period per screenplay (C5207). Explaining the processing contents of C5207 in detail, first, the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is calculated using the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223ln. For example, when the special figure 1 fluctuation of 60 seconds is executed, the value corresponding to the fluctuation time of 60 seconds at the start timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation (in the present embodiment, the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223ln is , Since it is configured to subtract 1 in the effect update process 18 (see C3142 in FIG. 443) executed every 1 millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 59), the value corresponds to 60 seconds. "60,000") is set. When this process is executed when 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation, the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223ln indicating the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation is "30000". Therefore, "30 seconds" is calculated as the residual fluctuation time of the fluctuation in Special Figure 1. Next, it is calculated based on the type of the game per game executed this time. In the present embodiment, since the opening command output from the main control device 110 includes information indicating the type of the game per game to be executed this time, the game period per game is calculated based on the information. Here, as the game period per normal figure, the time specified as the end condition that is established based on the passage of time is calculated.

Specifically, the game per game ends when 3 seconds have passed since the game per game was started, or when the number of winning balls to the second winning opening 640 reaches 10. If the end condition is set in advance, "3 seconds", which is the maximum time during which the game per game can be continued, is set as the game period per game. As a result, in the process of predicting the waiting period (the period from winning the special figure 2 to the execution of the change in the special figure 2) in advance in order to set the effect mode of the series of effects, the hit of the normal figure used for the prediction. Since it is possible to prevent a situation in which the actual game period per game is longer than the game period, the period predicted as the period during which the ball can win the second winning opening 640. It is possible to avoid a situation in which a ball wins a prize in the second winning opening 640 after the lapse of time and the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed. Therefore, even when the effect mode is set in advance based on the prediction result, it is possible to make it difficult for the actual game content and the effect content to be executed to deviate from each other, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

When the game period per game is calculated as described above, the game per game ends in a shorter period than the calculated game period per game, that is, the predetermined number of games per game (1) within the game period per game. The game may end when the ball (10) wins in the second winning opening 640. In this case, the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 during the game per game, and when the game per game ends, it corresponds to the staging corresponding to the waiting period or the special figure 2 variable period. Since the production is performed, it is configured so as not to give a sense of discomfort to the player.

Returning to FIG. 452, the explanation will be continued. After finishing the processing of C5207, then, based on the comparison result of C5207, the remaining period of the special figure 1 (the remaining period of the variation of the special figure 1) is larger (longer) than the game period per normal figure, that is, the feature being executed. FIG. 1 It is determined whether or not the timing at which the variation ends is later than the end timing of the game per game to be executed this time (C5208). In the processing of C5208, if it is determined that the remaining period of the special figure 1 is shorter than the game period per normal figure (C5208: No), the special figure is obtained when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the game per normal figure. Since there is a possibility that 1 fluctuation has not been executed, the constant monitoring flag 223oc is set to ON (C5209), and the process proceeds to C5210.

On the other hand, in the processing of C5208, when it is determined that the remaining period of the special figure 1 is longer than the game period per normal figure, that is, the variation of the special figure 1 being executed does not end during the game per normal figure executed this time (C5208). : Yes), skip the process of setting the constant monitoring flag 223oc (C5209) because it is confirmed that the special figure 1 fluctuation is being executed when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the game. Then, the process proceeds to C5210.

In the process of C5210, a series of production scenarios during the game per corresponding normal figure is set (C5210), and then the process proceeds to the process of C5204. In the processing of C5204, the flag for hitting the normal figure is set to ON (C5204), and then the process proceeds to the processing of C5215. Here, to explain in detail the processing content of C5210 described above, in the processing of C5208, when it is determined that the remaining period of Special Figure 1 is longer than the game period per normal figure (C5208: Yes), the difference period, that is, , Calculate the period from the end of the game per normal figure to the end of the special figure 1 residual fluctuation. Then, using the calculation result as the special figure 2 waiting period, the scenario per normal figure to which the special figure 2 waiting period corresponds is selected from the scenario table per normal figure defined in the series of effect scenario table 222oa, and the effect is produced. Set the aspect.

On the other hand, in the processing of C5208, if it is determined that the remaining period of Special Figure 1 is shorter than the game period per normal figure (C5208: No), the effect mode (series effect) is when the ball actually wins the second winning opening 640. Since the effect mode according to the waiting period in the above-mentioned 16th embodiment is set, the same effect mode as the above-mentioned 16th embodiment is set.

Next, in the process of C5201 when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (C5201: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received from the main controller 110 (C5211). Then, when it is determined that the ending command has been received (C5211: Yes), the middle flag 223oa is set to off (C5212), the constant monitoring flag 223oc is set to off (C5213), and the ending for display is set. A command is set (C5214), and then the process proceeds to C5215. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is directed to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S4102) of the main process executed by the MPU 221. Will be sent. Upon receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 starts the ending effect on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received in the processing of C5211 (C5211: No), the process proceeds to the processing of C5215. In the process of C5215, the process corresponding to the other command is executed (C5215), and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the variation effect setting process 19 (C4044) will be described with reference to FIG. 453. FIG. 453 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation effect setting process 19 (C4044) executed in the 19th embodiment. In this variable effect setting process 19 (C4044), when the constant monitoring flag 223oc is set to on (during a game per game executed during a series of effects, the length of the waiting period is not set. In the case), the process for setting the variable effect to be executed is added, and the content of the process for setting the variable effect of the normal symbol is changed. It is different from the process 5 (see FIG. 416), and is the same except for the process 5. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

When the variation effect setting process 19 (C4044) is executed, the same process of C4101 as the variation effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 416) of the 16th embodiment described above is executed, and the special figure variation effect is not set (usually). If it is determined (C4101: No), the variation effect setting process 19 is executed (C4167), and then this process is terminated. The details of the variable staging setting process 19 (C4167) will be described later with reference to FIG. 455.

On the other hand, in the process of C4101, when it is determined that the special figure variation effect is set (C4101: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the constant monitoring flag 223oc is set to ON (C4151). If it is determined that the constant monitoring flag 223oc is on (C4151: Yes), the constant monitoring effect setting process is executed (C4152), and the process proceeds to the C4102 process. The details of this constantly monitoring effect setting process (C4152) will be described later with reference to FIG. 454. On the other hand, if it is determined that the constant monitoring flag 223oc is not set to ON in the processing of C4151, the processing of C4152 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of C4102. After executing the process of C4152, the same processes of C4102 to C4116 as the variable staging setting process 5 (see FIG. 416) of the 16th embodiment described above are executed, and then this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 454, the contents of the constantly monitoring effect setting process (C4152) will be described. FIG. 454 is a flowchart showing the contents of the constantly monitoring effect setting process (C4152) executed in the 19th embodiment. This constantly monitoring effect setting process (C4152) is executed by the variation effect setting process 19 (see C4044 in FIG. 453), and is executed when a variation pattern command corresponding to the special symbol variation is received. It is a thing.

In the constantly monitoring effect setting process (C4152), first, it is determined whether a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation has been received (whether the special 1 fluctuation has started) (C5301), and the special figure 1 fluctuation is supported. When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command is received (special 1 fluctuation has started) (C5301: Yes), the fluctuation pattern extracted by the processing of C3303 of the fluctuation pattern command processing 16 (see C3204 in FIG. 409) is used. Based on this, the fluctuation time of the current special figure 1 fluctuation (special figure 1 fluctuation time) is extracted (C5302). Next, it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is larger (longer) than the period per normal figure (C5303).

In the processing of C5303, the special figure 1 fluctuation time extracted in the processing of C5302 is compared with the remaining period of the game per normal figure (period per normal figure) during execution, and the end timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation time is set. Determine if it is later than the end timing of the per-figure period. In the present embodiment, the constantly monitoring effect setting process (C4152) is configured to be executed when the constantly monitoring flag 223oc is set to ON, that is, at least during the game per game, so that C5303 The process of is executed during the game per game, but if the process of C5303 is configured to be executable in a state where the game per game is not executed, the game per game is executed. As a non-existent state, the special figure 1 fluctuation time and the normal figure per period may be compared by using the normal figure per period "0".

In the processing of C5303, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time is longer than the game period per normal figure (the end timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation is later than the end timing of the game per normal figure) (C5303: Yes). Since the special figure 1 fluctuation does not end during the game per normal figure, the effect mode (effect scenario of a series of effects) during the game per normal figure is set based on the determination result of C5303 (C5304) and constantly monitored. The flag 223oc is set to off (C5305), and the process proceeds to C5306.

Here, the processing of C5304 will be described in detail. First, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time is longer than the game period per normal figure (the end timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation is later than the end timing of the game per normal figure) (C5303: Yes), the difference. The period, that is, the period from the end of the game per normal map to the end of the special figure 1 fluctuation is calculated, and the calculated period is the waiting period for the second special symbol (special figure 2) change (special figure 2 standby). Period), and among the scenarios 1 to 3 per drawing specified in the series of production scenario tables 222oa, the production mode is set based on the scenario per normal figure corresponding to the special figure 2 waiting period calculated this time. On the other hand, in the processing of C5303, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time is not longer than the normal figure per period (the end timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation is earlier than the end timing of the game per normal figure) (C5303). : No), even if the current special figure 1 change is executed, the special figure 2 waiting period cannot be predicted, that is, the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 during this special figure 1 change. If not, since the game per normal figure is still being executed even after the special figure 1 change to be executed this time is completed, whether the special figure 1 change is executed during the remaining games per normal figure or not. FIG. 2 Since it is not possible to predict whether the fluctuation will be executed, the processing of C5304 and C5305 is skipped, and the process shifts to the processing of C5306. In this case, since the constant monitoring flag 223oc is not set to off, the continuous monitoring effect setting process (C4152) is continuously executed.

In the nineteenth embodiment, as described above with reference to FIGS. 447 and 448, a period effect (series) in which the period from the execution of the normal map fluctuation to the execution of the jackpot game is used to have a relationship. When executing the effect), the previous game content (length of the special figure 2 waiting period) is predicted at multiple timings (normal figure fluctuation start timing, game start timing per normal figure), and the effect is produced based on the prediction result. It is configured to set the aspect. Then, at each prediction timing, only when it is determined that the prediction is unpredictable, the constantly monitoring effect setting process (C4152) is executed, and it is always monitored whether the special figure change is executed during the game per normal figure. It is composed.

With this configuration, it is possible to collectively set the production mode of the series of effects for the range in which the previous game content (length of the waiting period in Special Figure 2) can be predicted in advance. It is possible to simplify the process for setting the effect mode. Further, since the process for predicting the content of the previous game can be executed at a plurality of timings, the prediction accuracy can be improved. Further, when the previous game content cannot be predicted at a plurality of prediction timings, the production mode of the series production is executed based on the actual game content, so that the production of the series production is performed. The aspect can be set reliably.

Returning to FIG. 454, the description will be continued. In the processing of C5301, if it is determined that the variation pattern command corresponding to the special figure 1 variation has not been received (it is not the start of the special figure 1 variation) (C5301: No), then the variation corresponding to the special figure 2 variation. When it is determined whether the pattern command has been received (whether it is the start of the special 2 variation) (C5306) and when it is determined that the variation pattern command corresponding to the special figure 2 variation has been received (it is the start of the special 2 variation). (C5306: Yes) Since the special figure 2 change is executed during the game per normal figure, as described above with reference to FIG. 448, even during the game per normal figure, the special figure 2 change period occurs. Scenario 3 is set as the corresponding production mode of the series of effects (C5307), the constant monitoring flag 223oc is set to off (C5308), the special 2 variation command for display is set (C5309), and then the process proceeds to C5310. do.

The above-mentioned processing of C5307 is a case where a series of effects is executed based on the normal map fluctuation, and is executed at the first prediction process executed at the normal map fluctuation start timing and at the game start timing per normal map. In any of the second prediction processes, the special figure 2 waiting period cannot be predicted, and the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed during the period during which the effect setting process is being constantly monitored during the game per normal figure. It is done when That is, it is a case where the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed without predicting the special figure 2 waiting period. In this way, when the special figure 2 variation is executed in a state where the special figure 2 waiting period cannot be predicted, the effect mode corresponding to the special figure 2 variation period is set in the process of C5307. Therefore, even if the previous game content cannot be predicted at a plurality of prediction timings, the series of effects is configured to execute the effect mode of the series of effects based on the actual game contents. The effect mode can be set reliably.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of C5306 that the fluctuation of the special figure 2 has not started (C5306: No), the process proceeds to the processing of C5310. In the processing of C5310, processing corresponding to other commands is executed (C5310), and then this processing is terminated.

Next, the contents of the variation effect setting process 19 (C4167) will be described with reference to FIG. 455. FIG. 455 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation effect setting process 19 (C4167) executed in the 19th embodiment. This variation effect setting process 19 (C4167) is a series effect prediction setting process (first) for predicting the content of the subsequent game and setting the series effect when the condition for executing the series effect of the normal map variation is satisfied. 1) It is different from the staging setting process for normal drawing (see FIG. 417) of the 16th embodiment described above in that the prediction process) is executed. Since the other contents are the same as the above-described 16th embodiment staging setting process for normal drawing (see FIG. 417), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the variable staging setting process 19 (C4167), first, the same processes of C4201 to C4206 as those of the staging setting process for normal drawing (see FIG. 417) of the 16th embodiment described above are executed, and in the process of C4206, a pseudo series of staging is performed. If it is determined that the flag 223lj is off (C4206: No), a series of staging prediction setting process is executed (C4251), and then the process proceeds to C4208. The details of this series of staging prediction setting process (C4251) will be described later with reference to FIG. 456. Next, after executing the same processing of C4208 to C4212 as the effect setting processing for normal drawing (see FIG. 417) of the 16th embodiment described above, the non-variable winning flag 223lm is set to off (C4252), and then the present. End the process.

Next, the contents of the series of staging prediction setting processing (C4251) will be described with reference to FIG. 456. FIG. 456 is a flowchart showing the contents of the series of staging prediction setting process (C4251) executed in the 19th embodiment. In this series of staging prediction setting process (C4251), the future game content (special figure 2 waiting period) is predicted (first prediction) at the start of the fluctuation of the normal map, and a series is performed based on the prediction result (first prediction result). The process for setting the effect mode during the period in which the effect is executed is executed, and there are cases where the length of the special figure 2 waiting period is predicted as the first prediction result and cases where it cannot be predicted. , Of the periods in which the series of effects is executed, the process for setting the effect mode is executed for different periods.

In the series of staging prediction setting process (C4251), first, it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation of the normal map is a hit fluctuation (C5401). If it is determined that the current fluctuation in the normal map is not a hit fluctuation (C5401: No), the condition for executing the series of effects is not satisfied, and the present processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation of the normal map this time is a hit fluctuation (C5401: Yes), the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter (special figure 1 fluctuation time counter) 223ln is read out (C5402), and the special figure fluctuation time counter is read. It is determined whether the value of 223ln is larger than 0 (C5403).

In the process of C5403, when it is determined that the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223ln is 0, that is, it is determined that the current state is not during the special figure 1 fluctuation (C5403: No), the present process is terminated as it is. That is, in the present embodiment, the conditions for executing the series of effects when the fluctuation per normal figure is executed, specifically, as shown in FIG. 455, the gaming state is the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol). , Normal symbol low probability state), this time the normal map fluctuation time is 30 seconds or more, the series production counter 223ga is set to off, the non-variable winning flag 223lm is set to off, and the pseudo series Even if the effect flag 223lj is set to off and the condition that is satisfied when the current fluctuation of the normal map is a fluctuation per normal map is satisfied as shown in FIG. 456. If the special figure 1 variation is not executed at the time when this process is executed, the series of effects is not executed (set).

With this configuration, it is possible to set whether or not to execute a series of effects that can be executed based on the fluctuations per normal figure, depending on the execution status of the special symbol fluctuations (special figure 1 fluctuations). In, it is possible to prevent a player who is performing a game in which a right-handed game is executed and only a normal figure fluctuation is executed from executing a series of effects.

In the processing of C5403, when it is determined that the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223ln is larger than 0 (C5403: Yes), that is, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation is in progress, the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223ln is determined. The remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is calculated based on (C5404), and the current normal map fluctuation time and the game time per normal map executed after the end of the current normal map fluctuation are extracted and added up (C5405). In this C5405 process, by adding up the normal map fluctuation time and the normal map game period, the period from the current time (the start point of the normal map change) to the end of the normal map game (end period per normal map). Is executed.

Then, the special figure 1 residual fluctuation time calculated in the processing of C5404 and the total time (total time per normal figure) calculated in the processing of C5405 are compared (C5406), and the comparison result is the special figure 1. It is determined whether or not the remaining fluctuation time is larger (longer) than the total time per map (C5407). If it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is larger (longer) than the total time per normal figure (C5407: Yes), the game per normal figure is completed by the time the change of the special figure 1 being executed is completed. Therefore, it is possible to predict the special figure 2 waiting period when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 during the game per game. Therefore, with reference to the series of staging scenario table 223ha, a scenario per normal figure is set based on the difference time (waiting period of special figure 2) between the remaining fluctuation time of special figure 1 and the total time per normal figure (C5408), and then the book. End the process.

On the other hand, in the processing of C5407, if it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is shorter than the total time per normal figure (C5407: No), the presence / absence and the length of the special figure 2 waiting period are predicted at the present time. Since this is not possible, scenario 4 per drawing is set (C5409), and then this process is terminated.

As described above, in the 19th embodiment, when the normal map change is executed, the change state of the special symbol (first special symbol) during the game per normal map is predicted, and based on the prediction result. It is configured to set the production mode of a series of productions corresponding to the fluctuation of the general map. That is, when the normal map fluctuation is executed, the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation executed this time, the normal map lottery result, and the game time (maximum time) of the game per normal map are calculated and used as the calculation result. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 change currently being executed ends during the game per normal figure, and the effect mode of a series of effects corresponding to the normal figure change is set based on the determination result. is doing.

With this configuration, for example, the change end timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation during execution is later than the period during which the ball can win the second winning opening 640, that is, the game period (maximum period) per normal figure. In this case, it is possible to predict the timing (length of the waiting period) at which the special figure 2 fluctuation can be executed at the time when the normal figure fluctuation is executed. Thereby, as various effect modes executed during the waiting period, it is possible to set an effect mode based on the length of the waiting period. Therefore, with respect to the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, since the period that can be variably set can be lengthened among the production modes of the series of effects according to the length of the waiting period, the series according to the length of the series of effects. It is possible to facilitate the execution of the production.

In the 19th embodiment described above, similarly to the 16th embodiment described above, as a game per normal figure, a game per short opening (closing period (opening period) is 0.1 seconds, opening period is 0.1 seconds. ) And the game per long opening (closing period (opening period) is 0.1 seconds, first opening period is 1 second, closing period (waiting period) is 1.5 seconds, second opening period is 0.5 seconds) And, because it is configured to be feasible, in the first prediction process (series effect prediction setting process (see C4251 in FIG. 456)) executed at the time of the change in the normal map, the winner was won in this change in the normal map. The hit type per normal figure may be discriminated, and the prediction range of the first prediction (the period during which the ball can win in the second winning opening 640) may be set based on the discriminating result. In addition, the mode of the prediction range corresponding to the type per normal map determined this time (the length and timing of the period during which the ball can win the second winning opening 640), that is, the game mode of the game per normal map to be executed. Based on this, it is determined how easy it is to win the ball in the second winning opening 640 during the game per game, and in the first prediction process, the waiting period (after the ball wins in the second winning opening 640) is determined. If it is not possible to predict the period until the special figure 2 fluctuation based on the winning is executed), the winning difficulty determination means for determining the ease of winning the ball to the second winning opening 640. Based on the determination result of, the effect mode during the fluctuation period of the normal map may be set.

Specifically, a game per game (for example, a game per drawing) determined by the winning difficulty determination means that the winning difficulty is low (it is possible to make the second winning opening 640 win a ball by performing a normal game). When a normal map hit type (for example, a normal map hit A (see FIG. 382 (b))) corresponding to the normal map long open per game) is set, the effect mode is set during the normal map fluctuation period. , It is difficult to win a prize by setting an effect mode that makes it easy to move to the next effect mode that is set as a series of effects (even if a normal game is performed, it is difficult to make the second winning opening 640 win a ball). When the type per normal figure (for example, B per normal figure (see FIG. 382 (b))) corresponding to the game per normal figure determined to be (for example, the game per game with the short open of the normal figure) is set, the normal game is set. Figure As an effect mode set during the fluctuation period, it is preferable to set an effect mode that suggests that the series of effects is completed (an effect mode in which it is difficult to shift to the next effect mode set as the series effect). .. In this way, when the waiting period cannot be predicted at the timing when the first prediction process is executed, the effect mode of the effect executed during the normal map fluctuation period is changed based on the type of the game per normal map to be executed. As a result, it is possible to make the player predict whether or not the jackpot game is likely to be executed with this change in the normal map at the time when the change in the normal map is started. Therefore, the first prediction process is executed. It is possible to enhance the effect of the effect to be executed when the waiting period cannot be predicted at the timing of the process.

In addition, it corresponds to a game per game (for example, a game per game with a short opening) that is determined to have a high degree of difficulty in winning (it is difficult to win a ball in the second winning opening 640 even if a normal game is played). When the type of per-figure (for example, B per per-figure (see FIG. 382 (b))) is set, the staging mode corresponding to the series of staging may not be set. With this configuration, the ball cannot be won in the second winning opening 640 during the normal game, and the game for the big hit game (special figure 2 fluctuation, small hit winning, small hit game). It is possible to suppress the execution of a series of effects when it is difficult to progress. In this case, if it is determined that the ball has won a prize in the second winning opening 640 during the game per game, which has a high degree of difficulty in winning, it may be configured to execute a series of effects from the winning timing. 2 When the length of the waiting period (the period until the special figure 2 change based on this prize is executed) at the time when the ball wins in the winning opening 640 is a predetermined period or more (for example, 30 seconds or more). , It is preferable to use a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) from the time when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 to set the effect mode that is usually set during the normal drawing fluctuation period.

In this way, when a game per game with a high degree of difficulty in winning is executed, the start timing of the series of effects is not the timing of the start of the fluctuation of the normal map, but the timing when the ball wins the second winning opening 640. It is possible to suppress the frequency with which the series of effects ends in the middle of the series of effects even though the series of effects has been executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which one type of per-figure corresponding to a game per per-figure having a low difficulty of winning is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game per per-figure having a low difficulty of winning is supported. Multiple types of per-figure can be set, and the game mode of the per-figure game executed corresponding to each type of per-figure may be different. A game mode of a game per game (game α per game) corresponding to the type α per game is configured so that at least the type α per game and the type β per game can be set as the type per game. As a game mode with a closing period of 0.1 seconds and an opening period of 3 seconds, as a game mode of a game per game (game β per game) corresponding to the type β per game, the closing period is 0.1 seconds. , The game mode of the first opening period 0.1 seconds, the closing period (waiting period) 3 seconds, and the second opening period (2.9 seconds) may be set.

In this case, when a game per game with a low degree of difficulty in winning is executed, the period during which the ball is likely to win in the second winning opening 640 differs depending on the set type of game per game, so that the game starts to fluctuate. In the first prediction process executed at the timing, the period during which the ball is likely to win in the second winning opening 640 is determined based on the type per drawing, and the first prediction process is executed based on the determination result of the determination means. It is good to configure it so that the range of prediction to be made is different. Specifically, when the above-mentioned game per normal figure α is executed, the range of prediction to be executed in the first prediction process is in the range of 0.1 seconds to 3.1 seconds from the start of the game per normal figure ( If the game β per normal figure is executed by setting based on the range of the open period), the range of prediction to be executed in the first prediction process is set from 3.3 seconds to 6.1 from the start of the game per normal figure. It may be configured to be set based on the range of seconds (range of the second opening period).

In this way, the prediction to be executed in the first prediction process is performed by setting the prediction range in association with each other based on the game mode (winning difficulty, setting timing of the winning period) of the game per normal map to be executed. It is possible to narrow the range of. This makes it easier to predict the waiting period in the first prediction process. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the execution of a series of effects and enhance the effect of the effects.

In addition, it is possible to set the type γ per figure as the type per game that corresponds to the game per game with low winning difficulty, and the game per game (game γ per game) corresponding to the type γ per figure. When configured to set a game mode of a closing period of 0.1 seconds, a first opening period of 1.5 seconds, a closing period (waiting period) of 3 seconds, and a second opening period (1.5 seconds). That is, when a game per game in which a plurality of open periods in which a ball can win is set in the second winning opening 640, the first prediction process first corresponds to the second opening period set later. By comparing the range to be performed and the remaining period (remaining fluctuation period) of the special figure 1 fluctuation during execution, it is determined whether the remaining period (remaining fluctuation period) of the special figure 1 fluctuation is later than the second opening period. If it is determined that the elapsed timing of the remaining period (remaining fluctuation period) of the special figure 1 fluctuation is later than the end timing of the second opening period, the special drawing being executed from the end timing of the second opening period. 1 It is configured to set the waiting period up to the end timing of the fluctuation, while it is determined that the elapsed timing of the remaining period (remaining fluctuation period) of the special figure 1 fluctuation is before the end timing of the second opening period. In that case, next, the elapsed timing of the remaining period (remaining fluctuation period) of the special figure 1 fluctuation and the range corresponding to the first opening period are compared.

Then, when it is determined that the elapsed timing of the first opening period is earlier than the elapsed timing of the remaining period (remaining fluctuation period) of the special figure 1 fluctuation, the special figure being executed from the end timing of the first opening period is executed. 1 It is configured to set the waiting period up to the end timing of the fluctuation, while it is determined that the elapsed timing of the first opening period is later than the elapsed timing of the first opening period, that is, the first. If the special figure 1 fluctuation that is being executed is stopped and displayed by the time the 1 opening period elapses, it is assumed that the waiting period could not be predicted in the first prediction process, and the second prediction process described above is executed. It is good to configure it like this.

<20th Embodiment>
Next, the twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 457 to 466. The 20th embodiment is different from the 16th embodiment described above in that the control process for the final variation effect executed in the final variation in the time saving state is different.

In the 16th embodiment described above, the lottery result of the variation and the special figure 2 variation executed after the variation (normally, the time saving state is completed) by using the final variation effect executed in the final variation of the time saving state. It was configured to suggest the pre-discrimination result for the special figure 2 variation) executed in the state where the state is set. With this configuration, when a hit (big hit, small hit) is won by the special figure 2 fluctuation executed after the time saving state ends, it is possible to suggest that fact in the final fluctuation effect.

The twentieth embodiment differs from the above-mentioned sixteenth embodiment in that the process for setting the effect mode of the final variation effect is described in detail. Specifically, when the final change in the time saving state is executed, the effect of the final change effect is produced based on the lottery result of the change and the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 (value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223 lc). It is configured to set the aspect.

Further, when the final fluctuation in the time saving state is a deviation fluctuation, the effect period of the final variation effect is set based on the special figure 2 reserved ball number (value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223 lc). There is. That is, when the final fluctuation in the time-saving state is an out-of-bounds fluctuation, the next special Figure 2 fluctuation (special Figure 2 fluctuation executed during the normal state), which is the suggestion target of the final fluctuation effect, is executed after the fluctuation is completed. Therefore, if the final fluctuation in the time-saving state is an out-of-time fluctuation, the fluctuation period of the special figure 2 fluctuation corresponding to the already acquired special figure 2 hold is made in advance at the start timing of the final fluctuation in the time-saving state. It is configured to set the effect mode (final variation effect).

<About the electrical configuration of the 20th embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the 20th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 457 to 461. The 20th embodiment is different from the 16th embodiment described above in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed, and the other parts are the same. Is. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 457 (a), the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 20th embodiment will be described. FIG. 457 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the twentieth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 457 (a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 20th embodiment has a final variation effect table 222pa and a final variation effect table 222pa with respect to the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 16th embodiment described above. The difference is that the final effect variable setting table 222pb is added, and the other points are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The final variation effect table 222pa is a data table referred to when setting the effect mode of the final variation effect, and is referred to when a variation pattern command corresponding to the final variation in the time saving state (special figure 2 variation) is received. Is to be done. Here, the contents of the final variation effect table 222pa will be described with reference to FIGS. 458 and 459.

FIG. 458 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final variation effect table 222pa. As shown in FIG. 458 (a), the final variation effect table 222pa is referred to when the lottery result of the variation is a hit and the final table 222pa1 for a hit is referred to when the lottery result of the variation is a hit. It has a final table 222ib2 for disengagement.

Here, the production period in the final fluctuation production will be described. In the 20th embodiment, as in the 16th embodiment described above, a "waiting period", a "first period", a "second period", and a "third period" are formed as the effect period of the final variation effect. It is configured so that the effect mode can be set for each period. In the 16th embodiment described above, regardless of the lottery result of the variation (time saving final variation), an effect mode (standby effect) for notifying that the final variation effect starts is set in the "waiting period", and the "waiting effect" is set. In the "first period", an effect mode (acquisition effect) for acquiring a large number of special figure 2 hold is set, and in the "second period", the lottery result of the change and the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold are suggested. An effect mode (mission effect) for performing the mission effect is set, and an effect mode (result effect) for showing the effect result of the mission effect is set in the "third period".

Further, based on the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 when the "waiting period" has elapsed, it is configured to determine whether to execute the acquisition effect or the mission effect as the effect to be executed during the "first period". However, if the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 after the "waiting period" has elapsed is equal to or greater than the predetermined number (if the upper limit number (4)), the mission production is configured to be executed in the "first period". rice field.

On the other hand, in the twentieth embodiment, the effect mode of the final variation effect is set based on the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 at the timing when the time saving final variation (special figure 2 variation) is executed. It is different from the above-mentioned 16th embodiment in that. Further, it differs from the above-described 16th embodiment in that the effect mode of the final variation effect set at the timing when the time-saving final variation (special figure 2 variation) is executed is different based on the lottery result of the variation. is doing. Further, it is different from the above-described 16th embodiment in that a plurality of timings for setting the effect mode of the final variation effect are provided.

First, with reference to FIG. 458 (b), the contents specified in the winning final table 222pa1 of the final variation effect table 222pa will be described. FIG. 458 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the final table 222pa1 for hitting. As shown in FIG. 458 (b), in the winning final table 222pa1, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223 lc (special figure 2 reserved ball number) and the acquired effect counter 223 lf value are obtained. The effect mode set for each effect period of the final variation effect is defined.

Specifically, in the range where the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223 lc is "0" and the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf is "0 to 169", the effect pattern A is set as the effect pattern of the final variation effect. In the range of "170 to 189", the effect pattern B is defined as the effect pattern of the final variation effect, and in the range of "190 to 198", the effect pattern C is defined as the effect pattern of the final variation effect. ing. Further, in the range where the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223 lc is "1, 2" and the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf is "0 to 169", the effect pattern A is defined as the effect pattern of the final variation effect. In the range of "170 to 198", the effect pattern B is defined as the effect pattern of the final variation effect. Further, in the range where the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223 lc is "3" and the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf is "0 to 109", the effect pattern A is defined as the effect pattern of the final variation effect. In the range of "110 to 198", the effect pattern B is defined as the effect pattern of the final variation effect.

Here, the detailed contents of various effect patterns defined in the final table 222pa1 for hitting will be described. The effect pattern A is such that the same final variation effect as that of the 16th embodiment described above is executed, and as described above with reference to FIG. 364, the effect pattern A is set first in the effect period in which the final variation effect is executed. In the waiting period (0th period) to be performed, a "waiting effect (effect a)", which is an effect mode for indicating that the final variation effect is executed, is set, and in the first period after the wait period has elapsed. , The "acquisition effect (effect b)", which is an effect mode for guiding the player to the game method for performing the later game in an advantageous manner (acquiring the special figure 2 hold), is set, and the first period In the second period after the lapse of time, the lottery result of the symbol to be the target of the final fluctuation effect (the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation which is the time saving final fluctuation, the look-ahead result for the special figure 2 hold currently acquired) is The "mission effect (effect c)", which is an effect mode for suggesting, is set, and in the third period after the second period has elapsed, the "mission effect (effect c)" executed during the second period A "result effect (effect d)", which is an effect mode for showing the effect result (lottery result), is set.

The effect pattern B is an effect pattern set when the time-saving final variation is won (big hit, small hit), and is an effect for notifying the player that the player has won the hit as the final variation effect. The mode "special effect 1 (effect e)" is set.

The effect pattern C is an effect mode set when the number of holdings in the special figure 2 when setting the final variation effect is a predetermined number or less (0), and is a waiting period (a standby period) in the effect period of the final variation effect. The "standby effect (a)" is set in the 0th period). When this effect pattern C is set, in order to set the effect mode of the final variation effect (effect mode executed in each of the first period to the third period) again after the end of the waiting period (0th period). Processing (final staging variable processing) is configured to be executed.

The detailed contents of this final effect variable process will be described later, but in the final effect variable process, the number of special figures 2 held during the waiting period (0th period) and at the end of the waiting period (0th period). Special figure 2 A process for setting different production modes according to the number of reservations in each of the first period to the third period is executed.

As described above, in the 20th embodiment, the final variation effect is set at the time of setting the final variation effect (at the start of the time-saving final variation) with respect to the setting method of the final variation effect in the 16th embodiment described above. The point that is configured to set the effect mode and the lottery result (look-ahead result) that is the target of the final variation effect are the lottery result of the variation and the time when the final variation effect is set (at the start of the time saving final variation). ) Is different from the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 hold acquired in) in that it is limited to.

With this configuration, it is possible to change the production mode of the final variation effect executed according to the acquisition status of the special figure 2 hold at the time when the time reduction final variation is executed, so that the time reduction final variation is executed. It is possible to give diversity to the game for acquiring the special figure 2 hold to be executed before (during the time saving state). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, as in the present embodiment, when the effect mode of the final variation effect executed according to the acquisition status of the special figure 2 hold at the time when the time reduction final variation is executed is changed, the time reduction final variation is executed. It is preferable to provide an effect mode that can be set only when the number of reserved special figures 2 acquired at a certain point in time is a specific number (for example, the upper limit number 3). With this configuration, the player can enthusiastically play the game so that the number of holdings in Special Figure 2 becomes a specific number (for example, the upper limit of 3) at the time when the time saving final fluctuation is executed. Can be done.

Since the above-mentioned winning final table 222pa1 is a data table that is referred to when the variation (time saving final variation) is won, execution of the final variation effect set with reference to the winning final table 222pa1. The period is a period corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the time-saving final fluctuation. That is, after the final variation effect set with reference to the winning final table 222pa1 is completed, the winning game corresponding to the lottery result of the variation is executed. In this way, when the time-saving final variation is won, the final variation corresponds to the variation time of the variation without considering the variation time of the special figure 2 variation executed based on the special figure 2 hold. Since the effect mode of the effect can be set collectively, the process for setting the effect mode can be simplified.

As described above, in the winning final table 222pa1 used in the 20th embodiment, the smaller the number of special figure 2 hold (value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223 lc), the easier it is to select the effect pattern C. It is stipulated. That is, the smaller the number of special figure 2 holdings at the time when the time reduction final fluctuation is executed, the more the number of special figure 2 holdings that can be acquired during the waiting period (0th period) can be increased, so that the waiting period (0th period) can be increased. ) Is configured so that it is easy to select the effect pattern C in which the effect mode can be variably set according to the number of reserved special figures 2 acquired in. With this configuration, it is possible to execute different final variation effects when the time-saving final variation is executed in a state where the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is small.

Further, it is stipulated that the larger the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223 lc), the easier it is to select the effect pattern B as the final variation effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to execute the special effect 1 indicating that the winner is won when the time saving final variation is executed in the state where the number of reservations in the special figure 2 is large. Therefore, it is possible to have the player enthusiastically play a game for acquiring the special figure 2 hold number, and it is possible to improve the operation of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 459, the contents of the disengagement final table 222ib2 possessed by the final variation effect table 222pa will be described. FIG. 459 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final table 222ib2 for disengagement. The deviation final table 222ib2 is a data table that is referred to when the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation, which is the time saving final fluctuation, is a deviation, and is reserved and stored during the fluctuation period of the fluctuation. Special Figure 2 Corresponding to Hold It is used to set the effect mode of the final variation effect with the period including the variation time of the variation as the effect period.

In the 20th embodiment, as in the 16th embodiment described above, the lottery result of the variation and the execution after the variation are executed by using the final variation effect executed in the final variation of the time saving state (time saving final variation). It is configured to suggest the pre-discrimination result for the special figure 2 fluctuation (the special figure 2 fluctuation executed in the state where the time saving state is finished and the normal state is set). Then, if the lottery result of the time saving final change is won (big hit, small hit), the winning game is executed after the end of the change, so that the final change effect is performed in the period corresponding to the change period of the change. It is configured to be executed.

On the other hand, if the lottery result of the time saving final change is out of order, the special figure 2 change corresponding to the special figure 2 hold stored after the end of the change is executed. In the present embodiment, the final variation effect is executed including the variation period of the special figure 2 variation that is reserved and stored at the time when the time saving final variation is completed.

As shown in FIG. 459, the final table 222ib2 for removal includes the special figure 2 hold number (value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223 lc), the look-ahead result for the special figure 2 hold, and the acquired effect counter 223 lf value. The production mode of the final variation effect is defined according to. In addition, as the effect period in which the final variation effect is executed, the variation period of the time reduction final variation and the time reduction state (low probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) are terminated, and the normal state (low probability of the special symbol) is completed. The fluctuation period of the special figure 2 fluctuation (the special figure 2 fluctuation corresponding to the special figure 2 hold acquired during the time saving state) executed in the state (low probability state of the normal symbol) is specified.

Then, at the execution timing of the time-saving final variation, the effect mode of the final variation effect is set even for the variation period of the special figure 2 variation executed in response to the already acquired special figure 2 hold number. is doing. With this configuration, it is possible to collectively set the effect mode (final variation effect) of the effect (final variation effect) that is executed across a plurality of special figure variations (special figure 2 variation), so that each special figure variation can be set. It is possible to simplify the process for setting the effect mode as compared with the case where the effect mode of the final variation effect is set each time.

Further, in the present embodiment, when there is winning information indicating a winning in the special figure 2 hold acquired at the time of setting the effect mode of the final variation effect (when the pre-reading result is a winning), the winning information is obtained. When there is no winning information indicating winning (when the look-ahead result is out of order), the execution content (whether or not to execute, the period of execution) of the acquisition effect executed during the final variation effect is configured to be different. If there is winning information indicating winning in the special figure 2 hold that has already been acquired (when the look-ahead result is winning), it is more difficult to execute the acquisition effect than in other cases. Alternatively, even if it is executed, the execution period is configured to be short.

With this configuration, the player can predict the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold according to the effect mode of the variation effect executed as the final variation effect, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In addition, the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 hold that has been acquired at the time when the time saving state can be terminated, that is, the special figure 2 fluctuation corresponding to the time saving final change is an out-of-time change and the time saving final change is executed is Other than that, the effect mode (acquisition effect (effect b)) for increasing the number of executions of the advantageous game (special figure 2 lottery in the normal state) executed after the time saving state ends in the out-of-time state. It is possible to emphasize compared to the case of. Therefore, it is possible to easily increase the number of times the advantageous game to be executed after the time saving state is completed.

Here, when the contents specified in the final table 222ib2 for disconnection are specifically described with reference to FIG. 459, the special figure 2 hold number (value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223 lc) is 0. When the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf is in the range of "0 to 159", "effect a" is set in the waiting period, "effect b" is set in the first period, and "effect c" is set in the second period. The production data is specified. Further, when the special figure 2 hold number (value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223 lc) is 0 and the acquired effect counter 223 lf value is in the range of "160 to 179", the waiting period and the first The effect data in which the "effect b" is set in the first period and the "effect c" is set in the second period is defined. Further, when the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf is in the range of "180 to 198", the effect data in which "effect a" is set in the waiting period is defined.

In addition, in the final table 222ib2 for the main deviation, the effect mode to be executed in the final effect period of the final variation effect at the present time is not set (in FIG. 459, "○" is displayed as a display mode indicating that the setting has not been made). It is configured in. In other words, if the special figure lottery result (look-ahead result) that can be grasped at the execution timing of the time reduction final change does not include a hit, the special figure 2 corresponding to the special figure 2 hold acquired after the execution timing of the time reduction final change The fluctuation may be executed after the special figure 2 fluctuation that is the target of the look-ahead processing at the execution timing of the time-saving final fluctuation.

In this way, when it is necessary to change the effect result (effect mode) of the final variation effect according to the lottery result of the special figure variation that can be executed in the period from the execution of the final variation effect to the end of the final variation effect. Is configured so that the effect mode of the final variation effect can be variably set at a timing other than the execution timing of the time-saving final variation. Therefore, the final variation effect can be executed in various effect modes.

Returning to FIG. 459, the description will be continued. When the special figure 2 hold number (value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223 lc) is 1, the winning information indicating the winning is included in the special figure 2 hold, and it is "there is a hold in hold", that is, , The special figure 2 variation executed this time (the last special figure 2 variation in the time saving state) is an out-of-bounds variation, and the special figure 2 variation executed next (the special figure 2 variation executed first after the normal state is set). ) Is a hit fluctuation, regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf (corresponding to the entire range from 0 to 198), "effect a" is displayed in the waiting period and "effect b" is displayed in the first period. , "Staging c" in the second period, in the third period, and in the fluctuation period (communication 1) of the first special figure 2 fluctuation (hereinafter referred to as normal special figure 2 fluctuation 1) after the normal state is set. The effect data for which the "effect d" is set is defined.

On the other hand, the special figure 2 hold number (value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223 lc) is 1, and the winning information indicating the winning is not included in the special figure 2 hold, and it is "no hold inside hit". In other words, the special figure 2 variation executed this time (the last special figure 2 variation in the time saving state) is an out-of-bounds variation, and the special figure 2 variation executed next (the first execution after the normal state is set). If the value of the acquired staging counter 223 lf is in the range of "0 to 189", "staging a" is set in the waiting period and "staging b" is set in the first period. , "Direction c" is set in the second period, and "Continuous effect (effect f)" is set as a display mode for delaying the display of the effect result of "effect c (mission effect)" in the third period. The staging data to be performed is specified.

Here, the above-mentioned "continuous effect" is an effect mode displayed after the mission effect (see FIG. 374 (b)) is executed, and is an effect mode showing the effect result of the mission effect (FIG. 375 (FIG. 375). a)), that is, an effect mode executed when the period until the result effect (effect d) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is extended.

The detailed display contents will be omitted, but for example, when the effect mode shown in FIG. 374 (b) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 as a mission effect, the falling rock 873 falls. By slowing down, the period until the effect result (success or failure) of the mission effect being executed is displayed can be extended, or the mission effect can be continued as the effect result of the mission effect being executed (success or failure). It is configured to display a display mode (for example, the characters "continue!") To indicate that the second mission effect is executed), and multiple mission effects can be performed in one final variation effect. As the effect result of the mission effect, an effect mode is set such as executing a pseudo result display effect that temporarily displays a display mode suggesting an effect result different from the actual effect result.

In this way, by configuring to execute the "continuous effect" as the final variation effect, for example, after the final variation effect is executed, the special figure 2 hold is acquired and the execution period of the running final variation effect is executed. In the case of extending, the effect period of the final variation effect can be extended without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Next, the special figure 2 hold number (value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223 lc) is 2, and the winning information indicating the winning is included in the special figure 2 hold (“Yes” in the hold). That is, the special figure 2 fluctuation executed this time (the last special figure 2 fluctuation in the time saving state) is an out-of-bounds fluctuation, and the special figure fluctuation corresponding to at least one of the two acquired special figure 2 hold is In the case of a hit fluctuation, regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf (corresponding to the entire range from 0 to 198), "effect a" is set in the waiting period, and "directed b" is set in the first period. In the 2nd period, the "staging c" is the 3rd period, and the fluctuation period of the first special figure 2 fluctuation (hereinafter referred to as the normal special figure 2 fluctuation 1) after the normal state is set (through 1), 2 Of the fluctuation period (through 2) of the second special figure 2 fluctuation (hereinafter referred to as normal special figure 2 fluctuation 2), the production data in which "effect d" is set is defined in the period until the hit variation ends. ing.

On the other hand, the special figure 2 hold number (value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223 lc) is 2, and the winning information indicating the winning is not included in the special figure 2 hold, and it is "no hold inside hit". In other words, the special figure 2 variation executed this time (the last special figure 2 variation in the time saving state) is an out-of-bounds variation, and the special figure 2 variation executed next (the first execution after the normal state is set). If the value of the acquired staging counter 223 lf is in the range of "0 to 189", "staging a" is set in the waiting period and "staging b" is set in the first period. , "Direction c" is set in the second period, and "Continuous effect (effect f)" is set as a display mode for delaying the display of the effect result of "effect c (mission effect)" in the third period. The staging data to be performed is specified.

Next, the special figure 2 hold number (value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223 lc) is 3, and the winning information indicating the winning is included in the special figure 2 hold (“Yes” in the hold). That is, the special figure 2 fluctuation executed this time (the last special figure 2 fluctuation in the time saving state) is an out-of-bounds fluctuation, and the special figure fluctuation corresponding to at least one of the three acquired special figure 2 reservations is In the case of a hit fluctuation, regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf (corresponding to the entire range from 0 to 198), "effect a" is set in the waiting period, and "directed b" is set in the first period. "Direction c" is set in the 2nd period, and "Production d" is set in the 3rd period and the period until the hit fluctuation ends among the 1st variable period, the 2nd variable period, and the 3rd variable period. The data is specified.

Further, when the special figure 2 hold number (value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223 lc) is 3, and the winning information indicating the winning is not included in the special figure 2 hold (“none” in the hold). That is, when the special figure 2 fluctuation executed this time (the last special figure 2 change in the time saving state) is an out-of-bounds fluctuation, and all the special figure 2 fluctuations corresponding to the three acquired special figure 2 hold are out-of-bounds fluctuations. Regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf (corresponding to the entire range of 0 to 198), the effect data in which "effect a" is set in the waiting period is specified.

Returning to FIG. 457 (a), the description will be continued. The final effect variable setting table 222pb is a data table used for selecting the effect mode of the final variation effect executed in the final variation (special figure 2 variation) in the time saving state, and the effect mode of the final variation effect is described. When setting using the final variation effect table 222pa, if there is an effect period (unset period) in which the effect mode is not set, the effect mode is set for the unset period during the execution of the final variation effect. It is used for. Specifically, in the final variation effect update process 20 (C4566 in FIG. 466), it is determined that the waiting period (0th period) has ended (C4863: Yes in FIG. 466), and the effect variable flag 223pc is set to ON. It is referred to when it is determined to be (C4864: Yes in FIG. 466), that is, when there is an effect period (unset period) in which the effect mode is not set (see C4865 in FIG. 466).

Here, the contents of the final effect variable setting table 222pb will be described with reference to FIGS. 460 and 461. FIG. 460 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final effect variable setting table 222pb. As shown in FIG. 460 (a), the final effect variable setting table 222pb is the hit setting table 222pb1 referred to when the special figure 2 fluctuation (time saving final fluctuation) being executed is a hit fluctuation, and the running setting table 222pb1. It has a setting table 222pb2 for deviation, which is referred to when the variation of special figure 2 (final variation of time reduction) is an deviation variation, and according to the lottery result of the variation of special figure 2 (final variation of time reduction) being executed. , It is configured so that different production modes are set. Further, although a detailed explanation will be described later, if the elements referred to when setting the staging mode are different depending on whether the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation (time saving final fluctuation) being executed is a hit or a miss. I'm letting you.

With this configuration, the player can set the effect mode set as the final variation effect according to the actual game content (special figure lottery result and increase in the number of reserved balls). It is possible to be interested in the production content of the final fluctuation production performed on the subject.

Next, the contents of the hit setting table 222pb1 will be described with reference to FIG. 460 (b). FIG. 460 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit setting table 222pb1. As shown in FIG. 460 (b), the hit setting table 222pb1 has the value of the hold number increase counter 223pa, that is, during the period from the execution of the final variation effect to the end of the waiting period (0th period). Different production modes are defined based on the acquired number of reserved special figures 2 and the acquired value of the effect counter 223 lf.

Specifically, when the value of the hold number increase counter 223pa is "0,1" and the value of the acquired effect counter 223lf is in the range of "0 to 198", "effect b" in the first period. It is stipulated that "effect c" is set in the second period and "effect d" is set in the third period. It should be noted that an unset period in which the effect mode is not set at the time of executing the final variation effect without setting a new effect mode for the period in which the effect mode is already set at the time of executing the final variation effect (Fig. The effect mode is set with reference to this table only for the period indicated by “◯” in 458 (b).

Next, when the value of the hold number increase counter 223pa is "2" and the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf is in the range of "0 to 149", "effect b" is set in the first period and "effect b" is set in the second period. It is stipulated that "effect c" and "effect d" are set in the third period, and if it is in the range of "150 to 198", it is being executed in the first period, the second period, and the third period. "Special effect 2 (effect g)" is set, which is a high expectation notification mode to show that the effect result of the final variation effect is likely to be the effect result indicating the winning of the special symbol (special figure 2). It is stipulated to do.

The above-mentioned "special effect 2 (effect g)" is an effect mode in which an effect different from the mission effect (see FIG. 374 (b)) normally executed as the final variation effect is executed, and is described in detail. Will be described later, but the selection ratio is specified so that the effect result of this final variation effect is more likely to be the effect result indicating winning than the mission effect is executed.

The detailed display contents of this "special effect 2" will be omitted, but for example, after the standby effect is executed, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 becomes dark, and the effect result indicating winning is obtained. A certain hit display mode (display mode imitating the letter "V") and a miss display mode (display mode imitating a "cross mark"), which is an effect result indicating a missed win, are displayed and are displayed until the end. An effect is executed in which the display mode is the effect result of the final variation effect. In this way, by notifying the player in an easy-to-understand manner that an unusual effect will be executed immediately after the waiting period ends, the player is expected to win the effect. You can watch it.

The production content of the "special production 2" is not limited to the above-mentioned content, and for example, according to the example shown in FIG. 374 (a), as a type of ally characters (851a to 851d) used for the mission production. , A character that is not displayed in the small display area Dm21 (for example, a character that imitates a whale) may be set so that a mission effect different from the usual one is executed, or the same ally character (851a to 851d) may be used to perform an effect in which a special mission is executed.

With this configuration, the image data used in a normal mission effect can be diverted as a part of the image data of the effect executed as the "special effect 2", so that the image data capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be used. Can be reduced.

Next, when the value of the hold number increase counter 223pa is "3" and the value of the acquired effect counter 223lf is in the range of "0 to 119", "effect b" is set in the first period and "effect b" is set in the second period. It is stipulated that "effect c" and "effect d" are set in the third period, and in the case of the range of "120 to 198", "effect g" is set in the first period, the second period, and the third period. Is specified to be set.

Finally, when the value of the hold number increase counter 223pa is "4" and the value of the acquired effect counter 223lf is in the range of "0 to 149", "in the first period, the second period, and the third period". It is stipulated to set "effect g", and if it is in the range of "150 to 198", the effect result of the final variable effect being executed is a special symbol (in the first period, the second period, and the third period). It is stipulated to set "special effect 3 (effect h)" which is a definite notification mode for notifying that the effect result indicating the winning of the special figure 2) is obtained.

The above-mentioned "special effect 3 (effect h)" is an effect different from the mission effect (see FIG. 374 (b)) normally executed as the final variation effect, and is a time-saving final variation (see FIG. 374 (b)). It is executed only when the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation) is a hit. The detailed display contents of this "special effect 3" will be omitted, but for example, after the standby effect is executed, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 becomes dark, and the effect result indicating winning is obtained. An effect of displaying a certain hit display mode (display mode imitating the letter "V") is executed. In this way, immediately after the waiting period for the final variation effect ends, the player can be made to prepare his / her mind for the winning game by notifying the player of the winning. Further, by making the display mode at the start of the special effect 2 and the display mode at the start of the special effect 3 the same (a mode in which the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is darkened (blacked out)), the player On the other hand, it is possible to notify in advance that the final variation effect of this time is the special effect 2 or the special effect 3. As a result, the player pays close attention to the final variation effect while expecting that the special effect 3 is executed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the 20th embodiment, as a privilege given to the player when the effect corresponding to the special effect 3 is executed, the effect result of the final variation effect is notified before the end of the final variation effect. Although it is configured to give a privilege, it may be configured to give a privilege other than that, for example, based on the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold acquired at the timing when the special effect 3 is set. It may be configured to give a privilege of notifying the player of the number of times of winning. Specifically, when there are two special figure 2 hold in which the look-ahead result is won out of the four special figure 2 hold, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used as the effect mode of the special effect 3. Is darkened, and an effect of displaying a plurality of hit display modes (display modes imitating the character "V"), which is an effect result indicating winning, is executed, and finally, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The number of displayed winning display modes may be configured to indicate the number of times a winning is won. In this way, as a special effect (special effect 3) that is executed when the special effect condition is satisfied, the player is given the first privilege (notification of winning) based on the execution of the special effect. However, even after the first privilege is granted, the second privilege (notification of the number of winnings) that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege can be granted after the first privilege is granted. It is possible to make the player interested in the effect content of the special effect (special effect 3) executed for the player, and to enhance the effect of the effect.

Next, see FIG. 461. The contents of the disconnection setting table 222pb2 will be described. FIG. 461 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the detachment setting table 222pb2. This disengagement setting table 222pb2 is used when the disengagement final table 222ib2 is used when setting the final variation effect to be executed in response to the final variation (special figure 2 variation) in the time saving state (see C4364 in FIG. 465). ), Which is a data table used for setting the effect mode for the unset period (the period indicated by “◯” in FIG. 459) in which the effect mode is not set, and is the final variation effect update process 20 (FIG. 466). (Refer to C4566), it is referred to when it is determined that it is the end timing of the waiting period (0th period) (C4863: Yes in FIG. 466) (see C4865 in FIG. 466).

As shown in FIG. 461, the value of the hold ball number increase counter 223ia (the number of special figure 2 holds acquired during the waiting period) and the presence / absence of additional hits (acquired during the waiting period) are shown in the disconnection setting table 222pb2. Special figure 2 Whether or not there is a win based on the pre-reading result of hold), the setting status of the hold upper limit flag 223 ls, and the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf, it is set for each effect period of the final variation effect. The production mode is specified.

When the final variation effect executed in response to the final variation (variation in Special Figure 2) in the time-saving state is set using the final table 222ib2 for disconnection (see C4364 in FIG. 465), the effect mode has already been set. It is configured so that the effect mode is set by referring to the disengagement setting table 222pb2 only for the unset period without setting a new effect mode for the effect period.

Next, the contents specified in the disconnection setting table 222pb2 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 461. First, when the value of the hold ball number increase counter 223ia is "0", that is, when a new special figure 2 hold is not acquired during the waiting period, the presence / absence of an additional hit and the setting status of the hold upper limit flag 223 ls. Regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf, various effect modes are set such that "effect b" is set in the first period, "effect c" is set in the second period, and "effect d" is set in the third to fourth periods. Is stipulated. That is, since there is no change between the time when the final variation effect is started and the number of holdings in the special figure 2, the effect indicating the deviation is shown as the final result effect (effect d) without setting a dedicated effect mode. The result is set.

Next, when the value of the hold ball number increase counter 223ia is "1", the additional hit is "Yes", and the hold upper limit flag 223 ls is set to ON, that is, the special figure 2 at the start of the final variation effect. When the number of holds is 3 and the look-ahead results of the acquired special figure 2 hold (3 pieces) are all out of order, and the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold newly acquired during the waiting period is a hit. In the range where the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf is "0 to 169", various effects are set so that "effect c" is set in the first period and the second period, and "effect d" is set in the third to fourth periods. Aspects are defined. That is, since the hold upper limit flag 223 ls is set to on at the end of the waiting period, it is stipulated not to execute the acquisition effect (effect b) for causing the player to acquire a new special figure 2 hold. Has been done. With this configuration, a useless effect (acquisition effect that causes the player to perform a game in which the special figure 2 hold is acquired even though the number of special figure 2 hold has reached the upper limit) is provided to the player. It can be suppressed that it is done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust in the content of the effect to be executed and reducing the effect of the effect. Further, in the range where the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf is "170 to 198", various effect modes are defined so that "effect g" is set in the first period, the second period, and the third to fourth periods. ing.

When the value of the holding ball number increase counter 223ia is "1" and the additional hit is "none", the first is irrespective of the setting status of the holding upper limit flag 223ls and the range of the value of the acquired effect counter 223lf. Various production modes are defined so that "effect b" is set in the period, "effect c" is set in the second period, and "effect d" is set in the third to fourth periods. That is, one new special figure 2 hold is acquired at the time when the final variation effect is started, and if the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 hold is out of order, a dedicated effect mode is set. As the final result effect (effect d), an effect result indicating a deviation is set.

Next, when the value of the hold ball number increase counter 223ia is "2", the additional hit is "Yes", and the hold upper limit flag 223 ls is set to ON, that is, the special figure 2 at the start of the final variation effect. In a state where the number of holds is 2 and the look-ahead results of the acquired special figure 2 hold (2 pieces) are both out of order, at least as the look-ahead result of the two special figure 2 hold newly acquired during the waiting period. If the look-ahead result of any of the special figure 2 hold is a hit, "directing c" in the first period and the second period, and "directing" in the third to fourth periods, regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf. Various production modes are specified so as to set "d". That is, since the hold upper limit flag 223 ls is set to on at the end of the waiting period, it is stipulated not to execute the acquisition effect (effect b) for causing the player to acquire a new special figure 2 hold. Has been done.

With this configuration, a useless effect (acquisition effect that causes the player to perform a game in which the special figure 2 hold is acquired even though the number of special figure 2 hold has reached the upper limit) is provided to the player. It can be suppressed that it is done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust in the content of the effect to be executed and reducing the effect of the effect.

On the other hand, when the value of the hold ball number increase counter 223ia is "2", the additional hit is "none", and the hold upper limit flag 223 ls is set to ON, that is, the special figure 2 hold at the start of the final fluctuation effect. In a state where the number is 2 and the pre-reading results of the acquired special figure 2 hold (2 pieces) are both out of order, the look-ahead results of the two newly acquired special figure 2 hold are also out of order during the waiting period. In this case, various production modes are specified so that "effect c" is set in the first period and the second period, and "effect d" is set in the third to fourth periods, regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf. There is. That is, since the hold upper limit flag 223 ls is set to on at the end of the waiting period, it is stipulated not to execute the acquisition effect (effect b) for causing the player to acquire a new special figure 2 hold. Has been done.

Further, when the value of the hold ball number increase counter 223ia is "2", the additional hit is "none", and the hold upper limit flag 223 ls is set to off, that is, the special acquired during the waiting period of the final fluctuation effect. In the state where the look-ahead results of FIG. 2 hold (2 pieces) are both out of order, the look-ahead results of the two special figure 2 hold newly acquired during the waiting period are also out of order, and further, the current special figure 2 hold is out of order. If the number has not reached the upper limit number (4), regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf, "effect b" in the first period, "effect c" in the second period, and the third to fourth periods. Various production modes are specified so as to set "effect d". That is, since the hold upper limit flag 223 ls is set to off at the end of the waiting period, the acquisition effect for having the player newly acquire the special figure 2 hold using the first period (effect b). Is configured to run.

Next, when the value of the holding ball number increase counter 223ia is "3", the additional hit is "Yes", and the holding upper limit flag 223ls is set to ON, the value of the acquired effect counter 223lf is "0 to". In the range of "109", various production modes are defined so that "effect c" is set in the first period and the second period, and "effect d" is set in the third to fourth periods. That is, when the waiting period ends, the acquisition effect (effect b) is executed even though the hold upper limit flag 223 ls is set to ON. In this way, when the effect result indicating winning is displayed as the effect result of the final variation effect, the hold upper limit flag 223 ls is set to on, that is, a new special figure 2 hold is acquired. Even in a state where it cannot be performed, by intentionally configuring the acquisition effect to be executed, it is possible to make a difference between the actual number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 and the effect mode to be executed.

Further, in the twentieth embodiment, the above-mentioned effect (despite the hold upper limit flag 223 ls being set to on, the acquisition effect (acquisition effect) only when the effect result of the final variation effect is the effect result indicating winning. Since the effect b) is configured to be executed, the effect with a difference between the actual number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 and the mode of effect to be executed is executed. , It is possible to notify that the effect result of the final variation effect is the effect result indicating the winning. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to whether or not there is a difference between the actual game content and the performance content to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the value of the holding ball number increase counter 223ia is "3", the additional hit is "Yes", and the holding upper limit flag 223ls is set to ON, the value of the acquired effect counter 223lf is "110 to 198". In the range of "", various production modes are defined so that "effect c" is set in the first period and the second period, and "effect d" is set in the third to fourth periods. That is, since the hold upper limit flag 223 ls is set to on at the end of the waiting period, it is stipulated not to execute the acquisition effect (effect b) for causing the player to acquire a new special figure 2 hold. Has been done.

Next, when the value of the holding ball number increase counter 223ia is "3", the additional hit is "Yes", and the holding upper limit flag 223ls is set to off, regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223lf, Various production modes are defined so that "effect c" is set in the first period and the second period, and "effect d" is set in the third to fourth periods. That is, at the end of the waiting period, the acquisition effect (effect b) is not executed even though the hold upper limit flag 223 ls is set to off. In this way, when the effect result indicating winning is displayed as the effect result of the final variation effect, the hold upper limit flag 223 ls is set to off, that is, it is possible to acquire a new special figure 2 hold. Even if it is possible, by configuring the acquisition effect so as not to be intentionally executed, it is possible to make a difference between the actual number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 and the effect mode to be executed.

Even in this case as well, the effect of the final variation effect is the effect result of winning, because the effect is executed with a difference between the actual number of reserved balls and the effect mode to be executed. It is possible to notify that. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to whether or not there is a difference between the actual game content and the performance content to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When the value of the holding ball number increase counter 223ia is "3", the additional hit is "none", and the holding upper limit flag 223ls is set to ON, that is, the number of holdings in the special figure 2 at the start of the final variation effect is In 2, when the look-ahead results of the two special figure 2 hold (2 pieces) that have already been acquired are out of order, and the look-ahead results of the two newly acquired special figure 2 hold are also out of order during the waiting period. Regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf, various effect modes are defined so that "effect c" is set in the first period and the second period, and "effect d" is set in the third to fourth periods. That is, since the hold upper limit flag 223 ls is set to on at the end of the waiting period, it is stipulated not to execute the acquisition effect (effect b) for causing the player to acquire a new special figure 2 hold. Has been done.

Further, when the value of the hold ball number increase counter 223ia is "3", the additional hit is "none", and the hold upper limit flag 223 ls is set to off, that is, the special acquired during the waiting period of the final fluctuation effect. In the state where the look-ahead results of FIG. 2 hold (2 pieces) are both out of order, the look-ahead results of the two special figure 2 hold newly acquired during the waiting period are also out of order, and further, the current special figure 2 hold is out of order. If the number has not reached the upper limit number (4), regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf, "effect b" in the first period, "effect c" in the second period, and the third to fourth periods. Various production modes are specified so as to set "effect d". That is, since the hold upper limit flag 223 ls is set to off at the end of the waiting period, the acquisition effect for having the player newly acquire the special figure 2 hold using the first period (effect b). Is configured to run.

Finally, when the value of the hold ball number increase counter 223ia is "4", that is, the special figure 2 hold number at the time when the final fluctuation effect is executed is "0", and four special figures 2 are held during the waiting period. When a new hold is acquired, the value of the staging counter 223lf acquired with "Yes" as an additional hit is in the range of "0 to 99", and "1st period, 2nd period, 3rd to 4th period" Various production modes are defined so as to set "effect g", and various production modes are set in the range of "100 to 198" so that "effect h" is set in the first period, the second period, and the third to fourth periods. The production mode is specified. When the additional hit is "None", "Direction c" is set in the first period and the second period, and "Production d" is set in the third to fourth periods regardless of the acquired value of the effect counter 223 lf. Various production modes are defined as described above. That is, since the hold upper limit flag 223 ls is set to on at the end of the waiting period, it is stipulated not to execute the acquisition effect (effect b) for causing the player to acquire a new special figure 2 hold. Has been done.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 20th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 457 (b). The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 20th embodiment has a hold number increase counter 223pa, a variable period storage area 223pb, and the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 16th embodiment described above. It differs from the effect variable flag 223pc in that it is added, and is the same except for that. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 2 obtained by the hold number increase counter 223pa within a specific period (a waiting period set as a part of the effect period of the final variation effect executed in response to the final variation in the time saving state, and the first period). It is a counter for measuring the number of holds, and the value of the counter is incremented by 1 each time a new special figure 2 hold is acquired within a specific period. The hold number increase counter 223pa received the prize information command corresponding to the special figure 2 prize in the final prize processing (see C3461 in FIG. 464) executed by the prize information command process 20 (see C3622 in FIG. 463). (C5501: Yes), and when it is determined that the effect variable flag 223pc is set to ON (C5502: Yes), that is, the special acquired during the waiting period in order to set the effect mode of the final variable effect. FIG. 2 When it is necessary to count the number of holds, the counter value is incremented by 1 (see C5503 in FIG. 464).

Then, when it is determined in the final variation effect update process 20 (see C4566 in FIG. 466) that the waiting period has ended (C4863: Yes in FIG. 466), the effect mode corresponding to the counter value is the final effect variable setting table 222pb. (See C4865 in FIG. 466). Further, when it is determined that the first period has ended (C4866: Yes in the figure), the effect extension process is executed in which the variation period of the special figure 2 hold acquired during the final variation effect is set as the effect period of the final variation effect. Therefore, the counter value is referred to (C4868), and then the counter value is reset to the initial value (0).

In this way, by providing a configuration for counting the number of specific reserved memories (for example, special figure 2 reserved) acquired during the specific period (for example, during the waiting period), the specific reserved storage at the end of the specific period is provided. Since it is possible to set the effect mode after the specific period based on not only the number but also the specific number of reserved storages acquired during the specific period, it is possible to set a wide variety of effect modes. In addition, it is possible to provide the player with a new playability of acquiring a large amount of reserved memory within a predetermined period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the present embodiment, a dedicated counter (holding number increase counter 223pa) is configured to count the number of specific holding memories (for example, holding in special figure 2) acquired during the specific period (for example, during the waiting period). However, the method is not limited to this, and for example, a storage means for temporarily storing the reserved storage number at the start of a specific period is provided, and the reserved storage number at the end of the specific period is stored in the storage means. It may be configured to calculate the number of reserved storages acquired during a specific period by comparing with the number of reserved storages.

Further, in the present embodiment, a specific period (for example, a waiting period) for measuring the number of acquisitions of a specific reserved memory (for example, special figure 2 hold) is set within one special figure change period (for example, special figure 2 change). Since it is set to (within a period), the number of reserved memories does not decrease within a specific period, and the configuration is simply to add the number of acquired reserved memories. As a specific period for measuring the number of acquisitions, a period during which the number of acquisitions of a specific reserved memory can be reduced (for example, a period set across a plurality of fluctuations in Special Figure 2) may be set. In this case, as a configuration for counting the number of specific hold storage (for example, special figure 2 hold), a counter value is added by 1 each time a specific hold memory (for example, special figure 2 hold) is acquired, and a specific hold memory is added. It may be configured to subtract 1 from the counter value every time the hold storage decreases (for example, every time the special figure 2 fluctuation using the special figure 2 hold is executed). In addition, in this case, the number of specific reserved storages may be smaller at the end of the specific period than at the start of the specific period. As a configuration for counting the number, it is preferable to set a value larger than the upper limit number that can store a specific reserved memory as the initial value of the counter. With such a configuration, when the counter value is increased or decreased in correspondence with the increase or decrease of the specific reserved storage during the specific period, it is possible to surely prevent the counter value from becoming smaller than 0.

Further, as a specific period for measuring the acquisition number of the specific reserved memory, a period during which the acquisition number of the specific reserved memory can be reduced (for example, a period set across a plurality of special figure 2 fluctuations) is set. In the case of the above-mentioned configuration, the number of specific reserved memories newly acquired within a specific period is simply added, instead of counting the number of specific reserved memories actually increased within a specific period. The configuration may be used.

Further, in the twentieth embodiment, the effect mode after the elapse of the specific period is set based on the increase number of the specific reserved storage (holding in FIG. 2) within the predetermined specific period (within the waiting period). However, the specific period is not limited to this, depending on the game content (lottery result of each symbol, game state, etc.) and the operation content of the player's operation means (for example, frame button 22). It may be configured to be variable, for example, a plurality of non-consecutive periods may be set as a specific period, or the length of one specific period may be variable. In this case, by configuring the player so as not to notify the player of the timing at which the specific period is set, it is difficult for the player to understand at what timing the reserved value is counted. Therefore, it is possible to perform an unexpected effect on the player.

In addition, the specific period should not be set based on the condition that a predetermined deletion condition (for example, a condition that is satisfied when the player performs an operation indicating that the specific period is not set by using the operation means) is satisfied. It may be configured. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the effect in a manner suitable for each player.

The variation period storage area 223pb is a storage area for temporarily storing the effect mode of the final variation effect executed in the final variation in the time reduction state (time reduction final variation). In this variable period storage area 223pb, a waiting period (0th period), a 1st period, a 2nd period, and a 3rd period associated with the final variable period of the time saving state are set, and after the time saving state ends (normal state setting). The first special figure 2 change after the normal state is set, which corresponds to the special figure 2 change (the special figure 2 change based on the special figure 2 hold acquired during the time saving state) executed later). Period), 2 periods (2nd special figure 2 fluctuation period after the normal state is set), 3 periods (3rd special figure 2 fluctuation period after the normal state is set), 4 periods (normal) A storage area corresponding to each period is formed in order to store the effect mode set for each period of the fourth special figure 2 variable period after the state is set.

Then, the information indicating the effect mode of the final variation effect set in the time saving effect setting process 20 (see C4164 in FIG. 465) is stored in the corresponding storage area (see C4365 in FIG. 465), and the final variation effect update process is performed. (Refer to C4566 in FIG. 466), when it is determined to be the end timing of the waiting period (C4863: Yes in FIG. 466), when it is determined to be the set effect mode (C4865) or the end timing of the first period. (C4866: Yes in FIG. 466), the set effect mode is stored in the corresponding storage area (see C4869 in FIG. 466). Then, although not shown, when the final variation effect is completed, the information indicating the effect mode stored in each storage area is cleared.

In this way, when using a configuration in which the effect mode of the period effect executed using the predetermined period can be set at a plurality of timings (timing at which the period effect is started, predetermined timing during the execution of the period effect), the period effect is used. By providing a storage area for storing the set effect mode each time the effect mode is set, it is possible to set a later effect mode based on the content of the previously set effect mode. Become. Therefore, when the effect mode set at a plurality of timings is used to execute the effect effect for one period, it is possible to set the effect mode without a sense of discomfort.

The effect variable flag 223pc is a flag for indicating that there is a period (unset period) in which the effect mode is not set as the effect mode of the final variation effect executed in the final variation of the time reduction state (time reduction final variation). It is set to ON when it is determined that there is an unset period. Specifically, in the time saving effect setting process 20 (see C4164 in FIG. 465), the effect mode of the final variation effect is set (see C4362 and C4364 in FIG. 465), and the unset period in which the effect mode is not set. If it is determined that there is (C4366: Yes in FIG. 465), it is set to on (see C4637 in FIG. 465).

Then, in the final variation effect update process 20 (C4566 in FIG. 466), it is the timing when the waiting period ends (C4863: Yes in FIG. 466) and the timing when the first period ends (C4866: Yes in FIG. 466). That is, when it is determined that the timing is such that the effect mode of the final variation effect can be set, the setting status is determined (C4864, C4867 in FIG. 466), and it is determined that the setting is turned on. , A new effect mode is set for the unset period (C4864, C4867 in FIG. 466). Then, after setting the effect mode for the unset period, it is set to off (see C4871 in FIG. 466).

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the 20th embodiment>
Next, the contents of each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 462 to 466. In the present embodiment, the command determination process 20 (see FIG. 462) is executed instead of the command determination process 16 (see FIG. 406) for the 16th embodiment described above, and the winning information command process 16 (see FIG. 407). The point of executing the prize information command process 20 (see FIG. 463) instead of (see FIG. 464), the point of executing the final prize process (see FIG. 464), and the time saving effect setting process (see FIG. 418). The difference is that the effect setting process 20 (see FIG. 465) is executed and the final variation effect update process 20 (see FIG. 466) is executed instead of the final variation effect update process (see FIG. 423). Other than that, it is the same. The same control processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, regarding the points where the contents of the referenced data table have been changed and the various processing contents that are changed in response to the changes in the contents of the referenced data table, the numerical values have simply been changed, which is technically ideological. Are the same, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the command determination process 20 (C3163) will be described with reference to FIG. 462. FIG. 462 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 20 (C3163) executed in the 20th embodiment.

When the command determination process 20 (C3163) is executed, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 in the above-mentioned processing of C3201 (C3201: Yes), the winning information command processing 20 is executed. (C3262), and this process is terminated. A detailed description of the winning information command processing 20 (C3262) will be described later with reference to FIG. 463. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of C3201 that the winning information command has not been received (C3201: No), the same C3203 to C3209 as the command determination process 16 (see FIG. 406) of the 16th embodiment described above. After executing the process, it is determined whether or not the special 2 hold number (special figure 2 hold number) is the upper limit (C3261). Here, in the process of C3261, it is determined whether the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223 lc is "4" which is the upper limit value.

If it is determined that the special 2 hold number (special figure 2 hold number) is the upper limit in the process of C3261 (C3261: Yes), the hold upper limit flag 223 ls is set to ON (C3262), and then this process is terminated. If it is determined that the special 2 hold number (special figure 2 hold number) is not the upper limit (C3261: No), the process of C3622 is not executed and the present process is terminated.

Further, after executing the same processes of C3210 to C3217 as the command determination process 16 (see FIG. 406) of the 16th embodiment described above, this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the winning information command processing 20 (C3262) will be described with reference to FIG. 463. FIG. 463 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information command processing 20 (C3262) executed in the 20th embodiment. In the prize information command process 20 (C3262), the content of the process executed when it is determined that the time saving final fluctuation flag 223 lk is set to the above-mentioned prize information command process 16 (see FIG. 407). It is different in that it is changed.

When the winning information command processing 20 (C3262) is executed, the same processing of C3401 to C3402 as the winning information command processing 16 (see FIG. 407) of the 16th embodiment described above is executed, and then the processing of C3403 is executed. If it is determined that the time saving final fluctuation flag 223 lk is on in the processing of C3404 (C3404: Yes), the final winning processing is executed (C3461), and the process proceeds to the processing of C3406. The details of this final winning process (C3461) will be described later with reference to FIG. 464.

On the other hand, in the process of C3404, if it is determined that the time saving final fluctuation flag 223 lk is off (C3404: No), the process of C3461 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of C3406. After that, the processes of C3406 and C3407 are executed, and this process is terminated.

Here, the contents of the final winning process (C3461) will be described with reference to FIG. 464. FIG. 464 is a flowchart showing the contents of the final winning process (C3461) executed in the 20th embodiment. In this final winning process (C3461), a ball wins a prize in the second winning opening 640 while the final fluctuation in the time saving state (special figure 2 fluctuation) is being executed, and a new special drawing 2 hold (winning information) is held. The process for setting the effect mode when the winning information command indicating that the winning information has been received is received is executed.

When the final winning process (C3461) is executed, first, it is determined whether the winning information command received this time is a winning information command indicating that the ball has won a prize in the second winning opening 640 (whether there was a special figure 2 winning). (C5501), If it is determined that the winning information command indicating that the ball has won the second winning opening 640 has not been received (not the special figure 2 winning) (C5501: No), this process is terminated as it is. ..

On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning information command indicating that the ball has won the second winning opening 640 has been received (special figure 2 winning) (C5501: Yes), then the effect variable flag 223pc is turned on. (C5502). When it is determined that the effect variable flag 223pc is on (C5502: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the hold number increase counter 223pa (C5503), and the process proceeds to C5504. If it is determined that the effect variable flag 223pc is off (C5502: No), the processing of C5503 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of C5504.

In the process of C5504, the information of the variable period storage area 223pb is read out (C5504), and then it is determined whether or not the current acquisition effect is in progress (C5505). If it is determined that the current acquisition effect is in progress (C5505: Yes), a display command indicating the pending acquisition during the acquisition effect is set (C5506), and then this process is terminated. In the process of C5505, if it is determined that the current acquisition effect is not in progress (C5505: No), a display command indicating hold acquisition is set (C5507), and then this process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the final variation effect can be executed in response to the final variation in the time saving state (special figure 2 variation), and a new special figure 2 hold is held as a part of the final variation effect. It is configured to execute an acquisition effect (see FIG. 373 (b)) for the player to acquire. Then, when the timing when the new special figure 2 hold is acquired (the timing when the prize information command indicating the special figure 2 prize is received) is the execution of the acquisition effect, the dedicated effect is executed. .. With such a configuration, it is possible to have a relationship between the content of the effect being executed and the actual game situation, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect.

In this embodiment, it is determined that the special figure 2 hold is acquired based on the content of the effect being executed at the timing when the new special figure 2 hold is acquired (the timing when the prize information command indicating the special figure 2 prize is received). Although it is configured to have a different effect mode to be shown, other configurations may be used. ) And may be configured to set the effect mode. In this case, for example, a prize determination means indicating that a prize information command indicating a special figure 2 prize has been received, and a remaining time determination for determining the remaining time in a time-reduced state at the time when the prize information command indicating a special figure 2 prize is received. A means and a means are provided, and the remaining period of the time saving state at the time when it is determined that the prize information command indicating the special figure 2 prize is received (there was a special figure 2 prize) by the prize determination means, that is, the special figure 2 hold is set. When the remaining period that can be easily obtained is a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) or more, a display mode (for example, "plus 1") indicating that the number of special figure 2 holds has increased due to the special figure 2 winning. ) Is displayed, and if it is less than the predetermined period, in addition to the display mode indicating that the number of special figure 2 hold has increased due to the special figure 2 prize (for example, the comment of "plus 1"), special figure 2 hold It is preferable to display a display mode (for example, a comment of "barely safe") indicating that the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 has increased in a state where the remaining period during which the above can be easily obtained is small.

With this configuration, it is possible for the player to determine whether or not the timing of acquiring the new special figure 2 hold is a timing with a margin, so that it can be used as a reference for future games. Can be done. Further, in this case, it is preferable to configure the player so as not to notify the player of the remaining period in the time-saving state, that is, the remaining period in which the special figure 2 hold can be easily obtained. As a result, the player determines the remaining period of the time saving state based on the display mode displayed when the special figure 2 hold is acquired, so that the display displayed when the special figure 2 hold is acquired is obtained. The aspect can be watched. In addition, the display mode displayed when the special figure 2 hold is acquired may be configured to be different according to the number of the special figure 2 hold. For example, the number of the acquired special figure 2 hold may be predetermined. When a prize information command indicating a special figure 2 prize is received in a state of a number or less (for example, "2" or less), the remaining period in a time-saving state, that is, the remaining period in which the special figure 2 hold can be easily obtained is predetermined. If it is less than the period (for example, 3 seconds), in addition to the display mode (for example, the comment of "plus 1") indicating that the special figure 2 hold number has increased due to the special figure 2 prize, the special figure 2 hold It may be configured to display a display mode (for example, a comment of "may be severe") suggesting that it is difficult to limit the number of.

In addition, as a method of determining the remaining period of the time saving state, the period until the time saving end condition is satisfied (for example, the period until the final special figure change in the time saving state is completed) is set as the remaining period of the time saving state. Alternatively, the period until the end of the last game per game executed in the time-saving state may be set as the remaining period in the time-saving state.

That is, in the present embodiment, the time saving state ends when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special drawing 2) is 1 time and 5 times) during the time saving state. It is configured to do. Therefore, it is possible to calculate the remaining period until the end of the time saving state based on the number of fluctuations and the fluctuation time of the special symbol. In addition, in the state where the time saving state is set, the fluctuation time of 2 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and further, the ball is easily won in the second winning opening 640. It is structured so that it is easy to win. In addition, the normal symbol is configured so that the game mode is set according to the game state at the time when the lottery is executed and the game state at the time when the game per normal figure is executed. If the time saving state is set when the normal symbol lottery (normal symbol lottery) is executed, the normal symbol lottery and the normal symbol fluctuation time are set as the high probability state of the normal symbol, and the game per normal symbol is executed. If the time saving state is set when is executed, the game is configured to be executed as a high-probability state of a normal symbol. Therefore, even if a player wins a game by a lottery for a game that is executed during the time saving state, it is normal if the normal state is set at the time when the game per game based on the game is executed. The game is executed as a low-probability state of the symbol.

In the present embodiment configured in this way, depending on the fluctuation timing of the special symbol and the fluctuation timing of the normal symbol, it is before the final special symbol variation (special diagram 2 variation) executed during the time saving state is completed. In some cases, the state in which the ball is likely to win in the second winning opening 640 ends. In this case, if the period until the end of the last special figure change (special figure 2 change) executed during the time saving state is determined as the remaining period of the time saving state, the second prize is won within the remaining period. The mouth 640 includes a period in which the ball is not in a state in which it is easy to win a prize, which causes a problem that the player's willingness to play is reduced.

Therefore, when determining the remaining period of the time-saving state, the period until the state in which the ball is likely to win in the second winning opening 640 ends, that is, the period during which the game can be executed per normal figure during the time-saving state is determined. It is good to configure it like this. With this configuration, it is possible to accurately determine the period advantageous to the player (the period in which the state in which the ball is easily won in the second winning opening 640 is easily set) as the remaining period in the time saving state. Therefore, when performing an effect of notifying the remaining period of the time saving state, the accuracy of the notification content can be improved. Further, when determining the remaining period of the time saving state in this way, even after the time saving state is completed and the normal state is set, a period advantageous to the player (the ball is placed in the second winning opening 640). If the period in which it is easy to set a winning state) continues, it is preferable to configure it so that the period until the end of the period is determined as the remaining period in the time-saving state. That is, when the game per normal figure (game per game per long open of the normal figure) executed during the time saving state is executed across the time saving state and the normal state, the game per game (per game long open of the normal figure). It is preferable to configure so that the period until the end of the game) is determined as the remaining period in the time-saving state. As a result, it is possible to accurately determine the period advantageous to the player (the period in which the state in which the ball is likely to win in the second winning opening 640 is easily set), so that the effect of notifying the remaining period in the time saving state is produced. When it is executed, the accuracy of the notification content can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 465, the contents of the time saving effect setting process 20 (C4164) will be described. FIG. 465 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving effect setting process 20 (C4164) executed in the 20th embodiment. This time-saving effect setting process 20 (C4164) is an effect mode in which the special figure 2 variation is executed as the time-saving final variation with respect to the time-saving effect setting process (see FIG. 418) of the 16th embodiment described above. The difference is that the process for setting has been changed.

When the time saving effect setting process 20 (C4164) is executed, the same processes of C4301 and C4302 as those of the time saving effect setting process (see FIG. 418) of the 16th embodiment described above are executed, and then in the process of C4302, When it is determined that the current special figure variation is the time-saving final variation (C4302: Yes), it is determined whether the current special figure 2 variation (time-saving final variation) is a hit variation (C4361). When it is determined that the current special figure 2 variation (time saving final variation) is a hit variation (C4361: Yes), the effect mode is set with reference to the hit final table 222pa1 possessed by the final variation effect table 222pa (C4362). ), Move to the processing of C4365. Further, in the processing of C4301, when it is determined that the current special figure change is not the special figure 2 change (C4301: No), or in the processing of C4302, the current special figure change is not the final change in the time saving state. If it is determined (C4302: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the current special figure 2 fluctuation (time saving final fluctuation) is not a hit fluctuation (a deviation fluctuation) (C4361: No), the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223la (second). The winning information regarding the special symbol (special figure 2) is read out (C4363), the effect mode is set with reference to the final table 222ib2 for deviation of the final variation effect table 222pa (C4364), and the process proceeds to C4365.

In the processing of C4365, the effect content (effect mode) set by the above-mentioned processing of C4362 and the process of C4364 is stored in the corresponding variable period storage area 223pb (C4365), and then whether or not there is an effect unset period. (C4366). If it is determined that there is an effect unset period (C4366: Yes), the effect variable flag 223pc is set to ON (C4637), and then this process is terminated. If it is determined that there is no effect unset period (C4366: No), the process of C4637 is skipped and the present process is terminated as it is.

Here, the contents of the final variation staging update process 20 (C4566) will be described with reference to FIG. 466. FIG. 466 is a flowchart showing the contents of the final variation effect update process 20 (C4566) executed in the 20th embodiment. In the final variation effect update process 20 (C4566), the final variation executed in response to the final variation in the time-saving state updated by the process of C4501 of the effect update process 16 (see C3112 in FIG. 420) in the 16th embodiment. The elapsed period of the effect (elapsed period of the change in Special Figure 2) is determined, and the process based on the determination result is executed.

When the final variation effect update process 20 (C4566) is executed, first, the information of the variation period storage area 223pb is read (C4861), and the read information of the variation period storage area 223pb (the set effect period) and the special figure. The current staging status is extracted based on the value of the fluctuation time counter 223ln (value indicating the fluctuation time of fluctuation in Special Figure 2) (C4862), and then it is determined whether or not the current timing is the end timing of the waiting period. Then, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the waiting period (C4863: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the effect variable flag 223pc is on (C4864). When it is determined that the effect variable flag 223 pc is on (C4864: Yes), the effect mode is set using the final effect variable setting table corresponding to the result of the determination of whether or not the change is true (C4865), and then this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the effect variable flag 223pc is off (C4864: No), the processing of C4865 is skipped and the main processing is terminated as it is.

In the processing of C4863, if it is determined that the current time is not the end timing of the waiting period (C4863: No), then it is determined whether the present is the end timing of the first period (C4866), and the end timing of the first period is used. If it is determined to be present (C4866: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the effect variable flag 223pc is on (C4867). When it is determined that the effect variable flag 223pc is on (C4867: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the hold number increase counter 223pa is larger than 0 (C4868). When it is determined that the value of the hold number increase counter 223pa is larger than 0 (C4868: Yes), the effect period corresponding to the increase is stored in the variable period storage area 223pb (C4869), and the process proceeds to C4870. If it is determined that the value of the hold number increase counter 223pa is 0 in the processing of C4868 (C4868: No), the processing of C4869 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of C4870.

In the process of C4870, the effect mode of the final period of the effect is set (C4870), the effect variable flag 223pc is set to off (C4871), and the process proceeds to the process of C4872. Further, even when it is determined that the effect variable flag 223pc is off (C4867: No), the process proceeds to the process of C4872. In the process of C4872, the value of the hold number increase counter 223pa is cleared (C4872), and then the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of C4866, when it is determined that the present is not the end timing of the first period (C4866: No), then it is determined whether or not the present is the end timing of the second period (C4873). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the second period (C4873: Yes), it is determined whether a new special 2 hold has been acquired during the second period (C4874), and it is determined whether a new special 2 hold has been acquired. If this is the case (C4874: Yes), the re-read-ahead flag 223lr is set to ON (C4875), and this process ends.

Here, to explain the content of the process executed by C4874, a storage area corresponding to each symbol hold is formed in the winning information storage area 223la, and in the present embodiment, the first special symbol (special symbol) is formed. The number of the storage area for 1), the storage area for the second special symbol (special figure 2), and the storage area for the normal symbol (normal figure) correspond to the upper limit reserved storage number (4 pieces) of each symbol. It is formed. Then, each storage area has been referenced to indicate whether or not the look-ahead information included in the winning information command output from the main control device 110 and the look-ahead result have been referred to when various effects are set by the voice lamp control device 113. It is configured to store information.

That is, in the processing of C4874, whether or not a new special 2 holding is stored in the winning information storage area 223la in addition to the special figure 2 holding (special 2 holding) referred to by the processing of C4806 or C4814 is stored in each storage area. Pre-reading information is described and referenced in the storage areas (4 pieces) corresponding to the special figure 2 hold (special 2 hold) of the prize information storage area 223la, which is determined based on the presence or absence of the stored referenced information. When it is determined that there is a storage area in which information is not stored, it is determined that there is a new special 2 hold.

Then, by setting the re-read-ahead flag 223lr to ON in the processing of C4875, the special figure 2 is held again as a variation effect corresponding to the next special figure change (the first special figure change after the end of the time reduction). A variable effect based on the look-ahead result of is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of C4874, when it is determined that there is no new special 2 hold (C4874: No), all of the currently acquired special figure 2 hold is pre-read, and the second step is based on the pre-reading result. Since this is the case when the time reduction final variation effect is being executed during the period, a display effect result command indicating the result of the time reduction variation effect is set (C4876), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of C4873 that it is not the end timing of the second period (C4873: No), then a display command corresponding to other update contents is set (C4877), and this process is terminated. In the processing of C4877, the setting of the effect mode based on the elapsed period of the final variation effect, the update setting of the remaining period display mode for indicating the remaining period of the final variation, and the elapsed period display mode for indicating the elapsed period of the final variation. The update setting of the above, the setting of the operation display mode executed based on the operation of the operation means (frame button 22) by the player during the final change, and the like are executed.

As described above, in the 20th embodiment, the stage of the final variation effect is set at the time of setting the final variation effect (at the start of the time-saving final variation), and the final variation is set. The lottery result (look-ahead result) that is the target of the effect is limited to the lottery result of the change and the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold that has been acquired at the time of setting the final change effect (at the start of the time-saving final change). It differs in that it does.

With this configuration, it is possible to change the production mode of the final variation effect executed according to the acquisition status of the special figure 2 hold at the time when the time reduction final variation is executed, so that the time reduction final variation is executed. It is possible to give diversity to the game for acquiring the special figure 2 hold to be executed before (during the time saving state). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, as in the present embodiment, when the effect mode of the final variation effect executed according to the acquisition status of the special figure 2 hold at the time when the time reduction final variation is executed is changed, the time reduction final variation is executed. It is preferable to provide an effect mode that can be set only when the number of reserved special figures 2 acquired at a certain point in time is a specific number (for example, the upper limit number 3). With this configuration, the player can enthusiastically play the game so that the number of holdings in Special Figure 2 becomes a specific number (for example, the upper limit of 3) at the time when the time saving final fluctuation is executed. Can be done.

In the 20th embodiment, the final variation effect described above is started from the timing when the final variation in the time saving state is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the remaining period in the time saving state is a predetermined period. In the case of, for example, the final variation effect may be executed when the number of remaining time reductions is two. Further, in the twentieth embodiment, a configuration for executing the final variation effect using a period for one special figure change in the time saving state and a period for several special figure changes in the normal state will be described. As for the increase / decrease status of the special figure 2 hold number while the final fluctuation effect is being executed, the special figure 2 hold number increases until the special figure change in the time saving state ends, and the special figure 2 hold state is in the normal state. After the start of the figure fluctuation, only the pattern in which the number of holdings in Special Figure 2 decreases has been explained, but as other patterns, for example, the time is shortened during the execution of the game per long opening of the normal figure executed during the time saving state. After the state ends (the final change in the time saving state (special figure 2 change) stops) and the special figure change in the normal state (special figure 2 change) starts, the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. There are cases. In such a case, for example, at the timing of executing the final variation effect, the lottery status of the normal symbol (the winning / failing result of the running normal drawing lottery, the type of the winning game to be executed, and the reserved normal symbol) The figure information (win / fail result, winning game type) is configured to be discriminating, and based on the discriminating result, it is determined whether or not the ball can win the second winning opening 640 after the transition to the normal state, and the determination is made. It may be configured to change the effect mode of the final variation effect based on the result. For example, when it is determined that the ball can (easily) win the second winning opening 640 after the transition to the normal state. Uses a production mode in which the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery based on the winning of the second winning opening 640 after the transition to the normal state and the fluctuation period can be easily reflected in the final fluctuation production (still images that can easily extend the production period). It may be configured to set an effect mode (or an effect mode in which the effect result can be suddenly changed).

Further, when the final variation effect is executed using a plurality of special figure 2 fluctuation periods in the time saving state, the number of remaining time reductions when executing the final variation effect (the number of remaining special figure 2 fluctuations that can be executed during the time reduction state). ), And based on the discrimination result, the maximum number of special figure 2 fluctuations that can be executed during the final variation effect may be calculated, and the effect mode may be set based on the calculation result. .. In this case, the number of special figure 2 fluctuations actually executed during the final fluctuation effect may not be larger than the calculated maximum number, but may be less (for example, the game is stopped during the final variation effect). When the special figure 2 hold becomes 0). Therefore, as the staging mode based on the above-mentioned calculation result, it is preferable to set the staging mode in which the staging effect does not decrease even if the number of fluctuations in the special figure 2 suddenly decreases.

Further, if the special figure 1 change is executed while the final change effect is executed for the special figure 2 change, the final change effect is continued even for the change period of the special figure 1 change. It may be executed, or it may be configured to suspend the final variation effect and execute the effect corresponding to the special figure 1 variation during the interruption period.

<21st Embodiment>
Next, the 21st embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 467 and 468. In the 16th embodiment described above, as described above with reference to FIG. 361, the game (left-handed game) in the case where the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) is set as the game state. ) Is configured to enable the Fuzu lottery, and a suggestion effect (series effect) is executed to suggest that a specific hit (Fuzu long open hit) was won in the Fuzu lottery executed during the normal state. It was configured to do.

Then, a guidance display mode (right-handed display) for allowing the player to win a ball in the second winning opening 640 provided in the right game area according to the execution timing of the game per long opening of the normal figure is displayed (series). (Displayed during the execution of the production) was configured so that the player could easily win the ball in the second winning opening 640 during the game per long opening. Furthermore, while an inappropriate game (for example, a right-handed game during a normal state) is being performed by the player, if the player wins the normal long opening, the above-mentioned suggestion effect and guidance display mode are displayed. Instead, it was configured to make it difficult for the player to win the ball in the second winning opening 640 during the game per the long opening of the Fuzu.

On the other hand, in the 21st embodiment, the ball launched by the left-handed game (the ball flowing down the left side game area) is also on the right while the game is being performed per the long opening of the game by the lottery. The point that the electric accessory 1640a, which is opened during the game, and the second winning opening 1640 are arranged at positions where the ball fired by the hitting game (the ball flowing down the right game area) can also win. Is different.

Furthermore, the proportion of the balls launched by the left-handed game that reach the electric accessory 1640a and the proportion of the balls launched by the right-handed game that reach the electric accessory 1640a are different, and the right The hitting game is configured so that the ball reaches the electric accessory 1640a at a higher rate than the left-handing game.

In addition, in the 21st embodiment, in a part of the case where the Fuzu long opening hit is won during the normal state, the fact that the Fuzu long opening hit is won is not executed rather than the Fuzu long opening hit game is executed. Notification that can be notified to the player before (for example, during the change of the winning normal map or the period from the acquisition of the winning information of the winning normal symbol (normal map) to the execution of the change of the normal map). It is configured to perform the production.

With this configuration, the ease with which the ball can be won in the second winning opening 640 can be made different depending on whether or not the notification effect is executed when the winner is won in the long opening of the Fuzu. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the effect to be performed, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

Further, since the second winning opening 1640 is arranged at a position where the ball fired by the left-handed game can also win, the ball is won in the second winning opening 1640 even when the notification effect is not executed. It becomes possible. Therefore, even when the notification effect is not executed, it is possible to prevent the player from executing an extremely disadvantageous game.

<About the configuration of the pachinko machine of the 21st embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the 21st embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 467. FIG. 467 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the 21st embodiment. In the 21st embodiment, the positions of the configurations arranged in the right game area are different from those of the 16th embodiment described above. Specifically, the through gate 67, the electric accessory 1640a, and the first 2 The arrangement positions of the winning openings 1640 are different.

As shown in FIG. 467, in the game board 13 of the 21st embodiment, a second winning opening 1640 to which an electric accessory 1640a is attached is provided below the first winning opening 64, and a left-handed game is performed by a left-handed game. Both the ball that has flowed down the area and the ball that has flowed down the right-handed game area by the right-handed game are configured to reach the second winning opening 1640.

Specifically, a restricting member (nail) is formed in the area between the first winning opening 64 and the left end side (left side in FIG. 467 front view) of the electric accessory 1640a in the open state (shown in black in FIG. 467). Is planted so that it is difficult for the ball to pass through the area. As a result, among the balls that have flowed down the left game area, only the balls that are guided by the nails planted in the game board 13 and pass through the area above the first winning opening 64 reach the second winning opening 1640. It is composed. In the 21st embodiment, the game board 13 is configured so that the ratio of the balls that reach the second winning opening 1640 among the balls that flow down the left game area is about 10%.

On the other hand, the ball launched by the right-handed game and flowing down the right game area is a ball flow formed on the upper surfaces of the V winning door 650b located in the closed state and the winning door 65b located in the closed state. The game board 13 is configured so that most of them (about 100%) flow down the road and reach the second winning opening 1640.

With this configuration, during the game per long opening, that is, when the ball can win the second winning opening 1640, the ball flowing down the right game area is more than the ball flowing down the left game area. It is easier to make the second winning opening 1640 win a prize. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to select whether to perform a left-handed game or a right-handed game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As shown in FIG. 467, in the present embodiment, in the normal state, the winning opening in which the ball flowing down the right game area can be won (the winning opening in which the player can be given a privilege (prize ball)) is more than the winning opening. It is configured so that the number of winning openings (winning openings that can give a privilege (prize ball, lottery) to a player) that can be won by a ball flowing down the left game area is larger. Specifically, the ball flowing down the right game area can win (pass) through the through gate 67 or the second winning opening 1640, while the ball flowing down the left game area can win (pass) through the gate 67. , The first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 1640, and the general winning opening 63 are configured to be able to win (pass).

With this configuration, in a right-handed game in which the ball is fired toward the right game area in the normal state except for the period when the ball can win in the second winning opening 1640 (the game period per the long opening of the normal figure). However, the left-handed game in which the ball is fired toward the left game area is a more advantageous game method for the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from continuously performing the right-handed game and to perform the left-handed game in the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to provide the fun of predicting when to perform the right-handed game during the normal state.

Further, in the 21st embodiment, the time required for the ball launched by the left-handed game to reach the second winning opening 1640 (left-handed arrival time) is the time required for the ball launched by the right-handed game to win the second prize. It is configured to be longer than the time required to reach the mouth 1640 (right-handed arrival time). Specifically, the left-handed arrival time is about 4 seconds, while the right-handed arrival time is about 3 seconds.

With this configuration, the ball fired by the left-handed game and the ball fired by the right-handed game executed after the left-handed game (for example, one second after the previously executed left-handed game). It is possible to reach the second winning opening 1640 at the same timing as the ball fired by the executed right-handed game).

Therefore, when the game per Fuzu long open is executed, the ball wins the second winning opening 1640 during the game per Fuzu long open depending on the timing of switching the game method from the left-handed game to the right-handed game. Since the ease of playing can be different, the player can be enthusiastically played.

Further, although detailed description is omitted, in the 21st embodiment, the winning game period of the game per long opening of the normal figure is 3 seconds (opening period 1 second, closing period 1.5) as in the 16th embodiment described above. Seconds, opening period 0.5 seconds). That is, if the right-handed game is executed after the normal game is executed, it is difficult for the ball fired by the right-handed game to win the second winning opening 1640, that is, the second winning opening 1640. It is configured so that the game may have ended at the time when the ball reaches the 1640.

As a result, the ball is not fired until the game per Fuzu long opening is executed, and a privilege (second prize opening) is given to the player who plays the ball right after the game per Fuzu long opening is started. Since it is possible to make it difficult to give the privilege (prize ball, special figure 2 lottery) given by winning the ball to 1640, the player can continuously shoot the ball, and the game can be played. Operation can be improved.

As described above, in the 21st embodiment, even if the winning game period of the Fuzu long open per game is set to 3 seconds and the right-handed game is executed after the Fuzu long open per game is started, the right-handed game is executed. It is configured so that it is difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 1640, but it is not limited to this, and the winning game period of the game per long opening of the normal figure is set to the right-handed arrival time (ball fired by the right-handed game). May be configured to be longer than the time required to reach the second winning opening 1640 (for example, 5 seconds (opening period 1 second, closing period 1 second, opening period 3 seconds)). As a result, it is possible for the player to play the game during the game per the long opening of the normal figure with peace of mind.

<Regarding the content of the production in the 21st embodiment>
Next, the content of the characteristic effect executed in the 21st embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 468. In the 21st embodiment using the configuration of the game board 13 described with reference to FIG. 467, it is easy to make the ball win the second winning opening 1640 while the game is being executed per the long opening of the normal figure. Therefore, a guidance notification (for example, right-handed notification) for guiding the game method to the player can be executed, and the player can easily identify the game method as the notification mode of the guidance notification. A first guidance notification mode and a second guidance notification mode in which it is more difficult for the player to identify the game method than the first guidance notification mode can be set.

With this configuration, depending on whether the executed guidance notification mode is the first guidance notification mode or the second guidance notification mode, the ball is placed in the second winning opening during the game per long opening. It is possible to set a state in which it is easy to win a prize in 1640 and a state in which it is difficult to win a prize.

The first guidance notification mode is a notification mode set as a part of the special map fluctuation effect executed in response to the special map fluctuation, and is in the normal map fluctuation that is won for the normal map long opening. It is set when the special figure fluctuation is executed in a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation time of 90 seconds or more is set), and is set on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. When the variation effect corresponding to the specific variation pattern described above is executed, the player can use a part of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the small display area Dm4 of the main display area Dm). A guidance display mode for guiding the game method (for example, a “right-handed” comment) is displayed (see FIG. 366 (b)).

Further, in the 21st embodiment, the normal map fluctuation ends before the game per normal map long opening is executed (for example, during the normal map fluctuation period in which the normal map long opening is won. During the period when the symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), or after receiving the winning information command to win the winning information command for the normal symbol long opening, until the game is executed. (During the period of) The first guidance notification mode can be displayed. With this configuration, even if the game is executed according to the display content (for example, "right-handed") of the first guidance notification mode after recognizing that the first guidance notification mode is displayed. It is possible to easily reach the second winning opening 1640, which is in an open state in which the ball is easily won by the game per long opening.

On the other hand, the second guidance notification mode is always displayed when the game per long opening of the normal figure is executed, and is displayed in a display mode that is more difficult for the player to identify than the first guidance notification mode described above. It is a thing. Specifically, a guidance display mode (for example, "right-handed") for guiding the game method to the end of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, which is smaller than the first guidance notification mode displayed in the small display area Dm4. Icon) is displayed.

As described above, in the 21st embodiment, the game board 13 is formed so that the period required for the ball launched by the right-handed game to reach the second winning opening 1640 is about 3 seconds. If a game method (for example, a right-handed game) is performed according to the content of the notification after recognizing the content of the notification in the second guidance notification mode, depending on the flow condition of the ball, the ball may be thrown during the game during the long opening of the normal figure. 2 A state occurs in which the winning opening 1640 cannot be reached.

Therefore, it is possible to have the player enthusiastically play the game in order to win the prize in the long opening of the normal figure in a state where the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is satisfied. In the 21st embodiment, when the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is satisfied and the winning is won, the game is executed based on the winning. The first guidance notification mode is displayed 3 seconds before, and the second guidance notification mode is displayed when the game per long opening of the normal figure is executed. With this configuration, even if the first guidance notification mode is displayed before the game for the long opening of the normal figure is actually executed, the game for the long opening of the normal figure is being executed. It is possible to notify the player in the second guidance notification mode.

In the 21st embodiment, it is set as the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode that the special symbol variation is executed in the variation pattern in which the variation time of 90 seconds or more is set. Without limitation, for example, it may be set as a notification condition that a predetermined operation has been performed on an operation means (for example, a frame button 22) that can be operated by a player, or a transition status of a game state, Specifically, it may be set as a notification condition that the time saving state has ended and the state has shifted to the normal state.

In addition, a flag indicating that the notification condition is satisfied (notification condition establishment flag) is provided, the notification condition establishment flag is set to on when the notification condition is satisfied, and the notification condition establishment flag is set to on during the period. Is configured to be able to display the first guidance notification mode and the second guidance notification mode described above, and is configured to display only the second guidance notification mode when the notification condition establishment flag is set to off. Is also good. In this case, it is preferable to set the notification end condition for setting the notification condition establishment flag set to on to off, and set the notification condition establishment flag to off when the notification end condition is satisfied. ..

Specifically, a predetermined period (the number of times the special figure changes reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, reaches 10 times, or the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes))) after the notification condition establishment flag is set to ON. It may be set so that the notification end condition is satisfied when the notification has elapsed, or the lottery is executed when a predetermined execution opportunity (for example, execution of a special figure lottery, winning of a ball to each winning opening) is satisfied. May be configured so that the notification end condition is satisfied when the predetermined lottery result is obtained.

Furthermore, a plurality of types (for example, A per Fuzu long and B per Fuzu long) are provided for each Fuzu long opening, and notification conditions and notification end conditions are set according to the type of winning Fuzu long opening. By making them different, it may be possible to set a normal map long open hit where the first guidance notification mode is easy to display and a normal map long open hit where it is difficult to display.

Further, the notification condition may be changed based on the game situation of the player. For example, the elapsed period (number of special figure fluctuations, elapsed time) from the previous big hit game (small hit game) satisfies the predetermined condition. In the case (for example, when the number of fluctuations in the special figure reaches the number corresponding to the reciprocal of the jackpot probability), the first guidance notification mode may be displayed without fail when winning the long opening of the normal figure. ..

In addition, a predetermined period after the player shifts from an inappropriate game (for example, a right-handed game performed when a normal state is set (a game state in which a right-handed game is performed (time saving state)) to a normal state. (Excluding))) is being performed, a warning display for modifying the game method to the player (for example, left-handed in the small display area Dm4 of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81). If it is determined that the inappropriate game is being continued even after the comment "Please return" is displayed), the notification condition may not be satisfied.

The technique for displaying the first guidance notification mode and the second guidance notification mode described above is not limited to the 21st embodiment, and may be applied to each of the above-described embodiments, for example. As in the 16th embodiment described above, it may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 in which the game board 13 is formed so that the ball cannot be won in the second winning opening 640 unless the right-handed game is executed. .. In this case, the privilege given to the player differs greatly depending on whether or not the first guidance notification mode is displayed. Therefore, the game for satisfying the notification condition is enthusiastically performed for the player. Can be made.

Further, a notification means for notifying the player of the game method for establishing the notification condition may be provided, for example, in order to establish the notification condition in the sub-display area Ds of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is good to configure it to display the necessary necessary information (for example, give a super reach). Further, it is preferable to share the presence / absence of the display of the necessary information as the suggestion information for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol. With this configuration, when the game according to the display content displayed as necessary information is executed, the notification condition for displaying the first guidance notification mode is satisfied, or the lottery result of the special symbol is determined. Since it is possible to inform the player whether or not a predetermined lottery result (for example, a lottery result indicating a big hit) has been obtained in an incomprehensible manner, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, a notification means capable of notifying the player that the first guidance notification mode can be notified (a state in which the notification condition is satisfied) may be provided. As a result, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Further, in the 21st embodiment, as the guidance notification mode suggesting that the game is executed per the long opening of the normal figure, the player determines the notification content from the first guidance notification mode and the first guidance notification mode. The second guidance notification mode, which is difficult to perform, is configured to be configurable, but in a state where the first guidance notification mode can be notified, a special operation to a further special execution condition (for example, an operation means (frame button 22)) is performed. When the condition) that is satisfied when the above is satisfied, a special guidance notification mode that is more advantageous to the player than the first guidance notification mode may be set.

Here, the special guidance notification mode is a guidance notification mode that notifies the player of the timing of executing a game method (for example, a right-handed game) according to the notification content, and is guided by the guidance notification mode. By executing the game method according to the content of the notification at the same timing, it is possible to make the player play a game in which an advantageous privilege is easily given. As described above, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the 21st embodiment is configured so that both the ball fired by the left-handed game and the ball fired by the right-handed game can reach the second winning opening 1640. It takes about 4 seconds for the ball launched by the left-handed game to reach the second winning opening 1640, and the period required for the ball launched by the right-handed game to reach the second winning opening 1640. Is configured to be about 3 seconds. Then, by operating the operation handle 51, 100 balls can be fired per minute.

Therefore, by changing the game method from the left-handed game to the right-handed game according to the execution timing of the game per long open, the ball fired by the left-handed game and the ball fired by the right-handed game. Is configured so that the second winning opening 640 can be reached at substantially the same timing. The above-mentioned special guidance notification mode is based on the timing at which the game is executed per the long opening of the normal figure, from the game method currently being executed to the player (for example, a left-handed game) to the game method according to the notification content (for example). , Right-handed game) and the timing at which multiple balls can reach the second winning opening 640 at the same time as the ball launch timing of the running game method (for example, left-handed game). The notification mode for notifying the user is set.

With such a configuration, the player will enthusiastically play the game so that a more advantageous guidance / notification mode is displayed, so that the interest of the game can be improved. In the above-mentioned example, when the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is satisfied, the above-mentioned special guidance notification mode can be set, but the first guidance notification mode is not limited to this. Even when the notification condition of is not satisfied, it may be configured so that a special execution condition for setting the special guidance notification mode can be satisfied, and the special execution condition is the first guidance notification. It may be configured so that the notification condition of the mode is satisfied more easily than the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is not satisfied.

In addition, a plurality of conditions are set as notification conditions (execution conditions) for setting various guidance notification modes, and when a predetermined number (for example, two) of the conditions are satisfied, the corresponding guidance notification mode is provided. May be configured to set. Further, the ease of establishing the notification condition (execution condition) for setting various guidance notification modes based on the operation result for the operation means (frame button 22) that can be operated by the player may be different. Each time a person performs a specific operation on the operation means, each notification condition (execution condition) is variably set so that the notification condition (execution condition) for setting various guidance notification modes can be easily established. It may be configured as. As a result, the motivation of the player to participate in the game can be increased, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

As described above, in the 18th embodiment, the game per game is executed, that is, the game per game (game per long opening of the game) that allows a ball to be won in the second winning opening 1640. It is configured to execute a guidance notification (for example, right-handed notification) for notifying the player during the execution of the normal map fluctuation, which is the result of the lottery to be executed, and the game per normal map is started. At the time before (before the fluctuation of the normal map is stopped and displayed), the game method executed by the player is configured to be changed from the left-handed game to the right-handed game, and the game per normal figure is started. The game ball fired by the right-handed game before the game is configured to win a prize in the second winning opening 1640 during the game per opening of the Fuzu long, but it is not limited to this, for example, the Fuzu long. A predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds) is set as the opening period of the open game, and the above-mentioned guidance notification (for example, right-handed notification) is applied to the opening period of the game per long open game (after the game per game is started). , The period until the electric accessory 1640a is opened) may be configured to be executed.

With this configuration, the guidance notification (right-handed notification) can be executed after the winning normal map fluctuation is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), so that the guidance notification (right-handed notification) is executed. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game is not executed per normal figure. In this case as well, as in the 21st embodiment, it is determined whether the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is satisfied, and the first guidance notification mode is set only when it is determined that the notification condition is satisfied. It is preferable to configure it to execute guidance notification. In addition, when it is determined that the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is not satisfied, the effect for showing the lottery result of the normal map lottery is performed by using the normal map fluctuation period and the opening period of the game per normal map. Is executed, and as a result of the effect, a display mode indicating that the player has won the game may be displayed at the end timing of the opening period of the game per game (opening operation timing of the electric accessory 640a).

As a result, when the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is not satisfied, it is notified that the electric accessory 640a has been won at the timing when the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed as a game per normal figure. Therefore, even if the player who has identified that he / she has won the prize by the notification plays the right-handed game, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball fired by the right-handed game to win the second winning opening 1640. In the above-mentioned example, when it is determined that the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is not satisfied, the player wins the game at the timing when the opening operation of the electric accessory 1640a is executed as a game per game. An example of notifying this is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the opening period of the game per normal figure, when the remaining period of the opening period is less than a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), the normal figure is used. It may be configured to notify that the winner has been won. In other words, even if a player who recognizes that he / she has won a hit in a normal figure plays a right-handed game, it is difficult to win a ball in the second winning opening 1640 during the game in a normal figure, for example, due to a right-handed game. Rather than the period required for the fired ball to reach the 2nd winning opening 1640, the game per normal drawing ends after notifying that the ball has won the 2nd winning opening 1640 (the ball can be won in the 2nd winning opening 1640). It is advisable to configure it so that the period until the end of the period) is shortened.

Further, based on the fact that the variation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed, if the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is satisfied, until the game per normal figure is executed. In the fluctuation effect corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation in the period, the effect suggesting that the player wins the game is executed, and the effect in which the first guidance notification mode is set is executed during the opening period of the game per game. By fusing the staging mode of the fluctuation effect of the special figure fluctuation and the staging mode of the opening effect of the game per normal figure, the player is notified of the timing to perform the right-handed game. It may be configured as follows.

In addition, the first notification for showing the lottery result of the special map lottery is executed by the special map effect executed based on the special map fluctuation, and the normal map lottery is executed by the normal map effect executed based on the normal map variation. By executing the second notification for showing the lottery result, and further executing the first notification and the second notification in a related manner (continuously or duplicately), the general figure is used. The third notification for indicating the right-handed timing at which the right-handed game is executed to the player may be executed for the hit game.

In addition, the length of the set opening period is different depending on the type of the game per game to be executed, and the game per game in which a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) or more is set as the opening period. , The ease of winning the ball to the second winning opening 640 during the game per game is different from that of the game per game in which a period less than a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) is set as the opening period. Alternatively, when the type of the set guidance notification mode (first guidance notification mode) and the type of the game per game to be executed satisfy a predetermined combination condition, the combination condition is not satisfied. , The guidance notification for facilitating the winning of the ball in the second winning opening 640 may be executed during the game per game. As a result, different benefits for the player (to the second winning opening 640) depending on the type of the game per game to be executed, the type of the set guidance notification mode, and whether or not the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is satisfied. Ease of winning a ball) can be given, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the 17th embodiment, the method of setting the guidance notification mode for facilitating the winning of the ball to the second winning opening 640 during the game per game has been described, but a specific game (for example, the game per game) From a game in which a ball is launched with a single firing intensity (for example, a left-handed game) to a game in which a ball is launched with a predetermined firing intensity different from the one firing intensity (for example, right-handed). Anything that makes it easier to win a ball to a specific winning opening (for example, the second winning opening 640) by changing it to a game), for example, a small hit by a special drawing lottery executed during a left-handed game. As a small hit game executed when a winner is won, a winning opening (for example, a V winning opening) that is opened during the small hit game at a position where a ball fired by a right-handed game can win a prize (for example, the right game area). If the configuration is provided with 650a), the guidance notification mode of the same idea as that of the present embodiment may be set by using the special figure fluctuation period and the opening period of the small hit game.

<About the 22nd embodiment>
Next, the 22nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 469 and 470. FIG. 469 is a front view schematically showing the board surface 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the 22nd embodiment. The board surface 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is different from the board surface 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the 18th embodiment described above in that the configuration of the right gaming area is changed. Since the other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 469, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, the flow velocity of the sphere is reduced in the flow path of the first flow path 701 (the time required for the sphere to pass through the first flow path 701 is delayed). ), And 701z are arranged so that the time required for the ball to pass through the first flow path 701 (ball passing time) is about 4 seconds. An operation gate 670 is provided at the lower end of the flow of the first flow path 701.

Here, the operating gate 670 will be described. In the present embodiment, a start gate 720a composed of a photo sensor capable of detecting the passage of a sphere is arranged. In each of the above-described embodiments, when a jackpot is won by lottery of a special symbol, the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in a display mode indicating the jackpot winning after a special symbol variation (special symbol variation) for a predetermined time. Then, the jackpot game is configured to be executed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the jackpot game is executed when it is determined that the ball has passed the actuating gate 670 after the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in the display mode indicating the jackpot winning. It is configured to be. That is, the actuating gate 670 is used as an execution means for executing the jackpot game when the jackpot execution condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the jackpot winning).

Further, the present embodiment is different from the above-mentioned 18th embodiment in that the arrangement positions of the electric accessory 640a and the V winning device 650 are changed. Further, the difference is that the configuration of the second winning opening 640 is changed to a gate shape through which a ball can pass. Since the other configurations of the game board 13 are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the variation time of the selected special symbol and the variation time of the normal symbol are different from those of the pachinko machine of the 18th embodiment described above. Specifically, as a variation pattern that can be selected when a big hit is won in the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery in a normal state, or when a small hit is won, a special special figure with a fluctuation time of 50 seconds. As a variation pattern that can be selected when one variation pattern is selectable and a small hit is won in the second special symbol (special figure 2) lottery in the normal state, the special special figure 2 variation pattern with a variation time of 1 second is used. It can be selected, and a special normal map fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 50 seconds can be selected as a normal map fluctuation pattern that can be selected when a normal symbol is won for a long opening.

Then, as the end condition of the small hit game, the first end condition that is established when the number of winning balls reaches one, and the period in which the V winning opening 650a is open in the small hit game is 1.5 seconds. The second termination condition, which is satisfied when the above is reached, is stipulated.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment configured in this way, when the special figure fluctuation in which the special special figure 1 fluctuation pattern is set is stopped and displayed, or when the special figure fluctuation pattern is set in the pachinko machine 10 is displayed. When the stop display is displayed, it is configured to execute a guidance notification (see FIG. 366 (b)) for causing the player to perform a right-handed game as a game method.

Here, when the executed guidance notification (right-handed notification) is based on the jackpot winning, the ball launched by the right-handed game flows down the first flow path 701 and passes through the operating gate 670, thereby causing a jackpot. The game is started. As described above, since it takes about 5 seconds for the ball launched by the right-handed game to reach the operating gate 670, the jackpot game is started about 5 seconds after the right-handed game is performed. become.

Further, when the executed guidance notification (right-handed notification) is based on the small hit winning, the ball launched by the right-handed game flows down the second flow path 702 and wins the V winning opening 650a. The jackpot game is started. As described above, it takes about 4 seconds for the ball launched by the right-handed game to reach the V winning opening 650a, and the small hit game ends when one ball wins during the small hit game. Moreover, when a ball wins in the V winning opening 650a, the winning ball is configured to always pass through the V gate (V region), so that about 5 seconds after the right-handed game is performed. The jackpot game will be started.

Further, when the executed guidance notification (right-handed notification) is based on the winning of the normal drawing, the ball launched by the right-handed game flows into the second flow path 702 and passes through the second winning opening 640. If the special figure 2 lottery executed based on the passage is a small hit, the small hit game is executed after a variation time of 1 second. Since the second flow path 702 is formed so that the time for the ball passing through the second winning opening 640 to reach the V winning opening 650a is about 2 seconds, a small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery. If so, the ball that has passed through the second winning opening 640 will win the V winning opening 650a. Therefore, the big hit game is started about 5 seconds after the right-handed game is performed.

That is, in the present embodiment, the same fluctuation time is set for the case where the big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol) in the normal state and the case where the small hit is won, and the fluctuation time has elapsed. When a guidance notification (right-handed notification) for changing the game method is executed at the timing, the player can perform a right-handed game based on the guidance notification, so that the jackpot game can be executed at the same timing. It is configured in.

By configuring in this way, it is difficult for the player to understand whether the big hit game is executed based on the big hit winning or the small hit winning. can. Further, as in the above-described embodiment, the big hit game executed when the big hit winning of the special symbol is won and the big hit game (V big hit game) executed via the small hit winning are performed by the player. If the size of the privilege (the number of prize balls during the big hit game, the advantageous game state (time saving state) set after the big hit is over) is different, what triggered the big hit game to be executed? By making it difficult to understand, it is possible to play the game while having expectations for the game state set during the big hit game or after the big hit game is completed.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, even when a specific hit (a long open hit of a normal figure) is won in a lottery of a normal symbol, a big hit game is started after the guidance notification (right-handed notification) is executed. The period until the special symbol is won is the same as when the big hit or the small hit is won. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to understand the execution opportunity of the jackpot game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result (special figure lottery result, normal figure lottery result) in which the jackpot game can be executed is obtained, the same fluctuation time (50 seconds) is selected. Therefore, it is possible to set a special variation effect using the same effect mode as the effect using the variation time. This makes it difficult for the player to understand whether the special variation effect being executed is a special variation effect based on the special map variation or a special variation effect based on the normal map variation even while the special variation effect is being executed. be able to.

In the above-mentioned example, the case where the special variation effect is set for the special variation pattern in which the variation time of 50 seconds is set has been described, but the variation time is not limited to this, for example, the variation time of 50 seconds or more. Of the variation effects corresponding to the set variation patterns, the above-mentioned special variation effect may be executed when the remaining variation time of the variation time is 50 seconds. Furthermore, in some cases where the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a special out-of-order variation pattern with a variation time of 50 seconds can be set, and as a result of the special variation effect, the guidance of the right-handed game after the variation time elapses. An effect pattern (failure effect) in which notification is not executed may be configured to be executable. With this configuration, even when the special variation effect is executed, it is possible to provide a pattern (gase pattern) in which the right-handed game is not guided, so that the player pays attention to the content of the special variation effect. be able to.

In addition, as described above in each embodiment, a specific hit (a long open hit in a normal figure) is won by a lottery of a normal symbol, a guidance notification for guiding a right-handed game is executed, and a second prize is won by the right-handed game. In the case of winning (passing) the mouth 640, if the special figure 1 change is being executed, the special figure 2 change is not immediately executed, that is, the special figure 1 change is completed until the execution is completed. 2 The waiting period during which the fluctuation is not executed will be set. In this case, it is preferable to execute the failure effect as a failure pattern in which the jackpot game is not executed even though the guidance notification is executed. In addition, when the ball is won (passed) in the second winning opening 640 by a right-handed game and the special figure 2 lottery is executed immediately, the above-mentioned failure effect is also obtained even if the result of the special figure 2 lottery is out of order. It is good to configure it to execute.

With this configuration, it is possible to set the same production mode when the special figure 2 lottery is won out of the game and when the waiting period for the special figure 2 lottery is set. If the waiting period is within a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) and the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery executed after the waiting period elapses is a small hit winning, the small winning is won from the above-mentioned failure effect. It is preferable to configure so that the effect (revival effect) of switching to the effect mode indicating that the effect has been performed is executed. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect that can make the player have expectations until the end.

The waiting period for the special figure 2 lottery may be calculated and predicted using various techniques used in each of the above-described embodiments, and various techniques used in each embodiment may be appropriately combined. Further, in the case of performing a right-handed game based on the winning of a regular figure, or in the case of performing a small hit game based on a small hit winning, the ball is a specific winning opening as in each of the above-described embodiments. (2nd winning opening 640, V winning opening 650a) may not be won (passed). Also in this case, the effect mode described in the above-described 16th embodiment (see, for example, FIG. 370 (b)) may be displayed. Further, even when a big hit is won in the special drawing lottery, a predetermined timing, for example, a timing at which a ball launched by a right-handed game can pass near the second winning opening 640 (after the guidance notification mode is displayed). It may be configured to execute a pseudo failure effect at a timing (about 1 second later) or at a timing when the ball can reach the V winning opening 650a (about 4 seconds after the guidance notification mode is displayed).

In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 capable of executing the jackpot game by a plurality of triggers notifies the player that the condition for executing the jackpot game is satisfied (“right-handed notification” in the present embodiment). By making the period from that time until the jackpot game is actually executed the same regardless of the trigger until the jackpot game is executed, the player is informed in advance that the jackpot game will be executed. Since it is configured to make it difficult to understand at which moment the jackpot game is executed while notifying, which game mode the jackpot game is actually executed or the game state after the jackpot game is completed. It is possible to provide the enjoyment of letting the player predict which game state is set.

The notification mode for notifying that the condition for executing the jackpot game is satisfied is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, and for example, an effect mode of a variation effect executed in response to each symbol variation can be used. It may be set to an effect mode indicating that the conditions for executing the jackpot game are satisfied, and the period from the execution of the notification based on the notification mode to the actual execution of the jackpot game should be unified. If it is possible, the notification timing and notification mode may be appropriately set.

Further, when the opportunity to execute the big hit game through the small hit game is used, it is determined in advance after the small hit game is started regardless of the timing of the ball winning in the V winning opening 650a during the small hit game. It is advisable to configure the jackpot game to be executed after a certain amount of time has passed. As a result, it is possible to further unify the period from the execution of the notification based on the notification mode to the actual execution of the jackpot game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 using the configuration in which the type (big hit type) of the big hit game to be executed later is set when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) during the small hit game, the pachinko machine 10 is in the small hit game. A plurality of specific areas (V gates) are provided in the V winning opening 650a where balls can win, and the balls winning in the V winning opening 650a are distributed to any of the plurality of specific areas (V gates) on the upstream side thereof. By providing a distribution movable member and configuring the distribution movable member to move according to the elapsed time from the start of the small hit game, the swing in the V winning opening 650a after the small hit game is started. The sphere is configured to pass through a specific region (V gate) that differs depending on the time until the sphere reaches the movable member. Then, by configuring so that the jackpot type in which the jackpot game in which a different opening period is set when passing through each specific region (V gate) is set is set, each specific region (V gate) is sphered. Even when the configuration in which the jackpot game is executed based on the passage of the above is used, the timing at which the specific winning opening 65 is opened may be unified in the jackpot game.

<Examples of staging correspondence at the time of power failure of each embodiment>
Next, among the various effects executed in each of the above-described embodiments, a plurality of periods in which different game controls (special figure variable game, normal figure variable game, small hit game, big hit game) are performed by the main control device 110. The control processing content of the voice lamp control device 113 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off during the execution of the period effect (series effect, final variation effect) executed straddling the above description will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of each embodiment, the control processing content (various information stored in the RAM 203) of the main control device 110 is the same even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. While the information can be temporarily retained (backed up), the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off for the control processing contents (various information stored in the RAM 223) of the voice lamp control device 113. It is configured to be erased in case.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off while the above-mentioned period effect is being executed based on the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 (power cut state). When the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed (at the time of power recovery), it becomes impossible to read what period the production was performed immediately before the power failure state. There was a problem that the period production could not be resumed.

Therefore, in this corresponding example, the return command indicating the game status at the time of power recovery is configured to be set in the start-up process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 402) (set after C910 in FIG. 402). As the return command, the remaining period until the game state shifts, such as whether or not there is a change in the special map, whether or not there is a change in the normal map, whether or not there is a current game state, whether or not there is a big hit game, whether or not there is a small hit game, and whether or not there is a right-handed notification. It is configured to set a command including each information of the information, and when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the above-mentioned recovery command, the current state (during power recovery) can execute the period effect (power interruption). It is configured to be able to execute the discrimination process (pre-disruption effect discrimination process) for determining whether or not the period effect has been executed immediately before).

Then, when it is determined in the pre-disruption effect determination process that the current period effect cannot be executed (for example, during a big hit game), the effect according to the command output from the main control device 110 is executed. If it is determined in the pre-disruption effect determination process that the current state is in a state where the period effect can be executed, the period effect is to be restarted later based on the command output from the main control device 110. The preparation processing state is set, and a comment indicating that the production may be restarted is displayed to the player.

Then, in the state where the preparation processing state is set, a command including information on the small hit type indicating the small hit winning (game for long open hit in the normal figure) in which a series of effects are executed as a hit-related command from the main control device 110 is issued. When it is determined that the output has been made, the period effect is resumed from the start of the small hit game. With this configuration, the period effect is executed over a plurality of periods in which different game controls (special figure variable game, normal figure variable game, small hit game, big hit game) are performed by the main control device 110. When the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off during the execution of (series of effects, final variation effect), it is possible to prevent all of the effects during that period from being discarded.

Further, in this corresponding example, even if the execution condition of the new effect (period effect) is satisfied while the preparation processing state is set, there is a limiting means for restricting the execution of the new effect (period effect). is doing. That is, the process of resuming the effect (period effect) that was executed before the power failure is configured to be executed with priority over the process of newly executing the effect (period effect) after the power is restored. With this configuration, the effect (period effect) that has already been provided (partially provided) to the player can be prioritized and executed, so that the player can be provided with a natural effect. .. In addition, when the effect mode of the effect (period effect) being executed before the power failure is combined with the effect mode of the effect (period effect) newly set regardless of the effect (period effect), the game is played. It is possible to surely prevent the production result from being advantageous to the person.

Further, in the state where the preparation processing state is set, there is a possibility that the effect (period effect) was executed immediately before the power failure each time various commands received from the main control device 110 are received. If it is configured to repeatedly execute the discrimination process for determining whether or not there is a presence, and based on the discrimination result, it is determined that the effect (period effect) cannot be executed immediately before the power failure. The comment indicating that the effect (period effect) may be restarted to the player is deleted, and the control process of the normal voice lamp control device 113 is executed.

Further, if the state in which the preparation processing state is set continues for a predetermined period (for example, the period until the number of commands received from the main control device 110 reaches 10, 20 seconds after the power is restored), the power is transmitted. A display mode (for example) indicating that the effect (period effect) that may have been executed before the power failure cannot be restarted, and the player cannot resume the effect (period effect) before the power failure. , The comment) "All the production contents before the power failure have been invalidated" is displayed, and the control process of the normal voice lamp control device 113 is executed.

With this configuration, even if the effect (period effect) that was being executed before the power failure cannot be resumed, it is possible to notify the player that the effect could not be resumed, for example. , A mission effect such as "If a reach of 3 occurs within 10 rotations, a big hit!" Is executed before the power cut, and after the power is restored, "3 reach" is executed regardless of the effect content that was executed before the power cut. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused by executing "." Further, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the predetermined period after the power is restored (for example, the maximum period in which the mission effect can be set (the number of special map fluctuations is 30 times, etc.)) may overlap with the effect result in the mission effect. It may be configured so that the effect mode is not set. Specifically, in a game in which a mission for establishing any of a specific reach mode (for example, reach of "3", "5", "7") can be set as a mission effect, a predetermined value after power recovery is performed. In the period, if the result of the special drawing lottery is out of order, the above-mentioned specific reach mode is not set, and if the result of the special drawing lottery is a hit, the above-mentioned specific reach mode is set. It is good to configure it so that it can be set. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the effect within the limited range even within a predetermined period after the power is restored. In addition, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a hit, a specific reach mode can be set, so a mission effect (for example, generate a reach of "3") is executed before the power failure. Even if "3 reach" occurs by chance within a predetermined period after the power is restored, the lottery result will be a hit, so that the player will not feel uncomfortable.

As described above, in each of the above-described embodiments, as an opportunity to execute a privileged game (big hit game) in which the player has an advantage, a big hit game is won by a special symbol lottery (design big hit game). Is executed (first opportunity) and a small hit is won by lottery of a special symbol, and the game ball is opened in a specific area (during the small hit game) during the small hit game. A gaming machine having two triggers: a trigger (second trigger) for executing a jackpot game (V jackpot game) based on passing through a V region (not shown) provided in (see 361). However, the game is not limited to this, and as an opportunity to execute a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player, a big hit game (design big hit game) is executed by winning a big hit in a special symbol lottery. The technique of each of the above-described embodiments may be diverted to the gaming machine having only the opportunity (first opportunity) to be performed.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the gaming state includes a normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol), a time saving state (low probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol). However, it is not limited to this, and it is possible to set a high probability state of a special symbol with a high probability of winning a special symbol after the end of the big hit game, and a probability change state (high of the special symbol). It may be configured so that a probability state (high probability state of a normal symbol) and a latent state (high probability state of a special symbol, low probability state of a normal symbol) can be set.

Then, when a specific gaming state (latent state) is set as the gaming state, it is easier to execute a specific special drawing lottery (special drawing 2 lottery) than when another gaming state is set (special drawing 2 lottery). Fig. 2 Make it easier to win the ball to the starting opening that triggers the execution of the lottery, or shorten the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 lottery), and frequently show the small hit game based on the small hit winning of the special figure 2 lottery. The game to be played may be configured to be feasible. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player play a game in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained without winning a big hit in the special drawing lottery, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

As described above, in the 16th to 21st embodiments described above, the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of jackpot execution triggers for executing the jackpot game is used, and specifically, the first special symbol is used. The first jackpot execution opportunity triggered by winning the jackpot by the lottery of (Special Figure 1) and the small hit by the lottery of the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) are won and executed based on the small hit winning. It has a second big hit execution opportunity triggered by winning a ball in the V winning opening 650a (see FIG. 361), which is open to the small hit game. In addition, as a special figure change execution opportunity for executing the lottery of the special symbol, the first special figure change execution opportunity triggered by having the ball win in the first winning opening 64 and the ball passing through the through gate 67. A ball is executed in the second winning opening 640 (see FIG. 361), which is opened by the game per game executed when a lottery of a normal symbol (normal figure) is executed and the winning is won in the normal figure lottery. It has the second special figure change execution opportunity, which is triggered by winning a prize. Then, the jackpot game is configured to be executed through various game processes according to the establishment condition of each jackpot execution trigger and each special figure fluctuation execution trigger. With such a configuration, the player can be made to execute the jackpot game through various game processes, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the 16th embodiment described above, from one game state (time saving state) in which it is easy to obtain a specific lottery right (a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 that triggers the execution of the special figure 2 lottery), the one game. When the transition condition for transitioning to another gaming state (normal state) where it is more difficult to obtain a specific lottery right than the state is satisfied, the acquisition guidance notification for acquiring a specific lottery right during one gaming state is executed. However, by configuring it so that it is easy to execute a specific lottery after shifting to another gaming state, it is possible to make the player enthusiastically play the game until just before the end of one gaming state. However, not limited to this, for example, if it is easier to acquire a specific lottery right during the jackpot game than the game state set after the jackpot game ends, the acquisition guidance notification is given during the jackpot game. May be configured so that a specific lottery can be easily executed after the jackpot game is completed.

Further, the ease of acquiring a specific lottery right may be different by changing the ease of winning a ball in the winning opening (starting winning opening) which is a specific lottery right, or the ease of acquiring a specific lottery right may be different. By making the length of the set period different, the ease of acquiring a specific lottery right in the gaming state may be made different.

Further, in the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, the ease of acquiring a specific lottery right differs between one gaming state and another gaming state, but the privilege given to the player is provided. It suffices as long as it is possible to change the game content in another game state based on the privilege acquired in one game state by varying the degree, and for example, the ball can be stored (retained) in a predetermined area of the game board 13. A storage member (retention member) is provided so that the ball is more easily stored in the storage member when one game state is set than when the other game states are set. Then, in other gaming states, it is configured to be more advantageous to the player to play the game with the balls stored in the storage member than to play the game with the balls not stored in the storage member. Is also good.

<23rd Embodiment>
Next, the 23rd embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 471 to 541. It should be noted that some of the configurations used in the 23rd embodiment have different reference numerals for the same configurations as those in the above-mentioned embodiments, which explain the invention of the 23rd embodiment in an easy-to-understand manner. Since the specific configuration is the same as the corresponding configuration of each of the above embodiments, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, the contents described in each of the above-described embodiments are also described in duplicate with different reference numerals. Specifically, in each of the above-described embodiments, each control process is described with a reference numeral of "S" or "C", but in the present embodiment, a reference numeral of "Z" is attached. The same process will be described in duplicate with different numbers.

First, the outline (specifications) of the pachinko machine 10 in the 23rd embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the 23rd embodiment has a first region (V region) in which a game ball can be entered inside a variable winning device 65 that can be entered when a big hit is obtained by a special symbol lottery. , A second region (non-V region) different from the first region, and a distribution device (V) that distributes the game ball that has flowed into the inside of the variable winning device 65 to either the first region or the second region. (Characteristics) and are provided. By entering (passing) at least one game ball into the first region during one jackpot, a probabilistic state of a special symbol is given after the end of the jackpot, while the first jackpot during one jackpot. If no game ball enters one area, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given until the lottery of the special symbol is executed up to 100 times after the big hit is completed. Therefore, when the jackpot game is executed, the game can be performed with the expectation that the game ball will be distributed to the first region (V region) by the distribution device (V accessory).

The distribution device (V accessory) is basically maintained in an arrangement that allows the game balls to be distributed to the second area (arrangement that cannot be distributed to the first area), and a predetermined round (for example, 5) in the jackpot. In the round), the arrangement is changed so that the game ball can be distributed to the first area only during a specific period (for example, 5 seconds after 5 seconds have passed since the start of the 5th round). .. By letting the game ball enter the specific winning opening 65a during this specific period, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the first area, and the probabilistic change of the special symbol that is advantageous for the game state after the big hit is completed. It can be transitioned to the state.

In the 23rd embodiment, an opening / closing pattern in which the game ball can reach the distribution device during a specific period in the 5th round (for example, 5 seconds after the start of the 5th round to 9.5 seconds). The jackpot type (probability variable jackpot) in which the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened and closed by the opening / closing pattern in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened for 4.5 seconds after the lapse of time, and the distribution during the specific period. A specific winning opening with an opening / closing pattern that makes it impossible to reach the device (for example, an opening / closing pattern in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened for 4.5 seconds from the start of the fifth round to the elapse of 4.5 seconds). At least a jackpot type (normal jackpot) in which the (large opening) 65a is opened and closed is provided. In the former jackpot type (probability variable jackpot), in the fifth round of the jackpot, simply by continuing to shoot the game ball aiming at the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, the game ball can be easily moved to the first area by the sorting device. After the big hit is over, the special symbol is almost in a probable state. On the other hand, in the latter jackpot type (normal jackpot), even if the game ball continues to be launched aiming at the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a in the fifth round of the jackpot, all the game balls that reach the distribution device are all. Since it is distributed to the second region, the probabilistic state is not given (the time saving state is given).

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 23rd embodiment, whether or not to fall into the low probability state of the special symbol each time the lottery condition of the special symbol is satisfied when the special symbol shifts to the probabilistic state. The lottery is executed. More specifically, when the lottery condition for the special symbol is satisfied in the probabilistic state of the special symbol, first, a lottery (fall probability 1/500) for whether or not to fall to the low probability state of the special symbol is executed, and the fall occurs. When the corresponding lottery result is obtained, the big hit lottery is executed with the lottery probability (1/250) in the low probability state of the special symbol, but if it is not the lottery result corresponding to the fall, the special symbol is in the high probability state. The jackpot lottery is executed with the lottery probability (1/125) in. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 23rd embodiment, regardless of whether it is a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot, the time saving state of the normal symbol is shortened until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times after the jackpot ends. It is configured to be maintained at. That is, when the probability variation jackpot is reached and the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends, it depends on whether or not the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained by the time the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times. However, after the jackpot ends, the normal state of the normal symbol continues until the 100th special symbol lottery condition is satisfied. Therefore, after the big hit is completed, until the lottery of the special symbol is executed 100 times, the operations other than the big hit probability are almost the same. Can be difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, if the previous jackpot was a normal jackpot and the probability of the special symbol was low after the jackpot ended, or if the previous jackpot was a probabilistic jackpot, until the special symbol lottery was executed 100 times. Even if the player falls into a low-probability state in the meantime, the player continues to have the expectation that the special symbol will be in a probabilistic state until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times. You can keep it going. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the motivation of the player for the game.

FIG. 471 is a front view of the gaming board A13 of the pachinko machine A10 according to the 23rd embodiment. As shown in FIG. 471, the game board A13 is a base plate A cut into a substantially square shape in front view.
In addition to a large number of nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) for ball guidance, rails 61 and 62,
It is configured by assembling a general winning opening 63, a first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640, a variable winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit A80, etc., and the peripheral portion thereof is an inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). Is fixed to.

The base plate A60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate A60 from the front side thereof. General winning opening 6
3. The first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable display device unit A80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate A60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board A13 by tapping screws or the like. Has been done.

The front central portion of the game board A13 is the inner frame 1 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14.
It can be visually recognized from the front side of 2. Below, mainly with reference to FIG. 471, the game board A13.
The configuration of is described.

An outer rail 6 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape on the front surface of the game board A13.
2 is planted, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed of a strip-shaped metal plate is planted at the inner position of the outer rail 62, similarly to the outer rail 62. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board A13, and the game board A13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board A13. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is in front of the game board A13 and has two rails 61 and 6.
It is a region formed by being partitioned by a resin outer edge member A73 connecting 2 and the rail (a region in which a winning opening or the like is arranged and a fired ball flows down).

In this embodiment, the outer edge member A73 is a metal plate-shaped member 75 made of metal (see FIG. 308).
Is configured to enhance the combined strength (rigidity) of the game board A13 and the outer edge member A73, which will be described in detail later.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. In the present embodiment, the aim of arranging the general winning opening 63 is different for each arrangement. This will be described below.

In the present embodiment, in the normal game, the first route passes through the left side of the third symbol display device 81.
The ball will be launched with the aim of getting the ball to the winning opening 64, but the first winning opening 64
A part of the ball flowing down the area on the left side of the first winning opening 64 without reaching the above will win a prize in the general winning opening 63 arranged on the left side of the game area. That is, the general winning opening 63 arranged on the left side of the game area is arranged with the aim of affecting the normal game. For example, the higher the possibility of winning the general winning opening 63, the more likely it is that the number of winnings to the first winning opening 64 will be increased with a small number of balls during normal times.

On the other hand, in the game during the time reduction or the probability change, the ball is launched with the aim of winning the ball to the second winning opening 640 by the route passing through the right side of the third symbol display device 81. A part of the ball flowing down the area on the right side of the second winning opening 640 without reaching the winning opening 640 wins a prize in the general winning opening 63 arranged on the right side of the game area. That is, the general winning opening 63 arranged on the right side of the game area is arranged with the aim of affecting the game during the probability change or the time reduction. For example, the higher the possibility of winning the general winning opening 63, the more it is possible to suppress the ball loss during the probability change or the time reduction.

By suppressing the ball loss, even if you do not play a game (even if you keep hitting) in a firing mode that stops the firing of the ball at the right time during the probability change, you will get the next big hit before the ball held in the upper plate 17 runs out. Since it is easy to do so, it is possible to reduce the stress (feeling of fatigue) that the player receives during the game. Therefore, the number of rotations until the next big hit frequently increases during the probability change (for example, 10).
Even in the case of (0 or more rotations), the player can comfortably execute the game.

In the game in the special game state, the ball is launched with the aim of winning the ball into the specific winning opening 65a by the route passing through the right side of the third symbol display device 81, but the second winning opening 640
A part of the ball flowing down the area on the right side of the above flows down to the general winning opening 63 side (right side) instead of the specific winning opening 65a side (left side), and wins a prize in the general winning opening 63a. Since the prize ball associated with the prize in the general prize opening 63 is paid out as a prize ball different from the prize ball in the specific prize opening 65a, the player can change the prize ball by the end of the special game state. In addition to the prize balls based on the planned number of prizes to be awarded to the specific prize opening 65a, the prize balls based on the number of prizes to be awarded to the general prize opening 63 can be obtained.

That is, the general prize opening 63 arranged on the right side of the game area is arranged for the purpose of increasing the number of payout prize balls that can be acquired by the player in the special gaming state. Here, as the number of winnings in the general winning opening 63 increases, the time efficiency of winning in the specific winning opening 65a decreases, so that the elapsed time until the end of the special gaming state tends to increase. In other words, the number of rounds and the number of counts in the special gaming state (specified number of winnings for each round) are the same in terms of control due to the arrangement location, the number of arrangements, and the design of the upstream flow path of the general winning opening 63. However, the time required to end the special game state (long and short) and the number of prize balls paid out to the player (somewhat) can be different.

In the special game state, the display mode when displaying the number corresponding to the number of payout prize balls on the third symbol display device 81 is not limited at all. For example, the number of payout prize balls based on the prize in the specific winning opening 65a and the number of payout prize balls based on the winning in the general winning opening 63 may be displayed separately, or the payout based on the prize in the specific winning opening 65a may be displayed. A numerical value obtained by totaling the number of prize balls and the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the general winning opening 63 may be displayed, or a combination thereof may be displayed.

As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher during the probabilistic change and during the time reduction than during the normal period.
In addition, since the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, "○" is displayed in the variable display of the second symbol.
The symbol of is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal time. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is easier to win in the second winning opening 640 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 than when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the first winning opening 6 without the electric accessory
Toward 4, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit A80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the second winning opening 64
Since the electric accessory 640a attached to 0 is likely to be in an open state and is in a state in which it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640, the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 toward the second winning opening 640. (So-called "right-handed"), pass through the through gate 67, and pass the electric accessory 640a.
It is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640 while opening the.

In the pachinko machine A10 of the present embodiment, the configuration of the game board A13 is asymmetrical, and it is required to hit the ball on the left and right according to the game state, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the configuration of the game board A13 may be symmetrical (see FIG. 471).
.. In this case, you can aim for the first winning opening 64 with "right-handed", or you can aim for the second winning opening 640 with "left-handed".
You can also aim at. Therefore, depending on the game state (whether it is in the probable change, in the time saving, or in the normal state), the method of firing the ball is changed to "left-handed" or "right-handed" for the player. It can be unnecessary to make it. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the troublesomeness of changing the way of hitting the ball.

In this embodiment, the input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225 (see FIG. 4). Other devices 228 include the drive motor AMT1 and the drive motor AM.
A drive motor for raising and lowering the effect unit A710 and T2 are included.

As described above with reference to FIG. 471 and the like, the second ball entry port (second prize opening) 640 is a game in which the second ball entry port (second winning opening) 640 flows down a flow path provided on the right side of the front view with respect to the third symbol display device 81. It is provided at a position where the ball can enter (a position where the game ball flowing down the flow path provided on the left side of the front view cannot enter (difficult)). That is, the probabilistic state in which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is easily opened (that is, the game ball is easy to enter into the second entry port 640) and the time saving state of the normal symbol is set. In the time-saving state, by launching the game ball toward the flow path on the right side of the front view, the game ball enters the second entrance 640 at a high rate (for example, 1 in 3 balls). Therefore, it is possible to play the game efficiently. On the other hand, in the normal state in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set, it is difficult to open the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 (that is, the game ball enters the second entrance 640). (Difficult), so the position where the game ball flowing down the flow path provided on the left side of the front view with respect to the third symbol display device 81 can enter (the game flowing down the flow path provided on the right side of the front view). The game is performed by a game method in which a game ball is launched aiming at a first ball entry port (first winning opening) 64 provided at a position where the ball cannot enter (difficult). Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification of the explanation, launching the game ball toward the flow path on the left side of the front view with respect to the third symbol display device 81 is referred to as "left-handed", and is directed toward the flow path on the right side of the front view. Launching a game ball is called "right-handed". In addition, the lottery of the special symbol executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first entry slot (first winning opening) 64 is referred to as the lottery of the first special symbol (lottery of the special figure 1). The lottery of the special symbol that is executed based on the fact that the game ball enters the second entry opening (second winning opening) 640 is called the lottery of the second special symbol (lottery of the special drawing 2). ).

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 472. FIG. 472 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the 23rd embodiment, and FIG. 472 (b) is the third in the 23rd embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the display content of the symbol display device 81 schematically. The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 487), for example, there are three symbols, left, middle, and right. The symbol column is displayed.

The third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is composed of nine types of main symbols with numbers "1" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of a rear symbol consisting of a wooden box with numbers from "1" to "9", of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as shields, swords, and cloaks on the front of the wooden box. Even numbers are small in green on the lower right side of, and are added so that they are displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 487) described later is a jackpot (big hit A to E), the same main symbol is obtained. It is configured so that a uniform variable display is performed and a big hit occurs after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

Furthermore, if the winning jackpot type is a normal jackpot, the same main symbol with an even number is always displayed in a variable manner, while if it is a probabilistic jackpot, the same main symbol with an even number is displayed. Either the uniform variable display or the uniform variable display with the same main symbols with odd numbers is executed. That is, by executing the variable display in which the same main symbols with odd numbers are aligned, not only the big hit but also the probable change state after the big hit is determined. In the 23rd embodiment, the rate at which the variable display in which the same main symbols with odd numbers are aligned is executed in the case of a probability variation jackpot is set to an extremely low probability (for example, a rate of 1%). There is. As a result, it is possible to rarely find that the jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot from the types of symbols that are aligned when the jackpot is won. As described above, until the lottery of 100 special symbols is executed after the end of the big hit, the normal symbol is maintained in the time-saving state (whether or not it is in the probable change state from the operation mode of the electric accessory 640a). Therefore, it is difficult to grasp whether or not it is a probable change jackpot from the types of main symbols that were prepared at the time of the jackpot winning, from the end of the jackpot to the end of the special symbol lottery 100 times. During that time, it is possible to generate a situation in which it is not known whether the state is a probable change state or a time saving state. Therefore, regardless of whether the jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot, the player is in a probabilistic state from the end of the jackpot to the end of the 100 special symbol lottery. Expectations can be sustained.

As shown in FIG. 472 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is a main display for displaying the third symbol when the third symbol is variablely displayed or when the third symbol is stopped and displayed. A region Dm, a small area Ds1 for displaying the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, a small area Ds2 for displaying the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, and a predetermined effect (for example, an interrupt described later). It is composed of a small area Ds3 for reducing and displaying the variation effect of the third symbol while the continuous hit effect) is being executed.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. If a combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed (the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol) among the balls that have entered the first ball entry port 64. The small area Ds2 is an area for displaying the number of balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed (the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol) among the balls that have entered the second entry port 640, and is a small area. Ds3 is an area in which the variable effect is reduced and displayed when a display effect different from the variable effect is executed in the main display area. By reducing and displaying the variable effect, it is possible to prevent the display effect different from the variable effect from being obscured by the third symbol and becoming difficult to see.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 472 (b), a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm, and a display showing the degree of expectation of a big hit in the background of the third symbol. Directing etc. are executed.

If a game ball enters the first entry port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display devices 37A, 37B), the number of entry is up to four times. It is held, and the number of held balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37A and also in the small area Ds1. Similarly, when a game ball enters the second entry port 640, the number of entry is suspended up to four times, the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37B, and the small area Ds2 is displayed. Also shown in. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number of the first special symbol, and in the small area Ds2, one reserved ball number symbol for each reserved ball number of the second special symbol. Is displayed. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 or the small area Ds2, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, it means that the reserved ball number symbol is displayed. Indicates that the number of reserved balls is four. When the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed, it means that the reserved ball number of the first special symbol is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball. FIG. 472 (b) illustrates a case where the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 4 and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0.

In the 23rd embodiment, the balls entering the first ball opening 64 and the second ball opening 640 are each held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is 4 times. The number of times is not limited to, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the small areas Ds1 and Ds2, the reserved ball number is displayed as a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is divided by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 473 to 486, various hobby effects performed by the pachinko machine 10 in the 23rd embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 473 to 476, in the 23rd embodiment, it is executed in the third symbol display device 81 during the gaming state (time saving state or probable change state) in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set. The display effect will be described. As described above, in the 23rd embodiment, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the time saving state and the probable change state after the jackpot is completed and until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times. It is configured. That is, regardless of whether the game state after the big hit is set to the time saving state or the probable change state, the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times after the previous big hit is finished, unless it becomes a big hit. Until then, the structure is such that the normal design is maintained in a time-saving state. This normal symbol time saving state is maintained even if the special symbol falls from the probabilistic state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol until it is executed 100 times, so the game set at the end of the jackpot Not only the state but also the timing of falling from the probabilistic state of the special symbol to the low probability state can be made difficult for the player to identify.

However, if the state of the special symbol of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is a probabilistic state of the special symbol or a low probability state) is configured to be completely indistinguishable, a gaming state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set. There is a risk that the game will become monotonous while the game continues, and it will not be possible to sufficiently improve the player's interest in the game. Therefore, in the 23rd embodiment, the player can predict the possibility of the probabilistic state to some extent by the display mode of the third symbol display device 81. More specifically, each time the variable display of the special symbol is executed, one of the three rear modes that suggests the degree of expectation of the probable change state is selected by taking into account the game state at the time of execution. It is configured to be set. As a result, it is possible to realize a game property in which the state of the special symbol is predicted from the aspect of the rear mode, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

First, with reference to FIG. 473 (a), a display mode (rear mode) in which the current state is a probable change state and the degree of expectation is relatively low will be described. As shown in FIG. 473 (a), when the rear mode (cave search mode), which is a probable change state and has a relatively low expectation, is set, the character 801 imitating an adventurer possesses a sword and a torch. The display mode for exploring the inside of the cave is displayed. Further, on the lower right side of the front view on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the number of lottery of the remaining special symbols until the number of lottery that the time saving state of the normal symbol may end is reached (the time saving state of the normal symbol). A display area 802 having a horizontally long rectangular shape for indicating the number of times of guarantee) is displayed. In the example of FIG. 473 (a), the case where 90 times are displayed as the guaranteed number of times is illustrated. That is, the state after the lottery of the special symbol is executed 10 times after the big hit is finished is illustrated. Further, a horizontally long substantially rectangular display area 803 is displayed below the front view on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Inside this display area 803, horizontally long, substantially oval-shaped right-handed images displaying the characters "right-handed" are displayed on the left and right, and between these right-handed images, a "cave search mode" is displayed. Is displayed. Depending on these display modes, the time saving state of the normal symbol continues until at least 90 more special symbol lottery is executed (the time saving state may end when the 90 times lottery is completed). And it is possible to easily make the player understand that the game should be played by right-handed. In addition, compared to the temple search mode (see FIG. 473 (b)) and the super-temple search mode (see FIG. 474), which will be described later, the display contents are more modest, so that the player can intuitively change the probability. It can be understood that the condition is relatively unlikely to continue.

FIG. 473 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode when a rear mode (temple search mode) with a high expectation that the current state is a probable change state is set as compared with the cave search mode. When the temple search mode is set, the display mode in which the character 801 imitating an adventurer searches the inside of the temple is displayed, and the characters between the right-handed images inside the display area 803 are the "temple search mode". Will be changed to. The display content of the temple search mode is brighter than that of the cave search mode, and the display mode makes it easier for the player to have a flashy impression. Can be intuitively understood.

FIG. 474 is a diagram showing a display mode when a rear mode (super-temple search mode) indicating that the expectation of a probable change state is higher than that of the temple search mode is set. When this super-temple search mode is set, the characters "CHANCE" are displayed on the pillars of the temple, and torches are installed on the pillars of the temple. Further, a substantially circular display area 804 in which the character "super" is displayed is displayed on the upper left side of the character "temple search mode" in the display area 803. With these display modes, it is possible to give the player a more flashy impression than in the temple search mode (see FIG. 473 (b)), so that the expectation of being in a probable state can be further improved. It should be noted that this super-temple search mode is a rear mode that may be set (shifted) only when the game state is a probable change state and the lottery result of the fall is not included in the hold. In other words, at the time of shifting to the super temple search mode, not only the probable change state is confirmed, but also the probable change state is confirmed at least until the reserved ball at the transition time is digested, so the transition to the super temple search mode is made. By doing so, the player can be pleased.

As described above, in the 23rd embodiment, the cave search mode in which the expectation of the probabilistic state is relatively low and the temple search mode in which the expectation of the probabilistic state is relatively high during the game state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set are relatively high. , And the super-temple search mode 3 that confirms that the probabilistic state is confirmed and that the lottery result corresponding to the fall is not included in the hold (at least the probable change state continues until the hold is exhausted). One of the types of rear modes is set at the time of executing the variable display effect based on the lottery result of the special symbol. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of predicting the current game state from the rear mode while the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, so that the player's interest in the game can be enjoyed. Can be improved. Also, by setting the super-temple search mode, it is confirmed that the game state is in the probable change state, so if the player shifts to the super-temple mode while predicting that it is in the probable change state, the player will be notified. On the other hand, it can make us happy that our predictions were correct. On the other hand, if the player shifts to the super-temple mode even though he has predicted that the special symbol is in a low-probability state, the player will be delighted that the game state has been set to be more advantageous than expected. You can make it happen. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Furthermore, by setting the super temple mode, it is confirmed that the lottery result corresponding to the fall is not included in the hold (at least the lottery for the number of hold balls can be executed with the jackpot probability of the probable change state). Therefore, it is possible to play the game with a stronger expectation that it will be a big hit in the hold.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 475 and 476, in the 23rd embodiment, a predetermined number of times (for example, 96 times) of special symbol lottery is performed without winning a jackpot in a state where the time saving state of the normal symbol is set. The probability change continuation suggestion effect that is executed when is executed will be described. FIG. 475 is a diagram showing a display mode at the start of this probability change continuation suggestion effect. This probability change continuation suggestion effect is an effect for suggesting whether or not the game state is a probability change state, and is executed from the 96th variation display effect to the 99th variation display effect after the end of the jackpot. That is, it is an effect that is executed until immediately before the 100th special symbol lottery, which is the guaranteed number of times in the time saving state, is executed. In the 23rd embodiment, the remaining number of time reductions is subtracted at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol in the time reduction state. That is, in the time reduction state, the number of time reductions becomes 0 at the start of the 100th variation display after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, during the execution of the 100th variation display, the time reduction state has already ended (shift to the normal state). It will be in the completed state). Therefore, it is configured to notify whether or not it is in the probabilistic state at the 99th variation display effect in which the normal symbol is surely maintained in the time-saving state regardless of whether it is in the probable change state or the time-saving state. With such a configuration, it becomes difficult to specify whether or not the probabilistic change state continues until the result of the probabilistic change continuation suggestion effect is confirmed (that is, the time is shortened from the operation of the electric accessory 640a). It becomes difficult to detect whether it is in a probable change state), so that the player can be made to pay attention to the probabilistic change continuation suggestion effect.

As shown in FIG. 475, when the probability change continuation suggestion effect is started, the effect that the door 806 appears in front of the character 801 imitating the adventurer is executed. Further, above the door 806, a display area 805 is displayed in which the characters "Door breakthrough mode starts !!" and "If the door is breached, the probability change continues !?" are displayed. Further, the characters displayed between the right-handed images in the display area 803 are changed to the "door breakthrough mode". From these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that if the character 801 can break through the door, it means that the probabilistic state is continued. In this probability change continuation suggestion effect (door breakthrough mode), an effect of attacking the door 806 is executed every time the fluctuation display is executed, and if the door 806 can be finally destroyed (breakthrough), the probability change state is achieved. The effect of notifying the continuation of is executed.

FIG. 476 (a) is a diagram showing an effect mode suggesting that the degree of expectation that the probability change state continues is relatively low in the probability change continuation suggestion effect (door breakthrough mode). When this low-expectation production mode is executed, as shown in FIG. 476 (a), the character 801 imitating an adventurer destroys (breaks through) the door 806 by performing an attack that cuts the door 806 with a sword. ) The effect to be tried is executed. On the other hand, FIG. 476 (b) is a diagram showing an effect mode suggesting that the probability of continuation of the probabilistic change state is relatively high in the probabilistic change continuation suggestion effect (door breakthrough mode). When this high-expectation production mode is executed, as shown in FIG. 476 (b), the character 801 imitating an adventurer strikes the door 806 with a huge hammer to hit the door 806. The effect of destroying (breaking through) is executed.

It is intuitive to many players that hitting with a hammer is more effective than slashing with a sword to destroy the door 806, so hitting with a hammer is more effective. , It is possible to easily make the player understand that the expectation of breaking through the door 806 is high. Therefore, during the execution of the probability change continuation suggestion effect, the game can be performed with the expectation that the effect of hitting the door 806 with the hammer will be executed more times. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the 23rd embodiment, at the start of the probability change continuation suggestion effect, the lottery results from the 96th to the 99th times, which is the execution range of the probability change continuation suggestion effect, are pre-read, and the probability change state is up to the 99th special symbol lottery. It is determined whether or not is continuing, and if the probability change state continues until the 99th special symbol lottery, the selection rate of the production scenario that tends to generate a high expectation attack pattern is high. .. On the other hand, if the player has fallen into a time-saving state before the 99th special symbol lottery is executed (or was in a time-saving state after the end of the previous jackpot), a low-expectation attack pattern occurs. The configuration is such that the selection rate of easy-to-use production scenarios is high. In this way, by setting the effect mode based on the game state at the end of the effect, it is possible to more accurately notify the game state after the end of the effect.

Here, if the configuration is such that the probability change continuation suggestion effect is executed based only on the gaming state at the start of the effect, the probability change state falls to the low probability state during the execution of the probability change continuation suggestion effect, and the continuation of the probability change state is notified. Nevertheless, there is a risk that the time saving state will end with the start of the 100th special symbol lottery. In this case, there is a possibility that the player may feel distrust of the pachinko machine 10 or the hall due to the contradiction between the production content and the actual operation. In addition, as a countermeasure, it is conceivable to configure the probabilistic continuation suggestion effect by an effect that is completed by one variation, but with this method, it is difficult to secure a sufficient effect period, so there are various production modes. It becomes difficult to change.

On the other hand, in the 23rd embodiment, the probability change continuation suggestion effect is executed over the last four fluctuation displays in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is guaranteed, and the notification content of the probability change continuation suggestion effect is provided. , It is configured to be determined based on the game state at the time when the lottery of the last special symbol in the execution range of the probabilistic continuation effect is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately notify the game state at the end of the production, and it is possible to diversify the production mode. If the ball is in a probable change state at the start of the effect and the reserved ball is not held until the end of the effect, the effect is configured so that an attack pattern with a relatively high expectation is likely to occur. ing. This is lower than the probability that the lottery result corresponding to the fall will be a big hit, and it is extremely rare to fall into the low probability state of the special symbol within the production period (the probability of the probability change state is relatively high). This is because the production ends as it is).

Next, with reference to FIG. 477, the transition of various states after the end of the probabilistic jackpot in the 23rd embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 477 (a), the transition of the state in the case of falling to the low probability state within 100 times after the end of the probabilistic jackpot will be described. As shown in FIG. 477 (a), if the player falls within 100 times, the special symbol will be in a low-probability state at the time of the fall, but in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, the special symbol lottery will be executed 100 times. Continue until it is done. Then, in the probability change continuation suggestion effect executed in the 96th to 99th variation display effects, the effect of failing to break through the door 806 is executed, and the transition to the normal state is notified.

On the other hand, FIG. 477 (b) is a diagram showing the transition of the state when the special symbol falls to the low probability state in the lottery of the special symbol 100 times or later after the end of the probability variation jackpot. As shown in FIG. 477 (b), in the case of falling 100 times or more after the end of the big hit, the time saving state of the normal symbol and the probable change state of the special symbol are maintained until the fall. Therefore, in the probability change continuation suggestion effect executed over the execution period of the 96th to 99th variation display, the effect of successfully breaking through the door 806 is executed, and the continuation of the probability change state is notified.

In addition, in the 23rd embodiment, as in the case of falling in the lottery of the special symbol after 100 times, even if the big hit is made in the lottery of the special symbol during the time saving state of the normal symbol, it is normal at the start of the fluctuation. The structure is such that the time saving state of the symbol ends. Therefore, if the time saving state is terminated within the number of lottery of the special symbol within 100 times (that is, within the guaranteed number of times of the time saving state), the winning of the big hit is confirmed at that time. On the other hand, when the time saving state is terminated after 100 times (that is, after the guaranteed number of times of the time saving state has elapsed), it means that it is either a big hit or a fall. And since the probability of winning a big hit (1/125) is higher than the probability of falling (1/500), it will be a big hit even if the time saving state ends at the start of fluctuation after 100 times. Can be expected. Therefore, since the game can be performed by paying attention to whether or not the time saving state is continued, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 478, the pressing stop effect in the 23rd embodiment will be described. This pressing stop effect is an effect in which each symbol row is stopped and displayed each time the lens member (PUSH button) 10317 provided on the swing operation member 10310 is pressed. That is, it is an effect that the stop timing of each symbol sequence can be set to an arbitrary timing of the player depending on the operation timing of the PUSH button 10317 of the player.

FIG. 478 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during execution of the pressing stop effect. In this pressing stop effect, as shown in FIG. 478 (a), a button image (left button image 807aL, center button image 807aC, right button image) imitating the PUSH button 10317 is below each symbol row in the variable display. 807aR) is displayed. Further, below each button image, a valid period gauge (left valid period gauge 807bL, central valid period gauge 807bC, right valid period gauge 807bR) indicating the remaining period during which the stop operation for each symbol row is valid is displayed. .. With these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that each symbol sequence is stopped and displayed each time the PUSH button 10317 is pressed.

FIG. 478 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the player performs the first operation (pressing) on the PUSH button 10317 while the pressing stop effect is being executed. As shown in FIG. 478 (b), when the first operation (pressing) is executed, the left symbol column is stopped and displayed. If the second operation is executed within the operation valid period, the right symbol column is stopped and displayed, and if the third operation is executed, the center symbol column is stopped and displayed. In this way, by configuring the timing of the symbol stop so that the player can arbitrarily determine it, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In the case where each symbol row is stopped and displayed according to the operation timing of the player, if the player's operation is too early, the time may be too long after all the symbol rows are stopped. As a countermeasure, in the 23rd embodiment, if the stop operation is executed three times at an early stage (for example, within 1 second after the start of the valid period), the central symbol row is not immediately stopped and displayed. By configuring the stop display of the central symbol row after a specific effect, it is possible to prevent the period after the stop display from becoming too long. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 479 (a), a plurality of (designations with the characters "Change Change") including a specific symbol (a symbol with the character "Change Change") are included based on the execution of the third operation (pressing). After the three) symbols move up and down in the central symbol row (ie, after suggesting that any of the three symbols may appear as a stop symbol in the central symbol row), a particular symbol. It is configured to execute an effect (chance charge fanning effect) in which symbols other than (chance charge symbol) are stopped and displayed. In this way, depending on the length of the remaining operation valid period at the time when the stop operation of the central symbol row (third press on the PUSH button 10317) is performed, the central symbol row is immediately stopped and displayed, or the chance charge is charged. By setting the configuration to switch whether to fill the time by the fanning effect, it is possible to prevent the state in which all the symbol rows are stopped and displayed become unnaturally long. Therefore, a more natural staging mode can be realized.

In the 23rd embodiment, there is also a separate effect of a pattern in which the chance charge symbol is stopped and displayed in the central symbol row in the pressing stop effect. In this case, the chance charge symbol is stopped and displayed after the chance charge fanning effect (see FIG. 479 (a)) regardless of the timing when the stop operation for the central symbol row is executed. When the stop display of this chance charge symbol occurs, it develops into a chance charge effect (see FIG. 479 (b)) described later. By setting an effect pattern in which the chance charge symbol is actually stopped and displayed, the operation stop effect is selected as a mere off-effect effect, and even if a chance charge fanning effect occurs, there is a possibility that it will develop into a chance charge effect. It can make the player think that there is. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 479 (b) and 480, the above-mentioned effect mode of the chance charge effect will be described. FIG. 479 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 at the time when the chance charge effect is started. When the chance charge effect is started, the character 801 imitating an adventurer is displayed in the center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the surroundings are set to emit light (a mode wearing an aura). Will be done. Further, on the right side of the character 801 is a vertically long substantially rectangular shape of the air gauge KG. This spirit gauge KG is for displaying the accumulated condition of the spirit of the character 801 in a meter format, and can be displayed in 1 to 6 stages. Further, in the display area 805 displayed above the character 801 the characters "the more the spirit is accumulated, the more chances are stocked" are displayed. Further, the characters "Change Change 5 times remaining" are displayed on the display area 803. In the chance charge effect of 1, the action of the character 801 trying to accumulate the spirit is executed five times, and the amount of the accumulated spirit is the size of the light around the character 801 (the amount of the aura to be worn) and the spirit gauge KG. It is notified by the meter amount of. With these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that there are times when it is good enough to accumulate spirit.

FIG. 480 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the end of the chance charge effect. As shown in FIG. 480 (a), in addition to the size of the light around the character 801 (the amount of aura worn) and the meter amount of the spirit gauge KG, the character displayed in the display area 805 also determines how much the spirit is accumulated. Is notified. In the example of FIG. 480 (a), a state in which the spirit is accumulated up to the fifth stage out of the six stages is illustrated, and the characters "charge level 5 !!" are displayed in the display area 805. With these display contents, the player can easily understand the amount of energy finally accumulated.

The spirit gauge accumulated in the chance charge effect is consumed to generate some chance-up effect at each timing until the reserved ball is consumed at the start of the chance charge effect. The chance-up effect is an effect that raises the expectation of a big hit. Occurrence etc. can be mentioned. The spirit gauge is configured to be consumed until it reaches 0. That is, it is configured so that it is not consumed and is not discarded. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp the remaining number of chance-up effects, so that the player can be expected to play the game while looking forward to what kind of chance-up effect will occur next. .. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the 23rd embodiment, the gauge amount of the spirit gauge KG accumulated in the chance charge effect is mainly determined based on the number of reserved balls at the start of the chance charge effect. Then, after the chance charge effect is completed, the pace at which the chance-up effect is executed (that is, the spirit gauge is consumed) is changed in consideration of the lottery result of each reserved ball. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load (processing load when determining the number of gauges) at the start of the chance charge effect.

FIG. 480 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the spirit gauge is consumed. FIG. 480 (b) illustrates a case where a so-called hold change effect is executed as a chance-up effect by consuming one gauge of the spirit gauge. That is, as shown in FIG. 480 (b), the gauge amount of the air gauge KG is reduced (consumed) by one gauge, and at the same time, the display mode of the third reserved ball number symbol Hz3 in the small region Ds1 is changed from white to blue. The production that changes to (the degree of expectation increases) is executed. In this way, as the gauge amount of the spirit gauge KG decreases, some kind of effect (chance-up effect) that raises the expectation of hitting is executed, so that while the gauge amount of the energy gauge KG remains, when , You can have them play the game looking forward to what kind of chance-up effect will occur next. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 481, the time-dependent change of the display mode (effect mode) in the variable display effect in which the press stop effect is set will be described. First, referring to FIG. 481 (a), when the third stop operation (stop operation for the middle symbol row) is executed 1 second or later from the start of the valid period in the press stop effect that does not develop into the chance charge effect. The change with time of the effect mode of the above will be described. As shown in FIG. 481 (a), when the fluctuation display in which only the pressing stop effect is set (that is, the chance charge effect is not executed) is executed, it is normal until 6 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. The variation display (simply the variation display in which each symbol string fluctuates at high speed in the vertical direction) is executed, and the pressing stop effect (see FIG. 478 (a)) is started after 6 seconds have elapsed. Then, when the third stop operation is executed 1 second or later (after 2 seconds have elapsed in the example of FIG. 481 (a)) after the valid period of the pressing stop effect is started, the left symbol column that has already been stopped is executed. , And, in addition to the right symbol column, the center symbol column is displayed as a pseudo stop. The pseudo stop display means that the display is displayed in a mode that is difficult to distinguish from the final stop display (for example, a mode that vibrates with an extremely small amplitude). This pseudo stop continues until the original stop display timing of the variable display (timing when the stop command is received from the main control device 110), and when the stop display timing is reached, each symbol sequence is completely stopped and displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 481 (b), in the pressing stop effect that does not develop into a chance charge effect, the third stop operation (stop operation for the middle symbol row) is executed within a range of 1 second or less from the start of the valid period. The time-dependent change of the staging mode when the effect is performed will be described. As shown in FIG. 481 (b), when the fluctuation display in which only the pressing stop effect is set (that is, the chance charge effect is not executed) is executed, it is normal until 6 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. The variation display is executed, and when 6 seconds have elapsed, the pressing stop effect (see FIG. 478 (a)) is started. Then, when the third stop operation is executed within the range of 1 second or less (after 0.5 seconds have elapsed in the example of FIG. 481 (b)) after the valid period of the pressing stop effect is started, the chance charge fanning effect is produced. After (see FIG. 479 (a)) is executed, the effect of stopping and displaying the combination of the out-of-order symbols at the stop display timing is executed. As a result, even if the stop operation is executed three times at a relatively early stage after the start of the valid period, the period until the stop display can be connected (filled) by the chance charge fanning effect. It is possible to show the transition of the effect mode up to the stop display of. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a staging mode with less discomfort.

Next, with reference to FIG. 481 (c), the change with time of the effect mode in the case of developing into the chance charge effect will be described. As shown in FIG. 481 (c), even when the chance charge effect is developed, the transition of the effect mode is the same as the case where the chance charge effect is not executed until the press stop effect is executed. Then, in the variable display in which the chance charge effect is set, when the stop operation is executed three times in the press stop effect, the chance charge fanning effect is produced regardless of the timing of the third stop operation (FIG. 479 (a)). (See) occurs, and then 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the chance charge effect develops.

As described above, in the 23rd embodiment, even in the variable display in which only the pressing stop effect is set, the chance charge fanning effect can be executed depending on the end timing of the stop operation, so that the chance charge effect is executed. You can have a feeling of expectation for it more times. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 482 to 484, the interrupt continuous hitting effect, which is a kind of the hobby effect in the 23rd embodiment, will be described. This interrupt continuous striking effect is an effect of a display mode as if an effect different from the display effect displayed up to that point was suddenly interrupted during the normal variation display or the reach variation. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 482 (a), an image of the normal variable display effect is obtained by executing the interrupt continuous hit effect during the execution of the normal variable display effect (see FIG. 472 (b)). A cut-in area CR in which the face of the monster is displayed up is formed (displayed) by superimposing on (on the layer on the front side). That is, as shown in FIG. 482 (a), a display area (cut-in area CR) formed in a band shape in a downward direction from the upper left side to the lower right side on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. .. As shown in FIG. 482 (a), the display range of this cut-in area CR occupies about 70% of the area of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and a monster is imitated in the central portion of the cut-in area CR. The image is enlarged and displayed. Further, a display area 805 in which the characters "Monster group assault !!" is displayed is displayed (formed) above the image imitating a monster in the cut-in area CR. With these display contents, it is easy for the player to understand that an effect completely different from the effect that was executed until the cut-in area CR was displayed was executed (interrupted). Can be made to. While the cut-in area CR is formed (that is, while the interrupt continuous striking effect is being executed), the display effect that has been executed until immediately before that is interrupted. That is, all the display effects of the layer on the back side of the cut-in area CR are paused, and when the interrupt continuous hit effect ends, the effect mode is restarted from the situation at the time of interruption. The audio (musical piece) can be paused (interrupted) or played continuously depending on the situation. In the 23rd embodiment, when the interrupt continuous striking effect is executed during the execution of the normal variable display, both the display mode and the voice mode are controlled so as to be interrupted until the end of the interrupt continuous striking effect. If the interrupt continuous striking effect is executed after the reach has occurred (during the reach fluctuation), only the display mode is interrupted. This is because the flashy music (BGM) is played after the reach occurs compared to during the execution of the normal variable display, so that the relatively flashy BGM is interrupted, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. The purpose is to prevent them from being embraced.

After the interrupt continuous hitting effect is executed and the cut-in area CR displaying an image imitating a monster is formed, the player is urged to continuously press the PUSH button 10317 (continuous hitting). The display mode is displayed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 482 (b), a button image BG imitating the PUSH button 10317 is displayed in the cut-in area CR, and the operation for the PUSH button 10317 is effective below the button image BG. A gauge image GG showing the remaining period in gauge format is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, the characters "continuous hit" and an image of three arrows pointing toward the PUSH button image BG are displayed. Further, a display area 808 in which the characters "Reduce monsters by repeated hits !!" is displayed on the display area 805 and the characters "100 remaining bodies" are displayed on the right side of the button image BG is formed ( Is displayed. From these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the number of monsters can be reduced as the PUSH button 10317 is pressed within the continuous hitting valid period.

In the 23rd embodiment, as the types of interrupt continuous hitting effects, a plurality of types having at least different numbers of monsters that can be reduced during the continuous hitting valid period (lower limit of the number of remaining monsters to be displayed) are provided. Has been done. And basically, the more monsters you defeat (the number of remaining monsters is smaller), the higher the expectation of a big hit. More specifically, when the interrupt continuous hit effect is set for the variable display of the jackpot, it is possible to subdue all 100 monsters (set the number of remaining monsters to 0). While the mode can be selected, it is configured so that the number of monsters cannot be reduced to 0 (only 3 can be reduced at the maximum) in the out-of-order variable display.

In the 23rd embodiment, the number of monsters to be subdued (subtracted) by pressing the PUSH button 10317 once is changed according to the length of the remaining valid period. More specifically, the longer the remaining valid period, the smaller the number of subjugation (subtraction number) by pressing once. With this configuration, even when a player who has a fast pace of repeated hits is playing a game, it is possible to prevent the number of monsters from being subtracted to the lower limit at an early stage after the start of the production.

Here, conventionally, as a kind of hobby effect, there has been known an operation effect in which an effect mode is changed by continuously operating an operation means such as an operation button during a predetermined period. In this operation effect, the upper limit of the variable number of times (development number) of the effect mode is generally set for each effect, and when the number of operations becomes a specific number of times, the upper limit of the development mode can be changed. Things were normal. However, in the production of such specifications, when a player with a high operation speed is playing a game, the upper limit stage is developed (variable) at an early stage, so that the upper limit stage is a low expectation. There is a problem that there is a possibility that the player's interest may be impaired when the stage is at the stage of showing. Furthermore, when a player whose operation speed is slow is playing a game, the operation is performed before the specified number of operations for developing to the upper limit development mode, even though the player is actively performing the operation. The validity period has expired, which may spoil the interest of the player.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 23rd embodiment, the number of monsters to be subdued (subtracted) by pressing once is changed according to the length of the remaining valid period, and the longer the remaining valid period, the more. Since it is configured to reduce the number of subjugation, even if it is pressed at a fast pace, it is possible to prevent the number of monsters from being subdued to the lower limit at an early stage. That is, it is possible to suppress that the subtraction of the number of monsters based on pressing is stopped at the remaining 10 bodies and the remaining 4 bodies, which are easily set in the case of a loss, and the player's expectation for a big hit is impaired. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. In addition, even when a player whose pressing pace is slow is playing a game, if the pressing is performed in the latter half of the continuous hitting valid period, a relatively large number of subjugation numbers can be easily selected, so that the number of monsters reaches the lower limit. The possibility can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the interrupting continuous hitting effect even for the player whose pressing pace is slow, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 483 (a), in an effect in which continuous operation on the PUSH button 10317 is effective, such as an interrupt continuous hit effect, an operation (press) on the PUSH button 10317 is performed within the continuous hit effective period of the effect. The output mode of the voice output each time it is detected will be described. As shown in FIG. 483 (a), every time a press (operation) on the PUSH button 10317 is detected during the continuous hitting valid period, the voice data in the voice output device 226 (see FIG. 501) described later is reproduced. Of the plurality of provided channels, the audio data corresponding to the pressing is reproduced for either CN2 or CN3. More specifically, when the press is first detected during the continuous striking valid period, the first voice data (first continuous striking sound) is reproduced with respect to CN2. As shown in FIG. 483 (a), the voice data corresponding to the first continuous tapping sound is composed of voice data in which the voice "Bissie" is output by playing back. Further, when the second press is detected during the continuous striking valid period, the second voice data (second continuous striking sound) is reproduced for CN3. As shown in FIG. 483 (a), the voice data corresponding to the second continuous tapping sound is composed of voice data in which the voice "Bassie" is output by playing back. After that, every time a press is detected, the control of playing back the voice data corresponding to the first continuous hitting sound for CN2 and the control of playing back the voice data corresponding to the second continuous hitting sound for CN3 alternate. Is repeated in. In this way, by configuring the configuration to output voice data corresponding to different voices each time a press is detected, it is possible to diversify the voice mode during continuous striking. In other words, since it is possible to suppress the voice mode from becoming monotonous, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game during the continuous striking valid period. Further, in the case where the first continuous tapping sound and the second continuous tapping sound are reproduced alternately on a single channel (that is, the control of cutting off the output of one sound being played and outputting the other sound) is performed. Compared to the case of repeating configuration), it is possible to output the other sound while maintaining the state in which one sound is output (the first and second continuous tapping sounds are output in an overlapping manner). Therefore, it is possible to make the voice mode more lively during the execution of repeated hits. More specifically, in the case of a configuration in which the first continuous hitting sound and the second continuous hitting sound are alternately reproduced on a single channel, when a player who has a short continuous hitting interval performs a continuous hitting operation, the head portion of each voice data is performed. Only will be a monotonous voice mode that is repeated alternately. On the other hand, if a configuration is configured in which a plurality of audio data are sequentially reproduced on a plurality of channels, the output of one audio data reproduced on one channel is not interrupted, and other audio data on the other channel. Can be regenerated. That is, the voice based on one voice data and the voice based on other voice data can be combined and output. Therefore, since it can be configured so that the voice other than the head portion in each voice can be easily output, the voice mode can be further diversified. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the 23rd embodiment, each time a press on the PUSH button 10317 is detected, two types of voice data are alternately reproduced for two channels to diversify the voice mode. The present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be configured in which three or more types of audio data are sequentially reproduced in CN1 and CN2 in order. Thereby, the voice mode can be further diversified. Further, in this case, the number of channels for reproducing the audio data is not limited to two, and the audio data may be sequentially reproduced for three or more channels. With this configuration, from the time when one audio data is played for one channel until the next audio data is played for the same channel (the audio data being played is terminated). Since the period of can be made longer, the voice mode can be further diversified. Further, the type of the output voice data may be different depending on the interval of repeated hits. Specifically, for example, when a player playing a game with a relatively short interval of repeated hits (for example, an interval of 0.5 seconds or less), three types of voice modes are sequentially reproduced in three channels. On the other hand, when the player is playing a game with a relatively long interval of repeated hits (for example, an interval longer than 0.5 second interval), two types of audio data are sequentially transmitted to two channels. It may be configured to be reproduced (alternately). With such a configuration, it is possible to change the output mode of the sound according to the continuous striking interval, so that it is possible to realize the playability of adjusting the continuous striking interval. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the 23rd embodiment, any of the repeated hitting sounds is output in conjunction with the continuous hitting operation, but under predetermined conditions, the repeated hitting sound may be output even if the continuous hitting operation is not performed. .. More specifically, for example, when the last repeated hitting sound during the valid period of the continuous hitting operation is the first continuous hitting sound, the second continuous hitting sound may be output after the end. With this configuration, even though the first and second tapping sounds are output as a set according to the repeated tapping operation, the final output sound becomes the first continuous tapping sound. (That is, the paired second continuous tapping sound is not output), and it is possible to suppress that the voice mode is halfway. Therefore, the voice mode can be set more preferably. In this case, when the last output continuous hitting sound is the first continuous hitting sound, the control to output the second continuous hitting sound after the end is changed to the variable display corresponding to the predetermined variation type (lottery result) (lottery result). For example, it may be configured to be set only during execution of the jackpot fluctuation). With this configuration, for the player who wants to know whether or not it is a predetermined variation type, the continuous hitting sound that is output last during the interrupt continuous hitting effect is intentionally set to the first continuous hitting sound. It is possible to realize the playability. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the 23rd embodiment, the first continuous hitting sound and the second continuous hitting sound are output alternately regardless of the interval between the repeated hits of the player, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the continuous striking operation is detected in a state where the sound is not reproduced, the first continuous striking sound may be output without fail. That is, if the interval between repeated hits is too long and the interval between repeated hits is such that the next repeated hit operation is executed after the reproduction of one repeated hit sound is completed, only the first repeated hit sound is continuously output. It may be configured. With this configuration, the player who wants to diversify the voice mode can execute the continuous striking operation at a faster pace, and thus improve the player's willingness to participate in the interrupt continuous striking effect. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 483 (b), the correspondence between the pressing timing in the continuous hitting effective period of the interrupt continuous hitting effect and the subtraction number of the monsters will be described. In the example of FIG. 483, the correspondence relationship in the interrupt continuous striking effect of the type that can subdue up to 100 monsters will be described as an example. FIG. 483 (b) is a graph showing the correspondence between the elapsed time (horizontal axis) at the time when the pressing of the PUSH button 10317 is detected and the number of monsters subdued (vertical axis). As shown in FIG. 483 (b), the later the pressing timing, the larger the number of monsters subtracted (number of subjugation). As a result, even if the player presses the PUSH button 10317 at a fast pace, it is possible to prevent the player from being subdued early to the lower limit of the number of monsters. That is, it is possible to suppress that the subtraction of the number of monsters based on pressing is stopped at the remaining 10 bodies and the remaining 4 bodies, which are easily set in the case of a loss, and the player's expectation for a big hit is impaired. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. In addition, even when a player whose pressing pace is slow is playing a game, if the pressing is performed in the latter half of the continuous hitting valid period, a relatively large number of subjugation numbers can be easily selected, so that the number of monsters reaches the lower limit. The possibility can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the interrupting continuous hitting effect even for the player whose pressing pace is slow, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The correspondence between the pressing timing and the subtraction number of monsters is not limited to that shown in FIG. 483 (b), and can be arbitrarily determined. Specifically, for example, by reducing the inclination (for example, halving) the correspondence shown in FIG. 483 (b), the number of monsters is the lower limit even if the repeated hits are positively performed. It can make it more difficult to subtract monsters until it becomes. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player perform continuous hits more seriously, it is possible to further improve the player's willingness to participate in the interrupt continuous hit effect. On the other hand, on the contrary, when the inclination is increased, it is relatively easy to subtract the number of monsters until the number of monsters reaches the lower limit by repeated hits, so even a player who is not good at repeated hits can reduce the number of monsters at the lower limit. It can be easily confirmed. Therefore, even a player who is not good at continuous striking can actively participate in the interrupt continuous striking effect. Further, in the 23rd embodiment, the correspondence between the pressing timing and the subtraction number of monsters is configured to be a proportional relation (linear function), but it is a quadratic function correspondence or a logarithmic function. Any designer's correspondence can be set, such as correspondence and exponential correspondence. Further, the correspondence relationship may be configured to be different depending on the production type of the interrupt continuous striking effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to realize a game playability that allows the player to predict the jackpot expectation degree from the transition of the subtraction number in the repeated hits, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 484, the time-dependent change of the effect mode during the execution of the variable display effect in which the interrupt continuous stroke effect is set will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 484 (a), the time-dependent change of the effect mode during the execution of the variable display effect in which the interrupt continuous hit effect is not executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 484 (a), when the variable effect for which the interrupt continuous hit effect is not set is executed, the normal variable display is executed for 10 seconds. Then, while the normal variation display is being executed, the variation display BGM (musical piece 1) corresponding to the normal variation display is played back in a loop. This song 1 is composed of three melody parts, A part, B part, and C part, and by performing loop playback for 10 seconds, the playback position is exactly at the end when 10 seconds have passed. It is configured in.

Then, as shown in FIG. 484 (a), normal reach occurs after 10 seconds have elapsed, and the mode changes to the variable display mode of normal reach. When this normal reach occurs, as shown in FIG. 484 (a), the voice is switched to the BGM (musical piece 2) corresponding to the normal reach fluctuation. Similar to the music 1, the music 2 also has a playback time set so as to end in accordance with the production time of the normal reach effect by performing loop playback.

On the other hand, in the variable display effect in which the interrupt continuous hit effect occurs before the normal reach effect occurs, as shown in FIG. 484 (b), two seconds after the start of the normal variable display effect, , The normal variable display effect is interrupted, and the interrupt continuous hit effect is started (interrupted). When the interrupt continuous hitting effect is executed, not only the display mode (normal variable display effect) but also the voice (normal variable display BGM) is interrupted. Then, 9 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (7 seconds after the start of the interrupt continuous stroke effect), the interrupt continuous stroke effect is terminated, and the normal variable display effect and the variable display BGM are restarted from the interrupted portion. After that, at the timing when 17 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, the normal fluctuation display is terminated and normal reach occurs. That is, normal reach occurs after the normal fluctuation display is executed for a total of 10 seconds. After the development to the normal reach, since it is the same as the transition of the display mode in the variable display in which the interrupt continuous striking effect is not set (see FIG. 484 (a)), the description thereof is omitted here.

Further, in the variable display effect in which the interrupt continuous hit effect occurs after the normal reach effect occurs, as shown in FIG. 484 (c), the reach effect develops after the normal variable display for 10 seconds is executed. Up to this point, it is the same as the transition of the display mode of the variable display effect in which the interrupt continuous striking effect is not set (see FIG. 484 (a)). Then, when 5 seconds have passed since the development of the normal reach effect, the normal reach effect is interrupted and the interrupt continuous hit effect is executed for 7 seconds. Then, when the interrupt continuous hitting effect for 7 seconds is completed, the interrupted normal reach effect is resumed. When the interrupt continuous hitting effect is executed after the reach occurs, only the display mode is interrupted, and the audio output mode is maintained as it is. That is, the BGM for the interrupt continuous hitting effect is reproduced on another channel (for example, CN2 to CN4) while maintaining the reproduction of the BGM for the reach effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the BGM for the relatively lively reach production from being suddenly interrupted and causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

In the 23rd embodiment, the fluctuation types in which the normal reach occurs are a normal reach with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds (outside normal reach A, hit normal reach A) and a normal reach with a fluctuation time of 37 seconds (outside normal reach B, hit normal reach B). ) And are provided. That is, different variation types with different variation times are set for 7 seconds, which is the effect time of the interrupt continuous striking effect. The interrupt continuous striking effect is configured to be executed or not by lottery only when the variation time is a variation type of 37 seconds. With this configuration, by combining the staging mode that can be set for the 30-second variation pattern (30-second staging mode) and the interrupt continuous striking effect staging mode, the variation time is exactly 37 seconds. Can be filled. That is, when the interrupt continuous hitting effect is set, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated effect mode, so that the display data and the voice data can be reduced. Therefore, the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Similarly, for the variation types that do not generate reach and the variation types that develop to super reach, multiple types with different variation times of 7 seconds are set, but the interrupt continuous hitting effect is a variation type that is longer for 7 seconds. It is configured so that it can be set only for. As a result, the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be increased because the 7-second long fluctuation time can be exactly filled by simply combining the effect mode that can be selected in the 7-second short variation type and the effect mode of the interrupt continuous striking effect. It is possible to preferably perform the production without the need for it.

Here, the details will be described later, but in the 23rd embodiment, the fluctuation time of the first symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is determined by lottery in the main control device 110 with the execution of the lottery of the special symbol. The configuration is such that a determination is made and the determined fluctuation time is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a fluctuation pattern command. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 selects a variation display effect of the effect period corresponding to the variation time notified by the variation pattern command, synchronizes with the variation display of the first symbol, and synchronizes with the variation display effect of the third symbol. Is configured to execute. The fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is composed of a basic time command indicating a basic fluctuation time and an additional time command indicating an additional fluctuation time, and is the fluctuation time longer by 7 seconds? Whether or not it is configured to be notified by an additional time command. More specifically, when the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is determined, the command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as the basic time command, and the command corresponding to 0 seconds is notified as the additional fluctuation time. You will be notified. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time of 37 seconds is determined, the command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as the basic time command, and the command corresponding to 7 seconds is notified as the additional fluctuation time. .. That is, it is configured so that it can be identified whether or not the variation type is 7 seconds longer by the notification content of the additional time command. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the variable type is the lottery target for whether or not the interrupt continuous hitting effect can be executed simply by checking the content of the additional time command. In addition, when it is decided to execute the interrupt continuous striking effect, the variation time can be just filled by setting the effect mode corresponding to the variation time (7 seconds shorter variation time) notified by the basic time command. can. Therefore, it is possible to easily match the end timing of the effect mode with the end timing of the variable display effect without preparing an effect mode dedicated to the interrupt continuous striking effect, so that a suitable effect mode can be provided.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 485 to 486, a hold batch change effect, which is a kind of entertaining effect in the 23rd embodiment, will be described. This hold batch change effect is an effect that may be executed when a plurality of hold balls exist, and at least a part of the hold ball number symbols among the plurality of hold ball number symbols is one of the players. It is an effect that is changed to a display mode with high expectation based on the operation of. In FIGS. 485 to 486, there are four reserved balls, and the second reserved ball number symbol Hz2 is changed to the blue display mode, and the third reserved ball number symbol Hz3 is changed to the green display mode. , The case where the hold batch change effect is executed will be described as an example. It should be noted that the display mode of the reserved ball number symbol is configured so that the degree of expectation of a big hit increases in the order of white, blue, green, and red. The display mode of the reserved ball number symbol is basically various types acquired based on the starting prize when the starting prize (ball entering the first ball opening 64 or the second ball opening 640) is detected. It is determined based on a random number value (counter value). More specifically, from various random value values acquired at the time of starting winning, the probability of winning or not when the special symbol lottery is executed and the fluctuation type are predicted (pre-read) in advance, and according to the prediction result (pre-reading result). With the lottery probability, it is drawn to which display mode the reserved ball number symbol is set. In this lottery, the pre-reading result corresponding to the lottery result having a high expectation is controlled so that the ratio set in the reserved ball number symbol in the aspect having a high expectation becomes high. Since the timing of the start winning is variable according to the player's game situation (pace of launching the game ball, etc.), the hold batch change effect is executed independently of the variable display effect. .. That is, it is an effect that may be executed over a variable period of a plurality of variable display effects (may be within one variable period).

FIG. 485 (a) is a diagram showing a display mode at the time when the hold batch change effect is executed. This hold batch change effect may be executed when a plurality of hold balls exist at the time when a new start prize is detected. When the hold batch change effect is executed, first, the hold change character HC, which suggests the start of the hold batch change effect, frame-in the display from above the display screen into the plane. As shown in FIG. 485 (a), the pending change character HC has a portion corresponding to the face displayed in a manner imitating the PUSH button 10317. Depending on the display mode of the pending change character HC, it is possible to suggest to the player in advance that the effect of pressing the PUSH button 10371 is executed.

After the reserved change character HC appears (frames in), as shown in FIG. 485 (b), each of the reserved ball number symbols Hz1 to Hz4 is changed to a display mode imitating a rock. That is, the expected degree (display color of the reserved ball number symbol) indicated by the reserved ball number symbol is temporarily changed to a concealed state. Further, a balloon image FG imitating a balloon is displayed above the hold change character HC, and the characters "hold rank UP with the button PUSH !?" are displayed inside the balloon image FG. With this display mode, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the expectation (display color) of any of the reserved ball number symbols is improved by pressing the PUSH button 10317 to the player. can.

FIG. 486 (a) is a diagram showing a display mode when the player presses the PUSH button 10317 during the execution of the hold batch change effect. As shown in FIG. 486 (a), when the player presses the PUSH button 10317, all the reserved ball numbers that have been changed to the display mode imitating a rock, the rocks around the symbol pop off, and the normal reserved ball. An effect of returning to the display mode of several symbols is executed. Further, at this time, the degree of expectation indicated by at least a part of the reserved ball number symbols is higher than before the occurrence of the reserved batch change effect. In the example of FIG. 486 (a), the second reserved ball number symbol Hz2, which was set to the blue display mode before the execution of the hold batch change effect, was changed to the red display mode after the hold batch change effect. Shows the case.

By executing this hold batch change effect, it is confirmed that the degree of expectation indicated by at least one hold ball number symbol is increased, so that the player's expectation for a big hit can be improved. In addition, since it is not known until the PUSH button 10317 is pressed which hold ball number symbol changes (expectation increases), the operation for the PUSH button 10317 is looking forward to which hold ball number symbol changes. Can be done. Further, since the expectation degree is notified by pressing the PUSH button 10317, the notification timing can be adjusted to the player's favorite timing. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved.

FIG. 486 (b) shows a state in which the hold change character HC (mini character) fades out of the screen during the valid period of the hold batch change effect. When the hold change character HC fades out of the screen, the valid period is interrupted even if the operation valid period in the hold batch change effect remains. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 486 (b), even if the player presses the PUSH button 10317, the effect of changing the expectation of each reserved ball number symbol (see FIG. 486 (a)) is executed. There is no. The effect in which the mini character is absent is executed, for example, when another operation effect accompanied by an operation on the PUSH button 10317 conflicts with the hold batch change effect. The absence of the hold change character HC corresponding to the hold batch change effect makes it easy for the player to understand that the operation validity period has been temporarily interrupted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the PUSH button 10317 from being dissatisfied with the fact that the operation does not develop by misunderstanding that the operation for the PUSH button 10317 is effective in the hold batch change effect. Therefore, a more suitable staging mode can be realized.

<Electrical configuration in the 23rd embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 487. FIG. 487 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 488) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 488, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like use the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, drawing the display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

To set the display of the jackpot lottery and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a special hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, a special hit type counter C2 used for selecting the jackpot symbol, and the like. The stop type counter C3 used to select the stop type, the fall lottery counter C4 used for the fall lottery from the probable change state of the special symbol, the fluctuation type counter CS1 used to select the fluctuation pattern, and the special hit random number counter. The initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of C1 is used. Further, the normal hit random number counter C5 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the normal hit random number counter C5. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 502), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 511). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203qa consisting of four hold areas (hold 1st to 4th areas), and each of these areas has a ball entering the first ball entry port 64. Each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the fall lottery counter C4, and the variable type counter CS1 is stored according to the timing. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203qb consisting of four holding areas (holding 1st to 4th areas), and each of these areas has a special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203qb, and each of these areas has a second entry port 640. Each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the fall lottery counter C4, and the variable type counter CS1 are stored according to the ball entry timing. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball execution area, and is a special hit random number counter C1, a special hit type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, a fall lottery counter C4, and a variation, which are targets for executing a lottery. Each value of the type counter CS1 is stored. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203qc consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and a game ball is provided in each of these areas. The value of the normal hit random number counter C5 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the normal entry port (through gate) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The special hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 999), reaches the maximum value (for example, 999 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 999), and then becomes 0. It is configured to return. In particular, when the special hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special hit random number counter C1.

Further, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the special hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the special hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 999, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 999. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 502), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 511).

The value of the special hit random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and when the game ball enters the first entry slot 64, the value is changed. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa of the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the game ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb.

The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the special symbol jackpot random number 23 table 202qa (see FIG. 490 (a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is set. , Special symbol jackpot random number 23 When it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by the table 202qa, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number 23 table 202qa is used for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (a period in which the probability of becoming a special symbol jackpot is higher than that of the low probability time). It is divided into two types, one for the period in which the special symbol is in the probabilistic state), and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots included in each is set differently (see FIG. 490 (a)). In this way, by making the number of random numbers that become big hits different, the probability of becoming a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol.

The special hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). , It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the special hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and when the game ball enters the first entry slot 64, the value is set. Is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa (special symbol reserved ball execution area if the special symbol lottery is not being executed) of the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the game ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb of the RAM 203 (if the special symbol lottery is not being executed, the special symbol reserved ball execution area). ).

Here, if the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first symbol is displayed. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the device 37 is the one when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. Is the one at the time of the big hit of the special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb. Become.

The special hit random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 999. In this special hit random number counter C1, there are four random numbers that become big hits of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random numbers "0 to 3" are the special symbol big hit random numbers 23 for the low probability. It is stored in a table (see FIG. 490 (a)). As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that become big hits is 4 while the total number of random numbers is 1000, so the probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol is "1/250". The random number value (counter value) that becomes a big hit is common to the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are eight random numbers that are the jackpots of the special symbol, and the values "4 to 11" are stored in the special symbol jackpot random number 23 table for the high probability. (FIG. 490 (a)). As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that become big hits is 8 while the total number of random numbers is 1000, so the probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol is "1/125".

Further, the value of the special hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 491 (b), when the lottery of the first special symbol is a big hit and the value of the special hit type counter C2 is "0 to 9", the big hit type is "big hit A" (15). Round probability change jackpot). In addition, the jackpot type when the value is "10 to 49" is "big hit B" (5 round probability variation jackpot), and the jackpot type when the value is "50 to 99" is "big hit C". (5 rounds usually a big hit).

On the other hand, when the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit and the value of the special hit type counter C2 is "0 to 79", the big hit type is "big hit D" (15 round probability variation big hit). Further, when the value is "80 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit E" (15 rounds normal jackpot).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, one jackpot type is selected from five types of jackpot types (big hits A to E) depending on the type of the special symbol and the value of the random number indicated by the special hit type counter C2. It is configured to be determined.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 250, reach the maximum value (that is, 250), and then return to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type of the stop symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Examples of the stop type include "front and back off reach" in which the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol after the reach occurs, and the final stop symbol is before and after the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. "Reach other than front and rear disengagement" that stops at other than, "complete disengagement" that does not cause reach, etc. are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and when a game ball enters the first entry port 64, the value is RAM 203. Is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa (special symbol reserved ball execution area if the special symbol lottery is not being executed). Further, when the game ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is set in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb of the RAM 203 (or the special symbol reserved ball execution area if the special symbol lottery is not being executed). Stored.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, reach the maximum value (that is, 198), and then return to 0. The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the fine symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. To. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 511) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern selection 23 table 202qb (see FIG. 492 (a)), which stores a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1, is the main control device 110. It is provided in ROM 202.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 492 and 493, the variation pattern selection 23 table 202qb used when the main control device 110 selects the variation pattern will be described. FIG. 492 (a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 23 table 202qb. As shown in FIG. 492 (a), the variation pattern selection 23 table 202qb in the 23rd embodiment has a symbol variation for showing the lottery result of the special symbol when the special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state. When the special symbol lottery is executed in the normal table 202qb1 referred to for determining the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the game state (probability change state and time reduction state) in which the time reduction state of the normal symbol is set, the symbol variation It is composed of at least a probability variation / time saving table 202qb2, which is referred to for determining the fluctuation time of.

First, the normal table 202qb1 will be described with reference to FIG. 492 (b). FIG. 492 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the normal table 202qb1. Various fluctuation patterns are defined in the normal table 202qb1 corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are defined for each of the fluctuation patterns. The value of is assigned. In addition, when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, it varies according to the determined jackpot type (the jackpot type determined from the jackpot type selection 23 table 202qd according to the acquired special hit type counter C2 value). The pattern is set. Specifically, the type of the special symbol (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special diagram 1), the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit, and the value of the acquired stop type selection counter C3 is "0 to 50". When the value of the acquired fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 180", the normal reach A is defined as the fluctuation pattern per 30 seconds of fluctuation time. When the normal reach A is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 30 seconds and an additional time of 0 seconds is output as a fluctuation pattern command. Since the additional time is 0 seconds, when the normal reach A is notified to the voice lamp control device 113, the interrupt continuous striking effect (see FIG. 482) is not executed as described above. When the value of the acquired stop type selection counter C3 is "0 to 50" and the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "181 to 198", the variation pattern is normal reach B per 37 seconds of variation time. Is stipulated. When the normal reach B is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 30 seconds and an additional time of 7 seconds is output as a fluctuation pattern command. Since the additional time is 7 seconds, when the normal reach B is notified to the voice lamp control device 113, whether or not the interrupt continuous hitting effect (see FIG. 482) can be executed is drawn by lottery as described above.

Further, as shown in FIG. 492 (b), the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is "51 to 250" and the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 150" as a variation pattern. Super reach A per 60 seconds of fluctuation time is defined, and super reach B per 67 seconds of fluctuation time is defined in the range where the value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "151 to 198". In the hit super reach A, since the additional time is 0 seconds, there is no possibility that the interrupt continuous hitting effect is executed, while in the hit super reach B, the additional time command indicating that the additional time is 7 seconds is voiced. Since the lamp control device 113 is notified, it is drawn whether or not the interrupt continuous hitting effect can be executed.

Further, when the symbol type is special figure 1 and the hit / fail determination result is incorrect, similarly, as shown in FIG. 492 (b), the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the value of the variable type counter CS1 correspond to each other. Therefore, a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation time of 8 seconds to 67 seconds is set is defined. Even in the case of deviation, in the fluctuation pattern in which the additional time command corresponding to the additional time of 7 seconds is specified, the voice lamp control device 113 is drawn to determine whether or not the interrupt continuous hitting effect can be executed, while the additional time of 0 seconds is specified. In the fluctuation pattern in which the additional time command corresponding to is specified, the interrupt continuous hitting effect is not executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 492 (b), when the symbol type is special figure 2, when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit (big hit D, big hit E), the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variable type selection counter. Regardless of the value of CS1, long fluctuation A per 150 seconds of fluctuation time is specified as the fluctuation pattern, and if the result of the hit / fail judgment is incorrect, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 Regardless of the value, a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 150 seconds is specified. This is because the game efficiency is deteriorated when a right-handed hit is performed in an attempt to execute a lottery for the second special symbol, which is advantageous in the distribution of jackpots in the normal state (that is, the ratio of winning jackpots is high). The purpose is to suppress the irregular game method of hitting right at normal times.

Next, with reference to FIG. 493, the specified contents of the probability change / time saving table 202qb2 will be described. As shown in FIG. 493, various fluctuation patterns are set in the probability change / time saving table 202qb2 in accordance with the lottery result of the special symbol, and the stop type selection counter C3 is set for each of the fluctuation patterns. The value of is assigned to the value of the variable type counter CS1. In the probability variation / time saving table 202qb2, a relatively short fluctuation time can be easily set with respect to the normal table 202qb1, and the fluctuation time common to the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. The only difference is that is configured to be selected, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted here. By configuring so that a short fluctuation time can be easily set, it is possible to execute a special symbol lottery more efficiently than in other game states during the probabilistic state in which the time reduction state of the normal symbol is set and the time reduction state. can do.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 488. The normal hit random number counter C5 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the normal hit random number counter C5 makes one round, the value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the normal hit random number counter C5. In the present embodiment, the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 is updated periodically, for example, at each timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the through gate 67, and the normal symbol of the RAM 203 is held. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203qc.

The value of the random number that is the hit of the normal symbol is defined in the normal hit random number 23 table 202qc (see FIG. 490 (b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 is set. , Ordinary hit random number 23 When it matches the value of the random number to be the hit specified in the table 202qc, it is determined to be the hit of the normal symbol. In addition, this normal hit random number 23 table 202qc is for a low probability time of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state) and a high probability time (normal symbol) with a higher probability of hitting a normal symbol than the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for (a period in which the time is shortened) and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently (see FIG. 490 (b)). In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be hit different, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability time of the normal symbol and the high probability time of the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 490 (b), when the probability of the normal symbol is low, there are two random values that are hit by the normal symbol, and the values are "5, 6". As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that become a jackpot is 2 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/120".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol and the game ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 is obtained. In, the variation display of the normal symbol is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired normal hit random number counter C5 is within the range of "5, 6", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a is released only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits, but it is opened. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random numbers are stored in the normal hit random number 23 table for high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random random values is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "1 / 1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol and the game ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 is obtained. In, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired normal hit random number counter C5 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol. In this case, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the electric accessory 640a is opened "1 second x 2 times". Will be done. In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is further shortened. Since it becomes very long as "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the second entry port 640. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a is released only "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbol hits, but the opening time and the like. The number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 2 times".

The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the normal hit random number counter C5 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 502). , Is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 511).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 487, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 488, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, and I / O. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 511) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 510) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (see FIG. 509) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Next, the specific contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. 489 (a). FIG. 489 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the present embodiment. In the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, as a part of the above-mentioned fixed value data, a special symbol jackpot random number 23 table 202qa, a variation pattern selection 23 table 202qb, a normal hit random number 23 table 202qc, a jackpot type selection 23 table 202qd, a fall lottery At least the table 202qe and the open pattern selection table 202qf are stored.

The special symbol jackpot random number 23 table 202qa (see FIG. 490 (a)) is a data table in which the correspondence between the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the lottery result is defined. Specifically, "0 to 3" is defined as a range of judgment values to be judged as a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol, and the judgment to be judged as a big hit in the high probability state (probability change state) of the special symbol. “4 to 11” is specified as the range of values (see FIG. 490 (a)). When the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired based on the start prize matches any of the judgment values corresponding to the jackpot specified in the special symbol jackpot random number 23 table 202qa (see FIG. 490 (a)). , It is determined that it is a big hit of a special symbol.

The jackpot type selection 23 table 202qd (see FIG. 491 (a)) is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored for each special symbol type, and the determination value of the special hit type counter C2 is set. , It is specified in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the big hit type selection 23 table 202qd, and the special hit type is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the counter C2 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 491 (a), the jackpot type selection 23 table 202qd is referred to for determining the jackpot type when a jackpot is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol (lottery of special figure 1). Fig. 1 23 tables 202qd1 for big hits and special figure 2 23 tables 202qd2 for big hits that are referred to to determine the big hit type when a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol (lottery of special figure 2). At least configured. First, with reference to FIG. 491 (b), the details of the special figure 1 jackpot 23 table 202qd1 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 491 (b), the value of the special hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 9" in association with "big hit A" (see FIG. 491 (b)). This "big hit A" has 15 rounds, and after the big hit is completed, a probable change state is given (an opening / closing pattern that enables the ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a during the period distributed to the V region is set. ) It's a big hit. Of the 100 counter values that the special hit type counter C2 can take, the counter value that becomes "big hit A" is 10, so if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit A" is determined. The ratio is 10% (10/100). This "big hit A" has the largest number of rounds in the jackpot of the first special symbol, and is given an advantageous probability change state after the jackpot ends, so that the most advantageous jackpot in the jackpot of the first special symbol It is a type.

Further, in the range where the value of the special hit type counter C2 is "10 to 49", "big hit B" is associated and defined (see FIG. 491 (b)). This "big hit B" has 5 rounds, and after the big hit is completed, a probable change state is given (an opening / closing pattern is set so that the ball can be entered into the specific winning opening 65a during the period when the ball is distributed to the V area. ) It's a big hit. Of the 100 counter values that the special hit type counter C2 can take, the counter value that becomes "big hit B" is 40, so if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit B" is determined. The ratio is 40% (40/100). Although the number of rounds of this "big hit B" is smaller than that of "big hit A", it is a relatively advantageous big hit type because it is given an advantageous probability change state after the end of the big hit.

Further, in the range where the value of the special hit type counter C2 is "50 to 99", "big hit C" is associated and defined (see FIG. 491 (b)). This "big hit C" has 5 rounds, and after the big hit is completed, a time saving state is given (an opening / closing pattern is set so that the ball cannot be entered into the specific winning opening 65a during the period when the ball is distributed to the V area. It is a big hit. Of the 100 counter values that the special hit type counter C2 can take, 50 are counter values that become "big hit C", so if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit C" is determined. The ratio is 50% (50/100). This "big hit C" is the most unfavorable jackpot type among the jackpots of the first special symbol because the number of rounds is the smallest and the game state after the jackpot is set to a relatively disadvantageous time saving state. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 491 (c), the details of the special figure 2 jackpot 23 table 202qd2 will be described. As shown in FIG. 491 (c), the value of the special hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 79" in association with "big hit D" (see FIG. 491 (c)). This "big hit D" has 15 rounds, and after the big hit is completed, a probable change state is given (an opening / closing pattern that enables the ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a during the period distributed to the V region is set. ) It's a big hit. Of the 100 counter values that the special hit type counter C2 can take, 80 counter values are "big hit D", so "big hit D" is determined when a big hit is obtained in the second special symbol lottery. The ratio is 80% (80/100). This "big hit D" is the most advantageous jackpot type because it has the largest number of rounds among the jackpots and is given an advantageous probability variation state after the jackpot ends.

Further, as shown in FIG. 491 (c), the value of the special hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of “80 to 99” in association with “big hit E” (see FIG. 491 (c)). ). This "big hit E" has 15 rounds, and after the big hit is completed, a time saving state is given (an opening / closing pattern is set so that the ball cannot be entered into the specific winning opening 65a during the period when the ball is distributed to the V area. It is a big hit. Of the 100 counter values that the special hit type counter C2 can take, 20 counter values are "big hit E", so if a big hit is obtained in the second special symbol lottery, "big hit E" is determined. The ratio is 20% (20/100). Although this "big hit E" has the largest number of rounds among the big hits, it is a big hit type that is disadvantageous in terms of the game state after the big hit because a disadvantageous time saving state is given after the big hit ends.

As described above, in the 23rd embodiment, when a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the first special symbol, the probabilistic big hit (big hit A, B) is determined at a rate of 50%, while the second When a big hit is made by a special symbol lottery, the probability variable big hit (big hit D) is determined at a rate of 80%. Therefore, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, the player can be expected to have a stronger expectation of a probable change state. As described above, in the 23rd embodiment, when the jackpot type is clearly indicated to the player, it is extremely rare (1% in the case of a probability variation jackpot). Then, after the big hit is completed, the time saving state of the normal symbol is maintained until the lottery of the special symbol is executed 100 times. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the probabilistic state is set or the time saving state is set from the end of the big hit to the execution of the special symbol lottery 100 times. Even if an unfavorable time saving state is set, the game can be played with the expectation that it will be in a probable change state until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times. Also, if a big hit occurs within 100 times, even if it is a big hit in a time-saving state, it can be made to think that it was a big hit during the probable change state, so it is possible to enter the probable change state more than it should be. It can make you feel as if the rate and continuation rate are high. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

The normal hit random number 23 table 202qc (see FIG. 490 (b)) is a data table in which the hit determination value of the normal symbol is defined (stored). Specifically, in the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol, "5, 6" is defined as the determination value for hitting the normal symbol (see FIG. 490 (b)). Further, in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, "5 to 204" is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the ordinary symbol (see FIG. 490 (b)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the 23rd embodiment, the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 acquired based on the passage of the game ball through the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67 and the normal hit random number 23 table 202qc are obtained. By referring to it, it is judged whether or not it is a hit of a normal symbol.

The variation pattern selection 23 table 202qb (see FIG. 492 (a)) is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode. Since the details of the variation pattern selection 23 table 202qb are as described above in the description of the variation type counter CS1, the detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

The fall lottery table 202qe is a data table in which the determination value of the fall lottery counter C4, which is determined to be a fall, is defined. The value of the fall lottery counter C4 acquired when the ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 (at the time of the start winning) in the probabilistic state of the special symbol is the fall lottery table 202qe. If it matches any of the judgment values specified in, it is set to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol (to fall).

More specifically, two determination values of "0, 1" are defined as determination values for determining a fall in the probable change state of the special symbol. Here, the fall lottery counter C4 is a loop counter whose value is updated in the range of "0 to 999". Of the 1000 possible values of the fall lottery counter C4, there are two judgment values that are determined to fall, so the probability of falling (shifting to the low probability state of the special symbol) in the probabilistic state of the special symbol. Is 1/500 (2/1000).

In the fall lottery table 202qe in the present embodiment, only the determination value for determining whether or not the special symbol has fallen in the probabilistic state (determination value for the probabilistic state of the special symbol) is defined, and the special symbol is specified. The judgment value for the low probability state of is not specified. This is because it is a waste of processing to determine whether or not to shift to the low-probability state of the special symbol when the special symbol is already in the low-probability state.

In the present embodiment, the fall lottery table 202qe is compared with the regularly updated fall lottery counter C4, and whether or not to shift (fall) from the probabilistic state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol. Is determined. That is, the timing of transition from the probable change state to the time saving state can be randomized. Therefore, when the probabilistic state shifts to the probabilistic state, the player can play the game while having a feeling of tension that he / she does not know when the probable change state will end, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the 23rd embodiment, it was drawn (determined) whether or not to shift (fall) from the probabilistic state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol, but it is decided to shift to another state. It may be configured so that lottery (judgment) is possible. For example, whether or not to shift from the time saving state of the normal symbol to the normal state of the normal symbol may be determined by a lottery executed for each change. As a result, the number of times the normal symbol can be continued in the shortened time state can be made random, so that the game can be played with a sense of tension in this case as well. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

The open pattern selection table 202qf is a data table in which data for setting a pattern according to the jackpot type is defined as an open pattern (opening / closing pattern of the specific winning opening 65a) in the fifth round of the jackpot. Although not shown in the figure, in the fifth round of the probabilistic jackpot (big hit A, B, D), the distribution device (V accessory) is arranged in a state of distributing the game ball to the first region (V region). During the open period (5 seconds to 10 seconds after the start of the 5th round), the game ball can reach the distribution device (5 seconds to 9 from the start of the 5th round). The data for setting the opening period (opening period until the lapse of 5 seconds) is read out. On the other hand, in the fifth round of the normal jackpot (big hits C and E), the period (starting the fifth round) in which the distribution device (V accessory) is arranged in a state of distributing the game ball to the second region (non-V region). Set an open period (4.5 seconds from immediately after the start of the 5th round to 4.5 seconds after the start of the 5th round) during which the game ball can reach the distribution device during the period from immediately after to 5 seconds. The data to be read is read out.

Next, the details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. 489 (b). FIG. 489 (b) is a block diagram showing a configuration of RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 486 (b), the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203qc, a special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203qd, and a special symbol. 2 Hold ball number counter 203qe, Normal symbol hold ball number counter 203qf, Time saving medium counter 203qg, Probability change flag 203qh, Big hit start flag 203qi, Big hit medium flag 203qj, Probability change setting flag 203qk, Probability change pass counter 203qm, Winning number counter 203qp, Remaining It has at least a ball timer flag 203qq, a remaining ball timer 203qr, a probability variation effective flag 203qs, a probability variation effective timer 203qt, a discharge number counter 203qu, and other memory areas 203z.

The special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203qa has four hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area), and each of these areas has a special hit random number counter C1, a special hit type counter C2, and a special hit type counter C2. The values of the stop type selection counter C3, the fall lottery counter C4, and the variable type counter CS1 are stored.

More specifically, each value of each counter C1 to C4, CS1 is acquired at the timing when the game ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting winning), and the acquired data is the four holding areas. Among the vacant areas (holding 1st area to holding 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the values of the counters C1 to C4 and CS1 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa are the special symbols. It is shifted (moved) to the reserved ball execution area (see FIG. 488), and a determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C4 and CS1 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the special symbol hold ball execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having a smaller area number. Will be done. In the 23rd embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa, the data shift is performed only for the reserved area (reserved second area to reserved fourth area) in which the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb has four reserved areas as in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa. In the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb, each counter value acquired based on the start winning to the second ball entry port 640 is stored. Since the method of storing the counter value is the same as that of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203qc has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). A random number counter C5 is normally stored in each of these areas. More specifically, the value of the counter C5 is acquired at the timing when the game ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding). Among the vacant areas of the 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb, the winning order is maintained and the data corresponding to the winning is stored. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C5 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203qc is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed based on the value of the counter C5 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb, the same applies to the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qb. A shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in another holding area is packed into the holding area one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of times of waiting) of the variable display (variation display performed by the display device 81) up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a game ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. Is added by 1 (see Z404 in FIG. 505). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see Z210 in FIG. 503).

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd (holding number N1 of the variation display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (Z211 in FIG. 503, Z405 in FIG. 505). reference). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203qd is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 holds the fluctuation display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203qd is changed. The value of the number of balls itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223qa of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual reserved ball in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry (starting prize) into the second entry port 640. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of times of waiting) of the variable display (variation display performed by the display device 81) up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a game ball enters the second entry port 640 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. Is added by 1 (see Z410 in FIG. 505). On the other hand, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see Z205 in FIG. 503). The value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command, similarly to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203qf is a reserved ball number (2nd symbol) of the normal symbol (second symbol) variable display performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the game ball at the normal entry port (through gate) 67. It is a counter that counts the number of times of waiting) up to 4 times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203qf is set to zero, and each time the game ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value 4. (See Z704 in FIG. 508). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203qf is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see Z605 in FIG. 507).

When the game ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203qf (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 is acquired. , The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203qc (Z705 in FIG. 508). On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203qf is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203qc (Z703 in FIG. 508: No).

The time saving medium counter 203qg is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203qg is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203qg is 0 and the probability variation flag 203qh is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. The initial value of the time saving / medium counter 203qg is set to zero, a special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110, and 100 is set at the end of the big hit every time a big hit is made (FIG. 514). See Z1303). Further, regardless of the jackpot type, when a jackpot is obtained by lottery of a special symbol, the value is set to 0 at the start of the variable display indicating the jackpot (see Z310 in FIG. 504). By configuring the value to be set to 0 at the start of the variation display indicating the jackpot, there is a possibility that the time saving state has ended, such as the normal symbol being out of the range during the variation display executed in the time saving state of the normal symbol. When a certain behavior occurs, the expectation for a big hit can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

When a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203qg and the state of the probability variation flag 203qh are referred to, and the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203qg is 1 or more, or the probability variation flag 203qh is on. For example, it is determined that the time is shortened for a normal symbol. In this case, a lottery of ordinary symbols is performed based on the ordinary random number 23 table 202qc for high probability (see Z609 in FIG. 507). On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203qg is 0 and the probability variation flag 203qh is off, it is determined to be the normal state of the normal symbol, and it is normal based on the normal random number 23 table 202qc for low probability time. A lottery of symbols is performed (see Z610 in FIG. 507).

The probability change flag 203qh is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol. If the probability change flag 203qh is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol. If the flag 203qh is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state of a special symbol. Further, as described above, during the probabilistic state of the special symbol, the time is shortened for the normal symbol. Therefore, when the probability change flag 203qh is on, it indicates that the special symbol is in the probability change state and the normal symbol is in the time saving state.

The initial value of the probability change flag 203qh is set to off, and when the game ball enters the first region (V region) in the variable winning device 65 in the fifth round of the jackpot, at the end of the jackpot. Set to on (see Z1302 in FIG. 514). Further, the probability change flag 203qh is reset to off when the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained in the probability change state (see Z305 in FIG. 504) and when the change display of the jackpot is started (see Z310 in FIG. 504). Will be.

This probability change flag 203qh is referred to in the special symbol change start processing 23 for determining whether or not the gaming state is the probability change state (see Z302 in FIG. 504). Specifically, when the special symbol change start processing 23 (FIG. 504, Z208) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol change start processing 23 (FIG. 504, Z208), the probability variation flag 203qh is referred to, and if it is on, the fall lottery is first executed, and if it is not, the first random number table for high probability is used. A special symbol lottery is performed based on 202qa (see FIG. 490 (a)). On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203qh is off, or the probability variation flag 203qh is on, and it is determined that the player has fallen by the fall lottery, the special symbol jackpot random number 23 table 202qa for low probability (FIG. 490 (a)). Based on (see), a lottery of special symbols will be held.

Further, the probability variation flag 203qh is also referred to in the normal symbol variation processing 23 for determining whether or not the gaming state is the time saving state (Z608, Z614, Z620 in FIG. 507). Specifically, if the probability variation flag 203qh and the above-mentioned time reduction / medium counter 203qg are referred to in the normal symbol variation processing 23 and the probability variation flag 203qh is on or the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203qg is 1 or more. , It is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state, and a lottery of the normal symbol is performed based on the normal hit random number 23 table 202qc (see FIG. 490 (b)) for high probability time (see Z609 in FIG. 507). On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203qh is off and the value of the time saving / medium counter 203qg is 0, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the normal state, and the second random number table 202qc for low probability time (FIG. 490 (FIG. 490). b) A lottery of ordinary symbols is performed based on (see Z610 in FIG. 507). Further, in the ordinary symbol variation processing 23, the probability variation flag 203qh is also referred to when determining the variation time of the ordinary symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a in the case of hitting the ordinary symbol (Z614 in FIG. 507). , Z620).

The jackpot start flag 203qi is a flag indicating whether or not to start the jackpot. If the jackpot start flag 203qi is on, it means that it is the timing to start the jackpot, and if it is off, it means that it is not the timing to start the jackpot. The jackpot start flag 203qi is set to ON when the end timing of the variation display indicating the jackpot is reached (see Z217 in FIG. 503). Further, the jackpot start flag 203qi is set to off when the jackpot start is set (see Z1103 in FIG. 512).

The jackpot middle flag 203qj is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot (special game state) is in progress. If the jackpot flag 203qj is on, it means that the jackpot is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the jackpot is not in progress. The jackpot middle flag 203qj becomes a jackpot by a lottery of a special symbol, and is set to on when the jackpot (special game state) is started (see Z1103 in FIG. 512). It is also set to off at the end of the jackpot (special game state) (see Z1305 in FIG. 514). In the special symbol variation processing 23 (see FIG. 503), the jackpot hit flag 203qj is referred to to determine whether or not the jackpot is hit (see Z201 in FIG. 503).

The probability change setting flag 203qk is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the probability change state after the big hit game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probabilistic state is determined by whether or not the gaming ball has entered the first region (V region) during the jackpot game. Here, when it is detected that the game ball has entered the first region (passage of the probability variation switch provided in the first region), the probability variation setting flag 203qk is set to ON (Z1415 in FIG. 515). .. On the other hand, this probability variation setting flag 203qk is set to off at the end of the jackpot (see Z1305 in FIG. 514). The probability variation setting flag 203qk is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is set to off.

If the probability change setting flag 203qk is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the probability change switch has passed before the power is turned off, and if it can be determined that the probability change switch has passed, the probability change setting flag 203qk is used. May be officially set to on and configured to return. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the probability change switch has passed before the power is turned off by checking whether the probability change passage counter 203qm, which will be described later, has a value larger than 0. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the damage on the amusement shop side by rewriting only the probability change setting flag 203qk to be turned on and determining the fraud that the power is turned on again when the power is turned off. can.

The probability variation passage counter 203qm is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the probability variation switch (entered the V region) in one round during the jackpot game (in this embodiment, one round of the jackpot). .. It is possible to determine whether all the game balls that have won in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 have been discharged from the sum of the probability variation passing counter 203qm and the discharge number counter 203q described later. The probability variation passage counter 203qm is incremented and updated by 1 when the probability variation switch is passed (the ball entering the V region is detected) (Z1414 in FIG. 515). Further, after executing the determination process of whether or not the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 65 and the number of ejected balls match, the initial value is reset to "0" (Z1511 in FIG. 516). The probability variation pass counter 203qm is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The winning number counter 203qp is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game, and the winning in the specific winning opening 65a is detected. Is added and updated one by one (Z1403 in FIG. 515). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes won in the variable winning device 65 (value of the winning number counter 203qp) and the number discharged (total value of the discharge number counter 203q and the probability variation passing counter 203qm) are one. After it is determined whether or not it is done, it is reset to the initial value "0" (see Z1511 in FIG. 516). The value of the winning number counter 203qp is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The remaining ball timer flag 203qq is a flag indicating whether or not the ball brushing period is after the end of one round and the closing of the specific winning opening 65a. When this remaining ball timer flag 203qq is set to on, it means that it is a ball brushing period. While the remaining ball timer flag 203qq is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203qr, which will be described later, is incremented and updated by 1 (see Z1505 in FIG. 516). The remaining ball timer 203qr is a counter for determining the time since the specific winning opening 65a is closed, and determines whether the time required for the game ball in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed. It is a counter for.

The remaining ball timer 203qr is required to eject the game ball that has won the variable winning device 65 when the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is closed after one round set in advance is completed. It is a counter for determining whether time has passed. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball winning in the variable winning device 65 to be ejected is 0.5 seconds, and in the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 0.8 seconds in advance is the remaining ball timer. It is set as the upper limit of 203qr. Based on the upper limit of the remaining ball timer 203qr (0.8 seconds in this embodiment), it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the variable winning device 65 and the number of ejections thereof match. (Z1507 in FIG. 516). If they do not match, an error command is set to notify that fact. Therefore, it is possible to notify at an early stage that the game ball is jammed in the variable winning device 65. In addition, the ball is illegally left in the variable winning device 65, and the game ball is transferred to the distribution device (V character) at the timing when 5 seconds have passed from the start of the 5th round of the jackpot C and the jackpot E. It is possible to suppress fraud that causes it to flow down.

If the number of winnings and the number of ejects do not match, a dedicated flag is set to on, and if that flag is on, the probability change setting flag 203qk is turned on even if the game ball passes through the probability change switch. It may be configured not to be set to. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an illegally assigned probabilistic state.

The probability change effective flag 203qs passes (enters the V area) when the game ball passes through the probability change switch (enters the V area) after the V accessory is switched to the arrangement that cannot be distributed to the first area (V area). It is a flag for determining whether or not to enable (entering a ball). When the probability change effective flag 203qs is set to ON, it indicates that it is a normal period for the game ball to pass through the probability change switch.

The probabilistic valid timer 203qt is a counter for counting the time after the above-mentioned probabilistic valid flag 203qs is set to ON. After the V accessory is switched to the non-V side arrangement by this probability change effective timer 203qt, it is possible to determine the period required for normally passing through the probability change switch. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball that has reached the V accessory to pass through the probability change switch is 0.3 seconds. The upper limit of the probability change effective timer 203qt is set to a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds, and even if the probability change switch is passed after that, it is determined to be invalid and is not determined to be passed.

As a result, the game ball can be illegally entered into the V region and passed through the probability change switch, the game ball can be pushed up and passed by a piano wire or the like from below the probability change switch, or the magnetic sensor can be erroneously detected by radio waves or the like. It is possible to suppress the damage caused by fraud.

The discharge number counter 203qu is a counter for counting the number of game balls discharged from the variable winning device 65 in one round. The ejection number counter 203qu is reset to the initial value of 0 after the coincidence between the number of balls won in the variable winning device 65 and the ejection number is determined (Z1511 in FIG. 516).

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

As described above, the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is provided with various counters and flags.

Next, with reference to FIG. 494, the method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10 realized by performing control based on various tables defined in ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in RAM 203. explain. FIG. 494 is a diagram showing a method of transitioning the state of the pachinko machine 10 in the 23rd embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 494, the pachinko machine 10 of the 23rd embodiment is roughly divided into three gaming states. That is, the normal state shown in the upper part of FIG. 494, the probabilistic state shown in the middle part of FIG. 494, and the time saving state shown in the lower part of FIG. 494 are provided.

As described above, the normal state indicates a low probability state of the special symbol and a normal state of the normal symbol, the probability of becoming a big hit is low, and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second entrance 640. (It is difficult for the electric accessory 640a to be released), which is the most disadvantageous game state for the player. Further, as described above, the probabilistic change state indicates the probabilistic change state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol, the jackpot probability is high, and the right-handed hit to the second entrance 640. Since the game ball enters frequently, it is the most advantageous game state for the player. In addition, the time saving state indicates a low probability state of a special symbol and a time saving state of a normal symbol, and although the jackpot probability is low, the game ball can be moved to the second entrance 640 by hitting right. Since the ball is frequently entered, the game state is relatively advantageous for the player.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 494, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal state to another state only when a big hit occurs. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 494, it becomes a jackpot of the first special symbol, and when either jackpot A or B is selected as the jackpot type, the game ball moves to the V area in the fifth round of the jackpot. On condition that the ball is entered, it shifts to the probable change state after the big hit. In jackpots A and B, it is possible to put a game ball into the V region by simply hitting right in the 5th round. If no game ball enters the V area in the 5th round due to the player not launching the game ball in the 5th round, the game state after the big hit is shortened. Set. On the other hand, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 494, when the jackpot C is selected as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, it is impossible (difficult) to put the game ball into the V region in the fifth round of the jackpot. ), So after the big hit is over, it shifts to the time saving state.

Further, as shown in the interruption of FIG. 494, from the probable change state to another state, there is a possibility of shifting to another gaming state when a big hit is made or when the player falls in a fall lottery. Specifically, when the jackpot is reached in the probability change state and the jackpot E is determined at a rate of 20%, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the time saving state. Further, even if the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained in the fall lottery before the lottery of the special symbol is executed 100 times after being set to the probabilistic state, the time is shortened. Further, after the special symbol lottery has been executed 100 times or more after being set to the probabilistic state, if the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained in the fall lottery, the state shifts to the normal state. On the other hand, when the jackpot is reached in the probabilistic state and the jackpot D is determined at a rate of 80%, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the probabilistic state again (looping the most advantageous probabilistic state). Therefore, in the probable change state, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that it will be a big hit before it falls and that it will be a big hit D.

Further, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 494, from the time saving state to another game state, in addition to the case where the big hit is won, when the lottery of the specified number of special symbols is executed after the big hit is completed, another Move to the state. More specifically, when the jackpot is reached in the time saving state and the jackpot D is determined at a rate of 80%, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the most advantageous probability variation state. In addition, the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times after the previous jackpot is completed, so that the state shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state. On the other hand, when the jackpot E is determined at a rate of 20% when the jackpot of the second special symbol is reached, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the time saving state again (time saving state). Loop). In the time-saving state, the probability of winning a jackpot is 1/250, which is the same as in the normal state, so it is not very likely that you will win the jackpot again within 100 times (it will be a jackpot again at a rate of about 33%). .. Therefore, when the time is shortened, there is a high possibility that the state will shift to the normal state. As described above, it is difficult to accurately distinguish between the time saving state and the probabilistic change state (operations other than the jackpot probability, such as the operation mode of the electric accessory 640a, are the same), so that the time saving state of the normal symbol is the same. While is set, the player can continue to have a sense of expectation that he / she is in a probabilistic state. In other words, even if a time saving state that is disadvantageous (that is, it is easy to shift to the normal state) is set as compared with the probabilistic state, it is possible to make the player feel as if he / she is playing the game in the probable change state. You can keep your motivation for the game high. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

As described above, in the 23rd embodiment, since it is possible to provide a novel game property that goes back and forth between the three types of game states, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Returning to FIG. 487, the description will be continued. The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a large opening solenoid for closing or opening the specific winning opening 65a, and an electric function. A solenoid 209 including a solenoid for driving an object is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115 are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is a signal output from the various switches 208. Or, various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interruption process (see FIG. 509) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the game ball, the launch strength of the game ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. be. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the game ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of the handle 51, and the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is a display control such as an audio output in the audio output device 226, an on / off output in the lamp display devices (illumination units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variable display effect (variable display). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the device 114. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, a PUSH button 10317, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or super reach. The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content of the time, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 495 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The ROM 222 includes a variation pattern selection table 222qa, a rear mode lottery table 222qb, a hold change lottery table 222qc, a change point calculation table 222qd, a batch change lottery table 222qe, a chance charge lottery table 222qf, and a continuation suggestion effect selection table. It has at least 222qg and a continuous interrupting lottery table 222qh.

In the variation pattern selection table 222qa, the voice lamp control device 113 is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110, and the rough variation content (variation time, variation type (reach, deviation, etc.) indicated by the variation pattern command). ) To determine more detailed fluctuation details. This makes it possible to determine a wider variety of variation modes. Here, one of a plurality of types of variation mode is determined by lottery with respect to the rough variation content instructed by the main control device 110.

The rear mode lottery table 222qb is data for drawing a change of the rear mode for showing the expectation degree in which the probabilistic state is set in the game state (probability change state, time reduction state) in which the time reduction state of the normal symbol is set. Is a specified data table. The details of the rear mode lottery table 222qb will be described with reference to FIG. 496. FIG. 496 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the rear mode selection table 222qb.

As shown in FIG. 496, the rear mode lottery table 222qb is in the rear mode in a state where it is confirmed that the current game state is in a probable change state and the lottery result corresponding to the fall is not included in the hold. To draw a change in the rear mode when the table for continuation of probability change referred to for drawing changes and the lottery result corresponding to the fall are included in the hold even though the current game state is in the probability change state. It is composed of at least an unfallen table referred to in the above and a fallen table referred to for drawing a change in the rear mode in a state where the table has already fallen to a time saving state.

As shown in FIG. 496, the rear mode lottery table 222qb is defined by associating the range of the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy for each combination of the current rear mode type and the rear mode of the transition destination (after change). Has been done. Here, the effect lottery counter 223qy is composed of a random number counter whose value is periodically updated, and is updated to any value in the range of "0 to 99" every time the update timing is reached. Using the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy, various effect modes and the like are selected. The effect lottery counter 223qy is provided with a separate and independent random number counter for each type of effect for executing the lottery. That is, the staging lottery counter 223qy is a general term for random number counters used for lottery of various staging.

As shown in FIG. 496, in the probabilistic continuation table, the current back mode is the cave search mode, and the destination back mode is the combination of the temple search mode (mode transition from the cave search mode to the temple search mode). The range "0 to 19" of the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with each other. Of the 100 possible random values (counter values) of the staging lottery counter 223qy, the number of random values associated with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is 20, so the current game state is The rate of transition (change) from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is 20% (20/100) in the probable state and in the state where the lottery result of the fall is not included in the hold. Further, as shown in FIG. 496, the value "20, 21" of the staging lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the super temple search mode. Of the 100 random values that can be taken by the staging lottery counter 223qy, the number of random values associated with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the super temple search mode is 2, so the current game state is in a probable change state. In addition, the rate of transition (change) from the cave search mode to the super temple search mode is 2% (2/100) when the lottery result of the fall is not included in the hold. If the value range of the staging lottery counter 223qy is other than the above (that is, the range of "22 to 99"), the mode transition is not performed. That is, the cave search mode is maintained.

In this way, when the cave search mode is set and the probability change continuation table is referenced (when the probability change state and the lottery result of the fall is not included in the hold), the fluctuation display is displayed. Each time it is executed, it shifts from the cave search mode to another mode at a rate of 22%. That is, the number of continuations of the cave search mode is reduced to about 5 on average. In other words, even if it is set to the cave search mode, it shifts to another mode with higher expectations in a relatively short period of time, so the period set to the cave search mode tends to be shorter (high expectations mode). The stay ratio tends to be high). Therefore, the longer the period of staying in the mode with high expectation, the more the player's expectation that the probabilistic state continues can be improved, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. can.

Further, as shown in FIG. 496, in the probability change continuation table, the range "0" of the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode. Of the 100 possible random values (counter values) of the staging lottery counter 223qy, the number of random values associated with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is one, so the current game state is The rate of transition (change) from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is 1% (1/100) in the probable state and in the state where the lottery result of the fall is not included in the hold. Further, as shown in FIG. 496, the range "1 to 10" of the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the super temple search mode. Of the 100 random values that can be taken by the staging lottery counter 223qy, the number of random values associated with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the super temple search mode is 10, so the current game state is in a probable change state. In addition, the rate of transition (change) from the temple search mode to the super temple search mode is 10% (10/100) when the lottery result of the fall is not included in the hold. If the value range of the staging lottery counter 223qy is other than the above (that is, the range of "11 to 99"), the mode transition is not performed. That is, the temple search mode is maintained.

In this way, when the temple search mode is set and the probability change continuation table is referenced (when the probability change state and the lottery result of the fall is not included in the hold), the variable display is displayed. Every time it is executed, it shifts to the cave search mode at a rate of 1%, and at a rate of 10%, it is confirmed that the probabilistic state is confirmed and that the lottery result of the fall is not included in the hold. Move to mode. That is, it is difficult to shift to the cave search mode with low expectations, and it is easy to shift to the super temple mode with high expectations.

Further, as shown in FIG. 496, the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is not associated with the mode transition from the super-temple search mode to the cave search mode in the probability change continuation table. Further, for the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the temple search mode, the range "0 to 4" of the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with each other. Of the 100 random values that can be taken by the staging lottery counter 223qy, the number of random values associated with the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the temple search mode is 5, so the current game state is in a probable change state. In addition, the rate of transition (change) from the super-temple search mode to the temple search mode is 5% (5/100) when the lottery result of the fall is not included in the hold. If the value range of the staging lottery counter 223qy is other than the above (that is, the range of "5 to 99"), the mode transition is not performed. That is, the super-temple search mode is maintained.

In this way, in the state where the super temple search mode is set, it shifts to another mode only at a rate of 5%, and even if the mode shifts, the temple search with relatively high expectations is made. Since the mode is changed, the player's expectation for the probable state can be maintained even if the super-temple mode, which has the highest expectation, is changed to another rear mode.

Further, as shown in FIG. 496, in the table for non-falling, the range "0 to 4" of the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the temple search mode. .. Of the 100 random values that can be taken by the staging lottery counter 223qy, the number of random values associated with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is 5, so the current game state is in a probable change state. Moreover, in the state where the lottery result of the fall is included in the hold, the ratio of shifting (changing) from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is 5% (5/100). On the other hand, the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is not associated with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the super temple search mode. If the value range of the staging lottery counter 223qy is other than the above (that is, the range of "5 to 99"), the mode transition is not performed. That is, the cave search mode is maintained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 496, in the table for non-falling, the range "0 to 9" of the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode. .. Of the 100 random values that can be taken by the staging lottery counter 223qy, the number of random values associated with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is 10, so the current game state is in a probable change state. Moreover, in the state where the lottery result of the fall is included in the hold, the ratio of shifting (changing) from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is 10% (10/100). On the other hand, the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is not associated with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the super temple search mode. If the value range of the staging lottery counter 223qy is other than the above (that is, the range of "10 to 99"), the mode transition is not performed. That is, the temple search mode is maintained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 496, in the non-falling table, the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is not associated with the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the cave search mode. On the other hand, in the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the temple search mode, the range "0 to 99" of the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with each other. That is, in the state where the super-temple search mode is set, when the table for non-falling is referred to, the mode always shifts (falls) to the temple search mode. When the table for non-fall is referred to in the super-temple search mode, the lottery result of the fall is not included in the hold at the time of the start of the previous change, and the new hold is held before the start of the change display this time. Only if the reserved ball is the result of a fall lottery. Therefore, in order to prevent the super-temple mode from being maintained even though the lottery result of the fall is included, in this case, the mode is always shifted to the temple search mode.

In this way, when the non-falling table is referenced (that is, the lottery result corresponding to the falling is included in the hold) and the back mode transition lottery is executed, the probability change continuation table is referenced. The mode transition rate from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is lower than in the case where the mode is changed to the temple search mode, and even if the mode is changed to the temple search mode, the rate of falling to the cave search mode is higher. That is, the percentage of stays in the cave search mode, which has a low expectation, is high. Therefore, it is possible to realize the game property of predicting whether or not the current game state is a probable change state by using the stay ratio of the cave search mode as a clue, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 496, in the fall table, the range "0,1" of the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the temple search mode. .. Of the 100 random values that can be taken by the staging lottery counter 223qy, the number of random values associated with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is 2, so the current game state is a time-saving state. In some cases, the rate of transition (changed) from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is 2% (2/100). On the other hand, the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is not associated with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the super temple search mode. If the value range of the staging lottery counter 223qy is other than the above (that is, the range of "2 to 99"), the mode transition is not performed. That is, the cave search mode is maintained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 496, in the fall table, the range "0 to 29" of the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode. .. Of the 100 random values that can be taken by the staging lottery counter 223qy, the number of random values associated with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is 30, so the current game state is in a probable change state. Moreover, in the state where the lottery result of the fall is included in the hold, the ratio of shifting (changing) from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is 30% (30/100). On the other hand, the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is not associated with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the super temple search mode. If the value range of the staging lottery counter 223qy is other than the above (that is, the range of "30 to 99"), the mode transition is not performed. That is, the temple search mode is maintained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 496, in the fall table, the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is not associated with the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the cave search mode. On the other hand, in the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the temple search mode, the range "0 to 99" of the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with each other. That is, when the table for fallen is referred to in the state where the super-temple search mode is set, the mode always shifts (falls) to the temple search mode as in the case where the table for non-falling is referred to. The case where the fall table is referred to in the super-temple search mode is only when the table is in a probable change state at the start of the previous fluctuation and the lottery result of the fall is obtained in the lottery of this special symbol. Therefore, in order to prevent the super-temple mode from being maintained even though the lottery result of the fall is included, in this case, the mode is always shifted to the temple search mode.

In this way, when the fallen table is referenced (that is, in a time-saving state) and the back mode transition lottery is executed, the temple is further from the cave search mode than when the non-fallen table is referenced. The mode transition rate to the search mode is low, and even if the mode shifts to the temple search mode, the rate of falling to the cave search mode is significantly high. That is, the percentage of stays in the cave search mode, which has a low expectation, is high. Therefore, it is possible to realize the game property of predicting whether or not the current game state is a probable change state by using the stay ratio of the cave search mode as a clue, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 495 (a). The hold change lottery table 222qc refers to the look-ahead result executed based on the detection of the start winning for the first entry opening 64 or the second entry opening 640, and the hold ball number symbol corresponding to the start winning. It is a data table referred to when the lottery of the display mode of is executed. The details of the pending change lottery table 222qc will be described with reference to FIG. 497 (a). FIG. 497 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the pending change lottery table 222qc.

As shown in FIG. 497 (a), in the hold change lottery table 222qc, the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy in which each hold symbol mode (white, blue, green, red) is selected for each look-ahead result (variation type). The range of is specified in association with each other. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 497 (a), when the variation type is "long deviation", the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is in the range of "0 to 98", and the white reserved symbol is used. The mode is defined in association with each other, and the blue reserved symbol mode is defined in association with the value "99" of the effect lottery counter 223qy. On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is not associated with the green and red reserved symbols. Therefore, when the look-ahead result is a variation type of long-off (the main control device 110 notifies the look-ahead result of long-off by the winning information command), 99% of the reserved ball number symbols corresponding to the start winning. A white reserved symbol mode is set at a ratio of (99/100), and a blue reserved symbol mode is set at a ratio of 1% (1/100). That is, in the case of a long deviation, it is extremely rare that a white reserved symbol mode is set and a reserved change (a reserved symbol mode other than white) is set.

Further, as shown in FIG. 497 (a), when the variation type is "out of normal reach", the white reserved symbol mode is associated with the range where the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is "0 to 94". The blue reserved symbol mode is defined in association with the range of "95 to 99" in the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy. On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is not associated with the green and red reserved symbols. Therefore, when the pre-reading result is off and the variation type of the normal reach is set, a white reserved symbol mode is set at a rate of 95% (95/100) as the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the start winning, and 5% ( The blue reserved symbol mode is set at a rate of 5/100). That is, even in the case of the off-normal reach, the white reserved symbol mode is set at a relatively high rate, and the reserved change (non-white reserved symbol mode) is set at a low rate.

Further, as shown in FIG. 497 (a), when the variation type is "out of super reach", the white reserved symbol mode corresponds to the range where the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is "0 to 74". It is specified by attaching, and the blue reserved symbol mode is associated with the range of "75 to 89", and the green reserved symbol aspect is associated with the range of "90 to 97". , The range of "98,99" is defined in association with the red reserved symbol mode. That is, in the case of the variation type of the out-of-super reach in which the fluctuation time is long and the relatively flashy (lively) production mode is executed, the ratio of the white reserved symbol mode is 75% (75/100) and others. It is lower than the variation type of the deviation, and the ratio of the blue reserved symbol mode is as high as 15% (15/100). Further, it can be set to a green or red reserved symbol mode. That is, the ratio of the green reserved symbol mode is 8% (8/100), and the ratio of the red reserved symbol mode is 2% (2/100). Therefore, in the case of a green or red reserved symbol mode, at least the variation type (variation type with low expectation) that is less than the normal reach is denied, and the player's expectation for the jackpot is improved. be able to.

Further, as shown in FIG. 497 (a), when the variation type is "hit normal reach", the white reserved symbol mode is associated with the range where the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is "0 to 74". The blue reserved symbol mode is associated with the range of "75 to 84", and the green reserved symbol embodiment is associated with the range of "85 to 94". A red reserved symbol mode is defined in association with the range of "95 to 99". That is, the ratio of being set to the green or red reserved symbol mode is higher than in the case of the out-of-order super reach.

Further, as shown in FIG. 497 (a), when the variation type is "hit super reach", the white reserved symbol mode corresponds to the range where the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is "0 to 49". It is specified by attaching, and the blue reserved symbol mode is associated with the range of "50 to 59", and the green reserved symbol aspect is associated with the range of "60 to 84". , The red reserved symbol mode is defined in association with the range of "85 to 99". That is, the rate of occurrence of the pending change itself is improved, and the rate at which the green or red reserved symbol mode is selected is also higher than that of the variation type of the off-super reach or the hit normal reach. Therefore, when the green or red reserved symbol mode is set, the expectation for the jackpot can be further improved.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 495. The change point calculation table 222qd is a data table that is referred to when calculating the change points that serve as a criterion for determining whether or not the hold batch change effect (see FIGS. 485 and 486) can be executed. The details will be described later, but at the time of the lottery for the hold batch change effect, the variation type of each hold ball and the jackpot expectation indicated by the hold symbol mode are different (notify the expectation low). (Too much), the more points are set. The more the hold symbol mode with a relatively low expectation is set by the hold change effect, the easier it is to execute the effect of improving the expectation by the hold batch change effect. As a result, the degree of expectation can be more appropriately notified by the reserved symbol mode. The details of the change point calculation table 222qd will be described with reference to FIG. 497 (b).

As shown in FIG. 497 (b), the change point calculation table 222qd is associated with change points for each variation type (look-ahead result) of the reserved ball and the reserved symbol mode set for the reserved ball. Is stipulated. In the 23rd embodiment, when a plurality of reserved balls are reserved at the time when the start winning is detected, the change points of each reserved ball are calculated by the change point calculation table 222qd, and the total value of the change points is calculated. Based on the above, a lottery is made to determine whether or not the hold batch change effect can be executed. That is, the larger the total value of the change points, the higher the execution rate of the hold batch change effect. As a result, even if a lower expectation level is once notified in the hold change effect, it is possible to give an opportunity to improve the expectation level by the hold batch change effect. Can be done.

As shown in FIG. 497 (b), “0” is associated with and defined as a change point for the variation types of short deviation and long deviation, regardless of the reserved symbol mode. Further, for the variation type of the out-of-normal reach, "1" is specified as a change point in association with the hold symbol mode of white hold, and "0" is set as a change point for other hold symbol modes. Is specified in association with each other. Further, for the variation type of the out-of-order super reach, "2" is defined in association with the reserved symbol mode of white hold, and "2" is defined as the change point for the reserved symbol mode of blue hold. "1" is associated and defined, and "0" is associated and defined as a change point with respect to other reserved symbol modes. Further, for the variable types of hit normal reach and hit super reach, 3 is defined as a change point in association with the reserved symbol mode of white hold, and as a change point with respect to the hold symbol mode of blue hold. 2 is associated and defined, 1 is associated and defined as a change point with respect to the reserved symbol aspect of green hold, and 0 is associated and defined as a change point with respect to the reserved symbol aspect of red hold.

As described above, in the 23rd embodiment, the more the reserved symbol mode with the lower expectation is set for the reserved ball of the variable type with the higher expectation, the more the change points are configured. That is, the larger the room for improving the expectation of the reserved symbol mode, the more change points, so that the execution of the reserved batch change effect becomes easier to be allowed. With this configuration, it is possible to notify a more appropriate degree of expectation depending on the reserved symbol mode.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 495 (a). The batch change lottery table 222qe is a data table that is referred to when a lottery for whether or not to execute the hold batch change effect is performed. The details of the batch change lottery table 222qe will be described with reference to FIG. 498 (a). FIG. 498 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the batch change lottery table 222qe. As shown in FIG. 498 (a), the batch change lottery table 222qe is defined in association with the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy in which the execution of the hold batch change effect is determined for each total value of the change points. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 498 (a), the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is not associated with the total value of the change points being 0. Further, when the total value of the change points is 1, the value "0 to 9" of the staging lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with each other, and when the total value of the change points is 2, the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is defined. "0 to 24" are associated and defined, and when the total value of the change points is 3 or more, the value "0 to 49" of the staging lottery counter 223qy is associated and defined. That is, if the change point is 1, the hold batch change effect is selected at a rate of 10%, and if the change point is 2, the hold batch change effect is selected at a rate of 25%, and the change point is 3. For example, the hold batch change effect is selected at a rate of 50%.

As described above, in the 23rd embodiment, as the total number of change points increases (a hold symbol mode with a low expectation is set for a hold ball of a variable type with a high expectation), a hold batch change effect is produced. It is configured to have a high percentage of decisions about the execution of. As a result, the greater the room for improving the degree of expectation of the reserved symbol aspect, the more change points, so that the execution of the reserved batch change effect becomes easier to be allowed. With this configuration, it is possible to notify a more appropriate degree of expectation depending on the reserved symbol mode.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 495 (a). The chance charge lottery table 222qf is a data table referred to for drawing whether or not the chance charge effect can be executed. The details of the chance charge lottery table 222qf will be described with reference to FIG. 498 (b). FIG. 498 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the chance charge lottery table 222qf. As shown in FIG. 498 (b), in the chance charge lottery table 222qf, the number of reserved balls and the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy determined to execute the chance charge effect are associated with each other for each variation type. It is stipulated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 498 (b), in the fluctuation pattern of the out-of-normal reach and the out-of-super reach, when the number of reserved balls is 0, 1, the range of the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is “0 to 0”. 4 ”is specified in association with each other. Further, when the number of reserved balls is 2, the range "0 to 14" of the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with each other, and when the number of reserved balls is 3 or more, the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined. The range "0 to 24" is defined in association with each other. That is, if the number of reserved balls is 0 or 1, the execution of the chance charge effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and if the number of reserved balls is 2, the execution of the chance charge effect is determined at a rate of 15%. If the number of reserved balls is 3 or more, the execution of the chance charge effect is decided at a rate of 25%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 498 (b), in the fluctuation pattern of the winning normal reach, the range “0 to 34” of the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the number of reserved balls of 0 and 1. On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is not associated with the number of reserved balls of 2 or more. That is, if the number of reserved balls is 0 or 1, the execution of the chance charge effect is determined at a rate of 35%, while if the number of reserved balls is 2 or more, the execution of the chance charge effect is determined. do not have. That is, when the number of reserved balls is 1 or less, the determination rate of the chance charge effect is higher than that of the fluctuation pattern of the deviation. Further, the reason why the chance charge effect is not executed when the number of reserved balls is 2 or more is to prevent a problem that the fire gauge is accumulated too much and a big hit is started before it is completely consumed. That is, in the case of a hit normal reach, since the fluctuation time is relatively short (there are few opportunities to execute the chance-up effect), there is a high possibility that the spirit gauge will be accumulated beyond the timing when the chance-up is possible. Then, the number of spirit gauges accumulated in the chance charge effect is determined only according to the number of reserved balls. That is, the larger the number of reserved balls, the higher the possibility that a large number of fire gauges will be set. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the chance charge effect is avoided when the number of reserved balls is large under the circumstances where the fluctuation is a hit. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that a big hit is started before the number of fire gauges is consumed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 498 (b), in the fluctuation pattern of the winning super reach, the range "0 to 49" of the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the number of reserved balls of 0 to 2. Therefore, when the number of reserved balls is 3, the range "0 to 9" of the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with each other. On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is not associated with the number of reserved balls of 4. That is, if the number of reserved balls is 0 to 2, the execution of the chance charge effect is determined at a rate of 50%, and if the number of reserved balls is 3, the execution of the chance charge effect is determined at a rate of 10%. On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls is 4, the execution of the chance charge effect is not decided. That is, when the number of reserved balls is 2 or less, the determination rate of the chance charge effect is higher than the fluctuation pattern of the deviation and the fluctuation pattern of the hit normal reach. Further, when the number of reserved balls is 3, the execution rate of the chance charge effect is low, and when the number of reserved balls is 4, the chance charge effect is not executed. This is the same as the normal reach of the hit, and the purpose is to suppress the problem that the big hit is started before the spirit gauge is completely consumed.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 495 (a). The continuous suggestion effect selection table 222qg is used when selecting an effect scenario of the continuous suggestion effect to be executed over the 96th to 99th variable display effects after the end of the big hit (that is, after the start of the time saving state of the normal symbol). The data table to be referenced. The details of this continuation suggestion effect selection table 222qg will be described with reference to FIG. 499.

FIG. 499 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222qg. As shown in FIG. 499, the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222qg includes a continuation confirmation table that is referred to when the continuation of the probabilistic state is confirmed until the end of the continuation suggestion effect, and up to the end of the continuation suggestion effect. Although the holding ball is not held, it is confirmed that the continuous enrichment table, which is referred to when it is confirmed that the probability change state is maintained in the hold, and the end of the continuation suggestion effect are in the time saving state. It consists of at least a table for discontinuity. Each table defines a plurality of combinations (scenarios) of effect modes to be executed in the 96th to 99th variable display.

As shown in FIG. 499, in the continuation confirmation table, the range of the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with each of the seven scenarios "01H" to "07H". Specifically, as shown in FIG. 499, a weak attack with a low expectation (see FIG. 476 (a)) is executed in the 96th to 98th fluctuation display, and the expectation is high in the 99th fluctuation display. The value "0-9" of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the effect scenario "01H" in which a strong attack (see FIG. 476 (b)) is executed to break through the door 806. In addition, a weak attack (see FIG. 476 (a)) is executed at the 96th and 97th fluctuation displays, and a strong attack (see FIG. 476 (b)) is executed at the 98th and 99th fluctuation displays to break through the door 806. The value "10 to 19" of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the effect scenario "02H" of the mode to be performed, and a weak attack (see FIG. 476 (a)) is executed in the 96th variation display. The value "20-59" of the staging lottery counter 223qy is set against the staging scenario "03H" in which a strong attack (see FIG. 476 (b)) is executed in the 97th to 99th fluctuation display to break through the door 806. The staging lottery counter 223qy is used for the staging scenario "04H" in which a strong attack (see FIG. 476 (b)) is executed in all the fluctuation displays of the 96th to 99th times to break through the door 806. The value "60 to 89" of is specified in association with each other. That is, the selection rate of the production scenario with a small number of strong attacks is low, and the selection rate of the production scenario with a large number of strong attacks is high.

Further, as shown in FIG. 499, the continuation confirmation table is provided with a special mode of staging scenario in which the door 806 is breached with a number of fluctuations of less than 99 times. That is, the production scenario "05H" (range of the value "90,91" of the production lottery counter 223qy) in which a weak attack is performed in the 96th variable production and the door 806 is broken through as it is, and the 96th weak attack, 97 The production scenario "06H" (range of the value "92 to 94" of the production lottery counter 223qy) in which a strong attack is made to break through the door 806, and the 96th and 97th weak attacks are performed, and the 98th time. A staging scenario "07H" (a range of the value "95 to 99" of the staging lottery counter 223qy) is set in which a strong attack is made to break through the door 806. The scenarios of these special embodiments may be set only when the continuation confirmation table is referenced. That is, it may be executed only in a state where it is confirmed that the probabilistic state continues until the end of the 99th variation display. Therefore, by executing the scenario of a special aspect, It is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 499, four scenarios of "08H" to "0BH" are defined in the continuous enrichment table. Since the flow of the production of the production scenarios "08H" to "0BH" is exactly the same as the production scenarios "01H" to "04H" described above, the details thereof will be omitted here. As shown in FIG. 499, the staging scenario "08H" is defined in association with the value "0 to 14" of the staging lottery counter 223qy, and the staging scenario "09H" is defined by the value "15 to" of the staging lottery counter 223qy. 29 ”is associated and defined, the effect scenario“ 0AH ”is defined in association with the value“ 30-69 ”of the effect lottery counter 223qy, and the effect scenario“ 0BH ”is defined in association with the value“ 30—69 ”of the effect lottery counter 223qy. 70 to 99 ”is specified in association with each other. That is, as in the continuation confirmation table, the selection rate of the effect scenario with a small number of strong attacks is low, and the selection rate of the effect scenario with a large number of strong attacks is high. In addition, if the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained while the scenario specified in the continuous rich table is in progress, the effect specified in the discontinuity table is displayed from the variable display that is the lottery result of the fall. It can be switched to the production scenario "0CH", which is one of the scenarios. As a result, even if the reserved balls for the 99th change display are not held at the start of the continuation suggestion effect, the game state at the end of the 99th change can be accurately changed by switching the scenario in the middle. It can be notified.

Further, as shown in FIG. 499, four scenarios of "0CH" to "0FH" are defined in the discontinuity table. The flow of the production of the production scenarios "0CH" to "0FH" is exactly the same as the production scenarios "01H" to "04H" described above, except that the door 806 finally fails to break through. Details will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 499, the staging scenario "0CH" is defined in association with the value "0 to 39" of the staging lottery counter 223qy, and the staging scenario "0DH" is defined by the value "40 to" of the staging lottery counter 223qy. 79 ”is associated and defined, the effect scenario“ 0EH ”is defined in association with the value“ 80-94 ”of the effect lottery counter 223qy, and the effect scenario“ 0FH ”is defined in association with the value“ 80FH ”of the effect lottery counter 223qy. 95-99 ”is specified in association with each other. That is, contrary to the continuous confirmation table and the continuous rich table, the selection rate of the production scenario with a small number of strong attacks is high, and the selection rate of the production scenario with a large number of strong attacks is low. There is. Therefore, as the number of strong attacks increases, it is less likely that the non-continuation table is referred to and the production scenario is determined. Therefore, during the execution of the continuation suggestion production, pay attention to the content of each attack and play the game. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 495 (a). The interrupt continuous hitting lottery table 222qh is a data table referred to for executing the interrupt continuous hitting effect (see FIG. 482) and for drawing the effect type. The details of the interrupt continuous hitting lottery table 222qh will be described with reference to FIG. 500. FIG. 500 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the interrupt continuous hitting lottery table 222qh. As shown in FIG. 500, in the interrupt continuous hitting lottery table 222qh, the effect type and the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy are defined in association with each other for each variation type.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 500, in the variation pattern of long deviation, it is executed during the normal variation effect period, and it is possible to reduce the number of monsters to a minimum of 10 remaining monsters. Therefore, the value "0 to 4" of the staging lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with each other. Therefore, in the case of a long deviation, the interrupt continuous striking effect is executed at a rate of 5% (5/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 500, in the deviation pattern of the normal reach, the effect lottery is performed for the effect type of the effect mode, which is executed during the normal variation effect period and can reduce the number of monsters to a minimum of 5 remaining bodies. The value "0 to 9" of the counter 223qy is defined in association with each other, and is executed during the reach fluctuation. "10 to 14" are specified in association with each other. For this reason, in the fluctuation pattern of the off-normal reach, it is determined to execute the interrupt continuous hitting effect at a rate of 15% in total. That is, the execution of the interrupt continuous striking effect is determined at a higher rate than in the case of long deviation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 500, in the variation pattern of the out-of-order super reach, as an interruption continuous striking effect executed during the normal variation effect period, an effect mode in which the number of monsters can be reduced to a minimum of 5 remaining bodies is produced. The value "0-4" of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the type, and the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined for the effect type in which the number of monsters can be reduced to a minimum of 4 remaining bodies. "5-9" are specified in association with each other. In addition, the value "10 to 14" of the effect lottery counter 223qy is associated with the effect type of the effect mode in which the number of monsters can be reduced to a minimum of four as the interrupt continuous hit effect executed during the reach fluctuation. The value "15 to 19" of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the effect type of the effect mode in which the number of monsters can be reduced to a minimum of three. That is, the execution rate of the total interrupt continuous hitting effect is higher than that of the off-normal reach, and the number of monsters can be reduced to a smaller number, so that the player's expectation for a big hit can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 500, in the variation pattern of the hit normal reach, as the interrupt continuous striking effect executed during the normal variation effect period, the effect type of the effect mode in which the number of monsters can be reduced to a minimum of 5 remaining bodies. On the other hand, the value "0 to 3" of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with each other, and the value "4" of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined for the effect type of the effect mode in which the number of monsters can be reduced to 0. It is specified in association with each other. In addition, the value "5 to 24" of the effect lottery counter 223qy is associated with the effect type of the effect mode in which the number of monsters can be reduced to a minimum of four as the interrupt continuous hit effect executed during the reach fluctuation. The value "25" of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the effect type of the effect mode in which the number of monsters can be reduced to 0. That is, since the execution rate of the total interrupt continuous hitting effect is higher than in the case of off, and there is a possibility of defeating all monsters, it is possible to improve the player's expectation for a big hit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 500, in the variation pattern of the hit super reach, as an interruption continuous striking effect executed during the normal variation effect period, an effect mode in which the number of monsters can be reduced to a minimum of 4 remaining bodies is produced. The value "0,1" of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the type, and the value "2" of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined for the effect type of the effect mode in which the number of monsters can be reduced to 0. Is specified in association with each other. In addition, the value "3 to 19" of the effect lottery counter 223qy is associated with the effect type of the effect mode in which the number of monsters can be reduced to a minimum of four as the interrupt continuous hit effect executed during the reach fluctuation. The value "20 to 39" of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the effect type of the effect mode that can reduce the number of monsters to 3 bodies, and the effect mode that can reduce the number of monsters to 0 bodies. The value "40, 41" of the staging lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the staging type. In other words, the execution rate of the total interrupt continuous hitting effect is higher than in the case of missed or hit normal reach, and the possibility of defeating all monsters is higher, so the player's expectation for a big hit is improved. Can be done.

In this way, in the 23rd embodiment, the execution timing of the interrupt continuous hitting effect and the number of monsters that can be subdued are configured to be different for each variable type, and the effect of subduing all the monsters is performed only in the case of a big hit. The configuration can be selected. With such a configuration, it is possible to more actively perform the continuous striking operation during the execution of the interrupt continuous striking effect, so that the player's willingness to participate in the interrupt continuous striking effect can be improved.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 495 (b). FIG. 495 (b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223qa, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223qb, a normal reserved ball number counter 223qc, a fluctuation start flag 223qd, a stop type selection flag 223qe, and a game state storage area 223qf. The time reduction guaranteed number counter 223qg, the continuous scenario storage area 223qh, the right-handed winning flag 223qi, the continuous hit type storage area 223qj, the chance charge standby flag 223qk, the charge number counter 223qm, and the charge state number counter 223qn. , Batch change flag 223qp, change point storage area 223qq, hold symbol state storage area 223qr, fluctuation time timer 223qs, operation valid period timer 223qt, stop operation count counter 223qu, continuous hit valid period timer 223qv, all at once. At least a change period timer 223qx, an effect lottery counter 223qy, and other memory areas 223z are provided.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223qa is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting number) corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol held in the main control device 110 up to 4 times, and the special symbol 2 is reserved. The ball number counter 223qb is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203qd and the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 203qe stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Cannot get the value of. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and sets the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223qa and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223qb. Therefore, the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls of the variable display is added by the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640, or in the main control device 110, a special symbol is used. When the fluctuation display in the above is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the number of reserved balls indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd after addition or subtraction, or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe. The command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the hold ball number counter of the main control device 110 is the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203qd or the special symbol 2 hold ball number command from the hold ball number command. The value of the number counter 203qe is acquired and stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223qa or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223qb (see Z3910 in FIG. 528). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223qa and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223qb according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The values can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe of the main controller 110.

The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223qa and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223qb are used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223qa and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223qb. , The display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223qa and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223qb after storage. ..

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223qa of the voice lamp control device 113 and the special symbol 2 hold. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the value of the ball number counter 223qb is displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223qa and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223qb are synchronized with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe of the main controller 110. However, its value is changed. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also synchronized with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe of the main control device 110. You can change it while letting it change. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

The normal reserved ball number counter 223qc is different from the above-mentioned special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223qa and special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223qb in that the target is changed from the special symbol to the normal symbol. Since the technical control concept is the same, detailed explanation is omitted.

The variation start flag 223qd is turned on when the variation pattern command of the first special symbol or the variation pattern command of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see Z3904 of FIG. 528), and the variation start flag 223qd is turned on. It is turned off when the variable display is set in the display device 81 (see Z4202 in FIG. 532). When the variation start flag 223qd is turned on, the variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (Z3102) of the main process (see FIG. 518) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 has a variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs variation display of the third symbol. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223qe is turned on when a special symbol stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see Z3907 in FIG. 528), and the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See Z4208 in FIG. 532). When the stop type selection flag 223qe is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

The game state storage area 223qf is a storage area for storing data according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10. The game state storage area 223qf is updated every time a state command output is received from the main control device 110 every time the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed (see Z3902 in FIG. 528). The game state storage area 223qf is composed of, for example, a 1-byte storage area, and is configured so that the game state can be specified by the state of the lower 2 bits. More specifically, for example, it indicates whether or not the lowest bit is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and indicates whether or not the lower second bit is in the probabilistic state of the special symbol. Therefore, in the "low probability state of the special symbol" and the "normal state of the normal symbol", the lower 2 bits are "00B", and in the "low probability state of the special symbol" and the "time saving state of the normal symbol", the lower 2 bits are lower. The 2 bits are "01B", and the lower 2 bits are "11B" in the "probability variation state of the special symbol" and the "time saving state of the normal symbol". The MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the game state of the pachinko machine 10 on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the data stored in the game state storage area 223qf.

The time saving guaranteed number counter 223qg is a counter for counting the remaining number of fluctuations for which the time saving state is guaranteed. The initial value of the time reduction guaranteed number counter 223qg is set to 0, and the value is set to 100 at the end of the jackpot (see Z4107 in FIG. 531). Also, each time a new variable display execution is set, the value is decremented by 1 (see Z4304 in FIG. 533). As described above, in the 23rd embodiment, after the big hit is completed, the time saving state of the normal symbol is maintained until the lottery of the special symbol is executed 100 times. By counting the number of times of time reduction guarantee by the time reduction guarantee number counter 223qg, the number of times of guarantee can be accurately grasped even on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

The continuation scenario storage area 223qh is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of the effect scenario determined from the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222qg (see FIG. 499) at the start of the probability change continuation suggestion effect. The initial value of the continuation scenario storage area 223qh is set to 00H, and when the production scenario is determined by lottery using the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222qg (see FIG. 499) at the start timing of the probabilistic continuation suggestion effect. Data indicating the effect scenario is stored (see Z4409 in FIG. 534). During the execution of the probabilistic continuation suggestion effect, the variation display mode at the start of each variation display is determined based on the data of the continuation scenario storage area 223qh (see Z4415 in FIG. 534).

The right-handed winning flag 223qi is a flag indicating whether or not the running jackpot is a jackpot won during the right-handed gaming state (normal symbol time saving state). If the right-handed winning flag 223qi is on, it indicates that the jackpot was won during the right-handed gaming state, and if it is off, the jackpot won during the left-handed gaming state (that is, the first hit). Indicates that. At the end of the big hit, the rear mode is set according to the state of the right-handed winning flag 223qi. That is, if it is on, the temple search mode is set, and if it is off, the cave search mode is set (see Z4109 and Z4110 in FIG. 531). As mentioned above, if you get a big hit in the left-handed game state (that is, you get a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol), only 50% of the time you move to the probable change state, while in the right-handed game state you get a big hit. When it becomes (that is, it becomes a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol), it shifts to the probability change state at a rate of 80%. The difference in this ratio is notified by the degree of expectation indicated by the rear mode.

The continuous hit type storage area 223qj is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of the interrupt continuous hit effect (the execution timing of the effect and the lower limit of the subtraction number of monsters). According to the data of the continuous hit type storage area 223qj, the start timing of the interrupt continuous hit effect, the number of subtraction of monsters for pressing the PUSH button 10317, and the like are set.

The chance charge waiting flag 223qk is a flag indicating whether or not it is a period (chance charge waiting period) from the determination of execution of the chance charge effect to the actual start of the chance charge effect, and is turned on. If, it indicates that it is a chance charge waiting period. The initial value of the chance charge standby flag 223qk is set to off, and is set to on when the execution of the chance charge effect is determined (see Z4564 in FIG. 536), and the execution of the chance charge effect is started. If set to off (see Z3313 in FIG. 520). If a new start prize is detected while this chance charge standby flag 223qk is on, the number of gauges is added to the number of gauges predetermined as the number of spirit gauges to be accumulated in the chance charge effect executed thereafter. Whether or not it is determined.

The charge number counter 223qm is a counter indicating the gauge number of the spirit gauge notified in the chance charge effect. The initial value of the charge number counter 223qm is set to 0, and when the execution of the chance charge effect is determined, a value obtained by adding 1 to the number of reserved balls at the time of the determination is set (FIG. 536). See Z4563). Further, by executing the chance-up effect, the value is subtracted and updated by 1 each time the spirit gauge is consumed (see Z3559 and Z3561 in FIG. 523).

The charge state count counter 223qn is a counter indicating the remaining number of fluctuations until the consumption of the spirit gauge accumulated by the chance charge effect is completed. The value of the charge state count counter 223qn is set according to the current number of reserved balls at the start of the chance charge effect (see Z3314 in FIG. 520), and the value is set each time a new variable display effect is set to be executed. It is subtracted by 1 (see Z4302 in FIG. 533). While the value of the charge state count counter 223qn is 1 or more, it is determined whether or not to consume the spirit gauge to execute the chance-up effect every time the chance-up effect can be executed.

The batch change flag 223qp is a flag indicating whether or not the hold batch change effect is being executed. If it is on, it means that the hold batch change effect is being executed, and if it is off, it means that the hold batch change effect is being executed. Indicates that the production is not in progress. The batch change flag 223qp is set to on when the initial value is set to off and the execution of the hold batch change effect is set (see Z4059 in FIG. 530).

The change point storage area 223qq is a storage area for storing the change points specified by referring to the change point calculation table 222qd described above. The change point storage area 223qq is configured to be able to store the change points of each reserved ball separately.

The reserved symbol state storage area 223qr is a storage area for storing data indicating the reserved symbol mode of each reserved ball number symbol. From the data stored in the reserved symbol state storage area 223qr, it is possible to accurately grasp the reserved symbol mode of each reserved ball number symbol.

The fluctuation time timer 223qs is a timer for measuring the fluctuation time. The progress of the fluctuation display effect can be accurately determined by the timer value of the fluctuation time timer 223qs.

The operation valid period timer 223qt is a timer for measuring the period during which the PUSH button 10317 is valid in the pressing stop effect (see FIG. 478). The operation validity period timer 223qt determines whether or not the operation for the PUSH button 10317 in the pressing stop effect is treated as valid. In the press stop effect, a separate button image and validity period gauge are displayed for each symbol row on the display screen, but in reality, the operation of the PUSH button 10317 is enabled by a single operation validity period. Whether or not it is determined. With such a configuration, it is possible to simplify the determination of whether or not the stop operation of each symbol row is valid, so that the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

The stop operation number counter 223qua is a counter indicating the number of remaining stop operations that can be executed in the pressing stop effect (see FIG. 478). If the stop operation is detected during the operation valid period when the value of the stop operation count counter 223qu is 3, the left symbol column is displayed as stopped, and the value is 2 and the stop operation is stopped during the operation valid period. When an operation is detected, the right symbol column is stopped and displayed, and when a stop operation is detected during the operation valid period while the value is 1, the central symbol column is stopped and displayed.

The continuous hit effective period timer 223qv is a timer for measuring the period during which the continuous hit operation for the PUSH button 10317 is valid in the interrupt continuous hit effect (see FIG. 482). The continuous hit valid period timer 223qv determines whether or not the operation for the PUSH button 10317 in the interrupt continuous hit effect is treated as valid.

The batch change period timer 223qx is a timer for measuring the period during which the PUSH button 10317 is valid in the hold batch change effect (see FIGS. 486 and 487). The batch change period timer 223qx determines whether or not the operation for the PUSH button 10317 in the hold batch change effect is treated as valid.

As described above, the effect lottery counter 223qy is a random number counter for executing the lottery of the effect mode.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the memory area 223z is provided with, for example, a winning information storage area for storing winning information based on the winning information command received from the main control device 110. The winning information storage area has a storage area consisting of four areas (first area to fourth area) for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In addition, it has one execution area. Winning information is stored in each area. In the pachinko machine 10, when a start winning is detected in the main control device 110, the values of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in response to the start winning are used. , Various information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the start prize is drawn is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is obtained. The main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and the winning information is the winning information of the RAM 223. It is stored in the winning information storage area (not shown), which is a storage area. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 areas (1st to 4th areas). Will be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the more the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed, a time-lapse timer that measures the effect time, and the like. is doing. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read / written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process 23 (see FIG. 528) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process 23 is read. (See S3114 in FIG. 528), the command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display (variation) in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It controls the production) and continuous notice production.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM erase switch 122. have. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 509).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the audio output device 226 according to the 23rd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 501. FIG. 501 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio output device 226. As shown in FIG. 501, the audio output device 226 is equipped with an MPU 301 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 301 is a ROM 302 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 301, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 302 is executed. It has a built-in RAM 303.

The MPU 301 of the voice output device 226 is electrically connected to the input / output port 305 and the voice synthesis unit 306. When a command for designating voice data is received from the voice lamp control device 113 to the voice output device 226, the command is input to the MPU 301 via the input / output port 305. Further, the voice data designated by the voice lamp control device 113 is read from the ROM 302 and output to the channel corresponding to the voice type of the voice synthesis unit 306.

The voice synthesis unit 306 is composed of a known voice synthesis LSI that synthesizes the voice data input to each channel and outputs the synthesized voice data to the amplifier unit 307. The synthesized voice data is amplified by the amplifier unit 307 and input to the speaker unit 308. As a result, various voices designated by the voice lamp control device 113 can be output from the speaker unit 308.

Next, with reference to FIG. 501, the configuration of the ROM 302 provided in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the 23rd embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 501, the ROM 302 is provided with at least an audio file storage area (audio file) 302a.

The audio file storage area (audio file) 302a is a storage area in which an audio file (audio data) used for outputting music, sound effects, etc. in various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 is stored. When the execution of various effects is notified by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice file corresponding to the effects is read from the voice file storage area (voice file) 302a and output to the corresponding channel of the voice synthesis unit 306. Will be done.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 303 provided in the audio output device 226 will be described. As shown in FIG. 501, the RAM 303 is provided with at least a continuous tap sound output flag 303a, a reproduction position storage area 303b, and a music output in-progress flag 303c.

The continuous hitting sound output flag 303a is a flag indicating the type of the continuous hitting sound most recently output (whether it is the first continuous hitting sound or the second continuous hitting sound) during the execution of the interrupt continuous hitting effect. If the continuous striking sound output flag 303a is 01H, it indicates that the most recently output continuous striking sound is the first continuous striking sound, and if it is "02H", it indicates that it is the second continuous striking sound. By configuring the continuous striking sound output flag 303a so that the type of the most recently output continuous striking sound can be grasped, it is possible to alternately reproduce different types of continuous striking sounds for different channels each time a continuous striking operation is detected. can. Therefore, since it is possible to diversify the voice mode during the execution of the continuous striking operation, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

The reproduction position storage area 303b is a storage area for storing data indicating the reproduction position at the time of interruption when the interruption of the reproduction of the music is instructed. When resuming the reproduction of the music, the reproduction can be accurately resumed from the interrupted reproduction position based on the data stored in the reproduction position storage area 303b.

The music output flag 303c is a flag indicating whether or not a music output based on an audio file is being output by executing a variable display effect or the like. If the music output flag 303c is on, it means that the music is being output, and if it is off, it means that the music is not being output.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the 23rd embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 502 to 516. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 502 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the process of reading various winning switches is executed (Z101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (Z102). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated to RAM203. Store in the corresponding buffer area of.

Further, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the fall lottery counter C4, the variable type counter CS1, and the normal hit random number counter C5 are updated (Z103). Specifically, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the fall lottery counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (999, respectively in this embodiment, respectively). When it reaches 99,250,999,198,239), it clears to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C5 and CS1 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol variation process 23 for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (Z104), which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, and then executed (Z104). , The start winning process 23 accompanying the winning (starting winning) to the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is executed (Z105). The details of the special symbol variation process 23 and the start winning process 23 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 503 to 506.

After executing the start winning process 23, the normal symbol variation process 23 (Z106), which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (Z106), and the through gate is passed along with the passage of the ball at the normal entry port. Process 23 is executed (Z107). The details of the normal symbol variation process 23 and the through gate passage process 23 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 507 and 508. After executing the through gate passage process 23, the launch control process is executed (Z108), and then the other winning process is executed (Z109). Further, other processing to be executed periodically is executed (Z110), and the timer interrupt processing is terminated. The launch control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and launches the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, the special symbol variation processing 23 (Z104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 503. FIG. 503 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation processing 23 (Z104). This special symbol variation processing 23 (Z104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 502), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display are performed. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in the device 81.

In this special symbol variation processing 23, first, it is determined whether or not the present is a big hit of the special symbol (Z201). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (Z201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (Z201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (Z202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203qd (the number of holdings of the variable display in the special symbol N1) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe (holding the variable display in the special symbol). The number of times N2) is acquired (Z203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe is larger than 0 (Z204), and if the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe is not 0 (N2). Z204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe is subtracted by 1 (Z205), and the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe changed by the calculation is set. (Z206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 511) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203qe from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the second special symbol hold ball number counter 223qb of the RAM 223. Store in.

After the reserved ball number command is set by the processing of Z206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb is shifted (Z207). In the processing of Z207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After the processing of Z207 is executed, the process proceeds to the processing of Z208.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z204 that the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203qd is 0 (Z204: No), the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd acquired in the processing of Z203 It is determined whether the value (N1) is 0 (Z209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd is 0 (Z209: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203qd is not 0 (Z209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203qd is set to 1. Subtract (Z210) and set the hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203qd changed by the calculation (Z211). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 511) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203qd from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223qa of the RAM 223. Store in.

After the reserved ball number command is set by the processing of Z211th, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa is shifted (Z212). In the processing of Z212, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process 23 (Z208) for setting the variation start of the special symbol (first symbol) is executed (Z208), and this process is terminated. The special symbol change start process 23 will be described later with reference to FIG. 504.

In the processing of Z202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (Z213). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If has not elapsed (Z213: No), the display of the first symbol display device is updated (Z214), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z213, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (Z213: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (Z215). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process 23 (Z208), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 504. When this special symbol change start process 23 (Z208) is executed, various counters stored in the execution area commonly provided in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb. A special symbol lottery is held based on the value. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the special hit random number counter C1, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it is a big hit according to the value of the special hit type counter C2. The type is determined.

In the present embodiment, as the stop symbol of the first symbol (special symbol), when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. Turn on the LED, turn on the green LED when it becomes a big hit C, turn on the blue LED and the red LED when it becomes a big hit D, and turn on the red LED when it becomes a big hit E. And turn on the green LED. Further, when it is out of alignment, the blue LED and the green LED are set to light up. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of Z215 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing 23 (Z208) (this lottery). The result) is determined whether it is a big hit of a special symbol (Z216). If the result of this lottery is a big hit of a special symbol (Z216: Yes), the big hit start flag 203qi is set to ON (Z217). Then, a stop command is set (Z218), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z216, if it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a big hit (Z216: No), the processing of Z217 is skipped, the processing of Z218 is executed, and then this processing is terminated.

Next, the special symbol change start processing 23 (Z208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 504. FIG. 504 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start processing 23 (Z208). This special symbol variation start process 23 (Z208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 23 (see FIG. 503) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 502), and is a process executed in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa. And, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb, a lottery (win / fail judgment) of "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed, and the first symbol is performed. This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol fluctuation start processing 23 (Z208), first, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type counter C3, the fall lottery counter C4, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area. (Z301). Next, it is determined whether the gaming state is currently in the probabilistic change (high probability state of the special symbol) (Z302). It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the probabilistic change is in progress is executed by determining whether or not the value of the probabilistic change flag 203qh is 1 or more. Here, the probability variation flag 203qh is set to a predetermined value based on the end of the jackpot game. On the other hand, the value is set to 0 based on the start of the jackpot game.

In the processing of Z302, when it is determined that the probability change is in progress (Z302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic change (high probability state of the special symbol). By comparing the value with the fall lottery table 202qe (see FIG. 490 (c)), a lottery (fall lottery) is performed as to whether or not to fall from the probabilistic state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol (fall lottery). Z303). Specifically, the value of the fall lottery counter C4 is compared one by one with the two random numbers stored in the fall lottery table 202qe. As described above, two random numbers "0, 1" are set for the fall to the low probability state during the probability change (high probability state of the special symbol), and the value of the fall lottery counter C4 and the value of the fall lottery counter C4. , When the random values corresponding to these falls match, it is determined that the player falls to a low probability state. After acquiring the lottery result of the fall lottery in the processing of Z303, the process proceeds to the processing of Z304.

In the processing of Z304, it is determined whether or not the lottery result corresponds to the fall of the special symbol to the low probability state (Z304), and if it is determined that the lottery result corresponds to the fall (Z304: Yes), The probability change flag 203qh is set to off (Z305), a state command indicating a fall to a low probability state is set (Z306), and the process proceeds to Z307.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the probabilistic change (high probability state of the special symbol), that is, it is in the low probability state of the special symbol (Z302: No), Z303 to Z306. The process is skipped and the process proceeds to the Z307 process.

In the processing of Z307, is it a jackpot of a special symbol based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of Z301 and the special symbol jackpot random number 23 table 202qa (see FIG. 490 (a)) for low probability? The lottery result of whether or not is acquired (Z307). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the four random number values stored in the special symbol jackpot random number 23 table 202qa. Four random numbers "0 to 3" are set as the random number values that are the big hits of the special symbols in the low probability state of the special symbols, and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the random number values that are the hits are set. If they match, it is judged to be a big hit of a special symbol. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to Z309 processing.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z304, if it is determined that the result is not the lottery result corresponding to the fall (Z304: No), the process proceeds to the processing of Z308. In the processing of Z308, is it a jackpot of a special symbol based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of Z301 and the special symbol jackpot random number 23 table 202qa (see FIG. 490 (a)) for high probability? The lottery result of whether or not is acquired (Z308). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the eight random number values stored in the special symbol jackpot random number 23 table 202qa. Eight random numbers "4 to 11" are set as the random number values that are the big hits of the special symbols in the high probability state of the special symbols, and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the random number values that are the hits are set. If they match, it is judged to be a big hit of a special symbol. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to Z309 processing.

In the processing of Z309, is the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of Z307 or Z308 a jackpot of the special symbol (that is, the value of the acquired special hit random number counter C1 and the special symbol jackpot random number 23 table 202qa). (Z309), and if it is determined that it is a big hit of a special symbol (Z309: Yes), the values of the time saving / medium counter 203qg and the probability variation flag 203qh are initially set. It is reset to a value (Z310), and a display mode at the time of a big hit is set based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of Z301 (Z311). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of Z301 is compared with the random number value stored in the jackpot type selection 23 table 202qd, and the jackpot types of five types of special symbols (big hit A). -Which of the jackpot E) is the current jackpot type? As described above, in the jackpot of the first special symbol, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 9", it is determined that the jackpot is A (15R probability variation jackpot), and "10 to 49". If it is in the range of, it is determined to be a jackpot B (5R probability variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", it is determined to be a jackpot C (5R normal jackpot) (see FIG. 491 (b)). .. Further, in the jackpot of the second special symbol, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 79", it is determined that the jackpot is D (15R probability variation jackpot), and the value is in the range of "80 to 99". If there is, it is determined to be a jackpot E (15R normal jackpot) (see FIG. 491 (c)).

In this Z311 process, the display mode (lighting state of the LEDs 37A and 37B) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A to E). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A to E) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display mode of the stop symbol set in the process of Z311 is stopped and displayed by the process of Z215 of the special symbol variation process 23 (see FIG. 503) described above.

Next, with reference to the variation pattern selection 23 table 202qb (see FIGS. 492 (a) and 493), the variation pattern at the time of winning the jackpot is selected. Here, in the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIGS. 492 (b) and 493, the game set in order to facilitate the setting of different fluctuation patterns according to the set game state. It is configured so that the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set by referring to different data tables according to the state. Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern is determined with reference to the normal table 202qb1 (see FIG. 492 (a)) of the variation pattern selection 23 tables 202qb, while the gaming state is determined. When is in the probability variation state or the time reduction state, the variation pattern is determined with reference to the probability variation / time reduction table 202qb2 (see FIG. 493) in the variation pattern selection 23 table 202qb (Z312). After the processing of Z312 is completed, the processing is transferred to Z318. When the variation pattern is set in the processing of Z312, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol reservation ball execution area of the RAM 203 and the value of the stop type selection counter C3. ..

On the other hand, in the processing of Z309, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order (Z309: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving / medium counter 203qg is larger than 0. (Z313). In the processing of Z313, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203qg is larger than 0 (that is, the value is 1 or more) (Z313: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203qg is subtracted by 1 (Z314). A state command indicating the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203qg after subtraction is set (Z315), and the process proceeds to Z316. On the other hand, in the processing of Z313, when it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 203qg is 0 (Z313: No), the processing of Z314 and Z315 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the processing of Z316.

In the processing of Z316, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-order symbol, and the stop type selected stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa and the special symbol reserved ball execution area. Based on the values of the counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) at the time of deviation is determined (Z317). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of Z312, the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol reservation ball execution area. ..

In the Z312 process or the Z318 process executed after the Z317 process is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the Z312 process or the Z317 process is set. (Z318). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the Z312 process or the Z317 process is set (Z319). When the processing of Z319 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing 23 (Z104).

Next, with reference to FIG. 505, the start winning process 23 (Z105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 505 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 23 (Z105). This start winning process 23 (Z105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 502), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64, and if there is a starting winning. In addition, it is a process for holding a value indicated by various random number counters and a process for executing pre-reading of a lottery result in a special symbol from the values indicated by the various held random number counters.

When the start winning process 23 (Z105) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first entry port 64 (Z401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has won the first entry slot 64 (Z401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd (the number of reserved balls N1 of the variation display in the special symbol) is acquired (Z402). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (Z403).

Then, in the processing of Z401, if it is determined that there is no prize in the first ball opening 64 (Z401: No), the process proceeds to the processing of Z408, and even if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (Z401: No). Z401: Yes), when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203qd is not less than 4 (that is, the upper limit 4) in the processing of Z403 (Z403: No), the processing of Z407. Move to. On the other hand, in the processing of Z401, it is determined that the first ball opening 64 has won a prize (Z401: Yes), and in the processing of Z403, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd is set. If it is determined that the value is less than 4 (Z403: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd is added by 1 (Z404). Then, a hold ball number command of the first special symbol indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203qd changed by the calculation is set (Z405).

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 511) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203qd from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the special symbol 1 hold ball number of the RAM 223. It is stored in the counter 223qa.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of Z405, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the fall lottery counter C4, and the variable type updated by Z103 of the timer interrupt processing described above. Each value of the counter CS1 is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203qa of the RAM 203 (Z406). In the processing of Z406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area. When the processing of Z406 is completed, the look-ahead processing 23 is then executed (Z407), and the process shifts to the processing of Z408. The detailed contents of the look-ahead process 23 (Z407) will be described later with reference to FIG. 506, but various counters acquired for entering the ball into the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 Based on the value, a process of predetermining (pre-reading) each lottery result executed at the start of fluctuation is executed.

Regarding each of the processes of Z408 to Z413, the above-mentioned processes of Z401 to Z406 based on the entry of the ball into the first entry port 64 are only changed to the process based on the entry of the ball into the second start opening 640. , Z401 to Z406 perform substantially the same processing, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. After executing the process of Z413, the look-ahead process 23 is executed (Z414 (Z407)), and then this process is terminated.

In the present embodiment, the value of each counter is configured to be acquired based on the incoming ball, but it may be configured to be acquired at the start of fluctuation. With such a configuration, a storage area for storing the value of each counter is not required until the start of fluctuation, and the use of the storage area of the RAM 203 can be suppressed. Further, among the counters, some counters (for example, only the fluctuation type counter CS1) may be configured to be acquired at the start of fluctuation. With this configuration, the counter related to the hit / miss judgment can be acquired at the time of entering the ball, and the counter not related to the hit / miss judgment can be acquired later, and the amount of data to be stored while maintaining the fairness of the game can be stored. It can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 506, a look-ahead process 23 (Z407 (Z414)), which is one process in the start winning process 23 (Z105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 506 is a flowchart showing the look-ahead process 23 (Z407 (Z414)).

In the look-ahead process 23, first, it is determined whether or not there is a new prize (Z501). In this Z501 process, when the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd or the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe is added, it is determined that a new prize has been awarded. .. If it is determined that there is no new prize in the processing of Z501 (Z5011: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a new prize (Z501: Yes), then it is determined whether the current prize is the special symbol 1 (first special symbol) (Z502), and the special symbol 1 is determined. If it is determined (Z502: Yes), the lottery result for each counter value acquired this time is based on the special symbol big hit random number 23 table 202qa and the special figure 1 big hit 23 table (special figure 1 big hit type selection 23 table) 202qd1. It is acquired in advance (Z503), and the process proceeds to Z504. In the processing of Z504, a winning information command including a jackpot determination result and a jackpot type is set as a lottery result acquired in advance (Z504), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z502, if it is determined that the winning prize this time is not the special symbol 1 (special diagram 1), that is, the special symbol 2 (special diagram 2) (Z502: No), each counter acquired this time. The lottery result for the value is acquired in advance based on the special symbol jackpot random number 23 table 202qa and the special figure 2 jackpot type 23 table (special figure 2 jackpot type selection 23 table) 202qd2 (Z505), and as the lottery result acquired in advance. , The winning information command including the jackpot determination result and the jackpot type is set (Z504), and this process is terminated.

In this way, the result of the hit / fail determination in advance before the fluctuation starts is output to the voice lamp control device 113 as a winning information command every time the reserved ball is established, so that the voice lamp control device 113 has. , The hit / fail judgment result and its hit type can be recognized in advance. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 changes the color of the reserved symbol to a color suggesting the result of the winning / failing determination (for example, the color of the reserved symbol is changed to a color suggesting the winning / failing determination result) for notifying the player of the winning / failing determination result for the reserved ball in advance based on the winning information command. Or, an effect such as outputting a notification sound for notifying the hit / fail determination result in the reserved ball) can be executed. Further, since the winning information command outputs one winning information command for the reserved ball each time the reserved ball is established, the voice lamp control device 113 can also recognize the establishment of the reserved ball. can. The look-ahead process 23 (see Z407 in FIG. 506) in the present embodiment is configured to end the process as it is when it is determined that there is no new prize in the process of Z501 (Z501: No). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the winning information command is set again for each counter value already stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb. May be. With this configuration, even if it is determined that the advance notice effect is not executed for the winning information command received on the voice lamp control device 113 side, the advance notice effect is executed again for the same reserved symbol. It is possible to make a determination as to whether or not to do so. Further, in the present embodiment, the lottery result based on each counter value acquired on the main control device 110 side is determined in advance, and the information for indicating the advance determination result is set as the winning information command. However, not limited to this, information for indicating each acquired counter value is set as a winning information command, and the lottery result is determined in advance based on the winning information command received on the voice lamp control device 113 side. It may be configured. In addition, when setting information for indicating each acquired counter value as a winning information command, the winning information command may be encrypted so as not to be specified by the player who illegally acquired the counter value. It is good to configure it so that the winning information command is output in multiple timings.

Next, with reference to FIG. 507, the normal symbol variation processing 23 (Z106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 507 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation processing 23 (Z106). This normal symbol variation process 23 (Z106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 502), and is attached to the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the second ball entry port 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a.

In the normal symbol variation processing 23, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (Z601). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is performed. In the middle of being included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (Z6011: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (Z601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (Z602), and the second symbol display device is used. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (Z602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203qf (number of holdings of variable display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (Z603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203qf is larger than 0 (Z604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203qf is 0 (Z604 :. No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203qf is not 0 (Z604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203qf is subtracted by 1 (Z605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203qc is shifted (Z606). In the processing of Z606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203qc is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203qc is acquired (Z607), and the process proceeds to Z608.

In the processing of Z608, it is determined whether or not the time is shortened (high probability state of a normal symbol) (Z608). In this Z608 processing, the value of the time saving medium counter 203qg and the state of the probability change flag 203qh are confirmed, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203qg is 1 or more, or if the probability change flag 203qh is on, the time saving medium is in progress. If the value of the time reduction counter 203qg is 0 and the probability variation flag 203qh is off, it is determined that the time reduction is not in progress. In the processing of Z608, when it is determined that the time reduction is in progress (normal symbol high probability state) (the value of the time reduction medium counter 203qg is 1 or more, or the probability variation flag 203qh is on), it is determined (Z608: Yes). , Since the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the normal symbol, the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 acquired by the processing of Z603 and the normal hit random number 23 table (normal symbol per random number table) 202qc for high probability (Fig.) Based on 490 (b)), the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is a hit is acquired (Z609), and the process is shifted to Z611. In the processing of Z609, specifically, it is stored in the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 and the normal hit random number 23 table (normal symbol per random number table) 202qc (see FIG. 490 (b)) for high probability. Compare with random number value. As described above, if the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", it is normal. It is determined that the design is out of alignment (see FIG. 490 (b)).

On the other hand, in the processing of Z608, when it is determined that the time is not during the time reduction (high probability state of the normal symbol) (the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203qg is 0 and the probability variation flag 203qh is off), it is determined (Z608: No). , Since the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state (normal state, latent state) of a normal symbol, the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 acquired by the processing of Z603 and the normal hit random number 23 table for low probability (normal state). Based on the random number table per symbol) 202qc (see FIG. 490 (b)), the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is a hit is acquired (Z610). Specifically, the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal hit random number 23 table (normal symbol per random number table) 202qc (see FIG. 490 (b)) for low probability. .. As described above, if the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 is in the range of "5,6", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,7-239", it is normal. It is determined that the design is out of alignment (see FIG. 490 (b)).

In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is less likely to be a hit. This is because during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special gaming state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry opening 640 is opened. This is to prevent the game ball that is to be won in the specific winning opening 65a from entering the second winning opening 640 as much as possible.

After executing the processing of Z609 or Z610, the process proceeds to the processing of Z611. In the processing of Z611, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of Z609 or Z610 is a hit of the normal symbol (Z611), and if it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol (Z611: 1). Yes), the display mode at the time of hit is set (Z612), and the process proceeds to Z614. In this Z612 process, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z611 that the normal symbol is out of alignment (Z611: No), the display mode at the time of being out of alignment is set (Z613), and the process proceeds to Z614. In this Z613 process, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

In the processing of Z614, it is determined whether or not the current time is shortened (whether or not it is a high probability state of a normal symbol) (Z614), and if it is during a short time (high probability state of a normal symbol) (Z614: Yes). , The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (Z615), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the processing of Z614 is not during the time reduction (high probability state of the normal symbol), that is, if it is the low probability state of the normal symbol (Z614: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30. Set to seconds (Z616) and end this process.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (Z602: Yes), whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (Z617). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of Z615 or the processing of Z616 before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

In the processing of Z617, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Z617: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of Z617, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (Z617: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (Z618). In the processing of Z618, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the processing of Z612, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) in the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is out of order and the display mode is set by the processing of Z613, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to. When the stop display is set by the processing of Z618, when the second symbol display update processing (see Z1007) of the main processing (see FIG. 511) is executed next, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. When the process is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the Z612 process or the Z613 process.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process 23 is the hit of the ordinary symbol. (Z619). If the result of this lottery is not a normal symbol (Z619: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (Z619: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current time is shortened (Z620). If it is determined that the time is being shortened (Z620: Yes), the opening time and the number of times of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 are set to 1 second x 2 times (Z622), and the process of Z623 is started. Transition.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z620, when it is determined that the time is not shortened (Z620: No), the opening time and the number of times of the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 are set to 0.2 seconds × 1 time. Is set to (Z622), and the process proceeds to Z623.

In the processing of Z623 executed after the processing of Z621 or Z622, the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is set (Z623), and this processing is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the processing of the Z623, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see Z1005) of the main process (see FIG. 511) is executed, the electric accessory 640a The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of Z621 or the processing of Z622 of FIG. 507 are completed.

In this way, except during the big hit of the special symbol, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, the fluctuation display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the low probability state of the normal symbol, and further. Since the release period of the second entry port 640 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entry port 640.

In this embodiment, the opening time and the number of opening times per long time are the same in the normal state and the latent state, but the operation is not limited to this, and the opening time and the number of opening times are set differently. May be good. Further, in the present embodiment, the opening operation content of the first electric accessory 640a is set based on the gaming state set at the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol (at the time of lottery). Without limitation, for example, the game is executed at the time when the change time of the winning normal symbol is elapsed by executing the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol based on the game state set at the start of the change of the normal symbol (at the time of lottery). The opening operation content of the first electric accessory 640a may be set based on the state. That is, in the present embodiment, since the game state is variably set based on the lottery of the special symbol, the game state may be variably set while the normal symbol is changed. In such a case, if the opening operation content of the first electric accessory 640a is set based on the game state set at the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol (at the time of lottery), for example, during a big hit game or normal There is a problem that the first electric accessory 640a is opened for a long time during the high probability state of the symbol. On the other hand, by configuring so as to set the opening operation content of the first electric accessory 640a based on the gaming state at the time when the fluctuation time of the winning normal symbol has elapsed, the first electric accessory 640a It is possible to execute the opening operation with the content suitable for the set game state.

Next, the through gate passing process 23 (Z107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 508. FIG. 508 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process 23 (Z107). This through gate passage process 23 (Z107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 502), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the normal hit random number counter C5.

In the through gate passing process 23, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (Z701). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal entry port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (Z701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203qf (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (Z702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203qf is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (Z703).

Whether the game ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (Z701: No), or even if the game ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol reserved ball count counter If the value (M) of 203qf is not less than 4 (Z703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (Z701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203qf is less than 4 (Z703: Yes), it is normal. The value (M) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203qf is added by 1 (Z704). Then, the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 updated by the timer interrupt process Z103 described above is the first of the free hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203qc of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area (Z705), and then this process is terminated. In the processing of Z705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203qf is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 509. FIG. 509 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (Z801) as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 510, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 510 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (Z901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as voice lamp control device 113, payout control device 111, etc.) to be in an operable state, a weight process (weight time of 1 second in this embodiment) is set. Processing for setting) is executed (Z902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (Z903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 122 provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (Z904), and if it is turned on (Z904: Yes), the process shifts to Z913. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (Z904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z905), and if it is not stored (Z905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also transferred to Z913 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (Z906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (Z907: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and even in such a case, the process is transferred to Z913. As will be described later in the process of Z1014 in FIG. 511, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of Z913, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (Z913). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (Z914, Z915) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process (Z914, Z915) is executed. Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (Z914, Z915) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner. .. In the RAM initialization process (Z914, Z915), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (Z914), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (Z915). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the Z911 process.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (Z904: No), the power off occurrence information is stored (Z905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (Z904: No). Z907: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203qg, and the state of the probability change flag 203qh (that is, the game state at the time of startup) are transmitted (Z908). Next, while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203, the power cutoff occurrence information is cleared (Z909). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff is transmitted (Z910), and the process proceeds to Z911. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of Z911, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (Z912), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 511, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 511 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of Z1001 to Z1007 is executed as a periodic process with a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of Z1010 and Z1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 502), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is input to each control device (periphery) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (Z1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading processing of Z101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 502) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process 23 (see FIG. 503) and the start winning process 23 (see FIG. 505) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning command set in the start winning processing 23 (see FIG. 505) and the look-ahead processing 23 (see FIG. 506) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (Z1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (Z1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. The jackpot control process 23 for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (Z1004). In the jackpot control process 23, the specific winning opening 65a is opened according to the content (big hit type) of the jackpot game to be executed, and the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed, or a ball is specified in the specific winning opening 65a. Determine if you have won a few prizes. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. The details of the jackpot control process 23 (Z1004) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 512 to 516. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process 23 (Z1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process. Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot game content corresponding to the jackpot type (type of opening, opening time, number of openings (number of rounds), opening period, interval period, ending period) is used as a jackpot scenario. The jackpot scenario that is stored in advance and corresponds to the jackpot type set at the time of winning the jackpot is read, and the jackpot game based on the read jackpot scenario is executed.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is executed (Z1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the processing of Z623 of the normal symbol variation process 23 (see FIG. 507), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is started. The opening / closing control of the first electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of Z621 or the processing of Z622 in FIG. 507 in the normal symbol variation processing 23 are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (Z1006). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the Z312 process or the Z317 process of the special symbol variation start process 23 (see FIG. 504), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed in the first symbol. It starts in the display devices 37A and 37B. In the present embodiment, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on until the fluctuation time elapses from the start of the fluctuation. If the LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the Z312 process or the Z317 process of the special symbol variation start process 23 (see FIG. 504) ends, the first symbol display is displayed. The stop symbol (first symbol) is set to the first symbol in the display mode set by the processing of Z311 or the processing of Z316 of the special symbol variation start processing 23 (see FIG. 504) after ending the variation display executed in the apparatus 37. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the display device 37.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (Z1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the Z615 process or the Z616 process of the normal symbol variation process 23 (see FIG. 507), the variation display is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, variable display is performed in which the symbol of "○" and the symbol of "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of Z618 of the normal symbol change process 23 (see FIG. 507), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped at the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the Z612 process or the Z613 process of the normal symbol variation process 23 (see FIG. 507). Display (light up display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z1008), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (Z1008: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (Z1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (Z1009: Yes), the process is shifted to Z1001 and each process after Z1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if a predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (Z1009: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (Z1010, Z1011).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (Z1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as that of the Z1002 (Z1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process of Z1001 to Z1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the initial value of the normal hit random number counter C5) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variable type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the processing of Z1008, if the power off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z1008: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 509 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after Z1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (Z1012), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And send (Z1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (Z1014), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (Z1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The Z1008 process is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the state changes of the games performed in Z1001 to Z1007, or at the end of one cycle of the Z1010 and Z1011 processes performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cutoff state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the processing of Z1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of Z1001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer has a predetermined value (in the process of initial setting). By setting the initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of Z1001. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process 23 (Z1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 512. FIG. 512 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 23 (Z1004). This jackpot control process 23 (Z1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 511), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and a specific winning opening is entered. (Large opening) This is a process for opening or closing 65a.

In the jackpot control process 23 (Z1004), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start flag 203qi is on (Z1101). If it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203qi is on (Z1101: Yes), the jackpot opening command is set (Z1102), the jackpot start flag 203qi is turned off, and the jackpot middle flag 203qj is set on (Z1103). , End this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z1101 that the jackpot start flag 203qi is off (Z1101: No), then whether the special symbol is currently being jackpotped (that is, the jackpot middle flag 203qj is on). Whether or not (Z1104). If it is determined in the processing of Z1104 that the current is not a big hit (the big hit flag 203qj is off) (Z1104: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of Z1104, if it is determined that the jackpot is currently being hit (the jackpot flag 203qj is on) (Z1104: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of a new round (Z1104: Yes). Z1105).

If it is determined in the processing of Z1105 that it is the start timing of a new round (Z1105: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process 23 for setting the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a according to the number of rounds is executed (Z1105: Yes). Z1106), this process is terminated. The details of the jackpot operation setting process 23 will be described later with reference to FIG. 513.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z1105 that it is not the start timing of a new round (Z1105: No), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending period of the currently executed round (Z1107). .. Here, in the present embodiment, when the final round of the jackpot is completed, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending period. If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending period (Z1107: Yes), the ending command is set (Z1108), and this process is terminated. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 511) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot is started in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z1107, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending period currently being executed (Z1107: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (Z1109). Here, the end timing of the jackpot indicates a case where the execution period of the ending effect has elapsed. If it is determined in the processing of Z1109 that it is the end timing of the jackpot (Z1109: Yes), the jackpot end processing 23 for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends is executed (Z1110), and this processing is terminated. The details of the jackpot end processing 23 will be described later with reference to FIG. 514. On the other hand, in the processing of Z1109, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the end of the big hit (Z1109: No), the winning processing 23 for controlling according to the winning of the specific winning opening 65a is executed (Z1111). An abnormality process 23 for determining whether or not a ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a is normally ejected is executed (Z1112), and then this process is terminated. Details of the winning process 23 and the abnormality process 23 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 515 and 516.

Next, the details of the jackpot operation setting process 23 (Z1106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 513. FIG. 513 is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process 23 (Z1106). This jackpot operation setting process 23 (Z1106) is executed in the jackpot control process 23 (see FIG. 512), and as described above, is a process for setting the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a according to the number of rounds. ..

When the jackpot operation setting process 23 (see FIG. 513) is started, it is first determined whether it is the start timing of 5 rounds (that is, the round in which the V accessory operates) (Z1201). In the processing of Z1201, if it is determined that it is the start timing of 5 rounds (Z1201: Yes), the start of the operation scenario of the V bonus is set (Z1202), and the opening pattern of the specific winning opening 65a corresponding to the jackpot type is set. Is set (Z1203), and the process shifts to Z1205.

As described above, in the 23rd embodiment, a common operation scenario is set for the V character regardless of the jackpot type (regardless of the type). Specifically, an operation scenario is set in which the game balls are arranged in a variable manner so that the game balls can be distributed to the V region from the time when 5 seconds have passed to the time when 10 seconds have passed since the start of the 5th round. On the other hand, as described above, with respect to the opening pattern of the specific winning opening 65a, a different opening pattern is set depending on whether it is a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot. Specifically, in the case of a probabilistic jackpot, an opening / closing pattern (fifth round) in which the game ball can reach the V character while the V character is variable in the arrangement of distributing the game ball to the V area. While the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened and closed in the opening / closing pattern) in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened for 4.5 seconds from 5 seconds after the start to 9.5 seconds after the start, it is normal. In the case of a big hit, an opening / closing pattern that makes it impossible to reach the V character while the V character is variable in the arrangement of distributing the game ball to the V area (4.5 seconds have passed from the start of the 5th round). The specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened and closed in the opening / closing pattern) in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened for 4.5 seconds until the time.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the fifth round in the processing of Z1201 (Z1201: No), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is set (Z1204), and the processing is shifted to Z1205. In the processing of Z1205 executed after the processing of Z1203 or Z1204, a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (Z1205), and this processing is terminated.

The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 511) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the control device 113. Upon receiving the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 sets a display round number command for displaying the newly started round number on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 can be updated according to the number of rounds of the jackpot.

By executing this jackpot operation setting process 23 (see FIG. 513), the specific winning opening 65a can be opened in each round of the jackpot, and the ball can be set in the V region in the fifth round. be able to. As a result, in the jackpots A, B, and D, the player just hits right in the fifth round, and the game ball almost certainly enters the V region and passes through the probability change switch, so that after the jackpot ends. It is possible to shift to a probable change state (a probable change state of a special symbol and a time saving state of a normal symbol). Further, in the case of big hits C and E, it is difficult to put the game ball into the V region even if the player hits right, so that the time can be set to a short time after the big hit. As a result, the lottery of the first special symbol in which the jackpot C is determined at a relatively high rate (50% rate) in the case of a big hit is regarded as a lottery disadvantageous to the player, and in the case of a big hit, it is relatively. The lottery of the second special symbol in which the jackpot E is determined at a low rate (20% rate) can be a lottery that is advantageous to the player.

Next, the details of the jackpot end processing 23 (Z1110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 514. FIG. 514 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process 23 (Z1110). This jackpot end process 23 (Z1110) is executed in the jackpot control process 23 (see FIG. 512), and as described above, is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends.

In the jackpot end process 23 (Z1110), first, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203qk is on (Z1301). If it is determined in the processing of Z1301 that the probability change setting flag 203qk is on (Z1301: Yes), it means that the game ball has passed the probability change switch during the jackpot, so the probability change flag 203qh should be set to on. Set the state after the big hit to the probable change state (Z1302), and shift to the processing of Z1303. On the other hand, in the processing of Z1301, if the probability variation setting flag 203qk is off (Z1301: No), it means that the game ball has not passed through the probability variation switch during the jackpot, so by skipping the processing of Z1302. After the jackpot ends, the special symbol is set to the low probability state, and the process proceeds to Z1303.

In the processing of Z1303, 100 is set to the value of the time saving medium counter 203qg (Z1303), and a state command (big hit end command) for indicating the game state after the big hit ends based on the state of the probability change flag 203qh and the time saving medium counter 203qg. ) Is set (Z1304). The state command (big hit end command) set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 511) executed by the MPU 201. Then, it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the state command, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the game state storage area 223qf according to the game state notified by the state command. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can accurately grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Next, both the jackpot middle flag 203qj and the probability variation setting flag 203qk are set to off (Z1305), and this process ends.

By executing this jackpot end process 23 (see FIG. 514), it is possible to accurately set the gaming state after the jackpot ends depending on whether or not the game ball has passed the probability change switch during the jackpot.

Next, the details of the winning process 23 (Z1111) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 515. FIG. 515 is a flowchart showing the winning process 23 (Z1111). This winning process 23 (Z1111) is executed in the jackpot control process 23 (see FIG. 512), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to the winning of the specific winning opening 65a.

In the winning process 23 (Z1111), first, it is determined whether the present is the round valid period (Z1401). Here, the round valid period is a period in which the round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the specific winning opening 65a to the end of the interval period. In the processing of Z1401, if the round is not valid (Z1401: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z1401, when it is determined that the current round validity period is (Z1401: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the winning to the specific winning opening 65a is detected (Z1402), and the specific winning opening 65a is determined. If winning is detected (Z1402: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter 203qp and updated (Z1403), and a winning command indicating that winning to the specific winning opening 65a is detected is set. (Z1404), the process proceeds to Z1405. On the other hand, if the winning of the specific winning opening 65a is not detected in the processing of Z1402 (Z1402: No), the processing of Z1403 and Z1404 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z1405.

In the processing of Z1405, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203qp is 10 or more (Z1405), and if the value of the winning number counter 203qp is 10 or more (Z1405: Yes), the process proceeds to Z1407. On the other hand, in the processing of Z1405, if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter is 9 or less (Z1405: No), it is determined whether the round time has elapsed (Z1406), and if the round time has elapsed (Z1406). Z1406: Yes), shift to the processing of Z1407. In this Z1406 process, it is determined that the round time has elapsed when 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round.

In the process of Z1407, the closure of the specific winning opening 65a is set (Z1407), and the closing command indicating that the closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set is set (Z1408). Next, it is determined whether the closure of the specific winning opening 65a this time is based on the end of the 5th round (Z1409), and if it is determined that the closure is based on the end of the 5th round (Z1409: Yes), the V accessory. By setting the flow path solenoid for changing the variable to off, the state of the V accessory is set to the arrangement in which the game ball is distributed to the non-V region (Z1410), and the process shifts to Z1411. On the other hand, in the processing of Z1409, when it is determined that the closure of the specific winning opening 65a this time is due to the completion of rounds other than the 5th round (Z1409: No), the flow path solenoid is set to ON. Since there is no possibility, the processing of Z1410 is skipped and the processing is transferred to Z1411.

In the processing of Z1411, the remaining ball timer flag 203qq, the probability change effective flag 203qs, and the round end flag are set to ON (Z1411), and the processing is shifted to Z1412. Further, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203qp is 9 or less in the processing of Z1405 (Z1405: No), and it is determined that the round time has not elapsed in the processing of Z1406 (Z1406: No). The processing of Z1407 to Z1411 is skipped, and the processing is transferred to Z1412.

In the processing of Z1412, it is determined whether the round end flag is on (Z1412), and if the round end flag is off (Z1412: No), the process proceeds to the processing of Z1413. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round end flag is on in the processing of Z1412 (Z1412: Yes), then it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203qs is on (Z1416). In the processing of Z1416, if the probability variation valid flag 203qs is off (Z1416: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the probabilistic valid flag 203qs is on (Z1416: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probabilistic valid timer 203qt (Z1417), and then it is determined whether the value of the probabilistic valid timer 203qt is the upper limit value (Z1416: Yes). Z1418). Then, if the value of the probability change effective timer 203qt is not the upper limit value (Z1418: No), the process proceeds to the process of Z1413, the probability change switch is monitored, and the process of updating the probability change setting flag 203qk is executed. As a result, if the probability change effective timer 203qt is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the probability change switch, so that the probability change state can be set in consideration of the ball brushing time. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the probability change switch from being improperly passed through the game ball and being given a probability change state.

On the other hand, if the value of the probabilistic valid timer 203qt is the upper limit (Z1418: Yes), the probabilistic valid flag 203qs and the round end flag are set to off (Z1419), and the value of the probabilistic valid timer 203qt is reset (Z1420). , End this process.

Further, in the process of Z1413, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the probability change switch (Z1413), and if the game ball has not passed the probability change switch (Z1413: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the game ball has passed through the probability change switch (Z1413: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability change passage counter 203qm (Z1414), the probability change setting flag 203qk is set to ON (Z1415), and this processing is performed. To finish.

Next, the exception handling 23 (Z1112) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 516. FIG. 516 is a flowchart showing the exception handling 23 (Z1112). This abnormality processing 23 (Z1112) is a processing executed in the jackpot control processing 23 (see FIG. 512), and as described above, it is determined whether or not the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a is normally discharged. This is a process for determining.

In the abnormality processing 23 (Z1112), first, it is determined whether the current is the round valid period (Z1501), and if it is not the round valid period (Z1501: No), the present processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is valid (Z1501: Yes), then whether or not the game ball has passed the ball discharge port switch (whether or not the game ball discharged from the variable winning device 65 is detected) is determined. Determine (Z1502).

In the processing of Z1502, if it is determined that the game ball has passed the ball discharge port switch (the game ball has been discharged from the variable winning device 65) (Z1502: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the discharge number counter 203ku. (Z1503), shift to the processing of Z1504. On the other hand, in the processing of Z1502, if the game ball has not passed through the ball ejection port switch (Z1502: No), the processing of Z1503 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z1504.

In the process of Z1504, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203qq is on (Z1504). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203qq is off (Z1504: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203qq is on (Z1504: Yes), the ball is in the bleeding period, so 1 is added to the value of the remaining ball timer 203qr to update (Z1505). Next, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203qr is the upper limit value (Z1506), and if the value of the remaining ball timer 203qr is not the upper limit value (Z1506: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203qr is the upper limit value (Z1506: Yes), then the number of discharged balls (the total value of the value of the probability variation passing counter 203qm and the value of the discharging number counter 203qu) is awarded. It is determined whether or not the number matches the number (value of the winning number counter 203qp) (Z1507).

If it is determined in the processing of Z1507 that the number of discharged pieces and the number of winnings do not match (Z1507: No), an error command is set (Z1508), and the process proceeds to Z1509. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character of a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, during the period when the V region is closed, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts in which the game ball is illegally entered into the V region and passed through the probability change switch.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z1507, if it is determined that the number of discharged pieces and the number of winnings match (Z1507: Yes), the processing of Z1508 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of Z1509. In the processing of Z1509, the remaining ball timer flag 203qq is set to off (Z1509), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203qr is reset (Z1510). After that, the values of the winning number counter 203qp, the discharging number counter 203qu, and the probability variation passing counter 203qm are reset (Z1511), and this process is terminated.

By executing this abnormality processing 23 (see FIG. 516), a problem occurs in which the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a is not normally ejected due to a ball clogging inside the variable winning device 65 or the like. Can be detected and notified at an early stage.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the 23rd embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 517 to 535, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 517. FIG. 517 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (Z3001). Specifically, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power cutoff processing flag is turned on, the power cutoff process of the Z3119 is performed by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "momentary power failure") (see FIG. 518). ) Is started in the middle of execution (Z3002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 518, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see Z3116 in FIG. 518), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of Z3119. Before the execution of the power cutoff process, the power cutoff processing flag is turned on, and after the power cutoff process is completed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power cutoff process of Z3119 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power cutoff process in progress flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (Z3002: No), the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of the Z3119 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (Z3003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of Z3006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (Z3003: Yes), the process proceeds to the Z3004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (Z3003: No), the process proceeds to the Z3008 process.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of RAM223 is destroyed (Z3003: Yes), and the process proceeds to Z3004. On the other hand, this start-up process was started after the execution of the power cutoff process of Z3119 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or it was reset only to MPU221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (Z3003: No), and the process proceeds to the Z3008 process.

If the power-off processing flag is on (Z3002: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and the voice lamp control device 113 is being executed during the power-off processing of the Z3119. MPU221 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power cutoff process is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to the Z3004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the Z3004 process, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (Z3004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, it is confirmed whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (Z3005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (Z3006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (Z3005: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (Z3007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of Z3008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (Z3008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of Z3119 is executed (see Z3118 in FIG. 518). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of Z3119 is executed, the process of Z3008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is the case where the Z3119 is started in a state where the execution of the power cutoff process is completed even after the power failure occurs. Therefore, in such a case (Z3008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (Z3009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (Z3010), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set permissions (Z3011). The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110. When the processing of Z3011 is completed, it is next determined whether or not a status command has been received from the main control unit 110 (Z3012). It should be noted that this state command is a command set in the Z908 process of the start-up process (see FIG. 510) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. If it is determined that a status command has been received in the Z3012 process (Z3012: Yes), information indicating the received status command is set in the status setting area (Z3013), and the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 518). And migrate. On the other hand, if it is determined that the status command has not been received in the processing of Z3012 (Z3012: No), the processing of Z3013 is skipped and the process proceeds to the main processing (see FIG. 518).

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of Z3008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, for example, so that the processing of Z3004 to Z3006 is performed via the processing of Z3008. This is the case when the process is reached or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power cutoff command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (Z3008: No), Z3009, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to Z3010, the above-mentioned processes of Z3010 to Z3013 are executed, and the main process (FIG. 518).

In this way, when the power is turned on, the main control device 110 outputs a command that can determine whether or not the normal symbol has been hit for a long time, so that the voice lamp control device 113 also determines the state. Can be done.

It should be noted that the reason for skipping the clearing process of Z3009 is that when the processing of Z3008 is reached from Z3004 via the processing of Z3006, all the storage areas of RAM223 have already been cleared by the processing of Z3004. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 518, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 518 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the Z3101 process this time was executed (Z3101), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (Z3101: No), the process of Z3102 to Z3113 is not performed and the process proceeds to the process of Z3114. In the processing of Z3101, it is mainly related to display (directing) that Z3102 to Z3113 determine whether or not 1 msec has elapsed, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process 23 of the Z3114, the variation display setting process 23 of the Z3115, and the process of updating various counter values (not shown) in a short cycle. That is, by executing the processing of Z3114 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of Z3115 in a short cycle, the command determination process 23 (FIG. FIG. Based on the command received by S3114 of 528), the setting related to the variation effect can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the processing of Z3101 (Z3101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of Z3103 to Z3115 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (Z3102). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the processing of Z3108 described later (Z3103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (Z3104). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not the time when the power is turned on, the process shifts to the Z3105 process without performing the notification by the power on notification process.

In the process of Z3105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (Z3106). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, the hold lamp (not shown) is turned on according to the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball count counter 223qa, the special symbol 2 hold ball count counter 223qb, and the normal hold ball count counter 223qc. Is done.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (Z3107). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process to set to perform the production.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (Z3108), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (Z3109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of Z3109, the liquid crystal display execution management processing is executed (Z3110), and the process shifts to the processing of Z3111. In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of Z3108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal display effect execution management process. The sound editing / output processing of the Z3109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

After the processing of Z3110 is completed, the effect update process 23 for updating the effect mode of various effects executed during the execution of the variable display effect is executed (Z3111). The effect update process 23 (Z3111) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 519 to 446. After executing the effect update process 23 (Z3111), the operation status (presence / absence of pressing) of the PUSH button 10317 is monitored, and when a pressing is detected, control according to the pressing status is executed. Pressing detection processing of (Z3112) is executed. The details of this press detection process (Z3112) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 524 to 450.

When the processing of Z3112 is completed, the counter update processing is executed (Z3113). In this counter update process (Z3113), a process for updating the value of a counter (for example, an effect lottery counter 223qy for drawing an effect mode) required when executing various effects is executed.

When the processing of Z3113 is completed, next, the command determination processing 23 for executing the control according to various commands received from the main control device 110 is executed (Z3114). The details (Z3114) of the command determination process 23 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 528 to 454. After the command determination process 23 (Z3114) is executed, the variable display setting process 23 is executed (Z3115). In the variation display setting process 23, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process 23 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 532 to 459.

When the processing of Z3115 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (Z3116). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the Z3116 process (Z3116: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in progress flag are turned on (Z3118), and the power-off process is executed (Z3119). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (Z3120), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power cutoff occurrence information is not stored in the Z3116 process (Z3116: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (Z3117) based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223, and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (Z3117: No), the process returns to the process of Z3101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (Z3117: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the effect update process 23 (Z3111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 519. FIG. 519 is a flowchart showing the effect update process 23 (Z3111). This effect update process 23 (Z3111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 518) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, various types executed during the execution of the variable display effect. This is a process for updating the production mode of the production.

In the effect update process 23 (Z3111), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time timer 223qs is larger than 0 (Z3201), and when it is determined that the value is 0 (Z3201: No), This process is terminated as it is because it means that the variable display is not currently being executed and there is no possibility that the effect to be updated is being executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time timer 223qs is a value larger than 0 (that is, a value of 1 or more) (Z3201: Yes), the value of the fluctuation time timer is subtracted (Z3202), and then The pressing stop effect processing for updating the effect mode during the execution of the pressing stop effect (see FIG. 478) is executed (Z3203). The details of this pressing stop effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 520.

When the processing of Z3203 is completed, the interrupt continuous hitting effect processing for updating the effect mode during execution of the interrupt continuous hitting effect (see FIG. 482) is subsequently executed (Z3204). The details of this interrupt continuous striking effect process (Z3204) will be described later with reference to FIG. 521. Further, when the processing of Z3204 is completed, next, a batch change effect processing for updating the effect mode during execution of the hold batch change effect (see FIGS. 485 and 486) is executed (Z3205). The details of this batch change effect processing (Z3205) will be described later with reference to FIG. 522. When the processing of Z3205 is completed, the charge consumption processing for setting the consumption of the charged spirit gauge in the chance charge effect (see FIG. 480) is executed (Z3206), and this processing is terminated. The details of this charge consumption process will be described later with reference to FIG. 523.

Next, the pressing stop effect process (Z3203) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 520. FIG. 520 is a flowchart showing this pressing stop effect processing (Z3203). This press stop effect process (Z3203) is executed in the effect update process 23 (see FIG. 519) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, the press stop effect (see FIG. 478). This is a process for updating the effect mode during execution.

In this pressing stop effect processing (see FIG. 520), first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the pressing stop effect (see FIG. 478) (Z3301). In the processing of Z3301, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the pressing stop effect (see FIG. 478), the start of the pressing stop effect is set (Z3302), and the value of the operation valid period timer 223qt is set to 3. Set the timer value corresponding to the seconds (Z3303). Next, 3 is set in the value of the stop operation count counter 223qu (Z3304), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3301, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the pressing stop effect (Z3301: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the operation valid period timer 223qt is larger than 0 (Z3305). If it is determined in the processing of Z3305 that the value of the operation validity period timer 223qt is larger than 0 (Z3305: Yes), the value of the operation validity period timer 223qt is updated (Z3306), and then the updated operation validity period timer is updated. It is determined whether or not the value of 223qt is 0 (Z3307). If it is determined in the processing of Z3307 that the value of the operation validity period timer 223qt after the update is not 0 (Z3307: No), this processing is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the value of the operation valid period timer 223qt after the update is 0 (Z3307: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the chance charge standby flag 223qk is on (Z3308). If it is determined in the processing of Z3308 that the chance charge waiting flag 223qk is on (Z3308: Yes), the stop display of the chance charge symbol is set (Z3309), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z3308, when it is determined that the chance charge standby flag 223qk is off (Z3308: No), only the pressing stop effect (see FIG. 478) is set for the current variation display effect. In the state (the execution of the chance charge effect was not set), it means that the operation valid period (3 seconds) has passed without the stop operation by the player, so the stop display of the off symbol is set. (Z3310), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3305, when it is determined that the value of the operation valid period timer 223qt is 0 (Z3305: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop display period of the chance charge symbol has elapsed (Z3311). .. If it is determined that the stop display period of the chance charge symbol has not elapsed (Z3311: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of Z3311, when it is determined that the stop display period of the chance charge symbol has elapsed (Z3311: Yes), the start of the chance charge effect corresponding to the value of the charge number counter 223qm is set (Z3312), and the chance is set. The charge standby flag 223qk is set to off (Z3313). Next, a value corresponding to the current number of reserved balls is set in the value of the charge state count counter 223qn (Z3314), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 521, the interrupt continuous striking effect process (Z3204) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 521 is a flowchart showing this interrupt continuous striking effect process (Z3204). This interrupt continuous striking effect process (Z3204) is executed in the effect update process 23 (see FIG. 519) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and during the execution of the interrupt continuous striking effect (see FIG. 482). This is a process for updating the production mode.

When this interrupt continuous hitting effect process (see FIG. 521) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the interrupt continuous hitting effect (Z3401). In the processing of Z3401, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the interrupt continuous hitting effect (Z3401: Yes), then, from the value of the fluctuation time timer 223qs, whether or not the current fluctuation time is the time indicating before reach. (Z3402). In the processing of Z3402, if it is determined that the fluctuation time indicates before reach (Z3402: Yes), after setting both display and audio pauses, set the pause flag to "01H" (Z3402: Yes). Z3404), shift to the processing of Z3405. Specifically, in the processing of Z3404, a display interruption command indicating the start of stop (interruption) of the display mode is set to be output to the display control device 114, and the output stop (interruption) of BGM is started. The voice interruption command indicating the above is set to be output to the voice output device 226.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z3402, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time timer 223qs is not the timer value indicating before reach (Z3402: No), the pause (suspension) of only the display mode is set and the pause flag is set. Is set to "02H" (Z3403), and the process proceeds to Z3405. In the processing of Z3405 executed after the processing of Z3403 or Z3404 is completed, the start of the interrupt continuous striking effect (see FIG. 482) is set (Z3405), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3401 when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the interrupt continuous striking effect (Z3401: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the continuous striking period (Z3406). If it is determined in the processing of Z3406 that it is the start timing of the continuous striking period (Z3406: Yes), a timer value corresponding to 5 seconds is set in the value of the continuous striking valid period timer 223qv (Z3407), and this processing is terminated. ..

On the other hand, in the processing of Z3406, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the continuous striking period (Z3406: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous striking valid period timer 223qv is larger than 0 (Z3408). When it is determined that the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223qv is larger than 0 (Z3408: Yes), the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223qv is subtracted by 1 (Z3409), and then the value of the repeated hit valid period timer 223qv after the subtraction is subtracted. Determines whether or not is 0 (Z3410). If it is determined that the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223qv after subtraction is 0 (Z3410: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of Z3410, when it is determined that the value of the continuous hit effective period timer 223qv after subtraction is not 0 (Z3410: No), the display of the end image of the interrupt continuous hit effect is set (Z3411), and then. This process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3408, when it is determined that the value of the continuous hit effective period timer 223qv is 0 (Z3408: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the interrupt continuous hit effect (Z3412). .. In the process of Z3412, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the interrupt continuous hitting effect (Z3412: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the pause flag is "01H" (Z3413). When it is determined that the value of the pause flag is "01H" (Z3413: Yes), it means that both the display and the sound have been stopped (interrupted) at the start of the interrupt continuous striking effect. Both aspects and voice aspects are set to resume from the pause position (Z3414). That is, the display control device 114 is set to output the display interruption command indicating the end of the interruption of the display mode, and the audio output device 226 is set to output the audio interruption command indicating the end of the interruption of the audio mode. Set the output. When the processing of Z3414 is completed, the processing is transferred to Z3415.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3413, when it is determined that the value of the pause flag is not "01H" (Z3413: No), it means that the value of the pause flag is "02H", and only the display mode is temporary. Since it means that the display mode has been stopped (suspended), the restart of the display mode from the pause position is set (that is, the display control device 114 is output with the display suspension command indicating the end of the display mode suspension). (Setting) (Z3416), and the process shifts to Z3415. In the processing of Z3415 executed after the processing of Z3414 or Z3416, by setting the initial value "00H" to the pause flag (Z3415), neither the voice nor the display is paused (interrupted). Is indicated, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3412, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the interrupt continuous hitting effect (Z3412: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 522, the batch change effect processing (Z3205) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 522 is a flowchart showing this batch change effect processing (Z3205). This batch change effect process (Z3205) is executed in the effect update process 23 (see FIG. 519) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is performed in the hold batch change effect (see FIGS. 485 and 486). This is a process for updating the effect mode during execution.

In the batch change effect processing (see FIG. 522), first, it is determined whether or not the batch change flag 223qp is on (Z3501), and when it is determined that the batch change flag 223qp is not on (off) (see FIG. 522). Z3501: No), which means that it is not during the execution period of the hold batch change effect (see FIGS. 485 and 486), and there is no possibility of making settings related to the hold batch change effect, so this process is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the batch change flag 223qp is on (Z3501: Yes), then, in the hold batch change effect, the timing at which the valid period of the operation for the PUSH button 10317 for batch changing the hold symbol mode is started. It is determined whether or not it is (Z3502). In the processing of Z3502, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the valid period of the operation for the PUSH button 10317 (Z3502: Yes), the timer value corresponding to 3 seconds is set in the value of the batch change period timer 223qx (Z3502: Yes). Z3503), the valid period of the operation for the PUSH button 10317 is set to 3 seconds, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of 3502 that it is not the start timing of the valid period (Z3502: No), then whether the value of the batch change period timer 223qx is larger than 0 (that is, the operation for the PUSH button 10317 is valid. Whether or not it is within the period) is determined (Z3504). In the processing of Z3504, if it is determined that the value of the batch change period timer 223qx is larger than 0 (Z3504: Yes), the value of the batch change period timer 223qx is subtracted by 1 (Z3505), and the batch change period timer 223qx after the subtraction is subtracted. It is determined whether or not the value of is 0 (Z3506). If it is determined in the processing of Z3506 that the value of the batch change period timer 223qx after subtraction is not 0 (Z3506: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of Z3506, when it is determined that the value of the batch change period timer 223qx after subtraction is 0 (Z3506: Yes), the number of reserved balls is set to the reserved symbol mode indicated by the data of the reserved symbol mode storage area 223r. The symbol is set to be changed and displayed (Z3507), all the values of the batch change flag 223qp, the change point storage area 223qq, and the batch change period timer 223qx are reset (Z3508), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the batch change period timer 223qx is 0 in the processing of Z3504 (Z3504: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

Next, the charge consumption process (Z3206) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 523. FIG. 523 is a flowchart showing this charge consumption process (Z3206). This charge consumption process (Z3206) is executed in the effect update process 23 (see FIG. 519) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is charged in the chance charge effect (see FIG. 480) as described above. It is a process for setting the consumption of the fire gauge.

In the charge consumption process (Z3206), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the charge number counter 223qm is larger than 0 (Z3551), and when it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223qm is 0 (Z3551: No). , Since it means that there is no room to consume the spirit gauge and generate a chance-up effect, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of Z3551 when it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223qm is larger than 0 (Z3551: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is the executeable timing of the charge consumption effect (Z3552). If it is determined in the process of Z3552 that it is not the feasible timing of the charge consumption effect (Z3552: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3552, when it is determined that it is the execution timing of the charge consumption effect (Z3552: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the charge state count counter 223qn is 0 (Z3552: Yes). Z3553). When it is determined that the value of the charge state count counter 223qn is 0 (Z3553: Yes), it means that it is the last fluctuation display in which the spirit gauge can be consumed, and the spirit gauge is within this fluctuation display. Since it is necessary to consume all of the above, the processing for setting the chance-up effect by consuming the spirit gauge (each processing of Z3560 and Z3561) is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z3553 that the value of the charge state count counter 223qn is not 0 (Z3553: No), then the fluctuation display currently being executed (the fluctuation) is expected to have a degree of expectation of super reach or higher. It is determined whether or not the effect mode shown is a set variable display (Z3554). If it is determined that the fluctuation is not more than expected (less than or equal to the normal reach effect) (Z3354: No), then whether or not the charge state includes a hold of more than super reach. (Z3555). If it is determined that the charge state range includes a hold of super reach or higher (Z3555: Yes), then the value of the charge number counter 223qm is the value obtained by adding 2 to the number of hold balls in the charge range. It is determined whether or not it is larger (Z3556). If it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223qm is larger than the value obtained by adding 2 to the number of reserved balls in the charge range (Z3556: Yes), the reserved balls with more chances of performing the chance-up effect are higher than the super reach effect. Even if it is included, it means that a large number of gauges (charges) of the spirit gauge remains with respect to the number of reserved balls. The process for consuming the gauge and setting the chance-up effect (each process of Z3558 and Z3559) is executed.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z3556, when it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223qm is equal to or less than the value obtained by adding 2 to the number of reserved balls in the charge range (Z3556: No), the variation display in which the super reach effect is set is set. By consuming the energy gauge at the execution timing of the multiple chance-up effects in the above, it means that the energy gauge can be sufficiently consumed within the range of the value of the charge state count counter 223qn. This process ends as it is without setting the consumption of the spirit gauge in.

Further, in the processing of Z3555, if it is determined that the charge state range does not include the hold of super reach or higher (Z3555: No), then the value of the charge number counter 223qm is the hold ball within the charge range. It is determined whether or not it is larger than the number (Z3557). If it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223qm is equal to or less than the number of reserved balls within the charge range (Z3557: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of Z3557, when it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223qm is larger than the number of reserved balls in the charge range (Z3557: Yes), the gauge number (charge number) of the spirit gauge is set with respect to the number of reserved balls. Since it means that a large amount remains, in order to reduce the energy gauge in the fluctuation, the processing for consuming the energy gauge and setting the chance-up effect (each processing of Z3558 and Z3559) is executed.

In the process of Z3558, the charge consumption effect of the effect mode according to the execution timing is set (Z3558), the value of the charge number counter 223qm is subtracted by 1 (Z3559), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z3554, when it is determined that the fluctuation is equal to or more than the super reach (Z3354: Yes), the charge consumption effect of the effect mode according to the execution timing is set (Z3560), and the value of the charge number counter 223qm. Is subtracted by 1 (Z3561), and then this process is terminated.

Next, the press detection process (Z3112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 524. FIG. 524 is a flowchart showing this pressing detection process (Z3112). This press detection process (Z3112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 518) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and monitors the operation status (presence / absence of press) of the PUSH button 10317. When a press is detected, it is a process for executing control according to the press status.

In the press detection process (Z3112), first, it is determined whether or not the press on the PUSH button 10317 is detected (Z3601), and if it is determined that the press on the PUSH button 10317 is not detected (Z3601: No), it is as it is. This process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pressing of the PUSH button 10317 is detected (Z3601: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the operation valid period timer 223qt is larger than 0 (Z3602). When it is determined that the value of the operation valid period timer 223qt is larger than 0 (Z3602: Yes), it means that the PUSH button 10317 is pressed (operated) during the valid period in the pressing stop effect (see FIG. 478). Therefore, a stop operation detection process (Z3603) for performing control corresponding to the stop operation during the execution of the press stop effect is executed (Z3603), and this process is terminated. The details of this stop operation detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 525.

When it is determined that the value of the operation valid period timer 223qt is 0 in the processing of Z3602 (Z3602: No), then whether the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223qv is larger than 0 (that is, the continuous hit in the interrupt continuous hit effect). Whether or not the operation is valid (Z3604). When it is determined that the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223qv is larger than 0 (Z3604: Yes), the continuous hit operation detection process for executing the control corresponding to the continuous hit operation during the execution of the interrupt continuous hit effect is executed (Z3605). After that, this process is terminated. The details of this continuous striking operation detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 526.

When it is determined that the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223qv is 0 in the processing of Z3604 (Z3604: No), then whether the value of the batch change period timer 223qx is larger than 0 (that is, in the hold batch change effect). It is determined whether or not the PUSH button 10317 is valid (Z3606). When it is determined that the value of the batch change period timer 223qx is larger than 0 (Z3606: Yes), the change operation detection process for controlling the batch change is executed during the execution of the hold batch change effect. (Z3607), and then this process is terminated. The details of this change operation detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 527. On the other hand, in the process of Z3606, when it is determined that the value of the batch change period timer 223qx is 0 (Z3606: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, the stop operation detection process (Z3603) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 525. FIG. 525 is a flowchart showing this stop operation detection process (Z3603). This stop operation detection process (Z3603) is executed in the press detection process (see FIG. 524) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, the stop operation during the execution of the press stop effect is performed. This is a process for performing the corresponding control.

In the stop operation detection process (Z3603), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the stop operation count counter 223qua is larger than 1 (Z3701), and when it is determined that the value of the stop operation count counter 223qu is larger than 1, (Z3701). : Yes), the stop display of the symbol string corresponding to the value of the stop operation count counter 223qua is set (Z3702), and the process proceeds to Z3709. In the processing of Z3702, if the value of the stop operation number counter 223ku is 3, the stop operation of the left symbol column is set, while if the value of the stop operation number counter 223ku is 2, the stop operation of the right symbol column is performed. Set.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z3701 that the value of the stop operation number counter 223qu is 1 or less (Z3701: No), it is determined whether or not the chance charge standby flag 223qk is on (Z3703). When it is determined that the chance charge standby flag 223qk is on in the processing of Z3703 (Z3703: Yes), it means that the variation display in which the execution of the chance charge effect is set is being executed, so that the remaining period By setting the stop display effect of the chance charge symbol in, it is notified that the chance charge effect is started (Z3707), and the process proceeds to Z3708.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3703, when it is determined that the chance charge standby flag 223qk is off (Z3703: No), then it is determined whether or not the operation valid period remains for 2 seconds or more (Z3704). If it is determined that the operation valid period remains for 2 seconds or more (Z3704: Yes), the execution of the chance charge fanning effect (see FIG. 479 (a)) is set in the remaining period (Z3705), and the process proceeds to Z3708. do. By executing the processing of Z3705, in the variable display in which only the pressing stop effect is set, if the pressing is completed three times at an early stage in the valid period (within 1 second after the start), the button is immediately removed. It is possible to perform a chance charge fanning effect that has a longer effect period than stopping the symbol. Therefore, since the effect period can be changed according to the speed of the player's operation (pressing), a more suitable effect mode can be realized.

In the processing of Z3704, if it is determined that the operation valid period does not remain for 2 seconds or more (less than 2 seconds) (Z3704: No), the stop display of the middle symbol row is set so as to be a combination of outlier symbols. (Z3706), shift to the processing of Z3708.

In the processing of Z3708 executed after any of the processing of Z3705 to Z3707 is executed, the value of the operation validity period timer 223qt is reset to 0 (Z3708), and the process proceeds to the processing of Z3709. In the processing of Z3709 executed after the processing of Z3702 or Z3708 is executed, the value of the stop operation number counter 223qu is decremented by 1 and updated (Z3709), and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 526, the continuous striking operation detection process (Z3605) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 526 is a flowchart showing this continuous striking operation detection process (Z3605). This continuous striking operation detection process (Z3605) is executed in the press detection process (see FIG. 524) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, the continuous striking operation during the execution of the interrupt continuous striking effect. This is the process for executing the corresponding control.

In the continuous hit operation detection process (Z3605), first, the remaining valid period (T) is specified from the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223qv (Z3751), and then the number of monsters corresponding to the effect type of the interrupt continuous hit effect this time is The lower limit value (D) is calculated (Z3752). As described above, the lower limit of the number of monsters is predetermined for each production type in the interrupt continuous hitting lottery table 222qh (see FIG. 500). When the processing of Z3752 is completed, next, "T / 5 seconds x (100 bodies-D)" is calculated (Z3753), and the calculated value is subtracted from the current number of remaining monsters (Z3754). ). In the processing of Z3754, the value after the decimal point is rounded off. When the processing of Z3754 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the calculated number of monsters is less than the lower limit value in the effect type of the interrupt continuous hitting effect this time (Z3755).

If it is determined in the Z3755 process that the number of monsters below the lower limit has been calculated (Z3755: Yes), the display of the remaining number of monsters is updated to the lower limit (Z3756), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z3755, if it is determined that the calculated number of monsters is equal to or greater than the lower limit (Z3755: No), the specified subtraction number is subtracted from the display of the remaining number of monsters and updated (Z3757), and then updated. , End this process.

Next, the change operation detection process (Z3607) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 527. FIG. 527 is a flowchart showing this change operation detection process (Z3607). This change operation detection process (Z3607) is executed in the press detection process (see FIG. 524) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, is performed collectively during the execution of the hold batch change effect. It is a process for performing control for setting a change.

In the change operation detection process (Z3607), first, the change point corresponding to each hold ball is specified from the data of the change point storage area 223qq (Z3801), and the mode of the hold ball having one or more change points is uniformly increased by one step. The data of the reserved symbol mode storage area 223r is updated so as to be (Z3802). Next, the variation type of the hold 1 is specified (Z3803), and the hold symbol mode is specified according to the specified variation type, the hold change lottery table 222qc, and the staging lottery counter (Z3804). Then, it is determined whether or not the specified reserved symbol mode has a higher expectation than the data of the reserved symbol mode storage area 223r (Z3805). When it is determined that the specified reserved symbol mode has a higher expectation than the data of the reserved symbol mode storage area 223r (Z3805: Yes), the data of the reserved symbol mode storage area 223r is the data indicating the specified reserved symbol mode. (Z3806) and shift to the processing of Z3807.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z3805, if it is determined that the specified reserved symbol mode is not higher in expectation than the data of the reserved symbol mode storage area 223r (Z3805: No), the processing of Z3806 is skipped and the process of Z3807 is performed. Transition.

In the processing of Z3807, it is determined whether or not the rank-up lottery of the reserved symbol mode by the processing of Z3804 to Z3806 is completed for all the reserved balls (Z3807), and the lottery for all the reserved balls is not completed. If it is determined (Z3807: No), the variation type of the reserved ball having a new start winning time is specified from the reserved ball that is the target of the lottery this time (Z3808), and the process returns to Z3804.

When it is determined in the processing of Z3807 that the rank-up lottery for all the reserved balls has been completed (Z3807: Yes), the display of the reserved symbol mode indicated by the data of the reserved symbol mode storage area 223r is set (Z3809), and all at once. All the values of the change flag 223qp, the change point storage area 223qq, and the batch change period timer 223qx are reset (Z3810), and this process ends.

Next, the command determination process 23 (Z3114) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 528. FIG. 528 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 23 (Z3114). This command determination process 23 (Z3114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 518) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. do.

In the command determination process 23 (Z3114), first, the unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read. It is determined whether or not the state command is included in (Z3901). In the processing of Z3901 if it is determined that the status command is included in the unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 (Z3901: Yes), the game is played according to the gaming status notified by the received command. The data in the state storage area 223qf is updated (Z3902), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the status command has not been received in the processing of Z3901 (Z3901: No), then the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 (variation among unprocessed commands). Whether or not the pattern command is included) is determined (Z3903). When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has been received in the processing of Z3903 (Z3903: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223qd is set to ON (Z3904), and the fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command (Z3905). After that, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3903, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (Z3903: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (Z3906). When it is determined that the stop type command has been received in the Z3906 process (Z3906: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223qe provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z3907), and the stop type is extracted from the received command. Then (Z3908), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3909, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (Z3906: No), then it is determined whether or not the reserved ball count command has been received (Z3909). When it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received in the processing of Z3909 (Z3909: Yes), the reserved ball number is extracted from the received command, and the corresponding special symbol reserved ball number counter (special symbol 1 reserved ball number). The values of the counter 223qa and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223qb) are updated (Z3910), and this process is terminated. Here, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223qa, and the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223qb. Stored. Further, when the reserved ball number command indicating the reserved ball number of the normal symbol is received, the information for indicating the reserved ball number is stored in the normal reserved ball number counter 223qc. In the present embodiment, since the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 includes information indicating the current hold ball number, for example, due to a power failure or the like, each hold ball number counter on the voice lamp control device 113 side Even if the value is erased, the value of each hold ball counter can be restored to an appropriate value by receiving the next hold ball count command to be transmitted. In this case, it may be configured to transmit each reserved ball number command in the process (see Z908 of FIG. 510) for transmitting the state command of the start-up process (see FIG. 510) of the main control device 110.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3909, when the reserved ball number command is not received (Z3909: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command is received from the main control device 110 (Z3911). If it is determined in the processing of Z3911 that a winning information command has been received (Z3911: Yes), various effects (look-ahead effects) are set according to the type of winning information notified by the winning information command. The winning information command processing 23 for the purpose is executed (Z3912), and this processing is terminated. The details of the winning information command processing 23 (Z3912) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 529 and 530.

When it is determined that the winning information command has not been received in the processing of Z3911 (Z3911: No), then various commands related to winning (opening command, round number command, jackpot end command, and ending command) are used. It is determined whether or not (Z3913) is received, and if it is determined that a hit-related command is being received (Z3913: Yes), control according to the type of the hit-related command is executed. The hit-related command process 23 is executed (Z3914), and this process is terminated. The hit-related command processing 23 (Z3914) will be described later with reference to FIG. 531. On the other hand, in the process of Z3913, if it is determined that the command related to the hit has not been received from the main control device 110 (Z3913: No), this process is then terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 529, the details of the winning information command processing 23 (Z3912), which is one of the processing in the command determination processing 23 (Z3114), will be described. FIG. 529 is a flowchart showing the winning information command processing 23 (Z3912). In the winning information command processing 23 (Z3912), first, the data indicating the lottery result notified by the command is stored in an empty area of the winning information storage area (Z4001), and the process proceeds to the processing of Z4002. In the processing of Z4001, data indicating the winning information notified by the command is stored in the empty area having the smallest number among the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area.

In the processing of Z4002, it is determined whether or not the chance charge waiting flag 223qk is on (Z4002). When it is determined that the chance charge standby flag 223qk is on (Z4002: No), it means that the variable display effect in which the chance charge effect is set is being executed, and the chance charge effect has not been started yet. Therefore, according to the content of the newly detected start prize, the gauge number (charge number) of the spirit gauge charged in the chance charge production is added to the value predetermined at the start of the fluctuation. Execute the process. More specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the current winning information command is a winning information command indicating a win (Z4003), and when it is determined that the winning information command is a winning information command (Z4003: Yes). ), 2 is added to the value of the charge number counter 223qm to update (Z4004), and the process proceeds to Z4006. On the other hand, in the processing of Z4003, when it is determined that the winning information command this time is not a winning information command indicating a hit (a winning information command indicating a loss) (Z4003: No), the value of the charge number counter is 223qm. 1 is added and updated (Z4005), and the process proceeds to Z4006.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z4002, if it is determined that the chance charge standby flag 223qk is off (Z4002: No), there is no possibility of adding the gauge number (charge number) of the spirit gauge, so each of Z4003 to Z4005. The process is skipped and the process proceeds to the Z4006 process. In the processing of Z4006, it is determined whether or not the lottery result corresponding to the fall has been notified (Z4006). In the processing of Z4006, if it is determined that the lottery result corresponding to the fall has been notified (Z4006: Yes), then whether or not the production mode corresponding to the continuation rich scenario in the probability change continuation suggestion production is being executed. Distinguish (Z4007). In this Z4007 process, when the data in the continuous scenario storage area 223qh is any of "08H" to "0BH" corresponding to the continuous rich scenario, the effect mode corresponding to the continuous rich scenario is being executed. Determine if there is.

If it is determined in the processing of Z4007 that the continuation suggestion effect of the continuation rich scenario is being executed (Z4007: Yes), then the prize information notified by the current prize information command is the probability change continuation suggestion effect. It is determined whether or not the winning information is digested during execution (Z4008). That is, it is determined from the new winning information whether or not it is confirmed that the special symbol will fall from the probabilistic state to the low probability state during the execution of the probabilistic continuation suggestion effect, and it is digested during the execution of the continuous suggestion effect. If it is determined that the winning information is (it is confirmed that the player will fall during the execution of the probability change continuation suggestion effect) (Z4008: Yes), refer to the discontinuation table of the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222qg (see FIG. 499). Then, the continuation suggestion effect scenario is determined (Z4009), the data indicating the selected scenario is overwritten in the continuation scenario storage area 223qh (Z4010), and the process proceeds to Z4011. In each process of Z4009 and Z4010, the effect scenario of "0CH" in the discontinuity table is stored in the continuation scenario storage area 223qh.

In the 23rd embodiment, when the new start prize is a lottery result corresponding to a fall in the number of fluctuations within the execution range of the probability change continuation suggestion effect, the effect scenario of "0CH" is always set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one scenario may be determined by lottery from the four staging scenarios (any of "0CH" to "0FH") specified in the discontinuity table. With such a configuration, it is possible to further diversify the staging mode at the time of falling.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z4006, when it is determined that the lottery result corresponding to the fall has not been notified (Z4006: No), and when it is determined that the probability change continuation suggestion effect of the continuation rich scenario is not being executed (Z4007: No). ), And if it is determined that the new prize information notified by the current prize information command is not the prize information that is digested during the execution of the probability change continuation suggestion effect (Z4008: No), the effect in the probability change continuation suggestion effect. Since it is not necessary to rewrite the scenario to the scenario of the discontinuity table, the process proceeds to Z4011 as it is.

By executing each of the processes of Z4006 to Z4010, the probability change state is in the probability change state at the start of the probability change continuation suggestion effect, and the reserved balls for the number of fluctuations until the probability change continuation suggestion effect ends are not accumulated. When the continuation suggestion effect is executed and then the start prize corresponding to the fall occurs, by switching to the effect scenario for non-continuation (the effect scenario of "0CH"), the result of the probability change continuation suggestion effect has already fallen. It is possible to notify that it is. That is, it is possible to prevent the staging mode from becoming continuous even though the staging has already been completed, so that a more suitable staging mode can be realized.

Further, in the processing of Z4011, based on the winning information notified by the winning information command, a holding notice lottery process for drawing a lottery for whether or not the hold change effect and the hold batch change effect can be executed is executed (Z4011), and this process is performed. To finish. The details of this hold notice lottery process will be described with reference to FIG. 530.

FIG. 530 is a flowchart showing this hold notice lottery process (Z4011). In this hold notice lottery process (Z4011), first, data indicating the hold symbol mode of white hold is stored in the empty area of the hold symbol mode storage area 223r (Z4051). More specifically, among the empty areas of the reserved symbol mode storage area 223r, the data indicating the white reserved symbol mode is stored in the area having the smallest number. When the processing of Z4051 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the batch change flag 223qp is on (Z4052), and if it is determined that the batch change flag 223qp is on (Z4052: Yes), the white hold is held. The symbol mode is set to be displayed as a reserved symbol corresponding to the new winning information (Z4053), and this process is terminated. By executing this Z4053 process, the reserved ball number symbol changed to imitate a rock by the reserved batch change effect, and the reserved ball number symbol based on the newly detected start prize after the start of the reserved batch change effect. Since the mode of the reserved symbols can be different from each other, the player can easily understand the range of the reserved ball number symbols to be the target of the reserved batch change effect. Therefore, it is possible to realize an effect mode that is easier for the player to understand.

In the 23rd embodiment, the number of reserved balls based on the start prize detected after the start of the hold batch change effect is uniformly set to the white hold hold symbol mode, but the configuration is limited to this. is not. For example, with respect to the new reserved ball number symbol, the lottery of the reserved symbol mode using the reserved change lottery table 222qc (see FIG. 497 (a)) may be executed. As a result, not only the reserved ball number symbol that is the target of the pending batch change effect, but also the reserved ball number symbol based on the new start winning can be expected to be a big hit. Further, for example, a new start prize detected after the start of the hold batch change effect may be added to the target of the hold batch change effect. In this case, the hold ball number symbol based on the new start winning may be added to the target of the hold batch change effect without fail, or may be added to the target of the hold batch change effect only under predetermined conditions. May be good. In addition, as a predetermined condition, for example, when the winning information corresponding to the new starting winning shows the jackpot expectation level higher than the super reach, it may be included in the execution target of the hold batch change effect. For example, as a configuration to be included in the execution target of the hold batch change effect only when the winning information corresponding to the variation type having a higher expectation than the hold ball in the range in which the hold batch change effect is set is newly notified. May be good. With this configuration, when the reserved ball number symbol based on the new start winning is added to the execution target of the reserved batch change effect, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be further improved.

In the processing of Z4052, when it is determined that the batch change flag 223qp is off (Z4052: No), then it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls is larger than 1 (Z4054), and the number of reserved balls is 1 or less. If it is determined that (Z4054: No), there is no possibility of executing the hold batch change effect, so the process of Z4060 for drawing the hold symbol mode of the hold ball number symbol corresponding to the new winning information is performed. Transition. On the other hand, in the processing of Z4054, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is larger than 1 (2 or more) (Z4054: Yes), the data of the winning information storage area and the data of the reserved symbol mode storage area 223r are obtained. , The change point is calculated according to the change point calculation table 222qd (Z4055), and it is determined whether or not the hold batch change effect can be executed according to the values of the calculated change point, the batch change lottery table 222qe, and the effect lottery counter. (Z4056). Next, it was determined whether or not the determination result by the processing of Z4056 was the determination result corresponding to the execution of the hold batch change effect (Z4057), and it was determined that the determination result was not the determination result corresponding to the execution of the hold batch change effect. In the case (Z4057: No), the process proceeds to the process of Z4060 for drawing the reserved symbol mode of the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the new winning information. On the other hand, in the processing of Z4057, if it is determined that the determination result corresponds to the execution of the hold batch change effect (Z4057: Yes), the execution of the hold batch change effect is set (Z4058), and the batch change flag 223qp is turned on. Set to (Z4059) to end this process.

In the processing of Z4060, the hold change lottery table 222qc (see FIG. 497 (a)) is read (Z4060), and the read hold change lottery table 222qc is determined according to the winning information notified by the command and the value of the staging lottery counter. The reserved symbol mode is determined (Z4061). Next, the data corresponding to the latest winning information in the reserved symbol mode storage area 223r is updated according to the reserved symbol embodiment determined in the processing of Z4061 (Z4062), and the reserved symbol embodiment of the aspect indicated by the updated data is updated. Set the display (Z4063) and end this process.

By executing this hold notice lottery process (see FIG. 530), various staging modes using the hold ball number symbol can be suitably set.

Next, the contents of the above-mentioned hit-related command processing 23 (Z3914) will be described with reference to FIG. 531. FIG. 531 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit-related command process 23 (Z3914). This hit-related command process 23 (Z3914) is executed by the command determination process 23 (see FIG. 528) of the voice lamp control device 113, and when a command related to the hit is received from the main control device 110. In addition, it is a process for performing control according to the type of the received command.

In the hit-related command processing 23 (see FIG. 531), first, it is determined whether or not the command received this time is an opening command (Z4101). If it is determined that the command received this time is an opening command (Z4101: Yes), a display opening command corresponding to the received opening command is set (Z4102), and then this process is terminated.

In the processing of Z4101, if it is determined that the command received this time is not the opening command (Z4101: No), then it is determined whether the command received this time is a round number command (Z4103), and the round number command is used. If it is determined to exist (Z4103: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the number of rounds indicated by the round number information included in the received round number command (Z4104), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the processing of Z4103 that the command received this time is not a round number command (Z4103: No), it is determined whether the command received this time is a jackpot end command (Z4105), and it is a jackpot end command. If it is determined (Z4105: Yes), the data in the game state storage area 223qf is updated (Z4106) according to the information indicating the game state after the end of the big hit included in the received jackpot end command, and the time saving guaranteed number counter 223qg. The value of is set to 100 (Z4107). Next, it is determined whether or not the right-handed winning flag 223qi is on (Z4108), and if it is determined that the right-handed winning flag 223qi is on (Z4108: Yes), the game is played by right-handed. It means that a big hit was made during the probable change state or the time saving state (that is, a so-called consecutive villa occurred), and it means that the big hit was made in the lottery of the second special symbol with a high ratio of the probable change big hit. , The rear mode for high expectation (see FIG. 473 (b)) is set (Z4110), and this process is terminated. Setting the back mode for high expectations uniformly makes it difficult to understand whether the time saving state is set or the probabilistic state is set, so that the player can predict the current game state. This is to realize it.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z4108, when it is determined that the winning flag 223qi during right-handed hitting is off (Z4108: No), it is a big hit in the normal state where the game is played by left-handed hitting (so-called first hit). This means that the lottery for the first special symbol, which has a low probability variation jackpot ratio, was a jackpot, so a rear mode for low expectations (see FIG. 473 (a)) was set (Z4109). After that, this process ends. Setting the back mode for low expectations uniformly makes it difficult to understand whether the time saving state is set or the probabilistic state is set, so that the player can predict the current game state. This is to realize it.

Further, when it is determined that the jackpot end command has not been received in the processing of Z4105 (Z4105: No), then it is determined whether the command received this time is an ending command (Z4111), and it is determined that the command is an ending command. If it is determined (Z4111: Yes), the display ending command is set (Z4112), and this process is terminated. If it is determined that the ending command has not been received in the Z4111 process (Z4111: No), the present process is terminated thereafter.

Next, the variation display setting process 23 (Z3115) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 532. FIG. 532 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 23 (Z3115). This variation display setting process 23 (Z3115) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 518) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. This is a process for generating and setting a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the variation display setting process 23 (Z3115), first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223qd provided in the RAM 223 is on (Z4201). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223qd is not on (that is, it is off) (Z4201: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so that the processing of Z4207 is performed. Move to. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223qd is on (Z4201: Yes), the variation start flag 223qd is turned off (Z4202), and the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the display variation pattern command is set to RAM223. (Z4203).

Next, the variation effect setting process 23 for setting the effect mode to be executed with the extracted variation pattern (variation time) is executed (Z4204). The contents of the variable staging setting process 23 will be described later with reference to FIG. 533. When the processing of Z4204 is completed, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the effect mode determined by the processing of Z4204 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (. Z4205). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area is shifted (Z4206). In this process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as 1st area → execution area, 2nd area → 1st area, 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area. After shifting the data, the process shifts to Z4207 processing.

In the processing of Z4207, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223qe provided in RAM 223 is on (Z4207). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223qe is not on (that is, it is off) (Z4207: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223qe is on (Z4207: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223qe is turned off (Z4208), and the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is set to RAM223. Obtained from (Z4209). Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (Z4210), and the process proceeds to Z4211.

In the process of Z4211, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (Z4211). .. When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled. After the processing of Z4211 is executed, this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 533, the contents of the variation effect setting process 23 (Z4204), which is one process in the variation display setting process 23 (see FIG. 532) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. do. FIG. 533 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation effect setting process 23 (Z4204). In this variation effect setting process 23 (Z4204), a process for setting a detailed effect mode (notice content) of the variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is executed.

In the variation effect setting process 23 (Z4204), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the charge state count counter 223qn is larger than 0 (Z4301), and when it is determined that the value of the charge state count counter 223qn is larger than 0 (Z4301). Z4301: Yes), the value of the charge state count counter 223qn is subtracted by 1 (Z4302), and the process proceeds to Z4303. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the charge state count counter 223qn is 0 in the processing of Z4301 (Z4301: No), the processing of Z4302 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z4303.

In the processing of Z4303, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving guaranteed number counter 223qg is larger than 0 (Z4303). If it is determined that the value of the time reduction guaranteed number counter 223qg is 0 (Z4303: No), the process proceeds to Z4311. On the other hand, in the processing of Z4303, when it is determined that the value of the time saving guaranteed number counter 223qg is larger than 0 (Z4303: Yes), the value of the time saving guaranteed number counter 223qg is subtracted by 1 (Z4304), and then after the subtraction. It is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction guarantee count counter 223qg is larger than 0 (Z4305). In the processing of Z4305, when it is determined that the value of the time saving guaranteed number counter 223qg after subtraction is 0 (Z4305: No), the process proceeds to the processing of Z4311. On the other hand, in the processing of Z4305, if it is determined that the value of the time saving guaranteed number counter 223qg after subtraction is larger than 0 (Z4305: Yes), then whether the value of the time saving guaranteed number counter 223qg after subtraction is larger than 4. Whether or not it is determined (Z4306). In the processing of Z4306, when it is determined that the value of the time saving guaranteed number counter 223qg after subtraction is larger than 4 (Z4306: Yes), the process proceeds to the processing of Z4312.

In the processing of Z4311, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a probable change state (Z4311). Here, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a probabilistic state based on the data stored in the gaming state storage area 223qf. In the processing of Z4311, if it is determined that the current state is the probable change state (Z4311: Yes), it means that the probable change state continues more than 100 times after the end of the big hit, so the lottery in the back mode is performed. Therefore, the process shifts to Z4312 processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z4311 that the current state is not in the probable change state (Z4311: No), the processing of Z4312 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of Z4313.

In the processing of Z4312, in the game state (time saving state, probability change state) in which the game is played by right-handed, one back mode is drawn from among a plurality of back modes showing the expectation of the probability change state with a lottery probability according to the game state. The back mode lottery process is executed (Z4312), and the process shifts to the Z4313 process. The details of this back mode lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 535.

In the process of Z4313, an effect mode selection process for selecting an effect mode in the variable display effect is executed (Z4313), and then this process is terminated. The details of this effect mode selection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 536.

Further, in the variation effect setting process 23 in the 23rd embodiment, when it is determined in the process of Z4306 that the value of the time saving guaranteed number counter 223qg after subtraction is 4 or less (Z4306: No), the probability change continuation suggestion effect is produced. Since it means that it is the execution period (the fluctuation period of the 96th to 99th fluctuation display after the end of the jackpot), next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is the jackpot (Z4307). In the processing of Z4307, if it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (Z4307: Yes), the big hit effect mode dedicated to the execution period of the continuation suggestion effect is set as the current variation display mode (Z4308), and right-handed. The winning flag is set to on (Z4309), and this process ends. As a jackpot effect mode dedicated to the execution period of the continuation suggestion effect, for example, an adventurer who breaks through the door 806 by the effect of breaking through the door 806 discovers a treasure on the other side of the door 806. , The effect of notifying the jackpot is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of Z4307, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol is not a big hit of the special symbol (Z4307: No), the continuation suggestion effect setting for setting the effect mode in the execution period of the probability change continuation suggestion effect. The process is executed (Z4310), and the present process is terminated. The details of this continuation suggestion effect setting process (Z4310) will be described later with reference to FIG. 534.

Next, with reference to FIG. 534, the content of the continuation suggestion effect setting process (Z4310), which is one of the processes in the variation effect setting process 23 (see FIG. 533) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. do. FIG. 534 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuation suggestion effect setting process (Z4310).

When the continuation suggestion effect setting process (Z4310) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving guarantee count counter 223qg is 4 (Z4401), and the value of the time saving guarantee count counter 223qg is not 4 (3). When it is determined (Z4401: No), the data in the continuation scenario storage area 223qh is read (Z4411), and it is determined whether or not the read scenario is a scenario for continuous enrichment (Z4412). If it is determined in the Z4412 process that the read scenario is not a scenario for continuous enrichment (Z4412: No), the process proceeds to the Z4415 process. On the other hand, in the processing of Z4412, if it is determined that the read scenario is a scenario for continuous enrichment (Z4412: Yes), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this special symbol is the lottery result of the fall (Z4412: Yes). Z4413), if it is determined that it is not the result of the lottery for the fall (Z4413: No), the process proceeds to Z4415. On the other hand, in the processing of Z4413, if it is determined that it is the result of the lottery of the fall (Z4413: Yes), the production scenario is switched to "0CH" (Z4414), and the process proceeds to the processing of Z4415.

In the processing of Z4415, the effect mode of the number of fluctuations corresponding to the value of the time saving guaranteed number counter 223qg is read from the scenario read from the continuous scenario storage area 223qh (Z4415), and the read effect mode is used as the display mode of the current variation pattern. Set (Z4416). Next, if it is determined whether or not the final effect mode of the scenario is set (Z4417), and if it is determined that the final effect mode of the scenario is set (Z4417: Yes), the data of the continuous scenario storage area 223qh is determined. Is reset to "00H" (Z4418), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z4417, if it is determined that the final effect mode of the scenario is not set (Z4417: No), the process of Z4418 is skipped and the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z4401, when it is determined that the value of the time saving guaranteed number counter 223qg is 4 (Z4401: Yes), it means that it is the start timing of the probability change continuation suggestion effect (see FIG. 475). The process for determining the production scenario of the continuation suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a probabilistic state (Z4402). In the processing of Z4402, if it is determined that the current gaming state is a probable change state (Z4402: Yes), the data in the winning information storage area is read out (Z4403), and the winning information includes the lottery result of the fall. Whether or not it is determined (Z4404). If it is determined in the processing of Z4404 that the lottery result of the fall is not included in the winning information (Z4404: No), then whether the four winning information is stored (that is, the probability change continuation suggestion effect). It is determined whether or not the reserved ball until the end is already held (Z4405).

If it is determined in the processing of Z4405 that four winning information is stored (Z4405: Yes), the continuation suggestion effect scenario is referred to with reference to the continuation confirmation effect table in the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222qg (see FIG. 499). (Z4406), and the process proceeds to Z4409. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z4405 that the four winning information is not stored (Z4405: No), the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222qg (see FIG. 499) is referred to and the continuation suggestion is made. The production scenario is determined (Z4407), and the process proceeds to Z4409.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z4402, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not a probable change state (Z4402: No), and in the processing of Z4404, the lottery result of the fall is included in the winning information. (Z4404: Yes), the effect scenario is determined (Z4408) with reference to the discontinuity table in the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222qg (see FIG. 499), and the process is shifted to Z4409.

In the process of Z4409 executed after any of the processes of Z4406 to Z4408 is executed, the data indicating the selected staging scenario is stored in the continuation scenario storage area 223qh (Z4409), and the first variation in the determined scenario. (Z4410) is set as the effect mode of the current variation pattern, and the present process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 535, the contents of the rear mode lottery process (Z4312), which is one process in the variable effect setting process 23 (see FIG. 533) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. do. FIG. 535 is a flowchart showing the contents of the back mode lottery process (Z4312).

When the rear mode lottery process (Z4312) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern (Z4501). If it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern (Z4501: Yes), the jackpot fluctuation display mode is selected as the fluctuation display mode (Z4502), and the right-handed winning flag 223qi is set to ON. Then (Z4503), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z4501, when it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is not the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot (Z4501: No), then it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation state (Z4504). .. When it is determined that the current gaming state is not a probable change state (Z4504: No), the back mode is set by referring to the fallen table in the rear mode lottery table 222qb (see FIG. 496) and the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy. Is drawn by lottery (Z4505), and the process proceeds to Z4510.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z4504, if it is determined that the current gaming state is a probable change state (Z4504: Yes), the data in the winning information storage area is read out (Z4506), and then the lottery result of the fall in the winning information. Is included (Z4507). If it is determined in the processing of Z4507 that the lottery result of the fall is included in the winning information (Z4507: Yes), the table for non-fall in the rear mode lottery table 222qb (see FIG. 496) and the staging lottery counter 223qy. The back mode is drawn by lottery with reference to the value of (Z4508), and the process proceeds to Z4510.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z4507 that the lottery result of the fall is not included in the winning information (Z4507: No), the probability change continuation table in the rear mode lottery table 222qb (see FIG. 496) and the staging lottery. The back mode is drawn by lottery with reference to the value of the counter 223qy (Z4509), and the process proceeds to Z4510.

In the Z4510 process executed after any of the Z4505, Z4508, and Z4509 processes is executed, the lottery result of each process is a lottery result indicating a change to a rear mode different from the current rear mode. Whether or not it is determined (Z4510). In the processing of Z4510, if it is determined that the lottery result corresponds to the change of the rear mode (Z4510: Yes), a display rear change command indicating the changed rear mode is set (Z4511), and this processing is terminated. do. On the other hand, if it is determined that the back mode is not changed in the processing of Z4510 (Z4510: No), the processing of Z4511 is skipped and the main processing is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 536, the contents of the staging mode selection process (Z4313), which is one of the staging mode setting processes 23 (see FIG. 533) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. do. FIG. 536 is a flowchart showing the contents of the staging mode selection process (Z4313).

When the effect mode selection process (Z4313) is executed, it is first determined whether or not a variation pattern command including an additional time command (including an additional time command indicating an additional time of 7 seconds) has been received (Z4551). If it is determined that the variation pattern command including the additional time command has not been received (Z4551: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of Z4551 when it is determined that the variation pattern command including the additional time command is received (Z4551: Yes), the interrupt continuous hit lottery table 222qh (see FIG. 500) is read out (Z4552), and the effect lottery counter. It is determined whether or not the interrupt continuous hitting effect can be executed and the type according to the value of 223qy (Z4553), and then it is determined whether or not the lottery result corresponding to the execution of the interrupt continuous hitting effect is obtained (Z4554). If it is determined in the processing of Z4554 that the lottery result corresponds to the execution of the interrupt continuous hitting effect (Z4554: Yes), the data corresponding to the type of the interrupt continuous hitting effect to be executed is stored in the continuous hitting type storage area 223qj (Z4555). ), Next, it is determined whether or not the type of the interrupt continuous hitting effect is the type executed before the reach (Z4556). In the processing of Z4556, when it is determined that it is a type of interrupt continuous striking effect executed before reach (Z4556: Yes), the voice mode corresponding to the fluctuation time indicated by the basic time command is determined (Z4558), and Z4559 Move to processing.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z4556, when it is determined that the type of the determined interrupt continuous striking effect is not the type executed before the reach (Z4556: No), the fluctuation time indicated by the basic time command and the additional time command are displayed. The voice mode corresponding to the sum of the fluctuation time shown is determined (Z4557), and the process proceeds to Z4559.

In the processing of Z4559, the display mode corresponding to the fluctuation time indicated by the basic time command is determined (Z4559), and this processing is terminated. As described above, in the 23rd embodiment, it is possible to easily identify whether or not the variation type is 7 seconds longer depending on the presence or absence of the additional time saving command. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the variable type is the lottery target for whether or not the interrupt continuous hitting effect can be executed simply by checking the content of the additional time command. In addition, when it is decided to execute the interrupt continuous striking effect, the variation time can be just filled by setting the effect mode corresponding to the variation time (7 seconds shorter variation time) notified by the basic time command. can. Therefore, it is possible to easily match the end timing of the effect mode with the end timing of the variable display effect without preparing an effect mode dedicated to the interrupt continuous striking effect, so that a suitable effect mode can be provided.

On the other hand, in the process of Z4554, when it is determined that the interrupt continuous hitting effect is not executed (Z4554: No), the chance charge lottery table 222qf (see FIG. 498 (b)) is read out (Z4560), and the variation type of this time. It is determined whether or not the chance charge effect (see FIGS. 479 (b) and 480 (a)) can be executed according to the number of reserved balls and the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy (Z4561), and then the process of Z4561 is performed. It is determined whether or not the execution of the chance charge effect is determined by the determination (lottery) by (Z4562). If it is determined in the process of Z4562 that the execution of the chance charge effect has not been determined (Z4562: No), the effect mode corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (Z4566), and this process is terminated. ..

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z4562 that the execution of the chance charge effect is decided (Z4562: Yes), a value obtained by adding 1 to the number of reserved balls is set to the value of the charge number counter 223qm (Z4563), and the chance is reached. The charge standby flag 223qk is set to ON (Z4564), the effect mode including the chance charge effect is determined as the variation display mode this time (Z4565), and the present process is terminated. As described above, in the 23rd embodiment, when the execution of the chance charge effect is decided, the gauge amount of the spirit gauge KG accumulated by the chance charge effect (charge number counter 223qm) based on the number of reserved balls at the time of the determination. The value of) is determined. Then, after the chance charge effect is completed, the pace at which the chance-up effect is executed (that is, the spirit gauge is consumed) is changed in consideration of the lottery result of each reserved ball. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load (processing load when determining the number of gauges) at the start of the chance charge effect.

<Regarding the control process of the audio output device in the 23rd embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the 23rd embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 537 to 541. First, with reference to FIG. 537 (a), the main process executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. FIG. 537 (a) is a flowchart showing the contents of this main process.

When the main process of the voice output device 226 is executed, first, a command determination process for performing control according to various commands received from the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (2001). The details of this command determination process (Z20001) will be described later with reference to FIG. 538. After the processing of Z2001, the audio setting process for reproducing the audio data (audio file) according to the effect is executed (Z20002). The details of this voice setting process (Z20002) will be described later with reference to FIG. 541.

When the processing of Z20002 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 303 (Z20003). If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the Z20003 process (Z20003: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in progress flag are turned on (Z20005), and the power-off process is executed (Z20006). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (Z20007), and then the process is looped infinitely.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the processing of Z20003 (Z20003: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 303 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 303 (Z20004), and the RAM 303 is destroyed. If not (Z20004: No), the process returns to Z2001 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 303 is destroyed (Z20004: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. 537 (b). FIG. 537 (b) is a flowchart showing the contents of this command interrupt process. This command interrupt process (see FIG. 537 (b)) is a process executed every time a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the RAM 303 (Z20101), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read by the command determination processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 538, a command determination process (Z20001), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 537 (a)) executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226, will be described. FIG. 538 is a flowchart showing the contents of this command determination process (Z20001).

In the command determination process (Z20001), first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (Z20201), and if there is no unprocessed new command (Z20201: No), the command determination process is terminated. And return to the main process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (Z20201: Yes), the new command flag indicating that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (Z20202), and then the unprocessed new command is stored in the command buffer area. For all the processing commands, the type of the command is analyzed (Z2203).

Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a voice variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (Z20204). This voice variation pattern command is used when the display variation pattern command is output (see Z4205 in FIG. 532) in the variation display setting process 23 (see FIG. 532) of the voice lamp control device 113. It is set to notify the type of sound to be played and the output timing according to the display mode.

In the processing of Z20204, when it is determined that there is a variation pattern command for voice among the unprocessed commands (Z20204: Yes), the music and sound effect used during the execution of the notified variation pattern command are specified (Z20205). ), The specified music, the output channel of the sound effect, and the output timing are set (Z20206), and the process returns to Z20201.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no voice variation pattern command in the processing of Z20204 (Z20204: No), then it is determined whether or not the unprocessed command includes the voice continuous hit command (Z20204: No). Z20207), if the voice continuous striking command is included (Z20207: Yes), it means that the continuous striking operation has been performed by the player, so the continuous striking sound command processing for setting the reproduction (output) of the continuous striking sound. Is executed (Z20208), and the process returns to the processing of Z20201. The details of this continuous tapping sound command processing (Z20208) will be described later with reference to FIG. 539.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z20207, if it is determined that the unprocessed command does not include the continuous tapping sound command for voice (Z20207: No), then it is determined whether or not the interrupt command for voice is included. If it is determined that the unprocessed command includes a continuous tapping sound command for voice (Z20209: Yes), the interrupt command processing for setting the interruption and resumption of the BGM being played is performed. Execute (Z20210) and return to the processing of Z20201. The details of this suspend command process will be described later with reference to FIG. 540. On the other hand, in the processing of Z20201, if there is no voice interruption command among the unprocessed commands (Z20209: No), the processing corresponding to the other unprocessed commands is executed (Z20211), and the process returns to the processing of Z20201.

Next, the details of the continuous tapping sound command processing (Z20208) will be described with reference to FIG. 539. FIG. 539 is a flowchart showing the continuous tapping sound command processing (Z20208). This continuous tapping sound command process (Z20208) is executed in the command determination process (FIG. 538) in the MPU 301 of the voice output device 226, and is a process for setting the reproduction (output) of the continuous tapping sound as described above.

In this continuous tapping sound command processing (Z20208), first, it is determined whether or not "00H" is set in the value of the continuous tapping sound output flag 303a (Z20301). If it is determined in the processing of Z20301 that "00H" is set in the value of the continuous hitting sound output flag 303a (Z20301: Yes), the continuous hitting sound command for the first continuous hitting operation in the interrupt continuous hitting effect (see FIG. 482) is issued. Since it means that it has been received, it shifts to the processing of Z20305 in order to reproduce the first continuous tapping sound.

On the other hand, if it is determined that "00H" is not set in the value of the continuous tapping sound output flag 303a (Z20301: No), then whether or not "01H" is set in the value of the continuous tapping sound output flag 303a. (Z20302). In the process of Z20302, when it is determined that "01H" is not set in the value of the continuous tapping sound output flag 303a (that is, the value of the continuous tapping sound output flag 303a is "02H"), (Z20302: No), 1 Since it means that the continuous hitting sound output last time in the interrupt continuous hitting effect is the second continuous hitting sound, in this case as well, the process shifts to the Z20305 process in order to reproduce the first continuous hitting sound.

In the processing of Z20305, the reproduction of the voice file corresponding to the first continuous tapping sound is set for CN2 of the voice synthesis unit 306 (see FIG. 501) (Z20305), and the continuous tapping sound output flag 303a corresponds to the first continuous tapping sound. It is updated (set) to "01H" (Z20306), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z20302, when it is determined that "01H" is set in the value of the continuous hitting sound output flag 303a (that is, the repeated hitting sound output last time is the first continuous hitting sound) (Z20302: Yes). , The voice file reproduction corresponding to the second continuous tapping sound is set for CN3 of the voice synthesis unit 306 (see FIG. 501) (Z20303), and the continuous tapping sound output flag 303a is set to "02H" corresponding to the second continuous tapping sound. Update (set) to (Z20304), and this process ends.

By executing this continuous striking sound command processing, two types of audio data can be alternately reproduced for two channels each time the continuous striking operation is executed, so that the audio mode can be diversified. .. Further, in the case where the first continuous tapping sound and the second continuous tapping sound are reproduced alternately on a single channel (that is, the control of cutting off the output of one sound being played and outputting the other sound) is performed. Compared to the case of repeating configuration), it is possible to output the other sound while maintaining the state in which one sound is output (the first and second continuous tapping sounds are output in an overlapping manner). Therefore, it is possible to make the voice mode more lively during the execution of repeated hits. More specifically, in the case of a configuration in which the first continuous hitting sound and the second continuous hitting sound are alternately reproduced on a single channel, when a player who has a short continuous hitting interval performs a continuous hitting operation, the head portion of each voice data is performed. Only will be a monotonous voice mode that is repeated alternately. On the other hand, if a configuration is configured in which a plurality of audio data are sequentially reproduced on a plurality of channels, the output of one audio data reproduced on one channel is not interrupted, and other audio data on the other channel. Can be regenerated. That is, the voice based on one voice data and the voice based on other voice data can be combined and output. Therefore, since it can be configured so that the voice other than the head portion in each voice can be easily output, the voice mode can be further diversified. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the 23rd embodiment, each time a continuous striking operation is detected, two types of audio data (continuous striking sound) are alternately output to the two channels, but the present invention is not limited to this. A configuration may be configured in which three or more types of audio data are sequentially reproduced in CN1 and CN2. Thereby, the voice mode can be further diversified. Further, in this case, the number of channels for reproducing the audio data is not limited to two, and the audio data may be sequentially reproduced for three or more channels. With this configuration, from the time when one audio data is played for one channel until the next audio data is played for the same channel (the audio data being played is terminated). Since the period of can be made longer, the voice mode can be further diversified. Further, the type of the output voice data may be different depending on the interval of repeated hits. Specifically, for example, when a player playing a game with a relatively short interval of repeated hits (for example, an interval of 0.5 seconds or less), three types of voice modes are sequentially reproduced in three channels. On the other hand, when the player is playing a game with a relatively long interval of repeated hits (for example, an interval longer than 0.5 second interval), two types of audio data are sequentially transmitted to two channels. It may be configured to be reproduced (alternately). With such a configuration, it is possible to change the output mode of the sound according to the continuous striking interval, so that it is possible to realize the playability of adjusting the continuous striking interval. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the 23rd embodiment, any of the repeated hitting sounds is output in conjunction with the continuous hitting operation, but under predetermined conditions, the repeated hitting sound may be output even if the continuous hitting operation is not performed. .. More specifically, for example, when the last repeated hitting sound during the valid period of the continuous hitting operation is the first continuous hitting sound, the second continuous hitting sound may be output after the end. With this configuration, even though the first and second tapping sounds are output as a set according to the repeated tapping operation, the final output sound becomes the first continuous tapping sound. (That is, the paired second continuous tapping sound is not output), and it is possible to suppress that the voice mode is halfway. Therefore, the voice mode can be set more preferably. In this case, when the last output continuous hitting sound is the first continuous hitting sound, the control to output the second continuous hitting sound after the end is changed to the variable display corresponding to the predetermined variation type (lottery result) (lottery result). For example, it may be configured to be set only during execution of the jackpot fluctuation). With this configuration, for the player who wants to know whether or not it is a predetermined variation type, the continuous hitting sound that is output last during the interrupt continuous hitting effect is intentionally set to the first continuous hitting sound. It is possible to realize the playability. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the 23rd embodiment, the first continuous hitting sound and the second continuous hitting sound are output alternately regardless of the interval between the repeated hits of the player, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the continuous striking operation is detected in a state where the sound is not reproduced, the first continuous striking sound may be output without fail. That is, if the interval between repeated hits is too long and the interval between repeated hits is such that the next repeated hit operation is executed after the reproduction of one repeated hit sound is completed, only the first repeated hit sound is continuously output. It may be configured. With this configuration, the player who wants to diversify the voice mode can execute the continuous striking operation at a faster pace, and thus improve the player's willingness to participate in the interrupt continuous striking effect. be able to.

Next, the interruption command processing (Z20210) will be described with reference to FIG. 540. FIG. 540 is a flowchart showing this interruption command processing (Z20210). The interruption command process (Z20210) is executed in the command determination process (see Z20001 in FIG. 538) in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226, and is a process for setting the interruption and resumption of the BGM being played.

In the interruption command processing (Z20210), first, it is determined whether or not the received command is a command indicating the start of interruption (Z20401). If it is determined that the received command is a command indicating the start of interruption (Z20401: Yes), data indicating the reproduction position of the variable BGM being reproduced is stored in the reproduction position storage area 303b (Z20402), and the CN1 is used. Playback of the BGM for the interrupt continuous hitting effect is set (Z2403), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z20401 that the received command is not a command indicating the start of interruption (that is, a command indicating the end of interruption) (Z20401: No), the BGM for interrupt continuous striking effect The reproduction is ended (Z20404), the data in the reproduction position storage area 303b is read (Z20405), the reproduction of the variable BGM from the read reproduction position is restarted in CN1 (Z20406), and then this process is ended.

Next, the details of the voice setting process (Z20002) will be described with reference to FIG. 541. FIG. 541 is a flowchart showing the voice setting process (Z20002). This audio setting process (Z20002) is executed in the main process (FIG. 537) in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226.

In this audio setting process (Z20002), first, it is determined whether or not the current time is the output timing of the music (Z20501). If it is determined that the current timing is not the output timing of the music (Z20501: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z20501, if it is determined that the current time is the output timing of the music (Z20501: Yes), the audio file corresponding to the current music is read (Z2052), and the read audio file is played back on the corresponding channel. (Z20503), the music output flag 303c is set to ON (Z20504), and this process ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 23rd embodiment, when a jackpot is won, regardless of the jackpot type, after the jackpot ends, until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times, the time reduction of the normal symbol is shortened. The configuration is such that the state continues. That is, the probabilistic jackpot and the normal jackpot are configured to have the same operation (operation mode of the electric accessory 640a) until the lottery of 100 special symbols is executed after the jackpot ends. Then, only when the game state is in the probable change state at the time when the lottery of 100 special symbols is completed after the big hit is completed, the time saving state of the normal symbols is continued even after 100 times. That is, when the time saving state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit, and the probability change state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit, and the probability shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol within 100 times. In this case, the time saving state of the normal symbol is terminated at the timing when the 100th special symbol lottery is executed, and the normal symbol is changed to the normal state. With this configuration, a relatively disadvantageous time saving state is set after the big hit, or a low probability state is set within 100 times after the probability change state is set. However, until the lottery of 100 special symbols is executed, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the time saving state and the probabilistic state, so at least 100 special symbol lottery is executed. Until then, the player can continue to have a sense of expectation that the gaming state is in a probabilistic state.

Further, in the 23rd embodiment, when the normal symbol is in the time saving state at the time of winning the big hit, the game state is set to the normal state at the start of the variation display for indicating the big hit (the time saving state of the normal symbol). Is terminated). With this configuration, the case where the time saving state of the normal symbol is ended within 100 times after the end of the big hit can be limited to the case where the fluctuation pattern of the big hit is started. Therefore, 100 after the end of the big hit. Behavior that is likely to have ended the time saving state of the normal symbol during the execution of the variation display effect within the number of times (for example, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol exceeds 3 seconds, or the normal symbol is missed by lottery. In this case, or when the pattern of 0.2 seconds × 1 time is executed as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a), the player can be pleased. Therefore, after the big hit is completed, until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times, the game can be played by paying attention to the lottery result of the normal symbol, the operation mode of the electric accessory 640a, and the like.

Further, in the 23rd embodiment, the player can predict the possibility of the probabilistic state to some extent by the display mode of the third symbol display device 81. More specifically, in the cave search mode in which the expectation of the probabilistic state is relatively low, the temple search mode in which the expectation of the probabilistic state is relatively high, and the probabilistic state during the game state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set. There are three types of back modes of super temple search mode that confirm that there is a lottery result corresponding to the fall in the hold (at least the probable change state continues until the hold is exhausted). One of them is set at the time of executing the variable display effect based on the lottery result of the special symbol. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of predicting the current game state from the rear mode while the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, so that the player's interest in the game can be enjoyed. Can be improved. Also, by setting the super-temple search mode, it is confirmed that the game state is in the probable change state, so if the player shifts to the super-temple mode while predicting that it is in the probable change state, the player will be notified. On the other hand, it can make us happy that our predictions were correct. On the other hand, if the player shifts to the super-temple mode even though he has predicted that the special symbol is in a low-probability state, the player will be delighted that the game state has been set to be more advantageous than expected. You can make it. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Furthermore, by setting the super temple mode, it is confirmed that the lottery result corresponding to the fall is not included in the hold (at least the lottery for the number of hold balls can be executed with the jackpot probability of the probable change state). Therefore, it is possible to play the game with a stronger expectation that it will be a big hit in the hold.

Further, in the 23rd embodiment, regardless of the gaming state, over a specific range of variable display executed before the end of the 100 special symbol lottery in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is guaranteed ( That is, just before the end of the 100 special symbol lottery, the probability change continuation suggestion effect for notifying whether or not the probability change state is continued (over the 96th to 99th fluctuation display after the end of the big hit) is performed. It is configured to be executed. When starting this probability change continuation suggestion effect, the lottery results from the 96th to the 99th times, which is the execution range of the probability change continuation suggestion effect, are pre-read, and whether or not the probability change state continues until the 99th special symbol lottery. If the probabilistic state continues until the 99th special symbol lottery, the selection rate of the production scenario in which a high-expected attack pattern is likely to occur is high. On the other hand, if the player has fallen into a time-saving state before the 99th special symbol lottery is executed (or was in a time-saving state after the end of the previous jackpot), a low-expectation attack pattern occurs. The configuration is such that the selection rate of easy-to-use production scenarios is high. In this way, by setting the effect mode based on the game state at the end of the effect, it is possible to more accurately notify the game state after the end of the effect. Here, if the configuration is such that the probability change continuation suggestion effect is executed based only on the gaming state at the start of the effect, the probability change state falls to the low probability state during the execution of the probability change continuation suggestion effect, and the continuation of the probability change state is notified. Nevertheless, there is a risk that the time saving state will end with the start of the 100th special symbol lottery. In this case, there is a possibility that the player may feel distrust of the pachinko machine 10 or the hall due to the contradiction between the production content and the actual operation. In addition, as a countermeasure, a method of configuring the probabilistic continuation suggestion effect by an effect that is completed by one variation is conceivable, but with this method, it is difficult to secure a sufficient effect period, so there are various production modes. It becomes difficult to change. On the other hand, in the 23rd embodiment, the probability change continuation suggestion effect is executed over the last four fluctuation displays in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is guaranteed, and the notification content of the probability change continuation suggestion effect is provided. , It is configured to be determined based on the game state at the time when the lottery of the last special symbol in the execution range of the probabilistic continuation effect is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately notify the game state at the end of the production, and it is possible to diversify the production mode. If the ball is in a probable change state at the start of the effect and the reserved ball is not held until the end of the effect, the effect is configured so that an attack pattern with a relatively high expectation is likely to occur. ing. This is lower than the probability that the lottery result corresponding to the fall will be a big hit, and it is extremely rare to fall into the low probability state of the special symbol within the production period (the probability of the probability change state is relatively high). This is because the production ends as it is).

Further, in the 23rd embodiment, as a kind of hobby effect, the press stop effect in which the stop operation of each symbol row is executed is enabled according to the operation timing of the player's PUSH button 10317. This pressing stop effect is basically an effect that suggests that it may develop into a chance charge effect. In this pressing stop effect, if it does not develop into a chance charge effect, each symbol row is stopped and displayed in a mere combination of deviations according to the player's pressing timing, while if it develops into a chance charge effect, there is a chance. The charge symbol is (pseudo) stopped and displayed to notify the development of the chance charge effect. In this way, by making the stop timing of each symbol row variable according to the pressing timing of the player, the timing at which it is notified whether or not it develops into the chance charge effect can be set to the player's favorite timing. Can be adjusted. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Further, in the pressing stop effect that does not develop into the chance charge effect, at least the mode when the center symbol string is stopped is displayed is different depending on the timing when the stop operation is performed for all the symbol rows. More specifically, if the stop operation is completed a specified number of times (three times) within a predetermined period (1 second) (that is, at a relatively early stage) after the start of the valid period of the stop operation, it is relatively effective. While the stop display of the central symbol row is performed by the chance charge fanning effect for a long time, if the stop operation of the specified number of times is completed after the predetermined period (1 second) has elapsed, the central symbol row is immediately removed. An effect (that is, a relatively short effect) that is stopped and displayed with a symbol is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the period after the stop display from becoming too long or conversely shortened depending on the completion timing of the stop operation of the player, regardless of the completion timing of the stop operation. It is possible to show the transition of the production mode up to the stop display of the off-design in a natural form. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a staging mode with less discomfort. Further, in the pressing stop effect in the 23rd embodiment, a separate button image and validity period gauge are displayed for each symbol row on the display screen, but in reality, the PUSH button 10317 is displayed by a single operation validity period. It is determined whether or not the operation of is valid. Then, the symbol string for which the stop display is set is changed according to the number of times the stop operation (pressed on the PUSH button 10317) is executed in the operation valid period of 1. It is determined whether the stop operation is executed for all the symbol strings. ) It is configured. As a result, it is possible to simplify the determination of whether or not the stop operation of each symbol row is valid, so that the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

Further, in the 23rd embodiment, the chance charge effect can be executed as a kind of the entertainment effect. This chance charge effect is the number of times (minimum guaranteed number of times) that a specific effect mode (chance-up effect) is performed within a predetermined number of fluctuations (until all the reserved balls held at the start of the effect are exhausted). It is an effect of suggesting (notifying) to the player in advance. The guaranteed number of chance-up effects (the number of gauges of the accumulated spirit gauge) notified in this chance charge effect causes some chance-up effect at each timing until the reserved ball is consumed at the start of the chance charge effect. Is consumed for. Here, the chance-up effect is an effect that raises the expectation of a big hit. For example, a change in the display mode of the reserved ball number symbol, a so-called pseudo-ream, a cut-in effect, or a red character. The occurrence of the dialogue of. The spirit gauge is configured to be consumed until it reaches 0. That is, it is configured so that it is not consumed and is not discarded. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp the remaining number of chance-up effects, so that the player can be expected to play the game while looking forward to what kind of chance-up effect will occur next. .. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. In the 23rd embodiment, the gauge amount of the spirit gauge accumulated in the chance charge effect is mainly determined based on the number of reserved balls at the start of the chance charge effect. Then, after the chance charge effect is completed, the pace at which the chance-up effect is executed (that is, the spirit gauge is consumed) is changed in consideration of the lottery result of each reserved ball. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load (processing load when determining the number of gauges) at the start of the chance charge effect.

Further, in the 23rd embodiment, the interrupt continuous hitting effect can be executed as a kind of the entertainment effect. This interrupted continuous striking effect is an effect of a display mode as if an effect different from the display effect displayed up to that point was suddenly interrupted during the normal variable display or the reach variation, and the player can see the effect. On the other hand, it is composed of an effect of an effect mode that prompts the PUSH button 10317 to be operated in a specific operation mode (continuous striking operation mode). In this interrupted continuous hitting effect, the more the stage of the effecting mode develops (the number of displayed monsters is reduced) according to the player's repeated hitting operation, the higher the expectation of a big hit is. be. As a result, the player can be made to positively perform the continuous striking operation, so that the player's willingness to participate in the interrupt continuous striking effect can be improved. This interrupt continuous hitting effect is performed when it is determined that the additional time command is not a command indicating 0 seconds (a command indicating 7 seconds) among the basic time command and the additional time command constituting the variation pattern command. It is a production that may be performed. Here, the fluctuation time is set by the sum of the basic time notified by the basic time command and the additional time notified by the additional time command. Then, when it is decided to execute the interrupt continuous hit effect, the interrupt continuous hit effect is executed for a period of the same length as the additional time notified by the additional time command, and the normal variable display effect (execution of the interrupt continuous hit effect) is executed. For the effect mode of the period other than the period), the effect mode of the period having the same length as the basic time notified by the basic time command is set. With this configuration, even if the variable display effect for which the interrupt continuous hit effect is set is executed, the effect mode corresponding to the basic time command can be reused, so that the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10 is reduced. can do.

Further, in the interrupt continuous striking effect in the 23rd embodiment, each time the continuous striking operation is executed, a plurality of types of voice data (voice data corresponding to the first continuous striking sound and voice data corresponding to the second continuous striking sound are used. ) Is configured to reproduce the audio data of 1. More specifically, when the even-numbered repeated hitting operation is detected during the valid period of the repeated hitting operation in the interrupt continuous hitting effect of 1, the voice data corresponding to the first repeated hitting sound is reproduced for CN2 in the voice synthesis unit 306. On the other hand, when the even-numbered repeated hitting operation is detected, the voice data corresponding to the second continuous hitting sound is reproduced for CN3 in the voice synthesis unit 306. In this way, each time the continuous striking operation is executed, one of a plurality of different audio data is output to one of a plurality of different channels (the first continuous striking sound and the second continuous striking sound are converted into CN1 and CN2). By making the configuration (output alternately), it is possible to diversify the voice mode during the continuous striking operation. In other words, since it is possible to suppress the voice mode from becoming monotonous, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game during the continuous striking valid period. Further, in the case where the first continuous tapping sound and the second continuous tapping sound are reproduced alternately on a single channel (that is, the control of cutting off the output of one sound being played and outputting the other sound) is performed. Compared to the case of repeating configuration), it is possible to output the other sound while maintaining the state in which one sound is output (the first and second continuous tapping sounds are output in an overlapping manner). Therefore, it is possible to make the voice mode more lively during the execution of repeated hits. More specifically, in the case of a configuration in which the first continuous hitting sound and the second continuous hitting sound are alternately reproduced on a single channel, when a player who has a short continuous hitting interval performs a continuous hitting operation, the head portion of each voice data is performed. Only will be a monotonous voice mode that is repeated alternately. On the other hand, if a configuration is configured in which a plurality of audio data are sequentially reproduced on a plurality of channels, the output of one audio data reproduced on one channel is not interrupted, and other audio data on the other channel. Can be regenerated. That is, the voice based on one voice data and the voice based on other voice data can be combined and output. Therefore, since it can be configured so that the voice other than the head portion in each voice can be easily output, the voice mode can be further diversified. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, in the interrupt continuous striking effect in the 23rd embodiment, the number of monsters subtracted increases as the pressing timing is delayed (the remaining time of the valid period decreases) in the valid period during which the continuous striking operation is effective (more). It is configured so that the production mode at the stage of high expectation can be easily set). As a result, even if the player presses the PUSH button 10317 at a fast pace, it is possible to prevent the player from being subdued early to the lower limit of the number of monsters. That is, it is possible to suppress that the subtraction of the number of monsters based on pressing is stopped at the remaining 10 bodies and the remaining 4 bodies, which are easily set in the case of a loss, and the player's expectation for a big hit is impaired. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. In addition, even when a player whose pressing pace is slow is playing a game, if the pressing is performed in the latter half of the continuous hitting valid period, a relatively large number of subjugation numbers can be easily selected, so that the number of monsters reaches the lower limit. The possibility can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the interrupting continuous hitting effect even for the player whose pressing pace is slow, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the 23rd embodiment, as a kind of hobby effect, a plurality of reserved ball number symbols are changed to a specific mode (display mode having a rock-like appearance) different from the normal reserved symbol mode. It is configured so that the hold batch change effect can be executed. In this hold batch change effect, after the plurality of hold ball number symbols are changed to a specific mode, the player performs a specific operation (pressing operation for the PUSH button 10317), so that at least one hold ball number symbol is performed. However, the effect of being changed to a mode having a higher degree of expectation than the reserved symbol mode before being changed to a specific mode is executed. By executing this hold batch change effect, it is confirmed that the degree of expectation indicated by at least one hold ball number symbol is increased, so that the player's expectation for a big hit can be improved. In addition, since it is not known until the PUSH button 10317 is pressed which hold ball number symbol changes (expectation increases), the operation for the PUSH button 10317 is looking forward to which hold ball number symbol changes. Can be done. Further, since the expectation degree is notified by pressing the PUSH button 10317, the notification timing can be adjusted to the player's favorite timing. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved.

In the 23rd embodiment, the voice mode is changed by alternately playing back two types of voice data for the two channels each time the pressing of the PUSH button 10317 is detected during the execution of the interrupt continuous hitting effect. Although the configuration is diversified, the configuration is not limited to this, and a configuration may be used in which three or more types of audio data are sequentially reproduced in CN1 and CN2. Thereby, the voice mode can be further diversified. Further, in this case, the number of channels for reproducing the audio data is not limited to two, and the audio data may be sequentially reproduced for three or more channels. With this configuration, from the time when one audio data is played for one channel until the next audio data is played for the same channel (the audio data being played is terminated). Since the period of can be made longer, the voice mode can be further diversified. Further, the type of the output voice data may be different depending on the interval of repeated hits. Specifically, for example, when a player playing a game with a relatively short interval of repeated hits (for example, an interval of 0.5 seconds or less), three types of voice modes are sequentially reproduced in three channels. On the other hand, when the player is playing a game with a relatively long interval of repeated hits (for example, an interval longer than 0.5 second interval), two types of audio data are sequentially transmitted to two channels. It may be configured to be reproduced (alternately). With such a configuration, it is possible to change the output mode of the sound according to the continuous striking interval, so that it is possible to realize the playability of adjusting the continuous striking interval. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the 23rd embodiment, one of the continuous hitting sounds is output in conjunction with the continuous hitting operation during the execution of the interrupt continuous hitting effect, but under a predetermined condition, the continuous hitting sound is output even if the continuous hitting operation is not performed. It may be configured so that it can be output. More specifically, for example, when the last repeated hitting sound during the valid period of the continuous hitting operation is the first continuous hitting sound, the second continuous hitting sound may be output after the end. With this configuration, even though the first and second tapping sounds are output as a set according to the repeated tapping operation, the final output sound becomes the first continuous tapping sound. (That is, the paired second continuous tapping sound is not output), and it is possible to suppress that the voice mode is halfway. Therefore, the voice mode can be set more preferably. In this case, when the last output continuous hitting sound is the first continuous hitting sound, the control to output the second continuous hitting sound after the end is changed to the variable display corresponding to the predetermined variation type (lottery result) (lottery result). For example, it may be configured to be set only during execution of the jackpot fluctuation). With this configuration, for the player who wants to know whether or not it is a predetermined variation type, the continuous hitting sound that is output last during the interrupt continuous hitting effect is intentionally set to the first continuous hitting sound. It is possible to realize the playability. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the 23rd embodiment, the first continuous hitting sound and the second continuous hitting sound are alternately output regardless of the interval between the repeated hits of the player during the execution of the interrupt continuous hitting effect, but the configuration is limited to this. is not. For example, when the continuous striking operation is detected in a state where the sound is not reproduced, the first continuous striking sound may be output without fail. That is, if the interval between repeated hits is too long and the interval between repeated hits is such that the next repeated hit operation is executed after the reproduction of one repeated hit sound is completed, only the first repeated hit sound is continuously output. It may be configured. With this configuration, the player who wants to diversify the voice mode can execute the continuous striking operation at a faster pace, and thus improve the player's willingness to participate in the interrupt continuous striking effect. be able to.

In the 23rd embodiment, the voice data (voice file) corresponding to the first continuous hitting sound and the voice data (voice file) corresponding to the second continuous hitting sound are alternately switched to different channels each time the continuous hitting operation is detected. However, under predetermined conditions, the audio data may be reproduced differently (or the audio data may be subjected to predetermined processing). More specifically, for example, the reproduction speed may be changed (or the voice data is processed) so that the output period of each repeated hitting sound is changed according to the interval of the repeated hitting operation of the player. .. That is, when the interval between the repeated hitting operations of the player is longer than the predetermined interval (for example, 1 second interval), the output period may be longer (for example, 1.5 seconds or more). With this configuration, even when a player with a long continuous striking interval is playing a game, it is relatively easy to superimpose the other continuous striking sound on the output of one continuous striking sound. The voice mode can be diversified. In the 23rd embodiment, the first continuous tapping sound and the second continuous tapping sound are alternately output (reproduced) to different channels based on the execution of the continuous striking operation. Is not limited to the case based on the continuous striking operation. The same control may be executed when the start winning sound based on the starting winning is output, or when the winning sound based on the detection of the winning to the specific winning opening 65a is output. With such a configuration, the sound can be output more preferably, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. Further, this control can also be adopted simply when outputting a sound effect for which an output period is set in advance as a part of the variable display effect. With this configuration, when sound effects and the like are continuously output in a relatively short time, the sound can be output more preferably, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. can.

In the 23rd embodiment, if the execution timing of the interrupt continuous hitting effect is before the reach, both the display mode and the voice mode are interrupted to execute the interrupt continuous hitting effect, while the execution timing of the interrupt continuous hitting effect is during the reach effect. If this is the case, the configuration is such that only the display mode is interrupted and the interrupt continuous hitting effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the interrupt continuous striking effect executed before the reach, only the display mode is interrupted, while in the interrupt continuous striking effect executed after the reach occurs, both the display mode and the voice mode are interrupted. good. Since the sound output before the reach is relatively plain, it is difficult to interfere with the sound of the interrupt continuous striking effect without interrupting the output. On the other hand, since a flashy voice is likely to be output after the reach, it is possible to prevent the voice of the interrupt continuous striking effect from becoming difficult to hear by interrupting the voice mode. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably set the voice mode of the interrupt continuous striking effect. Further, for example, both the display mode and the voice mode may be interrupted regardless of the execution timing of the interrupt continuous hitting effect, or conversely, only the display mode may be interrupted regardless of the execution timing. .. Further, the control is not limited to the control of switching the target to be interrupted (at least one of the voice mode and the display mode) according to the execution timing of the interrupt continuous striking effect, and may be controlled to switch according to other conditions. .. More specifically, for example, at the start of the interrupt continuous striking effect, it may be configured to determine whether to interrupt both the voice and the display by lottery or to interrupt only one of them. In this case, the probability of being determined to interrupt both may be different depending on whether it is a big hit or a miss. With this configuration, it is possible to play the game by paying attention to whether both the voice and the display are interrupted or only one of them is interrupted. Therefore, the player's game at the start of the interrupt continuous striking effect. It is possible to improve the interest in. Further, in the 23rd embodiment, as the interrupt continuous striking effect, only the effect having an effect time of 7 seconds is provided, but a plurality of interrupt continuous striking effects having different effect times may be provided. In this case, by providing a command indicating an additional time different from 0 seconds and 7 seconds as the additional time command, the interrupt continuous striking effect of the effect time according to the additional time notified by the additional time command is executed. It may be configured as. As a result, the staging mode can be further diversified, and the player's interest in the game can be improved. Also, instead of or in addition to increasing the variation of the additional time that can be notified by the additional time command, the total notified by the variation pattern command (that is, the basic time notified by the basic time command and the additional time command). (Sum of the additional time notified by May be. More specifically, for example, when the fluctuation pattern of the deviation super reach B of 67 seconds is notified, the production time of the interrupt continuous striking effect is 37 seconds so that 30 seconds, which is the basic time of the deviation normal reach, remains. It may be configured to set. With this configuration, by simply setting the effect mode for 30 seconds, which is the basic time, the variable display effect can be terminated exactly at the end of the variable time, in addition to the effect time of the interrupted continuous hit effect. Therefore, it is possible to suitably set the effect mode of the variable display effect in which the interrupt continuous stroke effect is set, without providing the dedicated variable display mode of the interrupt continuous stroke effect. When this control (control that determines the effect time of the interrupt continuous stroke effect so that the fluctuation time for the basic time is left over) is adopted, the interrupt continuous stroke effect can be executed even if the additional time is 0 seconds. can. That is, it can be applied to the pachinko machine 10 having specifications such that the additional time command does not exist in the first place. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the chances of executing the interrupt continuous hitting effect, it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the game.

In the 23rd embodiment, when the number of lottery of the special symbol exceeds 100 times and the probability change state continues after the big hit, the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained, and the special symbol is low. It was configured to fall to the stochastic state and end the time saving state of the normal symbol, but it is not limited to this. Even after the number of lottery of the special symbol exceeds 100 times, the condition for ending the time saving state of the normal symbol may be different from the condition for falling to the low probability state of the special symbol. Specifically, for example, the lottery for whether or not to fall from the time-saving state of the normal symbol to the normal state of the normal symbol may be configured to be executed at the start of the fluctuation separately from the fall lottery from the probable change state. good. Further, for example, when a specific lottery result is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol, only the time saving state may be terminated. By configuring in this way, even if the time saving state of the normal symbol is terminated, it can be configured so that the probabilistic state of the special symbol may continue. Therefore, immediately after the time saving state of the normal symbol is terminated. It is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game and to continue the game in the expectation that the probabilistic state of the special symbol will continue. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the 23rd embodiment, the number of reserved balls based on the start winning prize detected after the start of the hold batch change effect is uniformly set to the white hold hold symbol mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. For example, with respect to the new reserved ball number symbol, the lottery of the reserved symbol mode using the reserved change lottery table 222qc (see FIG. 497 (a)) may be executed. As a result, not only the reserved ball number symbol that is the target of the pending batch change effect, but also the reserved ball number symbol based on the new start winning can be expected to be a big hit. Further, for example, a new start prize detected after the start of the hold batch change effect may be added to the target of the hold batch change effect. In this case, the hold ball number symbol based on the new start winning may be added to the target of the hold batch change effect without fail, or may be added to the target of the hold batch change effect only under predetermined conditions. May be good. In addition, as a predetermined condition, for example, when the winning information corresponding to the new starting winning shows the jackpot expectation level higher than the super reach, it may be included in the execution target of the hold batch change effect. For example, as a configuration to be included in the execution target of the hold batch change effect only when the winning information corresponding to the variation type having a higher expectation than the hold ball in the range in which the hold batch change effect is set is newly notified. May be good. With this configuration, when the reserved ball number symbol based on the new start winning is added to the execution target of the reserved batch change effect, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be further improved.

<24th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the 24th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 542 to 557. In the 23rd embodiment described above, the chance charge effect is made feasible as a kind of entertaining effect. That is, during the production, the number of times (minimum guaranteed number of times) that a specific production mode (chance-up production) is performed within a predetermined number of fluctuations (until all the reserved balls held at the start of the production are exhausted) is performed. The effect of suggesting (notifying) to the player in advance by the number of gauges of the accumulated spirit gauge KG was configured to be feasible. By making the player know in advance the remaining number of chance-up effects by this chance charge effect, it is possible to realize the playability of predicting what kind of chance-up effect will occur next, and the player. I was trying to improve the interest in the game.

In addition to this, in the 24th embodiment, the number of gauges of the spirit gauge (the remaining number of times of the chance-up effect) acquired in the chance charge effect is changed according to the operation content of the player with respect to the PUSH button 10317. .. More specifically, in the chance charge effect, an effect mode for urging the player to operate (press) the PUSH button 10317 is displayed, and the player operates (presses) the PUSH button 10317 according to the length of the period. , The structure is such that the effect of increasing the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG is executed. The maximum number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG is determined at the start of the chance charge effect. The maximum number of gauges is determined based on the number of reserved balls at the time when the effect is started, as in the 23rd embodiment. By making the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG variable according to the operation (pressing) content of the player, it is possible to give the impression that the player decides the number of chance-up effects by himself / herself. can. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the chance charge effect.

Further, in the 23rd embodiment described above, after the jackpot is completed, the state of 100 times or more is displayed over 96 to 99 times of variation display (the last 4 times of variation display in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is guaranteed). The configuration was such that a probability change continuation suggestion effect was executed to indicate whether the state was a probability change state or a transition to a normal state. This probability change continuation suggestion effect is the result of the effect (whether the continuation of the chance zone is notified or the end of the chance zone is notified) according to the game state at the time when the lottery of the last (99th) special symbol in the execution range of the effect is completed. Was notified) was configured to be variable.

In addition to this, in the 24th embodiment, the BGM is set in the variable display effect unit during the execution of the probability change continuation suggestion effect. That is, as the BGM for the probability change continuation suggestion effect, instead of setting the BGM over the fluctuation display period of 96 to 99 times of the fluctuation display, as a configuration in which the fluctuation display BGM according to the fluctuation time for each fluctuation display is set. There is. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the end timing of the variation display and the end timing of the variation display BGM from being deviated even when the variation is stopped in the execution range of the probability variation continuation suggestion effect. can do. More specifically, the probability change continuation suggestion effect is executed over the variation display period of the 96th to 99th variation display (that is, at a fixed timing) after the end of the jackpot, regardless of the situation of the reserved ball. It is an effect, and it is irrelevant whether or not the reserved balls for the minutes until the end of the effect (that is, the 99th variation display) are held at the start time of the effect (that is, the start time of the 96th variation display after the end of the jackpot). It is a production that is executed in. Therefore, there is a possibility that the reserved balls will disappear during the production, and the period from the start to the end of the production will be indefinite. Under such circumstances, if the BGM with a fixed playback period is played back with the start of the probabilistic continuation suggestion staging as an opportunity, the BGM playback end timing and the staging end timing do not match, and the player It may make you feel uncomfortable. On the other hand, by setting the BGM in the variable display unit, the end timing of the effect and the end timing of the BGM can be surely matched, so that the audio mode and the display mode can be preferably executed. can.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the 24th embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the 23rd embodiment is that the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the voice lamp control device. The configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the 113 are partially changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed. The 23rd regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the 23rd embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 542, a display mode when a long press effect (an effect of urging the player to operate a predetermined operation mode for the PUSH button 10317) is executed in the chance charge effect will be described. FIG. 542 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the time when the long press effect is started. As shown in FIG. 542 (a), in the 24th embodiment, when the chance charge effect is executed, the PUSH button 10317 is continuously pressed on the substantially central portion of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. An image (long press image NG) in a mode prompting to continue (long press) is displayed. More specifically, a long-press image NG composed of an image imitating the PUSH button 10317, an image of an arrow pointing in the direction pointing to the PUSH button 10317 from above, and the characters "long-press !!" is displayed. Will be done. In addition, the characters "Hold down to save energy !!" are displayed on the display area 805. From these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG increases by continuously pressing (holding down) the PUSH button 10317.

Further, as shown in FIG. 542 (a), the characters "remaining 10.00 seconds" are displayed on the right side of the front view in the display area 803. The display of the remaining number of seconds is counted down according to the elapsed time, and when the remaining number of seconds reaches 0.00, the long press effect is ended, and the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG at that time. However, it is determined as the number of occurrences of the subsequent chance-up effect. As a result, the player can easily understand the end timing of the long press effect, so that it is possible to realize an effect that is easier for the player to understand. Since the other display contents are the same as the display contents of the chance charge effect in the 23rd embodiment (see FIG. 479 (b)), detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

FIG. 542 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode while the player is performing a long press in the long press effect. As shown in FIG. 542 (b), when the player continuously presses (holds) the PUSH button 10317, the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG increases. In the example of FIG. 542 (b), a state in which the number of gauges of the air gauge KG is increased to 2 gauges by long pressing is illustrated. In this way, by configuring the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG to increase according to the length of the period during which the PUSH button 10317 is pressed, the player wants to press the PUSH button 10317 for a longer time. I can remind you. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the long-pressing effect. In the 24th embodiment, the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG increases by 1 gauge each time the total pressing period for the PUSH button 10317 elapses for 1 second in the long pressing effect of 1. In addition, even if the long press is interrupted, the period of the long press is memorized, and when the long press is resumed, the count of the long press period is also restarted from the time when the long press is interrupted. is doing. This makes it possible to further improve the convenience of the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 543, the correspondence between the voice mode and the display mode during the execution of the long press effect in the 24th embodiment will be described. FIG. 543 (a) is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship when the PUSH button 10317 is continuously pressed in the long press effect. As shown in FIG. 543 (a), when the player continues to press and hold the PUSH button 10317 during the long press effect, the voice mode corresponding to the gauge number as the gauge number increases (synchronously). Is configured to be output. Specifically, while the number of gauges is 0 (while the long press period is less than 1 second), the voice "ta" is output three times in 1 second (0 gauge voice). .. Further, as shown in FIG. 543 (a), while the gauge number is 1 (the long press period is 1 second or more and less than 2 seconds), the voice "da" is output three times in 1 second. Voice mode (voice for 1 gauge). This 1-gauge voice is a flashier (larger) voice mode than the 0-gauge voice.

Further, as shown in FIG. 543 (a), while the gauge number is 2 (the long press period is 2 seconds or more and less than 3 seconds), the voice "do" is output three times in 1 second. Voice mode (voice for 2 gauge). This 2-gauge voice is a flashier (larger) voice mode than the 0-gauge voice and the 1-gauge voice. Similarly, for the subsequent (3 gauge to 5 gauge), as the number of gauges increases, a flashy (loud) voice is output as the voice output during the long press. As a result, not only the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG but also the number of gauges (number of chance-up effects) can be easily grasped by the player from the voice mode, so that the convenience of the player can be improved. Can be done.

FIG. 543 (b) shows the correspondence between the voice mode and the display mode when the long press is interrupted during the long press effect (while the gauge number is 1 gauge) and then the long press is restarted. It is a figure which showed. As shown in FIG. 543 (b), if the long press is interrupted during the long press effect, the output of the audio (1 gauge audio) is interrupted, while the display mode remains the display mode immediately before the interruption. Be maintained. That is, the output of the voice is stopped when the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG is 1. With these voice modes and display modes, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the increase in the number of gauges is interrupted by interrupting the long press. Further, as shown in FIG. 543 (b), when the long press is restarted, the voice is output from the continuation of the voice mode that was output at the time of interruption. With this configuration, the timing at which the number of gauges increases and the timing at which the voice mode is switched can be matched (synchronized) regardless of the presence or absence of interruption, so that the production mode of the long press effect is more preferable. Can be set to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 544, the transition of the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG at the time of the long press effect for each game method of the player will be described. FIG. 544 (a) shows a gauge in the case where the upper limit of the number of gauges is a long press effect of 4 gauges, and the long press on the PUSH button 10317 is continuously executed from the time when one second elapses to the end of the long press effect. It is a figure which showed the transition of the number.

As shown in FIG. 544, if the long press is continuously performed during the long press effect, the number of gauges increases by 1 every 1 second and reaches the upper limit of 4 gauges after 5 seconds. do. After that, the number of gauges is maintained at 4 until the end of the effect period (until 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of the long press effect).

FIG. 544 (b) is a diagram showing the transition of the number of gauges when the long press is interrupted in the middle of the long press and then the long press is restarted in the long press effect. In the example of FIG. 544 (b), when the long press is interrupted between 2.5 seconds and 3.5 seconds and from 5 seconds to 9.3 seconds after the start of the long press effect. It shows the transition of the number of gauges in. As shown in FIG. 544 (b), when the long press is continuously executed from the time when 1 second elapses to the time when 2.5 seconds elapses after the start of the long press effect, the number of gauges increases at the time when 2 seconds elapse. As it increases to 1 gauge, the voice for 1 gauge is output, and the state of 1 gauge is maintained until the lapse of 2.5 seconds. Then, when the player interrupts the long press at the time when 2.5 seconds have elapsed (that is, when 0.5 seconds have elapsed after shifting to the state of 1 gauge), the gauge number (display mode of the spirit gauge KG). ) Is maintained at 1 gauge, and the audio output is interrupted. That is, in conjunction with the interruption of the long press (pressing the PUSH button 10317), the audio output is also interrupted. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the increase in the number of gauges is interrupted by interrupting the long press without changing the display mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 544 (b), when the player resumes the long press, the output of the 1-gauge voice is resumed. At this time, the playback position of the resumed sound is set to the playback position where the previous playback was interrupted. That is, when the long press is interrupted, the playback position is stored (backed up), and when the long press is restarted, the long press sound is restarted from the backed up playback position. With this configuration, even if the long press is interrupted, the voice mode can be changed (developed) in synchronization with the change in the display mode (the number of gauges of the air gauge KG). The display mode can be preferably set. Therefore, the staging mode can be preferably set.

As shown in FIG. 544 (b), when the total long press period after the number of gauges has increased to 1 gauge reaches 1 second (that is, when 4 seconds have elapsed after the start of the long press effect). As the number of gauges increases to 2 gauges, the voice mode switches from 1-gauge voices to 2-gauge voices. That is, the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG is increased to 2 gauges, and the voice mode is switched to the voice for 2 gauges.

As shown in FIG. 544 (b), in a state where the number of gauges is 2 gauges, the sound for 2 gauges continues to be output (reproduced) while the player continues to press and hold. Then, when the player interrupts the long press 4.9 seconds after the start of the long press effect (0.9 seconds after the state of the 2 gauge is reached), the output of the 2-gauge voice is interrupted. On the other hand, the spirit gauge KG is maintained in the state of 2 gauge. This state (a state in which only the output (reproduction) of the voice mode is interrupted) is 9.3 seconds after the start of the long press effect until the player resumes the long press (in the example of FIG. 544 (b)). (Until time) will continue. Then, by restarting the long press, the output of the voice mode is restarted again. Although details will be described later, in the 24th embodiment, when the long press is restarted, the length of the remaining period (long press valid period) in which the long press can be executed and the upper limit in the long press effect this time are set. It is configured to discriminate from the number of gauges and change the increasing speed of the number of gauges (reproduction speed of voice mode and update speed of display mode). More specifically, each time the long press is restarted, the playback speed (update speed) that can be increased up to the maximum number of gauges by the end of the long press valid period is set up to the double speed. It has a structure. With this configuration, the chance charge effect can be ended when the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG is larger, so that the number of chance up effects that occur after the end of the chance charge effect can be increased. .. Therefore, the staging effect can be further improved.

In the example of FIG. 544 (b), at the time when the long press is restarted (at the time when 9.3 seconds have elapsed), the remaining long press valid period is 0.7 seconds, while the maximum number of gauges (4 gauges) is reached. It is a figure which showed the state which the remaining gauge number of 2 gauge remains. Until the long press is interrupted, the long press is executed for 0.9 seconds in the state of 2 gauge, so it is normally the remaining long press period to raise to 3 gauge 0 . If you do not continue to press for 1.1 seconds, which is the sum of 1 second and 1 second, which is the remaining long press period for raising from 3 gauge to 4 gauge, it will rise to the upper limit of 4 gauge. It becomes impossible to make it. That is, if the reproduction speed is not changed, it is impossible to increase the 2 gauge in the remaining 0.7 seconds. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 544 (b), by setting the playback speed to double speed after restarting the long press, the number of gauges can be increased to the upper limit of 4 gauges within 0.7 seconds. Is possible. That is, after restarting, it increases to 3 gauge when 0.05 seconds have passed (9.35 seconds after the start of the long press effect), and after increasing to 3 gauge, 0.5 seconds have passed (start of the long press effect). It is controlled to increase to 4 gauge after 9.85 seconds (usually, the playback speed that takes 1 second to increase 1 gauge is set, but it is 0 to increase 1 gauge. By setting the playback speed (playback speed to double speed) that requires .5 seconds), it is possible to increase the number of gauges up to the upper limit of 4 gauges within the range of the long press valid period. As a result, the chance charge effect can be ended when the number of gauges is larger, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Here, even if the reproduction speed is doubled, if it is impossible to increase the number of gauges to the upper limit, the reproduction speed is set to the normal reproduction speed. As a result, the reproduction speed becomes excessively high, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or uncomfortable.

In the 24th embodiment, if it is impossible to increase the number of gauges to the upper limit even if the speed is set to double, the playback is performed at the normal playback speed, but the speed is limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, even if it is impossible to increase the number of gauges to the upper limit, the speed may be set to double. With this configuration, even if the number of gauges is less than the upper limit, the chance charge effect can be terminated with a larger number of gauges, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 545 and 546, the correspondence between the voice mode and the display mode during the execution of the continuation suggestion effect of the 24th embodiment will be described. First, referring to FIG. 545 (a), all the lottery results of the special symbols within the execution period of the continuation suggestion effect are out of order, and the fluctuation display for four times is continuously (that is, the hold is cut off in the middle). It is a figure which showed the correspondence relation when it was executed (without). As shown in FIG. 545 (a), when the variation display is continuously executed during the continuation suggestion effect, the display mode of the probability variation continuation suggestion effect is synchronized with the variation display period in the variation display of the special symbol. (See FIG. 476) is displayed. Similarly, for the voice mode, the variable BGM is reproduced in synchronization with each variable display period of the four variable displays. In the 24th embodiment, the variable display period is a fixed period of 4.5 seconds when the lottery of the 96th to 99th special symbols, which is the execution period of the probability change continuation suggestion effect, is missed. It is configured to be. Therefore, as the display mode and the voice mode corresponding to each variation display during the execution of the continuous suggestion effect, it is sufficient to prepare only the mode for 4.5 seconds. Therefore, since the variation of the display mode and the voice mode can be minimized, the storage capacity of the display control device 114 and the voice output device 226 can be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 545 (a), during the fluctuation stop state during the execution period of the probability change continuation suggestion effect, the stop display of the third symbol is displayed as the display mode, and the fluctuation stop sound is output as the voice mode. (Reproduced). Since the fixed display period after the end of the fluctuation is uniformly set to 0.5 seconds, it is possible to minimize the variation of the display mode and the fluctuation stop sound at the time of stop display. Therefore, the storage capacity of the display control device 114 and the audio output device 226 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 545 (b), the correspondence between the display mode and the voice mode when the hold becomes 0 during the execution of the probability change continuation suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 545 (b) illustrates a case where the hold ball becomes 0 when the 96th special symbol lottery is executed, and the hold 0 state continues even after the end of the fluctuation. As shown in FIG. 545 (b), when the 96th fluctuation display is completed and the fluctuation is stopped (the holding ball is 0 and the special symbol lottery cannot be executed), the demonstration is performed as a display mode. Switch to the display mode. As this demo display mode, for example, a display mode of the continuation suggestion effect immediately before (96th time) and a display mode in which the stop symbol is continuously displayed are set. Further, as a voice mode, there is no sound after the 96th stop sound is output. Since the player can easily understand that the reserved ball is 0 by these display modes and voice modes, the game ball can be positively launched aiming at a new starting prize. .. As shown in FIG. 545 (b), when a start prize is generated during the demo display, the special symbol variation display is executed and the continuation suggestion effect is started continuously.

In this way, by configuring the voice mode to be output in the variable display unit, even if the reserved ball becomes 0 during the execution of the probability change continuation suggestion effect, the voice mode and the display mode are subsequently deviated from each other. It is possible to prevent it from being stored. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably set the effect of the probabilistic continuation suggestion effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 546, the correspondence between the display mode and the voice mode when a big hit is won during the execution of the probability change continuation suggestion effect will be described. Here, in the 23rd embodiment described above, regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol, one effect corresponding to the preset effect scenario is executed for each change display of 1 executed in the probability change continuation suggestion effect. It was configured to be. For this reason, if a big hit is made at an early stage (96th or 97th special symbol lottery) in the probabilistic continuation suggestion effect, the big hit will be notified shortly after the probabilistic continuation suggestion effect is fully enjoyed. There was a problem that it was difficult to improve the interest of the person.

On the other hand, in the 24th embodiment, when a big hit occurs during the execution of the probability change continuation suggestion effect, pseudo variation display is executed for the number of remaining probability change continuation suggestion effects during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation. It was configured so that the jackpot would be notified as a result of the probabilistic continuation suggestion effect. That is, when the door 806 is destroyed (breakthrough) in the probability change continuation suggestion effect, the jackpot can be notified. With this configuration, even if a big hit occurs in the middle of the probability change continuation suggestion effect, the effect for the number of times of the probability change continuation suggestion effect can be executed, so that the probability change continuation suggestion effect can be further enjoyed. ..

FIG. 546 is a diagram showing the correspondence between the display mode and the voice mode when the jackpot is achieved in the 97th special symbol lottery after the jackpot is completed. As shown in FIG. 546, in the 96th deviation variation, the first suggestion effect is displayed and the reproduction time (4.5 seconds) for one variation is displayed as in FIGS. 545 (a) and 545 (b). BGM for fluctuation of is reproduced (output). Then, in synchronization with the fluctuation stop of the special symbol, the third symbol is stopped and displayed for 0.5 seconds as the display mode, and the fluctuation stop sound is reproduced (output) as the voice mode. After that, when the 97th special symbol variation display (big hit variation) is executed, as shown in FIG. 546, three suggestion effects are simulated during the variation display period of one jackpot variation. , At the end of each suggestion effect, the third symbol is pseudo-stopped and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 546, the fluctuation display BGM and the fluctuation stop sound are pseudo-output (reproduced) in synchronization with the pseudo-suggestion effect. Then, in the fourth suggestion effect, an effect that succeeds in destroying the door 806 is displayed, and a big hit is notified. After the fluctuation stop period (0.5 seconds) of the jackpot fluctuation has elapsed, the jackpot is struck, the display mode for the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the BGM for the opening of the jackpot is displayed. It is output.

In addition, in the 24th embodiment, when a big hit is made during the execution of the probability change continuation suggestion effect, the same period as the case where the lottery of all the special symbols during the effect period of the probability change continuation suggestion effect is missed. The fluctuation time of the jackpot is set so that the probabilistic continuation suggestion effect ends. For example, in the case of a big hit in the 97th special symbol lottery after the big hit shown in FIG. 546, the fluctuation time of the big hit fluctuation is 3 times of deviation fluctuation fluctuation time (4.5 seconds × 3) and 2 The fluctuation time of 14.5 seconds, which is the total of the stop display periods (0.5 seconds × 2) for each time, is set. As a result, in the pseudo suggestion effect and the pseudo third symbol stop display executed during the jackpot fluctuation, the same display mode and effect mode as during the out-of-order fluctuation can be diverted, so that the display mode and the voice can be used. Variations in aspects can be minimized. Therefore, the storage capacity of the display control device 114 and the audio output device 226 can be reduced.

As described above, in the 24th embodiment, when the big hit is not obtained (they are missed four times in a row) during the execution of the probability change continuation suggestion effect, the voice mode (variable BGM) is output in the variable display unit. By doing so, even if the reserved ball becomes 0 during the execution of the probability change continuation suggestion effect, it is possible to prevent the voice mode and the display mode from being displaced thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably set the effect of the probabilistic continuation suggestion effect. Further, in the case of a big hit during the execution of the probability change continuation suggestion effect, the suggestion effect for the number of unexecuted times when the big hit is won is simulatedly executed during one big hit change. With this configuration, even if the jackpot is won, the probability change continuation suggestion effect can be confirmed to the end, so that the player's interest can be improved. Further, since the jackpot is notified in the same mode as the mode of notifying that the probability change state is continuing (the mode of destroying the door 806), the jackpot can be expected when the door 806 is destroyed. can. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the expectation for the probabilistic continuation suggestion staging.

<Electrical configuration in the 24th embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the 24th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 547. Here, the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 24th embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 23rd embodiment only in that the specified contents of the variation pattern selection 23 table 202qb are partially changed. .. Therefore, here, only the changes in the variation pattern selection 23 table 202qb will be described, and the details of other configurations of the ROM 202 will be omitted.

FIG. 547 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 24 table 202rb according to the 24th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 547 (a), the variation pattern selection 24 table 202rb in the 24th embodiment suggests the configuration of the variation pattern selection 23 table 202qb in the 23rd embodiment (see FIG. 492 (a)). The difference is that the production table 202r1 is added. This suggestion effect table 202r1 is referred to for selecting a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol for showing the lottery result of the 96th to 99th special symbols after the end of the jackpot, which is the execution period of the probability variation continuation suggestion effect. It is a data table to be created. That is, in the 24th embodiment, when the first to 95th special symbol lottery is executed after the big hit is completed, the variation pattern is determined with reference to the probability change / time saving table 202qb2, and the variation pattern is determined from 96 times to 99 times. When the lottery of the special symbol of the times is executed, the variation pattern is determined with reference to the suggestion effect table 202r1. Then, after 100 times, the fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to either the normal table 202qb1 or the probability variation / time saving table 202qb2 according to the gaming state.

FIG. 547 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the suggestion staging table 202r1. As shown in FIG. 547 (b), the suggestion effect table 202r1 is selected for each of the lottery result of the special symbol (win / fail determination result) and the number of lottery of the special symbol after the big hit (96 to 99 times). Fluctuation patterns are specified in association with each other. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 547 (b), when the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit and the number of lottery of the special symbol is 96 times, the stop type selection counter C3 and the variable type counter CS1 Regardless of the value of, a special variation A per 19.5 seconds of variation time is defined as a variation pattern in association with each other. This fluctuation time of 19.5 seconds is the sum of the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation for 4 times (4.5 seconds x 4) and the stop display period for 3 times (0.5 seconds x 3) in the probability change continuation suggestion effect. Is the time to match. That is, it is composed of a period during which it is possible to execute exactly four (pseudo) deviation fluctuations and fluctuation suspensions, including the fluctuation suspension period of the actual jackpot fluctuation. For this reason, when a big hit is obtained in the first special symbol lottery after the start of the probabilistic continuation suggestion effect, the pseudo variation display is executed four times in the jackpot fluctuation, so that the normal probabilistic continuation suggestion effect can be achieved. Similarly, the suggestion effect can be executed four times.

Further, as shown in FIG. 547 (b), in the situation where the winning / failing determination result is a big hit and the number of lottery of the special symbol is 97 times, the values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variable type counter CS1 are used. Therefore, as a fluctuation pattern, a special fluctuation B per 14.5 seconds of fluctuation time is defined in association with the fluctuation pattern. This fluctuation time of 14.5 seconds is the sum of the fluctuation time of three deviation fluctuations (4.5 seconds x 3) and the stop display period of two times (0.5 seconds x 2) in the probabilistic continuation suggestion effect. Is the time to match. That is, it is composed of a period during which it is possible to execute exactly three (pseudo) deviation fluctuations and fluctuation suspensions, including the fluctuation suspension period of the actual jackpot fluctuation. For this reason, if the first special symbol lottery is missed and the second lottery is a big hit after the start of the probability change continuation suggestion effect, the pseudo-variation display is executed three times in the big hit fluctuation. As a result, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect four times in addition to the one deviation fluctuation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 547 (b), in the situation where the winning / failing determination result is a big hit and the number of lottery of the special symbol is 98 times, the values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variable type counter CS1 are used. Therefore, as a fluctuation pattern, a special fluctuation C per 9.5 seconds of fluctuation time is defined in association with the fluctuation pattern. This fluctuation time of 9.5 seconds corresponds to the sum of the fluctuation time of three deviation fluctuations (4.5 seconds x 2) and the stop display period of one time (0.5 seconds) in the probabilistic continuation suggestion effect. It's time to do it. That is, it is composed of a period during which it is possible to execute exactly two (pseudo) deviation fluctuations and fluctuation suspension, including the fluctuation suspension period of the actual jackpot fluctuation. For this reason, if the first and second special symbol lottery is missed and the third lottery is a big hit after the start of the probability change continuation suggestion effect, a pseudo change display is displayed in the big hit fluctuation. By executing it twice, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect four times in addition to the two deviation fluctuations.

Further, as shown in FIG. 547 (b), in the situation where the winning / failing determination result is a big hit and the number of lottery of the special symbol is 99 times, the values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variable type counter CS1 are used. Therefore, as a fluctuation pattern, a special fluctuation D per 4.5 seconds of fluctuation time is defined in association with the fluctuation pattern. This fluctuation time of 4.5 seconds is composed of the same fluctuation time as the deviation time, so by executing the suggestion effect in the same way as when the deviation occurs, the suggestion effect for 4 fluctuations is executed without discomfort. be able to.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 547 (b), when the result of the hit / fail judgment is wrong, the special fluctuation with the fluctuation time of 4.5 seconds is defined as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the number of lottery of the special symbol. Has been done. For this reason, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect for 5 seconds each time the special symbol lottery is performed 96 to 99 times after the end of the jackpot, which is the execution period of the probability change continuation suggestion effect. Therefore, since the probability change continuation suggestion effect can be executed at the same effect time each time, it is possible to realize an effect mode that is easier for the player to understand.

As described above, in the 24th embodiment, the total fluctuation time (and the stop display time) until the probabilistic continuation suggestion effect ends, regardless of whether the jackpot is achieved or not during the execution of the probabilistic continuation suggestion effect. Is configured to be 20 seconds. With such a configuration, it is possible to fix the effect period of the probabilistic continuation suggestion effect each time, so that it is possible to provide an effect that is easier for the player to understand.

In the 24th embodiment, the effect period of the probabilistic continuation suggestion effect is fixed to 20 seconds, but the effect period is not necessarily limited to 20 seconds, and the suggestion effect of a specific number of times (4 times) is used. May be longer or shorter than 20 seconds, as long as it is feasible.

Next, with reference to FIG. 548, the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the 24th embodiment will be described. FIG. 548 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 222 in the 24th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 548 (a), the ROM 222 in the 24th embodiment has a reproduction speed selection table 222ra added to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the 23rd embodiment (see FIG. 495 (a)). Is different. Since other configurations are the same as the configurations of ROM 222 in the 23rd embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

The playback speed selection table 222ra started (resumes) the remaining long press period (A) required to increase the maximum number of gauges and the long press during the execution of the long press effect (see FIG. 542). It is a data table in which data for selecting the reproduction speed (display mode and voice mode) of the effect mode during long press is defined according to the remaining long press valid period (B) at the time point. The specified contents of the reproduction speed selection table 222ra will be described with reference to FIG. 548 (b).

FIG. 548 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the reproduction speed selection table 222ra. As shown in FIG. 548 (b), the playback speed selection table 222ra shows the remaining long press period (A) required to increase the maximum number of gauges, and the time when the long press is started (restarted). The reproduction speed (update speed) of the display mode and the voice mode is defined in association with each other for each correspondence with the remaining long press valid period (B). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 548 (b), when B is a period having a length of A or more (that is, by continuing the long press until the end of the long press effective period, the maximum number of gauges is increased. (When it is possible to make it possible) is configured so that 1x speed is selected as the reproduction speed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 548 (b), when B has a length less than A and a period having a length of 2/3 or more of A, 1.5 times speed is selected as the reproduction speed. It is configured as follows. Further, when B has a length less than 2/3 of A and a period having a length of half or more of A, double speed is selected as the reproduction speed. On the other hand, if B is less than half the length of A, 1x speed is selected as the reproduction speed.

As described above, in the 24th embodiment, by setting the reproduction speed with reference to the reproduction speed selection table 222ra, it is possible to increase the number of gauges to the upper limit within the remaining time of the long press valid period. The speed can be set. Therefore, in the chance charge effect, the effect can be ended with the number of gauges increased to a larger number, so that the number of times the chance-up effect is executed can be secured more. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 549, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the 24th embodiment will be described. FIG. 549 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the 24th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 549, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the 24th embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the 23rd embodiment (see FIG. 495 (b)) with the long press effect in progress flag 223ra and the long press period timer. 223rb, long press timer 223rc, long press execution flag 223rd, long press interruption flag 223re, air gauge counter 223rf, gauge rise timing storage area 223mg, pseudo fluctuation count counter 223rh, pseudo fluctuation timer 223rg. Is different in that is added.

The long-press effect in progress flag 223ra is a flag indicating whether or not the long-press effect (see FIG. 542) is being executed, and if it is on, it means that the long-press effect is being executed, while it is off. If so, it means that the long press effect is not being executed. The long-press effect during flag 223ra is set to on at the start timing of the long-press effect (see Z5902 in FIG. 551), and is set to off when the long-press valid period elapses (see Z5908 in FIG. 551).

The long press period timer 223rb is a timer for measuring the long press effective period in the long press effect, and a counter value corresponding to 10 seconds is set at the start of the long press effect (see Z5903 in FIG. 551). During this long press valid period, the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG is increased by the player performing the long press.

The long-pressed timer 223rc is a timer for measuring the total period (long-pressed period) in which the player operates the PUSH button 10317 during the long-pressed effect of 1. Basically, until the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG reaches the upper limit value, the gauge number increases by 1 every time the value of the long-pressed timer 223rc increases by 1 second. When the reproduction speed is 1.5 times or 2 times, the number of gauges increases at the timing according to the reproduction speed.

The long press execution flag 223rd is a flag for indicating whether or not the player is executing the long press in the long press effect. If the long press execution flag 223rd is on, it means that the player is executing the long press, and if it is off, it means that the long press is not being executed. This long press execution flag 223rd is set to on when a new operation (press) for the PUSH button 10317 is detected during the long press valid period (see Z6101 in FIG. 553), and turns off when the long press is interrupted. It is set (see Z6002 in FIG. 552).

The long press interruption flag 223re is a flag for indicating whether or not the long press is interrupted during the long press valid period of 1, and if it is on, it means that the long press is interrupted. If it is off, it means that the long press is not interrupted. This long press interruption flag 223re is set to on when the long press is interrupted (see Z6002 in FIG. 552) and turned off when the long press is resumed (see Z6105 in FIG. 553).

The spirit gauge counter 223rf is a counter for counting the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG actually increased by the player performing the long press during the long press effect. The initial value of the energy gauge counter 223rf is set to 0, and the value is incremented and updated by 1 each time the number of gauges of the energy gauge KG increases (see Z6007 in FIG. 552). At the end of this long press effect, the value of the energy gauge counter 223rf is overwritten with the value of the charge number counter 223qm (see Z5907 in FIG. 551). As a result, the number of gauges actually increased by the operation of the player can be reflected as the number of chance-up effects executed thereafter.

The gauge rise timing storage area 223 mg is a storage area for storing data indicating the remaining period until the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG increases during the execution of the long press effect. Whether or not to increase the number of gauges according to the data stored in the gauge increase timing storage area 223 mg and the value of the long press timer 223rc while the player is performing a long press in the long press effect. Is determined (see Z6005 in FIG. 552).

The pseudo fluctuation number counter 223rh is a counter for counting the number of remaining pseudo fluctuation effects (pseudo suggestion effects) to be executed during the jackpot variation in the probability change continuation suggestion effect. This pseudo-variation number counter 223rh is the value of the time reduction guaranteed number counter 223qg at the time of the big hit when a big hit is made by the lottery of the special symbol during the probability change continuation suggestion effect (that is, the rest of the probability change continuation suggestion effect). The number of effects) is set (see Z6202 in FIG. 557), and the value is decremented by 1 each time the pseudo-variation effect is executed (see Z6206 in FIG. 554). By counting the number of times of the pseudo-variation effect by the pseudo-variation number counter 223rh, it is possible to surely execute four suggestion effects in each probability change continuation suggestion effect. Therefore, the probability change continuation suggestion effect can be suitably executed.

The pseudo-variation timer 223rj is a timer for timing the remaining effect period in the pseudo-variation effect. The pseudo-variation timer 223rj is set with a timer value corresponding to 5 seconds each time the start of the pseudo-variation effect is set (see Z6203 in FIG. 557). By managing the effect period of the pseudo-variation effect by the pseudo-variation timer 223rj, it is possible to execute one or a plurality of pseudo-variation effects that match the fluctuation time of the jackpot variation. Therefore, the probability change continuation suggestion effect can be suitably executed.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the 24th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 550 to 557, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 24th embodiment will be described. In the process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 24th embodiment, the effect update process 23 (FIG. 519) is performed with respect to the various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 23rd embodiment. Z3111) is replaced with the effect update process 24 (Z3181 in FIG. 550), the variation display setting process 23 (Z3115 in FIG. 532) is replaced with the variation display setting process 24 (Z3182 in FIG. 555), and the variation effect setting process 23 (FIG. The difference is that the variable staging setting process 24 (Z4281 in FIG. 556) is executed instead of Z4204) in 533. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the staging update process 24 (Z3181) in the 24th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 550. This effect update process 24 (Z3181) is executed in place of the effect update process 23 (see FIG. 519) in the 23rd embodiment, and is variable display like the effect update process 23 (see FIG. 519) in the 23rd embodiment. This is a process for updating the effect mode of various effects executed during the execution of the effect.

Of the effect update processes 24 (see FIG. 550) in the 24th embodiment, each process of Z3201 to Z3206 is the same as each process of Z3201 to Z3206 of the effect update process 23 (see FIG. 519) in the 23rd embodiment, respectively. Processing is executed.

Further, in the effect update process 24 (see FIG. 550) in the 24th embodiment, when the process of Z3206 is completed, the long press effect process (Z3261) for updating the effect mode in the long press effect (see FIG. 542) is performed. This process is executed, and then a pseudo-variation setting process (Z3262) for updating the display mode during execution of the pseudo-variation effect (see FIG. 546) is executed, and this process is terminated. Details of these long-press effect processing (Z3261) and pseudo-variation setting processing (Z3262) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 551 to 553 and 554, respectively.

Next, the above-mentioned long press effect processing (Z3261) will be described with reference to FIG. 551. FIG. 551 is a flowchart showing the contents of the long press effect process (Z3261). As described above, this long-press effect process (Z3261) is a process for updating the effect mode in the long-press effect (see FIG. 542).

In this long-press effect process (Z3261), first, it is determined whether or not the present is the start timing of the long-press effect (Z5901). If it is determined that the current time is the start timing of the long press effect (Z5901: Yes), the long press effect in progress flag 223ra is set to ON (Z5902), and the value of the long press period timer 223rb corresponds to 10 seconds. The counter value is set (Z5903), and this process ends. Thereby, the long press effective period in the long press effect can be set to 10 seconds.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z5901 that the current time is not the start timing of the long press effect (Z5901: No), then whether the long press effect in progress flag 223ra is on (that is, the execution of the long press effect). Whether or not it is inside) is determined (Z5904). If it is determined that the long-press effect in progress flag 223ra is off (that is, the long-press effect is not being executed) (Z5904: No), there is no possibility of updating the effect mode related to the long-press effect, so that it is as it is. This process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z5904, when it is determined that the long press effect in progress flag 223ra is on (that is, the long press effect is being executed) (Z5904: Yes), the value of the long press period timer 223rb is subtracted. (Z5905) Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the long press period timer 223rb after subtraction is 0 (Z5906). When it is determined that the value of the long press period timer 223rb after subtraction is 0 (Z5906: Yes), it means that it is the end timing of the long press effect, so the value of the charge number counter 223qm is set to the value of the charge gauge counter 223rf. By overwriting the value of, the number of gauges actually increased (reached) in the long press effect is set as the number of subsequent chance-up effects (Z5907).

When the processing of Z5907 is completed, the values of the long press effect flag 223ra, the long press timer 223rc, the long press execution flag 223rd, the spirit gauge counter 223rf, and the long press interruption flag 223re are all reset (Z5908), and the chance charge is performed. The end of the effect is set (Z5909), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z5906, when it is determined that the timer value of the long press period timer 223rb after subtraction is not 0 (not the end timing of the long press effect) (Z5906: No), the long press execution flag 223rd is turned on. (That is, the player holds down the PUSH button 10317 for a long time) or not (Z5910). When it is determined that the long press execution flag 223rd is on (Z5910: Yes), the long press execution process for updating the effect mode while the player is performing the long press is executed (Z5911). , End this process. The details of this long press execution process (Z5911) will be described later with reference to FIG. 552.

On the other hand, in the process of Z5910, when it is determined that the long press execution flag 223rd is off (that is, the player does not press and hold the PUSH button 10317) (Z5910: No), then the PUSH button 10317 is displayed. It is determined whether or not the press is detected (Z5912). If it is determined that the pressing of the PUSH button 10317 is not detected (Z5912: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the press on the PUSH button 10317 is detected in the process of Z5912 (Z5912: Yes), the long press start process for setting the control for starting the long press is executed (Z5913). , End this process. The details of this long press start process (Z5913) will be described later with reference to FIG. 553.

Next, the long press execution process (Z5911) in the 24th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 552. FIG. 552 is a flowchart showing the contents of the long press execution processing (Z5911). As described above, this long press execution process (Z5911) is a process for updating the effect mode while the player is performing the long press.

In this long press execution process (Z5911), first, it is determined whether or not the PUSH button 10317 is pressed (Z6001), and if it is determined that the PUSH button 10317 is not pressed (Z6001: No), the length is long. The press execution flag 223rd is set to off, and the long press interruption flag 223re is set to on (Z6002). Then, the display and the pause of the sound are set (Z6003), and this process is terminated. More specifically, the interruption command is set for the display control device 114 and the audio output device 226, respectively.

On the other hand, in the process of Z6001, when it is determined that the PUSH button 10317 is pressed (Z6001: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the long-pressed timer 223rc to update (Z6004), and then the spirit gauge is used. It is determined whether or not the timer value corresponds to the timing of increasing the gauge number of the KG (Z6005). If it is determined in the processing of Z6005 that the timer value does not correspond to the timing of increasing the number of gauges (Z6005: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of Z6005, when it is determined that the timer value corresponds to the rise timing of the gauge number (Z6005: Yes), then the value of the air gauge counter 223rf is smaller than the value of the charge number counter 223qm. Whether or not it is determined (Z6006).

In the processing of Z6006, if it is determined that the value of the air gauge counter 223rf is smaller than the value of the charge number counter 223qm (Z6006: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the air gauge counter 223rf to update (Z6007). Execution of the display mode and the voice mode corresponding to the value of the later air gauge counter 223rf is set (Z6008), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z6006 that the value of the air gauge counter 223rf is equal to or greater than the value of the charge number counter 223qm (Z6006: No), the number of gauges cannot be increased any more in this long press effect. In order to mean that, the execution of the display mode and the voice mode corresponding to the value of the current air gauge counter 223rf is set (Z6009), and this process is terminated.

Next, the long press start process (Z5913) in the 24th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 553. FIG. 553 is a flowchart showing the contents of the long press start process (Z5913). As described above, the long press start process (Z5913) is a process for setting control for the player to start the long press.

In the long press start process (Z5913), first, the long press execution flag 223rd is set to ON (Z6101), and then it is determined whether or not the long press interruption flag 223re is ON (Z6104). When it is determined that the long press interruption flag 223re is off in the processing of Z6104 (Z6104: No), it means that the player has performed the operation for the PUSH button 10317 for the first time in the long press effect, so that the gauge rise timing. Data indicating an increase every second is stored in the storage area 223 rg (Z6102), the display mode and the voice mode for long press are reproduced at 1x speed (Z6103), and then this process is terminated. Setting 1x speed regardless of the cutting time with the first long press may make the player feel uncomfortable if the display and audio are played at 1.5x speed or 2x speed from the beginning. Since it has sex, it is intended to suppress this.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z6104, when it is determined that the long press interruption flag 223re is on (Z6104: Yes), the long press interruption flag 223re is set to off (Z6105), and the value of the charge number counter 223qm x 1 second. The value (A) obtained by subtracting the value of the long-pressed timer 223rc is calculated (Z6106). Next, the value (B) obtained by subtracting the value of the long press period counter from the timer value corresponding to 10 seconds is calculated (Z6107), and from the reproduction speed selection table 222ra (see FIG. 548 (b)), A and B are calculated. The reproduction speed corresponding to each value is selected (Z6108). Next, the data in the gauge rise timing storage area 223 rg is updated according to the reproduction speed selected from the reproduction speed selection table 222ra (Z6109), and the reproduction of the display mode and the voice mode at the selected reproduction speed is started (Z6110). ), End this process.

By executing this long press start process (see FIG. 553), a suitable playback speed can be set according to the timing at which the long press is restarted.

Next, the pseudo-variation setting process (Z3262) in the 24th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 554. FIG. 554 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pseudo-variation setting process (Z3262). As described above, the pseudo-variation setting process (Z3262) is a process for updating the display mode during execution of the pseudo-variation effect (see FIG. 546).

In the pseudo-variation setting process (Z3262), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the pseudo-variation number counter 223rh is larger than 0 (Z6201). If it is determined that the value of the pseudo-variation count counter 223rh is 0 in the processing of Z6201 (Z6201: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of Z6201 when it is determined that the value of the pseudo-variation count counter 223rh is larger than 0 (Z6201: Yes), the value of the pseudo-variation timer 223rj is subtracted by 1 (Z6202), and then the pseudo after subtraction is performed. It is determined whether or not the value of the variable timer 223rj is 0 (Z6203). If it is determined in the process of Z6203 that the value of the pseudo-variation timer 223rj after subtraction is not 0 (Z6203: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z6203, when it is determined that the value of the pseudo-variation timer 223rj after subtraction is 0 (Z6203: Yes), the pseudo-variation effect for 5 seconds corresponding to the value of the pseudo-variation count counter 223rh after subtraction. Set the start of (Z6204) and set the playback of the variable BGM for 5 seconds (Z6205). Next, the value of the pseudo-variation count counter 223rh is subtracted by 1 (Z6206), and this process is terminated.

By executing this pseudo-variation setting process (see FIG. 554), the pseudo-variation effect can be suitably executed when a big hit is won during the execution of the probability change continuation suggestion effect.

Next, the variation display setting process 24 (Z3182) in the 24th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 555. This variation display setting process 24 (Z3182) is executed in place of the variation display setting process 23 (see FIG. 532) in the 23rd embodiment, and is the same as the variation display setting process 23 (see FIG. 532) in the 23rd embodiment. , This is a process for executing the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81.

In each of the Z4201 to Z4203, Z4205, and Z4206-Z4211 processes of the variable display setting process 24 (Z3182), Z4201 to Z4203, Z4205, and Z4206 of the variable display setting process 23 (see FIG. 532) in the 23rd embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process of Z4211 is executed. Further, in the variation display setting process 24 (Z3182) in the 24th embodiment, when the processing of Z4203 is completed, the variation effect setting process 23 (see FIG. 533) in the 23rd embodiment is replaced with the variation effect setting process. 24 is executed (Z4281). The details of the variable staging setting process 24 (Z4281) will be described later with reference to FIG. 556.

Further, in the variation display setting process 24 (see FIG. 555) in the 24th embodiment, when the process of Z4205 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the value of the pseudo variation timer 223rj is larger than 0 (Z4282). When it is determined that the value of the pseudo fluctuation timer 223rj is 0 (Z4282: No), the reproduction of the fluctuation BGM according to the fluctuation time is set (Z4283), and the processing is shifted to Z4206. On the other hand, in the processing of Z4282, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo-variation timer 223rj is larger than 0 (Z4282: Yes), the processing of Z4283 is skipped and the processing is shifted to Z4206.

Next, with reference to FIG. 556, the variation effect setting process 24 (Z4281) in the 24th embodiment will be described. This variation effect setting process 24 (Z4281) is executed in place of the variation effect setting process 23 (see FIG. 533) in the 23rd embodiment, and is the same as the variation effect setting process 23 (see FIG. 533) in the 23rd embodiment. , This is a process for executing the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81.

Of the variation effect setting process 24 (Z4281), in each process of Z4301 to Z4307 and Z4310 to Z4313, each of Z4301 to Z4307 and Z4310 to Z4313 of the variation effect setting process 23 (see FIG. 533) in the 23rd embodiment, respectively. The same process as the process is executed. Further, in the variable effect setting process 24 (Z4281) in the 24th embodiment, if it is determined in the process of Z4307 that the lottery result is a big hit (Z4307: Yes), during the execution period of the probability change continuation suggestion effect. Since it means that the jackpot fluctuation is started, the winning process during the suggestion effect for setting the execution of the remaining unexecuted suggestion effect during the jackpot variation is executed (Z4381), and this process is terminated. The details of the winning process (Z4381) during the suggestion staging will be described with reference to FIG. 557.

FIG. 557 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning process (Z4381) during the suggestion staging. In this suggestion staging winning process (Z4381), first, the right-handed winning flag 223qi is set to ON (Z6201), and then the value of the time-saving guaranteed number counter 223qg is set to the value of the pseudo-variation number counter 223rh (Z6202). ). When the processing of Z6202 is completed, the timer value corresponding to 5 seconds is set in the value of the pseudo-variation timer 223rj (Z6203), the start of the pseudo-variation effect for 5 seconds is set (Z6204), and the variation for 5 seconds is set. By setting the reproduction of BGM (Z6205), the execution of the pseudo-variation effect for 5 seconds is set. Then, the value of the pseudo-variation count counter 223rh is subtracted by 1 (Z6206), and this process is terminated.

By executing the winning process (Z4381) during the suggestion effect, all the unexecuted suggestion effects can be completed during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation, so that the probability change continuation suggestion effect can be more preferably executed. ..

<Regarding the control process of the audio output device in the 24th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 558, the control process executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the 24th embodiment will be described. The 24th embodiment differs only in that the interruption command processing 24 (Z20221) is executed instead of the interruption command processing (see FIG. 540) in the 23rd embodiment described above. The details of the suspend command process 24 (Z20221) will be described with reference to FIG. 558. Since the other control processes executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the 23rd embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

FIG. 558 is a flowchart showing the suspend command process 24 (Z20221). The suspend command process 24 (Z20221) is a process executed in place of the suspend command process (see FIG. 540) in the 23rd embodiment described above, and is the same as the suspend command process (see FIG. 540) in the 23rd embodiment. In addition, it is a process for performing control according to the interruption command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the interruption command processing 24 (see FIG. 558) in the 24th embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the interruption command corresponds to the variable BGM (Z20601), and the interrupt command corresponds to the variable BGM. If it is determined (Z20601), the variable BGM interruption process for setting the interruption and resumption of the variable BGM is executed (Z20602), and this process is terminated. In this variable BGM interruption process (Z20602), the same process as the interruption command process (see FIG. 540) in the 23rd embodiment is executed. Since the suspend command process (see FIG. 540) has already been described in the 23rd embodiment, the detailed description of the variable BGM suspend process (Z20602) having the same content as the suspend command process (see FIG. 540) is omitted. do.

Further, in the processing of Z20601, if it is determined that the command is not the interruption command corresponding to the variable BGM (Z20601: No), the audio mode (audio for long press effect) reproduced (output) during the long press effect is interrupted. Or, since it means that it is a suspend command for resuming, whether or not this suspend command is a command indicating the start of suspension (whether it is a command based on the player interrupting the long press). To determine. If it is determined in the processing of Z20603 that the command indicates the start of interruption (Z20603: Yes), data indicating the reproduction position of the long-pressed sound during reproduction is stored in the reproduction position storage area 303b (Z20604). , Set the interruption of the playback of the long-pressed effect sound (Z20605), and end this process.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z20603, when it is determined that the interruption command is not an interruption command indicating the start of interruption (that is, the interruption command indicates the restart of the long press effect sound) (Z20603: No), then the playback position. The data stored in the storage area 302b is read (Z20606), and the playback of the long-press effect sound at the playback speed notified by the interrupt command is restarted from the playback position indicated by the read data (Z20607). This process ends.

By executing this interruption command process 24 (see FIG. 558), the player synchronizes the timing at which the long press is interrupted and resumed during the execution of the long press effect, and the interruption and resumption of the long press effect voice are accurately performed. Can be set to. Therefore, the long press effect can be more preferably executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the 24th embodiment is configured to be capable of executing a long press effect that urges the player to continuously press the PUSH button 10317 (operation of a specific operation content). When this long press effect is executed, the effect that the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG is gradually increased according to the duration of the long press is executed. As a result, it is possible to realize a novel production mode that affects the number of gauges (the number of chance-up effects to be executed after that) according to the operation content of the player (duration of long press). Can be further improved. Further, in the 24th embodiment, while the player presses and holds the button for a long time, the voice mode is output in synchronization with the display of the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG. That is, each time the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG increases, the voice mode corresponding to the increased number of gauges is output. Then, in the 24th embodiment, when the player interrupts the long press in the long press effect, the reproduction position of the sound is stored, and when the player resumes the long press after that, the memory is stored. It is configured so that the sound is output from the set playback position. With this configuration, the timing at which the number of gauges increases and the timing at which the voice mode is switched can be matched (synchronized) regardless of whether or not the long press is interrupted. Can be set more preferably.

Further, in the 24th embodiment, when the long press is restarted in the long press effect, the remaining gauge up to the long press effective period and the upper limit gauge number that can be increased in the current long press effect. The number is discriminated, and the update speed (reproduction speed) of the voice mode and the display mode during the subsequent long press is changed according to the discrimination result. That is, when the remaining long press valid period is short, the configuration is controlled so that the maximum number of gauges can be increased as much as possible within the valid period by setting 1.5 times speed or 2 times speed. is doing. With this configuration, it is possible to end each long press effect with a larger number of gauges accumulated. Therefore, since it is possible to perform more chance-up effects after that, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, in the 24th embodiment, as in the 23rd embodiment described above, a series of story-like staging (probability change continuation suggestion staging) is executed over the 96th to 99th variable display periods after the end of the jackpot. It is configured to be. Further, during the execution period of the probability change continuation suggestion effect, the voice mode and the display mode are set in the variable display unit. In other words, instead of setting the display mode and voice mode over the fluctuation time of 4 fluctuations, the display mode and voice mode are set to end at the fluctuation time set at the start of the fluctuation for each fluctuation. .. With this configuration, even if the reserved ball becomes 0 during the execution of the probability change continuation suggestion effect, it is possible to prevent the voice mode and the display mode from being displaced thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably set the effect of the probabilistic continuation suggestion effect.

In the 24th embodiment, if the reserved ball becomes 0 during the execution of the probabilistic continuation suggestion effect, the probabilistic continuation suggestion effect is interrupted (the demo display is displayed), but this is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, even when the hold becomes 0, the variable display effect may be executed in a pseudo manner, and the display mode and the voice mode for the suggestion effect may be set accordingly. With such a configuration, the probabilistic continuation suggestion staging can be configured so as not to be interrupted, so that a staging with a better tempo can be realized. It should be noted that the pseudo variable display effect may be executed only when the result of the effect has already been determined. More specifically, only when the game state is a time-saving state and it is confirmed that the transition to the normal state is performed by executing the 100th special symbol lottery, the probability change continuation suggestion effect is simulated. It may be configured to end in. As a result, it is possible to prevent a contradiction between the content of the effect and the actual behavior, so that a more suitable mode of effect can be realized.

<Modified example of the 24th embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 24th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 559. In the 24th embodiment described above, in the probability change continuation suggestion effect, the voice mode and the display mode are set in the variable display unit. On the other hand, in this modification, at the timing of newly setting the effect, the effect mode (display mode and effect mode) up to the range in which the effect is reliably and continuously executed is collectively according to the situation of the reserved ball. It was configured to be set. In this case, the configuration is such that a continuous display mode and an effect mode are set over a range of continuous execution. As a result, it is possible to prevent the production from being interrupted in the variable display unit, so that it is possible to realize a production mode with a better tempo.

The correspondence between the voice mode and the display mode in the modified example of the 24th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 559. FIG. 559 is a diagram showing the correspondence between the display mode and the voice mode when the hold becomes 0 at the time when the second suggestion effect in the probability change continuation suggestion effect is set in the present modification. As shown in FIG. 559, in the situation where one reserved ball is present at the start of the first suggestion effect, the variable display, the display mode for the variable display corresponding to the reserved ball, and the audio mode are displayed. It is configured to be set collectively. That is, as shown in FIG. 559, the execution of the suggestion effect 1 and the suggestion effect 2 is set, and the BGM for variation of the reproduction time over the variation display for two times is set. With such a configuration, the story of the probabilistic continuation suggestion staging can be further emphasized, so that the staging effect can be enhanced. After the variable stop state is set, the demo display is set and the voice mode is stopped, and the execution of the suggestion effect is restarted with a new start prize as an opportunity, as in the 24th embodiment described above. To.

In this way, the story of the probabilistic continuation suggestion effect can be further emphasized by setting the voice mode up to the suggestion effect in the range where the execution is confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the above-mentioned 24th embodiment and its modification, the BGM reproduced during the execution period of the probability change continuation suggestion effect is configured to end in the variable display unit, but the present invention is not limited to this. do not have. For example, at the start of the probabilistic continuation suggestion effect, a predetermined BGM loop reproduction is set (that is, the reproduction is started without setting the end timing), and it is determined that the reserved ball becomes 0 during the execution of the probabilistic continuation suggestion effect. In this case, a sharp reproduction position (for example, a reproduction position where the melody changes) is determined in a predetermined range before and after the end timing of the last variation display (for example, a range within 1 second before and after the end). Then, the display mode may be set so that the effect is interrupted at the discriminated reproduction position, and the interruption of the BGM may be set. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to set the BGM in the variable display unit, so that the processing load during the execution of the probability change continuation suggestion effect can be reduced.

<25th Embodiment>
Next, the 25th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 560 to 579. In the 23rd embodiment and the 24th embodiment described above, an operation means (PUSH button 10317) that can be operated by the player is provided, and the operation to the operation means (PUSH button 10317) is effectively determined within the operation validity period. By operating the operating means (PUSH button 10317), it is possible to execute an operation effect that changes the effect mode of the effect being executed. More specifically, by operating the operation means (PUSH button 10317) a plurality of times within the operation valid period, it is possible to execute a continuous operation effect (so-called continuous hit effect) in which the effect mode is changed stepwise. ..

This continuous hitting effect is configured to suggest that the more variable the effect mode is, the more likely it is that a privilege that is advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit by a special symbol lottery) will be given. Each time the button 22 is pressed, it is determined whether or not to change the effect mode, and when it is determined that the effect mode is to be changed, the continuous striking effect is controlled so as to change the effect mode. there were.

However, in the continuous striking effect in each of the above-described embodiments, when the player enthusiastically operates (presses) the PUSH button 10317, the variable number of times of the effect mode reaches the upper limit number at an early stage, and the remaining operation is effective. No matter how many times the PUSH button 10317 is operated (pressed) within the period, there is a problem that the effect mode does not change. That is, in the continuous striking effect executed in each of the above-described embodiments, the player is enthusiastic even though the effect mode cannot be changed up to the upper limit number of times unless the player presses the PUSH button 10317 a plurality of times. In addition, when the PUSH button 10317 is operated, there is a problem that the period in which the staging mode is not changed continues, and the motivation of the player to operate the PUSH button 10317 is reduced.

On the other hand, in the 25th embodiment, the effect mode is configured to limit the variable range (variable number of times and variable value) according to the elapsed state of the operation valid period. With this configuration, even if the same operation is executed for the operating means within the operation valid period, the variable content of the effect mode based on the operation can be changed according to the elapsed state of the operation valid period. Can be different. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the operation timing of the PUSH button 10317 during the operation valid period in addition to the operation content of the PUSH button 10317 executed during the operation effect, and the operation effect to be executed. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored at an early stage.

Further, in the 25th embodiment, a plurality of restricted contents for limiting the variable range of the effect mode according to the elapsed state of the operation valid period are configured to be managed as a scenario, and the contents are different as the scenario type. It is configured to select one scenario type from the scenario types. Specifically, the scenario type in which the variable range of the effect mode can reach the upper limit only in the first operation valid period, which is the first half of the operation valid period, and the variable range of the effect mode are limited during the first operation valid period. , The scenario type and the like in which the variable range of the effect mode can reach the upper limit in the second operation valid period after the first operation valid period can be set. With this configuration, the degree of variability of the effect mode based on the number of operations of the operation means and the operation timing during the operation valid period can be easily changed according to the set scenario type. Variations can be easily diversified.

Therefore, as compared with the conventional configuration in which it is determined whether or not to change the effect mode each time the PUSH button 10317 is pressed, it is possible to give regularity to the variable pattern of the effect mode within the operation valid period. For example, by making the type of the scenario set according to the determination result of whether or not the privilege is given different, the variable number of the staging mode is before reaching the upper limit, that is, Depending on the variable situation of the effect mode, it is possible to make it easier for the player to predict the effect result of the operation effect this time, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

In addition, in the 25th embodiment, the variable amount of the effect mode that can be changed according to one operation of the PUSH button 10317 is also limited. Specifically, it is configured so that an operation effect in which the effect mode can be changed in 5 stages is executed based on the operation to the PUSH button 10317, and a maximum of 3 operations can be performed by one operation of the PUSH button 10317. The variable amount is limited so that the staging mode can be changed only for each stage. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easy for the player to enthusiastically operate the PUSH button 10317 a plurality of times during the continuous striking effect.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the 25th embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the 24th embodiment described above is that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The point is that the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed. The 24th regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the 24th embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the content of the production in the 25th embodiment>
Here, with reference to FIGS. 560 to 562, the contents of the characteristic effects among the various effects executed in the 25th embodiment will be described. As described above, in the 25th embodiment, the content of the continuous striking effect (operation effect) is different from that of the 24th embodiment described above, and the content is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the continuous striking effect. The display mode to be displayed is also different in that it is different depending on the repeated striking effect to be performed. In addition, in explaining the effect content of the 25th embodiment, the detailed description of the same content as the 24th embodiment described above will be omitted. Further, the same reference numerals are given to the reference numerals attached to the same elements, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, a display mode when the continuous striking effect is executed will be described. In the 25th embodiment, as an effect period (continuous hitting effect period) in which the continuous hitting effect is executed, a waiting period for notifying the player that the effect of operating the operating means is executed, and the operating means are provided. Based on the execution period in which the operation validity period is set and the display mode (effect mode) is changed based on the operation result to the operation means, and the operation result to the operation means during the execution period. The result period for notifying the effect result of the continuous striking effect is divided into a standby effect, a continuous striking period effect during the execution period, and a result effect during the result period.

FIG. 560 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during the standby effect executed during the standby period in the continuous stroke effect period in which the above-mentioned continuous stroke effect is executed. This standby effect is an effect that is executed before the operation valid period is set, and is an effect for notifying the player in advance that the operation valid period is set. With such a configuration, it is easy to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the operation means (frame button 22) is forgotten to be operated or the desired operation cannot be executed without noticing that the operation validity period has been set. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 560 (a), in the 25th control example, when the standby effect is executed, the operation valid period set next is set in the substantially central portion of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The operation means to be operated is the PUSH button 10317, and an image NG in a display mode indicating that the operation to be executed by the player during the operation valid period is a continuous striking operation is displayed. More specifically, an image NG composed of an image imitating the PUSH button 10317 and the characters of "continuous hitting" is displayed. During the standby effect, the operation valid period is not set, and even if the player operates the operation means (PUSH button 10317), the effect mode does not change. On the other hand, a mode for prompting an operation to the operating means (PUSH button 10317) (for example, a character of "press", an image of an arrow pointing from above to an image imitating the PUSH button 10317, etc.) is displayed. There is no.

Further, on the left side of the front view of the image NG, the character 801 is displayed in a state of wearing the spirit (aura) of the initial mode, and on the right side of the front view, the operation means (PUSH button 10317) during the operation valid period is displayed. The spirit gauge KG, in which the number of gauges for indicating the accumulation of spirits based on the operation is displayed in five stages, is displayed. With these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the effect of increasing the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG will be executed soon by repeatedly hitting the PUSH button 10317.

Further, in the display area 805 displayed above the character 801 the characters "waiting for repeated hits" are displayed. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the current state is the state before the operation validity period is set. Further, the characters "2 seconds until the start of repeated button presses" are displayed on the display area 803.

Although a detailed explanation will be described later, the continuous striking effect is set as a variation effect pattern selected at the timing when the special symbol variation starts, and the standby effect is executed (the standby period is set). The timing, the timing at which the continuous striking period effect is executed (execution period is set), and the timing at which the result effect is executed (result period is set) are set to the elapsed time of the special symbol change (elapsed time of the variation effect). Correspondingly specified.

Therefore, since it is possible to determine after how many seconds the continuous striking period effect is executed based on the elapsed time of the special symbol variation (elapsed time of the variation effect), the display mode based on the determination result is displayed in the display area 803. Can be displayed in. Therefore, it is possible for the player who has grasped the effect content of the standby effect not only to execute the continuous hitting period effect in which the operation valid period is set, but also to easily understand the execution timing. Although detailed description is omitted, the display mode of the remaining time display of the waiting period (displaying the remaining time until the continuous striking period effect is executed) displayed in the display area 803 during the waiting period is in seconds. It is configured to be updated, and further, there is no remaining time, that is, the display timing indicating 0 seconds is configured to be slightly before (0.5 seconds before) the execution timing of the continuous striking period effect. ing.

With this configuration, when the operation (continuous striking operation) to the operation means (PUSH button 10317) is started when the remaining time display displayed in the display area 803 during the standby effect becomes 0 seconds, Immediately after the operation validity period is set, the player can be made to operate the PUSH button 10317. The timing indicated by the remaining period display may be set based on the timing at which the continuous striking period effect is executed (the timing at which the operation valid period is set). For example, the timing at which the continuous striking period effect is executed (operation). It may be configured to indicate the timing at which the valid period is set as it is, or the timing slightly later than the timing at which the continuous striking period effect is executed (the timing at which the operation valid period is set) (for example, 0.5). It may be configured to indicate (after seconds). In addition, the timing at which the end timing of the standby effect and the elapsed time from the execution timing of the standby effect becomes a predetermined time is shown without being based on the timing at which the continuous striking period effect is executed (the timing at which the operation valid period is set). It may be configured in.

Further, in the 25th embodiment, the timing at which the continuous striking period effect is executed is configured to be predictable to the player by using the number of seconds, but the timing is not limited to this, and the timing at which the continuous striking period effect is executed is not limited to this. A mode in which the player can understand that the balloon is approaching, for example, a mode in which the balloon gradually inflates and the continuous striking period effect is executed when the balloon bursts, or a predetermined moving body is in the first position. You may use an aspect or the like indicating that the continuous striking period effect is executed when the moving body reaches the second position by gradually approaching the second position. That is, it suffices as long as it is possible for the player to understand (predict) the timing at which the continuous striking period effect is executed according to the update status of the display mode displayed in the display area 803 during the standby effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 560 (b), among the continuous striking effects, a display mode during the continuous striking period effect in which the operation valid period is set will be described. FIG. 560 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during the continuous striking period production. This continuous striking period effect is an effect executed in a state where the operation valid period is set, and is a first effect for notifying the player that the operation valid period is set, and a game. A second effect in which the effect mode is changed based on an operation on the operation means (PUSH button 10317) by a user, and a second effect for indicating that the player has operated the operation means (PUSH button 10317) during the operation valid period. The three effects are at least executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner by the first effect that the operation valid period is set. Further, since the effect mode of the second effect can be changed according to the operation of the operation means, the player can positively operate the operation means (PUSH button 10317) a plurality of times. In addition, by executing the third effect, even if the effect mode of the second effect does not change when the player operates the operation means (PUSH button 10317) during the operation valid period, the operation means can be used. It is possible to easily make the player understand that the operation has been effectively accepted.

Although a detailed description will be described later, in the 25th embodiment, when the operating means (PUSH button 10317) is operated during the operation valid period, a predetermined variable lottery is executed and the variable lottery is won. It is configured so that a variable condition for changing the effect mode of the second effect is satisfied. Therefore, even if the player operates the operation means (PUSH button 10317) a plurality of times during the operation valid period, a situation may occur in which the effect mode of the second effect is not variable.

In this way, when the number of operations to the operating means reaches a certain number of times, the effect mode of the second effect does not always change, but when the variable lottery executed based on the operation to the operating means is won. When the effect mode of the second effect is configured to be variable, at what timing the second effect changes for the player, and to what stage the effect mode changes in this continuous striking effect. Can be made difficult for the player to predict, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. However, if the variable lottery is not won for a long time even though the operating means is operated a plurality of times, the production mode of the second effect is not changed for a long time. Due to the failure of the pachinko machine 10, it seems that the operation to the operating means is not effectively accepted, and there is a problem that the motivation to operate the operating means is reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the third effect for indicating that the player has operated the operating means (PUSH button 10317) during the operation valid period is configured to be executable, the third effect can be executed for a long time. Even if a situation occurs in which the variable lottery is not won, the player can easily understand that the operation to the operating means is effectively accepted, so that the player's motivation to operate is reduced. Can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 560 (b), when the continuous striking period effect is executed, an image NG for prompting the continuous striking operation of the PUSH button 10317 is displayed near the center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. .. More specifically, an image imitating the PUSH button 10317, a character of "continuous hitting", and a plurality of arrow images for prompting the push of the PUSH button 10317 multiple times are displayed. Then, in the display area 805, the characters "Save your spirit by hitting repeatedly !!" are displayed. With these displays, the player can easily understand that the operation validity period is currently set. That is, the above-mentioned display mode corresponds to the first effect executed during the continuous striking period effect.

Further, in the display area 803, the remaining period of the execution period (the remaining period of the operation valid period) in which the continuous hitting period effect is executed is displayed. As a result, the length of the execution period of the continuous striking period effect can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. In the 25th embodiment, the remaining time is displayed in seconds in order to make the player understand the remaining period of the continuous striking period effect (the remaining period of the operation valid period). A configuration other than the above may be used, and a mode in which the player can understand that the end timing of the continuous striking period effect (operation valid period) is approaching, for example, the balloon gradually inflates and bursts. An aspect indicating that the period effect is completed, or an aspect indicating that the continuous striking period effect ends when the predetermined moving object gradually approaches the second position from the first position and the moving pair reaches the second position. Aspects and the like may be used. That is, it suffices as long as it is possible for the player to understand (predict) the timing at which the continuous striking period effect ends according to the update status of the display mode displayed in the display area 803 during the continuous striking period effect.

In the 25th embodiment, 10 seconds is set as the effect period (operation valid period) of the continuous striking period effect, and in the example shown in FIG. 560 (b), the continuous striking period effect is executed. The display mode at the time when 3.5 seconds have elapsed (after the operation valid period is set), that is, the display mode at the time when the remaining time of the continuous striking period effect (operation valid period) is 6.5 seconds is displayed. By repeatedly hitting the PUSH button 10317 during the operation validity period (3.5 seconds) that has already passed, the spirit gauge KG increases to the number of gauges in the second stage, and the spirit (aura) worn by the character 801 ) Is displayed in a mode corresponding to the number of gauges (a mode larger than the initial state (see FIG. 560 (a))). That is, the display mode of the character 801 and the variable mode for varying the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG correspond to the second effect executed during the continuous striking period effect.

Further, the image imitating the PUSH button 10317 displayed on the image NG is configured so that the mode is variably displayed based on the player operating (pressing) the PUSH button 10317. Specifically, when the player does not press the PUSH button 10317, it is displayed in the initial display mode shown in FIG. 560 (a), and when the player presses the PUSH button 10317, FIG. 560. As shown in (b), the image imitating the PUSH button 10317 is configured to be displayed in a dented pressing display mode rather than the initial display mode (see FIG. 560 (a)). That is, the variable mode of the image imitating the PUSH button 10317 displayed on the image NG corresponds to the third effect executed during the continuous striking period effect. As a result, the player can easily understand that the operation of the operating means by the player is effectively accepted even if the period in which the effect mode of the second effect is not changed continues.

In the 25th embodiment, when it is detected that the player operates (presses) the operation means (PUSH button 10317) in the state where the operation validity period is set, the PUSH displayed on the image NG is displayed. It is configured to display the pressed display mode as the display mode of the image imitating the button 10317, but if it is configured to notify the player that the operation to the operating means is effectively determined. , Other configurations may be used, for example, the pressed display mode may continue for at least 0.5 seconds, and the initial display mode displayed after the pressed display mode may also continue for at least 0.5 seconds. The display may be controlled. In this case, it may be configured so that the presence or absence of the variable condition is not determined for 0.5 seconds after the variable condition of the display mode is satisfied. With this configuration, even if the operating means is operated multiple times in a short time, for example, even if the button is pressed at intervals of 0.1 seconds, the display image displayed in the image NG is initially displayed. Since the display mode and the pressed display mode are alternately and variablely displayed at intervals (0.5 second intervals) that the player can visually recognize, the operation of the operating means by the player is effectively accepted. Can be easily understood by the player.

Further, as the third effect executed during the above-mentioned continuous striking period effect, not only the display effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 but also the sound output device 226 (see FIG. 487) outputs. It may be configured to be able to execute a voice effect capable of notifying that the operation to the operation means by the player is effectively accepted by voice. In this case, the execution interval may be different between the display effect and the voice effect. For example, in the display effect, the effect mode is the first interval (0.5 second interval) regardless of the operation interval of the actual operation means. The voice effect may be configured to be executed according to the operation interval of the actual operation means.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the above-mentioned third effect, that is, as an effect mode for notifying that the operation to the operation means by the player is effectively accepted, the remaining period of the operation valid period and the remaining period of the operation valid period are used. The same effect mode is set regardless of the effect mode (variable situation) of the second effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the remaining period of the operation valid period and the effect mode of the second effect (the effect mode of the second effect). It may be configured so that different production modes can be set according to the variable situation). For example, the shorter the remaining period of the operation valid period, the easier it is for the player to understand the variable situation of the third production mode. The staging mode may be changed so as to be difficult to understand, or the staging mode of the second staging (variable situation) approaches the upper limit of the staging of the third staging. The effect mode may be changed so that the player can easily understand the variable state of the mode, or the effect mode may be changed so as to be difficult to understand.

Next, with reference to FIG. 561, the variable contents of the second effect during the continuous striking period effect will be described. In the 25th embodiment, the degree of variability of the second effect during the continuous striking period effect can be controlled. Specifically, the upper limit value that can be reached in this continuous striking effect is determined in advance, and the internal value can be determined up to the predetermined upper limit value according to the elapsed state of the operation valid period. is doing. When the variable condition of the second effect is satisfied, the effect mode of the second effect is changed up to the internal value at that time. With this configuration, immediately after the continuous striking period effect is executed, the variable condition of the second effect is satisfied multiple times, and the second effect reaches the upper limit with a large remaining period of the operation valid period. It is possible to suppress the change.

Further, in the 25th embodiment, as a scenario showing the degree of transfer of the internal value described above, one scenario can be set from a plurality of scenarios in which the transfer state of the internal value is different. As a result, the degree of variability of the second effect during the continuous striking period effect can be made different according to the set scenario, so that the player can perform the effect that the player does not get tired of.

In addition, in the 25th embodiment, if the type of variation pattern in which the continuous striking effect is executed, that is, the selection ratio of the scenario indicating the degree of transfer of the internal value is different depending on the result of the special symbol lottery to be the effect. I'm letting you. That is, when the continuous hitting effect is executed as a part of the big hit variation effect which is won in the special symbol lottery, and when the continuous hitting effect is executed as a part of the missed variation effect which is won in the special symbol lottery. And, it is configured so that different scenarios can be easily set. With this configuration, the player is made to assume the set scenario type based on the variable situation of the second effect during the continuous hitting effect, and the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is obtained based on the assumed result. It is possible to make a prediction. Therefore, it is possible to make the player, in particular, the player who wants to grasp the result of the special symbol lottery as soon as possible, interested in the production content of the continuous striking effect and enthusiastically operate the operation means. It is possible to improve the interest of.

FIG. 561A shows a display mode in which the effect mode of the second effect (the display mode of the spirit gauge KG and the effect for changing the display mode of the character 801) during the continuous striking period effect has reached the internal value. It is a figure. As described above, in the 25th embodiment, the scenario is managed so that the internal value shifts (increases) according to the passage of time of the operation valid period set during the continuous striking period production, and the internal value at that time is set. It is configured to change the display mode of the second effect to the upper limit. Therefore, when the display mode of the second effect is variable to the display mode corresponding to the internal value, the effect mode of the second effect is the period until the internal value is updated (increased) with the passage of time. It is a non-variable period (variable suspension period).

In the 25th embodiment, as shown in FIG. 561 (a), when the variable interruption period is reached, the display mode is different from the normal execution period (the period during which the continuous striking period effect is executed), and the player can see the display mode. In this continuous striking period effect, the effect mode of the second effect may be further changed, that is, it is configured to suggest that the internal value can be changed (updated). As a result, even if the display mode of the second effect is not changed for a predetermined period (the period until the internal value is updated), the player is motivated to change the effect mode of the second effect. Can operate the operating means (PUSH button 10317).

Here, a display mode during the variable suspension period will be described with reference to FIG. 561 (a). The display mode during the variable suspension period is different from the display mode during the normal execution period (see FIG. 560 (b)) in that the display mode of the image NG and the display mode of the display area 805 are different. .. Other display modes are the same, and detailed description of the same display mode will be omitted.

More specifically, in the image NG, the image imitating the PUSH button 10317 is displayed in a size slightly reduced with respect to the display mode (see FIG. 560 (b)) during the normal execution period. Although detailed description is omitted, when a command for indicating that the present is a variable suspension period is output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the PUSH button 10317 is pressed on the display control device 114. As a control for displaying the imitated image, it is configured to execute a control to make the scale smaller than the normal time (for example, the scale ratio is 100% in the normal time and the scale ratio is 90% in the variable interruption). ing.

With this configuration, it is possible to easily set a display different from the display mode during the normal execution period without using dedicated image data for indicating that the variable suspension period is in progress. The amount of image data can be reduced. Further, since the display mode of the image NG is changed by changing the scale of the image imitating the PUSH button 10317, the display mode during the variable suspension period and the display mode during the normal execution period are relative to each other. It is possible to make it easier for a player who is playing a game to the extent that it can be discriminated to recognize that the current period is a variable suspension period based on the display mode of the image NG, rather than other players. It is possible to add value to a player who has been doing this for a long time.

In addition, the characters "Still hitting repeatedly !!" are displayed in the display area 805. With this configuration, even if the display mode of the second effect is not variable for a predetermined period (the period until the internal value is updated), the effect mode of the second effect can be changed for the player. The operating means (PUSH button 10317) can be enthusiastically operated in order to make it operate.

As described above, in the display mode of the image NG and the display mode of the display area 805 described with reference to FIG. 561 (a), the staging mode of the second staging cannot be changed at present, but the staging period staging It corresponds to a suggestion mode for suggesting to the player that the internal value is updated during the remaining period, in other words, the mode of the second effect can be changed after a while.

In the 25th embodiment, it is determined whether or not the current internal value is the same as the upper limit value set for the continuous striking period effect during execution (whether or not it is small), and it is determined that the current internal value is not the same (small). In, it is determined that it is a variable interruption period, and the suggestion mode shown in FIG. 561 (a) is displayed. For example, the current internal value is the upper limit value set for the continuous striking period effect during execution. The above-mentioned suggestion mode may be displayed even in a part of the case where it is determined to be the same as the above. As a result, even when the effect mode of the second effect is changed to the display mode corresponding to the upper limit value, the player is enthusiastically expected that the effect mode of the second effect is further changed. The operating means (PUSH button 10317) can be operated. In this case, when the current internal value is not the same as the upper limit value set for the continuous striking period effect being executed, the current internal value is the same as the upper limit value set for the continuous striking period effect being executed. It is preferable to configure it so that the above-mentioned suggestion mode is more easily displayed than in a certain case. As a result, it is possible to prevent the degree of expectation when the suggestion mode is displayed, that is, the degree of expectation that the effect mode of the second effect will be changed significantly in the future.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, in the 25th embodiment, it is determined that the current internal value is the same as the upper limit value set for the continuous striking period effect during execution, and the effect of the second effect is achieved. When the mode is changed to the display mode corresponding to the internal value, it is possible to execute the upper limit suggestion effect for suggesting to the player that the effect mode of the second effect is not changed any more in this continuous striking period effect. It is configured in. In this upper limit suggestion effect, the characters "Maybe no more energy is accumulated !?" are displayed in the display area 805, and as the display mode of the image NG, the PUSH button 10317 is further pressed than the display mode during the variable interruption period. A display mode in which the imitated image is reduced (for example, a scale ratio of 50%) is set. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from unnecessarily operating the PUSH button 10317.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned upper limit suggestion effect may be configured to be feasible even in a part when it is determined that the current internal value is different from the upper limit value set for the continuous striking period effect being executed. With this configuration, even when the upper limit suggestion effect is executed, there is a possibility that the effect mode of the second effect can be changed based on the operation to the operating means. On the other hand, it is possible to create an unexpected effect. In this case, if the current internal value is the same as the upper limit value set for the continuous striking period effect being executed, the current internal value is the same as the upper limit value set for the continuous striking period effect being executed. It is preferable to configure it so that the above-mentioned upper limit suggestion effect can be easily executed as compared with the case without it. As a result, it is possible to prevent the reliability when the upper limit suggestion effect is executed, that is, the reliability in which the effect mode of the second effect is not changed significantly in the future.

Next, with reference to FIG. 561 (b), the display content displayed when the player does not operate the operating means (PUSH button 10317) during the continuous striking period effect will be described. FIG. 561 (b) schematically shows a display mode when the player has never operated the operating means (PUSH button 10317) in a state where 4 seconds have passed since the continuous striking period effect was executed. It is a figure.

As described above, in the 25th embodiment, a scenario for shifting (updating) the internal value according to the elapsed time from the setting of the operation valid period is set during the continuous striking effect, and the effect of the second effect is achieved. When the variable condition for changing the mode is satisfied, the staging mode of the second effect can be changed within the range up to the internal value determined according to the content of the set scenario at that time. It was composed. That is, when the operation validity period is set, the internal value is configured to be migrated (updated) regardless of the operation status for the actual operation means.

Then, when the difference between the actually displayed display value (variability indicated by the effect mode of the second effect) and the internal value is a predetermined value (3 in the present embodiment) or more, the continuous striking period effect is performed. It is configured to display a specific display mode (pressing promotion mode) as an effect mode (display mode). With this configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the effect mode (display value) of the second effect is easily variable when the PUSH button 10317 is operated. The PUSH button 10317 can be enthusiastically operated.

Further, in the present embodiment, the selection ratio of the scenario type set during the operation valid period is configured to be different depending on whether the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the continuous hitting effect is a big hit or a miss. There is. Therefore, when the continuous striking period effect is executed, the type of the scenario set for the continuous striking period effect is set based on the timing at which the above-mentioned pressing promotion mode is displayed without intentionally operating the PUSH button 10317. It is also possible to provide a novel playability of discriminating and predicting the result of the special symbol lottery based on the discriminating result.

Specifically, the content of the pressing promotion mode will be described specifically with reference to FIG. 561 (b). In contrast to the display mode (see FIG. The difference is that the characters "Please do" are displayed and the characters "Continuous hits !!" are displayed on the image NG, and the rest are the same. In this way, by setting the pressing promotion mode so as to have a slight difference from the display mode (see FIG. 560 (b)) during the continuous striking period production during the normal operation, the game is played for a long time. It is possible to add value to a player who is present.

In the example shown in FIG. 561 (b), since the PUSH button 10317 has not been pressed even once since the operation period effect was executed, the effect mode of the second effect (the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG). ) Is the initial state (0th stage), and the display mode of the character 801 is also the initial state (the same aura as the initial state).

Next, the effect content of the result effect executed after the continuous hitting period effect is completed will be described with reference to FIG. 562. FIG. 562 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode of a result effect in a continuous striking effect. This result production is a production that displays the production result according to the spirit (variable state of the second production) acquired during the continuous striking period production, and the special symbol lottery corresponding to the player is performed according to the production content. It suggests the result.

As shown in FIG. 562, when the result effect is executed, the character 801 attacks the target icon 806 on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the result for showing the effect result from the destroyed target icon 806. The effect of displaying the display 806 is executed. The example shown in FIG. 562 shows an example in which the result effect is executed in a state where the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG is increased to the fourth stage, and is displayed on the right side of the display screen during the continuous striking period effect. The fire gauge KG that has been displayed is continuously displayed, and the character 801 is also displayed in a display mode (fourth stage aura) corresponding to the number of gauges of the fire gauge KG. Then, the character "great chance" is displayed on the result display 806. Further, in the display area 803, the characters "attack with the accumulated spirit" are displayed as a guidance mode for guiding the production mode of the result effect.

With the above-mentioned display contents, it is possible to make the player understand in an easy-to-understand manner that the result effect is executed in the effect mode according to the energy (the number of gauges of the energy gauge KG) accumulated during the continuous striking period effect. Further, in the present embodiment, the upper limit value set during the continuous striking period effect is higher in the continuous striking effect corresponding to the special symbol variation in which the jackpot is won than in the continuous striking effect corresponding to the special symbol variation in which the jackpot is not won. It is configured so that it tends to be high (the variable amount tends to be large). Then, in the result production, the production mode (attack pattern of the character 801 and the display content of the result display 806a) is determined according to the spirit (the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG) accumulated during the continuous striking period production, not the lottery result of the special symbol. It is configured to decide.

With this configuration, the player is enthusiastically trying to increase the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG during the continuous striking period production (to change the production mode of the second production more). The PUSH button 10317 can be easily operated, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In the present embodiment, the effect mode of the result effect is determined according to the effect content of the continuous striking period effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it corresponds to the effect content of the continuous striking period effect. The result of the special symbol lottery to be performed may be determined in a complex manner to determine the production mode of the result production, or the production content during the continuous striking period production (the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG) and the continuous striking period production are set. It may be configured to determine the effect mode of the result effect based on the difference value between the upper limit value and the value.

In this case, for example, when the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG reaches the fourth stage during the continuous striking period production, it is determined whether the upper limit value is 4 or 5, and if the upper limit value is 4, the upper limit value is 4. It is determined that the PUSH button 10317 was actively operated during the continuous hitting period production, and the production result that is advantageous to the player (for example, the display of "great chance") is displayed. It is determined that the PUSH button 10317 is not actively operated during the period production, and the production result is more disadvantageous to the player than when the upper limit value is 4 (for example, the jackpot winning expectation degree rather than the "big chance". It may be configured to display the word "chance") indicating that is low. As a result, the player enthusiastically operates the PUSH button 10317 in order to increase the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG during the continuous striking period production (to change the production mode of the second production more). It can be made easy to make.

Further, a part of the effect mode of the result effect (for example, the display mode of the target icon 806) may be changed according to the number of operations to the operation means during the continuous striking period effect. In this way, regardless of the degree of increase in the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG, the player can enjoy purely operating the operating means by configuring the effect mode of the result effect to be variable depending on the number of operations to the operating means. Can be provided to. In the present embodiment, the effect mode of the result effect is determined according to the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG accumulated during the continuous striking period effect, but the effect of the result effect is based on other factors. The mode may be determined, and for example, the mode may be configured to determine the effect mode of the result effect based on the timing when the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG increases or the type of the set scenario. With this configuration, even if the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG accumulated during the continuous striking period production is the same, the production mode of the result production can be different, so that the production content of the result production can be different. It is possible to make it easier for the player to be interested.

Next, with reference to FIG. 563, the flow of the continuous striking effect in the 25th embodiment will be described. FIG. 563 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the relationship between the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) and the continuous striking effect. As shown in FIG. 563, in the present embodiment, when the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) is executed, the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) for a predetermined period is executed, and the predetermined symbol is specified. The result of the special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed after the special symbol change of the period is completed. By configuring so that the result of the special symbol lottery is displayed after the period in which the special symbol change is executed in this way, it is suppressed that a large number of special symbol lottery is executed in a short time.

In addition, in order to prevent the player from getting tired of the game while the special figure change is being executed, the variation effect corresponding to the change period of the special figure change is executed. , The result of the special symbol lottery can be predicted by the player before the result of the special symbol lottery is actually stopped and displayed based on the effect mode of the variation effect. .. By configuring the variable effect so that it can be executed in this way, it is possible to pay attention to the effect mode of the variable effect during the special figure variation period, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game.

In the present embodiment, as in the 23rd embodiment described above, a special figure of 2 seconds to 150 seconds is executed as a period in which the special figure change is executed according to the result of the special symbol lottery and the set gaming state. The variation period is configured to be selected, and FIG. 563 shows an example in which a variation time of 60 seconds is set as the special figure variation (see FIG. 563 (a)). When the special map fluctuation time of 60 seconds is set, the variation effect of 60 seconds, which is the same length as the special map fluctuation time, is executed (see FIG. 563 (b)). Since the contents of various control processes from the execution of the special symbol lottery to the execution of the variation effect are the same as those of the 23rd embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the flow of determining the effect mode of the variable effect will be briefly described. When the special symbol lottery (discrimination by the discrimination means) is executed by the main control device 110, the special symbol variation for showing the result of the special symbol lottery (dynamic display of the identification symbol for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means). ) Fluctuation pattern (dynamic display period) is selected. Then, a variation pattern command including at least information for indicating the selected variation pattern (dynamic display period) and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery (discrimination result of the discrimination means) is controlled by the voice lamp from the main control device 110. It is output to the device 113.

In the voice lamp control device 113, the variation pattern command is used as the variation effect pattern of the third symbol (identification information) to be variablely displayed (dynamically displayed) by the third symbol display device 81 based on the reception of the variation pattern command. The variation effect pattern of the period corresponding to the dynamic display period included in is determined, and the variation effect is executed. That is, the effect mode of various variation effects executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is determined based on the result of the special symbol lottery executed by the main control device 110, and the special symbol variation is started. The variable effect is executed at the same timing.

Then, based on the elapsed time of the special symbol variation (variation effect), the variation effect is executed in the effect mode corresponding to the predetermined effect mode of the variation effect. Further, a process of changing the effect mode when a variable condition of the effect mode (for example, an operation by a player to an operation means or a winning information command is received from the main control device 110) is satisfied during the execution of the variable effect. Is executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 563, a flow is shown when a variation effect pattern in which a continuous striking effect is executed for 20 seconds from the lapse of 10 seconds is determined as the variation effect for 60 seconds. In this continuous striking effect, the effect of each display mode described above is executed with reference to FIGS. 560 to 562, and the effect mode is based on the operation of the player on the operation means (PUSH button 10317). It is a production that can be changed.

The 20-second effect period in which this continuous striking effect is executed is the standby effect (waiting period (5 seconds) in which reference to FIG. 560 (a) is executed) and the continuous striking period effect (see FIGS. 560 (b) to 561 (b)). ) Is executed (10 seconds), and the standby effect (see FIG. 562) is executed (see FIG. 562). It is configured so that the operation valid period (10 seconds) in which the operation of the above is effectively determined is set.

Next, the flow of determining the effect mode of each effect executed in the continuous striking effect will be described. First, at the timing of determining the overall variation effect pattern, that is, at the start timing of the variation effect, the execution timing of the continuous striking effect and the effect period are determined. Further, the effect mode of the standby effect (see FIG. 560 (a)) and the effect mode at the time of executing the continuous striking period effect are also determined. That is, the above-mentioned effect mode is a predetermined effect mode before the continuous striking effect is executed.

Then, when the PUSH button 10317 is operated during the continuous striking period effect (during the operation valid period) and the variable condition of the effect mode is satisfied, the variable effect mode is determined and determined as the effect mode of the continuous striking period effect. The effect mode is displayed (see FIGS. 560 (b) and 561 (a)). Further, even when the variable condition of the effect mode is satisfied based on the elapsed time of the continuous striking period effect, the effect mode after the change is determined as the effect mode of the continuous striking period effect, and the determined effect mode is displayed (FIG. 561). See (b)). That is, the above-mentioned effect mode is an effect mode determined according to the variable condition established during the continuous striking period effect.

Finally, the flow of determining the production mode of the standby effect will be described. The effect mode of the standby effect is configured to be determined when the execution period ends and the wait period is set. Specifically, the effect mode according to the effect mode (the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG) at the end of the execution period is determined, and the effect according to the determined effect mode is executed for a certain period (5 seconds). .. That is, the effect mode of the standby effect is an effect mode determined at a predetermined timing in the continuous striking effect, and corresponds to the effect content (the effect content of the continuous striking period effect) until the standby effect is executed among the continuous striking effects. It becomes a production mode in which different contents are determined.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 563, the period in which the continuous striking effect is executed is composed of three periods, a waiting period, an execution period, and a result period. It may consist of two or more periods. In this case, for example, the waiting period and the execution period may be set repeatedly, and the operation valid period may be set a plurality of times in one continuous striking effect. In addition, it is possible to set a part of the period constituting the continuous striking effect, for example, an interval period in which a predetermined effect mode is set before the continuous striking effect is executed, between the execution period and the result period. It may be configured. By providing the interval period in this way, for example, as a result effect, not only the display effect using the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 but also the movable accessory effect using the decorative accessory possessed by the pachinko machine 10 can be produced. In the case of execution, it is possible to execute the preparatory process for the result effect during the interval period, and the result effect can be smoothly executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect mode of the result effect is determined at the timing when the execution period ends. Therefore, for example, the length of the execution period (operation valid period) during the execution of the continuous striking effect. Even when the process of shortening or extending the length) is executed, the effect mode of the result effect can be appropriately set.

Further, as shown in FIG. 563, in the present embodiment, the lengths of the execution period and the operation valid period are the same, but the operation valid period may be included in the execution period. For example, the operation valid period may be set 0.2 seconds after the execution period is set, or the operation valid period end timing may be set before the end timing of the execution period. You may. Further, the operation valid period may be set a plurality of times during the execution period.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 564 to 566, the operation content to the operating means during the continuous striking period effect in the 25th embodiment and the variable state of the effect mode of the second effect (variable number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG). Situation) and the relationship with.

In the 25th embodiment, the operation valid period is set during the continuous striking period effect, and when the player operates the PUSH button 10317 during the operation valid period, the operation is effectively determined. , A variable lottery is performed to determine whether or not to change the effect mode (display value indicating the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG) of the second effect, and when the winner is won in the variable lottery, the display value indicating the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG. Is configured to raise.

Further, the upper limit value in the continuous striking period effect is set based on the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery, and the display value is configured not to rise to a value larger than the upper limit value during the continuous striking period effect. In addition, the internal value that can be updated (increased) can be determined so that the maximum value becomes the upper limit according to the passage of time of the operation validity period, and when the variable condition of the display value is satisfied, that time point. It is configured to update (increase) the displayed value up to the internal value in.

In the 25th embodiment, the transition status (transition status) of the internal value updated (increased) during the operation validity period is managed in a scenario, and a plurality of internal value transition statuses are different. By setting one scenario type among the scenario types, the internal value is configured to be updated according to the elapse of the operation valid period according to the set scenario type.

Here, a detailed description will be described later, but in the 25th embodiment, as the type of scenario for updating the internal value, an even type “scenario 1” in which the internal value increases in proportion to the passage of time is used. The latter half period (6 to 10 seconds) of the operation valid period (10 seconds) is the latter half type "scenario 2" in which the internal value is more likely to increase than the first half period (1 to 5 seconds), and the operation valid period (10 seconds). ), The first half type "Scenario 3", in which the internal value is more likely to increase in the first half period (1 to 5 seconds) than in the second half period (6 to 10 seconds), and the internal value increases regardless of the passage of time. The descending random type "scenario 4" and the descending random type "scenario 4" are configured to be configurable. In this way, by configuring to set one scenario from a plurality of scenario types (scenario 1 to scenario 4) having different tendencies to shift (update) the internal value, the display value during the continuous striking period production. It is possible to have various variations in the degree of increase (variable degree) of (the effect mode of the second effect), and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the 25th embodiment, the internal value migration data (migration line) is created and created based on the determined scenario type, the upper limit of the display value, and the length of the operation validity period. It is configured to migrate (update) internal values based on the migration data. Therefore, even when setting different length periods as the operation valid period or determining various upper limit values based on the result of the special symbol lottery, the transition data corresponding to each pattern is prepared in advance. It is possible to reduce the amount of data used to execute the effect as compared with the case.

Furthermore, as described above, since the internal value migration data is created every time the operation validity period is set, additional conditions are easily set for the internal value migration content (update content). For example, an additional condition that makes the start timing for migrating (updating) the internal value different from the setting timing of the operation validity period, an additional condition that changes the scenario type in the middle stage, and migrating (updating) the internal value. ) Is provided for an additional condition for a predetermined period, but it is possible to easily create the migration data of the internal value of the content including the additional condition.

FIG. 564 is a diagram schematically showing an effect pattern during the continuous striking period effect when "scenario 1" is set as the scenario type and "4" is set as the upper limit value. As shown in FIG. 564, during the continuous striking period effect (10 seconds) as the continuous striking effect (see FIG. 564 (a)), the operation valid period is set for 10 seconds (see FIG. 564 (b)). Then, the internal migration data is set at the same time as the operation validity period is set, and the migration (update) of the internal value is started (see FIG. 564 (c)).

FIG. 564D is a diagram showing a state in which the operating means (PUSH button 10317) is pressed by the player, is turned on when the player presses the PUSH button 10317, and is turned off when the player releases the PUSH button 10317. It becomes. In the 25th embodiment, it is determined that the operation of the operating means by the player is executed at the timing when the player releases the PUSH button 10317 (the timing of transition from on to off), and the determination timing is determined. When the operation is within the valid period, a lottery for whether or not to change the display value is executed.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 564 (d), even if the player operates the operation means in a situation where the operation valid period is not set, for example, during the waiting period (5 seconds) in which the standby effect is executed. (The first operation timing in FIG. 564 (d)), the operation is not effectively determined, and a lottery for whether or not to change the display value is not performed.

In the 25th embodiment, the length of the operation valid period used for the continuous striking effect and the upper limit value of the display value at the timing of setting the effect pattern of the variation effect, that is, the timing when the corresponding special symbol variation is executed. And the scenario type indicating the internal value migration status are determined, and the process of creating the internal value migration data is executed based on the determined various contents.

In the example shown in FIG. 564, the scenario type "scenario 1" in which the internal value increases evenly with the passage of time is set, "4" is set as the upper limit value, and "10 seconds" is set as the operation valid period. Based on these settings, internal value transfer data that raises the internal value to "4" is created as internal value transfer data within 9 seconds from the start. As a result, the internal value rises evenly immediately after the operation validity period is set, the internal value reaches "1" after 2.25 seconds, and the internal value becomes "2" after 4.5 seconds. , And the internal value reaches "3" after 6.75 seconds, and the internal value reaches "4" after 9 seconds.

In this embodiment, the internal value transition data is created so that the internal value reaches the upper limit value with the remaining time of the operation valid period remaining at least for a predetermined period (1 second). .. With this configuration, the operation validity period after the internal value reaches the upper limit value is short, and the display value is raised to the upper limit value for the player who is enthusiastically operating the operation means. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation that cannot be done.

For the length of the remaining period from the time when this internal value is raised to the upper limit value to the end of the operation valid period, a predetermined fixed value (for example, 1 second) may be used, or a set scenario. A value corresponding to the type may be used, a value set at random may be used, or a value corresponding to the length of the operation valid period may be used. When the length of 1 is selected from a plurality of lengths as the length of the residual period in this way, the length of the residual period is one of the additional conditions when creating the internal value migration data. It may be configured to set.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 564 (c) to (e), the relationship between the internal value during the continuous striking period effect, the operation status of the PUSH button 10317, and the variable status of the display value will be described. Since the internal value has not reached "1" until 2.25 seconds have elapsed after the operation valid period is set (after the continuous striking period effect is executed), in the second and third button operations. The displayed value does not change. Then, in the fourth button operation executed after 2.25 seconds have elapsed, that is, in the state where the internal value has reached "1" (the display value can be changed), the display value is changed. Since the winner was lost in the variable lottery for determining whether or not (indicated by a cross in the figure), the displayed value does not change in this fourth button operation.

Next, the fifth button operation is executed after 2.25 seconds have elapsed, and at the timing before 4.5 seconds have elapsed, that is, at the timing when the internal value is "1", and the winner is won by the variable lottery ( Since it is indicated by a circle in the figure), the displayed value is changed from "0" to "1". Here, when the display value is changed from "0" to "1", the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG shown in FIG. 560 (a) is in the initial state (the state in which the spirit gauge KG is all displayed in black). ) To the state of the gauge number 1 (the state where only the bottom frame of the spirit gauge KG is displayed in white), and the display mode of the character 801 is shown in the initial state (FIG. 560 (a)). The aspect of the aura) is variably displayed as an aspect in which the aspect of the aura is increased by one step.

Here, since the internal value "1" and the display value "1" become the same value by the fifth button operation, even if the button operation is executed until the internal value is updated (increased). Since the display value cannot be increased, the display mode shown in FIG. 561 (a) is displayed. Since the internal value remains "1" when the sixth button operation is executed, the button operation is executed while the display mode shown in FIG. 561 (a) is displayed. Therefore, the displayed value is not changed. Further, in the 7th button operation, the internal value is set to be larger than the displayed value as in the 4th button operation described above, but the displayed value is different because the variable lottery is won. It cannot be changed.

Next, the eighth button operation is won by a variable lottery as in the fifth button operation, and the display value changes from "1" to "2". After that, the display value changes from "2" to "3" by the 10th button operation based on the transition of the internal value with the passage of time, the button operation timing, and the lottery result of the variable lottery, and the 11th time. The display value changes from "3" to "4" by operating the button of.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the internal value is updated (increased) based on the internal migration data, and the degree of variability (increased degree) of the displayed value within the operation valid period is limited by the internal value. Since it is configured, it is possible to easily change the display value over the entire operation validity period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display value from reaching the upper limit in the first half of the operation valid period, causing the player to perform unnecessary operations during the remaining period of the operation valid period, and reducing the motivation to play. can do. In addition, in order to prevent the display value from reaching the upper limit only in the first half of the operation validity period, it is difficult to establish a variable condition for varying the display value for operations on the operation means during the operation validity period. By configuring the above, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the displayed value does not reach the upper limit value during the operation valid period.

Next, with reference to FIG. 565, the effect content when the button operation content by the player is different from the example shown in FIG. 564 under the same conditions as the example shown in FIG. 564 described above will be described. do. FIG. 565 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the flow of the effect when the player does not enthusiastically operate the operation means during the continuous hitting effect. FIG. 565 differs from FIG. 564 described above in that the button operation content (see FIG. 565 (d)) and the variable status of the displayed value (see FIG. 565 (e)) are different, and are otherwise the same. Is. The detailed description of the same content will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 565 (d), if the player does not execute the button operation until 6.75 seconds have elapsed from the execution of the continuous striking period effect, the display value remains "0" and is inside. The value will change to "3". In this case, since the difference between the displayed value and the internal value is a predetermined value or more (3 or more), the display mode of the pressing promotion mode shown in FIG. 561 (b) is displayed. In this way, by displaying the display mode of the pressing promotion mode, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the display value is likely to be variable (increased) when the PUSH button 10317 is pressed. can.

Then, in the second button operation (button operation executed between 6.75 seconds and 9 seconds after the operation validity period is set), the variable lottery is won and the display value is from "0" to "2". Variable to. Here, in the present embodiment, the variable amount of the display value that can be changed by one button operation is configured so that the upper limit is two steps. Therefore, when the display value is changed based on the second button operation in which the internal value is "3", the display value is changed only from "0" to "2" which is increased by two steps. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easy for the player to enthusiastically operate the PUSH button 10317 a plurality of times during the continuous striking period production.

In the present embodiment, when the variable condition for changing the display value is satisfied (when the winner is won by the variable lottery), if there is a difference between the display value and the internal value in a plurality of stages, the above description is made. It is configured to change the display value up to the upper limit of the variable amount, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable amount of the display value to be changed by one button operation may be determined by lottery. .. With this configuration, even if there is a difference between the displayed value and the internal value in multiple stages, it is possible to change the display mode in only one stage by operating one button. It is possible to make it easier for the player to experience many events in which the display value is variable.

Next, with reference to FIG. 566, an effect pattern during the continuous striking period effect when the scenario type “scenario 2” in which the transition tendency of the internal value is the latter half type is set will be described. FIG. 566 is a diagram schematically showing an effect pattern during the continuous striking period effect when "scenario 2" is set as the scenario type and "4" is set as the upper limit value. Of the contents shown in FIG. 566, the same parts as those described above with reference to FIG. 564 will be omitted in detail.

When the scenario type "scenario 2" is set, the internal value transition data in which the internal value rises sharply in the latter half period is created as compared with the case where the scenario type "scenario 1" is set (see FIG. 564). To. In this embodiment, the period until the internal value shifts to 1 is 2.25 seconds regardless of the set scenario type. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from easily determining the scenario type set this time immediately after the continuous hitting period effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 566, when the degree of migration of the internal value indicated by the scenario internal value migration data increases exponentially, the operation is specifically performed while the player operates the operating means a plurality of times. While winning a variable lottery executed based on an operation on the means, the internal value may increase more than once. In the present embodiment, when the variable lottery is won, an upper limit is set for the display value that can be increased once. FIG. 566 shows an example in which "2" is set as the upper limit of increase of the display value. That is, even if the displayed value and the internal value deviate from each other, the displayed value can be increased by only two steps at the maximum by one variable display. Therefore, when the variable lottery is won by the 11th button operation (operation to the PUSH button 10317), the internal value at that time has risen to "4", but the display value is "1". , The display value becomes "3".

With this configuration, unless the player operates the operating means (PUSH button 10317) a plurality of times during the continuous striking period production, it is possible to make it difficult to raise the display value to the upper limit value. , You can play the game enthusiastically.

<About the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device in the 25th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 567 to 571, the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 25th embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of the 25th embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the 23rd embodiment described above in that a part of the ROM 222 configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 and a part of the RAM 223 configuration are different. It differs in that it is set, and is the same in other respects. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of ROM 222 will be described with reference to FIG. 567. FIG. 567 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 567, in the 25th embodiment, the internal scenario table 222sa, the push lottery table 222sb, and the upper limit value selection table are used for the ROM 222 of the 23rd embodiment described above (see FIG. 495 (a)). It differs in that 222sc and the difference upper limit value selection table 222sd are added, and is the same except for the addition. The detailed description of the same content will be omitted.

The internal scenario table 222sa is a data table that is referred to when selecting the migration tendency of the internal value during the continuous striking period effect, and is configured to be able to select a plurality of scenario types having different internal value migration tendencies. There is. This internal scenario table 222sa is used in the basic staging mode selection process 25 (see Z4581 in FIG. 579) executed in the staging mode selection process 25 (see Z4353 in FIG. 578) executed for setting the variable staging. When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern of the above is included in the continuous striking effect (Z6701: Yes in FIG. 579), it is referred to for setting the effect mode of the continuous striking effect (see Z6702 in FIG. 579). Then, using the scenario type selected with reference to the internal scenario table 222sa, internal migration data indicating the transition status of the internal value during the operation valid period set during the continuous striking effect is created.

Here, the contents specified in the internal scenario table 222sa will be described with reference to FIG. 568 (a). FIG. 568 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the internal scenario table 222sa. As shown in FIG. 568 (a), in the internal scenario table 222sa, four types of scenarios (scenario 1 to scenario 4) are shown, the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the current fluctuation pattern, and the acquired scenario effect counter. It is defined in association with the value of 223sa.

Specifically, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, the value of the scenario effect counter 223sa is "scenario 1" in the range of "0 to 39" and "scenario" in the range of "40 to 69". "2" is defined as "Scenario 3" in the range of "70 to 89", and "Scenario 4" is defined in the range of "90 to 98". If the result of the special symbol lottery is out of order, "Scenario 1" is in the range of "0 to 59" and "Scenario 2" is in the range of "60 to 79". , "Scenario 3" is defined in the range of "80 to 89", and "Scenario 4" is defined in the range of "90 to 98".

Here, the contents of each scenario type specified in the internal scenario table 222sa will be described. As described above with reference to FIG. 564, "scenario 1" shows a transition tendency in which the internal value increases (variable) evenly with the lapse of the operation valid period. That is, when this "scenario 1" is selected, the continuous striking period effect that can evenly increase (variable) the display value over the entire range of the operation valid period is executed. Therefore, the display value reaches the upper limit value during the first half of the operation valid period, and the display value does not increase (variable) for a long time even though the PUSH button 10317 is operated multiple times. , It is possible to prevent the player's motivation to operate the operating means from being reduced.

Next, “Scenario 2” shows a transition tendency in which the internal value is more likely to increase (variable) in the latter half period than in the first half period of the operation valid period, as described above with reference to FIG. 566. That is, when this "scenario 2" is selected, the continuous striking period effect that makes it easier to raise (variable) the display value in the latter half period than in the first half period of the operation valid period is executed. Therefore, it is possible to operate the operation means while giving the player a sense of expectation until the end of the operation validity period. Further, in the present embodiment, since the scenario type is selected to determine the transition tendency of the internal value, as described above with reference to FIG. 566, until the internal value reaches "1". Is configured to follow the same course as "Scenario 1", and the update status of the internal value after that is configured to be created according to the tendency of "Scenario 2". Therefore, even when "Scenario 2" is selected, it is possible to prevent the display value from being unchanged for a long time during the first half of the operation valid period.

In addition, by configuring the process until the internal value reaches a predetermined value (for example, "1") to be the same as that of other scenario types, immediately after the operation valid period is set (the continuous striking period effect is produced). Immediately after it is executed), it is possible to prevent the scenario type adopted for this continuous striking period production from being specified.

"Scenario 3" shows the opposite tendency to the above-mentioned "Scenario 2", and shows a transition tendency in which the internal value is more likely to increase (variable) in the first half period than in the second half period of the operation valid period. .. That is, when this "scenario 3" is selected, the continuous striking period effect that makes it easier to raise (variable) the display value in the first half period than in the second half period of the operation valid period is executed. Therefore, the display value tends to increase immediately after the continuous hitting period effect is executed, and a large value (for example, "5") may be set as the upper limit value set in the continuous hitting period effect. It can be made easier to remind people.

Even when creating internal migration data based on this "scenario 3", it is configured to follow the same process as "scenario 1" until the internal value reaches "1", and the internal after that. The value update status may be configured to be created according to the tendency of "scenario 3". With this configuration, the process until the internal value reaches a predetermined value (for example, "1") is the same as that of other scenario types, and immediately after the operation valid period is set (continuous hitting period production is executed). Immediately after it is done), it is possible to prevent the scenario type adopted for this continuous hitting period production from being specified.

Finally, unlike other scenarios, "scenario 4" shows a transition tendency in which the internal value repeatedly rises and falls as the operation validity period elapses. That is, while the above-mentioned "scenario 1" to "scenario 3" are shown only by the tendency that the internal value increases with the lapse of the operation valid period, "scenario 4" is the operation valid period. There is a big difference in that the internal value may decrease with the passage of time.

That is, when this "scenario 4" is selected, the second timing (for example, 3.5 seconds) after the first timing of the operation valid period (for example, when 3 seconds have elapsed) and after the first timing. (At the elapsed time), the internal value will be smaller. Therefore, the degree of increase in the display value can be greatly different depending on the operation timing of the PUSH button 10317 during the continuous striking period production, so that it is difficult for the player to predict the upper limit value set in the continuous striking period production. Can be done.

When the above-mentioned "scenario 4" is selected, a state in which the internal value is smaller (lower) than the displayed value may occur. That is, in a state where the internal value changes to "3", the variable condition of the display value (winning of the variable lottery) is satisfied, and after the display value is changed to "3", the internal value becomes "2". May change to. In this case, the continuous striking period effect may be executed in a special mode suggesting that the internal value is smaller than the displayed value. As a result, it is possible to make the player predict that the internal migration data based on the "scenario 4" is set in the continuous hitting period production this time. Further, even when the internal value is smaller than the displayed value, the same mode as when the displayed value and the internal value are the same (see FIG. 561 (a)) may be displayed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict that the internal migration data based on the "scenario 4" is set in the continuous hitting period production this time.

As shown in FIG. 568 (a), in the 25th embodiment, if the selection ratio of each scenario type is different depending on the result (big hit, miss) of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the variable effect in which the continuous hit effect is executed. If you win the jackpot, the selection rate of "Scenario 1" is about 40%, the selection rate of "Scenario 2" is about 30%, the selection rate of "Scenario 3" is about 20%, and "Scenario 3". It is stipulated that the selection rate of "4" is about 10%, and if the jackpot is not won (if the winner is out of the game), the selection rate of "Scenario 1" is about 60% and the selection rate of "Scenario 2" is selected. It is stipulated that the ratio is about 20%, the selection ratio of "scenario 3" is about 10%, and the selection ratio of "scenario 4" is about 10%.

In other words, "Scenario 2" and "Scenario 3" are configured so that "Scenario 2" and "Scenario 3" are more easily selected when the jackpot is won than when the jackpot is not won (when the jackpot is won). Is configured to be difficult to select. With this configuration, the selected scenario type is determined by predicting the transition status of the internal value based on the internal migration data set during the continuous striking period effect, and the continuous striking effect is based on the determination result. Can provide the enjoyment of predicting the outcome of the corresponding special symbol draw before the end of.

In addition, it is stipulated that the selection rate of "Scenario 1" is lower when the jackpot is won than when the winner is lost, but the selection rate of "Scenario 1", which is defined as low, is the highest among each scenario type. Since it is stipulated that the selection ratio is set, every time the continuous hitting effect is executed, the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery may be easily grasped before the continuous hitting effect ends. Can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, the same scenario type can be selected depending on whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit or not, and the result of the special symbol lottery is obtained only by the selected scenario type. Although it is configured to be difficult to identify, the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific lottery result (for example, for example) at the lowest selection ratio (for example, 0.5%) in each scenario type. , A scenario type (for example, "scenario V") that can be selected only in the case of a big hit) may be specified.

With this configuration, when it is determined that "Scenario V" has been selected, the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery can be grasped before the continuous hitting effect ends, so that the continuous hitting period It is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting which scenario type is selected in the production. In addition, when the "scenario V" that can be selected only when it is a specific lottery result is provided in this way, the internal value of the scenario so that the internal migration data clearly different from other scenario types is created. It is good to specify the transition tendency of, for example, the restriction tendency that the internal value rises only to a predetermined value (for example, "2") regardless of the set upper limit value, the invalid tendency that the internal value does not rise at all, and the operation valid. Regardless of the passage of time, it is preferable to configure the system so that the internal value always shows a transition tendency such as an upper limit showing an upper limit. Thereby, when the internal value is changed based on the internal migration data created based on the "scenario V", it is possible to make it easy for the player to predict the selected scenario type.

In the 25th embodiment, as shown in FIG. 568 (a), the selection ratio of the scenario type is configured to be different based on the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery, that is, whether or not the jackpot is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the selection ratio of the scenario type may be different based on the length of the operation valid period, or the length of the effect period set for the corresponding variable effect may be set. It may be configured so that the selection ratio of the scenario type is different based on (the length of the fluctuation time of the special symbol), or based on the result of the winning information (look-ahead information) of the acquired special symbol hold. It may be configured so that the selection ratio of the scenario type is different. Further, if the pachinko machine 10 has a probability setting function that can set a value of 1 from a plurality of values having different probabilities as the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol (so-called pachinko machine 10 with a setting function), it is set. The selection ratio of the scenario type may be different depending on the value (set value) indicating the jackpot probability. That is, by grasping the selected scenario type, it is sufficient to make it possible to give a privilege that is advantageous to the player.

The pressed lottery table 222sb is a variable lottery for determining whether or not to change the display value (display mode) when the player operates the PUSH button 10317 (operation means) within the operation valid period during the continuous hitting effect. It is a data table used to execute, and is a lottery corresponding to the result (big hit, miss) of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the continuous hitting effect during execution and the value of the acquired lottery effect counter 223sb. The results (winning and losing) are specified respectively. When the result of the variable lottery executed using this pressed lottery table 222sb is a winning, the variable condition of the display value is satisfied, the display value can be changed, and the result of the variable lottery is out of order. In some cases, the display value cannot be changed without satisfying the variable condition of the display value.

In this way, when the operation of the player to the operating means is effectively determined during the operation valid period, the variable lottery is executed based on the operation, and the display mode (display value) is based on the variable lottery result. ) Is configured to satisfy the variable condition, so that the state in which the display value can be changed can be set irregularly, so that the display is displayed at a timing unexpected to the player. The aspect can be easily changed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Here, with reference to FIG. 568 (b), the contents specified in the push lottery table 222sb will be described. FIG. 568 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the pressed lottery table 222sb. As shown in FIG. 568 (b), the push lottery table 222sb shows "winning" and "missing" as the lottery results, the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the current fluctuation pattern, and the acquired lottery effect counter 223sb. It is specified in association with the value.

Specifically, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, the value of the lottery effect counter 223sb is "winning" in the range of "0 to 29" and "out of" in the range of "30 to 98". Are stipulated respectively. If the result of the special symbol lottery is out of order, the value of the lottery effect counter 223sb is defined as "winning" in the range of "0 to 19" and "out of order" in the range of "20 to 98". Has been done.

That is, it is configured so that when the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is a big hit, it is easier to win in the push lottery than when it is out of order. With this configuration, it is possible to easily predict the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery by the variable frequency of the display value during the continuous striking period production, and the player is interested in the production content during the continuous striking period production. Can be made easier to hold.

In this embodiment, when the operation to the operating means is effectively determined during the operation valid period during the continuous striking period effect, the press lottery table 222sb is always referred to to determine whether or not the variable condition is satisfied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a measuring means capable of measuring the number of consecutive deviations in the variable lottery executed by referring to the pressed lottery table 222sb is provided, and the measuring means is provided. When the measurement result by the above reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), the variable lottery may be configured to facilitate winning. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the effect of the continuous striking period effect is reduced without continuously winning the variable lottery.

Further, the winning probability of the variable lottery may be changed based on the number of winnings of the variable lottery within one operation valid period and the length of the remaining period of the operation valid period. For example, the operation valid period may be changed. When the remaining period of the variable lottery is a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) or more and the number of times the variable lottery is won reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times), the probability of winning the variable lottery may be low. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display value from reaching the upper limit value in a state where a large amount of the remaining operation valid period remains. Further, when the remaining period of the operation valid period is less than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) and the number of winnings of the variable lottery is a specific number of times (for example, 0 times), the winning probability of the variable lottery becomes high. It may be configured as follows. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the effect of the continuous striking period effect is reduced without continuously winning the variable lottery.

The upper limit value selection table 222sc is a data table that is referred to when setting the upper limit of the display value that can be displayed during the continuous hitting period effect, and is the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery and the acquired upper limit value effect counter 223sc. The upper limit is set in the range of "2" to "5" in correspondence with the value of.

This upper limit value is a display value displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the continuous striking period effect, specifically, the upper limit of the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG and the display mode of the character 801 (see FIG. 560). Is shown. Then, in the case where the big hit is won in the corresponding special symbol lottery, a large value (for example, "5") is more likely to be selected as the upper limit value than in the case where the big hit is not won. With this configuration, the more the display value is changed to a larger value during the continuous hitting period production, the higher the expectation that the corresponding special symbol lottery will be a big hit can be raised. It is possible to enthusiastically play the game so that the displayed value rises.

Here, with reference to FIG. 569 (a), the contents specified in the upper limit value selection table 222sc will be described. FIG. 569 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the upper limit value selection table 222sc. As shown in FIG. 569 (a), in the upper limit value selection table 222sc, the upper limit values "2" to "5" are acquired as the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the current fluctuation pattern (hit / fail judgment result). It is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223sc for the upper limit value.

Specifically, when the result of the special symbol lottery (win / fail judgment result) is a big hit, the value of the upper limit value effect counter 223sc is in the range of "0 to 39", and the upper limit value "5" is "40 to". "4" is defined in the range of "89", and the upper limit value "3" is defined in the range of "90 to 98". If the result of the special symbol lottery (win / fail judgment result) is out of order, the value of the upper limit value effect counter 223sc is in the range of "0-9" and the upper limit value "5" is "10-69". "4" is specified in the range, the upper limit value "3" is specified in the range of "70 to 89", and "2" is specified in the range of "90 to 98".

That is, when the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery (win / fail judgment result) is a big hit, the upper limit value "5" is set in about 40% of the hits, but when the win / fail judgment result is out of order. In, the upper limit value "5" is set only in about 10% of the cases. Therefore, when the display value rises (variable) to "5" during the continuous striking period production, the expectation that the corresponding special symbol lottery is a big hit can be increased, so that the display value is displayed to the player. Can be enthusiastically played so that

Further, as described above, in the 25th embodiment, the degree of increase in the display value during the continuous striking period effect is regulated not only by the set upper limit value but also by the internal value that changes according to the internal migration data. is doing. Therefore, even during the continuous striking period production in which the upper limit value "5" is set, the display value does not change to "5" until the internal value reaches "5". Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the game while expecting the display value to rise to "5" during the entire period of the continuous striking period production.

The difference upper limit value selection table 222sd is a data table that is referred to when a specified value (difference upper limit value) for the difference between the internal value and the display value is selected. This difference upper limit value is used when determining whether or not to display the pressing promotion mode (see FIG. 561 (b)) and when determining the amount of increase (variable amount) when the display value is increased (variable). Used for.

Here, with reference to FIG. 569 (b), the contents specified in the difference upper limit value selection table 222sd will be described. FIG. 569 (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the difference upper limit value selection table 222sd. In this difference upper limit value selection table 222sd, the difference upper limit values "2" to "4" are the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the current fluctuation pattern (win / fail judgment result) and the acquired difference value effect counter 223sd. It is specified in association with the value.

Specifically, when the result of the special symbol lottery (win / fail judgment result) is a big hit, the difference upper limit value "4" is set to "5" in the range where the value of the difference value effect counter 223sd is "0 to 4". The difference upper limit value "3" is defined in the range of "to 64", and the difference upper limit value "2" is defined in the range of "65 to 98". If the result of the special symbol lottery (win / fail judgment result) is out of the range, the value of the difference value effect counter 223sd is in the range of "0 to 59", and the difference upper limit value "3" is "60 to 98". "2" is specified in the range of.

That is, only when the result of the special symbol lottery (win / fail judgment result) is a big hit, "4" can be selected as the difference upper limit value, and the difference upper limit value "3" has the same ratio regardless of the win / fail judgment result. It is configured to be selected at (about 60%), and the difference upper limit value "2" is configured so that it is more difficult to be selected when the hit / fail determination result is a big hit than when it is out of order.

With this configuration, for example, when the display value is variably displayed during the continuous striking period production, the display value increases by 4 steps (for example, the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG increases from "0" to "4". ), The effect is equivalent to notifying that the jackpot has been won in the corresponding special symbol lottery. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the value of the display value displayed during the continuous striking period effect but also in the degree of variability of the display value, so that the effect of the continuous striking period effect can be further enhanced. Can be enhanced.

In the 25th embodiment, the value used for determining whether or not to display the pressing promotion mode (difference value between the internal value and the display value) and the display value are changed by one variable display. The variable amount (range) that can be used is the difference upper limit value selected in the difference upper limit value selection table 222sd, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to refer to different values. In this case, the display value is changed by a selection table in which the value (difference value between the internal value and the display value) used for determining whether or not to display the pressing promotion mode can be selected, and one variable display. It may be configured to provide a selection table in which a variable amount (range) that can be selected can be selected.

Further, in the present embodiment, the difference upper limit value determined with reference to the difference upper limit value selection table 222sd is configured to be used for the entire period of the continuous striking period effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the continuous striking period effect is not limited to this. The difference upper limit value may be changed according to the degree of progress, for example, the passage of time of the continuous striking period effect, the display content of the displayed value, and the transition state of the internal value.

Next, with reference to FIG. 570, the contents specified in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 25th embodiment will be described. FIG. 570 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the 25th embodiment. The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 25th embodiment has a scenario effect counter 223sa with respect to the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 23rd embodiment described above (see FIG. 495 (b)). , Lottery effect counter 223sb, upper limit value effect counter 223sc, difference value effect counter 223sd, upper limit value storage area 223e, difference upper limit value storage area 223sf, upper limit value storage area 223se, and difference upper limit value storage. The difference is that the area 223sf, the internal migration data storage area 223sg, the display value storage area area 223sh, and the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si are added, and the other points are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The scenario effect counter 223sa, the lottery effect counter 223sb, the upper limit value effect counter 223sc, and the difference value effect counter 223sd are counters for updating the random number value referred to when selecting the corresponding effect effect mode. Therefore, it is composed of a loop counter whose value is updated in the range of "0 to 99". The values of the various counters are updated in the counter update process (see Z3113 in FIG. 518) executed in the main process (see FIG. 518) of the voice lamp control device 113. Further, it is configured to be updated even if the remaining period generated when the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed is used. In the 25th embodiment, a process of selecting various production modes is performed by the time the main process (see FIG. 518) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed a plurality of times (until the counter update process is repeatedly executed). It is configured to run. That is, if there is only one counter for updating the random value referred to when selecting the effect mode, the same random value will be used when selecting various effect modes. , There is a problem that the combination of the selected production modes becomes monotonous. Further, in order to solve the problem, when a configuration is used in which the process of selecting the effect mode is executed only once each time the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, a plurality of effect modes are used. It takes a long time to select, and there is a new problem that smooth production cannot be performed.

On the other hand, in the 25th embodiment, when the effect mode is selected according to the number of effect mode selection processes that can be executed when the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed once. A counter that can update the referenced random number value is provided. As a result, different random number values can be used in the selection process of the effect mode that can be executed when the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed once, so that the combination of the selected effect modes can be varied. It can be held and the effect of production can be enhanced. Further, since a plurality of effect modes can be selected in one main process of the voice lamp control device 113, the effect can be smoothly executed (set).

The upper limit value storage area 223se is a storage area for temporarily storing the upper limit value of the display value that can be displayed during the continuous striking period effect, and the upper limit value selected by referring to the upper limit value selection table 222sc is stored. Will be done. Then, the internal migration data is created using the stored upper limit value. Further, when it is determined that the displayed value and the internal value at that time are the same when the variable condition of the displayed value is satisfied, it is based on the difference between the stored upper limit value and the internal value at that time. It is referred to when selecting the mode. After that, the stored value is cleared at the end timing of the continuous striking effect.

The difference upper limit storage area 223sf is a storage area for temporarily storing the difference upper limit value, which is a specified value for the difference between the internal value and the display value, and refers to the difference upper limit value selection table 222sd described above. The selected difference upper limit is temporarily stored. Then, when the variable condition of the display value is satisfied and the display value is variable (increased), the difference upper limit value stored for determining the variable amount of the display value is read out. Further, when determining whether or not to display the display mode of the pressing promotion mode, the difference upper limit value is read out as a determination criterion. After that, the stored value is cleared at the end timing of the continuous striking effect.

The internal migration data storage area 223sg is a storage area for temporarily storing the internal migration data in order to show the migration content of the internal value during the continuous striking period effect, and is a process for selecting the effect mode of the variable effect. , The created internal migration data is stored. Then, it is read at the start timing (setting timing of the operation valid period), and the internal value is migrated (updated) with the contents shown in the internal migration data. After that, the stored data is cleared at the end timing of the continuous striking effect.

The display value storage area 223sh is a storage area for temporarily storing the display value during the continuous striking period effect, that is, the value corresponding to the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. It is a storage area for storing the value already notified to the player. Then, it is read out when the variable condition of the display value is satisfied, and the display mode according to the internal value or the difference value from the upper limit value is determined. After that, the stored value is cleared at the end timing of the continuous striking effect.

The continuous striking effect setting flag 223si is a flag for managing the execution status of the continuous striking effect, and is configured to be able to determine the execution status of the continuous striking effect based on the setting status of the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si.

Here, the contents of the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si will be described with reference to FIG. 571. FIG. 571 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si. As shown in FIG. 571, the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si has a configuration in which six types of states of 00H to 05H can be set. As described above with reference to FIG. 563, in the 25th embodiment, it is determined that the continuous striking effect is executed as the variable effect as the execution status of the continuous striking effect, and "before the start" where the continuous striking effect is not executed. That is, the situation in which the variation effect in which the continuous hitting effect is executed is set in the effect mode selection process 25 (see Z4353 in FIG. 578) executed at the start timing of the special symbol variation, and the standby of the continuous hitting effects. The internal values are "Waiting", which is the situation where the effect is being executed, "Running", which is the situation where the continuous striking period effect is being executed, and "Result", which is the situation where the result effect is being executed. , "Special", which is a situation larger than the sum of the difference upper limit value and the display value, and "-", which is a situation where it is not certain that the repeated hitting effect will be executed, can be distinguished. There is.

As shown in FIG. 571, the value "00H" of the continuous hitting effect setting flag 223si high corresponds to the situation of "-", and "01H" corresponds to the situation of "before the start", and "02H". "Responds to the" waiting "situation," 03H "corresponds to the" running "situation," 04H "corresponds to the" result "situation, and" 05H ". "Corresponds to the" special "situation. By configuring the situation related to the continuous striking effect to be discriminable in this way, it is possible to easily change the effect mode (display mode) in each situation at various timings according to the effect result and the game result in other situations. can.

<Regarding the control content of the voice lamp control device in the 25th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 572 to 579, the content of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 25th embodiment will be described. The control processing content executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 25th embodiment is an effect update process with respect to the control processing content executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 24th embodiment described above. Instead of 24 (see Z3181 in FIG. 550), the effect update process 25 (Z3191 in FIG. 572) is replaced with the press detection process (Z3112 in FIG. 524), and the press detection process 25 (Z3192 in FIG. 576) is used. The difference is that the effect mode selection process 25 (Z4353 in FIG. 578) is executed instead of the selection process (Z4313 in FIG. 536), and the other processes are the same. The detailed description of the same content will be omitted. For the control processing content executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 24th embodiment described above, refer to the control processing content executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 23rd embodiment described above. Therefore, when explaining the content of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 25th embodiment, it is appropriately executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 23rd embodiment described above. The control processing content to be performed is used.

First, the contents of the staging update process 25 (Z3191) will be described with reference to FIG. 572. FIG. 572 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect update process 25 (Z3191). The effect update process 25 (Z3191) is configured to execute a process (Z3271) for updating various timers with respect to the passage of time of the effect for the effect update process 24 (see Z3181 in FIG. 550) described above. The difference is that the point and the process of the continuous striking effect process (Z3272) are added, and the other points are the same. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the continuous striking effect processing (Z3272) will be described with reference to FIG. 573. FIG. 573 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous striking effect processing (Z3272). In this continuous striking effect processing (Z3272), various controls in the continuous striking effect are executed.

When the continuous striking effect processing (Z3272) is executed, it is first determined whether the setting status of the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si is "00H", that is, whether or not any setting related to the continuous striking effect is made (Z6501). If it is determined to be "00H" in the processing of Z6501 (Z6501), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not "00H", that is, some information about the continuous striking effect is set (Z6501: No), then whether the setting status of the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si is "01H". That is, when it is determined whether the variable effect in which the continuous stroke effect is set is being executed and the start timing of the continuous stroke effect has not yet arrived (Z6502), and it is determined to be "01H". (Z6502: Yes) Next, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the continuous striking effect (Z6503).

In the Z6503 process, among the various timers updated in the effect update process 25 (see Z3191 in FIG. 572), the elapsed time of the variable effect starts the continuous hitting effect based on the value of the timer that updates the elapsed time of the variable effect. It is determined whether it is the timing. When it is determined that it is the start timing in the processing of Z6503 (Z6503: Yes), the setting status of the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si is set to "02H", that is, the setting status indicating the waiting period of the continuous striking effect (Z6504). The start of the continuous striking effect is set (Z6505), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z6503, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the continuous striking effect (Z6503: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

In the processing of Z6502, if it is determined that the setting status of the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si is not "01H" (Z6502: No), then it is determined whether the setting status of the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si is "02H". (Z6506), if it is determined to be "02H" (Z6506: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the continuous striking period (Z6507), and if it is determined to be the start timing of the continuous striking period (Z6507). : Yes), the timer value corresponding to the operation valid period is set to the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223qv (Z6508), and the setting status of the continuous hit effect setting flag 223si is set to "03H", that is, the continuous hit period (execution period). It is set to the setting status indicating that (Z6509), the internal migration data stored in the internal value migration data storage area 223sg is read (Z6510), and the internal value is migrated based on the read data (internal value migration data). Is started (Z6511).

Further, in the processing of Z6506, if it is determined that the setting status of the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si is not "02H" (Z6506: No), then the second continuous striking effect processing is executed (Z6512), and then this End the process.

Next, the contents of the second continuous striking effect processing (Z6512) will be described with reference to FIG. 574. FIG. 574 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second continuous striking effect process (Z6512). In this second continuous striking effect processing (Z6512), various processes are executed when the setting status of the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si is "03H".

When the second continuous striking effect processing (Z6512) is executed, first, it is determined whether the setting status of the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si is "03H" (Z6531), and if it is determined to be "03H" (Z6531). : Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223qv is 0 (Z6532).

In the processing of Z6532, when the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223qv is not 0, that is, when it is determined that the operation valid period is still in progress (Z6532: No), the data in the internal migration data storage area 223 sg and the continuous hit valid period The current internal value (A) is calculated (Z6533) based on the value of the timer 223qv, the display value (B) stored in the display value storage area 233sh is read out (Z6534), and the difference upper limit value storage area 223sf is read. Read the difference upper limit value (C) stored in (Z6535).

Then, it is determined whether the internal value (A) is larger than the total value of the display value (B) and the difference upper limit value (C) (Z6536), and if it is determined to be larger (Z6536: Yes), the button is pressed. A display command for prompting is set (Z6537), "05H" is set in the setting status of the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si, and this process is terminated.

Here, the display command set by the processing of Z6537 executes an effect of urging the player to press the PUSH button 10317 as shown in FIG. 561 (b).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223qv is 0 in the processing of Z6532 (Z6532: Yes), the setting status of the continuous hit effect setting flag 223si is set to "04H" (Z6539), and the display value is set. The display value stored in the storage area 223sh is read (Z6540), a display command for indicating the effect mode of the result effect corresponding to the read display value is set (Z6541), and this process is terminated.

Further, in the processing of Z6531, if it is determined that the setting status of the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si is not "03H" (Z6531: No), then the third continuous striking effect processing is executed (Z6542), and this processing is performed. finish.

Here, the contents of the third continuous striking effect processing (Z6542) will be described with reference to FIG. 575. FIG. 575 is a flowchart showing the contents of the third continuous striking effect process (Z6542). In this third continuous striking effect (Z6542), the setting status of the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si is "04H", that is, various processes for ending the continuous striking effect are executed.

When the third continuous striking effect processing (Z6542) is executed, first, it is determined whether the setting status of the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si is "05H", that is, whether it is a special situation (Z6571), and it is determined to be "05H". If so (Z6571: Yes), then it is determined whether the current internal value (A) is larger than the total value of the display value (B) and the difference upper limit value (C) (Z6572).

In the processing of Z6572, when it is determined that the internal value (A) is larger (Z6572: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223qv is 0 (Z6573), and when it is determined to be 0. (Z6573: Yes), "04H" is set in the setting status of the continuous hitting effect setting flag 223si (Z6574), the display value stored in the display value storage area 233sh is read (Z6575), and the read display value is read. 1 A display command for indicating the effect mode of the result effect for the subtracted value is set (Z6576), and this process is terminated.

That is, when the setting status of the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si is set to "05H", that is, the player does not enthusiastically operate the PUSH button 10317 during the continuous striking period, and the internal value value and the display value value. When there is a large deviation from the above, as a penalty, an effect mode corresponding to a display value smaller than the display value actually displayed is set as the effect mode of the result effect. With this configuration, the player can enthusiastically operate the operating means. In addition, for players who are not interested in the continuous hitting effect (players who operate the operating means lightly during the continuous hitting period), it is difficult to predict the degree of expectation of the jackpot winning depending on the content of the result effect of the repeated hitting effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being notified of unnecessary information and reducing the motivation to play.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, as a method of discriminating a player who is not enthusiastically participating in the continuous striking effect, the setting status of the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si is used to determine the value of the part value and the display value. A method of determining the degree of deviation from the value is used, but the method is not limited to this, and for example, within the operation valid period, based on the length of the period during which the player does not operate the operation means, the continuous striking effect is performed. A method of discriminating a player who is not enthusiastically participating may be used.

On the other hand, in the process of Z6572, when it is determined that the internal value (A) is not larger (Z6572: No), the setting status of the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si is set from "05H" indicating a special situation to "05H" indicating that it is being executed. It is changed to "03H" (Z6577), and this process is terminated. With this configuration, the internal value and the displayed value deviate from each other, and even a player who is in a special situation can be normal by actively operating the operating means thereafter. You can return to the situation. Therefore, the player who did not notice that the continuous hitting effect is being executed, or the internal based on the scenario tendency (for example, scenario types "2" and "3") in which the internal value greatly increases in a short period of time as internal migration data. When the migration data is created, it is appropriate for the player who has been continuously out of the variable lottery and has set a special situation even though he is enthusiastically operating the operation means. It is possible to provide a continuous hitting effect.

Further, in the processing of Z6571 when it is determined that the setting status of the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si is not "05H" (Z6571: No), then the setting status of the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si is "04H", that is, It is determined whether the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223qv is 0 (whether the operation valid period has ended) (Z6578), and if it is determined to be "04H" (Z6578: Yes), at the end timing of the continuous hit effect. It is determined whether or not there is (Z6579).

In the processing of Z6579, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the continuous striking effect, that is, the end timing of the result effect (Z6579: Yes), the setting status of the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si is set to "00H" (Z6580). The values stored in the upper limit value storage area 223se, the difference upper limit value storage area 223sf, the internal migration data storage area 223sg, and the display value storage area 233sh are cleared (Z6581), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z6578 that the setting status of the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si is not "04H" (Z6578: No), or when it is determined in the processing of Z6579 that it is not the end timing of the continuous striking effect (Z6579). Z6579: No) ends this process as it is.

Next, the contents of the press detection process 25 (Z3192) will be described with reference to FIG. 576. FIG. 576 is a flowchart showing the contents of the press detection process 25 (Z3192). This press detection process 25 (Z3192) is executed when it is determined that the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223qv is larger than 0 (Z3604: Yes) with respect to the above-mentioned press detection process (see Z3112 in FIG. 524). The process to be performed is different in that the continuous striking operation detection process (Z3605) is changed to the continuous striking operation detection process 25 (Z3651), and the other processes are the same. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the continuous striking operation detection process 25 (Z3651) will be described with reference to FIG. 577. FIG. 577 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous striking operation detection process 25 (Z3651). In this continuous striking operation detection process 25 (Z3651), various effects are executed based on the operation of the operating means (PUSH button 10317) during the continuous striking period (during measurement of the continuous striking valid period timer 223qv).

When the continuous hitting operation detection process 25 (Z3651) is executed, first, the pressing lottery is executed (Z6601) with reference to the pressing lottery table 222sb, and a notification command for indicating the button pressing is set (Z6602). That is, the notification command is set regardless of the result of the push lottery. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that it is properly determined that the PUSH button 10317 has been pressed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the push lottery has been won (Z6603), and if not (Z6603: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the user has won (Z6603: Yes), then the current internal value is extracted (Z6604) based on the data stored in the internal migration data storage area 223sg, and the display value is stored. The display value stored in the area 233sh is read out (Z6605), and it is determined whether the internal value and the display value are the same (Z6606).

When it is determined that they are not the same in the processing of Z6606 (Z6606: No), the difference upper limit value stored in the difference upper limit value storage area 223sf is read (Z6607), and the difference between the internal value and the display value is the difference upper limit. It is determined whether the value is larger than the value (Z6608), if it is determined not to be larger (Z6608: No), the difference value is added to the display value (Z6609), and the display value after the addition is displayed. A command is set (Z6610), a value indicating the added display value is set in the display value storage area 223sh (Z6611), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z6608, when it is determined that the difference between the internal value and the display value is larger than the difference upper limit value (Z6608: Yes), the value of the difference upper limit value is added to the display value (Z6612), and then. It shifts to the above-mentioned Z6610.

When it is determined that the internal value and the display value are the same in the processing of Z6606 (Z6606: Yes), the upper limit value stored in the upper limit value storage area 223se is read, and the display value and the upper limit value are the same. If it is determined whether it exists (Z6614) and if it is determined that they are not the same (Z6614: No), the display value cannot be updated at present, but the display value is changed by updating the internal value. Since it is possible to do so, a suggestion command for suggesting that the displayed value increases by continuous continuous hitting is set (Z6615), and this process is terminated.

Further, in the processing of Z6614, when it is determined that the displayed value and the upper limit value are the same (Z6614), a suggestion command for suggesting that it is difficult to further increase the displayed value is set (Z6614). Z6616), this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the staging mode selection process 25 (Z4353) will be described with reference to FIG. 578. FIG. 578 is a flowchart showing the contents of the staging mode selection process 25 (Z4353). When the effect mode selection process 25 (Z4353) determines that the variation pattern command including the additional time command has not been received for the effect mode selection process (see Z4313 in FIG. 536) described above (Z4551: No). In addition, the basic effect mode selection process 25 (Z4581) is configured to be executed, and the other points are the same. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the basic effect mode selection process 25 (Z4581) will be described with reference to FIG. 579. FIG. 579 is a flowchart showing the contents of the basic effect mode selection process 25 (Z4581). In the basic effect mode selection process 25 (Z4581), the initial setting process for the continuous striking effect when the variation pattern (variation effect pattern) including the continuous striking effect is extracted is executed.

When the basic effect mode selection process 25 (Z4581) is executed, first, it is determined whether the extracted variation pattern includes the continuous striking effect (Z6701), and if it is determined to be included (Z6701: Yes). , The internal scenario table 222sa is referred to to determine the internal scenario (Z6702). Then, the operation valid period set for this continuous hitting effect is extracted from the fluctuation pattern (Z6703), and the internal migration data is created and created based on the determined internal scenario and the extracted operation valid period (Z6704). The migrated data (internal migration data) is stored in the internal migration data storage area 223sg (Z6705).

After that, the upper limit value is determined with reference to the upper limit value selection table 222sc (S6706), the determined upper limit value is stored in the upper limit value storage area 223se (Z6707), and then the difference is made with reference to the difference upper limit value selection table 222sd. The upper limit value is determined (Z6708), the determined difference upper limit value is stored in the difference upper limit value storage area 223sf (Z6709), the setting status of the continuous hitting effect setting flag 223si is set to "01H", and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z6701 that there is no continuous striking effect (Z6701: No), the effect mode corresponding to the extracted variation pattern is determined (Z6711), and this process is terminated.

<About the 26th embodiment>
Next, the 26th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 580 to 594. In the 25th embodiment described above, internal migration data for migrating internal values according to the passage of time is created for one operation valid period, and the player operates the operation means during the operation valid period. By configuring the display value to be updated based on the content, the internal value indicated by the internal migration data, and the display value that has already been displayed, the effect of the operation effect for which the operation validity period is set is improved. It was something that could be made to do.

On the other hand, in the 26th embodiment, the internal value can be transferred over the operation validity period set a plurality of times. Specifically, as the jackpot middle effect executed during the jackpot game, it is possible to execute the jackpot middle effect in which the operation valid period is set multiple times, and the multiple operation valid set in one jackpot medium effect. The internal values are configured to be migrated (updated) so as to span the period.

With this configuration, when a plurality of operation valid periods are set within one effect period, the degree of variability of the effect mode (display value) within each operation valid period executed within one effect can be determined. Since it is possible to set according to the entire effect of 1, the operation effect can be executed a plurality of times without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

In addition, when the operation valid period is set multiple times within one effect period, the display value reaches the upper limit value during the operation valid period set earlier, and then the effect is meaningful. It is possible to prevent the effect of the effect from being lowered due to the setting of a valid operation period. Furthermore, since it is configured to create one internal migration data for the entire period of the plurality of operation validity periods, the effect mode (display value) does not increase during the operation validity period set earlier. Even so, while expecting that the internal migration data based on "Scenario 2", which is the latter half of the scenario type, is set, the operation means (PUSH button 10317) is enthusiastically operated during the remaining operation validity period. Can be made to.

Details will be described later, but in the 26th embodiment, in order to migrate (update) the internal value so as to span a plurality of operation valid periods, the transition period for migrating (updating) the internal value is a dedicated measuring means ( It differs from the 25th embodiment described above in that it is configured to be measured by the transition timer 223ta). That is, in the 25th embodiment described above, the internal value is migrated (updated) by using the measuring means (continuous hitting valid period timer 223qv) for measuring the passage of time of the set operation valid period. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated measuring means to transfer (update) the internal value, the manufacturing cost can be suppressed, and the control process related to the operation effect can be simplified. Since the period during which the internal value shifts (updates) and the operation valid period are the same period, variations of the operation effect (particularly, a variable pattern of the effect mode executed based on the operation of the operation means) There was the problem of becoming scarce.

On the other hand, in the 26th embodiment, as described above, the transition period for migrating (updating) the internal value is configured to be measured by the dedicated measuring means (transition timer 223ta), so that the operation valid period It is possible to transfer (update) the internal value in a period different from the period in which is set. As a result, the internal value at the timing when the operation validity period is set can be made different, so that the variable state of the effect mode for the operation by the player to the operation means can be easily made different, and there are abundant variations. It is possible to facilitate the execution of the operation effect.

The pachinko machine 10 in the 26th embodiment has a part of the ROM 222 configuration of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, a part of the RAM 223 configuration, and a part of the RAM 223 configuration with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the 25th embodiment described above. A part of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed, and an effect executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 based on the above-mentioned changes. It differs in that the production mode is changed, and is the same except for that. The detailed description of the same element will be omitted. Further, among the points that need to be changed when the above-mentioned differences are used for the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 25th embodiment, the points that can be easily conceived by those skilled in the art will be omitted in detail. ..

<Regarding the content of the production in the 26th embodiment>
First, with reference to FIGS. 580 and 581, among the various effects performed by the pachinko machine 10 of the 26th embodiment, the effect during the jackpot game, which is a characteristic effect of the 26th embodiment (during the jackpot). I will explain the contents of the production).

FIG. 580 (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode when the first operation valid period is set as a big hit medium effect, and FIG. 580 (b) is a diagram showing the first operation valid period. It is a figure which showed typically an example of the display mode at the end of a period. FIG. 581 (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode suggesting that the second operation valid period is set as the big hit medium effect, and FIG. 581 (b) is a diagram showing schematically an example of the display mode. It is a figure which showed typically an example of the display mode in the case where the 2nd operation valid period is set.

Here, in the present embodiment, a probabilistic jackpot in which a probabilistic state that is advantageous to the player is set after the jackpot game ends, and a time-saving jackpot in which a time-saving state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the probabilistic state after the jackpot game ends are set. And, are configured to be feasible, and whether the winning jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot or a time-saving jackpot can be notified to the player in the stop display mode of the third symbol indicating the jackpot winning. .. Specifically, when the stop display mode (for example, "777") displayed with the same odd number symbol is displayed as the stop display mode of the third symbol indicating the jackpot winning, the winning jackpot is a probable variable jackpot. Notify the player that there is.

With this configuration, before the jackpot game is executed, the player can be made aware that this jackpot is a probable change jackpot, so the jackpot game can be executed while giving the player a sense of security. Can be made to.

On the other hand, if all notifications of whether the winning jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot or a time-saving jackpot are notified before the jackpot game is executed, the player's motivation to play the winning jackpot will decrease. , A part of the probabilistic jackpot, and when the time-saving jackpot is won, the stop display mode (for example, "666") displayed with the same even symbol is displayed as the stop display mode of the third symbol indicating the jackpot winning. By the operation round effect executed during the jackpot game, it is configured to execute the effect (so-called probabilistic promotion effect) that incites whether this jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot or a time-saving jackpot. There is.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to leave the possibility that this jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot until the jackpot game ends, so it is easier to play the game while maintaining the player's willingness to play. Can be done.

In the 26th embodiment, as the big hit middle effect executed during the big hit game, the operation round effect in which the operation valid period is set is executed in the specific round game. Further, the number of operation round effects executed within the effect period of one big hit medium effect is configured to be selected from 1 to 3 times. Further, it is configured to create internal migration data based on the cumulative operation valid period, which is the sum of the production periods of one big hit medium production.

By using these configurations, the ratio of the operation valid period set for one operation round effect to the cumulative operation valid period differs depending on the number of operation round effects executed during the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the effect result of the current big hit medium effect only by the variable state of the display value during the operation round effect of 1.

Further, in the 26th embodiment, the player is not notified (difficult to grasp) the number of operation round effects executed in one big hit medium effect. Therefore, even if the display mode does not change (raise) significantly in the operation round effect of 1, the jackpot game can be performed while expecting that the operation round effect is executed again.

First, when the operation round effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 580 (a), the player is instructed to repeatedly hit the PUSH button 10317 near the center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. An image KG for performing is displayed, and a display area 826b for showing the number of operation round effects executed in the current jackpot middle effect is formed above the image KG, and the first operation round effect is being performed. As a display mode indicating, the characters "First time !!" are displayed in the display area 826b.

Then, in the display area Ds10, "2 rounds" for indicating that the current number of rounds is the second round is displayed, and in the display area Ds3, the third symbol stopped and displayed at the time of winning the jackpot is displayed. "666" for indicating the stop display mode is displayed. That is, the state shown in FIG. 580 (a) is the second round of the jackpot game in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of "666", and the first operation round effect is performed as the probabilistic promotion effect. It is a diagram showing the state of execution.

On the right side of the display screen, a continuous striking gauge RG whose effect mode is changed during the operation round effect and an icon 826a for showing the effect result of the probabilistic promotion effect are displayed. Then, in the display area 803, the characters "accumulate the gauge and explode by repeatedly hitting the button !!" are displayed as a guidance display mode for guiding the effect content of the probabilistic promotion effect. In addition, the characters "right-handed" are displayed as the game guidance display mode 803a for guiding the player to the game method during the big hit game.

That is, in the 26th embodiment, the player repeatedly hits the PUSH button 10317 as a probabilistic promotion effect to increase the gauge number of the continuous hit gauge RG, and the gauge number of the continuous hit gauge RG is the upper limit value. When 5 ”is reached, the icon 826a explodes, and an effect of changing the display mode of the third symbol displayed in the display area Ds3 is executed.

By executing the effect of increasing the gauge number of the continuous striking gauge RG in this way, it is possible to inform the player of the progress of the probabilistic promotion effect in an easy-to-understand manner. It is possible to facilitate the continuous operation of the button 10317.

Here, when the content of the image NG displayed during the operation round effect is specifically described, it is the same as the image NG displayed during the continuous striking period effect in the 25th embodiment described above (see FIG. 560 (b)). In addition, an image imitating the PUSH button 10317, the character "repeated hit" to encourage the repeated hit operation, and a plurality of arrow images are displayed, and in addition, the length of the operation valid period set for this operation round effect. A remaining period gauge is displayed as a remaining period display mode for indicating the above.

Since the state shown in FIG. 580 (a) is immediately after the operation round effect is executed, it is displayed in a mode in which the remaining period gauge is not reduced (indicated in black in the figure), and the operation valid period is displayed. It is displayed in such a manner that the remaining period gradually decreases from the left side with the passage of time. Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, the operation valid period of 10 seconds is set during the operation round effect, and the round game targeted for the operation round effect is executed at the timing. The operation valid period is set, and the operation round effect is configured to end when 10 seconds have elapsed from the execution of the round game. Further, as in each of the above-described embodiments, as the end condition of the round game, the end condition that is satisfied when 30 seconds have passed and the case where 10 game balls win the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 470). It has an end condition that is satisfied, for example, if the end condition of the round game is satisfied before the elapse of 10 seconds (before the end of the operation round effect), that time point. It is configured so that the operation round effect ends with.

In addition, regarding the effect mode for increasing and displaying the gauge number of the continuous striking gauge RG used in the 26th embodiment and the control content, in order to increase and display the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG in the 25th embodiment described above. Since it is the same as the effect mode and the control content of the above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Then, when the first operation round effect is completed, the display mode shown in FIG. 580 (b) is displayed. The display mode shown in FIG. 580 (b) is a display mode at the time when the operation valid period (10 seconds) has elapsed in the first operation round effect, and the image NG shows the remaining time of the operation valid period. The remaining period gauge (displayed in white in the figure) indicating that it is 0 seconds is displayed together with the character "END" indicating that the operation valid period has expired, and the PUSH button 10317 is operated by the player. The image imitating the PUSH button 10317 is erased in order to show that it is in a state where it is not effectively determined even if it is not performed. The character "sorry" indicating that the value (5) was not reached is displayed.

Further, the continuous striking gauge RG displays a display mode (displayed in black in the figure) indicating that the number of gauges has increased to the second stage in the first operation round effect, and the display area 803 shows the present time. In the jackpot middle effect, the characters "Maybe there is a second time !!" are displayed as a suggestion mode for suggesting that the operation round effect is executed again.

The continuous striking gauge RG and the icon 826a are configured to be continuously displayed even after the end of the first operation round effect. When the second operation round effect is executed, the effect result of the first operation round effect, that is, the operation round that inherits the gauge number of the continuous striking gauge RG raised in the first operation round effect. It is configured so that the production is executed. Therefore, for the player who is executing the jackpot game while expecting that the second operation round effect is executed, even during the period when the operation round effect is not executed, the current continuous hit gauge RG The number of gauges can be easily grasped.

In the jackpot medium effect described above with reference to FIG. 580, the first operation round effect is executed in the second round (see FIG. 580 (a)), and the second operation round effect is executed in the fourth round. It is a medium production, and the timing before the start of the 4th round game in which the 2nd operation round production is executed, specifically, the timing when the 3rd round game is started, is the second time soon. Operation A notice display for notifying the player that the round effect is executed is executed.

As shown in FIG. 581 (a), the characters "3 rounds" are displayed in the display area Ds10 as a display mode indicating that the third round of the game is in progress, and as a notice display, "next" near the center of the display screen. The text "The second chance to hit repeatedly in the round will start !!" is displayed. As described above, the continuous striking gauge RG and the icon 826a are continuously displayed even during the period when the operation round effect is not executed, and the effect result of the first operation round effect executed in the second round (FIG. 580 (FIG. 580). b) See) is displayed as it is.

In the 26th embodiment, a notice is displayed that the operation round effect will be executed soon at the timing when the round (3 rounds) immediately before the round (4th round) in which the operation round effect is executed is executed. Is configured to notify the player using, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the notice display may be displayed at the timing when the third round game ends, or the third round may be displayed. It may be configured to display the notice display using the interval period set between the and the fourth round.

If the rounds in which the operation round effect is executed are continuous, the interval period set between the round in which the first operation round effect is executed and the round in which the second operation round effect is executed is executed. Alternatively, the notice display may be displayed during the period during which the first operation round effect is being executed. In this way, by notifying the player that the operation round effect is executed before the operation round effect is actually executed, the operation means during the operation valid period set during the operation round effect. Can be easily operated.

When the jackpot game progresses to the fourth round, the second operation round effect that inherits the effect result of the first operation round effect is executed, and the display mode shown in FIG. 581 (b) is displayed. In FIG. 581 (b), “4 rounds” are displayed in the display area Ds10 to indicate that the present is the 4th round, and the second operation round effect is executed in the display area 826b. The "second time" shown is displayed. Then, during the second operation round effect, the gauge number of the continuous hit gauge RG reaches the upper limit value "5", the icon 826a explodes, and the stop display mode of the third symbol displayed in the display area Ds3 is displayed. However, the display mode switched (promoted) to "777" indicating the probability change jackpot is displayed.

That is, in FIG. 581, an effect of increasing the number of gauges of the continuous striking gauge RG (probability change promotion effect) is executed across the two operation round effects, and as the effect result, the effect result indicating the success of the probability change promotion is displayed. There is. In this way, by configuring the effect of the probabilistic promotion effect to be displayable across a plurality of operation round effects, if the effect result of the one operation round effect is bad (for example, the continuous hit gauge RG). Even if the number of gauges is increased by only one step), it is possible to have expectations for the operation round effect to be executed next.

Further, in the 26th embodiment, the internal transition data for updating (increasing) the internal value capable of increasing the gauge number of the continuous striking gauge RG is set so as to straddle a plurality of operation round effects. In the probabilistic promotion effect performed during the jackpot game in which the jackpot is won, it is possible to intentionally create an effect mode in which the gauge number of the continuous hit gauge RG is unlikely to increase during the first operation round effect. Therefore, even if the effect result of one operation round effect is bad (for example, when the gauge number of the continuous hit gauge RG increases by only one step), the next operation round effect is expected. Can be given.

In addition, since the internal transition data that updates (increases) the internal value that can increase the gauge number of the continuous hit gauge RG is set so as to straddle multiple operation round effects, the time-saving jackpot winning jackpot game In the probabilistic promotion effect performed during the process, it is possible to intentionally create an effect mode in which the number of gauges of the continuous striking gauge RG is likely to increase during the first operation round effect. Therefore, even if the probabilistic promotion effect is not promoted, it is possible to provide a good state (for example, a state in which the number of gauges of the continuous striking gauge RG is increased by 4 steps) as an effect result of one operation round effect. It is possible to play the game while expecting to be promoted probabilistically until the final operation round effect in the jackpot medium effect is completed.

In addition, in the 26th embodiment, even if the number of gauges of the continuous striking gauge RG does not reach the upper limit value (5), the possibility of probable change promotion remains. In this case, the icon 826a does not explode in the probability change promotion effect, the effect of the probability change promotion failure is executed, and the player is notified that the probability change jackpot has occurred during the ending period of the jackpot game or after the jackpot game ends. It is configured in. With this configuration, it is possible to keep expecting a probabilistic jackpot until the game state is actually set after the jackpot game ends, so that the player is prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage. be able to.

In this case, as the timing for notifying whether the jackpot winning type is a probabilistic jackpot or a time-saving jackpot, the notification by the probabilistic promotion effect, that is, the notification at the timing when the jackpot game is executed is the most. It is preferable to configure it so that it is easy to be selected, and then it is easy to be selected in the order of the timing before the start of the big hit game, that is, the timing of notifying in the stop display mode of the third symbol indicating the big hit winning, and the timing near the end of the big hit game. .. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the probability change promotion ratio in the probability change promotion effect executed in order to encourage the player whether or not to promote the probability change over a long period of time, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 582, the flow of the effect executed during the jackpot game in the 26th embodiment will be described. FIG. 582 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the jackpot during the jackpot game executed during the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 582, if a big hit is won as a result of the special figure change (special symbol change), the round game from the first round to the final round is performed as a big hit game after the OP (opening) period. It is configured to be executed, and then, after an ED (ending) period, the jackpot game ends. Then, an interval period of a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) is set between each round game (see FIG. 582 (a)).

During the special symbol change, a variation effect for showing the result of the special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery) is executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Then, during the jackpot game, the jackpot middle production is executed. This jackpot effect is composed of an OP effect executed during the OP period, a round effect executed during the round game, an ED effect executed during the ED period, and an interval effect executed during the interval period (). See FIG. 52 (b)).

In the 26th embodiment, among the above-mentioned jackpot middle effects, in the round effect executed for each round game, a probability change promotion effect for notifying whether or not the current jackpot is a probability change jackpot is performed. It is configured to be feasible, and in the probabilistic promotion effect, it is configured to execute a continuous striking effect across a plurality of round games. Further, it is configured to execute the continuous hitting notice effect for notifying that the continuous hitting effect will be executed before the continuous hitting effect is executed.

Similar to the 25th embodiment described above, the operation valid period is set so as to be set during the continuous striking effect (see FIG. 582 (c)), and all the operation valid set in the jackpot medium effect. Period, in the example of FIG. 582, the degree of movement of the internal value is calculated with respect to the total operation valid period, which is the sum of the operation valid periods set for the two consecutive hitting effects executed in the second round and the fourth round. The internal value migration data shown is created, and the internal value is configured to be variable (increased) based on the created internal value migration data. The method of creating the internal value migration data in the 26th embodiment is the same as the 25th embodiment described above except that the calculation method of the operation validity period is different, so that the details thereof are detailed. The explanation is omitted.

Then, the internal value migration data is not updated from the end of one continuous striking effect (operation valid period) to the start of the next continuous striking effect (operation valid period) (Fig.). 582 (d)). With this configuration, the internal value transition data can be continuously updated even if the continuous hitting effect is executed at intervals in the big hit medium effect.

In the present embodiment, the update period of the internal value migration data is set as the period in which the operation valid period is set, but the period is not limited to this, and for example, the interval period after the end of the round game in which the continuous hitting effect is executed is also included. It may be configured to update the internal value migration data. By configuring the internal value to be updated based on the internal value migration data in a period different from the operation valid period in this way, the display value that is unexpected to the player in the next repeated hitting effect is displayed. It can be facilitated to provide a variable aspect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the internal value is updated (variable) with reference to the internal value migration data based on the passage of time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a continuous striking effect is executed. When the end timing of the round game is early, that is, when the end condition of the round game (winning 10 game balls) is satisfied early, the internal value update condition is satisfied and the internal value is established earlier than the actual time elapsed. It may be configured to advance the value migration data. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the round game in which the continuous hitting effect is executed ends early and the internal value cannot reach the upper limit value during the big hit game.

Furthermore, the cumulative total of the number of game balls (over-winning number) that have won more than the predetermined condition (for example, the number of winnings (10) for satisfying the end condition) during the jackpot game is the specific number (for example, the number of over-winning). When the condition) that is satisfied when 10) is reached, the forced update process for updating the internal value to the upper limit may be executed regardless of the content of the internal value transfer data. As a result, the internal value can be updated according to the game content of the jackpot game during the period when the continuous hitting effect is not executed, so that the player can enthusiastically play the game.

Further, in this case, it is preferable to execute a notification effect for notifying that the above-mentioned predetermined condition is satisfied and a notification effect for notifying the information until the predetermined condition is satisfied. This makes it possible for the player to enthusiastically play the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 583, among the effect contents of the continuous striking effect in the 26th embodiment, the points different from the effect content of the continuous striking effect in the 25th embodiment described above will be described. In the 25th embodiment described above, the created internal migration data is set according to the setting timing of the operation valid period, and the internal value is updated (increased) during the operation valid period based on the set internal migration data. It was configured to do. On the other hand, the 26th embodiment is different in that the timing for setting the created internal migration data is configured to be different from the timing for setting the operation validity period. Specifically, as the timing for setting the internal migration data, it is possible to set the internal migration data at a timing 2 seconds earlier or 10 seconds later than the reference timing with the setting timing of the operation valid period as the reference timing. It is configured so that it can be done.

By making the set timing of the internal migration data different in this way, even if the same internal migration data is created, it is possible to make the update status of the internal value different with respect to the passage of the operation validity period. .. Therefore, even when the same internal migration data is created and the player operates the operation means (PUSH button 10317) with the same operation content during the operation valid period, the degree of variation of the display value may be different. It can be done and the effect of production can be enhanced.

FIG. 583 is a diagram schematically showing an effect pattern during the continuous striking period effect when "scenario 1" is selected as the scenario type indicating the transition tendency of the internal value, and is a diagram of the 25th embodiment described above. It differs from the figure shown in 564 in that the timing at which the internal migration data is set is advanced by 2 seconds, and is the same except for the above. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 583 (c), since the internal migration data is set from 2 seconds before the timing when the operation valid period is set (execution timing of the continuous striking period effect), it is 0 after the operation valid period is set. After 25 seconds, the internal value reaches "1", 2.5 seconds later, "2", 4.75 seconds later, "3", and 7 seconds later, "4". That is, the earlier the set timing of the internal migration data is, the easier it is to update (increase) the internal value earlier within the operation valid period.

In the example shown in FIG. 583, since the set timing of the internal migration data is set to 2 seconds before the timing when the operation valid period is set, the timing when the internal value reaches the upper limit is also shown in FIG. 564. It is configured to be 2 seconds earlier than the 25th embodiment, but is not limited to this, for example, the timing at which the internal value reaches the upper limit value is fixed with respect to the remaining period of the operation valid period, and the timing thereof is fixed. The period between the fixed timing and the set timing of the internal migration data may be calculated as the update period of the internal value, and the internal migration data may be created according to the length of the update period.

Further, as described above, in the 26th embodiment, the timing at which the internal migration data is set can be delayed by 10 seconds from the setting timing of the operation valid period. Here, when the set timing of the internal migration data is delayed by 10 seconds, the operation valid period is 10 seconds, so that the internal value is not updated based on the internal migration data during the operation valid period. ing. Therefore, in this case, even if the operation means is operated during the continuous striking period performance (during the operation valid period), the internal value remains "0", so that the display value is not changed (updated).

In the 26th embodiment, the timing at which the internal migration data is set can be delayed by 10 seconds from the setting timing of the operation valid period only when the corresponding special symbol lottery is a big hit. Further, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, a value of at least "2" or more is selected as the upper limit value in the continuous striking period production.

Therefore, if the PUSH button 10317 is positively operated during the continuous striking period production, the display value can be updated (increased) to at least "2" regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, as described above. In addition, when the timing at which the internal migration data is set is delayed by 10 seconds from the setting timing of the operation valid period, the display value is from "0" no matter how the PUSH button 10317 is operated during the continuous striking period production. It is possible to set a state that is not variable (updated).

With this configuration, the more variable (updated) the display value is, the more advantageous the player is. In the continuous striking period production, the display value is variable (updated) even though the operating means is enthusiastically operated. Even if this is not done, it is possible to obtain an effect that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, with respect to the operation content to the operation means during the operation valid period and the variable state of the display value based on the operation to the operation means. It can make the player interested.

<About the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 26th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 584 to 586, the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the 26th embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 584, the configuration of the ROM 222 included in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the 26th embodiment will be described. FIG. 584 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of ROM 222 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 26th embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 584, the ROM 222 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 26th embodiment has the transition timer start timing selection table 222ta and the ROM 222 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 25th embodiment described above (see FIG. 567). It differs from the production number selection table 222tb in that it is added. Other elements are the same, and the same contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The migration timer start timing selection table 222ta is a data table that is referred to when selecting the timing for setting the internal migration data, and the set timing of the internal migration data is selected when setting the variation pattern (variation effect). The internal migration data is updated and variable based on the selected set timing.

The contents of the transition timer start timing selection table 222ta will be described with reference to FIG. 585. FIG. 585 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the transition timer start timing selection table 222ta. In the transition timer start timing selection table 222ta, the start timing of the transition timer (time measurement by the transition timer is started) in correspondence with the lottery result (win / fail determination result) of the corresponding special symbol and the acquired staging lottery counter 223y. As the timing), "-5 seconds", "origin", and "+10 seconds" are specified, respectively.

Specifically, when the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery (win / fail judgment result) is a big hit (hit), the value of the acquired effect lottery counter 223qy is in the range of "0 to 19", and the start timing is "-5". The "second" is defined as "origin" in the range of "20 to 94" and "+10 seconds" in the range of "95 to 98". On the other hand, when the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery (win / fail judgment result) is out of order, the value of the acquired effect lottery counter 223qy is in the range of "0-9", and the start timing is "-5 seconds" and "10". The "origin" is defined in the range of "~ 98".

In other words, when the result of the target special symbol lottery is "hit", it is easier to select "-5 seconds" as the start timing of the transition timer than when it is "missing", and further, "hit". Only in the case of "", "+ 10b seconds" is easily selected as the start timing of the transition timer. With this configuration, the timing at which the internal migration data is set is predicted based on the transition (variable) status of the display value during the continuous striking period production, and the determination result of the pass / fail determination means is determined based on the prediction result. It can provide fun to make people predict.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 585 (a), a timing different from the origin (timing for setting the operation valid period) can be selected as the set timing of the internal migration data. Specifically, the timing earlier than the origin (-2 seconds) and the timing later than the origin (+10 seconds) can be selected, but other timings may be selectable, for example. , Two or more different timings may be selectably configured as the timing earlier than the origin. Further, in the 26th embodiment, when a timing later than the origin is selected, the start timing is delayed to the extent that the internal value is not updated according to the internal migration data until the operation valid period ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the start timing (for example, +5 seconds) of the transition timer delayed within the range until the end of the operation validity period may be selectably configured.

In addition, in the 26th embodiment, the timing at which the operation valid period is set is set as the origin, and the start timing of the transition timer can be selected differently from the origin, but the operation valid period is set. Regardless of the set timing, for example, the start timing of the transition timer can be selected from a plurality of timings based on the elapsed time from the execution of the variation effect (the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation). Alternatively, a predetermined start condition (for example, a start condition that is satisfied based on an operation by the player on the operating means, or a start condition that is satisfied when a specific effect is executed as a variable effect) is satisfied. It may be configured to set the internal migration data based on the above. With this configuration, the pachinko machine 10 has an effect pattern in which there are a plurality of timings at which the operation valid period is set, and an effect pattern in which a different length can be selected as the length of the operation valid period of 1. Since the relationship between the update status of the internal value by the migration data and the elapsed status of the operation validity period can be further diversified, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The effect number selection table 222tb is a data table that is referred to when selecting the effect number of the operation round effect executed in the jackpot medium effect, and is a target jackpot type (probability variation jackpot, normal (short time) jackpot). ) And the acquired value of the effect counter 223qy, a different number of effects (1 to 3) is selected. The effect number selection table 222tb determines that the opening command has been received in the hit-related command process 26 (see Z3974 in FIG. 591) executed when the hit-related command is received (Z4101: Yes in FIG. 590). ) When it is determined in the hitting effect setting process (see Z4151 in FIG. 592) that the current jackpot symbol (the third symbol displayed as stopped) is not a probabilistic symbol (for example, "777"). (Z6801: No in FIG. 592), which is referred to for determining the number of repeated hits effects, which is an operation round effect (see Z6805 in FIG. 592).

Here, with reference to FIG. 585 (b), the contents specified in the effect number selection table 222tb will be described. FIG. 585 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect number selection table 222tb. As shown in FIG. 585 (b), the effect number selection table 222tb has a different number of effects based on the target jackpot type (probability variation jackpot, normal (short time) jackpot) and the acquired value of the effect counter 223qy. (1 to 3) are stipulated, and it is stipulated that the number of productions selected is more likely to be selected when the target jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot than when it is a normal (short time) jackpot. There is.

Specifically, the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot, and the number of staging "1" is in the range of "0 to 29" and the number of staging is in the range of "30 to 89" when the value of the acquired staging lottery counter 223qy is "0 to 29". In the range of "2" and "90 to 98", the number of productions "3" is defined. On the other hand, the jackpot type is a normal (short time) jackpot, and the number of staging "1" is in the range of "0 to 39" and the number of staging is in the range of "40 to 98" when the value of the acquired staging lottery counter 223qy is "0 to 39". "2" is specified.

That is, it is configured so that the number of effects "3" can be selected only when it is a probability variation jackpot, and the number of effects "2" is also easier to select for the probability variation jackpot than the normal (time saving) jackpot. It stipulates. In the 26th embodiment, one jackpot medium effect, that is, the number of operation round effects executed during one big hit game is determined with reference to the effect number selection table 222tb, and the determined number of times is determined. Throughout the operation round production, it is configured to execute a probabilistic promotion production to fuel whether or not this jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot.

By configuring in this way, the player can predict whether or not this jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot not only by the effect result of the probabilistic promotion effect but also by the number of operation round effects executed during the probabilistic promotion effect. It is possible to make it. Therefore, not only the effect of the probabilistic promotion effect but also the content of the probabilistic promotion effect can be interested in the player, so that the effect of the big hit middle effect can be enhanced.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the operation valid period of the operation round effect executed in the jackpot middle effect of 1 is added up, and 1 internal migration data is created for the total operation valid period. Since it is configured, the value of the internal value that is variable during the first operation round effect executed in the jackpot middle effect based on the probability variation jackpot can be made different according to the number of times the operation round effect is produced. Therefore, in the probabilistic promotion effect in which only one operation round effect is executed, the probable change state is set after the jackpot game ends even though the display value does not reach the upper limit, or multiple operation round effects are executed. Despite the probabilistic promotion effect, the display value reaches the upper limit in the first operation round effect, and the remaining operation round effect becomes meaningless, so the effect is effective. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation of deterioration.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the 26th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 586. FIG. 586 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the 26th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 586, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 26th embodiment is relative to the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 25th embodiment described above (see FIG. 570). , The transition timer 223ta, the effect count counter 223tb, the round effect storage area 223tc, the promoted flag 223td, and the transition timer interruption flag 223te are added, and the other points are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The migration timer 223ta is a timer for measuring the elapsed time since the internal migration data is set, and the current internal value is determined based on the content of the internal migration data and the elapsed time indicated by the migration timer 223ta. Will be done. When the transition timer 223ta is determined in the continuous striking effect process 26 (see Z3282 in FIG. 588) to be the transition start timing of the internal value, that is, the timing to set the internal migration data (Z6521: Yes in FIG. 588). ), When the value of 1 is set (Z6524 in FIG. 588) and it is determined in the effect update process 26 (see Z3198 in FIG. 587) that the value of the transition timer 223ta is 1 or more (Z3275 in FIG. 587:). Yes), the value is updated (Z3277 in FIG. 587). Then, in the continuous hit operation detection process 26 (see Z3761 in FIG. 590), when the push lottery is won (Z6603: Yes in FIG. 590), it is referred to in order to specify the internal value based on the internal migration data. Then, when the big hit middle effect ends (when the big hit game ends), the value of the transition timer 223ta is cleared to 0.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the internal value is updated based on the internal migration data over a plurality of operation valid periods, and after the operation valid period of 1 is completed, the next The value of the migration timer 223ta is not updated until the operation validity period is set. Therefore, when the continuous hitting effect (operation round effect) for which the operation valid period is set ends, the measurement of the elapsed time by the transition timer 223ta is interrupted, and the next continuous hitting effect (operation round effect) is started. The transition timer 223ta, which has been interrupted, restarts the measurement of the elapsed time. With this configuration, the internal value is updated by the internal migration data so as to span multiple operation valid periods, regardless of the length of the non-operation valid period provided between the multiple operation valid periods. can do.

The effect count counter 223tb is a counter for measuring the number of continuous hitting effects (operation round effects) executed in the jackpot medium effect, and the value corresponding to the number of effects selected in the effect number selection table 222tb is It is set and subtracted each time the continuous hitting effect (operation round effect) is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to set the number of consecutive hits (operation round effect) executed in the big hit medium effect and the effect mode corresponding to the remaining number of times, providing an easy-to-understand effect to the player. can do.

The round effect storage area 223tc is a storage area for temporarily storing the type of round effect executed for each round game in the jackpot game, and when the jackpot game is started (after the jackpot is won). The content of the round effect executed in each round game set in any period of the period until the first round game is executed is temporarily stored. Then, each time a new round game is started, the content of the stored round effect is read out, and the round effect based on the content is executed.

In the 26th embodiment, three types of round effects, a normal round effect, an operation round effect, and a notice round effect, are determined for each round game.

The promoted flag 223td is a flag for indicating that the probabilistic promotion is successful as a result of the probabilistic promotion effect executed during the jackpot game, and is set to on when the probabilistic promotion is successful and does not succeed. If so, it will be set to off. Then, when the setting status is determined (Z6901 in FIG. 593) by the round effect setting process (see Z4152 in FIG. 593) executed at the start timing of the new round game, and it is determined to be ON (FIG. 593). Z6901: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the display mode (see FIG. 581 (b)) indicating the success of the probabilistic promotion is already displayed as the effect of the probabilistic promotion effect, the probabilistic promotion is congratulated. When the round effect of the display mode is executed and it is determined to be off (Z6901: No in FIG. 593), that is, the display mode indicating the success of the probabilistic promotion is not displayed as the effect result of the probabilistic promotion effect. If it is determined, it is configured to execute a round effect corresponding to each round game, which is predetermined.

The promoted flag 223td is also referred to when setting the effect mode in the ending period of the jackpot game, and is executed when a command indicating the ending period of the jackpot game is received (FIG. 594). When it is determined in (see Z4153) that the promoted flag 223td is set to ON (Z4153: Yes in FIG. 594), there is an effect mode for indicating that the probability change state is set after the jackpot game is completed. If it is set (see Z7002 in FIG. 594) and it is determined that the promoted flag 223td is set to off (Z4153: No in FIG. 594), if the jackpot type this time is a probabilistic jackpot (FIG. 594). 594 Z7004: Yes), during the ending period, a staging mode indicating probabilistic promotion is set (Z7005 in FIG. 594), and when it is not a probabilistic jackpot, that is, it is a normal (time saving) jackpot (Z7004 in FIG. 594). : No), an effect mode for indicating that the non-probability change state (time saving state) is set is set (see Z7006 in FIG. 594).

In the 26th embodiment, even if the probability change jackpot is achieved depending on the degree of operation of the player to the PUSH button 10317 (operation means) during the probability change promotion effect or the degree of transfer of the internal migration data. During the probabilistic promotion effect (during the operation round effect), the display mode indicating the probabilistic promotion may not be displayed. Therefore, by making it possible to determine whether or not the display mode indicating the probabilistic promotion is displayed based on the setting status of the promoted flag 223td, it is possible to set a round effect corresponding to the effect content of the probabilistic promotion effect. It is possible to perform a big hit medium production without giving a sense of discomfort to the person.

The transition timer interruption flag 223te is a flag for interrupting the measurement of the passage of time by the transition timer 223ta, and is set to ON when interrupting the measurement of the passage of time by the transition timer 223ta. This transition timer interruption flag 223te is set to on when the continuous striking effect (operation round effect) for which the operation valid period is set ends, and is set to off when the next continuous striking effect (operation round effect) is started. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to measure the passage of time by the transition timer 223ta so as to straddle the plurality of operation valid periods.

<Regarding the control content of the voice lamp control device in the 26th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 587 to 594, the content of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 26th embodiment will be described. The control processing content executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 26th embodiment is an effect update process with respect to the control processing content executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 25th embodiment described above. Instead of 25 (see Z3191 in FIG. 572), the effect update process 26 (see Z3198 in FIG. 587) is replaced with the continuous striking effect process (see Z3272 in FIG. 573), and the continuous striking effect process 26 (see Z3282 in FIG. 588). Is replaced with the third continuous striking effect processing (see Z6542 in FIG. 575), and the third continuous striking effect processing 26 (see Z5692 in FIG. 589) is replaced with the continuous striking operation detection process 25 (see Z3651 in FIG. 577). The detection process 26 (see Z3761 in FIG. 590) is different in that the hit-related command process 26 (see Z3974 in FIG. 591) is executed instead of the hit-related command process, and is otherwise the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the staging update process 26 (Z3198) will be described with reference to FIG. 587. FIG. 587 is a flowchart showing the contents of the staging update process 26 (Z3198). The effect update process 26 (Z3198) differs from the above-mentioned effect update process 25 (see Z3191 in FIG. 572) in that a process is added when the value of the fluctuation time timer is 0, and other than that, the effect update process 26 (Z3198) is different. It is the same.

When the effect update process 26 (Z3198) is executed, it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time timer is larger than 0 (Z3201), and if it is determined to be large (Z3201: Yes), the effect update process 25 (Z3201: Yes) described above is performed. The same processing of Z3271 to Z3262 as in (see Z3191 of FIG. 572) is executed, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z3201, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time timer is 0 (Z3201: No), it is determined whether the current is a big hit (during a big hit game) (Z3274), and a big hit (Z3274). If it is determined that the game is a big hit (Z3274: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the transition timer 223ta is 1 or more (Z3275).

In the processing of Z3275, if it is determined that it is 1 or more (Z3275: Yes), it is determined whether the transition timer interruption flag 223te is set to ON (Z3276), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON, it is determined. (Z3276: No), the value of the transition timer 223ta is updated (Z3277), and this process is terminated. Further, in the processing of Z3274, when it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (Z3274: No) and when it is determined that the value of the transition timer 223ta is not 1 or more (Z3275: No), the transition timer interruption flag 223te is set to ON. If it is (Z3276: Yes), this process is terminated without executing the process of Z3277. As a result, the value of the migration timer 223ta for updating the internal migration data can be appropriately updated.

Next, the contents of the continuous striking effect processing 28 (Z3282) will be described with reference to FIG. 588. FIG. 588 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous striking effect processing 28 (Z3282). The continuous striking effect processing 28 (Z3282) differs from the above-mentioned continuous striking effect process (see Z3272 in FIG. 573) in that a process for setting the transition timer 223ta and the transition timer interruption flag 223te is added. , Other than that, it is the same.

When the continuous hitting effect process 28 (Z3282) is executed, first, it is determined whether it is the migration start timing of the internal value (Z6521), and if it is determined that it is the migration start timing (Z6521: Yes), then. The data (internal migration data) stored in the internal migration data storage area 223sg is read (Z6522), the migration of the internal value based on the read data (internal migration data) is started (Z6523), and the value of the migration timer 223ta is set. 1 is set (Z6524), and then the same processing of Z6501 to 6509 and Z6512 as the above-mentioned continuous hitting effect processing (see Z3272 in FIG. 573) is executed.

Then, when the processing of Z6509 is completed, it is next determined whether the transition timer interruption flag 223te is set to ON (Z6525), and if it is determined to be set to ON (Z6525: Yes), the transition timer is determined. The interruption flag 223te is set to off (Z6526), and this process ends. If it is determined that the Z6525 process is not set to ON (Z6525: No), the Z6526 process is skipped and the present process ends.

Next, the contents of the third continuous striking effect processing 26 (Z5692) will be described with reference to FIG. 589. FIG. 589 is a flowchart showing the contents of the third continuous striking effect processing 26 (Z5692). The third continuous striking effect processing 26 (Z5692) differs from the above-mentioned third continuous striking effect process (see Z6542 in FIG. 575) in that a process of setting the transition timer interruption flag 223te is added.

Specifically, in the processing of Z6579, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the continuous striking effect (Z6579: Yes), the transition timer interruption flag 223te is set to ON (Z6594), and the setting status of the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si. Is set to "01H" (Z6580), and then it is determined whether the value of the effect count counter tb is 1 or more (Z6595). That is, in the processing of Z6595, it is determined whether the continuous hitting effect executed this time is the last continuous hitting effect in the jackpot medium effect.

In the processing of Z6595, when it is determined that the value of the effect count counter tb is not 1 or more (0) (Z6595: No), since this is the last continuous stroke effect, the above-mentioned third continuous stroke effect (FIG. The same processing of Z6581 as (see Z6542 of 575) is executed, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z6595, when it is determined that the value of the effect count counter tb is 1 or more, that is, the next continuous hit effect is executed within the jackpot medium effect (Z6595: Yes), the effect number of times. The counter value of the counter tb is subtracted by 1 (Z6596), it is determined whether the value of the effect count counter tb after the subtraction is 0 (Z6597), and if it is determined to be 0 (Z6597: Yes), the display value. The effect mode corresponding to (Z6598) is set, and this process is terminated.

Further, in the processing of Z6597, when it is determined that the value of the effect count counter tb is not 0 (Z6597: No), an effect mode (see FIG. 580 (b)) suggesting that the continuous striking effect is continued is set. , End this process. In this way, when the entire effect of 1 is executed across a plurality of continuous stroke effects, when the continuous stroke effect of 1 is completed, it is determined whether or not the remaining continuous stroke effect exists, and the determination thereof is made. By configuring the display mode (effect mode) to be displayed at the end of the continuous striking effect based on the result, the entire effect of 1 can be smoothly executed as a series of effects.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 589, only the end timing of the last continuous striking effect is set according to the display value (the number of gauges of the continuous striking gauge RG), and the end timing of the other continuous striking effects is set. Is configured to suggest that the next continuous striking effect is executed, but is not limited to this, and the display value (gauge of the continuous striking gauge RG) is set at the end timing of the continuous striking effect other than the last continuous striking effect. It may be configured to set the effect mode according to the number). As a result, the player who enjoys the big hit middle effect is made to think that all the continuous hit effects executed as the big hit middle effect are finished, and then a further continuous hit effect is executed, which is a surprising effect. Can be provided.

Further, at the end timing of the last continuous striking effect, an effect mode suggesting that the next continuous striking effect is executed may be set. As a result, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting the player to execute a new continuous hitting effect until the end of the big hit middle effect.

In the present embodiment, the period during which the continuous hitting effect is executed in the jackpot medium effect is defined as the round game period, but the period is not limited to this, and the continuous hitting effect is executed during the jackpot interval period or the ending period. May be. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the continuous hitting effect is executed.

Next, the contents of the continuous striking operation detection process 26 (Z3761) will be described with reference to FIG. 590. FIG. 590 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous striking operation detection process 26 (Z3761). In this continuous hit operation detection process 26 (Z3761), a process related to a continuous hit effect (promotion effect) executed during a big hit (during a big hit game) is added to the above-mentioned continuous hit operation detection process 25 (see Z3651 in FIG. 577). It differs in that it is the same, otherwise it is the same. The same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the continuous striking operation detection process 26 (Z3761) is executed, the same processes of Z6601 to Z6616 as the continuous striking operation detection process 25 (see Z3651 in FIG. 577) are executed. Then, when the processing of Z6611 is completed, it is determined whether the display value after addition is 5 (Z6651), if it is determined to be 5, (Z6651: Yes), and then it is determined whether the jackpot is in progress. (Z6652).

In the process of Z6652, when it is determined that the jackpot is in progress, that is, when the display value reaches 5 in the jackpot middle effect (promotion effect) and the promotion screen shown in FIG. 581 (b) is displayed. (Z6652: Yes) sets the promoted flag 223td to ON (Z6653), and ends this process. In the present embodiment, when the promoted flag 223td is set to ON, the round effect is executed in the effect mode for indicating the promotion success (indicating the probable change jackpot) in the subsequent round games. There is. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the problem that the continuous hitting effect (promotion effect) is executed again in the subsequent round effect even though the promotion screen (see FIG. 581 (b)) is executed.

Next, the contents of the hit-related command process 26 (Z3974) will be described with reference to FIG. 591. FIG. 591 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit-related command process 26 (Z3974). The hit-related command process 26 (Z3974) is a part of the content of the process executed when each command is received for the hit-related command process 23 (see Z3914 in FIG. 531) in the 23rd embodiment described above. It differs in that it has changed. If the same processing is not performed, the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted.

When the hit-related command process 26 (Z3974) is executed, if it is determined that the opening command has been received in the Z4101 process (Z4101: Yes), the hit-time effect setting process is executed (Z4151), and the Z4102 process is executed. Then, this process is terminated. The detailed contents of the hitting effect setting process (Z4151) will be described later with reference to FIG. 592.

In the processing of Z4103, if it is determined that the round number command has been received (Z4103: Yes), the processing of Z4104 is executed, then the round effect setting processing is executed (Z4152), and this processing is terminated. The detailed contents of the round effect setting process (Z4152) will be described later with reference to FIG. 593.

Further, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received in the processing of Z4103 (Z4103: No), Z4105 to the same as the hit-related command processing 23 (see Z3914 in FIG. 531) in the above-mentioned 23rd embodiment. The processing of Z4111 is executed. Then, when it is determined that the ending command has been received in the processing of Z4111 (Z4111: Yes), the hitting effect end processing is executed (Z4153), the processing of Z4112 is executed, and this processing is terminated. The detailed contents of the hitting effect end process (Z4153) will be described later with reference to FIG. 594.

Next, the contents of the hit-in-the-middle effect setting process (Z4151) executed by the hit-related command process 26 (Z3974) described above will be described with reference to FIG. 592. FIG. 592 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hitting effect setting process (Z4151). In this hit-and-hit effect setting process (Z4151), the big-hit-middle effect executed during the current big-hit game is performed according to the type of the big-hit game and the type of the third symbol (probability variation symbol or normal symbol) indicating the big-hit winning. The process for setting the effect mode is executed.

When the hitting effect setting process (Z4151) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot symbol (third symbol) is a probabilistic symbol (Z6801). Here, in the present embodiment, a variation effect is executed in which the third symbol is variablely displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the period during which the special symbol variation is executed. Then, at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination indicating the jackpot winning, the third symbol is also stopped and displayed in the combination indicating the jackpot winning (for example, a combination of the same numbers (666, etc.)). As a combination indicating the jackpot winning of the third symbol, a combination that can also notify the jackpot type of the winning jackpot (probability variation jackpot, normal (time saving) jackpot, etc.) (for example, probability variation symbol "777" indicating probability variation jackpot) and It has a combination that does not notify the jackpot type (for example, a normal symbol "666" that can be displayed in either a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot). Then, when the stop display is made with the combination of the third symbols that do not notify the jackpot type, the jackpot type (probability variation jackpot, normal (short time) jackpot) of this time is notified by the jackpot medium effect executed during the jackpot game. It is configured to perform promotion effects.

With this configuration, the case of notifying the big hit type at the stop display timing of the third symbol (before the start of the big hit game) and the case of notifying the big hit type during the big hit game (during the execution of the big hit middle effect). And, since it is possible to provide the player, it is possible to play the game for a long period of time while expecting the player to win a more advantageous jackpot (probability variable jackpot), and it is possible to enhance the staging effect.

In the processing of Z6801, it is determined whether or not the player has already been notified that the jackpot is a probability variation jackpot before the start of the jackpot game, and the jackpot symbol is not a probability variation symbol, that is, it is determined to be a normal symbol. (Z6801: No), then determine whether the jackpot type this time is a probabilistic jackpot (Z6802), and if it is determined to be a probabilistic jackpot (Z6802: Yes), 5 in the upper limit storage area 223se. (Z6803), if it is determined that it is not a probabilistic jackpot, that is, if it is a normal (time saving) jackpot (Z6802: No), 4 is set in the upper limit storage area 223se (Z6804), respectively, Z6805. Move to the processing of.

As described above with reference to FIGS. 580 and 581, in the present embodiment, the continuous hitting effect is executed a plurality of times during the jackpot game, and the continuous hitting gauge RG is formed by the multiple repeated hitting effects. The number of gauges is increased, and when the number of gauges rises to 5, a promotion effect indicating that it is a probabilistic jackpot is executed. Therefore, as explained in the processing of Z6803 and Z6804, by setting 5 in the upper limit storage area 223se only when the jackpot this time is a probability variation jackpot, during a jackpot game other than the probability variation jackpot. , It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of gauges of the continuous striking gauge RG rises to 5.

Returning to FIG. 592, the description will be continued. In Z6805, the number of continuous hitting effects executed in the current hitting effect is determined with reference to the effect number selection table 222tb (Z6805), and the determined number of times is set as the value of the effect number counter tb (Z6806). .. Then, the number of rounds in which the repeated hitting effect is executed is determined, information indicating the round effect corresponding to each round is stored in the round effect storage area 223tc (Z6807), and the internal scenario is determined with reference to the internal scenario table 222sa. (Z6808), internal value migration data (internal value migration data) is created based on the number of repeated hits and the internal scenario (Z6809), and the created internal value migration data is stored in the internal migration data storage area 223sg (Z6809). Z6810), 5 is set in the difference upper limit storage area (Z6811), and this process is terminated.

As shown in the process of Z6811, in the 26th embodiment, unlike the 25th embodiment described above, the difference upper limit value is set to 5, which is the upper limit of the number of gauges of the continuous striking gauge RG. There is. That is, when it is a probabilistic jackpot and the internal value has risen to 5, for example, even if the current display value is 0, the probabilistic jackpot is based on one operation to the operating means. It is possible to display the indicated display value 5. As a result, it is possible to provide a player with an unexpected effect.

It should be noted that, as in the present embodiment, the technical idea that the displayed value can be increased to the upper limit value based on one operation to the operating means may be used in the above-mentioned 25th embodiment, or the above-mentioned second embodiment. The technical idea used in the 25th embodiment, that is, the technical idea in which the displayed value cannot be raised to the upper limit value by one operation to the operating means may be used in the 26th embodiment.

Further, in the case of the present embodiment, for example, until the internal value rises to 5, the continuous hitting effect is simply configured so as not to execute the effect of urging the player to operate the operating means. It can be changed to a one-time push effect. In this case, on the display screen shown in FIG. 580 (a), instead of the character "continuous hit", the character "blow PUSH" is used as a display mode for prompting the user to press the operating means once in the image NG. It may be displayed, and a guidance display indicating that the effect result of the promotion effect is displayed by one operation of the PUSH button 10317 may be displayed in the display area 803.

Further, in this way, when the continuous hitting effect and the one-time pressing effect can be executed as the big hit medium effect, the effect type to be executed by the player during the big hit game can be selected. Alternatively, the probability variation jackpot expectation may be different depending on the effect type, and the effect type to be executed may be determined by a predetermined lottery based on the actual jackpot type.

Returning to FIG. 592, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of Z6801 that the jackpot symbol is a probabilistic symbol (Z6801: Yes), then the effect mode of the hitting effect for showing the probabilistic jackpot is set (Z6812), and this processing is terminated. .. In other words, if the player is notified that the jackpot game has already been a probable change jackpot before the jackpot game is started, it is not necessary to execute the promotion effect in the jackpot medium effect (hit middle effect). , Different productions are performed.

With this configuration, when the probability change jackpot is won, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game does not change depending on the notification timing of the probability variation jackpot, but the production mode of the jackpot middle production is different. be able to. In this case, what is the jackpot type in the jackpot medium production that is executed when the player is notified that the jackpot is already a probability variation jackpot before the jackpot game starts (when the jackpot is hit with a probability variation symbol)? A production that can give special benefits to different players (for example, in the case of a pachinko machine 10 with specifications that can set the jackpot probability in multiple stages, the set value and the high probability state of the special symbol with the jackpot game in between If the pachinko machine 10 (so-called limit machine) has a specification that sets an upper limit on the number of times that can be set continuously, the remaining number of times until the upper limit (limit) is reached, the game state at the time of winning a big hit, etc. are notified. It is good to configure it to perform possible effects). As a result, when the same jackpot type (probability variable jackpot) is won, the benefits that the player can obtain (advantageous information that can be obtained from the staging) can be different depending on the timing at which the jackpot type is notified. It is possible to improve the interest of the game. When the above-mentioned technical idea is used, for example, in the remaining round game period after the probabilistic jackpot is notified in the promotion staging, it is possible to execute the staging mode of the jackpot middle staging when the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed. As an effect mode for the big hit middle effect when the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed, it is preferable to provide an effect mode in which the privilege is more likely to be given as the latter half goes. As a result, even when the promotion effect is executed, it is possible to create a situation that is advantageous to the player by promptly notifying the probabilistic jackpot, so that the player can enthusiastically use the operation means. It can be operated.

Next, the contents of the round effect setting process (Z4152) will be described with reference to FIG. 593. FIG. 593 is a flowchart showing the contents of the round effect setting process (Z4152). This round effect setting process (Z4152) is executed when a round number command is received in the above-mentioned hit-related command process 26 (see Z3974 in FIG. 591), and is stored in the round effect storage area 223 ct. Based on the existing round effect information, a process of setting an effect mode for a newly started round game is executed.

When the round effect setting process (Z4152) is executed, first, it is determined whether the promoted flag 223td is set to ON (Z6901), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (Z6901: Yes), The effect mode of the hitting effect for showing the probability variation jackpot is set (S6902), and this process is terminated. That is, as in the present embodiment, the promotion effect is executed so as to straddle a plurality of round games, and the effect result of the promotion effect (timing for notifying the probabilistic jackpot) is an operation by the player to the operating means. When configured to be based on the result, it is unclear at what timing the probabilistic jackpot notification is executed.

That is, as the promotion effect, even if the situation where the probability change jackpot can be notified, that is, the internal value transition data in which the internal value rises to 5, is set during the continuous hit effect executed in the second round, the second round If the player does not operate the operating means in the continuous hitting effect, the round game ends without the probability change jackpot notification being executed, and the next continuous hitting effect (for example, the fourth round) is executed. On the other hand, when the player enthusiastically operates the operating means in the second round, the probability change jackpot may be notified during the second round.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, each time a new round is started, it is determined whether the promoted flag 223td is set to ON, and if it is set to ON, a predetermined effect mode ( It is configured so that a dedicated effect mode different from the effect mode based on the information stored in the round effect storage area 223 ct) is set. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of discomfort with respect to the content of each round production in the jackpot middle production.

In this embodiment, when the promoted flag 223td indicating that the probability change jackpot notification has been executed is set to ON, the information stored in the predetermined effect mode (round effect storage area 223tc) is used. It is configured so that a dedicated production mode different from the original production mode) is set, but it is not limited to this, and the promotion production (continuous hitting production) should not be forcibly executed in the jackpot medium production. (Regulation flag) is provided, and even when it is determined that the regulation flag is set to ON, a predetermined effect mode (effect mode based on the information stored in the round effect storage area 223tc) is provided. ) May not be executed. In this case, for example, during the opening period of the jackpot game, a selection screen for the player to select whether or not to execute the promotion effect is displayed, and the player is promoted. If you choose not to perform the effect, you may configure it to turn on the regulation flag.

If it is determined in the processing of Z6901 that the promoted flag 223td is not set to ON (Z6901: No), then the information stored in the round staging storage area 223tc is read out to correspond to the number of rounds this time. The round effect to be performed is specified (Z6903), it is determined whether the specified round effect is a continuous hit effect (Z6904), and if it is determined to be a continuous hit effect (Z6904: Yes), the continuous hit effect setting flag 223si is set to "02H". "(Z6905), the start of the continuous striking effect is set (Z6906), and this process is terminated.

Further, in the processing of Z6904, when it is determined that the round effect is not the continuous hitting effect (Z6904: No), then it is determined whether the round effect is the continuous hitting notice effect (Z6907), and it is determined that the round effect is the continuous hitting notice effect. If so (Z6907: Yes), the start of the continuous hitting notice effect is set (Z6908), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the effect is not the continuous hit advance notice effect (Z6907: No), the start of the normal round effect is set (Z6909), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 594, the content of the hitting effect end process (Z4153) will be described. FIG. 594 is a flowchart showing the hitting effect end process (Z4153). This hit-in-time effect end process (Z4153) is executed when an ending command is received in the above-mentioned hit-related command process 26 (see Z3974 in FIG. 591), and is executed according to the setting status of the promoted flag 223td. A process for setting a different effect mode and a process for ending the big hit medium effect are executed.

When the winning effect end process (Z4153) is executed, first, it is determined whether the promoted flag 223td is set to ON (Z7001), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (Z7001; Yes). , The effect mode indicating the probability change state entry is determined (Z7002), the promoted flag 223td is set to off (Z7003), the process proceeds to the process of Z7007 described later, and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z7001 that the promoted flag 223td is not set to ON (Z7001: No), then it is determined whether the current jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot (Z7004), and the probabilistic jackpot is determined. If it is determined to be (Z7004: Yes), an effect mode indicating probabilistic promotion is determined (Z7005), the process proceeds to the process of Z7007 described later, and then this process is terminated.

Further, in the processing of Z7004, when it is determined that the hit is not a probable change jackpot (Z7004: No), the effect mode indicating the non-probability change state entry is determined (Z7006), and the upper limit value storage area 223se, the difference upper limit value storage area 223sf, The values of the internal migration data storage area 223sg, the display value storage area 233sh, the round staging storage area 223tc, and the migration timer are cleared (reset) (Z7007), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the 25th embodiment and the 26th embodiment described above, in the operation effect capable of executing the variable display in which the display mode is changed based on the operation of the operation means by the player, the target value is achieved. By setting (upper limit value) in advance and further defining the range of values (internal values) that can be variably displayed based on the elapsed time, the entire period of the operation effect (operation valid period) is set. Since the variable display can be continuously executed for the entire period), the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, as the transition degree of the value (internal amount) defined based on the elapsed time, as shown in FIG. 568 (a), various transition degrees based on different tendencies (mathematical expressions) can be created. It is possible to increase the variation of the production in the operation production.

In addition, in the 25th embodiment and the 26th embodiment described above, a specific transition degree is created for 1 effect period (total period of operation valid periods set during 1 effect period). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the degree of transition may be preferentially created for a part of the period and then the degree of transition may be created for another period.

Specifically, when creating a migration degree (internal migration data) for an operation effect with an operation validity period of 10 seconds and an upper limit set to 10, the priority internal migration data for the latter 5 seconds is first generated. create. In this case, the priority internal migration data is created under the condition that the internal value can be increased by up to 10 in 5 seconds. Then, when the priority internal migration data that increases the internal value by 8 in 5 seconds is created as the priority internal migration data, then the internal migration data that increases the internal value by 2 seconds with respect to the first 5 seconds. Will be created.

In this way, one effect period is divided into a plurality of sub-periods, internal migration data is created individually while giving priority to each sub-period, and finally, the upper limit of one effect period. By configuring the entire internal migration data that matches the value so that it can be created, for example, among the operation effects executed within one effect period, the period during which the player pays the most attention (for example, the final stage of the operation effect). It is possible to create internal migration data so that the internal value greatly increases for a period (a period during which an operation effect of an unusual mode is executed).

Therefore, the display mode can be easily changed (easily raised) by operating the operating means during the period in which the player is gazing, and the effect of the effect can be further enhanced. In each of the above-described embodiments, as an operation effect (continuous striking effect), a pattern for increasing the display mode (number of gauges of the continuous striking gauge RG) is described, but the display mode can be changed a plurality of times. However, for example, it may be configured to reduce the value indicated by the display mode, or a display mode having no concept of a value (for example, a plurality of display modes individually indicating a plurality of reach modes) may be used. , May be configured to be variable.

Further, in the 25th embodiment and the 26th embodiment described above, the internal migration data is created when the operation effect is executed, but the elapsed time of the operation effect is not limited to this. Depending on the situation, it may be configured to create internal migration data after the elapsed time. In this case, for example, a discriminating means capable of discriminating the operation result of the player in the first half period of the operation staging is provided, and the internal transition data in the second half period of the operation staging is created based on the result of the discriminating means. Well, specifically, whether or not the upper limit that can be variablely displayed (internal value after the first half period has elapsed) has been reached in the first half period (whether or not the player is enthusiastically operating the operating means). Internal transition that makes it easy for the internal value to reach the upper limit value (the upper limit value that can be variablely displayed during this operation effect period) in the latter half period when it is determined that the upper limit that can be variablely displayed has been reached. It is advisable to configure the data (internal migration data whose internal value tends to increase in the early part of the latter half period) to be created, or to increase the upper limit value.

With this configuration, the player can be made to actively play the game over the entire period of the operation effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 568, in the 25th embodiment and the 26th embodiment described above, one of the four types of internal scenarios is selected as the scenario showing the tendency of the degree of migration of the internal migration data. It is configured to enable and create internal migration data based on the trends indicated by the selected internal scenario, but is not limited to this, allowing multiple internal scenarios to be selected and multiple selected internals. After creating a fusion scenario that fuses the scenarios, the internal migration data may be created based on the fusion scenario.

Further, a processing means for processing the above-mentioned internal scenario is provided, and for example, the same internal scenario is performed by performing a processing process for expanding / contracting or increasing the curve (see FIG. 568 (a)) showing the tendency of each internal scenario. It may be configured to increase the variation of the internal migration data created when is selected.

Further, in the 25th embodiment and the 26th embodiment described above, the internal scenario is read out when the internal migration data is created, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the pachinko machine 10 is powered. Elapsed time since the input of, the fluctuation time since the special symbol fluctuation was executed in a specific fluctuation pattern, the elapsed time since the jackpot game started, and the elapsed time since the jackpot game ended. Or, when it is determined that the waveform indicating the internal scenario progresses based on the time measuring result measured by the time measuring means (for example, RTC) of the pachinko machine 10 and the internal migration data is created, the progress is made. It may be configured to create internal migration data based on the waveform inside. With this configuration, the internal migration data that is easy to create can be biased depending on the timing at which the operation effect is executed. Therefore, the display in the operation effect is displayed for the player who has been playing for a long time. It is possible to easily predict the relationship between the degree of variability of the embodiment and the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the operation effect.

<27th Embodiment>
Next, the 27th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 595 to 603. Conventionally, as in the 25th embodiment described above, an operation means (PUSH button 10317) that can be operated by the player is provided, and the operation to the operation means (PUSH button 10317) is effectively determined within the operation validity period. By operating the operating means (PUSH button 10317), there is one that executes an operation effect that changes the effect mode of the effect being executed. Then, as a part of the operation effect, there is a continuous operation effect (so-called continuous hit effect) in which the effect mode is changed stepwise by operating the operation means (PUSH button 10317) a plurality of times within the operation valid period. ..

This continuous hitting effect is configured to suggest that the more variable the effect mode is, the more likely it is that a privilege that is advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit by a special symbol lottery) will be given. Each time the means (PUSH button 10317) is operated (pressed), it is determined whether or not to change the effect mode, and when it is determined that the effect mode is to be changed, repeated hits are made so as to change the effect mode. The production was controlled. Then, every time the player operates the operating means (PUSH button 10317), an operation notification (for example, output of a pressing sound) for notifying the player that the operating means (PUSH button 10317) has been operated is executed. By doing so, when the effect mode is not changed even though the PUSH button 10317 is operated, the operating means fails by reliably notifying the player that the PUSH button 10317 has been operated (pressed). There is something that makes you understand what you are not doing.

However, when the above-mentioned conventional continuous striking effect is executed, it is configured to determine whether or not to change the effect mode each time the PUSH button 10317 is operated, so that the effect is short-term. When it is determined that the effect mode is changed in each of the operations to the PUSH button 10317 that are operated a plurality of times during the operation, the variable effect for changing the effect mode is before the end. There is a problem that the next variable effect is executed, and an operation effect that is difficult for the player to understand is executed.

On the other hand, in the 27th embodiment, when the operation means (PUSH button 10317) is operated within the operation valid period and the variable effect for changing the effect mode is executed based on the operation on the operation means. Is configured so that the next variable effect is not executed until the effect period of the variable effect has elapsed. With such a configuration, the variable effect executed based on the operation to the operating means is executed in duplicate, or the running variable effect is stopped and a new variable effect is executed. , It is possible to prevent the effect of the operation effect from being lowered.

Further, even during the effect period of the variable effect, the operation notification executed when the player operates the operation means can be executed. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the operation on the operating means executed by the player is correctly recognized within the operation valid period, so that a new variable effect is executed.

Further, in the 27th embodiment, when the player operates the operating means during the effect period of the variable effect, the variable effect is not executed, but an internal lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed. Based on the result of the internal lottery, the effect mode after the variable effect is completed is variably configured. Therefore, the player can enthusiastically operate the operating means even while the variable effect is being executed. Further, with such a configuration, even if the effect period of the variable effect is set to be long, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the motivation to operate the operation means.

The pachinko machine 10 in the 27th embodiment has a part of the ROM 222 configuration of the voice lamp control device 113, a part of the RAM 223 configuration, and a voice lamp control with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the 25th embodiment described above. The difference is that a part of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the apparatus 113 is changed, and the other parts are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the production content of the 27th embodiment>
With reference to FIGS. 595 to 596, characteristic effect contents among various effect contents executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the 27th embodiment will be described. Specifically, the content of the effect executed based on the player operating the operating means while the operation valid period is set will be described.

First, with reference to FIG. 595 (a), an aspect in which the effect mode is changed during the continuous striking effect will be described. FIG. 595 (a) is a diagram schematically showing a display mode when the effect is variable in the continuous striking effect. The content shown in FIG. 595 (a) is a diagram showing the same variable content as the display mode described with reference to FIG. 560 (b) in the above-mentioned 25th embodiment, and the player can use it. The display mode immediately after operating the operating means (after 0.1 seconds) is shown. In FIG. 595 (a), only the differences from FIG. 560 (b) described above will be described, and the description thereof will be omitted for the same contents.

When the player operates the operating means (PUSH button 10317) while the operation valid period is set, the voice output device 226 outputs a pressing sound (indicated by "duck" in the figure) for 0.1 seconds, and the spirit gauge is output. An effect display for varying (increasing) the number of gauges of the KG and an effect display for changing (increasing) the display mode of the aura worn by the character 801 are executed for 0.5 seconds. Since the figure shown in FIG. 595 (a) is immediately after the player operates the PUSH button 10317 (about 0.1 seconds later), the second-stage gauge of the spirit gauge KG is in the middle of displaying, and the character 801 is displayed. The display mode in the middle of the display for increasing the aura by one step is shown. Then, in the display area 803, the characters "remaining 6.50 seconds" indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period are displayed.

Then, in the 27th embodiment, the variable effect display for changing (increasing) the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG and the display mode of the aura worn by the character 801 are changed (largely) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. During the period (0.5 seconds) until the variable effect display is finished, even if the player operates the PUSH button 10317, only the pressing sound is output so that the new variable effect is not executed. It is composed. Therefore, since it is possible to prohibit the start of a new variable effect until the execution of the variable effect display is completed, the player is given the effect display executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It can be understood in an easy-to-understand manner.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, it is configured to take 0.15 seconds at the shortest in order to determine that the player has operated the PUSH button 10317. That is, even if the player repeatedly hits the PUSH button 10317 at intervals shorter than 0.15 seconds, the operation of pressing the PUSH button 10317 at the timing with an interval of 0.15 seconds or more is the target of the operation determination. It is configured in. With this configuration, the pressing interval of the PUSH button 10317 can be longer than the pressing sound output period (0.1 seconds), so that a situation in which a plurality of pressing sounds may be output in duplicate may occur. It is possible to physically suppress the occurrence.

Further, although a detailed description will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the operating means is operated during the period (0.5 seconds) in which the variable effect display is executed, that is, during the period in which the new variable effect is not executed. When the operating means is operated, the button display for changing the display mode of the image imitating the PUSH button 10317 displayed on the display screen is not the lottery for changing the mode of the variable effect display described above. The variable lottery is configured to be executable, and if the button display variable lottery is won, an image imitating the PUSH button 10317 displayed on the display screen is displayed after the running variable effect display is completed. It is configured to execute an effect display that changes the mode.

That is, in the present embodiment, the display mode of 1 (for example, the display mode of the character) is variably configured based on the operation of the operating means by the player, and the display mode of 1 is changed. (Variable period) is set to an invalid period in which the display mode of 1 is not changed even if the player operates the operating means, so that the situation where the display mode of 1 is duplicated and changed is prevented. is doing. Then, when the operating means is operated during the invalid period, as a process different from the process (variable) for changing the display mode of 1, in order to change another display mode different from the display mode of 1. It is configured to execute the processing of. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the display mode of 1 is duplicated and variable, and even during the period in which the display mode of 1 is variable (variable period). It is possible to make the player enthusiastically operate the operation means.

Next, with reference to FIG. 595 (b), a display mode when the variable effect display ends in a state where the button display variable lottery has been won will be described. FIG. 595 (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the display mode when the display mode of the PUSH button 10317 is changed, and is 0.4 seconds from the state shown in FIG. 595 (a) described above. It is a figure which showed the display mode which is displayed later.

As shown in FIG. 595 (b), when the variable effect display (effect display that changes the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG and the display mode of the character 801) is completed, the button display variable executed during the variable effect display period is variable. Based on the result of the lottery, the display mode of the image imitating the PUSH button 10317 displayed on the image NG is displayed in a mode different from the normal display mode (in the figure, the edge is painted black). Then, in the display area 803, the characters "remaining 6.10 seconds" are displayed.

The details will be described later, but in the button display variable lottery, the button display variable lottery for determining whether or not to change the display mode of the image imitating the PUSH button 10317 and the button display variable lottery for winning the display mode are selected. A display mode lottery for determining the type is executed. Then, when the button is won by the variable lottery, the variable condition of the display value is satisfied based on the operation to the first operation means executed after the end of the variable effect display (without executing the variable lottery). It is configured so that the player is given the privilege that the variable condition is always satisfied).

Further, in the display mode lottery, different display modes are displayed based on the type (big hit, miss) of the target special symbol lottery result (hit / fail judgment result) and the value of the upper limit value set for the continuous hitting effect. It is configured to be selected. That is, when the display mode of the image imitating the PUSH button 10317 is variable, it is possible to give a privilege that the player can predict the result of the target special symbol lottery depending on the type of the display mode. It is composed.

Therefore, even while the variable effect display is being executed, the player can enthusiastically operate the operating means. Further, as the effect period of the variable effect display becomes longer, the chance of newly changing the display value within the operation valid period, which is a limited period, decreases, and the effect of the effect decreases. However, by using the effect period of the variable effect display to enable the button variable lottery to be executed, it is possible to prevent the effect of the effect from being lowered during the operation valid period.

In this embodiment, when the player operates the operating means (PUSH button 10317) during the period when the new variable effect is not executed (additional variable invalid period), the player is made to predict the result of the special symbol lottery. It is configured to execute the possible effect by changing the display mode of the image imitating the PUSH button 10317, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when an additional variable invalid period is set. By displaying a new display mode (for example, a rock icon imitating a rock) on the image NG, an effect mode indicating that the operation to the operating means is restricted by the rock icon may be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player that the additional variable invalid period is set in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, the rock icon described above is configured to be variable based on the operation to the operating means during the additional variable invalid period, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the variable lottery is won), the rock icon is destroyed. It may be configured to display a display icon that can give a privilege advantageous to the player. In this case, as a privilege advantageous to the player, it is configured to give a privilege different from the privilege (big hit winning expectation degree) provided based on the result of the variable effect (the result of changing the spirit gauge KG). Well, for example, in the case of winning a big hit, a privilege suggesting a game state set after the end of the big hit game, a privilege suggesting the number of round games to be executed when the big hit is won, or a currently set game state. It is good to configure it to give a privilege that suggests.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from executing an effect that is difficult for the player to understand (overlapping variable effect) during the execution period of the continuous hitting effect, and it is advantageous for the player due to the plurality of effects. Since it is possible to provide a plurality of such benefits, the player can enthusiastically operate the operation means.

Next, with reference to FIG. 596, the contents of various effects executed in response to the operation to the operation means (PUSH button 10317) during the continuous hitting effect in which the operation valid period is set will be described. FIG. 596 is a timing chart showing the contents of various effects executed in response to the operation to the operation means (PUSH button 10317) during the continuous hitting effect in which the operation valid period is set.

As shown in FIG. 596, when the player presses the PUSH button 10317, a pressing sound of 0.1 seconds (indicated by "duck" in the figure) is output from the voice output device 226, and if the variable lottery is won, , A variable effect for 0.5 seconds (an effect of increasing the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG, an effect of changing the display mode of the character 801) is executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Then, while this variable effect is being executed, even if the player operates the PUSH button 10317, the additional variable invalid period is such that no new variable effect is executed.

Even during this additional variable invalid period, a pressing sound is output each time the PUSH button 10317 is pressed. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the pressing operation is properly recognized. Further, even during the additional variable invalid period, the variable lottery is configured to be executed based on the pressing operation of the PUSH button 10317, and if the variable lottery is won, it is internally variable. A state in which it is easy to win the lottery is set (corresponding to the fourth pressing of the PUSH button 10317 in FIG. 592 (a)).

Then, when a state in which it is easy to win the variable lottery is set internally, the variable effect is executed without executing the variable lottery when the PUSH button 10317, which is executed after the additional variable invalid period ends, is pressed. (See the black circle in FIG. 596 (a)). With this configuration, the player can enthusiastically operate the operating means (PUSH button 10317) even during the additional variable invalid period.

In the example shown in FIG. 596 (a), 0.5 seconds is set as the execution period of the variable effect, but the execution period of the variable effect is different depending on the type of the variable effect. ing. Specifically, the execution period of the variable effect when the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG shifts from the first stage to the second stage and from the second stage to the third stage is 0.5 seconds, from the third stage. The execution period of the variable effect at the time of transitioning from the 4th stage and the 4th stage to the 5th stage is configured to be 1 second. That is, the higher the expectation of the jackpot winning by the variable effect, the longer the execution period of the variable effect is configured, and the effect is configured to have a greater impact on the player.

With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the expected degree of jackpot winning in the variable production in an easy-to-understand manner. Further, as the variable effect progresses (as the number of gauges increases), the execution period of the variable effect becomes longer, so that the additional variable invalid period becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the operation period for executing an effect (effect for changing the display mode of the PUSH button 10317) different from the variable effect executed during the continuous striking effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the period during which the variable effect is executed and the period during which the additional variable invalid period is set are the same period, but the period is not limited to this, and the period during which the variable effect is executed is not limited to this. It may be configured so that the additional variable invalid period is longer than that. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the next variable effect from being executed immediately after the variable effect is completed.

Further, in the present embodiment, as an effect mode of the continuous striking effect, as shown in FIG. 595, an effect mode in which the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG increases is used, but the display is based on the operation by the player to the operation means. Any mode may be used as long as the mode is variable and the expected degree of granting a privilege (for example, big hit winning) that is advantageous to the player is different depending on the variable situation. Therefore, a specific value may be reduced, and an effect mode in which the degree of expectation of granting the privilege may be different depending on the amount of the reduction may be used, or the privilege may be changed depending on the number of times the display mode is changed based on the operation of the operating means by the player. It is also possible to use an effect mode in which the degree of expectation of granting is different. Further, as an idea opposite to the present embodiment, an effect mode may be used in which the expectation of granting the privilege is higher when the display mode is not variable, based on the operation of the operating means by the operating means.

Further, in the present embodiment, the player is configured to operate the operating means a plurality of times to execute an effect of changing the display mode a plurality of times, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a game. An effect of changing the display mode multiple times according to the length of the period during which the user continuously presses the operation means (long-press effect), or added to the operation means when the player operates the operation means. An effect of changing the display mode a plurality of times based on the strength and direction of the applied pressure (impact) may be used.

Further, as shown in FIG. 596, in the present embodiment, one type of "duck" is used as a voice indicating that the PUSH button 10317 has been operated (pressed) during the operation valid period. Not limited to this, for example, different voices are output when the operation means is operated in a period in which the display mode can be changed and when the operation means is operated in a period in which the display mode cannot be changed (additional variable invalid period). It may be configured as possible. With this configuration, it is effectively recognized that the operating means has been operated depending on the type of voice output when the operating means (PUSH button 10317) is operated, and the display mode is currently displayed. It is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner whether or not the period is variable.

Further, in the 27th embodiment, as a continuous striking effect, an effect capable of changing (raising) the display mode (the number of gauges of the air gauge KG) in a plurality of stages is configured, but the present invention is limited to this. The variable mode may be changed in an analog manner, or the degree of variability may be displayed as a percentage. Further, it may be configured so that the decrease in the display mode is advantageous to the player, or the larger the number of times the display mode is changed is, the more advantageous to the player.

<About the electrical configuration in the 27th embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the 27th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 597 and 598. The pachinko machine 10 in the 27th embodiment includes a part of the ROM 222 configuration of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 and a part of the RAM 223 configuration with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the 25th embodiment described above. The difference is in the change of, and the other electrical configurations are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of ROM 222 will be described with reference to FIG. 597 (a). FIG. 597 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of ROM 222 in the 27th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 597 (a), the 27th embodiment is different from the ROM 222 of the 25th embodiment described above in that the button display mode selection table 222ua is added, and is the same except for the addition. The description of the same element will be omitted.

The button display mode selection table 222ua is a data table referred to when selecting a display mode of an image imitating the PUSH button 10317 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and is a data table referred to when selecting a display mode. It is configured so that a plurality of types of display modes (display colors) are selected. In the button display mode selection table 222ua, the value of the effect timer 223ua described later is determined to be 0 in the effect timer process (see Z3281 in FIG. 601) (Z7102: Yes in FIG. 601), and the confirmation flag 223ub described later is turned on. When it is determined that the setting is set to (Z7103: Yes in FIG. 601), that is, when the variable effect display is finished, it is determined to change the display mode of the PUSH button 10317 during the variable effect display. In this case, it is referred to for selecting the display mode of the PUSH button 10317 (Z7104 in FIG. 601).

Here, the contents of the button display mode selection table 222ua will be described with reference to FIG. 597 (b). FIG. 597 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the button display mode selection table 222ua. In this button display mode selection table 222ua, the lottery result (win / fail determination result) of the target special symbol, the upper limit value set for the continuous hitting effect being executed, and the value of the acquired effect lottery counter 223qy are displayed. Corresponding to, four types of display modes (blue, yellow, red, rainbow) are defined respectively. The upper limit value is specified by reading the information stored in the upper limit value storage area 223sf.

Specifically, when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit (big hit) and "5" is set as the upper limit value, "yellow" is set in the range of "0 to 59" for the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy. If "red" is specified in the range of "60 to 89" and "rainbow" is specified in the range of "90 to 98", and "~ 4" (other than "5") is set as the upper limit, The value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is defined as "yellow" in the range of "0 to 59", "blue" in the range of "60 to 89", and "red" in the range of "90 to 98".

On the other hand, when the hit / fail judgment result is out of order and "5" is set as the upper limit value, the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is in the range of "0 to 59", "yellow" is in the range of "60 to 89". If "blue" is specified in "blue" and "red" is specified in the range of "90 to 98" and "~ 4" (other than "5") is set as the upper limit, the value of the production lottery counter 223qy. Is defined as "blue" in the range of "0 to 59", "yellow" in the range of "60 to 89", and "red" in the range of "90 to 98".

That is, four types of display modes that can be selected in the button display mode selection table 222ua are defined with different degrees of advantage for the player, and the display mode that is most disadvantageous to the player is "blue", and then The contents of the button display mode selection table 222ua are defined so that "yellow" and "red" gradually become more advantageous and "rainbow" becomes the most advantageous display mode for the player.

Explaining in detail, since the display mode "rainbow" is a display mode that can be selected only when the hit / fail determination result is "hit (big hit)", the display mode of the image imitating the PUSH button 10317 is "rainbow". ], It is possible to make the player understand that the hit / fail determination result is a hit (big hit) before the effect result of the continuous hitting effect being executed is displayed. Therefore, it is the most advantageous display mode for the player who wants to quickly grasp that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit.

Further, in the present embodiment, "rainbow" is displayed as the display mode only when the result of the target special symbol lottery (win / fail determination result) is a big hit and the set upper limit value is "5". Since it is configured so that it can be selected, when the display mode "rainbow" is selected, it is notified in advance that the display value is variable (increased) to the maximum "5" in the continuous striking effect during execution. Will be done. Therefore, even for a player who wants to change (raise) the display value to the maximum value during the continuous striking effect, it is possible to notify the player that the display value can be changed (raised) to the maximum value during the continuous striking effect. Therefore, the display mode is advantageous to the player.

Further, other display modes (“blue”, “yellow”, “red”) are defined so that the selection ratio differs depending on the result of the hit / miss judgment and the set upper limit value, and the player The display mode "blue" is most likely to be selected, followed by "yellow" and "red" when the result of the hit / fail judgment is unfavorable (outside) and the upper limit is unfavorable to the player (other than "5"). It is configured so that it is difficult to select in the order of ". Therefore, from the viewpoint of the selection ratio in the situation most disadvantageous to the player, the display mode "blue" is the display mode most disadvantageous to the player. The display mode "yellow" is more advantageous to the player than the display mode "blue", but is more disadvantageous than the display mode "red".

Even when the selection ratio of each display mode when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit (big hit) and the selection ratio of each display mode when the hit / fail judgment result is wrong are compared, the display mode is displayed. "Blue" is the most easily selected when the hit / fail judgment result is wrong, and is the most difficult to be selected when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit (big hit), followed by the display mode "yellow" and the display mode "red". In this order, it is stipulated that it will be easier to be selected at the time of winning. Therefore, even from the viewpoint of the selection ratio when the winning / failing judgment result is a result (hit) that is advantageous to the player, the selection ratio when the winning / failing judgment result is a result (missing) that is disadvantageous to the player. From the viewpoint, the display mode "blue" is the most disadvantageous display mode for the player. The display mode "yellow" is more advantageous to the player than the display mode "blue", but is more disadvantageous than the display mode "red".

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 27th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 598. FIG. 598 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 27th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 598, the RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 27th embodiment is determined to be a timer 223ua during production with respect to the configuration of the RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 25th embodiment described above (see FIG. 570). It differs from the flag 223ub in that it is added, and is the same except for that. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The effecting timer 223ua is a timer for measuring the effect period of the variable effect display executed during the operation valid period (during the continuous striking period effect), and is performed by the continuous striking operation detection process 27 (see Z3681 in FIG. 601). When a variable effect is executed in the executed normal operation process (see Z7206 in FIG. 602), a value corresponding to the effect period (0.5 seconds) of the variable effect is set. Then, the timer is updated every time the Z3271 process of the effect update process 27 (see Z3188 in FIG. 599) is executed. When the value of the effect timer 223ua is larger than 0, that is, when the variable effect display is being executed, the press lottery table 222sb is referred to in the continuous hit operation detection process 27 (see Z3681 in FIG. 601). The process of executing the variable lottery and the process of executing the variable effect display (effect display that changes the display value) (processes of Z7203 to Z7207 in FIG. 601) are skipped. Therefore, it is possible to reliably suppress the execution of a new variable effect display during the variable effect display.

Further, when the continuous striking operation detection process 27 (see Z3681 in FIG. 601) determines that the value of the timer 223ua during the effect is 1 or more (Z7202: Yes in FIG. 601), the above-mentioned PUSH button 10317 is displayed. An operation process during production (see Z7208 in FIG. 603) for executing a button variable lottery for changing the mode is executed.

Then, whether or not the value of the effecting timer 223ua is updated to 0 is determined by the effecting timer process (see Z3281 in FIG. 600) executed by the effect update process 27 (see Z3188 in FIG. 599), and is updated to 0. That is, when it is determined that the variable effect display has ended (Z7102: Yes in FIG. 600), a process for determining the display mode after the variable effect display ends is executed.

The confirmation flag 223ub is a flag for indicating that it is confirmed that the display mode of the PUSH button 10317 is variable, and is set to ON when it is confirmed that the display mode of the PUSH button 10317 is variable. This confirmation flag 223ub is changed when it is determined in the continuous hit operation detection process 27 (see Z3681 in FIG. 601) that the value of the timer 223ua during the production is 1 or more (Z7202: Yes in FIG. 601), that is, the present is variable. It is set to ON when the push lottery is won in the during-effect operation process (see Z7208 in FIG. 603) executed when it is determined that the effect is being displayed (see Z7354 in FIG. 603).

Then, in the effect timer process (see Z3281 in FIG. 600), the setting status is determined when the value of the effect timer 223ua becomes 0 (Z7102 in FIG. 600). Based on this determination result, the display mode of the PUSH button 10317 after the end of the variable effect display is determined. Further, when the player operates the operation means after the end of the variable effect display, it is referred to in the continuous hit operation detection process 27 (see Z3681 in FIG. 601) (see Z7203 in FIG. 601) and is set to ON. If it is determined, the normal operation process (see Z7206 in FIG. 602) is executed without executing the push lottery.

That is, in the 27th embodiment, the display mode after the end of the variable effect display is determined based on the setting status of the confirmation flag 223 ub, and the operation to the operation means by the player executed after the end of the variable effect display is based. It is configured to make the ease of variable display of the display value different. With this configuration, the operating means can be enthusiastically operated even during the period in which the new variable staging display is not executed.

<28th Embodiment>
Next, the 28th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 604 to 629. In the 28th embodiment, similarly to the 12th embodiment described above, even if one special symbol variation (for example, the first special symbol variation) is being executed, the other special symbol variation (for example, the first special symbol variation) is being executed. , The second special symbol change) is configured to be feasible. Then, in the twelfth embodiment described above, the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) is set as the most advantageous gaming state for the player who frequently executes the small hit game. On the other hand, in the 28th embodiment, the gaming state that is most advantageous to the player is the latent probability state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) as in the first embodiment described above. It is different in that it is set to be.

In addition, it is easier for the player to select the jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery than in the case where the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the latent state. It is configured in.

Further, when the small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery and the first special symbol for showing the lottery result (small hit winning) is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), the second special symbol lottery being executed (the second special symbol lottery (confirmed display)). If the jackpot is won, the second special symbol fluctuation that is won by the jackpot is forcibly stopped and displayed by the lottery result indicating the loss.

Then, in the 28th embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special symbol change set when the small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery is set when the big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery. It is configured to be shorter than the fluctuation time of.

With this configuration, if a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery during the latent state, the period until the change in the first special symbol that has won the small hit is stopped and displayed is set to the second. Even if you win a big hit in a special symbol lottery, you can invalidate the big hit. Therefore, it is possible to set a period during which the player can play the game with peace of mind without fearing that the latent state will end based on the jackpot winning.

In addition, in the 28th embodiment, as the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, a disadvantageous jackpot type in which a game state other than the latent state is set after the jackpot game ends and a jackpot game It is configured so that the advantageous jackpot type in which the latent state is set after the end can be set, and different fluctuation times are set according to the set jackpot type. Specifically, when the disadvantageous jackpot type is set, it is easier to set a longer fluctuation time than when the advantageous jackpot type is set, and in particular, the advantageous jackpot type is set. In this case, it is possible to set a fluctuation time (for example, 1 second) shorter than the fluctuation time set when the small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery.

As a result, the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol in which the jackpot type (advantageous jackpot type) that is advantageous to the player is set based on the small hit winning in the first special symbol lottery is disadvantageous to the player. It can be made more difficult to be discarded than the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol in which the jackpot type (disadvantageous jackpot type) is set.

More specifically, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol set when the small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery and the disadvantageous jackpot type are set when the big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery. It is configured so that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol has almost the same length (about 30 seconds). That is, if the disadvantageous big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the second special symbol change is executed in the fluctuation time of 30 seconds, and then the small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol is small. The jackpot of the second special symbol is configured to be stopped and displayed before the hit.

Therefore, after the unfavorable jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is executed, it is possible to suppress an irregular game in which a left-handed game is performed in order to discard the unfavorable jackpot fluctuation being executed.

The pachinko machine 10 in the 28th embodiment has a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 included in the main control device 110, the ROM 222 included in the voice lamp control device 113, and the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment described above. A part of the configuration of the RAM 223, a part of the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and a part of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. Different, otherwise identical. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the gaming state in the 28th embodiment will be briefly described. As described above, in the 28th embodiment, there are three gaming states, specifically, a normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) and a probabilistic state (high of special symbol). A probability state (high probability state of a normal symbol) and a latent state (high probability state of a special symbol, low probability state of a normal symbol) can be set.

The latent state is configured as the most advantageous gaming state for the player, and the normal state is configured as the most disadvantageous gaming state. Further, the probabilistic state is configured as a gaming state having a higher degree of advantage than the normal state. In the following description, the advantageous latent state will be referred to as "RUSH mode". Further, the disadvantageous normal state is referred to as "normal mode", and the relatively advantageous probabilistic state is referred to as "chance mode".

Here, with reference to FIG. 604, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 28th embodiment will be described. FIG. 604 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 28th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 604, the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 28th embodiment has the same configuration as the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 12th embodiment (see FIG. 317). There is.

That is, a central first ball entry port 64c is provided below the variable display unit 80. Further, below the central first ball entry port 64c, a small attacker 4650 that is opened when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol is provided. Since the small attacker 4650 is surrounded by nails and the central first winning opening 64c on the left, right, and above, it is extremely difficult to insert a game ball during the small hit opening period of the first special symbol. .. In the 28th embodiment, the small hit of the first special symbol is provided so that the game ball enters the second entrance 640 in a state other than the RUSH mode (for example, a chance mode in which a probability change state is set). If the ball is thrown and the second special symbol makes a long fluctuation, the purpose is to forcibly end the long fluctuation, and in the RUSH mode, the second special symbol lottery is disadvantageous to the player. When the lottery result is obtained and the second special symbol change (disadvantageous special figure 2 change) for showing the disadvantageous lottery result is executed, the disadvantageous special figure 2 change is forcibly terminated (in a stop display mode indicating a deviation). This is because it is installed for the purpose of forcibly stopping) and not for winning a prize ball.

That is, even if the second special symbol fluctuates for a long time, it is configured to win a small hit with a high probability (120/480) when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed. With the start of the game as a trigger (when the stop symbol indicating a small hit is confirmed and displayed), the second special symbol that has been fluctuating for a long time in a game state other than RUSH mode is forcibly stopped with a stop symbol that is out of the game. Can be made to. Further, in the RUSH mode, the second special symbol that is changing in the disadvantageous special figure 2 can be forcibly stopped by the off-stop symbol. Therefore, it is assumed that the ball has entered the second entrance 640 in a game state other than the RUSH mode (for example, a probable change state in which a right-handed game is executed), and a long fluctuation of the second special symbol has started. However, the long variation of the second special symbol can be terminated without waiting for the end of the long variation of the second special symbol.

In the 28th embodiment, when the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times) (when the time saving end condition is satisfied) without winning the jackpot in the state where the probability change state is set, the latent state is entered. It is configured to migrate to. Therefore, in the right-handed game executed in the state where the probability change state is set, the game ball vigorously flows down the right side area (the game area provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80), and the right electric accessory 64ra. There is a risk that the ball will jump over and enter the second entrance 640, and a long fluctuation of the second special symbol will be executed.

Further, since the first special symbol lottery is configured to be executed even while the long fluctuation of the second special symbol is being executed, the first special symbol lottery is executed a plurality of times. As a result, the above-mentioned time-saving end condition is satisfied, and the state can be changed from the probable change state to the latent state. In this case, even if the latent state (RUSH mode), which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, is set, the game ball is acquired in the RUSH mode unless a new lottery of the second special symbol is executed. (Because it is not possible to acquire a game ball by winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery), there is a problem that it is not possible to provide a RUSH mode that is advantageous to the player.

On the other hand, in the 28th embodiment, as in the 12th embodiment described above, the game ball is made to enter the right first entry slot 64r by the right-handed game during the probability change state, and the first special symbol lottery is performed. Even if the long fluctuation of the second special symbol is executed during the probabilistic change state, the long change of the second special symbol being executed by the first special symbol lottery mainly executed during the probabilistic change state is performed. It is possible to forcibly terminate the fluctuation. Therefore, when the time saving end condition is satisfied while the probability change state is set and the RUSH mode (latent state) that is advantageous to the player is set, a situation occurs in which the second special symbol fluctuates for a long time. Can be suppressed.

In the 28th embodiment, even if a specific jackpot (latent jackpot) is won in a special symbol lottery, the RUSH mode (latent state) is executed (set) after the jackpot game is completed. However, if the jackpot is won for both the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) (the jackpot game is executed), and the game is being executed. Since it is configured to forcibly terminate the special symbol change, if the RUSH mode (latent state) is set after the jackpot game ends, a new second special symbol change will be started, and the second special symbol change will be started. 2 It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the special symbol fluctuates for a long time.

In addition, in the 28th embodiment, the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed as compared with the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment described above, and a prize ball can be obtained by winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery. It is configured so that the first special symbol lottery can be easily executed during the game state (RUSH mode). Specifically, it is configured so that it is easy to win a normal symbol even in the RUSH mode (latent state) in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set.

Then, when the first special symbol lottery is executed and the small hit is won during the RUSH mode, the first special symbol variation is executed in a specific fluctuation time (30 seconds), and the small hit is won. 1 If the second special symbol fluctuation that is changing at the time when the special symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed is a small hit fluctuation, the small hit fluctuation is interrupted, and if it is a big hit fluctuation or an out-of-order fluctuation, a lottery is performed. It is configured to be forcibly stopped in a display mode indicating that the result is off.

With this configuration, even if a jackpot (disadvantageous jackpot) that can trigger the termination of the RUSH mode is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the RUSH mode, the disadvantageous jackpot is changing. By displaying the stop display (confirmed display) of the first special symbol with the symbol indicating the small hit winning, the disadvantageous big hit can be discarded.

Further, in the 28th embodiment, in the second special symbol lottery executed during the RUSH mode, the advantageous jackpot in which the RUSH mode (latent state) is set again after the jackpot game ends, and the normal jackpot after the jackpot game ends. It is configured so that you can win the unfavorable jackpot in which the mode (normal state) is set, and from the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation (advantageous special figure 2 fluctuation) set when you win the advantageous jackpot. However, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation (disadvantageous special figure 2 fluctuation) set when the unfavorable jackpot is won is configured to be longer.

As a result, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery during the RUSH mode, the fluctuation time can be longer in the case of winning the disadvantageous jackpot than in the case of winning the advantageous jackpot. It can be easily discarded based on the result of the symbol lottery. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from being reduced because the advantageous jackpot that is advantageous to the player is discarded.

Further, in the 28th embodiment, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery in the RUSH mode, a variation time of 30 seconds is selected as the variation time of the special symbol variation (special diagram 1 small hit variation). The above-mentioned disadvantageous special figure 2 fluctuation (second special symbol fluctuation set when the disadvantaged jackpot is won) is also configured so that the fluctuation time of 30 seconds can be easily selected. As a result, even if the disadvantaged jackpot is won in the newly executed second special symbol lottery during the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation period, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the disadvantaged jackpot. Before, the first special symbol can be stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a small hit. Therefore, the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation period can be set as a period (invincible period) in which the RUSH mode does not end.

Further, as described above, since the fluctuation time (30-second fluctuation) of the same length is easily executed between the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation and the disadvantageous special figure 2 fluctuation in the RUSH mode. For example, even if a small hit is won in the first special symbol after winning a disadvantageous jackpot in the second special symbol lottery during the RUSH mode, the disadvantageous special figure 2 fluctuation ends before the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation. It will be. Therefore, after determining that the disadvantageous special figure 2 fluctuation has been executed, it is possible to suppress the execution of the left-handed game and the irregular game of aiming for a small hit in the first special symbol lottery. can.

Further, as shown in FIG. 604, on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in the game board 13, a second entry port (through gate) 67 and a right first entry ball provided downstream of the through gate 67 are provided. The upper surface of the right electric accessory 64ra that can open and close the upper surface of the mouth 64r and the right first ball entry port 64r, and the upper surface of the right electric accessory 64ra while the right electric accessory 64ra is closed. A second entry port 640, which is provided at a position where a game ball that has passed through the above can enter, is provided. As shown in FIG. 604, the flow path of the game ball so that only the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can reach the second entry port 640 with the right electric accessory 64ra closed. Is set. That is, even if a right-handed hit is made in a high-probability state (probability-changing state) of a normal symbol in which the right electric accessory 64ra is likely to be opened, almost all the game balls that have passed through the through gate 67 enter the right first ball. Since the ball enters the mouth 64r, the game ball cannot be entered into the second entrance 640. With this configuration, it is possible to advance the game by right-handed game even in the probable change state (chance mode).

Although detailed description is omitted, the left-handed game is performed in the low-probability state of the normal symbol rather than the number of times of the first special symbol lottery that can be executed when the right-handed game is performed in the low-probability state of the normal symbol. The number of times of the first special symbol lottery that can be executed in such a case is configured to be more likely to increase. As a result, it is possible to suppress the act of executing the right-handed game and executing the first special symbol lottery in the state where the normal mode (normal state) is set.

Further, in the 28th embodiment, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the RUSH mode, the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation is a period during which the RUSH mode cannot be terminated. It is configured to be able to execute a notification effect (invincible mode) to show the player that this is the case. As a result, during the period when the invincible mode is displayed, the second special symbol is positively changed without worrying that the disadvantageous jackpot game is executed, and the prize ball is won by the small hit game. Can be done.

On the other hand, in the RUSH mode, if an advantageous jackpot different from the disadvantageous jackpot is won, the fluctuation time of the advantageous special figure 2 fluctuation is shorter than the fluctuation time corresponding to the disadvantageous jackpot (for example, 1 second). Is configured to be easy to select. In this way, by changing the fluctuation state (variation time) of the special symbol according to the degree of advantage to the player, it is possible to display the variable mode of the second special symbol variation based on the special figure 1 small hit winning. can.

Further, in the 28th embodiment, when the RUSH mode is set, the RUSH mode is configured to continue until a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery. Then, if the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times) in the RUSH mode without winning the big hit, the above-mentioned invincible mode is easily executed (invincible mode high probability state). It is configured.

Specifically, as a fluctuation pattern table referred to when selecting the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation executed in the RUSH mode (latent state), the special symbol lottery is performed a predetermined number of times (50 times) in the RUSH mode. It has a first latent probability table that is referred to until it is executed, and a second latent probability table that is referred to after the special symbol lottery has been executed a predetermined number of times (50 times) during the RUSH mode. The first latent probability table is configured so that a long fluctuation time (30 seconds) can be easily selected when the first special symbol lottery is missed and the winner is won, as compared with the second latent probability table. That is, even though the small hit is not won, the number of times of the first special symbol lottery executed per unit time is reduced by executing the first special symbol fluctuation for a long time, and as a result, the unit It is configured so that the expectation of winning a small hit by the first special symbol lottery per hour is low.

Therefore, if the RUSH mode continues for a long time, it is possible to execute a game that is more advantageous to the player, so that it is possible to suppress the game in the RUSH mode from becoming monotonous, and the player can play the game early. It is possible to suppress getting bored with.

<Regarding the content of the production in the 28th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 605 and 606, among the various effect contents executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the 28th embodiment, the characteristic effect content is executed. In the 27th embodiment, a part of the effect content in the RUSH mode, which is executed when the gaming state (latent state) that is most advantageous to the player is set with respect to the 12th embodiment described above. It differs in that it is changed, and is the same except for that. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 605 (a), a display mode when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery in the RUSH mode will be described. FIG. 605 (a) is a display displayed when a special symbol change (special figure 1 small hit change) indicating that a small hit was won in the first special symbol lottery is executed during the latent state (RUSH mode). It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of an aspect.

As shown in FIG. 605 (a), when the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation is executed, a character 811 imitating a rabbit wearing a flame is displayed near the center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and is displayed below. Is displayed with the characters "Enter invincible mode !!". With these displays, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the jackpot game based on the disadvantageous jackpot is not executed. That is, the above-mentioned display mode is a guidance notification mode for notifying that the present is an advantageous period that is advantageous for the player.

Further, on the lower right side of the screen, the period during which the above-mentioned invincible mode continues, that is, the remaining period display for showing the remaining variation time of the special figure 1 small hit variation is displayed in the display area Dm28a. In FIG. 605 (a), since the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation has just started, the characters “remaining 30:00 seconds” indicating the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation are displayed. The value of this remaining period display decreases with the passage of time, and when 30 seconds have passed and "0:00 seconds remaining" is displayed, the first special symbol indicates a small hit. Stop display (confirmed display).

By displaying the remaining period by the display area Dm28a, the player can easily determine the remaining period of the invincible mode, so that the player can play the game more enthusiastically to execute the second special symbol lottery during the invincible period. Can be done. In the 28th embodiment, a small hit is won (special figure 2 small hit winning) in the second special symbol lottery executed during the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation, and the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation is stopped and displayed. When the second special symbol change (special figure 2 small hit fluctuation) indicating the special figure 2 small hit winning is stopped and displayed, the small hit game corresponding to the special figure 2 small hit winning is executed. During the small hit game period, the remaining period of the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation does not decrease, and after the end of the small hit game, the remaining period of the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation is reduced again. Therefore, even if a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery during the invincible mode, the remaining period of the invincible mode does not decrease during the small hit game, and the player can play the game in the invincible mode period. Can be entertained to the maximum.

Then, in the second special symbol lottery executed during the invincible mode period, if a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player, that is, a disadvantaged jackpot in which the normal state is set after the jackpot game is completed, that fact is announced. The exclusion effect for notifying the player is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 605 (b), the effect content of the exclusion effect will be described. FIG. 605 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display mode of the exclusion effect executed when a disadvantageous jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery during the invincible mode period.

As described above, in the 28th embodiment, it is easy to set a variation time of 30 seconds as the special figure 1 small hit variation executed when the small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery executed in the RUSH mode. Similarly, the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is easily set as the disadvantageous jackpot fluctuation executed when the disadvantageous jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery executed in the RUSH mode. In this way, by configuring the fluctuation time set for the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation to be the same as the fluctuation time set for the disadvantageous jackpot fluctuation, the second special during the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation. If the unfavorable jackpot is won in the symbol lottery, the unfavorable jackpot can be discarded by the special figure 1 small hit, so the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation period can be set as a period advantageous to the player (invincible mode). can.

However, if the disadvantageous jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery executed immediately after the invincible mode is set, the special symbol 1 small hit variation is disadvantageous as the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation is disadvantageous. Each of the big hit fluctuations is executed for about 30 seconds, and even though the RUSH mode is in progress, the small hit game is not executed for a continuous period, and there is a possibility that the player's motivation to play may decrease.

Therefore, when the unfavorable jackpot fluctuation is executed during the invincible mode, as shown in FIG. 605 (b), the exclusion for suggesting to the player that the unfavorable jackpot is discarded by the special figure 1 small hit. It is configured to perform the production. By providing the dedicated effect in this way, the player's attention can be drawn to the effect content executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, so that the period during which the small hit game is not executed continues. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play due to the above.

When the exclusion effect is executed, a rabbit-like character 811 chases the enemy character 860 that imitates a turtle at the bottom center of the display screen, and above that, "until the enemy is eliminated, XX seconds are left." Character is displayed. Then, the value of "10:00" displayed in the display area Dm28a indicating the remaining time of the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation is inserted and displayed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the remaining period until the disadvantageous jackpot is discarded is 10 seconds by the special figure 1 small hit.

Further, the display area Dm3 in which the guidance display mode “right-handed” for guiding the game method in the RUSH mode is displayed is displayed in a smaller size than the display in the normal RUSH mode (see FIG. 605 (a)). .. As a result, it is difficult to execute a new second special symbol lottery in the RUSH mode, that is, even if a right-handed game is performed, it is more disadvantageous to the player than in the normal RUSH mode. Can suggest to one. That is, the size of the display area Dm3 is configured to suggest to the player the degree of advantage when the game is played by the game method according to the guidance display mode.

In the 28th embodiment, the exclusion effect is configured to be executed only when the special figure 1 small hit is fluctuating in the RUSH mode and the disadvantageous big hit is won in the second special symbol. Not limited to this, for example, in a part of the case where the small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is configured to be selected, and the small hit fluctuation of 30 seconds is executed. In this case, the exclusion effect may be executed regardless of the presence or absence of the first special symbol change, or the fluctuation time of 30 seconds may be executed in a part of the case where the advantageous jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery. It may be configured to be selected, and when the advantageous jackpot fluctuation of 30 seconds is executed, the exclusion effect may be executed regardless of the presence or absence of the first special symbol fluctuation.

With this configuration, as a result of the exclusion effect, the special figure 1 small hit game (small hit game that opens the small attacker 4650) and the special figure 2 small hit game (the first variable winning device 65 are opened). Since it is possible to provide a small hit game) and a special figure 2 big hit game (a big hit game that opens the first variable winning device 65), even during the production period of the exclusion effect for the player, It is possible to play the game while expecting that a more advantageous game result will be provided.

In addition, it is configured to be able to execute a 30-second deviation change in a part of the case where the second special symbol lottery is won, and when this 30-second deviation change is executed, regardless of the presence or absence of the first special symbol change. Instead, it may be configured to execute the exclusion effect, and regardless of the result of the second special symbol lottery, the variation effect pattern of the special figure 1 small hit variation is in the middle of the change (for example, the special figure 1 small hit variation). A variable staging pattern may be configured such that the exclusion staging is executed from the timing when the remaining period of the staging is 20 seconds).

By configuring in this way, even if the second special symbol lottery does not actually result in a disadvantageous jackpot, the player is made to think that the disadvantaged jackpot was won and the disadvantaged jackpot was discarded during the invincible mode. Therefore, the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, in the RUSH mode, in order to prevent the player from being excessively awarded the prize ball in a short time, when the variation time of the deviation fluctuation of the second special symbol is set to be long, the variation time is set. Since the exclusion effect can be executed by using the fluctuation period of the deviation fluctuation, it is possible to suppress the player's motivation to play due to the execution of the deviation fluctuation for a long time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 606, the effect contents in the invincible mode high probability state set after the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times) in the RUSH mode will be described. FIG. 606 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed during the invincible mode high probability state.

In the 28th embodiment, when the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times) in the RUSH mode, the type of the variation pattern table referred to when selecting the variation time of the special symbol variation is switched. It is composed. Specifically, as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation, the small hit fluctuation is selected from the fluctuation pattern table (first latent probability table) in which the fluctuation of 30 seconds is selected at the time of the small hit fluctuation and a part of the deviation fluctuation. It is configured so that the fluctuation pattern table referred to is switched to the fluctuation pattern table (second latent probability table) in which the fluctuation of 30 seconds is selected only at the time.

Therefore, in a state where the second latent probability table is referred to (a state in which the special symbol lottery is executed more than a predetermined number of times (50 times) in the RUSH mode), the first special symbol variation other than the small hit variation is performed. Is completed early, so that the number of executions of the first special symbol lottery per unit time can be increased, and as a result, the ratio of the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation per unit time can be increased. (Invincible mode high probability state).

When the invincible mode high probability state is set, the characters "in high probability state" are displayed in the display area Dm28b at the bottom of the display screen, and the guidance mode for guiding the current game content below that. The text "It's easy to enter invincible mode !!" is displayed. With these displays, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the gaming state is more advantageous to the player in the RUSH mode.

<About the electrical configuration in the 28th embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the 28th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 607 to 613. The 28th embodiment has a partial configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, a partial configuration of the RAM 203, and a partial configuration of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 with respect to the 12th embodiment described above. And the partial configuration of the RAM 223 are different in that they are different from each other, and are the same except for the above. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 607 (a), the contents specified in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the 28th embodiment will be described. FIG. 607 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the 28th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 607 (a), the ROM 202 of the 28th embodiment is the first ROM 202 of the twelfth embodiment described above (see FIG. 321 (a)) instead of the first random number table 202a. The hit random number 28 table 202va is replaced with the small hit random number table 202b, the small hit random number 28 table 202vb is replaced with the big hit type selection table 202d, and the big hit type selection 28 table 202vd is replaced with the small hit type selection table 202e. The type selection 28 table 202ve is different in that the variation pattern selection 28 table 202vf is provided instead of the variation pattern selection table 202f, and the variation pattern scenario 28 table 202vg is provided instead of the variation pattern scenario table 202ka. be.

First, the contents of the random number 28 table 202va per first will be described with reference to FIG. 607 (b). FIG. 607 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the random number 28 table 202va per first. The first random number 28 table 202va has a special symbol state (low probability state, high probability state) with respect to the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 321 (b)) in the twelfth embodiment described above. The difference is that the value of the first random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit is specified differently, and the other points are the same. The detailed description of the same content will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 607 (b), regardless of the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), the first hit acquired as a value determined to be a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol. The value "7,8" of the random number counter C1 is defined, and the value "0 to 5" of the acquired first random number counter C1 is defined as the value determined to be a big hit in the high probability state of the special symbol. .. Since the range of values that the first random number counter C1 can take is "0 to 479", the jackpot probability is 2/480 (1/240) in the low probability state of the special symbol, and in the high probability state of the special symbol. The jackpot probability is 6/480 (1/80).

Next, the contents of the small hit random number 28 table 202vb will be described with reference to FIG. 607 (c). FIG. 607 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the small hit random number 28 table 202vb. As shown in FIG. 607 (c), the small hit random number 28 table 202vb is smaller than the first special symbol with respect to the small hit random number table 202b (see FIG. 322 (a)) in the twelfth embodiment described above. The difference is that the range of the value of the first random number counter determined to be a hit is changed, and the other points are the same. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

Specifically, for the first special symbol whose symbol type is the first special symbol, the small hit determination value is defined in the range where the value of the first random number counter C1 is "360 to 479" regardless of the probability state of the special symbol. For the second special symbol whose symbol type is the second special symbol, the small hit determination value is defined in the range where the value of 1 of the first random number counter C1 is "240 to 479" regardless of the probability state of the special symbol.

That is, in the 28th embodiment, the small hit is won with a probability of about 1/4 when the 1st special symbol lottery is executed, and the probability of about 1/2 when the 2nd special symbol lottery is executed. It is configured to win a small hit. In this embodiment, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, a small hit game is executed in which the small attacker 4650, which cannot (difficultly) win a ball during the small hit game, is opened. When a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the first variable winning device 65, which is opened during the big hit game, is configured to execute the small hit game. Therefore, even if it is set to win a small hit with a high probability in the first special symbol lottery, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively given a specific (prize ball). Further, in the second special symbol lottery, the small hit probability is set to be higher than the small hit probability of the first special symbol lottery, and the second special symbol lottery is easier to be executed than the first special symbol lottery. In the latent state, it is possible to frequently execute a small hit game, and it is possible to easily increase (difficult to decrease) the number of balls held by the player. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the 28th embodiment, the latent probability state is the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 608, the contents of the jackpot type selection 28 table 202vd will be described. FIG. 608 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the jackpot type selection 28 table 202vd. As shown in FIG. 608, the jackpot type selection 28 table 202vd changes the types of jackpot types that can be selected with respect to the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 323) in the twelfth embodiment described above. Is different. In addition, as the types of jackpot types that can be selected are changed, the setting values of the time reduction counter 203f and the setting contents of the probability change flag 203g specified for each jackpot type are also different, and each jackpot. The selection rate of the type is also different. Since the other elements, for example, the type of the variable winning device to be opened for the jackpot game and the opening operation content thereof, are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 608, in the 28th embodiment, three jackpot types of "big hit A28" to "big hit C28" are defined as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. Further, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, two jackpot types of "big hit D28" and "big hit E28" are defined.

As shown in FIG. 608, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 corresponds to the range of "0 to 34", and the jackpot type corresponds to "big hit A28". It is specified with. This "big hit A28" is a type of jackpot (8 rounds normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 and the normal mode (normal state) is set after the jackpot ends.

In the present embodiment, as in the twelfth embodiment described above, the value of the time saving counter 203f set at the end of the big hit game (after the end of the big hit game) is configured to be different depending on the game state at the time of winning the big hit. However, when this "big hit A28" is won, the value of the time saving counter 203f is set regardless of which game state (normal state, probable change state, latent state) is at the time of the big hit winning. 0 is set. Further, at the end of the big hit game (after the end of the big hit game), the probability change flag 203g is configured not to be set on (set to off). That is, after the jackpot game is completed, the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) is always set as the jackpot type. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the game state set after the jackpot game is completed, it is the most disadvantageous jackpot type for the player.

Next, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "35 to 79", and the jackpot type is defined in association with "big hit B28". ing. This "big hit B28" is a type of big hit (8 round probability variable big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds and the high probability state of the special symbol is set after the big hit ends.

When this "big hit B28" is won, a different value is set in the value of the time reduction counter 203f according to the game state at the time of the big hit, and the game state at the time of the big hit is in the normal state. In some cases, the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to 0, in the case of the probabilistic state, the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to 100, and in the case of the latent state, the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to 50. Is stipulated to be. Further, it is stipulated that the probability change flag 203g is set to ON at the end of the big hit game (after the end of the big hit game). That is, in the normal state, when the "big hit B28" is won, the latent probability state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) is set after the jackpot game ends, and the probability change state and the latent probability state are set. In the case of winning the "big hit B28", the probability change state (high probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) is set after the end of the jackpot game.

Further, the time saving counter 203f is configured to have a larger value when the "big hit B28" is won in the probability change state than when the "big hit B28" is won in the latent state. As described in the twelfth embodiment described above, the time reduction counter 203f is a counter for indicating a period during which the high probability state of the normal symbol continues, and is a counter value based on the execution of the special symbol lottery. Is subtracted and the low probability state of the normal symbol is set when the counter value becomes 0.

That is, when the "big hit B28" is won in the probabilistic state, the game state in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is hard to be set is set as compared with the case where the "big hit B28" is won in the latent state. .. In the 28th embodiment, since the latent probability state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, the "big hit B28" is won in the probability variation state. However, winning the "big hit B28" in the latent state is a big hit that is advantageous to the player.

Next, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "80 to 99", and the jackpot type is defined in association with "big hit C28". ing. This "big hit C28" is a type of jackpot (8 rounds probability variation jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 and a high probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends.

When this "big hit C28" is won, 10000 is set in the value of the time saving counter 203f regardless of which game state (normal state, probable change state, latent state) is at the time of the big hit winning. .. Further, it is stipulated that the probability change flag 203g is set to ON at the end of the big hit game (after the end of the big hit game). That is, after the jackpot game is completed, the probability variation state (high probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) is always set as the jackpot type.

As described above, in the 28th embodiment, when the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, "big hit A28" is selected at a rate of 35%, and "big hit B28" is selected at a rate of 45%. It is configured so that "big hit C28" is selected at a rate of 20%. And, regardless of which jackpot type is selected, the number of round games executed during the jackpot game is the same (8 rounds), so from the viewpoint of the prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game. , A jackpot game with no advantages or disadvantages is executed. Further, from the viewpoint of the degree of advantage of the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game, the "big hit A28" is the most disadvantageous to the player, and the "big hit B28" is the most advantageous jackpot type to the player. Further, the "big hit C28" is a jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player than the "big hit A28" and more disadvantageous to the player than the "big hit B28".

On the other hand, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 34", and the jackpot type is "big hit D28". ing. This "big hit D28" has the same contents as the "big hit A28" which is one of the big hit types of the first special symbol (special figure 1) described above. That is, when this "big hit D28" is won, 0 is set in the value of the time saving counter 203f regardless of which game state (normal state, probable change state, latent state) is at the time of the big hit winning. Will be done. Further, at the end of the big hit game (after the end of the big hit game), the probability change flag 203g is configured not to be set on (set to off). That is, after the jackpot game is completed, the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) is always set as the jackpot type. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the game state set after the jackpot game is completed, it is the most disadvantageous jackpot type for the player.

Next, "big hit E28" is defined as a big hit type in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "35 to 99". This "big hit E28" is a type of big hit (8 rounds probability variable big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds and the high probability state of the special symbol is set after the big hit is completed.

When this "big hit E28" is won, 100 is set in the value of the time saving counter 203f regardless of which game state (normal state, probable change state, latent state) is at the time of the big hit winning. .. Further, it is stipulated that the probability change flag 203g is set to ON at the end of the big hit game (after the end of the big hit game). That is, after the jackpot game is completed, the probability variation state (high probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) is always set as the jackpot type.

Next, with reference to FIG. 609, the contents of the small hit type selection 28 table 202ve in the 28th embodiment will be described. FIG. 609 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the small hit type selection 28 table 202ve. The small hit type selection 28 table 202ve defines the small hit type for the first special symbol with respect to the above-mentioned small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16B), and the small hit game. The difference is that the release target to be opened is changed, the symbol confirmation time is changed, and the control content to be performed for the special symbol change during execution is changed, and the other points are the same. .. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

To explain specifically the contents specified in the small hit type selection 28 table 202ve, the entire range "0 to 99" that the small hit type counter C5 can take is set for the first special symbol (special figure 1). On the other hand, "small hit A28" is associated with it. Since the range of possible values of the small hit type counter C5 is 100 of "0 to 99", the ratio of "small hit A28" selected at the time of winning the small hit of the first special symbol lottery is 100% ( It is configured to be 100/100).

When "small hit A28" is selected, a small hit game is executed in which the second attacker (small attacker) 4650 is opened for 0.1 seconds. As described above with reference to FIG. 604, the small attacker 4650 is arranged at a position where it is difficult for the game ball to win a prize even if the opening operation is executed, and the opening time is as short as 0.1 seconds. In the small hit game based on "small hit A28", the player can hardly win the prize ball.

Although detailed description is omitted, if a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, the third symbol display device is used until the small hit game (0.1 seconds) is completed. On the display surface of 81, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode (for example, "341") indicating that the first special symbol lottery was not won. That is, when the small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery in the normal state, the display mode for notifying the player that the small hit has been won and that the small hit game is being executed is displayed. It is configured not to. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the small hit game that cannot (difficultly) win the prize ball is executed (that is), so that the small hit game is executed. However, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the prize ball cannot be obtained and the player's motivation to play is reduced.

Further, when the "small hit A28" is won, the comparison is "0.1 seconds" as the symbol determination period of the first special symbol, that is, the period in which the stop display mode indicating the lottery result is continuously stopped and displayed. A short time is specified. As a result, the period from when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode indicating "small hit A28" to the end of the small hit game can be shortened, so that the period until the small hit game ends can be shortened. During that time, even if the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

Further, when "small hit A28" is selected, the processing of interruption or discard is executed for the second special symbol change (special figure 2 change) being executed. Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the 28th embodiment, when the small hit game is executed based on the result of one of the special symbol lottery (when the special symbol indicating the small hit is confirmed and displayed), it is being executed. The result of the special symbol lottery for the other special symbol change is discriminated, and the content of the control process executed for the other special symbol being changed is configured to be different based on the discriminant result.

More specifically, when the other special symbol is undergoing a jackpot fluctuation or a missed fluctuation, the other special symbol fluctuation (big hit fluctuation or the missed fluctuation) is discarded (forced in a display mode indicating the missed). If the other special symbol is a small hit fluctuation, the control to interrupt the small hit fluctuation (the subtraction of the fluctuation time is stopped until the small hit game is completed) is executed. It is configured to be possible.

With this configuration, for example, in the RUSH mode in which the latent state is set, if a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, and the second special symbol is in the big hit fluctuation, the big hit. It is possible to discard the fluctuation and not to discard the small hit fluctuation if the small hit fluctuation is in progress. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to stop and display the lottery result (big hit winning) of the second special symbol whose latent state can be terminated, so that the RUSH mode can be easily entertained by the player for a long time.

Further, in the 28th embodiment, when the big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the advantageous big hit in which the RUSH mode (latent state) is set again after the big hit game ends, and the normal mode (normal mode) after the big hit game ends. It is configured so that the fluctuation time of different length is set depending on the disadvantageous jackpot for which the normal state) is set. Specifically, the case where the advantageous jackpot is won is better than the case where the disadvantaged jackpot is won. Also, it is configured so that a short fluctuation time (1 second) can be easily selected.

As a result, it is possible to make it easier to stop and display the first special symbol in the display mode indicating the winning of the small hit during the special symbol change of the disadvantageous jackpot than during the special symbol change of the advantageous jackpot. That is, the disadvantageous jackpot can be more easily discarded than the advantageous jackpot. Therefore, in the latent state, a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, a prize ball is won by the small hit game, and a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, creating a situation where the disadvantageous big hit is easily discarded. It is possible to provide a novel playability that makes people expect to be played.

Here, the control content when interrupting the second special symbol change during execution based on the winning of the small hit of the first special symbol will be briefly described. When the control process for interrupting the second special symbol change during execution (special figure 2 variation) is executed, the process for interrupting the process for measuring the change time elapsed of the second special symbol change during execution is executed. Will be executed. Specifically, when the small hit game is executed, the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is set to on, and while the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is set to on, the second special symbol (special figure 2) is set. 2) The process of skipping the process of updating the value of the variable time counter 203n indicating the variable time (remaining variable time) of FIG. 2 is executed. Then, when the small hit game ends, the restart condition is satisfied (the temporary stop flag of the special figure 2 is set to off), and the process of updating the value of the interrupted special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is restarted. With this configuration, it is possible to prohibit the remaining fluctuation time of the second special symbol change during execution from being reduced while the small hit game is being executed (while the interruption condition is satisfied). Therefore, while the small hit game is being executed, for example, the winning second special symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed, and the winning game (big hit game, small hit game) is executed in duplicate. Can be banned. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

In addition, since the process of measuring the change time elapsed of the special symbol change during execution is only interrupted (skip), the second special symbol change that was executed before the small hit game after the restart condition is satisfied is satisfied. Can be restarted. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the player of the result of the special symbol lottery that has already been executed. In this embodiment, when the interruption condition is satisfied when the small hit is won, the process of interrupting the special symbol change during execution is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the special symbol change during execution may be continuously executed, and the stop display of the second special symbol change may be interrupted after the change time of the special symbol change has elapsed. That is, even if the interruption condition is satisfied, the update process for updating the fluctuation time of the special symbol change is continuously executed, and the update process is executed until the preset variation time elapses. If it is determined whether or not the condition is satisfied and it is determined that the interruption condition is satisfied, the stop display of the special symbol change may not be executed until the restart condition is satisfied. As a result, it is not necessary to interrupt the update process for updating the fluctuation time of the special symbol change in the middle, so that the processing load can be reduced.

Next, returning to FIG. 609, among the contents specified in the small hit type selection 28 table 202ve, the small hit type (“small hit C28”, small hit C28” that can be selected when the small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery. The contents of E28) will be explained. "Small hit C28" is associated with the value of the small hit type counter C5 in the range of "0 to 89", and "small hit E28" is associated with the range of "90 to 99". .. Since the range of possible values of the small hit type counter C5 is 100 from "0 to 99", the ratio of selecting "small hit C28" is 90% when the small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery. (90/100), the ratio of selecting "small hit E28" is configured to be 10% (10/100).

When "small hit C28" is selected, a small hit game is executed in which the first attacker (first variable winning device) 65 is opened for 1.5 seconds. In addition, "0.5 seconds" is selected as the symbol confirmation time of the special symbol. Further, even when "small hit E28" is selected, the same small hit game as the above-mentioned "small hit C28" is executed. That is, when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the small hit game is executed in which the first attacker 65 arranged at a position where the game ball is easily won is released for 1.5 seconds. A small hit game is performed in which a person can easily obtain a prize ball.

That is, in the 28th embodiment, the first small hit game in which the first attacker 65 is opened and the game ball is easily won, and the second attacker 4650 is opened and the game ball is won. The second small hit game, which is difficult to do, is configured to be feasible. In terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the small hit game, the first small hit game and the second small hit game are smaller in that the first small hit game is more advantageous than the second small hit game. It will be a winning game.

As shown in FIG. 609, the small hit type (small hit C28, small hit E28) for executing the above-mentioned first small hit game (small hit game in which the first attacker 65 is opened) is the above-mentioned first small hit game. A symbol determination time (0.5 seconds) longer than that of the small hit type (small hit A28) for executing the two small hit game (small hit game in which the second attacker 4650 is opened) is specified. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a period during which the player can be aware that the small hit has been won and that the small hit game will be executed, and the player can easily understand the game. Can be provided. As described above, since the second small hit game is a small hit game in which a prize ball cannot be won (difficult), the symbol determination time should be shorter than the small hit type in which the first small hit game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the small hit is won and that the small hit game is executed.

Further, even when "small hit C28" and "small hit E28" are selected, control for suspending or discarding the other special symbol change during execution is executed as in the above-mentioned "small hit A28". Will be done. The control content in this case is different from the above-mentioned "small hit A28" only in that the type of the other special symbol is switched from the second special symbol to the first special symbol, and other than that. Are the same, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, when "small hit E28" is selected, the time saving end condition for shifting the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state is satisfied. With this configuration, for example, the second special symbol lottery is executed during the probability change state, which is the chance mode, and the "small hit E28" is selected. Based on the winning of the small hit, the "chance mode" is selected. It will shift to "RUSH mode".

In this way, by setting a time-saving end condition that can be satisfied even when the number of executions of the special symbol lottery reaches a predetermined number of times, the player who is playing the "chance mode" is always in the "RUSH mode". Since it is possible to play the game while expecting the transition to "", it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the 28th embodiment, the small hit type (small hit E28) for which the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the small hit winning is specified only when the small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery. Not limited to this, even when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, a small hit type that can satisfy the time saving end condition may be selected. With this configuration, in the first special symbol lottery that is mainly executed during the "chance mode", it is possible to satisfy the time saving end condition regardless of the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed. It is possible to make it easier for a player who is playing the "mode" to expect a transition to the "RUSH mode".

Further, in the 28th embodiment, the time saving end condition is satisfied based on winning the small hit E28 once, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of times (not limited to this) for a specific small hit type ( For example, you may set a time saving end condition that is satisfied when you win 5 times). By providing such a time saving end condition, it is possible to increase the rate at which a specific small hit type is selected when the probability that the time saving end condition based on the small hit winning is satisfied is constant. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to have a variation in the period required until the time saving end condition is satisfied according to the game result of the player, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 having a time saving end condition that is satisfied when the specific small hit type is won a plurality of times (for example, 5 times), the number of times the specific small hit type is won and the time saving are obtained. It is preferable to configure the player to execute the number-of-times notification effect so that the player can grasp the number of remaining winnings required until the end condition is satisfied.

In addition, in the 28th embodiment, one kind of time saving end condition that can be satisfied based on the small hit winning is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of time saving ending conditions may be provided, for example, a specific time saving end condition. The first time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the first small hit type, which is one of the small hit types, is won five times, and the second, which is one of the specific small hit types and different from the first small hit type. A second time-saving end condition, which is established when the small hit type is won twice, may be provided. Then, it is preferable to configure the first small hit type so that it is easier to select than the second small hit type. With this configuration, it is possible to expect the player to select a different small hit type while grasping which time-saving end clause is likely to be established.

In the 28th embodiment, one type of time saving end condition that can be satisfied based on the small hit winning is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the state in which the time saving ending condition is easily satisfied based on the small hit winning and the time saving ending condition are provided. A state in which the condition is difficult to be satisfied may be configured to be configurable. For example, in the jackpot type in which the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends, the jackpot type in which the time saving end condition is easily satisfied during the probability change state and the time reduction The jackpot type, which is difficult to satisfy the end condition, may be configured to be selectable.

More specifically, the first big hit type, which can set the probability variation state in which the time saving end condition is satisfied when the specific first small hit type is won five times, and the specific first small hit type are won three times. In some cases, a second jackpot type that can set a probable change state in which the time saving end condition is satisfied may be configured to be selectable. With this configuration, it is possible to make the ease of satisfying the time saving end condition different even for the jackpot types in which the same probability variation state is set. Further, in this case, it is preferable to perform an effect that makes it difficult for the player to understand which jackpot type is selected when the probability change state is set. For example, the time saving end condition that is most advantageous to the player. It is preferable to execute an effect of notifying the remaining number of times until is satisfied. Then, when the remaining number of times becomes 0, an effect of inciting whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied is executed, and when the jackpot type in which the time saving end condition most advantageous to the player is set is selected. Executes the effect of shifting to the RUSH mode as it is, and executes the effect of continuing the game in the probable change state when the time reduction end condition other than the time reduction end condition that is most advantageous to the player is set. It is good to configure it like this. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of entertaining the player when to shift to the latent probability state of the "RUSH mode" in the probability change state of the "chance mode".

Furthermore, a time saving end condition that can be satisfied based on the small hit winning (small hit time saving end condition) and a time saving end condition that can be satisfied based on the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (variable number of time saving end conditions) are set respectively. In the possible pachinko machine 10, the same time saving end condition (for example, 50 times) is set as the variation number time saving end condition, and only the small hit time saving end condition is made different according to the selected jackpot type as described above. Alternatively, the same time-saving end condition (for example, winning 5 times for a specific small hit type) is set as the small hit time-saving end condition, and only the variable number of time-saving end conditions are selected as the jackpot type as described above. It may be different depending on it. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the types of time-saving end conditions (small hit time-saving end conditions, variable number of time-saving end conditions) that are easy to be established different according to the selected jackpot type, and to further enhance the interest of the game. Can be improved.

Further, as a condition for shortening the number of fluctuations, in the 28th embodiment, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol (number of lottery) and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (number of lottery) are based on the total number of fluctuations. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to set a variable number time reduction end condition for counting only the number of changes (number of lottery) of one special symbol.

In the 28th embodiment, when one special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode showing a specific lottery result, it is possible to discard or interrupt the other special symbol change being executed. is doing. In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of discarding or interrupting the execution of the special symbol change, the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the number of times the change starts) and the number of times the special symbol is changed (in the manner of showing the lottery result). The number of times stopped is displayed) and may not match. In this case, the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed may be used as an element for satisfying the time saving end condition, or the number of times the special symbol change is executed (stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the lottery result). The number of times) may be used. In particular, when the latter number of times is used, for example, when the other special symbol change during execution is discarded, the number of times is not counted, and when the other special symbol change during execution is interrupted. Will be counted at the time when the special symbol change after the restart (for example, restarted after the end of the jackpot) is stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to understand at what timing the time saving end condition is satisfied, and it is possible to make the player play the game while being interested in it.

In the 28th embodiment, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is won in one special symbol lottery, the content of the control to be executed for the other special symbol change being executed is set in the other special symbol change lottery result. It is configured to be switchable based on, but it is not limited to this, and it may be configured to be switchable based on the fluctuation status (residual fluctuation time) of the other special symbol fluctuation, specifically, the other being executed. If the fluctuation pattern set for the special symbol fluctuation of is a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 30 seconds or more, the special symbol fluctuation is forcibly stopped (discarded) and has a fluctuation time of less than 30 seconds. In the case of a fluctuation pattern, the control content may be configured to be switchable so as to interrupt the special symbol fluctuation. By configuring as follows, whether or not to discard the lottery result of the running special symbol lottery is determined according to the fluctuation status of the running special symbol change, so the special symbol indicating the small hit winning is It is possible to make the player interested in the timing at which the stop display is displayed.

Further, in this case, since the content of the variation pattern, that is, the length of the variation time is set as a condition for switching the control content for the special symbol variation during execution, for example, the variation corresponding to the lottery result disadvantageous to the player. By simply defining the fluctuation pattern table so that the fluctuation time of the pattern becomes long, it is possible to make it easy to forcibly stop (discard) the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the lottery result which is disadvantageous to the player. The conditions used when determining the control content are not limited to this, and for example, the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol change during execution and whether or not the lottery result satisfies the specific condition are determined, and the determination result is determined. The result of the control content may be determined based on. Further, the control content to be executed for the executing first special symbol change may be determined based on the combination of the executing first special symbol change and the lottery result of the second special symbol won by the small hit. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 610, among the variation pattern selection 28 tables 202vf in the 28th embodiment, the first latency table 202vf1 and the second latency table 202vf2 referred to during the latency state Will be explained. First, FIG. 610 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the variation pattern selection 28 table 202vf. As shown in FIG. 610 (a), the variation pattern selection 28 table 202vf is referred to in the latent state with respect to the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 17) of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above. There is a difference between the change in the contents of the variation pattern table and the change in the name of the time reduction / probability change table 202f2 (see FIG. 17) to the probability change table 202f2 because the time reduction state is not set as the game state. Are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 610 (a), the variation pattern selection 28 table 202vf includes a normal table 202f1 referred to during the normal state, a probability change table 202f2 referred to during the probability change state, and a probability change table 202f2 referred to during the probability state. The first latent probability table 202vf1 and the second latent probability table 202vf2 to be referred to are defined.

In the 28th embodiment, the first latent probability table 202vf1 is referred to immediately after the latent probability state is set, and then, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the second latent probability table 202vf2 is referred to thereafter. It is configured to be done. The contents defined as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (special figure 1) are different between the first latent probability table 202vf1 and the second latent probability table 202vf2.

Here, the contents of the first latency table 202vf1 will be described with reference to FIG. 610 (a). FIG. 610 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the first latency table 202vf1. In the 28th embodiment, in the latent state (RUSH mode), the second special symbol lottery in which the lottery opportunity is established by letting the game ball enter the second entrance 640 by the right-handed game is mainly performed. It is configured so that a short fluctuation time is selected for the second special symbol fluctuation so as to be executed.

In addition, the electric accessory 64r is released when the player wins the game by hitting the right-handed game in the latent state (RUSH mode) and the game ball passes through the through gate 67. It operates, a game ball enters the right first entrance 64ra, and the first special lottery is executed. Then, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery (when "small hit A28" is selected), the second special symbol change during execution is interrupted or discarded.

To specifically explain the contents specified in the first latent probability table 202vf1, if the type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special diagram 1) and the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit, it is acquired. If the jackpot short variation with a variation time of 2 seconds is specified for the entire range (0 to 198) of the values that can be taken by the variation type counter CS1 and the hit / fail judgment result is a small hit, the acquired variation type counter CS1 is taken. If the small hit fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is specified for the entire range (0 to 198) of the obtained value and the hit / fail judgment result is incorrect, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149". On the other hand, an deviation short variation of 10 seconds is specified, and an deviation variation of 30 seconds is specified for the range of "150 to 198".

Further, when the type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the hit / fail judgment result is the jackpot type "big hit D28" which is a disadvantageous jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player, it is acquired. A jackpot variation with a variation time of 30 seconds is specified for the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the variation type counter CS1. In the case of the type "big hit E28", the big hit short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 1 second is specified for the entire range (0 to 198) of the acquired value of the variable type counter CS1, and the hit / fail judgment result is a small hit. In that case, the small hit variation with a variation time of 1 second is specified for the entire range (0 to 198) of the values that can be taken by the acquired variation type counter CS1. The deviation time of 1 second is specified for the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the counter CS1.

In the 28th embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 609, when one special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the small hit winning, the other special symbol change during execution is the big hit change. In that case, it is configured to discard (forced stop) the jackpot fluctuation. Then, in the above-mentioned first latent probability table 202vf1, when a disadvantageous big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is selected, and a small hit in the first special symbol lottery. Even if the player wins, the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is selected.

That is, during the period when the small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery and the small hit fluctuation for 30 seconds is executed, even if the disadvantageous jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the disadvantageous jackpot fluctuation is surely performed. It is configured to be discarded. Therefore, during the period in which the first special symbol fluctuation is executing the small hit fluctuation, it is an advantageous period in which the RUSH mode (latent state) is not won and the disadvantageous jackpot is not won. In the 28th embodiment, the "invincible mode" (see FIG. 605) can be executed as an effect for indicating that this advantageous period has arrived. This makes it possible to provide the player with a period in which he / she can play the game with peace of mind.

Further, in the 28th embodiment, the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is selected regardless of whether the disadvantageous big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery or the small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery. Therefore, for example, even if a player wins a disadvantage in the second special symbol lottery and wins a small hit in the first special symbol lottery during the second special symbol fluctuation period (disadvantageous jackpot fluctuation period) of 30 seconds, it is disadvantageous first. Since the jackpot is displayed as stopped, it is configured so that the disadvantageous jackpot fluctuation is not discarded. With this configuration, for example, after noticing that the second special symbol fluctuation for a long time (30 seconds) has been executed by the right-handed game, the left-handed game is executed and the first special symbol lottery is performed. It is possible to suppress the execution of irregular games such as aiming for a small hit.

Further, when the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, the fluctuation time longer than the fluctuation time selected when the small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery is selected. In the present embodiment, the second special symbol lottery is configured to win a small hit with a high probability (about 50%). Therefore, during the RUSH mode, the second special symbol lottery is continuously executed. , The jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol lottery can be almost eliminated. On the other hand, in the case of winning the advantageous jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, that is, the jackpot E28 which is the jackpot type in which the RUSH mode is set again after the jackpot game is completed, the second special symbol variation (advantageous) with a fluctuation time of 1 second. Since the jackpot fluctuation) is executed, it can be made more difficult to be discarded by the small hit of the first special symbol lottery than the disadvantageous jackpot fluctuation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 610 (b), in the first latent probability table 202vf1, the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is selected at a rate of about 1/4 when the first special symbol lottery is missed and won. It is configured as follows. In this way, by configuring the lottery result other than the small hit winning to be able to select a long fluctuation time, the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to the fluctuation time of the executed special symbol fluctuation. It is possible to suppress the determination based on the above. In addition, since the frequency of the first special symbol lottery executed during the latent state can be suppressed, it is possible to suppress the excessive setting of the "invincible mode" and the provision of an excessively advantageous game to the player. be able to.

Next, the contents of the second latent probability table 202vf2 will be described with reference to FIG. 610 (c). FIG. 610 (c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the second latency table 202vf2. In the present embodiment, when a specific transition condition is satisfied in the RUSH mode (latent state), the type of the variation pattern table referred to when selecting the variation time of the special symbol variation is configured to be switched. Until the specific transition condition is satisfied, the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is selected with reference to the above-mentioned first latent probability table 202vf1, and after the specific transition condition is satisfied, the second latent probability is satisfied. It is configured so that the fluctuation time of the special symbol variation is selected with reference to the table 202vf2.

The second latent probability table 202vf2 is different from the above-mentioned first latent probability table 202vf1 in that the length of the variable time that can be selected when the first special symbol lottery is missed and won is different. However, everything else is the same. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 610 (c), in the second latent probability table 202vf2, if the type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special diagram 1) and the hit / fail determination result is incorrect, the acquired variation is obtained. A short variation with a variation time of 1 second is specified for the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the type counter CS1. That is, if the player wins the game in the first special symbol lottery, the game is configured so that the game has a variation time of 1 second.

With this configuration, the first special symbol fluctuation executed during the RUSH mode will not be changed for a long time except for the small hit fluctuation (invincible mode), so that the first special symbol lottery per unit time will not occur. The number of times of execution can be increased from the state in which the fluctuation time is selected with reference to the first latent probability table 202vf1, and the length of the invincible mode period in the game period can be easily increased. can.

That is, in the RUSH mode, it is possible to set a second period that is more advantageous to the player than the first period in which the first latency table 202vf1 is referenced. Therefore, it is possible to make the player who is playing the game in the RUSH mode play the game while expecting that a specific transition condition is satisfied.

Further, in the 28th embodiment, as a transition condition for shifting from the first period in which the first latency table 202vf1 is referred to to the second period in which the second latency table 202vf2 is referred to, it is special. The number of times the symbol change is executed is specified, and specifically, the transition condition is satisfied when the special symbol change is executed 50 times, and the transition is made to the second period. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player in the RUSH mode with a novel game property of playing a game while expecting not to win a big hit. Further, when the second period is set, it becomes more difficult to win the big hit (a state in which the big hit fluctuation is easily discarded), so that the RUSH mode can be easily continued for a long period of time.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern scenario 28 table 202vg will be described with reference to FIG. 611. FIG. 611 is a diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the variation pattern scenario 28 table 202vg. As shown in FIG. 611, in the 28th embodiment, when the latent probability state is set, the fluctuation time is selected by referring to different fluctuation patterns according to the number of special symbol fluctuations (number of special symbol fluctuations). It is configured to do.

Specifically, the first latent probability table 202vf1 is referred to until the special symbol change is executed 50 times after the latent probability state is set, and after that, the second latent probability table 202vf2 is referred to. It is configured to be. That is, when the period of the latent probability state (RUSH mode) becomes long, the second latent probability table 202vf2, which is more advantageous to the player than the first latent probability table 202vf1, is referred to. As a result, the player in the RUSH mode can be enthusiastically played to continue the RUSH mode for a long period of time.

In the 28th embodiment, the contents of the variation pattern scenario 28 table 202vg are defined so that the player is more advantageous as the RUSH mode continues, but based on the fact that the transition condition is satisfied during the RUSH mode. Therefore, another configuration may be used based on the technical idea that the degree of advantage to the player is different. For example, immediately after the RUSH mode is set, the state that is most advantageous to the player is obtained. The contents of the variation pattern scenario 28 table 202vg may be specified in. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player who has entered the RUSH mode evenly execute the game in the advantageous state.

Further, in the 28th embodiment, the degree of advantage to the player is changed by changing the fluctuation pattern (variation time) selected when the player loses the prize by the first special symbol lottery, but the degree of advantage is limited to this. No, for example, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) selected when a small hit is won by the first special symbol lottery, that is, the degree of advantage to the player can be changed by changing the length of the invincible mode period. 2 By making the fluctuation pattern (variation time) selected when the advantageous jackpot is won by the special symbol lottery different, or by making the fluctuation pattern (variation time) selected when the disadvantageous jackpot is won, the game It may be configured to change the degree of advantage to the person.

In this case, for example, 30 seconds and 2 seconds can be selected as the variable time that can be selected when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, and further, a disadvantageous big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery. As the fluctuation time selected in this case, a fluctuation time longer than 30 seconds and a fluctuation time shorter than 30 seconds may be selectably configured. With this configuration, if the disadvantageous jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery during the small hit fluctuation of the first special symbol, the disadvantaged jackpot may or may not be discarded according to the selected fluctuation time. You can create cases. Then, in the advantageous state favorable to the player, the special symbol variation of 30 seconds is more likely to be selected when the small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery than in the disadvantageous state, and the disadvantageous jackpot is caused by the second special symbol variation. When winning, it is preferable to configure it so that a fluctuation time longer than 30 seconds can be easily selected.

Further, according to the above-mentioned example, when the small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, the fluctuation time of 2 seconds can be selected. Therefore, for example, the disadvantageous jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery and the disadvantageous jackpot fluctuation. Even after the above is executed, it is possible to discard the disadvantageous big hit fluctuation by winning the small hit in the first special symbol lottery. Therefore, it is possible to have the possibility of discarding the unfavorable jackpot fluctuation until the second special symbol indicating the unfavorable jackpot winning is stopped and displayed, and the player can be enthusiastically played the game.

In the 28th embodiment, two types of fluctuation pattern tables that are referred to during the latent probability state are provided, and the degree of advantage to the player differs depending on the type of the variable pattern table that is referred to. Three or more types of fluctuation pattern tables referred to during the state may be provided. Further, in the 28th embodiment, in the variation pattern scenario 28 table 202vg, an example in which one switching timing for switching the reference variation pattern table is provided is shown, but the variation is not limited to this, and the variation is performed at a plurality of timings. The scenario content may be specified so that the pattern table is switched.

Further, in the 28th embodiment, the number of executions of the special symbol variation is set as a transition condition for switching the variation pattern table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is established based on, for example, the result of the special symbol lottery. The variable pattern table is switched based on the transition conditions to be performed, for example, the variable pattern table is switched when a specific small hit is won, or the RUSH mode is continuously set across the big hit game (number of consecutive villas). You may switch. Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of transition conditions, the fluctuation patterns referred to may be different depending on the order in which each transition condition is satisfied. For example, each of the pachinko machines 10 may be configured in a specific order. A special variation pattern table that can be referred to only when the transition condition is satisfied is provided so that the state in which the special variation pattern table is referred to is the most advantageous state or the most disadvantageous state for the player. It is advisable to specify the contents of the special fluctuation pattern table.

With this configuration, the player can be interested not only in whether or not the transition conditions are satisfied, but also in the order in which the transition conditions are satisfied.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 included in the main control device 110 according to the 28th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 612. FIG. 612 is a diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the RAM 203 included in the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 612, the RAM 203 of the 28th embodiment deletes the second special symbol execution area 203b with respect to the RAM 203 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 21) described above, and the second special symbol holding ball. A storage area 203va, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203vb, a special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203vc, a special figure 1 subtraction flag 203vd, a special figure 2 subtraction flag 203ve, and a time saving end wait flag 203vf are added. It differs in that it is the same, otherwise it is the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The second special symbol holding ball storage area 203vb is a storage area for temporarily storing the lottery right of the second special symbol. In the first embodiment described above, the lottery right of the first special symbol is memorable up to a predetermined number (4 pieces), but the lottery right of the second special symbol is not memorable. , If the execution of the second special symbol lottery is permitted at the time when the lottery right of the second special symbol is acquired, each value acquired is stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b, and the second special is immediately obtained. It was configured to execute a symbol lottery.

On the other hand, the 28th embodiment is different in that the lottery right is stored up to a predetermined number (4) even for the second special symbol. The content of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203vb is obtained only by changing the type of the special symbol to be stored with respect to the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a described above in the first embodiment. The contents other than are the same. That is, each of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the small hit type counter C5, and the variable type counter CS1 according to the timing of entering the second ball entry port 640. Each value is stored.

Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the hold first area of the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203va are shifted to the second special symbol execution area. , Special symbol variation based on various stored values is started.

As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol at the same time (in parallel), each special symbol is available. The holding ball storage area (first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, second special symbol holding ball storage area 203va) is configured to have an execution area, respectively. As a result, when the start condition of each special symbol is satisfied, the next special symbol change can be promptly executed.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203vb is a counter for measuring the number of lottery rights (reserved balls) of the second special symbol, and is counted with respect to the above-mentioned first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d. Is different in that the number of balls reserved for the first special symbol changes from the number of balls reserved for the second special symbol, and is the same except for the above.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203vb is based on the entry of a game ball into the second entry port 640, which is detected in the timer interruption process that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display effect (variable display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 up to four times. The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203vb is set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, each time the starting prize is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203vb is decremented by 1 each time the variation display effect is executed.

Further, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203vb (that is, the number of reserved balls) is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball based on the ball entering the second entry port 640 (starting prize). When the counter value is stored in the area 203va, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. The second special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203vb is incremented by 1. Is.

The special figure 1 subtraction flag 203vd is a flag indicating whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203f should be subtracted when the fluctuation is stopped in the fluctuation of the first special symbol. This special figure 1 subtraction flag 203vd is used when it is determined in the first special symbol change start processing 28 (see S10208 in FIG. 614) that the value of the time saving counter 203f is a value larger than 0 (S10301: Yes in FIG. 614). ), Set to on (S10302 in FIG. 614), and when it is determined in the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203vd that the time saving update flag 203vd is on, the value of the time saving counter 203f is subtracted and then set to off. Will be done.

If a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is set to off in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 28 (see S10221 in FIG. 620). Similarly, in the case of winning a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is set to off in the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 28 (not shown). In addition, by setting the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203vd to off when a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery, if the change of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped after the big hit game is over, the change is changed. When the fluctuation is stopped after restarting, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203vd is off, and when it is determined that the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203vd is off, the value of the time saving counter 203f is subtracted. The process is skipped and the process to stop the fluctuation is executed.

The special figure 2 subtraction flag 203ve is a flag for indicating whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203f should be subtracted when the fluctuation is stopped in the fluctuation of the second special symbol. The detailed contents are different only in that the target is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol with respect to the above-mentioned special figure 1 subtraction flag 103vd, and other than that, they are the same. The explanation is omitted.

The time reduction end waiting flag 203vf is a flag indicating that the special figure change in which the end condition of the time reduction state is satisfied has been started. The time saving end wait flag 203vf determines whether the value of the time saving counter 203f is 1 (that is, the final change of the specified number of times in the time saving state) in the first special symbol change start processing 28 (see S10208 in FIG. 614). (S10303), when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 (S10303: Yes), it is set to ON (S10304 in FIG. 614).

Then, it is set to off when the time saving update process (see S10908 in FIG. 621), which is the timing for stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol, is executed. With this configuration, when the time reduction end wait flag 203vf is set to ON (that is, the standby state), when any time reduction end timing arrives, it is sure to correspond to each timing. Can execute the time saving end processing.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the 28th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 614 to 622, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the 28th embodiment will be described. In the 28th embodiment, the control processing content for updating the time saving counter 203f and the control processing executed when a small hit is won are performed with respect to the control processing of the main control device 110 in the 12th embodiment described above. The contents and the control processing contents corresponding to the above-mentioned differences are different. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the twelfth embodiment described above, the content of the control process of the main control device 110 is described with reference to the above-mentioned first embodiment. Therefore, the content of the control process of the main control device 110 in the 28th embodiment is described. In the description, the content of the control process of the main control device 110 according to the first embodiment will be described as appropriate.

First, the contents of the first special symbol change start processing 28 (S10208) will be described with reference to FIG. 614. FIG. 614 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol change start processing 28 (S10208). The first special symbol change start process 28 (S10208) is a game state update process (see S308 in FIG. 33) with respect to the first special symbol change start process (see S208 in FIG. 33) in the above-described first embodiment. The difference is that the processing according to the value of the time saving counter 203f is executed instead of the above, and the other points are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the first special symbol change start process 28 (S10208) is executed, first, the same processes of S301 to S307 as the first special symbol change start process (see S208 of FIG. 33) in the above-described first embodiment are executed. do. Then, next, it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203f is a value larger than 0, that is, whether the current gaming state is in the time reduction (S10301). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203f is larger than 0 (S10301: Yes), the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203vd is set to ON (S10302), and the process proceeds to S10303. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S10301 that the value of the time reduction counter 203f is not a value larger than 0 (S10301: No), the game state is the normal state, and the present process is terminated as it is. In this way, when the value of the time reduction counter 203f is larger than 0, that is, when the time reduction is in progress, by setting the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203vd to ON, the time reduction is started during the time reduction when the fluctuation is stopped. It is possible to determine whether or not the fluctuation has occurred, and it is possible to update the end condition of the time reduction (subtract the value of the time reduction counter 203f) when the fluctuation is stopped.

After executing the process of S10302 described above, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203f is 1 (S10303). That is, it is determined whether the final fluctuation is the end condition of the time saving state. When it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 (S10303: Yes), the time reduction end wait flag 203vf is set to ON (S10304), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S10303 that the value of the time saving counter 203f is not 1, it is not the final change of the time saving game state, so the present processing is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 615, the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 28 (S10331) will be described. FIG. 615 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 28 (S10331). The first special symbol jackpot determination process 28 (S10331) performs a process based on the setting status of the time saving end wait flag 203vf for the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 34) of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the added point and the processing executed when the big hit is not won in the first special symbol lottery are changed, and the other points are the same.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 28 (S10331), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S401). Then, in order to determine whether the time reduction end condition is satisfied and the state is waiting, that is, whether the time reduction final change is being executed in the lottery of the second special symbol, the time reduction end is performed. It is determined whether the wait flag 203vf is set to ON (S10401). When it is determined that the time reduction end wait flag 203vf is on (S10401: Yes), the period of the time reduction state set this time has ended, so that the game state storage area of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 (S10401: Yes). (Not shown) is set to the normal state (S10402), and the time saving end wait flag 203vf and the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203ve are set to off (S10403). Next, the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to 0 (S10404), a state command indicating that the gaming state has been switched to the normal state is set (S10405), and the process proceeds to S10406. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S10401 that the time saving end wait flag 203vf is not on (S10401: No), the final fluctuation of the time saving state is not executed, so the processing of S10402 to S10405 is skipped. The process proceeds to S10406.

In this way, in the state of waiting for the end of the time saving state (the state in which the final change of the time saving state is started in the other special symbol), the game is played before the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired. By setting the state to the normal state, even though the time-saving game state has ended, the time-saving game state with the other special symbol until the change of the special symbol in which the final change of the time-saving state is executed ends. It is possible to eliminate the problem of executing a game based on. Therefore, an appropriate game can be provided to the player.

Next, in the process of S10406, the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number 28 table 202va (S10406), it is determined whether the acquired lottery result is a big hit (S406), and if it is determined to be a big hit, (S406: Yes), the same processing of S407 to S410 as the first special symbol jackpot determination processing (S306 of FIG. 34) of the first embodiment described above is executed, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S406, if it is determined that the hit is not a big hit (off, a small hit) (S406: No), the special figure 1 out-of-bounds variation process 28 is executed (S10407), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 616, the contents of the special figure 1 deviation variation processing 28 (S10407) will be described. FIG. 616 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 deviation processing 28 (S10407). In the special figure 1 deviation variation processing 28, when the big hit is not won in the first special symbol lottery (when the deviation is won), a process for determining whether or not the small hit is won is executed. It should be noted that the detailed contents differ only in that the processing target is switched from the second special symbol to the first special symbol with respect to the above-mentioned special figure 2 deviation processing (see S1011 in FIG. 41). Other than that, they are the same.

In the special figure 1 deviation variation processing 28 (S10407), first, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result (the lottery result of S406 in the first special symbol big hit determination process 28 (see FIG. 615)) is a small hit (S3111). ..

If it is determined in the processing of S3111 that a small hit has been won (S3111: Yes), information indicating a special figure 1 small hit is set for the small hit flag 203k (S3112), and a lottery for the first special symbol is made. The result is set to a small hit (S3113), then the small hit symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S3113), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3111, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a small hit, that is, it is out of order (S3111: No), the out-of-order symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. It is set (S3115), and this process is terminated.

As described above, the special symbol 1 deviation processing 28 (S10407 in FIG. 616) executed as one process of the first special symbol variation start processing 28 (see S10208 in FIG. 614), that is, the fluctuation of the special symbol (see S10208 in FIG. 614). By setting the small hit flag 203k to ON when it is determined that the small hit has been won in the process executed at the timing of starting the lottery), the small hit flag 203k is set at the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol. It is possible to easily execute the process corresponding to the small hit winning based on the setting status.

The small hit flag 203k used in the present embodiment has a special figure 1 area indicating that the small hit was won in the first special symbol lottery and a special figure 2 area indicating that the small hit was won in the second special symbol lottery. If you win a small hit in the first special symbol lottery, set the flag of the special figure 1 area to on, and if you win a small hit in the second special symbol lottery, , The flag of the special figure 2 area is configured to be set to on. As a result, even if a small hit is won in duplicate in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, the state can be easily stored.

Next, the contents of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 28 (S10332) will be described with reference to FIG. 617. FIG. 617 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 28 (S10332). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 28 (S10332) is a variation pattern other than the jackpot winning with respect to the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 35) executed in the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the process for selecting is added, and the rest is the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 28 (S10332) is executed, the same processes of S501 to S505 as in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 35) are executed, and this process is terminated. .. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S501 that the result of the lottery this time is not a big hit (S501: No), the special figure 1 deviation pattern selection process 28 is executed (S10501), and then the process proceeds to the above-mentioned process of S503. do. The contents of the deviation pattern selection process 28 (S10501) in the special figure 1 will be described later with reference to FIG. 618.

Here, with reference to FIG. 618, the contents of the special figure 1 deviation pattern selection process 28 (S10501) will be described. FIG. 618 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 deviation pattern selection process 28 (S10501). In the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process 28 (S10501), the same processing content as the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (see S1207 in FIG. 43) of the above-described 7th embodiment is performed from the second special symbol. The process of switching to the first special symbol is executed.

When it is determined that the lottery result (special figure 1 lottery result) of the first special symbol this time is not a small hit when the special figure 1 deviation pattern selection process 28 (S10501) is executed (S10591: No), The processing having the same contents as S1307 to S1309 of the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation pattern selection processing (see S1207 in FIG. 43) is executed by changing the processing target to the first special symbol (S10597 to S10599), and then this processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S10591 that it is a small hit (S10591: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired (S10592), and the small hit type is obtained based on the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5. Selection 28 The small hit type is selected with reference to the table 202ve (S10593). Next, the process having the same contents as the process of S1304 to S1306 of the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation pattern selection process (see S1207 of FIG. 43) is executed by changing the processing target to the first special symbol (S10594 to S10596). End the process.

Next, the first special symbol variation in-execution process (S10205) will be described with reference to FIG. 619. In the 28th embodiment, the same processing of S701 to S705 as the processing during execution of the first special symbol change (see S205 in FIG. 37) of the first embodiment described above is executed. Therefore, detailed description will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 28 (S10221) will be described with reference to FIG. 620. FIG. 620 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 28 (S10221). The first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 28 (S10221) has determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is not set to ON for the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S207 in FIG. 38) described above. In the case of (S801: No), that is, when the first special symbol fluctuation to be stopped this time is an out-of-bounds fluctuation, the special figure 1 out-of-order stop processing 28 (S10801) is changed to be executed, and the special figure. The difference is that the processing content to be executed when it is determined that the 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S801: Yes) is changed. For convenience of explanation, the numbers (S numbers) assigned to each process and the processing contents are different in wording, but the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 38) in the above-described first embodiment. The same processing content as in S207) will be omitted in detail.

When the first special symbol change stop process 28 (S10221) is executed and it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S801: Yes), then the special figure 2 is changing, that is, It is determined whether or not the second special symbol change is being executed (S10802). Here, if it is determined that the special figure 2 change is in progress (S10802: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop indicating the stop of the special figure change. A command is set (S10803), the second special symbol of the first symbol display device is stopped and displayed with a missed symbol (S10804), the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is set to 0 (S10805), and the process proceeds to S10806. Transition.

That is, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lottery result indicating the big hit, the process for forcibly stopping the execution special symbol change due to the deviation is executed in the above-mentioned processes S10803 to S10805. .. In addition, in this embodiment, regardless of the lottery result of the special figure 2 change during execution, the special symbol change during execution is forcibly stopped at the time of deviation. With this configuration, after the jackpot game is over, when both the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol are held, both special symbol fluctuations can be executed at the same time.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed by the lottery result indicating a big hit, it is configured to be forcibly stopped regardless of the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation being executed. However, the control content may be changed according to the lottery result of the variation of the special figure 2.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S10802 that the second special symbol change is not executed (S10802: No), the process of S10803 to S10808 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S10809.

In the process of S10806, in order to determine whether the special figure 2 fluctuation determined to be changing in the process of S10802 is a jackpot variation, it is determined whether the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is on (S10806) and turned on. If it is determined to be (S10806: Yes), the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to off (S10807), the stored information for the special figure 2 jackpot is deleted (S10808), and the process proceeds to S10809. Further, in the process of S10806, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is not set to ON (S10806: No), the processes of S10807 and S10808 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S10809. That is, the processes of S10807 to S10808 are processes for discarding the result of the special symbol lottery that has won the big hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the information on the jackpot from remaining after the special figure 2 fluctuation during execution is deviated and the player is forcibly stopped.

In the processing of S10809, a jackpot scenario based on the jackpot winning in the first special symbol lottery is set (S10809), the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h, the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203vd, the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203ve, and the time saving end standby. The flag 203vf and the probability variation flag 203g are set to off, and the value of the time saving counter 203g is reset to 0 (S10810). After that, the jackpot middle flag 203o is set to ON (S10811), the special figure 1 confirmation command is set (S10812), and the fluctuation of the first special symbol of the first special symbol display device is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the jackpot. (S10813), this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 621, the special figure 1 disengagement stop process 28 (S10801) will be described. FIG. 621 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 disengagement stop process 28 (S10801). In the special figure 1 disengagement stop process 28 (S10801), the same process as the special figure 2 disengagement stop process (see S1508 of FIG. 46) of the first embodiment described above is performed, and the processing target is the first special from the second special symbol. The difference is that the small hit process 28 (S10902) is executed and the time saving update process (FIG. 10908) is executed while switching to the symbol, and the other points are the same. Is omitted.

Here, the small hit process 28 (S10902) executed in the special figure 1 disengagement stop process 28 (see S10801 in FIG. 621) will be described with reference to FIG. 622. FIG. 622 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit process 28 (S10902). In the small hit process 28 (S10902), various control processes corresponding to the winning small hit types are executed. Specifically, when a specific small hit type (small hit A, B, C) is won, processing (interruption processing, forced stop (discard) processing) according to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol change being executed is performed. It is configured to run.

When the small hit process 28 (S10902) is executed, first, the small hit type set for this special symbol variation is read (S11001), and the read small hit type is "small hit A or small hit C". (S11002). When it is determined that it is "small hit A" or "small hit C" (S11002: Yes), it is determined whether the special symbol is currently changing (the other special symbol is changing) (S11003). When it is determined that the figure change is in progress (S11003: Yes), then it is determined whether the special figure change is a small hit change (S11004).

Then, when it is determined in the processing of S11004 that the small hit fluctuation is in progress, the temporary stop flag indicating that the special symbol fluctuation being executed is interrupted (temporary stop), that is, the first special symbol is the first special symbol in the current processing. If it is the small hit process 28 when the small hit is stopped, the temporary stop flag corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2 temporary stop flag), and this processing is the small when the second special symbol is stopped by the small hit. If it is the hit process 28, the temporary stop flag corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v) is set to on (S11005), and the temporary stop command indicating that the temporary stop flag is on is set (S11006). ), End this process.

Further, in the process of S11004, when it is determined that the small hit fluctuation is not in progress, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation or the deviation fluctuation is performed (S11004: No), it indicates that the special figure fluctuation during execution is stopped. A special symbol fluctuation stop command is set (S11007), the corresponding special symbol is stopped and displayed as a missed symbol on the first special symbol display device 37 (S11008), and the fluctuation time counter of the corresponding special symbol (special symbol) (S11008). The value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m or the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n) is set to 0 (S11009).

Next, it is determined whether the jackpot flag (special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h or special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i) is set to on based on the forced stop of the special figure fluctuation (S11010), and the jackpot flag is set to on. If it is determined to be present (S11010: Yes), the corresponding jackpot flag (special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h or special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i) is set to off (S11011), and the stored information for the jackpot is deleted (S11012). ), End this process.

If it is determined in the process of S11003 that the special figure is not changing (S11003: No), the process of S11004 to S11006 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S11002, when it is determined that it is not "small hit A" or "small hit C" (S11002: No), that is, when it is determined that it is "small hit B", the value of the time saving counter 203f. Is greater than 0, that is, it is determined whether the current state is in the high probability state of the normal symbol (S11013). When it is determined that the current state is in the high probability state of the normal symbol (S11013: Yes), it is next determined whether the time saving end wait flag 203vf is set to ON (S11014), and the time saving end waiting flag 203vf is set. When it is determined that it is not on (S11014: No), that is, when it is determined that it is not the final fluctuation of the probability change state, the time saving end wait flag 203vf is set to ON (S11015), and the process proceeds to the above-mentioned S11003 process. ..

As described above, in the 28th embodiment, when the small hit game is executed, the processing content is determined according to the content of the special symbol change being executed. More specifically, at the time when the small hit game is executed based on one special symbol lottery (when the special symbol indicating the small hit winning is stopped and displayed), the lottery result of the other special symbol change being executed is executed. If the lottery result is a specific lottery result (for example, missed, jackpot), the other special symbol change that is being executed is discarded (off forced stop), and the lottery result is other than the specific lottery result. Is configured to be able to interrupt the other special symbol variation in progress. That is, when a specific condition for executing the special processing for the special symbol change during execution is satisfied, the processing content of the special processing is determined by referring to the lottery result of the special symbol being executed. ..

With this configuration, the player can be made to pay attention to the lottery result of the other special symbol change that is being executed at the time when the small hit is won (when the small hit is stopped) with one special symbol.

Not limited to this, for example, the content of the special processing determined when a specific condition is satisfied may be different according to the set gaming state. Specifically, when the normal state is set, even if a specific condition is satisfied, only "suspension" is determined as a special process, and when the probabilistic state is set, "suspension" or "suspension" or "suspension" is set. It may be configured so that "discard" is set. By making the determination content of the special process different according to the game state set in this way, it is possible to give diversity to the game playability in each game state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned small hit process 28 is executed regardless of whether the small hit is won by the first special symbol or the small hit is won by the second special symbol. The content of the special processing to be determined may be different depending on the type of the special symbol for which the specific condition is satisfied. For example, the second is higher than the case where the specific condition is satisfied for the first special symbol. It may be configured so that "discard" is more easily determined when a specific condition is satisfied in the special symbol. Specifically, the first special symbol lottery may be configured so that the specific conditions are more difficult to be satisfied than the second special symbol lottery (so that it is difficult to win a small hit), or the specific conditions are satisfied. In this case, the condition for determining "discard" is such that it is more difficult to satisfy the condition when the specific condition is satisfied in the first special symbol than when the specific condition is satisfied in the second special symbol. It may be configured. As a result, the content of the special processing can be different depending on which special symbol type the specific condition is satisfied, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the 28th embodiment is different from the above-mentioned 12th embodiment in that it is configured so that a small hit can be won in any of the 1st special symbol lottery and the 2nd special symbol lottery. There is. With this configuration, even if one of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery wins a big hit, the big hit can be discarded by the other small hit winning. Depending on the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, the ratio of the probable change jackpot at the time of winning the jackpot can be surely different.

In the 28th embodiment described above, the other special symbol is set as a condition (specific condition) that triggers the execution of special processing (interruption or destruction) for one special symbol variation (for example, the first special symbol variation). The conditions that are satisfied when a specific small hit is won in the fluctuation (for example, the second special symbol fluctuation) are shown, but other than this, an opportunity to establish the specific condition may be provided, for example, the ball is specified. It may be configured so that a specific condition is satisfied when the ball enters the entrance of the ball, or the power supplied to the pachinko machine 10 is not normal (for example, noise is generated and the power is temporarily supplied. May be configured so that a specific condition is satisfied when it is determined that the condition is rejected. Further, the game method executed by the player is an illegal game method (for example, a magnetic sensor for detecting the magnetic force is provided, and the game method when the magnetic sensor detects the magnetic force, or the impact detection for detecting the impact on the pachinko machine 10). A sensor may be provided so that a specific condition is satisfied when the impact detection sensor detects a predetermined amount of impact).

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, when the special symbol variation executed when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (when the probability variation state and the time saving state are set) is discarded (forced stop). , The number of time reductions (probability change number) is not added according to the discarded special symbol fluctuation. Specifically, in a gaming machine configured to set a latent probability state when the number of special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) while the probability change state is set. When the special symbol change executed during the probabilistic change state is discarded (forced stop), the number of time reductions (probability change number) is not added. In the pachinko machine 10 using such a configuration, for example, the display mode for showing the number of time reductions (the number of probability changes) until the probability change state ends on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is also synchronized with the number of time reductions. The display mode is not updated. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the special symbol variation has been discarded without updating the number of time reductions. In this case, for example, a pachinko machine configured to update the display mode for indicating the number of time reductions (probability variation number) displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 at the start timing of the special symbol change. In the case of the machine 10, the display mode is restored based on the fact that the special symbol variation is discarded (for example, if the remaining time reduction number is displayed, the addition is performed, and if the elapsed time reduction number is displayed, the display mode is displayed. If there is, subtract it).

In addition, as a transition condition for transitioning from the probabilistic state to the latent state (end condition for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol (time reduction end condition)), a plurality of time reduction end conditions (for example, the first special symbol). The first time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the total number of fluctuations and the second special symbol change reaches 100 times, and the second time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the second special symbol change is executed five times). In the pachinko machine 10 that has been set, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to the end condition that is most likely to be satisfied among the plurality of time-saving end conditions (for example, the second special symbol change 5 times). If the pachinko machine 10 is configured to notify the player of the game content in an easy-to-understand manner by displaying only "5"), the first special symbol change is executed immediately after the probability change state is set. However, the display mode of "5" displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is configured so as not to be updated. Then, when the first special symbol change is further executed 95 times after the probabilistic change state is set (when the 96th first special symbol change is executed), the first special symbol change is executed 95 times. , The display control for updating the display of "5" displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 to "4" is executed. In this way, it is determined whether or not to update the time reduction number display displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 according to the special symbol type in which the special symbol change is executed during the probability change (time reduction) state. This makes it possible to inform the player of the period until the probability change state ends in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Regarding the control content of the voice lamp control device in the 28th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 623 to 629, the control contents executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 28th embodiment will be described. The control content executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 28th embodiment is the variable display setting process 13 with respect to the control content executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the twelfth embodiment described above. Instead of (see S4121 in FIG. 334), the variable display setting process 28 (see S14121 in FIG. 623) is replaced with various counter update processes (see S4111 in FIG. 72), and various counter update processes 28 (see S14111 in FIG. 628) are replaced. (See) is different in that the small hit-related process 28 (see S14504 in FIG. 629) is executed for the small hit-related process (see S4504 in FIG. 65), and is otherwise the same. The detailed description of the same content will be omitted. In the twelfth embodiment described above, the content of the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 is described with reference to the first embodiment described above. Therefore, the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 28th embodiment is described. In explaining the contents, the control processing contents of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment will be described as appropriate.

First, the contents of the variable display setting process 28 (S14121) will be described with reference to FIG. 623. The variation display setting process 28 (S14121) is an effect mode corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the latent state with respect to the variation display setting process 13 (see S4121 in FIG. 334) described above. The variable display setting process 28 (S15102) for special figure 1 for setting the variable display content) and the special figure for setting the effect mode (variable display content) corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2) variation. The variation display setting process 28 (S15104) for 2 is different from the staging mode setting process 28 (S15105) that is executed regardless of the special symbol type, and the other contents are the same.

Here, the contents of the variation display setting process 28 (S15102) for the special figure 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 624. FIG. 624 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation display setting process 28 (S15102) for the special figure 1. In the variation display setting process 28 (S15102) for the special figure 1, the process of setting the effect mode during the small hit variation is executed for the variation display setting process for the special figure 1 (see S5104 of FIG. 70) described above. It differs in that.

When the variation display setting process 28 (S15102) for special figure 1 is executed, first, the same processes of S5201 and S5202 as the above-mentioned variation display setting process for special figure 1 (see S5104 of FIG. 70) are executed. Then, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation this time is a small hit fluctuation (S15201), and if it is determined to be a small hit fluctuation (S15201: Yes), a display command for indicating an invincible state is set. (S15202), the invincible flag 223va is set to ON (S15203), the latent probability variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is set based on the extracted variation pattern (S5203), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S15201, if it is determined that the fluctuation is not a small hit variation (S15201: No), the process proceeds to the process of S5206, and then the present process is terminated.

In this embodiment, as described above, when a small hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery in the latent state, a display command for indicating an invincible state is always set. However, it may be decided by lottery whether or not to set a display command to indicate the invincible state, the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation being executed, and the look-ahead result for the acquired special figure 2 hold. Based on (preliminary determination result), it may be configured to determine whether or not to set a display command for indicating an invincible state.

Specifically, by the time the special figure 1 fluctuation (small hit fluctuation) executed this time is stopped and displayed, the result of the special figure 2 lottery that can be stopped and displayed is determined (preliminary determination), and the special figure executed this time is executed. If it is determined that the result of the special figure 2 lottery is a big hit by the time the 1 fluctuation (small hit fluctuation) is stopped and displayed, it is preferable to configure so that the display command for indicating the invincible state is not set. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the disadvantageous jackpot game is executed even though the display mode (see FIG. 605 (a)) based on the display command for indicating the invincible state is displayed.

In the 28th embodiment described above, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in the display mode indicating that the lottery result of one special symbol lottery is a small hit, the other special symbol change during execution is performed. The lottery result was discriminated, and the processing content for the other special symbol change was determined according to the discriminating result. Then, it is advantageous by making the length of the variable time set in the other special symbol lottery different between the case where the jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player is won and the case where the jackpot that is advantageous to the player is won. By making it easier for the disadvantaged jackpot to be discarded based on the small hit winning than the jackpot, it was possible to set a specific period in which the disadvantaged jackpot is likely to be discarded before winning the disadvantaged jackpot. The configuration for setting a specific period is not limited to this, for example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in a display mode indicating that the lottery result of one of the special symbol lottery is a small hit. , The lottery result of the other special symbol change being executed is determined, and as the determination result, only when it is determined that the disadvantageous jackpot is won, the other special symbol change being executed is discarded (lottery indicating a loss). The result may be forcibly stopped).

Further, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, the invalid lottery process used during the jackpot fluctuation of the special symbol, that is, during the special symbol variation in which one special symbol has won the jackpot, the jackpot is won in the other special symbol lottery. It may be configured to execute the process of controlling so as not to obtain during the special symbol change in which the small hit is won. Even in this case, it is safe for the player without fear that the latent state will end based on the big hit winning during the specific period when one of the special symbols fluctuates in the small hit. It is possible to set a period during which the game can be played with care. In this case, it is not possible to win a big hit in which a big hit type advantageous to the player is set in a special symbol lottery during a specific period, but a small hit can be won as in the first embodiment described above. Therefore, the game of winning the prize ball by the small hit game can be executed without worrying about the big hit winning.

In the above-described A embodiment, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, the special symbol change period corresponding to the small hit winning is a specific period in which the player cannot (difficultly) win the big hit that is disadvantageous to the player. It was configured to be. Then, if the small hit is not won in the first special symbol lottery, that is, if the big hit or the miss is won, the fluctuation time for a short time (1 second) is set. Therefore, for example, after the latent probability state is set, the left-handed game is executed in order to establish only the lottery opportunity of the first special symbol without establishing the lottery opportunity of the second special symbol, and the first special symbol is executed. When the fluctuation has passed for 1 second or more, there is a possibility that an irregular game of performing a right-handed game may be performed. That is, by executing the second special symbol lottery by the right-handed game only while the first special symbol fluctuates in a small hit, a game that makes it difficult to execute the disadvantageous big hit game during the latent state is performed. There was a problem.

In order to solve this problem, in the present A embodiment, when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the latent state, the first special symbol variation lottery establishes a lottery opportunity by a left-handed game. It is determined whether the lottery opportunity is established by the right-handed game or the lottery opportunity by the right-handed game, and when it is determined that the lottery opportunity is established by the right-handed game, the lottery opportunity is established by the left-handed game. It is configured so that it is easier to notify the player that a specific period has been set than when it is determined that there is.

As a result, whether or not the player who executes the first special symbol lottery in the left-handed game in the latent state has won a small hit for the first special symbol change being executed (during a specific period). Since it is possible to make it difficult to grasp (whether or not), it is possible to make it difficult to perform an irregular game (left-handed game) in the latent state.

As a method for determining whether the first special symbol change lottery to be executed has established the lottery opportunity by the left-handed game or the lottery opportunity by the right-handed game, for example, the main control The entry type for indicating whether the game ball has entered the central first entry slot 64c or the game ball has entered the right first entry slot 64r in the winning command output from the device 110. By configuring the information so that it can be set, the game ball enters any entry port (central first entry port 64c or right first entry port 64r) on the voice lamp control device 113 side. It may be configured so that it can be determined whether or not the winning command is set based on the above, or the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 corresponds to the special symbol fluctuation for which the fluctuation pattern is set this time. It may be configured to set the ball type information.

Further, based on various commands output from the main control device 110, on the voice lamp control device 113 side, to any entry port (central first entry port 64c or right first entry port 64r). It is not configured so that it can be determined whether or not the game ball has entered, but for example, a left-handed game detecting means for detecting that the player is playing a left-handed game and a right-handed game being performed. By providing a right-handed game detection means for detecting the above and configuring the voice lamp control device 113 to be able to receive the detection result of each detection means, the player's game status (right-handed game, left-handed game). May be configured so that the voice lamp control device 113 can be directly discriminated without going through the main control device 110. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing to be executed by the main control device 110, so that the processing load related to the main control device 110 can be reduced, and it is possible to facilitate smooth game provision. can.

Further, unlike the 28th embodiment, the same fluctuation time as when the small hit is won (for at least a part of the case where the first special symbol lottery executed during the latent state is missed or the big hit is won). For example, it is preferable to configure it so that 30 seconds) is set. With this configuration, it is difficult for the player who is executing the left-handed game during the latent state to grasp the lottery result based on the fluctuation time of the first special symbol change during execution. It is possible to make it more difficult to determine whether or not the present is in a specific period.

In addition, in another example using the above-mentioned method of setting the variable time, the player is notified that the case of winning a small hit is a specific period than the case of winning a small hit in the first special symbol lottery. It is preferable to configure it so that the notification effect for doing so can be easily executed. As a result, the player can be made to positively execute the right-handed game even though the specific period is not set internally.

In the 28th embodiment, a plurality of ball entry means (central first ball entry port 64c, right first ball entry) are used as starting winning openings for establishing a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol lottery on the game board 13. Mouth 64r) is provided, and the ball entry that establishes the lottery opportunity is the effect mode of the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 in response to the special symbol variation for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol. It is configured to be different depending on the type of means, but other than that, it may be different as long as it is different depending on the type of the ball entry means that established the lottery opportunity, for example, the same. Three or more ball entry means for establishing a lottery opportunity may be provided.

Further, even when the lottery opportunity is established based on the entry of the game ball into the same ball entry means, the effect mode of the variable effect may be different depending on the timing when the lottery opportunity is established. , The production mode of the variable effect may be different depending on the frequency at which the lottery opportunity is established. Further, a means capable of discriminating the process (for example, the flow path) until the game ball enters the ball entering means may be provided, and the effect mode of the variation effect may be different based on the discriminating result. In this case, for example, a pachinko machine is configured such that a plurality of flow paths are formed in the game area of the game board 13 and the game balls flowing down the game area can enter one ball entry means in various flow patterns. In the case of the machine 10, a detection means capable of detecting the type of the flow path through which the game ball flows is provided, and the process until the game ball enters the ball entry means based on the detection result of the detection means (for example,). It is preferable to configure it so as to discriminate the flow path).

Further, in the 28th embodiment, the game ball has entered the ball entry means (central first entry slot 64c or right first entry slot 64r) for establishing a lottery opportunity for a special symbol. We have explained the configuration in which the effect mode of the variable effect executed based on the above is different depending on the type of ball entry means, but if there are multiple ball entry means provided for the same purpose, a special symbol lottery will be given. The target may be a ball-entry means other than the ball-entry means for establishing the opportunity. For example, when a plurality of ball-entry means (through gates 67) for establishing a lottery opportunity for a normal symbol are provided on the game board 13, for example, the right. The left area where the game ball fired by the left-handed game is easier to flow down than the game ball fired by the left-handed game, and the game ball fired by the right-handed game than the game ball fired by the left-handed game. If a through gate 67 is provided in the right side area where it is easier to flow down, the effect mode of the variable effect for showing the lottery result of the normal symbol is set, and the ball entry means that establishes the lottery opportunity of the normal symbol. (Through gate 67) may be configured to be different depending on the type, or a general entry port 63 for paying out a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls by inserting a game ball. If a plurality of game boards 13 are provided, the effect mode of the ball entry effect for indicating that the game ball has entered the general ball entry port 63 is set in the general ball entry port 63 in which the game ball has entered. It may be different depending on the type.

With this configuration, by grasping the production mode of various effects executed based on the entry of the game ball into the entry means, it is possible to determine which entry means the game ball has entered. Since it can be discriminated, it is possible to make the player understand the past game contents that he / she has played in an easy-to-understand manner.

<29th Embodiment>
Next, the 29th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 630 to 635. In the 29th embodiment, the variation pattern selected in the latent state (RUSH mode) is changed with respect to the 28th embodiment described above, and the voice lamp control device 113 has the first special symbol. The point that the type of the entrance where the lottery opportunity was established (central first entrance 64c or the right first entrance 64r) can be discriminated, and the entrance where the lottery opportunity for the first special symbol is established. There is a big difference in that the effect mode of the variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol variation is configured to be different depending on the type.

In the 28th embodiment described above, when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the latent state (RUSH mode) and the small hit is won (small hit A28 is won), the special symbol is changing (special figure 1 small). Even if the jackpot (big hit D28), which is disadvantageous to the player, is won in the second special symbol lottery, the jackpot is discarded. Then, by providing a first ball entrance (right first ball opening 64r) that triggers a lottery for the first special symbol in the game area (right area) where the game ball launched by the right-handed game can flow down. , The first special symbol lottery is periodically executed even during the right-handed game executed during the latent state. With this configuration, it is possible to set a special period (invincible mode period) in which the jackpot game that is disadvantageous to the player is not executed in the second special symbol lottery that is mainly executed during the latent state. It was possible to provide a period during which a player who is performing a game in a latent state can play with peace of mind.

However, in the 28th embodiment described above, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery during the latent state (RUSH mode), a special period is given to the player during the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation. Since it is configured to execute the effect for notifying that it is (invincible mode period), for example, the left-handed game, that is, the second special symbol lottery is not executed during the latent state. , An irregular game in which a game that enables only the first special symbol lottery to be executed is executed, a right-handed game is executed, and a second special symbol lottery is executed only when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery. There was a risk that it would be executed.

Further, in the 28th embodiment described above, a special period (invincible mode period) is made by facilitating the selection of a short-time (1 second) variable time when the player loses the prize in the first special symbol lottery during the latent state. ) Is not set, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation is shortened, and it becomes easier to set a special period (invincible mode period) during the latent state (easily execute a new first special symbol lottery). However, in the case of such a configuration, a small hit is won when the first special symbol fluctuation with a fluctuation time longer than 1 second is executed in the state where the latent state is set. In this case, the notification effect for notifying the player that the special period (invincible mode period) is set is not executed because the player can easily grasp that the special symbol is changed. However, there is a problem that it is easy to determine whether or not a special period (invincible mode period) is set for the player.

On the other hand, in the 29th embodiment, the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is more likely to be selected when the player loses the prize in the first special symbol lottery executed during the latent state, as compared with the 28th embodiment described above. is doing. This makes it difficult for the player to determine whether the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery executed during the latent state is a small hit or a miss, based on the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. ..

Further, in the 29th embodiment, when the lottery opportunity of the first special symbol is established by the left-handed game (when the game ball is put into the central first entry slot 64c), the right-handed game is used. 1 When the lottery opportunity for the special symbol is established (when the game ball is inserted into the right first entry slot 64r), the effect mode of the variation effect executed in response to the change of the first special symbol is shown. It is configured to be different, and in the latent state, it is better to execute the first special symbol lottery by the right-handed game than to execute the first special symbol lottery by the left-handed game. It is configured to make it easy for the player to understand that the first special symbol change is being executed, that is, that a special period (invincible mode period) is set. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a left-handed game is executed in a state where a latent state is set.

In addition, in the 29th embodiment, when the lottery opportunity of the first special symbol is established by the left-handed game during the latent state (when the game ball is entered into the central first entry slot 64c). , Even if the lottery result of the 1st special symbol is out of order, the variable effect suggesting that the special period (invincible mode period) is set can be executed, while the lottery result of the 1st special symbol Even if it is a small hit, it is configured not to execute a variable effect that suggests that a special period (invincible period) is set.

As a result, in the case where the lottery opportunity of the first special symbol is established by the left-handed game during the latent state (when the game ball is put into the central first entrance 64c), the special period (invincible period) Since it is possible to make it more difficult to understand whether or not is set, it is possible to further suppress the situation where the left-handed game is executed in the state where the latent state is set.

First, with reference to FIG. 630, the structure of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 29th embodiment will be described. In the 29th embodiment, it is for detecting that a game ball has entered the central first entry port 64c with respect to the game board 13 (see FIG. 604) of the pachinko machine 10 of the 28th embodiment described above. The first detection sensor 64s1 and the second detection sensor 64s2 for detecting that a game ball has entered the right first ball entry port 64r are provided, and the other points are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the 29th embodiment, the detection result of each detection sensor (64s1, 64s2) is configured to be received by the voice lamp control device 113 without going through the main control device 110. With this configuration, it becomes possible on the voice lamp control device 113 side to determine which entry port the game ball has entered and the lottery opportunity for the first special symbol has been established, and the first special It is possible to set a variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol variation in an effect mode according to the type of the ball entrance that has established the symbol lottery opportunity.

Further, in the 29th embodiment, it is determined which entry port the game ball enters on the voice lamp control device 113 side without going through the main control device 110, and the lottery opportunity for the first special symbol is established. Since the determination can be made, the processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

<About the electrical configuration in the 29th embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the 29th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 631 and 632. The pachinko machine 10 of the 29th embodiment has a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 and the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 with respect to the pachinko machine 10 of the 28th embodiment described above. It differs in that a part of is changed. Specifically, the ROM 202 is provided with a variation pattern selection 29 table 202wf instead of the variation pattern selection 28 table 202vf, and the RAM 223 is configured with an irregular winning flag 223wa. ing. The other elements are the same as the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the 28th embodiment described above, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the variation pattern selection 29 table 202wf will be described with reference to FIG. 631. FIG. 631 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the variation pattern selection 29 table 202wf. As shown in FIG. 631 (a), the variation pattern selection 29 table 202wf is provided with the first latency 29 table 202wf1 in place of the first latency table 202vf1 for the above-mentioned variation pattern selection 28 table 202vf. It differs in that it is the same otherwise.

Here, the contents of the first latent probability 29 table 202wf1 will be described with reference to FIG. 631 (b). FIG. 631 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the first latent probability 29 table 202wf1. The first latent probability 29 table 202wf1 is defined so that the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is more easily selected than the above-mentioned first latent probability table 202vf1 when the hit / fail determination result of the first special symbol is different. It differs in that it does, and is otherwise the same. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

Specifically, when the hit / fail judgment result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is out of order, the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149" and the fluctuation time is out of 30 seconds. However, the deviation time of 1 second is specified in the range of "150 to 198". That is, when the first special symbol change is executed in the state where the latent probability state is set, the lottery result (win / fail judgment result) has the same fluctuation time depending on whether it is a small hit or a miss. (30 seconds) can be easily selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the result of the first special symbol lottery due to the fluctuation time of the first special symbol.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the 29th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 632. FIG. 632 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the 29th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 632, the 29th embodiment differs from the RAM 223 (see FIG. 613) of the pachinko machine 10 in the 28th embodiment described above in that an irregular winning flag 223wa is added, and other than that. It is the same.

The irregular winning flag 223wa is a flag for indicating that a special symbol lottery opportunity has been established by an inappropriate game for the set game state, and the special symbol lottery opportunity is caused by an inappropriate game. It is set to on when it is established. In the 29th embodiment, a left-handed game (a game in which a game ball is launched aiming at a game area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80) is used as an entrance for establishing a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol. A game launched by a right-handed game (a game in which a game ball is launched toward a game area formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80) and a central first entrance 64c in which a game ball launched by the player can win a prize. It has a right first ball entrance 64r, and a ball can win a prize.

Then, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the left-handed game becomes an advantageous gaming method for the player, and when the probabilistic state and the latent probable state are set, the right-handed game becomes the player. It is configured to be an advantageous game method.

This irregular winning flag 223wa is set to ON when it is detected that a game ball has entered the central first entry slot 64c in a state where the latent probability state is set. Specifically, it is set to ON when the first detection sensor 64s1 capable of detecting the game ball that has entered the central first ball entry port 64c detects the game ball. Then, it is referred to in the variation display setting process 29 for special figure 1 (see S15172 in FIG. 634) for determining the effect mode of the variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol variation, and the irregular winning flag 223wa is set to ON. If it is determined to be, it is set to off (see S15174 in FIG. 634), and an invincible state is set against a 30-second fluctuation regardless of the result of the first special symbol lottery (see S15202 in FIG. 634).

That is, in the 29th embodiment, the player's game method executed in the latent state can be discriminated, and the variation effect set for the same special symbol variation based on the discriminating result. It is configured to make the production mode of the above different. Specifically, if the irregular winning flag 223wa is not set to on in the latent state, the invincible state is set only when the small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, and the irregular winning flag 223wa is turned on. When set to, it is invincible when the fluctuation pattern for showing the result of the first special symbol lottery is a fluctuation of 30 seconds, that is, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a small hit win or a miss. It is configured so that the state can be set.

With this configuration, if a proper game (right-handed game) is not performed in the latent state, the invincible state is set in addition to the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation, so that the player can be invincible. On the other hand, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether or not the small hit is changing. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a game in which a left-handed game is executed in the latent state and a right-handed game is performed when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery (when an invincible state is set).

<Regarding the control processing content of the audio lamp control device in the 29th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 633 to 634, the content of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 29th embodiment will be described. The control processing content executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 29th embodiment is the main processing (main processing) with respect to the control processing content executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 28th embodiment described above. Instead of the main process 29 (see FIG. 633), the variation display setting process 28 for the special figure 1 (see S15102 in FIG. 624) is replaced with the variation display setting process 29 for the special figure 1 (see FIG. 634). The difference is that S15172) is executed, and the other points are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted. The content of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 28th embodiment described above is described with reference to the above-mentioned 1st embodiment and the 12th embodiment. In explaining the content of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 29th embodiment, the above-mentioned first embodiment and the twelfth embodiment will be described as appropriate.

First, the contents of the main process 29 will be described with reference to FIG. 633. FIG. 633 is a flowchart showing the contents of the main process 29. The main process 29 differs from the main process (see FIG. 59) in the first embodiment described above in that a winning opening determination process (S14101) is added, and is the same except for the addition. The contents of the winning opening determination process (S14101) will be described later with reference to FIG. 635.

Next, the contents of the variation display setting process 29 (S15172) for the special figure 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 634. FIG. 634 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation display setting process 29 (S15172) for the special figure 1. The variation display setting process 29 (S15172) for the special figure 1 is an effect mode in the first special symbol variation in the latent state with respect to the variation display setting process 28 for the special figure 1 (see S15102 in FIG. 624) described above. The difference is that the setting method (setting method of the invincible state) is different, and the other points are the same.

When the variation display setting process 29 (S15172) for special figure 1 is executed, the same processes of S5201 and S5202 as the above-mentioned variation display setting process 28 for special figure 1 (see S15102 of FIG. 624) are executed. After that, it is determined whether the irregular winning flag 223wa is set to on (S15173), and if it is determined to be set to on (S15173: Yes), the irregular winning flag 223wa is set to off (S15174). It is determined whether or not the fluctuation of the special figure 1 this time is a fluctuation of 30 seconds (S15175).

In the 29th embodiment, as shown in the first latent probability 29 table 202wf1 (see FIG. 631 (b)), all the cases where the result of the first special symbol lottery (special drawing 1 lottery) is a small hit. , It is configured so that the fluctuation of 30 seconds is selected in about 75% of the cases of losing and winning. Therefore, in the process of S15175, it is determined whether the fluctuation is a small hit fluctuation or a missed fluctuation (30 seconds). In the process of S15175, if it is determined that the fluctuation is 30 seconds (S15175: Yes), a display command for indicating an invincible state is set regardless of whether or not a small hit is won (S15202), and the invincible flag 223va is set. Is set to on (S15203), and the process proceeds to S5206. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S15173 that the irregular winning flag 223wa is not set to ON (S15173: No), it is the same as the above-mentioned variation display setting process 28 for special figure 1 (see S15102 in FIG. 624). The processing of S1521 to S15203 is executed, then the processing of S5206 is executed, and this processing is terminated.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the irregular winning flag 223wa is set to ON, that is, when the left-handed game is executed during the latent state, the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 lottery). Even if the result of is not a small hit, the effect of showing an invincible state (see FIG. 605 (a)) is configured to be executed. Therefore, after the latent state is set, only the special figure 1 lottery is executed by the left-handed game, and the right-handed game is performed only during the period when the special figure 1 lottery fluctuates in small hits (invincible period). FIG. 2 It is possible to make it difficult to execute an irregular game that prevents a disadvantageous jackpot from being won in a lottery.

Next, the contents of the winning opening determination process (S14101) will be described with reference to FIG. 635. FIG. 635 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning opening determination process (S14101). In this winning opening determination process (S14101), a process for determining whether an irregular game is being executed in the latent probability state is executed.

When the winning opening determination process (S14101) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (S14151), if it is determined to be the latent state (S141511: Yes), and then the first. 1 It is determined whether the ball entry sensor 64s1 (see FIG. 630) is on (S14152). When it is determined that the first ball entry sensor 64s1 is on (S14152: Yes), that is, when the game ball enters the central first ball entry port 64c during the latent state, the irregular winning flag 223wa is turned on. (S14153), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S14151, when it is determined that the latent state is not set (S141511: No), or in the process of S14152, it is determined that the first ball entry sensor 64s1 is not on (S14152: No). ), This process ends as it is.

In this embodiment, the irregular winning flag 223wa is set to off every time the first special symbol lottery is executed while the irregular winning flag 223wa is set to on. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the irregular winning flag 223wa may be set to off when the variation for 30 seconds is executed in the state where the irregular winning flag 223wa is set to on. With this configuration, when an irregular game is played, it is possible to always set an invincible state based on the fluctuation time (an invincible state executed regardless of the small hit winning). It is possible to make it difficult to execute an irregular game that prevents a disadvantageous jackpot from being won in a lottery.

Further, as a condition for turning off the irregular winning flag 223wa, the second ball entry sensor 64s2 (see FIG. 630) detects a predetermined number (10) of game balls in a situation where the irregular winning flag 223wa is set to on. In this case, a condition for setting the irregular winning flag 223wa to off may be provided. With this configuration, it is possible to set an invincible state (an invincible state executed regardless of a small hit win) for a player who has once executed an irregular game for a predetermined period and based on a fluctuation time. , It is possible to make it more difficult to execute an irregular game that prevents a disadvantageous jackpot from being won in the special figure 2 lottery.

Further, in the 29th embodiment, when it is determined that the first ball entry sensor 64s1 is on during the latent probability state, the process of setting the irregular winning flag 223wa to on is executed. Not limited to this, when the number of times that the first ball entry sensor 64s1 is determined to be on during the latent probability state reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times), the irregular winning flag 223wa is set to on. It may be configured. In this way, by providing an allowable range until the irregular winning flag 223wa is set to ON, the game ball flows down the left side region even though the right-handed game is played, and the first ball entry sensor 64s1 When it is turned on, the irregular winning flag 223wa can be set to be difficult to turn on. Therefore, it is possible to set an invincible state (an invincible state executed regardless of the small hit winning) based on the fluctuation time for a predetermined period only for the player who intentionally executes the irregular game. It is possible to make it more difficult to execute an irregular game that prevents a disadvantageous jackpot from being won in the special figure 2 lottery.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the lottery opportunity of the first special symbol lottery is configured to be established by a plurality of requirements, and the first special symbol lottery is performed according to the type of requirements for establishing the lottery opportunity. It is configured so that the production mode for showing the lottery result of the above is different. That is, different effects can be executed by different requirements for establishing the lottery opportunity.

In the 29th embodiment, an advantageous staging mode that is advantageous to the player (invincible state based on the small hit winning) and a disadvantageous staging mode that is disadvantageous to the player (invincible state based on the small hit winning) according to the type of requirement for establishing the lottery opportunity. (Invincible state based on fluctuation time) and is configured to be configurable, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an additional mode set for the same production mode may be changed.

In addition, it is not a technical idea to change the degree of advantage of the player, but based on the technical idea of improving the effect of the effect, to show the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery according to the requirement type for establishing the lottery opportunity. It may be configured so that the production mode is different. Further, in the present embodiment, the effect mode (variable effect) for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is configured to be different according to the requirement type for establishing the lottery opportunity, but the present invention is limited to this. However, for example, the effect mode (variable effect) for showing the lottery result of the ordinary symbol may be configured to be different according to the requirement type for establishing the lottery opportunity.

In addition, in the 29th embodiment, an example in which two elements for establishing a lottery opportunity are provided for the same lottery is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and elements for establishing a lottery opportunity are shown. 3 or more may be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, only when a specific gaming state (latent state) is set, the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery is shown according to the requirement type for establishing the lottery opportunity. When the production mode is configured to be different and a game state other than a specific game state (latent state) is set, the first special symbol lottery is performed according to the type of requirement for establishing the lottery opportunity. It is configured so that the effect mode for showing the lottery result is not different, but it is not limited to this, and regardless of the set game state, depending on the type of requirement for establishing the lottery opportunity, The production mode for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery may be different. Further, the types of different production modes may be configured to be further different according to the set gaming state.

<30th embodiment>
Next, the thirtieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 636 to 647. The thirtieth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth embodiment described above in that the mode of effect of the variable effect to be executed is different.

In the 16th embodiment described above, the jackpot game (design jackpot game) is executed based on the fact that the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery as an opportunity to execute the privilege game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player. A small hit is won by the opportunity (first opportunity) and a lottery of a special symbol, and the game ball is opened in a specific area during the small hit game (V winning device 650 (see FIG. 361) that is opened during the small hit game). It has two triggers, one is the trigger (second trigger) for the jackpot game (V jackpot game) to be executed based on the passage through the V area (not shown) provided inside, and further, the first The lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) was configured so that it was easier to win a small hit than the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1). Then, during the time saving state, which is a game state that can be set after the end of the big hit game, the lottery of the special figure 2 is easily executed.

As a result, in the time-saving state in which the lottery of the special figure 2 is mainly executed, it is possible to facilitate the establishment of the above-mentioned second opportunity, and it is possible to make it easier to execute the jackpot game than in the normal state. The time saving state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player can be enthusiastically played with the aim of setting the time saving state.

In addition, in the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, a maximum of 4 prize information of the 2nd special symbol (special figure 2) can be stored in a hold, and the lottery result of the final change of the special figure 2 in the time saving state can be obtained. Using the variable effect shown, it was configured to notify the player of the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 winning information stored on hold. More specifically, as an effect corresponding to the final variation of Special Figure 2 in the time saving state, a first effect (final variation effect), a second effect executed after the first effect (result notification effect), and Was configured to be feasible, and the effect mode of the final variation was set so as to be set based on the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 winning information stored on hold. That is, as a result of the effect of the variation effect executed during the time saving state, in addition to the lottery result of the special figure variation, the special figure 2 lottery executed after the gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state (to the normal state). It was configured to notify the result of the lottery for the winning information of the special figure 2 which was held and stored at the time of the transition.

However, the special figure 2 lottery (holding memory at the time of shifting to the normal state) executed after the gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state by the final fluctuation effect showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 final fluctuation in the time saving state. Since it was configured to notify the player (advance notification) of all the results of the lottery for the winning information of Special Figure 2 that has been done, the variation effect (final variation effect) for the final variation of Special Figure 2 in the time saving state However, if the final variation effect is executed in an effect mode that indicates that the player has not won, the player's motivation to play will drop at once. was there.

Further, in the 16th embodiment described above, the number of reserved special figures 2 acquired at the execution timing of the final variation effect is determined, and the effect mode of the final variation effect is set based on the determination result. Therefore, for example, the game is performed so as to acquire the upper limit of the special figure 2 hold just before the end of the special figure 2 final fluctuation period in the time saving state, that is, near the timing when the final fluctuation effect ends and the result notification effect is executed. Therefore, as an effect mode of the final variation effect, the special figure 2 lottery executed after the game state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state (the winning information of the special figure 2 held and stored at the time of shifting to the normal state). It was possible not to reflect the result of the lottery for the special figure 2), but in order not to reflect the result of all the special figure 2 lottery in the production mode of the final variation effect, the special figure 2 is reserved. Since it is necessary to delay the acquisition timing of, in the worst case, the special figure 2 hold will not be acquired up to the upper limit, and the time saving state will shift to the normal state, providing a disadvantageous game to the player. There was a problem that it would end up.

On the other hand, in the thirtieth embodiment, the look-ahead range to be the target of the final variation effect can be differently executed. Specifically, the production content of the final variation effect indicates the lottery result of the variation, the lottery result including a part of the acquired special figure 2 hold, and all the acquired special figure 2 It is configured to be either the case of showing the lottery result including the hold or the case of showing the lottery result. Then, the lottery result of the special figure 2 hold, which is not included in the effect content of the final variation effect, is executed across the special figure 2 final change period and the special figure 2 change period executed in the normal state. It is configured to notify the player by using the result notification effect (time saving result display effect).

With this configuration, even if the effect content of the final variation effect is an effect content that indicates an deviation, the range of the effect content that is targeted for the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold can be determined. Since it can be difficult for the player to understand, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the winning even during the period when the time saving result display screen is displayed.

Further, in the thirtieth embodiment, the range of the special figure 2 hold to be reflected in the effect content of the final variation effect is determined based on the operation content of the operating means by the player. With this configuration, the player can determine all or part of the range of the special figure 2 hold to be reflected in the production content of the final variation effect, so that the game content desired by the player can be determined. It is possible to easily set the effect mode of various effects (final variation effect, result notification effect) executed in the final variation of the special figure 2 in the effect mode according to the above.

Further, in the thirtieth embodiment, the range of the special figure 2 hold to be reflected in the effect content of the final variation effect is configured so as to be difficult for the player to grasp. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to understand how many lottery results (look-ahead results) of the second special symbol lottery are used to set the effect content of the final variation effect. Therefore, for example, the final variation. Even if the production content of the production is out of alignment, the production can be enjoyed to the end while expecting that the number of special figures 2 pending, which is the target of the result notification production, is large.

In addition, in the thirtieth embodiment, when the result notification effect is executed, the number of special figures 2 reserved that was not the target of the final variation effect can be notified to the player. With this configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the result notification effect while causing the player to predict the degree of expectation that the effect indicating the winning will be executed during the result notification effect.

<Regarding the content of the production in the 30th embodiment>
First, with reference to FIGS. 636 to 639, characteristic production contents among various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the thirtieth embodiment will be described. Specifically, among the effects executed during the final change in the time-saving state (Final change in FIG. 2), the main points are different from the effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment described above. I will explain.

First, with reference to FIG. 639, regarding the content of the effect executed during the final variation of FIG. 2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirtieth embodiment, the final of the special figure 2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth embodiment described above. The explanation will be focused on the differences from the effect content (see FIG. 364) executed during the fluctuation. FIG. 639 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the effect executed by the final variation of the special figure 2 in the time saving state.

As shown in FIG. 639, in the thirtieth embodiment, as in the case of the sixteenth embodiment described above with reference to FIG. A variable period of seconds is set, the first 5 seconds becomes a waiting period, and a waiting effect, which is an effect mode for encouraging the player to acquire a holding ball (special figure 2 holding) of the second special symbol, is performed. It is configured to run.

After that, the first period in which the operation valid period is set is set for 5 seconds. The contents of the effect (pressing effect) executed during this first period will be described later with reference to FIG. 636 (a). Then, when the first period elapses, a second period of 15 seconds is set. During this second period, a mission effect (reach effect) of a display mode based on the effect result of the pressing effect executed during the first period is executed. Since the content of the mission effect (reach effect) is the same as the effect shown in FIGS. 374 (b) and 375 (a) of the 16th embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Then, when the second period ends, the remaining period (5 seconds) of the final fluctuation of the special figure 2 and the fluctuation time (2 seconds) for digesting the special figure 2 hold (maximum 4 pieces) at the end of the time reduction are added. A third period is set, and during the third period, a result notification effect for displaying the game result during the time saving state is executed. The content of the result notification effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 638. In the 30th embodiment as well, as in the 16th embodiment described above, the variation time required when all the special figure 2 lottery results included in the special figure 2 hold at the end of the time reduction are out of order is also the special figure 2. The fluctuation time required when any of the special figure 2 lottery results included in the hold is a hit is also configured to be the same fluctuation time (2 seconds).

Specifically, in the 16th embodiment described above, four normal fluctuation pattern 16 tables 202le1 (see FIG. 385) referred to when selecting the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation in the normal state are used. The total fluctuation time (0.5 seconds x 4 times = 2 seconds) when all the special figure 2 holds are removed, and the fluctuation time (2 seconds) when the first special figure 2 hold is a hit, and 1 Total fluctuation time (0.5 seconds + 1.5 seconds = 2 seconds) when the second special figure 2 hold is off and the second special figure 2 hold is a hit, and the first and second special figure 2 hold The total fluctuation time (0.5 seconds x 2 times + 1 second = 2 seconds) when the special figure 2 hold is removed and the third special figure 2 hold is a hit is configured to be the same. ..

With this configuration, it is possible to set a fixed period as the third period regardless of the lottery result corresponding to the special figure 2 hold (4 pieces) acquired at the end of the time reduction.

Note that FIG. 639 shows an example in which the special figure 2 hold acquired at the end of the time reduction is the upper limit value (4 pieces), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special figure acquired at the end of the time reduction is not limited to this. Fig. 2 By making the variable time selected when the lottery result is out of order according to the number of holdings, all the special features are obtained regardless of the number of holdings of Special Figure 2 acquired at the end of the time reduction. FIG. 2 The fluctuation time (total fluctuation time) required to digest the hold may be configured to be 2 seconds.

For example, if there is only one special figure 2 hold acquired at the end of the time reduction, the variation time of 2 seconds is selected when the special figure 2 hold is out, and the time reduction ends. If there are two special figure 2 holds that are sometimes acquired and none of the lottery results are out of order, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation corresponding to the first special figure 2 hold is 0.5. The fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds may be selected as the fluctuation time of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 corresponding to the second special figure 2 hold. As a result, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation executed after the end of the time reduction is set regardless of the number of special figure 2 holds acquired at the end of the time reduction and the result of the special figure 2 lottery corresponding to each special figure 2 hold. Can be unified.

Next, with reference to FIG. 636 (a), the contents of the effect (pressing effect) executed in the first period (see FIG. 639) of the final variation of the special figure 2 will be described. FIG. 636A is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode displayed during the pressing effect. In the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment described above, the same contents as those displayed during the final variation of FIG. 2 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the content of the pressing effect will be described. In the present embodiment, an operation valid period during which the player can operate the frame button 22 (operation means) is set during the first period of the final change in FIG. 2, and the operation to the frame button 22 during the operation valid period is set. Based on the content, it is configured to be able to execute a pressing effect in which the effect mode can be changed.

As shown in FIG. 636 (a), when the pressing effect is executed, a button icon for indicating an operating means (frame button 22) to be operated by the player near the center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. 829a is displayed, and in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "release stock with button PUSH" are displayed as a guidance mode for explaining the effect content during the pressing effect. Further, in the display area Dm21, the number of pressing icons (872a to 872d) corresponding to the acquired number of reserved special figures 2 is displayed. FIG. 636 (a) shows a state in which “4” is displayed in the small display area Dm2a for indicating the number of special figure 2 hold, that is, a state in which four special figure 2 hold are acquired. Four pressing icons are displayed in the area Dm21.

When the player presses the frame button 22 during this pressing effect period, the display mode of the pressing icon is variably displayed in the order of the first pressing icon 872a, the second pressing icon 872b, the third pressing icon 872c, and the fourth pressing icon 872d. To. In the thirtieth embodiment, based on the player pressing the frame button 22 during the pressing effect, the pre-reading special figure 2 hold is determined by lottery from the acquired special figure 2 hold, and the determination is made. It is configured to set the display mode after the change based on the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 hold. Further, in the thirtieth embodiment, when the frame button 22 is pressed for each pressing icon, the pre-reading special figure 2 hold is determined in duplicate.

That is, the number of hold icons corresponding to the acquired special figure 2 hold number is displayed, and each time the player presses the frame button 22, each hold icon is variably displayed in a display mode showing the look-ahead result. , While each hold icon appears to be variably displayed in a display mode for indicating the look-ahead result of the corresponding special figure 2 hold, in reality, the special figure 2 hold is randomly selected (including duplicate selection). The hold icon can be variably displayed in a display mode showing the look-ahead result.

With this configuration, it is possible to execute a pressing effect that makes it difficult for the player to understand the number of special figure 2 holds that was actually pre-read, so that various effects executed in the final variation of special figure 2 can be performed. In addition to the lottery result of the fluctuation, it is possible to perform an effect in which it is difficult to grasp the range of the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 hold.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the pressing icons 872a to 872d are configured to be pressed in order, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the player can select the pressing order of the pressing icons 872a to 872d. In this case, the image 829a imitating the operation means may be configured, such as an image corresponding to the first pressing icon 872a, an image corresponding to the second pressing icon 872b, an image corresponding to the third pressing icon 872c, and a fourth. It is configured to display the image corresponding to the pressing icon 872d, the displayed plurality of images are configured to be selected in order, and the pressing icon 872a to correspond to the image selected at the time of operating the operation means. It is preferable to configure 872d so that it can be changed to a display icon.

Further, in this case, it is preferable to specify that the distribution of the special figure 2 hold that can be a target is changed for each of the pressed icons 872a to 872d. As a result, the selection ratio of the target special figure 2 hold can be changed by the operation of selecting the desired pressed icon from the pressed icons 872a to 872d by the player. When the player arbitrarily selects and operates the press icons 872a to 872d, even if the press icons 872a to 872d are configured to completely correspond to each special figure 2 hold. good.

Next, with reference to FIG. 636 (b), the effect content when the display modes of all (four) pressed icons are variably displayed during the pressing effect will be described. FIG. 636 (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode displayed when the display modes of all (four) pressing icons are variably displayed during the pressing effect.

As shown in FIG. 636 (b), the display mode of the character 851 is changed according to the display mode of the variablely displayed pressed icon. In FIG. 636 (b), the first pressing icon 872a is changed to the display mode indicating "chance", the second pressing icon 872b is changed to the display mode indicating "sword", and the third pressing icon 872c is "aura large". The display mode indicating "chance" is changed, and the fourth pressing icon 872d is changed to the display mode indicating "chance".

Then, the display mode of the character 851 is changed to a display mode corresponding to the display mode of each of the pressed icons displayed in a variable manner, and the display mode in which the character 851 wearing "aura large" is equipped with a sword is displayed. Has been done. Then, the character "chance" is displayed below the character 851. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "Clear the mission with the emission power" are displayed as a guidance display for indicating the content of the mission effect (effect mode during the second period) to be executed next to the press effect. Will be done.

In this case, the mission effect is executed in the effect mode including the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 hold determined for each pressed icon. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the special figure 2 hold to be read ahead is randomly determined for each pressed icon, the number of the special figure 2 hold to be read ahead is determined. Expectations for mission production can be different depending on the situation.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 636 (b), the types of display icons for each pressed icon are configured to be duplicated, but the same display icon is not selected without limitation. It may be configured as follows. With this configuration, the more the pressing icon is pressed, the more various display icons can be displayed, so that the player can enthusiastically operate the operating means.

On the other hand, in the state of FIG. 636 (a), when the first period (pressing effect period) elapses without the player pressing the frame button 22 even once, the display mode shown in FIG. 637 (a) is displayed. .. FIG. 637 (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode when the frame button 22 is never pressed (when the stock is not used) during the pressing effect. As shown in FIG. 637 (a), when the frame button 22 is not pressed during the pressing effect, the special drawing 2 hold to be read ahead is not determined for each pressing icon (872a to 872d). Since it is in the state, each pressing icon (872a to 872d) cannot be variably displayed in the display mode for showing the look-ahead result (lottery result) of the special figure 2 hold of the look-ahead target. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 637 (a), the display mode of each of the pressed icons (872a to 872d) is variably displayed in the display mode indicating "?".

In this case, since there is no special figure 2 hold to be read ahead, the mission effect executed after the pressing effect is executed in an effect mode corresponding to the lottery result of the variation. That is, even if four special figure 2 hold are acquired, by not pressing the frame button 22 during the press effect, the effect mode of the final variation effect (mission effect) can be read ahead of the special figure 2 hold. It can be set without using the result.

Although detailed description will be described later, in the present embodiment, the type of the character 851 whose display mode is changed during the pressing effect is determined based on the lottery result of the change (Final change in FIG. 2). It is composed. Specifically, the character (advantageous character) that is easier to select when the lottery result of the change (final change in Special Figure 2) is a hit (small hit or big hit) is easier to select than the case where the change is out of order, and the change. 1 from a plurality of characters including a character (disadvantageous character) that is easier to select when the lottery result of (Special Figure 2 final fluctuation) is a hit (small hit or big hit) than when it is a hit (small hit or big hit). Characters can be determined (selected).

With this configuration, it is possible for the player to select whether or not to press the frame button 22 during the pressing effect according to the type of the character 851 displayed as the pressing effect. For example, when an advantageous character is displayed in the pressing effect, even if the mission effect is executed only for the lottery result of the fluctuation, the effect result tends to be a winning effect, so that the effect result is likely to be a hit during the pressing effect. When a game in which the frame button 22 is not operated is selected, or conversely, when an advantageous character is displayed in the pressing effect, the pressing effect is to increase the probability that the effect result of the mission effect will be a winning effect. You can select a game to operate the frame button 22 inside.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the display mode of the character 851 displayed during the pressing effect is configured to be different as a suggestion effect suggesting the lottery result of the variation, but the present invention is not limited to this. , A specific character 851 may be determined without being related to the lottery result of the variation. In this case, the effect mode of the mission effect executed after the pressing effect may be different depending on the effect result of the variation. That is, in the present embodiment, after predicting the lottery result of the variation, the pre-reading target of the special figure 2 hold is configured to be different in the pressing effect, whereas the lottery result of the variation is predicted. In the pressing effect, the pre-reading target of the special figure 2 hold may be configured to be different without causing the pressing effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 637 (b), a display mode of the special pattern executed during the pressing effect will be described. FIG. 637 (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode displayed when a plurality of winning information indicating winning is included in the special figure 2 hold.

Although a detailed description will be described later, in the thirtieth embodiment, in a part of the case where the player operates the frame button 22 in order to change the display mode of the fourth pressing icon 872d, the special figure 2 to be read ahead. It is configured so that the number of holds is not one but multiple (all special figures 2 hold). Then, in the case where a plurality of special figure 2 hold is targeted, when it is determined that there are a plurality of special figure 2 hold having winning information indicating winning as a look-ahead result for the plurality of special figure 2 hold. , The display mode of each pressing icon is configured to be displayed in a special pattern for showing the player that there are a plurality of winnings in the special figure 2 hold.

When the display mode of the special pattern is displayed, as shown in FIG. 637 (b), the display mode showing "V" is displayed in the display area Dm21 as a special display mode in which each pressed icon is fused, and the character is displayed. The 851 is also displayed in a display mode with the "V" mark attached. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "premier item GET" are displayed as a guidance display mode for showing that the effect result of the pressing effect this time is a special effect result that is advantageous to the player. With these displays, it is possible to easily understand that the player is given a special privilege (multiple small wins).

As described above, in the thirtieth embodiment, as a condition for displaying the display mode of the special pattern, the acquired number of reserved special figures 2 is the upper limit (4 pieces), and the display mode of the fourth pressing icon 872d is displayed. A condition is set that is satisfied when the player operates the frame button 22 in order to change the value. Therefore, with the aim of displaying the display mode of the special pattern, the game is enthusiastically performed so that the number of holdings in Special Figure 2 reaches the upper limit, and the frame button 22 is actively operated during the pressing effect. Can be made to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 638, when the effect content indicating the deviation is executed in the mission effect, the effect content executed during the third period (see FIG. 639) will be described.

Here, the contents of the effect executed during the third period will be briefly described. This third period is an effect period set after the second period in which the mission effect is executed, as described above with reference to FIG. 639. Then, at the timing when the third period is started, the effect content is set according to the effect results up to the second period.

Specifically, when the result of the mission effect is the effect result indicating the winning, the effect mode (see FIG. 375 (b)) indicating the winning is set as it is, and the effect indicating that the result of the mission effect is out of order is set. In the case of a result, the result notification effect is configured to display a display screen (time saving end screen) indicating that the time saving state ends. Then, in the pressing effect executed during the first period, if the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 hold that was not included in the pre-reading target includes a winning effect, the effect indicating the winning effect during this result notification effect ( Resurrection production) is configured to be executed. With this configuration, the look-ahead result for the special figure 2 hold acquired at the time when the first period is set is notified during the second period or the third period according to the effect result of the pressing effect. Since it is determined whether or not to notify the player, the player can be allowed to play the game with the expectation of winning until the final variation effect of Special Figure 2 is completed.

FIG. 638 (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode displayed during the result notification effect executed during the third period. As shown in FIG. 638 (a), when the result notification effect is executed, the same time saving end screen as described above is displayed with reference to FIG. 377 of the 16th embodiment described above. Further, in the thirtieth embodiment, a number of treasure chest icons corresponding to the number of reserved special figures 2 that were not targeted for pre-reading in the pressing effect is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "Hmm? There is a treasure chest" are displayed to inform the player that there is a special figure 2 hold that has not yet been read ahead.

In the example shown in FIG. 638 (a), as a result of the pressing effect, a result notification effect is shown when only one special figure 2 hold look-ahead result is set as the look-ahead target, and the pressing effect indicates the look-ahead target. Three treasure chest icons 829b1 to 829b3 are displayed to indicate that the number of reserved special figures 2 that did not become three is three.

In this way, in the result notification effect, by configuring the special figure 2 hold number for which the look-ahead result is not yet reflected in the execution effect to be notified to the player, an effect indicating winning is executed during the result notification effect. The degree of expectation can be predicted by the player. Therefore, when many treasure chest icons are displayed, it is possible to draw attention to the result notification effect with the expectation of winning, and when the number of treasure box icons displayed is small, excessive expectations for the result notification effect. It is possible to play a game without having to have.

In the result notification effect, the effect of opening the displayed treasure box icons (three treasure box icons 829b1 to 829b3 in the figure) in order is executed, and the winning information indicating the winning in the special figure 2 hold that is the target of the result notification effect is executed. When there is a special figure 2 hold including the above, the display mode shown in FIG. 638 (b) is displayed. FIG. 638 (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode displayed when a winning result is shown in the result notification effect.

As shown in FIG. 638 (b), if there is a special figure 2 hold that includes winning information indicating winning in the special figure 2 hold that is the target of the result notification effect, the target treasure box icon (treasure box icon in the figure). 829b1) opens, and pseudo symbols 881a to 881c indicating that the player wins the prize are displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "Congratulations on the resurrection big hit" are displayed as a guidance display mode for notifying the winning (small hit winning).

The timing at which the display mode shown in FIG. 638 is displayed is during the final fluctuation period of FIG. 2 as shown in the small display area Dm2 and the small display area Dm2a. That is, the pseudo symbols 881a to 881c do not indicate the lottery result of the variation, but notify the result of the special figure 2 lottery to be executed later in advance. Therefore, in the thirtieth embodiment, as in the sixteenth embodiment described above, from the display of the pseudo symbols 881a to 881c in the result notification effect to the stop display of the special figure 2 fluctuation that is actually won. During that time, the pseudo symbols 881a to 881c are configured to swing and display (in the figure, they are displayed by curved arrows), and the pseudo symbols 881a to 881c are configured to stop and display the winning special figure 2 fluctuation. Is configured to be switched to and displayed as a third symbol (for example, 777) indicating winning.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the lottery result corresponding to the second special symbol change that is actually being executed from being mistakenly recognized as a winning result. That is, in the present embodiment, a symbol (pseudo symbol) for notifying the result of the special symbol lottery to be executed later and a symbol for notifying the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the execution of the special symbol change are notified. By displaying the (third symbol) and the display mode differently, it is configured so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game.

Although not shown, if the special figure 2 hold corresponding to the result notification effect does not include the winning information indicating the winning, all the treasure box icons will not open (in the figure, a cross mark is used). (Display) is displayed, and the time saving state ends as it is.

In the thirtieth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 638 (a), in the result notification effect, the special figure 2 hold number for which the look-ahead result is not yet reflected in the execution effect can be notified to the player. Not limited to this, for example, the display mode of the treasure box icon is configured to display one treasure box icon regardless of the number of reserved special figures 2 in which the look-ahead result is not yet reflected in the execution effect. It may be configured to be different based on the look-ahead result of the target special figure 2 hold.

In this case, for example, when there is a special figure 2 hold (winning special figure 2 hold) having winning information indicating winning in the special figure 2 hold which is the pre-reading target of the result notification effect, there is no winning special figure 2 hold. It is preferable to configure it so that it is possible to select an advantageous display mode that is easier to select than, and a disadvantageous display mode that is easier to select when there is no hit special figure 2 hold than when there is a hit special figure 2 hold. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to understand which effect used the special figure 2 hold as the look-ahead result in the final variation effect of the special figure 2. Further, as the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 hold, the display mode of the treasure box icon may be changed according to the number of hold numbers indicating the winning (big hit, small hit) winning.

<About the electrical configuration in the thirtieth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 640 to 642, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirtieth embodiment will be described. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the thirtieth embodiment is a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 and the RAM 223 with respect to the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth embodiment described above. It differs from a part of the configuration of, in that it is changed, and is the same except for that. The detailed description of the same content will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the thirtieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 640 (a). FIG. 640 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents specified in ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the thirtieth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 640 (a), in the present embodiment, the variation pattern selection 30 table 222xa is provided in place of the variation pattern selection 16 table 222la for the ROM 222 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment described above. The difference is that the character selection table 222xb, the target hold selection table 222xc, and the display icon selection table 222xd are added.

The variation pattern selection 30 table 222xa has two variation pattern selection tables associated with the gaming state, and specifically, the normal variation pattern selection 16 table referred to when the gaming state is the normal state. It has 222la1, a time saving variation pattern selection 30 table 222xa2 referred to in the case of a time saving state. Since the normal variation pattern selection 16 table 222la1 is the same as the 16th embodiment described above, the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the time saving variation pattern selection 30 table 222xa2 is based on the same technical concept as the variation pattern selection table described in each of the above-described embodiments, and is included in the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110. It is a data table in which a display variation pattern (effect mode) corresponding to a variation pattern (variation time, lottery result, symbol type) is selected, and a variation time of 30 seconds is specified as the final variation of the second special symbol in a time-saving state. It is different from the above-mentioned 16th embodiment in that the variation pattern is configured to be always selected, and is the same except for the above-mentioned embodiment. Therefore, the illustration and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the thirtieth embodiment, the final variation in the time saving state (the final variation in FIG. 2) is configured to be a variation of 30 seconds without fail. Therefore, it is possible to unify the effect pattern of the variation effect executed in response to the final variation of the special figure 2, and it is possible to reduce the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113. Further, when the first special symbol change is executed as the final change in the time saving state, the short change of 0.2 seconds is executed as in the above-mentioned 16th embodiment (see FIG. 386), and the short change is executed. As a variable effect corresponding to, the time saving end screen is displayed. That is, if an irregular game is played in the time saving state and the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the execution of the first special symbol change, the special figure 2 hold is acquired in the final change period in the time saving state. A sufficient period is not set for the effect, and the effect (standby effect) for prompting the acquisition of the special figure 2 hold is not executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the act of intentionally performing an irregular game during the time saving state.

The character selection table 222xb is a data table referred to when selecting the type of character 851 (see FIG. 636) to be displayed in the pressing effect executed during the first period of the effect period of the final change in FIG. Is. This character selection table 222xb is executed when it is determined to be the first period start timing in the final variation effect update process 30 (see C4596 in FIG. 643) executed for determining the effect mode of the final variation in the time saving state. It is referred to when the type of the character 851 is selected in the first period effect setting process (see C4882 in FIG. 644) (see C8001 in FIG. 644). The character selection table 222xb is defined so that the ratio of type selection of the character 851 is different depending on the result (win / fail determination result) of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the final change of the special figure 2.

Here, the contents specified in the character selection table 222xb will be described with reference to FIG. 641. FIG. 641 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the character selection table 222xb. As shown in FIG. 641, in the character selection table 222xb, there are three types of selected characters (3 types of selected characters) corresponding to the hit / fail determination result corresponding to the change (the final change in Special Figure 2) and the acquired value of the effect counter 223 lf. Character type) is specified.

Specifically, when the hit / fail judgment result corresponding to the change (final change in Special Figure 2) is a big hit, the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf is in the range of "0 to 49", and "rabbit" is set to ". When "Brave" is defined in the range of "50 to 98" and the hit / fail judgment result corresponding to the change (Final change in Special Figure 2) is a small hit, the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf is ". "Rabbit" is specified in the range of "0 to 49", "turtle" is specified in the range of "50 to 79", and "hero" is specified in the range of "80 to 98". If the result of the hit / fail judgment corresponding to (variation) is out of order, the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf is "turtle" in the range of "0 to 39" and "rabbit" in the range of "40 to 89". "Brave" is defined in the range of "90 to 98".

That is, of the three types of characters that can be selected with reference to the character selection table 222xb, "hero" is the most advantageous character type for the player, "turtle" is the most disadvantageous character type for the player, and "rabbit". Is a character type that is more disadvantageous to the player than "Brave" and more advantageous to the player than "Turtle".

In this way, by making the selected character type different based on the hit / fail determination result corresponding to the change (Final change in FIG. 2), the change is based on the type of the character 851 displayed as the pressing effect. It is possible to make the player predict the result of the hit / fail judgment corresponding to (Special Figure 2 Final Change). Therefore, it is possible to let the player select whether or not to operate the frame button 22 during the pressing effect according to the prediction result of the hit / fail determination result corresponding to the change (special figure 2 final change). 2 It is possible to easily increase the variation of the effect executed during the final fluctuation.

In this embodiment, regardless of which character type is selected, the content of the character selection table 222xb so that the possibility of "missing" remains as a result of the hit / fail judgment corresponding to the change (Final change in FIG. 2). However, the special character is not limited to this, and is selected only when, for example, the hit / fail judgment result corresponding to the change (final change in Special Figure 2) is a hit (big hit, small hit). For example, a character imitating an angel) may be configured to be selectable. With this configuration, the player can be made to select whether or not to operate the frame button 22 during the pressing effect, after understanding that the fluctuation is won. As a result, for example, a player who does not want to uselessly grasp the look-ahead result in advance can select a game in which the frame button 22 is not operated during the pressing effect, and the frame button 22 can be selected in the pressing effect. It is also possible to select a game for predicting the number of deviations included in the special figure 2 hold by positively operating the button and changing the display mode of the pressed icon.

The target hold selection table 222xc is referred to in order to change the display mode of each press icon when the player presses the frame button 22 with respect to the press icons 872a to 872d during the press effect. It is a data table for selecting the type of. In the target hold selection table 222xc, the pressing effect is executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 30 (see C3157 in FIG. 647) for periodically monitoring that the player operates the frame button 22. When it is determined that it is in one period (C8201: Yes in FIG. 647) and it is determined that there is a pressed icon whose display mode is not variable (C8202: Yes in FIG. 647), the target special figure is 2 Referenced for selecting a hold (see C8203 in FIG. 647). Then, the display mode after the change is selected by the display icon selection table 222xd described later according to the hit / fail determination result (look-ahead result) of the selected special figure 2 hold (target hold).

Here, the contents specified in the target hold selection table 222xc will be described with reference to FIG. 642 (a). FIG. 642 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the target hold selection table 222xc. As shown in FIG. 642 (a), in the target hold selection table 222xc, the type of the pressed icon to be selected this time, the acquired special figure 2 hold number, and the acquired effect counter 223 lf value are displayed. Correspondingly, the target hold (target special figure 2 hold) is stipulated.

The values of "1" to "4" defined as the target hold indicate the order in which they are stored in the winning information storage area 223la. For example, the target hold "1" is next to the second special. The special figure 2 hold (the first special figure 2 hold) in which the symbol lottery is executed is shown, and the target hold "2" is the special figure 2 hold (the second special figure 2 hold) in which the second special symbol lottery is executed next. (Fig. 2 hold) is shown. Hereinafter, the target hold "3" is the third special figure 2 hold, and the target hold "4" is the second special symbol lottery executed at the end of the acquired special figure 2 hold. The special figure 2 hold (the fourth special figure 2 hold) is shown.

Specifically, if the target is the first pressing icon 872a (the pressing icon whose display mode is first changed by the pressing effect), and the number of acquired special figure 2 holdings is one, the acquisition is performed. The target hold "1" is specified in the range where the value of the effect counter 223 lf is "0 to 79", and the target hold "-" is specified in the range of "80 to 98", that is, no target hold is specified. Further, when the number of acquired special figure 2 hold is 2, the target hold "1" is in the range of "0 to 39" and the target hold is in the range of "40 to 79" in the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf. "2" is defined as a target hold "-" in the range of "80 to 98", that is, no target hold. When the number of acquired special figure 2 hold is 3, the target hold "1" is in the range of "0 to 39" and the target hold "2" is in the range of "40 to 79". , "3" in the range of "80 to 89" and "-" in the range of "90 to 98", that is, no target hold is specified. When the number of acquired special figure 2 hold is 4, the target hold "1" is in the range of "0 to 39" and the target hold is "2" in the range of "40 to 79". , "3" is defined in the range of "80 to 89", and "4" is defined in the range of "90 to 98".

Next, when the second pressed icon 872b (the pressed icon whose display mode is changed second by the pressing effect) is the target and the acquired special figure 2 hold number is 2, the acquired effect is obtained. The target hold "2" is in the range of "0 to 39", the target hold "-" is in the range of "40 to 79", and the target hold "1" is in the range of "80 to 89". The target hold "-" is specified in the range of "90 to 98". When the number of acquired special figure 2 hold is 3, the target hold "2" is in the range of "0 to 39" and the target hold "3" is in the range of "40 to 79". , "1" is specified in the range of "80 to 89", and "-" is specified in the range of "90 to 98". When the number of acquired special figure 2 hold is 4, the target hold "2" is in the range of "0 to 39" and the target hold is "3" in the range of "40 to 79". , "1" is defined in the range of "80 to 89", and "4" is defined in the range of "90 to 98".

If the target is the third press icon 872c (the press icon whose display mode is changed third by the press effect) and the acquired special figure 2 hold number is 3, the acquired effect counter 223 lf. The target hold "3" is in the range of "0 to 39", the target hold "2" is in the range of "40 to 79", and the target hold "1" is in the range of "80 to 89". The target hold "-" is specified in the range of "~ 98". When the number of acquired special figure 2 hold is 4, the target hold "3" is in the range of "0 to 39" and the target hold "4" is in the range of "40 to 79". , "2" is specified in the range of "80 to 89", and "1" is specified in the range of "90 to 98".

Finally, when the fourth pressed icon 872d (the pressed icon whose display mode is changed at the end (fourth) by the pressing effect) is the target, and the number of acquired special figure 2 hold is four. , The target hold "2" is in the range of "0 to 39", the target hold "3" is in the range of "40 to 79", and the target hold is in the range of "80 to 89". "4" is defined as "all" on hold in the range of "90 to 98".

The target hold "all" that can be selected as the target hold for the fourth pressed icon 872d indicates that all the special figure 2 hold is set as the target hold. With this configuration, it is possible to determine the display mode after the change by referring to the hit / fail determination results of a plurality of special figure 2 hold for one pressed icon, so that one special figure 2 hold is held. As compared with the case where the display mode after the variable is determined by referring to the result of the hit / fail judgment, the probability that the winning / fail judgment result includes the winning can be increased. Can be easily selected.

Further, since it can be determined that a plurality of winnings are included in the winning / failing determination results of the plurality of special figures 2 hold, a special display mode (FIG. 637) indicating that the plurality of winnings are included. (B)) can be displayed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, as the pressing effect executed in a partial period (first period) of the final fluctuation of the special figure 2, the number of pressing icons 872a to 872d corresponding to the reserved number of the special figure 2 Is configured to be displayed, and when the player presses the operating means (frame button 22) during the first period, the display modes of the pressing icons 872a to 872d are variably displayed in order. Then, when the display mode of the pressed icons 872a to 872d is to be variably displayed, the target special figure 2 hold is randomly selected for each pressed icon, and based on the pre-reading result of the selected special figure 2 hold. It is configured to determine the effect mode after the variable display. Further, it is configured so that the special figure 2 hold which is the target of each pressed icon can be duplicated, and the display mode of the pressed icon can be changed without providing the target hold.

By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to understand how many pre-reading results of the special figure 2 hold are displayed in the display mode of the pressed icon variably displayed during the pressing effect. Even if the effect result of the mission effect executed after the pressing effect is an effect result indicating a deviation, there is a possibility that the mission effect that does not reflect the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold is executed, so the result is It is possible to play the game while expecting that the winning is notified by the notification effect.

Further, when a plurality of display modes that are easily selected at the time of winning are selected as the display modes of each pressed icon, is the plurality of display modes selected for the specific hit special figure 2 hold, or is it? Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether or not there are a plurality of hit special figure 2 reservations, it is possible to make the player interested in the game content to be executed in the future.

In this embodiment, either the special figure 2 hold of 1 or all the special figure 2 hold can be selected as the target hold of the press icon, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured so that two special figure 2 hold and three special figure 2 hold can be selected as the target hold. Further, in the present embodiment, depending on the selection result with reference to the target hold selection table 222xc, three or more pressing icons for which the same special figure 2 hold is the target hold can be generated. The number of pressed icons for which the same special figure 2 hold is the target hold may be set to an upper limit without limitation, or may be configured so as not to be duplicated. With this configuration, it is possible to easily match the number of times the player operates the operating means during the pressing effect with the number of holdings in Special Figure 2 that refers to the look-ahead result. It is possible to easily set the special figure 2 hold number used for the effect and the mission effect) and the special figure 2 hold number used for the result notification effect to the contents desired by the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, the more the player operates the operating means during the pressing effect, the more the number of special figures 2 held for the final variation effect (pressing effect and mission effect) increases. Not limited to this, for example, the more the player operates the operating means during the pressing effect, the more the special figure 2 hold number used for the final variation effect (pressing effect and mission effect) is configured to decrease. Is also good. In this case, on the start screen of the pressing effect shown in FIG. 636 (a), "Discard the stock with the button PUSH !!" is displayed, and by operating the frame button 22 during the pressing effect, the display area Dm21 is displayed. The effect of erasing the displayed pressed icons 872a to 872d in order is executed, and the target hold is applied to the pressed icons 872a to 872d displayed in the display area Dm21 at the end timing of the pressed effect, as in the present embodiment. It may be determined and configured to be variable to a display mode according to the result of the determination of whether or not the target is held.

With this configuration, it is possible to enthusiastically operate the frame button 22 for the player who does not want to reflect the look-ahead result in the special figure 2 hold in the final variation effect (pressing effect and mission effect). Become. Further, the first pressing effect and the second pressing effect are executably configured as the pressing effect, and as the first pressing effect, as in the present embodiment, the more the player operates the operating means, the more the final variation occurs. Special figure 2 used for the effect (pressing effect and mission effect) The pressing effect that increases the number of holdings is executed, and as the second pressing effect, the more the player operates the operating means, the more the final variable effect (pressing effect and mission). The special figure 2 used for the effect) may be configured to execute a pressing effect that reduces the number of holdings. As a result, even for a player who does not want to reflect the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 hold in the final variation effect (pressing effect and mission effect), the special figure 2 hold in the final variation effect (pressing effect and mission effect). It is possible to operate the frame button 22 during the pressing effect even for the player who wants to reflect the pre-reading result, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced, and for the player who does not want to operate the frame button 22. However, it is possible to execute the final variation effect in different modes, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The display icon selection table 222xd is a data table for selecting the display mode after the change of each pressed icon. Here, the contents specified in the display icon selection table 222xd will be described with reference to FIG. 642 (b). FIG. 642 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the display icon selection table 222xd. As shown in FIG. 642 (b), in the display icon selection table 222xd, the hit / fail determination result (look-ahead result) of the target hold of each of the pressed icons 872a to 872d selected with reference to the target hold selection table 222xc and the effect. A different display mode (display icon) is defined based on the value of the counter 223 lf.

Specifically, when the result of the hit / fail judgment is "hit", the display icon "large aura" is defined in the range where the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf is "0 to 49", and the range is "50 to 89". The display icon "sword" is defined in, and the display icon "chance" is defined in the range of "90 to 98". If the result of the hit / fail judgment is "off", the display icon "?" Is defined in the range of "0 to 39" for the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf, and the display icon "?" Is specified in the range of "40 to 79". "Sword" is defined, the display icon "chance" is defined in the range of "80 to 89", and the display icon "aura large" is defined in the range of "90 to 98".

Further, when the hit / fail determination result is "-", that is, when the target hold is not provided, the display icon "chance" is defined in the range where the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf is "0 to 49", and "50". The display icon "?" Is specified in the range of "~ 98". Further, when the winning / failing determination result is "multiple hits", that is, the target hold "all" is selected in the target hold selection table 222xc, and a plurality of small hit wins are selected in all the special figure 2 holds. If there is a hit / fail determination result (look-ahead result), the display icon "special V" is defined in the range of "0 to 98", which is the entire range that the acquired effect counter 223 lf can take.

In this way, by making the selection ratio of the selected display icon (display mode after variable) different according to the hit / fail judgment result (look-ahead result) of the target hold, it is based on the display mode displayed by the pressing effect. Therefore, it is possible to predict the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold. Therefore, for example, the operation means is operated for the first pressing icon 872a during the pressing effect, and the display mode of the pressing icon 872a is "large aura", that is, it is selected when the target hold is won. When the display mode is variable to an easy display mode, the operation to the operating means during the pressing effect at that time is stopped, or the operating means is further operated to display the second "aura large". It can provide the enjoyment of letting the player choose whether to aim for.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the thirtieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 640 (b). FIG. 640 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the thirtieth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 640 (b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the thirtieth embodiment has the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the above-mentioned sixteenth embodiment (see FIG. 387 (b)). On the other hand, the press counter 223xa, the used hold information storage area 223xb, the unused hold information storage area 223xc, and the completed flag 223xd are added, and the other points are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The pressing counter 223xa is a counter for measuring the number of pressing icons 872a to 872d displayed during the pressing effect. The press counter 223xa is the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223 lc when it is determined in the final variation effect update process 30 (see C4596 in FIG. 643) that the waiting period has elapsed timing (C4801: Yes in FIG. 643). A value corresponding to the number of reserved special figures 2 is set based on (see C4881 in FIG. 643). Then, it is subtracted when it is effectively determined that the frame button 22 is operated during the first period (during the pressing effect) (C8207 in FIG. 647). Further, the value of the pressing counter 223xa is determined at the end timing of the first period in which the pressing effect is executed (C4885 in FIG. 643), and the value is larger than 0, that is, the display mode is changed at the end of the pressing effect. When it is determined that there is no pressed icon (C4885: Yes in FIG. 643), the display mode of the pressed icon corresponding to the value of the pressed counter 223xa is variably displayed as "?", And then the value is cleared to 0. (See C4887 in FIG. 643).

The used hold information storage area 223xb and the unused hold information storage area 223xc are storage areas for storing information for managing the special figure 2 hold in which the look-ahead result is used in the pressing effect.

The completed flag 223xd is a flag for indicating that the effect indicating that the winner has been won has been executed in the final variation effect (pressing effect and mission effect), and the effect indicating that the winner has been won has been executed. Is set to on. Then, in the third period effect setting process (see C4891 in FIG. 646), the setting status is determined, and the effect mode is set based on the determination result. In other words, if an effect indicating that the winner is won is executed in the effect (final variation effect) executed in the first period and the second period, the effect of congratulating the winning is executed in the third period. (See C8111 in FIG. 646) and then set to off (C8112 in FIG. 646).

On the other hand, if the effect indicating that the winner is won is not executed in the effect (final variation effect) executed in the first period and the second period, the time saving end screen is displayed in the third period effect. It is determined whether or not to execute the result notification effect for the purpose of performing the result notification effect, and further determine whether or not to execute the revival effect during the result notification effect, and the effect mode according to the determination result. As a result, it is possible to execute a plurality of effects executed during the final variation period of Special Figure 2 as a series of effects without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

The first period flag 223xe is a flag for indicating that the final variation effect is in the first period, and is set to on when the first period is set. Then, it is set to off at the end timing of the first period.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the thirtieth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 643 to 647, the content of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the thirtieth embodiment will be described. The control processing content executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the thirtieth embodiment is a final variation effect with respect to the control processing content executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixteenth embodiment described above. Instead of the update process (see C4506 in FIG. 423), the final variation effect update process 30 (see C4596 in FIG. 643) is replaced with the frame button input monitoring / effect process (C3107), and the frame button input monitoring / effect process (see C3107). It differs in that it executes (see C3157 in FIG. 647), and is otherwise the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, the control processing contents of the voice lamp control device 113 are described with reference to the 1st embodiment. Therefore, in a part of explaining the content of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the thirtieth embodiment, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment as appropriate. The explanation will be given using the contents (details are the contents in which the S number is changed to the C number).

First, the contents of the final variation staging update process 30 (see C4596) will be described with reference to FIG. 643. FIG. 643 is a flowchart showing the contents of the final variation effect update process 30 (see C4596). In the final variation effect update process 30 (see C4596), the start or end timing of each effect is determined during the execution of the final variation effect (Special Figure 2 final variation effect), and the control process according to the determination result is performed. Will be executed.

When the final variation effect update process 30 (see C4596) is executed, first, it is determined whether the waiting period has elapsed timing (C4801), and if it is determined to be the waiting period elapsed timing (C4801: Yes), the special feature. FIG. 2 The value corresponding to the number of holds is set in the press counter 223xa (C4881), and this processing is terminated.

Further, in the processing of C4801, when it is determined that the waiting period has not elapsed timing (C4801: No), then it is determined whether it is the first period start timing (C4804), and it is the first period start timing. If it is determined (C4804: Yes), the first period effect setting process is executed (C4882), and this process is terminated. The first period effect setting process (C4882) will be described later with reference to FIG. 644.

In the processing of C4804, if it is determined that it is not the first period start timing (C4804: No), then it is determined whether it is the first period end timing (C4883), and it is determined that it is the first period end timing. If (C4883: Yes), the flag 223xe is set to off during the first period (C4884), it is determined whether the value of the press counter 223xa is larger than 0 (C4885), and it is determined that it is larger than 0. (C4885: Yes), a display command is set to display the pressing icon corresponding to the value of the pressing counter 223xa as "?" (C4886), and the value of the pressing counter 223xa is cleared to 0 (C4886). C4887), this process is terminated. Further, in the process of C4885, if it is determined that the value of the press counter 223xa is 0 (C4885: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, in the process of C4883, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the first period (C4883: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the second period (C4888), and it is the start timing of the second period. If it is determined (C4888: Yes), the second period effect setting process is executed (C4889), and this process is terminated. The second period effect setting process (C4889) will be described later with reference to FIG. 645. On the other hand, in the processing of C4888, when it is determined that it is not the second period start timing (C4888: No), then it is determined whether it is the third period start timing (C4890), and it is the third period start timing. If it is determined (C4890: Yes), the third period effect setting process is executed (C4891), and this process is terminated. The third period effect setting process (C4891) will be described later with reference to FIG. 646. Further, in the process of C4890, if it is determined that the timing is not the start timing of the third period (C4890: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, the contents of the first period staging setting process (C4882) will be described with reference to FIG. 644. FIG. 644 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first period effect setting process (C4882). In this first period effect setting process (C4882), a process for setting an effect mode for the first period, that is, an effect mode of the pressing effect is executed.

When the first period effect setting process (C4882) is executed, first, a character is selected with reference to the character selection table 222xb based on the result of determining whether or not the final variation is correct (C8001). Then, a display command indicating the selected character is set (C8002), then a display command indicating the press icons 872a to 872d corresponding to the value of the press counter 223xa is set (C8003), and the flag during the first period is set. Set 223x to on (C8004) and end this process.

Next, the contents of the second period staging setting process (C4889) will be described with reference to FIG. 645. FIG. 645 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second period effect setting process (C4889). In this second period effect setting process (C4889), a process for setting an effect mode corresponding to the second period, that is, an effect mode of a mission effect is executed.

When the second period effect setting process (C4889) is executed, first, the information in the use hold information storage area 223xb is read out (C8051), and it is determined whether or not there is hit information (C8052). Then, when it is determined that there is hit information (C8052: Yes), the effect mode indicating the winning is determined as the effect result of the mission effect (C8053), the completed flag 223xd is set to ON (C8054), and the determination is made. A display command indicating the effect mode is set (C8055), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of C8052 that there is no winning information (C8052: No), among the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223la, the number of holdings for the winning information that has not been used yet, and the winning / failing determination are made. Information indicating the result (pre-reading result) is stored in the unused pending information storage area 223xc (C8056), the production mode of the second period production (mission production) indicating the deviation is determined (C8057), and the process proceeds to C8055. After that, this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the third period effect setting process (C4891) will be described with reference to FIG. 646. FIG. 646 is a flowchart showing the contents of the third period effect setting process (C4891). In this third period effect setting process (C4891), a process for setting an effect mode corresponding to the third period, that is, an effect mode of the result notification effect is executed.

When the third period effect setting process (C4891) is executed, first, it is determined whether the completed flag 223xd is set to ON (C8101), and when it is determined that it is not set to ON, that is, for the mission effect. If it is determined that the effect indicating winning is not executed (C8101: No), the information stored in the unused hold information storage area 223xc is read (C8102), and the treasure box icon corresponding to the read hold number is read. The number of 829b is determined (C8103), and it is determined whether or not there is information in the information read in the process of C8102 (C8104).

In the processing of C8104, when it is determined that there is a hit information (C8104: Yes), an effect mode indicating a winning using the corresponding treasure box icon 829b is determined (C8105), and a display command indicating the determined effect mode is issued. Set (C8106) and end this process.

On the other hand, in the process of C8104, when it is determined that there is no hit information (C8104: No), the information stored in the winning information storage area 223la is read (C8107), and it is checked whether the read information contains the hit information. Discriminate (C8108).

Here, the processing content of C8108 will be described. In the present embodiment, at the start of the result notification effect, the treasure box icon 829b corresponding to the number of information stored in the unused pending information storage area 223xc is displayed, and the effect of hitting and notifying during the result notification effect can be executed. is doing. However, the timing at which the information is stored in the unused pending information storage area 223xc is the start timing of the second period. Therefore, for example, when the special figure 2 hold has not been acquired up to the upper limit number (4 pieces) at the start of the second period, the new special feature is stored after the information is stored in the unused hold information storage area 223xc. FIG. 2 Occurs when a hold is acquired.

Therefore, by the processing of C8108, the winning information corresponding to the special figure 2 holding that is not stored in the unused hold information storage area 223xc and is stored in the prize information storage area 223la is determined in advance, so that the time reduction ends. It is possible to execute the hit notification during the result notification effect for all the special figure 2 holdes that have already been acquired in.

In the process of C8108, if it is determined that there is a hit information (C8108: Yes), after displaying the out-of-order treasure box, the effect mode showing the winning is determined (C8109), and the process proceeds to the process of C8106. If it is determined that there is no hit information (C8108: No), the mode showing the winning is determined (C8110), and the process proceeds to C8106.

On the other hand, in the process of C8101, when it is determined that the completed flag 223xd is set to on (C8101: Yes), the effect mode for congratulating the hit is determined (C8111), and the completed flag 223xd is set to off (C8111). C8112), shift to the processing of C8106.

Next, the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 30 (C3157) will be described with reference to FIG. 647. FIG. 647 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 30 (C3157). In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 30 (C3157), a process for setting various effects to be executed based on the operation of the operating means (frame button 22) by the player is executed.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 30 (C3157) is executed, first, it is determined whether the flag 223xe is set to ON during the first period (C8201), and if it is determined that the flag 223x is set to ON, it is determined. (C8201: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the pressing counter 223xa is larger than 0, that is, whether the pressing icons 872a to 872d are displayed (C8202).

In the process of C8202, if it is determined that the value of the press counter 223xa is larger than 0 (C8202: Yes), the target hold is determined by referring to the target hold selection table 222xc (C8203), and the determined target hold is awarded. The display icon is determined by referring to the display icon selection table 222xd based on the information (C8204), and the display mode of the press icon 872 corresponding to the value of the press counter 223xa is determined to be the determined display icon (C8205) and displayed. The display mode of the character corresponding to the content of the icon is determined (C8206), the value of the press counter 223xa is subtracted by 1 (C8207), the display command corresponding to the determined content is set (C8208), and this process is performed. finish.

Further, in the process of C8202, when it is determined that the value of the pressing counter 223xa is 0, that is, when it is determined that all the displayed pressing icons 872 are variably displayed during the pressing effect (C8202). : No), the production mode for liveliness is determined (C8209), and the process proceeds to C8208. On the other hand, in the process of C8201 when it is determined that the flag 223xe is not set to ON during the first period (C8201: No), the process related to the other frame button input is executed (C8210), and the process proceeds to the process of C8208. ..

In the thirtieth embodiment, the look-ahead of the special figure 2 hold referred to in the plurality of effects (final variation effect, result notification effect) executed in the final variation (special figure 2 final variation) in the time saving state. It is configured so that the result is selected, but it is not limited to this, and as a variation effect corresponding to the special figure 2 variation executed during the time saving state, it corresponds to the special figure 2 variation other than the special figure 2 final variation. In the variable effect (non-final variable effect) to be performed, the effect mode may be variably configured based on the preliminary determination result of the special drawing 2 lottery executed after the gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state. Then, even if it is configured so that the player can grasp the number of winnings included in the special figure 2 hold that has already been acquired, based on the effect mode of the non-final variation effect and the effect mode of the final variation effect. good. Specifically, when the special variation effect is executed as the non-final variation effect, if the effect result of the special variation effect is the effect result indicating winning, the special figure corresponding to the non-final variation effect. 2 When the variation indicates that the variation is a hit variation and the effect result of the special variation effect is an effect result indicating a deviation, the special figure corresponding to the non-final variation effect 2 A plurality of special figures executed after the variation. 2 The lottery may be configured to indicate that a plurality of winnings are included.

With this configuration, when a special variation effect is executed, it is possible to provide the player with a novel effect of expecting the variation to be an out-of-range variation, and to enhance the interest of the game. Can be improved.

<31st Embodiment>
Next, the 31st embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 648 to 651. The 31st embodiment is different from the 30th embodiment described above in that the method for determining the effect mode of the time saving final variation is different, and is the same except for the above. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

In the thirtieth embodiment described above, at the end timing of the waiting period (start timing of the first period) in the final variation of the time saving state (final variation of special figure 2), according to the number of reserved special figures 2 acquired. When the display mode (pressing icons 872a to 872d) that can be operated (pressed) is displayed during the pressing effect and the operating means is operated during the pressing effect, any of the acquired special figure 2 holds is displayed. It was configured to notify the player of information for indicating the look-ahead result for the hold.

On the other hand, in the 31st embodiment, the pre-reading for the acquired special figure 2 hold is performed at the end timing (start timing of the first period) of the waiting period in the final change in the time saving state (special figure 2 final change). When it is executed and it is determined that there is a winning special figure 2 hold, the timing for notifying that the winning special figure 2 hold (winning special figure 2 hold) exists is configured to be determined by lottery. There is a big difference in that.

With this configuration, the execution timing of the effect (win effect) for notifying the existence of the hit special figure 2 hold, which is the effect content most desired by the player as the effect content of the time saving final fluctuation, is randomly set. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player to the end of the production of the time saving final fluctuation.

Here, with reference to FIG. 648, the effect content of the time saving final variation executed in the 31st embodiment will be described focusing on the points different from the 30th embodiment described above. FIG. 648 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the effect executed in the time saving final variation (special FIG. 2 final variation). As shown in FIG. 648, the effect of the time saving final variation executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the 31st embodiment is the effect of the time saving final variation executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the 30th embodiment described above (see FIG. 639). ), It differs in that the period in which the operation valid period for which the operation to the operation means by the player is effectively determined is set, that is, the period in which the pressing effect is executed is deleted, and the other points are the same. be. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

More specifically, in the time saving final variation (special figure 2 final variation), the second special symbol variation for 30 seconds is executed, and the player is made to acquire the special figure 2 hold in the first 5 seconds. A waiting period during which the prompting standby effect is executed is set, and then a first period of 20 seconds is set. During this first period, the mission effect (final variation effect) according to the thirtieth embodiment described above is executed, and then the result notification effect is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, as the effect of the time saving final variation, the final variation effect and the result notification effect are executed as in the above-mentioned thirtieth embodiment.

Then, if there is a winning special figure 2 hold (winning special figure 2 hold) in the acquired special figure 2 hold, whether to notify that fact by the final variation effect or the result notification effect. Is configured to be determined by lottery.

By configuring in this way, for example, at the time when the waiting period elapses, the special figure 2 hold is acquired up to the upper limit (4 pieces), and the special figure 2 hold exists in the acquired special figure 2 hold. However, it is possible to notify that fact not by the final fluctuation effect but by the result notification effect. Therefore, the player is expected to win the prize until all of the plurality of effects (the effect capable of notifying the player of the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 hold) executed in the final variation of the time reduction is completed. It is possible to easily maintain the feeling.

<About the electrical configuration of the 31st embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 649 and 650, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the 31st embodiment will be described. In the 31st embodiment, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device is partially changed from the 30th embodiment described above, and the configuration of the RAM 223 is partially deleted. Other than that, the configuration is the same. be. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. First, the contents specified in ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 649. FIG. 649 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 649, in the 31st embodiment, the character selection table 222xb, the target hold selection table 222xc, and the display icon selection table 222xd are deleted from the 30th embodiment described above, and the notification period selection 31 table 222ya is deleted. It differs in that it is added, and it is the same except for that.

The configuration of the RAM 223 is such that the press counter 223xa, the used hold information storage area 223xb, the unused hold information storage area 223xc, and the completed flag 223xd are deleted from the above-described 30th embodiment, that is, the configuration of the ROM 222 is changed. Along with this, there is a difference in that unnecessary flags and counters are deleted, but since the only difference is the deletion of the configuration, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Notification period selection 31 Table 222ya selects an effect (period) for notifying when there is a special figure 2 hold (winning special figure 2 hold) indicating winning in the special figure 2 hold in the time saving final fluctuation. It is a data table used to do so. The notification period selection 31 table 222ya stores the winning information when it is determined in the final variation effect update process 31 (see FIG. 651 in FIG. 651) that it is the start timing of the first period (C8301: Yes in FIG. 651). When the winning information corresponding to the special figure 2 hold is read from the area 223la and it is determined that there is winning information (winning special figure 2 hold) as the pre-determination result (look-ahead result) based on the read winning information (FIG. 651). C8303: Yes), referred to for selecting the notification period of the hit notification.

Here, the contents of the notification period selection 31 table 222ya will be described with reference to FIG. 650. FIG. 650 is a diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the notification period selection 31 table 222ya. As shown in FIG. 650, in the notification period selection 31 table 222ya, the pass / fail judgment result of the execution fluctuation (time saving final fluctuation), the special figure 2 hold type including the hit information, and the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf are displayed. , And the notification target period is specified.

Specifically, when the result of determining whether or not the fluctuation during execution is "hit" and the hit information exists in Hochi 1 (holding in the first special figure 2), the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf is "0". The range of "29" defines the "first period" as the notification target period, and the range of "30 to 98" defines the "second period" as the notification target period. Further, when the hit information exists in the maintenance 2 (holding in the second special figure 2), the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf is in the range of "0 to 39", and the "first period" is set to "1st period" as the notification target period. A "second period" is defined as a notification target period in the range of "40 to 98". Further, when the hit information exists in the maintenance 3 (holding in the third special figure 2), the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf is in the range of "0 to 49", and the "first period" is set to "1st period" as the notification target period. A "second period" is defined as a notification target period in the range of "50 to 98". Further, when the hit information exists in the maintenance 4 (holding in the fourth special figure 2), the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf is in the range of "0 to 69", and the "first period" is set to "1st period" as the notification target period. A "second period" is defined as a notification target period in the range of "70 to 98".

On the other hand, when the result of determining whether or not the fluctuation during execution is "missing" and the hit information exists in Hochi 1 (holding in the first special figure 2), the value of the acquired effect counter 223lf is "0 to 69". The range of "1st period" is defined as the notification target period, and the range of "70 to 98" is defined as the "second period" as the notification target period. Further, when the hit information exists in the maintenance 2 (holding in the second special figure 2), the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf is in the range of "0 to 59", and the "first period" is set to "1st period" as the notification target period. A "second period" is defined as a notification target period in the range of "60 to 98". Further, when the hit information exists in the maintenance 3 (holding in the third special figure 2), the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf is in the range of "0 to 49", and the "first period" is set to "1st period" as the notification target period. A "second period" is defined as a notification target period in the range of "50 to 98". Further, when the hit information exists in the maintenance 4 (holding in the fourth special figure 2), the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf is in the range of "0 to 39", and the "first period" is set to "1st period" as the notification target period. A "second period" is defined as a notification target period in the range of "40 to 98". In addition, when the execution fluctuation is "off", it is configured to determine whether there are multiple hit information, and when it is determined that there are multiple hit information (when there are multiple hit information), it is configured. A "first period" is defined as a notification target period for the entire range "0 to 98" that the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf can take.

In the 31st embodiment, as described above, when the hit information (hit special figure 2 hold) exists in the special figure 2 hold, the notification target period is selected by lottery, and the notice is given. When the first period is selected as the target period, the winning is notified in the mission effect (see FIG. 375 (a)) which is the final variation effect, and when the second period is selected, the result is notified. It is configured to notify the winning in the production (see FIG. 638 (b)). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the effect indicating the winning is executed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the 31st embodiment, the notification target period is selected according to the storage location of the winning special figure 2 hold, that is, the order in which the winning special figure 2 hold is stored among the acquired special figure 2 hold. The proportions are different. Therefore, when the winning is actually notified, by determining whether the notification was made during the first period or the second period, it is possible to predict the number of winning special figures 2 held. It can be made easier.

In addition, in the 31st embodiment, as a general rule, for the acquired special figure 2 hold, the pre-reading process (winning special figure) is performed in order from the first special figure 2 hold (the hold in which the special figure 2 lottery is executed next). 2 Preliminary determination process for whether or not the book is on hold) is executed, and if it is determined that the special figure 2 is on hold, the look-ahead process is not executed for the subsequent special figure 2 hold. There is.

That is, when the hit special figure 2 hold is the first special figure 2 hold, the pre-reading process of the second special figure 2 hold to the fourth special figure 2 hold is not executed, and the hit special figure 2 is not executed. When the hold is the 4th special figure 2 hold, it means that the 1st special figure 2 hold to the 3rd special figure 2 hold are "off". Therefore, by predicting the type of winning special figure 2 hold (1st special figure 2 hold to 4th special figure 2 hold) based on the period during which the effect indicating the winning is executed, the remaining special figure 2 hold Since it is possible to make the expectation for winning the prize different, it is possible to make the player more interested in the production performed during the final change in time reduction.

Further, in the 31st embodiment, the notification target period is different according to the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation (the final change of the special figure 2) being executed, and the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation being executed is obtained. It is configured so that the notification target period that is easy to be selected differs depending on whether it is a hit or a miss. Specifically, if the special figure 2 fluctuation during execution is won, the look-ahead result that is advantageous to the player as the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold (the special figure 2 hold that is executed earlier is a hit special). (Fig. 2 hold), it is stipulated that the second period is easier to select, but if the special figure 2 fluctuation during execution is out of the range, the game is played as a look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold. It is stipulated that the pre-reading result (the earlier-executed special figure 2 hold is a hit and the special figure 2 hold) is more advantageous to the person, the easier it is to select the first period. With this configuration, in addition to the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold, the player can be interested in the lottery result of the change (time saving final change).

In addition, in the 31st embodiment, the look-ahead process is executed for all the special figure 2 hold only when the predetermined condition is satisfied, that is, only when the special figure 2 fluctuation during execution is out of alignment. When it is determined that there are a plurality of hit special figure 2 hold in the special figure 2 hold by the look-ahead process, the first period is always selected as the notification target period. It is composed. With this configuration, if the mission effect executed in the first period is the effect result indicating winning, and the lottery result of the change is out of order, the special figure 2 hold will be held. It is possible to increase the possibility that there are multiple.

In this case, when the result of the mission is to indicate the winning, it is possible to perform a suggestion effect that can suggest to the player which special figure 2 lottery result the effect result is intended for. It is good to configure it, and at least it is sufficient to make it possible to execute a suggestion effect that allows the player to grasp whether it is the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation being executed or the lottery result of the special figure 2 hold that has been acquired. ..

Further, without using the above-mentioned suggestion effect, for example, as described above with reference to FIG. 375, for showing the fluctuation status of the second special symbol (variably displaying the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the special diagram 2). By displaying the small display area Dm2 and the small display area Dm2a for showing the number of holdings of the second special symbol (the number of holdings of special figure 2) on the display screen, the result of this production is the lottery result of the time saving final fluctuation. A mode in which the player can determine after the fact whether it is shown or the lottery result of the special figure 2 hold may be used.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the 31st embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 651, the content of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the 31st embodiment will be described. The control processing content executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 31st embodiment is finally changed with respect to the control processing content executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 30th embodiment described above. The difference is that the final variation effect update process 31 (see C4599 in FIG. 651) is executed instead of the effect update process 30 (see C4596 in FIG. 643), and the rest is the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 651 is a flowchart showing the contents of the final variation effect update process 31 (see C4599). In the final variation effect update process 31 (see C4599), the processing content executed at the start timing of each period is different from the above-mentioned final variation effect update process 30 (see C4596 in FIG. 643). It's different.

When the final variation effect update process 31 (see C4599) is executed, first, it is determined whether it is the first period start timing (C8301), and when it is determined that it is the first period start timing (C8301: Yes). , The winning information is read from the winning information storage area 223la (C8302), and it is determined whether the winning information is included in the read winning information (C8303).

Then, in the process of C8303, when it is determined that the hit information is included (C8303), the first is referred to by referring to the notification period selection 31 table 222ya based on the hit / fail determination result of the change and the hit information. The period and the effect mode of the second period are determined (C8304), and the process proceeds to C8311. Further, in the processing of C8303, if it is determined that the hit information is not included (C8303: No), it is determined whether the fluctuation is a hit fluctuation (C8305), and if it is a hit fluctuation (C8305: Yes). ), The effect mode indicating winning is determined in the first period (C8306), and the process proceeds to C8311.

On the other hand, in the process of C8305, when it is determined that there is no hit fluctuation (C8305), the effect mode showing the deviation in the first period and the second period is determined (C8307), and the process proceeds to the process of C8311.

Further, in the processing of C8301 when it is determined that it is not the first period start timing (C8301: No), then it is determined whether it is the second period start timing (C8308), and it is the second period start timing. (C8308: Yes), it is determined whether or not a new special 2 hold, that is, a new special figure 2 hold (special 2 hold) has been acquired after the start timing of the first period (C8309). If it is determined that a new acquisition has been made (C8309: Yes), the re-read-ahead flag lr is set to ON (C8310), and the process proceeds to S8311. Since the contents of the re-reading flag rl and the contents of various processes executed based on the fact that the re-reading flag is set to ON are the same as those in the 16th embodiment described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the processing of C8308, it was determined that it was not the start timing of the second period (C8308: No), or in the processing of C8309, it was determined that a new special 2 hold (special figure 2 hold) was not acquired. In the case (C8309: No), the process of C8310 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of C8311.

In the process of C8311, a display command for indicating the effect mode determined in the above-mentioned various processes is set (C8311), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the 31st embodiment, with respect to the acquired special figure 2 hold at the end timing (start timing of the first period) of the waiting period in the final change in the time saving state (special figure 2 final change). When pre-reading is executed and it is determined that there is a winning special figure 2 hold, the timing for notifying that the winning special figure 2 hold (winning special figure 2 hold) exists is determined by lottery. There is a big difference in the composition.

With this configuration, the execution timing of the effect (win effect) for notifying the existence of the hit special figure 2 hold, which is the effect content most desired by the player as the effect content of the time saving final fluctuation, is randomly set. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player to the end of the production of the time saving final fluctuation.

In addition, in the time saving final variation (special figure 2 final variation), the second special symbol variation for 30 seconds is executed, and in the first 5 seconds, a standby effect is performed to urge the player to acquire the special figure 2 hold. The waiting period to be executed is set, and then the first period of 20 seconds is set. During this first period, the mission effect (final variation effect) according to the thirtieth embodiment described above is executed, and then the result notification effect is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, as the effect of the time saving final variation, the final variation effect and the result notification effect are executed as in the above-mentioned thirtieth embodiment.

Then, if there is a winning special figure 2 hold (winning special figure 2 hold) in the acquired special figure 2 hold, whether to notify that fact by the final variation effect or the result notification effect. Is configured to be determined by lottery.

By configuring in this way, for example, at the time when the waiting period elapses, the special figure 2 hold is acquired up to the upper limit (4 pieces), and the special figure 2 hold exists in the acquired special figure 2 hold. However, it is possible to notify that fact not by the final fluctuation effect but by the result notification effect. Therefore, the player is expected to win the prize until all of the plurality of effects (the effect capable of notifying the player of the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 hold) executed in the final variation of the time reduction is completed. It is possible to easily maintain the feeling.

As described above, in the thirtieth embodiment and the thirty-first embodiment described above, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation (special figure 2 final variation), which is the time-saving final variation, is fixed to 30 seconds (FIG. 639). , And FIG. 648), but the variation time is not limited to this, and the variation time of the special figure 2 variation (the final variation of the special figure 2), which is the time-saving final variation, can be selected and the variation time of a different length can be selected. May be. In this case, for example, 5 seconds and 25 seconds can be selected as the fluctuation time of the final fluctuation of the special figure 2, and when the fluctuation time of 5 seconds is selected, the result notification effect is produced when the final fluctuation of the special figure 2 is started. When a variation time of 25 seconds is selected, the standby effect (5 seconds) is omitted when the final variation of Special Figure 2 is started, and the final variation effect is executed. Then it is good. As a result, even when the fluctuation time of the final fluctuation of the special figure 2 is different, the effect using the same effect data can be executed, so that the amount of effect data can be reduced.

In addition, when a fluctuation time of 25 seconds to 30 seconds can be set as the fluctuation time of the final fluctuation in Special Figure 2, the fluctuation production in which the length of the period during which the above-mentioned standby effect is executed is changed is executed. It should be configured to do so. That is, as in the thirtieth embodiment and the thirty-first embodiment described above, at least the staging period including the final fluctuation period of FIG. 2 is divided into a plurality of periods (first period, second period, etc.), and each period. When different effects are configured to be executable, the effects executed for each period are prioritized, and when different lengths of effects are set, the high-priority effects are given. It is preferable to preferentially secure the length of the period to be executed and to change the length of the period during which the low-priority effect can be executed.

With this configuration, even when different lengths of effect period are set, it is possible to easily execute a high-priority effect using the same effect period. Further, by making it possible to execute a high-priority effect using the same effect period, it is possible to easily execute a high-priority effect using the same effect mode, so that the player can easily understand the effect. Can be provided.

Further, in the thirtieth embodiment and the thirty-first embodiment described above, the variable time of the second special symbol lottery executed after the normal state is set (the second special figure 2 hold acquired at the end of the time reduction). 2 As the variable time of the special symbol lottery), a fixed time (see FIG. 385 (b)) is set as in the 16th embodiment described above, but the time is not limited to this, and for example, different lengths are set. It may be configured so that the fluctuation time of the sword is selected.

In this case, the variation time of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the special figure 2 hold by changing the length of the specific period (for example, the waiting period) among the variation effects executed in the special figure 2 final variation. It may be configured to set the effect period including, for example, the fluctuation time of the final fluctuation of the special figure 2 is 30 seconds, and the total fluctuation time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol corresponding to the acquired special figure 2 hold. When it becomes 10 seconds, the effect period of the variation effect executed based on the start of the final variation in Special Figure 2 is set to 40 seconds, the standby effect period of 13 seconds, the final variation effect period of 20 seconds, and 7. It may be configured so that the result notification effect period of seconds is reached.

With this configuration, the effect period of the variation effect executed based on the start of the final variation of the special figure 2 can be set to the period including the variation time of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the reservation of the special figure 2. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the time saving state is set for a long time. Further, since the length of the period (final variation effect period, result notification effect period) other than the specific period (standby effect period) can be fixed, the effect using the same effect data is used for different effect periods. Can be facilitated.

Further, among the variation effects executed based on the start of the final variation of the special figure 2, the length of the effect period of the effect (standby effect) executed first is changed to correspond to the hold of the special figure 2. 2 When the variation time of the special symbol lottery is different, the timing at which the effect to be executed later (final variation effect, result notification effect) is executed is the timing at which the time saving state ends and the normal state is entered. Can be.

With such a configuration, for example, when the time saving state is terminated before the result notification effect is executed, that is, when the result notification effect is executed after the transition to the normal state, the result is obtained. Since it is possible to make it difficult to acquire a new special figure 2 hold during the notification effect, the effect control that changes the effect mode of the result notification effect in the middle, that is, after the result notification effect is started in the effect mode indicating the deviation. , When a new special figure 2 hold is acquired and the pre-reading result of the newly acquired special figure 2 hold is a winning result, the effect mode of the result notification effect is changed to the effect mode indicating the winning. Control can be difficult to perform. Therefore, the processing load of the staging control can be reduced.

In the above-mentioned example, the case where the execution timing (start timing) of the result notification effect is in the normal state has been described, but the execution timing (start timing) of the final variation effect is not limited to this, and is in the normal state. The fluctuation time of the final fluctuation of the special figure 2 and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the reservation of the special figure 2 may be selectively configured so as to be possible after the transition to. In addition, instead of changing the length of the fluctuation time, the length of the production period can be changed by making the fixed time of each special figure change (the period during which the special symbol for showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed) different. It may be configured to be different.

In addition, the total period of the fluctuation time of the final fluctuation of the special figure 2 and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the reservation of the special figure 2, that is, the effect of the fluctuation effect executed at the start of the final fluctuation of the special figure 2. A period determination means for determining whether or not the length of the period is longer than the specific period (for example, 50 seconds) is provided, and when the period determination means determines that the period is longer than the specific period, a special effect is executed. It may be configured to set a possible special period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the various periods (standby effect period, final variable effect period, result notification effect period) set in the effect period from becoming unnecessarily long and the effect from being reduced. Can be done. Further, in this case, as the fluctuation time of the final fluctuation of the special figure 2 or the fluctuation time of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the reservation of the special figure 2, the case where the winning is won is higher than the case where the winning is not won. , It is good to configure so that a long fluctuation time is set. As a result, in the case of winning (winning), it is possible to make it easier to execute the specific effect by setting a longer effect period, so the expectation of winning when the specific effect is executed. You can increase the degree. Further, in this case, it is preferable to configure the special period to be set only when there are a plurality of winnings in the special figure 2 final change and the special figure 2 hold. With this configuration, the added value for special effects can be further increased.

In each of the above embodiments, every time the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main control device 110 (that is, when it increases or decreases), the reserved ball number command is used. Has been described for transmission from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the hold number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only when the value (N) of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d increases in the main control device 110. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to reduce the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 sends the hold number command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced, respectively. The control load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above embodiments, the winning of the first ball opening 64 and the passage of the through gate 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls in the variable display based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 is set by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is divided into four areas by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member notifies the number of reserved balls. It may be configured as.

Further, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbol as the identification information is scrolled vertically on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The design may be moved and displayed along a predetermined route such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol, or a wide variety of motion display or change display is performed separately from the symbol. It also includes the staging display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the third symbol display for showing the player the lottery result of each symbol is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for the display means for displaying the main symbol to be emphasized and displayed to the player and the display means for displaying the subordinate symbols. Further, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is executed in the game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player, and the left side area of the game board 13 is executed in the normal game state. It is configured so that the left-handed game aiming at is executed, but the target area of the game board 13 may be different depending on the game state, and the left-handed game is executed during the time saving state, and during the normal state. May perform a right-handed game. Further, the game may be configured to be playable in different game states while aiming at the same area.

In each of the above-described embodiments, as the operation means that can be operated by the player, the frame buttons 22 and 23 that determine that the operation means has been operated by the player's pressing operation are used, but other than that. The configuration may be used, and an operating means configured in a lever shape capable of determining that the player has been operated by tilting it to the left or right or back and forth, or that the player has been operated by contact or proximity. A touch sensor type operating means capable of discriminating, a wireless operating means capable of discriminating that the operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. Further, each of the movable valve 750, the storage device (first storage device 770, the second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c. A part or all of the operation control may be executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side instead of the main control device 110.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the voice lamp control device 113 performs a process for setting a display mode in the effect executed by using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the game (lottery) itself is a voice lamp. It is configured to be executed by the main control device 110 different from the control device 113, but is not limited to this, and the process for executing the game (lottery) and the result of the game (lottery) are displayed as an effect. The processing for this may be configured to be executed by the same control device. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a plurality of different processes with one control device.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple hits (for example, two or three times) including it occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which a combination of probabilities (commonly known as a setting) related to a big hit lottery is provided in a plurality of stages and the setting can be changed on the game store side. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In addition, as a pachinko machine provided with a setting of a plurality of stages, a combination of jackpot probabilities (combination of a jackpot probability in a low probability state and a jackpot probability in a probabilistic state) may be one of a plurality of stages (for example, 6 stages). A typical example is one that can be set to, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probabilities, for example, the ratio of each jackpot symbol (each jackpot type) determined when a jackpot is hit is implemented as a pachinko machine that can be changed according to the setting. You may. That is, the ratio of determining the type of jackpot that is advantageous to the player may be changed according to the setting, or the ratio of determining the type of jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player may be changed. More specifically, for example, the ratio at which the jackpot with a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) is determined can be changed according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds) is determined. The ratio may be changed according to the setting to change the degree of advantage for each setting. Further, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot to which a large number of time reductions (for example, 100 times) is given after the end of the jackpot can be changed according to the setting, or the jackpot to which a small number of time reductions (for example, 0 times) is given can be changed. The ratio at which is determined may be changed according to the setting. Further, the rate at which the jackpot that shifts to (or is easy to shift to) an advantageous gaming state (for example, a probable change state) after the end of the jackpot is determined can be changed according to the setting, or the disadvantageous gaming state (for example, the normal state) can be determined. ) May be changed according to the setting. In addition, a configuration may be provided in which a jackpot type is provided, in which the ratio determined only in a specific setting is significantly high (almost never determined in other settings). Specifically, for example, the setting is configured to be configurable in 6 steps from 1 to 6, and the most advantageous setting is set 6. In setting 6, the jackpot of 6 rounds is determined at a rate of 2% in the case of a jackpot, while in other settings, the jackpot of 6 rounds is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. It may be configured. With this configuration, when the jackpot ends in 6 rounds, the possibility of the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so the player is made to pay attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot to play the game. be able to. Further, instead of or in addition to this, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 time reductions are given after the jackpot is completed may be configured to be higher than other settings. With this configuration, it is possible to focus on the number of times the time saving state ends and play the game. In addition to or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or an accessory inside the jackpot) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during the execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured to be provided so that the jackpot type can be easily determined by a specific setting (the ratio of determination is high). In addition, when the combination of jackpot probabilities is changed according to the setting, in the low probability state, the jackpot probability is increased as the setting is advantageous to the player, while in the probabilistic state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. It may be configured to increase the jackpot probability as much as possible. This configuration is a type in which it is easy to increase the number of balls held as the number of lottery of special symbols increases (the number of prize balls to be paid out tends to be larger than the number of game balls fired), especially in the probabilistic state. It is effective in gaming machines. More specifically, for example, by applying it to a gaming machine of a type in which the probability change state continues until the next big hit is won, and the probability change state is a small hit with a high probability, the advantage of the high setting is achieved. You can improve your sex. That is, if the probability of becoming a big hit in the probable change state is low, the number of lottery until the next big hit tends to increase, so that there are many chances to win a prize ball as a small hit. Therefore, in the probable change state, it becomes easier to win more prize balls until the next big hit, which is advantageous for the player.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, a first special symbol and a second special symbol, are used as a plurality of special symbol types, but the types of special symbols are not limited to this, and three or more. The special symbol type may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a game property in which a lottery (variation) is performed according to a predetermined rule for a plurality of special symbols and a game property in which a lottery (variation) is individually performed independently are described. However, the playability described in each embodiment may be interchanged or combined.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Each of the above-described embodiments and control examples may be configured by combining all or a part thereof.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Characteristic A group> (Development control in meter control)
Based on the operation means that can be operated by the player, the validity period setting means that can set the validity period in which the operation of the operation means is effective, and the operation means that is operated within the validity period. The final effect of the effect that can be executed based on the operation of the operation means within the valid period in the gaming machine having the effect execution means capable of executing the effect. It is executed based on an information determining means capable of determining information corresponding to an embodiment and a timing at which the operating means is operated within the valid period based on the information determined by the information determining means. The gaming machine A1 is characterized by having a setting means capable of setting setting information for determining an effect mode capable of the above.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. As an effect for notifying the lottery result, it is proposed that a notice effect that suggests the lottery result is executed in advance before the lottery result is notified by operating an operation means that can be operated by the player. (For example, Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). However, there was a demand for further improvement in the interest of games. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine A1, information corresponding to the final effect mode to be executed by operating the operating means within the valid period is determined, and at the timing when the operating means is operated based on the determined information. Since the staging mode that can be executed is determined based on the above, it is possible to make the staging mode to be executed up to the final staging mode different depending on the operation timing of the player. It is possible to perform a plurality of various effects by combining the frequency and timing at which the player operates the operating means, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

The gaming machine A1 has an updating means capable of adding or subtracting numerical information based on the operation of the operating means, and the effect executing means updates the numerical information to the updating means. Based on this, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the updated numerical information, and the information determining means determines the maximum value or the minimum value of the numerical information as the information. The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the setting means sets a value that can be updated by the updating means as the setting information in accordance with the timing at which the operating means is operated.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, a value that can be updated at the timing when the operating means is operated corresponds to the maximum value or the minimum value predetermined by the information determining means as setting information. Since it is set, it is possible to effectively use the validity period to update the numerical information to the maximum value or the minimum value, it is possible to execute the production that effectively uses the validity period, and the interest of the production using the operation means. Has the effect of improving.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the setting means can set a mathematical formula for the updating means to update the numerical information based on the time information corresponding to the timing when the operating means is operated. A game machine A3 characterized by being a machine.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1 or A2, there is an effect that the updating means can easily determine the numerical information for updating by setting the mathematical formula by the setting means. ..

<Characteristic B group> (Continuous hit detection control in repeated button hits)
It is executed by the effect executing means in a gaming machine having an operation means that can be operated by the player and an effect executing means that can execute the effect based on the operation of the operation means. When the effect is executed by the effect mode selection means capable of selecting the effect mode and the effect execution means, the effect is executed based on the operation of the operation means for a predetermined period. , A gaming machine B1 characterized by having a regulatory means that can be regulated.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. As an effect for notifying the lottery result, it is proposed that a notice effect that suggests the lottery result is executed in advance before the lottery result is notified by operating an operation means that can be operated by the player. (For example, Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). However, there was a demand for further improvement in the interest of games. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine B1, when the effect is executed, it is restricted that the effect is executed for a predetermined period, so that the operating means is operated while the effect is being executed. It has the effect of suppressing the problem that a new production is started and the interest of the production is lowered, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine B1 is characterized by having a period setting means capable of setting period information corresponding to the effect to be executed as the predetermined period when the effect is executed by the effect execution means. Game machine B2.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1, the period information corresponding to the effect to be executed is set as a predetermined period, so that the execution of the effect is restricted in the period corresponding to the effect to be executed. As a result, there is an effect that the execution interval of the production becomes long, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the interest of the game is lowered.

The gaming machine B1 or B2 has a notification means capable of notifying the notification mode each time the operation means is operated, and a lottery means capable of executing a predetermined lottery when the operation means is operated. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the effect executing means is configured to be able to execute the effect when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1 or B2, the notification mode is notified each time the operating means is operated, and a predetermined lottery is executed each time the operating means is operated, so that a specific lottery is executed. Since the effect is configured to be executed when the lottery result is, the player identifies that the operating means has been operated even when the lottery result is not a specific lottery result. It has the effect of being able to be recognized and suppressing problems that reduce the enjoyment of the game.

<Characteristic C group> (It makes it difficult for the unfavorable jackpot game to be executed during a part of the advantageous game state)
The first privilege game in which the first game state is set after the end of the privilege game and the privilege game based on the discrimination means capable of performing the discrimination and the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means being the specific discrimination result. In a gaming machine having a second privilege game in which a second game state is set, which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state after the end, and a privilege game execution means capable of executing the second privilege game, the second game When a predetermined condition is satisfied while the state is set, the gaming machine has a setting means capable of setting the first setting, and the first setting is set by the gaming machine. It is configured so that the first privilege game based on the specific determination result is more difficult to be executed than the case where the determination means is not set. Characteristic gaming machine C1.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine capable of setting an advantageous gaming state (probability changing state) that is advantageous to the player or a disadvantageous gaming state (normal state) that is disadvantageous to the player after the end of the privileged game according to the lottery result. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine wins when a privilege game (disadvantageous privilege game) in which a disadvantageous game state is set is executed after the end of the privilege game by a lottery executed in a state where an advantageous game state is set. If this is done, there is a problem that the disadvantageous privilege game is surely executed and the player's motivation to play is reduced. In particular, if the advantageous gaming state is set for a short period of time and the player wins when the disadvantageous privilege game is executed, the advantageous gaming state ends with almost no benefit from the advantageous gaming state. , There was a problem that the player's willingness to play was further reduced. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play and to provide a gaming machine having an improved interest in the game.

Further, conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a game property (so-called simultaneous fluctuation type) in which a plurality of lottery is executed at the same time. In a gaming machine having such playability, if the lottery result of one lottery is a win, a privileged game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and another lottery game being executed is forced out of the game. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-319221) has been proposed. By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine forcibly stops and displays other lottery due to the stop display of the lottery result in which the privilege game is executed regardless of the type of the privilege game. There was a problem of giving discomfort to the person. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having further improved the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine C1, by setting the first setting, it is possible to make it difficult to execute the first privilege game. Therefore, the first privilege game is given to the player who plays the game during the second game state. Can be enthusiastically played without fear of being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play and improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine C1 is characterized in that the gaming machine C1 has a notification means capable of executing a notification effect for notifying that the first setting is set.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1, the setting status of the first setting can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner by the notification effect executed by the notification means. There is an effect that the discrimination of the discrimination means in the second gaming state can be enthusiastically executed.

The gaming machine C2 has a notification condition determining means capable of determining whether or not the notification condition is satisfied when the first setting is set by the setting means, and the notification means is provided by the notification condition determining means. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the notification effect can be executed when it is determined that the notification condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C2, the notification effect is executed when it is determined that the notification condition is satisfied, so that it is possible to execute an appropriate notification effect for the player. effective.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the award game executing means has a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the result of the determination by the discrimination means on the display means. When the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that it is the specific determination result, the privilege game is executed, and the gaming machine is used. It has a stop control means capable of stopping and displaying the dynamic display executed at the timing when the first setting is completed with the identification information indicating a discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result. A gaming machine C4 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the pre-identification information indicating the discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result in the dynamic display executed at the timing when the first setting is completed. Since it can be stopped and displayed with, there is an effect that it is difficult to execute the first privilege game.

In the gaming machine C4, the dynamic display period of the identification information executed by the dynamic display means includes a first dynamic display period, a second dynamic display period shorter than the first dynamic display period, and a second dynamic display period. It has a dynamic display period setting means capable of setting one dynamic display period from a plurality of dynamic display periods including, and the discriminating means has, as the specific discriminating result, a first discriminating result and the first discriminating result. It is possible to discriminate at least a second discriminating result different from the result, and the privileged game executing means performs the first privileged game based on the result of the discriminating by the discriminating means being the first discriminating result. The second privilege game can be executed based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means being the second discrimination result, and the dynamic display period setting means shows the first discrimination result. As the dynamic display period of the identification information for this purpose, the first dynamic display period is easier to set than the dynamic display period of the identification information for showing the second discrimination result. A gaming machine C5 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C4, the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the discrimination result that the first privilege game is executed determines the discrimination result that the second privilege game is executed. Since it is possible to easily set a dynamic display period of a longer time than the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating, it is possible to make it more difficult to execute the first privilege game than the second privilege game by the stop control means. There is an effect.

<Characteristic D group> (Right-handed detection version: Even if the lottery results are the same, the production mode differs depending on the type of winning opening)
A first control means capable of executing main control related to the game, a second control means capable of executing control of the game based on the information output from the first control means, and a second control means capable of entering the game ball. It has one ball entry means and a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and the first control means has a game ball in the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means. Discrimination means capable of performing discrimination based on the entry of a ball, game information determination means capable of determining game information based on the result of the discrimination, and game information determined by the game information determination means. A game having a control signal output means capable of outputting a control signal for showing, and the second control means having an effect executing means capable of executing an effect for showing the determination result based on the control signal. In the machine, whether the first control means is the control signal based on entering the first ball entry means or the control signal based on entering the second ball entry means. The identification information that can be identified can be output to the second control means, and the effect executing means can execute a specific effect that is advantageous to the player during the period in which the effect is being executed based on the identification information. The gaming machine D1 characterized in that it is configured in.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. In addition, by executing an effect for showing the lottery result, there is a case where the game can be performed while expecting that the lottery result is a hit. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). Further, a plurality of starting ports are provided as a lottery opportunity for executing one lottery, and the lottery can be executed by various games, thereby improving the playability. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, no matter which starting port the gaming ball is awarded, the same production is executed, so that the production becomes monotonous and the player's motivation to play is reduced. there were. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play and to provide a gaming machine having an improved interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine D1, it is possible to identify whether the control signal is based on the entry of the game ball into the first entry means or the control signal based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. Since it is possible to execute an effect based on information, there is an effect that the variation of the effect can be increased and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine D1, the effect information executing means can make the execution frequency of the specific effect different based on the identification information.

According to the gaming machine D2, since the execution frequency of the specific effect can be different between the case of entering the first ball entry means and the case of entering the second ball entry means, the specific effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make any of the ball-entry means perform a game in which the game ball is inserted, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the main control means has a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result, and the effect executing means is said. The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that the specific effect can be executed when the determination result based on the control signal is the specific determination result.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1 or D2, when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result in which the privilege game is executed, the specific effect can be executed, so that the player can execute the specific effect. On the other hand, there is an effect that the game can be performed while expecting that the specific effect is executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine D3, when the effect executing means receives the control signal based on the ball entering the first ball entry means, the specific effect is performed only when the determination result is the specific determination result. When the control signal based on the ball entering the second ball entry means is received, the specific effect is performed when the discrimination result is different from the specific discrimination result. A gaming machine D4 characterized by being feasible.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D3, the conditions under which the specific effect is executed differ depending on whether the ball enters the first ball-entry means or the second ball-entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can predict the discrimination result of the discrimination means based on the type of the ball entry means into which the game ball is inserted.

<Characteristic E group> (SG time reduction final fluctuation control)
It is possible to store an entry means capable of entering a game ball, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry means, and information acquired by the acquisition means. A possible storage means, a discrimination means capable of discriminating based on the information stored in the storage means, and identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means are dynamically displayed on the display means. And a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is displayed in a mode for showing the specific determination result on the display means. In the gaming machine having A variable means that can be varied into a first state that makes it easier for the game ball to enter and a second state that makes it more difficult to enter the ball than the first state, a first game state, and the first state. The second game state is set by the game state setting means that can set the second game state that makes it easier for the variable means to change from the second state to the first state than the game state, and the game state setting means. If so, the effect is executed in response to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, which is started before the end condition set by the game state setting means is satisfied for the first game state. The effect executing means has, and the effect executing means has the identification information corresponding to a predetermined number of the information among the information stored in the storage means when the effect is executed. The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that the effect can be executed over a period until the dynamic display ends.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Further, there is a case in which a plurality of privilege games having different degrees of advantage are configured to be executable, a plurality of game states can be set, and the selection ratio of the privilege games is different depending on the set game states. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-13075). Further, in such a gaming machine, when a specific gaming state (for example, a time saving state) is set, it becomes easier to enter the ball than when another gaming state (for example, a normal state) is set. When a specific start port (for example, a start port with an electric accessory) is provided and a lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the specific start port is executed, and the game ball enters another start port. It is configured so that a privileged game with a higher degree of advantage (for example, a small hit) can be easily executed, and the right of a lottery to be executed based on the game ball entering a specific starting port is predetermined. There is one that can be stored on hold up to the maximum number. In the gaming machine configured in this way, when a specific gaming state is set, the player can efficiently execute a lottery executed based on the entry of the gaming ball into the specific starting port. Therefore, it was possible to enthusiastically play a game with the aim of setting a specific game state.

However, when the end condition of the specific game state is satisfied, it becomes difficult to perform the lottery executed based on the game ball entering the specific start port. Therefore, as the end of the specific game state approaches, the player There was a problem that the motivation to play was reduced. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by showing the player a long period in which a specific game state is set.

According to the gaming machine E1, the effect is executed across the dynamic display corresponding to the information stored in the storage means executed after the end condition is satisfied, so that even after the transition to the first gaming state, the first is performed. 2 It is possible to make the player think that the game state is continuously set, and by making the player think that the period of the second game state is set for a long time, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. effective.

In the gaming machine E1, the predetermined number is the number of all the information stored in the storage means. The gaming machine E2.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E1, the dynamic display of more identification information can be made to appear as if it is the dynamic display of 1, and the second gaming state is set. You can make them feel longer.

In the game machine E1 or E2, the pre-discrimination means capable of preliminarily discriminating the information stored in the storage means before the discrimination by the discriminating means based on the information is executed, and the staging execution means. The effect mode setting means is provided with an effect mode setting means capable of setting the effect mode of the effect executed by the above-mentioned effect, and the effect mode setting means is the above-mentioned thing with respect to the information stored in the storage means when the effect is executed. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that it is possible to set an effect mode based on the result of the pre-determination.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E1 or E2, the effect mode of the effect executed during the second gaming state is preliminarily determined for the information to be determined after the transition to the first gaming state. Since the setting can be made based on the result, it is possible to make the player think that the result of the determination executed during the second gaming state is the specific determination result with a higher probability than the set value. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically perform the game during the second game.

In the gaming machine E3, the effect executing means can at least execute the first effect and the second effect executed after the end of the first effect as the effect, and the effect mode setting means causes the effect to be executed. The gaming machine E4 is characterized by having a selection means capable of selecting the number of the information used for setting the effect mode of the first effect.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E3, the result of discrimination of the discriminating means becomes the specific discriminant result by making the number of information used for setting the staging mode of the first effect different. Can be set depending on whether the player is notified by the first effect or not. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while expecting that the privileged game is executed until the effect executed by the effect executing means is completed.

The gaming machine E4 has an operation means that can be operated by the player and an operation validity period setting means that can set an operation validity period for which the operation for the operation means is effectively determined. As the effect, it is possible to execute an operation effect in which the operation valid period is set before the first effect is executed, and the selection means is an operation content to the operation means during the operation effect. The gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the number of the information used for setting the effect mode of the first effect can be selected based on the above.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E4, the number of information used when setting the production mode of the first effect can be selected based on the operation of the operating means by the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily set the desired production mode of the player.

In the gaming machine E4 or E5, the effect mode setting means can set the effect mode of the second effect based on the result of the prior determination for the information not selected by the selection means. The gaming machine E6.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine E4 or E5, the effect mode of the second effect is set based on the preliminary determination result for the information that was not used when setting the effect mode of the first effect. Therefore, even if the effect mode of the first effect is an effect mode indicating a deviation, it is expected that the number of information used when setting the effect mode of the first effect is small, and the second effect is used. It can be noticed. Therefore, it can be expected that the privilege game will be executed until the effect executed by the effect executing means is completed.

In any of the gaming machines E4 to E6, those having a notification means capable of notifying the number of the information that was not used for setting the effect mode of the first effect by the time the second effect is started. The gaming machine E7, which is characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines E3 to E6, the number of information not used for setting the effect mode of the first effect is notified by the time the second effect is started. Therefore, there is an effect that the rest of the production can be properly enjoyed based on the number of notified information.

<Characteristic F group> (Right-handed detection version: Even if the lottery results are the same, the production mode will be different depending on the game situation)
A first control means capable of executing main control related to the game, a second control means capable of executing control of the game based on the information output from the first control means, and a first control means capable of flowing down the game ball. A game in which the flow path, the second flow path configured so that the game ball flowing down the first flow path is difficult to flow down, and the game ball flowing down the first flow path flow down the second flow path. A first ball entry means configured to be easier to enter than a ball, and a second entry means to allow a game ball flowing down the second flow path to enter the ball more easily than a game ball flowing down the second flow path. It has a ball means and a detection means capable of detecting a game ball flowing down the second flow path, and the first control means enters the game ball into the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means. A discrimination means capable of performing discrimination based on a sphere, an information determination means capable of determining information based on the result of the discrimination, and a control signal for indicating information determined by the information determination means. The second control means has an effect executing means capable of executing an effect for notifying the determination result indicated by the control signal, and has the effect executing means. Is configured to be capable of executing a specific effect that is advantageous to the player based on the detection result by the detection means during the period in which the effect is executed. F1.

<G group> (Transformation 1 of SG time reduction final fluctuation control (unused look-ahead number notification))
A predetermined number of the entry means capable of entering the game ball, the acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry means, and the information acquired by the acquisition means. The storage means that can be stored in the upper limit, the discrimination means that can be discriminated based on the information stored in the storage means, and the identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discriminating means are dynamically displayed in the display means. A privilege that can execute a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the dynamic display means that can be displayed and the identification information are displayed on the display means in a manner for showing the specific determination result. In a game machine having a game execution means, a privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege to a player by passing a game ball through a specific area during a period in which the privilege game is executed, and the above-mentioned input. A variable means that can be varied into a first state that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the ball means, a second state that makes it more difficult to enter the ball than the first state, and a first gaming state. A game state setting means capable of setting a second game state in which the variable means is more likely to be changed from the second state to the first state than the first game state, and a second game state by the game state setting means. Is set, the first game state is set by the game state setting means. The execution is started before the end condition is satisfied. The effect is corresponding to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information. The effect execution means that can be executed, the effect mode setting means that can set the effect mode of the effect executed by the effect execution means, and the information stored in the storage means are based on the information. It has a pre-discrimination means capable of pre-discrimination before the discriminating by the discriminating means is executed, and the effect mode setting means has the pre-discrimination for the information stored in the storage means. It is possible to set an effect mode based on at least a part of the result, and the gaming machine can provide a suggestion effect that can suggest the number of the information that is not used for setting the effect mode by the effect mode setting means. A game machine G1 characterized by being feasible.

According to the game machine G1, the suggestion effect can suggest the number of information that is not used for setting the effect mode of the effect executed by the effect execution means, so that even after the end of the effect, the privilege game Can be expected to be executed, and has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

<Group H> (Transformation 2 of SG time reduction final fluctuation control (suggestion of holding position))
A predetermined number of the entry means capable of entering the game ball, the acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry means, and the information acquired by the acquisition means. The storage means that can be stored in the upper limit, the discrimination means that can be discriminated based on the information stored in the storage means, and the identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discriminating means are dynamically displayed in the display means. A privilege that can execute a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the dynamic display means that can be displayed and the identification information are displayed on the display means in a manner for showing the specific determination result. In a game machine having a game execution means, a privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege to a player by passing a game ball through a specific area during a period in which the privilege game is executed, and the above-mentioned input. A variable means that can be varied into a first state that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the ball means, a second state that makes it more difficult to enter the ball than the first state, and a first gaming state. A game state setting means capable of setting a second game state in which the variable means is more likely to be changed from the second state to the first state than the first game state, and a second game state by the game state setting means. Is set, the first game state is set by the game state setting means. The execution is started before the end condition is satisfied. The effect is corresponding to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information. The effect execution means that can be executed, the effect mode setting means that can set the effect mode of the effect executed by the effect execution means, and the information stored in the storage means are based on the information. It has a pre-discrimination means capable of pre-discrimination before the discriminating by the discriminating means is executed, and the effect mode setting means has the pre-discrimination for the information stored in the storage means. The gaming machine H1 is characterized in that it is possible to set an effect mode in which the information whose result is the specific determination result can be identified.

According to the gaming machine H1, it is possible to predict the information that will be the specific determination result among the information stored in the storage means, based on the effect mode of the effect. As a result, by grasping whether other information stored in the storage means is determined before the privilege game is executed or after the privilege game is completed, the information is executed after the privilege game is completed. There is an effect that the content of the game can be predicted in advance and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic I group> (SG2)
It is possible to store an entry means capable of entering a game ball, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry means, and information acquired by the acquisition means. A possible storage means, a discrimination means capable of discriminating based on the information stored in the storage means, and identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means are dynamically displayed on the display means. And a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is displayed in a mode for indicating the specific determination result on the display means. In a gaming machine having It has an effect executing means capable of executing an effect based on a result, and a selection means capable of selecting information corresponding to an effect to be executed by the effect executing means among the information stored in the storage means. A game machine I1 characterized by being a thing.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been configured to display the result of a lottery result in a variable combination of symbols and then stop and display the combination corresponding to the lottery result. A configuration has been proposed in which the lottery result can be discriminated in advance before the variation display is started and the pre-discrimination result can be notified (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-13075). In such a gaming machine, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a game having an improved interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine I1, since the player can select the information used in the production, there is an effect that the range in which the player can intervene in the game is widened and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic J group> (SG3)
It is possible to store an entry means capable of entering a game ball, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry means, and information acquired by the acquisition means. A possible storage means, a discrimination means capable of discriminating based on the information stored in the storage means, and identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means are dynamically displayed on the display means. And a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is displayed in a mode for indicating the specific determination result on the display means. In a gaming machine having Other than the effect execution means capable of executing the effect based on the result and the information stored in the storage means, which is determined by the prior determination means corresponding to the effect executed by the effect execution means. The gaming machine J1 is characterized by having a suggestion means capable of suggesting suggestion information for showing the number information of the above.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been configured to display the result of a lottery result in a variable combination of symbols and then stop and display the combination corresponding to the lottery result. A configuration has been proposed in which the lottery result can be discriminated in advance before the variation display is started and the pre-discrimination result can be notified (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-13075). In such a gaming machine, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a game having an improved interest in the game.

According to the game machine J1, after the effect is executed, the number of information for which the effect based on the prior determination is not executed is notified. Therefore, even after the effect is executed, the information for which the effect is not executed is displayed. On the other hand, it has the effect of being able to have expectations and improving the interest of the game.

<Characteristic K group> (SG4)
It is possible to store an entry means capable of entering a game ball, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry means, and information acquired by the acquisition means. A possible storage means, a discrimination means capable of discriminating based on the information stored in the storage means, and identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means are dynamically displayed on the display means. And a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is displayed in a mode for indicating the specific determination result on the display means. In a gaming machine having It has an effect executing means capable of executing an effect based on a result, and the effect executing means can execute an effect based on a determination result by the prior determination means based on a plurality of information stored in the storage means. The gaming machine K1 characterized in that it is configured in.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been configured to display the result of a lottery result in a variable combination of symbols and then stop and display the combination corresponding to the lottery result. A configuration has been proposed in which the lottery result can be discriminated in advance before the variation display is started and the pre-discrimination result can be notified (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-13075). In such a gaming machine, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a game having an improved interest in the game.

According to the game machine K1, since the effect is executed based on the determination result of the pre-determination means based on a plurality of information, the effect can be diversified and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic L group> (SG5)
It is possible to store an entry means capable of entering a game ball, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry means, and information acquired by the acquisition means. A possible storage means, a discrimination means capable of discriminating based on the information stored in the storage means, and identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means are dynamically displayed on the display means. And a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is displayed in a mode for showing the specific determination result on the display means. In a gaming machine having It has an effect executing means capable of executing an effect based on the result, and the effect is variable based on the information corresponding to the order in which the information determined by the prior determination means is stored. A game machine L1 characterized by being present.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been configured to display the result of a lottery result in a variable combination of symbols and then stop and display the combination corresponding to the lottery result. A configuration has been proposed in which the lottery result can be discriminated in advance before the variation display is started and the pre-discrimination result can be notified (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-13075). In such a gaming machine, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a game having an improved interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine L1, since the production is changed according to the order in which the information is stored, the production can be diversified, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic A group> (Small hits are possible during specific special map fluctuations)
The first determination means capable of executing the first determination, the first display means for displaying the determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means. The dynamic display period setting means for dynamically displaying the first identification information, the dynamic display period setting means for setting the dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the first identification information, and the second determination can be executed. The second determination means, the second display means for displaying the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means, and the first for showing a specific first determination result to the first display means. 1 When the identification information is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for showing a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second privilege game is displayed. In a gaming machine having the privileged game executing means for executing the above, the first gaming state that makes it easier to execute the second determination than the first determination, and the first determination rather than the second determination are executed. The game state setting means has a game state setting means capable of setting a second game state for facilitating, and the game state setting means dynamically displays the first identification information when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine A1 characterized in that the first gaming state can be set during the target display period.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (probability changing state) that is advantageous to the player during the period from the end of the privileged game to the winning of the next big hit according to the lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766 (Ab. 2012). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, which is advantageous to the player, is changed by the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set, that is, it is executed during the advantageous gaming state. If the next win is won immediately by the lottery, the period for which the advantageous gaming state is set is shortened, and if the lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state does not immediately win the next hit, the advantageous gaming state is set. Will be set for a longer period. As described above, there is a problem that the period in which the advantageous gaming state to be provided to the player is set differs depending on the result of the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. Further, if the gaming machine has a game property of giving a privilege to the player during the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem that the privilege given to the player is significantly different. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having further improved the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine A1, the first gaming state in which the second determination is easily executed can be set during the period in which the first determination is dynamically displayed, so that the length of the period in which the first gaming state is set is set. Can be set in advance. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine A1, the second determination means is configured to determine the specific second determination result with a higher probability than the probability that the first determination means determines the specific first determination result. A gaming machine A2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are played. That is, the second privilege game executed based on the determination result of the second determination by the second determination means is executed rather than the first privilege game executed based on the determination result of the first determination by the first determination means. Therefore, the first gaming state can be set to a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play the game in the hope that the first game state is set, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, a first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second entry means different from the first entry means, the first entry means, and the second entry means. A third ball entry means different from the means, a first state in which the game ball can be guided to the second ball entry means, and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the second ball entry means than the first state. The first determination means has a variable means that can be changed into two states, and the first determination means is based on the fact that a game ball enters the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means. The second determination means is configured to be able to execute the determination, and the second determination means is configured to be able to execute the second determination based on the game ball entering the third ball entry means. The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the variable means is controlled so as to be more easily variable to the first state than the first gaming state.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A1 or A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is possible to make it more difficult to execute the first determination in the first gaming state than in the second gaming state. Therefore, in the state where the first game state is set, it is possible to facilitate the game of inserting the ball into the third ball entry means, and it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. ..

In the gaming machine A3, after the first privilege game is executed, the probability of being determined as the specific first determination result by the first determination can be set to a higher probability than usual. Having setting means, the gaming state setting means is displayed with the first identification information for showing the specific first determination result when the high probability is set by the high probability setting means. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the first gaming state is set based on the start of the dynamic display of the first identification information.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the high probability is set by the high probability setting means, the dynamic display of the first identification information that is displayed by the first identification information for showing the specific first determination result by the first determination. Since the first gaming state is set based on the start, the process until the first gaming state is set can be set step by step. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it easier for the player to continuously play the game.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the second privilege game is characterized in that the privilege that can be given to the player is set to be smaller than that of the first privilege game. Machine A5.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are played. That is, in the second privilege game, the privilege that can be given to the player is set to be less than that in the first privilege game, so that the player is given an excessive privilege during the period in which the first game state is set. There is an effect that it can be suppressed from being given.

<Characteristic B group> (Game content and special 1 and special 2 are set at once)
The first determination means capable of executing the first determination, the first display means on which the first identification information for showing the determination result by the first determination means is displayed, and the first identification information on the first display means. The first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the above, the first dynamic display period determining means for determining the period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the second determination. A second determination means capable of performing the above, a second display means for displaying the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means, and the second identification information dynamically displayed on the second display means. The second dynamic display means to be displayed, the second dynamic display period determining means for determining the period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means, and the first display means are specified. When the first identification information for showing the first determination result of the above is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and the second identification information for showing the specific second determination result to the second display means. Is displayed, the first identification information for showing the specific first determination result is displayed in the gaming machine having the privilege game execution means for executing the second privilege game. A period determination means for determining a dynamic display period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and a dynamic display of the second identification information executed during the dynamic display period determined by the period determination means. The gaming machine B1 is characterized by having an effect determining means for determining an effect corresponding to the above, and an effect executing means for executing the effect determined by the effect determining means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (probability changing state) that is advantageous to the player during the period from the end of the privileged game to the winning of the next big hit according to the lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766 (Ab. 2012). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, which is advantageous to the player, is changed by the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set, that is, it is executed during the advantageous gaming state. If the next win is won immediately by the lottery, the period for which the advantageous gaming state is set is shortened, and if the lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state does not immediately win the next hit, the advantageous gaming state is set. Will be set for a longer period. As described above, there is a problem that the period in which the advantageous gaming state to be provided to the player is set differs depending on the result of the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. Further, if the gaming machine has a game property of giving a privilege to the player during the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem that the privilege given to the player is significantly different. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having further improved the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine B1, since the staging determination means determines the effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the second identification information executed during the dynamic display period determined by the period determination means, the first identification information Since it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the second identification information in association with the dynamic display period, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the future game based on the effect to be executed. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine B1, the effect determining means determines the effect based on the dynamic display period determined by the period determining means and the game content of the first privilege game. Characteristic gaming machine B2.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B1, by grasping the effect executed by the effect execution means, the dynamic display period of the first identification information being executed and the game of the first privilege game It is possible to predict the content and. Therefore, since the player can pay attention to the production, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2, a first gaming state in which the second determination is easier to be executed than in the first determination, and a second gaming state in which the first determination is easier to be executed than in the second determination. The gaming state setting means has a configurable gaming state setting means, and the gaming state setting means dynamically displays the first identification information to be displayed by the first identification information for showing the specific first determination result. The gaming machine B3, characterized in that the first gaming state is executed during the dynamic display period.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines B1 or B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the first game state is set during the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the determination result at which the first privilege game is executed, the period until the first privilege game is executed is set. It can be used to perform a game aiming at the second privilege game. Further, by grasping the effect executed by the effect execution means, it is possible to predict the period in which the first game state is set, so that the game can be enthusiastically performed during the first game state. effective.

In the gaming machine B2 or B3, as the first privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the normal first privilege game and the small first privilege game in which the privilege given to the player is less than the normal first privilege game. The first dynamic display period determining means can determine a first period and a second period longer than the first period. In the staging determination means, the small first privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, and the second period is determined by the period determination means, and the normal second period is determined by the privilege game execution means. 1 The gaming machine B4, characterized in that the privileged game is executed and the production of the same aspect is determined in the case where the first period is determined by the period determining means.

According to the gaming machine B4, when the combination of the effects of the gaming machine B2 or B3 and the advantages of the two elements for determining the effect content is different, the effect determining means has the same embodiment. Since the effect is determined, it is possible to make the player predict a plurality of patterns of the future game situation by grasping the content of the effect executed by the effect execution means. Then, the accuracy of the prediction can be gradually improved depending on the progress of the first gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the enjoyment of predicting the player can be further enhanced and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine B4, the effect determining means determines a specific effect when the normal first privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means and the second period is determined by the period determination means. A gaming machine B5 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, by executing the specific effect, it is possible to notify the player that the most advantageous game content has been set, so that there is an effect that the player can be given a sense of superiority.

<Characteristic C group> (rush notification)
The first determination means capable of executing the first determination, the first display means on which the first identification information for showing the determination result by the first determination means is displayed, and the first identification information on the first display means. The first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the above, the first dynamic display period determining means for determining the period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the second determination. The second identification information is dynamically displayed on the second determination means capable of executing the above, the second display means for displaying the determination result by the second determination means, and the second display means. The second dynamic display means to be displayed, the second dynamic display period determining means for determining the period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means, and the first display means are specified. When the first identification information for showing the first determination result of the above is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and the second identification information for showing the specific second determination result to the second display means. When is displayed, the first gaming state in which the second determination is more likely to be executed than the first determination in the gaming machine having the privileged game executing means for executing the second privilege game, and the first game state. When the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means capable of setting the second gaming state that makes it easier to execute the first determination than the second determination, and the gaming state setting means, the second game state is set. It has a notification timing determining means for determining the notification timing for notifying the player of the notification mode for indicating to the player that the first gaming state has been set based on the situation in the dynamic display of the identification information. The gaming machine C1 characterized by.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Furthermore, according to the lottery result, an advantageous game state (probability change state) that is advantageous to the player is set during the period from the end of the privilege game to the next big hit, and the player is notified that the game state has changed. A gaming machine that performs such an effect has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, since the above-mentioned gaming machine is configured to execute an effect of notifying the player based on the setting of the advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player, for example, the advantageous gaming state is set. Despite this, even if a new lottery cannot be executed, the problem is that the player is informed that the game state is set, which makes the player uncomfortable. was there. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having further improved the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine C1, the notification timing for notifying that the first gaming state in which the second determination is easily executed is set can be determined based on the dynamic display status of the second identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from being uncomfortable with the notification timing for notifying that the first game state has been set.

In the gaming machine C1, the second dynamic display means can dynamically display the second identification information while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means.

According to the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1. That is, when the first gaming state set based on the determination result of the first determination means executed separately from the second determination means is set, the second identification information is notified based on the situation in the dynamic display. The timing is decided. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game by combining the first identification information and the second identification information that can be dynamically displayed at the same time.

The gaming machine C2 has a dynamic display determining means for determining whether or not the second identification information is dynamically displayed at the time when the first gaming state is set, and the notification timing determining means is the moving. When it is determined by the target display determination means that the second identification information is not dynamically displayed, the notification timing is determined based on the time when the first gaming state is set. Amusement machine C3.

According to the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C2. That is, if the second determination can be executed immediately after the first gaming state is set, it is immediately notified that the first gaming state has been set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game in the first game state for a longer time.

In the gaming machine C2 or C3, when the notification timing determining means determines that the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display determining means, the dynamic display of the second identification information ends. The gaming machine C4, characterized in that the notification timing is determined based on the timing of the notification.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines C2 or C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, even if the first gaming state is set, during the period when the second determination cannot be executed, it is not notified that the first gaming state has been set, and the second determination can be executed. In this case, it is notified that the first gaming state has been set. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the second determination cannot be executed even though it is notified that the first game state has been set, and it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. It has the effect of being able to do it.

The gaming machine C4 has a remaining period determining means for determining the period from the timing at which the dynamic display of the second identification information ends to the ending of the first gaming state, and is based on the determination result by the remaining period determining means. The gaming machine C5 is characterized by having a notification determination means for determining whether or not to determine the notification timing by the notification timing determination means.

According to the gaming machine C5, it is determined whether or not to determine the notification timing based on the period during which the second determination can be executed in the first gaming state. Therefore, for example, the second determination is made in the first gaming state. When the executable period becomes extremely short, it is possible to prevent the player from being notified that the first gaming state has been set. Therefore, even though the player is notified that the first gaming state has been set, it is possible to prevent the first gaming state from ending in a short period of time and causing discomfort to the player. It has the effect of being able to do it.

<Characteristic D group> (Large hit discard, small hit interruption due to simultaneous fluctuation)
The first determination means capable of executing the first determination, the first display means for displaying the determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means. The first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the above, the second determination means capable of executing the second determination, and the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means are displayed. The second display means, the second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means for a predetermined period, and the first for displaying a specific first determination result on the first display means. When the identification information is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for showing a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second privilege game is performed. In a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means to be executed and a second privilege game type setting means for setting the content of the second privilege game from a plurality of privilege contents, the second dynamic display means is the first. 1 The second identification information can be dynamically displayed in a state where the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the specific second identification information can be dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means. When the second identification information indicating that it is a determination result is stopped and displayed, the dynamic display by the first dynamic display means is performed based on the privilege content set by the second privilege game type setting means. D1 is a gaming machine D1 having a stop control means for executing stop control.

Conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a game property (so-called simultaneous fluctuation type) in which a plurality of lottery is executed at the same time. In a gaming machine having such playability, if the lottery result of one lottery is a win, a privileged game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and another lottery game being executed is forced out of the game. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-319221) has been proposed. By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine forcibly stops and displays other lottery due to the stop display of the lottery result in which the privilege game is executed regardless of the type of the privilege game. There was a problem of giving discomfort to the person. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having further improved the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine D1, the stop control content for the first dynamic display can be set according to the content of the second privilege game to be executed, so that the situation of causing discomfort to the player is suppressed. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine D1, the stop control means is a forced stop control that stops and displays the dynamic display by the first dynamic display means with the first identification information indicating a determination result different from the specific first determination result. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that it is capable of temporarily stopping the measurement of the period dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means until a predetermined restart condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are played. That is, it is possible to set whether to forcibly stop or temporarily stop the dynamic display by the first dynamic display means according to the content of the second privilege game to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessive privilege, and the privilege game to which a small privilege is given is executed, so that the privilege game to which a large privilege is given is discarded. It has the effect of being able to suppress this.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the second privilege game type setting means can set the first privilege type and the second privilege type that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege type, and is said to be stopped. The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that the control means executes the forced stop control when the second special type is set by the second privilege game type setting means.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines D1 or D2, the following effects are played. That is, when the second privilege type that is advantageous to the player is set, the dynamic display can be forcibly stopped by the first dynamic display means, so that an excessive privilege is given to the player. It has the effect of being able to suppress this.

In the gaming machine D3, when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, the dynamic display executed by the first dynamic display means ends, and the specific first determination is performed. Until the first identification information for showing the result is displayed on the first display means, the second privilege game type setting means has an invalid means for invalidating the setting of the second privilege type. A gaming machine D4 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D3, the following effects are played. That is, when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result, the setting of the second privilege type is invalidated by the invalidation means during the dynamic display. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first privilege game and the second privilege game in which the second privilege type is set from being continuously executed, and the player is given an excessive privilege. It has the effect of being able to be suppressed.

In the gaming machine D3 or D4, the second privilege game type setting means sets the first privilege type and the second privilege type based on the determination result of the second determination means. The gaming machine D5, characterized in that the first privilege type is easier to set than the second privilege type.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D3 or D4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the first privilege type is easier to set than the second privilege type, even if a lot of the second privilege games are executed, it is possible to suppress the excessive privilege being given to the player. There is.

<Other Thoughts 1> (The latent state can be set before and after the jackpot game)
The first determination means capable of executing the first determination, the first display means for displaying the determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means. A dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the above, a second determination means capable of executing the second determination, and a second display means for displaying the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means. When the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result is displayed on the first display means, the first privilege game is executed, and the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. When the second identification information for indicating is displayed, the second determination is more likely to be executed in the gaming machine having the privilege game execution means for executing the second privilege game than the first determination. The game state setting means has a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state that makes it easier for the first determination to be executed than the second determination, and the game state setting means is a predetermined first. When the condition is satisfied, the first gaming state is set during the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and when the predetermined second condition is satisfied, the first privilege game is completed. The gaming machine E1 characterized in that the first gaming state is set later.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (probability changing state) that is advantageous to the player during the period from the end of the privileged game to the winning of the next big hit according to the lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766 (Ab. 2012). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, which is advantageous to the player, is changed by the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set, that is, it is executed during the advantageous gaming state. If the next win is won immediately by the lottery, the period for which the advantageous gaming state is set is shortened, and if the lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state does not immediately win the next hit, the advantageous gaming state is set. Will be set for a longer period. As described above, there is a problem that the period in which the advantageous gaming state to be provided to the player is set differs depending on the result of the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. Further, if the gaming machine has a game property of giving a privilege to the player during the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem that the privilege given to the player is significantly different. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having further improved the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine E1, the timing at which the first gaming state is set can be divided into before and after the first privileged gaming, so that it is possible to provide a player with a surprising game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic G group> (Small hit RUSH during the symbol confirmation period)
The first determination means capable of executing the first determination, the first display means for displaying the determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means. A first stop display means for displaying a stop display, a stop display period setting means for setting a stop display period for displaying the first identification information by the first stop display means, and a second determination capable of executing a second determination. The means, the second display means for displaying the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for showing the specific first determination result to the first display means. Is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second privilege game is executed. In a gaming machine having the privileged game executing means, the first gaming state that makes it easier to execute the second determination than the first determination, and the first determination that makes it easier to execute the first determination than the second determination. The game state setting means has a game state setting means capable of setting two game states, and the game state setting means is said to have a stop display period during which the first identification information is stopped and displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine G1 characterized in that the first gaming state can be set.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (probability changing state) that is advantageous to the player during the period from the end of the privileged game to the winning of the next big hit according to the lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766 (Ab. 2012). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, which is advantageous to the player, is changed by the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set, that is, it is executed during the advantageous gaming state. If the next win is won immediately by the lottery, the period for which the advantageous gaming state is set is shortened, and if the lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state does not immediately win the next hit, the advantageous gaming state is set. Was set for a long period of time. That is, there is a problem that the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set differs depending on the result of the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. Further, if the gaming machine has a game property of giving a privilege to the player during the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem that the privilege given to the player is significantly different. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having further improved the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine G1, since the stop display period can be set in advance as the period in which the first gaming state is set, there is an effect that the period in which the first gaming state is executed can be appropriately managed. .. Further, since the first game state is set during the period in which the identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination is stopped and displayed, the player is informed in advance of the game content after the first game state is completed. It can be grasped. With this configuration, for example, when the first gaming state is set in a state where a specific determination result is displayed as the determination result of the first determination, after the first gaming state is completed, It is possible to know in advance that the first privilege game will be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that the stop display period setting means sets stop display periods of different lengths based on the determination result of the first determination means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1, the stop display period is set based on the determination result of the first determination means, so that the first privilege game is based on the determination result of the first determination means. The presence or absence of execution and the length of the stop display period are determined. Therefore, the player can be more closely watched by the determination result of the first determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G2, when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, the stop display period setting means has a longer stop display than when the determination result is other than the specific first determination result. The gaming machine G3 characterized in that the period can be easily set.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2, when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result, the stop display period is longer than the case other than the specific first determination result. Is easy to set, so that the first gaming state in which a longer period is set can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machines G2 or G3, the stop display period setting means can set stop display periods of different lengths when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result. The gaming machine G4 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2 or G3, the length of the stop display period can be made different even in the case of a specific first determination result. Therefore, even in the case of a specific first determination result, since the period in which the first gaming state is set is different, the player is enthusiastically played so that the longer first gaming state is set. It has the effect of being able to make it.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the second determination means determines the specific second determination result with a higher probability than the probability that the first determination means determines the specific first determination result. The gaming machine G5, which is characterized in that it is configured in.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the following effects are played. That is, the second privilege game executed based on the determination result of the second determination by the second determination means is executed rather than the first privilege game executed based on the determination result of the first determination by the first determination means. Therefore, the first gaming state can be set to a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play the game in the hope that the first game state is set, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic H group> (Small hit RUSH by winning a big hit when the end of working hours fluctuates)
A first determination means capable of executing the first determination, a first display means displaying the first identification information for showing the determination result by the first determination means, and a second determination means capable of executing the second determination. And the second display means for displaying the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for showing the specific first determination result to the first display means. The privilege of executing the first privilege game when displayed, and executing the second privilege game when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. In a gaming machine having a game executing means, a first gaming state that makes it easier to execute the second determination than the first determination, and a second that makes it easier to execute the first determination than the second determination. It has a gaming state setting means capable of setting a gaming state, and the gaming state setting means can execute the second determination when both the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are satisfied. The gaming machine H1 characterized in that the first gaming state can be set during the first period.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (probability changing state) that is advantageous to the player during the period from the end of the privileged game to the winning of the next big hit according to the lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766 (Ab. 2012). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, whether or not an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set is set only by one lottery result. Therefore, the process until the advantageous gaming state is set is given to the player. There was a problem that it was not possible to play a game while entertaining. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having further improved the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine H1, when both the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are satisfied, the first gaming state can be set for the first period, so that the second determination is made during the first gaming state. Can be reliably executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the first gaming state is terminated without executing the second determination even though the first gaming state is set, which gives the player a feeling of dissatisfaction. Can provide no games.

The gaming machine H1 has a first determination number measuring means capable of measuring the number of times of the first determination executed by the first determination means, and the first determination measured by the first determination number measuring means. The gaming machine H2 is characterized in that the first predetermined condition is satisfied when the number of times reaches a predetermined number of times.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H1, when the number of times of the first determination reaches a predetermined number, the first predetermined condition is satisfied, so that the first determination by the first determination means is executed. As a result, the game content can be reliably advanced toward the establishment of the first predetermined condition. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the state in which the first predetermined condition is not satisfied when the game is played for a long time, and it is possible to suppress the player from being uncomfortable.

The gaming machine H3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine H1 or H2, when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, the second predetermined condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1 or H2, when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result, the second predetermined condition is satisfied, so that the player can understand. It has the effect of being able to provide easy games.

In the gaming machine H2 or H3, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state even when the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied, and the gaming state setting means When the first gaming state is set based on the satisfaction of the first predetermined condition, the first gaming state is set during the second period in which it is difficult to execute the second determination. The gaming machine H4 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H2 or H3, when only the first predetermined condition is satisfied, the first gaming state is set only in the second period in which the second determination is difficult to execute. As a result, the first gaming state set when only the first predetermined condition is satisfied can be set to a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game so that both the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are satisfied.

In the gaming machine H4, when the first gaming state is set based on the satisfaction of the second predetermined condition, the gaming state setting means is shorter than the first period and the first. The gaming machine H5, characterized in that the first gaming state is set during a third period longer than two periods.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H4, when only the second predetermined condition is satisfied, the first gaming state is set during the third period, so that the first predetermined condition is higher than the first predetermined condition. There is an effect that the game can be enthusiastically played in order to satisfy the second predetermined condition first.

<Characteristic I group> (The expected degree of small hit RUSH rush is variable by the number of time reductions)
A first determination means capable of executing the first determination, a first display means displaying the first identification information for showing the determination result by the first determination means, and a second determination means capable of executing the second determination. And the second display means for displaying the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for showing the specific first determination result to the first display means. The privilege of executing the first privilege game when displayed, and executing the second privilege game when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. It is possible to set a game execution means, a first game state in which the second determination is easier to execute than the first determination, and a second game state in which the first determination is easier to execute than the second determination. In a gaming machine having the above-mentioned gaming state setting means, the gaming state setting means can set a third gaming state in which the first gaming state is more likely to be set than the second gaming state for a predetermined period. There is a third gaming state period setting means capable of setting a first period and a second period longer than the first period as a period in which the third gaming state is set, and the third gaming state is provided. The gaming machine I1 is characterized in that when the first period is set by the period setting means, it is easier to set the first gaming state than when the second period is set.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine capable of setting an advantageous gaming state (latent state) that is advantageous to the player by performing a game in which a plurality of gaming states are gradually shifted according to the lottery result (for example,). Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-058267). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, since the ease of setting the advantageous gaming state in the gaming state (quasi-advantageous gaming state) in which the advantageous gaming state is easily set is single, the aim is to set the advantageous gaming state. There was a problem that the content of the game played was monotonous. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having further improved the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine I1, the expectation that the first gaming state is set in the state where the third gaming state is set by differently setting the period for setting the third gaming state in which the first gaming state is easily set. Can be different. Therefore, since the player can be interested in the setting contents of the third game state, the player can enthusiastically play the game even in the game process until the first game state is set. It has the effect of being able to do it.

The gaming machine I1 has a progress determining means for determining the passage of the predetermined period set by the third gaming state period setting means, and the gaming state setting means has elapsed of the predetermined period by the progress determining means. The gaming machine I2 is characterized in that the first gaming state is set based on the establishment of the first setting condition that is satisfied when the above is determined.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I1, the first gaming state is set when the period in which the third gaming state is set elapses, so that an easy-to-understand game can be provided. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, when the gaming state setting means is in a state where the third gaming state is set and the first determination result by the first determination means is the specific first determination result. The gaming machine I3 is characterized in that the first gaming state is set based on the establishment of the second setting condition that is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1 or I2, even when a third gaming state in which the first setting condition is difficult to be satisfied, that is, a long-term third gaming state is set. During the third gaming state, the first gaming state can be set based on the determination result of the first determining means. Therefore, it is possible to aim for different transition conditions in order to set the first gaming state according to the period of the third gaming state to be set, and therefore, the motivation to play depends on the length of the period of the third gaming state to be set. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

In the gaming machines I2 and I3, the third gaming state period setting means can set a third period longer than the second period, and the progress determination means determines the progress of the third period. In this case, the gaming machine I4 is characterized by having a condition limiting means that does not satisfy the first setting condition.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1 or I2, when the passage of the third period is determined, the first setting condition is not satisfied by the condition limiting means, so that the first gaming state is set. You can definitely limit what you do. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the provision of an excessively advantageous state to the player.

In any of the gaming machines I2 to I4, the first gaming state period setting means for setting the period in which the first gaming state is set is provided, and the first gaming state period setting means is provided by the progress determination means. A gaming machine characterized in that when it is determined that the first period has elapsed, the period in which the first gaming state is set is set longer than when it is determined that the second period has elapsed. I5.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines I2 to I4, it is determined that the second period has elapsed for a longer period than the determination that the second period has elapsed. The game state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can pay attention to the determination result of the progress determination means.

<Characteristic J group> (Surely small hit RUSH for a predetermined period)
A first determination means capable of executing the first determination, a first display means displaying the first identification information for showing the determination result by the first determination means, and a second determination capable of executing the second determination. The means, the second display means for displaying the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for showing the specific first determination result to the first display means. Is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second privilege game is executed. In a gaming machine having the privileged game executing means, the first gaming state that makes it easier to execute the second determination than the first determination, and the first determination that makes it easier to execute the first determination than the second determination. 2 The game state can be set by the game state setting means, the advantageous period setting means for setting the advantageous period in which the first game state can be continuously set by the game state setting means, and the advantageous period setting means. A first termination condition that is satisfied when the set advantageous period has elapsed, or an termination means that terminates the first gaming state when a second termination condition different from the first termination condition is satisfied. A gaming machine J1 having an end limiting means for limiting the establishment of the second end condition when a predetermined continuation condition is satisfied.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine capable of setting an advantageous gaming state (latent state) that is advantageous to the player by performing a game in which a plurality of gaming states are gradually shifted according to the lottery result (for example,). Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-058267). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set changes based on the lottery result executed during the advantageous gaming state, so that the advantageous gaming state is provided to the player for a predetermined period. There is a problem that the advantageous gaming state is terminated in a short period of time even though the advantageous gaming state is set with difficulty, and the motivation for playing is reduced. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having further improved the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine J1, when a predetermined continuation condition is satisfied, the establishment of the second termination condition can be restricted by the termination limiting means. Therefore, it is possible to continuously set the first gaming state during the advantageous period set by the advantageous period setting means, and there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In the gaming machine J1, the gaming state setting means can set an advantageous first gaming state in which the predetermined continuation condition can be satisfied and a disadvantageous first gaming state in which the predetermined continuation condition cannot be satisfied. A gaming machine J2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J1, the advantageous first gaming state and the disadvantageous first gaming state can be set by the gaming state setting means, which is more advantageous than the gaming state setting means. There is an effect that the game can be enthusiastically performed so that the first game state is set.

The gaming machine J1 or J2 is characterized in that the predetermined continuation condition is satisfied when the result of the first determination of the first determination means is the specific first determination result. J3.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1 or J2, when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result, a predetermined continuation condition is satisfied, so that the first determination means is satisfied. There is an effect that the player can be enthusiastically played the game so that the determination result of the above is the specific first determination result.

The gaming machine J4 is characterized in that the gaming machine J2 or J3 has a notifying means for notifying that the advantageous first gaming state is set.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J2 or J3, the notification means notifies that the advantageous first gaming state is set, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. There is an effect.

In any of the gaming machines J2 to J4, there is a discriminating means for determining that the condition for satisfying the second end condition is satisfied during the period in which the advantageous first gaming state is set, and the discriminating means of the said discriminating means. The gaming machine J5 is characterized by having a second notifying means for notifying that the condition for satisfying the second ending condition is satisfied based on the determination result.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines J2 to J4, the second notification means that the condition for satisfying the second end condition is satisfied during the period in which the advantageous first gaming state is set. Therefore, if it is assumed that the first gaming state set this time is not the advantageous first gaming state but the disadvantageous first gaming state, whether or not the first gaming state has ended is determined. It can be discriminated by the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can experience the superiority of the advantageous first gaming state set this time.

<Characteristic K group> (Provide a period during which the number of time reductions is not subtracted during the time reduction state)
The first determination means capable of executing the first determination, the first display means on which the first identification information for showing the determination result by the first determination means is displayed, and the first identification information on the first display means. The first determination is made when the first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the above first period and the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result are displayed on the first display means. A gaming state setting means capable of setting an advantageous gaming state for a predetermined period, a period measuring means for measuring the period of the advantageous gaming state set by the gaming state setting means, and the predetermined period measuring means. An ending means for terminating the advantageous gaming state when the period is measured, and a measurement limiting means for limiting the measurement of the period of the advantageous gaming state by the period measuring means when a predetermined limiting condition is satisfied. The gaming machine K1 characterized by having the above.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player during the period from the end of the privileged game to the winning of the next big hit according to the lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766 (Ab. 2012). By the way, since the above-mentioned gaming machine is configured to set the period until the number of lottery reaches a predetermined number as the period in which the advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is set, the advantageous gaming state is set. There was a problem that the period could be easily predicted. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having further improved the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine K1, since the measurement for a predetermined period in which the advantageous gaming state is set can be restricted by the measurement limiting means, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set can be extended. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player with an unexpected game, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine K1, the second determination means capable of executing the second determination, the second display means for displaying the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means, and the second display means thereof. When the second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for a predetermined second period and the first identification information for showing a specific first determination result are displayed on the first display means. , When the second identification information for executing the first privilege game and indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the privilege game execution means for executing the second privilege game and the privilege game execution means. The second identification information can be dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. The gaming machine K2 is characterized in that, when the determination result of the second determination means is the specific second determination result, the predetermined restriction condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1, the second determination means can be dynamically displayed while the first identification information is dynamically displayed. When the determination result of is a specific second determination result, a predetermined restriction condition is satisfied. Thereby, the first determination by the first determination means can be executed in a state where the measurement of the period of the advantageous gaming state is restricted. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine K2, the measurement limiting means is in the advantageous gaming state by the period measuring means while the dynamic display corresponding to the specific second determination result is executed by the second dynamic display means. A gaming machine K3 characterized in that it limits the measurement of a period.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1, the period of the advantageous gaming state is measured while the dynamic display corresponding to the specific second determination result is executed by the second dynamic display means. Is restricted. Therefore, the first determination by the first determination means can be executed in a state where the measurement of the period of the advantageous gaming state is restricted. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

One of the gaming machines K1 to K3 is characterized by having a notification means for notifying that the measurement limiting means limits the measurement of the period of the advantageous gaming state by the period measuring means. Game machine K4.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the notification means notifies that the measurement of the period is restricted by the measurement limiting means, so that the game can be easily understood by the player. It has the effect of being able to provide.

<Characteristic L group> (Small hit RUSH with different end conditions)
A first determination means capable of executing the first determination, a first display means displaying the first identification information for showing the determination result by the first determination means, and a second determination means capable of executing the second determination. And the second display means for displaying the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for showing the specific first determination result to the first display means. The privilege of executing the first privilege game when displayed, and executing the second privilege game when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. In a gaming machine having a game executing means, a first gaming state that makes it easier to execute the second determination than the first determination, and a second that makes it easier to execute the first determination than the second determination. It has a gaming state setting means capable of setting a gaming state, and the gaming state setting means is when a predetermined first condition is satisfied or when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. The first game state is set in the above, and the first game state is set based on the condition of the second condition, rather than the first game state is set based on the condition of the first condition. The gaming machine L1 is characterized in that the case where the gaming state is set makes it easier for the first gaming state to continue.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine capable of setting an advantageous gaming state (latent state) that is advantageous to the player by performing a game in which a plurality of gaming states are gradually shifted according to the lottery result (for example,). Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-058267). By the way, since the above-mentioned gaming machine has a single end condition of the advantageous gaming state, the ease of continuing the set advantageous gaming state cannot be different, and the player in the advantageous gaming state cannot be different. There is a problem that the game to be provided becomes monotonous and the motivation to play is reduced. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having further improved the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine L1, the first gaming state can be set because the first gaming state that is easy to continuously set and the first gaming state that is difficult to continuously set can be set by the gaming state setting means. Even after the game is played, it is possible to play the game while expecting that the first game state will continue for a long period of time, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine L1, the gaming state setting means sets a gaming state different from the first gaming state when a predetermined end condition is satisfied in the state where the first gaming state is set. The case of setting the first gaming state based on the satisfaction of the second condition is better than the case of setting the first gaming state based on the satisfaction of the first condition. A gaming machine L2 characterized in that the conditions are difficult to be satisfied.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L1, the first game state is set based on the second condition being satisfied, rather than the first gaming state being set based on the first condition being satisfied. When the gaming state is set, it is possible to make it more difficult to end the first gaming state. Therefore, since it is possible to set a first game state that is easy to end and a first game state that is difficult to end for the player, the first game state that is difficult to end even after the first game state is set. It is possible to play the game while hoping that the game state is set, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine L2 has an end condition setting means capable of setting a first end condition and a second end condition different from the first end condition as the predetermined end condition, and the second condition is satisfied. The gaming machine L3 is characterized in that when the first gaming state is set based on the above, the first ending condition is not satisfied.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L2, when the first gaming state is set based on the satisfaction of the second condition, the first ending condition is not satisfied, so that it is difficult to end. The first gaming state can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game in order to satisfy the second condition.

In the gaming machine L3, the ending condition setting means sets the second ending condition when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result. L4.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L3, a second end condition is set when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result. As a result, when the first gaming state is terminated based on the satisfaction of the second termination condition, the privileged game can be provided. Therefore, even if the first game state ends, the player can be given a privilege, so that there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

The gaming machine L5 is characterized in that the gaming machine L3 or L4 has a notifying means for notifying that the first gaming state has been set based on the satisfaction of the second condition.

According to the gaming machine L5, since the notification means notifies that the first end condition is not satisfied, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

<Characteristic M group> (Set the fall invalid period of special figure high accuracy)
A first determination means capable of executing the first determination, a first display means for displaying the first identification information for showing the determination result by the first determination means, and a first determination specific to the first display means. The privilege game execution means for executing the first privilege game when the first identification information for showing the result is displayed, and the first determination means executed when a predetermined setting condition is satisfied. In a gaming machine having a gaming state setting means capable of setting an advantageous gaming state in which the result of the first determination is more likely to be the specific first determination result than the normal gaming state, the advantageous gaming state is achieved by the gaming state setting means. When the predetermined transition condition is satisfied in the state in which is set, the gaming state transition means for shifting the gaming state from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state and the establishment of the predetermined transition condition are restricted. A gaming machine M1 characterized by having a transition condition limiting means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, according to the lottery result, a predetermined lottery (probability change state) is set to be advantageous to the player during the period from the end of the privileged game to the next big hit. A gaming machine has been proposed that terminates an advantageous gaming state when a player wins a fall lottery. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-152). By the way, since the above-mentioned gaming machine is configured so that the falling lottery is executed based on the execution of the winning / failing lottery of the game, there is a sense of danger that the advantageous gaming state is always terminated for the player. There was a problem that it was not possible to play the game with peace of mind. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine in which a player can play a game with peace of mind and the interest of the game is improved.

According to the gaming machine M1, the transition from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state can be restricted by the transition condition limiting means, so that the gaming state shifts from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state. It is possible to set a non-playing period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a period for the player to play the game with peace of mind.

In the gaming machine M1, the first determination means executes the first determination when a predetermined first determination condition is satisfied, and when the predetermined first determination condition is satisfied, the first determination condition is satisfied. 1 It has a special determination means capable of executing a special determination different from the determination, and when the determination result by the special determination means is a specific special determination result, the predetermined transition condition is satisfied. Characterized gaming machine M2.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1, a special determination is executed when the first determination condition is satisfied, and a predetermined transition condition is determined when the determination result is a specific special determination result. Is established. Therefore, since the determination by the first determination means and the determination by the special determination means can be set in association with each other, there is an effect that an easy-to-understand game can be provided.

In the gaming machine M1, when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific second determination result different from the specific first determination result, the second privilege game different from the first privilege game is executed. A second privilege game execution means and a variable ball entry means in which the game ball is variably operated to an open state in which the game ball can enter the inside when the second privilege game is executed by the second privilege game execution means. , A variable control means for controlling the variable operation of the variable ball entry means, a specific area through which the game ball can pass is provided inside the variable ball entry means, and the game ball can pass through the specific area. The gaming machine M3, characterized in that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied when the machine passes through.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M1, a predetermined transition condition is satisfied when the gaming ball passes through a specific area. Therefore, since the transition condition can be satisfied at a timing different from the determination timing of the first determination means, it is possible to provide the player with a surprising game. Further, since it is possible to determine whether or not the transition condition is satisfied based on the game result of whether or not the player fires the game ball, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate can be increased.

In the gaming machine M3, the variable control means has a first variable control in which a ball entering the variable ball entry means easily passes through the specific region, and a first variable control means in which the ball is less likely to pass through the specific region than the first variable control. 2 Variable control and a gaming machine M4 characterized by being configurable.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M3, the variable control means provides a first variable control in which a ball entering the variable ball entry means easily passes through a specific region and a second variable control in which it is difficult to pass. Since it is possible to set and, it is possible to provide a player with a surprising game. Further, since it is possible to determine whether or not the transition condition is satisfied based on the game result of whether or not the player fires the game ball, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate can be increased.

The gaming machine M4 is characterized in that the gaming machine M4 has a notification means for notifying that the second variable control is set by the variable control means.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M4, it is notified that the second variable control is set by the notification means, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. be.

<Characteristic N group> (Selection of small hit games)
A first determination means capable of executing the first determination, a first display means for displaying the first identification information for showing the determination result by the first determination means, and a first determination specific to the first display means. When the first identification information for showing the result is displayed, the privilege game executing means for executing the first privilege game and the determination result of the first determination means are different from the specific first determination result. In the case of the second determination result of the above, the second privilege game is executed by the second privilege game execution means for executing the second privilege game different from the first privilege game and the second privilege game execution means. In this case, it has a variable ball entry means in which the game ball is variably operated to an open state in which the game ball can enter the inside, and a variable control means for controlling the variable operation of the variable ball entry means. A specific area through which a game ball can pass is provided inside the variable ball entry means, and a gaming state setting means capable of setting a disadvantageous gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player when the game ball passes through the specific area is provided. The gaming machine N1 characterized by being.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There has been proposed a gaming machine capable of setting an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to a player when an advantageous privileged game is executed and a gaming ball passes through a specific area during the privileged game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-152). In the above-mentioned gaming machine, since the advantageous gaming state is set when the gaming ball passes through the specific area, it is intended to pay attention to whether or not the gaming ball passes through the specific area. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having further improved the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine N1, when the gaming ball passes through a specific area, a disadvantageous gaming state is set, so that there is an effect that a novel game property can be provided to the player.

In the gaming machine N1, the variable control means has a first variable control in which a ball entering the variable entry means easily passes through the specific region, and a first variable control means in which the ball is less likely to pass through the specific region than the first variable control. 2 Variable control and a gaming machine N2 characterized in that it can be set.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N1, the first variable control in which the ball entering the variable ball entering means easily passes through the specific region by the variable control means, and the first variable control thereof Since either of the second variable control that is difficult to pass through the specific area is set, the launched game ball can pass through the specific area when the game ball is launched according to the variable control content to be executed. Gender can be different. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the enjoyment of the player deciding whether or not to launch the game ball.

In the gaming machine N2, the second privilege game executed by the second privilege game executing means has a notification means capable of notifying that the second variable control is set by the variable control means. A gaming machine N3 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine N2, the notification means notifies that the second variable control is set, so that when the player decides whether or not to launch the gaming ball. Information that can be used as a reference can be provided. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the enjoyment of the player deciding whether or not to launch the game ball.

In any of the game machines N1 to the game machine N3, the invalid means has a detection means for detecting that the game ball has passed through the specific area and an invalid means for invalidating the detection result by the detection means. The gaming machine N4 is characterized in that the detection result by the detection means is invalidated based on the determination result of the first determination means.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines N1 to N3, the detection result by the detecting means can be invalidated by the invalidating means, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine N4, the measuring means for measuring the number of gaming balls detected by the detecting means during the period in which the detection result by the detecting means is invalidated by the invalid means, and the measurement result of the measuring means. The gaming machine N5, characterized by having a measurement result notification means for notifying based information.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N4, the measurement result notification means notifies the information based on the measurement result of the measuring means during the period in which the detection result by the detecting means is invalidated, so that the information is invalid. The player can grasp the number detected by the detection means during the period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily feel the superiority.

<Characteristic O group> (End the time reduction based on the condition that was satisfied earlier among multiple conditions)
The first determination means capable of executing the first determination, the first display means for displaying the determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means. The privilege of executing the first privilege game when the first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying and the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result are stopped and displayed on the first display means. A game executing means, a first gaming state in which the first determination is easily executed, a second gaming state in which the first determination is more difficult to be executed than the first gaming state, and a game state setting means that can be set. The possessed gaming machine has an ending means for terminating the first gaming state when a predetermined first ending condition is satisfied or when a second ending condition different from the first ending condition is satisfied. The ending means is characterized in that the first gaming state is terminated based on the previously established termination condition among the first termination condition and the second termination condition. O1.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, a gaming machine capable of changing the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-12907). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the subtraction of the period in which the advantageous gaming state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set is the timing at which the special symbol changes, so that the advantageous gaming state should be set to the maximum. There was a problem that the player could not do it and the player was uncomfortable. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having further improved the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine O1, a first ending condition and a second ending condition are provided as conditions for ending the first gaming state, and when any of the ending conditions is terminated, the first gaming state is terminated. , There is an effect that the first gaming state can be surely ended.

In the gaming machine O1, the second determination means capable of executing the second determination, the second display means for displaying the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means, and the second display means thereof. The second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for a predetermined second period, and the privilege game execution means for showing the second display means a specific second determination result. When the second identification information is displayed, the second privilege game is executed, and the second movement is performed while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. The second identification information can be dynamically displayed by the target display means, and when the first determination means is executed, the first termination condition is satisfied and the second determination means is executed. The gaming machine O2 is characterized in that the second termination condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O1, the first termination condition is satisfied based on the first determination by the first determination means, and the second termination condition is established based on the second determination by the second determination means. This is a gaming machine capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information by the second dynamic display means while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. However, there is an effect that the first gaming state can be appropriately terminated.

In the gaming machine O2, the first execution number measuring means for measuring the number of executions of the first determination means, the second execution number measuring means for measuring the execution number of the second determination means, and the first execution number measuring means. The total number of times the first determination means is executed and the total number of times the first determination means is executed as the first period in which the first gaming state is continuously set. , The first period setting means for setting a predetermined number of times including the number of executions of the second determination means, and the dynamic display corresponding to the case where the number of executions of the first determination means becomes the predetermined number of times are being executed. The second determination means is executed by the second determination means in a state of having an execution determination means for determining that the slingshot is being executed and the state determination means determining that the dynamic display is being executed. When this is done, the gaming machine O3 is characterized in that the second termination condition is satisfied before the second determination is executed.

According to the game O3, in addition to the effect of the game machine O2, the second end condition can be satisfied even during the dynamic display in which the first end condition can be satisfied, so that the first game state can be appropriately satisfied. Has the effect of being able to terminate.

In the gaming machine O3, the first termination condition is that the number of executions of the first determination means is the number of executions of the first determination means after the dynamic display corresponding to the case where the number of executions of the first determination means becomes the predetermined number of times is completed. The gaming machine O4 is characterized in that it is established at any time until the first determination corresponding to the case where the number of times exceeds a predetermined number is executed.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O3, the first determination is made after the dynamic display corresponding to the case where the first determination means is executed a predetermined number of times is completed. Since the first determination corresponding to the case where the number of times of execution of the means becomes larger than the predetermined number of times is executed is established, the predetermined first period can be set longer. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from being uncomfortable.

In the gaming machine O4, the third determination means capable of executing the third determination, the third display means for displaying the third identification information for showing the determination result by the third determination means, and the third display means thereof. When the third dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the third identification information and the third identification information for indicating a specific third determination result to the third display means are stopped and displayed, the third privilege. It has a third privilege game execution means for executing a game, and the third determination means sets the second game state when the first game state is set by the game state setting means. The gaming machine O5 is characterized in that it is easier to execute than in the case of the above.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine O4, the first gaming state is set because it has a third determination means that makes it easier to execute when the first gaming state is set. By lengthening the period, the period during which the third determination means can be easily executed can be lengthened. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from being uncomfortable.

<Characteristic P group> (Special figure changes even during the opening period of the jackpot game)
A first determination means capable of executing the first determination, a first display means displaying the first identification information for showing the determination result by the first determination means, and a second determination means capable of executing the second determination. And the second display means for displaying the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for showing the specific first determination result to the first display means. Based on what is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and the second privilege game is based on the fact that the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. The second determination means is a gaming machine having the privileged game executing means for executing the above, and the second determination means is the second determination during a specific first period of the period during which the first privileged game is being executed. The gaming machine P1 is characterized in that the second determination is not executed in the second period different from the first period.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a plurality of types of special symbols are provided and a plurality of special symbols can be changed at the same time (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-226399). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, a plurality of special symbols are changed at the same time to allow a player to efficiently perform a lottery, but when one of the special symbols is won, the other special symbol is won. Since it is configured so that the fluctuation of is not executed, there is a problem that the motivation for playing is reduced when the lottery efficiency is lowered. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machines to suppress a decrease in motivation to play and to provide a gaming machine with an improved interest in playing.

According to the gaming machine P1, since the second determination can be executed while the first privilege game is being executed, it is possible to make the player execute more determinations. Therefore, there is an effect that the game efficiency can be improved.

In the gaming machine P1, the variable ball-entry means that can be varied between the first state in which the gaming ball can enter and the second state in which the gaming ball is more difficult to enter than the first state, and the first privilege. When the game is executed, the variable ball-entry means has a variable control means that variably controls the variable ball-entry means into the first state and the second state, and the variable ball-entry means is in the second state by the variable control means. The gaming machine P2, wherein the period variable to the above is the first period.

According to the gaming machine P2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1. That is, since the second determination is executed using the period during which the first privilege game is being executed and the game ball cannot enter the variable ball entry means, the game result of the first privilege game can be understood. The second determination can be performed without difficulty. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

In the gaming machine P1 or P2, the second determination means is more suitable for the player than the advantageous second determination result and the advantageous second privilege game executed based on the advantageous second determination result as the second determination result. It is possible to discriminate from the disadvantageous second determination result in which the disadvantageous second privilege game is executed, and the determination result of the second determination means executed during the first privilege game is the advantage second determination. The gaming machine P3, characterized in that it has a discrimination limiting means for limiting the result.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines P1 or P2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the second determination executed during the first privilege game is restricted by the determination limiting means so that the determination result does not become an advantageous second determination result, an excessive privilege is given to the player. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a situation. Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided to the player.

The gaming machine P3 is characterized by having a variable limiting means that limits the variable means from the second state to the first state by the variable control means during the disadvantageous second privilege game. Gaming machine P4.

According to the gaming machine P4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P3. That is, it is possible to limit the variable restriction means from changing the first privilege game to the first state while the disadvantageous second privilege game is being executed based on the determination result of the second determination means. can. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the provision of a game that is difficult to understand due to the duplicate execution of a plurality of privilege games.

In the gaming machine P4, when the variable limiting means restricts the variable adjustment of the first privileged game to the first state, the first privileged game is variable to the first state. Characterized gaming machine P5.

According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine P4, even if the variable limiting means restricts the first privileged game from being variable to the first state, the first state of the first privileged game Since the length of the period is not variable, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Further, while the second period of the first privilege game is set, there is an effect that the game can be enthusiastically performed in order to make the second determination until the end.

In any of the gaming machines P2 to P5, the variable control means variably controls the variable ball entry means so as to be in the second state when the first privilege game is executed. The gaming machine P6 is characterized in that the period from the execution of the first privileged game to the state in which the variable ball-entry means is in the first state is the first period.

According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines P2 to P5, the following effects are played. That is, since the second determination can be executed immediately after the first privilege game is executed, the second determination can be continuously executed from the period before the first privilege game is executed. This has the effect that the second determination can be executed during the first privilege game without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In the gaming machine P6, the first period is different from the second dynamic display setting means for dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the determination result of the second determination means for a predetermined period as the first privilege game. It has a first privilege game setting means capable of setting a plurality of the first privilege games, and the privilege game granting means grants the first privilege game set by the first privilege game setting means. The first privilege game setting means is at least longer than the period for dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the determination result of the second determination means set by the second dynamic display setting means. A shortened first privilege game in which the first period, which is shorter than the normal first privilege game in which the first period is set and the period for dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the determination result of the second determination means, is set. And, the gaming machine P7 characterized in that it can be set.

According to the gaming machine P7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P6. That is, when the first privilege game is normally set by the first privilege game setting means, it becomes possible to execute the second privilege game based on the determination by the second determination means during the first period, and the shortened first. When the privilege game is set, it can be configured so that it becomes difficult to execute the second privilege game based on the determination by the second determination means during the first period. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player interested in the first period, which is difficult to make the player interested in the privilege game, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage. effective.

In any of the gaming machines P1 to P7, there is a second dynamic display setting means for dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the determination result of the second determination means for a predetermined period, and the first privilege game is executed. The gaming machine P8 is characterized by having a forced stop means for forcibly stopping and displaying the identification information for showing the determination result of the second determination means that is dynamically displayed.

According to the gaming machine P8, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines P1 to P7, the following effects are played. That is, when the first privilege game is executed, the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the determination result of the second determination means is forcibly stopped and displayed, so that a new dynamic display is performed during the first period. Can be facilitated to start. Therefore, it is possible to easily provide the player with the determination by the second determination means executed during the first period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines P1 to P8, there is a specific area through which the gaming ball can pass, and the privileged game granting means indicates that the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result. The first privilege game is given when the game ball passes through the specific area while the identification information for the purpose is stopped and displayed, and the second determination means determines the first determination means. It is assumed that the period from when the identification information for indicating that the result is the specific first determination result is stopped and displayed until the game ball passes through the specific area is also during the first period. A gaming machine P9 characterized in that it executes a determination.

<Derivation of characteristic Pa group> (Small hit RUSH using special electric start port)
The determination means capable of performing the determination, the display means for displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the predetermined identification information for indicating the specific determination result are displayed on the display means. Based on this, based on the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game and the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the first state from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter is the first state. The variable ball-entry means that is variable to the second state in which the game ball is easier to enter, and the variable ball-in means to the second state by the privilege game execution means after the predetermined identification information is displayed. The gaming machine Pa1 is characterized by having a special game executing means capable of executing a special game that changes the variable ball entering means to the second state until the variable is changed.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a plurality of types of special symbols are provided and a plurality of special symbols can be changed at the same time (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-226399). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, a plurality of special symbols are changed at the same time to allow the player to efficiently draw a lottery. Since it is not possible to grant a privileged game, there is a problem that the interest of the game is reduced. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having an improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine Pa1, the variable ball-entry means can be changed to the second state by the special game execution means before the variable ball-entry means is changed to the second state by the privilege game execution means. , It is possible to provide a player with a surprising game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine Pa1, from the first state in which the ball can enter and the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter based on the ball entering the ball, the game ball is more than the first state. Has a second variable ball-entry means that is variable to a second state that facilitates ball entry, and the special game execution means is based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second variable ball-entry means. A gaming machine Pa2 characterized by executing a special game.

According to the gaming machine Pa2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Pa1. That is, since the special game is executed by inserting the game ball into the second variable ball entry means, there is an effect that an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player.

The gaming machine Pa2 has a special game setting means for setting the content of the special game executed by the special game executing means, and the special game setting means allows a game ball to enter the second variable ball entering means. A gaming machine characterized in that the variable ball-entry means sets one special game from a plurality of special games having different preparation periods until the variable ball entry means is changed to the second state. Pa3.

According to the gaming machine Pa3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Pa2. That is, depending on the special game to be executed, the preparation period from when the game ball enters the second variable entry means to when the variable entry means is changed to the second state can be different. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed while expecting that the special game with a short preparation period is executed.

The gaming machine Pa3 has a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state, and the special game setting means is said by the gaming state setting means. Pa4 is a gaming machine characterized in that when a first gaming state is set, it is easy to set a privileged game having a shorter preparation period than when the second gaming state is set.

According to the gaming machine Pa4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Pa3. That is, when the first game state is set, a short preparation period can be easily set, so that the concentrated special game can be executed during the period when the first game state is set, and the game can be executed. It has the effect of improving the interest.

In the gaming machine Pa4, the gaming machine Pa5 is characterized in that the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state based on the determination result by the determination means being the specific determination result. ..

According to the gaming machine Pa5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Pa4. That is, since the presence / absence of the privileged game and the setting of the gaming state are executed based on the determination result of the determination means, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the determination result of the determination means. ..

The gaming machine Pa5 has a waiting period setting means for setting a waiting period from the display of the predetermined determination result on the display means to the execution of the privileged game, and the special game setting means has. The gaming machine Pa6 is characterized in that when the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the special game in which the preparation period shorter than the waiting period is set is set.

According to the gaming machine Pa6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Pa5. That is, when the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the special game in which the preparation period shorter than the waiting period is set is set, so that the special game can be reliably executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic Q group> (Derived from P group)
A first determination means capable of executing the first determination, a first display means displaying the first identification information for showing the determination result by the first determination means, and a second determination means capable of executing the second determination. And the second display means for displaying the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for showing the specific first determination result to the first display means. Based on what is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and the second privilege game is based on the fact that the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. In a gaming machine having a privileged game executing means for executing the above, the second determination means makes the second determination during a specific first period of the period during which the first privileged game is being executed. The gaming machine Q1 which is executed and is characterized in that the second determination different from the first period is executed and the second determination is not executed.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a plurality of types of special symbols are provided and a plurality of special symbols can be changed at the same time (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-226399). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, a plurality of special symbols are changed at the same time to allow the player to efficiently draw a lottery. Since it is not possible to grant a privileged game, there is a problem that the interest of the game is reduced. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having an improved interest in gaming.

<Characteristic R group> (V winning rate is different depending on the fluctuation time of the special figure.)
By a discrimination means that performs discrimination when the discrimination condition is satisfied, a dynamic display means that causes the display means to dynamically display identification information for showing the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, and a dynamic display means thereof. A bonus game is granted based on the dynamic display period setting means for setting the dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the identification information and the stop display of the identification information indicating the first discrimination result on the display means. The game ball enters based on the fact that the special game granting means and the identification information indicating the second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result as a result of the discrimination by the discrimination means are stopped and displayed on the display means. It has a variable ball entry means that can be changed from a difficult first state to a second state that makes it easy to enter, and a specific area through which a game ball that has entered the variable entry means can pass. The means grants the privilege game even when the gaming ball passes through the specific area, and the dynamic display period setting means has the first period and the first period as the dynamic display period. It is possible to set a longer second period, and it is easier for the game ball to pass through the specific area when the second period is set than when the first period is set. The gaming machine R1 characterized by.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a specific game is executed when the lottery result is a specific lottery result, and a privilege game is executed even when the ball passes through a specific area during the specific game (for example). , Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-192067). By the way, since the above-mentioned gaming machine enables the privileged game to be executed at a plurality of triggers, it is possible to improve the interest of the game, but depending on the type of the specific game to be executed, the player can move to a specific area. Since the passing ratio of the ball is variable, the lottery result has a great influence on the content of the subsequent game, and there is a problem that the interest of the game is lowered. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having an improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine R1, the ease of passing the game ball to the specific area can be made different depending on the dynamic display period set by the dynamic display period setting means. There is no such thing, and the player can be made to pay attention until the timing when the identification information for showing the discrimination result is stopped and displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine R1, a period group storage means having a plurality of period groups in which a plurality of dynamic display periods that can be set by the dynamic display period setting means are defined, and a plurality of period group storage means stored in the period group storage means. It has a period group selection means for selecting one period group from the period group, and the dynamic display period setting means is defined in the one period group selected by the period group selection means. One of the plurality of dynamic display periods is set, and the period group storage means corresponds to the first period group and the second period rather than the first period group. The gaming machine R2 is characterized by having at least a second period group including a large number of dynamic display periods.

According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second period group in which the second period is easily set is set, the second period can be set more easily than in the case where the first period group is set, so that the second period can be set easily. While the group is set, there is an effect that the player can play a game that is advantageous to the player with peace of mind.

The gaming machine R2 has a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state as a gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state, and the period group selection means sets the gaming state. The gaming machine R3 is characterized in that the period group is selected according to the gaming state set by the means.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the period group is set according to the gaming state, once the second period group advantageous to the player is set, the second period group is set until a different gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. The two-period group will continue. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In the gaming machine R3, the dynamic display period setting means has the first discrimination result and the second discrimination result as a result of the discrimination by the discrimination means in a state where the second period group is set. The gaming machine R4 is characterized in that a special dynamic display period can be set based on the fact that the identification information indicating a different third determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means.

According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display period set when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the third discrimination result allows the player to understand that the currently set period group is the second period group advantageous to the player. Can be made to. Therefore, even if the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a discrimination result in which the privileged game cannot be executed, there is an effect that the player can be interested and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic S group> (R derivative)
By a discrimination means that performs discrimination when the discrimination condition is satisfied, a dynamic display means that causes the display means to dynamically display the identification information for showing the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, and the dynamic display means thereof. A bonus game is granted based on the dynamic display period setting means for setting the dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the identification information and the stop display of the identification information indicating the first determination result on the display means. The game ball enters based on the fact that the special game granting means and the identification information indicating the second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result as a result of the discrimination by the discrimination means are stopped and displayed on the display means. It has a variable ball entry means that can be changed from a difficult first state to a second state that makes it easy to enter, and a specific area through which a game ball that has entered the variable entry means can pass. The means grants the privilege game even when the game ball passes through the specific area, and the dynamic display period setting means has the first period and the first period as the dynamic display period. It is possible to set a longer second period, and it is easier for the game ball to pass through the specific area when the second period is set than when the first period is set. The gaming machine S1 characterized by.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a specific game is executed when the lottery result is a specific lottery result, and a privilege game is executed even when the ball passes through a specific area during the specific game (for example). , Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-192067). By the way, since the above-mentioned gaming machine enables the privileged game to be executed at a plurality of triggers, it is possible to improve the interest of the game, but depending on the type of the specific game to be executed, the player can move to a specific area. Since the passing ratio of the ball is variable, the lottery result has a great influence on the content of the subsequent game, and there is a problem that the interest of the game is lowered. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having an improved interest in gaming.

<Characteristic T group> (3 loops of 1 type and 2 types)
The discrimination means for discriminating when the discrimination condition is satisfied, the display means for displaying the discrimination information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the identification for showing the first discrimination result as the discrimination result on the display means. When the information is stopped and displayed, the privileged game granting means for granting the privileged game that is advantageous to the player, and the first game state and its A gaming state setting means capable of setting a second gaming state in which the privileged game is more likely to be granted than in the first gaming state, and a third gaming state in which the privileged game is less likely to be granted than in the first gaming state, and the above-mentioned game state setting means. Based on the fact that the identification information indicating the second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result is stopped and displayed on the display means as the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, the period during which the game ball can pass through the specific area is set. It has a possible period setting means, and the privilege game granting means grants the privilege game even when the gaming ball passes through the specific area, and the gaming machine is in the second gaming state. When the privilege game is granted in the state where is set, either the first game state or the second game state is more than the third game state after the end of the privilege game by the game state setting means. A gaming machine T1 characterized by being easy to set.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, when the lottery result is a specific lottery result, a specific game is executed, and when the ball passes through the specific area during the specific game, the privilege game is also executed, and the ball passes through the specific area. A gaming machine capable of setting an easy gaming state has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-192067). By the way, since the above-mentioned gaming machine enables the privileged gaming to be executed at a plurality of triggers, it has been possible to improve the interest of the gaming, but the gaming state in which the ball easily passes through a specific area is present. There was a problem that the game might end immediately and the interest of the game would be reduced. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having an improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine T1, when the second gaming state is set, the third gaming state is not set when the next privileged game is granted, so that it is easy to grant the privileged games one after another. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind in a state where the privilege game is easily given.

In the gaming machine T1, the gaming state setting means has a privilege game in a state where the first gaming state is set, as compared with a case where the privilege game is given in the state where the second gaming state is set. The gaming machine T2, characterized in that it is easier to set the third gaming state after the privileged gaming is completed.

According to the gaming machine T2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T2. That is, when the first game state is set, the third game state is easily set based on the grant of the privilege game, so that the game state advantageous to the player is set for a long period of time. Can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an appropriate game.

In the gaming machine T1 or T2, the gaming state setting means includes a first privilege game, which is given based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means among the privilege games, and the specific area. It is characterized in that the game state set according to the type of the privilege game given by the privilege game granting means is different from the second privilege game given based on the passage of the game ball. The gaming machine T3.

According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T2 or T3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the game state to be set can be different depending on whether the first privilege game is granted or the second privilege game is granted, which type of privilege game is executed for the player. You can be interested in whether it was done. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine T3, when the second gaming state is set, the gaming state setting means is more advantageous to the player when the second privilege game is given than when the first privilege game is given. A gaming machine T4 characterized by facilitating the setting of various gaming states.

According to the gaming machine T4, when the second gaming state is set, the player can be enthusiastically played the game so that the second privilege gaming is given. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine T3 or T4, in the state where the first gaming state is set, the player is given the first privilege game rather than the second privilege game. The gaming machine T5, which is characterized by facilitating the setting of an advantageous gaming state.

According to the gaming machine T5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T3 or T4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first game state is set, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game so that the player is given the first privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic U group> (Derived from T group)
The discrimination means for discriminating when the discrimination condition is satisfied, the display means for displaying the discrimination result indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the identification information indicating the specific discrimination result are stopped and displayed on the display means. In this case, after the privilege game granting means for granting the privileged game advantageous to the player and the privileged game granted by the privileged game granting means are completed, the first gaming state and the first gaming state A game state setting means capable of setting a second game state in which the privilege game is easily given and a third game state in which the privilege game is less likely to be given than the first game state, and a result of discrimination by the discrimination means. Based on the fact that the identification information indicating the second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, the game ball changes from the first state in which it is difficult to enter to the second state in which it is easy to enter. It has a variable ball-entry means that can be varied and a specific area through which the game ball that has entered the variable ball-entry means can pass, and the privilege game granting means is when the game ball passes through the specific area. Also, the privilege game is given, and when the privilege game is given while the second game state is set, the game state setting means is the first game after the privilege game is completed. A gaming machine U1 characterized in that any one of a state and the second gaming state can be easily set.

<Characteristic V group> (Small hit RUSH that does not require simultaneous fluctuation)
The first discriminating means capable of entering the game ball, the first discriminating means capable of executing the first discriminating based on the entering the ball into the first entering means, and the discriminating result by the first discriminating means are shown. The first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information for the purpose, the second ball entry means on which the game ball can enter, and the game ball entering the second ball entry means. The acquisition means for acquiring information based on the above, the second discrimination means capable of executing the second discrimination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the second for showing the discrimination result by the second discrimination means. A second dynamic display means that dynamically displays the identification information on the display means, a storage means that can store the information acquired by the acquisition means until the determination by the second discrimination means is executed, and the storage means. To the second privilege game granting means for granting the execution of the second privilege game when the second identification information for indicating the specific second discrimination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, and the second ball entry means. When the limiting means for restricting the entry of the gaming ball and the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result are stopped and displayed on the display means, at least the limiting means can be released. A gaming machine V1 characterized by having a first privilege game execution means for executing a first privilege game.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (time saving state) in which a ball can easily enter a specific entrance after the end of the privileged game according to the lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). Gazette). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that the ball can be easily entered into a specific entrance at any time during an advantageous gaming state, so that the gaming machine gets tired of the game at an early stage. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having further improved the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine V1, the ball can be entered into the ball-entry means only while the privilege game or the special privilege game is granted, so that the privilege game or the special privilege game is granted. There is an effect that the memory in the storage means can be restricted in the state where the memory is not used.

In the gaming machine V1, the second entry means in which the game ball can enter, the first position in which the game ball is allowed to enter the second entry means, and the entry of the game ball from the first position. It has a variable member that can be changed to a second position that regulates the ball, and the variable member is variably controlled when the privilege game or the special privilege game is executed. The gaming machine V2 is characterized in that the limiting means positions the variable member at the first position, and the limiting releasing means positions the variable member at the second position.

According to the gaming machine V2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the ease of entering the ball into the ball entry means can be changed according to the variable situation of the variable member executed in the privilege game or the special privilege game, the privilege game or the privilege game or The ball can be entered into the ball entry means in synchronization with the game of the special privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that the playability during the privilege game or the special privilege game can be improved.

In the gaming machine V1 or V2, it is easier to release the restriction by the restriction means by the restriction release means when the special privilege game is executed than when the privilege game is executed. Gaming machine V3.

According to the gaming machine V3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines V1 or V2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the ease of entering the ball into the ball entry means can be changed according to the type of the game in which the variable member is changed, the playability during the privilege game or the special privilege game is improved. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine V3, the gaming machine V4 is characterized in that the privileged game is more difficult to be executed than the special privileged game.

According to the gaming machine V4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, although the privilege game is more difficult to execute than the special privilege game, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the ball entry means during the game. Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically aim the player to execute the privileged game, and there is an effect that the operation of the game can be enhanced.

<Characteristic W group> (Ease of establishing multiple game conditions is variable depending on the character movement pattern)
A discriminant means capable of discriminating, a variable means variable from the first state to the second state when the discriminant result by the discriminant means is a specific discriminant result, and variable operation contents of the variable means are set. The variable operation setting means includes a variable operation setting means for controlling the variable operation means and a variable control means for controlling the variable operation content based on the variable operation content set by the variable operation setting means, and the variable control means is the first by the variable operation setting means. When 1 variable operation content is set, the variable operation means is variably controlled so that the first privilege is more easily given than the second privilege different from the first privilege, and the variable operation setting means. When a second variable operation content different from the first variable operation content is set, the variable means is variably controlled so that the second privilege is more easily given than the first privilege. The gaming machine W1 characterized by this.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (time saving state) in which a specific electric accessory is easily variably operated after the end of the privilege game according to the lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). .. By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machines, the privilege that can be given to the player by variably operating the electric accessory is always the same, and further, one privilege is given by different the variable operation contents of the electric accessory. Since it is only possible to set a state in which it is easy to play and a state in which it is difficult to play, there is a problem that the game gets tired early. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having further improved the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine W1, since the privilege to be given can be different based on the movable operation content set by the movable operation setting means, the player can pay attention to the variable state of the variable means. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine W1, the end condition setting means for setting a plurality of end conditions, the condition determination means for determining the establishment of the plurality of end conditions set by the end condition setting means, and the end condition by the condition determination means. Has a variable control end means for terminating the variable control of the variable means by the variable control means when it is determined that is satisfied, and is based on the fact that the specific end condition is satisfied among the plurality of end conditions. The gaming machine W2 is characterized in that when the variable control ending means ends the variable control, a special state is set in which the first privilege and the second privilege are easily given.

According to the gaming machine W2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine W1. That is, when the specific end condition is satisfied, the special state is set, so that the player can enthusiastically play the game so that the specific end condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine W2, the ball entering means, the second discriminating means capable of executing the second discriminating based on the ball entering the ball entering means, and the discriminating result by the second discriminating means are specific. A gaming machine W3 comprising a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game when it is a second determination result, wherein the first privilege is such that the second determination is executed.

According to the gaming machine W3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine W2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the second determination capable of executing the privilege game is given as the first privilege, the player is expected to set the first variable operation content in which the first privilege is easily given. You can play games while playing. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine W3, when the privileged game is executed by the privileged game executing means, the first state in which the gaming ball is difficult to enter is changed to the second state in which the gaming ball is easier to enter than the first state. The gaming machine W4 having a variable ball-entry means that can be operated, and the second privilege is that a game ball enters the variable ball-entry means.

According to the gaming machine W4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine W3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the privilege game is executed, the game can be performed while expecting that the second variable operation content in which the second privilege is easily given is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines W2 to W4, the ending condition setting means sets the granting of the first privilege as the specific ending condition of the gaming machine W5.

According to the gaming machine W5, in addition to the effect playing on any of the gaming machines W2 to W4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game while expecting that the first privilege is given so that the special state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic X group> (Can pass through during a hit game)
The discrimination is made by a first ball-entry means capable of entering a game ball, a discrimination condition-satisfying means for establishing a discrimination condition based on the game ball entering the first ball-entry means, and the discrimination condition-establishing means. The discrimination means capable of executing the discrimination when the condition is satisfied, the privilege game granting means for granting the privilege game based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result, and the privilege game granting means described above. Passing means that allow the game ball to pass while the privilege game is granted, judgment means that can execute a judgment based on the passage of the game ball through the passing means, and the judgment result is a specific judgment result. A variable means that is variably controlled from the first position to the second position based on the above, and when the variable means is in the second position, a gaming ball is inserted as compared with the case of the first position. It has a second ball-entry means that facilitates ball entry, and the discrimination condition-satisfying means is characterized in that the discrimination condition is satisfied even when a game ball enters the second ball-entry means. The gaming machine X1.

In the gaming machine X1, the second ball-entry means is provided at a position where a ball that has passed through the passing means can enter the gaming machine X2.

In the gaming machine X2, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for showing a determination result by the determination means and a dynamic display period for setting a period for dynamically displaying the identification information by the dynamic display means. The dynamic display period setting means has a setting means, and the dynamic display period setting means has a first period in which a ball that has passed through the passing means can enter the second ball entry means, and a ball entry rather than the first period. A gaming machine X3 characterized in that at least a difficult second period can be set.

In the gaming machine X3, the gaming machine X4 is characterized in that the first period is longer than the second period.

<Characteristic Y group> (Advantageous ending of Fuzu)
Having a determination means for executing the determination and a period determination means for determining a period for notifying the determination result by the determination means, the notification result for showing the specific determination result is notified. Based on this, in a gaming machine that is in an advantageous state advantageous to the player, the gaming machine has a setting means for setting a setting period until the next determination by the determination means can be executed after the advantageous state is completed. The gaming machine Y1 is characterized in that a first set period and a second set period that is more advantageous to the player than the first set period are set at least.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-226399). By the way, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous due to a long period until the hit game or the like is executed, which is advantageous to the player, and the game gets tired early. It has been required that the player can enjoy the game even during the period until the winning game is executed, and that the problem of getting tired of the game at an early stage is suppressed. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the player from getting bored of the game at an early stage.

According to the gaming machine Y1, when an advantageous state is set, the player can be expected to set a second setting period, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. effective.

The gaming machine Y1 has a first flow path through which the game ball can pass in the advantageous state, and when the second setting period is set, the first flow path is connected to the first flow path. 1 The gaming machine Y2 is characterized in that the gaming ball is configured to flow down more easily than when the set period is set.

According to the gaming machine Y2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Y1, when the second setting period is set, the gaming ball can be easily flowed down to the first flow path, and the second setting period is set. It has the effect of making you expect more to be set.

In the gaming machine Y1 or Y2, during the second setting period, the determination result by the next determination means in the advantageous state becomes the specific determination result and the advantageous state is reached, so that the first flow path is reached. The gaming machine Y3 is characterized in that it is set for a period in which the privilege is easily given by passing the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine Y3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Y1 or Y2, the setting of the second setting period can increase the value for setting the next advantageous state, and the advantageous state can be set. It has the effect of increasing expectations for being set.

In any of the gaming machines Y1 to Y3, the specific ball entering means is arranged at a position where the gaming ball flowing down the first flow path is possible, and when the gaming ball enters, at least a part of the privilege is given. A state setting means for setting a first state in which a pachinko ball can enter the specific ball entry means and a second state in which the ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. The gaming machine Y4 is characterized in that the second setting period is configured by a period during which the gaming ball can reach the specific ball-entry means during the period in which the first state is set.

According to the gaming machine Y4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines Y1 to Y3, it is easy for the gaming ball to reach the specific ball-entry means by setting the second setting period. Therefore, there is an effect that the expectation that the second setting period is set can be increased.

In the gaming machine Y4, a ball-entry means that allows a game ball to enter the ball in the advantageous state, and a specific determination means that executes a specific determination based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball-entry means. , A period determining means for determining a variable period for varying the period until the specific ball-entry means is set to the first state, based on the execution of the specific determination by the specific determining means. The gaming machine Y5 is characterized in that the period determining means is configured to be able to determine a period that is advantageous to the player even when the second setting period is not set.

According to the gaming machine Y5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Y4, even when the second setting period is not set by the period determining means, the period advantageous to the player is determined, which is advantageous to the player. There is an effect that it is possible to increase the state in which the player becomes tired of the game at an early stage, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

<Characteristic β group derivation> (advantageous per regular interval map)
The determination means for executing the determination, the period determination means for determining the period for notifying the determination result by the determination means, and the notification result for indicating the specific determination result are notified to the player. An advantageous state setting means for setting an advantageous advantageous state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a first flow path through which the game ball can pass when the advantageous state is set by the advantageous state setting means. The first flow path has a high probability of being able to pass when the interval at which the advantageous state is set is the first interval. Game machine β1.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-226399). By the way, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that further enhances the interest of gaming. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine with an improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine β1, when the interval in which the advantageous state is set is the first interval, the probability that it will be possible to pass through the first flow path is set high, so that after the advantageous state is executed, the next It has the effect of improving the interest of the game by making people interested in the intervals at which they are executed.

In the gaming machine β1, the ball-entry means on which the game ball can enter, the first position for guiding the game ball to the ball-entry means, and the second position for making it difficult to enter the ball-entry means. 2. The gaming machine β2, which comprises a variable means that can be changed, and the advantageous state setting means is for changing the variable means to the first position as the advantageous state.

According to the gaming machine β2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine β2, an advantageous state is set by changing the variable means to the first position, so that there is an effect that it is easy to understand that the advantageous state is achieved. ..

In the gaming machine β2, the advantageous state setting means cancels the setting of the advantageous state based on the fact that a predetermined number of game balls have entered the ball entry means when the advantageous state is set. The game is characterized in that, when the setting of the advantageous state is canceled, the gaming ball rolling on the predetermined range of the variable means is guided to the first flow path. Machine β3.

According to the gaming machine β3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine β2, it is possible to make the gaming ball on the variable means interested even when the advantageous state is released, and the expectation is also made for the cancellation of the advantageous state. It has the effect of being able to have it.

In any of the gaming machines β1 to β3, a specific region in which the gaming ball guided to the first flow path can enter is arranged, and the first state in which the gaming ball can enter the specific region. The state-variable means, which is set to the second state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the ball-in state, and the above-mentioned before the flow-down period in which the game ball flows down the first flow path elapses. The first variable control that changes the state-variable means to the first state and then changes to the second state, and the state-variable means that changes to the first state during the period when the flow-down period elapses. The gaming machine β4, characterized by having a variable control means for executing at least one of the second variable control.

According to the gaming machine β4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines β1 to β3, it can be expected that the second variable control is executed by the variable control means, and the effect of improving the interest of the game can be improved. be.

<Characteristic Z group> (attacker below the normal train)
A means for displaying a ball-entry means on which a game ball can enter, a determination means capable of executing a determination based on the entry into the ball-entry means, and identification information for indicating a determination result of the determination means. Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying, and privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. , A variable means that can be changed to a first state that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means and a second state that makes it more difficult for the game ball to enter the ball than the first state, and specific conditions. In a gaming machine having a variable control means that changes the variable means from the second state to the first state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, the variable means is in the first state. A specific flow path that is guided by the variable means and is variable to the second state before entering the first ball entry means, so that the game ball that has flowed down can enter the ball, and a specific flow thereof. It has a specific area in which a game ball flowing down the road can enter, and the privileged game execution means sets an entry state in which the game ball can enter the specific area until the end condition is satisfied. The gaming machine Z1 characterized in that the privileged gaming is executed.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-226399). By the way, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that further enhances the interest of gaming. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine with an improved interest in gaming.

According to the game machine Z1, even a game ball that could not be entered into the ball entry means by the variable means can be expected to enter the specific flow path, and the game can be played. Has the effect of improving.

The gaming machine Z1 has the dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period when the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display period determining means. The period is such that at least an advantageous dynamic display period in which the game ball easily enters the specific area and an unfavorable display period in which it is difficult to enter the specific area are set. Characterized gaming machine Z2.

According to the gaming machine Z2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Z1, the player can be interested in the dynamic display period of the identification information, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine Z1 or Z2, the privileged game executing means starts executing the setting of the ball entry state in the specific area according to a certain rule based on the execution start of the privileged game. Game machine Z3.

According to the gaming machine Z3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Z1 or Z2, a specific area is set to the ball entry state according to a certain rule based on the start of execution of the privilege game, so that it is fair to the player. It has the effect of keeping the sex constant.

<Characteristic AA group> (Special figure 2 production based on fluctuations)
A means for displaying a ball-entry means on which a game ball can enter, a determination means capable of executing a determination based on the entry into the ball-entry means, and identification information for indicating a determination result of the determination means. A dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information, a dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period for which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and a specific determination result on the display means. In a gaming machine having a specific ball-entry means that allows a game ball to enter until the end condition is satisfied when the identification information for indicating is stopped and displayed, the ball enters the specific ball-entry means. It has a detecting means capable of detecting a gaming ball flowing down a possible flow path and an effect executing means capable of executing an effect during the dynamic display period, and the effect executing means is the detecting means. The gaming machine AA1 characterized in that at least a part of the above-mentioned effect is executed based on the detection result by.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, when the lottery result is notified, the player can have high expectations for the lottery result by configuring the lottery result to be notified to the player after the effect suggesting the lottery result is executed for a predetermined period. A game machine has been proposed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-226399). By the way, since the effect is executed based on the lottery result determined in advance, the effect tends to be constant and the game becomes monotonous, and there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a player from getting tired of playing a game at an early stage.

According to the gaming machine AA1, a gaming ball flowing down a flow path that allows entry into a specific entry means is detected by the detection means, and at least a part of the effect executed based on the detection result is executed. Therefore, not only the dynamic display of the identification information but also the effect being executed can be executed so as to be variable by the flow of the game ball, the interest of the game is improved, and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. It has the effect of suppressing defects.

In the game machine AA1, at least the first dynamic display period set so that the game ball can easily enter the specific ball entry means is set in the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means. The gaming machine AA2 is characterized in that the effect executing means executes a specific effect on the condition that the first dynamic display period is determined.

According to the gaming machine AA2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AA1, the specific effect is executed on the condition that the first dynamic display period that is advantageous to the player is determined, so that the specific effect is executed. Is executed, there is an effect that it can be expected that the first dynamic display period is determined.

In the gaming machine AA2, the effect executing means is the same as the specific effect when the detection means does not detect the game ball even when the first dynamic display period is determined. Is a gaming machine AA3 characterized by performing different effects.

According to the gaming machine AA3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AA2, even when the first dynamic display period is determined, if the gaming ball is not detected by the detection means in the specific detection period, a specific effect is produced. Is not executed, so there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the execution of the specific effect is unnecessarily performed and the degree of expectation for the specific effect is lowered.

In any of the gaming machines AA1 to AA3, the specific entry means is provided with a specific area through which the entered game ball can pass, and based on passing through the specific area, the privileged game is played. The gaming machine AA4, characterized in that the setting for execution is executed.

According to the gaming machine AA4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines AA1 to AA3, the gaming ball passes through the specific area and the privileged game is executed when the gaming ball enters the specific entry means. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine AA4, a variable means that can be changed into a first state that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means and a second state that makes it more difficult for the game ball to enter the ball than the first state. And a variable control means that changes the variable means from the second state to the first state until the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the establishment of the specific condition, and the flow path is the variable means. Is guided to the variable means by being in the first state, and is changed to the second state before entering the first ball entry means so that the flowing game ball can flow in. AA5 gaming machine characterized by being played.

According to the gaming machine AA5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AA4, it is expected that the gaming ball that did not enter the ball entering means will flow into the flow path by changing the variable means. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine AA5, the specific entry means is configured so that a gaming ball that has flowed down the flow path and entered can easily pass through the specific area. ..

According to the gaming machine AA6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AA5, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation of passing through a specific area by flowing down the flow path, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AB group> (Public train non-winning balls can win special trains)
The first discriminating means capable of entering the game ball, the first discriminating means capable of executing the first discrimination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entering means, and the first discriminating means thereof. The first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information for showing the discrimination result on the display means for a predetermined period, the first state in which the game ball can enter, and the first state thereof. When the first variable ball-entry means that can be changed to the second state in which it becomes difficult to enter the ball and the discrimination result by the first discrimination means are specific discrimination results, the first variable ball-entry means is referred to as the second. A first variable control means that changes from a state to the first state, a first taxiway that can guide a game ball to the first variable ball entry means, and a second taxiway that allows the game ball to enter. A second discrimination means capable of performing a second discrimination based on a ball entering means, a game ball entering the second ball entering means, and a second discrimination for showing the discrimination result by the second discrimination means. A second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying information on the display means for a predetermined period, and a first state provided in the first taxiway where a game ball can enter and a first state thereof. When the second variable ball-entry means that can be changed to the second state in which it becomes difficult to enter the ball and the discrimination result by the second discrimination means are specific discrimination results, the second variable ball-entry means is referred to as the second variable ball-entry means. A game having a second variable control means for varying from a state to the first state, wherein the first variable ball entry means is the first lead without entering the second variable ball entry means. A gaming machine AB1 characterized in that a gaming ball flowing down a road can enter.

Here, for a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a variable display is executed for a predetermined period based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening, and the gaming ball is won to the first symbol and the second starting winning opening. There is a second symbol whose variation display is executed for a predetermined period based on the above, and each symbol can be varied at the same time. In such a gaming machine, when a predetermined lottery result (for example, a small hit) is obtained as a lottery result of the second symbol, a small privilege game (for example, a small hit game) that can give a small privilege to the player is provided. Some are configured to be executed, and a gaming state in which the lottery of the second symbol is easily executed and a gaming state in which it is difficult to be executed can be set. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-39398).

In such a conventional gaming machine, by making the length of the fluctuation time of the second symbol different, it is possible to set a gaming state in which the lottery of the second symbol is easy to be executed and a gaming state in which the lottery of the second symbol is difficult to be executed, as a result. , Since it is configured to set a game state in which the small privilege game is easy to be executed and a game state in which it is difficult to be executed, for example, in a state where the lottery of the second symbol is easy to be performed, the small privilege game is given to the player. There was a problem that it was not possible to make detailed settings such as different amounts of benefits, and the interest in the game was reduced. The purpose is to solve the above-exemplified problems.

According to the gaming machine AB, the number of gaming balls reaching the first variable entry means can be changed according to the situation of the second variable entry means, so that the number of balls reaching the first variable entry means can be changed. 2 It is possible to make adjustments according to the control content of the variable means. Therefore, since the amount of privilege given to the player in the game in which the first variable ball entry means is opened can be adjusted, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AB1, a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state, and the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display means. The dynamic display period setting means includes a dynamic display period setting means capable of setting the dynamic display period from different periods, and the dynamic display period setting means sets the first gaming state by the gaming state setting means. In addition, the gaming machine AB2 is characterized in that it facilitates setting a longer dynamic display period than when the second gaming state is set.

According to the gaming machine AB2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AB1. That is, the dynamic display period of the second dynamic display means can be changed according to the set gaming state. Further, when the first gaming state is set, it becomes easier to set a longer dynamic display period than when the second gaming state is set. Therefore, since the period during which the ball cannot enter the second variable ball entry means can be lengthened, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to reach the first variable ball entry means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the game machine AB2, the second variable ball entry means has at least an opening through which the game ball can enter and an opening / closing lid member for opening / closing the opening, and the opening / closing lid member has the opening. In the state where the portion is closed, the upper surface of the opening / closing lid member is configured to form a part of the first taxiway, and the dynamic display period setting means is the first by the gaming state setting means. The gaming machine AB3 is characterized in that when a gaming state is set, it is easy to set a dynamic display period longer than the passing time for the gaming ball to pass over the upper surface of the opening / closing lid member.

According to the gaming machine AB3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AB2 described above, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first gaming state is set, the ball can be reliably reached by the first variable ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine AB2 or AB3 has a variable pattern setting means capable of setting a variable pattern that is variably controlled by the second variable control means from among a plurality of different variable patterns, and the variable pattern setting means is in the gaming state. When the first gaming state is set by the setting means, a variable pattern is set in which the period in which the second variable ball-entry means is in the second state is longer than when the second gaming state is set. A gaming machine AB4 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine AB4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines AB2 or AB3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first gaming state is set, a variable pattern is set in which the period in which the second variable ball entry means is in the second state is longer than when the second gaming state is set. 1 The gaming state can be made into a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AC group> (Suggests the result of the special figure 1 lottery based on the special figure 2 lottery during the change of the special figure 1)
The first discrimination means capable of executing the first discrimination, the first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information for showing the discrimination result by the first discrimination means, and the first identification information are The first display means to be displayed, the second discrimination means capable of executing the second discrimination, and the second dynamic display for dynamically displaying the second identification information for showing the discrimination result by the second discrimination means for a predetermined period. Based on the means, the second display means on which the second identification information is displayed, and the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result on the first display means, the first identification information is stopped and displayed. 1 As a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game and executing a second privilege game based on the fact that the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is stopped and displayed on the second display means. , The discrimination result of the first discrimination means is suggested based on the fact that the discrimination of the second discrimination means is executed while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. AC1 is a gaming machine characterized by having a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect for the purpose.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, a gaming machine capable of changing the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-12907). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine executes a variation effect dedicated to the first special symbol in order to suggest the lottery result of the first special symbol, and is dedicated to the second special symbol in order to suggest the lottery result of the second special symbol. Since it is configured to execute a variable effect, the game using one special symbol lottery and the game using the other special symbol lottery become independent, and both special symbol lottery are enthusiastically executed. There was a problem that the motivation to try was reduced. Further, when a plurality of special symbols are fluctuating at the same time, there is a problem that the lottery result of each special symbol is incomprehensible to the player. In addition, since an independent variable effect is executed for each special symbol, there is a problem that an effect without a sense of unity is executed. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved by providing the player with a suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result of each special symbol in an easy-to-understand manner.

According to the gaming machine AC1, the discrimination result of the first discrimination means is suggested based on the discrimination of the second discrimination means executed while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. Since the suggestion effect for the purpose is executed, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game so that the player may execute the discrimination of the second discriminating means in order to grasp the discriminating result of the first discriminating means in advance. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AC1, the suggestion effect executing means executes the suggestion effect when the discrimination result of the first discriminating means is the specific first discrimination result. ..

According to the gaming machine AC2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AC1. That is, since the suggestion effect is executed when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result, there is an effect that the effect of the suggestion effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine AC2, from the time when the first discrimination means determines that the specific first discrimination result is obtained until the first identification information for indicating the specific first discrimination result is stopped and displayed. The gaming machine AC3, wherein the gaming machine AC3 has a limiting means for limiting the discrimination result of the second discriminating means to be the specific second discriminating result.

According to the gaming machine AC3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AC2. That is, when the discrimination result of the first discrimination means is a specific first discrimination result, it is executed because the limiting means limits the discrimination by the second discrimination means to be the specific second discrimination result. It is possible to prevent a privilege game different from the content of the suggestion effect from being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the reliability of the suggestion effect can be increased and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine AC1 or AC3, the suggestion effect executing means is characterized in that the suggestion effect is executed by using the display mode of the second identification information.

According to the gaming machine AC4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AC1 to AC3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the suggestion effect is executed using the display mode of the second identification information, the player can check the discrimination result of the second discrimination means by simply looking at the display mode of the second identification information. It is possible to predict the discrimination result of the discrimination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player pays close attention to the second identification information and can improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC4, a tabulation means for totaling the discrimination results of the second discriminating means and a condition establishment discriminating means for discriminating the establishment of the execution condition based on the discriminant result aggregated by the tabulation means. The gaming machine AC5, wherein the suggestion effect executing means executes the suggestion effect when it is determined by the condition establishment determining means that the execution condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine AC5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AC1 to AC4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the discrimination results of the second discrimination means are totaled and the suggestion staging is executed when the totalized results satisfy the execution conditions, the player is enthusiastically played the game in order to satisfy the execution conditions. Can be made. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC5, the effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the suggestion effect executed by the suggestion effect execution means is provided, and the effect mode setting means is the first suggestion mode and the first suggestion mode thereof. The gaming machine AC6 is characterized in that it is possible to set a second suggestion mode that suggests the discrimination result of the first discriminating means more difficultly than the first suggestion mode.

According to the gaming machine AC6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AC1 to AC5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, an easy-to-understand suggestion effect and a difficult-to-understand suggestion effect are executed depending on the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the discriminant result of the first discriminating means from being easily grasped by one suggestion staging. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be enthusiastically performed so as to execute the suggestion effect a plurality of times.

The gaming machine AC6 has a number of times measuring means for measuring the number of times the suggestion effect is executed executed by the suggestion effect execution means, and the effect mode setting means executes the suggestion effect measured by the number of times measuring means. The gaming machine AC7 is characterized in that it is easier to set the first suggestion mode when the number of times is a specific number of times larger than the predetermined number of times.

According to the gaming machine AC7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AC6. That is, since the suggestion effect that is easy for the player to understand is executed as the number of times the suggestion effect is executed increases, there is an effect that the game can be enthusiastically performed so as to execute the suggestion effect a plurality of times.

<Characteristic BA group> (The greater the number of consecutive first advantageous states, the easier it is to set a more advantageous second advantageous state).
A discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result. As the gaming state after the privileged game is completed, the first gaming state, the second gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the third gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. A first game state setting means capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a game state, and a predetermined specific condition established in the second game state are satisfied. Based on the above, the second gaming state setting means for setting the gaming state to the third gaming state is provided, and the specific condition is set based on the execution of the privileged game during the first gaming state. The second gaming state set based on the execution of the privileged game during the second gaming state is more likely to be established than the second gaming state. The gaming machine BA1 characterized by being a thing.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning result, the game shifts to a winning state. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest of winning by differentiating the game values that can be acquired (for example). , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 25144417).

In addition, some of the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines are configured so that the gaming state after the hit state ends can be different depending on the hit type, and after the hit state ends. There are also some that are trying to improve the interest in pachinko. Further, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, a relatively advantageous gaming state is set after the hitting state is completed, and the relatively advantageous gaming state is continuously lost by a specific number of lottery. In some cases, there are some that move to a more favorable state.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the transition condition from the relatively advantageous gaming state to the more advantageous gaming state is fixed regardless of the situation at the time when the relatively advantageous gaming state is reached. There is a problem that it is difficult to improve the expectation of the player at the time when the gaming state is set to be favorable, and it is difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BA1, it is advantageous for the player based on the discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition and the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes a specific discrimination result. As the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game and the game state after the privilege game is completed, the first game state, the second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and the second game state thereof. In the first gaming state setting means capable of setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including at least a third gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state, and in the second gaming state. A second gaming state setting means for setting a gaming state to the third gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition is provided, and the specific condition is the same during the first gaming state. The second game state set based on the execution of the privilege game during the second game state, rather than the second game state set based on the execution of the privilege game. Is configured so that it is easy to hold.

As a result, when the second gaming state is reached, it is more advantageous than the first gaming state, and it becomes easier to shift to the third gaming state, so that the player's expectation for the third gaming state is improved. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BA1, the specific condition is a game after the end of the privilege game, as compared with the case where the second game state is set based on the execution of the privilege game during the first game state. The gaming machine BA2 is characterized in that the state is configured so that it is more likely to be established when the second gaming state is continuously set for a specific number of times or more.

According to the gaming machine BA2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BA1, the specific condition is a case where the second gaming state is set based on the execution of the privileged game during the first gaming state. Rather, it is configured so that the second gaming state is more likely to be established when the second gaming state is continuously set a specific number of times or more as the gaming state after the end of the privileged game. Even if the privileged game is executed without satisfying the specific condition in the above, the expectation for the third game state can be further improved. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machines BA1 or BA2, the second gaming state setting means is the second gaming state when the second gaming state is set based on the execution of the privileged game during the first gaming state. The third gaming state is set based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is different from the specific discrimination result continuously over a predetermined first number of times in the gaming state. In the second gaming state, when the second gaming state is continuously set a specific number of times or more as the gaming state after the end of the privilege game, the second gaming state setting means The third gaming state is set based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is different from the specific discrimination result for the second number of times less than the first number of times. The gaming machine BA3, which is characterized by being a pachinko machine.

According to the gaming machine BA3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BA1 or BA2, the second gaming state setting means is based on the execution of the privileged game during the first gaming state. When the state is set, the discriminant result of the discriminating means is different from the specific discriminant result continuously over the predetermined first number of times in the second gaming state. The third game state is set based on the above, and the second game state setting means sets the second game state continuously for a specific number of times or more as the game state after the end of the privilege game. In the second gaming state, the discriminant result of the discriminating means is different from the specific discriminant result continuously over the second number of times less than the first number of times. Based on the above, the third gaming state is set.

As a result, in the second gaming state, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the deviation discrimination result is expected to be continuous rather than the specific discrimination result, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In any of the gaming machines BA1 to BA3, an entry means capable of entering a game ball, a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the entry of the game ball into the entry means, and a preceding means. A variable means that can be changed to a first position where the game ball can enter the entry ball means and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, and a discrimination result of the discrimination means. Is a variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the fact that the second determination result is different from the specific determination result. The gaming machine BA4 is characterized in that the third gaming state is configured so that the variable gaming is easier to be executed than the second gaming state.

According to the gaming machine BA4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines BA1 to BA3, it is determined based on the entry means in which the gaming ball can enter and the entry means in which the gaming ball enters the entry means. It is possible to change to a privilege granting means for granting the privilege of the above, a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. The variable means is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discriminant means is different from the specific discriminant result. The variable game execution means for executing the variable game to be performed is provided, and the third game state is configured so that the variable game can be executed more easily than the second game state.

As a result, in the third game state, there are many opportunities for the game ball to enter the ball entry means, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BA4, the discriminating means discriminates based on the establishment of a first discriminating means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the first discriminating condition and a second discriminating condition different from the first discriminating condition. It is composed of at least a second discriminating means for executing the above, and the discriminating by the second discriminating means has a higher probability of being the second discriminating result than the discriminating by the first discriminating means. The gaming machine BA5 is configured such that the third gaming state is configured so that the second discriminating condition is more easily satisfied than other gaming states.

According to the gaming machine BA5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BA4, the discriminating means is different from the first discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the establishment of the first discriminating condition and the first discriminating condition. It is composed of at least a second discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition, and the discrimination by the second discrimination means is more than the discrimination by the first discrimination means. 2 It is configured so that the probability of a discrimination result is high, and the third gaming state is configured so that the second discrimination condition is more likely to be satisfied than other gaming states. Is.

This has the effect that in the third gaming state, the game can be performed by paying attention to the discrimination result of the second discriminating means.

In any of the gaming machines BA1 to the gaming machine BA5, the first entry means on which the gaming ball can enter, the second entry means different from the first entry means, and the first entry means. The first discriminating condition is provided with a third position in which the game ball can enter, a fourth position in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the third position, and a second variable means that can be changed. Is established based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means, and the second determination condition is based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means. The gaming machine BA6, which is characterized by being established.

According to the gaming machine BA6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines BA1 to BA5, a first entry means capable of entering a game ball and a second entry means different from the first entry means thereof. A second variable means that can be changed to a third position where the game ball can enter the first ball entry means and a fourth position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the third position. , And the first determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the pachinko ball has entered the first ball entry means, and the second determination condition is to the second ball entry means. It is established based on the entry of a game ball.

As a result, since the variable position of the second variable means can be focused on, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BA6, the second gaming state is configured so that the second variable means can be more easily changed to the third position than the first gaming state and the third gaming state. The gaming machine BA7 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine BA7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BA6, in the second gaming state, the second variable means is changed to a third position as compared with the first gaming state and the third gaming state. Since it is configured to be easy, there is an effect that the degree of advantage of the second gaming state can be improved.

In the gaming machine BA6 or BA7, the third is the discrimination result of the passing means through which the game ball can pass, the passing discriminating means for executing the discrimination based on the passing of the passing means by the gaming ball, and the passing discriminating means. A variable control means for varying the second variable means in a predetermined variable pattern based on the determination result is provided, and the passage determination means is used when the determination is executed in the second gaming state. , The third discrimination result is obtained with the first probability, and when the discrimination is executed in the first gaming state and the third gaming state, the third discrimination is performed with a second probability lower than the first probability. The gaming machine BA8 characterized by being a result.

According to the gaming machine BA8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BA6 or BA7, a passing means through which the gaming ball can pass, a passing determining means for executing discrimination based on the passing of the passing means by the gaming ball, and a passing determining means for performing the discrimination. Based on the fact that the discrimination result of the passage discrimination means is the third discrimination result, the second variable means is provided with a variable control means for varying the second variable means in a predetermined variable pattern, and the passage discrimination means is the first. 2 When the discrimination is executed in the gaming state, the third discrimination result is obtained with the first probability, and when the discrimination is executed in the first gaming state and the third gaming state, the first probability The third determination result is obtained with a low second probability.

As a result, the game can be performed by paying attention to the determination result of the passage determination means, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic BB group> (The result of dynamic display is suggested in the production for notifying at least the content different from the result)
A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed based on the first discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition and the discrimination result of the first discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result. Based on the establishment of the privilege game executing means, the first effect executing means for executing the first effect for showing the determination result of the first determination means, and the second determination condition different from the first determination condition. 2. When the first effect and the second effect are executed in an overlapping manner by executing the second effect, the second effect executing means is indicated by the first effect in the second effect. The gaming machine BB1 is configured to be able to execute a specific effect mode capable of suggesting a discrimination result of the first discrimination means.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There is something to perform a winning game. Further, among the conventional gaming machines, a gaming machine capable of changing the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-12907). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine executes a variation effect dedicated to the first special symbol in order to suggest the lottery result of the first special symbol, and is dedicated to the second special symbol in order to suggest the lottery result of the second special symbol. Since it is configured to execute a variable effect, the game using one special symbol lottery and the game using the other special symbol lottery become independent, and both special symbol lottery are enthusiastically executed. There was a problem that the motivation to try was reduced. Further, when a plurality of special symbols are fluctuating at the same time, there is a problem that the lottery result of each special symbol is incomprehensible to the player. In addition, since an independent variable effect is executed for each special symbol, there is a problem that the effect cannot be appropriately executed.

On the other hand, according to the game machine BB1, the first discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the establishment of the first discriminating condition and the discriminating result of the first discriminating means are based on the specific discriminant result. The privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player, the first effect execution means for executing the first effect for showing the determination result of the first determination means, and the first determination condition. Can execute a second discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of different second discrimination conditions and a second effect for showing the discrimination result of the second discrimination means in an overlapping manner with the first effect. The second effect executing means includes a second effect executing means, and the second effect executing means is the second effect when the first effect and the second effect are executed in an overlapping manner by executing the second effect. In the staging, a specific staging mode capable of suggesting the discriminating result of the first discriminating means indicated by the first staging is feasible.

As a result, not only the discrimination result of the second discriminating means but also the discrimination result of the first discriminating means can be suggested by the second staging, so that there is an effect that a more suitable staging mode can be realized.

In the gaming machine BB1, the second staging execution means is configured to be able to execute the specific staging mode in the second staging before the discriminating result of the first discriminating means is shown by the first staging. The gaming machine BB2, which is characterized by being a machine.

According to the gaming machine BB2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BB1, the second staging execution means is performed in the second staging before the discriminating result of the first discriminating means is shown by the first staging. Since the specific effect mode is configured to be feasible, the determination result of the first determination means can be confirmed by confirming the second effect without confirming the first effect to the end. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be improved.

The gaming machine BB1 or BB2 includes a first ball-entry means on which a game ball can enter and a second ball-entry means different from the first ball-entry means, and the first determination condition is the first. 1 It is established based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry means, and the second determination condition is established based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means. A gaming machine BB3 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine BB3, in addition to the effect of the game machine BB1 or BB2, a first ball entry means on which the game ball can enter and a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means are provided. The first determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the first ball entry means, and the second determination condition is the game to the second entry means. It is established based on the fact that the ball has entered.

As a result, the game can be performed by paying attention to the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the game machines BB1 to BB3, the variable ball entry means that can be varied into a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. A second method in which the discriminating result of the second discriminating means is different from that of the specific discriminating means and the privilege giving means that grants a predetermined privilege based on the ball entering the variable ball entering means. Based on the determination result, the variable ball-entry means includes a variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the second state is changed to the first state for a predetermined period, and the second effect. The execution means is configured to be able to suggest the specific effect mode in the second effect executed based on the determination result of the second determination means becoming the second determination result. A gaming machine BB4 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine BB4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BB1 to BB3, the first state in which the gaming ball can enter and the second state in which the gaming ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. The discriminant result of the second discriminating means is the variable ball-entry means that can be changed according to the state, the privilege-giving means that grants a predetermined privilege based on the ball entering the variable ball-entry means, and the second discriminating means. A variable game in which the variable ball-entry means executes a variable game in which the second state is changed to the first state for a predetermined period based on the second determination result different from the specific determination result. The second effect executing means includes the execution means, and the second effect executing means is the specific effect in the second effect executed based on the determination result of the second determination means being the second determination result. It is configured so that the aspect can be suggested.

This has the effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the discrimination result of the second discrimination means will be the second discrimination result.

In the gaming machine BB4, as the gaming state after the end of the privileged game, the first gaming state in which the discrimination of the first discriminating means is easily executed and the discrimination of the second discriminating means are easier to be executed than the first gaming state. A game based on a game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a second game state and a predetermined specific condition established in the first game state. A gaming machine BB5 comprising: a gaming state changing means for changing a state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state.

According to the gaming machine BB5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BB4, as the gaming state after the end of the privileged game, the first gaming state in which the determination of the first discriminating means is easily executed and the first gaming state thereof are higher than those in the first gaming state. A gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including at least a second gaming state in which discrimination of the second discriminating means is easily executed, and a predetermined game state in the first gaming state. A gaming state changing means for changing the gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on the establishment of the specific condition is provided.

As a result, in the first game state, the game can be performed with the expectation that a specific condition is satisfied, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine BB1 or BB2, a variable ball entry means that can be changed into a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state, and its variable A privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the ball entering the ball entering means is provided, and the second discriminating means means whether the gaming ball has entered the variable ball entering means. The second effect is to determine whether or not the ball is present, and is characterized in that the second effect is composed of an effect of outputting a predetermined sound based on the fact that the game ball has entered the variable ball entry means. The gaming machine BB6.

According to the gaming machine BB6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BB1 or BB2, the first state in which the gaming ball can enter and the second state in which the gaming ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. The second discriminating means includes a variable ball-entry means that can be changed and a privilege-giving means that grants a predetermined privilege based on the ball entering the variable-ball-entry means. It is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the ball means, and the second effect is an effect of outputting a predetermined sound based on the fact that the game ball has entered the variable ball entry means. It is composed of.

As a result, it is possible to perform an auditory effect by voice, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In any of the gaming machines BB1 to BB6, when the first effect mode and the first effect for showing the specific determination result rather than the first effect mode are executed in the specific effect mode. The gaming machine BB7 is characterized in that at least a second effect mode in which the ratio of execution by the second effect execution means is increased is included.

According to the game machine BB7, in any of the game machines BB1 to BB6, the specific effect mode includes the first effect mode and the first effect for showing the specific determination result rather than the first effect mode. Is included, at least a second effect mode in which the ratio of execution by the second effect execution means is increased when is executed is included, so that the second effect mode is executed in the second effect. You can expect more strongly. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BB7, the specific effect mode includes a third effect mode that can be executed by the second effect execution means only when the first effect for showing the specific determination result is executed. A gaming machine BB8 characterized by being included at least.

According to the gaming machine BB8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BB7, the second effect is performed only when the first effect for showing the specific determination result is executed in the specific effect mode. Since at least the third effect mode that can be executed by the execution means is included, the player can be more pleased when the third effect mode is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

A gaming machine characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines BB1 to BB8, the second effect is executed in a manner that is easier for the player to see than the first effect for at least a predetermined period. BB9.

According to the gaming machine BB9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BB1 to BB8, the second effect is executed in a manner that is easier for the player to see than the first effect for at least a predetermined period. Therefore, by confirming the second effect that is easy to visually recognize, both the discrimination result of the second discrimination means and the discrimination result of the first discrimination means can be confirmed. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be improved.

<Characteristic BC group> (Transfer directly to the advantageous state based on the establishment of specific conditions that are at least different from the jackpot in the disadvantaged state)
A discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, a privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result, and a game. A second gaming state setting means for setting a second gaming state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a specific setting condition at least different from the execution of the privileged game during the first gaming state disadvantageous to the player. The second gaming state, the gaming machine is characterized by comprising an acquired game executing means for executing an acquired game in which a player can acquire a predetermined privilege each time a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. BC1.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning result, the game shifts to a winning state. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest of winning by differentiating the game values that can be acquired (for example). , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 25144417).

In addition, some of the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines are configured so that the gaming state after the hit state ends can be different depending on the hit type, and after the hit state ends. There are also some that are trying to improve the interest in pachinko. Further, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, a relatively advantageous gaming state is set after the hitting state is completed, and the relatively advantageous gaming state is continuously lost by a specific number of lottery. In some cases, there are some that move to a more favorable state.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is difficult to shift to a more advantageous gaming state unless it is shifted to a relatively advantageous gaming state, so that the interest in the disadvantageous gaming state is improved. There was a problem that it was difficult to make it.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BC1, a discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the establishment of the discriminating condition and a privilege that is advantageous to the player based on the discriminating result of the discriminating means becoming a specific discriminant result. A second game that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a specific setting condition that is at least different from the execution of the privilege game between the privileged game executing means for executing the game and the first game state that is disadvantageous to the player. A second game state setting means for setting a state, and an acquired game execution means for executing an acquired game in which a player can acquire a predetermined privilege each time a predetermined specific condition is satisfied in the second game state. And.

As a result, in the disadvantageous first game state, the game can be performed with the expectation that a specific setting condition is satisfied, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BC1, the entry means through which the gaming ball can enter, the first position in which the gaming ball can enter into the entry means, and the gaming ball become more difficult to enter than the first position. The second position, a variable means that can be changed, and a privilege giving means that grants the predetermined privilege based on the ball entering the ball entering means, and the acquired game executing means Assuming that the specific condition is satisfied that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is different from the specific discrimination result, the variable means is used as the acquisition game for a predetermined period from the second position to the second position. The gaming machine BC2 characterized in that it is controlled so as to be variable to one position.

According to the gaming machine BC2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BC1, the entry means through which the gaming ball can enter, the first position where the gaming ball can enter into the entry means, and the first position thereof. A variable means that can be changed to a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the position, and a privilege granting means that grants the predetermined privilege based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means. The variable means as the acquired game, assuming that the specific condition is satisfied that the discriminant result of the discriminating means is a second discriminating result different from the specific discriminating result. Is controlled so as to be variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period.

As a result, in the second game state, the game can be performed by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the ball entry means, so that the effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved. There is.

The gaming machine BC2 is characterized in that, when the acquired game is executed at least in the second gaming state, the second gaming state is maintained even after the execution of the acquired game is completed. Game machine BC3.

According to the gaming machine BC3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BC2, when the acquired game is executed at least in the second gaming state, the second gaming state remains even after the execution of the acquired game is completed. Since it is maintained, the degree of advantage of the second gaming state can be further increased. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine BC2 or BC3 includes a first ball-entry means on which a game ball can enter and a second ball-entry means different from the first ball-entry means, and the determination condition is the first ball entry means. It is composed of at least a first determination condition that is established based on the entry of the game ball into the means and a second determination condition that is established based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. The discrimination executed based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition has a higher probability of being the second discrimination result than the discrimination executed based on the satisfaction of the first discrimination condition. In the first gaming state, when the discrimination is executed based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition, the discrimination result is less likely to be obtained than in the second gaming state. A gaming machine BC4 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine BC4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BC2 or BC3, a first entering means into which the gaming ball can enter and a second entering means different from the first entering means thereof are provided. The discrimination condition is based on the first discrimination condition that is established based on the ball entering the first ball entry means and the game ball entering the second ball entry means. It is composed of at least a second discriminant condition that is satisfied, and the discriminant executed based on the fulfillment of the second discriminant condition is more than the discriminant executed based on the fulfillment of the first discriminant condition. It is configured so that the probability of the second discrimination result is high, and the first gaming state is the second gaming state when the discrimination is executed based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition. It is configured so that the discrimination result is harder to obtain than the state.

As a result, the degree of advantage in the second gaming state can be further improved, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines BC1 to BC4, the second gaming state is characterized in that the same gaming state is maintained at least until the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes the specific discrimination result. The gaming machine BC5.

According to the gaming machine BC5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines BC1 to BC4, the second gaming state is the same game until at least the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes the specific discrimination result. Since the state is maintained, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel playability that is expected not to result in a specific determination result in the second gaming state.

In the gaming machine BC5, the gaming machine BC6 is characterized in that the second gaming state has a lower probability of producing the specific determination result than the first gaming state.

According to the gaming machine BC6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BC5, the probability that the second gaming state will result in the specific determination result is lower than that of the first gaming state, so that the degree of advantage in the second gaming state is low. There is an effect that can be further enhanced.

The gaming machine BC5 or BC6 includes an initialization means for initializing the settings of the gaming machine, and the second gaming state is configured by a gaming state set when the initialization is performed by the initialization means. The gaming machine BC7, which is characterized by being a machine.

According to the gaming machine BC7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BC5 or BC6, an initialization means for initializing the settings of the gaming machine is provided, and the second gaming state is initialized by the initialization means. It is composed of the game states that are set when the game is played.

As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an extremely special gaming property different from that of a general gaming machine, that is, the gaming state set by the initialization becomes advantageous.

In the gaming machine BC7, the acquired game is executed from the time when the second gaming state is set based on the initialization performed by the initialization means until the predetermined specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine BC8, which is provided with a limiting means for limiting the difficulty of being played.

According to the gaming machine BC8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BC7, a predetermined specific condition is set after the second gaming state is set based on the initialization performed by the initialization means. Since the limiting means for limiting the acquired game is difficult to be executed until it is established, it is possible to prevent it from becoming too advantageous at the time of initialization. Therefore, there is an effect that it becomes excessively advantageous for the player after the initialization, and it is possible to suppress the disadvantage to the hole.

In the gaming machine BC8, the entry means through which the gaming ball can enter, the first position in which the gaming ball can enter into the entry means, and the gaming ball become more difficult to enter than the first position. The second position, a variable means that can be changed, and a privilege giving means that grants the predetermined privilege based on the ball entering the ball entering means, and the acquired game executing means Assuming that the specific condition is satisfied that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is different from the specific discrimination result, the variable means is used as the acquisition game for a predetermined period from the second position to the second position. The limiting means is controlled so as to be variable to one position, and the limiting means has a period from the discrimination result of the discrimination means to the second discrimination result to the start of the acquired game. The gaming machine BC9, characterized in that it is controlled to be longer than when it is not restricted by the limiting means.

According to the gaming machine BC9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BC8, the entry means in which the gaming ball can enter, the first position in which the gaming ball can enter into the entry means, and the first position thereof. A variable means that can be changed to a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the position, and a privilege granting means that grants the predetermined privilege based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means. The variable means as the acquired game, assuming that the specific condition is satisfied that the discriminant result of the discriminating means is a second discriminating result different from the specific discriminating result. Is controlled so as to be variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period, and the limiting means is acquired after the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes the second discrimination result. The period until the game is started is controlled to be longer than when the restriction by the restriction means is not performed.

This has the effect of reducing the degree of advantage of the second gaming state after initialization.

<Characteristic BD group> (The degree of advantage differs between the normal state at the time of RBAM clearing and the normal state that is transferred at another opportunity)
A first state setting means that can set the gaming state to a predetermined first gaming state based on the initialization of the setting of the gaming machine, and a predetermined specific that is at least different from turning on the power to the gaming machine. Based on the establishment of the setting condition, the first game state is set by the second state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of game states including at least the first game state, and the first state setting means. Based on the setting, the specific element regarding the degree of advantage is set to be equal to or less than the predetermined specific degree of advantage, and the first game state is set by the second state setting means. The gaming machine BD1 comprising: a specific element setting means for setting an element to be higher than the specific degree of advantage.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning result, the game shifts to a winning state. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest of winning by differentiating the game values that can be acquired (for example). , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 25144417).

In addition, some of the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines are configured so that the gaming state after the hit state ends can be different depending on the hit type, and after the hit state ends. There are also some that are trying to improve the interest in pachinko. Further, in the conventional gaming machine, a novel gaming state in which a gaming state having a lower degree of advantage than the gaming state (so-called normal state) set when the setting of the gaming machine is initialized is provided. There are also sex ones.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, if the degree of advantage of the gaming state after initialization is increased in an attempt to realize novel game performance, the initialization becomes excessively advantageous to the player. Therefore, there is a risk that the pachinko machine will be difficult to initialize for the hall.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BD1, a first state setting means capable of setting the gaming state to a predetermined first gaming state based on the initialization of the setting of the gaming machine, and a power supply for the gaming machine. A second state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of game states including at least the first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific setting condition at least different from the input, and the first state setting means. Based on the fact that the first gaming state is set by the one state setting means, a specific element related to the degree of advantage is set to be equal to or less than a predetermined specific degree of advantage, and the first gaming state is set by the second state setting means. The specific element setting means for setting the specific element to be higher than the specific advantage degree based on the setting of the specific element is provided.

As a result, the game can be performed with the expectation that the first game state will be set by the second state setting means rather than the first state setting means, so that the player's interest in the game can be expressed. It has the effect of being able to do.

In the gaming machine BD1, the specific element setting means sets the specific element based on the fact that a predetermined specific setting condition is satisfied during the first gaming state set by the first state setting means. The gaming machine BD2, characterized in that it is set to be higher than the specific degree of advantage.

According to the gaming machine BD2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BD1, the specific element setting means has specific setting conditions predetermined during the first gaming state set by the first state setting means. Since the specific element is set to be higher than the specific advantage degree based on the establishment, the game can be played with the expectation that the specific setting condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine BD1 or BD2, the ball entry means on which the game ball can enter, the first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means, and the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. A variable means that can be changed to a second position, a privilege granting means that grants a predetermined privilege based on the ball entering the ball entering means, and a discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. And the variable game in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means and the discrimination result of the discrimination means. The gaming machine BD3 comprising a variable game executing means, wherein the specific element setting means changes the ease of executing the variable game as the specific element.

According to the gaming machine BD3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines BD1 or BD2, the entry means on which the gaming ball can enter, the first position on which the gaming ball can enter the entry means, and the first position thereof. A variable means that can be changed to a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, and a privilege grant that grants a predetermined privilege based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means. Based on the means, the discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes a specific discrimination result, the variable means has the second position to the second position for a predetermined period. A variable game executing means for executing a variable game that is variable to one position is provided, and the specific element setting means changes the ease of executing the variable game as the specific element.

As a result, the ease with which the variable game can be executed can be changed in the first game state, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BD3, the display means capable of displaying the identification information, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means to the display means, and the dynamic display means thereof. The specific element setting means includes the dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information, and the first game state is set by the first state setting means. Based on this, the dynamic display period determining means controls so that a period having a length of a predetermined first period or longer can be easily set, and the second state setting means sets the first gaming state. Based on this, the gaming machine BD4 is characterized in that it is controlled so that a period having a length shorter than that of the first period can be easily set.

According to the gaming machine BD4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BD3, a display means capable of displaying identification information and a dynamic display means for displaying the identification information indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means are dynamically displayed. The display means and the dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means are provided, and the specific element setting means is provided by the first state setting means. Based on the setting of the first gaming state, the dynamic display period determining means controls so that a period having a length of a predetermined first period or longer can be easily set, and the second state setting is performed. Based on the fact that the first gaming state is set by the means, it is controlled so that a period shorter than the first period can be easily set.

This has the effect that the degree of advantage can be changed more reliably in the first gaming state.

The gaming machine BD4 includes a first ball-entry means capable of entering a game ball and a second ball-entry means different from the first ball-entry means, and the determination condition is to the first ball-entry means. It is composed of at least a first discriminant condition that is satisfied based on the fact that the ball has entered the ball and a second discriminant condition that is established based on the fact that the ball has entered the second ball entry means. As for the discrimination means, the specific discrimination result is obtained when the discrimination is executed based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition than when the discrimination is executed based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition. The specific element setting means is configured to have a high probability, and the second determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the first gaming state is set by the first state setting means. As the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the control, a period having a length equal to or longer than the first period is controlled so as to be easily set, and the first game is performed by the second state setting means. Based on the state being set, a period shorter than the first period is set as the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the satisfaction of the second determination condition. The gaming machine BD5, which is characterized in that it is controlled so as to be easily operated.

According to the game machine BD5, in addition to the effect of the game machine BD4, a first ball entry means on which the game ball can enter and a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means are provided. The discrimination conditions include a first discrimination condition that is established based on entering the first ball entry means, and a second discrimination condition that is established based on entering the second ball entry means. When the discrimination is executed based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition, rather than when the discrimination is executed based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition. Is configured so that the probability of obtaining the specific determination result is higher, and the specific element setting means has set the first gaming state by the first state setting means. Based on this, it is controlled so that a period having a length of the first period or more can be easily set as the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the establishment of the second determination condition. As the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the establishment of the second determination condition based on the setting of the first gaming state by the second state setting means, the first. It is controlled so that a period shorter than one period can be easily set.

This has the effect that the degree of advantage can be made different by making the determination execution interval of the second determination means different.

In the gaming machine BD5, based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a predetermined second determination result, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player and the end of the privilege game. As a later gaming state, the specific element is set to be more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state in which the specific element is set to be equal to or lower than the specific advantage degree, and the specific element is set to be higher than the specific advantage degree. The gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including at least a second gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the second state setting means are the second. The gaming machine BD6 is characterized in that the first gaming state is set by assuming that the predetermined changing condition is satisfied while the gaming state is set and the specific setting condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine BD6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BD5, a privileged game advantageous to the player is executed based on the determination result of the discrimination means being a predetermined second determination result. As the privilege game execution means and the game state after the end of the privilege game, the specific element is more advantageous to the player than the first game state in which the specific element is set to be equal to or less than the specific advantage degree, and the specific element is A gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including at least a second gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first gaming state set higher than the specific advantage. The second state setting means sets the first gaming state by assuming that the predetermined changing condition is satisfied while the second gaming state is set as the specific setting condition is satisfied.

As a result, in the second gaming state, the game can be performed with the expectation that a predetermined change condition is satisfied, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BD6, the first gaming state is configured such that the probability that the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes the second discrimination result is lower than that of the second gaming state. The gaming machine BD7.

According to the gaming machine BD7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BD6, in the first gaming state, the probability that the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes the second discrimination result is lower than that of the second gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel game property that the first gaming state is advantageous when it is set by the second state setting means even though the discrimination result of the discriminating means is low. effective.

In the gaming machine BD6 or BD7, the specific element setting means moves in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the establishment of the second determination condition based on the setting of the second gaming state. The gaming machine BD8 is characterized in that the target display period is controlled so that a period having a length of the first period or more can be easily set.

According to the gaming machine BD8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BD6 or BD7, the specific element setting means is executed based on the establishment of the second determination condition based on the setting of the second gaming state. Since the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information is controlled so that a period having a length equal to or longer than the first period can be easily set, it is difficult to satisfy the second determination condition in the second gaming state. It has the effect of being able to.

<Characteristic BE group> (Perform a specific effect from the transition to the small hit RUSH until the start of the small hit fluctuation)
In the entry means where the game ball can enter, the first position where the game ball can enter into the entry means, and the second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. Based on the variable means that can be changed, the discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes a specific discrimination result, the variable means is the first for a predetermined period. In a gaming machine provided with a variable game executing means for executing a variable game that is variable from two positions to the first position, the first game state in which the variable game is difficult to be executed based on the establishment of a specific setting condition. A game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a second game state in which the variable game is more likely to be executed than the first game state, and a game state setting thereof. The first effect executing means for executing the first effect based on the setting of the second game state by the means, and the discriminating means after the first effect is executed by the first effect executing means. The gaming machine BE1 is provided with a second effect executing means for executing a second effect having an effect mode different from that of the first effect, based on the determination result being the specific determination result.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, a variable display of symbols is performed on a display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a jackpot game advantageous to the player is given. Further, on the display device, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed in addition to the design, and the entertainment of the game is improved by executing a wide variety of entertainment effects (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886). Gazette).

In addition, some of the conventional gaming machines include an effect mode (preparation effect mode) indicating that a situation advantageous to the player is near in a predetermined gaming state, and a player during execution of the preparation effect mode. There are also things that can be performed as an advantageous situation effect that indicates that the situation has become advantageous when the situation becomes advantageous to the player.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, even if the preparatory staging mode is executed, the player only wants the advantageous situation staging to be executed as soon as possible, and the execution period of the preparatory staging mode becomes long. There was a problem that there was a risk of spoiling the interest of the player.

On the other hand, according to the game machine BE1, the ball-entry means on which the game ball can enter, the first position where the game ball can enter the ball-entry means, and the game ball from the first position. Based on the fact that the variable means that can be changed to the second position that makes it difficult to enter the ball, the discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the discrimination result of the discrimination means become a specific discrimination result. The variable means is provided with a variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period, and is based on the establishment of a specific setting condition. One game state is set from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state in which the variable game is difficult to be executed and a second game state in which the variable game is more likely to be executed than the first game state. The game state setting means to be performed, the first effect executing means for executing the first effect based on the setting of the second game state by the game state setting means, and the first effect execution means by the first effect executing means. Is executed, the second effect executing means for executing the second effect of the effect mode different from the first effect based on the determination result of the determination means becoming the specific determination result, and To prepare.

This has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.

In the gaming machine BE1, a privilege game advantageous to the player is provided based on the display means capable of displaying the identification information and the discrimination result of the discrimination means having a second discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result. The privilege game execution means to be executed and the dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means are provided, and the discrimination conditions are the first discrimination condition and the first discrimination. The dynamic display means is composed of at least a second discrimination condition different from the condition, and the dynamic display means dynamically displays the identification information based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition and the second discrimination condition. It is configured so that the dynamic display of the identification information based on the establishment of the above can be performed in duplicate, and the gaming machine has the first determination condition and the second determination condition. When the second discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination based on the satisfaction of one of the discrimination conditions, the other discrimination is performed at least during the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the second discrimination result. A game characterized by comprising a discrimination result control means for controlling discrimination to be performed based on the condition that a condition is satisfied so that the discrimination result is different from both the specific discrimination result and the second discrimination result. Machine BE2.

According to the gaming machine BE2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BE1, the discrimination result of the display means capable of displaying the identification information and the discrimination means is different from the specific discrimination result. Based on this, a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player and a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means are provided, and the discrimination condition is , The first discrimination condition and the second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition are at least configured, and the dynamic display means is the identification information based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition. The dynamic display of the above and the dynamic display of the identification information based on the establishment of the second determination condition can be performed in duplicate, and the gaming machine is configured to perform the first determination. Dynamic display of the identification information to show at least the second discrimination result when the second discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination based on the establishment of one of the condition and the second discrimination condition. During the dynamic display period in, the discrimination is executed based on the fact that the other discrimination condition is satisfied, and the discrimination is controlled so that the discrimination result is different from both the specific discrimination result and the second discrimination result. A result control means is provided.

This has the effect of suppressing the duplication of execution of the privilege game between the determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition and the determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition.

In the gaming machine BE2, the second gaming state is configured so that discrimination based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition is easier to be executed than the first gaming state, and the second discrimination condition is The discrimination executed based on the establishment of the above is characterized in that it is configured to be one of the specific discrimination result, the second discrimination result, and the deviation discrimination result. Game machine BE3.

According to the gaming machine BE3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BE2, the second gaming state is configured so that the discrimination based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition is more easily executed than the first gaming state. The discrimination executed based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition is one of the specific discrimination result, the second discrimination result, and the deviation discrimination result. It is configured as follows.

This has the effect that it can be expected that a specific determination result will be obtained in the second gaming state.

The gaming machine BE3 is provided with a gaming state changing means for changing the gaming state to the second gaming state based on the establishment of a specific condition at least different from the execution of the privileged game in the first gaming state. The gaming machine BE4 featuring.

According to the gaming machine BE4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BE3, the gaming state is changed to the second gaming state based on the establishment of a specific condition at least different from the execution of the privileged game in the first gaming state. Since the game state changing means for changing the state is provided, it is possible to play the game in the expectation that a specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BE4, the gaming state changing means does not execute the privileged game between the time when the first gaming state is set and the time when the determination by the determining means a predetermined number of times is executed. In this case, the gaming machine BE5 is characterized in that the gaming state is changed to the second gaming state.

According to the gaming machine BE5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BE4, the gaming state changing means is executed by the discriminating means a predetermined number of times after the first gaming state is set. If the privileged game is not executed in the meantime, the gaming state is changed to the second gaming state. Therefore, in the first gaming state, the game is played with the expectation that the privileged game will not be executed. It has the effect of realizing playability.

In the gaming machine BE5, the first gaming state is configured so that when the discrimination by the discriminating means is executed, the second discriminating result is obtained with the first probability, and the second gaming state is The second discrimination result is obtained with a second probability lower than the first probability when the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed, and the gaming state changing means is the first. When the privilege game is not executed between the time when the game state is set and the time when the determination by the determination means is executed a predetermined number of times, the second determination result is determined by the determination means. The gaming machine BE6 is characterized in that the gaming state is changed to the second gaming state by changing the probability of becoming from the first probability to the second probability.

According to the gaming machine BE6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BE5, the first gaming state is configured to have the second discrimination result with the first probability when the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed. The second gaming state is configured so that when the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed, the second discrimination result is obtained with a second probability lower than the first probability. , The game state changing means is a case where the privilege game is not executed between the time when the first game state is set and the time when the determination by the determination means a predetermined number of times is executed. The gaming state is changed to the second gaming state by changing the probability of the second discrimination result from the first probability to the second probability by the discrimination by the discrimination means.

As a result, it is possible to realize a novel playability that the lower the probability of the second discrimination result is, the more advantageous it is, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines BE1 to BE6, the gaming state is set to the second gaming state based on the initialization means for initializing the settings of the gaming machine and the initialization executed by the initialization means. In the second gaming state set by the initialization setting means and the initialization setting means, the variable game is less likely to be executed than in the second gaming state set by the gaming state setting means. The gaming machine BE7, characterized in that it is provided with a limiting means for limiting to.

According to the gaming machine BE7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines BE1 to BE6, the initialization means for initializing the settings of the gaming machine and the initialization means executed by the initialization means. , From the second gaming state set by the gaming state setting means in the initialization setting means for setting the gaming state to the second gaming state and the second gaming state set by the initialization setting means. Also provided with limiting means for limiting the variable game so that it is difficult to perform.

As a result, there is an effect that extremely special and novel game playability can be realized, in which the same gaming state as the state after initialization can be advantageous while suppressing the advantage after initialization too much.

<Characteristic BF group> (Multiple small hit RUSH states with different degrees of advantage)
In the entry means where the game ball can enter, the first position where the game ball can enter into the entry means, and the second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. A variable means that can be changed, a privilege giving means that grants a predetermined privilege based on the ball entering the ball entering means, a discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a discrimination means thereof. The discrimination result of the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes the first discrimination result, and the discrimination result of the discrimination means are different from the first discrimination result. Based on the result of the second determination, the variable game executing means for executing the variable game in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period, and the predetermined setting conditions are satisfied. In a plurality of states including a first state, a second state in which the variable game is more likely to be executed than the first state, and a third state which is more advantageous to the player than the second state. The gaming machine BF1 is provided with a state setting means capable of setting the state of 1 to 1.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning result, the game shifts to a winning state. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest of winning by differentiating the game values that can be acquired (for example). , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 25144417).

In addition, some of the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines are configured so that the gaming state after the hit state ends can be different depending on the hit type, and after the hit state ends. There are also some that are trying to improve the interest in pachinko. Further, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, as an advantageous state, a so-called small hit game is easily executed, and a state in which the game value can be acquired even if the hit state is not reached is installed. As a result, there are some that are trying to further improve the interest.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, if the small hit game is easily executed, the subsequent game becomes monotonous and simply continues to acquire the game value. There was a problem that it became difficult to improve the interest of the person.

On the other hand, according to the game machine BF1, the ball entry means in which the game ball can enter, the first position in which the game ball can enter the ball entry means, and the game ball from the first position. A variable means that can be changed to a second position where it is difficult to enter the ball, a privilege granting means that grants a predetermined privilege based on the ball entering the ball entering means, and a determination condition are satisfied. Discrimination between the discriminating means for executing the discrimination based on the discriminating means, the privileged game executing means for executing the privileged game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discriminating means becoming the first discriminating result, and the discriminating means. Based on the fact that the result is a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result, the variable means is variable to execute a variable game in which the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period. Based on the game execution means and the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, the first state, the second state in which the variable game is more easily executed than the first state, and the second state which is more advantageous to the player than the second state. It is provided with a state setting means capable of setting one state from a plurality of states including three states.

As a result, the game can be performed with the expectation that the second state or the third state will be reached, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BF1, the state at the time when the second determination result is obtained is at least maintained even after the end of the variable game executed based on the second determination result. The gaming machine BF2 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine BF2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BF1, the variable game executed based on the fact that the state at the time when the second discrimination result is obtained becomes the second discrimination result. Since it is maintained at least after the end of, the variable game can be executed a plurality of times in the second state. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of advantage of the second state can be improved.

In the gaming machine BF1 or BF2, the third state is a state in which the variable game is more likely to be executed than the second state.

According to the gaming machine BF3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BF1 or BF2, the variable game is more likely to be executed than the second state, so that the degree of advantage of the third state can be further improved. effective.

In the gaming machine BF3, the discriminating means discriminates based on the establishment of a first discriminating means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the first discriminating condition and a second discriminating condition different from the first discriminating condition. It is composed of at least a second discriminating means for executing the above, and the second state is such that the first discriminating condition is more likely to be satisfied than the second discriminating condition. In the third state, the second discrimination condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first discrimination condition, and the discrimination by the second discrimination means is more likely than the discrimination by the first discrimination means. However, the gaming machine BF4 is configured so that the probability of the second determination result being high is high.

According to the gaming machine BF4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BF3, the discriminating means is different from the first discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the establishment of the first discriminating condition and the first discriminating condition. It is composed of at least a second discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition, and the second state is the first discrimination condition rather than the second discrimination condition. Is more likely to be established, and the third state is such that the second discrimination condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first discrimination condition, and is more likely to be satisfied than the discrimination by the first discrimination means. Also, the discrimination by the second discrimination means is configured so that the probability of the second discrimination result is higher.

This has the effect that the game can be played with a stronger expectation that the second determination condition will be satisfied.

In any of the gaming machines BF1 to BF4, the state setting means sets one of the plurality of states as the gaming state after the execution of the privileged game by the privileged game executing means is completed. It is possible that the probability of the specific determination result in the second state is higher than the probability of the specific determination result in the third state. The featured gaming machine BF5.

According to the gaming machine BF5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BF1 to BF4, the state setting means is a plurality of gaming states after the execution of the privileged game by the privileged game executing means is completed. It is possible to set one state from the states, and the probability that the specific discrimination result will be obtained in the second state is higher than the probability that the specific discrimination result will be obtained in the third state. It is configured as follows.

As a result, since the probability that the specific determination result is obtained in the third state is lower, the advantageous third state can be configured so as to be easy to continue for a longer time. Therefore, when the third state is set, there is an effect that the player can have a greater sense of satisfaction.

In the game machine BF5, a first ball-entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball-entry means different from the first ball-entry means, and a game ball can enter the first ball-entry means. A third position, a fourth position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the third position, and a second variable means that can be changed, and the discriminating means is the first ball entry means. Alternatively, the determination is executed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means, and the second state and the third state are the second variable rather than the first state. The gaming machine BF6 is characterized in that the means is configured so as not to be variable to the third position.

According to the gaming machine BF6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BF5, a first entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second entry means different from the first entry means, and the first entry means described above. A second variable means that can be changed to a third position where the game ball can enter the ball means, a fourth position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the third position, and the above-mentioned The discriminating means executes discrimination based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means, and the second state and the third state are The second variable means is configured to be less likely to be variable to the third position than in the first state.

This has the effect of realizing a novel playability in which a state in which the second variable means is difficult to change is more advantageous than a state in which the second variable means is easily changed to the third position.

In the gaming machine BF4, as the gaming state after the execution of the privileged game is completed, from among a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state. The game state setting means for setting the game state of 1 is provided, and the state setting means sets the first state based on the setting of the first game state, and the second game state is set. The gaming machine BF7 is characterized in that one of the second state and the third state is set based on the above.

According to the gaming machine BF7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BF4, the gaming state after the execution of the privileged game is completed includes a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state. The game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of game states including at least, is provided, and the state setting means sets the first state based on the setting of the first game state. Then, based on the setting of the second gaming state, one of the second state and the third state is set.

As a result, as the second gaming state, a second gaming state in which the second state is set and a second gaming state in which the third state is set can be provided. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel game property that the degree of advantage is variable even though the game state is the same.

<Characteristic BG group> (The degree of advantage can be changed by subtracting the number of time reductions during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation)
Discrimination between a discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition and a privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result. A predetermined first in a gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying information and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means in the display means. Based on the fact that the first gaming state setting means for setting the first gaming state and the second setting condition predetermined in the first gaming state are satisfied, the above-mentioned setting condition is satisfied. A second gaming state setting means for setting a second gaming state having a different degree of advantage from the first gaming state is provided, and the second setting condition is the movement of the identification information for showing the specific determination result. The gaming machine BG1 characterized in that it can be established at least during the execution of the target display.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning result, the game shifts to a winning state. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest of winning by differentiating the game values that can be acquired (for example). , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 25144417).

In addition, some of the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines are configured so that the gaming state after the hit state ends can be different depending on the hit type, and after the hit state ends. There are also some that are trying to improve the interest in pachinko.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, even if it is set to an advantageous gaming state, it is advantageous because there is a possibility that the advantageous state may be changed to the disadvantageous state by winning the winning. There was a problem that it was difficult to improve the interest of the player when it was a hit in the state.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BG1, a discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the establishment of the discriminating condition and a privilege that is advantageous to the player based on the discriminating result of the discriminating means becoming a specific discriminant result. It is provided with a privilege game executing means for executing a game, a display means capable of displaying identification information, and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means in the display means. The first gaming state setting means for setting the first gaming state and the second predetermined gaming state in the first gaming state based on the establishment of the first predetermined setting condition. A second gaming state setting means for setting a second gaming state having a different degree of advantage from the first gaming state based on the establishment of the setting condition is provided, and the second setting condition is the specific It can be at least established during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the determination result.

As a result, even during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information for showing a specific determination result, the game can be performed with the expectation that the second setting condition is satisfied, so that the player's game can be played. It has the effect of improving the interest.

In the gaming machine BG1, the discriminating means discriminates based on the establishment of a first discriminating means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the first discriminating condition and a second discriminating condition different from the first discriminating condition. The dynamic display means dynamically displays the first identification information for showing the discrimination result of the first discrimination means. It is composed of at least a target display means and a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for showing the discrimination result of the second discrimination means, and is the second setting condition. Is executed by the second discriminant means while the first dynamic display means is dynamically displaying the identification information to indicate the specific discriminant result in the first gaming state. The gaming machine BG2, which is characterized by being configured under conditions that can be established based on the facts.

According to the gaming machine BG2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BG1, the discriminating means is different from the first discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the establishment of the first discriminating condition and the first discriminating condition. The dynamic display means is composed of at least a second discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the establishment of the second discriminating condition, and the dynamic display means is a first for showing the discriminating result of the first discriminating means. 1 It is composed of at least a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information and a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for showing the discrimination result of the second discrimination means. The second setting condition is that while the first dynamic display means is executing the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the specific determination result in the first gaming state. , It is configured under the conditions that can be satisfied based on the execution of the discrimination by the second discrimination means.

As a result, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the discrimination by the second discrimination means is positively executed while the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the specific discrimination result is executed. It has the effect of improving the interest in the game.

In the gaming machine BG2, the second setting condition is that after the first gaming state is set and before the privileged game is executed, a predetermined number of determinations are made by the determining means. The gaming machine BG3 characterized in that it is established based on what has been done.

According to the gaming machine BG3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BG2, the second setting condition is predetermined after the first gaming state is set and before the privilege game is executed. Since it is established based on the execution of the discrimination by the discrimination means of the specific number of times, the discrimination by the discrimination means of the specific number of times is performed while the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the specific discrimination result is executed. It has the effect of realizing a novel playability that aims to end.

In the gaming machine BG2 or BG3, the first dynamic display means has a length of a predetermined specific period or longer as a dynamic display of the identification information for showing the specific determination result in the first gaming state. The dynamic display of the identification information during the dynamic display period of the above is executed, and the second dynamic display means is shorter than the specific period as the dynamic display of the identification information in the first gaming state. The gaming machine BG4, characterized in that the dynamic display of the identification information during the dynamic display period of the length is executed.

According to the gaming machine BG4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BG2 or BG3, the first dynamic display means is used as a dynamic display of the identification information for showing the specific determination result in the first gaming state. , The dynamic display of the identification information for a dynamic display period having a length of a predetermined specific period or longer is executed, and the second dynamic display means is the identification information in the first gaming state. As the dynamic display, the dynamic display of the identification information for a dynamic display period shorter than the specific period is executed.

As a result, in the first gaming state, when the dynamic display of the identification information for showing a specific determination result is executed by the first dynamic display means, the dynamic display by the second dynamic display means is further performed. Since it can be executed in large numbers, there is an effect that it can be easily set in the second gaming state.

In any of the game machines BG1 to BG4, the ball entry means on which the game ball can enter, the first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means, and the game ball from the first position. Discrimination between the variable means that can be changed to the second position that makes it difficult to enter the ball, the privilege giving means that grants a predetermined privilege based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means, and the discrimination means. A variable game execution in which the variable means executes a variable game in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the result that the second determination result is different from the specific determination result. The gaming machine BG5 comprising means and means, wherein the second gaming state is one in which the variable gaming is more likely to be executed than the first gaming state.

According to the gaming machine BG5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines BG1 to BG4, a ball entry means capable of entering the ball, a first position in which the gaming ball can enter the ball entry means, and the first position thereof. A variable means that can be changed to a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, and a privilege grant that grants a predetermined privilege based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means. Based on the fact that the discrimination result of the means and the discrimination means is a second discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result, the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period. A variable game executing means for executing a variable game is provided, and the second game state is easier to execute the variable game than the first game state.

As a result, it is possible to form a state in which the variable game is easily executed during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating a specific determination result, so that the variable game can be played until the privilege game is executed. It has the effect of being entertaining.

In any of the gaming machines BG1 to BG5, as a gaming state after the end of the privileged game, one of a plurality of gaming states including at least the first gaming state and the second gaming state is set. The post-game setting means is provided, and when the privilege game is executed in the second game state, the privilege game is executed by the privilege post-game setting means, as compared with the case where the privilege game is executed in the first game state. The gaming machine BG6 is configured so that the second gaming state can be easily set.

According to the gaming machine BG6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BG1 to BG5, a plurality of gaming states including at least the first gaming state and the second gaming state as the gaming state after the end of the privileged game. When the privileged game is executed in the second gaming state, rather than when the privileged game is executed in the first gaming state, provided with the privileged game post-setting means for setting any of the gaming states. It is configured so that the second gaming state can be easily set by the privileged gaming post-setting means.

As a result, by shifting to the second game state before the privilege game is executed, the second game state can be easily set even after the end of the privilege game, so that the identification information for showing a specific determination result is shown. There is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel playability in which the determination by the second discrimination means is executed more positively during the execution of the dynamic display of.

<Concept of the invention using the projection plate member 620 of the projection unit 600 as an example>
It is provided with a light transmitting member formed from a light transmitting material in a plate shape and having a reflecting portion, and a light irradiating means for irradiating the side end surface of the light transmitting member with light, and is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. In a gaming machine in which the light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member, the ratio of the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member to the light emitted from the light irradiating means is high. The gaming machine A1 is provided with an emission increasing means for increasing emission, and the emission increasing means is arranged outside the display area.

Here, a light transmitting member formed from a light transmitting material in a plate shape and having a reflecting portion, and a light irradiating means for irradiating the side end surface of the light transmitting member with light are provided from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. A gaming machine is known in which incident light is reflected by a reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of a light transmitting member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-29735). According to this type of gaming machine, for example, by disposing a light transmitting member on the front side of the liquid crystal display device in the game area, the player can display the liquid crystal display device via the light transmitting member in a normal state. On the other hand, when a predetermined gaming state is formed, the light emitted from the light irradiating means is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member, and the light traveling inside the light transmitting member is reflected by the reflecting portion. Then, it is emitted from the front of the light transmitting member. In this case, a plurality of groups composed of a plurality of reflecting surfaces are arranged in the reflecting portion, and each group forms a pattern or a pattern. Therefore, the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member can be recognized by the player as a pattern or a pattern. That is, along with the display of the liquid crystal display device, a pattern or a pattern can be made to appear (display) on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device.

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member is weak. Therefore, it becomes difficult to clearly show (display) a pattern or a pattern. In this case, if the output of the light irradiation means is increased, not only the cost and power consumption are increased, but also the amount of heat generated is increased, which causes a problem that heat affects other members and devices.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, since the emission increasing means for increasing the ratio of the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member to the light emitted from the light irradiating means is provided, the light reflected by the reflecting portion is provided. The light emitted from the front of the transmissive member can be strengthened. As a result, patterns and patterns can be clearly highlighted (displayed). Further, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the light irradiation means, the calorific value can be reduced and the influence of heat on other members and devices can be suppressed. Further, since the emission increasing means is arranged outside the display area, it can be difficult for the player to see it, and it is possible to suppress deterioration of the appearance by that amount.

The position of forming the reflective portion of the light transmitting member may be, for example, the back surface of the light transmitting member or the inside of the light transmitting member.

In the gaming machine A1, the emission increasing means includes an outer edge member arranged along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine A2, since the emission increasing means includes an outer edge member arranged along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member, the light emitting means irradiates the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Not only the light that reaches directly but also the light that is emitted from the light irradiating means and reflected by the outer edge member can be incidented from the side end surface of the light transmitting member, and the light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member by that amount can be incident. The light collection efficiency can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the light that reaches the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member among the light emitted from the light irradiating means, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened. , Patterns and patterns can be clearly highlighted (displayed). Further, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the light irradiation means, the calorific value can be reduced and the influence of heat on other members and devices can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, when the emission increasing means includes the outer edge member arranged along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member, the other device in the game area emits light. Can prevent the outer edge member from blocking the light of the other device and incident light from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, when the light irradiating means is turned off (when the light is not incident on the light transmitting member and the pattern or pattern is not displayed on the front of the light transmitting member), the light from another device is incident on the light transmitting member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pattern or pattern from being displayed on the front of the light transmitting member.

In the gaming machine A2, the gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the outer edge member is arranged on each of the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect of the game machine A2, the outer edge members are arranged on the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member, respectively. The light that is not directly incident on the side end surface and that deviates to the front side of the light transmitting member and the light that deviates to the back side are reflected by the front outer edge member and the back outer edge member, respectively, and incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. be able to. Therefore, the light condensing efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be further improved by that amount.

Further, by providing the outer edge member on each of the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member in this way, even if the light emitted by another device in the gaming area arrives from either the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member. Since it can be blocked by each of the front outer edge member and the back outer edge member, it is possible to suppress the incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, when the light irradiating means is turned off (when the light is not incident on the light transmitting member and the pattern or pattern is not displayed on the front of the light transmitting member), the light from another device is incident on the light transmitting member. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably suppress the display of patterns and patterns on the front surface of the light transmitting member.

In the gaming machine A2 or A3, the gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the outer edge member is arranged so as to project outward from the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of the game machine A2 or A3, the outer edge member is arranged so as to project outward from the side end surface of the light transmitting member, so that the light emitted from the light irradiating means can be emitted. , It is possible to reflect the light at the overhanging portion of the outer edge member (the surface connected to the side end surface of the light transmitting member) so that the light can be easily incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the light condensing efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be further improved by that amount.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the outer edge member is formed of a material having a refractive index smaller than that of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine A5, in any of the effects of the game machines A2 to A4, the outer edge member is formed of a material having a refractive index smaller than that of the light transmitting member, and thus is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Light can be easily reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reached to the reflecting portion, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened to make the pattern or pattern clear. It can be highlighted (displayed).

That is, for example, when the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are formed of a material having the same refractive index, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member is less likely to be reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. It is easily transmitted to the outer edge member. The light transmitted to the outer edge member is totally reflected (or partially reflected) on the outer surface (boundary with air) of the outer edge portion and then returned to the light transmitting member, but the light returned from the outer edge member to the light transmitting member. Includes not only those traveling in the direction toward the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member but also those traveling in the direction toward the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the light that reaches the reflecting portion is reduced. On the other hand, like the game machine A4, by forming the outer edge member from a material having a refractive index smaller than that of the light transmitting member, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be collected from the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. Since it can be easily reflected (or can be totally reflected) at the boundary with and, it is possible to secure the light that reaches the reflecting portion.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A5, the gaming machine A6 is characterized in that the outer edge member is arranged in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine A6, in the effect of any of the game machines A2 to A5, the outer edge member is arranged in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member. Light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reflected by the front surface or the back surface (boundary with air) of the light transmitting member. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reached to the reflecting portion, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened to make the pattern or pattern clear. It can be highlighted (displayed).

That is, for example, when the refractive index of the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are the same or the difference in the refractive index is relatively small, if the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are in close contact with each other, the side end surface of the light transmitting member The incident light is less likely to be reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member, and is easily transmitted to the outer edge member. The light transmitted to the outer edge member is totally reflected (or partially reflected) on the outer surface (boundary with air) of the outer edge portion and then returned to the light transmitting member, but the light returned from the outer edge member to the light transmitting member. Includes not only those traveling in the direction toward the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member but also those traveling in the direction toward the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the light that reaches the reflecting portion is reduced. On the other hand, like the game machine A5, by arranging the outer edge member in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member, the light is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Since the light can be easily reflected (or can be totally reflected) on the front surface or the back surface (boundary with air) of the light transmitting member, the light reaching the reflecting portion can be secured.

In any of the game machines A2 to A6, a rotation mechanism for rotatably supporting the light transmitting member and applying a rotational driving force to the light transmitting member is provided, and the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape. , A curved rack gear is engraved along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface or the inner peripheral surface of the annular shape, and the rotation mechanism rotationally drives a pinion gear meshed with the curved rack gear of the outer edge member and the pinion gear. A game machine A7 characterized by being provided with a driving means.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A2 to A6, the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape and along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface or the inner peripheral surface of the annular shape. A curved rack gear is engraved, and the rotation mechanism includes a pinion gear meshed with the curved rack gear of the outer edge member and a drive means for rotationally driving the pinion gear. The rotation of the pinion gear can be transmitted to the outer edge member via the curved rack gear, whereby the light transmitting member can be rotated together with the outer edge member. Therefore, the pattern or pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member can be visually recognized by the player in a displaced (rotated) state.

In this case, the outer edge member has both the role of condensing the light emitted from the light irradiating means on the side end surface of the light transmitting member and the role of transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the light transmitting member to rotate the light. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts by that amount, reduce the product cost, and improve the reliability due to the simplification of the structure.

In any of the game machines A2 to A7, the light transmitting member is rotatably supported and a rotation mechanism for applying a rotational driving force to the light transmitting member is provided, and the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape. The gaming machine A8 is characterized in that a guide groove is recessed along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface of the annular shape, and the rotation mechanism includes a plurality of support rings guided along the guide groove.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A2 to A7, the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape, and the guide groove is formed along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface of the annular shape. Since the rotating mechanism is recessed and includes a plurality of support rings guided along the guide groove, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is exposed by the action of the guide groove and the support ring, that is, light. The light transmitting member can be rotatably supported in a state where light can be incident from the side end surface of the transmitting member. Therefore, by rotating the light transmitting member, the pattern or pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member can be visually recognized by the player in a displaced (rotated) state.

In this case, the outer edge member can have both the role of condensing the light emitted from the light irradiating means on the side end surface of the light transmitting member and the role of rotatably supporting the light transmitting member together with the support ring. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, the product cost can be reduced, and the reliability can be improved by simplifying the structure.

The support ring may be rotatably pivotally supported, or may be non-rotatably fixed. In this case, as the form in which the support ring is guided along the guide groove, the support ring rotatably supported by the shaft rolls along the guide groove or rolls while sliding, or becomes non-rotatable. An example is a mode in which a fixed support ring slides along a guide groove.

Further, in the gaming machine A8 which is subordinate to the gaming machine A7, the outer edge member in which the curved rack gear is engraved is on either the front or the back surface of the light transmitting member, and the outer edge member in which the guide groove is recessed is the light transmitting member. It is preferable to dispose of them on the other side of the front surface or the back surface, respectively. That is, by disposing the outer edge member on the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member, the light radiated from the light irradiating means is not directly incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member, and the front surface of the light transmitting member. This is because the light that deviates to the side and the light that deviates to the back side can be reflected by the outer edge member on the front surface and the outer edge member on the back surface, respectively, and incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Further, by disposing the outer edge member on the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member in this way, the light emitted by the other device in the game area reaches from either the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member. Even in this case, it can be blocked by each of the front outer edge member and the back outer edge member, and it is possible to suppress the incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

In the gaming machine A8, the outer peripheral side of the outer edge member is formed so as to face the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member at a predetermined interval, and the facing space between the outer edge member and the light transmitting member is the guide. A gaming machine A9 characterized by being a groove.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effect of the game machine A8, the outer peripheral side thereof is formed in a shape in which the outer peripheral side thereof faces the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member at a predetermined interval, and the outer edge member and the light transmitting member are formed. Since the space opposite to the guide groove is used as a guide groove, it is possible to reduce the size of the structure composed of the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. That is, by supporting one inner wall of the guide groove on the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member, it is not necessary to form the outer edge member in a U-shaped cross section, and the thickness dimension of the outer edge member can be reduced. Therefore, the size of the above-mentioned structure can be reduced accordingly.

Further, since the outer edge member is arranged in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member is directed to the front surface of the light transmitting member. Alternatively, it can be easily reflected on the back surface (boundary with air). As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reached to the reflecting portion, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened to make the pattern or pattern clear. It can be highlighted (displayed).

In any of the game machines A2 to A9, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is formed orthogonal to the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member, and the light irradiating means has a direction of irradiating light from the irradiating surface. The gaming machine A10 is characterized in that the irradiation surface is arranged so as to face the side end surface of the light transmitting member in a posture orthogonal to the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A2 to A9, the side end faces of the light transmitting member are formed orthogonal to the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member, and the light irradiating means thereof irradiates the light transmitting member. Since the irradiation surface is arranged so as to face the side end surface of the light transmitting member in a posture in which the irradiation direction of light from the surface is orthogonal to the side end surface of the light transmitting member, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is irradiated from the light irradiation means. The light incident from the light can be easily reflected by the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reached to the reflecting portion, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened to make the pattern or pattern clear. It can be highlighted (displayed).

<Concept of the invention using the irradiation unit 650 of the projection unit 600 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a target member to be irradiated with light and a plurality of light emitting means dispersedly arranged around the target member in a posture in which each of the target members faces an irradiation surface, the plurality of light emitting means. It is provided with one or a plurality of substrate members on which at least two or more of the light emitting means are mounted and elastically deformable, and a base member that holds the substrate member in a predetermined elastically deformed posture. Characteristic gaming machine B1.

Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a target member to be irradiated with light and a plurality of light emitting means arranged in such a posture that each of the target members faces an irradiation surface (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015). -29735 (publication). According to this gaming machine, by irradiating light from a light emitting means and incident light from the outer peripheral surface of the target member, the incident light is advanced inside the light transmitting member and reflected by a reflecting portion. It can be emitted from the front of the light transmitting member. In this case, the applicant of the present application forms the target member in a disk shape from a light-transmitting material and forms a reflective portion, while irradiating a plurality of light emitting means on the outer peripheral surface of the disk shape (target member). We devised a structure in which the light emitted from each light emitting means is incident from the outer peripheral surface of the target member (not known at the time of filing the present application).

However, it has been newly found that in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since it is necessary to dispose a plurality of light emitting means around the target member, there is a problem that the disposition work is troublesome. In particular, since it is necessary to dispose of the plurality of light emitting means in a posture in which each irradiation surface is directed toward the outer peripheral surface of the target member (that is, each has a different direction), the disposition work is troublesome from this point as well. ..

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, at least two or more light emitting means are mounted and one or a plurality of substrate members formed so as to be elastically deformable, and the substrate members are held in a predetermined elastically deformed posture. By disposing one substrate member on the base member, it is possible to complete the disposing work of at least two or more light emitting means. Therefore, the labor of arranging the light emitting means can be reduced accordingly.

Further, when the substrate member is arranged on the base member, the substrate member is held in a predetermined elastically deformed posture, so that the direction of the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be defined. That is, since it is not necessary to dispose of the plurality of light emitting means in a posture in which their irradiation surfaces are individually directed toward the outer peripheral surface of the target member, the labor of disposing the light emitting means can be suppressed from this point as well.

The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that the gaming machine B1 is provided with a block body which is formed to have higher rigidity than the substrate member and is arranged on the substrate member, and the block body is held by the base member.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the block body is formed to have higher rigidity than the board member and is provided on the board member, and the block body is held by the base member. , It is possible to suppress warpage and bending of the substrate member and easily define the posture of the substrate member. As a result, the posture of the light emitting means can be suppressed from being affected by the warp or bending of the substrate member, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be easily maintained.

In the gaming machine B2, the gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the light emitting means is arranged in a region of the substrate member where the block body is arranged.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, the light emitting means is arranged in the region where the block body is arranged in the substrate member, so that the posture of the light emitting means is the warp of the substrate member. It is possible to more reliably suppress the influence of bending and bending. Therefore, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the direction can be further easily maintained.

In the gaming machines B2 or B3, a plurality of the block bodies are arranged on the substrate members at predetermined intervals, and the base members are elastically deformed from the substrate members located between the block bodies. A gaming machine B4 characterized by being held by the body.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of the game machine B2 or B3, a plurality of block bodies are arranged on the board members at predetermined intervals, and the board members located between the block bodies are elastically arranged. Since it is held by the base body in a deformed (bent) posture, the posture of the light emitting means (direction of the irradiation surface) is stabilized as compared with the case where the substrate member in the elastically deformed posture is directly held by the base member. be able to.

In any of the gaming machines B2 to B4, the light emitting means is arranged in front of the substrate member facing the target member, and the block body is the substrate member on the opposite side to the target member. A gaming machine B5 characterized by being arranged on the back surface.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B2 to B4, the light emitting means is arranged in front of the substrate member facing the target member, and the block body is on the opposite side of the target member. Since it is arranged on the back surface of the substrate member, the light emitting means can be brought closer to the target member while obtaining the effect of stabilizing the posture of the substrate member by the block body.

In the gaming machine B5, the block body is fastened and fixed by screws from the front surface of the board member, and the head of the screw is projected to the front surface of the board member.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, the block body is fastened and fixed by screws from the front surface of the substrate member, and the head of the screw protrudes from the front surface of the substrate member, so that the light emitting means can be used. It can be protected by the head of the screw. That is, for example, when the movable member is displaced to the front surface of the substrate member, the head of the screw is brought into contact with the member, and it is possible to prevent the member from being in contact with the light emitting means and being damaged.

In the gaming machine B6, the block body is fastened and fixed by at least two screws, and the light emitting means is arranged between the heads of the two screws.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, the block body is fastened and fixed by at least two screws, and the light emitting means is arranged between the heads of the two screws. The light emitting means can be easily protected by the head of the screw.

It is preferable that the two screws are arranged along the displacement direction of the movable member. This is because by disposing the light emitting means between the heads of the screws arranged in this way, it is possible to easily bring the movable member into contact with the head of the screw, and it is possible to easily protect the light emitting means.

In any of the gaming machines B2 to B7, a protrusion is projected from one of the base body or the block body, and a fitting hole for receiving and fitting the protrusion is formed on the other side of the base body or the block body. A gaming machine B8 characterized by being recessed in.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of either the game machines B2 to B7, a protrusion is projected on one of the base body and the block body, and the protrusion is received and fitted to the one of the base body and the block body. Since the hole is recessed in the other side of the base body or the block body, the block body can be arranged in the base body by fitting the protrusion into the fitting hole, and the labor of the arrangement work can be suppressed. .. In particular, when a plurality of block bodies are arranged on a substrate member and are arranged in an elastically deformed (bent) posture between the block bodies, one of the block bodies is positioned (temporarily fixed) by fitting. ), The substrate member can be elastically deformed (bent) and the other block body can be fitted, so that the workability of the arrangement work can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines B2 to B8, the block body has a recess on the surface on the side where the board member is disposed, and the electronic component disposed on the substrate member is housed in the recess of the block body. A gaming machine B9 characterized by being played.

According to the gaming machine B9, in any of the gaming machines B2 to B8, the block body is provided with a recess on the surface on the side where the block body is disposed, and is disposed on the substrate member in the recess of the block body. Since the electronic parts are stored, the electronic parts can be covered and protected by the block body. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent a movable member from coming into contact with an electronic component and being damaged.

<Concept of the invention using the vertical displacement unit 800 as an example>
A game including a base member, a displacement member disposed on the base member and displaceably formed between the first position and the second position, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member to displace it. In the machine, the displacement member includes an elastic member that is elastically deformed as it is displaced from the first position to the second position, and the displacement member moves from the first position to the second position by the action of gravity. In a state of being disposed on the base member in a form of being displaced in the direction and the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released, at a predetermined position between the first position and the second position. A gaming machine C1 characterized in that the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced.

Here, the base member, the displacement member disposed on the base member and displaceably formed between the first position and the second position, and the driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member to displace it. A game machine is known to provide an effect by displacement of a displacement member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-239870). In this case, for example, in a normal state, the displacement member is placed in a retracted position (for example, either the first position or the second position) which is invisible to the player or is on the outer edge side of the game area, while a predetermined game. When the state is formed, the displacement member is displaced toward the overhanging position (the other of the first position or the second position) overhanging the game area, and the movement of the displacement member displaced toward the overhanging position is played. The production is performed so that the person can see it. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and the displacement member is displaced at a constant displacement speed, so that it is difficult to make the displacement member perform an interesting displacement. There was a problem that there was.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the displacement member is provided with an elastic member that is elastically deformed as the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position, and the displacement member is the first from the first position due to the action of gravity. It is arranged on the base member in a form of being displaced in the direction toward the two positions, and in a state where the driving force is released from the driving means to the displacement member, at a predetermined position between the first position and the second position. Since the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, the reciprocating displacement (approximately simple vibration) due to the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member around this equilibrium position (predetermined position). ) Can be performed by the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the displacement member in the gravity direction can be regarded as the normal projection motion of the constant velocity circular motion, and the displacement velocity can be changed, so that the displacement member can be displaced in an interesting manner.

On the other hand, if a driving force is applied from the driving means to the displacement member, the displacement member is displaced between the first position and the second position in a manner different from the above-mentioned displacement (movement of normal projection of constant velocity circular motion). It is possible to increase the variation of displacement accordingly. That is, the variation of displacement can be increased only by switching whether or not the driving force is applied from the driving means to the displacement member, and the structure and control do not need to be complicated, so that the product cost can be reduced and the reliability can be improved. It can be improved.

In the gaming machine C1, the displacement member is characterized in that one end side is rotatably supported by the base member and the other end side is moved up and down between the first position and the second position. Game machine C2.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, one end side is rotatably supported by the base member, and the other end side is moved up and down between the first position and the second position. , When the displacement member is made to perform reciprocating displacement (approximately simple vibration) due to the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member by releasing the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member. The displacement of the other end of the displacement member can be a displacement that combines not only a linear motion in the vertical direction but also a rotational motion centered on one end side. As a result, it is possible to make such a displacement member perform an interesting displacement.

The gaming machine C2 includes a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, and the transmitting means is a rotating member rotatably arranged on the base member and rotated by the driving force of the driving means. The gaming machine C3 is characterized by comprising a connecting member having one end rotatably connected to a position eccentric from the rotation center of the rotating member and the other end rotatably connected to the displacement member.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C2, the transmission means are rotatably arranged on the base member and rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the eccentricity from the rotation center of the rotating member. Since one end is connected to the displaced position and the other end is connected to the displacement member, the driving force applied to the displacement member is released from the driving means, and the action of gravity and the elastic recovery of the elastic member are released. When reciprocating displacement (approximately simple vibration) due to force is performed on the displacement member, the displacement member pushes and pulls the connecting member to rotate the rotating member, and the pushing and pulling causes the rotating member to rotate. Since the posture of the connecting member is changed, the magnitude of the force component in the direction of rotating the rotating member among the forces in the push-pull direction can be changed. That is, when the displacement member is reciprocally displaced, the magnitude of the resistance that the displacement member receives from the transmission means can be changed, and as a result, the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member can be changed. It is possible to make such a displacement member perform an interesting displacement.

In the game machine C3, at the predetermined position where the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, with respect to the direction connecting the rotation center of the rotating member and the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the directions connecting the connecting positions of the rotating member and the connecting member and the connecting positions of the connecting member and the displacement member are substantially orthogonal to each other.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of the game machine C3, at a predetermined position where the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, the rotation center of the rotating member and the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member are connected. Since the direction connecting the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member is substantially orthogonal to the direction connecting the and, the direction of rotating the rotating member among the forces in the push-pull direction. The magnitude of the force component can be maximized at the equilibrium position (predetermined position), and the force component can be reduced in any direction of pushing or pulling from the equilibrium position. That is, when the displacement member is reciprocally displaced, the resistance received by the displacement member from the transmission means can be changed substantially symmetrically with respect to the equilibrium position, so that the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member can be easily continued.

In the gaming machine C3 or C4, one of the rotating member or the connecting member includes a projecting portion projecting toward the other, and the predetermined position in the movable range between the first position and the second position. When the displacement member is displaced in the central range including the above, the projecting portion is made non-opposed to the other of the rotating member or the connecting member, and the first position or the second position is smaller than the central range. The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that when the displacement member is displaced in an outer range close to the above, the projecting portion faces the other of the rotating member or the connecting member so as to be abuttable.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C3 or C4, one of the rotating or connecting members comprises a protruding portion that projects towards the other and is between the first and second positions. When the displacement member is displaced in the central side range including the predetermined position in the movable range of the above, the projecting portion is made non-opposed to the other of the rotating member or the connecting member, and the first position or the first position from the central side range or When the displacement member is displaced in the outer range close to the second position, the projecting portion faces the other of the rotating member or the connecting member, so that the driving force applied from the driving means to the displacement member is released. , When the displacement member is made to perform reciprocating displacement centered on the equilibrium position (predetermined position), the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member is smoothed by avoiding the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the projecting portion in the central range. On the other hand, when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, the projecting portion is made to face the other of the rotating member or the connecting member so as to be abuttable in the outer range, and the displacement members are rotated. It is possible to suppress rattling between the member and the connecting member.

In the gaming machine C5, the outer range is set closer to the first position than the center side range, and the center side range is set to a range including the predetermined position and the second position. A gaming machine C6 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C5, the outer range is set closer to the first position than the central side range, and the central side range includes a predetermined position and a second position. Since it is set in the range, when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the posture of the displacement member can be changed by suppressing the rattling between the rotating member and the connecting member by using the projecting portion. On the other hand, when the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position by the driving force of the driving means, it is possible to avoid the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the projecting portion, which acts on the displacement member. It is possible to smoothly displace the displacement member while also utilizing gravity.

For example, when the first position is the retracted position where the displacement member is retracted to the outer edge side of the game area, and the second position is the overhang position where the displacement member projects toward the center side of the game area. At the first position (retracted position), rattling of the displacement member can be suppressed to improve the appearance and durability, and the effect of other members can be suppressed from being hindered, and the displacement member can be suppressed. Is displaced from the first position to the second position (overhanging position), it can be quickly extended (displaced) to the second position, and the effect of the overhanging operation can be enhanced. ..

In the gaming machine C6, at the second position, the rotation center of the rotating member, the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member are located substantially in a straight line. The gaming machine C7.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect of the game machine C6, at the second position, the rotation center of the rotating member, the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member are substantially straight. Since it is located on the line, even if the displacement member pushes and pulls the connecting member to rotate the rotating member, the pushing and pulling direction is toward the center of rotation of the rotating member, and the force component in the direction of rotating the rotating member is generated. A state that does not occur (that is, a dead point) can be formed. Therefore, when the displacement member is displaced toward the second position, the second displacement member can be smoothly (quickly) displaced while avoiding the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the projecting portion. After being placed at the position, the action of the dead center described above suppresses the rattling of the displacement member, and the appearance and durability can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines C3 to C7, the connecting member includes a contact portion formed so as to be able to contact the base member, and the contact portion is the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member and the rotation. It is characterized in that it is arranged on a substantially straight line connecting the connecting positions of the member and the connecting member, and is arranged on the side opposite to the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member with the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member interposed therebetween. Game machine C8.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C3 to C7, the connecting member includes a contact portion formed so as to be able to contact the base member, and the contact portion is a displacement member and a base. Since it is on a substantially straight line connecting the connecting position of the member and the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and is arranged on the opposite side of the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member across the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member. , When the displacement member rattles against the base member, the contact portion of the connecting member comes into contact with the base member, so that the connecting portion of the rotating member and the connecting member (one end of the rotating member and the connecting member can rotate). It is possible to easily suppress the inclination of the rotating shaft) with respect to the shaft support hole of the portion connected to. As a result, the driving force of the driving means can be smoothly transmitted to the displacement member via the transmitting means.

<Concept of the invention using the displacement unit 400 as an example>
In a gaming machine including a base member, a displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member, and a drive means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, the drive means are the first drive means and the first drive means. Two driving means are provided, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the first driving means, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the second driving means. The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that the displacement member is displaced in a different manner.

Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a base member, a displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, and performing an effect by displacement of the displacement member. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-239870). In this case, for example, in a normal state, the displacement member is placed in a retracted position that is invisible to the player or is on the outer edge side of the game area, while when a predetermined game state is formed, the displacement member is stretched over the game area. The displacement member is displaced toward the protruding position, and the player is made to visually recognize the operation of the displacement member displaced toward the overhanging position.

However, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that the effect of the effect due to the displacement of the displacement member is insufficient. Specifically, in the conventional gaming machine, the displacement mode (trajectory when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited to one, so the effect of the displacement of the displacement member is one pattern. Therefore, it was difficult to produce a surprising effect for the player. Even if the driving force of the driving means is changed by varying the strength, the displacement speed of the displacement member only increases or decreases, and the displacement mode (trajectory) is still constant. It was difficult to do.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the driving means includes a first driving means and a second driving means, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the first driving means. (2) Since the displacement member is displaced in a different manner depending on the case where the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the driving means, the effect of the effect of the displacement of the displacement member can be enhanced. That is, unlike the conventional product in which the displacement mode of the displacement member (trajectory when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited in one way, the effect is not one pattern, and at least two displacement members are used. Since the displacement can be performed according to the displacement mode, the player can perform a surprising effect by switching the displacement mode.

In the gaming machine D1, a first member that is slidably displaceable on the base member and is driven by the first drive means, and a second drive means that is slidably displaceable on the base member. A gaming machine D2 comprising a second member driven by the displacement member, wherein the first portion and the second portion of the displacement member are connected to the first member and the second member at least rotatably, respectively. ..

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the first member is displaceably displaced on the base member and is slidably displaceable on the base member and the first member driven by the first drive means. The first and second parts of the displacement member are at least rotatably connected to the first and second members, respectively, with a second member driven by the second drive means. When the first member is slidably displaced by the driving force of the first driving means, it is possible to form a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the second portion side, while the second member is displaced by the driving force of the second driving means. When the member is slidably displaced, it is possible to form a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the first portion side. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least two displacement modes, it is possible to perform a surprising effect of the player by switching the displacement mode.

In particular, according to the game machine D2, the two displacement modes are not formed by making the center of rotation the same and different the direction of rotation, but forming the center of rotation differently and the center of rotation differently. Therefore, the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member can be made large, and the player can easily perform a surprising effect.

In the gaming machine D2, the first member and the second member are disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a connecting pin protruding from the first portion of the displacement member or one of the first members is provided. A gaming machine D3 characterized in that it is rotatably and slidably inserted into a guide groove formed on the other side.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D2, the first member and the second member are arranged on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and one of the first part or the first member of the displacement member. Since the connecting pin projecting from is rotatably and slidably inserted into the guide groove formed on the other side, the first member is linearly displaced by the driving force of the first driving means or the driving force of the second driving means. A displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the second portion side and a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the first portion side are formed depending on whether the second member is linearly displaced. can. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least two displacement modes, it is possible to perform a surprising effect of the player by switching the displacement mode.

In this case, since the first member and the second member are arranged on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, it is not necessary to have a complicated structure as in the case of sliding displacement with a curved locus (with a curved locus). If there is, it is necessary to provide not only a mechanism for guiding the first member and the second member in a curved shape but also a mechanism for continuously applying a driving force to the first member and the second member that are displaced in a curved shape. (Given), for example, a rack pinion mechanism can be utilized and its structure can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost and improve the durability and the reliability of operation.

In the gaming machine D3, the gaming machine D4 is characterized in that the direction of the linear displacement of the first member and the direction of the linear displacement of the second member are substantially parallel to each other.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of the game machine D3, the direction of the linear displacement of the first member and the direction of the linear displacement of the second member are substantially parallel to each other. In addition to the displacement mode in which only one of the driving means is driven to rotate the entire displacement member, the displacement in which both the first driving means and the second driving means are driven to linearly displace (for example, traverse) the entire displacement member. Aspects can be formed. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least three different displacement modes, it is possible to easily perform a surprising effect of the player by switching such displacement modes.

In particular, according to the game machine D4, as the displacement mode of the displacement member, the type of displacement (rotation) is the same, but the type of displacement itself is different in addition to the one that makes the direction of rotation different from the position of the center of rotation. (That is, rotation and linear displacement can be formed), so that the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member can be further increased, and it is possible to further facilitate the surprising effect of the player.

In the gaming machine D4, when the first member and the second member are driven by the first driving means and the second driving means, respectively, the displacement speed of the first member and the displacement speed of the second member are different. A gaming machine D5 characterized by being speed.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of the game machine D4, when the first member and the second member are driven by the first drive means and the second drive means, respectively, the displacement speed of the first member and the second member. Since the displacement velocity is different from the displacement velocity of the member, the displacement of the displacement member can include the rotational motion and the linear motion. That is, the displacement member can be not only displaced (linear motion) in parallel with the direction of linear displacement of the first member and the second member while maintaining its posture, but can also be linearly moved while rotating its posture. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to perform a surprising effect.

It should be noted that it is impossible to displace the displacement member in a displacement mode that combines such rotational motion and linear motion with the conventional configuration in which the displacement member is slid along the slide groove by the driving force of one driving means. , It is possible for the first time to use the driving means of 2 as in the present invention.

In any of the game machines D1 to D5, a second displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member is provided, and when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the first driving means, the displacement thereof. The second displacement member is displaced together with the member, while the second displacement member is maintained in a stopped state when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the second driving means. Amusement machine D6.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D5, a second displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member is provided, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the first driving means. When the displacement member is displaced, the second displacement member is displaced together with the displacement member, while when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the second driving means, the second displacement member is maintained in the stopped state. , The device (change) between the displacement mode by the first drive means and the displacement mode by the second drive means can be increased. Therefore, by switching such a displacement mode, it is possible to easily perform a surprising effect of the player.

<Concept of the invention using the projection unit 5600 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a target member to be irradiated with light and a light irradiating means for irradiating the target member with light, at least one or both of the target member and the light irradiating means is formed displaceably. The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that the irradiation mode of the target member by the light irradiation means is changed by the displacement of one or both of the above.

Here, a game in which a displacement member displaceably formed between the first position and the second position and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member to displace the displacement member are provided, and an effect is produced by the displacement of the displacement member. The machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-239870). In this gaming machine, a light irradiation means (LED) is arranged inside the displacement member, and a translucent portion made of a light transmissive material is provided on the front surface (the surface on the player side) of the displacement member, and the translucency thereof is provided. By irradiating the light portion from the back surface with the light irradiating means, the player can visually recognize the form in which a part of the displacement member (translucent portion) is emitting light. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the irradiation mode of the target member is constant by the light irradiation means, there is a problem that there is little change in the mode visually recognized by the player, and it is difficult to have a hobby.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, at least one or both of the target member and the light irradiation means are formed so as to be displaceable, and the displacement of one or both changes the irradiation mode of the target member by the light irradiation means. It is possible to change the mode in which the player visually recognizes. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to have an interest.

As the form in which the light irradiation mode is changed, for example, the position of the target member irradiated by the light irradiation means is changed, and the distance from the irradiation surface of the light irradiation means to the irradiation position of the target member is changed. The form to be used, the form in which these are combined, and the like are exemplified.

The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that the gaming machine E1 includes a base member, the light irradiation means is fixed to the base member, and the target member is displaceably arranged on the base member.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the light irradiating means is fixed to the base member, and the target member is displaceably arranged on the base member. The target wiring can be fixed, and the occurrence of disconnection can be suppressed accordingly.

In the game machine E2, a shielding member having an opening and being arranged on the base member is provided, and a part of the target member is made visible to the player from the opening of the shielding member, and the target member is illuminated by light. Formed from a transmissive material in a plate shape and provided with a reflecting portion, the light emitted from the light irradiating means and incident from the side end surface is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the target member. A game machine E3 featuring.

Here, in the reflecting portion, a plurality of groups composed of a plurality of reflecting surfaces are arranged, and each group forms a pattern or a pattern. Therefore, the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member can be recognized by the player as a pattern or a pattern.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, a shielding member having an opening and arranged on the base member is provided, and a part of the target member is visually recognized by the player from the opening of the shielding member. By displacing the target member, different parts of the target member can be visually recognized by the player through the opening of the shielding member.

For example, a first position in which the first group among a plurality of groups constituting the reflective portion is visible through the opening, and a second group different from the first group are openings. When the target member is displaceable from the second position which becomes visible via While making the player visually recognize the first pattern or pattern to be formed, by displacing the target member from the first position to the second position, the pattern or pattern to be visually recognized by the player through the opening of the shielding member can be obtained. , Can be changed to a second pattern or pattern formed by the second group.

In this case, since the target member is formed of a light-transmitting material, when the target member is displaced in order to change the pattern or pattern visually recognized by the player, the light from the light irradiation means is not irradiated. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the target member is displaced.

In the game machine E3, the target member is formed in a circular shape or an annular shape in a front view, and is rotatably arranged on the base member with the center of the circular shape or the annular shape as a rotation center. Game machine E4 to play.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect of the game machine E3, the target member is formed in a front view circular shape or an annular shape, and can rotate to the base member with the center of the circular shape or the annular shape as the center of rotation. Since it is arranged in, the target member is arranged while ensuring the number of patterns and patterns to be visually recognized by the player through the opening of the shielding member, as compared with the case where the target member can be slidably displaced. Space required for can be suppressed.

In the game machine E2, the target member is formed of a light-transmitting material in the shape of a circular plate in front view and has a reflecting portion, and receives light emitted from the light irradiating means and incident from the side end surface. A plurality of light irradiation means are distributed and arranged around the target member in a posture in which the irradiation surface is directed toward the side end surface of the target member. The gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the target member is rotatably arranged on the base member with the center of the circular shape as the center of rotation.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of the game machine E6, the target member is formed of a light-transmitting material into a circular plate shape and has a reflecting portion, and is irradiated from the light irradiation means and from the side end surface. The incident light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the target member, and a plurality of light irradiation means are distributed around the target member in a posture in which the irradiation surface is directed to the side end surface of the target member. Therefore, by rotating the target member while irradiating light from the light irradiation means, the player can visually recognize the pattern or pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front of the target member in a rotated state. can.

In the gaming machine E5, the plurality of light irradiating means are distributed and arranged in the circumferential direction at positions equidistant from the rotation center of the target member.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effect of the game machine E5, the plurality of light irradiation means are distributed and arranged in the circumferential direction at positions equidistant from the rotation center of the target member, so that the rotation position of the target member ( Regardless of the phase), the light emitted from the front of the target member can be easily kept constant. That is, it is possible to stably form a pattern or a pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front surface of the target member.

The gaming machine E7 is characterized in that the gaming machine E1 includes a base member, and the light irradiation means and the target member are displaceably arranged on the base member.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the light irradiation means and the target member are displaceably arranged on the base member. It is possible to increase the variation of the change of the irradiation mode. Therefore, it is possible to further change the mode in which the player visually recognizes, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to have an interest.

The gaming machine E7 includes a driving means for applying a driving force to the target member to displace it, and the light irradiation means is brought into contact with the target member displaced by the driving force applied from the driving means. The gaming machine E8 is characterized in that it is displaced together with the target member.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E7, a driving means for applying a driving force to the target member to displace it is provided, and the light irradiation means is a target displaced by the driving force applied from the driving means. When the members are in contact with each other, they are displaced together with the target member, so that the drive means for displacing the target member can also be used, and it is not necessary to separately provide a drive means for displacing the light irradiation means. can.

<Characteristic F group> (Countdown notice can be set freely)
Among the different production periods, the effect period setting means for setting one effect period, the specific effect execution means for executing the specific effect in the specific period set within the one effect period, and the specific effect execution means are described above. A second information different from the first information, in which a notification effect execution means for executing a notification effect for notifying in advance that a specific effect is to be executed and a trigger for starting the notification effect are set based on a predetermined first information. The gaming machine F1 is characterized by having a notification effect setting means for setting an end trigger of the notification effect based on information.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable effect for a predetermined period to suggest to the player whether or not the player has won the prize. Then, among the effects executed for a predetermined period, a game in which a advance notification effect (countdown effect) that notifies the player in advance of the timing at which a specific effect (for example, a cut-in effect) is executed can be executed. There is a machine. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-198568).

In such a conventional gaming machine, by notifying the player in advance of the timing at which a specific effect is executed, it is possible to execute the variable effect while increasing the player's expectation for a big hit. However, when it is determined that the advance notification effect is to be executed, the period for executing the advance notification effect (that is, the start timing and the end timing) is set, so that the effect content becomes monotonous. There was a problem that the player got tired of the production early. Further, in the conventional gaming machine having the above-described configuration, the effect mode of the advance notification effect is changed (for example, a specific effect to be the target of the advance notification effect is changed while the advance notification effect is being executed. ), And there was a problem that the production effect could not be enhanced.

According to the gaming machine F1, a start trigger is set based on the first information by the notification effect setting means as an execution period of the notification effect for notifying that the specific effect is executed, and based on the second information. The end opportunity is set. As a result, since the period for executing the notification effect is set based on a plurality of different information, the period for executing the notification effect can be freely set, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine F1 has an execution information discriminating means for discriminating the execution information of the specific effect, and the notification effect setting means uses the execution information of the specific effect determined by the execution information discriminating means as the second information. A gaming machine F2 characterized by being a game machine.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1, the execution information for indicating that the specific effect is executed is set as the second information to set the end trigger of the notification effect, so that the execution information of the specific effect is set. It is possible to set a notification effect corresponding to. Therefore, while the period during which the notification effect is executed can be freely set, the notification effect corresponding to the specific effect to be executed can be executed, so that there is an effect that the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine F2, the execution information determining means is characterized in that at least the timing at which the specific effect is executed is determined.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F2, the execution information for indicating that the specific effect is executed is set as the second information to set the end trigger of the notification effect, so that the execution timing of the specific effect is set. It is possible to set a notification effect corresponding to. Therefore, while the period during which the notification effect is executed can be freely set, the timing at which the specific effect is executed can be accurately notified, which has the effect of enhancing the effect.

In the gaming machine F2 or F3, as the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means, there is a specific effect setting means for setting one of the specific effects having different execution timings. A gaming machine F4 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F2 or F3, it is possible to easily set a notification effect according to the timing at which the specific effect is executed for a plurality of specific effects having different execution timings. can. Therefore, while the period during which the notification effect is executed can be freely set, the period during which the specific effect is executed can be accurately notified, which has the effect of enhancing the effect.

In the gaming machines F1 to F4, the notification effect setting means is different from the timing of setting the start trigger of the notification effect based on the first information, and the end trigger of the notification effect based on the second information. The gaming machine F5, which is characterized by setting.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the execution period of the notification effect can be set at different timings, so that the period during which the notification effect is executed can be freely set. It has the effect of being able to enhance the staging effect.

In the gaming machine F5, the notification effect period setting means sets the end trigger of the notification effect based on the second information while the notification effect is being executed by the notification effect execution means. The featured gaming machine F6.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F5, it is possible to set the end trigger of the notification effect after the notification effect is executed, so that the notification effect is executed after the notification effect is executed. The execution period will be set. Therefore, it is possible to freely set the period during which the notification effect is executed, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In addition, since it is not set at what timing the notification effect is targeted at the time when the notification effect is executed, the content of the notification effect is predicted by the player in advance. It can be reliably prevented.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, an operation means that can be operated by the player, an operation effect execution means that executes an operation effect for operating the operation means, and the operation executed by the operation effect execution means. It has an operation determination means for determining that the operation means has been operated during the effect, and the notification effect setting means sets the effect mode of the notification effect based on the determination result of the operation determination means. The gaming machine F7 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the effect period of the notification effect is set based on the operation content of the operating means during the operation effect, so that the player participates in the effect. It has the effect of increasing motivation.

In any of the game machines F1 to F7, the notification effect setting means has a first notification effect period and a second notification effect period set after the first notification effect period as a period in which the notification effect is executed. The gaming machine F8 is characterized in that, at least, the second notification effect period is set based on the second information.

According to the gaming machine F8, in any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the second notification effect period can be set based on the second information among the periods during which the notification effect is executed, so that the notification effect period can be freely set. In the gaming machine that can be set to, it is possible to secure a period for executing the effect based on the second information, and there is an effect that the effect that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.

The gaming machine F8 is characterized in that the notification effect executing means executes a time-dependent effect that suggests a period until the specific effect is executed during the second notification effect period. Machine F9.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F8, the timekeeping effect can be executed during the second notification effect period, so that the player can be informed of the timing when the specific effect is executed in an easy-to-understand manner. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the game machine F9, based on the notification effect period determining means for determining the effect period of the notification effect set by the notification effect setting means and the length of the effect period determined by the notification effect period determination means. The gaming machine F10 is characterized by having a time-lapse effect period setting means for setting a period during which the time-lapse effect is executed.

According to the game machine F10, in addition to the effect played by the game machine F9, a period for executing the time-lapse effect is executed for a certain period by the time-lapse effect period setting means based on the length of the effect period in which the notification effect is executed. Since the timing obtained by subtracting a certain period from the execution timing of the specific effect is determined as an opportunity to execute the time-dependent effect, the start timing of the specific effect is accurate even if a different effect period is set by the effect period setting means. It has the effect of being able to suggest to the player.

In any of the game machines F8 to F10, the notification effect setting means sets an effect mode of the first effect executed during the first notification effect period based on the first information, and is the first. 1 The gaming machine F11 comprising a first effect mode changing means for changing the first effect mode when a predetermined effect variable condition is satisfied during the notification effect period.

According to the gaming machine F11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F8 to F10, the effect mode of the first effect executed during the first notification effect period is established while the first effect is being executed. It is variable when the possible effect variable condition is satisfied. As a result, after the notification effect is executed, the effect mode of the notification effect can be changed, so that there is an effect that the effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine F12 is characterized in that the effect variable condition is satisfied when the end trigger of the notification effect is set by the notification effect setting means.

According to the gaming machine F12, when the end trigger of the notification effect is set and the effect period of the notification effect is fixed, the effect mode of the first effect can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to execute the first effect corresponding to the set end trigger, and it is possible to suppress the player from giving a sense of discomfort.

In the game machine F1, the operation means that can be operated by the player, the operation effect execution means for executing the operation effect for operating the operation means, and the operation during the operation effect executed by the operation effect execution means. It has an operation determining means for determining that the means has been operated, and the operation effect executing means executes the operation effect while the notification effect is being executed by the notification effect executing means. The gaming machine F13 is characterized in that the notification effect setting means sets the second information based on the determination result by the operation determination means.

According to the gaming machine F13, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1, the end trigger of the notification effect is set based on the operation content for the operation effect executed during the notification effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect period of the notification effect can be changed by the operation of the player, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine F13 has a specific period setting means for setting the specific period based on the determination result by the operation determination means, and the notification effect setting means indicates the specific period set by the specific period setting means. The gaming machine F14, characterized in that the information for the purpose is the second information.

According to the game machine F14, in addition to the effect played by the game machine F13, a specific period in which the specific effect is executed is set based on the operation content for the operation effect executed during the notification effect, and the specific period is set. Since the effect period of the notification effect can be changed based on the effect, there is an effect that the notification effect corresponding to the specific effect to be executed can be executed.

In the gaming machine F14, the specific period setting means sets one predetermined period from a plurality of predetermined periods as the specific period, and the specific effect executing means is set by the specific period setting means. The gaming machine F15, characterized in that the specific effect corresponding to the specific period is executed.

According to the gaming machine F15, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F14, the specific effect corresponding to the specific period set by the specific period setting means is executed, so that the specific effect different depending on the operation content of the operating means is executed. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be enthusiastically participated.

In the game machine F15, the notification effect setting means sets a first notification effect period and a second notification effect period set after the first notification effect period as a period during which the notification effect is executed. The operation effect executing means executes the operation effect during the first notification effect period, and the length of the second notification effect period corresponds to the specific period set by the specific period setting means. It has a means for varying the effect period. A gaming machine F16 characterized by this.

According to the game machine F16, in addition to the effect played by the game machine F15, in the notification effect set from the first notification effect period and the second notification effect period, the operation effect is executed during the first notification effect period. The length of the notification effect is changed by changing the length of the second notification effect period based on the operation content to the operation means during the operation effect. Therefore, when the length of the notification effect is changed, the period during which the operation effect is executed can be secured, so that there is an effect that the effect that makes it easy for the player to operate the operation means can be executed.

<Characteristic G group> (Variations of HP display)
The variable effect is executed by the determination means that executes the determination based on the effect information, the variable effect execution means that executes the variable effect that changes the effect value based on the determination result by the determination means, and the effect execution means. When the first effect value is determined by the first effect value determining means for determining the first effect value for varying the effect value and the first effect value determining means, the effect value is determined. The gaming machine G1 is characterized by having a second effect value determining means for determining a second effect value different from the first effect value capable of varying the above.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable effect for a predetermined period to suggest to the player whether or not the jackpot has been won. Then, as a variable effect, a game machine that executes an effect (battle effect) in which the own character and the enemy character play against each other and notifies the result of whether or not the jackpot is won according to the value of each physical strength point at the end of the effect. be. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-9075).

In such a conventional gaming machine, the effect of reducing the physical strength points of the own character or the enemy character is performed multiple times during the battle effect, and it is specified whether or not the reduced physical strength points are won by the player as a big hit. By notifying the player in advance of the timing at which the effect of the above is executed, it was possible to execute the variable effect while increasing the expectation of the player for the jackpot. Further, by setting the physical strength points to be reduced during the battle production in detail, the production pattern of the battle production is increased, and the player is prevented from getting bored with the battle production. However, in the conventional gaming machine, the detailed physical strength points displayed on the display screen are managed, and the next physical strength points are set based on the managed physical strength points, so that the physical strength points are reduced. There is a problem that the amount of processing for management becomes enormous. It is possible to simplify the management of reducing physical strength points by reducing the number of patterns that reduce physical strength points during battle production, but in this case, the production pattern of battle production will decrease, and the player will be early. There was a problem of getting bored with.

According to the gaming machine G1, since the effect value is determined based on the values determined by a plurality of determination means, it is easier to increase the variation of the effect value as compared with the case where the effect value is determined by one determination means. It has the effect of being able to.

In the game machine G1, the effect value is set when the specific effect state is set by the effect state setting means capable of setting the specific effect state in which the variable effect is continuously executed and the effect state setting means. The effect value updating means includes a effect value updating unit that continuously and variably updates, and a first effect value storage unit that can store the first effect value determined by the first effect value determining unit. The gaming machine G2 is characterized in that the effect value is variably updated based on the first effect value stored in the first effect value storage means.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine G1, when the effect value determined based on the first effect value and the second effect value is variably updated, the effect value is not the sum of the effect values but the first effect value. Since only one effect value is stored and the effect value is variably updated based on the first effect value, the actually displayed effect value (the effect value obtained by adding the first effect value and the second effect value). With respect to the display pattern, it is possible to reduce the pattern of the value (first effect value) that is variably updated by the effect value update means, and there is an effect that the processing load can be reduced.

In the gaming machine G2, an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode based on a variable amount of the effect value that is variably updated by the effect value update means, and an effect for displaying the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means. A gaming machine G3 characterized by having an aspect display means.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G2, an effect mode based on a variable amount of the effect value variably updated by the effect update means is displayed. There is an effect that the variable amount of the effect value can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the gaming machine G3, the first effect value is a part of the effect value, the second effect value is composed of a value different from the first effect value, and the first effect and the effect value are described. The gaming machine G4 is characterized by having an effect value summing means for calculating the effect value by adding it to the second effect value.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G3, the first effect value which is a part of the effect value and the second effect value different from the first effect value are added up by the effect value summing means. Since the effect value is determined, there is an effect that the effect value can be further diversified.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, a discriminant means for executing the discriminant when a predetermined discriminant condition is satisfied and a privilege are granted based on the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means being a specific discriminant result. The gaming machine G5 is provided with a privilege granting means, and the first effect value is determined by the first effect value determining means when the determination by the determination means is executed.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines G1 to G4, the first effect value is determined and the effect value is variable when the determination by the discrimination means is executed. The effect can be executed so as to be related to the discrimination result of the discrimination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can pay attention to the variable situation of the effect value and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the second effect value determining means determines the second effect value based on the determination of the first effect value by the first effect value determining means. The gaming machine G6 featuring.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, when the first effect value is determined, the second effect value is determined, so that the first effect value and the second effect value are determined. The effect value that is the sum of the values is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the variable amount of the variable effect value due to the execution of the discrimination by the discrimination means, and it is possible to provide the fun of predicting.

In the gaming machine G5 or G6, the gaming machine G7 is characterized in that the first effect value determining means makes the discriminating means different the variable amount of the first effect value based on the discrimination result.

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G5 or G6, the variable amount of the effect value can be made different based on the determination result of the discrimination means, so that the variable amount of the effect value can be different for the player. It has the effect of being able to gaze at and enhance the effect of the production.

In the gaming machine G7, the first effect value determining means facilitates determination of the first effect value so that the variable amount becomes large when the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result. A gaming machine G8 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G7, the larger the variable amount of the effect value, the easier it is to give a privilege. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G8, as a selectable range in which the second effect value determined by the second effect value determining means can be selected, the first range or a second range different from the first range thereof. The second effect value determination means has a selection range storage means having the above, and a determination value determination unit for determining whether the first effect value determined by the first effect value determination unit is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. The means is to select one selection range from a plurality of selection ranges stored in the selection range storage means based on the determination result of the determination value determination means to determine the second effect value. The gaming machine G9 featuring.

According to the gaming machine G9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G1 to G8, if the selection range in which the second effect value is selected differs depending on whether or not the first effect value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. Can be made. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the effect value can be easily increased.

In the gaming machine G9, the selection range storage means has a first selection range in which a range in which the first effect value can be increased or decreased is stored as the second effect value, and a range in which the first effect value can be decreased. The second effect value determination means determines that the determination result of the determination value determination means is less than a predetermined value. The gaming machine G10 is characterized in that the second selection range is selected and the second effect value is set.

According to the gaming machine G10, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G9, when the first effect value is less than a predetermined value, the second effect value for reducing the first effect value is selected, so that the first effect is selected. It is possible to prevent the effect value, which is the sum of the value and the second effect value, from becoming larger than the first effect value. As a result, for example, when the lower limit value (for example, 0) is determined as the first effect value, it is possible to suppress the determination of a value larger than the lower limit value as the effect value, which gives the player a sense of discomfort. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the execution of the staging.

<Characteristic H group> (Notification of suggestion of advantageous period of fall lottery machine)
When the predetermined discrimination condition is satisfied, the first discrimination means for executing the discrimination and the privilege game execution for executing the privilege game when the first discrimination result by the first discrimination means is the predetermined first discrimination result. The means, the high-probability state in which the first discrimination result by the first discrimination means is likely to be the predetermined first discrimination result, and the first discrimination result by the first discrimination means are predetermined rather than the high-probability state. When the predetermined discrimination condition is satisfied in the state where the high probability state is set by the probability setting means that can set the low probability state that is unlikely to be the first discrimination result and the probability setting means. The probability setting means has a second discrimination means for executing the discrimination, and sets the low probability state when the second discrimination result by the second discrimination means is a predetermined second discrimination result. A gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state in which the predetermined discrimination condition is likely to be satisfied and a second gaming state in which the predetermined discrimination condition is less likely to be satisfied than in the first gaming state. In a gaming machine having a period effect executing means for executing a period effect for notifying the period in which the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the game state setting means is described as described above. In the state where the first gaming state is set, the second gaming state is set when the first condition is satisfied, and the period effect executing means determines whether or not the first condition is satisfied. The period effect including the first effect for showing and the second effect for determining the effect mode of the first effect is repeatedly executed, and the first condition is determined by the probability setting means. It is established when both the first requirement that the low-probability game is set and the second requirement that the determination is executed a predetermined number of times by the first determination means in the state where the first game state is set are satisfied. The gaming machine H1 is characterized by having a period effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode of the period effect in response to the establishment information of the first requirement or the second requirement.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the gaming state is set to an advantageous gaming state (for example, a probabilistic state in which the probability of winning is high) that is advantageous to the player based on the winning. There is a gaming machine that suggests to the player whether or not the period in which the gaming state continues ends by the result of the effect (for example, the battle effect). (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-143197).

In such a conventional gaming machine, when the winning pattern is won when the advantageous gaming state continues, the effect result of the winning pattern in which the own character wins is displayed, and when the winning is won when the advantageous gaming state ends, the own character is won. The production result of the defeat pattern that is defeated is displayed, and if the winning is not won (when the advantageous game state is still set), the production result of the draw pattern that does not win or lose is displayed. Since it is executed, the content of the battle effect can be watched by the player, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. However, when the game is executed without winning for a long period of time in the advantageous gaming state, it becomes easier to execute the battle effect in which the effect result of the draw pattern is displayed as a result, and the player for the battle effect. There was a problem that the degree of expectation of was lowered. Further, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when a specific variation pattern is drawn without winning as a result of the lottery, the battle effect of the draw pattern is executed. When a specific fluctuation pattern is continuously drawn, there is a problem that the battle effect of the draw pattern is continuously executed and the player's expectation for the battle effect is further lowered.

According to the gaming machine H1, among the period effects executed in the state where the first game state is set, the effect mode of the second effect is set corresponding to the establishment information of the first requirement and the second requirement. Therefore, it is possible to predict whether or not the first requirement and the second requirement are satisfied based on the effect mode of the second effect. As a result, even when the period effect is repeatedly executed, the player can predict the game state based on the effect mode of the second effect to be newly executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored early with respect to the period production.

The gaming machine H1 is characterized in that the period effect mode setting means has a first effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the first effect.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H1, the production mode of the first effect for showing whether or not the first condition is satisfied is, in addition to the effect result of the second effect, the first requirement or. Since it is set based on whether or not the second requirement is satisfied, it is necessary to predict the result of whether or not the first condition is satisfied and the situation until the first condition is satisfied, depending on the effect mode of the first effect. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be more closely watched by the effect mode of the first effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine H1 or H2, the gaming machine H3 is characterized in that the period effect mode setting means has a second effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the second effect.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1 or H2, the effect mode of the second effect for determining the effect mode of the first effect is based on the presence or absence of the first requirement or the second requirement. Therefore, it is possible to predict the situation until the first condition is satisfied, depending on the effect mode of the second effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can pay attention to the effect mode of the second effect and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the period effect mode setting means sets a different effect mode when any of the first requirement and the second requirement is satisfied. The featured gaming machine H4.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the effect of the period effect is changed by satisfying one of the plurality of requirements for satisfying the first condition. It is variable. Therefore, it is possible to predict the period until the first condition is satisfied depending on the effect mode of the period effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can pay attention to the effect mode of the period effect and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine H4 has a remaining period determining means for determining the remaining period until the second requirement is satisfied, and the period effect mode setting means is the remaining period determining means when the first requirement is satisfied. The gaming machine H5 is characterized in that it sets an effect mode of the period effect corresponding to the determination result.

According to the gaming machine H5, the effect mode of the period effect is set based on the remaining period until the first condition is satisfied. Thereby, it is possible to suggest the remaining period until the first condition is satisfied depending on the effect mode of the period effect. Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game while giving the player a sense of crisis, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the game machines H1 to H5, the period effect executing means switches the period effect being executed from the second effect to the first effect when a predetermined effect switching condition is satisfied. It is characterized in that the ease with which the effect switching condition is satisfied differs depending on whether the high probability state is set by the probability setting means and the case where the low probability state is set. Game machine H6.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the case where the high probability state is set by the probability setting means and the case where the low probability state is set are the first. Since the frequency at which one effect is executed can be made different, it is possible to predict the currently set probability state based on the frequency at which the first effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. There is an effect.

The gaming machine H6 is characterized in that the gaming machine H6 has a condition setting means for facilitating the establishment of the effect switching condition for a predetermined period after the first requirement is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H6, the first effect can be easily executed for a predetermined period after the low probability state is set by the probability setting means. Therefore, it is possible to make the player predict the currently set probability state based on the frequency at which the first effect is executed, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H7, the period effect executing means executes the first effect when the first determination result by the first determination means is the predetermined first determination result. The gaming machine H8 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H7, the first effect is executed even when the discrimination result of the first discrimination means is the discrimination result in which the privilege game is executed. Therefore, when the first effect is executed, the effect is watched while being aware of both whether or not the privilege game is won or whether or not the first condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the performance to be performed and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H8, there is a number measuring means for measuring the number of times of the period effect executed continuously while the first gaming state is continuously set by the gaming state setting means. The gaming machine H9 is characterized in that the second staging mode setting means sets the second staging mode based on the number of executions of the period staging measured by the number of times measuring means.

According to the gaming machine H9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H8, when the period effect is repeatedly executed, the second effect mode is set based on the number of times the period effect is repeated. When the gaming state is continuously set for a long period of time, it is possible to prevent the same effect mode from being repeatedly set as the second effect mode. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In any of the game machines H6 to H9, the staging period determining means for discriminating the staging period after the first staging is executed by the period staging executing means, and the staging period determining means in which the predetermined staging switching condition is satisfied. When the staging period determined by the staging period determining means is within a predetermined period, the staging controlling means for restricting the execution of the first staging by the period staging executing means is provided. The featured game machine H10.

According to the gaming machine H10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H6 to H9, even if the effect switching condition is satisfied, it is determined that the effect period after the first effect is executed is within a predetermined period. If so, the execution of the first staging is restricted by the staging regulating means. As a result, it is possible to suppress the frequent execution of the first effect, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the execution of the first effect.

In the gaming machine H10, the first effect executed when the first determination result by the first determination means is the predetermined first determination result is not regulated by the effect restricting means. The featured gaming machine H11.

According to the gaming machine H11, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H10, the first effect executed when the privileged game is executed is executed regardless of the determination result of the effect period determining means, so that the privileged game is performed. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the effect when it is executed. Further, when the first effect is executed again within a predetermined effect period after the previous first effect is executed, the expectation that the privilege game is executed can be increased, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. There is an effect.

<Characteristic J group> (The target effect is different depending on the notification timing of the expected increase effect)
The expectation display control means capable of displaying a plurality of expectation display modes capable of suggesting the expectation degree for indicating that a predetermined condition is satisfied in a stepwise manner on the display means, and the expectation display control means displayed by the expectation display control means. A display mode variable means for gradually changing the expectation display mode, a variable information setting means for setting variable information variable by the display mode variable means, and at least one expectation among the plurality of expectation display modes. It has a variable suggestion effect executing means for executing a variable suggestion effect suggesting that the degree display mode is variable, and the expectation degree display control means has at least one of the plurality of expectation degree display modes. The gaming machine J1 is characterized in that the display mode is displayed on the display means at different timings, and the game machine J1 has an execution timing setting means for setting a timing for executing the variable suggestion effect.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable effect for a predetermined period to suggest to the player whether or not the jackpot has been won. Then, as the display mode of the character displayed on the display screen in the effect executed for the predetermined period, there are a plurality of display modes corresponding to the expected degree of the jackpot, and the expected degree of the jackpot of the current variable effect is displayed. There is a gaming machine that notifies the player depending on the display mode of the character. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-248305).

In such a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to show the player the expectation of a big hit by the display mode of the character displayed during the variation effect, so that the player is interested in the effect content of the variation effect to be executed. And can enhance the staging effect. Further, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, among a plurality of display modes, a plurality of types of expectation display modes in which display modes corresponding to the expected degree of jackpot are displayed are provided, and the display modes of each expectation display mode are combined. Since it is possible to suggest the jackpot expectation to the player by making a specific judgment, it is possible to make the player predict the jackpot expectation based on the display modes of a plurality of types of expectation display modes, and the effect to be executed. It was possible to make the player pay close attention to the content and enhance the effect of the production. Further, in the gaming machine having the above-mentioned configuration, the suggestion effect for suggesting the display mode of the expectation degree display mode is configured to be executable, and which display mode is displayed as the expectation degree display mode is suggested. There is also a gaming machine that executes an expectation display mode prior suggestion effect that causes the player to predict in which display mode the expectation display mode is displayed as a variation effect. There is also a gaming machine in which the display mode of the expectation degree display mode is changed from the display mode once displayed on the display screen.

However, in a gaming machine having a plurality of types of expectation display modes, when the expectation display mode prior suggestion effect corresponding to a specific expectation display mode is executed, the expectation that the expectation display mode prior suggestion effect is not applied. There is a problem that the effect of the effect is deteriorated because it is implicitly denied that the display mode is variable.

According to the gaming machine J1, a variable suggestion effect suggesting that one of a plurality of expectation display modes displayed on the display means at different timings is variable is a variable suggestion effect execution means. Will be executed. Since the execution timing of the variable suggestion effect is set by the execution timing setting means, the execution timing of the variable suggestion effect can be different. This has the effect that even if the same effect mode is used as the variable suggestion effect, the expected degree display mode that is the suggestion target of the variable suggestion effect can be different.

In the gaming machine J1, a discrimination means for executing discrimination when a predetermined discrimination condition is satisfied, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result, and a privilege granting means. The gaming machine J2 is characterized in that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J1, when a privilege is given, the expectation degree display mode can easily show a high expectation degree, so that the player can display the expectation degree display mode. You will be watching the contents. Therefore, there is an effect that the staging effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine J3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine J1 or J2, the variable suggestion effect notifies variable information of a stepwise variable expectation degree display mode.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J1 or J2, the variable suggestion effect can be notified to the player by the variable suggestion effect, so that the variable information of the target expectation degree display mode can be notified. There is an effect that it can be watched and the effect of production can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine J3, the variable suggestion effect is characterized in that a plurality of variable quantities including at least a variable quantity for indicating the degree to which the expected degree display mode is actually varied are displayed. J4.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J3, a plurality of variable amounts are displayed as a variable suggestion effect, so that the larger variable amount is displayed among the plurality of variable amounts displayed for the player. It is possible to play the game with the expectation that the amount will be a real variable amount, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the machine having the target notification means for notifying the expectation degree display mode to be the target of the variable suggestion effect executed by the variable suggestion effect before the end of the variable suggestion effect. The gaming machine J5 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the variable execution is performed for the player by notifying the player in advance of the target of the variable suggestion effect to be executed this time. It has the effect of being able to entertain the suggestion production with peace of mind.

In any of the gaming machines J2 to J5, based on the expectation type setting means for setting the expectation type based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means, and the expectation type set by the expectation type setting means. , The expectation degree setting means for setting the expectation degree for each of the plurality of expectation degree display modes, and the expectation degree display control means is the plurality of expectation degree display modes set by the expectation degree setting means. The expected degree display mode for showing at least a part of the expected degree is displayed in advance, and the variable suggestion effect is set by the already displayed expected degree and the expected degree setting means. The gaming machine J6 is characterized in that the difference from the expected degree is suggested as the variable amount.

According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines J2 to J5, an effect of suggesting the difference between the already displayed expectation degree and the preset expectation degree as a variable amount is executed. Therefore, even if the variable amount displayed as the variable suggestion effect is small, the privilege is given if the variable suggestion effect is executed for the expectation degree display mode in which the high expectation degree is already displayed. It is possible to increase the possibility of Therefore, not only the effect content of the variable suggestion effect but also the display mode of the current expectation degree display mode is drawn by lottery, which has the effect of enhancing the effect.

In the gaming machine J2, the operation means that can be operated by the player, the operation effect execution means that executes the operation effect for operating the operation means, and the operation during the operation effect executed by the operation effect execution means. The display mode variable means has an operation discriminating means for determining that the means has been operated, and the display mode variable means changes the expectation degree display mode in response to the discriminating result by the operation discriminating means. The featured gaming machine J8.

According to the gaming machine J8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J2, the expected degree display mode is changed in response to the operation of the operating means, so that the player can enthusiastically operate the operating means. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine J8, a discrimination means for executing discrimination when a predetermined discrimination condition is satisfied, a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game when the result of discrimination by the discrimination means is a predetermined discrimination result, and a bonus game execution means. When a predetermined acquisition condition is satisfied, the acquisition means for acquiring the ball entry information and the ball entry information acquired by the acquisition means are stored up to a predetermined number until the predetermined determination condition is satisfied. A possible storage means, a pre-determination means that executes pre-discrimination based on the ball entry information stored in the storage means, and a number of ball entry information indicating the number of the ball entry information stored in the storage means. In a gaming machine having a ball entry information number display means to be displayed, when a predetermined additional condition is satisfied, the ball entry information number display means is displayed in response to the determination result by the operation determination means. The gaming machine J9 is characterized by having an additional effect executing means for executing an additional effect that changes a display mode for indicating the number of ball entry information.

According to the gaming machine J9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J8, the display mode for showing the number of ball entry information can be changed by the additional effect performed in response to the operation to the operating means. , There is an effect that the player can enthusiastically operate the operation means.

The gaming machine J9 has an effect condition determining means for determining whether the expected degree display mode displayed by the expected degree display control means satisfies a predetermined effect condition, and satisfies the effect condition by the effect condition determination means. The gaming machine J10, characterized in that the above-mentioned additional conditions are satisfied when it is determined that the above-mentioned additional conditions are not satisfied.

According to the gaming machine J10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J9, when the expected degree display mode displayed on the display means does not satisfy a predetermined effect condition, an additional effect is executed, so that a plurality of effects can be obtained. It has the effect of being able to have relevance and enhancing the staging effect.

The gaming machine J10 is characterized in that, when the expected degree display control means does not display a predetermined number of the expected degree display modes, the effect condition determination means determines that the effect condition is not satisfied. Game machine J11.

According to the game machine J11, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J10, the number of the effects to be executed can be complemented by executing the additional effect, so that the game motivation is increased by the small number of the effects to be executed. It has the effect of suppressing the decrease.

<Characteristic K group> (Big hit production at the time of holding consecutive times)
The discrimination means that executes the discrimination when a predetermined discrimination condition is satisfied, the privilege game execution means that executes the privilege game when the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means is the predetermined discrimination result, and the predetermined acquisition condition are When it is established, the acquisition means for acquiring the ball entry information and the storage means for storing the ball entry information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number until the predetermined determination condition is satisfied. In a gaming machine having a pre-discrimination means for executing pre-discrimination based on the ball entry information stored in the storage means, the pre-discrimination means satisfies at least the pre-discrimination condition during the privilege game. In this case, the pre-determination is executed, and the pre-discrimination means is characterized by having an effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode during the privilege game in response to the determination result of the pre-determination means. Game machine K1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a holding means that can acquire the ball entry information based on the ball entering the starting port and hold the ball entry information until the lottery condition is satisfied, and the lottery condition are established. It has a lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery based on the ball entry information, and an execution means for executing a winning game that is advantageous to the player when the lottery result of the lottery means is won. There is a game machine. Then, it has a pre-determination means for discriminating the ball entry information held in the hold means in advance before the lottery is performed by the lottery means, and the pre-determination means means that there is a hit in the hold at the end of the game. There is a gaming machine that continuously displays the display mode (number of rounds) during the winning game when it is determined. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-30737).

In such a conventional gaming machine, a special effect can be performed during the second hit game when the hit is won again in the hold, and the player can be satisfied. However, since it is configured to determine the winning information held at the end of the big hit and only the effect set at the time of winning is executed during the first winning game, for example, the winning is won during the first winning game. Even if the winning information is suspended, there is a problem that the effect for the first hit game cannot be changed and the effect of the effect cannot be enhanced.

Further, although the effect is configured to be continuous for a plurality of hit games, only the effect that the player can easily identify the break between the first hit game and the second hit game is executed. There is a problem that it is possible to easily predict how much the winning game will be executed during the production that is continuously executed during the winning game.

According to the gaming machine K1, the effect mode during the privilege game is set based on the determination result of the pre-determination means executed during the privilege game, so that the effect mode during the privilege game is set in advance as compared with the case where the effect mode during the privilege game is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load when setting the effect mode corresponding to the pre-determination result can be reduced.

In the gaming machine K1, the privileged game executed by the privileged game executing means is such that a plurality of small privileged games are executed, and the prior determination condition is satisfied when the small privileged game is executed. A gaming machine K2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K1, the pre-determination condition is satisfied when the small privilege game is executed, and the effect mode during the privilege game is set, so that the execution status of the small privilege game is set. It is possible to set the production mode of the privilege game according to the above. Therefore, even if the effect mode of the privilege game is set during the privilege game, there is an effect that the privilege game can be executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

In the gaming machine K2, as the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, there is a privilege game selection means for selecting one privilege game from a plurality of the privilege games in which a different number of small privilege games are executed. A gaming machine K3 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K2, as a privilege game, one privilege game is selected from a plurality of privilege games in which different numbers of small privilege games are executed. It has the effect of being able to change and improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine K3, when the pre-determination result is a predetermined pre-determination result, the storage means includes the entry information on which the privilege game is executed. The effect mode setting means determines in advance, and the effect mode setting means sets the effect mode during the privilege game according to the number of small privilege games executed in the privilege game previously determined by the advance determination means. A gaming machine K4 characterized by being a pachinko machine.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K3, the effect mode during the privileged game is set according to the number of small privileged games determined by the prior determination means, so that the player is in the privileged game. There is an effect that it is possible to pay attention to the production mode.

In the game machine K3 or K4, an execution number storage means for storing the number of small privilege games of the privilege game selected by the privilege game selection means, and the number of the small privilege games stored in the execution number storage means. Of these, the small privilege game number notification means for notifying at least a part, the number of the small privilege games stored in the execution number storage means, and the small privilege notified by the small privilege game number notification means. Notification for setting the number of the small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification means based on the determination result of the first difference determination means for determining the difference from the number of games and the first difference determination means. A gaming machine K5 characterized by having a number setting means.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K3 or K4, one privilege is provided by partially notifying the number of small privilege games (round games) executed during the privilege game (big hit). It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of small privilege games executed during the game, and while the privilege game is being executed, the game is performed while expecting more small privilege games to be executed. It has the effect of being able to make it.

The gaming machine K5 is characterized by having an addition means for adding the number of the small privilege games executed in the privilege game pre-determined by the pre-determination means to the execution number storage means. Machine K6.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K5, if it is determined in advance that the privileged game will be executed by the prior determination means during the privileged game (big hit), the predetermined privileged game The number of small privilege games to be executed is stored in the execution number storage means by the addition means. As a result, when a plurality of privilege games are executed at short intervals, the number of small privilege games notified while the previous privilege game is being executed is the number of small privilege games executed in the later privilege games. It can be set by adding the number of. Therefore, by looking at the number of small privilege games notified during the privilege game by the small privilege game number notification means, it is possible to predict whether or not the next privilege game will be executed, and one privilege game ends. There is an effect that it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the game after playing.

The gaming machine K5 or K6 has an update determination means for determining whether to update the number of the small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification means when the small privilege game is executed. A gaming machine K7 characterized by being there.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K5 or K6, the update determination means determines whether to update the number of small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification means, so that the number of notifications is notified. Even if the number of small privilege games is set by the setting means, the number of small privilege games may not be updated. Therefore, when a new small privilege game is executed, even if the number of small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification means is not updated, the next time the small privilege game is executed, the small privilege game is executed. It is possible to leave the possibility that the number of small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification means will be updated, and it is possible to play games while expecting more small privilege games to be executed. effective.

In the gaming machine K7, when the discrimination result by the first difference discriminating means satisfies the first condition, the forced updating means for updating the number of the small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification means is provided. A gaming machine K8 characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K7, when the discrimination result by the first difference discrimination means satisfies the first condition, it is notified by the forced update means and by the small privilege game number notification means. By forcibly updating the number of small privilege games, there is an effect that it is possible to set a period for the player to execute the privilege games with peace of mind.

In the gaming machine K7 or K8, the executed small privilege game number notification means for notifying the number of the small privilege games already executed, the number of the small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification means, and the number of the small privilege games. When the second difference discriminating means for discriminating the difference from the number of the small privilege games notified by the executed small privilege game number notification means and the discrimination result by the second difference discriminating means satisfy the second condition. The gaming machine K9 is characterized by having a compulsory updating means for updating the number of the small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification means.

According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K7 or K8, when the discrimination result by the second difference discrimination means satisfies the second condition, the forced update means is used to notify the small privilege game number notification means. Since the number of small privilege games that have been played is forcibly updated, it is possible to prevent the number of executed small privilege games from becoming larger than the number of small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification means. It has the effect of being able to.

In any of the gaming machines K5 to K9, the small privilege game number notification means preliminarily determines the ball entry information acquired by the acquisition means during a specific period during the period during which the privilege game is being executed. The gaming machine K10 is characterized in that when the result of the above is the predetermined predetermined result, the notification of a specific small privilege game number is executed.

According to the gaming machine K10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K5 to K9, the ball entry information acquired within a specific period during the period during which the privileged game is being executed is the result of the privileged game. If the player is elected, the specific small privilege game number notification is executed by the small privilege game number notification means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the enjoyment of acquiring the entry information during the privilege game.

In any of the gaming machines K5 to K10, the number of the small privilege games stored in the execution number storage means and the number of the small privilege games notified by the executed small privilege game number notification means. When the third difference discriminating means for discriminating the difference and the discriminant result of the third difference discriminating means satisfy the third condition in the state where the privileged game is completed, the privileged game is terminated. The gaming machine K11 is characterized by having an effect continuing means for continuing the effect executed during the privileged game from the time when the specific condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine K11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K5 to K10, if the discrimination result by the third difference discriminating means satisfies the third condition, it is executed during the privilege game by the staging continuation means. The effect is continuously displayed. As a result, when it is determined by the prior determination means that the privilege game is to be executed, there is an effect that the effect executed during the privilege game can be continuously displayed after the first privilege game is completed. be.

In the gaming machine K11, the gaming machine K12 is characterized in that the specific condition is not satisfied at least until the next privileged game is executed.

According to the gaming machine K12, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K11, it is executed during the privileged game during the period from the end of the first privileged game to the execution of the second privileged game by the means of continuing the production. It is possible to surely execute the effect to be performed. Therefore, since a series of effects can be executed for a plurality of privilege games, it is possible to perform the games while expecting more small privilege games to be executed while the effects are being executed. effective.

In any of the game machines K5 to K12, when the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means is a predetermined discriminating result, the storage number discriminating means for discriminating the number of the ball entry information stored in the storage means and the storage number discriminating means. It has an effect mode storage means for storing a plurality of effect modes executed during the privilege game, and is stored in the effect mode storage means based on the number of the ball entry means determined by the storage number determination means. The gaming machine K13 is characterized by having a privileged game effect mode selection means for selecting one effect mode from the plurality of effect modes.

According to the gaming machine K13, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K5 to K12, if it is a predetermined determination result, the effect mode during the privilege game is based on the number of ball entry information stored in the storage means. Is selected, it is possible to provide various effects to the player during the privileged game. Therefore, there is an effect that the staging effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine K13, the staging mode storage means, as the plurality of staging modes, states that the pre-discrimination result of the pre-discrimination means is the predetermined pre-discrimination result at the time when the privilege game is started. The gaming machine K14 is characterized in that at least a first effect mode that can be notified to a person and a second effect mode that can be notified to a player after the privilege game is completed are stored.

According to the gaming machine K14, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K13, it is notified that the result of the pre-determination of the pre-determining means is a predetermined pre-discrimination result by the effect mode selected by the privilege game effect mode selection means. Since the timing can be changed, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristic L group> (Change the production frequency in the game history)
A determination means for executing a determination when a determination condition is satisfied, an effect execution means for executing an effect for showing the determination result of the determination means, and an effect for showing a specific determination result by the effect execution means. It is executed by the privilege granting means that grants a privilege that is advantageous to the player when executed, the storage means that stores the corresponding game information as history information when a specific condition is satisfied, and the staging execution means. The gaming machine L1 is characterized by having, among the effects, a determination means for determining whether to execute a specific effect based on the history information.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable effect for a predetermined period to suggest to the player whether or not the player has won the prize. Then, as a variable effect executed for a predetermined period, there is a gaming machine that executes an operation effect in which the effect mode is changed based on the operation result of the operation means that can be operated by the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-249877).

In such a conventional gaming machine, since the effect mode is changed based on the operation content of the player to the operating means, the player can be enthusiastically participated in the game. However, there is a problem that the player's willingness to play is reduced if the operation effect is frequently executed for the player who does not enthusiastically operate the operating means.

According to the gaming machine L1, since the execution of the specific effect is determined based on the history information, the execution frequency of the specific effect can be changed according to the progress of the game, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine L1 has an effect selection table storage means in which a plurality of effect selection tables set so that the selection rates of the specific effects are different, and the determination means corresponds to the history information. A gaming machine L2 characterized in that it determines a table.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L1, the selection rate of the specific effect can be switched by selecting the corresponding effect selection table, so that the selection rate of the specific effect can be changed by simple control. It has the effect of being able to.

The gaming machine L1 or L2 has an operation means operated by the player and an operation determination means capable of determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means. When the predetermined operation is discriminated by the operation discriminating means, an operation staging that changes the staging mode is set, and the specific condition is that at least one that the predetermined operation is discriminated by the operation discriminating means. The gaming machine L3, which is characterized in that it is set to the condition of.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L1 or L2, by operating the operating means in the operation effect, not only the effect mode is changed but also the specific condition is easily satisfied. Has the effect of being able to change and affect the execution rate of a specific effect.

In any of the gaming machines L1 to L3, at least the storage means capable of accumulating the history information, the setting means capable of setting the storage value up to a predetermined value based on the storage result by the storage means, and the setting means thereof. A selection means for selecting the accumulated privilege system corresponding to the set accumulated value from a plurality of accumulated privilege systems, and an accumulated privilege granting means for granting the accumulated privilege corresponding to the accumulated privilege system selected by the selection means. When a new accumulated value is set by the setting means, the accumulated privilege granting means grants a new accumulated privilege corresponding to the accumulated value privilege selected by the selection means. The gaming machine is characterized in that the selection means selects one storage privilege system from a plurality of storage privilege systems based on the history information stored in the storage means. F4.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines L1 to L3, the accumulated privilege system is selected based on the accumulated history information, and the accumulated privilege corresponding to the accumulated privilege system is given. As a result, both the setting of the frequency at which the specific effect is executed and the granting of the accumulated privilege are executed based on the history information. Therefore, there is an effect that the staging effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine L5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine L4, the accumulated privilege given by the accumulated privilege granting means is different for each of the accumulated privilege systems selected by the selection means.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine L4, the accumulation benefits given by the accumulation privilege system can be different, so that it is fun to acquire various accumulation benefits while differently operating the operation means. Can be provided to the player. Further, by making the operation contents of the operation means different, it is possible to make the effect frequency different, so that there is an effect that new enjoyment can be provided to the player for the effect to be performed.

The gaming machine L5 is characterized by having a history information erasing means capable of erasing the history information stored in the storage means to a state in which the storage privilege system different depending on the selection means can be selected. Game machine L6 to play.

According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L5, the history information can be deleted until a different storage privilege system can be selected. Therefore, as compared with the case where all the history information is deleted, the following It is possible to make it easier to select the accumulated privilege system. Therefore, there is an effect that the motivation to acquire other accumulated benefits can be increased.

In addition, since the accumulated value set by the setting means is also variable (decreased) based on the partial deletion of the history information by the history information erasing means, the accumulated value is a predetermined upper limit. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation in which the value is reached and the effect of the effect is reduced.

The gaming machine L7 is characterized in that any one of the gaming machines L4 to L6 has a guiding means for guiding the game content for selecting a specific accumulation privilege system by the selection means.

According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines L4 to L6, the game is played based on the game content guided by the guiding means, so that a specific accumulated privilege system is selected. Therefore, it is possible to give various accumulation benefits to the player, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine L8 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine L7, the guiding means guides the game content for selecting a specific accumulated privilege system by changing the effect mode of the operation effect.

According to the gaming machine L8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L7, the effect mode of the operation effect is changed by the guiding means, so that a different accumulation privilege system can be selected simply by operating the operation means according to the effect mode of the operation effect. Will be done. Therefore, it is possible to give various benefits to the player, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine L8, as the effect mode of the operation effect, the guide means has either a notification effect mode for notifying the operation means to perform the predetermined operation or a non-notification effect mode for not notifying the operation means. A gaming machine L9 characterized in that the game content is guided by using a machine.

According to the gaming machine L9, as the operation effect, it is possible to execute an effect mode in which a predetermined operation is easy to be performed on the operation means and an effect mode in which a predetermined operation is difficult to be performed. Just by operating it, different accumulated privilege systems will be selected. Therefore, it is possible to give various benefits to the player, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines L4 to L9, the player has a system selection means capable of selecting the specific storage privilege system corresponding to the game content guided by the guidance means from the plurality of storage privilege systems. A gaming machine L10 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine L10, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines L4 to L9, the game content can be notified so that the player can select the accumulated privilege system desired by the player, so that the effect of the game is further enhanced. It has the effect of being able to.

<Characteristic M group> (Measures for discrimination when small hits are confirmed)
A launching means capable of launching a game ball based on a player's operation, a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means, and a game ball entering the ball entry means. A determination means capable of executing a determination in a case, a display means for displaying identification information for showing the determination result by the determination means, and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means. And the dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the identification information for showing the specific determination result to the display means are stopped. In a game having a privileged game executing means capable of executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player when displayed, a game ball is inserted during the period in which the privileged game is executed by the privileged game executing means. A special ball-entry means that enables a ball, a specific area where a game ball that has entered the specific ball-entry means can enter, and a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the specific area. The privilege granting means to be granted, the privilege type determining means for determining the type of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means, and the privilege determined by the privilege type determining means when the identification information is stopped and displayed. A notification means for notifying the notification information that the player can identify the type of, and the specific input when the firing by the firing means is stopped for a predetermined period or more after the notification information is notified by the notification means. The gaming machine M1 is characterized by having a means for making it difficult to enter the ball means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a gaming ball into a starting port provided on the gaming board, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and a state after the hit game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous to the player is set depending on the type of the hit game. As the type of the winning game, when the lottery result is displayed by a symbol or the like and notified, the notification is made in a predetermined notification mode so that the fairness of the game can be maintained. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when a game ball enters a specific entrance or a specific area during a hit game, the hit game is further executed, and the game is set after that. Assuming that the state is determined by the type of the hit game in which the player is executed first, it is determined whether the state is the hit type to which the game state disadvantageous to the player is given, and a specific entrance or a specific area is determined. There is a risk that the disadvantage of the game store side will increase due to the game method in which the game is performed so that the game ball does not enter.

The present gaming machine M1 is made for solving the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing disadvantages on the gaming store side.

According to the gaming machine M1, when the player tries to avoid being given a specific privilege type by confirming the notification information indicating the type of the privilege determined by the privilege type determining means, another privilege type is used. Even in this case, it becomes difficult to enter the specific ball entry means, so that there is an effect that the disadvantage on the amusement shop side can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine M1, the dynamic display mode determining means determines one dynamic display mode among different dynamic display modes in which the pseudo-stop mode in which the identification information is dynamically displayed and then temporarily stopped is combined. A gaming machine M2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine M2, the temporary stop in the pseudo-stop mode makes it difficult to understand the final stop timing of the identification information, and when a specific privilege game is executed, the gaming ball is sent to the specific entry means. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the execution of a game method for avoiding the entry of a ball.

The gaming machine M3 is characterized in that the gaming machine M1 or M2 has a variable control means for varying the entry rate of a ball entering the specific area according to the type of the privileged game executed by the privileged game executing means.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M1 or M2, the entry rate of entering a specific area can be changed depending on the type of privileged game to be executed, so that the probability of entering a specific area can be changed. Has the effect of being able to be easily controlled.

<Characteristic N group> (Direct hit production part 2)
There are an entry means that allows a game ball to enter, a determination means that can execute a determination when a game ball enters the entry means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means. The display means to be displayed, the dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information, and the dynamic display for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. A second privilege game different from the first privilege game and the first privilege game, which is advantageous to the player when the mode determining means and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are stopped and displayed on the display means. In a game having a privilege game execution means capable of executing the privilege game, the game ball can be entered during the period in which the first privilege game or the second privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. A specific ball-entry means, a specific area in which a game ball that has entered the specific ball-entry means can enter, and a game when the first privilege game is executed and the game ball enters the specific area. A privilege granting means for granting a first privilege advantageous to a player and, when the second privilege game is executed, granting a second privilege advantageous to the player regardless of entering the specific area. And an effect executing means capable of executing an effect spanning a period from the start of dynamic display of the identification information for showing the specific determination result to the entry into the specific ball entry means. A gaming machine N1 characterized by having.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a gaming ball into a starting port provided on the gaming board, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and a state after the hit game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous to the player is set depending on the type of the hit game. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is a problem that the game is only produced up to the hit game, the game becomes monotonous, and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

The present gaming machine N1 is made for solving the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing early boredom of a game.

According to the gaming machine N1, when the identification information for showing a specific determination result is displayed, the effect is executed during the period from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information to the entry into the specific area. Therefore, it is possible to expect that the identification information not only indicates a specific determination result but also to enter a specific area by the staging, and there is an effect that the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine N1, the effect executing means is characterized in that the effect of 1 is executed based on the type of privileged game given by a plurality of effects.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine N1, there is an effect that various effects can be executed.

In the gaming machine N1 or N2, the effect executing means is characterized in that if the game ball does not enter the specific area even after a preset period has elapsed, the effect is switched to the specific effect and executed. The gaming machine N3.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine N1 or N2, if the ball does not enter the specific area, the ball can be switched to the specific effect, so that it is effective for the player not to enter the specific area. It has the effect of being able to notify the pachinko machine.

<Characteristic P group> (A delay device is provided above the V attacker to prevent choro hitting)
There are an entry means that allows a game ball to enter, a determination means that can execute a determination when a game ball enters the entry means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means. The display means to be displayed, the dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information, and the dynamic display for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. It has an aspect determining means and a privileged game executing means capable of executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. In a game, a specific ball-entry means that allows a game ball to enter during a period in which the privilege game is being executed by the privilege game execution means, and a specific ball that can enter a game ball that has entered the specific ball-entry means. An area, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player when the gaming ball enters the specific region, and a privilege type determining means for determining the type of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means. When the identification information is stopped and displayed, the notification means for notifying the information regarding the type of the privilege determined by the privilege type determining means and the position where the game ball can be guided to the specific ball entry means. A gaming machine P1 comprising: an adjusting means for reducing the amount of flow of a gaming ball guided to a specific ball entering means for a predetermined period.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a gaming ball into a starting port provided on the gaming board, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and a state after the hit game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous to the player is set depending on the type of the hit game. As the type of the winning game, when the lottery result is displayed by a symbol or the like and notified, the notification is made in a predetermined notification mode so that the fairness of the game can be maintained. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when a game ball enters a specific entrance or a specific area during a hit game, the hit game is further executed, and the game is set after that. Assuming that the state is determined by the type of the hit game in which the player is executed first, it is determined whether the state is the hit type to which the game state disadvantageous to the player is given, and a specific entrance or a specific area is determined. There is a risk that the disadvantage of the game store side will increase due to the game method in which the game is performed so that the game ball does not enter.

The present gaming machine P1 is made for solving the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing disadvantages on the gaming store side.

According to the gaming machine P1, the amount of flow down for a predetermined period guided to the specific ball entry means is reduced by the adjusting means, so that the information notified by the notification means is discriminated and the game ball is inserted into the specific ball entry means. It has the effect of making it difficult to distinguish whether or not to make a ball.

In the gaming machine P1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball into a gaming area, a firing intensity variable means capable of varying the firing intensity launched by the launching means by the operation of a player, and a first method in which the gaming ball can flow down. It has one flow path and a second flow path in which the game ball flowing down the first flow path is difficult to flow down, and the adjusting means enters the game ball flowing down the second flow path into the specific ball. The gaming machine P2 is characterized in that it is distributed at a predetermined ratio to a specific flow path capable of entering the means and a flow path having difficulty in entering the specific ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P1, the amount of the gaming balls flowing down the second flow path and guided to the specific entry means can be easily reduced. effective.

In the gaming machine P1, a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball into a gaming area, a launching intensity variable means capable of varying the firing intensity emitted by the launching means by the operation of a player, and a first method in which the gaming ball can flow down. It has one flow path and a second flow path that makes it difficult for the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path to flow down, and the adjusting means rolls the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path for a predetermined period or longer. The gaming machine P3 is characterized by having a rolling means capable of moving the gaming ball and discharging the gaming ball into a flow path guided to the specific entry means.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine P1, the gaming ball that has flowed down the second flow path for a predetermined period or longer is rolled by the adjusting means, so that the player has stopped launching the gaming ball. However, there is an effect that the game ball can be guided to the specific ball entry means after a lapse of a predetermined period.

In any of the gaming machines P1 to P3, the period from when the identification information for showing the specific determination result is stopped and displayed until the specific ball-entry means can enter the ball is to the second flow path. The gaming machine P4 is characterized in that it is configured to be shorter than the period from launching the gaming ball to reaching the specific entry means through the adjusting means.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines P1 to P3, it is necessary to continuously launch the gaming ball in order to enter the specific ball entry means. There is an effect that it is possible to regulate the game method that does not allow the special game to enter the specific ball entry means.

<Characteristic Q group> (Countermeasures against cholo hitting 2)
There are an entry means that allows a game ball to enter, a determination means that can execute a determination when a game ball enters the entry means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means. The display means to be displayed, the dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information, and the dynamic display for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. It has an aspect determining means and a privileged game executing means capable of executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. In a game, a specific ball-entry means that allows a game ball to enter during a period in which the privilege game is being executed by the privilege game execution means, and a specific ball that can enter a game ball that has entered the specific ball-entry means. A region, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player when a gaming ball enters the specific region, and a privilege type determining means for determining the type of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means. The pachinko / pachinko ball is guided to the specific ball-entry means at a position where the game ball can be guided to the specific ball-entry means. Gaming machine Q1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a gaming ball into a starting port provided on the gaming board, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and a state after the hit game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous to the player is set depending on the type of the hit game. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a risk that the disadvantage on the gaming store side will increase because the gaming method is performed so that the gaming ball does not enter a specific entrance or a specific area. was there.

The present gaming machine Q1 is made for solving the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing disadvantages on the gaming store side.

According to the gaming machine P1, the amount of flow down for a predetermined period guided to the specific ball entry means is reduced by the adjusting means, so that the information notified by the notification means is discriminated and the game ball is inserted into the specific ball entry means. It has the effect of making it difficult to distinguish whether or not to make a ball.

In the gaming machine Q1, a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball into a gaming area, a firing intensity variable means capable of varying the firing intensity emitted by the launching means by the operation of a player, and a first method in which the gaming ball can flow down. It has one flow path and a second flow path in which the game ball flowing down the first flow path is difficult to flow down, and the adjusting means enters the game ball flowing down the second flow path into the specific ball. The gaming machine Q2 is characterized in that it is distributed at a predetermined ratio to a specific flow path capable of entering the means and a flow path having difficulty in entering the specific ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q1, the amount of the gaming balls that are guided to the specific entry means among the gaming balls flowing down the second flow path can be easily reduced. effective.

In the gaming machine Q1, a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball into a gaming area, a firing intensity variable means capable of varying the firing intensity emitted by the launching means by the operation of a player, and a first method in which the gaming ball can flow down. It has one flow path and a second flow path that makes it difficult for the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path to flow down, and the adjusting means rolls the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path for a predetermined period or longer. The gaming machine Q3 is characterized by having a rolling means capable of moving the gaming ball and discharging the gaming ball into a flow path guided to the specific entry means.

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q1, the gaming ball that has flowed down the second flow path for a predetermined period or longer is rolled by the adjusting means, so that the player has stopped the firing of the gaming ball. However, there is an effect that the game ball can be guided to the specific ball entry means after a lapse of a predetermined period.

In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the period from when the identification information for showing the specific determination result is stopped and displayed until the specific ball-entry means can enter the ball is to the second flow path. The gaming machine Q4 is characterized in that it is configured to be shorter than the period from launching the gaming ball to reaching the specific entry means through the adjusting means.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, it is necessary to continuously launch the gaming ball in order to enter the specific ball entry means. There is an effect that it is possible to regulate the game method that does not allow the special game to enter the specific ball entry means.

<Characteristic R group> (Direction until passing V in small hit and direct hit)
The entry means capable of entering the game ball, the determination means capable of executing the determination when the game ball enters the entry means, and the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means are provided. The display means to be displayed, the dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information, and the dynamic display for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. A second privilege game different from the first privilege game and the first privilege game, which is advantageous to the player when the mode determining means and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are stopped and displayed on the display means. In a game having a privilege game execution means capable of executing the privilege game, the game ball can be entered during the period in which the first privilege game or the second privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. A specific ball-entry means, a specific area in which a game ball that has entered the specific ball-entry means can enter, and a game when the first privilege game is executed and the game ball enters the specific area. A privilege granting means for granting a first privilege advantageous to a player and, when the second privilege game is executed, granting a second privilege advantageous to the player regardless of entering the specific area. And an effect executing means capable of executing an effect spanning a period from the start of dynamic display of the identification information for showing the specific determination result to the entry into the specific ball entry means. , And the effect executing means executes a suggestion effect suggesting that the method of launching the gaming ball is gradually switched before the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. A gaming machine R1 characterized by being a thing.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a gaming ball into a starting port provided on the gaming board, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and a state after the hit game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous to the player is set depending on the type of the hit game. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is a problem that the game is only produced up to the hit game, the game becomes monotonous, and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

The present gaming machine N1 is made for solving the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing early boredom of a game.

According to the gaming machine N1, when the identification information for showing a specific determination result is displayed, the effect is executed during the period from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information to the entry into the specific area. Therefore, it is possible to expect that the identification information not only indicates a specific determination result but also to enter a specific area by the staging, and there is an effect that the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine R1, the effect executing means is characterized in that the effect of 1 is executed based on the type of privileged game given by the plurality of effects.

According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine R1, there is an effect that various effects can be executed.

In the gaming machines R1 or R2, the effect executing means is characterized in that if the game ball does not enter the specific area even after a preset period has elapsed, the effect is switched to the specific effect and executed. The gaming machine R3.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine R1 or R2, if the ball does not enter the specific area, the ball can be switched to the specific effect, so that it is effective for the player not to enter the specific area. It has the effect of being able to notify the pachinko machine.

<Characteristic S group> (Switching between two types of control for small hits and symbol hits)
The entry means on which the game ball can enter, the determination means capable of executing the determination when the game ball enters the entry means, and the identification information for showing the determination result by the determination means. The display means to be displayed, the dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information, and the dynamic display for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. The first privilege game that is advantageous to the player and the second privilege game that is different from the first privilege game when the mode determination means and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are stopped and displayed on the display means. In a game having a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game, a game ball can be entered during a period in which the first privilege game or the second privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. A specific ball entry means, a specific area in which a game ball that has entered the specific ball entry means can enter, and a game when the first privilege game is executed and the game ball enters the specific area. A privilege granting means for granting a first privilege advantageous to a player and, when the second privilege game is executed, granting a second privilege advantageous to the player regardless of entering the specific area. In the first state where the taxiway that guides the gaming ball that has entered the specific ball entry means to the specific area can be guided to the specific area and the second state where it is difficult to guide the game ball to the specific area. When the switching means for switching and the first privilege game are executed, the first switching information for switching the taxiway by the switching means is set, and when the second privilege game is executed, the said The gaming machine S1 is characterized by having a setting means for setting a second switching information different from the first switching information.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a starting port provided in the game board, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. The game is executed, and the state after the hit game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous to the player depending on the type of the hit game. It has been proposed that when a gaming ball enters the area, benefits such as winning games are further granted. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-9795).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming.

The present gaming machine P1 is made for solving the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine S1, the control method of the taxiway is switched between the first privilege game and the second privilege game, so that the player can be shown the guidance mode to a different specific area, and the interest of the game can be improved. There is an effect.

The gaming machine S2 is characterized in that it can be switched to the first state by switching the taxiway according to the second switching information.

According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine S1, the taxiway is switched to the first state by the second switching information, so that in the second privilege game, the gaming ball can be easily entered into a specific area. Even if it is a second privilege game, there is an effect that the player can be made to think that the second privilege is given by entering the specific area.

In the gaming machine S1 or S2, the first switching information is set to a plurality of different information, and the information of 1 is determined based on a predetermined rule.

According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine S1 or S2, there is an effect that the first switching information can be diversified and the guidance state of the taxiway can be switched in various ways.

<Characteristic T group> (Switch between 2 types for small hits and symbol hits 2)
The entry means on which the game ball can enter, the determination means capable of executing the determination when the game ball enters the entry means, and the identification information for showing the determination result by the determination means. The display means to be displayed, the dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information, and the dynamic display for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. The first privilege game that is advantageous to the player and the second privilege game that is different from the first privilege game when the mode determination means and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are stopped and displayed on the display means. In a game having a privilege game execution means capable of executing the privilege game, the game ball can be entered during the period when the first privilege game or the second privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. A specific ball entry means, a specific area in which a game ball that has entered the specific ball entry means can enter, and a game when the first privilege game is executed and the game ball enters the specific area. A privilege granting means for granting a first privilege advantageous to a player and, when the second privilege game is executed, granting a second privilege advantageous to the player regardless of entering the specific area. In the first state where the taxiway for guiding the gaming ball that has entered the specific ball entry means to the specific area can be guided to the specific area and the second state where it is difficult to guide the taxiway to the specific area. When the switching means for switching and the first privilege game are executed, the first switching information for switching the taxiway by the switching means is set, and when the second privilege game is executed, the said The gaming machine T1 comprising: a setting means for setting a second switching information for switching the taxiway to the first state.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a starting port provided in the game board, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. The game is executed, and the state after the hit game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous to the player depending on the type of the hit game. It has been proposed that when a gaming ball enters the area, benefits such as winning games are further granted. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-9795).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming.

The present gaming machine P1 is made for solving the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine S1, the control method of the taxiway is switched between the first privilege game and the second privilege game, so that the player can be shown the guidance mode to a different specific area, and the interest of the game can be improved. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine T1, the gaming ball reaches the specific area by different taxiways depending on whether the second state is switched to the first state by the second switching information or the first state is switched by the first switching information. The gaming machine T2, which is characterized by being guided by.

According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T1, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored at an early stage because he / she is guided to a specific region by different guidance.

In the gaming machine T1 or T2, the first switching information is set to a plurality of different information, and the information of 1 is determined based on a predetermined rule.

According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine T1 or T2, there is an effect that the first switching information can be diversified and the guidance state of the taxiway can be switched in various ways.

<Characteristic group U> (The production mode is set based on the length of the period from the special 2 prize to the special 2 fluctuation)
When the first determination condition is satisfied, the first determination means for executing the first determination, the acquisition means for acquiring the acquisition information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the acquisition information acquired by the acquisition means are predetermined. A storage means that can store up to a number, a second discrimination means that executes the second discrimination based on the acquired information stored in the storage means when the second discrimination condition is satisfied, and the first discrimination. It has a first identification information for showing the discrimination result of the means, or a dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the second identification information for showing the discrimination result of the second discrimination means for a predetermined period. In the game machine, while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, the dynamic display of the second identification information is not started, and the predetermined effect condition is satisfied. When the period effect executing means for executing the period effect based on the method and the first identification information are dynamically displayed, the dynamic display of the second identification information is started after a predetermined start condition is satisfied. It has a period determining means for determining the period up to, and an effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode in the period effect executed by the period effect executing means based on the determination result of the period determination means. A game machine U1 characterized by being present.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Further, there is a case in which a plurality of starting openings are provided and different lottery is executed according to the starting openings in which the game ball enters. Then, there is a device that executes a suggestion effect suggesting the result of the winning / failing lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into each starting port (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-13075). In such a gaming machine, if a game ball enters the other starting port while a winning / failing lottery is being executed based on the entry of the game ball into one starting port, the winning / failing during execution is executed. By preventing the new winning / failing lottery from being executed until the lottery is completed, it was possible to prevent the player from executing the winning / failing lottery excessively.

However, the period from when the game ball enters one of the starting ports until the winning / failing lottery (suggesting effect) based on the entry is executed is based on the entry of the game ball into the other starting opening. Since it differs depending on the situation of the winning / failing lottery to be executed, for example, after the game ball enters the starting opening, a suggestion effect for showing the lottery result of the winning / failing lottery executed based on the entry is executed. If the period until the end is long, it becomes difficult for the player to understand which entry-based suggestion effect is being executed, the effect of the suggestion effect is reduced, and the motivation for playing is reduced. there were. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by providing an effect capable of suppressing a decrease in the player's motivation to play the game.

According to the gaming machine U1, the effect of the period effect executed by the period effect execution means is based on the length of the period from the establishment of the predetermined start condition to the start of the dynamic display of the second identification information. Since the mode can be set, even if the period until the dynamic display of the second identification information is started is different, the period effect that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play when the period until the dynamic display of the second identification information is started is long.

The gaming machine U1 has a remaining period determining means for determining the residual dynamic display period of the dynamic display period of the first identification information, and the period determining means has the remaining period determined by the remaining period determining means. The gaming machine U2, characterized in that the period is determined based on the above.

According to the gaming machine U2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U1, the second identification information is obtained after a predetermined start condition is satisfied based on the residual dynamic display period of the first identification information being executed by the period determining means. Since the period until the dynamic display of is started can be determined, the accuracy of the determination result can be improved. Therefore, there is an effect that the period effect can be executed according to the actual game content and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machines U1 or U2, the predetermined start condition is satisfied when the acquisition means acquires the acquisition information, and the period determination means is said after the predetermined start condition is satisfied. The gaming machine U3 is characterized in that the period until the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the acquired information for which the start condition is satisfied is started is determined.

According to the gaming machine U3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U1 or U2, the period from the acquisition of the acquired information to the start of the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the acquired information is determined. Since the discrimination is performed by means, the accuracy of the discrimination result can be improved. Therefore, there is an effect that the period effect can be executed according to the actual game content and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine U3, the period effect executing means includes at least a period from the acquisition of the acquired information to the start of the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the acquired information. A gaming machine U4 characterized in that the period effect is executed during the effect period.

According to the gaming machine U4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine U3, as an effect period in which the period effect is executed, at least after the acquisition means acquires the acquired information, the second identification information based on the acquired information is dynamically dynamic. Since the period until the display is started can be set, it is possible to set the effect mode corresponding to the actual gaming situation during the period corresponding to the actual gaming situation. Therefore, there is an effect that the staging effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine U1 or U2 has a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game in which the acquisition condition is easily satisfied when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, and the period determination means is the specific game execution means. The period from the execution of the specific game to the start of the dynamic display of the second identification information is determined, and the period effect executing means is at least after the predetermined execution condition is satisfied. The gaming machine U5 is characterized in that the period effect is executed during the effect period including the period until the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the acquired information is started.

According to the gaming machine U5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U1 or U2, it is possible to determine the period until the dynamic display of the second identification information is started before the acquisition condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to set an effect mode for a longer period based on the determination result of the period determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the staging effect of the period staging can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine U5, when the specific game is executed by the specific game execution means, the dynamic display determination means capable of determining whether or not the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the dynamic display determination means. When it is determined that the first identification information is not dynamically displayed, the second period determination means for executing the determination of the second period different from the period determination means is provided, and the second period determination is performed. The means determines the period from the acquisition of the acquired information to the start of the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the acquired information in the state where the first identification information is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine U6 characterized by being a pachinko machine.

According to the gaming machine U6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U5, when the first identification information is not dynamically displayed at the timing when the discrimination can be executed by the period determining means, the second identification information is performed at a timing different from that timing. It is possible to execute the determination of the period determination means. Therefore, since the period from the establishment of the predetermined start condition to the start of the dynamic display of the second identification information can be determined at a plurality of timings, the period effect according to the actual game content is executed. It has the effect of making it easier.

In any of the gaming machines U1 to U6, the period effect executing means has a first period effect executed in a predetermined first period and a second period effect executed after the first period as the period effect. The gaming machine U7 is characterized in that at least the second period effect executed in the period effect is executed, and the effect mode setting means is for setting the effect mode of the second period effect.

According to the gaming machine U7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines U1 to U6, the common first period effect can be executed regardless of the determination result of the period determination means, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. There is an effect that the period production can be executed without giving.

In the gaming machine U7, when the discrimination result by the period discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, the effect mode setting means is a part of the effect mode of the first period effect as the effect mode of the second period effect. The gaming machine U8, which is characterized by setting.

According to the gaming machine U8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine U7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the effect mode of the first period effect can be set as the effect mode of the second period effect, whether the first period effect is executed or the second period effect is executed for the player. It can be difficult to understand. Therefore, even when the second period is determined to be long by the period determination means, there is an effect that the period effect can be executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

<Characteristic group V> (When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the normal figure long opening suggestion effect is executed)
A variable ball-entry means that can be changed into a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state, and the game ball enters the variable ball-in means. A discrimination means that executes discrimination when a discrimination condition is satisfied based on a ball, and a privilege granting means that can grant a privilege to a player when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result. In a gaming machine having a determination means for executing a determination when a determination condition is satisfied, and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for showing the result of the determination based on the determination condition for a predetermined period. The staging execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode. The variable ball-entry means has a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game for a predetermined period of time to change the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period, and the effect execution means satisfies a predetermined effect condition. The gaming machine V1 is characterized in that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific display mode.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, the winner of the game is first drawn by lottery, and when the lottery result is a hit, the player There was a special game that was advantageous to the player. Further, a movable member is provided at the starting port, and when the game ball is won in the second lottery executed when the game ball passes through the starting gate, the movable member is moved so that the game ball enters the starting port. There is something that makes it easier. In addition, there is one configured to execute a suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result of the second lottery to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-13075). In such a gaming machine, since the lottery result of the second lottery can be suggested by the suggestion effect, the player is expected to play the game while expecting that the gaming ball can be easily inserted into the starting opening. It was possible to improve the interest of the game.

However, there is a high possibility that the effect mode in which the player stops the firing of the game ball by executing the suggestion effect and restarts the game based on the effect result of the suggestion effect is a winning effect. In that case, the game is stopped until the suggestion effect is completed, and the game is restarted at the timing when the movable member moves, or the suggestion effect is likely to be out of order. Is to the other starting port during the period from when the game ball enters one of the starting ports until the suggestion effect is completed until the winning / failing lottery (suggesting effect) is executed based on the entry. Since it differs depending on the situation of the winning / failing lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball, for example, the lottery result of the winning / failing lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball after the game ball enters the starting port. If the period until the suggestion effect for showing is executed becomes long, it becomes difficult for the player to understand which entry-based suggestion effect is being executed, and the effect of the suggestion effect is reduced. , There was a problem that the motivation to play was reduced. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by providing an effect capable of suppressing a decrease in the player's motivation to play the game.

According to the gaming machine V1, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, it is possible to notify that the specific game is executed by the specific game executing means in the effect executed by the effect executing means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be enthusiastically played a game for establishing the staging condition, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine V1, as the types of the specific games executed by the specific game execution means, the first type corresponding to the first specific game that is advantageous to the player and the first type that is more disadvantageous than the first specific game. 2 It has a game type setting means capable of setting a second type corresponding to a specific game, and the effect executing means executes the effect when the first type is set by the game type setting means. A gaming machine V2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine V2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine V1, when the first specific game that is advantageous to the player is executed, the effect by the effect executing means is executed, so that the effect can be enhanced. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the gaming machines V1 or V2, a condition discriminating means capable of discriminating whether or not the staging condition is satisfied and a dynamic display of specific identification information for showing the result of the discriminating executed by the discriminating means are dynamically displayed for a predetermined period. It has a display means, and the condition determination means determines that the effect condition is satisfied when the specific identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. The gaming machine V3.

According to the gaming machine V3, since the effect condition can be satisfied when the specific identification information is dynamically displayed, the player is motivated to play the game of dynamically displaying the specific identification information. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine V3, it is determined whether the information holding means capable of holding the execution information indicating that the discrimination has been executed by the discriminating means and the execution information held by the information holding means satisfy the valid conditions. It has an effective condition determining means, and the condition determining means determines that the effect condition is satisfied even when it is determined by the effective condition determining means that the effective condition is satisfied. A gaming machine V4 characterized by being there.

According to the gaming machine V4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine V3, even if the specific identification information is not dynamically displayed, the staging condition can be satisfied as long as the execution information satisfies the valid condition. Therefore, even if a timing occurs in which the specific identification information is not dynamically displayed even though the game is performed in which the specific identification information is dynamically displayed, it is possible to execute the effect by the effect executing means. .. Therefore, it is possible to stably perform the production for the player who is enthusiastically playing the game, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In either of the gaming machines V3 or V4, an acquisition means capable of acquiring acquisition information when the acquisition condition is satisfied, and a storage means capable of storing the acquired information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number. When the determination condition is satisfied, the determination means makes the determination based on the acquisition information stored in the storage means, and the condition determination means is the acquisition means. Executes the first condition determination based on the acquisition of the acquired information, and executes the second condition determination based on the determination being executed by the determination means. A gaming machine characterized in that the effect is executed when it is determined that the effect condition is satisfied in either the result of the first condition determination or the result of the second condition determination. V5.

According to the gaming machine V5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine V3 or V4, it is possible to determine the establishment of the staging condition at a plurality of timings by the condition determining means, so that the player who is enthusiastically playing the game can be determined. There is an effect that the production can be performed stably and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine V1 or V5, the effect executing means is characterized in that, as the effect, a timing notification effect for notifying the timing at which the variable ball entry means becomes the first state can be executed. Machine V6.

According to the gaming machine V6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine V1 or V5, depending on the effect executed by the effect executing means, not only the determination result of the determination means but also the timing when the variable ball entry means becomes the first state is the game. Since the person is notified, the game can be enthusiastically performed so that the effect by the effect execution means is executed, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine V6, the effect executing means can execute a pseudo timing notification effect for notifying a timing different from the timing at which the variable ball entry means becomes the first state when the effect condition is not satisfied. A gaming machine V7 characterized by being a game machine.

According to the gaming machine V7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the effect condition is not satisfied, a timing different from the timing at which the variable ball entry means becomes the first state is notified, so that the game in which only the determination condition is satisfied without satisfying the effect condition is performed. There is an effect that the player who plays can be made to play a disadvantageous game.

The gaming machine V8 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines V1 to V7, the determination condition is more likely to be satisfied than the staging condition.

According to the gaming machine V8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines V1 to V7, the determination condition is easier to be satisfied than the production condition, so that the game is performed more enthusiastically in order to satisfy the production condition. It has the effect of being able to make it.

<Characteristic group W> (Notify the advantageous small hit winning with a higher probability than the distribution ratio during the time saving in the small hit winning production during the time saving)
When the acquisition means for acquiring the acquisition information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the storage means for storing the acquisition information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number, and the predetermined determination condition are satisfied, the above-mentioned A discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the acquired information stored in the storage means, and a first privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the first discrimination result are executed. In a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means capable of executing a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game when the second determination result is different from the first determination result. The game state setting means capable of setting the first game state after the end of the first privilege game or the second privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, and the acquisition information stored in the storage means are referred to. During the first game state, a pre-determination means for pre-determining before the determination based on the acquired information and a suggestion effect for indicating that the first privilege game or the second privilege game is executed are performed. The game state setting means has the effect execution means that can be executed, and the game state setting means has the first game state and the first game state based on the fact that a predetermined end condition is satisfied in the state where the first game state is set. Is to set a different second gaming state, and the effect executing means is based on the result of the prior determination corresponding to the acquired information in which the determination is executed after the predetermined end condition is satisfied. The gaming machine W1 characterized in that it is capable of performing suggestive effects.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, the winner of the game is first drawn by lottery, and when the lottery result is a hit, the player There was a special game that was advantageous to the player. Further, there is a case in which a plurality of privilege games having different degrees of advantage are configured to be executable, a plurality of game states can be set, and the selection ratio of the privilege games is different depending on the set game states. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-13075). Further, in recent gaming machines, in order to improve the soundness of the game, the ratio (so-called continuation rate) in which the gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, the time saving state or the probable change state) is set after the jackpot game is completed is low. (For example, 65% or less) There is something that suppresses the gambling of the game by setting it.

In such a gaming machine, for example, even if a hit (for example, a big hit or a small hit) is won in a state where an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is set, the advantageous gaming state is again set after the winning game is completed. Since the set ratio is suppressed, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to give a sense of expectation to the hit notification effect during the advantageous gaming state, and the motivation for playing is reduced. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by suppressing a decrease in the player's motivation to play the game.

According to the gaming machine W1, the suggestion effect executed during the first gaming state causes the first privileged game or the second privileged game, which is more advantageous than the first privileged game, to be executed based on the result of the preliminary determination. Is suggested. Then, since the suggestion effect can be executed based on the pre-discrimination result corresponding to the discrimination result of the discrimination means executed after the second game state is set, the privilege game is executed during the first game state. It can be easily suggested. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine W1, in the effect executing means, the pre-discrimination result corresponding to the acquired information in which the discrimination is executed after the predetermined end condition is satisfied is before the second discrimination result is shown. The gaming machine W1 is characterized in that the case where the pre-article discrimination result is obtained is easier to execute the suggestion effect than the case where the pre-discrimination result for showing the first discrimination result is obtained.

According to the gaming machine W2, the pre-discrimination result corresponding to the acquired information in which the discrimination is executed after the second gaming state is set based on the satisfaction of the end condition of the first gaming state indicates the second discrimination result. In the case, the suggestion effect by the effect execution means is more likely to be executed than in the case of showing the first determination result. As a result, when the suggestion effect is executed during the first game state, in addition to the determination result of the determination means executed during the first game state, the determination means executed after the second game state is set. In the configuration in which the suggestion effect is executed based on the pre-discrimination result corresponding to the determination result, the ratio of the second privilege game being executed when the first suggestion effect is executed can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the suggestion effect is executed, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine W2 has a ratio setting means capable of setting a ratio in which the discrimination result by the discrimination means becomes the first discrimination result and a ratio in which the second discrimination result becomes the second discrimination result, and the ratio setting means The feature is that the ratio of the second determination result is larger when the second gaming state is set than when the first gaming state is set. The gaming machine W3.

According to the gaming machine W3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine W1, it is possible to make it easier to obtain the second determination result in the second gaming state than in the first gaming state. As a result, it is possible to increase the ratio of the second privilege game being executed when the first suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines W1 to W3, the staging execution means has a period until the determination corresponding to the acquired information for which the pre-discrimination has been performed is executed by the pre-discrimination means as an effect period. A gaming machine W4 characterized by being capable of performing a suggestion effect.

According to W4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines W1 to W3, the suggestion effect is executed with the period until the determination corresponding to the pre-determined acquisition information is executed as the effect period. It has the effect of being able to increase.

<Characteristic X group> (When the condition for transitioning from the time saving state to the normal state is satisfied, the notification for executing a lot of special figure 2 fluctuations in the normal state is executed during the time saving state)
When the acquisition means for acquiring the acquisition information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the storage means for storing the acquisition information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number, and the predetermined determination condition are satisfied, the above-mentioned A discriminating means that executes a discriminant based on the acquired information stored in the storage means, and a privileged game that executes a privileged game that is advantageous to the player when the discriminating result by the discriminating means is a specific discriminating result. A game having an execution means, a first game state in which the acquisition means is easy to acquire the acquisition information, a second game state in which the acquisition means is more difficult to acquire than the first game state, and a game state setting means that can be set. In the machine, the game state setting means sets the second game state at least when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied while the first game state is set, and the storage means is used for the second game state. A notification mode setting that can set a storage number discriminating means that can discriminate the number of stored information and a notification mode based on the discrimination result of the storage number discriminating means in a state where the first gaming state is set. It has a means and a notification executing means capable of executing a notification operation in the notification mode set by the notification mode setting means, and the notification mode setting means has at least the storage at a specific timing of the first gaming state. The gaming machine X1 is characterized in that the notification mode is set based on the determination result of the number determination means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Further, there is a case in which a plurality of privilege games having different degrees of advantage are configured to be executable, a plurality of game states can be set, and the selection ratio of the privilege games is different depending on the set game states. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-13075). Further, in such a gaming machine, when a specific gaming state is set, a specific starting port is provided, which makes it easier to enter the ball than when another gaming state is set, and the game is played at the specific starting port. When a lottery based on the entry of a ball is executed, it is configured so that a privileged game with a higher degree of advantage is more likely to be executed than when a game ball enters another starting port, and further specified. There is a structure in which the right of lottery executed based on the entry of a game ball into the starting opening can be held and stored up to a predetermined number. In the gaming machine configured in this way, when a specific gaming state is set, the player can efficiently execute a lottery executed based on the entry of the gaming ball into the specific starting port. Therefore, it was possible to enthusiastically play a game with the aim of setting a specific game state.

However, when the end condition of the specific game state is satisfied, it becomes difficult to perform the lottery executed based on the game ball entering the specific start port. Therefore, as the end of the specific game state approaches, the player There was a problem that the motivation to play was reduced. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by suppressing a decrease in the player's motivation to play the game.

According to the gaming machine X1, the mode of notification executed by the notification executing means can be set according to the number of stored information stored in the storage means in the specific period of the first gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play a game for varying the number of stored information so that the notification execution means executes various modes of notification operation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. effective.

In the game machine X1, the notification executing means executes acquisition suggestion notification suggesting that the acquired information is acquired during the first gaming state, and the notification mode setting means is the storage number determination means. The gaming machine X2 is characterized in that, when it is determined that the acquired information stored in the storage means is not more than a predetermined number, a notification mode corresponding to the acquisition suggestion notification is set.

According to the gaming machine X2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine X1, the acquisition suggestion notification is executed when the number of acquired information stored in the storage means in the storage means in the first gaming state is equal to or less than a predetermined number. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game. Further, when the number of acquired information stored in the storage means in the first game state is larger than the predetermined number in a specific period, for example, when the storage means stores the upper limit number of acquired information, the acquisition suggestion is made. Since the notification can be configured not to be executed, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the content of the notification executed by the notification executing means.

In the gaming machine X1 or X2, based on the discrimination number measuring means for measuring the number of times of the discrimination executed by the discrimination means in the state where the first gaming state is set, and the measurement result by the discrimination number measuring means. , A transition condition determining means for determining whether the transition condition is satisfied, and the notification executing means from the time when the transition condition determining means determines that the transition condition is satisfied until the transition condition is satisfied. The gaming machine X3, characterized in that the notification effect is executed within a specific period of the above.

According to the gaming machine X3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine X2. That is, since the notification effect is executed after it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied, the player is made to play the game for acquiring the acquired information within a limited period of time. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game until the final period in which the first game state is set.

The game machine X3 has a period setting means capable of setting at least a first period and a second period set after the first period as the specific period, and the notification executing means has at least. , The notification effect is executed in the first period, and the second period effect is executed during the second period based on the determination result of the storage number determination means at the end timing of the first period. It has a period effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the above, and a second period effect execution means for executing the second period effect in the effect mode set by the period effect mode setting means. Characterized game machine X4.

According to the gaming machine X4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine X3, the effect mode of the second period effect is set based on the number of acquired information stored in the storage means after the notification effect is executed. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the staging effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine X4, the number of the acquired information stored in the storage means at the time when the first period is set and the acquired information stored in the storage means at the end of the first period. The period effect mode setting means has an increase number determining means capable of discriminating the number of acquired information stored in the storage means during the first period based on the number of the increase number. The gaming machine X5, characterized in that the effect mode is set based on the determination result of the means.

According to the game machine X5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine X4, the production mode of the second period effect is set based on the number of acquired information stored during the first period, so that the first period is set. By adjusting the number of acquired information stored at a certain point in time by the player, the number of acquired information stored during the first period can be varied, so that the production mode of the second period effect can be changed. .. Therefore, since it is possible to execute different effects according to the game content executed by the player, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine X4 or X5 has a pre-discrimination means for preliminarily discriminating the acquired information stored in the storage means before the discrimination based on the acquired information is executed, and the period effect mode setting means. The gaming machine X6 is characterized in that the effect mode is set based on the determination result of the advance determination means.

According to the gaming machine X6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine X5, the effect mode of the second period effect can be set based on the pre-determination result of the acquired information stored in the storage means, so that the player can set the effect mode. On the other hand, there is an effect that the second period production can be more interesting.

In the gaming machine X6, the second period effect executing means is a case where the discrimination result of the discriminating means being executed is other than the specific discriminating result, and the discriminating result of the pre-discriminating means is a specific discriminant result. When it is shown, it is characterized in that the second period effect is executed until the discrimination result of the discrimination means based on the acquisition information which is the specific discrimination result is notified. Game machine X7.

According to the gaming machine X7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine X6, when the discrimination result of the pre-discrimination means is a specific discriminant result, the staging execution means is used until the identification information corresponding to the pre-discrimination is stopped and displayed. The production is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can pay attention to the effect performed during the second period.

In the gaming machine X7, the effect mode setting means indicates a suggestion effect mode that suggests that the determination result of the pre-discrimination means is a specific determination result until the dynamic display being executed is stopped and displayed. A gaming machine X8 characterized by being set.

According to the gaming machine X8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine X7, it is suggested that the discrimination result of the pre-discrimination means is a specific discrimination result depending on the suggestion effect mode until the dynamic display during execution is stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which discrimination results in a specific discrimination result. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic Y group> (Multiple time-saving end conditions are set, and different benefits are given according to the established time-saving end conditions)
A discrimination means that executes discrimination when a predetermined discrimination condition is satisfied, and a privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result. A game having a game state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state in which the discrimination is easily executed by the discrimination means and a second gaming state in which the discrimination is more difficult to be executed than in the first gaming state. In the machine, the gaming state setting means sets the second gaming state at least based on the fact that a predetermined transition condition is satisfied while the first gaming state is set, and the transition is performed. As a condition, a transition condition setting means capable of setting a first transition condition and a second transition condition different from the first transition condition, and the transition condition set by the transition condition setting means are satisfied. Based on this, it has a privilege granting means capable of granting a predetermined privilege that is advantageous to the player, and the privilege granting means grants the first privilege when the first transition condition is satisfied, and the second privilege. The gaming machine Y1 is characterized in that a second privilege different from the first privilege is given when the transition condition is satisfied.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, the winner of the game is first drawn by lottery, and when the lottery result is a hit, the player There was a special game that was advantageous to the player. Further, a movable member is provided at the starting port, and when the game ball is won in the second lottery executed when the game ball passes through the starting gate, the movable member is moved so that the game ball enters the starting port. There is something that makes it easier. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-13075). In addition, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, when a specific gaming state is set, the fluctuation period of the second lottery is set shorter than when other gaming states are set, so that the specific gaming state is set. Is configured to execute more second lottery during the set period.

However, since the fluctuation period of the second lottery set in the specific gaming state is constant, there is a problem that the game in the specific gaming state becomes monotonous and the player's motivation to play is reduced. there were. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by suppressing a decrease in the player's motivation to play the game.

According to the gaming machine Y1, when the first gaming state in which the acquired information is easily acquired is set, it differs depending on the established transition condition among the plurality of transition conditions for transitioning from the first gaming state to the second gaming state. Benefits can be granted. Therefore, even though the first game state is set, it is possible to make it difficult to generate a situation in which the first game state ends without obtaining a privilege. Therefore, the first game state is set for the player. There is an effect that the game for setting can be enthusiastically performed and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine Y1, the transition condition setting means satisfies the condition that the determination number of the determination means executed in the state where the first gaming state is set reaches a predetermined number of times. 1 The gaming machine Y2 characterized in that it is set as a transition condition.

According to the gaming machine Y2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Y1, it is possible to set a limit on the number of discriminations of the discrimination means executed during the period in which the first gaming state is set, which is excessive for the player. It has the effect of suppressing the granting of benefits.

In the gaming machine Y1 or Y2, a variable ball entering means that can be varied into a first state in which the gaming ball can enter and a second state in which the gaming ball is more difficult to enter than the first state, and a predetermined execution. When the condition is satisfied, the variable ball-entry means has a specific game execution means for executing a specific game that can be changed to the first state for a predetermined period, and the discriminating means is the variable ball-entry means. The determination is executed based on the entry of the game ball, and the first game state set by the game state setting means is a game in which the specific game is more easily executed than the second game state. A gaming machine Y3 characterized by being in a state.

In the gaming machine Y3, the privilege granting means grants a gaming state in which the specific game is more easily executed than the first gaming state as the first privilege granted when the first transition condition is satisfied. The gaming machine Y4 characterized by being.

In the gaming machine Y4, a determination means capable of executing a determination when a determination condition is satisfied, and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination executed by the determination means for a predetermined period. , A dynamic display period setting means capable of setting a dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the predetermined execution condition is a display in which the identification information is specific. It is established when the stop display is performed in the mode, and the dynamic display period setting means is shorter when the first privilege is given than when the first privilege is not given. The gaming machine Y5, which is characterized by facilitating the setting of a target display period.

In the gaming machines Y1 or Y5, the transition condition setting means has a special discrimination result in which the discrimination result of the discrimination means executed in the state where the first gaming state is set is different from the specific discrimination result. The gaming machine Y6 is characterized in that a condition that is satisfied based on the number of times reaching a predetermined number of times is set as the second transition condition.

According to the gaming machine Y6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Y1 or Y2, the first gaming state shifts to the second gaming state according to the determination result of the discrimination means executed during the period in which the first gaming state is set. Therefore, the period during which the first gaming state continues can be indefinite. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting the first game state to continue for a long period of time, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AA group> (It makes it difficult for the player to understand the opportunity until the jackpot game is executed)
A privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the satisfaction of a predetermined execution condition, a first determination means for executing the first determination when the first determination condition is satisfied, and a first determination means. A second discriminant means for executing a second discriminant when a second discriminant condition different from the first discriminating condition is satisfied, a determination means for executing a determination when the determination condition is satisfied, and a gaming ball enter the ball. When the variable ball entry means that can be varied from the difficult first state to the second state in which the game ball is easier to enter than the first state, and the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific determination result. In a gaming machine having a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game that causes the variable ball entry means to be variable to the second state for a predetermined period, the second determination condition is that the variable ball entry means has a game ball. The first execution condition, or the first execution condition, which is established when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, can be established based on the fact that the ball has entered the ball. The privilege game is executed based on the establishment of the second execution condition that can be satisfied based on the determination result of the second determination means, and the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first. Execution of an effect for notifying the first information indicating that the determination result is the determination result or the second information indicating that the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result, using the same effect mode. The effect executing means has means, the period from the execution of the effect to the execution of the privilege game based on the satisfaction of the first execution condition, and the period from the execution of the effect to the execution of the effect. The gaming machine AA1 is characterized in that the effect is executed so that the period until the privileged game is executed based on the establishment of the second execution condition is the same.

Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a gaming ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the gaming board, a first lottery is executed in which the winning or losing of the game is drawn, and the lottery result is a hit. In some cases, a privileged game that is advantageous to the player is performed. Further, a movable member is provided at the starting port, and when the game ball is won in the second lottery executed when the game ball passes through the starting gate, the movable member is moved so that the game ball enters the starting port. There is something that makes it easier. Then, a first suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result of the first lottery to the player and a second suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result of the second lottery to the player can be executed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-115411). In such a gaming machine, by executing the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect, the player can play the game while giving a sense of expectation to both the first lottery and the second lottery. I was able to do it, and I was able to improve the interest of the game.

However, since the production mode of the effect executed by the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect is different, there is a problem that the player can easily determine the game situation and the player's motivation to play is reduced. .. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by suppressing a decrease in the player's motivation to play the game.

According to the gaming machine AA1, regardless of which execution condition is satisfied, the period from the execution of the effect to the execution of the privileged game by the effect execution means can be the same, so that the player can use the same period. It is possible to make it difficult to understand which execution condition the privileged game to be executed is based on. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AA1, the second execution condition is satisfied after the effect for notifying the second information indicating that the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result is executed by the effect execution means. The gaming machine AA2 is characterized by having a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect when it cannot be performed.

According to the game machine Z2, after the effect is executed by the effect execution means, the special effect can be executed when the privilege game cannot be executed, so that the player can easily understand the effect. It has the effect of being able to enhance the staging effect.

In the gaming machines AA1 to AA2, the gaming machine having a gaming area in which the gaming ball can flow down and a launching means capable of causing the gaming ball to reach the gaming area with variable firing intensity. The gaming area includes at least a first gaming area in which a gaming ball launched by the launching means at one firing intensity can flow down, and a gaming ball launched at a predetermined firing intensity different from the one firing intensity. A first ball-entry means that has a second game area different from the first game area that can flow down, and the first determination condition is satisfied by the game ball entering the first game area. And the specific ball-entry means for which the determination condition is satisfied when the game ball enters, and the variable ball-entry means and the privilege game execution means for the privileged game in the second game area. Is executed, the specific variable ball-entry means that can be changed from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the game ball is easier to enter than the first state is arranged. The gaming machine AA3 is characterized in that the effect executing means executes the effect in an effect mode including a variable firing notification for launching a game ball with the predetermined firing intensity.

According to the gaming machine AA3, since the notification for changing the firing intensity is executed based on the effect executed by the effect executing means, the timing for changing the firing intensity can be the same. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it more difficult to understand the execution opportunity of the specific game.

In the gaming machine AA3, the first period required for the gaming ball flowing down the second gaming area to reach the variable entry means and the gaming ball flowing down the second gaming area become the specific variable entry means. The gaming machine AA4 characterized in that the second period required to reach it is different from that of the second period.

According to the gaming machine AA4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AA3, the timing at which the ball flowing down the second gaming area enters the second variable entry means and the timing at which the ball enters the specific variable entry means are different. Therefore, it is possible to confirm in order whether the gaming ball flowing down the second gaming area enters the variable ball entry means or the specific variable entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the flow situation of the game ball can be more enjoyed.

In any of the gaming machines AA1 to AA4, the award game executing means has the dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result of the first discriminating means, and the privilege game executing means is the dynamic display means. When the identification information dynamically displayed by the player is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode indicating the specific determination result, the privilege game is executed, and the effect executing means is the dynamic display means. The gaming machine AA5 is characterized in that the effect is executed during the period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed.

<Characteristic AB group> (Provide a period to increase the number of special figure fluctuations that can be executed by opening the electric chew once)
A variable ball-entry means that can be changed into a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state, and when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied. The specific game execution means for executing the specific game in which the variable ball entry means can be changed to the first state for a predetermined period, and the discrimination condition that can be established based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means. When it is established, the discrimination means capable of executing the discrimination, the dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means for a predetermined period, and the dynamic display execution means thereof. When the dynamic display period setting means for setting the dynamic display period of the identification information to be executed and the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means are stopped and displayed in a specific display mode. In a gaming machine having a privileged game executing means capable of executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player, the variable input is performed by the specific game as the dynamic display period set by the dynamic display period setting means. The gaming machine AB1 is characterized in that the ball means has a specific period setting means capable of setting a specific period in which a short dynamic display period shorter than a predetermined period variable to the first state is easily set.

According to the gaming machine AB1, when the specific period is set by the specific period setting means, it becomes easy to set a dynamic display period shorter than the period in which one specific game is executed. This makes it possible to execute the determination of the discrimination means a plurality of times during one specific game period. It is possible to make the player play the game while expecting that a specific period is set, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AB1, the second discrimination means capable of executing a predetermined second discrimination and the second identification information for showing the result of the second discrimination executed by the second discrimination means are dynamically displayed for a predetermined period. As the dynamic display period of the second dynamic display means and the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display means, one of a plurality of dynamic display periods can be set. The second dynamic display period setting means is provided, and the predetermined execution condition is satisfied when the result of the second determination executed by the second determination means is a specific second determination result. The first gaming state in which the dynamic display period of the first period can be set by the second dynamic display period setting means, and the second period longer than the first gaming state. The gaming machine AB2 is characterized by having a second gaming state in which is easy to set, and a state setting means capable of setting at least.

According to the gaming machine AB2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AB1, there is an effect that the number of determinations by the determination means per unit time can be increased in the first gaming state than in the second gaming state.

In the gaming machines AB1 or AB2, the gaming state setting means is set as the first gaming state for an advantageous first gaming state that can be set for the first period and a second period shorter than the advantageous first gaming state. At least the possible disadvantageous first gaming state can be set, and the execution condition is satisfied when the advantageous first gaming state is set than when the disadvantaged first gaming state is set. A gaming machine AB3 characterized by being easy to use.

According to the gaming machine AB3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines AB1 or AB2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is easier to execute the special game if the first game state is set for a long period of time, so that the privilege game is executed during the first game state even though the first game state is set for a long period of time. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

In any of the gaming machines AB1 to AB3, there is a transition condition determining means capable of determining whether or not a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, and the gaming state setting means is in a state where the first gaming state is set. The second gaming state is set when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, and the execution condition is satisfied when it is determined by the transition condition determining means that a specific transition condition is satisfied. The gaming machine AB4 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine AB4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AB1 to AB3, a special game can be executed when a specific transition condition is satisfied and the first gaming state ends. It has the effect of allowing a person to play the game enthusiastically until the end.

The gaming machine AB4 is characterized by having a suggestion effect executing means that can execute the suggestion effect suggesting that the specific transition condition is satisfied while the first game state is set. Amusement machine AB5.

According to the gaming machine AB5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AB1 or AB2, a suggestion effect suggesting that a specific transition condition is satisfied while the first gaming state is set is executed, so that the suggestion effect is performed. When is executed, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

<Characteristic BA group> (BGM is reset when the power is restored)
A power supply means capable of supplying a predetermined power, a notification means capable of executing notification for indicating that the power has been supplied by the power supply means, and after the notification executed by the notification means is completed. In a gaming machine having an effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect and a voice output means capable of outputting voice based on voice data for a predetermined period, the voice output means can be notified by the notification means. It is determined that the voice is output from the start position of the voice data during the execution notification period, and the voice is output from a predetermined position of the voice data when the effect is executed by the effect executing means. Characterized game machine BA1.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and after a predetermined fluctuation time, the lottery result is a hit. Was performing a privileged game that was advantageous to the player. Further, if the power is turned off during the predetermined fluctuation time, the subtraction of the fluctuation time is stopped, the return screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and the subtraction of the stopped fluctuation time is restarted (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016). -No. 005505). In such a gaming machine, it was possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the power was turned on by displaying the return screen. There was a problem that it was not possible to clearly notify that the subtraction of the fluctuation time was resumed. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of notifying a player of a gaming situation at the time of power recovery in an easy-to-understand manner.

According to the gaming machine BA1, the sound output during the period during which the predetermined effect is being executed can be output even while the notification for indicating that the power is supplied is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the period for notifying that the power is supplied can be related to the subsequent period. In addition, at the timing when the notification for indicating that the power is supplied ends and the predetermined effect is started, the voice based on the voice data for the predetermined period is output from the specific position of the voice data. Since it is configured, it is possible to output the sound with the content corresponding to the effect executed after the period when the notification for indicating that the power is supplied is completed. Therefore, there is an effect that the sound can be output without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

When the above-mentioned gaming machine BA1 is used, it is between a determination means for determining whether or not the special figure fluctuation is executed when the power is turned off and a predetermined period in which the determination result is turned off. A memorable storage means is further provided, and when the power is supplied, if it is determined that the power is turned off during the fluctuation of the special figure, the special feature is provided during the notification period for notifying that the power is supplied. It is preferable to configure the BGM to be output during the fluctuation of the figure. As a result, it is possible to notify the player by voice that the special figure fluctuation is being executed while the notification for indicating that the power is supplied is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

Further, it is preferable to configure the period for notifying that the power is supplied to be continuously set until the start-up process is completed for the various control devices of the pachinko machine 10. With this configuration, it is possible to shorten the period for notifying that power has been supplied. If the power is turned off during the special map fluctuation, or if the special map fluctuation is started during the period for notifying that the power has been supplied, the period for notifying that the power has been supplied ends. , There is a possibility that the special figure fluctuation will straddle the timing when the normal display screen is displayed. In this case, the period from the time when the normal display screen is displayed until the end of the special figure fluctuation during execution is determined, and the variation effect (residual variation time corresponding effect) is set based on the determination result. Good to configure. As a result, it is possible for the player to easily understand the suggestion effect that suggests the lottery result of the special figure variation.

If the determination result of the remaining fluctuation time is within a predetermined time (for example, within 1 second), it is preferable to delay the end timing of the effect of notifying that the power is supplied by a predetermined time (1 second). .. As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of the residual variation time-corresponding effect only for a short period of time, which makes it difficult for the player to identify, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect.

<Characteristic BB group> (Background change timing is different according to the pattern fluctuation speed when the button is operated)
It is dynamically displayed by the discrimination means that executes a predetermined discrimination, the dynamic display execution means that causes the display means to dynamically display the identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the dynamic display execution means. A privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the above-mentioned identification state being stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, an operating means that can be operated by the player, and a predetermined operation being performed on the operating means. It is possible to execute an operation discriminating means capable of discriminating, a staging mode variable means for varying the staging mode based on the discriminating result of the operation discriminating means, and a staging corresponding to the staging mode variable by the staging mode variable means. Variable timing setting for setting the timing for changing the effect mode based on the effect execution means and the dynamic display speed of the identification information when it is determined by the operation determination means that the predetermined operation has been performed. A gaming machine BB1 characterized by having means and means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and after a predetermined fluctuation time, the lottery result is a hit. Was performing a privileged game that was advantageous to the player. Further, there is also one in which an operation means that can be operated by the player is provided and various effects are set based on the operation content of the player with respect to the operation means (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-18274). In such a gaming machine, by executing the operation effect, the effect mode can be changed according to the operation result of whether or not the player operates the operation means. Therefore, the operation means can be provided to the player. It was possible to operate enthusiastically, that is, to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game, but when the player participated in the game (when the operation means was operated in the operation production). Since there are few production modes to be executed, it has been desired to make it possible to set a wider variety of production modes and enhance the production effect.

According to the gaming machine BB, since the effect mode can be changed according to the fluctuation speed of the identification information at the timing when the player operates the operating means, it is possible to provide various effects. In the above-mentioned gaming machine BB, as the effect mode changed by the effect mode variable means, for example, the display mode of the background mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be considered. This makes it possible to change the timing at which the background mode is variably set according to the dynamic display speed of the identification information. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the background mode from being variably set in a state where the dynamic display speed of the identification information is slow, that is, a state immediately before the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, it is preferable to provide a notification means for notifying the player of the dynamic display speed of the current identification information. Thereby, when the operating means is operated to change the effect mode, the player can determine whether or not the effect mode is changed immediately afterwards. Further, when the period from the operation of the operating means by the player to change the effect mode to the change of the effect mode is longer than a predetermined period, the player can change the effect mode after the predetermined period elapses. It is good to configure to display the comment shown in. This makes it possible for the gaming company to easily grasp whether or not the gaming machine accepts the operation when the operation for changing the effect mode is executed.

Further, when an interval of a predetermined period or longer is provided from the operation of the operating means to the change of the staging mode, for example, the predetermined period is set up to the timing when the next special figure change is executed. Then it is good. With this configuration, it is possible to change the effect mode while the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the lottery result of the special drawing lottery is not executed.

<Characteristic BC group> (Switches the development effect according to the button operation timing and the number of operations)
An operation means that can be operated by the player, an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and a timing at which the operation determination means determines that the predetermined operation has been performed. The operation timing discriminating means capable of discriminating, the operation number measuring means capable of measuring the number of times the predetermined operation is determined to be performed by the operation discriminating means, the discriminating result of the operation timing discriminating means, and the operation number of times. Having an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode based on the measurement result of the measurement means, and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect according to the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means. The featured gaming machine BC1.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and after a predetermined fluctuation time, the lottery result is a hit. Was performing a privileged game that was advantageous to the player. Further, there is also one in which an operation means that can be operated by the player is provided and various effects are set based on the operation content of the player with respect to the operation means (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-18274). In such a gaming machine, the effect mode is set based on the operation content or the number of operations for the operating means. With the gaming machine configured in this way, it is difficult to set various production modes according to the operation content of the operating means, so that the production effect can be enhanced, but more various productions are possible. There has been a demand for a gaming machine whose mode can be set.

According to the gaming machine BC1, since the effect mode can be changed based on both the operation timing for the operation means and the number of operations, more various effects can be set and the effect can be enhanced. ..

In addition, in the gaming machine having the configuration of the gaming machine BC1, the continuous operation effect in which the effect mode changes in response to the operation to the operation means a plurality of times is configured to be executable, and the continuous operation effect is executed. Of these, it is preferable to set the effect mode variable timing of the subsequent continuous operation effect according to the operation timing of the predetermined number of times. Specifically, based on the operation timing for the first operation means during the period during which the continuous operation effect is being executed, the easiness of changing the effect mode for the second and subsequent operations for the operation means is different. Good to configure. With this configuration, various production modes can be set without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, in this case, regardless of the operation timing of the first operation means, it is preferable to set the same effect mode set for the first operation of the operation means. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the difference in the operation timing to the first operation means.

In addition, the effect mode to be executed after the continuous operation effect may be changed according to the effect mode of the continuous operation effect displayed in the state where the continuous operation effect is completed. As a result, the player can be enthusiastically participated in the continuous operation production. In addition, the continuous operation effect is configured to be executable based on the special figure change, and the effect mode to be executed after the continuous operation effect is set based on the effect result of the continuous operation effect and the lottery result of the special figure change. The effect mode variable condition (operation) of the continuous operation effect is based on the lottery result of the special figure variation and the operation timing of the predetermined number of times (for example, the first time) during the continuous operation effect period. It may be configured to set the number of operations of the means, the operation method, etc.).

<Characteristic BD group> (Provides a state in which the hold number display displayed on the liquid crystal is synchronized with the actual number of hold balls and a state in which the hold number is not synchronized).
The acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the discrimination means for executing the determination when the determination condition is satisfied based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the said acquisition means. To indicate a storage means that can store information up to a first predetermined number up to an upper limit, an effect execution means that can execute a predetermined effect a plurality of times, and a predetermined number until at least the determination condition for the information is satisfied. The display means includes a mode display means for displaying the display mode of the above, and the mode display means indicates the number of the information stored in the storage means when the first condition is satisfied. The first aspect for this purpose is displayed on the display means as the display mode, and when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, the effect is executed by the effect executing means. The gaming machine BD1 is characterized in that a second aspect for indicating the number of times is displayed on the display means as the display mode.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. The privilege game that became was executed. Further, a plurality of rights to execute the lottery are memorable so that the game can be played efficiently. Then, in a gaming machine configured to be able to store a plurality of rights (holds) for executing a lottery, there is one that displays a hold symbol for indicating the stored number of holds to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-18274). In such a gaming machine, since the player can easily grasp the current number of holdings, the game content can be determined based on the number of holdings, and efficient gaming can be performed. In addition, the stored hold has a function to determine the lottery result in advance before the lottery is actually executed, and the number of stored holds is a specific number. In that case, there was a case where a series of effects (continuous effects) were executed by using the period during which the lottery corresponding to the specific number of holds was executed. In such a continuous effect, the result of pre-determination for a plurality of holds can be executed by using a series of effects, so that the target lottery includes a hit rather than the effect based on one lottery result. It is possible to increase the possibility and make the player pay close attention to the production. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, when a new hold is acquired during the period during which the continuous effect is being executed, a hold symbol corresponding to the new hold is added to the hold symbol indicating the hold that is the target of the continuous effect. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to determine which reserved symbol is the target of the continuous effect, and there is a problem that the effect of the effect is reduced. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of notifying a player of a reserved symbol to be directed in an easy-to-understand manner.

According to the gaming machine BD1, the display mode indicating the storage number displayed on the display means displays the case where the storage number stored in the storage means is displayed according to the condition to be established, and the information indicating the number of times of the effect is displayed. Since it can be variably set depending on the case of playing, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Further, in the gaming machine having the configuration of the gaming machine BD1, it is preferable to provide a second display means capable of constantly displaying the stored number stored in the storage means separately from the display means. As a result, it is possible to reliably notify the player of the number of stored memories of the storage means that affect the result of the game. In this case, the second display means may be provided in the vicinity of the above-mentioned display means (for example, in the same liquid crystal display device), or may be configured to notify by the light emitting mode of the light emitting means such as an LED. Is also good.

Further, the display means may be configured to display the number of storages stored in the storage means by the second display means during the period in which the information indicating the number of times of the effect is displayed. Further, the second display means may be configured to be less conspicuous than the display means. With such a configuration, the player can be made to pay attention to the display mode displayed on the display means, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, when the display means displays information indicating the number of times of the effect, the display means may be configured to display the number of stored storage means corresponding to the number of determinations executed during the effect period, or the effect period. It may be configured to display based on the length of (for example, one display every 30 seconds). Further, a display indicating the number of times the third symbol is stopped (including a temporary stop) during the effect period may be used.

<Characteristic BE group> (Notice effect performed only when the background is changed)
An effect mode in which an effect mode is changed based on an operation means that can be operated by a player, an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and a determination result of the operation determination means. When the variable means, the effect executing means for executing the effect changed by the effect mode variable means, and the variable timing in which the effect mode is changed by the effect mode variable means satisfy specific conditions. , A game machine BE1 characterized by having a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. The privilege game that became was executed. In addition, there was a suggestion effect for the player to play the game while expecting the player to win the lottery result. Then, in order to increase the variation of the effect mode of the suggestion effect, there is one that variably configures the mode in which the suggestion effect is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-21399). Further, there is also one that changes the mode (background) in which the suggestion effect is executed based on the player operating the operating means. In such a gaming machine, by providing a variety of effects to the player by executing a dedicated suggestion effect according to the set mode, the effect of the effect can be enhanced. However, there is a problem that the player enthusiastically operates the operation means after seeing the special production corresponding to each mode, and the motivation to change the mode is reduced. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of causing a player to enthusiastically change a mode in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine BE1, since it is configured to be able to execute a dedicated effect when the effect mode is changed, it is possible to experience even if a long-term game is performed during the period in which each mode is set. It is possible to execute an effect that cannot be performed at the mode switching timing. Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically operate the operation means for the player who wants to experience various effects.

<Characteristic BF group> (A period for notifying the current mode and a period for not notifying are provided, and the current mode can be grasped by button operation even during the non-notifying period).
A mode setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of effect modes, an effect execution means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the effect mode set by the mode setting means, and a mode setting means. It has an effect mode notification means capable of notifying the effect mode, an operation means that can be operated by the player, and an operation determination unit that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means. , The staging mode notifying means determines that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means by the operation determination means during a predetermined first period or a second period different from the first period. The gaming machine BF1 is characterized in that, when the mode is set, information for indicating the effect mode set by the mode setting means is notified. According to the gaming machine BF1, a period for notifying the effect mode and a period for not notifying the effect mode are set, and the effect mode can be notified based on the operation to the operating means even during the period without notifying the effect mode. Therefore, the player can enthusiastically operate the operation means in order to grasp the effect mode. In this case, if a predetermined operation is not performed on the operating means during the second period, it may be configured to notify another information about the game. For example, the dynamic display of the identification information may be performed. It is preferable to notify the speed and the suggestion information suggesting the discrimination result of the discrimination means. Thereby, during the second period, the game information desired by the player can be selected based on the operation of the player to the operating means.

<Characteristic BG group> (Step up of button vibrator)
An operation means that can be operated by the player, an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, a vibration means that can vibrate the operation means, and a vibration means thereof. It is possible to change the vibration amount by the vibration amount changing means that can change the vibration amount that vibrates the operation means to a different vibration amount, and the vibration amount changing means based on the discrimination result of the operation discrimination means. It is characterized by having a period setting means for setting a possible variable period, and a suggestion effect executing means for executing a suggestion effect suggesting that the variable period is set by the period setting means. Game machine BG1. According to the gaming machine BG1, since the suggestion effect suggesting that the vibration amount of the operating means is variable is executed, the player can enthusiastically operate the operating means.

<Characteristic BH group> (The color of the button informs the speed of pattern fluctuation)
It is dynamically displayed by the discrimination means that executes a predetermined discrimination, the dynamic display execution means that causes the display means to dynamically display the identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the dynamic display execution means. A privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the above-mentioned identification state being stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, an operating means that can be operated by the player, and a predetermined operation being performed on the operating means. It has an operation discriminating means capable of discriminating, an operation staging executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the discriminating result of the operation discriminating means, and a mode variable means capable of varying the mode of the operation means. The mode-variable means is the mode in which the dynamic display speed of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is changed from a first speed to a second speed slower than the first speed. BH1 is a gaming machine characterized in that the speed is variable. According to the gaming machine BH1, the dynamic display speed of the identification information can be grasped depending on the mode of the operating means.

<Characteristic BI group> (Background changes depending on the combination of stop symbols)
The discrimination means that executes a predetermined discrimination, the dynamic display execution means that causes the display means to dynamically display the identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the discrimination result of the discrimination means are specific discrimination results. If this is the case, the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, and if the discrimination result of the discrimination means is other than the specific discrimination result, the identification information is displayed in a predetermined manner different from the specific display mode. In a gaming machine having a stop display means for displaying a stop in a display mode and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in the specific display mode by the stop display means. The stop display means can stop and display a plurality of display modes as the predetermined display mode, and the effect mode is changed based on the predetermined display mode stopped and displayed by the stop display means. The gaming machine BI1 is characterized by having a variable means and an effect executing means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the effect mode changed by the effect mode variable means. According to the gaming machine B11, even if the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined identification information, it is possible to pay attention to the display mode. In this case, when the player stops and displays the identification information in a predetermined stop display mode, the stop display mode may be selected. Specifically, it may be configured so that the player can select one stop display mode from a plurality of stop display modes by operating an operable operating means.

<Characteristic BJ group> (Prevention of leading by preparatory drive for accessory movement)
A display means for executing a predetermined effect display, an effect display control means for causing the display means to execute the effect display based on a predetermined effect scenario, a movable means for executing a predetermined effect operation, and the predetermined effect. It has an effect motion control means for causing the movable means to execute the effect operation based on the effect scenario, and an effect scenario setting means capable of setting one effect scenario from a plurality of effect scenarios as the effect scenario. The movable means is configured to be movable from at least the first position to a second position different from the first position, and is prepared to move the movable means to the initial position of the staging operation. The preparatory movement control means has a feasible preparatory movement control means, and the preparatory movement control means executes the preparatory movement before the effect display is executed by the effect display control means based on the effect scenario. A game machine BJ1 characterized by this. According to the gaming machine BJ1, by performing the preparatory movement in advance, it is possible to surely execute the production based on the production scenario. Furthermore, since the preparatory movement control is configured to be performed separately from the staging operation based on the staging scenario, the preparatory movement can be performed regardless of whether the staging operation is executed or not. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether or not the staging operation is executed even if the movable means is preparatory and movable.

<Characteristic BK group> (Replace the look-ahead result according to the operating state of the accessory)
Acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of acquisition conditions, discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and identification information for showing the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means. In a display means that can be displayed and a gaming machine to which a privilege is given when the identification information is stopped and displayed on the display means in a specific display mode, the information acquired by the acquisition means is at least the said for the information. Until the determination is executed, the storage means that can store up to the first predetermined number and the information stored in the storage means until the dynamic display of the identification information based on the information is started. A pre-determination means capable of pre-determining, an effect mode setting means capable of setting an effect mode of a specific effect based on the result of the pre-determination by the pre-determination means, and the effect set by the effect mode setting means. The specific effect executing means capable of executing the specific effect corresponding to the embodiment at a predetermined timing, and the specific effect executing means when the specific condition is satisfied at the timing when the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect. As the effect mode of the specific effect executed by the above-mentioned method, the effect mode replacement means for setting a replacement effect mode different from the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means is provided. Game machine BK1 to play. According to the gaming machine BK1, the effect mode set based on the determination result of the pre-discrimination means can be replaced with the replacement effect mode, so that the effect according to the situation can be executed and the effect of the effect is enhanced. be able to. In this case, as the effect mode in which the effect mode setting means can be set, the movable mode of the movable means that can move a predetermined range is used, and the effect mode is changed by the effect mode changing means based on the position information of the movable means. It is good to configure it so that it can be replaced. Specifically, when the position information of the movable means acquires the position where it is difficult to execute the movable mode, for example, the position information indicating a position different from the initial position of the movable mode, the movable means is used by the staging mode changing means. An effect mode that is not used, for example, an effect mode that uses only the display means may be set as a replacement effect mode. Further, by providing a movable control means for moving the above-mentioned movable means based on the operation of the operation means that can be operated by the player, and by using the above-mentioned technical idea for the gaming machine having enhanced the effect of the effect, the effect mode can be changed. The effect is more pronounced in the means.

<Characteristic BL group> (During the demo, the setting timing of the operation validity period differs depending on the game state)
The discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination, the dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information for showing the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, and the identification by the dynamic display execution means. A first gaming state in which a first period is easily set as a dynamic display period in which information is dynamically displayed, and a second gaming state in which a second period, which is a dynamic display period shorter than the first period, is easily set. , And a standby for setting a standby state when a predetermined standby condition is satisfied in a state where the dynamic display of the identification information is not executed by the dynamic display execution means. A predetermined state setting means, an operation means that can be operated by the player, an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and a predetermined result based on the determination result of the operation determination means. It has an operation effect executing means capable of executing an effect, and a valid period setting means for setting an operation valid period that can effectively determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means. In the case where the second period is set by the gaming state setting means, the valid period setting means sets the valid period after the standby state is set, as compared with the case where the first period is set. The gaming machine BL1 characterized in that the start timing of the valid period is set so that the period until the setting is long. According to the gaming machine BL1, the setting timing of the operation valid period for effectively determining the operation to the operating means can be changed according to the set gaming state, so that the operation is carelessly executed. Can be suppressed. Further, when the notification means for notifying the player that the operation valid period has been set is provided, it is possible to suppress the frequent notification by the notification means. In addition, while the second gaming state is set, it is preferable to configure the discriminating means so that the discriminating means can be easily executed. As a result, the second gaming state can be set to a more advantageous gaming state than the first gaming state. In this case, even if the standby state is set during the second gaming state, the standby state can be terminated in a short period of time.

<Characteristic BM group>
It is executed by a power supply means capable of supplying electric power to the game machine, a notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification based on the start of supply of the electric power by the power supply means, and the notification means thereof. The effect execution means capable of executing the predetermined effect based on the end of the notification, and the reproduction reproducible of the predetermined voice data based on the start of the supply of the electric power by the power supply means. In a gaming machine having a means and an audio output means capable of outputting an electric power corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the reproduction means, the notification is set as a reproduction start position of the audio data reproduced by the reproduction means. The gaming machine BM1 is provided with a reproduction start position setting means for setting a reproduction start position according to the mode of the notification by the means.

Conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines display an initial screen for notifying the player that the power has been turned on when the power is turned on (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-005505). In such a gaming machine, it has been required to make the gaming situation at the time of turning on the power easier to understand. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

According to the game machine BM1, a power supply means capable of supplying electric power to the game machine and a notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification based on the start of supply of the electric power by the power supply means. , The effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the end of the notification executed by the notification means, and the predetermined power supply means based on the start of the supply of the electric power. It has a reproduction means capable of reproducing audio data and an audio output means capable of outputting audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the reproduction means, and the audio data reproduced by the reproduction means. As the reproduction start position, the reproduction start position setting means for setting the reproduction start position according to the mode of the notification by the notification means is provided. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

In the gaming machine BM1, the reproduction start position setting means sets the reproduction start position so that the reproduction position at the end of the voice data is reproduced in accordance with the end timing of the notification. Game machine BM2.

According to the gaming machine BM2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BM1, there is an effect that the sound can be output more preferably.

In the gaming machine BM1 or BM2, the reproducing means is characterized in that the audio data is repeatedly reproduced at least until the predetermined effect is completed.

According to the gaming machine BM3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BM1 or BM2, the reproduction means repeatedly reproduces the audio data at least until the predetermined effect is completed, so that the audio is output more preferably. It has the effect of being able to.

In any of the gaming machines BM1 to BM3, an execution determination means for determining whether or not the execution condition of the predetermined effect is satisfied based on the start of the supply of the electric power by the electric power supply means is provided. The gaming machine BM4 is characterized in that the reproduction means reproduces the voice data based on the determination that the execution condition is satisfied by the execution determination means.

According to the gaming machine BM4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BM1 to BM3, the execution condition of the predetermined effect is satisfied based on the start of the power supply by the power supply means. The reproduction means is provided with an execution determination means for determining whether or not the presence or absence is present, and the reproduction means reproduces the audio data based on the determination that the execution condition is satisfied by the execution determination means. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

<Characteristic BN group>
It is dynamically displayed by the discrimination means that executes a predetermined discrimination, the dynamic display execution means that causes the display means to dynamically display the identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the dynamic display execution means. A privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, an operating means that can be operated by the player, and a predetermined operation being performed on the operating means. As a dynamic display speed of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means in a gaming machine having an operation discriminating means capable of discriminating between, at least a first speed and a second speed slower than the first speed thereof. A speed setting means capable of setting a speed, and a period shortening means for shortening a first period for dynamically displaying the identification information at the first speed when the discrimination result of the operation discrimination means is a specific discrimination result. The gaming machine BN1 characterized by having and.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some in which advantageous privilege games are executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). With such a gaming machine, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine BN1, a discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination, a dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a dynamic display thereof. A privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the identification state dynamically displayed by the executing means being stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, an operating means that can be operated by the player, and predetermined operating means for the operating means. The operation discriminating means capable of discriminating that the operation of the above operation has been performed, the staging mode variable means for varying the staging mode based on the discriminating result of the operation discriminating means, and the staging mode variable by the staging mode variable means. The effect mode is changed based on the effect execution means capable of executing the corresponding effect and the dynamic display speed of the identification information when it is determined by the operation determination means that the predetermined operation has been performed. It has a variable timing setting means for setting the timing. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine BN1 has an effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means, and the effect executing means is provided by the speed setting means. The gaming machine BN2 is characterized in that a different effect is executed according to the dynamic display speed of the identification information to be set.

According to the gaming machine BN2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BN1, different effects are executed according to the dynamic display speed of the identification information, so that the player can positively operate the operating means. .. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the gaming machine BN2, a second operation means different from the operation means, a second operation determination means capable of determining that a predetermined second operation has been performed on the second operation means, and the first period. The gaming machine BN3 is characterized by having a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect when the second operation is performed in a state where is set.

According to the gaming machine BN3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BN2, the player can be made to select whether to operate the operating means or the second operating means during the first period, and the player's game. You can increase your motivation to participate in. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic BO group>
An operation means that can be operated by the player, an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the predetermined operation by the operation determination means within a predetermined first period. Based on the operation timing determination means capable of determining the operation timing determined to have been performed and the determination result of the operation timing determination means, the effect mode during the second period set after the first period is set. The staging mode setting means is provided, and the staging execution means that can execute the staging according to the staging mode set by the staging mode setting means is provided, and the staging execution means is set by the staging mode setting means. BO1 is a gaming machine BO1 characterized in that a suggestive effect suggesting an effect mode during the second period is executed during the first period.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some in which advantageous privilege games are executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). With such a gaming machine, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the game machine BO1, the operation means that can be operated by the player, the operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the operation within a predetermined first period. A second set after the first period based on the operation timing discriminating means capable of discriminating the operation timing determined by the discriminating means and the discriminating result of the operation timing discriminating means. The effect execution means includes an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode during a period and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect according to the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means. The suggestion effect suggesting the effect mode during the second period set by the effect mode setting means is executed during the first period. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine BO1 has a measuring means for measuring the number of discriminations determined that the predetermined operation has been performed within the first period, and the staging mode setting means has the number of discriminations measured by the measuring means. The gaming machine BO2 is characterized in that the effect mode during the second period is set based on the operation timing in which is a specific number of times.

According to the gaming machine BO2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BO1, different effects are executed according to the dynamic display speed of the identification information, so that the player can positively operate the operating means. .. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the gaming machine BO2, the effect executing means is set by the effect mode setting means during the second period when the determination number of times measured by the measuring means is a predetermined number less than the specific number of times. The gaming machine BO3, which is characterized by performing a unified production that does not suggest a production mode.

According to the gaming machine BO3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BO2, it is possible to prevent the player from early grasping the effect mode set in the second period. Therefore, there is an effect that the staging effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristic BP group>
The discrimination means for acquiring information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the discrimination means for executing the discrimination when the discrimination condition is satisfied based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the discrimination result of the discrimination means are specified. A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the above, a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect for showing the determination result of the determination means, and the acquisition means. A storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the above method up to a first predetermined number up to a predetermined number, a display means capable of displaying a predetermined display mode, and a display means thereof, at least until the determination condition for the information is satisfied. As a display mode to be displayed on the screen, a specific display mode is displayed based on the fact that the number of information of the information stored in the storage means becomes a second predetermined number equal to or less than the first predetermined number. A third predetermined number of the second predetermined number or less among the display control means capable of the display and the information stored in the storage means at the time when the specific display mode is displayed by the display control means. The game BP1 is characterized by comprising an aspect ending means for terminating the display of the specific display aspect based on at least the information used in the discrimination by the discriminating means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some in which advantageous privilege games are executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). With such a gaming machine, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the game machine BP1, the acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the determination means for executing the determination based on the establishment of the determination condition based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the determination means thereof. A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result, and a specific effect for executing a specific effect for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means. It is possible to display the execution means, the storage means that can store the information acquired by the acquisition means up to a first predetermined number up to a predetermined number, and a predetermined display mode until at least the discrimination condition for the information is satisfied. As a display means and a display mode to be displayed on the display means, it is specified based on the fact that the number of information of the information stored in the storage means becomes a second predetermined number equal to or less than the first predetermined number. The second predetermined number of the display control means capable of displaying the display mode of the above and the information stored in the storage means at the time when the specific display mode is displayed by the display control means. It is provided with a mode ending means for terminating the display of the specific display mode based on at least the use of the following third predetermined number of the information for the discrimination by the discriminating means. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine BP1 is provided with a second display control means for causing the display means to display a number-of-times suggestion mode suggesting the number of discriminating counts of the remaining discriminating means executed by the end of the specific display mode. A gaming machine BP2 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine BP2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BP1, the number of times suggestion mode suggesting the number of times of discrimination of the remaining discriminating means executed by the end of the specific display mode is provided to the display means. Since the second display control means for displaying is provided, there is an effect that a display mode that is easier for the player to understand can be realized.

In the gaming machine BP2, when the specific display mode is not displayed, the information number suggestion mode suggesting the number of information of the information stored in the storage means is difficult to distinguish from the number suggestion mode. The gaming machine BP3, which comprises a third display control means for displaying.

According to the gaming machine BP3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BP2, the information number suggestion mode suggesting the number of information of the information stored in the storage means when the specific display mode is not displayed. Since the third display control means for displaying in a mode that is difficult to distinguish from the number-of-times suggestion mode is provided, there is an effect that the player can easily understand the meaning of the number-of-times suggestion mode.

In the gaming machine BP2 or BP3, the second display control means sets a predetermined specific condition when new information is stored in the storage means while the specific display mode is displayed. If is satisfied, the gaming machine BP4 is characterized in that the number of times suggested by the number-of-times suggestion mode is increased.

According to the gaming machine BP4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BP2 or BP3, the second display control means stores new information in the storage means while the specific display mode is displayed. In this case, if a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the number of times suggested by the number-of-times suggestion mode is increased, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Characteristic BQ group>
A privilege game that executes a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition and the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes a predetermined specific discrimination result. The specific effect of the specific effect is based on the fact that the execution means, the specific effect execution means for executing the specific effect for showing the determination result of the discriminating means, and the predetermined specific condition are satisfied during the execution of the specific effect. A gaming machine BQ1 comprising: a suggestion effect execution means for executing a suggestion effect capable of suggesting a type.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some in which advantageous privilege games are executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). With such a gaming machine, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine BQ1, the discriminant means for executing the discriminant based on the establishment of the discriminant condition and the discriminant result of the discriminant means are advantageous to the player based on the predetermined specific discriminant result. The privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game, the specific effect execution means for executing the specific effect for showing the determination result of the determination means, and the predetermined specific condition are satisfied during the execution of the specific effect. Based on this, a suggestion effect execution means for executing a suggestion effect capable of suggesting the type of the specific effect is provided. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the game machine BQ1, as the types of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means, the first specific effect in which the first effect mode is executed after at least a specific period has elapsed from the start of the specific effect, and the specific effect. One type is determined from a plurality of types including at least a second specific effect in which a second effect mode different from the first effect mode is executed after at least the specific period has elapsed from the start of the effect. A gaming machine comprising a type determining means, wherein the suggestion effect executing means executes the suggestion effect based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied before the specific period elapses. BQ2.

According to the game machine BQ2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine BQ1, as a type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means, the first effect mode is set after at least a specific period has elapsed from the start of the specific effect. A plurality of including at least a first specific effect to be executed and a second specific effect in which a second effect mode different from the first effect mode is executed after at least the specific period has elapsed from the start of the specific effect. A type determining means for determining one type from the types of the above is provided, and the suggestion effect executing means executes the suggestion effect based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied before the specific period elapses. It is something to do. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

The gaming machine BQ3 is characterized in that the gaming machine BQ1 or BQ2 is provided with an operating means that can be operated by a player, and the specific condition is satisfied based on an operation on the operating means.

According to the gaming machine BQ3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BQ1 or BQ2, an operating means that can be operated by the player is provided, and the specific condition is satisfied based on the operation of the operating means. , It is possible to positively operate the operation means for the player who wants to execute the suggestion effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to realize an effect mode according to the preference of the player.

<Characteristic BR group>
A mode setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of effect modes, an effect execution means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the effect mode set by the mode setting means, and a mode setting means. Based on the effect mode notification means capable of notifying the effect mode and the predetermined first condition being satisfied, the suppression period during which the effect mode notification means suppresses the notification of the effect mode is set. It is provided with a suppression period setting means and a notification control means for notifying the effect mode notification means of the effect mode based on the fact that a predetermined second condition is satisfied during the suppression period. A game machine BR1 characterized by being present.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some in which advantageous privilege games are executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). With such a gaming machine, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the game machine BR1, a mode setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of effect modes, and an effect executing means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the effect mode set by the mode setting means. , The notification of the effect mode by the effect mode notification means is suppressed based on the fact that the effect mode notification means capable of notifying the effect mode set by the mode setting means and the predetermined first condition are satisfied. A notification control for notifying the effect mode notification means of the effect mode based on the suppression period setting means for setting the suppression period and a predetermined second condition being satisfied during the suppression period. It is provided with means. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine BR1, the first operation for the operating means is detected during a specific period included in the staging period as the type of the operating means that can be operated by the player and the staging executed by the staging executing means. The effect type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least a specific effect in which a predetermined effect mode is executed based on the above means, and the suppression period setting means is provided for at least the specific period. The suppression period is set, and the effect mode notifying means notifies the effect mode based on the detection of the first operation on the operation means during a period different from the suppression period. A gaming machine BR2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine BR2, in addition to the effect of the game machine BR1, the operation means that can be operated by the player and the type of the effect executed by the effect execution means are the above-mentioned during a specific period included in the effect period. The suppression includes an effect type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least a specific effect in which a predetermined effect mode is executed based on the detection of the first operation on the operation means. The period setting means sets the suppression period at least for the specific period, and the effect mode notification means detects the first operation on the operation means during a period different from the suppression period. The effect mode is notified based on the above. This has the effect of improving the convenience of the player.

The gaming machine BQ3 is characterized in that the second condition is satisfied when a second operation different from the first operation is executed for the operating means.

According to the gaming machine BQ3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BQ2, the second condition is satisfied when a second operation different from the first operation is executed for the operating means. There is an effect that the convenience of the player can be further improved.

<Characteristic BS group>
Between the operation means that can be operated by the player, the specific effect execution means that executes the specific effect for which the effective period for treating the operation for the operation means as effective is set during the effect period of 1, and the effective period. The specific control execution means that executes a specific control based on the operation on the operation means, and the first control and the second control as the types of the specific control executed by the specific control execution means. When a control type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least, and a specific number of operations for the operating means are performed in the valid period of 1 as the type of the specific effect. A plurality of types including at least a first type in which the first control is easily executed, and a second type in which the second control is more likely to be executed when the operation is performed a specific number of times than the first type. The gaming machine BS1 is provided with a specific effect type determining means for determining one type from among the types.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some in which advantageous privilege games are executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). With such a gaming machine, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine BS1, an operation means that can be operated by the player, a specific effect execution means that executes a specific effect in which an effective period for treating the operation for the operation means as effective is set during the effect period of 1, and a specific effect execution means. The first is a specific control executing means that executes a specific control based on the operation performed on the operating means during the valid period, and a specific control type executed by the specific control executing means. A control type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least a control and a second control, and a specific number of operations for the operating means in the valid period of 1 as the type of the specific effect. The first type in which the first control is easily executed when the first control is performed, and the second type in which the second control is more likely to be executed when the operation is performed a specific number of times than the first type. It is provided with a specific effect type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine BS1, in the specific effect, the correspondence relationship between the number of operations for the operation means during the valid period and the type of control that is easily determined by the control type determination means is determined in advance for each type of the specific effect. The gaming machine BS2 characterized by being defined.

According to the gaming machine BS2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BS1, the specific effect corresponds to the number of operations for the operating means during the valid period and the type of control that is easily determined by the control type determining means. Since the relationship is predetermined for each type of the specific effect, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine BS1 or BS2, the first control is a control for vibrating the operating means with the first vibration intensity, and the second control is different from the first vibration intensity of the operating means. The gaming machine BS3 characterized in that it is a control for vibrating with a second vibration intensity.

According to the game machine BS3, in addition to the effect of the game machine BS1 or BS2, the first control is a control for vibrating the operating means with the first vibration intensity, and the second control is the operation. Since the means is controlled to vibrate with a second vibration intensity different from the first vibration intensity, it is possible to easily understand the type of the specific effect by checking the vibration intensity of the operating means. effective.

In any of the gaming machines BS1 to BS3, the specific effect has a correspondence relationship between the number of operations for the operation means during the valid period and the type of control that is easily determined by the control type determination means. The gaming machine BS4, which is characterized in that it is predetermined for each type of.

According to the gaming machine BS4, in addition to the effect of any one of BS1 to BS3, the display means capable of displaying the display mode and the specific control execution for the display means during the execution period of one specific effect. The display control means for displaying the history of the control executed by the means is provided. As a result, the type of the executed specific effect can be easily understood by the player, which has the effect of improving the convenience of the player.

<Characteristic BT group>
An operation means that can be operated by the player, an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and a predetermined operation effect can be executed based on the determination result of the operation determination means. The operation effect setting means for setting one of the operation effects from a plurality of the operation effects and the operation means as the operation effect executed by the operation effect execution means in the gaming machine having the operation effect execution means. The mode-variable means comprises a mode-variable means in which the mode of the above-mentioned can be changed, and the mode-variable means changes the mode of the operation means to a mode suggesting the one operation effect set by the operation effect setting means. The gaming machine BT1 characterized by being.

Here, conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on a game board surface, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, There are some that perform privileged games that are advantageous to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, there was a demand for further improvement in the interest of games. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine BT1, based on the operation means that can be operated by the player, the operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the determination result of the operation determination means. It has an operation effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined operation effect, and as the operation effect executed by the operation effect execution means, one operation effect is set from a plurality of the operation effects. The mode-variable means has a setting means and a mode-variable means in which the mode of the operation means can be changed, and the mode-variable means sets the mode of the operation means to the one operation effect set by the operation effect setting means. It is variable to the suggested embodiment. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine BT1 is characterized in that it has a light emitting means for emitting light in a region visible to the player in the operating means, and the mode changing means changes the light emitting mode of the light emitting means. BT2.

According to the gaming machine BT2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BT1. That is, it has a light emitting means for emitting light in a region visible to the player in the operating means, and the mode changing means changes the light emitting mode of the light emitting means. This has the effect of notifying the player who intends to operate the operating means of the current situation in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the gaming machine BT1 or BT2, a discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination, a dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a dynamic display thereof. The operation effect setting means has a privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the identification state dynamically displayed by the executing means being stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, and the identification information is dynamically displayed in the operation effect setting means. The gaming machine BT3 is characterized in that different operation effects can be set during the displayed period.

According to the gaming machine BT3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines BT1 or BT2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the discrimination means that executes a predetermined discrimination, the dynamic display execution means that causes the display means to dynamically display the identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the dynamic display execution means that dynamically displays the identification information. The operation effect setting means has a privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the displayed identification state being stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, and the operation effect setting means is during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed. It is possible to set different operation effects.

As a result, different operation effects are set during one dynamic display period, so that the player can enjoy the timing of operating the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic BU group>
A privilege to execute a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the display means capable of displaying the identification information, the discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination, and the discrimination result of the discrimination means to be a specific discrimination result. The dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the game execution means, the identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means in the display means, and the dynamic display as the type of the dynamic display by the dynamic display means. The first dynamic display type in which the first aspect is displayed after at least a specific period has elapsed from the start of the display, and the second aspect different from the first aspect after the specific period has elapsed are displayed. A mode selection means for selecting one mode from a plurality of types including at least a second dynamic display type, and between the start of the dynamic display of the identification information and the elapse of the specific period. A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect, and a first specific effect capable of suggesting that the first aspect is displayed as a type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. BU1 is a gaming machine comprising:, a second specific effect capable of suggesting that the second aspect is displayed, and a specific effect type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of including at least. ..

Here, conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on a game board surface, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, There are some that perform privileged games that are advantageous to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, there was a demand for further improvement in the interest of games. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine BU1, it is advantageous for the player based on the display means capable of displaying the identification information, the discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination, and the discrimination result of the discrimination means to be a specific discrimination result. The privilege game executing means for executing the privileged game, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means in the display means, and the dynamic display by the dynamic display means. As the type of, the first dynamic display type in which the first aspect is displayed after at least a specific period has elapsed from the start of the dynamic display, and the first aspect after the specific period has elapsed. A mode selection means for selecting one mode from a plurality of types including at least a second dynamic display type in which a different second mode is displayed, and the identification after the dynamic display of the identification information is started. It is suggested that the first aspect is displayed as a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect until the period elapses and a type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. It is provided with a specific effect type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of possible first specific effects and a second specific effect that can suggest that the second aspect is displayed. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the game machine BU1, the specific effect executing means can display a deviation effect mode showing an deviation determination result different from the specific determination result a plurality of times during the execution period of the specific effect of 1. The first specific effect is the combination of the off-effect modes displayed during the execution period of the specific effect of 1, and the second specific effect is the first combination. The gaming machine BU2 is characterized in that the combination of the deviation effect modes displayed during the execution period of the specific effect of 1 is a second combination different from the first combination.

According to the gaming machine BU2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BU1. That is, the specific effect executing means is configured to be able to display the deviation effect mode showing the deviation determination result different from the specific determination result a plurality of times during the execution period of the specific effect 1. In the first specific effect, the combination of the off-effect modes displayed during the execution period of the specific effect of 1 is the first combination, and the second specific effect is 1. The combination of the deviation effect modes displayed during the execution period of the specific effect is a second combination different from the first combination. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Characteristic BV group>
In a gaming machine having an effect control means capable of executing an effect control for executing a predetermined effect, the effect control means includes an effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the effect and an effect mode setting means thereof. It has an output means capable of outputting the effect information indicating the effect mode set by the above, and is a predetermined first with respect to the first effect means based on the effect information output by the output means. Based on the first effect control means for executing the effect operation and the effect information output by the output means, a predetermined second effect operation is executed by a second effect means different from the first effect means. The first staging control means has a second staging control means, and the first staging control means can output specific information included in the staging information output by the output means to the second staging control means. The gaming machine BV1 characterized by having the above.

Here, conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on a game board surface, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, There are some that perform privileged games that are advantageous to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, there was a demand for further improvement in the interest of games. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

According to the game machine BV1, in a game machine having an effect control means capable of executing an effect control for executing a predetermined effect, the effect control means is an effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the effect. And an output means capable of outputting the effect information indicating the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means, and based on the effect information output by the output means, the first effect means. A predetermined first effect control means for executing a predetermined first effect operation, and a second effect means different from the first effect means based on the effect information output by the output means. It has a second staging control means for executing a second staging operation, and the first staging control means transfers specific information included in the staging information output by the output means to the second staging control means. It has a specific information output means that can be output. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the game machine BV1, the effect mode setting means can set an overlapping effect mode using at least the first effect operation and the second effect operation, and the output means indicates the overlap effect mode. The effect information is output to the first effect control means, and the specific information output means outputs information indicating the second effect operation as the specific information to the second effect control means among the overlapping effect modes. A game machine BV2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine BV2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BV1. That is, the staging mode setting means can set an overlapping staging mode using at least the first staging operation and the second staging operation, and the output means has the staging information indicating the overlapping staging mode. Is output to the first staging control means, and the specific information output means outputs the information indicating the second staging operation to the second staging control means as the specific information in the overlapping staging mode. .. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine BV2, the effect mode setting means is characterized in that the overlap effect mode is set so that the start timing of the first effect operation is earlier than the start timing of the second effect operation. Game machine BV3.

According to the gaming machine BV3, the staging mode setting means sets the overlapping staging mode so that the start timing of the first staging operation is earlier than the start timing of the second staging operation. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Characteristic BW group>
When the first effect condition is satisfied while the first effect period is being set by the effect period setting means capable of setting a predetermined effect period and the effect period setting means, at least from the first position. While the first effect executing means capable of executing the first effect using the effect member movable to the second position different from the first position and the first effect period are set, the first effect is set. In a gaming machine having a second effect executing means capable of executing a second effect different from the first effect using a display means when a second effect condition different from the effect condition is satisfied, the first effect. A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect using the effect member and the display means, a movable state determining means for determining the movable state of the effect member, and the above-mentioned movable state determining means in the specific effect period within the effect period. It is characterized by having a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect different from the specific effect during the specific effect period when the determination result of the movable state determining means is a specific determination result. Game machine BW1 to play.

Here, conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on a game board surface, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, There are some that perform privileged games that are advantageous to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, there was a demand for further improvement in the interest of games. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

According to the game machine BW1, when the first effect condition is satisfied while the first effect period is set by the effect period setting means capable of setting a predetermined effect period and the effect period setting means. A first effect executing means capable of executing a first effect using an effect member movable from at least the first position to a second position different from the first position, and the first effect period are set. In the middle of the process, it has a second effect executing means that can execute a second effect different from the first effect using the display means when a second effect condition different from the first effect condition is satisfied. In the game machine, in the specific effect period within the first effect period, the specific effect execution means capable of executing the specific effect using the effect member and the display means, and the movable state of the effect member are determined. It has a movable situation determining means and a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect different from the specific effect during the specific effect period when the determination result of the movable state determining means is a specific determination result. It is a thing. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine BW1 is characterized in that the movable state discriminating means discriminates from the specific discriminant result when the staging member is not located at the first position.

According to the gaming machine BW2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BW1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the movable state discriminating means discriminates from the specific discriminant result when the staging member is not located at the first position. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine BW1 or BW2, the gaming machine BW3 is characterized in that the special effect executing means is for executing the special effect using the display means.

According to the gaming machine BW3, the special effect executing means executes the special effect using the display means. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In any of the gaming machines BW1 to BW3, the first one has an operating means that can be operated by the player and an operation determining means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means. The effect condition is satisfied when it is determined by the operation determining means that the predetermined operation has been performed.

According to the gaming machine BW4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BW1 to BW3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it has an operation means that can be operated by the player and an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the first effect condition is the operation determination means. It is established when it is determined that the predetermined operation has been performed. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine BW4, the valid period setting means capable of setting the operation valid period for which it is effectively determined that the predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means by the operation determining means, and the valid period setting means thereof. It has a period display means for causing the display means to display that the operation valid period is set.

According to the gaming machine BW5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BW4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it has an operation means that can be operated by the player and an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the first effect condition is the operation determination means. It is established when it is determined that the predetermined operation has been performed. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine BW4, the valid period setting means capable of setting the operation valid period for which it is effectively determined that the predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means by the operation determining means, and the valid period setting means thereof. It has a period display means for causing the display means to display that the operation valid period is set. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Characteristic BX group>
The discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination, the dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information for showing the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, and the identification by the dynamic display execution means. A first gaming state in which a first period can be set as a dynamic display period in which information is dynamically displayed, and a second gaming state in which a second period, which is a dynamic display period shorter than the first period, can be set. , A game state setting means that can set, a standby state setting means that sets a standby state when a predetermined standby condition is satisfied, an operation means that can be operated by a player, and a predetermined operation means. The operation discriminating means has an operation discriminating means capable of discriminating that the operation of the above operation has been performed, and an operation staging executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the discriminating result of the operation discriminating means. When the standby state is set by the standby state setting means, it is effectively determined that the predetermined operation has been performed, and the game state is set based on the game state setting means. The gaming machine BX1 having a standby condition variable setting means capable of variably setting the standby condition.

Here, conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on a game board surface, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, There are some that perform privileged games that are advantageous to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, there was a demand for further improvement in the interest of games. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine BX1, a discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination, a dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information for showing the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, and an operation thereof. A first game state in which the first period can be set as a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the target display execution means, and a second period, which is a dynamic display period shorter than the first period, are set. A game state setting means that can set a possible second game state, a standby state setting means that sets a standby state when a predetermined standby condition is satisfied, an operation means that can be operated by the player, and an operation means that can be operated by the player. It has an operation determining means capable of determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means, and an operation effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the discrimination result of the operation determining means. The operation determining means effectively determines that the predetermined operation has been performed when the waiting state is set by the waiting state setting means, and is set by the gaming state setting means. It has a standby condition variable setting means capable of variablely setting the standby condition based on the gaming state. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine BX1, the standby condition is satisfied when the length of the period during which the identification information is not dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means is a predetermined period, and the standby condition variable setting is established. The means is to variably set the waiting condition so that the waiting condition is less likely to be satisfied when the second gaming state is set than when the first gaming state is set. A gaming machine BX2 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine BX2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BX1. That is, the waiting condition is satisfied when the length of the period during which the identification information is not dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means is a predetermined period, and the waiting condition variable setting means is satisfied. The waiting condition is variably set so that the waiting condition is less likely to be satisfied when the second gaming state is set than when the first gaming state is set. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine BX1 or BX2, the gaming machine BX3 is characterized in that the second gaming state is easier to be discriminated by the discriminating means than the first gaming state.

According to the gaming machine BX3, the second gaming state is easier to discriminate by the discriminating means than the first gaming state. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Point where the player's pushing direction is from the back to the front>
In an operating device having an operating means for a player to push in, the operating device is arranged in a first state in a normal state and a position where the operating means overhangs the player from the first state. It is possible to configure two states, and it is provided with an urging means that urges the operating means from the first state to the second state, and the pushing direction of the operating means in the second state is from the back side to the front side for the player. A gaming machine A1 characterized in that it is oriented toward the side.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14421).
See Publication No. 8). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the effect is performed in a manner that raises the expectation of the big hit to the player at the advance position, the player can easily operate the operation means at the advance position with a large acceleration. , It was necessary to design the strength of the operating means to be high. In this case, there is a problem that the operating means becomes heavy as a whole and the driving means for driving the operating means becomes large.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, when the pushing operation is performed in the second state, the pushing direction of the operating means is the direction from the back side to the front side for the player, so that the player moves straight up and down. Then, the momentum of pushing can be released by causing the part that cannot be operated as a slip between the player's hand and the operating means.

In addition, when the operating means is pushed around the shoulders and elbows from the player's playing posture,
Since it becomes difficult to apply a force toward the front, the force applied by the player to the operating means can be naturally weakened.

In the gaming machine A1, the operating device is configured to be rotatable around a shaft rod arranged on the back side of the player, and can be tilted up and down around the shaft rod, and has the operating means. A gaming machine A2 comprising tilting means, the tilting means arranging the operating means in the second state toward the opposite direction of the player.

According to the gaming machine A2, the tilting means having the operating means is configured to rotate, and the operating means are arranged in the opposite direction of the player in the second state, so that the game can be played in the second state. It is possible to prevent a person from hitting an operating means.

In addition, by placing the hand near the shaft rod and tilting the hand with that position as the fulcrum, the operating means can be easily pushed in, so it is possible to provide a new pushing operation method in which the acceleration of pushing is hard to be attached. , It is possible to prevent the operating device from being damaged by the pushing operation of the player.

As a new pushing operation method, for example, the outer side surface of the left little finger is placed near the shaft rod, and the palm is placed near the operating means with the palm raised in the vertical direction, and the thumb side is directed toward the operating means. Examples include a method of operating by tilting the palm, and a method of dropping the palm toward the operating means from a state where the tip of the middle finger is placed near the shaft rod and the palm is placed facing the operating means. Will be done.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the gaming machine A3 is characterized in that, in the first state, the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means is the vertical direction.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means in the first state is the vertical direction, so that the second state is ensured while ensuring the operability in the first state. It is possible to prevent destruction by pushing in the state.

In the gaming machine A3, the operating device includes a driving means for automatically operating the operating means and generating a driving force for the automatic operation, and the driving force of the driving device is pushed by the player. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that it acts in the direction in which it acts and does not act in the opposite direction.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3, the driving force of the driving means for automatically operating the operating device acts only in the pushing operation direction, so that the driving force is in the direction opposite to the operating direction of the player. Can be prevented from acting. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being damaged by the operation of the player.

For example, by adopting a configuration in which only the button can be pushed in, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being pulled from the player in the opposite direction when performing the operation of retracting the button and receiving a high load on the driving means.

In the gaming machine A4, a maintenance state for maintaining the operation device in the first state or the second state can be formed, and a maintenance means operated by the drive means is provided, and the drive means is said to be via an eccentric portion. The operating means has a rotating means for transmitting a driving force, and the rotating means can change the phase between the first phase and the second phase different from the first phase while keeping the maintaining means in the maintenance state. In the first phase and the second phase, the range in which the operating means can move is changed when the maintenance state is released, and in both the first phase and the second phase, the movable range is changed.
A gaming machine A5 configured to be able to release the maintenance state by the same rotation.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A4, the phase of the driving means can be changed while the maintenance means is kept in the maintenance state, and the movement for releasing the maintenance state is rotated in the phase after the change. By making it a means, it is possible to change the movement width in which the operating device moves by the urging means. Therefore, it is possible to configure a plurality of operation modes by the urging means.

In the gaming machine A5, the maintenance means is movable in the urging direction of the urging means in the maintenance state, and the moving speed of the maintaining means increases or decreases according to the rotation speed of the rotating means. A6 gaming machine configured in such a manner that the operating means moves following the movement of the maintaining means.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A5, the movement of the urging means in the direction of the urging force is caused only by the urging force, so that the mode of movement is limited to one. Since it is possible to add a movement mode of moving following the maintenance means to the operation means, it is possible to increase the types of movement modes of the operation means. As a result, the degree of attention of the operating device can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the second state is provided with a light emitting means disposed inside the operating device and irradiating light toward the player, as compared with the first state. However, from the player's point of view, the gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the area of the operating means is reduced and the irradiation range of the light emitted by the light emitting means is expanded.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, a light emitting means is provided, and the second state is irradiated by the light emitting means from the player's point of view as compared with the first state. Since the irradiation range of the light to be emitted is expanded and the area of the operating means is reduced, the player can pay attention to the light and the effect of the effect can be improved, and it is difficult to press the operating means without aiming. It is possible to reduce the power of the player at the time of operation.

In the gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transparent material, and the area of the exposed portion of the light emitting means changes as the operating means moves away from the display means in close proximity to the display means. A featured gaming machine A8.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A7, the operating means is composed of a non-transparent material, and the operating means moves away from the display means in close proximity to the display means. Since the area of the exposed portion of the above changes, it is possible to prevent the emitted light from being reflected on the display means and making the image of the display means difficult to see.

<Points where the repulsive force during normal times is small while making it possible to respond to repeated hits>
In an operating device having an operating means capable of allowing the player to operate up to the terminal position, the first state and the second state in which the range of motion of the operation up to the terminal position is wider than that of the first state.
It is provided with a first driving means capable of forming a state and generating a driving force for moving from the second state to the first state, and provided with an urging means for generating an urging force for moving from the first state to the second state. The gaming machine B1 is characterized by comprising a second driving means for generating a driving force for moving the operating means from the first state to the second state according to the operation of the player.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14421).
See Publication No. 8). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the force for returning the operating means to the initial position is generated by the spring, and the driving motor automatically operates the operating means. However, it is better to lower the elastic constant of the spring to drive the motor. However, in that case, the return of the operating means is delayed, and when the player's operation is fast, the operating means does not follow the player's operation, which makes it difficult for the player to perform the continuous striking operation. There was a problem.

According to the gaming machine B1 2
By pushing back the operating means with the driving means, the return can be speeded up, so that the player can enjoy the continuous striking operation.

The gaming machine B1 is provided with a continuous striking discriminating means for determining whether or not a continuous striking operation is performed based on the sensor detection value of the stroke operating means within a predetermined time, and the second driving means is determined by the detection value of the continuous striking discriminating means. A gaming machine B2 characterized by determining whether or not to drive it.

According to the gaming machine B2, since it is determined whether or not to drive the second driving means based on the detection value of the continuous hitting discrimination means, the player does not perform the continuous hitting operation (for example, a single push operation or a long press). It is possible to prevent the player from feeling the load of pushing the hand back by operating the second driving means even when the player is performing an operation or the like.

In the gaming machine B2, the terminal detecting means for detecting the position of the operating means and detecting whether or not the operating means is arranged at the terminal position, and whether or not the operating means is arranged at a position changed by a predetermined amount from the terminal position. The movement direction determining means is provided with a position difference detecting means for detecting and a moving direction determining means for determining the moving direction of the operating means from the time relationship between the detection value of the terminal detecting means and the detection value of the position difference detecting means. The gaming machine B3, characterized in that the second driving means is driven when the direction of movement determined by the above is the direction of returning from the push-in end to the first state.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, when the direction of movement determined by the moving direction determining means is the direction of returning from the push end to the first state, that is, the player's hand is from the button. Since the second driving means is driven at the timing of moving in the direction of separation, it is possible to generate a load that pushes back the operating means in a form synchronized with the movement of the player.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second drive device from operating in the direction facing the moving direction of the player's hand and applying a high load to the player's hand.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the second driving means is characterized by being composed of a voice coil motor that vibrates and displaces along the direction connecting the first state and the second state of the operating means. Gaming machine B4.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the vibration displacement of the voice coil motor can be effectively used to generate a driving force for moving the operating means.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, a support frame for supporting the operation means is provided, and the second drive means elastically supports a drive motor for rotating the eccentric weight and the drive motor on the support frame. A mode in which a support means is provided, and the closer the operating means is to the terminal position, the greater the driving force for moving the operating means from the position of the first state to the position of the second state. The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the eccentric weight abuts on the support frame in a state where the operating means is arranged at the terminal position to generate a driving force.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the driving force by the second driving means is generated by the driving force generated by the supporting means and the contact between the eccentric weight and the support frame. By generating it separately from the driving force, it is possible to adjust the driving force given to the operating means while maintaining the rotation of the driving motor. At this time, it is not necessary to control the start or stop of the rotation of the drive motor, and the rotation of the drive motor can be maintained.

In the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight moves close to the support frame in the moving direction of the operation means based on the operation means being arranged at the terminal position, and abuts on the support frame. A gaming machine B6 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight moves close to the support frame in the moving direction of the operating means and comes into contact with the support frame, so that the repulsive force generated by the contact is used. Then, the drive motor can be moved in the direction away from the support frame in the moving direction of the operating means. As a result, the supporting means that supports the driving motor moves in a direction away from the support frame (direction close to the operating means), so that the driving force that pushes back the operating means can be further increased.

<Points of using VCM as a braking device and a vibration effecting device>
A detection sensor for detecting a position near the terminal position of the operating means is provided, and the detection sensor is composed of a plurality of sensors, a measuring means for measuring the speed of the operating means from the detection interval of the detection sensor, and the measuring means thereof. The threshold determination means is provided with a threshold determination means for determining whether or not the measured value measured by the above is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold, and a repulsion means for generating a driving force in the direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operating means. When the measured threshold value is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value, the driving force generated by the repulsive means increases as compared with the case where the threshold value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or lower than the predetermined threshold value. Characteristic gaming machine C1.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14421).
See Publication No. 8). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, if the player emphasizes light operation, the operation resistance becomes low and the operation means may be damaged by the operation of the player, while if the operation means is firmly supported, the movement of the operation means itself is affected. It is possible to reduce the speed and the possibility that the operating means will be damaged, but there is a problem that the force required for the player's operation increases and the operation of the operating means becomes a burden for the weak player. ..

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the threshold value determining means determines whether the speed of the operating means is equal to or higher than the threshold value, and if the speed is equal to or higher than the threshold value, the driving force generated by the repulsive means is increased. Therefore, the operation resistance can be reduced when the speed of the operation means is equal to or less than the threshold value, and the operation means can be decelerated only when necessary. Therefore, the repulsive means can improve the operability and prevent the destruction.

In the game machine C1, the repulsive means includes a voice coil motor that generates a driving force in the direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operating means, and the threshold measured by the threshold determining means is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold. Before the control for pushing the voice coil motor to the extended position is executed and the operating means is arranged in a position where the voice coil motor can be in contact with the voice coil motor.
A gaming machine C2 characterized in that the voice coil motor is driven in advance.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, the voice coil motor can be driven and controlled to decelerate the operating means, and the operating means are arranged at a position where they can come into contact with the voice coil motor. By driving the voice coil motor before the operation, the impact generated between the operating means and the voice coil motor can be suppressed.

The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that, after the operating means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other, the gaming machine C1 or C2 is controlled to increase the current flowing through the voice coil motor.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the operating means is controlled by increasing the current flowing through the voice coil motor after the operating means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other. It is possible to gradually improve the degree of braking of the operating means while suppressing the generation of a large load at the moment of contact with the voice coil motor, and it is possible to reduce the discomfort felt by the player during operation.

In the gaming machine C1, the repulsive means is arranged so as to be in contact with the operating means, and the gaming machine C4 is characterized in that a driving force corresponding to a deformation amount deformed by the movement of the operating means is generated by spring elasticity. ..

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the repulsive means generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation by spring elasticity, so that the driving force is not delayed even when the moving speed of the operating means is high. Can be generated.

In the gaming machine C4, the repulsion means is compared when the value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold value and when the value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold value. The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that the movable region of the end portion of the repulsive means, which is the end portion on the opposite side to the operating means, is narrowed.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C4, the movable area of the end of the repulsive means on the opposite side of the side that comes into contact with the operating means is narrowed, so that the operating means can be operated. When the speed is high, the elastic force generated by the repulsive means can be increased.

<Prevents damage to the driving means by blocking the transmission of driving force with a clutch>
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device includes a driving means for generating a driving force for operating the operating means, a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means. A release means for releasing the transmission of the driving force is provided, and the release means is provided with the driving force when the load generated between the driving means and the operating means via the transmitting means becomes a predetermined amount or more. A gaming machine D1 characterized by canceling transmission.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14421).
See Publication No. 8). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the operating means is automatically operated for staging, if the operating means is operated during the automatic operation, a large load may be generated on the drive system. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the releasing means is configured to release the transmission of the driving force when the load generated between the driving means and the operating means via the transmitting means becomes a predetermined amount or more. Therefore, even if the player operates the operating means when the operating means is automatically operated, the transmission of the load to the drive system is canceled (disconnected), and the load applied to the drive system can be suppressed. can.

In the gaming machine D1, the driving means is capable of driving in the first direction and driving in the second direction opposite to the first direction, and is being driven in the first direction. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the release by the release means functions regardless of whether the drive is in the second direction.

Here, when it is determined whether or not the transmission of the driving force can be canceled depending on the operating direction of the driving means,
If the operating means is operated by the player when the driving means is driven in an operating direction in which the transmission of the driving force cannot be released, a large load may be generated on the driving means. Therefore, the degree of freedom in the production when the operation means is operated to produce the effect is reduced.

When the button is driven between the first position and the second position, the lock member that locks the button is moved in the release direction or in the release direction depending on whether the drive means rotates in the forward direction or in the reverse direction. Switch whether to move in the opposite direction. In this case, it is possible to create two modes of button operation (two patterns, a release pattern and a non-release pattern), but it is necessary that the driving force is interrupted in both of them.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the transmission of the driving force can be canceled (disconnected) in both directions of the driving direction regardless of the driving direction of the driving means. , It is possible to improve the degree of freedom of operation of the effect of automatically operating the operation means.

As a method of releasing the transmission, the clutch moves in a direction intersecting the operating direction of the driving means. The crossing direction is intended to exclude, for example, the circumferential direction when the driving means rotates, and the clutch may move in the rotation axis direction or in the radial direction.

The gaming machine D1 or D2 includes an urging means for urging the driving means and the transmitting means to a state in which the driving force can be transmitted, and the releasing means is a contact portion between the driving means and the transmitting means. Each of the convex portions is provided with engaging teeth that transmit a driving force in a state where they are engaged with each other, and the engaging teeth have both sides facing the operating direction of the driving means from the contact surface. The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that it is configured to have a shape that is inclined with respect to the contact surface in a manner that tapers as the distance increases.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the urging means presses the driving means and the transmitting means, and the releasing means exerts a driving force in a meshed state on the pressed contact surface. On the other hand, since both sides facing the operating direction of the driving means are provided with engaging teeth that are inclined so as to taper away from the contact surface, the transmitting means can be transmitted from the driving means by engaging the engaging teeth with each other. It can be separated, thereby canceling the transmission of the driving force.

Further, an urging force by the urging means is constantly applied between the driving means and the transmitting means, and when the transmitting means separates from the driving means, the urging force is applied to the operating direction of the driving means via the engaging teeth. A load is applied. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change in the load applied to the driving means between the state in which the driving force is transmitted and the state in which the transmission is released.

The size of the engaging portion of the engaging tooth becomes smaller in the circumferential direction of the transmitting means as the transmitting means moves away from the driving means. Therefore, when the phase difference between the transmission means and the driving means becomes large, it is possible to prevent the load generated in the circumferential direction of the transmission means from becoming excessive.

In addition, in the released state, the resistance does not disappear completely at a distance, but the resistance is periodically restored. As a result, when the player releases his hand, the button can be started to operate within a short time.

That is, when the button is driven, "as an effect", if the player holds the button,
One phase of button operation has passed. And if the player releases his hand in the middle and moves from the end of the one phase, the period when the button is stopped becomes long, and "
The feeling that "it started to move because the load on the player was released" is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D3, the operating means can be started within a short time after the player releases the hand and the load is released. As a result, it is possible to produce a feeling of movement because the load on the player has been released.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the engaging surface between the transmitting means and the releasing means is
A gaming machine D4 characterized in that it is formed from a sawtooth shape that engages with each other.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, when the load from the player is released, the releasing means can be easily returned to the engagement position with the transmitting means at an early stage.
That is, when the tip of the engaging surface has a plane parallel to the direction in which the transmitting means and the releasing means are close to each other, the transmitting means and the releasing means abut on the plane and the transmitting means of the releasing means are transmitted. It is possible to prevent the movement of the means from being stopped in the direction of proximity and separation. Therefore, the operation means can be started at an early stage after the load from the player is released.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the operation mode of the operating means differs depending on whether the driving means is continuously operated in the forward direction or the driving means is continuously operated in the reverse direction. The gaming machine D5 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, while preparing a plurality of operating modes of the operating means, the driving force transmission is released without being limited to any of the operating modes. It can be carried out.

In the gaming machine D5, when there is a difference in whether the driving means operates in the forward direction or the reverse direction, the operation mode of the operating means is the operation mode for a predetermined period from the start of the operation of the driving means. Similarly, the gaming machine D6 is characterized in that the operation after the lapse of a predetermined period is different.

According to the gaming machine D6, when there is a difference in the operating direction of the driving means in the operating mode of the operating means in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D5, the operating mode of the driving means is the same for a predetermined period from the start of the operation. Since the operation after the lapse of the predetermined period is different, the player's attention to the operating means can be improved.

Here, by entwining the difference in the operation mode of the operation means with information that is beneficial to the player, such as the jackpot expectation degree, the operation of the operation means is performed by the player for a predetermined period until the operation mode of the operation means changes. You can watch over.

Further, since this difference in the operation mode is caused by the difference in the operation direction of the drive means, if the operation direction of the drive means can be confirmed in advance, the player can grasp the difference in the jackpot expectation degree without watching the operation of the operation means. Can be done. However, since the driving means is usually hidden from the player and the difference in the operating direction cannot be recognized from the vibration sound or the like, the operating direction of the driving means cannot be confirmed in advance, and the player cannot confirm the operating direction. Can be watched over by the operation of the operating means.

<Change the position of the cam protrusion based on the rotation of the cam>
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device includes a driving means for generating a driving force for operating the operating means, a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, and a transmission means. The operating means is configured to operate between the first position and a second position different from the first position, and is a first means for suppressing the position of the operating means from changing from the first position. An urging means that urges the operating means from the first position toward the second position, and an operating means that moves the operating means from the first position to the second position by the urging force of the urging means. In a gaming machine including a terminal means for forming a movable end of the above in a variable manner, the first means suppresses a change in the position of the operating means by engaging with the operating means. A release load means for giving a load for disengaging the engagement of one means to the operation means to the first means is provided, disengagement by the release load means, and movement termination of the operation means in the termination means. The gaming machine E, characterized in that the change is performed by a single driving means.
1.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a movable operating means operated by a cam is fixed at the first position, and the fixing is released by a release load means, so that the urging force of the urging means is used to extend the movement. , There is a gaming machine in which the displacement amount of the overhanging motion can be changed by a terminal means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the displacement amount of the overhanging operation of the operating means is changed depending on the phase of the cam at the time of releasing the fixing, the phase of the cam at the time of releasing the fixing is changed in various ways. The cam for moving the means and the release load means for releasing the fixing were operated by different driving forces. Therefore, there is a problem that a plurality of driving means are required and the space for arranging the driving means becomes large.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine E1, the release load means for releasing the fixing of the operating means is driven by the driving means for driving the operating means. As a result, the number of drive means can be reduced because the drive means for changing the end position of the operation means by the end means and the drive means for moving the release load means can be used in combination.

In the gaming machine E1, the gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the change in the position of the releasing load means is performed based on the operation of the transmitting means.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, a change in the position of the releasing load means can be generated based on the operation of the transmitting means. The state of the load means can be determined. As a result, the number of arrangements of the detection means such as the position sensor for detecting the state of the release load means can be reduced, and the number of parts can be reduced.

As a method of switching the state of the release load means, when the transmission means is composed of a cam and the release load means is composed of a protrusion that rotates coaxially with the cam, a method of shifting the rotation cycle between the cam and the protrusion is used. , When the cam is placed in a predetermined phase, the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the protrusion are out of sync, and in other phases, the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the protrusion are synchronized.
Illustrated.

In the gaming machine E2, the release load means is subjected to a load given by the first means.
The gaming machine E3 is operably arranged with respect to the transmission means, and the operation of the release load means switches whether or not the release load means and the transmission means operate synchronously.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, the releasing load means is operably arranged with respect to the transmitting means by the load from the first means, and the releasing load means is operated by the operation of the releasing load means. Since it is switched whether or not the transmission means and the transmission means operate in synchronization, the synchronization state between the release load means and the transmission means can be changed without adding a member.

In the game machine E2, the transmission means includes a rotating first rotating member, the operating means is supported eccentrically with respect to the rotation axis of the first rotating member, and the release load means rotates a second rotation. A gaming machine E4 comprising a member, wherein the first rotating member and the second rotating member have different rotation cycles.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, the first rotating member and the second rotating member are operated by a single driving means, but since the rotation cycles are different, the second rotating means is predetermined. It is possible to prepare a plurality of types of phases of the first rotating member when the first means is released by abutting with the first means in phase.

According to this configuration, it is possible to prepare a plurality of types of terminal positions when the operation of the first means is released from the state where the operating means is maintained at the first position and the operation means is moved toward the second position. ,
The range of production can be expanded. For example, an effect of gradually moving the terminal position away from the first position and an effect of gradually moving the terminal position closer to the first position can be realized with the same configuration.

<Vibration device supported by soft case>
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device includes a first position of the operating means and a second position reached by the operating means when the player operates from the first position. In a gaming machine including a vibrating means configured to be movable between and having a vibrating vibrating portion and a receiving means arranged so as to be in contact with the vibrating portion, the operating means is arranged at the first position. Then, the vibrating portion is in a separated state in which it cannot abut on the receiving means, while when the operating means is arranged at the second position, the vibrating portion can abut on the receiving means. A gaming machine F1 characterized by being in contact with each other.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with an operating means that can be operated by the player and a vibration means that transmits vibration to the player via the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine (for example,).
See Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the vibrating means vibrates regardless of whether or not the operating means is operated, the vibration is transmitted to the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine. Or, since it is transmitted to the player who touches the frame of the gaming machine, when performing an effect of transmitting vibration immediately after operating the operating means,
It is necessary to operate the vibrating means after detecting the operation of the operating means. Therefore, after the player operates the operating means, it is necessary to operate the vibrating means before releasing the hand from the operating means, and the operation mode of the player (for example, an operation such as releasing the operating means at the moment when the operating means is pushed in). In some cases, the vibration may not start in time before the player releases the vibration, and there is a problem that the vibration may not be noticed by the player.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, whether or not the vibrating portion comes into contact with the receiving means depends on whether the operating means is arranged in the first position or is operated by the player and arranged in the second position. Since it changes, even when the vibrating portion is continuously vibrated, the player can feel the vibration for the first time by operating the operating means. Further, since the vibration of the vibrating portion is generated before the player pushes in, the vibrating portion can be vibrated before the player releases the hand, regardless of the mode of the player's operation. Vibration can be transmitted to a person.

In the gaming machine F1, the vibrating means is arranged so as to project over an occupied area occupied when the operating means is arranged at the second position in the separated state, and the operating means moves to the second position. The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the vibrating means is brought out of the occupied area to change to the contact state.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, the vibration means moves based on the movement of the operating means, so that the separated state changes to the contact state. Therefore, depending on the degree of movement of the operating means. The contact strength between the operating means or receiving means and the vibrating part can be changed.
The intensity of the transmitted vibration can also be changed. Therefore, the effect of changing the strength of the transmitted vibration with respect to the operation strength of the player can be performed by vibrating the vibrating means in the same manner without any particular change in the driving mode.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the vibrating means is supported by the receiving means via a supporting means having spring elasticity.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the support means can perform positioning with respect to the receiving means while suppressing the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the receiving means. As a result, the receiving means and the vibrating means can be separated from each other to prevent the transmission of vibration, and the displacement generated in the vibrating means during vibration can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine F3, the gaming machine F4 is characterized in that the supporting means expands and contracts based on the vibration of the vibrating portion in the contact state.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, the elasticity of the supporting means can be used to increase the load generated when the vibrating portion and the receiving means come into contact with each other. That is, the expansion and contraction of the support means can give momentum when the vibrating portion moves in a direction close to the receiving means.

In the gaming machine F3, the supporting means has a deformation resistance along the operating direction of the operating means.
The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that it is lowered as compared with the deformation resistance in the direction perpendicular to the operating direction of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, the direction in which the supporting means is deformed can be finely set when the operating means is operated and interferes with the supporting means due to the difference in the deformation resistance of the supporting means. can.

As a result, even if the difference in the amount of movement of the operating means is slight, the amount of expansion and contraction of the supporting means can be made different, and the load generated between the vibrating portion and the receiving means can be made different. ..

As a method of making the deformation resistance different, when the supporting means is composed of a rubber member surrounding the vibrating means, a method of extending the rubber legs along the operating direction of the operating means, or a method of supporting the supporting means surrounding the vibrating means. In the case of being composed of rubber members, a method of manufacturing the rubber members by two-color molding and changing the deformation resistance in each direction, and a rail that guides the operating means so that the operating means move in the direction along the operating direction. , A method of configuring the coil spring that urges the vibrating means along the operating direction of the operating means, and the like are exemplified.

The gaming machine F6 is characterized in that a portion of the gaming machine F3 with which the vibrating portion abuts is the receiving means, and the receiving means is configured as a means different from the operating means.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, the vibration is not transmitted to the player through the operating means, but is transmitted to the player through the receiving means which is a means different from the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the driving means via the operating means and the transmitting means, so that it is possible to suppress the state in which the driving means is loaded. This makes it possible to improve the durability of the drive means.

Further, since the vibration can be suppressed from being transmitted to the hand of the player who operates the operating means, it is possible to prevent the player who is surprised by the vibration from stopping the operation during the operation.

As the receiving means, for example, in the frame part of the game machine, the part near the upper plate to which the game ball is supplied, the edge part of the glass frame, etc., the player does not notice during the game. Examples include a part that may be touched by a hand, a storage part that partially surrounds the operating means, and the like.

<One-touch mounting of cam and shaft. Shape deformation (elastic deformation) is possible at the mounting part>
In an operation device having an operation means operated by a player, the operation device is configured so that the operation means can move between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and the operation means can be used. It is characterized by comprising a driving means for generating a driving force to be driven and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, and the transmitting means includes a deformed portion elastically deformed by an overload. Game machine G1 to play.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an operating means that can be operated by a player, a driving means that generates a driving force for driving the operating means, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force from the driving means to the operating means are provided. There is a gaming machine provided (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218).
.. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the operating means is gripped and fixed by the player, when the driving means generates a driving force for driving the operating means, the connecting portion between the transmitting means and the operating means or
There is a problem that a load is accumulated in the connecting portion between the transmitting means and the driving means, and these connecting portions may be damaged.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, when the operating device is overloaded, the deformed portion of the transmitting means is elastically deformed, so that the connecting portion between the operating means and the transmitting means and the driving means and the transmitting means are connected. The load given to the connecting portion with and can be relaxed.

In the gaming machine G1, the transmission means includes a cam member that is rotatably supported, the deformed portion constitutes a connecting portion with the rotating shaft of the cam member, and the elasticity of the deformed portion causes the rotation shaft. The gaming machine G2, which is characterized in that a fixing force of the above is generated.

According to the game machine G2, the deforming portion plays a role as a part responsible for elastic deformation of the cam member with respect to the rotation shaft of the transmission means, and a role as a part for generating a bearing force of the cam member with respect to the rotation shaft.
To prepare for. Therefore, the configuration of the transmission member can be simplified by combining the functions. For example, individual fixing members such as e-rings can be omitted.

In the game machine G2, the cam member includes a convex portion that is convexly provided in parallel with the axis of rotation, and the convex portion and the operating means are connected to each other, and the elastic deformation of the deformed portion is applied to the cam member. On the other hand, the gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the rotation axis is tilted.

Here, the elastic deformation of the transmission means can also be performed, for example, by displacing the convex portion along the circumferential direction of the cam member. However, in this case, it becomes difficult to form the cam member and the convex portion with one member, and the number of members may increase.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2, the elastic deformation of the deformed portion is such that the rotation axis is tilted with respect to the cam member, so that the convex portion is used as the cam member. On the other hand, as compared with the case of sliding movement, the cam member can be easily configured from a single member, and the member can be simplified.

In the game machine G3, the resistance of the elastic deformation of the deformed portion is compared with the rotation axis in the first rotation direction in which the cam member is rotated about the straight line connecting the rotation shaft and the convex portion. A gaming machine characterized in that the deformation resistance is larger in the second rotation direction in which the straight line connecting the convex portion and the straight line perpendicular to both the extension direction of the rotation axis are rotated about the axis. G4.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effect of the game machine G3, by making the deformation resistance of the deformed part different for each direction, the state after the deformed part is elastically deformed in the direction of the rotation axis is better. Compared with the state before elastic deformation, the convex tip of the convex portion can be displaced in the direction along the circumferential direction of the cam member. As a result, the convex portion can be displaced along the direction in which the convex portion of the cam member tends to move, so that the load generated between the convex portion and the operating means due to the elastic deformation of the deformed portion is alleviated. can do.

The gaming machine G3 or G4 includes a friction member that is spaced apart by a predetermined distance along a direction parallel to the rotation axis of the cam member, and the deformed portion is elastically deformed to change the posture of the cam member. The gaming machine G5, characterized in that the cam member and the friction member come into contact with each other.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G3 or G4, when an overload is applied to the operating means, the deformed portion is elastically deformed, so that the cam member changes its posture, and the cam member and the friction member Can increase the operating resistance of the cam member itself, thereby reducing the load applied to the connecting portion between the cam member and the operating means.

A gaming machine G6 comprising a detection means for detecting that at least a part of the cam member is tilted and displaced with respect to an axis in any of the gaming machines G3 to G5.

Here, in a situation where the operating device is overloaded and the driving means is operating but the operating means is not operating, for example, the displacement expected due to the driving of the driving means and the actual displacement of the operating means. When detecting that an overload has occurred on the basis of the deviation from the above, it is necessary to drive the driving means for a predetermined period before detecting the occurrence of the overload. This period can be shortened as the arrangement interval of the detection means for detecting the displacement shift is smaller, but the smaller the arrangement interval of the detection means, the more complicated the configuration of the detection means becomes and the more expensive it becomes. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to configure the configuration so that the occurrence of overload can be detected at an early stage at low cost.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G3 to G5, the detecting means detects whether or not at least a part of the cam member is tilted and displaced with respect to the axis. Therefore, it is possible to determine that an overload has occurred at the same time that the detecting means detects at least a part of the cam member without having to drive the driving means for a predetermined period while suppressing the additional number of the detecting means. This makes it possible to reduce the load applied to the drive means when an overload occurs.

<Structure to prevent ball goat with thread. Pachinko machine H>
In a gaming machine provided with a foul ball passage through which a foul ball returning to the launching device can pass among the gaming balls launched into the game area, the foul ball passage allows the flowing game ball to pass through. The gaming machine H1 is provided with a one-way obstructing means for obstructing the progress of a backflowing object.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a fraudulent act performed by arranging a thread cutting blade inside a guide path for guiding the game ball from the upper plate to the launcher and driving the game ball to which the thread is connected into the game area. There is a gaming machine having a function of preventing (cutting a thread) (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-02).
See Publication No. 4179). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the thread is pressed against the thread trimming teeth at the time of firing, and the thread is cut by the tension generated at that time. However, when the firing strength of the gaming ball is weak, the gaming ball cannot be completely cut. It may be returned to the player as a foul ball.
Therefore, for example, an illegal tool with a game ball connected to both ends of the thread is prepared, and one of the game balls connected to one end of the thread is fired at a low firing strength to flow into the foul ball passage and returned to the player side. By driving the other game ball connected to the other end of the thread into the game area while holding one of the game balls, the thread can be removed from the guide path and one through the foul ball passage. Since it is possible to create a state in which the game ball of 1 and the other game ball are connected by a thread, a load is applied to the thread connected to the other game ball from the outside, and the other game ball arranged in the game area. There was a problem that there was a risk of being able to gain fraudulent profits by manipulating.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, even if a fraudulent act of applying a load to the other gaming ball is performed by using the thread guided to the gaming area through the foul ball passage, the one-way obstruction means. However, by obstructing the movement of the thread in the backflow direction of the game ball, it is possible to make it difficult to generate fraudulent profits.

In the gaming machine H1, the foul ball passage is provided with a bent portion that bends the flow path of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1, the thread guided along the path of the gaming ball can be rubbed against the bent portion, so that the thread can be cut at an early stage.

In the game machine H2, the bent portion is provided with a load means on the inner angle side of the bend, which does not give a load to the flowing game ball but gives a load to the backflowing object.
..

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H2, a load can be applied to a backflowing object (for example, a thread-shaped member) by the loading means.

In the gaming machine H3, the loading means is arranged in a recessed portion having a width smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H3, by preventing the gaming ball from entering the recess of the recessed portion, the loading means and the gaming ball are prevented from colliding with each other, and the loading means is damaged. It can be prevented from doing so.

The gaming machine H5 is characterized in that the gaming machine H3 or H4 is provided with a regulating means for restricting the movement of the loading means to the outside of the foul ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H3 or H4, the regulation means restricts the movement of the loading means to the outside of the foul ball passage, so that between the thread-like member and the loading means. When a load is generated, the load means is deformed to the outside of the foul ball passage, so that it is possible to prevent the load applied to the member on the yarn from being weakened.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, a receiving dish, which is a dish on which the foul ball first reaches on the front side of the front door, is provided, and the receiving dish is a portion for discharging the game ball to be paid out from the payout device. The gaming machine H6 is characterized in that the ball discharging portion is arranged above the discharging side outlet of the foul ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the gaming ball discharged from the payout device passes in front of the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage, so that the game ball passes through the foul ball passage. When a fraudulent act of applying a load to the other game ball is performed using the thread guided to the game area, the game ball to be paid out is intentionally applied to apply a load and reduce the durability of the thread. be able to.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the lower end of the payout ball ejection portion, which is a portion for discharging the game ball to be dispensed from the payout device, is to the receiving dish, which is the dish on which the foul ball first reaches on the front side of the front door. , The gaming machine H7, characterized in that it is located below the lower end of the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, a fraudulent act of imposing a load on the other gaming ball was performed using the thread guided to the gaming area through the foul ball passage. In some cases, the payout ball can make it easier to damage the thread.

<Structure of board retainer. Pachinko machine I>
A gaming means used during a game and a receiving means having an opening on one side facing the gaming means and being able to accept the gaming means from that one side are provided, and the receiving means includes the gaming means. A state changing means capable of changing the gaming means from an unusable state, which is an unusable state, to a usable state, which is a usable state, is provided, and the state changing means puts the gaming means into the used state. The gaming machine I1 is provided with a proximity means that is close to the gaming means from one side.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, it is possible to rotate in a rotation direction parallel to the front surface of the game board, and the state changes between a fixed state in which the game board is fixed to the inner frame and a release state in which the game board can be removed from the inner frame. There is a gaming machine provided with a fixing means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-230420). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the fixing means is configured so that the fixing means can be changed only after the gaming board is pushed into the position in the used state. Therefore, when the gaming board is pushed halfway, it is pushed again. There is a problem that it is necessary to perform the repetitive work, and the work efficiency may be lowered.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, the state changing means is provided with a proximity means that is close to the gaming means from the receiving side (one side) when the gaming means is put into use, so that the gaming board is pushed in. Even if it is halfway, the proximity means comes into contact with the game board and applies a pushing force, so that
It has the effect of pushing the game board to the position where it is in use.

In the gaming machine I1, the state changing means is characterized in that the gaming means is displaced to the one side as the state changes to an unusable state that makes the gaming means unusable. ..

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1, the gaming means is displaced to the receiving side (one side) as the gaming means is changed to an unusable state, so that the gaming means is removed. It has the effect of improving the work efficiency of the work.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the state changing means is characterized in that the proximity means retracts to the outside of the gaming means as the gaming means becomes unusable. Game machine I3 to play.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1 or I2, the proximity means is retracted to the outside of the gaming means, so that the work efficiency of the removal work of the gaming means can be improved and it is a game. Since it is performed by disabling the means, the work efficiency can be further improved.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the state changing means is a gaming machine I4 including a contacting means that receives a load from the gaming means when the state changes to a usable state.

According to the gaming machine I4, when the contacting means receives a load from the gaming means, the state changing means changes to a usable state. Therefore, by pressing the gaming means against the state changing means, the state changing means can be used as a series of flows. The state can be changed to.

In the gaming machine I4, the gaming means is supported around one side of the receiving means and is configured to be accepted by the receiving means by being brought close to the other side, and the state changing means is the receiving means. The gaming machine I5, characterized in that it is arranged on the other side of the above.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I4, the width dimension of the gaming means is used.
A load can be efficiently applied to the contacting means via the gaming means.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, a closing means for closing the opening on one side of the receiving means is provided, and the closing means cannot be used by the state changing means so that the gaming means cannot be used. The gaming machine I6 is provided with a closing restricting unit that makes it impossible to close the opening on one side of the gaming means when maintaining the state.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the state changing means can use the gaming means depending on whether or not the closing means can close the opening on one side of the gaming means. It is possible to determine whether or not to do so. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the closing means closes the opening on one side of the gaming means even though the gaming means remains unusable.

<The reverse cup and harness band prevent the piano wire from getting stuck. Pachinko machine J>
A gaming means used during a game and a receiving means having an opening on one side facing the gaming means and being able to accept the gaming means from that one side are provided, and the receiving means is the above-mentioned gaming means. The gaming machine J1 is provided with an arranging means arranged in a path communicating with the outside, and the arranging means is configured to be able to suppress the entry of an object from the outside at a plurality of places.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines provided with a fraud prevention unit for preventing fraud against fraudulent acts of inserting a piano wire from the rotation axis side of the front frame (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-).
See Publication No. 26573). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that the fraud prevention unit is only in one place and the fraud prevention effect is not sufficient.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine J1, an arrangement means is arranged in a path where the piano wire may be inserted, and the arrangement means is configured to be able to suppress the entry of the piano wire at a plurality of places, thus preventing fraud. The effect of can be improved.

In the gaming machine J1, the arranging means includes a first means for suppressing the entry of a member from the outside at a first place and a second means for suppressing the entry of a member from the outside at a second place.
A gaming machine J2 characterized in that the entry of members from the outside is suppressed by different methods.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1, the method of suppressing the entry of the member from the outside differs between the first place and the second place, so that the placement means is simply placed. Compared with the case where the number of members is increased, the entry of members from the outside can be further suppressed.

The method of suppressing the invasion from the outside is not limited at all. For example, a method of suppressing entry by blocking the route may be used, or a method of suppressing fraudulent activity by detecting heat and sounding an alarm may be used.

The gaming machine J3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine J1 or J2, the arranging means includes an intrusion control portion formed from a cup shape that is opened toward the outside of the receiving means.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1 or J2, the intrusion restricting portion is formed from the cup shape, so that the invading member can be prevented from further invading.

In the gaming machine J3, the arranging means includes a supporting means for supporting the electric wiring, and the supporting means is arranged on the downstream side of the entry restricting portion in the route from the outside to the gaming means. Characterized gaming machine J4.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J3, when an illegality occurs in which the entry restricting portion is penetrated by high heat, changes (such as disconnection due to heat) caused in the wiring due to the high heat are detected from the outside. It is possible to easily generate the effect of suppressing the entry of the member.

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the arranging means refers to a member that has entered from the outside.
The gaming machine J5 is provided with a eliminating means for guiding to a eliminating area far from the gaming means.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the members entering from the outside are guided to the elimination area far from the gaming means by the arranging means, so that the members entering from the outside enter. Even if the degree becomes stronger, it is possible to prevent the member that has entered from the outside from reaching the gaming means.

<Structure of a decorative board with a five-sheet structure. Involved in fraud prevention. Pachinko machine K>
The first and second means are arranged so as to face each other along the first direction and at least one side is connected, and the first means and the second means are arranged along the first direction. In a gaming machine including the first means and the second means, a connecting portion for connecting the first means and the second means is provided, and the connecting direction of the connecting portion is set to a second direction intersecting with the first direction. The gaming machine K1 characterized by this.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the first means and the second means are arranged so as to face each other and are connected by at least one side, and are arranged between the first means and the second means along the first direction. There is a gaming machine provided with a third means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26573).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, each member is connected by an existing method such as bonding or screwing, but when the first means and the second means are connected, a load along the first direction is applied. There is a problem that the third means may be damaged by being applied to the three means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, since the connecting direction of the connecting portion connecting the first means and the second means is set to the second direction intersecting the first direction, the first direction is set to the third means. It is possible to reduce the load applied from the machine. This makes it possible to prevent the third means from being damaged.

The gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the connecting portion is arranged apart from the third means in the gaming machine K1.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied from the connecting portion to the third means.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the connected means to be connected and fixed to the other side of the first means and the second means is provided, and the one side of the first means and the second means is connected to the connected means. The gaming machine K3 is characterized in that the second means is displaced with respect to the first means in a third direction close to each other and fitted to each other to be connected to each other.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1 or K2, the connected means to be connected to the other sides of the first means and the second means is provided, and one side of the first means and the second means is provided. Is connected and fixed by the fitting generated by displacing the second means with respect to the first means in the third direction close to the connected means, so that the first means and the first means oriented in the direction intersecting the third direction and The resistance to decomposition of the second means can be improved.

In the gaming machine K3, the gaming machine K4 is characterized in that the one side of the first means and the second means is exposed to the outside and arranged.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K3, one side of the first means and the second means is exposed to the outside and arranged, so that the state of the fitting portion can be easily confirmed. be able to.
As a result, even when a fraudulent act of destroying the fitting portion and disassembling the first means and the second means occurs, the detection of the fraudulent act can be accelerated.

In the gaming machine K3 or K4, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed to the connected means, and the direction of fastening and fixing thereof is the same as the third direction. ..

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K3 or K4, the fastening direction between the first means and the second means and the connected means is set to be the same as the third direction. The tightening strength can reinforce the fitting strength.

In any of the gaming machines K3 to K5, one of the light irradiation means that irradiates light toward the first means or the second means and is fixed to the connected means and the first means or the second means. The gaming machine K6 is characterized by comprising a light guide means fixed to the member of the above-mentioned member and configured to be able to introduce the light irradiated by the light irradiating means into the inside.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K3 to K5, it is possible to prevent the misalignment between the first means and the second means and the light guide means.

The gaming machine K6 is characterized in that the gaming machine K6 is provided with a contacting means that abuts on a surface in a region facing the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K6, the distance between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means is maintained by the size of the contacting means. Can be done.
This prevents the distance between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means from changing when the first means or the second means receives a load in the opposite direction and is displaced. Can be done.

This prevents the positional relationship between the first means, the second means, and the light guide means from changing even if a load is applied in the opposite direction when the first means or the second means illegally attempts to disassemble. can do.

<Point L for utilizing the curved light guide means. As a point, it has not been reached>
The light guide means formed in a curved wave shape in the irradiation direction of the light passing through the inside, and the projected means arranged facing the light guide means and projecting the light passing through the light guide means are provided. The gaming machine L1 is characterized in that the projected means includes a concave facing portion arranged to face the concave portion of the light guide means, and a convex facing portion facing the convex portion of the light guide means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a light guide plate that uniformly emits light emitted from an end surface (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26573). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the light guide plate is formed in the shape of a flat plate, it is necessary to change the intensity of the incident light in order to partially change the intensity of the light emitted from the surface. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, since the projected means includes the concave facing portion and the convex facing portion, even if the intensity of the light incident on the light guide means is constant, the concave facing portion and the convex facing portion are opposed to each other. With the club
The emission intensity of the projected means can be changed.

In the gaming machine L1, the projected means is characterized in that the concave facing portion is made of a light-transmitting material, and the convex facing portion is made of a material that is less likely to transmit light than the concave facing portion. The gaming machine L2.

According to the game machine L2, in addition to the effect of the game machine L1, the light emitted from the light guide means is focused on the concave facing portion by consciously weakening the intensity of the light transmitted through the convex facing portion. It is possible to improve the effect of the effect of the light.

The game machine L2 includes a counter-projection means that is arranged on the opposite side of the light-guiding means with the light-guiding means and is projected with light that has passed through the light-guiding means, and the counter-projecting means is the guiding means. The gaming machine L3 is characterized in that a portion facing the concave surface portion of the light means and a portion facing the convex surface portion of the light guide means are formed of materials having substantially the same light transmission property.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L2, the portion of the counter-projection means that is arranged to face the concave portion of the light guide means and the portion that is arranged to face the convex portion of the light guide means are light. Since the transparency is formed from substantially the same material, by incident the same light on the light guide means, the light effect mode to be visually recognized through the projected means and the light effect mode to be visually recognized through the counterprojection means. Can be different.

<Bass reflex speaker layout structure. Pachinko machine M>
The first and second means that are arranged facing each other and fixed to each other to form an internal space, and the acoustic means that is arranged with at least a part of the internal space entering the internal space, and the above-mentioned. The gaming machine M1 is provided with a bending means for forming a bending path in an internal space.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which speakers are arranged at both left and right ends of a front frame and an effect is produced by the sound output from the speakers (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-1).
See Publication No. 6088). Then, in such a gaming machine, the vibration wave traveling toward the back side of the speaker body is advanced to the left and right center positions of the gaming machine and transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine.
There is a problem that the path length of the vibration wave is defined by the left-right width of the gaming machine, where it is easy to produce a low-pitched sound.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, the bending means forms a bending path in the internal spaces of the first means and the second means. Therefore, by forming a path longer than the length of one piece, the gaming machine can be used. It is possible to cancel the regulation of the left-right width and allow the vibration wave to travel at any distance.

In the gaming machine M1, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed in such a manner that a load is applied in opposite directions, and the bending means is ribbed from at least one of the first means or the second means toward the other. The gaming machine M2 is provided with a projecting portion projecting from the pachinko machine M2, wherein the projecting tip of the projecting portion abuts on the other of the first means or the second means.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1, the protruding tip of the protruding portion and the other of the first means or the second means in the direction in which the fastening force is applied to the first means and the second means. By abutting against each other, it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the projecting portion and the other of the first means or the second means due to the fastening and fixing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fluid such as a vibration wave from passing through the gap of the bending path.

The gaming machine M1 or M2 is provided with an opening for connecting the internal space and the outside, and the opening is passed to the internal space and the outside through the opening and is connected to the acoustic means. A gaming machine M3 characterized by being blocked by.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1 or M2, the opening is closed by the passing member connected to the acoustic means, so that it is not necessary to prepare an additional closing member. The walls constituting the internal space can be appropriately closed while the passing member is passed from the internal space to the outside.

In the gaming machine M3, the gaming machine M4 is characterized in that the opening is arranged on a side closer to the acoustic means than the protruding portion.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M3, when the wiring of the acoustic means is passed from the internal space to the outside through the opening, the wiring of the acoustic means is prevented from being pinched by the projecting portion and broken. be able to.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, a support fastening means to which at least one of the first means or the second means is fastened and fixed, and a staging means arranged below the support fastening means and producing an effect associated with the game. The gaming machine M5 is characterized in that the effect means supports the support fastening means from below.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, the support fastening means is supported by the staging means from below, so that the support fastening means is weighted without squeezing the space used for the staging. Things can be adopted.

<Movable unit, flower that rotates in the opposite direction. Petals that stop on the way. Pachinko machine N>
A base member, a first displacement means displaceably supported by the base member, a drive means for applying a driving force to the first displacement means, and a follow-up state in which the first displacement means is displaced in the displacement direction. A second switchable state in which the first displacement means is displaced in a direction different from the displacement direction of the first displacement means.
In a gaming machine provided with a displacement means, a third displacement means that is displaced in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means by the driving force of the drive means at least when the second displacement means is in a follow-up state. A gaming machine N1 characterized by being provided with.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the second displacement means is displaced in the expansion / contraction operation direction of the first displacement means as the first displacement means expands / contracts, while the first displacement means operates near the extension end portion. There is a gaming machine in which the second displacement means is displaced in a direction different from the expansion / contraction operation direction of the first displacement means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229580). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the first displacement means expands and contracts, the displacement directions of the first displacement means and the second displacement means are the same, so that the effect is slow and the effect is not sufficient. There was a point.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, at least in the follow-up state of the second displacement means, the third
Since the displacement means is displaced in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means, the displacement speed of the second displacement means can be visually recognized as a speed with respect to the third displacement means. Therefore, the speed of the second displacement means that the player feels can be increased as compared with the speed at which the second displacement means is actually driven.

The gaming machine N1 is provided with a resistance means for generating resistance to the displacement of the second displacement means, and the resistance means is characterized in that the switching point between the following state and the non-following state can be changed. Gaming machine N2 to play.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N1, the following state in which the second displacement means follows the first displacement means and the non-following state in which the second displacement means deviates from the following state due to the action of the resistance means. Since the switching point can be changed, it is possible to increase the types of displacement modes of the second displacement means with respect to the first displacement means. As a result, the effect of the effect can be improved.

In the gaming machine N2, the resistance means is characterized in that the state of the second displacement means can be changed by utilizing the driving force when the second displacement means is operated in the non-following state. Gaming machine N3.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N2, a driving force for switching the state of the second displacement means can be generated by the driving means for driving the first displacement means, so that the driving means is also used. be able to.

In the gaming machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is arranged so as to be visible from the front surface of the gaming machine N4.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is configured to be visible so that the resistance means can be visually recognized by the player and the function of changing the state of the first displacement means. It can also be used as a function as a staging device.

The gaming machine N4 includes a rod-shaped shaft means fixed to the base member, and the shaft means pivotally supports the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means coaxially and rotatably. The gaming machine N5.

According to the game machine N5, in addition to the effect of the game machine N4, the shaft means that functions as the rotation axis of the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means is fixed to the base member, so that the first displacement means, As the posture of either the second displacement means or the resistance means changes, the postures of the other members or means also change accordingly, so that the displacement resistance should be prevented from increasing excessively. Can be done.

<Use of shell buttons and holes. As a point, it has not been reached>
In a gaming machine including a first means and a storage means configured to accommodate the first means, the storage means is an opening for receiving the first means when the first means is housed. The gaming machine O1 is characterized by comprising one opening and a second opening having a width equal to or larger than the width of the gap between the first opening and the first means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with an operating means that can be operated by a player and an upper plate that covers the operating means from below, and the operating means moves up and down with respect to the upper plate (for example, special feature). Kai 2012-048970 (see Japanese Patent Publication No. 2012-048970). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that when a foreign substance is inserted in the gap between the upper plate and the operating means, the foreign substance may remain inside and induce a malfunction. ..

On the other hand, since the gaming machine O1 includes a second opening formed with a width equal to or larger than the width of the gap between the first opening of the accommodating means and the first means, foreign matter is accommodated through the second opening. It can be easily removed to the outside of the means. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which foreign matter remains inside.

The gaming machine O1 is characterized in that the accommodating means includes a support portion for supporting the first means, and the second opening is arranged on the opposite side of the support portion with the first means interposed therebetween. Pachinko machine O2.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O1, the second opening can be formed while maintaining the supporting strength of the supporting portion.

In the gaming machine O1 or O2, the accommodating means includes a low water resistant portion having a low water resistance, and the second opening is arranged around the low water resistant portion.

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O1 or O2, the water can be discharged to the outside along the second opening before the water reaches the low water resistant portion. That is, it can be used for both the purpose of passing a predetermined solid object through the second opening and the purpose of discharging a liquid such as water.

In any of the gaming machines O1 to O3, a plurality of the second openings are formed, and the plurality of second openings are composed of a shape based on a shape projected in different directions of the solid object. A game machine O4 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines O1 to O3, a plurality of second machines are used.
Since the opening is formed of a shape based on the shape of the solid object in a different direction, it is possible to easily remove the solid object through the second opening.

In any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the gaming machine O5 is characterized in that the second opening is arranged closer to the player than the first means.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the shadow of the solid object is visually recognized by the player in a state where the solid object is partially blocked by the second opening. Can be made to. As a result, the player can be made aware that the solid object is inserted between the first means and the accommodating means, so that the possibility that the solid object will continue to remain can be reduced. ..

<Points related to devising the shape of the bottom of the glass frame (front frame)>
A gaming machine including a first means and a first supporting means for supporting the first means, wherein the first supporting means includes a protruding shape portion projecting from a lower surface. P1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a glass frame (front frame) on which an operation handle is arranged is removable from an outer frame on which a gaming board is arranged (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. (See 2015-159837). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the bottom surface of the glass frame is formed from a flat shape, there is a risk of slipping when holding the bottom surface with a finger, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of ease of handling. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine P1, the protruding shape portion projecting from the bottom surface of the first supporting means functions as a portion on which a finger is hung, thereby suppressing the occurrence of a situation in which the first supporting means slips off the hand. Therefore, it can be improved from the viewpoint of ease of handling.

The arrangement of the projecting shape portion is not limited at all, and may be any as long as it is projecting to the outside of the first support means. For example, it may be projected in the vertical direction or may be projected to the front side.

The gaming machine P1 includes the second support means that detachably supports the first support means, and the projecting shape portion is separated from the support position where the first support means is supported by the second support means. The gaming machine P2, which is characterized in that it is arranged.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P1, the protruding shape portion is projected downward from the lower bottom surface at a position away from the position where the weight of the first supporting means is centrally applied as the supporting position. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to hold the first support means. This makes it possible to easily attach / detach the first support means to / from the second support means.

The position away from the support position is not limited at all. For example, the first
The position may be closer to the front side when the support means is supported on the front side of the second support means, or closer to the other end when the first support means is pivotally supported by the second support means at one end. It may be a position, or it may be a position opposite to the shaft support position with respect to the plate for storing the game ball.

In the gaming machine P1 or P2, the first supporting means includes a recessed shape portion recessed from the inside to the outside, and the first means has a gap between the recessed shape portion and the recessed shape portion. A gaming machine P3 characterized in that it is arranged to face the concave shape portion.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P1 or P2, a part of the supporting position between the first means and the first supporting means is made a gap by the recessed shape portion, so that the first means can be used. Powder (shavings, dust) that may be generated when the first means and the first support means rub against each other due to misalignment.
However, the amount of generation can be reduced. That is, it is possible to prevent the powder from accumulating and clogging the movable portion to cause a malfunction, or the powder from accumulating at the detection point of the detection device and erroneously detecting the powder.

In this way, the recessed shape portion is not only when it is not operating (for example, when the glass frame is opened to clear an error, when maintenance, or when the glass frame is replaced), but also when it is operating (for example, when playing a game). It is also effective in the middle or in the game waiting state (demo screen display state).

The gaming machine P4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine P3, the recessed shape portion is arranged inside a range in which the protrusion shape portion is provided.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P3, the portion where the concave shape portion is formed becomes extremely thin as compared with other portions, and it is possible to prevent the strength from becoming insufficient. can. Further, since the concave shape portion is formed behind the protrusion shape portion, the protrusion shape portion can be bent and deformed in the inward and outward directions, so that even if a large load is applied to the protrusion shape portion, the protrusion is formed. It is possible to suppress cracking of the shape portion.

The load applied to the projecting shape portion includes, for example, the weight of the first supporting means that may be applied during transportation or temporary placement, the load applied when moving the first supporting means, and the first.
An example is a load applied by a collision of something moved by a player or a clerk (such as a Senryobako) near a support means.

In the gaming machine P4, the first means is a portion of the first support means on the outside of the recessed shape portion, and is supported in such a manner that it abuts on an overlapping portion that overlaps the protrusion shape portion in the inward and outward directions. A gaming machine P5 comprising a contacting means and an operating unit positioned by the contacting means and configured to be operable by a player.

According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P4, the effect of the recessed shape portion can be maintained, and the supporting thickness of the overlapping position for supporting the abutting means can be sufficiently secured. It is possible to prevent the first support means from being deformed during operation.

In the gaming machine P5, the contact means is provided with impact damping means which is continuously formed between the contact means and the operation portion so as to be able to attenuate the impact, and the impact damping means is the recessed shape portion. A gaming machine P6 characterized in that it is formed with a width shorter than the width.

According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P5, the impact transmitted from the operating portion to the abutting means can be attenuated by the impact damping means, and a distance is provided between the impact damping means and the overlapping portion. Therefore, the impact can be attenuated by the deformation (deflection) of the abutting means.

Various aspects are exemplified as the impact damping means. For example, it may be a mass member formed of a flexible material, an elastic member such as a coil spring, a device such as a damper, or a damping device.

In any of the gaming machines P3 to P6, the recessed shape portion includes a first portion facing the first means and a second portion extending from the first portion of the first portion. The gaming machine P7 is characterized in that the degree of recession is larger than that of the second portion.

According to the gaming machine P7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines P3 to P6, a sufficient space is prepared in the first part where a large load is expected to be applied, and compared with the first part. By forming the space of the second portion, which is expected to have a small load, to be small, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the recessed shape portion while maintaining high durability.

The degree of denting is exemplified by, for example, the depth of denting (the larger the degree of denting, the deeper) and the width of denting (the larger the degree of denting, the wider).

If the structure of the first means is complicated and the load applied to the portion facing the first means is smaller than that of the other portions, the concave shape corresponding to the other portions. The degree of recession of the portion may be formed to be large.

Further, the recessed shape portion may be designed based on the magnitude of the load generation frequency, for example, without being limited to the magnitude of the load. In this case, the frequency of occurrence of the load may be based on the magnitude of the frequency of occurrence during the entire business hours of the gaming store, or the frequency of occurrence in a predetermined state of the gaming machine (a predetermined production state or a gaming state such as a specific gaming state). It may be based on the size of.

In any of the gaming machines P1 to P7, the projecting shape portion is formed along the front-rear direction below the bottom surface portion of the first support means, and the formation range becomes wider toward the front. The gaming machine P8.

According to the gaming machine P8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines P1 to P7, it is possible to improve the load capacity of the front portion where the load is concentrated when the first supporting means is made to stand alone. (1) Even in a storage method in which the support means is placed on the floor alone, the first support means can be stored for a long period of time without the first support means falling down.

It should be noted that what is considered when designing the projecting shape portion is not limited to the weight of the first support means. For example, the shape of the projecting shape portion may be designed by considering the magnitude of the load generated during the operation of the first means and the frequency of load generation.

In any of the gaming machines P1 to P8, the gaming machine P9 is characterized in that the lower surface of the first supporting means is formed as an inclined surface that ascends and inclines in a direction away from the second supporting means.

According to the gaming machine P9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines P1 to P8, the first supporting means can be easily self-supported by itself, and the contact portion with the floor is limited to the projecting shape portion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the portion other than the projecting shape portion from becoming dirty.

<Points regarding deformation mode based on the support structure and shape of the scarf>
In a gaming machine including an operating means that can be operated by a player, a first supporting means that supports the operating means, and a second supporting means that supports the first supporting means or at least one of the operating means. The gaming machine Q1 is characterized in that the first supporting means is configured to be deformable in a direction that narrows the gap between the operating means and the second supporting means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which an operating means such as an effect button is supported by a glass frame (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-106830). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the countermeasure against the misalignment that occurs in the area around the operating means due to the load at the time of operating the operating means is insufficient, and it is called the countermeasure against the misalignment that occurs in the area around the operating means. There was a problem that there was room for improvement from the viewpoint.

For example, when the weight of the player is applied to the operating means and the operating means is lowered, the second supporting means is also lowered at the same time. At this time, the descending distance of the front side portion of the second supporting means tends to be longer than the descending distance of the operating means. At this time, due to the difference in descent distance, in the front side part,
There may be a gap between the operating means and the second supporting means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine Q1, even if the second supporting means is lowered excessively, the deformation of the first supporting means suppresses the formation of a gap between the operating means and the second supporting means. can do. That is, since the operating means can tolerate an extra descent (sinking),
It is possible to simplify the support mode of the operating means.

The operation direction is not limited at all. For example, it may be a descending direction, an ascending direction, a pushing direction along the front-rear direction, a rotation (rotation) direction, or a combination thereof.

Further, as the mode of contact from the operation direction, various modes are exemplified in addition to the case where the normal extending from the contact surface coincides with the operation direction. For example, the contact surface may be formed as a surface that spreads in a mortar shape (V-shaped cross section) with respect to the operation direction. In this case, the operation direction can be moved toward the center side of the bottom of the mortar (V-shaped) formed by the contact surface, and in addition, the reaction force increases toward the center side of the bottom, so that the support of the operation means is effective. Can be done.

Further, a common support means that commonly supports the first support means and the second support means may be provided. In this case, the first support means and the second support means may be connected (coupled, fitted) at a position opposite to the support position supported by the common support means.

In the gaming machine Q1, the first supporting means is made of a flexible material, and is configured to be able to hold a support portion that supports the operating means and a gaming ball, and the operating means via the first supporting means. A gaming machine Q2 characterized by having a gaming ball holding portion connected to the gaming machine Q2.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q1, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the operating means and the gaming ball holding portion.

Further, when the first supporting means is composed of a flexible member or is connected to the operating means or the game ball holding portion by a floating structure, the vibration when the operating means is operated is held as it is. Since it is possible to prevent the game ball from being transmitted to the unit, it is possible to prevent the game ball held by the game ball holding unit from being displaced and generating an abnormal noise each time the operating means is operated.

Various aspects are exemplified as the structure for preventing (suppressing) vibration transmission. For example, the first
The vibration transmission may be prevented in the direction of 1, while the vibration transmission may be maintained in the second direction. In this case, by generating the vibration in the second direction, it is possible to intentionally generate an abnormal sound, and it is possible to execute the effect by the sound.

In the gaming machine Q2, the operating means includes an operating unit configured to be operable by the player.
The first supporting means is such that the connection position with the game ball holding portion is farther from the operating portion.
A gaming machine Q3 characterized by being arranged on the front side.

In the game machine Q3, in addition to the effect of the game machine Q2, in the vicinity of the operation unit, which is a position where the position is likely to shift due to the operation, the connection position is moved to the back side to reduce the absolute amount of the position shift. While suppressing the generation of gaps between the ball holding portion and the first supporting means, by arranging the connecting position on the front side (closer to the player) in the distant position of the operating portion, which is a position where the position is unlikely to shift due to the operation. , It is possible to improve the design.

In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the operating means includes an operating unit configured to be operable by a player, a main body portion supported by the first supporting means, and the operating unit and the main body portion. The operation unit is formed wider than the connection portion, and the first support means is formed from a plurality of divided bodies and can be attached and detached in a direction sandwiching the connection portion. Even the gaming machine Q4, which is configured to surround the connecting portion.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, it is possible to facilitate the assembly of the first support means while ensuring a sufficient size of the operation unit.

Various aspects of the method for fixing the first support means formed from the divided body are exemplified.
For example, a plurality of divided bodies may be connected to the operating means, respectively, or include one divided body connected to the operating means among the plurality of divided bodies and another divided body connected to the divided body. You may let me.

In addition, various embodiments are exemplified as the fixing position and the fixing mode of the divided body. For example, it may be fitted or fastened.

In the case of fastening, by fixing the divided body at a plurality of positions along the operation direction of the operation unit, the impact generated when the operation unit is operated can be dispersed and handled at the plurality of fixed positions. Since the durability of fixing the divided body can be improved, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of misalignment of the first support means.

Furthermore, by setting the fastening direction to a direction that intersects (for example, orthogonally) with the operation direction of the operation unit, the direction of the load due to the operation of the operation unit and the direction of tightening the fastening screw can be made different. It is possible to prevent the fastening screw from loosening due to the impact during operation.

In the gaming machine Q4, the gaming machine Q5 is characterized in that the fastening directions of the fastening means for fastening the divided bodies intersect with the operating direction of the operating unit.

According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q4, it is possible to suppress the load applied to the fastening direction during the operation of the operation unit, so that the fastening by the fastening means is loosened during the operation.
It is possible to prevent the split body from being unfixed.

In addition, various aspects are exemplified as the direction which intersects with the operation direction. For example, when the operation direction is a rotation direction along a circle centered on a predetermined rotation axis, the direction intersecting the operation direction is a direction intersecting a plane orthogonal to the predetermined rotation axis (for example, a predetermined direction). Direction along the axis of rotation) is exemplified.

Further, for example, when the operation direction is along a predetermined straight line (pushing operation or pulling operation), the direction intersecting the operating direction is along a plane intersecting the predetermined straight line. The direction is illustrated.

In this case, if a plurality of predetermined straight lines (straight lines along the operation direction having a high ratio (frequency) in the operation) are assumed during the game, at least among the plurality of planes intersecting each straight line, at least. The fastening direction may be set in a direction along one plane, or the fastening direction may be set in a direction intersecting any of a plurality of plane intersections, that is, a plurality of predetermined straight lines.

In the gaming machine Q4 or Q5, the fastening points of the split body are configured at a plurality of points, and the first plane including one fastening point and the second plane including the other fastening points are configured as different planes. A game machine Q6 featuring.

According to the gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q4 or Q5, even when a large load is applied to one fastening point (including the first plane), a large load is applied to the other fastening points at the same time. Since it is possible to prevent the slingshot from being applied, it is possible to prevent the split bodies from being displaced at the same time at both fastening points or the fastening being loosened.

The fastening portion of the split body may be arranged at a location where the load is concentrated when the operation unit is operated. Even in this case, since another fastening point is arranged on a plane different from the plane on which the load is concentrated, the split body may be displaced or the fastening may be loosened due to the load during operation. Can be prevented.

In any of the gaming machines Q4 to Q6, the operating means include a detecting means configured to be able to detect a predetermined operation of the operating unit, and the detecting means is arranged at a position away from the split position of the split body. A gaming machine Q7 characterized by being installed.

According to the gaming machine Q7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines Q4 to Q6, the holding force tends to be insufficient at the divided position, and the operating unit moves when the operating unit is operated at the divided position. And the divided body rub against each other, and powder (dust, etc.) may be generated. Since the detection means is arranged away from the divided position, it is possible to prevent the detection means from detecting the powder (dust, etc.). can do. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of erroneous detection.

In any of the gaming machines Q4 to Q7, the operating means interferes with the split body in the split direction view on the side that separates in the split direction (proximity separation direction) of the split body when the game is possible. A gaming machine Q8 characterized by being equipped with.

According to the gaming machine Q8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines Q4 to Q7, the interference means can suppress the displacement of the operating means with respect to the divided body in the dividing direction.

The interfering means may be formed so as not to interfere with the operating means in the assembled state, but before the assembled state, for example, during the assembling work. For example, when the split body is formed of a flexible material, the split body can be bent during the assembling operation, so that interference with the interference means can be easily avoided and the ease of assembly is maintained. can do.

Further, for example, even when the divided body is formed of a hard material, it may be configured so as not to interfere with the interfering means in the process of assembling. That is, it may be formed from a shape that does not interfere in the assembly direction view (for example, the direction view in the direction in which the divided bodies are brought closer to each other for assembly) before fastening. In this case, it is possible to suppress the misalignment of the divided body when the game is possible while ensuring the ease of assembly.

In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q8, the second supporting means includes a receiving recessed portion that is recessed so as to accept the first supporting means.

According to the gaming machine Q9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q8, the first supporting means is received in the receiving recess, so that the first supporting means is affected by the misalignment of the operating means. Even if the position is displaced, the operating means and the first support means can be returned to their original positions at an early stage by the repulsive force from the receiving recessed portion.

In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q9, the first supporting means is formed in a curved shape along a circle in which the center of the radius of curvature is arranged on the operating portion side of the operating means. Q10.

According to the gaming machine Q10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q9, a large area where the operation unit can be arranged can be secured, and in addition, when the player grips the operation unit, it is cramped. It is possible to prevent feeling. As a result, it is possible to improve the design of the operation unit and improve the operability of the operation unit.

In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q10, the first support means includes a streak portion that is processed into a streak shape for reinforcement, and the extension direction of the streak portion is formed in a different direction for each region. A gaming machine Q11 characterized by being played.

According to the gaming machine Q11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q10, the extending direction of the streaks is different for each region, so that the first supporting means having anisotropy in rigidity is used. Can be configured.

The design criteria for the extension direction of the streaks are not limited at all. For example, the shape of the first support means may be designed as an extension direction with a good yield, or when the load generated during the operation of the operating means acts in a different manner for each region, it is the best response to the load. The extension direction of the streak may be designed as the direction.

<Points regarding the support structure between the speaker and the board>
A vibration means, a light emitting means arranged at a position where the vibration is transmitted and configured to be capable of emitting light, and a light emitting means.
The gaming machine R1 is characterized in that the light emitting means has a displaceable width with respect to the vibrating means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a speaker and a light emitting element are arranged side by side (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-16588). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of light emission effect.

More specifically, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, a light emitting element (LED, fluorescent lamp, discharge tube, etc.) is arranged behind the speaker in order to prevent the substrate from receiving the vibration of the speaker, and the speaker is arranged. It will be dark because it is not possible to produce light emission at the places where it is used. in this case,
In the front area where the gaming machine is easily visible, the area that can be produced brilliantly becomes narrow. In the first place, the size of gaming machines such as pachinko machines is roughly determined by the standard, so
It is recognized that securing a light emitting effect area is an important issue.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine R1, since the light emitting means has a displaceable width with respect to the vibrating means, the light emitting means can pass the vibration of the vibrating device, and the light emitting means is arranged at the vibration generation location of the vibrating means. Can be approached to. As a result, the front region can be visually recognized brightly regardless of the vibration generation location of the vibrating means, which can be improved from the viewpoint of light emission effect.

The mode of the vibrating means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be an acoustic means configured to be able to output sound, or an operating means having a built-in vibration device. Further, the means is not limited to the means capable of actively vibrating, and any means configured to be vibrable (passively vibrable) with respect to a load of an external force may be used.

Various aspects are exemplified as the acoustic means. For example, the vibrating membrane of the speaker,
For example, an discharge port where the back pressure of the vibration of the speaker, which is seen in a bass reflex type speaker, is discharged, and a path connected from the vibration portion to the discharge port are exemplified.

The vibrating device may be a rotationally driven vibrating device (for example, a vibrator).
A vibration device (for example, a voice coil motor) that generates vibration by linear drive may be used.

The aspect of the proximity arrangement is not limited in any way, and any aspect may be used as long as the player can visually recognize the light of the light emitting means. For example, the light emitting means may be stacked and arranged on the vibrating means.
In that case, the stacking direction may be a front-rear direction, a direction inclined upward or downward with respect to the front-rear direction, or a direction inclined inward from the left-right end.

The gaming machine R1 is characterized in that a plurality of the vibrating means are provided, a light emitting substrate on which the light emitting means is arranged is provided, and the light emitting substrate is laminated and arranged on the plurality of the vibrating means. ..

According to the game machine R2, in addition to the effect of the game machine R1, the light emitting substrate tends to be displaced (vibration, misalignment, etc.) due to the influence of vibration generated when the vibration means outputs sound. Where the effect mode of the light emitting means can be changed, the displacement mode of the light emitting substrate can be changed by different the vibration means for outputting the sound, so that the type of change (variation) of the effect mode of the light emitting means can be changed. ) Can be increased.

The number of light emitting substrates may be one or a plurality. In the case of a plurality of sheets, at least one light emitting substrate may be laminated and arranged on a plurality of vibrating means. In this case, since it is possible to provide a combination of the light emitting substrate that is displaced by the vibration generated from the vibrating means and the light emitting substrate that is not displaced, it is possible to further increase the types of changes in the effect mode of the light emitting means.

The gaming machine R2 includes holding means for holding the vibration means, the light emitting substrate is not fixed to the holding means in the stacking direction, and the holding means emits light along the stacking direction. The gaming machine R3 is configured to generate a load in a direction that suppresses displacement of the board.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R2, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the light emitting substrate and the displacement of the holding means.

The non-fixed mode is not limited to the case where the light emitting substrate and the holding means are not mechanically connected. For example, even if the light emitting substrate and the holding means are connected by screws, it can be said that they are not fixed if the fastening force does not act (for example, simply to prevent them from coming off).

Moreover, the expression "non-fixed" does not assume that a large displacement is allowed. For example, by fixing two plate members that define the front-rear position of the light-emitting substrate to the holding means, the front-rear position of the light-emitting substrate is specified (the front-back position is stable and small vibration is allowed), and the shape of the light-emitting substrate is determined. By surrounding the direction orthogonal to the front-back direction with a frame member having a slightly larger frame shape, it is possible to suppress displacement in a direction different from the front-back direction (up / down / left / right).

As a result, the influence of the vibration generated by the vibrating means on the light emitting substrate can be reduced as compared with the case where the light emitting substrate is fixed to the holding means as in the case of the vibrating means, so that the position stability of the light emitting substrate can be reduced. Can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine R2 or R3, the first member and the second member arranged on both sides of the light emitting substrate in the stacking direction, the fixing means for fixing the first member and the second member to the holding means, and the said. A regulating means for restricting the moving direction of the first member and the second member in the stacking direction is provided, and the fixing means advances toward the holding means along a direction inclined with respect to the stacking direction. The gaming machine R4 featuring.

According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R2 or R3, the direction in which the first member and the second member are laminated does not match the traveling direction of the fixing means, and the first member and the second member Since the movement of the fixing means in the traveling direction is restricted, even if the fixing by the fixing means is loosened (even if some fixing means are loosened), the displacement is compared with the displacement of the fixing means. Therefore, the displacement of the first member and the second member can be reduced.

This makes it easy to maintain the positional relationship between the first member and the second member. In other words, it is possible to prevent the first member and the second member from being separated or approached more than expected.

In addition, various aspects are exemplified as the aspect which progresses. For example, a rod-shaped member may be inserted into the through hole, or a fastening screw may be fastened to the screw hole.

In any of the gaming machines R2 to R4, the light emitting substrate includes a first displacement region configured to be displaceable and a second displacement region in which displacement is suppressed as compared with the first displacement region. The gaming machine R5 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine R5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines R2 to R4, the change in the light emitting mode when the light emitting substrate is displaced due to the influence of the vibration of the vibrating means is changed for each region of the light emitting substrate. Can be made to.

Thereby, by designing the mode of the light emitting effect in the first displacement region and the mode of the light emitting effect in the second displacement region in different modes, an excellent effect can be obtained. For example, as the first refraction means for receiving and refracting the light emitted from the first displacement region, a surface light emitting means for producing a uniform light emission effect by surface emission is arranged, while receiving and refracting the light emitted from the second displacement region. As the second refraction means, an edge light emitting means for showing the player high-intensity light by totally reflecting the light incident from one end (edge) and emitting it from the other end (edge) is arranged. This makes it possible to perform a novel light emission effect in which the light emission mode (for example, brightness) is different for each region.

The mode of suppressing the displacement is not limited in any way. For example, the mode may be a mode of suppression defined by the positional relationship between the light emitting substrate and the plurality of vibration means, or a mode defined by the mode of holding the light emitting substrate.

For example, as for the positional relationship between the plurality of vibrating means and the light emitting substrate, the region that is equidistant from each vibrating means is such that the influence from one vibrating means is canceled by the influence from the other vibrating means. , Displacement may be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines R1 to R5, a fastening screw for fastening and fixing and a facing portion arranged to face the head of the fastening screw are provided, and when the fastening screw becomes loose, the head of the fastening screw is provided. The gaming machine R6 is characterized in that the portions and the facing portions are arranged so as to be in contact with each other.

According to the gaming machine R6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines R1 to R5, the advancement of the fastening screw is restricted by the facing portion, so that the fastening relationship is further deteriorated when the fastening screw becomes loose. Can be prevented from doing so.

In addition, various aspects are exemplified as the correspondence after the tightening screw becomes loose. For example, when the fastening screw is loosened, the loosening may be detected electrically, or the fastening screw may be loosened by forming the facing portion on the surface of the vibrating device. If it is vibrated when it is vibrated, an abnormal noise may be generated and the looseness may be noticed, or the loosened part may be repaired by regular maintenance without providing a special notification.

In any of the gaming machines R1 to R6, the first member and the second member arranged on both sides of the light emitting substrate and the connecting means to be fastened and fixed to the first member and the second member are provided.
The connecting means is configured in such a manner that the deformation in the direction intersecting the connecting direction is more easily caused than the deformation in the connecting direction connecting the first member and the second member. The featured gaming machine R7.

Here, when the connecting means is configured in such a manner that the deformation in the connecting direction easily occurs, the interval between the connecting positions is changed in both directions such as extension and contraction, and the favorable influence and the disadvantageous influence are periodic. It becomes unfavorable.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine R7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines R1 to R6, the connecting means is deformed in the direction intersecting the connecting direction, so that only the side where the interval between the connecting positions is shortened is changed. It is possible to preferentially generate a load in a direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other.

As a result, it is possible to increase the load in the direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other only in the situation where the connecting means is deformed (for example, the situation where a load is generated in the connecting means). While setting the load in the opposite direction of the member and the second member to be low, the load in the direction of pressing the first member and the second member against each other can be increased only when the light emitting substrate is easily shaken by the vibration by the vibration means, and the light is emitted. It is possible to suppress the shaking of the board.

It should be noted that the mode in which deformation easily occurs in a predetermined direction is not limited at all. For example, the shape of the connecting means may be formed so that the thickness differs from direction to direction, or the magnitude of the load generated on the connecting means may change from direction to direction.

Further, the mode of switching the loads in the pressing direction is not limited at all. For example, a drive device that displaces either the first member or the second member may be provided. According to this, the load in the direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other can be changed at an arbitrary timing by controlling the drive device.

In any of the gaming machines R1 to R7, the vibration means is configured so that the direction of vibration can be changed between a first direction along the displaceable width and a second direction intersecting the first direction. The featured gaming machine R8.

According to the gaming machine R8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines R1 to R7, a plurality of types of actions of the vibration means on the light emitting means can be configured.

<Technical concept of light emitting means on the side. Edge light travels to the sides and back of the member>
A first aspect comprising a light emitting means configured to emit light and a light guiding means capable of guiding light, the light guiding means guides the light emitted from the light emitting means in the first aspect. The gaming machine S1 includes a light guide means and a second light guide means that guides the light emitted from the light emitting means in a mode different from that of the first mode.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured to incident LED light from an end portion of the plate-shaped member and emit it from the surface of the plate-shaped member (for example, JP-A-2015-).
See 159875A). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the effect of the light emitting effect.

More specifically, when the LED substrate formed from a flat plate is used for light emission effect as in the conventional gaming machine described above, the price of the substrate can be reduced, which is useful for cost reduction, but as it is, it is a three-dimensional light emission effect. It was difficult to achieve both.

That is, the effect tends to be reduced due to the difference in the light emitting mode (brightness, intensity, brightness, etc.) between the near position and the far position with respect to the LED, and the light emitting mode is weak in order to eliminate this. It is possible to increase the number of LEDs in the part that tends to be (dark), but in that case, the number of LED elements required for the effect increases with respect to the area of the LED substrate, which results in hindering cost reduction. It will be. Therefore, it was unavoidable to select whether to improve the staging effect or reduce the cost.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine S1, since the light guiding means is configured to be able to guide the light from the light emitting means in different modes, the effect of the effect is reduced even if the distance with respect to the light emitting means is different. It can suppress (changing). Therefore, it is possible to improve from the viewpoint of the effect of the light emission effect while reducing the cost.

As the mode of the light guide means, various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be a light-transmitting member made of a colorless or colored transparent member, a member that emits light in a nearly uniform surface such as rubbed glass, or formed by curing a resin or the like of a milky white material. It may be a white member that is made to be colorless, a member that allows light to pass through a gap similar to a screen door or a shoji screen, a member that is similar to a transmissive liquid crystal and whose display is projected (projected) on the member itself, and others. It may be a member of the above aspect.

The gaming machine S1 is characterized in that the light guide means is configured so that the light emitting means changes stepwise in response to a difference in distance from the light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine S1, the light guiding means is configured in a plate shape forming a curved surface even when the substrate on which the light guiding means is arranged is formed of a flat plate. If so,
It is possible to perform an effect of making the curved surface emit light uniformly (uniformly).

In the gaming machine S1 or S2, the accommodating means for accommodating the light emitting means and the light emitting substrate on which the light emitting means is arranged are provided, and the accommodating means supports the light emitting substrate and the light guide means. The support means is fixed at least in the first position, and the shielding means configured to shield between the light guide means and the player, and the first position is outside the outer shape of the shielding means. A gaming machine S3 characterized in that it is arranged in a direction.

In the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine S1 or S2, the fixing at the first position can be loosened while the shielding means is still attached, so that the position of the light guiding means with respect to the supporting means can be easily positioned. Can be adjusted. Therefore, it becomes easy to repair the positional deviation between the light emitting means and the light guiding means, and the maintainability can be improved.

The mode of shielding of the shielding means is not limited at all. For example, the light guide means may be shielded so that the player cannot touch the light guide means, while the light guide means may be visible, or the player may not be able to touch or see the light guide means. You may.

When the first position is formed at a plurality of places, all the first positions may be arranged outside the outer shape of the shielding means, or at least one of the plurality of first positions may be arranged. It may be arranged outside the outer shape of the shielding means.

In the gaming machine S3, the light emitting substrate is not fixed to the support means and the light guide means, the light guide means has a long plate shape, and the first position is the light guide means. A gaming machine S4 characterized in that it is arranged at an end in a long direction.

According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine S3, the light guide means has a long plate shape.
Since the first position is arranged at the end in the long direction, the position shift of the light guide means can be easily corrected by loosening the fixing of the first position and applying a load in the lateral direction of the light guide means. ..

More specifically, the correction of the misalignment of the light guide means can be supplemented by the deformation of the light guide means in the lateral direction.
The position of the light guide means even when the fixation is loosened only at one end in the longitudinal direction and the fixation is maintained at the other end by compensating for slippage due to applying a strong load. The deviation can be easily repaired.

Further, in the case of the support mode in which the light emitting substrate is pressed against the support means by the light guide means, the degree of supporting the light emitting substrate by the support means can be weakened due to the bending deformation of the light guide means.
Therefore, even if the light guide means is not removed from the support means, the degree of support of the light emitting substrate can be weakened by loosening the fixing at the first position and bending and deforming the light guide means, and the load is applied to the light emitting substrate in that state. By giving, it is possible to correct the misalignment of the light emitting substrate.

The adjustment range of the position adjustment is not limited at all. For example, the basis of the design is that the portion to be irradiated by the light guide means is mechanically regulated so as not to be completely displaced in the irradiation direction from the outer shape of the light emitting means arranged on the light emitting substrate. The adjustment width may be sufficient to correct the misalignment in the light (adjustment width is small), or the part to be irradiated by the light guide means from the outer shape of the light emitting means is the irradiation direction based on the design that secures a large adjustment width in advance. The position of the light guide means may be adjustable to a position that is completely out of sight (large adjustment range).

In this case, the light emitting means and the light guiding means have the same structure, and the mode of the light emitting effect visually recognized at the same time of the effect can be changed. In this case, for example, when a gaming machine having the same configuration is prepared so that it can be played with different playability (for example, when a gaming machine having different specifications is configured),
Since the mode of the light emitting effect can be changed by adjusting the position of the light guide means without significantly changing the mechanical configuration of each part, the burden (for example, cost) related to the manufacture of the gaming machine can be reduced.

The non-fixed mode is not limited in any way. For example, a mode other than the case of being fixed by a fixing tool such as a fastening screw may be generally expressed as non-fixing. Further, the end portion is an expression of intention to avoid being limited to the end portion. That is, the first position may be arranged at a position including the periphery of the long direction end.

In the gaming machine S3 or S4, the shielding means is fixed to the supporting means, and the light guide means and the shielding means are configured to reduce the relative positional deviation as the distance between them is shortened. A gaming machine S5 comprising a portion, wherein the misalignment prevention portion includes a fixing portion with the support means.

Here, where it is necessary to connect wiring that conducts electricity to the light emitting board, misalignment or chipping of the wiring directly affects the malfunction of the light emitting means, so for the purpose of preventing it, it is also for light emitting. It is preferable to configure the board so that the positional deviation between the substrate and the supporting means does not easily occur.

Considering the effect of staging, it is preferable that the light guide means is easy to align when the misalignment occurs on the premise that the misalignment with the light emitting substrate does not easily occur. It is also considered that it is better to hold it on the support means side. On the other hand, if the position shift occurs between the light guide means and the shielding means, the light guiding means and the shielding means may collide with each other and the appearance may be deteriorated, and it is considered good to hold the light guiding means on the shielding means side.

Since the shielding means is a place that the player can touch, it is preferable to fix it to the supporting means as a base in consideration of the strength. As described above, the support mode expected for each means was various.

According to the gaming machine S5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine S3 or S4, the action of the misalignment prevention unit facilitates mutual alignment at the time of assembly without directly fixing the light guide means and the shielding means. Not only can this be done, but it is also possible to facilitate the maintenance of the positional relationship between the light guide means and the shielding means during the game.

The mode of the misalignment prevention unit is not limited at all. For example, the unevenness that can be fitted with the same shape may be used, or the unevenness that can be fitted may be such that the shape along the assembling direction is invariant, and the side closer to the mating member is tapered. It may be composed of a shape and an expanding concave shape.

In any of the gaming machines S1 to S5, the light guide means corresponds to the main body portion, the separation extension portion extending from the main body portion to the side separated from the light emitting means, and the outer shape of the extension portion. The light emitting means is provided with a facing extension portion extending toward the light emitting means in a cross-sectional shape, and the light emitting means is arranged in such a manner that the light incident on the facing extending portion is totally reflected. A gaming machine S6 characterized by having a section.

According to the gaming machine S6, since it is possible to suppress the light emitted from the total reflection light emitting portion from entering the portion other than the facing extension portion, the separation extension portion, the facing extension portion, and the other portions. The boundary between the light and the light can be clarified, and the effect of changing the mode of light (separating the light) can be performed at the boundary of a short width.

The mode of total internal reflection is not limited to any one. For example, the positional relationship between the light guiding means and the light emitting means, the direction of the irradiated light, the width of the irradiated light, the material and shape of the light guiding means,
And can be specified by a combination thereof and the like.

In the gaming machine S6, the light guide means forms an lining portion to be overlaid on the light emitting substrate and an outer shape of the lining portion, and is formed from a frame shape having the same shape as the outer shape of the light emitting substrate. A gaming machine S7 comprising a frame portion to be formed, and the facing extending portion extending from the covering portion and being coupled to the frame portion.

According to the gaming machine S7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine S6, light can be incident on the frame portion from the joint portion, so that the effect of the light emitting effect of the frame portion can be improved, and the facing extension portion is provided. By functioning as a reinforcing rib, the strength of the light guide means can be improved.

According to this, if the frame portion extends to the back of the light emitting means along the direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means, it is possible to perform an effect of shining the opposite side of the light emitting direction.

In the gaming machine S7, the facing extension portion is formed in an elongated shape along the covering portion, is connected to the frame portion at one end in the longitudinal direction, and is connected to the frame portion at the other end portion from the frame portion. A gaming machine S8 characterized by being separated.

According to the gaming machine S8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S7, based on the design of the facing extension portion,
Since it is possible to configure an end portion in which light can be incident on the frame portion in the longitudinal direction and an end portion in which light incident is restricted, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing a light emitting effect using the frame portion.

In any of the gaming machines S6 to S8, the light emitting means is arranged at the projection positions of the facing extension portion and the separation extension portion, and the inclination angle of the tip shape of the separation extension portion with respect to the irradiation direction is set. The gaming machine S9 is characterized in that the smaller the size, the closer to the end of the cross-sectional shape of the facing extension portion and the separation extending portion.

According to the gaming machine S9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines S6 to S8, even if the tip shape of the detached extension portion is inclined with respect to the plane of the light emitting substrate, the light emitting intensity of the light emitting means It is possible to produce light emission without giving a sense of discomfort to the player while keeping the same. That is, the entire cross-sectional shape of the detached extension portion can be made to emit light to the same extent.

<Technical concept of top light emitting means. Point to change the way of shining depending on the distance from the light emitting means>
A light emitting means configured to emit light and a light receiving means capable of receiving light are provided, and the light receiving means includes a first light receiving means for receiving light emitted from the light emitting means in the first aspect. The gaming machine T1 is provided with a second light receiving means that receives light emitted from the light emitting means in a mode different from that of the first aspect.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, LED light is incident from the edge of the planar member.
There is a gaming machine configured to emit light from the surface of the planar member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015).
-Refer to 159875 (see). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the effect of the light emitting effect.

More specifically, when the LED substrate formed from a flat plate is used for light emission effect as in the conventional gaming machine described above, the price of the substrate can be reduced, which is useful for cost reduction, but as it is, it is a three-dimensional light emission effect. It was difficult to achieve both.

That is, the effect tends to be reduced due to the difference in the light emitting mode (brightness, intensity, brightness, etc.) between the near position and the far position with respect to the LED, and the light emitting mode is weak in order to eliminate this. It is possible to increase the number of LEDs in the part that tends to be (dark), but in that case, the number of LED elements required for the effect increases with respect to the area of the LED substrate, which results in hindering cost reduction. It will be. Therefore, it was unavoidable to select whether to improve the staging effect or reduce the cost.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine T1, since the light receiving means is configured to be able to receive the light from the light emitting means in different modes, the effect of the effect is reduced even if the distance with respect to the light emitting means is different (change). ) Can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to improve from the viewpoint of the effect of the light emission effect while reducing the cost.

As the mode of the light receiving means, various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be a light-transmitting member made of a colorless or colored transparent member, a member that emits light in a nearly uniform surface such as rubbed glass, or formed by curing a resin or the like of a milky white material. It may be a white member that is made to be colorless, a member that allows light to pass through a gap similar to a screen door or a shoji screen, a member that is similar to a transmissive liquid crystal and whose display is projected (projected) on the member itself, and others. It may be a member of the above aspect.

2.

According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T1, even when the substrate on which the light receiving means is arranged is formed of a flat plate, the light receiving means is formed in a plate shape forming a curved surface. To,
It is possible to perform an effect of making the curved surface emit light uniformly (uniformly).

The gaming machine T1 or T2 includes an accommodating means for accommodating the light emitting means and a light emitting substrate on which the light emitting means is arranged, and the accommodating means is arranged to face one surface of the light emitting substrate. The gaming machine T3 is provided with a partitioning means for partitioning a region, and the light receiving means is configured so that the lighting method changes for each region partitioned by the partitioning means.

According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T1 or T2, the frame of the partitioning means is arranged at the boundary where the lighting method of the light receiving means changes, so that the lighting method of the light receiving means changes abruptly. It is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity given to the player when the player is allowed to play. As a result, even when the number of light emitting substrates is small, it is possible to improve the effect of the light emitting effect using the light emitting substrates.

In the gaming machine T3, the gaming machine T4 is characterized in that the light emitting substrate is aligned by being supported by the partitioning means from a direction that opposes the urging force applied to the light emitting substrate.

According to the gaming machine T4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T3, it is possible to facilitate the assembly work by facilitating the alignment between the light emitting substrate and the partitioning means, and in addition, the light emitting substrate at the time of use. And the partitioning means can be prevented from being displaced from each other.

In the gaming machine T3 or T4, the partition means includes a through hole formed corresponding to the shape of a light emitting portion arranged on the light emitting substrate, and the light receiving means is inserted through the through hole. A gaming machine T5 characterized by having a section.

According to the gaming machine T5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T3 or T4, the distance between the light emitting portion and the light receiving means can be narrowed without being affected by the dimensions of the partition means, and the light incident on the inside of the insertion portion can be reduced. It becomes easy to totally reflect the light, and it is possible to prevent the intensity of the light emitted from the light emitting means from decreasing.

In the gaming machine T5, the partition means is bored corresponding to the shape of the light emitting portion arranged on the light emitting substrate, and includes a non-insertion through hole that does not accept the insertion portion, and the non-insertion through hole is provided. ,
The gaming machine T6 is formed in such a manner that the opening expands as it separates from the light emitting substrate, and is brought into surface contact with the light receiving means from the opposite side of the light emitting substrate.

According to the gaming machine T6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T5, the through hole through which the insertion portion is not inserted can be configured as a means for emitting the light emitted from the light emitting portion at a wide angle, and in addition, the light receiving means. Light leakage can be suppressed by narrowing the gap between the two.

In any of the gaming machines T1 to T6, the light receiving means is characterized in that the outer shape of the cross-sectional shape is formed larger on the side far from the light emitting means than on the side closer to the light emitting means. T7.

According to the gaming machine T7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines T1 to T6, the area where the player sees the light through the light receiving means is made larger than the area where the light emitting means is formed. Can be done.

In the gaming machine T7, the light receiving means includes a light conducting portion extending from the light emitting means side and a punching boundary surface portion intersecting the light conducting portion, and the punching boundary surface thereof is a light conducting portion. The gaming machine T8 is characterized in that the front-rear direction surface portion in the extension direction is arranged at a position shorter than the inclined surface portion.

According to the gaming machine T8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T7, even when the light receiving means is formed in such a manner that the outer shape of the cross-sectional shape becomes larger toward the front, the punched boundary surface portion is formed. However, it is possible to easily make the wall thickness of the light conducting portion uniform. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain total reflection over the extending direction of the optical conduction portion.

In the gaming machine T7 or T8, the light receiving means includes a light conducting portion extending from the light emitting means side, and the light conducting portion is formed in a line shape including a base end portion of the insertion portion. The featured gaming machine T9.

According to the game machine T9, in addition to the effect of the game machine T7 or T8, the light emitted from the LED of the light emitting means can be easily visually recognized as line-shaped light (light mixed with light from a point light source). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the feeling of a point light source without increasing the number of LEDs arranged.

<Points consisting of two directions in which the fastening direction is inclined>
In a gaming machine including a first means and a second means fixed to the first means by a fixing means, the fixing means includes a first fixing means for generating a fixing force in a first direction and the first fixing means. A gaming machine U1 comprising: a second fixing means for generating a fixing force in a second direction inclined with respect to a direction.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a front frame is configured by combining a plurality of structures with fastening screws inserted in the front-rear direction (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-41185). .. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the shape of the structure is defined by the arrangement of the fixing means, and the degree of freedom in designing the structure is lowered.

For example, when a fastening screw to be inserted in the front-rear direction is inserted into the fixing means, it is not possible to arrange a light emitting member such as an LED at a position where the fastening screw interferes with the fastening screw in a front view in one cross section through which the fastening screw is inserted. That is, since the region where the fixing means can be arranged substantially coincides with the limit position of the outer shape of the light emitting member, the size of the structure is limited to the position where the fixing means can be arranged.

In other words, the shape of the support plate that supports the light emitting substrate from the back side needs to be formed larger than the light emitting substrate by the amount in which the fixing means is arranged. The size of the light emitting substrate will be limited.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine U1, the insertion direction of the fastening screw for fixing the fixing means is composed of the first direction and the second direction in which they are inclined to each other, so that all the fixing means are along the front-rear direction. Compared with the case of being inserted, it is possible to secure a wider production area on the side to be visually recognized by the player.

In the gaming machine U1, the fixing means is characterized in that a first surface formed along the first direction and a second surface formed along the second direction are provided on the outer surface. Gaming machine U2
..

According to the gaming machine U2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine 1, the outer surface is formed along the direction of the fixing force applied to the fixing means, so that even if the outer surface is likely to be deformed by an external force, sufficient resistance is obtained. A force can be generated and deformation of the outer surface can be suppressed.

The gaming machine U3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine U1 or U2, at least one of the fixing portions of the fixing means is provided with a suppressing means for suppressing a decrease in the fixing force.

Here, assuming that the first means and the second means are made of a resin molded product and the drawing direction of the resin mold for manufacturing is one direction, the first direction or the second direction inclining each other and the pulling direction are different. Since it is inclined, the fixing force may be weakened by the first or second fixing means corresponding to the inclined side.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine U3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U1 or U2, a decrease in the fixing force can be suppressed by the suppressing means, so that the fastening screw used for fastening the fixing means is used as a common part. can do.

The configuration of the suppressing means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a loosening preventing means for preventing the loosening of the fixing, or a loosening regulating means for restricting further loosening when the loosening of the fixing occurs.

In the gaming machine U3, the suppressing means is provided with a notification means capable of notifying a fixing defect of the fixing means.

According to the gaming machine U4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U3, the notification means notifies the fixing failure of the fixing means, so that it is possible to quickly detect that the fastening screw has loosened.

The configuration of the notification means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a means for electrically notifying, such as a detection means such as a sensor, or a structural means for causing a change in appearance.
As structural means, for example, a transmission changing means for changing the transmission intensity of vibration generated inside the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine, a light effect changing means for blocking light emission from the inside and generating a shadow that can be seen from the outside, and a light effect changing means. An example is a vibration notification means that makes the player notice by contacting the vibrating part of the vibrating device to generate an abnormal noise or strengthen the vibration.

In any of the gaming machines U2 to U4, a third means disposed between the first means and the second means is provided, and the third means has the first surface and the second surface. A gaming machine U5 characterized in that it is arranged between them.

According to the gaming machine U5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines U2 to U4, the directions in which the first means and the second means can generate a resistance force as the component direction of the fixing force of the fixing means are set to a plurality of directions. Therefore, it is possible to easily hold the third means safely.

The configuration of the third means is not limited at all. For example, the third means may be configured such that the first means side is made visible to the player, while the second means side is not made visible to the player. In this case, the side where the distance between the first surface and the second surface is widened is the first means side, and the side where the distance between the first surface and the second surface is narrowed is the second means side. The area occupied by the composition can be narrowed.

The gaming machine U5 includes a fourth means arranged on the opposite side of the third means with the first surface interposed therebetween, and the first surface is formed so as to be inclined with respect to the front-rear direction. Gaming machine U
6.

According to the gaming machine U6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U5, the area occupied by the third means and the area occupied by the fourth means in front view can interfere with each other, so that the third means and the fourth means can interfere with each other. It is possible to secure a large area where the pachinko machine can be placed.

A gaming machine U7, wherein in any of the gaming machines U1 to U6, the first fixing means and the second fixing means are arranged in a set at predetermined intervals, respectively.

According to the gaming machine U7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines U1 to U6, the first fixing means and the second fixing means are arranged in a set at predetermined intervals, so that the one fixing means is used. It is possible to prevent deformation along the generation direction of the fixing force from occurring in the other fixing means. That is, since deformation in the direction intersecting the direction in which the fixing force is generated can be suppressed, it is possible to avoid loosening of the fixing means.

<The rigidity of the game board assists the decrease in rigidity due to the notch (through hole) on the side of the rear case>
In a gaming machine including a gaming board and facing means having edges arranged facing each other on the gaming board, the facing means is provided with a proximity portion arranged close to the gaming board on the left and right edges. , The gaming machine ZA1 characterized in that the formation mode of the proximity portion is asymmetrical.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine including a gaming board constituting a gaming area and a back case in which a movable unit or the like is arranged (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-77627). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the internal space of the rear case is eroded by the space occupied by the connection position between the gaming board and the rear case, so that a sufficient space for arranging movable units and the like can be secured. There was a problem that it became difficult.

In particular, in a right-handed machine that plays a right-handed game in a probabilistic state (high probability state) or a jackpot game (special game state), the player's line of sight is often concentrated on the right side of the game area, so the right side. It has been required to secure the internal space of the back case on the back side of the flow path (the flow path on the right side of the liquid crystal device) through which the struck game ball flows down.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZA1, the formation mode of the proximity portion is asymmetrical.
Since the arrangement of the left and right edges of the facing means with respect to the game board can be asymmetrical, the internal area of either the left or right facing means is secured instead of sacrificing the internal area of either the left or right facing means. Can be facilitated. As a result, the degree of freedom in arranging the facing means with respect to the game board can be improved, a sufficient space for arranging the movable unit and the like can be secured, and the degree of freedom in the effect of making the player visually recognize through the game board is improved. be able to. For example, the vicinity of the end portion of the game board (for example, a right-handed flow path) can be illuminated by a light emitting means of a mobile accessory, or can be illuminated by light emitted from a liquid crystal display device.

The mode of forming the proximity portion is not limited in any way. For example, it may be in contact with the game board, may be arranged away from the game board, or may be a combination thereof.

The mode of forming the proximity portion is not limited at all. For example, it is possible to secure a region in which the connecting portion (contact portion) used for connecting to the game board is not formed in a wide range.
The connecting portion (contact portion) may be arranged after suppressing the area occupied by the connecting portion (contact portion).

Further, the aspect of left-right asymmetry is not limited at all. For example, the area where the proximity portion is formed may be asymmetric, the direction of formation of the proximity portion may be left-right asymmetric, and the functional portion (female screw to which the fastening screw is fastened and fixed) arranged in the proximity portion may be asymmetric. The formation position, formation direction (for example, the direction in which the insertion direction of the fastening screw is set in the front-rear direction, the left-right direction, or another direction) or the number of formations may be asymmetrical.

In the gaming machine ZA1, the facing means includes an arrangement portion in which the proximity portion is formed at an end portion on the game board side and is arranged facing each other in the left-right direction, and the proximity portion is formed in a left-right direction with respect to the arrangement portion. The gaming machine ZA2, which is characterized by being asymmetrically configured.

According to the gaming machine ZA2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZA1, the area between the arrangement portions can be configured to be asymmetrical with respect to the gaming board. It should be noted that the mode in which the formation direction is asymmetrical is not limited at all. For example, the formation direction may be opposite to the symmetrical direction (the same direction for both left and right), or the formation direction may be a direction that intersects left and right (for example, an orthogonal direction).

Further, as the forming direction, for example, an extension direction in which the plate-shaped portion is extended (direction in which the plate-shaped portion is provided), a recessed direction in which the recessed portion is recessed as a notch (direction of cutting), and the like are exemplified.

In the gaming machine ZA1 or ZA2, the proximity portion includes a facing surface which is a surface facing the gaming board and an facing side which is a side facing the gaming board, and is compared with a portion of the gaming board with respect to the left side portion. The gaming machine ZA3 is characterized in that the portion of the gaming board with respect to the right side portion has a larger proportion of the facing sides than the facing surface.

According to the gaming machine ZA3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZA1 or ZA2, the left-right width occupied by the proximity portion can be narrowed on the right side portion of the gaming board as compared with the left side portion of the gaming board.

The gaming machine ZA4 is characterized in that any one of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA3 is provided with a suppressing means for suppressing the displacement of the gaming board or the facing means in the facing direction.

According to the gaming machine ZA4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA3, the rigidity of the opposing means can be reinforced by the suppressing means. The arrangement of the suppressing means is not limited at all. For example, it may be arranged at a position away from the game board (including a position where it abuts on the opposing means), or may be arranged at a position away from the facing means (including a position where it abuts on the game board). However, it may be arranged at a position between the game board and the facing means (including a position where the game board or the facing means is in contact with at least one of them).

In the gaming machine ZA4, the suppressing means is arranged on the gaming board side of the gaming machine ZA5.

According to the gaming machine ZA5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZA4, it is possible to maintain the strength (ensure the rigidity) of the gaming unit as a whole without providing a special member in the facing means.

In the gaming machine ZA4 or ZA5, the suppressing means includes an overlapping portion that overlaps with the outermost surface of the facing means in a front view. The gaming machine ZA6.

According to the gaming machine ZA6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZA4 or ZA5, it is possible to prevent the sacrifice of the design freedom inside the gaming board, so that the space of the right-handed flow path in the gaming area can be secured. It is possible to maintain the strength (ensure the rigidity) of the game unit as a whole.

In any of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA6, the facing means is provided with a non-contacting portion that is non-contacting with the gaming board at the edge portion on the gaming board side of the outermost surface in the predetermined direction. Characterized gaming machine ZA7.

According to the gaming machine ZA7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA6, the gap between the gaming board and the non-contact portion can be used as a place for arranging the driving device of the variable winning opening, or the driving device thereof. It can be effectively used by using it as a wiring path connected to a winning sensor or a light emitting device, or by using it as a place for arranging a light emitting device.

In any of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA7, the gaming board is formed of a resin material.
The facing means is provided with an effect means arranged between the facing means and the gaming board, and the front end of the effect means can be arranged on the front side of the front end of the facing means. ZA8
..

According to the gaming machine ZA8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA7, the space for arranging the staging means can be expanded to the front side.

<Various light emission modes for movable accessories>
A light emitting means that irradiates a predetermined light emitting region with light, and a displacement means configured so that a first position that at least partially overlaps the light emitting region in a predetermined direction is included in at least a part of the displacement section.
The gaming machine ZB1 is characterized in that the light emitting region includes a possible region that is visibly configured in a plurality of types of light emitting modes corresponding to the arrangement of the displacement means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that a light emitting means and a displacement means overlap each other in a front view (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-159178). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the light emitting means and the displacement means are only visually recognized independently, and the staging effect utilizing the overlap is insufficient. That is, the displacement means is arranged in front of the light emitting means so that the light emitting means is hidden by the displacement means.
There was a problem that the staging effect was insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZB1, since the light emitting means is configured to be visually recognizable in a different light emitting mode in connection with the mode of the displacement means, it is possible to diversify the staging mode.

The modes of the displacement means include, for example, the arrangement mode of the displacement means, the displacement mode of the displacement means, the direction (posture) of the displacement means, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means arranged in the displacement means, and the like. Illustrated. Examples of the arrangement mode of the displacement means include a case where a part of the displacement means overlaps with the light emitting means and a case where the entire displacement means overlaps with the light emitting means. As the displacement mode of the displacement means,
Examples thereof include a case where the displacement means is displaced toward the light emitting means side, and a case where the displacement means is displaced away from the light emitting means. The orientation (posture) of the displacement means includes a case where the front surface of the displacement means faces the light emitting means side, a case where the back surface of the displacement means faces the light emitting means side, and a case where the surface in between faces the light emitting means side. Illustrated.

As the light emitting mode of the light emitting means, a mode in which the light emitting means that emits light toward the displacement means side is turned on, blinks or extinguished, a mode in which the light emitting means that emits light toward the side away from the displacement means is turned on, blinks or extinguished, and the like. Is exemplified.

In the gaming machine ZB1, the possible region includes a first state in which the displacement means is arranged in the first position and a second state in which the displacement means is arranged in a second position different from the first position. The gaming machine ZB2 is characterized in that it can be configured when the light emitting mode visually recognized from the predetermined direction is different.

According to the gaming machine ZB2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZB1, the light emitting mode can be changed by changing the position of the displacement means, so that the impression given to the player while keeping the light emitting mode of the displacement means alone the same. Can be changed suddenly.

In the gaming machine ZB1 or ZB2, the light emitting means includes a substrate on which a light emitting portion is arranged and a refracting means in which the light emitted from the light emitting portion is refracted so as to be refractable. The gaming machine ZB3 is arranged outside the possible region in a directional view, and the refraction means includes a first refraction portion that overlaps the possible region in a predetermined directional view.

According to the gaming machine ZB3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZB1 or ZB2, the mode of the light visually recognized through the first refracting portion is a combination of the light emitted from the light emitting portion and the color or light / darkness based on the displacement means. Can be revealed by.

Further, by narrowing the forming range of the substrate, it is possible to secure a region for arranging a driving device for generating a driving force of other constituent members, for example, a displacement means, and a space for the displacement means to be displaced.

In the gaming machine ZB3, the displacement means is characterized in that the displacement at a position overlapping the possible region in the predetermined direction is larger than the displacement at other positions.

According to the game machine ZB4, in addition to the effect of the game machine ZB3, the displacement of the displacement means is suppressed at the position where the light emitting means occupies a large space, and the displacement of the displacement means is increased at the position where the space occupied by the light emitting means is small. Therefore, it is possible to secure the maximum degree of freedom of displacement of the displacement means while suppressing the space occupied jointly by the light emitting means and the displacement means.

The magnitude of the displacement is not limited in any way. For example, the absolute value of the displacement of the displacement means may be used for comparison, positive or negative may be provided in opposite directions for comparison, or the displacement of the displacement means in a predetermined direction (component) may be used for comparison. The comparison may be made including the number of members that are configured in the displacement means and are displaced.

In any of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB4, the displacement means includes a second light emitting means that emits light in a manner that can be visually recognized from the predetermined direction, and a transmitting means that transmits light emitted from the second light emitting means. The gaming machine ZB5 is characterized in that the transmission means has a shape in which the width in a direction intersecting the displacement direction of the displacement means changes.

According to the gaming machine ZB5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB4, the position of the displacement means in the displacement section is the width of the light of the second light emitting means visually recognized through the possible region. Can be changed by.

A gaming machine ZB6, wherein in any of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB5, the possible area is arranged on the center side of a window portion in which a liquid crystal display area is visually opened.

According to the gaming machine ZB6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB5, the change in the light emitting mode of the possible region can be used to guide the player's line of sight toward the liquid crystal display region side.

It should be noted that the arrangement mode of the possible region is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified.
For example, it may be scattered around the window portion (including the case where there is only one possible area).
It may be in the shape of a circle (arc) surrounding the window.

In any of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB6, a substrate on which the light emitting means is arranged is provided.
The gaming machine ZB7 is characterized in that the substrate is not provided with fastening means for fastening at the end portion on the possible region side.

According to the gaming machine ZB7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB6, it is possible to secure a space for arranging the light emitting means on the side of the possible region, and a shadow of the fastening means is generated in the possible region. It can be avoided.

The gaming machine ZB 7 is characterized in that the gaming machine ZB 7 is provided with an lining means that is covered in a manner of covering between the possible region and the substrate in the predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine ZB8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZB7, the boundary position between the possible area and the substrate is hidden by the lining means, so that the visibility of light deteriorates near the end of the substrate. Even if there is, it is possible to avoid showing it to the player.

In the gaming machine ZB7 or ZB8, a substrate holding means for holding the substrate is provided, and the substrate holding means includes a gap forming portion for forming a gap in order to facilitate assembly of the substrate.
The gaming machine ZB9 is characterized in that the gap forming portion is closed in the assembled state.

According to the gaming machine ZB9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZB7 or ZB8, it is possible to avoid problems such as light leaking from the gap forming portion while achieving the effect of facilitating the assembly of the substrate by the gap forming portion. .. Further, this gap forming portion may be used for engagement with other members and may be used for alignment of other members.

In any of the gaming machines ZB7 to ZB9, the board includes a connector portion to which wiring is connected, and the connector portion is disposed at a position away from the end portion on the possible region side. Game machine ZB10.

According to the gaming machine ZB10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines ZB7 to ZB9, a load is applied to the wiring connected to the connector portion to generate a moment starting from the end portion on the possible region side. Therefore, the substrate can be easily taken out even in a situation where the substrate cannot be taken out directly.

<Transmission of driving force to multiple members, switching between transmission and interruption>
A displacement means configured to be displaceable, a drive means for generating a driving force for displace the displacement means, and a drive means generated by the drive means can be transmitted to the displacement means in a predetermined state. In a gaming machine comprising a transmission means, the transmission means includes a transmission unit that transmits a driving force to a predetermined transmitted portion of the displacement means, and the transmission unit is transmitted by the transmission unit in a driving state of the driving means. The gaming machine ZC1 is characterized in that the displacement of the displacement means can be suppressed when the portion is not abutted.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a cylindrical portion used for driving force transmission is guided to a concave portion of a displacement member, and the arrangement of the cylindrical portion and the posture of the displacement member correspond to each other (for example). See JP-A-2010-234152). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above,
Since the posture of the displacement member is maintained by the support by the columnar portion, there is a problem that it is difficult to perform other effects using the columnar portion while the posture of the displacement member is maintained.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZC1, since the transmission unit is configured to be able to suppress the displacement of the displacement means even in the non-contact state, the transmission unit can be used for other effects while maintaining the posture of the displacement means. It can be used.

The mode of the transmission means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a single gear or a plurality of gears arranged between the displacement means and the drive means, or may be an embodiment exemplified by a mechanism such as a slider crank or a cam in which a plurality of members interact with each other.

The mode in which the displacement can be suppressed is not limited at all. For example, it may be urged by gravity or an elastic force based on a spring member, or it may be locked (engaged) by a claw-shaped member, or it may be in contact with a member having a function as a stopper to suppress it. It may be the mode that is done. Further, examples of the mode that can be suppressed include a mode in which the displacement of the displacement means is reduced, a mode in which the displacement of the displacement means is prevented (regulated), and the like.

In the gaming machine ZC1, the transmission means includes a forming portion formed along the movement locus of the transmission portion, and the forming portion is such that the transmission portion is not in the moving direction of the displacement means with respect to the displacement means. The gaming machine ZC2 is configured to be able to come into contact with the displacement means in a state of being in contact with the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine ZC2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZC1, the displacement of the displacement means can be suppressed by the contact between the forming portion and the displacement means, so that the stability of the arrangement of the displacement means with respect to the external force is improved. be able to.

In the gaming machine ZC2, the forming portion is extended from the transmission portion along the displacement direction of the transmission means, and the distance between the transmission unit and the displacement means becomes longer than the distance between the transmission unit and the displacement means. The gaming machine ZC3, which is characterized by being configured in such a manner.

According to the gaming machine ZC3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZC2, a portion where a load is generated when the driving force is transmitted and a portion where the load is generated when the displacement is suppressed are partially in the facing direction between the displacement means and the transmission means. Can be displaced.

In the gaming machine ZC3, the displacement means has a one-sided functional portion formed on one side of the displacement means in the moving direction with respect to the transmitted portion and the other side in the moving direction of the displacement means with respect to the transmitted portion. The one-sided functional portion is configured in the same plane as the movement locus of the forming portion, and the other-side functional portion is located outside the moving locus of the forming portion. A gaming machine ZC4 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine ZC4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZC3, the moving direction in which the movement is suppressed by the forming portion can be set to one side.

In any of the gaming machines ZC1 to ZC4, the displacement means includes a first displacement means and a second displacement means different from the first displacement means, and the transmission means are the first displacement means and the second displacement means. The gaming machine ZC5 is characterized in that the transmission mode to the displacement means can be changed for each operation section.

The method of switching the transmission mode is not limited at all. For example, when the driving force is transmitted to one of the first displacement means and the second displacement means, the transmission of the driving force to the other may be cut off, or the driving force may be transmitted to the first displacement means and the second displacement means. It may be an embodiment in which the ratio of the driving force to be applied is changed.

According to the gaming machine ZC5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZC1 to ZC4, a plurality of displacement means can be displaced in different displacement modes by one transmission means.

In the gaming machine ZC5, the gaming machine ZC6 is characterized in that the first displacement means is arranged on one side of the transmission means, and the second displacement means is arranged on the other side of the transmission means.

According to the gaming machine ZC6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZC5, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in setting the combination of the displacement modes of the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

The combination of the displacement modes of the first displacement means and the second displacement means is not limited at all. For example, it may include a timing in which the first displacement means and the second displacement means are displaced in synchronization, or the transmission or interruption of the driving force to the first displacement means and the second displacement means is configured to be reversed and synchronized. It may be the one that does not displace.

Further, when the timing of synchronous displacement is included, the displacement mode may be changed by changing the relative speeds of the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

In the gaming machine ZC5 or ZC6, the gaming machine ZC7 is characterized in that the direction of displacement of the first displacement means and the direction of displacement of the second displacement means are set in opposite directions.

According to the gaming machine ZC7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZC5 or ZC6, the first displacement means and the second displacement means can be mutually recognized in a common area, so that the first displacement means and the second displacement means can be visually recognized. Even when the effect area in which the means is displaced is narrow, effective effect can be performed.

The mode of the first displacement means and the second displacement means is not limited at all. for example,
A plurality of displacement means laminated in the front-rear direction may be extended to a common area at different timings, or the initial arrangement is configured so as to pass through a common range while the plurality of movable members are moving while being laminated in the front-rear direction. May be.

<The load generating part catches up and comes into contact with each other to prevent the stop position from shifting>
In a gaming machine including a first displacement means configured to be displaceable and a second displacement means configured to displace the first displacement means by being displaced in a predetermined direction, the second displacement means is
The first displacement means includes a load generating portion that applies a load in a direction along the predetermined direction in order to displace the first displacement means, and the first displacement means includes a loaded portion that receives a load from the load generating portion and generates the load. The gaming machine is characterized in that the portion is separated from the loaded portion during displacement along the predetermined direction and can be brought into contact with a predetermined portion different from the loaded portion of the first displacement means. ZD1
..

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a cylindrical portion used for driving force transmission is guided to a concave portion of a displacement member, and the arrangement of the cylindrical portion and the posture of the displacement member correspond to each other (for example). See JP-A-2010-234152). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above,
If the cylindrical portion moves excessively due to a defect in drive transmission, the position of the displacement member may shift from the moving end, which may give a sense of discomfort to the player.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZD1, the load generating portion separates from the loaded portion during displacement and comes into contact with a predetermined portion different from the loaded portion, so that excessive displacement occurs in the second displacement means. However, it is possible to prevent the first displacement means from being placed in an unintended position.

In the gaming machine ZD1, the load generating portion applies a load directed from the other side to one side in the predetermined direction in a state where the first displacement means is arranged at one end of the displaceable section. The gaming machine ZD2, which is configured to be able to be given to a pachinko machine.

According to the gaming machine ZD2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZD1, when the first displacement means is arranged at one end in a predetermined direction, the load generating portion is in a predetermined direction with respect to the first displacement means. Since the load in the direction from the other side to the one side is applied, the first displacement means can be pressed against the end portion on one side in the predetermined direction by the load.

The gaming machine ZD1 or ZD2 includes a driving means configured to be able to drive the second displacement means, and the load generating portion is the first on the other side of the loaded portion in the predetermined direction.
A gaming machine ZD3 characterized by abutting on a displacement means.

According to the gaming machine ZD3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZD1 or ZD2, the second displacement means can be mechanically stopped by the contact between the load generating portion and the first displacement means, so that the driving force is stopped. Even if the timing accuracy is low, the terminal positions of the first displacement means and the second displacement means can be easily made constant. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first displacement means and the second displacement means from being displaced from the terminal positions while abruptly setting the stop of the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

In addition, the part that takes measures against the rare event that the second displacement means moves excessively
By providing it at a location different from the loaded portion that receives the load each time the driving force is transmitted, the fail-safe function can be exhibited without any problem even if the loaded portion is deformed.

A gaming machine ZD4, wherein any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD3 is provided with a regulating means capable of regulating the first displacement means at one end in the predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine ZD4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD3, the second displacement means is regulated by the regulating means at one end in a predetermined direction. 1 It can be displaced independently of the displacement means.

The mode of the regulatory means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a claw-shaped member that enters and exits in a direction intersecting the displacement direction of the first displacement means and engages with it, or it may be regulated by gravity or an urging force by an elastic member, or a part of the second displacement means. May be configured by.

In any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD4, the first displacement means is provided with a detection means configured to be able to detect that the first displacement means is arranged at one end in the predetermined direction, and the first displacement means is a method.
The gaming machine ZD5 is characterized in that the detection means includes a detected portion whose position is detected, and the load generating portion comes into contact with the detected portion.

According to the gaming machine ZD5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD4, the portion damaged by the load at the time of contact can be limited to the detected portion.

By linking the life that can be calculated from the number of displacements (number of drives) of the second displacement means and the durability of the detection piece, it is possible to determine the detection failure due to the damage of the detection piece. It is possible to grasp the replacement time (maintenance time) of the displacement means.

In any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD5, the direction of the load applied from the load generating portion to the predetermined portion intersects with the direction of the load applied from the load generating portion to the loaded portion. The gaming machine ZD6 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine ZD6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD5, the first
It is possible to facilitate a plurality of operating directions of the displacement means.

In any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD6, the loaded portion and the predetermined portion are arranged at predetermined intervals in a direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction.
..

According to the gaming machine ZD7, in any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD6, the loaded portion and the predetermined portion are arranged at the same position when visually recognized from a direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction.
The area required for the arrangement of the loaded portion and the predetermined portion can be narrowed.

<Technical concept to maintain by utilizing the flexibility of the following means>
In a gaming machine provided with a displacement means configured to be able to displace a predetermined area and a following means for following the displacement of the displacement means, prevention of preventing a predetermined portion of the following means from entering the predetermined area side. The gaming machine ZE1 characterized by being provided with means.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which flexible wiring is routed along the direction of displacement of the displacement means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-157474).
.. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, by setting the length of the wiring in comparison with the displacement means, there is an advantage that the wiring is less likely to bend when the displacement means is displaced, but the wiring is caught in the displacement means. In addition to the need to form temporary fixing parts that temporarily fix the wiring so that the wiring does not displace relative to each other, the displacement means are placed in place while the wiring is laid on the temporary fixing part. It usually takes time to assemble because it is assembled while doing it.
This has a problem that the degree of freedom in design and the assembly efficiency may be lowered.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZE1, the preventing means prevents the following means exemplified for wiring or the like from being displaced toward a predetermined region side, so that the following means is rubbed against the displacement means and damaged. It can be suppressed. This makes it possible to eliminate the need to form a plurality of temporary fixing portions in the displacement means, improve the degree of freedom in designing the displacement means, and improve the assembly efficiency.

In the gaming machine ZE1, the preventing means is characterized in that the following means is supported so as to be relatively displaceable in a predetermined direction in which a change in distance from the displacement means occurs due to the displacement of the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine ZE2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZE1, the preventing means supports the following means in a manner capable of being displaced in a direction in which the distance between the preventing means and the displacement means changes with the displacement of the displacement means. , The load applied to the following means can be reduced as compared with the case where the position of the following means is fixed by a fixing member such as a binding band.

The mode of the preventive measures is not limited at all. For example, it may be a columnar portion around which the following means can be wound, or a claw-shaped portion on which the following means can be sandwiched. Further, when the preventive means is formed as a columnar portion, for example, the columnar portion may be formed as a fastening portion used when fastening and fixing the members to each other, or may be used for positioning when assembling the members to each other. It may be formed as a positioning portion.

Moreover, the mode of the following means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an electric wiring that supplies electricity to the displacement means, or it is a band-shaped member that is displaced based on the displacement of the displacement means, and a figure or pattern is drawn on the surface, and the figure or pattern is made visible to the player. A band-shaped effect member that assists the effect may be used, or an elastic means such as a coil spring that generates an urging force that assists the displacement of the displacement means may be used.

In the gaming machine ZE1 or ZE2, the following means is configured to be able to supply electricity to the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine ZE3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZE1 or ZE2, electricity can be satisfactorily supplied to the displacement means.

In any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE3, the predetermined direction is a direction intersecting the direction in which the displacement means is displaced, and the following means is configured to surround the prevention means. The gaming machine ZE4.

According to the gaming machine ZE4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE3, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the following means greatly overhangs to one side. That is, since the range in which the following means can be displaced can be arranged on both sides of the preventing means, the area where it is necessary to avoid interference between the following means and other members can be limited to the range around the preventing means. ..

Further, it is not necessary to configure a relief portion for allowing the following means to enter from the displacement end of the displacement means to the outside in the displacement direction. As a result, the displacement means can be arranged in a small space.

In any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE4, a shielding means for shielding at least a part of the displacement means is provided, and the following means is connected to the displacement means at an inner position of the shielding means. The gaming machine ZE5.

According to the gaming machine ZE5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE4, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the connecting portion between the following means and the displacement means by the shielding means. In addition, the inward direction here means the inward direction when the edge portion in the front view is used as the outer shape.

In the gaming machine ZE5, the displacement means is configured to be rotatable about a first axis, and the first axis is arranged at an outer edge portion of the shielding means.

According to the gaming machine ZE6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZE5, a large amount of protrusion from the outer shape (outer edge portion) of the shielding means of the displacement means is secured while keeping the following means out of the player's field of view. be able to.

In the gaming machine ZE5 or ZE6, the prevention means is a straight line that equally divides the rotatable angle of the displacement means about the first axis, and is arranged on a straight line passing through the first axis. ZE7, a gaming machine featuring.

According to the gaming machine ZE7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZE5 or ZE6, the absolute value of the displacement amount of the following means can be suppressed.

In any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE7, the displacement means is provided with a guide portion for guiding the following means in a direction away from the displacement locus.

According to the gaming machine ZE8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE7, it is possible to prevent the displacement means from rubbing against each other, and it is possible to improve the durability of the following means.

In the gaming machine ZE8, the guiding portion is extended in a direction orthogonal to the outer shape of the predetermined region.

According to the gaming machine ZE9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZE8, the area occupied by the following means in the vicinity of the displacement means can be narrowed, and the area of the void through which the following means can pass can be narrowed. It is possible to improve the rigidity of the external means for holding the displacement means as compared with the case where the gap is large.

In any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE9, the following means is formed in a string shape or a band shape, one end is connected to the displacement means, the other end is connected to the gaming machine, and the following ends are directed toward both ends. The gaming machine ZE10 is characterized in that it is guided from one side of the predetermined area.

According to the gaming machine ZE10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE9, a load in a direction of pulling from one side of a predetermined region can be applied at both ends of the following means. As a result, the entire following means can be balanced with the load given by the guide unit.

In any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE10, the following means is configured to be wound around the preventive means in a loosening direction by shifting the displacement means from the position before the displacement to the position after the displacement. Machine ZE11.

According to the gaming machine ZE11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE10,
By absorbing the displacement of the displacement means by the looseness (slack) of the following means, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an excessive load on the following means.

In any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE11, an arranging means in which the following means is arranged between the ZE1 and ZE11 is provided, and an arranging portion for aligning the arranging means is provided. A gaming machine Z characterized in that it is arranged outside the movement trajectory of the following means.
E12.

According to the gaming machine ZE12, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE11,
Since it is possible to prevent the alignment portion from eroding the displacement space of the tracking means, it is possible to minimize the load applied to the following means due to the displacement of the displacement means.

In the gaming machine ZE12, the following means is configured to be wound around the preventing means, and the following means is set to have a first displacement portion (weak displacement portion) and a displacement larger than that of the first displacement portion. The gaming machine ZE13 is provided with a second displacement portion (strong displacement portion), and the first displacement portion is arranged between the second displacement portion and the arrangement means.

According to the gaming machine ZE13, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZE12, it is possible to limit the locations where damage is likely to occur due to contact with the arranging means of the following means. Therefore, it is possible to limit the locations that require reinforcement, and it is possible to improve durability at low cost.

The mode of comparing the magnitudes of the displacements of the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion is not limited at all. For example, the linear distances of the positions before and after the displacement may be compared, or when the displacement occurs in a plurality of directions, the comparison may be limited to the displacement in a predetermined direction (or on a predetermined surface).

In the gaming machine ZE12 or ZE13, the preventing means includes a protruding portion projecting from the arranging means, and the following means is wound around the projecting portion.

According to the gaming machine ZE14, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZE12 or ZE13, the fixing means can be assembled to the arranging means from above while supporting the following means dripping by its own weight by the arranging means. And the fixing means can be easily assembled.

<Technical concept in which the displacement mode (transmission mode) changes with forward and reverse rotation>
In a gaming machine including a driving means, a displacement means configured to be displaceable by the driving force of the driving means, and a transmitting means configured to be able to transmit the driving force generated by the driving means to the displacement means. The driving means has a first driving mode for generating a driving force in the first direction and the first driving mode.
The displacement means is configured to be operable in a second driving mode that generates a driving force in a second direction different from the direction, and the displacement means is driven by the first displacement mode and the second driving mode. The gaming machine ZF1 is characterized in that it is configured to be displaceable by a second displacement mode to be driven.

A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a first displacement means and a second displacement means that are displaced by a driving force of a common drive device, and the direction of displacement is reversed by reversing the drive direction of the drive device in the forward and reverse directions. There is a gaming machine configured as such (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-146413).
.. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the first is due to the length of driving the drive device in the positive direction.
Even if the displacement modes of the displacement means and the second displacement means change, and the drive directions of the drive devices are exchanged in the forward and reverse directions, both the first displacement means and the second displacement means are displaced. Therefore, there is a problem that the degree of improvement of the staging effect is insufficient by adopting a device that can be driven in the forward and reverse directions as the drive device.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZF1, the displacement mode of the displacement means can be changed by changing the direction in which the driving force is generated. Therefore, a driving device capable of setting a plurality of driving force generation directions is provided. The effect of the effect used can be sufficiently improved.

The gaming machine ZF1 is provided with a light emitting means that emits light toward the displacement means, and the displacement means is configured to be displaceable so as to pass through an optical axis of light emitted from the light emitting means. The gaming machine ZF2.

According to the gaming machine ZF2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZF1, the position where the light emitted from the light emitting means intersects the displacement means can be changed during the displacement of the displacement means, so that the illuminated position of the displacement means can be changed. Can produce a gorgeous effect that changes over time.

The gaming machine ZF1 or ZF2 includes a displacement suppressing means for suppressing displacement of at least a part of the transmission means, and the transmission means is the driving means in at least one of the first driving mode and the second driving mode. The gaming machine ZF3 includes a suppression region in which transmission of a driving force is suppressed, and the displacement suppressing means is configured to be capable of suppressing a predetermined displacement in the suppression region.

According to the gaming machine ZF3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZF1 or ZF2, the displacement suppressing means causes the transmission means to be unintentionally displaced when the transmission of the driving force is suppressed, thereby causing displacement in an unintended displacement mode. It is possible to prevent the means from being displaced.

Further, the visibility of the displacement means can be maintained high as compared with the case where the displacement means is stopped by directly contacting the displacement means with another member. Therefore, it is possible to easily configure the displacement means having an appropriate displacement mode from the player.

The mode of the displacement suppressing means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an engaging device that generates viscous resistance such as a damper device, a resistance device that generates resistance by its own weight, or a case where the resistance by its own weight tends to be insufficient (for example, displacement of the displacement means). (When the direction is along the horizontal direction), the idling operation cannot be suppressed by the gravitational force, so for example, a device such as a torque limiter whose resistance can be changed according to the displacement mode may be used.

The game machine ZF3 includes a detecting means configured to be able to detect the displacement of the displacement suppressing means, and the displacement suppressing means generates resistance when the operating speed of the transmitting means in the suppressing region is lower than a predetermined speed. The resistance is suppressed when the operating speed of the transmission means in the suppression region is equal to or higher than a predetermined speed, and the detection means is a detected portion of the displacement suppression means at a position where the displacement suppression means generates resistance. ZF4 is a gaming machine characterized in that it is arranged so as to be detectable.

According to the gaming machine ZF4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZF3, is the detection means functioning well in detecting the stop position of the displacement suppressing means and suppressing the displacement in the suppressing region of the transmission means in the displacement suppressing means? It can be used for both detection and detection.

In any of the game machines ZF1 to ZF4, the displacement means includes a first displacement means that is rotationally displaced around the first axis, and a second displacement means that is rotationally displaced outside the first displacement means around the first axis. The gaming machine ZF5 is provided with a displacement means, and is configured to be capable of suppressing the displacement of the second displacement means in the first drive mode or the second drive mode.

According to the gaming machine ZF5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF4, the first
In the drive mode or the second drive mode, the displacement of the second displacement means can be suppressed, and in this suppressed state, the second displacement means is arranged between the player and the first displacement means and the view is visible. It is possible to configure two production modes, one is to block the second displacement means and the other is to dispose the second displacement means outward between the player and the first displacement means so as not to block the view. In addition, the second displacement means can be configured. Since the displacement is possible even in the drive mode in which the displacement of the above is not suppressed, it is possible to configure the effect by the displacement means in a total of three displacement modes.

In any of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF5, the transmitting means is provided with a light transmitting means formed of a light transmitting material on a connection position side with the displacement means.
..

According to the gaming machine ZF6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF5, the effect of facilitating the assembly of the displacement means by the light transmitting means and the light emission effect by conducting the light toward the displacement means. It can play the effect that makes it possible.

In any of the game machines ZF1 to ZF6, the displacement means includes a first displacement means that is rotationally displaced about the first axis and a transmission means that is rotationally displaced about the first axis and is the first displacement means. It is provided with a second displacement means connected to the transmission means outside the connection position of the above, and the second displacement means is configured to overlap with the first displacement means in the first axial direction. Characteristic gaming machine ZF7.

According to the gaming machine ZF7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF6, the second
The first displacement means can be used to prevent the displacement means from coming off. This makes it possible to eliminate the need for a separate arrangement of the retaining member.

<Vibration device next to the device (P9 policy 1)>
For the first operating means configured to be operable by the player, the second operating means arranged at a position different from the first operating means and configured to be operable by the player, and the first operating means. The second
The gaming machine ZG1 is provided with a load generating means which is arranged on the operating means side and is configured to be able to generate a load toward the first operating means and the second operating means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine including a plurality of operating devices and a driving device for driving the operating devices (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-159).
See 178). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the vibration device is arranged in each operation device, the space required for arranging each operation device is large, and the number of operation devices that can be arranged is easily limited. In addition, there is a problem that the cost increases due to an increase in the number of drive devices.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZG1, since the load generating means is arranged on the second operating means side with respect to the first operating means, the load generating means is used as the first operating means and the second operating means (that is,). , Multiple operating means) can also be used to drive. As a result, the space required for arranging the first operating means and the second operating means can be reduced, and the upper limit of the number of arrangable operating means can be raised. In addition, since the number of load generating means can be reduced, the cost for configuring the gaming machine can be suppressed.

The mode of the load generating means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a means configured to enable vibration (high-speed repetitive displacement), a means to generate a load at a predetermined cycle such as a pump, or a means composed of an arm member whose posture changes due to the displacement of a cam. good. Moreover, the mode of the load is not limited in any way. For example, a load that is mechanically transmitted in a contact state may be used, or a load that is transmitted in a non-contact state (wind pressure, sound pressure, high pressure, etc.) may be used.

In the gaming machine ZG1, the load generating means is arranged between the first operating means and the second operating means. The gaming machine ZG2.

According to the gaming machine ZG2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZG1, the load can be transmitted to both the first operating means and the second operating means to the same extent.

In the gaming machine ZG1 or ZG2, the first operating means is operated to launch a gaming ball toward a gaming area, and the load generating means covers the first operating means at least partially from a predetermined direction. The gaming machine ZG3, which is characterized in that it is arranged in the setting means.

According to the gaming machine ZG3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZG1 or ZG2, the load generating means is arranged at a position where the finger of the player who operates the first operating means is sandwiched between the first operating means. Therefore, the load generated from the load generating means can be easily transmitted to the player's fingers.

For example, in the process of moving the player's fingers by moving the fingers closer to the first operating means and releasing the fingers from the first operating means after the operation is completed, the lining means is arranged at a position where the player's fingers can easily pass. By (arranging the lining means so as to cover from a direction that easily interferes with the fingers), it is possible to configure the device so that the load of the load generating means can be easily transmitted to the player during the movement of the fingers.

Further, for example, by arranging the lining means at a position where the fingers come into contact with each other with a high probability when the player operates the first operating means, the load of the load generating means can be increased during the operation of the first operating means. It is possible to configure a state that can be easily transmitted to the player.

It should be noted that this idea is different from the idea of arranging the load generating means in the first operating means.
That is, since the load generating means is arranged on the second operating means side with respect to the first operating means, the load generating means is arranged at a position different from that of the first operating means.

In the gaming machine ZG3, an intervening means configured to intervene between the load generating means and the first operating means and the second operating means so that the load can be transmitted to the first operating means and the second operating means. The gaming machine ZG is characterized in that the intervening means is configured such that the strength of vibration transmission to the first operating means is higher than the strength of vibration transmission to the second operating means.
4.

According to the gaming machine ZG4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZG3, the load transmission can be concentrated on the first operating means side.

The gaming machine ZG4 is characterized in that the intervening means is configured so that the strength of load transmission can be changed by displacing the load generating means with the driving of the load generating means.

According to the gaming machine ZG5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZG4, the strength of the load transmitted via the intervening means is improved when the load generating means is driven as compared with when the load generating means is not driven. Therefore, while suppressing the degree to which the first operating means and the second operating means interlock with each other (vibration) due to the load given to the pachinko machine by the player, the first operation is performed when the load generating means is driven.
It is possible to perform an effect of strongly operating (vibrating) the operating means and the second operating means.

In any of the gaming machines ZG1 to ZG5, the gaming machine ZG6 is provided with a holding means for holding the load generating means in a displaceable manner, and the holding means is provided with a guide unit for guiding the displacement of the load generating means. ..

According to the gaming machine ZG6, the safety of the player can be ensured by defining the displacement direction of the load generating means in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZG1 to ZG5. That is, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem such as an unintentional collision of the displaced member displaced by the vibration of the load generating means with the player.

In addition, regardless of the structure of the load generating means itself, the load generating means can be displaced in the desired direction by guiding it in the desired direction, so that the load generation adopted to realize the desired operation (vibration) effect is adopted. The degree of freedom of means can be improved.

In the gaming machine ZG6, the holding means is configured to allow displacement of the load generating means in a crossing direction intersecting the direction guided by the guide portion.
G7.

According to the gaming machine ZG7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZG6, the load generating means can be configured to be displaced in the crossing direction when switching between the non-driving state and the driving state, and the switching state and the driving state (stable state) can be configured. The load generating means can be displaced in different ways. As a result, the effect of the load generation means can be improved.

In addition, various aspects are exemplified as the aspect which allows displacement. For example, a second holding means for guiding the holding means may be provided so that the guiding direction by the second holding means intersects the guiding direction of the guide portion, or the load generating means may be located between the holding means and the holding means. It may be configured so as to interpose a flexible member, and displacement may occur due to deformation of the flexible member.

<Vibration means for lining means (P9 policy 2)>
The lining includes a frame means formed in a frame shape, an lining means for covering at least a part of the frame means from the front side, and a vibrating means arranged in the lining means and configured to be vibrable. The means is
The gaming machine ZH1 is provided with an allowable portion to which displacement is allowed, and is configured to be able to transmit the vibration of the vibrating means through the allowable portion.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine including a front frame and a vibrating means disposed on the front side of the front frame (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-159837). but,
In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is necessary to suppress the vibration of the vibrating means to the extent that the vibration of a predetermined strength or more is not transmitted to the front frame side (internal mechanism side), and there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of vibration production. was there.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZH1, since the vibrating means is arranged in the lining means and the displacement of the lining means is allowed, the vibration can be transmitted to the player side via the lining means. On the other hand, by absorbing the vibration by the displacement of the lining means, it is possible to suppress the transmission of the vibration to the frame means side.
Thereby, the allowable degree as the vibration strength of the vibration means can be increased.

The mode of the permissible portion is not limited in any way. For example, it may be configured in a connection mode premised on the displacement of slides, phosphorus, gears, etc., and displacement may occur due to the operation of slides, links, gears, etc. It may be flexible and may be displaced by being overloaded.

In the gaming machine ZH1, the lining means is configured such that the allowable amount of displacement in the vertical direction is smaller than the allowable amount of displacement in the horizontal direction.
..

According to the gaming machine ZH2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZH1, the effect of the permissible portion is maintained by the displacement in the horizontal direction, and the player puts his / her hand on the lining means in the direction of gravity with respect to the lining means. When a load is applied, it is possible to prevent the lining means from being excessively displaced and disturbing the posture of the player. That is, by keeping the allowable amount of displacement in the vertical direction small, it is possible to stabilize the structure of the product.

In the gaming machine ZH1 or ZH2, the lining means is configured in a bag shape with the frame means side open.

According to the gaming machine ZH3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZH1 or ZH2, since the frame means side is configured in an open bag shape, the edge of the bag and the frame means are arranged to face each other.
The contact area between the lining means and the frame means, which are in contact with each other and transmit vibration, can be reduced. As a result, the vibration transmission to the frame means side can be suppressed, so that it is possible to avoid the vibration being transmitted to the main substrate, the ball passage, and the main electric configuration arranged on the frame means side.

In any of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH3, the vibrating means includes an arrangement portion arranged on the frame means side, and the frame means includes a support portion for supporting the arrangement portion, and the arrangement is provided. The department is
The gaming machine ZH4 is characterized in that the deformation resistance is lower than that of the support portion.

According to the gaming machine ZH4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH3, the displacement range of the vibrating means is limited while maintaining the suppression of the vibration transmission to the frame means side, and the arrangement portion further provides. It is possible to cause biting by utilizing the fact that the deformation resistance is low as compared with the case where the structure is rigid, and it is possible to secure a large absolute value of the displacement amount of the vibrating means to the frame means side. As a result, it is possible to easily displace the lining means in which the vibrating means is arranged.

In any of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH4, the lining means includes a first lining portion and a second lining portion having a lower deformation resistance than the first lining portion, and the vibration means is a vibration means. The gaming machine ZH5, which is connected to the first lining portion and the second lining portion and is provided with a contact portion capable of locally contacting the first lining portion.

According to the gaming machine ZH5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH4, the contact position is obtained by locally contacting the first covering portion having high deformation resistance and the contact portion. Can be used as a fixed point (reference point) for vibration. That is, the absolute value of the displacement of the vibrating means and the second lining portion with respect to the contact position can be increased.

In any of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH5, a ball launching operating means operated for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area is provided, and the lining means is at least between the gaming machines and the ball launching operating means. A gaming machine ZH6 characterized by passing through a predetermined member.

According to the gaming machine ZH6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH5, vibration transmission to the ball launching operating means can be suppressed.

<Points characterized by blocking the light itself by the displacement of the accessory>
In a gaming machine including a light emitting means and an irradiated means to which light from the light emitting means is irradiated, the appearance of the irradiated means is changed while leaving the outer shape of the irradiated means in a predetermined direction. The featured gaming machine ZI1.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine equipped with a light emitting means mounted on a movable accessory and capable of executing a light emitting effect (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-208360).
.. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, a member that is displaced so as to interfere with the optical axis of the light emitting means is not arranged, and it is necessary to control the light emitting means in order to change the mode of the light emitting effect. There is a problem that there is room for improvement in the method of realizing the light emission effect because the data capacity is compressed due to the control and the size of the substrate is increased.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZI1, for example, the displacement means is configured so that the first position and the second position can be displaced, and the displacement means interferes with the light emitted from the light emitting means. By configuring it so that it can be configured, the mode of the light emitting effect can be switched by the displacement of the displacement means. Therefore, it is possible to change the mode of the light emitting effect without controlling the light emitting means, and it is possible to reduce the size of the substrate by eliminating the need for control data or the control circuit. can. This makes it possible to improve the method for realizing the light emission effect.

The mode of displacement is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be rotated, it may be a linear slide, or it may be a displacement along a predetermined curve. When the displacement of the displacement means is a linear slide, the case where the direction of the slide coincides with the predetermined direction is better than the case where the directions of the slide intersect with the predetermined direction. It is possible to easily maintain the outer shape.

The mode of the irradiated means is not limited at all. For example, it is configured to rotate on a rotation axis that intersects the optical axis, and the projected area may change due to the difference in posture. The relative projected area may change due to the displacement.

The mode of the displacement means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be configured to be rotationally displaced around the irradiated means, or it may be slid on a plane so as to enter the side of the irradiated means (between the light emitting means).

Further, the mode in which the outer shape of the displacement means is left is not limited at all.
For example, the displacement means may be visually recognized as stopped, or the absolute value of the displacement amount may be smaller than that of the irradiated means so that the displacement of the displacement means is not recognized by the player. It may be an embodiment.

Further, the displacement means may be displaced in relation to the light emitting means. The light emitting means may be configured to face the irradiated means at any timing of the displacement.

The mode of the light emitting means is not limited in any way. For example, the position may be fixed, or it may be configured to be displaceable. The light emitting means may be arranged in the displacement means in a displaceable state, or the light emitting means and the displacement means may be displaced separately (independently). Further, the irradiation direction may be fixed, or the irradiation direction may be variable.

The displacement of the light emitting means may be such that the optical axis is directed to the irradiated means and slides in a manner of being close to and separated from the irradiated means, or the light emitting means is moved around the irradiated means with the optical axis directed to the irradiated means. It may be a rotating one.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be the one that keeps the lighting state at all times, or the one that can switch between lighting and extinguishing.

The gaming machine ZI1 is characterized in that the difference in the appearance of the irradiated means is caused by the irradiation means reflecting the light emitted from the light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine ZI2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZI1, the difference in the irradiated means can be recognized immediately after the light emitting means irradiates the light, so that the attention to the timing of the light irradiation can be improved. .. According to this, even if the irradiated means is a displaceable means,
It may be a non-displaceable means.

The gaming machine ZI3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine ZI1 or ZI2, the degree of difference in the appearance of the irradiated means changes based on the displacement of the irradiated means.

According to the gaming machine ZI3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines ZI1 or ZI2, it is possible to improve the attention to the irradiated means.

The mode of displacement, which is the basis of the difference in the appearance of the irradiated means, is not limited at all. For example, it may be a constant (periodic) displacement that continues at a constant speed, or it may be an irregular displacement. Further, it may be a momentary displacement, or it may be a slow speed (a slow speed that makes it difficult for the player to grasp the displacement, for example, a displacement of 1 [mm / min] or the like.

A gaming machine ZI4, wherein in any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, the irradiated means can be configured to change the direction in which the light from the light emitting means is reflected.

According to the gaming machine ZI4, in any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, it is possible to make the spots stand out by being illuminated by the light reflected through the irradiated means while maintaining the outer shape of the irradiated means.

In any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, the gaming machine ZI5 is characterized in that the irradiated means can be configured to reflect light in the same direction, but at least one of the light amount and the color of the light is different. ..

According to the gaming machine ZI5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, it is possible to improve the attention to the light emitting mode of the irradiated means.

In any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI5, the irradiated means can be irradiated with light in an irradiation mode in which the optical axis does not interfere with the movement locus of the displacement means arranged around the irradiated means. The gaming machine ZI6, which comprises a shielding light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine ZI6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI5, by irradiating light from the unshielded light emitting means, it is possible to irradiate the irradiated means regardless of the arrangement of the displacement means. , It is possible to prevent the irradiated means from being visually recognized darker than necessary.

In any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI6, the irradiated means is the first irradiated means and
The first irradiated means is provided with a second irradiated means configured so that the light emitted from the light emitting means can be arranged at a shielding position toward the first irradiated means, and the first irradiated means is the light emitting means. The area of the optical axis in the direction of the optical axis is smaller when the second irradiated means is arranged at the shielded position than when the second irradiated means is not arranged at the shielded position. A gaming machine ZI7 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine ZI7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI6, the first
It is possible to make it difficult for light to reach the irradiated means. That is, the effect of shielding light can be improved. It should be noted that the change in the area of the first irradiated means may occur only when the light is irradiated from the light emitting means.

In any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI7, the light emitting means is configured to irradiate the irradiated means with light on a plurality of optical axes, and the irradiated means can intersect the plurality of optical axes at a predetermined position. A gaming machine ZI8 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine ZI8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI7, the amount of light received by the irradiated means is increased by increasing the optical axis of the light emitting means (for example, increasing the number of LEDs). Can be made to.

In any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI8, the irradiated means is provided with a driving means configured to be able to synchronously drive the irradiated means and the displacement means arranged around the irradiated means, and the irradiated means is being displaced. The gaming machine ZI9 is configured such that a predetermined first surface faces the same side, and the displacement means is configured to periodically displace the first position and the second position.
..

According to the gaming machine ZI9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI8, the light emitting mode of the irradiated means caused by the arrangement of the displacement means while suppressing a large change in the visibility of the irradiated means ( For example, the switching timing of light and dark) can be changed by changing the speed of the displacement means.

The displacement mode of the irradiated means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a slide displacement or a rotational displacement. The rotational displacement may be, for example, a rotational displacement that occurs on a rotational axis along the display surface of the display device, or a rotational displacement that occurs on a rotational axis that is orthogonal to the display surface of the display area.

In any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI9, the displacement means arranged around the irradiated means or at least one of the irradiated means has a surface on the light emitting means side, and the displacement means is arranged at the second position. The gaming machine ZI10 is characterized in that the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be changed to the player side.

According to the gaming machine ZI10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI9, the displacement means is irradiated from the light emitting means depending on whether the displacement means is arranged at the first position or the second position. It is possible to increase the difference in the degree to which the light travels toward the player.

<Characteristic AA group> (Lever UP control)
It has an operation means that can be operated by at least a player from a predetermined first position in a first direction, and an effect execution means that can execute an effect corresponding to the operation based on the operation of the operation means. In the gaming machine, the notification means capable of notifying the operation suggestion mode suggesting that the operation means is operated in the first direction, and the state in which the release condition is satisfied after the operation in the first direction is satisfied. The gaming machine AA1 is characterized by having a specific effect setting means capable of setting a specific effect when the operation unit is not located at a specific position.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Then, before the lottery result is notified, an operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means can be executed as a suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result, and a period until the lottery result is notified is set. There was something to entertain the player. Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is a gaming machine in which a player is allowed to operate the operating means in a state where the operating means is moved from an initial position in order to further enhance the effect of the effect (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). In such a gaming machine, when the player does not operate the operating means even though the operating means is moved from the initial position, the operating means in the movable state is initially set regardless of the player's operation. It is necessary to execute the control to return to the position, and there is a problem that the effect of the production is lowered and the interest of the game is lowered. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a game having an improved interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine AA1, when the operation means is not located at the specific position in the state where the release condition is satisfied, the specific effect is set by the specific effect setting means, so that the operation means is located at the specific position. If there is no such thing, it will be possible to provide the player with the effect. Therefore, even if the operating means is not operated after the operating means is moved, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the staging effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine AA1, it is possible to move the urging means that constantly urges the operating means toward the specific position and the operating means from the specific position to the first position different from the specific position. The gaming machine AA2 is characterized in that the operating means is located at the specific position by operating the operating means from the first position in the first direction.

According to the gaming machine AA2, when the player operates the operating means located at the first position, the operating means can be moved to a specific position. Therefore, it is fun to let the player operate the operating means. , The act of moving the operating means to a specific position can be executed at the same time. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation effect can be smoothly performed and the effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine AA2 has a second operating means that can be operated by a player different from the operating means, and the specific effect includes at least a suggestion mode suggesting that the second operating means is operated. A gaming machine AA3 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine AA3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AA2, a specific effect including a suggestion mode suggesting that the second operating means is operated is executed, so that the second operating means can be easily operated. It becomes possible. Therefore, since the player can easily move the operating means to a specific position by the urging means by releasing his / her hand from the operating means, the operating means can be easily positioned at a predetermined position, and the operation effect can be produced. It has the effect of making it easier to execute.

The gaming machine AA4 is characterized in that any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA3 has a fixing means for fixing the operating means at the specific position so as to be difficult to operate.

According to the gaming machine AA4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, when the operating means is located at a specific position, the movement of the operating means is restricted by the fixing means. Can prevent the operating means from being operated regardless of. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the operating means from being operated unnecessarily and causing a failure.

In any of the gaming machines AA1 to AA4, there is a launching means capable of launching the gaming ball based on the operation of the player, and the specific effect includes an embodiment for encouraging the player to launch the gaming ball. AA5 gaming machine characterized by being a pachinko machine.

According to the gaming machine AA5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA4, an aspect for urging the player to launch a gaming ball as a specific effect is included, and therefore, when the specific effect is executed, the specific effect is executed. It is possible to actively encourage the player to launch a game ball. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect that makes it easier for the player to take his / her hand off the operating means, so that the operating means can be easily moved to a specific position, and thus the operating means can be easily positioned at a predetermined position. This has the effect of facilitating the execution of operation effects.

<Characteristic AB group> (combined control of pending PUSH and PUSH notice)
An acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, a determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and the determination means thereof. A display means for displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and an identification symbol corresponding to the information stored in the storage means. In a gaming machine having an identification symbol display means to be displayed on the display means, an operation means that can be operated by a player and an operation that can execute an operation effect in which an effect mode is changed by operating the operation means. The effect executing means, the identification symbol effect executing means capable of executing the identification symbol effect that can change the mode of the identification symbol displayed by operating the operation means, and the operation effect and the above. The gaming machine AB1 characterized by having a regulatory means for restricting execution of the identification symbol effect in an overlapping period.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Then, before the lottery result is notified, an operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means can be executed as a suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result, and a period until the lottery result is notified is set. There was something to entertain the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). Further, in some gaming machines having the above-mentioned configuration, a plurality of conditions for executing an operation effect are provided in order to further enhance the effect. In this case, there is a problem that a plurality of operation effects are duplicated and the effect is difficult for the player to understand, and the interest of the game is lowered. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a game having an improved interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine AB1, it is possible to regulate that the operation effect and the identification symbol effect are executed in the overlapping period by the regulating means, so that it is possible to prevent the plurality of operation effects from being executed in duplicate. Is possible. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AB1, the regulating means sets a period for restricting the execution of the operation effect mode during the period when the identification information is dynamically displayed, and is configured to execute the identification symbol effect within that period. A game machine AB2 characterized by being a game machine.

According to the gaming machine AB2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AB1, a period for restricting the execution of the operation effect mode is set by the regulating means during the period when the identification information is dynamically displayed, and the identification is performed within that period. Since the symbol effect is executed, it is possible to smoothly execute a plurality of operation effects. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily perform a plurality of operation effects, and there is an effect that the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machines AB1 or AB2, during the period in which the operation effect is executed, the mode variable effect in which the mode of the identification symbol is variably displayed without the operation means being operated is configured to be feasible. The gaming machine AB3, which is characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine AB3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machines AB1 or AB2, since the mode variable effect is configured to be executable during the period when the operation effect is executed, it is possible to identify whether the mode variable effect is executed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the design effect is executed, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AC group> (Controlling the end of electric support by falling)
Variable that can be changed to a ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter, a first state in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than the first state. A member, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry means, a discrimination means capable of performing discrimination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and a discrimination means thereof. In order to show a display means for displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result by the display means, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and a specific discrimination result of the display means. When the identification information of is displayed, a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege advantageous to the player, a first probability as a probability of being discriminated from the specific discrimination result, and a second probability higher than the first probability. When the second probability is set by the probability setting means capable of setting the probability and the probability setting means, the determination means capable of executing the determination and the determination means determine the specific determination result. A probability control means for setting the first probability based on the above, a setting means capable of setting a specific gaming state in which the variable member is more likely to be changed from the second state to the first state than in the normal gaming state, and a setting means thereof. In a gaming machine having an end condition determining means for determining the establishment of an end condition for setting the normal gaming state when a special gaming state is set by the setting means, the setting means has the second probability. When the special gaming state is set, the special gaming state can be set, and the end condition determining means has a predetermined period after the special gaming state is set, and the second probability is described. AC1, a gaming machine characterized in that it is determined that the end condition is satisfied based on the setting of the first probability.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Then, in order to make it possible to set a high-probability state in which it is easy to win as a game state and a low-probability state in which it is difficult to win, and to shift the game state to a low-probability state when the high-probability state is set. There was one that executed the lottery (so-called fall lottery). Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is a configuration in which a specific gaming state in which the winning / failing lottery of the game is easily executed and a normal gaming state in which it is difficult to be executed can be set. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-269007). However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is no relation between the timing of transitioning from the high-probability state to the low-probability state and the timing of transitioning from the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state, and the player can understand the transition status of each gaming state. There was a problem that it became difficult and the interest of the game was reduced. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a game having an improved interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine AC1, the normal gaming state is set when the first probability is set by the probability control means, so that the setting status of the probability setting means and the setting status of the setting means can be varied in association with each other. can. Therefore, there is an effect that the transition state of the game state can be easily understood by the player and the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine AC1 is characterized in that the determination means executes the determination when the determination condition for executing the determination is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine AC2, it is possible to execute the determination by the determination means when the determination condition is satisfied, so that it is possible to prevent the determination means from excessively executing the determination while the second probability is set. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided to the player.

The gaming machine AC2 is characterized in that the determination means executes a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means before the dynamic display of the identification information is started. Machine AC3.

According to the gaming machine AC3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AC2, the determination by the determination means is executed before the dynamic display of the identification information is started, so that the determination is executed based on the fact that the determination condition is satisfied. It is possible to dynamically display the identification information for showing the result of the determined determination based on the determination result of the determination means. As a result, when the determination means determines that the determination result is specific, the determination means that is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition that triggered the determination can be determined with the first probability. Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided to the player.

In any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC3, the probability control means determines the first probability before the start of dynamic display of the identification information when the determination means determines the specific determination result. A gaming machine AC4 characterized by being set.

According to the gaming machine AC4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC3, when the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result, the probability control means starts the dynamic display of the identification information. The first probability is set before. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the dynamic display of the identification information based on the second probability from being executed after the specific determination result is determined, so that an appropriate game can be provided to the player. effective.

In any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC4, the setting means sets the normal gaming state based on the determination from the specific determination result in the state where the special gaming state is set. The gaming machine AC5 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine AC5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC4, even when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, the normal gaming state is set by the setting means, so that the setting is made. When the normal gaming state is set by the means, it may be difficult for the player to understand whether the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result or the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result. It can and can provide predictive fun. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AD group> (burst interruption effect)
A period during which an effect is executed by the effect executing means in a gaming machine having an effect executing means capable of executing the effect and an effect period determining means for determining an effect execution period executed by the effect executing means. A specific effect executing means capable of interrupting at least a part of the effect executed by the effect executing means to execute the specific effect, and the effect executing means executed by the effect executing means when the specific effect is executed. The gaming machine AD1 is characterized by having a setting means capable of changing and setting the effect to be interrupted according to the state of the effect.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Then, before the lottery result is notified, the suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result can be executed, and the player can enjoy the period until the lottery result is notified. Further, as a suggestion effect, there is a gaming machine in which the effect of the suggestion effect is further enhanced by executing various effects at various timings (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-209952). In such a gaming machine, even while one suggestion effect is being executed, another suggestion effect can be executed, so that the types of effects to be executed can be increased and the effect can be enhanced. be. However, since the above-mentioned gaming machine is configured to execute another suggestion effect regardless of the effect status of one suggestion effect being executed, the player suddenly switches the suggestion effect to be executed. There was a problem that the player's motivation to play was reduced. Further, when the suggestion effect being executed indicates a predetermined process change (for example, story development), the predetermined process change mode ends in the middle by switching the suggestion effect. Therefore, there was a problem that the player was more confused. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by executing various suggestion effects without confusing the player.

According to the gaming machine AD1, since the mode of the effect interrupted by the execution of the specific effect can be changed by the setting means, the effect is interrupted during the execution and the player is confused. It can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand effect in a gaming machine that can execute a plurality of effects in an overlapping manner.

In the gaming machine AD1, the effect executed by the effect executing means includes an effect by voice, and the setting means interrupts the effect by voice depending on the state of the effect, and the above. The gaming machine AD2 is characterized in that it sets a case where the production by voice is not interrupted.

According to the gaming machine AD2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AD1, when the production is interrupted, it is interrupted because it is possible to set a case where only the sound is continued and a case where the sound is also interrupted. It is possible to change the interruption mode of the production according to the content of the production. Therefore, it is possible to make the degree of interest of the player different in the interrupted production, and there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In this case, it may be determined whether or not to interrupt the output of the sound based on the effect mode of the specific effect and the effect mode of the interrupted effect, and the sound set as the effect mode of the specific effect may be determined. When the type and the sound type set as the effect mode of the effect to be interrupted are the same sound type, it is preferable to configure the sound output to be interrupted. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the sound of the interrupted effect from being output and being confused with the sound set as the effect mode of the specific effect to provide an effect that is difficult to understand.

Further, it may be configured to determine whether or not to interrupt the audio output according to the interruption timing of the effect. In this case, when the remaining period of the effect to be interrupted is a predetermined period or less (for example, 1 second or less), only the sound can be output to the end even if the effect is interrupted. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the production has been interrupted.

In the gaming machines AD1 or AD2, a display means in which a plurality of identification symbols are dynamically displayed as one of the effects executed by the effect execution means, and a case where the identification symbols are displayed in a specific combination on the display means. The setting means has a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player, and the setting means has another identification symbol in a state where one identification symbol is dynamically displayed among the plurality of identification symbols. The gaming machine AD3 is characterized in that the effect of being interrupted is changed and set depending on whether or not the reach display mode displayed in a combination capable of being a specific combination is displayed. ..

According to the gaming machine AD3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AD1 or AD2, the effect can be changed depending on whether the interrupted effect is before or after the reach display. That is, it is possible to change the mode of the effect set by the setting means based on the interruption timing of the effect executed by the effect executing means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from being confused by the interruption of the production.

In the gaming machine AD3, the setting means interrupts the effect by voice when the effect executed by the effect means is interrupted before the reach display mode is displayed, and the reach display mode is interrupted. AD4 is a gaming machine AD4 characterized in that the effect is set so that the effect by voice is not interrupted when the effect is interrupted after is displayed.

According to the gaming machine AD4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AD3, if the effect is interrupted before the reach display mode is displayed, the sound is interrupted, and if the effect is interrupted after the reach display mode is displayed, the effect is interrupted. You can prevent the audio from being interrupted. Therefore, even if the production is interrupted after the reach display mode is displayed, the sound can be continuously output, which confuses the player that the reach display mode is discarded in the middle. It has the effect of suppressing the loss.

<Characteristic AE group> (button repeated tapping sound control)
In a gaming machine having an operation means that can be operated by a player and an effect execution means whose effect is variable based on the operation of the operation means, a first operation is performed each time the operation means is operated. The gaming machine AE1 is characterized by having a voice control means capable of alternately outputting a sound and a second operation sound different from the first operation sound.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Then, before the lottery result is notified, an operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means can be executed as a suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result, and a period until the lottery result is notified is set. There was something to entertain the player (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, when the player operates the operating means, there is one that outputs an operation sound in order to notify that the operation has been accurately accepted. In such a gaming machine, whether or not the player was able to operate the operating means could be easily determined from the output operation sound, but until the output of one operation sound is completed. When the next operation is executed during the period, that is, when the continuous striking operation is performed, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to hear the operation sound output corresponding to each operation. In addition, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous if the output operation sound is one sound. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by making it easier for the player to hear the output operation sound and outputting a wide variety of operation sounds.

According to the gaming machine AE1, when the player operates the operating means a plurality of times, the first operation sound and the second operation sound are output alternately, so that only one type of operation sound is output. It has the effect of being able to output a wide variety of operation sounds. In addition, since different operation sounds are output alternately, even if the operation means is operated at short intervals (intervals shorter than the output period of one operation sound), the player has operated the operation means. Can be easily identified by the operation sound. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AE1, the voice control means is operated to output the first operation sound during the first period, and then to output the first operation sound before the first period elapses. In this case, the gaming machine AE2 is characterized in that the first operation sound being output is stopped and the output of the first operation sound is newly started.

According to the gaming machine AE2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AE1, if the next first operation sound is output within the first period in which the first operation sound is output, the first operation sound being output is output. Is stopped and a new first operation sound is output, so that there is an effect that the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the new operation has been executed.

In the gaming machine AE1 or AE2, the voice control means outputs the second operation sound during the second period, and then the second operation sound is output before the second period elapses. If this is the case, the gaming machine E3 is characterized in that the second operation sound being output is stopped and the output of the second operation sound is newly started.

According to the gaming machine AE3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AE1 or AE2, if the next second operation sound is output within the second period during which the second operation sound is output, the second operation sound being output is being output. Since the operation sound is stopped and a new second operation sound is output, there is an effect that the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the new operation has been executed.

In any of the gaming machines AE1 to AE3, the effect executing means is configured to be capable of executing a continuous operation effect in which the mode of the effect is variable in response to the operation of the operating means a plurality of times in succession. A gaming machine AE4 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine AE4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AE1 to AE3, the continuous operation effect is executed in response to the operation of the operating means a plurality of times in succession, so that the effect mode can be changed. It is possible to notify the player that the operating means has been operated. As a result, it becomes possible to determine from the operation sound and the effect that the operation to the operation means has been accepted. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

<Characteristic AF group> (Hold notice)
An acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, a determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and the determination means thereof. A display means for displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and an identification symbol corresponding to the information stored in the storage means. In a gaming machine having an identification symbol display means to be displayed on the display means, an operation means that can be operated by a player and an operation that can execute an operation effect in which an effect mode is changed by operating the operation means. It has an effect executing means and an identification symbol effect executing means capable of executing an identification symbol effect that can change the mode of the identification symbol displayed by operating the operation means. The gaming machine AF1 characterized in that the identification symbol effect executing means executes the identification symbol effect on two or more of the identification symbols when a plurality of identification symbols are displayed on the display means. ..

Conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a variable display of symbols based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening, and notify the player of the result of the lottery after the variable display is completed. Furthermore, the lottery executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening is configured to be hold-stored multiple times, the hold symbol corresponding to the hold storage number is displayed, and the displayed hold symbol is displayed. There is one that can be used to execute a hold notice effect that can notify the information about the corresponding lottery in advance (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-297071). In the above-mentioned gaming machine, by changing the color and shape of the reserved symbol, the expected degree of a big hit in the variable display corresponding to the reserved symbol is suggested, and the game is played before the variable display is started. It was possible to raise the expectations of those who were. However, when the hold notice effect is generated, it becomes difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation for the hold symbol that is not the target of the hold notice, and there is a problem that the player's motivation to play is reduced. The purpose is to solve the above-exemplified problems.

According to the gaming machine AF1, since the identification symbol effect is configured to be executed for two or more identification symbols as one identification symbol effect, the target range of the identification symbol effect can be expanded and the identification can be performed. It is possible to reduce the number of identification symbols that are not subject to the symbol effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine AF1 has a pre-discrimination means capable of executing the discrimination before the information stored in the storage means is discriminated by the discriminating means, and the identification symbol effect executing means is the above-mentioned thing. The gaming machine AF2 is characterized in that the mode of the identification symbol is changed based on the discrimination result by the pre-discrimination means.

According to the gaming machine AF2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AF1, the mode of the identification symbol can be changed based on the discrimination result of the pre-discrimination means, so that the player is interested in the effect result of the identification symbol effect. Can be given. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machines AF1 or AF2, the identification symbol effect executing means changes the mode of the two or more identification symbols based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied by operating the operation means. The featured gaming machine AF3.

According to the gaming machine AF3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AF1 or AF2, the mode of two or more identification symbols can be changed based on the operation to the operating means, so that the effect executed for the player is performed. It has the effect of increasing the motivation to participate in.

In any of the gaming machines AF1 to AF3, the identification symbol effect executing means executes the identification symbol effect over a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed a plurality of times, and the identification symbol effect is performed. The gaming machine AF4 is characterized by having a regulation period setting means for setting a regulation period in which the operation of the operation means is not valid during the period in which the operation means is executed.

According to the gaming machine AF4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines AF1 to AF3, the identification symbol effect is executed over a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed multiple times, and further, the identification symbol effect is performed. During the execution period, there is a regulation period in which the operation on the operating means is not determined to be valid. As a result, it is possible to entertain the player at what timing the operation means is operated, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine AF5 is characterized in that, among the periods during which the identification symbol effect is executed, the specific effect is executed during a period other than the restricted period.

According to the gaming machine AF5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AF4, by executing a specific effect, it is possible to determine whether or not the operation of the operating means is currently in a restricted period during the identification symbol effect. Since it can be easily discriminated by a player, there is an effect that a player can easily perform an effect that is easy to understand.

<Characteristic AG group>
Variable that can be changed into a ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter, a first state in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than the first state. A member, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry means, a discrimination means capable of performing discrimination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and a discrimination means thereof. In order to show a display means for displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result by the display means, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and a specific discrimination result of the display means. When the identification information of is displayed, the privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege advantageous to the player, the first probability as the discrimination probability to be discriminated from the specific discrimination result, and the first probability higher than the first probability. Probability setting means capable of setting two probabilities, and as a gaming state, a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is more likely to be changed from the second state to the first state than the normal gaming state. In a gaming machine having a settable setting means, the probability setting means sets the first probability when the first transition condition is satisfied while the second probability is set. The setting means sets the normal gaming state when the second transition condition is satisfied while the specific gaming state is set, and the first transition condition and the second transition condition are set. It has an effect mode setting means capable of setting different effect modes based on the order of establishment of the above, and an effect execution means capable of executing the effect based on the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means. The gaming machine AG1 characterized by this.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Then, in order to make it possible to set a high-probability state in which it is easy to win as a game state and a low-probability state in which it is difficult to win, and to shift the game state to a low-probability state when the high-probability state is set. There was one that executed the lottery (so-called fall lottery). Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is a configuration in which a specific gaming state in which the winning / failing lottery of the game is easily executed and a normal gaming state in which it is difficult to be executed can be set. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-269007). However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is no relation between the timing of transitioning from the high-probability state to the low-probability state and the timing of transitioning from the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state, and the player can understand the transition status of each gaming state. There was a problem that it became difficult and the interest of the game was reduced. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a game having an improved interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine AG1, the effects are executed in different production modes based on the order in which the first transition condition and the second transition condition are established. Therefore, the current game situation is predicted based on the execution contents. This has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine AG1, the discriminating means can discriminate the special discriminating result different from the specific discriminating result, and the second transition condition is that the discriminating result of the discriminating means is the special discriminating result. The gaming machine AG2, which is characterized in that it is established based on the above.

According to the gaming machine AG2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AG1, the second transition condition is satisfied based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means. Therefore, the discrimination by the discrimination means may be more advantageous for the player. , It is possible to provide a case where the determination result is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the discrimination result of the discrimination means and the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine AG2 has a counting means capable of counting the number of times that the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes the special discrimination result in the state where the specific gaming state is set, and the second transition condition is the counting. The gaming machine AG3 is characterized in that the second transition condition is satisfied when the result of the counting by the means is a predetermined counting result.

According to the gaming machine AG3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AG2, the second transition condition is satisfied when the number of times the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes the special discrimination result reaches a predetermined number of times, so that the discrimination means is discriminated. By discriminating that the result is a special discrimination result, it is possible to provide fun for predicting the period until the second transition condition is satisfied, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines AG1 to AG3, the effect mode setting means is based on the discrimination probability set by the probability setting means and the game state set by the setting means. The gaming machine AG4, which is characterized by setting the above.

According to the gaming machine AG4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AG1 to AG3, the effect mode is set based on the set discrimination probability and the game state, and therefore, the effect mode is set based on the effect to be executed. It can provide fun to predict the current game situation, and has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine AG4, the effect mode setting means includes a first gaming state in which the first probability is set by the probability setting means and the normal gaming state is set by the setting means, and the probability setting means. The gaming machine AG5 is characterized in that the same effect mode is set in the second gaming state in which the second probability is set and the normal gaming state is set by the setting means.

According to the gaming machine AG5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AG4, the first gaming state in which the first probability is set and the normal gaming state is set, and the second gaming state in which the second probability is set are set and the normal gaming state is set. Since the same effect mode is set for the second gaming state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish between the first gaming state and the second gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the current game situation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine AG5 has a determination means capable of executing the determination when the second probability is set by the probability setting means, and the determination means determines the determination for the determination means to execute the determination. The gaming machine AC6 is characterized in that the determination is executed when the condition is satisfied, and the first transition condition is satisfied when the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result. ..

According to the gaming machine AC6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AG5, the determination by the determination means can be executed when the determination condition is satisfied, so that the determination means excessively performs the determination when the second probability is set. It is possible to suppress the determination from being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided to the player.

In the gaming machine AG5 or AG6, the staging mode setting means suggests the discrimination probability set by the probability setting means when a predetermined period elapses after the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means. The gaming machine AC7, which is characterized in that it sets a suggestion effect mode for the purpose.

According to the gaming machine AC7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AG5 or AG6, the suggestion effect mode is set when a predetermined period elapses after the privilege is given by the privilege giving means, so that the first gaming state is set. Alternatively, when the second gaming state is set, the player can be made to grasp the current gaming state based on the content of the suggestion effect mode. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to continue the game until a predetermined period elapses, and there is an effect that the operation of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AH group> (Development of combined control of pending PUSH and PUSH notice)
An acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, a determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and the determination means thereof. A display means for displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and an identification symbol corresponding to the information stored in the storage means. In a gaming machine having an identification symbol display means to be displayed on the display means, an operation means that can be operated by a player and an operation that can execute an operation effect in which an effect mode is changed by operating the operation means. The effect executing means, the identification symbol effect executing means capable of executing the identification symbol effect that can change the mode of the identification symbol displayed by operating the operation means, and the operation effect and the above. When the identification symbol effect is executed in an overlapping period, the specific effect executing means capable of executing the specific effect based on the operation of the operation means in the overlapping period is provided. A game machine AH1 characterized by being present.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Then, before the lottery result is notified, an operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means can be executed as a suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result, and a period until the lottery result is notified is set. There was something to entertain the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). Further, in some gaming machines having the above-mentioned configuration, a plurality of conditions for executing an operation effect are provided in order to further enhance the effect. In this case, there is a problem that a plurality of operation effects are duplicated and the effect is difficult for the player to understand, and the interest of the game is lowered. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a game having an improved interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine AH1, when the operation effect and the identification symbol effect are executed in the overlapping period, the specific effect is executed. Therefore, even if the operation effect and the identification symbol effect overlap, the player It is possible to perform an easy-to-understand effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of directing can be enhanced and the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine AH1 has a setting means for setting the operation effect or the identification symbol effect to be changed when the operation means is operated in the overlapping period, and the specific effect includes the operation. The AH2 is characterized by including a suggestion mode indicating the operation effect or the identification symbol effect to be changed by operating the means.

According to the gaming machine AH2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AH1, it is possible to suggest to the player an effect to be changed when the operating means is operated by the effect specifying effect played by the gaming machine AH. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of performing an easy-to-understand effect to the player.

In the gaming machines AH1 or AH2, the number of operations for which the operation effect or the identification symbol effect is changed is set to be different based on the operation of the operation means in the overlapping period. AH3, a gaming machine characterized by.

According to the gaming machine AH3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines AA1 or AA2, the variable number of operations differs depending on whether the operation effect or the variable operation effect is executed independently or in duplicate. It will be possible to make it. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of the specific effect can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines AH1 to AH3, when the operation effect and the identification symbol effect are executed in an overlapping period, at least one of them is changed by operating the operation means a plurality of times. The gaming machine AH4, characterized in that it has a switching setting means for setting such as.

According to the gaming machine AH4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines AH1 to AH3, when the operation effect and the identification symbol effect are executed in the overlapping period, at least the number of operations corresponding to one of the operation effects is performed. Can be increased, so that it is possible to easily grasp that a specific effect is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the specific effect from being completed in a short period of time and the effect that is difficult for the player to understand to be executed.

The gaming machine AH4 is characterized in that the specific effect includes a game machine in which the execution period of the operation effect mode after being changed is set to be longer than a normal time.

According to the gaming machine AH5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AH4, the execution period of the operation effect mode is set longer than usual during the specific effect, so that the specific effect is executed for the player. Since it is possible to notify the fact in an easy-to-understand manner, there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristic AI group> (Development of pending notice)
An acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, a determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and the determination means thereof. A display means for displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and an identification symbol corresponding to the information stored in the storage means. In a gaming machine having an identification symbol display means to be displayed on the display means, an operation means that can be operated by a player and an operation that can execute an operation effect in which an effect mode is changed by operating the operation means. The effect executing means, the identification symbol effect executing means capable of executing the identification symbol effect capable of changing the mode of the identification symbol displayed by operating the operation means, and the identification symbol effect execution. By means, the effect mode variable means for varying the effect mode of the discriminating symbol effect being executed based on the fact that a predetermined change condition is satisfied during the period during which the identification symbol effect is being executed. A game machine AI1 characterized by being present.

Conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a variable display of symbols based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening, and notify the player of the result of the lottery after the variable display is completed. Furthermore, the lottery executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening is configured to be hold-stored multiple times, the hold symbol corresponding to the hold storage number is displayed, and the displayed hold symbol is displayed. There is one that can be used to execute a hold notice effect that can notify the information about the corresponding lottery in advance (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-297071). In the above-mentioned gaming machine, by changing the color and shape of the reserved symbol, the expected degree of a big hit in the variable display corresponding to the reserved symbol is suggested, and the game is played before the variable display is started. It was possible to raise the expectations of those who were. However, since the content of the hold notice effect cannot be made to correspond to the change in the game situation after the hold notice effect occurs, the player may have a sense of expectation for the content of the hold notice effect. There was a problem that it became difficult and the motivation for playing was reduced. The purpose is to solve the above-exemplified problems.

According to the gaming machine AI1, when the change condition is satisfied during the execution of the identification symbol effect, the effect of the identification symbol effect being executed can be changed, so that the effect of the identification symbol effect can be enhanced. can. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in the motivation to play and improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine AI1 is characterized in that the change condition is satisfied based on the fact that new information is stored in the storage means during the period during which the identification symbol effect is being executed. AI2.

According to the gaming machine AI2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1, it is possible to change the effect mode of the identification symbol effect based on the storage of new information in the storage means, so that the identification symbol effect is being executed. Also, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game in order to store new information in the storage means, and the operation of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine AI2 has a pre-discrimination means capable of executing the discrimination before the information stored in the storage means is discriminated by the discriminating means, and the identification symbol effect executing means is the above-mentioned thing. The gaming machine AI3 is characterized in that the mode of the identification symbol is changed based on the discrimination result by the pre-discrimination means.

According to the gaming machine AI3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AI2, the mode of the identification symbol is changed based on the discrimination result of the pre-discrimination means. There is an effect that the effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine AI3 is characterized in that the effect mode changing means changes the effect mode based on the determination result of the advance determination means for the information that triggers the establishment of the change condition. Machine AI4.

According to the gaming machine AI4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AI3, it is possible to change the effect mode of the identification symbol effect based on the result of the preliminary determination for the newly stored information. It is possible to target a range of identification symbols wider than the range of the identification symbols indicated by the identification symbol effect in. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to have a sense of expectation for the identification pattern production, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines AI1 to AI4, the identification symbol effect executing means executes the identification symbol effect over a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed a plurality of times, and the identification symbol effect is executed. AI5 is a gaming machine AI 5 having a regulation period setting means for setting a regulation period during which the operation of the operation means is not valid.

According to the gaming machine AI5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines AI1 to AI4, the identification symbol effect is executed over a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed multiple times, and further, the identification symbol effect is performed. During the execution period, there is a regulation period in which the operation on the operating means is not determined to be valid. As a result, it is possible to entertain the player at what timing the operation means is operated, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine AI6 is characterized in that, among the periods during which the identification symbol effect is executed, the specific effect is executed during a period other than the restricted period.

According to the gaming machine AI6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AI5, by executing a specific effect, it is possible to determine whether or not the operation of the operating means is currently in a restricted period during the identification symbol effect. Since it can be easily discriminated by a player, there is an effect that a player can easily perform an effect that is easy to understand.

<Characteristic AJ group> (button repeated tapping sound control)
In a gaming machine having an operation means that can be operated by a player and an effect execution means whose effect is variable based on the operation of the operation means, each time the operation means is operated, an operation sound is generated. , At least a voice control means capable of outputting a first operation sound and a second operation sound different from the first operation sound, and a type of the operation sound output by the voice control means can be set. The voice setting means has a voice setting means and a voice discriminating means capable of discriminating the type of the operation sound output by the voice control means, and the voice setting means is said to have the discriminating result of the voice discriminating means. A game machine AJ1 characterized in that it sets the type of operation sound.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Then, before the lottery result is notified, an operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means can be executed as a suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result, and a period until the lottery result is notified is set. There was something to entertain the player (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, when the player operates the operating means, there is one that outputs an operation sound in order to notify that the operation has been accurately accepted. In such a gaming machine, whether or not the player was able to operate the operating means could be easily determined from the output operation sound, but until the output of one operation sound is completed. When the next operation is executed during the period, that is, when the continuous striking operation is performed, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to hear the operation sound output corresponding to each operation. In addition, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous if the output operation sound is one sound. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by making it easier for the player to hear the output operation sound and outputting a wide variety of operation sounds.

According to the gaming machine AJ1, since a new operation sound type can be set based on the type of the operation sound actually output, it is possible to output an operation sound that is easy for the player to understand, and the game can be played. It has the effect of improving the taste.

The gaming machine AJ1 is characterized in that the voice setting means sets the operation sound of a type different from the type of the operation sound determined by the voice discrimination means.

According to the gaming machine AJ2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AJ1, it is possible to set an operation sound of a type different from the type of the operation sound actually output, so that various operation sounds are output. As a result, it is possible to perform a variety of productions, which has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine AJ1 or AJ2 is characterized in that the voice setting means sets the first operation sound when it is determined by the voice discriminating means that the operation sound is not output. Machine AJ3.

According to the gaming machine AJ3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AJ1 or AJ2, when the operation sound is not output, the first operation sound is set by the voice setting means. Therefore, it is possible to output the operation sound with a predetermined regularity for the operation of the operation means, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines AJ1 to AJ3, the operation status discriminating means capable of discriminating the interval between the operations performed on the operating means is provided, and the voice setting means has a discriminating result of the operation status discriminating means. The gaming machine AJ4 is characterized in that the first operation sound and the third operation sound different from the second operation sound can be set when a specific situation determination result is obtained.

According to the gaming machine AJ4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines AJ1 to AJ3, the third operation sound can be set based on the discrimination result of the operation status discriminating means, so that the player can be operated. It can provide the enjoyment of manipulating the means. Therefore, there is an effect that the motivation of the player to participate in the game can be increased.

The gaming machine AJ4 is characterized in that the operation status determination means discriminates from the specific status determination result when the interval between the operations performed on the operation means is shorter than a predetermined period. Gaming machine AJ5.

According to the gaming machine AJ5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AJ4, the third operation sound is output when the interval between the operations performed on the operating means is shorter than the predetermined period. It has the effect of increasing the motivation of the player to participate in the game.

In any of the game machines AJ1 to AJ5, the effect executing means executes the effect during a predetermined effect period, and is based on the discrimination result of the voice discriminating means at the time when the effect period elapses. The voice control means can also output the pseudo voice set by the pseudo voice setting means. A game machine AJ6 featuring.

According to the gaming machine AJ6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines AJ1 to AJ5, it is possible to output a pseudo sound based on the type of operation sound output when the production period elapses, so that the production period ends. Regardless of the type of operation sound output at that time, there is an effect that the voice output control can be terminated without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

In the gaming machine AJ6, the pseudo voice setting means sets a pseudo voice corresponding to the second operation sound when the voice discriminating means determines a type of the operation sound different from the second operation sound. A game machine AJ7 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine AJ7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AJ6, when the type of the operation sound output after the lapse of the production period is other than the second operation sound, the second operation sound is corresponded to by the pseudo voice. Since the voice is output, it is possible to unify the end voice of the voice to be output by the voice control means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player.

In the gaming machine AJ7, the discrimination means capable of executing the discrimination when the discrimination condition is satisfied, the display means for displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the identification information are predetermined to the display means. The dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the period and the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means are stopped and displayed in a specific display mode indicating that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result. The effect period is set during the dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display. The pseudo voice setting means is more than a case where the identification information dynamically displayed while the effect is being executed is stopped and displayed in the specific display mode, as compared with a case where the identification information is not stopped and displayed in the specific display mode. , A game machine AJ8 characterized by facilitating the setting of the pseudo voice.

According to the gaming machine AJ8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AJ7, the pseudo voice is performed during the dynamic display period of the identification information indicating that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result. Since it is easy to output, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the end content of the voice output by the voice control means.

<Characteristic AK group> (design voice)
The effect execution is performed on a gaming machine having an effect execution means capable of executing the effect and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player when the specific effect is executed by the effect execution means. A voice control means capable of outputting a voice corresponding to a first effect executed by the means, a voice information determining means for determining the voice information output by the voice output means from a plurality of voice information, and a voice information determining means thereof. The gaming machine AK1 comprising: a regulating means capable of regulating the type of voice information determined by the voice information determining means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. When notifying the lottery result, it has been proposed that a plurality of symbol rows are variablely displayed so that the lottery result is notified by a combination of the stopped and displayed symbols (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013). -090780 (Ab.). In addition, some of the above-mentioned gaming machines are configured to give sharpness to the effect of notifying the lottery result by outputting a sound effect when a plurality of variablely displayed symbol rows are stopped and displayed. .. However, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous due to repeated monotonous sound effects, and the player gets tired of the game. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game in which a player can be prevented from getting tired of the game at an early stage by suppressing repeated output of monotonous sound effects in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine AK1, by restricting the type of voice information determined by the voice information determining means, the type of voice information can be easily determined as intended at the time of design, and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. It has the effect of suppressing defects.

The gaming machine AK1 has a storage means capable of storing the voice information determined by the voice information determining means as history information, and the regulation means corresponds to the history information stored in the storage means. The gaming machine AK2, which regulates the type of the voice information determined by the voice information determining means.

According to the game machine AK2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine AK1, the determined voice information is stored in the storage means as history information, and the voice determined by the voice information determining means corresponding to the stored history information. By restricting the type of information, it is possible to control the voice information determined in response to the history information, and it is possible to make the type of the determined voice information suitable.

In the gaming machine AK2, the regulating means regulates that the same type as the type of the voice information stored before a predetermined number of times is determined.
According to the gaming machine AK3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AK2, it is possible to suppress the continuous determination of the same type of voice information, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the game becomes monotonous.

The gaming machine AK4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AK1 or AK2, the regulating means regulates the determination of the type of the voice information determined a specific number of times or more in a predetermined period.

According to the gaming machine AK4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines AK1 or AK2, it is possible to suppress a defect in which the same voice information type is excessively determined in a predetermined period, and it is possible to suppress a defect in which the game becomes monotonous. There is an effect.

In any of the gaming machines AK1 to AK4, the effect executed by the effect executing means includes a symbol effect in which a plurality of identification symbols are dynamically displayed, and the first effect is the plurality of identifications. Among the symbols, the gaming machine AK5 is characterized in that the identification symbol of 1 is stopped and displayed.

According to the gaming machine AK5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines AK1 to AK4, various sounds are output when the identification symbol is stopped and displayed, so that various effects when the identification symbol is stopped and displayed are output. It is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

A determination means capable of executing a determination in any of the gaming machines AK1 to AK5, and a privilege granting means capable of imparting a privilege advantageous to the player based on the determination result by the determination means being a specific determination result. The gaming machine AK6 is characterized in that the voice information determination means can determine the voice information based on the determination result by the determination means.

According to the gaming machine AK6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines AK1 to AK5, the determination result can be identified by the voice output corresponding to the first effect, so that the output voice can be identified. It has the effect of making the game interesting to the type.

The game machine AK6 has an acquisition means capable of acquiring information and an information storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the determination means is the information stored in the information storage means. The gaming machine has a pre-determination means that executes a pre-determination prior to the determination means based on the information stored in the information storage means. The gaming machine AK7 is characterized in that the voice information determining means is configured to be able to determine the voice information based on the preliminary determination result by the prior determination means.

According to the gaming machine AK7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AK6, the result of the preliminary determination can be identified by the type of the output voice, so that the type of the output voice can be interested. It has the effect of being able to do it.

<Characteristic AL group> (Image quality control)
The amount of data in at least two or more of the display information determining means for determining the display information of the display mode to be displayed by the display means from the plurality of display information and the display information determined by the display information determining means. It has a data amount discriminating means for discriminating the corresponding information, and a variable control means for variablely controlling the display mode to be displayed on the display means based on the discriminating result determined by the data amount discriminating means. A game machine AL1 characterized by being there.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. As an effect for notifying the lottery result, a display device configured to display various images and moving images has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). However, since the notice display mode is randomly displayed, there is a problem that the displayed image data becomes excessive and the addition to the display control or the like increases. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game capable of reducing a control load in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine AL1, the display mode displayed is variably controlled based on the result determined by the data amount determining means, so that the display control can be performed according to the data amount, and the control load can be reduced. It has the effect of being able to reduce it.

In the gaming machine AL1, the data amount determining means determines whether or not a specific condition is satisfied based on the total value of the information corresponding to the data amount of the display mode displayed in the predetermined first period. The gaming machine AL2 featuring.

According to the gaming machine AL2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AL1, it is determined whether or not the specific condition is satisfied based on the total value of the data amount of the display mode displayed in the predetermined first period. It is possible to suppress the problem that the control load increases in.

In the gaming machines AL1 or AL2, when the determination means capable of executing the determination, the effect executing means capable of executing the effect based on the determination result of the determination means, and the specific effect are executed by the effect executing means, It has a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to a player, and the display information determining means determines a display mode displayed in the effect executed by the effect executing means. The gaming machine AL3.

According to the gaming machine AL3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AL1 or AL2, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the effect notified by the determination result cannot be stably executed due to an increase in the amount of data.

In any of the gaming machines AL1 to AL3, the display mode displayed by the display mode determining means is such that the status information corresponding to the data amount is set as the information corresponding to the data amount. The gaming machine AL4 is characterized in that the data amount determining means determines whether or not the total value to which the status information is added is equal to or greater than a predetermined value.

According to the gaming machine AL4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines AL1 to AL3, the effect that the data amount can be easily determined by setting the status information corresponding to the data amount is set. be.

In any of the gaming machines AL1 to AL4, the variable control means corresponds to the display information determined by the display information determining means so that the total value of the data amount of the display mode displayed on the display means is reduced. The gaming machine AL5, characterized in that the display mode is variable.

According to the gaming machine AL5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines AL1 to AL4, the amount of data is suppressed, so that there is an effect that the control load can be reduced. The game machine AL5 is characterized in that the variable control means sets a display mode in which the number of pixels of the display mode corresponding to at least one display information determined by the display information determination means is reduced. Game machine AL6 to play.

According to the gaming machine AL6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AL5, the amount of data can be suppressed by setting a small number of pixels in the existing display mode, and the problem that the display data becomes excessive can be suppressed. There is.

<Characteristic AM group> (Multiple pressing effects)
A discrimination means capable of performing discrimination, a display means for displaying identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means. , The dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the identification information for showing the specific discrimination result on the display means are displayed. In this case, in a gaming machine having a privilege granting means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player, an operation that can be operated by the player as a dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. An operation dynamic display mode in which the display mode is changed by operating the means is set, and when the operation dynamic display mode is set, the validity period in which the operation of the operation means is valid is set. A valid period setting means to be set, and a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect based on the remaining period of the set valid period when the operating means is operated within the valid period. And, the gaming machine AM1 characterized by having.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. As an effect for notifying the lottery result, a method has been proposed in which the player can directly participate in the game by changing the effect by operating an operation means that can be operated by the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). However, since the method such as the timing of operating the operating means and the period of operation is not fixed depending on the player, there is a problem that the interest in executing the production is lowered. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machines to provide gaming machines that can improve the interest.

According to the gaming machine AM1, when the operating means is operated, it is possible to execute a specific effect based on the remaining period of the valid period, so that the valid period is set to be long and the game is widely played. Even if a person is configured to be able to operate the operating means, a specific effect is executed based on the remaining period of the valid period, so that various effects can be executed, and the interest of the game can be enjoyed. It has the effect of being able to improve.

In the gaming machine AM1, the suggestion mode setting means for setting the suggestion mode suggesting that the operation means is operated a plurality of times within the valid period set by the validity period setting means, and the suggestion mode setting means for setting the suggestion mode setting means. The effect period setting means for setting a predetermined effect period within the valid period for the suggestion mode corresponding to the operation of 1 and the remaining period of the effect period set by the effect period setting means. The gaming machine AM2, which comprises a notifying means capable of notifying the remaining period mode indicating the above.

According to the gaming machine AM2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AM1, the player can be made to think that the validity period is set for each of the multiple operations, so that the multiple operations can be performed. It has the effect of being able to inform you of what to do in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the gaming machine AM1 or AM2, the identification information is configured by combining a plurality of identification symbols, and the dynamic display means dynamically displays the plurality of identification symbols, respectively, to show the discrimination result. The plurality of identification symbols are stopped in combination, and the operation dynamic display mode is displayed in a specific mode by operating the operation means for at least a part of the plurality of identification symbols. When the remaining period is equal to or longer than a predetermined period as the specific effect, the specific effect executing means is configured to follow the dynamically displayed identification information. The gaming machine AM3, characterized in that it executes an effect corresponding to the information reflected in the dynamic display of the identification information at which the dynamic display is started.

According to the gaming machine AM3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AM1 or AM2, by operating the operating means so that the remaining period is equal to or longer than the predetermined period, it is reflected in the dynamic display after the dynamic display. By executing the effect to be performed, there is an effect that the operating means can be enthusiastically operated in a short period of time.

<Characteristic AN group> (Cosmo up)
An acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, a discrimination means capable of performing discrimination based on the information stored by the storage means, and a discrimination means thereof. The display means for displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result by the display means, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and the dynamic display means for the dynamic display means. When the dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information and the identification information for indicating the specific discrimination result are displayed on the display means, a privilege advantageous to the player is provided. In a gaming machine having a privilege granting means to be granted, an effect executing means capable of executing an effect during a period in which the dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed, and a specific effect executed by the effect executing means. The effect executed by the effect executing means at the start of the dynamic display of the identification information based on the specific information storage means in which the specific information based on the above is stored and the specific information stored in the specific storage means. The gaming machine AN1 characterized by having a special effect determining means for determining a special effect as at least a part of the above.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. As an effect for notifying the lottery result, it has been proposed that a advance notice effect suggesting the lottery result is executed before the lottery result is notified (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). ). However, there was a need for further improvement in interest. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machines to provide gaming machines that can improve the interest.

According to the gaming machine AN1, the special effect is determined based on the specific information stored when the specific effect is executed, so that the effect to be executed thereafter can be changed by executing the specific effect. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game by providing different games for each player.

Based on that, in the gaming machine AN1, the suggestion means for suggesting the suggestion mode corresponding to the specific information stored in the specific information storage means and the special effect determined by the special effect determination means are executed. Further, it has a suggestion mode variable means for varying the suggestion mode, and when the suggestion mode is a predetermined mode, the residual dynamic display period of the identification information is configured to be a predetermined period or longer. The gaming machine AN2, which is characterized by being a machine.

According to the gaming machine AN2, it can be determined that the identification information is not the timing to be displayed in the mode for showing the discrimination result according to the suggestion mode, and there is an effect that the problem of overlooking the discrimination result can be suppressed.

In the game machine AN1 or AN2, the effect determined by the special effect determining means, which has an operation means that can be operated by the player, is composed of an operation effect in which the effect mode is changed by operating the operation means. The gaming machine AN3 is characterized in that the number of times the operation effect is executed is set in response to the specific information stored in the specific information storage means.

According to the gaming machine AN3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AN1 or AN2, the number of times the operation effect is executed is set by the stored specific information, so that the number of times the player can operate the operating means. It has the effect of suppressing the problem of misunderstanding.

<Characteristic AO group> (3 operations)
It has an operation means that can be operated by the player and an operation effect setting means that can set an operation effect in which the effect is executed based on the operation of the operation means, and is set by the operation effect setting means. The operation effect that can be performed is set to a plurality of operation effects in which a specific operation effect is executed in response to a plurality of operations, and when the plurality of operation effects are set, the plurality of operations effects are set. The gaming machine AO1 is characterized in that the suggestion mode of the number corresponding to the number of operations set in the operation effect is displayed.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. As an effect for notifying the lottery result, a method has been proposed in which the player can directly participate in the game by changing the effect by operating an operation means that can be operated by the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). However, there is a problem that the interest is lowered in performing the production based on the operation of the operating means. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machines to provide gaming machines that can improve the interest.

According to the gaming machine AO1, when a plurality of operation effects are set, the suggestion mode of the number corresponding to the number of operations is displayed, so that an easy-to-understand game can be provided and the interest of the game can be improved. be.

In the gaming machine AO1, when the plurality of operation effects are set, the validity period setting means for setting the validity period in which the operation of the operation means is valid and the validity period set by the validity period setting means are set. The gaming machine AO2 is characterized by having a variable display means for setting a variable display mode that is variably displayed in response to a decrease in the valid period for each of the suggested modes.

According to the gaming machine AO2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AO1, the variable display mode makes it seem as if the valid period is set for each suggestion mode, and the timing of each operation is variablely displayed. It can be operated according to the embodiment, and there is an effect that the timing at which the operation effect is displayed can be optimized.

In the gaming machine AO1 or AO2, the plurality of operating effects is characterized in that the operating effects executed according to the number of times the operating means are operated are preset.

According to the gaming machine AO3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AO1 or AO2, there is no need to individually set a plurality of operation effects, and there is an effect that the control of being operated a plurality of times can be easily performed.

<Characteristic AP group> (Burst Challenge)
The operation effect can be executed based on the operation means that can be operated by the player, the validity period setting means that sets the validity period in which the operation of the operation means is effective, and the operation of the operation means within the validity period. In a gaming machine having an operation effect executing means, the information determining means for determining information corresponding to the operation effect that can be executed in the predetermined period of the valid period, and the operation means are operated within the predetermined period. The gaming machine AP1 is characterized by having an operation mode determining means for determining an mode of the operation effect to be executed based on the remaining period of the predetermined period.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. As an effect for notifying the lottery result, it has been proposed that a advance notice effect suggesting the lottery result is executed before the lottery result is notified (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). ). However, there was a need for further improvement in interest. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machines to provide gaming machines that can improve the interest.

According to the gaming machine AP1, the information corresponding to the operation effect that can be executed in the predetermined period within the valid period is determined in advance, and the mode of the operation effect is determined based on the remaining period, so that the operation means is operated. Even if there are differences in the player such as frequency and interval, the effect of improving the interest of the game by effectively using the valid period by executing the operation effect according to the player's operation and notifying the information. There is.

In the gaming machine AP1, the operation effect executing means is configured to be able to execute the operation effect each time the operation means operates within the predetermined period, and the information determination means is executed within the predetermined period. The gaming machine AP2, characterized in that the information corresponding to the mode of the final operation effect that can be performed is determined.

According to the gaming machine AP2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AP1, the final operation effect is predetermined, so that each time the operation means is operated, the process until the final operation effect is executed is enjoyed. It has the effect of being able to.

It is shown that when the specific operation effect is executed in the gaming machine AP1 or AP2, a privilege advantageous to the player is given, and the operation effect executed in the predetermined period includes the operation effect. , The process operation effect corresponding to the process until the specific operation effect is displayed is set, and the operation mode determining means is the specific operation mode when the remaining period of the predetermined period is equal to or less than the predetermined period. The gaming machine AP3 is characterized in that the operation effect is determined, and when the remaining period is equal to or longer than a predetermined period, the process operation effect corresponding to the remaining period is determined.

According to the gaming machine AP3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AP1 or AP2, the process operation effect can make the player gradually recognize that the final operation effect will be achieved, which can enhance the interest of the player. It has the effect of being able to do it.

The gaming machine AP3 has an update means for updating the effect value based on the operation of the operation means, and the update means currently sets a value for updating the effect value as the remaining period of the predetermined period. The operation mode determination means determines the mode of the operation effect corresponding to the effect value updated by the update means. The gaming machine AP4 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine AP4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AP3, the mode of the operation effect can be easily determined by the effect numerical value, and there is an effect that the control load can be reduced.

<Characteristic AQ group> (Derived from Cosmo Up)
An acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, a discrimination means capable of performing discrimination based on the information stored by the storage means, and a discrimination means thereof. The display means for displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result by the display means, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and the dynamic display means for the dynamic display means. When the dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information and the identification information for indicating the specific discrimination result are displayed on the display means, a privilege advantageous to the player is provided. In a gaming machine having a privilege granting means to be granted, an effect executing means capable of executing an effect during a period in which the dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed, and a specific effect executed by the effect executing means. A special effect is determined as at least a part of the effect executed by the effect executing means based on the specific information storage means in which the specific information based on the above is stored and the specific information stored in the specific storage means. A game machine AQ1 characterized by having a special effect determining means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. As an effect for notifying the lottery result, it has been proposed that a advance notice effect suggesting the lottery result is executed before the lottery result is notified (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). ). However, there was a need for further improvement in interest. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machines to provide gaming machines that can improve the interest.

According to the gaming machine AQ1, the special effect is determined based on the specific information stored when the specific effect is executed, so that the effect to be executed thereafter can be changed by executing the specific effect. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game by providing different games for each player.

<Characteristic AR group> (Derived from Burst Challenge)
The operation effect can be executed based on the operation means that can be operated by the player, the validity period setting means that sets the validity period in which the operation of the operation means is effective, and the operation of the operation means within the validity period. In a gaming machine having an operation effect executing means, an information determining means for determining information corresponding to the operation effect that can be executed in the valid period, and when the operation means is operated within the predetermined period, The gaming machine AR1 comprising: an operation mode determining means for determining an aspect of the operation effect to be executed based on the remaining period of the valid period.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. As an effect for notifying the lottery result, it has been proposed that a advance notice effect suggesting the lottery result is executed before the lottery result is notified (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). ). However, there was a need for further improvement in interest. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machines to provide gaming machines that can improve the interest.

According to the gaming machine AR1, the information corresponding to the operation effect that can be executed within the valid period is determined in advance, and the mode of the operation effect is determined based on the remaining period, so that the frequency and interval of operating the operation means are determined. Even if there is a difference between the players, such as, by executing the operation effect according to the player's operation and notifying the information, there is an effect that the valid period can be effectively used and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic BA group> (Gameability that is advantageous if there is no pending ream)
The first discrimination information is obtained based on the first ball entry means arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can easily enter and the game ball entering the first ball entry means. The first discrimination information acquisition means to be acquired and the first discrimination means for executing the first discrimination based on the first discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means are different from the first direction. The second discrimination information is obtained based on the second ball entry means arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can easily enter and the game ball entering the second ball entry means. The second discrimination information acquisition means to be acquired, the second discrimination means for executing the second discrimination based on the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means, and the second discrimination information acquisition means. The second discrimination information is stored up to a predetermined number of information from the acquisition of the second discrimination information to the execution of the second discrimination based on the acquired second discrimination information. A possible discrimination information storage means and a first state in which the game ball launched in the second direction is arranged at a position where it is easy to enter, and a first state in which the game ball is easy to enter, and a ball that is more difficult to enter than the first state. A variable ball-entry means that can be changed to the second state, a privilege-giving means that grants a predetermined privilege based on the ball entering the variable ball-entry means, the first discriminating means, or the first discriminating means. A variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable ball-entry means is changed to a first state a predetermined number of times based on a specific judgment result obtained by the discrimination by the second discrimination means, and a variable game execution means thereof. As a gaming state after the execution of the variable game by the means is completed, one of a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. The game state setting means includes a game state setting means for setting the game state of the above, and the game state setting means has the specific determination result by the second determination means rather than the specific determination result by the first determination means. The gaming machine BA1 is characterized in that the ratio of setting the first gaming state as the gaming state after the execution of the variable game is completed is higher.

According to the game machine BA1, the first ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can easily enter, and the game ball enters the first ball entry means. The first discrimination information is acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means. The first discrimination is executed by the first discrimination means based on the first discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means. Based on the fact that the second ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction different from the first direction can easily enter, and the game ball enters the second ball entry means. The second discrimination information is acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means. The second discrimination is executed by the second discrimination means based on the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means. The second discrimination information is stored by the discrimination information storage means from the acquisition of the second discrimination information by the second discrimination information acquisition means until the second discrimination based on the acquired second discrimination information is executed. It is stored up to a predetermined number of information. A variable ball entry means that can be changed between the first state where the game ball is easy to enter and the second state where it is more difficult to enter than the first state, the game ball launched in the second direction enters the ball It is located in a position that is easy to do. A predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means based on the fact that the game ball enters the variable ball entering means. A variable game in which the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state a predetermined number of times is executed by the variable game execution means based on the fact that the determination by the first determination means or the second determination means results in a specific determination. .. As a game state after the execution of the variable game by the variable game execution means is completed, among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. The game state of 1 to 1 is set by the game state setting means. The first game state as the game state after the execution of the variable game is completed by the game state setting means when the specific judgment result is obtained by the second judgment means rather than the specific judgment result by the first judgment means. The ratio of setting is high.

As a result, when the game ball is launched in the second direction in order to obtain a predetermined privilege during the execution of the variable game, the game ball enters the second ball entry means and the second discrimination information is stored. .. When a specific discrimination result is obtained by the second discrimination based on the second discrimination information, the ratio of being set to the first gaming state, which has a lower advantage than the second gaming state, is high, so that it is stored during the execution of the variable game. In the second discrimination based on the second discrimination information, the player can be made to play the game with the expectation that a specific discrimination result will not be obtained. Therefore, there is an effect that a novel playability can be realized.

In the gaming machine BA1, as the variable pattern of the variable ball entry means, at least a plurality of first variable patterns and a second variable pattern in which the game ball is more difficult to enter the variable ball entry means than the first variable pattern. The variable pattern setting means is provided with the variable pattern setting means for setting any of the variable patterns of the above, and the variable pattern setting means is said to be more than the second variable pattern when the specific determination result is obtained by the discrimination by the first discrimination means. The ratio of setting the first variable pattern becomes high, and when the specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the second discriminating means, the ratio of setting the second variable pattern becomes higher than that of the first variable pattern. A gaming machine BA2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine BA2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BA1. That is, as the variable pattern of the variable ball entry means, any of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which the game ball is more difficult to enter the variable ball entry means than the first variable pattern. Is set by the variable pattern setting means. When a specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the first discrimination means, the ratio of setting the first variable pattern by the variable pattern setting means is higher than that of the second variable pattern. On the other hand, when a specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the second discrimination means, the ratio of setting the second variable pattern by the variable pattern setting means is higher than that of the first variable pattern.

As a result, when a specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the second discrimination means, it becomes easy to set the second variable pattern in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the variable entry means. Therefore, the variable game is being executed. The second discrimination based on the second discrimination information stored in the above has an effect that it is possible to make a stronger expectation that a specific discrimination result is not obtained.

In the gaming machines BA1 or BA2, based on the start of the variable game, the variable pattern of the variable ball entry means is a first variable pattern and a game ball in the variable ball entry means rather than the first variable pattern. The pachinko ball is provided with a variable pattern setting means for setting at least one of a plurality of variable patterns including a second variable pattern in which the ball is difficult to enter, and the gaming ball is in the period from the start to the end of the first variable pattern. When it continues to be launched in the second direction, it is configured to have a period at least longer than the period until the second discrimination information of the predetermined number of information is acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means. The gaming machine BA3 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine BA3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines BA1 or BA2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the start of the variable game, as the variable pattern of the variable ball entry means, the first variable pattern and the second variable in which the game ball is harder to enter the variable ball entry means than the first variable pattern. Any of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a pattern is set by the variable pattern setting means. During the period from the start to the end of the first variable pattern, when the game ball continues to be launched in the second direction, the second discrimination information acquisition means acquires a predetermined number of second discrimination information. It consists of at least a longer period than the period until the information is reached.

As a result, when the player keeps firing the game ball in the second direction in order to obtain a predetermined privilege during the execution of the variable game in which the first variable pattern is set, the second is at least a predetermined number of information or more. Discrimination information is acquired. Therefore, after the end of the variable game, the second determination of the upper limit number of times is executed each time. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to play the game with the expectation that all the second determinations of the upper limit number of times do not result in a specific determination result.

In any of the gaming machines BA1 to BA3, the second discrimination by the second discriminating means is executed with priority over the first discriminating by the first discriminating means. Gaming machine BA4.

According to the gaming machine BA4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines BA1 to BA3, the second discrimination by the second discriminating means is executed with priority over the first discriminating by the first discriminating means. Even if the gaming ball enters the first ball entry means in a state where the second discrimination information is stored in the discrimination information storage means, it is possible to suppress the execution of the first discrimination. Therefore, there is an effect that attention can be drawn by the second discrimination.

In any of the gaming machines BA1 to BA4, the gaming ball launched in the second direction is arranged at a reachable position, and the reached gaming ball is passed to the first flow path provided with the second ball entry means. The gaming machine BA5 is provided with a distribution means for distributing the ball to the second flow path provided with the variable ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine BA5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines BA1 to BA4, a first flow path provided with a second ball entry means and a second flow path provided with a variable ball entry means. Since the distribution means for distributing the game balls is arranged at a position where the game balls launched in the second direction can be reached, the flow direction of the game balls launched in the second direction is biased. It has the effect of being able to prevent it.

In the gaming machine BA5, the gaming machine BA6 is characterized in that the distribution means alternately distributes game balls to the first flow path and the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine BA6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BA5, the gaming balls are alternately distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path by the distribution means, so that the game is played during the execution of the variable game. The ball can be alternately entered into the second entry means and the variable entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game ball launched in the second direction from entering the second ball entry means or the variable entry means in a biased manner.

In any of the game machines BA1 to BA6, the game ball enters the first position where the game ball can easily enter the first ball entry means, and the game ball enters the first ball entry means as compared with the first position. A variable means that can be changed to a second position that makes it difficult to play a ball and a variable control means that controls the variable operation of the variable means are provided. It is difficult to change to one position, and the second gaming state is characterized in that the variable means is more likely to be changed to the first position by the variable control means as compared with the first gaming state. Game machine BA7.

According to the gaming machine BA7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines BA1 to BA6, the first position at which the gaming ball can easily enter the first ball entry means and the first position compared to the first position. The variable means is variable to the second position where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means. The variable operation of the variable means is controlled by the variable control means. In the first gaming state, the variable means is less likely to be changed to the first position by the variable control means, and in the second gaming state, the variable means is more likely to be changed to the first position by the variable control means than in the first gaming state. ..

As a result, in the first game state, the variable means can be easily changed to the first position, so that the game ball can easily enter the first ball entry means. Therefore, in the first gaming state, the game can be played more efficiently, so that there is an effect that the game can be played with the expectation that the first gaming state will be reached.

In any of the gaming machines BA1 to BA7, in the first gaming state, the probability that the specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the first discrimination means and the second discrimination means is set as the first probability. In the second gaming state, the probability that the specific discrimination result will be obtained by the discrimination by the first discrimination means and the second discrimination means is set to a second probability lower than the first probability. A gaming machine BA8 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine BA8, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines BA1 to BA7, the following effects are played. That is, in the first gaming state, the probability that a specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the first discrimination means and the second discrimination means is set as the first probability. On the other hand, in the second gaming state, the probability that a specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the first discrimination means and the second discrimination means is set to the second probability lower than the first probability.

As a result, in the first game state, the probability that a specific determination result will be obtained is higher than in the second game state, so that the variable game can be easily executed again with a relatively small number of determinations after the variable game is completed. Therefore, in the first gaming state, it is expected that more predetermined benefits will be acquired in a relatively short period of time, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic BB group> (Perform a specific effect using the ending period of the jackpot and the pending digestion period)
A discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, a privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means, and a privilege thereof. A plurality of games including at least a first game state and a second game state in which the player has a higher degree of advantage than the first game state, as the game state after the execution of the privileged game by the game execution means is completed. A game state setting means for setting one game state from among the states, a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means, and predetermined during execution of the privilege game. Based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied, the period until the end of the privilege game and the period until the dynamic display of one or more of the identification information executed after the end of the privilege game ends. The specific effect is provided with a specific effect execution means for executing the specific effect, and the specific effect is an effect capable of suggesting to the player whether or not the gaming state after the specific effect is completed is the second gaming state. The gaming machine BB1 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine BB1, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the privilege game is executed in favor of the player based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a specific discrimination result. Performed by means. A plurality of games including at least a first game state and a second game state in which the player has a higher degree of advantage than the first game state as the game state after the execution of the privilege game by the privilege game execution means is completed. One of the gaming states is set by the gaming state setting means. The identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means. Dynamic display of one or more identification information executed after the end of the award game and the period until the end of the award game based on the fact that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the award game. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means in the period until the end of. The specific effect is composed of an effect that can suggest to the player whether or not the game state after the end of the specific effect is the second game state.

As a result, the specific effect can be executed over the period from the establishment of the specific condition to the end of the dynamic display of one or more identification information, and thus the period until the end of the privilege game. Or, there is an effect that the degree of freedom of the specific effect can be improved as compared with the case where the specific effect is executed in the dynamic display time in the dynamic display of the identification information of 1.

In the gaming machine BB1, the specific effect executing means is based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied when the gaming state after the execution of the privileged game is set to the second gaming state. The gaming machine BB2, which is characterized by executing the above.

According to the gaming machine BB2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BB1, when the gaming state after the execution of the privilege game is completed is set to the second gaming state, the specific effect is based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied. Is executed by the specific effect executing means, so that the second game state is suggested in the specific effect unless a specific determination result is obtained and the state shifts to the first game state during the execution of the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that a specific determination result will not be obtained during the execution of the specific effect.

In the game machine BB1 or BB2, the discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the discrimination means and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means are obtained by the discrimination information acquisition means based on a predetermined specific opportunity. Until the discrimination condition for the acquired discrimination information is satisfied, the discrimination information storage means that can store up to a predetermined number of information and the discrimination information storage means based on the satisfaction of the specific condition are stored. Based on the determination means for determining whether or not the discrimination information corresponding to the specific discrimination result is included in the discrimination information, and the determination result by the determination means, the effect mode of the specific effect is determined. The gaming machine BB3 is provided with an effect mode determining means, and the specific effect executing means is for executing a specific effect of the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means.

According to the gaming machine BB3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BB1 or BB2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on a predetermined specific opportunity, the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is the discrimination for the acquired discrimination information. Until the condition is satisfied, the information is stored by the discriminant information storage means up to a predetermined number of information. Based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied, the determination means determines whether or not the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means includes the discrimination information corresponding to the specific discrimination result. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the effect mode of the specific effect is determined by the effect mode determining means. The specific effect of the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means is executed by the specific effect execution means.

As a result, since the discrimination result by the discrimination means can be determined in advance, there is an effect that it is possible to set an effect mode according to the result of the determination actually executed by the discrimination means.

In the game machine BB3, as the types of the privilege games executed by the privilege game execution means, the first privilege game in which the game state after the execution is completed is set to the first game state by the game state setting means, and The determination means is provided with a type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types of award games including at least a second privilege game in which the game state after the execution is completed is set to the second game state. Is to determine whether the discrimination information corresponding to the first privilege game is included in the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means, and the effect mode determining means is the determination. Based on the determination that the determination information corresponding to the first privilege game is included by the means, an effect mode suggesting that the game state after the specific effect is completed is the first game state. A gaming machine BB4 characterized by being determined.

According to the gaming machine BB4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BB3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the types of privilege games executed by the privilege game execution means, the first privilege game in which the game state after the execution is completed is set to the first game state by the game state setting means, and the first privilege game after the execution is completed. One type is determined by the type determining means from a plurality of types of privilege games including at least a second privilege game in which the game state is set to the second game state. It is determined by the determination means whether or not the discrimination information corresponding to the first privilege game is included in the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means. Based on the determination by the determination means that the determination information corresponding to the first privilege game is included, the effect mode suggesting that the game state after the end of the specific effect is the first game state is produced. It is determined by the mode determining means.

As a result, it is possible to provide a novel game property in which the game is performed with the expectation that the first privilege game is not included. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines BB1 to BB4, the specific effect is characterized in that a predetermined specific period is set as the effect period regardless of the effect mode.

According to the gaming machine BB5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines BB1 to BB4, a predetermined specific period is set as the production period of the specific production regardless of the production mode, so that the production period is long. Therefore, it becomes difficult to predict the result of the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can pay attention to the result of the specific effect until the end.

In the gaming machine BB5, the display means for displaying the identification information, the dynamic display execution means for executing the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the dynamic display execution means executed by the dynamic display execution means. The dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information is provided based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the specific period is the privilege game after the specific condition is satisfied. Is determined by the dynamic display period determining means when the period until the end of the process and the determination by the discrimination means for a predetermined specific number of times are all different from the specific discrimination result. The gaming machine BB6, which is the sum of the dynamic display period for a specific number of times.

According to the gaming machine BB6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BB5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the identification information is displayed on the display means. The dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means. The dynamic display time in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is determined by the dynamic display period determining means based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means. The dynamic display period is determined when the period from the establishment of the specific condition to the end of the award game and the discrimination by the predetermined number of discrimination means are all different from the specific discrimination result. The sum of the dynamic display period for a specific number of times determined by the means is set as the specific period.

As a result, the specific effect can be ended at the timing when the dynamic display of the identification information for a specific number of times is completed, so that there is an effect that the specific effect can be ended clearly.

In the gaming machine BB6, after the end of the privilege game, the dynamic display period determination means is at least until the end of the specific period when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination means within the specific number of times. The gaming machine BB7 is characterized in that a period equal to or longer than the remaining period of the above is determined as the dynamic display period.

According to the gaming machine BB7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BB6, if a specific discrimination result is obtained by discrimination by a discrimination means within a specific number of times after the end of the privilege game, at least the remaining until the end of the specific period. Since the period longer than the period is determined as the dynamic display period by the dynamic display period determining means, if a specific determination result is obtained by the determination within a specific number of times, the award game is performed before the end of the specific period. Can be suppressed from being started. Therefore, by starting the privilege game before the end of the specific effect, it is possible to prevent the result of the specific effect from being known in advance, so that there is an effect that the specific effect can be more noticed.

In any of the gaming machines BB1 to BB7, an expectation degree suggestion effect executing means for executing an effect indicating an expectation degree for the second game state to be suggested by the specific effect is provided during the execution of the privilege game. BB8, a gaming machine characterized by.

According to the gaming machine BB8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines BB1 to BB7, an effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the second gaming state is suggested by the specific effect during the execution of the privilege game is the expected degree suggestion effect execution means. Since it is executed by, it is possible to give the player the impression that the effect mode during the execution of the privilege game and the specific effect are a series of effects. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game during the execution of the privilege game can be improved.

<Characteristic BC group> (It is difficult to determine from the attacker's operation whether or not a hold ream occurs)
A privileged ball entry means in which a predetermined privilege is given based on the entry of a game ball, a first position in which the game ball can enter the privilege entry means, and a game from the first position. Based on the variable means that changes to the second position where the ball is difficult to enter, the discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the discrimination by the discrimination means that the first discrimination result is obtained. Based on the fact that the first variable control means for controlling the variable means to be variable in the first variable mode and the second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result in the discrimination by the discrimination means. Then, based on the gaming state setting means capable of setting a gaming state different from the gaming state at the time when the discrimination is executed and the second discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means, the specified number of times In the second variable mode, which includes at least a specific variable mode having an appearance that is difficult to distinguish from the first variable mode of the specific number of times, which is executed when all the discrimination by the discriminating means results in the first discriminating result. The gaming machine BC1 comprising: a second variable control means for controlling the variable means to be variable.

According to the gaming machine BC1, a predetermined privilege is given by the privilege entering means based on the entry of the gaming ball, and the first position where the gaming ball can enter the privilege entering means and its position. The variable means is variable to the second position where the gaming ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. The first variable control means is such that the variable means is variable in the first variable mode based on the fact that the discrimination is executed by the discriminant means based on the establishment of the discriminant condition and the discriminant result is a specific discriminant result. Controlled by. Based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means results in the second discrimination result, it is distinguished from the first variable mode of the specific number of times executed when all the discriminations by the discrimination means of the specific number of times result in the first discrimination result. In the second variable mode, which includes at least a specific variable mode having a difficult appearance, the variable means is controlled to be variable by the second variable control means.

As a result, it becomes difficult to distinguish whether the first discrimination result is obtained or the second discrimination result is obtained from the variable mode of the variable means. Therefore, it is determined whether or not different gaming states are set. It has the effect of making it difficult for a person to identify.

In the gaming machine BC1, the gaming state setting means can set one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the first gaming state. When the second discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means, the ratio of setting the second gaming state is set higher than the ratio of setting the first gaming state. A gaming machine BC2 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine BC2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BC1. That is, one gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means from a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the first gaming state. When the second determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination means, the rate at which the second game state is set by the game state setting means is set higher than the rate at which the first game state is set.

As a result, when the second determination result is obtained, the disadvantageous second gaming state is likely to be set, so that there is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the first determination result will be obtained.

The gaming machine BC3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine BC1 or BC2, the ratio of the first discrimination result in the discrimination by the discrimination means is set higher than the ratio of the other discrimination results.

According to the gaming machine BC3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BC1 or BC2, the ratio of the first discrimination result in the discrimination by the discrimination means is set higher than the ratio of the other discrimination results. There is a high possibility that the first determination result will be continuously obtained over the number of times. Therefore, even when the variable means is controlled in the second variable mode as the second determination result, it can be made to think that the first determination result may be continuous over a specific number of times. Therefore, there is an effect that it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not different gaming states are set.

In any of the gaming machines BC1 to BC3, the discriminating means executes discrimination when either the first discriminating condition or the second discriminating condition different from the first discriminating condition is satisfied. When the second discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition, the gaming state setting means is set at a high rate of setting the first gaming state, and the second discrimination condition is set. A gaming machine characterized in that when the second determination result is obtained by the determination based on the establishment, the ratio of setting the second gaming state, which is more disadvantageous than the first gaming state, is set. BC4.

According to the gaming machine BC4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines BC1 to BC3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when either the first discrimination condition or the second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition is satisfied, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means. When the second determination result is obtained by the determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition, the rate at which the first game state is set by the game state setting means is set high. On the other hand, when the second determination result is obtained by the determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition, the ratio of setting the second gaming state which is more disadvantageous than the first gaming state is set.

As a result, when the second discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition, the first gaming state having a higher degree of advantage than the second gaming state is likely to be set, so that the first discrimination condition is set. The game can be played with the expectation that it will be established. Therefore, when the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed, there is an effect that the type of the discrimination condition that triggered the execution of the discrimination can be focused on.

In the gaming machine BC4, when the discrimination by the discriminating means results in the second discriminating result and the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the privilege ball entering means is used rather than the second variable mode. A gaming machine BC5 comprising a third variable control means for controlling the variable means to be variable in a third variable mode in which a gaming ball is easy to enter.

According to the gaming machine BC5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BC4, the discrimination by the discriminating means results in the second discriminating result, and when the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the second variable mode is used. Since the third variable control means controls the variable means so that the variable means is variable in the third variable mode in which the gaming ball is easily entered into the privileged ball entry means, the second determination is made based on the establishment of the first determination condition. The degree of advantage when the result is obtained can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to play the game in the expectation that the first determination condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machines BC4 or BC5, the first ball-entry means arranged at a position where the gaming ball launched in the first direction can easily enter, and the gaming ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction. A second ball-entry means arranged at a position where it is easy to enter the ball is provided, and the first determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball enters the first ball-entry means. The second determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means, and the privilege entry means has the game ball launched in the second direction. A gaming machine BC6 characterized in that it is provided at a position where it is easy to ball.

According to the gaming machine BC6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BC4 or BC5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, while the first ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can easily enter, the second ball is located at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can easily enter. A ball entry means and a privilege ball entry means are provided. The first determination condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the first entry means, whereas the second determination condition is established based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. Is established.

As a result, when the privilege entry means is changed to the first position and the game is launched in the second direction in an attempt to obtain a predetermined privilege, the game ball enters the second entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to form a state in which discrimination based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition is easily executed after the privilege ball entry means is changed to the first position.

In the gaming machine BC6, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means, it is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the discrimination means and the discrimination information acquisition means. The gaming machine BC7 is provided with a discrimination information storage means that can store the discrimination information at least until the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed, up to a predetermined number of information.

According to the gaming machine BC7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BC6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means, the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is obtained. Up to a predetermined number of information, it is stored at least by the discrimination information storage means until the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed.

As a result, when the ball entering the second ball entry means is detected in a situation where the discrimination by the discrimination means cannot be started, the discrimination information used for the discrimination can be stored by the discrimination information storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the wasteful entry of the ball to the second entry means.

In any of the gaming machines BC4 to BC7, the determination executed based on the establishment of the second determination condition is prioritized over the determination executed based on the establishment of the first determination condition. A gaming machine BC8 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine BC8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines BC4 to BC7, the discrimination executed based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition is based on the discrimination executed based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition. Is executed with priority, so that when the discrimination based on the satisfaction of the second discrimination condition is executed, it is possible to pay attention to the result of the discrimination.

<Characteristic BD group> (Structure in which special 2 start prizes are likely to occur during big hits and are unlikely to occur during normal times)
The first discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition, the second discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition, and the first discrimination. A privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game advantageous to the player based on the means or the discrimination by the second discriminating means, and the privileged game executed by the privileged game executing means. As the type of, the type determination of one privilege game is determined from a plurality of types including at least the first privilege game and the second privilege game having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first privilege game. Based on the means and the discrimination by the first discrimination means or the second discrimination means, a specific discrimination result is set, and the first state in which the second discrimination condition is easily satisfied is set, and the privilege game is performed. Based on the fact that the end condition is satisfied, the second state is provided with a state setting means for setting a second state in which the second determination condition is less likely to be satisfied as compared with the first state, and the type determination means is the second state. It can be seen that the rate of determining the second privilege game is higher when the determination by the first discrimination means results in the specific discrimination result than when the discrimination by the discrimination means results in the specific discrimination result. Characterized gaming machine BD1.

According to the gaming machine BD1, the discrimination is executed by the first discrimination means based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition, and the discrimination is executed by the second discrimination means based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition. Will be done. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the scoring game executing means based on the fact that the determination by the first determination means or the second determination means yields a specific determination result. As the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, there are at least a plurality of types including the first privilege game and the second privilege game having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first privilege game. The type of privilege game 1 is determined by the determination means. The state setting means sets a first state in which the second discrimination condition is likely to be satisfied, based on the fact that the discrimination by the first discrimination means or the second discrimination means yields a specific discrimination result. On the other hand, based on the fact that the end condition of the privilege game is satisfied, the second state in which the second determination condition is less likely to be satisfied as compared with the first state is set by the state setting means. The type determination means is such that the ratio of determining the second privilege game is higher when the determination by the first discrimination means results in a specific discrimination result than when the discrimination by the second discrimination means results in a specific discrimination result. It is configured.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the second determination condition from being satisfied in a state other than the execution of the privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that the opportunity for the first privilege game having a low degree of advantage to be executed can be limited.

In the gaming machine BD1, the discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring the discrimination information to be used for the discrimination by the second discrimination means based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means. BD2 is a gaming machine BD2 comprising: a discrimination information storage means for storing a predetermined number of information as an upper limit until it is used for discrimination by the second discrimination means.

According to the gaming machine BD2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BD1. That is, based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition, the discrimination information to be used for the discrimination by the second discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means. The discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is stored by the discrimination information storage means up to a predetermined number of information until it is used for the discrimination by the second discrimination means.

As a result, when the second discrimination condition is satisfied a plurality of times before the discrimination by the second discrimination means is executed, the plurality of discrimination information acquired according to the satisfaction of the second discrimination condition for the plurality of times is satisfied. Is stored by the discrimination information storage means, so that there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the discrimination is not executed even though the second discrimination condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machine BD2, the second discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means during the execution of the privilege game, and based on the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means, after the end of the privilege game. The gaming machine BD3, which is characterized by performing discrimination.

According to the gaming machine BD3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BD2, the privilege is obtained by the second discrimination means based on the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means during the execution of the privilege game and stored in the discrimination information storage means. Since the determination is executed after the end of the game, the opportunity for the determination by the second determination means to be executed can be concentrated after the end of the privileged game. Therefore, after the end of the privileged game, the game can be performed with the expectation that the discrimination by the second discrimination means will not result in a specific discrimination result. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines BD1 to BD3, the entry means in which the second determination condition is satisfied based on the entry of the gaming ball, and the first position in which the gaming ball is difficult to enter into the entry means. , The variable means that can be changed to a second position that makes it easier for the gaming ball to enter than the first position, and the variable means from the first position to the first position based on the establishment of a specific determination condition. The variable means is variable to the second position based on the specific determination means for determining whether to change to two positions and the determination by the specific determination means to change from the first position to the second position. The variable control means is provided with a variable control means for controlling such as the above, and the variable control means is the specific determination means in the second state rather than the case where the specific determination means is determined to change the variable means in the second state. The gaming machine BD4 is characterized in that when it is determined that the variable means is variable, the variable means is controlled so that the period during which the variable means is variable to the second position is longer.

According to the gaming machine BD4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines BD1 to BD3, the following effects are played. That is, the first position where the game ball is difficult to enter into the ball entry means where the second determination condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball, and the game ball is easier to enter than the first position. The variable means is variable to the second position. Based on the fact that the specific determination condition is satisfied, the specific determination means determines whether to change the variable means from the first position to the second position. Based on the determination that the variable means is variable from the first position to the second position by the specific determination means, the variable control means is controlled so that the variable means is variable to the second position. When it is determined that the variable means is variable by the specific discriminant means in the second state, the variable means is in the second position than when it is determined that the variable means is variable by the specific discriminant means in the second state. It is controlled by the variable control means so that the variable period becomes long.

As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry means in the first state than in the second state. Therefore, in the first state, there is an effect that the second discrimination condition can be more easily satisfied than in the second state.

In any of the gaming machines BD1 to BD4, the entry means in which the second determination condition is satisfied based on the entry of the gaming ball, and the first position in which the gaming ball is difficult to enter into the entry means. , The variable means that can be changed to a second position that makes it easier for the gaming ball to enter than the first position, and the variable means from the first position to the first position based on the establishment of a specific determination condition. The variable means is variable to the second position based on the specific determination means for determining whether to change to two positions and the determination by the specific determination means to change from the first position to the second position. In the first state, the period from the start to the end of the discrimination of 1 by the specific discrimination means tends to be shorter than in the second state. A gaming machine BD5 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine BD5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines BD1 to BD4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first position where the game ball is difficult to enter into the ball entry means where the second determination condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball, and the game ball is easier to enter than the first position. The variable means is variable to the second position. Based on the fact that the specific determination condition is satisfied, the specific determination means determines whether to change the variable means from the first position to the second position. Based on the determination that the variable means is variable from the first position to the second position by the specific determination means, the variable control means is controlled so that the variable means is variable to the second position. The first state is configured such that the period from the start to the end of the determination of 1 by the specific determination means is more likely to be shorter in the first state than in the second state.

As a result, in the first state, the period required for the specific discrimination means to perform the same number of discriminations is shorter than in the second state. Therefore, since the variable means can be changed to the second position more times, there is an effect that the game ball can be easily entered in the first state.

In any of the game machines BD1 to BD3, the ball entry means provided in the specific flow path and the second determination condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball, and the game ball is difficult to flow down the specific flow path. An opening / closing means that can be changed between a closed state that closes so as to be closed and an open state that allows the game ball to flow down, and the opening / closing means thereof are set to the open state based on the first state. BD6 is a gaming machine provided with an opening / closing control means for setting the closed state based on the second state.

According to the gaming machine BD6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines BD1 to BD3, the following effects are played. That is, a ball entry means for satisfying the second determination condition based on the entry of the game ball is provided in the specific flow path. The opening / closing means is changed between a closed state in which the specific flow path is closed so that the game ball is difficult to flow down and an open state in which the game ball can flow down. The opening / closing means is set to the open state by the opening / closing control means based on the first state, while the opening / closing means is set to the closed state by the opening / closing control means based on the second state. ..

This has the effect of more reliably preventing the second determination condition from being satisfied in the second state.

The gaming machine BD6 is characterized in that, when the opening / closing means is set to the closed state, a specific number of gaming balls can be stopped on the upstream side of the opening / closing means. Machine BD7.

According to the gaming machine BD7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BD6, when the opening / closing means is set to the closed state, a specific number of gaming balls can be stopped on the upstream side of the opening / closing means. Therefore, when the open state is set, the stopped game ball can be entered into the ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the second determination condition can be more easily satisfied in the first state in which the open state is set.

<Characteristic BE group> (The fluctuation pattern command from the main to the sub includes information according to the remaining number of fluctuations until the end of the specific effect)
In a gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying an effect mode, a main control means for performing main control regarding the game, and a secondary control means for controlling the game based on a command output from the main control means. , The main control means executes a discriminant means that executes a discriminant based on the establishment of a discriminant condition, and a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the discriminant result by the discriminant means becomes a specific discriminant result. The operation in the dynamic display of the privilege game executing means, the dynamic display executing means for executing the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means, and the dynamic display executing means. The dynamic display time determining means for determining the target display time, the information corresponding to the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means, and the specific information different from the information corresponding to the dynamic display time. The subordinate control means includes a command output means for outputting a dynamic display time command including at least information to the subordinate control means, and the subordinate control means receives the dynamic display time command output by the command output means. Based on the command receiving means for specifying the dynamic display time command received by the command receiving means, the dynamic display time specifying means for specifying the dynamic display time and the predetermined specific conditions are satisfied. Based on this, the specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect that can be executed over the one or more dynamic display times in the display means, and the specific information included in the dynamic display time command. Based on this, the specific effect end determination means for determining whether or not to end the specific effect and the specific effect end determination means determined to end the specific effect were used for the determination. It is characterized by comprising a specific effect ending means for terminating the specific effect before the end of the dynamic display time specified by the dynamic display time specifying means based on the dynamic display time command. Game machine BE1 to play.

According to the gaming machine BE1, in the main control means, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the discrimination result by the discrimination means becomes a specific discrimination result, which is advantageous to the player. The privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. The dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means. The dynamic display time in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is determined by the dynamic display time determining means. A dynamic display time command that includes at least information corresponding to the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means and specific information different from the information corresponding to the dynamic display time is generated by the command output means. It is output to the slave control means. In the subordinate control means, the dynamic display time is dynamic based on the fact that the dynamic display time command output by the command output means is received by the command receiving means and the dynamic display time command is received by the command receiving means. Display time is specified by the means. Based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition, a specific effect that can be executed over one or a plurality of dynamic display times is executed by the specific effect executing means in the display means. Based on the specific information included in the dynamic display time command, whether or not to end the specific effect is determined by the specific effect end determination means. Dynamic display time based on the dynamic display time command used for the determination triggered by the determination that the specific effect is to be terminated by the specific effect end determination means, the dynamic display time specified by the specific effect end determination means ends. In the meantime, the specific production is completed by the specific production main hot water amount means.

This has the effect that the specific effect can be suitably terminated.

In the gaming machine BE1, when it is determined by the specific effect end determination means that the specific effect is to be terminated, the specific effect is specified based on the information according to the determination result by the determination means included in the dynamic display time command. The gaming machine BE2 is provided with an effect mode determining means for determining an effect mode until the specific effect is ended by the effect end means.

According to the gaming machine BE2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BE1, when it is determined that the specific effect is to be terminated by the specific effect end determination means, it corresponds to the determination result by the determination means included in the dynamic display time command. Based on the information, the effect mode until the specific effect is ended by the specific effect end means is determined by the effect mode determining means, so that the effect mode can be determined in consideration of the determination result by the discriminating means. .. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect mode of the specific effect can be preferably set.

In the gaming machine BE1 or BE2, the slave control means is included in the dynamic display time command when the power-on determination means for determining the power-on to the gaming machine and the power-on determination means are determined by the power-on determination means. Based on the specific information obtained, the special effect is executed by the cutoff determination means for determining whether or not the time when the power of the gaming machine is cut off was during the execution of the specific effect, and the cutoff time determination means. The gaming machine BE3 is provided with a post-input effect executing means for executing the specific effect based on the determination that the specific effect is inside.

According to the gaming machine BE3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BE1 or BE2, when the power supply to the gaming machine is determined by the power-on determination means and the power-on is determined by the power-on determination means in the slave control means. In addition, based on the specific information included in the dynamic display time command, it is determined by the shutoff time determination means whether or not the time when the power of the gaming machine is cut off is during the execution of the specific effect. Based on the determination that the specific effect was being executed by the cutoff determination means, the specific effect is executed by the post-input effect execution means.

As a result, even if the power is cut off during the execution of the specific effect, the specific effect can be restarted, so that the effect mode differs before and after the power is cut off, which suppresses the player from being confused. It has the effect of being able to.

The gaming machine BE4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine BE3, the specific effect ending means ends the specific effect executed by the effect executing means after the input.

According to the gaming machine BE4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BE3, the specific effect executed by the effect executing means after the input is terminated by the specific effect ending means, so that the power of the gaming machine is turned on during the execution of the specific effect. Even when it is blocked, there is an effect that the specific effect can be suitably ended.

The gaming machine BE5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine BE4, the specific effect executing means sets a predetermined specific period as the effect period of the specific effect.

According to the gaming machine BE4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BE5, a specific period predetermined by the specific effect executing means is set as the effect period of the specific effect, so that a simple process is required when setting the specific effect. There is an effect that it can be set with.

In any of the game machines BE1 to BE5, the main control means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the discrimination means and the discrimination information acquisition means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. The discriminant information storage means is provided with discriminant information storage means that can store the discriminated information at least until it is used for discrimination by the discriminant means, up to a predetermined number of information, and the command output means stores the discriminant information in the discriminant information storage means. An information number command including information corresponding to the number of information of the discrimination information is output to the slave control means, and the specific effect executing means is the discrimination information included in the information number command. The gaming machine BE6 is characterized in that the specific effect is executed over the dynamic display of the identification information a number of times equal to or less than the number of information.

According to the gaming machine BE6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines BE1 to BE5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the main control means, the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. The discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is stored in at least the discrimination information storage means until it is used for the discrimination by the discrimination means, up to a predetermined number of information. The information number command including the information corresponding to the number of information of the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is output to the slave control means by the command output means. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means over the dynamic display of the identification information a number of times equal to or less than the number of information of the discrimination information included in the number of information commands.

As a result, the specific effect can be executed within the range of the number of information of the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means or less, so that the specific effect can be specified even though the dynamic display of the discrimination information is not executed. It has the effect of suppressing the continuation of the production.

In the game machine BE6, the information according to the number of information of the discrimination information is obtained from the time when the specific condition is satisfied until all the discrimination based on the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is completed. The gaming machine BE7 is characterized in that it is composed of information corresponding to the number of information of the remaining discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means.

According to the game machine BE7, in addition to the effect of the game machine BE6, all the discrimination based on the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means after the specific condition is satisfied, the information according to the number of information of the discrimination information is satisfied. Is composed of information according to the number of remaining discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means until the end of the process, so that the specific effect is more reliably stored in the discrimination information storage means. There is an effect that it can be executed within the range of the number of information of the discrimination information or less.

<Characteristic BF group> (The ease with which the special drawing lottery on the disadvantaged side can be executed is changed according to the winning symbol)
The first discrimination information is obtained based on the first ball entry means arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can easily enter and the game ball entering the first ball entry means. What is the first discrimination means for executing the first discrimination using the first discrimination information acquisition means to be acquired and the first discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means, and the first direction? Second discrimination information based on the second ball entry means arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a different second direction can easily enter, and the game ball entering the second ball entry means. The second discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring the above and the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means are used to determine a second discrimination that tends to result in a more disadvantageous discrimination result than the first discrimination. A discriminant information storage means that can store the second discriminating means to be executed and the second discriminating information acquired by the second discriminating information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of information, the first discriminating means, or the first discriminating means. As a type of privileged game execution means for executing a privileged game advantageous to the player and a privileged game executed by the privileged game executing means based on the determination by the second discrimination means. The first privilege game in which it is more likely to be advantageous to launch the game ball in the first direction than in the second direction at least for a predetermined period, and the game ball in the second direction rather than the first direction in the predetermined period. The gaming machine BF1 is provided with a type determining means for determining the type of the privileged game 1 from a plurality of types including the second privileged game which is more likely to be launched.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning result, the game shifts to a winning state. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest of winning by differentiating the game values that can be acquired (for example). , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 25144417). In addition, some conventional gaming machines are advantageous by replacing or in addition to the number of rounds, by differently giving different game states after hitting, or by differently different numbers of prize balls that can be obtained in each round. Some have different degrees. However, it has been required to further increase the difference in the degree of advantage according to the hit type.

On the other hand, according to the game machine BF1, the first ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can easily enter. The first discrimination information is acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means, and the first discrimination information acquired by the first information acquisition means is used. , The first determination is executed by the first determination means. The second ball entry means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction can easily enter. The second discrimination information is acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means. Using the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means, the second discrimination means is executed by the second discrimination means, which tends to give a more disadvantageous discrimination result than the first discrimination. The second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means is stored in the discrimination information storage means up to a predetermined number of information. Based on the determination result obtained by the first determination means or the second determination means, the privilege game execution means executes the privilege game advantageous to the player. As the types of privilege games executed by the privilege game execution means, the first privilege game in which it is more advantageous to launch the game ball in the first direction than in the second direction at least in a predetermined period, and the first privilege game in a predetermined period from the first direction. Also, one type of privileged game is determined by the type determining means from a plurality of types including the second privileged game in which it is more likely to be advantageous to shoot the game ball in the second direction.

As a result, it is difficult for the first privilege game, which is advantageous by firing the game ball in the first direction, to execute the second determination, which tends to result in a disadvantageous determination result. Therefore, the first privilege game and the second privilege It is possible to increase the difference in the degree of advantage from the game. Therefore, since it can be expected that the first privilege game is determined by the type determination means, it is possible to pay attention to the type of the privilege game when the specific determination result is obtained. There is.

In the game machine BF1, the game ball launched in the first direction is arranged at a position where it is easy to enter, and the first state can be changed between a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter. The variable ball entry means and the game ball launched in the second direction are arranged at a position where the ball can easily enter, and the game ball can be changed into a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter. The two variable ball entry means and the privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the ball entering the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means are provided. The first privilege game is more likely to be changed to a state in which the first variable ball entry means can enter the ball than the second variable ball entry means, and the second privilege game is the first privilege. The gaming machine BF2 is characterized in that the second variable ball entering means is more likely to be changed to a state in which a ball can be entered than a game.

According to the gaming machine BF2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BF1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a first variable ball entry means that can be changed between a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can easily enter. Has been done. A second variable ball entry means that can be changed between a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can easily enter. There is. A predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means based on the fact that the game ball enters the first variable ball entering means or the second variable ball entering means. The first privilege game is more likely to be changed to a state in which the first variable ball entry means can enter the ball than the second variable ball entry means. The second privilege game is more likely to be changed to a state in which the second variable ball entry means can enter the ball than the first privilege game.

This has the effect that during the execution of the privilege game, the game can be performed by paying attention to whether or not the launched game ball enters the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means. be.

In the gaming machine BF1 or BF2, as the gaming state after the privileged gaming is completed, one of a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. The game state setting means for setting the game state of the above is provided, and the first game state is after the privileged game executed based on the specific determination result obtained by the determination by the second determination means. The gaming machine BF3, characterized in that the ratio set as the later gaming state is higher than that of the second gaming state.

According to the gaming machine BF3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines BF1 or BF2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the gaming state after the privileged game is completed, one of a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state is the gaming state. It is set by the setting means. The ratio of the first gaming state set as the gaming state after the privileged game executed based on the result of the discrimination by the second discrimination means is higher than that of the second gaming state. It is configured to be.

As a result, when the discrimination by the second discrimination means is executed, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the game is played with the expectation that a specific discrimination result will not be obtained. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BF3, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state by the ratio of setting the second gaming state as the gaming state after the first privilege game or the second privilege game is completed. The gaming machine BF4, which is characterized in that it is higher than the ratio of the game.

According to the gaming machine BF4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BF3, the ratio in which the second gaming state is set as the gaming state after the first privilege game or the second privilege game is completed is the ratio of the first gaming state. Since it is configured to be higher than the set ratio, the second determination executed based on launching the game ball in the second direction in a predetermined period results in a specific determination result, and the first gaming state is obtained. Can be made to remind the player to avoid being set. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the second determination will not result in a specific determination result after the end of the second privilege game.

In any of the game machines BF1 to BF4, a suggestion effect executing means for executing a suggestion effect suggesting a discrimination result by the first discriminating means or the second discriminating means, and the suggestion executed by the suggestion effect executing means. As the effect, when the first privilege game is determined by the type determination means, either the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect different from the first suggestion effect is determined, and the type determination means determines. The game machine BF5 is provided with a suggestion effect determining means for determining the first suggestion effect when the second privilege game is determined.

According to the gaming machine BF5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines BF1 to BF4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the suggestion effect suggesting the discrimination result by the first discriminating means or the second discriminating means is executed by the suggestion effect executing means. As the suggestion effect executed by the suggestion effect execution means, either the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect different from the first suggestion effect is suggested when the first privilege game is determined by the type determination means. It is determined by the production determining means. On the other hand, when the second privilege game is determined by the type determination means, the first suggestion effect is determined by the suggestion effect determination means.

As a result, when the second suggestion effect is executed, it is determined that the game is the first privilege game, so that the game can be performed with the expectation that the second suggestion effect will be executed as the suggestion effect. There is an effect. Further, since the first suggestion effect may be executed in the first privilege game, when the first suggestion effect is executed, the game can be performed with the expectation that it is the first privilege game. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine BF5, when the first suggestion effect is executed based on the determination of the first privilege game by the type determination means, the suggestion effect execution means is described after the end of the first suggestion effect. A gaming machine BF6 characterized in that it executes a second suggestion effect.

According to the gaming machine BF6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BF5, when the first suggestion effect is executed based on the fact that the first privilege game is determined by the type determining means, after the end of the first suggestion effect. Since the second suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution means, when the first suggestion effect is executed, the game is performed with the expectation that the second suggestion effect will be executed after the end of the first suggestion effect. It has the effect of being able to make it.

In any of the gaming machines BF1 to BF6, when the gaming ball is continuously launched in the second direction during the predetermined period, the second discrimination information acquisition means at least the predetermined number of information or more. The gaming machine BF7, characterized in that it is a period of length for which the discrimination information of the above is acquired.

According to the gaming machine BF7, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines BF1 to BF6, it becomes a second privilege game, and when the gaming ball is continuously launched in the second direction in a predetermined period, the discrimination information storage means is used. Since the second determination information of the predetermined number of information, which is the upper limit, is stored, there is an effect that the second determination of the number of times corresponding to the upper limit can be executed after the end of the second privilege game.

In the gaming machine BF7, the gaming ball launched in the second direction is arranged at a position where it is easy to enter, and it is variable between a first state in which the gaming ball can enter and a second state in which the gaming ball is difficult to enter. A gaming ball enters the second variable ball-entry means, the variable control means for changing the state of the second variable ball-entry means to the first state in the predetermined period, and the second variable ball-entry means. A privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the ball, and a game ball launched in the second direction are arranged at a reachable position, and the reached game ball is provided by the second ball entry means. The gaming machine BF8 is provided with a distribution means for distributing to either the first flow path provided and the second flow path provided with the second variable ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine BF8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BF7, the following effects are exhibited. A second variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state in which the game ball can enter a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can easily enter and a second state in which the game ball is difficult to enter. Is placed. The state of the second variable ball entry means is changed to the first state in a predetermined period by the variable control means. A predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means based on the fact that the game ball enters the second variable ball entering means. A first flow path provided with a second ball entry means and a second flow path provided with a second variable ball entry means at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can reach. A distribution means for distributing to either of the above is arranged.

This has the effect of suppressing the flow direction of the game ball launched in the second direction from being biased.

In the gaming machine BF8, the distribution means is characterized in that the gaming balls are alternately distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine BF9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BF8, the gaming balls launched in the second direction during a predetermined period in the second privilege game are used as the second entering means and the second variable entering means. You can enter the ball alternately. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably prevent the game ball launched in the second direction from entering the second ball entry means or the second variable entry means in a biased manner.

<Characteristic BG group> (Notify the jackpot type based on V winning)
A discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, a privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means, and a game ball. Can be changed to a ball-entry means that allows the ball to enter, a first position that allows the ball to enter the ball, and a second position that makes it more difficult to enter the ball than the first position. The variable control means for varying the means and the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the privilege game, and the privilege game are completed. As a later game state, a first game state that is advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the ball entry means during the execution of the privilege game is set, and the ball entry is performed during the execution of the privilege game. A game state setting means for setting a second game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state when the game ball does not enter the means, and a privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means. As a type, a type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game, and a type determining means thereof. When at least the first privilege game or the second privilege game is determined, the game ball has entered the ball entry means with a suggestion effect suggesting the type of the determined privilege game. A gaming machine BG1 characterized by comprising a suggestion staging execution means that can be executed based on the above.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is known. In this conventional gaming machine, a variable display of symbols is performed on a display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a winning game advantageous to the player is given. In addition, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device in addition to the design, and the entertainment of the game is improved by performing a wide variety of entertainment effects (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886 (Ab. 2003-325886). In addition, among the conventional gaming machines, there is also a gaming machine that does not notify the gaming state after the hit at the time of winning, and executes an effect suggesting the gaming state after the hit during the hit state. Are known. However, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that the remaining winning games become monotonous after the effect suggesting the gaming state after the hit is executed.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BG1, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the player is determined by the privilege game execution means based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means yields a specific discrimination result. A privileged game that is advantageous to the player is executed. The variable means is variable to a first position where the game ball can enter into the ball entry means where the game ball can enter, and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. Based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the privilege game, the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period by the variable control means. As the game state after the privilege game is completed, when the game ball enters the ball entry means during the execution of the privilege game, the game state setting means sets the first game state which is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the game ball does not enter the ball entry means during the execution of the privilege game, the game state setting means sets the second game state, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state. As the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, one type is selected from a plurality of types including at least the first privilege game and the second privilege game which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. It is determined by the type determination means. When at least the first privilege game or the second privilege game is determined by the type determination means, the effect suggesting the type of the determined privilege game is suggested. The game ball enters the ball entry means by the effect execution means. It is executed based on.

As a result, even after the game ball enters the ball entry means and the setting of the advantageous first game state is confirmed, pay attention to the type of privileged game suggested by the suggestion effect executed by the suggestion effect execution means. Can be played. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous after the game ball is inserted into the ball entry means.

In the gaming machine BG1, the discriminating means has a first discriminating means that executes the first discriminating based on the establishment of the first discriminating condition as the discriminating condition, and a second discriminating means different from the first discriminating condition. It has a second discriminating means for executing a second discriminating based on the satisfaction of the condition, and the type determining means has obtained the specific discriminating result in the first discriminating by the first discriminating means. As the type of the privilege game executed based on the above, one type is determined from a plurality of types including at least the first privilege game and the second privilege game, and the second by the second determination means. As the type of the privileged game executed based on the determination of the specific determination result, the ball entry means during the execution of the privileged game rather than the first privileged game and the second privileged game. One type is determined from a plurality of types including at least a third privilege game in which the pachinko ball is difficult to enter, and the first privilege game is more than the second privilege game. The gaming machine BG2 is characterized in that the second determination is easily executed in a predetermined period after the end of the game.

According to the gaming machine BG2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BG1, in the discrimination means, the first discrimination is executed by the first discrimination means based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition. The second determination is executed by the second determination means based on the establishment of the second determination condition different from the first determination condition. As a type of privilege game executed based on the result of a specific determination in the first determination by the first determination means, a plurality of privilege games including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game by the type determination means. One type is determined from the types. On the other hand, as a type of award game executed based on the fact that a specific determination result is obtained by the second determination by the second determination means, the first award game and the award game rather than the second award game are being executed. One type is determined by the type determining means from a plurality of types including at least a third privilege game in which it is difficult to enter the ball entering means. In the first privilege game, the second determination is more likely to be executed in a predetermined period after the privilege game is completed than in the second privilege game.

As a result, when the first privilege game is completed, the disadvantageous second determination is likely to be executed in a predetermined period, so it is more strongly expected that the second privilege game will be determined when a specific determination result is obtained. Can be made to. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can pay attention to the type of the privileged game and play the game.

In the gaming machine BG1 or BG2, a specific effect is executed from the start of the first privilege game or the second privilege game to at least the period from the start of the game ball to the ball entering means. The gaming machine BG3 comprising means, wherein the suggestion effect executing means executes an effect suggesting the type of the privileged game as a result of the specific effect.

According to the gaming machine BG3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines BG1 or BG2, the following effects are exhibited. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means at least during the period from the start of the first privilege game or the second privilege game until the game ball enters the ball entering means. As a result of the specific effect, the effect suggesting the type of the privilege game is executed by the suggestion effect execution means.

As a result, the specific effect and the effect suggesting the type of the privileged game can be shown as a series of effects, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BG2 or BG3, the display means capable of displaying the identification information, the dynamic display means for displaying the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means in the display means, and the dynamic display means thereof. Identification information that can determine one identification information from a plurality of identification information including at least a first identification information and a second identification information different from the first identification information as the identification information dynamically displayed by The identification information determination means includes a determination means, and the identification information determination means obtains the specific determination result by discrimination by the discrimination means, and the first identification information is determined when the first privilege game is determined by the type determination means. The gaming machine BG4 is characterized in that the first identification information or the second identification information is determined when the second privilege game is determined.

According to the gaming machine BG4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines BG2 or BG3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the display means capable of displaying the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means is displayed by the dynamic display means. As the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, one identification information is the identification information from a plurality of identification information including at least the first identification information and the second identification information different from the first identification information. It is determined by the deciding means. When the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a specific discrimination result and the first privilege game is determined by the type determination means, the identification information determining means determines the first identification information. On the other hand, when the second privilege game is determined, the first identification information or the second identification information is determined by the identification information determining means.

As a result, it is possible to confirm the dynamic display of the identification information in the expectation that the second identification information, which is determined only in the advantageous second privilege game, will be displayed by the dynamic display. In addition, by configuring the configuration so that the first identification information can be displayed even in the case of the second privilege game, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for the second privilege game when the first identification information is displayed. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the gaming machine BG4, the suggestion effect executing means executes the suggestion effect when the first identification information is displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display means. The types of the suggestion effect include a first suggestion effect in which the first identification information displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information is maintained as the first identification information, and the first identification information is the second. The gaming machine BG5 is characterized in that a second suggestion effect that is variable to the identification information is provided at least.

According to the gaming machine BG5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BG4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first identification information is displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display means, the suggestion effect execution means executes the suggestion effect. The types of suggestion effects include a first suggestion effect in which the first identification information displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information is maintained as the first identification information, and the first identification information is changed to the second identification information. At least a second suggestion effect is provided.

This has the effect that when the first identification information is displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information, the game can be performed with the expectation that the second suggestion effect will be executed.

The game machine BG5 includes a suggestion effect execution determination means for determining whether or not to execute the suggestion effect when the first privilege game or the second privilege game is determined by the type determination means. The identification information determining means determines the first identification information based on the determination that the suggestion effect execution determination means executes the suggestion effect, and the suggestion effect execution means determines the type determination means. The first suggestion effect is determined, and when it is determined by the suggestion effect execution determination means that the suggestion effect is to be executed, the first suggestion effect is executed, and the second privilege game is determined by the type determination means. The gaming machine BG6 is characterized in that the second suggestion effect is executed when it is determined by the suggestion effect execution determination means to execute the suggestion effect.

According to the gaming machine BG6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BG5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first privilege game or the second privilege game is determined by the type determination means, whether or not to execute the suggestion effect is determined by the suggestion effect execution determination means. The first identification information is determined by the identification information determining means based on the determination that the suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution determining means. When the first identification information is determined by the type determining means and it is determined by the suggestion effect execution determining means that the suggestion effect is to be executed, the first suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution means. On the other hand, when the second privilege game is determined by the type determining means and it is determined by the suggestion effect execution determining means that the suggestion effect is to be executed, the suggestion effect execution means executes the second suggestion effect.

As a result, since the second suggestion effect is executed only when the second bonus game is determined, there is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the second suggestion effect will be executed.

In the gaming machine BG6, the suggestion effect execution determining means executes the suggestion effect when the second privilege game is determined than when the first privilege game is determined by the type determination means. The gaming machine BG7 characterized in that the discrimination rate is high.

According to the gaming machine BG7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BG6, when the second privilege game is determined, the suggestion effect executing means is used rather than when the first privilege game is determined by the type determining means. Since the rate of determination is high when the suggestion effect is executed, there is an effect that the expectation for the second privilege game can be improved when the suggestion effect is started.

The display means capable of displaying the identification information in the gaming machines BG1 or BG2, the dynamic display execution means for executing the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means in the display means, and the dynamic display thereof. A period of dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result executed by the executing means and a period of at least the period from the start of the privilege game until the variable means is changed to the first position. The specific effect executing means is provided with the specific effect executing means, and the suggestion effect executing means executes the suggestion effect suggesting the type of the privilege game as a result of the specific effect. Game machine BG8.

According to the gaming machine BG8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines BG1 or BG2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the display means capable of displaying the identification information, the period of dynamic display of the identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means and at least from the start of the privilege game until the variable means is biased to the first position or two. Over the period, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means. As a result of the specific effect, a suggestion effect suggesting the type of the privilege game is executed by the suggestion effect execution means.

As a result, the specific effect and the effect suggesting the type of the privileged game can be shown as a series of effects, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic BH group> (The ease of predicting the presence or absence of pending consecutive occurrences varies depending on the jackpot type)
A discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, a privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means, and a privilege game execution means thereof. As the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, one type is determined from a plurality of types including at least the first privilege game and the second privilege game different from the first privilege game. The first variable mode and the first variable thereof are based on the means, the variable means that can be changed in a predetermined variable mode, and the discriminant result different from the specific discriminant result in the discrimination by the discriminating means. The specific discrimination result is obtained by the first variable control means for varying the variable means in any one of the plurality of variable modes including at least the second variable mode different from the mode, and the discrimination by the discrimination means. Based on this, the second variable control means for varying the variable means in the third variable mode including at least the specific variable mode having an appearance that is indistinguishable from the first variable mode, and the first privilege game are completed. During the period from the time when the predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the first variable control means sets the first variable state in which the variable means is easily changed in the first variable mode, and the second privilege game is performed. From the end to the time when the specific condition is satisfied, the variable state setting means for setting the second variable state in which the variable means is more likely to be changed in the second variable mode than the first variable state. A gaming machine BH1 characterized by being provided.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest of winning by differentiating the game values that can be acquired (for example). , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 25144417). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, in addition to being notified of the hit at the time of hit, the hit type is also notified, so that after the notification is made, it is simply notified. In some cases, the game became monotonous because it became like a task of just digesting the hit. In addition, in some conventional gaming machines, it is difficult to distinguish between a hit state and a small hit, which is a type of hit, from the production mode and the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening. The constructed gaming machines are also known, and there are also known gaming machines that can be expected to be hit even after the winning game is completed. However, with such a gaming machine, it takes too much time to grasp whether it is a hit or a small hit, and there is a risk that the player's interest in the game will be impaired.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BH1, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. Based on the result of the determination by the determination means, the privilege game execution means executes the privilege game advantageous to the player. As the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, one type is selected by the type determination means from a plurality of types including at least the first privilege game and the second privilege game different from the first privilege game. It is determined. A plurality of variable modes including at least a first variable mode and a second variable mode different from the first variable mode, based on the fact that the discrimination by the discriminating means results in an outlier discrimination result different from the specific discriminant result. In any one of the variable modes, the variable means is changed by the first variable control means. Based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means yields a specific discrimination result, the variable means is provided by the second variable control means in the third variable mode including at least the specific variable mode having an appearance that is difficult to distinguish from the first variable mode. It is variable. From the end of the first privilege game until the predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the variable state is easily changed by the first variable control means by the first variable control means, and the first variable state is easily changed by the variable state setting means. Set. On the other hand, from the end of the second privilege game until the specific condition is satisfied, the variable state is set by the variable state setting means so that the variable means is more likely to be changed in the second variable mode than the first variable state. Will be done.

As a result, it becomes difficult to distinguish the appearance of the variable mode of the variable means between the case where the deviation determination result is obtained after the end of the first privilege game and the case where the specific determination result is obtained, so that at least a specific condition is satisfied. Until then, it can be difficult to identify whether or not the privilege game is executed from the variable mode of the variable means. On the other hand, if the deviation determination result is obtained after the end of the second privilege game, the second variable mode is set, so that the player can relatively identify whether or not the deviation determination result is obtained from the variable aspect of the variable means. It will be easier. Therefore, since the ease of identifying the deviation determination result until the specific condition is satisfied can be changed according to the type of the privileged game, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine BH1 is provided with a ball-entry means through which the game ball can enter, and the variable means has a first position in which the game ball can enter the ball-entry means and a game ball from the first position. Is variable to a second position where it becomes difficult to enter the ball, and in the first variable mode, the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the passage of the first period. The second variable mode is a variable mode in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the passage of a second period different from the first period. The gaming machine BH2 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine BH2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BH1. That is, the variable means is variably configured to be a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. The first variable mode is configured in a variable mode in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the passage of the first period, and the second variable mode is a second variable mode different from the first period. The variable means is configured in a variable manner in which the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the passage of the period.

This has the effect that the player can easily identify whether the variable means is the first variable mode or the second variable mode by confirming the interval until the variable means is changed to the first position. There is.

In the gaming machine BH1 or BH2, the discriminating means includes a first discriminating means that executes the first discriminating based on the establishment of the first discriminating condition, and a second discriminating condition different from the first discriminating condition. The first variable control means includes a second discriminating means for executing the second discriminating based on the establishment, and the first variable control means is said to be based on the fact that the discriminating by the first discriminating means results in the misaligned discriminating result. The variable means is variable in any one of a plurality of variable modes including at least one variable mode and the second variable mode, and the second variable control means is the first discriminating means. The gaming machine BH3 is characterized in that the variable means is variable in the third variable mode based on the determination by the above-mentioned specific determination result.

According to the gaming machine BH3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines BH1 or BH2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first determination is executed by the first determination means based on the establishment of the first determination condition. The second determination is executed by the second determination means based on the establishment of the second determination condition different from the first determination condition. The first variable control is performed in any one of a plurality of variable modes including at least the first variable mode and the second variable mode, based on the fact that the discrimination by the first discriminating means results in an outlier discrimination. Variable means are variable by means. The variable means is varied in the third variable mode by the second variable control means based on the fact that the discrimination by the first discriminant means results in a specific discriminant result.

As a result, the variable mode of the variable means is changed in the case where the discrimination by the first discriminating means results in a misjudgment, depending on the type of the privilege game. Therefore, the first discriminating means is used until the specific condition is satisfied. There is an effect that the game can be performed by paying attention to the variable mode of the variable means each time the determination is executed.

In the gaming machine BH3, the type determination means determines the type of the privileged game to be executed based on the specific determination result obtained by the second determination by the second determination means. A gaming machine BH4 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine BH4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BH3, the type of the privileged game executed based on the specific discrimination result obtained by the second discrimination by the second discrimination means is determined by the type determination means. Since it is determined, when the second determination by the second determination means is executed, it is possible to pay attention to whether the first privilege game is determined or the second privilege game is determined. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the gaming machine BH3 or BH4, the first discriminating condition is characterized in that it is easier to be satisfied than the second discriminating condition from the end of the privileged game until the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine BH5.

According to the gaming machine BH5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BH3 or BH4, the first determination condition is satisfied more than the second determination condition from the end of the privilege game until the specific condition is satisfied. Since it becomes easy, there is an effect that the game can be played by paying attention to the variable mode of the variable means until the specific condition is satisfied.

In any of the gaming machines BH3 to BH5, the gaming ball launched in the first direction was launched in a second direction different from the first direction and a first entering means provided at a position where the ball can enter. A second ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball can enter, and a predetermined position based on the fact that the game ball launched in the first direction is provided at a position where the ball can easily enter and the game ball enters. Based on the start of the above-mentioned privilege game, the state of the privilege entry means to which the privilege of the above is given and the state of the privilege entry means are changed from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter. A variable control means that changes a predetermined number of times to a possible second state is provided, and the first determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means. The gaming machine BH6 is characterized in that the second determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the second entry means.

According to the gaming machine BH6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines BH3 to BH5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can enter, and the first ball can enter the position where the game ball launched in the second direction different from the first direction can enter. 2 Ball entry means are provided. A privilege entry means is provided at a position where a game ball launched in the first direction can easily enter, and a predetermined privilege is given based on the entry of the game ball. The state of the privilege ball entering means is changed by the variable control means a predetermined number of times from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the game ball can enter based on the start of the privilege game. The first determination condition is established based on the entry of the game ball into the first entry means, and the second determination condition is based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. Is established.

As a result, by launching the game ball aiming at the privilege ball entry means during the execution of the privilege game, the game ball can also be entered into the first ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the first determination condition can be easily satisfied when the privilege game is executed.

In the game machine BH6, the first discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring the first discrimination information used for the discrimination by the first discrimination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means, and the first 1 The discrimination information storage means that can store the first discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of information is provided, and the specific condition is the discrimination information at the end of the privilege game. The gaming machine BH7 is characterized in that it is established based on the execution of discrimination based on all the first discrimination information stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine BH7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BH6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means, the first discrimination information used for the discrimination by the first discrimination means is acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means. The first discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means is stored by the discrimination information storage means up to a predetermined number of information. The specific condition is satisfied based on the fact that the discrimination based on all the first discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is executed at the end of the privilege game.

As a result, the first discrimination information acquired during the execution of the privilege game is stored in the discrimination information storage means, so that there is an effect that the first discrimination can be efficiently executed.

In the gaming machine BH7, as the gaming state after the privileged gaming is completed, from among a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. The game state determining means for determining the game state of 1 is provided, and the type determining means is the game state as a type of privileged game executed based on the result of the specific determination in the first determination. The first type determining means in which the ratio of determining the third privileged game in which the first gaming state is determined by the determining means is higher than the ratio of determining the type of the other privileged game, and the above-mentioned identification by the second discrimination. As the type of the privilege game executed based on the determination result of, the second type is determined from a plurality of types including at least the first privilege game and the second privilege game. The game state determining means has a determination means, and when the first privilege game or the second privilege game is reached, the second game state is set as a game state after the privilege game is completed. A gaming machine BH8 characterized by being determined.

According to the gaming machine BH8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BH7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as a gaming state after the privileged game is completed, one gaming state is selected from a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. Is determined by the game state determination means. As a type of privilege game executed based on the result of a specific determination in the first determination, the third privilege game in which the first game state is determined by the game state determination means is determined by the first type determination means. The percentage to be played is higher than the percentage to determine the type of other privilege games. As the type of the privilege game executed based on the result of the specific determination in the second determination, one type is the first among a plurality of types including at least the first privilege game and the second privilege game. It is determined by two types of determination means. In the case of the first privilege game or the second privilege game, the second game state is determined by the game state determining means as the game state after the privilege game is completed.

As a result, when a specific discrimination result is obtained in the first discrimination, the ratio of the first gaming state being determined after the end of the privilege game is high, so that the first discrimination stored in the discrimination information storage means during the execution of the privilege game is performed. Based on the information, it is possible to perform the game in the hope that all the first determinations executed after the end of the privileged game will be out of order and the determination result will be. Therefore, since it is possible to realize a novel game property that makes one want to avoid a specific determination result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic BI group> (Easiness of holding reams varies depending on the jackpot type)
The first discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition, the second discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition, and the above. Based on the discrimination by the first discrimination means or the discrimination by the second discrimination means, a specific discrimination result is obtained, and the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player and the privilege game execution means thereof. As the type of the privileged game to be executed, the first privileged game and the first privileged game are determined by the second discriminating means from the end of the privileged game to the time when the specific condition is satisfied. A first gaming state as a type determining means for determining the type of one of the privileged games including at least a second privileged game that tends to be a specific determination result, and a gaming state after the privileged game is completed. A game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of states including at least a second game state different from the first game state, the first privilege game and the second privilege game. The gaming machine BI1 is characterized in that, as a gaming state after the privileged game is completed, the setting ratio of the first gaming state is higher than that of the second gaming state.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning result, the game shifts to a winning state. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest of winning by differentiating the game values that can be acquired (for example). , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 25144417). In addition, some conventional gaming machines are advantageous by replacing or in addition to the number of rounds, by differently giving different game states after hitting, or by differently different numbers of prize balls that can be obtained in each round. Some have different degrees. However, it has been required to further increase the difference in the degree of advantage according to the hit type.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BI1, the discrimination is executed by the first discriminating means based on the establishment of the first discriminating condition, and the second discriminating condition different from the first discriminating condition is satisfied. 2 The discrimination is executed by the discrimination means. Based on the determination by the first determination means or the determination by the second determination means resulting in a specific determination result, the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. As the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the first privilege game and the discrimination by the second discrimination means from the end of the privilege game to the establishment of the specific condition rather than the first privilege game. The type of one privileged game is determined by the type determining means from a plurality of privileged games including at least the second privileged game that tends to give a specific determination result. As the game state after the privilege game is completed, one game state is set by the game state setting means from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state. .. In both the first privilege game and the second privilege game, the setting ratio of the second game state is higher than that of the second game state as the game state after the privilege game is completed.

As a result, depending on whether the game is the first privilege game or the second privilege game, there is a difference in the possibility that the discrimination by the second discrimination means will result in a specific discrimination result until the specific condition is satisfied. There is an effect that the game can be played by paying attention to the type of the privilege game determined by the type determination means.

In the game BI1, the type determining means includes at least the first privilege game, the second privilege game, and the third privilege game which is more disadvantageous to the player than the other types of the privilege game. 1 to 1 is to determine the type of the privileged game, and the third privileged game is the case where the specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the second determination means rather than the determination by the first determination means. The gaming machine BI2, characterized in that the ratio determined by the type determining means is high.

According to the gaming machine BI2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BI1. That is, the type of the privilege game is one of a plurality of types including at least the first privilege game, the second privilege game, and the third privilege game which is more disadvantageous to the player than the other privilege game types. Is determined by. The rate at which the third privilege game is determined by the type determination means is higher than the determination by the first determination means when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the second determination means.

As a result, if a specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the second discrimination means, the rate at which the disadvantageous third privilege game is determined increases, so that it is hoped that the discrimination by the second discrimination means does not result in a specific discrimination result. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that it will be the first privilege game, rather than the second privilege game in which the discrimination by the second discrimination means tends to produce a specific determination result.

In the gaming machine BI1 or BI2, the probability that the first gaming state will be the specific discrimination result when the discrimination by the first discriminating means or the discrimination by the second discriminating means is executed is the second gaming state. The second determination condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first determination condition from the end of the second privilege game until the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine BI3 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine BI3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines BI1 or BI2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first gaming state is configured so that the probability that a specific discrimination result will be obtained when the discrimination by the first discrimination means or the discrimination by the second discrimination means is executed is higher than that in the second gaming state. .. From the end of the second privilege game until the specific condition is satisfied, the second determination condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first determination condition.

As a result, in the first gaming state, the probability that a specific determination result will be obtained is higher than in the second gaming state, so that it is easy to continuously become a privileged game at relatively short intervals. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved when the first game state is reached.

In any of the game machines BI1 to BI3, a discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the second discrimination means based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, and the discrimination information acquisition means acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means. Based on the discrimination information storage means that can store the discrimination information up to a predetermined number of information and the discrimination information 1 stored in the discrimination information storage means used for the discrimination by the second discrimination means. The identification information is provided with an erasing means for erasing the discrimination information of the above 1 from the discrimination information storage means, and the specific condition is that the number of information of the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means becomes 0. The gaming machine BI4, which is characterized by being established based on the above.

According to the gaming machine BI4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines BI1 to BI3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the establishment of the predetermined acquisition condition, the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the second discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means. The discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is stored in the discrimination information storage means up to a predetermined number of information. Based on the fact that the discrimination information of 1 stored in the discrimination information storage means is used for the discrimination by the second discrimination means, the discrimination information of the 1 is erased from the discrimination information storage means by the erasing means. The specific condition is satisfied based on the fact that the number of information of the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means becomes 0.

As a result, until the number of information of the discrimination information becomes 0, it is easy to obtain a specific discrimination result by the discrimination by the second discrimination means. Therefore, the game is played by paying attention to the number of information stored in the discrimination information storage means. It has the effect of being able to.

In any of the gaming machines BI1 to BI4, the first ball entering means arranged at a position where the gaming ball launched in the first direction can enter, and the gaming ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction. A second ball entry means arranged at a position where the game ball can enter is provided, and the first determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means. The second determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means, and the second privilege game has started the privilege game. The gaming machine BI5 is characterized in that it is easier for a player to launch a gaming ball in the second direction than in the first direction at least for a predetermined period later.

According to the gaming machine BI5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines BI1 to BI4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can enter. The second ball entry means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction can enter. The first determination condition is established based on the entry of the game ball into the first entry means, while the second determination condition is that the game ball has entered the second entry means. It is established based on. In the second privilege game, it is more advantageous for the player to launch the game ball in the second direction than in the first direction at least for a predetermined period after the privilege game is started.

As a result, in the case of the second privilege game, the game ball can be entered into the second entry means by launching the game ball in the second direction in a predetermined period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to form a state in which the second determination condition is easily satisfied after the end of the privilege game.

In the game machine BI5, the first game ball launched in the first direction is arranged at a position where the ball can enter, and the first state can be changed between a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter. The variable ball entry means and the game ball launched in the second direction are arranged at a position where the ball can enter, and the state in which the game ball can enter and the state in which the game ball is difficult to enter can be changed. The first variable ball entry means is provided with a first variable ball entry means or a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the ball entering the second variable ball entry means. 2. The game machine BI6 is characterized in that the variable ball entry means is changed so that the game ball can enter the ball during at least the predetermined period during the execution of the second privilege game.

According to the gaming machine BI6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BI5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a first variable ball entry means that can be changed between a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can enter. Has been done. A second variable ball entry means that can be changed between a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can enter. There is. A predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means. The second variable ball entry means is changed to a state in which the game ball can be entered during at least a predetermined period during the execution of the second scoring game.

As a result, during a predetermined period during the execution of the second privilege game, the player who wants to obtain the predetermined privilege can launch the game ball in the second direction. Therefore, there is an effect that a larger number of game balls can be entered into the second entry means during a predetermined period.

In the gaming machine BI6, the first variable ball-entry means is characterized in that during the execution of the first privilege game, the game ball is changed to a state in which the game ball can be entered at least during the predetermined period. Pachinko machine BI7.

According to the gaming machine BI7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BI6, during at least a predetermined period during the execution of the first scoring game, the first variable ball-entry means is variable to a state in which the game ball can be entered. Therefore, during a predetermined period during the execution of the first privilege game, the player who wants to obtain the predetermined privilege can launch the game ball in the first direction. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second ball entry means during a predetermined period during the execution of the first privilege game.

A discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the second discrimination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means in any of the gaming machines BI5 to BI7, and a discrimination information acquisition means thereof. A discrimination information storage means capable of storing the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of information is provided, and the gaming ball is continuously launched in the second direction for the predetermined period. In this case, the gaming machine BI8 is characterized in that the period is such that at least the predetermined number of information or more of the second discrimination information is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means.

According to the gaming machine BI8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines BI5 to BI7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means, the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the second discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means. The discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is stored by the discrimination information storage means up to a predetermined number of information. The predetermined period is configured to have a length in which at least a predetermined number of information or more of the second discrimination information is acquired by the discrimination information storage means when the game ball is continuously launched in the second direction.

As a result, in the case of the second privilege game, there is an effect that the discrimination information can be surely stored in the discrimination information storage means up to the upper limit number of information.

In the gaming machine BI8, the gaming ball launched in the second direction is subjected to a first flow path provided with the second ball entry means and a second flow path provided with the second variable ball entry means. The gaming machine BI9 is provided with a distribution means capable of distributing to either of the above.

According to the gaming machine BI9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BI8, the gaming ball launched in the second direction has a first flow path provided with a second entry means and a second variable entry means. Since the pachinko ball is distributed to either of the provided second flow paths by the distribution means, the gaming ball launched in the second direction is biased toward the second entry means, or conversely, the second. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the ball from being biased toward the variable ball entry means.

<Characteristic BJ group> (As a state in which a game is played in Special 1, a state in which a time reduction is easily given and a state in which a time reduction is difficult to be given are provided).
In the entry means where the game ball can enter, the first position where the game ball can enter into the entry means, and the second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. A second variable means in which the variable means and the variable means are less likely to allow the gaming ball to enter the first variable pattern and the first variable pattern based on the establishment of a specific variable condition. It is based on a variable control means that changes the variable pattern by one of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a variable pattern, a discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the ball entering the ball entering means, and the discrimination means. As a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on at least a specific determination result in the discrimination, and a game state after the execution of the privilege game by the privilege game execution means is completed. , 1 of a plurality including at least a first gaming state, a second gaming state different from the first gaming state, and a third gaming state different from both the first gaming state and the second gaming state. The game state setting means for setting the game state is provided, and the first game state and the second game state are the variable means in the first variable pattern by the variable control means rather than the third game state. BJ1 is a gaming machine characterized in that the rate at which is variable is low.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of such gaming machines are set to either a normal gaming state or an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when the hit state ends (for example, Patent Document 1: Special Patent Document 1: Kai 2006-000392).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, if the advantageous gaming state is not set when the hit state ends, the motivation of the player for the game is lowered, and it becomes easy to quit the game. There was a problem.

In particular, in a type of gaming machine that is not equipped with a so-called probability fluctuation function and is provided with only two types of gaming states, a time-saving gaming state and a normal gaming state, the normal gaming state is set after the time-saving gaming state. In that case, there is a risk that the player will be satisfied with the game because the game can be played in the short-time game state, and it will be difficult to make the player think that the game will be continued in the normal game state after that.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BJ1, the first position where the gaming ball can enter into the entry means where the gaming ball can enter, and the first position where the gaming ball can enter more difficult than the first position. The variable means is variably configured at the second position. Based on the establishment of a specific variable condition, the variable means has a first variable pattern by the variable control means and a second variable pattern in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means than the first variable pattern. It is variable by one of a plurality of variable patterns including at least one. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means at least based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means executed based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means results in a specific discrimination result. Will be done. As the game state after the execution of the privilege game by the privilege game execution means is completed, both the first game state, the second game state different from the first game state, and the first game state and the second game state are both. A gaming state of at least one of a plurality including different third gaming states is set by the gaming state setting means. The first gaming state and the second gaming state are configured so that the rate at which the variable means is changed in the first variable pattern by the variable control means is lower than that in the third gaming state.

This makes it difficult to distinguish between the first gaming state and the second gaming state from the variable ratio of the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BJ1, the first gaming state and the second gaming state are characterized in that the probability that the specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means is a common specific probability. Machine BJ2.

According to the gaming machine BJ2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BJ1, the probability that the first gaming state and the second gaming state become a specific discrimination result by discrimination by the discrimination means becomes a common specific probability. Since it is configured, there is an effect that it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to distinguish between the first gaming state and the second gaming state.

In the game machine BJ1 or BJ2, a second ball entry means different from the ball entry means, a second discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means, and the second discriminating means thereof. The second privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game based on the determination result by the second determination means is provided, and the first game state is determined by the second determination means. When the specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination, the third gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means at the first ratio, and the second gaming state is discriminated by the second discriminating means. The gaming machine BJ3 is characterized in that the third gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means at a second ratio higher than the first ratio when the specific determination result is obtained. ..

According to the gaming machine BJ3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines BJ1 or BJ2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the discrimination is executed by the second discriminating means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means different from the ball entering means. The privilege game is executed by the second privilege game execution means based on the fact that the discrimination by the second determination means yields a specific determination result. When a specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the second discrimination means in the first game state, the third game state is set at the first ratio by the game state setting means, while the second game state is set in the second game state. When a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination means, the game state setting means sets the third gaming state at a second ratio higher than the first ratio.

As a result, in the second game state, the third game state is more likely to be set as the game state after the execution of the privilege game is completed than in the first game state. There is an effect that the game can be played with a stronger expectation of becoming.

In the gaming machine BJ3, when the privilege game is executed, the third gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means at a third ratio higher than the first ratio. A gaming machine BJ4 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine BJ4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BJ3, when the privilege game is executed in the third gaming state, the third gaming state is higher than the first ratio by the gaming state setting means. Since it is set in, the privilege game and the third game state are likely to be repeated in the third game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can have a great sense of satisfaction when the third game state is reached.

In the gaming machine BJ4, in the second gaming state, a game that shifts the gaming state to the first gaming state based on the fact that at least a predetermined specific condition different from the specific determination result is satisfied. The third gaming state is provided with a state transition means, and when the privilege game is executed, either the second gaming state or the third gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. A gaming machine BJ5 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine BJ5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BJ4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the second gaming state, the gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state by the gaming state transition means based on the fact that a predetermined specific condition that is at least different from the specific determination result is satisfied. When the privilege game is executed in the third game state, either the second game state or the third game state is set by the game state setting means.

As a result, when a specific determination result is obtained in the third gaming state, the first gaming state is not set. Therefore, even after the third gaming state is completed, at least, the gaming state transition means is used. 2 It is possible to make the player think that the game will be continued until the game state is changed to the first game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the gaming machine BJ5, the gaming state transition means, as the specific condition, is based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means continuously results in a deviation discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result for a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine BJ6 is characterized by shifting from the second gaming state to the first gaming state.

According to the gaming machine BJ6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BJ5, as a specific condition, the discriminant result is different from the specific discriminant result continuously for a predetermined number of times by the discriminating means. Since the second gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state by the gaming state transition means, it is possible to pay attention to the number of consecutive times of the disengagement determination result to play the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BJ6, as the type of the second gaming state set by the gaming state setting means, the gaming state shifts based on the result of the deviation determination over the first determination by the discrimination means. The first type is shifted to the first gaming state by the means, and the first type is shifted to the first gaming state, and the deviation determination result is obtained over the discrimination of the second number of times, which is larger than the first number of times. A gaming machine BJ7 comprising: a type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least a second type shifted to one gaming state.

According to the gaming machine BJ7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BJ6, as the type of the second gaming state set by the gaming state setting means, the discriminant result is obtained over the first number of discriminations by the discriminating means. By the gaming state transition means based on the fact that the first type is shifted to the first gaming state by the gaming state transition means based on Since one type is determined by the type determination means from a plurality of types including at least the second type that is transferred to the first gaming state, it is decided that the second gaming state continues over a larger number of discriminations. You can expect it. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BJ7, it is possible to display the first effect mode on the display means when the first game state is set by the display means capable of displaying the effect mode and the game state setting means. When the second game state is set by the first display control means and the game state setting means, it is possible to cause the display means to display a second effect mode different from the first effect mode. The first effect mode is displayed from the time when the second game state is set by the second display control means and the game state setting means until the deviation determination result is obtained over the second number of times. The gaming machine BJ8, which comprises a limiting means for limiting the number of machines.

According to the gaming machine BJ8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BJ7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the first display control means displays the first effect mode to the display means. When the second game state is set by the game state setting means, the second display control means displays the display means with a second effect mode different from the first effect mode. From the time when the second game state is set by the game state setting means until the result of the deviation determination is obtained for the second number of times, the display of the first effect mode is restricted by the limiting means.

As a result, even if the deviation determination result is obtained over the first number of times after the second game state is set, the first effect mode is not displayed until the second number of times, so that the player can use the second game. It becomes difficult to distinguish whether it is the second gaming state of one type or the second gaming state of the second type. Therefore, regardless of the type of the second gaming state, it is possible to make the player think that the game is to be continued at least until the determination of the second number of times is executed, so that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved. be.

In the gaming machine BJ8, the first effect mode is displayed based on the fact that the deviation determination result is obtained over the second number of times after the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. A gaming machine BJ9 characterized by being provided with display control means.

According to the gaming machine BJ9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BJ8, the third display is based on the fact that the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means and the deviation determination result is obtained for the second number of times. Since the first effect effect mode is displayed by the control means, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the period in which it is unknown whether the player is in the first gaming state or the second gaming state is too long.

A gaming machine BJ10, characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines BJ4 to BJ9, the second ratio is higher than the third ratio.

According to the gaming machine BJ10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines BJ4 to BJ9, the second ratio is configured to be higher than the third ratio, so that a specific determination result can be obtained in the second gaming state. It has the effect of making you expect more strongly.

<Characteristic BK group> (Structure that makes it difficult for Special 2 to turn during a short time)
Based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, a first gaming state, a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and a third gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. A game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of including at least, a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, and a first method in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means. A variable means that can be changed to a position, a second position that makes it more difficult for the game ball to enter than the first position, and a variable operation of the variable means to the ball entry means in the first gaming state. Controlled by the first control that makes it difficult for the gaming ball to enter, and controlled by the second control that makes it difficult for the gaming ball to enter the ball entry means in the second gaming state, in the third gaming state. The gaming machine BK1 is characterized by comprising a variable control means controlled by a third control that makes it easier for the gaming ball to enter the ball entry means than the first control and the second control.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of such gaming machines are set to either a normal gaming state or an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when the hit state ends (for example, Patent Document 1: Special Patent Document 1: Kai 2006-000392).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, if the advantageous gaming state is not set when the hit state ends, the motivation of the player for the game is lowered, and it becomes easy to quit the game. There was a problem.

In particular, in a type of gaming machine that is not equipped with a so-called probability fluctuation function and is provided with only two types of gaming states, a time-saving gaming state and a normal gaming state, the normal gaming state is set after the time-saving gaming state. In that case, there is a risk that the player will be satisfied with the game because the game can be played in the short-time game state, and it will be difficult to make the player think that the game will be continued in the normal game state after that.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BK1, the first gaming state, the second gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the second gaming state are based on the establishment of the predetermined setting conditions. A third gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player, and one gaming state from a plurality of including at least one are set by the gaming state setting means. Variable means are variably configured in the first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and the second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. There is. The variable operation of the variable means is controlled by the variable control means in the first control that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means in the first game state, and the game ball enters the ball entry means in the second game state. Is controlled by the variable control means in the second control that makes it difficult for the ball to enter, and is controlled by the variable control means in the third control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry means in the third game state.

As a result, the degree of advantage differs between the first game state and the second game state in which control that makes it difficult to enter the ball entry means is executed, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the gaming machine BK1, the second control is characterized in that the variable means is more likely to be arranged at the first position than the first control.

According to the gaming machine 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BK1, the second control is configured so that the variable means can be more easily arranged at the first position than the first control. Although the variable means is more likely to be arranged at the first position than the first control, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel operation that makes it difficult to enter the ball entry means as in the first control.

The gaming machine BK2 includes a passing means through which the game ball can pass and a discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the passing of the passing means by the gaming ball, and the variable control means is discriminating by the discriminating means. The variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the result of the specific determination, and the first gaming state is determined by the determination means. The specific discrimination result is obtained with a probability of 1, and the second gaming state and the third gaming state are determined by the discrimination means and have a second probability higher than the first probability. The gaming machine BK3, which is characterized by having a specific determination result.

According to the gaming machine BK3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BK2. That is, the discrimination is executed by the discriminating means based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing means through which the game ball can pass. The variable control means changes the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the result of the determination by the determination means. In the first gaming state, the discrimination by the discriminating means results in a specific discrimination result with the first probability, while in the second gaming state and the third gaming state, the discrimination by the discriminating means is higher than the first probability. A specific discrimination result is obtained with a probability of 2.

As a result, it is possible to realize a novel operation in which the ease of entering the ball into the ball entry means is different even though the probability of obtaining a specific discrimination result is common between the second game state and the third game state. There is an effect.

The gaming machine BK3 is provided with a firing means capable of firing a game ball at a firing interval of a predetermined interval or longer, and the second gaming state is determined by the discriminating means after the specific discriminating result is obtained, and then the variable means is described. The period until the variable means is changed to the first position is set as the first period, and the period from when the variable means is changed to the first position to when the variable means is changed to the second position is set as the second period. The period from when the pachinko ball passes through the passing means until the passed game ball reaches the entering means is likely to be shorter than the first period. The period from when the pachinko ball passes through the passing means until the pachinko ball launched by the launching means reaches the variable means at the predetermined interval after the passing gaming ball is the first period. The gaming machine BK4 is characterized in that it tends to be longer than the sum of one period and the second period.

According to the gaming machine BK4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BK3. That is, the game ball is launched by the launching means at a firing interval of a predetermined interval or more. In the second gaming state, the period from the determination by the discrimination means to the change of the variable means to the first position is set as the first period, and the variable means is variable to the first position. The period from the time when it is changed to the time when it is changed to the second position is set as the second period. The period from when the game ball passes through the passing means until the passing game ball reaches the entering means tends to be shorter than the first period. The first period and the first period from when one game ball passes through the passing means until the game ball launched by the launching means reaches the variable means at a predetermined interval next to the passed game ball. It tends to be longer than the sum of the two periods.

As a result, even if the game ball is continuously fired at the passing means in the second game state, the game ball is made to reach the ball entry means while the variable means is changed to the first position. Can be difficult. Therefore, there is an effect that the second game state can be set to a special state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means even though the variable means is easily changed to the first position.

In the gaming machine BK4, in the third gaming state, the period from the specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means until the variable means is changed to the first position is from the first period. Is also set to a long third period, and the period from when the variable means is changed to the first position to when the variable means is changed to the second position is set to the second period, and the passage is set. The period from the passage of the pachinko ball through the means to the arrival of the passed pachinko ball at the ball entry means is longer than the third period, and the third period and the second period. The gaming machine BK5, which is characterized in that it tends to be shorter than the sum of.

According to the gaming machine BK5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BK4. That is, in the third gaming state, the period from the determination by the discrimination means to the change of the variable means to the first position is set to the third period, which is longer than the first period. The period from when the variable means is changed to the first position to when it is changed to the second position is set as the second period. The period from the passage of the game ball through the passing means to the arrival of the passed game ball at the entry means is longer than the third period, and the sum of the third period and the second period. It tends to be shorter than.

As a result, in the third game state, when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination executed based on the passage through the passing means, the game ball that has passed through the passing means is directly entered into the entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the game in the third game state can be efficiently advanced.

In any of the game machines BK1 to BK5, the second ball entry means, which is different from the ball entry means and allows the game ball to enter, and the game ball enters the ball entry means. The first discrimination means for executing the first discrimination, the second discrimination means for executing the second discrimination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means, and the first discrimination means. The game state is provided with a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination or the determination result of the first determination predetermined by the determination by the second determination means. The setting means is the first game state after the end of the privileged game executed based on the result of the first determination in the second determination in the first gaming state. As the game state after the end of the privilege game executed based on the setting of the three game states and the result of the first determination in the second determination in the second game state, the first The gaming machine BK6 is characterized in that the third gaming state is set at a second ratio higher than the ratio.

According to the gaming machine BK6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines BK1 to BK5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first determination is executed by the first determination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry means. The second determination is executed by the second determination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means different from the entry means. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the determination by the first determination means or the determination result of the first determination predetermined by the determination by the second determination means. As the game state after the end of the privilege game executed based on the result of the first determination in the second determination in the first game state, the third game state is set at the first ratio by the game state setting means. Set. As a game state after the end of the privilege game executed based on the result of the first judgment in the second judgment in the second game state, the game state is set at a second ratio higher than the first ratio. The third gaming state is set by means.

This has the effect that the game can be played with a strong expectation that a specific determination result will be obtained during the second game state.

In the gaming machine BK6, the gaming state setting means is used as a gaming state after the end of the privileged game executed based on the result of the first determination in the first determination in the third gaming state. The gaming machine BK7, characterized in that the third gaming state is determined at a third ratio higher than the first ratio.

According to the gaming machine BK7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BK6, as a gaming state after the end of the privileged game executed based on the first determination result in the first determination in the third gaming state. Since the third gaming state is determined by the gaming state setting means at a third ratio higher than the first ratio, in the third gaming state, the third gaming state is likely to occur again after the end of the privileged game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can have a great sense of satisfaction when the third game state is reached.

In the gaming machine BK7, the gaming machine BK8 is characterized in that the second ratio is higher than the third ratio.

According to the gaming machine BK8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BK7, the second ratio is configured to be higher than the third ratio, so that the first discrimination result is obtained in the second gaming state. There is an effect that the game can be played with a stronger expectation.

<Characteristic BL group> (Mechanism that can be played by a game method that makes it easy to be distributed to two routes alternately by a distribution means and a game method that makes it easy to distribute to one route)
An operating means that can be operated by the player, a launching means that can launch a gaming ball according to the operation content for the operating means, a first flow path through which the gaming ball launched by the launching means can pass, and a first channel thereof. While the second flow path different from the first flow path and the first condition that can be satisfied by performing the operation of the first operation content on the operation means are satisfied, the game ball reached is the first. The second condition that can be satisfied by performing the operation of the second operation content different from the operation of the first operation content is satisfied because it becomes easy to distribute the first flow path and the second flow path alternately. The gaming machine BL1 is provided with a distribution means that makes it easier to distribute the reached game ball to the first flow path than while the first condition is satisfied.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a distribution member for distributing the game ball to either of the two types of flow paths provided on the board surface. In the conventional game machine, the game balls that have reached the distribution member are distributed to two types of flow paths one by one, so that the game balls can flow down into the two types of flow paths in a well-balanced manner. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-231902).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, the gaming balls that have reached the distribution member are alternately distributed to the two types of flow paths regardless of the gaming method of the player, so that there is room for the skill of the player to intervene. There was a risk that the player's interest in the game would be reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BL1, the gaming ball is launched by the launching means according to the operation content for the operating means that the player can operate. A first flow path through which the game ball launched by the launching means can pass and a second flow path different from the first flow path are provided. While the first condition that can be satisfied by performing the operation of the first operation content on the operation means is satisfied, the game ball that the state of the distribution means has reached is the first flow path and the second. It becomes easy to distribute to the flow path alternately. While the second condition that can be satisfied by performing the operation of the second operation content different from the first operation content is satisfied, the state of the distribution means is from the time when the first condition is satisfied. The game ball that has reached is easily distributed to the first flow path.

As a result, it is possible to make the method of distributing the game balls by the distribution means different according to the operation content of the player, so that there is an effect that the operation of the operation means can be devised.

In the gaming machine BL1, the operation of the first operation content is executed so that the gaming ball is launched by the launching means at the first firing interval, and the operation of the second operation content is executed. The gaming machine BL2 is characterized in that the gaming ball is launched by the launching means at a second firing interval longer than the first firing interval.

According to the gaming machine BL2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BL1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the operation of the first operation content is executed, the game ball is fired at the first firing interval by the firing means. When the operation of the second operation content is executed, the game ball is launched by the launching means at a second firing interval longer than the first firing interval. As a result, it is possible to easily change the way the game balls are distributed by the distribution means simply by changing the firing interval, which has the effect of enhancing the convenience of the player.

In the gaming machine BL2, the distribution means has at least a first movable range in which the reached game ball is easily distributed to the first flow path and a second movable range in which the reached game ball is easily distributed to the second flow path. The distribution means is configured to be movable in a specific movable range including the above-mentioned second. It is configured to be easy to move in the movable range, and to be easily moved to the first movable range by distributing the game ball to the second flow path in a state of being arranged in the second movable range. A gaming machine BL3 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine BL3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BL2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the distribution means can move a specific movable range including at least a first movable range in which the reached game ball can be easily distributed to the first flow path and a second movable range in which the reached game ball can be easily distributed to the second flow path. do. By distributing the game ball to the first flow path while being arranged in the first movable range, the distribution means can be easily moved to the second movable range. Further, by distributing the game ball to the second flow path while being arranged in the second movable range, the distribution means can be easily moved to the first movable range.

This has the effect that the game balls can continuously reach the distribution means to alternately distribute the game balls to the first flow path and the second flow path.

In the gaming machine BL3, when the gaming ball is distributed to the first flow path and moved within the second movable range, the distribution means is shorter than the length of the second firing interval and is the first. BL4 is a gaming machine characterized in that it can move up to the first movable range in a period longer than the length of the firing interval of.

According to the gaming machine BL4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BL3, when the gaming ball is distributed to the first flow path and the sorting means moves within the second movable range, it is shorter than the length of the second firing interval. Moreover, since the sorting means can move to the first movable range in a period longer than the length of the first firing interval, when the gaming ball is continuously fired at a firing interval equal to or longer than the second firing interval, the sorting means is distributed. There is an effect that the movable range of the means can be surely set to the first movable range.

In the gaming machine BL4, the distribution means becomes easy to move from the first movable range to the second movable range due to the mass of the game ball distributed to the first flow path, and is distributed to the second flow path. The gaming machine BL5 is characterized in that it is easy to move from the second movable range to the first movable range depending on the mass of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine BL5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BL4, the mass of the gaming ball distributed to the first flow path makes it easier for the distribution means to move from the first movable range to the second movable range. Since the mass of the gaming balls distributed to the two flow paths makes it easier for the distribution means to move from the second movable range to the first movable range, it is possible to eliminate the need for a power source for moving the distribution means. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine BL4 or BL5, the sorting means is configured so that the predetermined position in the first movable range becomes the initial arrangement, and returns to the predetermined position when the gaming ball does not reach the predetermined period. The gaming machine BL6, which is characterized in that it is configured in.

According to the gaming machine BL6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BL4 or BL5, the sorting means is configured so that the predetermined position in the first movable range is the initial arrangement, and the gaming ball is used as the sorting means. On the other hand, since the distribution means is configured to return to the predetermined position when the predetermined period is not reached, the distribution means is maintained in the first movable range unless the game balls are distributed. Therefore, there is an effect that the game ball that first reaches the distribution means can be reliably distributed to the first flow path.

In any of the game machines BL1 to BL6, a passing means provided at a position where the game balls distributed to the second flow path can pass, a game ball flowing down the first flow path, and the second flow path. A ball-entry means provided at a position where a game ball flowing down a flow path can enter, a first position where a game ball can enter the ball-entry means, and a position before the first position. A variable means that can be changed to a second position that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the entry ball means, a discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the passage of the passing means by the game ball, and a discrimination means thereof. BL7 is a gaming machine comprising: a variable control means for changing the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the result of the determination according to the above.

According to the gaming machine BL7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines BL1 to BL6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the passing means is provided at a position where the game balls distributed in the second flow path can pass. A ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the first flow path and the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter. The variable means can be changed to the first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and the second position where the game ball becomes more difficult to enter the ball entry means than the first position. Has been done. Discrimination by the discriminating means is executed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing means. The variable control means changes the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the result of the determination by the determination means.

As a result, the game can be performed by paying attention to the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BL7, based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, the first gaming state, the second gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the second gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. The variable control means includes, in the first gaming state, a gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including at least a third gaming state. In the first variable mode in which the ball is difficult to enter, the variable means is controlled to be variable, and in the second gaming state, the game ball is difficult to enter into the ball entry means. The variable means is controlled to be variable, and in the third variable mode, the game ball is more likely to enter the ball entry means than the first variable mode and the second variable mode. The gaming machine BL8, characterized in that the variable means is controlled so as to be variable.

According to the gaming machine BL8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BL7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the establishment of the predetermined setting conditions, the first gaming state, the second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the third that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. A gaming state and one gaming state from a plurality including at least are set by the gaming state setting means. In the first game state, the variable control means is controlled so that the variable means is variable in the first variable mode in which the game ball is difficult to enter into the ball entry means. In the second gaming state, the variable control means is controlled so that the variable means can be changed in the second variable mode in which it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means. In the third game state, the variable control means is controlled so that the variable means is variable in the third variable mode in which the game ball is more likely to enter the ball entering means than in the first variable mode and the second variable mode.

As a result, since a plurality of game states having different ease of entering the ball are provided, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine BL8, the first gaming state is the specific discrimination result with the first probability by the discriminating means, and the second gaming state is higher than the first probability by the discriminating means. The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific discrimination result is obtained with a high second probability, and the three gaming states are those in which the discrimination means results in the specific discrimination result with the second probability. BL9.

According to the gaming machine BL9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BL8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the first gaming state, a specific discrimination result is obtained with a first probability by the discrimination means. In the second gaming state, a specific discrimination result is obtained with a second probability higher than the first probability by the discrimination means. In the third gaming state, a specific discrimination result is obtained with a second probability by the discrimination means.

As a result, although the probability of a specific discrimination result is common between the second gaming state and the third gaming state, a novel operation of making the ease of entering the ball into the ball entry means different is realized. It has the effect of being able to.

<Characteristic BM group> (It is more advantageous to get out of the time saving)
A discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, a privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game advantageous to the player based on at least a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means, and a privilege game execution means thereof. One of a plurality of gaming states including at least one of the first gaming state and the second gaming state which is more advantageous than the first gaming state as the gaming state after the execution of the privileged game by the privileged game executing means is completed. In a state where the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means for setting the gaming state of the above and the gaming state setting means, a specific transition condition at least different from the end of the execution of the privileged game is satisfied. The gaming machine BM1 is provided with a gaming state transition means for transitioning from the first gaming state to the second gaming state.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of such gaming machines are set to either a normal gaming state or an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when the hit state ends (for example, Patent Document 1: Special Patent Document 1: Kai 2006-000392).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the normal gaming state is set when the hit state ends, the disadvantageous state continues at least until the next hit state, so that when the normal gaming state is reached. There was a problem that it was not possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, in the conventional gaming machine, in addition to the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state, a third gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state and more disadvantageous than the advantageous gaming state is provided. After the hit state ends, by configuring so that either the advantageous gaming state or the third gaming state is set, the game is attempted to continue the game until at least the third gaming state ends. There are also things that can make people think. However, in such a gaming machine, when the lottery for a predetermined number of times is completed in the third gaming state, it is normal to shift from the third gaming state to the normal gaming state, so that the gaming machine shifts to the normal gaming state. After that, there was a problem that it became difficult to improve the interest of the player.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BM1, the privilege game execution means is advantageous to the player, at least based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means executed based on the establishment of the discrimination condition yields a specific discrimination result. The game is executed. As a game state after the execution of the privilege game by the privilege game execution means is completed, one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous than the first game state. The game state is set by the game state setting means. From the first game state to the second game state based on the fact that a specific transition condition at least different from the end of the execution of the privilege game is satisfied while the first game state is set by the game state setting means. It is transferred by the game state transition means.

As a result, the game can be performed with the expectation that a specific transition condition will be satisfied in the first game state, so that there is an effect that the game in the first game state can be suppressed from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine BM1, the specific transition condition is a discrimination by the discriminating means executed after being set to the first gaming state, a predetermined specific number of times, and a deviation discriminating result different from the specific discriminating result. The gaming machine BM2, which is characterized in that it is established when becomes.

According to the gaming machine BM2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BM1, the discrimination by the discrimination means executed after being set to the first gaming state is a predetermined number of times and a deviation discrimination different from the specific discrimination result. Since a specific transition condition is satisfied when a result is obtained, in the first gaming state, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which each time the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed, it is expected that the discrimination result will be out of alignment. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine BM1 or BM2, the ball-entry means on which the game ball can enter, the first position where the game ball can enter the ball-entry means, and the ball-entry means from the first position. A variable means that can be changed to a second position where the game ball is difficult to enter, and a first variable control that makes it easy for the variable means to be changed to the first position in the first game state are executed, and the first variable control is executed. 2 In the gaming state, the variable control means is provided with a variable control executing means for executing a second variable control in which the variable means is less likely to be changed to the first position than in the first gaming state, and the discriminating condition is set to the ball entry means. The gaming machine BM3 is characterized in that it is established based on the entry of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine BM3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BM1 or BM2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable means is variable between the first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and the second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter the ball entry means than the first position. In the first gaming state, the first variable control that makes it easier for the variable means to be changed to the first position is executed by the variable control executing means, and in the second gaming state, the variable means is changed to the first position rather than the first gaming state. The second variable control, which is difficult to perform, is executed by the variable control executing means. The discrimination condition is established based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry means.

This has the effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the variable means will be variable to the first position.

In the gaming machine BM3, the gaming state setting means is among a plurality of gaming states including at least the first gaming state, the second gaming state, and the third gaming state which is more advantageous than the second gaming state. 1 is to set the game state, and the variable control executing means is easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry means in the third game state than the first variable control and the second variable control. The gaming machine BM4, characterized in that it executes the third variable control.

According to the gaming machine BM4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BM3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, one of a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state, a second gaming state, and a third gaming state that is more advantageous than the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. .. In the third game state, the variable control executing means executes the third variable control, which makes it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entering means than the first variable control and the second variable control.

As a result, in the third gaming state, the discrimination by the discriminating means is easily executed, so that the game can be efficiently performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the game will be in the third game state.

In the gaming machine BM4, when the specific determination result is obtained in the first gaming state, the gaming state setting means has the third gaming state at the first ratio as the gaming state after the privileged game is completed. Is set, and when the specific determination result is obtained in the second gaming state, the third gaming state is set at a second ratio higher than the first ratio. Game machine BM5.

According to the gaming machine BM5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BM4, when a specific determination result is obtained in the first gaming state, the first ratio is determined by the gaming state setting means as the gaming state after the privileged game is completed. On the other hand, when a specific determination result is obtained in the second gaming state, the third gaming state is set at a second ratio higher than the first ratio, so that the second gaming state is set. When a specific determination result is obtained in the gaming state, it becomes easier to set the third gaming state as the gaming state after the end of the privileged game. Therefore, in the first gaming state, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the game is played with the expectation that a specific transition condition is satisfied, rather than a specific determination result.

In the gaming machine BM5, the gaming state setting means sets the third gaming state at a third ratio higher than the first ratio as the gaming state after the end of the privileged game executed in the third gaming state. A gaming machine BM6 characterized by being set.

According to the gaming machine BM6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BM5, the gaming state after the end of the privileged game executed in the third gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means at a third ratio higher than the first ratio. Since the third gaming state is set, in the third gaming state, it is easy to enter the third gaming state again after the end of the privileged game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be greatly satisfied by being in the third gaming state.

In any of the gaming machines BM1 to BM6, a second privileged game executing means for executing the privileged game based on the entry area where the game ball can enter and the game ball entering the entry area. The gaming machine BM7, which is characterized by being provided with.

According to the gaming machine BM7, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines BM1 to BM6, the privileged game is executed by the second privileged game executing means based on the fact that the gaming ball enters the entry area. , It is possible to play the game by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the ball entry area. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic BN group> (Small hits that tend to be disadvantageous after the end of small hits if you win during the short time)
A discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a first advantageous game execution that executes a first advantageous game that is advantageous to the player based on the first discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means. As the type of the first advantageous game executed by the means and the first advantageous game executing means, one of a plurality of types including at least a first type and a second type different from the first type. A second discriminating result that is different from the first discriminating result in the discriminating by the discriminating means and the type determining means for determining the type of the first is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous game. 2 As a game state after the execution of the second advantageous game by the second advantageous game execution means for executing the advantageous game and the execution of the second advantageous game by the second advantageous game execution means is completed, the first game state and the first game state thereof. Is a discrimination between a gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from a plurality of different second gaming states including at least one and the discriminating means executed in the first gaming state, other than the second discriminating result. If the predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the game state ending means for terminating the first gaming state is provided, and the specific condition is determined by the discrimination means. The first discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination means, and the first discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination means, and the first discrimination result is obtained by the classification determination means, as compared with the case where the first type is determined by the type determination means. The gaming machine BN1 is characterized in that it is configured so that it is easier to establish when two types are determined.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has an entry port that allows the ball to enter when the electric accessory is opened (or movable), and the game ball enters the entry port. A game ball that has entered the inside of the V-winning device that is opened during a specific game (small hit game, etc.) executed based on the above-mentioned has a specific area (winning switch, etc.) provided in the V-winning device. A pachinko machine has been proposed that enables a privileged game (big hit game, etc.) to be given to a player by passing through the pachinko machine (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-010741).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, even if the small hit game is executed, the privilege game is not executed unless the game ball can be put into the inside of the V winning device. Therefore, the game is played in the V winning device. If the ball could not be inserted, there was a risk that the player's interest in the game would be impaired.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BN1, the first advantageous game that is advantageous to the player is the first based on the fact that the first discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means executed based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. It is executed by the advantageous game execution means. As the type of the first advantageous game executed by the first advantageous game execution means, one is selected from a plurality of types including at least a first type and a second type different from the first type by the type determining means. The type is determined. Based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result, the second advantageous game execution means executes the second advantageous game that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous game. To. As a game state after the execution of the second advantageous game by the second advantageous game execution means is completed, a game is selected from a plurality of states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state. The game state of 1 is set by the state setting means. When the discrimination by the discrimination means executed in the first gaming state results in a discrimination result other than the second discrimination result, if a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the first gaming state is the gaming state ending means. Is terminated by. The discrimination by the discrimination means results in the first discrimination result, and the discrimination by the discrimination means results in the first discrimination result, and the classification by the classification means determines the second type, as compared with the case where the type determination means determines the first type. Is configured so that the specific condition is more likely to be satisfied when is determined.

This has the effect that when the first determination result is obtained, the game can be performed with the expectation that the first type will be determined.

In the gaming machine BN1, the second gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the gaming state ending means is the first gaming state if the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine BN2, which is characterized by shifting from the second gaming state to the second gaming state.

According to the gaming machine BN2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BN1. That is, the second gaming state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. If the specific condition is satisfied, the game state ending means shifts from the first game state to the second game state.

As a result, it is possible to play the game in the first game state with the expectation that a specific condition is satisfied, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine BN1 or BN2 includes a ball-entry area in which a game ball can enter based on the execution of the first advantageous game, and the second advantageous game execution means plays a game in the ball-entry area. The second advantageous game is executed based on the ball entering, and the gaming state ending means is the first number of times the first advantageous game of the first type is performed in the first gaming state of 1. Based on the execution, the first gaming state is terminated, and in the first gaming state of 1, the first advantageous game of the second type is executed a second number of times less than the first number of times. The gaming machine BN3, characterized in that the first gaming state is terminated based on the above.

According to the gaming machine BN3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines BN1 or BN2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second advantageous game is executed by the second advantageous game executing means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the entry area where the ball can be entered based on the execution of the first advantageous game. .. The first game state is terminated by the game state end means based on the fact that the first advantageous game of the first type is executed the first time in the first game state of 1, while the first game state of 1 is the first. The first gaming state is terminated by the gaming state ending means based on the fact that the first advantageous game of the two types is executed the second number of times less than the first number of times.

As a result, during the execution of the first advantageous game, the game ball is entered into the entry area to execute the second advantageous game, or the specific condition is satisfied without entering the entry area. There is an effect that it is possible to realize playability that allows the player to select whether to expect or not.

In the gaming machine BN3, the gaming state setting means executes the second advantageous game based on the fact that the gaming ball enters the ball entry area during the execution of the first advantageous game of the second type. In this case, the gaming machine BN4 is characterized in that the first gaming state is determined as the gaming state after the end of the second advantageous game.

According to the gaming machine BN4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BN3, the second advantageous game is executed based on the fact that the gaming ball enters the entry area during the execution of the first advantageous game of the second type. In this case, since the first game state is set by the game state setting means as the game state after the end of the second advantageous game, it is determined whether the first advantageous game is the first type or the second type. Select whether to predict more seriously and let the pachinko ball enter the entry area to execute the second advantageous game, or to expect that a specific condition is satisfied without entering the entry area. Can be made to. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BN4, the gaming state setting means executes the second advantageous game based on the fact that the gaming ball enters the ball entry area during the execution of the first advantageous game of the first type. In this case, the gaming machine BN5 is characterized in that the second gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the second advantageous game.

According to the gaming machine BN5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BN4, the second advantageous game is executed based on the fact that the gaming ball enters the entry area during the execution of the first advantageous game of the first type. In this case, the second advantageous game is set as the game state after the end of the second advantageous game by the game state setting means. Therefore, if the first advantageous game is the first type, the ball is not allowed to enter the ball entry area. As a result, there is a possibility that a specific condition is satisfied and the game shifts to the second gaming state. On the other hand, in the case of the second type, the second advantageous game is executed by entering the ball into the ball entry area, and further, the second advantageous game is executed. 2 Move to the gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the type of the first advantageous game can be predicted more seriously.

In the gaming machine BN5, a common specific effect is executed regardless of the type of the first advantageous game determined by the type determination means based on the determination result of the first determination by the discrimination means. BN6 is a gaming machine characterized by being provided with a specific effect executing means.

According to the gaming machine BN6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BN5, it does not depend on the type of the first advantageous game determined by the type determining means based on the first discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means. Since a common specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means, it becomes difficult to distinguish between the first type and the second type from the effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to predict more seriously whether it is the first type or the second type.

In any of the gaming machines BN1 to BN6, the gaming state setting means is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, the second gaming state, the first gaming state, and the second gaming state. The game state is set by setting one of a plurality of game states including at least three game states, and the game state setting means is a game after the second advantageous game executed in the first game state is completed. As the state, the third gaming state is set at the first ratio, and the gaming state after the second advantageous game executed in the second gaming state is completed is a second higher than the first ratio. The gaming machine BN7, characterized in that the third gaming state is set at the ratio of.

According to the gaming machine BN7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines BN1 to BN6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, one of a plurality of game state setting means including at least a first game state, a second game state, and a third game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state and the second game state. The game state is set. As the gaming state after the second advantageous game executed in the first gaming state is completed, the third gaming state is set at the first ratio by the gaming state setting means, while the third gaming state is set in the second gaming state. As the gaming state after the second advantageous game is completed, the third gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means at a second ratio higher than the first ratio.

This has the effect that the game can be performed with a stronger expectation that the second advantageous game will be executed in the second game state.

In the gaming machine BN7, the gaming state setting means has a third ratio higher than the first ratio as a gaming state after the second advantageous game executed in the third gaming state is completed. 3 A gaming machine BN8 characterized by setting a gaming state.

According to the gaming machine BN8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BN7, the gaming state after the second advantageous game executed in the third gaming state is completed is higher than the first ratio by the gaming state setting means. Since the third gaming state is set at a ratio of 3, when the third gaming state is reached, the second advantageous gaming and the third gaming state are likely to be repeated. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be more satisfied when the third game state is reached.

In the gaming machine BN8, the gaming machine BN9 is characterized in that the second ratio is higher than the third ratio.

According to the gaming machine BN9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BN8, the ratio is higher than the ratio of the second ratio tooth third, so that when the second gaming state is reached, the second advantageous game is played. There is an effect that the game can be played with a stronger expectation that is executed.

<Characteristic CA group> (Invincible zone for fall lottery)
An acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, a discrimination means capable of performing discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means, and a discrimination means thereof. A display means for displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result by the above, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and a first method based on the discrimination result. A state setting means capable of setting at least one of a gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the storage means before the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means. In a gaming machine having a pre-discrimination means capable of executing discrimination based on the information stored in the computer, the gaming machine has an effect executing means capable of performing an effect during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed. The effect executing means is configured to be able to execute a period effect corresponding to a specific period in which the second gaming state is continuously set in response to the result of the determination by the prior determination means. A game machine CA1 characterized by.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. By setting a game state that is advantageous to the player, such as increasing the lottery probability, the interest in switching to the game state that is advantageous to the player and the continuous setting of the advantageous game state. It has been proposed that the game is configured so that the interest of the game is improved by the expectation of the above (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). In such a gaming machine, by utilizing a configuration in which a gaming state advantageous to the player is set, the gaming state advantageous to the player is continuously set by the player at an accurate and early timing, or is disadvantageous. There has been a demand for a gaming machine that can further improve the interest of gaming by suggesting information related to switching to the gaming state. In the present invention, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the period in which the game state advantageous to the player is set is determined in advance, and the effect based on the information on the determination result is executed. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can improve the interest.

According to the gaming machine CA1, the period effect corresponding to the specific period is executed according to the determination result of the pre-determination means, so that the period in which the second gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set by the executed period effect. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

The gaming machine CA1 is characterized in that the period effect is executed corresponding to a period in which the identification information of 1 is dynamically displayed.

According to the gaming machine CA2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CA1, the period effect is executed corresponding to the dynamic display period of the identification information of 1, so that the period during which the identification information of 1 is dynamically displayed is The content of the period effect is valid (for example, when the period effect suggesting that the setting of the second gaming state is continued is executed, the identification information of 1 being executed is dynamically displayed until the end of the period. , It is possible to recognize at an early stage that the second gaming state is continuously set), which has the effect of making it easy to understand.

In the gaming machines CA1 or CA2, when the second gaming state is set, the state setting means is before the dynamic display of the identification information is started based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means. CA3 is a gaming machine that is configured to be capable of setting the first gaming state.

In the gaming machine CA3, since the second gaming state is set before the dynamic display of the identification information is started, the player determines whether the gaming state has been changed each time the identification information is dynamically displayed. It has the effect of making you interested in.

<Characteristic CB group> (New game characteristics based on the number of counts in the normal map)
The first information based on the first ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, the second entering means different from the first entering means, and the game ball entering the first entering means. The first information acquisition means capable of acquiring the second information, and the second information acquisition means capable of acquiring the second information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means. The first determination is executed based on the storage means in which the first information and the second information are stored, and the first information stored in the storage means, and the second information is based on the second information. The first privilege can be given based on the discrimination means capable of performing the discrimination and the result of the first discrimination by the discrimination means being a specific first discrimination result, and the result of the second discrimination is specific. In a gaming machine having a privilege granting means capable of granting the second privilege different from the first privilege based on the second determination result, a specific entry ball into which a game ball can enter is possible. The flow path switching means includes a means and a flow path switching means capable of switching a flow path through which the game ball flows down according to the number of game balls that have entered the specific ball entry means. The first guidance state for guiding the game ball to the first ball entry means and the second guidance state for guiding the game ball to the second ball entry means can be set by switching the flow path. The gaming machine CB1 characterized by being a machine.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. There are multiple entrances on the surface of the game board that allow the game balls to enter, and the game machines that have improved the interest of the game by making the entrances for the balls different depending on the flow path through which the game balls flow down. It has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233181). In such a gaming machine, the flow path through which the gaming ball flows tends to be constant, and there is a problem that the gaming becomes monotonous. In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, by switching the flow path through which the pachinko ball flows according to the conditions, and by switching the entrance for the pachinko ball to enter, a wide variety of pachinko balls can be entered. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the game from becoming monotonous by allowing the ball to enter the ball mouth and suppressing the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

According to the gaming machine CB1, the first guidance state and the second guidance state are switched depending on the number of game balls that have entered the specific entry means, so that the guidance state is determined by the number of game balls that are entered into the specific entry means. There is an effect that the fun of the game can be improved by controlling the ball-entry means for entering the ball by arbitrarily switching.

In the gaming machine CB1, a variable means that can be changed into an open state in which a game ball is easy to enter into a specific ball entry means and a closed state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the open state, and the variable means thereof. It has a variable control means that changes from the closed state to the open state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the variable control means is variable during a period in which a first number or more of balls can be entered into the specific ball entry means. It is possible to switch between a first opening that changes the means to the open state and a second opening that changes the variable means to the open state during a period in which it is difficult for the first number to enter the ball. The gaming machine CB2, which is characterized by being the one that has been used.

According to the gaming machine CB2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CB1, it is possible to switch between a state in which the first number or more of balls can be entered and a state in which it is difficult to enter the ball. It has the effect of being able to control the number.

A gaming machine CB3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine CB2, the variable control means executes the first opening when the second induction state is set.

According to the gaming machine CB3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine CB2, when the second guidance state is set, it is possible for the player to enter the first number or more into the specific entry means. There is an effect that the guidance state can be intentionally switched easily.

<Characteristic CC group> (Control of count number in normal map)
The first information based on the first ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, the second entering means different from the first entering means, and the game ball entering the first entering means. The first information acquisition means capable of acquiring the second information, and the second information acquisition means capable of acquiring the second information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means. The first determination is executed based on the storage means in which the first information and the second information are stored, and the first information stored in the storage means, and the second information is based on the second information. The first privilege can be given based on the discrimination means capable of executing the discrimination and the result of the first discrimination by the discrimination means being a specific first discrimination result, and the result of the second discrimination is specific. A specific entry ball to which a game ball can enter in a gaming machine having a privilege granting means capable of granting the second privilege different from the first privilege based on the second determination result. It has means, and has means for changing the acquisition ratio, which changes the acquisition ratio of the first information and the second information according to the number of game balls that have entered the specific ball entry means. The gaming machine CC1 featuring.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. There are multiple entrances on the surface of the game board that allow the game balls to enter, and the game machines that have improved the interest of the game by making the entrances for the balls different depending on the flow path through which the game balls flow down. It has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233181). In such a gaming machine, the flow path through which the gaming ball flows tends to be constant, and there is a problem that the gaming becomes monotonous. In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, by switching the flow path through which the pachinko ball flows according to the conditions, and by switching the entrance for the pachinko ball to enter, a wide variety of pachinko balls can be entered. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the game from becoming monotonous by allowing the ball to enter the ball mouth and suppressing the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

According to the gaming machine CC1, since the acquisition ratios of the first information and the second information can be different depending on the number of gaming balls that have entered the specific ball entry means, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine CC1, a variable means that can be changed into an open state in which the game ball easily enters the specific ball entry means and a closed state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the open state, and the variable means thereof. It has a variable control means that changes from the closed state to the open state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the variable control means is variable during a period in which a first number or more of balls can be entered into the specific ball entry means. It is possible to switch between a first opening that changes the means to the open state and a second opening that changes the variable means to the open state during a period in which it is difficult for the first number to enter the ball. The gaming machine CC2, which is characterized by being a pachinko machine.

According to the gaming machine CC2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CC1, it is possible to switch between a state in which the first number or more of balls can be entered and a state in which it is difficult to enter the ball. It has the effect of being able to control the number.

In the gaming machine CC2, the variable means also regulates the entry of a gaming ball into the first entry means or the second entry means when the variable means is in the open state. Game machine CC3.

According to the gaming machine CC3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CC2, when the variable means is in the open state, the entry of the gaming ball into the first entry means or the second entry means is restricted. Therefore, the entry of the game ball into the specific entry means and the entry of the game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means occur at the same time, which suppresses the execution of an incomprehensible game. It has the effect of being able to.

<Characteristic CD group> (Preliminary development control when the symbol is stopped)
In order to show a specific discrimination result by the discrimination means capable of executing a predetermined discrimination, the display control means for dynamically displaying the discrimination information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means and then stopping the display, and the display control means. In a gaming machine having a privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to a player when the identification information is stopped and displayed, the display control means dynamically displays a plurality of display modes as the identification information. A voice control means for displaying and stopping and displaying the plurality of display modes at different timings, and capable of outputting voice based on the stop display of the display mode by the display control means, and a voice control means thereof. It has a voice information determining means for determining the voice information output by the voice output means from a plurality of voice information, and a regulating means capable of regulating the type of the voice information determined by the voice information determining means. A game machine CD1 characterized by this.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. When notifying the lottery result, it has been proposed that a plurality of symbol rows are variablely displayed so that the lottery result is notified by a combination of the stopped and displayed symbols (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013). -090780 (Ab.). In addition, some of the above-mentioned gaming machines are configured to give sharpness to the effect of notifying the lottery result by outputting a sound effect when a plurality of variablely displayed symbol rows are stopped and displayed. .. However, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous due to repeated monotonous sound effects, and the player gets tired of the game. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game in which a player can be prevented from getting tired of the game at an early stage by suppressing repeated output of monotonous sound effects in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine CD1, by restricting the type of voice information determined by the voice information determining means, the type of voice information can be easily determined as intended at the time of design, and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. It has the effect of suppressing defects.

The gaming machine CD1 has a storage means capable of storing the voice information determined by the voice information determining means as history information, and the regulation means corresponds to the history information stored in the storage means. The gaming machine CD2, which regulates the type of the voice information determined by the voice information determining means.

According to the game machine CD2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine CD1, the determined voice information is stored in the storage means as history information, and the voice determined by the voice information determining means corresponding to the stored history information. By restricting the type of information, it is possible to control the voice information determined in response to the history information, and it is possible to make the type of the determined voice information suitable.

The gaming machine CD3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine CD2, the regulating means regulates that the same type as the type of the voice information stored before a predetermined number of times is determined.

According to the gaming machine CD3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine CD2, it is possible to suppress the continuous determination of the same type of voice information, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the game becomes monotonous.

The gaming machine CD4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine CD1 or CD2, the regulating means regulates the determination of the type of the voice information determined a specific number of times or more in a predetermined period.

According to the gaming machine CD4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CD1 or CD2, it is possible to suppress a problem that the same voice information type is excessively determined in a predetermined period, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the game becomes monotonous. There is an effect.

In any of the gaming machines CD1 to CD4, the effect executed by the effect executing means includes a symbol effect in which a plurality of identification symbols are dynamically displayed, and the first effect is the plurality of identifications. Among the symbols, the gaming machine CD5 is characterized in that the identification symbol of 1 is stopped and displayed.

According to the gaming machine CD5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines CD1 to CD4, various sounds are output when the identification symbol is stopped and displayed, so that various effects when the identification symbol is stopped and displayed are output. It is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

A determination means capable of executing a determination in any of the gaming machines CD1 to CD5, and a privilege granting means capable of imparting a privilege advantageous to the player based on the determination result by the determination means being a specific determination result. The gaming machine CD6, wherein the voice information determining means can determine the voice information based on a determination result by the determination means.

According to the gaming machine CD6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines CD1 to CD5, the determination result can be identified by the voice output corresponding to the first effect, so that the output voice can be identified. It has the effect of making the game interesting to the type.

The game machine CD6 has an acquisition means capable of acquiring information and an information storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the determination means is the information stored in the information storage means. The gaming machine has a pre-determination means that executes a pre-determination prior to the determination means based on the information stored in the information storage means. The gaming machine CD7 is characterized in that the voice information determining means is configured to be able to determine the voice information based on the preliminary determination result by the prior determination means.

According to the gaming machine CD7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine CD6, the result of the preliminary determination can be identified by the type of the output voice, so that the type of the output voice can be interested. It has the effect of being able to do it.

<Characteristic CE group> (Pixel number switching control depending on the display content)
The amount of data in at least two or more of the display information determining means for determining the display information of the display mode to be displayed by the display means from the plurality of display information and the display information determined by the display information determining means. It has a data amount discriminating means for discriminating the corresponding information, and a variable control means for variablely controlling the display mode to be displayed on the display means based on the discriminating result determined by the data amount discriminating means. The game machine CE1 is characterized in that the display information determining means determines the display information at at least two or more timings.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. As an effect for notifying the lottery result, a display device configured to display various images and moving images has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). However, since the notice display mode is randomly displayed, there is a problem that the displayed image data becomes excessive and the addition to the display control or the like increases. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game capable of reducing a control load in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine CE1, since the display mode displayed is variably controlled based on the result determined by the data amount determination means, it is possible to perform display control according to the data amount, and the control load can be reduced. It has the effect of being able to reduce it.

In the gaming machine CE1, the data amount determining means determines whether or not a specific condition is satisfied based on the total value of the information corresponding to the data amount of the display mode displayed in the predetermined first period. The gaming machine CE2 featuring.

According to the gaming machine CE2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CE1, it is determined whether or not the specific condition is satisfied based on the total value of the data amount of the display mode displayed in the predetermined first period. It is possible to suppress the problem that the control load increases in.

In the gaming machine CE1 or CE2, when the determination means capable of executing the determination, the effect execution means capable of executing the effect based on the determination result of the determination means, and the specific effect are executed by the effect execution means. It has a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to a player, and the display information determining means determines a display mode displayed in the effect executed by the effect executing means. Game machine CE3.

According to the gaming machine CE3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine CE1 or CE2, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the effect notified by the determination result cannot be stably executed due to an increase in the amount of data.

In any of the gaming machines CE1 to CE3, the display mode displayed by the display mode determining means is such that the status information corresponding to the data amount is set as the information corresponding to the data amount. The gaming machine CE4 is characterized in that the data amount determining means determines whether or not the total value to which the status information is added is equal to or greater than a predetermined value.

According to the gaming machine CE4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines CE1 to CE3, the effect that the data amount can be easily determined by setting the status information corresponding to the data amount is set. be.

In any of the gaming machines CE1 to CE4, the variable control means corresponds to the display information determined by the display information determining means so that the total value of the data amount of the display mode displayed on the display means is reduced. CE5 is a gaming machine characterized in that the display mode is variable.

According to the gaming machine CE5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines CE1 to CE4, the amount of data is suppressed, so that there is an effect that the control load can be reduced. The game machine CE5 is characterized in that the variable control means sets a display mode in which the number of pixels of the display mode corresponding to at least one display information determined by the display information determination means is reduced. Game machine CE6.

According to the gaming machine CE6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CE5, the amount of data can be suppressed by setting a small number of pixels in the existing display mode, and the problem that the display data becomes excessive can be suppressed. There is.

<Characteristic CF group> (Variable effect when the button is pressed)
A discrimination means capable of performing discrimination, a display means for displaying identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means. , The dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the identification information for showing the specific discrimination result on the display means are displayed. In this case, in a gaming machine having a privilege granting means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player, an operation that can be operated by the player as a dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. An operation dynamic display mode in which the display mode is changed by operating the means is set, and the validity period setting means for setting the validity period during which the operation on the operation means is valid, and the validity period The gaming machine CF1 characterized by having a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect based on the remaining period.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. As an effect for notifying the lottery result, a method has been proposed in which the player can directly participate in the game by changing the effect by operating an operation means that can be operated by the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). However, since the method such as the timing of operating the operating means and the period of operation is not fixed depending on the player, there is a problem that the interest in executing the production is lowered. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machines to provide gaming machines that can improve the interest.

According to the gaming machine CF1, when the operating means is operated, a specific effect can be executed based on the remaining period of the valid period, so that the valid period can be set long and the game can be played widely. Even if a person is configured to be able to operate the operating means, a specific effect is executed based on the remaining period of the valid period, so that various effects can be executed, and the interest of the game can be enjoyed. It has the effect of being able to improve.

In the gaming machine CF1, the suggestion mode setting means for setting the suggestion mode suggesting that the operation means is operated a plurality of times within the valid period set by the validity period setting means, and the suggestion mode setting means for setting the suggestion mode setting means. The effect period setting means for setting a predetermined effect period within the valid period for the suggestion mode corresponding to the operation of 1 and the remaining period of the effect period set by the effect period setting means. CF2 is a gaming machine having a notification means capable of notifying the remaining period mode indicating the above.

According to the gaming machine CF2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CF1, it is possible to make the player think that the validity period is set for each of the multiple operations, so that the multiple operations can be performed. It has the effect of being able to inform you of what to do in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the gaming machine CF1 or CF2, the identification information is configured by combining a plurality of identification symbols, and the dynamic display means dynamically displays the plurality of identification symbols, respectively, to show the discrimination result. The plurality of identification symbols are stopped in combination, and the operation dynamic display mode is displayed in a specific mode by operating the operation means for at least a part of the plurality of identification symbols. When the remaining period is equal to or longer than a predetermined period as the specific effect, the specific effect executing means is configured to follow the dynamically displayed identification information. The gaming machine CF3, characterized in that it executes an effect corresponding to the information reflected in the dynamic display of the identification information at which the dynamic display is started.

According to the gaming machine CF3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CF1 or CF2, by operating the operating means so that the remaining period is equal to or longer than the predetermined period, the effect is reflected during the dynamic display after the dynamic display. By executing the effect to be performed, there is an effect that the operating means can be enthusiastically operated in a short period of time.

<Characteristic CG group> (3 operations)
It has an operation means that can be operated by the player and an operation effect setting means that can set an operation effect whose effect mode changes based on the operation of the operation means, and is set by the operation effect setting means. In the operation effect that can be performed, a plurality of operation effects that change the effect mode according to the number of operations of the operation means are set, and when the plurality of operation effects are set, the plurality of operations effects are set. The gaming machine CG1 is characterized in that the suggestion mode of the number corresponding to the number of operations set in the operation effect is displayed.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. As an effect for notifying the lottery result, a method has been proposed in which the player can directly participate in the game by changing the effect by operating an operation means that can be operated by the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). However, there is a problem that the interest is lowered in performing the production based on the operation of the operating means. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machines to provide gaming machines that can improve the interest.

According to the gaming machine CG1, when a plurality of operation effects are set, the suggestion mode of the number corresponding to the number of operations is displayed, so that an easy-to-understand game can be provided and the interest of the game can be improved. be.

In the gaming machine CG1, when the plurality of operation effects are set, the validity period setting means for setting the validity period in which the operation of the operation means is valid and the validity period set by the validity period setting means are set. The gaming machine CG2 is characterized by having a variable display means for setting a variable display mode that is variably displayed in response to a decrease in the valid period for each of the suggested modes.

According to the gaming machine CG2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CG1, the variable display mode makes it seem as if the valid period is set for each suggestion mode, and the timing of each operation is variablely displayed. It can be operated according to the embodiment, and there is an effect that the timing at which the operation effect is displayed can be optimized.

In the gaming machine CG1 or CG2, the plurality of operating effects is characterized in that the operating effects executed according to the number of times the operating means are operated are preset.

According to the gaming machine CG3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine CG1 or CG2, there is no need to individually set a plurality of operation effects, and there is an effect that the control of being operated a plurality of times can be easily performed.

<Characteristic CH group> (Cosmo up)
An acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, a discrimination means capable of performing discrimination based on the information stored by the storage means, and a discrimination means thereof. The display means for displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result by the display means, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and the dynamic display means for the dynamic display means. When the dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information and the identification information for indicating the specific discrimination result are displayed on the display means, a privilege advantageous to the player is provided. The effect executing means having the privilege granting means and capable of executing the effect during the period when the identification information is dynamically displayed, and the specific information based on the specific effect executed by the effect executing means. The gaming machine CH1 is characterized by having a specific information storage means to be stored and a special effect determination means for determining a special effect based on the specific information stored in the specific storage means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. As an effect for notifying the lottery result, it has been proposed that a advance notice effect suggesting the lottery result is executed before the lottery result is notified (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). ). However, there was a need for further improvement in interest. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machines to provide gaming machines that can improve the interest.

According to the gaming machine CH1, the special effect is determined based on the specific information stored when the specific effect is executed, so that the effect to be executed thereafter can be changed by executing the specific effect. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game by providing different games for each player.

Based on the suggestion means in which the suggestion mode corresponding to the specific information stored in the specific information storage means is suggested and the special effect determined by the special effect determination means are executed in the gaming machine CH1. Further, it has a suggestion mode variable means for varying the suggestion mode, and when the suggestion mode is a predetermined mode, the residual dynamic display period of the identification information is configured to be a predetermined period or longer. The gaming machine CH2, which is characterized by being a machine.

According to the gaming machine CH2, it is possible to determine that the identification information is not the timing to be displayed in the aspect for showing the discrimination result according to the suggestion mode, and there is an effect that the problem of overlooking the discrimination result can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine CH1 or CH2, the effect determined by the special effect determining means, which has an operation means that can be operated by the player, is composed of an operation effect in which the effect mode is changed by operating the operation means. CH3 is a gaming machine CH3, wherein the number of times the operation effect is executed is set in response to the specific information stored in the specific information storage means.

According to the gaming machine CH3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine CH1 or CH2, the number of times the operation effect is executed is set by the stored specific information, so that the number of times the player can operate the operating means. It has the effect of suppressing the problem of misunderstanding.

<Characteristic CI group> (Pseudo light guide plate production)
In a gaming machine having a display means and a display control means capable of displaying a second display mode different from the first display mode from the first display mode, the second display mode is the first display mode. On the other hand, it is configured in a display mode in which the focal position is variable, and the display control means is configured so that the first display mode and the second display mode can be displayed in an overlapping manner. The gaming machine CI1 characterized by this.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. After the symbol for showing the lottery result is variablely displayed on the display means, it is stopped and displayed by the combination of the symbols indicating the lottery result, and during the variable display, a notice effect suggesting the lottery result is executed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). In such a gaming machine, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a driving object, a light emitting device such as an LED, or the like is arranged on a gaming board or the like and operated in relation to a display mode to further improve the interest of the game. In such a configuration, the cost of the gaming machine becomes excessive, and there is a demand for a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game while reducing the cost. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming in order to solve the above-mentioned problems.

According to the gaming machine CI1, by displaying the display modes with variable focal positions in an overlapping manner, it is possible to make the display mode look like a perspective display to the player, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved. ..

The gaming machine CI1 is characterized in that the second display mode includes a mode in which the display object displayed in the first display mode is out of focus.

According to the gaming machine CI2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CI1, the aspect in which the display object is out of focus is included, so that the first display aspect and the second display aspect can be overlapped with each other. It has the effect of providing a perspective effect.

In the gaming machine CI1 or CI2, the display control means displays the first display mode for the first period, and then displays the second display mode a plurality of times on the front side of the first display mode. The gaming machine CI3 is configured so that the second state to be hidden can be repeatedly displayed.

According to the gaming machine CI3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CI1 or CI2, the second display mode is repeatedly displayed and hidden on the front side of the first display mode in a short time, so that an afterimage and a first display mode are repeated. There is an effect that it is possible to make it seem as if the first display mode is overhanging on the front side by combining the above.

<Characteristic CJ group> (Control of production using hold information and inside information)
An acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, a discrimination means capable of performing discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means, and a discrimination means thereof. A display means for displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and a first method based on the discrimination result. A state setting means capable of setting at least one of a gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the storage means before the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means. A staging execution means capable of executing an effect on a gaming machine having a pre-determination means capable of executing a pre-determination based on the information stored in the above, and an effect mode of the effect executed by the effect execution means. It has a staging selection means capable of selecting one staging mode group from a plurality of staging mode groups including at least, and a group switching means for switching the staging mode group selected by the staging selection means. The gaming machine CJ1 is characterized in that the group switching means determines the type of the staging mode group based on the discrimination result of the pre-discrimination means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Then, it is possible to set a game state in which it is easy to win in a winning / losing lottery and a game state in which it is difficult to win, and a game with a different degree of expectation of winning is provided to the player according to the set game state. Things have been proposed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). By performing an effect to make it difficult for the player to understand the currently set gaming state on such a gaming machine, the game is played while expecting that the gaming state advantageous to the player is set. There was something to be done, but in this case, even if the gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set, the player thinks that the gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player is set, and the game is played. There was a problem that motivation was reduced. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by performing an effect capable of appropriately suggesting a set game state.

According to the gaming machine CJ1, the effect mode group is switched based on the determination result of the prior determination means, and the effect is executed by the effect execution means based on the switched effect mode group, so that the effect is based on the effect mode to be executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to predict the later game situation. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine CJ1, the effect executed by the effect executing means includes a suggestion effect suggesting that the two gaming states are set, and the group switching means is the pre-determination means. It is determined whether or not the second gaming state can be switched to the first gaming state by the prior determination according to the above, and the effect mode group from which the suggestion effect corresponding to the determination result can be selected is determined. The gaming machine CJ2 featuring.

According to the gaming machine CJ2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CJ1, it is determined based on the staging mode group corresponding to the determination that the gaming state is switched from the second gaming state to the first gaming state by the prior determination means. Since the effect can be executed by the effect execution means, it is possible to predict the currently set game state or the game state that can be set later based on the effect mode of the effect to be executed. .. Further, since the effect mode group is switched based on the prior determination information that the game state actually shifts, it is possible to execute the effect with high reliability for the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can pay attention to the effect to be executed and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine CJ1 or CJ2, the state setting means is set by switching to the first gaming state at the start of dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the specific determination result. Machine CJ3.

According to the gaming machine CJ3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CJ1 or CJ2, the state setting means sets the switching from the second gaming state to the first gaming state at the start of the dynamic display of the identification information. It has the effect of making it difficult for the player to understand the timing of switching states.

In any of the gaming machines CJ1 to CJ3, a period until at least a predetermined number of discrimination results are displayed by the identification information for indicating the discrimination result based on the setting of the second gaming state. The advantageous period setting means for setting an advantageous period that is advantageous to the player, and the suggestion mode are the gaming states set by the state setting means at the time when the period until the determination of the predetermined number of times is displayed has elapsed. The gaming machine CJ4, which is characterized by suggesting.

According to the gaming machine CJ4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines CJ1 to CJ3, the suggestion mode is displayed based on the elapsed status of the set advantageous period, so that the suggestion is made immediately after the advantageous period is set. It is possible to suppress the display of the aspect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from immediately decreasing and to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic CK group> (meter sound control)
In a gaming machine having an operation means that can be operated by a player and an operation effect execution means that can execute an operation effect based on operating the operation means, the operation effect execution means is used for a specific period of time. In addition, the specific operation effect is configured to be executable when the operation means is operated, and the specific operation effect corresponds to the operated period when the operation means is operated during the specific period. The gaming machine CK1 is configured to perform different aspects.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Then, before the lottery result is notified, an operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means can be executed as a suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result, and a period until the lottery result is notified is set. There was something to entertain the player. Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machines, there are those that allow the player to operate the operating means in order to further enhance the effect of the effect (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). In such a gaming machine, the same operation effect is executed regardless of the timing at which the operation means is operated, so that there is a problem that the effect of the effect is lowered and the interest of the game is lowered. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a game having an improved interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine CK1, when the operating means is operated, the specific operation effect can be executed in different modes corresponding to the operated period, so that the specific operation executed when the operating means is operated can be executed. There is an effect that the variation of the production can be increased and the fun of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine CK1, the specific operation effect is at least a display effect in which the display mode is changed stepwise according to the period in which the operation means is operated, and a voice effect corresponding to the variable display effect. A gaming machine CK2 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine CK2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine CK1, a display effect in which the display mode is changed stepwise as a specific operation effect and a voice effect corresponding to the variable display effect are executed. It has the effect of enhancing the staging effect.

In the gaming machine CK2, the voice effect is a reproduction process in which reproduction of the corresponding audio data is started when the operation means is operated, and the audio data executed in the reproduction process is executed. The reproduction is continued for a predetermined reproduction period, or when the operation means performs a predetermined operation before the reproduction period is continued, the reproduction of the audio data is stopped or the audio is reproduced. The gaming machine CK3, characterized in that the process of stopping the output of the game is executed.

According to the game machine CK3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine CK2, the voice effect in which the voice data is reproduced is stopped when the operation means is operated in advance, so that the display effect and the voice effect can be combined. It is possible to perform a production with a sense of unity, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine CK3, after the processing of stopping the reproduction of the audio data or stopping the output of the audio is executed, the reproduction is stopped or the output of the audio is stopped based on the operation of the operating means. The gaming machine CK4, characterized in that the reproduction is started or the sound output is executed from the position where the game was played.

According to the gaming machine CK4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CK3, the reproduction of the stopped audio data can be restarted again based on the operation of the operating means, so that the display effect and the audio effect give a sense of unity. There is an effect that it is possible to execute the production with the above, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic CL group> (Variation straddle voice control)
A discrimination means capable of performing discrimination, a display means for displaying identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and a dynamic display means thereof. When the dynamic display period determining means dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are stopped and displayed, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player can be executed. In a game machine having a game execution means, a display effect execution means capable of executing a display effect during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, and a display effect execution means during a period in which the display effect is executed by the display effect execution means. It has a voice effect executing means capable of executing a voice effect, and the display effect executing means performs 1 display effect in a period until the identification information for showing the determination result of a predetermined number of times is stopped and displayed. The specific display effect to be executed is configured to be executable, and the voice effect execution means is configured to be able to execute the specific voice effect corresponding to the period during which the specific display effect is executed, and the specific voice effect is executed. When it is executed, the process of stopping the reproduction of the specific voice effect based on the stop display of the identification information and restarting it in correspondence with the start of the dynamic display of the identification information is executed. The game machine CL1 characterized by this.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). Further, some of the above-mentioned gaming machines are configured so that a specific effect can be executed in a specific period until the winning / failing lottery is executed a predetermined number of times, and the effect differs depending on the period in which the winning / failing lottery is executed. There was something that enhances the staging effect by providing the player with. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, there are cases where the winning / failing lottery is executed without interruption during a specific period, and there are cases where the winning / failing lottery is interrupted during the specific period. There was a problem that it was not possible to give a sense of unity to the effect to be performed, and it was not possible to enhance the effect of the effect. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest by enhancing the effect of production.

According to the gaming machine CL1, the specific voice effect executed during the period in which the specific display effect is executed is stopped based on the stop display of the identification information, and the dynamic display of the identification information is started. Since it is restarted based on the above, it is possible to give a sense of unity between the specific display effect and the specific audio effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of directing can be enhanced and the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine CL1 is characterized in that the voice effect executing means is configured to output a special sound when the reproduction of the specific sound effect is stopped. According to the gaming machine CL2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine CL1, a special voice is output when the specific voice effect is stopped, so that the next identification information is dynamically displayed after the identification information is stopped and displayed. When the period until the start is short, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the specific voice production is interrupted, and there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

It is preferable that the special voice output by the voice effect executing means is at least continuously output from the time when the identification information is stopped and displayed until a predetermined period elapses. This makes it easier for the player to think that the specific voice effect is continuously executed over the dynamic display of the identification information a plurality of times.

In the gaming machine CL1 or CL2, the specific display effect is characterized in that an effect corresponding to the end of the dynamic display period of the identification information of 1 is preset.

According to the gaming machine CL3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CL1 or CL2, an effect corresponding to the end of the dynamic display period of the identification information of 1 is set in advance as a specific display effect, so that the dynamic display period There is an effect that the effect corresponding to the end can be surely executed and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines CL1 to CL3, the display effect executing means displays the specific display effect based on the fact that the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped during the period when the specific display effect is executed. The gaming machine CL4 characterized by being interrupted.

According to the gaming machine CL4, in addition to any effect played by the gaming machines CL1 to CL3, the display of the specific display effect can be interrupted based on the stop of the dynamic display of the identification information, so that the specific display can be interrupted. It is possible to perform a staging with a sense of unity by the staging and the specific voice staging, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. The identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time, provided that the prize is won (or passed through the operating port). Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
640 Second ball entry port (ball entry means)
C213 Discrimination means C308 Acquisition means C310 Storage means C4104 Production execution means

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a winning game when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Among such gaming machines, for example, there are some that aim to improve the interest by providing a plurality of hit types having different degrees of advantage for the player.

Japanese Patent No. 25144417

However, further improvement of interest is required.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is based on a discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition and a discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes a specific discrimination result . It is said that the determination result of the determination means becomes the specific determination result in the first gaming state which has the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player and at least disadvantageous to the player. Based on the establishment of at least different specific setting conditions, a second gaming state setting means for setting a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and a predetermined specific condition are established. Based on the above, the second gaming state is provided with a specific game execution means for executing a specific game in which the player can acquire a predetermined privilege, and the second gaming state acquires the predetermined privilege more than the first gaming state. It is an easy gaming state, and the first gaming state is a gaming state that is at least set when the gaming machine is initialized, and the gaming machine provides a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball into a gaming area. It has a configuration in which the gaming state at the time when the specific condition is satisfied can be maintained even after the specific game executed based on the establishment of the specific condition is completed, and the specific condition is the firing. A condition that can be satisfied when the game ball is launched in the first direction by the means, but not a condition that can be satisfied when the game ball is launched in a second direction different from the first direction by the launching means. The first gaming state is determined when the gaming ball continues to be launched in the second direction than when the gaming ball continues to be launched in the first direction by the launching means. The condition is easily satisfied, and in the second gaming state, the gaming ball is launched in the second direction when the gaming ball continues to be launched in the first direction by the launching means. The configuration is such that the determination condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the case of continuing, and the gaming machine is in the second gaming state based on the fact that the determination of the predetermined discrimination means is executed in the second gaming state. A first effect executing means capable of executing the first effect including at least the first effect mode corresponding to the above, and a predetermined period between at least the setting of the second game state and the first execution of the specific game. A second effect executing means capable of executing a second effect configured to include at least a second effect mode that is not started when the first effect is executed, and the specific determination in the first gaming state. Even if the result is obtained, it is based on the specific discrimination result. The second game state can be set when the specific setting condition is satisfied without executing the privilege game after the privilege game is completed, and the specific setting condition is at least the game. Conditions that can be satisfied when the machine is initialized and the first gaming state is set, and then the determination result is different from the specific determination result continuously over a predetermined specific number of determinations. Is.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the establishment of the discriminating condition and the discriminating result of the discriminating means are advantageous to the player based on the specific discriminant result. A specific setting that is at least different from the determination result of the determination means being the specific determination result in the first gaming state, which has a privilege game execution means for executing the privileged game, and is at least disadvantageous to the player. Based on the fact that the condition is satisfied, the second gaming state setting means for setting the second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the predetermined specific condition are satisfied. The second game state is a game state in which the player is more likely to obtain the predetermined privilege than the first game state, comprising a specific game execution means for executing the specific game in which the player can acquire the predetermined privilege. The first gaming state is a gaming state that is at least set when the gaming machine is initialized, and the gaming machine has a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball into a gaming area, and is specified. The gaming state at the time when the condition is satisfied is a configuration that can be maintained even after the specific game executed based on the establishment of the specific condition is completed, and the specific condition is the first direction by the launching means. It is a condition that can be satisfied when the game ball is launched, and is not satisfied when the game ball is launched in a second direction different from the first direction by the launching means, and is the first condition. In the gaming state, the determination condition is more likely to be satisfied when the gaming ball is continuously launched in the second direction than when the gaming ball is continuously launched in the first direction by the launching means. In the second gaming state, the case where the gaming ball is continuously launched in the first direction by the launching means is larger than the case where the gaming ball is continuously launched in the second direction. The first game machine corresponds to the second gaming state based on the fact that the determination of the predetermined discriminating means is executed in the second gaming state. The first effect execution means capable of executing the first effect including at least the effect mode, and at least a predetermined period between the setting of the second game state and the first execution of the specific game. It is assumed that the player has a second effect executing means capable of executing a second effect configured to include at least a second effect mode that is not started at the time of executing the effect, and the specific determination result is obtained in the first gaming state. However, the award game based on the specific determination result is completed. The configuration is such that the second gaming state can be set when the specific setting condition is satisfied without executing the privilege game after the completion, and the specific setting condition is such that at least the gaming machine is initialized. This is a condition that can be satisfied when the determination result different from the specific determination result is continuously obtained over a predetermined specific number of determinations after the first gaming state is set .

This has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the effect displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the ending of the jackpot game in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content during the probability change in the first embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the second special symbol is non-variable after the start of the hit fluctuation of the first special symbol in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents when the second special symbol is non-variable, and (b) is the first embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of a small hit by the 2nd special symbol in RUSH in a form. (A) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the second special symbol is changing after the start of the hit change of the first special symbol in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents when the second special symbol is changing. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content when the 2nd special symbol stopped the fluctuation during the hit variation of the 1st special symbol in a form. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a state in which the result of the variation display of the first special symbol is a jackpot A during RUSH in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a state in which the RUSH in the first embodiment is shown. It is a figure which showed an example of the state that the result of the variation display of the 1st special symbol became a jackpot C or a jackpot D. (A) is a diagram showing the card forgetting warning screen in the first embodiment, and (b) to (d) are timing charts showing the timing of displaying the card forgetting warning screen in the first embodiment. be. It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the game flow of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the ROM of the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit random number table, and (c) is a schematic diagram. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the random number table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit type selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of the variation pattern selection table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of a normal table schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving / probability variation table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the latent probability table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the stop display mode selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the additional effect selection table. It is a block diagram of the electric structure of the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) to (c) are explanatory views explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surfaces B to D. (A) to (c) are explanatory views explaining the back surface E. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol change start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation execution processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation stop processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol change start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 deviation variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in a main control unit. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation execution process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 disengagement stop process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the through-gate passage processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prize processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the stop type command reception process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the state command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the hit-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot related processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the small hit-related processing which is executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the remaining number update process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the temporary stop-related processing executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation resumption processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process for special figure 1 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process for special figure 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the various counter update processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (A) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. It is a flowchart which showed the ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the rush inrush command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the additional effect command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (A) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in the display control device. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the jackpot C is won in the probable change state in the second embodiment. FIG. 1 is a relationship diagram between the game content of the special figure 1 game and the grant privilege after the probability change state in the second embodiment is set. (A) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the second special symbol is changing when the hit symbol of the first special symbol in the second embodiment is stopped, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents when the second special symbol is stopped. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of the 2nd special symbol stop while the hit symbol stop of the 1st special symbol in a form. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the ROM of the main control unit in the 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the jackpot type selection 2 table schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the loss type selection table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of 2 tables for time saving and probability change schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol change stop process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol determination period setting process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the fixed time executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol motion stop processing 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol determination period setting process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the remaining number update process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the temporary stop-related process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the resumption process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the symbol determination-related processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the various counter update process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 1 is a relationship diagram between the game content of the special figure 1 game and the grant privilege after the probability change state in the third embodiment is set. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the end of the jackpot in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the first variation after the jackpot. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the third variation after the jackpot in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the fourth variation after the jackpot in the third embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the third variation after the jackpot in the case where the third variation after the jackpot in the third embodiment is a jackpot, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the third variation after the jackpot, and (b) is between the first to third fluctuations after the jackpot. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content of the 2nd change after the big hit when the special figure 1 small hit is won. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the structure of the ROM of the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 3 table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit random number 3 table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit type selection 3 table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 3 table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection 3 table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation 3 table, and (c) is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the probability variation A table schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probabilistic B table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probabilistic C table, and (c) is a probabilistic D table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of 3 tables for latent accuracy schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the probabilistic staging selection table schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the deviation processing of special figure 1 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows 1st special symbol change stop process 3 executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 disengagement stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the prize information-related processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot related process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the big hit end processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process for probability variation executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the special figure 1 jackpot is won during the probability change state in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is the flow when the time is shortened during the probability change state. It is a timing chart shown. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the RUSH rush due to the arrival of the reduced number of times in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is the RUSH in the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation in the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content to notify. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents when the fall lottery is won during the latent state in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a special figure during the latent state in the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display screen at the time of winning a big hit in 2. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content in super RUSH in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the ROM of the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 4 table in the 4th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a fall lottery table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a latent mode selection table, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a fall lottery table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the notification selection table schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows 1st special symbol change stop processing 4 executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol change stop processing 4 executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the state command process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the latent mode setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the fall effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the small hit-related process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the fall notification processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 4 for special figure 1 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 4 for special figure 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the variable winning device for small hits. It is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device for small hits. It is an operation diagram which saw the variable winning device for small hits from the back side. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the special figure 1 jackpot is won during the probability change state in the fifth embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the game in the case of short-time digestion in the probable change state in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content at the time of a small hit in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content during the small hit game. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents when the ball passes through the fall gate during the small hit game in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content when the ball passes through the fall gate during the small hit game. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content when it did not pass. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the end of the small hit, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content in the latent state (invincible mode). It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 5 table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the operation scenario storage area. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit entrance passage processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fall gate passing processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the state command process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the hit | related process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the ball passing-related processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the ROM of the main control unit in the 6th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit state flag, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit state flag. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation condition determination process which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows 1st special symbol change start processing 6 executed by MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol change start process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric accessory opening / closing process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a round execution process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot interruption processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing an ending execution process executed by the MPU in the main control unit according to the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 7th Embodiment. It is an enlarged view which expanded the flow path unit in 7th Embodiment. (A) is a plan view schematically showing the ball flow when the electric accessory is in the closed state (buried state) in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a plan view schematically showing the electric accessory in the closed state (buried state). ) Is a perspective view schematically showing the ball flow in the case of. (A) is a plan view schematically showing the ball flow when the electric accessory is in the open state (protruding state) in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a plan view schematically showing the electric accessory in the open state (protruding state). ) Is a perspective view schematically showing the ball flow in the case of. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content at the time of hitting the second symbol in the time-saving state in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is the second ball entrance in the time-saving state in the seventh embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content when a ball enters the ball. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents when the result of the special drawing 2 lottery is out of order in the time saving state in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents in the time saving state in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of display contents when a sphere is flowing down a delay passage during a change in Special Figure 2. FIG. 2A is a diagram showing an example of display contents when a sphere is flowing down a normal passage during special drawing 2 fluctuation in a time-saving state in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 2B is a diagram showing an example of display contents. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of passing V during a small hit game in a form. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display contents in the case where V did not pass during the small hit game during the time saving state in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is the figure showing as the time saving state in the seventh embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content when the time saving state A is set. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control unit according to the seventh embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the configuration of the RAM of the main control unit according to the seventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 7 table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 1 random number table, (c). Is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number 7 table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 7 table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the variation pattern 7 table schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first time-saving fluctuation pattern table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second time-saving fluctuation pattern table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the opening scenario 7 table schematically. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine in the seventh embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the game at the time of passing a small hit V in the 7th embodiment. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device according to the seventh embodiment in the seventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the content of the delay passage state flag schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving number update process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V entrance passage processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V passing process executed by the MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric accessory opening / closing process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 7 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the hit | related process 7 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the small hit start processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the time saving effect-related processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the end time processing per ordinary figure executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 7 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process for special figure 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the ball passage monitoring process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a front view of the gaming board of the pachinko machine in the eighth embodiment. (A) is a plan view schematically showing the case where the opening / closing door 3650f of the second attacker 3650 in the eighth embodiment is in the open state, and (b) is the second attacker 3650 in the eighth embodiment. It is a top view schematically showing the case where the opening / closing door 3650f of the door is in the closed state. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in 8th Embodiment, and is the schematic diagram which shows the flow of the ball to the 2nd attacker schematically. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in 8th Embodiment, and is the schematic diagram which schematically shows the flow of the ball to the 2nd entrance. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents during the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot C in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a ball during the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot C in the eighth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of entering a ball into the 2nd ball entrance. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display contents of the ending screen of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot C in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is the figure after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot C in the eighth embodiment. 2 is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the screen during the game. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display contents when the special figure 2 small hit is won in the normal state in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is the figure which showed the big hit H in the special figure 2 in the eighth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of winning. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents during the special figure 2 game in the time-saving state in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is the end of the final special figure change in the time-saving state in the eighth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content of time. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine in the eighth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control unit in the eighth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the random number 8 table per first in the eighth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the 1st type selection 8 table in 8th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the operation scenario 8 table in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the contents of each scenario type in the eighth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the random number 8 table per 2nd in the 8th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the variation pattern selection 8 table in the 8th Embodiment schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the 8 tables for normal / latent probability in the 8th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the 8 tables for time saving / probability variation in the 8th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in the above. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 8th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the eighth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the reserved ball number-related processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the reduction processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the small hit control process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 9th Embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol jackpot determination process 9 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the ninth embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing a time saving end process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the ninth embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing a game state update process 9 executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol change stop processing 9 executed by MPU in the main control device in 9th Embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol jackpot determination process 9 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol change stop processing 9 executed by MPU in the main control device in 9th Embodiment. It is a front view of the gaming board of the pachinko machine in the tenth embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the stop screen of the jackpot symbol in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is an example of the display content during the symbol determination period in the jackpot C in the tenth embodiment. It is a figure which showed. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the ROM of the main control device in the tenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the random number 10 table per second schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the jackpot type selection 10 table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the specific winning operation pattern table schematically. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the RAM of the main control device in the tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process which is executed by the MPU in the main control device in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 10 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 10 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation stop processing 10 executed by MPU in the main control device in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the specific ball entry process which is executed by the MPU in the main control device in 10th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of the tenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the effect content in the modification of the 7th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a random number 11 table 202ja for high probability in the modified example of the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a second hit for low probability in the modified example of the seventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed the random number 11 table 202jb. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process 11 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the modification of 7th Embodiment. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 11 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modified example of the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary figure effect setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 7th Embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display contents when the special figure 2 small hit is won in the latent state in the modified example of the 4th embodiment, and (b) is the modified example of the 4th embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content in the case of being elected out of the special figure 2 in the latent state in. (A) is a figure showing an example of the jackpot content suggestion effect in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, and (b) shows an example of the effect result of the jackpot content suggestion effect in the modified example of the fourth embodiment. It is a figure. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, and (b) is the schematic diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the modified example of the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of RAM schematically. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the suggestion mode selection table in the modification of the 4th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the suggestion staging selection table in the modification of the 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 11 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot-related process 11 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit-related process 11 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process 11 for special figure 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion mode setting process which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the liquid crystal display execution management process 11 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 4th Embodiment. (A) shows an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the ending effect executed during the ending period of the jackpot game in which the probability change state or the time saving state is set after the jackpot ends in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 3B is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the probabilistic state before the river breakthrough effect is executed and the time saving state in the eleventh embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 at the start of the river breakthrough effect in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the river breakthrough effect in the eleventh embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display device 81 when it succeeded in breaking through a river in 1 and was notified of the continuation of a chance zone. (A) shows an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the case where the river breakthrough effect succeeds in breaking through the river and the transition to the latent state (RUSH) is notified in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 3B is an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the case where the river breakthrough effect fails to break through the river and the transition to the normal state is notified in the eleventh embodiment. It is a figure shown. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing the transition of the gaming state and the staging mode when the chance zone is set after the end of the big hit in the eleventh embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the small hit effect of the second special symbol suggesting that the lottery result of the first special symbol is likely to be a big hit is executed. It is a figure which showed an example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit random number table in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the small hit random number table in the eleventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the jackpot type selection table in eleventh embodiment schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving / probability variation table in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the latent probability table in the eleventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the RAM of the main control device in eleventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine in the eleventh embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the eleventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the eleventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit effect selection table in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the winning sound selection table in the eleventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in eleventh embodiment. 11 is a flowchart showing a second winning process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the state command processing 12 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in eleventh embodiment. 11 is a flowchart showing a small hit related process 12 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process 12 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving medium-time production setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process 12 for special figure 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in eleventh embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the twelfth embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the normal mode in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the probability variation number in the normal mode in the twelfth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 in the case of transitioning to a normal state after a lapse of time. (A) is an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the preparatory state from the transition to the consecutive villa mode to the actual acquisition of the prize ball in the twelfth embodiment. In the twelfth embodiment, (b) shows a case where a game ball enters the second entrance in the prepared state and a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery. 3 It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the symbol display device 81. In (a), in the twelfth embodiment, the reserved ball of the first special symbol at the time of transition from the normal mode to the consecutive villa mode is removed, and the second special symbol is drawn twice in succession during the preparation mode. It is a figure which showed the time-dependent change of the staging mode in the case which became out of place and became a small hit in the third lottery of the second special symbol, and (a) is a figure which showed the time-dependent change from the normal mode to the consecutive villa mode in the twelfth embodiment. It is a figure which showed the time-dependent change of the effect mode in the case where the reserved ball of the 1st special symbol at the time of transition to is the lottery result corresponding to "big hit D12". (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control unit in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the first random number table in the twelfth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit random number table in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic showing the contents of the variation pattern scenario table in the twelfth embodiment. It is a figure. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table in the twelfth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the table for probable change / latent start in the twelfth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the table for time saving start in the twelfth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal start table in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RUSH table in the twelfth embodiment. It is a figure. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine in the twelfth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol jackpot determination process 13 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twelfth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 deviation variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twelfth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 executed by MPU in the main control device in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol change stop process 13 executed by MPU in the main control device in 12th Embodiment. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 disengagement stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twelfth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation display setting process 13 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the twelfth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing an effect mode setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the twelfth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing a ceiling effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing a normal effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the twelfth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing a variation display setting process 13 for special figure 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the preparation state setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the second random number table in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the table for probable change / latent start in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation process 14 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 13th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of the thirteenth embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed the flow path of the game ball in the state which the electric accessory is closed in the modification of the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is the figure which showed the electric role in the modification of thirteenth embodiment. It is a figure which showed the flow path of a game ball in a state where an object is open. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 14th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the variation pattern scenario table in 14th Embodiment schematically. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table in the 14th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the probability change A table in 14th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the probability variation B table in 14th Embodiment schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the ordinary table in 14th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine in the 14th embodiment. It is a front view of the gaming board of the pachinko machine in the fifteenth embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing the flow path of the game ball in the time-saving state in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) shows the flow path of the game ball in the latent state in the fifteenth embodiment. It is a figure. In the fifteenth embodiment, it is a figure which showed the transition of the game state and the effect mode at the time of winning the jackpot of the 1st special symbol during the probability change state. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 at the start of fluctuation per special figure 1 in the probabilistic change state in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) is the figure which showed the fifteenth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the number of time reductions elapses during the jackpot fluctuation. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the second random number table in the fifteenth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving / probability variation table in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the latent probability table in the fifteenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device when the river breakthrough effect in the modified example of the eleventh embodiment is started. It is a front view which shows typically the game board of the pachinko machine in 16th Embodiment. It is a transition diagram schematically showing the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine in the 16th embodiment. (A) and (b) are timing charts showing the game content and the production mode of the series of effects in the 16th embodiment. (A) and (b) are timing charts showing the game content and the final variation effect effect mode in the 16th embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the display content displayed on the third symbol display device in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is displayed on the third symbol display device in the 16th embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the production mode of the normal figure fluctuation effect. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode in which a normal figure variation effect is executed in the main display area of the third symbol display device in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode in which the normal figure variation effect is executed. It is a figure which showed an example of the effect mode of the screen per ordinary figure displayed on the 3rd symbol display device. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode at the time of special 2 winning during special 1 change displayed on the third symbol display device in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode at the time of special 2 winning, and (b) is the figure in the 16th embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the effect mode of the special 2 changing effect (challenge game) displayed on the 3rd symbol display device. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when a small hit is won by the special 2 variation displayed on the third symbol display device in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode in the 16th embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the effect mode when the big hit is acquired in the small hit displayed on the 3rd symbol display device. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode at the time of special 2 winning during special 1 non-variation displayed on the third symbol display device in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode at the time of special 2 winning. It is a figure which showed an example of the effect mode in the case of winning a small hit by the special 2 variation displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the above. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode at the time when one second has elapsed from the start of the game per normal figure displayed on the third symbol display device in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode. It is a figure which showed an example of the effect mode when a ball did not win a prize in a 2nd prize opening during a game per game displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the above. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode at the time when 3 seconds have passed from the start of the small hit game displayed on the third symbol display device in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode in the 16th embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the effect mode when a ball did not win a prize in a V winning opening during a small hit game displayed on the 3rd symbol display device. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the 16th embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of an aspect. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode in a time-saving state displayed on the third symbol display device in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the third symbol display device in the 16th embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the effect mode of the display time saving final variation. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode of the first half effect of the time saving final variation displayed on the third symbol display device in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode of the third symbol in the 16th embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the effect mode of the latter half effect of the time saving final variation displayed on a display device. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode showing the effect result of the latter half effect of the time saving final variation displayed on the third symbol display device in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode showing the effect result of the latter half effect. It is a figure which showed an example of the result display mode of the time saving final variation effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in the above. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode at the time of hitting the special 2 after the end of the time reduction displayed on the third symbol display device in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode in the 16th embodiment. 3 It is a figure which showed an example of the result display mode of the time saving final variation effect displayed on a symbol display device. It is a figure which showed an example of the effect mode which shows the end of a time saving state displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in 16th Embodiment. It is a figure which showed the outline of various counters in 16th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the main control unit in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is one of the contents of the RAM of the main control unit in the 16th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the part schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the first random number 16 table in the 16th embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the special symbol 1 random number 16 table in the 16th embodiment. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a special symbol 2 random number 16 table in the 16th embodiment, and (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a random number 16 table per ordinary symbol. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection 16 table in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 16 table in the 16th embodiment. FIG. 2C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 16 table in the 16th embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the table for selecting the type per normal figure in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is the opening of the electric accessory based on the type per normal figure and the game state. It is a figure which showed the operation content. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the small hit type selection 16 table in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the special figure 1 small hit type selection 16 table in the 16th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the special figure 2 small hit type selection 16 table in the 16th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal map variation pattern selection table in the 16th embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a variation pattern 16 table in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a normal variation pattern 16 table in the 16th embodiment. be. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the time saving variation pattern 16 table which is a part of the variation pattern selection table in the 16th embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the 16th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the variation pattern selection 16 table in the 16th embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the variation pattern selection 16 table for the time saving final in the 16th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process 16 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 16 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start processing 16 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving update process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start setting process 16 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process 16 executed by MPU in the main control device in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process 16 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing 16 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process 16 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the general drawing look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V entrance passage processing 16 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V passing process 16 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 16 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 16 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 16th Embodiment. 16 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 16 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the 16th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize information command processing 16 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning situation determination process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation pattern command processing 16 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 16th Embodiment. 16 is a flowchart showing a hit-related command process 16 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the 16th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot-related command processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 16th Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a small hit-related command process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 16th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal small hit process to be executed. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit process for a series of productions executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the stop command processing 16 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process 16 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 16th Embodiment. 16 is a flowchart showing a variation effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 16th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process for a general drawing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 16th Embodiment. 16 is a flowchart showing a time saving effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 16th embodiment. 16 is a flowchart showing a hit variation effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 16th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process 16 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 16th Embodiment. 16 is a flowchart showing a series of effect update processes executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the 16th embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing an update process during a game per game executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart in the voice lamp control device in the 16th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the update process during a small hit game executed by MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the final variation effect update process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 16th Embodiment. It is a front view which shows typically the game board of the pachinko machine in 17th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode during the time reduction final variation in the 17th embodiment, and (b) is an effect during the support time displayed on the third symbol display device in the 17th embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of an aspect. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of ROM of the main control device in 17th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a table for selecting a type per normal figure in the 17th embodiment, and (b) is an electric combination based on the type per normal figure and the gaming state in the 17th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the opening operation contents of an object schematically. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the variation pattern 17 table for normal use in 17th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the normal map fluctuation pattern table in the 17th embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the normal map fluctuation pattern table for time saving A in the 17th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the fluctuation pattern of the normal map for time saving B in the 17th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing 17 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process 17 for a general drawing executed by the MPU in the main control device in 17th Embodiment. It is a front view which shows typically the game board of the pachinko machine in 18th Embodiment. It is an enlarged view schematically enlarged the right side game area of the game board of the pachinko machine in 18th Embodiment. It is an enlarged view schematically enlarged the right side game area of the game board of the pachinko machine in 18th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are timing charts schematically showing the flow of production of the pachinko machine in the eighteenth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the eighteenth embodiment, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the eighteenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the variation pattern 18 table in the 18th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the normal variation pattern 18 table in the 18th embodiment. be. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal map variation pattern selection 18 table in the 18th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the stop command processing 18 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 18th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process 18 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 18th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the set effect setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 18th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal figure set effect setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 18th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process 18 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 18th Embodiment. It is a figure which showed the setting method of a series of productions in 18th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 19th embodiment, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the 19th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the general diagram scenario table in the 19th embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the flow which the scenario 2 per a normal figure is set as a series of staging scenarios in 19th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the flow which the scenario 4 per a normal figure is set as a series of production scenarios in 19th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize information command processing 19 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 19th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the series | staging determination process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 19th Embodiment. 19 is a flowchart showing a hit-related command process 19 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the 19th embodiment. 19 is a flowchart showing a command process related to a normal figure executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device according to the nineteenth embodiment. 19 is a flowchart showing a variation effect setting process 19 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 19th embodiment. 19 is a flowchart showing a constantly monitoring effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the nineteenth embodiment. 19 is a flowchart showing a variation effect setting process 19 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 19th embodiment. 19 is a flowchart showing a series of staging prediction setting processes executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the nineteenth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 20th embodiment, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the 20th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the final variation effect table in the 20th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the winning final table in the 20th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the final table for disengagement in 20th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the final effect variable setting table in the 20th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the hit setting table in the 20th embodiment. .. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the setting table for disconnection in 20th Embodiment. 20 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 20 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the twentieth embodiment. 20 is a flowchart showing a winning information command process 20 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the twentieth embodiment. 20 is a flowchart showing a final winning process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the twentieth embodiment. 20 is a flowchart showing a time saving effect setting process 20 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the twentieth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the final variation effect update process 20 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 20th Embodiment. It is a front view which shows typically the game board of the pachinko machine in 21st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a right-handed notification screen in the first notification mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the 21st embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a right-handed notification screen in the first notification mode, and FIG. It is a figure which showed an example of the right-handed notification screen in the 2nd notification mode displayed on the symbol display device. It is a front view schematically showing the game board of the pachinko machine in the 22nd Embodiment. It is a figure which schematically showed the flow of the production of the pachinko machine in the 22nd embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 23rd embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a display area of the third symbol display device in the 23rd embodiment, and (b) is a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the 23rd embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the rear mode in which the expectation of the probability change state is low among the rear modes displayed by the third symbol display device in the 23rd embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the back mode which the expectation degree of a probable change state is high among the back modes displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 23rd Embodiment. Among the rear mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the 23rd embodiment, an example of the display mode of the rear mode in which the continuation of the probabilistic state is confirmed at least until all the reserved balls at the start of the fluctuation are digested is shown. It is a figure. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode at the start of the probability change continuation suggestion effect displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 23rd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of an attack pattern with a low expectation in the probability change continuation suggestion effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the 23rd embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of an attack pattern with a low expectation. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the attack pattern of high expectation degree in the probability change continuation suggestion effect displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams schematically showing the transition of the state after the end of the probabilistic jackpot in the 23rd embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during execution of the pressing stop effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the 23rd embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode during execution, and (b) is a diagram showing the third symbol in the 23rd embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in the case where a player performs the first operation (press) with respect to a PUSH button during execution of a press stop effect displayed on a display device. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during execution of the chance charge fanning effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the 23rd embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during execution of the chance charge fanning effect, and (b) is a diagram showing a third in the 23rd embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in execution of the chance charge effect which is executed after the stop of a chance charge symbol in a symbol display device. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the end of the chance charge effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the 23rd embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode at the end of the chance charge effect, and (b) is a diagram showing the third symbol in the 23rd embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of consumption of a spirit gauge displayed by a display device. (A) to (c) are diagrams schematically showing changes over time in the effect mode during execution of the variable display effect in which the press stop effect is set in the 23rd embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode during execution of the interrupt continuous striking effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the 23rd embodiment. (A) It is a figure which schematically showed the output mode of the voice while the continuous hitting operation with respect to a PUSH button is performed during the execution of the interrupt continuous hitting effect in 23rd Embodiment, (b) is a figure which showed the 23rd embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically the correspondence relationship between the execution timing of the continuous hitting operation, and the subtraction number of a monster in the execution of the interrupt continuous hitting effect in a form. (A) to (c) are diagrams schematically showing changes over time in the effect mode of the variable display effect in which the interrupt continuous striking effect is set in the 23rd embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the hold batch change effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the 23rd embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode when the player presses the PUSH button during execution of the hold batch change effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the 23rd embodiment. be. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 23rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the structure of various counters in 23rd Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control unit in the 23rd embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control unit in the 23rd embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special symbol jackpot random number 23 table in the 23rd embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the ordinary hit random number 23 table in the 23rd embodiment. (C) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the fall lottery table in the 23rd embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the jackpot type selection 23 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 23rd embodiment, and (b) is the special figure 1 jackpot 23 in the 23rd embodiment. It is the figure which showed the rule contents of the table schematically, and (c) is the figure which showed the rule contents of the special figure 2 jackpot 23 table in the 23rd embodiment schematically. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 23 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 23rd embodiment, and (b) is the variation pattern selection 23 table in the 23rd embodiment. It is a figure which schematically showed the regulation contents of the constituent ordinary table. It is a figure which schematically showed the regulation contents of the probability variation / time saving table which constitutes the variation pattern selection 23 table in 23rd Embodiment. It is a figure which showed schematically the transition method of the state in 23rd Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the 23rd embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the 23rd embodiment. be. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the back mode lottery table in 23rd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the pending change lottery table in the 23rd embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the specified contents of the change point calculation table in the 23rd embodiment. It is a figure. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the batch change lottery table in the 23rd embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the specified contents of the chance charge lottery table in the 23rd embodiment. It is a figure. It is a figure which schematically showed the definition content of the continuation suggestion effect selection table in 23rd Embodiment. It is a figure which schematically showed the provision content of the interrupt continuous hit lottery table in 23rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the audio output device in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing 23 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start processing 23 executed by MPU in the main control device in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process 23 executed by MPU in the main control device in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process 23 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing 23 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process 23 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 23 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process 23 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing 23 executed by MPU in the main control device in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process 23 executed by MPU in the main control device in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality processing 23 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process 23 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pressing stop effect processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the interrupt continuous hitting effect processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the batch change effect processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the charge consumption processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pressing detection process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the stop operation detection process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous hit operation detection process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the change operation detection process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 23rd Embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 23 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the 23rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize information command processing 23 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 23rd Embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a hold notice lottery process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 23rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit-related command processing 23 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process 23 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation effect setting process 23 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation suggestion effect setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the back mode lottery process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect mode selection process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 23rd Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the main process executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the 23rd embodiment, and (b) is a command executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the 23rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the interrupt process. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process which is executed by MPU in the voice output device in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the continuous tapping sound command processing executed by MPU in the voice output device in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the interruption command processing executed by the MPU in the voice output device in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the audio setting process which is executed by the MPU in the audio output device in 23rd Embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode at the time of a long press effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the 24th embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the voice mode and the display mode when the long press is continuously performed during the long press effect in the 24th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing schematically. In the 24th embodiment, it is a figure schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the voice mode and the display mode when the press is interrupted in the middle of the long press effect. FIGS. (A) and (b) are diagrams schematically showing the correspondence between the transition of the number of gauges and the elapsed time during the long press effect in the 24th embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the voice mode and the display mode during the execution of the probability change continuation suggestion effect in the 24th embodiment, and (b) is the figure showing the probability change in the 24th embodiment. It is a figure which schematically showed the correspondence relation between the voice mode and the display mode when the hold becomes 0 during execution of a continuation suggestion effect. In the 24th embodiment, it is a figure schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the voice mode and the display mode when a big hit is won during the execution of the probability change continuation suggestion effect. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 23 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 24th embodiment, and (b) is the block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 23 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 24th embodiment. It is a figure which schematically showed the regulation contents of the set suggestion effect table. (A) is a block diagram showing the structure of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 24th embodiment, and (b) is a reproduction speed selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 24th embodiment. It is a figure which showed the regulation contents of. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in 24th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process 24 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 24th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the long press effect process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 24th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the long press execution process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 24th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the long press start processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 24th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo-variation setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 24th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process 24 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 24th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation effect setting process 24 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 24th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process during suggestion effect performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 24th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the interrupt command processing executed by the MPU in the voice output device in 24th Embodiment. In the modified example of the 24th embodiment, it is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the voice mode and the display mode when the hold becomes 0 during execution of a continuation suggestion effect. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during a continuous hit waiting period displayed by the third symbol display device in the 25th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode during the continuous hit waiting period, and (b) is a diagram showing the third symbol display device in the 25th embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode during the continuous hitting period displayed by. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the internal value displayed by the third symbol display device in the 25th embodiment reaches the upper limit, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the internal value reaches the upper limit, and (b) is a diagram showing the third symbol in the 25th embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode when the difference between the display value and the internal value displayed by a display device is 3 or more. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode after the lapse of the continuous hitting period displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 25th Embodiment. It is a figure which schematically showed the flow of the continuous hitting effect in 25th Embodiment. It is a figure which schematically showed the effect pattern at the time of one set of the scenario during the continuous hit effect in 25th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows another pattern of the effect pattern at the time of one set of the scenario during the continuous hitting effect in 25th Embodiment. It is a figure which schematically showed another pattern of the effect pattern at the time of the scenario 2 set during the continuous hitting effect in 25th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the voice lamp control apparatus in 25th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the internal scenario table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device according to the 25th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the voice lamp control device according to the 25th embodiment. It is a figure which schematically showed the regulation contents of the push lottery table set in the ROM of. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the upper limit value selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 25th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the voice lamp control in the 25th embodiment. It is a figure which schematically showed the regulation contents of the difference upper limit value selection table set in the ROM of a device. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in 25th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the continuous hitting effect setting flag set in the RAM of the voice lamp control apparatus in 25th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process 25 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 25th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous hitting effect processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 25th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd continuous hitting effect processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 25th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd continuous hitting effect processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 25th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pressing detection process 25 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 25th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous hit operation detection process 25 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 25th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect mode selection process 25 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 25th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the basic effect mode selection process 25 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 25th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode when the first operation valid period is set as the jackpot medium effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the 26th embodiment. b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the second operation valid period displayed by the third symbol display device in the 26th embodiment is set. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode when the first operation valid period is set as the jackpot medium effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the 26th embodiment. b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the second operation valid period displayed by the third symbol display device in the 26th embodiment is set. It is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the jackpot during the jackpot game executed during the jackpot game in the 26th embodiment. It is a figure which schematically showed the effect pattern at the time of one set of the scenario during the continuous hit effect in the 26th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the voice lamp control apparatus in 26th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the transition timer start timing table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device according to the 26th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the transition timer start timing table, and (b) is the voice lamp according to the 26th embodiment. It is a figure which shows schematically the regulation contents of the effect number selection table set in the ROM of a control device. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the 26th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process 26 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 26th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous hitting effect processing 26 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 26th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd continuous hitting effect processing 26 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 26th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous hit operation detection process 26 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 26th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit-related command processing 26 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 26th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hitting effect setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 26th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the round effect setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 26th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hitting effect end setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 26th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode when the effect is variable in the continuous striking effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the 27th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the display mode in the 27th embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode after the variable invalid period in the continuous hitting effect displayed by the 3rd symbol display device. 27 is a timing chart showing the contents of various effects executed in response to operations on the operation means during the continuous hitting effect in which the operation valid period is set in the 27th embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the structure of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 27th embodiment, and (b) is the button display mode selection set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 27th embodiment. It is a figure which showed the regulation contents of the table schematically. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in 27th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process 27 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 27th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer processing during production which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 27th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous hit operation detection process 27 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 27th Embodiment. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a normal operation process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the 27th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the operation process during production which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 27th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 28th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode during a small hit variation of the latent state special figure 1 displayed by the third symbol display device in the 28th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing a display mode. 28 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the invincible mode in the embodiment and during the special figure 2 disadvantageous jackpot fluctuation. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode after the number of special figure fluctuations of the latent probability state displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 28th Embodiment exceeded 50 times. (A) is a block diagram showing the structure of the ROM of the main control unit in the 28th embodiment, and (b) is a random number 28 table per first set in the ROM of the main control unit in the 28th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the rule contents schematically, and (c) is a figure which shows typically the rule contents of the small hit random number 28 table set in the ROM of the main control device in 28th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the jackpot type selection 28 table set in the ROM of the main control device in 28th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the small hit type selection 28 table set in the ROM of the main control device in 28th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 28 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 28th embodiment, and (b) is the variation pattern selection 28 table in the 28th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the predetermined content schematically of the 1st latent probability table which constitutes, (c) is the figure which schematically shows the specified content of the 2nd latent probability table which constitutes the variation pattern selection 28 table in 28th Embodiment. It is a figure shown as a target. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the fluctuation pattern scenario table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control apparatus in 28th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 28th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control apparatus in 28th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol change start processing 28 executed by MPU in the main control device in 28th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 28 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 28th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 deviation variation processing 28 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 28th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection process 28 executed by MPU in the main control device in 28th Embodiment. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 deviation pattern selection process 28 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 28th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation execution process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 28th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol change stop processing 28 executed by MPU in the main control device in 28th Embodiment. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 disengagement stop process 28 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 28th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit process 28 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 28th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process 28 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 28th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process 28 for special figure 1 which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 28th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process 28 for special figure 2 which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 28th Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 latent process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the 28th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect mode setting process 28 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 28th Embodiment. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing various counter update processes 28 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the 28th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit-related process 28 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 28th Embodiment. It is a front view of the gaming board of the pachinko machine in the 29th embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 29 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 29th embodiment, and (b) is the variation pattern selection 29 table in the 29th embodiment. It is a figure which schematically showed the regulation contents of the 1st latent probability 29 table which constitutes. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control apparatus in 29th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 29 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 28th Embodiment. 29 is a flowchart showing a variation display setting process 29 for special figure 1 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device according to the 29th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning opening discriminating process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 29th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode during the time reduction final variation displayed by the third symbol display device in the thirtieth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode during the time saving final variation, and (b) is a diagram showing a third embodiment in the thirtieth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode when the total stock was consumed during the time saving final fluctuation displayed by a symbol display device. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode when the stock is not used during the time saving final fluctuation displayed by the third symbol display device in the thirtieth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing. , 30 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the special stock is consumed during the time saving final fluctuation displayed by the third symbol display device in the thirtieth embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode of the latter half of the time saving final fluctuation displayed by the third symbol display device in the thirtieth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode in the latter half of the time saving final variation, and (b) is a diagram showing a third embodiment in the thirtieth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the revival jackpot in the latter half of the time saving final fluctuation displayed by a symbol display device. FIG. 2 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of an effect executed in the final variation of FIG. 2 during the time saving state in the thirtieth embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the thirtieth embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the thirtieth embodiment. be. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the character selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the thirtieth embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the character selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device according to the thirtieth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the character selection table, and (b) is a diagram showing the voice lamp control device according to the thirtieth embodiment. It is a figure which schematically showed the regulation contents of the display icon selection table set in the ROM of. It is a flowchart which shows the final variation effect update process 30 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in thirtyth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st period effect setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 30th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd period effect setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 30th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd period effect setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 30th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 30 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in thirtyth embodiment. It is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the effect executed in the time saving final variation in the 31st embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the voice lamp control apparatus in 31st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows schematically the specified contents of the notification period selection 31 table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control apparatus in 31st Embodiment. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a final variation effect update process 31 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the 31st embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 87, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 12) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses 16a is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 12) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending unit 40 is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and a general prize. A port 63, a first ball entry port 64, a second ball entry port 640, a variable winning device 65, an out port 66, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled to form an inner frame 12 (the peripheral portion thereof). It is attached to the back side of (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood made by laminating thin plate materials, and is formed so that the player cannot see various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first entry opening 64, the second entry opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged in a game board. It is fixed from the front side of 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 12) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center.

A first symbol display device 37 (37A, 37A,) provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display along the outer peripheral surface of the outer rail 62 on the upper right side of the front view of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2). 37B) is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 (37A, 37B) displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12), and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Will be. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 (37A, 37B) indicates whether the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64 (upper first ball entry port 64b1, lower first ball entry port 64b2). It is configured to be used properly according to whether or not the ball has entered the second entry port 640. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 2, but in the present embodiment, the upper first ball entry port 64b1 and the lower first ball entry port 64b2 are provided as a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol. In the following description, when both the upper first ball entry port 64b1 and the lower first ball entry port 64b2 are shown, the term of the first ball entry port 64 will be simply used for explanation.

Specifically, when the ball enters the first entry port 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, while when the ball enters the second entry port 640, the ball enters the second entry port 640. The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic state, the time saving state, or the normal state by the lighting state, and indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the lighting state. Indicates whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable change jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, a missed symbol, or a small hit symbol by the lighting state, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state. , The 7-segment display device displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and the error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors suggests various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a ball is entered in either the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 15R time reduction jackpot, and 2R time reduction jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to (sets) a probability variation state in which the maximum number of rounds is a high probability state of a special symbol and a high probability state of a normal symbol after a jackpot of 15 rounds. There, "2R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a probability variation state in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 2 rounds. Further, the "15R time saving jackpot" is a time saving state in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the low probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol are changed for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 50 times). ) It is a jackpot to be set, and "2R time saving jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is set to a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 50 times) after the jackpot of 2 rounds. ..

Further, the "high probability state of the special symbol" is a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, in other words, a state of the game in which the transition to the special gaming state is easy. The "high probability state of the normal symbol" is a state in which the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased, in other words, a state of the game in which the electric accessory 64a is easily released.

In addition, in the gaming state (probability change state, time saving state) in which the "high probability state of the normal symbol" is set, not only the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) increases, but also the lower first entrance ball opening 64b2 As the time for opening the electric accessory 64a associated with the above, a longer time is set as compared with the gaming state (latent state, normal state) in which the "low probability state of the normal symbol" is set. When the electric accessory 64a is in the open state (open state), the ball is moved to the lower first entry port 64b2 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 64a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy to win a prize. Therefore, during the probable change state or the time saving state, the ball can easily win a prize in the lower first entry slot 64b2, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

It should be noted that, in the probable change state or the time saving state, the opening time of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entry port 64b2 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, once. The change may be made so that the number of times that the electric accessory 64a is opened by hitting is increased from the normal state. In addition, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed in the probabilistic change state or the time saving state, and the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entry port 64b2 is opened at the time when the electric accessory 64a is opened and the electric accessory is hit once. At least one of the number of times the 64a is opened may be changed. In addition, the time during which the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entry port 64b2 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 64a is opened at one time are not changed during the probability change state or the time saving state. It may be changed so that only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased as compared with the normal state.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are triggered by the entry of a ball into either the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 (starting winning). A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays a variable display of the third symbol (decorative symbol) while synchronizing with the variable display, and a sphere to the through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs that variablely display a normal symbol (second symbol) with a passage as a trigger is provided.

Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 12), for example, the upper, middle, and lower three. Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the decorative third symbol is dynamically displayed so as to correspond to the dynamic display of the first symbol (special symbol) displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the third symbol is dynamically displayed. By configuring the display mode to notify the player, the display mode during the dynamic display period is unified with respect to the dynamic display of the first symbol (special symbol) whose operation is controlled by the main control device 110. For example, even if the processing load of the main control device 110 is reduced by repeatedly turning on and off in 0.1 second increments), the movement of the third symbol set by the voice lamp control device 113 By variably setting the target display mode based on, for example, the lottery result of the first symbol (special symbol), it is possible to suggest to the player that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit (first). The effect mode using the three symbols) can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device lights the "○" symbol and the "×" symbol as normal symbols (second symbol (not shown)) alternately for a predetermined time each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67. It is a variable display. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entry port 64b2 is provided. It is configured to be in the operating state (operated to the open state) for a predetermined time.

The time required to display the fluctuation of the second symbol is shorter in the high probability state (probability change state, time saving state) of the normal symbol than in the low probability state (normal state, latent state) of the normal symbol as the game state. Is set to be. As a result, during the high-probability state of the normal symbol, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than in the low-probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entrance ball opening 64b2.

Therefore, during the probabilistic change state and the time saving state, it is possible to set the game state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the lower first entry slot 64b2. In this embodiment, the dynamic display mode of the third symbol and the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 are set depending on whether the probabilistic state is set as the gaming state or the time saving state is set. The same display mode is set as the background mode displayed on the screen, and it is configured to make it difficult for the player to grasp the current game state. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of guessing the current game situation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the dynamic display mode of the third symbol and the background mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 are the same in a plurality of gaming states in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. It is configured to set the display mode of. Therefore, when the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is unified, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping what the current gaming state is depending on the operating status of the electric accessory 64a. be able to.

It should be noted that, in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the hit probability is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 64a per hit are increased. 1 When the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball entry port 64b2, the time required for the variation display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is set shorter than in the normal state in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state. Further, the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 64a per hit may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side (right area) of the variable display device unit 80. The through gate 67 is configured so that a part of the balls launched on the game board can pass through the balls flowing down the game board. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is not correct. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol hold lamps are provided for the maximum number of hold lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be two or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment will be briefly described. In the first embodiment, a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol), a probabilistic state (a high probability state of a special symbol and a high probability state of a normal symbol), and a time saving state (special). Four gaming states are provided: a low-probability state of the symbol and a high-probability state of the normal symbol) and a latent state (a high-probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol). Then, the latent state is configured to be the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

That is, when the latent state is set, the variable time for showing the lottery of the second special symbol, which is more likely to be a lottery result more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol, is set in another game state. By stipulating that the lottery be shorter than when it is done, the lottery that is advantageous to the player can be executed most efficiently.

In the first embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol. The first specific winning opening 65a of the winning device 65 is opened for a predetermined period (1.5 seconds × 1 time, 0.2 seconds × 6 times, or 0.06 seconds × 8 times). For this reason, in the lottery of the second special symbol, even if the jackpot is not won, there are many chances to get the ball into the first specific winning opening 65a and win the prize ball. It is more advantageous than the lottery. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification of the explanation, the result of the lottery in which the first specific winning opening 65a is opened will be referred to as a "small hit".

In the lottery of the second special symbol, in addition to the big hit, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened even if it becomes a small hit, so that the prize ball is in a latent state where the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short. Can continue to increase. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that it will be in a latent state. In a general gaming machine, the probabilistic state is the most advantageous gaming state, but in the present embodiment, the latent probabilistic state is more advantageous than the probabilistic state, so that a novel game property can be provided.

Further, in the first embodiment, the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous). A variable method is adopted). As a result, even if the variable display of one special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the other special symbol can be executed without waiting for the end of the variable display, so that the lottery of the special symbol can be executed more efficiently. can. In addition, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating at the same time, if one of them stops fluctuating with a stop symbol of a big hit or a small hit, the other fluctuating display shows the remaining fluctuation time or lottery. Regardless of the result, the stop symbol is displayed as a stop. As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem that the other variable display is fixedly displayed as a hit or a small hit during the execution of the big hit or the small hit, and the big hit or the small hit is started in duplicate.

Here, with reference to FIG. 2, various configurations provided in the game area in the first embodiment and the flow of balls launched toward the game area will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 of the present embodiment is configured to divide the game area into a left side area and a right side area by a variable display device unit 80 arranged in the center of the game area. ..

In the present embodiment, the launched ball does not pass through the foul ball prevention valve 68 until the operation handle 51 is rotated 20 degrees (clockwise) from the initial position (state in which the player is not rotating). The ball is fired with a degree of firing intensity. Therefore, the launched ball finally flows back in the launch path formed between the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 61 and becomes a foul ball. The foul ball that flows backward and flows down passes through the start position of the launch flow path (the lower left end of the outer rail 62 shown in FIG. 2) and communicates with the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 1). (Not shown) flows down and is recirculated to the upper plate 17. With this configuration, even if a foul ball is generated when the player operates the operation handle 51 to launch the ball with a desired firing intensity, the foul ball remains in the firing path and the game is played. It is possible to suppress the hindrance to.

Next, when the operation amount (rotation amount) of the operation handle 51 is in the range of 20 to 80 degrees from the initial position (the state in which the player is not rotating), the ball is launched with a firing intensity sufficient to flow down the left side region described above. In the range of 81 degrees to 120 degrees (81 degrees to 120 degrees, which is the maximum rotation amount of the operation handle 51), the ball is launched with a firing intensity sufficient to flow down the right side region described above.

That is, the present embodiment is configured so that the area where the ball flows down can be changed based on the operation amount of the operation handle 51, that is, based on the operation of the player. Further, although details will be described later, in the first embodiment, when a gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set as the gaming state, the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is set so that the ball flows down the left side region. Instead of playing a game that is adjusted (hereinafter referred to as a left-handed game), a game that is performed by adjusting the operation amount of the operation handle 51 so that the ball flows down the right area (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game) is performed. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, the player may maintain the operation handle 51 rotated to the upper limit (rotated 120 degrees) while the gaming state advantageous to the player is set. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the player play an appropriate game.

Next, the left side region of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. Details will be described later, but in the first embodiment, the game state is a normal state (special symbol low probability state: normal symbol low probability (normal) state) and a time saving state (special symbol low probability state: normal symbol high probability (time saving). ) State), probabilistic state (special symbol high probability (probability) state: normal symbol high probability (time saving) state), latent state (special symbol high probability (probability) state: normal symbol low probability (normal) state) Is configured to be set. In addition, the big hit game state executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is won in the big hit and the small hit game state executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is won in the small hit are set. It is configured.

Among them, when the normal state, the time saving state, and the probable change state are set as the game state, the variable display device unit 80 is used to perform a left-handed game in which the ball is made to flow down to the left side area of the game board 13. A right-handed game in which the player is guided to the game method using the display screen of the provided third symbol display device 81, and when the latent state is set, the ball is made to flow down to the left area of the game board 13. The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used to guide the player to the game method. Further, during the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the player's game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) is guided according to the game state before the winning.

As a guidance method for each game method (left-handed game, right-handed game), for example, a game method suitable for the current game state may be configured to be displayed at all times, or only when the game method is switched after switching. It may be configured to display the game method. Further, when a game method (left-handed game in this embodiment) that is easily set for a long period of time is regarded as a normal game among the left-handed game and the right-handed game, and a game method other than the normal game (right-handed game) is performed. The game method may be constantly guided and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the guide display may not be performed when the left-handed game is to be performed.

When there are two types of game methods to be selected by the player as in the present embodiment, the other game method can be guided by not displaying the display mode for guiding one game method. That is, it is possible to guide a plurality of game methods depending on whether or not one display mode is displayed. In this embodiment, the display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used to guide the player to the game method, but the present embodiment is not limited to this. As described above, by not displaying a specific display mode, a configuration for notifying the player of the game method may be used, or a configuration for notifying the player using voice or a lamp may be used.

A through gate 67 and a general winning opening 63 are arranged in the left side region of the game board 13. Further, at the lower position of the variable display device unit 80, an upper first ball entry port 64b1 is provided so that a ball flowing down the left side region can enter the ball. A lower first ball entry port 64b2 to which an electric accessory 64a is attached is provided at a position below the upper first ball entry port 64b1. In this electric accessory 64a, when the ball is won in the normal symbol (second symbol) lottery executed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the ball enters the lower first entrance slot 64b2. It is configured to variably move from a closed state (first state) where the ball is difficult (impossible) to an open state (second state) where the ball can easily (possibly) enter the lower first entry port 64b2. ing.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) can be executed (the change of the special figure 1 is not executed, and the big hit game and the small hit game are executed. When a ball enters the upper first entry port 64b1 or the lower first entry opening 64b2 in a state where the ball has not been entered), the lottery shown in FIG. 1 is executed. That is, the entry of a ball into the upper first entry port 64b1 or the lower first entry opening 64b2 is an opportunity for executing the lottery of the first special symbol.

In addition, in a state in which the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) cannot be newly executed (a state in which the change in special figure 1 has already been executed, or a big hit game or a small hit game has been executed). When a ball enters the upper first entry port 64b1 or the lower first entry opening 64b2, it has a storage means for storing the right of the ball to enter, up to a predetermined number (4). ing.

Therefore, even while the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) is being executed, the player can be made to continue playing the game, so that the operation of the game can be improved. In this embodiment, only the storage means for storing the right of the ball to enter and the first special symbol are provided.

80% of the balls flowing down the left side area by the left-handed game pass through the through gate 67, and about 8% of the fired balls (8 out of 100 balls) enter the upper first entrance 64b1. A spherical flow path is formed by a plurality of structures such as nails and windmills so as to make a sphere. Further, when the electric accessory 64a is in the closed state, about 0% of the balls enter the lower first entry port 64b2, and when the electric accessory 64a is in the open state, the lower first entry port 64a. The ball flow path is formed so that the number of balls entering 64b2 is about 25%. That is, it is difficult for a ball to enter in the order of the lower first entry port 64b2 (electric accessory 64a open state), the upper first entry port 64b1, and the lower first entry port 64b2 (electric accessory 64a closed state). It is configured to be.

As described above, the upper first entry slot 64b1 and the lower first entry opening 64b2 are configured to give the player a privilege of paying out a prize ball in addition to the privilege of executing the lottery of the first special symbol. It is configured to pay out four prize balls to the player every time one ball is inserted. In this embodiment, the same number (4) prize balls are given regardless of whether the ball enters the upper first entry port 64b1 or the lower first entry opening 64b2. However, the prize balls may be set to different numbers for each of them.

On the other hand, in the right side region of the game board 13, a second entrance slot 640 and a first variable winning device 65 are provided. The second entry port 640 is configured so that the lottery of the second special symbol is executed when the ball enters, and a plurality of balls are entered so that about 50% of the balls flowing down the right area enter. A spherical flow path is formed by nails. Here, the ball that did not enter the second entrance 640 flows down toward the first variable winning device 65 provided below the right side region.

Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the present embodiment, in the state where the normal state is set as the gaming state, the time (variable time) from the execution of the lottery of the second special symbol to the display of the lottery result is long. In the state where the fluctuation time of the time (10 minutes) is set and the latent state is set, the short fluctuation time (1 second) is set.

That is, when the normal state is set as the game state, the right-handed game is performed rather than the ball being inserted into the first entrance 64 in order to perform the left-handed game and execute the lottery of the first special symbol. It is easier to put the ball in the second entrance 640 in order to execute the lottery of the second special symbol, but the game efficiency is improved because the fluctuation time for a long time (10 minutes) is set. It gets very bad. Therefore, in the normal state, the player plays a left-handed game and executes a lottery for the first special symbol.

In addition, since the second entry port 640 is set with one prize ball, a right-handed game is performed in a state where the normal state is set, and a ball fired in a right-handed game at a rate of about 50%. Even if the ball is inserted into the second entry port 640, the number of balls does not increase.

Further, when the time saving state or the probabilistic change state is set as the gaming state, the normal symbol becomes a high probability state, and the electric accessory 64a is easily released. However, since the through gate 67, which triggers the lottery of the normal symbol for opening the electric accessory 64a, is provided only in the left side region, the lower first entry port 64b2 makes it easier for the ball to enter than in the normal state. It is configured to allow the player to perform a left-handed game in order to allow the ball to enter the ball.

On the other hand, in the state where the latent state is set as the game state, the normal symbol becomes a low probability state and the electric accessory 64a becomes difficult to open, and as described above, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short. Since the fluctuation time of (1 second) is set, it is an appropriate game to perform a right-handed game and execute a lottery of the second special symbol. Here, in the first embodiment, only the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to win a small hit (winning probability of about 1/2). When a small hit is won, the first variable winning device 65 is opened for a predetermined period (for example, 1.5 seconds) as a small hit game, and 10 for one ball that has entered the first variable winning device 65. It is configured so that individual prize balls are awarded.

That is, when the latent state is set as the game state, the player continuously executes the right-handed game to draw a second special symbol aiming at winning a small hit, and a small hit game. Can be executed continuously.

As shown in FIG. 2, a second variable winning device 650 is arranged at the lowermost part of the game area. The second variable winning device 650 operates so that the rotary door 650f operates toward the front side when a big hit is won by a special symbol lottery, and the ball is in an open state in which a ball can win a prize in the second specific winning opening 650a. Is to be done. The second variable winning device 650 is configured so that a ball that has flowed down the left side region by a left-handed game and a ball that has flowed down the right side area by a right-handed game can be evenly entered. Therefore, when the jackpot game in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened is executed, the gaming method before the jackpot game is executed may be continuously executed, and the gaming method may be performed for the player. Can be suppressed from being complicatedly changed.

When a ball enters the above-mentioned first entry port 64 (upper first entry opening 64b1 and lower first entry opening 64b2), a first entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13. ) Is turned on, a big hit lottery is performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12) due to the turning on of the first ball entrance switch, and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A. Is done.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the second entrance 640, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, which is caused by the on of the second entrance switch. A big hit lottery is made by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, the first entry port 64 is a winning opening in which four balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, and the second entry opening 640 is a winning opening in which one ball is paid out when a ball enters. It is one of the winning openings paid out as a prize ball. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the upper first entry port 64b1 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the first entry port 64. Was made the same (both 4) and different from the number of prize balls (1) to be paid out when the ball entered the 2nd entrance 640, but the ball entered the upper 1st entrance 64b1. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the lower first entry slot 64b2 may be different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the lower first entry slot 64b2.

In this case, for example, the number of prize balls in the upper first entry port 64b1 is set to four, and the number of prize balls in the lower first entry opening 64b2 is set to two, so that a normal state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter is set. In this case, the privilege for the ball entering the upper first entry port 64b1 is increased, and the ball is more likely to enter when a specific game state (probability change state, time saving state) is set. Even if a ball frequently enters the 1 entry slot 64b2, the player may not be allowed to acquire an excessive prize ball, and the number of prize balls in the upper 1st entry slot 64b1 is 4 and the lower 1st. The number of prize balls in the entry port 64b2 may be set to 5, so that a large privilege can be given to the player when a specific game state (probability change state, time saving state) is set.

Further, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the second entry port 640 (for example, both are 5). It may be configured as (pieces).

An electric accessory 64a is attached to the lower first ball entry port 64b2. The electric accessory 64a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 64a is in a closed state (regulated state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the lower first entry port 64b2. There is. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display (normal symbol lottery) of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory The 64a is in the open state (allowable state), and the ball can easily enter the lower first entry port 64b2.

As described above, in the probabilistic state and the time-saving state, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than in the normal state, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short, so that the variation display of the second symbol is performed. In, the symbol "○" is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 64a is in the open state (allowable state) increases. Further, during the probable change state or the time saving state, the time for opening the electric accessory 64a is also longer than that in the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball can easily enter the lower first entry port 64b2 in the probable change state or the time saving state as compared with the normal state.

As described above, the lower first entry port 64b2, that is, the entry port to which the electric accessory 64a is attached, is in a state where the ball can easily enter according to the set gaming state (first state). It is possible to set a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter (second state). That is, from the viewpoint of the ease of entering the ball, the first state is an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the second state is a disadvantageous gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player (more disadvantageous than the first state). Will be.

Here, when the ball enters the first entry port 64 (when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed) and when the ball enters the second entry opening 640 (the lottery of the second special symbol). The probability of winning a jackpot is the same, and if a low probability state of a special symbol is set, a lottery that wins a jackpot is executed with a predetermined low probability (for example, 1/280). When the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the lottery that becomes a big hit is executed with a predetermined high probability (for example, 1/30) that is easier to win than the low probability state. However, the type of jackpot selected (set) in the case of a jackpot is set to be different between the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment sets the method of launching the ball (game method) to the player as "left-handed (left-handed game)" and "right" according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. It can be changed to "hit (right-handed game)". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit for the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win (win) in any of the winning openings (entry openings) 63, 64b1, 64b 2, 65a, 640, 650a is shown through the out opening 66. You will be guided to the ball discharge channel. The out port 66 is arranged below the lower first ball entry port 64b2. In the first embodiment, the game area has one out port 66, but other configurations may be used, and two or more out ports 66 may be provided.

By providing a plurality of out ports 66 in this way, it is necessary to form a ball flow path for finally consolidating the balls launched in the game area to one place (the place where the out ports 66 are arranged). Since it is eliminated, the degree of freedom in arranging various devices constituting the game area can be increased. Specifically, for example, it is preferable to provide an out port dedicated to the ball flowing down the left side region and an out port dedicated to the ball flowing down the right side region. Further, when a plurality of out ports are provided, it is preferable to provide a notification means for notifying the player that the ball entry port is an out port. As a result, a situation occurs in which no privilege is given even though the ball enters the ball entry port (actually the out port) provided in the game area, which suppresses the player from being uncomfortable. be able to.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is provided with a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 to pay out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol (decorative symbol dynamically displayed corresponding to the dynamic display of the first symbol) is composed of nine types of main symbols with numbers "1" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of numbers "1" to "9" on the rear symbols that imitate various animals. Specifically, for example, the number "1" is attached to the rear design imitating an elephant, and the number "2" is attached to the rear design imitating a lion. By forming the third symbol in a display mode in which the rear symbol and the number are associated with each other in this way, the display mode of the rear symbol is displayed to the player even during the dynamic display of the third symbol (the rear symbol is displayed. The type of the 3rd symbol can be roughly grasped by the color, outline, size, etc.), and when the 3rd symbol is stopped and displayed, the number attached to the rear symbol can be identified to ensure the type of the 3rd symbol. Can be grasped.

In the first embodiment, the combination of the rear symbol and the number forming the third symbol is not changed, but the combination of the rear symbol, the display mode, and the number may be changed. good. With this configuration, it is possible to display a lottery result different from the lottery result (type of the third symbol) predicted by the player while the third symbol is dynamically displayed, and the player can be displayed. On the other hand, it is possible to provide a game that does not get tired. Further, by setting the combination pattern of the rear symbol and the number as the third symbol to be regularly changed according to, for example, the lottery result of the special symbol or the set gaming state, the third symbol can be used. It is possible to improve the prediction accuracy of the game content based on the display mode (combination of the rear symbol and the number) that is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of making the prediction.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed, and the variable display is completed. It is configured to generate a jackpot later. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned. Further, in the present embodiment, a small hit is won as a lottery result of a special symbol, and when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the main symbol is a specific combination (for example, "341"). Is stopped and displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, the lottery result is made easy for the player to understand by making the combination of the main symbols to be stopped and displayed different according to the lottery result of the special symbol, but the present invention is limited to this. Without this, for example, the same main symbol may be stopped and displayed depending on whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and about 3/4 of the upper side is the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. Approximately 1/4 of the lower side is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows L1, L2, and L3, which are upper, middle, and lower, are displayed. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, and the symbol rows L1 to L3 are scrolled in the left-right direction (usually from the right to the left) with a periodicity and displayed in a variable manner. Is done. In particular, in the upper symbol row L1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row L2 and the lower symbol row L3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the three columns of left, middle, and right for each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. The vertical line on the left side of the main display area Dm, the vertical line in the middle stage, and the vertical line on the right side are set as effective lines V1 to V3, respectively. In addition, the downward-sloping diagonal line and the upward-sloping diagonal line in the main display area Dm are set as effective lines V4 and V5, respectively. In each game, the third symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) on the effective lines V1 to V5 in the order of the upper symbol row L1 → the lower symbol row L3 → the middle symbol row L2. This stop display state is held for at least 1 second. In this way, by displaying the stopped 3rd symbol for a certain period (1 second or more), whether or not the player is a combination of the 3rd symbols corresponding to the jackpot (the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot). It is possible to prevent overlooking (whether or not there is). Further, if a combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main symbols) is aligned on the effective lines V1 to V5 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot movie (opening effect) is displayed as a jackpot.

In addition, if the combination of the third symbols displayed as stopped is a combination corresponding to the disconnection and there is a reserved ball, after the stop display (confirmed display) for 1 second, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is displayed. Is started. If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest incoming balls in time.

On the other hand, if the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) for 1 second in the state where the reserved ball does not exist, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. .. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters either the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed (confirmed display), a demo effect (customer waiting demo screen) indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. ..

It is rare that the player does not enter the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 even though the player has continuously fired the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). In most cases, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) because the player has quit the game, and the pachinko machine 10 has not played the game at all. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. As a result, the player who is trying to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demo effect. On the other hand, if a new ball enters the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the ball corresponds to the new ball entry. The variable display of the third symbol is executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm. The sub-display area Ds is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed among the balls entered in the first entry port 64. In the present embodiment, the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 while the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol is performed by the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37). In this case, the number of balls entered is held up to 4 times, and the number of held balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. The number of reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is currently suspended. In this embodiment, only the variable display of the first special symbol can be held, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not stored on hold. Therefore, in the sub-display area Ds, only the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed.

In the display screen shown using FIG. 4A, the sub-display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm, and the third symbol is dynamically displayed (variable display) in the main display area Dm. The effect (variable effect) including the above is executed, and the advance notice effect, the display of the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like are executed in the sub-display area Ds. It is not necessary to form each area shown in 1. For example, when the player is watching the effect for suggesting whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the display area of the sub display area Ds is used. It may be configured to perform a powerful effect by reducing (erasing) and enlarging the display area of the main display area Dm. On the other hand, when the effect of changing the display mode of the reserved symbol or the game guidance explaining the future game content is emphasized and executed in the sub display area Ds, the display area of the main display area Dm is reduced and the sub By enlarging the display area of the display area Ds, it may be configured to perform an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

Further, depending on the set game state and the effect mode being executed, an area for displaying the number of reserved symbols in the main display area Dm and an area for executing the advance notice effect may be formed, or a sub-area may be formed. The display area Ds may be provided with an area for executing the variable display of the third symbol.

Next, an example of the display content actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 4 (b). On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols and sub-symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. Further, on the right side and the left side of the display area Dm, three parts of the main symbol and three parts of the sub symbol are displayed. These show the lottery result of the first special symbol in the normal state. Further, in the upper central portion of the main display area Dm, a small area Dm1 for displaying the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed. In this small area Dm1, variation display of three third symbols having a simple aspect composed of only the numbers "1" to "9" is executed. Even in this small area Dm1, the big hit is started by stopping and displaying the three third symbols composed of the same numbers. It should be noted that the display of the third symbol showing the lottery result of the second special symbol in a simpler manner than the third symbol showing the lottery result of the first special symbol is basically displayed in the normal state and the probable change state. This is because the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, and the lottery for the second special symbol is rarely executed.

Therefore, the game result is displayed more clearly by configuring the variable display of the first special symbol, which is mainly executed, to be displayed in a larger display area. In the following description, the variation display of the special symbol mainly executed in each game state (the variation display of the first special symbol is applicable in the normal state and the probabilistic state) is referred to as the main variation, and in each game state. The variable display of the special symbol that is rarely executed when the regular game method is performed (in the normal state or the probabilistic state, the variable display of the second special symbol is applicable) is called a sub-variation.

Further, as will be described in detail later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the state where the probability variation state is set, it is a long period (up to 10 minutes). The variable display (dynamic display) is executed, and the gaming state is configured to shift from the probable change state to the latent state at the timing when the variable display is started. Then, during the period in which the latent state is set (the period from the execution of the variable display that becomes the jackpot to the end of the variable display and the start of the jackpot game), the second special symbol is drawn. It is configured to execute a game aiming at a small hit. Therefore, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, the variation display of the second special symbol becomes the main variation, and the variation display of the first special symbol becomes the sub-variation.

In the small area Ds1 in the sub-display area Ds, the same number of reserved symbols imitating the face of a bird are displayed as the number of reserved balls of the first symbol. This reserved symbol is subjected to an effect of entering the inside of the house displayed on the right side in the small area Ds1 at the start of the variable display based on the corresponding reserved ball. As a result, the player can easily understand that the variable display corresponding to the reserved ball has started. Further, in the small area Ds1, a notice effect is sometimes performed such that the reserved symbol performs a special operation or another character appears.

In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times. It may be set to the following or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the ball entering the second ball entry port 640 may be configured to be holdable. Further, instead of displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1, the reserved ball number is different by a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the flow of the variable display effect of the third symbol in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 5 is a timing chart schematically showing the game state of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment and the content of the variation display effect executed in response to the variation status of each special symbol. Here, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be briefly described. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a variable display (dynamic display) for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol and a variable display (dynamic display) for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol. ) And can be executed at the same time (in parallel).

Then, when the probability variation state (high probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) is set and the variation display corresponding to the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed, the high probability state of the normal symbol is executed. Is configured to shift to a low-probability state, and the gaming state shifts from a probabilistic state to a latent state. While this latent state is set, the variable display (dynamic display) period for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol is set short, so that many lottery of the second special symbol can be executed. It will be a period that can be done (Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Advantageous Period).

In the present embodiment, since the small hit is configured to be won with a probability of about 1/2 in the lottery of the second special symbol, the small hit is set during the period when the latent state is set as the game state. The small hit game that is executed when the player wins the game is frequently executed, and the game state is advantageous to the player who can win many prize balls (special figure 2 advantageous state).

As described above, the period in which the latent probability state is set in the present embodiment (special figure 2 variable advantageous period) is during the variable display period (dynamic display period) of the first special symbol won by the jackpot in the probable change state. Since (special figure 1 big hit is changing), the big hit game is executed when the special figure 2 advantageous state ends. In this way, since a plurality of states (special figure 2 advantageous state, jackpot game state) that are advantageous to the player are continuously set, the player is continuously given various benefits. Can be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is won by one special symbol (special figure 2) and the small hit game is executed, the fluctuation of the other special symbol (special figure 1) is interrupted (variation display period). The measurement is interrupted), and when the small hit game is completed, the measurement of the interrupted fluctuation display period is restarted. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 variable advantage period from being subtracted during the small hit game, and therefore, regardless of the number of small hit games executed during the special figure 2 variable advantageous period. It is possible to provide the player with a certain special figure 2 variable advantageous period.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of one special symbol (special figure 1), the other special symbol (special figure 2) that is changing is stopped and displayed. It is configured to be forcibly stopped with. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a small hit game is executed during a big hit game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control content for the change of the other special symbol is different depending on the lottery result of one special symbol. Specifically, if the lottery result of one special symbol is a big hit (a lottery result that can give the player the first privilege), the change of the other special symbol means that the lottery result is out of order. If it is stopped and displayed in the display mode shown and the lottery result of one special symbol is a small hit (a lottery result that can give the player a second privilege different from the first privilege), the other special symbol changes. Is stopped until the grant of the second privilege is completed (until the small hit game is completed), and is restarted after the grant of the second privilege is completed. In addition, if the lottery result of one special symbol is out of order, the change of the other special symbol is executed as it is.

With this configuration, the lottery content (lottery result, period until the lottery result is displayed) of the other special symbol can be changed based on the lottery result of one special symbol, and the player's It is possible to provide various playability.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a lottery result that can give a privilege to the player, the control content for the change of the other special symbol is changed according to the content of the privilege. Therefore, for example, in the case of a lottery result that gives the player the most advantageous privilege (big hit game), the lottery result corresponding to the change of the other special symbol being executed is the lottery result that gives the privilege. Even so, the fluctuation is forcibly stopped so that the lottery result is out of order, the player is suppressed from being given excessive benefits, and the lottery result (small hit) with less benefits given than the big hit game. In the case of, in order to prevent the privilege based on the lottery of the other special symbol from being given during the small hit game without changing the lottery result corresponding to the change of the other special symbol being executed, the variable display is performed. It is possible to interrupt only the measurement of the period.

Therefore, in a state where a plurality of special symbols (Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2) are fluctuating at the same time, the player is given the least advantageous privilege, and thus the most advantageous privilege to be given later is given. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the player is not able to do so, and it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, a short-term (0.5 second) variable display period is set as the variable display period of the second special symbol (special figure 2). It is configured so that small hit games can be performed frequently. Then, the condition for setting the latent state as the gaming state is the condition where the latent state is set, and the condition for ending the latent state is the condition for winning the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol while the probability changing state is set. Is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot, and the jackpot game is executed. Therefore, the jackpot game is executed after the end of the first advantageous period, which is advantageous to the player who frequently executes the small hit game. The second game period will be set. Therefore, since the first advantageous period and the second advantageous period that are advantageous to the player can be continuously set, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game so that the first advantageous period is set.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 9, the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in each gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, when the jackpot gaming state is set as the gaming state, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 displays, for example, a round of the jackpot game currently being executed as the content of the jackpot game. A round number display mode for indicating the number, an acquisition amount display mode for indicating the number of acquired balls, and a type for suggesting the type of the jackpot game being executed (the number of rounds, the game state set after the jackpot game is completed). The number of jackpots won in the period in which the non-normal state (probability change state, latent state, time saving state) is continuously set without setting the normal state as the suggestion display mode and the game state (so-called consecutive chan number). ) Etc. are displayed. The jackpot game display mode is displayed.

Then, at the timing when the jackpot game ends (see FIG. 5A), when the jackpot type this time is the jackpot type (for example, jackpot A) in which the probability change state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot game ends, the figure. As shown in 6 (a), an effect mode (chance zone mode) aiming at setting a latent probability state advantageous to the player is displayed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 6A, the display contents of the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 6A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 6A, on the ending screen of the jackpot game, the comment "Chance zone entry !!" indicating that the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. Then, in the main display area Dm, the character 811 displayed during the period in which the probability change state or the latent probability state is set is displayed. This character 811 is configured so as not to appear (not displayed) during the period in which the normal state is set, and the player is in the period in which the character 811 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is designed to be in a game state that is advantageous to the player (a game state that is more advantageous than the normal state).

With this configuration, the player can grasp the outline of the currently set gaming state by grasping whether or not the character 811 is displayed on the display screen, so that the game is easy to understand. Can be provided.

In addition, the comment "Aim for RUSH !!" is displayed to aim at setting the latent state in the main display area Dm. Further, in the guidance display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, the character "left-handed" is displayed as a guidance display mode for causing the player to perform a left-handed game. As a result, it is possible to easily make the player know that the left side game aiming at the left side area is performed when the probability change state is set. In the present embodiment, the second variable winning device 650, which is opened during the jackpot game, has both a ball fired by the left-handed game (a ball flowing down the left side region) and a ball fired by the right-handed game. , Characters (“left-handed”, “right-handed”) displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 during the jackpot game, which are arranged at positions where prizes can be won (downstream position of the game area (see FIG. 2)), that is, , The game method to be guided during the jackpot game is configured to be variable according to the game state before the jackpot game is executed.

Specifically, when the game state when the jackpot is won is determined and it is determined that the game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state) in which the left-handed game is guided, it is displayed as a guidance display during the jackpot. When "left-handed" is displayed and it is determined that the right-handed game is in the guided game state (latent state), "right-handed" is displayed as the guidance display during the jackpot. As a result, when the jackpot game is executed, it is possible to save the player the trouble of changing the game method.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the special figure 1 display area Dm1 for displaying the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol and the special figure 2 display area for displaying the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol are displayed. Dm2 is formed, and according to the example shown in FIG. 6A, "777" is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 as a display mode corresponding to the jackpot game currently being executed (during the ending screen display). It is displayed. In the special figure 2 display area Dm2, "-" is displayed as a non-variable display mode indicating that the second special symbol is not variablely displayed.

In the present embodiment, if the special symbol has never been variablely displayed after the power is turned on, the above-mentioned non-variable display mode is displayed. By displaying this non-variable display mode, it is possible for the player to predict the past game history (variation history of the special symbol).

Although the present embodiment is configured to display the non-variable display mode described above, the present embodiment is not limited to this, and is configured to display a predetermined display mode (initial display mode) indicating deviation. It is also good, or when it is determined that the elapsed period since the last variable display was executed exceeds a predetermined period (for example, 30 minutes), the display displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 and the special figure 2 display area Dm2. The mode may be configured to be variably displayed in the initial display mode or the non-variable display mode.

Returning to FIG. 5, the explanation will be continued. In the state in which the probabilistic state is set as the game state (see FIG. 5B), the game state is such that the lottery of the first special symbol can be easily executed by the left-handed game. That is, in the probabilistic state, since the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the electric accessory 64a is easily opened, and the ball is easily entered into the lower first entry port 64b2.

The contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in this probabilistic state will be described with reference to FIG. 6 (b). FIG. 6B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the display screen in the probable change state. As shown in FIG. 6B, the comment "in the chance zone" indicating that the current gaming state is in the probable changing state is displayed so as to scroll horizontally (from right to left) in the sub-display area Ds. Scroll.

Then, in the main display area Dm, an effect that the character 811 moves (runs) in the horizontal direction (from left to right) is displayed. Then, "left-handed" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3, and a changing display indicating that the first special symbol is changing is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. Even at this point, the second special symbol is not newly changed from the state shown in FIG. 6 (a) (because the ball is not entered into the second entrance 640 by the right-handed game). , The non-variable display mode "-" is continuously displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a plurality of operation display patterns of the character 811 are stored in the probabilistic state, and the lottery result (hit / fail determination result) of the first special symbol in the probabilistic state is stored. The operation display pattern of the character 811 is set differently according to the situation. This makes it possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol will win the jackpot in the probable change state.

After the display screen shown in FIG. 6 (b) is displayed, when the variable display for showing that the lottery result of the first special symbol has won the big hit is executed, the display shown in FIG. 7 (a) is executed. The screen is displayed. FIG. 7A is a schematic diagram showing the display contents displayed when the variable display in which the jackpot is won is started in the probable change state. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the gaming state shifts from the probabilistic state to the latent state at the timing when the variation display indicating that the first special symbol has won the jackpot is started during the probable change state. It is configured as follows.

Therefore, since the gaming state shifts to a state advantageous for the player (latent state) at the timing when the change of the first special symbol starts, the change of the first special symbol in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 of the display screen. While the variable display mode indicating that the display is being executed is displayed, the display mode of the effect symbol 813 (display mode of "333") for indicating that the game state has changed to the player is stopped. Will be done. As a result, the player can be made to think that the game state has changed from the probable state to the latent state because the effect symbol 813 is stopped and displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, since the display mode similar to the display mode of the third symbol is used as the effect symbol display mode, the stop-displayed effect symbol display mode is a display for showing the lottery result of the special symbol. It can be thought of as an aspect.

This embodiment is configured so that a large number of small hit games can be executed by frequently executing the variable display of the second special symbol during the period in which the latent probability state is set. Therefore, at least during the period in which the latent probability state is set, "right-handed" for indicating the right-handed game to the player is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "RUSH rush !! Right-handed" is displayed to indicate that the latent state is set as the game state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect symbol displayed in the main display area Dm is stopped and displayed without changing the effect mode of the special figure 1 display area Dm1 at the start of the change of the first special symbol won by the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the game state has changed according to the lottery result of the staging pattern.

Then, while the right-handed game is continuously executed in the latent state (during the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol), when the small hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, it is shown in FIG. 7 (b). As you can see, the effect mode for showing that the small hit was won is displayed. Here, the display contents when the latent probability state is set will be described with reference to FIG. 7 (b). FIG. 7B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the display screen in the latent state.

According to FIG. 7B, if a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol while the latent state is set (in RUSH), the first special symbol is in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. A variation display mode for suggesting that is in fluctuation (big hit fluctuation) is displayed, and a display mode "341" indicating that a small hit has been won is displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2. ..

Then, the treasure box 812 displayed as the effect mode in RUSH is opened, and "V" for indicating a small hit is displayed as the effect symbol 813 for indicating the game result from the inside. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the small hit is won by the second special symbol during the latent state (RUSH) and the small hit game is executed.

In this embodiment, the first variable winning device 65, which is rotated when a small hit is won, is provided in the right side region, and the game can be played by the same game method (right-handed) as in the latent state. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, even if the small hit game is frequently executed during the latent state, the player only has to continue the right-handed game, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game. can.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the probability variation state, the latent probability state is set from the start of the jackpot fluctuation, and the latent probability state is set. Is set so that the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be efficiently performed.

Therefore, at the same time as the latent state is set, the player is notified of the period during which the latent state is set (based on the setting of the latent state) (FIG. 7 (a)). ))reference.

However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed at the same time, the first special symbol is also the second in the state where the probabilistic state is set. Both special symbols may fluctuate.

In such a case, even if the display mode indicating that the latent state (RUSH) is set at the timing when the latent state is set is displayed (see FIG. 7A), the second is currently changing. Until the special symbol stops fluctuating, the lottery for the second special symbol cannot be executed in the latent state, and there is a problem that the small hit game is not executed forever even in the RUSH state. There was a risk.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the condition for transition to the latent probability state is satisfied (when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol during the probability change state), the change status of the second special symbol (whether or not there is a change, (Fluctuating remaining period) is determined, and the timing for notifying that the RUSH state has been set is different based on the determination result.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 5 and 8, when the transition condition to the latent probability state is satisfied (when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol during the probability change state), the second special symbol ( The content of the production when the special figure 2) is fluctuating will be explained. As shown in FIG. 5, if the second special symbol is changing at the time when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started in the state where the probability change state is set (see (c) of FIG. 5), the probability change A "super chance zone" with a higher expectation that the RUSH state is set is displayed rather than a "chance zone" for indicating the state.

Here, the display contents of the display screen in the "super chance zone" will be described with reference to FIG. 8A. FIG. 8A is a diagram when the change in which the jackpot is won in the first special symbol is executed during the second special symbol change in the probable change state. In other words, this "super chance zone" is a state in which the latent state is set as the game state, but the variation display of the second special symbol executed before the latent state is set is displayed. It is a display mode which shows the state which is not finished.

When the "super chance zone" is set, a comment indicating that the sub-display area Ds is "in the super chance zone" is displayed. Then, in the main display area Dm, the character 811 is displayed in a mode in which the character 811 is moving at a higher speed than in FIG. 6B, and the character 811 moving at a high speed is configured to easily find the treasure box 812.

Then, a "variable display mode" for indicating that the first special symbol is changing is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, and a latent state is set in the special figure 2 display area Dm2. The "variation display mode" that has been changing since the previous time is displayed.

Returning to FIG. 5, the explanation will be continued. The display screen of the "super chance zone" shown in FIG. 8A is displayed until the timing at which the special figure 2 fluctuation executed over the timing of shifting the gaming state from the probable change state to the latent probable state ends. When the special figure 2 fluctuation is completed (see FIG. 5 (d)), the “RUSH” rush screen for notifying the player that the “RUSH” has been rushed is displayed (see FIG. 8 (b)).

Here, with reference to FIG. 8B, the contents of the screen that has entered the “RUSH” via the “super chance zone” will be described. FIG. 8B is a schematic diagram schematically showing a screen that has entered the “RUSH” via the “super chance zone”. As shown in FIG. 8B, in the main display area Dm, the effect symbol 813 is displayed from the treasure box 812, and a display mode for notifying the player that the player has entered "RUSH" is displayed. Then, "right-handed" that guides the game method during the rush game is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. At this point, the special figure 1 display area Dm1 displays a variation display mode for suggesting that the first special symbol is changing (big hit fluctuation), and the special figure 2 display area Dm2 shows an deviation. The display mode "346" is stopped and displayed.

Returning to FIG. 5, the explanation will be continued. During the rush game (during RUSH), that is, during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, a game in which a lottery of the second special symbol in which a variation pattern with a short variation time is set by performing a right-handed game is frequently performed. Is executed. Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in the present embodiment, in a state where one special symbol wins a big hit (including during a big hit change), the other special symbol can be won by lottery. It is configured so that there is no such thing. Therefore, in the lottery of the second special symbol during the rush game, the lottery result is either a small hit or a miss. Then, in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is configured to win a small hit with a high probability (about 1/2).

Therefore, during the rush game, the game of winning the small hit with a probability of 1/2 and acquiring the prize ball by the small hit game will continue until the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol is completed. That is, even if the lottery of the second special symbol is frequently executed during the rush game, the jackpot is not won by the lottery of the second special symbol, so the jackpot fluctuation period of the first special symbol is fully used. A rush game can be provided.

Then, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is completed (see FIG. 5 (f)), a screen corresponding to the jackpot type won this time is displayed (see FIGS. 9 (a) and 9 (b)). Here, the display screen at the end of the rush game (when the big hit fluctuation is stopped in Special Figure 1) will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 (a) and 9 (b).

9 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the display contents when a big hit (big hit A (see FIG. 16 (a))) which is advantageous for the player is set, and is a diagram schematically showing FIG. 9 (b). Is a diagram schematically showing the display contents when a jackpot (big hit D (see FIG. 16A)), which is disadvantageous to the player, is won.

As shown in FIG. 9 (a), at the timing when the third symbol (“777”) for indicating that the jackpot A (see FIG. 16 (a)) was won is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. In the special figure 2 display area Dm2, the third symbol of "346" indicating the deviation is forcibly stopped and displayed. Then, the effect symbol 813 (“super V”) indicating that the jackpot advantageous to the player has been won is displayed from the treasure box 812, and the comment “Congratulations” is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In this case, the character "right-handed", which is the same game method as in the latent state, is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3.

On the other hand, in FIG. 9 (b), at the timing when the third symbol (“666”) for indicating that the jackpot D (see FIG. 16 (a)) was won is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. In the special figure 2 display area Dm2, the third symbol of "346" indicating the deviation is forcibly stopped and displayed. Then, a staging pattern 813 (“end?”) Showing that the player has won a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player is displayed from the treasure box 812, and a comment “Please return to left-handed” is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. Will be done. In this case, in order to indicate to the player that the rush game has ended, the character "left-handed", which is the same game method as in the normal state, is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3.

Note that FIG. 9 (b) shows the display screen when the jackpot D (see FIG. 16 (a)) is won, but the jackpot C (see FIG. 16 (a)) is won, that is, the jackpot D. The same jackpot game is executed, but the same display screen is displayed even if the game state set after the jackpot ends is a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot D, and the game is restored at the end of the jackpot game. As a production, it is configured to execute a production in which a right-handed game is performed. As a result, it is possible to provide a player with an unexpected effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 10, a card forgotten warning screen to be displayed to the player will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is necessary to insert a card (valuable medium) into a card unit installed along with the pachinko machine 10 in order to borrow a ball used for a game. In such a pachinko machine 10, when a player wins many prize balls by a game, he / she forgets to insert the card into the card unit and forgets to take the card at the end of the game. I had something to do.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the card forgetting warning screen (see FIG. 10A) is configured to be displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of a big hit game in which a prize ball can be won). This can prevent the player from forgetting to take the card. Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to set a jackpot that makes it easy to win a prize ball and a jackpot that is difficult to win a prize as a jackpot game, and further, it is possible to set a game state in which a small hit game can be frequently executed in a short period of time. The timing for displaying the card forgotten warning screen can be set according to the game result (cumulative number of prize balls in a predetermined period).

Here, with reference to FIG. 10A, the display contents of the card forgotten warning screen will be described. FIG. 10A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the card forgetting warning screen. In this way, the operation when removing the card from the card unit is displayed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10, and the comment "Please be careful not to forget to remove the card" is displayed. ..

Next, the display timing of the card forgotten warning screen will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 (b) to 10 (d). FIG. 10 (b) shows the case where the first jackpot is "big hit A (see FIG. 16 (a))", that is, the jackpot that can give a lot of prize balls to the player in one jackpot game is won. It is a timing chart showing the display timing of the card display (card forgotten warning display), and in FIGS. 10 (c) and 10 (d), the first big hit is "big hit A (see FIG. 16 (a))". That is, it is a timing chart showing the display timing of the card display (card forgetting caution display) when a big hit that can give a lot of prize balls to a player in one big hit game is won.

As shown in FIG. 10B, if the first jackpot (the jackpot won when the normal state is set as the gaming state) is jackpot A, a sufficient number of prize balls is given during the jackpot. Since it will be granted, the card display will be executed during the ending period (ED) of the jackpot.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10 (c) and 10 (d), when the first big hit is the big hit C, a sufficient number of prize balls cannot be given to the big hit, and the player cannot give a sufficient number of prize balls. Since there is a possibility of borrowing a ball using a card, the card display is not displayed on the end screen of the first big hit (big hit C).

In such a state, in the present embodiment, the period from the first big hit to the setting of the normal state again is set as the advantageous continuation period, and the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period is accumulated, and the accumulated result is It is configured to execute the card display on the condition that the predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) is reached as the card display execution condition.

That is, if small hit games occur continuously after the end of big hit C and the number of prize balls during the advantageous continuation period exceeds a predetermined amount, the card is displayed on the ending screen of the small hit game. (See FIG. 10 (c)), when the number of prize balls during the advantageous continuation period exceeds a predetermined amount due to repeated execution of the jackpot C, the card is displayed on the ending screen of the jackpot game. (See FIG. 10 (d)).

<Regarding the transition of the gaming state in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a method of shifting from one gaming state to another gaming state for four types of gaming states set in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment.

First, a method of shifting the gaming state when staying in the normal state will be described. As described above, in the normal state, the lottery frequency of the special symbol tends to be higher when the game is played with the left-handed than when the game is played with the right-handed, so that the left-handed is more advantageous for the player. This is because when a left-handed hit is made, it becomes easier to enter the upper first ball entry port 64b1. As described above, in the lottery of the first special symbol executed based on the ball entering the first ball entry port 64, the small hit is not drawn, so the ball is held endlessly unless it becomes a big hit. It will be in a disadvantageous state that continues to decrease. In this normal state, there is a possibility of shifting to another gaming state only when a big hit occurs. As the jackpot types that can be won in the lottery of the first special symbol, four types of jackpots A to D are provided. Details of these jackpot types will be described later with reference to FIG. 16 (a).

As shown on the left side of FIG. 11, when the jackpots A and C are determined at a total rate of 65% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state ST1, after the jackpot ends, the center of FIG. 11 It shifts to the probability change state ST2 shown in. Further, when the jackpot D is determined at a rate of 10% when the jackpot is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state ST1, the time saving state ST3 shown on the right side of FIG. 11 is entered after the jackpot is completed. .. On the other hand, when the jackpot B is determined at a rate of 25% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the normal state is set again as the game state after the jackpot ends (the normal state is looped). do).

In the normal state, it is normal to play a game aiming at the upper first entrance 64b1 by hitting left, but the player intentionally hits right and the ball enters the second entrance 640. As a result of a part of the ball hitting to the left entering the second entrance 640, there is a possibility that a big hit will be obtained in the second special symbol lottery. In this embodiment, there are three types of jackpots (big hits EG) as the jackpot types set when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol, and the jackpot of the second special symbol is won in the normal state. When the jackpots E and F are determined at a total rate of 65%, the probability change state ST2 is entered after the jackpot ends, and when the jackpot G is determined at a rate of 35%, the normal state is the game state after the jackpot ends. Is set again (loops the normal state).

In this way, if a big hit is achieved by the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state, there is a possibility that the time saving state will be more advantageous than the normal state at a rate of 10% (big hit D). If a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state, the possibility of shifting to the time saving state becomes zero. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the demerit when the irregular game method of executing the lottery of the second special symbol is performed by right-handing in the normal state, it is possible to suppress the irregular game. Further, in the lottery of the second special symbol executed in the normal state, since the fluctuation pattern having the fluctuation time for a long time (10 minutes) is set, the game efficiency is the case where the left-handed game is performed. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the demerit when the irregular game method of executing the lottery of the second special symbol is performed by right-handing in the normal state.

Next, a method of shifting the gaming state when staying in the probabilistic state will be described. As described above, in the probabilistic state, the lottery frequency of the special symbol tends to be higher when the game is played with the left-handed than when the game is played with the right-handed as in the normal state, so the left-handed is more advantageous for the player. Will be. In the probabilistic state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is higher than in the normal state, so that it is advantageous compared to the normal state, but disadvantageous compared to the latent state. When the probability change state ST2 is set, the process shifts to the latent state SP1 when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won (the change in the jackpot of the special figure 1 starts).

In the probabilistic state, the game is aimed at the lower first ball opening 64b2 provided below the upper first ball opening 64b1 while aiming at the upper first ball opening 64b1 by hitting left as in the normal state. Will do. That is, since the high probability state of the normal symbol is set during the probability change state, the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entry port 64b2 can be easily opened. Therefore, it becomes a gaming state in which the lottery of the first special symbol is easier to be executed than in the normal state.

In the probabilistic state configured in this way, a left-handed game is usually performed to execute a lottery for the first special symbol, but a ball enters the second entrance 640 and the second special symbol is used. There is a possibility that it will be a big hit by lottery. In this case, when the jackpots E and F are determined at a total rate of 65% when the jackpot of the second special symbol is won, the probability change state ST2 is set again after the jackpot ends and is determined at a rate of 35%. When the jackpot G is reached, the time saving state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot ends.

That is, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in the probabilistic state, it is possible to shift to the latent probable state which is most advantageous to the player, while the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. If this is the case, the possibility of shifting to the latent state becomes zero. Therefore, it is possible to increase the demerit when the irregular game method of executing the lottery of the second special symbol is performed by right-handing in the probabilistic state, and it is possible to suppress the irregular game.

Next, a method of shifting the gaming state when staying in the latent state will be described. As described above, in the latent probability state, unlike the normal state and the probability change state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shortened, so that the lottery of the second special symbol can be efficiently performed by playing the game by hitting right. .. Therefore, right-handed is more advantageous for the player than left-handed.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won in the state where the probability change state is set (first transition condition), and when the jackpot C is won in the state where the probability change state and the time saving state are set. It has two transition conditions (second transition condition), and when the first transition condition is satisfied, the latent state is set before the jackpot game is started, that is, during the jackpot fluctuation of the special symbol. When the setting is made and the second transition condition is satisfied, the latent state is set after the jackpot game is completed.

With this configuration, the timing at which the game state (latent state) that is most advantageous to the player is set can be set before or after the jackpot game, so that the player can play a variety of games. Can provide sex.

Further, when the first transition condition is satisfied, the period in which the latent probability state is set becomes the jackpot fluctuation period of the first special symbol, so that the period in which the latent probability state is set can be determined in advance. Therefore, it is possible to easily create an effect to be executed during the latent state in advance (at the time of setting the latent state) according to the period in which the latent state is set.

In addition, if the jackpot C is won by the lottery of the first special symbol in the state where the probability variation state is set, the latent probability state can be set before or after the jackpot game, so that the player can be set. It is possible to provide unexpected playability.

Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used for main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is provided with a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37A, 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate 65f of a variable winning device 65. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing to the right side as a shaft and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 issues various commands to these via the input / output port 205. Send a control signal.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 420, 530, 630.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. Notify the display control device 114 by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 such as a variation effect of the third symbol is produced. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are combined. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 13 to 21, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described. First, the details of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12) provided in the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

In the main control device 110, main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device (not shown). To execute. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 13) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 13, a counter or the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform a jackpot lottery, setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and drawing the display result of the second symbol display device. used.

For the setting of the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot (and small hit) lottery and the jackpot type (big hit symbol) are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for the above, the fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting the fluctuation pattern, and the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1 are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Further, the small hit type counter C5 is used for selecting the small hit type. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 52). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although the details will be described later, in the RAM 203, each counter for the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second ball entry port 640, in which each counter value is stored for the ball entry to the first ball entry port 64, is stored. A second special symbol execution area 203b in which the value is stored is provided. In the present embodiment, the first ball entry port 64 is provided with up to four reserved balls. Therefore, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 during the period when the special symbol can be drawn, such as when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner or when the special symbol is not in the jackpot game, each counter value is changed. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and when a ball enters the second entry port 640, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b. After that, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is moved to the execution area provided in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and the first special symbol is variablely displayed (dynamically). Various settings and control processes for displaying) are executed. Further, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b is used as it is for various settings and control processing for variable display of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, during the period when the lottery of the first special symbol is impossible, such as during the variable display of the first special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the ball wins the first entry slot 64. When the number of reserved balls in the first ball entry port 64 is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment), each counter value is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Will be done. Further, when the number of reserved balls for the first ball entry port 64 is the upper limit value (4 pieces in this embodiment) or more, each counter value or the like is not acquired and the prize ball (4 pieces in this embodiment) is not acquired. Only the prize ball) is treated as an invalid ball paid out to the player. In addition, the ball entered the second entrance 640 during the period when the lottery of the second special symbol is impossible, such as during the variable display of the second special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In this case, only the prize balls (two prize balls in this embodiment) are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player without acquiring each counter value or the like.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is set to 4 with respect to the first ball entry port 64, but the number is not limited to this, and may be less than 4 (for example, 3). It may be more than 4 (for example, 8). Further, a configuration in which an upper limit value is not provided may be used. Further, in the present embodiment, the ball entering the second ball opening 640 (variation display based on the lottery of the second special symbol) is not held, but the holding storage is possible as in the case of the first ball opening 64. It may be configured.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 479) and reaches the maximum value (for example, 479 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 479) and then 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 479, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 479. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 52).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing. The value of the random number that becomes the big hit of the special symbol is defined in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 15A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the first random number counter C1. When the value matches the value of the random number that is the jackpot specified in the first random number table 202a, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol. Further, the value of the random number that becomes the small hit of the special symbol is defined in the small hit random number table 202b (see FIG. 15B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 15A. The first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a hit in each game state is set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15A, when the game state is a low probability state (normal state, time saving state) of the special symbol, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. , It is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is any of "7, 8", and if it is any of "7, 8", it is determined to be a big hit.

Further, when the game state is a high probability state (probability change state, latent state) of the special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is It is determined whether it is within the range of "0 to 5", and if it is within the range of "0 to 5", it is determined to be a big hit. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, out of the random number counters having a total number of 480, two values are defined as values for discriminating as a jackpot in the low probability state of the special symbol, so that the low probability state of the special symbol is specified. The jackpot probability at the time is 1/240. On the other hand, the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol is 1/80.

Next, the small hit random number table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (b). The small hit random number table 202b is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a small hit is set in a special symbol lottery. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15B, the lottery for the first special symbol does not specify a random number value as a small hit. That is, the lottery for the first special symbol does not result in a small hit. On the other hand, in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is within the range of "212 to 432" regardless of the gaming state, and the range of "212 to 432" is determined. If it is inside, it is determined that it is a small hit.

Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is a random number that is a small hit, the first symbol. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the display device 37 is the one at the time of a small hit of the special symbol.

On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first random number. 1 The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of a big hit of a special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 479. As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, there are two values of the random number counter C1 per first, which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number value "7, 8" is the first hit as described above. It is stored in the random number table 202a. In this way, while the total number of random numbers is 480, the total number of random numbers that become big hits is 2, so the probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol is "1/240". On the other hand, in the high probability state of the special symbol, there are four values of the first random number counter C1 which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number values "0 to 5" are the first random number table as described above. It is stored in 202a. In this way, while the total number of random numbers is 480, the total number of random numbers that become big hits is 6, so the probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol is "1/80".

Further, as described above, there are 221 values of the first random number counter C1 which is a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the random number values "212 to 432" are stored in the small hit random number table 202b. ing. Since the total number of random numbers that are small hits is 221 while the total number of random numbers is 480, the probability of being a small hit of a special symbol is "221/480" (about 46%).

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The value of the first type counter C2 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit, the big hit type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A). It becomes. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG. 16 (a).

The small hit type counter C5 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the small hit type (small hit) is based on the value of the small hit type counter C5 and the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16B). A to C) will be selected. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG. 16 (b).

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, reach the maximum value (that is, 198), and then return to 0. The variation type counter CS1 determines the variation pattern of 1 from the set variation pattern selection table 202f. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also a counter for determining the fluctuation time. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 52) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202f (see FIGS. 17 to 19) storing a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random value value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided inside.

The variation pattern selection table 202f defines a plurality of data tables for selecting variation patterns (see FIGS. 17 to 19). A plurality of variation pattern selection tables according to the gaming state are set in the variation pattern selection table 202f, and a variation pattern selection table is set for each of the variation pattern selection tables according to the winning / failing determination result. Details of each variation pattern selection table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 232, the maximum value (that is, 232) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start port (through gate) 67. At that time, it is acquired and stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that is a hit of the normal symbol is defined in the second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 15C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and is the value of the second hit random number counter C4. However, when it matches the value of the random number that is the hit specified in the second hit random number table 202c, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol (second symbol). The details of the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (c).

FIG. 15C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202c. In this second hit random number table 202c, there are 11 random number values that can be hit by the normal symbol in the low probability state (in the normal state, in the latent state) of the normal symbol as the game state, and the range is "0 to 10". ". Since the total number of random numbers that can be hit by the second random number counter C4 is 233, the total number of random numbers that can be hit is 11, so the probability of hitting a normal symbol is "11/233".

On the other hand, in the high probability state (probability change state, time saving state) of the normal symbol, there are 232 random values that can be hit by the normal symbol, and the range is "0 to 231". Since the total number of random numbers that can be hit by the second random number counter C4 is 233, the total number of hit random numbers is 232, so the probability of hitting a normal symbol is "232/233". As described above, in the present embodiment, the random value that is the hit of the normal symbol is configured to have a difference of about 20 times between the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol. There is. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entry port 64b2 when the normal symbol hits are also higher than the low probability state of the normal symbol. The probability state is configured to be more advantageous (it is easier for the ball to enter the lower first entry port 64b2).

When the sphere passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed for 3 seconds in the second symbol display device. Then, in the low probability state of the normal symbol, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is within the range of "0 to 10", it is determined to be a hit, and the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed. Later, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the lower first ball entry port 64b2 is opened only "1 second x 2 times". On the other hand, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 231", it is determined to be a hit, and the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed. Later, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the lower first ball entry port 64b2 is opened only "1 second x 2 times". In this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the normal electric accessory, and the number of times of opening may be appropriately changed as long as the playability is not impaired.

The normal figure variation type counter CS2 is configured as a loop counter in which 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 198, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198), the counter returns to 0. When the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol variation pattern table 202g (see FIG. 20) for selecting the variation pattern of the normal symbol based on the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2. ) Is specified in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. The details of the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202g will be described later with reference to FIG. 20.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 198), and is updated once for each timer interruption process (see FIG. 31). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 52).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 20. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the present embodiment. In the ROM 202, in addition to the first hit random number table 202a, the small hit random number table 202b, and the second hit random number table 202c already described above, the big hit type selection table 202d, the small hit type selection table 202e, and the variation pattern selection At least a table 202f and a normal map variation pattern table 202g are provided.

First, the details of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 16A. The jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A) is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored for each type of special symbol, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is , It is specified in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the big hit type selection table 202d, and the first hit. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the type counter C2 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 16A, "big hit A" is associated with the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 24". Is stipulated. This "big hit A" has 15 rounds, and a big hit game for opening the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is set. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 25 counter values are "big hit A", so if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit A" is determined. The ratio is 25% (25/100).

When "Big hit A" is selected, the probability change state is set at the end of the big hit (the probability change flag 203g is set to ON) regardless of the game state when the big hit is won, and the number of time reductions of 10,000 times is set. It is set (a value of 10000 is set in the time saving counter 203f). That is, after the end of "big hit A", the probability change state is set until the next big hit is won.

"Big hit A" is one of the big hit types with the largest number of rounds, so it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. Further, since the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the hit probability of the normal symbol are set to be higher than those in the normal state, the gaming state is such that the game can be played more advantageous than the normal state. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the latent state is configured so as to be easier to give a privilege advantageous to the player than the probable change state, and among a plurality of gaming states, the latent state is next to the latent state. It becomes a favorable game state.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "25 to 49", "big hit B" is associated and defined. This "big hit B" is the one in which the same big hit game as the above-mentioned "big hit A" is executed, the number of rounds is 15, and the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is opened. The game is set. After the end of the "big hit B", the probability variation flag 203g is set to off, and the time saving counter 203f is configured to have a different value depending on the gaming state at the time of winning.

When the game state at the time of winning the big hit is the normal state, the value of "0" is set in the time saving counter 203f, and when the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit is the time saving state or the probability change state, the time saving counter 203f is set. A value of "100" is set. In other words, if the "big hit B" is won while the normal state is set, the normal state is set after the big hit ends, whereas if the "big hit B" is won during the time saving state, the normal state is set. , The time saving state (100 times) is set after the big hit ends. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 25 counter values are "big hit B", so if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit B" is determined. The ratio is 25% (25/100).

"Big hit B" is one of the big hit types with the largest number of rounds like "Big hit A", so it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained, but the high probability state of the special symbol is not set after the big hit is over. , It is a big hit type that is more disadvantageous than "Big hit A".

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 89", "big hit C" is associated and defined. This "big hit C" has two rounds, and a big hit game for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is opened even in the small hit game executed when the small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. It is configured so that it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the case where the "big hit C" is won and the case where the "small hit" is won.

With such a configuration, when the hit game in which the first attacker is opened is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the big hit game is executed or the small hit game is executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the player is configured to be in a latent state (RUSH state) in which the small hit game can be frequently executed during the big hit fluctuation period of the first special symbol. 1 The game is played while expecting that the hit game in which the attacker is released is a small hit game. That is, it is possible to provide a novel game property by providing a game period in which the player does not normally execute the jackpot game most desired by the player.

After the end of the "big hit C", the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON, and the time saving counter 203f is configured to have a different value depending on the gaming state at the time of winning. When the game state at the time of winning the big hit is the normal state, the value of "10000" is set in the time saving counter 203f, and when the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit is the time saving state or the probability change state, the time saving counter 203f is set. A value of "0" is set. That is, when the "big hit C" is won in the state where the normal state is set, the probable change state is set after the end of the big hit, whereas the "big hit C" is won during the probable change state or the time saving state. If so, the latent state is set after the jackpot ends.

In this way, in the game state when the jackpot is won, even if the jackpot is of the same type, the game state set after the jackpot ends is configured to be different, so that the player simply aims to win the jackpot. Not only that, it is possible to pay attention to the set game state, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the latent probability state is set as the gaming state, the gaming state is configured to be the most advantageous to the player, and the probability changing state is set as a condition for setting this latent probability state. There are two setting conditions: the first setting condition where the jackpot fluctuation of the special symbol is started when is set, and the second setting condition where the jackpot C is won when the probability variation state and the time saving state are set. is doing. That is, it is configured so that the degree of expectation (probability) in which the latent probability state is set differs depending on the game state when the jackpot is won. By configuring in this way, it is possible to gradually increase the expectation of the player to set a game state that is advantageous to the player according to the progress of the game (according to the set game state). It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter value that becomes "big hit C" is 40, so if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit C" is determined. The ratio is 40% (40/100). "Big hit C" is one of the big hit types with a smaller number of rounds and a shorter opening operation period than the above-mentioned "Big hit A" and "Big hit B", so it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. However, depending on the game state at the time of winning the big hit, it is set after the big hit because it is the only type of big hit that can set the latent state that is most advantageous to the player as the game state set after the big hit ends. In terms of the game state, it is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than "big hit A" and "big hit B".

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "90 to 99", "big hit D" is associated and defined. This "big hit D" has two rounds, and a big hit game (same as "big hit C") for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set.

After the end of the "big hit D", the probability change flag 203g is set to off, and the value of "0" is set to the time saving counter 203f. That is, when the "big hit C" is won, the normal state is set after the big hit ends. Since this "big hit D" has the same big hit game content as the above-mentioned "big hit C", the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is configured to operate in the same open operation as the small hit game. ing.

After the end of "Big hit D", since the normal state is set as described above, the fluctuation display (big hit fluctuation) that won "Big hit D" in the state where the probability change state is set is displayed. When executed, the jackpot game is executed after the small hit game is frequently performed during the jackpot fluctuation, and then the normal state is set.

That is, in the latent state (RUSH state) when the "big hit D" is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the normal state after the "big hit D" in which the same opening operation as the small hit game is set is completed. Is set, it is possible to make the player think that the latent state in which the jackpot game is executed has ended.

Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter value that becomes "big hit D" is 10, so if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit D" is determined. The ratio is 10% (10/100). "Big hit D" is one of the big hit types with a smaller number of rounds and a shorter opening operation period than the above-mentioned "Big hit A" and "Big hit B", so it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. It becomes. Further, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the normal state is set after the jackpot ends, which is disadvantageous in terms of the gaming state set after the jackpot. That is, it is the most disadvantageous jackpot type.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment has four jackpot types (“big hit A” to “big hit D”) as jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1). There is. Among them, in two jackpot types (“big hit A” and “big hit B”), a jackpot game is executed in which the second attacker (second variable winning device 650), which is opened only during the jackpot game, is targeted for opening. In the other two jackpot types (“big hit C” and “big hit D”), the jackpot game is executed by targeting the first attacker (first variable winning device 65), which is the same as the small hit game.

That is, in the first embodiment, as a big hit of a special symbol, a main big hit game (“big hit A”, “big hit B”) for the purpose of getting a player to win a prize ball, and a variable game state. ("Big hit C", a sub-big hit game for the purpose of making it difficult for a player to know whether or not a big hit has been won (making it difficult to determine whether a small hit game is a big hit game). "Big hit D") and is configured to be feasible.

Further, in the present embodiment, since it is not a big hit game but a game in which a player can get a prize ball by a small hit game, it is difficult to obtain a large amount of prize balls during the big hit game. Even so (even if a jackpot game in which only a small amount of prize balls can be obtained is executed depending on the jackpot type), a jackpot game aimed at changing the game state while suppressing discomfort to the player is performed. Can be set.

On the other hand, as the type of jackpot by the lottery of the second special symbol, "big hit E" is defined in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 4". This "big hit E" has 15 rounds, and a big hit game for opening the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is set. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, five counter values are "big hit E", so if a big hit is obtained in the second special symbol lottery, "big hit E" is determined. The ratio is 5% (5/100).

When "Big hit E" is selected, the probability change state is set at the end of the big hit (the probability change flag 203g is set to ON) regardless of the game state when the big hit is won, and the number of time reductions of 10,000 times is set. It is set (a value of 10000 is set in the time saving counter 203f). That is, after the end of "big hit E", the probability change state is set until the next big hit is won.

"Big hit E" is one of the big hit types with the largest number of rounds, so it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. Further, since the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the hit probability of the normal symbol are set to be higher than those in the normal state, the gaming state is such that the game can be played more advantageous than the normal state. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the latent state is configured so as to be easier to give a privilege advantageous to the player than the probable change state, and among a plurality of gaming states, the latent state is next to the latent state. It becomes a favorable game state.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "5 to 64", "big hit F" is associated and defined. This "big hit F" has two rounds, and a big hit game for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter value that becomes "big hit F" is 60, so if a big hit is obtained in the second special symbol lottery, "big hit F" is determined. The ratio is 60% (60/100).

When "Big hit F" is selected, the probability change state is set at the end of the big hit (the probability change flag 203g is set to ON) regardless of the game state when the big hit is won, and the number of time reductions of 10,000 times is set. It is set (a value of 10000 is set in the time saving counter 203f). That is, after the end of "big hit F", the probability change state is set until the next big hit is won.

Since "big hit F" is one of the big hit types with the smallest number of rounds, it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. Further, since the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the hit probability of the normal symbol are set to be higher than those in the normal state, the gaming state is such that the game can be played more advantageous than the normal state. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the latent state is configured so as to be easier to give a privilege advantageous to the player than the probable change state, and among a plurality of gaming states, the latent state is next to the latent state. It becomes a favorable game state.

A "big hit G" is associated with a range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "65 to 99". This "big hit G" has two rounds, and a big hit game for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter value that becomes the "big hit G" is 35, so if a big hit is achieved in the second special symbol lottery, the "big hit G" is determined. The ratio is 35% (35/100).

When "Big hit G" is selected, the normal state is set at the end of the big hit (the probability variation flag 203g is set to off) regardless of the game state when the big hit is won, and the number of time reductions of 0 times is set. It is set (a value of 0 is set in the time saving counter 203f).

Since "big hit G" is one of the big hit types with the smallest number of rounds, it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. Further, since the game state set after the big hit is the normal state, it is disadvantageous in terms of the game state set after the big hit. That is, it is the most disadvantageous jackpot type.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the case where the big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the case where the big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2). The points that the probability change flag 203g is set to ON after the big hit is 65% (65/100) are the same, but the ratio that 15 rounds are set as the big hit game (50% in Special Figure 1). , Special figure 2 is 5%), Ratio at which the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is selected as the opening target (Special figure 1 is 50%, Special figure 2 is 5%), Game state at the time of big hit winning The rate at which a value of 10000 is set in the time saving counter 203f after the end of the jackpot when is in the time saving state or the probabilistic state (that is, the high probability state of the normal symbol) (special figure 1 is 25%, special figure 2 is 65%). Is configured to be different.

In this way, by making the contents of the big hit game and the game state after the big hit different according to the type of the special symbol won by the big hit, it is possible to provide various game characteristics to the player, and the game can be played. It is possible to improve the interest.

In this embodiment, the above-mentioned contents are configured to be different depending on the type of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only a part of the above-mentioned contents may be configured to be different. It is good, and other than the above-mentioned contents, for example, by setting the number of rounds of the jackpot game that can be set only for the jackpot type corresponding to the special figure 1 (for example, 7 rounds), the set number of rounds may be different. , The ratio of setting the probability variation flag 203g to ON may be different.

Further, on condition that the ball has passed through a specific area (for example, an area where the ball winning in the second variable winning device 650 can pass) during the big hit game, the probability change flag 203g is set to ON after the big hit is completed. In the gaming machine configured in the above, the probability that the ball passes through the specific area may be different between the jackpot type corresponding to the special figure 1 and the jackpot type corresponding to the special figure 2. Further, the data table for selecting the variation pattern for showing the lottery result in each game state set after the big hit may be configured to be different depending on the big hit type.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16A, in the present embodiment, both the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) and the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) can win a prize in one round game. Although the upper limit value is set to "10", the upper limit value may be different between the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) and the second attacker (second variable winning device 650). In addition, the upper limit of the opening operation in the round game may be different depending on the winning jackpot type (or the type of the special symbol won in the jackpot).

Next, the details of the small hit type selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 16 (b). The small hit type selection table 202e is a data table referred to for determining the type of small hit when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2). In the small hit type selection table 202e, the corresponding small hit type is defined for each range of values of the small hit type counter C5.

As shown in FIG. 16B, "small hit A" is defined in association with the range in which the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "0 to 93". This "small hit A" is a small hit type in which the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state only once for 1.5 seconds during the small hit game.

Of the 100 random values that the small hit type counter C5 can take, 94 are random values that become "small hit A", so if a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, "small hit A" Is determined at 94% (94/100).

Further, in the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "94 to 98", "small hit B" is defined in association with it. This "small hit B" is a small hit type that sets an open state for 0.2 seconds x 6 times during a small hit game. Of the 100 random values that the small hit type counter C5 can take, 5 are random values that become "small hit B", so if a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, "small hit B" Is determined at 5% (5/100).

Further, the value "99" of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with "small hit C". This "small hit C" is a small hit type that sets an open state of 0.06 seconds x 8 times during a small hit game. Of the 100 random values that the small hit type counter C5 can take, one random value is "small hit C", so if a small hit is obtained by a special symbol lottery, it will be "small hit C". The ratio is 1% (1/100).

Next, the details of the variation pattern selection table 202f will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19. As described above, in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f, a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the fluctuation display is defined from the value (random value value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

As shown in FIG. 17, the variation pattern selection table 202f is a normal table 202f1 for determining a variation pattern (variation time) in a normal state, and a time reduction / probability variation for determining a variation pattern in a time reduction state and a probability variation state. At least a table 202f2 and a latent table 202f3 for determining a variation pattern in the latent state are included. The specific contents of these tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19. In each of the tables shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the fluctuation time is expressed in milliseconds, but in the following description, the fluctuation time is expressed in seconds for easy understanding.

First, the normal table 202f1 will be described with reference to FIG. The normal table 202f1 is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is in the normal state. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table 202f1. As shown in FIG. 18, the normal table 202f1 has a random number value (variation type) for determining the type (variation time) of the fluctuation pattern for each type of the special symbol and the stop type (win / fail determination result) of the special symbol. The counter value of the counter CS1) is specified.

Specifically, as a fluctuation pattern determined when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, a normal reach (20 seconds) is associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 50". Super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "51 to 100", super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "101 to 150", and super reach is associated with the range of "151 to 198". C (30 seconds) is associated.

On the other hand, when the first special symbol is lost in the lottery and the normal table 202f1 is referred to, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (value set in the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d). The correspondence between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the selected variation pattern changes according to the above. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 18, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is within the range of 0 or 1, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is long in the range of "0 to 70". The deviation pattern (12 seconds) is associated with the deviation pattern, and the deviation normal reach (20 seconds) is associated with the range of "71 to 150". Further, as the value of the variation type counter CS1, the out-of-range super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "151 to 170", and the out-of-range super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "171 to 198". Has been done.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 2 or 3, the fluctuation pattern of a short deviation (8 seconds) corresponds to the range of "0 to 70" as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. As the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern of long deviation (12 seconds) is associated with the range of "71 to 130", and the deviation pattern of normal reach (20 seconds) is associated with the range of "131 to 170". ing. Further, as the value of the variation type counter CS1, the out-of-range super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "171 to 185", and the out-of-range super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "186 to 198". Has been done.

The process of selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol with reference to the normal table 202f1 (see S505 of FIG. 35) is from the process of subtracting the reserved ball of the first special symbol (see S303 of FIG. 33). Is also executed later. Therefore, the normal table 202f1 is not referred to when there are four reserved balls.

As described above, when the number of reserved balls is small (0 or 1), it becomes easier to select a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time as compared with the case where the number of reserved balls is large (2 or 3). With this configuration, when the number of reserved balls is small, it is possible to secure time for storing the reserved balls and make the variable display less likely to be interrupted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from getting tired of the game. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is large, it becomes difficult to accumulate the reserved balls because the fluctuation time is shortened. Can be prevented (suppressed) from entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel that he / she has lost.

On the other hand, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed and the normal table 202f1 is referred to, 600 seconds (10 minutes) is set as the fluctuation time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the long variation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1. When the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, the small hit long variation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1. When the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order, the out-of-order long variation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1. As a result, when the right-handed hit is performed in the normal state and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the fluctuation time of 600 seconds is set each time, so that the game efficiency is significantly worse than the left-handed hit. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a right-handed hit is normally performed.

Next, the details of the time saving / probability variation table 202f2 will be described with reference to FIG. 19 (a). The time reduction / probability change table 202f2 is a table referred to when a variation pattern is selected when a high probability state (that is, a time reduction state or a probability change state) of a normal symbol is set as a game state.

As shown in FIG. 19 (a), the time reduction / probability variation table 202f2 is used to determine the type (variation time) of the fluctuation pattern for each type of the special symbol and the stop type (win / fail determination result) of the special symbol. A random value (counter value of the variable type counter CS1) is specified. The time saving / probability variation table 202f2 is different from the normal table 202f1 described above with reference to FIG. 18 so that different fluctuation patterns are not selected according to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. is doing.

That is, when the normal state is set as the game state, it is difficult to always secure the reserved ball of the first special symbol because the game is aimed at the upper first entry slot 64b1 while performing the left-handed game. There is a possibility that there will be a period in which the lottery for the first special symbol is not executed (the first special symbol has not changed). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small, the normal table 202f1 is configured so that the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time can be easily selected. As a result, in the normal state, the state in which the variation display of the first special symbol is not executed continues for a long time, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game.

On the other hand, the time-saving / probability-changing table 202f2 shown in FIG. 19A is in a time-saving state or a probability-changing state in which a left-handed game is performed and a game in which a ball is inserted into the lower first entry port 64b2 is performed. The data table to be referenced. During this time-saving state and the probable change state, the electric accessory 64a is frequently released, so that the game state is such that the reserved ball of the first special symbol can be easily stored.

In this way, when the gaming state in which the reserved balls of the first special symbol can be easily stored is set, it varies when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small as in the above-mentioned normal table 202f1. If a configuration is added that makes it easier to select a variation pattern with a long time, the first special symbol (special symbol 1) variation that is executed when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is reduced by taking a break from the game. The fluctuation time of the game becomes long, and it becomes difficult to play the game efficiently during the time saving state and the probable change state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the variable pattern table (time reduction / Probability variation table 202f2) so that the fluctuation pattern selected by the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol does not differ (the fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is not selected when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small). ) It is configured. As a result, it is possible to efficiently execute the game in the time-saving state and the probable change state.

Further, as will be described in detail later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a state where the probability change state is set, the probability change state is changed to the latent state at the timing when the jackpot fluctuation starts. It is configured to move to. Specifically, when the first special symbol (special figure 1) is drawn in a state where the probability change state is set and the lottery result (win / fail judgment result) is a big hit, the time saving / probability change table 202f2 is displayed. With reference, when the hit special fluctuation (600 seconds) is selected, the gaming state becomes the latent state while the hit special fluctuation (600 seconds) is being executed, and when the hit special fluctuation ends, the special figure 1 The special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with a combination indicating that the lottery result is a big hit, and the big hit game is started.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be capable of executing lottery and variation display at the same time, while the latent state is set (special variation per special figure 1). (While is being executed), the lottery of the second special symbol can be performed. In addition, in the present embodiment, the variation display period (variation time) for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol is defined as a short period (1 second) only in the latent state, and only the second special symbol. It is configured to win a small hit. With this configuration, the player is allowed to frequently draw the second special symbol while the latent state is set (while the special variation of the special figure 1 is being executed). Can win many prize balls.

As described above in FIG. 19A, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot of the special figure 1 is won in the state where the probability variation state is set, 60 seconds to 600 depending on the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. It is configured so that the fluctuation time of seconds is set, and this fluctuation time directly becomes the duration of the latent state. Therefore, as a lottery result of the special symbol, the player can pay attention not only to the result of whether or not the jackpot is won (win / fail judgment result) but also to the selected fluctuation pattern (variation time). It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

On the other hand, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed and the time saving / probability variation table 202f2 is referred to, 60 seconds (1 minute) is set as the variation time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, a long variation (60 seconds) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1. 2 When the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the small hit long fluctuation (60 seconds) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1, and the second When the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the out-of-order long variation (60 seconds) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1. As a result, when a right-handed hit is performed in a time-saving state or a probable change state and a lottery for the second special symbol is executed, a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is set each time, so that the game efficiency is extremely higher than that of a left-handed hit. Getting worse. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a right-handed player is hit in a time-saving state or a probable change state.

Next, the details of the latency table 202f3 will be described with reference to FIG. 19 (b). The latent probability table 202f3 is a table referred to when selecting a variation pattern when a latent probability state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set as a gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 19 (b), the latent probability table 202f3 is a disorder for determining the type (variation time) of the fluctuation pattern for each type of the special symbol and the stop type (win / fail determination result) of the special symbol. Numerical values (counter values of the variable type counter CS1) are specified. It should be noted that the latent probability table 202f3 is configured so that different fluctuation patterns are not selected according to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, similarly to the time saving / probability variation table 202f2 described above.

The latent probability table 202f3 is used when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol (special figure 2) during the period during which the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 1 is executed during the probability change state, or during the time saving state or the probability change state. When winning a jackpot, which is a jackpot type of "big hit C", and selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) to be executed after the jackpot game is completed. Referenced.

The latent probability table 202f3 is selected when a big hit is obtained in the first special symbol lottery with respect to the contents specified in the time saving / probability variation table 202f2 described above with reference to FIG. 19 (a). The difference is that the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 specified for each fluctuation pattern is different, and the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern selected in the lottery of the second special symbol is different. Everything else is the same. Detailed description of the same element will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 19B, as the fluctuation pattern determined when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 corresponds to the range of "0 to 39" and the normal fluctuation (60). Seconds) are associated, super fluctuations (180 seconds) are associated with the range of "40 to 119", and special fluctuations (600 seconds) are associated with the range of "120 to 198".

On the other hand, when the lottery of the first special symbol is missed and the latent probability table 202f3 is referred to, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (value set in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d). ) And the out-of-middle fluctuation (30 seconds) are associated with each other regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

When the lottery of the second special symbol is executed and the latent probability table 202f3 is referred to, 1 second is set as the fluctuation time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the hit short variation (1 second) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1. 2 When the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the small hit short variation (1 second) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1, and the second When the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the out-of-order short variation (1 second) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1. As a result, a large number of lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed in the latent state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the details of the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202g will be described. As described above, the normal symbol variation pattern table 202g is a table referred to for selecting a normal symbol variation pattern when a lottery for ordinary symbols is executed. As shown in FIG. 20, in the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202g, the range of the value of the normal map fluctuation type counter CS2 and the fluctuation pattern (variation time) are displayed for each game state at the time when the lottery of the normal symbols is executed. Is specified in association with.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 20, when the gaming state is a normal state, a latent state, that is, a low probability state of a normal symbol, the entire range of possible values of the normal figure variation type counter CS2 ( A fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is associated with 0 to 198). Further, even when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2.

On the other hand, when the game state is a time saving state or a probabilistic state, that is, a high probability state of a normal symbol, the value of the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 fluctuates in the range of "0 to 198" with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds. Patterns are associated.

In the first embodiment, a plurality of variations of the fluctuation pattern are provided only in the latent state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even in the normal state or the probabilistic state, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol may have a variation, and when the lottery of the normal symbol is executed in the latent state, the fluctuation time is 2 of 1 second or 3 seconds. Any of the types may be set, and the fluctuation time is not limited to two types, and a larger fluctuation time may be selectably configured. The more variation there is in the fluctuation time, the more difficult it is for the player to predict the fluctuation time, so that it is possible to make the player make a continuous right-handed strike more reliably during the latent state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set based on the game state and the value of the acquired normal symbol fluctuation type counter CS2, but in addition to that, it is based on the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol. You may use a configuration in which the fluctuation time is changed, a configuration in which the fluctuation time is changed based on the number of lottery of special symbols, or a configuration in which the fluctuation time of a normal symbol is set by a method in which the above-mentioned various configurations are combined. Specifically, 1 second is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol from the transition of the gaming state to the latent state until the lottery of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), and thereafter (for example, 50 times). , 51 times to 100 times) may be configured so that 3 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol.

In this way, the number of special symbol fluctuations (first special symbol, second special symbol) since the end of the previous jackpot is measured, and the variation time corresponding to the measurement result is selected and executed. , It is possible to make the player play the game with a sense of expectation so that a more advantageous fluctuation time (for example, a short fluctuation time) is executed more during the period when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. can.

In addition, while the lottery for the even number of special symbols is being executed after the game state shifts to the latent state, 1 second is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and other than that (odd number), It may be configured so that 3 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of a normal symbol. In this way, by configuring to change the fluctuation time of the normal symbol based on the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to predict the fluctuation time, so that it is more reliable during the latent state. It is possible to make a continuous right-handed hit. In this case, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is longer (longer than the case where the lottery of the special symbol is executed) when the lottery of the special symbol is not executed, or the special symbol is configured to be longer. It may be configured so that the smaller the number of lottery pending and stored, the longer the fluctuation time of the normal symbol.

Further, when setting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol based on the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol, it is preferable to configure so that the longer the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is, the easier it is to select. With this configuration, the pachinko machine 10 is adjusted so that the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is hard to be accumulated, and the pachinko machine 10 is adjusted so that the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is easy to be accumulated. It is possible to make the number of ordinary symbol lottery uniform.

Next, the details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing a configuration of RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 21, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol execution area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d, and a normal symbol holding ball. Number counter 203e, time reduction counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, special figure 1 big hit flag 203h, special figure 2 big hit flag 203i, winning state storage area 203j, small hit flag 203k, special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m, special figure 2 fluctuation It has at least a time counter 203n, a big hit medium flag 203o, a small hit medium flag 203p, a special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s, a normal figure short fluctuation flag 203t, a winning counter 203u, a special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v, and other memory areas 203z. ing.

The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area (first special symbol execution area) and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these is held. Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the small hit type counter C5, and the variable type counter CS1 is stored in the area.

More specifically, the value of each counter is acquired at the timing when the ball enters the first entry port 64 (starting prize), and the acquired data is obtained in four holding areas (holding first area to ~. Among the vacant areas of the reserved 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is the execution area. It is shifted (moved) to, and a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is performed based on each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having a smaller area number. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data shift is performed only for the holding area (holding second area to holding fourth area) in which the winning data is stored.

The second special symbol execution area 203b stores a determination value (counter value) for executing a special symbol lottery, similarly to the first special symbol execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. In the second special symbol execution area 203b, each counter value acquired at the timing when the start winning to the second entrance 640 is detected is stored.

Similar to the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area (ordinary symbol holding ball execution area) and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). ) And. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, at the timing when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is the four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). ) Is stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th) in the vacant area. That is, similarly to the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the winning order is maintained and the data corresponding to the winning is stored. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the reserved first area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is the execution area. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area after being shifted (moved) to, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty, so that it is stored in another hold area as in the case of the 1st special symbol hold ball storage area 203a. A shift process is performed in which the winning data is packed into a holding area that is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d displays the variation of the special symbol (first symbol display device 37,) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the third symbol display device 81 (variation display performed by the symbol display device 81) up to four times. The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. Is added by 1 (see S1704 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S303 in FIG. 33).

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of reserved balls N1 of the variation display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S304 in FIG. 33, FIG. 47). See S1705). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 displays the variation held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of reserved balls itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is reserved in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number of balls deviates from the number of balls, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e sets the number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times of holding the variable display in the normal symbol M) is set to zero, and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases as the ball passes through the through gate 67. Each time, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S1904 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed.

When the sphere passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved sphere counter 203e (the number of holding times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. , The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (see S1905 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S1903: No. in FIG. 49). reference).

The time saving counter 203f is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time saving state. At this time reduction counter 203f, a value corresponding to the winning jackpot type is set after the jackpot ends. Then, the time reduction counter 203f is subtracted by 1 in the game state update process executed immediately after setting the start of the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (see S308 in FIG. 36). When the lottery of the normal symbol is performed, if the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time reduction state, and the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol is executed with reference to the table for high probability time. .. On the other hand, if the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 0, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the normal state, and the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol is executed with reference to the table for low probability time.

The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol is set, and when it is set to ON, it indicates that the special symbol is in the high probability state. That is, when the probability variation flag 203g is set to on, the game state is a probability variation state (special symbol: high probability state, normal symbol: high probability state) or a latent probability state (special symbol: high probability state, It means that one of (normal symbol: low probability state) is set.

This probability variation flag 203g is set to ON at the end of the jackpot when the winning jackpot type is a jackpot for setting the probability variation state or the latent probability state after the jackpot ends (S2402: Yes in FIG. 54). 54 S2403). Then, when the symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit is stopped and displayed, it is set to off (see S806 in FIG. 38).

In this embodiment, as described above, the high-probability state of the special symbol is set based on the jackpot winning of the special symbol, and the high-probability state of the special symbol is continued until the next jackpot is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the special symbol after the high probability state of the special symbol (special symbol high probability state) is set as the special symbol high probability end condition for terminating the high probability state of the special symbol. When the number of fluctuations (number of fluctuations in the special figure) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), the probability variation flag 203g may be set to off. In this case, in order to set the timing to turn off the probability change flag 203g, a storage means for storing the number of special figure fluctuations as the special figure high probability end condition in advance and a storage means after the special figure high probability state is set are set. End determination to determine whether the number of special figure fluctuations measured by the measuring means and the special figure fluctuation number measured by the measuring means satisfy the special figure fluctuation number (special figure high probability end condition) stored in the storage means. Means and means may be provided.

Further, a plurality of special figure high-accuracy end conditions are prepared, for example, the special figure 1 high-accuracy end condition and the variation of the second special symbol that can be satisfied based only on the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol in the special-figure high-accuracy state. Various special figure 2 high probability end conditions that can be established based only on the number of times, and lottery end conditions that can be established when the lottery result of the special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a lottery result of winning a small hit). The special figure high probability end condition may be facilitated, and the probability change flag 203 g may be set to off when any of the special figure high probability end conditions is satisfied.

The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on entering the first ball entry port 64 matches the jackpot determination value at the start of fluctuation. It is a flag set to (see S407 in FIG. 34). The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to off when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (S806 in FIG. 38).

When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol ends while the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is on, the process of forcibly stopping the second special symbol with the off symbol is executed (see S804 in FIG. 38). .. As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem in which one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit while the other is being executed.

The special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on the entry into the second entry port 640 matches the jackpot determination value at the start of fluctuation. It is a flag set to (see S1007 in FIG. 40). The special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to off when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (S1506 in FIG. 45).

When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol ends while the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is on, the process of forcibly stopping the first special symbol with the off symbol is executed (see S1004 in FIG. 40). .. As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem in which one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit while the other is being executed.

The winning state storage area 203j is a storage area for storing information indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state (if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 and the probability variation flag 203g is off), the normal state is set in the winning state storage area 203j. "00H" is stored as information indicating. On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a probability change state (if the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more and the probability change flag 203g is on), the probability change state is shown in the winning state storage area 203j. "01H" is stored as information. Further, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the latent state (if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 and the probability change flag 203g is on), the latent state is set in the winning state storage area 203j. "02H" is stored as the information to be shown.

The information stored in the winning state storage area 203j is retained until the end of the jackpot, and is referred to when setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends (see S2404 in FIG. 54).

The small hit flag 203k is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on the entry into the second entry port 640 matches the small hit determination value at the start of fluctuation. This is a flag to be set (see S1102 in FIG. 41). The small hit flag 203k is set to off when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit (see S1605 in FIG. 46). When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol ends with the small hit flag 203k turned on, the fluctuation of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (the counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the special symbol is subtracted). The process of stopping) is executed (see S1603 in FIG. 46). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a problem that a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol and the big hit is started during the small hit while the small hit of the second special symbol is being executed. can.

The special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m and the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n are counters for measuring the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, and are the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When the fluctuation pattern of the symbol is selected, the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern is set. Whether or not the fluctuation time of each special symbol has ended is determined by the timing results of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m and the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n.

The jackpot flag 203o is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot is being hit. If the jackpot flag 203o is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot, and if it is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot. This jackpot middle flag 203o is set to on when the start of the jackpot is set. On the other hand, it is set to off in the jackpot end processing executed at the end of the jackpot.

The small hit middle flag 203p is a flag indicating whether or not the small hit is in progress. If the small hit medium flag 203p is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a small hit, and if it is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is not in a small hit. The small hit medium flag 203p is set to on when the start of the small hit is set (see S1606 in FIG. 46). On the other hand, it is set to off at the end of the small hit (see S2512 in FIG. 55).

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to win a small hit only for the second special symbol, and when the small hit is won (when the small hit medium flag 203p is set to ON), the second special symbol is won. 1 It is configured to interrupt the variable display of special symbols. That is, among the multiple types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), one special symbol (second special symbol) is selected by lottery to win a small hit, and the small hit medium flag 203p is set to ON. In this state, since the variable display of the other special symbol (first special symbol) does not end, the player can be made to pay attention to the small hit game and play the game. Further, during the small hit game, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from ending and the big hit game from starting.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is a flag indicating that the fluctuation of the first special symbol is the period from the stop display (confirmed display) of the jackpot stop symbol to the start of the jackpot. When the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to on, the execution of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided even if there is a new entry to the second entry opening 640. (See S901: Yes in FIG. 39). This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to on when the second special symbol is forcibly stopped by a missed symbol (see S802 in FIG. 38), and the process for executing the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided. If so, it is set to off (S902 in FIG. 39).

The normal symbol short fluctuation flag 203t is a flag for indicating that the fluctuation of the normal symbol (second symbol) was a short fluctuation (variation for 3 seconds), and is set to on to indicate the normal symbol (second symbol). It shows that the short change of the symbol) has been executed. The normal symbol variation flag 203t determines that the timing for setting the variation time of the normal symbol in the normal symbol variation processing (see S106 in FIG. 48) is in the time reduction state (time reduction) (S1811: Yes in FIG. 48). ), It is set to on when the fluctuation time (short fluctuation) of 3 seconds is set (S1814 in FIG. 48), and it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) has elapsed (S1816 in FIG. 48: Yes), it is referred to when it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol (second symbol) is a hit (S1818: Yes in FIG. 48) (S1819 in FIG. 48).

Here, when it is determined that the normal figure short fluctuation flag 203t is set to ON (S1819: Yes in FIG. 48), it is determined whether the current state is in the time saving state (time saving in progress) (S1821 in FIG. 48). ), When it is determined that the time saving state is in progress (S1821: Yes in FIG. 48), an opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a (FIG. 48 S1822). The short variation flag 203t is set to off after being determined to be on in the normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 48) (S1820 in FIG. 48).

In this way, when the game state at the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol (second symbol) (when the fluctuation time is set) and when the electric accessory 64a opening operation is set after the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) has elapsed. Since the opening operation (long opening) that is advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a only when both the gaming state and the time saving state are set, a plurality of gaming states (normal state) are set. By changing the normal symbol (lottery) that is executed across the time saving state), it is possible to surely prevent the electric accessory 64a from opening for a long time, which is an advantageous privilege for the player (long of the electric accessory 64a). It is possible to prevent the player from being excessively provided with the opening).

The winning counter 203u is a counter that counts the number of balls that have won (winned) into the first specific winning opening 65a in the round of the small hit game. When the value of the winning counter 203u becomes 10, which is the upper limit value, it is determined that the end condition of the round is satisfied, and the round is ended (see S2706 in FIG. 57). In each round of big hits, even if the value of the winning counter 203u is less than 10, the round is ended when the round period set for the round is reached. The value of the winning counter 203u is incremented by 1 each time a ball is detected in the first specific winning opening 65a during the round validity period of the small hit. Also, the value is reset to 0 at the end of each round.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, the above-mentioned winning counter 203u is not limited to the small hit game, but also counts the number of balls that have won the second specific winning opening 650a in each round during the big hit game. It is also used for.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the period for opening the first specific winning opening 65a is set to 1.5 seconds as the game content of the small hit game, and the end condition of the round established by the number of winnings is set to 10. is doing. That is, the valid period (1.5 seconds) of the round game elapses by the time 10 balls are won in the first specific winning opening 65a during the small hit game (until the round end condition for the number of winnings is satisfied). It will be. Therefore, since the period of the small hit game can be fixed, the effect straddling the small hit game (the period from the start of the change of one special symbol to the end of the change of the other special symbol via the small hit game). It is possible to predetermine the production period of a series of productions to be performed. Therefore, the fluctuation timing of the special symbol and the execution timing of the effect can be easily synchronized, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is a flag indicating a period for stopping the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1, and when it is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped. When the state set to on is set to off, the update (subtraction) of the stopped fluctuation time is restarted.

This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to be turned on when the change of the second special symbol (special figure 2) whose lottery result is a small hit is stopped (S1602 in FIG. 46), and the special symbol change processing (FIG. 32) (see S202 in FIG. 32). As a result of reference, when it is set to ON, the process of updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the special figure 1 is executed in the same manner as during the change (S203 in FIG. 32). That is, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped, but the fluctuation display is continuously executed in the first symbol display device 37. Will be. As a result, it is possible to notify that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped by setting the temporary stop flag 203v of the special figure 1 to ON. Then, when it is determined that it is set to on in the first special symbol variation executing process (see FIG. 37) (S701: Yes in FIG. 37), it is set to off (S703 in FIG. 37).

In addition, in this embodiment, since only the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be able to win the small hit, the special symbol whose variation display is temporarily stopped based on the winning of the small hit is the first special. Only symbols are available, but if the lottery for the first special symbol is configured so that a small hit can be won, even if the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is provided to temporarily stop the variation display of the second special symbol. good.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a big hit, it is based on the fact that one special symbol is stopped in the combination indicating the big hit (based on the execution of the big hit game). ), The process of forcibly stopping the variable display of the other special symbol, and if the lottery result of one special symbol is a small hit, one special symbol is stopped by the combination indicating the small hit. Based on this, the variable display of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (stopped until the small hit game is completed).

That is, it is configured so that the variable display of the other special symbol can be processed in various modes according to the lottery result of one special symbol. With this configuration, the lottery result of one special symbol becomes the most advantageous game result (for example, big hit) for the player, and while the variable display for showing the game result is being executed, the other The special symbol (the lottery result is a small hit) is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to prevent the big hit from being erased by the small hit.

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is provided with various flags, counters, and the like. Based on the various tables provided in the ROM 202 and the flags, counters, and the like provided in the RAM 203, the basic functions of the pachinko machine 10 and the novel state transition shown in FIG. 11 can be realized.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23, details of the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 22A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 22A, the ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a, a stop display mode selection table 222b, and an additional effect selection table 222c.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, the voice lamp control device 113 is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110, and the rough variation content (variation time, variation type (reach, deviation, etc.) indicated by the variation pattern command) is shown. ), It is used to determine the content of the detailed variable display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This makes it possible to determine a wider variety of variation modes. Here, one of a plurality of types of variation mode is determined by lottery with respect to the rough variation content instructed by the main control device 110.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 19A, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol in the state where the probability variation state is set, the fluctuation time is 60 seconds per normal fluctuation and fluctuation. A fluctuation pattern command corresponding to either a super fluctuation when the time is 180 seconds or a special fluctuation when the fluctuation time is 600 seconds is output from the main control device 110, and the fluctuation pattern command (variation time) received by the voice lamp control device 113. The variable effect corresponding to the information indicating) will be set.

Here, as a variation effect corresponding to the special variation (600 seconds), the first 60 seconds is the first stage effect mode (for example, the effect of defeating the first enemy), and the second period is 60 seconds to 180 seconds. A variable effect is set to execute the stage effect mode (for example, the effect of defeating the second enemy) and execute the third stage effect mode (effect of defeating the third enemy) in a period of 180 to 600 seconds. As a variation effect corresponding to the variation (180 seconds), the first stage effect mode (for example, the effect of defeating the first enemy) is executed for the first 60 seconds, and the second stage effect mode is executed for a period of 60 seconds to 180 seconds. A variable effect that executes (for example, an effect of being defeated by a second enemy) is set, and as a variable effect corresponding to the normal variation (60 seconds), the first 60 seconds is the first stage effect mode (for example, the first enemy). A variable effect is set to execute the effect) to be defeated.

In this way, by setting the effect mode so as to divide the variation effect to be executed corresponding to the stage of the variation time that can be set as the lottery result of the special symbol, the variation pattern set this time for the player. It is possible to entertain the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while predicting which type the is, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

In addition, in the case of executing the above-mentioned variable effect, the remaining time display mode for allowing the player to grasp the remaining time for the effect period set as each stage (for example, the timing at which the effect mode can shift to the next stage). It may be configured to display an effect mode) in which the remaining time until is displayed as a countdown. As a result, the player can be made to know in advance at least the period during which the fluctuation effect is continuously executed (the period during which the latent state is continuously set), so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. can.

In addition, multiple types of enemies that appear during the variable effect are provided, and the degree of expectation that the variable effect will shift to the next stage according to the type of enemy that appears (the rate at which the effect mode that wins the enemy is selected) and , It is preferable to configure it so that it is possible to suggest the content of the jackpot game executed after the end of the current fluctuation display and the game state set after the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, in this case, for example, when enemy A is displayed as the enemy type, if the fluctuation pattern set this time is a hit super fluctuation (180 seconds), the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player is If it indicates that it is selected and the fluctuation pattern is a hit special fluctuation (600 seconds), it may be configured to indicate that a jackpot type other than the most advantageous jackpot type for the player is selected. With this configuration, the effect mode (type of enemy) of the variable effect can be determined by combining a plurality of elements that determine whether or not to give a privilege advantageous to the player. The effect can be further enhanced.

In the stop display mode selection table 222b, the latent state is set as the game state, and the period during which the small hit game can be frequently executed (hereinafter referred to as the rush period) is set by the lottery of the second special symbol. It is a data table referred to when selecting the stop display mode (see FIGS. 7A and 8B) of the effect symbol for notifying a person. The stop display mode selection table 222b is configured to select different stop display modes according to the jackpot type won in the lottery of the first special symbol and the length of the rush period to be executed.

Here, the contents of the stop display mode selection table 222b will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 23 (a). FIG. 23A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the stop display mode selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 23A, the stop display mode selection table 222b predicts the degree of advantage of each jackpot type (number of rounds, gaming state set after the jackpot game) and the length of the rush period. It is stipulated that the stop display mode of the effect symbol is set so as to be possible.

Specifically, among the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the jackpot type "big hit A", which is the most advantageous to the player, is won, and the remaining time storage area 223p (the length of the rush period) is set. When the information stored in the area for storing the indicated information) is "0 to 60 seconds", that is, the rush period is within 60 seconds, the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 39". , The stop display mode "111" is defined, the stop display mode "111" is defined in the range of "40 to 79", and the stop display mode "666" is defined in the range of "80 to 99". ..

In addition, the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) that won the "big hit A" is "61 seconds to 300 seconds", that is, the rush period is 61. If it is within ~ 300 seconds, the stop display mode "111" is defined in the range of "0 to 39" for the acquired effect counter 223h, and the stop display mode "333" is defined in the range of "40 to 79". Is specified, the stop display mode "333" is specified in the range of "80 to 99", and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing the information indicating the length of the rush period) is specified. When "301 seconds or more", that is, when the rush period is 301 seconds or more, the stop display mode "777" is defined in the range where the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is "0 to 39", and "40 to 79". The stop display mode "777" is defined in the range of "80 to 99", and the stop display mode "VVV" is defined in the range of "80 to 99".

Then, among the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the jackpot type "big hit B", which is disadvantageous to the player, is won, and the remaining time storage area 223p (information indicating the length of the rush period is stored). When the information stored in the area) is "0 to 60 seconds", that is, the rush period is within 60 seconds, the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 39", and the stop display mode is "222" is defined, the stop display mode "444" is defined in the range of "40 to 79", and the stop display mode "666" is defined in the range of "80 to 99".

In addition, the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) that won the "big hit B" is "61 seconds to 300 seconds", that is, the rush period is 61. If it is within ~ 300 seconds, the stop display mode "444" is defined in the range of "0 to 39" for the acquired effect counter 223h, and the stop display mode "666" is defined in the range of "40 to 79". Is specified, the stop display mode "111" is specified in the range of "80 to 99", and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is specified. When "301 seconds or more", that is, when the rush period is 301 seconds or more, the stop display mode "111" is defined in the range where the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is "0 to 39", and "40 to 79". The stop display mode "333" is defined in the range of "80 to 99", and the stop display mode "333" is defined in the range of "80 to 99".

Finally, among the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the second most advantageous jackpot type "big hit C" or the most unfavorable jackpot type "big hit D" is won and the rest. When the information stored in the time storage area 223p (area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is "0 to 60 seconds", that is, when the rush period is within 60 seconds, the acquired effect counter 223h The stop display mode "444" is defined in the range of "0 to 39", the stop display mode "666" is defined in the range of "40 to 79", and the stop display mode "666" is defined in the range of "80 to 99". The stop display mode "444" is specified.

In addition, the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) that is won in "Big hit C" and "Big hit D" is "61 seconds to 300 seconds", that is, When the rush period is within 61 to 300 seconds, the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is defined in the range of "0 to 39", the stop display mode "666" is defined, and the value is in the range of "40 to 79". The stop display mode "111" is defined, and the stop display mode "111" is defined in the range of "80 to 99", and is stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period). When the information is "301 seconds or more", that is, when the rush period is 301 seconds or more, the stop display mode "333" is defined in the range where the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is "0 to 39". , The stop display mode "777" is defined in the range of "40 to 99".

As described above, in the present embodiment, the length of the rush period and after the end of the rush period are determined by the stop display mode of the effect symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing when the rush period is started. It is configured to suggest the content of the jackpot to be executed (big hit type) to the player. As a result, the player can predict the future game content by grasping the stop display mode of the effect symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is stipulated that the stop display mode of the staging symbol has a predetermined rule, and specifically, the stop display mode of the staging symbol is "even symbol", "odd symbol", and the like. It is stipulated that the benefits given to the player increase in the order of "777" and "VVV" (the rush period becomes longer, and the jackpot type becomes more advantageous). By giving a predetermined rule to the stop display mode of the staging symbol in this way, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Further, since the jackpot type and the length of the rush period are combined to select the stop display mode of the effect symbol, for example, the stop display mode "111" of the effect symbol is most advantageous to the player. Since it is stipulated that only when the jackpot type "big hit A" is set, it is selected even if the rush period is within 60 seconds, if "111" is displayed, the player In contrast to the novel gameplay that wants the rush period to end in 60 seconds, that is, the playability that normally wants a longer rush period, the jackpot type and the length of the rush period are combined. By displaying the stop display mode, it is possible to add a game property that is opposite to the normal game result (short rush period).

In addition, when "VVV" is displayed as the stop display mode of the staging symbol, it means that the player has selected the most advantageous one for both the jackpot type and the length of the rush period. On the other hand, you can play the game with confidence.

In the present embodiment, the timing for selecting the stop display mode of the effect symbol by referring to the stop display mode selection table 222b according to the game state (timing for stopping and displaying the effect symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81) is set. It is configured to be different. Specifically, whether or not the second special symbol is changing at the time when the latent probability state is set (when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol starts in the state where the probability change state is set). If it is determined that the second special symbol has not changed, that is, if the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed immediately after the latent probability state is set, the jackpot change of the first special symbol occurs. It is configured to stop and display the staging symbol based on the start.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol is fluctuating at the time when the latent probability state is set (when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started while the probability variation state is set), That is, unless the variable display of the second special symbol currently being executed is completed, if the lottery of the second special symbol cannot be executed in the state where the latent state is set, the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is displayed. It is configured to stop and display the staging symbol based on the timing when is finished.

With this configuration, it is possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol with the latent state set immediately after the staging symbol is stopped and displayed and the rush period is started, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. It is possible to play a game in a latent state without giving it.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is said that the second special symbol is changed at the time when the latent probability state is set (when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started in the state where the probability change state is set). In the case of determination, the length of the rush period from the timing when the variation display of the second special symbol being executed ends is determined, and if the determination result is within a predetermined time, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed. It is configured not to execute (the effect indicating that the rush period has started). As a result, the rush period ends if the small hit game is executed even though the effect symbol is stopped and displayed to notify that the rush period has started (the rush game has started). Can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, since the start of the rush period (rush game) is configured to be displayed by a staging symbol similar to the third symbol, it is as if the third symbol corresponds to the special symbol. It is possible to make the player think that the rush game has been executed based on the fact that the symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, even if the length of the rush period is within a predetermined time and the staging symbol is not stopped and displayed, it is possible to suppress giving a great sense of discomfort to the player.

In the present embodiment, as described above, as the timing for stopping and displaying the staging symbol, the second special being executed at the timing when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started or the timing when the latent state is set. Although the timing at which the variation display of the symbol is stopped is used, the effect symbol may be configured to be stopped and displayed at a timing other than this, and is stored in, for example, the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. If the winning information command indicating the winning information is analyzed and it is determined in advance that the jackpot fluctuation will be executed in the next fluctuation, immediately before the jackpot fluctuation is executed (the third symbol in the pre-variation of the jackpot fluctuation). May be configured to stop and display the effect symbol at the timing when is stopped and displayed). With this configuration, the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed immediately after the latent state is set.

In this way, when using a configuration in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed before the jackpot fluctuation is executed and the notification that the rush game is started is used, the second input is performed from the timing when the effect symbol is stopped and displayed. When a game aiming at the ball mouth 640 (right-handed game) is performed, it is preferable to configure so that the lottery of the second special symbol is not executed before the next jackpot fluctuation is started. As a result, as a result of performing a right-handed game based on the fact that the staging symbol is stopped and displayed, the second is before the latent probability state is set (before the jackpot fluctuation is started), that is, during the probability change state. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a lottery for a special symbol is executed and the period during which the rush game is executed is shortened.

The additional effect selection table 222c is used when selecting an effect mode (additional effect mode) for resuming the variable display of the first special symbol that has been temporarily stopped due to winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery. The data table to be referred to is configured so that a different additional effect mode (treasure box (see FIG. 7B)) is selected according to the residual fluctuation time of the first special symbol after resumption. Here, the contents specified in the additional effect selection table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 23 (b).

FIG. 23B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the additional staging selection table 222c. As shown in FIG. 23B, in the additional effect selection table 222c, different additional effect types are selected based on the period information stored in the residual variation time information storage area 223o and the additional effect counter 223i. The data content is defined as such, and the player predicts the remaining variation time (remaining period of the rush period) of the first special symbol by executing the additional effect mode corresponding to the selected additional effect type. It is configured to get.

Specifically, when the remaining fluctuation time (period information stored in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o) is the period A (less than 5 seconds), the value of the acquired additional effect counter 223i is "0 to 99". "None" is specified in the range of "100 to 198", and "Additional effect A" is specified in the range of "100 to 198". Further, when the remaining fluctuation time (period information stored in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o) is the period B (5 seconds to 60 seconds), the value of the acquired additional effect counter 223i is "0 to 99". The additional effect type "additional effect A" is defined in the range of "100 to 198", and the "additional effect B" is defined in the range of "100 to 198". When the remaining fluctuation time (period information stored in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o) is the period C (60 seconds or more), the value of the acquired additional effect counter 223i is in the range of "0 to 99". The additional effect type "additional effect B" is defined, and "additional effect C" is specified in the range of "100 to 198".

Here, when the "additional effect A" is set, the display mode of the treasure box 812 (see FIG. 7B) displayed during the rush period is changed to a tattered display mode. By grasping the tattered display mode, the player can predict that the rush period is short. Further, when "additional effect B" is set, the treasure box 812 (see FIG. 7B) in the normal display mode is displayed, and when "additional effect C" is set, the treasure box 812 in the normal display mode is displayed. A gorgeous display mode is set. If "None" is selected, the effect of not displaying the treasure box 812 is set during the remaining rush period.

In the additional effect selection table 222c (FIG. 23 (b)) shown in the present embodiment, an example in which the remaining fluctuation time of the rush period and the additional effect type are completely associated with each other is shown, but the present invention is limited to this. With a small probability, for example, "additional effect C" is set when the period B is set, and "additional effect A" or "none" is set when the period C is set. Is also good. As a result, it is possible to perform an unexpected effect on the player.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the compound game information in which the rush period and the jackpot type are combined is played in the stop display mode of the effect symbol displayed at the timing when the latent state is reached and the rush game is started. It is configured to provide the player with game information indicating the remaining period of the rush period by providing additional effects during the rush period. As a result, the player can comprehensively discriminate between the stop display mode of the staging symbol executed as the compound game information and the staging mode of the additional staging, so that more detailed game contents can be predicted.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 22 (b). FIG. 22B is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d, a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e, and a special figure 1 stop. Type selection flag 223f, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g, effect counter 223h, additional effect counter 223i, state setting area 223j, remaining time reduction number area 223k, special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m, special figure. 2 Fluctuation time counter 223n, remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o, remaining time storage area 223p, card notification flag 223q, card notification possible flag 223s, rush display flag 223t, prize ball counter 223u, power supply. At least the disconnection flag 223y and the other memory area 223z are provided.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until the processing for the command is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read / written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 60) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process performs the command determination process. , The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores winning information. In the pachinko machine 10, when the starting prize for the first ball opening 64 is detected in the main control device 110, the first winning random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 acquired in response to the starting winning. From each value of the small hit type counter C5 and the variable type counter CS1, various information (whether or not, the big hit type in the case of a big hit, the fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the starting prize is drawn is obtained. It is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and various predicted information is notified from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win / fail, big hit type in case of big hit, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and the winning information. Is stored in the winning information storage area 223b. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 areas (1st to 4th areas). Will be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is a variation effect (variation display) of the first special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is reserved by the main control device 110. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol up to four times for each type of special symbol.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c sets the reserved ball number as the special symbol. It is designed to be managed for each type of.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the ball into the first ball entry port 64, or in the main control device 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command. , Stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (see S4212 in FIG. 60). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d.

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223c, and holds the first special symbol after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the ball number counter 223c, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, it holds the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the ball number symbol is displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is changed while synchronizing with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. can. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e receive the fluctuation pattern command of the first special symbol and the fluctuation pattern command of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110, respectively. It is turned on (see S4206 and S4209 in FIG. 60) and turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S5102 and S5108 in FIG. 69). When the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e are turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

When the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g receive the stop type command of the first special symbol and the stop type command of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110. (See S4301 in FIG. 61), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S5112 in FIG. 69). When the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is turned on, the stop type is changed based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type). It is determined.

The effect counter 223h is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The effect counter 223h is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198. For example, each time the main process (see FIG. 59) is executed, the value is incremented by 1 and updated. Will be done.

The additional effect counter 223i is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The additional effect counter 223i is composed of a 1-byte loop counter updated in the range of 0 to 198. For example, the value is incremented by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 59) is executed. Will be updated.

The state setting area 223j is a storage area in which information corresponding to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is stored. In this state setting area 223j, every time a state command output from the main control device 110 is received, information corresponding to the state of the pachinko machine 10 indicated by the state command is stored (see S4405 in FIG. 62). .. More specifically, the state setting area 223j is allocated with a 2-bit storage area, and whether or not it is a high-probability state of a special symbol or whether or not it is a high-probability state of a normal symbol in order from the high-order bit. A value indicating whether or not is stored. For example, if the value of the state setting area 223j is "11B", it means that it is a probabilistic state (high probability state of special symbol and high probability state of normal symbol), and if it is "10B", it means latent. It means that it is a probable state (a high-probability state of a special symbol and a low-probability state of a normal symbol). On the other hand, if it is "00H", it means that it is a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol and a low probability state of a normal symbol).

By updating the state setting area 223j in response to the state command output from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 can accurately grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10.

The remaining time reduction area 223k is a storage area for storing the remaining number of times in the high probability state of the normal symbol. The remaining time reduction number area 223k is updated to the number of times notified by the remaining time reduction number command output every time the value of the time reduction counter 203f is updated in the main control device 110 (see S4802 in FIG. 66). As a result, the value stored in the remaining time reduction number area 223k can be updated in synchronization with the value of the time reduction counter 203f of the main control device 110, so that the remaining time reduction number grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 can be determined. It can be matched with the actual number of time reductions updated by the main controller 110.

The special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m and the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n indicate the corresponding fluctuation time when each fluctuation display is set (executed) in the fluctuation display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 69). Each time a value is set and various counter update processes (see S4111 in FIG. 72) are executed, each value is decremented by 1 (see S5402 and S5404 in FIG. 72). The period from the reception of the special figure 1 temporary stop command to the reception of the special figure 1 restart command is when various counter update processes (see S4111 in FIG. 72) are executed. Also, the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is configured so as not to be subtracted by 1.

Then, when calculating the remaining fluctuation time in the temporary stop-related processing (see S4220 in FIG. 67) that is executed when it is determined that the temporary stop-related command has been received in the command determination processing (see S4112 in FIG. 60). It is referenced (see S4903 in FIG. 67).

The remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o is a storage area for storing information indicating the remaining period of the rush period, that is, the remaining time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol. In this residual fluctuation time information storage area 223o, remaining period information (period A to period C) for indicating the residual fluctuation time of the temporarily stopped first special symbol variation display is set, and the temporarily stopped first special The remaining period information stored when setting the additional effect when restarting the variable display of the symbol is referred to.

The card notification flag 223q is a flag for indicating whether or not the card forgetting warning screen (see FIG. 10A) is displayed (notified), and is turned on when the card forgetting warning screen is displayed. Set.

The card notification possible flag 223s is a flag for indicating whether or not the card forgetting warning screen (see FIG. 10A) can be displayed (notified), and the card forgetting warning screen can be displayed. It is set to on when the above conditions are met.

The rush displayed flag 223t is a flag for indicating whether or not the rush game has been started in the state where the latent state is set, and is a rush entry screen indicating that the rush game has started (FIG. 7). (A), see FIG. 8 (b)) is set to on.

The prize ball number counter 223u is a counter for continuously measuring the number of prize balls after the jackpot game is started, and is a prize ball during a period in which a game state advantageous to the player is continuously set. The numbers are configured to be cumulative. Specifically, in the hit-related processing (S4216 in FIG. 63), when it is determined that the prize ball command has been received (S4505: Yes in FIG. 63), the value corresponding to the received prize ball command is added (S). S4506 in FIG. 63).

As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to acquire a large amount of prize balls not only in the big hit game but also in the small hit game, the pachinko machine 10 is small according to the value of the prize ball counter 223u. It is configured so that the card forgotten warning display can be executed after the end of the winning game or after the end of the big hit game in which a small number of rounds is set.

The power cutoff flag 223y is a flag used for determining whether or not there is a momentary power failure. The power cutoff flag 223y is set to be turned on before the power cutoff process is executed after receiving the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S4117 in FIG. 59). After that, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all the information in the RAM 223 disappears after a certain period of time (100 milliseconds). Therefore, when the power cutoff flag 223y is on (see 4008: Yes in FIG. 58) in the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 58), it is constant after the power cutoff flag 223y is set to on. This is the case where the voice lamp control device 113 is started up before the lapse of time (100 milliseconds), that is, when there is a momentary power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 has not disappeared, and unnecessary information (or information that has become incomplete due to the disappearance of only a part of the information) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. In some cases, the information in the work area of RAM 223 is cleared (see S4009 in FIG. 58). As a result, the processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so that each processing of the voice lamp control device 113 can be operated normally.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and the number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches it, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset is applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by 1. When the MPU 231 executes the instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory generally has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, high-speed reading is possible for the data on the second and subsequent pages, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-consecutive data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 described later of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and is, for example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to read and write data to and from the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b has one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in one bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. The process of transferring one page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a in the NOR type ROM 234d, specifically, the first program stored in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be executed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and also specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM 234d is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (command code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after the address "0000H" is specified, and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The program storage area of the work RAM 233 for each fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is programmed so that the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 73) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a is stored, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 30) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. By expanding the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 75 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes an image drawing process for the next frame, and also executes a process of displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays an image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, the NAND flash memory facilitates a large capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 by the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display a third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is held without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area for storing the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the game is started by the player while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the upper first entry port 64b1 or the lower first. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a variable image at power-on, which displays the result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 by a variable effect when a ball entering the ball entry port 64b2 is detected.

When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 73).

Here, a variation image when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. 25. In FIG. 25, immediately after the power is turned on by the display control device 114, the power is turned on by the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234. It is explanatory drawing explaining the time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the main image area 235a at power-on, and the main image at power-on shown in FIG. 25 (a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is the instruction command for starting the variation, is received, the display control device 114 displays FIG. 25 (b). On the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, the image of the "x" symbol that fluctuates when the power is turned on is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the fluctuation period. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image shown in FIG. 25 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the variation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", it is shown in FIG. 25 (c). The displayed image is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball is detected in the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2. If this is the case, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 25 (b) and 25 (c) are drawn. Is instructed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 so as to be alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball is detected in the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is set to the third. It can be immediately displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 24, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 26, the range of the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be described. FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a range of four types of rear images and a rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image, and FIG. 26 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing " FIG. 26B shows the back side A corresponding to the "city stage", and the back sides B to D corresponding to the "forest stage", the "river stage", and the "sky stage", respectively. .. Further, FIG. 27 is shown with respect to the back surface E corresponding to the “island stage”.

As shown in FIG. 26, as the rear image corresponding to each of the rear surfaces A to D, an image that is horizontally longer than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A to D (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured so that the back image is continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a'are composed of an image corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The rear image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

When the change of the back type is decided based on the back type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to "city stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "empty stage", MPU231 will be First, the area between the position a and the position a'of the corresponding rear image is set as the initial position of the display area, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image of the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and further displayed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the position a and the position c so as to flow toward the left.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27, the rear image on the back surface E has a third symbol in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) → ... In FIG. 27 with the passage of time. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, on the back surface E, the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed in a fixed position. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color tone of the sky image spreading on the mountain changes with the passage of time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage", the rear image shown in FIG. 27 (a) is displayed as the initial rear image of the rear surface E. In the rear image shown in FIG. 27 (a), an orange sky indicating a morning glow is displayed. Then, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the back image shown in FIG. 27B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 27 (b), a bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black with the lapse of time, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, the back image shown in FIG. 27 (c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 27 (c), a black sky indicating the night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually begins to turn white from black and then changes to orange. Then, after the lapse of a predetermined time, the back image shown in FIG. 27 (a) is returned, and the back images of FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (c) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 again.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 26A, the back surface A corresponding to the city stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 in which all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d are stored. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is played without changing the stage while the initial stage "city stage" is displayed, so the image data on the back A corresponding to the frequently displayed "city stage" is displayed. By making all of them resident in the rear image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the "forest stage", the back surface C corresponding to the "river stage", and the back surface D corresponding to the "empty stage" are a part of the back surface as shown in FIG. 26 (b). That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Further, the back surface E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 27 (a), and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (b) excluding FIG. 27 (b) is obtained after the power is turned on. It is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and is resident in the start-up process.

Here, in order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to make the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images, but if this is done, the resident video RAM 235 will be resident. As a result, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image first displayed when the stage is changed is the range from the position a to the position a'(or the range of FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (b)). ), And the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 27 (a) and 27 (b)) is transferred to the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Since the character ROM 234 is configured to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, when the stage change is decided by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial positions of the back surfaces B to D can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone changes with the passage of time. It can be displayed while making it. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a part of the range of images is stored in the back surfaces B to D, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, on the rear surfaces B to D, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is directed from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. While scrolling, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b'to the image at the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b'to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b'to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Similarly, on the back surface E, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the images of FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. While the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 27 (b) to 27 (c) and 27 (c) to (a) can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, FIG. 27 (a). ) To (b) are set. As a result, while displaying the images of FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (b), the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 27 (b) to (c) and 27 (c) to (a) are normally used. Since it can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images of FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Using the image data corresponding to the rear image, the images of FIGS. 27 (b) to (c) and 27 (c) to (a) are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time. be able to.

In the backs B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 24) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

Further, in the rear surfaces B to D, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the images between the positions b'and b. Image data to be stored is duplicated. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image controller 237 is controlled. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so that the image between the positions a and c flows toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 24, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, is resident. As a result, when performing a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37 after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640, the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variation effect is not immediately started.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", the main symbol consisting of the rear symbol such as a wooden box, the rear symbol and the character such as the furoshiki, the helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the above is also resident. These image data are used for the demo effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. Be done. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed according to various productions, and the data corresponding to these are displayed in the character design area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but is resident. By reading the image data resident in advance in the character symbol area 235e of the video RAM 235, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. Notify the display control device 114 by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 has an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the process of displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used to draw the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a rear image change flag 233w, a rear image discrimination flag 233x, a demo display flag 233y, and a definite display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and an opening effect. , A display data table corresponding to the round effect, ending effect, and demo effect is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A or jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state and the large opening that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round effect will start from now on. It is a production to notify the player of the number of rounds to be performed. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special gaming state.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the game is not performed on the pachinko machine 10.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α-blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is larger than 100%, the sprite will be displayed enlarged from the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed reduced from the standard size. Will be done.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as effects that express the insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is specified for each address. It should be noted that one or a plurality of information regarding the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are obtained with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type is the back A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "city stage", "forest stage", "river stage", "sky stage", and "island stage"). Information is described that specifies whether to display one of them or to display a rear image different from the rear images A to E. Further, as the back surface type, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to E, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to E is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A to E as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to E, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In this embodiment, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not the display should be performed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the rear image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be specified as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the lapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the third symbol can be the variation symbol in the previous variation effect or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110. By managing by the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variablely displayed at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 29). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address "02F0H" in which the "End" information is described is made to correspond to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table. The drawn contents are described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 30) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable staging images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of staging images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, it is resident. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the image data of the sprite used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 29). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data for which the transfer should be started does not exist at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data for which the transfer should be started does not exist corresponding to the address. All data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 29).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 29, in the example of FIG. 29). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is the display data table. If a transfer data table corresponding to the above exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 30) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 29, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified in the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Bull data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not to display the power-on images (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) shown in FIGS. 25 (a) to 25 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 73) (see S6005 in FIG. 73). Then, at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 85 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 75 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 75 (b)) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. See S6309 in 75 (b)). On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 85 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 85 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the content of the image drawing instruction for the user. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 30) described later that describes drawing instructions is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Null data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to the later drawing list (see FIG. 30) that describes the instruction content for image drawing to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 moves the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 75 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 84) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 30) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 30, a rear image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Design 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as the symbol 1). In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and the image controller 237 includes various types. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. Processing is performed, composition processing with other sprites is performed according to the α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to the color information, and filtering processing is performed by the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 has a drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and other contents of an image to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) are set to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can be used according to the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Hold ball number symbol 1, hold ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol 1).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 performs the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list contains this transfer data information, the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information to create an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 75 (b). ) Is executed, the time counting counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 in FIG. 82). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "Off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 86). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 86). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as "drawing target buffer") that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 87).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when the value is "1", it is set to "0". It is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see S6306 in FIG. 75 (b)) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The rear image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the rear image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the rear image is changed, and if it is off, it means that the change is not performed. The rear image change flag 233w is set to on when the rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 81 (a)). Further, the rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 86), and is set to off when the rear image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 86). As a result, it is possible to display the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command and the effect mode change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

The rear image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set rear image type. This flag is composed of, for example, 1 byte, and each back type is associated with each bit. If any bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the rear surface A is set. When the rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to on for the rear image discrimination flag 233x (FIG. 81 (a). ) S7002). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back type can be easily specified.

The demo display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not the demo is being produced. If the demo display flag 233y is on, it means that the demo is being produced, and if it is off, it means that the demo is not being produced. This demo display flag 233y is set to on when the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (see S7221 in FIG. 82), and the demo display data table is set. It is set to off when other display data tables other than are set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 77 (a), S6705 in FIG. 78 (a), S6805 in FIG. 78 (b). , See S6905 in FIG. 79). With this demo display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demo is currently being produced.

The confirmation display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the confirmation display effect is being executed. Here, the definite display effect indicates an effect in which the stop symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the fluctuation pattern. If the definite display flag 233z is on, it means that the definite display effect is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the definite display effect is not in progress. The confirmation display flag 233z is set to on when the confirmation display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (S7214 in FIG. 82), and is other than the confirmation display data table. Set off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 77 (a), S6705 in FIG. 78 (a), S6805 in FIG. 78 (b), FIG. See S6905 in 79). With this confirmation display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the current confirmation display effect is in progress.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 31 to 57. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When it reaches 479,99,232,99, respectively, it clears to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C4, and C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, the start winning process associated with winning the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32 to 47.

After executing the start winning process (S105), a process for displaying on the second symbol display device (not shown) and a process for passing the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 are performed normally. The symbol variation process is executed (S106). The details of the normal symbol variation processing (S106) will be described later with reference to FIG. 48. After the normal symbol variation process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to determine whether to turn on / off the firing. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

First, with reference to FIG. 32, the contents of the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation processing (S104). When the special symbol variation process (S104) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current is a big hit or a small hit (S201), and when it is determined that the current is a big hit or a small hit (S201: Yes). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S202). In the process of S202, it is determined whether the subtraction of the variable time of the other special figure during the change is interrupted by the stop display of one special figure with the symbol indicating the hit. If it is determined in the process of S202 that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S202: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the temporarily stopped special figure is updated. (S203), that is, the process of continuing the variable display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed for the special figure in which the subtraction of the variable time is interrupted, and this process is terminated. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the special figure fluctuation has not been forcibly stopped.

On the other hand, in the processing of S201, when it is determined that the present is a big hit or a small hit (S201: No), is the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m larger than 0 (that is, the special figure 1 changes)? (S204), and if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is not larger than 0 (0) (S204: No), the first special symbol fluctuation start processing is performed. (S208) is executed, and then the process proceeds to S209, which executes the variation processing related to the special figure 2. The details of the first special symbol change start processing (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG. 33.

In the process of S204, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203 m is larger than 0 (S204: Yes), the first special symbol variation executing process (S205) is executed. The first special symbol variation in-execution process (S205) executes the process in the special figure 1 variation, and a detailed description thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 37.

After finishing the first special symbol variation in-execution process (S205), it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the variation time (whether the variation time counter 203m in the special figure 1 is 0) (S206), and the variation time is determined. If it is determined that the end timing is reached (S206: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S207) is executed, and then the process proceeds to S209. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S206 that it is not the end timing of the fluctuation time (S206: No), the processing of S207 is skipped and the process proceeds to S209.

In the processes of S209 to S213, the same processes as those of S204 to S207 executed for the special figure 1 are executed. When the processing of S209 is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is larger than 0 (that is, whether the special figure 2 is changing) (S209), and the special figure 2 change. If it is determined that the value of the time counter 203n is not larger than 0 (0) (S209: No), the second special symbol variation start process (S210) is executed, and then this process ends. The details of the second special symbol change start processing (S210) will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

On the other hand, in the process of S209, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is larger than 0 (S209: Yes), the second special symbol variation executing process (S211) is executed. This second special symbol variation executing process (S211) executes the process during the special figure 2 variation, and will be described later with reference to FIG. 44.

After finishing the second special symbol variation executing process (S211), it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the variation time (whether the variation time counter 203n in the special figure 2 is 0) (S212), and the variation time is determined. If it is determined that the end timing is reached (S212: Yes), the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S213) is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S212, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the fluctuation time (S212: No), the process of S213 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the first special symbol variation start process (S208), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change start processing (S208).

In the first special symbol change start processing (S208), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is acquired (S301), and the value of the acquired first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d (N1). ) Is greater than 0 (S302). In the process of S302, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is used. After subtracting 1 (S303), a hold ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the hold ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d after the subtraction is set (S304). ..

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol hold ball number counter of the RAM 223. Store in 223c. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d.

When the processing of S304 is completed, the data of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is then shifted to the previous data (S305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

When the process of S305 is completed, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is then executed (S306). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 34, but the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. This is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not a jackpot is a jackpot based on the set gaming state.

When the processing of S306 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing is next executed (see FIG. 35). Although the details will be described later, this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) is a variation type counter stored in the execution area of the first special symbol winning / failing determination result and the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. This is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on the value of CS1.

When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) is completed, the game state update process is then executed (S308). The details of this game state update process (S308 in FIG. 36) will be described later, but the state of the pachinko machine 10 by updating the state of the probability change flag 203 g and the value of the time saving counter 203f, which indicate the state of the pachinko machine 10. It is a process for updating. When the process of S308 is completed, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S302 that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S302: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, regarding the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), which is one process of the first special symbol change start process (FIG. 33, S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. explain. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, whether or not the jackpot is won in the other special symbol lottery during the period in which the fluctuation display (big hit fluctuation) in which the jackpot is won in one of the special symbols is executed. It is configured so that no discrimination is made.

In other words, in a state where it is confirmed that the jackpot game will be executed after a predetermined period (after the fluctuation time has elapsed) by one special symbol lottery, the jackpot will be won by the other special symbol lottery, and multiple times in a short period of time. It is configured to prevent the jackpot from being won and giving excessive benefits.

In this way, the process of acquiring various counter values is performed in the same manner as in the normal special symbol lottery, the determination based on the various counter values acquired in the process is skipped, and the outlier symbol is set. It is possible to respond quickly to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired (S401). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S402). That is, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in a high probability state (probability change state, latent probability state). When it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is on (that is, the probability variation state of the special symbol) (S402: Yes), the random number value that becomes the jackpot specified in the first random number table 202a for high probability time. And whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer matches, and the determination result (lottery result) is acquired (S403). On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S402 that the probability variation flag 203g is off (that is, it is a low probability state of the special symbol) (S402: No), the first random number table 202a for the low probability time is displayed. It is determined whether or not the specified random number value that becomes a big hit and the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer match, and the lottery result is acquired (S404).

Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag 202i is on (S405). If it is determined that it is not on (that is, it is off) (S405: No), it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in S403 or S404 is a big hit (S406), and if the lottery result is a big hit (S406). S406: Yes), the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON for the first special symbol (S407), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to the jackpot (S408). Then, based on the acquired value of the hit type counter, the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S409), and the value corresponding to the current gaming state is set in the winning state storage area. It is stored in 203j (S410), 1 is set in the time saving counter 203f (S411), and this processing is terminated.

Here, by setting the value of the time reduction counter 203f to 1 in the processing of S411, the first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see S306 in FIG. 34) in the first special symbol fluctuation start processing (see S208 in FIG. 33). In the game state update process (S308) executed later than the above, the high probability state of the normal symbol can be shifted to the low probability state. As a result, when a jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol, it is possible to set a low probability state of the normal symbol at the timing when the jackpot fluctuation starts. Therefore, it is possible to shift the probabilistic state to the latent probable state by winning the jackpot of the first special symbol while the probabilistic state is set.

Further, by performing the process of setting the value of the time reduction counter 203f to 1 in the process of S411, the process of shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state on condition that the jackpot is won, and the special symbol. Both the process of shifting the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state and the process of shifting the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state on condition that the number of fluctuations of the above reaches a predetermined number of times can be executed by using the game state update process (S308). As a result, even when a plurality of conditions for terminating the high-probability state of the normal symbol are provided, it is possible to prevent the processing of the main control device 110 from becoming complicated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S405, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is on (S405: Yes), or in the processing of S406, when it is determined that the lottery result is out of order (S406: No), the out-of-order symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S412), and then this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S208 in FIG. 33), will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 35), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 34), the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot, that is, the first. 1 It is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is set (S501). Here, the determination as to whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is on. The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON in the process of S407 in the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34).

When it is determined in the process of S501 that the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S501: Yes), the first obtained in the process of S401 in the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34). Based on the value of the per-type counter C2, the jackpot type is determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A) (S502), and the process proceeds to S503.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S501 that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of order (that is, the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is off) (S501: No), the processing of S502 is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S503.

In the process of S503, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (S503). Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 17 to 19) according to the gaming state is read out (S504), and the process proceeds to S505. The gaming state is determined based on the state of the probability change flag 203g and the value of the time reduction counter 203f. In the process of S505, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S505), and then the special figure 1 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern (S505). S506).

When the processing of S506 is completed, the special figure 1 stop type command indicating the stop symbol is set (S507), then the change start of the first special symbol is set by the first symbol display device 37 (S508), and the processing of S505 is completed. A value indicating the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in 1 is set in the fluctuation time counter 203m in Special Figure 1 (S509), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a game state update process (S308), which is one process of the first special symbol change start process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this game state update process (S308). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the state of the probability change flag 203g, which is a condition for setting the gaming state, and the value of the time saving counter 203f, only the value of the time saving counter 203f is updated at the start of the change of the special symbol. In addition, in the game state update process (see FIG. 36), which is one of the first special symbol change start processes (see FIG. 33), the process of updating the value of the time saving counter 203f is configured to be executed.

The probability variation flag 203g, which will be described in detail later, is set to off when the jackpot fluctuation ends and the special symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed (when the jackpot game is executed). It is configured as follows.

That is, one of the two conditional elements (the state of the probability change flag 203g and the value of the time reduction counter 203f) referred to when setting the game state is updated at the start of the change of the special symbol, and the other conditional elements. By making it possible to update when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, it is possible to easily diversify the gaming state set by combining the two conditional elements. In addition, since it is possible to set a specific gaming state (for example, latent state) only during the period from the start to the end of the change of the special symbol, it is advantageous for the player only during the predetermined period. It is possible to set the game state.

When the game state update process (see FIG. 36) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203f is larger than 0 (S601). If it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 0 (S601: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203f is larger than 0 (S601: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S602), and the remaining time saving number command indicating the value of the time saving counter 203f is set. (S603). Next, it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 0 (S604), if it is determined to be 0 (S604: Yes), and then it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S605). ). Here, when it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is set to ON (S605: Yes), it is a probability change state (that is, a latent state) in which the time saving game is not given, so that the latent state is indicated. A status command is set (S606), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S605, when it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is not set to ON (S605: No), since it is a normal state, a state command indicating the normal state is set (S607), and this process is performed. To finish.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S604 that the value of the time reduction counter 203f is not 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is.

In this embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set until the next big hit of the special symbol is won (until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination indicating the big hit). In addition to this, for example, a probability change counter is provided in place of the probability change flag 203 g, and the value of the probability change counter is subtracted each time a change of a special symbol is executed, and the value of the probability change counter becomes 0. In some cases, it may be configured to shift the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state.

When such a configuration is used, the game state update process (S308) shown with reference to FIG. 36 is set as the game state update process at the start of the special figure change, and separately at the timing when the change display of the special symbol ends. By providing the game state update process when the special symbol fluctuation is stopped to update the value of the probability change counter, the process of determining whether to end the high probability state of the special symbol and whether to end the high probability state of the normal symbol It is possible to execute the process of determining whether or not at a different timing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the content of the first special symbol variation executing process (S205) executed in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. I will explain. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation executing process (S205). In the first special symbol variation executing process (S205), when the subtraction of the variation time of the special figure 1 is interrupted, the process of restarting the subtraction and the process of subtracting the variation time are executed.

When the first special symbol variation executing process (S205) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S701). Here, a case where this process is executed with the temporary stop flag 203v of Special Figure 1 set to ON will be briefly described. As described above, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to on when the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a hit (small hit) while the special figure 1 is changing. Then, when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON, the jackpot middle flag 203o is set to ON in the process, so that the timer interrupt executed every 2 milliseconds by the main controller 110 is performed. When the process loops and the next special symbol variation process (FIG. 32) is executed (after 2 milliseconds when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON), the process of S201 is a big hit. Therefore, the first special symbol variation executing process (S205) is not executed. Then, when the big hit game (or small hit game) is completed and it is determined in the process of S201 that the game is not during the big hit (or during the small hit), the first special symbol variation executing process (S205) is executed. It will be. With this configuration, the big hit (or small hit) game is in the state where the first special symbol change executing process (S205) is executed while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON. It is configured so that it is the timing to restart the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation, which has been completed and the subtraction of the fluctuation time has been suspended.

Returning to FIG. 37, the explanation will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S701 that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S701: Yes), then the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command is set (S702), and the special figure 1 provisional stop flag 203v is set. The stop flag 203v is set to off (S703), and the process proceeds to S704. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S701 that the temporary stop flag 203v in FIG. 1 is not set to on (set to off) (S701: No), the processing of S702 and S703 is skipped and S704 is performed. Move to the processing of.

In the process of S704, the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203 m is decremented by 1 and updated (S704), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S705), and the present process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207), which is one of the special symbol variation processing (S104 in FIG. 32), will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207).

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON for the first special symbol (special figure 1) (S801). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to on for the first special symbol (S801: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to on (S802), and the special figure is set. 2 A special figure 2 indicating that the fluctuation stop flag 203s is turned on is set (S803). Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed with a detached symbol (S804).

When the processing of S804 is completed, the jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S805), and the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h, the probability variation flag 203g, and the time saving counter 203f are reset (S806). Next, the jackpot middle flag 203o is set to ON (S807), and the process proceeds to S808.

On the other hand, in the process of S801, if the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to off for the first special symbol (S801: No), the processes of S802 to S807 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S808.

In the process of S808, a special figure 1 confirmation command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the first special symbol is confirmed and stopped is set (S808). After that, a process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is variablely displayed by the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S809), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the first special symbol stop process (S207), the process (S802 to S809) of stopping the variation display with the symbol showing the determination result of the first lottery game is executed. Further, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a big hit (S801: Yes), the process of forcibly stopping the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner (S803, S804) is executed.

In the first embodiment, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed by the jackpot symbol, the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is forcibly stopped and displayed by the off symbol. It is not limited to. For example, at the time when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol may be interrupted (temporarily stopped). Then, after the jackpot of the first special symbol is completed, the variable display of the second special symbol may be restarted. As a result, it is possible to produce a natural aspect as compared with the case where the engine is forcibly stopped due to disengagement. Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot scenario is set in the process of S805 based on the game state stored in the winning state storage area 203j in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34). For example, a jackpot scenario is set in the process of S805 based on the game state stored in the winning state storage area 203j in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) using the opening period of the jackpot game. You may try to do it.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the contents of the second special symbol change start process (S210) executed in the special symbol change process (FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol change start processing (S210). In the second special symbol change start processing (S210), a process for starting the change of the special figure 2 is executed. It should be noted that, in response to the above-mentioned processing related to the change of the first special symbol with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46, the object of the change is simply changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. The detailed description of the element will be omitted.

In the second special symbol change start processing (S210), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 change stop flag 203s is set to ON (S901). When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to on (S901: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to off (S902), and this process is terminated. As described above, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is a flag that is set to be turned on while displaying the stop of the second special symbol with the stop symbol corresponding to the deviation when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol ends. .. That is, if the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is on, it means that the jackpot is started, so that the fluctuation start of the second special symbol should not be set. Therefore, when the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is turned on in the processing of S901, the main processing is terminated as it is without executing each processing of S902 to S907 for setting the fluctuation start.

On the other hand, in the process of S901, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to off (that is, not set to on) (S901: No), the second special symbol execution area 203b Data (various counter values) are acquired (S903). Next, based on the data acquired in the process of S903, it is determined whether or not there is the acquired data (S904). That is, when it is determined that there is no data in the second special symbol execution area 203b (S904: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S903, when it is determined that there is data (S904: Yes), the second special symbol jackpot determination process for executing the jackpot determination of the second special symbol based on each stored counter value is performed. Execute (S905). The details of the second special symbol jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40.

After the processing of S905 is completed, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process for selecting the variation pattern is executed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol and the data acquired in the process of S903 (S906). .. The details of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906) will be described later with reference to FIG. 42. After the process of S906 is completed, the above-mentioned game state update process (see FIG. 36) is executed (S907), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, regarding the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905), which is one process of the second special symbol change start process (S210 in FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. explain. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905).

In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905), the same process as the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) is executed, so that the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) is performed. The differences between the above will be mainly explained.

When the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905) is executed, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b is acquired (S1001). Then, the processes of S1002 to S1004 for acquiring the lottery result of whether or not it is a big hit are executed based on each acquired counter value and the state of the probability variation flag 203g. Each of these processes differs from the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) except that the counter value used for the lottery (determination) is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b. Control is executed.

When the processing of S1003 or S1004 is completed, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S1005). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is not set to ON (S1005: No), it is determined whether or not the acquired lottery result is a jackpot (S1006), and it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot. (S1006: Yes) executes the processes of S1007 to S1010 for setting the lottery result of the second special symbol as a big hit, and ends this process. In each of these processes S1007 to S1010, the same process as each process of S407 to S410 for setting the lottery result of the first special symbol to the jackpot is executed in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34), respectively. Will be done.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1005 that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S1005: Yes), or if the lottery result of the second special symbol acquired in the processing of S1006 is not a jackpot. If it is determined (S1006: No), the special figure 2 deviation variation processing for setting the small hit of the second special symbol or the stop symbol corresponding to the deviation is executed (S1011), and this processing is terminated. The details of the special figure 2 deviation variation processing (S1011) will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this special drawing 2 deviation processing (S1011).

In the special figure 2 deviation variation processing (S1011), first, it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in the processing of S1003 or S1004 of FIG. 40 is a small hit of the second special symbol (S1101), and the lottery result is a small hit. (S1101: Yes), the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1102), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to the small hit (S1103). Then, the small hit symbol indicating the small hit type corresponding to the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is set as the stop symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S1104), and the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1101 that the lottery result is out of order (S1101: No), the out-of-order symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1105), and then. This process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906), which is one of the second special symbol variation start processes (S210 in FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Will be explained. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906).

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906 in FIG. 42), first, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b (S1201). Next, in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905 in FIG. 40), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the jackpot of the second special symbol is set. (S1202). Here, the determination as to whether or not the jackpot is a big hit is determined by whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is turned on for the second special symbol. The special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON in the process of S1007 in the above-mentioned second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40).

In the process of S1202, when it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is set (S1202: Yes), the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 17 and 19) corresponding to the current gaming state is read out. (S1203). Then, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S1001 in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40) described above, the jackpot from the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A). The type is determined (S1204).

When the processing of S1204 is completed, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S1205), and then the special figure 2 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern. (S1206). Then, the process proceeds to S1208.

On the other hand, in the process of S1202, when it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is not set (S1202: No), the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (S1207) is executed, and the process of S1208 is performed. Transition.

In the process of S1208, a special figure 2 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (S1208). Next, the first symbol display device 37 sets the variation start of the second special symbol (S1209), and the value indicating the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the processing of S1205 is set in the special figure 2 variation time counter 203n (S1209). S1210), this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the special FIG. 2 deviation pattern selection process (S1207) will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 deviation pattern selection process (S1207).

In the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (S1207 in FIG. 43), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (S1301). Here, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1301). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is on (S1301: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b (S1302). Then, the small hit type is selected based on the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5 and the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16B) (S1303).

Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 17 to 19) corresponding to the current gaming state is read (S1304), and the variation pattern of the small hit corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is read from the read variation pattern selection table. Is selected (S1305). After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command indicating the selected small hit fluctuation pattern is set (S1306), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1301, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a small hit (that is, it is out of order) (S1301: No), the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the current gaming state (FIG. 17 and FIG. 19) are read (S1307), and an outlier variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S1308). After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is set (S1309) based on the selected deviation pattern, and the present process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the second special symbol variation executing process (S211), which is one of the processes in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Explain the contents. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation executing process (S211). In the second special symbol variation executing process (S211), when the subtraction of the variation time of the special figure 2 is interrupted, the process of restarting the subtraction and the process of subtracting the variation time are executed.

When the second special symbol change execution processing (S211) is executed, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is subtracted by 1 and updated (S1401), and the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. Is updated (S1402), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the contents of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S213). The second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S213) executes the processing for stopping the fluctuation of the special figure 2.

When the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S213) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to on (S1501), and the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to on. (S1501: Yes), a special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating the stop of the special figure 1 fluctuation is set (S1503). Next, when the processing of S1503 is completed, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed with a detached symbol (S1504). Next, a jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S1505), and the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i, the probability variation flag 203g, and the time saving counter 203f are reset (S1506). Next, the jackpot middle flag 203o is set to ON (S1507), and the process proceeds to S1509.

In the process of S1509, a special figure 2 confirmation command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the second special symbol is confirmed and stopped is set (S1509). After that, a process of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol that is variablely displayed by the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1510), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1501, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is not set to ON (S1501: No), the special figure 2 disengagement stop process is executed (S1508), and the above-mentioned S1509 and S1510 are executed. Process is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, a special figure 2 out-of-order stop process (S1508), which is one process of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S213 in FIG. 45), will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the special drawing 2 disengagement stop process (S1508). In this special figure 2 loss stop process (S1508), when the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is other than a big hit (small hit, miss), the special figure 2 indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a small hit, the process for temporarily stopping the change of the special figure 1 being executed is executed.

In the special figure 2 disengagement stop process (S1508), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1601). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1601: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S1602). Next, a special figure 1 temporary stop command indicating that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is turned on is set (S1603).

When the processing of S1603 is completed, a small hit scenario based on the selected small hit type is set (S1604). After that, the small hit flag 203k is set to off (S1605), and the small hit medium flag 203p is set to on (S1606).

When the processing of S1606 is completed, the special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the second special symbol is set (S1607). After that, the second special symbol, which is variablely displayed by the first symbol display device 37, is stopped to change at the small hit symbol (S1608), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1601 that the small hit flag 203k is off (that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order) (S1601: No), the second special symbol is fixedly stopped. A special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to do so is set (S1609). After that, the second special symbol that is variablely displayed by the first symbol display device 37 is deviated and stops variable at the symbol (S1610), and this process is terminated.

As described above, since the control of the variation display between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is independently and can be executed in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are varied at the same time. It can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to execute a lottery game with more special symbols within a predetermined time, and it is possible to increase the probability that the player will be given a big hit within the predetermined time. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

In this embodiment, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be configured to be variablely displayed in a state where the temporary stop or the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted. In such a case, the temporarily stopped special symbol is stopped in a display mode or a notification mode in which the player can know that the temporary stop is in progress, so that the player loses the lottery game that was in the middle of the variable display. You can know that you haven't done so, and you can play big hit games with confidence.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, a start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105 in FIG. 47) determines whether or not a game ball has entered (winned) in the first entry opening (first starting opening) 64, and if it has entered (winning), it is suspended. This is a process of storing each of the acquired counter values in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a up to the upper limit number (up to four in the first ball entry port 64). Further, when each counter value acquired based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, it is based on each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. , A process of predicting a hit / fail determination result, a selected fluctuation pattern, or the like is executed in advance. Hereinafter, the start winning process (S105) will be described.

In the start winning process (S105), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the first entry port 64 (starting winning), which is the first starting opening (S1701). Here, the determination is made using the detection result of the first ball entry switch (not shown) that detects the ball entry into the first ball entry port 64. When it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64 (there was a start prize) (S1701: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S1702). ). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703). It is determined whether this is less than 4, which is the upper limit of the number of reserved balls for the first ball entry port 64 (that is, whether the number of reserved balls is stored up to the upper limit). If it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (S1704). A hold ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the number of hold balls is set (S1705). Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 which are various counter values is read (acquired) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 is read. Each is reserved (stored) in the storage area of the corresponding number of reserved balls (S1706).

Next, based on each stored counter value, the hit / fail determination result of the first special symbol, the determined hit type, and the fluctuation pattern are predicted (S1707). Then, a winning information command including the predicted winning / failing determination result of the first special symbol, the winning type, and the fluctuation pattern is set (S1708), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins a prize in the first start opening (first entry opening) 64 and is newly reserved and stored, the winning / failing determination result is based on the reserved storage information. Is determined before the start of fluctuation and notified to the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, the display mode of the hold ball can be changed (for example, the color of the hold ball can be changed to a different color from the usual one) based on the hold-stored hit / fail determination result, or before the change starts. It is possible to display a notice symbol or the like and perform an effect of suggesting a winning / failing determination result to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and the variation display and variation time of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83, the lower first ball entry port 64b2. This is a process for controlling the opening operation, opening time, and the like of the electric accessory 64a accompanying the above.

In this normal symbol variation processing (S106 in FIG. 48), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S1801). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entrance ball opening 64b2 is performed while the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the hit. Includes what is being done. As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S1801: Yes), a new normal symbol change (lottery) cannot be started (executed), so that it is as it is. This process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S1801: No), then whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (normal symbol is changing). When it is determined (S1802) and it is determined that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is not changing (normal symbol changing) (S1802: No), that is, even if the normal symbol is currently hit, the normal symbol changes. If it is determined that there is no such state, that is, it is possible to start (execute) a new normal symbol change (lottery), data (random number per second) is stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. It is determined whether or not the counter C4 value) is stored (S1804), and if the data is not stored (S1804: No), the lottery for normal symbols cannot be executed, so this process is terminated as it is. ..

On the other hand, in the process of S1804, when it is determined that the data is stored in the execution area (S1804: Yes), the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. (S1807). Then, based on the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S1807 and the random number table 202c per ordinary symbol (second), the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is a hit is acquired (S1808). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c. As described above, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 10", it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit and the normal symbol is hit. When the high probability state is set, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 231", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "232", it is determined to be a hit. It is determined that the design is out of the ordinary pattern.

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S1808 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S1809), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S1809: Yes), it is a hit. (S1810), and the process proceeds to S1811. In the process of S1810, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "○" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

On the other hand, in the process of S1809, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S1809: No), the display mode at the time of out of alignment is set (S1812), and the process proceeds to S1811. In the process of S1812, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S1811.

When the processing of S1810 or S1812 is completed, in the processing of S1811, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol (S1811), and the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol. If it is determined to be in the state) (S1811: Yes), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device is set to 3 seconds (S1813), and then the normal symbol short fluctuation flag 203t is set to ON. (S1814), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol (it is the low probability state of the normal symbol) (S1811: No), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device. Is set to 10 seconds (S1815), and this process is terminated.

The short fluctuation flag 203t of the normal symbol set to be turned on in the process of S1814 is a configuration for temporarily storing the game state at the timing when the lottery of the normal symbol is executed, and the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped. It is displayed and referred to when setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a. As a result, it is possible to change the opening operation content of the electric accessory 64a according to which gaming state the normal symbol change (lottery) start timing and the opening operation timing of the electric accessory 64a are.

In the present embodiment, the game state at the start (execution) timing of the fluctuation (lottery) of the normal symbol is configured to be temporarily stored by using a dedicated flag, but other configurations may be used. For example, when it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol is a hit in the game state storage means that can always store the currently set game state, the game state when the lottery of the normal symbol is executed is determined. It may be configured to provide a storage area for temporary storage. Furthermore, a means for always storing the period in which the normal state is set is provided, and the period stored in the means (the period in which the normal state is set) is compared with the timing when the lottery of the normal symbol is performed. By doing so, it may be configured so that the gaming state at the timing when the lottery of ordinary symbols is performed can be determined. That is, the configuration may be such that a storage means capable of storing the currently set gaming state and a storage means capable of storing at least the gaming state set at a predetermined timing in the past are provided.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1802 that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S1802: Yes), the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S1816). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S1810 or the process of S1812 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

If it is determined in the process of S1813 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S1816: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1816, if it is determined that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S1816: Yes), then the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S1817). In the processing of S1817, the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win, and if the display mode is set by the processing of S1810, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighting display) in the second symbol display device. ) Is set to be done. On the other hand, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is out of order and the display mode is set by the processing of S1812, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. Is set. The period during which the second symbol is stopped and displayed is longer than the period during which one part of the blinking display (alternate display of "○" and "×") indicating that the second symbol is changing is turned on. It is configured to be (confirmed display). This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp that the second symbol has been stopped and displayed.

When the stop display is set by the process of S1817, and then the second symbol display update process (S2208 of FIG. 52) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed, the variable display in the second symbol display device is executed. Is completed, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S1810 or the process of S1812.

After finishing the processing of S1817, next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation processing (S106) (this lottery result). However, it is determined whether or not it is a hit of a normal symbol (S1818). If it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S1818: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S1818: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the short fluctuation flag 203t of the normal figure is set to ON (S1819).

In the process of S1819, when it is determined that the normal figure short fluctuation flag 203t is not set on (set to off), that is, the gaming state at the timing when the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol this time is started is When it is determined that the state is normal (S1819: No), the opening time of the electric accessory 64a is set to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S1824), and the process proceeds to S1823. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S1819, when it is determined that the normal figure short fluctuation flag 203t is set to ON, that is, it is determined that the gaming state at the timing when the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol this time is started is the time saving state. If this is the case (S1819: Yes), the short fluctuation flag 203t is set to off (S1820), and then it is determined whether the current gaming state is the time saving state (time saving) (S1821).

In the process of S1821, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the time saving state (S1821: No), the gaming state at the timing when the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol this time is started is the normal state, and the current gaming state (S1821: No). Since the timing for setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a) is in the normal state, the opening period of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entry port 64b2 is set to 0.2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set. It is set to once (S1824), and the process proceeds to S1823.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the time saving state (S1821: Yes), the timing at which the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol this time is started, and the current gaming state (opening operation of the electric accessory 64a). (Timing to set) is both in a short time state, so the opening period of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entry port 64b2 is set to 2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (electric accessory). The long opening operation of 64a is set) (S1822), and the process proceeds to S1823.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the lottery (variation) of the ordinary symbol is executed, the timing at which the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a executed based on the winning of the ordinary symbol is set, and the timing are set. Only when both of them are in the time saving state, the opening operation (long opening) which is advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a.

With this configuration, it is possible to strictly set the conditions under which the opening operation that is advantageous to the player is set. Therefore, for example, a lottery of ordinary symbols is performed in a state where the normal state is set as the game state (for example). Even if the time reduction state is set before the fluctuation time (10 seconds) of the normal symbol is set after the execution of the fluctuation) is executed and the winning is won, the long opening is set as the operation of the electric accessory 64a. There is no such thing. Similarly, in the change of the normal symbol (lottery) executed in the state where the time saving state is set, the winner is won, and the normal state is set as the game state until the change of the normal symbol stops. Even in this case, the long opening of the electric accessory 64a is not set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous privilege (long opening of the electric accessory 64a).

Further, since it is possible to prevent the electric accessory 64a from being opened for a long time in a state where the normal state is set as the game state, it is easy to execute a lottery of a special symbol (second special symbol) advantageous to the player. The period can be limited to the time saving state. In this embodiment, the game state is determined between the timing when the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol is started and the timing when the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a is set, and the game state is set at each timing. The above-mentioned configuration is used as the configuration for setting the opening operation content of the electric accessory 64a based on the above, but other configurations may be used.

For example, the opening operation that is disadvantageous to the player only when both the timing when the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol is started and the timing when the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a is set are in the normal state (S1824 in FIG. 48). (Opening operation set in S1822) may be set (short opening is set), and long opening (opening operation set in S1822 in FIG. 48) may be set in other states. With this configuration, a privilege (long opening) that is advantageous to the player is provided even for normal symbol fluctuations that are executed during the period before and after the time saving state, which is the gaming state that is advantageous to the player, is set. Therefore, it is possible to make the time saving state more advantageous to the player.

In this way, while the time saving state is set as the game state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is very short, "10 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case where the normal state is set, and further. Since the opening period of the lower first entry port 64b2 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", it is easy for the ball to enter the lower first entry port 64b2. Become. In this embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed, the time saving state is configured to end, so that the normal state is reached during the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the small hit game is executed, the time reduction state is continuously set unless the time reduction end condition is satisfied, so that the small hit state is executed while the time reduction state is set. During the winning game, the first variable winning device 65 is opened and the electric accessory 64a is opened for a long time in the small hit game, and a plurality of winning openings (first specific winning opening 65a, lower first winning opening) are opened. It will be a specific period during which it will be easier for the ball to enter 64b2).

By using such a configuration, for example, instead of the configuration of the game board 13 shown in FIG. 2, an electric accessory 64a and a lower first ball entry port 64b2 are arranged above the first variable winning device 65. , It is preferable to configure the ball to enter two winning openings (specific winning opening 65a, lower first entry opening 64b2) during the small hit game, whereby the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the small hit game. Can be increased, and it becomes possible to give more advantageous benefits to the player.

Returning to FIG. 48, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S1820, the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entry port 64b2 is set (S1823), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64a is set by the process of S1823, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S2206) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed, the opening / closing of the electric accessory is performed. The control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S1824 or the process of S1822 are completed.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, and the game ball has passed. If there is, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process (S107 in FIG. 49), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S1901). Here, the passage of the game ball at the normal entry port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S1901: Yes), the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203e (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S1902). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S1903).

Whether the game ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S1901: No), or even if the game ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol reserved ball count counter If the value (M) of 203e is not less than 4 (S1903: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S1901: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S1903: Yes), it is normal. The value (M) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is added by 1 (S1904).

When the processing of S1904 is completed, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) described above is set to the empty holding area (holding first) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the first area (S1905) of the area (4th area on hold), and this process is terminated. In the process of S1905, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 1, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special symbol is set to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery based on the first special symbol. Therefore, the state in which the ball can enter the lower first entry slot 64b2 provided by winning the lottery result of the normal symbol (second symbol) is an advantageous gaming state as compared with the normal gaming state. ..

By indicating the timing at which such a gaming state is provided based on the preliminary determination result of the normal drawing, the player can play the game without overlooking the gaming state which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. In addition, when the effect is performed using such a pre-judgment result of the normal figure, not only the effect based on the result of the hit / miss judgment of the normal figure but also the electric accessory 64a when the normal figure is judged to be a hit is opened. It is good to perform a production that suggests the timing. By doing so, in the normal game state, the game is performed aiming at the game area on the left side of the game board 13, and the lower first entry slot 64b2 (the entry slot to which the electric accessory 64a is attached) is the game board 13. Even if it is arranged on the right side of the game, it is possible to switch to a game aiming at the right side of the game board 13 (so-called right-handed) before the electric accessory 64a opens, which is a normal game state. However, there is an effect that the possibility that the ball enters the lower first entry port 64b2 can be increased.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power disconnection occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S2001) as a setting of the power supply disconnection occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 51), first, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed (S2101). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S2102). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S2103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch (see FIG. 12) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S2104), and if it is turned on (S2104: Yes), the process shifts to S2110. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch (see FIG. 12) is not turned on (S2104: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2105), and if it is not stored (S2105). S2105: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S2110 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S2106), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S2107: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and even in such a case, the process is transferred to S2110. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S2110, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S2110). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S2111, S2112) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch (FIG. 12). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 12) is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 initialization process (S2111, S2112) is executed.

Further, the initialization process (S2111, S2112) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S2111, S2112), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S2111), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S2112). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S2113.

On the other hand, the RAM erase switch (FIG. 12) is not turned on (S2104: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S2105: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. If there is (S2107: Yes), the power cutoff occurrence information is cleared while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S2108). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff is transmitted (S2109), and the process proceeds to S2113. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S2113). After that, the state of the probability change flag 203g and each value of the time saving counter 203f are read (S2114), and a state command is set based on the read counter value (S2115). When the processing of S2115 is completed, the interrupt is permitted (S2116), and the process proceeds to the main processing described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the counter update process and the power cutoff process are roughly classified.

In the main processing, first, in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is input to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side. ) Is executed (S2201).

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S2202). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S2203) and executed. The jackpot control process is executed (S2204). The jackpot control process (S2204) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 53, but a process for setting the operation of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 in the jackpot game is executed.

After the big hit control process (S2204) is executed, the small hit control process (S2205) is executed. This small hit control process (S2205) will be described later with reference to FIG. 55. After that, the electric accessory opening / closing process is executed (S2206). In this electric accessory opening / closing process (S2206), the opening / closing process of the electric accessory 64a is executed. After that, the display update process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S2207).

Next, the display update process of the second symbol (for example, the symbol of “◯” or “×”) by the second symbol display device is executed (S2208). Briefly, on condition that the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device is used. The variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is carried out. Then, a lottery for the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is carried out based on the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is in the winning state, the electric accessory 64a is released for a predetermined time.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2209), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S2209: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S2210). If a predetermined time (4 ms) has already passed (S2210: Yes), the process is shifted to S2201 and each process after S2201 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S2210: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S2211, S2212).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S2211). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479, 232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S2202 (S2212).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S2201 to S2208 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and is displayed variable. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the process of S2209, if the power off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2209: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing shown in FIG. 50 has been executed, the processing at the time of power cutoff after S2213 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S2213), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S2214). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S2215), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S2216), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S2209 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S2201 to S2208, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S2211 and S2212 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cutoff state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S2201. That is, the process can be started from the process of S2201 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S2101). By setting a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S2201. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S2204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S2204). This jackpot control process (S2204) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 52), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and the first specific prize is won. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large open mouth) 65a and the second specific winning mouth 650a.

In the jackpot control process (S2204), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot scenario is set (S2301). If it is determined that the jackpot scenario has not been set (S2301: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2301 that the jackpot scenario is set (S2301: Yes), the jackpot scenario is updated (S2302), and it is determined whether it is the timing to start the opening of the jackpot scenario (S2303). .. More specifically, in the processing of S2302, 1 is added to the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown), and in the processing of S2303, the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown) starts the opening of the jackpot scenario. Determine if the value corresponds to.

In the process of S2303, if it is determined that it is the timing of the opening start (big hit start) of the jackpot scenario (S2303: Yes), the jackpot opening command is set (S2304), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the opening start timing of the jackpot scenario (S2303: No), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2305).

In the process of S2305, if it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2305: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process for setting the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 650a during the jackpot is executed (S2305: Yes). S2306), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2305 that it is not the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2305: No), then it is determined whether the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S2305: No). S2307). Here, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are won in total while the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is open, or the first. When the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a has elapsed for a predetermined time (30 seconds), it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied (S2307: Yes), the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a currently open in the process of S2308 is set to be closed. This process ends. The discrimination process from S2305 to S2307 described above is repeatedly executed for the number of rounds of the jackpot set in the jackpot scenario.

On the other hand, in the process of S2307, when it is determined that the round end condition of the currently executed round is not satisfied (S2307: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S2309), and the ending effect is produced. If it is the start timing of (S2309: Yes), the ending command for big hit is set (S2310), and this process is terminated. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the process of S2309, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2309: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S2311). Here, the end timing of the jackpot indicates a case where the execution period of the ending effect has elapsed. If it is determined in the process of S2311 that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S2311: Yes), the jackpot end process for setting the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is executed (S2312), and this process is terminated. The details of this jackpot end process (S2312) will be described later with reference to FIG. 54. On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the jackpot (S2311: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the jackpot end process (S2312), which is one of the jackpot control processes (S2204 in FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. As described above, this jackpot end process (S2312) is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end processing (S2312).

In the jackpot end process (S2312), first, the game state at the time of winning is specified based on the state storage area 203j at the time of winning (S2401). Next, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a probability variation jackpot (a jackpot type in which the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON after the jackpot game ends) (S2402). Here, in the process of S2402, the determination is performed based on the jackpot type set this time. In the process of S2402, if it is determined that the current jackpot is a probability variation jackpot (S2402: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S2403), and the process proceeds to S2404. On the other hand, in the process of S2402, if it is determined that the current jackpot is not a probabilistic jackpot (S2402: No), the process of S2403 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2404. As a result, a low probability state of the special symbol is set as the game state after the big hit.

Next, the value corresponding to the game state at the time of winning read by the process of S2401 and the jackpot type is set in the time reduction counter 203f (S2404). Specifically, when "big hit A" is set as the big hit type, "10000" is set to the value of the time reduction counter 203f in order to continue the high probability state of the normal symbol until the next big hit, and "big hit B". Is set, "100" is set in the value of the time reduction counter 203f in order to continue the high probability state of the normal symbol until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 100 times.

After finishing the processing of S2404, the jackpot middle flag 203o is set to off, and the winning state storage area 203j is cleared (S2405). After that, a state command corresponding to the set game state is set (S2406), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot type of the jackpot won this time and the gaming state at the time of winning are determined, and two conditional elements for setting the gaming state after the jackpot game ends. It is configured to set the contents of (probability change flag 203g, time reduction counter 203f). Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to both the jackpot type of the winning jackpot and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot.

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, a small hit control process (S2205), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the contents of this small hit control process (S2205).

In the small hit control process (S2205), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit scenario is set (S2501). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the process of S1604 of the special figure 2 out-of-order stop process (see FIG. 46) is executed and the small hit scenario is set. If the small hit scenario is not set in the process of S2501 (S2501: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the small hit scenario is set in the process of S2501 (S2501: Yes), the small hit scenario is updated (S2502), and it is determined whether it is the timing to start the opening of the small hit scenario (S2503). More specifically, in the processing of S2502, 1 is added to the counter value of the small hit scenario counter (not shown), and in the processing of S2503, the counter value of the small hit scenario counter (not shown) is the small hit scenario. Determine if the value corresponds to the opening start of.

In the process of S2503, if it is determined that it is the timing to start the opening of the small hit scenario (S2503: Yes), the opening command for the small hit is set (S2504), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening start of the small hit scenario (S2503: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing of the round start of the small hit scenario (S2505).

If it is determined in the process of S2505 that it is the timing to start the round of the small hit scenario (S2505: Yes), the small hit operation setting process is executed (S2506), and this process is terminated. The details of the small hit operation setting process (S2506) will be described later with reference to FIG. 56. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing of the round start of the small hit scenario (S2505: No), then it is determined whether the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S2507). Here, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined number (for example, 5) of balls are won in total while the specific winning opening 65a is open, or when the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a elapses for a predetermined time. If so, it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied.

If it is determined in the process of S2507 that the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S2507: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed in the process of S2508, and this process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round end condition of the specific winning opening 65a is not satisfied (S2507: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending effect (S2509).

If it is determined in the process of S2509 that it is the timing to start the ending effect (S2509: Yes), the ending command for small hits is set (S2510), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the process of S2509, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2509: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the small hit (S2511). Here, the end timing of the small hit indicates the case where the execution period of the ending effect has elapsed.

If it is determined in the process of S2511 that it is the end timing of the small hit (S2511: Yes), the small hit medium flag 203p is set to off (S2512), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the small hit (S2511: No), the second winning process is executed (S2513), and this process is terminated. The details of this second winning process (S2513) will be described later with reference to FIG. 57.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, a small hit operation setting process (S2506), which is one process in the small hit control process (S2506 in FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the contents of this small hit operation setting process (S2506).

In the small hit operation setting process (S2506), first, the opening scenario in which the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the small hit to be started is set is read (S2601). The opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a is set by the data read in the process of S2601 (S2602), and this process is terminated.

In this way, since each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends in the middle. Problems can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the details of the second winning process (S2513), which is one process in the small hit control process (S2506 in FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the second winning process (S2513). This second winning process (S2513) is executed in the small hit control process (see FIG. 55), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to the winning of the specific winning opening 65a.

In this second prize processing (S2513), first, it is determined whether or not the present is the round valid period (S2701). Here, the round valid period is a period in which the round game is set, that is, a period from the setting of the specific winning opening 65a to the end of the interval period (5 seconds). In the process of S2701, if the round is not valid (S2701: No), the winning counter 203u is reset (S2702), and this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2701 if it is determined that the current round validity period is (S2701: Yes), then it is determined whether or not a prize has been detected in the specific winning opening 65a (S2703), and the specific winning opening 65a is reached. If no winning is detected (S2703: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the winning of the specific winning opening 65a is detected in the process of S2703 (S2703: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning counter 203u to update (S2704). Then, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter 203u is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (5 in the present embodiment) (S2705), and if the value of the winning counter 203u is equal to or lower than the upper limit value (5 in the present embodiment) ( S2705: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter 203u is the upper limit value (5 in this embodiment) or more (S2705: Yes), the closing of the specific winning opening 65a (opening / closing plate 65f1 attached to the special winning opening 65f1) is set (S2706). Next, the small hit scenario is updated to the end of the round (S2707), and this process ends.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 58 to 72, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power cutoff processing flag is turned on, the power cutoff process of S4117 (see FIG. 59) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "momentary power failure") in this start-up process. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 59, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff occurrence information from the main control device 110 (see S4114 in FIG. 59), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S4117. The power cutoff processing flag is turned on before the power cutoff process is executed, and the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off after the power cutoff process is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power cutoff process of S4117 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power cutoff process in progress flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S4002: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S4117 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power cutoff process of S4116 was completed after the momentary power failure occurred, or it was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the data is transferred to S4008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and the voice lamp control device 113 is being executed during the power-off processing of S4117. MPU221 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power cutoff process is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, it is confirmed whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S4006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff flag 223y is turned on (S4008). The power cutoff flag 223y is turned on when the power cutoff process of S4117 is executed (see S4116 in FIG. 59). That is, since the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off process of S4117 is executed, the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag 223y turned on at the moment of the start-up process. This is the case where the power failure is started after the power failure of S4117 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), after clearing the work area of the RAM in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4009) and setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010), the state The state setting area 223j is updated based on the command (S4011). Next, interrupt permission is set (S4012), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S4008 is reached with the power cutoff flag 223y turned off is that the start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, for example, so that the process of S4004 to S4006 is followed by S4008. This is the case when the process is reached or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power cutoff command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S4010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010).

It should be noted that the reason for skipping the clearing process of S4009 is that when the processing of S4008 is reached from S4004 via the processing of S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S4004. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S4101 was executed (S4101), 1 millisecond. If the above time has not passed (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4112 without performing the processes of S4102 to S4111. In the process of S4101, it is the process related to the display (effect) that S4102 to S4111 determine whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S4112 and the variation display setting process of S4113 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S4112 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception omission of the command transmitted from the main controller 110, and by executing the processing of S4113 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing. Based on this, the settings related to the variable display effect can be made without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4103 to S4113 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S4101: Yes). S4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process shifts to the process of S4105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is a display control device as a command. It is transmitted to 114.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process to set to perform the production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

After the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S4108), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S4109, the liquid crystal display execution management process is executed (S4110). After that, the process proceeds to S4111. In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal display effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

After the processing of S4110, various counter update processings are executed (S4111), and the process proceeds to the processing of S4112. Details of the various counter update processes will be described later with reference to FIG. 72.

After that, the command determination process (S4112) that performs the process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S4113. The details of this command determination process (S4112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 60.

In the process of S4113, in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed by the display control device 114. The variable display setting process, which is a process set for transmission to the user, is executed (S4113). The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 69.

When the processing of S4113 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S4113 (S4114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S4116), and the power-off process is executed (S4117). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (S4118), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4114 (S4114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4115: No), the process returns to the process of S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4115: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S4112). This command determination process (S4112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. .. Hereinafter, the details of the command determination process (S4112) will be described.

In the command determination process (S4112), first, from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read and analyzed, and a special figure is drawn from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4201). If it is determined that either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4201: Yes), the stop type command reception process is executed (S4202), and this process is terminated. The details of this stop type command reception process (S4202) will be described later with reference to FIG. 61.

On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the special figure 1 stop type command nor the special figure 2 stop type command has been received in the processing of S4201 (S4201: No), whether or not the state command has been received from the main controller 110. Is determined (S4203). If it is determined that the status command has been received (S4203: Yes), the status command process is executed (S4204), and this process is terminated. The details of this state command processing (S4204) will be described later with reference to FIG. 62, but the gaming state (normal state, probable change state, latent probability) of the pachinko machine 10 based on the state command output from the main control device 110. The process of setting the state) to the state setting area 223j is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S4203, when it is determined that the state command has not been received (S4203: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation pattern command has been received (S4205). Here, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol.

In the process of S4205, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4205: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4206) and received. Special Figure 1 The variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (S4207), and this process is terminated. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that can be identified as the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and is stored in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 69) described later. , When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the first special symbol and the display mode of the variation display effect of the first special symbol (setting the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol). If you do).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received (S4205: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4208). The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol.

When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has been received in the processing of S4208 (S4208: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4209) and the received special figure 2 is received. FIG. 2 The variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (S4210), and this process is terminated. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that can be identified as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is stored in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 69) described later. , When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the second special symbol and the display mode of the variation display effect of the second special symbol (setting the variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol). If you do).

In the process of S4208, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4208: No), it is determined whether or not the reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4211). When it is determined that the hold ball number command has been received (S4211: Yes), the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 included in the received hold ball number command (that is, the first). The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated according to the extracted counter value (the number of reserved balls in the variable display of the special symbol) ( S4212), this process is terminated. Since the present embodiment does not have a configuration for holding and storing the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the reserved ball number counter 223c of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is set in the processing of S4212. Only the update process is executed.

Here, since the hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64, every time there is a starting winning, the process of S4212 , The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the start is started. If the hold ball number command is notified based on the winning, the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected, and the first special symbol hold ball number of the main control device 110 is corrected. It can be adjusted to the value of the counter 203d.

Further, in the process of S4211 when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S4211: No), it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4213). When it is determined that the winning information command has been received in the processing of S4213 (S4213: Yes), the information of the received winning information command (whether or not the special symbol lottery is successful, the winning type, and the variation pattern) is the corresponding winning information. It is set in the storage area 223b (S4214), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4213, when it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S4213: No), it is determined whether or not the winning related command has been received from the main control unit (S4215). If it is determined that the hit-related command has been received in the process of S4215 (S4215: Yes), the hit-related process is executed (S4216), and this process is terminated. The details of the hit-related process (S4216) will be described later with reference to FIG. 63, but as a result of the lottery of the special symbol, the production corresponding to the big hit game or the small hit game executed when the big hit or the small hit is won. This is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute the display.

On the other hand, in the process of S4215, when it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S4215: No), it is determined whether or not the remaining time reduction command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4217). If it is determined in the process of S4217 that the command for the number of remaining time reductions has been received (S4217: Yes), the remaining number of times update process (S4218) is executed. The details of this remaining number update process (S4218) will be described with reference to FIG. 66, but for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 based on the remaining time reduction command output from the main control device 110. The process of setting the contents of the effect display is executed.

In the process of S4217, when it is determined that the command for the number of remaining time reductions has not been received (S4217: No), it is determined whether or not the temporary stop related command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4219). If it is determined in the process of S4219 that a temporary stop-related command has been received (S4219: Yes), the temporary stop-related process is executed (S4220), and this process ends. The details of the temporary stop-related processing (S4220) will be described later with reference to FIG. 67, but the processing for determining the remaining time of the special figure fluctuation time when the special figure 1 temporary stop command or the special figure 2 temporary stop command is received. And, when the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command or the special figure 2 fluctuation restart command is received, the process of setting the effect (additional effect) to be executed by the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S4219, if it is determined that the temporary stop related command has not been received (S4219: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S4221), and this process is terminated. In the processing of S4221, if the other command is a command used in the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is performed. Is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114.

As described above, in the command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 60) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment, the process of determining whether a state command has been received (see S4203 in FIG. 60) is performed. , It is configured before the process of determining whether the variation pattern command of each special symbol has been received (see S4205 and S4208 in FIG. 60).

With this configuration, when the fluctuation pattern command and the status command are output from the main controller 110 at the same time, that is, in the first special symbol variation start processing of the main controller 110 (see S208 in FIG. 33). Then, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 33) is executed, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is set, and in the game state update process (see S308 in FIG. 33) executed thereafter, the game is played. Even when a state command indicating that the state has changed is set, the game state currently set on the voice lamp control device 113 side can be determined before the special figure 1 variation pattern command.

Therefore, when the jackpot in Special Figure 1 is won with the probability variation state set and the latency state is set during the jackpot fluctuation, the voice lamp control device 113 side is said to have set the latency state. A variation effect (see FIG. 7A) corresponding to a variation pattern command that causes a jackpot variation in the determined state can be easily set.

In addition, unlike the configuration of the present embodiment, when the processing according to the fluctuation pattern command is executed before the discrimination processing of the state command, the probability change is different from the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation described above. Only the information indicating that the jackpot has been won by the first special symbol lottery in the state is received first, and the variable display according to the received content is set. Therefore, it becomes difficult to execute the fluctuation display indicating that the latent probability state is set at the same time as the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started. Since the fluctuation display indicating that the latent state is set is delayed in this way, the timing of notifying the player to perform the right-handed game is delayed, which makes the player uncomfortable. The problem of giving is raised.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, on the main control device 110 side, the process of changing the game state after the jackpot hit / fail determination (see S306 in FIG. 33) and the variation pattern setting (S307 in FIG. 33). (Game state update process (S308 in FIG. 33)) is executed, whereas the voice lamp control device 113 first executes a process for determining the current game state (S4204 in FIG. 60), and then executes the process. It is configured to set the fluctuation display corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Therefore, even though the latent state is set, it is possible to surely prevent the variable display corresponding to the previous game state from being set and executed.

Further, it is necessary to specify the output order of various commands on the main control device 110 side by configuring the voice lamp control device 113 side to specify the reception order of various commands output from the main control device 110. Can be reduced. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Next, the stop type command reception process (S4202) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this stop type command reception process (S4202). This stop type command reception process (S4202) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. Hereinafter, the details of the stop type command reception process (S4202) will be described.

In the stop type command reception process (S4202), first, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received in response to the received command, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f is set to ON, and the special figure 2 is set. When the stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON (S4301). Next, the stop type (big hit A to big hit G, small hit A to small hit C, missed, missed reach, etc.) is extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command (S4302). End the process.

The stop type extracted in S4302 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is the second special symbol. It is identifiable that it is a stop type. As a result, even if the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) start to change at the same time, it is possible to manage the stop types respectively, and to execute an appropriate change display. Can be done.

Next, the state command process (S4204) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this state command processing (S4204). This state command process (S4204) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. Hereinafter, the details of the state command processing (S4204) will be described.

In this state command process (S4204), when the process of setting the current game state to the state setting area 223j is executed based on the state command output from the main control device 110, and the game state shifts to the latent state. In addition, the process for setting the effect for notifying the player that the latent state is set (chance zone effect (see FIG. 6B)) and the game state have shifted to the normal state. In this case, processing for clearing various flags and counters used to display the card forgotten warning screen (see FIG. 10A) is executed.

In the state command processing (S4204), first, the game state before receiving the state command is determined from the value of the state setting area 223j provided in the RAM 223 (S4401). That is, it is determined in which game state the state command was received. Next, it is determined whether the gaming state before receiving the state command is the latent state (S4402). When it is determined that the gaming state before receiving the state command is not the latent state (S4402: No), it is determined whether the received command is a state command indicating the transition to the latent state (S4403). In the process of S4403, when the received command is a state command indicating the transition to the latent state (S4403: Yes), the latent notification effect for notifying the entry of the latent state is set (S4404). Then, the value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the received state command is stored in the state setting area 223j (S4405), and the process proceeds to S4406.

On the other hand, in the processing of 4402, when it is determined that the gaming state before receiving the state command is the latent state (S4402: Yes), each processing of S4403 and S4404 is skipped, and the processing of S4405 is executed. The process proceeds to S4406. Further, in the process of S4403, if the received command is not a state command indicating the transition to the latent state (S4403: No), the processes of S4404 and S4405 are skipped and the process proceeds to S4406.

Next, it is determined whether the received command is a state command indicating the transition to the normal state (S4406). If it is determined that the received command is not a state command indicating the transition to the normal state (S4406: No), the processing of S4407 to S4410 is skipped, the processing of S4411 described later is executed, and this processing is terminated. .. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received command is a state command indicating the transition to the normal state (S4406: Yes), it is determined whether the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4407). When it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4407: Yes), the value of the prize ball counter 223u is cleared to 0 (S4408), the card notification flag 223q, and the card notification possible flag. 223s, the rush displayed flag 223t is set to off (S4409). Next, the contents of the remaining variable time information storage area 223o and the remaining time storage area 223p are cleared (S4410), and the values corresponding to the game states notified by the other state commands are stored in the state setting area 223j (S4411). This process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4407 that the card notification flag 223q is set to off (S4407: No), the processing of S4408 and S4409 is skipped, the processing of S4410 and S4411 is executed, and the present invention is performed. End the process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, a hit-related process (S4216), which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit-related process (S4216). In this hit-related process, a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to a big hit game or a small hit game, which is executed when a big hit or a small hit is won as a result of a special symbol lottery. This is to be performed, and processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 when a big hit or a small hit is won is executed.

In addition, when a prize ball number command for indicating the number of prize balls acquired during a winning game (big hit game, small hit game) is received, the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command is accumulated and accumulated. Based on the result, a process for displaying the card forgotten warning screen (see FIG. 10A) is executed.

In the hit-related process (S4216), first, it is determined whether the command received by the command determination process (see FIG. 60) has received the jackpot-related command (S4501). If it is determined that the received command is a jackpot-related command (S4501: Yes), the jackpot-related process is executed (S4502), and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 64, the jackpot-related process (S4502), which is one of the hit-related processes (S4216 in FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot related process (S4502). In the jackpot-related processing, processing is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won, and when the jackpot is won, the main control device is used. Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from 110 is executed.

In the jackpot-related process (S4502), first, it is determined whether or not the hit-related command received by the hit-related process (S4216) has received the jackpot start command (S4601). When the jackpot start command is received (S4601: Yes), the jackpot start command for display is set (S4602), and this process is terminated. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S4601, when it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4601: No), it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S4603). When the round number command is received (S4603: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the round number (S4604), and this process is terminated. In this embodiment, since the main control device 110 transmits information indicating the number of rounds as a round number command, the display round number command is set based on the received round number command. In order to reduce the amount of command data transmitted from the control unit 110, the voice lamp control unit is configured to transmit information indicating that a new round has started from the main control unit 110 as a round update command. When a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of 113, a round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of received round update commands is provided, and the current round is performed on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the value of the round number accumulation counter. It may be configured to calculate the number and set the display round number command.

On the other hand, in the process of S4603, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S4603: No), it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S4605). If it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S4605: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ending command has been received (S4605: Yes), the display ending command is set (S4606), and it is determined whether the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4607). If it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4607: Yes), a display ending command that does not include the card notification is set (S4608). That is, a process for preventing the display mode of FIG. 10A from being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4607, when it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is not set to on (that is, it is off) (S4607: No), the jackpot type this time is jackpot A or jackpot B. (S4609). When it is determined that the jackpot type this time is jackpot A or jackpot B (S4609: Yes), a display ending command including card notification is set (S4610), and the card notification flag 223q is set to ON. (S4611). That is, a process for displaying the display mode of FIG. 10A on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot type this time is not jackpot A or jackpot B (S4609: No), it is determined whether the card notification enable flag 223s is set to ON (S4612). When it is determined that the card notification possible flag 223s is set to on (S4612: Yes), the card notification possible flag 223s is set to off (S4613), and the above-mentioned processes S4610 to S4611 are executed. End the process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4612 that the card notification possible flag 223s is not set to ON (S4612: No), the above-mentioned process of S4608 is executed and the present process is terminated.

As described above, in the jackpot-related process (S4502 in FIG. 64), as various display modes to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game, the game information (opening, opening, In addition to the process of setting the display contents of the ending and the number of rounds), the process of whether or not to display the card forgotten warning screen (see FIG. 10A) is configured to be executed.

This card forgetting warning screen is a card (borrowing a ball) to the player when the player wins a predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) of prize balls in a winning game (big hit game, small hit game). This is a notification mode for calling attention not to forget the valuable medium used at the time. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned card is used when the number of prize balls acquired in the period from the normal state to the jackpot and the transition to the normal state again (continuation advantageous period) satisfies the condition that the predetermined amount can be reached. It is configured to display the forgetfulness alert screen.

Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 64, the jackpot (big hit A,) that can easily obtain a prize ball exceeding a predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) in the jackpot (first hit) won in the normal state. If the jackpot B) is won, the card notification that displays the card forgotten warning screen is executed at the end of the jackpot game, and if the other jackpots (big hit C, jackpot D) are won, the card notification is executed. It is configured not to.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a player who has not won a predetermined amount of prize balls from displaying a card forgotten warning screen, and can continue to borrow balls while playing a game. It is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the big hit game, a game state (latent state) in which the small hit game can be easily executed can be set. Therefore, by repeating the small hit game, the player can set the game state (latent state). A predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) of prize balls may be obtained. Therefore, the number of prize balls acquired by the player during the advantageous continuation period (the number of prize balls paid out during the advantageous period) is accumulated, and if the cumulative result exceeds a predetermined amount (250 shots), the execution is performed at that time. The card forgetting warning screen is displayed on the ending screen of the big hit game or the small hit game. As a result, it is possible to display the card forgotten warning screen for the player at an appropriate timing.

Further, in the present embodiment, the card forgetting warning screen is notified only once during one advantageous continuation period. As a result, the card forgetting warning screen is frequently displayed, and it is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable. The method of displaying the card forgotten warning screen is not limited to the content of the present embodiment. For example, a measuring means for measuring the advantageous continuation period is provided, and the elapsed period since the previous card forgetting warning screen is displayed. If the number exceeds a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes), the card forgotten warning screen may be displayed again. In this case, since the card forgotten warning screen is displayed once (because the display conditions for displaying the card forgetting warning screen are already satisfied), during the special symbol change period (for example, during the advantageous continuation period). When a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds or more is selected), it is preferable to display the card forgetting warning screen.

With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the current game situation by using the fixed concept of the player that the card forgetting warning screen is displayed after the big hit game is completed. Further, as a method of achieving the same effect, the big hit game may display the card forgetting warning screen by using the opening period of the small hit game.

Returning to FIG. 63, the description will be continued. In the process of S4501, when it is determined that the received command is not a jackpot-related command (S4501), it is determined whether the received command has received the small hit-related command (S4503). If it is determined that the received command is a small hit related command (S4503: Yes), the small hit related process (S4504) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 65, a small hit-related process (S4504), which is one process in the hit-related process (S4216 in FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit related process (S4504). In the small hit-related processing, processing is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the small hit game executed when the small hit is won, and when the small hit is won. , Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 is executed.

In the small hit-related process (S4504), first, it is determined whether or not the hit-related command received by the hit-related process (S4216) has received the small hit start command (S4701). When the small hit start command is received (S4701: Yes), the small hit start command for display is set (S4702), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4701 when it is determined that the received command is not the small hit start command (S4701: No), it is determined whether the ending command has been received (S4703). If it is determined that the received command is not the ending command (S4703: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received command is the ending command (S4703: Yes), the display ending command is set (S4704), and it is determined whether the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4705). .. If it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4705: Yes), a display ending command that does not include card notification is set (S4706), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4705, when it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is not set to ON (S4705: No), it is determined whether the card notification enable flag 223s is set to ON (S4707). When it is determined that the card notification possible flag 223s is set to on (S4707: Yes), the card notification possible flag 223s is set to off (S4708), and the display ending command including the card notification is set (S4707: Yes). S4709), the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4710), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4707, the card notification possible flag 223s is not set to ON (S4707: No), the above-mentioned process of S4706 is executed, and this process is terminated.

As described above, in this embodiment, even in a small hit game that does not meet the display conditions for displaying the card forgetting warning screen in one game, after winning the big hit in the normal state, If the cumulative value of the number of prize balls acquired during the game period (advantageous continuation period) until the normal state is set again satisfies the display condition (for example, the number of acquired prize balls reaches 250), a small hit It is configured to display the card forgotten warning screen even after the game is over. As a result, it is possible to display the card forgotten warning screen for the player at an appropriate timing.

Returning to FIG. 63, the description will be continued. In the process of S4503, when it is determined that the received command is not a small hit related command (S4503: No), it is determined whether or not the prize ball command has been received (S4505). If it is determined that the received command is not a prize ball command (S4505: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is a prize ball command (S4505: Yes), the value corresponding to the received command is added to the value of the prize ball counter 223u (S4506), and then the card. It is determined whether the notified flag 223q is set to ON (S4507). When it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is not set to ON (S4507: No), it is determined whether the value of the prize ball number counter 223u added in the processing of S4506 is 250 or more (S4508). When it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter 223u after addition is 250 or more (S4508: Yes), the card notification enable flag 223s is set to ON (S4509), and the display prize ball number command is set. (S4510), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S4507 that the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4507: Yes), or in the processing of S4508, the prize ball number counter 223u after addition is less than 250. If it is determined (S4508: No), the process of S4509 described above is skipped, the process of S4510 is executed, and the present process is terminated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is determined that the normal state is set by the state command processing (see S4204 in FIG. 62), and the value of the prize ball counter 223u is cleared. The number of prize balls corresponding to the prize ball number command received during the period up to (advantageous continuation period) is configured to be accumulated by the prize ball number counter 223u. Then, at the end of the winning game (big hit game, small hit game), the card forgetting warning screen is displayed according to the value of the prize ball counter 223u (at the ending screen display timing).

As a result, for example, when the jackpot (first hit) that triggers the setting of the advantageous continuation period is jackpot C (a jackpot in which it is difficult to obtain a predetermined amount (250 shots) of prize balls in one jackpot game). Can display a card forgotten warning screen when a small hit game is won during the advantageous continuation period, or when a big hit C is won again.

Next, the remaining number of times update process (S4218) will be described with reference to FIG. 66. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the contents of the remaining number update process (S4218). This remaining number update process (S4218) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the remaining time reduction command is executed from the main control device 110. Is received, a process of updating the contents set in the remaining time reduction frequency area 223k, the remaining variable time information storage area 223o, and the remaining time storage area 223p is executed.

In the remaining number update process (S4218), first, it is determined whether or not the remaining time reduction command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4801). If it is determined that the command for the number of remaining hours has not been received (S4801: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S4801, when it is determined that the remaining time reduction command has been received (S4801: Yes), the display time reduction command corresponding to the received command is set (S4802), and this processing is terminated.

Next, the contents of the temporary stop-related process (S4220) will be described with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the contents of the temporary stop-related process (S4220). In this temporary stop-related process (S4220), a process of determining the remaining time of the special figure fluctuation time when the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received, and a third symbol display device when the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command is received. The process of setting the effect (additional effect) to be executed in 81 is executed.

When the temporary stop-related process (S4220) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop command has been received (S4901), and if it is determined that the command has not been received (S4901: No), the variable restart process is performed. (S4902) is executed. The details of the fluctuation resumption processing (S4902) will be described later with reference to FIG. 68. On the other hand, in the process of S4901 when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop command has been received (S4901: Yes), the remaining fluctuation time of the currently set fluctuation pattern is calculated (S4903). Then, it is determined whether the residual variation time calculated by the process of S4903 is less than 2 seconds (S4904), and if it is determined to be less than 2 seconds (S4904: Yes), the residual variation is in the residual variation time information storage area 223o. A period A indicating that the time is short is set (S4905), and the process proceeds to S4902.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4904, when it is determined that the residual fluctuation time is not less than 2 seconds (2 seconds or more) (S4904: No), then the residual fluctuation period is 2 seconds or more and more than 15 seconds. If it is determined whether the time is short (S4906), and if it is 2 seconds or more and less than 15 seconds (S4906: Yes), the period B indicating that the residual fluctuation time information storage area 223o is the normal residual fluctuation time. Is set (S4907), and the process proceeds to S4902.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S4906 that the remaining variation time is not less than 15 seconds (exceeding 15 seconds) (S4906: No), it indicates that the residual variation time is long in the residual variation time information storage area 223o. The period C is set (S4908), and the process proceeds to S4902. In this way, the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) that is executed when the special map fluctuation resumes is calculated at the timing when the special map fluctuation is interrupted (the subtraction of the special map fluctuation time is interrupted), and the period corresponds to that period. By setting the information to be performed, it is possible to execute an effect (additional effect) suitable for the remaining variation time without delay at the timing of restarting the special figure variation.

In the present embodiment, if the period information (period A to period C) set in the residual fluctuation time information storage area 223o corresponding to the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) executed when the special figure fluctuation resumes is different. However, the selection of each period information is not limited to this, and for example, the shorter the remaining time, the easier it is to select the period A, and the longer the remaining time, the easier it is to select the period C. The ratio may be configured to be different according to the remaining time, or the remaining period may be divided at predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) intervals, and the periods A to C may be distributed in order for each division. It may be configured.

With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the relationship between the additional effect executed based on the period information set in the residual variation time information storage area 223o and the residual variation time. It can provide the enjoyment of predicting the fluctuation time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the contents of the fluctuation resumption process (S4902) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation restart process (S4902). This variation resumption process (S4902) executes a process of setting an additional effect to be executed when the special figure 1 variation resumption command is received.

When the variation restart process (S4902) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation restart command has been received (S5001), and if it is determined that the command has not been received (S5001: No), this process is terminated. .. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5001 that the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command has been received (S5001: Yes), then the remaining fluctuation time information stored in the residual fluctuation time information storage area 223o is read out (S5002). ), The additional effect type is determined from the additional effect selection table 222c based on the read-out residual fluctuation time information and the additional effect counter 223i (S5003). Next, the display additional effect command corresponding to the read additional effect type is set (S5004), the information set in the residual variation time information storage area 223o is cleared (S5005), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the special figure change is interrupted, the special figure change is restarted after the normal effect (the effect display executed when the special figure change is started) is completed. A shaking effect that swings and displays the third symbol is executed during the period until the pattern is changed, and when the special figure change is restarted, an additional effect corresponding to the special figure change period (remaining change period) after the restart is executed. However, other configurations may be used.

For example, an effect period determining means for determining a normal effect period in which a normal effect is executed is provided, and when it is determined by the effect period determination means that the normal effect period has ended, an additional effect is executed. May be good. With such a configuration, since the normal effect and the additional effect can be continuously executed, it is possible to provide a more suitable effect display for the player. Further, in this case, an error may occur between the end timing of the additional effect period in which the additional effect is executed and the special figure fluctuation period after the restart, but the additional effect is continuously executed during the error period. Alternatively, a shaking effect for displaying the third symbol in a swinging manner may be executed. Further, an error period discriminating means for discriminating the length of the error period is provided, and when the error period discriminating means determines that the error period is a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) or more, the additional effect is executed again. It may be configured as follows.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the variation display setting process (S4113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S4113). This variation display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 69) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. As described above, the variation display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 69) is performed on the first or special figure 2 variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on this, a variable pattern command for display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set, and a process of transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop types (big hit A to big hit G), a process of setting a display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

In the variation display setting process (S4112), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5101). When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is off (S5101: No), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S5107 is started. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S5101: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off (S5102). Next, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (S5103). When it is determined that the current gaming state is the latent state (S5103: Yes), the variation display setting process for special figure 1 (S5104) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 70, the details of the variation display setting process (S5104) for the special figure 1, which is one process in the variation display setting process (S4113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. do. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation display setting process (S5104) for the special figure 1. In this special figure 1 variation display setting (S5104), when the current gaming state is the latent state, the first special symbol is displayed based on the special figure 1 variation pattern command received from the main control unit 110. A process of setting a latent fluctuation pattern command and transmitting it to the display control device 114 is executed.

In the variation display setting process for special figure 1 (S5104), first, the variation time corresponding to the extracted variation pattern is read (S5201), and the value corresponding to the variation time read out in the process of S5201 is sub-special figure 1. The fluctuation time counter is set to 223 m (S5202). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5203). When it is determined that the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is 0 (S5203: No), the display rush inrush command is set (S5204), and the rush displayed flag 223t is set to ON (S5205). ). On the other hand, in the process of S5203, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation counter in FIG. 2 is larger than 0 (S5203: Yes), the process of S5204 and S5205 described above is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S5206. Next, based on the extracted variation pattern, a latent variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is set (S5206), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. When it was determined in the process of S5103 that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S5103: No), it was extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command in the process of S4205 of the command determination process (see FIG. 60). The variation pattern in the variation display effect of the first special symbol is acquired from the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223, and the variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is generated (S5105). The display variation pattern command of the first special symbol is configured to be able to identify whether it is a display variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol or a variation pattern command of the second special symbol. Specifically, if the upper 2 bits of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command having a 2-byte configuration is "10", it indicates that it corresponds to the first special symbol, and if it is "01", it indicates that it corresponds to the second special symbol. It is configured to indicate that it corresponds to.

The variable pattern command for display of the first special symbol set in the process of S5104 or S5105 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process of the main process (see FIG. 59) (see FIG. 59). It is transmitted to the display control device 114 by S4102). By receiving the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the display control device 114 corresponds to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed.

With the setting of the variable pattern command for display of the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set variable pattern command for display is consumed (that is, the variable corresponding to the reserved ball of the first special symbol). The data corresponding to the first special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted in accordance with the setting of the display) (S5106).

Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5107). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is not on (that is, off) (S5107: No), the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110. Therefore, the process of S5111 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S5107: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off (S5108). Next, the process of the variable display setting process for special figure 2 (S5109) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 71, a variation display setting process (S5109) for special figure 2, which is one process in the variation display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 69), will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 variation display setting process (S5109).

In the variation display setting process for special figure 2 (S5109), first, in the process of S4210 of the command determination process (see FIG. 60), the variation time corresponding to the extracted variation pattern is read out (S5301), and the read variation is performed. The value corresponding to the time is set in the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n (S5302). Next, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (S5303). When it is determined that the state is latent (S5303: Yes), it is determined whether the rush displayed flag 223t is on (S5304). When it is determined that the rush displayed flag 223t is not on (S5304: No), the remaining time stored in the remaining time storage area 223p is read out (S5305). Next, it is determined whether the remaining time read in the process of S5305 is less than 1 second (S5306). If it is determined that the remaining time is less than 1 second (S5306: Yes), the process of S5307 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5308.

On the other hand, in the process of S5306, when it is determined that the remaining time read out is 1 second or more (S5306: No), the display rush rush command is set (S5307), and the rush displayed flag 223t is set to ON. (S5308). Next, based on the extracted variation pattern, the latent probability variation pattern command for displaying the second special symbol is set (S5309), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5303 that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S5303: No), or when it is determined in the process of S5304 that the rush display flag 223t is set to ON. (S5304: Yes), the process of S5305 to S5308 described above is skipped, the process of S5309 is executed, and the present process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the state where the latent state is set in the state setting area 223j, when the variable display of the first special symbol is set, that is, the latent state during the jackpot fluctuation period. When it is determined whether the second special symbol (special figure 2) is changing and it is determined that the special figure 2 is not changing when the fluctuation display corresponding to the first special symbol change is set. Is configured to set a rush rush command as an effect mode of variable display. That is, it is configured to display a screen (see FIG. 7A) for notifying the player that the rush has entered the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing when the target special figure 1 change is executed. is doing.

On the other hand, when setting the fluctuation display corresponding to the first special symbol fluctuation in which the jackpot fluctuation period is in a latent state, it is determined whether the second special symbol (special figure 2) is changing, and the special symbol is used. When it is determined that 2 is in a fluctuating state, as an effect mode of the fluctuating display, a screen showing that the state is in a latent state (see FIG. 6B) without setting the display rush rush command is displayed. It is configured to be displayed.

As a result, if a right-handed game is performed when a screen for setting a display rush rush command and notifying the player that the rush has been rushed (see FIG. 7A) is displayed, the game is immediately performed. It is possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol in the latent state, and it is possible to provide the player with a comfortable game.

In addition, when setting the fluctuation display corresponding to the first special symbol fluctuation that is in the latent state during the jackpot fluctuation period, it is determined whether the second special symbol (special figure 2) is changing, and the special figure 2 If it is determined that is in the process of change, the change in the special figure 2 during the change may be forcibly terminated so that a new change in the special figure 2 can be executed.

It should be noted that the setting timing of the display rush rush command when the game state shifts to the latent state during the fluctuation of Special Figure 2 is not limited to the content of the present embodiment, and the player is provided with a game that does not feel uncomfortable. It suffices if the configuration is such that For example, when it is determined that the fluctuation of the special figure 2 that is changing has ended at the timing when the latent state is set, the display rush inrush command may be set, or the change may be made at the timing when the latent state is set. It may be configured to discriminate the remaining time until the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation in the figure 2 and set the display rush rush command when the discriminant result becomes a predetermined time (1 second). In this case, the predetermined time to be set is required from the time when the player operates the operation handle 51 to the time when the right-handed game is started until the ball launched by the right-handed game enters the second entrance 640. The time may be shorter than the period, and may be appropriately set according to the configuration of the game board 13.

Returning to FIG. 69, the explanation will be continued. The variable pattern command for display of the second special symbol set in the process of S5109 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed by the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59). It is transmitted to the control device 114. By receiving the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol, the display control device 114 corresponds to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed. Then, in the winning information storage area 223b, the data corresponding to the second special symbol is shifted (S5110).

Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON (S5111). If it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is not set to on (that is, it is off) (S5111: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is on (S5111: Yes), the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f is on. Sets the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f to off, and sets the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g to off when the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is on (S5112).

In the process of S4201 of the command determination process (see FIG. 60), the stop type extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command is set (S5113), and this process is terminated. When the extracted stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, the display special figure 1 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set based on the stop type. If the extracted stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, a display special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set based on the stop type. .. The special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command notified from the main control device 110 notifies the big hit type when a big hit occurs, and notifies even when the determination result is out of order. Will be done. When the determination result is out of order, the out-of-order symbol is set without referring to the stop type.

Next, with reference to FIG. 72, various counter update processes (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the various counter update processes (S4111). The various counter update processes (S4111 in FIG. 72) are one of the main processes (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and are the values of the various counters provided in the RAM 223. This is the process to execute the update.

In the various counter update processes (S4111), first, it is determined whether the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5401). When it is determined that the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5401: Yes), the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is subtracted by 1 (S5402). On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5401 that the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is not larger than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S5401: No), the processing of S5402 is skipped and S5403 is skipped. Move to the processing of. Next, it is determined whether the value of the sub-special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is larger than 0 (S5403). When it is determined that the value of the sub-special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is larger than 0 (S5403: Yes), the value of the sub-special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is subtracted by 1 (S5404).

Next, the value of the sub-special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m and the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n are read out (S5405), and the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is read from the value of the sub-special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m. The remaining time is calculated by subtracting the value of (S5406). The remaining time calculated in the process of S5406 is stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (S5407), the values of other various counters are subtracted by 1 (S5408), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5403, when it is determined that the value of the sub-special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is not larger than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S5403: No), the above-mentioned S5404 to S5407 are skipped. , S5408 process is executed, and this process is terminated.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 73 to 87, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 73, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is set in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs initially processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR type ROM 234d has a high speed because a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it can sufficiently store not only image data but also a control program and the like, while controlling. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to the predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S6001 in FIG. 73) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is completed and the boot process is terminated.

By executing the boot process (S6001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, in the display control device 114. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 74, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S6102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. It may execute the process set in 231a. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S6101. And S6102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. 1 It may be stored in the program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary staging unit in the MPU 231, which is possible after the boot process, earlier.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 73. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct to execute the display process. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes a start address and a final address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, transfer destination information (here, resident video RAM 235), and a transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of this register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6003, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S6004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 85 (a)) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 85 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75 (b)), the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) (not shown) is simply drawn. The command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 75 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying the image on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. By using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, so that the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, there was a ball entry (starting prize) into the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640, and the start instruction of the variable effect was given. When the main control device 110 passes through the voice lamp control device 113, that is, when the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the fluctuation image at power-on is immediately displayed during the fluctuation effect period, and a simple fluctuation is performed. You can produce. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, and it takes time to transfer the flash memory. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery is possible. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S6005, the interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 75 (a). FIG. 75A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 75 (b). FIG. 75B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. The command determination process (S6302) is executed so that the display device 81 can display the image, and then the display setting process (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. If the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81.

In the display setting process (S6303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), which are determined by the task process (S6304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 29 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list (S6306). The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 87.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / rear out reach, complete out) is set. The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed to shift to the process of S6304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 76, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then the command. For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). Then, if there is a variable pattern command for display (S6404: Yes), the variable pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 77 (a). FIG. 77A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S6405). This fluctuation pattern command processing (S6405) executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed in the main control device 110 at a distance of several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly for display. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counting counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6505, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S6502e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 as the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 76. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a stop type command for display (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 77 (b). FIG. 77B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (one of big hit A to G, small hit A to C, reach off, and complete off) indicated by the display stop type command. (S6601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is used. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is set. Set it on (S6603) and return to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-mentioned task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is completely out of order. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete deviation is set by the process of S6602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 will have a "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out of order". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 is completely disengaged. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408), and the display is performed. If there is an opening command for (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (a). FIG. 78 (a) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command process executes the process corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command processing, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and the time data is set in the timekeeping counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command (S6410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (b). FIG. 78B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. Set to the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command process executes the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6903). S6904). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6905), the ending command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display rush inrush command among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and the display is performed. If there is a rush rush command (S6414: Yes), the rush rush command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the rush inrush command process (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 80 (a). FIG. 80A is a flowchart showing the rush inrush command process. This rush rush command process executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rush rush command processing, first, a rush rush display data table corresponding to the display mode of the rush rush effect indicated by the display rush rush command is determined, and the determined rush rush display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. Then, it is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6931). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6932).

Next, based on the rush inrush display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6931, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6934). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6935), the rush inrush command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display rush rush command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an additional effect command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and the additional effect is performed. If there is a command (S6416: Yes), the additional effect command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the additional effect command processing (S6417) will be described with reference to FIG. 80 (b). FIG. 80B is a flowchart showing additional effect command processing. This additional effect command process executes the process corresponding to the additional effect command for display received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the additional effect command processing, first, an additional effect display data table corresponding to the display mode of the additional effect indicated by the additional effect command for display is determined, and the determined additional effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. , Set to the display data table buffer 233d (S6951). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6952).

Next, based on the additional effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6951, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6954). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6955), the additional effect command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6416, if it is determined that there is no additional display effect command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6418), and the rear surface is determined. If there is an image change command (S6418: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S6419), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S6419) will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag 233w for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (S7001). ). Then, among the bits of the rear image discrimination flag 233x provided for each rear image type (rear surface A, B), the bit corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is set to ON, and other bits are set. The bit corresponding to the rear image type of is set to off (S7002), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag 233w set by the process of S7001 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is changed from the rear image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S7002. Identify.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that either the back surface A or the back surface A or B is displayed according to the back surface type of the rear image specified in the display data table, the rear image discrimination flag 233x set by S7002 is used. The type of back image to be displayed at that time is specified, and the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored ( (Whether it is a resident video RAM 235 or a normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 76. In the processing of S6418, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S6418: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6420), and there is an error command. If (S6420: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6421), and the process returns to S6401 processing.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S6421) will be described with reference to FIG. 81 (b). FIG. 81B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S7102), and the error command is used. Ends the process and returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S7102 is determined and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the error discrimination flag corresponding to all the error types indicated by each error command is set to ON in the process in S7102. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 76. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S6416 (S6420: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S6422), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

In the processing of S6401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), The processing of S6402 to S6422 is executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6422 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75B) is also processed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment processing, only the commands required to display the power-on image, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are used from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 77 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and for other commands, Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 77 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6501. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the process of writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 82, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7201: No). ), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, the processes of S7202 to S7204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S7202), S7203 to S7204 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to and all the error discrimination set to ON is set. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S7301).

In the task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 82. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is turned off (S7203: No), the process proceeds to the process of S7205.

In S7205, the pointer update process is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 84. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the respective values are sequentially started from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the process of S7401, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is ". Determination (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), the pointer 233f is updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. It means that.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S7403), and if it is a demo display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7405), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demo effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S7403: No). S7406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawing contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 82. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task processing (S6304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S7206 together with the warning image developed earlier, and each sprite is specified. , Display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and other parameters required for drawing are determined.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the definite display flag 233z is on. (S7209).

As a result, if the definite display flag 233z is off (S7209: No), it is the timing to produce the definite display because the definite display has not been produced yet. Therefore, first, the definite display data table is displayed in the data table buffer 233d. (S7210), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the definite display data table is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after the confirmation display flag 233z indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final symbol display effect of the stopped symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing content can be set as such. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the confirmed display data table, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Further, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. A wide variety of staging images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S6304), from the start of the fluctuation until the predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S7215, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the definite display flag 233z is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag 233y is on (S7216). If the demo display flag 233y is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the timekeeping counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that a certain period of time has passed since the end of the final display effect. After the lapse of time, a process for displaying the demo effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demo display flag 233y indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. ..

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing contents can be set to.

In the process of S7216, if the demo display flag 233y is on (S7216: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is performed as it is. It ends and returns to V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75 (b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table that specifies that the image of the above is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 85A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 85 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, off as a result of the processing of S7501 (S7501: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 85 (b). FIG. 85B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S7601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S7601: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7602). In the process of S7602, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S7602 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7602: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7603. Further, as a result of the processing of S7601, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S7603: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 describes the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S7603 (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S7605), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 75 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) (see S7501: No in FIG. 85 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 86, a normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the display setting process (S6303) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702), and if it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is stored from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source final address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7703) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

Further, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S7702: No), the processes of S7703 and S7704 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S7706 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7706: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7707. Further, as a result of the processing of S7705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S7705: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707), and if the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7709). If the rear image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag 233w is set to off (S7710), it is provided for each rear image type. Among the rear image discrimination flags 233x, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7711). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag 233x in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (transfer destination). The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The discrimination in the processing of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the stored state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the stored state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is a normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If, as a result of the processing of S7713, the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7713 (S7713: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 includes the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the given address. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of S7714, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal transfer setting processing is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that became the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined by the task process (S6304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and a drawing list (see FIG. 30) is generated from the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305) (S7801). That is, in the processing of S7801, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). Then, the specified stored RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231 and expands it by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. do. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address is read out from the character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. Then, in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the image expanded in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed in parallel at the same time. be able to.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the processing of S7802 (S7803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when the value is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 75 (b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

In the first embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in the state where the variation display of 1 is executed, the other variation display may be configured to be infeasible. Then, if there is a reserved ball, the starting prize may be changed in order from the oldest reserved ball. With this configuration, control can be simplified and the processing load can be reduced.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol) and the probabilistic state (high probability state of the special symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol). Four gaming states are provided: a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbol and high probability state of normal symbol) and latent state (high probability state of special symbol and normal state of normal symbol). There is. Then, the latent state is configured to be the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

That is, when the latent state is set, the variable time for showing the lottery of the second special symbol, which is more likely to be a lottery result more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol, is set in another game state. By stipulating that the lottery be shorter than when it is done, the lottery that is advantageous to the player can be executed most efficiently. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel playability in which the player is expected to set the latent state.

Specifically, in the lottery of the second special symbol, in addition to the big hit, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened even if the prize is small, so that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short. In the state, the prize balls can be continuously increased. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that it will be in a latent state. In a general gaming machine, the probabilistic state is the most advantageous gaming state, but in the present embodiment, the latent probabilistic state is more advantageous than the probabilistic state, so that a novel game property can be provided.

Further, in the first embodiment, the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous). A variable method is adopted). As a result, even if the variable display of one special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the other special symbol can be executed without waiting for the end of the variable display, so that the lottery of the special symbol can be executed more efficiently. can. In addition, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating at the same time, if one of them stops fluctuating with a stop symbol of a big hit or a small hit, the other fluctuating display shows the remaining fluctuation time or lottery. Regardless of the result, the stop symbol is displayed as a stop. As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem that the other variable display is fixedly displayed as a hit or a small hit during the execution of the big hit or the small hit, and the big hit or the small hit is started in duplicate.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set, the variable display corresponding to the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed. , The high-probability state of the normal symbol shifts to the low-probability state, and the gaming state shifts from the probabilistic state to the latent state. While this latent state is set, the variable display (dynamic display) period for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol is set short, so that many lottery of the second special symbol can be executed. It will be a period that can be done (Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Advantageous Period).

In the present embodiment, since the small hit is configured to be won with a probability of about 1/2 in the lottery of the second special symbol, the small hit is set during the period when the latent state is set as the game state. The small hit game that is executed when the player wins the game is frequently executed, and the game state is advantageous to the player who can win many prize balls (special figure 2 advantageous state).

As described above, the period in which the latent probability state is set in the present embodiment (special figure 2 variable advantageous period) is during the variable display period (dynamic display period) of the first special symbol won by the jackpot in the probable change state. Since (special figure 1 big hit is changing), the big hit game is executed when the special figure 2 advantageous state ends. In this way, since a plurality of states (special figure 2 advantageous state, jackpot game state) that are advantageous to the player are continuously set, the player is continuously given various benefits. Can be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is won by one special symbol (special figure 2) and the small hit game is executed, the fluctuation of the other special symbol (special figure 1) is interrupted (variation display period). The measurement is interrupted), and when the small hit game is completed, the measurement of the interrupted fluctuation display period is restarted. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 variable advantage period from being subtracted during the small hit game, and therefore, regardless of the number of small hit games executed during the special figure 2 variable advantageous period. It is possible to provide the player with a certain special figure 2 variable advantageous period.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of one special symbol (special figure 1), the other special symbol (special figure 2) that is changing is stopped and displayed. It is configured to be forcibly stopped with. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a small hit game is executed during a big hit game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control content for the change of the other special symbol is different depending on the lottery result of one special symbol. Specifically, if the lottery result of one special symbol is a big hit (a lottery result that can give the player the first privilege), the change of the other special symbol means that the lottery result is out of order. If it is stopped and displayed in the display mode shown and the lottery result of one special symbol is a small hit (a lottery result that can give the player a second privilege different from the first privilege), the other special symbol changes. Is stopped until the grant of the second privilege is completed (until the small hit game is completed), and is restarted after the grant of the second privilege is completed. In addition, if the lottery result of one special symbol is out of order, the change of the other special symbol is executed as it is.

With this configuration, the lottery content (lottery result, period until the lottery result is displayed) of the other special symbol can be changed based on the lottery result of one special symbol, and the player's It is possible to provide various playability.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a lottery result that can give a privilege to the player, the control content for the change of the other special symbol is changed according to the content of the privilege. Therefore, for example, in the case of a lottery result that gives the player the most advantageous privilege (big hit game), the lottery result corresponding to the change of the other special symbol being executed is the lottery result that gives the privilege. Even so, the fluctuation is forcibly stopped so that the lottery result is out of order, the player is suppressed from being given excessive benefits, and the lottery result (small hit) with less benefits given than the big hit game. In the case of, in order to prevent the privilege based on the lottery of the other special symbol from being given during the small hit game without changing the lottery result corresponding to the change of the other special symbol being executed, the variable display is performed. It is possible to interrupt only the measurement of the period.

Therefore, in a state where a plurality of special symbols (Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2) are fluctuating at the same time, the player is given the least advantageous privilege, and thus the most advantageous privilege to be given later is given. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the player is not able to do so, and it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, a short-term (0.5 second) variable display period is set as the variable display period of the second special symbol (special figure 2). It is configured so that small hit games can be performed frequently. Then, the condition for setting the latent state as the gaming state is the condition where the latent state is set, and the condition for ending the latent state is the condition for winning the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol while the probability changing state is set. Is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot, and the jackpot game is executed. Therefore, the jackpot game is executed after the end of the first advantageous period, which is advantageous to the player who frequently executes the small hit game. The second game period will be set. Therefore, since the first advantageous period and the second advantageous period that are advantageous to the player can be continuously set, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game so that the first advantageous period is set.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the probability variation state, the latent probability state is set from the start of the jackpot fluctuation, and the latent probability state is set. Is set so that the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be efficiently performed.

Therefore, at the same time as the latent state is set, the player is notified of the period during which the latent state is set (based on the setting of the latent state) (FIG. 7 (a)). ))reference.

However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed at the same time, the first special symbol is also the second in the state where the probabilistic state is set. Both special symbols may fluctuate.

In such a case, even if the display mode indicating that the latent state (RUSH) is set at the timing when the latent state is set is displayed (see FIG. 7A), the second is currently changing. Until the special symbol stops fluctuating, the lottery for the second special symbol cannot be executed in the latent state, and there is a problem that the small hit game is not executed forever even in the RUSH state. There was a risk.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the condition for transition to the latent probability state is satisfied (when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol during the probability change state), the change status of the second special symbol (whether or not there is a change, (Fluctuating remaining period) is determined, and the timing for notifying that the RUSH state has been set is different based on the determination result.

Specifically, when the condition for transition to the latent state is satisfied, the RUSH state is set when it is determined that the new second special symbol change is feasible. It is configured. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the change of the new second special symbol is not started and the small hit game is not executed even though the notification that the RUSH state has been set is notified.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the condition for transition to the latent state is satisfied, the period from the state in which the new change of the second special symbol can be executed to the end of the latent state is determined. If the determined period is less than the predetermined period, the RUSH state is not notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the big hit game from being started without the small hit game being executed even though the notification that the RUSH state has been set is notified.

In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the probabilistic state, the high probability state of the normal symbol is changed to the low probability state at the time when the jackpot fluctuation starts, so that the game state is set. If the probability state is set and the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the high probability state of the normal symbol does not shift to the low probability state at the start of the jackpot fluctuation. , It is configured to continue the probabilistic state even during the jackpot fluctuation. With this configuration, it is possible to provide different playability depending on the type of special symbol.

Not limited to the configuration of this embodiment, even if a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery in the probabilistic state, the high probability state of the normal symbol is changed to the low probability state at the time when the jackpot fluctuation starts. It may be configured to set the latent probability state as the game state by shifting to, or only when a specific jackpot type is set among a plurality of jackpot types, it is normal at the time when the jackpot fluctuation starts. It may be configured to set the latent state as the game state by shifting the high probability state of the symbol to the low probability state.

Furthermore, the number of jackpots won during the advantageous continuation period is measured, and when the measurement result reaches a predetermined number of times, the high-probability state of the normal symbol is shifted to the low-probability state at the time when the jackpot fluctuation starts. It may be configured to set the latent probability state as the game state.

In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the probability change state, the latent state is set at the time when the jackpot fluctuation starts and the period until the jackpot fluctuation ends. However, the period until the end of the jackpot fluctuation corresponding to the predicted winning information is not limited to this, for example, based on the prediction that the jackpot will be won in the start winning process (see FIG. 47) (see FIG. 47). Multiple fluctuation periods) It may be configured to set the latent state.

In the present embodiment, when the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is selected in the state where the latent probability state is set, the fluctuation pattern table is always constant regardless of the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol during the latent probability state setting. (See FIG. 19B) is used, but the configuration is not limited to this, and for example, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the latent probability state is set reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times). It is also possible to provide a discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the discriminating means have been performed, and to make the data table for selecting the variation pattern different based on the discriminating result of the discriminating means.

Specifically, when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol has not reached a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), the fluctuation of the second special symbol is performed by referring to the data table in which the average fluctuation time is about 2 seconds. When the number of times reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), it is preferable to refer to a data table in which the average fluctuation time is about 1 second. As a result, more small hit games can be provided to the player when a fluctuation pattern in which a long fluctuation time is set is selected as the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, the latent probability state is set during the jackpot fluctuation in the probability change state, but in addition to this, the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific deviation or a small hit. The latent probability state may be set during the fluctuation display in the case, or the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol is out of a specific range or becomes a small hit reaches a predetermined number of times during the probability change state. If this is the case, the latent state may be set.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 111. In the above-mentioned first embodiment, when the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set, the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1). In addition, the gaming state during the jackpot fluctuation is set as the latent probability state, and the small hit game is easily executed when the latent probability state is set. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the first embodiment described above, the gaming state can be changed during the symbol determination period (the period during which the first symbol is stopped and displayed) for displaying the lottery result of the special symbol. It is configured to let you. That is, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the state where the probability variation state is set, the start timing of the symbol confirmation period (the first symbol indicating the big hit) in which the lottery result is displayed is displayed. Is configured to set the latent state as the game state at the timing when is stopped and displayed).

Further, the second embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that a different symbol determination period is set based on the lottery result of the special symbol. With this configuration, the length of the period in which the latent state that is advantageous to the player is set can be made different according to the length of the set symbol determination period. Further, as compared with the configuration in which the latent state is set corresponding to the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the period during which the special symbol is fluctuating) as in the first embodiment described above, the symbol confirmation period (special) of the special symbol is obtained. Since the configuration in which the latent probability state is set corresponding to the period in which the symbol is stopped) is used, it is possible to simplify the display mode corresponding to the special symbol in the state in which the latent probability state is set. , The control of the pachinko machine 10 can be simplified.

Further, in the first embodiment described above, once the probabilistic state is set, the probabilistic state is maintained until the next big hit is won, but in the second embodiment, the special symbol jackpot is used. Even if the player is not elected, the probability change state is terminated when the predetermined end condition (the number of special symbol fluctuations after the probability change state is set reaches the predetermined number of times (50 times)) is satisfied. It differs in that it is configured in. With such a configuration, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game for a player for shifting to a latent state during a period in which a probable change state is set.

Here, the flow of the game in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 88. FIG. 88 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of the game when a specific jackpot (big hit C) is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in a state where the probability variation state is set. .. As shown in FIG. 88, in the second embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the state where the probability variation state is set, the jackpot game starts from the timing when the jackpot fluctuation stops (see FIG. 88 (c)). The latent state is set in the period until it is executed (symbol confirmation period).

Then, in the state where the latent probability state is set, the game for causing the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed as in the first embodiment described above. Further, if the small hit of the special figure 2 is won during the symbol confirmation period of the special figure 1, the measurement (subtraction) of the symbol confirmation period of the special figure 1 is interrupted during the period in which the small hit game is executed. ing. In addition, in the second embodiment, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order or a small hit, a different symbol determination period is set according to the lottery result. As a result, the player desires that a long period be set as the symbol determination period as the lottery result (lottery result of winning the jackpot) of the special figure 1 corresponding to the period in which the latent state is set. In the state where the latent state is set, it is desired that a short period is set as the symbol determination period in order to execute more lottery of the special figure 2.

That is, in the second embodiment in which the symbol confirmation period is different according to the lottery result, a long symbol confirmation period is desired and a short symbol confirmation period is desired according to the game state and the type of special symbol. Can be provided to the player. Further, in the second embodiment, different symbol determination periods are set for the same fluctuation pattern in which the same fluctuation display can be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from predicting the symbol confirmation period in advance due to the variable display content of the special symbol, and which symbol confirmation period is set for this special symbol lottery. It is possible to make it difficult to understand until the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed. In addition, since it has the above-mentioned configuration, it has a variation effect (an effect mode executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81) that is executed corresponding to one variation time (variation pattern). Since it is configured to set multiple types of symbol confirmation periods, the time required for one special symbol lottery (after the special symbol lottery is performed, the next special symbol lottery can be performed. Even when the time until) is set in a complicated manner, it is possible to unify the variable staging.

In the example described with reference to FIG. 88, the flow of the game when the jackpot of Special FIG. 1 is won when the probability variation state is set, that is, when the number of remaining time reductions is 47 times is shown. It is configured so that the latent state is set from the time when the jackpot fluctuation stops. In addition to this, when the jackpot of Special Figure 1 is won at the timing when the probability change state ends (the value of the probability change counter 203aa becomes 0) (for example, the 50th special figure lottery after the probability change state is set). Is configured so that the latent state is set from the timing when the jackpot fluctuation starts.

With this configuration, in the state where the probability variation state is set, the advantageous period of different length is set based on the timing of winning the jackpot of the special figure 1. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while requesting that the player win the jackpot at the timing when a long advantageous period is set, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, the gaming state set for the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) executed when the probability change state is set will be described with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing the relationship between the content of the special figure 1 game and the given score after the probability change state is set.

As shown in FIG. 89, in the second embodiment, the game state is variably set based on the lottery result of the special symbol lottery executed in the state where the probability variation state is set and the number of lottery (number of special figure fluctuations). It is configured to do. Specifically, in the second embodiment, the probability change state is continuously set until the number of lottery (variation number) of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (50 times) without winning the jackpot. If the jackpot is won while the number of lottery (number of fluctuations) of the special symbol is 1 to 49, the symbol that shows the probability change state and the jackpot is stopped and displayed during the jackpot fluctuation. The latent state is set during the confirmation period. As a result, the player is given a latent state game (RUSH game) during the symbol determination period and a jackpot game after the latent state ends as a privilege.

Next, when the number of lottery (number of fluctuations) of the special symbol is the 50th jackpot, the latent state is set during the jackpot fluctuation and during the symbol determination period. As a result, the player is given a latent state game (RUSH game) from the jackpot fluctuation to the end of the symbol confirmation period and a jackpot game after the end of the latent state as a privilege. That is, in the second embodiment, in the state where the probability change state is set, the transition condition (big hit winning) to the latent state is set in the state where the specific condition (specific lottery number (50th)) is satisfied. When it is satisfied, the player is configured to be given a privilege which is more advantageous than the case where the transition condition to the latent state is satisfied when the specific condition is not satisfied.

Then, when the number of lottery of the special symbol exceeds 50 times, the predetermined probability variation number is reached, and the normal state is set as the game state. If a jackpot is won during this normal state, the normal state continues during the fluctuation of the special symbol and during the symbol confirmation period, and the jackpot game is executed.

On the other hand, if the number of lottery (number of fluctuations) of the special symbol is out of the range from the 1st to the 49th after the probability variation state is set, the probability variation state is changed during the change of the special symbol and during the symbol confirmation period. If it continues and it is off at the 50th time, the latent state is set during the change of the special symbol and during the symbol confirmation period, so the latent state from the special symbol change to the end of the symbol confirmation period. The game (RUSH game) becomes feasible.

Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the second embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit with respect to the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the probable change state and the symbol confirmation period, it is not a big hit (missing). , Small hit), it is configured so that a long time is easier to select. For example, when the lottery result of a special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation time is "60 seconds to 180 seconds". The fluctuation time of "" is selected, and the symbol confirmation period of "5 seconds to 150 seconds" is selected as the symbol confirmation period. The fluctuation time of "0.5 seconds to 150 seconds" is selected as the fluctuation time, and the symbol confirmation period of "0.2 seconds to 1.5 seconds" is selected as the symbol confirmation period.

With this configuration, the lottery result of the special symbol and the latent state game (RUSH game) can be played for a maximum of 330 seconds (when a big hit is won with the 50th special figure change number) according to the number of lottery, and the minimum. It can be provided to the player with a range of 5 seconds (when the jackpot is won in the 1st to 49th special figure fluctuations). Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting how long the latent state of this time will continue.

Further, in the present embodiment, regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol, when the number of times of special symbol lottery (number of fluctuations) after the probability change state is set becomes the 50th time, the special symbol is being changed and the special symbol is changing. , Since the latent state is set during the symbol confirmation period, even if the jackpot is not won during the probable change state, the latent state game (RUSH game) is played against the player. Can be provided. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to experience the latent state game (RUSH game) than the configuration of the first embodiment in which the latent state game (RUSH game) is provided only when the jackpot is won. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player gets tired of the game because he / she cannot experience the latent state game (RUSH game) even though he / she has played the game for a long time.

Further, in the present embodiment, the latent state is set when the latent state is set based on the winning of the jackpot during the probable change state, and the latent state is set longer than the latent state is set without winning the jackpot. It is configured to be easy. As a result, the longer the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed, the easier it is to execute the jackpot game after the latent state game (RUSH game) is completed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player in the latent state game (RUSH game) play the game while expecting the jackpot game to be executed.

In addition, unlike the configuration of the present embodiment described above, in a part of the case where the latent state is set without winning the big hit, it is equivalent to the case where the latent state is set based on the winning of the big hit. Or, set the fluctuation time and the symbol confirmation period corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol other than the big hit (missing, small hit) so that the latent state game (RUSH game) of a longer length is executed. Is also good. As a result, it is possible to provide a player with a situation in which it may be advantageous not to win a big hit in a special symbol lottery, and it is possible to provide a surprising game.

In the present embodiment, as described above, it is easy to set a long latent state when a big hit is won during the probable change state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the latent probability is not limited to this, and the big hit is not won during the probable change state. When the state is set, it may be configured so that a long latent state is set. In this case, for example, the probability of change (the number of lottery of special symbols whose probability change state is continuously set (number of fluctuations)) is 50, and the probability of big hit in the probability change state, that is, the high probability state of the special symbol is 1/20. It is preferable to set to, so that a long latent state is set when the result of the lottery of the special symbol is missed 50 times in a row (about 7%).

Next, among the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the display contents different from the above-described first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 90. In the second embodiment, unlike the first embodiment described above, the latent probability state is set during the symbol determination period, and therefore, a special figure 1 for the effect content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The display mode of the display area Dm1 or the special figure 2 display area Dm2 is different from the above-described first embodiment. FIG. 90A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents in the latent state. As shown in FIG. 90 (a), in the second embodiment, since the latent probability state is set during the period when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), the latent probability state is set. The display of the effect mode (super chance zone display) indicating the state in which the change of the second special symbol is executed across the timing is displayed, and the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. It differs from the display screen of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 8A) in that it is executed during the period in which the second symbol for showing is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). Since the other display elements are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the example shown in FIG. 90 (a), the display mode (“777”) of the third symbol for indicating that the first special symbol (special figure 1) has won the big hit is stopped and displayed. It shows that the latent probability state is set based on the fact that the jackpot is won in the first special symbol during the probability change state. In the example shown in FIG. 90 (a), since the special figure 1 display area Dm1 in which the third symbol is displayed in a display mode that can be visually recognized by the player is formed, the player can see the special figure 1 display area. By grasping the display mode of the third symbol displayed on Dm1 and the effect mode indicating that the latent state displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 has been set, the flow of the future game will be related. The game can be performed in a state in which information (information on whether or not the jackpot game is executed after the latent state game is completed) is acquired in advance.

Further, in the second embodiment, when the latent probability state is set based on the jackpot winning of the first special symbol, the fall lottery (special symbol) is performed when the special symbol is drawn during the latent probability state. The lottery for shifting the high-probability state to the low-probability state) is not performed. Therefore, by identifying the display mode of the third symbol displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, it is possible to grasp whether or not the current latent state is an advantageous latent state that is advantageous to the player. You can play the game with confidence.

In the second embodiment, the third symbol is displayed so that the player can easily identify the lottery result of the special symbol, but the lottery result of the special symbol is not limited to this. In order to make it difficult for the player to identify, the display area may be reduced, or the display area other than the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a light emitting body attached to the game board 13 or a light emitting body other than the third symbol display device 81) may be provided. A configuration such as a liquid crystal display device) may be used for display. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand what triggered the latent state to be set, so that the jackpot game is executed after the latent state game (RUSH game) is completed. It is possible to play the game while predicting whether or not the fall lottery is being executed during the latent state game (RUSH game).

Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol is displayed from the time when the third symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 until the final display period (symbol confirmation period) elapses. It is configured to stop completely without changing it, but it is not limited to this as long as it notifies the player that the special symbol is currently in the final display period (symbol finalization period), for example. During the final display period, the variable display of the third symbol is stopped, but the display mode (color) of the third symbol may be gradually changed, or the third symbol may be configured to be indistinguishable by the player. The design may be configured to swing.

In addition, for the player, a new lottery (variation) of the special symbol is made because the right of the special symbol lottery to be newly executed has not been acquired, whether the player is currently in the confirmed display period (design confirmation period). ) May not be executed, it may be configured to set a display mode for allowing the player to identify, for example, "confirmed display" or "waiting" in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. The command of "" may be displayed, or the display mode (color, design) of the third symbol may be changed between "confirmed display" and "waiting". With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent erroneous recognition that a new lottery is not started even in the state of having the reserved memory during the definite display period.

Next, with reference to FIG. 90 (b), the display contents at the time of entering the latent state game (RUSH game) in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 90B is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the latent state game (RUSH game) is entered. As shown in FIG. 90 (b), in the present embodiment, since the latent state is set during the period when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), the latent state game (RUSH game) is performed. The effect mode indicating rushing is executed during the period in which the second symbol for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. In that respect, it differs from the display screen of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 8B). Since the other display elements are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 96. In the second embodiment, the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed from the first embodiment described above, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. It differs in that it is done. Other points are the same as those in the first embodiment, the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 91 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 91, in the ROM 202 of the second embodiment, the big hit type selection table 202aa is replaced with the big hit type selection table 202d, and the small hit type selection table 202a is replaced with the small hit type selection table 202ab. Is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the variation pattern selection table 202ac is provided instead of the variation pattern selection table 202f, and the deviation type selection table 202ad is provided.

The jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa is different from the jackpot type selection table 202d of the first embodiment described above in that the type of the jackpot type is changed, and various counters (time reduction counter 203f, probability variation counter 203aa) set after the jackpot ends. , The fixed time counters 203ad and 203ae) are different from each other in that the value of the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type is changed. Here, the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 92.

FIG. 92 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 92, the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa is defined by the same jackpot operation content as the jackpot type defined in the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A) of the first embodiment described above. For each jackpot type, the values of the time reduction counter 203f, the probability variation counter 203aa, the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad, and the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae are specified.

Specifically, when the jackpot type (big hit A1 to jackpot A3) in which the same jackpot operation content as that of the jackpot A in the jackpot type selection table 202d of the first embodiment described above is executed is selected (winning the jackpot). When the game state is the normal state or the latent state, the value of "100" is set in the time saving counter 203f, and the value of "50" is set in the time saving state and the probable change state. Therefore, it is specified that the value of "50" is set in the probability variation counter 203aa.

Furthermore, as the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol, it is stipulated that the jackpot A1 is set to "5 seconds", the jackpot A2 is set to "60 seconds", and the jackpot A3 is set to "150 seconds". The jackpot A1 is defined in the range where the value of the counter C2 (0 to 99) is "0 to 19", the jackpot A2 is defined in the range of "20 to 23", and the jackpot A3 is defined in the range "24". That is, in the second embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to the jackpot A (big hits A1 to A3) is executed in 25% of the cases where the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and 80% (20 / 20 /) of them. It is stipulated that 25) is the jackpot D, 16% (4/25) is the jackpot A2, and 4% (1/25) is the jackpot A3.

That is, in the present embodiment, even if the jackpot in which the most advantageous jackpot game is executed for the player is won, the short symbol confirmation period is set as the period (symbol confirmation period) for stopping and displaying the lottery result to the player. If selected, the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed will be shortened. Therefore, for the special symbol lottery, the player can pay attention not only to whether or not the player has won the big hit, but also to the length of the symbol determination period, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the second embodiment, a configuration is used in which the symbol determination period is associated with the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a lottery for selecting the jackpot operation content (big hit type) and a lottery. The lottery for selecting the symbol fixing period and the lottery may be configured to be executed independently. In this case, since a plurality of symbol determination periods can be combined for a plurality of jackpot types, it is possible to provide game playability that is difficult for the player to predict.

Next, similarly to the above-mentioned jackpots A1 to A3, jackpots B1 to B3, jackpots C1 to C3, and jackpots D1 to D3 are defined, respectively.

Specifically, when the jackpot type (big hit B1 to jackpot B3) in which the same jackpot operation content as that of the jackpot B in the jackpot type selection table 202d of the first embodiment described above is executed is selected (winning the jackpot). When the gaming state is the normal state or the latent state, the value of "0" is set in the time saving counter 203f, and the value of "100" is set in the time saving state and the probable change state. Therefore, it is specified that the value of "0" is set in the probability variation counter 203aa. Further, as the symbol determination period of the special symbol, it is stipulated that the jackpot B1 is set to "5 seconds", the jackpot B2 is set to "60 seconds", and the jackpot B3 is set to "150 seconds".

Next, the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab will be described with reference to FIG. 93 (a). FIG. 93A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 93 (a), the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab has each small hit type (small) with respect to the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16 (b)) of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the hit A to the small hit C) are further subdivided and defined. Other than that, it is the same as the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16B). The detailed description of the same element will be omitted.

Specifically, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is in the range of "0 to 9" as the small hit type in which the small hit operation (opening operation) corresponding to the small hit A of the first embodiment described above is executed. , "Small hit A1" with a symbol confirmation time of "0.2 seconds" is in the range of "10 to 89", and "Small hit A2" with a symbol confirmation time of "0.5 seconds" is "90 to 93". "Small hit A3" with a symbol confirmation time of "1.5 seconds" is specified in the range of ".

Then, as the small hit type in which the small hit operation (opening operation) corresponding to the small hit B of the first embodiment described above is executed, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is determined in the range of "94 to 95". "Small hit B1" with a time of "0.2 seconds" is in the range of "96 to 97", and "Small hit B2" with a symbol confirmation time of "0.5 seconds" is in the value of "98". A "small hit B3" with a fixed time of "1.5 seconds" is specified. Further, as the small hit type in which the small hit operation (opening operation) corresponding to the small hit C of the first embodiment described above is executed, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is set to "99" and the symbol determination time is "1. A small hit operation (opening operation) of "5 seconds" is specified.

Next, the contents of the deviation type selection table 202ad will be described with reference to FIG. 93 (b). This out-of-order type selection table 202ad is referred to for selecting the out-of-order type when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, and is different in correspondence with the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5. The fixed time is specified.

In the present embodiment, the same counter value (value of the small hit type counter C5) is used depending on whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit or a miss because the lottery result of the special symbol cannot be duplicated. ) To select the type. As a result, the number of counters included in the main control device 110 can be reduced. The configuration is not limited to the above-mentioned configuration, and different counters may be used depending on whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit or a miss.

FIG. 93B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the deviation type selection table 202ad. As shown in FIG. 93 (b), the symbol type (off type) having a symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds to 1.5 seconds corresponding to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a small hit. It is specified corresponding to the value of the type counter C5.

As described above, in the second embodiment, it is possible to set the lottery results of big hit, small hit, and miss as the lottery result of the special symbol, and further, it is possible to set a different symbol confirmation time for each lottery result. It is configured in. Thereby, even if the lottery results of the special symbols are the same, different symbol confirmation times can be set.

Here, for example, when the lottery result of a special symbol is a big hit and the latent probability state is set during the symbol confirmation period, a long time (for example, 150 seconds) is selected as the symbol confirmation time. , Since the period in which the latent state is set can be lengthened, it can be advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the longer the symbol confirmation time is selected, the smaller the number of games per unit time (the number of special symbol lottery), which is disadvantageous to the player.

Further, of the second special symbol (special diagram 2) when the latent state is set during the period in which the special symbol indicating that the lottery result of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is a big hit is stopped and displayed. In the latent state game (RUSH game) in which the lottery is executed, when the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a small hit or a miss, a long symbol confirmation time is selected, and a predetermined latent state is selected. Since the number of special figure 2 lottery that can be executed during the period (the symbol confirmation period of special figure 1) is reduced, it is disadvantageous to the player.

In this way, since the degree of advantage of the set symbol determination period can be changed according to the lottery result of the special symbol, it is possible to provide the player with a novel playability.

In the present embodiment, by changing the symbol determination period of the special symbol, the period in which the latent state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is set is changed, and the game is executed during the latent state. By varying the number of special symbol lottery, the degree of advantage provided to the player is different, but other configurations may be used, for example, a big hit in a special symbol lottery. Only when the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol indicating that the player has won is longer than the predetermined period, the player may be configured to have a privilege of displaying a preferable image, or the music played during the jackpot game may be provided. The selection operation may be configured to be feasible during the symbol determination period.

Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the contents of the time saving / probability variation 2 table 202ac2 will be described. FIG. 94 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving / probability variation 2 table 202ac2 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 94, the time reduction / probability variation 2 table 202ac2 has a variation pattern corresponding to the special figure 1 with respect to the time reduction / probability variation table 202f2 (see FIG. 19A) of the first embodiment described above. They differ in that they have different lengths. Other than that, it is the same as the time saving / probability variation table 202f2 (see FIG. 19A). The detailed description of the same element will be omitted.

That is, in the present embodiment, the latent probability state is set during the stop display period (symbol confirmation period) of the special symbol when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery (lottery of special figure 1) during the probability change state. Therefore, the variation display period of the special figure 1 in the probabilistic state is configured to be shorter than that of the first embodiment.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 95. FIG. 95 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 95, in the second embodiment, the probability variation counter 203aa is provided in place of the probability variation flag 203g, the special figure 1 symbol determination flag 203ab, and the special figure 2 The difference is that the symbol 203ac, the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad, and the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae are added. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

The probability variation counter 203aa is a counter for continuing the number of lottery of special symbols executed in the high probability state (latent state, probability variation state) of the special symbol, and is a period during which the lottery of the special symbol is executed with high probability. It is for showing.

The probability variation counter 203aa is a value defined according to the winning jackpot type at the timing when the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON in the jackpot end processing (see S2312 in FIG. 54) of the first embodiment described above. 92) is set, the value is referred to in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98) (S451 in FIG. 98), and the jackpot lottery according to the value set in the probability variation counter 203aa is performed. It is executed (see S403 and S404 in FIG. 98). It is also referred to when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the same manner (see S953 in FIG. 102).

Then, the value is decremented by 1 at the timing when the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol (Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2) has elapsed, and is reset to 0 at the timing when the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol won by the jackpot has elapsed. ..

The special figure 1 symbol confirmation flag 203ab is a flag for indicating that the first special symbol (special figure 1) is stopped and displayed, and when it is set to on, the stop display of the special figure 1 is displayed. It indicates that it is during the period (during the symbol confirmation period). This special symbol 1 symbol confirmation flag 203ab is set to on in the first special symbol determination period setting process (see S852 in FIG. 100) (see S2802 in FIG. 100), and the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see FIG. 99). See S257). Then, when it is determined that the symbol determination period has elapsed (S853: Yes in FIG. 99), it is set to off.

The special figure 2 symbol confirmation flag 203ac is a flag for indicating that the second special symbol (special figure 2) is stopped and displayed, and when it is set to on, the stop display of the special figure 2 is displayed. It indicates that it is during the period (during the symbol confirmation period). The special figure 2 symbol fixing flag 203ac sets the target special symbol type from the first special symbol (special figure 1) to the second special symbol (special figure) with respect to the above-mentioned special figure 1 symbol fixing flag 203ab. The only difference is that it has been changed to 2), and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad and the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae are counters for measuring the symbol fixing period of the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2). , When the first special symbol (special diagram 1) or the second special symbol (special diagram 2) 1 is stopped and displayed, a value indicating the current symbol determination period is set in the corresponding counter. Then, in the process during the fixed time (see S860 in FIG. 101) that is periodically executed, the value of the counter is subtracted, and the values of the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad and the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae become 0. In this case, the process of ending the symbol determination period of the special symbol is executed.

In the second embodiment, different symbol determination periods are set according to the type for showing the lottery result of the special symbol (see FIGS. 92 and 93). Then, the latent state is set as the game state during this symbol determination period.

Next, the information stored in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 96, in the RAM 223 of the second embodiment, in addition to the electrical configuration of the first embodiment described above, the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa, the special figure 2 confirmation counter 223ab, and the remaining confirmation time information storage area The difference is that 223ac and the confirmation flag 223ad are added.

The special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is a counter for measuring a period (symbol confirmation period) for stopping and displaying the first special symbol, and is a symbol confirmation period of the first special symbol (special figure 1) from the main control device 110. When a confirmation command including information for indicating the above is received, the value corresponding to the symbol confirmation period of the special figure 1 is set.

The value set in the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is periodically subtracted by various counter update processes 2 (see FIG. 111) executed every 1 millisecond. In the second embodiment, the latent state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is configured to be set during the symbol determination period of the special symbol (first special symbol). 1 By managing the value of the confirmation counter 223aa, it is possible to set the remaining period information indicating the remaining period in which the latent probability state is continuously set.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the small hit of the second special symbol is won during the symbol confirmation period of the special figure 1 (during the latent state game), the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa during the small hit game. Is configured to interrupt the process of subtracting. Therefore, since the symbol determination period of the special figure 1 is not subtracted while the small hit game is being executed, the lottery of the second special symbol can be appropriately executed during the symbol determination period.

In addition to the configuration of the second embodiment described above, a process of accumulating the period during which the subtraction process of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is suspended may be provided. Specifically, a small hit game counter is provided to measure the period during which the small hit game is being executed, and the small hit game counter is used to continuously set the small hit game during the latent state. It may be configured to calculate the cumulative period of It may be configured to calculate the cumulative period during the small hit game in the latent state continuously set by using the medium counter.

In this way, by calculating the cumulative interruption information accumulating the period during which the subtraction process of the symbol determination period of Special Figure 1 is interrupted, the result of the current latent state game (RUSH game) is notified to the player. Can be done. Further, as a detailed game result of the latent state game (RUSH game), the cumulative number of acquired balls acquired during the latent state game (RUSH game), the cumulative number of small hits won, and the above-mentioned interruption accumulation Based on the information and the game result indicating whether or not there are more benefits acquired than the design value (or more than the past history), and whether or not the number of balls acquired is large for the number of small hits won. It may be configured to notify the player of the game result shown and the game result indicating whether or not the interruption cumulative information is long with respect to the number of winning small hits. Further, it may be configured to simply notify the cumulative number of acquired balls, the cumulative number of small hits, and the cumulative interruption information.

The special figure 2 confirmation counter 223ab is a counter for measuring the period (symbol confirmation period) for stopping and displaying the second special symbol, and is the symbol confirmation period of the second special symbol (special figure 2) from the main control device 110. When a confirmation command including information for indicating the above is received, the value corresponding to the symbol confirmation period of the special figure 2 is set. The specific contents are the same as those of the above-mentioned special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa, except that the measurement target is the symbol confirmation period of special figure 2 instead of the symbol confirmation period of special figure 1, and the details thereof are the same. The explanation is omitted.

The remaining fixed time information storage area 223ac determines the remaining time (remaining fixed time) of the symbol fixed period at the time when the subtraction process of the symbol fixed period of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is interrupted (temporary stop of special figure 1). It is a data area for storing the remaining fixed time information to be shown. In the second embodiment, an effect mode for restarting the subtraction process of the symbol confirmation period is set based on the remaining confirmation time information stored in the remaining confirmation time information storage area 223ac. As a result, it is possible to predict the period until the latent state ends by grasping the effect mode executed when the small hit game ends and the subtraction process of the symbol determination period is restarted.

When it is determined that the temporary stop related command has been received in the command determination process 2 (see S4162 in FIG. 106) of the voice lamp control device 113 in the remaining fixed time information storage area 223ac (S4219: Yes in FIG. 106). The remaining fixed time information (period A to period C) set in the temporary stop-related process 2 (see S4253 in FIG. 108) to be executed is stored (see S4956, S4958, and S4959 in FIG. 108). Then, it is read when setting the effect mode when restarting the subtraction process of the symbol determination period in the restart process (see S4952 in FIG. 109) executed in the temporary stop-related process 2 (see S4253 in FIG. 108). It is issued (see S5002 and S5052 in FIG. 109) and is referred to when determining an additional effect type (see S5003 and S5053 in FIG. 109).

Since the information for indicating the remaining period of the latent state game is notified when various notification conditions are satisfied in this way, the remaining period of the symbol determination period, that is, the latent state game is It is possible to acquire information indicating the remaining period that can be executed by grasping the production mode of various effects executed during the latent state. Therefore, the player can be made to pay close attention to the effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the second embodiment, the remaining period of the symbol determination period, that is, the remaining period during which the latent state game can be executed is divided into predetermined ranges, and the remaining period information for indicating the divided ranges is provided by the player. By configuring to notify the player, the player is configured to roughly grasp the remaining period of the latent state game and to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the specific remaining period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the player may be configured to notify the player of the specific remaining period in seconds.

The confirmation flag 223ad is a flag for indicating that the special symbol is in the stop display period (symbol confirmation period), and is set to ON when the special symbol is in the stop display period (symbol confirmation period). The flag. The confirmation flag 223ad is configured to be set to ON even if either the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2) is in the symbol confirmation period. There is.

The confirmation flag 223ad is executed when it is determined that the symbol confirmation related command has been received in the command determination process 2 (see S4162 in FIG. 106) of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4254: Yes in FIG. 106). It is set to on in related processing (see S4255 in FIG. 110) (see S5077 in FIG. 110). Then, when it is determined in the temporary stop-related process 2 (see S4253 in FIG. 108) that the special figure 1 temporary stop command has been received (see S4951 in FIG. 108), the fluctuation state of the special figure 1 is during the symbol determination period. It is referred to to determine whether or not it is (see S4953 in FIG. 108). Further, when it is determined that the special figure 1 restart command has been received in the restart process (S4952 in FIG. 109) executed in the temporary stop-related process 2 (see S4253 in FIG. 108), it is also determined (S5001: Yes in FIG. 109). , It is referred to in order to determine whether or not the fluctuation state of the special figure 1 is in the symbol determination period (see S5051 in FIG. 109).

As described above, in the second embodiment, at the time when the small hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) (when the small hit game is executed) or at the time when the small hit game is completed. It is determined whether the fluctuation state of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is in the fluctuation display period or the symbol confirmation period, and based on the determination result, the special figure 1 is temporarily stopped (variation display period, It is configured to set the processing when the subtraction of the symbol fixing period is interrupted) and the effect mode when restarting the special figure 1 (restarting the subtraction of the variable display period and the symbol fixing period).

With this configuration, processing is appropriately executed regardless of the fluctuation state of the first special symbol (special figure 1) at the timing when the small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2). can do.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the second embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 105. The control process of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment replaces the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 32) with respect to the control process of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment described above. (See FIG. 97), instead of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34), the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see FIG. 98), instead of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 38). The second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see FIG. 102) and the second special symbol variation stop process instead of the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (see FIG. 99) and the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40). The second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see FIG. 103) is executed instead of (see FIG. 45), and the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 2 (see FIG. 105) is executed instead of the special figure 2 disengagement stop process (see FIG. 46). The difference is that the first special symbol fixing period setting process (see FIG. 100) and the second special symbol fixing period setting process (see FIG. 104) are newly added. Other than that, the same processing is executed. The same processing is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, among the contents of the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the second embodiment, the points that are significantly different from the first embodiment described above will be briefly described. In the first embodiment described above, the latent state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is configured to be set during the variable display period of one of the special symbols (special figure 1). More specifically, in the state where the probabilistic state is set, the latent state is set during the variable display period of the special symbol won by the jackpot, and the latent state game (RUSH game) is played until the variable display period ends. It was configured to execute and execute the jackpot game immediately after the variable display period ended. As a result, it is possible for the player to continuously perform two different privilege games (a game in which a small hit occurs frequently in a latent state and a big hit game), and the player can play many games in a short period of time. It was possible to give the privilege of.

Further, since the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed in the state before the jackpot game is executed, the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed with peace of mind. In other words, even if the game result on the first half side is not good, by setting the big hit game, which generally gives the player a larger privilege than the small hit game, on the second half side of two consecutive privilege games. , It was possible to enthusiastically acquire benefits in the game (big hit game) executed on the latter half side.

In addition, since the latent state game (RUSH game) is configured to be performed during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation, it is possible to set in advance the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed. can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed for an unexpectedly long time and an excessive privilege is given to the player.

In addition, the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed varies according to the fluctuation pattern selected when the jackpot is won. In other words, since it is configured to determine whether or not the jackpot game is executed and the length of the game period of the latent state game (RUSH game) by one lottery of the special symbol, the latent state game ( The processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced as compared with the case where the processing using the dedicated selection table is executed in order to preset the length of the game period of the RUSH game).

However, in the configuration of the first embodiment described above, since the gaming period of the latent state game (RUSH game) is determined only by the fluctuation pattern (variable time) of the special symbol, the latent state game In order to prepare a plurality of game periods of (RUSH game), it is necessary to prepare a plurality of fluctuation patterns (variation times) in advance, which may put pressure on the data area for storing the fluctuation patterns.

Therefore, in the second embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the first embodiment described above, the period during which the special symbol is stopped and displayed (symbol confirmation period) is also the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed. In addition, the length of the symbol determination period is different depending on the symbol type based on the lottery result of the special symbol.

With this configuration, the game period of the latent state game (RUSH game) can be set by adding (combining) the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the symbol confirmation period, so that the latent state can be set. It is possible to set a plurality of patterns for the game period of the game (RUSH game) with a small amount of data.

Further, even in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) during the latent state game (RUSH game), a different symbol confirmation period is set according to the lottery result, so that it is set. Depending on the symbol determination period, the number of lottery of the special figure 2 executed during the predetermined latent state game (RUSH game) period (variable display time of the special figure 1) can be made different.

That is, in the lottery of the first special symbol that sets the game period of the latent state game (RUSH game), it is desired that a longer symbol confirmation period is set, and the latent state game (RUSH game). In the second special symbol lottery that is repeatedly executed during the game, it is a game that requires a shorter symbol determination period to be set, and the novelty is that different lottery results are desired depending on the special symbol type that is the target of the lottery. It is possible to provide a player with a certain playability.

Further, in the second embodiment, a process for shifting the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state (subtraction process of the time reduction counter 203f) is executed at the start of the change of the special symbol, and the high-probability state of the special symbol is executed. Is configured to be executed at the end of the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol (subtraction process of the probability variation counter 203aa) for shifting to the low probability state, and the high probability state of the special symbol is set. When the number of fluctuations (lottery) of the special symbol reaches the predetermined number of times (50 times), the high probability state of the special symbol is shifted to the low probability state, and the special symbol is set in the high probability state. When the number of fluctuations (number of lottery) of the symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (50 times), the high-probability state of the normal symbol can be changed to the low-probability state.

That is, when the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set and the number of fluctuations (lottery count) of the special symbol reaches 50 times, the fluctuation (50th variation). ) Is started, the gaming state shifts to the latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), and the timing when the fluctuation (50th fluctuation) ends (end of symbol confirmation period). At times), the gaming state can be changed to the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol).

With this configuration, even if the jackpot is not won, the latent state can be set only for a predetermined specific period (50th fluctuation period (including the symbol confirmation period)). , It is possible to make it easier for the player to experience the latent state game (RUSH game).

First, the special symbol variation process 2 (S154) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 97. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation processing 2 (S154). The special symbol variation process 2 (S154) replaces the first special symbol variation stop process (S207) in that the processes of S251 and S252 are added to the special symbol variation process (S104) in the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263) is executed instead of the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257) and the second special symbol variation stop process (S213).

In the special symbol variation processing 2 (S154), when it is determined in the processing of S204 that the value of the special diagram 1 variation time counter 203m is 0 (S204: No), the special symbol 1 symbol determination flag 203ab is turned on. It is determined whether it is set (S251). When it is determined that the special figure 1 symbol determination flag 203ab is set to ON (S251: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257) is executed, and the process proceeds to S209. The details of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S257) will be described later with reference to FIG. 99. On the other hand, in the process of S251, when it is determined that the special figure 1 symbol determination flag 203ab is set to off (S251: No), the first special symbol change start process (S208) is executed, and S209 is performed. Move to processing.

When it is determined in the above-mentioned processing of S206 that the value of the fluctuation time counter 203m in FIG. 1 is not 0 (greater than 0) (S206: No), or when the processing of S208 and S257 is executed, the special feature is next. FIG. 2 It is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time counter 203n is larger than 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is not larger than 0 (0) (S209: No), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 symbol fixing flag 203ac is set to ON. (S252).

In the process of S252, when it is determined that the special figure 2 symbol determination flag 203ac is not set to ON (S252: No), that is, by the process of S209 and S252, the present is the second special symbol (special figure 2). If it is determined that neither the variation display nor the symbol confirmation period is in effect, the second special symbol variation start process is executed in order to newly start the variation of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) (S210), and then the book. End the process. Since the processing content of the second special symbol change start processing (S210) is the same as that of the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, in the process of S252, when it is determined that the special figure 2 symbol fixing flag 203ac is set to ON (S252: Yes), that is, the present is during the symbol fixing period of the second special symbol (special figure 2). If it is determined that the above is the case, the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S263) is executed, and this process is terminated. The details of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S263) will be described later with reference to FIG. 103.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S356) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S356). In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S356), the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is larger than 0 in place of the process of S402 with respect to the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) in the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the process (S451) for determining whether or not the product is executed is executed.

That is, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, when the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the high probability state of the special symbol is continued until the jackpot of the special symbol is won. A probability variation flag 203g was used to indicate that the state is in a high probability state, but in the second embodiment, as a condition for ending the high probability state of the special symbol, a jackpot winning of the special symbol (first end condition) is used. In addition, it has a second end condition that is satisfied when the number of fluctuations (number of lottery) of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times). Therefore, the probability variation counter 203aa is used to measure the number of fluctuations (number of lottery) of the special symbol during the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set. This probability variation counter 203aa is for measuring the number of fluctuations (number of lottery) of the special symbol until the above-mentioned second end condition is satisfied, and the value is updated based on the execution of the special symbol lottery. It is configured to be.

Even if the configuration is other than the present embodiment, it may be any configuration as long as it can determine whether or not the above-mentioned second end condition is satisfied. For example, the probability variation flag 203 g used in the first embodiment and the second embodiment are used. The probability variation counter 203aa used in the embodiment may be used, or a variation count counter for always measuring the variation count (lottery count) of the special symbol regardless of the gaming state is provided, and the setting status of the probability variation flag 203g and the setting status of the probability variation flag 203g are provided. It may be configured to determine the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the probabilistic state based on the number of updates of the fluctuation count counter.

Further, in the second embodiment, the number of changes of the special symbol, that is, the number of changes of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the number of changes of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are added to the total number of times. The end condition (second end condition) for ending the probabilistic state is set, but it is not limited to this, and only the number of changes (number of lottery) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is measured. FIG. 1 A fluctuation count counter and a special figure 2 fluctuation counter that measures only the fluctuation count (lottery count) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are provided, and the fluctuation count (lottery count) of each special symbol is provided. It may be configured to set each end condition (end condition for ending the probability change state).

Further, in the second embodiment, as the end condition for ending the high probability state (for example, the probabilistic state) of the special symbol, in addition to the first end condition based on the jackpot winning of the special symbol, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol The second end condition is set based on (number of lottery times), but other end conditions may be set. For example, the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific lottery result other than the big hit (for example, a small hit). A third end condition that is satisfied when the number of times that the number of times has reached a predetermined number of times may be set. Further, the third end condition may be set for the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol, respectively.

In addition, a timekeeping counter is provided to measure the time when the high probability state of the special symbol is set, and the fourth end condition that is satisfied when the timekeeping counter clocks the predetermined time and the high probability state of the special symbol are set. A fifth end condition that can be established based on the lottery result of the ordinary symbol executed in the state of being executed and the number of lottery may be provided.

Further, when any of the plurality of termination conditions described above is satisfied, the timing for shifting the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state is set to a timing other than the timing used in the second embodiment. It is also good, for example, immediately before starting the lottery of the special symbol, immediately after the lottery of the special symbol is executed, the timing of starting the fluctuation of the special symbol, or the predetermined time after the fluctuation of the special symbol is started (for example,). The timing when 5 seconds have passed, the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol has stopped, the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second) has elapsed since the special symbol was stopped and displayed, and the stop display period of the special symbol (design confirmed). It may be configured to shift at any timing of the end timing of the period).

By providing a plurality of end conditions for ending the high-probability state of the special symbol and a timing for ending the high-probability state of the special symbol when the end condition is satisfied, it is special for the player. Since it is possible to make it difficult to understand how long the high-probability state of the symbol will continue and at what timing (at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, at the stop of fluctuation, at the end of the symbol confirmation period), the player is nervous. It is possible to play a game while giving a feeling.

Since the other processes of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S356) are the same as those of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257), which is one of the processes in the special symbol variation process 2 (S154) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the second embodiment. Will be explained. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S257). The first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257) is a process (S851 to S858) executed during the symbol determination period of the special symbol with respect to the first special symbol variation stop process (S207) in the above-described first embodiment. , S860) is different from the point that the content of the reset process when the first special symbol (special figure 1) won the jackpot is stopped and displayed is different. Since other processes are the same as the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S207), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, returning to FIG. 97, the conditions under which the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S257 in FIG. 99) is executed will be described. In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S257 in FIG. 99), a process of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol, a process of setting a period for stopping and displaying the special symbol (symbol confirmation period), and a process of setting the set symbol confirmation. The process of measuring the period and various execution processes corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol after the symbol determination period has elapsed are configured to be executed.

Therefore, in the process of S206 of FIG. 97, that is, the timing of stopping the change of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the process of determining whether or not it is the timing to end the change of the first special symbol (special figure 1). (The value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is 0) (S206: Yes in FIG. 97), and the processing of S251, that is, the present is the first special symbol (special figure 1). When it is determined that the stop display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is being performed (the special figure 1 symbol confirmation flag 203ab is set to on) in the process of determining whether or not the stop display is in progress. (S251: Yes in FIG. 97) is executed.

Returning to FIG. 99, the explanation will be continued. In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S257), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 1 symbol determination flag 203ab is set to ON (S851). Here, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 has elapsed and the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257) is executed in order to stop and display the special figure 1, that is, in the process of S206 of FIG. 97. When the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257) is executed because the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is determined to be 0, the special figure 1 symbol confirmation flag 203ab is set to ON. Therefore, in the process of S851, it is determined that the special figure 1 symbol confirmation flag 203ab is not set on (set to off) (S851: No), and the first special symbol confirmation period setting process is executed. (S852).

In the first special symbol confirmation period setting process (S852), the process is executed to set the period (symbol confirmation period) for stopping and displaying the special symbol. Here, with reference to FIG. 100, the first special symbol determination period setting process, which is one of the processes in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. (S852) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol determination period setting process (S852). In the first special symbol confirmation period setting process (S852), the process of setting the confirmation time (symbol confirmation period) and setting the command to be transmitted to the first symbol display device 37, and the current first special symbol (special symbol). When the lottery result of 1) is a big hit, the process for shifting the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state is executed.

In the second embodiment, as a condition for shifting the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state (time-saving end condition), when the jackpot of the special symbol is won (first time-saving end condition), the normal symbol is used. When the number of fluctuations (lottery number) of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) in the state where the high probability state of is continuously set (second time reduction end condition), two time reduction ends. If the condition is satisfied and the above-mentioned first time reduction end condition is satisfied, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (the start timing of the symbol confirmation period), and the second When the two-time reduction end condition is satisfied, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol is started (the timing when the lottery of the special symbol is executed). ..

In this way, multiple conditions (time-saving end conditions) that trigger the transition of the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state are provided, and the transition timing to the low-probability state is different depending on the established time-saving end condition. By configuring to, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set at what timing for the player playing the game in the game state (time saving state, probability change state) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict whether or not the game will shift to the game state (normal state, latent state), it is possible to always pay attention to the game content and provide a game that does not get tired.

In the second embodiment, the state of the normal symbol is changed according to the above-mentioned contents, but other configurations may be used, for example, immediately before starting the lottery of the special symbol or the special symbol. Immediately after the lottery is executed, the timing to start the fluctuation of the special symbol, the timing to elapse a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, the timing to stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, etc. , It is configured to shift at any timing of the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second) has elapsed from the stop display of the special symbol or the end timing of the stop display period (symbol confirmation period) of the special symbol. May be.

In the first special symbol confirmation period setting process (S852), first, a value indicating the confirmation time (symbol confirmation time) corresponding to the stopped symbol is set in the special figure 1 confirmation time counter 203ad (S2801). In the second embodiment, the fixed time corresponds to each type selected in various tables (big hit type selection 2 table 202aa, small hit type selection 2 table 202ab, loss type selection table 202ad) used in the special symbol lottery. Since (symbol confirmation period) is specified, a value indicating the confirmation time (symbol confirmation period) corresponding to the type stopped and displayed this time is set in the special figure 1 confirmation time counter 203ad. Specifically, for example, if the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot and the jackpot type selected using the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa (see FIG. 92) is the jackpot A3, it is confirmed. Since 150 seconds is specified as the time (design confirmation period), a value indicating 150 seconds is set in the special figure 1 confirmation time counter 203ad.

Next, the special figure 1 symbol determination flag 203ab is set to on (S2802), and it is determined whether the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to on (S2803). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S2803: Yes), that is, it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol for which the confirmation time (symbol confirmation time) is set is a jackpot. If so, the value of the time saving counter 203f is reset in order to shift the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state (S2804). On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is not set to ON (S2803: No), the processing of S2804 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2805. As a result, only when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the low probability state of the normal symbol can be set at the timing of stopping and displaying the special symbol.

In addition, for example, when the jackpot of the special symbol is won (first time reduction end condition), the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (number of lottery) is a predetermined number of times (the number of lottery) in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is continuously set. For example, when the time (50 times) is reached (second time reduction end condition) and when the two time reduction end conditions are satisfied based on the same special symbol lottery, it is determined whether or not the first time reduction end condition is satisfied. Since the process of determining whether or not the second time-saving end condition is satisfied is prioritized over the process of performing, the special symbol jackpot is won when setting the symbol determination period of the special symbol. Even in this case, the processing of S2804 will be skipped.

After executing the process of S2803 or S2804, it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is larger than 0 in the process of S2805 (S2805). When it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203aa is larger than 0 (S2805: Yes), a state command indicating the latent probability state is set (S2806), and the process proceeds to S2808. On the other hand, in the process of S2805, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is 0 (S2805: No), a state command indicating a normal state is set (S2807), and the process proceeds to the process of S2808. After executing the process of S2806 or S2807, the special figure 1 confirmation command is set (S2808). Next, the fluctuation of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S2809), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 99, the explanation will be continued. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 symbol fixing flag 203ab is set to ON in the processing of S851 (S8511: Yes), that is, the present is during the symbol fixing period of the first special symbol (special figure 1). If it is determined that there is, the process of S852 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S853. In the special symbol variation process 2 (see S154 in FIG. 97), it is determined that the special symbol 1 symbol determination flag 203ab is set to ON (S251: Yes in FIG. 97), and the first special symbol variation stop process 2 is performed. When (see S257 in FIG. 99) is executed, it is determined that the special figure 1 symbol determination in progress flag 203ab is set to ON in the process of S851.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad is 0 (S853). That is, it is determined whether or not the present is the timing when the symbol determination period of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) has elapsed. Here, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 confirmation time counter 203ad is not 0 (1 or more), that is, it is determined that the present is in the symbol confirmation period of the first special symbol (special figure 1). In the case (S853: No), the process during the fixed time (S860) is executed, and the present process is terminated. This fixed time processing (S860) executes a process of updating the elapsed time of the symbol fixed period, or updates the elapsed time of the symbol fixed period that has been temporarily stopped based on the execution of the small hit game. The process for resuming the process is executed, and the detailed contents thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 101.

On the other hand, in the process of S853, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad is 0 (S853: Yes), that is, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the fixed time (design fixed period). , Special figure 1 symbol fixing flag 203ab is set to off (S854). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is larger than 0 (S855). When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is larger than 0 (S855: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is subtracted by 1 (S856). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is 0 (S855: No), the processing of S856 is skipped and the process proceeds to S857. In the process of S857, a state command corresponding to the values of the time saving counter 203f and the probability variation counter 203aa is set (S857).

By executing the process of S856 described above, in the present embodiment, after the stop display period of the special symbol has elapsed (after the symbol determination period has elapsed), the process of subtracting the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is executed and subtracted. When the value of the subsequent probability variation counter 203aa becomes 0, the high probability state of the special symbol is configured to shift to the low probability state. As a result, the probability variation end condition (condition for shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state) that is satisfied when the number of fluctuations (lottery number) of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times) is satisfied. In this case, the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the stop display period of the special symbol has elapsed, so that the special symbol is high during the variable display period of the target special symbol and during the symbol confirmation period. It can be a stochastic state. Therefore, for example, even if the above-mentioned probability change end condition is satisfied due to the change (lottery) of the first special symbol, the probability state of the special symbol is high during the change display period of the first special symbol and the symbol confirmation period. The second special symbol change (lottery) can be executed in the state where is set.

To specifically explain the content of the state command set in the process of S857 described above, when the value of the time saving counter 203f is larger than 0 (when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set), the probability variation counter When the value of 203aa is larger than 0, a state command indicating that the gaming state is in the probabilistic state is set, and when the value of the probabilistic counter 203aa is 0, it indicates that the gaming state is in the time saving state. The status command is set. Further, when the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 (when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set) and the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is larger than 0, the gaming state is the latent state. When the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is 0, the state command indicating that the gaming state is the normal state is set.

Further, in the process of S857, when the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is larger than 0 (1 or more), the value of the probability variation counter 203aa, that is, the residual probability variation count command is set as information indicating the residual probability variation count. The state command and the residual probability variation number command set in the process of S857 are output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (see S2201 of FIG. 52) of the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 52). Will be done. The voice lamp control device 113 receives various commands output from the main control device 110, and executes a process corresponding to the command received in the command determination process 2 (see S4162 in FIG. 106). As a result, the current gaming situation can be appropriately determined on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when the first time saving end condition (condition that is satisfied when a big hit is won) is satisfied, the high probability state of the normal symbol is low-probability at the stop display timing of the special symbol. If the second time reduction end condition (condition that is satisfied according to the number of changes in the special symbol (number of lottery)) is satisfied after shifting to the state, the high probability state of the normal symbol is lowered at the start timing of the change of the special symbol. When the probability state is entered and the probability change end condition (the first probability change end condition that is satisfied when a big hit is won, the second probability change end condition that is satisfied according to the number of changes of the special symbol (lottery number)) is satisfied. Is configured to shift the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state at the end timing of the stop display period (symbol confirmation period) of the special symbol.

With this configuration, the period in which the latent state that is advantageous to the player as the game state is set can be different depending on the time-saving end condition that is established. As a result of the lottery of special symbols, it is possible not only to expect a big hit or not, but also to expect that the length of the period in which an advantageous gaming state is set becomes longer.

Next, the special figure 1 fixed period end command is set (S858), and the same processing as the processing of S801 to S805 in the above-described first embodiment is executed. Next, the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h and the probability variation counter 203aa are reset (S859), the jackpot middle flag 203o is set to ON (S807), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101, a process during a fixed time (S257 in FIG. 99), which is a process in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257 in FIG. 99) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the second embodiment ( S860) will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the contents of the processing (S860) during the fixed time.

In the process during the fixed time (S860), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S2901). This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to be turned on when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol and the lottery result is stopped and displayed (see S1602 in FIG. 46). Then, during the period in which the small hit game is being executed, the first special symbol variation stop process 2 is not executed in the process of S201 of the special symbol variation process 2 (see S154 of FIG. 97). That is, in the process of S2901 of the process during the fixed time (see S860 of FIG. 101), it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON only after the small hit game is completed. Only when the variation processing 2 (see S154 in FIG. 97) is executed.

Therefore, if it is determined in the processing of S2901 that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S2901: Yes), the special figure 1 restart command is set (S2902), and the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is set. Set 203v to off (S2903) and shift to S2904. That is, in the process of S2901 when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S2901: Yes), the small hit game is executed because the small hit game is finished. The process of S2902 and S2903 is executed in order to restart the update process of the symbol fixing period that has been temporarily stopped.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2901 that the temporary stop flag 203v in FIG. 1 is not set to on (set to off) (S2901: No), the processing of S2902 and S2903 is skipped and S2904 is performed. Move to the processing of.

In the process of S2904, the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad is decremented by 1 and updated (S2904), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S2905), and the present process is terminated.

Next, the second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S953) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 102. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S953). In the second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S953), the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is changed to the process of S1002 with respect to the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905 in FIG. 40) in the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the process (S1051) for determining whether the value is larger than 0 is executed. Since other processes are the same as the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S903), detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, since the content of the process executed in S1051 described above is the same as the content executed in S451 of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98) described above, the details thereof are detailed. The explanation is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S263), which is one of the processes in the special symbol variation process 2 (S154) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. Will be explained. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S263). The second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263) adds the processes of S1551 to S1563 to the second special symbol variation stop process (see S213 in FIG. 45) in the first embodiment described above, and S1506. The difference is that the process of S1560 is provided instead of the process of S1509 and the process of S1509 and S1510 is deleted. Since other processes are the same as the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S213 in FIG. 45), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S263), the symbol determination period elapses after the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, similarly to the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99) described above. The process up to this is executed, and the difference is that the control target is changed from the first special symbol (special figure 1) to the second special symbol (special figure 2). Of the various processes executed in the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263), the control target is simply the various processes of the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99) described above. The detailed description will be omitted for the processing in which the symbol types are different.

In the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S263), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 2 symbol determination flag 203ac is set to ON (S1551). If it is determined that the special figure 2 symbol determination flag 203ac is set to ON (S1551: Yes), the processing of S1552 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1553. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1551 that the special figure 2 symbol fixing flag 203ac is set to off (S1551: No), the second special symbol fixing period setting process (S1552) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 104, the second special symbol which is one of the processes in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see S263 in FIG. 103) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the second embodiment. The fixed period setting process (S1552) will be described. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol determination period setting process (S1552). In the second special symbol fixing period setting process (S1552), the symbol type targeted for the process executed in the above-mentioned first special symbol fixing period setting process (see S852 in FIG. 100) is set to the first special symbol. To the second special symbol, the command to be set is the special symbol 2 confirmation command corresponding to the second special symbol, and the symbol type to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the second special symbol. Only the differences are made, and the other processing contents are the same. Therefore, the content of the first special symbol determination period setting process (see S852 in FIG. 100) described above will be referred to, and a detailed description of this process will be omitted.

Returning to FIG. 103, the description will be continued. After executing the process of S1551 or S1552, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae is 0 (S1553), and the value of the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae is not 0 (that is,). When it is determined (S1553: No), the value of the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae is updated (S1562), and the display of the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S1563). ), End this process.

The process of S1563 updates the display of the second special symbol that has already been stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, the symbol is lit and displayed (including a display that blinks at a high speed to the extent that the player recognizes that the symbol is lit) in order to indicate that the special symbol is stopped by the first symbol display device 37. Therefore, in the process of S1563, an instruction for lighting the second special symbol is output to the first symbol display device 37.

In the case of using the configuration in which the special symbol is continuously lit during the symbol determination period as in the present embodiment, for example, the second special symbol determination period setting process (see S1552 in FIG. 104). In the process of S3009, an instruction for stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol (stop display) is output, and at the same time, information indicating a period for stopping and displaying (design confirmation period) is also output, and a predetermined period (symbol confirmation) is output. During the period), the second special symbol may be configured to be lit and displayed in advance. With this configuration, it is not necessary to execute the process for updating the display content of the first symbol display device 37 each time in the process executed in a short cycle, so that the processing load of the main control device 110 Can be reduced.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae is 0 (S1553: Yes), the special figure 2 symbol fixing flag 203ac is set to off (S1554). Next, when it is determined whether the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to on (S1555) and when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to off (S1555: No), the probability variation counter 203aa It is determined whether or not the value of is greater than 0 (S1556).

When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is larger than 0 (S1556: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is subtracted by 1 (S1557), and the process proceeds to S1558. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1555 that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S1555: Yes), or when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is 0 in the processing of S1556. (S1556: No) skips the process of S1557 and shifts to the process of S1558.

In the process of S1558, a state command corresponding to the values of the time reduction counter 203f and the probability change counter 203aa is set (S1558), then the special figure 2 confirmation period end command is set (S1559), and then the first embodiment described above is performed. The same processing of S1501 to S1505 as above is executed. Here, in the process of S1501, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is not set to on (set to off) (S1501: No), the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 2 (S1561) is determined. ) Is executed to end this process.

Further, when the processing of S1505 is completed, next, the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to off, the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is reset (S1560), and the same processing of S1507 as that of the first embodiment described above is executed. Then, this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 105, the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 2 (S) which is one of the processes in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S263) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment ( S1561) will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 2 (S1561). The special figure 2 disengagement stop process 2 (S1561) in the second embodiment is different from the special figure 2 disengagement stop process (S1508) in the first embodiment in that the processes S1607 to S1610 are not executed. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 111. The control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment is a command determination process 2 instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 59) with respect to the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment described above. (See FIG. 106), the various counter update processes 2 (see FIG. 111) are executed instead of the various counter update processes (see FIG. 72), and the other processes are the same. Specifically, the processing executed when various commands output by changing the control content executed by the main control device 110 from the first embodiment and the various additions from the second embodiment are performed. A process to update the value of the counter has been added.

First, the command determination process 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 106. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 2 (S4162). The command determination process 2 (S4162) differs from the command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 60) in the above-described first embodiment in that the processes S4251 to S4255 are added. Since other processes are the same as the command determination process (S4112) in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the command determination process 2 (S4162) is executed, first, the same processes of S4201 to S4216 as the command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 60) in the first embodiment described above are executed. Then, in the process of S4215, when it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S4215: No), then it is determined whether or not the remaining number-related command has been received (S4251). ).

Here, as the command related to the remaining number of times, the remaining time reduction command (set by the process of S603 in FIG. 36) indicating the remaining number of times (the number of remaining fluctuations of the special symbol) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is continuously set is set. There is a residual probability variation number command (command set by the process of S857 in FIG. 99) indicating the remaining number of times (the number of remaining fluctuations of the special symbol) in which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set. If it is determined that the command related to the remaining number of times has been received (S4251: Yes), the remaining number of times update process 2 (S4252) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 107, the remaining number update process 2 (S4252), which is one process in the command determination process 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described. .. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the contents of the remaining number update process 2 (S4252). The remaining number update process 2 (S4252) is different in that the processes S4851 to S4852 are added to the remaining number update process (S4218) in the first embodiment described above. Specifically, it differs in that a process for transmitting a command for displaying the residual probability variation number to the display control device 114 is added.

In the remaining number update process 2 (S4252), first, it is determined whether or not the remaining time reduction command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4801). When it is determined that the remaining time reduction command has been received (S4801: Yes), the display remaining time reduction command corresponding to the command is set (S4802). On the other hand, if it is determined that the command for the number of remaining time reductions has not been received (S4801: No), the process of S4802 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S4851. Next, it is determined whether or not the residual probability variation number command has been received (S4851). When it is determined that the residual probability variation count command has been received (S4851: Yes), the display residual probability variation count command corresponding to the command is set (S4852), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the residual probability variation number command has not been received (S4851: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Returning to FIG. 106, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4251 that the remaining number-related command has not been received (S4251: No), it is determined whether or not the temporary stop-related command has been received (S4219). Here, the temporary stop-related command includes the special figure 1 temporary stop command (see S1603 in FIG. 46) that is set when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v for temporarily stopping the first special symbol is set to ON. And the variable display of the first special symbol that has been temporarily stopped, or the special figure 1 restart command (see S2902 in FIG. 101) that is set when the stop display is restarted. If it is determined that the temporary stop-related command has been received (S4219: Yes), the temporary stop-related process 2 (S4253) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 108, a temporary stop-related process 2 (S4253), which is one process in the command determination process 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described. .. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the contents of the temporary stop-related process 2 (S4253). The temporary stop-related process 2 (S4253) is different from the temporary stop-related process (S4203) in the first embodiment described above in that a process for calculating the remaining fixed time is added.

In this temporary stop-related process 2 (S4253), when the variation display of the first special symbol or the elapsed time of the stop display is temporarily interrupted (temporary stop), the temporarily stopped first special symbol is displayed. Processing is performed for the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variable display mode or the effect mode corresponding to the stop display mode. In the temporary stop-related process 2 (S4253), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4951). If it is determined that the temporary stop command has not been received (S4951: No), the restart process (S4952) is executed and the present process is terminated. The details of the restart process (S4952) will be described later with reference to FIG. 109. On the other hand, in the process of S4951, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop command has been received (S4951: Yes), that is, the variation display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is performed with the execution of the small hit game, or If it is determined that it is the timing to temporarily stop the stop display, then it is determined whether the confirmation flag 223ad is set to ON (S4953). Here, when it is determined that the confirmation flag 223ad is set to ON (S4953: Yes), the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (during the symbol confirmation period), so that the set symbol confirmation time is set. The remaining time of (the symbol confirmation time of the first special symbol) is calculated (S4954), and the process proceeds to S4955.

In the process of S4954, the remaining time of the set symbol confirmation time is calculated by reading the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa, that is, the value indicating the remaining time of the symbol confirmation time of the first special symbol. Next, it is determined whether the remaining time of the symbol determination time calculated in the process of S4954 is less than 2 seconds (S4955). If it is determined that the remaining time is less than 2 seconds (S4955: Yes), a period A indicating that the remaining fixed time is short is set in the remaining fixed time information storage area 223ac (S4956), and the process of S4952 is executed. Then, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4955, when it is determined that the remaining time is not less than 2 seconds (2 seconds or more) (S4955: No), then the remaining time is 2 seconds or more and less than 60 seconds. (S4957). In the process of S4957, when it is determined that the remaining time is 2 seconds or more and less than 60 seconds (S4957: Yes), it is determined that the remaining fixed time information storage area 223ac has a normal remaining fixed time. The indicated period B is set (S4958), the process of S4952 is executed, and the present process is terminated.

When it is determined in the process of S4957 that the remaining time is not less than 60 seconds (60 seconds or more) (S4957: No), it indicates that the remaining confirmation time is long in the remaining confirmation time information storage area 223ac. The period C is set (S4959), the process of S4952 is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4953, when it is determined that the confirmation flag 223ad is set to off (S4953: No), that is, when it is determined that the present is in the variable display period of the first special symbol, The process for calculating the remaining variation time of the first special symbol (see S4903 to S4908) executed in the temporary stop-related process of the first embodiment described above (see S4220 in FIG. 67) is executed, and the process of S4952 is executed. Move to. Since the process for calculating the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol (see S4903 to S4908) is the same as that of the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 109, a restart process (S4952), which is a process in the temporary stop-related process 2 (S4253) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the contents of the restart process (S4952).

In the second embodiment, in addition to the variable display of the first special symbol (during the variable display period), the second special symbol can be changed (lottery) even during the stop display (during the symbol confirmation period). Since it is configured, when the small hit game is executed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol, the stop display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped (subtraction of the symbol confirmation period is temporarily suspended). It is configured as follows. Further, at the timing when the small hit game is completed, the stop display of the first special symbol is restarted (the subtraction of the symbol confirmation period is restarted). Therefore, in the second embodiment, the situation of the first special symbol when the variable display or the stop display of the first special symbol is restarted is determined, and the effect mode after the restart is set based on the determination result. It is configured to do.

In the restart process (S4952), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 restart command has been received (S5001). If it is determined that the special figure 1 restart command has not been received (S5001: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 restart command has been received (S5001: Yes), it is determined whether or not the confirmation flag 223ad is set to ON (S5051). When it is determined that the confirmation flag 223ad is set to ON (S5051: Yes), that is, when the timing of receiving the special figure 1 restart command is during the stop display of the first special symbol, the remaining confirmation Based on the reading (S5052) of the remaining fixed time information stored in the time information storage area 223ac, the read remaining fixed time information and the additional effect counter 223i, the additional effect type is determined from the additional effect selection 2 table 222aa (). S5053), an additional display command corresponding to the additional effect type determined in the process of S5053 is set (S5054), and the information set in the remaining fixed time information storage area 223ac is cleared (S5055). Then, the fixing flag 223ad is set to off (S5056), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5051, when it is determined that the confirmation flag 223ad is set to off (S5051: No), that is, the timing at which the special figure 1 restart command is received is in the variation display of the first special symbol. In some cases, the same processing of S5002 to S5005 as the fluctuation resumption processing of the first embodiment described above (S4902 in FIG. 68) is executed, and this processing is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 106, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4219 that the temporary stop-related command has not been received (S4219: No), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination-related command has been received (S4254). If it is determined that the symbol confirmation-related command has been received (S4254: Yes), the symbol confirmation-related process (S4255) is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the symbol confirmation related command has not been received (S4254: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S4221), and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 110, a symbol determination-related process (S4255), which is one process in the command determination process 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the contents of the symbol determination related process (S4255).

In the symbol confirmation-related processing (S4255), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 confirmation command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S5071). When it is determined that the special figure 1 confirmation command has been received (S5071: Yes), the display special figure 1 confirmation command corresponding to the received command is set (S5072). Next, the value corresponding to the received command is set in the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa (S5073), and the process proceeds to S5074. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5071 that the special figure 1 confirmation command has not been received (S5071: No), the processes of S5072 and S5073 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S5074.

In the process of S5074, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received (S5074). When it is determined that the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received (S5074: Yes), the display special figure 2 confirmation command corresponding to the received command is set (S5075), and the value corresponding to the received command is specified. 2 Set to the confirmation counter 223ab (S5076), set the confirmation flag 223ad to ON (S5077), and end this process. On the other hand, in the process of S5074, if it is determined that the special figure 2 confirmation command has not been received (S5074: No), the process of S5075 and S5076 is skipped as it is, the process of S5077 is executed, and this process is terminated. do.

Next, various counter update processes 2 (S4161) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 111. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the contents of various counter update processes 2 (S4161).

In the various counter update processes 2 (S4161), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is larger than 0 (S5451). When it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is larger than 0 (S5451: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is subtracted by 1 (S5452). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is 0 (S5451: No), the processing of S5452 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S5453. In the process of S5453, it is determined whether or not the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5453). When it is determined that the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5453: Yes), the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is subtracted by 1 (S5454), and the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa And the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is read out (S5455). Next, the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is subtracted from the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa read in the process of S5455 to calculate the remaining time (S5456). Next, the processes of S5407 and S5408 are executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5453, when it is determined that the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is 0 (S5453: No), the processes of S5454 to S5456 and S5407 are skipped, and the process of S5408 is executed. , End this process.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 135. The second embodiment described above is configured so that the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) fluctuate at the same time as in the first embodiment described above (so-called). , Simultaneous fluctuation type), so that a large number of small hit games (RUSH games) can be executed by executing the lottery (variation) of Special Figure 2 during the period when the latent state is set as the game state. Was configured in.

Furthermore, as a condition for setting the latent probability state (condition for enabling the RUSH game), the first probability change end that is established when a big hit is won in the lottery of Special Figure 1 in the state where the probability change state is set. A condition and a second probability change end condition that is satisfied when the number of changes (lottery number) of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (50 times) are set, and if the first probability change end condition is satisfied, a big hit is won. When the period (symbol confirmation period) in which the special symbol (special figure 1) indicating that the item has been stopped is stopped and displayed is in the latent state and the second probability change end condition is satisfied, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be in a latent state during the period (variable display period) and the symbol confirmation period.

In addition, the length of the symbol confirmation period is different depending on the lottery result of the special symbol, and the symbol confirmation period is set longer when the jackpot is won than when the jackpot is not won. It was configured as follows.

In addition, if a big hit is won in the lottery of one special symbol (special figure 1), an invalid lottery that does not win the big hit in the lottery of the other symbol (special figure 2) will be executed. It was configured so that the value related to the condition for changing the game state was not updated by this invalid lottery. Specifically, during the period when the jackpot is won in the lottery of special figure 1 (during the variable display period of the special symbol winning the jackpot and during the symbol confirmation period), the lottery of special figure 2 is executed. Even if this is done, the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is configured so as not to be updated (subtracted).

In the second embodiment configured in this way, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the special figure 1 in the state where the probability variation state is set, the period during which the jackpot game for the jackpot winning is executed (variable display). Until the period (period, symbol confirmation period) ends, the value of the probability change counter 203aa will not be updated (subtracted) no matter how many times the fluctuation (lottery) of special figure 2 is executed, so special figure 2 can be relieved. Was able to carry out the fluctuations of.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the types of probability change end conditions are increased as compared with the above-mentioned second embodiment, and the period in which the latent probability state is set is longer than that of the above-mentioned second embodiment. is doing. Specifically, as the probability change end condition, the probability change end condition (third probability change end condition) is satisfied when a small hit is won in the special figure 1 in the state where the probability change state is set, and the third probability change end condition is satisfied. When the probability change end condition is satisfied, the game state is configured to shift from the probability change state to the latent state when the small hit game is started.

Further, the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set (value of the probability variation counter 203aa) and the period in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (value of the time reduction counter 203f) are made the same (for example, "4". ”), When the probability change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set and the jackpot is not won, the game state shifts from the probability change state to the normal state. It is configured in.

That is, in the third embodiment, while the probabilistic state (high probability state for both special symbol and normal symbol) is set, a small hit is won by the lottery of special figure 1, and the normal symbol is moved to the low probability state. By shifting, the period from the start timing of the small hit game to the setting of the low probability state of the special symbol can be set as the latent state.

With this configuration, it is possible to change the period during which the latent state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is continuously set according to the timing of winning a small hit in the lottery of Special Figure 1. .. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more interested in the lottery result of the special symbol, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not get tired of.

Further, in the third embodiment, when a big hit is won in the final variation in which the probability variation state ends, a variation pattern having a long variation time is easily selected. As a result, even if the final fluctuation of the probabilistic state is reached without winning a small hit, the latent probable state can be set for a long time, so that the player can play the game with expectations until the end. Can be made.

Here, with reference to FIG. 112, the types of benefits given based on the game content of the special figure 1 in the probabilistic state in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 112 is a schematic diagram summarizing the relationship between the game content and the grant privilege of the special figure 1 game after the probability change state is set. As shown in FIG. 112, in the present embodiment, the probability change state is set in a predetermined period (4 fluctuations of the special symbol) after the end of the jackpot, and the number of fluctuations during the probability change state (after the jackpot). The content of the privilege given to the player is made different according to the number of changes in the special figure) and the lottery result of the special figure.

Specifically, in the first and second special figure 1 fluctuations (special figure 1 lottery) after the probability change state is set, if the lottery result (lottery result of special figure 1) is a big hit, there are many players. In addition to the jackpot game in which the prize ball can be obtained, the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating that the special figure 1 is a jackpot (symbol confirmation period). ) Is set. In addition, when the lottery result (lottery result of special figure 1) is a small hit, the small hit game is executed based on the lottery result of special figure 1 as the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed. After that, it is stipulated that the period (symbol confirmation period) until the number of special symbol changes after the big hit reaches 4 times is set.

That is, when a small hit is won in the first special figure 1 lottery after the end of the big hit, the timing at which the small hit game is started (the timing at which the first special symbol change is stopped and the small hit game is executed). ) To the end of the fourth special figure change after the end of the jackpot, the latent state game (RUSH game) is set. Therefore, as the period in which the latent state (RUSH state) is set, the longest period can be set, which is the "ultra-long". In addition, if the lottery result (lottery result of special figure 1) is out of the first and second special figure 1 fluctuation (special figure 1 lottery) after the probability change state is set, no privilege is given to the player. Is not given.

In the third special figure 1 fluctuation (special figure 1 lottery) after the probability change state is set, the latent probability state is set under the same conditions as the first and second times after the probability change state is set as described above. It is composed. Here, if the small hit is won, in addition to the small hit game, the period until the end of the fourth special figure change is set as the latent state, so after the above-mentioned probability change state is set. Compared to the case where a small hit is won in the 1st and 2nd special figure 1 fluctuation (special figure 1 lottery), the period in which the latent state is set is shorter.

Further, in the third embodiment, as the number of special figure 1 fluctuations (special figure 1 lottery) after the probabilistic change state is set increases during the probabilistic change state, the fluctuation having a longer fluctuation time when the jackpot is won. It is configured so that the pattern can be easily selected. Therefore, it is easier to lengthen the period in which the latent probability state is set as compared with the case where the jackpot is won in the first and second special figure 1 fluctuations (special figure 1 lottery) after the above-mentioned probability change state is set. be able to.

Next, in the fourth special figure change (special figure lottery) after the probability change state is set, that is, in the special figure final change in the probability change state, the special figure change is started regardless of the result of the special figure lottery. The period from to the end (until after the symbol confirmation period has elapsed) is set as the latent state. In the third embodiment, it is easy to set a long fluctuation time when a big hit is won in the final fluctuation of the special map in the probabilistic state (the fourth special map fluctuation after the probabilistic change state is set). The length of the period in which the latent state is set is "long".

If the jackpot is not won due to the final change of the special figure in the probable change state, the normal state is set after the symbol confirmation period elapses, and the fifth and subsequent special figure lottery is executed.

<Regarding the content of the staging display in the third embodiment>
In the third embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 112, the period in which the latent state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is set differs depending on the transition condition (probability change end condition) that is satisfied. In the probable change state, the possibility that the latent state is set and the suggestion effect (bingo game) for suggesting the timing when the latent state is set to the player are executed. It is composed.

Therefore, with reference to FIGS. 113 to 115, the display contents of the suggestion effect (bingo game) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment will be described. Among the elements displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the same elements as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 113 (a), the display contents of the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game in which the probability change state is set will be described. FIG. 113A is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display screen at the end of the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 113 (a), in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the special figure 1 display area Dm1 and the special figure 2 display area are the same as those in the second embodiment described above. Dm2 and a guide display area Dm3 are formed, and in addition, a special figure 1 hold number display area Dm4 showing the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 and a special figure 2 hold number display area Dm5 showing the number of hold balls in special figure 2. , Are formed.

FIG. 113A shows the end screen of the jackpot game executed based on the special figure 1 jackpot, and shows that the lottery result of the special figure 1 is a jackpot in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. The stop display mode “777” of the third symbol is displayed, and “−” indicating that the special figure 2 variation is not executed is displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2. Further, in the guidance display area Dm3, the characters "left-handed" are displayed to indicate that the jackpot game was performed in the left-handed game.

In the third embodiment, the game content (right-handed or left-handed) displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 during the jackpot game is the same as the game content at the time of the jackpot winning, as in the second embodiment described above. It is configured to be. That is, the state shown in FIG. 113 (a) is a big hit won during the left-handed game.

Further, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, a bingo card 820 used in a probabilistic state set after the end of the jackpot game is displayed. Here, the suggestion effect (bingo game) executed in the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, Bingo is used as a suggestion effect to suggest to the player whether or not the latent probability state is set or whether or not the jackpot is won during the period when the probability change state is set. The game is configured to run.

In this bingo game, a bingo card 820 (see FIG. 113 (a)) in which arbitrary numbers are arranged for nine squares (vertical 3 x horizontal 3) is displayed on the jackpot end screen (ending screen). , Numbers are announced based on the lottery of Special Figure 1 executed in the state where the probability change state is set, and the number is announced to the player based on the announced number and the arrangement of the numbers described on the Bingo card 820. An effect suggesting a game result (lottery result of special figure 1) is executed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 113 (b) to 115, display contents (effect contents) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during execution of the bingo game will be described. When the bingo game is started (when the special figure 1 fluctuation in the probability change state is started), the display shown in FIG. 113 (b) is executed. FIG. 113 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents displayed when the special figure 1 fluctuation (first time) is executed after the jackpot ends.

As shown in FIG. 113 (b), when the special figure 1 change (first time) is executed, a display mode indicating that the special figure 1 is changing is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. .. Then, "3" is displayed in the special figure 1 reserved number display area Dm4, and it is subtracted (updated) from the value ("4") shown in FIG. 113 (a) due to the fluctuation of the special figure 1. Shows.

Further, in the lower left area of the main display area Dm, the number "1" is displayed as the lottery result 821 of the bingo game based on the lottery result of this time (special figure 1 fluctuation (first time)), and the lower right area. Displays the remaining number display 822 indicating the remaining number "last 3" of the bingo game. Here, for example, an example of the effect in the case where the special figure 1 fluctuation (fourth time) in the probable change state is a big hit will be described with reference to FIG. 114.

FIG. 114 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the bingo game during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 fluctuation (third time) when the special figure 1 fluctuation (fourth time) in the probability change state is a big hit. , FIG. 114 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents during the change of the special figure 1 change (fourth time). In the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 112, in the final variation of the probabilistic state (special figure 1 variation (fourth time)), the latent state is set at the timing when the variation display of the special figure 1 is started. During the latent state, the latent state game (RUSH game) in which the lottery of the special figure 2 is executed by the right-handed game is executed.

Therefore, in order to have the player immediately perform a right-handed game immediately after the final change of the probability change state is executed (after the symbol confirmation period of the special figure 1 change (third time) has elapsed), the latent state is changed. The effect result (displaying two rows of bingo) for notifying that it is set is before the special figure 1 change (4th time) in which the latent state is set (during the special figure 1 change (3rd time)). It is configured to be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to set the latent probability state in a state in which the player fully understands that the latent probability state is set.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in the third embodiment, if the big hit or the small hit is not won in the lottery of the special figure 1 in the final change of the probable change state (when it is out of order), it is short. The fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time (1 second) is selected, and the effect result (bingo two-row alignment display) for notifying that the latent state is set in the bingo game is not displayed. .. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the notification to the player that the latent state is actually set for a short time, and to execute the failure effect of the bingo game. Further, when the latent state for a short period of time is set, the guide display area Dm3 does not display that the player is to perform the right-handed game, so that the annoyance to the game can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 114 (a), the description will be continued. In FIG. 114 (a), the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 fluctuation (third time) is performed, and the lottery result “1” of the special figure 1 fluctuation (first time) and the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation (second time) are performed. "8" is displayed on the left side of the main display area Dm as the past history 823, and "5" is displayed as the lottery result 821 this time. Then, in the Bingo card 820, the squares corresponding to "1", "8", and "5" displayed in this bingo game are changed to "cross marks", and two rows of lines are formed and displayed. ..

Further, "double bingo" is displayed as a situation display mode 824 indicating the current situation, and a comment of "super lucky" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In this way, by notifying the player that the bingo game was successful during the change before the special figure 1 change (4th time) that actually wins the jackpot, the player can be directed. It is possible to provide a period of successful satisfaction and to notify in advance that it is necessary to perform a right-handed game from the next fluctuation.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a comment notifying that the right-handed game is performed from the next fluctuation (a comment notifying that the right-handed game condition is satisfied (the condition for setting the latent state is satisfied)). "It's about to be a right-handed game" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, but the player is notified in advance of the timing when the latent state is set, that is, the timing when the right-handed game is performed. For example, the remaining period until the end of the special figure 1 fluctuation (third time) (the remaining period obtained by adding the remaining fluctuation display period of the special figure 1 fluctuation (third time) and the symbol fixing period) is calculated. A calculation means may be provided, and information based on the calculation result of the calculation means (information for indicating the residual fluctuation period of the special figure 1 variation (third time)) may be notified to the player.

In the third embodiment, when the ball is entered into the second entry opening 640 in a state where the probability change state is set as the gaming state (when the start condition of FIG. 2 is satisfied), the ball is entered into the second entry opening 640. It is configured so that a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time (0.5 seconds to 1 second) is set regardless of the lottery result. As a result, if the right-handed game is performed in the state where the probability change state is set and the fluctuation (lottery) of the special figure 2 is executed, the probability change state is set for the period during which the latent probability state can be set. Since the left-handed game is extremely short compared to the case where the left-handed game is performed in the state and the fluctuation (lottery) is executed in the special figure 2, the right-handed game in the probable change state can be regarded as a disadvantageous game for the player. .. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an act of intentionally performing an irregular game different from the displayed content in the probabilistic state in which "left-handed" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 of the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the ball is entered into the second entry opening 640 in a state where the probability change state is set as the gaming state (when the start condition of FIG. 2 is satisfied). ) Is configured to set a variation pattern with a short variation time (0.5 seconds to 1 second) regardless of the lottery result, but the variation is not limited to this, and the variation in Special Figure 2 during the probability variation state is not limited to this. The time may be configured as a fluctuation time (for example, 120 seconds) extremely longer than the fluctuation time in FIG. 1.

With this configuration, for example, when the right-handed game is performed in a state where the probability change state is set while ignoring the progress content of the suggestion effect (bingo game) executed by the third symbol display device 81. In addition, since the special figure 2 fluctuation for a long time (for example, 120 seconds) is executed, even if the latent state is set after that (for example, the fluctuation of the special figure 1 fluctuation (fourth time) in which the jackpot is won). Even if the display is started), since the special figure 2 change is being executed, a new latent state game (a game that executes the special figure 2 change while the latent state is set) is newly performed. It can be difficult to execute.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the latent probability state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is set based on the fluctuation period of the special symbol (special figure 1) and the symbol determination period, the latent probability state is set. The longer the period from when is set (the predetermined special figure 1 fluctuation starts) to the end of the executing special figure 2 fluctuation, the longer the period during which the special figure 2 fluctuation in the latent state can be executed (latent probability). The state game period) becomes shorter. Further, when a sufficient time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the setting of the latent probability state in order to surely prevent the special figure 2 fluctuation from being executed in the state where the probability change state is set. Similarly, when the right-handed game is started from, the latent state game period is shortened. Therefore, in order to grasp the timing of executing the right-handed game, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed to the player. You can watch the contents displayed on the screen.

Then, when the right-handed game is performed during the latent state and the special figure 2 variation is executed, the effect display during the RUSH game (latent state game) shown in FIG. 114 (b) is displayed by the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed on the display screen of. FIG. 114 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the fourth special figure change is a big hit after the end of the big hit (after setting the probability change state). In the present embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, when the latent state is set, the latent state game (RUSH game) in which the variation (lottery) of the special figure 2 is executed by the right-handed game is performed. That is, in the latent state, the right-handed game is an advantageous game, and the left-handed game is a disadvantageous game.

In the display screen shown in FIG. 114 (b), in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, the guide display area Dm3 is "right-handed", and the special figure 1 display area Dm1 is changed to the special figure 1 (4). The display mode indicating that the change of the special figure 2 is in progress, and the display mode indicating that the change in the special figure 2 is being executed are displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2. Is displayed with "0" indicating that there is no reserved number of special figure 1, and "0" indicating that there is no reserved number of special figure 2 is displayed in the special figure 2 reserved ball number display area Dm5.

During the period when this RUSH game is being executed, the character 811 imitating a rabbit runs from the left to the right and opens the treasure box 812 found on the way (the same effect as the first embodiment). Is displayed in the main display area Dm, and in the sub display area Ds, the character "RUSH in progress" indicating that the latent state game (RUSH game) is in progress is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the current latent state game (RUSH game) is in progress.

In FIGS. 113 to 114 described above, when the second probability change end condition that is satisfied based on the number of changes of the special symbol is satisfied as the probability change end condition for ending the probability change state, that is, the final change of the probability change state (4). An example of the display screen when the latent state is set by the special figure change) was explained. In the third embodiment, as a probability change end condition (a condition for shifting a high probability state of a normal symbol to a low probability state) for ending the probability change state (shifting the probability change state to the latent probability state), the first Probability change end condition (probability change end condition established based on big hit winning), second probability change end condition (probability change end condition established based on the number of changes of special symbol), third probability change end condition (established based on small hit winning) It has a probability change end condition), and is configured to shift the gaming state from the probability change state to the latent state when any of the end conditions is satisfied.

Next, with reference to FIG. 115 (a), the display displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the first probability variation end condition is satisfied before the second probability variation end condition described above is satisfied. Explain the contents. FIG. 115A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents executed during the third special figure change in the case where the third special figure change is a big hit after the big hit (after the probability change state is set). It is a figure.

In the third embodiment, when the first probability change end condition (winning the jackpot of the special symbol) is satisfied, the special symbol for indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot is stopped and displayed. It is configured so that the latent state is set during the period until the stop display ends (the symbol confirmation period). Therefore, since the probability variation state is continuously set during the variation display period of the special figure 1 (during the variation of the special figure), in the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 115 (a), the special figure 1 display area Dm1 is special. A display mode indicating that FIG. 1 is in variable display is displayed, and “left-handed” is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. Then, "4" is displayed in the lottery result 821, and the bingo card 820 is displayed in a display mode indicating that a line has been established.

Further, although detailed description is omitted, in the third embodiment, when the above-mentioned first probability variation end condition is satisfied and the latent probability state is set during the symbol determination period of the special symbol, it becomes a target. It is configured so that different numbers can be displayed multiple times as the lottery result 821 of the bingo game during the variable display period of the special symbol, and the information for showing the final result of this bingo game is notified to the player step by step. It is configured to do.

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 115 (a), the special figure 1 shows a state in which a single row of lines is established during the variable display. For example, the type of the jackpot won this time is a long symbol confirmed. In the case of a jackpot type (for example, jackpot C) in which a period (for example, 300 seconds) is set, a different number as the lottery result 821 of the bingo game during the remaining period until the variable display of the special figure 1 ends. (For example, "5") is newly displayed, and the effect that the result of the bingo game is "establishment of two rows of lines" is executed.

In this way, the result of the bingo game (the number of established lines) is configured to be variable a plurality of times during the variable display of the special symbol. As a result, the content of the privilege (RUSH game, jackpot game) given to the player at the end of this special symbol change can be grasped with the passage of the change display period of the special symbol. 3 The effect content displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 81 can be continuously watched.

In addition, if the type of jackpot won this time is a jackpot type (for example, jackpot A) in which a short symbol confirmation period (for example, 5 seconds) is set, the result of the bingo game (number of established lines) does not change. A number (for example, "3") may be displayed, and the result of the bingo game may be configured to be "a row of lines established".

By configuring in this way, while unifying the number of lottery results 821 displayed by the bingo game (the number of numbers displayed in the past history 823), the result of the bingo game (number of established lines) and the special symbol It is possible to associate the content of the privilege (amount of privilege) given after the end of the variable display of. Therefore, since the player can pay attention to the content and the result of the bingo game, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the third embodiment, the number of lottery results 821 displayed during the bingo game (the number displayed in the past history 823) is unified regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol, and the result of the bingo game. We have shown an effect that makes the player excited about whether or not (the number of established lines) will increase, but it is not limited to this, for example, the content of the privilege (amount of privilege) given after the variable display of the special symbol ends. , The number of lottery results 821 displayed during the bingo game (the number of numbers displayed in the past history 823) may be associated with each other. As a result, it is possible to give a privilege that is advantageous to the player when a large number is displayed as the lottery result 821 during the bingo game, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 115 (b), the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the third probability change end condition is satisfied will be described. FIG. 115B schematically shows an example of the display content executed during the second special figure change when the second special figure change is a small hit after the big hit (after setting the probability change state). It is a schematic diagram.

The third embodiment is configured so that the timing at which the latent probability state is set differs depending on the type of the probability change end condition that has been established. Specifically, when the first probability change end condition is satisfied, the period (target symbol) from the time when the stop display of the corresponding special symbol is started to the end of the stop display (until the jackpot game is started). When the symbol confirmation period) is set as the latent state and the second probability change end condition is satisfied, from the time when the variation display of the corresponding special symbol is started to the end of the stop display of the corresponding special symbol. The period (variation display period of the target symbol and the symbol confirmation period) is set as the latent state. That is, regardless of which of the above-mentioned first probability change end condition and second probability change end condition is satisfied, the latent probability state is set within the period of the special symbol 1 change.

On the other hand, if the third probability change end condition is satisfied, a small hit is won in any of the multiple (4 times) special figure 1 fluctuations that can be executed within the period in which the probability change state is set. In addition, the latent state is set in the period from the time when the stop display of the special symbol indicating that the lottery result is a small hit is started to the end of the stop display of the special symbol which is the final change of the probability change state. .. That is, if a small hit is won in the special figure lottery (first special figure lottery) executed immediately after the probability change state is set, the special symbol indicating the result (small hit) of the first special lottery is stopped. After being displayed, after the 2nd to 4th special symbol lottery period (variable display period and symbol confirmation period), until the stop display of the special symbol indicating the result of the 4th special symbol lottery is completed (multiple times) The latent state will be set during the special figure fluctuation period).

As shown in FIG. 115 (b), when the third probability change end condition is satisfied, "ALL" for all numbers is displayed in the lottery result 821, and 8 lines (all lines) are satisfied. The Bingo card 820 is displayed in the display mode indicating. Then, "341" indicating that a small hit has been won is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, and "right" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 to indicate that the latent state game (RUSH game) has started. Hitting "is displayed.

Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the third embodiment, whether or not the first probability change end condition or the second probability change end condition is satisfied is a special figure variation (special figure lottery) in which each probability change end condition is satisfied. ) Is determined before the execution (preliminary determination), whereas the third probability change end condition is configured not to perform the preliminary determination.

By configuring in this way, the progress content of the suggestion effect (bingo game) displayed over a plurality of special symbol fluctuations executed during the period in which the probability change state is set is completed by the first probability change. Since it can be set according to the condition or whether or not the second probability change end condition is satisfied, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player, and when the third end condition is satisfied. Since the suggestive effect shown in FIG. 115 (b) is executed, it is possible to provide an unexpected effect.

In the third embodiment, the presence or absence of the first probability change end condition and the second probability change end condition is determined in advance, and the presence or absence of the third probability change end condition is not determined in advance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, only the second probability variation end condition that is satisfied based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol may be configured to be preliminarily determined.

Further, as the above-mentioned pre-determination, at the end of the jackpot (during the ending period of the jackpot game), the pre-determination is performed for the special figure 1 stored on hold, and the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 stored on hold. It is configured to determine whether or not the information corresponding to the lottery result is included, and to change the combination of numbers displayed on the bingo card 820 based on the determination result.

With this configuration, there is no sense of discomfort with respect to the number of special figure fluctuations executed before winning the jackpot and the amount of benefits given to the player by winning the jackpot (Bingo). The game) can be run. In addition, by allowing the player to grasp the numbers displayed on the Bingo card 820, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the future game results in advance.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 116 to 124, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed from the second embodiment described above, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. It differs in that it is done. Other points are the same as those in the second embodiment, the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 116 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 116, the first hit random number table 202a is replaced with the first hit random number 3 table 202ba, the small hit random number table 202b is replaced with the small hit random number 3 table 202bb, and the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa is replaced with. The above-mentioned first is that the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc is replaced with the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab, the small hit type selection 3 table 202b is provided, and the variation pattern selection 2 table 202ac is replaced with the variation pattern selection 3 table 202be. 2 It is different from the embodiment.

The first random number 3 table 202ba is a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol with respect to the first random number table 202a (similar to the first embodiment and see FIG. 15A) of the second embodiment described above. The difference is that the range of the value of the first random number counter C1 determined to be the above and the range of the value of the first random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit in the high probability state of the special symbol are changed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 117 (a), the contents specified in the first random number 3 table 202ba will be described. FIG. 117A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 3 table 202ba. As shown in FIG. 117 (a), when the game state is a low probability state (normal state, time saving state) of the special symbol, the first obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is determined whether the value of the hit random number counter C1 is any of "0 to 9", and if it is any of "0 to 9", it is determined to be a big hit.

Further, when the game state is a high probability state (probability change state, latent state) of the special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is It is determined whether it is within the range of "0 to 99", and if it is within the range of "0 to 99", it is determined to be a big hit. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, out of the random number counters having a total number of 480, 10 values are defined as values for discriminating as a jackpot in the low probability state of the special symbol. The jackpot probability in the low probability state is 1/48. On the other hand, the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol is 1 / 4.8.

The small hit random number 3 table 202bb is the first special symbol (special figure 1) with respect to the small hit random number table 202b of the second embodiment described above (similar to the first embodiment and see FIG. 15B). The difference is that the lottery has also been changed to win a small hit. Here, with reference to FIG. 117 (b), the contents specified in the small hit random number 3 table 202bb will be described. FIG. 117 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit random number 3 table 202bb. As shown in FIG. 117 (b), in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is any of "10 to 14". If it is any of "10 to 14", it is determined that it is a small hit.

In the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the same contents as the above-mentioned small hit random number table 202b (see FIG. 15 (b)) are defined, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. That is, the third embodiment is different from the above-mentioned second embodiment in that it is configured so that a small hit can be won even in the lottery of the first special symbol. Then, in the third embodiment, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in a state where the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set, it is normal. It is configured to execute a process of shifting the high-probability state of the symbol to the low-probability state, that is, a process of shifting the gaming state from the probabilistic state to the latent probabilistic state.

With this configuration, it is possible to increase the opportunity to shift the game state to the latent state during the probabilistic state, so that the player who is executing the game during the probable change state is enthusiastically playing the game. Can be done.

As shown in FIG. 117 (b), in the third embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the special symbol (1/48 (see FIG. 117 (a))). , The probability of winning the small hit of the first special symbol (1/32 (see FIG. 117 ((b))) is higher. Since the latent probability state is set based on the small hit winning with a higher probability than the case where the latent probability state is set based on the winning, the player who is executing the game in the probabilistic changing state. On the other hand, both the latent state game (RUSH game) and the jackpot game are executed, but only the game aiming at the big hit winning, which is difficult to win, and the latent state game (RUSH game) are executed, and the jackpot winning is higher than the jackpot winning. It is possible to play both a game aiming for a small hit that is easy to win and a game that aims to win a small hit.

In the third embodiment, the probability of winning the small hit of the special figure 1 is configured to be higher than the probability of winning the big hit of the special figure 1 in the high probability state of the special symbol, but the present invention is limited to this. It may be configured to be lower than the jackpot winning probability of the special figure 1 in the high probability state. For example, the probability of winning the small hit of the special figure 1 may be set to a low probability of 1/480. good. With this configuration, in the state where the probability change state is set, if the small hit is won before the big hit, the big hit game is not executed and the latent state game (RUSH game) is performed. Since it can be executed, it is possible to provide a player with a surprising game.

The jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc is different from the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa of the second embodiment described above in that the type of the jackpot type is changed, and various counters (time reduction counter 203f, probability variation counter) set after the jackpot is completed. The difference is that the contents of the fixed time counters 203ad and 203ae) are changed and the value of the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type is changed. Here, the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 118.

FIG. 118A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118 (a), the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc is the jackpot operation content of each jackpot type defined in the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16 (a)) of the first embodiment described above. The jackpot operation contents that differ only in the number of rounds executed for each jackpot are specified, and for each jackpot type, the time reduction counter 203f, the probability variation counter 203aa, the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad, and the special figure 2 fixed time are specified. The value of the counter 203ae is specified.

Specifically, in the jackpot A whose symbol type is set corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) is "0 to 49". It is defined in the range, and the jackpot operation content in which the round game for opening the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is executed for two rounds (2R) and the value of "4" in the time saving counter 203f are set. It is specified that the value of "4" is set in the probability variation counter 203aa and the value indicating "5 seconds" is set in the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad.

The jackpot B whose symbol type is set corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1) is defined by the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) in the range of "50 to 96". The jackpot operation content in which the round game for opening the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is executed for two rounds (2R), the value of "4" in the time saving counter 203f, and the value of "4" in the probability variation counter 203aa are ". It is specified that the value of "4" is set to the value indicating "100 seconds" in the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad.

The jackpot C whose symbol type is set corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1) is defined by the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) in the range of "97 to 99". The jackpot operation content in which the round game for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is executed for two rounds (2R), the value of "4" in the time saving counter 203f, and the value of "4" in the probability variation counter 203aa are ". It is specified that the value of "4" is set to the value indicating "300 seconds" in the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad.

Further, the jackpot D whose symbol type is set corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2) is defined in the range where the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) is "0 to 64". The jackpot operation content in which the round game for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is executed for two rounds (2R) and the value of "4" in the time saving counter 203f are the probability variation counter 203aa. The value of "4" is specified in the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad so that a value indicating "0.5 seconds" is set.

The jackpot E whose symbol type is set corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2) is defined by the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) in the range of "65 to 99". The jackpot operation content in which the round game for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is executed for two rounds (2R), the value of "4" in the time saving counter 203f, and the value of "4" in the probability variation counter 203aa are ". It is specified that the value of "4" is set to the value indicating "1 second" in the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad.

As described above, in the third embodiment, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set higher than that in the second embodiment described above, making it easier to win the jackpot, and a privilege given to the player in the jackpot game ( It is configured so that the number of prize balls) is reduced. With this configuration, the amount of benefits given to the player (prize ball) depending on the result of whether or not the latent state is set and the length of the period in which the latent state is continuously set. Since the number) can be greatly varied, it is possible to provide a player with a novel playability.

The small hit type selection 3 table 202bd is the content of the small hit type set when the special figure 1 is won with respect to the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16B) described above. It differs in that it is specified by adding. Here, the small hit type selection 3 table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 118 (b).

FIG. 118B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 3 table 202b in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118 (b), the small hit type selection 3 table 202b has a symbol type “Special Figure 1” with respect to the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16 (b)) of the first embodiment described above. It differs from the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16 (b)) in that the small hit D is added as the small hit type corresponding to the above, and other than that, the small hit type selection table 202e (FIG. 16 (b)). The detailed description of the same element will be omitted.

In the small hit type selection 3 table 202b, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol (special figure 1), the first attacker (first variable prize) is used regardless of the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5. A small hit game in which the opening operation of opening the device 65) for 0.02 seconds is executed once is specified. That is, when the small hit is won in the lottery of the special figure 1, the small hit game in which it is difficult for the player to win the prize ball in the small hit game is executed.

That is, in the third embodiment, the small hit winning of the special figure 1 is not the purpose of giving a privilege (prize ball) to the player by the small hit game, but is an opportunity to set the latent state as the game state. It is an object. As a result, if the small hit of Special Figure 1 is won in the state where the probability change state is set, the right-handed game is executed immediately after the effect of notifying that fact (see FIG. 115 (b)) is executed. Even if it does, the small hit game has already ended (because it takes longer for the ball launched by the right-handed game to reach the right area than the small hit game period), so the latent state is smooth. A game (RUSH game) can be executed.

Further, when the small hit of the special figure 1 is won in the normal state, the small hit game can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort. In this embodiment, since the opening time of the first variable winning device 65 by the small hit game is set as short as 0.02 seconds, if the small hit of Special Figure 1 is won in the normal state, the player wins. Even if the game method is changed from the left-handed game to the right-handed game (when the special symbol indicating the small hit winning is stopped and displayed), the ball is changed to the first variable winning device 65 during the small hit game. Since it is difficult to win a prize, when the small hit of the special figure 1 is won in the normal state, the effect and guidance to emphasize that the small hit is won on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is configured so that the display of "right-handed" that guides the right-handed game is not executed in the display area Dm3.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from performing annoying game operations. It should be noted that a notification means may be provided to notify that the small hit of Special Figure 1 has been won in the normal state, or right-handed display even when the small hit game based on the special figure 1 small hit winning in the normal state is in progress. May be configured to execute.

The variation pattern selection 3 table 202be replaces the time saving / probability variation table 202f2 referred to when the probability variation state is set with respect to the variation pattern selection table 202f of the first embodiment described above. Is different in that the latent probability 3 table 202be2 is provided in place of the latent probability table 202f3 that is referred to when the latent probability state is set.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection 3 table 202be will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 to 121. FIG. 119 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the variation pattern selection 3 table 202be. As shown in FIG. 119 (a), in the third embodiment, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the same normal table 202f1 as the first embodiment described above is referred to, and the probability change state is changed. If it is set, the probability variation 3 table 202be1 is referred to, and if the latency state is set, the latency 3 table 202be2 is referred to.

In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 118 (a), the value of the time saving counter 203f and the value of the probability variation counter 203aa are configured to be the same after the end of the jackpot, so that the probability variation counter is the same. Since the gaming state (that is, the time saving state) in which the value of 203aa becomes 0 and the value of the time saving counter 203f becomes a value larger than 0 is not set, the variation referred to when the time saving state is set. It does not have a pattern selection table.

Next, the contents of the probability variation 3 table 202be1 will be described with reference to FIG. 119 (b). FIG. 119 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation 3 table 202be1. As described above with reference to FIG. 118 (a), the third embodiment is configured so that the probabilistic state is always set for the special symbol 4 fluctuations when the jackpot is won. Then, in the state where the probability variation state is set, the variation pattern (variation pattern) is referred to according to the number of special symbol fluctuations (number of special symbol fluctuations) after the end of the jackpot and the lottery result of the special symbol. Fluctuation time) is configured to be selected.

With this configuration, the latent state is determined according to the timing (number of times the special figure changes) when the condition for setting the latent state as the game state (big hit winning or small hit winning in Special Figure 1) is established. It is possible to make the period (special figure fluctuation time) to be set different. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention not only to the lottery result of the special symbol but also to the number of fluctuations in the special symbol, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Specifically, when the symbol type of the special symbol is special diagram 1 and the lottery result is "big hit", when the number of special symbol changes after the end of the big hit is "1 to 2 times". , "Probability change A table 202bea (probability change A)" is referred to, "probability change B table 202be (probability change B)" is referred to in the case of "3 times", and "probability change C" is referred to in the case of "4 times". It is specified that "Table 202 bec (probability variation C)" is referred to. In addition, when the lottery result is "small hit, miss", and when the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the big hit is "1 to 3 times", refer to "Probability change A table 202bea (probability change A)". In the case of "4 times", it is stipulated that "probability change C table 202 bec (probability change C)" is referred to.

Further, when the symbol type of the special symbol is special diagram 2, the "probability variation D table 202bed (probability variation D)" is referred to regardless of the lottery result and the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the big hit. It is stipulated in.

Next, the contents specified in the various probability variation tables (probability variation A table 202be to probability variation D table 202bed) referred to in the probability variation 3 table 202be1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 (c) to 120. .. FIG. 119 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the probability variation A table 202bea, and FIG. 120 (a) schematically shows the contents specified in the probability variation B table 202bea. It is a schematic diagram, FIG. 120 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the probability variation C table 202be, and FIG. 120 (c) is defined in the probability variation D table 202bed. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents schematically.

As shown in FIG. 119 (c), in the probability variation A table 202bea, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0" as the variation pattern determined when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). The jackpot variation 1 (1 second) is associated with the range of "99", the jackpot variation 2 (2 seconds) is associated with the range of "100 to 197", and the jackpot variation 3 (300 seconds) is associated with the value of "198". ) Is associated. In addition, when a small hit or a loss is won in the lottery of Special Figure 1, the small hit variation 1 (1 second) or the loss variation 1 (1 second) is associated regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 120 (a), in the probability variation B table 202be, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0" as the variation pattern determined when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). The jackpot variation 1 (1 second) is associated with the range of "99", the jackpot variation 2 (2 seconds) is associated with the range of "100 to 149", and the jackpot variation 3 (1 second) is associated with the range of "150 to 198". 300 seconds) is associated.

As shown in FIG. 120 (b), in the probability variation C table 202be, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0" as the variation pattern determined when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). The value of "1" is associated with the jackpot fluctuation 1 (1 second), the value of "1" is associated with the jackpot fluctuation 2 (2 seconds), and the jackpot fluctuation 3 (300 seconds) is associated with the range of "2 to 198". It is associated. In addition, when a small hit is won in the lottery of Special Figure 1, the small hit fluctuation 2 (240 seconds) is associated regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and when the lottery is won, the fluctuation type counter is associated. The deviation variation 1 (1 second) is associated with the value of CS1 regardless of the value.

As shown in FIG. 120 (c), in the probability variation D table 202bed, as a variation pattern determined when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. The big hit fluctuation 1 (1 second) is associated, and if the small hit is won, the small hit fluctuation 4 (0.5 seconds) is associated regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. , The deviation variation 4 (0.5 seconds) is associated with the variation type counter CS1 regardless of the value.

Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the contents specified in the latent probability 3 table 202be2 will be described. FIG. 121 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the latent probability 3 table 202be2. As shown in FIG. 121, in the third embodiment, a fluctuation pattern in which a long fluctuation time is set when the lottery of the special figure 1 is executed is selected in a state where the latency state is set. It is configured to be.

Here, in the third embodiment, in the state where the probability change state is set, the latent probability state is set when a small hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery, so that the latent probability is set. In order for the fluctuation pattern to be selected with reference to the table 202be2, it is necessary to win a small hit by the lottery of the special figure 1 during the probability change state.

As described above, in the third embodiment, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is selected by referring to different tables according to the number of special symbol fluctuations in the state where the probability variation state is set. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to both the lottery result of the special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (the number of fluctuations after the probability variation state is set) that is the result of the lottery.

Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 122. FIG. 122 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 122, the RAM 203 of the third embodiment adds the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba and the special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb to the RAM 203 of the second embodiment described above. It differs in that. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is a flag for indicating that a small hit has been won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and is set to on to draw the special figure 1. It shows that you won a small hit. This special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to be on for a period from when the small hit is won in the lottery of special figure 1 until the small hit game is executed.

The special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb is a flag for indicating that the small hit game is executed based on the small hit winning of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and is set to ON. , It is shown that the small hit game based on the small hit winning of the special figure 1 is executed. In the third embodiment, when the small hit game based on the small hit winning of the special figure 1 is started in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the high probability state of the normal symbol is changed to the low probability state. It is configured to execute the process of migrating to.

The special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb is determined when it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to ON in the special figure 1 disengagement stop process (see S871 in FIG. 128) (S3201 in FIG. 128). : Yes), set to on (S3207 in FIG. 128), and when it is determined in the small hit control process 3 (see S2255 in FIG. 129) that it is the timing to start the small hit (see S2503 in FIG. 129), refer to. (S2551 in FIG. 129).

Next, when it is determined in the process of S2551 of FIG. 129 that it is set to ON (S2551: Yes in FIG. 129), that is, the small hit game this time is won in the lottery of Special Figure 1. When it is determined that the small hit is executed based on the above, the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to 0. Then, when it is determined by the small hit control process 3 (see S2255 in FIG. 129) that it is the end timing of the small hit (S2511: Yes in FIG. 129), it is set to off.

Next, with reference to FIG. 123 (a), the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 123 (a) shows the voice lamp control device according to the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of ROM 222 of 113 schematically. As shown in FIG. 123 (a), the ROM 222 of the third embodiment has a probability variation effect selection table 222ba instead of the additional effect selection table 222c with respect to the ROM 222 of the second embodiment (first embodiment) described above. It is different in that it is provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the probability variation effect selection table 222ba will be described with reference to FIG. 124. FIG. 124 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the probability variation effect selection table 222ba. This probability variation effect selection table 222ba is a data table for selecting the final aspect of the suggestion effect (bingo game) described with reference to FIGS. 113 (b) to 115 (a), and is a big hit. The final mode is defined based on the number of fluctuations (the number of fluctuations in the special figure after the end of the jackpot) and the types of jackpots that can be won.

Specifically, when the number of jackpot winning fluctuations is "2", that is, when the jackpot is won again in the second special symbol change after the jackpot ends, the winning jackpot types are "big hit A" and "big hit B". If it is, the effect mode that establishes one row (line) in Bingo is set, and if it is "Big hit C", the effect mode that establishes three rows (lines) in Bingo is set.

If the number of jackpot winning fluctuations is "3", that is, if the jackpot is won in the third special symbol change after the jackpot ends, if the winning jackpot types are "big hit A" and "big hit B". , It is stipulated that an effect mode in which two rows (lines) are established in Bingo is set, and in the case of "big hit C", an effect mode in which three rows (lines) are established in Bingo is set.

Finally, when the number of jackpot winning fluctuations is "4", that is, when the jackpot is won in the fourth special symbol change (the final fluctuation of the special symbol in which the probability change state is set) after the jackpot ends, the winning jackpot type If is "Big hit A", an effect mode in which two rows (lines) are established in Bingo is set, and if "Big hit B", an effect mode in which three rows (lines) are established in Bingo is set, and "Big hit C". If so, it is stipulated that the production mode in which all rows (lines) are established in Bingo is set.

Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the third embodiment, when the jackpot is won by the first special symbol change after the jackpot ends, the display screen at the end of the jackpot (normally, a bingo card). On the screen on which 820 is displayed (see FIG. 113), a special display screen for informing that the latent state is set after the end of the big hit is displayed.

On this special display screen, an image congratulating the player is displayed in the main display area Dm, and "right-handed" for guiding the right-handed game is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. As a result, at the end of the big hit game, it is possible to perform a game (right-handed game) suitable for the game state (latent state) after the big hit game ends, so that the period in which the latent state is set is fully set. It can be utilized to execute a lottery game of the second special symbol (special figure 2).

In the third embodiment, the display screen at the end of the big hit is configured to display the special display screen when the big hit is won by the first special symbol change after the end of the big hit. The timing of displaying the special display screen may be any timing as long as it is during the jackpot game, it may be the timing when the jackpot game is started, or it may be the timing when a predetermined round game in the jackpot game is executed. In this case, when the jackpot is won in the normal state, it corresponds to the special symbol change executed next among the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b by the time the round game of the jackpot game is started. A pre-determination means for preliminarily determining whether or not the winning information (winning information corresponding to the first special symbol change after the end of the jackpot) includes information indicating that the jackpot is won is provided, and the pre-determination by the pre-determination means is provided. As a result, when the information indicating that the jackpot is won is included, "right-handed" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 and the right-handed game is performed in order to perform the jackpot game in the right-handed game. When the effect mode for displaying is configured to be executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 and the information indicating that the jackpot is won is not included, the guidance display area Dm3 is set to "left". It is good to configure it to display "hit".

With this configuration, when a jackpot is won in a normal state (a gaming state in which a left-handed game is performed), the jackpot game is determined by the display mode of the guidance display area Dm3 that guides the game method during the jackpot game. It is possible to predict the content of the game after the end. Since the same configuration of the game board 13 as in the first embodiment is used in the present embodiment, the left-handed game is performed when the jackpot game for opening the second variable winning device 650 is executed. It is configured so that the ratio of the ball winning the second variable winning device 650 does not change between the case and the case where the right-handed game is performed. Therefore, even if a configuration is used in which the game method (right-handed, left-handed) during the jackpot game is changed based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b, it is disadvantageous to the player during the jackpot game. Does not provide a situation.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the ending command has been received in the jackpot-related process 3 (see S4552 in FIG. 132) (S4605: Yes in FIG. 132), the jackpot end process (see S4651 in FIG. 133) is executed. By determining whether or not there is winning information for winning a jackpot in the winning information (winning information in Special Figure 1) stored in the winning information storage area 223b (see S5605 in FIG. 133), the jackpot game is in progress. The newly generated winning information is also targeted for discrimination, and is configured so that more winning information can be discriminated. However, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b (winning information in Special Figure 1) A timing other than this embodiment may be set as a timing for determining whether or not there is winning information for winning a jackpot. For example, a timing at which a jackpot game is started or a specific number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds) may be set. The timing at which the game is reached or the timing at which a specific round game (the first round game) is completed may be set as the timing for executing the determination.

Next, with reference to FIG. 123 (b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 123 (b) shows the voice lamp control device according to the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of RAM 223 of 113 schematically. As shown in FIG. 123 (b), the RAM 223 of the third embodiment is provided with the residual probability variation number area 223ba, the look-ahead per-read flag 223bb, and the residual variation number counter 223bc with respect to the ROM 222 of the second embodiment described above. It differs in that. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The remaining probability variation number area 223ba is a storage area for storing the variation number in which new winning information can be set as a special symbol variation that can be executed during the probability variation state. A value obtained by subtracting the number of winning information already stored in the winning information storage area 223b in the jackpot end processing (see S4651 in FIG. 133) is set in the residual probability variation number area 223ba (S5604 in FIG. 133). .. Then, in the prize information related processing (see S4271 in FIG. 131), the set value is referred to (see S5504 in FIG. 131), and when the set value is larger than 0, that is, during the probability change state. When the winning information corresponding to the executeable special symbol change can be newly received (S5504; Yes in FIG. 131), the look-ahead process (the information hits the winning information) is executed as the special symbol change executed during the probabilistic change state. (Process for determining whether or not it is included) is executed (S5505 in FIG. 131), and then the set value is subtracted by 1 (S5507 in FIG. 131).

In this way, the probability change state is set by using the residual probability change number area 223ba to determine whether or not it is possible to set new winning information as a special symbol variation that can be executed during the probability change state. It is possible to determine whether or not the newly received winning information in the state corresponds to the special symbol change executed during the probability change state. Therefore, since the probabilistic effect executed in the probabilistic state can be set only based on the winning information corresponding to the special symbol variation executed in the probabilistic state, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The look-ahead hit flag 223bb is a flag for indicating that there is winning information that has been won in the jackpot of the special symbol, and by being set to on, among the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b. Indicates that the winning information corresponding to the jackpot is included in.

This look-ahead hit flag 223bb determines that in the jackpot end processing (see S4651 in FIG. 133), there is winning information indicating that the jackpot has been won in the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b. If this is the case (S5605: Yes in FIG. 133), it is set to ON (S5606 in FIG. 133). Further, in the prize information-related processing (see S4271 in FIG. 131), it is determined that the prize information received this time corresponds to the special symbol change executed during the probability change state (S5504: Yes in FIG. 131). It is also set to ON (see S5506 in FIG. 131) even when it is determined that the winning information includes winning information indicating that the jackpot is won (S5505: Yes in FIG. 131).

Then, it is referred to in the probability variation variation display setting process (see S5151 in FIG. 135), and when the look-ahead flag 223bb is not set to ON (S5702: No in FIG. 135) and when it is set to ON (S5702: No in FIG. 135). The process is executed so that a different effect mode can be set in S5702: Yes) in FIG. 135.

The remaining fluctuation number counter 223bc is for counting the number of remaining special figure fluctuations until the jackpot is won, and is stored in the winning information storage area 223b in the jackpot end processing (see S4651 in FIG. 133). When the winning information includes the winning information for winning the jackpot (S5605: Yes in FIG. 133), the value corresponding to the number of changes in the special symbol until the special symbol corresponding to the winning information for winning the jackpot changes. Is set (see S5607 in FIG. 133). Then, when it is determined in the variation display setting process 3 (see S4173 in FIG. 134) that the variation display in the probability variation state is set (see S5103 in FIG. 134), the probability variation variation display setting process (see S5151 in FIG. 135) is executed. In (see), when it is determined that the special symbol for which the variation display is set this time is the pre-variation of the special symbol corresponding to the winning information for winning the jackpot (the next time is the jackpot variation) (S5703: Yes in FIG. 135). ), An effect mode using the probability variation effect selection table 222ba is set.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 125 to 129, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. The control process of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment is different from the control process of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment described above, instead of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see FIG. 98). 1 Special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (see S376 in FIG. 125), first special symbol fluctuation stop process 3 (see S277 in FIG. 127) instead of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see FIG. 99), small hit control The difference is that the small hit control process 3 (see FIG. 129) is executed instead of the process (see FIG. 55). Other than that, the same processing is executed. In addition, in the above-mentioned second embodiment, since the same processing as that of the first embodiment is executed, the part where the detailed description is omitted will be described with reference to the figure used for the description of the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, the parts where the same processing as that of the second embodiment described above is executed are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 125, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (S376) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (S376). Since the third embodiment is configured to win a small hit by the lottery of the special figure 1, the first special symbol big hit determination process 3 (S376) is the first special in the above-mentioned second embodiment. The difference is that the content of the process to be executed when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is not a big hit is different from the symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98). is doing. Other than that, they are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (S376) is executed, the same process as the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see FIG. 98) is executed, and in the process of S406, this fluctuation is a jackpot. If it is determined that this is not the case (S406: No), the special figure 1 deviation processing (S471) is executed, and this processing is terminated. This special figure 1 deviation variation processing (S471) is executed when it is determined that the lottery result of special figure 1 is other than a big hit, and it is determined whether or not a small hit is won, and the determination is made. It executes the process corresponding to the result.

Next, with reference to FIG. 126, the special figure 1 deviation processing (S471), which is one of the processes in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (S376) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. ) Will be explained. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 deviation processing (S471). This special figure 1 deviation variation processing (S471) executes a process for displaying a small hit symbol or an deviation symbol on the first symbol display device 37, and targets the second special symbol (special diagram 2). The difference is that the target special symbol is changed from the special figure 2 to the special figure 1 with respect to the processing content of the special figure 2 deviation change processing (S1011 of FIG. 41) to be executed.

In the special figure 1 deviation variation processing (S471), first, it is determined whether or not the execution data acquired from the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is a small hit (S3101). When it is determined that the execution data is a small hit (S3101: Yes), the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to ON (S3102), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to the small hit (S3103). ). Next, the small hit symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S3104), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S3101, when it is determined that the execution data is not a small hit (out of order) (S3101: No), the out-of-order symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set. (S3105), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 3 (S277) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 3 (S277). The first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 3 (S277) is a case where the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a big hit with respect to the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S257 in FIG. 99) in the second embodiment described above. That is, in the process of S801, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is off (S801: No), the special figure 1 disengagement stop process (S871) is executed. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 128, it is executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment. The special figure 1 disengagement stop process (S871), which is one of the processes in the first special symbol change stop process 3 (S277), will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 disengagement stop process (S871). In the special figure 1 out-of-order stop process (S871), when the lottery result of the special figure 1 is a small hit, a process for starting the small hit game is executed.

In the special figure 1 disengagement stop process (see S871 in FIG. 128), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to ON (S3201). When it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to on (S3201: Yes), the change of the special figure 2 during the change is stopped and displayed by the lottery result indicating the forcible deviation. Special figure 2 The fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON (S3202).

Then, a special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is turned on is set (S3203), and the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a deviated symbol (S3204). Next, a small hit scenario based on the selected small hit type is set (S3205), the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to off (S3206), and the special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb is turned on. Set (S3207) and end this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S3201, when it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is not set to on (that is, the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of order) (S3201: No), the book is as it is. End the process.

With this configuration, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the change in special figure 2 that is changing can be forcibly stopped, so that the small hit game can be performed. It is possible to facilitate the execution of the new special figure 2 fluctuation during the latent state set at the start timing. In the third embodiment, when the small hit of the special figure 1 is won, the process of forcibly stopping the change of the special figure 2 being executed in the display mode indicating that the lottery result is out of order is used. Not limited to this, for example, it is configured to interrupt the measurement of the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation so that the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation during the execution is not progressed during the period in which the small hit game is being executed. You may.

Next, with reference to FIG. 129, it is executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment. The small hit control process 3 (S2255) will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit control process 3 (S2255). The small hit control process 3 (S2255) differs from the small hit control process (S2205) in the first embodiment described above in that the processes S2551 and S2552 are added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the small hit control process 3 (S2255), when it is determined in the process of S2503 that it is the timing to start the small hit (S2503: Yes), that is, the small hit scenario updated by the process of S2502 starts the small hit. If the content indicates, an opening command is set (S2504), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb is set to ON (S2551). When it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb is set to ON (S2551: Yes), the time saving counter 203f is set to 0 (S2552), and this processing is terminated.

The third embodiment is configured so that both the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) can win a small hit, of which the small hit of special figure 1 can be won. The value of the time saving counter 203f is set (cleared) to 0 only when the winning is won.

That is, as a condition for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol (the state where the value of the time reduction counter 203f is larger than 0), the small hit winning of the special figure 1 (the start of the small hit game based on the small hit winning of the special figure 1). Is set. With this configuration, it is possible to terminate the high-probability state of a normal symbol under conditions other than the case where the special symbol is changed for a predetermined number of times. Therefore, in the state where the probabilistic state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set, the latent probabilistic state (high probability state of any special symbol) is advantageous to the player at any timing (any special symbol lottery). Since it is possible to shift to a high-probability state of a special symbol and a low-probability state of a normal symbol, it is possible to make the player always enthusiastically play the game.

Further, in the third embodiment, the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set is configured to be until the lottery (variation) of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (4 times). Therefore, the shorter the period from the setting of the probability change state to the winning of the small hit in the lottery of the special figure 1, the more the number of lottery of the special symbol that can be executed during the probability change state can be increased. Therefore, the player can be made to play the game more enthusiastically.

In addition, in the third embodiment, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special diagram 2), the high probability state of the normal symbol is not terminated. As a result, even if the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of Special Figure 2 is set higher than the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of Special Figure 1, in the state where the probability variation state is set, Special Figure 2 It is possible to suppress a situation in which a right-handed game is performed in order to execute the lottery.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2551 that the special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb is not set to ON (S2551: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when a big hit is won by lottery of a special symbol, the probability change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is always after the end of the big hit game. Is configured to be set for a predetermined period (4 special symbol fluctuations), and various transition conditions (latent state transition state) that shift the high-probability latent state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state during the probabilistic state. Is configured to set the latent probability state, which is a game state advantageous to the player.

Then, in the third embodiment, as the latent probability transition condition, the first latent probability transition condition that is satisfied when a big hit is won during the probability change state, and a predetermined period (special symbol variation 4) in which the probability change state is set. When the second latent probability transition condition that is established when the final change of (times) is executed and the small hit is won in the lottery of the specific special symbol (first special symbol (special figure 1)) in the probability change state. It has a third latent transition condition that is satisfied. In this way, by configuring the latent state to be set under various conditions, it is possible to provide the player with a playability that does not get tired of.

Further, the plurality of latent probability transition conditions described above are configured so that the period in which the latent probability state is set after being satisfied is different, and when the first latent probability transition condition is satisfied, the jackpot is indicated. If the latent state is set during the symbol confirmation period when the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the second latent transition condition is satisfied, the latent symbol is latent during the fluctuation period of the target special symbol fluctuation and during the symbol confirmation period. When the probability state is set and the third latent probability transition condition is satisfied, the probability change state is started from the timing when the target small hit game is executed (the timing when the first variable winning device 65 is opened as the small hit game). It is configured to be set until the timing when the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol corresponding to the final fluctuation of is completed.

With this configuration, in order to perform a game to set the latent state during the probable change state, it is not just aiming at the latent state, but also a game for the opportunity to set the latent state. Since the person can be watched, the game can be played more enthusiastically.

Further, in the third embodiment, the symbol determination period of the special symbol is configured to be different according to the lottery result of the special symbol. Further, the variation display period (variation time) for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is configured to be different according to the number of times the special symbol is changed after the probability variation state is set.

Specifically, the lottery result of the special symbol that satisfies the first latent probability transition condition, that is, if the big hit is won in the special symbol lottery, the symbol confirmation period is 5 seconds to 300 seconds depending on the lottery result. It is configured to be set within the range of. With this configuration, even if the player determines that the first latent probability transition condition is satisfied (even if the special symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed), the symbol determination period set after that is set. Since it is not possible to easily determine the length of the game, it is possible to play the game while expecting that a long period is set as the period in which the latent state is continuously set.

In addition, when the above-mentioned second latent transition condition is satisfied, the latent state is set by the lottery result of the special symbol variation (final variation in the probabilistic state) corresponding to the establishment of the second latent transition condition. The length of the period to be set is greatly different. For example, in the final fluctuation in the probabilistic state, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the length of the period set as the latent state is set. It is configured so that it is less than or equal to the fluctuation time (including the same) of the special figure 2 fluctuation executed during the latent state. With this configuration, if the final fluctuation of the probabilistic state is out of the range, the latent probability state is temporarily set internally, but the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed during the latent probability state, and it is small. It is possible to set a disadvantageous latent state that is disadvantageous to a player who makes it impossible (difficult) to acquire a winning game.

When the above-mentioned disadvantageous latent state is set, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 does not execute the effect mode for notifying that the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed. It is preferable not to notify the player that the latent state is set.

In the present embodiment, as described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of the final fluctuation of the probability change state, the disadvantageous latent probability state is set. For example, the lottery result of the special symbol is set. In some cases where is out of order, a long symbol determination period (for example, 100 seconds that can be set when the lottery result is a big hit) is set, or the lottery result of a special symbol is out of order. As the fluctuation pattern (variation time) selected for, 300 seconds, which can be set when the lottery result is a big hit, may be set to be configurable.

With this configuration, even if a big hit or a small hit is not won during the probabilistic state, it is possible to set a latent probable state that is advantageous to the player, so expectation is given until the end of the probable change state. You can play games while playing. In addition, by making the set symbol confirmation period and fluctuation pattern the same as the period (time) that can be set when the jackpot is won, it is expected that the jackpot game will be executed after the latent state ends. be able to.

In the above-mentioned example, when the latent state game (RUSH game) is performed by setting the length of the symbol determination period to the same length as when the jackpot is won, the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed. It is preferable to stop and display the special symbol (third symbol) in a display mode that is difficult for the player to grasp. As a result, the lottery result of the special symbol this time is determined at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the motivation to play during the latent state game.

Further, in the third embodiment, the length of the period in which the latent probability state is set differs depending on the timing when the first latent probability transition condition is satisfied. Specifically, it is configured so that the latent probability state becomes longer and easier to be set as the number of special symbol fluctuations in the probability change state increases. As a result, as the number of special symbol fluctuations in the probabilistic state increases, that is, as the number of special symbol fluctuations that can be executed during the probabilistic change state decreases, it becomes easier to set a latent state that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to make the player want to win the jackpot as soon as possible (to establish the first latent probability transition condition), or to win the jackpot just before the end of the probability change state, which improves the interest of the game. Can be made to. In addition, when a big hit is won in the final change of the probability change state, that is, when both the first latent probability transition condition and the second latent probability transition condition are satisfied in one special symbol change (lottery). Since the latent state is set from the period when the jackpot fluctuation starts, it is possible to provide the latent state for a longer period.

In the present embodiment, the longer the establishment of the first latent transition condition is delayed, the easier it is to set the latent state for a long period of time. However, in addition to this, a specific number of fluctuations (for example, for example). It may be configured so that the longest latent state period is set when the number of fluctuations is an even number or when the jackpot is won in the third), or the first latent transition condition is satisfied as soon as possible. It may be configured so that the latent state can be easily set for a long period of time.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 to 135. The control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment is a command determination process instead of the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 106) with respect to the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment described above. 3 (see FIG. 130), jackpot-related processing 3 (see FIG. 132) instead of jackpot-related processing (see FIG. 64), variable display setting processing 3 (see FIG. 134) instead of variable display setting processing (see FIG. 69). The difference is that the prize information related processing (see FIG. 131), the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 133), and the variation display processing for probability variation (see FIG. 135) are added, and the other processing is the same. Will be executed. The same processing is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the command determination process 3 (S4172) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 130. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 3 (S4172). The command determination process 3 (S4172) is different from the command determination process 2 (S4162) in the second embodiment described above in that the process of S4271 is executed instead of the process of S4214. Since other processes are the same as the command determination process 2 (S4162) in the second embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, a winning information-related process (S4271), which is one process in the command determination process 3 (S4172) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment, will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information-related processing (S4271).

In the winning information-related processing (S4271), first, the information indicating the gaming state stored in the state setting area 223j is read out (S5501). Next, in the process of S5501, it is determined whether or not the read gaming state (that is, the current gaming state) is in the probable change (S5502). When it is determined that the read game state is in the probable change (S5502: Yes), the value of the residual probability change number area 223ba is read out (S5503). Next, in the process of S5503, it is determined whether the value of the read residual probability variation number area 223ba is larger than 0 (S5504). When it is determined that the value of the residual probability variation number area 223ba is larger than 0 (S5504: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is information in the winning information received this time (S5505). When it is determined that there is hit information in the winning information (S5505: Yes), the look-ahead hit flag 223bb is set to ON (S5506). On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no hit information in the winning information (S5505: No), the processing of S5506 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5507.

Next, the value of the residual probability variation number area 223ba is subtracted by 1 (S5507), the information of the received winning information command is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b (S5508), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5502, when it is determined that the read game state is not in the probable change (S5502: No), or in the process of S5504, when it is determined that the value of the residual probability variation number area 223ba is 0. (S5504: No), a display winning command corresponding to the received winning information is set (S5509), the above-mentioned processing of S5508 is executed, and this processing is terminated.

Next, the jackpot-related process 3 (S4552) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 132. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot related process 3 (S4552). The jackpot-related process 3 (S4552) executes the above-mentioned S4608 or S4611 process for the jackpot-related process (S4502) in the first embodiment described above, and then executes the jackpot end process (S4651). It differs in that. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the jackpot end processing (S4651), which is one of the jackpot-related processing 3 (S4552) executed by the MPU221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment, will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end processing (S4651).

In the jackpot end processing (S4651), first, all the information stored in the winning information storage area 223b is read out (S5601). Next, it is determined whether or not there is winning information (S5602). If it is determined that there is no winning information (S5602: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is winning information (S5602: Yes), the number of winning information determined in the process of S5602 is subtracted from the probability variation setting number (n = 4) (S5603). Next, in the process of S5603, the subtracted value is set in the residual probability variation number area 223ba (S5604).

Next, it is determined whether or not the read information has hit information (S5605). If it is determined that the read information has winning information (S5605: Yes), is the winning information included in the winning information corresponding to the next variation (that is, the first variation executed after the jackpot game ends)? Is determined (S5606). In the process of S5606, when it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the next fluctuation contains the winning information (S5606: Yes), the player is notified that the latent state is set immediately after the big hit is completed. A special effect mode for this is set (S5607), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the next fluctuation does not include the winning information (S5606: No), the look-ahead hit flag 223bb is set to ON (S5608), and the winning information including the winning information changes. The number of special figure fluctuations up to this point is set in the remaining fluctuation number counter 223bc (S5609), the ending command for display including the bingo game display mode is set (S5611), and this process is terminated.

Further, in the process of S5605, when it is determined that there is no information in the read state (S5605: No), the probability variation setting number (n = 4) is set in the remaining fluctuation number counter 223bc (S5610), and the above-mentioned S5611 Process is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the variation display setting process 3 (S4173) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 3 (S4173). The variation display setting process 3 (S4173) determines that the current gaming state is not the latent state in the process of S5103 with respect to the variation display setting process (S4113) in the first embodiment described above (S5103). : No), the difference is that the probability variation variation display setting process (S5151) is executed. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 135, the probability variation variation display setting process (S5151), which is one process in the variation display setting process 3 (S4173) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. explain. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the contents of the probability variation variation display setting process (S5151). In the probabilistic variation display setting process (S5151), when the current gaming state is the probabilistic variation state, the variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is based on the special figure 1 variation pattern command received from the main control unit 110. Is set, and the process of transmitting to the display control device 114 is executed.

In the probability variation variation display setting process (S5151), first, it is determined whether or not the current variation is a small hit (S5701). When it is determined that the fluctuation this time is a small hit (S5701: Yes), an effect mode such that it becomes all bingo, that is, an effect mode as shown in FIG. 114 (b) is set (S5709), and S5710. Move to processing. On the other hand, in the process of S5701 when it is determined that the current fluctuation is not a small hit (S5701: No), it is determined whether the look-ahead hit flag 223bb is set to ON (S5702). When it is determined that the look-ahead flag 223bb is set to ON (S5702: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the residual variation count counter 223bc is 2, that is, whether the residual variation count is 2. S5703). When it is determined that the value of the remaining fluctuation number counter 223bc is 2 (S5703: Yes), the winning information corresponding to the next fluctuation is read from the winning information storage area 223b (S5704).

Next, based on the winning information read in the process of S5704 and the number of fluctuations, the effect mode is set from the probability variation effect selection table 222ba (S5705). Next, the look-ahead flag 223bb is set to off (S5706), the residual probability variation number area 223ba and the residual variation number counter 223bc are reset (S5707), and the process proceeds to S5710. On the other hand, in the processing of S5702, when it is determined that the look-ahead hit flag 223bb is not set to ON (S5702: No), or in the processing of S5703, when it is determined that the value of the remaining fluctuation number counter 223bc is not 2. (S5703: No), an effect mode in which Bingo cannot be established is set (S5708), the value of the remaining fluctuation number counter 223 bc is subtracted by 1 (S5711), and the process proceeds to S5710.

Next, the extracted variation pattern command and the display variation pattern command corresponding to the effect mode set in any of S5705, S5708, and S5709 are set (S5710), and this process is terminated.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 160. Each of the above-described embodiments is configured so that the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) fluctuate at the same time (so-called simultaneous fluctuation type), and the game state is latent. A large number of small hit games (RUSH games) are executed by executing the lottery (variation) of the special figure 2 during the period when the state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) is set. It was configured to be possible.

Then, the latent probability state once set is the first latent probability end condition established based on the start of the jackpot game, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. It was configured to end when any of the second latent probability end conditions that are satisfied based on the above is satisfied.

In the above-described first to third embodiments configured in this way, for example, when the first latent probability end condition is satisfied, the latent probability gaming state (as the first advantageous game that is advantageous to the player) ( Since the RUSH game) is executed until just before the big hit game, which is the second advantageous game, is started, it is possible for the player to continuously execute a plurality of different advantageous games, and the player can play the game. Was able to give a feeling of satisfaction.

However, in each of the above-described embodiments, after the probabilistic state (high probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) is set, the latent probability state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) is set. The probability change end condition to be shifted to is configured so that multiple types can be set, but since only the above two types are used for the probability probability end condition to end the latent probability state, it is latent for the player. There is a problem that the period for which the probability state continues is easily predicted.

In response to such a problem, in the fourth embodiment, every time a special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) is executed, a lottery is performed to shift (fall) the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state. (Hereinafter referred to as a fall lottery) is configured to be executed, and a low probability state of a special symbol is set when the fall lottery is won.

With this configuration, it is possible to solve the problem that the player can easily predict the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set, which is an advantageous game that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to play a game while expecting that the latent state game (RUSH game) will continue for a long time.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, during the period (special figure variation display period) in which the variation display (special figure variation display) for displaying that the jackpot is won in one special symbol is executed, the other Even if the lottery of the special symbol is executed, the lottery result of the fall lottery is invalid.

As a result, if the latent state is set by satisfying the first probability change end condition (probability change end condition that is established based on the jackpot winning), the latent state game (RUSH) executed during the latent state is set. In the game), since the fall lottery can be invalidated, the latent probability state game (RUSH game) can be made into an advantageous latent state game (super RUSH game) that can be executed for a long period of time.

On the other hand, if the latent state is set by satisfying the second probability change end condition (the probability change end condition that is satisfied based on the number of changes of the special symbol), the fall lottery is executed during the latent state. Therefore, since there is a risk that the latent state will end early based on winning the fall lottery, the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed is the above-mentioned advantageous latent probability. It can be a normal latent state game that tends to be shorter than a state game.

Here, with reference to FIG. 136, the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 during the probable change state in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 136 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a transition method of four types of gaming states set in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, the transition content of the gaming state when the fall lottery is won is added to the method of transitioning the gaming state in the pachinko machine 10 used in the first embodiment described above, and each transition. The difference is that the elements until the condition (predetermined condition) is satisfied and the transition ratio that shifts at the time of winning the jackpot are changed, and other than that, they are the same. Detailed description of the same element will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 136, in the fourth embodiment, the fall lottery for shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state is executed, and the fall lottery is performed during the probability change state. If you win, you will move to the time saving state, and if you win the fall lottery during the latent state, you will move to the normal state.

With this configuration, in order to set the latent probability state, which is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, the probability variation state (high probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) is set. In the state, the condition for shifting the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state (for example, time-saving number of times digestion) is higher than the condition for shifting the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state (winning of the fall lottery). It needs to be established first.

Therefore, whether or not the latent state is set is determined according to the timing at which the transition condition of each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol) is satisfied, so that the player can pay attention to the game content and the game. It is possible to improve the interest of. Further, although details will be described later, in the fourth embodiment, the game method to be executed is the same (left-handed game) in the probability change state and the time saving state, and the effect content displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is configured to be the same. Therefore, even if the fall lottery is won before the transition condition of the normal symbol (the condition of shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state) is satisfied, it is difficult for the player to grasp that fact. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the flow in which the latent probability state is set and the flow of the game in the latent probability state will be described. FIG. 137 (a) is a timing chart schematically showing the flow when the special figure 1 jackpot is won (when the first probability change end condition is satisfied) during the probability change state, and FIG. 137 (b) is a timing chart. It is a timing chart schematically showing the flow when the number of time reductions becomes 0 during the probability change state (when the second probability change end condition is satisfied).

As shown in FIG. 137 (a), in the fourth embodiment, in the state where the high probability state (probability variation state or latent probability state) of the special symbol is set, the high probability state of the special symbol is changed to the low probability state. The lottery (falling lottery) for shifting to is configured to be performed every time the lottery (variation) of the special symbol is executed, and when the jackpot is won during the probability change state (first probability change end condition). Is set to), it is configured to be set as a fall lottery invalid period in which the fall lottery is not executed.

On the other hand, when the latent probability state is set based on the satisfaction of the second probability change end condition, the fall lottery is valid even during the latent probability state game (RUSH game) as shown in FIG. 137 (b). Since it is executed, the latent state is shifted to the normal state based on the fact that the fall lottery is won before the special figure 1 change is completed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the first probability change end condition is satisfied, the latent probability state game (RUSH game) which is more advantageous than the case where the second probability change end condition is satisfied can be executed.

<Regarding the contents of the staging display in the fourth embodiment>
In the fourth embodiment, in addition to the effect content executed in the first embodiment described above as the effect content executed during the probability change state, the player is suggested (notified) the opportunity to set the latent probability state. There is a difference between the effect for this purpose and the effect for suggesting (notifying) that the fall lottery was won during the latent state game (RUSH game).

Here, with reference to FIGS. 138 to 140, the contents of the effect added by the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 138 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the effect for suggesting that the latent probability state game (RUSH game) is set by satisfying the second probability change end condition (reaching the number of time reductions). FIG. 138 (b) schematically shows the content of the effect for suggesting that the latent probability state game (RUSH game) is set by satisfying the first probability change end condition (big hit winning). It is a schematic diagram.

As shown in FIGS. 138 (a) and 138 (b), in the present embodiment, the player has an opportunity to set the latent state according to the display mode of the effect symbol 813 displayed when the treasure box 812 is opened. When the display mode of "444" is displayed as the effect symbol 813, it is notified that the second probability change end condition (reaching the number of time reductions) has been satisfied, and " When the display mode of "Super RUSH" is displayed, it is configured to notify that the first probability change end condition (big hit winning) has been satisfied.

In the fourth embodiment, the player is notified of the trigger for setting the latent probability state by the display mode of the effect symbol 813 displayed as the effect result during the probability change state. A configuration other than the above may be used. For example, a plurality of display modes having different selection ratios may be provided according to the type of probability variation end condition established as the display mode of the displayed effect symbol 813. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting which probabilistic end condition is satisfied.

Here, with reference to FIG. 139 (a), the display contents when the fall lottery is won during the latent state game (RUSH game) will be described. FIG. 139 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents when the fall lottery is won during the latent state game (RUSH game). In the fourth embodiment, the fall lottery is executed every time the special figure lottery start condition for executing the special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) is satisfied, and the special figure lottery start condition is satisfied. It is configured to execute the fall lottery during the period from the time when the big hit lottery is executed, that is, before the big hit lottery is executed.

Therefore, when the fall lottery is won, as shown in FIG. 139 (a), the latent state game (RUSH game) is displayed while the special symbol (special figure 1) corresponding to the fall lottery is variablely displayed. Is notified to indicate that the game has ended, and it is suppressed that a new special figure 2 change is executed after the fall lottery is won (after the game state shifts from the latent state to the normal state). In addition, the display mode of the guidance display area Dm3 is variably displayed from "right-handed" to "left-handed" while the special symbol (special figure 1) corresponding to the winning of the fall lottery is variablely displayed. After the fall lottery is won (after the gaming state shifts from the latent state to the normal state), it is suppressed that the new special figure 2 fluctuation is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 139 (b), the content of the effect executed when the jackpot is won during the latent state game (RUSH game) will be described. FIG. 139 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the effect content executed when a big hit is won during the latent state game (RUSH game).

Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the contents of the effect during the advantageous latent state game (super RUSH game), which is advantageous to the player among the latent state games (RUSH game), will be described. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when the latent probability state is set based on the satisfaction of the first probability change end condition, the fall lottery is invalidated during the setting period of the latent probability state. The treasure box 812 is configured so that the lottery invalid period is set, and the fact that the game is in the advantageous latent state game (super RUSH game) is displayed in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The number of displays is increased, and the comment "in super RUSH" indicating that the sub-display area Ds is in the advantageous latent state game is displayed.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 to 146. First, with reference to FIG. 141, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like use the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, drawing the display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. The difference is that the fall lottery counter C6, which is used when determining the lottery result of the fall lottery, is added to each of the above-described embodiments.

The fall lottery counter C6 is a loop counter whose value is updated in the range of "0 to 239", and is updated at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31), and is also updated. Some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 52), and the updated values are stored in a counter buffer (fall lottery counter buffer) set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203.

The value of the fall lottery counter C6 is referred to in the fall lottery executed when the high probability state of the special symbol is set (when the probability variation flag 203g is set to on), and is acquired. When it is determined that the value of the fall lottery counter C6 is a determination value predetermined in the fall lottery table 202cc, the high probability state of the special symbol shifts to the low probability state (falls).

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 142, the ROM 202 of the fourth embodiment is provided with the jackpot type selection 4 table 202ca instead of the jackpot type selection table 202d for the ROM 202 of the first embodiment described above, and a fall lottery. The difference is that the table 202cc is provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection 4 table 202ca will be described with reference to FIG. 143. FIG. 143 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the jackpot type selection 4 table 202ca. As shown in FIG. 143, in the fourth embodiment, when the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed, the operation content (operation scenario) for always opening the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is It differs from the above-mentioned first embodiment in that it is set. Further, as the number of rounds of the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won, the operation content (operation scenario) is set so that the jackpot game of at least 5 rounds or more is executed, which is the same as the first embodiment described above. Is different.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, the operation content executed during the small hit game is to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether the special symbol has won the big hit or the small hit. A jackpot game in which the same movement content as the (motion scenario) (a concept including a difference that is difficult for the player to discriminate) is executed, and a latent state is set, which is a game state in which the player has an advantage. While it was difficult to understand the timing and the timing of the end, in the fourth embodiment, the player can easily determine whether the jackpot is won or the small hit is won (in the jackpot game). By making the operation content different from the operation content of the small hit game, the player can easily distinguish it).

In this way, by making the player easily determine whether the big hit game is executed or the small hit game is executed, the number of small hit games executed during the latent state game (RUSH game) can be easily determined. Can be grasped by.

Next, the fall lottery table 202cc will be described with reference to FIG. 146 (a). FIG. 146 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the fall lottery table 202cc. The fall lottery table 202cc is a data table in which the determination value of the above-mentioned fall lottery counter C6 is stored. The value of the fall lottery counter C6 acquired when the ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 (at the time of the start winning) is any of the values specified in the fall lottery table 202cc. When it matches the judgment value of, it is set to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol (to fall).

More specifically, four determination values of "43,107,195,222" are defined as determination values for determining a fall in a high probability state of a special symbol. Here, the fall lottery counter C6 is a loop counter whose value is updated in the range of "0 to 239". Of the 240 possible values of the fall lottery counter C6, there are four judgment values that are determined to fall, so the probability of falling (shifting to the low probability state of the special symbol) in the probabilistic state of the special symbol. Is 1/60 (4/240).

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the probability of winning a big hit in a high probability state of a special symbol is set to be 6/480 (see FIG. 15A), and a small hit is won in the lottery of the special figure 2. The probability of this is 221/480 (see FIG. 15 (b)). That is, the probability of winning the fall lottery is slightly higher than the probability of winning the jackpot. That is, in the fourth embodiment, in the state where the latent probability state is set, it is configured so that it is easy to win in the order of small hit, fall, and big hit.

The winning rates of the big hit, the small hit, and the fall in the high probability state of the special symbol are not limited to those shown in the present embodiment, and the ease of winning may be different. For example, the fall probability (probability of winning the fall lottery) is set to be lower than the jackpot probability, and the jackpot game and the small hit game are repeatedly enjoyed until the fall is won in the latent state. Alternatively, the small hit probability and the fall probability are set to be almost the same (for example, the small hit probability 1/3, the fall probability 1/4), and a special symbol lottery is performed during the latent state. It may be a playability that makes the player excited every time it is played. Also, even if the fall probability is set high (for example, 1/2) and the special symbol lottery can be executed with the latent probability set only when the fall is not made in the first fall lottery. good.

In the fall lottery table 202cc in the present embodiment, only the determination value for determining whether or not the special symbol has fallen in the high probability state is specified, and the determination value for the low probability state of the special symbol is specified. It has not been. This is because it is a waste of processing to determine whether or not to shift to the low-probability state of the special symbol when the special symbol is already in the low-probability state.

In the fourth embodiment, the fall lottery table 202cc and the regularly updated fall lottery counter C6 are compared to shift from the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol (fall). ) Whether or not is determined. That is, the timing of transition from the latent state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) to the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) can be randomized. .. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the timing at which the latent state ends during the latent state game (RUSH game) performed during the period in which the latent state is set.

In the present embodiment, a lottery (determination) is made as to whether or not to shift (fall) from the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol, but it is a lottery (determination) to shift to another state. ) May. For example, whether or not to shift from the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state of the normal symbol may be determined by a lottery (special symbol lottery) executed for each change of the special symbol. As a result, it is possible to randomly determine how long the high-probability state of the normal symbol lasts, so that the probabilistic state (high-probability state of the special symbol, high-probability state of the normal symbol) is changed to the latent state (high-probability state of the special symbol). , It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing of shifting to the low probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, during the period in which the probabilistic state is set, the game can always be played while expecting that the latent probable state is set. Further, for example, it may be configured so that whether or not to shift from the low probability state of the special symbol to the high probability state of the special symbol can be drawn.

Next, with reference to FIG. 144, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 144 shows the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown schematically. As shown in FIG. 144, the RAM 203 of the fourth embodiment is different from the RAM 203 of the first embodiment described above in that the state update restriction flag 203ca is provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The state update restriction flag 203ca is a flag for indicating that the update of various parameters corresponding to various conditions for shifting the game state is restricted, and is various when it is set to ON. It indicates that the parameter update is restricted. In the fourth embodiment, when the state update limit flag 203ca is set to ON, the process of updating the value of the time saving counter 203f is skipped.

This state update restriction flag 203ca is when it is determined in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see S386 in FIG. 147) that the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) (S406 in FIG. 147). : Yes), or when it is determined in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see S975 in FIG. 150) that the jackpot is won by the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) (S1006: Yes in FIG. 150). ) Is set to on (S487 in FIG. 147, S1077 in FIG. 150).

Further, when it is referred to in the game state update process 4 (see S388 in FIG. 149) (see S651 in FIG. 149) and it is determined that it is set to ON (S6511: Yes in FIG. 149), the time saving counter 203f The process of updating (subtracting) the value, that is, the process of updating the parameter (number of time reductions) corresponding to the condition for shifting the gaming state is skipped. Then, when it is determined in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (see S287 in FIG. 148) that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to on (S801: Yes in FIG. 148), it is set to off. (See S871 in FIG. 148). Similarly, when it is determined in the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (see S293 in FIG. 151) that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S1501: Yes in FIG. 151), it is also turned off. It is set (S1571 in FIG. 151).

That is, in the fourth embodiment, when a jackpot is won by any of a plurality of special symbols (special figure 1 and special figure 2), the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to on, and the special symbol won by the jackpot is set. It is configured so that the gaming state is not changed during the period when the variable display of is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 145 (a), the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 145 (a) shows the voice lamp control device according to the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of ROM 222 of MPU 221 of 113 schematically. As shown in FIG. 145 (a), the ROM 222 of the fourth embodiment is different from the ROM 222 of the first embodiment described above in that the latent mode selection table 222ca and the fall notification selection table 222cc are provided. is doing. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The latent mode selection table 222ca is a data table referred to when selecting an effect mode (latent mode) of an effect (latent effect) for notifying the player that the latent state has been set. .. In this latent mode selection table 222ca, a plurality of effect modes (a trigger for setting a latent probability state (a trigger for winning a big hit, a trigger for reaching the number of time reductions (time reduction omission)) and a mode setting effect counter 223ca to be described later are associated with each other. The effect mode) is defined, and it is possible to suggest to the player an opportunity to set the latent probability state depending on the effect mode of the selected latent probability effect.

Next, the detailed contents defined in the latent mode selection table 222ca will be described with reference to FIG. 146 (b). FIG. 146 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the latent mode selection table 222ca. As shown in FIG. 146 (b), when the information included in the state command received from the main control device 110 is the jackpot latent state, the value of the mode setting effect counter 223ca acquired. "Invincible mode" is defined in the range of "0 to 49", "normal mode B" is defined in the range of "50 to 89", and "normal mode A" is defined in the range of "90 to 99". ing.

When the information included in the state command received from the main control device 110 indicates that the latent state of this time is the time-saving latent probability state, the value of the acquired mode setting effect counter 223ca is "0 to 49". "Normal mode A" is defined in the range, "normal mode B" is defined in the range of "50 to 89", and "normal mode B" is defined in the range of "90 to 99".

The fall notification selection table 222cc is a data table for selecting a notification mode for notifying (suggesting) the player that the fall lottery has been won, and the time saving state (high probability state of the normal symbol) continues. The notification mode is selected based on the value of the remaining time reduction area 223k indicating the remaining period set and the value of the fall notification effect counter 223cf.

The fourth embodiment is executed by the game method (left-handed game) and the third symbol display device 81 depending on whether the probabilistic state is set as the game state or the time saving state is set. It is configured so that the various display modes are the same. With this configuration, the player cannot easily determine whether the current state is a probable change state or a time saving state. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, since the fall lottery is executed, the time is shortened at random timing in the state where the probabilistic state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set. The state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is configured to be set.

Then, when the high probability state of the normal symbol shifts to the low probability state while the probability change state is set, the gaming state shifts from the probability change state to the latent state, which is advantageous to the player. While the probability state game (RUSH game) is executed, when the high probability state of the normal symbol shifts to the low probability state in the state where the time reduction state is set, the game state changes from the time reduction state to the normal state. Move to the state.

Here, the specific contents of the fall notification selection table 222cc will be described with reference to FIG. 146 (c). FIG. 146 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fall notification selection table 222cc. As shown in FIG. 146 (c), the fall notification selection table 222cc is associated with the number of remaining time reductions (information on the remaining time reduction number area 223k) at the time of winning the fall and the value of the fall notification effect counter 223cf. The notification mode is specified.

Specifically, when the fall winning timing is 0 for the remaining time reduction number (when the information stored in the remaining time reduction number area 223k indicates 0 remaining time reduction number), that is, the high probability of the normal symbol. When the fall lottery is won due to the fluctuation that the state ends, "confirmed notification" is defined regardless of the value of the acquired fall notification effect counter 223cf. Then, when the fall winning timing is 1 to 49 in the number of remaining time reductions, that is, when the period in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set has passed more than half, the acquired fall notification effect counter 223cf is used. "Suggestion notification" is defined in the range of "0 to 49" or "90 to 99", and "confirmed notification" is defined in the range of "50 to 89". When the number of remaining time reductions is 50 to 98, that is, when the period in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set remains more than half, the value of the acquired fall notification effect counter 223cf is "0 to 89". "Suggestion notification" is specified in the range of "90 to 99", and "confirmed notification" is specified in the range of "90 to 99".

Here, when "confirmed notification" is selected as the notification mode, the player has fallen to a notification mode in which the player can easily grasp that the fall lottery has been won, for example, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. A notification mode is set such as displaying to that effect (for example, displaying "sorry") or notifying that the fall lottery has been won by voice or the emission color of the decorative member.

Further, when "suggestion notification" is selected as the notification mode, a notification mode (for example, display of "pinch") for notifying the player that there is a possibility of winning the fall lottery is set. .. Although detailed description is omitted, this "suggestion notification" is configured to be set when the notification condition is satisfied even when the fall lottery is not won. With this configuration, the "suggestion notification" is executed regardless of whether the fall lottery is actually won or not.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the remaining period (remaining time reduction) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is continuously set as the mode of the notification (suggestion) effect of whether or not the fall lottery has been won. It is configured to be set based on the period), and it is configured so that the longer the remaining time is, the more difficult it is to set the "confirmed notification". Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player knows that he / she has won the fall lottery with a long remaining time, and the motivation for playing during the remaining time is reduced.

Further, the setting frequency of "suggestion notification" set when the fall lottery is not won may be configured to be variable based on the length of the remaining time short period. For example, the longer the remaining time short period, the more the fall. It is preferable to configure it so that "suggestion notification" can be easily set when the lottery has not been won. This makes it possible to change the possibility of actually winning the fall lottery when the "suggestion notification" is executed, based on the length of the remaining short period, so that the "suggestion notification" is executed. It is possible to make the player predict whether or not the fall lottery will be won while discriminating between the frequency (number of times) to be played and the number of times the remaining time is shortened, and to improve the interest of the game. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 145 (b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 145 (b) shows the voice lamp control device of the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of RAM 223 of MPU 221 of 113 schematically. As shown in FIG. 145 (b), the RAM 223 of the fourth embodiment has the mode setting effect counter 223ca, the latent mode storage area 223cc, and the number of small hits with respect to the RAM 223 of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the counter 223cc, the fall flag 223cd, the time saving notification flag 223ce, and the fall notification effect counter 223cf are provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The mode setting effect counter 223ca is a counter used when selecting the latent mode using the latent mode selection table 222ca. It is updated repeatedly in the range of 0 to 99. Although not shown, it is updated by 1 each time the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed.

The latent mode storage area 223cc is a storage area for storing the currently set latent mode, and the latent mode determined in the latent mode setting process (see S4451 in FIG. 154) is stored (set). (See S5804 in FIG. 154). Then, it is referred to in the variation display setting process 4 for special figure 1 (see S5171 in FIG. 159) (see S5251 in FIG. 159), and the variation pattern command for display is set (see S5252 in FIG. 159). Similarly, it is referred to in the variation display setting process 4 for special figure 2 (see S5175 in FIG. 160) (S5351 in FIG. 160), and the variation pattern command for display is set (S5352 in FIG. 160). The information (latent mode information) stored (set) in the latent mode storage area 223cc is when it is determined by the state command process 4 (see S4281 in FIG. 153) that the gaming state has shifted to the normal state. (See S4454 in FIG. 153).

The small hit count counter 223cc is a counter for measuring the number of small hits won during the latent state, and the small hit start command is issued in the small hit related process 4 (see S4574 in FIG. 156) during the latent state. Upon reception, the value is incremented by 1 (see S4752 in FIG. 156). Then, it is referred to when determining the number of small hits won during the latent state (S4753 in FIG. 156). In the present embodiment, the small hit count display 825 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on the value of the small hit count counter 223 cc, and the small hit is displayed during the period when the latent state is set. When the number of winnings reaches a predetermined number of times (a multiple of 10), the remaining time in the latent state is displayed.

The fall flag 223cd is a flag for indicating that the fall lottery has been won during the probability change state, and is set to ON to indicate that the fall lottery has been won.

The time saving notification flag 223ce wins the fall lottery during the probability change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol), and goes to the time saving state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol). It is a flag for indicating that a fall notification effect (an effect executed when a definite notification is selected in the fall notification selection table 222cc) for notifying the player of the transition has been executed. By setting it to ON, the fall notification effect is set.

The fall notification effect counter 223cf is a counter used when selecting the notification mode of the fall lottery using the fall notification selection table 222cc. It is updated repeatedly in the range of 0 to 99. Although not shown, it is updated by 1 each time the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 147 to 151. The control process of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment is different from the control process of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment described above, in place of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34). Special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see FIG. 147), first special symbol fluctuation stop process 4 (see FIG. 148) instead of the first special symbol change stop process (see FIG. 38), game state update process (see FIG. 36). Instead of the game state update process 4 (see FIG. 149), the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40) is replaced by the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see FIG. 150), and the second special symbol change stop process. The difference is that the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (see FIG. 151) is executed instead of (see FIG. 45). Other than that, the same processing is executed. The same processing is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 147. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386). The first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386) shifts from the probability variation state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol with respect to the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) in the first embodiment described above (S306). The difference is that a process for executing a lottery for whether or not to make the player fall is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386), first, the data of the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired (S401). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is on (S481). When it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is on (S481: Yes), since the jackpot of the second special symbol is being executed, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is off (S481: No), it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g is on, that is, whether or not the probability variation is in progress (S482). When it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is off, that is, the probability change is not in progress (S482: No), the process proceeds to S404.

On the other hand, in the process of S482, when it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is on, that is, when it is determined that the probability change is in progress (S482: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the fall lottery table 202cc. (S483). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the fall lottery counter C6 matches any of the determination values (random value) defined in the fall lottery table 202cc (that is, the value corresponding to the fall) (S484). ), If it is determined that the value does not correspond to the fall (S484: No), the process proceeds to S403.

On the other hand, in the process of S484, when it is determined that the value of the fall lottery counter C6 matches any of the determination values (random value) specified in the fall lottery table 202cc (value corresponding to the fall) ( S484: Yes), by setting the probability variation flag 203g to off, the probabilistic variation state of the special symbol is shifted (falls) to the low probability state of the special symbol (S485). Then, a fall command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the transition (fall) has occurred from the probabilistic state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol is set (S486), and the process proceeds to S404. Transition. Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the data in the execution area this time is a big hit in the processing of S406 (S406: Yes), after the processing of S407 to S411 is executed, the state update restriction flag 203ca is executed. Is set to on (S487), and this process ends.

By executing the special symbol change start process 4 (S386), a lottery for whether or not to shift (fall) to the low probability state of the special symbol and a lottery for whether or not the special symbol is a big hit are easily executed. be able to. In this embodiment, as the order of processing in the probabilistic state of the special symbol, a lottery (falling lottery) is first executed to determine whether or not to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol, and then the special symbol is a big hit. It was configured to execute a lottery as to whether or not it would be, but the processing order is not limited to this. The big hit lottery may be executed first, and then the fall lottery may be performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 148, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (S287) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (S287). The first special symbol change stop process 4 (S287) executes the processes S801 to S805 for the first special symbol change stop process (S207) in the above-described first embodiment, and then sets the state update restriction flag 203ca. The difference is that the process (S871) to be set to off is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the game state update process 4 (S388) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 149. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the contents of the game state update process 4 (S388). The game state update process 4 (S388) adds a process (S651) for determining whether or not the state update restriction flag 203ca is on to the game state update process (S308) in the first embodiment described above. It's different. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the game state update process 4 (S388), first, it is determined whether or not the state update limit flag 203ca is on (S651). If it is determined that the state update restriction flag 203ca is on (S6511: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S651 that the state update restriction flag 203ca is not on (S6511: No), the process proceeds to the process of S601.

Then, after executing the processes of S601 to S604, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag 203g is on (that is, whether or not the probability change is in progress) in the process of S605 (S605). When it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is on (S605: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is on (S652). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is on (S652: Yes), a status command indicating the jackpot latency state is set (S653), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S652, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is not on (S652: No), a state command indicating the time saving latent probability state is set (S654), and this process is terminated. ..

Next, the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S975) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 150. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S975). The second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S975) shifts from the probability variation state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol with respect to the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905) in the first embodiment described above. The difference is that a process for executing a lottery for whether or not to make the player fall is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, with reference to FIG. 147, in contrast to the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386), a process of shifting the target of the change from the first special symbol to the second special symbol is performed. Since it is only executed, the detailed explanation is omitted.

Next, the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (S293) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 151. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (S293). The second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (S293) executes the S1501 and S1503 to S1506 for the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S213) in the first embodiment described above, and then sets the state update restriction flag 203ca. The difference is that a process (S1571) to be set to off is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 152 to 160, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. The control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment is a command determination process 4 instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 60) for the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment described above. (See FIG. 152), the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 157) is executed instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 69), and the other processes are the same. The same processing is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the command determination process 4 (S4182) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 152. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 4 (S4182). When the command determination process 4 (S4182) determines that the status command has been received from the main control device 110 in the process of S4203 with respect to the command determination process (S4112) in the first embodiment described above (S4203: No), the difference is that the state command process 4 (S4281) is executed instead of the state command process (S4204). Since other processes are the same as the command determination process (S4112) in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 153, the state command process 4 (S4281), which is one of the command determination processes 4 (S4182) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the contents of the state command process 4 (S4281). The state command process 4 (S4281) determines that the latent mode setting process (S4451) is added to the state command process (S4204) in the first embodiment described above, and whether or not a command related to a fall has been received. The difference is that processing is added. Since other processes are the same as the state command process (S4204) in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the state command process 4 (S4281), if it is determined that the command received this time is a state command indicating the transition to the latent state (S4403: Yes), the latent mode setting process (S4451) is executed. The details of the latent mode setting process (S4451) will be described later with reference to FIG. 154. Next, the value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the state command is stored in the state setting area 223j (S4405), and the process proceeds to S4452. On the other hand, in the process of S4403, when it is determined that the command received from the main control device 110 this time is not a state command indicating the transition to the latent state (S4403: No), a fall command is issued from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not the command has been received (S4452). If it is determined that the fall command has been received (S4452: Yes), the fall effect setting process is executed (S4453). The details of the fall effect setting process (S4453) will be described later with reference to FIG. 155. On the other hand, in the process of S4452, if it is determined that the fall command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S4452: No), the process of S4453 is skipped and the process of S4406 is executed. Next, after executing the processing of S4406 to S4411, the latent mode storage area 223cc, the small hit count counter 223cc, the fall flag 223cd, and the time saving notified flag 223ce are cleared (S4454), and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 154, the latent mode setting process (S4451), which is one process in the state command process 4 (S4281) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, will be described. .. FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the contents of the latent mode setting process (S4451).

In the latent mode setting process (S4451), first, the type of the state command received from the main control unit 110 this time is read out (S5801). Next, the latent mode is determined using the latent mode selection table 222ca (see FIG. 146 (b)) based on the received state command and the value of the mode setting effect counter 223ca (S5802). Next, in the process of S5802, the display latent mode command corresponding to the determined latent mode is set (S5803), and the determined latent mode is set in the latent mode storage area 223cc (S5804). Next, the latent probability notification effect for notifying the entry of the latent probability state is set (S5805), the value corresponding to the game state notified by the state command is stored in the state setting area 223j (S5806), and this process is terminated. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 155, a fall effect setting process (S4453), which is one process in the state command process 4 (S4281) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fall effect setting process (S4453).

In the fall effect setting process (S4453), first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (S5901). When it is determined that the current gaming state is the latent state (S5901: Yes), the latent probability notification effect for notifying the end of the latent state is set (S5902), and the state command received from the main control device 110. The value corresponding to the game state notified by is stored in the state setting area 223j (S5903), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5901 when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S5901: No), then the remaining time reduction number is 99 or more, that is, the remaining time reduction area 223k. It is determined whether or not the value stored in is 99 or more (S5904). When it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is 99 or more (S5904: Yes), the time reduction notification effect for notifying the entry of the time reduction state is set (S5905), and the time reduction notification flag 223ce is set to ON (S5906). .. On the other hand, in the process of S5904, when it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is not 99 or more (S5904: No), the process of S5905 and S5906 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S5907. Next, the fall flag 223cd is set to ON (S5907), the value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the state command received from the main control device 110 is stored in the state setting area 223j (S5908), and this processing is terminated. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 156, the small hit related process 4 (S4574) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit related process 4 (S4574). The small hit-related process 4 (S4574) differs from the small hit-related process (S4504) in the first embodiment described above in that a process for displaying the remaining time information is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the small hit-related process 4 (S4574), first, when it is determined that the small hit start command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4701: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is in the latent state. (S4751). When it is determined that the current gaming state is the latent state (S4751: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the small hit count counter 223cc (S4752). Next, it is determined whether the value of the small hit count counter 223cc is a multiple of 10 (S4753). When it is determined that the value of the small hit count counter 223cc is a multiple of 10 (S4753: Yes), the information stored in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o is read out (S4754). A display time information command indicating the remaining time information is set (S4755), then a display small hit start command is set (S4702), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S4751 when it is determined that the player is not in the latent state (S4751: No), or in the processing of S4753, when it is determined that the value of the small hit count counter 223cc is not a multiple of 10 (S4751: No). S4753: No), S4702 processing is executed, and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 157, the variation display setting process 4 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 4 (S4183). The variation display setting process 4 (S4183) replaces the variation display setting process (S5104) for the special figure 1 with respect to the variation display setting process (S4113) in the first embodiment described above, and is a variation display setting process for the special figure 1. 4 (S5171), the variation display setting process 4 (S5175) for the special figure 2 is executed instead of the variation display setting process (S5109) for the special figure 2, and the fall notification process (S5173) is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the variation display setting process 4 (S4183), first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d in FIG. 1 is ON (S5101). When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S5101: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off (S5102). Next, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (S5103). When it is determined that the current gaming state is the latent state (S5103: Yes), the variation display setting process 4 (S5711) for special figure 1 is executed, and the first special symbol in the prize information storage area 223b is executed. The corresponding data is shifted (S5106). The details of the variation display setting process 4 (S5711) for the special figure 1 will be described later with reference to FIG. 159.

On the other hand, in the process of S5103, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S5103: No), it is determined whether or not the fall flag 223cd is on (S5172). If it is determined that the fall flag 223cd is on (S5172: Yes), the fall notification process (S5173) is executed. The details of the fall notification process (S5173) will be described later with reference to FIG. 158. Next, based on the extracted variation pattern, the variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is set (S5105), and the process proceeds to the process of S5106 described above. Next, the process executed for the special figure 1 of S5171 to S5173 is executed by changing the target to the special figure 2.

Here, with reference to FIG. 158, a fall notification process (S5173), which is a process in the variation display setting process 4 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fall notification process (S5173).

In the fall notification process (S5173), first, it is determined whether or not the time saving notification flag 223ce is on (S8001). When it is determined that the time reduction notified flag 223ce is on (S8001: Yes), a latent variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is set based on the extracted variation pattern (S8009), and this processing is performed. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time reduction notification flag 223ce is off (S8001: No), the information of the remaining time reduction frequency area 223k is read out (S8002). Next, the fall notification mode is determined using the fall notification selection table 222cc based on the number of remaining time reductions read in the processing of S8002 and the value of the fall notification effect counter 223cf (S8003). Next, in the process of S8003, it is determined whether the determined notification mode is the definite notification mode (S8004). When it is determined that the mode is the definite notification mode (S8004: Yes), the time saving notification flag 223ce is set to off (S8005), and the fall flag 223cd is set to off (S8006). Next, a time saving notification effect for notifying the entry of the time saving state is set (S8007), the above-mentioned processing of S8009 is executed, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S8004 that the determined notification mode is not the definite notification mode (S8004: No), a display fall notification command corresponding to the fall notification mode determined in the processing of S8003 is set (S8004: No). S8008), the process of S8009 described above is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 159, the variation display setting process 4 (for special figure 1), which is one of the processes in the variation display setting process 4 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment ( S5171) will be described. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation display setting process 4 (S5711) for the special figure 1. The variation display setting process 4 (S5711) for the special figure 1 executes the processes of S5201 to S5205 for the variation display setting process (S5104) for the special figure 1 in the above-described first embodiment, and then performs the process of S5206. Instead, read out the latent mode stored in the latent mode storage area 223cc (S5251), and based on the extracted variation pattern and the latent mode, the latent variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is executed. The difference is that the process of setting (S5252) is executed. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 160, the variation display setting process 4 (for special figure 2), which is one of the processes in the variation display setting process 4 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment ( S5175) will be described. FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation display setting process 4 (S5175) for the special figure 2. The variation display setting process 4 (S5175) for the special figure 2 executes the processes of S5301 to S5308 with respect to the variation display setting process (S5109) for the special figure 2 in the above-described first embodiment, and then performs the process of S5309. Instead, read out the latent mode stored in the latent mode storage area 223cc (S5351), and based on the extracted fluctuation pattern and latent mode, the latent fluctuation pattern command for displaying the second special symbol. The difference is that the process of setting (S5352) is executed. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, the fourth embodiment has a configuration in which a fall lottery is performed for each of the above-mentioned first embodiments to shift the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state based on the lottery result. Therefore, in the state where the probabilistic state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set, at what timing the time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) It can be difficult for the player to predict whether or not the transition will occur.

In addition, if the player wins the fall lottery during the probability change state and shifts to the time saving state, the player will enter the latent probability state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), which is a game state advantageous to the player. Since it becomes difficult to shift (it is harder to shift than the probability change state), once the probability change state is set, the latent probability state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set. You can play the game while being thrilled not to win the fall lottery before.

Further, in the present embodiment, the same game method (left-handed game) is performed depending on whether the probability change state is set or the time saving state is set. It is possible to make it more difficult to grasp whether the game state is a probable change state or a time saving state.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, if the fall lottery is won immediately after the probability change state is set (for example, the first special symbol change), the player is notified that the probability change state is set. There is another possibility that the latent state will be set because it is configured to execute the effect mode (time-saving notification effect) that makes it appear as if the time-saving state was set from the beginning (after the end of the big hit). It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable that the probability change state higher than that of the game state has ended in a short period of time.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, a production that suggests to the player the possibility of winning the fall lottery during the probability change state (suggestion notification) and a production that notifies the player that the fall lottery has been won (confirmed notification). ) And, are made feasible, and the selection ratio between the suggestion notification and the definite notification is configured to be different based on the number of residual fluctuations of the special symbol that can be continuously set in the probabilistic state. Specifically, the larger the number of residual fluctuations in the probabilistic state, the more difficult it is to execute the definite notification. As a result, it is possible to recognize that the transition from the probabilistic change state to the time saving state is performed in the state where the remaining number of fluctuations remains large, and it is possible to suppress the player's motivation to play. In addition, the effect of notifying the suggestion is configured to be executed even when the fall lottery has not been won.

In this embodiment, the above-mentioned suggestion notification or definite notification is configured to cause the player to determine whether the current gaming state is a probabilistic state or a time-saving state. Other configurations may be used, for example, a fluctuation pattern of a special symbol (variation time) that can be selected only during the probable change state, or a special symbol fluctuation pattern (variation time) that can be selected only during the time saving state. It may be configured so that the player predicts the current gaming state according to the variation pattern of the special symbol to be provided and executed. In this case, the contents of the fluctuation pattern dedicated to the probabilistic change state and the fluctuation pattern dedicated to the time saving state do not differ greatly, but it is preferable to provide the fluctuation pattern with an error of about 1 second, for example. As a result, the current gaming state can be notified to the player by an error of the variation display time of a slight sense of incongruity, so that the variation display of the special symbol to be executed can be strongly consciously watched. Further, in this case, one second of the error may be used, for example, in the period until the fluctuation of the third symbol is started on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, whereby the fluctuation start timing of the third symbol may be used. However, the current game state can be notified to the player due to a slight sense of incongruity that the game is slower or faster than usual, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the fourth embodiment, the lottery result of the fall lottery due to the other special symbol change (lottery) is invalidated during the period when the jackpot change is executed in one special symbol. .. As a result, for example, due to the establishment of the first latent probability transition condition that is established based on the jackpot winning of Special Figure 1, the second special without winning the fall lottery during the period when the latent probability state is set. It will be possible to continue receiving the lottery for the design (Special Figure 2). Therefore, it is possible to set a latent state that is more advantageous (easily continued for a long time) than the latent state set by the establishment of other latent transition conditions.

In the fourth embodiment, when the special symbol change (lottery) is executed, the fall lottery is also executed. That is, it is configured to execute the fall lottery when the execution condition of the special symbol change (lottery) is satisfied, but it is not limited to this, for example, a specific entrance (for example, the first entry). The ball entered the ball opening 64, the second entrance opening 640, and the general winning opening 63), the ball passed through the through gate 67, and the execution conditions for the normal symbol change (lottery) were satisfied. , The special symbol, or the normal symbol stop display timing, or the elapsed timing of the symbol confirmation period may be the trigger for executing the fall lottery, and when the execution condition of the special symbol change (lottery) is satisfied, the fall lottery is performed. It may be configured to determine whether or not to execute and execute the fall lottery based on the determination result. This makes it difficult for the player to understand when the fall lottery is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from easily detecting the timing of winning the fall lottery.

In the fourth embodiment, every time a fall lottery is executed, the presence or absence of a fall is determined with the same probability, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is easy to fall in a fall lottery (winning). It may be configured to provide a high-probability state (easy) and a low-probability state (difficult to win). In this case, for example, based on the jackpot type, a high probability variation state and a low probability variation state are provided as probability variation states set after the jackpot is completed, and in the high probability variation state, a low probability state of the fall lottery is set and the probability variation is low. In the state, a high probability state of the fall lottery may be set. Further, the state of the fall lottery (high probability state, low probability state) may be changed based on the number of special symbol fluctuations (lottery) executed after the probability change state is set. For example, the probability change state may be changed. The predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 10 times) after the state is set is configured so that the high probability state of the fall lottery that is easy to win the fall lottery is set, and then the low probability state of the fall lottery is set. May be.

With such a configuration, it is possible to set a period in which it is easy to fall from the probable change state and a period in which it is difficult to fall, so that it is possible to provide the player with a sharp playability. Further, in the present embodiment, when the fall lottery is won, the process of shifting the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state is executed. A process of shifting the high-probability state to the low-probability state may be executed. Further, in the fourth embodiment, when the fall lottery is won, the high probability state of the special symbol is shifted to the low probability state. For example, the high probability state of the special symbol is changed to the medium probability state (the jackpot probability is high). It may be configured to shift to a state (lower than the probability state and higher than the low probability state), and may not shift to the medium probability state unless the fall lottery is won.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the contents of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 to 179. In the fourth embodiment described above, the fall lottery for shifting the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state (to make it fall) is executed. With this configuration, the period during which the high-probability state of the special symbol continues can be different depending on the lottery result of the fall lottery, so that the player can have the high-probability state of the special symbol for a long period of time. It was possible to play the game while expecting it to continue.

However, in the configuration of the fourth embodiment described above, since the fall lottery is executed every time the special symbol lottery (variation) is executed, the player decides whether or not the fall lottery is executed by his / her own intention. It was not possible to make a selection, which could lead to a decrease in motivation for playing. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, a winning device (variable winning for small hits) in which a ball can be won during a small hit game executed when the lottery result of a special symbol becomes a predetermined lottery result (small hit). Device) 2650 is provided, and when it is detected that a ball has passed in the area (flow path) through which the ball won in the small hit variable winning device 2650 can pass, the high probability state of the special symbol is changed to the low probability state. The fall gate 2650e3 (see FIG. 164) is configured to be provided.

With this configuration, as in each of the above-described embodiments, the latent state in which the small hit game is frequently executed based on the special figure 2 lottery (high probability state of special symbol, low probability of normal symbol). In the state), it is possible to select whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol falls depending on whether or not the player fires during the small hit game.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the operation content (opening operation pattern) of the small hit game to be executed is configured to be different depending on the type (small hit type) when the small hit is won. Depending on the opening operation pattern to be performed, the rate at which the ball winning the small hit variable winning device 2650 passes through the fall gate 2650e3 during the small hit game is configured to be different.

By configuring in this way, the content of the small hit game to be executed is predicted in order to prevent the high probability state of the special symbol from falling and to perform the game aiming at the acquisition of the privilege (prize ball) by the small hit game. It is possible to let the player select a game while letting the player select a game.

In addition, as in the fourth embodiment described above, in the latent state set during the period when one special symbol is executing the jackpot fluctuation, a small hit is won in the other special symbol fluctuation (lottery). Even if the ball passes through the fall gate 2650e3, the high-probability state of the special symbol does not shift to the low-probability state.

As a result, in the state where the latent probability state is set, the advantageous latent probability state in which the high probability state of the special symbol does not fall (difficult) and the high probability state of the special symbol are more likely to fall than the advantageous latent probability state. It is possible to set the unfavorable probability state.

<Regarding the configuration of the game board in the fifth embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 to 164. In the fifth embodiment, the configuration of the right side region of the game board 13 is different from the configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 2), instead of the first variable winning device 65. The point that the variable winning device for small hits 2650 is provided and the point that the winning device (variable winning device for small hits 2650) that is opened during the small hit game is provided on the upstream side of the second entrance 640. Is different.

Here, the configuration of the game board 13 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 161. A variable winning device for small hits 2650 is provided in the right area of the game board 13. This variable winning device for small hits 2650 has a plurality of flow paths through which the winning ball flows (a flow path for causing the high probability state of the special symbol to fall into the low probability state, and a high probability state of the special symbol in the low probability state). The winning ball is configured to flow down a different flow path according to the timing at which the ball wins in the variable winning device for small hits 2650.

The internal structure of the variable winning device for small hits 2650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 162 to 164. Next, the structure of the variable winning device for small hits 2650 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 162. FIG. 162 is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device for small hits 2650.

As shown in FIG. 162, the small hit variable winning device 2650 is combined with the opening forming member 2650b arranged so as to project toward the front side of the game board 13 and the back side of the opening forming member 2650b, and is combined with the small hit. The base member 2650c for screwing the variable winning device 2650 to the game board 13 and the LED are lit from the back side of the base member 2650c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 arranged on the back side of the base member 2650c. An LED board 2650d in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged, a back cover body 2650e that sandwiches the LED board 2650d with a base member 2650c, and a small hit winning opening (small hit) formed in the opening forming member 2650b. Winning port) An opening / closing unit 2650f having an opening / closing door 2650f1 for opening / closing 2650a, a flow path cover body 2650g that is combined on the back side of the back cover body 2650e to form a flow path, and a back cover body 2650e and a flow path. A switching member 2650h that protrudes into the flow path formed by the cover body 2650g and switches the flow path of the game ball, a link member 2650i that is locked to the switching member 2650h, and a flow path cover body 2650g are arranged on the back surface side. The back cover body 2650j, the flow path solenoid 2650k fixed to the back side of the back cover body 2650j to operate the link member 2650i, and the flow path solenoid 2650k are covered from the back side and attached to the back cover body 2650j with screws. It is composed of a fixing cover body 2650 m for fixing.

FIG. 163 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device for small hits 2650. FIG. 163 (c) is a top view of the variable winning device for small hits 2650, and FIG. 163 (b) is a sectional view taken along line Lb-Lb of the variable winning device for small hits 2650. As shown in FIG. 163 (b), the small hit variable winning device 2650 is formed with a small hit winning opening (small hit winning opening) 2650a, which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The small hit winning opening (small hit winning opening) 2650a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and a game ball passing through the opening is guided to the left in FIG. 163 (b). The bottom surface is formed so as to be inclined to the lower left. At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 2650a1 composed of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 2650c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 2650a1 is guided to the distribution flow path formed on the back surface side of the back cover body 2650e shown in FIG. 163 (b).

As shown in FIG. 163 (b), the opening of the small hit winning opening (small hit winning opening) 2650a can be opened by the opening / closing door 2650f1 having a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side. It is variable to an open state and a closed state where it is impossible to enter the ball (difficult to enter the ball). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 2650f1 so that the ball can roll over the upper part of the opening / closing door. Further, in the open state, the opening / closing door 2650f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the small hit winning opening (small hit winning opening) 2650a by being retracted to the inside of the base member 2650c (inside the game board 13). ing.

With this configuration, when the opening of the small hit variable winning device 2650 is closed, the ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 2650f1 of the small hit variable winning device 2650 to enter the second ball. It is configured to be guided to the mouth 640 side, and during the right-handed game (during the latent state), the ball can be entered into the second entrance 640 while the right-handed game is being performed. This makes it possible to reduce the time and effort required to change the game method to a left-handed game during a latent state in which a small hit game is frequently executed. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

Further, in the open state, the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball flows down can be configured as the opening of the small hit variable winning device 2650, so that more game balls can be efficiently used as the small hit winning opening (small). Winning prize opening) It is possible to win a prize within 2650a. Therefore, the ball can be reliably won by the variable winning device for small hits 2650 during the small hit game, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 163 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in FIG. 163 (b). As shown in FIG. 163 (a), the magnetic sensor 2650c1 having the detection port 2650a1 is fixed to the base member 2650c so that the detection port 2650a1 is tilted toward the distribution flow path side of the back cover body 2650e.

Next, with reference to FIG. 164, a configuration will be described in which the sphere guided to the distribution flow path of the back cover body 2650e is distributed to the normal discharge flow path 2650e1 and the special discharge flow path 2650e2, which will be described later.

FIG. 164A is a rear view of the back cover body 2650e showing a state in which the switching member 2650h is operated so that the ball is distributed to the special exhaust flow path 2650e2. As shown in FIG. 164 (a), the switching member 2650h has a locking hole 2650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 2650i is inserted and a guide piece 2650h2 for guiding the ball, and is provided in the flow path cover body 2650g. It is rotatably supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 2650 g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 2650 h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 2650 h is rotated into the distribution flow path from the back surface side of the flow path cover body 2650 g. It is configured so that it can be placed as possible.

As shown in FIG. 164 (a), the sphere guided into the distribution flow path from the detection port 2650a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 2650h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge flow path 2650e2. .. The special discharge flow path 2650e2 flows down the fall route through which the inflowing ball passes through the fall gate (fall switch) 2650e3 and the second normal discharge flow path 2650e5 branched from the special discharge flow path 2650e2, and flows down the second normal discharge flow path 2650e5. 2 Normal switch) A fall switch 2650e3 or a second normal switch 2650e6 that is configured to have a second normal route that passes through 2650e6 and can detect the passage of a ball that has flowed into the special discharge flow path 2650e2. After being detected, it is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball.

Here, the details will be described later, but in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, when the above-mentioned fall switch 2650e3 detects a ball during the small hit game, that is, when the ball passes through the fall route, a special symbol is provided. The high-probability state of is configured to shift (fall) to the low-probability state. That is, the fall gate (fall switch) 2650e3 is configured as a trigger for shifting the special symbol from the high probability state to the low probability state. Further, the switching member 2650h is a flow path (special discharge flow path 2650e2) that can pass through the fall gate (fall switch) 2650e3 as a flow path of the ball that has won the small hit variable winning device 2650 during the small hit. It is for setting any flow path (normal discharge flow path 2650e1) that cannot (difficultly) pass through the gate (fall switch) 2650e3, and by setting the flow path solenoid 2650k to ON. The ball that has won the small hit variable winning device 2650 is configured to switch the flow path so as to flow down the special discharge flow path 2650e2 (see FIG. 164 (a)).

In the pachinko machine 10 used in the present embodiment, the flow path solenoid 2650k is set to off during normal game play, and the ball winning the small hit variable winning device 2650 has a special discharge flow path 2650e2. It is configured to flow down. Therefore, when an illegal state such as the opening / closing door 2650f1 of the variable winning device for small hits 2650 is opened to win a ball even though the small hit game is not being executed, the illegally won ball is a fall switch. It is configured to pass through 2650e3.

In this way, the state in which the flow path solenoid 2650k is set to off is set to a state in which the pachinko machine 10 is maintained for a long period of time, and further, the flow path configuration (variable winning device for small hits 2650) that is disadvantageous to the player By adopting a flow path configuration in which the winning ball can pass through the fall switch 2650e3), the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed, and a penalty can be imposed on the game in which the illegal game is performed.

In this way, since it is determined whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol ends depending on the flow route in which the ball winning in the variable winning device for small hit 2650 flows down during the small hit game, the game is also played during the small hit game. It is possible to improve the interest of the person. It should be noted that the small hit winning opening (small hit winning opening) 2650a of the small hit variable winning device 2650 passes through the entrance of the special discharge flow path 2650e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 2650h2 of the switching member 2650h). The required time consists of at least 1 second.

Further, at the end of the normal discharge flow path 2650e1, a discharge confirmation switch (normal switch) 2650e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a sphere is provided. Thereby, whether or not all the winning balls are discharged in the small hit variable winning device 2650 can be determined by the total number of ball detections of the normal switch 2650e4, the second falling switch 2650e6, and the falling switch 2650e3. That is, the number of balls detected by the ball winning switch 2650c1 (the number of balls won in the variable winning device for small hits 2650) and various switches (normal switch 2650e4, second falling switch 2650e6, falling switch) provided in the three discharge areas. By comparing the number of balls detected by each of the 2650e3) (the number of balls ejected from the variable winning device for small hits 2650), it is determined whether or not the balls remain in the variable winning device for small hits 2650. can do.

The end timing of the small hit game (the end condition of the small hit game (when a predetermined number (10 pieces) of prizes are given to the small hit variable winning device 2650, or the opening scenario of the small hit variable winning device 2650) If all the game balls that have entered the variable winning device for small hits 2650 have not been discharged at the timing when the small hit ending period that is executed after) is established), the variable for small hits is variable. It is preferable to determine that the abnormality is inside the winning device 2650, notify the abnormality to the outside, or stop the game so that the jackpot game or the normal game is not started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from progressing in a state where an abnormality has occurred in a part of the pachinko machine 10 and a secondary abnormality has occurred.

In this way, the ball that has won the small hit winning opening (small hit winning opening) 2650a of the small hit variable winning device 2650 is detected by the ball winning switch 2650c1, and based on this, the prize ball (book) is given to the player as a privilege. In the embodiment, 10 prize balls are paid out for one ball prize, and whether the ball passes through the fall switch 2650e3 by using the detected ball (passed through the ball prize switch 2650c1). By configuring it so that it can be sorted, it is possible to determine whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol ends during the small hit game. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated area for shifting the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state separately from the variable winning device for small hits 2650, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

Next, the flow of the game in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 165 and 166. First, with reference to FIG. 165, the flow of the game when the jackpot of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is won in the state where the probabilistic state is set as the game state will be described. FIG. 165 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the special figure 1 jackpot is won during the probability change state.

As shown in FIG. 165, in the fifth embodiment, if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the special figure 1 in a state where the probability variation state is set as in the fourth embodiment described above, the jackpot is latent during the jackpot fluctuation. The state is configured to be set (see FIG. 165 (a)). Then, during the period when the latent probability state is set (during special figure 1 big hit fluctuation), the small hit game is performed by performing a right-handed game in order to execute the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2). It is configured to execute a latent state game (RUSH game) that is frequently executed.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result after winning the jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol during the jackpot fluctuation period of one special symbol (for example, special figure 1). The period up to) is configured so that the jackpot will not be won in the lottery of the other special symbol (for example, special figure 2). As a result, during the jackpot fluctuation period of one special symbol (for example, special figure 1), the jackpot is won by lottery of the other special symbol (for example, special figure 2), and based on the jackpot winning of the other special symbol. By starting the jackpot game, it is possible to prevent the period in which the latent probability state is set from being shortened. That is, in the fifth embodiment, the latent state game (RUSH game) is surely performed during the latent state setting period (for example, the jackpot fluctuation time of the special figure 1) set in advance when the latent state is set. ) Can be executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in a state where the high probability state of the special symbol is set, during the jackpot fluctuation period of one special symbol (for example, special symbol 1) (after winning the jackpot by lottery of the special symbol). , The period until the big hit game is executed based on the lottery result), even if the ball passes through the fall switch 2650e3 in the variable winning device for small hits 2650, the high probability state of the special symbol becomes the low probability state. It is configured to be a period during which there is no transition (fall invalid period).

Therefore, if the latent probability state is set during the special figure 1 fluctuation that is won by the jackpot, the special figure 1 fluctuation period becomes the fall invalid period, so that the high probability state of the special symbol ends. It is possible to execute a latent state game (RUSH game) without worrying about it. Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the present embodiment, the latent state is set based on the jackpot winning in Special Figure 1 (the latent state is set based on the establishment of the first latent transition condition). It is configured to determine whether or not to execute an invincible effect (see FIG. 169) that notifies the player of what has been done.

By configuring to execute this invincible effect (see FIG. 169), it is possible to easily make the player know that the fall invalid period is set in the currently set latent state, so that the player can be informed. It is possible to play a latent state game (RUSH game) with peace of mind. Further, in the fifth embodiment, even in the latent state in which the fall invalid period is set, the above-mentioned invincible effect may not be executed. With this configuration, in the latent state game in which the invincible effect (see FIG. 169) is not executed, the fall invalid period may actually be set, so that the ball is made small during the small hit game. When the winning variable winning device 2650 is won, the rate of falling can be reduced.

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation elapses (see FIG. 165 (b)), the high-probability state of the special symbol shifts to the low-probability state. If the small hit game is not executed at this timing, the big hit game is started. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 165, if the small hit game is executed at the timing when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation has elapsed, the start of the big hit game is postponed until the small hit game is completed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with a game that is difficult to understand because the big hit game is started during the execution of the small hit game.

The same gaming state (normal state) as during the jackpot game is set for the interruption period from the lapse of the fluctuation time of the special hit 1 jackpot fluctuation shown in FIG. 165 to the start of the jackpot game. In the fifth embodiment, if the small hit game is executed at the timing when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation has elapsed, the start of the big hit game is interrupted (postponed) until the small hit game is completed. ), But it is sufficient to control so that the small hit game and the big hit game are not executed at the same time. For example, the small hit game is executed at the timing when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation has elapsed. If so, it may be configured to forcibly end the running small hit game.

Further, although detailed description is omitted, in this embodiment as well as in each of the above-described embodiments, a small hit is won with one special symbol (special figure 2), and the small hit game is executed. During the period, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol (special figure 1) is interrupted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the latent probability state (advantageous latent probability state) set based on the jackpot winning of Special Figure 1 is set as the fall invalid period, so that a special symbol is given to the player. It is possible to entertain the latent state game (RUSH game) without worrying about the end of the high probability state of. Further, the small hit game started during the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed to the end.

Next, with reference to FIG. 166, the flow of the game when the predetermined number of time reductions is exhausted in the state where the probability change state is set as the game state will be described. FIG. 166 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when all the time reduction times are exhausted during the probability change state.

As shown in FIG. 166, in the fifth embodiment, since the subtraction of the time reduction number is performed at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, the value of the counter (time reduction counter 203f) for continuously setting the time reduction state is set. When it becomes 0, the latent probability state is set from the execution special figure 1 fluctuation (see FIG. 166 (a)). As shown in FIG. 166, the latent state set by digesting a predetermined number of time reductions is configured so that the fall lottery during the latent state period is effectively determined. Therefore, in the small hit game executed during the latent state game (RUSH), there is a possibility that the high probability state of the special symbol will be terminated by the ball that has been won by the variable winning device (variable winning device for small hit 2650). There is a disadvantageous probability state.

<Regarding the content of the production performed in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 167 to 169, the characteristic effect contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fifth embodiment will be described. It should be noted that the mode of the effect executed during the probability change state in order to suggest whether or not the latent probability state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is set is the effect described in each of the above-described embodiments. Since it is the same as the embodiment, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 167 (a), the effect content displayed when a small hit is won in a state where the latent probability state is set will be described. FIG. 167 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents when a small hit is won in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 167 (a), the special figure 1 display area Dm1 displays a display mode indicating that the first special symbol (special figure 1) is variablely displayed, and the special figure 2 display area Dm2 displays a display mode. Displays a display mode (“341”) indicating that the second special symbol (special figure 2) has won a small hit. Then, in the guidance display area Dm3, "right-handed" for guiding the game method in the latent state is displayed.

Then, in the main display area Dm, the character 811 is displayed in a display mode for notifying that the small hit has been won, and the character "GET" is displayed. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "The small hit game will start" indicating that the small hit game is started is displayed.

When the small hit game is started, the display screen of FIG. 167 (b) is displayed. FIG. 167 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents during the small hit game. According to the figure shown in FIG. 167 (b), the display mode shown in FIG. 167 (a) described above, that is, the display showing that the special figure 1 is variablely displayed, is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. Although the aspect is displayed, in reality, the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is interrupted during the small hit game. In addition, unlike the display mode shown in FIG. 167 (b), the state in which the special figure 1 is appropriately variable-displayed (the state in which the variable time is subtracted) and the variable display in the special figure 1 are interrupted. It may be configured so that the display mode displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 is different from that in the state (the state in which the fluctuation time is not subtracted).

Then, in the main display area Dm, the effect mode in which the character 811 runs from the left direction to the right direction and the treasure box 812 appears from the traveling direction is displayed. In the present embodiment, the effect of opening the treasure box 812 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed during the small hit game, and the effect of this time is determined by the display mode of the effect symbol 813 appearing from the treasure box 812. It is configured to notify the player of the result of the winning game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 168 (a) and 168 (b), display contents for showing the game result of the small hit game in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 168 (a) shows the display content when the ball is won by the variable winning device for small hits 2650 during the small hit game, the fall switch 2650e3 detects the ball, and the high probability state of the special symbol ends. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example.

In FIG. 168 (a), the effect symbol 813 indicating the “cross mark” is displayed from the treasure box 812, and the character 811 shifts from the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state during the small hit game. It is displayed in the failure display mode shown. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment indicating that the latent state game (RUSH game) ends and the game method returns to the left-handed game is displayed. That is, the game state is latent by shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state during the latent state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) in which the RUSH game is performed. In order to shift from the state to the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), a comment for executing the left-handed game is displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

On the other hand, in FIG. 168 (b), an effect symbol 813 indicating “V” is displayed from the treasure box 812, and a display mode for notifying the player that the RUSH game is continuously executed (that is, left). The character 811 is displayed in the display mode (display mode) running from to the right.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect corresponding to the game result during the small hit game executed during the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed by the third symbol display device 81. The player can easily grasp the progress of the latent state game (RUSH game) only by grasping the effect content executed by the third symbol display device 81.

In the present embodiment, the ball winning the small hit variable winning device 2650 during the small hit game is the probability change switch 2650e3 according to the type of the small hit game executed during the latent state game (RUSH game). The ratio (possibility) of flowing down the special discharge flow path 2650e2 provided with the above is different.

Therefore, for example, on the display screen at the time of winning the small hit shown using FIG. 167 (a), the player selects whether or not to make the variable winning device for small hit 2650 win the ball in the small hit game this time. It is configured to display comments (for example, "RUSH ends if you are unlucky with a small hit", "Stop launching if you are uneasy"), and the character displayed when you win a small hit. The display mode of 811 may be configured to be variable depending on whether or not the small hit type won this time is a small hit that makes it easy to end the latent state game (RUSH game).

With this configuration, the player can select whether or not to make the small hit variable winning device 2650 win the ball during the small hit game. Further, in the fifth embodiment in which the latent probability state is set only for a predetermined period (special figure 1 fluctuation time), the number of small hit games that can be executed during the latent probability state is limited, so that the player On the other hand, it is possible to play a game while thinking about whether to acquire a privilege (prize ball) during a small hit game or to avoid the end of a latent state game (RUSH game), which is a novel game. Can provide sex.

Further, even if it is configured to notify the player of the type of the small hit game being executed by the display mode of the treasure box 812 displayed on the display screen during the small hit game shown with reference to FIG. 167 (b). Well, for example, the smaller the type of small hit that is being executed is the type of small hit that makes it easier to end the latent state game (RUSH game), the better it is configured so that the old and tattered treasure chest 812 is displayed. It is preferable to display a comment according to the display mode of the treasure box 812. Further, the display mode displayed during the small hit game is more specific than the content suggesting the small hit type (RUSH game continuation expectation degree) won this time to the player when the small hit is won. It is advisable to configure the player to be notified of such (highly reliable) content.

With this configuration, for the player who has selected whether or not to make the small hit variable winning device 2650 win the ball in this small hit game based on the display screen displayed at the time of winning the small hit. Since it is possible to show a more specific RUSH continuation expectation degree, it is possible for the player himself to predict whether or not the selected game content is correct for the player.

In this case, in particular, it was emphasized that the RUSH game was a small hit type in which it was difficult for the player who chose not to win the ball in the variable winning device for small hits 2650 to finish the RUSH game even if the ball was won. It is good to configure it so that it can be notified. Specifically, the small hit type determining means for determining the type of the small hit game this time, and whether or not the ball has won the small hit variable winning device 2650 within a predetermined period from the start of the small hit game. (Or a means for determining that the right-handed game has been executed after the small hit winning) is provided, and the determination result by the small hit type determination means is the small hit type in which the RUSH game is difficult to end. In this case, if it is determined that the ball has not won the small hit variable winning device 2650 within a predetermined period from the start of the small hit game, it is better to fire the ball in this small hit game. It is advisable to provide a display means to display a fanning comment (for example, "I should have fired a ball", "Weakling") indicating that it was acquired.

As a result, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the ball was not won by the variable winning device for small hits 2650, so that the player can be positively notified of the loss during the small hits game. The variable winning device 2650 can be prompted to win a ball. In other words, when the RUSH game ends by having the variable winning device for small hits 2650 win a ball, the game shows that the selection was unsuccessful based on the game result, even if the fanning by the staging was not executed. Although the player can be aware of it, the player who chooses not to win the ball in the small hit variable winning device 2650 cannot be aware of whether or not the selection result of this time is advantageous, so the selection result is selected by the display means. By displaying the evaluation of, the player can easily grasp whether or not this selection is successful.

Further, a display mode for notifying the player who has selected not to win the ball in the variable winning device for small hits 2650 that the small hit type this time is the small hit type in which the RUSH game is likely to end. (For example, "Stop firing and get a big correct answer", "I have a good intuition") may be displayed, and even if the small hit type this time is a small hit type in which the RUSH game is likely to end. In this small hit game, you may display a fan comment (for example, "I should have fired the ball", "Weakling") indicating that you could get the privilege by firing the ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 169, the display content of the effect of notifying that the fall invalid period is set in the latent probability state (advantageous latent probability state) will be described. FIG. 169 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display content displayed at the end of the small hit in the advantageous latent probability state. As shown in FIG. 169, when the currently set latent state is the advantageous latent state in which the fall invalid period is set, the same latent mode setting process as the above-described fourth embodiment (FIG. 154). When the invincible mode is set as the current latent mode in (see S4451), the effect mode (“invincible mode”” indicating that the latent state currently set for the player is the advantageous latent state. ) Is displayed.

When the character 811 enters the invincible mode, the display mode of the character 811 becomes a display mode dedicated to the invincible mode (a display mode in which an aura is wrapped around the display mode). Then, "lucky point x 0" is displayed as the cumulative display mode 819 of the number of balls that have passed through the fall gate 2650e3 during the invincible mode. This cumulative display mode 819 corresponds to a command indicating the number of balls detected by the fall switch 2650e3 output from the main control device 110 (a command indicating the number of falls if the fall invalid period is not set). The numbers are displayed. As a result, it is possible to easily inform the player of the situation in which the invincible mode has worked in favor of the player.

Although not shown in the figure of FIG. 169, the small hit number display 825 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be displayed in the above-described fourth embodiment, and the small hit number display 825 may be displayed. And the cumulative display mode 819 may be displayed together. In addition, the non-game number measuring means for measuring the number of small hit games in which the player did not make the ball win in the small hit variable winning device 2650, and the number of times measured by the non-game number measuring means are displayed on the display means. It may be configured to do so.

With this configuration, for example, for all the small hit games executed during the latent state game (RUSH game), the number of small hit games in which the player has executed the game and the player can play the game. Since it is possible to easily grasp the number of small hit games that have not been executed, it can be used as a reference for future RUSH games.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the fifth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 170 to 173. First, the contents of ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 170. FIG. 170 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 170, the ROM 202 of the fifth embodiment is provided with the small hit type selection table 202da instead of the small hit type selection table 202e for the ROM 202 of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the operation scenario storage area 202db is added. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the small hit type selection 5 table 202da will be described with reference to FIG. 171. FIG. 171 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the small hit type selection 5 table 202da. The fifth embodiment is configured to win a small hit only for the second special symbol (special figure 2), and when the small hit is won in the lottery of the special figure 2, the small hit type selection 5 table The small hit type is selected with reference to 202da.

In the small hit type selection 5 table 202da, the corresponding small hit type is defined for each range of the value of the small hit type counter C5, and as shown in FIG. 171 (a), the value of the small hit type counter C5. However, in the range of "0 to 14", "small hit A" is defined in association with each other. This "small hit A" is a small hit type in which the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state for 1.5 seconds after the opening period of 1.5 seconds has elapsed during the small hit game. After the opening state of 1.5 seconds has elapsed, an ending period of 0.5 seconds is set, but since this ending period is the same for all small hit types, FIG. 171 (a) shows. Omit.

Further, in the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "15 to 59", "small hit B" is defined in association with it. This "small hit B" is performed after the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state (first open setting) for 0.1 seconds after the opening period of 0.5 seconds has elapsed during the small hit game. It is a small hit type that sets the open state for 1.4 seconds (second open setting) after an interval period of 1 second. After the second opening setting, an ending period of 0.5 seconds is set, but since this ending period is the same for all small hit types, it is omitted in FIG. 171 (a).

In the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "60 to 79", "small hit C" is defined in association with each other. This "small hit C" is obtained after the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state (first open setting) for 0.5 seconds after the opening period of 0.1 seconds has elapsed during the small hit game. It is a small hit type that sets an open state for 0.1 seconds (second open setting) after an interval period of 1 second. After the second opening setting, an ending period of 0.5 seconds is set, but since this ending period is the same for all small hit types, it is omitted in FIG. 171 (a).

In the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "80 to 99", "small hit D" is defined in association with each other. This "small hit D" is performed after the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state (first open setting) for 0.5 seconds after the opening period of 0.1 seconds has elapsed during the small hit game. , It is a small hit type that sets the open state for 1 second (second open setting) after an interval period of 0.3 seconds. After the second opening setting, an ending period of 0.5 seconds is set, but since this ending period is the same for all small hit types, it is omitted in FIG. 171 (a).

The operation scenario storage area 202db is a data area in which the operation scenario of the flow path solenoid 2650h during the small hit game is stored in advance, and the flow path solenoid 2650h performs the same operation regardless of the type of small hit to be executed. One operation scenario is set to execute.

Here, the contents of the operation scenario stored in the operation scenario storage area 202db will be described with reference to FIG. 171 (b). FIG. 171 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the operation scenario defined in the operation scenario storage area 202db. As shown in FIG. 171 (b), the operation scenario storage area 202db defines an operation scenario set according to the start timing of the small hit game.

Specifically, it is stipulated that the flow path solenoid 2650h is set to off until 1.4 seconds have passed from the start timing of the small hit, and from 1.4 seconds after the start of the small hit to the end of the small hit. It is specified that the flow path solenoid 2650h is set to ON during the period of. The operation scenario in which the operation content of the flow path solenoid 2650h is defined is a scenario in which a value is incremented by 1 each time the main processing of the main control device 110 executed every 4 milliseconds is executed. It is managed by a counter (not shown).

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the small hit type selected and the flow path solenoid determine whether or not the ball winning the small hit variable winning device 2650 flows down the special discharge flow path 2650e2. It is configured to be variably set according to the operation scenario of 2650h. Further, the ball flowing down the special discharge flow path 2650e2 is branched into a ball passing through the fall gate 2650e3 and a ball not passing through (second normal switch 2650e6) by the internal structure of the variable winning device for small hits 2650. It is configured in.

Specifically, in the small hit game in which "small hit A" is set as the small hit type, the opening period (1.5 seconds) is the period in which the flow path solenoid 2650h is set to off (1 from the start of the small hit). Since it is set longer than (4 seconds), the ball does not pass through the fall route, and the small hit game that is most advantageous to the player who is set to have a long opening period is executed.

In the small hit game in which "small hit B" to "small hit D" are set as the small hit types, the first opening period is the timing at which the winning ball can pass through the fall route. Further, "small hit C" and "small hit D" have a short opening period of 0.1 seconds (shorter than "small hit B"), and. Since the first opening period is as long as 0.5 seconds (because it is longer than "small hit B"), it is a small hit game in which the ball easily passes through the fall route.

In addition, "small hit C" is the most disadvantageous small for the player because the period in which the first attacker (first variable winning device) 65 is released in one opening operation is as short as 0.6 seconds. It will be a winning game. In the fifth embodiment, it takes about 0.5 seconds for the ball launched by the right-handed game to win the small hit variable winning device 2650 and reach the distribution flow path distributed by the flow path solenoid 2650h. It is configured so that the symbol determination period of the special symbol at the time of winning a small hit is 0.5 seconds.

Therefore, the small hit game is started by stopping the right-handed game immediately after the third symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 167 (a)). At this point, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a ball fired before stopping the right-handed game wins the small hit variable winning device 2650.

Next, the contents of ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 172. FIG. 172 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 172, the RAM 203 of the fifth embodiment is different from the RAM 203 of the fourth embodiment in that the small hit winning counter 203da, the fall passage counter 203db, and the passage flag 203dc are added. is doing. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The small hit winning counter 203da is a counter for measuring the number of balls won in the small hit variable winning device 2650 during the small hit game, and passes through the balls in the small hit entrance passing process (see S171 in FIG. 174). When it is determined that the timing when the sensor (ball detection switch 2650c1) is on is during the opening period of the small hit winning opening 2650a (S3302: Yes in FIG. 174), the value is added by 1 and after the addition. The winning number command corresponding to the information indicating the value of is set (S3305 in FIG. 174). Then, when it is determined in the small hit control process 5 (see S2271 in FIG. 176) that it is the end timing of the small hit game (S2511: Yes in FIG. 176), the value of the counter is cleared (FIG. 176). S2571).

Although detailed description will be described later, in the fifth embodiment, the latent state continues on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the winning number command set corresponding to the value of the small hit winning counter 203da. The number of balls won in the variable winning device for small hits 2650 is accumulated during the set period. As a result, the number of winning balls in one latent state game (RUSH game) can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, as described above, the player has the game property of selecting whether or not the ball is to be won by the variable winning device for small hits 2650 during the small hit game. Depending on the selection content of the player, the cumulative value of the number of balls won by the variable winning device for small hits 2650 may differ greatly even if the number of small hit games is the same. Therefore, detailed game results can be provided by displaying the number of balls won in the variable winning device for small hits 2650 instead of the number of times the small hit game is executed.

In addition, both the number of balls won in the above-mentioned variable winning device for small hits 2650 and the number of times the small hit game is executed are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or a prize is won during one small hit game. The average value of the number of balls may be displayed, or the number of winnings may be displayed as a winning history for each small hit type of the executed small hit game.

The fall passage counter 203db is a counter for measuring the number of balls that have passed through the fall gate 2650e3 during the small hit game, and the fall switch 2650e3 detects the balls in the fall gate passing process (see S172 in FIG. 175). (S3402: Yes in FIG. 175), the value is added by 1 (S3403 in FIG. 175), and the pass number command is set with the information corresponding to the added value (S3404 in FIG. 175). Then, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit game (S2511: Yes in FIG. 176), the value of the counter is cleared (S2571 in FIG. 176).

In the present embodiment, when the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to on, that is, when the advantageous latent probability state is set, the number of balls that have passed through the fall route is always counted. .. As a result, when the "invincible mode" is set as the latent probability mode, the high-probability state of the special symbol shifts to the low-probability state when it is not in the advantageous latent probability state (fall route). The number of balls played can be notified to the player (see the cumulative display mode 819 in FIG. 169).

The pass flag 203dc indicates that the fall switch 2650e3 has detected the ball when the fall switch 2650e3 has detected the ball effectively (when the state update limit flag 203ca is set to off). This flag is set to ON to indicate that the fall switch 2650e3 has detected a ball.

This pass flag 203dc is used when it is determined in the fall gate passage process (see S172 in FIG. 175) that the ball has passed through the fall gate 2650e3 and the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to off (S3405 in FIG. 175). : No), set to on (see S3408 in FIG. 175). Then, when the passing flag 203dc is set to ON, the process of determining whether or not a new ball has passed the falling gate 2650e3 in the falling gate passing process (see S172 in FIG. 175) is skipped. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the process for dropping the high-probability state of the special symbol is executed a plurality of times during one small hit game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 173, the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 173 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 173, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment has a winning number counter 223da and a passing number counter 223db with respect to the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment described above. And are different in that they are added, and they are the same except for that. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The winning number counter 223da is a counter for measuring the number of balls won in the small hit variable winning device 2650 during the small hit game, and is the main control device 110 in the ball passing related processing (see S4582 in FIG. 179). When it is determined that the winning number command has been received from (S8101: Yes in FIG. 179), the value is incremented by 1, and the information corresponding to the added value is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Set a number command (see S8106 in FIG. 179).

Then, when the gaming state shifts from the latent state to the normal state, the value of the counter is cleared. That is, the winning number counter 223da is a ball that has won the small hit variable winning device 2650 in a plurality of small hit games executed until the latent state is set once the latent state is set. It is configured so that the numbers can be accumulated and measured.

The pass count counter 223db is a counter for measuring the number of balls that have passed through the fall gate 2650e3, and is determined to have received the pass count command from the main control device 110 in the ball pass-related processing (see S4582 in FIG. 179). In this case (S8107: Yes in FIG. 179), the value is added by 1 when the latent probability state this time is the advantageous latent probability state (see S8110 in FIG. 179).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 to 176. The control process of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment is a small hit control process 5 (see FIG. 55) instead of the small hit control process (see FIG. 55) for the control process of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the small hit entrance passage process (see FIG. 174) and the fall gate passage process (see FIG. 175) are executed. Other than that, the same processing is executed. The same processing is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 174, the small hit entrance passage process (S171) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit entrance passing process (S171).

In the small hit entrance passage process (S171), first, it is determined whether or not the ball passage sensor is on (S3301). If it is determined that the ball passage sensor is not on (S3301: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball passing sensor is on (S3301: Yes), it is determined whether the small hit winning opening is in the opening period (S3302). If it is determined that the winning opening for small hits is being opened (S3302: Yes), a command for passing through the small hit entrance is set (S3303). The small hit entrance passage command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is directed to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201. Will be sent. 1 is added to the value of the small hit winning counter 203da (S3304). Next, in the process of S3304, a winning number command is set based on the value of the small hit winning counter 203da after addition (S3305), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3302, if it is determined that the winning opening for small hits is not open (S3302: No), an error command is set (S3306), and the flow path solenoid is set to off (S3307). , End this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 175, the fall gate passing process (S172) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fall gate passing process (S172).

In the fall gate passing process (S172), first, it is determined whether or not the passing flag 203dc is on (S3401). If it is determined that the pass flag 203dc is on (S3401: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the passage flag 203dc is not on (S3401: No), it is determined whether or not there is passage in the fall gate (S3402). If it is determined that there is no passage through the fall gate (S3402: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a passage in the fall gate (S3402: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the fall passage counter 203db (S3403), and the number of passages is based on the value of the fall passage counter 203db after the addition. Set the command (S3404). Next, it is determined whether or not the state update restriction flag 203ca is on (S3405). If it is determined that the state update restriction flag 203ca is on (S3405: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the state update restriction flag 203ca is not on (S3405: No), it is determined whether or not the fall gate passage is in the valid period (S3406). When it is determined that the fall gate passage is in the valid period (S3406: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is set to off (S3407) and the passage flag 203dc is set to on (S3408). Next, a fall command is set (S3409), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3406, if it is determined that the fall gate passage is not in the valid period (S3406: No), an error command is set (S3410), and this process is terminated.

Next, the small hit control process 5 (S2271) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 176. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit control process 5 (S2271). When the small hit control process 5 (S2271) determines that it is the timing of the end of the small hit in the process of S2511 with respect to the small hit control process (S2205) in the first embodiment described above (S2511: No. ) The difference is that the values of the small hit winning counter 203da and the fall passing counter 203db are cleared (S2571), and the passing flag 203dc is set to off (S2572). Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 177 to 179, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. The control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment is a state command process instead of the state command process (see FIG. 62) for the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment described above. 5 (see FIG. 177), the hit-related process 5 (see FIG. 178) is executed instead of the hit-related process (see FIG. 63), the ball passage-related process (see FIG. 179) is different, and the other processes are the same. Is executed. The same processing is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the state command process 5 (S4921) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 177. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the contents of the state command process 5 (S4921). The state command process 5 (S4921) executes the process of S4411 for the state command process 4 (S4281) in the fourth embodiment described above, and then replaces the process of S4444 with the latent mode storage area 223 kb, small. The difference is that a process (S4471) for clearing the winning number counter 223cc, the winning number counter 223da, the passing number counter 223db, the fall flag 223cd, and the time saving notified flag 223ce is added. Since other processes are the same as the state command process 4 (S4281) in the fourth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the hit-related process 5 (S4292) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 178. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit-related process 5 (S4292). The hit-related process 5 (S4292) differs from the hit-related process (S4216) in the fourth embodiment described above in that a process related to ball passage is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the hit-related process 5 (S4292), if it is determined that the prize ball command has not been received from the main control device 110 in the process of S4505 (S4505: No), it is determined whether or not the ball passage-related command has been received. (S4581). If it is determined that the ball passage-related command has been received (S4581: Yes), the ball passage-related process (S4582) is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball passage related command has not been received (S4581: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 179, a ball passage-related process (S4582), which is one process in the hit-related process 5 (S4922) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ball passage-related processing (S4582).

In the ball passage-related processing (S4582), first, it is determined whether or not the winning number command has been received from the main control device 110 this time (S8101). When it is determined that the winning number command has been received (S8101: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter 223da (S8102), and the latent mode stored in the latent mode storage area 223cc is read out. Execute (S8103). Next, it is determined whether the latent mode read in the process of S8103 is the invincible mode (S8104). When it is determined that the mode is not invincible (S8104: No), a suggestion effect suggesting the end of the latent state is set (S8105), a winning number command for display is set (S8106), and this process is terminated. .. On the other hand, in the process of S8104, when it is determined that the read latent mode is the invincible mode (S8104: Yes), the process of S8105 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S8106.

On the other hand, in the process of S8101 when it is determined that the winning number command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S8101: No), it is determined whether or not the passing number command has been received (S8107). When it is determined that the pass count command has been received (S8107: Yes), the value stored in the state setting area 223j is read out (S8108). Next, in the process of S8108, it is determined whether or not the read value is a value indicating the time saving latency (S8109). When it is determined that the read value is not a value indicating the time saving latency (S8109: No), 1 is added to the value of the pass count counter 223db (S8110). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8109 that the read value is not a value indicating the time saving latency (S8109: Yes), the process of S8110 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S8111.

Next, the latent mode stored in the latent mode storage area 223 cab is read out (S8111). Next, it is determined whether the latent mode read in the process of S8111 is an invincible mode (S8112). When it is determined that the mode is not invincible (S8112: No), a suggestion effect suggesting the end of the latent state is set (S8113), a display pass count command is set (S8114), and this process is terminated. .. On the other hand, in the process of S8112, if it is determined that the read latent mode is the invincible mode (S8112: Yes), the process of S8113 is skipped, the process of S8114 is executed, and the present process is terminated.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the operation content (opening operation pattern) of the small hit game to be executed differs depending on the type (small hit type) when the small hit is won. Depending on the opening operation pattern to be executed, the rate at which the ball winning the small hit variable winning device 2650 passes through the fall gate 2650e3 during the small hit game is configured to be different.

By configuring in this way, the content of the small hit game to be executed is predicted in order to prevent the high probability state of the special symbol from falling and to perform the game aiming at the acquisition of the privilege (prize ball) by the small hit game. It is possible to let the player select a game while letting the player select a game.

In addition, as in the fourth embodiment described above, in the latent state set during the period when one special symbol is executing the jackpot fluctuation, a small hit is won in the other special symbol fluctuation (lottery). Even if the ball passes through the fall gate 2650e3, the high-probability state of the special symbol does not shift to the low-probability state.

As a result, in the state where the latent probability state is set, the advantageous latent probability state in which the high probability state of the special symbol does not fall (difficult) and the high probability state of the special symbol are more likely to fall than the advantageous latent probability state. It is possible to set the unfavorable probability state.

In each of the above embodiments, the process of updating the value of the time reduction counter 203f (process of subtracting the number of time reductions) is the timing at which the variation of the special symbol is started (for example, the first special symbol variation start process (see S208 in FIG. 33)). ), So that the first special symbol change (lottery) and the second special symbol change (lottery) can be executed at the same time in a gaming machine for a predetermined number of times. , It is configured to execute a time-saving game (a game in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is set), but for example, when setting 100 to the value of the time-saving counter 203f (when setting 100 times of time-saving). ), There is a problem that the period from the start of the 100th special symbol change to the start of the 101st special symbol change becomes a non-time saving state (low probability state of a normal symbol).

During the period when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the lottery (variation) that is advantageous to the player can be executed even in the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol different from the special symbol. The period from the start of the 100th special symbol change to the start of the 101st special symbol change, that is, the period from the start of the number of special symbol changes exceeding the predetermined time reduction number. There is a problem that the player is uncomfortable due to the setting of the non-time saving state.

However, if the process of updating the value of the time reduction counter 203f (the process of subtracting the number of time reductions) is configured to be updated at the timing when the variation display of the special symbol ends (the timing when the symbol confirmation period ends), In a gaming machine that can simultaneously execute the first special symbol change (lottery) and the second special symbol change (lottery), the time saving state sets the special symbol change (lottery) more than a predetermined number of times. There was a problem that it was executed in the state where it was done.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the time saving end condition is applied to the special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) corresponding to the special symbol lottery (100th time saving) executed when the value of the time saving counter 203f becomes 0. (1st time reduction end condition) is set, and the time reduction end condition (2nd time reduction end condition) is also set for the other special symbol (for example, the 2nd special symbol), and the set two time reduction end conditions are set. Of these, it may be configured to end the time saving state based on the time saving ending condition that is satisfied earlier.

Specifically, when a predetermined period (for example, 100 times of time reduction) is set as the period for which the time reduction state is set, the special symbol change corresponding to the final change of the time reduction state (for example, the 100th time reduction) ends. The first time-saving end condition that is satisfied as a result, and the second time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the condition for starting a new special symbol change (for example, the 101st special symbol change) that is newly executed after a predetermined period is satisfied are satisfied. And, if the first time reduction end condition is satisfied first, that is, by the time the 101st special symbol change is started, the 100th special symbol change period (or symbol confirmation period) has ended. In that case, the time saving state is terminated at that point.

On the other hand, when the second time reduction end condition is satisfied before the first time reduction end condition is satisfied, that is, before the 100th special symbol change period (or symbol determination period) ends (special). If the condition for starting the 101st special symbol change is satisfied (during the symbol change), the time saving state may be terminated before the 101st special symbol lottery is executed.

With this configuration, the maximum period can be achieved while preventing the special symbol fluctuation (lottery) from being executed more than a predetermined number of times in the state where the time saving state is set as the game state. It can be set as a time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to set a state advantageous to the player as long as possible as a normal symbol lottery (variation).

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the probability variation counter 203aa for measuring the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set and the time reduction counter 203f for measuring the period in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set are provided. However, in each of the above embodiments, the time saving counter is used instead of the process of interrupting the subtraction of the probability variation counter 203aa (the process of interrupting (skipping) the measurement). A process of interrupting the subtraction of 203f may be applied, or vice versa.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 194. In the second embodiment described above, the so-called simultaneous fluctuation type pachinko machine 10 capable of simultaneously executing the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol, and further. It was configured to change the game state during the symbol confirmation period (the period during which the first symbol is stopped and displayed) for displaying the lottery result of the special symbol. That is, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the state where the probability variation state is set, the start timing of the symbol confirmation period (the first symbol indicating the big hit) in which the lottery result is displayed is displayed. Was configured to shift from the probable change state to the latent state at the timing when the stop is displayed).

With this configuration, the second special symbol in the latent state during the symbol confirmation period of special figure 1 (the period from the stop display of the first symbol indicating the jackpot to the execution of the jackpot game). (Special figure 2) It was possible to execute the game and improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the second embodiment described above, in order to prevent a situation in which the jackpot game and the lottery game of the special symbol are performed at the same time and the player cannot concentrate on the jackpot game, the jackpot game is performed. (From the time when the opening period of the jackpot game is set to the end of the ending period of the jackpot game), the special symbol change (lottery) is not executed. In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, since the lottery (variation) of the special symbol is not executed during the jackpot game, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game. However, since the special symbol lottery (variation) is not performed during all the periods during the jackpot game, the period for executing the special symbol lottery is limited, and the game efficiency (number of special symbol lottery executions per unit time) decreases. There was a problem of doing it.

On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, even during the period from the execution of the jackpot game to the start of the round game (opening period of the jackpot game), the special symbol change on the side that has not won the jackpot changes. It is configured to be executed. Specifically, for example, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol and the jackpot game corresponding to the winning jackpot is started (when the opening period of the jackpot game is set), during the opening period. It is configured to execute the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol.

That is, even during the jackpot game, the round game in which the ball can be entered by the jackpot game (the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is in an open state in which it is easy to enter the ball). During the period other than the game) (for example, the opening period, the interval period, and the ending period), the special symbol lottery can be executed. With this configuration, the jackpot game can be watched during the round game in the jackpot game, and the special symbol fluctuation can be watched during the other period, so that the player can be provided with an efficient game.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the jackpot is not won in the special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from providing an excessive jackpot game. In addition, in the present embodiment, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is wrong (other than the big hit), a small amount of privilege (prize ball) can be won in the small hit that can be given to the player. ing. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so that the probability of winning a small hit is different. Therefore, the degree of advantage between the second special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game of the first special symbol and the first special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game of the second special symbol can be different.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment>
Here, the electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 182. FIG. 180 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 180, the ROM 202 of the sixth embodiment is different from the ROM 202 of the second embodiment described above in that the open scenario table 202ea is added, and the other elements are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The open scenario table 202ea is a data table in which the game contents during the big hit game or the small hit game (hereinafter referred to as the hit game) are stored, and the scenario of the executed hit game is according to the hit type. It is remembered. Specifically, the length of the period (opening period) from the start of the winning game to the start of the first round game, the length of the round game period, and the variable winning state that is opened in the round game. The type of device, the number of times a round game is executed, the length of the inter-round game (interval period), and the length of the ending period set after all the round games are completed are stored.

The information (contents of the winning game) read out for executing the winning game corresponding to the winning big hit or small hit may be predetermined, and the open scenario table 202ea is used as in the present embodiment. Information may be stored, or the method used in each of the above-described embodiments may be adopted.

Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 181. FIG. 181 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the main control device 110RAM 203 according to the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 181, the RAM 203 of the sixth embodiment has a jackpot state flag 203ea, a small hit state flag 203eb, a special figure variable variable flag 203ec, and a jackpot interruption flag 203ed with respect to the RAM 203 of the second embodiment described above. , The difference is that the special figure fluctuation prohibition flag 203ee is added.

The jackpot status flag 203ea is for indicating the status during the jackpot game, and the type of the special symbol that won the jackpot and the current jackpot game status (during the opening period, during the round game, during the interval period, and the ending period). It is a flag referred to when determining which of the middle). Here, the contents of the jackpot state flag 203ea will be described with reference to FIG. 182 (a). FIG. 182 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot state flag 203ea. As shown in FIG. 182 (a), the jackpot state flag 203ea is composed of a 1-byte storage area, and is configured so that the gaming state can be specified by the state of the lower 4 bits.

Specifically, the special symbol that won the jackpot this time is the first special symbol (special diagram 1), and during the opening period (OP) of the jackpot game, the lower 4 bits are "0001" (FIG. 182 (a). ) Is described as "01"), the lower 4 bits are "0010" (described as "02" in FIG. 182 (a)) during the round game (round), and the lower 4 bits are described during the inter-round game (interval). The 4 bits are "0011" (described as "03" in FIG. 182 (a)), and the lower 4 bits are "0100" (described as "04" in FIG. 182 (a)) during the ending period (ED). Become.

The special symbol that won the jackpot this time is the second special symbol (special diagram 2), and during the opening period (OP) of the jackpot game, the lower 4 bits are "0101" (in FIG. 182 (a), "" 05 ”), and during the round game (round), the lower 4 bits are“ 0110 ”(described as“ 06 ”in FIG. 182 (a)), and during the inter-round game (interval), the lower 4 bits are. It becomes "0111" (described as "07" in FIG. 182 (a)), and the lower 4 bits become "1000" (described as "08" in FIG. 182 (a)) during the ending period (ED).

Further, when the jackpot game is not executed (when the jackpot middle flag 203o is set to off), the lower 4 bits are set to "0000" as the initial state. The jackpot state flag 203ea is configured to update its value according to the updated jackpot scenario in the jackpot control process 6 (see S2272 in FIG. 188) executed during the jackpot game, and is a winning state. The jackpot state flag 203ea is updated based on the information stored in the storage area 203j, that is, the type of the special symbol won in the jackpot and the content (big hit game state) indicated by the updated jackpot scenario.

As described above, since the value of the jackpot state flag 203ea is configured to be updated based on the jackpot scenario, for example, a means for storing the updated content of the jackpot status flag 203ea and the stored content thereof. A means for determining (past history) may be provided, and a configuration may be used in which the presence or absence of an abnormality in the jackpot game is determined based on the determination result of the past history of the jackpot state flag 203ea. Specifically, for example, from the values that can be set when a big hit is won by the lottery of Special Figure 1 (values of "01" to "04" shown in FIG. 182 (a)), the big hit by the lottery of Special Figure 2 When it is determined that the value has been updated to the value that can be set when the player wins the game (the value of "05" to "08" shown in FIG. It is preferable to configure it to notify an abnormality. As a result, it is possible to accurately determine that the player has played an illegal game during the jackpot game.

In this embodiment, the value of the jackpot state flag 203ea is configured to be variable according to the execution content of the jackpot control process 6 (see S2272 in FIG. 188), but the current jackpot game status can be determined. Any configuration may be used, for example, a means for determining whether or not the current jackpot is being hit, a means for detecting the open state of the variable winning device (first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650), and the like. May be configured to set the value of the jackpot state flag 203ea based on the discrimination (detection) result of each means, or the content of the image displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be discriminated. The current jackpot game situation may be determined based on the determination result of the means.

Then, when the value set in the jackpot state flag 203ea is updated, a state command for indicating to that effect is set and output to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 determines the current jackpot game status by receiving a status command for indicating that the value set in the jackpot status flag 203ea has been updated, and various production modes according to the jackpot game status. Is set.

In the sixth embodiment, the special symbol type won by the jackpot is also determined as the jackpot game situation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol type may not be determined. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of types for classifying the jackpot game situations.

The small hit state flag 203eb is for indicating the state during the small hit game, and which is the current small hit game status (during the opening period, during the round game, during the interval period, during the ending period). This is a flag that is referred to when determining. Here, the contents of the small hit state flag 203eb will be described with reference to FIG. 182 (b). FIG. 182 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit state flag 203eb. As shown in FIG. 182 (b), the small hit state flag 203eb is composed of a 1-byte storage area, and is configured so that the gaming state can be specified by the state of the lower 2 bits.

Specifically, during the opening period (OP) of the small hit game, the lower 2 bits become "01" (described as "01" in FIG. 182 (b)), and during the round game (round), the lower 2 bits become. Is "10" (described as "02" in FIG. 182 (b)), and the lower two bits are "11" (described as "03" in FIG. 182 (b)) during the ending period (ED). When the small hit game is not executed (when the small hit medium flag 203p is set to off), the lower two bits are "00" (described as "00" in FIG. 182 (b)). ..

In the present embodiment, since the round game is configured to be executed only once as the small hit game, the value for indicating the interval period is deleted from the above-mentioned big hit state flag 203ea, and the first 1 Since it is configured so that the small hit is not won in the lottery of the special symbol, the value for determining the type of the special symbol won in the small hit is also deleted. The value of the small hit state flag 203eb is configured to be set according to the update content of the small hit scenario to be updated in the small hit control process 6 (see S2273 in FIG. 193), and the small hit state flag is set. When the value of 203eb is updated, a status command for indicating the value of the updated small hit state flag 203eb is set and output to the voice lamp control device 113.

The voice lamp control device 113 grasps the current small hit game situation by receiving a state command including information for indicating the value of the small hit state flag 203eb, and displays an effect mode according to the current situation. Set.

The special symbol changeable flag 203ec is a flag for indicating whether the current situation is in a state where a new special symbol change can be executed, and is turned on when a new special symbol change can be executed. It is set.

The jackpot interruption flag 203ed is a flag for suspending the update of the jackpot scenario during the jackpot game, and is set to be turned on when the update of the jackpot scenario is interrupted. The jackpot interruption flag 203ed is set to on, for example, when the lottery result of the special symbol executed during the opening period of the jackpot game becomes a small hit and the jackpot game is executed.

In the sixth embodiment, a new special symbol lottery (variation) is executed in a part of the state during the jackpot game (a state in which the round game is not executed), and the special symbol lottery is performed. If a small hit is won, the small hit game is executed. During this small hit game, the big hit interruption flag 203ed is set to on so that the big hit scenario is not updated.

With this configuration, for example, even if a small hit is won during the opening period of the big hit game, the small hit game can be reliably executed without starting the round game of the big hit. In addition, even if a small hit is won within a predetermined period such as the opening period of the big hit, many small hit games are executed because the opening period of the big hit is not subtracted (update of the big hit scenario). You can enthusiastically play the game.

In the sixth embodiment, when the small hit game is executed during the big hit game, the update of the big hit scenario is interrupted and the small hit game is surely executed, but the present invention is limited to this. Without interrupting the update of the jackpot scenario, for example, forcibly ending the jackpot game based on the timing at which the jackpot round game is executed, or until the jackpot round game is finished. May be configured to be temporarily interrupted.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, since the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is set to be on based on the timing at which the small hit game is executed, the jackpot scenario is updated during the fluctuation time of the special symbol won by the small hit. Will be done. As a result, in addition to winning a small hit during the big hit game, the player can be made to play the game while expecting that a fluctuation pattern in which the shortest fluctuation time is set is set. On the other hand, the contents of the special symbol lottery (variation) can be closely watched.

In this case, regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol variation executed this time at the timing when the variation of the special symbol is started, it is preferable to execute the variation time suggestion notification suggesting the set variation time. As a result, it is possible to indicate to the player whether or not a short fluctuation time has been set, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the next special symbol lottery can be executed immediately by setting a short fluctuation time. That is, the fluctuation time suggestion notification is a notification indicating whether or not the lottery result is advantageous to the player without indicating whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a hit or a miss (hit or fail determination result).

In addition to the configuration of the sixth embodiment, for example, the big hit interruption flag 203ed may be set to ON based on the timing when the special symbol change won in the small hit is executed. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem that the round game of the big hit is executed while the special symbol change in which the small hit is won is being executed, and the player is provided with a game that is difficult to understand.

Further, in order to solve the above-mentioned problem, a means for determining the remaining period of the opening period of the jackpot game and a means for determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol are provided, and this special symbol lottery (variation) is the opening period. If it is determined that the special symbol lottery will end within the opening period, an effect mode will be set based on the lottery result (win / fail determination result) of the special symbol lottery, and if it is determined that the special symbol lottery (variation) will not end within the opening period. , The effect mode corresponding to the case where the lottery result (win / fail determination result) of the special symbol lottery is out of order may be set. With this configuration, even if the lottery result of the special symbol change that was forcibly terminated by executing the big hit round game is a small hit, the special symbol change without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. Can be stopped.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the sixth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 183 to 194. The control process of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment replaces the special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see FIG. 97) with respect to the control process of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment described above. Instead of the first special symbol change start process (see FIG. 33), the first special symbol change start process 6 (see FIG. 185) and the second special symbol change start process (see FIG. 39) are used instead of the process 6 (see FIG. 183). Instead, the second special symbol change start process 6 (see FIG. 186), the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 188) instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 53), and the jackpot end process instead of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 54). The point where the small hit control process 6 (see FIG. 193) is executed instead of the process 6 (see FIG. 192) and the small hit control process (see FIG. 55), the fluctuation condition discrimination process (see FIG. 184), and the round execution process (see FIG. 184). 189) and the small hit end process (see FIG. 194) are added. Other than that, the same processing is executed. The same processing is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the special symbol variation processing 6 (S181) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 183. FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation processing 6 (S181). In the special symbol variation processing 6 (S181), the variation condition determination process (S291) is added to the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 97) of the second embodiment described above, that is, the first special symbol variation start process. The first special symbol change start process 6 (see FIG. 185) is replaced with (see FIG. 33), and the second special symbol change start process 6 (see FIG. 186) is replaced with the second special symbol change start process (see FIG. 39). It differs in that it executes. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the special symbol variation processing 6 (S181), first, the variation condition determination process (S291) is executed. The details of the fluctuation condition determination process (S291) will be described later with reference to FIG. 184. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure variable flag 203ec is on (S292). If it is determined that the special figure variable flag 203ec is not on (S292: No), the process proceeds to S202. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure variable flag 203ec is on (S292: Yes), the process proceeds to S204.

Next, with reference to FIG. 184, the variation condition determination process (S291), which is one of the processes in the special symbol variation process 6 (S181) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation condition determination process (S291).

In the variation condition determination process (S291), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure variation prohibition flag 203ee is on (S3501). When it is determined that the special figure change prohibition flag 203ee is on (S3501: Yes), the special figure changeable flag 203ec is set to off (S3506), and the process proceeds to S3507. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation prohibition flag 203ee is not on (S3501: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot medium flag 203o is on (S3502). When it is determined that the jackpot middle flag 203o is on (S3502: Yes), the information set in the jackpot state flag 203ea is read out (S3503). Next, in the process of S3503, it is determined whether or not the read information of the jackpot state flag 203ea is "01" or "05". That is, it is determined whether it is the opening period of the jackpot (S3504). When it is determined that the read information is "01" or "05" (S3504: Yes), the special figure variable flag 203ec is set to ON (S3505), and the process proceeds to S3507. On the other hand, in the processing of S3504, when it is determined that the read information is not "01" or "05" (S3504: No), the special figure variable flag 203ec is set to off (S3506), and the processing of S3507. Move to.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit medium flag 203o is not on (S3502: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit medium flag 203p is on (S3507). When it is determined that the small hit middle flag 203p is off (S3507: No), the special figure variation flag 203ec is set to ON (S3512), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3507, when it is determined that the small hit medium flag 203p is on (S3507: Yes), the information set in the small hit state flag 203eb is read out (S3508). Next, it is determined whether or not the information of the small hit state flag 203eb read in the process of S3508 is "01" (S3509). When it is determined that the information is "01" (S3509: Yes), the special figure variable flag 203ec is set to ON (S3510), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the read information is not "01" (S3509: No), the special figure variable flag 203ec is set to off (S3511), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 185, the first special symbol variation start process 6 (S293), which is one of the processes in the special symbol variation process 6 (S181) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment. Will be explained. FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol change start processing 6 (S293). The first special symbol variation start process 6 (S293) is different in that the information of the jackpot state flag 203ea is read out from the first special symbol variation start process (S208 in FIG. 33) in the second embodiment. .. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the first special symbol change start processing 6 (S293), first, the information set in the jackpot state flag 203ea is read out (S391). Next, it is determined whether or not the information set in the jackpot state flag 203ea is "00" or "05". That is, it is determined whether it is the opening period of the jackpot of the second special symbol or the execution period of the jackpot (S392). If it is determined that the information set in the jackpot state flag 203ea is "00" or "05" (S392: Yes), the process proceeds to S301. On the other hand, when it is determined that the information set in the jackpot state flag 203ea is neither "00" nor "05" (S392: No), this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 186, the second special symbol variation start process 6 (S294), which is one of the processes in the special symbol variation process 6 (S181) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment. Will be explained. FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol change start processing 6 (S294). The second special symbol variation start process 6 (S294) reads out the information of the jackpot state flag 203ea for the second special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 39) in the second embodiment, and reads the information of the jackpot state flag 203ea, and the jackpot of the first special symbol. Add a process to determine whether it is the opening period or the round period of. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the second special symbol change start processing 6 (S294), first, the information set in the jackpot state flag 203ea is read out (S971). Next, it is determined whether or not the information set in the jackpot state flag 203ea is "00" or "01". That is, it is determined whether it is the opening period of the jackpot of the first special symbol or the execution period of the jackpot (S972). When it is determined that the information set in the jackpot state flag 203ea is "00" or "01" (S972: Yes), the process proceeds to S901. On the other hand, if it is determined that the information set in the jackpot state flag 203ea is not "00" or "01" (S972: No), the process of S902 is executed and the present process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 187, the electric accessory opening / closing process 6 (S2271) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing the contents of the electric accessory opening / closing process 6 (S2271).

In the electric accessory opening / closing process 6 (S2271), first, it is determined whether or not there is an opening setting (S3601). When it is determined that there is an open setting (S3601: Yes), the solenoid of the corresponding attacker is set to ON (S3602), the jackpot status flag 203ea is set to the corresponding value (S3606), and this process is terminated. do. On the other hand, in the process of S3601 when it is determined that there is no open setting (S3601: No), it is determined whether or not there is a closed setting (S3603). When it is determined that there is a closing setting (S3603: Yes), the solenoid of the corresponding attacker is set to off (S3604), the process of S3606 is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3603, when it is determined that there is no closing setting (S3603: No), it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the closing scenario (S3605). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the closing scenario (S3605: Yes), the process of S3606 is executed and the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3605 that it is not the end timing of the closing scenario (S3605: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, the jackpot control process 6 (S2272) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 188. FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 6 (S2272).

In the jackpot control process 6 (S2272), first, when it is determined in the process of S2301 that the jackpot scenario is set (S2301: Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is on (S2351). .. If it is determined that the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is on (S2351: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is not on (S2351: No), the jackpot scenario is updated (S2302).

Next, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the jackpot (S2302). When it is determined that it is the start timing of the big hit (S2303: Yes), the opening command is set (S2304), the value corresponding to the big hit state flag 203ea is set (S2352), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2303, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the start of the big hit (S2303: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S2305). If it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S2305: Yes), the round execution process (S2353) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 189, a round execution process (S2353), which is one process in the jackpot control process 6 (S2272) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the contents of the round execution process (S2353).

In the round execution process (S2353), first, it is determined whether or not the present time is the start timing of the first round (S3701). If it is determined that it is the start timing of the first round (S3701: Yes), the jackpot interruption process is executed (S3702), and the process proceeds to the process of S3703. The details of the jackpot interruption process (S3702) will be described later with reference to FIG. 190. On the other hand, in the process of S3701 when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the first round (S3701: No), the value corresponding to the jackpot state flag 203ea is set (S3703), and the process corresponding to the jackpot scenario is set. (S3704), and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 190, a jackpot interruption process (S3702), which is one process in the round execution process (S2353) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot interruption process (S3702).

In the big hit interruption process (S3702), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit medium flag 203p is on (S3801). When it is determined that the small hit middle flag 203p is on (S3801: Yes), the big hit interruption flag 203ed is set to on (S3802), the big hit interruption command is set (S3803), and the process proceeds to S3805. .. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3801 that the small hit medium flag 203p is not on (S3801: No), an opening command indicating the start of a small hit is set (S3804), and the process proceeds to S3805.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m or the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is larger than 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is changing (S3805). When it is determined that the special symbol is changing (S3805: Yes), the corresponding special symbol is stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (S3806), the special symbol fluctuation prohibition flag 203ee is set to ON (S3807), and this End the process. On the other hand, in the process of S3805, when it is determined that the special symbol is not changing (S3805: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Returning to FIG. 188, the explanation will be continued. On the other hand, in the process of S2305, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S2305: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the round (S2307). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the round (S2307: Yes), the closing of the specific winning opening is set (S2308), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2307, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the round (S2307: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of the end of the operation of the special electric power (S2354). When it is determined that it is the timing of the end of the operation of the special electric power (S2354: Yes), the ending execution process (S2355) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 191, an ending execution process (S2355), which is one process in the jackpot control process 6 (S2272) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending execution process (S2355).

In the ending execution process (S2355), first, a value corresponding to the jackpot state flag 203ea is set (S3901), an ending command is set (S3902), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 188, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S2354, when it is determined that it is not the operation end timing of the special electric power (S2354: No), it is determined whether it is the operation end timing of the combined operation device (S2356). When it is determined that it is the operation end timing of the combined operation device (S2356: Yes), the jackpot end process 6 (S2357) is executed to end this process. On the other hand, in the process of S2356, if it is determined that it is not the operation end timing of the combined operation device (S2356: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, the jackpot end process 6 (S2357) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 192. FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end process 6 (S2357). In the jackpot end process 6 (S2357), after setting the status command for the jackpot end process (S2312 in FIG. 54) of the second embodiment described above (S2406), the jackpot status flag 203ea is set to "00". The difference is that the process (S2451) is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the small hit control process 6 (S2272) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 193. FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit control process 6 (S2272). In the small hit control process 6 (S2272), a process of setting a value corresponding to the small hit state flag 203eb is added to the small hit control process (S2205 in FIG. 55) of the second embodiment described above. The difference is that the small hit end process (S2584) is executed instead of the process of S2512. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the small hit control process 6 (S2272), when it is determined that it is the timing to start the small hit in the process of S2503 (S2503: Yes), the opening command is set (S2504), and the small hit state flag 203eb is supported. The value to be set is set (S2581), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2503, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the small hit (S2503: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the small hit round (S2505). When it is determined that it is the start timing of the small hit round (S2505: Yes), the small hit operation setting process (S2506) is executed, the value corresponding to the small hit state flag 203eb is set (S2582), and this process is performed. To finish.

Then, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that it is the ending timing in the processing of S2509 (S2509: Yes), the ending command is set (S2510), and the value corresponding to the small hit state flag 203eb is set (S2509: Yes). S2583), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2509, if it is determined that it is not the ending timing (S2509: No), it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the small hit (S2511). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (S2511: Yes), the small hit end process (S2584) is executed to end this process.

Here, with reference to FIG. 194, a small hit end process (S2584), which is one process in the small hit control process 6 (S2272) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit end process (S2584).

In the small hit end process (S2584), first, it is determined whether the big hit interruption flag 203ed is on (S2591). When it is determined that the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is on (S2591: Yes), the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is set to off (S2592), and the special figure fluctuation prohibition flag 203ee is set to on (S2593). Next, the update value of the big hit scenario is subtracted by 1 (S2594), the small hit medium flag 203p is set to off (S2595), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2591 that the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is not on (S2591: No), the processes of S2592 to S2594 are skipped, the process of S2595 is executed, and the present process is terminated.

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the special symbol change on the side that has not won the jackpot even during the period from the execution of the jackpot game to the start of the round game (opening period of the jackpot game). Is configured to be executed. Specifically, for example, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol and the jackpot game corresponding to the winning jackpot is started (when the opening period of the jackpot game is set), during the opening period. It is configured to execute the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol.

That is, even during the jackpot game, the round game in which the ball can be entered by the jackpot game (the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is in an open state in which it is easy to enter the ball). During the period other than the game) (for example, the opening period, the interval period, and the ending period), the special symbol lottery can be executed. With this configuration, the jackpot game can be watched during the round game in the jackpot game, and the special symbol fluctuation can be watched during the other period, so that the player can be provided with an efficient game.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the jackpot is not won in the special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from providing an excessive jackpot game. In addition, in the present embodiment, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is wrong (other than the big hit), a small amount of privilege (prize ball) can be won in the small hit that can be given to the player. ing. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so that the probability of winning a small hit is different. Therefore, the degree of advantage between the second special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game of the first special symbol and the first special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game of the second special symbol can be different.

<7th Embodiment>
Next, the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 195 to 233. In each of the above-described embodiments, the jackpot game is executed only when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a specific area 650V is provided in the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 opened during the small hit game, and the ball passes through the specific area 650V during the small hit game. It is configured so that a big hit (so-called per 2 types) game is executed.

In addition, as will be described in detail later, as a path for the ball to flow down toward the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 opened during the small hit game, the first flow in which the ball is difficult to pass through the specific area 650V. The road ta (see FIG. 196) and the second flow path tb (see FIG. 196) in which the sphere easily passes through the specific region 650V are provided. As a result, the player pays close attention to which flow path the ball flows down during the small hit game. Therefore, since the player can be interested in the movement of the ball flowing down on the game board 13, the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the ball is distributed to the above-mentioned first flow path ta or the second flow path tb by the opening / closing operation of the electric accessory 3640a, so that the operation of the electric accessory 3640a It is also possible to make the player interested in. Further, when the ball flows down the second flow path tb which easily passes through the specific region 650V, the ease of winning the ball in the V winning device 650 is configured to be different according to the fluctuation time of the special symbol. ing.

Further, the change time of the special symbol to be set is configured to be different depending on the set game state and the winning small hit type. With this configuration, when a small hit corresponding to a big hit that is given a time saving state after the big hit game is won, the game state (advantageous time saving) that makes it easier for the ball to pass through the specific area 650V and the big hit end. When a small hit corresponding to a big hit to which a time saving state is given later is won, a gaming state (unfavorable time saving) that makes it easy for the ball to pass through the specific area 650V can be set.

Then, in the present embodiment, by using the above-mentioned advantageous time saving and disadvantageous time saving configurations, once a big hit is won (first hit), at least three big hits including the first hit are executed. It is configured so that the gaming state favorable to the player continues. By making it possible to set a game state in which it is guaranteed that the jackpot game is executed a plurality of times in this way, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the detailed configuration will be described later with reference to FIGS. 196 to 198, but in the seventh embodiment, the second special symbol is configured to win a small hit by lottery, and the second special symbol is won. The electric accessory 3640a is configured to operate so that the ball can easily enter the second entrance 3640, which is an opportunity to execute the lottery. Then, the electric accessory 3640a shifts to the closed state based on the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 3640a entering the second entry port 3640, and at that time, it flows down on the electric accessory 3640a. The ball is configured to be distributed to the first flow path ta and the second flow path tb according to the position (upstream side, downstream side) where the ball has flowed down.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the ball located on the downstream side of the ball flow path on the electric accessory 3640a is configured to be distributed to the second flow path tb which is advantageous to the player, and continuously. When the ball is launched, it is configured so that the ball can easily flow into the second flow path tb.

Therefore, in order to allow the ball to flow into the second flow path tb while the lottery for the second special symbol is being executed, it is necessary to continuously shoot the ball toward the game area of the game board 13. .. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an act of obtaining an advantageous result by firing the ball at a predetermined timing.

Here, the configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 195. FIG. 195 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 195, the seventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above in that the structure of the right side region of the game board 13 is significantly different.

Specifically, a point where the flow path unit 660 is provided in the right side region of the game board 13, a point where a second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 is provided below the flow path unit 660, and a second variable A point that a specific area 650v that can provide a big hit game based on the passage of a ball is provided in the winning device (V winning device) 650, and a second variable winning device provided in the lower center of the game board 13. The difference is that 650, the second ball entry port 640, and the lower first ball entry port 64b2 to which the electric accessory 64a is attached are deleted. Other configurations are the same as those of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) of the first embodiment described above, and the same configurations are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the configuration of the flow path unit 660 will be described with reference to FIGS. 196 to 198. FIG. 196 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the flow path unit 660, and FIG. 197 (a) is a plan view schematically showing a ball flow when the electric accessory 3640a is in a closed state (buried state). Therefore, FIG. 197 (b) is a perspective view schematically showing the ball flow when the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state (buried state). FIG. 198 (a) is a plan view schematically showing the ball flow when the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state (protruding state), and FIG. 198 (b) shows the electric accessory 3640a. It is a perspective view which shows typically the ball flow in the open state (protruding state).

To explain the term indicating the variable state of the electric accessory 3640a used in the seventh embodiment, the closed state of the electric accessory 3640a is a flow path for allowing the ball to enter the second entry port 3640. It is a term used to indicate a state in which (a flow path formed on the electric accessory 3640a) is closed, that is, a state in which the electric accessory 3640a is embedded in the game board 13, and is a functional expression. As a stipulation, the term restricted state (a state in which the ball is restricted from entering the second entry port 3640) may be used.

Further, the open state of the electric accessory 3640a is a state in which the flow path for allowing the ball to enter the second entry port 3640 (the flow path formed on the electric accessory 3640a) is open, that is, electric. It is a term used to indicate a state in which the accessory 3640a protrudes from the game board 13, and as a functional expression, a term of an allowable state (a state in which a ball is allowed to enter the second entrance 3640). May be used.

As shown in FIG. 196, the flow path unit 660 forms a first passage 660a forming the first flow path ta and a second flow path tb as a ball passage for flowing the ball toward the V winning device 650. It has a second passage 660b, and further, a first inflow port 661 into which a ball flowing down substantially in the center of the right side region flows in, and a ball flowing in from the first inflow port 661 flows down toward the electric accessory 3640a. The first taxiway 661a (see FIG. 197 (b)), the second inflow port 662 through which the ball flowing down the left side of the right side region flows in, and the ball flowing in from the second inflow port 662 pass through the through gate 67. The third passage 660c is allowed to flow down toward the lower region of the game board 13, the third inflow port 663 into which the ball flowing down on the right side of the right side region flows in, and the ball flowing in from the third inflow port 663 is flown into the game board 13. It is composed of an out port 66 for discharging to the outside.

The sphere flowing down the right region is a flow path unit while varying the flow path by a plurality of nails arranged above the flow path unit 660 (for example, a nail 660k (see FIG. 195) which is a flow path variable member). It is configured to reach 660, with about 55% of the spheres flowing down the right region flowing into the first inlet 661, about 40% into the second inlet 662, and about 5% into the third. It is configured to flow into the inflow port 663. The above-mentioned distribution ratio shows an average value when a right-handed game is performed. For example, among the firing intensities capable of a right-handed game, the ball continues to be fired at the weakest firing intensity. In this case, the proportion of balls flowing into the second inflow port 662 increases. By allowing the player to control the firing intensity in the right-handed game in this way, the inflow ratio to each inflow port arranged in the flow path unit 660 can be changed, so that the player can change the firing intensity. It can provide the enjoyment of varying the firing intensity so that a favorable game is performed.

Further, the ball flowing down the second inlet 662 is configured to be distributed to two flow paths formed in the depth direction of the pachinko machine 10, and is distributed to the front flow path (about 90). %) Flows down the third passage 660c provided with the through gate 67, and the balls (about 10%) distributed to the back passage (not shown) flow into the out port 66, and the pachinko machine 10 It is configured to be discharged to the outside. As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the position close to both ends of the electric accessory 3640a that is opened when the lottery result of the normal symbol is a hit (formed when the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state). An out port 66 is arranged (a partition wall for partitioning the space from the out port 66 is arranged) at a position close to each of the upstream end and the downstream end of the ball flow path.

With this configuration, the player can easily understand the movable range of the electric accessory 3640a that is operated when the hit game of the normal symbol is executed, so that the electric accessory 3640a during the hit game can be easily understood. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the opening operation of.

In the schematic diagram shown with reference to FIG. 196, the partition wall for partitioning the space between the out port 66 and the movable region of the electric accessory 3640a is in contact with the electric accessory 3640a, but in reality, it is in contact with the electric accessory 3640a. , It is configured so that a gap of less than half a sphere is generated. As a result, even if the opening operation of the electric accessory 3640a is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to prevent the electric accessory 3640a or the partition wall from being damaged by friction. Further, since the size of the gap is less than half the size of the sphere, it is possible to prevent the sphere from spilling downward from the gap.

Next, the ball flow of the right-handed game when the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state (buried state) will be described with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197. As shown in FIG. 196, the ball flowing in from the first inflow port 661 flows down toward the electric accessory 3640a, but when the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state (buried state), it is on the electric accessory 3640a. It flows down to the first passage 660a provided below the first taxiway 661a (see FIG. 197 (b)) without flowing down. The first passage 660a is a passage in which the first passage ta is formed. The first flow path ta is configured so that the time required for the ball to pass is about 0.5 seconds, and the ball is V-winned in a shorter time than the ball flowing down the second flow path tb, which will be described later. The device 650 can be reached.

In addition, most of the balls flowing into the second inflow port 662 pass through the through gate 67 regardless of the state of the electric accessory 3640a, and are on the front side of the second passage 660b described later. It flows down the third passage 660c formed (on the front side from the viewpoint of the player looking at the pachinko machine 10 from the front) and is discharged to the lower region of the game board 13. Further, a part (about 10%) of the balls flowing into the second inflow port 662 passes through the fourth passage (not shown) provided on the back side of the third passage 660c and flows into the out port 66.

In this way, by constructing a plurality of ball passages using the space in the depth direction of the game board 13, the flow path through which the balls flow can be three-dimensionally formed, so that the game area of the game board 13 can be formed. It is possible to configure more ball passages in a limited range, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing a ball flow that does not get tired of the player.

Similar to the second inlet 662 described above, the ball that has entered the third inlet also passes through the out port 66 and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 regardless of the state of the electric accessory 3640a. .. Here, the structure of the upper surface (lower surface of the ball flow) of the electric accessory 3640a will be described with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197 (a). As shown in FIG. 196, the electric accessory 3640a is configured so that a downward inclination is formed from the upper right direction to the lower left direction when the pachinko machine 10 is viewed from the front, and the upper surface of the electric accessory 3640a is formed. The ball that has reached is configured to flow down the upper surface of the electric accessory 3640a from the upstream side (upper right side) to the downstream side (lower left side) by its own weight.

The upper surface of the electric accessory 3640a is provided with a delay member for delaying the flow speed at which the ball flows down the upper surface. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 197 (a), the first delay member 3641 and the second delay member 3642 are provided, and the ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 3640a is the first delay member 3461. The ball enters the second entry port 640 provided on the lower end side of the flow end of the electric accessory 3640a while in contact with the second delay member 3642. In this embodiment, the installation member 3643 is provided as a delay member for delaying the flow speed of the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 3640a.

The installation member 3644 is directly attached to the flow path unit 660 instead of the electric accessory 3640a. Therefore, it is always arranged at a fixed position without being involved in the operation of the electric accessory 3640a. The delay member for delaying the flow speed of the ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 3640a is provided in the first delay member 3461, the second delay member 3642, and the flow path unit 660 attached to the electric accessory 3640a. When the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state (protruding state) (see FIG. 198 (a)) by being composed of the attached installation member 3644, the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 3640a meanders. It functions as a flow path forming means for making the electric accessory 3640a, and when the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state (buried state) (see FIG. 197 (a)), it is impossible for the ball to flow down on the electric accessory 3640a. It can function as a flow suppression means that makes it (difficult).

Here, the above-mentioned flow suppressing means will be specifically described. When the electric accessory 3640a is in a closed state (see FIG. 197 (a)), that is, in a state where it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entry port. As shown in FIG. 197 (a), since the electric accessory 3640a is embedded in the back side of the game board 13, the first delay member 3641 on the electric accessory 3640a is on the game board 13 side. Will be located in. As a result, the distance ct between the first delay member 3641 and the installation member 3643 becomes narrower (the distance (about 5 mm) so that the ball cannot pass between the first delay member 3641 and the installation member 3644. Become). Similarly, the distance td between the second delay member 3642 and the installation member 3644 is also such that the ball cannot pass through (about 7 mm).

As a result, even if the ball is illegally placed on the electric accessory 3640a while the electric accessory 3640a is closed, the ball enters the second entrance 3640. It can be suppressed. Further, when the electric accessory 3640a is set to the open state (protruding state), it is not necessary to bury each delay member on the electric accessory 3640a inside the gaming board 13, so that the electric accessory 3640a is to be embedded. The opening of the game board 13 to be provided can be narrowed, and it is possible to prevent dust and dirt from entering the inside of the pachinko machine 10 from the opening of the game board 13.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, even when the electric accessory 3640a is closed, the electric accessory 3640a is not completely embedded in the game board 13, but is partially (first delay member 3461, first). 2 The state in which the delay member 3642) is exposed is configured to be the closed state of the electric accessory 3640a. As a result, even when the electric accessory 3640a is located in the closed state, the player can easily grasp at which position the electric accessory 3640a is arranged. Further, since each delay member provided on the electric accessory 3640a is exposed, how the ball flows down on the electric accessory 3640a when the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state (protruding state). It is possible to let the player know whether to do it.

That is, in the seventh embodiment, the movement of the ball (ball flow on the electric accessory 3640a) that can be executed when the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state is in a state where the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state. Since the player can be made to grasp in advance, it is possible to prevent the player from actually opening the electric accessory 3640a and overlooking the state in which the ball flows down on the electric accessory 3640a.

On the other hand, when the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state (protruding state), as shown in FIG. 198, a ball that has flowed into the first inflow port 661 and has flowed down the first taxiway 661a is on the electric accessory 3640a. To reach. Then, the upper surface of the electric accessory 3640a is inclined and meanders along the shape of each delay member while flowing down toward the second entry port 3640.

Here, when the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state (protruding state), the spherical flow path formed on the electric accessory 3640a will be described with reference to FIG. 198 (a). Is formed with a meandering ball flow path until the ball discharged from the first guideway 661a reaches the second entry port 3640. The time for the sphere to pass through this meandering spherical flow path is about 2 seconds, and it passes through the flow path (flow path upstream portion ZA) from the discharge port of the first taxiway 661a to the inner side of the first delay member 3641. It takes about 0.8 seconds to pass through the flow path (downstream part ZB of the flow path) from the back side of the first delay member 3641 to the second entry port 3640. It is configured to be seconds.

In the present embodiment, the operation end condition of the electric accessory 3640a is the first normal electric end condition and the second, which are satisfied when the elapsed time from the operation to the open state (protruding state) is 3 seconds. The second normal power end condition, which is satisfied when one ball enters the ball entry port 3640, is set, and when any of the normal power end conditions is satisfied, the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state. It is configured to operate to (buried state).

The ball staying on the electric accessory 3640a when the electric accessory 3640a operates from the open state (protruding state) to the closed state (buried state) is the first passage 660a, which is desired below the electric accessory 3640a. Alternatively, it is configured to fall into any of the second passages 660b. That is, the moving distance (moving distance in the depth direction) when operating the electric accessory 3640a from the open state (protruding state) to the closed state (buried state) is at least one ball (11 mm) or more. In the present embodiment, the moving distance of the electric accessory 3640a is set to be 15 mm, which is larger than one ball (11 mm) and smaller than two balls (22 mm).

With this configuration, when the electric accessory 3640a is closed, the ball located on the electric accessory 3640a can be reliably dropped downward, and the two balls are pachinko. Since the machines 10 do not continuously fall in the depth direction, it is possible to prevent ball clogging from occurring inside the first passage 660a and the second passage 660b.

The sphere staying in the flow path upstream portion ZA (see FIG. 198 (a)) of the meandering spherical flow path stays in the first passage 660a and in the flow path downstream portion ZB (see FIG. 198 (a)). The sphere is configured to fall into the second passage 660b. In this embodiment, due to the inertia acting on the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 3640a, the ball moves from the open state (protruding state) to the closed state (buried state) at a speed at which the ball falls directly below. It is configured as follows.

In the seventh embodiment, the electric accessory 3640a is in an open state (protruding state), and the ball is located between the second delay member 3642 and the second entry port 3640. When the ball moves to the closed state (buried state), the ball collides with the second delay member 3642 moving toward the second entry port 3640 and enters the second entry port 3640. It is composed. As described above, depending on the position of the ball on the electric accessory 3640a, the operation of moving the electric accessory 3640a from the open state to the closed state is defined as a guiding operation for guiding the ball to the second entry port. be able to.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be capable of firing 100 balls per minute, and when 100 balls are fired per minute in a right-handed game, the ratio of one ball to every two balls is about one. A ball flows into the first inflow port 661. That is, since the balls fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds flow into the first inflow port 661 at a rate of one in two balls, the interval at which the balls flow into the first inflow port 661 is about 1.2 on average. It will be seconds.

And, as described above, since the downstream portion ZB of the flow path is configured to take 1.2 seconds for the ball to pass through, when the above-mentioned second normal power termination condition is satisfied, that is, the second ball entry port. When the electric accessory 3640a operates in the closed state (buried state) due to the ball entering the 3640, and the ball is continuously launched into the right-handed area, the second entry port 3640 Since the electric accessory 3640a operates in a closed state while the ball that has flowed into the first inflow port 661 next to the ball that has entered the ball is located in the downstream portion ZB of the flow path, the ball is placed in the second passage 660b. It can be made easy to fall.

On the other hand, when the game is played with the timing of intentionally launching the ball, it is difficult for another ball to fall into the second passage 660b with the ball entering the second entry port 3640. can do. Therefore, in order to allow the ball to enter the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650, which is advantageous to the player, it is possible to encourage the ball to be continuously fired.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the time saving state is set as the gaming state, 3 seconds is set as the first normal power ending condition of the electric accessory 3640a as described above, but the gaming state is the normal state. In this case, the first normal train end condition is set to 0.2 seconds. This 0.2 seconds is set to be shorter than the time (0.8 seconds) required to flow down the upstream portion of the meandering spherical flow path formed on the electric accessory 3640a. Even if the right-handed game is performed during the normal state, the ball will not be allowed to enter the second entrance 3640. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the privilege of being given an advantageous privilege to a player who plays an inappropriate game such as playing a right-handed game during a normal state.

In addition, since it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down to the second passage 660b, the ball is allowed to flow down to the second passage 660b with the V winning device 650 opened by some method to reach the specific area 650V. It is possible to suppress cheating by passing the ball.

In the present embodiment, the ball passes through the second passage 660b, which is advantageous to the player, for the right-handed game in the normal state or the player who does not continuously perform the right-handed game in the time-saving state. The second passage 660b is provided on the downstream side of the electric accessory 3640a in order to make it difficult to make the electric accessory 3640a, but the second passage 660b may be provided on the upstream side of the electric accessory 3640a without limitation. Further, the number of passages for receiving the balls that have fallen from the electric accessory 3640a may be three or more, or a plurality of receiving ports for the balls that have fallen from the electric accessory 3640a are provided, and each receiving port is used in the V winning device 650. It may be configured so that the probability of passing through the specific region 650V is different. Further, a plurality of passages through which the ball that has fallen from the electric accessory 3640a can pass through the specific area 650V are provided, and the time required for each passage to reach the specific area 650V (time required for winning the V winning device 650). May be configured to be different.

Returning to FIG. 195, the explanation will be continued. A first variable winning device 65 is provided below the flow path unit 660. Similar to the first embodiment described above, the first variable winning device 65 is opened when a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery. In addition, 90% of the balls launched in the right-handed game during the jackpot game (balls that flowed into the first inflow port 661 (50%) and balls that flowed into the second inflow port 662 (40%)) Since both are configured to win a prize in the first variable winning device 65, even if the flow path unit 660 is provided on the upstream side (upper side) of the first variable winning device 65, the jackpot game can be smoothly executed. Can be done. Further, since the sphere that has flowed into the first inflow port 661 and the sphere that has flowed into the second inflow port 662 flow down different flow paths and reach the first variable winning device 65, a plurality of spheres can be simultaneously placed on the first variable winning device 65. 1 It is possible to easily make the variable winning device 65 win a prize.

<Regarding the content of the production in the 7th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 199 to 202, the playability of the seventh embodiment will be briefly described before the characteristic effects performed in the seventh embodiment are described. In the seventh embodiment, when a big hit is won by a special symbol lottery, or a small hit is won by a special symbol lottery, the ball is passed through a specific area (specific area 650V) during the small hit game. In some cases, the jackpot game is configured to be executed (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type).

Further, in the lottery of the first special symbol, the small hit is not won, and only in the lottery of the second special symbol, the small hit is won. The second ball entry port 3640, which triggers the execution of the lottery for the second special symbol, is configured so that the ball can be thrown in only when the time saving state is set as the game state. Then, when the jackpot game is executed, the time saving state is set at a predetermined rate after the jackpot is completed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 195) is configured to open in the small hit game, and the ball is passed through a specific area 650V provided in the V winning device 650. It has a difficult first flow path (first passage 660a) and a second flow path (second passage 660b) that is easy to pass through, and it is possible to change which flow path the ball flows down according to the game content. Is configured to allow

Further, the seventh embodiment has an advantageous small hit in which the time saving state is set after the end of the correspondingly set big hit game, and a disadvantageous small hit in which the time saving state is not set. It is configured to change the fluctuation time set according to it. In addition, as a time saving state, when the advantageous small hit is won, it is easy to put the ball in the specific area 650V, and when the disadvantageous small hit is won, it is easy to put the ball in the specific area 650V. It is configured to be able to set the time saving state.

In the present embodiment, the second passage (second passage 660b) capable of flowing the ball toward the specific region 650V in the V winning device 650 based on the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol It is configured to set the state in which the ball can flow down, and is configured to change the fluctuation time of the special symbol set at the time of winning the small hit between the advantageous time saving state and the disadvantageous time saving state. Then, in the state where the advantageous time saving state is set, the ball flowing down the second flow path wins the V winning device 650 when the advantageous small hit is won, and the second flow path is won when the disadvantageous small hit is won. The variation time of the special symbol corresponding to each small hit type is set so that the ball flowing down the ball does not win the V winning device 650.

With this configuration, when the advantageous time saving state is set, the ball does not pass through the specific area 650V even if the disadvantageous small hit is won, so the time saving state is set across the big hit game. be able to. That is, in the case of winning the jackpot (first hit) in which the advantageous time saving state is set after the jackpot ends in the lottery of the first special symbol, the jackpot game is executed at least twice (three times including the first hit). be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 199 (a), the effect executed when the normal symbol (second symbol) is won in the time saving state will be described. FIG. 199 (a) is a display screen showing an example of an effect executed when a normal symbol (second symbol) is won in a time-saving state. As shown in FIG. 199 (a), while the time saving state is set, the character "right-handed" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 in order to allow the player to perform the right-handed game. A symbol for showing the lottery result of the normal symbol is displayed in the variable region Dm5.

The symbol displayed in the normal symbol fluctuation region Dm5 is variablely displayed in accordance with the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol (second symbol) executed when the sphere passes through the through gate 67 (see FIG. 195). This is a display mode for showing the result of the lottery this time, in synchronization with the timing at which the fluctuation of the normal symbol (second symbol) is stopped. FIG. 199 (a) shows a display mode “display mode imitating two circles” indicating that the lottery result of the normal symbol (second symbol) is a hit. In the embodiment, when the lottery result of the normal symbol (second symbol) is out of order, the "display mode imitating two cross marks" is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol fluctuation area Dm5, and the normal symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed. ) Is being displayed, the "display mode in which the circle mark and the cross mark are alternately and variablely displayed" is displayed in the normal figure fluctuation area Dm5.

Then, as shown in FIG. 199 (a), when a winner is won in the regular drawing lottery, a character 811 imitating a rabbit crosses the bridge 851 and heads for the race venue 852. In this production, the ball is made to flow down on the electric accessory 3640a operated to the closed state (protruding state) based on the winning in the normal drawing lottery, and the ball is made to enter the second entrance 3640. It shows a game, and the operating state of the electric accessory 3640a is expressed by using the erected state of the bridge 851 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the ball enters the second entrance 3640. The display content is set so as to express whether or not the character 811 reaches the race venue 852.

In this way, by performing an effect reminiscent of actual game playability using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to inform the player of complicated game playability in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in the state of FIG. 199 (a), neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol has started to change, and it is in either the special figure 1 display area Dm1 or the special figure 2 display area Dm2. A display mode indicating that no special symbol change has been performed is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "preparing for the race" are displayed, suggesting the content of the future production.

Here, to briefly explain the flow of the effect content executed during the time saving state in the present embodiment, it is executed based on the fact that the ball is passed through the through gate 67 in the state where the time saving state is set. If a winner is won in the ordinary symbol lottery (general drawing lottery), as shown in FIG. A production corresponding to the game of entering the ball (a production toward the race venue) is executed.

Then, when the ball enters the second entrance 3640 and the change of the second special symbol is started, the character 811 reaches the race venue and the race effect shown in FIG. 199 (b) described later is executed. To. The content of this race effect depends on the lottery result (win / fail judgment result, fluctuation time) of the second special symbol being executed and the inflow situation of the ball into the second passage 660b where the ball can easily enter the specific area 650V. Is set.

After that, when the ball passes through the specific area 650V in the small hit game, the effect that the character 811 is the first place as a result of the race is executed (see FIG. 201 (b)). In this way, each game executed in the time-saving state, that is, a game in which a normal symbol is won, a game in which a ball is inserted into the second entrance 3640, and a small hit is won by a lottery for the second special symbol. It is possible to notify the player of the game result of the game for passing the ball to the specific area 650V during the game to be caused and the small hit game by using a series of effects. Therefore, since the player can grasp the game result by seeing the effect (race effect) executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. ..

Here, the display screen during the race production will be returned to FIG. 199 (b) to continue the explanation. The display shown in FIG. 199 (a) was executed, that is, the normal symbol (second symbol) was won during the time saving state, and the electric accessory 3640a was variably operated to the open state (allowable state). When the ball flows down on the electric accessory 3640a and enters the second entrance 3640, the race start screen shown in FIG. 199 (b) is displayed.

On the race start screen, a display mode in which the character 811 imitating a rabbit executes a race with a rival 860 imitating a turtle is displayed. The state shown in FIG. 199 (b) is a state in which the first second special symbol change is executed after the time saving state is set, and the second special symbol (special symbol) is set in the special figure 2 fluctuation region Dm2. A display mode (dynamic display mode) indicating that FIG. 2) is being displayed in a variable manner is displayed, and the characters "race entry remaining 9 times" are displayed in the remaining time reduction notification area Dm6 as the remaining time reduction count. .. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "goal in the first place" are displayed in order to guide the production result of the race effect corresponding to the game result that is advantageous to the player.

Next, when the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed during the time saving state and the lottery result is out of order, the screen shown in FIG. 200 (a) is displayed. In FIG. 200A, the stop display mode of "3, 4, 6" indicating that the lottery result of the special figure 2 is out of order is displayed in the special figure 2 fluctuation area Dm2, and the main display area Dm. , An effect mode indicating that the race effect has ended (a display mode in which the character 811 falls into the river and cannot reach the goal) is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "expected next time" are displayed to indicate that the change in the special figure 2 this time was not a game result advantageous to the player and that the time saving state continues. ..

On the other hand, when the lottery of the special figure 2 is a win, the screen shown in FIG. 200 (b) or FIG. 201 (a) is displayed. As described above with reference to FIG. 196, in the present embodiment, the ball passage is configured so that two flow paths for flowing the ball toward the V winning device 650 which is opened at the time of winning a small hit are formed. The time required to reach the V winning device 650, which is opened during the small hit game, is configured to differ depending on which flow path the ball passes through. Further, the ease of passing the ball to the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 is configured to be different depending on the flow path through which the ball passes.

Therefore, during the special symbol fluctuation when the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is won by lottery, the flow path in which the ball is flowing toward the V winning device 650 is detected, and the detection result is obtained. It is configured to make the production mode different based on the above. Specifically, when the ball flows down the second passage (delayed passage) 660b which is advantageous to the player during the small hit fluctuation of the special figure 2, the effect mode shown in FIG. 200 (b) is displayed. FIG. 201 (a) shows a case where the ball flows down the first passage (normal passage) 660a which is disadvantageous to the player during the small hit fluctuation of FIG. 2 (when the ball does not flow down the second passage 660b). The production mode is displayed.

In FIG. 200 (b), in order to show that the ball easily passes through the specific area 650V in the small hit game executed after the special figure 2 fluctuation during execution is stopped and displayed, the main display is as a race effect. An effect is executed in which the character 811 runs ahead of the rival 860 in the area Dm. Then, the display mode of the character 811 is changed to a display mode different from the normal display mode (display mode wearing an aura), and the player is notified that there is a high possibility that the character 811 will be the first place in this race production. In order to do so, the characters "Speed UP" are displayed. In addition, the characters "Great Chance" are also displayed in the sub-display area Ds as a comment to indicate that the character 811 is likely to be the first in the race production this time.

On the other hand, in FIG. 201 (a), as a race effect, an effect mode in which the character 811 and the rival 860 aim for a goal while developing a dead heat is displayed. In this way, even if the lottery results of the second special symbol (special diagram 2) are the same small hit type, it is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 due to the difference in the flow path through which the ball flows. Since it is possible to make the player predict whether or not the game result will be advantageous to the player by making the effect mode different, it is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to make the player interested in the contents of a series of productions (race productions).

Then, when the ball passes through the specific area 650V during the small hit game, that is, when it is confirmed that the big hit game is executed after the small hit game is completed, the effect mode shown in FIG. 201 (b) is displayed. Will be done.

On the other hand, when the ball does not pass through the specific area 650V during the small hit game, the rival 860 scores a goal before the character 811 in the production mode shown in FIG. 202 (a), that is, in the race production. The effect mode to be performed is displayed.

Further, although detailed description will be described later, in the present embodiment, the first time saving state (time saving state A) which is advantageous to the player as the time saving state and the second time saving state which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first time saving state. The state (time saving state B) can be set, and when the time saving state A (first time saving state) is set, the small hit type corresponding to the big hit game in which the time saving state is given is set. The ball is configured to pass through the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 only when the player wins the game.

That is, in the state where the time saving state A is set, when the big hit game is executed based on the small hit winning, the time saving state which is advantageous to the player is surely set after the big hit game is completed. is doing.

Therefore, in the seventh embodiment, in order to suggest (notify) to the player that the time saving state A has been set, the effect mode shown in FIG. 202 (b) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to be displayed. FIG. 202B is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the time saving state A is set.

As shown in FIG. 202 (b), when the time saving state A is set, an effect mode in which the seabed race in which the background showing the seabed is set is executed is set. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "If you win the race, a luxurious prize is confirmed !?" is displayed, which suggests that the time saving state is set again after the big hit game is completed. By suggesting that the time saving state A is set by changing the background when the race is executed in this way, it is possible to set a staging mode that is easy for the player to understand, and at the same time, during the actual race. Since the effects can be shared, the amount of image data used to set the effect mode can be reduced.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, a plurality of background images other than the normal background and the above-mentioned seabed background can be set as the background of the effect during the race. For example, the desert. You can set a background that imitates a tree, a background that imitates a tree sea, or a background that imitates an urban area. Then, each background has a different ratio set according to the currently set time saving state (time saving state A, time saving state B). As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting which is the currently set time saving state based on the background type set as the background of the effect during the race.

Further, a special measuring means for measuring the number of times the time saving state A is continuously set is provided, and the setting can be made only when the number of times the time saving state A is continuously set reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times). A background may be provided. This provides a sense of security that the time saving state is set to be advantageous to the player, and can provide a sense of superiority by notifying the surrounding players that the game result is special. ..

Although the characteristic effect mode executed in the seventh embodiment has been described above, the above-mentioned contents are merely examples, and other effect modes may be displayed. For example, in the effect example described with reference to FIGS. 199 to 202, an effect example in which an effect mode corresponding to the game result is set is shown, but the effect is not limited to this, and the effect mode is easily set by the game result. May be configured to be different.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the state where the effect mode shown in FIG. 199 (b) is displayed, that is, in the state where the ball enters the second entry port 3640 during the time saving state (the variation in FIG. 2 is started). , The display mode of the rival 860 may be variably set based on the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery, for example, an advantageous small hit (small hit A) which is advantageous to the player in the special figure 2 lottery. Rival 860 is displayed depending on whether the player wins, the disadvantaged small hit (small hit C), which is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous small hit, or the non-winning (winning out of) small hit. It may be configured so that the type of the character set as an aspect is different.

With this configuration, when the special figure 2 fluctuation starts, the player is provided with information that can predict the future game content, that is, the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery and the winning small hit type. Can be provided.

In addition, when the effect mode (display mode) suggesting the lottery result of the special figure 2 variation is displayed (set) at the time when the special figure 2 variation is started, the content of the displayed effect mode is grasped. However, there arises a problem that the action of continuing the game is performed only when the lottery result is favorable to the player, but in the present embodiment, when the ball is continuously entered into the second entrance 3640, the ball is continuously inserted. It is configured so that it is difficult to pass the ball to the specific area 650V during the small hit game unless the ball is fired.

As a result, even if the effect mode (display mode) suggesting the lottery result of the special figure 2 change is displayed (set) at the time when the special figure 2 change is started, the display mode is confirmed and then the display mode is displayed. Since it is possible to prevent the player from determining whether or not to make the V winning device 650 win the ball during the small hit game, the above-mentioned problem can be solved.

In addition, since the race shown in FIG. 199 (b) can be started from the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation is started, the period during which the race is executed (the period during which the effect is executed during the race) can be lengthened. The staging effect can be enhanced. Specifically, since the fluctuation period of the special symbol can be included in the production execution period during the race, for example, winning the winning (big hit, small hit) by the special symbol lottery is longer than the case of losing. By configuring the variable period so that it is easy to set, it is possible to make the player think that the longer the effect execution period during the race is, the more the player wins, and the longer the period to execute the effect. As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect of suggesting that the player has won the prize (hit suggestion effect).

Further, in the present embodiment, after the discrimination by the discrimination means (special figure 2) is executed during the period from the start of the special figure 2 variation to the end of the small hit game, the discrimination result is a predetermined discrimination result. Using the specific game (small hit game) executed in the case of (small hit), the character 811 is configured to execute the effect of racing (see FIGS. 199 (b) to 202 (a)). , The value (information) for indicating the remaining time reduction number displayed in the remaining time reduction notification area Dm6 (the remaining number of times excluding the special figure change currently being executed) at the start of the race (see FIG. 199 (b)) is raced. It is configured to be continuously displayed until the end (FIG. 202 (a)), that is, until the end of the small hit game executed after the end of the special figure variation (special figure 2 variation).

In this way, even if the special figure fluctuation is completed and the small hit game is executed, the player can understand the effect during the race by configuring the display mode of the remaining time reduction notification area Dm6 so as not to change. It can be easily notified.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the race is performed using one special figure change (lottery) and the period until the small hit game is completed when the small hit is won in the special figure lottery. Since it is configured to execute the middle production, there is a problem that the production execution period during the race is significantly different based on the result of the special drawing lottery. That is, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the small hit game is not executed, so that the period during which the small hit game is executed cannot be included in the during-race production execution period, and the during-race production is executed. There was a problem that the period was shortened.

Further, in the present embodiment, at least a lottery result of a special symbol and a game result of a small hit game are included as elements for branching the effect mode of the effect during the race. (For example, see FIGS. 200 (b) and 201 (a)) cannot be provided to the player, and the player gets tired of the game before he / she can enjoy various effects. There was a risk that the problem would occur.

In order to solve such a problem, for example, in a part of the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the fluctuation time is longer than that in the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, specifically. , The deviation pattern (variation pattern for Gase production) in which the fluctuation time set when the small hit is won and the (same) fluctuation time similar to the total time of the small hit game time are set. It is configured to be configurable, and when this variation pattern for Gase production is set, as a production during the race, a small hit is won as if it were a special symbol variation, and the ball does not pass through the specific area 650V during the small hit game. It is preferable to configure it so as to set an effect mode (see FIG. 202 (a)) that indicates that. As a result, even if a small hit is not won in the special drawing lottery, the player can experience the production mode set at the end of the production during the race.

In addition, if a big hit is won in the special drawing lottery, the same fluctuation time as the fluctuation time set when the small hit is won is set, and the first round of the big hit game and the small hit are set. It is advisable to set the opening operation of the jackpot game so that the game and the game have the same opening operation mode. As a result, even if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery, the effect during the race can be executed, so that the player is provided with an effect mode in which the effect result of the effect during the race is advantageous to the player. Can be made easier.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect during the race is executed using the period (special figure fluctuation period, small hit execution period) set based on one special symbol lottery. Without limitation, it may be configured to execute the effect during the race using a period set based on a plurality of special symbol lottery. With such a configuration, for example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is continuously out of order, it is possible to execute the effect during the race by using the continuous special symbol fluctuation period.

Therefore, even if the fluctuation time set when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order is set to be shorter than that when the lottery result of the special symbol is a hit, it is set at the end of the production during the race. The production mode can be provided to the player. In addition, in order to set one effect mode using a plurality of deviation variations, the effect mode for indicating to the player that the lottery of the special symbol was out of order is made to correspond to each special figure lottery. Compared to the case of setting, it is possible to reduce the number of times the effect of notifying the player that the special drawing lottery is out is executed.

The contents of the effect when the time saving state is set have been described above, but in addition to that, for example, by the lottery of the first special symbol, the jackpot type in which the time saving state A is set is won after the big hit game is completed. In some cases, it may be configured to execute a special suggestion effect for notifying that fact. For example, instead of the display mode of the third symbol that is normally stopped and displayed, a special display mode of "VVV" is used. 3 The symbol may be stopped and displayed. As a result, it is possible to promptly notify the player that a game state advantageous to the player is set, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind for a long period of time.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the 7th embodiment>
Here, the electrical configuration in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 203 to 213. FIG. 203 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 203 (a), the ROM 202 of the seventh embodiment has a random number 7 table 202fa per first, a type selection 7 table 202fb per first, a random number 7 table 202fc per second, and a variation pattern 7 table 202fd. It has a small hit type selection 7 table 202fe and an open scenario 7 table 202ff. It should be noted that the configuration (table) having the same name as the electrical configuration used in any of the above-described embodiments (the same name except for "7" attached to make it identifiable that it was used in the seventh embodiment). ) Is the same as each of the above-described embodiments in terms of its use, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The first random number 7 table 202fa is a data table used for the same purpose as the first random number table 202a used in each of the above-described embodiments, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first hit. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the big hit set by the random number 7 table 202fa, it is determined as the big hit of the special symbol. Further, the first random number 7 table 202fa is provided with two types, a special symbol 1 random number table 202fa1 for the first special symbol and a special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2 for the second special symbol, and is a big hit. Although the number of random numbers is the same, the value of the random number that is a small hit is set only in the special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2 for the second special symbol (see FIG. 204). In this way, by making the number of random numbers that become small hits different (setting only one), the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery can be a privilege (big hit or small hit) for the player. ) The degree of expectation for grant can be different.

Here, the contents of the first random number 7 table 202fa will be described with reference to FIG. 204. FIG. 204 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the first random number 7 table 202fa, and FIG. 204 (b) is the contents specified in the special symbol 1 random number table 202fa1. FIG. 204 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2. In the first random number 7 table 202fa, a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a big hit and a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a small hit are set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is a table.

Specifically, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, the special symbol 1 random number table 202fa1 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 204 (b), in the special symbol 1 random number table 202fa1, "0 to 4" among the values of the first random number counter C1 is defined as the jackpot determination value, and the other values are other than the jackpot. It is specified as a judgment value of (that is, out of order). Then, in the lottery of the first special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 is determined, and when the value is any of "0 to 4", it is determined to be a big hit.

When the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 204 (c), in the special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2, "0 to 4" among the values of the first random number counter C1 are defined as jackpot determination values, and "5 to 504" is small. It is defined as a hit determination value, and "505 to 999" is defined as a determination value other than that (that is, a deviation). Then, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 is determined, and when the value is any of "0 to 4", it is determined to be a big hit, and it is determined to be any of "5 to 504". In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit.

The first hit type selection 7 table 202fb is a data table used for the same purpose as the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 14) used in each of the above-described embodiments, and is a value of the first hit type counter C2. Is configured to refer to the first hit type selection 7 table 202fb to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is won. Here, the contents of the first type selection 7 table 202fb will be described with reference to FIG. 205.

FIG. 205A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the first type selection 7 table 202fb. As shown in FIG. 205 (a), in the present embodiment, the special figure 1 jackpot type used when determining the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired at the time of the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). It has a selection table 202fb1 and a special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202fb2 used for determining the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired at the time of lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2). .. As a result, the jackpot type when the jackpot is won by the lottery of Special Figure 1 and the jackpot type when the jackpot is won by the lottery of Special Figure 2 are different, or each of a plurality of types of jackpot types is selected. Since the ratios can be different, it is necessary to provide the player with different game characteristics between the game using the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the game using the second special symbol (special figure 2). It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202fb1 used at the time of the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) will be described with reference to FIG. 205 (b). FIG. 205 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202fb1. As shown in FIG. 205 (b), in the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is any of "0 to 9", the jackpot type is "big hit A", and any of "10 to 49". If it is, the jackpot type is "big hit B", and if it is any of "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit C".

"Big hit A" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 15 rounds (R) as a big hit game, and the game state after the big hit is set to the time saving state (actual time saving number of times is 10 times). Then, as the time saving state set after the end of the big hit, "time saving A" which is advantageous to the player is set. This "big hit A" has a large number of rounds of big hit games, and the game state after the big hit is set to "time saving A" which is more advantageous among the time saving states which are advantageous for the player, so "big hit A" is , The most advantageous jackpot type for players. Of the 100 counter values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 10 are random values for which "big hit A" is selected, so the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a big hit. When it becomes, the ratio that "big hit A" is selected is 10%.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the time saving state is set, it is an opportunity of the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) which is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 lottery). It is configured so that the ball can easily enter the second ball entry port 3640, and the number of lottery (variation number) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure) in a time-saving state. When the number of lottery (number of fluctuations) of 2) and the total number of times (total number of times) reaches 100, or the number of lottery (number of fluctuations) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) reaches 10 times. If this is the case, the time saving state is configured to end.

With this configuration, even if the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1), which is disadvantageous to the player, is executed immediately after the time saving state is set, the lottery for the special figure 2 is performed a specified number of times ( Since it is possible to execute the game 10 times, the player can play the game with peace of mind. As a result, for example, when the total number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 and the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 in the time saving state reaches the specified number of times (10 times), the time saving state is configured to end. In order to prevent the special figure 1 fluctuation (lottery) from being executed when the time saving state is set after the big hit ends, a game in which the holding of the special figure 1 is not secured (a game in which the ball is not continuously fired). (So-called stop-and-shoot game)) can be prevented from being executed, and the operation of the game can be improved.

"Big hit B" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 5 rounds (R) as a big hit game and the game state after the big hit is set to the time saving state (the number of times shortening is 10 times). Then, as the time saving state set after the end of the big hit, "time saving B" which is disadvantageous to the player is set. This "big hit B" has a smaller number of rounds of the big hit game than the above-mentioned "big hit A", but the game state after the big hit is set to a time saving state which is advantageous for the player, so that the big hit is advantageous for the player. However, a "time saving B" that is more disadvantageous to the player is set than the time saving state "time saving A" that is set when the "big hit A" is won.

That is, the jackpot B is an advantageous jackpot in which the time saving state is set after the jackpot ends, but the number of rounds of the jackpot game and the type of the time saving state set after the jackpot end are more games than the above-mentioned "big hit A". It will be disadvantageous to the person. That is, "big hit B" is a big hit type that is more disadvantageous than the above-mentioned "big hit A". Of the 100 counter values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 40 are random values for which "big hit B" is selected, so the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a big hit. When it becomes, the ratio that "big hit B" is selected is 40%.

"Big hit C" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 5 rounds (R) as a big hit game and the game state after the big hit is set to the normal state (non-time saving state). Since the number of rounds is small and the normal state is set after the big hit, "big hit C" is a big hit type that is disadvantageous to the player. Of the 100 counter values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 50 are random values for which "big hit C" is selected, so the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a big hit. When it becomes, the ratio that "big hit C" is selected is 50%.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot game (big hit) of 15 rounds (R) is performed at a rate of 10% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). After the end, the time saving A) is selected, and the jackpot game of 5 rounds (R) (time saving B after the end of the jackpot) is selected at a rate of 40%. That is, a jackpot in which the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game shifts to the time saving state is selected at a rate of 50%.

In this embodiment, as the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player, the number of rounds executed during the jackpot game is the largest (15 rounds (R)), and the time saving state that is advantageous after the jackpot is completed (time saving A). ) Is set, the number of rounds (5 rounds (R)) executed during the jackpot as the jackpot type that is advantageous to the player, and the type of the time saving state set after the jackpot ends. However, the jackpot type "big hit B", which is more disadvantageous to the player than the "big hit A", and the jackpot type "big hit C", which is the most disadvantageous to the player because the time saving state is not set after the jackpot ends, are set. Although it is configured to be possible, other jackpot types may be configured to be configurable. For example, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is the largest (15 rounds (R)), and "time saving B" is set as the time saving type. The number of jackpot types and the number of rounds of the jackpot game are small (5 rounds (R)), but the number of jackpot types and the number of rounds of the jackpot game where "time saving A" is set as the time saving type is the largest (15 rounds (R)). )), It may be possible to set the jackpot type in which the time saving state is not set.

In addition, as a concept of whether or not the set jackpot type is advantageous to the player, the number of rounds of the jackpot game as in the present embodiment and the gaming state set after the jackpot is completed are comprehensively combined. The concept of advantage / disadvantage may be defined based only on the number of rounds of the jackpot game, or the concept of advantage / disadvantage may be defined based only on the game state set after the end of the jackpot. The concept may be defined.

Next, with reference to FIG. 205 (c), the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202fb2 used at the time of the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) will be described. FIG. 205 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202fb2. As shown in FIG. 205 (c), in the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is any of "0 to 89", the jackpot type is "big hit D" and the random number value is "90 to 99". It is stipulated that the jackpot type in the case of any of "" is "big hit E".

"Big hit D" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 15 rounds (R) as a big hit game, and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the time saving state (actual time saving number of times 10 times). Then, as the time saving state set after the end of the big hit, "time saving A" which is advantageous to the player is set. That is, this "big hit D" is a big hit type having the same contents as the above-mentioned "big hit A", and is the big hit type that is most advantageous to the player. Of the 100 counter values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 90 are random values for which "big hit D" is selected, so the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a big hit. When it becomes, the ratio that "big hit D" is selected is 90%.

"Big hit E" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 15 rounds (R) as a big hit game, and the game state after the big hit is set to the time saving state (actual time saving number of times is 10 times). Then, as the time saving state set after the end of the big hit, "time saving B", which is more disadvantageous to the player than "time saving A", is set. That is, this "big hit E" is a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous than the above-mentioned "big hit D". Of the 100 counter values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 10 are random values for which "big hit E" is selected, so the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a big hit. When it becomes, the ratio that "big hit E" is selected is 10%.

That is, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, a big hit game of 15 rounds (R) is executed, and further, a time saving state is always set after the big hit is completed. ing. As a result, the jackpot game that is more advantageous to the player is provided by winning the jackpot in the special figure 2 lottery than by winning the jackpot in the special figure 1 lottery. 2 The lottery with special symbols is more advantageous to the player.

In the present embodiment, the number of types of jackpots is five, but the number is not limited to four, or four or less, or six or more may be provided. Further, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured so that different jackpot types are selected even if the values of the same first hit type counter C2 are used. By configuring in this way, for example, when a big hit with the second special symbol is made, by setting a big hit type in which a larger number of rounds is executed, the hit with the second special symbol becomes more a player. You can expect it. Therefore, it is possible to make the hit in the high-probability game state more advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the taste of the game in the high-probability state. Therefore, the player can be strongly reminded that he / she wants to shift to the high probability state, and the game can be played for a longer time.

In addition, the type of the jackpot type selected for the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the selection rate (distribution rate) of each jackpot type are made the same, and the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type. It may be configured so that only the range is different. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent act of acquiring the value of the first type counter C2 by aiming at a specific counter value from being executed in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The second random number 7 table 202fc is a data table used for the same purpose as the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 14) used in each of the above-described embodiments, and is the value of the second random number counter C4. With reference to the second random number 7 table 202fc, it is determined whether or not there is a winning.

In the present embodiment, as in each of the above-described embodiments, there is a low probability time of the normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and a high probability time (normal) in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol is higher than that of the low probability time. The number of values corresponding to the hits is set differently depending on the period during which the symbol is in a shortened state). In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be hit different, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability time of the normal symbol and the high probability time of the normal symbol.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, a plurality of operation patterns (open operation patterns) of the electric accessory 3640a, which is executed when a normal symbol (second symbol) is won, can be set. As a result, the timing of opening the electric accessory 3640a can be changed based on the hit of the normal symbol (second symbol), so that the timing of opening the electric accessory 3640a (the ball is inserted into the second entrance 3640). It is possible to suppress the game of firing the ball at the timing when the ball can be made).

Here, the contents of the second random number 7 table 202fc will be described with reference to FIG. 206 (a). FIG. 206A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the second random number 7 table 202fc. As shown in FIG. 206 (a), in the second random number 7 table 202fc, "A per normal figure", "B per normal figure", and "off" can be set as the second hit type. The second hit type is defined based on the game state (high probability state or low probability state of the normal symbol) and the acquired value of the second random number counter C4.

Specifically, when the game state is a low probability state (normal state) of a normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is set to "0" and "A per normal figure" is defined, and "1". "B per normal figure" is specified in, and "off" is specified in the range of "2 to 99". When the game state is a high probability state (time saving state) of a normal symbol, "A per normal figure" is defined in the range where the value of the second random number counter C4 is "0 to 79", and "80". "B per normal figure" is specified in the range of "to 98", and "off" is specified in "99".

That is, in the seventh embodiment, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set as the game state, the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is 2% (2/100). Therefore, if a winner is won, "A per Fuzu" and "B per Fuzu" are selected at a rate of 50%.

When the game state is a high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol, the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is 99% (99/100), and the winning is won. In this case, "A per Fuzu" is selected at a rate of about 80% (80/99), and "B per Fuzu" is selected at a rate of about 20% (20/99). is doing.

That is, in the seventh embodiment, the high probability state of the normal symbol is configured to have a higher probability of winning than the low probability state of the normal symbol, and at the time of winning, the "normal figure" is used. It is configured so that "hit A" can be easily selected. In this way, by making the hit probability and the hit type of the normal symbol (second symbol) different according to the game state, the game is performed while expecting that a more advantageous game state is set for the player. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the operation pattern of the electric accessory 3640a at the time of winning the second symbol is configured to be different depending on the gaming state and the hit type, and the second symbol is in the low probability state of the normal symbol. It is more advantageous for the player to win the second symbol in the high probability state of the normal symbol than to win the second symbol, that is, to enter the ball into the second entrance 3640. It is configured so that an operation pattern that is easy to make is set. As a result, it is set as a condition for giving a privilege advantageous to the player to win the prize during the high probability state of the normal symbol.

Here, with reference to FIG. 206 (a), the contents of the operation pattern of the electric accessory 3640a executed during the high probability state of the normal symbol will be described. In the seventh embodiment, different operation patterns are set according to the winning type, and when "A per normal figure" is set during the high probability state, the opening period is 0. When the operation pattern of 1 second (S), the opening period is 2 seconds (S), and the ending period is 3.5 seconds (S) is executed and "B per normal figure" is set, the opening period is 0.1. An operation pattern of seconds (S), an opening period of 2.5 seconds (S), and an ending period of 3 seconds (S) is executed.

Then, regardless of which operation pattern is executed, if one ball enters the second entrance 3640 while the electric accessory 3640a is in the opening operation (opening period is being set), the closing condition is satisfied. This is established, and the closing operation of the electric accessory 3640a is executed. That is, in the seventh embodiment, as a condition for terminating the open state of the electric accessory 3640a, a condition that is satisfied when a predetermined opening period is reached and a predetermined number are the second entrances. The conditions that are satisfied when the ball enters 3640 are set. As a result, when a winning prize is won in the lottery of the second symbol (ordinary symbol), a large number of balls enter the second entrance 3640, and the player is given an excessive privilege (prize ball). It is possible to prevent the award from being lost.

Further, regardless of which operation pattern is executed, the ending period is set to be equal to or longer than the period (3 seconds) in which the ball flows down the second passage (delayed passage) 660b. Therefore, even if the player wins consecutively in the game, if the player wins the small hit by the special figure 2 lottery executed based on the previous game, the next game will be held during the small hit game. It is possible to surely suppress the situation where the ball flowing down the second passage 660b wins the V winning device 650 based on the normal drawing.

In this embodiment, by using the above-described configuration, the ball does not pass through the specific area 650V during the small hit game at an unintended timing based on a plurality of consecutive game results (general map lottery results). It is configured so that an appropriate game is executed, but the ball is not limited to this, and the ball passes through a specific area 650V during a small hit game, for example, when a player wins a game in succession. It may be configured to be easy to do. In this case, for example, the hit type (normal) in which the opening period (0.1 seconds), the opening period (2 seconds), and the ending period (0.1 seconds) are set as the hit type for the second hit (per normal figure). C) per figure can be set, and if the player wins again in the next normal figure change that wins C per normal figure, it flows into the second passage 660b during the hit game corresponding to the next normal figure change. The ball may be configured to pass through the specific area 650V during the small hit game won in the special figure 2 lottery executed based on the normal figure C.

With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a player with a surprising game, and thus it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, when such playability is adopted, an effect during the race (FIG. 200 (b)) is executed in correspondence with C per the normal figure, and then an effect of losing the race once (FIG. 202 (a)). After executing (see), if it is detected by the delayed passage entry switch 660e1 that the ball has flowed into the second passage 660b based on the following normal drawing, the revival effect after losing the race is executed. It is good to configure it like this. As a result, it is possible to perform an unexpected effect corresponding to the unexpected game for the player.

Further, a general map pre-determination means capable of preliminarily discriminating the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired when passing through the through gate 67 is provided, and as a pre-discrimination result corresponding to the reserved and stored general map winning information, When it is determined that the Fuzu winning information that wins C per Fuzu and the Fuzu winning information that wins per Fuzu are stored in a row, it is possible to handle multiple consecutive Fuzu winnings. It may be configured to execute the effect (continuous effect). In this way, by executing the pre-reading process of the Fuzu winning information, it is possible to set the effect in a state where the lottery result of the Fuzu lottery (second symbol lottery) is determined in advance, so that the effect is high. Can be executed.

In the seventh embodiment, the electric accessory 3640a is opened for a period in which the ball can be inserted into the second entrance 3640 as a winning game executed when the player wins the game. It is configured so that only the hit game is executed, but the ball is not limited to this, and for example, the ball cannot be made to enter the second entrance 3640, but the ball is made to flow into the second passage 660b. The electric accessory 3640a may be configured to be open for a period of time (for example, 1 second).

The variation pattern 7 table 202fd is a data table used for the same purpose as the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 14) used in each of the above-described embodiments. A fluctuation pattern in which different fluctuation times are set is defined according to the result of the lottery and the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern 7 table 202fd will be described with reference to FIGS. 207 and 208. FIG. 207 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern 7 table 202fd, and FIG. 208 (a) is defined in the first time saving variation pattern table 202fd2 defined by the variation pattern 7 table 202fd. FIG. 208 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the second time saving fluctuation pattern table 202fd3 defined by the fluctuation pattern 7 table 202fd. It is a figure.

Next, the contents of the first time saving variation pattern table 202fd2 will be described with reference to FIG. 208 (a). The first time saving variation pattern table 202fd2 is a variation pattern table referred to when the time saving state A (time saving A) is set as the gaming state, and is a second time saving variation pattern table 202fd3 (time saving) described later. In the case of winning a small hit (for example, small hit C) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the variable pattern table referred to when the state B (time saving B) is set, the V winning device 650 The fluctuation time is defined so that the fluctuation time that makes it difficult for the sphere to pass through the specific region 650V can be easily set.

Here, to specifically explain the contents specified in the first time saving variation pattern table 202fd2, if the type of the special symbol is special figure 1 and the lottery result is out of order, the acquired variation type counter CS1 Regardless of the value of, if "ultra-short deviation" (variation time 0.5 seconds) is specified as the fluctuation pattern and the lottery result is a big hit, it is the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1. "Ultra short hit" (variation time 0.5 seconds) is specified. That is, when the time saving state A (time saving A) is set, that is, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in a state where the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed, it is always 0.5 seconds. It is configured so that the fluctuation pattern is set.

When the type of the special symbol is special figure 2 and the lottery result is out of order, the variation pattern is "ultra-short deviation" (variation time 0.5 seconds) regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. ) Is specified, and if the lottery result is small hit A or small hit B, "long small hit" (variation time 3 seconds) is specified as the fluctuation pattern, and if the lottery result is small hit C, "short small hit" is specified as the fluctuation pattern. (Variation time 0.5 seconds) ”is specified. Further, when the lottery result is a big hit, when the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149", "short jackpot (variation time 1 second)" is defined as the fluctuation pattern. When the range is in the range of "150 to 198", "medium jackpot (variation time 30 seconds)" is defined as the fluctuation pattern.

With this configuration, when the first time reduction variation pattern table 202fd2 is referred to, that is, when the time reduction A is set as the gaming state, the variation pattern with a variation time of 3 seconds is set small. When the hit A or the small hit B is won, the ball is configured to easily pass through the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650. On the other hand, when the small hit C in which the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is set is won, immediately after the ball enters the second entry slot 3640 (the lottery of the second special symbol is executed). Since the small hit game is executed immediately after), the opening operation of the V winning device 650 is completed before the ball flowing down the second flow path tb is discharged from the second flow path tb. Can make it difficult for the player to pass through the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650.

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, after the end of the big hit game executed based on the passage of the ball through the specific area 650V during the small hit game corresponding to the small hit C, the player is in a gaming state. It is configured so that a disadvantageous normal state is set, and after the end of the big hit game executed based on winning other small hits (small hit A, small hit B), the game state is set. It is configured so that a time saving state (time saving A or time saving B) that is advantageous to the player is set.

In this way, when the time reduction A is set as the game state, the variation pattern is set with reference to the first time reduction variation pattern table 202fd2, and the small hit that is advantageous to the player depending on the set variation pattern. When the type is won, the big hit game via the small hit game is easily executed, so that it is easy to continuously set an advantageous game state even after the end of the next big hit game, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Can be done.

Next, the contents of the second time saving variation pattern table 202fd3 will be described with reference to FIG. 208 (b). FIG. 208 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second time saving variation pattern table 202fd3. The second time saving variation pattern table 202fd3 is a variation pattern table referred to when the time saving B is set as the gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 208 (b), the second time saving variation pattern table 202fd3 is set when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery with respect to the above-mentioned first time saving variation pattern table 202fd2. The difference is that the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is different, and the other factors are the same.

Specifically, when the lottery result is small hit A, "long and small hit" (variable time 3 seconds) is defined as the fluctuation pattern, and when the lottery result is small hit B, "short small hit" (variable time) is defined as the fluctuation pattern. 0.5 seconds) is specified, and in the case of small hit C, when the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 169", the fluctuation pattern is "long and small hit" (variation time 3 seconds). ) Is specified, and when the range is in the range of "170 to 198", "short hit" (variation time 0.5 seconds) is specified as the fluctuation pattern.

That is, when the second time saving variation pattern table 202fd3 is referred to, that is, in the state where the time saving B is set as the game state, the lottery of the second special symbol is easier to be executed than in the normal state, but it is a small hit. Since the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time of 3 seconds is set when C is won, the normal state is more likely to be set as the game state after the end of the next big hit game than the state in which the above-mentioned time reduction A is set. Become.

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol, in which the jackpot game is more likely to be executed based on the lottery result than the first special symbol, is set as the game state. It is possible to set a time saving state that is easier to execute, and as a time saving state, a gaming state (time saving A) in which a gaming state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player after the end of the next big hit is easily set again, and a game state (time saving A) where the next big hit ends. It is possible to set a game state (time reduction B) in which a game state (time reduction state) that is later advantageous to the player is more difficult to set than the time reduction A.

With this configuration, when the game state (time saving A) that is most advantageous to the player is set, the game state shifts to the normal state only by executing one jackpot game. Since this can be suppressed, the player can be made to play the game with peace of mind. Further, even when the time reduction B which is more disadvantageous to the player than the time reduction A is set, the probability that the time reduction A is set after the jackpot game is completed is higher than when the normal state is set. Therefore, it is possible to make the player enthusiastically play the game aiming at setting the time saving A.

Further, as shown in FIG. 208 (b), in the seventh embodiment, even when the small hit C in which the normal state is set as the game state is won after the big hit game is completed, the ball is the V winning device 650. Since it is configured so that a fluctuation pattern that is difficult to pass through the specific region 650V (a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds) can be selected, not only the winning result of the small hit but also the flow of the ball Can also make players interested. In this case, for example, it is preferable to notify the player that the small hit C has been won, and then perform an effect of inciting whether or not the ball passes through the specific area 650V. With this configuration, the ball does not pass through the specific area 650V even though the player wins a disadvantageous small hit, so that a gaming state disadvantageous to the player is set. It is possible to make the player aware that it was possible to avoid the problem, and it is possible to provide a feeling of satisfaction.

Further, a means for measuring the number of times the small hit is won (the number of times the small hit C is won), which is disadvantageous to the player, is provided, and the number of times the big hit game based on the small hit C is avoided (the small hit of the small hit C). The number of times the ball did not pass through the specific area 650V during the game) may be displayed. As a result, it is possible for the player to specifically understand that it was possible to avoid a situation in which a disadvantageous gaming state is set for the player, and whether the currently set gaming state is the time saving A. It is possible to make it easier for the player to predict whether the time is shortened B.

In the seventh embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 208 (a) and 208 (b), as described above, the data table (variation pattern) referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol according to the set time saving state. By making the table) different, when a small hit that is advantageous to the player is won, the game state in which the ball easily passes through the specific area 650V (time reduction A) and the game state in which it is difficult to pass (time reduction B) can be obtained. It is configured to be configurable. In other words, when a small hit that is disadvantageous to the player is won, a game state in which the ball easily passes through the specific area 650V (time reduction B) and a game state in which it is difficult to pass (time reduction A) can be set. ing.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, a game state in which the ball easily passes through the specific area 650V at the time of winning a small hit and a game in which the ball is difficult to pass, depending on the type of the time saving state (time saving A, time saving B) set. The state and is configured to be configurable. More specifically, when the time saving A is set as the gaming state, the first time saving variation pattern table 202fd2 is referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol. When selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol with reference to the first time saving variation pattern table 202fd2, 90% at the time of winning the small hit (100% at the time of winning the small hit A and 100 at the time of winning the small hit B). %) Is configured to set the fluctuation time during which the sphere can pass through the specific region 650V.

On the other hand, when the time reduction B is set as the gaming state, the second time reduction variation pattern table 202fd3 is referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol. When selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol with reference to the second time saving variation pattern table 202fd3, about 28.5% at the time of winning the small hit (100% at the time of winning the small hit A and winning the small hit C). It is configured so that the fluctuation time during which the sphere can pass through the specific region 650V is set in (about 85% of the time).

That is, in the seventh embodiment, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) set at the time of winning the small hit is configured to be different according to the type of the set time saving state, and is specified at the time of winning the small hit. The region 650V is configured so that the rate at which the variation pattern through which the sphere can pass is selected is different. Therefore, the probability of executing the big hit game based on the small hit winning can be different depending on the type of the time saving state to be set.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, as a transition condition (time reduction end condition) for shifting the time reduction state to the normal state, it is set as a transition condition that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 10 times, so that the time reduction is performed. When the time saving B is set as the type of the state, it is more difficult to execute the big hit game at the time of winning the small hit, so that the transition condition can be easily satisfied.

In the seventh embodiment, as described above, it is easy for the ball to pass through the specific area 650V at the time of winning the small hit, which is advantageous for the player, and the time is shortened so that the ball easily passes through the specific area 650V at the time of winning the small hit. The time saving A, which is a state, and the time saving B, which makes it easy for the ball to pass through the specific area 650V at the time of winning a small hit, and makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the specific area 650V at the time of winning a small hit. , But is not limited to this, for example, a small hit type is set to one, and a fluctuation pattern in which a ball can pass through a specific area 650V at the time of winning a small hit is simply set. The fluctuation pattern table to be referred to may be different depending on the type of the set time saving state so that only the ratio is different.

Further, the transition condition (time reduction end condition) for shifting the time reduction state to the normal state may be set differently according to the type of the time reduction state to be set. For example, the time reduction state advantageous to the player may be set. When (for example, time reduction A) is set, the time reduction end condition (for example, the time reduction end condition that is satisfied with a small number of special symbol fluctuations) is more likely to be established than the time reduction state (for example, time reduction B) that is disadvantageous to the player). May be set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the degree of expectation that the jackpot game will be executed during the period in which the time saving state is set to be significantly different depending on the type of the set time saving state. Even if is set, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game aiming at a big hit game.

Further, since the expected game content can be different depending on the type of the time saving state to be set, specifically, the time saving end condition is easily satisfied, and the specific area 650V is obtained when the small hit is won. When the time saving state is set so that the ball can easily pass through, it is expected that the small hit will be won during the time saving state, the time saving end condition is difficult to be satisfied, and the specific area 650V is hit at the time of the small hit winning. When a time saving state is set in which it is difficult for the player to pass, the player can expect the ball to pass through the specific area 650V in the small hit won during the time saving state, so that the player gets tired of the game early. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

The small hit type selection 7 table 202fe is a data table used for the same purpose as the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 14) used in each of the above-described embodiments, and when a small hit is won, the data table is used. It is referred to when selecting a small hit type, and is configured so that a different small hit type is selected according to the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5.

Here, the contents of the small hit type selection 7 table 202fe will be described with reference to FIG. 206 (b). FIG. 206 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the small hit type selection 7 table 202fe. As shown in FIG. 206 (b), in the small hit type selection 7 table 202fe, three types of small hits A to C are selected as the small hit types of the second special symbol according to the value of the small hit type counter C5. Is stipulated as. Specifically, when the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any of "0 to 19", the small hit type is "small hit A (10R real time reduction 10 times big hit when passing V)". If it is any of "20 to 89", the small hit type is "small hit B (10R real time reduction 10 times big hit when passing V)", and if it is any of "90 to 99". The small hit type is "small hit C (10R time saving no big hit when passing V)".

Then, when the jackpot based on the winning of "small hit A" is completed, "time saving A" is set as the game state, and when the jackpot based on the winning of "small hit B" is completed, "time saving B" is set as the gaming state. Then, when the big hit based on the winning of the "small hit C" is completed, the "normal state" is set as the game state.

Here, for each small hit type (small hit A to small hit C), when the ball passes through the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 in the small hit game, it is executed after the small hit game is completed. The type of jackpot game is set. In the case of "small hit A", the 10R real time reduction 10 times big hit is set, and after the small hit A is executed, the big hit in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 10 round (R) open state is executed. After that, 10 time-saving games (a period until the special symbol changes 100 times in total or the second special symbol changes 10 times) are set as the time-saving state.

Further, in the case of "small hit B", 10 rounds (R) of 10 rounds of real time reduction big hits are set, and after the small hit B is executed, the variable winning device 65 is set to the 10 rounds (R) open state. The jackpot is executed, and then 10 time-saving games (the period until the special symbol changes 100 times in total or the second special symbol changes 10 times) are set as the time-saving state. It is configured in. In the case of "small hit C", a 10R time saving no big hit is set, and after the small hit C is executed, the big hit in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 10 round (R) open state is executed. After the jackpot game, the time saving state is not set, but the normal state is set.

In this way, the content of the big hit game executed after the small hit game and the game state set after the big hit game can be different depending on the selected small hit type.

Specifically, "small hit A" has a large number of rounds executed in the big hit game (10R), and a time saving state (time saving A) that is most advantageous to the player after the big hit game is set is set. , The small hit B is set as the most advantageous small hit for the player, and the small hit B has a large number of rounds executed in the big hit game (10R) and is set to be the same as the small hit A described above, but the big hit game. Since the time saving state set later is set to "time saving B" in which the time saving A is more disadvantageous to the player than the time saving A, it is set as a small hit which is more disadvantageous than the small hit A. "Small hit C" is set as the most disadvantageous small hit for the player because the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is large (10R), but the time saving state is not set after the big hit game.

In the present embodiment, regardless of the type of the winning small hit, the big hit game executed when the ball passes through the specific area 650V during the small hit game is configured to be a round game of 10 rounds (R). By doing so, the player can easily grasp the type of the small hit won this time by grasping the number of round games (number of rounds) executed as the big hit game during the big hit game executed by the small hit opportunity. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a different number of rounds of big hit games may be set for each small hit type. As a result, the degree of advantage for each small hit type can be greatly different, so that the player can be expected to win the most advantageous small hit type while playing the game.

In the present embodiment, as the end condition of the time saving state, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is 10 times (first end condition), or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is. A total of 100 times (second end condition) is set. With this configuration, when the jackpot is won with the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol being 1 or more and the time saving state is set after the jackpot ends, the first special symbol (special figure 1) is set after the jackpot ends. ) Is executed, but the time saving state does not end. Further, when the change of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed, the above-mentioned second end condition is satisfied and the time saving state can be terminated. Therefore, any special symbol (second) during the time saving state can be terminated. The special symbol) can be reliably changed a predetermined number of times.

Next, the winning type won during the time saving state (during the high probability state of the normal symbol) and the ball flow to the second entrance 3640 will be described with reference to FIG. 196. As described above with reference to FIG. 196, in the seventh embodiment, the electric accessory 3640a is changed to a protruding state (see FIG. 198) by winning the game and moving the electric accessory 3640a onto the electric accessory 3640a. Is constructed so that the ball can easily enter the second entry port 3640.

Then, when the closing condition of the electric accessory 3640a is satisfied, the electric accessory 3640a executes the closing operation, and the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 3640a at that time is provided directly under the electric accessory 3640a. It flows into the first flow path ta or the second flow path tb. Here, the sphere that has flowed down the first flow path ta reaches the V winning device 650 provided below the flow path unit 660 after a flow period of 0.5 seconds, and the sphere that has flowed down the second flow path tb. Reaches the V winning device 650 after a flow period of 3 seconds.

Next, a case where a ball enters the second entry port 3640 as a closing condition of the electric accessory 3640a will be described. When the closing condition of the electric accessory 3640a is satisfied by the ball entering the second entrance 3640, the electric accessory 3640a is closed and the second special symbol lottery is executed. .. Then, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol is determined according to the lottery result of the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, it is possible to set an advantageous time reduction (time reduction A) that is advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous time reduction (time reduction B) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous time reduction, and the time reduction is set. It is configured so that different fluctuation patterns are set according to the state.

In the open scenario 7 table 202ff, the game content (open scenario) of the winning game (big hit game, small hit game) executed when the winning (big hit, small hit) is won in the special symbol lottery is the winning type. It is a data table defined in correspondence with, and when a hit is won, the open scenario corresponding to the set hit type is read and the hit game is executed.

Here, the contents of the open scenario 7 table 202ff will be described with reference to FIG. 209. FIG. 209 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the open scenario 7 table 202ff. This open scenario 7 table 202ff is a winning device (variable winning device) in which a ball can be entered in a privilege game (big hit game, small hit game) executed when the lottery result of a special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. Operation data (opening scenario) for differentiating the opening operation of 65, V winning device 650) according to the winning type (big hit type, small hit type) is specified.

In this way, the winning device (variable winning device 65, V winning device 650) and the opening operation content (opening scenario) that are opened according to the winning result (big hit or small hit) and the winning type (big hit type, small hit type). ) Can be set differently to set the degree of advantage of the award game in multiple stages, so even after winning a big hit or a small hit, it is possible to entertain the player with which type of hit was won. can.

In the open scenario 7 table 202ff, the start interval period during the winning game corresponding to the winning type (big hit type, small hit type) (the period from the start of the winning game to the first opening operation of the winning device). ), The opening operation mode of the winning device (type of winning device to be opened, the number of seconds of one opening operation (round game), the total number of opening operations (number of rounds)), and the interval period between rounds (between rounds). The period during which the winning device set for the game is closed) and the end interval period (the period from the end of all round games to the end of the winning game (until the start of a new special symbol change is allowed). Period)) and are specified respectively.

Specifically, the winning type corresponds to "big hit A, D, E", the start interval period is "2 seconds", and the opening operation mode of the winning device is "variable winning device 65" for "15 rounds". The opening operation mode for opening "continuously 29 seconds" as one round game is defined as "1 second" as the interval period between rounds and "4 seconds" as the end interval period. Therefore, if the jackpot type is a jackpot of jackpots A, D, and E, a jackpot game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for 15 rounds is executed, and a large number of prize balls are paid out to the player. It will be a big hit game. Further, when the jackpot type is jackpot A or D, the jackpot A or D is the most advantageous for the player because it is a jackpot in which a time saving state is set, which is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player after the jackpot game is completed. It will be a big hit with the privilege.

Next, the winning type corresponds to the jackpots B and C, and the start interval period is "2 seconds", and the opening operation mode of the winning device is "variable winning device 65" as "5 rounds" and one round game. The opening operation mode for opening "continuously for 29 seconds" is defined as "1 second" as the interval period between rounds and "4 seconds" as the end interval period. Therefore, if the jackpot type is a jackpot of jackpots B and C, a jackpot game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for 5 rounds is executed, and the jackpots A, D, and E are given to the player. It is a jackpot game in which about 1/3 of the prize balls of the corresponding jackpot game are paid out.

Next, the hit type corresponds to the small hits A to C, and the start interval period is "0.1 seconds", and the "V winning device 650" is opened to the "first round" as the opening operation mode of the winning device. When the ball passes through the specific area 650V (V passes) during the opening operation of the first round (including 0.5 seconds set as the ball handling time after the opening operation is completed), "variable". The winning device 65 is opened to the "2nd to 11th rounds", and as one round game, the 1st round is "continuously open for 1.5 seconds" and the 2nd to 11th rounds are "continuously open for 29 seconds". The opening operation mode is defined as "5 seconds" after the end of the first round, "1 second" as the interval period between rounds, and "4 seconds" as the end interval period. That is, in the seventh embodiment, when the ball passes through the specific area 650V during the small hit game, the big hit game for 10 rounds is executed thereafter.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the jackpot game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened is executed from the first round, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the above-mentioned small hit is executed. A jackpot type (for example, jackpot Z) in which the same opening scenario as the hits A to C is set may be provided. With this configuration, when the big hit Z is set, the V winning device 650 is operated in the same open operation mode as the small hit in the first round, so this special for the player. It is possible to make it difficult to tell whether a big hit or a small hit was won by the design.

In this case, since the jackpot game has already been executed, even if the ball does not pass through the specific area 650V while the V winning device 650 is open in the first round of the jackpot Z. The second and subsequent round games will be executed. Therefore, when the big hit game in which the same opening operation mode as the small hit game is set is executed, the effect shown in FIG. 201 (b) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Good to configure. As a result, the result of this game can make the player think that the big hit game was executed by the ball passing through the specific area 650V during the small hit game.

Further, since the effect shown in FIG. 201 (b) can be executed depending on whether the specific area 650 V is actually passed during the small hit game and the case where the big hit Z is won, the effect result in the effect during the race. As a result, it is possible to increase the proportion of the effect result (see FIG. 201 (b)) that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the production during the race.

It should be noted that the case where the jackpot type (for example, the jackpot Z) in which the same opening operation mode as the small hit game is set is won and the case where various small hits are won are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In order to make it difficult for the player to identify the lottery result by the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 showing the lottery result of the special symbol so that the same effect mode is executed as the variable display (variable effect). The stop display timing of the special symbol and the stop display timing of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be different, or the stop display timing of the special symbol and the stop display timing of the third symbol may be synchronized. In order to make it more difficult for the player to identify the display of the third symbol in the stop display timing or the period before and after it, the display mode and the display area may be changed, or the stop display timing of the special symbol may be changed. It is preferable to switch the symbol for effect displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 from the third symbol to the normal symbol for effect corresponding to the variable display of the ordinary symbol. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lottery result from being easily grasped in the stop display mode of the third symbol whether it is a small hit or a big hit.

Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 203 (b). FIG. 203B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 203 (b), the RAM 203 of the seventh embodiment has a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d, a time saving medium total counter 203fa, and a jackpot start flag 203fb. It has a big hit medium flag 203o, a small hit start flag 203fc, a small hit medium flag 203p, a V passing big hit type storage area 203fd, a V flag 203fe, a time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff, a V passing flag 203fg, and other memory areas 203z. .. It should be noted that the configuration (flag) having the same name as the electrical configuration used in any of the above-described embodiments (the same name except for "7" attached to make it identifiable that it was used in the seventh embodiment). , Counter, area) is the same as each of the above-described embodiments in terms of its use, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The time-saving / medium-time total counter 203fa is a counter for totaling the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol executed during the time-saving state and counting up to 100 times. The time-shortening-medium total counter 203fa is set to 0, which is the initial value when the jackpot is won (see S10018 in FIG. 215), and is set to 100 at the end of the jackpot (see S10614 in FIG. 222). Then, 1 is subtracted each time the change of the special symbol ends during the time saving state (see S10202 in FIG. 217). The value of the time-saving / medium-time total counter 203fa is referred to when determining whether or not the end condition of the time-saving state is satisfied, and when it is determined that the counter value has been subtracted to 0 (S10207 in FIG. 217). : Yes), the normal state is set as the gaming state (S10208 in FIG. 217).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the time saving state reaches 100 times (first end condition), or the second special symbol in the time saving state. It is configured so that the time saving state ends when any of the conditions that the number of fluctuations of the symbol reaches 10 times (second end condition) is satisfied, and whether or not the first end condition is satisfied. The time-saving and medium-time total counter 203fa is used to determine. The value of the time saving / middle total counter 203fa is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the remaining time saving number command (see S10205 in FIG. 217). The remaining time reduction number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the time reduction / medium total counter 203fa is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 is the number of remaining fluctuations until the first end condition of the time saving state is satisfied by the remaining time saving number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the time saving medium total counter 203fa is changed. Can be obtained. As a result, the number of remaining time reductions managed by the game state storage area 223fe of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the actual number of remaining time reductions counted by the time reduction / medium total counter 203fa of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise and the like. Even if it does, the deviation can be corrected by the next received command for the number of remaining hours.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of remaining time reductions based on the remaining time reduction number command, but the remaining time reduction number command corresponding to the value of the time reduction / middle total counter 203fa described above, that is, the first time reduction state. Information indicating the number of remaining fluctuations until the end condition is satisfied is not transmitted to the display control device 114. This is because, in the case of performing a normal game, the time saving state is configured to shift to the normal state by satisfying the second ending condition of the time saving state, and the first ending condition is The second end condition is satisfied in a state where the number of remaining fluctuations until the establishment is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the situation where the time saving state ends is suppressed.

The jackpot start flag 203fb is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the jackpot game. When the fluctuation of the special symbol whose lottery result is determined to be a big hit is stopped, the big hit start flag 203fb is set to ON (S10017 in FIG. 215). When it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203fb is on and it is determined that the jackpot start timing is reached, it is set to off (S10603 in FIG. 222). The jackpot start flag 203fb is set to off in the initial state, and is configured to be backed up and the state immediately before the power cut is maintained when a power cut or the like occurs.

The jackpot middle flag 203o is a flag indicating that the jackpot game is in progress. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a big hit is stopped (S10017 in FIG. 215). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (when it is determined that the game of the number of rounds corresponding to the set jackpot type has been completed), it is set to off (S10617 in FIG. 222). This jackpot middle flag 203o is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is retained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of the power failure or the like when a power failure or the like occurs. It is configured to. The jackpot medium flag 203o has the same function as the jackpot medium flag 203o used in the above-described first embodiment.

The small hit start flag 203fc is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the small hit game. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped (S10304 in FIG. 218). When it is determined that the small hit start flag 203fc is on and it is determined that it is the start timing of the small hit game, it is set to off (S10703 in FIG. 223). This small hit start flag 203fc is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure occurs is backed up and held. It is configured to be.

The small hit medium flag 203p is a flag indicating that the small hit game is in progress. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped (see S10304 in FIG. 218). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (when it is determined that the game of the set number of rounds of the small hit has ended), it is set to off (see S10717 in FIG. 223). This small hit medium flag 203p is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure occurs is backed up and held. It is configured to be.

The V-passing jackpot type storage area 203fd is a switch for detecting that the ball that has won the V-winning device 650 has passed through the specific area 650V (the ball has passed through the specific area 650V) when the small-hit game is being executed. This is a storage area in which data for determining the jackpot type set in) (not shown) is stored. In the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203fd, when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit stops, the data value corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the determined small hit type is stored (FIG. 218). S10302). When a sphere flows down a specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 and the sphere is detected by the detection switch, the V flag 203fe corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the data value stored in the V passing jackpot type storage area 203fd. Is configured to be turned on. At the end of the small hit game, the data value stored in the V-passing big hit type storage area 203fd is configured to be cleared. This V-passing jackpot type storage area 203fd is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure occurs is backed up. It is configured to be held by.

When the ball flows down the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 during the small hit game and the ball is detected by the detection switch, the V flag 203fe is changed to the big hit type corresponding to the type of the small hit game being executed. The corresponding flag is set to on. At the end of the small hit game, it is determined whether or not the V flag 203fe is on (see S10712 in FIG. 223), and when it is determined that the V flag 203fe is on (S10712: Yes in FIG. 223), it is turned on. The jackpot type to be executed is determined based on the set flag, and the start of the corresponding jackpot game (opening scenario based on the jackpot type) is set (S10713 in FIG. 223). This V flag 203fe is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is maintained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of the power failure or the like when a power failure or the like occurs. It is configured as follows.

The time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol executed during the time saving state up to 10 times. At this time, the time-saving medium-special 2 counter 203ff is set to 0, which is the initial value when the jackpot is won (see S10018 in FIG. 215), and is set to 10 at the end of the jackpot (see S10614 in FIG. 222). Then, when the change of the second special symbol is completed during the time saving state, 1 is subtracted (see S10204 in FIG. 217). The value of the time reduction medium special 2 counter 203ff is referred to when determining whether or not the end condition of the time reduction state is satisfied, and when it is determined that the counter value has been subtracted to 0 (FIG. 217). S10206: Yes), the normal state is set as the gaming state (S10208 in FIG. 217).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the time saving state reaches 100 times (first end condition), or the second special symbol in the time saving state. It is configured so that the time saving state ends when any of the conditions that the number of fluctuations of the symbol reaches 10 times (second end condition) is satisfied, and whether or not the second end condition is satisfied. In order to determine, the time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff is used. The value of the time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the remaining time saving number command (see S10205 in FIG. 217). The remaining time reduction number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the time reduction medium special 2 counter 203ff is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the remaining time reduction number based on the remaining time reduction number command, but the remaining time reduction number command corresponding to the value of the above-mentioned time reduction medium special 2 counter 203ff, that is, the time reduction state first. 2 It is configured to transmit information indicating the number of remaining fluctuations until the end condition is satisfied to the display control device 114. This is because, when a normal game is being performed, the time saving state is configured to shift to the normal state by satisfying the second end condition of the time saving state, and the player is asked to do so. This is to provide an easy-to-understand game by displaying the number of remaining fluctuations until the end of the time saving state on the third symbol display device 81.

The V-passing flag 203fg is a flag used to determine the state in which the V-flag 203fe is set to ON during the small hit game, and is set to ON when the V-flag 203fe is set to ON. Will be done. In the present embodiment, it is set to ON in the V passing process (see FIG. 221) corresponding to the ball that first passes through the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 during the small hit game (S10507 in FIG. 221).

Then, in the V-pass processing (see FIG. 221), it is determined whether the V-pass flag 203fg is set to ON (S10501 in FIG. 221), and if it is determined to be set to ON (S10501: Yes in FIG. 221). ), The processing of S10502 to S10508 among the V-passing processing (see FIG. 221) is configured to be skipped. As a result, when a plurality of balls pass through the specific area 650V during one small hit game (when the detection switch (not shown) capable of detecting the balls passing through the specific area 650V detects a plurality of balls). ), Only the V-passing process corresponding to the first detected ball will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the process executed during the small hit game, and the V passage command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 a plurality of times, so that the V passage management on the voice lamp control device 113 side is complicated. Can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 210 and 211, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 210 is a transition diagram schematically showing the flow of the gaming state after that based on the lottery result of the special symbol, and FIG. 211 is a schematic diagram of the operation flow of various devices executed during the small hit game. It is a timing chart shown as a target.

In the seventh embodiment, a normal state in which a left-handed game in which a ball is launched aiming at the left side area of the game board 13 (see FIG. 195) is performed and a lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed, and a game board. It is possible to set a time-saving state in which a right-handed game in which a ball is launched aiming at the right side area of 13 and a lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed, and the first is higher than the lottery for the first special symbol. 2 The lottery of special symbols is configured to make it easier to execute the jackpot game.

Further, as the time saving state, either the time saving state A (time saving A) which is advantageous to the player or the time saving state B (time saving B) which is more disadvantageous to the player than the time saving state A is set. ing. Here, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed in the state where the time saving state A (time saving A) is set, the normal state is not set (difficult to be) after the jackpot game is completed. There is. With this configuration, once the time saving state A (time saving A) is set, the normal state is not set as the game state unless at least two big hit games are executed, so that the time saving state that is advantageous for the player can be set. Can be built.

As shown in FIG. 210, in the state where the normal state is set, the game is executed by the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and if the big hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery, the big hit is won. If the time-saving jackpot is "big hit A" (10% of the jackpot), the time-saving state A (time-saving A) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends, and it is "big hit B" (40% of the jackpot). In that case, the time saving state B (time saving B) is set as the game state after the big hit game ends, and in the case of "big hit C" (50% of the big hit), the normal state is set as the game state after the big hit game ends. To.

In addition, when the special figure 2 lottery is executed during the normal state and the big hit is won or the big hit game is executed based on the small hit winning, the normal state is set after the big hit game is completed. It is configured. As a result, it is possible to suppress the act of illegally executing the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) during the normal state.

In the state where the time saving state A (time saving A) is set, the special figure 2 lottery is mainly executed. In this special figure 2 lottery, as explained with reference to FIG. 205 (c), when a big hit is won, the time saving state is always set after the big hit game is completed, so that the time saving state A (time saving A) If a big hit is won, the normal state is not set after the big hit game is over.

Further, even if a small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, the fluctuation pattern specified in the first time saving fluctuation pattern table 202fd2 referred to during the time saving state A (time saving A) is set. When the small hit type "small hit C" in which the normal state is set after the big hit game is won, the ball does not pass through the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650. Therefore, when the time saving state A (time saving A) is set, a plurality of big hit games can be executed until the game state is set to the normal state again. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the advantageous gaming state is immediately terminated even though the advantageous gaming state is set to be advantageous to the player, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. can.

In the state where the time saving state A is set, when the time saving end condition is satisfied (when the special figure 2 variation is executed 10 times), the time saving state ends and the normal state is set. However, in the short time state, there is a probability of winning a small hit with a probability of about 1/2, and 80% of the small hit games that can pass the ball to a specific area 650V are executed, so continue. As long as the normal game is performed, the jackpot game can be executed before the time saving end condition is satisfied. On the other hand, in order to pass the ball through a specific area 650V when a specific small hit type is won, when a game in which the right-handed game is not continuously performed is executed, the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 2 is reduced to 10 times. By reaching it, it is possible to shift to the normal state. As a result, a penalty can be imposed on the player who has performed an inappropriate game during the time saving state.

If the small hit A (20%) is won while the time saving state A (time saving A) is set, the time saving state A (time saving A) is performed again after the big hit game based on the small hit winning is executed. Is set and when the small hit B (70%) is won, the time saving state B (time saving B) is set after the big hit game based on the small hit winning is executed. If the small hit C (10%) is won, a short fluctuation time (0.5 seconds) is set as shown in FIG. 208 (a), so that the specific area 650V is set during the small hit game. The ball never passes.

Further, when the jackpot is won in the state where the time saving state B (time saving B) is set, the jackpot D (90%) and the jackpot E (10%) are the same as the time saving state A (time saving A) described above. Is set. Further, when the small hit is won, the second time saving fluctuation pattern table 202fd3 (see FIG. 208 (b)) is referred to, and the ball is configured to pass through the specific region 650V in the small hit A or the small hit C. ing.

Therefore, when the small hit A (20%) is won, the time saving state A (time saving A) is set after the big hit game based on the small hit winning is executed, and when the small hit C is won, the time saving state A (time saving A) is set. After the big hit game based on the small hit win is executed, the normal state is set. Further, as in the time saving state A (time saving A), when the time saving end condition is satisfied (when the special figure 2 variation is executed 10 times), the time saving state ends and the normal state is set. It is composed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 211, the flow of operations of various devices during the small hit game will be described. FIGS. 211 (a) to 211 (f) are diagrams schematically showing the flow of various configurations during the small hit game. As shown in FIGS. 211 (a) to 211 (f), when the special figure variation display in which a small hit is won is executed by the control process of the main control device 110, the display control device 114 displays the third symbol display device 81. An effect during the race (see FIGS. 199 (b) to 202 (a)) is executed on the screen. Then, when t1 (0.1 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the small hit game, the V winning opening solenoid (not shown) is driven for 1.5 seconds according to a predetermined scenario (see FIG. 209).

A ball flowing down a specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 is detected by a detection switch (not shown), and is detected within 4 seconds (V valid period t5) from 1 second after the start of the small hit game. When the switch detects the ball, the big hit game is executed after the small hit game ends, and when the opening period t6 (2 seconds) elapses after the big hit game starts, the first round game starts and the specific winning opening 65a is released.

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the normal state, the time saving state A, and the time saving state B can be set as the gaming state, and the time saving state A is set and the time saving state B is set. It is configured so that the data table to be referred to when setting the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is different depending on the case where it is done.

When the time saving state A is set, if the player wins a small hit (small hit C) that is disadvantageous to the player, the ball does not pass through the specific area 650V during the small hit game. It is configured so that the fluctuation pattern is set. Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 196, when the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed in the time saving state, the flow path (second flow) capable of passing through the specific region 650V. The fluctuation time (0.5 seconds) set when the small hit C is won, rather than the period (3 seconds) required for the ball to flow down the path tb) and pass through the second flow path tb. ) And the time (1.6 seconds) from the start of the small hit game to the end of the opening period of the V winning device 650 are configured to be shorter.

Further, when the time saving state B is set, if a small hit (small hit C) that is disadvantageous to the player is won, the ball fluctuates so that the ball can pass through the specific area 650V during the small hit game. It is configured so that the pattern is set. With this configuration, even if the time saving state is set as the game state, the degree of advantage to the player can be significantly different by simply changing the data table referred to when setting the fluctuation pattern. Can be made.

<About the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 212 and 213, the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 212 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 212, the RAM 223 of the seventh embodiment has a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d, a fluctuation start flag 223fa, a stop type selection flag 223fb, an effect counter 223h, and a SW effective time. It has a storage area 223fd, a fluctuation time counter 223fd, a game state storage area 223fe, a delay passage state flag 223ff, a length fluctuation flag 223fg, a second ball entry flag 223fh, a normal flag 223fi, and another memory area 223z. Since the configuration (flag, counter, area) having the same name as the electrical configuration used in any of the above-described embodiments is the same as each of the above-described embodiments in terms of its use, detailed description thereof will be omitted. ..

The variation start flag 223fa is a flag for indicating that information (variation pattern command) indicating that the variation of the special symbol is started is received, and is set to ON when the variation of the special symbol is started. It is a thing. This fluctuation start flag 223fa is based on the information included in the fluctuation pattern command received by the voice lamp control device 113, and whether the current special symbol variation is the variation of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) or the second special symbol. It is configured so that it can be determined whether it is a fluctuation in (Special Figure 2).

Specifically, the variation start flag 223fa receives the special figure 1 variation start flag 223fa1 which is set to be on when the variation pattern command indicating the special figure 1 variation is received, and the variation pattern command indicating the special figure 2 variation. It is formed from the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fa2, which is set to be on when the command is performed.

Then, when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (S12001: Yes in FIG. 226), the variation start flag 223fa corresponding to the symbol type information included in the received variation pattern command is set to ON. (See S12002 in FIG. 226), it is set to off when the variation display in the third symbol display device 81 is set (see S5102 or S5108 in FIG. 231). When any of the variation start flags 223fa is set to on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is the command output process (S4102 in FIG. 225) of the main process (see FIG. 225) executed by the MPU 221. Inside, it is transmitted toward the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223fb is a flag for indicating that a command (stop type command) including information for indicating the stop type of the current special symbol change has been received from the main control device 110, and is a flag for indicating that the main control device 110 has received the command (stop type command). It is set to on when a stop type command transmitted from is received (see S12005 in FIG. 226), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S5112 in FIG. 231). .. When the stop type selection flag 223fb is set to on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

The game state storage area 223fe is an area for storing the game state corresponding to the state command when the state command related to the game state is received from the main control device 110. By referring to the information (game state) stored in the game state storage area 223fe, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to identify the current game state. In the present embodiment, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is stored in the game state storage area 223fe when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like because the data is erased when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. The information indicating the current gaming state is also deleted. However, in the present embodiment, since the state command is set in the start-up process (see FIG. 51) of the main control device executed after the power is turned on (S2115 in FIG. 51), the game state storage area 223fe is immediately after the power is restored. Information indicating the game state that was set before the power was cut off will be stored in. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the voice lamp control device 113 can always identify the gaming state.

The state command output from the main control device 110 is received when it is determined by the command determination process 7 of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S4182 in FIG. 226) whether or not it has been received, and when it is determined that the command has been received. The game state included in the state command is configured to be stored in the game state storage area 223fe, but in FIG. 226, the processing content is processed according to other commands (S12019 in FIG. 226). The process is included in (see), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The delayed passage state flag 223ff is a flag for determining the state of the sphere flowing down the second flow path (delayed flow path) tb in the flow path unit 660. Here, the contents of the delayed passage state flag 223ff will be described with reference to FIG. 213. FIG. 213 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the delayed passage state flag 223ff. As shown in FIG. 213, the delay passage state flag 223ff is composed of a storage area of 1 byte, and is configured so that the ball flow state of the delay passage can be specified by the state of the lower 4 bits.

Specifically, the delayed passage entry switch 660e1 that detects the ball that has flowed into the second passage (delayed passage) 660b is set to off, and the delayed passage discharge that detects the ball that has flowed out from the second passage (delayed passage) 660b. When the switch 660e2 is set to off, that is, when the ball does not pass through the second passage (delayed passage) 660b, the lower 4 bits become "0001" (described as "00" in FIG. 213). When the delayed passage entry switch 660e1 is set to on and the delayed passage discharge switch 660e2 is set to off, that is, when the ball is passing through the second passage (delayed passage) 660b, the lower 4 bits. Is "0010" (described as "01" in FIG. 213), the delay passage entry switch 660e1 is set to off, and the delay passage discharge switch 660e2 is set to on, that is, the second passage (delay passage). ) In the state where the ball is ejected from the inside of 660b, the lower 4 bits are "0011" (described as "02" in FIG. 213).

Here, the delay passage entry switch 660e1 and the delay passage discharge switch 660e2 are both composed of a proximity sensor capable of detecting a ball flowing down the second passage tb formed in the second passage 660b, and are the targets. It is configured to be turned on when an object is detected continuously for a predetermined period. Then, it is configured to be set to off when the object is not detected for a predetermined period.

Here, when the setting status of the lower 4 bits of the delayed passage state flag 223ff is the above-mentioned "0001", "0010", and "0011", the ball normally flows down the second passage (delayed passage) 660b. Since it is a state that can be set to, it is determined to be a normal ball flow state.

On the other hand, the delayed passage entry switch 660e1 is set to ON and the delayed passage discharge switch 660e2 is also set to ON, that is, the ball flows into the second passage (delayed passage) 660b and the ball is discharged. In the state where the state is detected at the same time, the lower 4 bits become "0011" (described as "03" in FIG. 213), and the delay passage entry switch 660e1 becomes an abnormal state (described as "-" in FIG. 213). In the state where the delay passage discharge switch 660e2 is set to ON, that is, in the state where the sensor for detecting the ball flow condition of the second passage (delay passage) 660b is out of order, the lower 4 bits are "0100" (FIG. In 213, it is described as "04"), and it is determined that the ball is in an abnormal flow state.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 214 to 224.

FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 according to the seventh embodiment. This timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds instead of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment.

Of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 214) in the seventh embodiment, in each of the processes S101 to S103, S105, S107, S110, and S111, the timer interrupt processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 31), respectively. The same processing as each processing of S101 to S103, S105, S107, S110, and S111 is executed.

Further, in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 214), when the processing of S103 is completed, the processing is for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81. The special symbol variation process 7 for setting the variation pattern of the above is executed (S191), and then the process proceeds to the process of S105. The details of the special symbol variation processing 7 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 215 to 218.

After the process of S105 is executed, the normal symbol variation process 7 (S192), which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S192), and then the process proceeds to the process of S107. The details of the normal symbol variation processing 7 will be described later with reference to FIG. 219. After executing the process of S107, the process of passing through the V entrance accompanying the entry of the ball into the V winning device 650 is executed (S193). After that, the V passing process executed when the ball winning the V winning device 650 passes through the specific area 650V is executed (S194), and then the process proceeds to the process of S110. The details of the V inlet passing process and the V passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 220 and 221.

That is, in the seventh embodiment, when the ball passes through the specific area 650V provided in the V winning device 650 during the small hit game, the process for executing the big hit game after the small hit game is completed (2). As the seed-based execution process), a V-entrance pass process (S193 in FIG. 214) and a V-pass process (S194 in FIG. 214) are provided, a process related to fluctuation of the first symbol (special symbol), and a second symbol (S). It differs from the above-mentioned first embodiment in that the detailed contents of the processing relating to the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol) are different.

Next, the special symbol variation processing 7 (S191) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 215. FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation processing 7 (S191). This special symbol variation processing 7 (S191) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 214) in the seventh embodiment, and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 is performed. , This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, in the special symbol variation processing 7 (see S191 of FIG. 215) in the seventh embodiment, there is also a place where the same processing as the special symbol variation processing (see S104 of FIG. 32) in the above-mentioned first embodiment is executed. However, for convenience of explanation, different reference numerals are given to the processes having the same contents. It should be noted that, of course, the modified contents described in each of the above-described embodiments can be applied to the elements having the same processing contents.

In the special symbol variation processing 7 (S191 in FIG. 215) in the seventh embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the present is a big hit of the special symbol (S10001). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S10001: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S10001: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S10002), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If it is determined that this is not the case (S10002: No), it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the second entry port 3640 (S1003).

When it is determined that the ball has entered the second entry port 3640 (S1003: Yes), the second entry command is set (S10004), the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the stop. Each value of the type selection counter C3 and the small hit type counter C5 is stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area (S10005). Next, the first symbol display device 37 executes the special symbol variation start process 7 for starting the variation display (S10011). The special symbol change start process 7 will be described later with reference to FIG. 216.

On the other hand, in the process of S1003, when it is determined that the ball has not entered the second entry port 3640 (S1003: No), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired. (S10006). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S10007). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (not larger than 0) (S10007: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (not 0) (S10007: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (N1). ) Is subtracted by 1 (S10008), and a hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S10009). Here, the set reserved ball number command is configured to include information for indicating that the command is for indicating the reserved ball number of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and is the main control. The hold ball number command set by the external output process (see S2201 in FIG. 52) executed in the main process of the device 110 (see FIG. 52) is output to the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, the current number of reserved balls can be grasped on the voice lamp control device 113 side for each type of special symbol.

After the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S10009, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S10010). After that, the process of S10011 is executed.

Further, in the process of S10002, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S10002: Yes), the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S10012). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If it is determined that has not elapsed (S10012: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S10012, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S10012: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S10013). The display mode of the stop symbol is preset by the special symbol variation start process 7 (S10011) described later with reference to FIG. 216. When this special symbol change start process 7 is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, depending on the value of the first random number counter C1, it is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit or a miss, and if it is a special symbol big hit, the first hit type counter. The jackpot type (big hits A to C) is determined according to the value of C2.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37. If it is a small hit, the red LED is turned on, and if it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S10013 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing 7 is displayed. , It is determined whether it is a big hit of a special symbol (S10014). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot of a special symbol (S10014: Yes), an opening scenario of a specific winning opening is set (S10015) based on the jackpot type, and then the start of the jackpot is set (S10016). Next, the jackpot start flag 203fb and the jackpot medium flag 203o are set to ON (S10017), the value of the time reduction / medium total counter 203fa and the value of the time reduction / medium special 2 counter 203ff are set to 0 (S10018), and S10019. Move to processing. In the process of S10019, a stop command is set (S10019), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S10014, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S10014: No), the time saving number update process (S10020) is executed to determine whether or not the current lottery result is a small hit. (S10021). The details of this time reduction update process (S10020) will be described later with reference to FIG. 217.

In the process of S10021, if it is determined that the lottery result this time is a small hit (S10021: Yes), the small hit start setting process is executed (S10022). Next, the process of S10019 is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S10021, if it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a small hit (S10021: No), the small hit start setting process (see S10022) is skipped, the process of S10019 is executed, and this process is completed. do.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed and it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit, the time reduction number update process (S10020) is executed, and then the current lottery result is obtained. It is configured to determine whether it is a small hit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it is configured to execute the time saving number update process (S10020) after executing the small hit start setting process (S10022). You may. Further, for example, when the time reduction number update process is executed and it is determined that the time reduction number ends by the special symbol variation process this time, and the lottery result of the special symbol this time is out of order, the execution timing of the time reduction number update process is performed. If the time saving state is terminated at (special symbol symbol stop timing) and the lottery result of this special symbol is a small hit, the time saving state may be terminated at the timing when the small hit game ends. .. This makes it possible to set the time saving state until just before the start of the next special symbol change. Further, even if a small hit is won in the final fluctuation of the time saving state, the small hit game can be executed in the state where the time saving state is set.

Next, the special symbol change start processing 7 (S10011) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 216. FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start processing 7 (S10011). This special symbol variation start process 7 (S10011) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 215) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214), and is the first special symbol holding ball storage area. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of 203a, a lottery (win / fail judgment) of "special symbol big hit", "special symbol small hit" or "special symbol omission" is performed, and the first symbol is performed. This is a process to be executed when setting information necessary for determining an effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of a variation effect performed by the display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol fluctuation start processing 7 (S10011), first, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, And, each value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired (S10101). Next, the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number 7 table 202fd corresponding to the acquired special symbol type (S10102). Specifically, in the case of a lottery of the first special symbol based on the entry into the first entry port 64, the value of the random number counter C1 per first and the special symbol 1 random number table 202fa1 (see FIG. 204 (b)). The random number value stored in is compared to determine whether or not it is a big hit, and if it is a lottery of the second special symbol based on the entry into the second entry opening 3640, the value of the first random number counter C1. And the random number value stored in the special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2 (see FIG. 204 (c)) are compared to determine a big hit or a small hit.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a big hit (S10103). When it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S10103: Yes), the big hit type is acquired based on the first hit type selection 7 table 202fa corresponding to the acquired special symbol type (S10104). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S10101 is compared with the random number value stored in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202fb1 or the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202fb2. It is determined what kind of jackpot is among the jackpots (big hits A to E) of the five types of special symbols (see FIG. 205 (b) or (c)).

In the seventh embodiment, the determination value determined to be a big hit is the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the determination value is not limited to the same, and different random values may be used. With this configuration, the random number value determined to be out of order in the first special symbol is configured to be determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and the bias of the jackpot can be suppressed.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the number is not limited to this, and the jackpot is defined for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The number of determined random numbers may be set differently. By configuring in this way, the probability of a big hit can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol having the higher jackpot probability, the player It is possible to have expectations for a big hit.

Then, the display mode at the time of normal jackpot corresponding to the special symbol type and the jackpot type is set (S10105). In this process of S10105, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37A) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A to E). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A to E) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

After that, the jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S10106), and the process proceeds to S10113. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S10106, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. Specifically, among the acquired special symbol type, the lottery result, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, and each variation pattern table of the variation pattern 7 table 202fd, the current game. The fluctuation time of the symbol variation is determined by comparing the values specified in the data table corresponding to the state (see FIG. 207).

In the process of S10113, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S10106 is set (S10113). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S10105 is set (S10114). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and are executed in the main process (see FIG. 52) of the main controller 110 in the external output process (S2201). Inside, it is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can set the variation display mode (effect mode) of the third symbol according to the variation pattern (variation time) and the stop type of the special symbol. When the processing of S10114 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing 7 (S191).

On the other hand, if the lottery result is not a big hit (S10103: No), then it is determined whether the lottery result is a small hit (S10107). When it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S10107: Yes), the small hit type is acquired based on the small hit type selection 7 table 202fe (S10108). More specifically, the value of the small hit type counter C5 acquired in the processing of S10101 is compared with the random number value specified in the small hit type selection 7 table 202fe, and the small hits (small) of three types of special symbols are compared. Among the hits A to C), it is determined what the small hit type is (see FIG. 206 (b)).

In addition, in this 7th embodiment, since it is configured so that a small hit is not won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), when the small hit is won in the lottery of the special symbol. Is not executing the process of determining the type of the special symbol won in the small hit because it is determined that the lottery of the special symbol this time is the lottery of the second special symbol. If any of the second special symbols is configured to win a small hit, after determining that the small hit has been won, a process of determining the type of the special symbol corresponding to the current lottery is performed, and the determination is made. It is preferable to configure the process to select the small hit type according to the result. With this configuration, it is possible to set different small hit types depending on whether the small hit is won with the first special symbol or the small hit with the second special symbol, and the game playability. Can have a width. In addition, the types of small hits that can be set when a small hit is won between the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not changed, and the selection ratio of each small hit type may be different. good.

Next, the display mode at the time of a small hit corresponding to the small hit type is set (S10109), and the small hit fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S10110). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the small hit symbol is determined. It should be noted that the processing executed in S10110 differs from the processing content of S10106 described above in that the lottery result of the target special symbol is changed to a small hit instead of a big hit, but the set variation. Since the subsequent processing executed for the pattern (for example, the processing for outputting to the voice lamp control device 113) is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, when the lottery result is not a small hit in the process of S10107 (S10107: No), the display mode at the time of disengagement corresponding to the special symbol is set (S10111). After that, the fluctuation pattern at the time of off is determined based on the number of reserved balls (S10112). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. Next, the processes of S10113 and S10114 described above are executed, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process 7.

In this embodiment, in the special symbol change start processing 7 (see S10011 in FIG. 216), the lottery result of the special symbol is configured to be determined in the order of "big hit", "small hit", and "missing". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to give priority to "off". Such a configuration is effective for reducing the number of determinations that are repeatedly executed in various processes of the main control device 110 because the lottery result that is most likely to appear as the lottery result of the special symbol is "missing". It becomes.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, in the special symbol variation start process 7 (see S10011 in FIG. 216), the variation pattern command and the stop type command are configured to be set in the same process. The pattern command and the stop type command may be configured to be set at different timings. Further, even if the settings are made within the same process, the stop type command is output after a predetermined period in which the variation pattern command is output so that the timing of output to the voice lamp control device 113 is not the same. You may.

Next, with reference to FIG. 217, the time saving number update process (S10020) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing the time reduction number update process (S10020). This time reduction number update process (S10020) is executed in the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 215) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214), updates the time reduction number, and sets the game state to the normal state. It is a process for.

In the time reduction number update process (S10020), first, it is determined whether the value of the time reduction / medium total counter 203fa is larger than 0 (S10201). When it is determined that the value of the time reduction / medium total counter 203fa is not larger than 0 (0), (S10201: No), that is, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal state, the time reduction number is updated. Since there is no need, this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction / medium total counter 203fa is larger than 0 (S10201: Yes), that is, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the time reduction state, the number of time reductions is updated (subtracted). Processes (S10202 to S10209) for executing the process of (S10202 to S10209) are executed.

In the process of S10202, the value of the time-saving / medium-time total counter 203fa is subtracted by 1 (S10202), and then it is determined whether or not the current special symbol change is the change of the second special symbol (special figure 2) (S10203). When it is determined that the current fluctuation is the second special symbol (special figure 2) (S10203: Yes), the value of the time-saving medium-time special 2 counter 203ff is subtracted by 1 (S10204), and the process proceeds to S10205. On the other hand, in the process of S10203, if it is determined that the current variation is not the second special symbol (the first special symbol) (S10203: No), the process of S10204 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S10205.

In the process of S10205, a remaining time reduction number command indicating the value of the time reduction medium counter (time reduction medium total counter 203fa and time reduction medium special 2 counter 203ff) changed by the calculation is set (S10205). The remaining time reduction command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) of the first embodiment. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113.

After that, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff is 0 (S10206), and if it is determined that the value of the time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff is not 0 (S10206: No), then the time saving middle It is determined whether the value of the total counter 203fa is 0 (S10207). If it is determined in the process of S10207 that the value of the time-saving / medium-time total counter 203fa is not 0 (S10207: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S10206, it was determined that the value of the time saving / medium special 2 counter 203ff was 0 (S10206: Yes), or in the processing of S10207, it was determined that the value of the time saving / medium total counter 203fa was 0. In the case (S10207: Yes), the gaming state is set to the normal state (S10208), the values of the time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff and the time saving medium total counter 203fa are both set to 0 (S10209), and this processing is terminated. ..

As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state are set, and when any of the time saving ending conditions is satisfied, the process of ending the time saving state (normal state). It is configured to execute the process of setting. Specifically, when the number of special symbol fluctuations (total number of fluctuations), which is the sum of the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol during the time reduction state, reaches a predetermined number, that is, the time reduction. The value (for example, 100) set in the time saving / medium summing counter 203fa when the state is set is subtracted every time the special symbol change is executed, and the time saving end condition is satisfied when the value becomes 0. When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times in the time saving state, that is, the value (for example, 10) set in the time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff when the time saving state is set is the second. 2 Special symbol (Special 2) The time reduction state is terminated when one of the time reduction end condition, which is subtracted each time the fluctuation is executed and the value becomes 0, is satisfied. It is configured to do.

With this configuration, the lottery for the second special symbol, in which the lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) while the time saving state is set. ) It can be surely executed. In the present embodiment, the configuration has the above-mentioned two time reduction end conditions, but the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more time reduction end conditions may be set. Further, in the jackpot winning of the special symbol that triggers the setting of the time saving state, the value for satisfying the time saving end condition may be different depending on the type of the winning jackpot. Further, in the present embodiment, the time saving state is terminated when any one of the plurality of time saving end conditions is satisfied, but the time saving state is not limited to this, and for example, three time saving conditions are satisfied. The end condition may be set in advance, and the time reduction state may be terminated when two of the time reduction end conditions are satisfied. By setting the conditions for ending the time saving state in a complicated manner in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp how long the time saving state (advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player) will continue. It is possible to play a game with a sense of tension.

Further, as described above, when a plurality of time reduction end conditions are set, a value corresponding to the time reduction end condition that is most likely to be satisfied is used as an effect of notifying the player of the period until the time reduction state ends. All you have to do is execute the effect of notifying. In the present embodiment, in the state where the time saving state is set, the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is executed by the right-handed game, so that the remaining time saving number notification executed during the time saving state is notified. Is configured to notify the value until the time saving end condition that is satisfied based on the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special drawing 2) is satisfied among a plurality of time saving ending conditions (FIG. 199 (b). ) Remaining time reduction notification area Dm6).

Next, with reference to FIG. 218, the small hit start setting process (S10022) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing the small hit start setting process (S10022). This small hit start setting process (S10022) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 215) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214), and is a small hit type (small hits A to C). ), This is a process for setting the start of the small hit game (the game content (operation scenario) of the small hit game to be executed this time).

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, when the small hit game is started, the V winning device 650 is changed to an open state in which a ball can win (easily), and the ball winning the V winning device 650 is changed. By passing through the specific area 650V, the big hit game is executed after the small hit game is completed.

That is, in the game state in which the small hit game is executed, the ball can be won in the V prize device 650 (the prize ball can be obtained), and the big hit game is executed as compared with the normal game state. It is configured to be in an advantageous state with a high probability.

In the small hit start setting process (S10022), first, an opening scenario (operation scenario) corresponding to the small hit type is set (S10301). This operation scenario is set by referring to the open scenario 7 table 202ff based on the small hit type set by referring to the small hit type selection 7 table 202fe at the time of winning the small hit.

After that, the jackpot type corresponding to the small hit type is set in the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203fd (S10302). More specifically, the big hit type (big hit D to E) at the time of passing V is determined based on the small hit type and the small hit type selection 7 table 202fe. As described above with reference to FIG. 206 (b), if the small hit type is small hit A, it is determined that the big hit type when passing V is "10 rounds, 10 times big hit, time saving A", and the small hit is made. If the type is small hit B, it is determined that it is "10 rounds, 10 times of time reduction, and time reduction B", and if the type of small hit is C, it is determined that it is "10 rounds, no time reduction, big hit" (FIG. 206). See (b)).

Next, the start of the small hit is set based on the small hit type (S10303), and the small hit start flag 203fc and the small hit medium flag 203p are set to ON (S10304). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 219, the normal symbol variation processing 7 (S192) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation processing 7 (S192). This normal symbol variation process 7 (S192) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device and the second entry port 3640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 3640a.

In the seventh embodiment, a plurality of hit types can be set as the hit types of the normal symbol (second symbol), and the operation pattern (opening scenario) of the electric accessory 3640a according to the set hit types. Is configured to be different. As a result, when the normal symbol is won, the electric accessory 3640a can be opened and closed in a plurality of operation patterns, which makes it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the electric accessory 3640a is operating. be able to.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, it is easier for the ball to enter the second entry port 3640 in the state where the electric accessory 3640a is operating (it is easier to enter the ball than in the state where the electric accessory 3640a is not operating). ), And the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 3640a at the timing when the operation of the electric accessory 3640a ends differs depending on the flow position (first flow path ta, second flow path). It is configured to be discharged to tb) (see FIGS. 195 to 198).

The ball flowing down the second flow path tb is configured to easily pass through the specific region 650V in the V winning device 650 during the small hit game than the ball flowing down the first flow path ta. .. As described above, in the present embodiment, the ease of entering the ball into the second entry port 3640 can be changed by changing the opening operation content of the electric accessory 3640a (second entry). Set the first open state where the ball is easy to enter the mouth 3640 and the second open state where the ball is harder to enter the second entry port 3640 than the easy entry state), and enter the specific area 650V. The ease of passage of the sphere can be changed (the first lead state in which the sphere easily passes to the specific region 650 V, and the second guide state in which the sphere is more difficult to pass to the specific region 650 V than the first guide state. Can be set).

That is, in the seventh embodiment, a plurality of hit types can be set as the hit types of the normal symbol (second symbol), and the operation pattern (opening scenario) of the electric accessory 3640a according to the set hit types. By making it different, it is possible to make the ease of satisfying each condition different for each of the plurality of conditions for having a privilege for the player, so that one variable means ( It is possible to make the player more interested in the operation content of the electric accessory 3640a).

As a configuration for differently satisfying a plurality of game conditions in this way, a configuration other than the configuration of the seventh embodiment may be used. For example, a variable means in which a plurality of operation patterns are set may be electrically used. Instead of the accessory 3640a, a winning device (for example, a variable winning device 65) in which an operation pattern is set at the time of winning a big hit may be used.

In the normal symbol variation processing 7 (S192), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S801). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second entrance 3640 is performed. In the middle of being included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S801: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S801: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S802), and the second symbol display device is used. If the display mode is not changing (S802: No), then it is determined whether data (value of the random number counter C4 per second) is stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area (S803).

In the process of S803, when it is determined that the data is not stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area, that is, the condition for newly starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol (second symbol) is not satisfied (S803: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball possible area, that is, when it is determined that the condition for newly starting the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is satisfied (S803). : Yes), then, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area is acquired (S804).

Then, based on the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S804 and the second random number 7 table 202fc, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S805). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number 7 table 202fc. As described above, when the current game state is a high probability state (time saving state) of a normal symbol, if the value of the random number counter C4 per second is in the range of "0 to 79", it is A per normal figure. If it is in the range of "80 to 98", it is determined that it is B per normal figure, and if it is a value of "99", it is determined that it is out of range. Further, when the current gaming state is a low probability state (normal state) of a normal symbol, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is "0", it is determined that the value is A per normal symbol. If it is a value of "1", it is determined that it is B per normal figure, and if it is "2 to 99", it is determined that it is out of order (see FIG. 206 (a)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S805 is a hit of the normal symbol (A per normal symbol or B per normal symbol) (S806), and it is determined that the lottery result is a hit of the normal symbol. If it is determined (S806: Yes), the display mode at the time of hit is set (S807), and the process proceeds to S809. In the process of S807, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed so that the hit type can be identified as the stop symbol (stop display mode) of the second symbol. To set.

On the other hand, in the process of S806, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary symbol (S806: No), the display mode at the time of the out of place is set (S808). In the process of S808, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S809.

When the processing of S807 or S808 is completed, in the processing of S809, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol (S809), and the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the normal symbol (S809). If it is (time saving state) (S809: Yes), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device is set to 3 seconds (S810), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol (S809: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S811), and this process is performed. finish.

In the seventh embodiment, when the time saving state is set, a shorter fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the second symbol than when the time saving state is not set (when the normal state is set). It is configured as follows. As a result, the number of lottery of the second symbol per unit time can be increased in the time-saving state as compared with the normal state, so that the time-saving game can be efficiently executed.

In the seventh embodiment, when the time saving state is set, the probability of hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) is higher than that in the normal state, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set. By shortening the length and making it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 3640 in the operation pattern of the electric accessory 3640a, the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. However, it suffices if the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is more easily executed in the time-saving state than in the normal state. For example, the time-saving state is better than the normal state. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) may be shorter, and the other items may be the same. It may be the same, or the operation pattern of the electric accessory 3640a may be made easier for the ball to enter the second entry port 3640 in the time saving state than in the normal state, and other than that, it may be the same.

On the other hand, in the process of S802, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S802: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed. (S812). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S810 or the process of S811 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device.

In the process of S812, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S812: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S812, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S812: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S813). In the processing of S813, the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win, and if the display mode is set by the processing of S807, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighting display) in the second symbol display device. ) Is set to be done. On the other hand, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is out of order and the display mode is set by the processing of S808, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. Is set. When the stop display is set by the process of S813, the second symbol display is displayed when the second symbol display update process (see S2208) of the main process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment is executed next. The variation display in the device is completed, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S807 or the process of S808.

Next, when the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current normal symbol (the current lottery result) is a hit of the normal symbol (S814). If the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S814: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S814: Yes), it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol (S815).

In the processing of S815, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol (S815: No), the opening period of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second entrance 3640 is 0.2 seconds. At the same time, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S816), and the process proceeds to S818. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (time saving state) of a normal symbol (S815: Yes), a command for hitting a normal figure is set (S851), and the hit type set this time and the current game state are set. The operation pattern of the corresponding electric accessory 3640a is set (S817), and the process proceeds to S818.

In the process of S818, the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second ball entry port 3640 is set (S818), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 3640a is set by the process of S818, the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S2206) of the main process (see FIG. 52) of the main control device 110 is executed. The opening / closing control of the object is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S816 or the process of S817 are completed.

Next, the V inlet passage process (S193) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 220. FIG. 220 is a flowchart showing this V inlet passing process (S193). This V entrance passage process (S193) is a flowchart showing the V inlet passage process (S193) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214).

In the V entrance passing process (S193), first, it is determined whether or not the ball passing sensor (not shown) for detecting that the ball has won the V winning device 650 is on (S10401). This ball passage sensor is a detection means that is turned on when a ball has passed. Specifically, it is composed of proximity sensors arranged close to the ball flow path so that the period required for the ball to flow down the detection area of the ball passage sensor is a predetermined period (for example, 30 milliseconds). This proximity sensor is configured to turn on (output an on signal) when it continuously detects an object for 30 milliseconds. As a result, for example, even if a state in which a ball is detected at intervals of less than 30 milliseconds appears due to noise generated in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to suppress a problem that the state is determined to be a state in which the ball has passed. can do.

If it is determined in the process of S10401 that the ball passage sensor is not on (S10401: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S10401, when it is determined that the ball passing sensor is on (S10401: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V winning device 650 is in the opening period (S10402).

In the process of S10402, when it is determined that the V winning device 650 is in the opening period (S10402: Yes), the V entrance passage command is set (S10403), and this process is terminated. The V inlet passage command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) of the main controller 110. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V entrance passage command, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the balls that have passed through the V entrance, and transmits a command for causing the display control device 114 to execute an effect based on the V entrance passage. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect during the small hit game based on the entry of the ball into the V winning device 650.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the V winning device 650 is not in the opening period (S10402: No), it means that the ball has won the V winning device 650 even though it is not a small hit game, so an error command is set. (S10404), and then this process is terminated.

Next, the V-passing process (S194) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 221. FIG. 221 is a flowchart showing the V-passing process (S194). This V-passing process (S194) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214) in the seventh embodiment.

In the V-passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the V-passing flag 203fg is on (S10501). If it is determined in the process of S10501 that the V passage flag 203fg is ON (S10501: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S10501, when it is determined that the V passage flag 203fg is not on (S10501: No), it is determined whether or not the V passage is present (S10502). That is, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the V winning switch 650e3 of the V winning device 650. In the process of S10502, if it is determined that V has not passed (S10502: No), this process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S10502, if it is determined that V passage is present (S10502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V passage is valid (S10503). If it is determined that the V-passing valid period is in progress (S10503: Yes), the V-passing jackpot type value stored in the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203fd is acquired (S10504), and the acquired V-passing jackpot is acquired. The V flag 203fe corresponding to the type is set to ON (S10505). Then, the V passage command is set (S10506).

Next, the V-passing flag 203fg is set to ON (S10507), and then the time-saving / medium-time total counter 203fa and the time-saving / medium-special 2 counter 203ff are set to 0 (S10508), and the present processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S10503, if it is determined that the V passage valid period is not in effect (S10503: No), an error command is set (S10509), and this process is terminated. If the ball passes through the V winning switch 650e3 when it is not in the V valid period, it is considered that the ball is illegally won in the V winning switch 650e3. In this case, by setting an error command in the process of S10505, an error output is executed and a fraudulent act can be detected.

Next, the jackpot control process 7 (S2282) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 222. FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 7 (S2282). This jackpot control process 7 (S2282) is executed in place of the jackpot control process (S2204) in the main process (see FIG. 52), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, it responds to the jackpot. It is a process for executing various effects and opening or closing the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650).

In the jackpot control process 7 (see FIGS. 222 and S2282), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S10601). Specifically, if the jackpot start flag 203fb is set to ON by the process of S10017 of the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 215), it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S10601, when the big hit of the special symbol is started (S10601: Yes), the opening command is set (S10602). Then, the jackpot start flag 203fb is set to off (S10603), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S10601, if the jackpot of the special symbol is not started (S10601: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S10604). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S10604, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S10604: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S10604, if it is determined that the special symbol is in the big hit (S10604: Yes), the process of S10605 is executed. In the process of S10605, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S10605). If it is determined in the process of S10605 that it is the start timing of a new round (S10605: Yes), the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the specific winning opening 65a or based on the opening scenario 7 table 202ff) The V winning opening 650a) of the V winning device 650 is opened (S10606), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S10607). After setting the round number command, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 in the first embodiment. Inside, it is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display round number command according to the round number to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

Although the details will be described later, in the seventh embodiment, when the continuous jackpot is executed, the display round number command according to the cumulative number of rounds is transmitted in the voice lamp control device 113. Become. Therefore, the cumulative number of rounds in the continuous jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the player can be made aware that the jackpot has continued for a long time, so that the player's interest can be improved.

On the other hand, in the process of S10605, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S10605: No), the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) It is determined whether the closing condition is satisfied (S10608). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650), or , When a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 in total) are won in the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 650, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the process of S10608, if the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is satisfied (S10608: Yes), the corresponding winning opening is satisfied. The opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed (S10609), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is not satisfied (S10608: No), the ending effect is started. It is determined whether it is the timing (S10610). The start timing of the ending effect is the start timing of the ending effect when the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed after the 15th round and the waiting time (3 seconds in the present embodiment), which is the ball ejection time, has elapsed. To determine as.

If it is determined in the process of S10610 that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S10610: Yes), the ending command is set (S10611), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 in the first embodiment. Then, it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S10610, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S10610: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect (S10612). If it is determined in the process of S10612 that it is not the end timing of the ending effect (S10612: No), the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S10612, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S10612: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special game being executed is the jackpot C (S10613). In the process of S10613, if it is determined that the hit is not C (5R time saving no big hit) (S10613: No), 100 is set in the time saving medium total counter 203fa and 10 is set in the time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff (S10614). The process proceeds to S10615. On the other hand, in the process of S10613, if it is determined that the hit is C (5R time saving no jackpot) (S10613: Yes), the process of S10614 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S10615.

In the process of S10615, a state command corresponding to the state after the big hit is set (S10615). Then, the end of the jackpot is set (S10616), the jackpot middle flag 203o is set to off (S10617), and then this process is terminated.

Next, the small hit control process 7 (S2283) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 223. FIG. 223 is a flowchart showing the small hit control process 7 (S2283). This small hit control process 7 (S2283) is executed in place of the small hit control process (S2205) in the main process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment, and the pachinko machine 10 is in a small hit state with a special symbol. In this case, various effects are executed according to the small hit, and the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened or closed. It is a process.

In the small hit control process 7 (S2283 in FIG. 223), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit of the special symbol is started (S10701). Specifically, if the small hit start flag 203fc is set to ON, it is determined that the small hit of the special symbol is started. In the process of S10701, when the small hit of the special symbol is started (S10701: Yes), the opening command is set (S10702). Then, the small hit start flag 203fc is set to off (S10703), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S10701, if the small hit of the special symbol is not started (S10701: No), it is determined whether the small hit of the special symbol is in progress (S10704). As for the small hits of the special symbols, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the small hits of the special symbols (including during the small hit game of the special symbols). Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the small hit game of the special symbol. In the process of S10704, if it is not during the small hit of the special symbol (S10704: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S10704, if it is determined that the special symbol is in the small hit (S10704: Yes), the process of S10705 is executed. In the process of S10705, it is determined whether or not it is the V winning opening opening timing (S10705). In the process of S10705, when it is determined that it is the V winning opening opening timing (S10705: Yes), the corresponding V winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened based on the opening scenario 7 table 202ff. (S10706), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S10705, if it is not the V winning opening opening timing (S10705: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the corresponding V winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is satisfied (S10707). .. Specifically, the closing condition is satisfied when the opening scenario set corresponding to the small hit game is completed, or when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 in total) are won in the V winning device 650. To determine.

If it is determined in the processing of S10707 that the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is satisfied (S10707: Yes), the corresponding winning opening (V winning opening of the V winning device 650) is determined. The mouth 650a) is closed (S10708) to end this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is not satisfied (S10707: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S10709). In the process of S10709, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S10709: Yes), the ending command is set (S10710), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 in the first embodiment. Then, it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the S10709 process, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S10709: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect (S10711). If it is determined in the process of S10711 that it is not the end timing of the ending effect (S10711: No), the present process is terminated.

In the process of S10711, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S10711: Yes), it is determined whether the V flag 203fe is set to ON (S10712), and the V flag 203fe is not set to ON. If it is determined that (S10712: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V flag 203fe is set to ON (S10712: Yes), an opening scenario based on the jackpot type corresponding to the content of the V flag 203fe is set (S10713), the jackpot start flag 203fb, and the jackpot. The medium flag 203o is set to on (S10714), the V flag 203fe is set to off (S10715), the V passage flag 203fg is set to off (S10716), and the small hit medium flag 203p is set to off (S10717). , End this process.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process 7 (S2281) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 224. FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing the electric accessory opening / closing process 7 (S2281). This electric accessory opening / closing process 7 (S2281) is a process executed in place of the electric accessory opening / closing process (S2207) in the main process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment.

In the electric accessory opening / closing process 7 (S2281), first, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing control setting of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second entrance 3640 is being set (S10801). If it is determined that the opening / closing control setting of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second entry port 3640 is not being set (S10801: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the opening / closing control setting of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second entrance 3640 is being set (S10801: Yes), the opening timing of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second entry 3640 is set. It is determined whether or not there is (S10802). When it is determined that it is the opening timing of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second entrance 3640 (S10802: Yes), the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second entry 3640 is opened (S10803), and the electric accessory is electric. The accessory release command is set (S10804), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S10802, if it is determined that it is not the opening timing of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second entry port 3640 (S10802: No), then the electric combination attached to the second entry port 3640 It is determined whether or not the closing timing of the object 3640a is reached (S10805). When it is determined that it is the closing timing of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second entrance 3640 (S10805: Yes), the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second entry 3640 is closed (S10806), and the electric accessory is electric. The accessory closing command is set (S10807), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the closing timing of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second entrance 3640 (S10805: No), then the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second entry 3640 is controlled. It is determined whether or not it is the end timing of (S10809). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the open / close control of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second entry port 3640 (S10809: Yes), the end command per normal figure is set (S10810), and then this process is terminated. do. Further, in the process of S10809, even if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second ball entry port 3640 (S10809: No), this process is terminated.

<Control processing executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 225 to 233, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the seventh embodiment will be described. First, the main process in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 225. This main process is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 59) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is the main process (and the figure) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment). It is a process for performing the same process as (see 59).

Of the main processes (see FIG. 225) in the seventh embodiment, the processes S4101 to S4111 and S4114 to S4118 are the main processes (see FIG. 59) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively. The same processes as those of S4101 to S4111 and S4114 to S4118 are executed. Further, in the main process (see FIG. 225) in the seventh embodiment, the effect update process is executed after the process of S4111 is executed (S4181). This effect update process (S4181) is for performing a process for changing the content of the effect (already set variable display) currently being executed during the effect execution.

After executing the process of the effect update process (S4181), the command determination process 7 that performs the process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S4182). The details of this command determination process 7 will be described later with reference to FIG. 226.

Next, the process proceeds to S4183. In the process of S4183, the variable display setting process 7 is executed (S4183). In the variation display setting process 7 (S4183), a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. .. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process 7 (S4183) will be described later with reference to FIG. 231.

Then, after executing the variation display setting process 7 (S4183), the ball passage monitoring process is executed (S4184). The details of this ball passage monitoring process (S4184) will be described later with reference to FIG. 233.

Further, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the process of S4101 this time was executed (S4101), and if 1 msec or more has not elapsed (S4101: No). ), The process shifts to the process of S4182 without performing the processes of S4102 to S4111, S4181.

Next, the command determination process 7 (S4182) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 226. FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 7 (S4182). This command determination process 7 (S4182) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 225) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. do. Further, in this process, when the winning information command is received from the main control device 110, the third symbol display device 81 also determines to start the continuous advance notice effect.

In the command determination process 7 (S4182), first, the first command received from the main control unit 110 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and changed from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not a pattern command has been received (S12001). When the variation pattern command is received (S12001: Yes), the variation start flag 223fa of the symbol type corresponding to the received variation pattern command is set to ON (S12002), and the variation pattern type is set from the received variation pattern command. Is extracted (S12003), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process 7 (see FIG. 231) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command is not received (S12001: No), it is then determined whether or not the stop type command is received from the main control device 110 (S12004). Then, when the stop type command is received (S12004: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223fb of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S12005), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S12006), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process 7 (see FIG. 231) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S12004: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S12007). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S12007: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 ( The number of holdings N1) of the variation display in the special symbol is extracted, and this is stored in the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 (S12008). Further, in the process of S12008, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223d is set. After the processing of S12008 is completed, the process returns to the main processing.

Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize) or when a special symbol lottery is performed. Therefore, every time a start winning prize is detected, or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 is set by the processing of S12008 in the main control device 110. It can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d. Therefore, even if the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the starting prize is won. At the time of detection or lottery of a special symbol, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 may be corrected to match the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d of the main control device 110. can. When the process of S12008 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S12007, if the reserved ball number command has not been received (S12007: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S12009). When it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S12009: Yes), the winning information based on the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223b (S12010), and then the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, in the process of S12009, when it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S12009: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning-related command has been received (S12011), and the winning-related command is received. If it is determined that the command has been performed (S12011: Yes), the hit-related process 7 is executed (S12012), and this process is terminated. In this hit-related process 7 (S12012), the third symbol display device 81 is made to execute the effect display corresponding to the big hit game or the small hit game that is executed when the big hit or the small hit is won as a result of the lottery of the special symbol. This is to perform processing for the purpose, and processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 when a big hit or a small hit is won is executed.

Here, the contents of the hit-related process 7 (S12012) will be described with reference to FIG. 227. FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit-related process 7 in the seventh embodiment. When this hit-related process (S12012) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot start command has been received (S12101). When it is determined that the jackpot start command has been received (S12101: Yes), the jackpot start command for display is set (S12102), and this process ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 225) executed by the MPU 221 in the seventh embodiment. ), It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S12101: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S12103). When it is determined that the round number command has been received in the process of S12103 (S12103: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the number of rounds (S12104), and this process ends. In the seventh embodiment, since the information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted from the main control unit 110 as the number of rounds command, the number of rounds command for display is set based on the received number of rounds command. , In order to reduce the amount of command data transmitted from the main control unit 110, when the configuration is such that information for indicating that a new round has been started from the main control unit 110 is transmitted as a round update command, voice is used. When a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of the lamp control device 113, a round number storage counter for accumulating the number of received round update commands is provided, and the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the value of the round number storage counter. It may be configured to calculate the current number of rounds and set a display round number command.

In the process of S12103, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S12103: No), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot end command has been received (S12105). When it is determined that the jackpot end command has been received in the process of S12105 (S12105: Yes), the display jackpot end command is set (S12106), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S12105 that the big hit end command has not been received (S12105: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit start command has been received (S12107).

If it is determined in the process of S12107 that the small hit start command has been received (S12107: Yes), the small hit start process is executed (S12108), and this process ends. Further, the details of this small hit start process (S12108) will be described later with reference to FIG. 228.

Here, the contents of the small hit start process (S12108) will be described with reference to FIG. 228. FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit start process in the seventh embodiment. When this small hit start process (S12108) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the long variation flag 223fg provided in the RAM 223 is on (S12201), and it is determined that the long variation flag 223fg is on. In the case (S12201: Yes), the value of the delay passage state flag 223ff is read out (S12202). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the delayed passage state flag 223ff is "01" (S12203). In the process of S12203, when it is determined that the value of the delay passage state flag 223ff is "01" (S12203: Yes), a small hit start command for display indicating a small hit with a high V expectation is set (S12204). After that, the process returns to the hit-related process 7.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the length variation flag 223fg is not on in the processing of S12201 (S12201: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S12205. Further, even when it is determined in the process of S12203 that the value of the delay passage state flag 223ff is not "01" (S12203: No), the process proceeds to the process of S12205.

In the process of S12205, a display small hit start command indicating a normal small hit is set (S12205), and then the process returns to the hit-related process 7.

Returning to FIG. 227, the explanation will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S12107 that the small hit start command has not been received (S12107: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit end command has been received (S12109). In the process of S12109, if it is determined that the small hit end command has been received (S12109: Yes), a display small hit end command is set (S12110) in order to execute an effect suggesting the end of the small hit game. This process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S12109, when it is determined that the small hit end command has not been received (S12109: No), it is determined whether or not the V inlet passage command has been received (S12111). If it is determined that the V entrance passage command has been received in the processing of S12111 (S12111: Yes), the display V entrance passage command is set (S12112), and this processing is terminated. Further, in the process of S12111, when it is determined that the V entrance passage command has not been received (S12111: No), it is determined whether the V passage command has been received next (S12113).

In the process of S12113, when it is determined that the V passing command has been received (S12113: Yes), a display V effect command for showing an effect based on the ball entering the V switch 650e3 of the V winning device 650 is set (S12113: Yes). S12114), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S12113 that the V passage command has not been received (S12113: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Returning to FIG. 226, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S12011, if it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S12011: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop command has been received (S12013). When it is determined that the stop command has been received (S12013: Yes), the stop display of the third symbol is set (S12014), and then it is determined whether or not the long variation flag 223fg is on (S12015). If it is determined that the long variation flag 223fg is on (S12015: Yes), the long variation flag 223fg is set to off (S12016), and then the process returns to the main process. If it is determined in the process of S12015 that the length variation flag 223fg is not on (S12015: No), the process of S12016 is not executed and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop command has not been received in the process of S12013 (S12013: No), then it is determined whether or not the time saving effect-related command has been received (S12017). If it is determined that the time saving effect-related command has been received (S12017: Yes), the time saving effect-related process is executed (S12018), and then the process returns to the main process. The details of the time saving effect-related processing (S12018) will be described later with reference to FIG. 229. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving effect-related command has not been received in the process of S12017 (S12017: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S12019), and then the process returns to the main process.

Next, the contents of the time saving effect-related processing (S12018) will be described with reference to FIG. 229. FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving effect-related processing (S12018). The time saving effect-related process (S12018) is a process executed in the command determination process 7 (see FIG. 226) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment.

When the time saving effect-related processing (S12018) is executed, first, the gaming state stored in the game state storage area 223fe is read (S12301), and then it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state (S12302). ). If it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state (S12302: No), this processing is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the command determination processing 7 (S4182 in FIG. 226).

On the other hand, in the process of S12302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S12302: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the command per normal figure is received (S12303), and the normal symbol is used. If it is determined that the hit command has been received (S12303: Yes), the current normal figure hit type is analyzed based on the received normal figure hit command (S12304), and the time saving effect corresponding to the normal figure hit type is executed. The display time saving effect start command for this is set (S12305), the middle flag 223fi is set to ON (S12306), and then the process returns to the command determination process 7.

On the other hand, in the process of S12303, when it is determined that the command per normal figure has not been received (S12303: No), then it is determined whether or not the second ball entry command has been received (S12307). When it is determined that the second ball entry command has been received (S12307: Yes), the second ball entry flag 223fh is set to ON (S12308), and the display effect command for updating the time saving effect is set (S12309). After that, the process returns to the command determination process 7.

On the other hand, in the process of S12307, when it is determined that the second ball entry command has not been received (S12307: No), then it is determined whether or not the end command has been received (S12310). If it is determined that the normal map per end command has been received (S12310: Yes), the normal map per end process is executed (S12311), and then the process returns to the command determination process 7. If it is determined that the end command has not been received in the process of S12310 (S12310: No), the process returns to the command determination process 7 as it is. Further, the details of the end-time processing (S12311) per drawing will be described later with reference to FIG. 230.

Next, the contents of the end-time processing (S12311) per drawing will be described with reference to FIG. 230. FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing the contents of the end processing (S12311) per normal figure. The end-of-life processing (S12311) is a processing executed in the time saving effect-related processing (see FIG. 229) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment.

When the end-of-life processing (S12311) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the second entry flag 223fh is on (S12401). If it is determined that the second entry flag 223fh is on (S12401: Yes), the second entry flag 223fh is set to off (S12402), and the process proceeds to S12404. If it is determined that the second ball entry flag 223fh is not on (S12401: No), a display effect command for ending the time saving effect is set (S12403), and the process proceeds to S12404.

In the process of S12404, the middle flag 223fi is set to off (S12404), and then this process is terminated and the process returns to the time saving effect-related process (S12018 in FIG. 229).

Next, with reference to FIG. 231, the variation display setting process 7 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 231 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process 7 (S4183). This variation display setting process 7 (S4183) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 225) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment, and the variation effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81. Is generated and set as a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the variation display setting process 7 (S4183), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation start flag 223fa1 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5101). Then, when it is determined that the variation start flag fa1 in FIG. 1 is not on (that is, is off) (S5101: No), the variation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so that the variation pattern command is not received from S5107. Move to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag fa1 is on (S5101: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag fa1 is set to off (S5102), and then the display control device 114 is notified. A display variation pattern command is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S5181). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started. When the processing of S5181 is completed, the data in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S5182), and the process shifts to the processing of S5107.

In the process of S5107, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag fa2 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5107). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag fa2 is not on (that is, it is off) (S5107: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so that the fluctuation pattern command is not received from S5111. Move to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag fa2 is on (S5107: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag fa2 is set to off (S5108), and then the fluctuation display setting process 7 for the special figure 2 is set. Is executed (S5183). The details of the variation display setting process 7 (S5183) for the special figure 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. 232. When the processing of S5183 is completed, the data corresponding to the second special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S5110), and the process shifts to the processing of S5111.

In the process of S5111, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag fb1 or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag fb2 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5111). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag fa1 or the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag fa2 is not on (that is, is off) (S5111: No), the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. Since there is no state, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag fa1 or the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag fa2 is on (S5111: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag fa1 or the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag fa2 is set to off. Then, the display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command is set based on the stop type extracted from the command (S5113), and then this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 232, the variation display setting process 7 (S5183) for special figure 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 232 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process 7 (S5183) for the special figure 2. The variation display setting process 7 (S5183) for the special figure 2 is a process executed in the variation display setting process 7 (see FIG. 231) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment. be.

In the variation display setting process 7 (S5183) for the special figure 2, first, the game state stored in the game state storage area 223fe provided in the RAM 223 is read (S12501), and then the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol. It is determined whether or not it is (S12502). When it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S12502: No), the corresponding display variation pattern command is set (S12510), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S12502, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S12502: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a big hit (S12503). If it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S12503: Yes), a display variation pattern command corresponding to the big hit is set (S12504), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S12503, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a big hit (S12503: No), then it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a small hit (S12505). If it is determined that the lottery result is not a small hit (S12505: No), a variation pattern command indicating the end of the time saving effect is set (S12506), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S12505, when it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S12505: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the small hit is a long variation (S12507). When it is determined that the variation pattern of the small hit is a long variation (S12507: Yes), the long variation flag 223fg is set to ON (S12508), and the process proceeds to S12509. On the other hand, in the process of S12507, if it is determined that the variation pattern of the small hit is not a long variation (S12507: No), the process of S12508 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S12509.

In the process of S12509, a display variation pattern command corresponding to a small hit is set (S12509), and then this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 233, the ball passage monitoring process (S4184) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing this ball passage monitoring process (S4184). This ball passage monitoring process (S4184) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 225) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment, and the variation effect is produced in the third symbol display device 81. In order to execute the command, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

In the ball passage monitoring process (S4184), first, it is determined whether or not the delayed passage entry switch (not shown) is on (S12601). When it is determined that the delayed passage entry switch is on (S12601: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the middle flag 223fi provided in the RAM 223 is on (S12602). If it is determined that the middle flag 223fi is not on (that is, it is off) per normal figure (S12602: No), the process proceeds to S12611.

In the process of S12602, when it is determined that the middle flag 223fi is on (S12602: Yes), the value of the delayed passage state flag 223ff is read out (S12603), and then the value of the delayed passage state flag 223ff is ". It is determined whether or not it is "00" (S12604). When it is determined that the value of the delayed passage state flag 223ff is "00" (S12604: Yes), the value of the delayed passage state flag 223ff is set to "01" (S12605), and the process proceeds to S12610. If it is determined in the process of S12604 that the value of the delay passage state flag 223ff is not 00 (S12604: No), the process of S12605 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S12610.

On the other hand, in the process of S12601, if it is determined that the delayed passage entry switch is not on (that is, it is off) (S12601: No), then whether or not the delayed passage discharge switch (not shown) is on. (S12606). If it is determined that the delayed passage discharge switch is not on (that is, it is off) (S12606: No), this process is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the delayed passage discharge switch is on (S12606: Yes), the value of the delayed passage state flag 223ff is read (S12607), and then whether or not the value of the delayed passage state flag 223ff is "01". Is determined (S12608). It is determined that the value of the delayed passage state flag 223ff is "01" (S12608: Yes), the value of the delayed passage state flag 223ff is set to "02" (S12609), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S12608 that the value of the delayed passage state flag 223ff is not "01" (S12608: No), the process proceeds to the process of S12610. In the process of S12610, a value corresponding to the delay passage state flag 223ff is set (S12610), an error command is set (S12611), and then this process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a specific area 650V is provided in the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 opened during the small hit game, and the ball sets the specific area 650V during the small hit game. It is configured so that a big hit (so-called per 2 types) game is executed by passing through.

In addition, as a path for the ball to flow down toward the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 opened during the small hit game, the first flow path ta (see FIG. 196) in which the ball is difficult to pass through the specific region 650V. ) And a second flow path tb (see FIG. 196) in which the sphere easily passes through the specific region 650V. As a result, the player pays close attention to which flow path the ball flows down during the small hit game. Therefore, since the player can be interested in the movement of the ball flowing down on the game board 13, the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the ball is distributed to the above-mentioned first flow path ta or the second flow path tb by the opening / closing operation of the electric accessory 3640a, so that the operation of the electric accessory 3640a It is also possible to make the player interested in. Further, when the ball flows down the second flow path tb which easily passes through the specific region 650V, the ease of winning the ball in the V winning device 650 is configured to be different according to the fluctuation time of the special symbol. ing.

Further, the change time of the special symbol to be set is configured to be different depending on the set game state and the winning small hit type. With this configuration, when a small hit corresponding to a big hit that is given a time saving state after the big hit game is won, the game state (advantageous time saving) that makes it easier for the ball to pass through the specific area 650V and the big hit end. When a small hit corresponding to a big hit to which a time saving state is given later is won, a gaming state (unfavorable time saving) that makes it easy for the ball to pass through the specific area 650V can be set.

Then, in the present embodiment, by using the above-mentioned advantageous time saving and disadvantageous time saving configurations, once a big hit is won (first hit), at least three big hits including the first hit are executed. It is configured so that the gaming state favorable to the player continues. By making it possible to set a game state in which it is guaranteed that the jackpot game is executed a plurality of times in this way, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the ball is configured to win a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the ball goes to the second entrance 3640, which is an opportunity to execute the lottery of the second special symbol. The electric accessory 3640a is configured to operate so that the ball can be easily entered. Then, the electric accessory 3640a shifts to the closed state based on the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 3640a entering the second entry port 3640, and at that time, it flows down on the electric accessory 3640a. The ball is configured to be distributed to the first flow path ta and the second flow path tb according to the position (upstream side, downstream side) where the ball has flowed down.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the ball located on the downstream side of the ball flow path on the electric accessory 3640a is configured to be distributed to the second flow path tb which is advantageous to the player, and continuously. When the ball is launched, it is configured so that the ball can easily flow into the second flow path tb.

Therefore, in order to allow the ball to flow into the second flow path tb while the lottery for the second special symbol is being executed, it is necessary to continuously shoot the ball toward the game area of the game board 13. .. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an act of obtaining an advantageous result by firing the ball at a predetermined timing.

In the seventh embodiment, a ball flowing down the second flow path tb, that is, a ball distributed to a flow path advantageous to the player by the opening operation of the electric accessory 3640a, is directed toward the V winning device 650. Although it is configured to flow down, it may be configured so that a ball that has flowed down a flow path that is advantageous to the player can enter the general entry port 63. As a result, many prize balls can be provided to the player.

Further, a valve member that can be changed into a first state in which the ball can pass through the specific area 650V and a second state in which it is difficult to pass is provided in the V winning device 650, and the V winning is obtained when the valve member is in the first state. The variable time for winning the device 650 and the variable time for winning the V winning device 650 in the second state may be changed according to the set time saving state.

Further, instead of the V winning device 650, a V attacker that is opened during the jackpot game is provided, and a probabilistic state (high probability state of a special symbol) is given by the ball passing through a specific area in the V attacker. It may be applied to the pachinko machine 10.

<8th Embodiment>
Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 234 to 259. In the first embodiment described above, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (in parallel), and the game state is set. When the latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set, it is easy to execute the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol, and it is based on the lottery result of the second special symbol. It was configured to generate small hit games frequently.

In this way, when the latent state is set as the game state, that is, in the low probability state of the normal symbol, in order to frequently generate the small hit game in the lottery of the second special symbol, the low probability state of the normal symbol is also obtained. It was necessary to use a configuration in which the lottery of the second special symbol could be easily executed even in the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) in which is set. Further, in order to prevent the lottery of the second special symbol from being frequently executed in the normal state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol set in the normal state is long (for example, 10 minutes). It was necessary to set a fluctuation pattern.

In this way, if the second special symbol whose lottery is easily executed is configured to execute a long fluctuation time, the player mistakenly executes the lottery of the second special symbol. , The next special symbol lottery is not executed until the fluctuation pattern is completed, which hinders the game. Therefore, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, the first special symbol lottery (variation) and the first It was configured so that the lottery (variation) of 2 special symbols could be executed at the same time (in parallel).

On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, the execution trigger of the second special symbol is during the big hit game or during the small hit game executed in the low probability state (normal state, latent state) of the normal symbol. It is configured so that the ball can (easily) enter the second entry port 640. As a result, the lottery of the second special symbol can be prevented from being executed unless the winning game (big hit game, small hit game) is executed. Therefore, as in the first embodiment described above, the lottery of the first special symbol is performed. Even if you do not use a configuration that executes (variation) and lottery (variation) of the second special symbol at the same time (in parallel), a small hit game based on the lottery of the second special symbol only during the latent state. Can be generated frequently. Therefore, the control process of the gaming machine can be simplified.

Furthermore, depending on the type of winning (big hit, small hit), it is possible to set a hit type in which the ball easily enters the second entry port 640 and a hit type in which it is difficult to enter. If you win a hit (big hit, small hit), not only the size of the privilege (number of prize balls) that can be obtained during the winning game, but also the ball enters the second entrance 640 during the winning game. It is possible to make the player interested in whether or not.

In addition, in the eighth embodiment, the ball enters the second entrance 640 depending on whether the player wins in the lottery of the first special symbol or wins in the lottery of the second special symbol. It is configured so that the ratio of easy-to-use hit types is set differently. Specifically, it is easier to set the hit type in which the ball is more likely to enter the second entrance 640 when the second special symbol is won than when the first special symbol is won. It is composed.

With this configuration, once the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) has been transferred to a state in which the lottery can be executed, the lottery for the special figure 2 can be continued and easily executed. Even though the advantageous game mode advantageous to the player (mode in which the lottery of Special Figure 2 can be executed) is set, the advantageous game mode is immediately terminated, which causes discomfort to the player. Can be suppressed.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to have a higher probability of winning (big hit, small hit) than the lottery of the first special symbol. Specifically, in the lottery of the first special symbol, only the big hit (1/400 at low probability) is set without winning the small hit, whereas in the lottery of the second special symbol, the big hit is won. The probability of (1/400 at low probability) is the same as the above-mentioned first special symbol, but it is set to win a small hit (300/400). As described above, in the eighth embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol is set so that the probability of winning the small hit is higher in the lottery of the second special symbol than in the lottery of the first special symbol. The lottery of the second special symbol is configured so that it is easier to win a win (big hit, small hit) than.

As a result, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640, it is possible to win a hit (big hit, small hit) with a high probability. The winning game based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be frequently executed in a short period of time.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, it is configured so that the winning game in which the ball is easily entered into the second entrance 640 is executed with a higher probability when the small hit is won than when the big hit is won. is doing. As a result, when a small hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, it is possible to easily execute the lottery of the second special symbol again after the winning game is completed.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the right to execute the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2 hold) is configured to be able to store a plurality (4 pieces) (hold memory) according to the winning type. Therefore, the opening operation pattern of the winning game is defined so that the number of cards that can be held and stored during one winning game is different.

With such a configuration, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game in order to secure more reserved memory by one hit game. Here, in the eighth embodiment, the second opening / closing door 3650f attached to the second attacker 3650, which is opened in the hit game, is opened (a state in which the ball can be guided to the second specific winning opening 3650a). A flow path in which a part of the ball spilled from the second opening / closing door 3650f can enter the second entry port 640 when the ball is changed to the closed state (the state in which the ball cannot be guided to the second specific winning opening 3650a). It is configured to pass through. In this way, the ball that could not enter the second attacker 3650, which is opened during the hit game, can enter the second entry port 640, so that the ball can enter the second attacker 3650 during the hit game. 2 The player can be made to pay close attention to the movement of the ball to be entered into the specific winning opening 3650a and the movement of the ball to be entered into the second entry opening 640.

Here, the configuration of the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 234. FIG. 234 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 234, the eighth embodiment is different from the configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above in that the structure of the right side region of the game board 13 is significantly different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 234, a first attacker (variable winning device) 650a is provided above the right side region of the game board 13, and a second attacker 3650 is provided at a substantially central position in the right side region. A point, a point where a guide passage 3660 is provided below the second attacker 3650, and a point where a second entry port 640 with an electric accessory 640a is provided at a position where the outlet of the guide passage 3660 faces. , Is very different. Other configurations are the same as those of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) of the first embodiment described above, and the same configurations are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 234, a ball flow during a right-handed game in the gaming machine of the present embodiment will be briefly described. During normal times (except during the game when the second attacker 3650 is opened), the ball launched toward the right area of the game board 13 by the right-handed game has the open / close door 3650f in the closed state (buried state). It passes through and flows down to enter the general entrance 63 while passing through the game area on the right side of the guidance passage 3660.

The general entrance 63 (general entrance 63 arranged on the right side of the second entrance 640) is provided with one prize ball as a privilege given when the ball enters. There is. Therefore, even if the right-handed game is performed in the normal state, the number of balls does not increase.

On the other hand, during the hit game in which the second attacker 3650 is opened, the opening / closing door 3650f is in an open state (protruding state), that is, a state in which a ball can flow down on the opening / closing door 3650f toward the second specific winning opening 3650a. In the case of, the ball fired by the right-handed game flows down on the opening / closing door 3650f and wins a prize in the second specific winning opening 3650a. Then, the closing condition of the second attacker 3650 (the elapse of the predetermined opening period or the number of balls winning the second specific winning opening 3650a reaches the predetermined upper limit winning number) is satisfied, and the opening / closing door 3650f is satisfied. Is configured to flow into the guide passage 3660 when the ball flowing down the downstream side of the opening / closing door 3650f is changed to the closed state (buried state).

That is, in the eighth embodiment, even if the right-handed game is performed in the normal time (except during the hit game in which the second attacker 3650 is opened), the ball flow path capable of entering the second ball entry port 640. It is configured so that the sphere does not flow down in the guide passage 3660 in which the ball is formed. With this configuration, unless the second attacker 3650 is opened by the winning game, the ball that has flowed down in the guidance passage 3660 will not enter the second entrance 640, so that the second special symbol is drawn. Can be limited in time.

Further, a through gate 67 is arranged between the opening / closing door 3650f and the inlet of the guide passage 3660 so that the ball flowing into the guide passage 3660 passes through the through gate 67 and then flows into the guide passage 3660. It is configured in. The guide passage 3660 is configured so that the period required for the sphere to flow down the guide passage is about 2.5 seconds. In this way, the ball flowing down the flow path that can enter the second entry port 640 is configured to always pass through the through gate 67, and reaches the second entry port 640 from the through gate 67. By configuring the time to be constant (about 2.5 seconds), whether the ball passing through the guidance passage 3660 enters the second entrance 640 according to the set fluctuation time of the normal symbol. Whether or not it can be easily changed.

Here, in the eighth embodiment, the fluctuation time of the set normal symbol is different depending on the set gaming state. Specifically, a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is set in the low probability state (normal state, latent state) of the normal symbol, and a fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds is set in the high probability state (time saving state, probability variation state) of the normal symbol. Is configured to be set. As a result, when the ball passes through the guidance passage 3660 when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the ball easily enters the second entry port 640, and the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. When the ball passes through the guidance passage 3660 when it is set, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the second entry port 640.

Next, with reference to FIG. 235, the configuration of the opening / closing door 3650f of the second attacker 3650 according to the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 235 (a) is a plan view schematically showing the opening / closing door 3650f in the open state (protruding state), and FIG. 235 (b) shows the opening / closing in the closed state (buried state). It is a top view which shows the door 3650f schematically. As shown in FIG. 235 (a), the opening / closing door 3650f of the present embodiment is formed from the upper right upper surface 3650y1 of the opening / closing door 3650f to the upper surface 3650f1 of the opening / closing door 3650f along the inclination of the opening / closing door 3650f (see FIG. 234). It is configured to flow out toward the second specific winning opening 3650a.

A first delay member 3650fa, a second delay member 3650fb, and a third delay member 3650fc are provided so that the ball meanders on the upper surface 3650f1 of the opening / closing door 3650f, and the flow period during which the ball flows down the opening / closing door 3650f is 1. It is configured to be .2 seconds. This flow period (1.2 seconds) is shorter than the period (1.5 seconds) for maintaining the open state when the second attacker 3650 is opened by the hit game (big hit B, big hit C, small hit). It is configured to be. With this configuration, the ball can be won in the second specific winning opening 3650a in the hit game in which the second attacker 3650 is opened.

In this embodiment, when the hit game in which the second attacker 3650 is opened is executed, the opening operation scenario is set so that the ball can win the second specific winning opening 3650a in all the hit games. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, as an opening operation scenario set during a winning game, an opening operation scenario in which a ball easily wins a prize in the second specific winning opening 3650a and an opening operation scenario in which the ball flows into the guidance passage 3660. It may be configured to set an easy open operation scenario.

In this case, for example, as an opening operation scenario of the second attacker 3650, a period (for example, 0. It is preferable to specify the opening operation scenario so that 5 seconds) is a period during which the opening / closing door 3650f is maintained in the open state when the opening operation is performed. When the opening operation scenario defined in this way is set, it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the second specific winning opening 3650a during the winning game, and the ball flowing down the upper surface 3650f1 of the opening / closing door 3650f flows into the guidance passage 3660. It becomes easier to do.

Thereby, for example, when the upper limit number of balls to win the second specific winning opening 3650a and the opening upper limit period of the opening / closing door 3650f are set as the end condition of the winning game, the second specific winning opening 3650a Since the opening operation that makes it difficult for the ball to win a prize is executed, the winning game can be continued for a long period of time. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of balls flowing into the guide passage 3660 during one hit game, and it is possible to acquire more special figure 2 hold memory.

Next, when the closing condition of the opening / closing door 3650f is satisfied, the state shown in FIG. 235 (a) is changed to the closed state (buried state) shown in FIG. 235 (b). In this state, the ball located at the downstream position ZD passes through the through gate 67, and the ball located at the upstream position ZC also passes through the right side region of the guide passage 3660.

As described above, in the eighth embodiment, the time for the upper surface sphere of the opening / closing door 3650f to flow down is 1.2 seconds (upstream position ZC is 0.5 seconds, downstream position ZD is 0.7 seconds). The opening / closing door 3650f is configured to be opened for 1.5 seconds in one small hit game. As a result, when the ball that has flowed down first wins the second attacker 3650 and is detected by the detection switch 3650Z, the next ball can be positioned at the downstream position ZD. Therefore, when the small hit game is executed, the ball can be reliably passed through the guidance passage 3660.

In addition, instead of the configuration of this embodiment, the following configuration may be used. That is, the position of the detection switch 3650Z for detecting the ball winning in the second attacker 3650 is positioned on the back side of the second attacker 3650 (the position of the modified example of FIG. 235), and from the opening of the second attacker 3650 to the detection switch 3650Z. The distance ZE may be configured so that it takes 0.3 seconds for the ball to pass. With this configuration, even if the distance of the opening / closing door 3650f is shortened, the ball that flows down next can be reliably positioned at the downstream position ZD.

Furthermore, a plurality of opening patterns of the opening / closing door 3650f that are effective in the small hit game are prepared, and a small hit game in which the opening period during which the ball can pass through the through gate 67 is set is possible without winning the second attacker 3650. It may be configured in. That is, it is possible to execute the game for making the second attacker 3650 win the ball and the game for acquiring the reserved memory of the special figure 2 by using the small hit game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 236 and 237, the ball flow in the right region of the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 236 is a schematic diagram showing the ball flow when the second attacker 3650 is in the open state (protruding state), and FIG. 237 is a sphere when the second attacker 3650 is in the closed state (buried state). It is a schematic diagram which showed the flow.

As shown in FIG. 236, when the opening / closing door 3650f is in the open state (protruding state), all the balls launched by the right-handed game are received by the opening / closing door 3650f (the right area of the game board 13). The opening / closing door 3650f is arranged so as to shield the door. With this configuration, when the hit game in which the second attacker 3650 is opened is executed, the ball can be easily won in the second specific winning opening 3650a simply by performing the right-handed game.

When the opening / closing door 3650f is located in the open state (protruding state), the opening / closing door 3650f shields the inflow port of the guide passage 3660 so that the ball cannot flow into the guide passage 3660 (difficult). It is configured in. That is, in the eighth embodiment, the opening / closing door 3650f, which is opened by the hit game, has a function for facilitating the winning of the ball into the second specific winning opening 3650a, and regulates the flow of the ball into the guidance passage 3660. It is used as a means to have a function for.

Next, when the opening / closing door 3650f is in the closed state (buried state), the ball launched into the right-handed area in the right-handed game flows down the area on the right side of the guidance passage 3660 (see the arrow in FIG. 237). .. Here, in the eighth embodiment, the ball that has flowed down the right-handed area by the right-handed game executed when the opening / closing door 3650f is in the closed state (buried state) cannot flow into the guide passage 3660 (difficulty). (To be).

Specifically, in the right side area of the game board 13, the nail K1 planted above the opening / closing door 3650f is planted below the opening / closing door 3650f to form the inflow port of the guide passage 3660. It is configured to be located on the right side (right side from the viewpoint of FIG. 237) by a distance Kz (about 10 mm) from the nail K2. Then, the distance between the nail K1 and the nail K2 in the height direction is configured to be one sphere (about 15 mm). With this configuration, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball that has flowed down the right side of the nail K1 due to the right-handed game from flowing into the inlet of the guide passage 3660 formed on the left side of the nail K2.

Further, regarding the arrangement position of the second specific winning opening 3650a in which the ball flowing down to the lower end of the opening / closing door 3650f can win a prize, the distance in the height direction is shorter than the distance in the width direction with the nail K1. Therefore, when the opening / closing door 3650f is in the closed state (buried state), the ball does not win in the second specific winning opening 3650a. In this embodiment, the opening operation of the opening / closing door 3650f is configured to change the state in which the ball can win the second specific winning opening 3650a and the state in which the ball cannot win (difficult). A configuration other than the above may be used. For example, a variable member that can be changed between an open position for opening the opening of the second specific winning opening 3650a and a closing position for closing the opening is provided with the second specific winning opening 3650a and the opening / closing door 3650f. The variable member may be variably controlled so as to be provided between the lower end portion of the flow and the variable member so as to be variable in synchronization with the opening operation of the opening / closing door 3650f.

In this case, for example, when the opening / closing door 3650f is in the closed state (buried state), that is, when the ball does not win the second specific winning opening 3650a, the variable member is variable so as to be located in the closed position. Controlled so that the variable portion is located in the open position when the opening / closing door 3650f is in the open state (protruding state), that is, in the state where the ball is allowed to win in the second specific winning opening 3650a. Variable control is good. As a result, it is possible to more reliably prevent a situation in which the ball wins the second specific winning opening 3650a at an unintended timing.

Further, when the configuration of the above-mentioned example is used, it is preferable to use one drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) to drive the variable member and the open / close door 3650f. As a result, the two members can be easily driven with regularity. Further, it is preferable to delay the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing door 3650f by a grace period in consideration of the flow time of the ball so that the variable member can be changed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a ball that has flowed down to the downstream end of the opening / closing door 3650f from being unable to win a prize in the second specific winning opening 3650a due to the variable operation of the variable member.

Next, the ball flow when the opening / closing door 3650f is changed to the closed state (buried state) while the ball is flowing down the upper surface 3650f1 (see FIG. 235 (a)) of the opening / closing door 3650f will be described with reference to FIG. 237. do. As shown in FIG. 237, a nail K2 is planted below the opening / closing door 3650f and near the position of the downstream side 1/3 of the opening / closing door 3650f, and the flow differs between the right side and the left side of the nail K2. The road is formed. Therefore, the ball flowing down the range of the upstream side 2/3 of the opening / closing door 3650f flows down the area on the right side of the guide passage 3660 when the opening / closing door 3650f is changed to the closed state (buried state). On the other hand, the ball flowing down the range of the downstream side 1/3 of the opening / closing door 3650f passes through the through gate 67 when the opening / closing door 3650f is changed to the closed state (buried state), and the guide passage 3660. Inflow to.

The guide passage 3660 used in the eighth embodiment is formed in a meandering shape in order to lengthen the time (flow time) until the ball reaches the second entry port 640, and the inflow of the guide passage 3660. It is configured so that the time required for the ball to flow down the flow path ty from the position 3661a to the discharge position 3661b is about 2.5 seconds.

Then, when the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 and has flowed down the flow path ty reaches the second entry port 640, if the electric accessory 640a is open, the ball enters the second entry port 640 and is electrically operated. If the accessory 640a is closed, the ball does not enter the second entry port 640 and flows down toward the out opening 66.

In the present embodiment, the first attacker (variable winning device) 650a is provided above the right side region, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first attacker (variable winning device) 650a may be provided below the guidance passage 3660. As a result, the balls flowing down the plurality of flow paths can enter the first attacker (variable winning device) 650a at the same timing.

Further, a delay member for delaying the flow velocity of the ball may be provided on the lower surface of the ball flow of the guide passage 3660 used in the present embodiment.

<Regarding the content of the production in the eighth embodiment>
Next, the characteristic effects performed in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 238 to 241. In the eighth embodiment, the right of the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2 hold memory) is easily acquired during the period in which the hit game (big hit game, small hit game) is being executed. Therefore, the lottery for the second special symbol is configured so that it is easier to win a small hit than the lottery for the first special symbol. That is, in the state where the normal state is set, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed by the left-handed game, the jackpot is won, and when the jackpot game is started, the right-handed game is executed and the game is released in the jackpot game. A game in which the attacker to be operated (1st attacker 650a, 2nd attacker 3650) is made to win a ball to obtain a prize ball (privilege), and at the same time, the right to draw the second special symbol (special figure 2 hold memory) is acquired. Is done.

Then, when the special figure 2 hold memory is acquired during the winning game, the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed after the winning game is completed, and the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a big hit or a small hit. If so, the winning game is executed again. In the eighth embodiment, since the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to win a small hit with a high probability, once the lottery of the special figure 2 is executed, the lottery of the special figure 2 is repeatedly executed. It becomes a game state that is easy to play.

Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, an effect is executed to suggest to the player whether or not the lottery of the special figure 2 is executed (whether or not the lottery of the special figure 2 is shifted to a feasible state). It is configured to be done. As a result, the player can play the game while checking the content of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the hit game (the hit action in which the second attacker 3650 is opened) is executed, the special figure 2 hold memory can be acquired. Therefore, first, FIG. 238. As shown in (a), the effect of urging the acquisition of the special figure 2 hold memory is executed during the execution of the hit game (the hit operation in which the second attacker 3650 is opened). FIG. 238 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the jackpot game when the second attacker 3650 wins the jackpot C, which is the jackpot that is opened.

As shown in FIG. 238 (a), when the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot C is started, in order to guide the player to perform the right-handed game during the jackpot game, the guidance display area Dm3 is set to " Right-handed "is displayed. Then, in the main display area Dm, the effect that the character 811 collects the key 871 is executed. The key 871 is set in an effect mode so that the number corresponding to the number of reserved storages of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is collected, and the character 811 collects a large number of keys 871. This is to suggest (notify) to the player that the number of reserved memories in FIG. 2 is large.

Then, in the main display area Dm, a comment "Collect the treasure key" for explaining the game nature of the production is displayed. The details will be described later, but in the present embodiment, the key for acquiring the reserved memory of the special figure 2 during the big hit game (collecting the key 871) and collecting the lottery result of the special figure 2 executed after the big hit game is completed. The treasure box 873 (see FIG. 239) is opened by using 871, and the effect of notifying the player of the contents of the treasure box 873 is executed.

Further, in the lower position of the main display area Dm, an acquisition display area Dm12a in which a value related to the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game is additionally displayed and a round number display area Dm12b indicating the current number of round games are formed. .. In the example shown in FIG. 238 (a), since the jackpot game has just started, "0000" is displayed in the acquisition display area Dm12a, and the prize ball is not acquired during the jackpot game. Is shown. Then, "Round 1" is displayed in the round number display area Dm12b.

Further, in the production during the jackpot game, the acquired display areas Dm10a to Dm10d for notifying the player of the number of collected keys 871 are formed at the right position of the main display area Dm. In the effect executed in the present embodiment, one key 871 is collected for each acquisition of the reserved memory of the special figure 2, so that the acquired display areas Dm10a to Dm10d have a maximum. It is configured so that four keys 871 are displayed. The acquired display areas Dm10a to Dm10d are also display areas for showing the number of reserved balls in FIG.

Further, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "Continue to hit right" for showing the game content to the player is also displayed, and a second guidance display area formed below the guidance display area Dm3 is displayed. A diagram schematically showing the configuration near the second entrance 640 is displayed on the Dm11. As described above, in the present embodiment, since it is configured so that it is easier to acquire the hold memory of the special figure 2 by continuously firing the ball, other effects are performed so as not to provide a disadvantageous game to the player. A comment for showing the game content is displayed in a display mode (display mode in which the size of characters is increased) that is emphasized more than the display mode used in. As described above, by using the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds to explain in detail the game content aimed at during the jackpot game, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Then, after the display of FIG. 238 (a) is executed, the jackpot game is executed, and when the reserved memory of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is acquired, the effect content shown in FIG. 238 (b) is obtained. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 238 (b) is a schematic diagram showing a part of the effect content displayed when the ball enters the second entrance 640 during the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 238 (b), when a ball enters the second entrance 640 during the jackpot game, the ball enters the second entrance 640 in the main display area Dm (special feature). An effect indicating that the key 871 has been collected is executed as an effect for notifying the player (that the reserved memory of FIG. 2 has been acquired), and a comment of "Congratulations" is displayed.

Further, in the acquired display area Dm10a, the key 871 is displayed to indicate that one key 871 has been acquired. Further, in the second guide display area Dm11, a specific effect is displayed at a position imitating the second entry port 640 in order to visually notify the player that the ball has entered. Then, in the acquisition display area Dm12a, "00085" is displayed as the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game, and in the round number display area Dm12b, "2" indicating that the current is the second round is displayed. There is.

Then, when the jackpot game is completed, the screen shown in FIG. 239 (a) is displayed. FIG. 239 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed during the ending period of the jackpot game. During this ending period, the notification mode (display mode 872 indicating that two keys have been collected) for notifying the player of the total number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 acquired during the current jackpot game is the main display. In addition to being displayed in the area Dm, a comment of "continue right-handed" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds to indicate that the right-handed game is continued even after the jackpot game is completed.

Further, in order to allow the player to continuously perform the right-handed game even after the jackpot game is completed, as a display mode of the guide display area Dm3, a display mode of the guide display area Dm3 during the jackpot game (FIG. 238 (a). ) More emphasized display mode is set. As a result, it is possible to reliably notify the player that the right-handed game must be continued even after the jackpot game is completed.

After that, when the jackpot game ends and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed, the key 871 collected during the jackpot game is used as shown in FIG. 239 (b). The effect of opening the treasure chest 873 is executed. FIG. 239 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect executed when the special figure 2 variation is executed after the jackpot game is completed.

Since FIG. 239 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed, the fluctuation display indicating that the second special symbol (special figure 2) is being displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2. The aspect is displayed. Then, an effect using one of the two keys 871 (holding special figure 2) collected during the jackpot game is executed. Therefore, the number of keys 871 displayed in the acquired display areas Dm10a to Dm10d is reduced from two at the end of the jackpot to one.

In addition, while the continuous production is being executed from the big hit game, the acquisition display area Dm12a is always displayed, and when the small hit is won by the special figure 2 lottery, the second attacker 3650 is acquired by winning the ball. Information on the number of prize balls won is also displayed in addition. As a result, the number of balls acquired during the period (advantageous period) in which the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be executed can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, the round number display area Dm12b is also continuously displayed in the same manner as the acquisition display area Dm12a described above, and the characters “round extra” are displayed while the game based on the variation in FIG. 2 is being performed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the advantageous state is set to be extended even after the jackpot game is completed.

In the present embodiment, the character "Round Extra" is displayed for the game period in which the special figure 2 variation can be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the special figure 2 variation can be displayed. A totaling means is provided to add up the number of prize balls acquired during the feasible game period, and the total number of prize balls obtained by the totaling means is the prize balls that can be obtained in one round game executed during the jackpot game. When it is determined that the number has been reached, the number of rounds displayed during the big hit game may be added by 1, or the small hit won during the game period in which the special figure 2 fluctuation can be executed. A small hit number measuring means for measuring the number of times is provided, and when the number of small hits measured by the small hit number measuring means reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), the number of rounds displayed during the big hit game. May be configured to add 1 to.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the jackpot game is being executed for an extended period of time. Further, in this case, it is preferable to configure the key 871 to perform the effect of opening the treasure box 873 (see FIG. 239 (b)) even while the jackpot game is being executed. As a result, it becomes difficult to determine whether or not the current jackpot game is in progress from the executed effect, so that it is possible to prevent the player from easily predicting the previous game.

If a small hit is won while the effect shown in FIG. 239 (b) is being executed, the treasure box 873 is opened and the contents of the treasure box 873 are exposed as shown in FIG. 240. FIG. 240 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect content displayed when a small hit is won when the normal state is set as the game state.

In the present embodiment, when the low probability state (normal state, latent state) of the normal symbol is set as compared with the case where the high probability state (probability change state, time saving state) of the normal symbol is set as the game state. Is configured so that it is easier to acquire the special figure 2 hold memory during the small hit game. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 240 (a), since the small hit is won in the state where the normal state is set, it is shown that the small hit game in which the special figure 2 hold memory can be acquired is executed. "V" is displayed as a display mode of the contents of the treasure box 873.

In addition to "V", there are multiple display modes indicating the contents of the treasure box 873. For example, if the lottery result of special figure 2 is out of order, "x" is displayed, and the lottery result of special figure 2 is reserved for special figure 2. If it is a small hit that is difficult to acquire memory, a display mode imitating "?" Is set. In addition, a pre-discrimination process for preliminarily discriminating the winning information of the second special symbol stored on hold is executed, and the discrimination result of the pre-discrimination process is a big hit or a player in the hold information stored on hold. If it is a determination result indicating that there is a small hit that is advantageous to Using the display mode showing the lottery result of the special figure 2, the display mode suggesting that the big hit or the small hit that is advantageous to the player is included in the hold information stored in the hold is set. It may be configured.

Here, if a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player as a result of the variation in Special Figure 2, that is, a jackpot in which a high probability state (for example, a time saving state) of a normal symbol is set after the jackpot game is completed, FIG. 240 As shown in (b), a display mode imitating a "skull" is set as a display mode showing the contents of the treasure box 873.

Further, even if it is configured to change the display mode of the key 871 and the display mode of the treasure box 873 based on the lottery result of the special figure 2 executed this time and the preliminary determination result for the hold information stored on hold. At best, for example, as shown in FIG. 241 (a), a display mode (a rusted key and a tattered treasure chest) suggesting that the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order may be displayed. As a result, the player can predict the lottery result of this special symbol before opening the treasure box 873, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

After each of the effects shown in FIGS. 238 (a) to 241 (a) described above is repeatedly executed, when the key 871 disappears (when the reserved memory of the special figure 2 disappears), the advantageous period advantageous to the player ends. Therefore, the ending screen shown in FIG. 241 (b) is displayed. On this ending screen, a value indicating the number of prize balls acquired during this advantageous period (a period in which the jackpot game period and the special figure 2 variable period are fused) (value displayed in the acquisition display area Dm12a) and a small hit The number of times you have won is displayed. Then, the display mode of the guidance display area Dm3 for guiding the player to return the game method to the left-handed game is variably displayed in "left-handed", and "return to left-handed" in the sub-display area Ds. Display the comment.

In this embodiment, the display mode of the guidance display area Dm3 is changed so that the game method is switched from the right-handed game to the left-handed game at the timing when the reserved memory of the special figure 2 disappears, not at the transition timing of the game state. ing. That is, in the state where the time saving state is set as the game state, if there is a special figure 2 hold, the right-handed game is guided, and if there is no special figure 2 hold, the left-handed game is guided. ing. As a result, the player can play an appropriate game without playing a disadvantageous game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 242, the flow of transition of each gaming state in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 242 is a transition diagram showing the flow of transition of each gaming state in the seventh embodiment. In the seventh embodiment, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 244, there are five types of jackpots (big hits A to E) set when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and the second It has three types of jackpots (big hits F to H) that are set when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery.

Then, the jackpot type set at the time of winning the jackpot, the gaming state set at the time of winning the jackpot, and the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game are configured to be different. With such a configuration, it is possible to change each game state in a complicated manner in the game executed by the pachinko machine 10, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In addition, the quasi-advantageous gaming state is set by providing a gaming state (quasi-advantageous gaming state) that is easy to shift to the advantageous gaming state (latent probability state) that is most advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is difficult to shift to. If this is the case, the player can be made to continue playing the game, so that the operation of the game can be enhanced.

As shown in FIG. 242, at the time when the game is started by the pachinko machine 10, the game of drawing the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed in a state where the normal state is set as the game state. Then, when the jackpot of Special Figure 1 is won, the probability change state is set with a probability of 65% (big hit A, B win), the time saving state is set with a probability of 25% (big hit E win), and the probability of 10%. The normal state is set (big hit C, D winning).

If the jackpot C is won (5%), the second attacker 3650 operates in a part of the jackpot game, so that it is possible to acquire the hold memory of the special figure 2 during the jackpot game. ..

Therefore, among the cases where the jackpot whose normal state is set after the jackpot game is won, the jackpot D (5%) is executed again by the game in which the lottery of the special figure 1 is performed, and the jackpot C (5%) is the jackpot C (5%). The game of drawing the lottery of the special figure 2 is executed. Then, the special figure 2 wins a small hit with a probability of about 75%, and in the small hit game executed in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol, the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is stored during the small hit game. Since it is configured so that it can be acquired, when the lottery of the special figure 2 is executed in the normal state, the special figure 2 game can be continuously executed as long as the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is not extinguished. Become.

If the normal state is set as the game state and the jackpot is won in the lottery of Special Figure 2 to be executed, the probability change state is set with a 30% probability (big hit F win) and the probability is 35%. The latent state is set (big hit G win), and the time saving state is set with a 35% probability (big hit H win).

Next, when the probability change state is set, since the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is assumed that the small hit is won in the lottery of special figure 2 executed based on the hold storage of special figure 2. However, it is configured so that the new reserved memory of Special Figure 2 cannot be acquired (difficult) during the small hit game. Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, the probability variation state is a game state that is more advantageous than the time saving state because the jackpot winning probability of the special symbol is high, but the state having the hold memory of the special figure 2 is special. Even if a small hit is won in the lottery of FIG. 2, since the new reserved memory of the special figure 2 cannot be acquired, the gaming state is disadvantageous to the player.

In the state where the probability change state is set, if the jackpot is won in the lottery shown in Special Figure 1, the probability change state is set again with a 35% probability (big hit A win), and the latent probability state is set with a 30% probability (the probability of winning the jackpot A). Big hit B wins), a normal state is set with a 10% probability (big hits C and D wins), and a time saving state is set with a 25% probability (big hit E wins). Then, if the jackpot is won in the lottery of Special Figure 2, the probability change state is set again with a probability of 30% (big hit F win), the latent probability state is set with a probability of 35% (big hit G win), and 35%. The time saving state is set with probability (big hit H winning).

Next, when the latent probability state is set, since the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the small hit is won in the lottery of special figure 2 executed based on the hold storage of special figure 2. In this case, it is configured so that a new reserved memory of special figure 2 can be acquired during the small hit game. Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, the latent probability state is a state in which the probability of winning a big hit of a special symbol is high and the memory of holding the special figure 2 is held, and the small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery. Since the new reserved memory of Special Figure 2 can be acquired, the gaming state is most advantageous to the player.

If you win a big hit in the lottery shown in Special Figure 1 while the latent state is set, the latent state is set again with a probability of 65% (big hits A and B won), and the normal state is set with a probability of 10%. It is set (big hit C, D wins), and the time saving state is set with a 25% probability (big hit E wins). Then, when a big hit is won in the lottery of Special Figure 2, a probability change state is set with a probability of 65% (big hit F, G win), a latent state is set with a probability of 35% (big hit G win), and 35%. The time saving state is set with the probability of (big hit H winning).

Finally, when the time saving state is set, since the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is assumed that the small hit is won in the lottery of special figure 2 executed based on the hold storage of special figure 2. However, it is configured so that the new reserved memory of Special Figure 2 cannot be acquired (difficult) during the small hit game. Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, in the time saving state, the probability of winning the big hit of the special symbol is low, and in the state of having the hold memory of the special figure 2, even if the small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, it is new. Since the reserved memory of the special figure 2 cannot be acquired, the gaming state is most disadvantageous to the player.

If the jackpot is won in the lottery shown in Special Figure 1 in the state where the time saving state is set, the probability change state is set with a probability of 65% (big hit A and B wins), and the normal state is set with a probability of 10% (the jackpot A and B wins). (Big hit C, D win), the time saving state is set again with a 25% probability (Big hit E win). Then, if a jackpot is won in the lottery of Special Figure 2, a probability change state is set with a probability of 30% (big hit F win), a latent state is set with a probability of 35% (big hit G win), and a probability of 35%. The time saving state is set again with (Big hit H winning).

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the state where there is no hold memory of the special figure 2, the ball cannot be newly entered into the second entrance 640 regardless of the game state. ing. Further, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is configured so as not to change between the high-probability state and the low-probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, in the state where there is no hold memory of the special figure 2, even if the state of the normal symbol is changed, the advantage to the player does not change.

That is, in the state where the fluctuation (lottery) of the special symbol 1 is executed, the low probability state (normal state, time saving state) of the special symbol has the same degree of advantage, and the high probability state (probability variation state, latent state) of the special symbol. (Probability state) is a more advantageous gaming state than the low probability state of the special symbol because the jackpot probability of the special symbol is high.

Further, in the state where the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is present, the new reserved memory of the special figure 2 cannot be acquired in the high probability state of the normal symbol, so that the high probability state of the normal symbol (probability change state, time saving state). The low-probability state (normal state, latent state) of the normal symbol is more advantageous to the player than the normal symbol. Therefore, the most advantageous gaming state for the player is the latent state, and the most unfavorable gaming state is the time saving state.

Further, when the ratio of shifting to the most advantageous latent state for the player when the jackpot is won is explained, the ratio of the latent state set based on the lottery of Special Figure 1 is the most probable state. High (30%). Therefore, the probabilistic state becomes a quasi-advantageous gaming state in which the most advantageous advantageous gaming state (latent probability state) is likely to shift.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the eighth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 243 to 250. FIG. 243 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 243 (a), the ROM 202 of the eighth embodiment has a first random number 8 table 202ga, a first type selection 8 table 202gb, a second random number 8 table 202gc, and a variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd. , Has an operation scenario 8 table 202ge. It should be noted that the configuration (table) having the same name as the electrical configuration used in any of the above-described embodiments (the same name except for "8" attached to make it identifiable that it was used in the eighth embodiment). ) Is the same as each of the above-described embodiments in terms of its use, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 243 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 243 (a), the ROM 202 of the eighth embodiment has a first random number 8 table 202ga, a first type selection 8 table 202gb, a second random number 8 table 202gc, and a variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd. , Has an operation scenario 8 table 202ge. It should be noted that the configuration (table) having the same name as the electrical configuration used in any of the above-described embodiments (the same name except for "8" attached to make it identifiable that it was used in the eighth embodiment). ) Is the same as each of the above-described embodiments in terms of its use, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The first random number 8 table 202ga is a data table used for the same purpose as the first random number table 202a used in each of the above-described embodiments, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first hit. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the big hit set by the random number 8 table 202ga, it is determined as the big hit of the special symbol.

Further, in this first random number 8 table 202ga, the number of random numbers to be a big hit is defined to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but only the lottery of the second special symbol is a small hit. The value of is specified (see FIG. 243 (b)). In this way, by making the number of random numbers that are small hits different (setting only for one special symbol), the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are a privilege for the player ( Expectations for granting (big hit or small hit) can be different.

Here, the contents of the first random number 8 table 202ga will be described with reference to FIG. 243 (b). FIG. 243 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first random number 8 table 202ga. In this first random number 8 table 202ga, a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a big hit and a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a small hit are defined in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is a data table and is referred to when the lottery result is acquired in the special symbol change start processing 8 (see FIG. 252) (see S11003 and S11004 in FIG. 252).

The first random number 8 table 202ga (see FIG. 243 (b)) is a data table in which the correspondence between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the lottery result is defined. Specifically, in the low probability state of the special symbol, "0 to 1" is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be a big hit (see 202ga1 in FIG. 243 (b)), and it is determined that the first special symbol is out of order. “2 to 399” is defined as the range of determination values to be determined (see 202ga2 in FIG. 243 (b)).

Further, "2 to 99" is defined as a range of judgment values determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202ga2 in FIG. 243 (b)), and the determination value determined to be a small hit of the second special symbol. The range is defined as "100 to 399" (see 202ga3 in FIG. 243 (b)). Further, in the high probability state (probability change state) of the special symbol, "0 to 19" is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be a big hit (see 202ga4 in FIG. 243 (b)), and the first special symbol is out of alignment. “20 to 399” is defined as the range of determination values to be determined (see 202ga5 in FIG. 243 (b)). Further, "20 to 99" is defined as a judgment value for determining that the second special symbol is out of alignment (see 202ga5 in FIG. 243 (b)), and "100" is determined as a small hit for the second special symbol. ~ 399 ”is specified (see 202ga6 in FIG. 243 (b)).

When the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on the start winning matches with any of the judgment values corresponding to the jackpot specified in the first random number 8 table 202ga (see FIG. 243 (b)). In addition, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, and if it matches any of the determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 244, the contents of the first type selection 8 table 202 gb will be described. FIG. 244 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the first type selection 8 table 202 gb. In the eighth embodiment, there are five types of jackpots (big hit A to jackpot E) set when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and the second special symbol (special figure 2). There are three types of jackpots (big hit F to jackpot H) that are set when a jackpot is won in the lottery, and the open operation scenario (operation scenario) set during the jackpot game according to the jackpot type. , The game state set after the jackpot game is over is different.

Specifically, when the symbol type won by the jackpot is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the determination value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 34", the jackpot type is "big hit A". Is set. This "big hit A" is a 10-round probability variation big hit, and the operation A is set as an open operation scenario (operation scenario). The specific contents specified in the operation scenario will be described later using the operation scenario 8 table 202ge shown in FIG. 245.

Further, in this embodiment, it is stipulated that the game state set after the end of the big hit game differs depending on the game state at the time when the big hit is won. If the "big hit A" is won, the big hit is won. The game state of is a normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol), or time saving state (low probability of special symbol). If it is a state (high probability state of a normal symbol), a probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends, and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a latent state (high probability state of a special symbol, low probability state of a normal symbol). For example, it is stipulated that the probability state is set after the jackpot game is completed.

When the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is "35 to 64", "big hit B" is set as the jackpot type. This "big hit B" is a game in which the same big hit game as the above-mentioned "big hit A" is executed (a big hit game in which the operation A is set as an open operation scenario (operation scenario) in a 10-round probability variation jackpot). The game state set after the jackpot game ends is different.

Specifically, when the "big hit B" is won, the game state at the time of the big hit is the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) or the time saving state (low probability of the special symbol). If it is a state (high probability state of a normal symbol), a probabilistic state is set after the jackpot game ends, and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a probabilistic state (high probability state of a special symbol, high probability state of a normal symbol), or If it is a latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), it is stipulated that the latent state is set after the big hit game is completed.

In this way, by providing a jackpot type in which the game content (operation scenario) of the jackpot game is the same and the game state set after the jackpot game is different is provided, the jackpot is hit against the player who is executing the jackpot game. It is possible to prevent the game state set after the end of the game from being grasped in advance (by the time the jackpot game ends). Further, by making it difficult to predict the game state set after the jackpot game ends depending on the game content of the jackpot game, for example, a suggestion effect for suggesting the game state set after the jackpot game ends to the player is being performed during the jackpot game. It is advisable to provide a means for executing the suggestion effect. With this configuration, the player pays close attention to the suggestion effect executed by the suggestion effect execution means, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in this case, a suggestion effect setting for setting the effect mode of the suggestion effect executed during the jackpot game based on the game state set after the end of the jackpot game and the game content of the jackpot game is provided. It is good to configure it to. Specifically, the game content of the jackpot game and the game state set after the jackpot game is completed are ranked in the order that is advantageous to the player, and each rank corresponding to the jackpot type won this time is fused ( It is preferable to configure one of a plurality of staging modes to be set based on the added value (information). As a result, as the jackpot game progresses (as the game content of the jackpot game becomes clear), it becomes easier to predict the game state set after the jackpot game ends based on the effect mode of the suggestion effect to be executed. It is possible to have the player pay close attention to the suggestive effect for a long period of time during the jackpot game, and the effect of the effect can be further enhanced.

When the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is "65 to 69", "big hit C" is set as the jackpot type. This "big hit C" is a game in which a big hit game of 10 rounds is executed in the same manner as the above-mentioned "big hit A", but the contents of the set operation scenarios are different, and the first attacker 650 and the second attacker are different. It is a big hit in which the scenario of the operation B in which the game content for opening both of the 3650 is defined is set. Then, it is a normal jackpot in which a low probability of a special symbol is set as a gaming state after the jackpot game is completed.

Specifically, when the "big hit C" is won, the game state at the time of winning the big hit is the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol), the probabilistic state (high probability state of the special symbol, Normal symbol high probability state), time saving state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol high probability state), or latent state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol low probability state), that is, jackpot winning Regardless of the game state at that time, it is stipulated that the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends.

Next, when the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is "70 to 74", "big hit D" is set. In this "big hit D", the operation scenario of the operation A is set so that the game content of the big hit game is the same as the above-mentioned "big hit A". And, like the above-mentioned "big hit C", it is a normal big hit in which a low probability of a special symbol is set as a game state after the big hit game is completed.

Specifically, when the "big hit D" is won, the game state at the time of winning the big hit is the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol), the probabilistic state (high probability state of the special symbol, Normal symbol high probability state), time saving state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol high probability state), or latent state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol low probability state), that is, jackpot winning Regardless of the game state at that time, it is stipulated that the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends.

When the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is "75 to 99", "big hit E" is set. This "big hit E" is the one in which the same big hit game as the above-mentioned "big hit D" is executed (a big hit game in which the operation A is set as an open operation scenario (operation scenario) in a normal jackpot for 10 rounds). Only the game state set after the jackpot game ends is different from the "big hit D".

Specifically, when the "big hit E" is won, the game state at the time of winning the big hit is the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol), the probabilistic state (high probability state of the special symbol, Normal symbol high probability state), time saving state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol high probability state), or latent state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol low probability state), that is, jackpot winning Regardless of the game state at the time, it is stipulated that the time reduction state is set after the jackpot game ends.

On the other hand, when the symbol type won by the jackpot is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the determination value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 29", "big hit F" is set as the jackpot type. To. This "big hit F" is a big hit game with the same game content as the above-mentioned "big hit A", that is, a 10-round probability variation big hit, and the operation A is set as an open operation scenario (operation scenario). Then, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), probability change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol), time saving state (special symbol). Low probability state, high probability state of normal symbol) or latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), that is, probabilistic change after the end of the big hit game regardless of the game state at the time of winning the big hit. It stipulates that the state is set.

When the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is "30 to 64", "big hit G" is set. This "big hit G" is a two-round probability variable jackpot in which a two-round jackpot game is executed, and an operation scenario of operation C in which the game content for opening the second attacker 3650 is defined is set. When the "big hit G" is won, the game state at the time of winning the big hit is the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol), and the probabilistic state (high probability state of the special symbol, normal symbol). If it is a high-probability state) or a short-time state (low-probability state of special symbol, high-probability state of normal symbol), the latent state (high-probability state of special symbol, low-probability state of normal symbol) is set after the big hit game is completed. It is stipulated that if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a latent state, the probability change state is set after the jackpot game is completed.

Finally, when the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is "65 to 99", "big hit H" is set. This "big hit H" is a 10-round normal big hit in which the operation scenario of the operation A is set so that the big hit game having the same game content as the above-mentioned "big hit D" is executed. When the "big hit H" is won, the game state at the time of winning the big hit is the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol), and the probabilistic state (high probability state of the special symbol, normal symbol). High probability state), time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol), or latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), that is, the game at the time of big hit winning Regardless of the state, it is stipulated that the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends.

Here, in the present embodiment, in the state where the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed (the state where the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is secured), the low probability state (normal state, latent state) of the normal symbol Is configured so that it is possible to provide a game that is more advantageous to the player than when the high probability state (probability change state, time saving state) of the normal symbol is set.

Specifically, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, it is configured to win a small hit with a probability of about 75%, and if the small hit is won, the second attacker 3650 (opening / closing door 3650f) is configured. ) Is configured to open. Then, the second attacker 3650 is opened by the small hit game, so that a state in which the ball easily flows into the guide passage 3660 (see FIG. 243) through the through gate 67 is provided. When the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the fluctuation time (2 seconds) of the normal symbol suitable for the time until the ball passing through the through gate 67 reaches the second entry port 640 is set. Therefore, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is configured to easily enter the second entry port 640.

On the other hand, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (0.1) is shorter than the time until the ball passing through the through gate 67 reaches the second entry port 640. Seconds), specifically, a game per game (electric accessory 640a) executed based on the fact that the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 has passed through the through gate 67 by the time the ball has passed through the second entrance 640. The fluctuation time is set so short that the opening operation) is completed. Therefore, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is configured to be difficult to enter the second entry port 640.

With this configuration, the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol during the small hit game can be made different according to the game state set when the small hit is won. If a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set during the big hit game, so the second special regardless of the game state set when the big hit is won. It is possible to easily acquire the reserved memory of the symbol.

The operation scenario 8 table 202ge is a table that defines the operations of the first attacker 650 and the second attacker 3650 when the gaming state is a big hit or a small hit. The operation scenario 8 table 202ge defines the operation content and whether or not the special figure 2 hold acquisition during the operation is possible for each scenario type.

Here, the contents of the operation scenario 8 table 202ge will be described with reference to FIG. 245 (a). FIG. 245 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the operation scenario 8 table 202ge. The operation scenario 8 table 202ge defines a jackpot game in which the first attacker 650 is opened for 10 rounds when the jackpot is a jackpot and the scenario type is A. Therefore, when the scenario A is set, the second attacker 3650 is not opened, so that the reserved memory of the special figure 2 cannot be newly acquired during the jackpot game. Next, when the scenario type is B in the jackpot, the jackpot game in which the second attacker 3650 is released for 1 to 2 rounds and the first attacker 650 is released for 3 to 10 rounds is specified. There is. Therefore, when the scenario B is set, the second attacker 3650 is opened, so that the reserved memory of the special figure 2 can be newly acquired during the jackpot game.

Next, when the scenario type is C in the jackpot, the jackpot game in which the second attacker 3650 is opened for 1 to 2 rounds is specified. Therefore, when the scenario C is set, the second attacker 3650 is opened, so that the reserved memory of the special figure 2 can be newly acquired during the jackpot game. In the case of a small hit, the second attacker 3650 is opened for one round. Therefore, the reserved memory of the special figure 2 can be newly acquired during the small hit game.

Here, with reference to FIG. 245 (b), the contents of each scenario defined in the operation scenario 8 table 202ge will be described. FIG. 245 (b) is a diagram showing the contents of each scenario. As shown in FIG. 245 (b), when scenario A is set, 2 seconds is set as the opening period (OP period) of the jackpot game, and the first attacker 650 is set for 30 seconds or as one round game. It will be open until the number of winnings reaches 10. When one round game is completed, an interval period of 2 seconds is set, and a scenario in which the next round game is executed is set. Then, when the 10th round game is completed, 4 seconds is set as the ending period (ED period), and when the ending period elapses, the jackpot game ends.

When scenario B is set, 2 seconds is set as the opening period (OP period) of the jackpot game, and one round game is executed three times to open the second attacker 3650 for 1.5 seconds. It is set until the number of winnings reaches 3 balls. When one round game is completed, an interval period of 2 seconds is set, and a scenario in which the next round game is executed is set. Then, when the interval period after the second round game elapses, the first attacker 650 is released as the third round game for 30 seconds or until the number of winnings reaches 10. When the 10th round game is completed, 4 seconds is set as the ending period (ED period), and when the ending period elapses, the jackpot game ends.

When scenario C is set, 0.5 seconds is set as the opening period (OP period) of the jackpot game, and one round game is executed three times to open the second attacker 3650 for 1.5 seconds. Alternatively, it is set until the number of winnings reaches three. When one round game is completed, an interval period of 2 seconds is set, and a scenario in which the next round game is executed is set. Then, when the second round game is completed, 4 seconds is set as the ending period (ED period), and when the ending period elapses, the jackpot game ends.

In the scenario set during the small hit game, 0.5 seconds is set as the opening period (OP period) of the small hit game, and one round game opens the second attacker 3650 once for 1.5 seconds. It is set until it is executed or the number of winnings becomes one ball. When one round game is completed, 4 seconds is set as the ending period (ED period), and when the ending period elapses, the jackpot game ends.

As described above, in the eighth embodiment, a part of the big hit game (big hit B, big hit C) and the hit game for opening the second attacker 3650 in the small hit game are configured to be executed. There is. Therefore, the ball can be passed through the through gate 67 during the hit game, and the ball can be entered into the second entry port 640. Further, as shown in FIG. 245 (b), in the case of opening the second attacker 3650 in the big hit game, the number of times the second attacker 3650 is opened is larger than in the case of opening the second attacker 3650 in the small hit game. Since the number is set to be large, in one hit game, the big hit game can allow more balls to enter the second entrance 640 than the small hit game.

Further, as described above, in the eighth embodiment, when the high probability state (time saving state, probability variation state) of the normal symbol is set, even if the ball is passed through the through gate 67, the guide passage 3660 It is configured so that the ball that has flowed down cannot enter the second entrance 640 (it becomes difficult), and when a big hit game is executed, a low probability state of a normal symbol is set, and a small hit game is performed. When it is executed, the small hit game is configured to be executed in the game state at the time of winning the small hit. Therefore, the big hit game is a hit game in which it is easier to put the ball into the second entrance 640 than the small hit game.

The second random number 8 table 202 gc is a data table used for the same purpose as the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 15) used in each of the above-described embodiments, and is a value of the second random number counter C4. With reference to the second random number 8 table 202 gc, the presence or absence of a winning is determined.

Here, the contents of the second random number 8 table 202 gc will be described with reference to FIG. 246. FIG. 246 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the second random number 8 table 202 gc. The second random number 8 table 202 gc (see FIG. 246) is a data table in which the hit determination value of the normal symbol is defined (stored). Specifically, "0 to 237" is defined as a determination value for hitting the normal symbol in the normal state of the normal symbol (see 202 gc1 in FIG. 246). Further, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, "0 to 238" is defined as a determination value for hitting the normal symbol (see 202 gc3 in FIG. 246). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, refer to the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired based on the passage of the ball through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 and the second random number 8 table 202 gc. However, it is judged whether or not it is a hit of a normal symbol.

Further, "238,239" is defined as a determination value that is out of the normal symbol in the normal state of the normal symbol (see 202 gc2 in FIG. 246). Further, "239" is defined as a determination value that is out of the normal symbol in the high probability state of the normal symbol (see 202 gc4 in FIG. 246).

The variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd is a data table used for the same purpose as the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 14) used in each of the above-described embodiments. A fluctuation pattern in which different fluctuation times are set is defined according to the result of the lottery and the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd will be described with reference to FIGS. 247 and 248. FIG. 247 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd, and FIG. 248 (a) is defined in the normal / latent 8 table 202gd1 defined by the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents shown, and FIG. 248 (b) schematically shows the contents specified in the time saving / probability variation 8 table 202gd2 specified by the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd. It is a schematic diagram.

Here, the contents of the normal / latent 8 table 202gd1 will be described with reference to FIG. 248 (a). The normal / latent 8 table 202gd1 is a variation pattern table that is referred to when the normal state / latent state is set as the gaming state, and is a time saving / probability changing 8 table 202gd2 (time saving state) described later. , Or the fluctuation pattern table referred to when the probability variation state is set), it is easier to set the fluctuation time so that the ball can easily pass through the second entry port 640 or the second attacker 3650. The fluctuation time is specified as follows.

To specifically explain the contents specified in the normal / latent 8 table 202gd1, if the type of the special symbol is special figure 1 and the lottery result is out of order, the value of the acquired variable type counter CS1 is used. Regardless of the fluctuation pattern, if "off fluctuation" (variation time 30 to 120 seconds) is specified and the lottery result is a big hit, the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 99". As a fluctuation pattern, "per normal fluctuation" (variation time 30 seconds) is defined. On the other hand, "hit super fluctuation" (variation time 60 seconds) is defined for the range of "100 to 179", and "hit special fluctuation" (variation time) is defined as the fluctuation pattern for the range of "180 to 198". 120 seconds) is specified.

When the type of the special symbol is special figure 2 and the lottery result is out of order, "out-of-order variation" (variation time 5 seconds) is defined as the variation pattern regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. If the lottery result is a small hit, "small hit fluctuation" (variation time 5 seconds) is defined as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1, and if the lottery result is a win, it is acquired. Regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, "hit fluctuation" (variation time 5 seconds) is defined as the fluctuation pattern. That is, in the special figure 2 game in the normal / latent state, the fluctuation time is set to 5 seconds regardless of the lottery result.

Next, with reference to FIG. 248 (b), the contents specified in the time saving / probability variation 8 table 202gd2 will be specifically described. If the type of the special symbol is special figure 1 and the lottery result is out of order, the fluctuation pattern is "out of middle fluctuation" (variation time 30 to 60 milliseconds) regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1. If the lottery result is a big hit and the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 39", "hit normal fluctuation" (variation time 30 milliseconds) is defined as the fluctuation pattern. .. In the case of "40 to 119", "per super fluctuation" (variation time 60 milliseconds) is specified. In the case of "120 to 198", "hit special fluctuation" (variation time 120 milliseconds) is defined as the fluctuation pattern.

Then, when the type of the special symbol is special figure 2 and the lottery result is out of order, the variation pattern is "out-of-order short variation" (variation time 1 millisecond) regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. Is specified, and if the lottery result is a small hit, "small hit short fluctuation" (variation time 1 millisecond) is specified as a fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1, and the lottery result is a win. In this case, "hit short variation" (variation time 1 millisecond) is defined as the variation pattern regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. That is, in the special figure 2 game in the time saving state or the probable change state, the fluctuation time is set to 1 millisecond regardless of the lottery result.

Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 249. FIG. 249 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 249, the RAM 203 of the eighth embodiment has a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203ga, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, and a first special symbol holding ball. Number counter 203d, 2nd special symbol holding ball number counter 203gb, normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e, probability variation flag 203g, fluctuation time counter 203gc, big hit medium flag 203o, small hit medium flag 203p, round end flag 203gd, other memory area It has 203z. Since the configuration (flag, counter, area) having the same name as the electrical configuration used in any of the above-described embodiments is the same as each of the above-described embodiments in terms of its use, detailed description thereof will be omitted. ..

The other memory area 203z of the present embodiment has a data area capable of storing the currently set gaming state, and has a high probability state, a low probability state, or a high probability of a normal symbol of a special symbol. The state and the low-probability state can be memorized, and the condition until each state ends (shifts to another state) and the current status for the condition can be updated. Since the specific contents are the same as the control processing for the probability change flag, the probability change counter, and the time reduction counter in each of the above-described embodiments, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The second special symbol holding ball storage area 203ga differs from the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the second special symbol. More specifically, each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the second entrance 640, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number 1). Among the vacant areas (1 area to 4th area on hold), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203ga is the execution area. It is shifted (moved) to, and a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is performed based on each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having a smaller area number. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data shift is performed only for the holding area (the second holding area to the fourth holding area) in which the winning data is stored.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203 gb is a counter that counts reserved balls based on winning a prize in the second entry opening 640, and is the same as the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d in other configurations. Since there is, the detailed explanation is omitted.

The fluctuation time counter 203 gc is a counter for counting the fluctuation time. In the fluctuation time counter 203gc, a counter value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern selection 8 table 202gd is set (see S11011 in FIG. 252). Further, the fluctuation time counter 203 gc is subtracted by 1 in the special symbol fluctuation process 8 (see FIG. 251) (see S10914 in FIG. 251), and whether the fluctuation time has elapsed based on the value of the fluctuation time counter 203 gc. Is determined.

Next, with reference to FIG. 250, the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 250 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 250 (a), since the ROM 222 of the tenth embodiment has the same electrical configuration as that of the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted. FIG. 250 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 250 (b), the RAM 223 of the tenth embodiment has a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c, a second special symbol holding ball number counter 223ga, and a fluctuation start flag 223fa. It has a stop type selection flag 223fb, a fluctuation time counter 223fd, a game state storage area 223fe, a jackpot effect extension flag 223gb, and other memory areas 223z. Since the configuration (flag, counter, area) having the same name as the electrical configuration used in any of the above-described embodiments is the same as each of the above-described embodiments in terms of its use, detailed description thereof will be omitted. ..

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga is a counter that counts reserved balls based on winning a prize in the second entrance 640, and is the same as the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c in other configurations. Since there is, the detailed explanation is omitted.

The jackpot effect extension flag 223 gb is a flag for indicating that the effect during the jackpot game (see FIG. 238 (a)) is continuously executed even after the jackpot game ends, and continues even after the jackpot game ends. It is set to ON when it is determined to execute (extend the jackpot effect). This jackpot effect extension flag 223 gb is turned on when a command indicating an increase in the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is received from the main control device 110 (S12806 in FIG. 257), and the received command has the number of reserved balls. It is turned off when it is determined that the command indicates that it is 0 (S12906 in FIG. 258). When the jackpot effect extension flag 223 gb is turned on, the jackpot extension effect is executed after the jackpot game (see FIG. 239 (a)).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the eighth embodiment>
Next, the special symbol variation processing 8 (S9001) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 251. FIG. 251 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing 8 (S9001). This special symbol variation process 8 (S9001) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display are performed. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in the device 81.

In this special symbol variation processing 8, first, it is determined whether or not the present is a big hit or a small hit of the special symbol (S10901). Specifically, it is determined whether any of the big hit medium flag 203o and the small hit medium flag 203p is on. As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the special symbol is in the big hit or the small hit (S10901: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S10901, when it is determined that the special symbol is neither a big hit nor a small hit (S10901: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S10902). When it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S10902: No), the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203gb (number of holdings of variation display based on the second special symbol lottery N2). Is acquired (S10903). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203 gb is larger than 0 (S10904). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203 gb is not 0 (S10904: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203 gb is subtracted by 1 (S10905) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203 gb is set (S10906). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203 gb from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the second special symbol hold ball number counter of the RAM 223. Store in 223ga.

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S10906, the data stored in the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203ga is shifted (S10907). In the process of S10907, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203ga is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. The data is shifted and the process proceeds to S10913.

On the other hand, in the process of S10904, when the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203 gb is 0 (S10904: No), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d (of the first special symbol). The number of holdings N1) of the variation display based on the lottery is acquired (S10908), and it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the acquired first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S10909).

In the process of S10909, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S10909: No), both the first special symbol and the second special symbol start to change newly. Since it is in a state where it cannot be done, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S10909, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S10909: Yes), the number of first special symbol reserved balls The value (N1) of the counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S10910), and the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S10911). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol hold ball number counter of the RAM 223. Store in 223c.

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S10911, the data stored in the first special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is shifted by the same method as the process of S10907 (S10909), and the process is transferred to S10913. Transition. In the process of S10913 executed after the process of S10907 or S10912, the special symbol variation start process 8 for starting the variation display is executed in the first symbol display device 37 (S10913), and this process is terminated. The details of this special symbol change start processing 8 will be described later with reference to FIG. 252.

In the process of S10902, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S10902: Yes), the value of the fluctuation time counter 203 gc is updated by subtracting 1 (S10914), and the updated fluctuation time counter. Based on the value of 203 gc, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S10915). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time counter 203 gc updated in the process of S10914 becomes 0. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If has not passed (S10915: No), the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S10916), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S10915, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S10915: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S10917). The display mode of the stop symbol is preset by the special symbol change start process 8 (S10913) described later with reference to FIG. 252. When the special symbol variation start process 8 (S10913) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it corresponds to the value of the first hit type counter C2. One of the jackpots A to H is determined.

After the processing of S10916 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing 8 is displayed. , It is determined whether it is a big hit of a special symbol (S10918). If the result of this lottery is a special symbol jackpot (S10918: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is set to off (S10919), the start of the special symbol jackpot is set (S10920), and the process proceeds to S10921. do. When the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the process of S10919, when the jackpot control process (S1004) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed, it branches to S1101: Yes and the opening command is set. (S1102). As a result, the jackpot effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S10918, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S10918: No), the process of S10919 and S10920 is skipped and the process is transferred to S10921.

In addition, in the special symbol variation processing 8 (see S9001 in FIG. 251) in the eighth embodiment, the technical idea and the control content for displaying the special symbol stopped for a predetermined period as in the second embodiment described above are described. It may be configured to be added. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the lottery result of the specific symbol in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, the special symbol change start process 8 (S10913) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 252. FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start processing 8 (S10913). This special symbol variation start process 8 (S10913) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 8 (see FIG. 251) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and is the first special symbol holding ball storage area. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of 203a and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203ga, a lottery (win / fail judgment) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol omission" is performed, and the first 1 This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variation pattern) of a variation effect performed by the symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol change start processing 8, first, the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203ga. Each value of C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (S11001).

Next, the probability change flag 203g is read out to determine whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state (S11002). In the process of S11002, if the probability change flag 203g is on, it is determined that the special symbol is in the probability change state, and if the probability change flag 203g is off, it is determined that the special symbol is in the low probability state (not the probability change state). When it is determined in the processing of S11002 that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic state of the special symbol (S11002: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S11001 and the first value for high probability. Based on the winning random number 8 table 202ga, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S11003). After acquiring the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S11005.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S11002 that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the probabilistic state (it is in the low probability state of the special symbol) (S11002: No), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S11001 is used. , Based on the first random number 8 table for low probability (see FIG. 243 (b)), the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S11004). After acquiring the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S11005.

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S11003 or S11004 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S11005), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S11005: Yes). Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S11001, the display mode at the time of a big hit is set (S11006).

In this process of S11006, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A to H). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A to H) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S11007). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S11007, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd (see FIG. 247), and the variation pattern (variation) corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is compared. Time) is decided.

On the other hand, in the process of S11005, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (including a small hit) (S11005: No), the display mode at the time of the off (small hit) is set (S11008). In the process of S11008, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off (small hit) symbol, and the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area. 3. As the stop type to be displayed on the symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is a front-back off reach, a reach other than the front-back off, a complete off, or a small hit.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a probabilistic state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S11001 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. And set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", set the reach out of front and back. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", set the reach out of front and back.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection (small hit) is determined (S11009). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off (small hit) symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S11007, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd, and the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is compared. Determine (variation time).

When the processing of S11007 or the processing of S11009 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the process of S11007 or the process of S11009 is set (S11010). Next, the counter value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the current fluctuation pattern is set in the fluctuation time counter 203 gc (S11011). Then, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S11006 or S11008 is set (S11012). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203, and are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 52). When the processing of S11012 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing 8.

In the special symbol change start processing 8 (see S10913 in FIG. 252) of the eighth embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit (S11005: Yes in FIG. 252), it is not a big hit (missing or missing). In the case of (small hit) (S11005: No in FIG. 252), the processing content to be executed is configured to be different, but as used in any of the above-described embodiments, it is determined that the hit is not a big hit. In some cases, a control process is executed for the loss, and the lottery result is configured to determine whether the lottery result is a loss or a small hit. It may be configured so that the processing contents to be executed are different. Since the detailed contents of the control process executed in this case are the same as those of each of the above-described embodiments, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the start winning process 8 (S9002) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 253. FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 8 (S9002). This start winning process 8 (S9002) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 and the second ball opening 640. Then, when there is a start prize, it is a process for executing the hold process of the value indicated by various counters.

When the start winning process 8 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first entry port 64 (S11101). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entry port 64 (S11101: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of holding the variable display in the special symbol N1) is acquired (. S11102). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S11103).

Then, whether or not the ball has won a prize in the first entry port 64 (S11101: No), or even if the ball has a prize in the first entry port 64, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d. If (N1) is not less than 4 (S11103: No), the process proceeds to S11107. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S11101: Yes) and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S11103: Yes), the first special The value (N1) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is added by 1 (S11104). Then, a hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S11105).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol hold ball number counter of the RAM 223. Store in 223c.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S11105, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) described above. Each value is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S11106), and the process is transferred to S11107. .. In the process of S11106, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

In the process of S11107, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the second entrance 640 (S11107). Also in this process, similar to the process of S1111, the ball entering the second ball entry port 640 is detected over the three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the second entrance 640 (S11107: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203 gb (the number of reserved balls N2 of the variation display in the special symbol) is acquired ( S11108), it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203 gb is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S11109).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the second ball entrance 640 (S11107: No), or even if there is a prize in the second ball slot 640, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203 gb is If it is determined that the value is not less than 4 (that is, 4) (S11109: No), the process proceeds to S11113. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the second entrance 640 (S11107: Yes) and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203 gb is less than 4 (S11109: Yes), the second special 1 is added to the value (N2) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203 gb (S11110). Then, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203 gb changed by the calculation is set (S11111).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203 gb from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the second special symbol hold ball number counter of the RAM 223. Store in 223ga.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S1111, the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in the processing of S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above are set. , The second special symbol holding ball storage area 203ga of the RAM 203 is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) (S11112), and the process proceeds to S11113. In the process of S11112, as in the process of S11106, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203ga is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

In the process of S11113, a pre-reading process for pre-reading whether or not the result is obtained from various counter values acquired based on the start winning is executed (S11113), and this process is terminated. The details of this look-ahead process will be described with reference to FIG. 254.

FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing the look-ahead process (S11113). In this look-ahead process (S11113), first, it is determined whether or not a new ball has been detected for the first ball opening 64 or the second ball opening 640 in the starting winning process 8 (see FIG. 253). If no new ball has been detected (S11201: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a new ball has been detected in the process of S11201 (S11201: Yes), then whether the number of reserved balls corresponding to the detected ball is the upper limit value (that is, 4). Whether or not it is determined (S11202), and if it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S11202: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S11202 that the number of reserved balls is less than the upper limit value (S11202: No), whether or not the timing of starting the variation display based on the incoming ball is the probable change state of the special symbol. (S11203). In the process of S1123, it is determined whether or not the game is in the probable change state according to the current gaming state and the look-ahead result of the reserved ball held before the current entry. Specifically, if the reserved ball does not include a big hit, the current game state and the timing to start the variation display based on the newly detected ball are the same, so that the current game state is a probable change state. It is determined that. In addition, if a jackpot is included in the reserved ball, the game state may be changed according to the type of jackpot. Specifically, if the probabilistic jackpot is suspended, it shifts to the probabilistic state after the jackpot, and if the normal jackpot is suspended, it shifts to the normal state after the jackpot. Taking these factors into consideration, it is determined whether or not the start timing of the variation display based on the ball entry detected this time is in the probable change state.

In the process of S1123, if it is determined that the start time of the fluctuation based on the ball entry detected this time is the probabilistic state of the special symbol (S1123: Yes), the type of the ball entry port that detected the ball entry and the high probability time. Based on the first random number 8 table 202ga for the game, the lottery result based on the current entry is acquired (S11204), and the process is shifted to S11206. On the other hand, when it is determined that the start of the fluctuation is in the low probability state of the special symbol (S1123: No), the type of the entry port where the entry is detected and the first random number 8 table 202ga for the low probability are displayed. Based on the above, the lottery result based on the current entry is acquired (S11205), and the process is shifted to S11206.

In the processing of S11206 executed after the processing of S11204 or S11205, the winning information command is set based on the type of the entrance that detected the current entry and the lottery result acquired in the processing of S11204 or S11205. (S11206), this process is terminated. The winning information command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 52) described later. It is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the type of the winning ball notified by the winning information command and the lottery result in the winning information storage area 223a.

Next, the normal symbol variation processing 8 (S9003) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 255. FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process 8 (S9003). This normal symbol variation process 8 (S9003) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the second ball entry are performed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the mouth 640.

In the normal symbol variation processing 8 (S9003), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S1130 1). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is performed. In the middle of being included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S11301: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S11301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S11302), and the second symbol display device is used. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S11302: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e (number of holdings of variable display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S11303). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S11304), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S11304 :). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S11304: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S11305).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S11306). In the process of S11306, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S11307).

Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the high probability state (time saving state) (S11308). In the process of S11308, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the high probability state based on the information possessed by the other memory area 203z of the RAM 203.

When it is determined in the processing of S11308 that the normal symbol is in a high probability state (S11308: Yes), the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S11307 and the second random number 8 for high probability. Based on the table 202 cc (see FIG. 246), the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is a hit is acquired (S11309). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number 8 table 202 gc for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 238", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "239", it is out of the normal symbol. (See FIG. 246).

If it is determined in the process of S11308 that the normal symbol is not in the high probability state (S11308: No), the process proceeds to the process of S11310. In the processing of S11310, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit game of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol. Based on the value of C4 and the second random number 8 table 202 gc for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S11310). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number 8 table 202 gc for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 237", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "238,239", the normal symbol is out of order. (See FIG. 246).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S11309 or S11310 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S11311), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S11311: Yes). The display mode at the time of hit is set (S11312). In the process of S11312, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the normal symbol is in the time saving state (high probability state) (S11314), and if it is the normal symbol time saving state (high probability state) (S11314: Yes), the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is performed. The fluctuation time of is set to 0.1 seconds (S11315), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (high probability state) (S11314: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 2 seconds (S11316), and this process is performed. finish.

Further, in the process of S11302, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S11302: Yes), whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S11317). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S11315 or the process of S11316 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

If it is determined in the process of S11317 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S11317: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S11317, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S11317: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S11318). In the processing of S11318, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the processing of S11312, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) in the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is out of order and the display mode is set by the processing of S11313, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to. When the stop display is set by the process of S11318, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed next, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. When the process is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S11313 or the process of S11318.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, is the lottery result (current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process a hit of the ordinary symbol? Is determined (S11319). If the result of this lottery is a hit of a normal symbol (S11319: Yes), then it is determined whether the normal symbol is in the time saving state (high probability state) (S11320), and in the time saving state (high probability state). If not (S11320: No), the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 and the number of times of opening are set to "0.9 seconds x 1 time" (S11321), and the process is performed in S11323. Move to. On the other hand, in the processing of S11320, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving (high probability state) (S11320: Yes), the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 and the opening time. The number of times is set to "1 second x 1 time" (S11322), and the process shifts to S11323.

In the process of S11323, the opening time determined in the process of S11321 or S11322 and the opening / closing control start of the number of times of opening are set (S11323), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S11323, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed, the electric accessory 640a The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S11321 or the process of S11322 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S11319, if the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S11319: No), each process of S11320 to S11323 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the eighth embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 256 to 259. The control process of the voice lamp control device 113 of the eighth embodiment is different from the control process of the seventh embodiment described above in that the content of the command determination process is changed. Since the other elements are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted. For convenience of explanation, different reference numerals may be given to the same processes as those in the above-described embodiments, but the processes having the same name are used for the same purpose.

First, the command determination process 8 (S4191) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 256. FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 8 (S4191). This command determination process 8 (S4191) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. It is a process to do.

In the command determination process 8, first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control unit 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and a variation pattern command is issued from the main control unit 110. It is determined whether or not the command has been received (S12701). In the process of S12701, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S12701: Yes), the variation start flag 223fa provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S12702), and the variation pattern type is selected from the received variation pattern command. Is extracted (S12703), and this process is terminated. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 52) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, in the process of S12701, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S12701: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S12704). Then, when the stop type command is received (S12704: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223fb of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S12705), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S12706). End the process. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S12704, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S12704: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S12707). .. Then, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S12707: Yes), the reserved ball number related process is executed (S12708), and this process is terminated. The details of the reserved ball number-related processing (S12708) will be described later with reference to FIG. 257.

Here, the reserved ball number command is issued from the main control device 110 when a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640, or when a special symbol lottery is performed. Since it is transmitted, every time a start winning prize is detected, or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c and the second special of the voice lamp control device 113 are processed by the processing of S12708. The value of the symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga can be matched with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb. Therefore, due to the influence of noise and the like, the values of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223ga of the voice lamp control device 113 are the first special symbol holding ball number counters of the main control device 110. Even if the values deviate from the values of 203d and the second special symbol holding ball counter 203gb, the first special symbol holding ball counter 223c and the second special symbol holding ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 are used when the start winning prize is detected or when the special symbol is drawn. The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga can be modified to match the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb of the main controller 110.

When the process of S12708 is executed, the display holding ball for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223ga. A few commands are set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S12707, if it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S12707: No), then it is determined whether or not the status command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S12709). Then, when it is determined that the state command has been received (S12709: Yes), the data in the game state storage area 223fe is updated according to the received command (S12710). As a result, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 can easily grasp the change.

On the other hand, in the process of S12709, if it is determined that the status command has not been received (S12709: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received (S12711). If it is determined in the process of S12711 that the winning information command has been received (S12711: Yes), the information corresponding to the received winning information command is set in the winning information storage area 223b (S12712), and this processing is terminated.

In the process of S12711, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S12711: No), then the commands related to the hit (big hit, small hit) (opening command, round number command, ending command for each hit). ) Is received (S12713). Then, when it is determined that the command related to the hit has been received (S12713: Yes), the hit-related process 8 for executing the control corresponding to the type of the command related to the hit is executed (S12714). This process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S12713, if it is determined that the command related to the jackpot has not been received (S12713: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S12715), and this process is terminated. In the processing of S12715, if the other command is a command used in the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is performed. Is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 257, a process related to the number of reserved balls (S12708), which is one process in the command determination process 8 (S4191) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing this reserved ball number related process (S12708).

In the reserved ball number-related process (S12708), first, it is determined whether or not a special figure 2 related command, that is, a command related to the reserved ball number of the second special symbol (special figure 2) has been received (S12801). When it is determined that the special figure 2 related command has been received (S12801: Yes), it is determined whether or not the received special figure 2 related command is a command indicating an increase in the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 (S1282). If it is determined that the command indicates an increase (S12802: Yes), the information in the game state storage area 223fe is read out (S12803). Next, it is determined whether the read information of the game state storage area 223fe is in the big hit or in the small hit (S12804). When it is determined that the jackpot is in progress or the small hit is in progress (S12804: Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot effect extension flag 223 gb is on (S12805). When it is determined that the jackpot effect extension flag 223 gb is off (S12805: No), the jackpot effect extension flag 223 gb is set to on (S12806) in order to set the extension of the effect executed during the jackpot. A jackpot extension effect is set (S12807), and the process proceeds to S12808. On the other hand, in the process of S12805, when it is determined that the jackpot effect extension flag 223 gb is on (S12805: Yes), it is not necessary to set the jackpot extension effect, so the process of S12806 to S12807 is skipped and the process of S12808 is performed. Move to processing.

With this configuration, if the reserved memory of special figure 2 is acquired during the winning game, the special figure 2 fluctuation (lottery) is executed after the big hit game is completed. You can set a jackpot extension effect. That is, since the effect executed after the end of the winning game is set based on the presence or absence of the reserved storage of the special figure 2 instead of the game state set after the end of the winning game, it is specified as in the eighth embodiment. Since it is possible to easily set the effect mode corresponding to the lottery (variation) of the special figure 2 that can be executed only under the conditions, it is possible to execute the effect that is easy for the player to understand.

In S12808, the key display mode (display mode of the acquired display areas Dm10a to Dm10d) corresponding to the command received this time is set (S12808). Next, the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received command and stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga (S12810), and the process proceeds to S12811. On the other hand, in the processing of S12804, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not a big hit or a small hit (S12804: No), an error command is set (S12809), and the process proceeds to S12810. ..

On the other hand, in the processing of S1282, if it is determined that the command related to the special figure 2 received this time is not a command indicating an increase (S12802: No), the processing at the time of decrease is executed (S12813), and the process proceeds to the processing of S12811. do.

Here, with reference to FIG. 258, a reduction processing (S12813), which is one of the reserved ball number-related processing (S12708) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing this reduction processing (S12813).

In the reduction processing (S12813), first, the number of reserved balls is extracted from the command received this time and stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga (S12901). Next, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, whether the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga is 0 (S12902). In the process of S12902, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga is 0 (S12902: Yes), it is the timing of the end of the jackpot. A display effect command indicating the end of the extra round is set (S12903). Next, a display instruction command indicating left-handedness is set (S12904). Next, the right-handed command is set to off (S12905), the jackpot effect extension flag 223 gb is set to off (S12906), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S12902, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S12902: No), the key display mode corresponding to the number of reserved balls is set (S12907). This process ends.

Returning to FIG. 257, the explanation will be continued. When any of the processes of S12801, S12810, or S12813 is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S12811. In the process of S12811, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 related command is received (S12811). In the process of S12811, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 related command is received (S12811). When it is determined that the special figure 1 related command has been received (S12811: Yes), the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received command and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (S12812), and this processing is terminated. do. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command related to the special figure 1 has not been received (S12811: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the contents of the hit-related process 8 (S12714) will be described with reference to FIG. 259. FIG. 259 is a flowchart schematically showing the contents of the hit-related process 8 (S12714). The hit-related process 8 (S12714) is executed when a hit-related command (command related to a big hit or a small hit) is received.

When the hit-related process 8 (S12714) is executed, first, it is determined whether the hit-related command received this time is a jackpot-related command (S12151), and if it is determined to be a jackpot-related command (S12151: Yes). , Set the corresponding display command (S12152), and end this process. The various display commands set in the process of S12152 are set by the same process as the process executed when the jackpot related command is received in the command determination process executed in each of the above-described embodiments. Therefore, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, in the process of S12151, if it is determined that the hit-related command received this time is not a jackpot-related command (S12151: No), then it is determined whether the hit-related command received this time is a small hit start command. (S12107), if it is determined that the command is a small hit start command (S12107: Yes), the small hit start process 8 is executed (S12158), and this process is terminated.

In the small hit start process 8 (S12158), the content of the display command set for the process executed in the small hit start process 7 (S12108) of the seventh embodiment described above is set to the height of the normal symbol. The difference is that the display command executed when the probability state is set and the display command executed when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set are discriminated and set. Other than that, they are the same, so detailed description will be omitted.

In the processing of S12107, if it is determined that the hit-related command received this time is not the small hit start command (S12107: No), then it is determined whether the small hit end command has been received (S12109), and the small hit end. If it is determined that the command has not been received (S12109: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S12109, when it is determined that the small hit end command has been received (S12109: Yes), then the small hit medium flag 203p is set to off (S12153), and then the second special symbol holding ball. It is determined whether the value of the number counter 223ga is larger than 0 (S12154). That is, in the process of S12154, the presence / absence of the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is determined at the timing when the small hit game is completed.

In the process of S12154, if it is determined that the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga is larger than 0 (S12154: Yes), the special figure 2 variation is executed after the small hit game is completed, so this process is performed as it is. To finish. On the other hand, in the process of S12154, when it is determined that the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga is not larger than 0 (0) (S12154: No), then the jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is turned on. It is determined whether or not it is set to (S12155), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S12155: Yes), the jackpot effect extension flag 223 gb is set to off (S12156), and this process is terminated.

As a result, if the special figure 2 fluctuation is not executed after the small hit game ends, that is, if the reserved memory of the special figure 2 cannot be acquired during the small hit game, the big hit extension effect is executed after the small hit game ends. It can be prevented from being done. Although detailed description is omitted, when the small hit end command is received in the hit-related process 8 (S12109: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga is 0 (S12154: No), the end screen of the big hit extension effect (see FIG. 241 (b)) is displayed at the end of the small hit game. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the player that the jackpot extension effect will end.

As described above, in the eighth embodiment, the second special symbol is executed during the big hit game or the small hit game executed in the low probability state (normal state, latent state) of the normal symbol. It is configured so that the ball can (easily) enter the second entry port 640, which serves as an opportunity. As a result, the lottery of the second special symbol can be prevented from being executed unless the winning game (big hit game, small hit game) is executed. Therefore, as in the first embodiment described above, the lottery of the first special symbol is performed. Even if you do not use a configuration that executes (variation) and lottery (variation) of the second special symbol at the same time (in parallel), a small hit game based on the lottery of the second special symbol only during the latent state. Can be generated frequently. Therefore, the control process of the gaming machine can be simplified.

Furthermore, depending on the type of winning (big hit, small hit), it is possible to set a hit type in which the ball easily enters the second entry port 640 and a hit type in which it is difficult to enter. If you win a hit (big hit, small hit), not only the size of the privilege (number of prize balls) that can be obtained during the winning game, but also the ball enters the second entrance 640 during the winning game. It is possible to make the player interested in whether or not.

In addition, in the eighth embodiment, the ball enters the second entrance 640 depending on whether the player wins in the lottery of the first special symbol or wins in the lottery of the second special symbol. It is configured so that the ratio of easy-to-use hit types is set differently. Specifically, it is easier to set the hit type in which the ball is more likely to enter the second entrance 640 when the second special symbol is won than when the first special symbol is won. It is composed.

With this configuration, once the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) has been transferred to a state in which the lottery can be executed, the lottery for the special figure 2 can be continued and easily executed. Even though the advantageous game mode advantageous to the player (mode in which the lottery of Special Figure 2 can be executed) is set, the advantageous game mode is immediately terminated, which causes discomfort to the player. Can be suppressed.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to have a higher probability of winning (big hit, small hit) than the lottery of the first special symbol. Specifically, in the lottery of the first special symbol, only the big hit (1/400 at low probability) is set without winning the small hit, whereas in the lottery of the second special symbol, the big hit is won. The probability of (1/400 at low probability) is the same as the above-mentioned first special symbol, but it is set to win a small hit (300/400). As described above, in the eighth embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol is set so that the probability of winning the small hit is higher in the lottery of the second special symbol than in the lottery of the first special symbol. The lottery of the second special symbol is configured so that it is easier to win a win (big hit, small hit) than.

As a result, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640, it is possible to win a hit (big hit, small hit) with a high probability. The winning game based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be frequently executed in a short period of time.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, it is configured so that the winning game in which the ball is easily entered into the second entrance 640 is executed with a higher probability when the small hit is won than when the big hit is won. is doing. As a result, when a small hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, it is possible to easily execute the lottery of the second special symbol again after the winning game is completed.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the right to execute the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2 hold) is configured to be able to store a plurality (4 pieces) (hold memory) according to the winning type. Therefore, the opening operation pattern of the winning game is defined so that the number of cards that can be held and stored during one winning game is different.

With such a configuration, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game in order to secure more reserved memory by one hit game. Here, in the eighth embodiment, the second opening / closing door 3650f attached to the second attacker 3650, which is opened in the hit game, is opened (a state in which the ball can be guided to the second specific winning opening 3650a). A flow path in which a part of the ball spilled from the second opening / closing door 3650f can enter the second entry port 640 when the ball is changed to the closed state (the state in which the ball cannot be guided to the second specific winning opening 3650a). It is configured to pass through. In this way, the ball that could not enter the second attacker 3650, which is opened during the hit game, can enter the second entry port 640, so that the ball can enter the second attacker 3650 during the hit game. 2 The player can be made to pay close attention to the movement of the ball to be entered into the specific winning opening 3650a and the movement of the ball to be entered into the second entry opening 640.

It should be noted that the inflow detecting means for detecting that the sphere has flowed into the flow path (guidance passage 3660) through which the sphere can flow when a specific condition is satisfied as in the seventh embodiment described above, and the sphere from the flow path. It is possible to provide an emission detecting means for detecting that the shavings have been discharged, and an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode based on the detection result of each detection means, or based on the detection result of each detection means. It is also possible to provide an operation limiting means for limiting the game operation.

<9th embodiment>
Next, the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 260 to 266. In the first embodiment described above, the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) are configured to be dynamically displayable at the same time (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous). Variable type). Further, in order to efficiently execute the discrimination of the special symbol, it is possible to set a game state (high probability state of the normal symbol) in which the electric accessory 64a is easily released, and the high probability state of the normal symbol (for example, a time saving state). Was configured to continue for a predetermined period (for example, the period until the number of times (time reduction number) of special symbol discrimination (variation) reaches 100 times after the end of the big hit).

In the above-mentioned first embodiment, since the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are configured to be able to execute the discrimination (variation) at the same time (in parallel), the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is determined in advance as described above. In order to prevent the setting from being longer than the predetermined period, refer to it when determining the period for continuing the high probability state of the normal symbol at the timing when the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol starts. It is configured to update the time saving information (for example, the time saving counter 203f) (see FIG. 36).

As described above, in the first embodiment, since the time saving information is updated at the timing when the fluctuation of each special symbol is started, the number of times the special symbol is discriminated (variated) in the simultaneous fluctuation type gaming machine. Even if the number of time reductions is set based on the above, it is possible to prevent the time reduction state from being set beyond the predetermined number of time reductions.

However, in the configuration of the first embodiment, in the simultaneous fluctuation type gaming machine, the period in which the time saving state is set is shortened depending on the discrimination (variation) timing of each special symbol, which causes discomfort to the player. There was a problem.

Specifically, for example, as the determination (variation) of the first special symbol, the determination (variation) of the second special symbol, that is, immediately after the special symbol variation at the 100th rotation (the final round of the time reduction) is executed. , When the 101st special figure change is executed, the time saving state can be terminated at the timing when the 100th special figure change is executed (immediately before the 101st special figure change is executed). Although it does not cause discomfort to the player, if the special figure change at the 101st rotation is not executed while the special figure change at the 100th rotation (the final time reduction number of times) is executed, for example, the 100th rotation. In the case where the special figure change of the 101st rotation is started after the special figure change of the 100th rotation is completed, the time saving state ends at the timing when the special figure change of the 100th rotation is executed. There was a problem that the player was uncomfortable with the state of the normal symbol during the change of the special symbol.

On the other hand, in the ninth embodiment, the time saving end condition is satisfied when the special figure fluctuation number (for example, 100 times) is set as the time saving ending condition for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol. The end timing of the special figure change (for example, the special figure change at the 100th rotation) and the start timing of the special figure change (for example, the special figure change at the 101st rotation) that is executed first after the time saving end condition is satisfied. It is configured to make it possible to discriminate between and, and to end the time saving state based on the timing to be executed first among any of the timings.

With such a configuration, the high probability state of the normal symbol can be set for a longer time, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that causes discomfort to the player.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, the timing at which the special figure change at the 101st rotation is executed is configured so that the timing at which the condition for executing the special figure change at the 101st rotation is satisfied can be determined, and the 101st rotation is executed. It is configured so that the time saving state ends before the special symbol is discriminated. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the time saving state from being set within the range exceeding the predetermined number of time saving times, and the lottery of the special symbol being executed in the time saving state.

In this embodiment, the end timing of the special figure change in which the time saving end condition is satisfied and the timing in which the special figure change is executed next to the special figure change in which the time saving end condition is satisfied are satisfied first. It is configured to end the time saving state based on the timing, but is not limited to this, for example, the time saving is based only on the timing when the special figure change is executed next to the special figure change in which the time saving end condition is satisfied. It may be configured to terminate the state.

With this configuration, for example, when there is a vacant period between the end of the 100th rotation special map change and the execution of the 101st rotation special map change, that is, the 100th rotation special map. When the demo screen (standby screen) is displayed after the fluctuation is completed, the time saving state can be continued even during the vacant period, so that the game state advantageous to the player (high probability state of the normal symbol) is further improved. Can be set longer.

In this case, when a game for passing a ball through the through gate 67 for starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol is performed, the ball launched by the game enters the ball for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol. It is preferable to configure the game area of the game board 13 so that the ball can enter the mouth. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a game in which only the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started without starting the fluctuation of the special symbol.

Furthermore, if a winner is won by discriminating a normal symbol (lottery), the electric accessory 64a is released so that the ball can easily enter the ball entry means for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game of executing only the determination (lottery) of the normal symbol from continuing for a long period of time.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, when a winning prize is won in a lottery of ordinary symbols, the electric accessory 64a is opened and a ball enters the lower first entry slot 64b2. Although it is configured to be easy (see Fig. 2), it is not an entrance for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol as an entrance for the ball to easily enter by opening the electric accessory 64a. , A predetermined number of prize balls may be given based on the ball entering.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the ninth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 260. The ninth embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that the content specified in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is changed, and the other electrical configurations are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted. FIG. 260 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the RAM 203 included in the main control device 110 of the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 260, the RAM 203 of the ninth embodiment is different from the RAM 203 of the first embodiment described above in that the time saving end wait flag 203ha is added.

The time saving end wait flag 203ha is a flag for indicating that it is a waiting state for ending the time saving state, and is set to on when it is a waiting state for ending the time saving state. In the ninth embodiment, a plurality of timings (time saving end timings) for ending the time saving state are set based on the number of times the special symbol changes (the number of times the special symbol changes), and any of the plurality of time saving ending timings is set. It is configured so that the time saving state ends when one of the timings is reached.

Then, when a state (standby state) in which a plurality of time saving end timings can be established is reached, the time saving end waiting flag 203ha is set to ON. Specifically, in the main control device 110, in the first special symbol change start process (see S208 in FIG. 33) and the second special symbol change start process (see S210 in FIG. 39), the game state update process (S308). ) Is executed in place of the game state update process 9 (see S396 in FIG. 263), and when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 (S604: Yes), it is set to ON (see S691). ).

Next, when the special symbol fluctuation stop processing (first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 9 (see S297 in FIG. 264), second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 9 (see S298 in FIG. 266)) is executed, or newly. When the special symbol is discriminated (1st special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (see S395 in FIG. 261)), it is referred to in the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (see S991 in FIG. When the flag 203ha is set to on, the time saving end process for ending the time saving state (see S492 in FIG. 262) is executed, and the time saving end waiting flag 203ha is set to off (S11404).

With this configuration, when the time reduction end wait flag 203ha is set to on (that is, the standby state), when any time reduction end timing arrives, it is sure to correspond to each timing. Can execute the time saving end processing. Further, since the time saving end waiting flag 203ha is set to off when the time saving end processing (see S492 in FIG. 262) is executed, it is surely prevented that the time saving end processing is executed in duplicate at a plurality of timings. can do.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the ninth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 261 to 266. The control process of the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment is the first special in place of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) with respect to the control process of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment described above. The symbol jackpot determination process 9 (see FIG. 261), the game state update process 9 (see FIG. 263) instead of the game state update process (see FIG. 36), and the first special symbol change stop process (see FIG. 38). 1 Special symbol fluctuation stop processing 9 (see FIG. 264), 2nd special symbol jackpot determination processing 9 (see FIG. 265) instead of the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 40), 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 40) The difference is that the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 9 (see FIG. 266) is executed instead of (see FIG. 45), and the time saving end process (see FIG. 262) is added. Other than that, the same processing is executed. The same processing is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (S395) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 261. FIG. 261 is a flowchart showing the details of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S395). The ninth embodiment is different in that the processes of S491 and S492 are added to the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (S395), after acquiring the data of the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (S401), is the time saving end wait flag 203ha turned on, that is, this time? It is determined whether the fluctuation start is the timing of the time reduction end (S491). When it is determined that the timing of the time reduction end is reached (S491: Yes), the time reduction end process is executed (S492), and the process proceeds to the process of S402. The details of the reduced working hours processing (S492) will be described later with reference to FIG. 262. On the other hand, in the process of S491, when it is determined that the time reduction end wait flag 203ha is not on, that is, it is determined that the current fluctuation start is not the timing of the time reduction end, the process proceeds to the process of (S491: No) S402.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not it is the timing of the end of the time reduction before acquiring the lottery result of the special symbol. By configuring before acquiring the lottery result in this way, it is possible to set the time reduction as the game state until the end of the fluctuation which is the timing of the end of the time reduction.

Next, the time saving end processing (S492) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 262. FIG. 262 is a flowchart showing the details of the time saving end processing (S492). In the time reduction end process (S492), a process for setting the game state after the time reduction end is executed.

In the time saving end processing (S492), first, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag 203g is on (S11401). When it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is on (S11401: Yes), a state command indicating the latent probability state is set (S11402), and the process shifts to S11404. On the other hand, in the process of S11401, when it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is not on (S11401: No), a state command indicating a normal state is set (S11403), and the process shifts to S11404. In the process of S11404, the time saving end wait flag 203ha is set to off (S11404), and the present process is terminated.

Next, the game state update process 9 (S396) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 263. FIG. 263 is a flowchart showing the details of the game state update process 9 (S396). In the ninth embodiment, it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 after the value of the time saving counter 203f is subtracted (S602) with respect to the game state update process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment. In this case (S604: Yes), the difference is that a process (S691) for setting the time saving end wait flag 203ha to ON is added.

Next, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 9 (S297) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 264. FIG. 264 is a flowchart showing the details of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 9 (S297). The ninth embodiment is different in that the processes of S891 and S892 are added to the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see S207 of FIG. 38) in the first embodiment. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 9 (S297), after the fluctuation of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S809), is the time saving end wait flag 203ha turned on, that is, the current fluctuation? It is determined whether or not the stop timing of is the timing of the time reduction end (S891). If it is determined in the process of S891 that the time saving end wait flag 203ha is off (S891: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S891 that the time saving end wait flag 203ha is on, the time saving end process for ending the time saving state is executed (S892), and this process is terminated. The time saving end process (S892) is the same as the time saving end process (see S492 and FIG. 262) executed in the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (see FIG. 261). Since it is not too much, the detailed explanation is omitted here.

Regarding the second special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (see FIG. 265) and the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 9 (see FIG. 266), the first special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (see FIG. 261) and the second special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (see FIG. 261), respectively. 1 Make the same changes to the special symbol fluctuation stop processing 9 (see FIG. 264) (addition of control processing to execute the time saving end processing (see FIG. 262) when the time saving end waiting flag 203ha is on). Since it is only there, the detailed explanation will be omitted.

As described above, in the ninth embodiment, the time saving end condition is set when the special figure variation number (for example, 100 times) is set as the time saving ending condition for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol. The end timing of the special figure change (for example, the special figure change at the 100th rotation) and the special figure change (for example, the special figure change at the 101st rotation) that is executed first after the time saving end condition is satisfied. It is configured so that the start timing and the start timing can be discriminated, and the time saving state is terminated based on the timing to be executed first among any of the timings.

With such a configuration, the high probability state of the normal symbol can be set for a longer time, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that causes discomfort to the player.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, the timing at which the special figure change at the 101st rotation is executed is configured so that the timing at which the condition for executing the special figure change at the 101st rotation is satisfied can be determined, and the 101st rotation is executed. It is configured so that the time saving state ends before the special symbol is discriminated. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the time saving state from being set within the range exceeding the predetermined number of time saving times, and the lottery of the special symbol being executed in the time saving state.

In this embodiment, the end timing of the special figure change in which the time saving end condition is satisfied and the timing in which the special figure change is executed next to the special figure change in which the time saving end condition is satisfied are satisfied first. It is configured to end the time saving state based on the timing, but is not limited to this, for example, the time saving is based only on the timing when the special figure change is executed next to the special figure change in which the time saving end condition is satisfied. It may be configured to terminate the state.

With this configuration, for example, when there is a vacant period between the end of the 100th rotation special map change and the execution of the 101st rotation special map change, that is, the 100th rotation special map. When the demo screen (standby screen) is displayed after the fluctuation is completed, the time saving state can be continued even during the vacant period, so that the game state advantageous to the player (high probability state of the normal symbol) is further improved. Can be set longer.

In this case, when a game for passing a ball through the through gate 67 for starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol is performed, the ball launched by the game enters the ball for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol. It is preferable to configure the game area of the game board 13 so that the ball can enter the mouth. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a game in which only the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started without starting the fluctuation of the special symbol.

Furthermore, if a winner is won by discriminating a normal symbol (lottery), the electric accessory 64a is released so that the ball can easily enter the ball entry means for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game of executing only the determination (lottery) of the normal symbol from continuing for a long period of time.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, when a winning prize is won in a lottery of ordinary symbols, the electric accessory 64a is opened and a ball enters the lower first entry slot 64b2. Although it is configured to be easy (see Fig. 2), it is not an entrance for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol as an entrance for the ball to easily enter by opening the electric accessory 64a. , A predetermined number of prize balls may be given based on the ball entering.

<10th Embodiment>
Next, the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 267 to 278. Each of the above-described embodiments has two types of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol), and when the lottery of each special symbol results in a specific lottery result (for example, a big hit or a small hit). , The privilege game (big hit game, small hit game) for operating the variable winning device (for example, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650) was configured to be executed.

In this way, when the privilege game is executed according to the lottery of the special symbol, the privilege game is executed when the lottery result becomes a specific lottery result, so that the lottery result becomes a specific lottery result. Although it was possible to give a sense of satisfaction to the player, even if the lottery of the special symbol is executed multiple times, there is a possibility that the lottery result may not be a specific lottery result, and the lottery of the special symbol may not be obtained. It was not possible to give any privilege to the player who executed.

On the other hand, in the tenth embodiment, the variable winning device (for example, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650) is activated when it is determined that the ball has entered. A ball means (specific entry port 4640 (see FIG. 267)) is provided. In this way, by configuring the variable winning device to operate only when the ball enters the specific ball entry means, a privilege is directly given to the player's game content (ball launch result). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being dissatisfied.

Here, with reference to FIG. 267, the configuration of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment will be described. The configuration of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment is the same as the configuration of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above, with the second ball slot 640 and the first variable winning device 65. , The electric accessory 64a and the lower first ball entry port 64b2 are deleted, and a ball entry port 464 is provided in place of the upper first ball entry port 64b1, and a specific entry port 4640 and its specific entry port are newly provided. It is different in that the specific accessory 4640a attached to the 4640 and the small attacker 4650 are provided. Other configurations are the same, and detailed description of the same configuration will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 267, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, the left side region (the region on the left side of the front view of the variable display device unit 80) and the left side region of the gaming region formed on the game board 13 Devices related to the game are concentrated in the lower area (the area on the lower side of the front view of the variable display device unit 80) where the ball fired in the game flows down, and the player is made to shoot the ball in the left area. It is configured to play a left-handed game.

Specifically, a through gate 67 is provided on the upstream side of the left side region, and a ball entry port 464, a specific ball entry port 4640, a small attacker 4650, and a second variable winning device 650 are provided in the lower area in order from the top. Has been done. Here, the flow of the game when the left-handed game is performed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.

Most of the balls launched by the left-handed game pass through the through gate 67 and flow down toward the lower region. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, the normal symbol discrimination (lottery) is executed based on the detection of the passage (detected by a detection switch (not shown)). In the present embodiment, when a hit of a normal symbol is won, a hit game in which the specific accessory 4640a described later is released is executed.

Of the balls that have reached the lower region, the entry port 464 is arranged so that one out of every 20 balls enters the entry opening 464. When it is detected that a ball has entered the ball entry port 464 (detected by a detection switch (not shown)), a lottery for a special symbol (first special symbol) is executed based on the detection. In addition, four prize balls are awarded to the player for each entry. Then, the ball that has not entered the entry port 464 flows down toward the specific entry port 4640, the small attacker 4650, and the second variable winning device 650 provided below the entry port 464.

Here, the specific entry port 4640 is a specific accessory that is a variable means that can be changed between a closed state that makes it difficult for the ball to enter and an open state that makes it easier for the ball to enter than the closed state. A 4640a is attached, and it is configured so that the ease of entering the ball differs depending on the variable situation of the specific accessory 4640a. The specific accessory 4640a is variably controlled by a variable control means (ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the main control device 110 (see S106 in FIG. 48)) so that the state changes according to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol. Therefore, when the ball is won by a lottery of a normal symbol executed based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, the ball is easily opened to enter the specific entry port 4640. Variable control.

Although detailed description will be described later, in the present embodiment, the specific accessory 4640a is likely to be in the open state (high probability state of the normal symbol) and the open state rather than the high probability state of the normal symbol. It is configured to be able to set a difficult state (low probability state of normal symbol), but even if the low probability state of normal symbol is set, the ball enters the specific entry port 4640. It is configured to get.

Returning to FIG. 267, the explanation will be continued. If the specific accessory 4640a is in the open state at the timing when the ball that did not enter the entry port 464 reaches the specific entry port 4640, the ball enters the specific entry port 4640 and is specified. When the accessory 4640a is in the closed state, it passes over the specified accessory 4640a in the closed state and flows down toward the small attacker 4650.

When a ball enters the specific entry slot 4640, a lottery for a special symbol (first special symbol) is executed, and one prize ball is awarded for each prize. In the present embodiment, a maximum of four special symbol (first special symbol) lottery rights executed when a ball enters the specific entry port 4640 can be reserved.

In the tenth embodiment, a plurality of nails are planted on the game board 13, and a ball flowing down the game area is guided by the plurality of nails to a position where various devices in the lower area are arranged. Flow down to. Further, in the lower region, a device provided below the number of balls guided toward the device provided on the upper side (for example, the ball entry port 464) (for example, the second variable winning device 650). ) Is configured to be larger in number of spheres guided towards.

Specifically, among the balls launched by the left-handed game, about 1 in 4 balls is guided to a position where the ball can enter the entrance 464 (upper position of the entrance 464), and 5 of them are guided. About 1 ball (that is, about 1 ball out of 20 balls launched by the left-handed game) is configured to enter the ball entrance 464.

Then, one of the balls launched by the left-handed game is guided to the specific entry port 4640 and the small attacker 4650. Despite being guided to a position where the ball can enter the ball entry port 464 (above the ball entry port 464), the specific ball entry port 4640 flows down without entering the ball entry port 464. It includes a ball and a ball that could not be guided to the entry port 464 at the stage of flowing down the left side region. Finally, the second variable winning device 650 is configured to guide almost all of the balls fired by the left-handed game.

Further, in the tenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 267, it is possible to perform a right-handed game, and the ball launched by the right-handed game is larger than the ball fired by the left-handed game. , The ball entry port 464, the specific ball entry port 4640, and the small attacker 4650 are difficult to be guided, and the second variable winning device 650 is configured to be guided at the same rate.

In this way, by making the ease of entering each ball entrance different depending on the position where the player launches the ball, it is possible to make the player play the game while competing for skill. It is possible to prevent people from getting bored early.

It should be noted that the configuration of the game board 13 provided in the tenth embodiment is not limited, and for example, it is easier to guide the ball to the small attacker 4650 by performing the right-handed game than by performing the left-handed game. It may be configured in. As a result, the player can be made to play a game in which the game method (left-handed, right-handed) can be changed according to the game result (whether or not the ball has entered the specific entry port 4640). Can be enthusiastically played.

Returning to FIG. 267, the explanation will be continued. The small attacker 4650 is provided with a small opening / closing door 4650a, which is a variable means that can be changed between a closed state that makes it difficult for the ball to enter and an open state that makes it easier for the ball to enter than the closed state. The small opening / closing door 4650a is configured so that the ease of entering the ball differs depending on the variable state. The small opening / closing door 4650a has a specific variable control means (specific ball entry process executed by the main control device 110 (see S196 in FIG. 278) so that the state changes when a ball enters the specific entry port 4640. )) Is variably controlled. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the value of the counter (first hit type counter C2) that is randomly updated when the ball enters the specific entry port 4640, and the set game. The opening pattern of the small opening / closing door 4650a is configured to be different depending on the state.

Specifically, the period (opening standby time) from when the ball enters the specific entry port 4640 until the small opening / closing door 4650a is opened is configured to be different. As a result, for example, in a gaming state (for example, a normal state) in which a long period (opening standby time) from when the ball enters the specific entry port 4640 until the small opening / closing door 4650a is opened is set, the unit time is set. It is possible to suppress the number of winning balls to the small attacker 4650 at the time of hitting, and it is easy to set a short period from when the ball enters the specific entry port 4640 until the small opening / closing door 4650a opens (for example, a gaming state). In the latent state), the number of balls won in the small attacker 4650 per unit time can be increased.

In the tenth embodiment, when a ball wins a small attacker 4650, 10 prize balls are given to one winning ball, and the above-mentioned entry slot 464 or a specific entry is provided. It is configured so that more prize balls are given than the ball mouth 4640. Therefore, by varying the number of balls winning the small attacker 4650 per unit time according to the gaming state, for example, the number of balls fired to the player by winning the ball to the small attacker 4650 is larger than the number of balls fired. It is possible to give the number of balls as a prize ball.

With this configuration, in addition to the game based on the lottery of the special symbol, the player can be made to play the game based on the ball entering the specific ball entry means (specific entry port 4640). It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Finally, the ball that did not win the small attacker 4650 also flows down toward the second variable winning device 650 provided below the small attacker 4650. The second variable winning device 650 is a variable means (operated during the jackpot game) that operates when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, as in the first embodiment described above. Since the detailed contents are the same as those of the above-described first embodiment, the detailed description thereof will be omitted. The balls that do not win in the second variable winning device 650 flow into the out port 66 formed at the lowermost position of the gaming area of the gaming board 13, and are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

In the present embodiment, the ball can be fired to the right side area of the game area (right-handed game is possible), but the game is not limited to this, and for example, a game in which the ball is fired to the right handle area of the game area. The right side area may be completely eliminated so that (right-handed game) becomes infeasible. Further, in the tenth embodiment, all the games (from the games in the normal state) can be executed only by the left-handed game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a through gate 67 or a specific entry port is used. The 4640 may be provided in the right side region and configured to change the game content according to the game state.

<Regarding the content of the production in the tenth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 268, a characteristic effect performed in the tenth embodiment will be described. In the tenth embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, the period (fixed period) from when the special symbol for indicating that the jackpot has been won is stopped and displayed until the jackpot game is executed is the jackpot type. It is stipulated to be different according to.

Then, in the tenth embodiment, the game state (latent state) in which the small attacker 4650 is easily released is set during the fixed period. That is, a game (so-called small hit RUSH) in which the small attacker 4650 is continuously opened is configured to be feasible by using a special symbol fixing period for indicating that the big hit has been won.

With this configuration, the small hit RUSH can be executed before the big hit game is executed. Since the technical idea of executing the small hit RUSH before the big hit game is executed is the same as the second embodiment described above, a detailed explanation thereof and a derivation that can be conceived based on this technical idea. The plan and the alternative plan are the same as those in the second embodiment described above, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the tenth embodiment, the same special symbol determination period as in the above-mentioned second embodiment is used as the period for executing the small hit RUSH, but the period is not limited to this, and the small hits are small in each of the above-described embodiments. The period used for frequently performing the winning game may be used. For example, as in the sixth embodiment described above, the period from the start of the jackpot game to the start of the round game (opening period) may be used. Furthermore, based on the lottery results of special symbols. The latent probability state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) may be set as the gaming state, and the small hit RUSH may be executed during the latent probability state.

Returning to FIG. 268, the description will be continued. FIG. 268 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, and FIG. 268 (b) is an execution during the symbol determination period of the special symbol. It is a figure which showed an example of the effect screen to be performed.

As shown in FIG. 268 (a), when the jackpot of the special symbol is won, "777" is stopped and displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, and "left-handed" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. Is displayed. In the present embodiment, since the left-handed game is configured to be executed in all the game states, "left-handed" is always displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. When the same game method (left-handed) is always executed as in the present embodiment, the guide display area Dm3 is displayed because the player does not need to change the game method. It may be configured not to.

Then, the character 811 is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the comment "Aim for RUSH" indicating to the player that the game period for frequently opening the small attacker 4650 starts is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of "entering the chance zone" indicating that a gaming state advantageous to the player has been set is displayed.

In the tenth embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, when a special symbol jackpot is won in a probabilistic state (high probability state of a special symbol, high probability state of a normal symbol), the special hit is won. It is configured so that the latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set during the determination period of the symbol. Then, when the gaming state is set to the latent state, an operation pattern is set in which the period (opening standby time) from when the ball enters the specific entry port 4640 until the first attacker 650 is opened is short. Since the game is configured to be easy, the game (RUSH game) that can increase the number of winning balls to the small attacker 4650 per unit time for the player ends the confirmation period of the special symbol. Will be executed.

Further, in the tenth embodiment, the fixing period of the special symbol is configured to be different depending on the winning jackpot type. Therefore, if the jackpot type with a long fixed period of the special symbol is won, the period during which the RUSH game can be executed can be lengthened, which is advantageous to the player.

Here, in each of the above-described embodiments, the stop display mode of the third symbol for indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot is set, and whether or not the game content during the jackpot game is advantageous to the player ( It is configured to be set according to whether or not the privilege (number of prize balls) that can be given to the player during the jackpot game is large or small) and the gaming state set after the jackpot game is completed is advantageous to the player. For example, when a big hit that is advantageous to the player is won, the stop display mode of the third symbol is set to the same odd number (for example, "777"), which is not advantageous to the player (disadvantageous). When the big hit is won, the stop display mode of the third symbol is configured to be set by the same even number (for example, "222").

On the other hand, in the tenth embodiment, as the stop display mode of the third symbol, whether or not the game content during the above-mentioned jackpot game is advantageous to the player (can be given to the player during the jackpot game). In addition to whether or not the privilege (number of prize balls) is large or small) and the game state set after the jackpot game is completed are advantageous to the player, whether or not the length of the symbol confirmation period is advantageous to the player. It is configured to be set accordingly.

With this configuration, by grasping the stop display mode of the third symbol, the RUSH game executed before the big hit game, the big hit game, the game state set after the big hit game ends, and the three game contents can be obtained. You can play games while predicting. In this case, for example, when the period in which the RUSH game is executed (design confirmation period), the game content of the jackpot game, and the game state set after the jackpot game ends are all advantageous to the player. It is preferable to provide a stop display mode (for example, "VVV") of the third symbol which is set only in. As a result, it is possible to make the player play the game while giving a feeling of satisfaction to the player.

Further, the stop display mode of the third symbol may be configured to be changed at predetermined timings. For example, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, it is shown that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. Among the stop display modes, a stop display mode (for example, "222") indicating that the jackpot is disadvantageous to the player is set, and then "777" during the symbol confirmation period (RUSH game), during the jackpot game. It may be configured to change the stop display mode of the third symbol so as to indicate that the player has gradually won a jackpot advantageous to the player, such as "VVV".

With this configuration, the player can be made to pay attention to the effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 while expecting that the stop display mode of the third symbol is variable. Further, in the present embodiment, the size of a plurality of benefits given to the player based on the jackpot winning is combined to set the stop display mode of the third symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each benefit is not limited to this. The size may be displayed in different modes.

For example, the type of the stop display symbol (number) of the third symbol is set according to the game state set after the jackpot game is completed, and the size of the third symbol is changed and set according to the game content during the jackpot game. However, the color of the third symbol may be changed and set according to the length of the symbol fixing period. As a result, it is possible to notify the player in detail of the content of the game to be executed in the future.

Further, in the tenth embodiment, when the latent state is set as the game state during the symbol confirmation period, the efficient RUSH game is executed, but the normal state is set during the symbol confirmation period. In that case, that is, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state and the jackpot is won, the inefficient RUSH game is executed. Therefore, when setting the stop display mode based on the length of the symbol confirmation period as the stop display mode of the third symbol, the stop display mode of the third symbol set based on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is variable. It is good to configure it so that it will. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the content of the game to be executed in the future in an easy-to-understand manner.

When the symbol determination period is entered after the display of FIG. 268 (a), the display screen shown in FIG. 268 (b) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 268 (b), during the period during which the RUSH game is being executed, "in the chance zone" is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the remaining period display mode for indicating the remaining period of the symbol determination period. "Remaining time 30 seconds" is displayed. This remaining period display mode is configured to update the number of seconds displayed according to the elapsed time, and notifies the player of the remaining period of the chance zone (design confirmation period). Further, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "Aim for a small attacker" is displayed to indicate the game content during the chance zone (during the symbol confirmation period).

The number of seconds displayed in this remaining period display mode may be set so as to indicate all of the remaining remaining period when entering the chance zone, or a period (seconds) shorter than the set symbol confirmation period. May be set to indicate, and a new number of seconds may be added to the number of seconds in the remaining period display mode displayed according to the passage of time. In addition, it is set to indicate a period (number of seconds) shorter than the set symbol confirmation period, and after the set period has elapsed, the remaining period display mode is set to "? Seconds", and the remaining period is the player. You may not understand it.

Further, in the tenth embodiment, the remaining period display mode is set so as to indicate the remaining period of the symbol fixing period in seconds, but it is possible to make the player understand that the remaining period is decreasing. Any aspect can be used, for example, the character 811 may be configured to suggest the remaining period by using an animation until it is caught by the enemy, or the period until the container containing the liquid is emptied may be used. It may be configured to suggest the remaining period. In this way, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the remaining period by using an animation showing the process of the story instead of the number of seconds.

<About the electrical configuration in the tenth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 269 to 273. The tenth embodiment is different from the second embodiment described above in that the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the contents of the RAM 203 are different from each other. The other electrical configurations are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 269 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 269, in the tenth embodiment, the small hit random number table 202b, the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab, and the out-of-type selection table 202ad are deleted from the ROM 202 in the second embodiment described above. , The second hit random number table 202ia is replaced with the second hit random number 10 table 202ia, and the jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib is provided instead of the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa, and a new specific ball entry operation pattern table 202ic is added. Is different.

The second hit random number 10 table 202ia is a second hit determined to be a hit in a state where a low probability state of a normal symbol is set with respect to the above-mentioned second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 15 (c)). The difference is that the range of the random number counter C4 is different, and the other points are the same. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents specified in the second random number 10 table 202ia will be described with reference to FIG. 270. FIG. 270 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the random number 10 table 202ia per second. As shown in FIG. 270, in the second random number 10 table 202ia, there are 231 random numbers that can be hit by the normal symbol in the low probability state (during the normal state and the latent state) of the normal symbol as the game state. , The range is "0 to 230". While the total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 233, the total number of winning random numbers is 231. Therefore, the probability of winning a normal symbol is "231/233".

On the other hand, in the high probability state (probability change state, time saving state) of the normal symbol, there are 232 random values that can be hit by the normal symbol, and the range is "0 to 231". Since the total number of random numbers that can be hit by the second random number counter C4 is 233, the total number of hit random numbers is 232, so the probability of hitting a normal symbol is "232/233". As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the random number value that is a hit of the ordinary symbol is configured to have a high probability (231/233) even for the low probability state of the ordinary symbol.

With this configuration, even in the gaming state (normal state, latent state) in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the gaming state (probability change state, time saving) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. Even if it is in the state), it is possible to easily win the prize in the lottery of ordinary symbols. In addition, since the high probability state of the normal symbol is configured so that the probability of winning is slightly higher than the low probability state of the normal symbol, the high probability of the normal symbol is higher than the low probability state of the normal symbol. It is configured so that the state is more advantageous. Further, the opening pattern of the specific accessory 4640a executed in the winning game executed when the winning is won is in the high probability state of the normal symbol as compared with the case of winning in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol. Since an open pattern is set in which it is easier for the ball to enter the specific entry port 4640 if the player wins the game, the high probability state of the normal symbol is more advantageous than the low probability state of the normal symbol. There is. It should be noted that the opening pattern of the specific entry port 4640 executed in the hit game of the normal symbol is not the state of the normal symbol (high probability state, low probability state) when the winning is won by the lottery of the normal symbol, but the winning game. It may be configured to be set according to the state of the normal symbol (high probability state, low probability state) at the time of executing.

The jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib is a data table for selecting a jackpot type when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, and is the same as the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa of the second embodiment described above. A plurality of jackpot types are defined in association with the value of the per-type counter C2.

Here, with reference to FIG. 271, the contents of the jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib will be described in detail. FIG. 271 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib. The same elements as those specified in the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa used in the second embodiment described above (for example, the time reduction counter 203f and the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad) are designated by the same reference numerals. And the detailed explanation is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 271, the jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib defines a plurality of jackpot types in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2, and is set in the time saving counter 203f for each jackpot type. The value to be set, the setting status of the probability change flag 203g, and the value set in the fixed time counter 203ad are specified.

Specifically, in the jackpot type (big hit A1 to jackpot A3) of the jackpot A in which the round game of 15 rounds is executed, the time saving counter 203f is set regardless of the game state when selected (when the jackpot is won). It is specified that the value of "10000" is set, and the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON. That is, when the jackpot A (big hit A1 to A3) is selected as the jackpot type, the probabilistic state (high probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) is set until the next jackpot is won. It stipulates. In the tenth embodiment, "10000" is set as the value of the time saving counter 203f in order to continue the high probability state of the normal symbol until the next big hit is won, but the present invention is limited to this. However, for example, a flag that is set to be on until the next big hit may be used.

Furthermore, as the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol, it is stipulated that the jackpot A1 is set to "5 seconds", the jackpot A2 is set to "60 seconds", and the jackpot A3 is set to "150 seconds". The jackpot A1 is defined in the range where the value of the counter C2 (0 to 99) is "0 to 19", the jackpot A2 is defined in the range of "20 to 23", and the jackpot A3 is defined in the range "24". That is, in the tenth embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to the jackpot A (big hits A1 to A3) is executed in 25% of the cases where the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and 80% (20 / 20 /) of them. It is stipulated that 25) is the jackpot A1, 16% (4/25) is the jackpot A2, and 4% (1/25) is the jackpot A3.

That is, in the tenth embodiment, even if the jackpot in which the most advantageous jackpot game (15 rounds of jackpot game) is executed is won, the lottery result is stopped and displayed to the player (design). If a short symbol confirmation period is selected as the confirmation period), the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed will be shortened. Therefore, for the special symbol lottery, the player can pay attention not only to whether or not the player has won the big hit, but also to the length of the symbol determination period, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the tenth embodiment, a configuration is used in which the symbol determination period is associated with the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a lottery for selecting the jackpot operation content (big hit type) and a lottery. The lottery for selecting the symbol fixing period and the lottery may be configured to be executed independently. In this case, since a plurality of symbol determination periods can be combined for a plurality of jackpot types, it is possible to provide game playability that is difficult for the player to predict.

Next, similarly to the above-mentioned jackpots A1 to A3, jackpots B1 to B3, jackpots C1 to C3, and jackpots D1 to D3 are defined, respectively.

Specifically, when the jackpot B (big hit B1 to jackpot B3) is set, the game content (5-round game) of the jackpot game, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the jackpot A, is selected (the jackpot is won). The value of "10000" is set in the time saving counter 203f when the gaming state of (when) is the normal state (low probability state of the normal symbol), and the value of "10" is set in the case of the time saving state and the probability change state. It is specified that the probability change flag 203g is set to ON.

That is, if the jackpot B is won, the jackpot game that is more disadvantageous than the jackpot A is executed, but if the game state is set to a time saving state or a probability change state, the player is asked after the jackpot game is completed. It is stipulated to be able to provide a state in which an advantageous gaming state can be set (a gaming state in which the high probability state of the special symbol is high until the next big hit and the high probability state of the normal symbol ends in 10 special symbol fluctuations). There is. Therefore, the jackpot A and the jackpot B are jackpots in which the jackpot A is more advantageous as the content of the jackpot game, but the jackpot B may be more advantageous as the game state set after the jackpot ends.

Furthermore, it is stipulated that the jackpot B1 is set to "30 seconds", the jackpot B2 is set to "90 seconds", and the jackpot B3 is set to "120 seconds" as the symbol determination period of the special symbol. The jackpot B1 is defined in the range of the counter C2 (0 to 99) in the range of "25 to 29", the jackpot B2 is defined in the range of "30 to 44", and the jackpot B3 is defined in the range of "45 to 49". There is.

That is, in the tenth embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to the jackpot B (big hits B1 to B3) is executed in 25% of the cases where the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and 20% (5 / 5 /) of them. It is stipulated that 25) is the jackpot B1, 60% (15/25) is the jackpot B2, and 20% (5/25) is the jackpot B3. Here, to explain the symbol fixing period that can be set in the case of the jackpot A and the symbol fixing period that can be set in the case of the jackpot B, the maximum value of the symbol fixing period of the jackpot A is larger than that of the jackpot B. Although it is stipulated to be longer, it is stipulated that the average value of the symbol fixing period set for the jackpot B is longer than that for the jackpot A.

In this way, the jackpot type (high risk high return) where the maximum value of the symbol confirmation period that can be set is large but the average value is small, and the jackpot type that the maximum value of the symbol confirmation period that can be set is small but the average value is large. (Low risk low return) is provided and the symbol confirmation period is set based on the selected jackpot type, so that the symbol confirmation period is set rather than completely randomly set. On the other hand, it is possible to make the player think that there is some kind of rule. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the game.

In this embodiment, the tendency of the symbol determination period that can be set according to the big hit type big classification (big hit A to big hit C) is different, but the tendency is not limited to this, and each big hit type big classification (big hit type). A high-risk, high-return symbol determination period selection group and a low-risk, low-return symbol determination period selection group may be provided within the jackpot A to jackpot C). In addition, even though the average value (expected value) of the symbol confirmation period that can be set is the same, from among a plurality of symbol confirmation period selection groups in which the maximum value and the minimum value of the symbol confirmation period that can be set are different. The player may be configured to be able to select a desired symbol determination period selection group, and may be configured to set the symbol determination period using the symbol determination period selection group selected by the player.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 271. As described above, in the present embodiment, the ratio of the jackpot type (big hit A1 to jackpot B3) in which the probability variation flag 203g is set to on after the jackpot game is completed, the so-called probability variation jackpot, is 50% (50/100) of the whole. For the remaining 50%, a jackpot type that sets the probability variation flag 203g to off after the jackpot game is completed, so-called normal jackpot, is selected.

Specifically, when the jackpot C (big hit C1 to jackpot C3) in which the game content (15 rounds game) of the same jackpot game as the jackpot A described above is set is selected (when the jackpot is won). It is stipulated that the value of "50" is set in the time reduction counter 203f regardless of the game state, and the probability variation flag 203g is stipulated to be set to off.

That is, when the jackpot C is won, the jackpot game that is advantageous to the player is executed as in the jackpot A, but the high probability state of the special symbol is not set after the jackpot game is completed, and the time reduction state of 50 times is performed. Is specified to be set. Therefore, the jackpot C is executed as a jackpot game that is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot B described above, but the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot is a jackpot that is more disadvantageous than the jackpot A and the jackpot B described above. It is a type.

Furthermore, it is stipulated that the jackpot C1 is set to "5 seconds", the jackpot C2 is set to "60 seconds", and the jackpot C3 is set to "150 seconds" as the symbol determination period of the special symbol. The jackpot C1 is defined in the range where the value of the counter C2 (0 to 99) is "50 to 54", the jackpot C2 is defined in the range of "55 to 64", and the jackpot C3 is defined in the range "65 to 74". There is.

That is, in the tenth embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to the jackpot C (big hits C1 to C3) is executed in 25% of the cases where the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and 20% (5 / 5 /) of them. It is stipulated that 25) is the jackpot C1, 40% (10/25) is the jackpot C2, and 40% (10/25) is the jackpot C3. Here, the jackpot C is defined so that the type of symbol determination period (5 seconds, 60 seconds, 150 seconds) that can be set is the same as that of the jackpot A described above, but the selection ratio is different. It is stipulated that the average value (expected value) of the symbol fixing period that can be set is higher than that of the jackpot A. As a result, the jackpot C is a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous than the jackpot A in terms of the content of the jackpot game and the game state set after the jackpot game ends, but the jackpot C is a jackpot with respect to the symbol confirmation time in which the RUSH game is executed. It is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than A.

Finally, in the jackpot D (big hit D1 to jackpot D3) in which the game content (5-round game) of the same jackpot game as the jackpot B described above is set, the game state when selected (when the jackpot is won). Regardless of this, it is specified that the value of "50" is set in the time reduction counter 203f, and the probability variation flag 203g is set to off.

That is, if the jackpot D is won, the jackpot game that is disadvantageous to the player is executed as in the jackpot B, and after the jackpot game is completed, the game state that is disadvantageous to the player is set as in the jackpot C. Has been done. Therefore, the jackpot D is the jackpot type that is most disadvantageous to the player among the above-mentioned jackpot types.

Furthermore, it is stipulated that the jackpot D1 is set to "30 seconds", the jackpot D2 is set to "90 seconds", and the jackpot D3 is set to "120 seconds" as the symbol determination period of the special symbol. The jackpot D1 is defined in the range where the value of the counter C2 (0 to 99) is "75 to 84", the jackpot D2 is defined in the range of "85 to 94", and the jackpot D3 is defined in the range "95 to 99". There is.

That is, in the tenth embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to the jackpot D (big hits D1 to D3) is executed in 25% of the cases where the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and 40% (10 / 10 /) of them. It is stipulated that 25) is the jackpot D1, 40% (10/25) is the jackpot D2, and 20% (8/25) is the jackpot D3. Here, the jackpot D is defined so that the type of symbol determination period (30 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds) that can be set is the same as that of the jackpot B described above, but the selection ratio is different. It is stipulated that the average value (expected value) of the symbol fixing period that can be set is lower than that of the jackpot B.

As described above, the jackpot D is a jackpot type that is most disadvantageous to the player in any of the jackpot game content, the game state set after the jackpot game ends, and the symbol determination time in which the RUSH game is executed.

The specific ball entry operation pattern table 202ic is a data table in which the content of the opening operation of the small attacker 4650 executed when the ball enters the specific ball entry port 4640 is defined, and the small attacker 4650 is released. The opening operation content of the small attacker 4650 is defined according to the value of the first type counter C2 and the gaming state at the time when the ball enters.

Here, with reference to FIG. 272, the contents specified in the specific ball entry motion pattern table 202ic will be described. FIG. 272 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the specific ball entry motion pattern table 202ic. As shown in FIG. 272, in the tenth embodiment, the operation content of the small attacker 4650 is defined to be the same regardless of the game state, and the game state and the value of the first type counter C2 are set. It is stipulated that the open waiting time differs depending on the situation.

Specifically, as the operation content of the small attacker 4650, an opening operation in which the opening / closing door 4650a of the small attacker 4650 is opened once is set, and the opening operation is such that the opening time reaches 1.5 seconds. Continue until the number of winning balls reaches 10. The ending period in which the opening operation is completed and the opening / closing door 4650a is closed is specified to be set for 0.5 seconds.

Next, the gaming state is the normal state, the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 89", the open waiting time is defined as "normal 1" of 20 seconds, and the opening standby time is defined in the range of "90 to 98". , "Normal 2" with an opening waiting time of 2 seconds is specified, and "normal 3" with an opening waiting time of 0.5 seconds is specified for the value of "99". Further, when the game state is a time saving state or a probable change state, the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 39", and the opening standby time of 10 seconds is defined as "time saving 1", and "40 to 89". In the range of "", "time reduction 2" with an opening waiting time of 5 seconds is specified, and in the values of "90 to 99", "time saving 3" with an opening waiting time of 2 seconds is specified. Further, the gaming state is the latent state, the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 89", and the open waiting time of 0.5 seconds is defined as "latent 1", and "90 to 97". In the range of "", "latent probability 2" with an opening waiting time of 0.2 seconds is defined, and in the values of "98 to 99", "latent probability 3" with an opening waiting time of 2 seconds is defined.

As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the opening waiting time is configured to be significantly different depending on the gaming state, and when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the ball is placed on the small attacker 4650. Even if the ball enters, the player's ball does not increase, but on the other hand, when the latent state is set as the game state, the small attacker 4650 is frequently opened, so that the player's possession You can increase the number of spheres.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 273. FIG. 273 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 203 in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 273, the RAM 203 of the tenth embodiment has a second special symbol execution area 203b, a special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i, and a small hit with respect to the RAM 203 of the second embodiment described above (see FIG. 95). Flag 203k, special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s, normal figure short fluctuation flag 203t, winning counter 203u, probability variation counter 203aa, special figure 2 symbol confirmation flag 203ac, special figure 2 confirmation time counter 203ae Is deleted, and the probability change flag 203g, the specific entry flag 203ia, and the specific entry invalid flag 203ib are added. Since the other elements are the same as the RAM 203 of the second embodiment described above, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, since the probability variation flag 203g has the same contents as the RAM 203 (see FIG. 21) of the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The specific entry flag 203ia is a flag for indicating that the ball has entered the specific entry port 4640, and is set to ON when it is determined that the ball has entered the specific entry port 4640. It is a thing. The specific ball entry flag 203ia causes a ball to enter the specific ball entry port 4640 in the specific ball entry process (see S196 in FIG. 278) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 274) of the main control device 110. When it is determined that the operation has been performed (S11501: Yes in FIG. 278), it is set to ON (see S11505 in FIG. 278).

Then, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (see S395 in FIG. 276), it is determined whether or not it is set to on (see S496 in FIG. 276), and if it is determined to be on (see FIG. 276). S496: Yes), a process for forcibly removing the lottery result of the first special symbol executed this time is executed (see S412 in FIG. 276). Then, it is set to off when the specific ball entry operation is completed.

As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the small attacker 4650 is configured to be opened when the ball enters the specific entry port 4640, and the specific entry for opening the small attacker 4650. When the operation scenario is set, the process of forcibly removing the lottery result of the first special symbol so as not to be a big hit is executed. As a result, since the jackpot of the first special symbol is not won during the period when the small attacker 4650 is open, it is possible to prevent the operation of opening the small attacker 4650 from being executed in duplicate. .. Furthermore, in order to make the variable ball entry means (small attacker 4650, second variable winning device 650), which is in a state where it is difficult for the ball to enter in the normal state (closed state), into a state in which the ball can easily enter (open state). It is possible to prevent the control of the above from being executed at the same time (overlapping).

The specific entry invalid flag 203ib is for indicating a period (specific entry invalid period) in which the operation of opening the small attacker 4650 is not performed when the ball enters the specific entry port 4640. It is set to on when the specific ball entry invalid period is set.

When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 10 (see S296 in FIG. 277), the specific ball entry invalid flag 203ib is determined to be on (S801: Yes in FIG. 277). ), Set to on (see S892 in FIG. 277). Then, in the specific ball entry process (S196 in FIG. 278), when the setting status is determined (S11502 in FIG. 278) and it is determined that the specific ball entry invalid flag 203ib is set to ON (S11502 in FIG. 278: Yes), the process of setting the specific ball entry motion scenario (S11504 in FIG. 278) is skipped. As a result, it is possible to prevent the small attacker 4650 from being opened based on the ball entering the specific entry port 4640 during the period during which the jackpot game is being executed.

<Regarding the control process in the tenth embodiment>
Here, the control process in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 274 to 278. In the tenth embodiment, since the configuration of the second special symbol is deleted and the configuration of the specific entry port 4640 is added to the second embodiment described above, the content of the control process to be executed is also included. The difference is that the control process related to the lottery (discrimination) of the second special symbol is deleted, and the control process executed when the ball enters the specific entry port 4640 is added. In addition, the control processing is different due to the difference in the control processing described above.

Specifically, instead of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment described above, the timer interrupt process 10 (see FIG. 274) is replaced with the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 97). The special symbol variation process 10 (see S195 in FIG. 275) is replaced with S154), and the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (see S395 in FIG. 276) is replaced with the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98). The point of executing the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 10 (see S296 of FIG. 277) instead of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see S257 of FIG. 99), and the specific ball entry process (see FIG. 278). It differs in that S196) of the above is added. Other than that, the same processing is executed. The same processing is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition to the above-mentioned contents, the specific contents of the control process (for example, the processing contents related to the second special symbol change) may be changed according to the configuration of the tenth embodiment. Other than the above-mentioned parts, the difference is that the corresponding processing is simply deleted, which can be easily conceived by a person skilled in the art, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 274, the contents of the timer interrupt process 10 executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 274 is a flowchart showing the contents of the timer interrupt process 10 in detail. In the tenth embodiment, the subroutine of the special symbol variation process 10 (S195) is executed instead of the special symbol variation process 2 (S154) for the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) in the second embodiment. The difference is that the subroutine of the specific ball entry process (S196) is executed. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the timer interrupt process 10 is executed, the processes S101 to S103 are executed in the same manner as the timer interrupt process described above, and then the special symbol variation process 10 (S195) is executed. In the special symbol variation processing 10 (S195), the above-mentioned special symbol variation processing 2 (see FIG. 97) can be made to execute a new special symbol variation and a point that the variation processing related to the second special symbol is deleted. The difference is that the processing content for determining whether or not it is possible has been changed. The detailed contents of the special symbol variation processing 10 (S195) will be described later with reference to FIG. 275.

Returning to FIG. 274, the explanation will be continued. When the special symbol variation process 10 (S195) is completed in the timer interrupt process 10, the same processes of S105 to S108 as in the above-mentioned special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 97) are executed, and then the specific ball entry is performed. After executing the process (S196), another process (S109) is executed to end this process.

Here, the specific ball entry process (S196) is a process executed when the ball enters the specific ball entry port 4640 (see FIG. 267), and the ball enters the specific ball entry port 4640. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the small attacker 4650 is opened, or whether or not the current entry is effectively handled, and a process for making a setting based on the determination result is performed. Specifically, the detailed contents of the specific ball entry process (S196) will be described later with reference to FIG. 278.

Next, the contents of the special symbol variation processing 10 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 275. FIG. 275 is a flow chart showing the control contents of the special symbol variation processing 10 (S195) in the tenth embodiment. When this special symbol variation process 10 (S195) is executed, it is first determined whether the current gaming state is during a big hit or during a specific ball entry (S295). In the process of S295, when it is determined that the jackpot middle flag 203o is set to on, it is determined that the current jackpot is in progress, and when it is determined that the specific entry flag 203ia is set to on. It is determined that the current ball is in the specific ball.

In the process of S295, when it is determined that the current gaming state is a big hit or a specific ball entry (S295: Yes), the special figure variation process 2 of the second embodiment described above (see S154 of FIG. 97). The same process of S202 and S203 is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S295, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not during the big hit or the specific ball entry (S295: No), the special figure variation process 2 of the second embodiment described above (S154 in FIG. 97). The same processing of S204, S205, S206, and S251 as in (see) is executed.

Then, in the process of S251, when it is determined that the special figure 1 symbol determination flag 203ab is not set to on (set to off), the first special symbol change start process 10 (S297) is executed. , End this process. The first special symbol variation start process 10 (S297) is the first special symbol variation start process (S208 in FIG. 33) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see S154 in FIG. 97) in the second embodiment described above. The difference is that the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (see S395 in FIG. 276) is executed instead of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 34). Since the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (see S395 in FIG. 276) is the same except for this, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the processing of S206, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is 0 (S206: Yes), or in the processing of S251, the special figure 1 symbol determination flag 203ab is set to ON. When it is determined that the case is true (S251: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 10 (S296) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (S395) will be described with reference to FIG. 276. FIG. 276 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (S395). In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (S395), the present is a high probability state of the special symbol with respect to the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98) of the above-mentioned second embodiment described above. When determining whether or not to refer to the probability variation flag 203g instead of the probability variation counter 203aa and whether or not to execute the lottery (big hit determination) of the first special symbol this time, special figure 2 It differs in that it refers to the specific entry flag 203ia instead of the jackpot flag 203i. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are described in detail later with the same reference numerals.

When the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (S395) is executed, first, the same process of S401 as in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98) of the second embodiment described above is performed. After that, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S495). When it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON in the processing of S495, since the current state is the high probability state of the special symbol, the lottery result of this time is based on the first random number table 202a for the high probability time. (S403).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is not set to ON in the processing of S495, since the current state is the low probability state of the special symbol, this time based on the first random number table 202a for the low probability time. The lottery result is acquired (S404). Next, when the processing of the above-mentioned S403 or S404 is completed, it is determined whether or not the specific entering ball flag 203ia is set to ON (S496), and when it is determined that it is set to ON (S496: Yes). That is, when it is determined that the ball has entered the specific entry port 4640 and the specific entry operation is being executed, the processing (S407 to S410) based on the determination of the special symbol being executed (big hit determination) is skipped. Then, after executing the same processing of S412 as the first special symbol jackpot determination processing 2 (see S356 of FIG. 98) of the second embodiment described above, this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S496, when it is determined that the specific ball entering flag 203ia is not set on (set to off) (S496: No), the first special symbol of the second embodiment described above is described. The same processes of S406 to S410 as in the jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98) are executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 277, the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 10 (S296) will be described. FIG. 277 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 10 (S296). The first special symbol variation stop process 10 (S296) deletes the update process related to the probability variation counter 203aa with respect to the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (see S257 of FIG. 99) of the second embodiment described above. A control to set a status command according to the setting status of the time reduction counter 203f and the probability change flag 203g has been added, and the content of the processing executed when the first jackpot flag 203h is set to ON has been partially changed. It is different in that it was done.

Specifically, when the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 10 (S296) is executed, first, the same S851 as the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99) of the second embodiment described above is executed. -The process of S854 is executed. Further, even when it is determined in the processing of S853 that the value of the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad is not 0 (1 or more) (S853: No), the first special symbol fluctuation stop of the second embodiment described above is performed. The process (S860) during the same fixed time as the process 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99) is executed.

When the processing of S854 is completed, next, a state command corresponding to the setting status of the time saving counter 203f and the setting status of the probability change flag 203g is set (S891), and then it is shown that the determination period of the first special symbol has ended. Special figure 1 for this purpose Set the command for ending the fixed period (S858). After that, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S801), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S801: Yes), the specific ball entry invalid flag 203ib is set to ON. (S892), a specific entry invalid command is set to indicate that the specific entry invalid flag 203ib is set to ON (S893). The command set here is the voice lamp control device by the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) of the main control device 110 in the same manner as the command set in the other control processes of the main control device 110. It is output to 113. By receiving the specific ball entry invalid command, the voice lamp control device 113 determines the period during which the specific ball entry operation is not executed even if the ball enters the specific ball entry port 4640, and the third is based on the determination result. The display mode displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 81 can be variably set.

When the process of S893 is completed, the same processes of S805 and S807 as those of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see S257 of FIG. 99) of the second embodiment described above are then executed to end this process. In the present embodiment, a process (S894) for setting the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h and the probability variation flag 203g to off is provided between the processing of S805 and the processing of S807, but the processing of S894 is provided. Since the target of the processing executed for the probability variation counter 203aa in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99) of the second embodiment described above is only changed to the probability variation flag 203g, the details thereof. Explanation is omitted.

Next, the contents of the specific ball entry process (S196) will be described with reference to FIG. 278. FIG. 278 is a flowchart showing the contents of the specific ball entry process (S196). This specific ball entry process (S196) is executed by the timer interrupt process 10 (see FIG. 274) that is repeatedly executed every 2 milliseconds in the main control device 110, and is executed at the specific ball entry port 4640. When it is determined that the ball has entered, various processes are executed.

Specifically, when the specific ball entry process (S196) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (ball entry) in the specific ball entry port 4640 (S11501). In the process of S11501, determination is executed with reference to the detection result of the detection switch (not shown) for detecting that the ball has entered the specific entry port 4640. In the process of S11501, if it is determined that there is no winning (winning) of the ball to the specific entry port 4640 (S11501: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S11501, when it is determined that the ball has won (winned) in the specific entry opening 4640 (S11501: Yes), then it is determined whether the specific entry invalid flag 203ib is set to ON. (S11502), when it is determined that the ball is set to ON (S1152: No), that is, during a period in which the specific ball entry operation based on the ball winning (winning) to the specific entry port 4640 is not executed. If there is, this process is terminated as it is. If it is determined in the process of S11502 that the specific ball entry invalid flag 203ib is not set to on (set to off) (S1152: No), then, based on the specific ball entry operation pattern table 202ic. , The specific ball entry pattern this time is determined (S11503).

Here, the contents executed in the process of S11503 will be described. As described above with reference to FIG. 272, the specific ball entry operation pattern table 202ic has a plurality of specific ball entry patterns (specific ball entry patterns) corresponding to the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 and the current gaming state. The operation scenario pattern) is specified, and in the process of S11503, the current game state is read from the game state information stored in the other memory area 203z of the RAM 203, and the value of the first type counter C2 is set. By acquiring it, the specific ball entry pattern this time is determined.

After finishing the process of S11503, next, the specific entry motion scenario corresponding to the determined specific entry pattern is set (S11504), and the specific entry flag 203ia is set to ON (S11505). Then, a specific ball entry command for indicating that the specific ball entry operation scenario is in the set period is set (S11506), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the tenth embodiment, since the specific entry port 4640 for executing the operation of opening the small attacker 4650 when the ball enters is provided, the ball is directed to the player. It is possible to make it easier to watch the flow situation of.

In addition, the period (waiting period) from when the ball enters the specific entry port 4640 until the small attacker 4650 is opened is set to the gaming state set when the ball enters the specific entry port 4640. Since it is configured to be different depending on the game state, it is possible to set a state in which the small attacker 4650 is easy to open and a state in which it is difficult to open the small attacker 4650 according to the game state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the currently set game state, and thus it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the tenth embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, the game is played during the period (symbol confirmation period) in which the third symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit is stopped and displayed. It is configured so that an advantageous gaming state (latent state) that is advantageous to the player is set, and when a ball enters the specific entry port 4640 while this advantageous gaming state is set, another It is configured so that the opening operation is set so that the period (waiting period) from when the ball enters the specific entry port 4640 to when the small attacker 4650 is opened is shorter than the state in which the game state is set. There is.

As a result, the jackpot of the special symbol is won, and the period from the stop display of the symbol (special symbol, the third symbol) for showing the lottery result to the start of the jackpot game, that is, the jackpot to the player. During the period from the notification of winning to the actual start of the big hit game, it is possible to frequently execute a special game in which the small attacker 4650 can be released.

In the tenth embodiment, the small attacker 4650 is easily released during the period (symbol confirmation period) in which the third symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit is stopped and displayed (latent probability). The state) is set, but a gaming state (latent state) in which the small attacker 4650 is easily released may be set at other timings, for example, the above-mentioned first. As in the first embodiment, it may be set during the variable display of the special symbol to indicate that the jackpot has been won, or as in the sixth embodiment described above, the round game is started after the jackpot game is started. It may be set to the period until it is executed (the opening period of the jackpot game). Further, it may be set to only one of the above-mentioned periods, or may be set by combining a plurality of periods.

Further, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, even if it is configured to execute a special game that can open the small attacker 4650 frequently before notifying the player that the lottery result of this time is a big hit. good. With this configuration, it is possible to predict that the jackpot game will be executed after the end of the special game due to the execution of the special game, so that the interest of the game can be improved. ..

Further, in the case where the special game and the jackpot game are continuously executed as in the tenth embodiment, at least a part of the display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It is good to configure it so that it is a series of productions that straddle the special game and the jackpot game. In this case, for example, the period during which the special game can be executed, that is, the information regarding the length of the symbol determination period set this time, the information regarding the game content (number of rounds) of the jackpot game, and the game set after the jackpot game ends. It is advisable to set the above-mentioned production mode of the series of effects based on the information regarding the state. As a result, it will be executed in the future based on the game content (game content of the special game, game content of the jackpot game) executed while the series of effects is displayed, and the effect content of the series of effects being displayed. It is possible to make the player predict the content of the game.

Further, in the case where the jackpot game is continuously executed after the end of the special game as in the tenth embodiment, the special game and the jackpot game are notified to the player as one jackpot game. You may set the effect mode to be performed. With this configuration, the content of the jackpot game in the production can be a combination of the setting content of the special game and the setting content of the jackpot game, so that the game content of one jackpot game can be combined. Can be set in various ways.

In the tenth embodiment, when the final display period of the special symbol indicating the jackpot winning ends (elapses), the jackpot game is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the special symbol When the ball passes through a specific area while the fixed display period has elapsed, the jackpot game is configured to be executed, and from the time when the fixed display period of the special symbol has passed until the ball passes through the specific area. The small attacker 4650 may be configured to set a gaming state (latent state) in which it is easy to open during the period.

<About the modified example of the tenth embodiment>
Here, a modified example of the tenth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIG. 279. In this modification, the starting gate 670 is provided at a position where a ball flowing down the left side region of the game board 13 (the left side region of the front view of the variable display device unit 80) can pass through the tenth embodiment described above. And, the point that the arrangement position of the specific entry port 4640 and the small attacker 4650 is changed is different. The other configurations are the same as those of the tenth embodiment, the same configurations are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the tenth embodiment described above, when the jackpot of the special symbol is won, the special symbol is variablely displayed for a predetermined period set as the variable display period, and the special symbol is set as the symbol confirmation period after the predetermined period elapses. It was configured to execute the jackpot game after displaying the suspension for a period. On the other hand, in this modification, after the special symbol is stopped and displayed for a specific period set as the symbol fixing period after the lapse of a predetermined period, the jackpot game is executed based on the ball passing through the start gate 670. It is configured in.

Then, in the period from the stop display of the special symbol to the execution of the jackpot game, that is, the total period of the symbol confirmation period and the start period until the ball passes through the start gate 670 after the symbol confirmation period has elapsed. , The advantageous gaming state (latent state) that is advantageous to the player is set.

According to the present modification configured as described above, it is possible to set an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player for a period other than a predetermined predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting the player to continue the advantageous game state for a longer period of time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 279, in this modification, the position where the ball launched to execute the special game in which the small hit attacker 4650 wins the ball, that is, the ball launched by the left-handed game can pass. Is provided with a starting gate 670. This makes it possible to prevent the special game from being performed without passing the ball through the starting gate 670 during the starting period described above.

Further, in this modification, the time from when the ball passes through the start gate 670 until the second variable winning device 650 is opened by the jackpot game is the time for the ball passing through the starting gate 670 to be the second variable winning device 650. It is configured to be shorter than the time required to reach. As a result, when the ball that has passed through the starting gate 670 reaches the second variable winning device 650, the second variable winning device 650 can be opened, so that the jackpot game can be efficiently performed. can.

As shown in FIG. 279, in this modification, a plurality of nails planted in the game board 13 are configured to change the flow direction of the ball, and the flow direction passes through the start gate 670. Since the ball is configured to pass through the start gate 670 when the direction is changed, it is difficult for the player to understand how long the start period will continue, and the game area of the game board 13 is set. It was possible to make the player interested in the flow of individual balls flowing down, but since the flowing direction of the balls is irregularly changed by multiple nails, the starting period continues for a long time. In some cases, it ended immediately.

Therefore, in the game area of the game board 13, the flow direction of the ball can be regularly distributed to the first direction and the second direction in the area where the ball can flow toward the start gate 670. A sphere flowing down the other flow path (second direction flow path) is directed toward the start gate 670 rather than one flow path (first direction flow path) distributed by the distribution means. It may be configured so that it can easily flow down.

With this configuration, it is possible to give a predetermined regularity to the flow of the ball flowing down the game area of the game board 13, so that the ball immediately passes through the start gate 670 during the start period. It is possible to prevent the situation that the situation occurs.

<About the modified example of the 7th embodiment>
Next, a modification of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 280 to 284. In the seventh embodiment described above, the ball enters the second entrance 3640 and the V winning device 650 is opened during the small hit game by one hit game of the second symbol (ordinary symbol). It was configured so that the presence or absence of the passage of the sphere to the specific region 650V in the inside could be set.

On the other hand, in this modification, in addition to the configuration of the seventh embodiment described above, the ball enters the second entrance 3640 and is small by the hit game of a plurality of second symbols (ordinary symbols). The difference is that it is possible to set whether or not the ball has passed through the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 which is opened during the winning game. Further, a maximum of four values of the second random number counter C4 that can be acquired by passing through the through gate 67 can be held and stored. Since the detailed configuration and control contents for holding and storing the second random number counter C4 are the same as those in the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 280, the content of the effect peculiar to the present modification executed by using the configuration of the present modification will be described. FIG. 280 schematically shows an example of a revival effect executed when the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is continuously won and the ball can pass through the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650. It is a schematic diagram.

As shown in FIG. 280, when the revival effect is executed, the character 811 is revived from the losing effect in the above-mentioned in-race effect using FIG. 202 (a), and the effect of winning is executed. During this revival production, a production in which the rival character 860 and the goal of the production during the race are skipped and the character 811 runs violently is executed in the main display area Dm. Here, the conditions under which the revival effect is executed will be briefly explained. In this modification, a predetermined hit game is executed in a state where the time saving state is set, and immediately after that, a normal state is set (in the next normal drawing lottery executed without a gap). When a specific winning game is executed, a ball enters the second entrance 3640 by the previously executed winning game, and the small winning game is won in the special figure 2 lottery executed based on the entry. During the hit small hit game, the ball that has flowed into the second passage 660b (see FIG. 195) due to the next hit game is configured to be able to pass through the specific region 650V, and such a state occurs. The possible state, that is, the result of the continuous drawing lottery (the result of preliminarily determining the winning information of the drawing included in the holding of the drawing) is a specific winning result, and each winning result The above-mentioned is the case where the gaming state at the time of executing the based hit game satisfies a predetermined condition, and the ball flows into the second passage 660b in at least the next (second) hit game among the continuous hit games. The resurrection production that was done is executed.

In this way, it is possible to provide a game result advantageous to the player (a state in which the ball passes through a specific area 650V during a small hit game) based on a plurality of normal drawing lottery, which is surprising to the player. It is possible to provide a certain game, and it is possible to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage. Further, by making it possible to execute an unexpected effect (revival effect) in correspondence with the above-mentioned unexpected game, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 281, the electrical configuration provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of this modification will be described. It should be noted that this modification is a modification of the above-mentioned seventh embodiment, and the basic electrical configuration is the same as that of the seventh embodiment. Here, only the configuration different from the above-described 7th embodiment will be described, and the other description will be omitted. FIG. 281 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the high probability second random number 11 table 202ja, and FIG. 281 (b) is a low probability second random number 11 table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents specified in 202jb schematically.

As shown in FIG. 281 (a), the second random number 11 table 202ja for high probability is referred to when the hit / fail determination of the second symbol is executed in the high probability state of the normal symbol, and has been described above. In the process of acquiring the lottery result (see S805 of FIG. 219) in the ordinary symbol variation process 7 (see S192 of FIG. 219) of the seventh embodiment, the currently set gaming state is the high probability state of the ordinary symbol. Referenced in some cases.

The second random number 11 table 202ja for high probability is different in that the second hit type (type per normal figure) is increased from the seventh embodiment described above. Specifically, C per normal figure is defined in the range where the value of the second random number counter C4 is "80 to 98". It should be noted that the second hit type, A per normal figure and B per normal figure, are the same as the above-mentioned seventh embodiment except that the corresponding range of the value of the second random number counter C4 is different. Therefore, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the selected second hit type (normal figure hit type) is set so that the operation content of the hit action executed is different according to the gaming state set at the timing when the hit action is executed. ..

The hit operation of A per normal figure and B per normal figure, which is executed in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, is omitted because it is the same as the seventh embodiment described above, but C per normal figure. The hitting motion is that the opening period is 0.1 seconds, the opening period is 2.5 seconds, the ending period is 1 second, and one ball enters the second entrance 3640 during the opening period. The operation is executed when the opening period ends.

That is, in the above-mentioned seventh embodiment, by setting the ending period of the time (3 seconds) or more required for the sphere to pass through the second passage 660b, based on the special figure 2 variation due to one normal drawing. During the executed small hit game, the ball flowing down to the second passage 660b based on other hits is configured so as not to pass through the specific area 650V, whereas the hit of the present variant is hit. In the hit game (hit motion) corresponding to C, the ending period is set shorter than the time required for the ball to pass through the second passage 660b (3 seconds) (0.1 seconds), and is usually executed immediately after. Based on the result of the lottery, the ball flowing into the second passage 660b can pass through the specific area 650V during the small hit game.

Specifically, when the special figure 2 lottery is executed by the winning action based on the C winning per normal figure, the next normal figure lottery can be executed 0.1 seconds after the start of the special figure 2 lottery, and then the next. If you win A per Fuzu by the Fuzu lottery, and the ball enters the second entrance 3640 in the shortest time (1.3 seconds) during the A per Fuzu, the C per Fuzu executed earlier The ball will flow into the second passage 660b 1.4 seconds after the special figure 2 lottery based on the above is started.

In such a case, the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery executed by the winning action based on the C winning per drawing is a small hit, and when the small hit game is executed, the normal drawing is performed during the small hit game. It is possible to construct a state in which the ball flowing into the second passage 660b can pass through the specific region 650V based on the winning A.

As described above, in this modified example, by winning a predetermined hit type (A, B per normal figure) immediately after winning a specific hit type (C per normal figure), a plurality of normal hits are hit. It is possible to provide a gaming state (passing the ball to a specific area 650V during a small hit game) that is advantageous to the player by the special drawing 2 lottery executed straddling the second passage and the flow of the ball to the second passage 660b. ..

The second random number 11 table 202jb for low probability is referred to when the hit / fail determination of the second symbol is executed in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, and the ordinary symbol variation process 7 of the above-mentioned seventh embodiment is used. In the process of acquiring the lottery result (see S805 of FIG. 219) in (see S192 of FIG. 219), it is referred to when the currently set gaming state is a low probability state of a normal symbol.

This low-probability second random number 11 table 202jb is different from the above-mentioned seventh embodiment in that different normal electric operation patterns are defined according to the second hit type (normal figure hit type). There is. Specifically, A per normal figure is defined in the range where the value of the second random number counter C4 is "0 to 19". If the game state when the winning action is executed is a low probability state, the winning game has an opening period of 0.1 seconds, an opening period of 1 second, and an ending period of 0.1 seconds. Is specified to be executed.

Further, B is defined for the value of the second random number counter C4 of "20". If the game state when the winning action is executed is a low probability state, the winning game with an opening period of 2 seconds, an opening period of 0.2 seconds, and an ending period of 3 seconds is executed. The value of the random number counter C4 per second is specified to be "21", and C per normal figure is specified. If the game state when the winning action is executed is a low probability state, the winning game with an opening period of 2 seconds, an opening period of 0.2 seconds, and an ending period of 3 seconds is executed. It is stipulated to be done. Then, "off" is defined in the range where the value of the random number counter C4 per second is "22 to 99".

Here, if a normal symbol is set to a low-probability state and a normal symbol is won, the winning game is electric only for a period during which the ball cannot enter the second entrance 3640. Although the accessory 3640a is configured so as not to be released, the opening period of the electric accessory 3640a is set to be long (1 second) only for the hit game based on the normal figure A. When this opening period of 1 second is set, the ball flows down on the electric accessory 3640a and flows down to a position facing the second passage 660b (see FIG. 198).

Then, when the opening period elapses for 1 second, the electric accessory 3640a is closed, the ball flows into the second passage 660b, and flows down toward the out port 66 as it is. In the normal state, since the ball does not enter the second entrance 3640, the V winning device 650 is not opened.

In this way, in the hit game executed in the low probability state of the normal symbol, the operation pattern (normal electric operation pattern) of the electric accessory 3640a is changed according to the set second hit type (normal symbol hit type). By making the passage through which the ball flows different, for example, it is possible to make the first variable winning device 65, which is opened during the jackpot game, win a ball that has passed through a plurality of passages. , It is possible to win multiple balls at once.

Further, in this modification, a hit game based on the normal symbol C is executed in a state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, and immediately after that, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set and the normal symbol hits A. When the corresponding hit game is executed, the ball that has flowed down the second passage 660b by the hit game corresponding to the normal figure hit A in the low probability state is based on the normal figure hit C executed in the high probability state. It is configured to be able to pass through a specific area 650V during the small hit game executed.

As a result, it is possible to execute a big hit game based on a small hit game even though the normal symbol has once moved to a low probability state, so that it is possible to provide a player with a surprising game. At the same time, it is possible to make the player enthusiastically play the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 282, the contents of the control process executed by the main control device 110 in this modification will be described. FIG. 281 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process 11. The through gate passing process 11 is acquired (stored) when the sphere passes through the through gate 67 with respect to the through gate passing process (see S107 in FIG. 49) executed by the seventh embodiment described above. The difference is that the process of determining (predicting) the game result in advance based on the values of various counters is executed.

When the through-gate passage process 11 (S157) is executed, first, the same processes of S1901 to S1905 as the through-gate passage process (see S107 of FIG. 49) executed by the seventh embodiment described above are executed, and then the processes of S1901 to S1905 are executed. Based on the counter value stored by the process of S1905, the winning / failing of the lottery of the ordinary symbol and the type of the normal symbol are predicted (S1951). Then, a general map winning information command including information indicating the predicted success / failure and the normal map hit type is set (S1952), and this process is terminated.

The detailed contents of the processes executed in S1951 and S1952 are those in which the targets of the processes of S1707 and S1708 of the start winning process (S105 of FIG. 47) executed for the special symbol are replaced with ordinary symbols. Therefore, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 283 and 284, the contents of the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in this modification will be described. FIG. 283 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 11. The command determination process 11 is a command (see S4182 in FIG. 226) that indicates the prize information of the normal symbol in addition to the prize information of the special symbol as the prize information with respect to the command determination process 7 (see S4182 of FIG. 226) executed by the seventh embodiment described above. The difference is that the process for determining that the Fuzu winning information command) has been received (see S12051) and the process executed when the Fuzu winning information command is received (see S12052) have been added. Are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 283, when it is determined that the winning information-related command (winning information command, general drawing winning information command) has been received (S12051: Yes), it is based on the received winning information command (general drawing winning information command). The winning information is stored in the winning information storage area 223b (S12010). Here, the winning information storage area used in this modification is configured to be able to store received winning information not only in the holding ball storage area of the special symbol but also in the holding ball storage area of the normal symbol. Then, when the processing of S12010 is completed, the normal drawing effect setting processing (S12052) is executed, and this processing is terminated.

Next, the contents of the normal drawing effect setting process (S12052) will be described with reference to FIG. 284. The normal symbol effect setting process (S12052) determines each information stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (see FIG. 21) based on the received general map winning information command, and a specific condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied, the process for specifying that the special effect can be executed is executed.

When the normal map effect setting process (S12052) is executed, first, it is determined whether the prize-related information received this time is the normal map prize information command (S13001), and if it is the normal map prize information command, the command is used. It is determined whether or not the information indicating C is included in the high-accuracy command (S13002). If it is determined in the process of S13002 that the information indicating C per the high-accuracy normal figure is included (S13002: Yes), the normal figure C winning flag is set to ON (S13003), and this process is terminated.

This Fuzu C winning flag is set to be turned on when the information (command) indicating C per high-accuracy Fuzu is received, and is set to Off the next time the Fuzu winning information command is received. It is a thing. As a result, it is possible to discriminate the received Fuzu winning information command after the Fuzu winning that indicates C per high-accuracy Fuzu.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S13002 that the information indicating C per high-accuracy normal map is not included (S13002: No), it is determined whether the information indicating A per low-accuracy normal map is included (S13002: No). (S13004), if it is determined that the item is not included (S13004: No), the winning flag of the normal figure C is set to off (S13007), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S13004 that the information indicating A per low-accuracy normal figure is included (S13004: Yes), it is determined whether the normal figure C winning flag is set to on (S13005), and it is turned on. If it is determined that it has been set (S13005: Yes), the special effect possible information is set in the corresponding Fuzu winning information (S13006), the Fuzu C winning flag is set to off, and this process ends.

If it is determined that the process is not set to ON in the process of S13005 (S13005: No), the process is terminated as it is. As a result, it is possible to predict in advance that A per low-accuracy map will be executed next to the high-accuracy map C, and it is possible to set a special effect according to the prediction result.

In addition, as in this modification, when giving a privilege that is advantageous to the player across the high probability state and the low probability state of the normal symbol, for example, the number of times the small hit is won (small hit). It is preferable to configure it so as to end the high probability state of the normal symbol based on the number of times the game is executed). As a result, the first general drawing lottery is executed in a high probability state, and the special drawing 2 lottery is executed by the winning game to win a small hit. Then, at the timing when the small hit game is executed, the high-probability state of the normal symbol is shifted to the low-probability state.

Since the high probability state of the normal symbol is still set at the timing when the special figure 2 lottery is executed, the next normal figure lottery is executed in the high probability state. Then, after the variation time when the small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, the winning game based on the next general drawing lottery is executed after the start timing of the small hit game to be executed. Set the fluctuation time of the fluctuation of the normal map in the stochastic state. With this configuration, the winning game based on the next general drawing lottery can be easily executed with the operation pattern in the low probability state.

<Modified example of the fourth embodiment>
Next, a modification of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 285 to 296. Among the above-described embodiments, in the embodiment using the technical idea of the first embodiment, the first is in the state where the probabilistic state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set. When a big hit is won by lottery of a special symbol (special figure 1), the game state during the jackpot fluctuation is set to be a latent state, and when the latent state is set, the second special symbol (2nd special symbol) By facilitating the lottery of the special figure 2), the small hit game is easily executed.

In the embodiment configured in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a game (so-called RUSH game) in which a small hit game is frequently generated by using the period during the big hit fluctuation of FIG. Since it is possible to continuously provide a plurality of different privilege games (RUSH game, jackpot game) to a player, the player can be more motivated to aim for a jackpot winning game. It is possible to improve the interest of.

Further, in the first embodiment described above, the jackpot winning of the special symbol is duplicated, and the jackpot is won in the lottery of the special figure 1 in order to prevent the player from being given an excessive privilege. In the lottery of Special Figure 2 executed during the jackpot fluctuation, the jackpot is not won. As a result, even if the special figure 2 lottery is executed a plurality of times during the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 1, the big hit of the special figure 2 will not be won. Therefore, the period from the end of the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 1 to the start of the jackpot game (the jackpot fluctuation period of the special figure 1) can be set as the RUSH game period.

In addition, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, it is stipulated that the length of the fluctuation time (minimum 60 seconds, maximum 600 seconds) that can be set when the jackpot of Special Figure 1 is won is set to have a range (minimum 60 seconds, maximum 600 seconds). 19 (b)), in the state where the probabilistic state is set as the game state, when the jackpot of the special figure 1 is won, that is, when the RUSH game is executed, FIG. 7 (a) is shown. As described above with reference to the above, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to stop and display the effect symbol 813 for suggesting the current jackpot fluctuation period. Then, the display of the effect symbol 813 which is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 1 starts according to the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 set this time and the type of the winning jackpot. It was configured to change the mode.

In this way, the player is configured to stop and display the effect symbol 813 on the third symbol display device 81 so as to suggest the length of the set special symbol fluctuation time instead of determining whether the special symbol lottery is successful or not. On the other hand, the display mode of the symbols stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 could be more interesting, and the effect of the effect could be enhanced.

However, in the above-mentioned production of the first embodiment, it is executed at the time when the jackpot fluctuation of FIG. 1 starts (at the time when the RUSH game starts), the length of the current RUSH game period, or after the end of the RUSH game. Since the content of the jackpot game is suggested to the player, there is a risk that the game motivation during the RUSH game may be reduced depending on the suggested content. Specifically, for example, a short fluctuation period (for example, 60 seconds) is set as the RUSH period (special figure 1 fluctuation period), and the winning jackpot type is more disadvantageous to the player than the other jackpot types. In the case of the type (for example, jackpot D), the jackpot winning of the special figure 1 this time is a lottery result that is not so advantageous to the player by grasping the display mode of the stopped-displayed effect symbol 813. There was a problem that the interest of the game during the RUSH period was lowered.

Here, if the display mode of the staging symbol 813 is configured so as not to be related to the length of the RUSH game period or the content of the jackpot game executed after the end of the RUSH game, the above-mentioned problem will occur. However, it is not an effective measure because it eliminates the enjoyment of predicting future game development (RUSH game period and jackpot game content) based on the display mode of the staging symbol 813.

On the other hand, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the lottery result (variable time, jackpot game content) of the changing special figure 1 is based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the variable period of the special figure 1. , The game state set after the jackpot game ends) is configured to execute the suggestion effect. Then, the effect mode of the suggestion effect is changed depending on the result (presence or absence of a hit) of the special figure 2 lottery executed during the variable period of the special figure 1 and the number of times.

With this configuration, the more the special figure 2 lottery is executed during the change period of the special figure 1, the easier it is to predict the lottery result of the special figure 1 that is changing. During the period, the player can be enthusiastically executed the special figure 2 lottery.

Further, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the RUSH game is executed by the special figure 2 lottery during the variable period of the special figure 1 in which the latent probability state is set, as in the first embodiment described above. Therefore, it is possible to more enthusiastically execute the special figure 2 lottery during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1.

It should be noted that the modified example of the fourth embodiment is a modification of the fourth embodiment using the configuration of the first embodiment described above, in which a part of the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed and the execution is performed. It is different from the point that the production mode to be performed is changed, and the other elements are configured to be the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the content of the production in the modified example of the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 285 and 286, a characteristic effect performed in the modified example of the fourth embodiment will be described. In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, during the RUSH game period (during the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation period in which the latent state is set), the lottery of the special figure 1 jackpot this time is based on the lottery of the special figure 2. It is configured to be different from the above-described fourth embodiment in that a suggestion effect for suggesting a result is executed.

In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, as the suggestion effect, the effect of suggesting the game content corresponding to the winning jackpot type and the game state set after the jackpot game is completed to the player is executed. ing. Then, in order to show the lottery result of the special figure 2, the display mode of the third symbol stopped and displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2 of the third symbol display device 81, the combination of numbers, and the combination of numbers can be changed, or during the RUSH period. The suggestion effect is executed by changing the effect mode of the RUSH middle effect (the effect of displaying the effect symbol 813 from the treasure box 812) showing the result of the special figure 2 lottery.

Next, an example of the actual production content will be described. Here, 110 seconds is set as the jackpot fluctuation time of Special Figure 1, 15 rounds of round games are executed as the jackpot game, and after the jackpot is completed, a probability change state that is advantageous to the player is set (big hit (big hit (big hit (big hit (big hit)). An example of winning the 15R probability change)) will be described. FIG. 285 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a small hit is won during the RUSH period, and FIG. 285 (b) is displayed when a loser is won during the RUSH period. It is a figure which showed an example of the display screen.

As shown in FIG. 285 (a), in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the remaining time of the current RUSH game period is displayed on the display screen (FIG. 7 (b)) of the first embodiment described above. The remaining time display 851 and the small hit number display 825 indicating the number of times a small hit was won during the current RUSH game period are different in that they are configured to be displayed, and are otherwise the same. .. The same elements (display contents) are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 285 (a) shows the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 10 seconds after the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation, and the remaining time display 851 is “100 seconds”, that is. A value obtained by subtracting 10 seconds that have already passed from the fluctuation time of 110 seconds is displayed, and "1" indicating that the number of small hits won during the RUSH game period is one is displayed on the small hit number display 825. There is. Since the value of the small hit number display 825 is configured to be updated (1 addition) at the timing when the small hit game is started, the state shown in FIG. 285 (a) is already 1. It indicates the state in which the second small hit is won (stopped and displayed) while the small hit game is being executed.

Next, the content of the effect related to the suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. 286 (b). FIG. 286 (b) shows a display screen when the lottery result of the special figure 2 is out of order. In this symbol 286 (b), "95 seconds" is displayed as the remaining time display 851. In this modification, as in the first embodiment described above, the variation time of the variation in Special Figure 1 is not subtracted during the period during which the small hit game is being executed. Therefore, FIG. 286 ( The state shown in b) is a state in which the small hit game is completed from the state shown in FIG. 286 (a) described above, and 5 seconds have elapsed thereafter. Therefore, the value of the small hit number display 825 is added by 1 from FIG. 286 (a), and "2" is displayed.

As described above, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the display mode (display mode of the third symbol or the effect symbol 813) for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery executed during the RUSH game period is used. Therefore, it is configured to suggest the result of the special figure 1 lottery currently being displayed in a variable manner to the player.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 285 (b), as a suggestion display mode, a stop display mode (Kanji) of the third symbol for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 which is stopped and displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2. Is different from the normal stop display mode (display mode shown in FIG. 285 (b)), or as the effect symbol 813 displayed from the treasure box 812, if it is different from the normal display mode. A gorgeous display mode is displayed.

In this way, by configuring so as to suggest the lottery result of the special figure 1 by using the display mode for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2, the lottery result of the special figure 2 and the lottery result of the special figure 1 can be obtained. , Can be discriminated by the display mode of one symbol, so that the player can be more interested in the display mode of the symbol that is stopped and displayed.

Further, as will be described in detail later, the smaller the remaining period of the RUSH game period, the easier it is to set the effect mode in which the lottery result of the special figure 1 is easily determined as the suggestion mode. Therefore, in any period during the RUSH game period, by executing the special figure 2 lottery, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game in order to grasp the lottery result of the special figure 1 in advance.

Next, the production content of the jackpot content suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. 286. As described above with reference to FIG. 285, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the symbol (third symbol or effect symbol 813) for showing the result of the special drawing 2 lottery executed during the RUSH game period. The display mode is configured to display a suggestion display mode in which the display mode is changed according to the lottery result of the special figure 1 during the variable display. In addition to this, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the lottery result of the special figure 2 executed during the RUSH game period (for example, the number of small wins has reached 10 times). In the case), the jackpot content suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result of the special figure 1 is configured to be executed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds).

As a result, the player enthusiastically executes the special figure 2 lottery while expecting that the jackpot content suggestion effect is executed during the RUSH game period, so that the operation of the game can be improved.

Here, the specific contents of the production will be described. FIG. 286 (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents displayed during the jackpot content suggestion effect, and FIG. 286 (b) is an example of display contents in which the effect result of the jackpot content suggestion effect is displayed. It is a figure which showed. In FIG. 286 (a), "10" is displayed as the small hit number display 825. Then, in order to notify the player that the number of small hits reaches 10 times is the execution timing (establishment condition) of the big hit content suggestion effect, the display mode of the small hit number display 825 is changed to a normal display mode (a normal display mode). A highlighting mode different from that of FIG. 285 (b) is displayed.

Further, when the jackpot content suggestion effect is executed, the next jackpot notice 865 is displayed in the lower left of the main display area Dm as a notification mode for notifying the game of the outline of the effect currently being executed, and the main display area Dm. Three treasure chests (treasure chest 812, treasure chest 860, treasure chest 870) are displayed. Of these three treasure chests, the treasure chest 812 is used to display the effect symbol 813 for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 as described above with reference to FIG. 285.

Then, the treasure box 860 suggests to the player whether or not the gaming state after the end of the next jackpot (after the end of the jackpot based on the currently variable display 1) is a gaming state advantageous to the player ( It is used for notification), and is displayed in a display mode with the characters "certain" to indicate that fact. In addition, the treasure box 870 is used to suggest (notify) the content (number of rounds, etc.) of the next big hit game to the player, and the letter "R" is added to indicate that fact. It is displayed in the displayed mode. As a result, even if a plurality of treasure chests are displayed in the main display area Dm, the player can easily grasp which treasure chest suggests (notifies) what, thus providing an easy-to-understand effect. can do.

In the sub-display area Ds, a display of "RUSH in progress" to indicate that the current RUSH game period is in progress and a comment of "Open the box with the power of V" to guide the jackpot content suggestion effect are displayed. Will be done. As shown in FIG. 286 (a), this jackpot content suggestion effect is executed independently of the effect for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 (the effect using the treasure box 812). During the period when this jackpot content suggestion effect is being executed, the jackpot content suggestion effect is prioritized (emphasized) and displayed over the effect for showing the lottery result of Special Figure 2. There is. Specifically, the treasure box (treasure box 860, treasure box 870) used for the jackpot content suggestion effect is displayed in a larger display mode than the treasure box (treasure box 812) used for the effect for showing the lottery result of Special Figure 2. It is configured to be. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the jackpot content suggestion effect.

Then, at the timing of showing the effect result of the jackpot content suggestion effect, the treasure chest 860 and the treasure chest 870 are opened as shown in FIG. 286 (b), and the display mode showing the content of the next jackpot is displayed from the inside. In the example shown in FIG. 286 (b), the treasure box 860 is opened and the character "lucky" is displayed as the game state suggestion display 861, and the treasure box 870 is opened and the character "odd number" is displayed as the round number suggestion display 871. To.

Further, the effect result of the jackpot content suggestion effect executed during one RUSH game period is displayed as a history on the suggestion history display 880. In this modification, the execution condition of the jackpot content suggestion effect can be satisfied multiple times during one RUSH game period, and the reliability of the suggestion content increases as the number of executions of the jackpot content suggestion effect increases. It is configured to be high (to make it easier for the player to grasp the actual lottery result).

By using the suggestion history display 880 in the present modification configured as described above and displaying the effect result of the jackpot content suggestion effect as a history, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect. Further, the suggestion history display 880 has a plurality of stages of display modes (“cross mark”, “triangle mark”, “circle mark”) based on the effect result of the jackpot content suggestion effect and the actual special figure 1 lottery result. Because it is configured to display The result can be notified.

In this modification, the display mode of the suggestion history display 880 is changed according to the effect result of the one-time jackpot content suggestion effect, but the display mode is not limited to this, for example, once. The suggestion history display 880 may be configured to have a specific display mode only when the jackpot content suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times during the RUSH game period and each effect result is a specific combination. With this configuration, even if the first jackpot content suggestion production is a production result that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a production result that suggests that the number of round games is a small jackpot), the next time. The game can be enthusiastically performed so that the jackpot content suggestion effect is executed.

The details will be described later, but the display content (display mode) showing the effect result of this jackpot content suggestion effect includes a strong suggestion display that is easy for the player to predict, and a weak suggestion display that is harder to predict than the strong suggestion display. Is configured to be set, based on the lottery result of Special Figure 1, the display mode of the suggestion history display 880 (the effect result of the jackpot content suggestion effect that has already been executed), and the number of executions of the jackpot content suggestion effect. The selection ratio between the strong suggestion display and the weak suggestion display is different. Further, only when a specific condition is satisfied, the effect of confirming the content of the next big hit and the effect of a privilege different from the suggestion of the content of the big hit are executed.

With this configuration, the player who has almost determined the next jackpot content by the already executed jackpot content suggestion effect will continue to enthusiastically establish the conditions for establishing the jackpot content suggestion effect. You can play a game.

In this modification, the treasure box (treasure box 812) used for the effect of showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 and the treasure box (treasure box 860, treasure box 870) used for the jackpot content suggestion effect are separated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one treasure box may be used to perform an effect for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 and an effect for suggesting the contents of the jackpot. In this case, it is preferable to configure the effect mode of the jackpot content suggestion effect to be variable so that the timing of displaying the effect symbol 813 and the timing of displaying the effect result of the jackpot content suggestion effect are different. As a result, even if one treasure box is used, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect, and it is possible to make the player think that the lottery of the special figure 2 is being executed more than the actual one.

Further, in this modification, a plurality of elements (number of round games and game state after the end) for showing the contents of the jackpot are individually displayed as the production result of the jackpot content suggestion effect. Not limited to this, only one of them may be configured to be displayed as the effect result of one big hit content suggestion effect. In this case, the player may be configured to be able to select which element the jackpot content suggestion effect is to be executed.

Further, in this modification, the effect results for a plurality of elements (the number of round games and the game state after the end) for showing the jackpot content as the effect result of the jackpot content suggestion effect are displayed at the same time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display may be configured to be displayed at a different timing. In this case, even if the element that results in a lottery result that is advantageous to the player and the element that results in a lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player are determined, and the element to be displayed first is determined based on the determination result. good. Specifically, it is preferable to configure so that the elements that result in the lottery that is advantageous to the player are displayed later. As a result, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game so that the player can perform many jackpot content suggestion effects.

In addition, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, as a result of the special figure 2 lottery during one RUSH game period, the big hit is based on the number of times the small hit is won and the number of times the special figure 2 lottery is executed. It is configured so that the execution condition of the content suggestion effect is satisfied, but in addition to this, for example, it is suggested that the number of times that the special figure 2 lottery is won out has reached a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). It may be set as an execution condition of the effect. As a result, even if the result of the special figure 2 lottery is a lottery result (missing) that is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation to play. Further, not only the result of the special figure 2 lottery during one RUSH game period but also the execution condition of the jackpot content suggestion effect may be set so as to straddle a plurality of RUSH game periods. With this configuration, even after the content of the next jackpot game is found to be disadvantageous to the player, the motivation is to facilitate the execution of the jackpot content suggestion effect during the next RUSH game period. It is possible to play a game in a targeted manner.

Further, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, it is configured to suggest a plurality of elements (the number of round games and the game state after the end) for showing the big hit contents as the production result of the big hit contents suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an effect result in which the above-mentioned plurality of elements are fused may be suggested. In addition, the remaining period of the RUSH game period is configured so that the player cannot grasp it, and as a result of the effect of the jackpot content suggestion effect, the remaining period of the RUSH game period, that is, the remaining variation time of the special figure 1 is suggested. It may be configured.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the modified example of the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 287 to 289, the electrical configuration in the modified example of the fourth embodiment will be described. The modified example of the fourth embodiment is different from the fourth embodiment described above in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. Other points are the same as those in the fourth embodiment, the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 287 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the modified example of the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 287 (a), it differs from the above-described fourth embodiment in that the suggestion mode selection table 222ja is provided and the suggestion staging selection table 222jb is provided.

The suggestion mode selection table 222ja is a second special symbol (special figure 2) in the RUSH game executed when the latent state is set as the game state during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 1). It is referred to when setting a suggestion mode that suggests the lottery content (big hit game content, game state set after the big hit game) of the special figure 1 during the jackpot fluctuation by using the effect mode for showing the lottery result of. Data table.

Here, the contents specified in the suggestion mode selection table 222ja will be described with reference to FIG. 288. FIG. 288 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the suggestion mode selection table 222ja. As shown in FIG. 288, the suggestion mode selection table 222ja corresponds to the acquired value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb, the remaining time information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p, and the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc. It is specified that a plurality of suggestion modes are selected.

In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the suggestion mode is not set as the type of the suggestion mode defined in the suggestion mode selection table 222ja, and the suggestion content is weak, that is, the player draws a special figure 1 lottery. "Weak suggestion" that makes it difficult to determine the lottery result (big hit content) and "Strong suggestion" that makes it easier for the player to determine the lottery result (big hit content) of the special figure 1 lottery than "weak suggestion" are stipulated. When "normal" is selected as the suggestion mode, a normal effect mode (see FIG. 285 (a)) is displayed as an effect mode for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery.

Further, when "suggestion weak" is selected as the suggestion mode, for example, the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery cannot be specifically determined by the player, but is the lottery result advantageous to the player? An effect mode (see FIG. 285 (b)) that suggests whether or not it is displayed is displayed. Further, when "suggestion strength" is selected as the suggestion mode, for example, the suggestion mode to the extent that the player can specifically discriminate the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery (for example, the lottery result of the special figure 2 is shown. The effect mode for this purpose is configured to display the number of rounds executed in the winning jackpot game and the suggestion mode with identification information for indicating the game state set after the jackpot game is completed). .. As described above, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, since the suggestion mode selection table 222ja is configured to select one type from a plurality of suggestion mode types having different suggestion degrees, the RUSH game period. It is possible to enthusiastically play the game so that the suggested mode is displayed multiple times.

To specifically explain the specified contents for the plurality of suggested mode types described above, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation count counter 223jb is "1 to 5", and the remaining time information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p is If it is "within 10 seconds", "normal" is specified regardless of the range of the value of the acquired suggestion effect counter 223jc, and if the remaining time information is "11 seconds to 90 seconds", it is acquired. The value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc is defined as "normal" in the range of "0 to 89" and "weak suggestion" in the range of "90 to 99". When the remaining time information is "91 seconds or more", "normal" is defined regardless of the range of the acquired suggestion effect counter 223jc value.

Further, when the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation frequency counter 223jb is "6 to 39" and the remaining time information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p is "within 10 seconds", the acquired suggestion effect counter is obtained. "Normal" is defined in the range of "0 to 59" for the value of 223jc, "strong suggestion" is defined in the range of "60 to 89", and "weak suggestion" is defined in the range of "90 to 99". ing. When the remaining time information is "11 seconds to 90 seconds", the acquired suggestion effect counter 223jc value is "normal" in the range of "0 to 89" and "weak suggestion" in the range of "90 to 99". Is stipulated. When the remaining time information is "91 seconds or more", "normal" is defined in the range of the acquired suggestion effect counter 223jc value of "0 to 59" or "90 to 99", and "60". "Weak suggestion" is defined in the range of "~ 89".

In addition, when the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation frequency counter 223jb is "40 or more" and the remaining time information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p is "within 10 seconds", the acquired suggestion effect counter. "Normal" is defined in the range of "0 to 59" for the value of 223jc, and "strong suggestion" is defined in the range of "60 to 99". When the remaining time information is "11 seconds to 90 seconds", the acquired suggestion effect counter 223jc value is "suggestion weak" in the range of "0 to 89" and "suggestion weak" in the range of "90 to 99". "Strong" is stipulated. When the remaining time information is "91 seconds or more", "suggestion strength" is defined regardless of the value of the acquired suggestion effect counter 223jc value.

As described above, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the larger the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb is, the more the lottery of the special figure 1 during the jackpot fluctuation is made according to the above-mentioned provisions of the suggestion mode selection table 222ja. Since the content can be easily grasped by the player, the player can be made to execute the special figure 2 lottery as much as possible.

Further, when the value of the fluctuation frequency counter 223jb in FIG. 2 is "1 to 5", indicating that the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p is within the remaining time of 10 seconds, it is a suggestion mode. Is configured so that is not selected. That is, in the state where the RUSH game is being executed, if the number of special drawing 2 lottery is small and the remaining time is short, it is possible that the RUSH game is not actively performed, so that the jackpot to be executed later The suggestion mode is difficult to select in order to prevent the player from easily suggesting the content of the game. With this configuration, the special figure 2 lottery can be enthusiastically executed in order to quickly grasp the lottery result of the special figure 1 which is currently changing.

In addition, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the larger the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb during the RUSH game period, the easier it is to select the suggestion mode that the player can easily discriminate. ing. With this configuration, the player can be made to play the game more enthusiastically.

In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the suggestion mode is selected based on the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation frequency counter 223jb and the information of the remaining time storage area 223p, but the present invention is limited to this. Without this, for example, the ratio in which the suggestion mode is selected may be changed according to the lottery result of the special figure 1 during the change. ) May be configured so that the suggestion mode is more easily selected than when the jackpot type (for example, jackpot D), which is more disadvantageous to the player than the jackpot A, is won. Further, in this case, when the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation frequency counter 223jb is a predetermined value (for example, 39) or less, the ratio at which the suggestion mode is selected is set to be the same (including the same concept including some errors). When it is larger than a predetermined value (for example, 39), the suggestion mode may be selected at a different rate. With this configuration, the player can be made to play the game more enthusiastically.

Further, in this modification, the suggestion mode is displayed so as to suggest the content of the next big hit game to the player based on the display content, but the suggestion is not limited to this. The frequency at which the mode is displayed is changed according to the winning jackpot type (the jackpot game to be executed), and the content of the next jackpot game is suggested to the player according to how many times the suggested mode is displayed. It may be configured.

The suggestion mode selection table 222ja is a suggestion mode setting process (FIG. 295) executed when it is determined in the variation display setting process 11 for special figure 2 (see S5195 in FIG. 294) that the latent probability state is set. When the suggestion mode is selected, the display mode corresponding to the set variation pattern of the special figure 2 and the selected suggestion mode type is set (see FIG. 295). See S14204). As a result, when the variation pattern of the corresponding special figure 2 is out of alignment, it is suggested that the display mode of the symbol (third symbol, effect symbol 813) indicating that the lottery result of the special figure 2 is out of alignment is selected. Since it can be variably displayed in the display mode corresponding to the mode, it is possible to provide the player with the notification of the lottery result of the special figure 2 and the suggestion of the lottery result of the special figure 1 at once. can.

Returning to FIG. 287 (a), the description will be continued. The suggestion effect selection table 222jb is a second special symbol (special figure 2) during the RUSH game executed when the latent state is set as the game state during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 1). When the lottery result of is satisfied with the predetermined conditions, it is referred to when setting a suggestion effect suggesting the lottery contents (big hit game contents, game state set after the big hit game is completed) of the special figure 1 during the big hit fluctuation. It is a data table.

Here, with reference to FIG. 289, the contents specified in the suggestion effect selection table 222jb will be described. FIG. 289 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the suggestion effect selection table 222jb. As shown in FIG. 289, the suggestion effect selection table 222jb was won by the acquired value of the small hit count counter 223cc, the suggested information stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja, and the lottery of the special figure 1. It is stipulated that a plurality of suggestion effects are selected in correspondence with the information indicating the jackpot type and the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc.

In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, as the type of the suggestion effect defined in the suggestion effect selection table 222jb, "failure" in which the suggestion effect is not executed and the suggestion content are weak, that is, the player draws a special figure 1 lottery. "Weak suggestion" that makes it difficult to determine the lottery result (big hit content), and "Strong suggestion" that makes it easier for the player to determine the lottery result (big hit content) of the special figure 1 lottery than "weak suggestion". On the other hand, it is suggested that "confirmation" to notify the lottery result (big hit content) of the special figure 1 lottery and "privilege effect" to be executed when the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery has already been notified to the player. "Pounding production", which is a fanning production that does not include content, is stipulated.

The suggestion effect selection table 222jb is determined when it is determined in the small hit-related process 11 (see S14574 in FIG. 292) that the execution condition of the suggestion effect (the number of small hit wins is a multiple of 10) is satisfied (FIG. 292). S4753: Yes) When it is determined in the suggestion effect setting process (see S14001 in FIG. 293) that the remaining time of the RUSH game period is 5 seconds or more (S14102: Yes in FIG. 293), the suggestion effect is executed. Referenced for (S14106 in FIG. 293).

When "Failure" is selected as the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect is executed (although the display screen of FIG. 286 (a) is displayed), but the effect ends without opening the treasure chests 860 and 870. Is executed. That is, the effect that does not suggest the lottery result of the special figure 1 to the player is executed. When "weak suggestion" or "strong suggestion" is selected as the suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 286 (b), the treasure chests 860 and 870 are opened as the effect result of the suggestion effect, and the lottery result of Special Figure 1 is selected. A comment (game state suggestion display 861, round number suggestion display 871) suggesting (big hit content) appears. The content of this comment is variably set according to the suggestion effect type selected as the suggestion effect.

When "confirmed" is selected as the suggestion effect, the effect of notifying the lottery result of the special figure 1 is executed from the treasure chests 860 and 870 as the effect result of the suggestion effect. In this modified example, "determination" is selected as the suggestion effect only when the lottery result is most advantageous to the player.

Further, when the "privilege effect" is set as the suggestion effect, an effect that is difficult to see elsewhere (for example, an effect in which the character wears a special costume to congratulate the player) is executed. As a result, even a player who has already grasped the contents of the next big hit during the RUSH game period can be enthusiastically played to continuously execute the suggestion effect.

In addition, when the "pounding effect" is set as the suggestion effect, the effect result suggesting the jackpot content to the player is not displayed as in the above-mentioned failure effect, but the treasure chests 860 and 870 (see FIG. 286 (b)). ) Is executed until the opening effect. In this way, as an effect in which the effect result suggesting the jackpot content to the player is not displayed (gase effect), the process of executing the same effect mode as the effect in which the effect result suggesting the jackpot content to the player is displayed is executed. By making it possible to set a different staging effect, the player can pay attention to the content of the suggestion effect until the end.

In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, a plurality of effect modes (comment contents displayed from each treasure box) are stored corresponding to the types of suggestion effect modes selected by using the suggestion effect selection table 222jb. It has means (not shown), and one effect mode is set from a plurality of effect modes stored in the storage means. Thereby, it is possible to provide the player with a wider range of suggestion effects than the number of suggestion effect types defined in the suggestion effect selection table 222jb. Further, the suggestion effect history displayed on the suggestion history display 880 of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 displays the display mode corresponding to the type of the suggestion effect mode selected by using the suggestion effect selection table 222jb. It is configured to be done. As a result, even if a wide range of suggestion effects are executed, the suggestion effect history can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner after the suggestion effects are executed.

To specifically explain the above-mentioned provisions for the plurality of suggested effect types, when the value of the small hit count counter 223 cc is "10", that is, when the execution condition of the suggested effect is satisfied for the first time during the RUSH game period. , Suggested information is not stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja (“-”), and the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc is in the range of “0 to 59” regardless of the jackpot type of Special Figure 1. "Failure" is stipulated, and "weak suggestion" is stipulated in the range of "60 to 99".

When the value of the small hit count counter 223cc is "20", the suggested information is not stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja ("-"), that is, the value of the small hit count counter 223cc is "10". When "Failure" is selected in the suggestion effect executed in the case of "", the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc is "weak suggestion" in the range of "0 to 59" regardless of the jackpot type in Special Figure 1. Is specified, "strong suggestion" is specified in the range of "60 to 89", and "failure" is specified in the range of "90 to 99".

On the other hand, when the suggested information is stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja (“Yes”), that is, when the value of the small hit count counter 223cc is “10”, the suggestion effect is “suggested”. When "weak" is selected, "failure" is defined in the range where the jackpot type in Special Figure 1 is "A" and the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc is "0 to 59", and "60 to 89". "Strong suggestion" is defined in the range of "90 to 99", and "failure" is defined in the range of "90 to 99". Further, the jackpot type in Special Figure 1 is "B to D", "failure" is defined in the range where the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc is "0 to 89", and "suggestion" is defined in the range of "90 to 99". "Strong" is stipulated.

When the value of the small hit count counter 223cc is "30", the suggested information is not stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja ("-"), that is, the value of the small hit count counter 223cc is "10". , And when "Failure" is selected in the suggestion effect executed when "20", the jackpot type in Special Figure 1 is "A" and the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc is "0 to". "Strong suggestion" is defined in the range of "59", and "weak suggestion" is defined in the range of "60 to 99". Further, the jackpot type of the special figure 1 is "B to D", and the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc is defined as "weak suggestion" in the range of "0 to 99".

On the other hand, when "suggested weak" (yes, weak) is stored as suggested information in the suggested information storage area 223ja, the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc is "0" regardless of the jackpot type in Special Figure 1. "Strong suggestion" is defined in the range of "59", and "failure" is defined in the range of "60 to 99". Further, when "suggested strong" (yes, strong) is stored as suggested information in the suggested information storage area 223ja, the jackpot type in Special Figure 1 is "A, B", and the suggestion effect counter 223jc. "Failure" is defined in the range of "0 to 59", "confirmed" is defined in the range of "60 to 89", and "failure" is defined in the range of "90 to 99". Further, when the jackpot type of the special figure 1 is "C, D", "failure" is defined regardless of the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc.

When the value of the small hit count counter 223cc is "40" or more and is a multiple of 10, "confirmed" is stored as suggested information in the suggested information storage area 223ja, and the special feature is When the jackpot type in FIG. 1 is "A, B", "privilege effect" is specified in the range of suggestion effect "0 to 99", and in all other cases, "pounding effect" is specified. Has been done.

In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, it is set as the execution condition of the suggestion effect that the value of the small hit count counter 223 cc becomes a predetermined value (a multiple of 10), but other matters are set as the execution condition of the suggestion effect. You may set it. Further, in this modification, the suggestion effect is configured to be able to be executed a plurality of times during one RUSH game period, and the suggestion effect having a lower suggestion degree than the suggestion effect executed in the past is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player with the suggestive staging to the end.

Next, with reference to FIG. 287 (b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the modified example of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 287 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the modified example of the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 287 (b), the fourth implementation described above is provided in that the suggested information storage area 223ja, the special figure 2 fluctuation frequency counter 223jb, the suggestion effect counter 223jc, and the suggestion effect in-progress flag 223jd are provided. It is different from the form.

The suggested information storage area 223ja is a data area for temporarily storing the contents of the executed suggestion effect (see FIG. 286), and is a suggestion effect executed during one RUSH game period. The history can be stored. In this suggested information storage area 223ja, information indicating the suggestion effect mode selected in the suggestion effect setting process (see S14001 in FIG. 293) is stored (S14108 in FIG. 293), and when the next suggestion effect mode is selected. The information stored in is read out (S14104 in FIG. 293). Then, the stored information is cleared at the timing when the RUSH game ends (the timing when the jackpot game starts) (see S4692 in FIG. 291). Further, the suggestion history display 880 is displayed based on the information stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja.

The special figure 2 change number counter 223jb is a counter for measuring the change number (lottery number) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) executed during the RUSH game period, and is a change display setting for special figure 2. In process 11 (see S5195 in FIG. 294), when it is determined that the latency state is set (S5303: Yes in FIG. 294), the value of the counter is updated by 1 (see S5393 in FIG. 294). The value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb is referred to when setting the suggestion mode showing the lottery result of the special figure 1 during the change by using the effect mode for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 (FIG. 295). (See S14201). Then, the value of the counter is cleared at the timing when the RUSH game ends (the timing when the big hit game starts) (see S4691 in FIG. 291).

The suggestion effect counter 223jc is a counter referred to when selecting the above-mentioned suggestion mode or suggestion effect, and is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 99. Although not shown, it is updated by 1 each time the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. Since the detailed configuration is the same as that of the staging counter 223h described above, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The suggestion effect in progress flag 223jd is a flag for indicating that the suggestion effect is being executed, and is set to be on while the suggestion effect is being executed. This suggestion staging flag 223jd is set to ON when the suggestion staging setting process (see S14001 in FIG. 293) is executed (S14109 in FIG. 293). Then, it is referred to in the variation display setting process 11 for special figure 2 (see S5195 in FIG. 294) (see S5391 in FIG. 294). Here, if it is determined that the suggestion effect is in progress (S5391: Yes in FIG. 294), a special display variation pattern command for the variation effect of the special figure 2 is set in parallel with the suggestion effect (FIG. See S5394 of 294). When this display variation pattern command is set, the variation effect of the aspect shown in FIG. 286 (the effect having a lower effect than the suggestion effect) is executed. Then, in the liquid crystal display effect execution management process 11 (see S4160 in FIG. 296), when it is determined that it is the timing to end the suggestion effect (S14302: Yes), it is set to off (see S14303 in FIG. 296).

<Regarding the control process in the modified example of the fourth embodiment>
Next, the control process in the modified example of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 290 to 296. In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the command determination process 11 (see FIG. 290) is replaced with the command determination process 4 (see S4182 in FIG. 152) for the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment described above. S14182) is replaced with the jackpot-related process (see S4502 in FIG. 64), and the jackpot-related process 11 (see S4592 in FIG. 291) is replaced with the small hit-related process 4 (see S4574 in FIG. 156). 11 (see S14574 in FIG. 292) is replaced with the variation display setting process 4 for special figure 2 (see S5175 in FIG. 160), and the variation display setting process 11 for special figure 2 (see S5195 in FIG. 294) is executed as a liquid crystal display. The liquid crystal display execution management process 11 (see S4160 in FIG. 296) is executed instead of the management process (see S4110 in FIG. 59), the suggestion effect setting process (see S14001 in FIG. 293), and the suggestion mode setting process (see FIG. 295). The difference is that (see S5392) is added. Other than that, the same processing is executed. The same processing is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the command determination process 11 (S14182) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the modified example of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 290. FIG. 290 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 11 (S14182). The command determination process 11 (S14182) determines that the command determination process 4 (see S4182 in FIG. 152) in the fourth embodiment described above has received a hit-related command from the main control unit 110 in the process of S4215. In some cases (S4215: Yes), the hit-related process 11 (S14574) is executed instead of the hit-related process (S4216). Since other processes are the same as the command determination process 4 (S4182) in the fourth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the hit-related process 11 executed in S14574 replaces the jackpot-related process (see S4502 in FIG. 64) executed when a jackpot-related command is received with respect to the above-mentioned hit-related process (S4216). The difference is that the related process 11 (S4592 in FIG. 291) is replaced with the small hit related process 4 (see S4574 in FIG. 156), and the small hit related process 11 (S14574 in FIG. 292) is executed. Since they are the same, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 291, a hit-related process, which is one process in the command determination process 11 (see S14182 in FIG. 290) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the modified example of the fourth embodiment. The jackpot-related process 11 (see S4592 in FIG. 291) executed in 11 (see S14574) will be described. FIG. 291 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot related process 11 (S4592). The jackpot-related process 11 (S4592) differs from the jackpot-related process (S4502 in FIG. 64) in the fourth embodiment described above in that the content of the process executed when the jackpot start command is received is changed. , Other than that, the same process is executed. Detailed description of the elements of the same processing content will be omitted.

When the jackpot-related process 11 (S4592) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start command has been received (S4601), and if it is determined that the jackpot start command has been received (S4601: Yes), the jackpot for display is started. A command is set (S4602), then the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation count counter 223jb is cleared (S4691), and the information stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja (suggestion effect executed during the RUSH game period). (History information) is cleared (S4692), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received in the processing of S4601 (S4601: No), the same processing of S4603 to S4613 as the above-mentioned jackpot related processing (S4502 in FIG. 64) is executed. End the process.

That is, in the jackpot-related process 11 (S4592), at the start timing of the jackpot, a process of initializing each parameter temporarily stored during the RUSH game executed before the start of the jackpot is executed. As a result, even if the RUSH game is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to reliably suppress that the effect mode during the RUSH game is set based on the information on the past RUSH game.

In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, since the RUSH game is configured to be executed during the jackpot fluctuation of FIG. 1, the end of the RUSH game and the start of the jackpot game are at the same timing. The initialization process of each parameter temporarily stored during the RUSH game is set as the start timing of the jackpot game, but the start timing is not limited to this, and a determination means for determining that the RUSH game has ended is provided and the determination means It may be configured to execute the initialization process of each parameter when it is determined that the RUSH game is completed. Further, since the condition that the RUSH game can be executed is the case where the latent state is set as the game state, it is determined that the determination result of the game state determination means for determining the current game state is not the latent state. In some cases, it may be configured to execute the initialization process of each parameter temporarily stored during the RUSH game.

Further, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the initialization process of each parameter is executed every time one RUSH game is completed, but the RUSH game is played again within a predetermined period after the big hit game. When it is executed, it may be configured so that the information (value) of each parameter can be continuously updated. As a result, it is possible to enthusiastically perform the game even if the RUSH game is continuously executed a plurality of times. In this case, an elapsed period determining means for determining whether or not a predetermined period (for example, a period until the number of executions of the special figure lottery is performed 30 times) has elapsed after the end of the jackpot game is provided, and the elapsed period determining means is provided. It may be configured to execute the initialization process of each parameter when the elapse of a predetermined period is determined by.

Next, with reference to FIG. 292, a hit-related process which is one of the command determination processes 11 (see S14182 in FIG. 290) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the modified example of the fourth embodiment. The small hit-related process 11 (see S14574 in FIG. 292) executed in 11 (see S14574) will be described. FIG. 292 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit related process 11 (S14574). The small hit-related process 11 (S14574) changes the content of the process executed when the small hit start command is received with respect to the small hit-related process 4 (S4574 in FIG. 156) in the above-described fourth embodiment. Other than that, the same processing is executed. Detailed description of the elements of the same processing content will be omitted.

When the small hit related process 11 (S14574) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the small hit start command has been received (S4701), and when it is determined that the small hit start command has been received (S4701: Yes), the above-mentioned The same processes of S4741 to S4753 as in the small hit-related process 4 of the fourth embodiment (see S4574 in FIG. 156) are executed, and in the process of S4753, it is determined that the value of the small hit count counter 223cc is a multiple of 10. If this is the case (S4753: Yes), the suggestion effect setting process is executed (S14001). After that, the small hit start command for display is set (S4702), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4701 that the small hit start command has not been received (S4701: No), S4703 which is the same as the small hit related process 4 of the fourth embodiment described above (see S4574 in FIG. 156). -The process of S4710 is executed, and this process is terminated.

The suggestion effect setting process executed in the process of S14001 is a process for setting the effect mode of the suggestion effect. That is, the above-mentioned process of S4753 serves as a determination means for determining whether or not the execution condition for executing the suggestion effect is satisfied. In this modification, the value of the small hit count counter 223cc is set to be a predetermined value (a value that is a multiple of 10) as an execution condition for executing the suggestion effect, but other elements are used as the execution condition. It may be set, for example, it may be set as an execution condition that the number of special figure 2 lottery executed while the latent state is set is a predetermined value (for example, a value that is a multiple of 20). good. In this case, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb may be read out and determined.

Further, in this modification, since the suggestion effect is set based on the number of small hits won during the latent state (during the RUSH game period), the small hit-related process 11 (S14574) sets the suggestive effect. Although it is configured to have a process (S14001), if the execution conditions of the suggestion effect are different, the corresponding process may be configured to have the suggestion effect setting process. Further, when a plurality of suggestion effect execution conditions are set, if one suggestion effect execution condition is satisfied, the other suggestion effect execution conditions are within a predetermined period (for example, the number of lottery of Special Figure 2 is 5 times). It is advisable to provide a limiting means for limiting the establishment within the period until reaching (or 30 seconds). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a plurality of different suggestion staging execution conditions from being satisfied in a short period of time and the suggestion staging from occurring frequently. In addition, when the above-mentioned limiting means is provided, it is preferable to change the effect mode of the suggestion effect based on the order in which the plurality of suggestion effect execution conditions are established. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested not only in executing the suggestion effect but also in which suggestion effect execution condition is satisfied, so that the effect of the effect can be further enhanced. ..

As the execution condition of the suggestion effect executed during the RUSH game period, the cumulative value of the number of lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the number of small hit wins, and the number of missed wins is set to a predetermined value. In addition to the cumulative value condition that can be satisfied when the game is reached, a continuous winning condition that can be satisfied when the number of consecutive winnings in the outlier reaches a predetermined value (for example, 5 times) may be set. Further, an operation condition that is satisfied when a specific operation is executed on the operation means (frame button 22) that can be operated by the player may be provided. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to actively operate the operating means during the RUSH game period, so that the motivation to participate in the game can be increased. Further, it may be configured so that the execution condition of the suggestion effect is satisfied based on the game result other than the special figure 2 lottery executed during the RUSH game period. For example, the number of balls entered into the ball entrance is predetermined. When the number is reached, or when the number of reserved memories has reached the upper limit, the number of balls (so-called over-winning balls) that have entered the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 has reached a predetermined number. In that case, the execution condition of the suggestion effect may be satisfied.

Next, with reference to FIG. 293, the content of the suggestion effect setting process (S14001 in FIG. 293) executed in the small hit-related process 11 (see S14574 in FIG. 292) will be described. FIG. 293 is a flowchart showing the contents of the suggestion effect setting process (S14001). In this suggestion effect setting process, a process for setting an effect mode of the suggestion effect executed during the RUSH game period is executed.

When the suggestion effect setting process (S14001) is executed, first, the time information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p, that is, the remaining time of the RUSH game period is acquired (S14101), and the acquired time information is 5 seconds. It is determined whether it indicates a longer time than (S14102). Here, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the suggestion effect for 5 seconds is configured to be executed. Therefore, if it is determined in the process of S14102 that the remaining period of the RUSH game period is 5 seconds or less, the RUSH game period ends at the end timing of the suggestion effect, so that the new suggestion effect is not executed. It is configured as follows.

In this modification, the time of the suggestion effect is fixed to 5 seconds, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the suggestion effect of a plurality of effect times may be executed. In this case, the effect time of the suggestion effect to be executed first is determined, then it is determined whether or not the remaining period of the RUSH game period is longer than the determined effect time, and the suggestion effect is executed based on the determination result. It may be configured to determine the presence or absence of. Further, the remaining period of the RUSH game period may be determined first, and the suggestive effect may be set from the effect time that can be executed within the remaining period.

If it is determined in the process of S14102 that the remaining time is 5 seconds or less (S14102: No), the present process is terminated because there is no period during which the suggestion effect can be executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining time is longer than 5 seconds (S14102: Yes), then the value of the small hit count counter 223cc is read out (S14103), and the information stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja (S14102). Information indicating the type of suggestion effect already executed during the current RUSH game period) is read (S14104), and then the lottery result of the currently executing special figure 1 lottery stored in the winning information storage area 223b is shown. Information (information indicating the jackpot type) is acquired (S14105).

Next, the effect mode of the suggestion effect to be executed this time is selected using the suggestion effect selection table 222jb based on the information acquired (read out) in the processes of S14103 to S14105 (S14106), and the selected suggestion effect mode is selected. A corresponding display suggestion effect command is set (S14107). Here, in this modification, a plurality of effect modes are set for the suggestion effect mode selected in the process of S14106, and the process of S14107 corresponds to the selected suggestion effect mode. A display suggestion effect command corresponding to one effect mode is set from the plurality of effect modes (S14107).

Then, when the processing of S14107 is completed, the information indicating the suggestion effect mode selected this time is stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja (S14108), the suggestion effect in progress flag 223jd is set to ON (S14109), and this processing is terminated. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 294, the contents of the variation display setting process 11 (S5195) for the special figure 2 will be described. FIG. 294 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation display setting process 11 (S5195) for the special figure 2. The variation display setting process 11 (S5195) for the special figure 2 is a process for setting a variation effect corresponding to the variation pattern of the special figure 2, and is a process for setting the variation display for the special figure 2 of the fourth embodiment described above. A point of adding a process of setting a variation pattern command for display when a suggestion effect is executed and a process of setting a suggestion mode during the RUSH game period to the process of process 4 (S5175 in FIG. 160). Is different, and the others are the same. The same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the variation display setting process 11 (S5195) for the special figure 2 is executed, first, the same S5301 to S5351 as the variation display setting process 4 for the special figure 2 (S5175 in FIG. 160) of the fourth embodiment described above is executed. Execute the process. Then, when the processing of S5351 is completed, it is determined whether or not the suggestion effecting flag 223jd is set to ON (S5391). In the process of S5391, when it is determined that the suggestion effect in progress flag 223jd is not set on (set to off), that is, when it is determined that the suggestion effect is not executed (S5391: No). The same process of S5352 as the variable display setting process 4 for special figure 2 (S5175 of FIG. 160) of the fourth embodiment described above is executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S5392.

On the other hand, in the process of S5391, when it is determined that the suggestion effect in-progress flag 223jd is set to ON (S5391: Yes), the second special symbol (special figure) is based on the extracted variation pattern and latency mode. The latent probability fluctuation pattern command during the suggestion effect for display in 2) is set (S5394), and the process proceeds to S5393. That is, in the latent state, the variation effect of the special figure 2 is set differently depending on whether the suggestion effect is executed or not. Specifically, when the suggestion effect is not executed, the variation effect of the special figure 2 is executed using the entire main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 285 (a)). On the other hand, when the suggestion effect is executed, in order to emphasize the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect is executed using most of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the remaining part is used. The variation effect of FIG. 2 is executed (see FIG. 286 (a)).

With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the most notable effect in an easy-to-understand manner. In this modification, as described above, the display command set by the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be different depending on whether or not the suggestion effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. , The same display command is set, and the area for displaying the variable effect of the special figure 2 is changed based on the display command received by the display control device 114 and whether or not the suggestion effect is executed. Is also good. As a result, when only the display position (the size of the display mode) is changed without changing the content of the variable effect shown in FIG. 2 depending on the presence or absence of the suggestive effect, the control load of the voice lamp control device 113 is applied. It can be easily reduced.

When the process of S5352 is completed, the suggestion mode setting process (S5392) is executed, then the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation frequency counter 223jb is added by 1 (S5393), and this process is terminated. In the process of S5392, a process for setting a suggestion mode for suggesting the result of the special figure 1 lottery being executed (during change) is executed by using the special figure 2 variation effect of this time.

In this modification, as described above, when the suggestion staging flag 223jd is set to ON, the suggestion mode setting process (S5392) is not executed. That is, during the period in which the effect suggesting the lottery result (big hit content) of the special figure 1 is being executed by the suggestion effect, the lottery result (big hit content) of the special figure 1 is suggested by using the variable effect of the special figure 2. It is configured so that the production is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a plurality of suggestive effects from being generated at the same time and providing a player with an incomprehensible effect.

Next, the content of the suggestion mode setting process (S5392) will be described with reference to FIG. 295. FIG. 295 is a flowchart showing the contents of the suggestion mode setting process (S5392). When the suggestion mode setting process (S5392) is executed, first, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb is read out (S14201), and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the remaining fluctuation time of special figure 1 is obtained. Information) is read (S14202), and the current production mode is selected using the suggestion mode selection table 222ja based on the counter value read in the process of S14201 and the stored information read in the process of S14202 (S14203). ). Then, a display command corresponding to the set variation pattern command and the selected effect mode is set (S14204), and this process is terminated.

With this configuration, when setting the variation effect of the special figure 2, it is possible to set the suggestion mode for suggesting the lottery result of the special figure 1 by using the variation effect of the special figure 2. It is possible to notify (suggest) a plurality of information (lottery result of special figure 2 and lottery result of special figure 1) to the player with one variable effect, and it is possible to make the player pay attention to the variable effect. can. In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, as the suggestion mode using the variation effect of the special figure 2, the suggestion mode (see FIG. 285 (b)) for varying the display mode of the effect symbol 813 and the suggestion mode of the third symbol. Although a stop display mode for showing the result of the special figure 2 lottery such as a suggestion mode for varying the display mode (see FIG. 285 (b)) is used, the suggestion is not limited to this, and the suggestion is made using the mode in the variable display. Aspects may be set. For example, the lottery result of the special figure 1 can be suggested by changing the background color when the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner, or the display mode of the treasure box 812 in which the effect symbol 813 is stored can be changed. By making it possible, the lottery result of the special figure 1 may be configured to be suggestive. Further, not only the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but also the voice output device 226 provided on the pachinko machine 10 and the lamp display device 227 can be used to suggest the lottery result of the special figure 1. You may. Specifically, the sound output during the period when the variable display of the special figure 2 is executed can be changed, or the light emission mode of the lamp during the period when the variable display of the special figure 2 is executed can be changed. By doing so, the lottery result of the special figure 1 may be configured to be suggestive.

Next, the contents of the liquid crystal display execution management process 11 (S4160) will be described with reference to FIG. 296. FIG. 296 is a flowchart showing the contents of the liquid crystal display effect execution management process 11 (S4160). In the liquid crystal display effect execution management process 11 (S4160), the suggestion effect is given to the liquid crystal display effect execution management process (S4110) executed in the main process (see FIG. 59) of the audio lamp control device 113 of the fourth embodiment described above. The difference is that a process for determining whether or not is in the execution period of is added, and the other points are the same.

The above-mentioned liquid crystal display effect execution management process (see S4110 in FIG. 59) will be briefly described. To constantly determine the effect period of each effect set by the voice lamp control device 113 and the update period of the effect being executed. The process is executed. Specifically, the timekeeping means (timer) possessed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 and the set effect scenario (running effect scenario) are constantly managed, and the running effect is terminated. A process for managing the timing and the timing for switching the effect mode is executed.

When the liquid crystal display effect execution management process 11 (S4160) is executed, first, it is determined whether the suggestion effect in-progress flag 223jd is set to on (S14301), and if it is determined to be set to off (S14301:). No), the process shifts to S14304. On the other hand, in the process of S14301, when it is determined that the suggestion effect in-progress flag 223jd is set to ON (S14301: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is the suggestion effect end timing (S14302). If it is determined in the process of S14302 that it is the end timing of the suggestion effect (S14302: Yes), the suggestion effect in progress flag 223jd is set to off (S14303), and the process shifts to S14304. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S14302 that it is not the end timing of the suggestion effect (S14302: No), the process of S14303 is skipped and the process is shifted to S14304. In the process of S14304, other liquid crystal display effect execution management is executed (S14304), and this process is terminated.

Explaining the processing of S14302, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the suggestion effect for 5 seconds is configured to be executed, and the elapsed time from the timing when the suggestion effect is executed is set as the voice lamp control device. The measurement is performed using the time measuring means of the MPU 221 of 113, and the determination is executed based on the measurement result. It should be noted that any process other than the above-mentioned processing may be used as long as it can determine the end timing of the suggestion effect. For example, a value corresponding to 5 seconds for a counting means capable of counting the effect time when the suggestion effect is executed. Is set, and the value of the counting means becomes a value indicating the passage of 5 seconds, so that the end timing of the suggestion effect may be determined.

As described above, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the change is based on the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) executed during the change of the first special symbol (special figure 1). Since the suggestion effect for suggesting (notifying) the lottery result of the special figure 1 to the player can be executed, it is possible to make the player predict the lottery result of the special figure 1 in advance. .. Therefore, the staging effect can be enhanced.

Further, since the above-mentioned suggestion effect is executed by using the variable effect for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2, the lottery result of the special figure 2 and the lottery result of the special figure 1 are combined into one effect. Since it is possible to suggest (notify) to the player with, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, since the suggestion effect is executed when the lottery result of the special figure 2 satisfies a predetermined condition, the player can be enthusiastically executed the special figure 2 lottery. In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the suggestion effect is more easily executed as the lottery of the special figure 2 is executed, so that the player's motivation to play can be further enhanced.

That is, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) executed during the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) suggests the lottery result of the special figure 1. It is configured to have both a role of satisfying the execution condition of the suggestion effect and a role of executing the suggestion effect. As a result, the player can be interested in whether the suggestion effect using the variable display of the special figure 2 is executed or the suggestive effect different from the variable display of the special figure 2 is executed.

Further, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, as the effect mode of the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect (suggestion strength) that makes it easy for the player to predict the lottery result of the special figure 1 and the lottery of the special figure 1 rather than the suggestion effect. Since the suggestion effect (weak suggestion), which is difficult to predict the result, is configured to be at least configurable, it is possible to pay attention to the effect mode of the suggestion effect. Further, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the suggestion effect can be executed a plurality of times during one special figure change period, and the lottery of the special figure 1 increases as the number of times the suggestion effect is executed increases. It is configured so that it is easy to set a suggestion effect (suggestion strength) that makes it easy to predict the result. As a result, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game so that the player can perform more suggestive effects.

In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the above-mentioned suggestion effect is executed based on the special figure 2 lottery during the change of the special figure 1, but a plurality of lottery that can be executed at the same time is used. For example, the above-mentioned suggestion effect may be executed based on the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) during the special symbol 1 change, or the special symbol (second symbol) during the normal symbol (second symbol) change may be executed. A suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result of a normal symbol may be executed based on the lottery of 1 symbol). Further, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be configured to execute a suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 based on the normal symbol lottery while the special figure 2 is changing at the same time.

In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the lottery of the special figure 1 is configured to suggest the contents of the big hit won based on the special figure 2 lottery during the big hit fluctuation. In addition, it may be configured to suggest the residual variation time of the special figure 1. Further, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, when one of the special symbols has won the jackpot (including during the change of the jackpot winning), the other special symbol is drawn by lottery. It is configured not to win the jackpot. Therefore, since the special figure 2 lottery executed during the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation does not win the big hit, even if the lottery result (big hit content) of the special figure 1 is suggested, the big hit game different from the suggested content. It is possible to suppress the situation in which (the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot won in the special figure 2 lottery) is executed.

In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the suggestion effect is executed based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the special figure 1 change in which the jackpot is won, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The suggestion effect may be executed based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the special figure 1 fluctuation that has not won the big hit. As a result, it is possible to make the player think that the changing special figure 1 has won the jackpot by executing the suggestion effect.

Further, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the state where the probability variation state is set, the latent probability state is set during the jackpot fluctuation, as in the case of the fourth embodiment described above. It is configured so that the lottery of 2 can be easily executed. As a result, it is possible to execute the special figure 2 lottery more during the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation, so that it is possible to easily provide the player with a suggestive effect. Further, in the state where the latent probability state is set, it becomes easy to win a small hit different from the big hit in the special figure 2 lottery, so that it is possible to make it easier to execute the special figure 2 lottery more positively.

In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the jackpot game of the special figure 1 provides a suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result of the special figure 1 based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 1. Although it is configured to be executed by the time it is started, the suggestion effect may be executed during a period other than this. For example, the technique of this modification is applied to the sixth embodiment described above, and the special figure 1 It may be configured to suggest the lottery result of the special figure 1 (the content of the big hit game or the game state set after the big hit game is completed) based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the big hit game.

Further, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the suggestion effect is executed based on the special figure 2 lottery only during the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special figure 1 is not limited to this. It may be configured to execute the suggestion effect based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the deviation fluctuation of. Thereby, when the suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to entertain the player whether or not the changing special figure 1 lottery is a big hit.

In the modification of the fourth embodiment described above, a suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result of the special figure 1 based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the change of the special figure 1 is added to the fourth embodiment. Although an example is shown, the suggestive effect used in the modified example of the fourth embodiment may be configured to be added to the above-mentioned other embodiments, for example, to be added to the above-mentioned third embodiment. It may be configured in.

In the third embodiment, a probability change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set after the end of the jackpot, and a predetermined transition condition (big hit winning, jackpot winning,) is set in the state where the probability variation state is set. When the small hit winning and the 4th lottery of the special symbol are established, the latent probability state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) is set as the predetermined end condition (4th lottery result of the special symbol). Is stopped and displayed) is set so that the period until it is established is set.

When the above-mentioned suggestion effect is executed in the third embodiment configured in this way, the special figure 1 is based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the special figure 1 fluctuation in which the latent probability state is set. It is preferable to configure not only the lottery result but also the suggestion effect suggesting the opportunity (transition condition) for which the latent state is set.

That is, in the third embodiment, a plurality of transition conditions in which the latent probability state is set are defined, and the period in which the latent probability state is set differs depending on the established transition condition. Since the specific contents are described above with reference to FIG. 112, the description thereof will be omitted. Further, according to the configuration used in the third embodiment, the player is transferred to the latent state this time until the change in Special Figure 1 in which the condition for transitioning to the latent state is satisfied is stopped and displayed. It was not possible to inform what was the opportunity.

Therefore, by adding the suggestive staging described by using the modified example of the fourth embodiment to the configuration of the third embodiment, during the variation of Special Figure 1 in which the condition for transition to the latent state is satisfied. It is possible to suggest the lottery result of the special figure 1 that is changing based on the executed special figure 2 lottery. With this configuration, the player can predict the trigger for the transition to the latent state this time by seeing the suggestion effect to be executed.

That is, it is possible to set a first gaming state (for example, a latent state) that is advantageous to the player as a gaming state and a second gaming state (for example, a probabilistic state) that is more disadvantageous than the first gaming state. When the transition condition of is satisfied, the transition from the second game state to the first game state is possible, and the special figure 2 change executed during the change of the special figure 1 when the first game state is set. Based on (lottery), it is preferable to configure a suggestion effect for suggesting to the player what the transition condition for which the first game state was set this time was.

In the modified example of the fourth embodiment described above, the small hit game (RUSH game) is frequently executed by executing the lottery of the special figure 2 during the big hit fluctuation of the special figure 1 (during the RUSH game period). , In a configuration in which a prize ball can be given to a player without executing a big hit game, the lottery result of special figure 1 based on the lottery of special figure 2 (big hit game content, game state after big hit game, special figure) Since the suggestion effect suggesting (1 variation remaining variation time) is feasibly configured, the special figure 2 lottery during the RUSH game period can have a plurality of meanings. Specifically, by the special figure 2 lottery executed during the RUSH game period, the lottery result advantageous to the player as the lottery result of the changing special figure 1 while expecting a small hit winning to obtain a prize ball. It can be expected that the suggestion effect suggesting that the above is executed.

In this configuration, for example, if one of the plurality of meanings of the special figure 2 lottery is disadvantageous to the player, the other is controlled to be advantageous to the player. good. Specifically, for example, as a result of the special figure 2 lottery, a small hit with a long fluctuation time (for example, a small hit A) and a small hit with a shorter fluctuation time than the small hit A (small hit B) can be set. do. In this case, in order to execute many small hit games within the limited period of the RUSH game period, it is necessary to select many lottery results having a short fluctuation time as the lottery results of the special figure 2. That is, when the above-mentioned small hit A is won, the lottery result is more disadvantageous to the player than when the small hit B is won.

In such a case, it is preferable to configure the device so that the suggestion effect is more easily executed when the small hit A is won than when the small hit B is won. As a result, when the result of the special figure 2 lottery that is disadvantageous to the player is obtained, it is possible to easily provide another added value (suggestion effect), so that the player's motivation to play is significantly reduced. It can be suppressed.

In addition to the above-mentioned example, for example, a first small hit game that is advantageous to the player as a game mode of the small hit game executed when the small hit is won, and a player rather than the first small hit game. It is possible to set a second small hit game in which a small hit game that is disadvantageous to the player is executed, and it is easy to provide another added value (suggestion effect) when the small hit game that is disadvantageous to the player is won. It may be configured so that

<11th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 297 to 316. In the above-mentioned first embodiment, when the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set, the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1). In addition, the gaming state during the jackpot fluctuation is set as the latent probability state, and the small hit game is easily executed when the latent probability state is set.

On the other hand, in the eleventh embodiment, and in the case where the time saving state of the normal symbol ends first (when the number of time saving times ends) in the probabilistic state, and in a part of the case where the jackpot is won, an advantageous latent state. It is configured to shift to. In addition, in a game state other than the latent probability state, even if a big hit is made, the rate at which the latent probability state is set is configured to have an extremely low probability (for example, 5%), so that other games are played. Most of the transitions from the state to the latent state are when the time saving state of the normal symbol ends in the probabilistic state.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the case where the probability change jackpot is won again in the relatively advantageous time saving state or the probability change state is set after the jackpot ends, as compared with the case where the probability change jackpot is won in the disadvantageous normal state. It is configured so that the end condition of the time saving state is easily satisfied in the probabilistic state (a small number of time saving is easy to be set). As a result, even if the time saving state of the normal symbol cannot be ended (that is, it cannot be transferred to the latent state) and the probability change jackpot is won, the state is changed to the latent state. Since there is a high possibility that it will be easier, it is possible to further improve the expectation of the player for the latent state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above is that the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main control device 110 are partially changed. The configuration of ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been partially changed, and the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. The point is that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 has been partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the gaming state in the eleventh embodiment will be briefly described. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 306, but in the eleventh embodiment, four types of gaming states are provided. That is, a normal state that is most disadvantageous to the player, a time-saving state that has a higher degree of advantage than the normal state, a probabilistic state that has a higher degree of advantage than the time-saving state, and a latent state that is most advantageous to the player are provided. ing.

In the time saving state (probability change state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol), as in the first embodiment, the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entrance ball opening 64b2 is easily released, and the lower first Since it becomes easier to enter the ball into the ball entry port 64b2, by performing the left-handed game, it becomes possible to efficiently execute the lottery of the first special symbol as compared with the normal state. That is, since the number of game balls to be launched and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the entry into the lower first entry opening 64b2 or the like are substantially the same, the first special symbol is not reduced. Form an advantageous state in which the lottery can be executed. In addition, the probabilistic state (probability change state of the special symbol and the time reduction state of the normal symbol) is the time reduction state of the normal symbol and the probability of becoming a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol is higher than the time reduction state. It will be even more advantageous. Further, in the latent probability state (probability change state of the special symbol and normal state of the normal symbol), the fluctuation time when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed is significantly shorter than that of the other gaming states (10 minutes). → 1 second) When the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, there is a high probability (59/60) of a small hit (a type of loss, and the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is specified. Since the lottery result will be open for a period and give an opportunity to win a prize ball), just by executing a right-handed game aiming at the second entry opening 640, the game ball will move to the first specific winning opening 65a. It will be an extremely advantageous game state in which it is possible to enter the ball frequently and continue to win the prize ball.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 297 to 301, a characteristic hobby effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, when the time saving state ends in the relatively advantageous probability change state, the configuration shifts to the most advantageous latent state. For this reason, in the probabilistic state, rather than becoming a big hit in the special symbol lottery, it is possible to shift to the latent state by continuously losing the special symbol lottery over the set number of time reductions. It is possible to provide a novel playability that makes people expect more strongly. Therefore, in the eleventh embodiment, when the state shifts to the probabilistic state, the display effect is configured to perform an effect suggesting the remaining number of lottery until the state shifts to the latent state. As a result, when the player shifts to the probabilistic state, the player can check the guideline of the remaining number of lottery until the transition to the latent state by simply checking the third symbol display device 81. Convenience can be improved.

First, with reference to FIG. 297 (a), in the eleventh embodiment, a display mode of the ending effect executed in the ending period of the jackpot game in which the probability change state or the time saving state is set after the jackpot ends will be described. As shown in FIG. 297 (a), when the ending effect in the eleventh embodiment is executed, the upper center (above the character 811 imitating a rabbit) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is relative to the display screen. A display area HR1 is formed in which the characters "RUSH is confirmed if a maximum of three rivers are breached !?" are displayed. From this display content, the player can easily understand that the transition to the RUSH (latent state) is confirmed when the character 811 breaks through a maximum of three rivers. Since the other display contents are the same as the display contents of the ending effect in the first embodiment (see FIG. 6A), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the eleventh embodiment, a jackpot type (big hit A11, jackpot H11) that directly shifts to the latent probability state (RUSH) after the end of the jackpot is also provided. Although not shown, when the jackpot type is used, the latent state (RUSH) entry is notified during the ending period.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 297 (b) to 299, a display effect executed during the time saving state of the normal symbol (that is, during the probabilistic change state or the time saving state) in the eleventh embodiment will be described. .. The details will be described later, but while the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, the time saving state of the normal symbol is terminated every time the special symbol lottery is executed a specific number of times (25 times or 15 times). The player decides whether to move to the most advantageous latent state, to end the time saving state of the normal symbol and to move to the most disadvantageous normal state, or to continue (maintain) the time saving state of the normal symbol. The effect of suggesting (notifying) is executed. That is, a river breakthrough effect (see FIGS. 298 and 299) that can suggest (notify) the gaming state after the end of the fluctuation is executed depending on whether or not the character 811 breaks through the river. The cycle in which the river breakthrough effect is executed is set to the number of fluctuations at which the time saving state may end. That is, when it becomes a big hit in the normal state and the probability change state or the time reduction state of the normal symbol is set, any one of 25 times, 50 times, or 75 times is set. Further, when the probability change state or the time reduction state becomes a big hit and the probability change state is set, any one of 10, 25 times, or 40 times is set. By executing the river breakthrough effect every time the number of fluctuations that may end the time saving state is reached, the game is expected to be notified of the transition to the latent state each time the river breakthrough effect is executed. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

First, with reference to FIG. 297 (b), an effect mode (display mode) before the river breakthrough effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 297 (b), until the river breakthrough effect is executed, the effect of the character 811 running toward the right in the front view is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Further, a horizontally long substantially rectangular display area HR2 is formed in the right direction of the front view of the character 811. In this display area HR2, characters (display mode) indicating (suggesting) the number of lottery of the remaining special symbols until the character 811 reaches the next river are displayed. Note that FIG. 297 (b) illustrates a state in which the characters "20 times remaining until the first river" are displayed. With this display content, it is easy for the player to understand that it is an opportunity to shift to an advantageous latent state by being continuously out of the lottery for 20 more special symbols. Can be done. Since other display contents are the same as the chance zone mode (see FIG. 6B) in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Here, the "chance zone" in the eleventh embodiment indicates a state while the time saving state of the normal symbol is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 298 (a), the display contents at the start of the river breakthrough effect will be described. FIG. 298 (a) is a diagram showing a display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the start of the river breakthrough effect. As shown in FIG. 298 (a), when the river breakthrough effect is started, the effect that the character 811 discovers the river image KG imitating the river is executed. In addition, the characters "Arrive at the first river !! Jump over the river !!" are displayed for the display area HR1 formed (displayed) at the upper part of the display screen. From these display contents, it is possible to easily understand that the time saving state of the normal symbol may end (that is, the number of time saving times elapses) in the fluctuation. That is, it is possible to make the player understand that there is a possibility of shifting to an advantageous latent state and a possibility of shifting to a disadvantageous normal state. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the river breakthrough effect and perform the game.

FIG. 298 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the river breakthrough is successful and the continuation of the time saving state (chance zone) of the normal symbol is notified in the river breakthrough effect. As shown in FIG. 298 (b), when the success is notified by the river breakthrough effect, the character 811 jumps and the effect of landing on the opposite bank of the river image KG is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 298 (b), a signboard image 815 imitating a signboard is displayed at the destination (opposite bank) that jumps over the river. The signboard image 815 is displayed to suggest (notify) the privilege caused by the character 811 jumping over (breaking through) the river image KG. FIG. 298 (b) illustrates a case where the character "continue" is displayed, which indicates that the time saving state of the normal symbol continues (the number of time saving times remains) even after the next fluctuation display. Further, as the signboard image 815 is displayed, the characters "First river breakthrough !! Chance zone continuation !!" are displayed for the display area HR1 formed in the upper center of the screen. From these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the time saving state of the normal symbol continues to shift to the next variable display. Therefore, by continuing the deviation until the next river breakthrough production, it is possible to play the game while having a sense of purpose to get a chance to shift to the latent state, which improves the player's interest in the game. Can be made to. If the time saving state of the normal symbol continues, the lottery result of the special symbol will be out of order. Therefore, in the small area Dm1 for displaying the lottery result of the first special symbol, the third symbol of the combination indicating the deviation (for example, the combination of "8", "1", and "5") is displayed.

It should be noted that there is a time lag (for example, 1) between the time when the character 811 succeeds in jumping over the river image KG and the time when the signboard image 815 is displayed (that is, a privilege for breaking through the river is suggested). Seconds) are configured to occur. As a result, the player can be expected to be notified of the transition to the latent state (RUSH) as a privilege of jumping over the river image 811 for this one second. Therefore, every time the river breakthrough effect is successful, it is possible to strongly expect that the latent state is notified for at least one second, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

FIG. 299 (a) shows a display in the case where the river breakthrough is successful and the transition to the latent state (RUSH) is notified (the time saving state of the normal symbol is terminated in the probability change state) in the river breakthrough effect. It is a figure which showed an example of an embodiment. As shown in FIG. 299 (a), even when the transition to the latent state is notified, the character 811 is similarly notified of the continuation of the time saving state of the normal symbol (see FIG. 298 (b)). Will jump over the river image KG and land on the opposite bank. On the other hand, when the transition to the latent state is notified, the characters "RUSH" are displayed on the signboard image 815, and "First river breakthrough !! RUSH" is displayed on the display area HR1. The text "Rush !!" is displayed. In addition, the characters displayed in the small area Dm3 are switched to "right-handed", and the display contents of the sub-display area Ds are switched to the display contents of "RUSH rush !! Right-handed !!". From these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the state has shifted to the most advantageous latent state (RUSH) and that the right-handed game should be performed.

FIG. 299 (b) shows an example of a display mode in the case where the river breakthrough effect fails and the transition to the normal state (the time saving state of the normal symbol is terminated in the time saving state) is notified. It is a figure shown. As shown in FIG. 299 (b), when the transition to the normal state is notified, the character 811 jumps toward the opposite bank of the river image KG, but cannot jump over the river image KG and the river image KG. The effect of falling toward is executed. In addition, the characters "breakthrough failure ... chance zone end ..." are displayed for the display area HR1, and the characters "chance zone end !!" are displayed for the sub-display area Ds. To. From these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the state has shifted to a disadvantageous normal state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 300, in the eleventh embodiment, a game in which a chance zone is set after the end of the big hit (that is, a probability change state or a time saving state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit). The transition of the state and the production mode will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 300 (a), the transition of the gaming state and the effect mode when the jackpot C11 is won in the normal state will be described. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 303, but in the jackpot C11, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the probable change state, and the time reduction number is set to 50 times and the probability change number is set to 100 times. It is a type. In other words, if the special symbol lottery is missed 50 times in a row after the big hit ends, unless the big hit is won after that, an advantageous latent state until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times after the big hit ends. It is a big hit of the kind that becomes.

As shown in FIG. 300 (a), when the jackpot C11 is won in the normal state, the time saving state of the normal symbol continues until the lottery of 50 special symbols is executed after the end of the jackpot, and the 50th special At the timing when the lottery of the symbol is executed, the time saving state of the normal symbol is terminated and the normal state of the normal symbol is set. On the other hand, the probabilistic state of the special symbol continues even if the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times or more (until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times at the maximum). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 300 (a), as an effect mode, the river breakthrough effect (FIG. 298) in which the continuation is notified during the execution of the variation display based on the execution of the 24th special symbol lottery. (B)) is executed, and the river breakthrough effect (see FIG. 299 (a)) in which the transition to the latent state is notified during the execution of the variation display based on the execution of the 49th special symbol lottery. ) Is executed. Then, after that, the RUSH effect indicating that the latent state is in effect is executed in the same display mode as in the first embodiment (see FIG. 7B). In the case of a probability variation jackpot (big hit D11) in which the number of time reductions is set to 25, the transition to the latent state is notified by the first river breakthrough effect. On the other hand, when the probability variation jackpot (big hit B11) in which the number of time reductions is set to 75 times is reached, the continuation of the time reduction state (chance zone) of the normal symbol is notified in the first and second river breakthrough productions, 3 The transition to the latent state is notified in the third river breakthrough effect (the river breakthrough effect executed in the variable display based on the execution of the 74th special symbol lottery).

Next, with reference to FIG. 300 (b), the transition of the gaming state and the effect mode when the jackpot F11 is won in the normal state will be described. Here, the jackpot F11 is a jackpot type in which the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set to the time reduction state and the number of time reductions is set to 50 times. In other words, it is a type of jackpot that becomes a disadvantageous normal state after that, if it is missed in the special symbol lottery 50 times in a row after the jackpot ends.

As shown in FIG. 300 (b), when the jackpot F11 is won in the normal state, the time saving state of the normal symbol continues until the lottery of 50 special symbols is executed after the end of the jackpot, and the 50th special symbol. At the timing when the lottery of the symbol is executed, the time saving state of the normal symbol is ended and the normal state of the normal symbol is set. In addition, the state of the special symbol is maintained in the low probability state of the special symbol from the end of the big hit. Therefore, the game state shifts to the normal state by executing the 50th special symbol lottery after the end of the big hit. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 300 (b), as an effect mode, the river breakthrough effect (FIG. 298) in which the continuation is notified during the execution of the variation display based on the execution of the 24th special symbol lottery. (B)) is executed, and during the execution of the variation display based on the execution of the 49th special symbol lottery, the river breakthrough effect (see FIG. 299 (b)) in which the river breakthrough fails. It is executed and the transition to the normal state is notified. Then, after that, the normal effect for the normal state is executed. In the case of a normal jackpot (big hit G11) in which the number of time reductions is set to 25, the transition to the normal state is notified by the first river breakthrough effect. On the other hand, when the normal jackpot (big hit E11) in which the number of time reductions is set to 75 times is reached, the continuation of the time reduction state (chance zone) of the normal symbol is notified in the first and second river breakthrough productions, 3 The transition to the normal state is notified in the third river breakthrough effect (the river breakthrough effect executed in the variable display based on the execution of the 74th special symbol lottery).

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, when the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set to the probabilistic state or the time saving state, each time the number of fluctuations at which the time saving state of the normal symbol may end is reached, the river By executing the breakthrough effect, whether the time saving state of the normal symbol continues, the time saving state of the normal symbol ends and shifts to the latent state, or the time saving state of the normal symbol ends and shifts to the normal state. It is configured to periodically notify (every 25 times or every 15 times the lottery of special symbols) whether or not to do so. By configuring in this way, while the chance zone (normal symbol time saving state) is set, the player can play the game with one pleasure that the next river breakthrough effect will be executed. Can be done. In addition, at least until the next river breakthrough production, it is possible to realize a novel playability that is desired to be continuously out of the lottery of special symbols. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Furthermore, by configuring the configuration so that there is a possibility of shifting to the normal state due to failure of the river breakthrough production, the continuation of the time saving state was notified in the river breakthrough production (shifting to the latent state even though the river was broken through). Even if it wasn't), it can be made to think that it is better than being notified of the normal state. That is, even if the latent state is not notified, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged.

Next, with reference to FIG. 301, the small hit effect that can be executed in the latent state in the eleventh embodiment will be described. Here, in the eleventh embodiment, a plurality of effects having different modes are provided as the small hit effect, and when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the lottery of the first special symbol being changed is performed. Performed to suggest results. In the latent state, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the time saving state of the normal symbol is mainly terminated in the probable change state in which the reserved balls of the first special symbol are easily accumulated, and the first special symbol is executed. This is the case when the state shifts to the latent state while possessing the reserved ball of the symbol. In this case, the game ball enters the second entrance 640 while the variable display based on the reserved ball of the first special symbol that has been suspended is being executed, so that the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. The variable display of the second special symbol is executed in duplicate. The lottery result of the first special symbol can be suggested by the small hit effect when the lottery of the second special symbol is a small hit.

FIG. 301 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a small hit effect (small hit effect for high expectation) suggesting that the lottery result of the first special symbol is likely to be a big hit. When the small hit effect for high expectation is executed, as shown in FIG. 301, the effect symbol 816 in a flashy display mode as compared with the effect symbol 813 in the normal small hit effect (see FIG. 7B). Is displayed. As shown in FIG. 301, in this effect symbol 816, the character color "V" for indicating a small hit is set to a character color (yellow) different from the character color (black) in the effect symbol 813, and " The effect around the letter "V" gives it a flashy look. With these display modes, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the small hit effect different from the normal small hit effect (see FIG. 7B) has been executed, so that the big hit is achieved. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the matter.

Although not shown, in the eleventh embodiment, in addition to the normal small hit effect (small hit effect for low expectation) and the small hit effect for high expectation, the expectation is medium. There is also a small hit effect (small hit effect for medium expectations). With this configuration, the second special symbol is likely to be executed in duplicate during the period when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are likely to overlap, such as immediately after the transition to the latent state. It is possible to realize a novel playability that predicts the lottery result of the first special symbol depending on the type of the small hit effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Here, conventionally, a gaming machine that executes a variable display effect of a symbol for showing the lottery result every time a lottery result of a special symbol is executed is widely known. In the conventional gaming machine, the player's interest is improved by executing various entertainment effects suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol during the execution of the symbol variation display effect. However, in a gaming machine having specifications capable of simultaneously executing a plurality of variable display effects, there is a problem that while paying attention to the effect mode associated with one variable display, the effect mode in the other variable display effect is overlooked. There was a point. In particular, in a gaming machine of a type in which one variation display is displayed in a mode that is easier to see than the other, it becomes difficult to confirm the effect mode in the variation display of the other (the side that is difficult to see), and the other variation display effect. However, there is a problem that the player may be confused when the big hit is started while the player is not paying attention to it.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment, the variation display of the second special symbol, which is mainly executed in the latent state, is prioritized (visually recognized) over the variation display of the first special symbol, which is difficult to execute. If the variation display of the first special symbol is executed together with the display (in an easy mode), the lottery of the first special symbol is performed by the small hit effect of the second special symbol (the effect mode accompanying the variation display). The structure suggests the result. With this configuration, it is possible to confirm the degree of expectation that will be a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol only by paying attention to the effect mode accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, the lottery result of the first special symbol, which is being executed at the same time, suggests the degree of expectation that the lottery result is a big hit, depending on the display mode in the small hit effect of the second special symbol. Not limited. For example, it may be configured to suggest the lottery result of the first special symbol depending on the effect mode of the effect executed during the variable display of the second special symbol. Further, for example, it is also possible to suggest (notify) the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol will be a big hit depending on the display mode of the variable display of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device. good. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest the result of the variable display effect on the side that is difficult to see to the player just by checking the variable display effect on the side that is easy to see, so that the effect that is easier to understand is realized. can do. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved.

<Electrical configuration of the eleventh embodiment>
Next, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 302 to 304. The ROM 202 in the eleventh embodiment has the specified contents of the first random number table 202a and the specified contents of the small hit random number table 202b with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 15A). The difference is that the specified contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d and the specified contents of the variation pattern selection table 202f are partially changed. Since the other configurations are the same as the configurations of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 15A), detailed description thereof will be described later.

First, the details of the first random number table 202a provided in the ROM 202 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 302 (a). FIG. 302A is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first random number table 202a. The first random number table 202a in the eleventh embodiment is the same as the first random number table 202a in the first embodiment (see FIG. 15A), in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is a data table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a hit in each game state is set.

As shown in FIG. 302 (a), the first hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 302 (a)) in the eleventh embodiment shows a random number value (counter value) determined to be a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol. ), While two of "7, 8" are specified, eight random numbers (counter value) of "0 to 7" are determined to be big hits in the high probability state (probability change state) of the special symbol. Random number value is specified. Therefore, in the eleventh embodiment, the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1/240 (2/480), and the jackpot probability in the probability variation state of the special symbol is 1/60 (1/480).

Next, the small hit random number table 202b in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 302 (b). FIG. 302 (b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the small hit random number table 202b in the eleventh embodiment. Similar to the small hit random number table 202b (see FIG. 15B) in the first embodiment, the small hit random number table 202b is set with a random number value (counter value) determined to be a small hit in the special symbol lottery. It is a table that has been set. As shown in FIG. 302 (b), in the small hit random number table 202b in the eleventh embodiment, the random number value to be a small hit is not defined for the lottery of the first special symbol. That is, in the lottery of the first special symbol, the small hit is not won. On the other hand, for the lottery of the second special symbol, 472 random numbers (counter values) of "8 to 479" are defined in association with each other. Therefore, in the eleventh embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, a small hit is obtained with a probability of 59/60 (472/480). That is, in the eleventh embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the latent state, it becomes a big hit or a small hit. Therefore, the degree of advantage of the latent state can be further increased.

Next, with reference to FIG. 303, the details of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 303 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d. Similar to the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A) in the first embodiment, the jackpot type selection table 202d in the eleventh embodiment has a determination value for determining the jackpot type for each type of special symbol. It is a data table stored in.

As shown in FIG. 303, in the jackpot type selection table 202d in the eleventh embodiment, seven jackpot types of "big hit A11" to "big hit G11" are shown as the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1). Is stipulated. On the other hand, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, three jackpot types of "big hit H11" to "big hit J11" are defined.

As shown in FIG. 303, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4", while the jackpot type is "big hit A11". It is specified in association with each other. This "big hit A11" is a type of jackpot (8 rounds probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds and the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends. It should be noted that whether or not the time saving state of the normal symbol is set is variable according to the game state at the time of winning the big hit. More specifically, when the "big hit A11" is won in the normal state, the time saving state, and the probability change state, the time saving state of the normal symbol is not set (0 is set in the value of the time saving counter 203f). That is, if the "big hit A11" is won in the normal state, the time saving state, and the probabilistic state, the state shifts to the most advantageous latent state. At this time, since the number of probability changes is set to 100 (100 is set in the probability change counter 203j), at the maximum, from the end of "big hit A11" to the execution of 100 special symbol lottery. For the time being, a favorable latent state continues. On the other hand, when the "big hit A11" is won in the latent state, the number of time reductions is set to 50 (50 is set to the value of the time reduction counter 203f), so after the big hit ends, a lottery of special symbols can be performed at the maximum. Is a relatively advantageous probabilistic state until it is executed 50 times. Therefore, the "big hit A11" is the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of the gaming state when winning in a gaming state other than the latent probability state. On the other hand, if you win in the latent state, it will be a relatively advantageous jackpot type in terms of the gaming state (it is more disadvantageous than the jackpot type in which the latent probability state is set, but it is more advantageous than the jackpot type in which the time saving state is set. Become).

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, 5 are the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit A11", so the lottery for the first special symbol In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit A11" is determined is 5% (5/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 303, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "5 to 14" and "big hit B11" as the jackpot type. This "big hit B11" is a type of jackpot (8 rounds probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds and the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends. If the "big hit B11" is won in the normal state, the number of time reductions is set to 75 times, while if the "big hit B11" is won in the time reduction state and the probable change state, the number of time reductions is set to 40 times. Will be done. That is, if the "big hit B11" is won in the normal state, the time saving state, and the probable change state, the state shifts to a relatively advantageous probable change state. On the other hand, when the "big hit B11" is won in the latent probability state, the number of time reductions is set to 0, so that the gaming state after the big hit is the most advantageous latent state. Therefore, the "big hit B11" is a big hit type that is relatively advantageous in terms of the gaming state when winning in a gaming state other than the latent probability state. On the other hand, if the player wins in the latent state, it will be the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of the game state.

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, 10 are the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit B11", so the first special symbol lottery. In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit B11" is determined is 10% (10/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 303, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "15 to 69" and "big hit C11" as the jackpot type. This "big hit C11" is a type of jackpot (8 rounds probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds and the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends. If you win the "big hit C11" in the normal state, the number of time reductions is set to 50 times, while if you win the "big hit C11" in the time reduction state and the probable change state, the number of time reductions is set to 25 times. Will be done. That is, since a smaller number of time reductions is set as compared with the case where the "big hit B11" is won in the above three game states, it becomes easier to shift to the latent state (normal symbols are continuously removed until the time reduction state ends. It will be easier to make it). Therefore, in the normal state, the time saving state, and the probable change state, the "big hit C11" is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than the "big hit B11". On the other hand, when the "big hit B11" is won in the latent probability state, the number of time reductions is set to 0, so that the gaming state after the big hit is the most advantageous latent state. Therefore, the "big hit C11" is the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of the gaming state when winning in the latent state.

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, 55 are the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit C11", so the first special symbol lottery. In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit C11" is determined is 55% (55/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 303, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined as "70 to 79", and "big hit D11" is associated with the jackpot type. This "big hit D11" is a type of jackpot (8 rounds probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds and the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends. If the "big hit D11" is won in the normal state, the number of time reductions is set to 25, while if the "big hit D11" is won in the time reduction state and the probable change state, the number of time reductions is set to 10 times. Will be done. That is, since the number of time reductions is set to be smaller than when the "big hit B11" or "big hit C11" is won in the above three game states, it becomes easy to shift to the latent state (the time reduction state of the normal symbol ends). It will be easier to continue the disconnection). Therefore, in the normal state, the time saving state, and the probable change state, the "big hit D11" is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than the "big hit B11" and the "big hit C11". On the other hand, when the "big hit D11" is won in the latent probability state, the number of time reductions is set to 0, so that the gaming state after the big hit is the most advantageous latent state. Therefore, the "big hit D11" is the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of the gaming state when winning in the latent state.

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, 10 are the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit D11", so the first special symbol lottery. In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit D11" is determined is 10% (2/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 303, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "80, 81", and the jackpot type is defined as "big hit E11". This "big hit E11" is a type of big hit (8 rounds normal big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds, and after the end of the big hit is set to the low probability state of the special symbol. If the "big hit E11" is won in the normal state, the number of time reductions is set to 75, while if the "big hit E11" is won in the time reduction state, the probable change state, and the latent state, the number of time reductions is set. It is set to 100 times. The time saving state is a kind of jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player because it only shifts to the normal state (it does not shift to the advantageous latent state) even if the time saving number of times elapses.

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, two are random values (counter values) associated with the "big hit E11", so the first special symbol lottery. In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit E11" is determined is 2% (2/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 303, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined as "82 to 98", and "big hit F11" is associated with the jackpot type. This "big hit F11" is a type of big hit (8 rounds normal big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds, and after the end of the big hit is set to the low probability state of the special symbol. If the "big hit F11" is won in the normal state, the number of time reductions is set to 50, while if the "big hit F11" is won in the time reduction state, the probable change state, and the latent state, the number of time reductions is set. It is set to 100 times. Therefore, the "big hit F11" is a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous than the "big hit E11" in the normal state, and is a jackpot with the same degree of advantage as the "big hit E11" in the time saving state, the probable change state, and the latent state. ..

Of the 100 possible random values (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, 17 are random values (counter values) associated with the "big hit F11", so the first special symbol lottery. In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit F11" is determined is 17% (17/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 303, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "99", and the jackpot type is defined as "big hit G11". This "big hit G11" is a type of big hit (8 rounds normal big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds, and after the end of the big hit is set to the low probability state of the special symbol. If the "big hit G11" is won in the normal state, the number of time reductions is set to 25, while if the "big hit G11" is won in the time reduction state, the probable change state, and the latent state, the number of time reductions is set. It is set to 100 times. Therefore, the "big hit G11" is a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous than the "big hit E11" and the "big hit F11" in the normal state, and the "big hit E11" and the "big hit F11" in the time saving state, the probable change state, and the latent state. It is a big hit with the same degree of advantage.

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, one is the random number value (counter value) associated with the "big hit G11", so the first special symbol lottery. In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit G11" is determined is 1% (1/100).

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, as the jackpot of the first special symbol, the probability variation jackpot (“big hit B11” to A "big hit D11") and a normal jackpot ("big hit E11" to "big hit G11") in which 75, 50, and 25 time reductions are set are provided. That is, the timing at which the time saving state of the normal symbol ends is set to three patterns of 75 times, 50 times, and 25 times after the end of the big hit. With this configuration, after the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, it shifts to the latent state every time the lottery of the special symbol is executed 25 times, 50 times, and 75 times. Can be expected. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the ratio of jackpots in which the number of time reductions is set to 25 is usually extremely low (1%). Therefore, since it is difficult to determine the jackpot type that is most disadvantageous to the player (the number of time reductions is small and there is no possibility of shifting to the latent state), it is possible to prevent the player from becoming too disadvantageous. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation for the game from being lowered. Further, the ratio of the normal jackpot (big hit E11) in which the number of time reductions is set to 75 is also configured to be relatively low (2%). As a result, when the number of time reductions exceeds 50 times (that is, when the continuation is notified by the second river breakthrough effect), the expectation of being in a probable change state can be improved. Therefore, even if the transition to the latent state is not notified in the second river breakthrough effect (that is, even if the continuation is notified), the expectation for the next (that is, the third) river breakthrough effect is higher. Can be improved.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the case where the probability change jackpot is won (that is, the consecutive villas) is less than the case where the jackpot is won in the normal state (that is, the so-called first hit) in the time saving state or the probability change state. The configuration is such that the number of time reductions is set. That is, it is configured so that the end condition of the normal symbol in the time-saving state is more easily established when the probability-changing jackpot is won in the time-saving state or the probability-changing state than when the probability-changing jackpot is won in the normal state. In other words, it is more likely that the person who wins the probability change jackpot during the time saving state of the normal symbol will shift to the latent state. As a result, the player can feel as if he / she is approaching the latent state as the jackpot is won in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. ..

If a normal jackpot is won in a time-saving state or a probability change state, 100 times are set as the number of time-savings regardless of the jackpot type. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of advantage in the case of a normal jackpot that is disadvantageous in the time saving state or the probable change state (that is, does not shift to the latent probable state even if the end condition of the time saving state of the normal symbol is satisfied). Therefore, in both the case of a probable change jackpot and the case of a normal jackpot, the degree of advantage can be increased when a so-called consecutive villa occurs rather than when the so-called first hit occurs. It is possible to further improve the expectation of the player in such a case.

Further, as shown in FIG. 303, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 74", and the jackpot type is "big hit H11". Is specified in association with each other. This "big hit H11" is a type of jackpot (16 rounds probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 16 rounds and the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends. If the "big hit H11" is won in a state other than the latent state, the number of time reductions is set to 100, while if the "big hit H11" is won in the latent state, the number of time reductions is set to 0. Set. That is, if the "big hit H11" is won in a game state other than the latent state, the game state after the big hit is set to the probable change state, while if the "big hit H11" is won in the latent state, after the big hit is finished. The game state of is set to the latent state.

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, 75 are the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit H11", so the second special symbol lottery. In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit H11" is determined is 75% (75/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 303, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "75 to 79" and "big hit I11" as the jackpot type. This "big hit I11" is a type of jackpot (16 rounds probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 16 rounds and the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends. If the "big hit I11" is won in a state other than the latent state, the number of time reductions is set to 100, while if the "big hit I11" is won in the latent state, the number of time reductions is 50 times. Set. That is, when the "big hit I11" is won, the gaming state after the big hit is set to the probable change state regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning.

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, the random values (counter values) associated with the "big hit I11" are five, so the second special symbol lottery. In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit H11" is determined is 5% (5/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 303, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "80 to 99" and "big hit J11" as the jackpot type. This "big hit J11" is a type of big hit (16 rounds normal big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 16 rounds, and after the end of the big hit is set to the low probability state of the special symbol. If the "big hit J11" is won in a state other than the latent state, the number of time reductions is set to 0, while if the "big hit J11" is won in the latent state, the number of time reductions is 100 times. Set. That is, if the "big hit J11" is won in a game state other than the latent state, the normal state is set after the big hit ends, while if the "big hit J11" is won in the latent state, the game state after the big hit ends is set. It is set to the time saving state.

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, 20 are the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit J11", so the second special symbol lottery. In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit J11" is determined is 20% (20/100).

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol in the game state other than the latent probability state, the game state after the big hit is relatively disadvantageous. .. This is intended to suppress an irregular game method in which a right-handed game is performed and a lottery for the second special symbol is executed even though the game is not in a latent state. That is, if the same gaming state as the latent probability state is set in the jackpot of the second special symbol won in the game state other than the latent probability state, the lottery of the second special symbol is intentionally performed by right-handed. Depending on the game method to be executed, the player will shift to the most advantageous latent state at a high rate of 75%, which will be excessively advantageous to the player. On the other hand, in the eleventh embodiment, even if a right-handed game is performed in a game state in which a left-handed game should be performed and a big hit is obtained, there is no possibility of shifting to the latent state (that is, the number of time reductions). (Probability change state where the probability change state ends at the same time as the passage) is set, or the most disadvantageous normal state is set, so it is disadvantageous for the player to win a big hit in the second special symbol lottery. .. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in which a right-handed game is performed in a game state in which a left-handed game should be performed.

Next, the details of the variation pattern selection table 202f according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 304. Similar to the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 17) in the first embodiment, the variation pattern selection table 202f determines the variation pattern (variation time) of the variation display from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1. It is a data table for doing. In the eleventh embodiment, among the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f, the provisions of the time saving / probability variation table 202f2 and the latent probability table 202f3 are partially changed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 304 (a), the time reduction / probability variation table 202f2 in the eleventh embodiment is more than the time reduction / probability variation table 202f2 (see FIG. 19 (a)) in the first embodiment. It is configured so that the fluctuation time is shortened (10 to 20 seconds) when the first special symbol is hit. Further, as the fluctuation pattern at the time of the deviation of the first special symbol, an deviation short variation with a fluctuation time of 1 second, an deviation middle fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds, and an deviation super fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds are provided. There is. As a result, it is possible to improve the game efficiency in the time saving state and the probable change state, and to diversify the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection. Further, since the average fluctuation time is shorter than that in the normal state (see FIG. 18), it is possible to improve the game efficiency in the game state in which the time reduction state of the normal symbol is set. As for the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol, 60 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result as in the first embodiment. As a result, when a right-handed game is performed in a time-saving state or a probable change state in which a left-handed game should be performed, the game efficiency can be deteriorated. It is possible to suppress the game method.

Further, as shown in FIG. 304 (b), in the latent probability table 202f3j in the eleventh embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol is the same as the time saving / probability variation table 202f2. On the other hand, for the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol, a fluctuation pattern for 1 second is set regardless of the lottery result. Therefore, when the player shifts to the latent state and performs the right-handed game, the small hit game is executed at a relatively short interval (about 1 second interval), so that the first specific winning opening 65a is frequently opened. , You can get prize balls frequently. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of advantage of the player in the latent state.

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, in the latent state, the jackpot probability becomes high, and the first specific winning opening 65a is opened at 1-second intervals, which is an extremely advantageous gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play the game with one goal of shifting to the latent state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 305, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 305 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 according to the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 305, in the configuration of the RAM 203 in the eleventh embodiment, a probability variation counter 203ja is added to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 21) in place of the probability variation flag 203g. It differs in that.

The probability variation counter 203ja is a counter for counting the number of lottery of the remaining special symbols until the probability variation state of the special symbol ends. If the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is 1 or more, it indicates that the special symbol is in the probability variation state, and if the value is 0, it indicates that the special symbol is in the low probability state. The initial value of the probability variation counter 203ja is set to 0, and the value is set to 0 when the jackpot is won. If the winning jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot, a value of 100 is set at the end of the probabilistic jackpot. Further, while the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is 1 or more, the value is decremented by 1 and updated every time a new special symbol lottery is executed (see S623 in FIG. 310). When the lottery of the special symbol is executed, the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is referred to to determine whether or not it is in the probability variation state, and a table for determining the jackpot (first random number for high probability). Either a table or a random number table per first for low probability times) is selected.

Next, with reference to FIG. 306, the method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10 realized by performing control based on various tables defined in ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in RAM 203. explain. FIG. 306 is a diagram showing a method of transitioning the state of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 306, the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment is roughly divided into four gaming states. That is, the normal state shown in the upper part of FIG. 306, the probabilistic state shown in the center left side of FIG. 306, the time saving state shown in the center right side of FIG. It is provided.

As described above, the normal state indicates a low probability state of the special symbol and a normal state of the normal symbol, the probability of becoming a big hit is low, and the electric accessory 64a is difficult to be released (the game ball is lower). 1 It is difficult to enter the ball into the ball entry port 64b2), which is the most disadvantageous game state for the player. Further, as described above, the probabilistic state indicates the probabilistic state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol, the probability of a big hit is high, and the lower first entrance is performed by performing a left-handed game. Since the game ball frequently enters the 64 (the electric accessory 64a is frequently released), the game state is relatively advantageous for the player. In addition, the time saving state indicates a low probability state of a special symbol and a time saving state of a normal symbol, and although the jackpot probability is low, by performing a left-handed game, the lower first is the same as the probability change state. Since the game ball frequently enters the ball entry port 640, a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is formed. Further, as described above, the latent probability state indicates the probabilistic state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, and when the jackpot probability is high and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. Since the set fluctuation time is significantly shorter than the other three game states (60 seconds → 1 second), the second special symbol lottery can be efficiently executed by performing a right-handed game. Can be done. Then, as described above, in the lottery of the second special symbol, a small hit is won with a high probability (59/60), and the first specific winning opening 64a is opened. The game balls frequently enter the two entry openings 640 and the first specific winning opening 64a, forming an extremely advantageous gaming state in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained without going through a big hit. Therefore, the latent state is the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 306, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal state to another state only when a big hit occurs. Specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 306, when the jackpot A11, which is the jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 5% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), it is latent after the jackpot ends. Move to a certain state. Therefore, when the jackpot A11 is reached, it directly shifts to the most advantageous latent state. Therefore, in the normal state, the jackpot A11 is the type of jackpot that is most pleasing to the player. In addition, if any of the jackpots B11 to D11, which is the jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 75% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), it will be in a relatively advantageous probability change state after the jackpot ends. Transition. Further, when the jackpot of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and any of the jackpots E11 to G11 determined at a rate of 20% is selected as the jackpot type, the time is shortened after the jackpot ends. As described above, when the probabilistic state and the time saving state are set as the game states after the jackpot ends, it is configured so that it becomes difficult to recognize which game state is set (which game state). However, the structure is such that the river breakthrough effect is executed at the same timing). Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the result of the river breakthrough effect and perform the game.

In addition, as shown on the left side of the center of FIG. 306, there is a possibility of shifting from the probabilistic state to another state in the case of a big hit or when the time saving state of the normal symbol ends. be. Specifically, it becomes a big hit in the probability change state, and when the big hit A11 determined at a rate of 5% is selected, it shifts to an advantageous latent state after the end of the big hit. Further, when the jackpots E11 to G11 determined at a rate of 20% are selected, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the time saving state. On the other hand, if the time saving state of the normal symbol ends before the jackpot is won, it shifts to the most advantageous latent state. On the other hand, when the jackpot type of the first special symbol is one of the jackpots B11 to D11 determined at a rate of 75%, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the probable change state again ( Loop the probabilistic state). In other words, in the probabilistic state, even if you win the jackpot, it will shift to the advantageous latent state only with a low probability (5% ratio), so it is better to let the player pass the time reduction number of times. You can feel that it is easy to shift to the state. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel playability in which the deviation is expected to be continuous over the set number of time reductions. As mentioned above, the transition is based on winning the probability change jackpot in the probability variation state or the time saving state, rather than the probability variation state (the probability variation state that transitioned after the first hit) that was transferred based on winning the probability variation jackpot in the normal state. It is configured so that the average value of the set number of time reductions is smaller in the probable change state (probability change state that shifts after the occurrence of the consecutive villas). That is, while the average number of time reductions set at the time of the first hit is 50 times, the average number of time reductions set at the time of the occurrence of the consecutive villas is 25 times. Therefore, it is easier to pass the number of time reductions when the consecutive villas occur, so even if the jackpot is won before the number of time reductions elapses in the probability change state and the probability change state is looped. Since there is a high possibility that the number of time reductions (small number of time reductions) that facilitates the transition to the latent state is set, the disappointment of the player can be alleviated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation for the game from being lowered.

Further, as shown on the right side of the center of FIG. 306, there is a possibility of shifting from the time saving state to another state in the case of a big hit or when the time saving state of the normal symbol ends. be. Specifically, when the jackpot is a big hit in the time saving state and the jackpot A11 determined at a rate of 5% is selected, it shifts to an advantageous latent state after the jackpot ends. Further, when the jackpots B11 to D11 determined at a rate of 75% are selected, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the probable change state. On the other hand, if the time saving state of the normal symbol ends before the jackpot is won, it shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state. On the other hand, when the jackpot type of the first special symbol is one of the jackpots E11 to G11 determined at a rate of 20%, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the time saving state again ( Loop the time saving state). In other words, in the time saving state, even if the number of time saving times of the normal symbol elapses, it shifts to the disadvantageous normal state, so it is advantageous to win the jackpot. As described above, it is difficult to distinguish whether the time saving state of the normal symbol is set or the probability variation state is set from the content of the effect, so the time saving state is set. In the meantime, it can be expected to be in a probable state. That is, it can be expected that the number of time reductions of the normal symbol will elapse. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 306, from the latent probability state to another state, there is a possibility of shifting to another gaming state not only when a big hit occurs but also when the number of probability changes has elapsed. Specifically, in the latent state, a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, and when the big hit I11 determined at a rate of 5% is selected, the probability change state is entered after the big hit is completed. Further, when the jackpot J11 determined at a rate of 20% is selected, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the time saving state. On the other hand, if the number of probable changes ends before the jackpot is won, the state shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state. On the other hand, if the jackpot H11 is determined at a rate of 75% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the latent state again ( Loop the latency state). In other words, in the latent state, by winning the jackpot before the number of probability changes elapses, a high rate (75% rate) of the advantageous latent state is looped, so that after shifting to the latent state. Can be made to play the game while expecting to be a big hit.

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, it is possible to realize the playability in which the deviation is expected to be continuous in the probabilistic state, while the playability is expected to be a big hit in the latent state. can do. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 307 (a), the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 307 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 222 in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 307 (a), the configuration of the ROM 222 in the eleventh embodiment has a small hit effect selection table 222ja and a prize for the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 22 (a)). It differs from the sound selection table 222jb in that it is added.

The small hit effect selection table 222ja is a data table referred to for selecting the type of the small hit effect during the execution of the small hit game when the small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. As described above, when the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are executed in duplicate (simultaneously), such as immediately after the transition to the latent state, this small hit effect is performed. Depending on the type, the lottery result of the first special symbol can be suggested. The details of the small hit effect selection table 222ja will be described later with reference to FIG. 308 (a).

The winning sound selection table 222jb is a data table referred to for selecting a winning sound to be output when a winning is detected for the specific winning opening 65a during the execution of the small hit game. In the eleventh embodiment, the lottery result of the first special symbol can be suggested (notified) even by the winning sound output during the small hit game. As a result, not only the small hit effect but also the winning sound can be paid attention to the game, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. The details of the winning sound selection table 222jb will be described later with reference to FIG. 308 (b).

Next, the details of the small hit effect selection table 222ja described above will be described with reference to FIG. 308 (a). FIG. 308 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the small hit effect selection table 222ja. As shown in FIG. 308 (a), in the small hit effect selection table 222ja, the type of winning information of the first special symbol (data stored in the storage area corresponding to the first special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b). The range of the counter value of the effect counter (effect lottery counter) 223h and the effect mode of the small hit effect are defined in association with each other.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 308 (a), when data indicating a jackpot is stored in the execution area as the winning information of the first special symbol (that is, the fluctuation of the first special symbol during execution). (When the display is a big hit), the value of the effect counter 223h is defined in association with the normal effect mode (see FIG. 7 (b)) with respect to the range of "0 to 69", and is defined as "70 to 89". The range of "90 to 99" is defined in association with the effect mode for medium expectation, and the range of "90 to 99" is associated with the effect mode for high expectation (see FIG. 301). There is. Therefore, the percentages of the normal effect mode, the effect mode for medium expectation, and the effect mode for high expectation selected during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol are 70% (70/100) and 20%, respectively. (20/100), and 10% (10/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 308 (a), when data indicating a jackpot is stored in an area other than the execution area as the winning information of the first special symbol (the jackpot is included in the reserved ball of the first special symbol). When the data indicating the out-of-order super fluctuation is stored in the execution area (when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol being executed is out of the super-variation), the value of the staging counter 223h is "0 to 84". A normal effect mode (see FIG. 7B) is associated with the range of, and an effect mode for medium expectation is associated with the range of “85 to 97”. An effect mode for high expectations (see FIG. 301) is defined in association with the range of "98,99". Therefore, when the reserved ball of the 1st special symbol contains a big hit, or when the out-of-order super fluctuation of the 1st special symbol is being executed, the normal effect mode, the effect mode for medium expectation, and the high effect mode are used. The percentages at which the effect mode for expectation is selected are 85% (85/100), 13% (13/100), and 2% (2/100), respectively. That is, the selection ratio of the effect mode for high expectation and the effect mode for medium expectation is lower than that in the case where the jackpot of the first special symbol is changing, and the selection ratio of the normal effect mode is increased. Has been done. Therefore, if the variation display of the first special symbol is executed at the time when the effect mode for high expectation or the effect mode for medium expectation is executed, the variation display of the first special symbol indicates a big hit. It can be expected more strongly that it is a variable display for. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the small hit effect and perform the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 308 (a), when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is not executed, the out-of-order super fluctuation is not executed, and the jackpot is not included in the reserved ball of the first special symbol. The value of the effect counter 223h is defined in association with a normal effect mode (see FIG. 7B) with respect to the range of "0 to 94", and with respect to the range of "95 to 98". The effect mode for medium expectation is defined in association with each other, and the effect mode for high expectation (see FIG. 301) is associated with "99". Therefore, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is not executed, the missed super fluctuation is not executed, and the jackpot is not included in the reserved ball of the first special symbol, the normal production mode and the medium expectation degree The proportions of which the effect mode for high expectation and the effect mode for high expectation are selected are 95% (95/100), 4% (4/100), and 1% (1/100), respectively. That is, the selection ratio of the production mode for high expectation and medium expectation compared to the case where the jackpot fluctuation or the missed super fluctuation of the first special symbol is being executed or the jackpot is included in the hold. Is configured to decrease and the selection ratio of the normal production mode increases. Therefore, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed at the time when the effect mode for high expectation or the effect mode for medium expectation is executed, or when the reserved ball of the first special symbol exists. , The game can be played with the expectation that the variable display during execution will be a big hit, or that the big hit is included in the hold. Therefore, every time a small hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is possible to realize a game property in which the lottery result of the first special symbol is predicted from the effect mode of the small hit effect. Can be improved.

Here, conventionally, a gaming machine that executes a variable display effect of a symbol for showing the lottery result every time a lottery result of a special symbol is executed is widely known. In the conventional gaming machine, the player's interest is improved by executing various entertainment effects suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol during the execution of the symbol variation display effect. However, in a gaming machine having specifications capable of simultaneously executing a plurality of variable display effects, there is a problem that while paying attention to the effect mode associated with one variable display, the effect mode in the other variable display effect is overlooked. There was a point. In particular, in a gaming machine of a type in which one variation display is displayed in a mode that is easier to see than the other, it becomes difficult to confirm the effect mode in the variation display of the other (the side that is difficult to see), and the other variation display effect. However, there is a problem that the player may be confused when the big hit is started while the player is not paying attention to it.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment, the variation display of the second special symbol, which is mainly executed in the latent state, is prioritized (visually recognized) over the variation display of the first special symbol, which is difficult to execute. If the variation display of the first special symbol is executed together with the display (in an easy mode), the lottery of the first special symbol is performed by the small hit effect of the second special symbol (the effect mode accompanying the variation display). The structure suggests the result. With this configuration, it is possible to confirm the degree of expectation that will be a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol only by paying attention to the effect mode accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, the lottery result of the first special symbol, which is being executed at the same time, suggests the degree of expectation that the lottery result is a big hit, depending on the display mode in the small hit effect of the second special symbol. Not limited. For example, it may be configured to suggest the lottery result of the first special symbol depending on the effect mode of the effect executed during the variable display of the second special symbol. Further, for example, it is also possible to suggest (notify) the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol will be a big hit depending on the display mode of the variable display of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device. good. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest the result of the variable display effect on the side that is difficult to see to the player just by checking the variable display effect on the side that is easy to see, so that the effect that is easier to understand is realized. can do. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved.

Next, the details of the winning sound selection table 222jb will be described with reference to FIG. 308 (b). As described above, the winning sound selection table 222jb is a data table referred to for selecting a winning sound to be output when a winning is detected for the specific winning opening 65a during the execution of the small hit game. As shown in FIG. 308 (b), in the winning sound selection table 222jb, the effect counter is displayed for each type of winning information in the execution area of the first special symbol (variation type of the variation display of the first special symbol being executed). (Production lottery counter) The range of the counter value of 223h and the type of winning sound (one of three types of normal sound, chance sound, and confirmed sound) are defined in association with each other. The normal sound is relatively short and is composed of a plain voice (for example, the voice of "charin"), and the chance sound is longer than the normal sound and is composed of a flashy voice (for example, "jakin"). It is composed of voice), and the definite sound is composed of the most flashy voice among the three types (for example, the voice "docker"). Although details will be described later, the fixed sound is a special sound that is output only when the game ball enters (wins) the first specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 308 (b), when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is being executed, a normal sound is generated as a winning sound with respect to the value of the effect lottery counter 223h in the range of "0 to 79". It is defined in association with each other, and a chance sound is associated with the range of "80 to 98" as a winning sound, and a definite sound is associated with "99" as a winning sound. Therefore, when a prize is detected for the first specific winning opening 65a during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the ratios of the normal sound, the chance sound, and the confirmed sound are 80% and 19%, respectively. And 1%. As mentioned above, the definite sound is a special sound that is selected only during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation. Therefore, when the definite sound is output, it is possible to give great joy to the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 308 (b), when the out-of-order super fluctuation of the first special symbol is being executed, the value of the staging lottery counter 223h is set as a winning sound in the range of "0 to 89". Normal sounds are associated with each other, and chance sounds are associated with the range of "90 to 99" as winning sounds. On the other hand, the value of the effect counter 223h is not associated with the fixed sound. Therefore, when a prize is detected for the first specific winning opening 65a during the execution of the out-of-order super fluctuation of the first special symbol, the ratio of the normal sound, the chance sound, and the confirmed sound being output is 90% and 10%, respectively. , And 0%. That is, the ratio of the chance sound being output decreases (about half) and the ratio of the normal sound being output increases as compared with the case of the jackpot fluctuation. Then, there is no possibility that a definite sound is output.

Further, as shown in FIG. 308 (b), when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is not executed or the off-super fluctuation is not executed, the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 94". Therefore, a normal sound is associated and defined as a winning sound, and a chance sound is associated and defined as a winning sound in the range of "95 to 99". On the other hand, the value of the effect counter 223h is not associated with the fixed sound. Therefore, when a prize is detected for the first specific winning opening 65a during the execution of the out-of-order super fluctuation of the first special symbol, the ratio of the normal sound, the chance sound, and the confirmed sound being output is 95% and 5%, respectively. , And 0%. That is, the output ratio of the chance sound is further reduced and the output ratio of the normal sound is increased as compared with the case where the off-super fluctuation is being executed. Therefore, when the chance sound is output, it is possible to improve the expectation that the jackpot fluctuation is being executed. Further, since the confirmation sound is output, it is confirmed that the jackpot fluctuation is being executed, so that the player can have great joy. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention not only to the small hit effect but also to the winning sound output during the small hit game, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 307 (b), the details of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 307 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 according to the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 307 (b), the configuration of the RAM 223 in the eleventh embodiment has a fluctuation count counter 223ja and an initial hit flag with respect to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 22 (b)). It differs from 223jb in that it is added.

The fluctuation number counter 223ja is a counter for counting the fluctuation number (lottery number) of the special symbol. The initial value of the fluctuation count counter 223ja is set to 0, and the value is incremented by 1 each time the fluctuation display effect starts (that is, each time a fluctuation pattern command is received from the main controller 110). (See S5121 and S5125 in FIG. 314). Further, it is reset to 0 at the end of the big hit (see S4422 in FIG. 312). In the gaming state (probability change state, time saving state) in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, it is determined whether or not the river breakthrough effect can be executed by referring to the value of the fluctuation number counter 223ja (S5132, S5133 in FIG. 315). reference).

The first hit flag 223jb is a flag indicating whether or not the time saving state of the normal symbol set after the first hit is set. If this first hit flag is on, it means that it is during the time saving state of the normal symbol set after the first hit, and if it is off, it means that it is not the time saving state after the first hit. In the time saving state of the normal symbol, this first hit flag 223jb is referred to every time the start timing of the variation display effect of the special symbol is reached, and whether it is the time saving state after the first hit or the time saving state after the occurrence of the consecutive villas. It is determined whether or not there is. Then, if the time is shortened after the first hit, the river breakthrough effect is set at the start of the 24th, 49th, and 74th variation display after the end of the big hit (see S5132 in FIG. 315). On the other hand, if the time is shortened after the occurrence of the consecutive villas, the river breakthrough effect is set at the start of the variation display of 9, 24, and 39 times (S5133 in FIG. 315). As described above, this is the number of fluctuations (special) in which the time saving state of the normal symbol may end between the time saving state of the normal symbol set after the first hit and the time saving state of the normal symbol set after the consecutive villas. This is because the number of lottery of symbols) is different.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 309 to 311, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 309, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 12 (S321) in the eleventh embodiment will be described. The first special symbol jackpot determination process 12 (S321) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment, and is a process executed in place of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34). Similar to the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34), based on the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, based on the set gaming state, This is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not it is a jackpot.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 12 (see FIG. 309) in the eleventh embodiment, the control content is changed by providing the probability change counter 203ja instead of the probability change flag 203g in the first embodiment. More specifically, in each process of S401, S403 to S410, S412 in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 12 (see FIG. 309) in the eleventh embodiment, the first special symbol jackpot in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S401, S403 to S410, S412 of the determination processing (see FIG. 34) is executed. Further, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 12 (see FIG. 309) in the eleventh embodiment, when the process of S401 is completed, the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is a value larger than 0 (that is, a value of 1 or more). If it is determined whether or not (S421) and it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is larger than 0 (S421: Yes), the process is shifted to S403. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is 0 in the processing of S421 (S421: No), the processing is shifted to S404.

Although the illustration is omitted, the control content of the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40) is also changed in the same manner.

Next, the details of the game state update process 12 (S322) in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 310. FIG. 310 is a flowchart showing the game state update process 12 (S322) in the eleventh embodiment. The game state update process 12 (S322) is a process executed in place of the game state update process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment, and is different from the game state update process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment. Similarly, it is a process for updating the state of the pachinko machine 10 by updating various flags and counters indicating the state of the pachinko machine 10.

In the game state update process 12 (S322) in the eleventh embodiment, the control content is changed by providing the probability change counter 203ja instead of the probability change flag 203g in the first embodiment. More specifically, in each of the games S601 to S604, S606, and S607 of the game state update process 12 (S322) in the eleventh embodiment, the game state update process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 36). The same processes as those of S601 to S604, S606, and S607 are executed.

Further, in the game state update process 12 (see FIG. 310) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S604 that the value of the time reduction counter 203f is a value larger than 0 (S604: Yes), then the probability change If it is determined whether or not the value of the counter 203ja is larger than 0 (S621) and it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is larger than 0 (S621: Yes), the process is shifted to S606. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is 0 (S621: No), the process shifts to S607.

Further, in the game state update process 12 (see FIG. 310) in the eleventh embodiment, when the process of S606 or S607 is completed, it is nextly determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is larger than 0. (S622), if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is greater than 0 (that is, a value of 1 or more) (S622: Yes), then the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is subtracted by 1 and updated. (S623), the residual probability change number command indicating the value of the probability change counter 203ja after the update is set (S624). When the processing of S624 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203ja after the update by the processing of S623 has become 0 (S625), and if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203ja has become 0 ( S625: Yes), a state command indicating that the state has shifted to the normal state is set (S626), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is 0 in the processing of S622 (S622: No), and when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is not 0 in the processing of S625. Terminates this process as it is.

Next, the details of the second winning process 12 (S2521) in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 311. FIG. 311 is a flowchart showing the second winning process 12 (S2521) in the eleventh embodiment. The second winning process 12 (S2521) is a process executed in place of the second winning process (see FIG. 57) in the first embodiment, and is different from the second winning process (see FIG. 57) in the first embodiment. Similarly, it is a process for performing control according to the winning of the first specific winning opening 65a detected during the execution of the small hit game.

Of the second prize processing 12 (see FIG. 311) in the eleventh embodiment, in each process of S2701 to S2707, each process of S2701 to S2707 of the second prize process (see FIG. 57) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process is executed. Further, in the second winning process 12 (see FIG. 311) in the eleventh embodiment, when the processing of S2704 is completed, the voice lamp control indicates that the winning of the first specific winning opening 65a is detected during the execution of the small hit game. A small hit winning command for notifying the device 113 is set (S2711), and the process shifts to S2705.

The small hit winning command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the small hit winning command, the voice lamp control device 113 refers to the winning information of the first special symbol and the value of the effect counter 223h, and wins a prize from the winning sound selection table 222jb (see FIG. 308 (b)). Select a sound and set the output of the selected winning sound. Thereby, the result of the variable display of the first special symbol can be suggested by the type of the winning sound every time the winning to the first specific winning opening 65a occurs in the small hit game of the second special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 312 to 316, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described. First, the state command process 12 (S4231) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 312. The state command process 12 (S4231) in the eleventh embodiment is a process executed in place of the state command process (see FIG. 62) in the first embodiment, and is a state command process (see FIG. 62) in the first embodiment. ), This is a process for setting the current gaming state in the state setting area 223j based on the state command output from the main control device 110.

Of the state command processes 12 (see FIG. 312) in the eleventh embodiment, in each of the processes S4401 to S4406, S4410, and S4411, the state command processes in the first embodiment (see FIG. 62) S4401 to S4406, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S4410 and S4411 is executed. Further, in the state command processing 12 (see FIG. 312) in the eleventh embodiment, after the processing of S4401 is completed, whether or not the current state command is a state command for indicating the gaming state after the end of the big hit. (S4421), and if it is determined that the command is a state command for indicating the game state after the end of the big hit (S4421: Yes), the value of the fluctuation count counter 223ja is reset to 0 (S4422).

When the processing of S4422 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot (the gaming state determined in the processing of S4401) is the normal state (S4423), and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state. If it is determined to be (S4423: Yes), the first hit flag 223jb is set to ON (S4424), and the process shifts to S4436. On the other hand, in the processing of S4423, if it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit is not the normal state (S4423: No), the first hit flag 223jb is set to off (S4425), and the processing shifts to S4426. ..

In the process of S4426 executed after the process of S4424 or S4425, the value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the state command is set in the state setting area 223j (S4426), and the process shifts to S4402. On the other hand, in the process of S4421, if it is determined that the state command received this time is not a state command for indicating the game state after the end of the big hit (S4421: No), each process of S4422 to S4426 is skipped. The process shifts to S4402.

By executing this state command process 12 (see FIG. 312), whether the jackpot is the first hit (the jackpot won in the normal state) or the consecutive villa (the jackpot won in the game state other than the normal state). Accordingly, the first hit flag 223jb can be appropriately updated. Therefore, the river breakthrough effect (see FIGS. 298 and 299) can be executed at an appropriate timing (the number of fluctuations at which the time saving state of the normal symbol may end).

Next, with reference to FIG. 313, the details of the small hit-related process 12 (S4521) in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 313 is a flowchart showing the small hit-related process 12 (S4521) in the eleventh embodiment. The small hit-related process 12 (S4521) is a process executed in place of the small hit-related process (see FIG. 65) in the first embodiment, and is the same as the small hit-related process (see FIG. 65) in the first embodiment. Similarly, it is a process for executing control according to the type of command related to the small hit.

Of the small hit-related processes 12 (see FIG. 313) in the eleventh embodiment, the processes S4701 to S4710 are the processes of S4701 to S4710 of the small hit-related processes (see FIG. 65) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process is executed. Further, in the small hit related process 12 (see FIG. 313) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined that the small hit start command has not been received from the main control device 110 in the process of S4701 (S4701: No), Next, it is determined whether or not the small hit winning command has been received (S4721), and if it is determined that the small hit winning command has been received (S4721: Yes), then the winning sound selection table 222jb (FIG. 308 (b)). Read (see) (S4722), select the winning sound corresponding to the data of the execution area of the first special symbol and the value of the effect counter 223h from the winning information storage area 223b, and set the output (S4723). ), End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S4721, if it is determined that the small hit winning command has not been received (S4721: No), the process is shifted to S4703.

Next, the variation display setting process 12 (S4121) in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 314. The variable display setting process 12 (S4121) is a process executed in place of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 69) in the first embodiment, and is different from the variable display setting process (see FIG. 69) in the first embodiment. Similarly, in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed based on the first or special diagram 2 variation pattern command received from the main control device 110. This is a process for setting a variation pattern command for use and transmitting the command to the display control device 114.

Of the variation display setting processes 12 (see FIG. 314) in the eleventh embodiment, in each of the processes S5101, S5102, S5106-S5108, and S5110 to S5113, the variation display setting process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 69), respectively. ), The same processes as those of S5101, S5102, S5106 to S5108, and S5110 to S5113 are executed. Further, in the variation display setting process 11 (see FIG. 314) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223d in FIG. 1 is turned on in the process of S5101 (S5101: Yes), then the variation is performed. The value of the number-of-times counter 223ja is updated by adding 1 (S5121), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off (S5102).

When the processing of S5102 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the current state is the time saving state of the normal symbol (S5122). In the process of S5122, it is determined whether or not the data set (stored) in the state setting area 223j is the data indicating either the probabilistic state or the time saving state. In the process of S5122, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S5122: Yes), the time saving medium effect setting process for setting the effect mode (for example, river breakthrough effect) in the normal symbol time saving state is executed. Then (S5123), the process shifts to S5106. The details of the time-saving and medium-time effect setting process (S5123) will be described later with reference to FIG. 315.

On the other hand, in the process of S5122, when it is determined that the time saving state of the normal symbol is not (S5122: No), the first special symbol display mode showing the variation display mode according to the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern command is shown. A variation pattern command is set (S5124), and the process shifts to S5106.

Further, in the variation display setting process 12 (see FIG. 314) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S5107 that the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e is on (S5107: Yes), then the variation is performed. The value of the number-of-times counter 223ja is updated by adding 1 (S5125), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off (S5108). Next, instead of the variation display setting process for special figure 2 (see FIG. 71) in the first embodiment, the variation display setting process 12 for special figure 2 is executed (S5126), and the process shifts to S5110. The details of the variation display setting process 12 (S5126) for the special figure 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. 316.

Next, with reference to FIG. 315, the details of the above-mentioned time-saving and medium-time effect setting process (S5123) will be described. As described above, the time-saving and medium-time effect setting process (S5123) is a process for setting the effect mode in the time-saving state of the normal symbol. When this time-saving and medium-time effect setting process (S5123) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the first hit flag 223jb is on (S5131), and if it is determined that the first hit flag 223jb is on (S5131). : Yes), then determine whether the value of the fluctuation count counter 223ja is any of 24, 49, and 74 (that is, whether it is the execution timing of the river breakthrough effect after the first hit). (S5132). In the process of S5132, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223jb is any of 24, 49, and 74 (S5132: Yes), the process for setting the effect mode of the river breakthrough effect (S5134 to Each process of S5137) is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S5132, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223jb is different from any of 24, 49, and 74 (S5132: No), it means that it is not the execution timing of the river breakthrough effect. Therefore, the process for setting the effect mode of the river breakthrough effect (each process of S5134 to S5137) is skipped, and the process is shifted to S5139.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first hit flag 223jb is off in the processing of S5131 (S5131: No), whether the value of the fluctuation count counter 223ja is any of 9, 24, and 39. (That is, whether or not it is the execution timing of the river breakthrough effect after the occurrence of the consecutive villas) is determined (S5133). In the process of S5133, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223ja is any of 9, 24, and 39 (that is, it is the execution timing of the river breakthrough effect after the occurrence of the consecutive villas) (S5133: Yes), the process for setting the effect mode of the river breakthrough effect (each process of S5134 to S5137) is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S5133, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223ja is not any of 9, 24, and 39 (that is, it is not the execution timing of the river breakthrough effect after the occurrence of the consecutive villas) (S5133: No), the process for setting the effect mode of the river breakthrough effect (each process of S5134 to S5137) is skipped, and the process shifts to S5139.

In the process for setting the effect mode of the river breakthrough effect (each process of S5134 to S5137), first, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining time reductions is 1 (S5134), and the number of remaining time reductions is not 1 (2). If it is determined (S5134: No), it is decided to execute the river breakthrough effect in the mode indicating the continuation of the chance zone (see FIG. 298 (b)) (S5135), and the process is shifted to S5139. do. On the other hand, in the process of S5134, when it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is 1 (S5134: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a probable change state (S5136). In the process of S5136, if it is determined that the gaming state is the probable change state (S5136: Yes), it means that the state shifts to the latent state at the start of the next fluctuation. The execution of the effect (see FIG. 299 (a)) is determined (S5137), and the process shifts to S5139. On the other hand, in the process of S5136, when it is determined that the state is not in the probable change state (that is, the time saving state) (S5136: No), it means that the state shifts to the normal state at the start of the next fluctuation. The execution of the river breakthrough effect (see FIG. 299 (b)) in the mode of failing to break through is determined (S5138), and the process is shifted to S5139. In the process of S5139, the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern command (S5139), and this process is terminated.

By executing this time saving medium effect setting process (see FIG. 315), while the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, the river breakthrough effect is executed every time the number of fluctuations at which the time saving state may end is reached. can do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 316, the details of the above-mentioned variation display setting process 12 (S5126) for the special figure 2 will be described. The variation display setting process 12 (S5126) for the special figure 2 is a process executed in place of the variation display setting process for the special figure 2 (see FIG. 71) in the first embodiment, and is a process executed in place of the variation display setting process for the special figure 2 (see FIG. 71). Similar to the variation display setting process for 2 (see FIG. 71), this is a process for setting the variation display mode of the second special symbol.

Of the special figure 2 variation display setting process 12 (see FIG. 316) in the eleventh embodiment, in each of the processes S5301 to S5303 and S5309, the variation display setting process for the special figure 2 in the first embodiment (FIG. The same processes as those of S5301 to S5303 and S5309 of (see 71) are executed. Further, in the variation display setting process 12 for special figure 2 (see FIG. 316) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S5303 that the current gaming state is the latent state (S5303: Yes), then , It is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol this time is a small hit (S5311). If it is determined in the process of S5311 that the lottery result is a small hit (S5311: Yes), the small hit effect selection table 222ja (see FIG. 308 (a)) is read out (S5312), and the winning information storage area 223b is displayed. The effect mode corresponding to the data corresponding to the first special symbol and the value of the effect counter 223h is specified (S5313). Next, a variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol indicating the specified effect mode is set (S5314), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5311, if it is determined that the lottery result this time is not a small hit (S5311: No), the process is shifted to S5309.

By executing this variation display setting process 12 for special figure 2 (see FIG. 316), every time a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is being executed according to the effect mode of the variation display effect indicating the small hit. , Or the result of the lottery of the first special symbol on hold can be suggested. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment is configured to shift to the latent probability state as the number of time reductions elapses in the probability change state. In the latent state, there is a high probability that a small hit will be won and the first specific winning opening 65a will be opened frequently (the chance to win a prize ball will be frequently obtained), and a comparison will be made when a big hit is made. Since the same state is repeated (looped) at a high rate, a very advantageous gaming state is formed for the player. For this reason, in the probabilistic state, it is possible to realize a novel playability in which the game is played with one goal of shifting to the latent probable state after the normal symbol has passed the time reduction number of times. You can improve your interest. Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the probability change jackpot is won in the probability change state or the time saving state rather than the probability change state (the probability change state shifted after the first hit) based on the winning of the probability change jackpot in the normal state. It is configured so that the average value of the set number of time reductions is smaller in the probable change state (probability change state in which the transition is made after the occurrence of the consecutive villas). That is, the probability change state set at the time of the occurrence of the consecutive villas is more likely to satisfy the transition condition to the latent probability state than the probability change state set at the time of the first hit. It is configured so that it is easy to make it. Therefore, it is easier to pass the number of time reductions when the consecutive villas occur, so even if the jackpot is won before the number of time reductions elapses in the probability change state and the probability change state is looped. Since there is a high possibility that the number of time reductions (small number of time reductions) that facilitates the transition to the latent state is set, the disappointment of the player can be alleviated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation for the game from being lowered.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, when the gaming state after the end of the big hit is set to the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the river breakthrough effect is produced every time the number of fluctuations that the time saving state of the normal symbol may end is reached. By executing, whether the time saving state of the normal symbol continues, the time saving state of the normal symbol ends and shifts to the latent state, or the time saving state of the normal symbol ends and shifts to the normal state. Is periodically (every 25 times or every 15 times the lottery of special symbols is performed). By configuring in this way, while the chance zone (normal symbol time saving state) is set, the player can play the game with one pleasure that the next river breakthrough effect will be executed. Can be done. In addition, at least until the next river breakthrough production, it is possible to realize a novel playability that is desired to be continuously out of the lottery of special symbols. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Furthermore, by configuring the configuration so that there is a possibility of shifting to the normal state due to failure of the river breakthrough production, the continuation of the time saving state was notified in the river breakthrough production (shifting to the latent state even though the river was broken through). Even if it wasn't), it can be made to think that it is better than being notified of the normal state. That is, even if the latent state is not notified, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment, it is output when the effect mode during the small hit fluctuation of the second special symbol and the winning of the first specific winning opening 65a are detected during the execution of the small hit game. Depending on the type of winning sound, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the result of the other special symbol variation (variation display of the first special symbol) will be a big hit. Here, conventionally, a gaming machine that executes a variable display effect of a symbol for showing the lottery result every time a lottery result of a special symbol is executed is widely known. In the conventional gaming machine, the player's interest is improved by executing various entertainment effects suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol during the execution of the symbol variation display effect. However, in a gaming machine having specifications capable of simultaneously executing a plurality of variable display effects, there is a problem that while paying attention to the effect mode associated with one variable display, the effect mode in the other variable display effect is overlooked. There was a point. In particular, in a gaming machine of a type in which one variation display is displayed in a mode that is easier to see than the other, it becomes difficult to confirm the effect mode in the variation display of the other (the side that is difficult to see), and the other variation display effect. However, there is a problem that the player may be confused when the big hit is started while the player is not paying attention to it. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment, the variation display of the second special symbol, which is mainly executed in the latent state, is prioritized (visually recognized) over the variation display of the first special symbol, which is difficult to execute. If the variation display of the first special symbol is executed together with the display (in an easy mode), the lottery of the first special symbol is performed by the small hit effect of the second special symbol (the effect mode accompanying the variation display). The structure suggests the result. With this configuration, it is possible to confirm the degree of expectation that will be a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol only by paying attention to the effect mode accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, the lottery result of the first special symbol, which is being executed at the same time, suggests the degree of expectation that the lottery result is a big hit, depending on the display mode in the small hit effect of the second special symbol. Not limited. For example, it may be configured to suggest the lottery result of the first special symbol depending on the effect mode of the effect executed during the variable display of the second special symbol. Further, for example, it is also possible to suggest (notify) the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol will be a big hit depending on the display mode of the variable display of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device. good. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest the result of the variable display effect on the side that is difficult to see to the player just by checking the variable display effect on the side that is easy to see, so that the effect that is easier to understand is realized. can do. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, the number of probable changes is 100, but the number of probable changes is not limited to 100, and may be arbitrarily determined. By reducing the number of probability changes, the degree of advantage for the player is lowered, so that gambling can be suppressed. On the other hand, by increasing the number of probability changes, the degree of advantage in the most advantageous latent state can be further increased, so the game should be played with a stronger expectation of shifting to the latent state. Can be done. Similarly, the number of time reductions can be arbitrarily determined. By reducing the number of time reductions, it becomes easier to shift from the probabilistic state to the latent state, so it can be more advantageous for the player, and by increasing the number of time reductions, it becomes difficult to shift to the latent state. It is possible to suppress gambling.

In the eleventh embodiment, it is easy to shift to the latent state depending on whether it is the first hit (the big hit won in the normal state) or after the occurrence of the consecutive villas (the big hit won in the state other than the normal state). (Easy to satisfy the end condition of the time saving state of the normal symbol) was made different, but it is not limited to this. For example, as the number of consecutive villas increases, the number of time reductions set after the end of the big hit may decrease. As a result, even if it is not possible to shift to the latent state, the player can feel as if he / she is approaching the latent state every time a consecutive villa occurs. You can improve your interest. In the eleventh embodiment, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, the "big hit A11" is determined at a rate of 5%, and an advantageous latent state is set after the big hit is completed. In this sense, it can be said that even in the configuration of the eleventh embodiment described above, the possibility of shifting to the latent state increases as the number of consecutive villas increases.

In the eleventh embodiment, when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol in the latent state, an effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the big hit of the first special symbol is changing is executed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to indicate the degree of expectation, which is a jackpot type that shifts to the latent state. As a result, it is possible to improve the expectation that the advantageous latent state will continue, and thus it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Further, it may be configured to notify (suggest) the degree of expectation that the jackpot is not included in the hold at the time of transition to the latent state during the variation effect of the second special symbol. That is, even if the state has shifted to the latent state, if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, the latent state may be terminated relatively early, which may disappoint the player. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player does not want to win the jackpot of the first special symbol in the latent state. Therefore, by making the configuration suggesting that the jackpot is not included in the hold, it is possible to make the player understand that the latent state is not terminated at least by the jackpot of the first special symbol. It is possible to expect a person to maintain a latent state for a long time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Furthermore, conversely, the degree of expectation (pinch degree) for being a pinch that normally wins a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol in the latent state is set during the variable production of the second special symbol (and during the small hit game). It may be configured to notify (suggest). With this configuration, when a production with a high degree of pinch is executed, the game can be played with a sense of tension, so that the game can be sharpened. In this case, when a specific type of small hit game is started by the lottery of the second special symbol, the variation display of the first special symbol may be forcibly stopped by the deviation. That is, it may be configured so that the life of the latent state can be extended by converting the normal jackpot into an outlier. With this configuration, a specific type of small hit game is executed after the effect with a high degree of pinch is executed, so that the player can have a great sense of relief. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<12th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 317 to 339. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment described above, the latent probability state is configured as an advantageous gaming state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed and the small hit game is frequently executed. In addition, it is expected that the deviation will continue for the number of time reductions set in the probabilistic state by assuming that the time saving state of the normal symbol ends in the probabilistic state in most of the cases of transitioning to the latent probability state. It was configured to make it possible to realize a novel playability.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment, the normal state is configured as an advantageous gaming state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed and the small hit game is frequently executed, and the latent state is established. Was configured as the most unfavorable gaming state. Then, by ending the number of probable changes in the latent probable state, the configuration is set to shift to the most advantageous normal state. That is, in the twelfth embodiment, it is possible to directly shift from the most unfavorable gaming state to the most advantageous gaming state without going through a jackpot. With this configuration, it is possible to play a game with one goal of passing the number of probable changes in the most unfavorable latent state.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment is that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. The configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been partially changed. The point is that the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, 11 It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the eleventh embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the gaming state in the twelfth embodiment will be briefly described. As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, the normal mode is configured as the most advantageous gaming state, and the latent probability state is configured as the most disadvantageous gaming state. Further, the time saving state and the probable change state are configured as a gaming state having a higher degree of advantage than the latent probable state. Since the special specification that the normal state becomes advantageous is adopted, in the explanation of the transition, the advantageous normal state will be referred to as "ream villa mode". Further, the disadvantageous latent state is referred to as "normal mode", and the relatively advantageous probabilistic state and the time-saving state are referred to as "chance mode A" and "chance mode B", respectively.

Next, with reference to FIG. 317, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 317, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the twelfth embodiment is based on the board surface structure (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13 in the eleventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above. The upper first ball entry port 64b1 and the lower first ball entry port 64b2 have been deleted, and a central first ball entry port 64c is provided instead. Further, below the central first ball entry port 64c, a small attacker 4650 that is opened when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol is provided. Since the small attacker 4650 is surrounded by nails and the central first winning opening 64c on the left, right, and above, it is extremely difficult to insert a game ball during the small hit opening period of the first special symbol. .. In the twelfth embodiment, the small hit of the first special symbol is provided because the game ball enters the second entrance 640 in a state other than the consecutive villa mode, and the second special symbol is long. This is because it is installed for the purpose of forcibly ending the long fluctuation when the fluctuation is made, and it is not for winning the prize ball. That is, even if the second special symbol fluctuates for a long time, it is configured to win a small hit with a high probability (475/480) when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed. With the start of, the second special symbol that has been fluctuating for a long time can be forcibly stopped by the off-stop symbol. Therefore, even if the ball enters the second entrance 640 in a game state other than the consecutive villa mode and the long fluctuation of the second special symbol is started, it can be easily long by returning to the left-handed game. The fluctuation can be terminated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 317, on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in the game board 13, a second entry port (through gate) 67 and a right first entry ball provided downstream of the through gate 67 are provided. The upper surface of the right electric accessory 64ra that can open and close the upper surface of the mouth 64r and the right first ball entry port 64r, and the upper surface of the right electric accessory 64ra while the right electric accessory 64ra is closed. A second entry port 640, which is provided at a position where a game ball that has passed through the above can enter, is provided. As shown in FIG. 317, the flow path of the game ball so that only the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can reach the second entry port 640 with the right electric accessory 64ra closed. Is set. That is, almost all the game balls that have passed through the through gate 67 enter the right first entrance 64r even if the right electric accessory 64ra is hit right in the time-saving state of the normal symbol that tends to be open. Since the ball is thrown, the game ball cannot be entered into the second entrance 640. With this configuration, it is possible to advance the game by the right-handed game even in the probable change state (chance mode A) and the time saving state (chance mode B).

Further, as shown in FIG. 317, in the game board 13 in the twelfth embodiment, the second variable winning device 650 is deleted, and only the first variable winning device 65 is provided. As a result, the first variable winning device 65 is opened in both cases of a big hit and a small hit of the second special symbol. That is, the chance mode A and the chance mode B in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, the most advantageous consecutive villa mode in which a small hit is frequently generated by entering the game ball into the second entrance 640, and It is configured so that all jackpot states can be advanced by hitting right. In other words, all states other than the most disadvantageous gaming state (latent state) for the player (state that is advantageous in some respect for the player) can be advanced by right-handed. As a result, it is possible to separate the right-handed game into an advantageous state and the left-handed game into a disadvantageous state, so that it is possible to realize a game that is easier for the player to understand.

Since the normal state of the normal symbol is set during the jackpot game, if a right-handed game is performed in an attempt to win a prize ball by entering the first specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot, almost all Four or more game balls enter the second entrance 640, and the number of reserved balls becomes the upper limit. As a result, after the jackpot game is completed, the second special symbol is almost started to change. However, as described above, by executing the lottery of the first special symbol, it is possible to make a small hit with a high probability and forcibly end the fluctuation display of the second special symbol by the deviation, so that after the big hit ends. Even if a game state other than the normal state is set as the game state of the above and the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the game can be advanced without any problem.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 318 to 320, various characteristic staging effects in the twelfth embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 318, an example of the effect mode in the normal mode (latent state) will be described. As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, the number of probable changes is elapsed in the latent probability state, so that the mode directly shifts to the most advantageous consecutive villa mode (normal state). Therefore, in the normal mode, the effect aiming at the latent state is executed. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 318 (a), the effect of the character 811 imitating a rabbit climbing a rocky mountain is executed. In addition, the characters "Aim to the Top!" Are displayed in the display area HR1 formed above the character 811 climbing the rocky mountain, and the normal mode is displayed in the display area HR2 formed on the right side of the character 811. The display content suggesting the remaining number of fluctuations until the end of (the number of probable changes has elapsed) is displayed. In the example of FIG. 318 (a), the case where the character "remaining 50 m" is displayed in the display area HR2 is illustrated. The remaining meter display up to the summit is subtracted by 1 m each time the fluctuation display is executed, so that the remaining meter (distance) up to the summit is displayed for the player in the consecutive villa mode. It is easy to understand that it is the remaining number of fluctuations until the transition.

FIG. 318 (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the number of probable changes has passed in the normal mode (they have been continuously disengaged over 100 probable changes in the latent state). As shown in FIG. 318 (b), when the number of probable changes has elapsed and the mode shifts to the consecutive villa mode, the effect that the character 811 reaches the top of the rocky mountain is executed, and the display area HR1 is "topped". "Arrival !!" is displayed. Further, the characters "remaining 0 m" are displayed on the display area HR2. From these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the mode has been changed to the consecutive villa mode.

FIG. 319 (a) shows the state (preparation) between the transition to the consecutive villa mode and the state in which the prize ball can actually be obtained (until the small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol). It is a figure which showed the display mode in a state). As shown in FIG. 319 (a), in the ready state, the character "right-handed" is displayed in the small area Dm3, and the display area HR1 is "started RUSH by right-handed !!". Is displayed. In addition, the characters "Preparing for RUSH" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. From these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the player enters the RUSH state in which the prize ball can be obtained by hitting right.

As shown in FIG. 319 (a), when the mode shifts to the continuous villa mode, the small area Dm1 is switched to the display area for performing the variable display of the second special symbol. That is, in the twelfth embodiment, the small area Dm1 is configured as a display area for displaying the variable display of the special symbol mainly executed in each gaming state. Further, the small area Dm2 for displaying the variation display of the other special symbol is a display area relatively smaller than the small area Dm1 on the lower right side of the sub display area Ds (in a mode that is difficult for the player to see). )Is displayed. As a result, regardless of the game state, it is possible to visually recognize the variable display of the special symbol on the side to be executed mainly by checking only the small area Dm1, so that the convenience of the player can be improved. In addition, the small area Dm1 can be focused on by displaying the variation display on the side different from the execution side in a mode that is difficult to visually recognize. That is, it is possible to easily make the player understand which is the variable display on the side to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide playability that is easy for the player to understand.

FIG. 319 (b) shows an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the game ball enters the second entrance 640 in the prepared state and a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery. It is a figure which showed. As shown in FIG. 319 (b), when the ball enters the second entrance 640 in the ready state and a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, "RUSH starts!" For the display area HR1! "Is displayed, and the character" RUSH rushes !! "is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. Further, the treasure box 812 is enlarged and displayed in the central portion of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. From these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the state in which the prize ball can be obtained (RUSH) has been started in the consecutive villa mode. Therefore, it is possible to realize playability that is easy for the player to understand.

In the twelfth embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is halved. That is, even if the game ball enters the second entrance 640, there is a relatively high possibility that the ball will simply come off (the probability of coming off is about 1/2). In the twelfth embodiment, if the second special symbol is lost in the lottery in the prepared state, the prepared state is continued as it is. That is, the configuration is such that the start of RUSH is not notified until the small hit is won and the prize ball is actually obtained. As a result, even though the start of RUSH has been notified, the state in which the prize ball cannot be obtained continues, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied.

Further, in the twelfth embodiment, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of one special symbol, a configuration is adopted in which the lottery of the other special symbol executed during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation is forcibly removed. ing. For this reason, when the reserved ball of the first special symbol exists at the time of shifting from the normal mode to the consecutive villa mode, and the variable display of the first special symbol started at the same time as the start of the consecutive villa mode is a big hit. Will always be missed in the second special symbol lottery while the jackpot fluctuation is being executed. That is, if the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol starts at the time of shifting to the ready state, the right-handed game is continuously performed, and even if the lottery of the second special symbol is continuously executed, it is missed. By continuing (not winning a small hit), the preparation state will continue for a long time (until the big hit fluctuation ends). As described above, since the small hit probability of the second special symbol is 1/2, the expectation that the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol is being executed can be improved as the deviation continues in the prepared state. More specifically, for example, in the prepared state, the possibility that the disengagement is continuous four times or more is about 6%, and the possibility that the disengagement is continuous six times or more is about 1%. Therefore, even if the lottery of the second special symbol is missed in the prepared state, the player's expectation for the big hit can be improved, so that the player's interest in the game in the prepared state can be further improved. ..

In the twelfth embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is set to 1/2, but the probability is not limited to this, and the probability of a small hit may be arbitrarily determined. .. For example, the small hit probability is increased so that when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed as in the eleventh embodiment, the small hit is almost (for example, with a probability of 59/60). May be good. In this configuration, if the deviation occurs even once in the prepared state, the expectation that the changing first special symbol is a big hit can be improved, so that the second special symbol is removed in the prepared state. It is possible to improve the interest of the player in the case of. Also, the higher the probability of a small hit, the shorter the preparation status (the average number of lottery times from the transition to the consecutive villa mode to the winning of the small hit will be smaller), so after shifting to the consecutive villa mode , It is possible to shorten the period until the ball is secured by the prize ball. That is, since the prize ball can be given to the player earlier, the player's interest in the game can be improved. On the other hand, the small hit probability may be lowered so that it is likely to come off during the preparation state. With such a configuration, the deviations are likely to be continuous, so that the expectation that the jackpot of the first special symbol is being changed can be held more frequently. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 320, changes over time in the staging mode before and after the ready state (before and after the start of RUSH) in the twelfth embodiment will be described. First, referring to FIG. 320 (a), the reserved ball of the first special symbol at the time of transition from the normal mode to the consecutive villa mode is removed, and the second special symbol is drawn twice during the preparation mode. The time-dependent change of the effect mode in the case of continuous loss and a small hit in the third lottery of the second special symbol will be described.

As shown in FIG. 320 (a), in the twelfth embodiment, the 99th special symbol lottery is executed in the normal mode (the latent state in which the probability variation number of 100 times is set), as described above. The effect of reaching the top of the rocky mountain (see FIG. 318 (b)) is performed. Then, the 100th variation display of the special symbol is started, and the display mode (see FIG. 319 (a)) indicating the preparation state is switched to, and the player is notified to perform the right-handed game. When the game ball is made to enter the second entrance 640 by right-handed during this preparation state, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the small area Dm1. Then, as shown in FIG. 320, the display indicating the preparation state is continued during the two deviation fluctuations of the second special symbol, and the third variation display (small hit variation) of the second special symbol is started. At that point, the display mode (see FIG. 319 (b)) indicating the RUSH entry is set. In addition, at the start of the small hit game, the deviation fluctuation of the first special symbol that was being changed is forcibly stopped and displayed. After that, the RUSH display is continued until the consecutive villa mode ends. In addition, in the twelfth embodiment, since the consecutive villa mode is set to the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol), the advantageous consecutive villa mode is advantageous unless a big hit is won. continue. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel playability in which the game is played with the expectation that the jackpot will not be won over the longest possible number of lottery.

Next, with reference to FIG. 320 (b), the time-lapse of the effect mode when the reserved ball of the first special symbol at the time of transition from the normal mode to the consecutive villa mode is the lottery result corresponding to the “big hit D12”. Explain the changes. Here, the "big hit D12" is a type of big hit in which a time saving state is set in which the number of time saving times is two times after the end of the big hit. In other words, after the jackpot is over, it is a type of jackpot that shifts to the consecutive villa mode by losing consecutively in a maximum of two special symbol lottery, and it is relatively easy to shift to the consecutive villa mode (game). It's a kind of jackpot. In the twelfth embodiment, the transition to the consecutive villa mode is notified only when the variable display corresponding to the "big hit D12" is started at the time of the transition to the consecutive villa mode, and the other first special When the jackpot of the symbol (which is relatively difficult to shift to the consecutive villa mode) is suspended, the jackpot winning is notified without notifying the transition to the consecutive villa mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged because the consecutive villa mode ends without winning a small hit even once, despite the shift to the consecutive villa mode.

As shown in FIG. 320 (b), when the mode shifts to the consecutive villa mode and the change display of the first special symbol corresponding to the "big hit D12" is started, the second start during the execution of the big hit change. The variable display of the special symbol is all off. Therefore, while the jackpot fluctuation is being executed, the deviations will be continuous, and the more the deviations are continuous, the higher the expectation for the player that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is being executed. Can be made to. In the twelfth embodiment, if a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the consecutive villa mode, a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is set. On the other hand, if the lottery for the second special symbol is missed, a fluctuation time of 1 second is set with high probability. Therefore, if the period from the transition to the consecutive villa mode until the game ball enters the second entrance 640 and the institution that confirms and displays the lottery result of the second special symbol are taken into consideration, the jackpot will fluctuate. During (10 seconds), the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed about 5 times. The probability of losing 5 times in a row in the lottery of the 2nd special symbol is low (about 3%) when the jackpot of the 1st special symbol is not changing. It is possible to strengthen the player's confidence that it is changing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game in the prepared state.

<Electrical configuration in the twelfth embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 321 (a). FIG. 321 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 321 (a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment is a variation pattern scenario with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 (see FIG. 14) in the eleventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above. The difference is that the table 202ka has been added. Further, the ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment is also different in that a part of the first random number table 202a, a part of the small hit random number table 202b, and a part of the variation pattern selection table 202f are changed. is doing.

The variation pattern scenario table 202ka is a data table referred to for selecting a table for determining a variation pattern from the variation pattern selection table 202f. When the lottery of the special symbol is executed, the variation pattern scenario table 202ka is referred to, the variation pattern table of 1 is selected from the variation pattern selection table 202f, and the variation pattern is determined based on the selected variation pattern table. Will be done. The details of this fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ka will be described later with reference to FIG. 322 (b).

First, the configuration of the first random number table 202a defined (stored) in the ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 321 (b). FIG. 321 (b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first random number table 202a in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 321 (b), in the first hit random number table 202a in the twelfth embodiment, the random number value (counter value) determined to be a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol is "0 to 3". Four random number values (counter values) are specified. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 321 (b), five random value values (counter values) of "0 to 4" are defined as random number values (counter values) determined to be big hits in the high probability state of the special symbol. ing.

Therefore, the probability of winning a big hit when the special symbol lottery is executed in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1/120 (4/480), while the special symbol lottery is performed in the high probability state of the special symbol. The probability of a big hit when executed is 1/96 (5/480). The change in the jackpot probability in the twelfth embodiment is intended to prevent the consecutive villa mode from becoming excessively advantageous and the normal mode from becoming excessively disadvantageous to the player. .. That is, when the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol is low (for example, in the case of 1/240 which is the same as the eleventh embodiment), once the transition to the consecutive villa mode is performed, the transferred consecutive villa mode is difficult to end. This is an excessive advantage for the player, which may be disadvantageous to the hole. In addition, when the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol is high (for example, in the case of 1/60 which is the same as the eleventh embodiment), the probability variation number is elapsed in the normal mode (over 100 special symbol lottery). Since the possibility of continuous disengagement is low, the probability of shifting to the consecutive villa mode is extremely low. As a result, there is a risk that the player will be excessively disadvantaged, and there is a possibility that the game on the pachinko machine 10 will be avoided. Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment, the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol is increased to prevent it from becoming excessively advantageous when shifting to the consecutive villa mode, and the high probability state of the special symbol is suppressed. The jackpot probability in is lowered to prevent the normal mode from becoming excessively disadvantageous.

Next, the details of the small hit random number table 202b in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 322 (a). FIG. 322 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the small hit random number table 202b in the twelfth embodiment. In the small hit random number table 202b in the twelfth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 322 (a), the random number value (counter value) determined to be a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is "5 to 479". 475 random numbers are specified. On the other hand, 240 random number values of "240 to 479" are defined as random number values (counter values) determined to be small hits in the lottery of the second special symbol.

That is, in the twelfth embodiment, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, the small hit is won with a high probability (probability of 475/480). This is because, as described above, when the game ball enters the second entrance 640 in a state other than the consecutive villa mode and the second special symbol makes a long fluctuation, the long fluctuation is caused. This is to forcibly terminate it. That is, when the long fluctuation of the second special symbol is executed, by executing the lottery of the first special symbol, it becomes almost a small hit and the long fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped at the start of the small hit. It can be displayed. Therefore, even if the ball enters the second entrance 640 in a game state other than the consecutive villa mode and the long fluctuation of the second special symbol is started, it can be easily long by returning to the left-handed game. The fluctuation can be terminated.

In addition, by setting the small hit probability of the second special symbol to 1/2 (240/480), the lottery of the second special symbol in the preparatory state is configured to be missed at a relatively high rate. As a result, if the misses are continuous in the prepared state, the small hit is forcibly set to miss because the big hit fluctuation of the 1st special symbol is executed, probably because it was missed in the lottery of the 2nd special symbol. It can be difficult to understand if it is done. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel playability in which the expectation of a big hit of the special symbol on the other side (that is, the first special symbol) becomes higher as the second special symbol is continuously disengaged in the prepared state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, the details of the variation pattern scenario table 202ka in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 322 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ka in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 322 (b), the variation pattern scenario table 202ka shows the correspondence between the number of lottery of special symbols after the end of the jackpot (or after clearing the RAM) and the selected variation pattern for each of the previous jackpot types. Is stipulated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 322 (b), when the previous jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot, the number of lottery of special symbols is in the range of 1 to 99 times, and the probabilistic / latent The table 202f11 for a certain start is specified in association with each other. The details of the probabilistic / latent start table 202f11 will be described later with reference to FIG. 324. On the other hand, the RUSH table 202f14 is defined in association with the range in which the number of lottery is 100 or more. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 326 (b), but when the variation pattern is selected with reference to the RUSH table 202f14, a short variation time (1 second or 10) is used as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. The fluctuation pattern of (seconds) will be selected. Therefore, the lottery of the second special symbol is continuously executed in a short period only by performing the right-handed game, and forms an advantageous state in which a small hit is won with a high probability (1/2).

Further, as shown in FIG. 322 (b), when the previous jackpot type is a normal jackpot, the special symbol lottery count is in the range of 1 to 99 times, and the time saving start table 202f12 Is specified in association with each other. The details of the time-saving start table 202f12 will be described later with reference to FIG. 325. On the other hand, the RUSH table 202f14 (see FIG. 326 (b)) is associated with the range in which the number of lottery is 100 or more.

Further, as shown in FIG. 322 (b), in the state where the jackpot has never been won (so-called the state after clearing the RAM), the number of lottery of the special symbol is in the range of 1 to 99 times. , The normal start table 202f13 is specified in association with each other. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 326 (a), but the normal start table 202f13 has a relatively long fluctuation time regardless of the lottery result when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed ( It is a table in which a long fluctuation (of 60 seconds) is set. As a result, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized by clearing the RAM and put into a normal state, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from being in the same state as the consecutive villa mode which is advantageous to the player. In other words, like a general gaming machine, it can be set to a disadvantageous state for the player when the initialization is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being in an advantageous state immediately after the initialization and inflicting an unexpected disadvantage on the hole. On the other hand, the RUSH table 202f14 (see FIG. 326 (b)) is defined in association with the range in which the number of lottery of special symbols is 100 or more. Therefore, even after initializing the pachinko machine 10, the operation is the same as in the normal mode except for the jackpot probability (the operation of shifting to the consecutive villa mode by continuously losing the lottery of 100 special symbols). be able to. Therefore, the state after initialization becomes excessively disadvantageous for the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from avoiding the game by the pachinko machine 10, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. ..

Regarding whether or not the state is after the RAM is cleared (initialized) in the 14th embodiment, for example, is the RAM 203 won at least once after the RAM is cleared? It is configured so that it can be discriminated by providing a flag (first winning flag) indicating whether or not it is. If the first winning flag is off, it is judged to be the normal state after initialization, and if the number of fluctuations is within the range of 1 to 99 times, the normal start table 202f13 is referred to and 100 times. In the above range, a variation pattern scenario in which the RUSH table 202f14 is referred to is set. On the other hand, by winning the jackpot, the first winning flag is set to on, so that the scenario in which the normal start table 202f13 is not referred to is set thereafter.

Next, with reference to FIG. 323, the details of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 323 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 323, in the twelfth embodiment, six jackpot types of "big hit A12" to "big hit F12" are defined as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. Further, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, two jackpot types of "big hit G12" and "big hit I12" are defined.

As shown in FIG. 323, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4", while the jackpot type is "big hit A12". It is specified in association with each other. This "big hit A12" is a type of big hit (8 rounds probable change jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds and the chance mode A (probability change state) is set after the end of the big hit. This chance mode A continues until a maximum of 100 special symbol lottery is executed after the jackpot ends, and after 100 times, the mode shifts to the consecutive villa mode. Therefore, the "big hit A12" is a relatively advantageous jackpot type in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot ends.

Further, as shown in FIG. 323, "big hit B12" is defined as a big hit type in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "5 to 49". This "big hit B12" has two rounds of big hits, and after the big hit ends, it is set to the normal mode (latent state) or the chance mode A (probable change state) (two rounds probable change big hit). Is. More specifically, when the "big hit B12" is won in the normal mode or the consecutive villa mode, the normal mode is set to be disadvantageous after the end of the big hit, while the "big hit B12" is set in the time saving state or the probable change state. If this happens, the chance mode A is set to be relatively advantageous after the jackpot ends. Therefore, the "big hit B12" is relatively advantageous when it is won in the chance mode A or the chance mode B, but it is relatively disadvantageous in the normal mode or the consecutive villa mode.

Further, as shown in FIG. 323, "big hit C12" is defined as a big hit type in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 69". This "big hit C12" has two rounds of jackpot, and is a type of jackpot (two-round probability variable jackpot) that is set to the most disadvantageous normal mode (latent state) after the end of the jackpot. That is, the "big hit C12" is the jackpot type that is the most disadvantageous in terms of the gaming state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 323, for the value of the first hit type counter C2 being "70", "big hit D12" is defined in association with the jackpot type. This "big hit D12" is a type of big hit (8 rounds normal big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds and the chance mode B (time saving state) is set after the end of the big hit. This chance mode B ends when the lottery of two special symbols is executed after the end of the big hit (the number of time reductions is set to 2). In other words, it is an advantageous jackpot type that is extremely easy to shift to the consecutive villa mode because it shifts to the consecutive villa mode by losing the lottery of the special symbol twice in a row at the maximum.

Further, as shown in FIG. 323, for the value of the first hit type counter C2 being "71 to 74", "big hit E12" is defined in association with the jackpot type. This "big hit E12" is a type of jackpot (two rounds normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is two and the chance mode B (time saving state) is set after the jackpot ends. This chance mode B is set to 50 times when the "big hit E12" is won in the normal mode or the latent mode, while 25 times is set when the "big hit E12" is won in the time saving state or the probable change state. Will be done. Chance mode B has a lower jackpot probability than chance mode A, and shifts to the consecutive villa mode by elapses the number of time reductions, which is advantageous for the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 323, for the value of the first hit type counter C2 being "75 to 99", "big hit F12" is defined in association with the jackpot type. This "big hit F12" is a type of jackpot (two rounds normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is two and the chance mode B (time saving state) is set after the jackpot ends. The number of time reductions in the chance mode B set after the end of the "big hit F12" is set to be larger than the number of time reductions in the chance mode B set after the end of the "big hit E12". Therefore, the chance mode B after the end of the "big hit F12" is in a disadvantageous state in which it is difficult to elapse the number of time reductions.

On the other hand, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 69", and the jackpot type is "big hit G12". ing. This "big hit G12" is a type of big hit (8 rounds probable change jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds and the chance mode A (probability change state) is set 100 times after the end of the big hit. Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "70 to 99" in association with "big hit I12" as the jackpot type. This "big hit I12" is a type of jackpot (8 rounds normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 and the chance mode B (time saving state) is set twice after the end of the jackpot. As mentioned above, while it is extremely easy to pass two time reductions, it is relatively difficult to continuously disengage over 100 probabilistic states, so the "big hit I12" is better. However, it can be said that it is a big hit of a type (that is, an advantageous type) that is easier to shift to the consecutive villa mode than the "big hit G12".

As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, the number of time reductions is set to at least two times without providing a normal jackpot (a jackpot that directly shifts to the consecutive villa mode after the end of the jackpot). .. By configuring the gaming state after the jackpot to end so as not to directly set the normal state, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from being in the same state as when it is initialized. That is, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes long, and the game must be advanced by hitting the left side (a state in which the fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the normal start table 202d13 described later). It is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern by referring to the time-saving start table 202f12. That is, it can be configured to immediately shift to the RUSH state when the number of time reductions elapses. Therefore, while suppressing the state at the time of initialization of the pachinko machine 10 from being excessively advantageous to the player, the jackpot type (the number of time reductions is two times) is substantially equivalent to directly shifting to the consecutive villa mode. Type) can be provided. In addition, since the normal symbol is in a low probability state during the jackpot game, it becomes difficult to release the right electric accessory 64ra, and as a result, the game ball frequently goes to the second entrance 640 during the jackpot game. Enter the ball. That is, at the same time as the end of the jackpot game, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, and the long variation of the second special symbol is started. Therefore, when the number of time reductions is set to 2, the first number of time reductions is consumed at the same time as the end of the jackpot. By hitting the right to enter the game ball into the right first entrance 64r during the long fluctuation of the second special symbol, a small hit is made with a high probability, and the long fluctuation of the second special symbol is deviated. It can be forcibly terminated. Therefore, when the number of time reductions of two times is set, it is possible to shift to the consecutive villa mode with only one start winning prize substantially after the end of the big hit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 324, the details of the above-mentioned probabilistic / latent start time table 202f11 will be described. FIG. 324 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the probabilistic / latent start table 202f11. As shown in FIG. 324, the probability change / latent start start table 202f11 defines the correspondence between the game state at the time of executing the special symbol lottery and the variable pattern that can be selected for each type of special symbol. Has been done. More specifically, in the latent state (normal mode), a longer fluctuation time is selected as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol than in the probability variation state (chance mode A). As a result, in the normal mode in which the left-handed game is performed, the variable display mode can be diversified, while in the chance mode A, the game efficiency can be improved.

On the other hand, with respect to the second special symbol, a long variation of 60 seconds is set regardless of the variation type and the gaming state. As a result, when the second special symbol is changed in the gaming state other than the consecutive villa mode, the gaming efficiency is remarkably increased. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a game ball is launched aiming at the second entrance 640 in a state other than the consecutive villa mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 325, the details of the above-mentioned time-saving start table 202f12 will be described. FIG. 325 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time-saving start table 202f12. As shown in FIG. 325, when the time saving start table 202f12 is referred to in order to select the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, it is relatively short (1 second to 20 seconds) in the time saving state (chance mode B). ) Fluctuation time is selected. Thereby, the game efficiency in the chance mode B can be improved. On the other hand, in the normal state (ie, after the number of time reductions has elapsed), a very short (0.1 second or 10 second) variation time is selected. As a result, after the end of the big hit is set to the time saving state, and after the number of time saving has elapsed (after shifting to the consecutive villa mode), if the holding ball of the first special symbol remains, the holding ball is held in an extremely short time. Is digested.

On the other hand, for the second special symbol, a long fluctuation of 60 seconds is set while the time reduction state continues, and a short fluctuation time of 10 seconds or 1 second is set after the time reduction state elapses, regardless of the fluctuation type. Set. As a result, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a game ball is launched aiming at the second entrance 640 in a game state other than the consecutive villa mode. In addition, after shifting to the consecutive villa mode, it is possible to form an extremely advantageous state in which the lottery of the second special symbol and the small hit game are repeated in a short time. Therefore, since the game can be performed with the goal of allowing the number of time reductions to elapse, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned normal start table 202f13 will be described with reference to FIG. 326 (a). FIG. 326 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time-saving start table 202f13. As shown in FIG. 326 (a), when the normal start table 202f13 is referred to in order to select the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, a relatively long fluctuation time (7 seconds to 90 seconds) is selected. .. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the variable display mode in the state where the left-handed game should be performed as in the latent state.

On the other hand, for the second special symbol, a long fluctuation of 60 seconds is set regardless of the fluctuation type. As a result, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a game ball is launched aiming at the second entrance 640 in a game state other than the consecutive villa mode.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned RUSH table 202f14 will be described with reference to FIG. 326 (b). FIG. 326 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the RUSH table 202f14. As shown in FIG. 326 (b), when the RUSH table 202f13 is referenced to select the variation pattern of the first special symbol, a very short variation time (0.1 or 10 seconds) is selected. .. Also, when the RUSH table 202f14 is referred to for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol, a short variation time (1 second or 10 seconds) is selected. This makes it possible to further increase the degree of advantage after shifting to the RUSH state (continuous villa mode).

Next, with reference to FIG. 327, the method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10 realized by performing control based on various tables defined in ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in RAM 203. explain. FIG. 327 is a diagram showing a method of transitioning the state of the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 327, the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment is roughly divided into four modes (gaming states). That is, the normal mode (latent state) shown in the upper part of FIG. 327, the chance mode A (probability changing state) shown in the center left side of FIG. 327, and the chance mode B (time saving state) shown in the center right side of FIG. 327. And the continuous villa mode (normal state) shown in the lower part of FIG. 327.

As described above, the normal mode indicates the probable change state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, the probability of becoming a big hit is high, and the right electric accessory 64ra is difficult to be released (the game ball is on the right). 1 It is difficult to enter the ball into the ball entry port 64r), which is the most disadvantageous game state for the player. Further, as described above, the chance mode A indicates a probabilistic state of the special symbol and a time-saving state of the normal symbol, has a high probability of a big hit, and is the first right-handed ball by performing a right-handed game. Since the game ball frequently enters the mouth 64r (the electric accessory 64ra is frequently opened), the game state is relatively advantageous for the player. Further, the chance mode B indicates a low probability state of the special symbol and a time saving state of the normal symbol, and although the jackpot probability is low, by performing a right-handed game, the right th is similar to the probability change state. Since the game ball frequently enters the 1 entry port 640r, a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal mode is formed. Further, as described above, the consecutive villa mode indicates a low probability state of the special symbol and a normal state of the normal symbol, and the fluctuation time set when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. , Since it is significantly shorter than the other three game states (60 seconds → 1 second), the lottery of the second special symbol can be efficiently executed by performing the right-handed game. Then, as described above, in the lottery of the second special symbol, a small hit is won with a high probability (1/2), and the first specific winning opening 64a is opened. The game balls frequently enter the two entry openings 640 and the first specific winning opening 64a, forming an extremely advantageous gaming state in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained without going through a big hit. Therefore, the consecutive villa mode is the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 327, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal mode to another state when a big hit occurs and when a specified number of probable changes have passed. Specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 327, when the jackpot A12, which is the jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 5% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), there is a chance after the jackpot ends. Move to mode A. In addition, if any of the jackpots D12 to F12, which is the jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 30% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the chance mode B is relatively advantageous after the jackpot ends. And migrate. Further, after the normal mode is set, the predetermined probability variation number (100 times) is elapsed, so that the mode directly shifts to the most advantageous consecutive villa mode (without going through a big hit). On the other hand, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is obtained and the jackpot B12 or the jackpot C12, which is determined at a rate of 65% as the jackpot type, is determined, the normal mode is set again after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in the normal mode, it is more advantageous to pass the specified probability variation number than to become a big hit, so that the player can be expected to continuously lose the specified number of times. .. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

As shown on the left side of the center of FIG. 327, there is a possibility of shifting from the chance mode A (probability change state) to another state when a big hit occurs or when the specified number of probability changes has passed. Specifically, as shown on the left side of the center of FIG. 327, when one of the jackpots D12 to F12, which is the jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 30% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined). Shifts to the relatively advantageous chance mode B after the jackpot ends. Further, after the chance mode A is set and the specified number of lottery times (100 times) elapses, the mode directly shifts to the most advantageous consecutive villa mode (the number of probable changes and the number of time reductions end at the same timing). ). Further, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is obtained and the jackpot C12 determined as the jackpot type at a rate of 20% is determined, the normal mode is set after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, if either the jackpot A12 or the jackpot B12, which is the jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 50% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the chance mode A is resumed after the jackpot ends. (Loops chance mode A). Therefore, in chance mode A, even if a big hit occurs, it becomes difficult to shift to the disadvantageous normal mode (the rate at which chance mode A is set increases), so the big hit is made before the number of probability changes elapses. Even if you win (the mode could not be switched to the consecutive villa mode), you can prevent the player from being discouraged. In the chance mode A, as in the normal mode, the jackpot probability is relatively high (1/96), so it is relatively difficult to pass the probability variation number. Therefore, in the chance mode A, it is possible to realize the playability that expects both the winning of the jackpot and the continuous loss, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as shown on the right side of the center of FIG. 327, there is a possibility of shifting from the chance mode B (probability change state) to another state when a big hit occurs or when a specified number of time reductions has elapsed. Specifically, as shown on the right side of the center of FIG. 327, when either the jackpot A12 or B12, which is the jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 50% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined). After the big hit, the player shifts to the relatively advantageous chance mode A. Further, after the chance mode A is set, the specified number of time reductions (any of 2, 25, 50, and 100) is allowed to directly shift to the most advantageous consecutive villa mode. .. Further, when the jackpot of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and the jackpot C12 determined as the jackpot type at a rate of 20% is determined, a disadvantageous normal mode is set after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, if either the jackpot A12 or the jackpot B12, which is the jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 30% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the chance mode B is resumed after the jackpot ends. (Loops chance mode B). Therefore, in the chance mode B, as in the chance mode A, it becomes difficult to shift to the disadvantageous normal mode even if a big hit occurs (the rate at which the chance mode A is set increases), so that the number of time reductions elapses. Even if you win the jackpot before you do (it was not possible to shift to the consecutive villa mode), you can prevent the player from being discouraged. Further, in the chance mode B, the jackpot probability is relatively low, and the number of time reductions may be set to 50 or less. Therefore, compared to the chance mode A and the normal mode, the jackpot is not directly involved. There is a high probability that you will move to the consecutive villa mode. Therefore, at the time of shifting to the chance mode B, it is possible to make the player feel that there is a high possibility of shifting to the consecutive villa mode, so that the player's expectation for the consecutive villa mode can be improved.

Further, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 327, there is a possibility of shifting from the consecutive villa mode (normal state) to another state only when a big hit occurs. Specifically, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 327, when the jackpot G12, which is the jackpot of the second special symbol and is determined at a rate of 70% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the comparison is made after the jackpot ends. It shifts to the advantageous chance mode A. In addition, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is determined and the jackpot I12, which is determined at a rate of 30% as the jackpot type, is determined, the chance mode is easier to shift to the consecutive villa mode than the chance mode A after the jackpot ends. Move to B. If the jackpot I12 is reached, the number of time reductions is set to 2 times. Therefore, if the chance mode B is set after the jackpot I12, the time reduction number is almost elapsed and the mode is returned to the consecutive villa mode. Can be migrated. Therefore, it can be said that the jackpot I12 is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than the jackpot G12. As described above, in this consecutive villa mode, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is significantly shorter than that of the other modes, and the second special symbol is drawn with a high probability (1/2 probability). Because it is a hit, just by playing a right-handed game, the lottery of the second special symbol based on the entry into the second entry opening 640 and the small hit period (during the opening period of the first specific winning opening 65a) It is possible to frequently generate a prize in the first specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, until the big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is possible to continue to acquire the prize ball based on the ball entering the first specific winning opening 65a (that is, a large amount of prizes can be obtained only by continuing to hit right. It forms a very advantageous playing state (where it is possible to acquire a ball). As described above, in the normal state of transition based on the initialization of the pachinko machine 10, a long fluctuation (60 seconds) is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, so that the normal mode is used. It also forms a disadvantageous gaming state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being overly advantageous to the player by initializing the pachinko machine 10 and giving an unexpected disadvantage to the hall.

As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, the configuration is such that four modes (game state) of the normal mode, the chance mode A, the chance mode B, and the consecutive villa mode are switched back and forth. As a result, the game playability changes each time the mode is changed, so that the game can be sharpened. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 328. FIG. 328 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 328, the RAM 223 in the twelfth embodiment has the winning flag 223ka, the preparing flag 223kb, and the RUSH with respect to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the eleventh embodiment (see FIG. 307 (b)). It differs from the medium flag 223kc in that it is added.

The winning flag 223ka is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 has won the jackpot at least once since the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 was turned on. If this winning flag 223ka is on, it means that the jackpot has been won at least once after the power is turned on, and if it is off, it means that the jackpot has not been won even once after the power is turned on. Means. When the game state is the normal state at the start of the fluctuation, the state of the winning flag 223ka is referred to, and if it is off, the normal state after the power is turned on (that is, long as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol). It is determined that it is in a disadvantageous state where fluctuations are set), and the effect for the normal mode is executed (while the number of special drawing lottery is less than 100), while if it is on, the effect for the consecutive villa mode is executed. To execute.

The ready state flag 223 kb is a flag for indicating whether or not it is in the ready state. If it is on, it means that it is in the ready state (see FIG. 319 (a)), and if it is off, it means that it is in the ready state. Means not. In the normal state, the preparation state flag 223kb is referred to to determine whether or not the preparation state has already been completed (switched to the display in RUSH), and the preparation state effect is executed. Decide whether to perform the RUSH state effect.

The RUSH middle flag 223kc is a flag for indicating whether or not it is in the consecutive villa mode, and if it is on, it means that it is in the consecutive villa mode, and if it is off, it means that it is not in the consecutive villa mode. In the normal state, the flag 223 kb in the ready state and the flag 223 kb in the RUSH state are referred to to determine which state to set the effect mode.

Whether or not the ceiling effect executing flag 223kd is executing an effect mode (top arrival effect) in which the character 811 reaches the top of the rocky mountain, which is executed with the probability variation number or the time reduction number remaining 1. It is a flag indicating whether or not. If the ceiling effect executing flag 223 kd is on, it means that the summit reaching effect (see FIG. 318 (b)) is being executed, and if it is off, it means that the summit reaching effect is not being executed. do. When the symbol stop timing is reached while the ceiling effect executing flag 223 cd is on, the mode shifts to the consecutive villa mode and the preparation state is set.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the twelfth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 329 to 333, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 329, the details of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 13 (S331) in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 329 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process 13 (S331) in the twelfth embodiment. The first special symbol jackpot determination process 13 (S331) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 12 (see FIG. 309) in the eleventh embodiment, and is a process executed in place of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 12 (see FIG. 309). Similar to the symbol jackpot determination process 12 (see FIG. 309), based on the set game state based on the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. This is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not it is a jackpot.

Of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 13 (see FIG. 329) in the twelfth embodiment, in each of the processes S401, S403 to S410, S412, and S421, the first special symbol jackpot determination process in the eleventh embodiment, respectively. The same processes as those of S401, S403 to S410, S412, and S421 of 12 (see FIG. 309) are executed.

Further, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 13 (see FIG. 329) in the twelfth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S406 that the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a jackpot, then a small hit. (S431) is executed to determine whether or not the player has won the prize, and to execute the process corresponding to the determination result, and the process is terminated. This special figure 1 deviation variation processing (S431) will be described with reference to FIG. 330.

FIG. 330 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 deviation processing (S431). In this special figure 1 deviation variation processing (S431), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit (S3111), and when it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S3111: Yes). ), The special figure 1 small hit flag for indicating that the small hit of the first special symbol is changing is set to on (S3112), and then the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to the small hit (S3113). ). Then, a small hit symbol is set as the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S3114), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S3111, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a small hit (that is, it is out of order) (S3111: No), the first symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37. As a special symbol, an out-of-order symbol is set (S3115), and this process is terminated. This special figure 1 deviation variation process (see FIG. 330) is a control process added by making the configuration so that a small hit can be won when the first special symbol is lost in the lottery.

Next, with reference to FIG. 331, the details of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 (S332) in the twelfth embodiment will be described. The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 (S332) in the twelfth embodiment is executed in place of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 35) in the eleventh embodiment (and the first embodiment). As in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 35), the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol and the variation type stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. This is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on the value of the counter CS1.

Of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 (see FIG. 331) in the twelfth embodiment, in each of the processes S501 to S503 and S505 to S509, the eleventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) is used. 1 The same processes as those of S501 to S503 and S505 to S509 of the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 35) are executed. Further, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 (see FIG. 331) in the twelfth embodiment, when the process of S503 is completed, the variation pattern scenario table 202ka (see FIG. 322 (b)) is then read out. The variation pattern selection table according to the previous jackpot type and the number of special drawing lottery is read out (S521). Specifically, if the previous jackpot is a probability variation jackpot and the number of special figure lottery is 99 or less, the latent probability / probability variation start table 202f11 (see FIG. 324) is read as a variation pattern selection table. If the previous jackpot is a normal jackpot and the number of special drawing lottery is 99 or less, the time-saving start table 202f12 (see FIG. 325) is read out as the variation pattern selection table. Further, if the pachinko machine 10 has not been won a big hit even once after the initialization of the pachinko machine 10 and the number of special drawing lottery is 99 times or less, the normal start table 202f13 (FIG. 326 (FIG. 326). a) Read). On the other hand, when the number of special drawing lottery is 100 or more, the RUSH table 202f14 (see FIG. 326 (b)) is read out as the fluctuation pattern selection table regardless of the type of the previous jackpot. When the processing of S521 is completed, the processing is transferred to S505.

By executing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 (see FIG. 331), the variation pattern can be selected with reference to the variation pattern selection table according to the previous jackpot type and the number of special symbol lottery. Therefore, the fluctuation pattern can be diversified. In addition, the degree of advantage differs between the normal state set based on the initialization of the pachinko machine 10 and the normal state shifted from other profitable gaming states, and after the initialization, it is different from that of a general gaming machine. Similarly, while the state can be set to be disadvantageous to the player, the normal state shifted through other gaming states can be formed as the most advantageous gaming state to the player. Although the illustration is omitted, in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 42), the variation pattern scenario table 202ka is also referred to (that is, the previous jackpot type and the number of special figure lottery). It is modified to read the variation pattern selection table (according to).

Next, with reference to FIG. 332, the details of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 13 (S221) in the twelfth embodiment will be described. The first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 13 (S221) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 38) in the eleventh embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is the first. Similar to the special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 38), this is a process for setting the stop display of the first special symbol.

Of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 13 (see FIG. 332) in the twelfth embodiment, in each of the processes S801 to S809, the first special symbol fluctuation stop process in the eleventh embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively. The same processing as each processing of S801 to S809 of (see FIG. 38) is executed. Further, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 13 (see FIG. 332) in the twelfth embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is off in the processing of S801 (S801: No), the first 1 Special figure for setting the stop symbol of the special symbol 1 The loss stop process is executed (S821), and this process is terminated. The details of the special drawing 1 disengagement stop processing (S821) will be described with reference to FIG. 333.

FIG. 333 is a flowchart showing the special drawing 1 disengagement stop process (S821). In this special figure 1 missed stop processing (S821), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 small hit flag is on (S3211), and when it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag is on (S3211 :. Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to on (S3212), and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to on (that is, the forced stop of the second special symbol is set). Special figure 2 for this purpose, the fluctuation stop command is set (S3213). Next, in the first symbol display device 37, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed by the off symbol (S3214), and the small hit scenario corresponding to the current small hit type is set (S3215). Then, the special figure 1 small hit flag is set to off (S3216), and the small hit medium flag 203p is set to on (S3217) to end this process. On the other hand, in the process of S3211, if it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag is off (S3211), there is no possibility of forcibly stopping the variation display of the second special symbol or starting the small hit. Therefore, this process is terminated as it is.

By executing this special figure 1 loss stop process (see FIG. 333), when a small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the change display of the second special symbol is removed at the same time as the small hit symbol is stopped. It can be forcibly stopped and displayed with. Therefore, in a state where the long variation of the second special symbol is being executed, the long variation of the second special symbol can be forcibly terminated only by executing the lottery of the first special symbol and winning the small hit.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 334 to 339, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described. First, the variation display setting process 13 (S4121) in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 334. The variation display setting process 13 (S4121) is a process executed in place of the variation display setting process 12 (see FIG. 314) in the eleventh embodiment, and the variation display setting process 12 (see FIG. 314) in the eleventh embodiment. ), The first special symbol or the second special symbol is based on the first or special figure 2 variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81. This is a process for setting a display variation pattern command and transmitting the command to the display control device 114.

Of the variation display setting process 13 (see FIG. 334) in the twelfth embodiment, in each process of S5101, S5102, S5106-S5108, S5110 to S5113, S5121, and S5125, the variation display setting process in the eleventh embodiment, respectively. The same processes as those of S5101, S5102, S5106 to S5108, S5110 to S5113, S5121, and S5125 of 12 (see FIG. 314) are executed. Further, in the variation display setting process 13 (see FIG. 334) in the twelfth embodiment, when the process of S5102 is completed, the effect mode corresponding to the variation type of the first special symbol notified by the variation pattern command is set. The effect mode setting process for this is executed (S5141), and the process shifts to S5106. The details of this staging mode setting process (S5141) will be described later with reference to FIG. 335.

Further, in the variation display setting process 13 (see FIG. 334) in the twelfth embodiment, when the process of S5108 is completed, the variation display setting process 12 for special figure 2 (see FIG. 316) in the eleventh embodiment is next. Instead, the variation display setting process 13 for special figure 2 is executed (S5412), and the process shifts to S5110. The details of the variation display setting process 13 (S5142) for the special figure 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. 338.

Further, in the variation display setting process 13 (see FIG. 334) in the twelfth embodiment, when the process of S5113 is completed, the preparation state setting process for setting the preparation state (see FIG. 319 (a)) is executed next. Then (S5143), this process is terminated. The details of this preparation state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 339.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned effect mode setting process (S5141) will be described. As described above, this effect mode setting process (S5141) is a process for setting an effect mode according to the variation type of the first special symbol notified by the variation pattern command. In this staging mode setting process (S5141), first, it is determined whether or not it is in the normal state (consecutive villa mode) (S13101), when it is determined that it is not in the normal state (S13101: No), and then in the time saving state. It is determined whether or not it is (chance mode B) (S13102). In the process of S13102, when it is determined that the time is not shortened (S1302: No), it means that the state is the latent state (normal mode) or the probable change state (chance mode A), and the number of probable changes of 100 times has elapsed. Since it means that there is no possibility of shifting to the continuous villa mode unless it is made to do so, it is next determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation number counter 223ja is 99 (S13103).

If it is determined in the process of S13103 that the value of the fluctuation count counter 223ja is 99 (S13103: Yes), the ceiling effect for selecting the final variation display effect before shifting to the consecutive villa mode. The setting process is executed (S13104), and the process is transferred to S13111. On the other hand, in the process of S13102, when it is determined that the gaming state is the time saving state (S13102: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the remaining time saving number is 1 (S13105), and the remaining time saving number is 1. If so, the same process as the ceiling effect setting process (S13104) described above is executed (S13110), and the process is transferred to S13111. On the other hand, in the processing of S13105, when it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is not 1 (S13105: No), and in the processing of S13103, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223ja is not 99 (S13103: No). Since there is no possibility of shifting to the continuous villa mode, the effect mode corresponding to the fluctuation type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command is determined (S13106), and the processing is shifted to S13111.

On the other hand, in the process of S13101, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal state (S13101: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the winning flag 223ka is on (S13107), and the winning is won. When it is determined that the completed flag 223ka is on (S13107), the normal effect setting process for setting the effect mode for the normal state is executed (S13108), and the process shifts to S13111. Details of this normal effect setting process (S13108) will be described later with reference to FIG. 337.

On the other hand, in the process of S13107, when it is determined that the winning flag 223ka is off (S13107: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation count counter 223ja is 99 (S13109), and the fluctuation is performed. If it is determined that the value of the number-of-count counter 223ja is 99 (S13109), the ceiling staging setting process (S13110) is executed to shift the process to S13111. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S13109 that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223ja is not 99 (S13109: No), the processing is shifted to S13108.

In the processing of S13111 executed after any of the processing of S13104, S13106, S13108, and S13110, a display variation pattern command indicating the effect mode determined by any of the processing of S13104, S13106, S13108, and S13110 is set. (S13111), this process is terminated.

Next, the details of the ceiling effect setting process (S13104, S13110) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 336. As shown in FIG. 336, in the ceiling effect setting process (S4131), first, the data of the execution area corresponding to the first special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b is read (S13201), and the data of the read execution area is read. Is determined whether or not the data corresponds to the jackpot (S13202), and if it is determined to be the jackpot (S13202: Yes), the effect mode corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command (to notify the jackpot). (S13203), and the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S13202, when it is determined that the data read from the execution area is not the data indicating a big hit (S13202: No), then, in the winning information storage area 223b, the first special symbol is reserved. The data in one area is read (S13204), and it is determined whether or not the read data in the reserved first area is the data corresponding to the jackpot. That is, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won immediately after shifting to the consecutive villa mode. In the process of S13205, if it is determined that the data in the reserved first area is a jackpot (S13205: Yes), then the data indicates the jackpot D12 (that is, after the jackpot ends, in a relatively short time (2). It is determined whether or not it is a jackpot type that shifts to the consecutive villa mode (by losing the lottery of special symbols in a row) (S13206), and if it is determined that it is not a jackpot D12 (S13206: No). , 10 seconds (that is, the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation in the consecutive villa mode) is added to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed this time, and the jackpot production of the production mode (that is, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol for two times) The straddling jackpot effect) is determined (S13207), and this process is terminated. That is, in the twelfth embodiment, when it is determined by the look-ahead that the jackpot fluctuation of a jackpot type other than the jackpot D12 starts immediately after the start of the consecutive villa mode, the transition to the consecutive villa mode (see FIG. 318 (b)). ) Is not notified, and the effect mode is executed as if a big hit was won just before the consecutive villa mode. With this configuration, despite the transition to the consecutive villa mode, the big hit will start without enjoying the small hit game even once, and it will prevent the player from feeling disappointed. can do.

On the other hand, in the processing of S13205, when it is determined that the data in the reserved first area of the first special symbol is not the data indicating the jackpot (S13205: No), and in the processing of S13206, the data in the reserved first area is the jackpot D12. When it is determined that the data indicates (S13206: Yes), the effect mode (see FIG. 318 (b)) at which the character 811 reaches the top of the rocky mountain is determined (S13208), and the ceiling effect executing flag 223 dd is turned on. Set to (S13209) to end this process.

By executing this ceiling effect setting process (see FIG. 336), the pre-reading result of the lottery result of the first special symbol at the time of shifting to the consecutive villa mode (normal state) (the number of time reductions or the number of probability changes has ended). Depending on the situation, it is possible to suitably set whether or not the summit reaching effect (see FIG. 318 (b)) can be executed.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned variation display setting process 13 (S5143) for the special figure 2 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 338. As described above, the variation display setting process 13 (S5143) for the special figure 2 is a process executed in place of the variation display setting process 12 for the special figure 2 (see FIG. 316) in the eleventh embodiment. When the variation display setting process 13 for special figure 2 (see FIG. 316) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the RUSH middle flag 223 kc is on (S13401), and the RUSH middle flag 223 kc is off. If it is determined (S13401: No), then the variation display mode of the second special symbol corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S13402), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S13401, when it is determined that the RUSH middle flag 223kc is on (S13401: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the preparation state flag 223kb is on (S13403), and the preparation state is prepared. When it is determined that the middle flag 223 kb is off (S13403: No), it means that the preparation state is completed in the consecutive villa mode, so that it is for the consecutive villa mode corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command. The effect mode is determined (S13404), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S13403, when it is determined that the preparation state flag 223kb is on (that is, the preparation state is in progress) (S13403: Yes), then the variation pattern command notifies the variation type of the small hit. It is determined whether or not it is (S13405), and if it is determined that the variation type of the small hit is notified (S13405: Yes), the preparation state flag 223kb is set to off (S13406), and the effect of this variation display effect is produced. As an aspect, an effect mode (see FIG. 319 (b)) for notifying the RUSH rush is determined (S13407), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S13405, when it is determined that the fluctuation type is not a small hit (S13405: No), it means that the preparation state continues at least until the fluctuation is completed, so that the fluctuation pattern The effect mode for the preparation state corresponding to the variation type indicated by the command is determined (S13408), and this process is terminated.

By executing this variation display setting process 13 for special figure 2 (see FIG. 338), the situation when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed (in the state of preparation or in the state where the RUSH rush has been notified). Depending on whether it is in a state other than the continuous villa mode), it is possible to perform an appropriate mode of staging.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned preparation state setting process (S5144) will be described with reference to FIG. 339. As described above, this preparation state setting process (S5144) is a process for setting the preparation state (see FIG. 319 (a)). In this preparation state setting process (S5144), first, it is determined whether or not the ceiling effect executing flag 223kd is on (S13501), and if it is determined that it is off (S13501: No), the state shifts to the preparation state. Since there is no possibility of causing this, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S13501, when it is determined that the ceiling effect executing flag 223kd is on (S13501: Yes), the ceiling effect executing flag 223kd is set to off (S13502), and the display mode during RUSH preparation (S13502). (See FIG. 319 (a)) is set (S13503). Next, both the RUSH middle flag 223 kb and the ready state flag 223 kb are set to ON (S13504), and this process ends.

By executing this preparation state setting process (see FIG. 339), it is possible to set the display mode of the preparation state from the time when the mode shifts to the consecutive villa mode.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment, the normal state is set as an advantageous gaming state (consecutive villa mode) in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed and the small hit game is frequently executed. It was configured and the latency state was configured as the most unfavorable normal mode. Then, by ending the number of probable changes in the normal mode, the configuration is such that the mode shifts to the most advantageous consecutive villa mode. In other words, it is possible to shift from the most unfavorable gaming state to the most advantageous gaming state directly without going through a big hit. With this configuration, in the most unfavorable normal mode (latent state), it is possible to play a game with the goal of allowing the number of probable changes to elapse.

Here, conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that shifts to a relatively advantageous normal state by setting the latent probability state to the most disadvantageous gaming state and ending the probability variation number in the latent probability state. However, in the conventional gaming machine, it is easier to give an advantageous time saving state after the end of the big hit when the big hit is made in the normal state than when the big hit is made in the latent state. , It is configured so that the normal state is more advantageous, and while staying in the normal state (that is, until the jackpot is won), it forms a disadvantageous state in which the number of balls to be held is likely to decrease. It was a thing. In other words, even if the number of probable changes elapses in the latent state and the state shifts to the normal state, it is not advantageous for the player at that time, and since it is necessary to win the jackpot, it is necessary to win the jackpot from the latent state. Even if the player directly shifts to the normal state without going through the above, there is a problem that the player does not feel satisfied and it is difficult to improve the player's interest.

On the other hand, in the twelfth embodiment, by ending (elapsed) the number of probability changes in the disadvantageous normal mode (latent state), the mode directly shifts to the most advantageous consecutive villa mode (normal state). did. In other words, even if you do not win the jackpot, you can easily continue to win prize balls intermittently just by continuing the right-handed game. With this configuration, when the number of probable changes can be completed, the player can have a greater sense of satisfaction and accomplishment, and thus the player's interest in the game can be improved. Can be done.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment, the normal state set by initializing the pachinko machine 10 and the normal state shifted by ending the probability change number or the time reduction number in other gaming states. Therefore, the player's degree of advantage is different. That is, a different variation pattern selection table is referred to between the normal state set by initialization and the normal state shifted via another gaming state (to the variation pattern scenario corresponding to the gaming state set after the jackpot ends). Refer to the fluctuation pattern selection table based on). With this configuration, the normal state set by initializing the pachinko machine 10 while forming the normal state shifted through other gaming states as the most advantageous gaming state for the player, can be obtained. It can be formed as a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. In other words, as with a general gaming machine, it can be set to a state that is disadvantageous to the player when it is initialized, so it will be in a state that is advantageous to the player immediately after initialization, and it will be in the hall. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent unexpected disadvantages. Further, in the twelfth embodiment, even in the normal state shifted after the initialization, when the number of lottery of the special symbol becomes 100 times or more, the state is configured to be the most advantageous for the player. ing. Therefore, even after initializing the pachinko machine 10, the operation is the same as in the normal mode except for the jackpot probability (the operation of shifting to the consecutive villa mode by continuously losing the lottery of 100 special symbols). be able to. Therefore, the state after initialization becomes excessively disadvantageous for the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from avoiding the game by the pachinko machine 10, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. ..

Further, the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment is configured to notify as a preparation state from the transition to the consecutive villa mode to the first winning of a small hit in the second special symbol lottery. When it becomes possible to win a prize ball (that is, when a small hit fluctuation is started), it is configured to notify that an advantageous state (RUSH state) has been reached. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being dissatisfied with the situation in which the prize ball cannot be obtained for a long time even though the RUSH state is notified. Further, in the twelfth embodiment, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of one special symbol, a configuration is adopted in which the lottery of the other special symbol executed during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation is forcibly removed. ing. For this reason, when the reserved ball of the first special symbol exists at the time of shifting from the normal mode to the consecutive villa mode, and the variable display of the first special symbol started at the same time as the start of the consecutive villa mode is a big hit. Will always be missed in the second special symbol lottery while the jackpot fluctuation is being executed. That is, if the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol starts at the time of shifting to the ready state, the right-handed game is continuously performed, and even if the lottery of the second special symbol is continuously executed, it is missed. By continuing (not winning a small hit), the preparation state will continue for a long time (until the big hit fluctuation ends). As a result, it is possible to realize a novel playability that the expectation that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is being executed can be improved as the deviations continue in the prepared state.

In the twelfth embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is set to 1/2, but the probability is not limited to this, and the probability of a small hit may be arbitrarily determined. .. For example, the small hit probability is increased so that when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed as in the eleventh embodiment, the small hit is almost (for example, with a probability of 59/60). May be good. In this configuration, if the deviation occurs even once in the prepared state, the expectation that the changing first special symbol is a big hit can be improved, so that the second special symbol is removed in the prepared state. It is possible to improve the interest of the player in the case of. Also, the higher the probability of a small hit, the shorter the preparation status (the average number of lottery times from the transition to the consecutive villa mode to the winning of the small hit will be smaller), so after shifting to the consecutive villa mode , It is possible to shorten the period until the ball is secured by the prize ball. That is, since the prize ball can be given to the player earlier, the player's interest in the game can be improved. On the other hand, the small hit probability may be lowered so that it is likely to come off during the preparation state. With such a configuration, the deviations are likely to be continuous, so that the expectation that the jackpot of the first special symbol is being changed can be held more frequently. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the twelfth embodiment, basically, when the number of probable changes or the number of time reductions is completed, the mode is changed to the consecutive villa mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the end of the jackpot, a jackpot of a type in which the direct consecutive villa mode is set may be provided. In this case, if the jackpot of the type in which the direct consecutive villa mode is set is won, the RUSH table 202f14 may be referred to immediately after the jackpot ends. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a type of jackpot that directly shifts to the consecutive villa mode after the jackpot ends, while suppressing the excessive advantage after the pachinko machine 10 is initialized. It is possible to pay attention to the type of jackpot and play the game. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game. In addition, as a condition for shifting to the consecutive villa mode, for example, when the probability change state is continuously won a specific number of times (for example, 5 times) and the probability change jackpot is won again, the game state after the jackpot is forcibly changed to the normal state. It may be configured to be set to. That is, a so-called probability variation limit function may be installed. With this configuration, even if you win consecutive probabilistic jackpots in the disadvantageous normal mode, you can feel as if you are approaching the consecutive villa mode, so the player's motivation for the game. Can be enhanced.

In the twelfth embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that a dedicated fluctuation pattern table is referred to in the initial state so that the initial state of the pachinko machine 10 is not excessively advantageous. It may be configured to be a mode. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player want to start playing the pachinko machine 10 immediately after the opening of the hall in the expectation that it has been initialized, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be increased. Can be improved.

In the twelfth embodiment, the more the number of misses in the second special symbol lottery continues during the preparation state, the higher the expectation that the first special symbol lottery will be a big hit. In addition to this, the configuration may be such that an effect of indicating the number of consecutive deviations during the preparation state (that is, indicating the degree of expectation during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol) is executed. Specifically, for example, the background color on the display screen in the ready state may change in the order of blue → green → red → rainbow color every time the disengagement occurs twice in succession. With such a configuration, even a player who does not know the use of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment can easily understand that the continuous deviation of the second special symbol is better. Therefore, it is possible to realize playability that is easy for the player to understand.

<13th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 340 to 344. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment described above, the normal state is set to an advantageous gaming state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed and the small hit game is frequently executed, while the latent state is set to the latent state. It is configured to be the most disadvantageous gaming state for the player. In addition, by assuming that the number of probable changes has ended in the latent state in most of the cases of transitioning to the normal state, it is expected that the deviation will continue over the number of probable changes set in the unfavorable latent state. It was configured to make it possible to realize a novel playability.

On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, two game states, a latent state and a normal state, are configured as an advantageous game state in which a small hit game is frequently executed, while a probable change state and a time-saving state are set as a game. It is configured as a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the person. As a result, in a general gaming machine, a disadvantageous state can be set while the time saving state is set, which is advantageous, and a state in which the time saving state is not set can be set as an advantageous state, so that the time saving state ends. It is possible to realize a novel playability in which a game is played in the hope that it will be played.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment is that the board structure of the game board 13 is the board structure of the game board 13 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 2). ), The configuration of ROM 202 of the main controller 110 has been partially changed, and the control process executed by MPU201 of the main controller 110 has been partially changed. be. The twelfth regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the twelfth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the mode in the thirteenth embodiment will be briefly described. In the thirteenth embodiment, the normal state is configured as the most advantageous state, and the latent state is also configured as a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, although the degree of advantage is lower than that of the normal state. On the other hand, the probabilistic state and the time saving state are configured as a disadvantageous game state in which the game should be advanced by the left-handed game. It can be said that the time-saving state is more advantageous for the player because the time-saving state is easier to shift to the most advantageous normal state than the probability change state. In the thirteenth embodiment, the most unfavorable probability change state is referred to as a normal mode, the time saving state is referred to as a chance mode, and the latent probability state advantageous to the player is referred to as a consecutive villa mode A, and the player. The most advantageous normal state for the user is referred to as a consecutive villa mode B. As in the twelfth embodiment described above, in the normal state set based on the initialization of the pachinko machine 10, only the long variation is selected when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. , Forming a disadvantageous situation where it is necessary to play a game by hitting left.

<Electrical configuration in the thirteenth embodiment>
First, the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 340 to 342. Here, the ROM 202 in the thirteenth embodiment has the specified contents of the first random number table 202a, the specified contents of the second random number table 202c, and the jackpot type selection table 202d with respect to the ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment. The specified contents and the specified contents of the variation pattern selection table 202f are partially changed. First, with reference to FIG. 238 (a), the configuration of the first random number table 202a defined (stored) in the ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment of the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 321 (b) describes the first random number table 202a in the twelfth embodiment.

FIG. 340 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first random number table 202a. As shown in FIG. 340 (a), in the first hit random number table 202a in the thirteenth embodiment, the random number value (counter value) determined to be a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol is "0 to 3". Four random number values (counter values) are specified. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 340 (a), eight random number values (counter values) of "0 to 7" are defined as random number values (counter values) determined to be big hits in the high probability state of the special symbol. ing.

Therefore, the probability of winning a big hit when the special symbol lottery is executed in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1/120 (4/480), while the special symbol lottery is performed in the high probability state of the special symbol. The probability of a big hit when executed is 1/60 (8/480). The change in the jackpot probability in the thirteenth embodiment is performed in order to further enhance the superiority of the normal state. That is, by configuring it so that it is easy to win a big hit in the latent state, it is difficult for the latent state to continue for a long time. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with a stronger expectation that the state of frequently winning small hits will shift to the normal state where it is easy to continue for a long time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, the details of the second random number table 202c in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 340 (b). FIG. 340 (b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the second random number table 202c in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 340 (b), in the second hit random number table 202c in the thirteenth embodiment, the random number value (counter value) determined to be a hit of the normal symbol in the low probability state of the normal symbol is "0". Is stipulated. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 340 (b), two random number values (counter values) of "0, 1" are used as random value values (counter values) determined to be hits of the normal symbol in the time saving state of the normal symbol. It is stipulated.

That is, in the thirteenth embodiment, even in the time-saving state of the ordinary symbol, the ordinary symbol is configured to hit only with a low probability. As a result, even if a left-handed game is performed in a time-saving state or a probable change state, it is difficult for the electric accessory 64a to be released, so that the game ball hardly enters the lower first entrance ball opening 64b2. Therefore, since it is necessary to execute the lottery of the first special symbol by inserting the game ball into the upper first entry slot 64b1 by the left-handed game, it is disadvantageous that the number of balls held is easily reduced in the probable change state and the time saving state. It becomes a game state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 341, the details of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 341 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 341, in the thirteenth embodiment, seven jackpot types of "big hit A13" to "big hit G13" are defined as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. Further, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, three jackpot types of "big hit H13" to "big hit J13" are defined.

As shown in FIG. 341, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4", while the jackpot type is "big hit A13". It is specified in association with each other. This "big hit A13" has 8 rounds of big hits, and is a type of big hits (8 rounds probability variable big hits) that is set to the consecutive villa mode A (latent state) after the end of the big hits. As described above, since the consecutive villa mode A is a game state in which a small hit game is frequently executed just by hitting right, the "big hit A13" is compared in terms of the game state after the big hit is completed. It will be a favorable jackpot type.

Further, as shown in FIG. 341, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "5 to 9" and "big hit B13" as the jackpot type. This "big hit B13" has 8 rounds of big hits, and is a type of big hit (2-round probable change big hit) that is set to the most disadvantageous normal mode (probability change state) after the end of the big hit. Since the number of time reductions set after the end of the "big hit B13" is set to 25, it is relatively easy to end the number of time reductions. By terminating the number of time reductions, the mode A is set to the continuous villa mode A until the number of probable changes (100 times) is completed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 341, "big hit C13" is defined as a big hit type in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "10 to 29". This "big hit C13" has two rounds of jackpot, and is a type of jackpot (two-round probabilistic jackpot) that is set to the most disadvantageous normal mode (probability change state) after the end of the jackpot. In the normal mode after the "big hit C13" is completed, the number of time reductions is set to 50, so that it is more difficult to shift to the consecutive villa mode A than the "big hit B13". Therefore, the "big hit C13" is a type of jackpot that is more disadvantageous than the "big hit B13".

Further, as shown in FIG. 341, for the value of the first hit type counter C2 being "30 to 74", "big hit D13" is defined in association with the jackpot type. This "big hit D13" is a type of big hit (two rounds probable change jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is two rounds and the normal mode (probability change state) is set after the end of the big hit. In the normal mode after the "big hit D13" is completed, the number of time reductions is set to 75, so that it is more difficult to shift to the consecutive villa mode A than the "big hit C13". Therefore, the "big hit D13" is a type of jackpot that is more disadvantageous than the "big hit B13" and the "big hit C13".

Further, as shown in FIG. 341, for the value of the first hit type counter C2 being "75", "big hit E13" is defined in association with the jackpot type. This "big hit E13" is a type of big hit (8 rounds normal big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds and the chance mode (time saving state) is set after the end of the big hit. In the chance mode set after the "big hit E13" is completed, the number of time reductions is set to 2, so it is extremely easy to end the number of time reductions. When the number of time reductions ends in the chance mode, the mode shifts to the most advantageous consecutive villa mode B (normal state), so that the "big hit E13" is the most advantageous jackpot among the jackpot types of the first special symbol.

Further, as shown in FIG. 341, for the value of the first hit type counter C2 being "76 to 80", "big hit F13" is defined in association with the jackpot type. This "big hit F13" is a type of big hit (two rounds normal big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is two rounds and the chance mode (time saving state) is set after the end of the big hit. Since the number of time reductions in the chance mode set after the end of the "big hit F13" is set to 50 times, it is more difficult to shift to the consecutive villa mode B than the "big hit E13". Therefore, the "big hit F13" is a type of jackpot that is more disadvantageous than the "big hit E13". In addition, in the chance mode, the jackpot probability is low, and by ending the number of time reductions, it directly shifts to the most advantageous consecutive villa mode B, so it is better than the "big hit B13" to "big hit D13" that shift to the normal mode. It can be said that it is an advantageous (easy to shift to consecutive villa mode B) jackpot type. Further, if we focus only on the point that the jackpot probability is low, it can be said that it is more disadvantageous than "big hit B13" to "big hit D13".

Further, as shown in FIG. 341, for the value of the first hit type counter C2 being "81 to 99", "big hit G13" is defined in association with the jackpot type. This "big hit G13" is a type of jackpot (two rounds normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is two and the chance mode (time saving state) is set after the jackpot ends. Since the number of time reductions in the chance mode set after the end of the "big hit G13" is set to 75, it is more difficult to shift to the consecutive villa mode B than the "big hit E13" or the "big hit F13". .. Therefore, the "big hit G13" is a type of big hit that is more disadvantageous than the "big hit E13" and the "big hit F13".

On the other hand, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), "big hit H13" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the range of "0 to 24" in the value of the first hit type counter C2. ing. This "big hit H13" is a big hit (8 rounds probability variable big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds and the game state after the big hit is set to the consecutive villa mode A or the normal mode. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 341, when the "big hit H13" is won in the consecutive villa mode B (normal state), the consecutive villa mode A (latent state) is set after the big hit ends, while the consecutive villa mode A (latent state) is set. If the "big hit H13" is won in the normal mode (probability change state), chance mode (time saving state), and consecutive villa mode A (latent state), the normal mode is set after the big hit ends.

Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "25 to 74" in association with "big hit I13" as the jackpot type. This "big hit I13" is a big hit (8 rounds probability variation big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds and the game state after the big hit is set to the consecutive villa mode A or the normal mode. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 341, if the "big hit H13" is won in the consecutive villa mode A (latent state) or the consecutive villa mode B (normal state), the consecutive villa mode A (submarine) is after the end of the big hit. On the other hand, if the "big hit H13" is won in the normal mode (probable change state) or the chance mode (time saving state), the normal mode is set after the big hit ends.

Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "75 to 99" in association with "big hit J13" as the jackpot type. This "big hit J13" is a type of big hit (8 rounds normal big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds and the game state after the big hit is set to the chance mode. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 341, when the "big hit J13" is won in the consecutive villa mode B, the number of time reductions is set to 2 times, so that an advantageous state in which the number of time reductions is extremely easy to end is formed. .. Further, if the "big hit J13" is won in the consecutive villa mode A, 75 times is set as the number of time reductions, and if the "big hit J13" is won in the normal mode or the chance mode, 100 times is set as the number of time reductions.

In addition, in the normal mode and the chance mode, when a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol, setting 100 times as the number of time reductions is the second entry by the right-handed game in the game state where the left-handed game should be performed. This is to suppress an irregular game method aiming at the ball mouth 640. As described above, in the thirteenth embodiment, the gaming state which is disadvantageous to the player is formed while the time saving state of the normal symbol is set. Therefore, in the normal mode or the chance mode, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, the time saving state of the disadvantageous ordinary symbol continues for a long time (100 times), which is anomalous to the player. It can make you feel like you don't want to play a game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in which a right-handed game is performed in a game state in which a left-handed game should be performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 342, the probabilistic / latent start time table 202f11 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. The probabilistic / latent start table 202f11 in the thirteenth embodiment is a lottery of the first special symbol in the latent state with respect to the probabilistic / latent start table 202f11 (see FIG. 324) in the twelfth embodiment. As the fluctuation pattern selected when is executed, only the fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time (0.1 seconds or 10 seconds) is selected, and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the latent state. The difference is that only the variation pattern with a short variation time (1 second or 10 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern selected in this case. In this change, the latent state in the twelfth embodiment is a normal mode that is disadvantageous to the player, whereas the latent state in the thirteenth embodiment is configured as a continuous villa mode A that is advantageous to the player. It is due to what I did.

Next, with reference to FIG. 343, a method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10 realized by performing control based on various tables defined in ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in RAM 203. explain. FIG. 343 is a diagram showing a method of transitioning the state of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 343, the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment is roughly divided into four modes (gaming states). That is, the normal mode (probability change state) shown in the upper part of FIG. 343, the chance mode (time saving state) shown in the center of FIG. , The continuous villa mode B (normal state) shown on the lower right side of FIG. 343 is provided.

As described above, the normal mode indicates the probable change state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol, and the probability of becoming a big hit is high, and the electric accessory 64a is more easily released than the normal state of the normal symbol. However, the probability of being released is low, and the game ball rarely enters the lower first entry port 64b2. Therefore, since it is necessary to advance the game by allowing the game ball to enter the upper first entry port 64b1 by the left-handed game, a game state disadvantageous to the player is formed. Further, as described above, the chance mode indicates a low probability state of the special symbol and a time saving state of the normal symbol, and although it is necessary to proceed with the left-handed game as in the normal mode, it is normal. Since it is easier to shift to the most advantageous consecutive villa mode A than the mode, it is a gaming state with a higher degree of advantage than the normal mode. Further, the consecutive villa mode A indicates a probable change state of the special symbol and a normal state of the normal symbol, and by performing the right-handed game, an advantageous game state in which the small hit game is frequently executed is obtained. Form. Further, the consecutive villa mode A indicates a low probability state of the special symbol and a normal state of the normal symbol, and is an extremely advantageous game in which the small hit game is frequently executed as in the consecutive villa mode A. Form a state.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 343, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal mode to another state when a big hit occurs and when a specified probability variation number has passed. Specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 343, when the jackpot A13, which is the jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 5% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), it is continuous after the jackpot ends. Shift to Zhuang mode A. In addition, if any of the jackpots E13 to G13, which is the jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 25% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the chance mode is relatively advantageous after the jackpot ends. Transition. Further, after the normal mode is set, the predetermined probability variation number (100 times) is elapsed, so that the mode A is directly shifted to the consecutive villa mode A, which is advantageous to the player (without going through a big hit). On the other hand, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is obtained and the jackpots B13 to C13, which are determined at a rate of 70% as the jackpot type, are determined, the normal mode is set again after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in the normal mode, it is more advantageous to pass the specified probability variation number than to become a big hit, so that the player can be expected to continuously lose the specified number of times. .. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, as shown in the center of FIG. 343, there is a possibility of shifting from the chance mode to another state when a big hit occurs or when a specified number of time reductions has elapsed. Specifically, as shown in the center of FIG. 343, when the jackpot A13, which is the jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 5% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), it is continuous after the jackpot ends. Shift to Zhuang mode A. In addition, if any of the jackpots B13 to D13, which is the jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 70% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the mode shifts to the disadvantageous normal mode after the jackpot ends. .. Furthermore, after the chance mode is set, the specified number of time reductions (any of 2, 25, 50, 75, and 100) is allowed to pass to the most advantageous consecutive villa mode B for the player. And move directly (without going through the jackpot). On the other hand, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is obtained and the jackpots E13 to G13, which are determined at a rate of 25% as the jackpot type, are determined, the chance mode is set again after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in the chance mode, even if it becomes a big hit, the rate of maintaining the status quo or falling to the disadvantageous normal mode becomes extremely high, so it is more advantageous to let the specified number of times shortened than to become a big hit. It is easy to become. Therefore, since it is possible to expect the player to have continuous deviations over a predetermined number of time reductions, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Further, as shown on the lower left side of FIG. 343, there is a possibility of shifting from the consecutive villa mode A to another state when a big hit occurs or when a predetermined probability change number has passed. Specifically, as shown on the lower left side of FIG. 343, when the jackpot H13, which is the jackpot of the second special symbol and is determined at a rate of 25% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), after the jackpot ends. Move to the disadvantageous normal mode. In addition, when the jackpot of the second special symbol becomes a jackpot and the jackpot J13 determined at a rate of 25% is selected (determined) as the jackpot type, the mode shifts to the disadvantageous chance mode after the jackpot ends. Furthermore, after the consecutive villa mode A is set, the specified number of probable changes (100 times after the end of the previous jackpot) elapses, so that the player can directly go to the consecutive villa mode B (without going through the jackpot), which is most advantageous for the player. )Transition. On the other hand, when the jackpot of the second special symbol becomes a jackpot and the jackpot I13 determined as the jackpot type at a rate of 50% is determined, the consecutive villa mode A is set again after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in the consecutive villa mode A, the prize ball can be won while staying in the consecutive villa mode, and in the case of a big hit, it becomes easier to loop in the same mode, which is advantageous for the player. It becomes. Furthermore, if the number of probable changes can be passed, the mode shifts to the most advantageous consecutive villa mode B, so that even if a big hit or a series of misses (small hits) occurs, the player will be in an advantageous state. Form.

Further, as shown on the lower right side of FIG. 343, there is a possibility of shifting from the consecutive villa mode B to another state only when a big hit occurs. Specifically, as shown on the lower right side of FIG. 343, when the jackpot H13 and I13, which are the jackpots of the second special symbol and are determined at a rate of 75% as the jackpot type, are selected (determined), the jackpots are selected. After the end, the mode shifts to the consecutive villa mode A, which is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the jackpot of the second special symbol becomes a jackpot and the jackpot J13 determined at a rate of 25% as the jackpot type is determined, the chance mode is set after the jackpot ends. In the chance mode set after the end of the jackpot J13, the number of time reductions is set to 2, so that the number of time reductions can be almost completed and the mode can be shifted to the consecutive villa mode B. Therefore, it is a jackpot type that is more pleasing to the player than the jackpots H13 and I13 that shift to the consecutive villa mode A. In this way, in the consecutive villa mode B, the prize ball can be won while staying in the consecutive villa mode, and in the case of a big hit, there is a possibility of shifting to the normal mode which is disadvantageous to the player. Since there is no such thing, it is very advantageous for the player.

<Control processing of the main control device in the thirteenth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 344, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 344 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation processing 14 (S121) in the thirteenth embodiment. This ordinary symbol variation process 14 (S121) is a process executed in place of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 48) in the twelfth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is a process executed in place of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 48). Similar to the process (see FIG. 48), the process for displaying in the second symbol display device (not shown) and the process for accompanying the passage of the sphere at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 are performed. It is a process for.

Of the ordinary symbol variation processing 14 (see FIG. 344) in the thirteenth embodiment, the twelfth implementation is performed in each of the processes S1801, S1802, S1804, S1807 to S1810, S1812, S1814, S1816 to S1818, S1821, and S1823, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S1801, S1802, S1804, S1807 to S1810, S1812, S1814, S1816 to S1818, S1821, and S1823 of the ordinary symbol variation processing (see FIG. 48) in the embodiment (and the first embodiment) is executed. Will be done.

Further, in the normal symbol variation processing 14 (see FIG. 344) in the thirteenth embodiment, after the processing of S1810 or S1812 is completed, 60 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (S1831), and the processing is performed. Move to S1814. That is, in the thirteenth embodiment, a long fluctuation time is set regardless of the lottery result of the normal symbol and the game state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the chance that the electric accessory 64a is released even in the probabilistic state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set or in the time saving state.

Further, in the normal symbol variation processing 14 (see FIG. 344) in the thirteenth embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S1821 that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (S1821: No), the electric accessory 64a is opened. The time and the number of times are set to "0.1 seconds x 1 time" (S1832), and the process shifts to S1823. On the other hand, in the process of S1821 when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S1821: Yes), the opening time and the number of times of the electric accessory 64a are set to "0.2 seconds x 1 time". (S1833), the process shifts to S1823. As described above, in the thirteenth embodiment, even in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long (60 seconds) and the opening time of the electric accessory 64a is also short. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the first entry port 64b2. Therefore, the gaming state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set can be set to a disadvantageous state for the player.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, two gaming states, a latent state and a normal state, are configured as an advantageous gaming state in which a small hit game is frequently executed. Here, conventionally, by executing the lottery of the second special symbol in the latent probability state, it is configured to win a small hit with a high probability, and the latent probability state is more advantageous than the probabilistic change state. Has been proposed. That is, a gaming machine equipped with an advantageous state (so-called small hit RUSH function) in which a prize ball can be won without winning a big hit has been proposed. However, in such a conventional gaming machine, even if the machine shifts to an advantageous state other than the latent state such as the probable change state, the player feels satisfied unless it shifts to the latent state (small hit RUSH state). It was difficult to hold. On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, as the so-called small hit RUSH state, two types of states having different degrees of advantage are provided, and the small hit RUSH state (ream villa mode A) having a relatively low degree of advantage is set. The configuration is such that migration is relatively easy. With this configuration, it is possible to form the pachinko machine 10 that allows the player to experience the small hit RUSH state relatively easily, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Modified example of the thirteenth embodiment>
Next, a modification of the above-mentioned thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 345 and 346. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, it is easy to execute a lottery of the second special symbol having a high probability of winning a small hit in two types of gaming states, a latent state and a normal state (variation time of the second special symbol). Formed as a short) advantageous condition. That is, just by continuously hitting the right side, small hits of the second special symbol occur frequently, and the first specific winning opening 65a is frequently opened, so that the prize ball can be won even if the big hit is not won. It was configured to form an advantageous state that could be acquired continuously (intermittently).

On the other hand, in the modified example of the thirteenth embodiment, by playing the game aiming at the first ball entrance 64b1 by the left-handed game, the small hit of the first special symbol frequently occurs and the small hit By playing a game aiming at the second entry opening 640 by a right-handed game and an advantageous state (latent state) in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the second specific winning opening 650a opened during the game. A configuration in which small hits of the second special symbol frequently occur and an advantageous state (normal state) in which the game ball is easily entered into the second specific winning opening 650a opened during the small hit game is provided. And said. That is, by performing a left-handed game, an advantageous state (latent state) in which a prize ball can be obtained intermittently (continuously) without winning a big hit, and by performing a right-handed game. , An advantageous state (normal state) in which prize balls can be obtained intermittently (continuously) without winning a big hit, and two types are provided. Further, the small hit probability of the first special symbol (for example, 1/5) is set to be lower than the small hit probability of the second special symbol (for example, 59/60), so that the normal state can be obtained. It is configured so that it is in a more advantageous state in which it is easier to obtain a prize ball than in a latent state.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the thirteenth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment is that the small hit probability is changed and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64aj is changed. The point is that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 has been changed. With reference to FIGS. 345 and 346, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 of this modification will be described.

As shown in FIG. 345, the game board 13 in this modified example is provided with an electric accessory 64aj in place of the electric accessory 64a provided incidentally to the lower first entrance ball opening 64b2. Drink differently. Similar to the electric accessory 64a in the thirteenth embodiment (and the first embodiment), the electric accessory 64aj is in a closed state (normally, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the lower first entry port 64b2). The open state (second state), which makes it easier for the game ball to enter the lower first entry port 64b2 compared to the closed state when the first state) is formed and a hit is made by lottery of a normal symbol. To form. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 346, but in this modified example, even if the open state is set, the game ball hardly enters the lower first entry port 64b2. In this modified example, the first special winning opening 65a is configured to be opened when a big hit is made or when a small hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the lottery of the first special symbol is made. The second specific winning opening 650a is configured to be opened when a small hit is made.

Next, the correspondence between the state of the electric accessory 640aj and the flow path of the game ball will be described with reference to FIG. 346. First, with reference to FIG. 346 (a), the flow path of the game ball in the state where the electric accessory 64aj is closed will be described. As shown in FIG. 346 (a), in a state where the electric accessory 64aj is closed, the game ball flowing down from above toward the electric accessory 64aj collides with (interferes with) the electric accessory 64aj, resulting in a path. The second variable winning device was changed (variable), and the route was changed by flowing down to the right side of the second variable winning device 650 (path Ka1) or colliding (interfering) with the electric accessory 64aj. It flows directly toward the second variable winning device 650 (path Ka3) without flowing down toward 650 (path Ka2) or colliding (interfering) with the electric accessory 64aj. That is, in the state where the electric accessory 64aj is closed, it is not possible to enter the ball into the lower first entry slot 64b2, but it is relatively easy to reach the second variable winning device 650. Therefore, in the latent state where the normal state of the normal symbol is set (the electric accessory 64aj is difficult to be released), the probability that the lottery of the first special symbol is executed by performing the left-handed game is 1/5. When the second specific winning opening 650a is opened, it becomes possible to relatively easily enter the game ball into the second specific winning opening 650a. When the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the latent state, a long fluctuation is set regardless of the lottery result, so even if the right-handed hit is continuously performed, there is little merit for the player ( Although you will win a small hit, it will be difficult to win a prize ball because the interval between small hit games will be long).

Further, FIG. 346 (b) is a diagram showing a flow path of the game ball in a state where the electric accessory 64aj is open. As shown in FIG. 346 (b), in the state where the electric accessory 64aj is opened, the game ball flowing down from above the electric accessory 64aj collides with (interferes with) the electric accessory 64aj and the flow path is changed. Even if it is changed, it is less likely to be reflected in the direction of the second variable winning device 650 (paths Kb1, Kb2). Further, since the electric accessory 64aj is opened, the area of the region formed between the electric accessory 64aj and the lower first ball entry port 64b2 becomes wider, so that the lower first one interferes with a nail or the like. It becomes relatively easy for a game ball to enter the ball entry port 64b2 (for example, about 1 in 200 balls). It should be noted that, only because it is easier to enter the ball than in the closed state, it is configured as a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter as compared with the time-saving state of the normal symbol in other embodiments. Therefore, in the probabilistic state or the time saving state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter both the lower first entry opening 64b2 and the second specific winning opening 650a, so that the first special symbol Every time the lottery is executed, even though the second specific winning opening 650a is opened with a probability of 1/5, it is a disadvantageous state that the game ball cannot be entered into the second specific winning opening 650a. To form. In this modification, a fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds is set each time the game ball passes through the through gate 67 in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and the game is hit with a high probability (for example, 232/233). In the case of a hit, the electric accessory 64aj is released for 2.5 seconds. That is, by performing the left-handed game, the operation repeats the fluctuation for 0.1 second and the opening for 2.5 seconds. In other words, the electric accessory 64aj is almost left open. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second specific entry port 650a in the time saving state or the probable change state.

As described above, in the modified example of the thirteenth embodiment, the second specific winning opening 650a is closed by the electric accessory 64aj which is opened when the normal symbol hits, so that the time saving state and the probable change state are obtained. Even if you hit the left side and get a small hit, it is difficult to win the prize ball. As a result, only when a left-handed strike is made in the normal state of the normal symbol (a state in which the electric accessory 64aj is difficult to open) and a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, the game is played to the second specific winning opening 650a. It is possible to form an advantageous state in which the ball is easy (possible) to enter. In other words, it is configured to form a relatively advantageous state by hitting left in the latent state. Therefore, it is possible to form an advantageous state in which the prize ball is easily obtained by hitting the left side and an advantageous state in which the prize ball is easily obtained by hitting the right side, so that the game method can be diversified. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Further, in this modification, the degree of advantage is different between the latent state in which it is easy to acquire the prize ball by hitting left and the normal state in which it is easy to acquire the prize ball by hitting right (if the frequency of acquiring the prize ball is different). It has a structure. As a result, the game can be sharpened, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In this modification, the probability of a small hit of the second special symbol is higher than the probability of a small hit of the first special symbol, so that the lottery of the first special symbol is mainly executed in the latent state. , The normal state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed is configured to be more advantageous, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to making the small hit probability different depending on the type of special symbol, for example, in the small hit of the first special symbol, in one small hit game than in the small hit of the second special symbol. By configuring so that the number of game balls that can be won is likely to decrease, it may be configured so that the normal state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed is more advantageous. In addition, instead of or in addition to these, the number of prize balls based on the entry into the second specific winning opening 650a, which is opened when the first special symbol is a small hit, is the second special symbol small hit. By making the number of prize balls smaller than the number of prize balls based on the entry into the first specific winning opening 65a, which is opened in the case of, the normal state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed is more advantageous. It may be configured as. By applying these modifications, the degree of advantage can be changed in a more multifaceted manner, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the thirteenth embodiment and its modifications, the normal state is configured to be more advantageous than the latent state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the latent state may be configured to be more advantageous than the normal state.

<14th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 347 to 341. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, in two types of gaming states, a normal state and a latent state, an advantageous state in which a prize ball by a small hit is easily obtained is formed. In addition, the degree of advantage between the normal state and the latent state is different, and the normal state is configured to be more advantageous than the latent state, thereby realizing a sharp playability.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 14th embodiment, as in the 1st embodiment, only the latent probability state is configured as an advantageous gaming state in which it is easy to obtain a prize ball by a small hit. Further, in the 14th embodiment, the degree of advantage (easiness of obtaining a prize ball) is changed according to the number of lottery of special symbols executed in the latent state. More specifically, as the latent state, the most advantageous state (latent state A) in which the lottery of the second special symbol having a high probability of winning a small hit (for example, the probability of 59/60) is easily executed, There are two types of states: a state in which the probability of winning a small hit is low (for example, a probability of 1/5) and the degree of advantage is lower than the latent state A in which the lottery of the first special symbol is likely to be executed (latent state B). It was configured to be able to switch. As a result, even in an advantageous latent state in which the small hit game is likely to be executed, the degree of advantage can be further changed, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the 14th embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the 13th embodiment is that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the main control device 110 The configuration of the ROM 202 is partially changed, and other configurations are the same as the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the thirteenth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 347, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the 14th embodiment will be described. FIG. 347 is a front view of the game board 13 in the 14th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 347, the game board 13 in the 14th embodiment has an upper first entrance for the game board 13 with respect to the configuration (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13 in the 13th embodiment (and the first embodiment). Instead of 64b1 and the lower first ball entry port 64b2, a central first ball entry port 64c with a central electric accessory 64ca is provided. Instead of the second ball entry port 640, the distribution device 6400D The point where is provided, and the arrangement of the second variable winning device 650, which is opened when a big hit or a small hit of the first special symbol is made, is moved to the right side of the board, and a game fired by left-handed. The change is that the upper left side is blocked by multiple nails so that the ball is difficult to enter. The reason why the arrangement of the second variable winning device 650 was changed is that the small hit is won with a relatively high probability (probability of 1/5) by the lottery of the first special symbol, so the game state (submarine) in which the left-handed game should be performed. The purpose is to prevent the game ball from entering the second variable winning device 650 in a game state other than the probability state), which is advantageous to the player.

Like the electric accessory 64a in the thirteenth embodiment, the electric accessory 64ca attached to the central first ball entry port 64c is opened when it hits a normal symbol. Therefore, in the time-saving state or the probable change state in which the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set, the game ball can easily enter the central first entrance ball opening 64c, so that the holding ball is less likely to be consumed. Therefore, the game efficiency is improved in the time saving state and the probable change state, which is advantageous for the player.

The distribution device 6400D is configured to be able to distribute (enter) the entered game ball to either the first entry port 6400D1 or the second entry port 6400D2 provided inside. There is. The first ball entry port 6400D1 is configured as a ball entry port that triggers a lottery of the first special symbol, similarly to the central first ball entry port 64c. On the other hand, the second entry slot 6400D2 is configured as an entry slot that triggers a lottery for the second special symbol. Further, as shown in FIG. 347, the game ball that has entered is received inside the distribution device 6400D, and the received game ball is sent to either the first entry slot 6400D1 or the second entry slot 6400D2. A distribution member 6400Da is provided. The distribution member 6400Da is provided with receiving portions on the left and right sides thereof that can receive a ball flowing down from above. In the distribution member 6400Da, the receiving portion on the right side is located directly under the opening of the distribution device 6400D (the position where the game ball can enter), and the receiving portion on the left side is the opening of the distribution device 6400D. There are two possible arrangements, one that comes directly under. FIG. 347 illustrates an arrangement in which the right receiving portion is directly below the opening.

If the game ball that has entered the distribution device 6400D through the opening is received by the right receiving portion while the receiving portion on the right side is located directly below the opening, the game is played. As a result of the distribution member 6400a rotating clockwise around the shaft 6400Db due to the weight of the sphere, the receiving portion on the left side is arranged to be directly below the opening. Further, since the receiving portion on the right side is tilted in the lower right direction in the front view due to the rotation, the game ball rolls along the tilt and flows down in the lower right direction of the distribution member 6400Da. That is, it flows down in the direction of the second entry port 6400D2 and enters the second entry port 6400D2.

On the other hand, when the game ball that has entered the distribution device 6400D is received by the left side receiving part in a state where the receiving part on the left side is directly below the opening, the weight of the game ball is heavy. As a result, the distribution member 6400Da rotates counterclockwise with the shaft 6400Db as the rotation axis, and as a result, the receiving portion on the right side is arranged to be directly below the opening. Further, since the receiving portion on the left side is tilted in the lower left direction in the front view due to the rotation, the game ball rolls along the tilt and flows down in the lower left direction of the distribution member 6400Da. That is, it flows down in the direction of the first ball entry port 6400D1 and enters the first ball entry port 6400D1. Therefore, each time the game ball enters the distribution device 6400D, the ball can be alternately distributed to the first entry port 6400D1 and the second entry port 6400D2.

The details will be described later, but in the 14th embodiment, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol tends to be shorter in the latent state (the small hit of the first special symbol starts during the fluctuation of the second special symbol). By doing so, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol tends to be shorter (first) between the state (latent state B) in which the fluctuation of the second special symbol is likely to be forcibly stopped due to the deviation. Either a state (latent state A) in which a small hit of the second special symbol is started during the fluctuation of the special symbol, so that the event that the fluctuation of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped due to the deviation is likely to occur). The configuration is such that the state is set. That is, in the latent state, the lottery of the first special symbol that wins the small hit with a probability of 1/5 is mainly executed, and the lottery of the second special symbol that wins the small hit with the probability of 59/60 is mainly executed. The configuration is such that two types of states, the state to be executed and the state to be executed, are provided. Along with this, the variable display on the game board 13 is configured so that both the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed only by right-handing in the latent state. A distribution device 6400D capable of alternately distributing game balls to the first ball entry port 6400D1 and the second ball entry port 6400D2 is provided in the area on the right side of the device unit 80.

<Electrical configuration in the 14th embodiment>
Next, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 according to the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 348 to 352. Here, in the ROM 202 in the 14th embodiment, the configurations of the jackpot type selection table 202d, the variation pattern selection table 202f, and the variation pattern scenario table 202ka are partially changed from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 13th embodiment. It differs in that it is. Since other configurations are the same as the configurations of ROM 202 in the thirteenth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the details of the variation pattern scenario table 202ka in the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 348. As shown in FIG. 348, in the variation pattern scenario table 202ka in the 14th embodiment, when the previous jackpot type is jackpot A14 or G14, the number of lottery of special symbols is in the range of 1 to 99 times. Therefore, as the variation pattern selection table, the probability variation A table 202f21 is defined in association with each other. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 350, the probability variation A table 202f21 is one of the tables that can be referred to while the probability variation state of the special symbol is set, and this table is referred to in the latency state. And, while forming the most advantageous state in which the small hit game of the second special symbol is easily executed, when this table is referred to in the probabilistic state, the game efficiency is higher in the left-handed than in the right-handed. Form a relatively advantageous gaming state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 348, the normal table 202f23 is defined as a variable pattern selection table in association with the range in which the number of lottery of special symbols is 100 or more. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 352, but when the normal table 202f23 is referred to, a right-handed hit is executed in the normal state to form an extremely disadvantageous state in which the game efficiency is deteriorated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 348, when the previous jackpot type is any of the jackpots B14, D14, and F14, the probability variation B table is obtained for the range of the number of lottery of special symbols from 1 to 99 times. 202f22 is specified in association with each other. The probability change B table 202f22 is one of the tables that can be referred to while the probability change state of the special symbol is set, and when this table is referred to in the latent state, the small hit game of the first special symbol is made. On the other hand, when this table is referred to in the probabilistic state, the left-handed player forms a relatively advantageous gamed state in which the game efficiency is higher than that of the right-handed player. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 348, a normal table 202f23 (see FIG. 352) is defined as a variation pattern selection table in the range where the number of lottery of special symbols is 100 or more. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 348, when the previous jackpot type is jackpot C14, the probability variation B table 202f22 (see FIG. 351) corresponds to the range in which the number of lottery of special symbols is 1 to 24 times. It is specified by attaching it, and the probability variation A table 202f21 (see FIG. 350) is specified in association with the range of 25 to 99 times. The probability change B table 202f22 is one of the tables that can be referred to while the probability change state of the special symbol is set, and when this table is referred to in the latent state, the small hit game of the first special symbol is made. On the other hand, when this table is referred to in the probabilistic state, the left-handed player forms a relatively advantageous gamed state in which the game efficiency is higher than that of the right-handed player. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 348, a normal table 202f23 (see FIG. 352) is defined as a variation pattern selection table in the range where the number of lottery of special symbols is 100 or more. ..

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 348, when the previous jackpot type is a normal jackpot, the normal table 202f23 (see FIG. 352) is defined in association with each other regardless of the number of lottery of special symbols. There is.

As described above, in the 14th embodiment, the latent probability state is determined depending on whether the probability variation A table 202f21 is referred to or the probability variation B table 202f22 is referred to (that is, according to the previous jackpot type). The configuration is such that the degree of advantage in the case of becomes variable. That is, in the latent state, the small hit game based on the lottery of the first special symbol, which has a relatively low degree of advantage, is easily executed (latent state B), and the small hit game based on the lottery of the second special symbol. It is possible to form two types of states, a state that is easy to execute (latent state A) and a state that is easy to execute. Therefore, since it is possible to form more states in which the player has different degrees of advantage, the game can be diversified and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 349, the details of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the 14th embodiment will be described. FIG. 349 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d.

As shown in FIG. 349, in the 14th embodiment, five jackpot types of "big hit A14" to "big hit E14" are defined as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. Further, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, three jackpot types of "big hit F14" to "big hit H14" are defined.

As shown in FIG. 349, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4", while the jackpot type is "big hit A14". It is specified in association with each other. This "big hit A14" has 8 rounds of big hits, and is set to the most advantageous latent state A (the latent state in which the small hit game of the second special symbol is easily executed) after the end of the big hit. It is a big hit (8 round probability change big hit). Since the latent state A is the most advantageous gaming state, the "big hit A14" is the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of the gaming state after the end of the jackpot.

Further, as shown in FIG. 349, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "5 to 19" and "big hit B14" as the jackpot type. This "big hit B14" has 8 rounds of big hit, and when it is won in a game state other than the latent state, it is set to a relatively advantageous probable change state after the end of the big hit, while the latent state. This is a type of jackpot (8-round probability variation jackpot) that is set to the latent probability state B (an advantageous state in which the small hit game of the first special symbol is easily executed) after the jackpot ends. If the probability change state is set after the end of the "big hit B14", the latent state B is set until the probability change number (100 times) ends by elapsed (finished) the number of time reductions. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 349, "big hit C14" is defined as a big hit type in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "10 to 29". This "big hit C14" has 8 rounds of big hit, and when it is won in a game state other than the latent state, it is set to a relatively advantageous probable change state after the end of the big hit, while the latent state. This is a type of jackpot (8-round probability variable jackpot) that is set to the latent state A (the most advantageous state in which the small hit game of the second special symbol is easily executed) after the end of the jackpot. After the end of the "big hit C14", the special symbol lottery is executed 25 times, so that the latent state A shifts to the latent state B having a low degree of advantage (see FIG. 348). Further, when the probability change state is set after the end of the "big hit B14", the latent state B is set until the probability change number (100 times) is completed by elapsed (finished) the number of time reductions. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 349, "big hit D14" is defined as a big hit type in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "70 to 79". This "big hit D14" has 8 rounds of big hit, and when it is won in a game state other than the latent state, it is set to a relatively advantageous probabilistic state after the end of the big hit, while the latent state. This is a type of jackpot (8-round probability variation jackpot) that is set to the latent probability state B (advantageous state in which the small hit game of the first special symbol is easily executed) after the jackpot ends. When the probability change state is set after the end of the "big hit D14", the latent state B is set until the probability change number (100 times) is completed by elapsed (finished) the number of time reductions. .. Here, if the "big hit D14" is won in a game state other than the latent probability state, the number of probability changes is set to be smaller than that of the "big hit B14" and the "big hit C14", so that the transition to a more advantageous latent state is established. It is possible to give the player a strong sense of expectation for what to do. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 349, "big hit E14" is defined as a big hit type in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "80 to 99". This "big hit E14" is a type of big hit (8 rounds normal big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds and the time saving state is set to 100 times after the end of the big hit. Since the time saving state in the 14th embodiment is more disadvantageous than the probable change state, the "big hit E14" is the most disadvantageous jackpot among the jackpot types of the first special symbol.

On the other hand, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), "big hit F14" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the range of "0 to 4" in the value of the first hit type counter C2. ing. This "big hit F14" has 16 rounds of big hits, and when it is won in a gaming state other than the latent state, it is set to a relatively advantageous probable change state after the end of the big hit, while the latent state. This is a type of jackpot (16-round probability variable jackpot) that is set to the latent probability state B (an advantageous state in which the small hit game of the first special symbol is easily executed) after the jackpot ends. Since the probability change state set after the end of the "big hit F14" is set to 100 times as the number of time reductions, the probability change state of the special symbol ends at the same time as the end of the number of time reductions. Therefore, if the "big hit F14" is won in a gaming state other than the latent probability state, there is no possibility of shifting to an advantageous latent probability state. This is intended to suppress anomalous gaming methods in which right-handed strikes are performed in a gaming state other than the latent state.

Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "5 to 79" in association with "big hit G14" as the big hit type. This "big hit G14" has 16 rounds of big hits, and when it is won in a game state other than the latent state, it is set to a relatively advantageous probable change state after the end of the big hit, while the latent state. This is a type of jackpot (16-round probability variation jackpot) that is set to the latent state A (the most advantageous state in which the small hit game of the second special symbol is easily executed) after the end of the jackpot. Since the probability variation state set after the end of the "big hit G14" is set to 100 times as the number of time reductions, as with the "big hit F14", it is an irregular state in which a right-handed strike is performed in a gaming state other than the latent probability state. It is possible to suppress the game method.

Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "80 to 99" in association with "big hit H14" as the big hit type. This "big hit H14" has 16 rounds of big hits, and when the player wins in a game state other than the latent state, it is set to the most disadvantageous normal state after the big hit, while in the latent state. If you win, it is a type of jackpot (16 rounds normal jackpot) that is set to a time-saving state after the jackpot ends. In addition, when the "big hit H14" is won in a game state other than the latent state, the most disadvantageous normal state is set to suppress the irregular game method of hitting right in the game state other than the latent state. This is to plan.

Next, the details of the probabilistic A table 202f21 in the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 350. FIG. 350 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the probability variation A table 202f21. As shown in FIG. 350, the probability variation A table 202f21 defines the correspondence between the gaming state at the time of executing the special symbol lottery and the variable pattern that can be selected for each type of special symbol. More specifically, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 in the probabilistic state, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is shorter than when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more. Become. Further, in the latent probability state, only the long variation of the first special symbol is selected in the probable change state, as in the case where the holding ball of the second special symbol is 1 or more.

On the other hand, for the second special symbol, a long fluctuation of 600 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result in the probabilistic state, while a short fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds to 1 second is set in the latent state. Set. As a result, when the game ball continuously enters the distribution device 6400D by hitting right in the probable change state, the game ball is alternately distributed to the first entry port 6400D1 and the second entry port 6400D2. , The number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 1 or more, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol become long, and the game efficiency becomes extremely poor. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a right-handed strike is performed in a probabilistic state. On the other hand, if a right-handed ball is hit in the latent state, the ball enters the first ball opening 6400D1 and the second ball opening 6400D2 alternately. And the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in duplicate. However, as shown in FIG. 350, in the latent state, the long fluctuation of the first special symbol is set, while the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 1 second or less, so that the right-handed game is continued. By doing so, the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed more frequently than the lottery of the first special symbol. That is, it forms an advantageous state in which the second special symbol is continuously won only for small hits. Therefore, the latent state A that is most advantageous to the player is formed.

Next, the details of the probability variation B table 202f22 in the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 351. FIG. 351 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the probability variation B table 202f22. As shown in FIG. 351, the probability variation B table 202f22 is configured so that the variation pattern selected in the probability variation state is exactly the same as the probability variation A table 202f21 (see FIG. 350). As a result, when the game ball continuously enters the distribution device 6400D by hitting right in the probabilistic state in which the scenario in which the fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the probability change B table 202f22 is set, the probabilistic change is used. As in the case where the A table 202f21 is referred to, the game balls are alternately distributed to the first entry port 6400D1 and the second entry opening 6400D2, and as a result, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 1 or more. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol become long, and the game efficiency becomes extremely poor. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a right-handed strike is performed in a probabilistic state.

Further, in the latent state, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 1 second or less, while the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to a long fluctuation of 600 seconds regardless of the lottery result of the second special symbol. Will be done. As a result, when right-handed in the latent state, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol for 1 second or less and the long fluctuation of the second special symbol are executed in duplicate, so the right-handed game is continued. By doing so, the lottery of the first special symbol can be executed more frequently than the lottery of the second special symbol. That is, it forms an advantageous state (latent state B) in which only small hits of the first special symbol are continuously won. The probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is 1/5, whereas the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is 59/60. The frequency at which the small hit game is executed is lower than that in the latent state A. That is, the latent state B forms a state in which the degree of advantage is lower than that of the latent state A. Therefore, in the latent probability state, it is advantageous for the player that the variation pattern is determined by referring to the probability variation A table 202f21 (see FIG. 350).

Next, the details of the normal table 202f23 in the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 352. FIG. 352 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the normal table 202f23. As shown in FIG. 352, the normal table 202f23 is configured so that the same fluctuation time as the fluctuation pattern selected in the probability variation state is selected. That is, by executing the lottery of the first special symbol by left-handed, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time of 20 seconds or less is set, while in the normal state, the time saving state, and the probable change state, right-handedness is continued. As a result, the game balls are alternately distributed to the first entry port 6400D1 and the second entry opening 6400D2, and as a result, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 1 or more, and the first special symbol changes. The time and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol become long, and the game efficiency becomes extremely poor. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a right-handed strike is performed in a state other than the latent state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 343, a method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10 realized by performing control based on various tables defined in ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in RAM 203. explain. FIG. 341 is a diagram showing a method of transitioning the state of the pachinko machine 10 in the 14th embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 341, the pachinko machine 10 of the 14th embodiment is roughly divided into five states. That is, the normal state shown on the upper left side of FIG. 341, the time saving state shown on the upper right side of FIG. 341, the probabilistic state shown in the center of FIG. , And the latent probability state A shown on the lower right side of FIG. 341 are provided.

The normal state indicates a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol, and the probability of becoming a big hit is low (1/240), and the most unfavorable gaming state in which the electric accessory 64a is difficult to be released. To form. Further, the time saving state indicates a low probability state of a special symbol and a time saving state of a normal symbol, and although the probability of becoming a big hit is low (1/240), the electric accessory 64a is easily released, so the left. By hitting, a relatively advantageous gaming state is formed in which the game can be played without reducing the number of balls held. In addition, the probabilistic state indicates the probabilistic state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol, and the probability of becoming a big hit is high (1/80), and the electric accessory 64a is easily released, so that it is left-handed. By performing the above, a game state that is more advantageous than the time-saving state in which the game can be played without reducing the number of balls held is formed. Further, the latent state A and the latent state B indicate the probabilistic state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, and the probability of becoming a big hit is high (1/80), and the electric accessory 64a Is a game state that is difficult to open. In addition, in the latent probability state B, since the small hit game of the first special symbol is easily executed by hitting right, the second specific winning opening 650a where the game ball can be entered by hitting right is reached. A game ball is inserted relatively frequently (every time the lottery of the first special symbol is executed about 5 times) to form an advantageous state in which a prize ball can be obtained. On the other hand, in the latent state A, as described above, the small hit game of the second special symbol is easily executed by hitting right, so that the first specific prize can be entered by hitting right. It forms a state more advantageous than the latent state B in which a prize ball can be obtained by frequently entering the mouth 65a (almost every time the lottery of the second special symbol is executed).

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 341, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal state to another state only when a big hit occurs. Specifically, as shown on the upper left side of FIG. 341, when the jackpot A14, which is the jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 5% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), after the jackpot ends. It shifts to the most advantageous latent state A. In addition, if any of the jackpots B14 to D14, which is the jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 75% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), it will be in a relatively advantageous probability change state after the jackpot ends. Transition. Further, when the jackpot E14, which is the jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 20% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the time is shortened after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in the normal state, by winning the big hit, the state always shifts to an advantageous state as compared with the normal state, so that the game can be played with the expectation that the big hit will be achieved.

Further, as shown on the upper right side of FIG. 341, there is a possibility of shifting from the time saving state to another state not only when a big hit occurs but also when the number of time saving times is completed. Specifically, as shown on the upper right side of FIG. 341, when the jackpot A14, which is the jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 5% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), after the jackpot ends. It shifts to the most advantageous latent state A. In addition, if any of the jackpots B14 to D14, which is the jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 75% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), it will be in a relatively advantageous probability change state after the jackpot ends. Transition. Further, after the time saving state is set, the predetermined time saving number (100 times) elapses (ends), so that the normal state, which is the most disadvantageous for the player, is directly (without going through the jackpot). On the other hand, when the jackpot of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and the jackpot E14 determined at a rate of 20% as the jackpot type is determined, the time saving state is set again after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in the time saving state, when a big hit occurs, the game state shifts to a more advantageous gaming state, or at least the current gaming state (time saving state) is maintained, while the number of time saving times ends. If this happens, it will shift to a disadvantageous normal state, so it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the jackpot will be won before the time saving state ends.

Further, as shown in the center of FIG. 341, there is a possibility of shifting from the probabilistic state to another state when a big hit occurs or when a specified number of time reductions has passed. Specifically, as shown in the center of FIG. 341, when the jackpot E14, which is the jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 20% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the probability changes after the jackpot ends. It shifts to a time saving state that is more disadvantageous than the state. Further, when the jackpot A14, which is the jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 5% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the state shifts to the most advantageous latent state B after the jackpot ends. Furthermore, after the probabilistic change state is set, the specified number of time reductions (10 times, 25 times, or 50 times) is allowed to elapse, so that the player can directly enter the consecutive villa mode A (without a big hit), which is relatively advantageous for the player. To). On the other hand, when it becomes a jackpot of the first special symbol and any of the jackpots B14 to D14 determined at a rate of 75% as the jackpot type is determined, the probability change state is set again after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in the probabilistic state, the rate of transitioning to a more advantageous state in the case of a big hit is low (5% rate), while the end of the time saving state surely leads to a more advantageous latent state. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel playability that is more strongly expected to end the time saving state.

Further, as shown on the lower left side of FIG. 341, the latent probability state B shifts to another state not only when a big hit occurs but also when the specified probability change number (100 times after the end of the big hit) is completed. there is a possibility. Specifically, as shown on the lower left side of FIG. 341, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is selected (determined) and the jackpots A14 and C14, which are determined at a rate of 55% as the jackpot type, are selected (determined), the jackpot is selected. After the end, it shifts to the most advantageous latent state B. In addition, when the jackpot of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and the jackpot E14 determined at a rate of 20% is selected (determined) as the jackpot type, the time shift to a disadvantageous time saving state after the jackpot ends. Further, when the number of probable changes (100 times after the end of the big hit) is completed, the state shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state. On the other hand, when the jackpot B14 and D14, which are the jackpots of the first special symbol and are determined at a rate of 25% as the jackpot type, are selected (determined), the latent state B is set again after the jackpot ends. To. Therefore, in the latent probability state B, it is possible to realize the playability in which the jackpot is expected to be won before the probability change number ends and the state shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state.

Further, as shown on the lower right side of FIG. 341, the latent state A shifts to another state not only when a big hit occurs but also when the specified probability change number (100 times after the end of the big hit) is completed. there is a possibility. Specifically, as shown on the lower right side of FIG. 341, when the jackpot F14, which is the jackpot of the second special symbol and is determined at a rate of 5% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), after the jackpot ends. It shifts to the latent state A, which has a relatively low degree of advantage. In addition, when the jackpot H14, which is the jackpot of the second special symbol and is determined at a rate of 20% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), it shifts to a disadvantageous time saving state after the jackpot ends. Further, when the number of probable changes (100 times after the end of the big hit) is completed, the state shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state. On the other hand, when the jackpot of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and the jackpot G14 determined at a rate of 75% is selected (determined) as the jackpot type, the latent state A is set again after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in the latent state A, the most advantageous latent state A is highly probable by winning the jackpot before the probability change number ends and the transition to the most disadvantageous normal state ends. It forms a very advantageous gaming state that loops at a rate of 75%).

As described above, in the 14th embodiment, there are two types of games, a latent state A and a latent state B, as an advantageous state in which a prize ball can be obtained by a small hit game without going through a big hit. It was configured to provide a state. Both of these states are composed of latent probability states (probability change state of special symbol and normal state of normal symbol), and by making the fluctuation pattern scenario different, the lottery of the second special symbol with high small hit probability is biased. It is configured to form a latent state A that is executed (biasedly) and a latent state B that is executed biasedly (biased) to the lottery of the first special symbol having a low small hit probability. With this configuration, it is possible to realize different game characteristics (a game property in which more prize balls can be obtained and a game property in which it is difficult to obtain prize balls) in one latent state. It is possible to improve the interest of the person. Further, unlike the thirteenth embodiment described above, the latent state can be set as the most advantageous gaming state and the normal state can be formed as the most unfavorable gaming state. There is no need to make any difference in control between the state and the normal state that shifts through other gaming states. Therefore, the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In the 14th embodiment, the normal state is configured as the most disadvantageous gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as in the thirteenth embodiment, the normal state may be configured as one of the advantageous states in which the small hit game is easily executed. That is, in addition to the latent state A and the latent state B, the normal state may also be a state advantageous for the player. With such a configuration, the number of advantageous states increases, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the 14th embodiment, when the number of reserved balls of the 2nd special symbol is 1 or more in a state other than the latent state, a long variation is always set as the variation pattern of the 1st special symbol. It is not limited to this. For example, when switching from a right-handed game to a left-handed game, such as immediately after the end of a big hit or when the number of probable changes has elapsed in the latent state, the lottery of the first special symbol of a specific number of times (for example, 4 times) is performed. Even if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more, the long fluctuation may not be set (the fluctuation time of 20 seconds or less is set). That is, as a fluctuation pattern scenario, when the fluctuation display executed for the first time after the end of the jackpot or the 100th time after the end of the jackpot is the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the fluctuation pattern is not limited to the situation of the reserved ball. It may be configured to set a scenario in which a fluctuation time of 20 seconds or less is selected. Further, in this case, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is extremely short (for example, 0.1 seconds) within the range of 5 times or less after the end of the big hit and 100 to 105 times after the end of the big hit. You may. With this configuration, after the jackpot ends and before the variation display of the first first special symbol ends, the reserved ball of the second special symbol can be set to 0, so that the regular game method can be used. Despite this, it is possible to prevent both the first special symbol and the second special symbol from being in a disadvantageous state of undergoing long fluctuations.

In the 14th embodiment, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more in a state other than the latent state, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is lengthened, so that the state is other than the latent state. The configuration is such that the game efficiency is deteriorated when the right-handed game is performed in the game state, and the irregular game method in which the right-handed game is performed in a state other than the latent state is suppressed, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. For example, in a state other than the latent probability state, the first special symbol may be configured to perform a long fluctuation when the total number of reserved balls is 5 or more. When the regular game method (left-handed game) is performed in a state other than the latent state, only the reserved balls of the first special symbol are accumulated, so that the maximum number of reserved balls is four. On the other hand, if an irregular game method of hitting right in a game state other than the latent state is performed, the game ball enters the first ball opening 6400D1 and the second ball opening 6400D2 alternately, as a result. The number of reserved balls exceeds five. Therefore, by continuing right-handedness, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol form an extremely unfavorable gaming state in which long fluctuations occur. It is possible to suppress the method. At first glance, the number of reserved balls will be 4 or less by stopping right-handed when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started and restarting right-handed when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is completed. It seems that the method of playing the game by adjusting to is established. However, when this method is performed, as the number of lottery of the first special symbol increases, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol that undergoes long fluctuation regardless of the lottery result and the number of reserved balls increases, so that the first special symbol At the time when the lottery is performed four times, the number of reserved balls is almost four. Therefore, after that, the first special symbol also has a long fluctuation, which forms a disadvantageous state in which the game efficiency is remarkably poor. As a result, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a right-handed strike is performed in a state other than the latent state.

In the 14th embodiment, the probability of the first special symbol being a small hit is made higher than the probability of the first special symbol being a small hit, so that the lottery of the first special symbol is mainly executed. The probability state A, in which the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed, is configured to be more advantageous than the above, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to making the small hit probability different depending on the type of special symbol, for example, in the small hit of the first special symbol, in one small hit game than in the small hit of the second special symbol. By configuring so that the number of game balls that can be won is likely to decrease, the probability state A in which the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed may be configured to be more advantageous. .. In addition, instead of or in addition to these, the number of prize balls based on the entry into the second specific winning opening 650a, which is opened when the first special symbol is a small hit, is the second special symbol small hit. By reducing the number of prize balls based on the entry into the first specific winning opening 65a, which is opened in the case of, the latent state A in which the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed is more advantageous. It may be configured to be. By applying these modifications, the degree of advantage can be changed in a more multifaceted manner, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<15th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 354 to 359. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the probabilistic state (special symbol) is set by ending the time saving state in the state where the probabilistic state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set. In the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol (low probability state of the normal symbol) is set, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the gaming state during the jackpot fluctuation is the latent state. It was configured to be (an advantageous state in which a small hit game is easily executed). Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment described above, the number of time reductions is completed before the number of probability changes in the probability change state, so that the probability change state is changed to the latent state (an advantageous state in which the small hit game is easily executed). It was configured to migrate.

On the other hand, in the fifteenth embodiment, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the probable change state, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation, so that the number of time reductions is reduced. Was subtracted so that it is possible to shift to the latent state during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation. That is, it is configured so that it is possible to form an advantageous state in which the small hit game is easily executed even during the execution of the big hit fluctuation. Further, by adopting the same state transition as in the eleventh embodiment, the gaming state after the end of the big hit is more likely to be more advantageous in the latent probability state than in the probability change state. As a result, when the remaining time until the end of the big hit fluctuation is short (even if the small hit game becomes easy to be executed, the big hit game is started with almost no execution of the small hit game). Even if there is, it is possible to make the player think that he wants to finish the number of time reductions. Therefore, it is possible to realize the playability of positively executing the lottery of the second special symbol during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation.

The pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment in terms of configuration, that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and that the main control device 110 The point is that the configuration of ROM 202 has been partially changed. The eleventh implementation of other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the form. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the eleventh embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 354 and 355, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. 354 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 in the fifteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 354, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth embodiment has a right region (right-handed game) of the game board 13 with respect to the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment described above. The difference is that the composition of the area where the ball launched by the ball flows down) is different. Further, the difference is that the central first ball entry port 64c is provided in place of the upper first ball entry port 64b1 and the lower first ball entry port 64b2.

As shown in FIG. 354, a ball path ZK1 through which a game ball can flow down (pass) is formed in the right region of the game board 13, and a through gate 67 and a variable winning device 1650 are formed in order from the upstream side of the ball path ZK1. , A second entrance 640 to which the electric accessory 640a is attached, and a variable winning device for small hits 2650 which is opened during the small hit game are arranged. Further, above the second entrance 640, a right first entrance 64r is provided, which triggers a lottery for the first special symbol when a game ball enters. The first entry port 64r on the right of the game ball flowing down the ball path ZK1 is at a position where it is difficult for the game ball that has rolled along the ball path ZK1 to enter (interference with the ball path ZK1 and other game balls). ) Is provided at a position where the ball can enter only when the ball is played. Therefore, 90% or more of the game balls hit to the right enter the second entrance 640, or pass through the second entrance 640 to the small hit variable winning device 2650 or the out opening 66. Enter the ball. The ratio of game balls entering the right first entrance 64r is about 1 in 20.

The variable winning device 1650 arranged in the ball path ZK1 is a device that opens and closes according to a predetermined opening scenario when a big hit is won in a lottery of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). The opening / closing door 1650f is variable between the specific winning opening 1650a, the open state in which the ball can enter the specific winning opening 1650a, and the closed state in which it is more difficult (impossible) to enter the ball than the open state. And, every time one ball enters during the jackpot game, 15 balls are paid out as prize balls.

The second entry port 640 has an opening formed so as to cut out a part of the lower surface of the ball flow of the ball path ZK1, and each time one ball enters, one prize ball is used. The ball is configured to be paid out. Further, as in the first embodiment described above, it is configured to trigger a lottery (variation) of the second special symbol. The opening of the second ball entry port 640 is covered with the electric accessory 640a, and it is more difficult (not possible) to enter the electric accessory 640a in the open state in which the ball can enter and in the open state. By variably controlling the closed state to be possible), the ease of entering the ball can be made different.

In the state where the electric accessory 640a covers the opening of the second entry port 640 (closed state), the ball flowing down the ball path ZK1 passes over the electric accessory 640a and goes to the downstream side of the ball path ZK1. It is configured to flow down. That is, in the ball path ZK1, the game ball that flows down to the downstream side of the second entry port 640 is a game ball that did not enter (cannot) enter the second entry port 640.

Of the ball path ZK1, the ball flowing down on the downstream side of the second entrance 640 reaches the small hit variable winning device 2650. The small hit variable winning device 2650 is composed of a small hit winning opening 2650a and an opening / closing door 2650f for covering the opening of the small hit winning opening 2650a, and the small hit winning opening 2650a is a ball path. It has an opening formed so as to cut out a part of the lower surface of the ball flow of ZK1, and is configured so that 10 balls are paid out as prize balls each time one ball enters. ..

This variable winning device for small hits 2650 operates during a small hit game executed when a small hit is won in a special symbol (second special symbol) lottery, and the opening / closing door 2650f is predetermined. By opening the ball in the open scenario, the ball is variably controlled into an open state in which the ball can enter and a closed state in which the ball is more difficult (impossible) to enter than the open state. In the fifteenth embodiment, as in the eleventh embodiment described above, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, a small hit is won with a high probability (for example, 59/60). ..

In the closed state where the opening / closing door 2650f closes the small hit winning opening 2650a, the ball flowing down the ball path ZK1 passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 2650f and flows down toward the out opening 66. .. The upper surface (ball passage surface) of the opening / closing door 2650f is provided with a delay means for delaying the flow of the ball, and is configured to take one second for the ball to pass over the opening / closing door 2650f. .. By providing this delay means, it is possible to secure the required ball transit time in a smaller space. Although detailed description is omitted, in the fifteenth embodiment, as a delay means, the door is opened and closed so as to have a ball passage having a high friction resistance (friction coefficient) (higher friction resistance than the other ball passage surfaces of the ball path ZK1). An uneven portion on the upper surface of the door 2650f is formed so that the ball can get over it.

As the delay means, a ball delay passage (for example, a passage in which the ball path is zigzag-folded) is formed by devising the structure of the ball passage surface, or a ball delay passage is formed by devising the material of the ball passage surface. Anything can be used as long as it forms a shape or delays the passage time for the sphere to pass through a predetermined section.

Further, a ball launched by a left-handed game (a game aimed at the left area (left area) of the variable display device unit 80) enters each winning opening (ball entry opening) provided in the above-mentioned ball path ZK1. Nails are planted below the game board 13 (below the first ball entrance 64 and to the right) as a regulating member (regulating means) for regulating the spillage. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with different games for the right-handed game and the left-handed game, so that it is possible to provide the player with a game that does not get tired (hard to get tired). ..

Next, the details of the ball flow in the right region in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 355. FIG. 355 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a ball flow in a state in which a time saving state or a probable change state is set as a game state, and FIG. 355 (b) is a schematic diagram in which a latent probable state is set as a game state. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the ball flow in the state which is being done.

The ball path ZK1 of the game board 13 of the fifteenth embodiment has a ball passing time from the through gate 67 to the second entry port 640 (until the ball passing through the through gate 67 reaches the second entry port 640). The time required) is configured to be 0.5 seconds. Further, the ball passing time on the electric accessory 640a covering the second entry port 640 (the time required for the ball to pass (flow) from the upstream end to the downstream end of the electric accessory 640a) is set to 1 second. is doing.

Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the fifteenth embodiment, when the high probability state (time saving state, probability variation state) of the normal symbol is set as the gaming state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.1 seconds. It is configured to set a time of about 0.4 seconds, that is, a time shorter than the ball passing time from the through gate 67 to the second entry port 640. Further, when a winner is won by a lottery of ordinary symbols, the opening operation of 0.2 seconds is executed twice with a closing period of 0.8 seconds. That is, it is configured to execute an opening operation in which a closing period shorter than the time (1 second) for the ball to pass over the electric accessory 640a is set.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 355 (a), when the right-handed game is played when the time saving state is set as the game state, most of the balls enter the second entrance 640. Further, in the fifteenth embodiment, since the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set in less than half of the ball passing time (0.5 seconds) from the through gate 67 to the second entry port 640, the normal symbol is set. Even if one lottery is held in which the result of the lottery is out of order, by winning the next lottery, the ball that caused the out-of-lottery can be entered into the second entrance 640. can.

On the other hand, when the low probability state (normal state, latent state) of the normal symbol is set as the game state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 3 to 5 seconds, that is, from the through gate 67 to the second entrance. It is configured so that a time longer than the ball passing time (0.5 seconds) up to 640 is set. Further, if a winner is won by a lottery of ordinary symbols, the opening operation for 0.04 seconds is executed once. That is, the ball is configured to be able to enter the second entry port 640 for only 0.04 seconds for a period of 3 to 5 seconds.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 355 (b), when the right-handed game is played when the latent state is set as the game state, most of the balls do not enter the second entrance 640. The ball will flow down toward the small hit winning device 2650. In the fifteenth embodiment, the time for the ball to pass on the electric accessory 640a is set to 1 second, and the ball is set to be fired once every 0.6 seconds. Therefore, by continuously performing the right-handed game, one ball is configured to always stay on the electric accessory 640a.

With this configuration, if a winner is won in the lottery of the normal symbol, the ball can be surely entered into the second entrance 640 and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the lottery of the second special symbol is not executed in the gaming state (probability change state, time saving state, latent probability state) in which the hitting game is executed. As described above, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, a small hit is won with a high probability, so in the latent state, the game ball is entered into the second entrance 640 at intervals of 3 to 5 seconds. It is possible to obtain a prize ball by inserting a game ball into the small hit winning device 2650. That is, the small hit game is frequently executed by the lottery of the second special symbol, and the prize ball based on the small hit is frequently obtained, forming an advantageous state. On the other hand, in the time-saving state or the probable change state, almost all the game balls hit to the right enter the second entrance 640 (or the right first entrance 64r), so that the small hit game is frequently executed. However, it becomes extremely difficult for the game ball to reach the small hit winning device 2650 during the execution period of the small hit game. Therefore, in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the game ball can only be efficiently entered into the second entry port 640 (or the right first entry opening 64r), and thus the submarine state is reached. The degree of advantage is lower than the probability state (it becomes difficult to win the prize ball).

Next, with reference to FIG. 356, various operations when a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol during the probabilistic state, which is a characteristic operation in the fifteenth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 356 is a timing chart schematically showing the game state of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth embodiment and the content of the variation display effect executed in response to the variation status of each special symbol. Here, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment will be briefly described. Similar to each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a variable display (dynamic display) for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol and a variable display for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol. (Dynamic display) and can be executed at the same time (in parallel).

As shown in FIG. 356, the chance zone display (see FIG. 297 (b)) is set as the effect mode in the probabilistic state. Also, during the probabilistic state, as described above, most of the game balls launched by right-handed hitting enter the second entrance 640, and rarely (for example, at a rate of 1 in 20) to the right. Enter the ball into the first entry port 64r. Therefore, during the probability change state, the number of time reductions is basically subtracted by executing the lottery of the second special symbol. In addition, if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol during the probability change state, the probability change state is looped at a rate of about 75% and the time is shortened at a rate of 20%, as in the eleventh embodiment described above. It is configured to transition (fall) to. In other words, even if a big hit occurs in the probable change state, it is unlikely that the state will shift to an advantageous latent probable state. You can have them play the game with a stronger expectation. Even if the game ball enters the right first entry slot 64r and the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, the small hit will not be won, but in the probable change state, as described above. Since it is extremely difficult to insert the game ball into the small hit winning device 2650, the variation of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol are executed in duplicate (simultaneously), thereby shortening the time. It is possible to give the player the impression that the number of times can be subtracted more. Therefore, in the probabilistic state, the more the game ball enters the right first entry port 64r, the more the player can have the impression that the player is approaching the latent state. It is possible to improve the interest in.

Then, in a state in which a probabilistic state (high probability state of a special symbol, high probability state of a normal symbol) is set, when the number of time reductions ends, as described above, the state shifts to a more advantageous latent state and frequently. The small hit game of the second special symbol is executed, and a very advantageous state is formed in which the game ball can be easily won by the small hit winning device 2650. In the latent state, when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, the player will not win a small hit, so the player will have the impression that the remaining number of probability changes is unnecessarily subtracted once. It can be subtracted. Therefore, in the probabilistic state, it is possible to realize the playability that the game ball is expected to enter the right first entrance 64r more, whereas in the latent state, the right first entrance 64r can be realized. It is possible to realize the playability that makes it expected that the game ball does not enter. That is, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the role of the right first ball entry port 64r (whether or not the ball entry port is preferable or not) can be switched according to the game state. ..

Further, in the fifteenth embodiment, by making the opening control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 different for each game state, the variation display of the second special symbol can be displayed even in the time saving state or the probable change state. It was mainly configured to be executed. That is, even if the lottery of the first special symbol is executed without setting the long variation of the second special symbol in the time saving state or the probable change state as in the eleventh embodiment described above, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. Even if it is done, it is configured so that a relatively short fluctuation time is set. As a result, in the probabilistic state, the playability aiming at the most advantageous latent state is realized by digesting the number of time reductions by the lottery of the second special symbol. By adopting this configuration, it is possible to realize the playability of digesting the time saving number of times of the second special symbol during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 356, in the state where the probabilistic state is set as the game state, it is easy to execute the lottery of the second special symbol by the right-handed game, and the rate is relatively low (for example, the fired game ball). At a rate of 1/20), the lottery for the first special symbol will also be executed. That is, in the probabilistic state, since the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the electric accessory 640a is easily opened, the game ball is easily entered into the second entrance 640, and a small hit. It forms a gaming state in which it becomes difficult for the gaming ball to enter the winning device 2650. In this probable change state, if the lottery of the first special symbol becomes a big hit, as shown in FIG. 356, during the big hit change, only the lottery of the second special symbol is executed by right-handed. In the fifteenth embodiment, if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol in the probable change state, a long fluctuation of 600 seconds is executed. During the big hit change in this probable change state, the change display of the first special symbol is interrupted every time a small hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol. As a result, it is possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol a plurality of times during the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, during the execution of the jackpot variation of the first special symbol, it is possible to execute the variation display of the second special symbol for the remaining number of time reductions. In this case, since the jackpot of the first special symbol is changing (the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is on), the lottery of the second special symbol does not win the jackpot more than once (the lottery result is missed or It will be a small hit). Therefore, while the long fluctuation of the first special symbol is being executed, there is no possibility that the lottery of the second special symbol will result in a big hit and a probable change state or a time saving state will be set. This makes it possible to reliably subtract the number of time reductions each time the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, which is an extremely advantageous state. In addition, as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, 90% or more is set to the fluctuation time of 1 second, so by continuously executing right-handed during the long fluctuation of the first special symbol, the long fluctuation Regardless of the number of time reductions at the start of, it is possible to end the number of time reductions during long fluctuations. During the execution of the jackpot fluctuation (long fluctuation) of the first special symbol, the super chance zone effect (see FIG. 357) described later is executed. That is, by executing the right-handed strike and ending the time reduction number of times, the effect mode for showing the transition to the advantageous latent state is executed.

As shown in FIG. 356, during the execution of the super chance zone effect (that is, during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol in the probabilistic state), the lottery of the second special symbol is performed until the number of time reductions elapses (ends). When executed, the gaming state is changed from the probabilistic state to the latent state. That is, the state in which it is difficult to reach the game ball to the small hit winning device 2650 shifts to the state in which it is easy to reach the small hit winning device 2650. Therefore, until the big hit is started, it is possible to enjoy the advantageous game in which the small hit game can be frequently won and the prize ball based on the prize in the small hit winning device 2650 can be obtained. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. After shifting to the latent state, the RUSH effect (see FIG. 7B) is executed as in the first embodiment and the like. Further, by starting the jackpot after the latent state is reached, the gaming state (number of time reductions) after the jackpot ends can be set with reference to the latent state. In other words, it is possible to treat as a jackpot winner in a latent state where the rate of looping the same state is high (at a rate of 75%, the latent state is set again after the big hit ends), so the end of the big hit. It can be configured so that there is a high possibility that the latent state will continue even afterwards. Therefore, when the super chance zone production is started, the player's interest in the game can be improved. If you get a big hit in the lottery of the 2nd special symbol, it is difficult to enter the right 1st entrance 64r even if you hit right, and the fluctuation time of the big hit fluctuation of the 2nd special symbol is also Because it is short, it is difficult to digest the remaining number of time reductions by the lottery of the first special symbol. Therefore, during the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol, the normal jackpot effect is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 357, a characteristic effect in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. First, the super-chance zone effect will be described with reference to FIG. 357 (a). This super chance zone effect is an effect executed during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol in the probable change state. When this super chance zone effect is executed, the character 811 discovers the carrot images NG1 to NG3 that imitate the carrot, and at the same time, "Discover the carrot !! Eat up!" For the display area HR1. Is displayed. Further, the characters "remaining 15 lines" are displayed on the display area HR2. Further, the characters "Entering the super chance zone !!" are displayed for the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, it is possible to easily understand that the character 811 is more advantageous to the player by eating up all the carrots shown in the carrot image. In the fifteenth embodiment, after the super chance zone effect is started, the effect that the character 811 eats one carrot is executed every time the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. This makes it easy for the player to understand that the remaining number of time reductions and the remaining number of carrots are linked (synchronized). In other words, it is easy to understand that by eating all the carrots, you will move to a latent state. Therefore, it is possible to realize a staging mode that is easy for the player to understand.

In the probabilistic state, if the character 811 can eat the carrot (the number of time reductions has ended) before the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol ends, as shown in FIG. 357, the display area HR1 However, the characters "Completed !! RUSH start !!" are displayed, and the characters "0 remaining" are displayed for the display area HR2. In addition, the characters "RUSH rush !!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the player has entered (shifted) into the most advantageous latent state (RUSH state).

In the fifteenth embodiment, as a super chance zone effect, the character 811 eats one carrot for each change, so that the remaining number of lottery until the latent state is reached can be suggested. However, it is not limited to this. The embodiment is not limited to this embodiment as long as it can suggest the remaining number of times. For example, as in the twelfth embodiment, the remaining number of time reductions is suggested by the height of climbing the rocky mountain (the remaining distance to the summit). It may be configured to be used.

In the fifteenth embodiment, as the super-chance zone effect, an effect suggesting the remaining number of lottery until the end of the time saving number is executed, but instead of or in addition to this, the first special symbol It may be configured to execute an effect (for example, a countdown display of the remaining time) suggesting the remaining time until the jackpot fluctuation ends. By constructing in this way, it is possible to play the right-handed game more seriously in an attempt to end the time reduction number before the suggested remaining time elapses, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. Can be made to.

<Electrical configuration in the fifteenth embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 358 and 359. First, the details of the second random number table 202c in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 358. As shown in FIG. 358, in the second hit random number table 202c in the fifteenth embodiment, the random number value (counter value) determined to be a hit of the normal symbol in the low probability state of the normal symbol is "0 to 230". 230 random number values (counter values) are specified. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 358, 231 random number values (counter values) of "0 to 231" are defined as random number values (counter values) determined to be hits of the normal symbol in the time saving state of the normal symbol. There is.

That is, in the fifteenth embodiment, both in the time saving state of the normal symbol and in the normal state of the normal symbol, each time the through gate 67 is passed, the normal symbol is almost hit. As a result, regardless of whether the right-handed game is played in the time-saving state or the probable change state, or the right-handed game is performed in the latent probable state, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened to the second. It is possible to form a state in which the ball can enter the ball entry port 640. As described above, in the time saving state and the probabilistic state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol becomes short and the opening time becomes long, while in the latent state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol becomes long and the opening time becomes short. .. As a result, almost all the game balls that have reached the second entrance 640 can be entered into the second entrance 640 in the time saving state or the probability change state. On the other hand, in the latent state, the game ball easily passes through the second ball opening 640 while the second ball opening 640 is closed, so that the game ball enters the small hit winning device 2650. It becomes easier to do. Therefore, it is possible to form a state that is more advantageous to the player than the time saving state or the probable change state.

Next, the time saving / probability variation table 202f2 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 359 (a). FIG. 359 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time saving / probability variation table 202f2. As shown in FIG. 359 (a), when the time saving / probability variation table 202f2 in the fifteenth embodiment becomes a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is long per 600 seconds regardless of the value of the variable type counter CS1. While the fluctuation is set, if the lottery of the first special symbol is missed, the deviation middle fluctuation for 10 seconds is set. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 359 (a), as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol, a relatively short fluctuation pattern of 1 second to 20 seconds is defined in association with each other. As a result, if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol in the probable change state, it is possible to continuously execute only the lottery of the second special symbol by continuing right-handed striking. Therefore, by continuously hitting the right in the probable change state, the lottery of the second special symbol can be performed at relatively short intervals, and the number of time reductions can be exhausted. Therefore, it is possible to easily shift to the most advantageous latent state during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation.

Next, the latent probability table 202f3 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 359 (b). FIG. 359 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the latency table 202f3. As shown in FIG. 359 (b), in the latent probability table 202f3 in the fifteenth embodiment, a long fluctuation of 600 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol regardless of the lottery result, while the second As the fluctuation time of the special symbol, a relatively short fluctuation time of 20 seconds or less is specified. Therefore, it forms a more advantageous gaming state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is more likely to be executed than in the latent probability state or the probability change state. That is, since only the small hit game of the second special symbol is executed and the chances of entering the small hit winning device 2650 increase, the right until the probability variation number ends or the big hit is reached. Form a game state in which it is possible to continue to acquire a large number of prize balls by hitting.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment, by performing a right-handed strike in the probabilistic state and the time-saving state, the second game ball is suppressed from reaching the small hit winning device 2650. The board surface configuration and the control of the electric accessory 640a in the time-saving state are configured so that the lottery of the special symbol can be easily executed. On the other hand, in the latent state, by hitting right, the game ball is configured to form an advantageous game state in which the game ball enters the second entrance 640 and the small hit winning device 2650 in a well-balanced manner. .. That is, in the game state other than the normal state, the game ball is configured to proceed with the game mainly by executing the lottery of the second special symbol, and the game ball is connected to the small hit winning device 2650 in the state other than the latent state. It is configured to prevent the ball from entering. With such a configuration, in a game state other than the normal state, it is possible to realize an easy-to-understand game property in which the game progresses by lottery of the second special symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth embodiment, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the probable change state, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation, thereby shortening the time. The number of times is subtracted so that it is possible to shift to the latent state during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation. That is, it is configured so that it is possible to form an advantageous state in which the small hit game is easily executed even during the execution of the big hit fluctuation. Furthermore, by configuring it so that it is possible to digest the time saving state and shift to the latent state during the execution of the big hit fluctuation, when the big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, it becomes the latent state. It becomes easy to start the jackpot from. That is, since the gaming state after the end of the big hit can be set with reference to the latent state, it can be configured so that the latent state is likely to be continued even after the end of the big hit. .. As a result, regardless of the remaining number of times in the time saving state, we have realized extremely special and novel playability that continues right-handed even during the jackpot fluctuation with the aim of ending the time saving number during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol. can do. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the fifteenth embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern selection table (time reduction / probability variation table 202f2) common to the time reduction state and the probability variation state, but the configuration is not limited to this. do not have. For example, in the case of a time saving state, the fluctuation time may be shortened when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol. This is because there is no merit for the player even if the number of time reductions is exhausted in the time reduction state.

In the fifteenth embodiment, when a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol in the probable change state, only a long fluctuation of 600 seconds is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an arbitrary fluctuation time is set. You may. The shorter the fluctuation time, the higher the possibility that the jackpot will start before the number of time reductions is completed even if the lottery of the second special symbol is continuously executed during the probability change state. When the jackpot fluctuation of the symbol is executed (when the super chance zone production is started), the game can be played with a feeling of tension. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. On the other hand, the longer the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the easier it is to end the number of time reductions during the jackpot fluctuation, so when the super chance zone is started, it gives a sense of security. You can play games. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Modified example of the eleventh embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the eleventh embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIG. 360. In the eleventh embodiment described above, the river breakthrough effect (see FIGS. 298 and 299) is executed every time the number of times of time reduction reaches the number of lottery that may elapse (end). In addition to this, in this modified example, the river breakthrough effect is configured to be executed as an effect suggesting that the jackpot was won during the chance zone (the time saving state of the normal symbol). In addition, at the start of the river breakthrough effect, the privilege (reward) that can be given to the player when the river is broken through is notified in advance. As a result, it is possible to give the player a wider sense of expectation.

First, with reference to FIG. 360 (a), a display mode at the start of the river breakthrough effect in this modified example will be described. FIG. 360 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the river breakthrough effect executed at the number of lottery times where the number of time reductions may end. As shown in FIG. 360 (a), in the river breakthrough effect in this modified example, the privilege (reward) given to the player when the river is breached in the current river breakthrough effect is displayed for the display area HR1. It is configured to be. The example of FIG. 360 (a) illustrates a case where it is notified that RUSH will be given as a privilege (shift to a latent state) by successfully breaking through the river. That is, it indicates a state in which the characters "reaching the first river !! RUSH by breaking through! Ending by falling ..." are displayed for the display area HR1. From this display content, it is possible to make the player understand that the player will enter the RUSH by breaking through the river, so that the player can be made to pay more attention to the result of the river breakthrough effect. In addition to the example of FIG. 360 (a), for example, the suggestion content of "continue by breaking through! End by falling ..." and the suggestion content of "big hit by breaking through! End by falling ..." are provided. There is. In this way, by giving variation to the suggestion content, it is possible to make the player's expectation for the river breakthrough effect different according to the suggestion content. For example, in the case of the display content of "RUSH by breaking through! Ending by falling ...", there is a big difference in the degree of advantage between the case of breaking through and the case of falling, so it is expected to break through more strongly. Can be done. In addition, if the display content is "Big hit with breakthrough! End with fall ...", either the big hit happened by chance or the number of time reductions ends at the timing when the number of time reductions may end. Therefore, it can be made to feel that the possibility of being a big hit is low. Therefore, even if the time saving state ends, the shock can be alleviated. Further, by executing the effect of breaking through the river in this display mode, it is possible to give a great surprise and joy to the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In this modification, as described above, the river breakthrough effect can be executed even at the timing when the time saving state is unlikely to end. That is, it is configured so that the river breakthrough effect is executed in the case of a big hit and a part of the case of the off (for example, 1/100 in the case of the off). The display mode in this case will be described with reference to FIG. 360 (b). FIG. 360 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode in the river breakthrough effect performed in a part of the case of a big hit and the case of a miss. As shown in FIG. 360 (b), when there is no possibility that the number of time reductions will end, the river image KG in a form thinner than the normal river breakthrough effect is displayed. In addition, the characters "Ogawa found !! If you jump over, big hit or continue !!" are displayed for the display area HR1. From these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the breakthrough of the river itself is confirmed. In the case of a big hit, the big hit is notified when the river breaks through, while in the case of a miss, the continuation is notified.

As described above, in this modification, even if a big hit occurs during the chance zone, the big hit is notified by the river breakthrough effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give a sense of unity to the production in the chance zone. Therefore, it is possible to realize a staging mode that is easier for the player to understand. Further, in this modification, at the start of the river breakthrough effect, the privilege (reward) given when the river is broken through is notified in advance. With this configuration, the player's expectation for the river breakthrough effect can be changed according to the content of the privilege, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

At the start of the river breakthrough effect executed in the case of a big hit or a miss, the big hit type in the case of a big hit and the number of time reductions set after the big hit may be suggested. More specifically, for example, four characters, white, green, and red, are provided as the character color of "big hit". In the case of white, the possibility of a normal big hit is high, and in the case of green, the possibility of a probable big hit. If it is high and red, it may be configured so that it is a probable change jackpot and the possibility of a small number of time reductions (0 or 10 times) is high (that is, it is easy to shift to a latent state). With this configuration, when green characters or red characters are displayed, it is possible to play the game with a stronger expectation that a big hit will be notified, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. be able to.

<16th Embodiment>
Next, the 16th embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 361 to 423. The same elements as those of the above-described embodiments will be repeatedly described for convenience of explanation. Further, for convenience of explanation, the contents described in each of the above-described embodiments may be duplicated with different reference numerals. Specifically, in each of the above-described embodiments, each control process is described by adding an S reference numeral, but in the present embodiment, the C reference numeral is attached to the description, and the same process can also be described. , Give a different number and explain again. The contents described in each of the above-described embodiments are applied to the parts where detailed explanations of the same elements as those described in the above-described embodiments are omitted.

In the gaming machine of the 16th embodiment, a jackpot game (design jackpot game) is executed by winning a jackpot by a special symbol lottery as an opportunity to execute a privilege game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player. A small hit is won by the opportunity (first opportunity) and a lottery of a special symbol, and the game ball is opened in a specific area (open operation during the small hit game) in the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 361). The jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed based on the passage through the V region (not shown) provided in the above (second trigger), and the jackpot game has two triggers.

With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a jackpot game at various occasions, so that it is possible to provide a game with improved game playability. Further, in the 16th embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is configured so as to be easier to win a small hit than the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). Then, during the time saving state, which is a game state that can be set after the end of the big hit game, the lottery of the special figure 2 is easily executed. As a result, when the time saving state is set, the jackpot game can be more easily executed than when the normal state is set. That is, the lottery of the special figure 1 is mainly executed in the normal state, whereas the lottery of the special figure 2 is mainly executed in the time saving state, so that the above-mentioned second opportunity can be easily established. .. Therefore, since the time saving state can be set to the gaming state which is advantageous to the player, the player can be enthusiastically played with the aim of setting the time saving state.

In addition, in the 16th embodiment, in the state where the normal state is set, the period in which the lottery of the special figure 2 is likely to be executed can be temporarily displayed. A detailed explanation will be described later with reference to FIG. 361, but when a specific hit (long open hit) is won by a normal symbol lottery in a normal state, the electric accessory 640a is used for a long period of time (1.5 seconds). It is configured to be open, and a period during which the ball can easily enter the second entrance (winning opening) 640, which is the trigger for executing the special drawing 2 lottery, is set. As a result, the player who is playing the game in the normal state can also execute the special figure 2 lottery, so that the game can be played without executing the special figure 2 lottery (without shifting to the time saving state). It is possible to suppress getting bored with.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the continuation condition (end condition) of the time saving state set after the end of the big hit game, at least the first condition (for example, the special figure 2 variation is executed 5 times during the time saving state, or the small hit game is performed. End) and the second condition (for example, the cumulative total of special figure 1 fluctuation and special figure 2 fluctuation) during the time saving state, which is easier to continue (difficult to end) than the first condition. It is configured so that it can be set to execute once or end the small hit game). Then, there are cases where the V jackpot game is executed based on the special figure 2 lottery executed in the normal state and cases where the V jackpot game is executed based on the special figure 2 lottery executed in the time saving state. The setting ratio of the continuation condition (end condition) of the state is different. Specifically, after the end of the V jackpot game executed based on the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state is more than after the end of the V jackpot game executed based on the special figure 2 lottery in the time saving state. , It is configured so that the continuation condition (end condition) that the time saving state is easy to continue (difficult to end) can be easily set.

With this configuration, the player can be interested not only in the lottery result of the special symbol (special symbol) but also in the game state when the special symbol lottery is executed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, in the 16th embodiment, as described above, a gaming state (normal state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the time saving state is set, as compared with the case where the gaming state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set. Is configured so that it is easier to set a time saving state that is easier to continue after the end of the V jackpot game. Therefore, the player can be enthusiastically played the game regardless of whether the normal state is set or the time saving state is set.

In addition, in the 16th embodiment, a maximum of 4 prize information of the 2nd special symbol (Special Figure 2) can be stored and stored, and the lottery result of the final change of the special figure 2 in the time saving state is shown. It is configured to notify the player of the pre-reading result of the winning information of the special figure 2 which is held and stored by using the variation effect. That is, as a result of the effect of the variation effect executed during the time saving state, in addition to the lottery result of the special figure variation, the special figure 2 lottery executed after the gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state (to the normal state). It is configured to notify the result of the lottery for the winning information of the special figure 2 which is held and stored at the time of the transition. With this configuration, if the effect result of the variable effect is an effect result indicating that a hit (for example, a small hit) has been won, whether the small hit winner this time was won in a short time state or a normal state. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether or not the player has won.

Further, as described above, in the 16th embodiment, the big hit game (V big hit game) executed via the small hit game in the case where the small hit is won in the time saving state and the case where the small hit is won in the normal state. The ease of continuing the time saving state set after the end of) is different. Specifically, the special figure in the normal state is better when the small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery. 2 It is configured so that the continuation condition (end condition) that the time saving state is easy to continue (difficult to end) is easier to set than the case of winning a small hit in the lottery, and further, after shifting to the normal state. When the pre-reading result corresponding to the special figure 2 lottery to be executed is the determination result that the small hit in which the time saving state is easy to continue is won, in the variation effect showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 final change in the time saving state. , The look-ahead result (the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 lottery executed after shifting from the time saving state to the normal state) is configured to be notified.

With this configuration, when it is notified that a small hit has been won by the fluctuation effect executed during the time saving state, the ratio of the winning small hit is the small hit that the time saving state is likely to continue. Can be enhanced. Here, in recent gaming machines (for example, pachinko machine 10), a ratio in which a gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, a time saving state or a probable change state) is set after the jackpot game is completed in order to improve the soundness of the game. By setting the (so-called continuation rate) low (for example, 65% or less), the gambling of the game may be suppressed. In such a gaming machine, for example, even if a hit (for example, a big hit or a small hit) is won in a state where an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is set, the advantageous gaming state is again set after the winning game is completed. Since the set ratio is suppressed, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to give a sense of expectation to the hit notification effect during the advantageous gaming state.

On the other hand, in the 16th embodiment, in the hit notification effect (variable effect) executed during the advantageous gaming state (time saving state), the winning (small hit) is won during the advantageous gaming state (time saving state). In addition to the notification of, in the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 lottery executed after shifting from the advantageous gaming state (time saving state) to the disadvantageous gaming state (normal state), if the small hit that the time saving state is easy to continue is won in advance. It is also configured to notify when it is determined. As a result, it is possible to increase the winning ratio of small hits in which the time saving state is likely to continue when the hit notification effect is executed during the advantageous gaming state (time saving state), and the player's expectation for the hit notification effect during the advantageous gaming state. You can enhance the feeling.

Further, in the 16th embodiment, the final variation of the time saving state (special figure 2 variation) or the special figure 2 variation executed after the end of the time saving state (after the transition to the normal state) (residual feature existing at the time of transition to the normal state). It is configured to execute a variation effect that makes it difficult for the player to understand which of the special figure 2 variations corresponding to the hold in FIG. 2) was won. Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the 16th embodiment, in addition to the lottery result of the fluctuation, after the end of the time saving state (after the transition to the normal state) by the fluctuation effect executed corresponding to the final fluctuation period of the time saving state. It is configured to notify the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 fluctuation (the special figure 2 fluctuation corresponding to the remaining special figure 2 hold that exists at the time of transition to the normal state), and after the end of the time saving state (after the transition to the normal state). The fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation to be executed (the special figure 2 fluctuation corresponding to the remaining special figure 2 hold existing at the time of transition to the normal state) is set to a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the short-time fluctuation ends. Up to, it is configured to display the effect result of the variation effect executed corresponding to the final variation period in the time saving state. In this way, the final change in the time saving state and the special figure 2 change executed after the end of the time saving state (after the transition to the normal state) (the special figure 2 change corresponding to the remaining special figure 2 hold existing at the time of the transition to the normal state). By executing a series of effects using the period during which, and displaying the effect results of the series of effects across multiple variations, this series of effects corresponds to which special figure variation. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the result of the special drawing lottery is notified.

First, the configuration of the game board 13 in the 16th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 361. An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 12) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 361) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 361) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 361) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable change jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or an off symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors suggests various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

The first winning opening 64 is arranged below the variable display unit 80. The variable display unit 80 is arranged so as to divide the game area on the game board 13 to the left and right, and the left side of the variable display unit 80 is the left flow path through which the game ball can flow down, and the right side of the variable display unit 80 is the game. A right flow path through which the sphere can flow is formed. The game ball that has flowed down the left channel is configured so as not to flow down the right channel. The first winning opening 64 is arranged at a position where both the game ball flowing down the left channel and the game ball flowing down the right channel can enter.

The second winning opening 640 is arranged at a position where the game ball flowing down the right flow path is easier to enter than the game ball flowing down the left flow path. The second winning opening 640 has a horizontally long rectangular opening formed in the game board 13, and a flow path through which the game ball can flow down is formed in the opening, and the ball enters the opening. A photo sensor for detecting a game ball is provided. An electric accessory 640a is attached to the front side of the opening as a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate capable of closing the opening, and the opening / closing drive is driven to the front side with the variable opening / closing plate as an axis. It is equipped with an open port solenoid (not shown). The opening of the second winning opening 640 is normally closed so that the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win. When the normal symbol (second symbol) hits, the opening solenoid is driven to tilt the electric accessory 640a downward in the front, and the open state where the ball easily wins in the opening of the second winning opening 640 is temporarily held. It operates so as to repeat the open state and the normally closed state a predetermined number of times determined by the gaming state.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R time reduction (99 times) jackpot (big hit AA) and 7R time reduction set corresponding to the first special symbol that is variablely displayed when the first winning opening 64 is won. (5 times) jackpot (big hit AB) and 7R time reduction (1 time) jackpot (big hit AC) are available. In addition, the 15R time reduction (99 times) jackpot (big hit AD) and the 12R time reduction (99 times) jackpot (big hit AE) that are set corresponding to the second special symbol that is variablely displayed when the second winning opening 640 is won. ), 7R time saving (99 times) jackpot (big hit AF) is prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, "15R time reduction (99 times) jackpot (big hit AA)" means that the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is changed 99 times after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, 99 times. During the period until the second fluctuation is stopped, the lottery probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) shifts to the high probability state, and the time-saving gaming state in which the short fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is easily selected is set. It's a big hit. "7R time reduction (5 times) jackpot (big hit AB)" means that the special symbol (1st special symbol or 2nd special symbol) is changed 5 times after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 7 rounds, and the 5th fluctuation. A big hit in which the lottery probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) shifts to the high probability state and the short fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is easily selected in the short game state until the stop. Is. In addition, in "7R time reduction (1 time) jackpot (big hit AC)", the lottery probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is the period from the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 7 rounds until the 5th fluctuation stops. It is a big hit that shifts to a high probability state and sets a time-saving gaming state in which a short fluctuation time of a normal symbol (second symbol) is easily selected.

During the reduced working hours (during the reduced working hours game state), not only the probability of hitting the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, as compared with the normal time. A long time is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the time reduction, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, during the time reduction, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric accessory 640a per hit. You may make a change to increase the number of times that is opened more than usual. Further, during the time reduction, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and at least the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and the number of times when the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit. One may be changed. In addition, during the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times for opening the electric accessory 640a per hit are not performed, and only the probability of winning the second symbol is calculated. , It may be changed so that it is up compared to the normal time.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is triggered by the winning (starting winning) of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and the variation of the third symbol is synchronized with the variation display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The second symbol is variablely displayed triggered by the passage of a ball of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") for displaying and a normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs is provided. Further, in the variable display unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 12), for example, the upper, middle, and lower three. Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device 83 includes a symbol of "○" and a symbol of "x" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. Is to be displayed in a variable manner by alternately lighting the above for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in operation (open) only.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the time reduction than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the time reduction, the winning lottery (the number of variation display of the second symbol) can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, during the time reduction, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second prize opening 640. When a ball enters the second winning opening 640, four balls are paid out to the player as prize balls on the upper plate 17, so that the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640. , The game can be played while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held by the player, and the investment for lending additional balls can be suppressed, while the lottery of special symbols can be performed in a short period of time. ..

It should be noted that, during the time reduction, the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 during the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a for each hit. In the case of, the time required for the variation display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, and the electric function for one hit may be set. The opening time and the number of opening times of the object 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board in the areas of the left side flow path and the right side flow path of the variable display unit 80, respectively, and among the balls fired on the game board, the left side and the right side of the game board. It is configured so that a part of the ball flowing down and can pass through. When the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is not correct. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is suspended up to a total of 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol reservation lamp. It is also lit and displayed (not shown). Four second symbol hold lamps are provided for the maximum number of hold lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4 times, but is set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You may. Further, the number of assembly of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 12), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A. In the present embodiment, the prize ball is not paid out when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, but the prize ball is not limited to this, and for example, a predetermined number of balls such as one ball is used. It may be configured to pay out the prize ball.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which four balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second prize opening 640 may be configured as five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state, making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the electric accessory is displayed. The 640a is in an open state, and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

As described above, during the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. Therefore, the symbol "○" in the variation display of the second symbol is displayed. Is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal time. Therefore, during the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is easier to win in the second winning opening 640 than in the normal time.

In the 16th embodiment, a through gate 67 through which a ball can pass is formed in a middle course portion (left side of the variable display unit 80) in the left game area. As a result, the lottery of the normal symbol (normal diagram) is executed even while the player is performing the game (left-handed game) in which the ball is made to flow down to the left game area. Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the present embodiment, if a specific normal symbol is won while the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) is set as the gaming state, It is configured so that a game per game in which a ball can be easily entered into the second winning opening 640 is executed.

In this way, by configuring the period (state) in which the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640 during the normal state can be provided, the special figure 2 lottery is used without shifting the gaming state to the time saving state. It is possible to provide a player with a game property, that is, a game property in which a big hit game is executed based on a small hit winning. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player who has been playing the game in the normal state for a long time from getting tired of the game without experiencing the game performance using the special figure 2 lottery.

In addition, as a game in the normal state, a game aiming for a big hit in a lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) executed based on the winning of the ball to the first winning opening 64, and a ball to the through gate 67. Since it is possible to simultaneously execute the game aiming at the big hit by the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) based on the passage of the above, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the normal state.

It should be noted that the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot, a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 (lottery corresponding to the second special symbol) and becomes a jackpot (big hit AD, jackpot AE, jackpot AF). In this case, the game state in which the time reduction is 99 times (a high probability state of the normal symbol is set until the special symbol is changed 99 times) is given at a rate of 100% as the game state after the jackpot game is completed. Is set. Then, when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 (it becomes a big hit in the lottery corresponding to the first special symbol), the big hit to which the time-saving game state of 99 times is given is the big hit AA (big hit). It is configured so that the jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 is selected. With this configuration, in the normal gaming state (a state in which the time reduction is not given in the low probability gaming state), the ball is easier to win in the first winning opening 64 than in the second winning opening 640. A jackpot (big hit AA) in which the number of fluctuations of 99 special symbols (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol) is given as a condition for ending the time-saving gaming state by winning a game ball in 1 winning opening 64 If the selected ratio is set low and the time reduction is given and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640, if a big hit is made with the second special symbol, the time reduction state is easily continued. Can be configured as follows. Therefore, it is possible to increase the value of being given a time saving.

In the 16th embodiment, a through gate 67, a second winning opening 640 (electric accessory 640a), a variable winning device 65, and a V winning device 650 are arranged in the right game area, and a lottery of ordinary symbols (normal figures) is provided. The game in which the game is performed, the game in which the second special symbol (special figure 2) is drawn, and the game in which the winning game (big hit game, small hit game) is performed can be executed by a right-handed game. There is. This eliminates the need for the player to change the firing direction of the ball (direction of the left game area, direction of the right game area) during the period in which the game in the time-saving state, the small hit game, and the big hit game are repeatedly executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from being complicatedly changed in the firing direction and to play the game comfortably. Further, in the 16th embodiment, when a gaming state (time saving state, small hit gaming state, big hit gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than when the normal state is set as the gaming state is set. In addition, since it is configured to perform a right-handed game, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the player is in an advantageous state during the right-handed game.

The V winning device 650 is a winning device that is opened when a small hit game is executed, and can be changed into an open state in which a ball can win in the V winning opening 650a and a closed state in which it is difficult to win. It has a winning door 650b. The V winning door 650b is configured so that a ball flow path is formed on the upper surface of the V winning door 650b when it is located in the closed state, and is fired by a right-handed game while the V winning device 650 is in the closed state. The ball is configured to flow down the upper surface of the V winning door 650b toward the variable winning device 65. In addition, a specific area (V area) (not shown) is provided inside the V winning opening 650a, and the ball winning the V winning opening 650a during the small hit game (including the ball handling period after the small hit game is completed). Is configured to execute a jackpot game when the player passes through a specific area (V area).

Since the configuration of the specific area (V area) provided in the V winning device 650 is a well-known and general technique in the art, detailed description thereof will be omitted, but for example, in the V winning device 650. A plurality of flow paths through which the sphere can pass may be provided so that only the sphere that has passed through the specific flow path can pass through the specific region (V region), or the sphere flowing down in the V winning device 650 may be configured. A distribution member that distributes the flow direction, for example, a distribution member that is constantly driven according to a predetermined rule from the time the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, or a distribution member that is constantly driven according to a predetermined rule after the jackpot game is started. A member or a distribution member that is constantly driven according to a predetermined rule after the start of a specific number of round games of the jackpot game is provided, and the ball distributed by the distribution member passes through the specific area (V area). If this is the case, the jackpot game may be executed.

Further, a plurality of types of small hit games to be executed when a small hit is won are provided. For example, a small hit game in which a ball easily passes through a specific area (V area) in the V winning device 650 during the small hit game. A small hit type to be executed and a small hit type in which a small hit game in which a ball is difficult to pass through a specific area (V area) may be executed may be configured to be configurable. In this case, the opening pattern of the V winning door 650b is different depending on the type of the winning small hit, and when the small hit game in which the ball is difficult to pass through the specific area (V area) is executed, the V winning opening 650a is executed. The opening pattern of the V winning door 650b, which makes it difficult for the ball to enter, is set, or the ball is distributed to other than the specific area (V area) by the distribution member provided in the V winning device 650. The opening pattern of the V winning door 650b may be set so that the ball reaches the distribution member at the timing. In addition, as a small hit game executed based on the small hit winning, a small hit game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened to operate instead of the V winning device 650 is configured to be configurable, and the small hit game is executed. In that case, it may be configured so that the sphere cannot physically pass through the specific area (V area) in the V winning device 650.

The variable winning device 65 is a winning device that is opened during a big hit game, and has a winning door 65b that can be changed into an open state in which a ball is easy to win in a specific winning opening 65a and a closed state in which it is difficult to win a ball. Have. The winning door 65b is configured so that a ball flow path is formed on the upper surface of the winning door 65b when it is located in the closed state, and the ball fired by the right-handed game while the variable winning device 65 is in the closed state. Is configured to flow down the upper surface of the winning door 65b toward the out port 66.

<About the game characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 in the 16th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 362, the game characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment will be described. FIG. 362 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of the game of the 16th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 362, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment, the gaming state is a normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) and a time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, It is configured so that one of the high-probability states of ordinary symbols) is set.

Then, if a left-handed game is performed during the normal state and a big hit is won (big hit probability 1/250) in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the time saving state is always set after the big hit game is completed. Here, the setting contents of the time saving state set when the special figure 1 jackpot is won during the normal state will be described. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 381, but if the special figure 1 jackpot is won during the normal state, one of the three jackpot types is set, and each jackpot type is set. Different time saving end conditions are specified. The time reduction end condition is a condition for ending the time reduction state, and when the time reduction end condition is satisfied, the game state shifts from the time reduction state to the normal state.

When the special figure 1 jackpot is won in the normal state, the number of changes of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the number of changes of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are 99 times as shown in FIG. 362. The jackpot type (big hit AA) for which the time saving end condition is satisfied is set at a rate of 1%, and the time saving ending condition is set when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special figure 2) reaches 5 times. The jackpot type (big hit AB) that holds is set at a rate of 15%, and the jackpot type (big hit AC) that satisfies the time saving end condition when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special figure 2) reaches one. It is configured to be set at a rate of 84%. In other words, if the special figure 1 jackpot is won during the normal state, the time saving state is always set after the jackpot game ends, but it is easy to continue the time saving state according to the set jackpot type (time saving end). Conditions) are different.

Although the details will be described later, in the 16th embodiment, since it is configured so that a maximum of 4 winning information of the special figure 2 can be held and stored, one time saving is set as a time saving end condition. Even if this is the case, the time saving state is set while the first special figure 2 fluctuation is being executed (until the first special figure 2 fluctuation is stopped), and the electric accessory 640a is easily released. Since it is in a state, it is possible to easily store the winning information of the special figure 2 on hold. Therefore, even if the time saving end condition of one time saving is set, the winning information of the special figure 2 (holding of the special figure 2) is stored on hold during the period in which the special figure 2 fluctuation in the time saving state is executed once. By performing the game to make the player perform the special figure 2 fluctuation after shifting from the time saving state to the normal state, it is possible to execute the special figure 2 fluctuation up to four times. With such a configuration, when a big hit is won, a large number of special figure 2 lottery can be executed, so that it is easy for the player to experience the big hit game via the small hit winning.

On the other hand, if a special small hit is won (small hit probability 1/500) in the special figure 1 lottery during the normal state, the ball is executed by passing through a specific area (V area) during the small hit game. After the jackpot game is over, the time saving state is always set. Specifically, the small hit type () in which the time saving end condition is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special figure 2) reach 99 times. The small hit type (small hit AB) is set at a rate of 10%, and the time saving end condition is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special figure 2) reaches 5 times. The small hit type (small hit AC) that satisfies the time saving end condition when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special figure 2) reaches one is set at a ratio of 50%. It is configured in.

As described above, in the 16th embodiment, when the jackpot is won (when the symbol jackpot is won) by the special figure 1 lottery executed in the state where the normal state is set, the small hit is won. The end of the big hit game regardless of whether the ball passes through a specific area and the big hit game is executed (V big hit) or the big hit game is executed during the small hit game. It is configured so that the time saving state is set later, and even if it is a big hit game executed based on the special figure 1 lottery, the ease of continuing the time saving state is made different depending on the execution opportunity of the big hit game. There is. As described above, among the execution opportunities of the big hit game, in the case of the execution opportunity that is easy to be established (the big hit winning by the special figure 1 lottery), the average number of continuations of the time saving state set after the end of the big hit game is 2.58 times. In the case of an execution opportunity that is difficult to be established (small hit winning by special figure 1 lottery), the average number of continuations of the time saving state set after the end of the big hit game is 12.4 times.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of execution triggers for the jackpot game, by associating the ease of establishing the execution trigger with the ease of continuing the advantageous gaming state (time saving state) that can be set after the establishment. Even if the jackpot game is executed by the execution opportunity of, the player can have a sense of expectation.

In the 16th embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 361, the lottery of the normal symbol (normal figure) is executed even while the left-handed game in the normal state is being executed. , It is configured so that there is a 1/10 chance of winning a prize. Then, a game per game (game per long opening) that opens the electric accessory 640a for a long period of time (1.5 seconds) is configured to be executed at a rate of 1/100 of the case where the player wins the game. There is. That is, a state (game per long opening) in which the special figure 2 lottery can be executed is set with a probability of about 1/1000 of the normal figure lottery executed while the normal state is set.

When a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 during the game per long opening, the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state is executed. Here, the flow of the game when a big hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state will be described with reference to FIG. 362. In the 16th embodiment, the probability of winning a big hit is set to be the same (1/250) in the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery. If the jackpot is won in the special figure 2 lottery, the time is shortened when the number of changes in the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the number of changes in the second special symbol (special figure 2) reach 99 times. Any of the jackpot types (big hit AD to AF) for which the end condition is satisfied is set (see FIG. 381). That is, in the normal state, of the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery having the same jackpot probability, it is difficult to establish the execution opportunity of the special figure lottery (it is difficult to win the ball in the corresponding start winning opening). Is configured so that it is easier to set a time saving state in which it is difficult to satisfy the time saving end condition after the end of the big hit game. With this configuration, when a winning game is won by the regular drawing lottery and the long open winning game is executed (1/1000), the player can be enthusiastically executed the special drawing 2 lottery. can.

Next, the flow of the game when a small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state will be described. In this embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the special figure 2 lottery (about 1 / 7.1) is higher than the probability of winning a small hit in the special figure 1 lottery (1/500). It is configured (see FIG. 380). Then, after the end of the big hit game executed by the ball passing through the specific area (V area) during the small hit game, the time saving state is always set. Specifically, the small hit type () in which the time saving end condition is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special figure 2) reach 99 times. The small hit AD) is set at a rate of 40%, and the small hit type (small hit AE) that satisfies the time saving end condition when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special figure 2) reaches 5 is 60%. It is configured to be set at the ratio of. That is, in the normal state, the average number of continuations in the time-saving state set via the small hit of the special figure 2 lottery is 42.6 times, and the big hit game is executed via the small hit of the special figure 1 lottery in the normal state. It becomes easier to set a time saving state in which the time saving end condition is hard to be satisfied (easy to continue).

In this way, in the game in the normal state, although there is a low probability, if the game is won by the regular drawing lottery and the long open winning game is executed (1/1000), the big hit is won by the special drawing lottery. By configuring it so that it is easy to set a time saving state that is advantageous to the player, the player who is playing in the normal state is allowed to play a game aiming for a big hit or a small hit in the special figure 1 lottery. With the winning of the figure lottery as an opportunity, it is possible to play a game aiming at a big hit or a small hit in the special figure 2 lottery.

Further, as shown in FIG. 361, a position where a ball launched into the game area (a ball flowing down the left game area) can pass when a left-handed game is performed in order to win a ball in the first winning opening 64. Since the through gate 67 is arranged in the above, a game in which the special figure 1 lottery is performed and a game in which the normal figure lottery is performed without changing the firing direction of the ball for the player who is playing in the normal state. Can be done in parallel.

In addition, in this embodiment, the more the jackpot game is executed at the opportunity that is difficult to be established, the easier it is to set the time saving state that is advantageous to the player. It may be configured so that it is easier to set a time saving state that is advantageous to the player when the big hit game is executed in, or a specific predetermined opportunity (for example, a small hit winning in the special figure 1 lottery) may be set. ) May be configured so that when the jackpot game is executed, it is easy to set a time saving state that is advantageous to the player.

When the ball does not pass through the specific area (V area) during the above-mentioned small hit game (small hit game executed when the small hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery or the special figure 2 lottery). (In the case of non-V winning), the normal state is set after the small hit game is completed (corresponding to the flow shown by the dotted line in FIG. 361). As a result, it is possible to prevent an excessive privilege from being given to a player who plays an illegal game in which the ball is not intentionally entered into a specific area (V area) while the small hit game is being executed. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 362, the flow of the game when the time saving state is set will be described. In the present embodiment, when the time saving state is set, the electric accessory 640a is easily released, and the ball is easily won in the second winning opening 640. Therefore, a right-handed game in which the special figure 2 lottery is mainly executed is executed. To.

This time saving state is configured to continue until a predetermined time saving end condition is satisfied, and to shift to a normal state when the time saving end condition is satisfied. This time saving end condition is configured so that different conditions are set according to the big hit type set for the big hit won in the special drawing lottery or the small hit type set for the winning small hit. There is. Specifically, regardless of which hit type (big hit type, small hit type) is set, the common time-saving end condition set as a common condition and the correspondence in which different conditions are set according to the hit type. The time reduction end condition is stipulated, and the common time reduction end condition includes the first end condition that is satisfied at the time of winning the big hit (at the start of the big hit game), the second end condition that is satisfied at the end of the small hit game, and the time reduction. The third end condition that is satisfied when the number of special symbol (special figure) changes executed during the state (cumulative number of special figure 1 changes and special figure 2 changes) reaches 99 is set. Corresponding time-saving end conditions include a short-term end condition that is satisfied when the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 2 that is executed during the time-saving state is one, and a middle-end condition that is satisfied when the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 2 is five. Conditions are set according to the hit type.

As described above, the corresponding time saving end condition exists at the time when the time saving state is set, for example, because the ending condition is set based on the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 mainly changed during the time saving state. Even if the special figure 1 change is executed during the time saving state based on the hold storage of the special figure 1 change, the corresponding time saving end condition is not satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the time saving state from ending without executing the special figure 2 lottery even though the time saving state advantageous to the player is set. Further, since the response time reduction end condition is satisfied based on the number of special figure 2 fluctuations, the number of special figure 2 fluctuations executed during the time reduction state can be easily specified, and the player can play. It is possible to suppress the provision of excessive benefits (special figure 2 lottery).

In the 16th embodiment, the common time saving end condition and the corresponding time saving end condition can be set as the time saving end condition with the above-mentioned contents, but the setting contents are not limited to those of the present embodiment. For example, in the 16th embodiment, as the end condition for the small hit game defined as the common time saving end condition, the end condition is set when the number of times the small hit game is executed becomes a specific number of times (for example, 3 times). It may be configured to be satisfied, or the end condition related to the small hit game may be set as the corresponding time saving end condition, and the number of executions of the small hit game in which the end condition related to the small hit game is satisfied may be different depending on the hit type. It may be configured. Further, in the present embodiment, regardless of the small hit type set at the time of winning the small hit, the second end condition is satisfied when the small hit game is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the second end condition may be satisfied when the small hit game corresponding to a specific small hit type is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the second end condition is satisfied when the small hit game is completed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second end condition is satisfied at the start of the small hit game (when the small hit is won). May be configured so that is satisfied.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing when the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the small hit winning in the time saving state, so that the player can feel nervous about how long the time saving state will continue. You can play a game.

Returning to FIG. 362, the flow of the game during the time saving state will be described. If a big hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery during the time saving state, the number of changes of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the number of changes of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are the same as in the normal state. One of the jackpot types (big hit AD to AF) in which the time saving end condition is satisfied when the number reaches 99 times is set (see FIG. 381). That is, only the common time-saving end condition is set as the time-saving end condition.

On the other hand, if a small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery during the time saving state, after the big hit game executed via the small hit winning is completed, in addition to the above-mentioned common time saving end condition, the small hit type is selected. The time saving state in which the corresponding time saving end condition is set is set. Specifically, a small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery during the time saving state, and after the big hit game executed via the small hit winning is completed, the special figure 2 changes as a response time saving end condition at a rate of 10%. The number of times is set to 5 times, and the response time reduction end condition is not set at a rate of 90% (actually 99 times are set).

As described above, in the 16th embodiment, the setting ratio of the end condition (time reduction end condition) of the time saving state set after the end of the big hit game based on the small hit winning of the special figure 2 lottery is set to the game state at the time of the small hit winning. It is more difficult to establish the time saving end condition if you win the small hit in the special figure 2 lottery during the normal state than if you win the small hit in the special figure 2 lottery during the time saving state. (The time saving end condition is not set) It is configured so that the time saving state can be easily set.

With this configuration, for example, a small hit is won by the special figure 2 lottery that is stored on hold when the time saving state, which is an advantageous gaming state that makes it easy to execute the special figure 2 lottery, ends and the normal state is entered. By doing so, it becomes easy to set a time saving state that is advantageous to the player, so that it is possible to enthusiastically play the game in order to acquire a large amount of the reserved memory of the special figure 2 until just before the time saving state ends.

Although a detailed description will be described later, in the present embodiment, the variation effect (final variation effect) executed in response to the final variation in the time reduction state (special figure 2 variation in which the corresponding time reduction end condition is satisfied) is used. In addition to the variable lottery result, the pre-reading result of the winning information of the special figure 2 stored on hold is also notified. With this configuration, it is possible to notify the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery up to 5 times as the effect result of the final variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to set the probability that the winning (small hit winning, big hit winning) will be notified as the effect result of the final variable effect higher than the variable effect that notifies only the lottery result of one special figure 2 lottery. This makes it possible for the player to pay close attention to the content of the production.

In addition, since the lottery results (including the look-ahead result) of the special figure 2 lottery in the time saving state and the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state are notified at once, the winning is won by this final fluctuation production. When is notified, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the winning special figure 2 lottery is the special figure 2 lottery in the time saving state or the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state. With this configuration, as in the present embodiment, when the time saving end condition is set at a different ratio according to the game state at the time of the small hit winning, the big hit executed based on the current small hit winning. It is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping what kind of time reduction state is set after the end of the game by the effect mode (effect timing) of the variable effect.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a short-time (0.5 second) fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation executed after the transition from the time-reduced state to the normal state. As the variation effect of the short-time variation, the effect result of the final variation effect described above is displayed. As a result, even if the final variation effect executed in response to the final variation in the time-saving state is configured to notify the pre-reading result of the winning information of the special figure 2 stored on hold, the pre-reading result is the target. The final variation effect can be continuously displayed until the variation of the special figure 2 is completed. Then, when the special figure 2 fluctuation corresponding to the special figure 2 remaining hold after the end of the time saving state (the special figure 2 change in the normal state) is completed (when the special figure 2 hold storage number becomes 0), the special figure 1 lottery is performed. A left-handed game aimed at execution is performed.

As described above, in the 16th embodiment, even when the normal state is set, the predetermined condition is satisfied (by winning the long opening in the general drawing lottery). The special figure 2 lottery is configured to be able to be executed, and the special figure 2 lottery is configured so that the probability of winning a small hit is higher than that of the special figure 1 lottery. As a result, in the normal state, it is possible to have the player perform a game in which the special figure 1 lottery is executed in parallel with the game in which the special figure 1 lottery is executed by aiming at the first winning opening 64. Can be improved.

<About the flow of production in the 16th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 363 to 377, the characteristic effect contents executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment, when the normal state is set, the variation effect corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1 is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. If a long open hit is won in the pachinko lottery during the execution of the special figure 1 fluctuation, the pachinko variation effect is displayed so as to interrupt the variation effect of the special figure 1 variation. Has been done.

Here, in the Fuzu fluctuation production, a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 after a game per Fuzu (opening of the electric accessory 640a) from the start timing of the Fuzu fluctuation, and the winning ball is dealt with. Special Figure 2 A small hit is won due to fluctuations, and it is executed as part of a series of effects using the period until the big hit game is executed based on the small hit winning.

Here, in recent years, the electric accessory 640a is opened for a long period of time (for example, for 1.5 seconds) during a normal state (low probability state of a special symbol, low probability state of a normal symbol). There is a method in which the lottery contents of the general drawing lottery are set so that the winner can be won, and the special drawing lottery (for example, the special drawing 2 lottery) which is temporarily advantageous in the normal state is executed. In such a gaming machine, a player who has been playing a game in a normal state for a long period of time can be made to execute an advantageous special drawing lottery, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, in such a gaming machine, the result of the normal map lottery is executed by the time when the normal map fluctuation effect for showing the lottery result of the normal map fluctuation is executed and the winning game per long opening is executed for the player. An effect that can provide the enjoyment of predicting There is also.

However, in recent gaming machines that perform only the normal map variation effect that can notify the player that the winning game per long opening is executed, the variation effect of the special figure 2 lottery acquired by the winning game and the above-mentioned The special figure 2 lottery was executed because the privilege given to the player by the winning game per long opening, that is, the winning game per long opening was executed, which is not related to the normal drawing fluctuation effect. There was a problem that it was not possible to inform the fact in an easy-to-understand manner, and it was not possible to enhance the effect of the normal map fluctuation effect.

On the other hand, in the 16th embodiment, a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 after a game per game (opening of the electric accessory 640a) from the start timing of the fluctuation of the normal figure, and the winning ball is used. It is configured to execute a series of effects by using the period until the big hit game is executed based on the small hit winning by the corresponding special figure 2 fluctuation. As a result, by executing a series of effects, the flow of the game until the jackpot game is executed can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner based on the lottery result of the general drawing lottery, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. can.

Here, in the case of executing the above-mentioned series of effects, when the ball is won in the second winning opening 640 during the hit game per long opening of the normal figure, that is, while the electric accessory 640a is open for a long period of time. In addition, there arises a problem that the timing at which the special figure 2 fluctuation based on the prize is started differs greatly depending on the fluctuation state of the special figure 1 fluctuation. Specifically, for example, when the special figure 1 fluctuation is being executed at the time when the ball is won in the second winning opening 640, and the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation is 120 seconds. , The period (waiting period) from when the ball is won in the second winning opening 640 to when the special figure 2 fluctuation is started is 120 seconds. If a series of productions are continuously executed in such a situation, there is a problem that the production mode of the series of productions is delayed and the player gets tired of the productions.

In response to such a problem, in the 16th embodiment, when the above-mentioned waiting period is 60 seconds or more, the series of effects is pseudo-finished and then the series of effects is simulated again. It is configured so that the aspect is set. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the production mode of the series of effects is delayed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 363, the flow of the variation effect related to the special map variation and the variation effect related to the normal map variation executed in the normal state will be described. FIG. 363 (a) shows a flow of the effect executed when the waiting period from when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 to when the special figure 2 fluctuation starts is less than a predetermined period (less than 60 seconds). 363 (b) is a timing chart showing that the waiting period from when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 to when the special figure 2 fluctuation starts is a predetermined period or more (60 seconds or more). It is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect executed in the case.

As shown in FIG. 363 (a), the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed until the variation corresponding to the long opening of the normal map (long opening variation) is executed by the fluctuation of the normal map. A variation effect (special 1 effect) corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1 is executed using the entire surface of. Here, with reference to FIG. 365 (a), the display screen of the variation effect corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1 will be described. FIG. 365 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a variation effect (special diagram 1 variation effect) corresponding to the special figure 1 variation. As shown in FIG. 365 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is vertically partitioned between the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds, and is formed in the upper right of the front view in the main display area Dm. Small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are formed (on the upper right side when viewed from the center of the main display area Dm). The small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are areas in which identification information (fourth symbol) for showing the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is in progress (changing) and the lottery result) is displayed. The fourth symbol (special figure 1 fourth symbol) for showing the lottery status of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is displayed in the small display area Dm1, and the lottery status of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is displayed. The fourth symbol (special figure 2 fourth symbol) for indicating the above is configured to be displayed in the small display area Dm2.

By providing the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 in this way, the lottery status of the special symbol can be displayed. Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is shown in a display mode using numbers, and the fourth symbol is variablely displayed in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (FIG. 365). In (a), it is displayed by a downward arrow) to indicate the situation where the special symbol is fluctuating, and by stopping and displaying the fourth symbol in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (see FIG. 368 (a)). ), It is configured to show the lottery result of the special symbol, but the figure is not limited to this, and for example, the figure can be displayed by using a display mode imitating the figure as the fourth symbol or a display mode showing a plurality of colors. It is configured to show the lottery result of the special symbol by showing that the special symbol is changed depending on the display mode to be deformed or the display mode to change the color, and by stopping and displaying the display mode showing the specific symbol or color. You may.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is in progress (changing) and the lottery result), but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be configured to notify only whether or not the special symbol is in the lottery (changing). Further, as shown in FIG. 365 (a), in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol display area (small display areas Dm1, Dm2) in which the fourth symbol for showing the lottery status of the special symbol is displayed is mainly displayed. An example of forming the fourth symbol display area on the upper right side of the area Dm is shown, but the position and size of the fourth symbol display area are determined according to the effect mode of the variable effect executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm. You may make it different.

Specifically, in the variation effect executed using the entire surface of the main display area Dm, it is possible to understand whether the variation effect being executed corresponds to the special figure 1 variation or the special figure 2 variation. When an effect mode for making it difficult is set, it is preferable to change the fourth symbol display area (small display areas Dm1 and Dm2) so that the player cannot easily see them. Further, for example, by switching the position of the display area of the fourth symbol corresponding to each special symbol or displaying only one of the display areas, the player sees the display mode of the fourth symbol display area. It may be configured so that the type of the special symbol being executed cannot be easily determined only by itself. With this configuration, the type of special symbol currently being executed is grasped by the display mode of the fourth symbol display area, and the effect of the variable effect executed in the main display area Dm is reduced. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

As described above, although it is notified that the special symbol is changed depending on the display mode of the fourth symbol display area corresponding to the period in which the special symbol (special symbol) is fluctuating, the fluctuating special symbol When the variable display is configured so that the type is difficult to determine, the result of the corresponding special figure variation (lottery) and the special figure type can be notified by the stop display mode after the variation display is completed. For example, when the red stop display mode is displayed as the display mode (stop display mode) of the fourth symbol displayed as a stop display, the fourth symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 (special 1 fourth). When the blue stop display mode is displayed in the symbol), it may be configured to notify that it is the fourth symbol (special 2 fourth symbol) corresponding to the special figure 2.

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress that the area in which the variation effect is executed is limited by the fourth symbol display area and the effect of the effect is lowered. In this case, the fourth symbol display area is deleted from the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the variable display of the fourth symbol is displayed by using the light emitting means (LED or the like) provided in the variable display device unit 80. It is good to configure it to execute.

Further, a small display area Dm1a is formed in the vicinity (left side) of the small display area Dm1, and a display mode showing the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is displayed. Further, a small display area Dm2a is formed in the vicinity (left side) of the small display area Dm2, and a display mode showing the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is displayed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 365 (a) described later, in the reserved number display area (small display area Dm1a, Dm1b), the number of reserved balls of each special figure is displayed in a numerical display mode. Although it is configured to be displayed, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to display a display mode using a color or a symbol so that the number of reserved balls in the acquired figure can be identified.

A small display area Dm4 is formed in the upper left of the front view (from the center of the main display area Dm toward the upper left) in the main display area Dm. In this small display area Dm4, a guidance display mode for guiding the player in the direction in which the ball is launched (game direction) is displayed (see FIG. 366 (b)).

In the 16th embodiment, the small display area Dm4 is used as the guide display area. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp to which area of the game board 13 the ball should be fired only by visually recognizing the guidance display mode displayed in the guidance display area Dm4. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

In this guidance display area (small display area Dm4), a "right-handed" display mode for guiding the player to perform a right-handed game and a left-handed game to be performed by the player are performed. The display mode of "left-handed" for guiding that is displayed, and the display mode of "right-handed" is a gaming state in which the right-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, It is displayed during the time saving state, the big hit game, and the small hit game, and the display mode of "left-handed" is configured to be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after the right-handed game is completed. ing. Further, even when it is detected that the left-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, the right-handed game is being executed during the normal state, the left-handed game is "left-handed" for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). It is configured so that the display mode is displayed.

Returning to FIG. 365 (a), the description will be continued. Although detailed description will be omitted, the above-mentioned small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a are the results of preliminarily determining the winning information stored in the holding in addition to the values for indicating the number of holding balls of the corresponding special symbol (pre-reading result). ) Is configured to display a display mode capable of suggesting and notifying the player. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player play the game while having expectations for the game to be executed in the future (the lottery result of the special symbol stored on hold).

Further, a small display area Dm3 is formed below the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2. This small display area Dm3 is an area in which identification information for indicating the lottery status of the normal symbol (normal figure) (whether or not the lottery is in progress (changing) and the lottery result) is displayed, and is normal. The fourth symbol (the fourth symbol of the ordinary figure) for showing the lottery status of the symbol (the ordinary figure) is configured to be displayed in the small display area Dm3.

In addition, a small display area Dm3a is formed in the vicinity of the small display area Dm3, and the number of reserved balls of a normal symbol is displayed. In the small display area Dm3a described above, in addition to the value for indicating the number of reserved balls of the corresponding normal symbol, the result (look-ahead result) of preliminarily determining the winning information stored in the reserved state can be suggested and notified to the player. It is configured to display various display modes. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player play the game while having expectations for the game to be executed in the future (the lottery result of the normal symbol stored in the hold).

Further, a sub-display region Ds is formed below the main display region Dm. As shown in FIG. 365 (b), the sub-display area Ds is configured to display a comment for the content of the game being executed. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game. The sub-display area Ds may be used for another purpose. For example, information for indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol shown in the small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a may be displayed in the sub-display area Ds. It may be configured.

In this case, for example, the sub-display area Ds may be configured to display a hold display mode (for example, a hold symbol display mode consisting of a circle) for individually indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol. Then, it is preferable to configure the player so that the number of reserved balls of the current special symbol can be grasped by the number of displayed holding display modes. Further, it is preferable to determine in advance the winning information corresponding to each special symbol stored on hold, and to change the corresponding hold display mode based on the determination result.

By configuring in this way, the game is played with the expectation that a big hit will be won in the lottery of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol whose display mode is changed among the reserved symbols that may exist in a plurality. Can be made. Further, unlike the present embodiment, since it is configured to display the reserved symbols corresponding to the individual reserved memory numbers, the display mode for showing the game result that may be advantageous to the player among the plurality of reserved symbols. It is possible to set the result display to easily display the variable reserved symbol display.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition, the game result suggestion mode for suggesting the game result (lottery result of each symbol) to the player and the content of the effect display executed in the main display area Dm are shown. An effect explanation mode for explaining, a frame button-related display mode for showing the timing of operating the frame button 22 and the operation result, and a hit-related information display mode for displaying information about the jackpot game are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. It is configured to be displayed, and the ratio of the display area between the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds is set to be different depending on the content to be displayed in the sub display area Ds.

In addition, when the combination of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed corresponds to the combination and the reserved ball exists, the third symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second in the display mode indicating that the lottery result is out. After that, the confirmation is displayed, and then the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started. If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest incoming balls in time.

On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second in the state where the holding ball does not exist, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state is until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or the ball wins the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demo effect indicating that the game has not been executed is displayed. Even though the player fires the ball continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), there is no winning (ball winning) in either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. In rare cases, when the third symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the player has quit the game, and the pachinko machine 10 has not played the game at all. Due to that.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. As a result, the player who is trying to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demo effect. On the other hand, if a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the new winning is executed. Will be done.

In FIG. 365 (a), for convenience of explanation, the small display area (guidance display area) Dm4 is shown to be displayed in the main display area Dm, but the game method (direction) is shown to the player. When the display mode to be guided is not displayed, the small display area Dm4 itself is not displayed. In this way, in a state where it is not necessary to guide the game method (direction), by deleting the display area in which the guidance display area is displayed, an area for displaying another display mode (for example, a variable effect display mode) can be displayed. Since it can be made wider, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 363 (a). When the sphere passes through the through gate 67 and the long open variation of the normal figure is executed while the variation of the special figure 1 is being executed, a part of the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed. (See point A in FIG. 363 (a)). The display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of the point A in FIG. 363 (a) will be described later with reference to FIG. 365 (b).

After that, when the fluctuation time of the normal map long open fluctuation elapses for a predetermined time, the special map fluctuation effect displayed in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the display area of the normal map variation effect The process of switching the size is executed, the normal map variation effect is executed using the entire surface of the main display area Dm, and the special map variation effect is executed in a part of the main display area Dm (FIG. 363 (a)). See point B). The display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of the point B in FIG. 363 (a) will be described later with reference to FIG. 366 (a).

In the present embodiment, the timing for switching the size of the display area between the special map variation effect and the normal map variation effect is set to be 10 seconds after the start of the normal map variation effect. Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the present embodiment, a variation time of 10 seconds is set in a part of the case where the result of the general drawing lottery is out of order, and the 10-second normal drawing is set. Even when the deviation variation is set, the normal map variation effect (see FIG. 365 (b)) is configured to be executed.

With this configuration, when the normal map fluctuation effect is executed based on the normal map deviation variation (10 seconds), the display area between the special map variation effect and the normal map variation effect is not switched, and the normal map variation effect is not switched. The effect that the variable effect ends is executed. Therefore, after the normal map variation effect is executed, the display area between the special map variation effect and the normal map variation effect is switched and displayed (see FIG. 366 (a)), so that the normal map variation effect being executed is normal. Figure It is possible to increase the degree of expectation, which is a long open fluctuation.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the normal map long open fluctuation elapses, the game per normal map (long open game) is executed, and the display screen during the game per normal map is displayed (see point C in FIG. 363 (a)). .. The display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of the point C in FIG. 363 (a) will be described later with reference to FIG. 366 (b).

Here, the display contents of the normal map fluctuation effect executed based on the normal map variation will be described with reference to FIGS. 365 (b) to 366 (b). FIG. 365 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect content displayed immediately after the start of the normal map variation effect (see the point A in FIG. 363 (a)). As shown in FIG. 365 (b), when the normal map variation effect is executed, a small display area Dm5 is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm (in the lower right direction when viewed from the center of the main display area Dm). , The normal map fluctuation production is started.

That is, the small display area Dm5 is a normal map variation effect display area on which the normal map variation effect is executed. Then, as a normal figure fluctuation effect, the character 851 finds the treasure box 852 and approaches the treasure box 852. In the state shown in FIG. 365 (b), since the special figure 1 fluctuation and the normal figure fluctuation are being executed, the display mode (FIG.) showing that the special figure 1 is variablely displayed in the small display area Dm1. In 365 (b), "indicated by an arrow in the downward direction") is displayed, and in a display mode indicating that the normal figure is variablely displayed in the small display area Dm3 (in FIG. 365 (b), "downward" is displayed. Displayed by "arrow") is displayed.

Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "Treasure chest found !! Chance when you reach it !!" are displayed as a comment to indicate that the normal map fluctuation effect has been executed and the content of the normal map variation effect. .. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner what kind of effect the normal map variation effect executed in a part of the main display area Dm should be developed in the future.

After that, when 10 seconds have passed from the start of the normal map fluctuation effect, the display screen shown in FIG. 366 (a) is displayed. FIG. 366 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect content displayed immediately after the display area of the normal map variation effect is switched (see point B in FIG. 363 (a)). As shown in FIG. 366 (a), when 10 seconds have passed from the start of the normal map variation effect, the normal map variation effect is executed using the entire main display area of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the first The variable display effect of the special symbol (special figure 1) is displayed in the small area Dm6 formed in a part (lower left part) of the main display area Dm. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of "great chance" indicating that the normal map fluctuation effect has progressed (indicating that the result of the normal map lottery was not an out-of-normal fluctuation) is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 365 (b) and 366 (a), a variable effect for showing the lottery results of a plurality of symbol lottery (special figure lottery, general figure lottery) (special figure variable effect, general figure variable effect). By varying the size of the display area in which each variation effect is executed according to the suggestion status of the lottery result of each symbol lottery, a lottery of a plurality of symbol lottery is performed for the player. It is possible to notify that the variation effect for showing the result is being executed at the same time, and to inform in an easy-to-understand manner which variation effect should be watched depending on the size of the display area in which each variation effect is executed. can.

Although not shown, if the executed normal-figure variation effect is a non-normal-figure variation (10 seconds), the small display area Dm5 gradually becomes smaller from the display screen of FIG. 365 (b), and finally. The effect that the small display area Dm5 is not displayed is executed, and the player is notified that the lottery result of the normal map lottery corresponding to the current normal map fluctuation effect is out of order. In this way, when the normal map fluctuation effect is executed based on the normal map deviation variation, only the normal map variation effect using a display area smaller than the special map variation display effect is executed, so that the normal map variation effect is executed. The figure variation effect does not interfere with the special figure variation effect.

That is, according to the above-mentioned example, the deviation (normal map deviation fluctuation (10 seconds)) is selected as the effect result of the normal map fluctuation effect (result of the normal map lottery that triggered the execution of the normal map variation effect). During the possible period, that is, the period from the start of the normal map variation effect to the elapse of 10 seconds, the special map variation effect and the normal map variation effect can be obtained by executing the display mode shown in FIG. 365 (b). The player is notified that the variation effect is being executed at the same time, and when 10 seconds have passed since the start of the variation effect, the effect result of the variation effect (the usual trigger for executing the variation effect). Since there is no possibility that the deviation (variation outside the normal drawing (10 seconds)) is selected as the result of the drawing lottery), the possibility that the drawing lottery this time is a hit is high. Therefore, FIG. 366 (a). As shown in the above, a display mode in which the display area of the normal map variation effect is large (larger than the display area in which the special map variation effect is executed) is executed.

As a result, there is a high possibility that the lottery result that is advantageous to the player as the lottery result of the normal map fluctuation effect, that is, the lottery result in which the game is executed when the electric accessory 640a is opened for a long time, the normal map change. Since the display area in which the effect is executed can be enlarged, it is possible to make the player appropriately pay attention to the normal figure variation effect. Further, for example, when the normal map fluctuation effect is executed based on the normal map deviation variation (10 seconds), the normal map variation is executed in a display area smaller than the special map variation effect (see FIG. 365 (b)). Since it ends only with the production, it does not interfere with the visibility of the special figure fluctuation production. In addition, regardless of the lottery result of the normal map lottery, the size of the display area at the start of the normal map fluctuation effect is unified. It is possible to prevent the result from being predicted by the player.

In the 16th embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 365 (b) and 366 (a), the display area in which the normal map variation effect is executed is larger than the display area in which the special figure variation effect is executed. A small display area (small display area Dm5 (see FIG. 365 (b))) and a display area larger than the display area (small display area Dm6 (see FIG. 366 (a)) on which the special figure variation effect is executed (FIG. 366). (See (a)) and two sizes are provided, but the size is not limited to this, and three or more sizes of the display area for the normal map variation effect may be provided. For example, the special figure variation effect may be provided. A display area as large as the display area in which is executed may be used.

Further, in the 16th embodiment, the display area in which the normal map fluctuation effect is executed is gradually increased as the normal map variation effect progresses, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal map variation effect is not limited to this. The display area in which the variation effect is executed may be reduced from the initial range (see FIG. 365 (b)) and then varied to the size of the final range (see FIG. 366 (a)). .. With this configuration, it is possible to continue the normal map variation effect while making the player think that the normal map variation effect will end, so that it is possible to provide an unexpected effect. can.

Further, in the 16th embodiment, when the special figure variation effect and the normal map variation effect are executed at the same time, the player pays attention by changing the size of the display area in which each variation effect is executed. Although it is configured to indicate a power variation effect, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the mode of the display area in which each variation effect is executed (for example, the color of the outer shell of the display area or the color of the background of the display area). Variable mode) and audio output mode corresponding to each variable effect (for example, output only the audio corresponding to one variable effect, or change the output level (volume) of the audio corresponding to each variable effect. By setting the output mode), the player may be configured to pay attention to any one of the plurality of variation effects.

In addition, in the 16th embodiment, the range of the display area in which the normal map variation effect is executed is changed according to the progress status (elapsed time) of the normal map variation effect. Without limitation, for example, the range of the display area in which the normal map variation effect is executed is changed based on the operation content for the operation means (for example, the frame button 22) that can be operated by the player, and the normal map variation is performed. A variable range of the display area in which the normal map variation effect is executed may be set based on the progress status (elapsed time) of the effect and the lottery result (win / fail determination result) of the normal map lottery. ..

With this configuration, for the player who wants to quickly grasp the lottery result of the normal map lottery during the normal map fluctuation production, the normal map lottery is based on the range of the display area that can be changed based on the operation of the operating means. The display area where the normal map fluctuation effect is executed by not operating the operation means for the player who wants to grasp the normal map lottery result with the effect result of the normal map variation effect. It is possible to execute the normal map fluctuation effect without changing the range of.

Then, when the fluctuation time of the regular opening fluctuation has elapsed and it is displayed that the lottery result of the regular drawing lottery is a long opening hit, then the long opening hit is executed, and it is shown in FIG. 366 (b). The display screen is displayed. FIG. 366 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed when the game is won per long opening and the game is executed per long opening.

As shown in FIG. 366 (b), when the character 851 opens the treasure box 852 in the main display area Dm when the normal figure long opening is won, the character 851 opens the treasure box 852 and is shown to have won the normal figure long opening from the treasure box 852. The effect that the capsule 853 of the above appears is executed. Then, in the small display area Dm3, a display mode (indicated by "three circles" in the figure) for indicating that the result of the general drawing lottery is a long open hit is displayed, and in the small display area Dm4. , "Right-handed" is displayed in order to make the second winning opening 640 play a game (right-handed game), and in the small display area Dm5, the position where the ball is won by the right-handed game is visually displayed. As a guide display mode for notifying, a guide map schematically showing a part of the right game area (near the second winning opening 640) of the game board 13 is displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 366 (b), since the special figure 1 fluctuation is being executed even while the normal figure long open per game is being executed, the special figure 1 is changing in the small display area Dm1. The special figure 1 fourth symbol is displayed in the display mode indicating that the special figure variation effect is reduced in the small display area Dm6 formed on the lower left side of the main display area Dm (display of FIG. 366 (a)). It is displayed smaller than the screen). In this way, even if the size of the display area in which the normal map variation effect is executed is not changed, the display area in which the special map variation effect is executed is executed by reducing the display area in which the special map variation effect is executed. On the other hand, since the display area in which the normal map variation effect is executed can be made relatively large, the effect content of the normal map variation effect can be made more conspicuous for the player.

Then, a comment of "Challenge GET" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds to notify the player that the normal map fluctuation effect is further developed. Here, in the 16th embodiment, in a part of the case where the lottery result of the Fuzu lottery is a hit, the fluctuation time is the same as the fluctuation time (60 seconds) set at the time of winning per the Fuzu long opening. It is configured so that the short opening fluctuation (60 seconds) is set. When the normal map fluctuation effect is executed in response to this normal map short opening variation, the normal map variation effect proceeds until the same display mode as the display screen shown in FIG. 366 (b) is displayed, and the treasure box From 852, an effect of displaying the deviation mode for showing that the lottery result of the general drawing lottery is deviation is executed.

That is, when a hit is won in the general drawing lottery and the short opening operation is executed as a winning game, the electric accessory 640a is configured to be opened to the extent that the ball cannot win the second winning opening 640. ing. In this case, even if the right-handed game is executed, the ball cannot be won in the second winning opening 640 (it is difficult), so that the comment of "right-handed" is not displayed in the small display area Dm4. ..

In this embodiment, as a winning game (a game in which the electric accessory 640a is opened) that is executed when a winning game is won in the regular drawing lottery, a long opening winning game in which a ball can be won in the second winning opening 640. It is configured to be able to execute two types of hit games, a short open hit game that makes it difficult to win a ball in the second winning opening 640, but it is not limited to this, and three or more types of hit games can be executed. For example, as a long opening winning game in which a ball can be won in the second winning opening 640, a winning game in which the opening timing and opening time of the electric accessory 640a are different can be executed. good.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the opening timing of the electric accessory 640a during the long open game, so that the ball is fired only at a predetermined timing during the hit game. 2 It is possible to suppress the game of winning a ball in the winning opening 640. Further, in order to achieve the same effect, for example, the execution timing of the normal map variation effect (the timing of displaying the display mode for notifying that the game per normal map is started) may be configured to be different. .. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the second winning opening 640 to grasp the ball launch timing that can be won based on the effect mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 363 (a), the flow of the production will be described. When a right-handed game is performed and the ball wins the second winning opening 640 while the game is being executed (see point C in FIG. 363 (a)), the display mode indicating that fact is the third. It is displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 81. The display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of the point C in FIG. 363 (a) will be described later with reference to FIG. 367 (a).

Here, in the 16th embodiment, the special figure 1 change for showing the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 change for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery are simultaneously (in parallel). ) It cannot be executed, and it is configured to preferentially execute the special figure 2 change over the special figure 1 change.

Therefore, if the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed at the time when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 during the game per normal figure, the winning information of the special figure 2 is reserved and stored, and the special figure 1 being executed is executed. During the period until the fluctuation ends (waiting period), the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation is waited for. After that, when the execution of the special figure 1 change is completed, the special figure 2 change based on the winning information stored on hold is preferentially executed, and the special figure 2 which has advanced the above-mentioned normal figure change effect effect mode. The variation effect is executed (see point D in FIG. 363 (a)). The display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of the point D in FIG. 363 (a) will be described later with reference to FIG. 367 (b).

After that, when the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is completed and the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the small hit winning (see the point E in FIG. 363 (a)), the special drawing 2 for showing the small hit winning is shown. Fluctuation production is executed. The display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of the point E in FIG. 363 (a) will be described later with reference to FIG. 368 (a). Then, when the ball passes through a specific area (V gate (V area)) provided in the V winning device 650 while the small hit game is being executed (see point F in FIG. 363 (a)), the small hit game is executed. A display mode indicating that the big hit game is executed after the hit game is completed is displayed (see FIG. 368 (b)).

Here, with reference to FIGS. 367 (a) to 368 (b), the third symbol is executed until the normal figure long open hit game is executed during the normal state and the big hit game is executed based on the hit game. The contents of the effect executed on the display screen of the display device 81 will be described.

In the 16th embodiment, a series of games (normal figure fluctuation, normal figure hit, special figure 2 fluctuation, special figure 2 small hit) from the execution of the normal figure long open fluctuation to the execution of the big hit game (normal figure fluctuation, normal figure hit, special figure 2 small hit). , A game that is executed in the flow of a big hit), it is configured to execute a series of productions with a story. Specifically, the player is informed that the production content of the normal map variation effect described with reference to FIGS. 365 (b) to 366 (b) progresses, and the jackpot game is executed depending on the progress status of the production. It is possible to suggest.

With this configuration, a series of effects is used to determine whether or not an execution trigger that is more complicated than the execution trigger that is established when the jackpot is won in the special symbol (special symbol) lottery as the execution trigger of the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

FIG. 367 (a) shows that the ball has won a prize in the second winning opening 640 in the state shown in FIG. 366 (b), that is, in the state in which the game per long opening executed during the special figure 1 fluctuation is being executed. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the display screen for demonstrating that. As shown in FIG. 367 (a), when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the game per long opening, the capsule 853 is broken, suggesting the content of the game to be executed from the capsule 853 in the future. A ticket 854 with a "challenge game" as an aspect is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of "challenge game GET" notifying that the challenge game will be executed in the future is displayed.

Here, according to the example shown in FIG. 367 (a), since the special figure 1 change is being executed, the special figure 2 change is immediately executed based on the fact that the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. The winning information of the special figure 2 will be put on hold and stored without being performed. Therefore, in the small display area Dm2a, "1" indicating that one prize information of the special figure 2 has been acquired is displayed. Then, when the special figure 1 change executed in the state of FIG. 367 (a) is completed, the special figure 2 change is started, and the challenge game is started on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. (See FIG. 367 (b)).

FIG. 367 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display screen during a challenge game. As shown in FIG. 367 (b), when the special figure 2 variation is executed during the execution of the series of effects, the challenge game is started. This challenge game is an effect executed in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and as shown in FIG. 367 (a), a plurality of result display modes 861a for showing the effect result. ~ 861e are rotated in order, and the result display modes 861a to 861e, which are stopped and displayed in the result display area 860, are executed as the effect of this time.

In the 16th embodiment, as the result display mode, the result display mode 861a with a “cross” to indicate that the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery is “missing” and the “small hit”. The result display mode 861d with "V" to indicate that, the result display mode 861c with "777" to indicate that it is a "big hit", and the lottery result of the special figure 2 are not notified. It has a result display mode 861b with a “?” And a result display mode 861e with a “NEXT” indicating that the challenge game is executed again.

Here, in the result display mode 861b in which "?" Is added as the effect result of the challenge game, the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery is any of "big hit", "small hit", and "missing". In the challenge game, the effect of not notifying the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery is executed. Even when the result display mode 861b is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860, "right-handed" is displayed in the small area Dm4.

With this configuration, when the result display mode 861b is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860 as the effect result of the challenge game, the right-handed game is performed without grasping the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery. Therefore, whether the ball launched by the right-handed game wins the V winning device 650 which is opened during the small hit game, or the variable winning device 65 which is opened during the big hit game. Do you win the second prize opening 640 that is opened during the game per normal figure, or you do not win the special figure hit (big hit, small hit) and the regular figure hit, and you do not win any prize opening It is possible to improve the fun of the game because it is possible to determine whether or not the ball is flowing down while observing the actual flow behavior of the ball.

In the 16th embodiment, when the result display mode 861b is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860, the player cannot grasp the effect result of the challenge game, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the result display mode 861b is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860, the display mode of the result display mode 861b is changed to notify the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery as the effect result of the challenge game. You may be able to do it.

With this configuration, during the execution of the challenge game, it is possible to inform the game which special figure 2 lottery result corresponds to the result display mode 861b in an incomprehensible manner, and the challenge game ends. Then, the effect result of this challenge game, that is, the lottery result of the special figure 2 can be notified to the player.

Further, the result display mode 861e (“NEXT display”) shown in FIG. 367 (b) is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860 when the challenge game is executed again. In the 16th embodiment, when a plurality of winning information of the special figure 2 is acquired during the game per long opening, the lottery of the special figure 2 continues until the big hit or the small hit is won in the lottery of the special figure 2. Is executed. In this case, for example, if the lottery result of the first special figure 2 lottery is out of order, the second special figure 2 lottery is continuously executed, so that the challenge is executed in response to the change of the first special figure 2. As a result of the game effect, the result display mode 861e is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860, and the second special figure 2 variation is started. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the first special figure 2 lottery is a hit (big hit, small hit), any one of the result display modes 861b to 861d for showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860. To.

With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a production (challenge game) corresponding to the number of winning information of the special figure 2 acquired during the game per long opening without discomfort. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the variable time set in the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state is the variable time corresponding to one challenge game (10 seconds) and the variable time corresponding to two times (20 seconds). ) And are configurable, and when the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery is out of order, the fluctuation time of 20 seconds is more difficult to be selected than the fluctuation time of 10 seconds.

As a result, if the challenge game is executed twice with one special figure 2 fluctuation effect, it is possible to set a high possibility of winning (big hit, small hit) in the special figure 2 lottery. .. Further, when the result display mode 861e to which "NEXT" is attached by the challenge game is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860 and the challenge game is executed again, the second challenge game is one special figure 2. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the game was executed within the fluctuation time or straddled the two special figure 2 fluctuations.

Since the state shown in FIG. 367 is a state in which the change in Special Figure 2 is being executed, the change in Special Figure 1 that has changed at the time shown in FIG. 367 (a) is deviated from the small display area Dm1. The display mode "451" is stopped and displayed, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol is displayed in the display mode (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure) indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation is being executed in the small display area Dm2. It is displayed. Further, since the special figure 2 variation was executed using the prize information of the special figure 2 which was reserved and stored at the time shown in FIG. 367 (a), “0” is displayed as the value displayed in the small display area Dm2a. It is displayed.

Then, as a series of effects, the special figure 2 variation effect is executed using the display area in which the normal figure variation effect was executed, so that the special figure variation effect (special figure 1 variation effect) is executed in FIG. 367 (a). The small display area Dm6 that has been set is deleted from the main display area Dm. Further, in the small display area Dm4, the characters "right-handed" for causing the player to perform a right-handed game are continuously displayed, and in the sub-display area Ds, the effect of this challenge game is to be fueled. The comment "What will come out?" Is displayed.

According to the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 367 (b), the small display areas Dm1 to Dm3 and Dm1a to Dm3a are displayed in a visible size in order to explain the current gaming situation. In reality, it is displayed in a display mode that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. As a result, it is possible to further enhance the effect of the effect mode (challenge game) executed in the continuous main display area Dm.

Further, as described above, the state shown in FIG. 367 (b) is a state in which the game per long opening of the normal figure is completed and the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed, so that the state is provided in the right game area at that timing. None of the winning openings (second winning opening 640, specific winning opening 65a, V winning opening 650a) is in a state where it is not easy to win a ball. However, until just before the state shown in FIG. 367 (b), it is easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 by the normal long open hit game, for example, a small hit by the special figure 2 lottery being executed. If you win, or if you win a big hit, it will be easy for the ball to win in the V winning opening 650a or the specific winning opening 65a.

In this way, even if the right-handed game in which the ball is made to flow down to the right-handed game area is not an advantageous game method for the player, the right-handed game is continuously performed. By displaying the characters "right-handed" in the small display area Dm4, the troublesomeness of the player frequently switching between the right-handed game and the left-handed game is eliminated, and the switching operation of the game method is delayed, for example. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the right-handed game cannot be performed in the state where the small hit game is executed, and the ball cannot be won in the V winning opening 650a during the small hit game.

In the present embodiment, for the reason described above, when the right-handed game can be executed with a predetermined interval (the period during which the variation in Special Figure 2 is executed), the small display area Dm4 is continuously performed even during the predetermined interval. Although it is configured to display the character "right-handed" in, the character "right-handed" is displayed in the small display area Dm4 only when the right-handed game is actually advantageous to the player. It may be configured to be displayed, or a state in which the right-handed game is actually advantageous to the player (general figure long open hit period, small hit game period) and a period between the states (special figure 2 variation). The characters "right-handed" may be displayed in the small display area Dm4 in different display modes.

With this configuration, players who are not accustomed to the game can continuously play right-handed games, and the game situation that is disadvantageous to the player (during the small hit game, the ball is placed in the V winning opening 650a). (Situations in which a prize cannot be won) is unlikely to occur, and a skilled player can be made to select a game method according to the display mode of "right-handed" displayed in the small display area Dm4. Therefore, it is possible to play a game according to the skill of the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, with respect to the display content displayed when the result display mode 861d with "V" as the effect result of the challenge game is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860, that is, when the small hit is won, FIG. 368 ( This will be described with reference to a). FIG. 368 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a small hit winning is notified in a challenge game.

As shown in FIG. 368 (a), when the special figure 2 fluctuation is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating a small hit, the special figure 2 fourth symbol is displayed in the display mode “341” indicating the small hit winning in the small display area Dm2. Is displayed, and the result display mode 861d is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860. Then, a comment of "small hit GET !!" indicating that the small hit has been won is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, and the player aims at the small display area Dm7 of the main display area Dm during the small hit game. As a guidance display mode for visually guiding the V winning device 650, a schematic diagram in which the vicinity of the V winning device 650 is enlarged and displayed is displayed.

Then, when the ball passes through a specific area (V gate (V area)) in the V winning opening 650a during the small hit game, it is notified that the right to execute the big hit game is acquired after the end of the small hit game. The display screen shown in FIG. 368 (b) is displayed as the display screen of. FIG. 368 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen displayed when the right of the big hit game is acquired during the small hit game.

As shown in FIG. 368 (b), the character "777" indicating that the jackpot game is executed is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the sub-display area Ds congratulates the player with "big hit !! Congratulations!" ! ”Comment is displayed.

As described above, in the 16th embodiment, the normal map fluctuation effect (see FIG. 365 (b)) is executed when the normal symbol (normal map) starts to fluctuate per long opening in the normal state. , The game per-figure effect (see FIG. 366 (b)) performed during the per-figure game in which the electric accessory 640a is opened, and the second winning opening 640 is awarded a ball during the per-figure game. The special figure 2 hold acquisition effect (see FIG. 367 (a)) executed when the prize information of the special figure 2 is acquired, and the special figure 2 variation effect executed when the special figure 2 variation (lottery) is started. (Refer to FIG. 367 (b)), Small hit winning effect indicating that a small hit was won in the special figure 2 fluctuation (lottery) (see FIG. 368 (a)), and the right of the big hit game was acquired during the small hit game. Since the small hit in-game effect (see FIG. 368 (b)) to be executed in the case is configured to be executed as a series of effects with a story, the big hit is established when a plurality of conditions are satisfied. In the pachinko machine 10 having an opportunity to execute a game, the game performance can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Returning to FIG. 363, the explanation will be continued. As described above, according to the flow of the game shown in FIG. 363 (a), by executing the series of effects, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. Among them, depending on the game state when the ball is won in the second winning opening 640, it may not be possible to inform the player of the progress of the game in an easy-to-understand manner in the above-mentioned series of staging modes.

Specifically, at the timing of the point C in FIG. 363 (a), since the special figure 1 change is being executed, the start timing of the special figure 2 change is a predetermined period (the remaining period of the special figure 1 change during execution). A series of staging modes in which a display screen (see FIG. 367 (a)) is displayed when the player is on standby is used. When the ball is won in the second winning opening 640, the special figure 2 fluctuation is immediately started. Therefore, when the above-mentioned production mode of the series of effects is used, the display screen of FIG. 366 (b) is directly transferred to the display screen of FIG. 367 (b), and each of the effects executed as a series of effects is executed. There was a problem that the relevance of the production was weakened.

Therefore, in the 16th embodiment, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation is executed at the timing when the winning information of the special figure 2 is acquired during the period when the series of effects is being executed, and the determination result is used. Based on this, it is configured to change the effect mode after acquiring the winning information of the special figure 2. Here, the content of the effect when the change in the special figure 1 is not executed at the timing when the winning information of the special figure 2 is acquired during the period in which the series of effects is being executed will be described with reference to FIG. 369.

FIG. 369 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen displayed when the winning information of the special figure 2 is acquired while the special figure 1 is not changing, and FIG. 369 (b) is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen displayed when the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery executed based on the winning information acquired in FIG. 369 (a) is a small hit.

As shown in FIG. 369 (a), when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 in the state where the special figure 1 change is not executed, the special figure 2 change starts immediately, so that the change in FIG. 366 (b) is taken. By the effect shown in the above, the effect that the character 851 destroys the capsule 853 appearing from the treasure box 852 by using the hammer 851aa is executed. Then, when the timing at which the fluctuation of the special figure 2 stops is reached, the display screen shown in FIG. 369 (b) is displayed. FIG. 369 (b) is an example of a display screen displayed when the special figure 2 change executed based on the ball winning the second winning opening 640 while the special figure 1 change is non-variable is stopped. It is a schematic diagram shown schematically.

As shown in FIG. 369 (b), when the variation of the special figure 2 is stopped, an effect is executed in which the result display mode 855 showing the lottery result of the variation of the special figure 2 appears from the capsule 853. In the example shown in FIG. 369 (b), since the lottery result of the variation of the special figure 2 is a small hit, the result display mode 855 with “V” indicating the small hit winning is displayed. The display mode of the result display mode 855 is configured to be variable according to the lottery result of the variation of the special figure 2. Specifically, the effect result of the challenge game shown in FIG. 367 (b) is shown. Since it is the same as the display mode shown, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, during a series of productions, if a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 during the special figure 1 fluctuation, the production in which the capsule 853 appears from the treasure box 852 corresponds to the normal drawing period (first stage). (Direction), and the production to acquire the ticket 854 from the capsule 853 corresponds to the special figure 2 hold acquisition period (remaining fluctuation period of special figure 1) (second stage production), and the challenge game production changes to special figure 2. While the production mode is set so as to correspond to the period (third stage production), if the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 during the non-variable special figure 1, the capsule 853 from the treasure box 852 The effect mode is set so that the effect of appearing corresponds to the normal period (first stage effect), and the effect of destroying the capsule 853 corresponds to the special figure 2 variable period (second stage effect). It is composed.

In this way, by configuring it so that different production modes can be set depending on the game situation during the series of production, depending on whether the waiting period of special figure 2 fluctuation occurs or not, the player feels uncomfortable. It is possible to execute an easy-to-understand series of effects without any problems.

Returning to FIG. 363, the flow of the production will be described. In the series of effects described above with reference to FIGS. 365 to 369, the contents of the effects that can be displayed when a normal game is executed while the series of effects are being executed have been described. Specifically, the content of the effect when the ball normally wins the second prize opening 640 during the long open game, and the content of the effect when the ball wins the V prize opening 650a during the small hit game. I explained.

Here, the content of the effect to be executed when the normal game is not executed in the state where the series of effect is executed will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 370, the contents of the effect when the ball does not win the second winning opening 640 during the game per long opening of the normal figure will be described. FIG. 370 (a) schematically shows an example of a display screen displayed when a ball has not won a prize in the second winning opening 640 when one second has elapsed from the start of the game per long opening. FIG. 370 (b) is a schematic diagram shown, which is displayed when the game per game for long opening of the normal figure is completed without the ball winning the second winning opening 640 during the game for the long opening of the normal figure. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display screen schematically.

As shown in FIG. 370 (a), the capsule 853 rolls away from the character 851 in the main display area Dm until the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the game for the long opening of the normal figure. At the same time as the execution, the comment "Hurry !! Hurry !!" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds to alert the second winning opening 640 to hurry to win the ball. In addition, it is possible that the player is not playing the right-handed game as a factor that causes the ball not to win the second winning opening 640 even after the game has passed for a predetermined period. The "right-handed" guidance display mode displayed in the small display area Dm4 is displayed in a display mode that is emphasized more than usual (in FIG. 370 (a), the outer shell of the small display area Dm4 is displayed by a double line). Will be done. In addition, the voice output device 226 also outputs a voice for notifying that the right-handed game is to be performed.

In the 16th embodiment, as a game per long opening, the electric accessory 640a is opened for 1 second, and then the electric accessory 640a is opened again for 0.5 seconds after a closing period of 1.5 seconds. It is configured so that a winning game (opening operation) is executed. Therefore, when one second has passed from the start of the game per the long opening of the normal figure, the caution screen shown in FIG. 370 (a) is displayed, and if the player who notices the display plays the right-handed game, the latter half of the game is performed. It is configured so that the ball can be won in the second winning opening 640 during the opening period (0.5 seconds). As a result, it is possible to provide a player who has played a right-handed game after visually recognizing the display content of the alert screen to have an opportunity to win a ball in the second winning opening 640.

After that, when the game time (3 seconds) per the long opening of the normal figure elapses without the ball winning in the second winning opening 640, the series of effects is completed as shown in FIG. 370 (b). An effect indicating that is executed. As shown in FIG. 370 (b), the character 851, which cannot acquire the capsule 853 and is regrettable, is displayed in the main display area Dm, and "end" indicating that the series of effects is completed in the sub display area Ds. Comment is displayed. Further, in the small display area Dm4, the character of "left-handed" for executing a normal game for executing the special figure 1 lottery in the normal state is displayed. With this configuration, if a normal game (a game that causes the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the game per the long opening of the normal figure) is not executed in the middle of the series of production, the series of production will be performed. Since the ending effect is executed, for example, it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations due to the series of effects progressing to the end without acquiring the winning information of Special Figure 2. ..

Next, as the content of the effect to be executed when the normal game is not executed in the state where the series of effects is executed, the ball does not win the V winning opening 650a during the small hit game, or is specified. The content of the effect when the area (V gate (V area)) is not passed will be described with reference to FIG. 371. FIG. 371 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen displayed when the ball has not won the V winning opening 650a when 3 seconds have passed from the start of the small hit game. FIG. 371 (b) schematically shows an example of a display screen displayed when the small hit game is completed without the ball winning the V winning opening 650a during the small hit game. It is a figure.

As shown in FIG. 371 (a), if a ball has not won a prize in the V winning opening 650a when 3 seconds have passed from the start of the small hit game, a small formed in a part of the main display area Dm. In the display area Dm8, the characters "Last 5 seconds !!" are displayed as the remaining period information for indicating the remaining period of the small hit game, and a countdown display is executed in which the value decreases with the passage of time. Then, in the main display area Dm, a situation is displayed in which the display mode for showing the game result of the small hit game is wrapped in smoke. Further, as in FIG. 370 (a) described above, the highlighting mode in which the guidance of the right-handed game is emphasized is displayed in the small display area Dm4, and the sub-display area Ds is currently in the small hit game. , The comment "Small hit !! Hurry !!" is displayed to indicate that the game is to be played in a hurry.

Then, when the small hit game is completed without winning the ball in the V winning opening 650a during the small hit game, a screen is displayed in which the same series of effects as in FIG. 370 (b) described above is completed (FIG. 371 (FIG. 371). b) See). As described above, when the situation where the series of effects is completed occurs at each time point of the series of effects, the data capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by using the same image data. In addition, since it cannot be displayed when a normal game is played, it is unlikely that the same image data is reused for the player even if the same image data is used. It is a thing.

Returning to FIG. 363, the explanation will be continued. Depending on the fluctuation status of the special figure 1 during the series of effects, a state in which the waiting period for the change in the special figure 2 is set and a state in which the waiting period is not set occur. Fig. 2 A new problem arose even when the waiting period for fluctuation was set.

That is, the waiting period of the special figure 2 fluctuation is set corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation during execution, and the winning timing of the ball to the second winning opening 640 is the special figure. It is set regardless of the fluctuation timing of 1. Further, since the length of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 varies, for example, there is a possibility that the waiting period of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 during a series of productions exceeds 100 seconds. In such a situation, if the display screen (see FIG. 367 (a)) showing the waiting period for the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is continuously displayed, the same display mode is continuously displayed for 100 seconds. There is a problem that the player feels uncomfortable and the series of productions is delayed and the production effect is reduced.

On the other hand, in the 16th embodiment, when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 during the series of productions, the presence or absence of the special figure 1 fluctuation and the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation are determined. FIG. 1 When the remaining fluctuation time of fluctuation is a predetermined time (60 seconds) or more, a special series of effects is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 363 (b), the flow of the game when the special series of effects is executed will be described. In FIG. 363 (b), the period from when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the game per chart to when the special figure 2 change is executed (the remaining change period of the special figure 1 during execution) is 60 seconds. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the effect (special series effect) executed in the above case. The detailed description of the same elements as the flow shown in FIG. 363 (a) will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 363 (b), when a series of effects (normal map fluctuation effect) is executed based on the normal map long open variation, the special figure 1 variation (indicated as special 1 variation in the figure) is shown in the special figure 1. The long deviation fluctuation (special 1 long fluctuation (disengagement)) is executed, and when the ball enters the second winning opening 640 during the game per normal long opening, the remaining period of the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed When it is determined that is 60 seconds or more, the series of effects being executed is pseudo-disengaged and ends with the effect (see point G in FIG. 363 (b)). After that, when the remaining time of the special figure 1 long deviation fluctuation during execution reaches 10 seconds, a pseudo series of effects is executed, and a challenge game is executed according to the start timing of the special figure 2 fluctuation (see FIG. 367 (b)). Is set (see point H in FIG. 363 (b)).

Here, with reference to FIG. 372, the contents of the above-mentioned special series of effects will be described. FIG. 372 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the point G in FIG. 363 (b). As shown in FIG. 363 (b), when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed at the time when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 is 60 seconds or more, the small display area Dm2a is displayed. Despite the state in which "1" indicating that one prize information of Special Figure 2 is reserved and stored is displayed, the end screen indicating that the series of effects has been completed is displayed in the main display area Dm. To.

After that, as a special series of effects, once the series of effects is completed, the special figure variation effect corresponding to the execution of the special figure 1 variation is executed until the remaining time of the special figure 1 variation reaches 10 seconds. Then, when the remaining time of the special figure 1 fluctuation reaches 10 seconds (when the timing at which the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed 10 seconds later), the display mode shown in FIG. 372 (b) is displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 364, the contents of the effect executed in the time-saving state in the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment will be described. FIG. 364 schematically shows the flow of the effect executed when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery in the normal state and the time saving state (once) is set after the jackpot game is completed. FIG. 364 (b) is a timing chart, in which a small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery during the time saving state, and the time saving state (5 times) is set after the end of the big hit game executed based on the small hit. It is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the effect executed in the case of.

As shown in FIG. 364 (a), there is a special figure 1 hold (hereinafter, also referred to as a special 1 hold) at the time when the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and the special figure 2 hold (hereinafter, both the special 2 hold). If there is no such thing, that is, if the jackpot is won by the game that executes the special figure 1 lottery (left-handed game), the special figure 2 lottery is executed by performing the right-handed game during the time saving state. Also, before, all the special figure 1 lottery stored on hold is configured to be executed.

Specifically, it is executed in a state where the time saving state is set rather than the normal figure fluctuation time (the normal figure fluctuation time set in the high probability state of the normal symbol) which is executed in the state where the time saving state is set. The fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is configured to be shorter. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the progress of the game in the time-saving state while holding the special figure 1 hold. Therefore, while various effects are being executed in the time-saving state, the special figure 1 variation, which is more difficult to win a small hit than the special figure 2 variation, is executed, and the effect balance of the various effects is lost. It can be suppressed.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the 16th embodiment, when the special figure 1 lottery is executed during the time saving state, 0.2 seconds regardless of the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery. It is configured so that the fluctuation time is set. Then, the jackpot game end screen indicating the end of the jackpot game is configured to be displayed until a predetermined period (3 seconds) elapses from the end of the jackpot game or until the special figure 2 variation is executed. ing.

Therefore, after the end of the big hit game, the period during which the special figure change (special figure 1 change) based on the special figure 1 hold already acquired at the start of the big hit game is executed (when the number of special figure 1 hold is 4, about 1). Seconds), a display mode indicating the end of the jackpot game is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. With such a configuration, it is possible to digest the special figure 1 hold without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

In addition, in the above-mentioned special figure 1 change (special figure 1 change executed immediately after the end of the big hit game), if the big hit is won or the small hit that can pass V is won, the big hit game is played again from the big hit game end screen. The display screen inside is configured to be displayed, and game information indicating the contents of the jackpot game (for example, information on the number of rounds indicating the number of rounds executed during one jackpot game, or acquisition during one jackpot game). Game information showing the cumulative value with the game information of the previous jackpot game is set as the acquired ball number information indicating the number of balls that have been set, and the display mode corresponding to the set game information is displayed. ing.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the multiple jackpot games are as if they were one jackpot game, so that the second jackpot game (the period during which the jackpot game end screen is displayed) The variation display mode (short time (0.2 seconds) variation) that makes it difficult for the player to identify the special map variation (special map 1 variation) corresponding to the newly executed jackpot game), and the variation of the third symbol Even if it is executed without display), it does not give a sense of discomfort to the player.

In addition, since the upper limit of the value that can be displayed as the game information of one big hit game can be increased, the player can have a stronger expectation for the big hit winning. Further, in the 16th embodiment, since the right-handed game is configured to be an appropriate game for both the big hit game and the game in the time saving state, the big hit game is internally completed and the time saving state is set. During the special figure 1 variable period (during the special figure 1 variable period in which the jackpot game end screen is displayed), the characters "right-handed" are displayed in the small display area Dm4 of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. To. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from determining whether the current game is a big hit game or a time saving state depending on the display mode of the small display area Dm4 on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment is configured so that the special figure 2 hold is given priority over the special figure 1 hold. Therefore, in the state where the time saving state is set, for example, even if the player makes a mistake in the game operation and acquires the special figure 1 hold in the state where the special figure 2 hold is present, the special figure 1 is held until the special figure 2 hold disappears. The special figure change (special figure 1 change) based on the hold is not executed. And, as long as the right-handed game is continuously executed during the time saving state, the special figure 2 hold is configured so as not to disappear. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special figure 1 fluctuation from being unnecessarily executed during the time saving state.

Further, in the 16th embodiment, as the corresponding time saving end condition which is a part of the time saving ending condition for ending the time saving state, the ending condition which is satisfied based on the number of executions of the variation in Special Figure 2 is set. , Even if the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed a predetermined number of times (up to 4 times) after the jackpot game ends, the game status until the corresponding time saving end condition is satisfied is updated based on the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 fluctuation. There is no such thing.

As described above, in the 16th embodiment, the special figure 2 variation is configured to be executed in preference to the special figure 1 variation, and the special figure 2 variation is executed in the state where the time saving state is set. It is configured so that the special figure 1 fluctuation is changed for a short time during the period when the special figure 1 is not held, so that the special figure 1 hold is eliminated during the time saving state. FIG. 2 It may be configured to be executed with priority over the fluctuation.

When "Special Figure 2 fluctuation once" is set as the response time reduction end condition after the jackpot game ends, the special Figure 2 fluctuation change period executed during the time reduction state is used. The time saving final variation effect is executed in the effect mode corresponding to the lottery result and the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold acquired during the time saving state.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 373 to 377, the contents of the effect executed during the time saving state in the 16th embodiment will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment, as the effect during the time saving state, the first time saving variation effect set in response to the special figure 2 variation other than the special figure final variation in the time saving state and the special effect. It is configured to execute the second time saving fluctuation effect set in response to the special figure 2 fluctuation which is the final fluctuation of the figure.

Then, in the first time saving variation effect, a variation effect for showing the lottery result of the variation is executed, and in the second time reduction variation effect, the lottery result of the variation and the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold are shown. Fluctuation production is executed. First, with reference to FIG. 373 (a), the display contents of the first time reduction variation effect will be described. FIG. 373 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents in the variation effect during the time saving state. The display content shown in FIG. 373 (a) is a display screen when the first special figure 2 variation is executed in the time reduction state in which the time reduction number “5 times” is set.

As shown in FIG. 373 (a), in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the characters of "time saving mode" for indicating that the current time saving state is displayed are displayed, and the rabbit is displayed. While the imitated character 851 is running, an effect of getting any one of the lottery result modes 871a to 871c showing the result of the special figure lottery is executed. In the 16th embodiment, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 386, the character 851 tries to obtain the lottery result modes 871a to 871c according to the fluctuation time set during the time reduction state (excluding the time reduction final variation). The get effect is configured to be executed multiple times during one variable period, and as the number of get effects executed during one variable period increases, the lottery result of this special figure variation is the player. It is configured so that the probability that it is a lottery result that is advantageous to the player is high. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player pay close attention not only to the effect result of each get effect but also to the number of times the get effect is executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the small display area Dm4, the character "right-handed" for guiding the game method during the time saving state is displayed, and in the sho display area Dm20, the "last 4" indicating the period until the time saving state ends. The characters "Times" are displayed. That is, it is notified that the time saving state will end when the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed four times later. In the 16th embodiment, a plurality of time saving end conditions that are satisfied based on the number of times the special figure changes can be set, but the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 has a plurality of time saving ending conditions. , It is configured to display the remaining period until the time saving end condition that is most likely to be satisfied is satisfied.

With this configuration, all of the multiple time-saving end conditions that exist are displayed, and the period until all the displayed time-saving end conditions are satisfied (remaining period) is displayed most. It is possible to inform the player of the easy time saving end condition in an easy-to-understand manner. Further, when the ease of satisfying the time saving end conditions overlaps, it may be configured to display all the overlapping time saving end conditions, or only one of the overlapping time saving end conditions is displayed. It may be configured to do so.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 373 (a), as the lottery result modes 871a to 871c, the first lottery result mode 871a with "777" indicating a big hit winning and the "V" indicating a small winning winning are shown. The attached second lottery result aspect 871b and the third lottery result aspect 871c with a “cross mark” indicating the deviation are displayed, and each time the get effect is executed, the character 851 is selected by one of the lottery. An action is performed in which the result aspects 871a to 871c are acquired but cannot be acquired, and finally any of the lottery result aspects 871a to 871c is acquired and the effect of notifying the lottery result of the variation is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a lottery result suggestion mode with a “chance” indicating that there is a high expectation of acquiring the lottery result modes 871a and 871b showing a lottery result that is advantageous to the player in the get effect. Or, the effect number suggestion mode with "next" indicating the remaining number of times the get effect is executed is displayed, and the character 851 executes the get effect to acquire the lottery result suggestion mode and the effect count suggestion mode. It may be configured.

With this configuration, the character 851 can execute the action of acquiring one of the display modes a plurality of times during one variable display effect, so that the player is prevented from getting tired of the effect. be able to. In addition, since it is possible to predict the lottery result of the current special figure change in the middle of the special figure change period, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to the production and improve the interest of the game.

Further, on the display screen shown in FIG. 373 (a), a display mode for showing the remaining number of executions of the variation in the special figure 2 as the remaining period in which the time saving state is set is displayed in the small display area Dm20. Not limited to, for example, a display mode for showing the remaining time for which the time reduction state is set based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 may be displayed, or the get effect executed during the time reduction state this time may be displayed. You may display the display mode for showing the remaining number of times. Furthermore, the remaining number of executions of the special figure 2 fluctuation at the time when the time reduction state is set, that is, the time reduction end condition (special figure 2 fluctuation number) set in the time reduction state this time, and the special figure executed during the time reduction state. 2 The display mode indicating the number of fluctuations may be configured to be displayed on the display screen.

Next, with reference to FIG. 373 (b), the display contents of the time saving final variation effect (second time saving variation effect) executed by the final variation in the time saving state will be described. FIG. 373 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents displayed in the first half period of the time saving final variation effect. In the 16th embodiment, as a variation effect on the time saving final variation, a hold ball acquisition effect for allowing the player to acquire the special figure 2 hold ball, a lottery result of the change, and a look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold. The second time-saving variation effect for notifying the player is configured to be feasible, and the hold ball acquisition effect is executed during the first half period (for example, 5 seconds) of the time-saving final variation effect, and the second half period (for example, for example). , 25 seconds) is configured to execute the second time reduction effect.

When the reserved ball acquisition effect is executed in the first half period of the time saving final variation effect, as shown in FIG. 373 (b), "Gather the characters!" Explaining the playability of the first half period in the sub-display area Ds! Is displayed, and an effect of gathering ally characters around the character 851 is executed in the main display area Dm. In FIG. 373 (b), a state in which the ally character 851a imitating a “turtle” and the ally character 851b imitating an “elephant” are gathered is displayed. Then, in the small display area Dm20, the character "last" is displayed in order to notify the player that the special figure change this time is the final change in the time saving state.

This ally character 851 is variably displayed in association with the number of acquired special figure 2 reserved balls, and since "2" is displayed in the small display area Dm2a, in FIG. 373 (b), it is displayed. Since it shows a state in which two special figure 2 holds have been acquired, it means that two ally characters 851 are gathered. Then, in the small display area Dm7, a set history display displayed in the order in which the gathered ally characters 851 are gathered is displayed, and "turtle" is displayed as the first history 872a and "elephant" is displayed as the second history 872b. ..

In this small display area Dm7, the set history display is displayed, and the display order here is associated with the digestion order of the special figure 2 hold, and the ally character used in the second time reduction effect described later. Based on the type of 851 and the display order of the set history display, for example, in the case of winning, it is possible to suggest which special figure 2 hold is won.

Then, when the number of special 2 hold balls reaches the upper limit value (4 pieces) during the execution of the hold ball acquisition effect, it is shown that the number of special figure 2 hold balls has reached 4 as shown in FIG. 374 (a). The effect mode is displayed. Specifically, around the character 851, a new ally character 851c imitating a "snake" and an ally character 851d imitating a "lion" have increased, and a total of four ally characters 851a to 851d have been added. The gathered production is displayed. Further, in the small display area Dm21, a "snake" is displayed in the third history 872c and a "lion" is displayed in the fourth history 872d, and the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 has reached the upper limit in the sub-display area Ds. The comment "All-Member Assembly !!" is displayed. As described above, during the execution of the reserved ball acquisition effect, the number of set of ally characters 851 is associated with the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2, so that the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is in the small display area Dm2a. "4" indicating that it is the upper limit value (4 pieces) is displayed.

After that, the first half period of the time reduction final variation effect elapses, and when the second half period is reached, the second time reduction variation effect shown in FIG. 374 (b) is started. FIG. 374 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display content (second time reduction effect) displayed when the latter half period of the time reduction final variation effect is started. As shown in FIG. 374 (b), in the second time reduction effect, one of the ally characters acquired in the first half of the time reduction final variation effect challenges the mission, notifies the winning of the winning mission, and fails the mission. The effect of notifying the non-winning is executed. Then, the effect result of the second time reduction variation effect is configured to reflect up to the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 hold acquired at the time when the first half period of the time reduction final variation effect elapses. ..

According to the example shown in FIG. 374 (b), the mission effect using the ally character 851a imitating the "turtle" is executed as the mission effect executed as the second time reduction effect. Here, the content of the mission effect to be executed (“tolerate falling rocks” in FIG. 374 (b)) is configured so that a plurality of patterns can be set, and the content of the mission effect and the type of the selected ally character 851. And, depending on, the degree of expectation of mission success is different. With this configuration, the player can be interested not only in the effect result of the second time reduction effect but also in the effect process until the effect result is displayed.

Then, when the mission production is successful, the mission success production is executed as shown in FIG. 375 (a). In the example shown in FIG. 375 (a), the first special figure 2 hold (the next special figure 2 hold), that is, the change in the first special figure 2 after the transition to the normal state. Since winning a small hit is pre-read and the pre-reading result is used as the production result of the second time-saving fluctuation production, as shown in FIG. 375 (a), the mission succeeds as the production result of the second time-saving fluctuation production. At the fluctuation stop timing of the time reduction final fluctuation displayed, the display mode of "351" indicating that the result of the special figure 2 lottery this time is out of order is displayed in the small display area Dm2.

After that, as shown in FIG. 375 (b), there is a change in the special figure 2 in which the small hit is won while the pseudo symbol "VVV" for notifying that the winner is won in the main display area Dm is oscillated. Until the end, a notification screen for notifying the player of the effect result of the second time reduction effect is displayed. At the time of FIG. 375 (b), the normal state is set as the game state, and since the special figure 2 is changing (during non-big hit game, non-small hit game), the right-handed game is actually performed. Is in a state where it is not possible to play a game that is advantageous to the player, but since the small hit game is executed immediately after that, the "right-handed" that continuously guides the right-handed game from the time-saving state. The display is displayed in the small display area Dm4. As a result, it is possible to perform a smooth game without causing the player to perform an act of changing the firing direction of the ball.

Then, when the special figure 2 change based on the winning information stored in the first special figure 2 hold is stopped and displayed at the time when the second time saving fluctuation effect is executed, it is shown in FIG. 376 (a). As you can see, the display mode for displaying the small hit winning to the player is displayed, and in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is "777" for indicating the small hit type set in this small hit winning. It is displayed in the display mode.

On the other hand, when the failure effect is set as the effect result of the mission effect described above with reference to FIG. 374 (b) (when the lottery result of the change and the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold are both out of order) ), The mission failure effect shown in FIG. 376 (b) is displayed, and then the time saving state end screen shown in FIG. 377 is displayed until the special figure 2 fluctuation corresponding to the special figure 2 hold is completed in the normal state. Is displayed.

Although the details will be described later, at the timing when the first half period of the time saving final fluctuation effect ends, the special figure 2 hold has not reached the upper limit value, and the second time saving variation effect is started (the second time saving effect). (After the effect result of the variation effect is set), if a new special figure 2 hold is acquired, the newly acquired special figure 2 will be acquired at the first special figure 2 variation start timing in the normal state after the end of the time saving final variation. If the look-ahead process is executed for the hold in FIG. 2 (the special figure 2 hold that is not reflected in the effect result of the second time reduction effect) and the result of the look-ahead process is a winning, the display of FIG. 377 is performed. An effect is executed in which the small hit winning screen (see FIG. 376 (a)) is suddenly displayed from the screen.

Next, the configuration of the counter buffer in the 16th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 378. FIG. 378 is a diagram schematically showing the configurations of various counters in the 16th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 378, in the 16th embodiment, the stop type counter C3 is added to the counter buffer (see FIG. 13) in the first embodiment described above, and the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area is added. 203la, special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203lb, stop type selection counter storage area for storing the value of stop type selection counter C3, and variation type counter for storing the value of variation type counter CS1. To store the value of the second hit type counter storage area and the second variable type counter CS2 for storing the value of the second hit type counter C6 in the point where the storage area is provided and the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203 lc. The point that the second variation type counter storage area was provided, and the point that the configuration of the special symbol hold ball execution area and the normal symbol hold ball execution area were changed according to the counter value stored in each hold ball storage area. , Is different. Since the other elements are the same, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed by the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach other than front and back" (for example, 98,99), and "reach other than front and back" (for example, range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops outside the front and back of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop (effect) patterns with "complete deviation" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where reach does not occur are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the timing at which the ball wins the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203la or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203lb of the RAM 203.

From the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high-probability time and a special symbol for low-probability time, and a range of random value values set for each stop type of deviation according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability times where the range of random value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is wide, 0 to 89, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and "completely off" is easily selected. In this table, the "front-back off reach" is narrowed to 98,99 and the "front-back off reach" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select "front-back off reach" or "front-back off reach". Further, in the low probability state, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entry port 64, which is a low probability state. The table for is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "completely off".

In this stop type selection table, the range of random value corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than front and rear deviation" is widened to 80 to 97, and "reach other than front and rear deviation" is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach displays with a long effect time, so that the ball entry time to the first entry port 64 can be secured, and the variation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It will be easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of random value corresponding to the stop type of "reach before and after" is set to 98,99.

The value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process of the main controller in this embodiment), and the normal symbol of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the sphere passes through the through gate 67. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203 lc. The value of the random number that is the hit of the normal symbol is defined in the random number 16 table 202 lc (see FIG. 380 (d)) provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. When the value of the second hit random number counter C4 matches the value of the random number that is the normal symbol specified in the random number 16 table 202 lc per normal symbol, it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol.

Here, with reference to FIG. 380 (d), a random number 16 table 202 lc per ordinary symbol will be described. The random number 16 table 202lc per ordinary symbol is a table in which random numbers (judgment values) determined to be hit in each game state (high probability state of ordinary symbol, low probability state of ordinary symbol) are set in the lottery of ordinary symbols. Is. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 380 (d), when the gaming state is the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the lottery of the normal symbol. Is within the range of "5 to 28", and if it is within the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be a normal figure. Further, when the gaming state is a high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is within the range of "5 to 204" in the lottery of the normal symbol. If it is within the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal figure.

That is, in the 16th embodiment, in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol, the winning is won with a probability of 1/10, and in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol, the probability is 5/6. It is configured to win the prize. And, although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the normal state, the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as a game per normal symbol with a probability of 1/100 when the normal symbol hit (per normal symbol) is won. It is configured so that an easy long open hit game is executed. In addition, during the time saving state, the long open hit game is always executed when the player wins the game.

With this configuration, even in the normal state, it is possible to execute a winning game in which the ball can be won in the second winning opening 640 with a probability of 1/1000, so that the normal state can be executed. To have a player who is playing the game simultaneously execute a game in which the special figure 1 lottery is executed and a game in which the special figure 2 lottery is executed (a game aiming at a specific winning in the general drawing lottery). Can be done.

The second variation type counter CS2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 999, reach the maximum value (that is, 999), and then return to 0. The second variation type counter CS2 determines the variation pattern of 1 from the set variation pattern selection table 202lf. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this normal map fluctuation pattern, and the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is also a counter for determining the fluctuation time. The value of the second variation type counter CS2 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 403) of the main control device 110 is executed, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The normal diagram variation pattern selection table 202lf (see FIG. 384), which stores a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the second variation type counter CS2, is the main control device 110. It is provided in the ROM 202 of.

Returning to FIG. 378, the description will be continued. In the 16th embodiment, the variable type counter storage area is provided in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203la and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203lb, and the winning information stored in the reserved memory is stored in advance (the special symbol changes). By discriminating (before), the fluctuation pattern (variation time) that is actually executed is configured to be pre-readable. With this configuration, it is possible to determine the timing at which the special symbol change corresponding to the winning information of the special symbol stored on hold is executed.

Further, in the 16th embodiment, the winning information of the ordinary symbol, that is, the first random number counter used in the winning lottery of the ordinary symbol as the type of each counter value acquired when the ball passes through the through gate 67. It is used when setting the C2, the second variation type counter CS2 used when determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol, and the type of the winning game per normal symbol.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 379 (a), the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the 16th embodiment will be described. FIG. 379 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the 16th embodiment. The ROM 202 includes a first random number 16 table 202la, a first hit type selection 16 table 202lb, a normal symbol random number 16 table 202lc, a variation pattern 16 table 202le, a small hit type selection 16 table 202lb, and a big hit scenario. At least 16 tables 202 hl, a small hit scenario 16 table 202 li, a normal figure per type selection 16 table 202 ld, and a normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202 lf are provided.

The first random number 16 table 202la is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a hit in each game state is set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

First, with reference to FIG. 380, the contents specified in the random number 16 table 202la per first will be described. FIG. 380 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 16 table 202la. As shown in FIG. 380 (a), the first random number 16 table 202la is the special symbol 1 random number 16 table 202la1 referred to at the time of the winning lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and the second special symbol. It has a special symbol 2 random number 16 table 202la2 that is referred to when the winning lottery of (Special Figure 2) is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 380 (b), the contents specified in the special symbol 1 random number 16 table 202la1 will be described. FIG. 380 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special symbol 1 random number 16 table 202la1. As shown in FIG. 380 (b), "big hit" is defined in the range where the value of the first random number counter C1 is "0 to 3", and "small hit" is defined in "10, 11". That is, in the 16th embodiment, the probability of winning a big hit in the lottery of FIG. 1 is 1/250, and the probability of winning a small hit is 1/500.

Next, with reference to FIG. 380 (c), the contents specified in the special symbol 2 random number 16 table 202la2 will be described. FIG. 380 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special symbol 2 random number 16 table 202la2. As shown in FIG. 380 (c), "big hit" is defined in the range where the value of the first random number counter C1 is "0 to 3", and "small hit" is defined in "10 to 149". That is, in the 16th embodiment, the probability of winning a big hit in the lottery of FIG. 2 is 1/250, and the probability of winning a small hit is about 1 / 7.1.

That is, in the 16th embodiment, the same big hit probability is set in the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery, and the small hit probability is configured to be higher in the special figure 2 lottery. As described above, in the 16th embodiment, since the small hit winning is configured to be a trigger for executing the big hit game, the special figure 2 lottery is easier to execute the big hit game than the special figure 1 lottery. It will be a drawing lottery.

In the 16th embodiment, as described above, the same jackpot probability is set for the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery are set. You may set a different jackpot probability from the lottery. In addition, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability are set to constant values regardless of the gaming state, but the probability is not limited to this, and the probability of winning the jackpot or the small hit increases depending on the gaming state (high probability state). It may be configured to set a high probability state of a special symbol) and a low probability state of a low probability state (low probability state of a special symbol).

The first hit type selection 16 table 202lb is a data table for determining the type of the jackpot game for the first special symbol. The special figure 1 jackpot type selection 16 table 202lb1 and the type of the jackpot game for the second special symbol are determined. Special figure 2 big hit type selection 16 table 202lb2 which is a data table for this is set respectively.

First, the contents of the first type selection 16 table 202lb will be described with reference to FIG. 381 (a). FIG. 381 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first type selection 16 table 202lb. As shown in FIG. 381 (a), the first hit type selection 16 table 202lb includes the special figure 1 big hit type selection 16 table 202lb1 referred to when the big hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery, and the special figure 2 lottery. It has a special figure 2 jackpot type selection 16 table 202lb2, which is referred to when a jackpot is won in.

Here, with reference to FIG. 381 (b), the contents specified in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 16 table 202lb1 will be described. FIG. 381 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 16 table 202lb1. In the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment, when a big hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery, three types from big hit AA to big hit AC are set so as to be selected by the value of the first hit type counter C2. There is. Specifically, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is defined as "0", "big hit AA (15R time reduction 99 times jackpot)" is defined as the jackpot type, and "big hit AB" is defined in the range of "1 to 15". (7R time reduction 5 times big hit) "is specified, and" big hit AC (7R time reduction 1 time big hit) "is specified in the range of" 16 to 99 ".

That is, in the normal state where the left-handed game is performed and the special figure 1 lottery is executed, if a big hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery, the time saving state is always set (granted) after the big hit game is completed. There is. Then, it is configured so that the end condition of the time saving state is set differently according to the set jackpot type.

Specifically, when the jackpot AA is set as the jackpot type, only the above-mentioned common time saving end condition is set, so the winner (big hit or small hit) is won in the special map lottery, or the special map changes. The time saving state continues until (the sum of the special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation) reaches 99 times. In the 16th embodiment, a right-handed game is performed in which the special figure 2 lottery is executed during the time saving state. In the special figure 2 lottery, the probability of winning a big hit is 1/250 and the probability of winning a small hit is 1 /. Since it is set to 7.1, for example, when the time saving state based on the jackpot AA is set, the special figure fluctuation becomes a predetermined number of times (99 times) without winning in the special figure 2 lottery. The probability of reaching is 0.01% or less. Therefore, when the jackpot AA is selected, the game state is substantially set to the time saving state until the next jackpot game is executed.

Next, when the jackpot AB is set as the jackpot type, in addition to the above-mentioned common time-saving end condition, "the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 fluctuation is 5 times" is set as the corresponding time-saving end condition. Therefore, the probability that the special figure fluctuation reaches a predetermined number of times (5 times) without winning in the special figure 2 lottery (the probability that the corresponding time saving end condition is satisfied and the time saving state ends) is about 46%. .. That is, when the jackpot AB is set, that is, when the special figure 2 fluctuation number of times 5 times is set as the time saving end condition, the probability of winning (continuous chan probability) by the time the time saving ending condition is satisfied is It will be about 54%.

When the jackpot AC is set as the jackpot type, in addition to the above-mentioned common time-saving end condition, "special figure 2 fluctuation number of times is 1" is set as the corresponding time-saving end condition. Therefore, the probability that the special figure fluctuation reaches a predetermined number of times (once) without winning in the special figure 2 lottery (the probability that the corresponding time saving end condition is satisfied and the time saving state ends) is 85%. That is, when the jackpot AC is set, that is, when the special figure 2 variation number of times is set once as the time saving end condition, the probability of winning (continuous chan probability) by the time the time saving ending condition is satisfied is It will be about 15%.

As described above, the degree of advantage (probability of consecutive chan) of the set time saving state is configured to be different according to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won in Special Figure 1, and the jackpot AA. Is the most advantageous jackpot type, then the jackpot AB is the advantageous jackpot type, and the jackpot AC is the most disadvantageous jackpot type.

In addition, the number of round games executed as jackpot games is also specified to be different depending on the jackpot type, so that the jackpot AA is "15R", the jackpot AB, and AC are "7R" round games. It is stipulated in. As the number of round games increases in one jackpot game, the number of balls that the player can acquire (the number of prize balls) increases. Therefore, in terms of the jackpot games to be executed, the jackpot AA is the most player. It will be an advantageous jackpot type.

In the 16th embodiment, the jackpot type (big hit AA) having the highest probability of consecutive chans is configured to execute the jackpot game with the largest number of rounds (15R), but the present invention is not limited to this. The jackpot type with the highest probability of consecutive chans and the jackpot type in which the jackpot game with the largest number of rounds is executed may be different.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the most advantageous gaming state different according to the gaming situation. For example, if a jackpot is won just before the amusement park is closed, a jackpot type that can win more prize balls in one jackpot game than a jackpot type that is given (set) a time saving state with a high probability of consecutive chans. Is a more advantageous jackpot type, and if the pachinko machine 10 has a limit value for the number of times the time saving state is set across the jackpot game, one jackpot game in the jackpot winning just before reaching the limit. The jackpot type that can win many prize balls is the more advantageous jackpot type. On the other hand, for example, when the number of consecutive chans (the number of times a jackpot game is executed without shifting to the normal state even once) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times), a privilege (for example, valuable) is given to the player. In the pachinko machine 10 to which the image) can be given, if the player is trying to acquire the privilege, the jackpot type to which the time saving state with a high probability of consecutive chan is given (set) is the more advantageous jackpot type.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned consecutive-chan probability indicates the probability of winning based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the time saving state, but in the 16th embodiment, the special figure 2 lottery is performed in a predetermined number. It is configured so that it can be stored on hold up to (4 pieces). Therefore, even after the time saving end condition is satisfied and the state shifts to the normal state, the special figure 2 lottery can be executed by the number of special figure 2 hold (remaining special figure 2 hold number) stored in the hold. Special figure 2 It is configured so that it is possible to aim for a small hit by lottery. As described above, in the 16th embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit by the special figure 2 lottery is set to a high probability of about 1 / 7.1, so that the remaining special figure 2 hold number (maximum 4) is set. By the special figure 2 lottery of the corresponding number of times, it becomes possible to sufficiently aim at the small hit winning.

Specifically, when the number of remaining special figures 2 held is 1, the probability of winning a small hit (pull-back probability) in the special figure 2 lottery based on the remaining special figure 2 hold is about 14%, and the remaining special figure 2 is held. 2 When the number of holdings is 2, the pullback probability is about 28.5%, and when the number of remaining special figures 2 is 3, the pullback probability is about 39.6%, and the number of remaining special figures 2 holding balls. When there are four, the pullback probability is about 49%.

In this way, the special figure 2 lottery is configured to be memorable on hold, and the special figure 2 lottery based on the remaining special figure 2 hold is executed even after the transition from the time saving state to the normal state. Regardless of the result of the special figure 2 lottery during the time saving state, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game in order to acquire the special figure 2 hold until the end of the time saving state. Therefore, the operation of the game can be improved.

In addition, once the time saving state is set, the game period during the time saving state (continuous chan period) described above and the period during which the special figure 2 lottery based on the remaining special figure 2 hold in the normal state is executed (pull back). Since it is possible to aim for a small hit win in the special figure 2 lottery in the two periods (period) and, even though the time saving state is set, the special figure game is never executed. It is possible to reduce the probability of shifting to a normal state aiming at one lottery, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the 16th embodiment, the small hit is won by the special figure 2 lottery during the time saving state, and the big hit game (ream-chan big hit game) is executed based on the small hit winning during the normal state. Special Figure 2 It is configured so that it is easier to set a time saving state that is advantageous to the player when a small hit is won in a lottery and a big hit game (pull-back big hit game) is executed based on the small hit winning. .. As a result, even if the consecutive chan period has passed, the player can be made to play the game while expecting to win a small hit during the pullback period, so that the player is prevented from getting bored with the game early. can do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 381 (c), the contents specified in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 16 table 202lb2 will be described. FIG. 381 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 16 table 202lb2. In the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment, when a big hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, three types from big hit AD to big hit AF are set so as to be selected by the value of the first hit type counter C2. There is. Specifically, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 19", and "big hit AD (15R time reduction 99 times big hit)" is defined as the jackpot type, and the range is "20 to 69". "Big hit AE (12R time reduction 99 times big hit)" is specified, and "Big hit AF (7R time reduction 99 times big hit)" is specified in the range of "70 to 99".

That is, when a big hit is won by the special figure 2 lottery, an advantageous game state is set in which the time saving state continues until the special figure fluctuation reaches 99 times after the end of the big hit game. As a result, in the special figure 2 lottery, which is executed less frequently than the special figure 1 lottery, it is advantageous for the player when the big hit is won, which is set to be three times or more lower than the probability of winning the small hit. It is possible to reliably provide a gaming state. Therefore, for a player who has a special experience of winning a big hit in the special figure 2 lottery, a game that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a setting of one time reduction) is set, and the player's motivation to play is motivated. It is possible to suppress a significant decrease.

It should be noted that each jackpot type specified in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 16 table 202lb2 is also executed during one jackpot game according to the jackpot type, as in the above-mentioned special figure 1 jackpot type selection 16 table 202lb1. The number of round games is different, and it is stipulated that the round games of "15R" for jackpot AD, "12R" for jackpot AE, and "7R" for jackpot AF are executed. As the number of round games increases in one jackpot game, the number of balls (prize balls) that can be acquired by the player increases. Therefore, the jackpot AD is most advantageous to the player in terms of the jackpot game to be executed. It will be a big hit type.

Next, with reference to FIG. 380 (d), the contents of the random number 16 table 202 lc per ordinary symbol will be described. FIG. 380 (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the random number 16 table 202 lc per ordinary symbol.

As shown in FIG. 380 (d), in the random number 16 table 202 lc per ordinary symbol, the values referred to when the lottery per ordinary symbol is executed in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol and the normal in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol. The value to be referred to when executing the lottery per figure is specified. Specifically, in the low probability state of the normal symbol, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is in the range of "5 to 28". "Hit" is defined, and in the high probability state of the normal symbol, "hit" is defined in the range where the value of the second random number counter C4 is "5 to 204".

The 16 table 202ld for selecting the type per normal symbol is a data table for selecting the type per normal symbol, and when the normal symbol (normal diagram) lottery is executed with reference to the random number 16 table 202 lc per the ordinary symbol and the winning is won. It is referred to in. In the 16th embodiment, as a game per game executed when a player wins a game in a low probability state of a normal symbol, an electric accessory 640a is used so that a ball can win a prize in the second winning opening 640. A long open hit game that is opened and a short open hit game that opens the electric accessory 640a so that the ball is more difficult to win in the second winning opening 640 than the long open hit game are configured to be feasible. Therefore, different winning games are executed according to the type of winning game selected at the time of winning.

Here, with reference to FIG. 382, the contents specified in the type selection 16 table 202ld per drawing will be described. FIG. 382 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the type selection 16 table 202ld per general drawing. As shown in FIG. 382 (a), the 16 table 202ld for selecting the type per normal figure has two types of types per normal figure (2 types) according to the probability state of the normal symbol and the value of the acquired second type counter C6. It is configured so that A per normal figure and B) per normal figure are selected.

Specifically, the probability state of the normal symbol is the low probability state (low probability of the normal figure), and the value of the acquired second hit type counter C6 is defined as "0" and "A per normal figure" is defined. "B per normal figure" is specified in the range of "1 to 99". Further, the probability state of the normal symbol is the high probability state (high probability of the normal figure), and the value of the acquired second hit type counter C6 is defined as "A per normal figure" in the range of "0,1". "B per normal figure" is specified in the range of "2 to 99".

Next, the relationship between the type per map selected in the table 202ld and the game state at the time when the game per map is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 382 (b). do. FIG. 382 (b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the type of normal drawing and the opening operation content of the electric accessory 640a based on the game state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment, a lottery for hitting a normal symbol (normal figure) is executed according to a game state set at a timing for executing a winning lottery for a normal symbol (normal figure change start timing), and a winning lottery is executed. If the game is won, the game content per pachinko game is set according to the game state set at the timing of executing the game per pachinko machine (timing to stop the fluctuation of the pachinko machine). That is, since the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment is configured to shift the gaming state according to the lottery status and the fluctuation status of the special symbol (special symbol), it is independent of the special symbol lottery game. In the executed pachinko lottery game, different game states are set depending on the timing of executing the pachinko lottery and the timing of executing the pachinko game executed when the pachinko machine is won in the lottery. There is a case.

For example, if the normal figure lottery is executed during the special figure change (time reduction final change) in the state where the time saving end condition is satisfied, the random number 16 tables 202 lc per normal symbol is in a high probability state (normal figure height). The winning lottery is executed using the judgment value specified in (Probability). Then, in the case of winning, the fluctuation of the normal map is stopped after a predetermined fluctuation time of the normal map (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, and then the game per normal map is executed. Here, when the time saving final change ends during the normal drawing change and the game state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state, the normal state is set as the game state at the timing when the game per normal figure is executed. It will be.

In such a case, if the game mode of the game per normal map is set according to the game state set at the time when the normal map lottery is executed, the normal state is set even though the normal state is set. There is a problem that the game per game (game per long open) that is executed during the time saving state is executed as the game per game, and the player is provided with an excessively advantageous privilege (special figure 2 lottery). there were.

On the other hand, in the 16th embodiment, the game state set at the timing of executing the game per normal figure is determined, and the content of the game per normal figure is set based on the determination result. As in the above-mentioned example, when the gaming state shifts to the normal state during the fluctuation of the normal map, the game per normal map corresponding to the low probability state of the normal symbol can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous privilege (special figure 2 lottery).

Specifically, when A per normal figure is selected (set) as the type per normal figure, the game state set at the execution timing of the game per normal figure (when the electric accessory 640a is open). Regardless of, the game is executed per the long opening of the Fuzu. On the other hand, when B per normal figure is selected (set) as the type per normal figure, the game state set at the execution timing of the game per normal figure (when the electric accessory 640a is open) is a normal symbol. If it is in the low probability state (low probability of the normal figure), the game per open of the short open of the normal figure is executed, and if it is in the high probability state of the normal symbol (high probability of the normal figure), the game per long open of the normal figure is executed. Is stipulated as.

Here, we will explain the contents of the winning game, which is the game per game, the game per game with the long opening of the game, and the game with the game short with the game. The game per normal figure long opening is a game per game in which the electric accessory 640a is opened (positioned in the open state) for a long period of time so that the ball can easily win a prize in the second winning opening 640, and is 0.1. After a second closed state (opening period), the electric accessory 640a is opened for 1 second (first opening period), and then after a 1.5 second closed state (standby period), it is opened again for 0.5 seconds. (Second opening period) A game is executed per normal figure. The flow of this opening operation is stipulated in a scenario per game that is not shown, and when a game per game is executed, a scenario per game corresponding to the type and game state of the game is set and the main control is performed. By periodically updating the scenario for hitting a normal figure in the main process of the device 110, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed in accordance with the above-mentioned flow of the game for hitting a normal figure.

In addition, in the 16th embodiment, when the game per long opening of the normal figure is executed, two opening periods are set so as to secure a period in which the ball can win a prize in the second winning opening 640. is doing. Then, of the two opening periods, when the first opening period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the second winning opening 640, and the determination result is that the ball has not won the second winning opening 640. In the case of determining that, a caution screen (see FIG. 370 (a)) for alerting the player to play a game in which the ball is won in the second winning opening 640 is configured to be displayed. There is.

With this configuration, a player who is unaware that the game per long open (right-handed game) has been executed in the state where the normal state is set (the state in which the left-handed game is being performed). On the other hand, it is possible to notify the player to execute the right-handed game again, and it is possible to prevent the player from having an unfavorable game result. Further, in the 16th embodiment, the second opening operation (0.5 seconds) is performed after a waiting period of a predetermined period (1.5 seconds) after the caution screen (see FIG. 370 (a)) is displayed. It is configured to be executed.

This waiting period (1.5 seconds) is set to be longer than the time (about 0.5 seconds) until the ball launched by the player performing a right-handed game reaches the second winning opening 640. Has been done. As a result, it is possible for the player who has executed the right-handed game after seeing the display of the caution screen (see FIG. 370 (a)) to easily make the second winning opening 640 win the ball.

Further, in the 16th embodiment, when the scenario per game is updated with the passage of time and the scenario indicating the end is reached, the game per game is terminated, and the second prize is won during the game per game. Two types of end conditions for each play are set, in which the game is ended when the number of balls won in the mouth 640 reaches a predetermined number (for example, one).

Then, when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the first opening period and when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the second opening period, the ball wins the second winning opening 640. It is configured so that the notification mode for showing that it has been done is different. Specifically, if the ball wins the second prize opening 640 during the second opening period, there is a high possibility that the proper game (right-handed game) has not been executed from the start stage of the game per normal figure. , It is configured to display the game explanation (comment such as "Be sure to hit right during the game per game with the long opening of the game") so that the game can be played properly at the next game per game. This makes it possible to inform the player of the game content in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, since the above-mentioned game explanation is not notified to the player who has won the ball in the second winning opening 640 during the first opening period, the player repeatedly notifies the game content that has been grasped, and the game is played. It is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation.

On the other hand, in the game per opening of the normal figure short, the game per game in which the electric accessory 640a is opened for 0.1 seconds is executed after the closed state (opening period) of 0.1 seconds. The flow of this opening operation is stipulated in a scenario per game that is not shown, and when a game per game is executed, a scenario per game corresponding to the type and game state of the game is set and the main control is performed. By periodically updating the scenario for hitting a normal figure in the main process of the device 110, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed in accordance with the above-mentioned flow of the game for hitting a normal figure.

Since the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is as short as 0.1 seconds, the above-mentioned game per opening of the normal figure is a game per game in which the ball cannot be substantially made to win the second winning opening 640. .. Further, as shown in FIG. 382 (b), this game per normal figure short opening is a game per game that is executed only in the low probability state (low probability of the normal figure) of the normal symbol, and is described above. As you can see, the game per Fuzu short is executed 0.2 seconds after the game is started, so the game per game is executed while the player is executing the left-handed game. Even if the right-handed game is played, the game per hit is completed by the time the ball fired in the right-handed game reaches the second winning opening 640 (0.5 seconds). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the game per open short.

It should be noted that the electric accessory 640a may be configured so that the ball cannot win the second winning opening 640 during the game per open short of the normal figure. For example, the electric accessory 640a may be configured by the electric accessory 640a. In the open state, the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a is configured so that the sphere can flow down from one end side to the other end side, and only the ball flowing out from the other end side of the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a can win a prize. It is preferable to arrange the second winning opening 640 at the position so that the period during which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a is at least 0.5 seconds. With this configuration, when the game is executed per the short opening of the normal figure, the ball that flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a during the period (0.1 seconds) in which the electric accessory 640a is in the open state. Cannot reach the other end side, so that it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from winning the second winning opening 640.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment, the winning game content of the game per game is set according to the game state set at the timing when the game per game is executed. Therefore, for example, if you win a game in a short time (high probability state), you will win a game with a high probability, and the game per game based on the winning game will be in a normal state (low probability). Even if it is executed in the state), it is possible to make it difficult for the game to be executed per the long opening of the normal figure.

As shown in FIG. 382 (a), in the 16th embodiment, the ratio of the type per normal figure (A per normal figure) in which the game is executed per the long open of the normal figure is selected regardless of the gaming state. Is different between the low probability state of the normal symbol (low probability of the normal symbol) and the high probability state of the normal symbol (high probability of the normal symbol). At the time of probability, it is configured to be selected with a probability of 2%. With this configuration, the player wins the game when the probability is low, and wins the game when the game is high, rather than when the game is played when the game is low. It is possible to increase the probability that the game per long open of the normal figure will be executed when the game is executed per game when the accuracy of the figure is low. Therefore, even if a configuration is used in which the game content of the game per normal figure is set according to the game state at the timing when the game per normal figure is executed, the game is executed when the time saving state is changed to the normal state. It is possible to increase the probability that the game per game becomes a game per long open game, and it is possible to make the player pay close attention to which game content the game per game is executed.

The variation pattern 16 table 202le is a data table referred to when selecting a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol, and is a value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, a special symbol type, and a special symbol lottery ( Various fluctuation patterns (variation time) are selected based on the lottery result of the special drawing lottery) and the set game state. Since the basic technical idea of the variation pattern 16 table 202le is the same as that of each of the above-described embodiments or the various variation patterns used in each embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted. The description will be continued focusing on the characteristic contents of the variation pattern 16 table 202le used in the embodiment.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern 16 table 202le will be described with reference to FIG. 385 (a). FIG. 385 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the variation pattern 16 table 202le. As shown in FIG. 385 (a), the variation pattern 16 table 202le is referred to when the gaming state is the normal state and the normal variation pattern 16 table 202le1 is referred to when the gaming state is the time saving state. The time-saving variation pattern 16 table 202le2 is provided, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected using the data table corresponding to the gaming state set when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol.

Next, the contents of the normal variation pattern 16 table 202le1 included in the variation pattern 16 table 202le will be described with reference to FIG. 385 (b). FIG. 385 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the normal fluctuation pattern 16 table 202le1. As shown in FIG. 385 (b), the variation pattern 16 table 202le has the symbol type of the special symbol, the number of times the special symbol has changed since the normal state was set, the lottery result of the special symbol, and the acquired variation type counter. Different fluctuation patterns are defined depending on the value of CS1.

As described above, in the 16th embodiment, when the normal state is set as the game state, the game in which the special figure 1 lottery is mainly executed is configured, and the second special symbol (2nd special symbol ( As a pattern in which the lottery of the special figure 2) is executed, a pattern in which the special figure 2 lottery corresponding to the special figure 2 hold stored at the end of the time saving state is executed and a long opening hit in the normal figure lottery. There is a pattern in which a special figure 2 lottery is executed based on a ball winning in the second winning opening 640 during a game per long opening.

Further, in the 16th embodiment, as a variation effect corresponding to the final variation in the time-saving state, a time-saving final variation effect capable of notifying the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold stored at the start of the time-saving final variation is executed. It is configured in. Then, the effect result of the time reduction final variation effect is continuously displayed until the special figure 2 variation executed (in the normal state) after the time reduction state ends.

The variation pattern 16 table 202le corresponds to the special figure 2 lottery executed during the number of special symbol variations 1 to 4 as the variation pattern of the second special symbol (special figure 2) variation executed in the normal state. The fluctuation pattern is configured to be a special fluctuation pattern.

Specifically, if the first special symbol change after the normal state is set is the special figure 2 change, and if the lottery result of the special figure 2 change is "off", the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 "Short miss A (0.5 seconds)" is selected regardless of the value of, and in the case of "hit (big hit, small hit)", "short hit A (2 seconds)" is selected. In addition, if the second special symbol change after the normal state is set is the special figure 2 change, and if the lottery result of the special figure 2 change is "off", the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is used. Regardless, "Short off A (0.5 seconds)" is selected, and in the case of "Hit", "Short hit B (1.5 seconds)" is selected, and the special symbol change after the normal state is set. If the third time is a special figure 2 fluctuation, and if the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation is "off", "short deviation A (0.5 seconds)" regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1. Is selected, and in the case of "hit", "short hit C (1 second)" is selected. Then, if the fourth special symbol change after the normal state is set is the special figure 2 change, and if the lottery result of the special figure 2 change is "off", the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is used. Regardless, "short hit A (0.5 seconds)" is selected, and in the case of "hit", "short hit D (0.5 seconds)" is selected.

With this configuration, if the number of special figure 2 holds is the maximum number (4) at the end of the time saving state, the special figure 2 lottery corresponding to the special figure 2 hold will be won (small hit). , The period until the prize is won (the period during which the second special symbol (special figure 2) is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the hit) and the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery corresponding to the special figure 2 hold are all. It is possible to unify the period until it comes off to 2 seconds.

Therefore, for example, regardless of whether there is winning information in the special figure 2 hold or not, simply controlling the result display for 2 seconds after the end of the time saving final fluctuation makes the player feel uncomfortable. It is possible to execute the special figure 2 fluctuation in the normal state without giving. In addition, it is possible to unify the timing at which the identification information indicating the winning is stopped and displayed (2 seconds after the normal state is set), regardless of the number of winnings in the special figure 2 hold. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know how many special figures 2 are held to win the prize.

Further, as shown in FIG. 385 (b), when the number of special symbol fluctuations is "5 times or more" as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation in the normal state, the number of special figure 2 reserved at the end of the time saving state. Since it is a special figure 2 lottery that is executed based on the fact that the game is executed per the long opening of the normal figure in the normal state and the ball wins in the second winning opening 640, the above-mentioned series of productions is performed. A variation pattern (variation (10 seconds)) for properly executing the above is selected, and based on the selected variation pattern, a display mode for indicating that the present is the special figure 2 variation period during a series of effects ( The effect mode) is set.

Next, the contents of the time saving variation pattern 16 table 222ee2 referred to when the time saving state is set will be described. FIG. 386 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a variation pattern of a special drawing lottery executed when a time saving state is set.

In the 16th embodiment, when the time saving state is set, the special drawing 2 lottery, which tends to give a lottery result advantageous to the player with respect to the special drawing 1 lottery, is more likely to be executed than the normal state, so that the time saving state is set. When set, a right-handed game for executing the special figure 2 lottery is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 361, the game board 13 is configured so that it is difficult for the ball to win the first winning opening 64, which is the trigger for executing the special figure 1 lottery, when the right-handed game is performed. Therefore, the special figure 1 lottery executed during the time saving state in which the right-handed game is executed is executed based on the special drawing 1 hold already acquired at the end timing of the jackpot game in which the time saving state is set. It will be one lottery.

Specifically, in the state where the jackpot is won in the state where the normal state is set and the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game (the time saving initial setting state), the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. If the special figure 2 hold cannot be obtained because the easy game is not performed and the special figure 1 hold is held at that time, the special figure 1 lottery will be executed.

In this case, as the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special figure 1 lottery executed during the period until the special figure 2 lottery is executed in the time reduction initial setting state, the fluctuation time for a long time (for example, 60 seconds) is used. If it is set, there is a problem that the special figure 2 change cannot be executed until the special figure 1 change is completed, and the game in the time saving state cannot be smoothly performed.

On the other hand, in the 16th embodiment, a short time (0.2 seconds) is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation executed during the time saving state. As a result, even if the time saving state is set while the maximum number (4) of the special figure 1 hold is secured, the special figure 1 change can be executed without disturbing the special figure 2 change.

Further, in the 16th embodiment, the end screen of the jackpot game is configured to be continuously displayed even after the jackpot game is completed until the special figure 2 variation is executed. As a result, it is possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to understand that the fluctuation of Special Figure 1 fluctuates in a short time during the time saving state. Further, when the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery executed during the time saving state is a big hit, the end screen of the big hit game continuously displayed is configured to shift to the big hit game screen.

The normal map fluctuation pattern selection table 202lf is a data table that is referred to when selecting a fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a normal symbol fluctuation (normal map fluctuation), and is a game state at the time when the normal symbol fluctuation is executed. It is configured so that a different fluctuation pattern (variation time) is selected based on the lottery result of the normal map fluctuation and the acquired value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2.

Here, the contents of the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202lf will be described with reference to FIG. 384. FIG. 384 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the normal map fluctuation pattern selection table 202 lf. As shown in FIG. 384, in the 16th embodiment, as the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation, a short fluctuation (2 seconds) in which a short fluctuation time is set and a long fluctuation in which a fluctuation time longer than the short fluctuation is set are set. (30 seconds to 60 seconds) and is configured to be selected.

Then, when the long fluctuation is selected as the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation, the normal map fluctuation effect is executed. In addition, in the 16th embodiment, only during the period in which the normal state in which it is difficult to win the long opening of the normal figure is set, the fluctuation effect of the normal figure to suggest that the winning is won in the long opening of the normal figure is executed. Therefore, long fluctuations (30 seconds to 60 seconds) are specified only in the data table referenced during the normal state.

Specifically, if the game state at the time when the normal figure change is executed is the normal state (low probability state of the normal symbol) and the lottery result of the normal figure change is "A per normal figure", the acquisition is obtained. The value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is "Public map long fluctuation A (30 seconds)" in the range of "0 to 499", and "Public map long fluctuation B (60 seconds)" in the range of "500 to 999". However, if the lottery result of the normal map fluctuation is "B per normal map", the value of the acquired second fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 999". A (2 seconds) "is specified. In addition, when the lottery result of the normal map fluctuation is "off", the value of the acquired second fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 996", and the "normal map short fluctuation A (2 seconds)" is set to ". "997,998" defines "Fuzu long fluctuation A (30 seconds)", and "999" defines "Fuzu long fluctuation B (60 seconds)". On the other hand, when the gaming state at the time when the normal figure change is executed is the time saving state (high probability state of the normal symbol), regardless of the lottery result of the normal figure change and the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2. "Public map short fluctuation A (2 seconds)" is specified.

As described above, in the 16th embodiment, when the lottery result of the normal map fluctuation is "A per normal map", that is, when the normal map long opening hit, the normal map long fluctuation is the normal map long fluctuation time. It is configured to be easy to select. Therefore, it is possible to expect the player to win the Fuzu long opening by executing the Fuzu fluctuation effect. Further, it is configured so that a different fluctuation time (30 seconds or 60 seconds) can be selected as the long fluctuation in which the normal map fluctuation effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the period from the execution of the normal map fluctuation effect to the start of the game per long opening of the normal map. Therefore, for example, when the normal map variation effect is started. It is possible to make it difficult for the game of stopping the firing of the ball, waiting for the lapse of a specific period (for example, 60 seconds), and then firing the ball again.

In addition, although it is slight, even if the lottery result of the normal map fluctuation is out of order, the normal map long fluctuation is selected, so even if the normal map fluctuation effect is executed, it is normal. Figure It is possible to leave the possibility that the player has not won the long opening. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player to the end of the normal drawing fluctuation production.

In the 16th embodiment, the long fluctuation (30 seconds or 60 seconds) is always selected when the "A per Fuzu", which is the long opening of the Fuzu, is won. Not limited to this, for example, "short fluctuation" or "middle fluctuation" (10 to 15) that is longer than "short fluctuation" and shorter than "long fluctuation" in some cases when "A per normal figure" is won. Seconds) may also be configured to be selectable. If a variation pattern other than "long variation" is selected, it is preferable to configure it so that the normal map variation effect is not executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to execute the game per long opening of the game without executing the staging of the game, so that it is possible to provide the player with a game that is unexpected. It is possible to predict the execution timing of the game per long opening of the normal figure and make it difficult to perform the game of firing the ball according to the predicted timing.

Further, in the 16th embodiment, when the lottery result of the normal figure fluctuation is "B per normal figure" in which the "game per normal figure short" is executed as the game per normal figure, "long fluctuation" is selected. It is configured not to be executed, but it is not limited to this, and it may be configured so that "long fluctuation" is selected.

The small hit type selection 16 table 202 lg is a data table referred to when selecting a small hit type set when a small hit is won in a special drawing lottery.

Here, with reference to FIG. 383, the small hit type selection 16 table 202 lg will be described. FIG. 383 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small hit type selection 16 table 202 lg, and FIG. 383 (b) is a schematic diagram of the contents specified in the special figure 1 small hit type selection 16 table 202 lg1. FIG. 383 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special figure 2 small hit type selection 16 table 202 lg2.

As the small hit type of the first special symbol, three types of small hit AA, small hit AB, and small hit AC are set so as to be selected by the value of the small hit type counter C5. Specifically, when the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any of "0 to 39", the small hit type is "small hit AA (7R time reduction 5 times big hit when passing V)". Will be. That is, the value of "0 to 39" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value. When the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any of "40 to 49", the small hit type is "small hit AB (7R time reduction when passing V, 9 times big hit)". That is, the value of "40 to 49" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value. Then, when the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any of "50 to 99", the small hit type is "small hit AC (no 2R time reduction when passing V)". That is, the value of "50 to 99" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value.

Here, in the small hit AA and the small hit AB, the type of the big hit game to be executed after the game ball enters the V winning opening 650 in the small hit game is set. Further, the small hit AC is a small hit in which the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening 650 in the small hit game. In the case of the small hit AA, the 7R time saving 5 times big hit is set, and after the small hit AA is executed, the big hit in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state is executed, and then the time saving game state is 5 It is configured to set a time-saving game (a period until the special symbol is changed five times and stopped and displayed). Further, in the case of the small hit AB, the 7R time reduction 99 times big hit is set, and after the small hit AB is executed, the big hit game in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 7R open state is executed, and after the big hit game, the big hit game is executed. It is configured so that five time-saving games (the period until the special symbol change is executed five times and stopped and displayed) are set.

Then, in the case of the small hit AC, the 2R time saving no big hit is set, and after the small hit AC is executed, the big hit game in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 2R open state is executed, and after the big hit game, the big hit game is executed. The time-saving game state is not set, and the normal game state is set. In this way, the small hit AB is executed the same number of rounds as the small hit AA in the big hit game, but the time saving game state after the big hit game is 99 times, which is the largest number compared to other small hit types ( Since the period until the special symbol is changed 99 times and stopped and displayed) is set, it is set to be the most advantageous small hit for the player. Then, in the small hit AA, the same number of rounds as the small hit AB is executed in the big hit game, but the time-saving game state after the big hit game is completed is 5 times (the change of the special symbol is executed 5 times). Since the period until the stop display is displayed) is set, the small hit is disadvantageous to the player when compared with the small hit AB. Further, the small hit AC has two rounds in the big hit game, and further, the time-saving game state is not set as the game state after the big hit game is completed, and the normal game state is set, which is the most disadvantageous for the player. It is a small hit type.

FIG. 383 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 small hit type selection 16 table 202lb2. As the small hit type of the second special symbol, the above-mentioned two types of small hit AD and small hit AE are set so as to be selected by the value of the small hit type counter C5. Specifically, when the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state, the small hit type when the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any of "0 to 9" is "small hit AD". (When passing V, 15R time reduction 99 times big hit) ". That is, the value of "0 to 9" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value. When the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any of "10 to 99", the small hit type is "small hit AE (7R time reduction 5 times big hit when passing V)". That is, the value of "10 to 99" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value.

Further, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the small hit type when the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any of "0 to 39" is "small hit AD (passing V). Time 15R time reduction 99 times big hit) ”. That is, the value of "0 to 39" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value. Further, when the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any of "140 to 99", the small hit type is "small hit AE (7R time reduction 5 times big hit when passing V)". That is, the value of "40 to 99" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value.

Here, in the small hit AD and the small hit AE, the type of the big hit game to be executed after the game ball enters the V winning opening 650 in the small hit game is set. In the case of the small hit AD, the 15R time saving 99 times big hit is set, and after the small hit AD is executed, the big hit in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 15R open state is executed, and then 99 as the time saving game state. It is configured to set a time-saving game (a period until the special symbol is changed 99 times and stopped and displayed). Further, in the case of the small hit AE, the 7R time reduction 5 times big hit is set, and after the small hit AE is executed, the big hit game in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 7R open state is executed, and then the variable winning is executed. A jackpot in which the device 65 is set to the 5R open state is executed, and then 5 time-saving games (a period until the special symbol change is executed 5 times and stopped is displayed) are set as the time-saving game state. It is configured.

In this way, regarding the small hit type for the second special symbol, when the V winning opening 650 is won more than the small hit type for the first special symbol, the small hit in which the time-saving gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set is set. The rate at which the type is selected is set high. As a result, when the time saving game state is set, the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed, and the probability of being determined as a small hit is higher than that of the lottery of the first special symbol. By determining that it is a small hit and winning the V winning opening 650, it is possible to easily execute the big hit game in which the time saving game state is set again. As a result, the jackpot game can be given to the player while the time-saving game state is continued, and the value of the time-saving game state can be further increased.

In this embodiment, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are determined to be small hits and the variable display is stopped, the LED corresponding to the small hit type of the first symbol display device 37 is lit and displayed. It is configured to be. Therefore, when the player is in the time-saving game, he / she wants to perform the game so that the more advantageous jackpot game (the jackpot game in which the time-saving game state is set) is executed by effectively using the remaining time-saving number of times. .. Then, the small hit game type displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is determined, and only when the small hit type is not given the time-saving game state, the launch of the game ball is stopped and the V entry port 650a is reached. There is a risk that a game method that is disadvantageous to the game store side, in which the game is played so that the game ball does not enter, is executed. However, in the present embodiment, the V winning door 650b is set to the open state for 1.6 seconds 0.1 seconds after the variation display determined to be a small hit in the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. In the configuration of the present embodiment, which is fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds and takes 2 seconds to reach the V entry port 650a, the game ball is fired after confirming the first symbol display device 37. Therefore, it is difficult to enter the ball into the V entry port 650a, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are determined to be small hits, the fluctuation is stopped, and the right-handed notification is the third symbol display device 81. It seems that it is difficult to enter the game ball into the V entrance 600a in the small hit game in all the small hit types unless the game ball is immediately launched to the right side area and the game is performed. It is configured in. As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of the game method, which is significantly disadvantageous to the game store side.

The jackpot scenario 16 table 202hl is a data table in which the jackpot scenario in which the operation contents during the jackpot game are set is specified, and the opening period of the jackpot game (the first round game is executed after the jackpot game is started). The jackpot type is the period until the game is played), the round period (the maximum period during which one round game is set), and the interval period between rounds (the period from the end of the round game to the start of the next round game). It is stipulated corresponding to.

The small hit scenario 16 table 202li is a data table in which a small hit scenario in which the operation content during the small hit game is set is set.

The jackpot scenario 16 table 202hl and the jackpot scenario 16 table 202li have the contents specified in each scenario for the jackpot scenario table 202aa and the jackpot scenario table 202ab of the above-mentioned A1 embodiment. The only difference is that it corresponds to the content of the big hit game or the small hit game executed in the embodiment, and the other points are the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the 16th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 379 (b). The RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the 16th embodiment has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203 la, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203 lb, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203 lc, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203 ld, and a special. Symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203le, normal symbol hold ball number counter 203 lf, time saving medium counter 203 lg, big hit start flag 203 hl, big hit medium flag 203 li, small hit start flag 203 lg, small hit medium flag 203 lk, V passing place big hit type value 203 lm , V flag 203 ln, and other memory area 203 ln.

As shown in FIG. 378, the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203la has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has. , Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type counter C5 acquired based on winning the first ball opening 64 is stored. ..

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting prize), each value of each counter C1 to C3, C5 is acquired, and the acquired data is the four holding areas (4 holding areas (starting winning). Among the vacant areas (holding 1st area to holding 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203la are transferred to the execution area. A determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having a smaller area number. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203la, the data is shifted only in the reserved area (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203lb is different only in that the counter values acquired for winning the second winning opening 640 are stored for the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203la. Since the configurations of the above are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Similar to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203 la or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203 lb, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203 lb has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). ) And. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the sphere passes through either the left or right through gate 67, and the acquired data is obtained in four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). ) Is stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th) in the vacant area. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203la, the winning order is maintained and the data corresponding to the winning is stored. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203 lc is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203la, the prizes stored in the other hold areas are won. The shift process is performed to pack the data of the above into the holding area which is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is a variable display (first symbol) of the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting prize). 3 This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the symbol display device 81 (variation display) up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. 1 is added (see C304 in FIG. 394). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see C210 in FIG. 390).

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203ld (the number of reserved balls N in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the special symbol 1 reserved ball count command (C211 in FIG. 390, FIG. 394). See C305). The special symbol 1 reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 changes the number of balls held in the main control device 110 by the special symbol 1 hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203ld is changed. The value of the displayed number of reserved balls itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual reserved ball in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol (reserved symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203le is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld in that the number of reserved balls is stored in the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the detailed description thereof will be omitted. When the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203le is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the special symbol 2 reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203lf sets the number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203lf is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203 lf is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed.

If the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203 lf (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the sphere passes through either the left or right through gate 67, the second random number counter C4 A value is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203 lc. On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203 lf is 4 when the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203 lc.

The time-saving medium counter 203 lg is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time-saving gaming state. A counter value corresponding to the number of time reductions is set in the time reduction medium counter 203 lg, and by subtracting one by one at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol stops, the time reduction until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol set in the time reduction game state ends. It is configured to set the game state.

The jackpot start flag 203hl is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the jackpot game. When the fluctuation of the special symbol whose lottery result is determined to be a big hit is stopped, the big hit start flag 203hl is set to ON (see FIG. 390: C219). When it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203hl is on and it is determined that the jackpot start timing is reached, it is set to off. The jackpot start flag 203hl is set to off in the initial state, and is configured to be backed up and maintain the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is turned off.

The jackpot middle flag 203li is a flag indicating that the jackpot game is in progress. The change of the special symbol whose determination result is a big hit is stopped, and it is set to ON at the timing when the big hit game is started (FIG. 404: C1203). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (when it is determined that the game of the number of rounds corresponding to the set jackpot type has been completed), it is configured to be set to off. This jackpot middle flag 203li is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is retained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of the power failure or the like when a power failure or the like occurs. It is configured to.

The small hit start flag 203lj is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the small hit game. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose judgment result is a small hit is stopped. When it is determined that the small hit start flag 203lj is on and it is determined that it is the start timing of the small hit game, it is set to off. This small hit start flag 203lj is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure occurs is backed up and held. It is configured to be.

The small hit medium flag 203 lk is a flag indicating that the small hit game is in progress. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose judgment result is a small hit is stopped. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (when it is determined that the game of the set number of rounds of the small hit has ended), it is configured to be set to off. This small hit medium flag 203lk is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure occurs is backed up and held. It is configured to be.

The jackpot type value 203 lm when passing through V is a memory for storing data for determining the jackpot type that is set when a ball wins in the V winning opening 650 within the V valid period when the small hit game is executed. It is an area. As the jackpot type value 203 lm when passing through V, the data value corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the determined jackpot type is stored when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped. When a ball wins in the V winning opening 650 during the V valid period, the V flag 203ln corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the data value stored in the jackpot type value 203lm at the time of passing V is set to ON. ing. At the end of the small hit game, the data value stored in the big hit type value 203 lm when passing through V is configured to be cleared. This V-passing jackpot type value 203 lm is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure occurs is backed up. It is configured to be held by.

The V flag 203ln is set to turn on the flag corresponding to the big hit type corresponding to the type of the small hit game being executed when the ball enters the V winning opening 650 during the V valid period in the small hit game. The flag. By determining whether or not this V flag 203ln is on at the end of the small hit game, it is identified that there was a prize in the V winning opening 650 during the V valid period, and the flag set to on. The type of jackpot to be executed is determined and the start of the corresponding jackpot game is set. This V flag 203ln is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is maintained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of the power failure or the like when a power failure or the like occurs. It is configured as follows.

The special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203ll is a counter for measuring the fluctuation number of the second special symbol, and a specific counter value is set when the time saving state is set. Then, when the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed during the time saving state, the counter value is subtracted, and when the counter value after subtraction becomes 0, the time saving state ends. That is, the special figure 2 fluctuation frequency counter 203ll is referred to when determining whether or not to end the time saving state, and constitutes a part of the time saving ending condition set in plurality.

In the 16th embodiment, the counter value set in the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203 ll is configured to be different depending on the winning jackpot type. This makes it possible to make the ease of ending the time-saving state different depending on the type of jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested not only in whether or not the jackpot is won, but also in the set jackpot type.

Next, with reference to FIG. 387, the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the 16th embodiment will be described. FIG. 387 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 16th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 387 (a), the ROM 222 in the present embodiment is provided with at least the variation pattern selection 16 table 222la.

First, the contents of the variation pattern selection 16 table 222la will be described with reference to FIG. 388. FIG. 388 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 16 table 222la, and FIG. 388 (b) is a variation pattern selection 16 table 222la having a time saving final variation pattern selection 16 table. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content specified in 222la3.

As shown in FIG. 388 (a), the variation pattern selection 16 table 222la has three variation pattern selection tables in association with the gaming state and the variation state. Specifically, the gaming state is in the normal state. The normal variation pattern selection 16 table 222la1 referred to in a certain case, the time reduction variation pattern selection 16 table 222la2 referred to in the time saving state, and the time saving final use referred to in the case of the final variation in the time saving state. It has a variation pattern selection 16 table 222la3 and.

The above-mentioned variation pattern selection 16 table 222la1 for normal use and the variation pattern selection 16 table 222la2 for time saving have the same technical concept as the variation pattern selection table described in each of the above-described embodiments or embodiments. It is a data table in which a display variation pattern (effect mode) corresponding to a variation pattern (variation time, lottery result, symbol type) included in the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 is selected. , The detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The time saving final variation pattern selection 16 table 222la3 is referred to when selecting the final variation in the time saving state, that is, the effect mode of the variation effect for the special figure variation when the time saving end condition is satisfied by executing the variation. In addition to the symbol type and lottery result of the fluctuation, the special figure 2 holding ball number (value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223 lc) and the presence / absence of a hold inside (winning information storage area 223la) It is configured so that a different variation pattern (effect mode) is selected based on the determination result of whether or not the winning information indicating the winning is included in the winning information stored in.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 388 (b), when the time reduction final variation is the special figure 1, that is, among the time reduction end conditions, one of the common time reduction end conditions is "99 times of special figure fluctuations". If the special figure change when "" is established is the special figure 1 change, "the final time saving for special figure 1" is selected as the change pattern regardless of the lottery result of the change and the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2. Will be done.

Next, when the time saving final change is the special figure 2, the lottery result (win / fail judgment result) of the change is "hit", and the special figure 2 reserved ball number is "0", the change pattern is "time saving final". If "A" is selected, the number of balls held in Special Figure 2 is "1, 2", and the winning information indicating a hit is included in the holding of Special Figure 2, "Final A in a short time" is selected as the fluctuation pattern. If the winning information indicating the winning is not included in the special figure 2 hold, "time saving final B" is selected as a fluctuation pattern.

Then, if the lottery result (win / fail judgment result) of the change is "win", the number of balls held in special figure 2 is "3", and the winning information indicating the hit is included in the hold of special figure 2, the change occurs. If "time saving final C" is selected as the pattern and the winning information indicating a hit is not included in the special figure 2 hold, "time saving final D" is selected as a variation pattern.

On the other hand, when the time saving final change is in Special Figure 2, the lottery result (hit / fail judgment result) of the change is "missing", and the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is "0", the change pattern is "time saving final E". Is selected, the number of balls held in Special Figure 2 is "1, 2", and if the winning information indicating a hit is included in the reserved ball in Special Figure 2, "Time saving final B" is selected as the fluctuation pattern. If the winning information indicating a hit is not included in the special figure 2 hold, "time saving final F" is selected as a fluctuation pattern.

In addition, if the lottery result (win / fail judgment result) of the change is "missing", the number of balls held in special figure 2 is "3", and the winning information indicating a hit is included in the holding of special figure 2, it changes. If "time saving final D" is selected as the pattern and the winning information indicating a hit is not included in the special figure 2 hold, "time saving final E" is selected as a variation pattern.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 16th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 387 (b). FIG. 387 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the 16th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 387 (b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 16th embodiment includes the winning information storage area 223 la and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223 lb in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113. , Special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223 lc, fluctuation start flag 223 ld, stop type selection flag 223 le, effect counter 223 lf, SW effective time counter 223 lg, state storage area 223 hl, series effect flag 223 li, pseudo series effect flag 223 lg, time saving final variation Flag 223 lk, small hit caution flag 223 ll, non-variable winning flag 223 lm, special figure fluctuation time counter 223 ln, normal figure fluctuation time counter 223 lo, continuous continuous effect flag 223 lp, series effect counter 223 lq, and other memory area 223 z are provided at least. There is.

The prize information storage area 223la has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and prize information is stored in each of these areas. From the information stored in the winning information storage area 223la, the lottery result of the reserved ball or the like can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 before the fluctuation starts.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223 lb is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld of the main control device 110. ), Which is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the variable effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld stored in the RAM 203l of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223 lb is used to hold the first special symbol. It is designed to manage numbers.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the first winning opening 64, or in the main control device 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and held. When the number of balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203ld after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203ld of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command. Special symbol 1 Stored in the reserved ball count counter 223lb. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223 lb according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol 1 hold ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203ld.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223 lb is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223 lb, and the stored special symbol 1 hold ball number. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223 lb, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the hold ball number value indicated by the command, that is, the hold ball corresponding to the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223 lb of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the numerical symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223 lb is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203 ld of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223 lc stores the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223 lb based on the reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. Since it is different only in that it is done, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The variation start flag 223ld is turned on when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. When the variation start flag 223ld is turned on, the variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223le is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see C2105 in FIG. 406), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See C4007 in FIG. 415). When the stop type selection flag 223le is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

The effect counter 223 lf is a counter used for advance notice effect and various lottery. It is updated repeatedly in the range of 0 to 198. Although not shown, it is updated by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed.

The SW effective time counter 223 lg is a storage area in which the period for which the frame button 22 is determined to be valid is stored.

The state storage area 223hl is a storage area for temporarily storing the current gaming state, and stores information included in the state command output from the main control device 110. In the present embodiment, in the state storage area 223hl, information indicating a game state (normal state, time saving state), information indicating a time saving end condition in the time saving state, and a winning type (big hit type, set when a big hit is won). It is configured to store information indicating the small hit type). Then, the effect mode is variably set based on various information stored in the state storage area 223hl.

Further, although detailed description is omitted, the state storage area 223hl is configured to temporarily store the game state set in the past in addition to the information indicating the current game state. With this configuration, it is possible to execute changes based on the transition state of the gaming state (which gaming state has transitioned to which gaming state).

The series effect flag 223li is a flag for indicating that the execution condition of the series effect is satisfied, and is set to be turned on when the execution condition of the series effect is satisfied. Here, in the present embodiment, in the normal state, when a series of effects is set as the variation pattern of the winning special figure lottery, or when a long variation of the normal symbol is executed, the execution condition of the series of effects is executed. Is configured to hold.

The series effect flag 223li is used when a series effect is set (see C4207 in FIG. 417) or in a hit variation effect setting process (see C4112 in FIG. 419) in the normal drawing effect setting process (see C4112 in FIG. 417). When a series of effects is set (C4402: Yes in FIG. 419), it is set to ON (C4208 in FIG. 417, C4403 in FIG. 419), and in the small hit related command processing (see C3504 in FIG. 412 (a)). , C3701 in FIG. 412 (a), which is referred to when setting the effect mode during the small hit game. Further, it is referred to when determining whether or not a new series of staging can be executed in the variable staging setting process (C4004 in FIG. 416) and the staging setting process for normal drawing (see C4117 in FIG. 417). Then, in the series effect update process (see C4503 in FIG. 421), it is set to off when it is determined that the continuous execution condition of the series effect is not satisfied (see C4613 in FIG. 421).

As described above, in the present embodiment, a series of effects are executed by a plurality of triggers (special drawing lottery, general drawing lottery). Even in such a configuration, by using the series effect flag 223li, it is possible to prevent the series effect from being set (executed) in duplicate.

The pseudo series effect flag 223lj is a flag for indicating that the lottery result of the special figure variation is out of order and the execution condition of the series effect is satisfied, and the series effect is set as the variation effect of the special figure out-of-figure variation. It is set to on if. This pseudo-series effect flag 223lj is set to have a lower priority than the above-mentioned series-effect flag 223li, and when the same series-effect is being executed, the series-effect flag 223li is set to ON. , It is configured so that different effect setting processes are executed depending on the case where the pseudo series effect flag 223lj is set to ON.

Specifically, when the series effect flag 223li is set to ON in the effect setting process for normal drawing (see C4117 in FIG. 417) (for example, the series effect is executed as the hit variation effect of the special figure variation). Case) is configured so that a new series of effects is not executed even when the fluctuation of the normal map satisfies the execution condition of the series of effects, whereas the pseudo series of effects flag 223lj is set to ON. (For example, when a series of effects is executed as an out-of-order variation effect of the special figure variation), the normal map variation satisfies the execution condition of the series effect, and the special condition is satisfied. In this case, a new series of effects (special series of effects) can be executed (see C4211 in FIG. 417).

In this way, in a state where the same series of effects is being executed, a process of executing a new series of effects based on the execution trigger of the series of effects being executed (a process of replacing the effect mode of the series of effects being executed). Since it is possible to change whether or not to perform it, it is possible to diversify the production contents of the series of productions. Further, since the effect mode of the series effect is replaced only when the effect result that is more advantageous to the player than the effect result of the series effect being executed can be displayed, the effect mode of the series effect being executed is replaced. It is possible to make the player watch a series of effects while expecting that the number will change.

The time saving final fluctuation flag 223lk is a flag for indicating that the current special map fluctuation is the final fluctuation in the time saving state, and is set to ON when the current special map fluctuation is the final fluctuation in the time saving state. .. By setting the time saving final variation flag 223 lk to ON, it is possible to set the effect mode for the time saving final variation.

The small hit caution flag 223ll is a flag indicating that the ball has not passed through a specific area even after a predetermined period has elapsed during the small hit game, and is a predetermined period (1 second) after the small hit game is started. Is set to on when the sphere has not passed through a specific area even after the passage of time. Then, when the small hit caution flag 223 ll is set to ON, a guidance display mode (see FIG. 371 (a)) for causing the right-handed game to be performed during the small hit game is displayed. Then, it is set to off at the timing when the small hit game ends.

The non-variable winning flag 223 lm is a flag for indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation is not executed when the ball passes through the through gate 67 in the normal state, and is a flag when the ball passes through the through gate 67. Special figure 1 Set to ON when the fluctuation is not executed. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to perform a left-handed game in a normal state, to win a ball in the first winning opening 64, and to execute a special drawing 1 lottery. Then, a fuzu lottery is executed based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 provided in the left game area, and when the lottery result of the fuzu lottery is a fuzu long opening, the electric accessory 640a Since the game per long opening is executed, a right-handed game is performed in order to make the second winning opening 640 win the ball.

That is, when the game is normally performed, the special figure 1 variation is executed at the timing when the ball is passed through the through gate 67. On the other hand, for example, in a state where the normal state is set, when a game is performed in which the ball is passed through the through gate 67 provided in the right game area of the game board 13, the ball is passed through the through gate 67. It means that the special figure 1 fluctuation is not executed at the timing of making it. Here, as the board surface configuration of the game board 13 of the 16th embodiment, the ball fired by the left-handed game is fired by the right-handed game rather than the ratio of passing through the through gate 67 provided in the left game area. The ratio of the ball passing through the through gate 67 provided in the right game area is higher.

In this way, in the case of performing a right-handed game and performing a malicious game that attempts to execute only the Fuzu lottery in the normal state, even if the player wins the long opening by the Fuzu lottery, the Fuzu It is configured so that the fluctuation effect is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for a player who plays a right-handed game in a normal state to understand the timing at which the game is executed per the long opening of the normal figure.

The special figure fluctuation time counter 223ln and the normal figure fluctuation time counter 223lo are counters for measuring each symbol fluctuation time, and when the symbol fluctuation is executed, a value corresponding to the current fluctuation time is set. To. Then, the value is periodically subtracted in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113. By using the values of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223ln and the normal map fluctuation time counter 223lo, it is possible to determine the remaining time of each symbol fluctuation time during the symbol fluctuation.

The continuous continuous effect flag 223 lp is a continuous continuous effect (see FIG. 363 (b)) that is executed when the waiting period of the change in the special figure 2 is a predetermined period (30 seconds) or more during the period during which the series effect is being executed. ) Is set, and is set to ON when a continuous series of effects is executed.

The series effect counter 223lq is a counter for updating the effect scenario of the series effect, and when the series effect is set, a value corresponding to the effect period of the series effect executed this time is set, and the value is set. , It is updated by the staging update process 16 (see C3112 in FIG. 420) which is periodically executed in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113. The series production counter 223lq is set with a value for indicating the period until the series production is completed to the end (the production in which the jackpot game is executed (see FIG. 368 (b)) is executed). It is configured, and the effect mode is set according to the updated counter value. Then, during the execution of the series of effects, the effect end condition (for example, the condition that is satisfied when the ball does not win the second winning opening 640 during the game per normal figure and the special figure 2 hold cannot be obtained) is satisfied. Then, when the series of effects is terminated, the effect mode for indicating the end of the series of effects is set, and the value of the series of effects counter 223 lq is reset to 0.

The re-read-ahead flag 223lr is a flag for indicating that the pre-reading process needs to be executed again for the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223la, and it is necessary to execute the pre-reading process again. If set to on. In the 16th embodiment, as the variation effect corresponding to the final special figure variation in the time saving state, the variation effect (time saving final variation effect) in which the effect mode based on the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold is set is executed. Therefore, the look-ahead process is executed for the special figure 2 hold that has already been acquired at the specific timing of the final special figure change period, and the effect mode corresponding to the look-ahead result is set.

The above-mentioned re-read-ahead flag 223lr is set to on and turned on when the final special figure change is being executed and a new special figure 2 hold is acquired after the lapse of a specific timing of the final special figure change period. In this case, at the execution timing of the special figure 2 change in the first rotation after the end of the time saving state, the look-ahead process for the special figure 2 hold is executed again, and the change effect based on the result of the look-ahead process is executed.

The holding upper limit flag 223ls is a flag for determining whether the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 has reached the upper limit value (4), and is when the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 reaches the upper limit value (4). Set to on. Then, it is referred to when setting the effect mode of the time saving final variation effect. Specifically, in the 16th embodiment, as a fluctuation effect corresponding to the final special figure change in the time-saving state, a holding ball for acquiring the special figure 2 hold during the first period of the final special figure change period. The acquisition effect can be executed, and the time-saving final variation effect for showing the lottery result of the variation and the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold can be executed during the second period after the first period. When the hold upper limit flag 223 ls is set to on at the start of the first period, the time saving final variation effect is executed using the first period and the second period. ..

With this configuration, it is possible to execute an effect (holding ball acquisition effect) for a player who has already acquired the special figure 2 hold up to the upper limit to acquire a new special figure 2 hold. For a game that can be suppressed and that the special figure 2 hold is always obtained close to the upper limit value, that is, a player who continuously executes a right-handed game, the execution period of the time-saving final variation effect is lengthened. Can be set. Therefore, the player can be made to play the game continuously, and the operation of the game can be improved.

The executed flag 223 lt is a flag for indicating that the time-saving final variation effect is executed as the variation effect corresponding to the final special figure variation, and is usually executed from the second period of the time-saving final variation period. The time saving final variation effect is set to be turned on when it is executed from the first period set before the second period. That is, at the start of the first period of the time-saving final fluctuation period, the number of special figures 2 held has reached the upper limit, and the time-saving final fluctuation effect (the effect using the first period and the second period) during the first period. Is set to on when it is determined to execute, and it is determined whether the executed flag 223lt is set to on at the start of the second period, and when it is determined to be set to on, the second Since the effect mode to be executed during the period is set, the process of setting a new effect mode is skipped. Then, it is set to off when a stop command corresponding to the time saving final fluctuation is received.

The special 2 winning flag 223lu is a flag for indicating that the ball has won a prize in the second winning opening 640 during the game per normal figure (during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a), and is during the game per normal figure (during the game per normal figure). This is set to ON when a ball wins a prize in the second winning opening 640 during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a). This special 2 winning flag 223lu is set when it is determined in the in-game update process (see FIG. 422 (a)) that a ball has won a prize in the second winning opening 640 (C4701 in FIG. 422 (a)). Yes), set to on (see C4705 in FIG. 422), and referenced in the series effect update process (see C4503 in FIG. 421) to determine whether to continue the series of effects (see FIG. 421). 421 C4608). If it is determined in the processing of C4608 that it is not set to on (set to off) (C4608: No in FIG. 421), the special figure 2 variation is not executed, and the end condition of the series of effects is satisfied. Therefore, the process (C4612) for terminating the series of effects is executed.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the 16th embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 389 to 405. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process 16 and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the operation is started. The processing and the main processing will be described. In the 16th embodiment, the contents described in each of the above-described embodiments are also described in duplicate with different reference numerals for convenience of explanation, but the contents will be described in each of the above-described embodiments. The contents described in each of the above-described embodiments are applied to the parts where detailed explanations are omitted for the same elements as those described above. Further, the technical idea described in each of the above-described embodiments is naturally applied to the 16th embodiment, and the modified examples and additional examples described in each of the above-described embodiments are also applied to the 16th embodiment. Of course, it is applied to the embodiment.

FIG. 389 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process 16 executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process 16 is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt processing 16, first, reading processing of various winning switches is executed (C101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (C102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, the small hit type counter C5, and the second hit type counter C6 are updated (C103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, the small hit type counter C5, and the second hit type counter C6 are each added by 1. At the same time, when those counter values reach the maximum values (999,99,239,239,99,99, respectively in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C6 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the special symbol variation process 16 for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (C104). .. After that, the start winning process 16 accompanying the winning (starting winning) to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 is executed (C105). The details of the special symbol variation process 16 and the start winning process 16 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 390 to 395.

After executing the start winning process 16 (C105), the normal symbol variation process 16 which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device is executed (C106). The details of the normal symbol variation processing 16 will be described later with reference to FIG. 396. After the normal symbol variation process 16 is executed, the through gate passage process 16 accompanying the passage of the sphere at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is executed (C107). The details of the through gate passing process 16 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 397 and 398.

After executing the through gate passing process 16, the V inlet passing process 16 is executed (C108), and then the V passing process 16 (C109) is executed. Here, details of the V-entrance pass processing 16 and the V-pass process 16 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 399 and 400.

After executing the V-passing process 16 (C109), the launch control process is executed (C110), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (C111), and the timer interrupt process 16 is terminated. .. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to determine whether to turn on / off the firing. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, the special symbol variation processing 16 (C104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 390. FIG. 390 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing 16 (C104). This special symbol variation processing 16 (C104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing 16 (see FIG. 389), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the first symbol are displayed. 3 This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed by the symbol display device 81.

In this special symbol variation processing 16, first, it is determined whether or not the present is a big hit of the special symbol (C201). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and special. It includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the big hit game of the symbol. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (C201: Yes), the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) cannot be executed, so the present process is terminated as it is.

If it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (C201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is changing (during the special symbol changing) (C202), and the first symbol is displayed. If the display mode of the devices 37a and 37b is not changing (during special symbol change) (C202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 203le (number of held times of variable display in the special symbol N2) is acquired ( C203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203le is larger than 0 (C204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203le is not 0 (C204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203le is subtracted by 1 (C205), and the value is changed by calculation. A hold ball number command (special figure 2 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203le is set (C206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (C1001) of the main process (see FIG. 403) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203ld and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203le from the hold ball number command, and the extracted values are used in the RAM 223. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223 lb and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223 lc, respectively.

After the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is set by the process of C206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203 lb is shifted (C207). In the process of C207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203 lb is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b execute the special symbol variation start processing 16 for starting the variation display (C213). The special symbol change start process 16 will be described later with reference to FIG. 391.

On the other hand, in the process of C204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203le is 0 (C204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is determined. The value is acquired (C208), and it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is larger than 0 (C209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is 0 (C209: No), that is, when there is no reserved ball for newly starting the special symbol variation, this process is performed as it is. To finish.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is not 0 (C209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is subtracted (C210) and processed by C210. A hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the changed (subtracted) special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203ld is set (C211). After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the process of C211th, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203la is shifted (C212). After that, the process of C213 is executed, and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the 16th embodiment, when the new special symbol variation (special symbol variation) is executed, the special symbol 2 is preceded by the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter (N1). Special symbol 2 When it is determined that the value of the reserved ball number counter (N2) is larger than 0, the value of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is determined. It is configured to execute the process for starting the special symbol change (special symbol change) (special symbol change start process 16 (see C213)). As a result, the second special symbol can be changed with priority over the first special symbol.

Further, in the process of C202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is changing (C202: Yes), the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it has been done (C214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (C214: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C214, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (C214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbols of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is set (C215). .. The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process 16 (C213) described later with reference to FIG. 391. When this special symbol change start process 16 is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203 la or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203 lb. Will be done. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and if the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is used. Depending on the jackpot AA, jackpot AB, jackpot AC, jackpot AD, jackpot AE, or jackpot AF, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the small hit is based on the value of the small hit type counter C5. One of AA, small hit AB, small hit AC, small hit AD, small hit AE, and small hit E is determined.

In this embodiment, the display mode (lighting mode) of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is configured to notify the player of the lottery result (determination result of each type of counter) of the special symbol this time. If the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, and if it is a small hit, the red LED is turned on and the case is off. The red LED and the green LED are turned on.

When the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot and the jackpot AA is determined, a blue LED is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b to indicate the jackpot AA (for example, the alphabet "a"). When the jackpot AB is determined, it is lit in an aspect indicating the jackpot AB (for example, the embodiment imitating the alphabet "b"), and when the jackpot AC is determined, the jackpot AC is determined. It is lit in a mode indicating AC (for example, a mode imitating the alphabet "c"), and when a jackpot AD is determined, it is lit in a mode indicating a jackpot AD (for example, a mode imitating the alphabet "d"). Let me.

Further, even when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the red LED is displayed for each small hit type (small hit AA, small hit AB, small hit AC, small hit) as in the case of winning the above-mentioned big hit. It is lit in a manner corresponding to AD, small hit AE and small hit E). The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped. Further, in the present embodiment, a mode (color corresponding to the lottery result of a special symbol) showing the content of each hit type so that the player can grasp each hit type (big hit type or small hit type) determined as described above. , The mode formed from the lighting mode corresponding to each hit type) is configured to light the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, but other configurations may be used, for example, a lottery result or. Even when the determined hit types are different, the same lighting mode may be used as the lighting mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b.

Further, in the present embodiment, by confirming the lighting mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, it is possible to grasp the lottery result of the special symbol this time and the determined winning type. However, other configurations may be used, and for example, it may be configured to display that the lottery results of the special symbols are different in a lighting mode divided to the extent that the player can discriminate. ..

After the processing of C215 is completed, it is determined whether the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol corresponding to the variable display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is a big hit of the special symbol (this lottery result). C216). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot with a special symbol (C216: Yes), a jackpot scenario is set based on the jackpot type (C217), and then the jackpot type determined in this jackpot is corresponded to the jackpot. The start setting (big hit setting such as 15 rounds) is executed (C218).

When the jackpot scenario is set in the process of C217, the jackpot scenario table corresponding to the current jackpot type is set among the jackpot scenario tables defined in the jackpot scenario table 202hl.

After finishing the processing of C218, next, the big hit start flag 203hl and the big hit medium flag 203li are set to on (C219), the value of the time saving medium counter 203lg is set to 0 (C220), and the stop command is set (C225). ), End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of C216, if it is determined that the lottery result this time is not a big hit (C216: No), the time saving update process is executed (C221). The details of this time saving update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 392, but when the time saving state is set, various parameters for satisfying the time saving end condition (second special symbol (special drawing 2)). The process of updating the number of fluctuations and the total number of fluctuations of the special symbol) is executed. After executing the processing of C221, it is determined whether the lottery result of this time is a small hit (C222), and if it is determined to be a small hit (C222: Yes), the small hit start setting process 16 (C223) is executed. Then, the above-mentioned C225 process is executed later, and this process is terminated. The details of the small hit start setting process 16 (C223) will be described later with reference to FIG. 393.

On the other hand, in the process of C222, if it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is not a small hit (out of place) (C222: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

As described above, in the 16th embodiment, the time saving update process is configured to be executed at the timing when the special symbol change is completed (the timing when the special symbol change time has elapsed). With this configuration, for example, when "Special Figure 2 variation number 1 time" is set as the corresponding time saving end condition that is a part of the time saving end condition, the time saving state is set and the special figure 2 variation is executed. Even if it is done, the period until the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is stopped can be shortened, so that the period for acquiring the special figure 2 hold can be secured.

In addition, the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the 16th embodiment, and may be configured to execute the time saving update process at the start of the change of the special symbol. In this case, the period for one change of the special figure 2 is secured as the time saving state. In order to do so, it may be configured to set "Special Figure 2 Number of fluctuations 2 times" as the response time reduction end condition.

Next, the special symbol change start process 16 (C213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 391. FIG. 391 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start processing 16 (C213). This special symbol variation start process 16 (C213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 16 (see FIG. 390) of the timer interrupt process 16 (see FIG. 389), and is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 16 (see FIG. 390). "Special symbol big hit", "special symbol small hit", or "special symbol miss" based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area of 203la and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203lb. This is a process for performing a lottery (hit / fail determination) and determining an effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol change start processing 16, first, the first random number counter stored in the common execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area (special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203la, special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203lb). Each value of C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the small hit type counter C5, and the variable type counter CS1 is acquired (C231). Next, the lottery result of the special symbol is drawn based on the special symbol jackpot random number table (special symbol 1 random number 16 table 202la1, special symbol 2 random number 16 table 202la2) corresponding to the special symbol type (special symbol 1, special symbol 2). It is acquired (C232), and the process proceeds to C233.

Specifically, when the special symbol variation executed in this process is the first special symbol (special diagram 1), the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is used as the value of the special symbol 1 random number 16 table 202la1 (Fig. 1). Compare each of the four random numbers set in 380 (b)) one by one. As described above, four random numbers "0 to 3" are set as the random number values that are the big hits of the first special symbol, and the acquired values of the first random number counter C1 and the random numbers that are the big hits are set. If it matches the numerical value, it is determined that it is a big hit of a special symbol. Similarly, the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 and the random number value "10, 11" which is a small hit set in the special symbol 1 random number 16 table 202la1 (see FIG. 380 (b)) are two. If they match, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same determination value determined to be a big hit, but the determination value is not limited to the same, and different random values may be used. With this configuration, the random number value determined to be out of order in the first special symbol is configured to be determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and the bias of the jackpot can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the number is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are determined to be jackpots. The number of random numbers may be set differently. By configuring in this way, the probability of a big hit can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol having the higher jackpot probability, the player It is possible to have expectations for a big hit.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so that the number of determination values determined to be small hits is different. With this configuration, the probability that the lottery result will be a small hit can be different depending on the type of special symbol, and the player is motivated to execute the lottery with the special symbol with the higher probability of small hit. It is possible to play a game in a targeted manner.

In this embodiment, the first random number 16 table 202la is set so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol win a small hit, but only one of the special symbols is a small hit. The first random number 16 table 202la may be set so as to win the prize. Specifically, the special symbol 1 random number 16 table 202la1 corresponding to the first special symbol is not set with a random number value that is a small hit of the special symbol, and the special symbol 2 random number 16 table 202la2 corresponding to the second special symbol is set. Only it is good to set a random number value that is a small hit of a special symbol. With such a configuration, the privilege (small hit game) that can be given to the player can be different according to the type of the special symbol, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot of the special symbol is made to correspond to the predetermined range (0 to 3) of the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and the special symbol is classified within the other range (4 to 999). However, as other configurations, for example, a part of the range (for example, 0 to 2) that is a big hit in the first special symbol is set to a small hit in the second special symbol. It may be set as a hit range.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value of the first random number counter C1 and the first random number 16 table 202la are used to draw a special symbol (big hit, small hit, miss). As another configuration, a lottery of special symbols may be performed using a plurality of winning random number tables. For example, whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit using the first random number table. If the lottery result using the first random number table is not a big hit, the second random number table is used to determine whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit. It may be configured. By performing the lottery of the special symbol using a plurality of random number tables in this way, the lottery result of the special symbol can be set more randomly, and the fraudulent act of manipulating the lottery result of the special symbol can be suppressed. ..

In the present embodiment, the value of the first random number counter C1 is used when the lottery of the special symbol is performed, but other configurations may be used, for example, the value of a plurality of random number counters and the first hit. A special symbol may be drawn using the random number 16 table 202la. In this case, for example, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit based on the value of the first random number counter, and the lottery result of the special symbol is small based on the value of the second random number counter. It may be configured to determine whether or not it is a hit.

Returning to FIG. 391, the explanation will be continued. In the processing of C233, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of C232 is a big hit of the special symbol (C233). If it is determined that the jackpot is a special symbol (C233: Yes), the jackpot type is acquired based on the first hit type selection 16 table 202lb corresponding to the special symbol type corresponding to this special symbol lottery (C233: Yes). C234), the display mode at the time of jackpot corresponding to the special symbol and the jackpot type is set (C235), the jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (C236), and the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined this time is used. The corresponding fluctuation pattern command is set (C243), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of C233, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (C233: No), then it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small hit (C237), and it is a small hit. (C237: Yes), the small hit type is acquired based on the small hit type selection 16 table 202 lg according to the special symbol type corresponding to this special symbol lottery (C238), and the special symbol and small are obtained. The display mode for small hits corresponding to the hit type is set (C239), the small hit fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (C240), and the fluctuation corresponding to the small hit fluctuation pattern determined this time is determined. A pattern command is set (C243), and this process ends.

Further, in the processing of C237, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit (C237: No), that is, when it is determined that the current lottery result is out of order, the outlier corresponding to the type of the special symbol. The time display mode is set (C241), the variation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined based on the number of reserved balls (C242), and the variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern at the time of disconnection determined this time is set (C243). This process ends.

Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the fluctuation pattern is determined regardless of the number of reserved balls, whereas the special symbol is determined. If the lottery result is out of the question, the fluctuation pattern is configured to be different depending on the number of reserved balls. Specifically, the larger the number of reserved balls at the timing when the special symbol variation start process 16 (C213) is executed, the easier it is to determine the variation pattern with a short variation time. As a result, the period until the lottery result of the special symbol does not give the player a privilege and the lottery result (missing) is displayed can be shortened as the number of reserved balls increases, so that it is executed per unit time. In order to increase the number of lottery of special symbols to be performed, the player can be enthusiastically played in order to always secure a large number of reserved balls. In addition, when it is not possible to secure a large number of reserved balls, it is possible to lengthen the time for changing one special symbol, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the special symbol does not change during the game. It is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from being reduced.

In the present embodiment, the variation pattern is configured to be different based on the number of reserved balls at the timing when the process of the special symbol variation start process 16 (C213) is executed, but other than that, for example, the special symbol is configured. Even if it is configured to shorten the fluctuation time set in the running fluctuation pattern on the condition that the number of reserved balls becomes a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more while the fluctuation is in progress. good. With this configuration, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game in order to secure a large number of reserved balls even while the special symbol is fluctuating.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is different based on the number of reserved balls only when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, but the reserved balls are also held when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. The fluctuation pattern may be different based on the number, or the fluctuation pattern of a long fluctuation time may be easily determined as the number of reserved balls increases. Further, the number of reserved balls referred to when determining the fluctuation pattern may be a value obtained by adding the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, or the first special symbol and the first. Of the two special symbols, only the value of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol on which the special symbol variation start processing is preferentially executed may be used, or the special symbol on the side subject to the special symbol variation start processing executed this time may be used. Only the value of the number of reserved balls of the symbol may be used.

Next, the time saving update process (C221) will be described with reference to FIG. 392. FIG. 392 is a flowchart showing the time saving update process (C221).

In the time saving update process (C221), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving medium counter 203 lg of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (C251). The time-saving / medium-time counter 203 lg is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a high-probability state of the normal symbol. It indicates that it is in a probability state, and if the value of the time-saving / medium-time counter 203 lg is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state of a normal symbol. In the 16th embodiment, two gaming states can be set. Specifically, two gaming states can be set: a normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) and a time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol). It is configured in. That is, in the present embodiment, the probability state of the special symbol is always constant, and only the probability state of the normal symbol can be variably set. Therefore, a time-saving state may be used as a term indicating a high-probability state of a normal symbol, and a normal state may be used as a term indicating a low-probability state of a normal symbol.

When the value of the time reduction counter 203 lg is 0 (C251: No), since the time reduction state is not set, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter 203 lg is 1 or more (C251: Yes), that is, when it is determined that the current state is in the time reduction state, the value of the time reduction counter 203 lg is subtracted by 1 (C252). Next, it is determined whether or not the current special figure change is a change of the second special symbol (special figure 2) (C253). If the current special figure fluctuation is the fluctuation of special figure 2 (C253: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation count counter 203ll is subtracted by 1 (C254), and the remaining time reduction command indicating the values of various counters is set. Then (C255), the process proceeds to C256.

In the process of C255, a command for the number of remaining time reductions indicating the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203 lb and the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203 ll is set. The remaining time reduction command set here is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 as a part of the state command indicating the game state by the external output process (see C1001 in FIG. 403) of the main process (see FIG. 403) described later. It is output. On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when it is determined that the status command (remaining time reduction command) has been received by the command determination process 16 (see C3113 in FIG. 406), it is included in the received command (C3212 in FIG. 406). Information is extracted and the current game state (remaining time reduction number) is stored in the state storage area 223hlh. As a result, the remaining period of the time saving state currently set by the voice lamp control device 113 can be predicted (determined), and the effect mode can be set according to the remaining period of the time saving state.

In this embodiment, each time the time saving update process (see C221 in FIG. 392) is executed, the main control device 110 is configured to output the remaining time saving number command for indicating the remaining time saving number. , Not limited to this, for example, to output the time saving end condition command for indicating the time saving end condition set at the time when the time saving state is set (when the jackpot game ends) to the voice lamp control device 113. The number of times a command (variation pattern command) indicating a special figure variation output from the main controller 110 side is received after extracting the time reduction end condition from the time reduction end condition command received on the voice lamp control device 113 side. May be accumulated, and it may be configured to determine whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the accumulated value. With such a configuration, the processing load on the main control device 110 side can be reduced.

In the processing of C253, if the variation of the special figure this time is not the variation of the special figure 2 (C253: No), the processing of C254 and C255 is not performed, and the process shifts to the processing of C256.

In the process of C256, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203 lg is 0 (C256). When the value of the time reduction counter 203 lg is 0 (C256: Yes), it means that the time reduction end condition (common time reduction end condition) is satisfied. Therefore, it is determined whether the corresponding time reduction end condition is satisfied among the time reduction end conditions. The value of the special figure 2 fluctuation count counter 203ll for this purpose is reset to 0 (C257), and the process proceeds to C260.

In the process of C256, if the value of the time reduction counter 203 lg is not 0 (C256: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation frequency counter 203 ll is 0 (C258). Special figure 2 When the value of the fluctuation count counter 203ll is 0 (C258: Yes), it means that the time saving end condition (corresponding time saving end condition) is satisfied. The value of the time-saving / medium-time counter 203 lg for determining is reset to 0 (C259), and then the process proceeds to C260. On the other hand, if the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation count counter 203ll is not 0 in the processing of C258 (C258: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

In the process of C260, the game state is set to the normal state (C260), the state command indicating the normal state is set (C261), and then this process is terminated.

As described above, the time saving update process (C221 in FIG. 392) is a plurality of time saving end conditions (part of the common time saving end condition and a part of the common time saving end condition) that can be satisfied based on the number of changes of the special symbol among the time saving end conditions. It is configured so that the establishment status of the corresponding time reduction end condition) can be discriminated, and when any of the time reduction end conditions is satisfied, the value of the parameter for satisfying the other time reduction end condition is also reset. As a result, no matter which parameter value the time saving end condition is satisfied with, the state after the time saving state is ended can be unified.

In this embodiment, as the time saving end condition, the common time saving end condition (first end condition, small hit that is established at the time of winning the big hit) is set in common regardless of the time saving state set based on any big hit type. It is set according to the second end condition that is established after the end of the game, the third end condition that is established when the number of special figure fluctuations (cumulative total of special figure 1 and special figure 2) reaches 99 times, and the jackpot type. It is configured to set the corresponding time saving end condition (special figure 2 condition that is satisfied when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number), but the condition for ending the time saving state is not limited to this. For example, a small hit end condition that is satisfied when the number of small hit winnings reaches a predetermined number of times or when the number of times a specific small hit type is selected reaches a predetermined number of times may be set. In this case, the small hit end condition may be set as the common time reduction end condition, or may be set as the corresponding time reduction end condition. In addition, when an end lottery means for drawing a lottery as to whether or not to end the time saving state based on the execution of the special symbol change (special figure change) is provided, and the lottery result of the end lottery means is the lottery result for ending the time saving state. In addition, it may be configured to end the time saving state.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the time saving state ends, so that the player can be made to execute the game in the time saving state while giving a feeling of excitement. .. In addition, when a predetermined continuation condition (for example, a condition that is satisfied when a lottery result indicating a specific deviation is obtained as a lottery result of a special symbol) is satisfied during the time reduction state, various parameters related to the time reduction end condition are set for a predetermined period. It may be configured not to be updated. Furthermore, only in the time saving state set when a specific jackpot type is selected, until a predetermined period elapses after the time saving state is set (for example, until the number of special map fluctuations reaches 30 times). It may be configured so that various parameters related to the time saving end condition are not updated. With this configuration, it is possible to surely set the period during which the time saving state continues, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Further, a discriminating means capable of discriminating that the ball did not win the V winning opening 650a even though the small hit game was executed is provided, and the ball does not win the V winning opening 650a by the discriminating means. It may be configured to set the time saving forced end condition that is satisfied when it is determined that the case has occurred as the common time saving end condition. With this configuration, the small hit type set when the small hit is won is discriminated, and the discriminant result is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a ball in a specific area in the V winning opening 650a). When it is determined that the game is a jackpot game that is disadvantageous to the player when passing through (a jackpot game with a small number of rounds or a jackpot game in which a game state (time saving state) advantageous to the player is not set after the end). It is possible to impose a penalty on a player who performs an illegal game such as aiming for the next small hit winning without firing a ball during the small hit game.

Next, the small hit start setting process 16 (C223) will be described with reference to FIG. 393. FIG. 393 is a flowchart showing the small hit start setting process 16 (C223). In this small hit start setting process 16 (C223), a scenario for opening and closing a solenoid (V inlet solenoid) 209 for opening the V winning door 650b when a small hit is won in a special symbol lottery is set. The process is executed.

In the small hit start setting process 16 (C223), first, a scenario (hit scenario) corresponding to the set small hit type is set based on the small hit scenario 16 table 202li (C291). Next, the small hit type corresponding to the small hit type determined as the big hit type value at the time of passing V is set (C292), the start of the small hit corresponding to the small hit type is set (C293), and the small hit medium flag 203 lk. Is set to on (C294), and this process ends.

Next, the start winning process 16 (C105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 394. FIG. 394 is a flowchart showing a start winning process 16 (C105) executed in the timer interrupt process 16 (see FIG. 389) in the present embodiment. This start winning process 16 (C105) is executed in the timer interrupt process 16 (see FIG. 389), and the first ball opening (winning opening) 64 or the second winning opening (winning opening) 640 is won. It is a process for determining the presence or absence of (starting prize), acquiring various random number counters when there is a starting winning, and executing the hold processing of the value.

When the start winning process 16 (see C105 in FIG. 394) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first entry (winning opening) 64 (starting winning) (C301). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port (winning opening) 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball opening (winning opening) 64 (C301: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld (the number of holdings of the variation display in the special symbol N1) is set. Acquire (C302). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (C303).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball opening (winning opening) 64 (C301: No), or even if there is a winning in the first ball opening (winning opening) 64, the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter. If the value (N1) of 203ld is not less than 4 (C303: No), the process proceeds to C307. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening (winning opening) 64 (C301: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is less than 4 (C303: Yes). The value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is added by 1 (C304). Then, a hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203ld changed by the calculation is set (C305).

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (C1001) of the main process (see FIG. 403) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203ld from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223lb of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of C305, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated by C103 of the timer interrupt processing 16 (see FIG. 389) described above. , The second hit random number counter C4, the small hit type counter C5, and the variable type counter CS1 are set in the empty hold area (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203la of the RAM 203. Store in the first area (C306). In the process of C306, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, in the processes of C307 to C312, the same process is executed for the winning of the second ball entrance (winning opening) 640 for the processes of C301 to C306. The only difference is that the hold processing for the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed for the winning of the second ball opening (winning opening) 640, and the other processing is the same. The explanation is omitted. Then, when it is determined in the processing of C307 that the ball has not won the second entry opening (winning opening) 640 (C307: No), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203le is less than 4. If not (C309: No), the look-ahead process 16 is executed after the process of C312 (C313). After that, this process ends.

Next, the look-ahead process 16 (C313) will be described with reference to FIG. 395. FIG. 395 is a flowchart showing the look-ahead process 16 (C313). When the look-ahead process 16 (C313) is executed, it is first determined whether or not there is a new prize (C321). If there is no new prize (C321: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if there is a new prize (C321: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the prize is a prize of the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) (C322).

In the processing of C322, if it is determined that the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (special drawing 1) (C322: Yes), the starting winning processing 16 (see C105 of FIG. 394) is processed by C306 or C312. Using the acquired various counter values, special symbol 1 random number 16 table 202la1 (see FIG. 380 (b)), special figure 1 big hit type selection 16 table 202lb1 (see FIG. 381 (b)), and special figure 1 small hit type selection. 16 The lottery result, the big hit type and the small hit type are acquired based on the table 202 lg1 (see FIG. 383 (b)) (C323), and the process proceeds to C325.

On the other hand, in the processing of C322, if it is determined that the winning is the winning of the second special symbol (special figure 2) (C322: No), the special symbol 2 random number 16 table 202la2 (see FIG. 380 (c)), special The lottery result, the big hit type and the small hit type are acquired based on FIG. 2 big hit type selection 16 table 202lb2 (see FIG. 381 (c)) and special figure 2 small hit type selection 16 table 202lb2 (see FIG. 383 (c)). (C324), the process proceeds to C325. In the process of C325, a winning information command including information for indicating each lottery result (big hit determination result, big hit type, small hit determination result, small hit type) acquired in the above-mentioned C323 or C324 process is set ( C325). Then, this process is terminated.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the look-ahead process 16 (see C313 in FIG. 395) in the 16th embodiment, when the special figure change based on the corresponding winning information is executed in addition to the above-mentioned look-ahead result. The set fluctuation pattern (variation time) is also configured so that it can be discriminated in advance. Specifically, it is configured to acquire the value of the variation type counter CS1 by the process of C306 or C312 of the start winning process 16 (see C105 of FIG. 394), and C323 of the look-ahead process 16 (see C313 of FIG. 395). Alternatively, in the processing of C324, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined in advance based on the variation pattern 16 table 202le (see FIG. 385), and the determination result is included in the winning information in the processing of C325. There is. As a result, it is possible to predict at what timing (after how many seconds) the special figure change corresponding to the winning information stored on hold is executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

Next, the normal symbol variation processing 16 (C106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 396. FIG. 396 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation processing 16 (C106). This normal symbol variation process 16 (C106) is executed in the timer interrupt process 16 (see FIG. 389), and the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a are executed. It is a process for controlling such things.

In the normal symbol variation processing 16, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (C601). The hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol) includes the process in which the display indicating the hit is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 and the process in which the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is performed. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (C6011: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (C601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (C602), and the second symbol display device is used. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (C602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203 lf (number of holdings of variable display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (C603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203 lf is larger than 0 (C604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203 lf is 0 (C604 :. No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203 lf is not 0 (C604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203 lf is subtracted by 1 (C605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203 lc is shifted (C606). In the process of C606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203 lc is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203 lc is acquired (C607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203 lg of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (C608). The time-saving / medium-time counter 203 lg is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal symbol. If the value of the time-saving / medium-time counter 203 lg is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal symbol. If the value of the time reduction counter 203 lg is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

When the value of the time reduction counter 203 lg is 1 or more (C608: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time reduction state of the normal symbol, so it is acquired by the processing of C607. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the random number 16 table 202 lc per normal symbol for high probability (see FIG. 380 (d)), the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (C609). ). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number 16 table 202 lc per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a hit of a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", it is determined. It is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (see FIG. 380 (d)).

In the processing of C608, when the value of the counter 203 lg during the time reduction is 0 (C608: No), the process proceeds to the processing of C610. In the processing of C610, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so that the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of C607 is low. Based on the random number 16 table 202 lc (see FIG. 380 (d)) for the probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (C610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number 16 table 202 lc per ordinary symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a hit of a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,29 to 239", it is determined. It is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (see FIG. 380 (d)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of C609 or C610 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (C611), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (C611: Yes). Next, the type per normal figure (A per normal figure, B per normal figure) is set using the 16 table 202ld for selecting the type per normal figure (C612). Specifically, the value of the second hit type counter C6 is compared with the random number value stored in the type selection 16 table 202ld per normal figure. As described above, when the current gaming state is the time saving state (high probability state of the normal figure), if the value of the second hit type counter C6 is in the range of "0,1", it is A per normal figure. If it is in the range of "2 to 99", it is determined that the value is B per normal figure (see FIG. 382 (a)). Alternatively, when the current gaming state is the normal state (low probability state of the normal figure), if the value of the second hit type counter C6 is in the range of "0", it is determined that the game is A per normal figure, and " If it is in the range of "1 to 99", it is determined that the value is B per normal figure (see FIG. 382 (a)).

Next, the display mode at the time of hitting based on the setting result of C612 is set (C613), and the process proceeds to C615. In the process of C613, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). On the other hand, in the processing of C611, if it is determined that the normal symbol is not a hit (C611: No), it means that the normal symbol lottery (normal symbol lottery) this time is out, so the display mode at the time of the out is set. (C614), the process proceeds to C615.

In the processing of C615, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203 lg is 1 or more (C615), and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203 lg is 1 or more (C615: Yes), the normal figure variation pattern selection table 202 lf Of these, the normal map fluctuation time (2 seconds) is set using the specified content corresponding to the time saving state (normal map high accuracy) (C617), and then this process is terminated. In the processing of C615, when the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203 lg is 0 (C615: No), the specified content corresponding to the normal state (low accuracy of the normal figure) in the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202 lf is used. The figure fluctuation time (2 to 60 seconds) is set (C616), and then various contents set in this process (value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203 lf, the lottery result of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol). ) Is set (C623), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of C602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (C602: Yes), whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. Is determined (C618). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of C616 or the processing of C617 before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of C618, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (C618: No), the process proceeds to C623 and the present process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of C618, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (C618: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (C619). In the processing of C619, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the processing of C613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) in the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is out of order and the display mode is set by the processing of C614, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to. When the stop display is set by the process of C619, and then the second symbol display update process (see C1008) of the main process (see FIG. 403) is executed, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of C613 or the process of C614.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process 16 is a hit of the ordinary symbol. (C620). If the result of this lottery is a hit of a normal symbol (C620: Yes), the opening pattern of the electric accessory is set according to the type of the normal symbol and the game state (C621), and the opening / closing control process of the electric accessory is set. (C622), then, the process proceeds to C623, a command for indicating the content of the game per game set by the process of C621 is set, and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of C621, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see C1006) of the main process (see FIG. 403) is executed, the electric accessory 640a The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time set in the processing of C616 or the processing of C617 is completed. On the other hand, in the processing of C620, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (C620: No), the processing of C621 and C622 is skipped, the process shifts to the processing of C623, and the out-of-ordinary fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped. Set the command indicating, and end this process.

Next, the through gate passing process 16 (C107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 397. The through gate passing process 16 (C107) determines whether or not a sphere has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, and when the sphere has passed, the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 is used. This is a process for acquiring and holding.

Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (C431). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (C4311: Yes), the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203 lf (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (C432). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203 lf is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (C433).

Whether the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (C4311: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203 lf If the value (M) is not less than 4 (C433: No), the process proceeds to C437. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 and the value (M) of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203 lf is less than 4 (C433: Yes), the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203 lf The value (M) of (M) is added by 1 (C434), and the normal figure reserved ball number command is set (C435). Then, the second random number counter C4 updated by C103 of the timer interrupt processing 16 described above, the value of the second hit type counter C6, and the second updated by the processing of C1002 of the main processing (see FIG. 403) described later. The value of the variation type counter CS2 is stored in the first area (C436) of the empty hold area (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203 lc of the RAM 203, and the process proceeds to C437. ..

When storing the value of the second random number counter C4 in the first area of the empty hold area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203 lc, the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203 lf is referred to, and the value is used. If it is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

In the process of C437, the normal map look-ahead process is executed (C437), and then the present process is terminated. The details of this normal symbol look-ahead processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 398, but it is based on each counter value stored in the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203 lc corresponding to the acquired normal map hold in the C436 process. Then, by the time the normal symbol change (normal figure change) is executed, the process of determining the lottery result and the change pattern of the normal symbol hold is executed in advance.

Next, with reference to FIG. 398, a normal map look-ahead process (C437) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described. FIG. 398 is a flowchart showing a normal map look-ahead process (C437) executed in the through gate passage process 16 (see FIG. 397).

In the normal map look-ahead processing (C437), first, a random number 16 table 202 lc per normal symbol (see FIG. 380 (d)), a type selection 16 table 202 ld per normal symbol (see FIG. 382 (a)), and a normal map variation pattern. The lottery result is acquired based on the selection table (C451), the winning information command for indicating each lottery result is set (C452), and then this process is terminated. The winning information command set here (the winning information command indicating the look-ahead result of the general drawing) is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 as the main process described later (see FIG. 403). ) In the external output process (C1001), the information is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether the received winning information command is the winning information command related to the special figure fluctuation or the winning information command related to the normal figure fluctuation, and stores the corresponding winning information storage area 223la. .. The prize information stored here is the lottery result of the symbol change at the timing before the symbol change (special figure change or normal figure change) corresponding to the prize information command is actually executed. Refer to when setting the suggestion effect.

Next, the V inlet passage process 16 (C108) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 399. FIG. 399 is a flowchart showing the V inlet passage process 16 (C108) executed in the timer interrupt process 16 (see FIG. 389).

In the V entrance passage processing 16 (C108), it is first determined whether or not the current is a hit game (small hit game) (C501), and if the current is not a hit game (small hit game) (C501). : No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current is a hit game (small hit game) (C501: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the V winning opening is open, that is, whether or not the small hit game is in progress. (C502). In the process of C502, if it is determined that the V winning opening opening period is in progress (C502: Yes), a V entrance passage command is set (C503), and this process is terminated. If it is determined that the game is not in the small hit game (C502: No), the ball wins in the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 even though the game is not a small hit game, so an error command is set. (C504), and this process is terminated.

The V inlet passage command set in the process of C503 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (C1001) of the main process (see FIG. 403) executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V entrance passage command, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the game balls that have passed through the V entrance, and transmits a command for executing the effect based on the V entrance passage to the display control device 114. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect during the small hit game based on the winning of the V winning device 650.

Next, the V-passing process 16 (C109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 400. FIG. 400 is a flowchart showing the V-passing process 16 (C109) executed in the timer interrupt process 16 (see FIG. 389).

When the V-passing process 16 (C109) is executed, it is first determined whether or not there is V-passing, that is, whether or not the ball has won a prize in a specific region (V gate (V region)) in the V winning opening 650a (C601). If it is determined that the prize has not been won (C6011: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the prize has been won (C6011: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current V valid period is in effect (C602). In the processing of C602, if the progress of the small hit scenario set during the small hit game is within a specific period, it is determined that the V valid period is in progress, and in other cases, the V valid period is not in progress. To determine.

In the processing of C602, if it is determined that the V valid period is in progress (C602: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current small hit game is in progress (C603), and if it is in the small hit game (C603). : Yes), acquire the V-passing jackpot type value corresponding to the small hit type of this small hit game (C604), set the V flag corresponding to the jackpot type to ON (C605), and set the time saving medium counter 203 lg. It is set to 0 (C606), the variation counter 203ll of the special figure 2 is set to 0 (C607), and the process proceeds to C608.

That is, in the processes of C604 to C607, the process for executing the big hit game is executed based on the fact that the game ball wins the V winning opening 650a during the small hit game. On the other hand, in the processing of C603, if it is determined that the small hit game is not in progress (C603: No), it is not necessary to perform a new processing for executing the big hit game, so the processing of C604 to C607 is skipped. , C608 shifts to processing.

In the process of C608, a V-pass command is set (C608), and this process is terminated. The V passage command set here is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the same manner as other commands set in the control process of the main control device 110. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V passage command, for example, when the V passage command is received during the small hit game, the V challenge executed during the small hit game is successful, and the small hit game is followed. , Perform an effect to show that the jackpot game is executed. Further, when the V passing command is received during the big hit game, the same effect as when the V passing command is received during the small hit game is executed. On the other hand, when the V passing command is not received at a predetermined timing during the small hit game, a disappointing effect indicating that the ball did not pass through the specific area during the small hit game is executed.

In the present embodiment, only a command (V passing command) for indicating that the ball has won (passed) a specific area in the V winning opening 650a is set, but the V winning opening 650a is used for a game. It may be configured to set a command (for example, a V non-passing command) for indicating that the ball has not won a prize. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can perform an appropriate effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, by using the above-mentioned configuration, it is possible to quickly determine that the game ball is clogged in the V winning device 650.

On the other hand, in the process of C602, if it is determined that the current period is not in the V valid period (C602: No), an error command is set (C609), and this process is terminated. By processing C609, the game ball wins the V winning opening 650a outside the V valid period, that is, the game in which the game ball is illegally won the V winning opening 650a is performed, or the V winning opening is performed. It is possible to promptly notify the outside when a defect (ball jam, etc.) occurs in the ball flow path in the mouth 650a.

Next, the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 401. FIG. 401 is a flowchart showing the contents of the NMI interrupt process. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (C801). That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 402. FIG. 402 is a flowchart showing the contents of the start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (C901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (C902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (C903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 122 provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (C904), and if it is turned on (C904: Yes), the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side is used. A payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 (C912). On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (C904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (C905), and if it is not stored (C905: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, in this case as well, the payout initialization device 111, which is the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side, is initialized. Send a command (C912).

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (C905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (C906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (C907: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, so in order to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side. A payout initialization command is sent (C912). The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213 (C913), sets an initial value, and can start payout control of the game ball. Will be. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process is executed. Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the initialization process of the RAM 203 is similarly executed (C914). After that, the process proceeds to C910. In the RAM initialization process, the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0, and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on, the power off occurrence information is stored, and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (C907: Yes), the data is backed up to the RAM 203. Clear the power outage occurrence information while retaining the data (C908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff is transmitted (C909). Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

Then, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 (C910), and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects (C911). Next, the interrupt is permitted and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 403, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 403 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of C1001 to C1008 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of C1011 and C1012 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 403), first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process 16 (see FIG. 389), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) of is executed (C1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of C101 in the timer interrupt processing 16 (see FIG. 389) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the number of acquired balls is calculated for the payout control device 111. Send the corresponding prize ball command. In addition, various commands set in the special symbol variation process 16 (see FIG. 390), the start winning process 16 (see FIG. 394), the V entrance passage process 16 (see FIG. 399), and the V pass process 16 (see FIG. 400) are executed. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, the ending command set in the jackpot control process 16 (see FIG. 404), and various commands set in the small hit control process 16 (see FIG. 405) described later are sent to the voice lamp control device 113. Send. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the values of the variable type counter CS1 and the second variable type counter CS2 are updated (C1002). Specifically, various variable type counters (variable type counter CS1 and second variable type counter CS2) are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the various variation type counters are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Although detailed description is omitted, in the 16th embodiment, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is used when referring to the variation pattern of the special symbol variation (special symbol variation), and the value of the second variation type counter CS2 is used. The value is usually used when referring to the fluctuation pattern of the symbol fluctuation (normal chart fluctuation). Then, the special map fluctuation and the normal map fluctuation are configured to be executed by the establishment of a separate and independent opportunity. As a result, even if the timing to update the values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the second fluctuation type counter CS2 and the contents to be updated are synchronized, the counter values used when actually executing each symbol variation are synchronized. No. Therefore, the processing content in the main control device 110 can be simplified without affecting the game.

Not limited to this, the process of updating the values of various variable type counters may be configured so as not to be synchronized. For example, the value of one variable type counter may be executed every time the main process is executed a predetermined number of times. It may be configured to update only the value of the other variable type counter every time it is executed a specific number of times different from the predetermined number of times described above. By making the update contents of the various variable type counters different in this way, it is possible to suppress that the value of the other variable type counter is determined based on the acquired value of one variable type counter.

Further, in the 16th embodiment, the fluctuation type counter CS1 referred to when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation and the second fluctuation type counter CS2 referred to when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the normal map fluctuation are used. It is separately provided and configured to update each counter value periodically, but the variation pattern is not limited to this, and is not limited to this, for example, based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. May be configured to select.

When the variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 are updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (C1003), and then when the special symbol is in the jackpot state. , The jackpot effect is executed, and the jackpot control process 16 for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (C1004). In the jackpot control process 16, the special winning opening 65a is opened by opening the winning door 65b for each round in the jackpot state, and the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed, or a ball is placed in the specific winning opening 65a. Determine if you have won the specified number. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process 16 (C1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 403), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process 16 (see FIG. 389). The details of the jackpot control process 16 will be described later with reference to FIG. 404.

Next, the small hit control process 16 (C1005) is executed. The small hit control process 16 (C1005) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 405. After that, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port (winning opening) 640 is executed (C1006). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of C622 of the normal symbol variation process 16 (see FIG. 396), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of C616 or the processing of C617 in the normal symbol variation processing 16 are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is executed (C1007). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the processing of C236, the processing of C240, or the processing of C242 of the special symbol variation start processing 16 (see FIG. 391), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed. , The first symbol display device 37a, 37b starts. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is used. Turns off and turns on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. Turns off and the red LED turns on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the C236 process, the C240 process, or the C242 process of the special symbol variation start process 16 (see FIG. 391) is completed, the variation time is completed. The change display executed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is terminated, and the stop symbol (first) is set in the display mode set by the processes of C235, C239 and C241 of the special symbol change start process 16 (see FIG. 391). 1 symbol) is displayed as a stop display (lighting display) on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (C1008). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of C616 or the process of C617 of the normal symbol variation process 16 (see FIG. 396), the variation display is started in the second symbol display device. do. As a result, in the second symbol display device, variable display is performed in which the symbol of "○" and the symbol of "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of C619 of the normal symbol change process 16 (see FIG. 396), the second symbol display device is executed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the processing of C613 or the processing of C619 of the normal symbol variation processing 16 (see FIG. 396) after ending the variation display. indicate.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (C1009), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (C1009: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (C1010). If the predetermined time has already passed (C1010: Yes), the process is shifted to C1001 and each process after C1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (C1010: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (C1011, C1012).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (C1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 are updated by the same method as the processing of C1002 (C1012).

Here, since the execution time of each process of C1001 to C1008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, various variable type counters can be updated at random.

In a configuration in which the variable type counter CS1 and the second variable type counter CS2 are updated as in the 16th embodiment, in order to make the update timings of the various variable type counters different, for example, in the main process C1002. In the process, any variation type counter may be updated, and in the process of C1012, only one variation type counter (for example, the variation type counter CS1) may be updated.

Further, in the processing of C1009, if the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (C1009: Yes), the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after C1013 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (C1013), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (C1014). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (C1015), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (C1016), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of C1009 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in C1001 to C1008, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of C1011 and C1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cutoff state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of C1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of C1001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer has a predetermined value (in the process of initial setting). By setting the initial value), it is possible to start from the process of C1001. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process 16 (C1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 404. FIG. 404 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 16 (C1004). This jackpot control process 16 (C1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 403), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and the variable winning device is used. This is a process for opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a of 65.

In the jackpot control process 16 (C1004), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start flag 203hl is on (C1201). This jackpot start flag 203hl is set to ON in the processing of C219 of the special symbol variation processing 16 (see C104 of FIG. 390). If it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203hl is on (C1201: Yes), the opening command is set (C1202), the jackpot middle flag 203li is set to on, and the jackpot start flag 203hl is set to off (C1203). After that, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of C1201, when it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203hl is off (C1201: No), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot middle flag 203li is on (C1204).

If it is determined that the jackpot middle flag 203li is off in the processing of C1204 (C1204: No), this processing is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203li is on (C1204: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current time is the start timing of a new round (C1215). If it is determined in the processing of C1205 that the current time is the start timing of a new round (C1205: Yes), the specific winning opening corresponding to the number of rounds is set to be opened (C1206) (opening / closing of the specific winning opening 65a). The specific winning opening solenoid is set to be turned on so that the door 65b is in the open state), then a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (C1207), and then this process is terminated.

The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output process (C1001) of the main process (see FIG. 403) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the 16th embodiment, when a plurality of jackpot games are executed in a state where a predetermined continuous condition is satisfied, the number of rounds executed during the plurality of jackpot games is accumulated. The cumulative number of rounds is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Then, this cumulative number of rounds determines whether or not the continuous condition is satisfied when a command indicating that the jackpot game has started (winning the jackpot) is received on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and is continuous. If it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the value of the cumulative number of rounds counter is updated based on the newly received number of rounds command without clearing the value of the cumulative number of rounds counter that accumulates the received rounds command. However, the cumulative number of rounds is displayed in a display mode showing the update result.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the jackpot games executed consecutively are one jackpot game, so that the player is set with one jackpot game. You can show a lot of maximum number of rounds. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while having a sense of expectation for the size of the privilege (the number of prize balls) provided by one big hit game.

In the present embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to execute the process of determining whether or not the continuous condition is satisfied and the process of accumulating the number of rounds, but the cumulative rounds are not limited to this. A part of the process for executing the number display may be configured to be executed on the main control device 110 side. For example, as a continuous condition for executing the cumulative round number display, it is executed after the jackpot game is completed. A continuous condition is set that is satisfied when the jackpot game is executed within a predetermined number of times of the special figure fluctuation (for example, 5 times of the special figure 2 fluctuation), and the cumulative number of rounds of the jackpot game is measured on the main control device 110 side. A cumulative round count counter is provided, and a command indicating the value of the cumulative round count counter is set as a round count command. Then, when the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed five times after the jackpot game is completed, the value of the cumulative round number counter is cleared.

With this configuration, if the continuous condition is satisfied when the jackpot game is executed, the value obtained by accumulating the number of rounds of the previous jackpot game is set as the value of the cumulative round number counter. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the round number display mode to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on the round number (cumulative round number) information included in the command. Only by itself, the cumulative number of rounds can be notified to the player.

In addition, other conditions may be set as continuous conditions for cumulatively displaying the number of rounds executed in a plurality of jackpot games. For example, even after the jackpot game ends, a predetermined period (for example, special figure 2 variation) may be set. (Period until 10 seconds have passed since the end of the jackpot game) When the jackpot game is executed during the period when the jackpot game end screen that is continuously displayed is displayed ( For example, the jackpot game is executed during the period that is satisfied (when the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery) or the specific gaming state (for example, the time saving state) is set as the gaming state. It may be configured to set the condition that is satisfied when it is done. In addition, both the value of the above-mentioned cumulative round number counter (cumulative number of rounds) and the number of rounds of the current jackpot game (number of single rounds) are displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It may be configured.

In the process of C1205, if it is determined that the current time is not the start timing of a new round (C1205: No), then it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the specific winning opening is satisfied (C1208). When it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening is satisfied (C1208: Yes), the specific winning opening is closed (the special winning opening solenoid 65f2 is turned off so that the opening / closing door 65b of the specific winning opening 65a is closed. (C1209), and then the process is terminated. In the process of C1208, when it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening is not satisfied (C1208: No), then it is determined whether or not the present is the start timing of the ending effect (C1210). If it is determined that the current time is the start timing of the ending effect (C1210: Yes), the ending command is set (C1211), and then this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of C1208 that the closing condition is satisfied, the closing condition is cleared, and it is not determined that the closing condition is satisfied again in the next and subsequent jackpot control processes.

On the other hand, in the process of C1210, when it is determined that the present is not the start timing of the ending effect (C1210: No), it is determined whether or not the present is the end timing of the ending effect (C1212). If it is determined that the current time is the end timing of the ending effect (C1212: Yes), the time reduction end condition corresponding to the jackpot type is set to the time reduction medium counter 203 lg and the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203 ll (C1213), and the jackpot type is set. A state command corresponding to the later game state is set (C1214), the end of the jackpot is set (C1215), and then this process is ended.

Here, the values set to the values of each counter in the processing of C1213 are different depending on the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game being executed (see FIGS. 381 and 383), and the jackpot type AA and the jackpot are different. When the types AD to AF are set, "99" is set in the time saving medium counter 203 ll, and "-" indicating that the time saving number counter 203 ll is not set is set in the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203 ll. As a result, after the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot type AA, the corresponding time-saving end condition that is established based on the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 2 is not set as the time-saving end condition, and the common time-saving end condition (big hit winning, small hit game) is not set. End, the number of special map fluctuations reaches 99 times) will be set.

When the jackpot AB is set as the jackpot type, "99" is set in the time reduction / medium counter 203 lg, "5" is set in the special figure 2 fluctuation frequency counter 203ll, and when the jackpot AC is set, the time reduction / medium counter. "99" is set in 203 lg, and "1" is set in the special figure 2 fluctuation frequency counter 203 ll.

Further, when the big hit game is executed based on the small hit winning, the value of the big hit type corresponding to the set small hit type is referred to, and as shown in FIG. 383, the small hit is configured. At the end of the big hit game based on the small hit winning with the types AA and AE set, "99" is set in the time saving medium counter 203 lg and "5" is set in the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203 ll, and the small hit types AB and AD are set. At the end of the big hit game based on the small hit winning in which is set, "99" is set in the time saving medium counter 203 lg, and "-" indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203 ll is not set is set. On the other hand, at the end of the big hit game based on the small hit winning in which the small hit type AC is set, "0" is set in the time saving medium counter 203 lg and "0" is set in the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203 ll.

On the other hand, in the process of C1212, if it is determined that the current time is not the end timing of the ending effect (C1212: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, the small hit control process 16 (C1005) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 405. FIG. 405 is a flowchart showing the small hit control process 16 (C1005). This small hit control process 16 (C1005) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 403), and a command setting for executing various effects according to the small hit on the voice lamp control device 113 and a V prize are won. This is a process for controlling the operation of the V winning solenoid for opening and closing the V winning door 600b attached to the mouth 650a.

In the small hit control process 16 (C1005), first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the small hit game (C1301). In the process of C1301, it is determined whether the small hit scenario set in the process of C291 of the small hit start setting process 16 (see C223 in FIG. 393) is the content indicating the start of the small hit game. When it is determined that it is the start timing of the small hit game (C1301: Yes), the small hit opening command is set (C1302), the small hit medium flag 203 lk is set to ON (C1303), and the operation for small hit is performed. Set the start of the scenario (C1304), and then end this process.

On the other hand, in the process of C1301, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the small hit game (C1301: No), then it is determined whether or not the small hit medium flag 203 lk is on (C1305). If it is determined that the small hit middle flag 203 lk is off (C1305: No), it means that the small hit game is not currently in progress, so this process is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the small hit medium flag 203 lk is on in the processing of C1305 (C1305: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the small hit game (C1306). If it is determined that it is not the end timing of the small hit game (C1306), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of C1306, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit game (C1306: Yes), the small hit medium flag 203 lk is set to off (C1307), and the value of the time saving medium counter 203 lg is reset to 0. (C1308), it is determined whether the V flag 203ln is set to ON (C1309). As described above, in the 16th embodiment, "0" is set as the value of the time saving medium counter 203 lg after the end of the small hit game regardless of whether or not the ball has passed the specific area during the small hit game. It is configured as follows.

By this process of C1308, one condition of the time saving end condition (common time saving end condition) is set. That is, when the small hit game is executed during the time saving state, the time saving state ends at the same time as the end of the small hit game. Therefore, for example, the running small hit game is disadvantageous to the player during the time saving state. During the small hit game, so that the big hit game based on the running small hit game is not executed when it is determined that the small hit type (for example, the small hit type in which the big hit game that is disadvantageous to the player can be executed) is determined. It is possible to suppress a game in which the ball is not fired (the ball is not passed through a specific area).

In the 16th embodiment, the value of the time saving medium counter 203 lg is always set (reset) to "0" when the small hit game is completed, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. When a small hit game based on a specific small hit type is executed, the value of the time saving medium counter 203 lg may be set (reset) to "0" after the small hit game is completed.

If it is determined that the V flag 203ln is off in the processing of C1309 (C1309: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V flag 203ln is on (C1309: Yes), then the start of the jackpot corresponding to the data in the jackpot type storage area is set (C1310), and the V flag 203ln is set to off. (C1311), and then this process is terminated.

Since all the small hit games are set as one round game in this embodiment, unlike the big hit scenario in which the operation control of the big hit game is executed, the process of setting the command related to the number of rounds and the interval period (round). Although it does not have a scenario corresponding to the interval period), when a small hit game having a plurality of rounds is provided, a scenario similar to the big hit scenario used in the above-mentioned big hit game may be set.

Further, in the present embodiment, the small hit scenario is set for the period during which the small hit game is executed. For example, after the small hit game is completed, until a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses. You may set a small hit scenario for the interval. With this configuration, for example, it is possible to set the V-passing valid period until 1 second has elapsed after the end of the small hit game. Therefore, it is possible to set a period set across different gaming states by one scenario, and there is an effect that the capacity of control processing can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the V winning opening 650a in the small hit game, the big hit game corresponding to the preset big hit type corresponding to the small hit is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type may be determined by acquiring the value of the first hit type counter C2 based on the detection of the game ball by the V winning opening 650a.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the 16th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 406 to 421, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. Of the control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the 16th embodiment, the detailed description and illustration of the parts that execute the same processes as those of the above-described embodiments are omitted. do.

Further, regarding the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment, various counters are used in the main processing (see FIG. 59) in the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment described above. After executing the update process (S4111), the effect update process 16 (see C3112 in FIG. 420) to be described later is executed, and the command determination process 16 (see S4112 in FIG. 59) is replaced with the command determination process 16 (see C3112 in FIG. 59). C3113), the variation display setting process 16 (C3114 in FIG. 415) is executed instead of the variation display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 59), and the illustration is omitted. Since the same processing is executed for the other processing in the main processing, the same reference numerals as those of the main processing (see FIG. 59) in the first embodiment are assigned, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the 16th embodiment, as shown in FIG. 363, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the special symbol variation effect according to the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) and the normal symbol variation (normal symbol variation) are performed. ) Is configured to be feasible.

Then, the normal map variation effect is configured to be executed as a series of effects in which a series of effects is executed across the normal map fluctuation period, the normal map per game period, the special figure 2 variable period, and the small hit game period. There is. With this configuration, the game when a specific Fuzu hit (per Fuzu long opening) is won by the Fuzu lottery, that is, the ball wins the second prize opening 640 during the game per Fuzu long opening. A special figure 2 lottery executed based on the winning is won, and the big hit game is executed by the ball passing through a specific area in the V winning opening 650a during the small hit game. The flow can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner depending on the production mode of the series of effects.

In addition, since the execution period of the above-mentioned series of effects greatly differs depending on the game situation (whether or not there is a change in Special Figure 1) at the time when the ball is won in the second winning opening 640 during the game per the long opening of the Fuzu, the Fuzu It is configured to set different production modes according to the game situation (presence or absence of change in Special Figure 1) at the time when the ball is won in the second winning opening 640 during the long opening game. That is, if the special figure 1 change is executed at the time when the ball is won in the second winning opening 640 during the game per the normal figure long opening, the special figure 2 change is completed after the running special figure 1 change is completed. Is executed, so that the effect mode is set according to the length of the residual fluctuation period (waiting period) of the special figure 1 fluctuation. Specifically, if the waiting period is less than the predetermined period, an effect mode corresponding to the normal series of effects is set, and if the waiting period is longer than the predetermined period, the series of effects is pseudo-finished and being executed. When the residual fluctuation period (waiting period) of the special figure 1 fluctuation reaches a specific period, a continuous series of effects is set to execute the series of effects in a pseudo manner again. In this way, by configuring the production mode of the series of effects to be variably set according to the length of the waiting period, it is possible to provide a series of effects that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player. It is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game because the execution period of the effect becomes unnecessarily long.

On the other hand, if the special figure 1 fluctuation is not executed at the time when the ball is won in the second winning opening 640 during the game per Fuzu long opening, the special figure 2 immediately after the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. Since the variation is executed, a shortened series of effects that is shorter than the normal series of effects is set.

That is, the 16th embodiment is configured so that when the normal state is set as the game state, the game for executing the special figure 1 lottery is performed by the left-handed game, and the above-mentioned series of effects is It is executed when the lottery result of the normal drawing lottery (the lottery executed based on the passing of the ball through the through gate 67) is a specific lottery result (per the normal drawing long opening). Therefore, while the series of effects is being executed, there is a high possibility that the special figure 1 variation is being executed. Therefore, a normal series of effects includes a normal figure fluctuation period, a normal figure per game period, a waiting period (a period of waiting until the end of the executing special figure 1 change), a special figure 2 variable period, and a small hit game period. It is executed across straddling, and it is configured to change the production content according to the stage of transitioning each period.

Here, if the special figure 1 fluctuation is not executed at the time when the ball is won in the second winning opening 640 during the game per normal drawing long opening, the waiting period is out of each period in which the above-mentioned series of effects is executed. Since this does not occur, the special figure 2 variable period will be set after the game period per normal figure has elapsed. While such a state can occur, the same production mode is used regardless of the game situation (whether or not there is a change in Special Figure 1) at the time when the ball is won in the second winning opening 640 during the game per long opening. If it is set, an unnecessary effect (for example, an effect indicating that the waiting period is in progress even though the waiting period is not set) is executed, which may lead to a decrease in the effect. ..

On the other hand, in the 16th embodiment, if the special figure 1 fluctuation is not executed at the time when the ball is won in the second winning opening 640 during the game per the long opening of the normal figure, the above-mentioned waiting period is performed. It is configured so that a series of productions in which the productions are skipped are executed. In addition, when skipping from the normal game period to the special figure 2 variable period so that the effect of the effect is not reduced even if the effect of the waiting period is skipped, the effect mode does not give the player a sense of discomfort. Is configured to be set. With this configuration, it is possible to inform in an easy-to-understand manner the normal map variation effect (series effect) executed based on the lottery result of the general map lottery.

Further, in the 16th embodiment, as shown in FIG. 364, as a variable effect showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery in the time saving state, the first suggestion effect suggesting and notifying only the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery. In addition to the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery, the second is to notify the suggestion including the determination result of the preliminary determination which determines the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery corresponding to the winning information included in the special figure 2 hold. It is configured to be feasible with suggestive staging.

Specifically, it is determined whether the special figure variation (special figure 2 variation) executed this time is the final variation in the time saving state in the time saving state, and the determination result is not the final variation (time saving final variation). If it is determined that the first suggestion effect (see FIG. 373 (a)) described above is executed as the variation effect corresponding to the variation in the special figure 2, and if it is determined that the final variation is a time saving, the special figure 2 is performed. The above-mentioned second suggestion effect (see FIGS. 373 (b) to 375 (a)) is executed as the variation effect corresponding to the variation.

With this configuration, in the variation effect corresponding to the time reduction final fluctuation, the special figure 2 lottery executed during the time reduction state and the special figure 2 lottery executed after the end of the time reduction state (after the transition to the normal state) Since the second suggestion effect based on the lottery result (preliminary determination result) of, is executed, the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery executed after the time saving state ends for the player is executed as if during the time saving state. Since the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery can be reminded, the winning probability (big hit probability, small hit probability) in the time saving state can be reminded to be higher than the actual set value.

In addition, it is easy to set an effect mode (successful effect mode shown in FIG. 375 (a)) indicating winning in a dedicated effect (for example, the mission effect shown in FIG. 374 (b)) executed during the time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the dedicated effect.

Further, in the 16th embodiment, the variation time (normal state) of the special figure 2 variation (the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the special figure 2 hold stored at the end of the time reduction state) executed after the time reduction state ends). It is configured so that a short fluctuation time (0.5 seconds) is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation executed during the fluctuation period, and the time reduction final fluctuation is supported during the fluctuation period of the special figure 2 fluctuation. The result of the second suggestion effect to be executed is displayed. With this configuration, as the second suggestion effect, when the success effect is executed based on the fact that the winning information indicating the winning (small hit) winning is included in the special figure 2 hold, the small winning special is won. FIG. 2 The second suggestion effect can be continuously executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player until the fluctuation is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the 16th embodiment, the effect period of the variation effect executed in response to the time saving final variation is divided into a plurality of effect periods, and each effect period is configured to be used for different purposes. Specifically, during the first period from the execution of the final time-saving fluctuation to the lapse of a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), the player acquires a large number of special figure 2 hold by the end of the fluctuation. It is configured to execute the effect (hold acquisition effect) for making the effect, and to execute the above-mentioned second suggestion effect during the second period set after the first period.

Then, the effect mode of the second suggestion effect executed during the second period of the time reduction final variation is the special figure 2 at a specific timing (for example, the end timing of the first period) before the second period is set. It is configured to be set based on the number of holds and the result of prior determination.

With this configuration, even if the time saving state ends (when the lottery result of the time saving final fluctuation is out of order), the special figure 2 lottery can be executed a maximum number of times (4 times) during the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game that is disadvantageous to the player.

As described above, in the 16th embodiment, the hold acquisition effect and the second suggestion effect are executed in the time saving final variation. This executes the hold acquisition effect during the special figure 2 change executed before the time reduction final change, and acquires the upper limit number (4) of the special figure 2 hold while the hold acquisition effect is being executed. Even so, when the special figure 2 change is executed as the time saving final change, the special figure 2 hold is subtracted, so that the player is made to execute the special figure 2 lottery a maximum number of times (4 times) during the normal state. This is to solve the problem of not being able to do.

In the 16th embodiment, as the second suggestion effect executed in the time saving final change, a plurality of special figure 2 lottery (special figure 2 lottery and special figure 2 hold) to be the target of the effect are supported. The lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery) is configured to set an effect mode for suggesting to the player whether or not the winning is included, but the effect is not limited to this. It may be configured to set an effect mode for suggesting and notifying the player of the number of winning lottery results included in the plurality of special figure 2 lottery. In this case, for example, as an effect mode of the second suggestion effect, it is a normal effect mode of the second suggestion effect that at least one winning prize is included in the plurality of special figure 2 lottery to be produced. It is also possible to set a special effect mode that can notify the player earlier than that, and to execute the hit number suggestion effect that suggests and notifies the player of the winning number in the special effect mode. In this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of security by promptly notifying the player that the winning win is included, and to entertain the production that suggests how many winning wins are included. can.

First, the command determination process 16 (C3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 406. FIG. 406 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 16 (C3113). This command determination process 16 (C3113) is a process executed in place of the command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 60) in the first embodiment, is executed in the main process (see FIG. 59), and is the main control. This is a process for executing control according to the type of command received from the device 110.

In the command determination process 16, first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the winning information command is issued from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not the command has been received (C3201). Then, when it is determined that the winning information command has been received (C3201: Yes), the winning information command processing 16 is executed (C3202), and this processing is terminated.

Here, the winning information command processing 16 (C3202) will be described with reference to FIG. 407. FIG. 407 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information command processing 16 (C3202). The prize information command process 16 (C3202) is a process executed when a prize information command is received from the main control device 110 in the command determination process 16 (C3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, a process for storing the information included in the received winning information command in the corresponding area (reserved storage area corresponding to the winning information command) in the winning information storage area 223la provided in the RAM 223 is executed.

The information included in the winning information command includes information on the winning / failing judgment result, information on the stop type, information on the fluctuation pattern, and the symbol type (special figure 1, special figure 2, general figure) to which the current winning information corresponds. The information is for the winning ball, but other information may be included. For example, the winning information about the ball that has already won the prize (the winning information command was received in the past) may be included. Further, although detailed description will be omitted, in the 16th embodiment, the main control device 110 is configured to set a winning information command for indicating a look-ahead result of a normal symbol (see FIG. 398). In the prize information storage area 223la, in addition to the area for storing the prize information of the special symbol, the prize information storage area of the ordinary symbol is also formed.

When the prize information command process 16 (C3202) is executed, first, the received prize information command information (look-ahead information) is stored in the corresponding prize information storage area 223la (C3401), and the prize status determination process (C3402) is performed. Run. As described above, the prize information storage area 223la has a maximum of four prize information commands for the first special symbol (special figure 1) and a maximum of four prize information commands for the second special symbol (special figure 2). It is configured to store up to 4 prize-winning commands for ordinary symbols, for a total of 12 prize-winning information commands, and the prize-winning information commands are stored in a designated storage area according to the order in which the prize-winning information commands are received. ..

Here, the winning status determination process (C3402) will be described with reference to FIG. 408. FIG. 408 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning status determination process (C3402). This winning status determination process (C3402) is a process executed in the winning information command processing 16 (C3202) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is the winning information of the normal symbol (normal figure). It is determined that the game state at the time when the command is received is determined, a process for setting a different effect mode based on the determination result, and an appropriate game (left-handed game) is performed in the normal state. Is executed.

In the winning status determination process (C3402), first, it is determined whether or not there is a Fuzu prize (whether the winning information command received this time is a command corresponding to the Fuzu) (C3451). If it is determined that the prize is not a regular prize (C3451: No), the process proceeds to the process of C3458 described later. When it is determined that the prize is a normal figure (C3451: Yes), then the current gaming state is read out from the state storage area 223hl provided in the RAM 223 (C3452), and it is determined whether the gaming state is the normal state. (C3453). When it is determined that the gaming state is not the normal state (C3453: No), that is, when it is determined that the game state is the time saving state, this processing is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the winning information command processing 16.

On the other hand, in the process of C3453, when it is determined that the gaming state is the normal state (C3453: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) is currently changing (C3454). ). Here, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation is currently in progress by determining whether the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223ln corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation is larger than 0. When it is determined that the current is not during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (C3454: No), the normal figure change is executed while the special figure 1 change is not executed during the normal state, so that the RAM 223 is used. The provided non-variable winning flag 223 lm is set to ON (C3455), and the process proceeds to C3458.

By setting the non-variable winning flag 223lm to ON in the processing of C3455, it is possible to memorize that the winning information command of the normal figure was received during the normal state and during the special figure 1 non-variable state. By determining the setting status of the non-variable winning flag 223 lm when the normal map fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the winning information command of the normal map is received, the special figure 1 at the time of winning the regular map (passing through gate 67) It is possible to set different variation effect modes according to the variation situation.

In the 16th embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 406, a process to be executed when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process 16 (C3113) of the voice lamp control device 113 (C3203 in FIG. 406). It is configured to execute the process (C3201, C3202 in FIG. 406) to be executed when the winning information command is received with priority over C3204).

Here, in the external output process (C1001 of FIG. 403) of the main process (see FIG. 403) of the main control device 110, the prize information command for the general figure prize and the variation pattern command for each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol). And, even if they are output in the same process, specifically, if a general map prize is generated while the normal map fluctuation is not executed, the timer interrupt process of the main controller 110 (Fig.) The winning information command is set in the processing of C105 (see 389), and the variation pattern command is set in the processing of C104 of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 389) executed next (after 2 milliseconds). .. Then, a command that can be output to the voice lamp control device 113 is output in the process (external output process) of C1001 of the main process (see FIG. 403) of the main control device 110 that is executed every 4 milliseconds. Therefore, depending on the execution timing of the timer interrupt processing and the execution timing of the main processing, the winning information command for the general drawing prize and the fluctuation pattern command are output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the same processing. There is.

In such a case, in the 16th embodiment, in the command determination process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see C3113 in FIG. 406), the winning information command process 16 (C3202 in FIG. 407) and the variation pattern command process 16 (FIG. 406). Since the processing is executed in the order of C3204) of 409, even if the winning information command and the fluctuation pattern command are output at the same time from the main control unit 110, when the fluctuation pattern of the normal map fluctuation is set, it is non-variable. It can be used for discrimination without missing the setting status of the winning flag 223 lm.

In the process of C3454, if it is determined that the current fluctuation of the special figure 1 is in progress (C3454: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is 30 seconds or more (C3456). .. If it is determined that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is not 30 seconds or more (C3456: No), the process proceeds to C3458.

In the process of C3456, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is 30 seconds or more (C3456: Yes), a display command indicating a look-ahead effect corresponding to the winning information is set (C3457), and then C3458. Move to the processing of.

When the process shifts to the processing of C3458, it is determined whether the winning information command received this time is the winning information command corresponding to the first special symbol (special drawing 1) (C3458), and it is determined that it is the winning information command of special drawing 1. If it is (C3458: Yes), then it is determined whether the non-variable winning flag 223 lm is set to ON (C3459), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (C3459: Yes), it is not. The variable time winning flag 223 lm is set to off (C3460), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C3458, if it is determined that the winning information command received this time is not the winning information command of FIG. 1 (C3458: No), it is determined whether the information indicating that the left-handed game is being performed is received. Determine (C3461). In the process of C3461, for example, it is determined whether or not the winning information indicating the winning of the ball to each winning opening (general winning opening 63) provided in the left gaming area of the game board 13 is received.

When it is determined that the left-handed game is detected in the processing of C3461 (C3461: Yes), the process proceeds to the above-mentioned processing of C3459, and when it is determined that the left-handed game is not detected (C3461: No), This process ends as it is.

As described above, in the 16th embodiment, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variation is executed at the time when the general figure winning (the ball passes through the through gate 67), and the special figure 1 variation is executed. If it is determined that there is no such thing, the non-variable winning flag 223 lm for indicating to that effect is set to ON. In addition, when the non-variable winning flag 223lm is set to ON and information indicating that the special figure 1 winning or the left-handed game is being performed is received, the non-variable winning flag 223lm is set to off. It is configured to do.

Then, as will be described in detail later, when the normal map long fluctuation is executed with the non-variable winning flag 223 lm set to ON, a variation effect (series effect) corresponding to the normal map long variation is performed. It is configured not to be executed.

With this configuration, the game situation in which the normal state is set and the normal map fluctuation is executed without performing the left-handed game (through gate provided in the right-handed game area by the right-handed game). It is possible to determine the game situation in which the ball is passed through the 67, and in that case, it is possible not to execute the variation effect corresponding to the long variation of the normal map (the effect suggesting that the game per normal map is executed). ..

Further, in the 16th embodiment, even when the left-handed game is properly executed, depending on the winning condition of the ball to the first winning opening 64, the special figure 1 is performed at the timing when the general drawing prize is generated. Since the fluctuation may not be executed, the non-variable winning flag 223lm, which is set to be on at the time of winning a regular figure, can be set to off by a left-handed game. As a result, for example, the left-handed game is executed within a predetermined period from the winning of the Fuzu to the start of the Fuzu fluctuation, so that the variation effect corresponding to the Fuzu long fluctuation (the game per Fuzu is executed). It is possible to normally execute the effect) that suggests that it will be done. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the setting of an effect mode that is disadvantageous to the player who is performing an appropriate game.

As long as it is possible to determine that an appropriate game (left-handed game in a normal state) is being performed, the configuration is not limited to the configuration of the 16th embodiment described above, and for example, a rotation operation of the operation handle 51 is performed. It may be configured so that it can be determined whether the left-handed game is executed based on the resistance value (launch intensity) of the variable resistor that detects the amount or the rotation operation amount by the change of the electric resistance, or the game board 13 A detection means for detecting the passage of a ball is provided in a part of the left game area (upstream area where most of the balls flowing down the left game area pass), and the left-handed game is executed based on the detection result in the detection means. It may be configured so that it can be determined whether or not it is.

Further, in the 16th embodiment described above, a configuration for determining whether or not a left-handed game is being executed is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration for determining whether or not a right-handed game is being executed is used. When a predetermined normal map fluctuation (normal map long fluctuation) is executed while it is determined that the right-handed game is being executed, a variation effect corresponding to the normal map long fluctuation (game per normal map) is performed. May be configured to limit the execution of the effect) that suggests that is executed. In this case, as a configuration for determining that the right-handed game is being executed, when it is detected that the ball has passed through a predetermined area (for example, through gate 67) provided in the right-handed game area. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects a configuration that determines that a right-handed game is being executed, a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51, or a rotation operation amount (rotation position) by a change in electrical resistance. It may be configured so that it can be determined whether or not the right-handed game is executed based on the resistance value (launch intensity).

Further, in the 16th embodiment, it is configured to determine whether or not the player is performing an appropriate game during the period from the winning of the normal map to the start of the fluctuation of the normal map. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a long period (discrimination target period) used for determining whether or not an appropriate game is being executed may be set. In this case, for example, a game status storage means capable of temporarily storing the game status is provided, and the game status (past history) of whether or not the player is performing a left-handed game is stored in the game status storage means. It is preferable to configure it so that at the timing of winning the Fuzu, it is determined whether or not the Fuzu is won during an appropriate game based on the game situation stored in the game situation storage means.

Further, as a winning information command (Public map winning information command) set when a Pymph prize is won, a winning information command (left Ping figure) indicating that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 arranged in the left game area. The voice lamp control device 113 distinguishes between the winning information command) and the Fuzu winning information command (right Fuzu winning information command) indicating that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 arranged in the right game area. It is possible to configure it, and based on the type of the received Fuzu winning information command and the game situation, the execution restriction of the variation effect (the effect that suggests that the game per Fuzu is executed) corresponding to the Fuzu long variation. May be configured to be variable.

Returning to FIG. 407, the explanation will be continued. It is determined whether or not there is special 2 hit information as the information (look-ahead information) included in the winning information command received this time (C3403). If it is determined that there is no special 2 hit information in the processing of C3403 (C3403: No), the process proceeds to the processing of C3406. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is special 2 hit information (C3403: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the time saving final fluctuation flag 223 lk provided in the RAM 223 is on (C3404). If it is determined that the time saving final fluctuation flag 223 lk is off (C3404: No), the processing of C3405 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of C3406.

If it is determined that the time saving final fluctuation flag 223 lk is on in the processing of C3404 (C3404: Yes), the information indicating the notification is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223la (C3405), and then the process proceeds to C3406. do.

In the process of C3406, an effect mode related to other winning information is set (C3406), a display command for indicating the set effect mode is set (C3407), and then this process is terminated and the process returns to the command determination process 16.

In the present embodiment, the specific effect set at the beginning of the variation display (for example, the specific effect executed 5 seconds after the start of the variation (specific effect C)) is set in another period (for example, the variation). It is stipulated that the effect shows that the jackpot expectation is higher than the specific effect) that is executed 20 seconds after the start. That is, it is stipulated that the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the jackpot winning of the special symbol is easier to select the fluctuation pattern in which the specific effect C can be executed.

As a result, when the suggestion effect is executed across a plurality of fluctuation displays, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player to win the jackpot in the fluctuations from the next time onward. Furthermore, it is possible to enthusiastically store the reservation of the special symbol so that the suggestion effect that straddles a plurality of fluctuations is executed.

In this embodiment, as described above, the winning information included in the received winning information command and the timing at which the winning information command is received (the remaining period of the variable display during execution) are used to straddle a plurality of variable displays. Is used to determine whether or not to execute the suggestion effect, but other configurations may be used. For example, the suggestion effect is based on the timing at which the prize information command is received (the remaining period of the variable display during execution). It may be configured to execute a precursor effect as a suggestion effect and set a specific effect at the timing of starting the next variation display when it is determined whether or not to execute. , A specific effect is set based on the operation content of the player's frame button 22 during the period in which the precursor effect is being executed (a specific effect that is the target of the suggestion effect is set from a plurality of specific effects). Is also good. With this configuration, the suggestion effect is produced based on the game situation (the lottery result of the next variation, the variation pattern, or the operation content to the operation means (frame button 22)) after the suggestion effect is started. Aspects can be set. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the staging as compared with the configuration in which the staging mode of the suggestive staging is determined in advance and then executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, as an example of executing the suggestion effect across a plurality of fluctuation displays, a variable display being executed and a variable display to be executed next time based on the winning information won during the variable display are displayed. Although the suggestion effect used is explained, the present invention is not limited to this, and any configuration may be used as long as the suggestion effect is executed across a plurality of variable displays. For example, the winning information won during the variable display is executed one after another. In the case of the variable display, the suggestion effect may be executed so as to straddle the variable display that is executed one after another from the variable display that is being executed, or the variable display that is executed next time is executed one after another. The suggestion effect may be executed so as to straddle the variable display. In this case, it is determined whether to set the timing for executing the suggestion effect to the running variation display or the next variation display based on the timing when the winning information command is received (the remaining period of the variation display during execution). It is good to provide a means to do so.

The winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223la is referred to when selecting the contents of various effects set by the voice lamp control device 113, and for example, the holding display area in which the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is displayed. In Dn4, in order to suggest a hold display (holding symbol) corresponding to the winning information indicating the jackpot, a holding change notice effect for changing the display mode of the holding display is set, or a special symbol corresponding to the winning information indicating the jackpot is set. It is referred to when setting a continuous notice effect that expects a big hit as an effect of a special symbol whose fluctuation starts before.

Further, in the 16th embodiment, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223la is referred to at the time of winning the jackpot, during the jackpot game, and at the end of the jackpot, and the winning information indicating the jackpot is included in the hold. It is configured to determine whether or not it is (whether or not there is a villa on hold), and to set the effect during the big hit game or after the big hit is finished based on the judgment result. In addition, even in the continuous production executed during the probability change state, the production content is configured to be selected based on the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223la.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, when an effect (look-ahead effect) referring to the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223la is executed, a flag indicating that fact (pre-reading effect) For example, if the look-ahead effecting flag) is set to on and the look-ahead effecting flag is set to on, when a new winning information command is received, the winning information included in the winning information command is included. It is configured so that a new look-ahead effect based on information is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the problem that a plurality of look-ahead effects are continuously executed without a gap and give a sense of discomfort to the player.

In addition, a control other than the above-mentioned contents for solving the above-mentioned problem may be used. For example, a priority rank is given to a plurality of pre-reading effects set based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223la. A look-ahead effect with a higher priority rank is compared with the priority rank of the look-ahead effect that is given and currently executed and the priority rank of the look-ahead effect that can be set based on the prize information included in the new prize information command. May be controlled to execute. In this case, if it is determined that the priority rank of the new look-ahead effect is higher, the look-ahead effect switching notification for notifying the player that the pre-reading effect being executed ends in the middle is executed. After that, a new look-ahead effect is executed, or a new look-ahead effect is executed after changing the effect mode of the pre-reading effect being executed to a shortened look-ahead effect mode earlier than the initially set end timing. You may.

In addition, as the priority rank of the look-ahead effect, the higher the expectation that the jackpot is won, the higher the priority rank so that the priority rank of the look-ahead effect corresponding to the winning information indicating that the jackpot is won is the highest. It is good to set so that is high. As a result, when the pre-reading effect being executed ends in the middle, the player can have a sense of expectation for the jackpot, and the new pre-reading effect to be executed next can be watched.

Return to FIG. 406 to continue the explanation. If it is determined in the process of C3201 that the winning information command has not been received (C3201: No), then it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command has been received from the main control unit 110 (C3203). If it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (C3203: Yes), the variation pattern command process 16 is executed (C3204), and then the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted in the variation pattern command process 16 is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to in the variation display setting process 16 (see FIG. 415) described later in order to determine a detailed display mode of the variation pattern. .. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type. Further, in the 16th embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to set a variation pattern for a special symbol (special symbol) and a variation pattern for a normal symbol (normal symbol). It is determined whether the received fluctuation pattern command is for a special figure or a normal figure, and processing based on the determination result is also executed.

Here, the variation pattern command process 16 (C3204) will be described with reference to FIG. 409. FIG. 409 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern command process 16 (C3204). This variation pattern command process 16 (C3204) is a process executed when a variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 in the command determination process 16 (C3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. Is.

In the variation pattern command processing 16 (C3204), first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is a special figure variation pattern command (C3301). If it is determined that the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is not the special figure variation pattern command (C3301: No), the processing of C3302 and C3303 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the processing of C3304. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is a special figure fluctuation pattern command (C3301: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223ld for the special figure provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (C3301: Yes). C3302), the variation pattern is extracted from the received variation pattern command for special figure (C3303), and then the process proceeds to C3304.

In the process of C3304, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is a variation pattern command for normal drawing (C3304). If it is determined that the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is not a variation pattern command for normal drawing (C3304: No), the processes of C3305 and C3306 are skipped, and the process returns to the command determination process 16.

On the other hand, in the process of C3304, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is a fluctuation pattern command for normal drawing (C3304: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223ld for normal drawing provided in RAM 223 is provided. Is set to on (C3305), a variation pattern is extracted from the received variation pattern command for normal drawing (C3306), and then this process is terminated and the process returns to the command determination process 16.

Return to FIG. 406 to continue the explanation. In the process of C3203, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (C3203: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3205). Then, when the stop type command is received (C3205: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223le of the RAM 223 is set to ON (C3206), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (C3207), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process 16 (see FIG. 415) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of C3205, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (C3205: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3208). Then, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command is received (C3208: Yes), the reserved ball number is extracted from the received reserved ball number command, and the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) is extracted. The value included in the hold ball number command received from the special symbol hold ball number counter or the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203 lf of the normal symbol is stored (C3209), and then the process returns to the main process. Specifically, when the reserved ball number command received this time is the reserved ball number command corresponding to the special symbol 1, from the received reserved ball number command, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld of the main controller 110 is used. The value (the number of holdings N1 of the variation display in the special symbol 1) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223lb provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113. On the other hand, when the reserved ball number command received this time is the reserved ball number command corresponding to the special symbol 2, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203le of the main controller 110 (special) from the received reserved ball number command. The number of holdings N2) of the variation display in the symbol 2 is extracted, and this is stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223 lc provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113.

Return to FIG. 406 to continue the explanation. In the processing of C3208, if it is determined that the reserved ball count command has not been received (C3208: No), then it is determined whether or not a hit-related command has been received (C3210), and if a hit-related command has been received, it is determined. (C3210: Yes), the hit-related command process 16 (C3211) is executed, and after the hit-related command process 16 (C3211) is completed, this process is terminated.

Here, the contents of the hit-related command process 16 (C3211) will be described with reference to FIG. 410. FIG. 410 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit-related command process 16 (C3211). The hit-related command process 16 (C3211) is a process executed in the command determination process 16 (C3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. In the hit-related command processing 16, first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot-related command has been received from the main control device 110 (C3501). Then, when it is determined that the jackpot-related command has been received (C3501: Yes), the jackpot-related command process is executed (C3502), and then the process proceeds to the C3503 process.

Here, the contents of the jackpot-related command processing (C3502) will be described with reference to FIG. 411. FIG. 411 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot-related command processing (C3502). The jackpot-related command process (C3502) is a process executed in the hit-related command process 16 (C3211) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. In the jackpot-related command processing (C3502), first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main control unit 110 (C3601). Then, when it is determined that the opening command has been received (C3601: Yes), the opening command process for display is executed (C3602), and then the process proceeds to C3608.

The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. Upon receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts the opening effect on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of C3601, when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (C3601: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (C3603). Here, when the round number command is received (C3603: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (C3604), and then the display round number command according to the round number extracted this time is set. (C3605), and then the process proceeds to C3608. The display round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, although detailed description is omitted, in the 16th embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed in a state where a predetermined continuous condition is satisfied, the round game executed in the previous jackpot game is performed. The number is configured to accumulate and display the number of round games of the jackpot game executed this time. Specifically, a period flag is set for a period in which the time saving state is set and a period in which the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed after the time saving state is changed to the normal state. Then, when the jackpot game is started, it is determined whether the period flag is set to on, and if it is determined that the period flag is set to on, the number of round games executed in the previous jackpot game is determined. The number of rounds of this jackpot game is cumulatively displayed in (number of rounds).

On the other hand, in the process of C3603, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (C3603: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3606). Then, when it is determined that the ending command has been received (C3606: Yes), the display ending command is set (C3607), and then the process proceeds to C3608. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. Upon receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 starts the ending effect on the third symbol display device 81.

If it is determined that the ending command has not been received in the processing of C3606 (C3606: No), the process proceeds to the processing of C3608. In the processing of C3608, processing corresponding to other commands is executed (C3608), this processing is terminated, and the process returns to the hit-related command processing 16.

Returning to FIG. 410, the explanation will be continued. In the process of C3501, when it is determined that the jackpot related command has not been received from the main controller 110 (C3501: No), then it is determined whether or not the small hit related command has been received from the main controller 110. (C3503). Then, when it is determined that the small hit related command has been received (C3503: Yes), the small hit related command process is executed (C3504), and then the process proceeds to the C3505 process.

Here, the contents of the small hit-related command processing (C3504) will be described with reference to FIG. 412 (a). FIG. 412 (a) is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit related command process (C3504). The small hit-related command process (C3504) is a process executed in the hit-related command process 16 (C3211) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. In the small hit-related command processing (C3504), first, it is determined whether or not the series production flag 223li provided in the RAM 223 is on (C3701). When it is determined that the series effect flag 223li is off (not on) (C3701: No), the normal small hit process is executed (C3702), and then this process is terminated and the process returns to the hit-related command process 16. ..

As described above, in the 16th embodiment, the effect mode when the small hit game is executed is variably set according to whether or not the small hit game execution timing is in a series of effects. .. That is, when the small hit game is executed during the series of effects, the small hit game effect (see FIG. 370) is configured to be executed as a part of the series of effects. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand effect.

Here, the contents of the normal small hit process (C3702) will be described with reference to FIG. 412 (b). FIG. 412 (b) is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal small hit process (C3702). The normal small hit process (C3702) is a process executed in the small hit related command process (C3504) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. In the normal small hit process (C3702), first, it is determined whether or not a small hit start command has been received from the main control device 110 (C3801). Then, when it is determined that the small hit start command has been received (C3801: Yes), the small hit start command for display is set (C3802), and then this process is terminated and the process returns to the small hit related command process.

If it is determined that the small hit start command has not been received in the processing of C3801 (C3801: No), then it is determined whether or not the small hit end command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3803). .. When it is determined that the small hit end command has been received (C3803: Yes), the small hit end command for display is set (C3804), and then this process is terminated and the process returns to the small hit related command process.

In the process of C3803, when it is determined that the small hit end command has not been received (C3803: No), then it is determined whether or not the V passage command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3805). If it is determined that the V-pass command has been received (C3805: Yes), the display V-pass command is set (C3806), and then this process is terminated and the process returns to the small hit-related command process.

Returning to FIG. 412 (a), the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of C3701 that the series effect flag 223li is on (C3701: Yes), the small hit game this time is a small hit game executed during the series production, so the small hit process for the series effect is performed. It is executed (C3703), and then this process is terminated and the process returns to the hit-related command process 16.

Here, the contents of the series of small hit processing for directing (C3703) will be described with reference to FIG. 413. FIG. 413 is a flowchart showing the contents of the series of small hit processing for directing (C3703). The small hit process for a series of effects (C3703) is a process executed in the small hit related command process (C3504) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. In the small hit process for a series of effects (C3703), first, it is determined whether or not a small hit start command has been received from the main control device 110 (C3901). Then, when it is determined that the small hit start command has been received (C3901: Yes), the series production hit start command is set (C3902), and then this process is terminated and the process returns to the small hit related command process.

In the process of C3901 when it is determined that the small hit start command has not been received (C3901: No), then it is determined whether or not the V passage command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3903). When it is determined that the V-pass command has been received (C3903: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the small hit caution flag 223ll provided in the RAM 223 is on (C3904). If it is determined that the small hit caution flag 223ll is off (C3904: No), a V effect command for displaying a series of effects is set (C3905), and then this process is terminated and the process returns to the small hit related command process.

Here, the small hit caution flag 223 ll allows the ball to pass through the specific area in the V winning opening 650a even after a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed even though the small hit game is being executed. A flag that is set on if it is not present. In the 16th embodiment, since the game board 13 is configured so that the period required for the ball launched by performing the right-handed game to reach the V winning device 650 is about 1 second, it is a small hit. When a right-handed game is performed based on the fact that the game has been executed, the small hit caution flag 223 ll is configured not to be set to ON.

On the other hand, if the player is playing a left-handed game without noticing that the small hit game is being executed, or if the number of balls to be fired during the small hit game is intentionally reduced (including 0), an inappropriate game is performed. If so, the ball may not pass through the specific area in the V winning opening 650a 3 seconds after the start of the small hit game, so the small hit caution flag 223ll is turned on. It will be easier to set. When this small hit caution flag 223ll is set to ON, the highlight guidance display (see FIG. 371 (a)) for causing the player to perform a right-handed game is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Will be done. Further, even when the ball passes through the specific area in the V winning opening 650a, different display modes are set depending on whether the small hit caution flag 223ll is set to on or off. For example, if a V-pass command is received while the small hit caution flag 223 ll is set to ON, a guidance effect is provided to promptly perform a right-handed game in the next small hit game. Is executed.

In the processing of C3904, if it is determined that the small hit caution flag 223ll is on (C3904: Yes), a special V effect command for displaying a series of effects is set (C3906), and then this process is terminated and the small hit is performed. Return to related command processing. The special V effect command for displaying a series of effects set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221. Inside, it is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the special V effect command for displaying a series of effects, the display control device 114 indicates that the timing at which the ball passed V in this small hit game was delayed as part of the series of effects in the third symbol display device 81. The V effect including the effect mode (for example, the comment "Let's hit right from earlier next time") is started.

On the other hand, in the process of C3903, when it is determined that the V passage command has not been received (C3903: No), then it is determined whether or not the small hit end command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3907). ). If it is determined that the small hit end command has been received (C3907: Yes), then it is determined whether or not there is a V passage (C3908), and if it is determined that there is a V passage (C3908: Yes), a series of effects is produced. The small hit end command for display is set (C3909), then the small hit caution flag 223ll is set to off (C3912), this processing is terminated, and the process returns to the small hit related command processing.

On the other hand, in the process of C3908, when it is determined that there is no V passage (C3908: No), a display command indicating the end of the series effect is set (C3910), and the series effect flag 223li is set to off (C3911). The small hit caution flag 223ll is set to off (C3912), and then this processing is terminated and the process returns to the small hit related command processing.

That is, if the ball does not pass through the specific area in the small hit game during the series of effects, the effect result indicating the occurrence of the big hit game cannot be displayed as the effect result of the series of effects. An effect mode (see FIG. 371 (b)) indicating failure) is set. Further, even when it is determined that the small hit end command has not been received in the processing of C3907 (C3907: No), this processing is ended and the process returns to the small hit related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 410, the explanation will be continued. In the process of C3503, if it is determined that the small hit related command has not been received from the main control device 110 (C3503: No), then whether or not the normal figure hit related command has been received from the main control device 110 is determined. Determine (C3505). Then, when it is determined that the command related to the normal figure has been received (C3505: Yes), the display command corresponding to the command related to the normal figure is set (C3506), and then this process is terminated and the command is determined. Return to process 16.

Returning to FIG. 406, the explanation is continued. In the process of C3210, when it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received from the main controller 110 (C3210: No), then it is determined whether the status command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3212). If it is determined that the status command has been received (C3212: Yes), the current game status is extracted from the received command and stored in the status storage area 223hl (C3213), and the status command for display is set (C3214). After that, this process is terminated.

In the processing of C3212, if it is determined that the status command has not been received (C3212: No), then it is determined whether the stop command has been received (C3215), and if the stop command has been received (C3215: Yes). ), The stop command process 16 (C3216) is executed, and after the stop command process 16 is completed, this process is terminated.

Here, the contents of the stop command process 16 (C3216) will be described with reference to FIG. 414. FIG. 414 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop command process 16 (C3216). The stop command process 16 (C3216) is a process executed in the command determination process 16 (C3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. In the stop command processing 16, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure stop command has been received (C3951), when it is determined that the special figure stop command has been received (C3951: Yes), and then the special figure fluctuation time counter. The value of 223ln is reset to 0 (C3952), and it is determined whether the pseudo series effect flag 223lj is set to ON (C3953).

If it is determined in the processing of C3953 that the pseudo-series effect flag 223lj is set to ON (C3953: Yes), the stop command received this time executes a series of effects as a variation effect of the deviation deviation variation. Since it is a fluctuation, the pseudo series effect flag 223lj is set to off (C3954), and the process proceeds to S3955. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of C3953 that the pseudo-series effect flag 223lj is not set to ON (C3953: No), the processing of C3954 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of C3955.

In the processing of C3955, it is determined whether the time saving final fluctuation flag 223 lk is set to ON (C3955), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (C3955: Yes), the read-ahead flag is set to ON (C3956). ), Set the time saving final fluctuation flag to off (C3957), and end this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of C3955 that the time saving final fluctuation flag 223 lk is not set to ON (C3955: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Returning to FIG. 406, the explanation is continued. If it is determined in the processing of C3215 that the stop command has not been received from the main control unit 110 (C3215: No), the processing corresponding to the received command is executed (C3217), and this processing is terminated. .. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. Set the command so that it is sent to the device 114.

By this processing, it is possible to set a command for making various settings to the display control device 114 based on the command output from the main control device 110.

Next, the variation display setting process 16 (C3114) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 415. FIG. 415 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 16 (C3114). This variation display setting process 16 (C3114) replaces the variation display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 59) in the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. In order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

The variation display setting process 16 (C3114) of the 16th embodiment is configured to set a variation pattern command for displaying a normal symbol for the variation display setting process used in each of the above-described embodiments. , The content of the variable staging that is set is changed, and the other elements (technical ideas) are the same. The same element (technical idea) as the variable display setting process used in each of the above-described embodiments will not be described in detail.

In the variation display setting process 16 (C3114), first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223ld provided in the RAM 223 is on (C4001). In the processing of C4001, either the variation start flag 223ld for special figures or the variation start flag 223ld for normal drawings in the processing of C3302 and C3305 of the variation pattern command processing 16 (see C3204 in FIG. 409) described above. Determines if is set to on.

Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223ld is not on (that is, the fluctuation start flag 223ld for the special figure and the fluctuation start flag 223ld for the normal drawing are both off), the main control is performed (C4001: No). Since the variation pattern command has not been received from the device 110, the process proceeds to C4006. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223ld is on (C4001: Yes), the corresponding fluctuation start flag 223ld is set to off (C4002), and then C3303 of the fluctuation pattern command process 16 (see FIG. 409). And in the process of C3306, the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (C4003), and the variation effect setting process is executed (C4004). Details of the variable staging setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 416.

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type and the variation pattern set in the variation effect setting process (C4004 in FIG. 416), a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is generated. Is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (C4005). After that, the process proceeds to C4006. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

In the process of C4006, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223le provided in the RAM 223 is on (C4006). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223le is not on (that is, it is off) (C4006: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variable display is displayed. End the setting process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223le is on (C4006: Yes), the corresponding stop type selection flag 223le is turned off (C4007), and then in the command determination process 16 (C3207 in FIG. 406). , The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (C4008). Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (C4009), and the process proceeds to C4010. In the process of C4010, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (C4010). After that, this process is terminated. When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

Next, with reference to FIG. 416, the variation effect setting process (C4004) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 416 is a flowchart showing this variation effect setting process (C4004). This variation effect setting process (C4004) is a process executed in the variation display setting process 16 (see FIG. 415) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is a process of varying effect of a special symbol. Alternatively, a process for setting a variation effect mode of a normal symbol is executed.

In the variation effect setting process (C4004), first, it is determined whether or not the variation effect setting process of this time sets the variation effect of the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) (C4101). In this C4101 process, when it is determined that the special figure variation start flag 223ld is set to ON in the C4001 process of the variation display setting process 16 (see C3114 in FIG. 415), the current variation effect setting process is performed. Is determined to set the fluctuation effect of the special figure fluctuation. Here, if it is determined that the special map variation effect is not set (the normal map variation effect is set) (C4101: No), the normal map effect setting process is executed (C4117), and then this process is terminated. .. The details of the normal drawing effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 417, but when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, the normal drawing change executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The process for setting the effect mode of the variation effect based on the above is executed.

In the process of C4101, when it is determined that the special figure variation effect is set (C4101: Yes), the information indicating the game state stored in the state storage area 223 hlh is read out (C4102), and the current game state is the normal state. It is determined whether or not there is (C4103). If it is determined that the current gaming state is not the normal state (time saving state) (C4103: No), the time saving effect setting process is executed (C4104), and then the process proceeds to C4116. The time saving effect setting process (C4104) is a process for setting the effect mode of the variable effect executed in the time saving state. The time saving effect setting process (C4104) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 418.

On the other hand, in the process of C4103, when it is determined that the gaming state is the normal state (C4103: Yes), it is determined whether the re-read-ahead flag 223lr is set to on (C4105), and the re-read-ahead flag 223lr is turned on. When it is determined that the setting is made (C4105: Yes), that is, the fluctuation effect this time is a variation effect corresponding to the special figure variation of the first rotation after the time reduction state ends, and the time reduction state is in progress. If there is a special figure 2 hold for which the look-ahead result is not reflected in the time-saving final variation effect executed by the time-saving final variation among the special figure 2 hold acquired in, the prize is stored in the prize information storage area 223la. From the information (winning information corresponding to special figure 2), the winning information (winning information corresponding to special drawing 2) for which the look-ahead processing has not been executed is extracted (C4106), and the winning information is included in the extracted winning information. It is determined whether or not there is winning information including (C4107).

In the process of C4107, if it is determined that there is winning information including winning information (C4107: yes), a display command for replacing the result display mode of the time saving variation effect with the revival winning display mode is set (C4108). , The re-read-ahead flag 223lr is set to off (C4109), and the process proceeds to C4110. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of C4105 that the re-look-ahead flag 223lr is not set to ON (C4105: No), the current variation effect setting process is executed at the timing of changing the result display mode of the time reduction effect. Since the processing is not performed, the processing of C4106 to C4109 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the processing of C4110. Further, in the processing of C4107, if it is determined that there is no winning information including the winning information in the extracted winning information (C4107: No), the current variation effect setting process changes the result display mode of the time saving effect. Although it is the timing to make it, since the condition for changing the result display mode (including the hit of the new look-ahead result) is not satisfied, the processing of C4108 is skipped, the processing of C4109 is executed, and the processing of C4110 is executed. Move to.

In the processing of C4110, it is determined whether or not the present is within the extended display period of the time saving variation effect executed during the time saving state (C4110), and the game result within the extended display period, that is, during the time saving state is displayed. If it is determined that the end screen (see FIG. 377) is displayed (C4110: Yes), the present process is terminated without setting the variation effect corresponding to the variation. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not within the extended display period (C4110: No), then, based on the fluctuation pattern acquired in the process of C4003 in FIG. 415, is the current fluctuation pattern a hit fluctuation pattern? Is determined (C4111).

In the process of C4111, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is a hit variation pattern (C4111: Yes), the hit variation effect setting process is executed (C4112), and then the process proceeds to the C4116 process. In this hit variation effect setting process (C4112), a process of determining whether or not to execute a series of effects as the special figure variation effect of this time and a series of effects when the series of effects are executed as the normal figure variation effect The effect result is replaced and the process is executed. The hit variation effect setting process (C4112) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 419.

On the other hand, in the processing of C4111, when it is determined that the current variation pattern is not a hit variation pattern (C4111: No), then it is determined whether or not the series production flag 223li is on (C4113). If it is determined that the series effect flag 223li is on (C4113: Yes), the process proceeds to C4116.

In the process of C4113, when it is determined that the series effect flag 223li is off (C4113: No), it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is the variation pattern of the series effect based on the extracted variation pattern (C4113: No). C4114). If it is determined that the current variation pattern is not the variation pattern of the series of effects (C4114: No), the process proceeds to C4116.

On the other hand, in the processing of C4114, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern of this time is the fluctuation pattern of the series of effects (C4114: Yes), the pseudo series of effects flag 223lj is set to ON (C4115), and then the process of C4116 is performed. Transition.

In the process of C4116, the special figure variation time counter 223ln is set (C4116), and then this process is terminated and the process returns to the variation display setting process 16.

Next, with reference to FIG. 417, the staging setting process (C4117) for normal drawing executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 417 is a flowchart showing this staging setting process for normal drawing (C4117). This normal-figure staging setting process (C4117) is executed in the variable staging setting process (see FIG. 416) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is a variable staging based on the normal map variation. The process for setting (series of effects) is executed.

In the normal drawing effect setting process (C4117), first, the current game state is read (C4201) from the state storage area 223hl provided in the RAM 223, and it is determined whether or not the read current game information is the normal state. (C4202). If it is determined that the current game information is not in the normal state (C4202: No), this process is then terminated.

In the process of C4202, when it is determined that the current game information is in the normal state (C4202: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time is 30 seconds or more (C4203). If it is determined that the fluctuation time is not 30 seconds or more (C4203: No), the present process is terminated thereafter. When it is determined that the fluctuation time is 30 seconds or more (C4203: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the series effect flag 223li is on (C4204).

If it is determined in the process of C4204 that the series effect flag 223li is on (C4204: Yes), the present process is terminated thereafter. On the other hand, when it is determined that the series effect flag 223li is off (C4204: No), then it is determined whether or not the non-variable winning flag 223lm is on (C4205), and the non-variable winning flag 223lm is determined. When it is determined that is off (C4205: No), then it is determined whether or not the pseudo series effect flag 223lj is on (C4206). When it is determined that the pseudo series effect flag 223lj is off (C4206: No), the series effect is set (C4207), the series effect flag 223li is set on (C4208), and then this process is terminated.

In the process of C4206, when it is determined that the pseudo series effect flag 223lj is on (C4206: Yes), a normal map variation pattern corresponding to the remaining period of the special map variation time is set (C4209), and then this process is performed. To finish.

On the other hand, in the process of C4205, when it is determined that the non-variable winning flag 223 lm is on (C4205: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the special figure variation time counter 223 ln is larger than 0 (C4210). ), When it is determined that the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223ln is not larger than 0 (0) (C4210: No), when the normal figure fluctuation is executed while the special figure fluctuation is not executed. Therefore, this process is terminated as it is without setting the normal map fluctuation effect for showing the lottery result of the normal map variation.

In the 16th embodiment, the normal map variation effect is not set when the special map variation is not executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the normal map variation effect is defined as normal. May be configured to execute the normal map fluctuation effect to be executed at different timings, and based on the executed normal map variation effect, the electric accessory 640a is opened for a long time according to the lottery result of this normal map lottery. The timing may be configured so that it is difficult for the player to easily determine the timing.

In the processing of C4210, when it is determined that the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223ln is larger than 0 (C4210: Yes), the special series effect is set (C4211), and the series effect flag 223li is set to ON (C4212). ), After that, this process is terminated.

As described above, in the 16th embodiment, when the fluctuation time of the normal map is a predetermined time (30 seconds) or more, it is based on the execution status of the series of effects and the status of the special map fluctuation during execution. It is configured to set the normal map fluctuation effect (normal map effect). With this configuration, when the effect of easily notifying the player of the lottery result advantageous to the player is executed as the special figure variation effect for displaying the lottery result of the special figure variation, the normal drawing effect is the effect. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the special figure fluctuation effect is hindered, and it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 418, a time saving effect setting process (C4104) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 418 is a flowchart showing this time saving effect setting process (C4104). This time saving effect setting process (C4104) is executed in the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 416) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

In the time saving effect setting process (C4104), first, it is determined whether or not the current special figure change is the change of the special figure 2 (C4301). If it is determined that the change in the special figure this time is not the change in the special figure 2 (C4301: No), the present process is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the current special figure change is the change of the special figure 2 (C4301: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current special figure change is the time-saving final change (C4302). If it is determined that the special figure change this time is not the time-saving final change (C4302: No), this process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the special figure fluctuation this time is the time saving final fluctuation (C4302: Yes), the time saving final fluctuation flag 223lk is set to ON (C4303), and the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223la is read out. (C4304), a variation pattern of the final variation is set based on the lottery result of the variation and the lottery result included in the winning information (C4305), and then this process is terminated.

Next, the hit variation effect setting process (C4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 419. FIG. 419 is a flowchart showing this hit variation effect setting process (C4112). This hit variation effect setting process (C4112) is executed in the variation effect setting process (see FIG. 416) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

In the hit variation effect setting process (C4112), first, it is determined whether or not the series effect flag 223li is on (C4401). When it is determined that the series effect flag 223li is off (C4401: No), then it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is the variation pattern of the series effect (C4402). If it is determined that the current variation pattern is not the variation pattern of the series of effects (C4402: No), the present process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the current variation pattern is a variation pattern of a series of effects (C4402: Yes), the series effect flag 223li is set to ON (C4403), and then this process is set.

On the other hand, in the process of C4401, when it is determined that the series effect flag 223li is on (C4401: Yes), the fluctuation stop timing and the series effect branch timing are analyzed (C4404), and then the result can be replaced. It is determined whether or not there is (C4405). If it is determined that the result cannot be replaced (C4405: No), this process is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the result can be replaced (C4405: Yes), a display replacement command indicating a variation pattern for replacing the effect result of the series of effects is set (C4406), and then this process is terminated.

Next, the effect update process 16 (C3112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 420. FIG. 420 is a flowchart showing the effect update process 16 (C3112). This effect update process 16 (C3112) is executed in the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the 16th embodiment, and is controlled based on the elapsed time regardless of the fluctuation of the special symbol. This is a process for setting the effect.

When the effect update process 16 (C3112) is executed, first, the values of various fluctuation time counters are updated (C4501), and then it is determined whether or not the series effect flag 223li is on (C4502). When it is determined that the series effect flag 223li is off (C4502: No), then it is determined whether or not the pseudo series effect flag 223lj is on (C4504). If it is determined that the pseudo series effect flag 223lj is off (C4504: No), the process proceeds to C4505.

In the process of C4502, when it is determined that the series effect flag 223li is on (C4502: Yes), and in the process of C4504, when it is determined that the pseudo series effect flag 223lj is on (C4504: Yes), a series of processes is performed. The effect update process is executed (C4503), and then the process proceeds to the C4505 process. Further, the details of the series of effect update processing will be described later with reference to the processing of FIG. 421.

In the process of C4505, it is determined whether or not the time saving final fluctuation flag 223 lk is on (C4505). If it is determined that the time saving final variation flag 223 lk is on (C4505: Yes), the final variation effect update process is executed (C4506), and the process proceeds to the process of C4507.

On the other hand, in the process of C4505, if it is determined that the time saving final fluctuation flag 223 lk is on (C4505: Yes), another effect update process is executed (C4507), and then this process is terminated.

Next, a series of effect update processes (C4503) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 421. FIG. 421 is a flowchart showing this series of staging update processing (C4503). This series of effect update process (C4503) is executed in the effect update process 16 (see FIG. 420) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

In the series effect update process (C4503), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the series effect counter is 0 (C4601). If it is determined that the value of the series effect counter is not 0 (C4601: No), the value of the series effect counter is updated (C4603), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the series effect counter is 0. (C4604). If it is determined that the value of the series effect counter is not 0 (C4601: No), the process proceeds to C4605. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the series effect counter is not 0 (C4604: Yes), the series effect flag 223li is set to ON (C4612), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of C4601, when it is determined that the value of the series effect counter is 0 (C4601: Yes), a value corresponding to the current series effect is set in the series effect counter (C4602), and the process proceeds to C4605. Transition.

In the process of C4605, it is determined whether or not the game is currently being played per normal figure (C4605). If it is determined that the current game is being played per game (C4605: Yes), the update process during the game per game is executed (C4606), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of C4605, if it is determined that the game is not currently being played per normal figure (C4605: No), then it is determined whether or not the game per normal figure is completed (C4607). It is determined whether or not the game is completed per normal figure (C4607). If it is determined that the game per normal figure has not been completed (C4607: No), the process proceeds to C4609. When it is determined that the game per normal figure is completed (C4607: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the special 2 winning flag is on (C4608). If it is determined that the special 2 winning flag is off (C4608: No), the series production flag 223li is set to on (C4612), and then this process is terminated. If it is determined that the special 2 winning flag is on in the processing of C4608 (C4608: Yes), the process proceeds to the processing of C4609.

In the process of C4609, it is determined whether or not the game is currently in a small hit (C4609). If it is determined that the current small hit game is in progress (C4609: Yes), the small hit game in-game update process is executed (C4610), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of C4609, if it is determined that the current small hit game is not in progress (C4609: No), a display command corresponding to the value of the series effect counter is set (C4611), and then this process is performed. finish.

Next, with reference to FIG. 422, the contents of the game-per-game update process (C4606) executed in the series of effect update processes (see C4503 in FIG. 421) will be described. FIG. 422 is a flowchart showing the contents of the in-game update process (C4606) per normal map. In this update process during game per map (C4606), the player is alerted when the ball does not win the second winning opening 640 for a predetermined period even though the game is being played per map. The process to do is executed.

When the in-game update process (C4606) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the second winning opening 640 (C4701), and it is determined that the ball has not won the second winning opening 640. If this is the case (C4701: No), then it is determined whether or not one second has passed from the start of the game per normal figure (C4702). Here, if it is determined that 1 second has elapsed (C4702: Yes), a display alert command is set (C4703), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of C4702, if it is determined that it is not the timing when one second has elapsed from the start of the game per game (C4702: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Here, when the display alert command is set in the process of C4703, the alert screen for making the second winning opening 640 win the ball by the end of the game per normal figure (see FIG. 370 (a)). ) Is displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, as a game per game, when the game per game long opening is executed, the electric accessory 640a is opened for 1 second, and after a closing period of 1.5 seconds, it is 0.5 again. It is configured so that a game per game that opens the electric accessory 640a for a second is executed. Then, the caution screen shown in FIG. 370 (a) is displayed one second after the start of the game per normal figure. With this configuration, when a player who sees the alert screen plays a right-handed game, the ball fired by the right-handed game can easily win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

On the other hand, in the process of C4701 when it is determined that the ball has won a prize in the second winning opening 640 (there was a special 2 winning) (C4701: Yes), a display command for indicating the special 2 winning is set ( C4704), the special 2 winning flag 223lu is set to ON (C4705), and this process is terminated. Here, when a display command is set in the process of C4704, a display mode for notifying the special 2 prize is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the special 2 prize has occurred in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, the content of the small hit in-game update process (C4610) will be described with reference to FIG. 422 (b). FIG. 422 (b) is a flowchart showing the contents of the update process (C4610) during the small hit game. In this small hit game renewal process (C4610), it is determined whether the ball has passed through a specific area in the V winning opening 650a during the small hit game, and a predetermined period (3 seconds) has been set since the small hit game was started. When the ball has not passed through the specific area in the V winning opening 650a even though the lapse has passed, a process for alerting the player is executed.

When the small hit game update process (C4610) is executed, first, it is determined whether the small hit caution flag 223ll is set to on (C4751), and it is determined that the small hit caution flag 223ll is not set to on. If so (C4751: No), then it is determined whether 3 seconds have passed from the start of the small hit game (C4752). If it is determined that 3 seconds have passed since the small hit game (C4752: Yes), it is determined whether the ball has passed through the specific area in the V winning opening 650a (C4753), and the ball has not passed. When it is determined that (C4753: No), the small hit caution flag 223 ll is set to ON (C4754), the display alert command is set (C4755), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit caution flag 223ll is already set to ON in the processing of C4751 (C4751: Yes), it is determined that 3 seconds have not passed from the start of the small hit game in the processing of C4752. (C4752: No), if it is determined that the ball has passed through a specific area in the V winning opening 650a in the processing of C4753 (C4753: Yes), the processing of C4754 and C4755 is skipped and this processing is performed. finish.

Next, the contents of the final variation effect update process (C4506) will be described with reference to FIG. 423. FIG. 423 is a flowchart showing the contents of the final variation effect update process (C4506). In this final variation effect update process (C4506), a process for setting a variation effect corresponding to the final variation in the time saving state is executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, as the variation effect during the time saving state, in addition to the first suggestion effect that suggests only the variation result (lottery result) of the variation, the variation result (lottery result) of the variation, and the special figure. The second suggestion effect that suggests the pre-reading result of the two hold and the second suggestion effect are configured to be feasible, and the second suggestion effect is configured to be executed in the final change in the time saving state.

Further, in the final variation of the time saving state of the present embodiment, there is also a hold acquisition effect for encouraging the player to acquire the special figure 2 hold up to the upper limit value (4 pieces) during the period when the time saving state is set. It is configured to be feasible, and the hold acquisition effect is executed in the first half of the change period of the final change, and the second suggestion effect (time saving final change effect) is executed in the second half period. Then, the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 hold acquired at the end timing of the first half period is reflected in the effect result of the second suggestion effect.

With this configuration, after the player has acquired many special figure 2 holds, the second suggestion effect (time saving final variation effect) that reflects the look-ahead result for the acquired special figure 2 hold is executed. Therefore, it is possible to easily set an effect mode indicating winning as an effect mode of the time-saving final variation effect, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

In addition, if the number of acquired special figure 2 reserved balls is equal to or greater than the upper limit (4) at the timing until the hold acquisition effect is executed (the start timing of the first half period), the hold acquisition effect is executed. It is configured to execute the second suggestion effect from the first half period without letting it. As a result, a useless effect for the player, that is, a hold acquisition effect for acquiring the special figure 2 hold even though the number of special figure 2 hold balls has already reached the upper limit is executed. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the content of the production. Further, by executing the second suggestion effect from the first half period, the effect period of the second suggestion effect can be lengthened, so that the second suggestion effect more interesting can be executed. Then, since the player can be enthusiastically played the game (right-handed game) in order to execute the second suggestion effect rich in interest, the operation of the game can be improved.

The final variation effect update process (C4506 in FIG. 423), which will be described with reference to FIG. 423, corresponds to the final variation in the time-saving state updated by the process of C4501 in the effect update process 16 (see C3112 in FIG. 420). The elapsed period of the final variation effect (elapsed period of the variation in FIG. 2) to be executed is determined, and the process based on the determination result is executed. When executed in the final variation effect update process (C4506), first, it is determined whether the current timing is the waiting period elapsed timing (C4801), and if it is determined to be the waiting period elapsed timing (C4801: Yes). Next, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 (value of the counter for the number of reserved balls in the special symbol 2 is 223 lc) is "4" which is the upper limit value (C4802).

In the process of C4802, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is "4" (C4802: Yes), the reserved upper limit flag 223 ls is set to ON (C4803), and this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of C4802, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is not "4", that is, "3" or less (C4802: No), the holding upper limit flag 223ls is not set to ON. This process ends.

In the processing of C4801, if it is determined that the current time is not the waiting period elapsed timing (C4801: No), then it is determined whether the current time is the first period start timing (C4804), and the first period start timing is used. If it is determined to be present (C4804: Yes), it is determined whether the hold upper limit flag 223ls is set to ON (C4805), and if it is determined to be set to ON, that is, at the start timing of the first period. Special Figure 2 When it is determined that the predetermined number (4) of the reserved balls is secured (C4805: Yes), the time reduction effect using the first period and the second period as the time reduction final variation effect. (C4806), the hold upper limit flag 223 ls is set to off, the executed flag 223 lt is set to on (C4808), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of C4805, when it is determined that the hold upper limit flag 223 ls is not set to ON (C4805: No), the holding ball number acquisition effect for acquiring the special figure 2 hold up to the upper limit value (4) is performed. The display effect command to be shown is set (C4809), and this process is terminated as it is. With this configuration, it is possible to change the effect mode of the effect executed during the first period according to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 at the time when the waiting period elapses, and to provide the player with various effects. can do.

In the processing of C4804, if it is determined that the current time is not the start timing of the first period (C4804: No), then it is determined whether the current time is the start timing of the second period (C4810), and the second period is started. When it is determined that it is the start timing (C4810: Yes), it is determined whether the executed flag 223lt is set to ON (C4811).

Here, when it is determined that the executed flag 223 lt is set to ON, that is, when it is determined that the effect mode of the effect to be executed during the second period is set at the start timing of the first period. (C4811: Yes) Since it is not necessary to newly set the effect mode, the executed flag 223 lt is set to off (C4812), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of C4811 that the executed flag 223lt is not set to ON (C4811: No), the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223la is read out (C4813), and the change is made. A display effect command indicating a time reduction variation effect based on the lottery result (hit determination result), the pre-reading result (preliminary determination result) included in the read winning information, and the display effect command (C4814) are set, and this process is terminated.

In this way, the effect mode based on the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold is not the execution timing of the time reduction final variation but the timing after the lapse of a predetermined time after the execution of the time reduction final variation (the timing when the second period is set). By setting, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223 lc) that is subtracted when the fluctuation is executed is re-added to the look-ahead result of special figure 2 hold. Based on the effect mode can be set. Therefore, since the number of pre-reading special figure 2 hold can be increased, it is possible to easily display the effect result indicating a hit in the effect (time saving final variation effect) executed during the second period. The staging effect can be enhanced.

In the process of C4810, when it is determined that the present is not the start timing of the second period (C4810: No), then it is determined whether the present is the end timing of the second period (C4815). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the second period (C4815: Yes), it is determined whether a new special 2 hold has been acquired during the second period (C4816), and whether a new special 2 hold has been acquired is determined. If it is determined (C4816: Yes), the re-read-ahead flag 223lr is set to ON (C4817), and this process is terminated.

Here, to explain the content of the process executed by C4816, a storage area corresponding to each symbol hold is formed in the winning information storage area 223la, and in the present embodiment, the first special symbol (special symbol) is formed. The number of the storage area for 1), the storage area for the second special symbol (special figure 2), and the storage area for the normal symbol (normal figure) correspond to the upper limit reserved storage number (4 pieces) of each symbol. It is formed. Then, each storage area has been referenced to indicate whether or not the look-ahead information included in the winning information command output from the main control device 110 and the look-ahead result have been referred to when various effects are set by the voice lamp control device 113. It is configured to store information.

That is, in the processing of C4816, whether or not a new special 2 holding is stored in the winning information storage area 223la in addition to the special figure 2 holding (special 2 holding) referred to by the processing of C4806 or C4814 is stored in each storage area. It is determined based on the presence or absence of the stored referenced information, and the look-ahead information is described and referenced in the storage areas (4 pieces) corresponding to the special figure 2 hold (special 2 hold) of the prize information storage area 223la. When it is determined that there is a storage area in which information is not stored, it is determined that there is a new special 2 hold.

Then, by setting the re-look-ahead flag 223lr to ON in the processing of C4817, the special figure 2 is held again as a variation effect corresponding to the next special figure change (the first special figure change after the end of the time reduction). A variable effect based on the look-ahead result of is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of C4816, when it is determined that there is no new special 2 hold (C4816: No), all of the currently acquired special figure 2 hold is pre-read, and the second step is based on the pre-reading result. Since this is the case when the time reduction final variation effect is being executed during the period, a display effect result command indicating the result of the time reduction variation effect is set (C4818), and this process is terminated. If it is determined in the process of C4815 that it is not the end timing of the second period (C4815: No), then a display command corresponding to other update contents is set (C4819), and this process is terminated. In the processing of C4819, the setting of the effect mode based on the elapsed period of the final variation effect, the update setting of the remaining period display mode for indicating the remaining period of the final variation, and the elapsed period display mode for indicating the elapsed period of the final variation. The update setting of the above, the setting of the operation display mode executed based on the operation of the operation means (frame button 22) by the player during the final change, and the like are executed.

<17th Embodiment>
Next, the 17th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 424 to 431. In the 16th embodiment described above, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is configured to be storable up to four, and the special figure 2 is reserved when the time saving state ends and the normal state is entered. For (maximum 4 pieces), the special figure 2 lottery was configured to be executed with the lottery probability in the normal state.

Further, the above-mentioned 16th embodiment is configured so that the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state is more likely to have a lottery result advantageous to the player than the special figure 2 lottery in the time saving state. At the end of the game, he was enthusiastic to play a game in order to get a lot of special figure 2 hold.

In the 16th embodiment described above, the maximum number of special figure 2 holds can be easily obtained only by continuously performing the right-handed game during the final fluctuation of the time saving state, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. However, it was not possible to make a difference in the number of special figure 2 lottery that can be executed after the end of the time saving state, and further technical improvement was required.

On the other hand, in the 17th embodiment, the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is set to "1", and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation executed during the time saving state is short. The period in which the time can be easily selected can be set according to the type of the time saving state and the number of special map fluctuations during the time saving state, and further, the winning game period is set as a game per normal figure executed during the time saving state. It is configured so that multiple types of long open games can be set. Further, as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation executed after the end of the time saving state, a state in which a short-time fluctuation (0.1 second fluctuation) can be easily set can be set.

With this configuration, the number of special figure 2 lottery that can be executed after the end of the time saving state (after the normal state is set) can be made different depending on how various game conditions are satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player what kind of game condition is satisfied at the end of the time saving state.

First, with reference to FIG. 424, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 17th embodiment will be described. FIG. 424 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment. The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the 17th embodiment is different from the game board of the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment described above in that the configuration of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is changed. Is different, and the others are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 424, in the 17th embodiment, a closed state in which it is difficult for a ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640 (displayed by a solid line in FIG. 424) and an open state in which a ball is easily won (indicated by a dotted line in FIG. 424). And, a variable electric accessory 640a is provided. The electric accessory 640a facilitates winning a plurality of balls into the second winning opening 640 when the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 361) of the 16th embodiment described above is in an open state. It is configured in. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the period from passing through the electric accessory 640a in the open state to winning the prize in the second winning opening 640 is configured to be different depending on the flow condition of the ball. For example, a ball that flows down along a structure having a second winning opening 640 and reaches the vicinity of the base of the electric accessory 640a (the structure side having the second winning opening 640), and a tip portion of the electric accessory 640a (second). A ball that has reached the vicinity of the structure having the winning opening 640), and the ball flowing period required from being located in a flowing position where the second winning opening 640 can be won to winning the second winning opening 640. The difference between the two is larger than 0.1 seconds.

With this configuration, it is possible to easily make the ball win the second winning opening 640 by providing a time difference of 0.1 seconds or more during the game per game in which the electric accessory 640a is positioned in the open state. can. Details will be described later, but in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation when the normal state is set as the gaming state is configured so that the fluctuation time of 0.1 second at the shortest is set. There is.

That is, in the present embodiment, the special figure 2 variation can be executed in a shorter variation time than the generation time lag of the plurality of winning balls during one game per normal map. Therefore, even if a plurality of balls win the second winning opening 640 during one game per game, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the special drawing 2 lottery for the number of times according to the number of winnings.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 424, a time lag of a winning ball is generated depending on which part of the electric accessory 640a the ball reaches with respect to the electric accessory 640a located in the open state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a plurality of openings (first opening, second opening) communicating with the second winning opening 640 are provided, and the ball flowing into each opening is the second winning opening 640. It is configured so that the period until reaching is different by at least 0.1 seconds or more, and further, it is configured to execute a game per game in which each opening is opened in one game per game. Is also good.

With this configuration, the period until the ball that has passed through the first opening and the ball that has passed through the second opening reach the second winning opening 640 during the game per game at approximately the same timing. Since it is possible to make the numbers different, it is possible to more reliably execute the special figure 2 lottery for the number of times according to the number of winnings.

Further, in this case, an electric accessory 640a may be provided for each opening, or one electric accessory 640a may be configured to shift a plurality of openings to an open state and a closed state. ..

<Regarding the content of the production performed by the pachinko machine 10 in the 17th embodiment>
Next, the display contents of the display screen in the 17th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 425. In the present embodiment, when a predetermined game condition is satisfied at the end timing of the time reduction state, a state (support state) in which the special figure 2 lottery can be easily executed is set for a predetermined period even after the end of the time reduction state. Therefore, in the final variation of the time reduction state (time reduction final variation effect), a suggestion effect suggesting that the support state is set after the end of the time reduction is executed.

FIG. 425 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed in the time saving final variation effect during the final variation in the time saving state. As shown in FIG. 425 (a), in the 17th embodiment, unlike the 16th embodiment described above, a variation effect (first suggestion) for showing the lottery result of the variation even in the final variation in the time saving state. Since the effect) is executed, the same effect screen as the variation effect (see FIG. 373 (a)) executed in response to the non-final variation in the time saving state of the 16th embodiment described above is displayed. The same elements as those of the display screen of the 16th embodiment described above (see FIG. 373 (a)) are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the 17th embodiment, it is suggested that the support state is set after the end of the time saving in addition to the lottery result aspects 871a to 871c for the display screen (see FIG. 373 (a)) of the 16th embodiment described above. The difference is that the state suggestion mode 871d with the word "support" is displayed. This state suggestion mode 871d is configured to be easily displayed each time the end of the time reduction state approaches, and when the lottery result of the time reduction final variation is out of order and the support state is set after the end of the time reduction state, the state suggestion mode 871d is configured. An effect mode is set in which the character 851 gets the state suggestion mode 871d. If the lottery result of the final variation in time reduction is a hit, an effect mode for obtaining the lottery result modes 871a to 871b indicating the win is set.

When the support state is set after the time saving state ends, the display screen shown in FIG. 425 (b) is displayed. FIG. 425 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display content displayed during the support state. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the game per normal figure won during the time saving state is the game per long opening, and the game per long opening is continuously executed even after the end of the time saving state, and during the normal state. The support state is set when the ball can win the second winning opening 640.

During this support state, although it is a normal state, "right-handed" is highlighted in the small display area Dm4 because the ball can win the second winning opening 640. Then, in the small display area Dm31, a guidance display mode for visually informing the player that the game of winning the ball in the second winning opening 640 is performed is displayed, and the support state is set in the sub-display area Ds. A "Support time rush" comment is displayed to indicate that it has been done.

Further, in the small display area Dm6, the third symbol corresponding to the change in the special figure 2 being executed is displayed in a variable manner, and the information indicating the number of changes in the special figure 2 executed during the current support state is displayed in the small display area Dm30. Is displayed as "Support count". In the example shown in FIG. 425 (b), since the first special figure 2 variation is executed after the support state is set, “support count × 1” is displayed. In the main display area Dm, an effect that the character 851 tries to stand up is executed, and a comment of "Ganbare" is displayed. During this support state, a short variation (0.1 second variation) can be executed as a special figure 2 variation, and in some cases, a large number of special figure 2 variations are executed. If a winner is won in the special figure 2 fluctuation during the support state, the effect that the character 851 stands up is executed.

<About the electrical configuration of the 17th embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 426 to 429. In the present embodiment, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is changed with respect to the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment described above, and the upper limit of the number of reservations in FIG. 2 is set to 1. The difference is that the configuration of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203lb and the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203le of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is changed due to the change, and the other points are the same. Is. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, the detailed description of the difference between the RAM 203 and the RAM 203 will be omitted.

FIG. 426 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the 17th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 426, with respect to the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, 6 tables 202fd per normal figure are replaced with 5 tables 202ld of random numbers per normal figure, and variation pattern 17 tables 202me are replaced with variation pattern 16 table 202le. Instead of the normal map fluctuation pattern selection table 202 lf, the normal map fluctuation pattern selection 17 table 202 mf is provided, and is the same except for the provision. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 427 (a), the contents of the type selection 17 table 202md per general map will be described. FIG. 427 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the type selection 17 table 202md per general drawing. In the 17th embodiment, as shown in FIG. 427 (a), the above-mentioned type per normal figure is provided in that A per normal figure, B1 per normal figure, and B2 per normal figure are provided. It is different from the selection 16 table 202ld.

Specifically, the probability state of the normal symbol is the low probability state (low probability of the normal figure), and the value of the acquired second hit type counter C6 is defined as "0" and "A per normal figure" is defined. "B1 per normal figure" is defined in the range of "1 to 50", and "B2 per normal figure" is defined in the range of "51 to 99". Further, the probability state of the normal symbol is the high probability state (high probability of the normal figure), and the value of the acquired second hit type counter C6 is defined as "A per normal figure" in the range of "0,1". "B1 per normal figure" is defined in the range of "2 to 50", and "B2 per normal figure" is defined in the range of "51 to 99".

Next, the relationship between the per-figure type selected in the per-figure type selection 17 table 202md and the game state at the time when the per-figure game is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 427 (b). do. FIG. 427 (b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the type of normal drawing and the opening operation content of the electric accessory 640a based on the game state.

In the 17th embodiment, "B1 per normal figure" and "B2 per normal figure" are provided in place of "B per normal figure" as the type per normal figure in the 16th embodiment described above. Although it is different, the opening operation content of the electric accessory 640a with respect to the "Public drawing B1" of the present embodiment is the same as the opening operation content of the "Public drawing B" of the 16th embodiment described above. The detailed description thereof will be omitted.

If the type per normal figure is "B2 per normal figure" and the game state at the time when the game per normal figure is released is the time saving state (high accuracy of the normal figure), the game per normal figure is "long". The opening operation of "opening B" is executed. When this "long opening B" is set, a game per game is executed in which the electric accessory 640a is opened for 1.5 seconds after a closed state (opening period) of 0.1 seconds. The flow of this opening operation is stipulated in a scenario per game that is not shown, and when a game per game is executed, a scenario per game corresponding to the type and game state of the game is set and the main control is performed. By periodically updating the scenario for hitting a normal figure in the main process of the device 110, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed in accordance with the above-mentioned flow of the game for hitting a normal figure.

That is, in the 17th embodiment, if a player wins a game during a time saving state, one of "long open A" and "long open B" is executed as a game per long open game. To. Regardless of which game per game is executed, the period during which the electric accessory 640a is open is the same as 1.5 seconds, and if the game per game is executed during the time saving state, any game is executed. Even if the game is executed per second, it is configured so that the player can be provided with the same privilege.

However, in "long open A" and "long open B", the period during which the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (a state in which it is easy to win a ball in the second winning opening 640) after the game is started. Is different, and when "Long Open A" is set, 2.6 seconds (including the opening period of 0.1 seconds) to 3.1 seconds after the start of the game per game. It is configured to open the electric accessory 640a in the open state during the period of.

Therefore, if the opening operation of "long opening A" is executed just before the end of the time saving state, the opening operation of "long opening B" is executed at the same timing. It is possible to make it easier for the electric accessory 640a to be in the open state after the time saving state is completed and the normal state is set, as compared with the case of winning.

Next, with reference to FIG. 428, the contents of the normal variation pattern 17 table 202me1 included in the variation pattern 17 table 202me will be described. FIG. 428 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the normal variation pattern 17 table 202me1, and is a schematic diagram showing the above-mentioned conventional variation pattern 16 table 202le1 (see FIG. 385 (b)) of the 16th embodiment described above. ), The content selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is different, and other than that, it is the same. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

In the 17th embodiment, according to the type of time saving state (time saving A, time saving B) set after the end of the big hit, the special figure is executed until the number of times the special figure changes after the end of the big hit reaches a predetermined number of times. 2 The fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the fluctuation is configured to be different.

Specifically, when the time reduction A (time reduction 1 time or time reduction 99 times) is set as the time reduction state, the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game is in the normal state within the range of "1st to 99th times". When the special figure 2 fluctuation in the above figure 2 is executed, the "short fluctuation (10 seconds)" is set regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the result of the special figure 2 lottery, and the "100th to 151st times" In the range, regardless of the value of the variable type counter CS1, if the result of the special figure 2 lottery is "off", "ultra-short miss (0.1 seconds)" is "hit (big hit, small hit)". Is set to "long hit (20 seconds)", and in the range of "152nd and subsequent times", "short fluctuation (10 seconds)" is set regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the result of the special figure 2 lottery. It is stipulated to be done.

Here, in the 17th embodiment, as in the 16th embodiment described above, a plurality of time saving end conditions (common time saving end condition, corresponding time saving ending condition) are set as the time saving ending condition for ending the time saving state. For example, even in the time saving state in which 99 times of time saving is set (the time saving state in which the corresponding time saving end condition established when the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 fluctuation reaches 99 times is set). , When the small hit game is executed, the ball does not pass through the specific area in the V winning opening 650a during the small hit game, and the big hit game is not executed, the common time saving end condition is satisfied and the time saving state ends. It is configured to do. Therefore, even if the time reduction of 99 times is set, there is a possibility that the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state will be executed when the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the big hit shifts to the second time.

As shown in FIG. 428, when the time reduction A is set, the fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds is 0.1 seconds when the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed when the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the jackpot is “100 to 151st”. Is configured to be set. In other words, if the time reduction state is set and the race is completed 99 times without winning, a variation time of 0.1 seconds is set as the variation time for the special figure 2 hold stored at that time. Will be done. In addition, when the game per game is executed so as to straddle the end timing of the time saving state, the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the normal state, and the special figure 2 fluctuates with a fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds. Is executed, even if a plurality of balls win the second winning opening 640 during the game per game, the special figure 2 variation of the number of times according to the number of winnings is easily executed. ..

On the other hand, when the time reduction state of one time reduction is set, the fluctuation time of 10 seconds is set as the special figure 2 variation even when the game per normal figure is executed so as to straddle the end timing of the time reduction state. Because it is set, even if a plurality of balls win the second winning opening 640 during the game per normal figure, the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed only the number of times up to the memory number of the special figure 2 hold. is doing.

In addition, when the time reduction B (time reduction state in which the time reduction 5 times is set) is set, the special figure 2 fluctuation in the normal state is within the range of "1st to 5th times" after the jackpot game is completed. When is executed, "short fluctuation (10 seconds)" is set regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the result of the special figure 2 lottery, and the fluctuation type is set in the range of "6th to 20th". Regardless of the value of the counter CS1, if the result of the special figure 2 lottery is "off", it is "ultra-short off (0.1 seconds)", and if it is "hit (big hit, small hit)", it is "long hit (long hit). "20 seconds)" is set, and in the range of "21st and subsequent times", "short fluctuation (10 seconds)" is set regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the result of the special figure 2 lottery. Has been done.

As described above, in the present embodiment, of the three time reduction states (1 time reduction, 5 time reductions, 99 time reductions) in which different time reduction end conditions are set, the time reduction state in which 5 time reductions are set is used. When the time saving state ends and the normal state is set by reaching the specified number of time reductions in the two types of time saving states, that is, the time saving state in which 99 times of time saving is set. The special figure 2 fluctuation of 1 second is configured to be feasible.

Then, as described above, the 0.1 second set as the special figure 2 variation is from the continuous opening period (0.5 seconds, 1 second, 1.5 seconds) of the electric accessory 640a in the game per long opening of the normal figure. Because it is short, it is possible to execute many special figure 2 fluctuations by making a plurality of balls win the second winning opening 640 in one game per normal figure long opening.

Therefore, the ease of executing the special figure 2 lottery after the end of the time reduction state can be made different depending on the set time reduction state and the established time reduction end condition. Therefore, the time reduction state is given to the player. It is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to play when the game is completed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the time saving state of one time saving is set, the special figure 2 change is executed within the period in which the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game becomes "100 to 151". In that case, that is, the timing at which the special figure 2 lottery is executed by winning the normal figure long opening while the left-handed game in the normal state is being executed after the time reduction state of one time reduction is completed. When the number of changes in the special figure after the end of the jackpot game is "100 to 151", a short change of 0.1 seconds is executed if the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery is out of order. Therefore, it is possible to execute the special figure 2 fluctuation multiple times at the time of winning the normal figure long opening.

With this configuration, it is possible to set a period during which the special figure 2 lottery can be advantageously executed not only after the end of the time saving state but also when the normal state is won by the long opening of the normal figure. On the other hand, it is possible to play a game in a normal state while being aware of the number of fluctuations in the special figure, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, a player who has been playing for a long period of time can grasp the contents of the previous time reduction state (number of time reductions), and further, the special figure 2 lottery is advantageous in winning the normal state long opening. Since it is possible to predict the number of special map fluctuations that can be executed (the number of special map fluctuations after the end of the big hit game) and it is possible to play the game more advantageously than other players, the willingness to continue playing the game. Can be enhanced.

In the 17th embodiment, when a specific time reduction state is set and the time reduction state is terminated by the satisfaction of the specific time reduction end condition, the fluctuation time of the variation in Special Figure 2 is short (0. It is configured so that the fluctuation pattern of 1 second) is selected, but it is not limited to this, and it is a short time (0.1 second) depending on the timing of winning the normal long opening of the normal figure. A range in which the fluctuation pattern is selected may be separately provided. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the special figure 2 lottery can be advantageously executed when the player wins the long opening of the Fuzu, so that the interest of the game can be improved. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation is configured to be selected based on the type of the time saving state and the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the big hit game, but the present invention is limited to this. However, for example, the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation may be selected based on the type of the time reduction state and the number of variations of the special figure after the time reduction state ends. With this configuration, regardless of which time reduction end condition the time reduction state ends, it becomes possible to select the same fluctuation pattern as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation after the end of the time reduction state, which is safe for the player. You can play the game with your heart.

Further, when the same type of time saving state is set, different fluctuation patterns may be selected. For example, a plurality of time saving types in which 5 times of time saving are set as the time saving state are provided, and a plurality of them. Of the time saving types in the above, the special figure 2 variation for a short time (0.1 seconds) may be executed only when a specific time saving type is set. As a result, when the time saving state is set (when the remaining time saving number is grasped), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the game content after the time saving state ends.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the variable time of 0.1 seconds is set as the state (support state) in which the special figure 2 lottery is advantageously executed. It may be configured so that the fluctuation time shorter than the opening time of the accessory 640a is set, and a plurality of types of fluctuation times (for example, 0.2 seconds and 0.3 seconds in addition to 0.1 seconds) may be set. It may be configured so that one fluctuation time is selected from among them. With this configuration, the number of special figure 2 lottery that can be executed during the support state depends on the length of the special figure 2 fluctuation time set in the state where the special figure 2 lottery is advantageously executed (support state). Is variable, so that the player can pay attention to the content of the game during the support state.

Next, the contents of the normal map variation pattern selection 17 table 202mf will be described with reference to FIG. 429. FIG. 429 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal map variation pattern selection 17 table 202mf, and FIG. 429 (b) is a normal diagram for time saving A possessed by the normal map variation pattern selection 17 table 202mf. FIG. 429 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the variation pattern table 202mf2, and FIG. 429 (c) is defined in the variation pattern table 202fe3 for the time saving B of the variation pattern selection 17 table 202mf. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents.

As shown in FIG. 429 (a), the normal map variation pattern selection 17 table 202mf is the normal map variation pattern table 202mf1 referred to when the normal state is set as the gaming state, and the time saving state is " It has a time saving A normal map fluctuation pattern table 202mf2 that is referred to when "time saving A" is set, and a time saving B normal map fluctuation pattern table 202mf3 that is referred to when "time saving B" is set. is doing.

Since the content specified in the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202mf1 is the same as the content referred to in the normal state (normal map low accuracy) of the normal map variation pattern selection table 202lf in the 16th embodiment described above. , The detailed description thereof will be omitted. On the other hand, the normal map fluctuation pattern table referred to in the time saving state (high accuracy of the normal map) is set with respect to the normal map fluctuation pattern selection table 202lf of the 16th embodiment described above, and the type of the time saving state and the jackpot. The difference is that the normal map fluctuation patterns selected based on the number of special map fluctuations after the end are configured to be different.

Here, with reference to FIG. 429 (b), the contents specified in the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202mf2 for time saving A will be described. The normal map fluctuation pattern table 202mf2 for the time saving A is a data table referred to when the time saving state is set to "time saving A", that is, once or 99 times, and is a data table of FIG. 429. As shown in (b), various normal map fluctuation patterns (variation times) are defined based on the number of special map fluctuations after the end of the jackpot and the acquired value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2.

Specifically, the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the jackpot is "1 to 98 times", and the value of the acquired second fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 629", that is, "short fluctuations (short fluctuations). "2 seconds)" is specified in the range of "630 to 999", and "ultra-short fluctuation (0.1 seconds)" is specified, and the number of special figure fluctuations is "99 times", and the acquired second "Ultra-short fluctuation (0.1 seconds)" is specified in the range of the fluctuation type counter CS2 "0 to 709", and "medium fluctuation (10 seconds)" is specified in the range of "710 to 989". In the range of "990 to 999", "short fluctuation (2 seconds)" is defined.

That is, in the time reduction final fluctuation when the time reduction of 1 time is set, 63% is configured to select 2 seconds and 37% selects 0.1 seconds as the normal map fluctuation pattern, and the time reduction of 99 times is set. In the case, the time saving final variation is configured to select 71% for 0.1 seconds, 28% for 10 seconds, and 1% for 2 seconds as the normal map variation pattern. Here, the shorter the fluctuation time is set as the normal map fluctuation pattern, the easier it is for the game per normal map to be executed so as to straddle the end timing of the time reduction state. In the time saving state in which the time saving 99 times is set, it is possible to easily set the state (support state) in which the ball is easily won in the second winning opening 640 after the time saving state ends.

On the other hand, when the number of special map fluctuations is "99", the normal map fluctuation time of 10 seconds is selected with a probability of 28%, and the 10-second normal map fluctuation time is selected. In that case, it becomes difficult to execute the game per normal figure so as to straddle the end timing of the time saving state. Further, in the present embodiment, when the time reduction end condition is set to 99 times, the normal map fluctuation time during execution of the special figure variation (99th special map variation) in which the time reduction end condition is satisfied is set as another. Since it is configured so that the normal map fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds is easier to select than the period of, the normal map fluctuation of 0.1 seconds is continuously executed without executing the final fluctuation in the time saving state. By making it possible, it is possible to make it difficult to play a game in which an excessive privilege (a prize ball paid out by winning a ball in the second winning opening 640) is performed.

In addition, the game board 13 is set so that the special figure change set as the time saving final change and the normal figure change are set at different moments, and one of the execution moments can be established by the ball launched by the right-handed game. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to perform a game in which the normal map change (variation per normal figure) is executed according to the end timing of the special figure change.

Next, with reference to FIG. 429 (c), the contents specified in the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202mf3 for time saving B will be described. The normal map fluctuation pattern table 202mf3 for time saving B is a data table referred to when “time saving B”, that is, 5 times of time saving is set as the type of time saving state, and is shown in FIG. 429 (c). As mentioned above, various normal map fluctuation patterns (variation time) are defined based on the number of special map fluctuations after the end of the jackpot and the acquired value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2.

Specifically, the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the jackpot is "1 to 4 times", and the value of the acquired second fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 629", that is, "short fluctuations (short fluctuations). "2 seconds)" is specified in the range of "630 to 999", and "ultra-short fluctuation (0.1 seconds)" is specified. 2 “Ultra-short fluctuation (0.1 second)” is specified regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS2. Since the time saving state is set to 5 times at the maximum, the value corresponding to the 6th and subsequent times of the special figure fluctuation is not set.

As described above, when the time reduction state of 5 times is set, the normal map fluctuation is always executed with the fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds during the time reduction final fluctuation. Therefore, it becomes easy to execute the game per normal figure so as to straddle the end timing of the time saving state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol can be set differently according to the type of the time reduction state (time reduction A, B) set. The time saving type (time saving B) in which 5 times of time saving is set makes it easy to set the state (support state) in which the special figure 2 lottery is most easily executed after the time saving state ends, and then 99 times of time saving and 1 time of time saving. It is configured in the order of.

As a result, when the condition for executing the jackpot game is not satisfied during the time saving state, a privilege (support state) can be given to the player, and further, the privilege is given according to the type of the set time saving state. By making the grant probability different, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this embodiment, when the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation is selected, or when the fluctuation pattern of the normal map fluctuation is selected, the number of special map fluctuations after the jackpot game is completed is configured to be referred to. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to select each fluctuation pattern by referring only to the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 fluctuation, or to refer to the number of fluctuations of the normal map fluctuation. You may. Further, it may be configured to select each fluctuation pattern by referring to the condition in which the set time saving end condition is satisfied.

Further, in the present embodiment, when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation, or when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the normal map fluctuation, the special figure fluctuation number after the end of the big hit game is configured to be referred to. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the variation pattern table used when selecting each variation pattern may be changed based on the small hit type won during the time saving state, or after the small hit game is completed. It may be configured to select each fluctuation pattern based on the number of fluctuations in the special map and the number of fluctuations in the normal map.

<Regarding the control process in the 17th embodiment>
Next, the contents of the control process in the 17th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 430 and 431. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol variation process 17 (see C136 in FIG. 430) is executed instead of the normal symbol variation process 16 (see C106 in FIG. 396) for the 16th embodiment described above, and the main control. The contents of the data table referred to in the various discrimination processes in the apparatus 110 (see FIGS. 426 to 429) are different, and the other points are the same. The same control processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, regarding the points where the contents of the referenced data table have been changed and the various processing contents that are changed in response to the changes in the contents of the referenced data table, the numerical values have simply been changed, which is technically ideological. Are the same, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the normal symbol variation processing 17 (C136) will be described with reference to FIG. 430. FIG. 430 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol variation processing 17 (C136). When the ordinary symbol variation process 17 (C136) is executed, the same processes of C601 to C611 as those of the ordinary symbol variation process 16 (see C106 of FIG. 396) of the 16th embodiment described above are executed, and in the process of C611, If it is determined that the lottery for the normal symbol this time is a win (C611: Yes), the type per normal symbol is set by referring to the table 202md of the selection 17 table for the normal symbol (C641), and the hit time (normal). The display mode (at the time of hitting the figure) is set (C613), and the process proceeds to C642. On the other hand, in the process of C611, if it is determined that the winning lottery of the normal symbol this time is out of order (C611: No), the display mode at the time of out of order is set (C614), and the process proceeds to C642.

In the processing of C642, the current normal map fluctuation pattern is set based on the normal map fluctuation pattern selection 17 table (C642), and the command corresponding to each setting content (winning lottery winning / fail judgment, normal map fluctuation pattern) is set. (C623), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of C602, when it is determined that the current figure is currently changing (C602: Yes), C618 to the same as the normal symbol change process 16 of the 16th embodiment described above (see C106 of FIG. 396). The process of C623 is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 of the 17th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 431. The control processing content of the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment replaces the control processing of the voice lamp control device 113 of the 16th embodiment described above with the staging setting process for normal drawing (see C4117 of FIG. 417). The difference is that the effect setting process 17 for normal drawing (see C4167 in FIG. 431) is configured to be executed. The other control processes are the same, and detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

FIG. 431 is a flowchart showing the contents of the staging setting process 17 (C4167) for normal drawing. As shown in FIG. 431, in the normal drawing effect setting process 17 (C4167), the above-mentioned normal drawing effect setting process (see C4117 in FIG. 417) is executed during the special figure final fluctuation period in the time saving state. The difference is that the processing for setting the effect mode is added, and the other parts are the same. The same control processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the normal drawing effect setting process 17 (C4167) is executed, the same processes of C4201 to C4212 as those of the normal drawing effect setting process (see C4117 of FIG. 417) of the 16th embodiment described above are executed, and this process is executed. To finish. Further, in the processing of C4202, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the normal state (C4202: No), then it is determined whether the current state is in the final change of the time saving state (C4251), and the final change. If it is determined that there is no inside (C4251: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of C4251 when it is determined that the current time-saving state is in the final fluctuation (C4251: Yes), the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223ln is acquired, and the remaining period of the special figure fluctuation being executed is calculated. Extract (C4252).

Then, if it is determined whether the end timing of the special figure change during execution is during the game per normal figure long (C4253), and if it is determined that the game is in progress per the normal long open opening (C4253: Yes), the time is shortened this time. Since the game per long opening of the normal figure is executed to straddle the state end timing, a display command is set to suggest that the special figure 2 fluctuation zone (support state) is set after the end of the time reduction (C4254). , End this process. When the display command is set by the process of C4254, the display command is output to the display control device 114 in the same process as the other display commands, and the effect screen shown in FIG. 425 (a) is the third symbol. It is displayed on the display screen of the display device 81.

In the process of C4253, if it is determined that the long release is not performed at the end time reduction timing (C4253: No), the present process is terminated as it is. In the present embodiment, it is configured to end the main process as it is when it is determined that the long release is not performed at the time saving end timing in the process of C4253 (C4253: No), but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, a setting. The time saving state was the time saving state (for example, time saving B) where it was easy to set the support state, but the support state was not set because the execution timing of the special figure fluctuation and the normal figure fluctuation was bad, in the first place, the support state. It may be configured to provide a means for determining whether or not a time saving state (for example, time saving A) that is difficult to set is set, and to display a display mode capable of notifying (suggesting) the determination result to the player. .. In addition, a means for determining whether or not the final change in the time-saving state has ended at the end timing of the current normal map change and the end timing of the game per normal map executed based on the current normal map change. If it is determined that the final change in the time-saving state has not ended at the end timing of the current normal map change and the end timing of the game per normal map executed based on the current normal map change, that is the case. It may be configured to suggest (notify) the discrimination result.

As described above, the 17th embodiment is the same as the 16th embodiment described above, in the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) rather than the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 lottery). It is set so that it is easier to win a small hit, and when the time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set as the game state, the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state, It is configured so that the special figure 2 lottery is easier to be executed than when the low probability state of the normal symbol) is set. Then, a ball is won in the V winning opening 650a which is in an open state during the small hit game, and when the ball passes through a specific area (V gate), the execution opportunity of the big hit game is established. ..

Then, as the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the first ending condition (condition that is satisfied when the number of times of special figure change (number of times of change of special figure 2) reaches the specified number of times (for example, 5 times)) and When the first end condition is satisfied by having at least the second end condition (a condition that is satisfied when a specified number of small hits (for example, once) is won by a special drawing lottery during the time saving state). It is configured so that it is possible to give an advantageous state to the player. Specifically, during the special map fluctuation in which the first end condition is satisfied, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is extremely short (normal map fluctuation time 0.1 seconds), and many during one special map fluctuation period. It is configured so that the fluctuation of the normal map can be executed.

As a result, when the time saving state ends based on the condition that the first end condition is satisfied, the fluctuation period of the normal map fluctuation to be executed is shortened by the final fluctuation of the time saving state (special figure final change). be able to. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the game per long opening of the Fuzu during the final change of the time saving state (final change of the special figure), and by extension, the time saving state ends during the execution of the game per long opening of the Fuzu, which is normal. Even after the state is set, it is possible to facilitate the continuation of the game per long opening.

That is, in the present embodiment, the special figure 2 lottery is executed in the state where the time saving state (1 time, 5 times, 99 times) is set, and the first privilege (small hit winning (small hit winning probability about 1 /). 7)) In the case where a predetermined number of special figure 2 lottery is executed without winning a small hit in the special figure 2 lottery executed during the time saving state while playing a game aiming to be granted. It is configured so that a second privilege (a period during which a short fluctuation is executed as a normal fluctuation) different from the first privilege is given. With this configuration, the player can be given a privilege that is advantageous to the player regardless of whether the small hit is won or not as the game result (special figure 2 lottery result) during the time saving state. Can improve the motivation to play.

Further, in the present embodiment, the period during which the short variation is executed as the normal map variation is set during the execution period of the special map final variation in a specific time saving state (for example, 5 times of time reduction). At the end of the time saving state, it is possible to easily acquire the number of reserved storages of the second special symbol (special figure 2) up to the upper limit (4). Further, by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal map, it is possible to increase the ratio of the period in which the electric accessory 1640a is open per unit time, so that the game per normal map is being executed (electric role). The normal state can be easily set in the state where the object 1640a is open or the state where the electric accessory 1640a is left open).

As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to be won in the second winning opening 1640 even after the normal state is set. Therefore, when the second privilege is given, it is better than when the second privilege is not given. Many special figure 2 lottery can be executed, and the player can enthusiastically play the game.

The pachinko machine 10 in the 17th embodiment has a ball entering from a first state (closed state) in which it is difficult for the ball to enter during a specific game (for example, a small hit game). A specific ball entry means (V winning opening 650a) that can be changed to a second state (open state) that is easy to play is provided, and a ball that has entered the specific entry means (V winning opening 650a) is a specific area (V gate). It is configured so that the big hit game is executed based on the passing of the ball, but the ball enters the V winning opening 650a which is opened when the small hit game is executed. In this case, the technique described in the present embodiment may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 in which the player is given the privilege of paying out a predetermined number of prize balls. Even in this case, the special figure 2 lottery is configured so that the probability of winning a small hit is higher than that of the special figure 1 lottery, which is advantageous to the player when the above-mentioned second privilege is given. It is possible to provide a gaming state.

Further, in the 17th embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 429, the period in which the above-mentioned second privilege is granted is the period in which the final change in the time reduction state is executed (the specific time reduction end condition is set. However, the period is not limited to this, and for example, when the time reduction 99 times is set, the number of special map fluctuations immediately after the time reduction state is set (for example, the number of special map fluctuations after the time reduction state is set) is set. The second benefit is given during the period (1 to 5 times) or after a predetermined period has elapsed since the time reduction state was set (for example, the period in which the number of special map fluctuations after the time reduction state was set is 45 to 50 times). As given, the contents specified in the normal map variation pattern selection 17 table 202mf may be configured. Further, for the time saving state in which the same time saving end condition is set, a plurality of time saving types may be provided, and the period for which the second benefit is granted may be different depending on the set time saving type. good.

With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand when the second privilege is granted when the time saving state is set, so it is expected that the second privilege will be granted. It is possible to play a game in a short time state while letting it play.

<About the modified example of the 17th embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the above-mentioned 17th embodiment will be described. In the 17th embodiment described above, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the time saving state, that is, when a specific time saving state (time saving state of 5 times shortening) is set, the fifth special figure change is executed. , The advantageous game in which a short-time (0.1 second) fluctuation time is easily selected as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal figure) is configured to be executed, and the time-saving state is about to end or immediately after the time-saving state ends. In, the ball was configured to be easy to win in the second winning opening 640. Then, in the above-mentioned 17th embodiment, as shown in FIG. 424, when the second winning opening 640 to which the electric accessory 640a is attached is provided in the right game area of the game board 13, the right-handed game is executed. The two winning openings 640 can be won, but the first winning opening 64 is configured so that the ball cannot be won.

On the other hand, in this modification, when the lower position of the second winning opening 640 provided in the right game area, specifically, the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state, the ball fired by the right-handed game. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the game board 13 in which the first winning opening 64 is arranged is used at a position where the ball fired by the right-handed game is difficult to win. ing. Since the other configurations of the game board 13 are the same as those of the 17th embodiment described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in this modification, the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) change in the order in which the acquired information is acquired (the order in which the ball wins in the corresponding winning opening). It is different from the above-mentioned 17th embodiment in that it is configured to execute (lottery) and that the configuration for holding and storing the acquired information of the special figure 2 is deleted. Since the other contents are the same as those of the 17th embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this modified example configured in this way, the second privilege (a game period in which a short time (0.1 second) is easily set as the normal figure fluctuation time) is given during the time saving state, and it is normal during the game per normal figure. When the state is set, the ball fired by the right-handed game can easily win the second winning opening 640, and it can be difficult to win the first winning opening 64. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation during the normal state. On the other hand, when the normal state is set at a timing other than during the normal game, the ball fired by the right-handed game is likely to win the first winning opening 64. Further, since it does not have a configuration for storing the hold of the special figure 2, even if the ball wins the second winning opening 640 while the special figure 1 change is being executed, the special figure 2 change occurs. It is configured not to be executed.

That is, in this modification, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a serves as a guiding means for guiding the ball to the second winning opening 640 and a limiting means for limiting the winning of the ball to the first winning opening 64. It is configured to work. With this configuration, the second privilege is given to the player when the time saving state ends and the normal state is set depending on whether the second privilege is given or not. The benefits can be greatly different. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting that the second privilege is given.

<18th Embodiment>
Next, the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 432 to 443. In the 16th embodiment described above, a series of effects can be executed as a variable effect executed based on the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the lottery result of the ordinary symbol, and the series of effects is executed. In that case, it is difficult to understand whether the execution opportunity of this series of productions is a special drawing lottery or a general drawing lottery, and it is configured to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the production result (lottery result). (See FIG. 363).

However, the notification mode (small display area Dm4 of the main display area Dm) for changing the game method from the left-handed game to the right-handed game depending on the hit game to be executed (normal figure hit game, small hit game, big hit game). Depending on the timing at which the display mode) is displayed, there is a risk that it may be determined which symbol lottery is based on this series of effects.

On the other hand, in the 18th embodiment, any of the symbol lottery is performed by the special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery) or the normal symbol lottery (general symbol lottery). However, the notification mode (display mode of the small display area Dm4 of the main display area Dm) for changing the game method from the left-handed game to the right-handed game at the same timing can be displayed. Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration of the 18th embodiment and the control contents will be described. The details of the same contents as those of the 16th embodiment described above will be omitted.

<Regarding the game board configuration in the pachinko machine 10 of the 18th embodiment>
First, the configuration of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 18th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 432 to 434. The game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 18th embodiment has a different structure of the right game area from the structure of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment described above (see FIG. 361). , Other than that, it is the same. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 432 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 18th embodiment. In the eighteenth embodiment, each winning opening in which a ball flowing down a right-handed game area by a player performing a right-handed game can win a prize by each hit game (a normal hit game, a small hit game, a big hit game). The time to reach (second winning opening 640, V winning opening 650a, specific winning opening 65a) is configured to be different. Specifically, the ball launched by the right-handed game is the second winning opening 640. It is configured so that the time to reach the special winning opening 650a is about 4 seconds, the time to reach the V winning opening 650a is about 2 seconds, and the time to reach the specific winning opening 65a is about 6 seconds.

Here, the configuration of the right side gaming area of the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 432 to 434. As shown in FIG. 432, a distribution means 700 capable of distributing balls to a plurality of ball paths is provided above the right game area, and the balls distributed by the distribution means 700 are the first path 701. And the second path 702 are configured to be alternately distributed.

The first path 701 is formed by a meandering ball passage, and is configured to take about 3 seconds for the ball to pass through the first path 701. Then, the ball that has passed through the first path 701 reaches the upper surface of the flow path unit provided with the variable winning device 65 and the electric accessory 640a. The flow path unit is configured so that its upper surface is inclined downward toward the out port 66, and as a part of the flow path formed on the upper surface thereof, an electric accessory 640a and a winning door 65b are provided. It is provided. When both the electric accessory 640a and the winning door 65b are closed, the ball flowing down the upper surface of the flow path unit flows out from the lowermost end (the end on the out port 66 side) of the upper surface of the flow path unit and is out. It is configured to flow into the mouth 66.

It is configured so that the time required for the ball passing through the first path 701 to reach the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a is about 1 second, and further, the ball flow on the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a (the ball flow on the upper surface of the flow path unit). A delay member for delaying the flow of the sphere is provided on the surface forming the path) so that the time required for the sphere to flow down on the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a is about 2 seconds. It is composed. Here, in the eighteenth embodiment, a meandering flow path in which the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a meanders in the depth direction so that the sphere does not flow down in a straight line is configured on the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a. This makes it possible to delay the flow of the sphere.

On the other hand, the sphere distributed to the second path 702 by the distribution means 700 flows into the opening 704a of the passage channel on a straight line formed in the depth direction of the first path, and is provided near the exit of the passage channel. It is configured to flow down toward the V winning opening 650a, and the ball launched by the right-handed game reaches the V winning opening 650a in about 2 seconds.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, each winning opening (No. 1) in which the ball fired by the right-handed game can be won by each hit game (normal hit game, small hit game, big hit game). 2 The time to reach the winning opening 640, the V winning opening 650a, and the specific winning opening 65a) is configured to be different. Specifically, the ball launched by the right-handed game reaches the second winning opening 640. The time to reach the V winning opening 650a is about 2 seconds, and the time to reach the specific winning opening 65a is about 6 seconds.

With this configuration, it is possible to confirm in order which winning opening the ball fired by the right-handed game wins, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. Further, although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the special figure fluctuation time is set to be different between the case where the small hit is won and the case where the big hit is won, and each winning game is executed. Immediately after that, in order to hit the ball and win a prize in the winning opening opened by the game, it is configured to give a notification to guide the right-handed game during the special figure fluctuation time. Then, regardless of whether the small hit is won or the big hit is won, the set effect is executed after the special figure fluctuation is started, and the notification for guiding the right-handed game is performed at the same timing when the specific time has passed. ing. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player determines the result of the lottery this time depending on the timing at which the notification for guiding the right-handed game is performed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the player wins the long opening of the game by the lottery, the execution timing of the set effect is set so as to notify the right-handed game at a specific timing of the set effect. It is composed. With this configuration, even if the set effect is executed and the notification to guide the right-handed game is given, it is difficult for the player to understand which hit game the effect result of this set effect indicates. It can be done and the effect of production can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 435, a series of effects used as variable effects of each symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, ordinary symbol) in the 18th embodiment, and right-handed to guide the right-handed game. The relationship with the display timing of the notification will be explained. FIG. 435 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the execution effect (notification) in each symbol variation.

As shown in FIG. 435, in the present embodiment, the effect (series effect) is executed for a predetermined period (54 seconds) after the symbol change is started, and then the guidance notification for guiding the right-handed game to the player is performed. (Right-handed notification) is executed. Then, when the player executes the right-handed game based on the execution of the guidance notification, the balls launched by the right-handed game are opened according to the lottery result of the symbol change executed this time. It is configured to win a prize in the winning opening (second winning opening 640, V winning opening 650a, specific winning opening 65a).

Specifically, if a series of effects (54 seconds) is executed based on the special figure 1 fluctuation (60 seconds) in which the jackpot is won, right-handed 54 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (during special figure 1 fluctuation). Notification is executed. Then, the big hit game is started at the timing when the ball launched by the right-handed game reaches the specific winning opening 65a (6 seconds after the right-handed game is performed).

In addition, if a series of effects (54 seconds) is executed based on the special figure 1 fluctuation (58 seconds) in which the small hit is won, right-handed notification is given 54 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (during special figure 1 fluctuation). Is executed. Then, the small hit game is started at the timing when the ball launched by the right-handed game reaches the V winning opening 650a (4 seconds after the right-handed game is performed). In this embodiment, when the ball wins the V winning opening 650a during the small hit game, the ball always passes through the V gate, and the ball wins the V winning opening 650a during the small hit game. If so, the big hit game is configured to start 2 seconds after the start of the small hit game. As a result, depending on whether the jackpot is won by the special figure 1 fluctuation or the small hit, the staging mode of the fluctuating staging (series staging) executed from the start of the fluctuating and the guidance notification for guiding the right-handed game. In addition to the execution timing of, it is possible to make the same from the start of fluctuation to the timing of starting the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which hit game the effect result of this variable effect (set effect) indicates, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

Furthermore, if a series of effects (54 seconds) is executed based on the winning normal map fluctuation (54 seconds), a right-handed notification is executed 54 seconds after the fluctuation starts (when the normal map fluctuation stops). Will be done. Then, at the timing when the ball launched by the right-handed game reaches the second winning opening 640 (two seconds after the right-handed game is performed), the normal game is started. Even when a series of effects are executed based on this fluctuation of the normal map, the start timing of the big hit game via the normal map game is determined by the case where the big hit is won in the above-mentioned special figure 1 lottery, and the case where the small hit is won. It is configured so that it can be the same. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which hit game the effect result of this variable effect (set effect) indicates, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, at a plurality of timings of the period from the execution of the guidance notification (right-handed notification) for guiding the right-handed game to the start of the jackpot game (right-handed ball flow period), this time. It is configured to be able to execute a failure effect for notifying that the effect result of is a failure (the jackpot game is not executed). Specifically, the failure notification timing is set 2 seconds, 4 seconds, and 6 seconds after the right-handed notification is executed.

That is, although detailed description and illustration are omitted, in some cases where the result of the special drawing 1 lottery is out of order, the fluctuation pattern is configured to set the fluctuation time of 56 seconds, 58 seconds, and 60 seconds. , When the fluctuation pattern is selected, the same fluctuation effect as the above-mentioned content is executed, and the failure notification is executed at the timing when the fluctuation time has elapsed. The failure notification timing described above is based on the timing at which it is determined that the ball could not be won in the second winning opening 640 during the game per game, and the ball was made to win in the second winning opening 640. It is configured to coincide with the timing at which the lottery result of the special figure 2 variation to be executed is notified, or the timing at which the small hit is won as a result of the special figure 2 lottery and the small hit game ends.

With this configuration, the special figure 1 lottery result is a series of staging that is executed when the result is out of order, and a series of staging that is executed based on the winning of the per-figure. In the game process after the game, it is possible to make the same as the effect mode set when the jackpot game is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which hit game the effect result of this variable effect (set effect) indicates, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, even if the jackpot is won by the special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure fluctuation of 60 seconds is executed, the above-mentioned failure notification is executed or not. It is configured to perform the fanning effect of. In this case, since the special figure 1 big hit is internally won, as a result of the fanning effect, a success effect mode for notifying the player that the player will not fail is set and executed as the effect.

In this way, by executing the fanning effect, it is possible to reduce the difference in the effect mode between the series of effects in which the failure notification is actually executed and the series of effects in which the failure notification is not executed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which hit game the effect result of) indicates, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In addition, since it is possible to make the player watch the effect (effect executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81), this effect is based on the ball flow situation in the right game area. It can be difficult to determine in advance what the result is.

<About the electrical configuration in the 18th embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 436 to 438. The present embodiment differs from the above-described 16th embodiment in that the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. Other than that, they are the same. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the 18th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 436 (a). FIG. 436 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the 18th embodiment. In the present embodiment, the variation pattern 18 table 202ne is provided in place of the variation pattern 16 table 202le, and the variation pattern selection 18 table 202nf is provided in place of the variation pattern selection table 202lf in place of the 16th embodiment described above. They differ in that they are the same, otherwise they are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the fluctuation pattern 18 table 202ne will be described with reference to FIG. 437. FIG. 437 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern 18 table 202ne. As shown in FIG. 437 (a), the variation pattern 18 table 202ne has a variation pattern 18 table 202ne1 for normal use and a variation pattern 16 table 202le2 for time saving, and is usually compared to the 16th embodiment described above. The contents of the fluctuation pattern table referenced when the state is set are different.

Here, the contents of the normal fluctuation pattern 18 table 202ne1 will be described with reference to FIG. 437 (b). FIG. 437 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the normal fluctuation pattern 18 table 202ne1. As shown in FIG. 437 (b), the normal variation pattern 18 table 202ne1 has a first special symbol (see FIG. 385 (b)) with respect to the conventional variation pattern 16 table 202le1 of the 16th embodiment described above. The contents specified in the data table referred to when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1) are different, and the data referred to when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol (special figure 2). The contents specified in the table are the same. The detailed description of the same content will be omitted.

In the normal variation pattern 18 table 202ne1, regardless of whether the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit", a dedicated variation pattern (variation time) for executing the set effect. ) Is selected. Specifically, when the lottery result in Special Figure 1 is "out of order", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "short" in the range of "0 to 139". "Out of line (7 seconds)" is in the range of "140 to 179", "Out of line (30 seconds)" is in the range of "180 to 189", and "Short set production (30 seconds)" is in the range of "190 to 194". "Various super reach (60 seconds)" is specified in the range, and "set staging (60 seconds)" is specified in the range of "195 to 198".

When the lottery result of Special Figure 1 is "big hit", the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 29", and "various normal reach (30 seconds)" is in the range of "30 to 39". "Short set effect (30 seconds)" is specified in the range of "40 to 179", "Various super reach (60 seconds)" is specified in the range of "40 to 179", and "Set effect (60 seconds)" is specified in the range of "180 to 198". When the lottery result is "small hit", the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is "small" in the range of "0 to 99" and "various super reach (60 seconds)" in the range of "100 to 198". "Hit set production (56 seconds)" is specified.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern for executing the set effect is selected at a predetermined ratio regardless of the lottery result of the special figure 1. Then, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) set as the set effect differs between the time of winning the small hit and the time of winning the big hit. Specifically, when the big hit is won, the variable time of 60 seconds can be selected as the set effect, and when the small hit is won, the variable time of 56 seconds can be selected as the set effect. That is, the fluctuation time of the set effect at the time of winning the small hit is set to be 4 seconds shorter than the fluctuation time of the set effect at the time of winning the big hit.

Here, as described later with reference to FIG. 432, in the game board 13 of the present embodiment, when the right-handed game is executed, the ball reaches the V winning opening 650a which is in the open state during the small hit game. The time required for the ball to reach the specific winning opening 65a (about 6 seconds), which is open during the jackpot game, is set to be 4 seconds longer than the time required for the game (about 2 seconds). .. Then, as will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the set effect (60 seconds) is executed, 54 seconds after the set effect is executed, regardless of the set variation time (special figure variation time). It is configured to execute a notification for guiding a right-handed game (right-handed notification).

With this configuration, the timing from the execution of the set effect to the execution of the right-handed notification can be the same for both the big hit win and the small hit win, so the player can be informed of the effect result of the set effect. It can be confusing. Furthermore, a right-handed notification is given 54 seconds after the set effect is executed, and when the player plays a right-handed game based on the right-handed notification, the special figure lottery result that triggers the execution of the set effect this time. Whichever (big hit, small hit) is, the ball fired by the right-handed game can be won in any of the winning openings in the open state.

Next, the contents of the normal map variation pattern selection 18 table 202nf will be described with reference to FIG. 438. FIG. 438 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the normal map variation pattern selection 18 table 202nf. As shown in FIG. 438, in the normal map fluctuation pattern selection table 202nf, the normal map variation pattern selection table 202 lf (see FIG. 384) of the 16th embodiment described above defines the normal map long variation B (60 seconds). The difference is that the long fluctuation C (58 seconds) of the normal figure is specified in the above range, and the other points are the same. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

As shown in the normal map fluctuation pattern selection 18 table 202nf, the game state is the normal state (normal map low accuracy), the result of the normal map lottery is A per normal map, and the value of the acquired second variation type counter CS2 is "500". The value of the acquired second variation type counter CS2 fluctuates in the range of "800 to 999" because the result of the ordinary map lottery is out of the range of "~ 999" and the game state is the normal state (low accuracy of the normal map). As a pattern, "Fuzu long fluctuation C (58 seconds)" is specified.

Then, when the normal figure long variation C is selected, the set effect can be executed. That is, even when the set effect is executed based on the long variation C of the normal figure, the right-handed notification is executed 54 seconds after the set effect is executed. Then, when the player plays a right-handed game based on the right-handed notification, the fired ball is configured to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

By configuring in this way, the timing from the execution of the set effect to the execution of the right-handed notification can be made the same for the big hit win, the small hit win, and the normal figure win, so that the set effect can be given to the player. It is possible to make it difficult to understand the production result of. Furthermore, 54 seconds after the set effect is executed, a right-handed notification is given, and when the player plays a right-handed game based on the right-handed notification, the symbol lottery result that triggers the execution of this set effect is obtained. Regardless of which one (big hit, small hit, normal hit), any of the winning openings (specific winning opening 65a, V winning opening 650a, second winning opening) that opens the ball fired by the right-handed game. You can win a prize in 640).

Further, in the present embodiment, the special figure hold and the normal figure hold are pre-read, and the start timing of the special figure change is a predetermined period (for example, 70 seconds) when the special figure lottery does not win the prize. When it is determined that the winning is won in the general drawing lottery after a predetermined range period (for example, 58 seconds to 62 seconds later) from the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, and it is the timing to execute the winning long open winning game. It is configured to execute the set effect from the start timing of the special figure change, and 54 seconds after the set effect executed from the start timing of the special figure change is started, the right-handed notification corresponding to the game per long open of the normal figure Is configured to run.

In this way, the set effect can be executed by pre-reading the content of the special figure change and the content of the normal figure change and determining that the set effect can be executed at any of the symbol change start timings. The frequency with which the effect is executed can be increased, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In addition, since the effect result of the set effect executed at the start timing of the special figure change can indicate the winning of the normal figure long opening, it is possible to make the player play a game having a character other than that.

The relationship between the start timing of the set effect and the execution timing of the right-handed notification does not deviate significantly. For example, the execution timing of the right-handed notification executed 54 seconds after the normal set effect is executed is set. It may be shifted to around a few seconds (2 seconds), and in reality, 58 seconds after the execution of the set effect is executed, the ball fired by the right-handed game will be the timing to win the prize opening, but the set effect is Right-handed notification may be executed 54 seconds after the execution. By allowing a slight deviation in this way and enabling the set effect to be executed, it becomes easier to establish the conditions under which the set effect can be executed, and the effect of the set can be enhanced.

Further, in the present embodiment, the set effect is executed at the start timing of the symbol change, but the present invention is not limited to this, and if the execution condition for the set effect described above is satisfied, for example, a special figure. It may be configured to execute the set effect while the fluctuation is being executed. In this case, it is preferable to display a pseudo stop display mode for making the player think that the special figure variation has ended before the set effect is executed. As a result, the player can execute the set effect that is started from the middle of the execution of the special figure variation without any discomfort.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 18th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 436 (b). The present embodiment differs from the 16th embodiment described above in that the effect prohibition flag 223na is added, and is the same except for the addition. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The effect prohibition flag 223na is a flag for prohibiting the setting of a new set effect, and is set to ON when the setting of the new set effect is prohibited. In this embodiment, in addition to the period during which the set effect is executed, the set effect is not executed even during the period during which a specific super reach effect (including deviation) is executed based on the fluctuation of the special figure. , The effect prohibition flag 223na is set to on even during the period when a specific super reach effect is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from being reduced due to the fact that the running effect (particularly, the effect with a high expectation of hitting) is switched to the set effect in the middle.

<Regarding the control process in the 18th embodiment>
Next, the contents of the control process in the 18th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 439 to 443. In the 18th embodiment, with respect to the control processing contents in the 16th embodiment described above, the main control device 110 has various discrimination processes (hit discrimination process, etc.) and various selection processes (hit type selection process, variation pattern selection process, etc.). Because the data table referred to in) is different, the processing results are different, and the specific processing to be executed based on the processing results (processing to set commands, processing to store processing results, etc.) Although the contents are different, the technical idea is the same, so the detailed explanation is omitted.

Further, in the control process of the voice lamp control device 113, the stop command process 18 (see C3246 in FIG. 439) is replaced with the stop command process 16 (see C3216 in FIG. 414), and the variable display setting process 16 (see C3114 in FIG. 415) is used. ) Is replaced with the variable display setting process 18 (see C3144 in FIG. 440), and the effect update process 16 (see C3112 in FIG. 420) is replaced with the effect update process 18 (see C3142 in FIG. 443). is doing. Other than that, they are the same, and detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

First, the contents of the stop command process 18 (C3246) will be described with reference to FIG. 439. FIG. 439 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop command process 18 (C3246). As shown in FIG. 439, the stop command process 18 (C3246) differs from the above-mentioned stop command process 16 (see C3216 in FIG. 414) in that the effect prohibition flag 223na setting process is added, and other than that. Are the same. The same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the stop command process 18 (C3246) is executed, first, the same processes of C3951 to C3956 as the above-mentioned stop command process 16 (see C3216 in FIG. 414) are executed, and then the stop command this time is the effect prohibition flag. When it is determined whether the target fluctuation is stopped when 223na is set to on (C3971), and when it is determined that the target fluctuation is stopped (C3971: Yes), the effect prohibition flag 223na is turned off. Set (C3972) and end this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of C3971 that it does not indicate the stop of the target fluctuation (C3972: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, the contents of the variable display setting process 18 (C3144) will be described with reference to FIG. 440. FIG. 440 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 18 (C3144). As shown in FIG. 440, the variation display setting process 18 (C3144) adds a process for setting the effect mode of the set effect to the variation display setting process 16 (see C3114 in FIG. 415) described above. The difference is that the process of setting the effect prohibition flag 223na to ON when the acquired fluctuation pattern is super reach is added, and the other points are the same. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

When the variation display setting process 18 (C3144) is executed, the same processes of C4001 to C4004 as those of the variation display setting process 16 (see C3114 in FIG. 415) are executed, and then the set effect setting process (C4041) is executed. Run. This set effect setting process (C4041) will be described later with reference to FIG. 441, but it is determined whether the current variation display setting process is executed based on the special map variation or the normal map variation. Then, based on the determination result, it is determined whether or not the execution condition of the set effect is satisfied, and when the execution condition of the set effect is satisfied, the process for setting the effect mode of the set effect is performed. Will be executed.

Returning to FIG. 440, the explanation will be continued. After finishing the processing of C4041, it is next determined whether the fluctuation pattern acquired this time is super reach (C4042), and if it is determined to be super reach (CS24042: Yes), the effect prohibition flag 223na is set to ON. (C4043), a display variation pattern command is set (C4044), and the same processes of C4006 to C4010 as the above-mentioned variation display setting process 16 (see C3114 of FIG. 415) are executed to end this process. On the other hand, in the processing of C4042, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern acquired this time is not super reach (C4042: No), the processing of C4043 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of C4044.

Next, the contents of the set effect setting process (C4041) will be described with reference to FIG. 441. FIG. 441 is a flowchart showing the contents of the set effect setting process (C4041). In the set effect setting process (C4041), a process for setting the set effect is executed at the start timing of the special figure variation or the normal map variation.

When the set effect setting process (C4041) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal state (C4901), and when it is determined that the current game state is not the normal state (time saving state), it is determined (C4901). , Since it is not in the game state to execute the set effect, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the state is normal (C4901: Yes), the variation display setting process 18 this time (see C3144 in FIG. 440) sets the variation display of the special figure variation (sets the effect). If it is determined whether it is a process (C4902) and it is determined that the process is to set the variation display of the special figure variation (C4902: Yes), the process of C4003 of the variation display setting process 18 (see C3144 in FIG. 440). It is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern acquired in is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the set effect (C4903).

If it is determined in the processing of C4903 that the fluctuation pattern does not correspond to the set effect (C4903: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern corresponds to the set effect (CS24903: Yes), then it is determined whether the effect prohibition flag 223na is set to ON (C4904), and it is determined that it is not set to ON. If so (C4904: No), it is determined whether or not the current time is a long fluctuation per normal figure (C4905).

In the processing of C4905, when it is determined that the current is long fluctuation per normal figure (C4905: Yes), the value of the normal figure fluctuation time counter 223lo is compared with the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223ln (C4905: Yes). C4906), it is determined whether the remaining period of the normal map fluctuation is shorter than the current special map fluctuation time (C4907). Then, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation time is longer (C4907: No), the prize information of the normal symbol stored in the prize information storage area 223la is read (C4908), and the read prize information is included. If it is determined whether there is winning information corresponding to the long fluctuation of the normal figure (C4909) and if it is determined that there is winning information corresponding to the long fluctuation of the normal figure (C4909: Yes), the set production according to the fluctuation pattern of this time is performed. Is set (C4910), the effect prohibition flag 223na is set to ON (C4911), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of C4909, if it is determined that there is no long fluctuation in the normal figure in the winning information read in the processing of C4908 (C4909: No), this processing is terminated as it is. If it is determined in the processing of C4907 that the remaining period of the normal map fluctuation is longer (C4907: Yes), a set effect is set according to the normal map fluctuation stop timing (C4912), and the effect prohibition flag 223na is turned on. (C4920), and this process ends.

It should be noted that, in the processing of C4905, the state in which it is determined that the long fluctuation per normal figure is in progress, that is, the long fluctuation per normal figure is determined even though it is determined that the effect prohibition flag 223na is not set to ON in the processing of C4904. The case is, for example, a case where the super reach effect is executed as the variation effect of the special map variation at the start timing of the long variation per normal map being executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the processing of C4909 is provided, and when there is a long fluctuation in the winning information, the set effect is set. With this configuration, if it is determined that there is a long variation in the normal map in the winning information, the long variation in the normal map is executed during the execution of the set effect based on the special map variation, so the set effect is executed. The fluctuation of the normal map is executed multiple times in a short period of time. For example, by executing the game per short of the normal map, the set effect of this time is the set effect executed based on the variation of the special map. It is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the information. In this embodiment, the processing of C4909 is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a set effect may be set.

Further, in the set effect set in the processing of C4912, the set effect is executed not at the start timing of the special figure change but at the timing according to the normal figure change stop timing, so that the normal figure long opening is performed as the effect result of the set effect. You will be notified of the hit. If the remaining period of the normal map fluctuation at the start of the special map fluctuation is shorter than the period (15 seconds) in which the set effect effect mode can be executed, the set effect is not set and the normal map long opening is performed. It is preferable to configure it so that a dedicated production mode indicating a hit is set. As a result, it is possible to reliably notify the player that he / she has won the long opening of the Fuzu.

On the other hand, in the processing of C4904, when it is determined that the effect prohibition flag 223na is set to ON (C4904: Yes), or in the processing of C4905, it is determined that the long fluctuation is not per normal figure (C4905:). No) acquires the lottery result of the currently executed Fuzu lottery (C4913), determines whether or not the Fuzu hit (Fuzu long open hit) is won (C4914), and Fuzu hit (Fuzu). If it is determined that the player has not won (per long opening) (or the general drawing lottery has not been executed) (C4914: No), the process proceeds to the above-mentioned C4910 process.

In the processing of C4914, if it is determined that the winning is won per normal figure (C4914: Yes), then it is determined whether the special figure fluctuation this time is a hit fluctuation (C4915), and it is determined that it is a hit fluctuation. If this is the case (C4915: Yes), the value of the normal map fluctuation time counter 223lo is compared with the value of the special map fluctuation time counter 223ln (C4916), and the remaining period of the normal map fluctuation is from the current special map fluctuation time. Is also short (C4917). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation time of the special map fluctuation is shorter than the remaining period of the normal map fluctuation during execution (C4917: Yes), the set effect executed for the normal map fluctuation is performed this time. It is set to the set effect showing the lottery result of the special figure change (C4918), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of C4915, when it is determined that the current special map fluctuation is not a hit fluctuation (C4915), or in the processing of C4917, the fluctuation of the current special map fluctuation rather than the remaining period of the running normal map fluctuation. If it is determined that the time is longer (C4917: Yes), this process ends without setting the set effect corresponding to the current special figure change.

Further, in the process of C4902, if it is determined that the current variation display setting process 18 (see C3144 in FIG. 440) is the process of setting the variation display of the normal symbol (C4902: No), the normal figure set effect setting. The process is executed (C4919), and the present process is terminated.

Here, the contents of the normal drawing set effect setting process (C4919) will be described with reference to FIG. 442. FIG. 442 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal drawing set effect setting process (C4919). When the normal figure set effect setting process (C4919) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current fluctuation pattern is a set effect (C5001), and if it is determined to be a set effect (C5001: Yes), the next In addition, it is determined whether or not the effect prohibition flag 223na is set to ON (C5002).

If it is determined that the effect prohibition flag 223na is not set to ON in the processing of C5002 (C5002: No), a set effect according to the current fluctuation pattern is set (C5003), and the effect prohibition flag 223na is set to ON. (C5004), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of C5002, when it is determined that the effect prohibition flag 223na is set to ON (C5002: Yes), it is determined whether the fluctuation of the normal map this time is a hit variation (variation per long opening) ( In C5005), if it is determined that the fluctuation is per long opening (C5005: Yes), the result of the special drawing lottery being executed is acquired (C5006), and it is determined whether the variation is per special figure (C5007). That is, it is determined whether or not the effect prohibition flag 223na is set to ON based on the fluctuation of the special figure.

In the processing of C5007, when it is determined that it is not a special figure hit (C5007: No), then the value of the normal figure fluctuation time counter 223lo and the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223ln are compared (C5008). If it is determined whether the current normal map fluctuation time is shorter than the remaining time of the special map fluctuation during execution (C5009), and if it is determined that the current normal map fluctuation time is shorter (C5009: Yes), it is being executed. A replacement effect (set effect) for notifying the normal figure lottery result (per long opening) is set by the special figure effect (set effect executed based on the special figure fluctuation) (C5010), and this process is completed. do. On the other hand, in the processing of C5007, when it is determined that the special map fluctuation during execution is a hit variation (C5007: Yes), or in the processing of C5009, the remaining of the special map variation during execution of the current normal map variation time. If it is determined that the time is longer than the time (C5009: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the contents of the staging update process 18 (C3142) will be described with reference to FIG. 443. FIG. 443 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect update process 18 (C3142). As shown in FIG. 443, the effect update process 18 (C3142) is a right-handed notification process when a set effect is executed for the effect update process 16 (see C3112 in FIG. 420) of the 16th embodiment described above. It differs in that it is added. Other than that, they are the same, and detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

When the effect update process 18 (C3142) is executed, first, the same processes of C4501 to C4506 as the effect update process 16 (see C3112 of FIG. 420) of the 16th embodiment described above are executed. Then, when it is determined that the time saving final variation flag 223 lk is not set to ON in the processing of C4505 (C4505: No), or when the final variation effect update process (C4506) is completed, the set effect is executed. (C4541). In the process of C4541, when the set effect is executed, the determination is performed by referring to the value of the effect time measurement counter (not shown) set to measure the effect time.

If it is determined in the processing of C4541 that the set effect is being executed (measurement of the effect time measurement counter is being performed) (C4541: Yes), is it the timing when 54 seconds have elapsed since the set effect was started? (C4542), if it is determined that the timing has passed 54 seconds (C4542: Yes), a display guidance command indicating a right-handed game is set (C4543), and the process proceeds to C4507. After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of C4541, when it is determined that the set effect is not being executed (C4541: No), or in the processing of C4542, when it is determined that the timing does not elapse 54 seconds (C4542: No). , The process proceeds to the process of C4507 without performing the process of C4543, and then the present process is terminated.

In the effect update process 18 (C3142) shown in FIG. 443, the right-handed game is configured to show the right-handed game at the elapsed timing of 54 seconds from the start of the effect only when it is determined that the set effect is being executed. However, in reality, it is configured to set a display guidance command to indicate a right-handed game even at other timings. Although specific illustration is omitted, for example, as shown in the normal variation pattern 18 table 202ne1 in FIG. 437 (b), when the set effect of 30 seconds is set, the set effect is executed. A display guidance command for indicating a right-handed game is set at the timing when 24 seconds have elapsed from. Further, when the effect result of the set effect being executed is replaced in the middle, a display guide command for indicating the right-handed game may be set at a further different timing. As a result, the right-handed game is notified at a timing different from the usual timing, so that it is possible to provide a player with an unexpected effect.

<19th Embodiment>
Next, the 19th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 444 to 456. The 19th embodiment is different from the 16th embodiment described above in that the method of setting the effect mode of the series of effects is different. First, a method of setting a series of effects according to the 16th embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIG. 444. FIG. 444 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of a series of staging settings in the 16th embodiment described above.

As shown in FIG. 444, in the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, there is a case where a winning figure is won (a winning figure is a long opening) and a case where a big hit or a small hit is won in the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery. A series of effects can be set, and the effect data of the series of effects is divided into a plurality of scenario types and stored.

Specifically, the scenario 1 corresponding to the effect mode (see FIGS. 365 (b) and 366 (a)) executed during the normal map fluctuation and the effect mode (FIG. 366) executed during the game per normal map. Scenario 2 corresponding to (b)), and scenario 3 corresponding to the staging mode (see FIG. 369 (a)) executed when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the game per game. It is executed when the period (waiting period) from when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the game per scenario until the special drawing 2 lottery based on the winning ball is executed is 10 to 30 seconds. Scenario 3-1 corresponding to the effect mode (see FIG. 367 (a)), scenario 4 corresponding to the effect mode (see FIG. 367 (b)) executed during the variation of the special figure 2, and the small hit game. In scenario 5 corresponding to the effect mode (see FIG. 368 (b)) executed in the above, and the effect mode (see FIGS. 370 (b) and 371 (b)) executed when the series of effects ends in the middle. The corresponding scenario 7 and is stored.

Then, when a big hit or a small hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery, a series of effects using a plurality of effect data are collectively set in correspondence with the corresponding change pattern command of the special figure 1 fluctuation. There is. Specifically, if a big hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery, a variable effect (series effect) in which the above-mentioned effect data from scenario 1 to scenario 5 are set collectively is executed, and a small hit is made in the special figure 1 lottery. If the winner is selected, the variable effect (series effect) in which the effect data of the above-mentioned scenarios 1 to 4 are collectively set is configured to be executed.

On the other hand, in the series of effects set based on the winning of the general figure, each scenario that constitutes the series of effects is set individually, and the next scenario is set for one scenario based on the establishment of the scenario transition condition. It is configured in. Specifically, in the case where the Fuzu long opening hit is won by the Fuzu lottery, if the execution condition of the series production is satisfied, the scenario 1 indicating the start of the series production is set, and the Fuzu long opening hit is set. When the indicated stop command is received, scenario 2 is then set. In addition, in the 16th embodiment, there is a case where the scenario 1 is set (so-called ghosting effect) in a state where the scenario 1 is not won in the long opening of the normal figure, and in that case, the elapsed time of the scenario 1 ends. , The series of production ends.

Next, when the production mode corresponding to the scenario 2 is executed during the game per the long opening of the normal figure and the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the special figure 2 (special 2) winning command indicating that fact is issued. A notification mode indicating that the sphere has won the second winning opening 640 is displayed on a layer different from the display layer output from the main control device 110 and executing the series of effects (sub-display area of FIG. 367 (a)). See Ds). Then, when the special figure 2 winning command is received, the scenario 3 is set. If the ball does not win the second winning opening 640 during the period in which the scenario 2 is set, the scenario 7 is set in order to end the series of effects, and the end screen of the predetermined period (3 seconds) is displayed. Is displayed.

In the 16th embodiment described above, the period until the special figure 2 lottery is executed when the ball enters the second winning opening 640 during the transition to the scenario 3, that is, during the game per game (waiting period). However, it is determined based on the fluctuation status of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and different scenarios are set according to the length of the waiting period. Specifically, if the waiting period is less than 10 seconds, scenario 3 (see FIG. 369 (a)) is set, and if the waiting period is 4 to 30 seconds, scenario 3-1 (see FIG. 367 (a)) is set. See) is set. Here, if the waiting period is 30 seconds or more, a special series of effects (continuous series of effects) in which the series of effects being executed is pseudo-terminated (scenario 7 is set) and the series of effects is started again after a predetermined period has elapsed. Is executed (see FIG. 372). Further, when the scenario 3-1 is set, the effect mode corresponding to the scenario 3-1 is continuously displayed until the scenario transition condition is satisfied.

Next, when the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is received with scenario 3 or scenario 3-1 set, the transition condition to the next scenario is satisfied, and scenario 4 is set. Scenario 4 is set until the special figure 2 stop command indicating the stop of the special figure 2 fluctuation is received, and the effect mode having the same length as the fluctuation time (15 seconds) of the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed. .. Then, when the special figure 2 stop command is received, if the change in the special figure 2 indicates a hit, the process proceeds to scenario 5. On the other hand, if the change in the special figure indicates an deviation, the process proceeds to scenario 7 and the series of processes is terminated.

Here, in the present embodiment, the same fluctuation time is set regardless of whether the special figure 2 fluctuation being executed is a small hit or a big hit in the state where the scenario 4 is set, and the transition to the scenario 5 is performed. However, it is not limited to this, for example, when a big hit is won by the special figure 2 fluctuation in the normal state, the small hit fluctuation time (15 seconds) and the small hit game time (10 seconds) are the fluctuation times. ) And the total of 25 seconds of fluctuation time is set, and scenario 4 is shifted to scenario 5 during the jackpot fluctuation of special figure 2, and the jackpot is matched with the stop timing of the jackpot fluctuation of special figure 2. It may be configured so that the game is executed.

If scenario 5 is set when the variation in the special figure 2 is a small hit, the effect mode corresponding to the scenario 5 is executed until the V passage command is received during the small hit game or until the small hit game is completed. When the V passage command is received, the notification mode indicating that effect is displayed on a layer different from the display layer on which the series of effects is executed, and the game shifts to the jackpot game. On the other hand, if the V-passing command has not been received after the small hit game period (10 seconds) has elapsed, the process proceeds to scenario 7 in order to end the series of effects.

As described above, in the 16th embodiment, when executing a series of effects based on the variation of the special figure 1, a series of effect scenarios are collectively set in correspondence with the variation pattern of the variation of the special figure 1 and are usually used. When executing a series of effects based on the fluctuation of the figure, the effect mode of the series of effects is updated according to the degree of establishment of the transition condition according to each scenario. Therefore, in the case of executing a series of effects in the same effect mode, if the update of the effect mode is confirmed, the process of setting the series effect can be simplified, and the update content of the effect mode changes depending on the game situation. In that case, the production mode can be flexibly changed according to each game situation.

In the 16th embodiment, when the series of effects is executed based on the drawing lottery, the scenario of the series of effects is set individually, but the scenario is not limited to this, for example, the drawing. Of the series of effects executed based on the lottery, the portion where the update of the effect mode is confirmed may be configured to collectively set a plurality of scenarios. This makes it possible to simplify the process of setting a series of effects.

The method of setting a series of effects in the 16th embodiment described above with reference to FIG. 444 sets a series of effects when the series of effects is executed in the same effect mode and the update of the effect mode is confirmed. In addition to simplifying the processing, when the update content of the effect mode is variable depending on the game situation, the effect mode can be flexibly changed according to each game situation, but the length of the waiting period is increased. Since the only staging mode that can be variably set according to the situation is the staging mode corresponding to scenario 3, the player feels uncomfortable as compared with the staging mode based on other scenarios of the series of staging executed in a predetermined period. There was a problem.

Here, in order to solve the above-mentioned problem, in the 19th embodiment, when the normal figure change is executed, the change state of the special symbol (first special symbol) during the game per normal figure is predicted. Based on the prediction result, it is configured to set the production mode of a series of effects corresponding to the fluctuation of the normal map. That is, when the normal map fluctuation is executed, the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation executed this time, the normal map lottery result, and the game time (maximum time) of the game per normal map are calculated and used as the calculation result. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 change currently being executed ends during the game per normal figure, and the effect mode of a series of effects corresponding to the normal figure change is set based on the determination result. is doing.

With this configuration, for example, the change end timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation during execution is later than the period during which the ball can win the second winning opening 640, that is, the game period (maximum period) per normal figure. In this case, it is possible to predict the timing (length of the waiting period) at which the special figure 2 fluctuation can be executed at the time when the normal figure fluctuation is executed. Thereby, as various effect modes executed during the waiting period, it is possible to set an effect mode based on the length of the waiting period. Therefore, with respect to the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, since the period that can be variably set can be lengthened among the production modes of the series of effects according to the length of the waiting period, the series according to the length of the series of effects. It is possible to facilitate the execution of the production.

<About the electrical configuration in the 19th embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the 19th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 445 and 446. The 19th embodiment is different from the 16th embodiment described above in that a partial configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 and a partial configuration of the RAM 223 are changed. Specifically, the difference is that a series of effect scenario tables 222oa is added to ROM 222, and a middle flag 223oa, an effect scenario storage area 223ob, and a constant monitoring flag 223oc are added to RAM 223. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the 19th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 445 (a). FIG. 445 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the 19th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 445 (a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 19th embodiment is different from the 16th embodiment in that a series of effect scenario table 222oa is added.

The series of effect scenario table 222oa is a data table in which the effect mode of the series of effect to be executed corresponding to the progressing game situation is defined. Here, with reference to FIG. 446, the contents of the normal map scenario table 222oa1 in which the continuous effect scenario set based on the normal map variation is defined will be described in the series of directing scenario table 222oa.

FIG. 446 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the series of staging scenario tables 222oa. Note that FIG. 446 shows only the characteristic contents of the 19th embodiment (the production scenario of the series of effects set based on the fluctuation of the normal map) among the contents specified in the series of production scenario table 222oa. Therefore, the description and description of the same contents as those of the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, that is, the contents of the production mode of the series of effects set corresponding to the fluctuation period of the special figure fluctuation, are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 446, in the 19th embodiment, when setting the production mode of a series of effects based on the fluctuation of the normal map, it is possible to set a plurality of scenarios per normal figure (scenarios 1 to 4 per normal figure). It is configured to set different scenarios per normal map based on the result of the first prediction (prediction about the length of the waiting period that can occur during the execution of a series of effects) that is executed when the normal map fluctuates. It is composed.

Specifically, when it is determined whether or not the first special symbol (special figure 1) is changing at the start of the change of the normal figure that was won per long opening of the normal figure, and it is determined that the special figure 1 is changing. In addition, the remaining period of the change in Special Figure 1 during execution is determined. Next, the game period of the game per Fuzu long opening executed based on the current Fuzu variation is compared with the remaining period of the executing Tokuzu 1 variation, and the end timing of the executing Tokuzu 1 variation is determined. It is determined whether it is later than the end time of the game per Fuzu long opening executed based on the current fluctuation of the Fuzu, and if it is determined to be later, it is special from the end time of the game per Fuzu long opening. FIG. 1 The waiting period until the fluctuation is completed (special figure 2 the period until the fluctuation can be executed) is determined. Then, it is configured to set a scenario per drawing corresponding to the length of the waiting period determined by the above-mentioned processing.

With this configuration, it is possible to predict in advance the length of the waiting period in which the special figure 2 fluctuation will not be executed at the start of the fluctuation of the normal map, so it depends on the length of the waiting period. It is possible to execute a series of effects in the same effect mode.

In the above-mentioned first prediction, when the special figure 1 change is not being executed at the start timing of the normal figure change, or the end timing of the special figure 1 change being executed is longer than the game period per the normal figure long. If it is before, since the waiting period cannot be predicted in advance, only the production mode of the series of effects corresponding to the normal map fluctuation time is set at the start of the normal map fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 446, the series of staging scenario table 222oa defines a plurality of scenarios per normal map set based on the prediction result of the first prediction executed at the start of the normal map fluctuation, and the first prediction. As a prediction result of, if the waiting period (special figure 2 waiting period) is "less than 2 seconds", "scenario 1 per normal figure" is set, and if it is "more than 2 seconds and less than 30 seconds", It is stipulated that "scenario per map 2" is set, and "scenario 3 per map" is set when it is "30 seconds or more". Further, when the prediction result of the first prediction is "unpredictable", it is stipulated that "scenario 4 per normal figure" is set.

Here, the contents of each scenario will be explained. When "Scenario 1 per normal figure" is set, "Scenario 1" is set to "During the change of the normal figure", "Scenario 2" is set to "During the game per normal figure", and "Variation of the special figure 2" as the production mode of the series of effects. The content of the scenario is defined so that the production mode corresponding to "Scenario 3" is set in "Medium". That is, when the "scenario 1 per figure" is set, that is, when the waiting period for the special figure 2 is short, the effect mode indicating the game per the normal figure is shown without setting the effect mode dedicated to the special figure 2 waiting period. A series of effects is executed, which shifts from the above to the effect mode showing the variation of the special figure 2.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from performing an effect that is difficult for the player to understand by setting the effect mode indicating the special figure 2 waiting period for a short period (for example, 0.5 seconds). Can be done. In addition, in this embodiment, when the scenario 1 per the normal figure is set, the special figure 2 waiting period of less than 2 seconds occurs when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the game per the long opening of the normal figure. It is configured so that the effect mode that can be set during the game is continuously set, but the effect is not limited to this, and the special figure 2 changes during the special figure 2 waiting period of less than 2 seconds. It may be configured to set the effect mode which can be set in.

When "Scenario 2 per normal figure" is set, "Scenario 1" is set to "During the change of the normal figure", "Scenario 2" is set to "During the game per normal figure", and "Variation of the special figure 2" as the production mode of the series of effects. The content of the scenario is defined so that the production mode corresponding to "scenario 3" is set in "waiting" and "scenario 4" is set in "special figure 2 changing". That is, when the "scenario 2 per normal figure" is set, that is, when the special figure 2 waiting period exists for a predetermined period, the effect mode dedicated to the special figure 2 waiting period is set.

With this configuration, when the special figure 2 waiting period occurs for a predetermined period, it is possible to execute a series of effects that do not give the player a sense of discomfort (a feeling of delay). Further, in the present embodiment, when "scenario 1 per normal figure" is set, "scenario 3" set to "during special figure 2 fluctuation" is set, and when "scenario 2 per normal figure" is set. Is configured to correspond to "Special Figure 2 Standby". With this configuration, it is possible to set an effect mode for transitioning from "scenario 2" to "scenario 3" as a series of effects regardless of the presence or absence of the special figure 2 waiting period. Therefore, it is possible to execute a series of effects that do not give a sense of discomfort to the player.

Next, when "Scenario 3 per Fuzu" is set, "Scenario 1" is set to "During the change of the Fuzu", "Scenario 2" is set to "During the game per Fuzu", and "Special" as the production mode of the series of effects. The contents of the scenario are defined so that the production mode corresponding to "Scenario 2" and "Scenario 3" is set in "Standing for change in FIG. 2" and "Scenario 4" is set in "During change in special figure 2". That is, when the "scenario 3 per normal figure" is set, that is, when the waiting period for the special figure 2 is equal to or longer than the predetermined period, the period during which the corresponding "scenario 2" is set during the game per normal figure is set. It is configured to be longer than other normal scenario.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the player think that even if the special figure 2 waiting period is long, that one period is during the game per normal figure. Therefore, it is difficult to think that the special figure 2 waiting period is long. In addition, since the effect mode (scenario 2) corresponding to the game per game is displayed for a long period of time, the game per game is executed for a long time instead of the special figure 2 waiting period for the player. You can make me think that it has been done.

In addition, when "Scenario 4 per Fuzu" is set, it is not possible to predict the fluctuation status of the fluctuation of Special Figure 1 during the game per long opening of Fuzu, so "Usu" is set. Only "Scenario 1" corresponding to "Figure is changing" is set, and this process is terminated. When "scenario per scenario 4" is set, it is determined whether the scenario transition condition is satisfied at the scenario switching timing as in the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, and the scenario based on the determination result is set. It is configured as follows.

Further, even if a different scenario for hitting a normal figure is set as a scenario for hitting a normal figure, the same effect mode is set during the small hit game and the big hit game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 447 and 448, a flow in the case where the scenario per normal figure 2 is set as a series of effects of the 19th embodiment will be described. FIG. 447 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow when the scenario 2 per normal figure is set as a series of effects.

As shown in FIG. 447, the first prediction process for determining the length of the waiting period (special figure 2 waiting period) is executed at the time when the fluctuation of the normal map is executed. Then, when the waiting period "20 seconds" is determined as the processing result of the first prediction process, the staging data corresponding to the "scenario per scenario 2" defined in the series of staging scenario table 222oa at the start of the staging fluctuation of the staging map. Is set and stored in the effect scenario storage area 223ob, which will be described later. Then, based on the passage of time, a series of effects is executed in an effect mode corresponding to the effect data stored in the effect scenario storage area 223ob.

In this way, when the future game content can be predicted at the start of the fluctuation of the normal map, a plurality of effect data (scenarios) are set together to set the effect mode of the series of effects. Processing can be simplified.

Next, with reference to FIG. 448, a flow in the case where the scenario 4 per normal figure is set as a series of effects will be described. FIG. 448 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow when the scenario 4 per normal figure is set as a series of effects.

As shown in FIG. 448, the first prediction process for determining the length of the waiting period (special figure 2 waiting period) is executed at the time when the fluctuation of the normal map is executed. Then, when it is determined that the stop timing of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 being executed as the processing result of the first prediction process is earlier than the stop timing of the fluctuation per normal figure, the length of the waiting period can be predicted. Since it is impossible, the processing result of the first prediction process is determined to be "unpredictable", and at the start of the fluctuation of the staging map, the staging data corresponding to the "scenario 4 per staging map" defined in the series of staging scenario table 222oa. Is set.

That is, according to the example shown in FIG. 448, a new period from when the execution of the special figure 1 fluctuation is stopped until the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the game per long opening of the normal figure. Special Figure 1 Since it is not possible to predict whether or not the fluctuation will be executed, it is not possible to predict the length of the waiting period. In such a case, at the start of the fluctuation of the normal map, only the production mode (scenario 1) during the period corresponding to the fluctuation of the normal map is set as the effect mode of the series of effects, and when the fluctuation of the normal map is stopped (at the start of the normal map hit). ), The second prediction process is executed.

The second prediction process is for determining the length of the waiting period again when the fluctuation of the normal map is stopped (at the start of hitting the normal map), and the length of the waiting period cannot be determined in the first prediction process. This is the process that is executed when In this second prediction process, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed when the normal map fluctuation is stopped (when the normal map is started), and if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation is in progress, the executing feature is executed. FIG. 1 The length of the waiting period is determined by comparing the remaining period of the fluctuation with the game period of the game per long opening of the normal figure. Then, based on the determination result, the effect mode of the series of effects is set based on the contents specified in the series of effect scenario table 222oa.

As shown in FIG. 448, when the waiting period cannot be predicted even in the second prediction process (when the special figure 1 fluctuation is not executed at the timing when the second prediction process is executed), Even at this point in time, since the waiting period cannot be determined, the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation or the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation during the game per normal figure (game per game with long open of the normal figure) is constantly monitored. The constant monitoring process for this is executed. Then, if it is determined by the constant monitoring process that the special figure 2 change is executed before the new special figure 1 change is executed, the special figure 2 changes correspond to the start of the special figure 2 change. The effect mode (scenario 3) corresponding to the fluctuation is set.

As described above, in the 19th embodiment, when setting the production mode of the series of effects to be executed based on the fluctuation of the normal map, the waiting period in which the irregular period is set according to the game situation is set. It is configured to predict the length and execute a series of effects according to the prediction result. With this configuration, even if a long waiting period is set during the period in which the series of effects is executed, it is possible to provide the player with a series of effects that does not give a sense of discomfort.

Further, in the 19th embodiment, since the waiting period is predicted at the timing when the series of effects is executed, the series of effects executed before the time when the waiting period is actually set is set. The effect mode can be variably set according to the length of the waiting period. Therefore, among the production modes of the series of productions, it is possible to execute a series of productions without a sense of discomfort, as compared with the case where only the production mode set corresponding to the waiting period is changed according to the length of the waiting period. ..

Further, in the 19th embodiment, in the state where the waiting period is set, it is possible to set an effect mode indicating that the period is other than the waiting period (for example, the game period per normal figure). It can be difficult to understand that a long waiting period is set for the player. In the 19th embodiment, as in the 16th embodiment described above, since the right-handed game is configured to be performed during the series of staging, whether or not the present is the waiting period depends on the game method. It can be difficult for the player to discriminate.

In addition, in the 19th embodiment, when it is difficult (impossible) to predict the length of the waiting period at the start of the fluctuation of the normal map, the waiting period is again at a different timing (game start timing per normal map). It is configured to execute a process for predicting the length of the (second prediction process). In this way, by providing a plurality of timings for predicting the length of the waiting period in the period until the waiting period is set, the prediction accuracy for the length of the waiting period can be improved.

In addition, in the process of predicting the waiting period, only when the waiting period cannot be predicted, the game status during the game per normal map is configured to be constantly monitored, and the waiting period is supported based on the result of the constant monitoring. Since it is configured to set the effect mode to be performed, it is possible to simplify the process for setting the effect mode of the series of effects.

In the 19th embodiment, in the process for predicting the waiting period (first prediction process, second prediction process), the length of the waiting period is determined by using the remaining variation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed. It is configured to predict (discriminate), but is not limited to this, for example, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223la is pre-read, and the next is based on the pre-reading result. The length of the waiting period may be predicted by using the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation executed in 1.

With this configuration, for example, as in the example shown in FIG. 448, when the stop timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation during execution is before the start timing of the game per normal figure, that is, during execution. If the start condition of the special figure 2 change (the winning of the ball to the second winning opening 640) cannot be satisfied at the end of the special figure 1 change, the change time of the special figure 1 change to be executed next is set. It is possible to look ahead and predict the length of the waiting period based on the look-ahead result. Therefore, the prediction accuracy for the length of the waiting period can be improved.

Further, in the 19th embodiment, similarly to the 16th embodiment described above, the special figure 2 variation is configured to be executed in preference to the special figure 1 variation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation may be configured to be executed according to the winning order of the balls to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and the special figure 2 variation may be prioritized. Then, the special figure 1 variation may be configured to be executed.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the 19th embodiment>
Next, the contents of each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the 19th embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 449 to 456. In the present embodiment, for the 16th embodiment described above, the winning information command processing 19 (see FIG. 449) is executed instead of the winning information command processing 16 (see FIG. 407), and a series of effect discrimination processing (see FIG. 449). (See 450), the hit-related command process 19 (see FIG. 451) instead of the hit-related command process 16 (see FIG. 410), and the hit-related command process (see FIG. 452). A point to be executed, a point to execute the variation effect setting process 19 (see FIG. 453) instead of the variation effect setting process 16 (see FIG. 415), and a point to execute the effect setting process during constant monitoring (see FIG. 454). And, at the point where the variable effect setting process 19 (see FIG. 455) is executed instead of the effect setting process for normal drawing (see FIG. 417), and the point where the series of effect prediction setting process (see FIG. 456) is executed. They are different and otherwise the same. The same control processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, regarding the points where the contents of the referenced data table have been changed and the various processing contents that are changed in response to the changes in the contents of the referenced data table, the numerical values have simply been changed, which is technically ideological. Are the same, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the winning information command processing 19 (C3242) will be described with reference to FIG. 449. FIG. 449 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information command processing 19 (C3242) executed in the 19th embodiment. In this prize information command process 19 (C3242), a process (series effect determination process (series effect determination process)) is executed when a prize information command is received during a series of effect execution for the above-mentioned prize information command process 16 (see FIG. 407). The difference is that C3441))) is added in FIG. 450, and the other points are the same. Therefore, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the winning information command processing 19 (C3242) is executed, the same processing of C3401 to C3405 as the winning information command processing 16 (see FIG. 407) of the 16th embodiment described above is executed, and then the special processing of C3403 is performed. If it is determined that there is no 2 hit information (C3403: No), the process of C3441 is executed. In the process of C3441, a series of effect determination processes are executed (C3441). Details of this series of staging determination process (C3441) will be described later with reference to FIG. 450.

After executing the process of C3441, the processes of C3406 and C3407 are executed, and then the present process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the series of staging determination processing (C3441) will be described with reference to FIG. 450. FIG. 450 is a flowchart showing the contents of the series of staging determination process (C3441) executed in the prize information command process 19 (FIG. 449) in the 19th embodiment. In this series of effect determination process (C3441), it is determined whether or not the series of effects is currently being executed, and when it is determined that the series of effects is being executed, the type of the winning command received this time (Special Figure 1, Special Figure 1). 2. The process corresponding to the general figure) is executed.

When the series effect determination process (C3441) is executed, first, the value of the series effect counter 223 lq is acquired (C5101), and then it is determined whether the value of the series effect counter 223 lq is 0 (C5102). The series effect counter 223lq acquired in the process of C4101 is set with a value corresponding to the effect period when the series effect is executed, is subtracted (updated) in the effect update process executed periodically, and is a counter value. Is configured to end the series of effects when becomes "0". That is, in the process of C5102, it is determined whether or not a series of effects is being executed.

In the process of C5102, when it is determined that the value of the series effect counter 223 lq is not larger than 0 (0) (C5102: No), since the series effect is not currently being performed, various display modes during the series effect execution. The process of C5103 to C5110 for setting is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of C5111.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the series production counter 223lq is larger than 0 (C5102: Yes), the series production is being executed. It is determined whether the command is related to (C5103), if it is determined that the special 2 prize is won (C5103: Yes), the information of the staging scenario storage area 223ob is read (C5104), and then the constant monitoring flag 223oc is turned on. It is determined whether or not there is (C5105). If it is determined that the constant monitoring flag 223oc is off (C5105: No), the process proceeds to C5108.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the constant monitoring flag 223oc is on (C5105: Yes), that is, in the production period in which the series of productions of this time is executed, the waiting period in which the execution of the special figure 2 variation is waited is in advance. If the situation is unpredictable, the waiting period is calculated (C5106).

Here, the calculation contents executed in the process of C5106 will be described. Since the processing of C5106 is the processing executed when the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 winning (special 2 winning) is received, the present time is the second winning opening 640 (the starting winning opening of the special drawing 2 variation). The ball wins a prize, and the condition that is a part of the execution opportunity of the special figure 2 fluctuation is satisfied. In the present embodiment, the special figure 1 change and the special figure 2 change are not executed at the same time (overlapping), and the special figure 2 change has priority over the special figure 1 change. Is configured to be executed.

That is, when the special figure 1 change is executed at the present time, the special figure 2 change corresponding to the winning information command received this time is executed after the execution of the special figure 1 change is completed. Therefore, the remaining time of the special figure 1 fluctuation currently being executed is extracted using the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223ln, and the extraction result is calculated as a waiting period. If the special figure 1 change is not executed at this time, the special figure 2 change corresponding to the winning information command received this time will be executed immediately, so "0" is set as the waiting period. ..

In this embodiment, the number of balls to be won in the second winning opening 640 is set to one during the execution of one series of effects (during the game per one Fuzu long opening). Therefore, when a prize information command indicating a special figure 2 prize (special 2 prize) is received in the process of C5103, the process for calculating the waiting period is always executed. Without limitation, for example, in the case of configuring so that two or more balls can be won in the second winning opening 640 (during a game per one Fuzu long opening) during one series of effects. Is set to turn on a flag (calculated flag) indicating that the waiting period has been calculated in the processing of C5106, and after determining that the constant monitoring flag 223oc is on in the processing of C5105 (C5105: Yes). , It is configured to determine whether the calculated flag described above is set to ON, and if the calculated flag is set to ON, the processing of C5106 and C5107 is skipped and the process proceeds to C5108. It is good to configure it like this.

With this configuration, even if a plurality of balls win the second winning opening 640 and receive the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 winning multiple times while the series of effects is being executed. Since the waiting period can be calculated only based on the prize information command indicating the special figure 2 prize received first, it is possible to suppress the execution of unnecessary processing. That is, in the present embodiment, the period from the timing when the special figure 2 is first won during the execution of the series of effects to the execution of the change in the special figure 2 is set as the waiting period, and the effect mode according to the length of the waiting period. By setting, even if the period during which the special figure 2 fluctuation is not executed (waiting period) is long even though the special figure 2 is won, the effect is executed in the middle of the series of effects (during the waiting period). Since it is configured to prevent the effect to be executed from being delayed and the effect of the effect from being reduced, a plurality of balls win the second winning opening 640 while the series of effects is being executed. However, even if the prize information command indicating the special figure 2 prize is received multiple times, the process of calculating the length of the waiting period based on the prize information command indicating the special figure 2 prize received from the second time onward is unnecessary. Processing.

In addition, as in the present embodiment, in the case of configuring to calculate the waiting period every time the prize information command indicating the special figure 2 prize is received during the period in which the series of effects is being executed, the special feature is first. Fig. 2 When a prize information command indicating a prize is received, it is sufficient to determine whether or not the variation in Special Figure 1 is executed, and if it is being executed, the remaining period, and calculate the waiting period. When a prize information command indicating a special figure 2 prize is received, it is determined whether the special figure change during execution is a special figure 1 change or a special figure 2 change, and if the special figure 1 change is being executed, it is determined. , The waiting period may be calculated based on the remaining period of the change in the special figure 1 being executed and the prize information command indicating the special figure 2 winning previously received.

In this case, the lottery result of the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the prize information command indicating the special figure 2 prize received earlier is pre-read, and if the pre-reading result is out of order, the prize indicating the special figure 2 prize received this time is obtained. The waiting period is the remaining period until the special figure 2 fluctuation corresponding to the information command is executed, that is, the total period of the remaining period of the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed and the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation to be executed next. It is good to configure it to be set as. With this configuration, it is possible to set the period during which the deviation fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed as the waiting period, so that it is difficult for the player to understand that the deviation was won in the special figure 2 lottery. can.

Return to FIG. 450 and continue the explanation. In the process of C5108, a display command corresponding to the special figure 2 winning is set (C5108), and the process proceeds to the process of C5109. In the process of C5108, a display command indicating that the special figure 2 has won is set. The display commands set here include, for example, a direct display mode for directly displaying that the special figure 2 has been won, and a display indicating the remaining period until the special figure change corresponding to the winning is executed. A mode, that is, an indirect display mode that indirectly displays that a prize has been won in Special Figure 2 is displayed.

In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned direct display mode and indirect display mode can be set by using the display command corresponding to the special figure 2 prize, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. , The effect mode may be set based on the lottery result of the variation, or may be configured based on the length of the waiting period of the series of effects. In addition, the notification mode indicating that the ball has won the second winning opening 640 first during the series of production and the notification mode indicating that the ball has won the second winning opening 640 after the second time are different. Is also good.

Next, in the process of C5109, it is determined whether the ball winning in the V winning opening 650a has passed through the specific region (V region) (whether there was a V winning) (C5109). If it is determined that the ball that has won the V winning opening 650a has passed the specific area (V area) (C5109: Yes), a display command corresponding to the V winning is set (C5110), and the process proceeds to C5111. .. If it is determined that the ball that has won the V winning opening 650a has not passed through the specific region (V region) (C5109: No), the process proceeds to C5111.

In the process of C5111, an effect mode related to other winning information is set (C5111), a display command for indicating the set effect mode is set (C5112), and then this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the hit-related command process 19 (C3261) will be described with reference to FIG. 451. FIG. 451 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit-related command process 19 (C3261) executed in the 19th embodiment. In this hit-related command process 19 (C3261), the effect mode in each period of the series of effects is set based on the execution of the game per game during the period in which the series of effects is being executed.

When the hit-related command process 19 (C3261) is executed, the same processes of C3501 to C3504 as the hit-related command process 16 (see FIG. 410) of the 16th embodiment described above are executed, and the main control is performed in the process of C3505. If it is determined that the command related to the normal figure is received from the device 110 (C3505: Yes), the command process related to the normal figure is executed (C3551), and then this process is terminated. The details of this per-figure related command processing (C3551) will be described later with reference to FIG. 452.

Next, with reference to FIG. 452, the contents of the command processing (C3551) related to the normal drawing will be described. FIG. 452 is a flowchart showing the contents of the per-figure-related command processing (C3551) executed in the 19th embodiment. This hit-related command process (C3551) is executed when a hit-related command related to a normal figure is received (C3505: Yes in FIG. 451), and the start timing and end of the game per normal figure. At the timing, various processes for setting the effect mode of the series of effects are executed.

In the command processing related to the normal figure (C3551), first, it is determined whether or not the opening command is received from the main control device 110 (C5201). Then, when it is determined that the opening command has been received (C5201: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the series effect counter 223 lq is larger than 0, that is, whether the series effect is currently being executed (C5202). .. If it is determined that the value of the series effect counter 223lq is not larger than 0 (C5202: No), the opening command processing for display is executed (C5203), the middle flag 223oa per normal figure is set to ON, and the C5215 Move to processing.

The display opening command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is a command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the 16th embodiment. Is transmitted toward the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts the opening effect on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of C5202, when it is determined that the value of the series effect counter 223 lq is larger than 0 (C5202: Yes), the information stored in the effect scenario storage area 223ob is read (C5205), and then the effect scenario. It is determined whether or not the information stored in the storage area 223ob is scenario 4 per normal figure (C5206).

Here, in the staging scenario storage area 223ob, information indicating a scenario per normal map set in the series of staging prediction setting process (C4251 in FIG. 456) performed when the normal map fluctuation (pull-out lottery) is executed is stored. In the processing of C5206, when it is determined that the scenario is "Scenario 4 per map (see FIG. 446)", which is a scenario per map in which the effect mode corresponding to the period during the game per map is not set. , The process for setting the effect mode during the game per scenario in the series of effects is executed.

In the process of C5206, if it is determined that the information stored in the staging scenario storage area 223ob is not scenario 4 per normal figure (scenarios 1 to 3 per normal figure) (C5206: No), the normal figure has already been made. Since the effect mode during the winning game is set, that is, in the series of effect prediction setting process (C4251 in FIG. 456) performed when the normal map fluctuation (normal map lottery) is executed, the normal map per game is being played in advance. Since it is the case that the effect mode corresponding to the period of is set, the process of C5207 to C5210 is skipped without setting the effect mode corresponding to the period during the game per normal drawing in this process. ) Move to the processing of C5204.

On the other hand, in the processing of C5206, when it is determined that the information stored in the effect scenario storage area 223ob is scenario 4 per normal figure (C5206: Yes), the special figure fluctuation time counter (special figure 1 fluctuation time counter). The value of 223 ln is compared with the game period per screenplay (C5207). Explaining the processing contents of C5207 in detail, first, the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is calculated using the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223ln. For example, when the special figure 1 fluctuation of 60 seconds is executed, the value corresponding to the fluctuation time of 60 seconds at the start timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation (in the present embodiment, the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223ln is , Since it is configured to subtract 1 in the effect update process 18 (see C3142 in FIG. 443) executed every 1 millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 59), the value corresponds to 60 seconds. "60,000") is set. When this process is executed when 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation, the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223ln indicating the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation is "30000". Therefore, "30 seconds" is calculated as the residual fluctuation time of the fluctuation in Special Figure 1. Next, it is calculated based on the type of the game per game executed this time. In the present embodiment, since the opening command output from the main control device 110 includes information indicating the type of the game per game to be executed this time, the game period per game is calculated based on the information. Here, as the game period per normal figure, the time specified as the end condition that is established based on the passage of time is calculated.

Specifically, the game per game ends when 3 seconds have passed since the game per game was started, or when the number of winning balls to the second winning opening 640 reaches 10. If the end condition is set in advance, "3 seconds", which is the maximum time during which the game per game can be continued, is set as the game period per game. As a result, in the process of predicting the waiting period (the period from winning the special figure 2 to the execution of the change in the special figure 2) in advance in order to set the effect mode of the series of effects, the normal figure used for the prediction is hit. Since it is possible to prevent a situation in which the actual game period per game is longer than the game period, the period predicted as the period during which the ball can win the second winning opening 640. It is possible to avoid a situation in which a ball wins a prize in the second winning opening 640 after the lapse of time and the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed. Therefore, even when the effect mode is set in advance based on the prediction result, it is possible to make it difficult for the actual game content and the effect content to be executed to deviate from each other, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

When the game period per game is calculated as described above, the game per game is completed in a shorter period than the calculated game period per game, that is, the predetermined number of games per game is completed within the game period per game. The game may end when the ball (10) wins in the second winning opening 640. In this case, the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 during the game per game, and when the game per game ends, it corresponds to the staging corresponding to the waiting period or the special figure 2 variable period. Since the production is performed, it is configured so as not to give a sense of discomfort to the player.

Returning to FIG. 452, the explanation will be continued. After finishing the processing of C5207, then, based on the comparison result of C5207, whether the remaining period of the special figure 1 (the remaining period of the variation of the special figure 1) is larger (longer) than the game period per normal figure, that is, the feature being executed. FIG. 1 It is determined whether the timing at which the variation ends is later than the end timing of the game per game to be executed this time (C5208). In the processing of C5208, if it is determined that the remaining period of the special figure 1 is shorter than the game period per normal figure (C5208: No), the special figure is obtained when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the game per normal figure. Since there is a possibility that 1 fluctuation has not been executed, the constant monitoring flag 223oc is set to ON (C5209), and the process proceeds to C5210.

On the other hand, in the processing of C5208, when it is determined that the remaining period of the special figure 1 is longer than the game period per normal figure, that is, the variation of the special figure 1 being executed does not end during the game per normal figure executed this time (C5208). : Yes), skip the process of setting the constant monitoring flag 223oc (C5209) because it is confirmed that the special figure 1 fluctuation is being executed when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the game. Then, the process proceeds to C5210.

In the process of C5210, a series of production scenarios during the game per corresponding normal figure is set (C5210), and then the process proceeds to the process of C5204. In the processing of C5204, the flag for hitting the normal figure is set to ON (C5204), and then the process proceeds to the processing of C5215. Here, to explain in detail the processing content of C5210 described above, in the processing of C5208, when it is determined that the remaining period of Special Figure 1 is longer than the game period per normal figure (C5208: Yes), the difference period, that is, , Calculate the period from the end of the game per normal figure to the end of the special figure 1 residual fluctuation. Then, using the calculation result as the special figure 2 waiting period, the scenario per normal figure to which the special figure 2 waiting period corresponds is selected from the scenario table per normal figure defined in the series of effect scenario table 222oa, and the effect is produced. Set the aspect.

On the other hand, in the processing of C5208, when it is determined that the remaining period of Special Figure 1 is shorter than the game period per normal figure (C5208: No), the effect mode (series of effects) is performed at the timing when the ball actually wins the second winning opening 640. Since the effect mode according to the waiting period in the above-mentioned 16th embodiment is set, the same effect mode as the above-mentioned 16th embodiment is set.

Next, in the process of C5201 when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (C5201: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received from the main controller 110 (C5211). Then, when it is determined that the ending command has been received (C5211: Yes), the middle flag 223oa is set to off (C5212), the constant monitoring flag 223oc is set to off (C5213), and the ending for display is set. A command is set (C5214), and then the process proceeds to C5215. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is directed to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S4102) of the main process executed by the MPU 221. Will be sent. Upon receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 starts the ending effect on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received in the processing of C5211 (C5211: No), the process proceeds to the processing of C5215. In the processing of C5215, processing corresponding to other commands is executed (C5215), and this processing is terminated.

Next, the contents of the variation effect setting process 19 (C4044) will be described with reference to FIG. 453. FIG. 453 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation effect setting process 19 (C4044) executed in the 19th embodiment. In this variable effect setting process 19 (C4044), when the constant monitoring flag 223oc is set to on (during a game per game executed during a series of effects, the length of the waiting period is not set. In the case), the process for setting the variable effect to be executed is added, and the content of the process for setting the variable effect of the normal symbol is changed. It is different from the process 5 (see FIG. 416), and is the same except for the process 5. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

When the variation effect setting process 19 (C4044) is executed, the same process of C4101 as the variation effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 416) of the 16th embodiment described above is executed, and the special figure variation effect is not set (usually). If it is determined (C4101: No), the variation effect setting process 19 is executed (C4167), and then this process is terminated. The details of the variable staging setting process 19 (C4167) will be described later with reference to FIG. 455.

On the other hand, in the process of C4101, when it is determined that the special figure variation effect is set (C4101: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the constant monitoring flag 223oc is set to ON (C4151). If it is determined that the constant monitoring flag 223oc is on (C4151: Yes), the constant monitoring effect setting process is executed (C4152), and the process proceeds to the C4102 process. The details of this constantly monitoring effect setting process (C4152) will be described later with reference to FIG. 454. On the other hand, if it is determined that the constant monitoring flag 223oc is not set to ON in the processing of C4151, the processing of C4152 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of C4102. After executing the process of C4152, the same processes of C4102 to C4116 as the variable staging setting process 5 (see FIG. 416) of the 16th embodiment described above are executed, and then this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 454, the contents of the constantly monitoring effect setting process (C4152) will be described. FIG. 454 is a flowchart showing the contents of the constantly monitoring effect setting process (C4152) executed in the 19th embodiment. This constantly monitoring effect setting process (C4152) is executed by the variation effect setting process 19 (see C4044 in FIG. 453), and is executed when a variation pattern command corresponding to the special symbol variation is received. It is a thing.

In the constantly monitoring effect setting process (C4152), first, it is determined whether a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation is received (whether the special 1 fluctuation has started) (C5301), and the special figure 1 fluctuation is supported. When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command is received (special 1 fluctuation has started) (C5301: Yes), the fluctuation pattern extracted by the processing of C3303 of the fluctuation pattern command processing 16 (see C3204 in FIG. 409) is used. Based on this, the fluctuation time of the current special figure 1 fluctuation (special figure 1 fluctuation time) is extracted (C5302). Next, it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is larger (longer) than the period per normal figure (C5303).

In the processing of C5303, the special figure 1 fluctuation time extracted in the processing of C5302 is compared with the remaining period of the game per normal figure (period per normal figure) during execution, and the end timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation time is set. Determine if it is later than the end timing of the per-figure period. In the present embodiment, the constantly monitoring effect setting process (C4152) is configured to be executed when the constantly monitoring flag 223oc is set to ON, that is, at least during the game per game, so that C5303 The process of is executed during the game per game, but if the process of C5303 is configured to be executable in a state where the game per game is not executed, the game per game is executed. As a non-existent state, the special figure 1 fluctuation time and the normal figure per period may be compared by using the normal figure per period "0".

In the process of C5303, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time is longer than the game period per normal figure (the end timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation is later than the end timing of the game per normal figure) (C5303: Yes). Since the special figure 1 fluctuation does not end during the game per normal figure, the effect mode (effect scenario of a series of effects) during the game per normal figure is set based on the determination result of C5303 (C5304) and constantly monitored. The flag 223oc is set to off (C5305), and the process proceeds to C5306.

Here, the processing of C5304 will be described in detail. First, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time is longer than the game period per normal figure (the end timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation is later than the end timing of the game per normal figure) (C5303: Yes), the difference. The period, that is, the period from the end of the game per normal map to the end of the special figure 1 fluctuation is calculated, and the calculated period is the waiting period for the second special symbol (special figure 2) change (special figure 2 standby). Period), and among the scenarios 1 to 3 per drawing specified in the series of production scenario tables 222oa, the production mode is set based on the scenario per normal figure corresponding to the special figure 2 waiting period calculated this time. On the other hand, in the processing of C5303, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time is not longer than the normal figure per period (the end timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation is earlier than the end timing of the game per normal figure) (C5303). : No), even if the current special figure 1 change is executed, the special figure 2 waiting period cannot be predicted, that is, the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 during this special figure 1 change. If not, since the game per normal figure is still being executed even after the special figure 1 change to be executed this time is completed, whether the special figure 1 change is executed during the remaining games per normal figure or not. FIG. 2 Since it is not possible to predict whether or not the fluctuation will be executed, the processing of C5304 and C5305 is skipped, and the process shifts to the processing of C5306. In this case, since the constant monitoring flag 223oc is not set to off, the continuous monitoring effect setting process (C4152) is continuously executed.

In the 19th embodiment, as described above with reference to FIGS. 447 and 448, a period effect (series) in which the period from the execution of the normal map fluctuation to the execution of the jackpot game is used to have a relationship. When executing the effect), the previous game content (length of the special figure 2 waiting period) is predicted at multiple timings (normal figure fluctuation start timing, game start timing per normal figure), and the effect is produced based on the prediction result. It is configured to set the aspect. Then, at each prediction timing, only when it is determined that the prediction is unpredictable, the constantly monitoring effect setting process (C4152) is executed, and it is always monitored whether the special figure change is executed during the game per normal figure. It is composed.

With this configuration, it is possible to collectively set the production mode of the series of effects for the range in which the previous game content (length of the waiting period in Special Figure 2) can be predicted in advance. It is possible to simplify the process for setting the effect mode. Further, since the process for predicting the content of the previous game can be executed at a plurality of timings, the prediction accuracy can be improved. Further, when the previous game content cannot be predicted at a plurality of prediction timings, the production mode of the series production is executed based on the actual game content, so that the production of the series production is performed. The aspect can be set reliably.

Returning to FIG. 454, the description will be continued. In the processing of C5301, if it is determined that the variation pattern command corresponding to the special figure 1 variation has not been received (it is not the start of the special figure 1 variation) (C5301: No), then the variation corresponding to the special figure 2 variation. When it is determined whether the pattern command has been received (whether it is the start of the special 2 variation) (C5306) and when it is determined that the variation pattern command corresponding to the special figure 2 variation has been received (it is the start of the special 2 variation). (C5306: Yes) Since the special figure 2 change is executed during the game per normal figure, as described above with reference to FIG. 448, even during the game per normal figure, the special figure 2 change period occurs. Scenario 3 is set as the corresponding production mode of the series of effects (C5307), the constant monitoring flag 223oc is set to off (C5308), the special 2 variation command for display is set (C5309), and then the process proceeds to C5310. do.

The above-mentioned processing of C5307 is a case where a series of effects is executed based on the normal map fluctuation, and is executed at the first prediction process executed at the normal map fluctuation start timing and at the game start timing per normal map. In any of the second prediction processes, the special figure 2 waiting period cannot be predicted, and the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed during the period during which the effect setting process is being constantly monitored during the game per normal figure. It is done when That is, it is a case where the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed without predicting the special figure 2 waiting period. In this way, when the special figure 2 variation is executed in a state where the special figure 2 waiting period cannot be predicted, the effect mode corresponding to the special figure 2 variation period is set in the process of C5307. Therefore, even if the previous game content cannot be predicted at a plurality of prediction timings, the series of effects is configured to execute the effect mode of the series of effects based on the actual game contents. The effect mode can be set reliably.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of C5306 that the fluctuation of the special figure 2 has not started (C5306: No), the process proceeds to the processing of C5310. In the processing of C5310, processing corresponding to other commands is executed (C5310), and then this processing is terminated.

Next, the contents of the variation effect setting process 19 (C4167) will be described with reference to FIG. 455. FIG. 455 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation effect setting process 19 (C4167) executed in the 19th embodiment. This variation effect setting process 19 (C4167) is a series effect prediction setting process (first) for predicting the content of the subsequent game and setting the series effect when the condition for executing the series effect of the normal map variation is satisfied. 1) It is different from the staging setting process for normal drawing (see FIG. 417) of the 16th embodiment described above in that the prediction process) is executed. Since the other contents are the same as the above-described 16th embodiment staging setting process for normal drawing (see FIG. 417), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the variable staging setting process 19 (C4167), first, the same processes of C4201 to C4206 as the above-described 16th embodiment staging setting process for normal drawing (see FIG. 417) are executed, and in the process of C4206, a pseudo series of staging is performed. If it is determined that the flag 223lj is off (C4206: No), a series of staging prediction setting process is executed (C4251), and then the process proceeds to C4208. The details of this series of staging prediction setting process (C4251) will be described later with reference to FIG. 456. Next, after executing the same processing of C4208 to C4212 as the effect setting processing for normal drawing (see FIG. 417) of the 16th embodiment described above, the non-variable winning flag 223lm is set to off (C4252), and then the present. End the process.

Next, the contents of the series of staging prediction setting processing (C4251) will be described with reference to FIG. 456. FIG. 456 is a flowchart showing the contents of the series of staging prediction setting process (C4251) executed in the 19th embodiment. In this series of staging prediction setting process (C4251), the future game content (special figure 2 waiting period) is predicted (first prediction) at the start of the fluctuation of the normal map, and a series is performed based on the prediction result (first prediction result). The process for setting the effect mode during the period in which the effect is executed is executed, and there are cases where the length of the special figure 2 waiting period is predicted as the first prediction result and cases where it cannot be predicted. , Of the periods in which the series of effects is executed, the process for setting the effect mode is executed for different periods.

In the series of staging prediction setting process (C4251), first, it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation of the normal map is a hit fluctuation (C5401). If it is determined that the current fluctuation in the normal map is not a hit fluctuation (C5401: No), the condition for executing the series of effects is not satisfied, and the present processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current fluctuation of the normal map is a hit fluctuation (C5401: Yes), the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter (special figure 1 fluctuation time counter) 223ln is read out (C5402), and the special figure fluctuation time counter is read. It is determined whether the value of 223ln is larger than 0 (C5403).

In the process of C5403, when it is determined that the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223ln is 0, that is, it is determined that the current state is not during the special figure 1 fluctuation (C5403: No), the present process is terminated as it is. That is, in the present embodiment, the conditions for executing the series of effects when the fluctuation per normal figure is executed, specifically, as shown in FIG. 455, the gaming state is the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol). , Normal symbol low probability state), this time the normal map fluctuation time is 30 seconds or more, the series production counter 223ga is set to off, the non-variable winning flag 223lm is set to off, and the pseudo series Even if the effect flag 223lj is set to off and the condition that is satisfied when the current fluctuation of the normal map is a fluctuation per normal map is satisfied as shown in FIG. 456. If the special figure 1 variation is not executed at the time when this process is executed, the series of effects is not executed (set).

With this configuration, it is possible to set whether or not to execute a series of effects that can be executed based on the fluctuations per normal figure, depending on the execution status of the special symbol fluctuations (special figure 1 fluctuations). In, it is possible to prevent a player who is performing a game in which a right-handed game is executed and only a normal figure fluctuation is executed from executing a series of effects.

In the processing of C5403, when it is determined that the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223ln is larger than 0 (C5403: Yes), that is, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation is in progress, the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223ln is determined. The remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is calculated based on (C5404), and the current normal map fluctuation time and the game time per normal map executed after the end of the current normal map fluctuation are extracted and added up (C5405). In this C5405 process, by adding up the normal map fluctuation time and the normal map game period, the period from the current time (the start point of the normal map fluctuation) to the end of the normal map game (end period per normal map). Is executed.

Then, the special figure 1 residual fluctuation time calculated in the processing of C5404 and the total time (total time per normal figure) calculated in the processing of C5405 are compared (C5406), and the comparison result is the special figure 1. It is determined whether or not the remaining fluctuation time is larger (longer) than the total time per map (C5407). When it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is larger (longer) than the total time per normal figure (C5407: Yes), the game per normal figure is completed by the end of the execution of the special figure 1 change. Therefore, it is possible to predict the special figure 2 waiting period when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 during the game per game. Therefore, with reference to the series of staging scenario table 223ha, a scenario per normal figure is set based on the difference time between the remaining fluctuation time of special figure 1 and the total time per normal figure (special figure 2 waiting period) (C5408), and then the book. End the process.

On the other hand, in the processing of C5407, if it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is shorter than the total time per normal figure (C5407: No), the presence / absence and the length of the special figure 2 waiting period are predicted at the present time. Since this is not possible, scenario 4 per drawing is set (C5409), and then this process is terminated.

As described above, in the 19th embodiment, when the normal map change is executed, the change state of the special symbol (first special symbol) during the game per normal map is predicted, and based on the prediction result. It is configured to set the production mode of a series of productions corresponding to the fluctuation of the general map. That is, when the normal map fluctuation is executed, the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation executed this time, the normal map lottery result, and the game time (maximum time) of the game per normal map are calculated and used as the calculation result. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 change currently being executed ends during the game per normal figure, and the effect mode of a series of effects corresponding to the normal figure change is set based on the determination result. is doing.

With this configuration, for example, the change end timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation during execution is later than the period during which the ball can win the second winning opening 640, that is, the game period (maximum period) per normal figure. In this case, it is possible to predict the timing (length of the waiting period) at which the special figure 2 fluctuation can be executed at the time when the normal figure fluctuation is executed. Thereby, as various effect modes executed during the waiting period, it is possible to set an effect mode based on the length of the waiting period. Therefore, with respect to the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, since the period that can be variably set can be lengthened among the production modes of the series of effects according to the length of the waiting period, the series according to the length of the series of effects. It is possible to facilitate the execution of the production.

In the 19th embodiment described above, similarly to the 16th embodiment described above, as a game per normal figure, a game per short opening (closing period (opening period) is 0.1 seconds, opening period is 0.1 seconds. ) And the game per long opening (closing period (opening period) is 0.1 seconds, first opening period is 1 second, closing period (waiting period) is 1.5 seconds, second opening period is 0.5 seconds) And, because it is configured to be feasible, in the first prediction process (series effect prediction setting process (see C4251 in FIG. 456)) executed at the time of the change in the normal map, the winner was won in this change in the normal map. The hit type per normal figure may be discriminated, and the prediction range of the first prediction (the period during which the ball can win in the second winning opening 640) may be set based on the discriminating result. In addition, the mode of the prediction range corresponding to the type per normal map determined this time (the length and timing of the period during which the ball can win the second winning opening 640), that is, the game mode of the game per normal map to be executed. Based on this, it is determined how easy it is to win the ball in the second winning opening 640 during the game per game, and in the first prediction process, the waiting period (after the ball wins in the second winning opening 640) is determined. If it is not possible to predict the period until the special figure 2 fluctuation based on the winning is executed), the winning difficulty determination means for determining the ease of winning the ball to the second winning opening 640. Based on the determination result of, the effect mode during the fluctuation period of the normal map may be set.

Specifically, a game per game (for example, a game per drawing) determined by the winning difficulty determination means that the winning difficulty is low (it is possible to make the second winning opening 640 win a ball by performing a normal game). When a normal map hit type (for example, a normal map hit A (see FIG. 382 (b))) corresponding to the normal map long open game is set, the effect mode is set during the normal map fluctuation period. , It is difficult to win a prize by setting an effect mode that makes it easy to shift to the next effect mode that is set as a series of effects (even if a normal game is performed, it is difficult to make the second winning opening 640 win a ball). When the type per normal figure (for example, B per normal figure (see FIG. 382 (b))) corresponding to the game per normal figure determined to be (for example, the game per game with the short open of the normal figure) is set, the normal game is set. Figure As an effect mode set during the fluctuation period, it is preferable to set an effect mode that suggests that a series of effects is completed (an effect mode that makes it difficult to shift to the next effect mode set as a series effect). .. In this way, when the waiting period cannot be predicted at the timing when the first prediction process is executed, the effect mode of the effect executed during the normal map fluctuation period is changed based on the type of the game per normal map to be executed. As a result, when the fluctuation of the normal map is started, it is possible to make the player predict whether or not the jackpot game is likely to be executed with the change of the normal map as an opportunity, so that the first prediction process is executed. It is possible to enhance the effect of the effect to be executed when the waiting period cannot be predicted at the timing of the process.

In addition, it corresponds to a game per game (for example, a game per game with a short opening) that is determined to have a high degree of difficulty in winning (it is difficult to make the ball win in the second winning opening 640 even if a normal game is played). When the type of per-figure (for example, B per per-figure (see FIG. 382 (b))) is set, the staging mode corresponding to the series of staging may not be set. With this configuration, the ball cannot be won in the second winning opening 640 during the normal game, and the game for the big hit game (special figure 2 fluctuation, small hit winning, small hit game). It is possible to suppress the execution of a series of effects when it is difficult to progress. In this case, if it is determined that the ball has won a prize in the second winning opening 640 during the game per game, which has a high degree of difficulty in winning, it may be configured to execute a series of effects from the winning timing. 2 When the length of the waiting period (the period until the special figure 2 fluctuation based on this prize is executed) at the time when the ball wins in the winning opening 640 is a predetermined period or more (for example, 30 seconds or more). , It is preferable to use a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) from the time when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 to set the effect mode that is usually set during the normal drawing fluctuation period.

In this way, when a game per game with a high degree of difficulty in winning is executed, the start timing of the series of effects is not the timing of the start of the fluctuation of the normal map, but the timing when the ball wins the second winning opening 640. It is possible to suppress the frequency with which the series of effects ends in the middle of the series of effects even though the series of effects has been executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which one type of per-figure corresponding to a game per per-figure having a low difficulty of winning is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game per per-figure having a low difficulty of winning is supported. Multiple types of per-figure can be set, and the game mode of the per-figure game executed corresponding to each type of per-figure may be different. A game mode of a game per game (game α per game) corresponding to the type α per game is configured so that at least the type α per game and the type β per game can be set as the type per game. As a game mode with a closing period of 0.1 seconds and an opening period of 3 seconds, as a game mode of a game per game (game β per game) corresponding to the type β per game, the closing period is 0.1 seconds. , The game mode of the first opening period 0.1 seconds, the closing period (waiting period) 3 seconds, and the second opening period (2.9 seconds) may be set.

In this case, when a game per game with a low difficulty of winning is executed, the period during which the ball is likely to win in the second winning opening 640 differs depending on the set type of game per game, so that the game starts to fluctuate. In the first prediction process executed at the timing, the period during which the ball is likely to win in the second winning opening 640 is determined based on the type per drawing, and the first prediction process is executed based on the determination result of the determination means. It is good to configure it so that the range of prediction to be made is different. Specifically, when the above-mentioned game per normal figure α is executed, the range of prediction to be executed in the first prediction process is in the range of 0.1 seconds to 3.1 seconds from the start of the game per normal figure ( If the game β per normal figure is executed by setting based on the range of the open period), the range of prediction to be executed in the first prediction process is set from 3.3 seconds to 6.1 from the start of the game per normal figure. It may be configured to be set based on the range of seconds (range of the second opening period).

In this way, the prediction to be executed in the first prediction process is performed by setting the prediction range in association with each other based on the game mode (winning difficulty, setting timing of the winning period) of the game per normal map to be executed. It is possible to narrow the range of. This makes it easier to predict the waiting period in the first prediction process. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the execution of a series of effects and enhance the effect of the effects.

In addition, it is possible to set the type γ per figure as the type per game that corresponds to the game per game with low winning difficulty, and the game per game (game γ per game) corresponding to the type γ per figure. When configured to set a game mode of a closing period of 0.1 seconds, a first opening period of 1.5 seconds, a closing period (waiting period) of 3 seconds, and a second opening period (1.5 seconds). That is, when a game per game in which a plurality of open periods in which a ball can win is set in the second winning opening 640, the first prediction process first corresponds to the second opening period set later. By comparing the range to be performed and the remaining period (remaining fluctuation period) of the special figure 1 fluctuation during execution, it is determined whether the remaining period (remaining fluctuation period) of the special figure 1 fluctuation is later than the second opening period. If it is determined that the elapsed timing of the remaining period (remaining fluctuation period) of the special figure 1 fluctuation is later than the end timing of the second opening period, the special drawing being executed from the end timing of the second opening period. 1 It is configured to set the waiting period up to the end timing of the fluctuation, while it is determined that the elapsed timing of the remaining period (remaining fluctuation period) of the special figure 1 fluctuation is before the end timing of the second opening period. In that case, next, the elapsed timing of the remaining period (remaining fluctuation period) of the special figure 1 fluctuation and the range corresponding to the first opening period are compared.

Then, when it is determined that the elapsed timing of the first opening period is earlier than the elapsed timing of the remaining period (remaining fluctuation period) of the special figure 1 fluctuation, the special figure being executed from the end timing of the first opening period is executed. 1 It is configured to set the waiting period up to the end timing of the fluctuation, while it is determined that the elapsed timing of the first opening period is later than the elapsed timing of the first opening period, that is, the first. 1 If the special figure 1 fluctuation that is being executed is stopped and displayed by the time the opening period elapses, it is assumed that the waiting period could not be predicted in the first prediction process, and the second prediction process described above is executed. It is good to configure it like this.

<20th Embodiment>
Next, the twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 457 to 466. The 20th embodiment is different from the 16th embodiment described above in that the control process for the final variation effect executed in the final variation in the time saving state is different.

In the 16th embodiment described above, the lottery result of the variation and the special figure 2 variation executed after the variation (normally, the time saving state is completed) by using the final variation effect executed in the final variation of the time saving state. It was configured to suggest the pre-discrimination result for the special figure 2 variation) executed in the state where the state is set. With this configuration, when a hit (big hit, small hit) is won by the special figure 2 fluctuation executed after the time saving state ends, it is possible to suggest that fact in the final fluctuation effect.

The twentieth embodiment differs from the above-mentioned sixteenth embodiment in that the process for setting the effect mode of the final variation effect is described in detail. Specifically, when the final change in the time saving state is executed, the effect of the final change effect is produced based on the lottery result of the change and the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 (value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223 lc). It is configured to set the aspect.

Further, when the final fluctuation in the time saving state is a deviation fluctuation, the effect period of the final variation effect is set based on the special figure 2 reserved ball number (value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223 lc). There is. That is, when the final fluctuation in the time-saving state is an out-of-bounds fluctuation, the next special Figure 2 fluctuation (special Figure 2 fluctuation executed during the normal state), which is the suggestion target of the final fluctuation effect, is executed after the fluctuation is completed. Therefore, if the final fluctuation in the time-saving state is an out-of-time fluctuation, the fluctuation period of the special figure 2 fluctuation corresponding to the already acquired special figure 2 hold is made in advance at the start timing of the final fluctuation in the time-saving state. It is configured to set the effect mode (final variation effect).

<About the electrical configuration of the 20th embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the 20th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 457 to 461. The 20th embodiment is different from the 16th embodiment described above in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed, and the other parts are the same. Is. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 457 (a), the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 20th embodiment will be described. FIG. 457 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the twentieth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 457 (a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 20th embodiment has a final variation effect table 222pa and a final variation effect table 222pa with respect to the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 16th embodiment described above. The difference is that the final effect variable setting table 222pb is added, and the other points are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The final variation effect table 222pa is a data table referred to when setting the effect mode of the final variation effect, and is referred to when a variation pattern command corresponding to the final variation in the time saving state (special figure 2 variation) is received. Is to be done. Here, the contents of the final variation effect table 222pa will be described with reference to FIGS. 458 and 459.

FIG. 458 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final variation effect table 222pa. As shown in FIG. 458 (a), the final variation effect table 222pa is referred to when the lottery result of the variation is a hit and the final table 222pa1 for a hit is referred to when the lottery result of the variation is a hit. It has a final table 222ib2 for disengagement.

Here, the production period in the final fluctuation production will be described. In the 20th embodiment, as in the 16th embodiment described above, a "waiting period", a "first period", a "second period", and a "third period" are formed as the effect period of the final variation effect. It is configured so that the effect mode can be set for each period. In the 16th embodiment described above, regardless of the lottery result of the variation (time saving final variation), an effect mode (standby effect) for notifying that the final variation effect starts is set in the "waiting period", and the "waiting effect" is set. In the "first period", an effect mode (acquisition effect) for acquiring a large number of special figure 2 hold is set, and in the "second period", the lottery result of the change and the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold are suggested. An effect mode (mission effect) for performing the mission effect is set, and an effect mode (result effect) for showing the effect result of the mission effect is set in the "third period".

Further, based on the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 when the "waiting period" has elapsed, it is configured to determine whether to execute the acquisition effect or the mission effect as the effect to be executed during the "first period". However, if the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 after the "waiting period" has elapsed is equal to or greater than the predetermined number (if the upper limit number (4)), the mission production is configured to be executed in the "first period". rice field.

On the other hand, in the twentieth embodiment, the effect mode of the final variation effect is set based on the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 at the timing when the time saving final variation (special figure 2 variation) is executed. It is different from the above-mentioned 16th embodiment in that. Further, it differs from the above-described 16th embodiment in that the effect mode of the final variation effect set at the timing when the time-saving final variation (special figure 2 variation) is executed is different based on the lottery result of the variation. is doing. Further, it is different from the above-described 16th embodiment in that a plurality of timings for setting the effect mode of the final variation effect are provided.

First, with reference to FIG. 458 (b), the contents specified in the winning final table 222pa1 of the final variation effect table 222pa will be described. FIG. 458 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the final table 222pa1 for hitting. As shown in FIG. 458 (b), in the winning final table 222pa1, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223 lc (special figure 2 reserved ball number) and the acquired effect counter 223 lf value are obtained. The effect mode set for each effect period of the final variation effect is defined.

Specifically, in the range where the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223 lc is "0" and the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf is "0 to 169", the effect pattern A is set as the effect pattern of the final variation effect. In the range of "170 to 189", the effect pattern B is defined as the effect pattern of the final variation effect, and in the range of "190 to 198", the effect pattern C is defined as the effect pattern of the final variation effect. ing. Further, in the range where the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223 lc is "1, 2" and the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf is "0 to 169", the effect pattern A is defined as the effect pattern of the final variation effect. In the range of "170 to 198", the effect pattern B is defined as the effect pattern of the final variation effect. Further, in the range where the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223 lc is "3" and the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf is "0 to 109", the effect pattern A is defined as the effect pattern of the final variation effect. In the range of "110 to 198", the effect pattern B is defined as the effect pattern of the final variation effect.

Here, the detailed contents of various effect patterns defined in the final table 222pa1 for hitting will be described. The effect pattern A is such that the same final variation effect as that of the 16th embodiment described above is executed, and as described above with reference to FIG. 364, the effect pattern A is set first in the effect period in which the final variation effect is executed. In the waiting period (0th period) to be performed, a "waiting effect (effect a)", which is an effect mode for indicating that the final variation effect is executed, is set, and in the first period after the wait period has elapsed. , The "acquisition effect (effect b)", which is an effect mode for guiding the player to the game method for performing the later game in an advantageous manner (acquiring the special figure 2 hold), is set, and the first period In the second period after the lapse of time, the lottery result of the symbol to be the target of the final fluctuation effect (the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation which is the time saving final fluctuation, the look-ahead result for the special figure 2 hold currently acquired) is The "mission effect (effect c)", which is an effect mode for suggesting, is set, and in the third period after the second period has elapsed, the "mission effect (effect c)" executed during the second period A "result effect (effect d)", which is an effect mode for showing the effect result (lottery result), is set.

The effect pattern B is an effect pattern set when the time-saving final variation is won (big hit, small hit), and is an effect for notifying the player that the player has won the hit as the final variation effect. The mode "special effect 1 (effect e)" is set.

The effect pattern C is an effect mode set when the number of holdings in the special figure 2 when setting the final variation effect is a predetermined number or less (0), and is a waiting period (a standby period) in the effect period of the final variation effect. The "standby effect (a)" is set in the 0th period). When this effect pattern C is set, in order to set the effect mode of the final variation effect (effect mode executed in each of the first period to the third period) again after the end of the waiting period (0th period). Processing (final staging variable processing) is configured to be executed.

The detailed contents of this final effect variable process will be described later, but in the final effect variable process, the number of special figures 2 held during the waiting period (0th period) and at the end of the waiting period (0th period). Special figure 2 A process for setting different production modes according to the number of reservations in each of the first period to the third period is executed.

As described above, in the 20th embodiment, the final variation effect is set at the time of setting the final variation effect (at the start of the time-saving final variation) with respect to the setting method of the final variation effect in the 16th embodiment described above. The point that is configured to set the effect mode and the lottery result (look-ahead result) that is the target of the final variation effect are the lottery result of the variation and the time when the final variation effect is set (at the start of the time saving final variation). ) Is different from the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 hold acquired in) in that it is limited to.

With this configuration, it is possible to change the production mode of the final variation effect executed according to the acquisition status of the special figure 2 hold at the time when the time reduction final variation is executed, so that the time reduction final variation is executed. It is possible to give diversity to the game for acquiring the special figure 2 hold to be executed before (during the time saving state). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, as in the present embodiment, when the effect mode of the final variation effect executed according to the acquisition status of the special figure 2 hold at the time when the time reduction final variation is executed is changed, the time reduction final variation is executed. It is preferable to provide an effect mode that can be set only when the number of reserved special figures 2 acquired at a certain point in time is a specific number (for example, the upper limit number 3). With this configuration, the player can enthusiastically play the game so that the number of holdings in Special Figure 2 becomes a specific number (for example, the upper limit of 3) at the time when the time saving final fluctuation is executed. Can be done.

Since the above-mentioned winning final table 222pa1 is a data table that is referred to when the variation (time saving final variation) is won, execution of the final variation effect set with reference to the winning final table 222pa1. The period is a period corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the time-saving final fluctuation. That is, after the final variation effect set with reference to the winning final table 222pa1 is completed, the winning game corresponding to the lottery result of the variation is executed. In this way, when the time-saving final variation is won, the final variation corresponds to the variation time of the variation without considering the variation time of the special figure 2 variation executed based on the special figure 2 hold. Since the effect mode of the effect can be set collectively, the process for setting the effect mode can be simplified.

As described above, in the hit final table 222pa1 used in the 20th embodiment, the smaller the number of special figure 2 hold (value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223 lc), the easier it is to select the effect pattern C. It is stipulated. That is, the smaller the number of special figure 2 holdings at the time when the time reduction final fluctuation is executed, the more the number of special figure 2 holdings that can be acquired during the waiting period (0th period) can be increased, so that the waiting period (0th period) can be increased. ) Is configured so that it is easy to select the effect pattern C in which the effect mode can be variably set according to the number of reserved special figures 2 acquired in. With this configuration, it is possible to execute different final variation effects when the time-saving final variation is executed in a state where the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is small.

Further, it is stipulated that the larger the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223 lc), the easier it is to select the effect pattern B as the final variation effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to execute the special effect 1 indicating that the winner is won when the time saving final variation is executed in the state where the number of reservations in the special figure 2 is large. Therefore, it is possible to have the player enthusiastically play a game for acquiring the special figure 2 hold number, and it is possible to improve the operation of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 459, the contents of the disengagement final table 222ib2 possessed by the final variation effect table 222pa will be described. FIG. 459 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final table 222ib2 for disengagement. The deviation final table 222ib2 is a data table that is referred to when the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation, which is the time saving final fluctuation, is a deviation, and is reserved and stored during the fluctuation period of the fluctuation. Special Figure 2 Corresponding to Hold It is used to set the effect mode of the final variation effect with the period including the variation time of the variation as the effect period.

In the 20th embodiment, as in the 16th embodiment described above, the lottery result of the variation and the execution after the variation are executed by using the final variation effect executed in the final variation of the time saving state (time saving final variation). It is configured to suggest the pre-discrimination result for the special figure 2 fluctuation (the special figure 2 fluctuation executed in the state where the time saving state is finished and the normal state is set). Then, if the lottery result of the time saving final change is won (big hit, small hit), the winning game is executed after the end of the change, so that the final change effect is performed in the period corresponding to the change period of the change. It is configured to be executed.

On the other hand, if the lottery result of the time saving final change is out of order, the special figure 2 change corresponding to the special figure 2 hold stored after the end of the change is executed. In the present embodiment, the final variation effect is executed including the variation period of the special figure 2 variation that is reserved and stored at the time when the time saving final variation is completed.

As shown in FIG. 459, the final table 222ib2 for removal includes the special figure 2 hold number (value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223 lc), the look-ahead result for the special figure 2 hold, and the acquired effect counter 223 lf value. The production mode of the final variation effect is defined according to. In addition, as the effect period in which the final variation effect is executed, the variation period of the time reduction final variation and the time reduction state (low probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) are terminated, and the normal state (low probability of the special symbol) is completed. The fluctuation period of the special figure 2 fluctuation (the special figure 2 fluctuation corresponding to the special figure 2 hold acquired during the time saving state) executed in the state (low probability state of the normal symbol) is specified.

Then, at the execution timing of the time-saving final variation, the effect mode of the final variation effect is set even for the variation period of the special figure 2 variation executed in response to the already acquired special figure 2 hold number. is doing. With this configuration, it is possible to collectively set the effect mode (final variation effect) of the effect (final variation effect) that is executed across a plurality of special figure variations (special figure 2 variation), so that each special figure variation can be set. It is possible to simplify the process for setting the effect mode as compared with the case where the effect mode of the final variation effect is set each time.

Further, in the present embodiment, when there is winning information indicating a winning in the special figure 2 hold acquired at the time of setting the effect mode of the final variation effect (when the pre-reading result is a winning), the winning information is obtained. When there is no winning information indicating winning (when the look-ahead result is out of order), the execution content (whether or not to execute, the period of execution) of the acquisition effect executed during the final variation effect is configured to be different. If there is winning information indicating winning in the special figure 2 hold that has already been acquired (when the look-ahead result is winning), it is more difficult to execute the acquisition effect than in other cases. Alternatively, even if it is executed, the execution period is configured to be short.

With this configuration, the player can predict the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold according to the effect mode of the variation effect executed as the final variation effect, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In addition, the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 hold that has been acquired at the time when the time saving state can be terminated, that is, the special figure 2 fluctuation corresponding to the time saving final change is an out-of-time change and the time saving final change is executed is Other than that, the effect mode (acquisition effect (effect b)) for increasing the number of executions of the advantageous game (special figure 2 lottery in the normal state) executed after the time saving state ends in the out-of-time state. It is possible to emphasize compared to the case of. Therefore, it is possible to easily increase the number of executions of the advantageous game executed after the time saving state is completed.

Here, when the contents specified in the final table 222ib2 for disconnection are specifically described with reference to FIG. 459, the special figure 2 hold number (value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223 lc) is 0. When the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf is in the range of "0 to 159", "effect a" is set in the waiting period, "effect b" is set in the first period, and "effect c" is set in the second period. The production data is specified. Further, when the special figure 2 hold number (value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223 lc) is 0 and the acquired effect counter 223 lf value is in the range of "160 to 179", the waiting period and the first The effect data in which the "effect b" is set in the first period and the "effect c" is set in the second period is defined. Further, when the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf is in the range of "180 to 198", the effect data in which "effect a" is set in the waiting period is defined.

In addition, in the final table 222ib2 for the main deviation, the effect mode to be executed in the final effect period of the final variation effect at the present time is not set (in FIG. 459, "○" is displayed as a display mode indicating that the setting has not been made). It is configured in. In other words, if the special figure lottery result (look-ahead result) that can be grasped at the execution timing of the time reduction final change does not include a hit, the special figure 2 corresponding to the special figure 2 hold acquired after the execution timing of the time reduction final change The fluctuation may be executed after the special figure 2 fluctuation that is the target of the look-ahead processing at the execution timing of the time-saving final fluctuation.

In this way, when it is necessary to change the effect result (effect mode) of the final variation effect according to the lottery result of the special figure variation that can be executed in the period from the execution of the final variation effect to the end of the final variation effect. Is configured so that the effect mode of the final variation effect can be variably set at a timing other than the execution timing of the time-saving final variation. Therefore, the final variation effect can be executed in various effect modes.

Returning to FIG. 459, the description will be continued. When the special figure 2 hold number (value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223 lc) is 1, the winning information indicating the winning is included in the special figure 2 hold, and it is "there is a hold in hold", that is, , The special figure 2 variation executed this time (the last special figure 2 variation in the time saving state) is an out-of-bounds variation, and the special figure 2 variation executed next (the special figure 2 variation executed first after the normal state is set). ) Is a hit fluctuation, regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf (corresponding to the entire range from 0 to 198), "effect a" is displayed in the waiting period and "effect b" is displayed in the first period. , "Staging c" in the second period, in the third period, and in the fluctuation period (communication 1) of the first special figure 2 fluctuation (hereinafter referred to as normal special figure 2 fluctuation 1) after the normal state is set. The effect data for which the "effect d" is set is defined.

On the other hand, the special figure 2 hold number (value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223 lc) is 1, and the winning information indicating the winning is not included in the special figure 2 hold, and it is "no hold inside hit". In other words, the special figure 2 variation executed this time (the last special figure 2 variation in the time saving state) is an out-of-bounds variation, and the special figure 2 variation executed next (the first execution after the normal state is set). If the value of the acquired staging counter 223 lf is in the range of "0 to 189", "staging a" is set in the waiting period and "staging b" is set in the first period. , "Direction c" is set in the second period, and "Continuous effect (effect f)" is set as a display mode for delaying the display of the effect result of "effect c (mission effect)" in the third period. The staging data to be performed is specified.

Here, the above-mentioned "continuous effect" is an effect mode displayed after the mission effect (see FIG. 374 (b)) is executed, and is an effect mode showing the effect result of the mission effect (FIG. 375 (FIG. 375). a)), that is, an effect mode executed when the period until the result effect (effect d) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is extended.

The detailed display contents will be omitted, but for example, when the effect mode shown in FIG. 374 (b) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 as a mission effect, the falling rock 873 falls. By slowing down, the period until the effect result (success or failure) of the mission effect being executed is displayed can be extended, or the mission effect can be continued as the effect result of the mission effect being executed (success or failure). It is configured to display a display mode (for example, the characters "continue!") To indicate that the second mission effect is executed), and multiple mission effects can be performed in one final variation effect. As the effect result of the mission effect, an effect mode is set such as executing a pseudo result display effect that temporarily displays a display mode suggesting an effect result different from the actual effect result.

In this way, by configuring to execute the "continuous effect" as the final variation effect, for example, after the final variation effect is executed, the special figure 2 hold is acquired and the execution period of the running final variation effect is executed. In the case of extending, the effect period of the final variation effect can be extended without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Next, the special figure 2 hold number (value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223 lc) is 2, and the winning information indicating the winning is included in the special figure 2 hold (“Yes” in the hold). That is, the special figure 2 fluctuation executed this time (the last special figure 2 fluctuation in the time saving state) is an out-of-bounds fluctuation, and the special figure fluctuation corresponding to at least one of the two acquired special figure 2 hold is In the case of a hit fluctuation, regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf (corresponding to the entire range from 0 to 198), "effect a" is set in the waiting period, and "directed b" is set in the first period. In the 2nd period, the "staging c" is the 3rd period, and the fluctuation period of the first special figure 2 fluctuation (hereinafter referred to as the normal special figure 2 fluctuation 1) after the normal state is set (through 1), 2 Of the fluctuation period (through 2) of the second special figure 2 fluctuation (hereinafter referred to as normal special figure 2 fluctuation 2), the production data in which "effect d" is set is defined in the period until the hit variation ends. ing.

On the other hand, the special figure 2 hold number (value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223 lc) is 2, and the winning information indicating the winning is not included in the special figure 2 hold, and it is "no hold inside hit". In other words, the special figure 2 variation executed this time (the last special figure 2 variation in the time saving state) is an out-of-bounds variation, and the special figure 2 variation executed next (the first execution after the normal state is set). If the value of the acquired staging counter 223 lf is in the range of "0 to 189", "staging a" is set in the waiting period and "staging b" is set in the first period. , "Direction c" is set in the second period, and "Continuous effect (effect f)" is set as a display mode for delaying the display of the effect result of "effect c (mission effect)" in the third period. The staging data to be performed is specified.

Next, the special figure 2 hold number (value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223 lc) is 3, and the winning information indicating the winning is included in the special figure 2 hold (“Yes” in the hold). That is, the special figure 2 fluctuation executed this time (the last special figure 2 fluctuation in the time saving state) is an out-of-bounds fluctuation, and the special figure fluctuation corresponding to at least one of the three acquired special figure 2 reservations is In the case of a hit fluctuation, regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf (corresponding to the entire range from 0 to 198), "effect a" is set in the waiting period, and "directed b" is set in the first period. "Direction c" is set in the 2nd period, and "Production d" is set in the 3rd period and the period until the hit fluctuation ends among the 1st variable period, the 2nd variable period, and the 3rd variable period. The data is specified.

Further, when the special figure 2 hold number (value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223 lc) is 3, and the winning information indicating the winning is not included in the special figure 2 hold (“none” in the hold). That is, when the special figure 2 fluctuation executed this time (the last special figure 2 change in the time saving state) is an out-of-bounds fluctuation, and all the special figure 2 fluctuations corresponding to the three acquired special figure 2 hold are out-of-bounds fluctuations. Regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf (corresponding to the entire range of 0 to 198), the effect data in which "effect a" is set in the waiting period is specified.

Returning to FIG. 457 (a), the description will be continued. The final effect variable setting table 222pb is a data table used for selecting the effect mode of the final variation effect executed in the final variation (special figure 2 variation) in the time saving state, and the effect mode of the final variation effect is described. When setting using the final variation effect table 222pa, if there is an effect period (unset period) in which the effect mode is not set, the effect mode is set for the unset period during the execution of the final variation effect. It is used for. Specifically, in the final variation effect update process 20 (C4566 in FIG. 466), it is determined that the waiting period (0th period) has ended (C4863: Yes in FIG. 466), and the effect variable flag 223pc is set to ON. It is referred to when it is determined to be (C4864: Yes in FIG. 466), that is, when there is an effect period (unset period) in which the effect mode is not set (see C4865 in FIG. 466).

Here, the contents of the final effect variable setting table 222pb will be described with reference to FIGS. 460 and 461. FIG. 460 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final effect variable setting table 222pb. As shown in FIG. 460 (a), the final effect variable setting table 222pb is the hit setting table 222pb1 that is referred to when the special figure 2 variation (time saving final variation) during execution is a hit variation, and is being executed. It has a setting table 222pb2 for deviation, which is referred to when the variation of special figure 2 (final variation of time reduction) is an deviation variation, and according to the lottery result of the variation of special figure 2 (final variation of time reduction) being executed. , It is configured so that different production modes are set. Further, although a detailed explanation will be described later, if the elements referred to when setting the staging mode are different depending on whether the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation (time saving final fluctuation) being executed is a hit or a miss. I'm letting you.

With this configuration, the player can set the effect mode set as the final variation effect according to the actual game content (special figure lottery result and increase in the number of reserved balls). It is possible to be interested in the production content of the final fluctuation production performed on the subject.

Next, the contents of the hit setting table 222pb1 will be described with reference to FIG. 460 (b). FIG. 460 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit setting table 222pb1. As shown in FIG. 460 (b), the hit setting table 222pb1 has the value of the hold number increase counter 223pa, that is, during the period from the execution of the final variation effect to the end of the waiting period (0th period). Different production modes are defined based on the acquired number of reserved special figures 2 and the acquired value of the effect counter 223 lf.

Specifically, when the value of the hold number increase counter 223pa is "0,1" and the value of the acquired effect counter 223lf is in the range of "0 to 198", "effect b" in the first period. It is stipulated that "effect c" is set in the second period and "effect d" is set in the third period. It should be noted that an unset period in which the effect mode is not set at the time of executing the final variation effect without setting a new effect mode for the period in which the effect mode is already set at the time of executing the final variation effect (Fig. The effect mode is set with reference to this table only for the period indicated by “◯” in 458 (b).

Next, when the value of the hold number increase counter 223pa is "2" and the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf is in the range of "0 to 149", "effect b" is set in the first period and "effect b" is set in the second period. It is stipulated that "effect c" and "effect d" are set in the third period, and if it is in the range of "150 to 198", it is being executed in the first period, the second period, and the third period. "Special effect 2 (effect g)" is set, which is a high expectation notification mode to show that the effect result of the final variation effect is likely to be the effect result indicating the winning of the special symbol (special figure 2). It is stipulated to do.

The above-mentioned "special effect 2 (effect g)" is an effect mode in which an effect different from the mission effect (see FIG. 374 (b)) normally executed as the final variation effect is executed, and is described in detail. Will be described later, but the selection ratio is specified so that the effect result of this final variation effect is more likely to be the effect result indicating winning than the mission effect is executed.

The detailed display contents of this "special effect 2" will be omitted, but for example, after the standby effect is executed, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 becomes dark, and the effect result indicating winning is obtained. A certain hit display mode (display mode imitating the letter "V") and a miss display mode (display mode imitating a "cross mark"), which is an effect result indicating a missed win, are displayed and are displayed until the end. An effect is executed in which the display mode is the effect result of the final variation effect. In this way, by notifying the player in an easy-to-understand manner that an unusual effect will be executed immediately after the waiting period ends, the player is expected to win the effect. You can watch it.

The production content of the "special production 2" is not limited to the above-mentioned content, and for example, according to the example shown in FIG. 374 (a), as a type of ally characters (851a to 851d) used for the mission production. , A character that is not displayed in the small display area Dm21 (for example, a character that imitates a whale) may be set so that a mission effect different from the usual one is executed, or the same ally character (851a to 851d) may be used to perform an effect in which a special mission is executed.

With this configuration, the image data used in a normal mission effect can be diverted as a part of the image data of the effect executed as the "special effect 2", so that the image data capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be used. Can be reduced.

Next, when the value of the hold number increase counter 223pa is "3" and the value of the acquired effect counter 223lf is in the range of "0 to 119", "effect b" is set in the first period and "effect b" is set in the second period. It is stipulated that "effect c" and "effect d" are set in the third period, and in the case of the range of "120 to 198", "effect g" is set in the first period, the second period, and the third period. Is specified to be set.

Finally, when the value of the hold number increase counter 223pa is "4" and the value of the acquired effect counter 223lf is in the range of "0 to 149", "in the first period, the second period, and the third period". It is stipulated to set "effect g", and if it is in the range of "150 to 198", the effect result of the final variable effect being executed is a special symbol (in the first period, the second period, and the third period). It is stipulated to set "special effect 3 (effect h)" which is a definite notification mode for notifying that the effect result indicating the winning of the special figure 2) is obtained.

The above-mentioned "special effect 3 (effect h)" is an effect different from the mission effect (see FIG. 374 (b)) normally executed as the final variation effect, and is a time-saving final variation (see FIG. 374 (b)). It is executed only when the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation) is a hit. The detailed display contents of this "special effect 3" will be omitted, but for example, after the standby effect is executed, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 becomes dark, and the effect result indicating winning is obtained. An effect of displaying a certain hit display mode (display mode imitating the letter "V") is executed. In this way, immediately after the waiting period for the final variation effect ends, the player can be made to prepare his / her mind for the winning game by notifying the player of the winning. Further, by making the display mode at the start of the special effect 2 and the display mode at the start of the special effect 3 the same (a mode in which the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is darkened (blacked out)), the player On the other hand, it is possible to notify in advance that the final variation effect of this time is the special effect 2 or the special effect 3. As a result, the player pays close attention to the final variation effect while expecting that the special effect 3 is executed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the 20th embodiment, as a privilege given to the player when the effect corresponding to the special effect 3 is executed, the effect result of the final variation effect is notified before the end of the final variation effect. Although it is configured to give a privilege, it may be configured to give a privilege other than that, for example, based on the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold acquired at the timing when the special effect 3 is set. It may be configured to give a privilege of notifying the player of the number of times of winning. Specifically, when there are two special figure 2 hold in which the look-ahead result is won out of the four special figure 2 hold, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used as the effect mode of the special effect 3. Is darkened, and an effect of displaying a plurality of hit display modes (display modes imitating the character "V"), which is an effect result indicating winning, is executed, and finally, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The number of displayed winning display modes may be configured to indicate the number of times a winning is won. In this way, as a special effect (special effect 3) that is executed when the special effect condition is satisfied, the player is given the first privilege (notification of winning) based on the execution of the special effect. However, even after the first privilege is granted, the second privilege (notification of the number of winnings) that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege can be granted after the first privilege is granted. It is possible to make the player interested in the effect content of the special effect (special effect 3) executed for the player, and to enhance the effect of the effect.

Next, see FIG. 461. The contents of the disconnection setting table 222pb2 will be described. FIG. 461 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the detachment setting table 222pb2. This disengagement setting table 222pb2 is a case where the disengagement final table 222ib2 is used when setting the final variation effect to be executed in response to the final variation (special figure 2 variation) in the time saving state (see C4364 in FIG. 465). ), Which is a data table used for setting the effect mode for the unset period (the period indicated by “◯” in FIG. 459) in which the effect mode is not set, and is the final variation effect update process 20 (FIG. 466). (Refer to C4566), it is referred to when it is determined that it is the end timing of the waiting period (0th period) (C4863: Yes in FIG. 466) (see C4865 in FIG. 466).

As shown in FIG. 461, the value of the hold ball number increase counter 223ia (the number of special figure 2 holds acquired during the waiting period) and the presence / absence of additional hits (acquired during the waiting period) are shown in the disconnection setting table 222pb2. Special figure 2 Whether or not there is a win based on the pre-reading result of hold), the setting status of the hold upper limit flag 223 ls, and the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf, it is set for each effect period of the final variation effect. The production mode is specified.

When the final variation effect executed in response to the final variation (variation in Special Figure 2) in the time-saving state is set using the final table 222ib2 for disconnection (see C4364 in FIG. 465), the effect mode has already been set. It is configured so that the effect mode is set by referring to the disengagement setting table 222pb2 only for the unset period without setting a new effect mode for the effect period.

Next, the contents specified in the disconnection setting table 222pb2 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 461. First, when the value of the hold ball number increase counter 223ia is "0", that is, when a new special figure 2 hold is not acquired during the waiting period, the presence / absence of an additional hit and the setting status of the hold upper limit flag 223 ls. Regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf, various effect modes are set such that "effect b" is set in the first period, "effect c" is set in the second period, and "effect d" is set in the third to fourth periods. Is stipulated. That is, since there is no change between the time when the final variation effect is started and the number of holdings in the special figure 2, the effect indicating the deviation is shown as the final result effect (effect d) without setting a dedicated effect mode. The result is set.

Next, when the value of the hold ball number increase counter 223ia is "1", the additional hit is "Yes", and the hold upper limit flag 223 ls is set to ON, that is, the special figure 2 at the start of the final variation effect. When the number of holds is 3 and the look-ahead results of the acquired special figure 2 hold (3 pieces) are all out of order, and the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold newly acquired during the waiting period is a hit. In the range where the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf is "0 to 169", various effects are set so that "effect c" is set in the first period and the second period, and "effect d" is set in the third to fourth periods. Aspects are defined. That is, since the hold upper limit flag 223 ls is set to on at the end of the waiting period, it is stipulated not to execute the acquisition effect (effect b) for causing the player to acquire a new special figure 2 hold. Has been done. With this configuration, a useless effect (acquisition effect that causes the player to perform a game in which the special figure 2 hold is acquired even though the number of special figure 2 hold has reached the upper limit) is provided to the player. It can be suppressed that it is done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust in the content of the effect to be executed and reducing the effect of the effect. Further, in the range where the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf is "170 to 198", various effect modes are defined so that "effect g" is set in the first period, the second period, and the third to fourth periods. ing.

When the value of the holding ball number increase counter 223ia is "1" and the additional hit is "none", the first is irrespective of the setting status of the holding upper limit flag 223ls and the range of the value of the acquired effect counter 223lf. Various production modes are defined so that "effect b" is set in the period, "effect c" is set in the second period, and "effect d" is set in the third to fourth periods. That is, one new special figure 2 hold is acquired at the time when the final variation effect is started, and if the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 hold is out of order, a dedicated effect mode is set. As the final result effect (effect d), an effect result indicating a deviation is set.

Next, when the value of the hold ball number increase counter 223ia is "2", the additional hit is "Yes", and the hold upper limit flag 223 ls is set to ON, that is, the special figure 2 at the start of the final variation effect. In a state where the number of holds is 2 and the look-ahead results of the acquired special figure 2 hold (2 pieces) are both out of order, at least as the look-ahead result of the two special figure 2 hold newly acquired during the waiting period. If the look-ahead result of any of the special figure 2 hold is a hit, "directing c" in the first period and the second period, and "directing" in the third to fourth periods, regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf. Various production modes are specified so as to set "d". That is, since the hold upper limit flag 223 ls is set to on at the end of the waiting period, it is stipulated not to execute the acquisition effect (effect b) for causing the player to acquire a new special figure 2 hold. Has been done.

With this configuration, a useless effect (acquisition effect that causes the player to perform a game in which the special figure 2 hold is acquired even though the number of special figure 2 hold has reached the upper limit) is provided to the player. It can be suppressed that it is done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust in the content of the effect to be executed and reducing the effect of the effect.

On the other hand, when the value of the hold ball number increase counter 223ia is "2", the additional hit is "none", and the hold upper limit flag 223 ls is set to ON, that is, the special figure 2 hold at the start of the final fluctuation effect. In a state where the number is 2 and the pre-reading results of the acquired special figure 2 hold (2 pieces) are both out of order, the look-ahead results of the two newly acquired special figure 2 hold are also out of order during the waiting period. In this case, various production modes are specified so that "effect c" is set in the first period and the second period, and "effect d" is set in the third to fourth periods, regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf. There is. That is, since the hold upper limit flag 223 ls is set to on at the end of the waiting period, it is stipulated not to execute the acquisition effect (effect b) for causing the player to acquire a new special figure 2 hold. Has been done.

Further, when the value of the hold ball number increase counter 223ia is "2", the additional hit is "none", and the hold upper limit flag 223 ls is set to off, that is, the special acquired during the waiting period of the final fluctuation effect. In the state where the look-ahead results of FIG. 2 hold (2 pieces) are both out of order, the look-ahead results of the two special figure 2 hold newly acquired during the waiting period are also out of order, and further, the current special figure 2 hold is out of order. If the number has not reached the upper limit number (4), regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf, "effect b" in the first period, "effect c" in the second period, and the third to fourth periods. Various production modes are specified so as to set "effect d". That is, since the hold upper limit flag 223 ls is set to off at the end of the waiting period, the acquisition effect for having the player newly acquire the special figure 2 hold using the first period (effect b). Is configured to run.

Next, when the value of the holding ball number increase counter 223ia is "3", the additional hit is "Yes", and the holding upper limit flag 223ls is set to ON, the value of the acquired effect counter 223lf is "0 to". In the range of "109", various production modes are defined so that "effect c" is set in the first period and the second period, and "effect d" is set in the third to fourth periods. That is, when the waiting period ends, the acquisition effect (effect b) is executed even though the hold upper limit flag 223 ls is set to ON. In this way, when the effect result indicating winning is displayed as the effect result of the final variation effect, the hold upper limit flag 223 ls is set to on, that is, a new special figure 2 hold is acquired. Even in a state where it cannot be performed, by intentionally configuring the acquisition effect to be executed, it is possible to make a difference between the actual number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 and the effect mode to be executed.

Further, in the twentieth embodiment, the above-mentioned effect (even though the hold upper limit flag 223 ls is set to on, the acquisition effect (acquisition effect) only when the effect result of the final variation effect is the effect result indicating winning. Since the effect b) is configured to be executed, the effect with a difference between the actual number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 and the mode of effect to be executed is executed. , It is possible to notify that the effect result of the final variation effect is the effect result indicating the winning. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to whether or not there is a difference between the actual game content and the performance content to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the value of the holding ball number increase counter 223ia is "3", the additional hit is "Yes", and the holding upper limit flag 223ls is set to ON, the value of the acquired effect counter 223lf is "110 to 198". In the range of "", various production modes are defined so that "effect c" is set in the first period and the second period, and "effect d" is set in the third to fourth periods. That is, since the hold upper limit flag 223 ls is set to on at the end of the waiting period, it is stipulated not to execute the acquisition effect (effect b) for causing the player to acquire a new special figure 2 hold. Has been done.

Next, when the value of the holding ball number increase counter 223ia is "3", the additional hit is "Yes", and the holding upper limit flag 223ls is set to off, regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223lf, Various production modes are defined so that "effect c" is set in the first period and the second period, and "effect d" is set in the third to fourth periods. That is, at the end of the waiting period, the acquisition effect (effect b) is not executed even though the hold upper limit flag 223 ls is set to off. In this way, when the effect result indicating winning is displayed as the effect result of the final variation effect, the hold upper limit flag 223 ls is set to off, that is, it is possible to acquire a new special figure 2 hold. Even if it is possible, by configuring the acquisition effect so as not to be intentionally executed, it is possible to make a difference between the actual number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 and the effect mode to be executed.

Even in this case as well, the effect of the final variation effect is the effect result of winning, because the effect is executed with a difference between the actual number of reserved balls and the effect mode to be executed. It is possible to notify that. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to whether or not there is a difference between the actual game content and the performance content to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When the value of the holding ball number increase counter 223ia is "3", the additional hit is "none", and the holding upper limit flag 223ls is set to ON, that is, the number of holdings in the special figure 2 at the start of the final variation effect is In 2, when the look-ahead results of the two special figure 2 hold (2 pieces) that have already been acquired are out of order, and the look-ahead results of the two newly acquired special figure 2 hold are also out of order during the waiting period. Regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf, various effect modes are defined so that "effect c" is set in the first period and the second period, and "effect d" is set in the third to fourth periods. That is, since the hold upper limit flag 223 ls is set to on at the end of the waiting period, it is stipulated not to execute the acquisition effect (effect b) for causing the player to acquire a new special figure 2 hold. Has been done.

Further, when the value of the hold ball number increase counter 223ia is "3", the additional hit is "none", and the hold upper limit flag 223 ls is set to off, that is, the special acquired during the waiting period of the final fluctuation effect. In the state where the look-ahead results of FIG. 2 hold (2 pieces) are both out of order, the look-ahead results of the two special figure 2 hold newly acquired during the waiting period are also out of order, and further, the current special figure 2 hold is out of order. If the number has not reached the upper limit number (4), regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf, "effect b" in the first period, "effect c" in the second period, and the third to fourth periods. Various production modes are specified so as to set "effect d". That is, since the hold upper limit flag 223 ls is set to off at the end of the waiting period, the acquisition effect for having the player newly acquire the special figure 2 hold using the first period (effect b). Is configured to run.

Finally, when the value of the hold ball number increase counter 223ia is "4", that is, the special figure 2 hold number at the time when the final fluctuation effect is executed is "0", and four special figures 2 are held during the waiting period. When a new hold is acquired, the value of the staging counter 223lf acquired with "Yes" as an additional hit is in the range of "0 to 99", and "1st period, 2nd period, 3rd to 4th period" Various production modes are defined so as to set "effect g", and various production modes are set in the range of "100 to 198" so that "effect h" is set in the first period, the second period, and the third to fourth periods. The mode of production is specified. When the additional hit is "None", "Direction c" is set in the first period and the second period, and "Production d" is set in the third to fourth periods regardless of the acquired value of the effect counter 223 lf. Various production modes are defined as described above. That is, since the hold upper limit flag 223 ls is set to on at the end of the waiting period, it is stipulated not to execute the acquisition effect (effect b) for causing the player to acquire a new special figure 2 hold. Has been done.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 20th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 457 (b). The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 20th embodiment has a hold number increase counter 223pa, a variable period storage area 223pb, and the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 16th embodiment described above. It differs from the effect variable flag 223pc in that it is added, and is the same except for that. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 2 obtained by the hold number increase counter 223pa within a specific period (a waiting period set as a part of the effect period of the final variation effect executed in response to the final variation in the time saving state, and the first period). It is a counter for measuring the number of holds, and the value of the counter is added by 1 every time a new special figure 2 hold is acquired within a specific period. The hold number increase counter 223pa received the prize information command corresponding to the special figure 2 prize in the final prize processing (see C3461 in FIG. 464) executed by the prize information command process 20 (see C3622 in FIG. 463). (C5501: Yes), and when it is determined that the effect variable flag 223pc is set to ON (C5502: Yes), that is, the special acquired during the waiting period in order to set the effect mode of the final variable effect. FIG. 2 When it is necessary to count the number of holds, the counter value is incremented by 1 (see C5503 in FIG. 464).

Then, when it is determined in the final variation effect update process 20 (see C4566 in FIG. 466) that the waiting period has ended (C4863: Yes in FIG. 466), the effect mode corresponding to the counter value is the final effect variable setting table 222pb. (See C4865 in FIG. 466). Further, when it is determined that the first period has ended (C4866: Yes in the figure), the effect extension process is executed in which the variation period of the special figure 2 hold acquired during the final variation effect is set as the effect period of the final variation effect. Therefore, the counter value is referred to (C4868), and then the counter value is reset to the initial value (0).

In this way, by providing a configuration for counting the number of specific reserved memories (for example, special figure 2 reserved) acquired during the specific period (for example, during the waiting period), the specific reserved storage at the end of the specific period is provided. Since it is possible to set the effect mode after the specific period based on not only the number but also the specific number of reserved storages acquired during the specific period, it is possible to set a wide variety of effect modes. In addition, it is possible to provide the player with a new playability of acquiring a large amount of reserved memory within a predetermined period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the present embodiment, a dedicated counter (holding number increase counter 223pa) is configured to count the number of specific holding memories (for example, holding in special figure 2) acquired during the specific period (for example, during the waiting period). However, the method is not limited to this, and for example, a storage means for temporarily storing the reserved storage number at the start of a specific period is provided, and the reserved storage number at the end of the specific period is stored in the storage means. It may be configured to calculate the number of reserved storages acquired during a specific period by comparing with the number of reserved storages.

Further, in the present embodiment, a specific period (for example, a waiting period) for measuring the number of acquisitions of a specific reserved memory (for example, special figure 2 hold) is set within one special figure change period (for example, special figure 2 change). Since it is set to (within a period), the number of reserved memories does not decrease within a specific period, and the configuration is simply to add the number of acquired reserved memories. As a specific period for measuring the number of acquisitions, a period during which the number of acquisitions of a specific reserved memory can be reduced (for example, a period set across a plurality of fluctuations in Special Figure 2) may be set. In this case, as a configuration for counting the number of specific hold storage (for example, special figure 2 hold), a counter value is added by 1 each time a specific hold memory (for example, special figure 2 hold) is acquired, and a specific hold memory is added. It may be configured to subtract 1 from the counter value every time the hold storage decreases (for example, every time the special figure 2 fluctuation using the special figure 2 hold is executed). In addition, in this case, the number of specific reserved storages may be smaller at the end of the specific period than at the start of the specific period. As a configuration for counting the number, it is preferable to set a value larger than the upper limit number that can store a specific reserved memory as the initial value of the counter. With such a configuration, when the counter value is increased or decreased in correspondence with the increase or decrease of the specific reserved storage during the specific period, it is possible to surely prevent the counter value from becoming smaller than 0.

Further, as a specific period for measuring the acquisition number of the specific reserved memory, a period during which the acquisition number of the specific reserved memory can be reduced (for example, a period set across a plurality of special figure 2 fluctuations) is set. In the case of the above-mentioned configuration, the number of specific reserved memories newly acquired within a specific period is simply added, instead of counting the number of specific reserved memories actually increased within a specific period. The configuration may be used.

Further, in the twentieth embodiment, the effect mode after the elapse of the specific period is set based on the increase number of the specific reserved storage (holding in FIG. 2) within the predetermined specific period (within the waiting period). However, the specific period is not limited to this, depending on the game content (lottery result of each symbol, game state, etc.) and the operation content of the player's operation means (for example, frame button 22). It may be configured to be variable, for example, a plurality of non-consecutive periods may be set as a specific period, or the length of one specific period may be variable. In this case, by configuring the player so as not to notify the player of the timing at which the specific period is set, it is difficult for the player to understand at what timing the reserved value is counted. Therefore, it is possible to perform an unexpected effect on the player.

In addition, the specific period should not be set based on the condition that a predetermined deletion condition (for example, a condition that is satisfied when the player performs an operation indicating that the specific period is not set by using the operation means) is satisfied. It may be configured. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the effect in a manner suitable for each player.

The variation period storage area 223pb is a storage area for temporarily storing the effect mode of the final variation effect executed in the final variation in the time reduction state (time reduction final variation). In this variable period storage area 223pb, a waiting period (0th period), a 1st period, a 2nd period, and a 3rd period associated with the final variable period of the time saving state are set, and after the time saving state ends (normal state setting). The first special figure 2 change after the normal state is set, which corresponds to the special figure 2 change (the special figure 2 change based on the special figure 2 hold acquired during the time saving state) executed later). Period), 2 periods (2nd special figure 2 fluctuation period after the normal state is set), 3 periods (3rd special figure 2 fluctuation period after the normal state is set), 4 periods (normal) A storage area corresponding to each period is formed in order to store the effect mode set for each period of the fourth special figure 2 variable period after the state is set.

Then, the information indicating the effect mode of the final variation effect set in the time saving effect setting process 20 (see C4164 in FIG. 465) is stored in the corresponding storage area (see C4365 in FIG. 465), and the final variation effect update process is performed. (Refer to C4566 in FIG. 466), when it is determined to be the end timing of the waiting period (C4863: Yes in FIG. 466), when it is determined to be the set effect mode (C4865) or the end timing of the first period. (C4866: Yes in FIG. 466), the set effect mode is stored in the corresponding storage area (see C4869 in FIG. 466). Then, although not shown, when the final variation effect is completed, the information indicating the effect mode stored in each storage area is cleared.

In this way, when using a configuration in which the effect mode of the period effect executed using the predetermined period can be set at a plurality of timings (timing at which the period effect is started, predetermined timing during the execution of the period effect), the period effect is used. By providing a storage area for storing the set effect mode each time the effect mode is set, it is possible to set a later effect mode based on the content of the previously set effect mode. Become. Therefore, when the effect mode set at a plurality of timings is used to execute the effect effect for one period, it is possible to set the effect mode without a sense of discomfort.

The effect variable flag 223pc is a flag for indicating that there is a period (unset period) in which the effect mode is not set as the effect mode of the final variation effect executed in the final variation of the time reduction state (time reduction final variation). It is set to ON when it is determined that there is an unset period. Specifically, in the time saving effect setting process 20 (see C4164 in FIG. 465), the effect mode of the final variation effect is set (see C4362 and C4364 in FIG. 465), and the unset period in which the effect mode is not set. If it is determined that there is (C4366: Yes in FIG. 465), it is set to on (see C4637 in FIG. 465).

Then, in the final variation effect update process 20 (C4566 in FIG. 466), it is the timing when the waiting period ends (C4863: Yes in FIG. 466) and the timing when the first period ends (C4866: Yes in FIG. 466). That is, when it is determined that the timing is such that the effect mode of the final variation effect can be set, the setting status is determined (C4864, C4867 in FIG. 466), and it is determined that the setting is turned on. , A new effect mode is set for the unset period (C4864, C4867 in FIG. 466). Then, after setting the effect mode for the unset period, it is set to off (see C4871 in FIG. 466).

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the 20th embodiment>
Next, the contents of each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 462 to 466. In the present embodiment, the command determination process 20 (see FIG. 462) is executed instead of the command determination process 16 (see FIG. 406) for the 16th embodiment described above, and the winning information command process 16 (see FIG. 407). The point of executing the prize information command process 20 (see FIG. 463) instead of (see FIG. 464), the point of executing the final prize process (see FIG. 464), and the time saving effect setting process (see FIG. 418). The difference is that the effect setting process 20 (see FIG. 465) is executed and the final variation effect update process 20 (see FIG. 466) is executed instead of the final variation effect update process (see FIG. 423). Other than that, it is the same. The same control processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, regarding the points where the contents of the referenced data table have been changed and the various processing contents that are changed in response to the changes in the contents of the referenced data table, the numerical values have simply been changed, which is technically ideological. Are the same, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the command determination process 20 (C3163) will be described with reference to FIG. 462. FIG. 462 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 20 (C3163) executed in the 20th embodiment.

When the command determination process 20 (C3163) is executed, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 in the above-mentioned processing of C3201 (C3201: Yes), the winning information command processing 20 is executed. (C3262), and this process is terminated. A detailed description of the winning information command processing 20 (C3262) will be described later with reference to FIG. 463. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of C3201 that the winning information command has not been received (C3201: No), the same C3203 to C3209 as the command determination process 16 (see FIG. 406) of the 16th embodiment described above. After executing the process, it is determined whether or not the special 2 hold number (special figure 2 hold number) is the upper limit (C3261). Here, in the process of C3261, it is determined whether the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223 lc is "4" which is the upper limit value.

If it is determined that the special 2 hold number (special figure 2 hold number) is the upper limit in the process of C3261 (C3261: Yes), the hold upper limit flag 223 ls is set to ON (C3262), and then this process is terminated. If it is determined that the special 2 hold number (special figure 2 hold number) is not the upper limit (C3261: No), the process of C3622 is not executed and the present process is terminated.

Further, after executing the same processes of C3210 to C3217 as the command determination process 16 (see FIG. 406) of the 16th embodiment described above, this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the winning information command processing 20 (C3262) will be described with reference to FIG. 463. FIG. 463 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information command processing 20 (C3262) executed in the 20th embodiment. In the prize information command process 20 (C3262), the content of the process executed when it is determined that the time saving final fluctuation flag 223 lk is set to the above-mentioned prize information command process 16 (see FIG. 407). It is different in that it is changed.

When the winning information command processing 20 (C3262) is executed, the same processing of C3401 to C3402 as the winning information command processing 16 (see FIG. 407) of the 16th embodiment described above is executed, and then the processing of C3403 is executed. If it is determined that the time saving final fluctuation flag 223 lk is on in the processing of C3404 (C3404: Yes), the final winning processing is executed (C3461), and the process proceeds to the processing of C3406. The details of this final winning process (C3461) will be described later with reference to FIG. 464.

On the other hand, in the process of C3404, if it is determined that the time saving final fluctuation flag 223 lk is off (C3404: No), the process of C3461 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of C3406. After that, the processes of C3406 and C3407 are executed, and this process is terminated.

Here, the contents of the final winning process (C3461) will be described with reference to FIG. 464. FIG. 464 is a flowchart showing the contents of the final winning process (C3461) executed in the 20th embodiment. In this final winning process (C3461), a ball wins a prize in the second winning opening 640 while the final fluctuation in the time saving state (special figure 2 fluctuation) is being executed, and a new special drawing 2 hold (winning information) is held. The process for setting the effect mode when the winning information command indicating that the winning information has been received is received is executed.

When the final winning process (C3461) is executed, first, it is determined whether the winning information command received this time is a winning information command indicating that the ball has won a prize in the second winning opening 640 (whether there was a special figure 2 winning). (C5501), If it is determined that the winning information command indicating that the ball has won the second winning opening 640 has not been received (not the special figure 2 winning) (C5501: No), this process is terminated as it is. ..

On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning information command indicating that the ball has won the second winning opening 640 has been received (special figure 2 winning) (C5501: Yes), then the effect variable flag 223pc is turned on. (C5502). When it is determined that the effect variable flag 223pc is on (C5502: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the hold number increase counter 223pa (C5503), and the process proceeds to C5504. If it is determined that the effect variable flag 223pc is off (C5502: No), the processing of C5503 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of C5504.

In the process of C5504, the information of the variable period storage area 223pb is read out (C5504), and then it is determined whether or not the current acquisition effect is in progress (C5505). If it is determined that the current acquisition effect is in progress (C5505: Yes), a display command indicating the pending acquisition during the acquisition effect is set (C5506), and then this process is terminated. In the process of C5505, if it is determined that the current acquisition effect is not in progress (C5505: No), a display command indicating hold acquisition is set (C5507), and then this process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the final variation effect can be executed in response to the final variation in the time saving state (special figure 2 variation), and a new special figure 2 hold is held as a part of the final variation effect. It is configured to execute an acquisition effect (see FIG. 373 (b)) for the player to acquire. Then, when the timing when the new special figure 2 hold is acquired (the timing when the prize information command indicating the special figure 2 prize is received) is the execution of the acquisition effect, the dedicated effect is executed. .. With such a configuration, it is possible to have a relationship between the content of the effect being executed and the actual game situation, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect.

In this embodiment, it is determined that the special figure 2 hold is acquired based on the content of the effect being executed at the timing when the new special figure 2 hold is acquired (the timing when the prize information command indicating the special figure 2 prize is received). Although it is configured to have a different effect mode to be shown, other configurations may be used. ) And may be configured to set the effect mode. In this case, for example, a prize determination means indicating that a prize information command indicating a special figure 2 prize has been received, and a remaining time determination for determining the remaining time in a time-reduced state at the time when the prize information command indicating a special figure 2 prize is received. A means and a means are provided, and the remaining period of the time saving state at the time when it is determined that the prize information command indicating the special figure 2 prize is received (there was a special figure 2 prize) by the prize determination means, that is, the special figure 2 hold is set. When the remaining period that can be easily obtained is a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) or more, a display mode (for example, "plus 1") indicating that the number of special figure 2 holds has increased due to the special figure 2 winning. ) Is displayed, and if it is less than the predetermined period, in addition to the display mode indicating that the number of special figure 2 hold has increased due to the special figure 2 prize (for example, the comment of "plus 1"), special figure 2 hold It is preferable to display a display mode (for example, a comment of "barely safe") indicating that the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 has increased in a state where the remaining period during which the above can be easily obtained is small.

With this configuration, it is possible for the player to determine whether or not the timing of acquiring the new special figure 2 hold is a timing with a margin, so that it can be used as a reference for future games. Can be done. Further, in this case, it is preferable to configure the player so as not to notify the player of the remaining period in the time-saving state, that is, the remaining period in which the special figure 2 hold can be easily obtained. As a result, the player determines the remaining period of the time saving state based on the display mode displayed when the special figure 2 hold is acquired, so that the display displayed when the special figure 2 hold is acquired is obtained. The aspect can be watched. In addition, the display mode displayed when the special figure 2 hold is acquired may be configured to be different according to the number of the special figure 2 hold. For example, the number of the acquired special figure 2 hold may be predetermined. When a prize information command indicating a special figure 2 prize is received in a state of a number or less (for example, "2" or less), the remaining period in a time-saving state, that is, the remaining period in which the special figure 2 hold can be easily obtained is predetermined. If it is less than the period (for example, 3 seconds), in addition to the display mode (for example, the comment of "plus 1") indicating that the special figure 2 hold number has increased due to the special figure 2 prize, the special figure 2 hold It may be configured to display a display mode (for example, a comment of "may be severe") suggesting that it is difficult to limit the number of.

In addition, as a method of determining the remaining period of the time saving state, the period until the time saving end condition is satisfied (for example, the period until the final special figure change in the time saving state is completed) is set as the remaining period of the time saving state. Alternatively, the period until the end of the last game per game executed in the time-saving state may be set as the remaining period in the time-saving state.

That is, in the present embodiment, the time saving state ends when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special drawing 2) is 1 time and 5 times) during the time saving state. It is configured to do. Therefore, it is possible to calculate the remaining period until the end of the time saving state based on the number of fluctuations and the fluctuation time of the special symbol. In addition, in the state where the time saving state is set, the fluctuation time of 2 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and further, the ball is easily won in the second winning opening 640. It is structured so that it is easy to win. In addition, the normal symbol is configured so that the game mode is set according to the game state at the time when the lottery is executed and the game state at the time when the game per normal figure is executed. If the time saving state is set when the normal symbol lottery (normal symbol lottery) is executed, the normal symbol lottery and the normal symbol fluctuation time are set as the high probability state of the normal symbol, and the game per normal symbol is executed. If the time saving state is set when is executed, the game is configured to be executed as a high-probability state of a normal symbol. Therefore, even if a player wins a game by a lottery for a game that is executed during the time saving state, it is normal if the normal state is set at the time when the game per game based on the game is executed. The game is executed as a low-probability state of the symbol.

In the present embodiment configured in this way, depending on the fluctuation timing of the special symbol and the fluctuation timing of the normal symbol, it is before the final special symbol variation (special diagram 2 variation) executed during the time saving state is completed. In some cases, the state in which the ball is likely to win in the second winning opening 640 ends. In this case, if the period until the end of the last special figure change (special figure 2 change) executed during the time saving state is determined as the remaining period of the time saving state, the second prize is won within the remaining period. The mouth 640 includes a period in which the ball is not in a state in which it is easy to win a prize, which causes a problem that the player's willingness to play is reduced.

Therefore, when determining the remaining period of the time-saving state, the period until the state in which the ball is likely to win in the second winning opening 640 ends, that is, the period during which the game can be executed per normal figure during the time-saving state is determined. It is good to configure it like this. With this configuration, it is possible to accurately determine the period advantageous to the player (the period in which the state in which the ball is easily won in the second winning opening 640 is easily set) as the remaining period in the time saving state. Therefore, when performing an effect of notifying the remaining period of the time saving state, the accuracy of the notification content can be improved. Further, when determining the remaining period of the time saving state in this way, even after the time saving state is completed and the normal state is set, a period advantageous to the player (the ball is placed in the second winning opening 640). If the period in which it is easy to set a winning state) continues, it is preferable to configure it so that the period until the end of the period is determined as the remaining period in the time-saving state. That is, when the game per normal figure (game per game per long open of the normal figure) executed during the time saving state is executed across the time saving state and the normal state, the game per game (per game long open of the normal figure). It is preferable to configure so that the period until the end of the game) is determined as the remaining period in the time-saving state. As a result, it is possible to accurately determine the period advantageous to the player (the period in which the state in which the ball is likely to win in the second winning opening 640 is easily set), so that the effect of notifying the remaining period in the time saving state is produced. When it is executed, the accuracy of the notification content can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 465, the contents of the time saving effect setting process 20 (C4164) will be described. FIG. 465 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving effect setting process 20 (C4164) executed in the 20th embodiment. This time-saving effect setting process 20 (C4164) is an effect mode in which the special figure 2 variation is executed as the time-saving final variation with respect to the time-saving effect setting process (see FIG. 418) of the 16th embodiment described above. The difference is that the process for setting has been changed.

When the time saving effect setting process 20 (C4164) is executed, the same processes of C4301 and C4302 as those of the time saving effect setting process (see FIG. 418) of the 16th embodiment described above are executed, and then in the process of C4302, When it is determined that the current special figure variation is the time-saving final variation (C4302: Yes), it is determined whether the current special figure 2 variation (time-saving final variation) is a hit variation (C4361). When it is determined that the current special figure 2 variation (time saving final variation) is a hit variation (C4361: Yes), the effect mode is set with reference to the hit final table 222pa1 possessed by the final variation effect table 222pa (C4362). ), Move to the processing of C4365. Further, in the processing of C4301, when it is determined that the current special figure change is not the special figure 2 change (C4301: No), or in the processing of C4302, the current special figure change is not the final change in the time saving state. If it is determined (C4302: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the current special figure 2 fluctuation (time saving final fluctuation) is not a hit fluctuation (a deviation fluctuation) (C4361: No), the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223la (second). The winning information regarding the special symbol (special figure 2) is read out (C4363), the effect mode is set with reference to the final table 222ib2 for deviation of the final variation effect table 222pa (C4364), and the process proceeds to C4365.

In the processing of C4365, the effect content (effect mode) set by the above-mentioned processing of C4362 and the process of C4364 is stored in the corresponding variable period storage area 223pb (C4365), and then whether or not there is an effect unset period. (C4366). If it is determined that there is an effect unset period (C4366: Yes), the effect variable flag 223pc is set to ON (C4637), and then this process is terminated. If it is determined that there is no effect unset period (C4366: No), the process of C4637 is skipped and the present process is terminated as it is.

Here, the contents of the final variation staging update process 20 (C4566) will be described with reference to FIG. 466. FIG. 466 is a flowchart showing the contents of the final variation effect update process 20 (C4566) executed in the 20th embodiment. In the final variation effect update process 20 (C4566), the final variation executed in response to the final variation in the time-saving state updated by the process of C4501 of the effect update process 16 (see C3112 in FIG. 420) in the 16th embodiment. The elapsed period of the effect (elapsed period of the change in Special Figure 2) is determined, and the process based on the determination result is executed.

When the final variation effect update process 20 (C4566) is executed, first, the information of the variation period storage area 223pb is read (C4861), and the read information of the variation period storage area 223pb (the set effect period) and the special figure. The current staging status is extracted based on the value of the fluctuation time counter 223ln (value indicating the fluctuation time of fluctuation in Special Figure 2) (C4862), and then it is determined whether or not the current timing is the end timing of the waiting period. Then, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the waiting period (C4863: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the effect variable flag 223pc is on (C4864). When it is determined that the effect variable flag 223 pc is on (C4864: Yes), the effect mode is set using the final effect variable setting table corresponding to the result of the determination of whether or not the change is true (C4865), and then this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the effect variable flag 223pc is off (C4864: No), the processing of C4865 is skipped and the main processing is terminated as it is.

In the processing of C4863, if it is determined that the current time is not the end timing of the waiting period (C4863: No), then it is determined whether the current time is the end timing of the first period (C4866), and the end timing of the first period is used. If it is determined to be present (C4866: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the effect variable flag 223pc is on (C4867). When it is determined that the effect variable flag 223pc is on (C4867: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the hold number increase counter 223pa is larger than 0 (C4868). When it is determined that the value of the hold number increase counter 223pa is larger than 0 (C4868: Yes), the effect period corresponding to the increase is stored in the variable period storage area 223pb (C4869), and the process proceeds to C4870. If it is determined that the value of the hold number increase counter 223pa is 0 in the processing of C4868 (C4868: No), the processing of C4869 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of C4870.

In the process of C4870, the effect mode of the final period of the effect is set (C4870), the effect variable flag 223pc is set to off (C4871), and the process proceeds to the process of C4872. Further, even when it is determined that the effect variable flag 223pc is off (C4867: No), the process proceeds to the process of C4872. In the process of C4872, the value of the hold number increase counter 223pa is cleared (C4872), and then the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of C4866, when it is determined that the present is not the end timing of the first period (C4866: No), then it is determined whether or not the present is the end timing of the second period (C4873). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the second period (C4873: Yes), it is determined whether a new special 2 hold has been acquired during the second period (C4874), and it is determined whether a new special 2 hold has been acquired. If this is the case (C4874: Yes), the re-read-ahead flag 223lr is set to ON (C4875), and this process ends.

Here, to explain the content of the process executed by C4874, a storage area corresponding to each symbol hold is formed in the winning information storage area 223la, and in the present embodiment, the first special symbol (special symbol) is formed. The number of the storage area for 1), the storage area for the second special symbol (special figure 2), and the storage area for the normal symbol (normal figure) correspond to the upper limit reserved storage number (4 pieces) of each symbol. It is formed. Then, each storage area has been referenced to indicate whether or not the look-ahead information included in the winning information command output from the main control device 110 and the look-ahead result have been referred to when various effects are set by the voice lamp control device 113. It is configured to store information.

That is, in the processing of C4874, whether or not a new special 2 holding is stored in the winning information storage area 223la in addition to the special figure 2 holding (special 2 holding) referred to by the processing of C4806 or C4814 is stored in each storage area. It is determined based on the presence or absence of the stored referenced information, and the look-ahead information is described and referenced in the storage areas (4 pieces) corresponding to the special figure 2 hold (special 2 hold) of the prize information storage area 223la. When it is determined that there is a storage area in which information is not stored, it is determined that there is a new special 2 hold.

Then, by setting the re-read-ahead flag 223lr to ON in the processing of C4875, the special figure 2 is held again as a variation effect corresponding to the next special figure change (the first special figure change after the end of the time reduction). A variable effect based on the look-ahead result of is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of C4874, when it is determined that there is no new special 2 hold (C4874: No), all of the currently acquired special figure 2 hold is pre-read, and the second step is based on the pre-reading result. Since this is the case when the time reduction final variation effect is being executed during the period, a display effect result command indicating the result of the time reduction variation effect is set (C4876), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of C4873 that it is not the end timing of the second period (C4873: No), then a display command corresponding to other update contents is set (C4877), and this process is terminated. In the processing of C4877, the setting of the effect mode based on the elapsed period of the final variation effect, the update setting of the remaining period display mode for indicating the remaining period of the final variation, and the elapsed period display mode for indicating the elapsed period of the final variation. The update setting of the above, the setting of the operation display mode executed based on the operation of the operation means (frame button 22) by the player during the final change, and the like are executed.

As described above, in the 20th embodiment, the stage of the final variation effect is set at the time of setting the final variation effect (at the start of the time-saving final variation), and the final variation is set. The lottery result (look-ahead result) that is the target of the effect is limited to the lottery result of the change and the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold that has been acquired at the time of setting the final change effect (at the start of the time-saving final change). It differs in that it does.

With this configuration, it is possible to change the production mode of the final variation effect executed according to the acquisition status of the special figure 2 hold at the time when the time reduction final variation is executed, so that the time reduction final variation is executed. It is possible to give diversity to the game for acquiring the special figure 2 hold to be executed before (during the time saving state). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, as in the present embodiment, when the effect mode of the final variation effect executed according to the acquisition status of the special figure 2 hold at the time when the time reduction final variation is executed is changed, the time reduction final variation is executed. It is preferable to provide an effect mode that can be set only when the number of reserved special figures 2 acquired at a certain point in time is a specific number (for example, the upper limit number 3). With this configuration, the player can enthusiastically play the game so that the number of holdings in Special Figure 2 becomes a specific number (for example, the upper limit of 3) at the time when the time saving final fluctuation is executed. Can be done.

In the 20th embodiment, the final variation effect described above is started from the timing when the final variation in the time saving state is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the remaining period in the time saving state is a predetermined period. In the case of, for example, the final variation effect may be executed when the number of remaining time reductions is two. Further, in the twentieth embodiment, a configuration for executing the final variation effect using a period for one special figure change in the time saving state and a period for several special figure changes in the normal state will be described. As for the increase / decrease status of the special figure 2 hold number while the final fluctuation effect is being executed, the special figure 2 hold number increases until the special figure change in the time saving state ends, and the special figure 2 hold state is in the normal state. After the start of the figure fluctuation, only the pattern in which the number of holdings in Special Figure 2 decreases has been explained, but as other patterns, for example, the time is shortened during the execution of the game per long opening of the normal figure executed during the time saving state. After the state ends (the final change in the time saving state (special figure 2 change) stops) and the special figure change in the normal state (special figure 2 change) starts, the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. There are cases. In such a case, for example, at the timing of executing the final variation effect, the lottery status of the normal symbol (the winning / failing result of the running normal drawing lottery, the type of the winning game to be executed, and the reserved normal symbol) The figure information (win / fail result, winning game type) is configured to be discriminating, and based on the discriminating result, it is determined whether or not the ball can win the second winning opening 640 after the transition to the normal state, and the determination is made. It may be configured to change the effect mode of the final variation effect based on the result. For example, when it is determined that the ball can (easily) win the second winning opening 640 after the transition to the normal state. Uses a production mode in which the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery based on the winning of the second winning opening 640 after the transition to the normal state and the fluctuation period can be easily reflected in the final fluctuation production (still images that can easily extend the production period). It may be configured to set an effect mode (or an effect mode in which the effect result can be suddenly changed).

Further, when the final variation effect is executed using a plurality of special figure 2 fluctuation periods in the time saving state, the number of remaining time reductions when executing the final variation effect (the number of remaining special figure 2 fluctuations that can be executed during the time reduction state). ), And based on the discrimination result, the maximum number of special figure 2 fluctuations that can be executed during the final variation effect may be calculated, and the effect mode may be set based on the calculation result. .. In this case, the number of special figure 2 fluctuations actually executed during the final fluctuation effect may not be larger than the calculated maximum number, but may be less (for example, the game is stopped during the final variation effect). When the special figure 2 hold becomes 0). Therefore, as the staging mode based on the above-mentioned calculation result, it is preferable to set the staging mode in which the staging effect does not decrease even if the number of fluctuations in the special figure 2 suddenly decreases.

Further, if the special figure 1 change is executed while the final change effect is executed for the special figure 2 change, the final change effect is continued even for the change period of the special figure 1 change. It may be executed, or it may be configured to suspend the final variation effect and execute the effect corresponding to the special figure 1 variation during the interruption period.

<21st Embodiment>
Next, the 21st embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 467 and 468. In the 16th embodiment described above, as described above with reference to FIG. 361, the game (left-handed game) in the case where the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) is set as the game state. ) Is configured to enable the Fuzu lottery, and a suggestion effect (series effect) is executed to suggest that a specific hit (Fuzu long open hit) was won in the Fuzu lottery executed during the normal state. It was configured to do.

Then, a guidance display mode (right-handed display) for allowing the player to win a ball in the second winning opening 640 provided in the right game area according to the execution timing of the game per long opening of the normal figure is displayed (series). (Displayed during the execution of the production) was configured so that the player could easily win the ball in the second winning opening 640 during the game per long opening. Furthermore, while an inappropriate game (for example, a right-handed game during a normal state) is being performed by the player, if the player wins the normal long opening, the above-mentioned suggestion effect and guidance display mode are displayed. Instead, it was configured to make it difficult for the player to win the ball in the second winning opening 640 during the game per the long opening of the Fuzu.

On the other hand, in the 21st embodiment, the ball launched by the left-handed game (the ball flowing down the left side game area) is also on the right while the game is being performed per the long opening of the game by the lottery. The point that the electric accessory 1640a, which is opened during the game, and the second winning opening 1640 are arranged at positions where the ball fired by the hitting game (the ball flowing down the right game area) can also win. Is different.

Furthermore, the proportion of the balls launched by the left-handed game that reach the electric accessory 1640a and the proportion of the balls launched by the right-handed game that reach the electric accessory 1640a are different, and the right The hitting game is configured so that the ball reaches the electric accessory 1640a at a higher rate than the left-handing game.

In addition, in the 21st embodiment, in a part of the case where the Fuzu long opening hit is won during the normal state, the fact that the Fuzu long opening hit is won is not executed rather than the Fuzu long opening hit game is executed. Notification that can be notified to the player before (for example, during the change of the winning normal map or the period from the acquisition of the winning information of the winning normal symbol (normal map) to the execution of the change of the normal map). It is configured to perform the production.

With this configuration, the ease with which the ball can be won in the second winning opening 640 can be made different depending on whether or not the notification effect is executed when the winner is won in the long opening of the Fuzu. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the effect to be performed, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

Further, since the second winning opening 1640 is arranged at a position where the ball fired by the left-handed game can also win, the ball is won in the second winning opening 1640 even when the notification effect is not executed. It becomes possible. Therefore, even when the notification effect is not executed, it is possible to prevent the player from executing an extremely disadvantageous game.

<About the configuration of the pachinko machine of the 21st embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the 21st embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 467. FIG. 467 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the 21st embodiment. In the 21st embodiment, the positions of the configurations arranged in the right game area are different from those of the 16th embodiment described above. Specifically, the through gate 67, the electric accessory 1640a, and the first 2 The arrangement positions of the winning openings 1640 are different.

As shown in FIG. 467, in the game board 13 of the 21st embodiment, a second winning opening 1640 to which an electric accessory 1640a is attached is provided below the first winning opening 64, and a left-handed game is performed by a left-handed game. Both the ball that has flowed down the area and the ball that has flowed down the right-handed game area by the right-handed game are configured to reach the second winning opening 1640.

Specifically, a restricting member (nail) is formed in the area between the first winning opening 64 and the left end side (left side in FIG. 467 front view) of the electric accessory 1640a in the open state (shown in black in FIG. 467). Is planted so that it is difficult for the ball to pass through the area. As a result, among the balls that have flowed down the left game area, only the balls that are guided by the nails planted in the game board 13 and pass through the area above the first winning opening 64 reach the second winning opening 1640. It is composed. In the 21st embodiment, the game board 13 is configured so that the ratio of the balls that reach the second winning opening 1640 among the balls that flow down the left game area is about 10%.

On the other hand, the ball launched by the right-handed game and flowing down the right game area is a ball flow formed on the upper surfaces of the V winning door 650b located in the closed state and the winning door 65b located in the closed state. The game board 13 is configured so that most of them (about 100%) flow down the road and reach the second winning opening 1640.

With this configuration, during the game per long opening, that is, when the ball can win the second winning opening 1640, the ball flowing down the right game area is more than the ball flowing down the left game area. It is easier to make the second winning opening 1640 win a prize. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to select whether to perform a left-handed game or a right-handed game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As shown in FIG. 467, in the present embodiment, in the normal state, the winning opening in which the ball flowing down the right game area can be won (the winning opening in which the player can be given a privilege (prize ball)) is more than the winning opening. It is configured so that the number of winning openings (winning openings that can give a privilege (prize ball, lottery) to a player) that can be won by a ball flowing down the left game area is larger. Specifically, the ball flowing down the right game area can win (pass) through the through gate 67 or the second winning opening 1640, while the ball flowing down the left game area can win (pass) through the gate 67. , The first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 1640, and the general winning opening 63 are configured to be able to win (pass).

With this configuration, in a right-handed game in which the ball is fired toward the right game area in the normal state except for the period when the ball can win in the second winning opening 1640 (the game period per the long opening of the normal figure). However, the left-handed game in which the ball is fired toward the left game area is a more advantageous game method for the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from continuously performing the right-handed game and to perform the left-handed game in the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to provide the fun of predicting when to perform the right-handed game during the normal state.

Further, in the 21st embodiment, the time required for the ball launched by the left-handed game to reach the second winning opening 1640 (left-handed arrival time) is the time required for the ball launched by the right-handed game to win the second prize. It is configured to be longer than the time required to reach the mouth 1640 (right-handed arrival time). Specifically, the left-handed arrival time is about 4 seconds, while the right-handed arrival time is about 3 seconds.

With this configuration, the ball fired by the left-handed game and the ball fired by the right-handed game executed after the left-handed game (for example, one second after the previously executed left-handed game). It is possible to reach the second winning opening 1640 at the same timing as the ball fired by the executed right-handed game).

Therefore, when the game per Fuzu long open is executed, the ball wins the second winning opening 1640 during the game per Fuzu long open depending on the timing of switching the game method from the left-handed game to the right-handed game. Since the ease of playing can be different, the player can be enthusiastically played.

Further, although detailed description is omitted, in the 21st embodiment, the winning game period of the game per long opening of the normal figure is 3 seconds (opening period 1 second, closing period 1.5) as in the 16th embodiment described above. Seconds, opening period 0.5 seconds). That is, if the right-handed game is executed after the normal game is executed, it is difficult for the ball fired by the right-handed game to win the second winning opening 1640, that is, the second winning opening 1640. It is configured so that the game may have ended at the time when the ball reaches the 1640.

As a result, the ball is not fired until the game per Fuzu long opening is executed, and a privilege (second prize opening) is given to the player who plays the ball right after the game per Fuzu long opening is started. Since it is possible to make it difficult to give the privilege (prize ball, special figure 2 lottery) given by winning the ball to 1640, the player can continuously shoot the ball, and the game can be played. Operation can be improved.

As described above, in the 21st embodiment, even if the winning game period of the Fuzu long open per game is set to 3 seconds and the right-handed game is executed after the Fuzu long open per game is started, the right-handed game is executed. It is configured so that it is difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 1640, but it is not limited to this, and the winning game period of the game per long opening of the normal figure is set to the right-handed arrival time (ball fired by the right-handed game). May be configured to be longer than the time required to reach the second winning opening 1640 (for example, 5 seconds (opening period 1 second, closing period 1 second, opening period 3 seconds)). As a result, it is possible for the player to play the game during the game per the long opening of the normal figure with peace of mind.

<Regarding the content of the production in the 21st embodiment>
Next, the content of the characteristic effect executed in the 21st embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 468. In the 21st embodiment using the configuration of the game board 13 described with reference to FIG. 467, it is easy to make the ball win the second winning opening 1640 while the game is being executed per the long opening of the normal figure. Therefore, a guidance notification (for example, right-handed notification) for guiding the game method to the player can be executed, and the player can easily identify the game method as the notification mode of the guidance notification. A first guidance notification mode and a second guidance notification mode in which it is more difficult for the player to identify the game method than the first guidance notification mode can be set.

With this configuration, depending on whether the executed guidance notification mode is the first guidance notification mode or the second guidance notification mode, the ball is placed in the second winning opening during the game per long opening. It is possible to set a state in which it is easy to win a prize in 1640 and a state in which it is difficult to win a prize.

The first guidance notification mode is a notification mode set as a part of the special map fluctuation effect executed in response to the special map fluctuation, and is in the normal map fluctuation that is won for the normal map long opening. It is set when the special figure fluctuation is executed in a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation time of 90 seconds or more is set), and is set on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. When the variation effect corresponding to the specific variation pattern described above is executed, the player can use a part of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the small display area Dm4 of the main display area Dm). A guidance display mode for guiding the game method (for example, a “right-handed” comment) is displayed (see FIG. 366 (b)).

Further, in the 21st embodiment, the normal map fluctuation ends before the game per normal map long opening is executed (for example, during the normal map fluctuation period in which the normal map long opening is won. During the period when the symbol is stopped (confirmed display), or after receiving the winning information command to win the winning information command for the normal symbol long opening, until the game is executed. (During the period of) The first guidance notification mode can be displayed. With this configuration, even if the game is executed according to the display content (for example, "right-handed") of the first guidance notification mode after recognizing that the first guidance notification mode is displayed. It is possible to easily reach the second winning opening 1640, which is in an open state in which the ball is easily won by the game per long opening.

On the other hand, the second guidance notification mode is always displayed when the game per long opening of the normal figure is executed, and is displayed in a display mode that is more difficult for the player to identify than the first guidance notification mode described above. It is a thing. Specifically, a guidance display mode (for example, "right-handed") for guiding the game method to the end of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, which is smaller than the first guidance notification mode displayed in the small display area Dm4. Icon) is displayed.

As described above, in the 21st embodiment, the game board 13 is formed so that the period required for the ball launched by the right-handed game to reach the second winning opening 1640 is about 3 seconds. If a game method (for example, a right-handed game) is performed according to the content of the notification after recognizing the content of the notification in the second guidance notification mode, depending on the flow condition of the ball, the ball may be thrown during the game during the long opening of the normal figure. 2 A state occurs in which the winning opening 1640 cannot be reached.

Therefore, it is possible to have the player enthusiastically play the game in order to win the prize in the long opening of the normal figure in a state where the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is satisfied. In the 21st embodiment, when the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is satisfied and the winning is won, the game is executed based on the winning. The first guidance notification mode is displayed 3 seconds before, and the second guidance notification mode is displayed when the game per long opening of the normal figure is executed. With this configuration, even if the first guidance notification mode is displayed before the game for the long opening of the normal figure is actually executed, the game for the long opening of the normal figure is being executed. It is possible to notify the player in the second guidance notification mode.

In the 21st embodiment, it is set as the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode that the special symbol variation is executed in the variation pattern in which the variation time of 90 seconds or more is set. Without limitation, for example, it may be set as a notification condition that a predetermined operation has been performed on an operation means (for example, a frame button 22) that can be operated by a player, or a transition status of a game state, Specifically, it may be set as a notification condition that the time saving state has ended and the state has shifted to the normal state.

In addition, a flag indicating that the notification condition is satisfied (notification condition establishment flag) is provided, the notification condition establishment flag is set to on when the notification condition is satisfied, and the notification condition establishment flag is set to on during the period. Is configured to be able to display the first guidance notification mode and the second guidance notification mode described above, and is configured to display only the second guidance notification mode when the notification condition establishment flag is set to off. Is also good. In this case, it is preferable to set the notification end condition for setting the notification condition establishment flag set to on to off, and set the notification condition establishment flag to off when the notification end condition is satisfied. ..

Specifically, a predetermined period (the number of times the special figure changes reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, reaches 10 times, or the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes))) after the notification condition establishment flag is set to ON. It may be set so that the notification end condition is satisfied when the notification has elapsed, or the lottery is executed when a predetermined execution opportunity (for example, execution of a special figure lottery, winning of a ball to each winning opening) is satisfied. May be configured so that the notification end condition is satisfied when the predetermined lottery result is obtained.

Furthermore, a plurality of types (for example, A per Fuzu long and B per Fuzu long) are provided for each Fuzu long opening, and notification conditions and notification end conditions are set according to the type of winning Fuzu long opening. By making them different, it may be possible to set a normal map long open hit where the first guidance notification mode is easy to display and a normal map long open hit where it is difficult to display.

Further, the notification condition may be changed based on the game situation of the player. For example, the elapsed period (number of special figure fluctuations, elapsed time) from the previous big hit game (small hit game) satisfies the predetermined condition. In the case (for example, when the number of fluctuations in the special figure reaches the number corresponding to the reciprocal of the jackpot probability), the first guidance notification mode may be displayed without fail when winning the long opening of the normal figure. ..

In addition, a predetermined period after the player shifts from an inappropriate game (for example, a right-handed game performed when a normal state is set (a game state in which a right-handed game is performed (time saving state)) to a normal state. (Excluding))) is being performed, a warning display for modifying the game method to the player (for example, left-handed in the small display area Dm4 of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81). If it is determined that the inappropriate game is being continued even after the comment "Please return" is displayed), the notification condition may not be satisfied.

The technique for displaying the first guidance notification mode and the second guidance notification mode described above is not limited to the 21st embodiment, and may be applied to each of the above-described embodiments, for example. As in the 16th embodiment described above, it may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 in which the game board 13 is formed so that the ball cannot be won in the second winning opening 640 unless the right-handed game is executed. .. In this case, the privilege given to the player differs greatly depending on whether or not the first guidance notification mode is displayed. Therefore, the game for satisfying the notification condition is enthusiastically performed for the player. Can be made.

Further, a notification means for notifying the player of the game method for establishing the notification condition may be provided, for example, in order to establish the notification condition in the sub-display area Ds of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is good to configure it to display the necessary necessary information (for example, give a super reach). Further, it is preferable to share the presence / absence of the display of the necessary information as the suggestion information for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol. With this configuration, when the game according to the display content displayed as necessary information is executed, the notification condition for displaying the first guidance notification mode is satisfied, or the lottery result of the special symbol is determined. Since it is possible to inform the player whether or not a predetermined lottery result (for example, a lottery result indicating a big hit) has been obtained in an incomprehensible manner, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, a notification means capable of notifying the player that the first guidance notification mode can be notified (a state in which the notification condition is satisfied) may be provided. As a result, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Further, in the 21st embodiment, as the guidance notification mode suggesting that the game is executed per the long opening of the normal figure, the player determines the notification content from the first guidance notification mode and the first guidance notification mode. The second guidance notification mode, which is difficult to perform, is configured to be configurable, but in a state where the first guidance notification mode can be notified, a special operation to a further special execution condition (for example, an operation means (frame button 22)) is performed. When the condition) that is satisfied when the above is satisfied, a special guidance notification mode that is more advantageous to the player than the first guidance notification mode may be set.

Here, the special guidance notification mode is a guidance notification mode that notifies the player of the timing of executing a game method (for example, a right-handed game) according to the notification content, and is guided by the guidance notification mode. By executing the game method according to the content of the notification at the same timing, it is possible to make the player play a game in which an advantageous privilege is easily given. As described above, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the 21st embodiment is configured so that both the ball fired by the left-handed game and the ball fired by the right-handed game can reach the second winning opening 1640. It takes about 4 seconds for the ball launched by the left-handed game to reach the second winning opening 1640, and the period required for the ball launched by the right-handed game to reach the second winning opening 1640. Is configured to be about 3 seconds. Then, by operating the operation handle 51, 100 balls can be fired per minute.

Therefore, by changing the game method from the left-handed game to the right-handed game according to the execution timing of the game per long open, the ball fired by the left-handed game and the ball fired by the right-handed game. Is configured so that the second winning opening 640 can be reached at substantially the same timing. The above-mentioned special guidance notification mode is based on the timing at which the game is executed per the long opening of the normal figure, from the game method currently being executed to the player (for example, a left-handed game) to the game method according to the notification content (for example). , Right-handed game) and the timing at which multiple balls can reach the second winning opening 640 at the same time as the ball launch timing of the running game method (for example, left-handed game). The notification mode for notifying the user is set.

With such a configuration, the player will enthusiastically play the game so that a more advantageous guidance / notification mode is displayed, so that the interest of the game can be improved. In the above-mentioned example, when the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is satisfied, the above-mentioned special guidance notification mode can be set, but the first guidance notification mode is not limited to this. Even when the notification condition of is not satisfied, it may be configured so that a special execution condition for setting the special guidance notification mode can be satisfied, and the special execution condition is the first guidance notification. It may be configured so that the notification condition of the mode is satisfied more easily than the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is not satisfied.

In addition, a plurality of conditions are set as notification conditions (execution conditions) for setting various guidance notification modes, and when a predetermined number (for example, two) of the conditions are satisfied, the corresponding guidance notification mode is provided. May be configured to set. Further, the ease of establishing the notification condition (execution condition) for setting various guidance notification modes based on the operation result for the operation means (frame button 22) that can be operated by the player may be different. Each time a person performs a specific operation on the operation means, each notification condition (execution condition) is variably set so that the notification condition (execution condition) for setting various guidance notification modes can be easily established. It may be configured as. As a result, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

As described above, in the 18th embodiment, the game per game is executed, that is, the game per game (game per long opening of the game) that allows a ball to be won in the second winning opening 1640. It is configured to execute a guidance notification (for example, right-handed notification) for notifying the player during the execution of the normal map fluctuation, which is the result of the lottery to be executed, and the game per normal map is started. At the time before (before the fluctuation of the normal map is stopped and displayed), the game method executed by the player is configured to be changed from the left-handed game to the right-handed game, and the game per normal figure is started. The game ball fired by the right-handed game before the game is configured to win a prize in the second winning opening 1640 during the game per opening of the Fuzu long, but it is not limited to this, for example, the Fuzu long. A predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds) is set as the opening period of the open game, and the above-mentioned guidance notification (for example, right-handed notification) is applied to the opening period of the game per long open game (after the game per game is started). , The period until the electric accessory 1640a is opened) may be configured to be executed.

With this configuration, the guidance notification (right-handed notification) can be executed after the winning normal map fluctuation is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), so that the guidance notification (right-handed notification) is executed. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game is not executed per normal figure. In this case as well, as in the 21st embodiment, it is determined whether the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is satisfied, and the first guidance notification mode is set only when it is determined that the notification condition is satisfied. It is preferable to configure it to execute guidance notification. In addition, when it is determined that the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is not satisfied, the effect for showing the lottery result of the normal map lottery is performed by using the normal map fluctuation period and the opening period of the game per normal map. Is executed, and the display mode indicating that the player has won the game as a result of the effect is displayed at the end timing of the opening period of the game per game (the opening operation timing of the electric accessory 640a).

As a result, when the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is not satisfied, it is notified that the electric accessory 640a has been won at the timing when the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed as a game per normal figure. Therefore, even if the player who has identified that he / she has won the prize by the notification plays the right-handed game, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball fired by the right-handed game to win the second winning opening 1640. In the above-mentioned example, when it is determined that the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is not satisfied, the player wins the game at the timing when the opening operation of the electric accessory 1640a is executed as a game per game. An example of notifying this is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the opening period of the game per normal figure, when the remaining period of the opening period is less than a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), the normal figure is used. It may be configured to notify that the winner has been won. In other words, even if a player who recognizes that he / she has won a hit in a normal figure plays a right-handed game, it is difficult to win a ball in the second winning opening 1640 during the game in a normal figure, for example, due to a right-handed game. Rather than the period required for the fired ball to reach the 2nd winning opening 1640, the game per normal drawing ends after notifying that the ball has won the 2nd winning opening 1640 (the ball can be won in the 2nd winning opening 1640). It is advisable to configure it so that the period until the end of the period) is shortened.

Further, based on the fact that the variation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed, if the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is satisfied, until the game per normal figure is executed. In the fluctuation effect corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation in the period, the effect suggesting that the player wins the game is executed, and the effect in which the first guidance notification mode is set is executed during the opening period of the game per game. By fusing the staging mode of the fluctuation effect of the special figure fluctuation and the staging mode of the opening effect of the game per normal figure, the player is notified of the timing to perform the right-handed game. It may be configured as follows.

In addition, the first notification for showing the lottery result of the special map lottery is executed by the special map effect executed based on the special map fluctuation, and the normal map lottery is executed by the normal map effect executed based on the normal map variation. By executing the second notification for showing the lottery result, and further executing the first notification and the second notification in a related manner (continuously or duplicately), the general figure is used. The third notification for indicating the right-handed timing at which the right-handed game is executed to the player may be executed for the hit game.

In addition, the length of the set opening period is different depending on the type of the game per game to be executed, and the game per game in which a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) or more is set as the opening period. , The ease of winning the ball to the second winning opening 640 during the game per game is different from that of the game per game in which a period less than a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) is set as the opening period. Alternatively, when the type of the set guidance notification mode (first guidance notification mode) and the type of the game per game to be executed satisfy a predetermined combination condition, the combination condition is not satisfied. , The guidance notification for facilitating the winning of the ball in the second winning opening 640 may be executed during the game per game. As a result, different benefits for the player (to the second winning opening 640) depending on the type of the game per game to be executed, the type of the set guidance notification mode, and whether or not the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is satisfied. Ease of winning a ball) can be given, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the 17th embodiment, the method of setting the guidance notification mode for facilitating the winning of the ball to the second winning opening 640 during the game per game has been described, but a specific game (for example, the game per game) From a game in which a ball is launched with a single firing intensity (for example, a left-handed game) to a game in which a ball is launched with a predetermined firing intensity different from the one firing intensity (for example, right-handed). Anything that makes it easier to win a ball to a specific winning opening (for example, the second winning opening 640) by changing it to a game), for example, a small hit by a special drawing lottery executed during a left-handed game. As a small hit game executed when a winner is won, a winning opening (for example, a V winning opening) that is opened during the small hit game at a position where a ball fired by a right-handed game can win a prize (for example, the right game area). If the configuration is provided with 650a), the guidance notification mode of the same idea as that of the present embodiment may be set by using the special figure fluctuation period and the opening period of the small hit game.

<About the 22nd embodiment>
Next, the 22nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 469 and 470. FIG. 469 is a front view schematically showing the board surface 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the 22nd embodiment. The board surface 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is different from the board surface 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the 18th embodiment described above in that the configuration of the right gaming area is changed. Since the other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 469, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, the flow velocity of the sphere is reduced in the flow path of the first flow path 701 (the time required for the sphere to pass through the first flow path 701 is delayed). ), And 701z are arranged so that the time required for the ball to pass through the first flow path 701 (ball passing time) is about 4 seconds. An operation gate 670 is provided at the lower end of the flow of the first flow path 701.

Here, the operating gate 670 will be described. In the present embodiment, a start gate 720a composed of a photo sensor capable of detecting the passage of a sphere is arranged. In each of the above-described embodiments, when a jackpot is won by lottery of a special symbol, the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in a display mode indicating the jackpot winning after a special symbol variation (special symbol variation) for a predetermined time. Then, the jackpot game is configured to be executed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the jackpot game is executed when it is determined that the ball has passed the actuating gate 670 after the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in the display mode indicating the jackpot winning. It is configured to be. That is, the actuating gate 670 is used as an execution means for executing the jackpot game when the jackpot execution condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the jackpot winning).

Further, the present embodiment is different from the above-mentioned 18th embodiment in that the arrangement positions of the electric accessory 640a and the V winning device 650 are changed. Further, the difference is that the configuration of the second winning opening 640 is changed to a gate shape through which a ball can pass. Since the other configurations of the game board 13 are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the variation time of the selected special symbol and the variation time of the normal symbol are different from those of the pachinko machine of the 18th embodiment described above. Specifically, as a variation pattern that can be selected when a big hit is won in the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery in a normal state, or when a small hit is won, a special special figure with a fluctuation time of 50 seconds. As a variation pattern that can be selected when one variation pattern is selectable and a small hit is won in the second special symbol (special figure 2) lottery in the normal state, the special special figure 2 variation pattern with a variation time of 1 second is used. It can be selected, and a special normal map fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 50 seconds can be selected as a normal map fluctuation pattern that can be selected when a normal symbol is won for a long opening.

Then, as the end condition of the small hit game, the first end condition that is established when the number of winning balls reaches one, and the period in which the V winning opening 650a is open in the small hit game is 1.5 seconds. The second termination condition, which is satisfied when the above is reached, is stipulated.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment configured in this way, when the special figure fluctuation in which the special special figure 1 fluctuation pattern is set is stopped and displayed, or when the special figure fluctuation pattern is set in the pachinko machine 10 is displayed. When the stop display is displayed, it is configured to execute a guidance notification (see FIG. 366 (b)) for causing the player to perform a right-handed game as a game method.

Here, when the executed guidance notification (right-handed notification) is based on the jackpot winning, the ball launched by the right-handed game flows down the first flow path 701 and passes through the operating gate 670, thereby causing a jackpot. The game is started. As described above, since it takes about 5 seconds for the ball launched by the right-handed game to reach the operating gate 670, the jackpot game is started about 5 seconds after the right-handed game is performed. become.

Further, when the executed guidance notification (right-handed notification) is based on the small hit winning, the ball launched by the right-handed game flows down the second flow path 702 and wins the V winning opening 650a. The jackpot game is started. As described above, it takes about 4 seconds for the ball launched by the right-handed game to reach the V winning opening 650a, and the small hit game ends when one ball wins during the small hit game. Moreover, when a ball wins in the V winning opening 650a, the winning ball is configured to always pass through the V gate (V region), so that about 5 seconds after the right-handed game is performed. The jackpot game will be started.

Further, when the executed guidance notification (right-handed notification) is based on the winning of the normal drawing, the ball launched by the right-handed game flows into the second flow path 702 and passes through the second winning opening 640. If the special figure 2 lottery executed based on the passage is a small hit, the small hit game is executed after a variation time of 1 second. Since the second flow path 702 is formed so that the time for the ball passing through the second winning opening 640 to reach the V winning opening 650a is about 2 seconds, a small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery. If so, the ball that has passed through the second winning opening 640 will win the V winning opening 650a. Therefore, the big hit game is started about 5 seconds after the right-handed game is performed.

That is, in the present embodiment, the same fluctuation time is set for the case where the big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol) in the normal state and the case where the small hit is won, and the fluctuation time has elapsed. When a guidance notification (right-handed notification) for changing the game method is executed at the timing, the player can perform a right-handed game based on the guidance notification, so that the jackpot game can be executed at the same timing. It is configured in.

By configuring in this way, it is difficult for the player to understand whether the big hit game is executed based on the big hit winning or the small hit winning. can. Further, as in the above-described embodiment, the big hit game executed when the big hit winning of the special symbol is won and the big hit game (V big hit game) executed via the small hit winning are performed by the player. If the size of the privilege (the number of prize balls during the big hit game, the advantageous game state (time saving state) set after the big hit is over) is different, what triggered the big hit game to be executed? By making it difficult to understand, it is possible to play the game while having expectations for the game state set during the big hit game or after the big hit game is completed.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, even when a specific hit (a long open hit of a normal figure) is won in a lottery of a normal symbol, a big hit game is started after the guidance notification (right-handed notification) is executed. The period until the special symbol is won is the same as when the big hit or the small hit is won. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to understand the execution opportunity of the jackpot game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result (special figure lottery result, normal figure lottery result) in which the jackpot game can be executed is obtained, the same fluctuation time (50 seconds) is selected. Therefore, it is possible to set a special variation effect using the same effect mode as the effect using the variation time. This makes it difficult for the player to understand whether the special variation effect being executed is a special variation effect based on the special map variation or a special variation effect based on the normal map variation even while the special variation effect is being executed. be able to.

In the above-mentioned example, the case where the special variation effect is set for the special variation pattern in which the variation time of 50 seconds is set has been described, but the variation time is not limited to this, for example, the variation time of 50 seconds or more. Of the variation effects corresponding to the set variation patterns, the above-mentioned special variation effect may be executed when the remaining variation time of the variation time is 50 seconds. Furthermore, in some cases where the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a special out-of-order variation pattern with a variation time of 50 seconds can be set, and as a result of the special variation effect, the guidance of the right-handed game after the variation time elapses. An effect pattern (failure effect) in which notification is not executed may be configured to be executable. With this configuration, even when the special variation effect is executed, it is possible to provide a pattern (gase pattern) in which the right-handed game is not guided, so that the player pays attention to the content of the special variation effect. be able to.

In addition, as described above in each embodiment, a specific hit (a long open hit in a normal figure) is won by a lottery of a normal symbol, a guidance notification for guiding a right-handed game is executed, and a second prize is won by the right-handed game. In the case of winning (passing) the mouth 640, if the special figure 1 change is being executed, the special figure 2 change is not immediately executed, that is, the special figure 1 change is completed until the execution is completed. 2 The waiting period during which the fluctuation is not executed will be set. In this case, it is preferable to execute the failure effect as a failure pattern in which the jackpot game is not executed even though the guidance notification is executed. In addition, when the ball is won (passed) in the second winning opening 640 by a right-handed game and the special figure 2 lottery is executed immediately, the above-mentioned failure effect is also obtained even if the result of the special figure 2 lottery is out of order. It is good to configure it to execute.

With this configuration, it is possible to set the same production mode when the special figure 2 lottery is won out of the game and when the waiting period for the special figure 2 lottery is set. If the waiting period is within a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) and the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery executed after the waiting period elapses is a small hit winning, the small winning is won from the above-mentioned failure effect. It is preferable to configure so that the effect (revival effect) of switching to the effect mode indicating that the effect has been performed is executed. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect that can make the player have expectations until the end.

The waiting period for the special figure 2 lottery may be calculated and predicted using various techniques used in each of the above-described embodiments, and various techniques used in each embodiment may be appropriately combined. Further, in the case of performing a right-handed game based on the winning of a regular figure, or in the case of performing a small hit game based on a small hit winning, the ball is a specific winning opening as in each of the above-described embodiments. (2nd winning opening 640, V winning opening 650a) may not be won (passed). Also in this case, the effect mode described in the above-described 16th embodiment (see, for example, FIG. 370 (b)) may be displayed. Further, even when a big hit is won in the special drawing lottery, a predetermined timing, for example, a timing at which a ball launched by a right-handed game can pass near the second winning opening 640 (after the guidance notification mode is displayed). It may be configured to execute a pseudo failure effect at a timing (about 1 second later) or at a timing when the ball can reach the V winning opening 650a (about 4 seconds after the guidance notification mode is displayed).

In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 capable of executing the jackpot game by a plurality of triggers notifies the player that the condition for executing the jackpot game is satisfied (“right-handed notification” in the present embodiment). By making the period from that time until the jackpot game is actually executed the same regardless of the trigger until the jackpot game is executed, the player is informed in advance that the jackpot game will be executed. Since it is configured to make it difficult to understand at which moment the jackpot game is executed while notifying, which game mode the jackpot game is actually executed or the game state after the jackpot game is completed. It is possible to provide the enjoyment of letting the player predict which game state is set.

The notification mode for notifying that the condition for executing the jackpot game is satisfied is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, and for example, an effect mode of a variation effect executed in response to each symbol variation can be used. It may be set to an effect mode indicating that the conditions for executing the jackpot game are satisfied, and the period from the execution of the notification based on the notification mode to the actual execution of the jackpot game should be unified. If it is possible, the notification timing and notification mode may be appropriately set.

Further, when the opportunity to execute the big hit game through the small hit game is used, it is determined in advance after the small hit game is started regardless of the timing of the ball winning in the V winning opening 650a during the small hit game. It is advisable to configure the jackpot game to be executed after a certain amount of time has passed. As a result, it is possible to further unify the period from the execution of the notification based on the notification mode to the actual execution of the jackpot game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 using the configuration in which the type (big hit type) of the big hit game to be executed later is set when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) during the small hit game, the pachinko machine 10 is in the small hit game. A plurality of specific areas (V gates) are provided in the V winning opening 650a where balls can win, and the balls winning in the V winning opening 650a are distributed to any of the plurality of specific areas (V gates) on the upstream side thereof. By providing a distribution movable member and configuring the distribution movable member to move according to the elapsed time from the start of the small hit game, the swing in the V winning opening 650a after the small hit game is started. The sphere is configured to pass through a specific region (V gate) that differs depending on the time until the sphere reaches the movable member. Then, by configuring so that the jackpot type in which the jackpot game in which a different opening period is set when passing through each specific region (V gate) is set is set, each specific region (V gate) is sphered. Even when the configuration in which the jackpot game is executed based on the passage of the above is used, the timing at which the specific winning opening 65 is opened may be unified in the jackpot game.

<Examples of staging correspondence at the time of power failure of each embodiment>
Next, among the various effects executed in each of the above-described embodiments, a plurality of periods in which different game controls (special figure variable game, normal figure variable game, small hit game, big hit game) are performed by the main control device 110. The control processing content of the voice lamp control device 113 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off during the execution of the period effect (series effect, final variation effect) executed straddling the above description will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of each embodiment, the control processing content (various information stored in the RAM 203) of the main control device 110 is the same even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. While the information can be temporarily retained (backed up), the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off for the control processing contents (various information stored in the RAM 223) of the voice lamp control device 113. It is configured to be erased in case.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off while the above-mentioned period effect is being executed based on the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 (power cut state). When the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed (at the time of power recovery), it becomes impossible to read what period the production was performed immediately before the power failure state. There was a problem that the period production could not be resumed.

Therefore, in this corresponding example, the return command indicating the game status at the time of power recovery is configured to be set in the start-up process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 402) (set after C910 in FIG. 402). As the return command, the remaining period until the game state shifts, such as whether or not there is a change in the special map, whether or not there is a change in the normal map, whether or not there is a current game state, whether or not there is a big hit game, whether or not there is a small hit game, and whether or not there is a right-handed notification. It is configured to set a command including each information of the information, and when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the above-mentioned recovery command, the current state (during power recovery) can execute the period effect (power interruption). It is configured to be able to execute the discrimination process (pre-disruption effect discrimination process) for determining whether or not the period effect has been executed immediately before).

Then, when it is determined in the pre-disruption effect determination process that the current period effect cannot be executed (for example, during a big hit game), the effect according to the command output from the main control device 110 is executed. If it is determined in the pre-disruption effect determination process that the current state is in a state where the period effect can be executed, the period effect is to be restarted later based on the command output from the main control device 110. The preparation processing state is set, and a comment indicating that the production may be restarted is displayed to the player.

Then, in the state where the preparation processing state is set, a command including information on the small hit type indicating the small hit winning (game for long open hit in the normal figure) in which a series of effects are executed as a hit-related command from the main control device 110 is issued. When it is determined that the output has been made, the period effect is resumed from the start of the small hit game. With this configuration, the period effect is executed over a plurality of periods in which different game controls (special figure variable game, normal figure variable game, small hit game, big hit game) are performed by the main control device 110. When the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off during the execution of (series of effects, final variation effect), it is possible to prevent all of the effects during that period from being discarded.

Further, in this corresponding example, even if the execution condition of the new effect (period effect) is satisfied while the preparation processing state is set, there is a limiting means for limiting the execution of the new effect (period effect). is doing. That is, the process of resuming the effect (period effect) that was executed before the power failure is configured to be executed with priority over the process of newly executing the effect (period effect) after the power is restored. With this configuration, the effect (period effect) that has already been provided (partially provided) to the player can be prioritized and executed, so that the player can be provided with a natural effect. .. In addition, when the effect mode of the effect (period effect) being executed before the power failure is combined with the effect mode of the effect (period effect) newly set regardless of the effect (period effect), the game is played. It is possible to surely prevent the production result from being advantageous to the person.

Further, in the state where the preparation processing state is set, there is a possibility that the effect (period effect) was executed immediately before the power failure each time various commands received from the main control device 110 are received. If it is configured to repeatedly execute the discrimination process for determining whether or not there is a presence, and based on the discrimination result, it is determined that the effect (period effect) cannot be executed immediately before the power failure. The comment indicating that the effect (period effect) may be restarted to the player is deleted, and the control process of the normal voice lamp control device 113 is executed.

Further, if the state in which the preparation processing state is set continues for a predetermined period (for example, the period until the number of commands received from the main control device 110 reaches 10, 20 seconds after the power is restored), the power is transmitted. A display mode (for example) indicating that the effect (period effect) that may have been executed before the power failure cannot be restarted, and the player cannot resume the effect (period effect) before the power failure. , The comment) "All the production contents before the power failure have been invalidated" is displayed, and the control process of the normal voice lamp control device 113 is executed.

With this configuration, even if the effect (period effect) that was being executed before the power failure cannot be resumed, it is possible to notify the player that the effect could not be resumed, for example. , A mission effect such as "If a reach of 3 occurs within 10 rotations, a big hit!" Is executed before the power cut, and after the power is restored, "3 reach" is executed regardless of the effect content that was executed before the power cut. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused by executing "." Further, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the predetermined period after the power is restored (for example, the maximum period during which the mission effect can be set (the number of special map fluctuations is 30 times, etc.)) may overlap with the effect result in the mission effect. It may be configured so that the effect mode is not set. Specifically, in a game in which a mission for establishing any of a specific reach mode (for example, reach of "3", "5", "7") can be set as a mission effect, a predetermined value after power recovery is performed. In the period, if the result of the special drawing lottery is out of order, the above-mentioned specific reach mode is not set, and if the result of the special drawing lottery is a hit, the above-mentioned specific reach mode is set. It is good to configure it so that it can be set. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the effect within the limited range even within a predetermined period after the power is restored. In addition, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a hit, a specific reach mode can be set, so a mission effect (for example, generate a reach of "3") is executed before the power failure. Even if "3 reach" occurs by chance within a predetermined period after the power is restored, the lottery result will be a hit, so that the player will not feel uncomfortable.

As described above, in each of the above-described embodiments, as an opportunity to execute a privilege game (big hit game) in which the player has an advantage, a big hit game is won by a special symbol lottery (design big hit game). Is executed (first opportunity) and a small hit is won by lottery of a special symbol, and the game ball is opened in a specific area (during the small hit game) during the small hit game. A gaming machine having two triggers: a trigger (second trigger) for executing a jackpot game (V jackpot game) based on passing through a V region (not shown) provided in (see 361). However, the game is not limited to this, and as an opportunity to execute a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player, a big hit game (design big hit game) is executed by winning a big hit in a special symbol lottery. The technique of each of the above-described embodiments may be diverted to the gaming machine having only the opportunity (first opportunity) to be performed.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the gaming state includes a normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol), a time saving state (low probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol). However, it is not limited to this, and it is possible to set a high probability state of a special symbol with a high probability of winning a special symbol after the end of the big hit game, and a probability change state (high of the special symbol). It may be configured so that a probability state (high probability state of a normal symbol) and a latent state (high probability state of a special symbol, low probability state of a normal symbol) can be set.

Then, when a specific gaming state (latent state) is set as the gaming state, it is easier to execute a specific special drawing lottery (special drawing 2 lottery) than when another gaming state is set (special drawing 2 lottery). Fig. 2 Make it easier to win the ball to the starting opening that triggers the execution of the lottery, or shorten the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 lottery), and frequently show the small hit game based on the small hit winning of the special figure 2 lottery. The game to be played may be configured to be feasible. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player play a game in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained without winning a big hit in the special drawing lottery, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

As described above, in the 16th to 21st embodiments described above, the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of jackpot execution triggers for executing the jackpot game is used, and specifically, the first special symbol is used. The first jackpot execution opportunity triggered by winning the jackpot by the lottery of (Special Figure 1) and the small hit by the lottery of the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) are won and executed based on the small hit winning. It has a second big hit execution opportunity triggered by winning a ball in the V winning opening 650a (see FIG. 361), which is open to the small hit game. In addition, as a special figure change execution opportunity for executing the lottery of the special symbol, the first special figure change execution opportunity triggered by having the ball win in the first winning opening 64 and the ball passing through the through gate 67. A ball is executed in the second winning opening 640 (see FIG. 361), which is opened by the game per game executed when a lottery of a normal symbol (normal figure) is executed and the winning is won in the normal figure lottery. It has the second special figure change execution opportunity, which is triggered by winning a prize. Then, the jackpot game is configured to be executed through various game processes according to the establishment condition of each jackpot execution trigger and each special figure fluctuation execution trigger. With such a configuration, the player can be made to execute the jackpot game through various game processes, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the 16th embodiment described above, from one game state (time saving state) in which it is easy to obtain a specific lottery right (a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 that triggers the execution of the special figure 2 lottery), the one game. When the transition condition for transitioning to another gaming state (normal state) where it is more difficult to obtain a specific lottery right than the state is satisfied, the acquisition guidance notification for acquiring a specific lottery right during one gaming state is executed. However, by configuring it so that it is easy to execute a specific lottery after shifting to another gaming state, it is possible to make the player enthusiastically play the game until just before the end of one gaming state. However, not limited to this, for example, if it is easier to acquire a specific lottery right during the jackpot game than the game state set after the jackpot game ends, the acquisition guidance notification is given during the jackpot game. May be configured so that a specific lottery can be easily executed after the jackpot game is completed.

Further, the ease of acquiring a specific lottery right may be different by changing the ease of winning a ball in the winning opening (starting winning opening) which is a specific lottery right, or the ease of acquiring a specific lottery right may be different. By making the length of the set period different, the ease of acquiring a specific lottery right during the game state may be made different.

Further, in the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, the ease of acquiring a specific lottery right differs between one gaming state and another gaming state, but the privilege given to the player is provided. It suffices as long as it is possible to change the game content in another game state based on the privilege acquired in one game state by varying the degree, and for example, the ball can be stored (retained) in a predetermined area of the game board 13. A storage member (retention member) is provided so that the ball is more easily stored in the storage member when one game state is set than when the other game states are set. Then, in other gaming states, it is configured to be more advantageous to the player to play the game with the balls stored in the storage member than to play the game with the balls not stored in the storage member. Is also good.

<23rd Embodiment>
Next, the 23rd embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 471 to 541. It should be noted that some of the configurations used in the 23rd embodiment have different reference numerals for the same configurations as those of the above-mentioned embodiments, but this explains the invention of the 23rd embodiment in an easy-to-understand manner. Since the specific configuration is the same as the corresponding configuration of each of the above embodiments, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, the contents described in each of the above-described embodiments are also described in duplicate with different reference numerals. Specifically, in each of the above-described embodiments, each control process is described with a reference numeral of "S" or "C", but in the present embodiment, a reference numeral of "Z" is attached. The same process will be described in duplicate with different numbers.

First, the outline (specifications) of the pachinko machine 10 in the 23rd embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the 23rd embodiment has a first region (V region) in which a game ball can be entered inside a variable winning device 65 that can be entered when a big hit is obtained by a special symbol lottery. , A second region (non-V region) different from the first region, and a distribution device (V) that distributes the game ball that has flowed into the inside of the variable winning device 65 to either the first region or the second region. (Characteristics) and are provided. By entering (passing) at least one game ball into the first region during one jackpot, a probabilistic state of a special symbol is given after the end of the jackpot, while the first jackpot during one jackpot. If no game ball enters one area, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given until the lottery of the special symbol is executed up to 100 times after the big hit is completed. Therefore, when the jackpot game is executed, the game can be performed with the expectation that the game ball will be distributed to the first region (V region) by the distribution device (V accessory).

The distribution device (V accessory) is basically maintained in an arrangement that allows the game balls to be distributed to the second area (arrangement that cannot be distributed to the first area), and a predetermined round (for example, 5) in the jackpot. In the round), the arrangement is changed so that the game ball can be distributed to the first area only during a specific period (for example, 5 seconds after 5 seconds have passed since the start of the 5th round). .. By letting the game ball enter the specific winning opening 65a during this specific period, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the first area, and the probabilistic change of the special symbol that is advantageous for the game state after the big hit is completed. It can be transitioned to the state.

In the 23rd embodiment, an opening / closing pattern in which the game ball can reach the distribution device during a specific period in the 5th round (for example, 5 seconds after the start of the 5th round to 9.5 seconds). The jackpot type (probability variable jackpot) in which the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened and closed by the opening / closing pattern in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened for 4.5 seconds after the lapse of time, and the distribution during the specific period. A specific winning opening with an opening / closing pattern that makes it impossible to reach the device (for example, an opening / closing pattern in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened for 4.5 seconds from the start of the fifth round to the elapse of 4.5 seconds). At least a jackpot type (normal jackpot) in which the (large opening) 65a is opened and closed is provided. In the former jackpot type (probability variable jackpot), in the fifth round of the jackpot, simply by continuing to shoot the game ball aiming at the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, the game ball can be easily moved to the first area by the sorting device. After the big hit is over, the special symbol is almost in a probable state. On the other hand, in the latter jackpot type (normal jackpot), even if the game ball continues to be launched aiming at the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a in the fifth round of the jackpot, all the game balls that reach the distribution device are all. Since it is distributed to the second region, the probabilistic state is not given (the time saving state is given).

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 23rd embodiment, whether or not to fall into the low probability state of the special symbol each time the lottery condition of the special symbol is satisfied when the special symbol shifts to the probabilistic state. The lottery is executed. More specifically, when the lottery condition for the special symbol is satisfied in the probabilistic state of the special symbol, first, a lottery (fall probability 1/500) for whether or not to fall to the low probability state of the special symbol is executed, and the fall occurs. When the corresponding lottery result is obtained, the big hit lottery is executed with the lottery probability (1/250) in the low probability state of the special symbol, but if it is not the lottery result corresponding to the fall, the special symbol is in the high probability state. The jackpot lottery is executed with the lottery probability (1/125) in. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 23rd embodiment, regardless of whether it is a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot, the time saving state of the normal symbol is shortened until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times after the jackpot ends. It is configured to be maintained at. That is, when the probability variation jackpot is reached and the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends, it depends on whether or not the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained by the time the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times. However, after the jackpot ends, the normal state of the normal symbol continues until the 100th special symbol lottery condition is satisfied. Therefore, after the big hit is completed, until the lottery of the special symbol is executed 100 times, the operations other than the big hit probability are almost the same. Can be difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, if the previous jackpot was a normal jackpot and the probability of the special symbol was low after the jackpot ended, or if the previous jackpot was a probabilistic jackpot, until the special symbol lottery was executed 100 times. Even if the player falls into a low-probability state in the meantime, the player continues to have the expectation that the special symbol will be in a probabilistic state until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times. You can keep it going. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the motivation of the player for the game.

FIG. 471 is a front view of the gaming board A13 of the pachinko machine A10 according to the 23rd embodiment. As shown in FIG. 471, the game board A13 is a base plate A machined into a substantially square shape in front view.
In addition to a large number of nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) for ball guidance, rails 61 and 62,
It is configured by assembling a general winning opening 63, a first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640, a variable winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit A80, etc., and the peripheral portion thereof is an inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). Is fixed to.

The base plate A60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate A60 from the front side thereof. General winning opening 6
3. The first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable display device unit A80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate A60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board A13 by tapping screws or the like. Has been done.

The front central portion of the game board A13 is the inner frame 1 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14.
It can be visually recognized from the front side of 2. Below, mainly with reference to FIG. 471, the game board A13.
The configuration of is described.

On the front surface of the game board A13, an outer rail 6 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape.
2 is planted, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed of a strip-shaped metal plate is planted at the inner position of the outer rail 62, similarly to the outer rail 62. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board A13, and the game board A13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board A13. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is in front of the game board A13 and has two rails 61 and 6.
It is a region formed by being partitioned by a resin outer edge member A73 connecting 2 and the rail (a region in which a winning opening or the like is arranged and a fired ball flows down).

In this embodiment, the outer edge member A73 is a metal plate-shaped member 75 made of metal (see FIG. 308).
Is configured to enhance the combined strength (rigidity) of the game board A13 and the outer edge member A73, which will be described in detail later.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. In the present embodiment, the aim of arranging the general winning opening 63 is different for each arrangement. This will be described below.

In the present embodiment, in the normal game, the first route passes through the left side of the third symbol display device 81.
The ball will be launched with the aim of getting the ball to the winning opening 64, but the first winning opening 64
A part of the ball flowing down the area on the left side of the first winning opening 64 without reaching the above will win a prize in the general winning opening 63 arranged on the left side of the game area. That is, the general winning opening 63 arranged on the left side of the game area is arranged with the aim of affecting the normal game. For example, the higher the possibility of winning the general winning opening 63, the more likely it is that the number of winnings to the first winning opening 64 will be increased with a small number of balls during normal times.

On the other hand, in the game during the time reduction or the probability change, the ball is launched with the aim of winning the ball to the second winning opening 640 by the route passing through the right side of the third symbol display device 81. A part of the ball flowing down the area on the right side of the second winning opening 640 without reaching the winning opening 640 wins a prize in the general winning opening 63 arranged on the right side of the game area. That is, the general winning opening 63 arranged on the right side of the game area is arranged with the aim of affecting the game during the probability change or the time reduction. For example, the higher the possibility of winning the general winning opening 63, the more it is possible to suppress the ball loss during the probability change or the time reduction.

By suppressing the ball loss, even if you do not play a game (even if you keep hitting) in a firing mode that stops the firing of the ball at the right time during the probability change, you will get the next big hit before the ball held in the upper plate 17 runs out. Since it is easy to do so, it is possible to reduce the stress (feeling of fatigue) that the player receives during the game. Therefore, the number of rotations until the next big hit frequently increases during the probability change (for example, 10).
Even in the case of (0 or more rotations), the player can comfortably execute the game.

In the game in the special game state, the ball is launched with the aim of winning the ball into the specific winning opening 65a by the route passing through the right side of the third symbol display device 81, but the second winning opening 640
A part of the ball flowing down the area on the right side of the above flows down to the general winning opening 63 side (right side) instead of the specific winning opening 65a side (left side), and wins a prize in the general winning opening 63a. Since the prize ball associated with the prize in the general prize opening 63 is paid out as a prize ball different from the prize ball in the specific prize opening 65a, the player can change the prize ball by the end of the special game state. In addition to the prize balls based on the planned number of prizes to be awarded to the specific prize opening 65a, the prize balls based on the number of prizes to be awarded to the general prize opening 63 can be obtained.

That is, the general prize opening 63 arranged on the right side of the game area is arranged for the purpose of increasing the number of payout prize balls that can be acquired by the player in the special gaming state. Here, as the number of winnings in the general winning opening 63 increases, the time efficiency of winning in the specific winning opening 65a decreases, so that the elapsed time until the end of the special gaming state tends to increase. In other words, the number of rounds and the number of counts in the special gaming state (specified number of winnings for each round) are the same in terms of control due to the arrangement location, the number of arrangements, and the design of the upstream flow path of the general winning opening 63. However, the time required to end the special game state (long and short) and the number of prize balls paid out to the player (somewhat) can be different.

In the special game state, the display mode when displaying the number corresponding to the number of payout prize balls on the third symbol display device 81 is not limited at all. For example, the number of payout prize balls based on the prize in the specific winning opening 65a and the number of payout prize balls based on the winning in the general winning opening 63 may be displayed separately, or the payout based on the prize in the specific winning opening 65a may be displayed. A numerical value obtained by totaling the number of prize balls and the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the general winning opening 63 may be displayed, or a combination thereof may be displayed.

As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher during the probabilistic change and during the time reduction than during the normal period.
In addition, since the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, "○" is displayed in the variable display of the second symbol.
The symbol of is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal time. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is easier to win in the second winning opening 640 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 than when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the first winning opening 6 without the electric accessory
Toward 4, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit A80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the second winning opening 64
Since the electric accessory 640a attached to 0 is likely to be in an open state and is in a state in which it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640, the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 toward the second winning opening 640. (So-called "right-handed"), pass through the through gate 67, and pass the electric accessory 640a.
It is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640 while opening the.

In the pachinko machine A10 of the present embodiment, the configuration of the game board A13 is asymmetrical, and it is required to hit the ball on the left and right according to the game state, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the configuration of the game board A13 may be symmetrical (see FIG. 471).
.. In this case, you can aim for the first winning opening 64 with "right-handed", or you can aim for the second winning opening 640 with "left-handed".
You can also aim at. Therefore, depending on the game state (whether it is in the probable change, the time is shortened, or it is in the normal state), the method of firing the ball is changed to "left-handed" or "right-handed" for the player. It can be unnecessary to make it. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the troublesomeness of changing the way of hitting the ball.

In this embodiment, the input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225 (see FIG. 4). Other devices 228 include the drive motor AMT1 and the drive motor AM.
A drive motor for raising and lowering the effect unit A710 and T2 are included.

As described above with reference to FIG. 471 and the like, the second ball entry port (second prize opening) 640 is a game in which the second ball entry port (second winning opening) 640 flows down a flow path provided on the right side of the front view with respect to the third symbol display device 81. It is provided at a position where the ball can enter (a position where the game ball flowing down the flow path provided on the left side of the front view cannot enter (difficult)). That is, the probabilistic state in which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is easily opened (that is, the game ball is easy to enter into the second entry port 640) and the time saving state of the normal symbol is set. In the time-saving state, by launching the game ball toward the flow path on the right side of the front view, the game ball enters the second entrance 640 at a high rate (for example, 1 in 3 balls). Therefore, it is possible to play the game efficiently. On the other hand, in the normal state in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set, it is difficult to open the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 (that is, the game ball enters the second entrance 640). (Difficult), so the position where the game ball flowing down the flow path provided on the left side of the front view with respect to the third symbol display device 81 can enter (the game flowing down the flow path provided on the right side of the front view). The game is performed by a game method in which a game ball is launched aiming at a first ball entry port (first winning opening) 64 provided at a position where the ball cannot enter (difficult). Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification of the explanation, launching the game ball toward the flow path on the left side of the front view with respect to the third symbol display device 81 is referred to as "left-handed", and is directed toward the flow path on the right side of the front view. Launching a game ball is called "right-handed". In addition, the lottery of the special symbol executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first entry slot (first winning opening) 64 is referred to as the lottery of the first special symbol (lottery of the special figure 1). The lottery of the special symbol that is executed based on the fact that the game ball enters the second entry opening (second winning opening) 640 is called the lottery of the second special symbol (lottery of the special drawing 2). ).

Next, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 472. FIG. 472 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the 23rd embodiment, and FIG. 472 (b) is the third in the 23rd embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the display content of the symbol display device 81 schematically. The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 487), for example, there are three symbols, left, middle, and right. The symbol column is displayed.

The third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is composed of nine types of main symbols with numbers "1" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of a rear symbol consisting of a wooden box with numbers from "1" to "9", of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as shields, swords, and cloaks on the front of the wooden box. Even numbers are small in green on the lower right side of, and are added so that they are displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 487) described later is a jackpot (big hit A to E), the same main symbol is obtained. It is configured so that a uniform variable display is performed and a big hit occurs after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

Furthermore, if the winning jackpot type is a normal jackpot, the same main symbol with an even number is always displayed in a variable manner, while if it is a probabilistic jackpot, the same main symbol with an even number is displayed. Either the uniform variable display or the uniform variable display with the same main symbols with odd numbers is executed. That is, by executing the variable display in which the same main symbols with odd numbers are aligned, not only the big hit but also the probable change state after the big hit is determined. In the 23rd embodiment, the rate at which the variable display in which the same main symbols with odd numbers are aligned is executed in the case of a probability variation jackpot is set to an extremely low probability (for example, a rate of 1%). There is. As a result, it is possible to rarely find that the jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot from the types of symbols that are aligned when the jackpot is won. As described above, until the lottery of 100 special symbols is executed after the end of the big hit, the normal symbol is maintained in the time-saving state (whether or not it is in the probable change state from the operation mode of the electric accessory 640a). Therefore, it is difficult to grasp whether or not it is a probable change jackpot from the types of main symbols that were prepared at the time of the jackpot winning, from the end of the jackpot to the end of the special symbol lottery 100 times. During that time, it is possible to generate a situation in which it is not known whether the state is a probable change state or a time saving state. Therefore, regardless of whether the jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot, the player is in a probabilistic state from the end of the jackpot to the end of the 100 special symbol lottery. Expectations can be sustained.

As shown in FIG. 472 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is a main display for displaying the third symbol when the third symbol is variablely displayed or when the third symbol is stopped and displayed. A region Dm, a small area Ds1 for displaying the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, a small area Ds2 for displaying the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, and a predetermined effect (for example, an interrupt described later). It is composed of a small area Ds3 for reducing and displaying the variation effect of the third symbol while the continuous hit effect) is being executed.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. If a combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed (the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol) among the balls that have entered the first ball entry port 64. The small area Ds2 is an area for displaying the number of balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed (the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol) among the balls that have entered the second entry port 640, and is a small area. Ds3 is an area in which the variable effect is reduced and displayed when a display effect different from the variable effect is executed in the main display area. By reducing and displaying the variable effect, it is possible to prevent the display effect different from the variable effect from being obscured by the third symbol and becoming difficult to see.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 472 (b), a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm, and a display showing the degree of expectation of a big hit in the background of the third symbol. Directing etc. are executed.

If a game ball enters the first entry port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display devices 37A, 37B), the number of entry is up to four times. It is held, and the number of held balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37A and also in the small area Ds1. Similarly, when a game ball enters the second entry port 640, the number of entry is suspended up to four times, the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37B, and the small area Ds2 is displayed. Also shown in. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number of the first special symbol, and in the small area Ds2, one reserved ball number symbol for each reserved ball number of the second special symbol. Is displayed. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 or the small area Ds2, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, it means that the reserved ball number symbol is displayed. Indicates that the number of reserved balls is four. When the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed, it means that the reserved ball number of the first special symbol is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball. FIG. 472 (b) illustrates a case where the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 4 and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0.

In the 23rd embodiment, the balls entering the first ball opening 64 and the second ball opening 640 are each held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is 4 times. The number of times is not limited to, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the small areas Ds1 and Ds2, the reserved ball number is displayed as a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is divided by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 473 to 486, various hobby effects performed by the pachinko machine 10 in the 23rd embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 473 to 476, in the 23rd embodiment, it is executed in the third symbol display device 81 during the gaming state (time saving state or probable change state) in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set. The display effect will be described. As described above, in the 23rd embodiment, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the time saving state and the probable change state after the jackpot is completed and until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times. It is configured. That is, regardless of whether the game state after the big hit is set to the time saving state or the probable change state, the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times after the previous big hit is finished, unless it becomes a big hit. Until then, the structure is such that the normal design is maintained in a time-saving state. This normal symbol time saving state is maintained even if the special symbol falls from the probabilistic state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol until it is executed 100 times, so the game set at the end of the jackpot Not only the state but also the timing of falling from the probabilistic state of the special symbol to the low probability state can be made difficult for the player to identify.

However, if the state of the special symbol of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is a probabilistic state of the special symbol or a low probability state) is configured to be completely indistinguishable, a gaming state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set. There is a risk that the game will become monotonous while the game continues, and it will not be possible to sufficiently improve the player's interest in the game. Therefore, in the 23rd embodiment, the player can predict the possibility of the probabilistic state to some extent by the display mode of the third symbol display device 81. More specifically, each time the variable display of the special symbol is executed, one of the three rear modes that suggests the degree of expectation of the probable change state is selected by taking into account the game state at the time of execution. It is configured to be set. As a result, it is possible to realize a game property in which the state of the special symbol is predicted from the aspect of the rear mode, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

First, with reference to FIG. 473 (a), a display mode (rear mode) in which the current state is a probable change state and the degree of expectation is relatively low will be described. As shown in FIG. 473 (a), when the rear mode (cave search mode), which is a probable change state and has a relatively low expectation, is set, the character 801 imitating an adventurer possesses a sword and a torch. The display mode for exploring the inside of the cave is displayed. Further, on the lower right side of the front view on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the number of lottery of the remaining special symbols until the number of lottery that the time saving state of the normal symbol may end is reached (the time saving state of the normal symbol). A display area 802 having a horizontally long rectangular shape for indicating the number of times of guarantee) is displayed. In the example of FIG. 473 (a), the case where 90 times are displayed as the guaranteed number of times is illustrated. That is, the state after the lottery of the special symbol is executed 10 times after the big hit is finished is illustrated. Further, a horizontally long substantially rectangular display area 803 is displayed below the front view on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Inside this display area 803, horizontally long, substantially oval-shaped right-handed images displaying the characters "right-handed" are displayed on the left and right, and between these right-handed images, a "cave search mode" is displayed. Is displayed. Depending on these display modes, the time saving state of the normal symbol continues until at least 90 more special symbol lottery is executed (the time saving state may end when the 90 times lottery is completed). And it is possible to easily make the player understand that the game should be played by right-handed. In addition, compared to the temple search mode (see FIG. 473 (b)) and the super-temple search mode (see FIG. 474), which will be described later, the display contents are more modest, so that the player can intuitively change the probability. It can be understood that the condition is relatively unlikely to continue.

FIG. 473 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode when a rear mode (temple search mode) with a high expectation that the current state is a probable change state is set as compared with the cave search mode. When the temple search mode is set, the display mode in which the character 801 imitating an adventurer searches the inside of the temple is displayed, and the characters between the right-handed images inside the display area 803 are the "temple search mode". Will be changed to. The display content of the temple search mode is brighter than that of the cave search mode, and the display mode makes it easier for the player to have a flashy impression. Can be intuitively understood.

FIG. 474 is a diagram showing a display mode when a rear mode (super-temple search mode) indicating that the expectation of a probable change state is higher than that of the temple search mode is set. When this super-temple search mode is set, the characters "CHANCE" are displayed on the pillars of the temple, and torches are installed on the pillars of the temple. Further, a substantially circular display area 804 in which the character "super" is displayed is displayed on the upper left side of the character "temple search mode" in the display area 803. With these display modes, it is possible to give the player a more flashy impression than in the temple search mode (see FIG. 473 (b)), so that the expectation of being in a probable state can be further improved. It should be noted that this super-temple search mode is a rear mode that may be set (shifted) only when the game state is a probable change state and the lottery result of the fall is not included in the hold. In other words, at the time of shifting to the super temple search mode, not only the probable change state is confirmed, but also the probable change state is confirmed at least until the reserved ball at the transition time is digested, so the transition to the super temple search mode is made. By doing so, the player can be pleased.

As described above, in the 23rd embodiment, the cave search mode in which the expectation of the probabilistic state is relatively low and the temple search mode in which the expectation of the probabilistic state is relatively high during the game state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set are relatively high. , And the super-temple search mode 3 that confirms that the probabilistic state is confirmed and that the lottery result corresponding to the fall is not included in the hold (at least the probable change state continues until the hold is exhausted). One of the types of rear modes is set at the time of executing the variable display effect based on the lottery result of the special symbol. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of predicting the current game state from the rear mode while the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, so that the player's interest in the game can be enjoyed. Can be improved. Also, by setting the super-temple search mode, it is confirmed that the game state is in the probable change state, so if the player shifts to the super-temple mode while predicting that it is in the probable change state, the player will be notified. On the other hand, it can make us happy that our predictions were correct. On the other hand, if the player shifts to the super-temple mode even though he has predicted that the special symbol is in a low-probability state, the player will be delighted that the game state has been set to be more advantageous than expected. You can make it happen. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Furthermore, by setting the super temple mode, it is confirmed that the lottery result corresponding to the fall is not included in the hold (at least the lottery for the number of hold balls can be executed with the jackpot probability of the probable change state). Therefore, it is possible to play the game with a stronger expectation that it will be a big hit in the hold.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 475 and 476, in the 23rd embodiment, a predetermined number of times (for example, 96 times) of special symbol lottery is performed without winning a jackpot in a state where the time saving state of the normal symbol is set. The probability change continuation suggestion effect that is executed when is executed will be described. FIG. 475 is a diagram showing a display mode at the start of this probability change continuation suggestion effect. This probability change continuation suggestion effect is an effect for suggesting whether or not the game state is a probability change state, and is executed from the 96th variation display effect to the 99th variation display effect after the end of the jackpot. That is, it is an effect that is executed until immediately before the 100th special symbol lottery, which is the guaranteed number of times in the time saving state, is executed. In the 23rd embodiment, the remaining number of time reductions is subtracted at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol in the time reduction state. That is, in the time reduction state, the number of time reductions becomes 0 at the start of the 100th variation display after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, during the execution of the 100th variation display, the time reduction state has already ended (shift to the normal state). It will be in the completed state). Therefore, it is configured to notify whether or not it is in the probabilistic state at the 99th variation display effect in which the normal symbol is surely maintained in the time-saving state regardless of whether it is in the probable change state or the time-saving state. With such a configuration, it becomes difficult to specify whether or not the probabilistic change state continues until the result of the probabilistic change continuation suggestion effect is confirmed (that is, the time is shortened from the operation of the electric accessory 640a). It becomes difficult to detect whether it is in a probable change state), so that the player can be made to pay attention to the probabilistic change continuation suggestion effect.

As shown in FIG. 475, when the probability change continuation suggestion effect is started, the effect that the door 806 appears in front of the character 801 imitating the adventurer is executed. Further, above the door 806, a display area 805 is displayed in which the characters "Door breakthrough mode starts !!" and "If the door is breached, the probability change continues !?" are displayed. Further, the characters displayed between the right-handed images in the display area 803 are changed to the "door breakthrough mode". From these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that if the character 801 can break through the door, it means that the probabilistic state is continued. In this probability change continuation suggestion effect (door breakthrough mode), an effect of attacking the door 806 is executed every time the fluctuation display is executed, and if the door 806 can be finally destroyed (breakthrough), the probability change state is achieved. The effect of notifying the continuation of is executed.

FIG. 476 (a) is a diagram showing an effect mode suggesting that the degree of expectation that the probability change state continues is relatively low in the probability change continuation suggestion effect (door breakthrough mode). When this low-expectation production mode is executed, as shown in FIG. 476 (a), the character 801 imitating an adventurer destroys (breaks through) the door 806 by performing an attack that cuts the door 806 with a sword. ) The effect to be tried is executed. On the other hand, FIG. 476 (b) is a diagram showing an effect mode suggesting that the probability of continuation of the probabilistic change state is relatively high in the probabilistic change continuation suggestion effect (door breakthrough mode). When this high-expectation production mode is executed, as shown in FIG. 476 (b), the character 801 imitating an adventurer strikes the door 806 with a huge hammer to hit the door 806. The effect of destroying (breaking through) is executed.

It is intuitive to many players that hitting with a hammer is more effective than slashing with a sword to destroy the door 806, so hitting with a hammer is more effective. , It is possible to easily make the player understand that the expectation of breaking through the door 806 is high. Therefore, during the execution of the probability change continuation suggestion effect, the game can be performed with the expectation that the effect of hitting the door 806 with the hammer will be executed more times. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the 23rd embodiment, at the start of the probability change continuation suggestion effect, the lottery results from the 96th to the 99th times, which is the execution range of the probability change continuation suggestion effect, are pre-read, and the probability change state is up to the 99th special symbol lottery. It is determined whether or not is continuing, and if the probability change state continues until the 99th special symbol lottery, the selection rate of the production scenario that tends to generate a high expectation attack pattern is high. .. On the other hand, if the player has fallen into a time-saving state before the 99th special symbol lottery is executed (or was in a time-saving state after the end of the previous jackpot), a low-expectation attack pattern occurs. The configuration is such that the selection rate of easy-to-use production scenarios is high. In this way, by setting the effect mode based on the game state at the end of the effect, it is possible to more accurately notify the game state after the end of the effect.

Here, if the configuration is such that the probability change continuation suggestion effect is executed based only on the gaming state at the start of the effect, the probability change state falls to the low probability state during the execution of the probability change continuation suggestion effect, and the continuation of the probability change state is notified. Nevertheless, there is a risk that the time saving state will end with the start of the 100th special symbol lottery. In this case, there is a possibility that the player may feel distrust of the pachinko machine 10 or the hall due to the contradiction between the production content and the actual operation. In addition, as a countermeasure, it is conceivable to configure the probabilistic continuation suggestion effect by an effect that is completed by one variation, but with this method, it is difficult to secure a sufficient effect period, so there are various production modes. It becomes difficult to change.

On the other hand, in the 23rd embodiment, the probability change continuation suggestion effect is executed over the last four fluctuation displays in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is guaranteed, and the notification content of the probability change continuation suggestion effect is provided. , It is configured to be determined based on the game state at the time when the lottery of the last special symbol in the execution range of the probabilistic continuation effect is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately notify the game state at the end of the production, and it is possible to diversify the production mode. If the ball is in a probable change state at the start of the effect and the reserved ball is not held until the end of the effect, the effect is configured so that an attack pattern with a relatively high expectation is likely to occur. ing. This is lower than the probability that the lottery result corresponding to the fall will be a big hit, and it is extremely rare to fall into the low probability state of the special symbol within the production period (the probability of the probability change state is relatively high). This is because the production ends as it is).

Next, with reference to FIG. 477, the transition of various states after the end of the probabilistic jackpot in the 23rd embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 477 (a), the transition of the state in the case of falling to the low probability state within 100 times after the end of the probabilistic jackpot will be described. As shown in FIG. 477 (a), if the player falls within 100 times, the special symbol will be in a low-probability state at the time of the fall, but in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, the special symbol lottery will be executed 100 times. Continue until it is done. Then, in the probability change continuation suggestion effect executed in the 96th to 99th variation display effects, the effect of failing to break through the door 806 is executed, and the transition to the normal state is notified.

On the other hand, FIG. 477 (b) is a diagram showing the transition of the state when the special symbol falls to the low probability state in the lottery of the special symbol 100 times or later after the end of the probability variation jackpot. As shown in FIG. 477 (b), in the case of falling 100 times or more after the end of the big hit, the time saving state of the normal symbol and the probable change state of the special symbol are maintained until the fall. Therefore, in the probability change continuation suggestion effect executed over the execution period of the 96th to 99th variation display, the effect of successfully breaking through the door 806 is executed, and the continuation of the probability change state is notified.

In addition, in the 23rd embodiment, as in the case of falling in the lottery of the special symbol after 100 times, even if the big hit is made in the lottery of the special symbol during the time saving state of the normal symbol, it is normal at the start of the fluctuation. The structure is such that the time saving state of the symbol ends. Therefore, if the time saving state is terminated within the number of lottery of the special symbol within 100 times (that is, within the guaranteed number of times of the time saving state), the winning of the big hit is confirmed at that time. On the other hand, when the time saving state is terminated after 100 times (that is, after the guaranteed number of times of the time saving state has elapsed), it means that it is either a big hit or a fall. And since the probability of winning a big hit (1/125) is higher than the probability of falling (1/500), it will be a big hit even if the time saving state ends at the start of fluctuation after 100 times. Can be expected. Therefore, since the game can be performed by paying attention to whether or not the time saving state is continued, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 478, the pressing stop effect in the 23rd embodiment will be described. This pressing stop effect is an effect in which each symbol row is stopped and displayed each time the lens member (PUSH button) 10317 provided on the swing operation member 10310 is pressed. That is, it is an effect that the stop timing of each symbol sequence can be set to an arbitrary timing of the player depending on the operation timing of the PUSH button 10317 of the player.

FIG. 478 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during execution of the pressing stop effect. In this pressing stop effect, as shown in FIG. 478 (a), a button image (left button image 807aL, center button image 807aC, right button image) imitating the PUSH button 10317 is below each symbol row in the variable display. 807aR) is displayed. Further, below each button image, a valid period gauge (left valid period gauge 807bL, central valid period gauge 807bC, right valid period gauge 807bR) indicating the remaining period during which the stop operation for each symbol row is valid is displayed. .. With these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that each symbol sequence is stopped and displayed each time the PUSH button 10317 is pressed.

FIG. 478 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the player performs the first operation (pressing) on the PUSH button 10317 while the pressing stop effect is being executed. As shown in FIG. 478 (b), when the first operation (pressing) is executed, the left symbol column is stopped and displayed. If the second operation is executed within the operation valid period, the right symbol column is stopped and displayed, and if the third operation is executed, the center symbol column is stopped and displayed. In this way, by configuring the timing of the symbol stop so that the player can arbitrarily determine it, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In the case where each symbol row is stopped and displayed according to the operation timing of the player, if the player's operation is too early, the time may be too long after all the symbol rows are stopped. As a countermeasure, in the 23rd embodiment, if the stop operation is executed three times at an early stage (for example, within 1 second after the start of the valid period), the central symbol row is not immediately stopped and displayed. By configuring the stop display of the central symbol row after a specific effect, it is possible to prevent the period after the stop display from becoming too long. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 479 (a), a plurality of (designations with the characters "Change Change") including a specific symbol (a symbol with the character "Change Change") are included based on the execution of the third operation (pressing). After the three) symbols move up and down in the central symbol row (ie, after suggesting that any of the three symbols may appear as a stop symbol in the central symbol row), a particular symbol. It is configured to execute an effect (chance charge fanning effect) in which symbols other than (chance charge symbol) are stopped and displayed. In this way, depending on the length of the remaining operation valid period at the time when the stop operation of the central symbol row (third press on the PUSH button 10317) is performed, the central symbol row is immediately stopped and displayed, or the chance charge is charged. By setting the configuration to switch whether to fill the time by the fanning effect, it is possible to prevent the state in which all the symbol rows are stopped and displayed become unnaturally long. Therefore, a more natural staging mode can be realized.

In the 23rd embodiment, there is also a separate effect of a pattern in which the chance charge symbol is stopped and displayed in the central symbol row in the pressing stop effect. In this case, the chance charge symbol is stopped and displayed after the chance charge fanning effect (see FIG. 479 (a)) regardless of the timing when the stop operation for the central symbol row is executed. When the stop display of this chance charge symbol occurs, it develops into a chance charge effect (see FIG. 479 (b)) described later. By setting an effect pattern in which the chance charge symbol is actually stopped and displayed, the operation stop effect is selected as a mere off-effect effect, and even if a chance charge fanning effect occurs, there is a possibility that it will develop into a chance charge effect. It can make the player think that there is. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 479 (b) and 480, the above-mentioned effect mode of the chance charge effect will be described. FIG. 479 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 at the time when the chance charge effect is started. When the chance charge effect is started, the character 801 imitating an adventurer is displayed in the center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the surroundings are set to emit light (a mode wearing an aura). Will be done. Further, on the right side of the character 801 is a vertically long substantially rectangular shape of the air gauge KG. This spirit gauge KG is for displaying the accumulated condition of the spirit of the character 801 in a meter format, and can be displayed in 1 to 6 stages. Further, in the display area 805 displayed above the character 801 the characters "the more the spirit is accumulated, the more chances are stocked" are displayed. Further, the characters "Change Change 5 times remaining" are displayed on the display area 803. In the chance charge effect of 1, the action of the character 801 trying to accumulate the spirit is executed five times, and the amount of the accumulated spirit is the size of the light around the character 801 (the amount of the aura to be worn) and the spirit gauge KG. It is notified by the meter amount of. With these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that there are times when it is good enough to accumulate spirit.

FIG. 480 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the end of the chance charge effect. As shown in FIG. 480 (a), in addition to the size of the light around the character 801 (the amount of aura worn) and the meter amount of the spirit gauge KG, the character displayed in the display area 805 also determines how much the spirit is accumulated. Is notified. In the example of FIG. 480 (a), a state in which the spirit is accumulated up to the fifth stage out of the six stages is illustrated, and the characters "charge level 5 !!" are displayed in the display area 805. With these display contents, the player can easily understand the amount of energy finally accumulated.

The spirit gauge accumulated in the chance charge effect is consumed to generate some chance-up effect at each timing until the reserved ball is consumed at the start of the chance charge effect. The chance-up effect is an effect that raises the expectation of a big hit. Occurrence etc. can be mentioned. The spirit gauge is configured to be consumed until it reaches 0. That is, it is configured so that it is not consumed and is not discarded. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp the remaining number of chance-up effects, so that the player can be expected to play the game while looking forward to what kind of chance-up effect will occur next. .. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the 23rd embodiment, the gauge amount of the spirit gauge KG accumulated in the chance charge effect is mainly determined based on the number of reserved balls at the start of the chance charge effect. Then, after the chance charge effect is completed, the pace at which the chance-up effect is executed (that is, the spirit gauge is consumed) is changed in consideration of the lottery result of each reserved ball. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load (processing load when determining the number of gauges) at the start of the chance charge effect.

FIG. 480 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the spirit gauge is consumed. FIG. 480 (b) illustrates a case where a so-called hold change effect is executed as a chance-up effect by consuming one gauge of the spirit gauge. That is, as shown in FIG. 480 (b), the gauge amount of the air gauge KG is reduced (consumed) by one gauge, and at the same time, the display mode of the third reserved ball number symbol Hz3 in the small region Ds1 is changed from white to blue. The production that changes to (the degree of expectation increases) is executed. In this way, as the gauge amount of the spirit gauge KG decreases, some kind of effect (chance-up effect) that raises the expectation of hitting is executed, so that while the gauge amount of the energy gauge KG remains, when , You can have them play the game looking forward to what kind of chance-up effect will occur next. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 481, the time-dependent change of the display mode (effect mode) in the variable display effect in which the press stop effect is set will be described. First, referring to FIG. 481 (a), when the third stop operation (stop operation for the middle symbol row) is executed 1 second or later from the start of the valid period in the press stop effect that does not develop into the chance charge effect. The change with time of the effect mode of the above will be described. As shown in FIG. 481 (a), when the fluctuation display in which only the pressing stop effect is set (that is, the chance charge effect is not executed) is executed, it is normal until 6 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. The variation display (simply the variation display in which each symbol string fluctuates at high speed in the vertical direction) is executed, and the pressing stop effect (see FIG. 478 (a)) is started after 6 seconds have elapsed. Then, when the third stop operation is executed 1 second or later (after 2 seconds have elapsed in the example of FIG. 481 (a)) after the valid period of the pressing stop effect is started, the left symbol column that has already been stopped is executed. , And, in addition to the right symbol column, the center symbol column is displayed as a pseudo stop. The pseudo stop display means that the display is displayed in a mode that is difficult to distinguish from the final stop display (for example, a mode that vibrates with an extremely small amplitude). This pseudo stop continues until the original stop display timing of the variable display (timing when the stop command is received from the main control device 110), and when the stop display timing is reached, each symbol sequence is completely stopped and displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 481 (b), in the pressing stop effect that does not develop into a chance charge effect, the third stop operation (stop operation for the middle symbol row) is executed within a range of 1 second or less from the start of the valid period. The time-dependent change of the staging mode when the effect is performed will be described. As shown in FIG. 481 (b), when the fluctuation display in which only the pressing stop effect is set (that is, the chance charge effect is not executed) is executed, it is normal until 6 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. The variation display is executed, and when 6 seconds have elapsed, the pressing stop effect (see FIG. 478 (a)) is started. Then, when the third stop operation is executed within the range of 1 second or less (after 0.5 seconds have elapsed in the example of FIG. 481 (b)) after the valid period of the pressing stop effect is started, the chance charge fanning effect is produced. After (see FIG. 479 (a)) is executed, the effect of stopping and displaying the combination of the out-of-order symbols at the stop display timing is executed. As a result, even if the stop operation is executed three times at a relatively early stage after the start of the valid period, the period until the stop display can be connected (filled) by the chance charge fanning effect. It is possible to show the transition of the effect mode up to the stop display of. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a staging mode with less discomfort.

Next, with reference to FIG. 481 (c), the change with time of the effect mode in the case of developing into the chance charge effect will be described. As shown in FIG. 481 (c), even when the chance charge effect is developed, the transition of the effect mode is the same as the case where the chance charge effect is not executed until the press stop effect is executed. Then, in the variable display in which the chance charge effect is set, when the stop operation is executed three times in the press stop effect, the chance charge fanning effect is produced regardless of the timing of the third stop operation (FIG. 479 (a)). (See) occurs, and then 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the chance charge effect develops.

As described above, in the 23rd embodiment, even in the variable display in which only the pressing stop effect is set, the chance charge fanning effect can be executed depending on the end timing of the stop operation, so that the chance charge effect is executed. You can have a feeling of expectation for it more times. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 482 to 484, the interrupt continuous hitting effect, which is a kind of the hobby effect in the 23rd embodiment, will be described. This interrupt continuous striking effect is an effect of a display mode as if an effect different from the display effect displayed up to that point was suddenly interrupted during the normal variation display or the reach variation. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 482 (a), an image of the normal variable display effect is obtained by executing the interrupt continuous hit effect during the execution of the normal variable display effect (see FIG. 472 (b)). A cut-in area CR in which the face of the monster is displayed up is formed (displayed) by superimposing on (on the layer on the front side). That is, as shown in FIG. 482 (a), a display area (cut-in area CR) formed in a band shape in a downward direction from the upper left side to the lower right side on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. .. As shown in FIG. 482 (a), the display range of this cut-in area CR occupies about 70% of the area of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and a monster is imitated in the central portion of the cut-in area CR. The image is enlarged and displayed. Further, a display area 805 in which the characters "Monster group assault !!" is displayed is displayed (formed) above the image imitating a monster in the cut-in area CR. With these display contents, it is easy for the player to understand that an effect completely different from the effect that was executed until the cut-in area CR was displayed was executed (interrupted). Can be made to. While the cut-in area CR is formed (that is, while the interrupt continuous striking effect is being executed), the display effect that has been executed until immediately before that is interrupted. That is, all the display effects of the layer on the back side of the cut-in area CR are paused, and when the interrupt continuous hit effect ends, the effect mode is restarted from the situation at the time of interruption. The audio (musical piece) can be paused (interrupted) or played continuously depending on the situation. In the 23rd embodiment, when the interrupt continuous striking effect is executed during the execution of the normal variable display, both the display mode and the voice mode are controlled so as to be interrupted until the end of the interrupt continuous striking effect. If the interrupt continuous striking effect is executed after the reach has occurred (during the reach fluctuation), only the display mode is interrupted. This is because the flashy music (BGM) is played after the reach occurs compared to during the execution of the normal variable display, so that the relatively flashy BGM is interrupted, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. The purpose is to prevent them from being embraced.

After the interrupt continuous hitting effect is executed and the cut-in area CR displaying an image imitating a monster is formed, the player is urged to continuously press the PUSH button 10317 (continuous hitting). The display mode is displayed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 482 (b), a button image BG imitating the PUSH button 10317 is displayed in the cut-in area CR, and the operation for the PUSH button 10317 is effective below the button image BG. A gauge image GG showing the remaining period in gauge format is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, the characters "continuous hit" and an image of three arrows pointing toward the PUSH button image BG are displayed. Further, a display area 808 in which the characters "Reduce monsters by repeated hits !!" is displayed on the display area 805 and the characters "100 remaining bodies" are displayed on the right side of the button image BG is formed ( Is displayed. From these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the number of monsters can be reduced as the PUSH button 10317 is pressed within the continuous hitting valid period.

In the 23rd embodiment, as the types of interrupt continuous hitting effects, a plurality of types having at least different numbers of monsters that can be reduced during the continuous hitting valid period (lower limit of the number of remaining monsters to be displayed) are provided. Has been done. And basically, the more monsters you defeat (the number of remaining monsters is smaller), the higher the expectation of a big hit. More specifically, when the interrupt continuous hit effect is set for the variable display of the jackpot, it is possible to subdue all 100 monsters (set the number of remaining monsters to 0). While the mode can be selected, it is configured so that the number of monsters cannot be reduced to 0 (only 3 can be reduced at the maximum) in the out-of-order variable display.

In the 23rd embodiment, the number of monsters to be subdued (subtracted) by pressing the PUSH button 10317 once is changed according to the length of the remaining valid period. More specifically, the longer the remaining valid period, the smaller the number of subjugation (subtraction number) by pressing once. With this configuration, even when a player who has a fast pace of repeated hits is playing a game, it is possible to prevent the number of monsters from being subtracted to the lower limit at an early stage after the start of the production.

Here, conventionally, as a kind of hobby effect, there has been known an operation effect in which an effect mode is changed by continuously operating an operation means such as an operation button during a predetermined period. In this operation effect, the upper limit of the variable number of times (development number) of the effect mode is generally set for each effect, and when the number of operations becomes a specific number of times, the upper limit of the development mode can be changed. Things were normal. However, in the production of such specifications, when a player with a high operation speed is playing a game, the upper limit stage is developed (variable) at an early stage, so that the upper limit stage is a low expectation. There is a problem that there is a possibility that the player's interest may be impaired when the stage is at the stage of showing. Furthermore, when a player whose operation speed is slow is playing a game, the operation is performed before the specified number of operations for developing to the upper limit development mode, even though the player is actively performing the operation. The validity period has expired, which may spoil the interest of the player.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 23rd embodiment, the number of monsters to be subdued (subtracted) by pressing once is changed according to the length of the remaining valid period, and the longer the remaining valid period, the more. Since it is configured to reduce the number of subjugation, even if it is pressed at a fast pace, it is possible to prevent the number of monsters from being subdued to the lower limit at an early stage. That is, it is possible to suppress that the subtraction of the number of monsters based on pressing is stopped at the remaining 10 bodies and the remaining 4 bodies, which are easily set in the case of a loss, and the player's expectation for a big hit is impaired. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. In addition, even when a player whose pressing pace is slow is playing a game, if the pressing is performed in the latter half of the continuous hitting valid period, a relatively large number of subjugation numbers can be easily selected, so that the number of monsters reaches the lower limit. The possibility can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the interrupting continuous hitting effect even for the player whose pressing pace is slow, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 483 (a), in an effect in which continuous operation on the PUSH button 10317 is effective, such as an interrupt continuous hit effect, an operation (press) on the PUSH button 10317 is performed within the continuous hit effective period of the effect. The output mode of the voice output each time it is detected will be described. As shown in FIG. 483 (a), every time a press (operation) on the PUSH button 10317 is detected during the continuous hitting valid period, the voice data in the voice output device 226 (see FIG. 501) described later is reproduced. Of the plurality of provided channels, the audio data corresponding to the pressing is reproduced for either CN2 or CN3. More specifically, when the press is first detected during the continuous striking valid period, the first voice data (first continuous striking sound) is reproduced with respect to CN2. As shown in FIG. 483 (a), the voice data corresponding to the first continuous tapping sound is composed of voice data in which the voice "Bissie" is output by playing back. Further, when the second press is detected during the continuous striking valid period, the second voice data (second continuous striking sound) is reproduced for CN3. As shown in FIG. 483 (a), the voice data corresponding to the second continuous tapping sound is composed of voice data in which the voice "Bassie" is output by playing back. After that, every time a press is detected, the control of playing back the voice data corresponding to the first continuous hitting sound for CN2 and the control of playing back the voice data corresponding to the second continuous hitting sound for CN3 alternate. Is repeated in. In this way, by configuring the configuration to output voice data corresponding to different voices each time a press is detected, it is possible to diversify the voice mode during continuous striking. In other words, since it is possible to suppress the voice mode from becoming monotonous, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game during the continuous striking valid period. Further, in the case where the first continuous tapping sound and the second continuous tapping sound are reproduced alternately on a single channel (that is, the control of cutting off the output of one sound being played and outputting the other sound) is performed. Compared to the case of repeating configuration), it is possible to output the other sound while maintaining the state in which one sound is output (the first and second continuous tapping sounds are output in an overlapping manner). Therefore, it is possible to make the voice mode more lively during the execution of repeated hits. More specifically, in the case of a configuration in which the first continuous hitting sound and the second continuous hitting sound are alternately reproduced on a single channel, when a player who has a short continuous hitting interval performs a continuous hitting operation, the head portion of each voice data is performed. Only will be a monotonous voice mode that is repeated alternately. On the other hand, if a configuration is configured in which a plurality of audio data are sequentially reproduced on a plurality of channels, the output of one audio data reproduced on one channel is not interrupted, and other audio data on the other channel. Can be regenerated. That is, the voice based on one voice data and the voice based on other voice data can be combined and output. Therefore, since it can be configured so that the voice other than the head portion in each voice can be easily output, the voice mode can be further diversified. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the 23rd embodiment, each time a press on the PUSH button 10317 is detected, two types of voice data are alternately reproduced for two channels to diversify the voice mode. The present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be configured in which three or more types of audio data are sequentially reproduced in CN1 and CN2 in order. Thereby, the voice mode can be further diversified. Further, in this case, the number of channels for reproducing the audio data is not limited to two, and the audio data may be sequentially reproduced for three or more channels. With this configuration, from the time when one audio data is played for one channel until the next audio data is played for the same channel (the audio data being played is terminated). Since the period of can be made longer, the voice mode can be further diversified. Further, the type of the output voice data may be different depending on the interval of repeated hits. Specifically, for example, when a player playing a game with a relatively short interval of repeated hits (for example, an interval of 0.5 seconds or less), three types of voice modes are sequentially reproduced in three channels. On the other hand, when the player is playing a game with a relatively long interval of repeated hits (for example, an interval longer than 0.5 second interval), two types of audio data are sequentially transmitted to two channels. It may be configured to be reproduced (alternately). With such a configuration, it is possible to change the output mode of the sound according to the continuous striking interval, so that it is possible to realize the playability of adjusting the continuous striking interval. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the 23rd embodiment, any of the repeated hitting sounds is output in conjunction with the continuous hitting operation, but under predetermined conditions, the repeated hitting sound may be output even if the continuous hitting operation is not performed. .. More specifically, for example, when the last repeated hitting sound during the valid period of the continuous hitting operation is the first continuous hitting sound, the second continuous hitting sound may be output after the end. With this configuration, even though the first and second tapping sounds are output as a set according to the repeated tapping operation, the final output sound becomes the first continuous tapping sound. (That is, the paired second continuous tapping sound is not output), and it is possible to suppress that the voice mode is halfway. Therefore, the voice mode can be set more preferably. In this case, when the last output continuous hitting sound is the first continuous hitting sound, the control to output the second continuous hitting sound after the end is changed to the variable display corresponding to the predetermined variation type (lottery result) (lottery result). For example, it may be configured to be set only during execution of the jackpot fluctuation). With this configuration, for the player who wants to know whether or not it is a predetermined variation type, the continuous hitting sound that is output last during the interrupt continuous hitting effect is intentionally set to the first continuous hitting sound. It is possible to realize the playability. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the 23rd embodiment, the first continuous hitting sound and the second continuous hitting sound are output alternately regardless of the interval between the repeated hits of the player, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the continuous striking operation is detected in a state where the sound is not reproduced, the first continuous striking sound may be output without fail. That is, if the interval between repeated hits is too long and the interval between repeated hits is such that the next repeated hit operation is executed after the reproduction of one repeated hit sound is completed, only the first repeated hit sound is continuously output. It may be configured. With this configuration, the player who wants to diversify the voice mode can execute the continuous striking operation at a faster pace, and thus improve the player's willingness to participate in the interrupt continuous striking effect. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 483 (b), the correspondence between the pressing timing in the continuous hitting effective period of the interrupt continuous hitting effect and the subtraction number of the monsters will be described. In the example of FIG. 483, the correspondence relationship in the interrupt continuous striking effect of the type that can subdue up to 100 monsters will be described as an example. FIG. 483 (b) is a graph showing the correspondence between the elapsed time (horizontal axis) at the time when the pressing of the PUSH button 10317 is detected and the number of monsters subdued (vertical axis). As shown in FIG. 483 (b), the later the pressing timing, the larger the number of monsters subtracted (number of subjugation). As a result, even if the player presses the PUSH button 10317 at a fast pace, it is possible to prevent the player from being subdued early to the lower limit of the number of monsters. That is, it is possible to suppress that the subtraction of the number of monsters based on pressing is stopped at the remaining 10 bodies and the remaining 4 bodies, which are easily set in the case of a loss, and the player's expectation for a big hit is impaired. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. In addition, even when a player whose pressing pace is slow is playing a game, if the pressing is performed in the latter half of the continuous hitting valid period, a relatively large number of subjugation numbers can be easily selected, so that the number of monsters reaches the lower limit. The possibility can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the interrupting continuous hitting effect even for the player whose pressing pace is slow, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The correspondence between the pressing timing and the subtraction number of monsters is not limited to that shown in FIG. 483 (b), and can be arbitrarily determined. Specifically, for example, by reducing the inclination (for example, halving) the correspondence shown in FIG. 483 (b), the number of monsters is the lower limit even if the repeated hits are positively performed. It can make it more difficult to subtract monsters until it becomes. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player perform continuous hits more seriously, it is possible to further improve the player's willingness to participate in the interrupt continuous hit effect. On the other hand, on the contrary, when the inclination is increased, it is relatively easy to subtract the number of monsters until the number of monsters reaches the lower limit by repeated hits, so even a player who is not good at repeated hits can reduce the number of monsters at the lower limit. It can be easily confirmed. Therefore, even a player who is not good at continuous striking can actively participate in the interrupt continuous striking effect. Further, in the 23rd embodiment, the correspondence between the pressing timing and the subtraction number of monsters is configured to be a proportional relation (linear function), but it is a quadratic function correspondence or a logarithmic function. Any designer's correspondence can be set, such as correspondence and exponential correspondence. Further, the correspondence relationship may be configured to be different depending on the production type of the interrupt continuous striking effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to realize a game playability that allows the player to predict the jackpot expectation degree from the transition of the subtraction number in the repeated hits, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 484, the time-dependent change of the effect mode during the execution of the variable display effect in which the interrupt continuous stroke effect is set will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 484 (a), the time-dependent change of the effect mode during the execution of the variable display effect in which the interrupt continuous hit effect is not executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 484 (a), when the variable effect for which the interrupt continuous hit effect is not set is executed, the normal variable display is executed for 10 seconds. Then, while the normal variation display is being executed, the variation display BGM (musical piece 1) corresponding to the normal variation display is played back in a loop. This song 1 is composed of three melody parts, A part, B part, and C part, and by performing loop playback for 10 seconds, the playback position is exactly at the end when 10 seconds have passed. It is configured in.

Then, as shown in FIG. 484 (a), normal reach occurs after 10 seconds have elapsed, and the mode changes to the variable display mode of normal reach. When this normal reach occurs, as shown in FIG. 484 (a), the voice is switched to the BGM (musical piece 2) corresponding to the normal reach fluctuation. Similar to the music 1, the music 2 also has a playback time set so as to end in accordance with the production time of the normal reach effect by performing loop playback.

On the other hand, in the variable display effect in which the interrupt continuous hit effect occurs before the normal reach effect occurs, as shown in FIG. 484 (b), two seconds after the start of the normal variable display effect, , The normal variable display effect is interrupted, and the interrupt continuous hit effect is started (interrupted). When the interrupt continuous hitting effect is executed, not only the display mode (normal variable display effect) but also the voice (normal variable display BGM) is interrupted. Then, 9 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (7 seconds after the start of the interrupt continuous stroke effect), the interrupt continuous stroke effect is terminated, and the normal variable display effect and the variable display BGM are restarted from the interrupted portion. After that, at the timing when 17 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, the normal fluctuation display is terminated and normal reach occurs. That is, normal reach occurs after the normal fluctuation display is executed for a total of 10 seconds. After the development to the normal reach, since it is the same as the transition of the display mode in the variable display in which the interrupt continuous striking effect is not set (see FIG. 484 (a)), the description thereof is omitted here.

Further, in the variable display effect in which the interrupt continuous hit effect occurs after the normal reach effect occurs, as shown in FIG. 484 (c), the reach effect develops after the normal variable display for 10 seconds is executed. Up to this point, it is the same as the transition of the display mode of the variable display effect in which the interrupt continuous striking effect is not set (see FIG. 484 (a)). Then, when 5 seconds have passed since the development of the normal reach effect, the normal reach effect is interrupted and the interrupt continuous hit effect is executed for 7 seconds. Then, when the interrupt continuous hitting effect for 7 seconds is completed, the interrupted normal reach effect is resumed. When the interrupt continuous hitting effect is executed after the reach occurs, only the display mode is interrupted, and the audio output mode is maintained as it is. That is, the BGM for the interrupt continuous hitting effect is reproduced on another channel (for example, CN2 to CN4) while maintaining the reproduction of the BGM for the reach effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the BGM for the relatively lively reach production from being suddenly interrupted and causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

In the 23rd embodiment, the fluctuation types in which the normal reach occurs are a normal reach with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds (outside normal reach A, hit normal reach A) and a normal reach with a fluctuation time of 37 seconds (outside normal reach B, hit normal reach B). ) And are provided. That is, different variation types with different variation times are set for 7 seconds, which is the effect time of the interrupt continuous striking effect. The interrupt continuous striking effect is configured to be executed or not by lottery only when the variation time is a variation type of 37 seconds. With this configuration, by combining the staging mode that can be set for the 30-second variation pattern (30-second staging mode) and the interrupt continuous striking effect staging mode, the variation time is exactly 37 seconds. Can be filled. That is, when the interrupt continuous hitting effect is set, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated effect mode, so that the display data and the voice data can be reduced. Therefore, the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Similarly, for the variation types that do not generate reach and the variation types that develop to super reach, multiple types with different variation times of 7 seconds are set, but the interrupt continuous hitting effect is a variation type that is longer for 7 seconds. It is configured so that it can be set only for. As a result, the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be increased because the 7-second long fluctuation time can be exactly filled by simply combining the effect mode that can be selected in the 7-second short variation type and the effect mode of the interrupt continuous striking effect. It is possible to preferably perform the production without the need for it.

Here, the details will be described later, but in the 23rd embodiment, the fluctuation time of the first symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is determined by lottery in the main control device 110 with the execution of the lottery of the special symbol. The configuration is such that a determination is made and the determined fluctuation time is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a fluctuation pattern command. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 selects a variation display effect of the effect period corresponding to the variation time notified by the variation pattern command, synchronizes with the variation display of the first symbol, and synchronizes with the variation display effect of the third symbol. Is configured to execute. The fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is composed of a basic time command indicating a basic fluctuation time and an additional time command indicating an additional fluctuation time, and is the fluctuation time longer by 7 seconds? Whether or not it is configured to be notified by an additional time command. More specifically, when the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is determined, the command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as the basic time command, and the command corresponding to 0 seconds is notified as the additional fluctuation time. You will be notified. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time of 37 seconds is determined, the command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as the basic time command, and the command corresponding to 7 seconds is notified as the additional fluctuation time. .. That is, it is configured so that it can be identified whether or not the variation type is 7 seconds longer by the notification content of the additional time command. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the variable type is the lottery target for whether or not the interrupt continuous hitting effect can be executed simply by checking the content of the additional time command. In addition, when it is decided to execute the interrupt continuous striking effect, the variation time can be just filled by setting the effect mode corresponding to the variation time (7 seconds shorter variation time) notified by the basic time command. can. Therefore, it is possible to easily match the end timing of the effect mode with the end timing of the variable display effect without preparing an effect mode dedicated to the interrupt continuous striking effect, so that a suitable effect mode can be provided.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 485 to 486, a hold batch change effect, which is a kind of entertaining effect in the 23rd embodiment, will be described. This hold batch change effect is an effect that may be executed when a plurality of hold balls exist, and at least a part of the hold ball number symbols among the plurality of hold ball number symbols is one of the players. It is an effect that is changed to a display mode with high expectation based on the operation of. In FIGS. 485 to 486, there are four reserved balls, and the second reserved ball number symbol Hz2 is changed to the blue display mode, and the third reserved ball number symbol Hz3 is changed to the green display mode. , The case where the hold batch change effect is executed will be described as an example. It should be noted that the display mode of the reserved ball number symbol is configured so that the degree of expectation of a big hit increases in the order of white, blue, green, and red. The display mode of the reserved ball number symbol is basically various types acquired based on the starting prize when the starting prize (ball entering the first ball opening 64 or the second ball opening 640) is detected. It is determined based on a random number value (counter value). More specifically, from various random value values acquired at the time of starting winning, the probability of winning or not when the special symbol lottery is executed and the fluctuation type are predicted (pre-read) in advance, and according to the prediction result (pre-reading result). With the lottery probability, it is drawn to which display mode the reserved ball number symbol is set. In this lottery, the pre-reading result corresponding to the lottery result having a high expectation is controlled so that the ratio set in the reserved ball number symbol in the aspect having a high expectation becomes high. Since the timing of the start winning is variable according to the player's game situation (pace of launching the game ball, etc.), the hold batch change effect is executed independently of the variable display effect. .. That is, it is an effect that may be executed over a variable period of a plurality of variable display effects (may be within one variable period).

FIG. 485 (a) is a diagram showing a display mode at the time when the hold batch change effect is executed. This hold batch change effect may be executed when a plurality of hold balls exist at the time when a new start prize is detected. When the hold batch change effect is executed, first, the hold change character HC, which suggests the start of the hold batch change effect, frame-in the display from above the display screen into the plane. As shown in FIG. 485 (a), the pending change character HC has a portion corresponding to the face displayed in a manner imitating the PUSH button 10317. Depending on the display mode of the pending change character HC, it is possible to suggest to the player in advance that the effect of pressing the PUSH button 10371 is executed.

After the reserved change character HC appears (frames in), as shown in FIG. 485 (b), each of the reserved ball number symbols Hz1 to Hz4 is changed to a display mode imitating a rock. That is, the expectation level (display color of the reserved ball number symbol) indicated by the reserved ball number symbol is temporarily changed to a concealed state. Further, a balloon image FG imitating a balloon is displayed above the hold change character HC, and the characters "hold rank UP with the button PUSH !?" are displayed inside the balloon image FG. With this display mode, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the expectation (display color) of any of the reserved ball number symbols is improved by pressing the PUSH button 10317 to the player. can.

FIG. 486 (a) is a diagram showing a display mode when the player presses the PUSH button 10317 during the execution of the hold batch change effect. As shown in FIG. 486 (a), when the player presses the PUSH button 10317, all the reserved ball numbers that have been changed to the display mode imitating a rock, the rocks around the symbol pop off, and the normal reserved ball. An effect of returning to the display mode of several symbols is executed. Further, at this time, the degree of expectation indicated by at least a part of the reserved ball number symbols is higher than before the occurrence of the reserved batch change effect. In the example of FIG. 486 (a), the second reserved ball number symbol Hz2, which was set to the blue display mode before the execution of the hold batch change effect, was changed to the red display mode after the hold batch change effect. Shows the case.

By executing this hold batch change effect, it is confirmed that the degree of expectation indicated by at least one hold ball number symbol is increased, so that the player's expectation for a big hit can be improved. In addition, since it is not known until the PUSH button 10317 is pressed which hold ball number symbol changes (expectation increases), the operation for the PUSH button 10317 is looking forward to which hold ball number symbol changes. Can be done. Further, since the expectation degree is notified by pressing the PUSH button 10317, the notification timing can be adjusted to the player's favorite timing. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved.

FIG. 486 (b) shows a state in which the hold change character HC (mini character) fades out of the screen during the valid period of the hold batch change effect. When the hold change character HC fades out of the screen, the valid period is interrupted even if the operation valid period in the hold batch change effect remains. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 486 (b), even if the player presses the PUSH button 10317, the effect of changing the expectation of each reserved ball number symbol (see FIG. 486 (a)) is executed. There is no. The effect in which the mini character is absent is executed, for example, when another operation effect accompanied by an operation on the PUSH button 10317 conflicts with the hold batch change effect. The absence of the hold change character HC corresponding to the hold batch change effect makes it easy for the player to understand that the operation validity period has been temporarily interrupted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the PUSH button 10317 from being dissatisfied with the fact that the operation does not develop by misunderstanding that the operation for the PUSH button 10317 is effective in the hold batch change effect. Therefore, a more suitable staging mode can be realized.

<Electrical configuration in the 23rd embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 487. FIG. 487 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 488) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 488, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like use the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, drawing the display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

To set the display of the jackpot lottery and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a special hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, a special hit type counter C2 used for selecting the jackpot symbol, and the like. The stop type counter C3 used to select the stop type, the fall lottery counter C4 used for the fall lottery from the probable change state of the special symbol, the fluctuation type counter CS1 used to select the fluctuation pattern, and the special hit random number counter. The initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of C1 is used. Further, the normal hit random number counter C5 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the normal hit random number counter C5. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 502), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 511). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203qa consisting of four hold areas (hold 1st to 4th areas), and each of these areas has a ball entering the first ball entry port 64. Each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the fall lottery counter C4, and the variable type counter CS1 is stored according to the timing. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203qb consisting of four holding areas (holding 1st to 4th areas), and each of these areas has a special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203qb, and each of these areas has a second entry port 640. Each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the fall lottery counter C4, and the variable type counter CS1 are stored according to the ball entry timing. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball execution area, and is a special hit random number counter C1, a special hit type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, a fall lottery counter C4, and a variation, which are targets for executing a lottery. Each value of the type counter CS1 is stored. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203qc consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and a game ball is provided in each of these areas. The value of the normal hit random number counter C5 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the normal entry port (through gate) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The special hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 999), reaches the maximum value (for example, 999 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 999), and then becomes 0. It is configured to return. In particular, when the special hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special hit random number counter C1.

Further, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the special hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the special hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 999, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 999. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 502), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 511).

The value of the special hit random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and when the game ball enters the first entry slot 64, the value is changed. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa of the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the game ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb.

The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the special symbol jackpot random number 23 table 202qa (see FIG. 490 (a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is set. , Special symbol jackpot random number 23 When it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by the table 202qa, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number 23 table 202qa is used for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (a period in which the probability of becoming a special symbol jackpot is higher than that of the low probability time). It is divided into two types, one for the period in which the special symbol is in the probabilistic state), and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots included in each is set differently (see FIG. 490 (a)). In this way, by making the number of random numbers that become big hits different, the probability of becoming a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol.

The special hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). , It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the special hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and when the game ball enters the first entry slot 64, the value is set. Is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa (special symbol reserved ball execution area if the special symbol lottery is not being executed) of the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the game ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb of the RAM 203 (if the special symbol lottery is not being executed, the special symbol reserved ball execution area). ).

Here, if the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first symbol is displayed. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the device 37 is the one when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. Is the one at the time of the big hit of the special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb. Become.

The special hit random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 999. In this special hit random number counter C1, there are four random numbers that become big hits of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random numbers "0 to 3" are the special symbol big hit random numbers 23 for the low probability. It is stored in a table (see FIG. 490 (a)). As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that become big hits is 4 while the total number of random numbers is 1000, so the probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol is "1/250". The random number value (counter value) that becomes a big hit is common to the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are eight random numbers that are the jackpots of the special symbol, and the values "4 to 11" are stored in the special symbol jackpot random number 23 table for the high probability. (FIG. 490 (a)). As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that become big hits is 8 while the total number of random numbers is 1000, so the probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol is "1/125".

Further, the value of the special hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 491 (b), when the lottery of the first special symbol is a big hit and the value of the special hit type counter C2 is "0 to 9", the big hit type is "big hit A" (15). Round probability change jackpot). In addition, the jackpot type when the value is "10 to 49" is "big hit B" (5 round probability variation jackpot), and the jackpot type when the value is "50 to 99" is "big hit C". (5 rounds usually a big hit).

On the other hand, when the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit and the value of the special hit type counter C2 is "0 to 79", the big hit type is "big hit D" (15 round probability variation big hit). Further, when the value is "80 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit E" (15 rounds normal jackpot).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, one jackpot type is selected from five types of jackpot types (big hits A to E) depending on the type of the special symbol and the value of the random number indicated by the special hit type counter C2. It is configured to be determined.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 250, reach the maximum value (that is, 250), and then return to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type of the stop symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Examples of the stop type include "front and back off reach" in which the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol after the reach occurs, and the final stop symbol is before and after the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. "Reach other than front and rear disengagement" that stops at other than, "complete disengagement" that does not cause reach, etc. are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and when a game ball enters the first entry port 64, the value is RAM 203. Is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa (special symbol reserved ball execution area if the special symbol lottery is not being executed). Further, when the game ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is set in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb of the RAM 203 (or the special symbol reserved ball execution area if the special symbol lottery is not being executed). Stored.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, reach the maximum value (that is, 198), and then return to 0. The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the fine symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. To. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 511) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern selection 23 table 202qb (see FIG. 492 (a)), which stores a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1, is the main control device 110. It is provided in ROM 202.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 492 and 493, the variation pattern selection 23 table 202qb used when the main control device 110 selects the variation pattern will be described. FIG. 492 (a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 23 table 202qb. As shown in FIG. 492 (a), the variation pattern selection 23 table 202qb in the 23rd embodiment has a symbol variation for showing the lottery result of the special symbol when the special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state. When the special symbol lottery is executed in the normal table 202qb1 referred to for determining the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the game state (probability change state and time reduction state) in which the time reduction state of the normal symbol is set, the symbol variation It is composed of at least a probability variation / time saving table 202qb2, which is referred to for determining the fluctuation time of.

First, the normal table 202qb1 will be described with reference to FIG. 492 (b). FIG. 492 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the normal table 202qb1. Various fluctuation patterns are defined in the normal table 202qb1 corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are defined for each of the fluctuation patterns. The value of is assigned. In addition, when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, it varies according to the determined jackpot type (the jackpot type determined from the jackpot type selection 23 table 202qd according to the acquired special hit type counter C2 value). The pattern is set. Specifically, the type of the special symbol (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special diagram 1), the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit, and the value of the acquired stop type selection counter C3 is "0 to 50". When the value of the acquired fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 180", the normal reach A is defined as the fluctuation pattern per 30 seconds of fluctuation time. When the normal reach A is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 30 seconds and an additional time of 0 seconds is output as a fluctuation pattern command. Since the additional time is 0 seconds, when the normal reach A is notified to the voice lamp control device 113, the interrupt continuous striking effect (see FIG. 482) is not executed as described above. When the value of the acquired stop type selection counter C3 is "0 to 50" and the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "181 to 198", the variation pattern is normal reach B per 37 seconds of variation time. Is stipulated. When the normal reach B is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 30 seconds and an additional time of 7 seconds is output as a fluctuation pattern command. Since the additional time is 7 seconds, when the normal reach B is notified to the voice lamp control device 113, whether or not the interrupt continuous hitting effect (see FIG. 482) can be executed is drawn by lottery as described above.

Further, as shown in FIG. 492 (b), the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is "51 to 250" and the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 150" as a variation pattern. Super reach A per 60 seconds of fluctuation time is defined, and super reach B per 67 seconds of fluctuation time is defined in the range where the value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "151 to 198". In the hit super reach A, since the additional time is 0 seconds, there is no possibility that the interrupt continuous hitting effect is executed, while in the hit super reach B, the additional time command indicating that the additional time is 7 seconds is voiced. Since the lamp control device 113 is notified, it is drawn whether or not the interrupt continuous hitting effect can be executed.

Further, when the symbol type is special figure 1 and the hit / fail determination result is incorrect, similarly, as shown in FIG. 492 (b), the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the value of the variable type counter CS1 correspond to each other. Therefore, a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation time of 8 seconds to 67 seconds is set is defined. Even in the case of deviation, in the fluctuation pattern in which the additional time command corresponding to the additional time of 7 seconds is specified, the voice lamp control device 113 is drawn to determine whether or not the interrupt continuous hitting effect can be executed, while the additional time of 0 seconds is specified. In the fluctuation pattern in which the additional time command corresponding to is specified, the interrupt continuous hitting effect is not executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 492 (b), when the symbol type is special figure 2, when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit (big hit D, big hit E), the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variable type selection counter. Regardless of the value of CS1, long fluctuation A per 150 seconds of fluctuation time is specified as the fluctuation pattern, and if the result of the hit / fail judgment is incorrect, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 Regardless of the value, a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 150 seconds is specified. This is because the game efficiency is deteriorated when a right-handed hit is performed in an attempt to execute a lottery for the second special symbol, which is advantageous in the distribution of jackpots in the normal state (that is, the ratio of winning jackpots is high). The purpose is to suppress the irregular game method of hitting right at normal times.

Next, with reference to FIG. 493, the specified contents of the probability change / time saving table 202qb2 will be described. As shown in FIG. 493, various fluctuation patterns are set in the probability change / time saving table 202qb2 in accordance with the lottery result of the special symbol, and the stop type selection counter C3 is set for each of the fluctuation patterns. The value of is assigned to the value of the variable type counter CS1. In the probability variation / time saving table 202qb2, a relatively short fluctuation time can be easily set with respect to the normal table 202qb1, and the fluctuation time common to the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. The only difference is that is configured to be selected, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted here. By configuring so that a short fluctuation time can be easily set, it is possible to execute a special symbol lottery more efficiently than in other game states during the probabilistic state in which the time reduction state of the normal symbol is set and the time reduction state. can do.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 488. The normal hit random number counter C5 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the normal hit random number counter C5 makes one round, the value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the normal hit random number counter C5. In the present embodiment, the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 is updated periodically, for example, at each timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the through gate 67, and the normal symbol of the RAM 203 is held. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203qc.

The value of the random number that is the hit of the normal symbol is defined in the normal hit random number 23 table 202qc (see FIG. 490 (b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 is set. , Ordinary hit random number 23 When it matches the value of the random number to be the hit specified in the table 202qc, it is determined to be the hit of the normal symbol. In addition, this normal hit random number 23 table 202qc is for a low probability time of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state) and a high probability time (normal symbol) with a higher probability of hitting a normal symbol than the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for (a period in which the time is shortened) and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently (see FIG. 490 (b)). In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be hit different, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability time of the normal symbol and the high probability time of the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 490 (b), when the probability of the normal symbol is low, there are two random values that are hit by the normal symbol, and the values are "5, 6". As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that become a jackpot is 2 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/120".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol and the game ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 is obtained. In, the variation display of the normal symbol is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired normal hit random number counter C5 is within the range of "5, 6", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a is released only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits, but it is opened. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random numbers are stored in the normal hit random number 23 table for high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random random values is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "1 / 1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol and the game ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 is obtained. In, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired normal hit random number counter C5 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol. In this case, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the electric accessory 640a is opened "1 second x 2 times". Will be done. In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is further shortened. Since it becomes very long as "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the second entry port 640. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a is released only "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbol hits, but the opening time and the like. The number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 2 times".

The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the normal hit random number counter C5 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 502). , Is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 511).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 487, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 488, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, and I / O. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 511) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 510) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (see FIG. 509) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Next, the specific contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. 489 (a). FIG. 489 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the present embodiment. In the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, as a part of the above-mentioned fixed value data, a special symbol jackpot random number 23 table 202qa, a variation pattern selection 23 table 202qb, a normal hit random number 23 table 202qc, a jackpot type selection 23 table 202qd, a fall lottery At least the table 202qe and the open pattern selection table 202qf are stored.

The special symbol jackpot random number 23 table 202qa (see FIG. 490 (a)) is a data table in which the correspondence between the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the lottery result is defined. Specifically, "0 to 3" is defined as a range of judgment values to be judged as a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol, and the judgment to be judged as a big hit in the high probability state (probability change state) of the special symbol. “4 to 11” is specified as the range of values (see FIG. 490 (a)). When the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired based on the start prize matches any of the judgment values corresponding to the jackpot specified in the special symbol jackpot random number 23 table 202qa (see FIG. 490 (a)). , It is determined that it is a big hit of a special symbol.

The jackpot type selection 23 table 202qd (see FIG. 491 (a)) is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored for each special symbol type, and the determination value of the special hit type counter C2 is set. , It is specified in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the big hit type selection 23 table 202qd, and the special hit type is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the counter C2 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 491 (a), the jackpot type selection 23 table 202qd is referred to for determining the jackpot type when a jackpot is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol (lottery of special figure 1). Fig. 1 23 tables 202qd1 for big hits and special figure 2 23 tables 202qd2 for big hits that are referred to to determine the big hit type when a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol (lottery of special figure 2). At least configured. First, with reference to FIG. 491 (b), the details of the special figure 1 jackpot 23 table 202qd1 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 491 (b), the value of the special hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 9" in association with "big hit A" (see FIG. 491 (b)). This "big hit A" has 15 rounds, and after the big hit is completed, a probable change state is given (an opening / closing pattern that enables the ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a during the period distributed to the V region is set. ) It's a big hit. Of the 100 counter values that the special hit type counter C2 can take, the counter value that becomes "big hit A" is 10, so if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit A" is determined. The ratio is 10% (10/100). This "big hit A" has the largest number of rounds in the jackpot of the first special symbol, and is given an advantageous probability change state after the jackpot ends, so that the most advantageous jackpot in the jackpot of the first special symbol It is a type.

Further, in the range where the value of the special hit type counter C2 is "10 to 49", "big hit B" is associated and defined (see FIG. 491 (b)). This "big hit B" has 5 rounds, and after the big hit is completed, a probable change state is given (an opening / closing pattern is set so that the ball can be entered into the specific winning opening 65a during the period when the ball is distributed to the V area. ) It's a big hit. Of the 100 counter values that the special hit type counter C2 can take, the counter value that becomes "big hit B" is 40, so if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit B" is determined. The ratio is 40% (40/100). Although the number of rounds of this "big hit B" is smaller than that of "big hit A", it is a relatively advantageous big hit type because it is given an advantageous probability change state after the end of the big hit.

Further, in the range where the value of the special hit type counter C2 is "50 to 99", "big hit C" is associated and defined (see FIG. 491 (b)). This "big hit C" has 5 rounds, and after the big hit is completed, a time saving state is given (an opening / closing pattern is set so that the ball cannot be entered into the specific winning opening 65a during the period when the ball is distributed to the V area. It is a big hit. Of the 100 counter values that the special hit type counter C2 can take, 50 are counter values that become "big hit C", so if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit C" is determined. The ratio is 50% (50/100). This "big hit C" is the most unfavorable jackpot type among the jackpots of the first special symbol because the number of rounds is the smallest and the game state after the jackpot is set to a relatively disadvantageous time saving state. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 491 (c), the details of the special figure 2 jackpot 23 table 202qd2 will be described. As shown in FIG. 491 (c), the value of the special hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 79" in association with "big hit D" (see FIG. 491 (c)). This "big hit D" has 15 rounds, and after the big hit is completed, a probable change state is given (an opening / closing pattern that enables the ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a during the period distributed to the V region is set. ) It's a big hit. Of the 100 counter values that the special hit type counter C2 can take, 80 counter values are "big hit D", so "big hit D" is determined when a big hit is obtained in the second special symbol lottery. The ratio is 80% (80/100). This "big hit D" is the most advantageous jackpot type because it has the largest number of rounds among the jackpots and is given an advantageous probability variation state after the jackpot ends.

Further, as shown in FIG. 491 (c), the value of the special hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of “80 to 99” in association with “big hit E” (see FIG. 491 (c)). ). This "big hit E" has 15 rounds, and after the big hit is completed, a time saving state is given (an opening / closing pattern is set so that the ball cannot be entered into the specific winning opening 65a during the period when the ball is distributed to the V area. It is a big hit. Of the 100 counter values that the special hit type counter C2 can take, 20 counter values are "big hit E", so if a big hit is obtained in the second special symbol lottery, "big hit E" is determined. The ratio is 20% (20/100). Although this "big hit E" has the largest number of rounds among the big hits, it is a big hit type that is disadvantageous in terms of the game state after the big hit because a disadvantageous time saving state is given after the big hit ends.

As described above, in the 23rd embodiment, when a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the first special symbol, the probabilistic big hit (big hit A, B) is determined at a rate of 50%, while the second When a big hit is made by a special symbol lottery, the probability variable big hit (big hit D) is determined at a rate of 80%. Therefore, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, the player can be expected to have a stronger expectation of a probable change state. As described above, in the 23rd embodiment, when the jackpot type is clearly indicated to the player, it is extremely rare (1% in the case of a probability variation jackpot). Then, after the big hit is completed, the time saving state of the normal symbol is maintained until the lottery of the special symbol is executed 100 times. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the probabilistic state is set or the time saving state is set from the end of the big hit to the execution of the special symbol lottery 100 times. Even if an unfavorable time saving state is set, the game can be played with the expectation that it will be in a probable change state until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times. Also, if a big hit occurs within 100 times, even if it is a big hit in a time-saving state, it can be made to think that it was a big hit during the probable change state, so it is possible to enter the probable change state more than it should be. It can make you feel as if the rate and continuation rate are high. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

The normal hit random number 23 table 202qc (see FIG. 490 (b)) is a data table in which the hit determination value of the normal symbol is defined (stored). Specifically, in the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol, "5, 6" is defined as the determination value for hitting the normal symbol (see FIG. 490 (b)). Further, in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, "5 to 204" is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the ordinary symbol (see FIG. 490 (b)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the 23rd embodiment, the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 acquired based on the passage of the game ball through the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67 and the normal hit random number 23 table 202qc are obtained. By referring to it, it is judged whether or not it is a hit of a normal symbol.

The variation pattern selection 23 table 202qb (see FIG. 492 (a)) is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode. Since the details of the variation pattern selection 23 table 202qb are as described above in the description of the variation type counter CS1, the detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

The fall lottery table 202qe is a data table in which the determination value of the fall lottery counter C4, which is determined to be a fall, is defined. The value of the fall lottery counter C4 acquired when the ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 (at the time of the start winning) in the probabilistic state of the special symbol is the fall lottery table 202qe. If it matches any of the judgment values specified in, it is set to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol (to fall).

More specifically, two determination values of "0, 1" are defined as determination values for determining a fall in the probable change state of the special symbol. Here, the fall lottery counter C4 is a loop counter whose value is updated in the range of "0 to 999". Of the 1000 possible values of the fall lottery counter C4, there are two judgment values that are determined to fall, so the probability of falling (shifting to the low probability state of the special symbol) in the probabilistic state of the special symbol. Is 1/500 (2/1000).

In the fall lottery table 202qe in the present embodiment, only the determination value for determining whether or not the special symbol has fallen in the probabilistic state (determination value for the probabilistic state of the special symbol) is defined, and the special symbol is specified. The judgment value for the low probability state of is not specified. This is because it is a waste of processing to determine whether or not to shift to the low-probability state of the special symbol when the special symbol is already in the low-probability state.

In the present embodiment, the fall lottery table 202qe is compared with the regularly updated fall lottery counter C4, and whether or not to shift (fall) from the probabilistic state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol. Is determined. That is, the timing of transition from the probable change state to the time saving state can be randomized. Therefore, when the probabilistic state shifts to the probabilistic state, the player can play the game while having a feeling of tension that he / she does not know when the probable change state will end, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the 23rd embodiment, it was drawn (determined) whether or not to shift (fall) from the probabilistic state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol, but it is decided to shift to another state. It may be configured so that lottery (judgment) is possible. For example, whether or not to shift from the time saving state of the normal symbol to the normal state of the normal symbol may be determined by a lottery executed for each change. As a result, the number of times the normal symbol can be continued in the shortened time state can be made random, so that the game can be played with a sense of tension in this case as well. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

The open pattern selection table 202qf is a data table in which data for setting a pattern according to the jackpot type is defined as an open pattern (opening / closing pattern of the specific winning opening 65a) in the fifth round of the jackpot. Although not shown in the figure, in the fifth round of the probabilistic jackpot (big hit A, B, D), the distribution device (V accessory) is arranged in a state of distributing the game ball to the first region (V region). During the open period (5 seconds to 10 seconds after the start of the 5th round), the game ball can reach the distribution device (5 seconds to 9 from the start of the 5th round). The data for setting the opening period (opening period until the lapse of 5 seconds) is read out. On the other hand, in the fifth round of the normal jackpot (big hits C and E), the period (starting the fifth round) in which the distribution device (V accessory) is arranged in a state of distributing the game ball to the second region (non-V region). Set an open period (4.5 seconds from immediately after the start of the 5th round to 4.5 seconds after the start of the 5th round) during which the game ball can reach the distribution device during the period from immediately after to 5 seconds. The data to be read is read out.

Next, the details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. 489 (b). FIG. 489 (b) is a block diagram showing a configuration of RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 486 (b), the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203qc, a special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203qd, and a special symbol. 2 Hold ball number counter 203qe, Normal symbol hold ball number counter 203qf, Time saving medium counter 203qg, Probability change flag 203qh, Big hit start flag 203qi, Big hit medium flag 203qj, Probability change setting flag 203qk, Probability change pass counter 203qm, Winning number counter 203qp, Remaining It has at least a ball timer flag 203qq, a remaining ball timer 203qr, a probability variation effective flag 203qs, a probability variation effective timer 203qt, a discharge number counter 203qu, and other memory areas 203z.

The special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203qa has four hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area), and each of these areas has a special hit random number counter C1, a special hit type counter C2, and a special hit type counter C2. The values of the stop type selection counter C3, the fall lottery counter C4, and the variable type counter CS1 are stored.

More specifically, each value of each counter C1 to C4, CS1 is acquired at the timing when the game ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting winning), and the acquired data is the four holding areas. Among the vacant areas (holding 1st area to holding 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the values of the counters C1 to C4 and CS1 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa are the special symbols. It is shifted (moved) to the reserved ball execution area (see FIG. 488), and a determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C4 and CS1 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the special symbol hold ball execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having a smaller area number. Will be done. In the 23rd embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa, the data shift is performed only for the reserved area (reserved second area to reserved fourth area) in which the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb has four reserved areas as in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa. In the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb, each counter value acquired based on the start winning to the second ball entry port 640 is stored. Since the method of storing the counter value is the same as that of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203qc has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). A random number counter C5 is normally stored in each of these areas. More specifically, the value of the counter C5 is acquired at the timing when the game ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding). Among the vacant areas of the 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb, the winning order is maintained and the data corresponding to the winning is stored. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C5 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203qc is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed based on the value of the counter C5 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb, A shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in another holding area is packed into the holding area one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of times of waiting) of the variable display (variation display performed by the display device 81) up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a game ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. Is added by 1 (see Z404 in FIG. 505). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see Z210 in FIG. 503).

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd (holding number N1 of the variation display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (Z211 in FIG. 503, Z405 in FIG. 505). reference). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203qd is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 holds the fluctuation display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203qd is changed. The value of the number of balls itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223qa of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual reserved ball in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry (starting prize) into the second entry port 640. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of times of waiting) of the variable display (variation display performed by the display device 81) up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a game ball enters the second entry port 640 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. Is added by 1 (see Z410 in FIG. 505). On the other hand, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see Z205 in FIG. 503). The value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command, similarly to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203qf is a reserved ball number (2nd symbol) of the normal symbol (second symbol) variable display performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the game ball at the normal entry port (through gate) 67. It is a counter that counts the number of times of waiting) up to 4 times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203qf is set to zero, and each time the game ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value 4. (See Z704 in FIG. 508). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203qf is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see Z605 in FIG. 507).

When the game ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203qf (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 is acquired. , The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203qc (Z705 in FIG. 508). On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203qf is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203qc (Z703 in FIG. 508: No).

The time saving medium counter 203qg is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203qg is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203qg is 0 and the probability variation flag 203qh is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. The initial value of the time saving / medium counter 203qg is set to zero, a special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110, and 100 is set at the end of the big hit every time a big hit is made (FIG. 514). See Z1303). Further, regardless of the jackpot type, when a jackpot is obtained by lottery of a special symbol, the value is set to 0 at the start of the variable display indicating the jackpot (see Z310 in FIG. 504). By configuring the value to be set to 0 at the start of the variation display indicating the jackpot, there is a possibility that the time saving state has ended, such as the normal symbol being out of the range during the variation display executed in the time saving state of the normal symbol. When a certain behavior occurs, the expectation for a big hit can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

When a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203qg and the state of the probability variation flag 203qh are referred to, and the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203qg is 1 or more, or the probability variation flag 203qh is on. For example, it is determined that the time is shortened for a normal symbol. In this case, a lottery of ordinary symbols is performed based on the ordinary random number 23 table 202qc for high probability (see Z609 in FIG. 507). On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203qg is 0 and the probability variation flag 203qh is off, it is determined to be the normal state of the normal symbol, and it is normal based on the normal random number 23 table 202qc for low probability time. A lottery of symbols is performed (see Z610 in FIG. 507).

The probability change flag 203qh is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol. If the probability change flag 203qh is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol. If the flag 203qh is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state of a special symbol. Further, as described above, during the probabilistic state of the special symbol, the time is shortened for the normal symbol. Therefore, when the probability change flag 203qh is on, it is shown that the special symbol is in the probability change state and the normal symbol is in the time saving state.

The initial value of the probability change flag 203qh is set to off, and when the game ball enters the first region (V region) in the variable winning device 65 in the fifth round of the jackpot, at the end of the jackpot. Set to on (see Z1302 in FIG. 514). Further, the probability change flag 203qh is reset to off when the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained in the probability change state (see Z305 in FIG. 504) and when the change display of the jackpot is started (see Z310 in FIG. 504). Will be.

This probability change flag 203qh is referred to in the special symbol change start processing 23 for determining whether or not the gaming state is the probability change state (see Z302 in FIG. 504). Specifically, when the special symbol change start processing 23 (FIG. 504, Z208) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol change start processing 23 (FIG. 504, Z208), the probability variation flag 203qh is referred to, and if it is on, the fall lottery is first executed, and if it is not, the first random number table for high probability is used. A special symbol lottery is performed based on 202qa (see FIG. 490 (a)). On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203qh is off, or the probability variation flag 203qh is on, and it is determined that the player has fallen by the fall lottery, the special symbol jackpot random number 23 table 202qa for low probability (FIG. 490 (a)). Based on (see), a lottery of special symbols will be held.

Further, the probability variation flag 203qh is also referred to in the normal symbol variation processing 23 for determining whether or not the gaming state is the time saving state (Z608, Z614, Z620 in FIG. 507). Specifically, if the probability variation flag 203qh and the above-mentioned time reduction / medium counter 203qg are referred to in the normal symbol variation processing 23 and the probability variation flag 203qh is on or the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203qg is 1 or more. , It is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state, and a lottery of the normal symbol is performed based on the normal hit random number 23 table 202qc (see FIG. 490 (b)) for high probability time (see Z609 in FIG. 507). On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203qh is off and the value of the time saving / medium counter 203qg is 0, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the normal state, and the second random number table 202qc for low probability time (FIG. 490 (FIG. 490). b) A lottery of ordinary symbols is performed based on (see Z610 in FIG. 507). Further, in the ordinary symbol variation processing 23, the probability variation flag 203qh is also referred to when determining the variation time of the ordinary symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a in the case of hitting the ordinary symbol (Z614 in FIG. 507). , Z620).

The jackpot start flag 203qi is a flag indicating whether or not to start the jackpot. If the jackpot start flag 203qi is on, it means that it is the timing to start the jackpot, and if it is off, it means that it is not the timing to start the jackpot. The jackpot start flag 203qi is set to ON when the end timing of the variation display indicating the jackpot is reached (see Z217 in FIG. 503). Further, the jackpot start flag 203qi is set to off when the jackpot start is set (see Z1103 in FIG. 512).

The jackpot middle flag 203qj is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot (special game state) is in progress. If the jackpot flag 203qj is on, it means that the jackpot is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the jackpot is not in progress. The jackpot middle flag 203qj becomes a jackpot by a lottery of a special symbol, and is set to on when the jackpot (special game state) is started (see Z1103 in FIG. 512). It is also set to off at the end of the jackpot (special game state) (see Z1305 in FIG. 514). In the special symbol variation processing 23 (see FIG. 503), the jackpot hit flag 203qj is referred to to determine whether or not the jackpot is hit (see Z201 in FIG. 503).

The probability change setting flag 203qk is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the probability change state after the big hit game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probabilistic state is determined by whether or not the gaming ball has entered the first region (V region) during the jackpot game. Here, when it is detected that the game ball has entered the first region (passage of the probability variation switch provided in the first region), the probability variation setting flag 203qk is set to ON (Z1415 in FIG. 515). .. On the other hand, this probability variation setting flag 203qk is set to off at the end of the jackpot (see Z1305 in FIG. 514). The probability variation setting flag 203qk is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is set to off.

If the probability change setting flag 203qk is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the probability change switch has passed before the power is turned off, and if it can be determined that the probability change switch has passed, the probability change setting flag 203qk is used. May be officially set to on and configured to return. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the probability change switch has passed before the power is turned off by checking whether the probability change passage counter 203qm, which will be described later, has a value larger than 0. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the damage on the amusement shop side by rewriting only the probability change setting flag 203qk to be turned on and determining the fraud that the power is turned on again when the power is turned off. can.

The probability variation passage counter 203qm is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the probability variation switch (entered the V region) in one round during the jackpot game (in this embodiment, one round of the jackpot). .. It is possible to determine whether all the game balls that have won in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 have been discharged from the sum of the probability variation passing counter 203qm and the discharge number counter 203q described later. The probability variation passage counter 203qm is incremented and updated by 1 when the probability variation switch is passed (the ball entering the V region is detected) (Z1414 in FIG. 515). Further, after executing the determination process of whether or not the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 65 and the number of ejected balls match, the initial value is reset to "0" (Z1511 in FIG. 516). The probability variation pass counter 203qm is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The winning number counter 203qp is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game, and the winning in the specific winning opening 65a is detected. Is added and updated one by one (Z1403 in FIG. 515). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes won in the variable winning device 65 (value of the winning number counter 203qp) and the number discharged (total value of the discharge number counter 203q and the probability variation passing counter 203qm) are one. After it is determined whether or not it is done, it is reset to the initial value "0" (see Z1511 in FIG. 516). The value of the winning number counter 203qp is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The remaining ball timer flag 203qq is a flag indicating whether or not the ball brushing period is after the end of one round and the closing of the specific winning opening 65a. When this remaining ball timer flag 203qq is set to on, it means that it is a ball brushing period. While the remaining ball timer flag 203qq is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203qr, which will be described later, is incremented and updated by 1 (see Z1505 in FIG. 516). The remaining ball timer 203qr is a counter for determining the time since the specific winning opening 65a is closed, and determines whether the time required for the game ball in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed. It is a counter for.

The remaining ball timer 203qr is required to eject the game ball that has won the variable winning device 65 when the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is closed after one round set in advance is completed. It is a counter for determining whether time has passed. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball winning in the variable winning device 65 to be ejected is 0.5 seconds, and in the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 0.8 seconds in advance is the remaining ball timer. It is set as the upper limit of 203qr. Based on the upper limit of the remaining ball timer 203qr (0.8 seconds in this embodiment), it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the variable winning device 65 and the number of ejections thereof match. (Z1507 in FIG. 516). If they do not match, an error command is set to notify that fact. Therefore, it is possible to notify at an early stage that the game ball is jammed in the variable winning device 65. In addition, the ball is illegally left in the variable winning device 65, and the game ball is transferred to the distribution device (V character) at the timing when 5 seconds have passed from the start of the 5th round of the jackpot C and the jackpot E. It is possible to suppress fraud that causes it to flow down.

If the number of winnings and the number of ejects do not match, a dedicated flag is set to on, and if that flag is on, the probability change setting flag 203qk is turned on even if the game ball passes through the probability change switch. It may be configured not to be set to. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an illegally assigned probabilistic state.

The probability change effective flag 203qs passes (enters the V area) when the game ball passes through the probability change switch (enters the V area) after the V accessory is switched to the arrangement that cannot be distributed to the first area (V area). It is a flag for determining whether or not to enable (entering a ball). When the probability change effective flag 203qs is set to ON, it indicates that it is a normal period for the game ball to pass through the probability change switch.

The probabilistic valid timer 203qt is a counter for counting the time after the above-mentioned probabilistic valid flag 203qs is set to ON. After the V accessory is switched to the non-V side arrangement by this probability change effective timer 203qt, it is possible to determine the period required for normally passing through the probability change switch. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball that has reached the V accessory to pass through the probability change switch is 0.3 seconds. The upper limit of the probability change effective timer 203qt is set to a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds, and even if the probability change switch is passed after that, it is determined to be invalid and is not determined to be passed.

As a result, the game ball can be illegally entered into the V region and passed through the probability change switch, the game ball can be pushed up and passed by a piano wire or the like from below the probability change switch, or the magnetic sensor can be erroneously detected by radio waves or the like. It is possible to suppress the damage caused by fraud.

The discharge number counter 203qu is a counter for counting the number of game balls discharged from the variable winning device 65 in one round. The ejection number counter 203qu is reset to the initial value of 0 after the coincidence between the number of balls won in the variable winning device 65 and the ejection number is determined (Z1511 in FIG. 516).

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

As described above, the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is provided with various counters and flags.

Next, with reference to FIG. 494, the method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10 realized by performing control based on various tables defined in ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in RAM 203. explain. FIG. 494 is a diagram showing a method of transitioning the state of the pachinko machine 10 in the 23rd embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 494, the pachinko machine 10 of the 23rd embodiment is roughly divided into three gaming states. That is, the normal state shown in the upper part of FIG. 494, the probabilistic state shown in the middle part of FIG. 494, and the time saving state shown in the lower part of FIG. 494 are provided.

As described above, the normal state indicates a low probability state of the special symbol and a normal state of the normal symbol, the probability of becoming a big hit is low, and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second entrance 640. (It is difficult for the electric accessory 640a to be released), which is the most disadvantageous game state for the player. Further, as described above, the probabilistic change state indicates the probabilistic change state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol, the jackpot probability is high, and the right-handed hit to the second entrance 640. Since the game ball enters frequently, it is the most advantageous game state for the player. In addition, the time saving state indicates a low probability state of a special symbol and a time saving state of a normal symbol, and although the jackpot probability is low, the game ball can be moved to the second entrance 640 by hitting right. Since the ball is frequently entered, the game state is relatively advantageous for the player.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 494, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal state to another state only when a big hit occurs. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 494, it becomes a jackpot of the first special symbol, and when either jackpot A or B is selected as the jackpot type, the game ball moves to the V area in the fifth round of the jackpot. On condition that the ball is entered, it shifts to the probable change state after the big hit. In jackpots A and B, it is possible to put a game ball into the V region by simply hitting right in the 5th round. If no game ball enters the V area in the 5th round due to the player not launching the game ball in the 5th round, the game state after the big hit is shortened. Set. On the other hand, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 494, when the jackpot C is selected as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, it is impossible (difficult) to put the game ball into the V region in the fifth round of the jackpot. ), So after the big hit is over, it shifts to the time saving state.

Further, as shown in the interruption of FIG. 494, from the probable change state to another state, there is a possibility of shifting to another gaming state when a big hit is made or when the player falls in a fall lottery. Specifically, when the jackpot is reached in the probability change state and the jackpot E is determined at a rate of 20%, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the time saving state. Further, even if the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained in the fall lottery before the lottery of the special symbol is executed 100 times after being set to the probabilistic state, the time is shortened. Further, after the special symbol lottery has been executed 100 times or more after being set to the probabilistic state, if the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained in the fall lottery, the state shifts to the normal state. On the other hand, when the jackpot is reached in the probabilistic state and the jackpot D is determined at a rate of 80%, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the probabilistic state again (looping the most advantageous probabilistic state). Therefore, in the probable change state, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that it will be a big hit before it falls and that it will be a big hit D.

Further, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 494, from the time saving state to another game state, in addition to the case where the big hit is won, when the lottery of the specified number of special symbols is executed after the big hit is completed, another Move to the state. More specifically, when the jackpot is reached in the time saving state and the jackpot D is determined at a rate of 80%, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the most advantageous probability variation state. In addition, the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times after the previous jackpot is completed, so that the state shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state. On the other hand, when the jackpot E is determined at a rate of 20% when the jackpot of the second special symbol is reached, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the time saving state again (time saving state). Loop). In the time-saving state, the probability of winning a jackpot is 1/250, which is the same as in the normal state, so it is not very likely that you will win the jackpot again within 100 times (it will be a jackpot again at a rate of about 33%). .. Therefore, when the time is shortened, there is a high possibility that the state will shift to the normal state. As described above, it is difficult to accurately distinguish between the time saving state and the probabilistic change state (operations other than the jackpot probability, such as the operation mode of the electric accessory 640a, are the same), so that the time saving state of the normal symbol is the same. While is set, the player can continue to have a sense of expectation that he / she is in a probabilistic state. In other words, even if a time saving state that is disadvantageous (that is, it is easy to shift to the normal state) is set as compared with the probabilistic state, it is possible to make the player feel as if he / she is playing the game in the probable change state. You can keep your motivation for the game high. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

As described above, in the 23rd embodiment, since it is possible to provide a novel game property that goes back and forth between the three types of game states, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Returning to FIG. 487, the description will be continued. The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a large opening solenoid for closing or opening the specific winning opening 65a, and an electric function. A solenoid 209 including a solenoid for driving an object is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115 are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is a signal output from the various switches 208. Or, various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interruption process (see FIG. 509) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the game ball, the launch strength of the game ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. be. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the game ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of the handle 51, and the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is a display control such as an audio output in the audio output device 226, an on / off output in the lamp display devices (illumination units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variable display effect (variable display). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the device 114. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, a PUSH button 10317, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or super reach. The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content of the time, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 495 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The ROM 222 includes a variation pattern selection table 222qa, a rear mode lottery table 222qb, a hold change lottery table 222qc, a change point calculation table 222qd, a batch change lottery table 222qe, a chance charge lottery table 222qf, and a continuation suggestion effect selection table. It has at least 222qg and a continuous interrupting lottery table 222qh.

In the variation pattern selection table 222qa, the voice lamp control device 113 is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110, and the rough variation content (variation time, variation type (reach, deviation, etc.) indicated by the variation pattern command). ) To determine more detailed fluctuation details. This makes it possible to determine a wider variety of variation modes. Here, one of a plurality of types of variation mode is determined by lottery with respect to the rough variation content instructed by the main control device 110.

The rear mode lottery table 222qb is data for drawing a change in the rear mode for indicating the degree of expectation that the probabilistic state is set in the game state (probability change state, time reduction state) in which the time reduction state of the normal symbol is set. Is a specified data table. The details of the rear mode lottery table 222qb will be described with reference to FIG. 496. FIG. 496 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the rear mode selection table 222qb.

As shown in FIG. 496, the rear mode lottery table 222qb is in the rear mode in a state where it is confirmed that the current game state is in a probable change state and the lottery result corresponding to the fall is not included in the hold. To draw a change in the rear mode when the table for continuation of probability change referred to for drawing changes and the lottery result corresponding to the fall are included in the hold even though the current game state is in the probability change state. It is composed of at least an unfallen table referred to in the above and a fallen table referred to for drawing a change in the rear mode in a state where the table has already fallen to a time saving state.

As shown in FIG. 496, the rear mode lottery table 222qb is defined by associating the range of the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy for each combination of the current rear mode type and the rear mode of the transition destination (after change). Has been done. Here, the effect lottery counter 223qy is composed of a random number counter whose value is periodically updated, and is updated to any value in the range of "0 to 99" every time the update timing is reached. Using the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy, various effect modes and the like are selected. The effect lottery counter 223qy is provided with a separate and independent random number counter for each type of effect for executing the lottery. That is, the staging lottery counter 223qy is a general term for random number counters used for lottery of various staging.

As shown in FIG. 496, in the probabilistic continuation table, the current back mode is the cave search mode, and the destination back mode is the combination of the temple search mode (mode transition from the cave search mode to the temple search mode). The range "0 to 19" of the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with each other. Of the 100 possible random values (counter values) of the staging lottery counter 223qy, the number of random values associated with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is 20, so the current game state is The rate of transition (change) from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is 20% (20/100) in the probable state and in the state where the lottery result of the fall is not included in the hold. Further, as shown in FIG. 496, the value "20, 21" of the staging lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the super temple search mode. Of the 100 random values that can be taken by the staging lottery counter 223qy, the number of random values associated with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the super temple search mode is 2, so the current game state is in a probable change state. In addition, the rate of transition (change) from the cave search mode to the super temple search mode is 2% (2/100) when the lottery result of the fall is not included in the hold. If the value range of the staging lottery counter 223qy is other than the above (that is, the range of "22 to 99"), the mode transition is not performed. That is, the cave search mode is maintained.

In this way, when the cave search mode is set and the probability change continuation table is referenced (when the probability change state and the lottery result of the fall is not included in the hold), the fluctuation display is displayed. Each time it is executed, it shifts from the cave search mode to another mode at a rate of 22%. That is, the number of continuations of the cave search mode is reduced to about 5 on average. In other words, even if it is set to the cave search mode, it shifts to another mode with higher expectations in a relatively short period of time, so the period set to the cave search mode tends to be shorter (high expectations mode). The stay ratio tends to be high). Therefore, the longer the period of staying in the mode with high expectation, the more the player's expectation that the probabilistic state continues can be improved, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. can.

Further, as shown in FIG. 496, in the probability change continuation table, the range "0" of the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode. Of the 100 possible random values (counter values) of the staging lottery counter 223qy, the number of random values associated with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is one, so the current game state is The rate of transition (change) from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is 1% (1/100) in the probable state and in the state where the lottery result of the fall is not included in the hold. Further, as shown in FIG. 496, the range "1 to 10" of the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the super temple search mode. Of the 100 random values that can be taken by the staging lottery counter 223qy, the number of random values associated with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the super temple search mode is 10, so the current game state is in a probable change state. In addition, the rate of transition (change) from the temple search mode to the super temple search mode is 10% (10/100) when the lottery result of the fall is not included in the hold. If the value range of the staging lottery counter 223qy is other than the above (that is, the range of "11 to 99"), the mode transition is not performed. That is, the temple search mode is maintained.

In this way, when the temple search mode is set and the probability change continuation table is referenced (when the probability change state and the lottery result of the fall is not included in the hold), the variable display is displayed. Every time it is executed, it shifts to the cave search mode at a rate of 1%, and at a rate of 10%, it is confirmed that the probabilistic state is confirmed and that the lottery result of the fall is not included in the hold. Move to mode. That is, it is difficult to shift to the cave search mode with low expectations, and it is easy to shift to the super temple mode with high expectations.

Further, as shown in FIG. 496, the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is not associated with the mode transition from the super-temple search mode to the cave search mode in the probability change continuation table. Further, for the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the temple search mode, the range "0 to 4" of the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with each other. Of the 100 random values that can be taken by the staging lottery counter 223qy, the number of random values associated with the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the temple search mode is 5, so the current game state is in a probable change state. In addition, the rate of transition (change) from the super-temple search mode to the temple search mode is 5% (5/100) when the lottery result of the fall is not included in the hold. If the value range of the staging lottery counter 223qy is other than the above (that is, the range of "5 to 99"), the mode transition is not performed. That is, the super-temple search mode is maintained.

In this way, in the state where the super temple search mode is set, it shifts to another mode only at a rate of 5%, and even if the mode shifts, the temple search with relatively high expectations is made. Since the mode is changed, the player's expectation for the probable state can be maintained even if the super-temple mode, which has the highest expectation, is changed to another rear mode.

Further, as shown in FIG. 496, in the table for non-falling, the range "0 to 4" of the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the temple search mode. .. Of the 100 random values that can be taken by the staging lottery counter 223qy, the number of random values associated with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is 5, so the current game state is in a probable change state. Moreover, in the state where the lottery result of the fall is included in the hold, the ratio of shifting (changing) from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is 5% (5/100). On the other hand, the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is not associated with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the super temple search mode. If the value range of the staging lottery counter 223qy is other than the above (that is, the range of "5 to 99"), the mode transition is not performed. That is, the cave search mode is maintained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 496, in the table for non-falling, the range "0 to 9" of the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode. .. Of the 100 random values that can be taken by the staging lottery counter 223qy, the number of random values associated with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is 10, so the current game state is in a probable change state. Moreover, in the state where the lottery result of the fall is included in the hold, the ratio of shifting (changing) from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is 10% (10/100). On the other hand, the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is not associated with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the super temple search mode. If the value range of the staging lottery counter 223qy is other than the above (that is, the range of "10 to 99"), the mode transition is not performed. That is, the temple search mode is maintained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 496, in the non-falling table, the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is not associated with the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the cave search mode. On the other hand, in the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the temple search mode, the range "0 to 99" of the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with each other. That is, in the state where the super-temple search mode is set, when the table for non-falling is referred to, the mode always shifts (falls) to the temple search mode. When the table for non-fall is referred to in the super-temple search mode, the lottery result of the fall is not included in the hold at the time of the start of the previous change, and the new hold is held before the start of the change display this time. Only if the reserved ball is the result of a fall lottery. Therefore, in order to prevent the super-temple mode from being maintained even though the lottery result of the fall is included, in this case, the mode is always shifted to the temple search mode.

In this way, when the non-falling table is referenced (that is, the lottery result corresponding to the falling is included in the hold) and the back mode transition lottery is executed, the probability change continuation table is referenced. The mode transition rate from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is lower than in the case where the mode is changed to the temple search mode, and even if the mode is changed to the temple search mode, the rate of falling to the cave search mode is higher. That is, the percentage of stays in the cave search mode, which has a low expectation, is high. Therefore, it is possible to realize the game property of predicting whether or not the current game state is a probable change state by using the stay ratio of the cave search mode as a clue, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 496, in the fall table, the range "0,1" of the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the temple search mode. .. Of the 100 random values that can be taken by the staging lottery counter 223qy, the number of random values associated with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is 2, so the current game state is a time-saving state. In some cases, the rate of transition (changed) from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is 2% (2/100). On the other hand, the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is not associated with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the super temple search mode. If the value range of the staging lottery counter 223qy is other than the above (that is, the range of "2 to 99"), the mode transition is not performed. That is, the cave search mode is maintained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 496, in the fall table, the range "0 to 29" of the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode. .. Of the 100 random values that can be taken by the staging lottery counter 223qy, the number of random values associated with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is 30, so the current game state is in a probable change state. Moreover, in the state where the lottery result of the fall is included in the hold, the ratio of shifting (changing) from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is 30% (30/100). On the other hand, the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is not associated with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the super temple search mode. If the value range of the staging lottery counter 223qy is other than the above (that is, the range of "30 to 99"), the mode transition is not performed. That is, the temple search mode is maintained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 496, in the fall table, the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is not associated with the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the cave search mode. On the other hand, in the mode transition from the super-temple search mode to the temple search mode, the range "0 to 99" of the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with each other. That is, when the table for fallen is referred to in the state where the super-temple search mode is set, the mode always shifts (falls) to the temple search mode as in the case where the table for non-falling is referred to. The case where the fall table is referred to in the super-temple search mode is only when the table is in a probable change state at the start of the previous fluctuation and the lottery result of the fall is obtained in the lottery of this special symbol. Therefore, in order to prevent the super-temple mode from being maintained even though the lottery result of the fall is included, in this case, the mode is always shifted to the temple search mode.

In this way, when the fallen table is referenced (that is, in a time-saving state) and the back mode transition lottery is executed, the temple is further from the cave search mode than when the non-fallen table is referenced. The mode transition rate to the search mode is low, and even if the mode shifts to the temple search mode, the rate of falling to the cave search mode is significantly high. That is, the percentage of stays in the cave search mode, which has a low expectation, is high. Therefore, it is possible to realize the game property of predicting whether or not the current game state is a probable change state by using the stay ratio of the cave search mode as a clue, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 495 (a). The hold change lottery table 222qc refers to the look-ahead result executed based on the detection of the start winning for the first entry opening 64 or the second entry opening 640, and the hold ball number symbol corresponding to the start winning. It is a data table referred to when the lottery of the display mode of is executed. The details of the pending change lottery table 222qc will be described with reference to FIG. 497 (a). FIG. 497 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the pending change lottery table 222qc.

As shown in FIG. 497 (a), in the hold change lottery table 222qc, the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy in which each hold symbol mode (white, blue, green, red) is selected for each look-ahead result (variation type). The range of is specified in association with each other. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 497 (a), when the variation type is "long deviation", the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is in the range of "0 to 98", and the white reserved symbol is used. The mode is defined in association with each other, and the blue reserved symbol mode is defined in association with the value "99" of the effect lottery counter 223qy. On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is not associated with the green and red reserved symbols. Therefore, when the look-ahead result is a variation type of long-off (the main control device 110 notifies the look-ahead result of long-off by the winning information command), 99% of the reserved ball number symbols corresponding to the start winning. A white reserved symbol mode is set at a ratio of (99/100), and a blue reserved symbol mode is set at a ratio of 1% (1/100). That is, in the case of a long deviation, it is extremely rare that a white reserved symbol mode is set and a reserved change (a reserved symbol mode other than white) is set.

Further, as shown in FIG. 497 (a), when the variation type is "out of normal reach", the white reserved symbol mode is associated with the range where the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is "0 to 94". The blue reserved symbol mode is defined in association with the range of "95 to 99" in the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy. On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is not associated with the green and red reserved symbols. Therefore, when the pre-reading result is off and the variation type of the normal reach is set, a white reserved symbol mode is set at a rate of 95% (95/100) as the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the start winning, and 5% ( The blue reserved symbol mode is set at a rate of 5/100). That is, even in the case of the off-normal reach, the white reserved symbol mode is set at a relatively high rate, and the reserved change (non-white reserved symbol mode) is set at a low rate.

Further, as shown in FIG. 497 (a), when the variation type is "out of super reach", the white reserved symbol mode corresponds to the range where the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is "0 to 74". It is specified by attaching, and the blue reserved symbol mode is associated with the range of "75 to 89", and the green reserved symbol aspect is associated with the range of "90 to 97". , The range of "98,99" is defined in association with the red reserved symbol mode. That is, in the case of the variation type of the out-of-super reach in which the fluctuation time is long and the relatively flashy (lively) production mode is executed, the ratio of the white reserved symbol mode is 75% (75/100) and others. It is lower than the variation type of the deviation, and the ratio of the blue reserved symbol mode is as high as 15% (15/100). Further, it can be set to a green or red reserved symbol mode. That is, the ratio of the green reserved symbol mode is 8% (8/100), and the ratio of the red reserved symbol mode is 2% (2/100). Therefore, in the case of a green or red reserved symbol mode, at least the variation type (variation type with low expectation) that is less than the normal reach is denied, and the player's expectation for the jackpot is improved. be able to.

Further, as shown in FIG. 497 (a), when the variation type is "hit normal reach", the white reserved symbol mode is associated with the range where the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is "0 to 74". The blue reserved symbol mode is associated with the range of "75 to 84", and the green reserved symbol embodiment is associated with the range of "85 to 94". A red reserved symbol mode is defined in association with the range of "95 to 99". That is, the ratio of being set to the green or red reserved symbol mode is higher than in the case of the out-of-order super reach.

Further, as shown in FIG. 497 (a), when the variation type is "hit super reach", the white reserved symbol mode corresponds to the range where the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is "0 to 49". It is specified by attaching, and the blue reserved symbol mode is associated with the range of "50 to 59", and the green reserved symbol aspect is associated with the range of "60 to 84". , The red reserved symbol mode is defined in association with the range of "85 to 99". That is, the rate of occurrence of the pending change itself is improved, and the rate at which the green or red reserved symbol mode is selected is also higher than that of the variation type of the off-super reach or the hit normal reach. Therefore, when the green or red reserved symbol mode is set, the expectation for the jackpot can be further improved.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 495. The change point calculation table 222qd is a data table that is referred to when calculating the change points that serve as a criterion for determining whether or not the hold batch change effect (see FIGS. 485 and 486) can be executed. The details will be described later, but at the time of the lottery for the hold batch change effect, the variation type of each hold ball and the jackpot expectation indicated by the hold symbol mode are different (notify the expectation low). (Too much), the more points are set. The more the hold symbol mode with a relatively low expectation is set by the hold change effect, the easier it is to execute the effect of improving the expectation by the hold batch change effect. As a result, the degree of expectation can be more appropriately notified by the reserved symbol mode. The details of the change point calculation table 222qd will be described with reference to FIG. 497 (b).

As shown in FIG. 497 (b), the change point calculation table 222qd is associated with change points for each variation type (look-ahead result) of the reserved ball and the reserved symbol mode set for the reserved ball. Is stipulated. In the 23rd embodiment, when a plurality of reserved balls are reserved at the time when the start winning is detected, the change points of each reserved ball are calculated by the change point calculation table 222qd, and the total value of the change points is calculated. Based on the above, a lottery is made to determine whether or not the hold batch change effect can be executed. That is, the larger the total value of the change points, the higher the execution rate of the hold batch change effect. As a result, even if a lower expectation level is once notified in the hold change effect, it is possible to give an opportunity to improve the expectation level by the hold batch change effect. Can be done.

As shown in FIG. 497 (b), “0” is associated with and defined as a change point for the variation types of short deviation and long deviation, regardless of the reserved symbol mode. Further, for the variation type of the out-of-normal reach, "1" is specified as a change point in association with the hold symbol mode of white hold, and "0" is set as a change point for other hold symbol modes. Is specified in association with each other. Further, for the variation type of the out-of-order super reach, "2" is defined in association with the reserved symbol mode of white hold, and "2" is defined as the change point for the reserved symbol mode of blue hold. "1" is associated and defined, and "0" is associated and defined as a change point with respect to other reserved symbol modes. Further, for the variable types of hit normal reach and hit super reach, 3 is defined as a change point in association with the reserved symbol mode of white hold, and as a change point with respect to the hold symbol mode of blue hold. 2 is associated and defined, 1 is associated and defined as a change point with respect to the reserved symbol aspect of green hold, and 0 is associated and defined as a change point with respect to the reserved symbol aspect of red hold.

As described above, in the 23rd embodiment, the more the reserved symbol mode with the lower expectation is set for the reserved ball of the variable type with the higher expectation, the more the change points are configured. That is, the larger the room for improving the expectation of the reserved symbol mode, the more change points, so that the execution of the reserved batch change effect becomes easier to be allowed. With this configuration, it is possible to notify a more appropriate degree of expectation depending on the reserved symbol mode.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 495 (a). The batch change lottery table 222qe is a data table that is referred to when a lottery for whether or not to execute the hold batch change effect is performed. The details of the batch change lottery table 222qe will be described with reference to FIG. 498 (a). FIG. 498 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the batch change lottery table 222qe. As shown in FIG. 498 (a), the batch change lottery table 222qe is defined in association with the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy in which the execution of the hold batch change effect is determined for each total value of the change points. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 498 (a), the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is not associated with the total value of the change points being 0. Further, when the total value of the change points is 1, the value "0 to 9" of the staging lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with each other, and when the total value of the change points is 2, the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is defined. "0 to 24" are associated and defined, and when the total value of the change points is 3 or more, the value "0 to 49" of the staging lottery counter 223qy is associated and defined. That is, if the change point is 1, the hold batch change effect is selected at a rate of 10%, and if the change point is 2, the hold batch change effect is selected at a rate of 25%, and the change point is 3. For example, the hold batch change effect is selected at a rate of 50%.

As described above, in the 23rd embodiment, as the total number of change points increases (a hold symbol mode with a low expectation is set for a hold ball of a variable type with a high expectation), a hold batch change effect is produced. It is configured to have a high percentage of decisions about the execution of. As a result, the greater the room for improving the degree of expectation of the reserved symbol aspect, the more change points, so that the execution of the reserved batch change effect becomes easier to be allowed. With this configuration, it is possible to notify a more appropriate degree of expectation depending on the reserved symbol mode.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 495 (a). The chance charge lottery table 222qf is a data table referred to for drawing whether or not the chance charge effect can be executed. The details of the chance charge lottery table 222qf will be described with reference to FIG. 498 (b). FIG. 498 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the chance charge lottery table 222qf. As shown in FIG. 498 (b), in the chance charge lottery table 222qf, the number of reserved balls and the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy determined to execute the chance charge effect are associated with each other for each variation type. It is stipulated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 498 (b), in the fluctuation pattern of the out-of-normal reach and the out-of-super reach, when the number of reserved balls is 0, 1, the range of the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is “0 to 0”. 4 ”is specified in association with each other. Further, when the number of reserved balls is 2, the range "0 to 14" of the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with each other, and when the number of reserved balls is 3 or more, the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined. The range "0 to 24" is defined in association with each other. That is, if the number of reserved balls is 0 or 1, the execution of the chance charge effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and if the number of reserved balls is 2, the execution of the chance charge effect is determined at a rate of 15%. If the number of reserved balls is 3 or more, the execution of the chance charge effect is decided at a rate of 25%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 498 (b), in the fluctuation pattern of the winning normal reach, the range “0 to 34” of the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the number of reserved balls of 0 and 1. On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is not associated with the number of reserved balls of 2 or more. That is, if the number of reserved balls is 0 or 1, the execution of the chance charge effect is determined at a rate of 35%, while if the number of reserved balls is 2 or more, the execution of the chance charge effect is determined. do not have. That is, when the number of reserved balls is 1 or less, the determination rate of the chance charge effect is higher than that of the fluctuation pattern of the deviation. Further, the reason why the chance charge effect is not executed when the number of reserved balls is 2 or more is to prevent a problem that the fire gauge is accumulated too much and a big hit is started before it is completely consumed. That is, in the case of a hit normal reach, since the fluctuation time is relatively short (there are few opportunities to execute the chance-up effect), there is a high possibility that the spirit gauge will be accumulated beyond the timing when the chance-up is possible. Then, the number of spirit gauges accumulated in the chance charge effect is determined only according to the number of reserved balls. That is, the larger the number of reserved balls, the higher the possibility that a large number of fire gauges will be set. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the chance charge effect is avoided when the number of reserved balls is large under the circumstances where the fluctuation is a hit. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that a big hit is started before the number of fire gauges is consumed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 498 (b), in the fluctuation pattern of the winning super reach, the range "0 to 49" of the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the number of reserved balls of 0 to 2. Therefore, when the number of reserved balls is 3, the range "0 to 9" of the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with each other. On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is not associated with the number of reserved balls of 4. That is, if the number of reserved balls is 0 to 2, the execution of the chance charge effect is determined at a rate of 50%, and if the number of reserved balls is 3, the execution of the chance charge effect is determined at a rate of 10%. On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls is 4, the execution of the chance charge effect is not decided. That is, when the number of reserved balls is 2 or less, the determination rate of the chance charge effect is higher than the fluctuation pattern of the deviation and the fluctuation pattern of the hit normal reach. Further, when the number of reserved balls is 3, the execution rate of the chance charge effect is low, and when the number of reserved balls is 4, the chance charge effect is not executed. This is the same as the normal reach of the hit, and the purpose is to suppress the problem that the big hit is started before the spirit gauge is completely consumed.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 495 (a). The continuous suggestion effect selection table 222qg is used when selecting an effect scenario of the continuous suggestion effect to be executed over the 96th to 99th variable display effects after the end of the big hit (that is, after the start of the time saving state of the normal symbol). The data table to be referenced. The details of this continuation suggestion effect selection table 222qg will be described with reference to FIG. 499.

FIG. 499 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222qg. As shown in FIG. 499, the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222qg includes a continuation confirmation table that is referred to when the continuation of the probabilistic state is confirmed until the end of the continuation suggestion effect, and up to the end of the continuation suggestion effect. Although the holding ball is not held, it is confirmed that the continuous enrichment table, which is referred to when it is confirmed that the probability change state is maintained in the hold, and the end of the continuation suggestion effect are in the time saving state. It consists of at least a table for discontinuity. Each table defines a plurality of combinations (scenarios) of effect modes to be executed in the 96th to 99th variable display.

As shown in FIG. 499, in the continuation confirmation table, the range of the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with each of the seven scenarios "01H" to "07H". Specifically, as shown in FIG. 499, a weak attack with a low expectation (see FIG. 476 (a)) is executed in the 96th to 98th fluctuation display, and the expectation is high in the 99th fluctuation display. The value "0-9" of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the effect scenario "01H" in which a strong attack (see FIG. 476 (b)) is executed to break through the door 806. In addition, a weak attack (see FIG. 476 (a)) is executed at the 96th and 97th fluctuation displays, and a strong attack (see FIG. 476 (b)) is executed at the 98th and 99th fluctuation displays to break through the door 806. The value "10 to 19" of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the effect scenario "02H" of the mode to be performed, and a weak attack (see FIG. 476 (a)) is executed in the 96th variation display. The value "20-59" of the staging lottery counter 223qy is set against the staging scenario "03H" in which a strong attack (see FIG. 476 (b)) is executed in the 97th to 99th fluctuation display to break through the door 806. The staging lottery counter 223qy is used for the staging scenario "04H" in which a strong attack (see FIG. 476 (b)) is executed in all the fluctuation displays of the 96th to 99th times to break through the door 806. The value "60 to 89" of is specified in association with each other. That is, the selection rate of the production scenario with a small number of strong attacks is low, and the selection rate of the production scenario with a large number of strong attacks is high.

Further, as shown in FIG. 499, the continuation confirmation table is provided with a special mode of staging scenario in which the door 806 is breached with a number of fluctuations of less than 99 times. That is, the production scenario "05H" (range of the value "90,91" of the production lottery counter 223qy) in which a weak attack is performed in the 96th variable production and the door 806 is broken through as it is, and the 96th weak attack, 97 The production scenario "06H" (range of the value "92 to 94" of the production lottery counter 223qy) in which a strong attack is made to break through the door 806, and the 96th and 97th weak attacks are performed, and the 98th time. A staging scenario "07H" (a range of the value "95 to 99" of the staging lottery counter 223qy) is set in which a strong attack is made to break through the door 806. The scenarios of these special embodiments may be set only when the continuation confirmation table is referenced. That is, it may be executed only in a state where it is confirmed that the probabilistic state continues until the end of the 99th variation display. Therefore, by executing the scenario of a special aspect, It is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 499, four scenarios of "08H" to "0BH" are defined in the continuous enrichment table. Since the flow of the production of the production scenarios "08H" to "0BH" is exactly the same as the production scenarios "01H" to "04H" described above, the details thereof will be omitted here. As shown in FIG. 499, the staging scenario "08H" is defined in association with the value "0 to 14" of the staging lottery counter 223qy, and the staging scenario "09H" is defined by the value "15 to" of the staging lottery counter 223qy. 29 ”is associated and defined, the effect scenario“ 0AH ”is defined in association with the value“ 30-69 ”of the effect lottery counter 223qy, and the effect scenario“ 0BH ”is defined in association with the value“ 30—69 ”of the effect lottery counter 223qy. 70 to 99 ”is specified in association with each other. That is, as in the continuation confirmation table, the selection rate of the effect scenario with a small number of strong attacks is low, and the selection rate of the effect scenario with a large number of strong attacks is high. In addition, if the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained while the scenario specified in the continuous rich table is in progress, the effect specified in the discontinuity table is displayed from the variable display that is the lottery result of the fall. It can be switched to the production scenario "0CH", which is one of the scenarios. As a result, even if the reserved balls for the 99th change display are not held at the start of the continuation suggestion effect, the game state at the end of the 99th change can be accurately changed by switching the scenario in the middle. It can be notified.

Further, as shown in FIG. 499, four scenarios of "0CH" to "0FH" are defined in the discontinuity table. The flow of the production of the production scenarios "0CH" to "0FH" is exactly the same as the production scenarios "01H" to "04H" described above, except that the door 806 finally fails to break through. Details will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 499, the staging scenario "0CH" is defined in association with the value "0 to 39" of the staging lottery counter 223qy, and the staging scenario "0DH" is defined by the value "40 to" of the staging lottery counter 223qy. 79 ”is associated and defined, the effect scenario“ 0EH ”is defined in association with the value“ 80-94 ”of the effect lottery counter 223qy, and the effect scenario“ 0FH ”is defined in association with the value“ 80FH ”of the effect lottery counter 223qy. 95-99 ”is specified in association with each other. That is, contrary to the continuous confirmation table and the continuous rich table, the selection rate of the production scenario with a small number of strong attacks is high, and the selection rate of the production scenario with a large number of strong attacks is low. There is. Therefore, as the number of strong attacks increases, it is less likely that the non-continuation table is referred to and the production scenario is determined. Therefore, during the execution of the continuation suggestion production, pay attention to the content of each attack and play the game. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 495 (a). The interrupt continuous hitting lottery table 222qh is a data table referred to for executing the interrupt continuous hitting effect (see FIG. 482) and for drawing the effect type. The details of the interrupt continuous hitting lottery table 222qh will be described with reference to FIG. 500. FIG. 500 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the interrupt continuous hitting lottery table 222qh. As shown in FIG. 500, in the interrupt continuous hitting lottery table 222qh, the effect type and the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy are defined in association with each other for each variation type.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 500, in the variation pattern of long deviation, it is executed during the normal variation effect period, and it is possible to reduce the number of monsters to a minimum of 10 remaining monsters. Therefore, the value "0 to 4" of the staging lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with each other. Therefore, in the case of a long deviation, the interrupt continuous striking effect is executed at a rate of 5% (5/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 500, in the deviation pattern of the normal reach, the effect lottery is performed for the effect type of the effect mode, which is executed during the normal variation effect period and can reduce the number of monsters to a minimum of 5 remaining bodies. The value "0 to 9" of the counter 223qy is defined in association with each other, and is executed during the reach fluctuation. "10 to 14" are specified in association with each other. For this reason, in the fluctuation pattern of the off-normal reach, it is determined to execute the interrupt continuous hitting effect at a rate of 15% in total. That is, the execution of the interrupt continuous striking effect is determined at a higher rate than in the case of long deviation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 500, in the variation pattern of the out-of-order super reach, as an interruption continuous striking effect executed during the normal variation effect period, an effect mode in which the number of monsters can be reduced to a minimum of 5 remaining bodies is produced. The value "0-4" of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the type, and the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined for the effect type in which the number of monsters can be reduced to a minimum of 4 remaining bodies. "5-9" are specified in association with each other. In addition, the value "10 to 14" of the effect lottery counter 223qy is associated with the effect type of the effect mode in which the number of monsters can be reduced to a minimum of four as the interrupt continuous hit effect executed during the reach fluctuation. The value "15 to 19" of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the effect type of the effect mode in which the number of monsters can be reduced to a minimum of three. That is, the execution rate of the total interrupt continuous hitting effect is higher than that of the off-normal reach, and the number of monsters can be reduced to a smaller number, so that the player's expectation for a big hit can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 500, in the variation pattern of the hit normal reach, as the interrupt continuous striking effect executed during the normal variation effect period, the effect type of the effect mode in which the number of monsters can be reduced to a minimum of 5 remaining bodies. On the other hand, the value "0 to 3" of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with each other, and the value "4" of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined for the effect type of the effect mode in which the number of monsters can be reduced to 0. It is specified in association with each other. In addition, the value "5 to 24" of the effect lottery counter 223qy is associated with the effect type of the effect mode in which the number of monsters can be reduced to a minimum of four as the interrupt continuous hit effect executed during the reach fluctuation. The value "25" of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the effect type of the effect mode in which the number of monsters can be reduced to 0. That is, since the execution rate of the total interrupt continuous hitting effect is higher than in the case of off, and there is a possibility of defeating all monsters, it is possible to improve the player's expectation for a big hit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 500, in the variation pattern of the hit super reach, as an interruption continuous striking effect executed during the normal variation effect period, an effect mode in which the number of monsters can be reduced to a minimum of 4 remaining bodies is produced. The value "0,1" of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the type, and the value "2" of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined for the effect type of the effect mode in which the number of monsters can be reduced to 0. Is specified in association with each other. In addition, the value "3 to 19" of the effect lottery counter 223qy is associated with the effect type of the effect mode in which the number of monsters can be reduced to a minimum of four as the interrupt continuous hit effect executed during the reach fluctuation. The value "20 to 39" of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the effect type of the effect mode that can reduce the number of monsters to 3 bodies, and the effect mode that can reduce the number of monsters to 0 bodies. The value "40, 41" of the staging lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the staging type. In other words, the execution rate of the total interrupt continuous hitting effect is higher than in the case of missed or hit normal reach, and the possibility of defeating all monsters is higher, so the player's expectation for a big hit is improved. Can be done.

In this way, in the 23rd embodiment, the execution timing of the interrupt continuous hitting effect and the number of monsters that can be subdued are configured to be different for each variable type, and the effect of subduing all the monsters is performed only in the case of a big hit. The configuration can be selected. With such a configuration, it is possible to more actively perform the continuous striking operation during the execution of the interrupt continuous striking effect, so that the player's willingness to participate in the interrupt continuous striking effect can be improved.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 495 (b). FIG. 495 (b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223qa, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223qb, a normal reserved ball number counter 223qc, a fluctuation start flag 223qd, a stop type selection flag 223qe, and a game state storage area 223qf. The time reduction guaranteed number counter 223qg, the continuous scenario storage area 223qh, the right-handed winning flag 223qi, the continuous hit type storage area 223qj, the chance charge standby flag 223qk, the charge number counter 223qm, and the charge state number counter 223qn. , Batch change flag 223qp, change point storage area 223qq, hold symbol state storage area 223qr, fluctuation time timer 223qs, operation valid period timer 223qt, stop operation count counter 223qu, continuous hit valid period timer 223qv, all at once. At least a change period timer 223qx, an effect lottery counter 223qy, and other memory areas 223z are provided.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223qa is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting number) corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol held in the main control device 110 up to 4 times, and the special symbol 2 is reserved. The ball number counter 223qb is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203qd and the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 203qe stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Cannot get the value of. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and sets the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223qa and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223qb. Therefore, the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls of the variable display is added by the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640, or in the main control device 110, a special symbol is used. When the fluctuation display in the above is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the number of reserved balls indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd after addition or subtraction, or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe. The command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the hold ball number counter of the main control device 110 is the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203qd or the special symbol 2 hold ball number command from the hold ball number command. The value of the number counter 203qe is acquired and stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223qa or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223qb (see Z3910 in FIG. 528). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223qa and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223qb according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The values can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe of the main controller 110.

The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223qa and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223qb are used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223qa and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223qb. , The display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223qa and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223qb after storage. ..

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223qa of the voice lamp control device 113 and the special symbol 2 hold. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the value of the ball number counter 223qb is displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223qa and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223qb are synchronized with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe of the main controller 110. However, its value is changed. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also synchronized with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe of the main control device 110. You can change it while letting it change. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

The normal reserved ball number counter 223qc is different from the above-mentioned special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223qa and special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223qb in that the target is changed from the special symbol to the normal symbol. Since the technical control concept is the same, detailed explanation is omitted.

The variation start flag 223qd is turned on when the variation pattern command of the first special symbol or the variation pattern command of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see Z3904 of FIG. 528), and the variation start flag 223qd is turned on. It is turned off when the variable display is set in the display device 81 (see Z4202 in FIG. 532). When the variation start flag 223qd is turned on, the variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (Z3102) of the main process (see FIG. 518) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 has a variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs variation display of the third symbol. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223qe is turned on when a special symbol stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see Z3907 in FIG. 528), and the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See Z4208 in FIG. 532). When the stop type selection flag 223qe is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

The game state storage area 223qf is a storage area for storing data according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10. The game state storage area 223qf is updated every time a state command output is received from the main control device 110 every time the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed (see Z3902 in FIG. 528). The game state storage area 223qf is composed of, for example, a 1-byte storage area, and is configured so that the game state can be specified by the state of the lower 2 bits. More specifically, for example, it indicates whether or not the lowest bit is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and indicates whether or not the lower second bit is in the probabilistic state of the special symbol. Therefore, in the "low probability state of the special symbol" and the "normal state of the normal symbol", the lower 2 bits are "00B", and in the "low probability state of the special symbol" and the "time saving state of the normal symbol", the lower 2 bits are lower. The 2 bits are "01B", and the lower 2 bits are "11B" in the "probability variation state of the special symbol" and the "time saving state of the normal symbol". The MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the game state of the pachinko machine 10 on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the data stored in the game state storage area 223qf.

The time saving guaranteed number counter 223qg is a counter for counting the remaining number of fluctuations for which the time saving state is guaranteed. The initial value of the time reduction guaranteed number counter 223qg is set to 0, and the value is set to 100 at the end of the jackpot (see Z4107 in FIG. 531). Also, each time a new variable display execution is set, the value is decremented by 1 (see Z4304 in FIG. 533). As described above, in the 23rd embodiment, after the big hit is completed, the time saving state of the normal symbol is maintained until the lottery of the special symbol is executed 100 times. By counting the number of times of time reduction guarantee by the time reduction guarantee number counter 223qg, the number of times of guarantee can be accurately grasped even on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

The continuation scenario storage area 223qh is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of the effect scenario determined from the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222qg (see FIG. 499) at the start of the probability change continuation suggestion effect. The initial value of the continuation scenario storage area 223qh is set to 00H, and when the production scenario is determined by lottery using the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222qg (see FIG. 499) at the start timing of the probabilistic continuation suggestion effect. Data indicating the effect scenario is stored (see Z4409 in FIG. 534). During the execution of the probabilistic continuation suggestion effect, the variation display mode at the start of each variation display is determined based on the data of the continuation scenario storage area 223qh (see Z4415 in FIG. 534).

The right-handed winning flag 223qi is a flag indicating whether or not the running jackpot is a jackpot won during the right-handed gaming state (normal symbol time saving state). If the right-handed winning flag 223qi is on, it indicates that the jackpot was won during the right-handed gaming state, and if it is off, the jackpot won during the left-handed gaming state (that is, the first hit). Indicates that. At the end of the big hit, the rear mode is set according to the state of the right-handed winning flag 223qi. That is, if it is on, the temple search mode is set, and if it is off, the cave search mode is set (see Z4109 and Z4110 in FIG. 531). As mentioned above, if you get a big hit in the left-handed game state (that is, you get a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol), only 50% of the time you move to the probable change state, while in the right-handed game state you get a big hit. When it becomes (that is, it becomes a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol), it shifts to the probability change state at a rate of 80%. The difference in this ratio is notified by the degree of expectation indicated by the rear mode.

The continuous hit type storage area 223qj is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of the interrupt continuous hit effect (the execution timing of the effect and the lower limit of the subtraction number of monsters). According to the data of the continuous hit type storage area 223qj, the start timing of the interrupt continuous hit effect, the number of subtraction of monsters for pressing the PUSH button 10317, and the like are set.

The chance charge waiting flag 223qk is a flag indicating whether or not it is a period (chance charge waiting period) from the determination of execution of the chance charge effect to the actual start of the chance charge effect, and is turned on. If, it indicates that it is a chance charge waiting period. The initial value of the chance charge standby flag 223qk is set to off, and is set to on when the execution of the chance charge effect is determined (see Z4564 in FIG. 536), and the execution of the chance charge effect is started. If set to off (see Z3313 in FIG. 520). If a new start prize is detected while this chance charge standby flag 223qk is on, the number of gauges is added to the number of gauges predetermined as the number of spirit gauges to be accumulated in the chance charge effect executed thereafter. Whether or not it is determined.

The charge number counter 223qm is a counter indicating the gauge number of the spirit gauge notified in the chance charge effect. The initial value of the charge number counter 223qm is set to 0, and when the execution of the chance charge effect is determined, a value obtained by adding 1 to the number of reserved balls at the time of the determination is set (FIG. 536). See Z4563). Further, by executing the chance-up effect, the value is subtracted and updated by 1 each time the spirit gauge is consumed (see Z3559 and Z3561 in FIG. 523).

The charge state count counter 223qn is a counter indicating the remaining number of fluctuations until the consumption of the spirit gauge accumulated by the chance charge effect is completed. The value of the charge state count counter 223qn is set according to the current number of reserved balls at the start of the chance charge effect (see Z3314 in FIG. 520), and the value is set each time a new variable display effect is set to be executed. It is subtracted by 1 (see Z4302 in FIG. 533). While the value of the charge state count counter 223qn is 1 or more, it is determined whether or not to consume the spirit gauge to execute the chance-up effect every time the chance-up effect can be executed.

The batch change flag 223qp is a flag indicating whether or not the hold batch change effect is being executed. If it is on, it means that the hold batch change effect is being executed, and if it is off, it means that the hold batch change effect is being executed. Indicates that the production is not in progress. The batch change flag 223qp is set to on when the initial value is set to off and the execution of the hold batch change effect is set (see Z4059 in FIG. 530).

The change point storage area 223qq is a storage area for storing the change points specified by referring to the change point calculation table 222qd described above. The change point storage area 223qq is configured to be able to store the change points of each reserved ball separately.

The reserved symbol state storage area 223qr is a storage area for storing data indicating the reserved symbol mode of each reserved ball number symbol. From the data stored in the reserved symbol state storage area 223qr, it is possible to accurately grasp the reserved symbol mode of each reserved ball number symbol.

The fluctuation time timer 223qs is a timer for measuring the fluctuation time. The progress of the fluctuation display effect can be accurately determined by the timer value of the fluctuation time timer 223qs.

The operation valid period timer 223qt is a timer for measuring the period during which the PUSH button 10317 is valid in the pressing stop effect (see FIG. 478). The operation validity period timer 223qt determines whether or not the operation for the PUSH button 10317 in the pressing stop effect is treated as valid. In the press stop effect, a separate button image and validity period gauge are displayed for each symbol row on the display screen, but in reality, the operation of the PUSH button 10317 is enabled by a single operation validity period. Whether or not it is determined. With such a configuration, it is possible to simplify the determination of whether or not the stop operation of each symbol row is valid, so that the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

The stop operation number counter 223qua is a counter indicating the number of remaining stop operations that can be executed in the pressing stop effect (see FIG. 478). If the stop operation is detected during the operation valid period when the value of the stop operation count counter 223qu is 3, the left symbol column is displayed as stopped, and the value is 2 and the stop operation is stopped during the operation valid period. When an operation is detected, the right symbol column is stopped and displayed, and when a stop operation is detected during the operation valid period while the value is 1, the central symbol column is stopped and displayed.

The continuous hit effective period timer 223qv is a timer for measuring the period during which the continuous hit operation for the PUSH button 10317 is valid in the interrupt continuous hit effect (see FIG. 482). The continuous hit valid period timer 223qv determines whether or not the operation for the PUSH button 10317 in the interrupt continuous hit effect is treated as valid.

The batch change period timer 223qx is a timer for measuring the period during which the PUSH button 10317 is valid in the hold batch change effect (see FIGS. 486 and 487). The batch change period timer 223qx determines whether or not the operation for the PUSH button 10317 in the hold batch change effect is treated as valid.

As described above, the effect lottery counter 223qy is a random number counter for executing the lottery of the effect mode.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the memory area 223z is provided with, for example, a winning information storage area for storing winning information based on the winning information command received from the main control device 110. The winning information storage area has a storage area consisting of four areas (first area to fourth area) for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In addition, it has one execution area. Winning information is stored in each area. In the pachinko machine 10, when a start winning is detected in the main control device 110, the values of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning are used. , Various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the start winning is performed is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is obtained. The main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and the winning information is the winning information of the RAM 223. It is stored in the winning information storage area (not shown), which is a storage area. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 areas (1st to 4th areas). Will be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the more the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed, a time-lapse timer that measures the effect time, and the like. is doing. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read / written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process 23 (see FIG. 528) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process 23 is read. (See S3114 in FIG. 528), the command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display (variation) in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It controls the production) and continuous notice production.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM erase switch 122. have. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 509).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the audio output device 226 according to the 23rd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 501. FIG. 501 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio output device 226. As shown in FIG. 501, the audio output device 226 is equipped with an MPU 301 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 301 is a ROM 302 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 301, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 302 is executed. It has a built-in RAM 303.

The MPU 301 of the voice output device 226 is electrically connected to the input / output port 305 and the voice synthesis unit 306. When a command for designating voice data is received from the voice lamp control device 113 to the voice output device 226, the command is input to the MPU 301 via the input / output port 305. Further, the voice data designated by the voice lamp control device 113 is read from the ROM 302 and output to the channel corresponding to the voice type of the voice synthesis unit 306.

The voice synthesis unit 306 is composed of a known voice synthesis LSI that synthesizes the voice data input to each channel and outputs the synthesized voice data to the amplifier unit 307. The synthesized voice data is amplified by the amplifier unit 307 and input to the speaker unit 308. As a result, various voices designated by the voice lamp control device 113 can be output from the speaker unit 308.

Next, with reference to FIG. 501, the configuration of the ROM 302 provided in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the 23rd embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 501, the ROM 302 is provided with at least an audio file storage area (audio file) 302a.

The audio file storage area (audio file) 302a is a storage area in which an audio file (audio data) used for outputting music, sound effects, etc. in various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 is stored. When the execution of various effects is notified by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice file corresponding to the effects is read from the voice file storage area (voice file) 302a and output to the corresponding channel of the voice synthesis unit 306. Will be done.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 303 provided in the audio output device 226 will be described. As shown in FIG. 501, the RAM 303 is provided with at least a continuous tap sound output flag 303a, a reproduction position storage area 303b, and a music output in-progress flag 303c.

The continuous hitting sound output flag 303a is a flag indicating the type of the continuous hitting sound most recently output (whether it is the first continuous hitting sound or the second continuous hitting sound) during the execution of the interrupt continuous hitting effect. If the continuous striking sound output flag 303a is 01H, it indicates that the most recently output continuous striking sound is the first continuous striking sound, and if it is "02H", it indicates that it is the second continuous striking sound. By configuring the continuous striking sound output flag 303a so that the type of the most recently output continuous striking sound can be grasped, it is possible to alternately reproduce different types of continuous striking sounds for different channels each time a continuous striking operation is detected. can. Therefore, since it is possible to diversify the voice mode during the execution of the continuous striking operation, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

The reproduction position storage area 303b is a storage area for storing data indicating the reproduction position at the time of interruption when the interruption of the reproduction of the music is instructed. When resuming the reproduction of the music, the reproduction can be accurately resumed from the interrupted reproduction position based on the data stored in the reproduction position storage area 303b.

The music output flag 303c is a flag indicating whether or not a music output based on an audio file is being output by executing a variable display effect or the like. If the music output flag 303c is on, it means that the music is being output, and if it is off, it means that the music is not being output.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the 23rd embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 502 to 516. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 502 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the process of reading various winning switches is executed (Z101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (Z102). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated to RAM203. Store in the corresponding buffer area of.

Further, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the fall lottery counter C4, the variable type counter CS1, and the normal hit random number counter C5 are updated (Z103). Specifically, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the fall lottery counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (999, respectively in this embodiment, respectively). When it reaches 99,250,999,198,239), it clears to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C5 and CS1 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol variation process 23 for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (Z104), which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, and then executed (Z104). , The start winning process 23 accompanying the winning (starting winning) to the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is executed (Z105). The details of the special symbol variation process 23 and the start winning process 23 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 503 to 506.

After executing the start winning process 23, the normal symbol variation process 23 (Z106), which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (Z106), and the through gate is passed along with the passage of the ball at the normal entry port. Process 23 is executed (Z107). The details of the normal symbol variation process 23 and the through gate passage process 23 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 507 and 508. After executing the through gate passage process 23, the launch control process is executed (Z108), and then the other winning process is executed (Z109). Further, other processing to be executed periodically is executed (Z110), and the timer interrupt processing is terminated. The launch control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and launches the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, the special symbol variation processing 23 (Z104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 503. FIG. 503 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation processing 23 (Z104). This special symbol variation processing 23 (Z104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 502), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display are performed. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in the device 81.

In this special symbol variation processing 23, first, it is determined whether or not the present is a big hit of the special symbol (Z201). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (Z201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (Z201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (Z202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203qd (the number of holdings of the variable display in the special symbol N1) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe (holding the variable display in the special symbol). The number of times N2) is acquired (Z203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe is larger than 0 (Z204), and if the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe is not 0 (N2). Z204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe is subtracted by 1 (Z205), and the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe changed by the calculation is set. (Z206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 511) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203qe from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the second special symbol hold ball number counter 223qb of the RAM 223. Store in.

After the reserved ball number command is set by the processing of Z206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb is shifted (Z207). In the processing of Z207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After the processing of Z207 is executed, the process proceeds to the processing of Z208.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z204 that the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203qd is 0 (Z204: No), the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd acquired in the processing of Z203 It is determined whether the value (N1) is 0 (Z209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd is 0 (Z209: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd is not 0 (Z209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd is set to 1. Subtract (Z210) and set a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203qd changed by the calculation (Z211). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 511) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203qd from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223qa of the RAM 223. Store in.

After the reserved ball number command is set by the processing of Z211th, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa is shifted (Z212). In the processing of Z212, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process 23 (Z208) for setting the variation start of the special symbol (first symbol) is executed (Z208), and this process is terminated. The special symbol change start processing 23 will be described later with reference to FIG. 504.

In the processing of Z202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (Z213). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If has not elapsed (Z213: No), the display of the first symbol display device is updated (Z214), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z213, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (Z213: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (Z215). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process 23 (Z208), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 504. When this special symbol change start process 23 (Z208) is executed, various counters stored in the execution area commonly provided in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb. A special symbol lottery is held based on the value. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the special hit random number counter C1, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it is a big hit according to the value of the special hit type counter C2. The type is determined.

In the present embodiment, as the stop symbol of the first symbol (special symbol), when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. Turn on the LED, turn on the green LED when it becomes a big hit C, turn on the blue LED and the red LED when it becomes a big hit D, and turn on the red LED when it becomes a big hit E. And turn on the green LED. Further, when it is out of alignment, the blue LED and the green LED are set to light up. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of Z215 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing 23 (Z208) (this lottery). The result) is determined whether it is a big hit of a special symbol (Z216). If the result of this lottery is a big hit of a special symbol (Z216: Yes), the big hit start flag 203qi is set to ON (Z217). Then, a stop command is set (Z218), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z216, if it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a big hit (Z216: No), the processing of Z217 is skipped, the processing of Z218 is executed, and then this processing is terminated.

Next, the special symbol change start processing 23 (Z208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 504. FIG. 504 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start processing 23 (Z208). This special symbol variation start process 23 (Z208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 23 (see FIG. 503) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 502), and is a process executed in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa. And, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb, a lottery (win / fail judgment) of "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed, and the first symbol is performed. This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol fluctuation start processing 23 (Z208), first, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type counter C3, the fall lottery counter C4, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area. (Z301). Next, it is determined whether the gaming state is currently in the probabilistic change (high probability state of the special symbol) (Z302). It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the probabilistic change is in progress is executed by determining whether or not the value of the probabilistic change flag 203qh is 1 or more. Here, the probability variation flag 203qh is set to a predetermined value based on the end of the jackpot game. On the other hand, the value is set to 0 based on the start of the jackpot game.

In the processing of Z302, when it is determined that the probability change is in progress (Z302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic change (high probability state of the special symbol). By comparing the value with the fall lottery table 202qe (see FIG. 490 (c)), a lottery (fall lottery) is performed as to whether or not to fall from the probabilistic state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol (fall lottery). Z303). Specifically, the value of the fall lottery counter C4 is compared one by one with the two random numbers stored in the fall lottery table 202qe. As described above, two random numbers "0, 1" are set for the fall to the low probability state during the probability change (high probability state of the special symbol), and the value of the fall lottery counter C4 and the value of the fall lottery counter C4. , When the random values corresponding to these falls match, it is determined that the player falls to a low probability state. After acquiring the lottery result of the fall lottery in the processing of Z303, the process proceeds to the processing of Z304.

In the processing of Z304, it is determined whether or not the lottery result corresponds to the fall of the special symbol to the low probability state (Z304), and if it is determined that the lottery result corresponds to the fall (Z304: Yes), The probability change flag 203qh is set to off (Z305), a state command indicating a fall to a low probability state is set (Z306), and the process proceeds to Z307.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the probabilistic change (high probability state of the special symbol), that is, it is in the low probability state of the special symbol (Z302: No), Z303 to Z306. The process is skipped and the process proceeds to the Z307 process.

In the processing of Z307, is it a jackpot of a special symbol based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of Z301 and the special symbol jackpot random number 23 table 202qa (see FIG. 490 (a)) for low probability? The lottery result of whether or not is acquired (Z307). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the four random number values stored in the special symbol jackpot random number 23 table 202qa. Four random numbers "0 to 3" are set as the random number values that are the big hits of the special symbols in the low probability state of the special symbols, and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the random number values that are the hits are set. If they match, it is judged to be a big hit of a special symbol. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to Z309 processing.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z304, if it is determined that the result is not the lottery result corresponding to the fall (Z304: No), the process proceeds to the processing of Z308. In the processing of Z308, is it a jackpot of a special symbol based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of Z301 and the special symbol jackpot random number 23 table 202qa (see FIG. 490 (a)) for high probability? The lottery result of whether or not is acquired (Z308). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the eight random number values stored in the special symbol jackpot random number 23 table 202qa. Eight random numbers "4 to 11" are set as the random number values that are the big hits of the special symbols in the high probability state of the special symbols, and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the random number values that are the hits are set. If they match, it is judged to be a big hit of a special symbol. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to Z309 processing.

In the processing of Z309, is the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of Z307 or Z308 a jackpot of the special symbol (that is, the value of the acquired special hit random number counter C1 and the special symbol jackpot random number 23 table 202qa). (Z309), and if it is determined that it is a big hit of a special symbol (Z309: Yes), the values of the time saving / medium counter 203qg and the probability variation flag 203qh are initially set. It is reset to a value (Z310), and a display mode at the time of a big hit is set based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of Z301 (Z311). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of Z301 is compared with the random number value stored in the jackpot type selection 23 table 202qd, and the jackpot types of five types of special symbols (big hit A). -Which of the jackpot E) is the current jackpot type? As described above, in the jackpot of the first special symbol, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 9", it is determined that the jackpot is A (15R probability variation jackpot), and "10 to 49". If it is in the range of, it is determined to be a jackpot B (5R probability variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", it is determined to be a jackpot C (5R normal jackpot) (see FIG. 491 (b)). .. Further, in the jackpot of the second special symbol, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 79", it is determined that the jackpot is D (15R probability variation jackpot), and the value is in the range of "80 to 99". If there is, it is determined to be a jackpot E (15R normal jackpot) (see FIG. 491 (c)).

In this Z311 process, the display mode (lighting state of the LEDs 37A and 37B) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A to E). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A to E) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display mode of the stop symbol set in the process of Z311 is stopped and displayed by the process of Z215 of the special symbol variation process 23 (see FIG. 503) described above.

Next, with reference to the variation pattern selection 23 table 202qb (see FIGS. 492 (a) and 493), the variation pattern at the time of winning the jackpot is selected. Here, in the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIGS. 492 (b) and 493, the game set in order to facilitate the setting of different fluctuation patterns according to the set game state. It is configured so that the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set by referring to different data tables according to the state. Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern is determined with reference to the normal table 202qb1 (see FIG. 492 (a)) of the variation pattern selection 23 tables 202qb, while the gaming state is determined. When is in the probability variation state or the time reduction state, the variation pattern is determined with reference to the probability variation / time reduction table 202qb2 (see FIG. 493) in the variation pattern selection 23 table 202qb (Z312). After the processing of Z312 is completed, the processing is transferred to Z318. When the variation pattern is set in the processing of Z312, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol reservation ball execution area of the RAM 203 and the value of the stop type selection counter C3. ..

On the other hand, in the processing of Z309, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order (Z309: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving / medium counter 203qg is larger than 0. (Z313). In the processing of Z313, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203qg is larger than 0 (that is, the value is 1 or more) (Z313: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203qg is subtracted by 1 (Z314). A state command indicating the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203qg after subtraction is set (Z315), and the process proceeds to Z316. On the other hand, in the processing of Z313, when it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 203qg is 0 (Z313: No), the processing of Z314 and Z315 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the processing of Z316.

In the processing of Z316, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-order symbol, and the stop type selected stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa and the special symbol reserved ball execution area. Based on the values of the counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) at the time of deviation is determined (Z317). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of Z312, the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol reservation ball execution area. ..

In the Z312 process or the Z318 process executed after the Z317 process is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the Z312 process or the Z317 process is set. (Z318). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the Z312 process or the Z317 process is set (Z319). When the processing of Z319 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing 23 (Z104).

Next, with reference to FIG. 505, the start winning process 23 (Z105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 505 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 23 (Z105). This start winning process 23 (Z105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 502), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64, and if there is a starting winning. In addition, it is a process for holding a value indicated by various random number counters and a process for executing pre-reading of a lottery result in a special symbol from the values indicated by the various held random number counters.

When the start winning process 23 (Z105) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first entry port 64 (Z401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has won the first entry slot 64 (Z401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd (the number of reserved balls N1 of the variation display in the special symbol) is acquired (Z402). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (Z403).

Then, in the processing of Z401, if it is determined that there is no prize in the first ball opening 64 (Z401: No), the process proceeds to the processing of Z408, and even if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (Z401: No). Z401: Yes), when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203qd is not less than 4 (that is, the upper limit 4) in the processing of Z403 (Z403: No), the processing of Z407. Move to. On the other hand, in the processing of Z401, it is determined that the first ball opening 64 has won a prize (Z401: Yes), and in the processing of Z403, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd is set. If it is determined that the value is less than 4 (Z403: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd is added by 1 (Z404). Then, a hold ball number command of the first special symbol indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203qd changed by the calculation is set (Z405).

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 511) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203qd from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the special symbol 1 hold ball number of the RAM 223. It is stored in the counter 223qa.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of Z405, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the fall lottery counter C4, and the variable type updated by Z103 of the timer interrupt processing described above. Each value of the counter CS1 is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203qa of the RAM 203 (Z406). In the processing of Z406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area. When the processing of Z406 is completed, the look-ahead processing 23 is then executed (Z407), and the process shifts to the processing of Z408. The detailed contents of the look-ahead process 23 (Z407) will be described later with reference to FIG. 506, but various counters acquired for entering the ball into the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 Based on the value, a process of predetermining (pre-reading) each lottery result executed at the start of fluctuation is executed.

Regarding each of the processes of Z408 to Z413, the above-mentioned processes of Z401 to Z406 based on the entry of the ball into the first entry port 64 are only changed to the process based on the entry of the ball into the second start opening 640. , Z401 to Z406 perform substantially the same processing, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. After executing the process of Z413, the look-ahead process 23 is executed (Z414 (Z407)), and then this process is terminated.

In the present embodiment, the value of each counter is configured to be acquired based on the incoming ball, but it may be configured to be acquired at the start of fluctuation. With such a configuration, a storage area for storing the value of each counter is not required until the start of fluctuation, and the use of the storage area of the RAM 203 can be suppressed. Further, among the counters, some counters (for example, only the fluctuation type counter CS1) may be configured to be acquired at the start of fluctuation. With this configuration, the counter related to the hit / miss judgment can be acquired at the time of entering the ball, and the counter not related to the hit / miss judgment can be obtained later, and the amount of data to be stored while maintaining the fairness of the game can be stored. It can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 506, a look-ahead process 23 (Z407 (Z414)), which is one process in the start winning process 23 (Z105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 506 is a flowchart showing the look-ahead process 23 (Z407 (Z414)).

In the look-ahead process 23, first, it is determined whether or not there is a new prize (Z501). In this Z501 process, when the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd or the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe is added, it is determined that a new prize has been awarded. .. If it is determined that there is no new prize in the processing of Z501 (Z5011: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a new prize (Z501: Yes), then it is determined whether the current prize is the special symbol 1 (first special symbol) (Z502), and the special symbol 1 is determined. If it is determined (Z502: Yes), the lottery result for each counter value acquired this time is based on the special symbol big hit random number 23 table 202qa and the special figure 1 big hit 23 table (special figure 1 big hit type selection 23 table) 202qd1. It is acquired in advance (Z503), and the process proceeds to Z504. In the processing of Z504, a winning information command including a jackpot determination result and a jackpot type is set as a lottery result acquired in advance (Z504), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z502, when it is determined that the winning prize this time is not the special symbol 1 (special diagram 1), that is, the special symbol 2 (special diagram 2) (Z502: No), each counter acquired this time. The lottery result for the value is acquired in advance based on the special symbol jackpot random number 23 table 202qa and the special figure 2 jackpot type 23 table (special figure 2 jackpot type selection 23 table) 202qd2 (Z505), and as the lottery result acquired in advance. , The winning information command including the jackpot determination result and the jackpot type is set (Z504), and this process is terminated.

In this way, the result of the hit / fail determination in advance before the fluctuation starts is output to the voice lamp control device 113 as a winning information command every time the reserved ball is established, so that the voice lamp control device 113 has. , The hit / fail judgment result and its hit type can be recognized in advance. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 changes the color of the reserved symbol to a color suggesting the result of the winning / failing determination (for example, the color of the reserved symbol is changed to a color suggesting the winning / failing determination result) for notifying the player of the winning / failing determination result for the reserved ball in advance based on the winning information command. Or, an effect such as outputting a notification sound for notifying the hit / fail determination result in the reserved ball) can be executed. Further, since the winning information command outputs one winning information command for the reserved ball each time the reserved ball is established, the voice lamp control device 113 can also recognize the establishment of the reserved ball. can. The look-ahead process 23 (see Z407 in FIG. 506) in the present embodiment is configured to end the process as it is when it is determined that there is no new prize in the process of Z501 (Z501: No). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the winning information command is set again for each counter value already stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb. May be. With this configuration, even if it is determined that the advance notice effect is not executed for the winning information command received on the voice lamp control device 113 side, the advance notice effect is executed again for the same reserved symbol. It is possible to make a determination as to whether or not to do so. Further, in the present embodiment, the lottery result based on each counter value acquired on the main control device 110 side is determined in advance, and the information for indicating the advance determination result is set as the winning information command. However, not limited to this, information for indicating each acquired counter value is set as a winning information command, and the lottery result is determined in advance based on the winning information command received on the voice lamp control device 113 side. It may be configured. In addition, when setting information for indicating each acquired counter value as a winning information command, the winning information command may be encrypted so as not to be specified by the player who illegally acquired the counter value. It is good to configure it so that the winning information command is output in multiple timings.

Next, with reference to FIG. 507, the normal symbol variation processing 23 (Z106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 507 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation processing 23 (Z106). This normal symbol variation process 23 (Z106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 502), and is attached to the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the second ball entry port 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a.

In the normal symbol variation processing 23, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (Z601). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is performed. In the middle of being included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (Z6011: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (Z601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (Z602), and the second symbol display device is used. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (Z602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203qf (number of holdings of variable display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (Z603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203qf is larger than 0 (Z604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203qf is 0 (Z604 :. No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203qf is not 0 (Z604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203qf is subtracted by 1 (Z605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203qc is shifted (Z606). In the processing of Z606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203qc is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203qc is acquired (Z607), and the process proceeds to Z608.

In the processing of Z608, it is determined whether or not the time is shortened (high probability state of a normal symbol) (Z608). In this Z608 processing, the value of the time saving medium counter 203qg and the state of the probability change flag 203qh are confirmed, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203qg is 1 or more, or if the probability change flag 203qh is on, the time saving medium is in progress. If the value of the time reduction counter 203qg is 0 and the probability variation flag 203qh is off, it is determined that the time reduction is not in progress. In the processing of Z608, when it is determined that the time reduction is in progress (normal symbol high probability state) (the value of the time reduction medium counter 203qg is 1 or more, or the probability variation flag 203qh is on), it is determined (Z608: Yes). , Since the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the normal symbol, the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 acquired by the processing of Z603 and the normal hit random number 23 table (normal symbol per random number table) 202qc for high probability (Fig.) Based on 490 (b)), the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is a hit is acquired (Z609), and the process is shifted to Z611. In the processing of Z609, specifically, it is stored in the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 and the normal hit random number 23 table (normal symbol per random number table) 202qc (see FIG. 490 (b)) for high probability. Compare with random number value. As described above, if the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", it is normal. It is determined that the design is out of alignment (see FIG. 490 (b)).

On the other hand, in the processing of Z608, when it is determined that the time is not during the time reduction (high probability state of the normal symbol) (the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203qg is 0 and the probability variation flag 203qh is off), it is determined (Z608: No). , Since the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state (normal state, latent state) of a normal symbol, the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 acquired by the processing of Z603 and the normal hit random number 23 table for low probability (normal state). Based on the random number table per symbol) 202qc (see FIG. 490 (b)), the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is a hit is acquired (Z610). Specifically, the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal hit random number 23 table (normal symbol per random number table) 202qc (see FIG. 490 (b)) for low probability. .. As described above, if the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 is in the range of "5,6", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,7-239", it is normal. It is determined that the design is out of alignment (see FIG. 490 (b)).

In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is less likely to be a hit. This is because during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special gaming state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the specific winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry opening 640 is opened. This is to prevent the game ball that is to be won in the specific winning opening 65a from entering the second winning opening 640 as much as possible.

After executing the processing of Z609 or Z610, the process proceeds to the processing of Z611. In the processing of Z611, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of Z609 or Z610 is a hit of the normal symbol (Z611), and if it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol (Z611: 1). Yes), the display mode at the time of hit is set (Z612), and the process proceeds to Z614. In this Z612 process, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z611 that the normal symbol is out of alignment (Z611: No), the display mode at the time of being out of alignment is set (Z613), and the process proceeds to Z614. In this Z613 process, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

In the processing of Z614, it is determined whether or not the current time is shortened (whether or not it is a high probability state of a normal symbol) (Z614), and if it is during a short time (high probability state of a normal symbol) (Z614: Yes). , The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (Z615), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the processing of Z614 is not during the time reduction (high probability state of the normal symbol), that is, if it is the low probability state of the normal symbol (Z614: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30. Set to seconds (Z616) and end this process.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (Z602: Yes), whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (Z617). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of Z615 or the processing of Z616 before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

In the processing of Z617, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Z617: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of Z617, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (Z617: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (Z618). In the processing of Z618, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the processing of Z612, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) in the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is out of order and the display mode is set by the processing of Z613, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to. When the stop display is set by the processing of Z618, when the second symbol display update processing (see Z1007) of the main processing (see FIG. 511) is executed next, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. When the process is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the Z612 process or the Z613 process.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process 23 is the hit of the ordinary symbol. (Z619). If the result of this lottery is not a normal symbol (Z619: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (Z619: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current time is shortened (Z620). If it is determined that the time is being shortened (Z620: Yes), the opening time and the number of times of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 are set to 1 second x 2 times (Z622), and the process of Z623 is started. Transition.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z620, when it is determined that the time is not shortened (Z620: No), the opening time and the number of times of the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 are set to 0.2 seconds × 1 time. Is set to (Z622), and the process proceeds to Z623.

In the processing of Z623 executed after the processing of Z621 or Z622, the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is set (Z623), and this processing is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the processing of the Z623, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see Z1005) of the main process (see FIG. 511) is executed, the electric accessory 640a The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of Z621 or the processing of Z622 of FIG. 507 are completed.

In this way, except during the big hit of the special symbol, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, the fluctuation display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the low probability state of the normal symbol, and further. Since the release period of the second entry port 640 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entry port 640.

In this embodiment, the opening time and the number of opening times per long time are the same in the normal state and the latent state, but the operation is not limited to this, and the opening time and the number of opening times are set differently. May be good. Further, in the present embodiment, the opening operation content of the first electric accessory 640a is set based on the gaming state set at the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol (at the time of lottery). Without limitation, for example, the game is executed at the time when the change time of the winning normal symbol is elapsed by executing the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol based on the game state set at the start of the change of the normal symbol (at the time of lottery). The opening operation content of the first electric accessory 640a may be set based on the state. That is, in the present embodiment, since the game state is variably set based on the lottery of the special symbol, the game state may be variably set while the normal symbol is changed. In such a case, if the opening operation content of the first electric accessory 640a is set based on the game state set at the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol (at the time of lottery), for example, during a big hit game or normal There is a problem that the first electric accessory 640a is opened for a long time during the high probability state of the symbol. On the other hand, by configuring so as to set the opening operation content of the first electric accessory 640a based on the gaming state at the time when the fluctuation time of the winning normal symbol has elapsed, the first electric accessory 640a It is possible to execute the opening operation with the content suitable for the set game state.

Next, the through gate passing process 23 (Z107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 508. FIG. 508 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process 23 (Z107). This through gate passage process 23 (Z107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 502), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the normal hit random number counter C5.

In the through gate passing process 23, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (Z701). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal entry port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (Z701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203qf (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (Z702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203qf is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (Z703).

Whether the game ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (Z701: No), or even if the game ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol reserved ball count counter If the value (M) of 203qf is not less than 4 (Z703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (Z701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203qf is less than 4 (Z703: Yes), it is normal. The value (M) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203qf is added by 1 (Z704). Then, the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 updated by the timer interrupt process Z103 described above is the first of the free hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203qc of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area (Z705), and then this process is terminated. In the processing of Z705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203qf is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 509. FIG. 509 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (Z801) as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 510, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 510 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (Z901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as voice lamp control device 113, payout control device 111, etc.) to be in an operable state, a weight process (weight time of 1 second in this embodiment) is set. Processing for setting) is executed (Z902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (Z903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 122 provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (Z904), and if it is turned on (Z904: Yes), the process shifts to Z913. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (Z904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z905), and if it is not stored (Z905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also transferred to Z913 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (Z906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (Z907: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and even in such a case, the process is transferred to Z913. As will be described later in the process of Z1014 in FIG. 511, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of Z913, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (Z913). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (Z914, Z915) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process (Z914, Z915) is executed. Further, the initialization process (Z914, Z915) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (Z914, Z915), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (Z914), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (Z915). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the Z911 process.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (Z904: No), the power off occurrence information is stored (Z905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (Z904: No). Z907: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203qg, and the state of the probability change flag 203qh (that is, the game state at the time of startup) are transmitted (Z908). Next, while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203, the power cutoff occurrence information is cleared (Z909). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff is transmitted (Z910), and the process proceeds to Z911. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of Z911, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (Z912), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 511, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 511 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of Z1001 to Z1007 is executed as a periodic process with a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of Z1010 and Z1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 502), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is input to each control device (periphery) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (Z1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading processing of Z101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 502) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process 23 (see FIG. 503) and the start winning process 23 (see FIG. 505) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning command set in the start winning processing 23 (see FIG. 505) and the look-ahead processing 23 (see FIG. 506) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (Z1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (Z1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. The jackpot control process 23 for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (Z1004). In the jackpot control process 23, the specific winning opening 65a is opened according to the content (big hit type) of the jackpot game to be executed, and the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed, or a ball is specified in the specific winning opening 65a. Determine if you have won a few prizes. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. The details of the jackpot control process 23 (Z1004) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 512 to 516. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process 23 (Z1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process. Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot game content corresponding to the jackpot type (type of opening, opening time, number of openings (number of rounds), opening period, interval period, ending period) is used as a jackpot scenario. The jackpot scenario that is stored in advance and corresponds to the jackpot type set at the time of winning the jackpot is read, and the jackpot game based on the read jackpot scenario is executed.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is executed (Z1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the processing of Z623 of the normal symbol variation process 23 (see FIG. 507), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is started. The opening / closing control of the first electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of Z621 or the processing of Z622 in FIG. 507 in the normal symbol variation processing 23 are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (Z1006). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the Z312 process or the Z317 process of the special symbol variation start process 23 (see FIG. 504), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed in the first symbol. It starts in the display devices 37A and 37B. In the present embodiment, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on until the fluctuation time elapses from the start of the fluctuation. If the LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the Z312 process or the Z317 process of the special symbol variation start process 23 (see FIG. 504) ends, the first symbol display is displayed. The stop symbol (first symbol) is set to the first symbol in the display mode set by the processing of Z311 or the processing of Z316 of the special symbol variation start processing 23 (see FIG. 504) after ending the variation display executed in the apparatus 37. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the display device 37.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (Z1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the Z615 process or the Z616 process of the normal symbol variation process 23 (see FIG. 507), the variation display is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, variable display is performed in which the symbol of "○" and the symbol of "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of Z618 of the normal symbol change process 23 (see FIG. 507), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped at the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the Z612 process or the Z613 process of the normal symbol variation process 23 (see FIG. 507). Display (light up display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z1008), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (Z1008: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (Z1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (Z1009: Yes), the process is shifted to Z1001 and each process after Z1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if a predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (Z1009: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (Z1010, Z1011).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (Z1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as that of the Z1002 (Z1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process of Z1001 to Z1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the initial value of the normal hit random number counter C5) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variable type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the processing of Z1008, if the power off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z1008: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 509 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after Z1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (Z1012), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And send (Z1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (Z1014), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (Z1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The Z1008 process is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the state changes of the games performed in Z1001 to Z1007, or at the end of one cycle of the Z1010 and Z1011 processes performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cutoff state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the processing of Z1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of Z1001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer has a predetermined value (in the process of initial setting). By setting the initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of Z1001. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process 23 (Z1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 512. FIG. 512 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 23 (Z1004). This jackpot control process 23 (Z1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 511), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and a specific winning opening is entered. (Large opening) This is a process for opening or closing 65a.

In the jackpot control process 23 (Z1004), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start flag 203qi is on (Z1101). If it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203qi is on (Z1101: Yes), the jackpot opening command is set (Z1102), the jackpot start flag 203qi is turned off, and the jackpot middle flag 203qj is set on (Z1103). , End this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z1101 that the jackpot start flag 203qi is off (Z1101: No), then whether the special symbol is currently being jackpotped (that is, the jackpot middle flag 203qj is on). Whether or not (Z1104). If it is determined in the processing of Z1104 that the current is not a big hit (the big hit flag 203qj is off) (Z1104: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of Z1104, if it is determined that the jackpot is currently being hit (the jackpot flag 203qj is on) (Z1104: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of a new round (Z1104: Yes). Z1105).

If it is determined in the processing of Z1105 that it is the start timing of a new round (Z1105: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process 23 for setting the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a according to the number of rounds is executed (Z1105: Yes). Z1106), this process is terminated. The details of the jackpot operation setting process 23 will be described later with reference to FIG. 513.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z1105 that it is not the start timing of a new round (Z1105: No), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending period of the currently executed round (Z1107). .. Here, in the present embodiment, when the final round of the jackpot is completed, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending period. If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending period (Z1107: Yes), the ending command is set (Z1108), and this process is terminated. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 511) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot is started in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z1107, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending period currently being executed (Z1107: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (Z1109). Here, the end timing of the jackpot indicates a case where the execution period of the ending effect has elapsed. If it is determined in the processing of Z1109 that it is the end timing of the jackpot (Z1109: Yes), the jackpot end processing 23 for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends is executed (Z1110), and this processing is terminated. The details of the jackpot end processing 23 will be described later with reference to FIG. 514. On the other hand, in the processing of Z1109, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the end of the big hit (Z1109: No), the winning processing 23 for controlling according to the winning of the specific winning opening 65a is executed (Z1111). An abnormality process 23 for determining whether or not a ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a is normally ejected is executed (Z1112), and then this process is terminated. Details of the winning process 23 and the abnormality process 23 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 515 and 516.

Next, the details of the jackpot operation setting process 23 (Z1106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 513. FIG. 513 is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process 23 (Z1106). This jackpot operation setting process 23 (Z1106) is executed in the jackpot control process 23 (see FIG. 512), and as described above, is a process for setting the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a according to the number of rounds. ..

When the jackpot operation setting process 23 (see FIG. 513) is started, it is first determined whether it is the start timing of 5 rounds (that is, the round in which the V accessory operates) (Z1201). In the processing of Z1201, if it is determined that it is the start timing of 5 rounds (Z1201: Yes), the start of the operation scenario of the V bonus is set (Z1202), and the opening pattern of the specific winning opening 65a corresponding to the jackpot type is set. Is set (Z1203), and the process shifts to Z1205.

As described above, in the 23rd embodiment, a common operation scenario is set for the V character regardless of the jackpot type (regardless of the type). Specifically, an operation scenario is set in which the game balls are arranged in a variable manner so that the game balls can be distributed to the V region from the time when 5 seconds have passed to the time when 10 seconds have passed since the start of the 5th round. On the other hand, as described above, with respect to the opening pattern of the specific winning opening 65a, a different opening pattern is set depending on whether it is a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot. Specifically, in the case of a probabilistic jackpot, an opening / closing pattern (fifth round) in which the game ball can reach the V character while the V character is variable in the arrangement of distributing the game ball to the V area. While the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened and closed in the opening / closing pattern) in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened for 4.5 seconds from 5 seconds after the start to 9.5 seconds after the start, it is normal. In the case of a big hit, an opening / closing pattern that makes it impossible to reach the V character while the V character is variable in the arrangement of distributing the game ball to the V area (4.5 seconds have passed from the start of the 5th round). The specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened and closed in the opening / closing pattern) in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened for 4.5 seconds until the time.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the fifth round in the processing of Z1201 (Z1201: No), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is set (Z1204), and the processing is shifted to Z1205. In the processing of Z1205 executed after the processing of Z1203 or Z1204, a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (Z1205), and this processing is terminated.

The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 511) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the control device 113. Upon receiving the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 sets a display round number command for displaying the newly started round number on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 can be updated according to the number of rounds of the jackpot.

By executing this jackpot operation setting process 23 (see FIG. 513), the specific winning opening 65a can be opened in each round of the jackpot, and the ball can be set in the V region in the fifth round. be able to. As a result, in the jackpots A, B, and D, the player just hits right in the fifth round, and the game ball almost certainly enters the V region and passes through the probability change switch, so that after the jackpot ends. It is possible to shift to a probabilistic state (a probable change state of a special symbol and a time saving state of a normal symbol). Further, in the case of big hits C and E, it is difficult to put the game ball into the V region even if the player hits right, so that the time can be set to a short time after the big hit. As a result, the lottery of the first special symbol in which the jackpot C is determined at a relatively high rate (50% rate) in the case of a jackpot is regarded as a lottery disadvantageous to the player, and in the case of a jackpot, it is relatively The lottery of the second special symbol in which the jackpot E is determined at a low rate (20% rate) can be a lottery that is advantageous to the player.

Next, the details of the jackpot end processing 23 (Z1110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 514. FIG. 514 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process 23 (Z1110). This jackpot end process 23 (Z1110) is executed in the jackpot control process 23 (see FIG. 512), and as described above, is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends.

In the jackpot end process 23 (Z1110), first, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203qk is on (Z1301). If it is determined in the processing of Z1301 that the probability variation setting flag 203qk is on (Z1301: Yes), it means that the game ball has passed the probability variation switch during the jackpot, so the probability variation flag 203qh should be set to on. Set the state after the big hit to the probable change state (Z1302), and shift to the processing of Z1303. On the other hand, in the processing of Z1301, if the probability variation setting flag 203qk is off (Z1301: No), it means that the game ball has not passed through the probability variation switch during the jackpot, so by skipping the processing of Z1302. After the jackpot ends, the special symbol is set to the low probability state, and the process proceeds to Z1303.

In the processing of Z1303, 100 is set to the value of the time saving medium counter 203qg (Z1303), and a state command (big hit end command) for indicating the game state after the big hit ends based on the state of the probability change flag 203qh and the time saving medium counter 203qg. ) Is set (Z1304). The state command (big hit end command) set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 511) executed by the MPU 201. Then, it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the state command, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the game state storage area 223qf according to the game state notified by the state command. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can accurately grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Next, both the jackpot middle flag 203qj and the probability variation setting flag 203qk are set to off (Z1305), and this process ends.

By executing this jackpot end process 23 (see FIG. 514), it is possible to accurately set the gaming state after the jackpot ends depending on whether or not the game ball has passed the probability change switch during the jackpot.

Next, the details of the winning process 23 (Z1111) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 515. FIG. 515 is a flowchart showing the winning process 23 (Z1111). This winning process 23 (Z1111) is executed in the jackpot control process 23 (see FIG. 512), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to the winning of the specific winning opening 65a.

In the winning process 23 (Z1111), first, it is determined whether the present is the round valid period (Z1401). Here, the round valid period is a period in which the round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the specific winning opening 65a to the end of the interval period. In the processing of Z1401, if the round is not valid (Z1401: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z1401, when it is determined that the current round validity period is (Z1401: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the winning to the specific winning opening 65a is detected (Z1402), and the specific winning opening 65a is determined. If winning is detected (Z1402: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter 203qp and updated (Z1403), and a winning command indicating that winning to the specific winning opening 65a is detected is set. (Z1404), the process proceeds to Z1405. On the other hand, if the winning of the specific winning opening 65a is not detected in the processing of Z1402 (Z1402: No), the processing of Z1403 and Z1404 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z1405.

In the processing of Z1405, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203qp is 10 or more (Z1405), and if the value of the winning number counter 203qp is 10 or more (Z1405: Yes), the process proceeds to Z1407. On the other hand, in the processing of Z1405, if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter is 9 or less (Z1405: No), it is determined whether the round time has elapsed (Z1406), and if the round time has elapsed (Z1406). Z1406: Yes), shift to the processing of Z1407. In this Z1406 process, it is determined that the round time has elapsed when 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round.

In the process of Z1407, the closure of the specific winning opening 65a is set (Z1407), and the closing command indicating that the closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set is set (Z1408). Next, it is determined whether the closure of the specific winning opening 65a this time is based on the end of the 5th round (Z1409), and if it is determined that the closure is based on the end of the 5th round (Z1409: Yes), the V accessory. By setting the flow path solenoid for changing the variable to off, the state of the V accessory is set to the arrangement in which the game ball is distributed to the non-V region (Z1410), and the process shifts to Z1411. On the other hand, in the processing of Z1409, when it is determined that the closure of the specific winning opening 65a this time is due to the completion of rounds other than the 5th round (Z1409: No), the flow path solenoid is set to ON. Since there is no possibility, the processing of Z1410 is skipped and the processing is transferred to Z1411.

In the processing of Z1411, the remaining ball timer flag 203qq, the probability change effective flag 203qs, and the round end flag are set to ON (Z1411), and the processing is shifted to Z1412. Further, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203qp is 9 or less in the processing of Z1405 (Z1405: No), and it is determined that the round time has not elapsed in the processing of Z1406 (Z1406: No). The processing of Z1407 to Z1411 is skipped, and the processing is transferred to Z1412.

In the processing of Z1412, it is determined whether the round end flag is on (Z1412), and if the round end flag is off (Z1412: No), the process proceeds to the processing of Z1413. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round end flag is on in the processing of Z1412 (Z1412: Yes), then it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203qs is on (Z1416). In the processing of Z1416, if the probability variation valid flag 203qs is off (Z1416: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the probabilistic valid flag 203qs is on (Z1416: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probabilistic valid timer 203qt (Z1417), and then it is determined whether the value of the probabilistic valid timer 203qt is the upper limit value (Z1416: Yes). Z1418). Then, if the value of the probability change effective timer 203qt is not the upper limit value (Z1418: No), the process proceeds to the process of Z1413, the probability change switch is monitored, and the process of updating the probability change setting flag 203qk is executed. As a result, if the probability change effective timer 203qt is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the probability change switch, so that the probability change state can be set in consideration of the ball brushing time. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the probability change switch from being improperly passed through the game ball and being given a probability change state.

On the other hand, if the value of the probabilistic valid timer 203qt is the upper limit (Z1418: Yes), the probabilistic valid flag 203qs and the round end flag are set to off (Z1419), and the value of the probabilistic valid timer 203qt is reset (Z1420). , End this process.

Further, in the process of Z1413, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the probability change switch (Z1413), and if the game ball has not passed the probability change switch (Z1413: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the game ball has passed through the probability change switch (Z1413: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability change passage counter 203qm (Z1414), the probability change setting flag 203qk is set to ON (Z1415), and this processing is performed. To finish.

Next, the exception handling 23 (Z1112) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 516. FIG. 516 is a flowchart showing the exception handling 23 (Z1112). This abnormality processing 23 (Z1112) is a processing executed in the jackpot control processing 23 (see FIG. 512), and as described above, it is determined whether or not the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a is normally discharged. This is a process for determining.

In the abnormality processing 23 (Z1112), first, it is determined whether the current is the round valid period (Z1501), and if it is not the round valid period (Z1501: No), the present processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is valid (Z1501: Yes), then whether or not the game ball has passed the ball discharge port switch (whether or not the game ball discharged from the variable winning device 65 is detected) is determined. Determine (Z1502).

In the processing of Z1502, if it is determined that the game ball has passed the ball discharge port switch (the game ball has been discharged from the variable winning device 65) (Z1502: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the discharge number counter 203ku. (Z1503), shift to the processing of Z1504. On the other hand, in the processing of Z1502, if the game ball has not passed through the ball ejection port switch (Z1502: No), the processing of Z1503 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z1504.

In the process of Z1504, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203qq is on (Z1504). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203qq is off (Z1504: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203qq is on (Z1504: Yes), the ball is in the bleeding period, so 1 is added to the value of the remaining ball timer 203qr to update (Z1505). Next, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203qr is the upper limit value (Z1506), and if the value of the remaining ball timer 203qr is not the upper limit value (Z1506: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203qr is the upper limit value (Z1506: Yes), then the number of discharged balls (the total value of the value of the probability variation passing counter 203qm and the value of the discharging number counter 203qu) is awarded. It is determined whether or not the number matches the number (value of the winning number counter 203qp) (Z1507).

If it is determined in the processing of Z1507 that the number of discharged pieces and the number of winnings do not match (Z1507: No), an error command is set (Z1508), and the process proceeds to Z1509. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character of a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, during the period when the V region is closed, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts in which the game ball is illegally entered into the V region and passed through the probability change switch.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z1507, if it is determined that the number of discharged pieces and the number of winnings match (Z1507: Yes), the processing of Z1508 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of Z1509. In the processing of Z1509, the remaining ball timer flag 203qq is set to off (Z1509), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203qr is reset (Z1510). After that, the values of the winning number counter 203qp, the discharging number counter 203qu, and the probability variation passing counter 203qm are reset (Z1511), and this process is terminated.

By executing this abnormality processing 23 (see FIG. 516), a problem occurs in which the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a is not normally ejected due to a ball clogging inside the variable winning device 65 or the like. Can be detected and notified at an early stage.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the 23rd embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 517 to 535, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 517. FIG. 517 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (Z3001). Specifically, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power cutoff processing flag is turned on, the power cutoff process of the Z3119 is performed by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "momentary power failure") (see FIG. 518). ) Is started in the middle of execution (Z3002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 518, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see Z3116 in FIG. 518), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of Z3119. Before the execution of the power cutoff process, the power cutoff processing flag is turned on, and after the power cutoff process is completed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power cutoff process of Z3119 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power cutoff process in progress flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (Z3002: No), the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of the Z3119 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (Z3003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of Z3006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (Z3003: Yes), the process proceeds to the Z3004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (Z3003: No), the process proceeds to the Z3008 process.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of RAM223 is destroyed (Z3003: Yes), and the process proceeds to Z3004. On the other hand, this start-up process was started after the execution of the power cutoff process of Z3119 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or it was reset only to MPU221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (Z3003: No), and the process proceeds to the Z3008 process.

If the power-off processing flag is on (Z3002: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and the voice lamp control device 113 is being executed during the power-off processing of the Z3119. MPU221 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power cutoff process is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to the Z3004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the Z3004 process, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (Z3004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, it is confirmed whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (Z3005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (Z3006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (Z3005: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (Z3007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of Z3008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (Z3008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of Z3119 is executed (see Z3118 in FIG. 518). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of Z3119 is executed, the process of Z3008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is the case where the Z3119 is started in a state where the execution of the power cutoff process is completed even after the power failure occurs. Therefore, in such a case (Z3008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (Z3009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (Z3010), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set permissions (Z3011). The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110. When the processing of Z3011 is completed, it is next determined whether or not a status command has been received from the main control unit 110 (Z3012). It should be noted that this state command is a command set in the Z908 process of the start-up process (see FIG. 510) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. If it is determined that a status command has been received in the Z3012 process (Z3012: Yes), information indicating the received status command is set in the status setting area (Z3013), and the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 518). And migrate. On the other hand, if it is determined that the status command has not been received in the processing of Z3012 (Z3012: No), the processing of Z3013 is skipped and the process proceeds to the main processing (see FIG. 518).

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of Z3008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, for example, so that the processing of Z3004 to Z3006 is performed via the processing of Z3008. This is the case when the process is reached or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power cutoff command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (Z3008: No), Z3009, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to Z3010, the above-mentioned processes of Z3010 to Z3013 are executed, and the main process (FIG. 518).

In this way, when the power is turned on, the main control device 110 outputs a command that can determine whether or not the normal symbol has been hit for a long time, so that the voice lamp control device 113 also determines the state. Can be done.

It should be noted that the reason for skipping the clearing process of Z3009 is that when the processing of Z3008 is reached from Z3004 via the processing of Z3006, all the storage areas of RAM223 have already been cleared by the processing of Z3004. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 518, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 518 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the Z3101 process this time was executed (Z3101), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (Z3101: No), the process of Z3102 to Z3113 is not performed and the process proceeds to the process of Z3114. In the processing of Z3101, it is mainly related to display (directing) that Z3102 to Z3113 determine whether or not 1 msec has elapsed, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process 23 of the Z3114, the variation display setting process 23 of the Z3115, and the process of updating various counter values (not shown) in a short cycle. That is, by executing the processing of Z3114 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of Z3115 in a short cycle, the command determination process 23 (FIG. FIG. Based on the command received by S3114 of 528), the setting related to the variation effect can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the processing of Z3101 (Z3101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of Z3103 to Z3115 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (Z3102). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the processing of Z3108 described later (Z3103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (Z3104). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not the time when the power is turned on, the process shifts to the Z3105 process without performing the notification by the power on notification process.

In the process of Z3105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (Z3106). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, the hold lamp (not shown) is turned on according to the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball count counter 223qa, the special symbol 2 hold ball count counter 223qb, and the normal hold ball count counter 223qc. Is done.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (Z3107). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process to set to perform the production.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (Z3108), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (Z3109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of Z3109, the liquid crystal display execution management processing is executed (Z3110), and the process shifts to the processing of Z3111. In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of Z3108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal display effect execution management process. The sound editing / output processing of the Z3109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

After the processing of Z3110 is completed, the effect update process 23 for updating the effect mode of various effects executed during the execution of the variable display effect is executed (Z3111). The effect update process 23 (Z3111) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 519 to 446. After executing the effect update process 23 (Z3111), the operation status (presence / absence of pressing) of the PUSH button 10317 is monitored, and when a pressing is detected, control according to the pressing status is executed. Pressing detection processing of (Z3112) is executed. The details of this press detection process (Z3112) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 524 to 450.

When the processing of Z3112 is completed, the counter update processing is executed (Z3113). In this counter update process (Z3113), a process for updating the value of a counter (for example, an effect lottery counter 223qy for drawing an effect mode) required when executing various effects is executed.

When the processing of Z3113 is completed, next, the command determination processing 23 for executing the control according to various commands received from the main control device 110 is executed (Z3114). The details (Z3114) of the command determination process 23 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 528 to 454. After the command determination process 23 (Z3114) is executed, the variable display setting process 23 is executed (Z3115). In the variation display setting process 23, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process 23 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 532 to 459.

When the processing of Z3115 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (Z3116). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the Z3116 process (Z3116: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (Z3118), and the power-off process is executed (Z3119). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (Z3120), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the Z3116 process (Z3116: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (Z3117) based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223, and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (Z3117: No), the process returns to the process of Z3101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (Z3117: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the effect update process 23 (Z3111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 519. FIG. 519 is a flowchart showing the effect update process 23 (Z3111). This effect update process 23 (Z3111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 518) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, various types executed during the execution of the variable display effect. This is a process for updating the production mode of the production.

In the effect update process 23 (Z3111), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time timer 223qs is larger than 0 (Z3201), and when it is determined that the value is 0 (Z3201: No), This process is terminated as it is because it means that the variable display is not currently being executed and there is no possibility that the effect to be updated is being executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time timer 223qs is a value larger than 0 (that is, a value of 1 or more) (Z3201: Yes), the value of the fluctuation time timer is subtracted (Z3202), and then The pressing stop effect processing for updating the effect mode during the execution of the pressing stop effect (see FIG. 478) is executed (Z3203). The details of this pressing stop effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 520.

When the processing of Z3203 is completed, the interrupt continuous hitting effect processing for updating the effect mode during execution of the interrupt continuous hitting effect (see FIG. 482) is subsequently executed (Z3204). The details of this interrupt continuous striking effect process (Z3204) will be described later with reference to FIG. 521. Further, when the processing of Z3204 is completed, next, a batch change effect processing for updating the effect mode during execution of the hold batch change effect (see FIGS. 485 and 486) is executed (Z3205). The details of this batch change effect processing (Z3205) will be described later with reference to FIG. 522. When the processing of Z3205 is completed, the charge consumption processing for setting the consumption of the charged spirit gauge in the chance charge effect (see FIG. 480) is executed (Z3206), and this processing is terminated. The details of this charge consumption process will be described later with reference to FIG. 523.

Next, with reference to FIG. 520, the pressing stop effect processing (Z3203) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 520 is a flowchart showing this pressing stop effect processing (Z3203). This press stop effect process (Z3203) is executed in the effect update process 23 (see FIG. 519) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, the press stop effect (see FIG. 478). This is a process for updating the effect mode during execution.

In this pressing stop effect processing (see FIG. 520), first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the pressing stop effect (see FIG. 478) (Z3301). In the processing of Z3301, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the pressing stop effect (see FIG. 478), the start of the pressing stop effect is set (Z3302), and the value of the operation valid period timer 223qt is set to 3. Set the timer value corresponding to the seconds (Z3303). Next, 3 is set in the value of the stop operation count counter 223qu (Z3304), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3301, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the pressing stop effect (Z3301: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the operation valid period timer 223qt is larger than 0 (Z3305). If it is determined in the processing of Z3305 that the value of the operation validity period timer 223qt is larger than 0 (Z3305: Yes), the value of the operation validity period timer 223qt is updated (Z3306), and then the updated operation validity period timer is updated. It is determined whether or not the value of 223qt is 0 (Z3307). If it is determined in the processing of Z3307 that the value of the operation validity period timer 223qt after the update is not 0 (Z3307: No), this processing is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the value of the operation valid period timer 223qt after the update is 0 (Z3307: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the chance charge standby flag 223qk is on (Z3308). If it is determined in the processing of Z3308 that the chance charge waiting flag 223qk is on (Z3308: Yes), the stop display of the chance charge symbol is set (Z3309), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z3308, when it is determined that the chance charge standby flag 223qk is off (Z3308: No), only the pressing stop effect (see FIG. 478) is set for the current variation display effect. In the state (the execution of the chance charge effect was not set), it means that the operation valid period (3 seconds) has passed without the stop operation by the player, so the stop display of the off symbol is set. (Z3310), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3305, when it is determined that the value of the operation valid period timer 223qt is 0 (Z3305: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop display period of the chance charge symbol has elapsed (Z3311). .. If it is determined that the stop display period of the chance charge symbol has not elapsed (Z3311: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of Z3311, when it is determined that the stop display period of the chance charge symbol has elapsed (Z3311: Yes), the start of the chance charge effect corresponding to the value of the charge number counter 223qm is set (Z3312), and the chance is set. The charge standby flag 223qk is set to off (Z3313). Next, a value corresponding to the current number of reserved balls is set in the value of the charge state count counter 223qn (Z3314), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 521, the interrupt continuous striking effect process (Z3204) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 521 is a flowchart showing this interrupt continuous striking effect process (Z3204). This interrupt continuous striking effect process (Z3204) is executed in the effect update process 23 (see FIG. 519) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and during the execution of the interrupt continuous striking effect (see FIG. 482). This is a process for updating the production mode.

When this interrupt continuous hitting effect process (see FIG. 521) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the interrupt continuous hitting effect (Z3401). In the processing of Z3401, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the interrupt continuous hitting effect (Z3401: Yes), then, from the value of the fluctuation time timer 223qs, whether or not the current fluctuation time is the time indicating before reach. (Z3402). In the processing of Z3402, if it is determined that the fluctuation time indicates before reach (Z3402: Yes), after setting both display and audio pauses, set the pause flag to "01H" (Z3402: Yes). Z3404), shift to the processing of Z3405. Specifically, in the processing of Z3404, a display interruption command indicating the start of stop (interruption) of the display mode is set to be output to the display control device 114, and the output stop (interruption) of BGM is started. The voice interruption command indicating the above is set to be output to the voice output device 226.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z3402, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time timer 223qs is not the timer value indicating before reach (Z3402: No), the pause (suspension) of only the display mode is set and the pause flag is set. Is set to "02H" (Z3403), and the process proceeds to Z3405. In the processing of Z3405 executed after the processing of Z3403 or Z3404 is completed, the start of the interrupt continuous striking effect (see FIG. 482) is set (Z3405), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3401 when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the interrupt continuous striking effect (Z3401: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the continuous striking period (Z3406). If it is determined in the processing of Z3406 that it is the start timing of the continuous striking period (Z3406: Yes), a timer value corresponding to 5 seconds is set in the value of the continuous striking valid period timer 223qv (Z3407), and this processing is terminated. ..

On the other hand, in the processing of Z3406, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the continuous striking period (Z3406: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous striking valid period timer 223qv is larger than 0 (Z3408). When it is determined that the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223qv is larger than 0 (Z3408: Yes), the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223qv is subtracted by 1 (Z3409), and then the value of the repeated hit valid period timer 223qv after the subtraction is subtracted. Determines whether or not is 0 (Z3410). If it is determined that the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223qv after subtraction is 0 (Z3410: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of Z3410, when it is determined that the value of the continuous hit effective period timer 223qv after subtraction is not 0 (Z3410: No), the display of the end image of the interrupt continuous hit effect is set (Z3411), and then. This process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3408, when it is determined that the value of the continuous hit effective period timer 223qv is 0 (Z3408: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the interrupt continuous hit effect (Z3412). .. In the process of Z3412, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the interrupt continuous hitting effect (Z3412: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the pause flag is "01H" (Z3413). When it is determined that the value of the pause flag is "01H" (Z3413: Yes), it means that both the display and the sound have been stopped (interrupted) at the start of the interrupt continuous striking effect. Both aspects and voice aspects are set to resume from the pause position (Z3414). That is, the display control device 114 is set to output the display interruption command indicating the end of the interruption of the display mode, and the audio output device 226 is set to output the audio interruption command indicating the end of the interruption of the audio mode. Set the output. When the processing of Z3414 is completed, the processing is transferred to Z3415.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3413, when it is determined that the value of the pause flag is not "01H" (Z3413: No), it means that the value of the pause flag is "02H", and only the display mode is temporary. Since it means that the display mode has been stopped (suspended), the restart of the display mode from the pause position is set (that is, the display control device 114 is output with the display suspension command indicating the end of the display mode suspension). (Setting) (Z3416), and the process shifts to Z3415. In the processing of Z3415 executed after the processing of Z3414 or Z3416, by setting the initial value "00H" to the pause flag (Z3415), neither the voice nor the display is paused (interrupted). Is indicated, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3412, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the interrupt continuous hitting effect (Z3412: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 522, the batch change effect processing (Z3205) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 522 is a flowchart showing this batch change effect processing (Z3205). This batch change effect process (Z3205) is executed in the effect update process 23 (see FIG. 519) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is performed in the hold batch change effect (see FIGS. 485 and 486). This is a process for updating the effect mode during execution.

In the batch change effect processing (see FIG. 522), first, it is determined whether or not the batch change flag 223qp is on (Z3501), and when it is determined that the batch change flag 223qp is not on (off) (see FIG. 522). Z3501: No), which means that it is not during the execution period of the hold batch change effect (see FIGS. 485 and 486), and there is no possibility of making settings related to the hold batch change effect, so this process is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the batch change flag 223qp is on (Z3501: Yes), then, in the hold batch change effect, the timing at which the valid period of the operation for the PUSH button 10317 for batch changing the hold symbol mode is started. It is determined whether or not it is (Z3502). In the processing of Z3502, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the valid period of the operation for the PUSH button 10317 (Z3502: Yes), the timer value corresponding to 3 seconds is set in the value of the batch change period timer 223qx (Z3502: Yes). Z3503), the valid period of the operation for the PUSH button 10317 is set to 3 seconds, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of 3502 that it is not the start timing of the valid period (Z3502: No), then whether the value of the batch change period timer 223qx is larger than 0 (that is, the operation for the PUSH button 10317 is valid. Whether or not it is within the period) is determined (Z3504). In the processing of Z3504, if it is determined that the value of the batch change period timer 223qx is larger than 0 (Z3504: Yes), the value of the batch change period timer 223qx is subtracted by 1 (Z3505), and the batch change period timer 223qx after the subtraction is subtracted. It is determined whether or not the value of is 0 (Z3506). If it is determined in the processing of Z3506 that the value of the batch change period timer 223qx after subtraction is not 0 (Z3506: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of Z3506, when it is determined that the value of the batch change period timer 223qx after subtraction is 0 (Z3506: Yes), the number of reserved balls is set to the reserved symbol mode indicated by the data of the reserved symbol mode storage area 223r. The symbol is set to be changed and displayed (Z3507), all the values of the batch change flag 223qp, the change point storage area 223qq, and the batch change period timer 223qx are reset (Z3508), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the batch change period timer 223qx is 0 in the processing of Z3504 (Z3504: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

Next, the charge consumption process (Z3206) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 523. FIG. 523 is a flowchart showing this charge consumption process (Z3206). This charge consumption process (Z3206) is executed in the effect update process 23 (see FIG. 519) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is charged in the chance charge effect (see FIG. 480) as described above. It is a process for setting the consumption of the fire gauge.

In the charge consumption process (Z3206), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the charge number counter 223qm is larger than 0 (Z3551), and when it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223qm is 0 (Z3551: No). , Since it means that there is no room to consume the spirit gauge and generate a chance-up effect, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of Z3551 when it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223qm is larger than 0 (Z3551: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is the executeable timing of the charge consumption effect (Z3552). If it is determined in the process of Z3552 that it is not the feasible timing of the charge consumption effect (Z3552: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3552, when it is determined that it is the execution timing of the charge consumption effect (Z3552: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the charge state count counter 223qn is 0 (Z3552: Yes). Z3553). When it is determined that the value of the charge state count counter 223qn is 0 (Z3553: Yes), it means that it is the last fluctuation display in which the spirit gauge can be consumed, and the spirit gauge is within this fluctuation display. Since it is necessary to consume all of the above, the processing for setting the chance-up effect by consuming the spirit gauge (each processing of Z3560 and Z3561) is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z3553 that the value of the charge state count counter 223qn is not 0 (Z3553: No), then the fluctuation display currently being executed (the fluctuation) is expected to have a degree of expectation of super reach or higher. It is determined whether or not the effect mode shown is a set variable display (Z3554). If it is determined that the fluctuation is not more than expected (less than or equal to the normal reach effect) (Z3354: No), then whether or not the charge state includes a hold of more than super reach. (Z3555). If it is determined that the charge state range includes a hold of super reach or higher (Z3555: Yes), then the value of the charge number counter 223qm is the value obtained by adding 2 to the number of hold balls in the charge range. It is determined whether or not it is larger (Z3556). If it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223qm is larger than the value obtained by adding 2 to the number of reserved balls in the charge range (Z3556: Yes), the reserved balls with more chances of performing the chance-up effect are higher than the super reach effect. Even if it is included, it means that a large number of gauges (charges) of the spirit gauge remains with respect to the number of reserved balls. The process for consuming the gauge and setting the chance-up effect (each process of Z3558 and Z3559) is executed.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z3556, when it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223qm is equal to or less than the value obtained by adding 2 to the number of reserved balls in the charge range (Z3556: No), the variation display in which the super reach effect is set is set. By consuming the energy gauge at the execution timing of the multiple chance-up effects in the above, it means that the energy gauge can be sufficiently consumed within the range of the value of the charge state count counter 223qn. This process ends as it is without setting the consumption of the spirit gauge in.

Further, in the processing of Z3555, if it is determined that the charge state range does not include the hold of super reach or higher (Z3555: No), then the value of the charge number counter 223qm is the hold ball within the charge range. It is determined whether or not it is larger than the number (Z3557). If it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223qm is equal to or less than the number of reserved balls within the charge range (Z3557: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of Z3557, when it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223qm is larger than the number of reserved balls in the charge range (Z3557: Yes), the gauge number (charge number) of the spirit gauge is set with respect to the number of reserved balls. Since it means that a large amount remains, in order to reduce the energy gauge in the fluctuation, the processing for consuming the energy gauge and setting the chance-up effect (each processing of Z3558 and Z3559) is executed.

In the process of Z3558, the charge consumption effect of the effect mode according to the execution timing is set (Z3558), the value of the charge number counter 223qm is subtracted by 1 (Z3559), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z3554, when it is determined that the fluctuation is equal to or more than the super reach (Z3354: Yes), the charge consumption effect of the effect mode according to the execution timing is set (Z3560), and the value of the charge number counter 223qm. Is subtracted by 1 (Z3561), and then this process is terminated.

Next, the press detection process (Z3112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 524. FIG. 524 is a flowchart showing this pressing detection process (Z3112). This press detection process (Z3112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 518) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and monitors the operation status (presence / absence of press) of the PUSH button 10317. When a press is detected, it is a process for executing control according to the press status.

In the press detection process (Z3112), first, it is determined whether or not the press on the PUSH button 10317 is detected (Z3601), and if it is determined that the press on the PUSH button 10317 is not detected (Z3601: No), it is as it is. This process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pressing of the PUSH button 10317 is detected (Z3601: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the operation valid period timer 223qt is larger than 0 (Z3602). When it is determined that the value of the operation valid period timer 223qt is larger than 0 (Z3602: Yes), it means that the PUSH button 10317 is pressed (operated) during the valid period in the pressing stop effect (see FIG. 478). Therefore, a stop operation detection process (Z3603) for performing control corresponding to the stop operation during the execution of the press stop effect is executed (Z3603), and this process is terminated. The details of this stop operation detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 525.

When it is determined that the value of the operation valid period timer 223qt is 0 in the processing of Z3602 (Z3602: No), then whether the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223qv is larger than 0 (that is, the continuous hit in the interrupt continuous hit effect). Whether or not the operation is valid (Z3604). When it is determined that the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223qv is larger than 0 (Z3604: Yes), the continuous hit operation detection process for executing the control corresponding to the continuous hit operation during the execution of the interrupt continuous hit effect is executed (Z3605). After that, this process is terminated. The details of this continuous striking operation detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 526.

When it is determined that the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223qv is 0 in the processing of Z3604 (Z3604: No), then whether the value of the batch change period timer 223qx is larger than 0 (that is, in the hold batch change effect). It is determined whether or not the PUSH button 10317 is valid (Z3606). When it is determined that the value of the batch change period timer 223qx is larger than 0 (Z3606: Yes), the change operation detection process for controlling the batch change is executed during the execution of the hold batch change effect. (Z3607), and then this process is terminated. The details of this change operation detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 527. On the other hand, in the process of Z3606, when it is determined that the value of the batch change period timer 223qx is 0 (Z3606: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, the stop operation detection process (Z3603) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 525. FIG. 525 is a flowchart showing this stop operation detection process (Z3603). This stop operation detection process (Z3603) is executed in the press detection process (see FIG. 524) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, the stop operation during the execution of the press stop effect is performed. This is a process for performing the corresponding control.

In the stop operation detection process (Z3603), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the stop operation count counter 223qua is larger than 1 (Z3701), and when it is determined that the value of the stop operation count counter 223qu is larger than 1, (Z3701). : Yes), the stop display of the symbol string corresponding to the value of the stop operation count counter 223qua is set (Z3702), and the process proceeds to Z3709. In the processing of Z3702, if the value of the stop operation number counter 223ku is 3, the stop operation of the left symbol column is set, while if the value of the stop operation number counter 223ku is 2, the stop operation of the right symbol column is performed. Set.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z3701 that the value of the stop operation number counter 223qu is 1 or less (Z3701: No), it is determined whether or not the chance charge standby flag 223qk is on (Z3703). When it is determined that the chance charge standby flag 223qk is on in the processing of Z3703 (Z3703: Yes), it means that the variation display in which the execution of the chance charge effect is set is being executed, so that the remaining period By setting the stop display effect of the chance charge symbol in, it is notified that the chance charge effect is started (Z3707), and the process proceeds to Z3708.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3703, when it is determined that the chance charge standby flag 223qk is off (Z3703: No), then it is determined whether or not the operation valid period remains for 2 seconds or more (Z3704). If it is determined that the operation valid period remains for 2 seconds or more (Z3704: Yes), the execution of the chance charge fanning effect (see FIG. 479 (a)) is set in the remaining period (Z3705), and the process proceeds to Z3708. do. By executing the processing of Z3705, in the variable display in which only the pressing stop effect is set, if the pressing is completed three times at an early stage in the valid period (within 1 second after the start), the button is immediately removed. It is possible to perform a chance charge fanning effect that has a longer effect period than stopping the symbol. Therefore, since the effect period can be changed according to the speed of the player's operation (pressing), a more suitable effect mode can be realized.

In the processing of Z3704, if it is determined that the operation valid period does not remain for 2 seconds or more (less than 2 seconds) (Z3704: No), the stop display of the middle symbol row is set so as to be a combination of outlier symbols. (Z3706), shift to the processing of Z3708.

In the processing of Z3708 executed after any of the processing of Z3705 to Z3707 is executed, the value of the operation validity period timer 223qt is reset to 0 (Z3708), and the process proceeds to the processing of Z3709. In the processing of Z3709 executed after the processing of Z3702 or Z3708 is executed, the value of the stop operation number counter 223qu is decremented by 1 and updated (Z3709), and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 526, the continuous striking operation detection process (Z3605) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 526 is a flowchart showing this continuous striking operation detection process (Z3605). This continuous striking operation detection process (Z3605) is executed in the press detection process (see FIG. 524) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, the continuous striking operation during the execution of the interrupt continuous striking effect. This is the process for executing the corresponding control.

In the continuous hit operation detection process (Z3605), first, the remaining valid period (T) is specified from the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223qv (Z3751), and then the number of monsters corresponding to the effect type of the interrupt continuous hit effect this time is The lower limit value (D) is calculated (Z3752). As described above, the lower limit of the number of monsters is predetermined for each effect type in the interrupt continuous hitting lottery table 222qh (see FIG. 500). When the processing of Z3752 is completed, next, "T / 5 seconds x (100 bodies-D)" is calculated (Z3753), and the calculated value is subtracted from the current number of remaining monsters (Z3754). ). In the processing of Z3754, the value after the decimal point is rounded off. When the processing of Z3754 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the calculated number of monsters is less than the lower limit value in the effect type of the interrupt continuous hitting effect this time (Z3755).

If it is determined in the Z3755 process that the number of monsters below the lower limit has been calculated (Z3755: Yes), the display of the remaining number of monsters is updated to the lower limit (Z3756), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z3755, if it is determined that the calculated number of monsters is equal to or greater than the lower limit (Z3755: No), the specified subtraction number is subtracted from the display of the remaining number of monsters and updated (Z3757), and then updated. , End this process.

Next, the change operation detection process (Z3607) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 527. FIG. 527 is a flowchart showing this change operation detection process (Z3607). This change operation detection process (Z3607) is executed in the press detection process (see FIG. 524) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, is performed collectively during the execution of the hold batch change effect. It is a process for performing control for setting a change.

In the change operation detection process (Z3607), first, the change point corresponding to each hold ball is specified from the data of the change point storage area 223qq (Z3801), and the mode of the hold ball having one or more change points is uniformly increased by one step. The data of the reserved symbol mode storage area 223r is updated so as to be (Z3802). Next, the variation type of the hold 1 is specified (Z3803), and the hold symbol mode is specified according to the specified variation type, the hold change lottery table 222qc, and the staging lottery counter (Z3804). Then, it is determined whether or not the specified reserved symbol mode has a higher expectation than the data of the reserved symbol mode storage area 223r (Z3805). When it is determined that the specified reserved symbol mode has a higher expectation than the data of the reserved symbol mode storage area 223r (Z3805: Yes), the data of the reserved symbol mode storage area 223r is the data indicating the specified reserved symbol mode. (Z3806) and shift to the processing of Z3807.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z3805, if it is determined that the specified reserved symbol mode is not higher in expectation than the data of the reserved symbol mode storage area 223r (Z3805: No), the processing of Z3806 is skipped and the process of Z3807 is performed. Transition.

In the processing of Z3807, it is determined whether or not the rank-up lottery of the reserved symbol mode by the processing of Z3804 to Z3806 is completed for all the reserved balls (Z3807), and the lottery for all the reserved balls is not completed. If it is determined (Z3807: No), the variation type of the reserved ball having a new start winning time is specified from the reserved ball that is the target of the lottery this time (Z3808), and the process returns to Z3804.

When it is determined in the processing of Z3807 that the rank-up lottery for all the reserved balls has been completed (Z3807: Yes), the display of the reserved symbol mode indicated by the data of the reserved symbol mode storage area 223r is set (Z3809), and all at once. All the values of the change flag 223qp, the change point storage area 223qq, and the batch change period timer 223qx are reset (Z3810), and this process ends.

Next, the command determination process 23 (Z3114) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 528. FIG. 528 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 23 (Z3114). This command determination process 23 (Z3114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 518) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. do.

In the command determination process 23 (Z3114), first, the unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read. It is determined whether or not the state command is included in (Z3901). In the processing of Z3901 if it is determined that the status command is included in the unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 (Z3901: Yes), the game is played according to the gaming status notified by the received command. The data in the state storage area 223qf is updated (Z3902), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the status command has not been received in the processing of Z3901 (Z3901: No), then the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 (variation among unprocessed commands). Whether or not the pattern command is included) is determined (Z3903). When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has been received in the processing of Z3903 (Z3903: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223qd is set to ON (Z3904), and the fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command (Z3905). After that, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3903, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (Z3903: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (Z3906). When it is determined that the stop type command has been received in the Z3906 process (Z3906: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223qe provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z3907), and the stop type is extracted from the received command. Then (Z3908), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3909, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (Z3906: No), then it is determined whether or not the reserved ball count command has been received (Z3909). When it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received in the processing of Z3909 (Z3909: Yes), the reserved ball number is extracted from the received command, and the corresponding special symbol reserved ball number counter (special symbol 1 reserved ball number). The values of the counter 223qa and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223qb) are updated (Z3910), and this process is terminated. Here, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223qa, and the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223qb. Stored. Further, when the reserved ball number command indicating the reserved ball number of the normal symbol is received, the information for indicating the reserved ball number is stored in the normal reserved ball number counter 223qc. In the present embodiment, since the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 includes information indicating the current hold ball number, for example, due to a power failure or the like, each hold ball number counter on the voice lamp control device 113 side Even if the value is erased, the value of each hold ball counter can be restored to an appropriate value by receiving the next hold ball count command to be transmitted. In this case, it may be configured to transmit each reserved ball number command in the process (see Z908 of FIG. 510) for transmitting the state command of the start-up process (see FIG. 510) of the main control device 110.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3909, when the reserved ball number command is not received (Z3909: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command is received from the main control device 110 (Z3911). If it is determined in the processing of Z3911 that a winning information command has been received (Z3911: Yes), various effects (look-ahead effects) are set according to the type of winning information notified by the winning information command. The winning information command processing 23 for the purpose is executed (Z3912), and this processing is terminated. The details of the winning information command processing 23 (Z3912) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 529 and 530.

When it is determined that the winning information command has not been received in the processing of Z3911 (Z3911: No), then various commands related to winning (opening command, round number command, jackpot end command, and ending command) are used. It is determined whether or not (Z3913) is received, and if it is determined that a hit-related command is being received (Z3913: Yes), control according to the type of the hit-related command is executed. The hit-related command process 23 is executed (Z3914), and this process is terminated. The hit-related command processing 23 (Z3914) will be described later with reference to FIG. 531. On the other hand, in the process of Z3913, if it is determined that the command related to the hit has not been received from the main control device 110 (Z3913: No), this process is then terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 529, the details of the winning information command processing 23 (Z3912), which is one of the processing in the command determination processing 23 (Z3114), will be described. FIG. 529 is a flowchart showing the winning information command processing 23 (Z3912). In the winning information command processing 23 (Z3912), first, the data indicating the lottery result notified by the command is stored in an empty area of the winning information storage area (Z4001), and the process proceeds to the processing of Z4002. In the processing of Z4001, data indicating the winning information notified by the command is stored in the empty area having the smallest number among the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area.

In the processing of Z4002, it is determined whether or not the chance charge waiting flag 223qk is on (Z4002). When it is determined that the chance charge standby flag 223qk is on (Z4002: No), it means that the variable display effect in which the chance charge effect is set is being executed, and the chance charge effect has not been started yet. Therefore, according to the content of the newly detected start prize, the gauge number (charge number) of the spirit gauge charged in the chance charge production is added to the value predetermined at the start of the fluctuation. Execute the process. More specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the current winning information command is a winning information command indicating a win (Z4003), and when it is determined that the winning information command is a winning information command (Z4003: Yes). ), 2 is added to the value of the charge number counter 223qm to update (Z4004), and the process proceeds to Z4006. On the other hand, in the processing of Z4003, when it is determined that the winning information command this time is not a winning information command indicating a hit (a winning information command indicating a loss) (Z4003: No), the value of the charge number counter is 223qm. 1 is added and updated (Z4005), and the process proceeds to Z4006.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z4002, if it is determined that the chance charge standby flag 223qk is off (Z4002: No), there is no possibility of adding the gauge number (charge number) of the spirit gauge, so each of Z4003 to Z4005. The process is skipped and the process proceeds to the Z4006 process. In the processing of Z4006, it is determined whether or not the lottery result corresponding to the fall has been notified (Z4006). In the processing of Z4006, if it is determined that the lottery result corresponding to the fall has been notified (Z4006: Yes), then whether or not the production mode corresponding to the continuation rich scenario in the probability change continuation suggestion production is being executed. Distinguish (Z4007). In this Z4007 process, when the data in the continuous scenario storage area 223qh is any of "08H" to "0BH" corresponding to the continuous rich scenario, the effect mode corresponding to the continuous rich scenario is being executed. Determine if there is.

If it is determined in the processing of Z4007 that the continuation suggestion effect of the continuation rich scenario is being executed (Z4007: Yes), then the prize information notified by the current prize information command is the probability change continuation suggestion effect. It is determined whether or not the winning information is digested during execution (Z4008). That is, it is determined from the new winning information whether or not it is confirmed that the special symbol will fall from the probabilistic state to the low probability state during the execution of the probabilistic continuation suggestion effect, and it is digested during the execution of the continuous suggestion effect. If it is determined that the winning information is (it is confirmed that the player will fall during the execution of the probability change continuation suggestion effect) (Z4008: Yes), refer to the discontinuation table of the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222qg (see FIG. 499). Then, the continuation suggestion effect scenario is determined (Z4009), the data indicating the selected scenario is overwritten in the continuation scenario storage area 223qh (Z4010), and the process proceeds to Z4011. In each process of Z4009 and Z4010, the effect scenario of "0CH" in the discontinuity table is stored in the continuation scenario storage area 223qh.

In the 23rd embodiment, when the new start prize is a lottery result corresponding to a fall in the number of fluctuations within the execution range of the probability change continuation suggestion effect, the effect scenario of "0CH" is always set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one scenario may be determined by lottery from the four staging scenarios (any of "0CH" to "0FH") specified in the discontinuity table. With such a configuration, it is possible to further diversify the staging mode at the time of falling.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z4006, when it is determined that the lottery result corresponding to the fall has not been notified (Z4006: No), and when it is determined that the probability change continuation suggestion effect of the continuation rich scenario is not being executed (Z4007: No). ), And if it is determined that the new prize information notified by the current prize information command is not the prize information that is digested during the execution of the probability change continuation suggestion effect (Z4008: No), the effect in the probability change continuation suggestion effect. Since it is not necessary to rewrite the scenario to the scenario of the discontinuity table, the process proceeds to Z4011 as it is.

By executing each of the processes of Z4006 to Z4010, the probability change state is in the probability change state at the start of the probability change continuation suggestion effect, and the reserved balls for the number of fluctuations until the probability change continuation suggestion effect ends are not accumulated. When the continuation suggestion effect is executed and then the start prize corresponding to the fall occurs, by switching to the effect scenario for non-continuation (the effect scenario of "0CH"), the result of the probability change continuation suggestion effect has already fallen. It is possible to notify that it is. That is, it is possible to prevent the staging mode from becoming continuous even though the staging has already been completed, so that a more suitable staging mode can be realized.

Further, in the processing of Z4011, based on the winning information notified by the winning information command, a holding notice lottery process for drawing a lottery for whether or not the hold change effect and the hold batch change effect can be executed is executed (Z4011), and this process is performed. To finish. The details of this hold notice lottery process will be described with reference to FIG. 530.

FIG. 530 is a flowchart showing this hold notice lottery process (Z4011). In this hold notice lottery process (Z4011), first, data indicating the hold symbol mode of white hold is stored in the empty area of the hold symbol mode storage area 223r (Z4051). More specifically, among the empty areas of the reserved symbol mode storage area 223r, the data indicating the white reserved symbol mode is stored in the area having the smallest number. When the processing of Z4051 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the batch change flag 223qp is on (Z4052), and if it is determined that the batch change flag 223qp is on (Z4052: Yes), the white hold is held. The symbol mode is set to be displayed as a reserved symbol corresponding to the new winning information (Z4053), and this process is terminated. By executing this Z4053 process, the reserved ball number symbol changed to imitate a rock by the reserved batch change effect, and the reserved ball number symbol based on the newly detected start prize after the start of the reserved batch change effect. Since the mode of the reserved symbols can be different from each other, the player can easily understand the range of the reserved ball number symbols to be the target of the reserved batch change effect. Therefore, it is possible to realize a staging mode that is easier for the player to understand.

In the 23rd embodiment, the number of reserved balls based on the start prize detected after the start of the hold batch change effect is uniformly set to the white hold hold symbol mode, but the configuration is limited to this. is not. For example, with respect to the new reserved ball number symbol, the lottery of the reserved symbol mode using the reserved change lottery table 222qc (see FIG. 497 (a)) may be executed. As a result, not only the reserved ball number symbol that is the target of the pending batch change effect, but also the reserved ball number symbol based on the new start winning can be expected to be a big hit. Further, for example, a new start prize detected after the start of the hold batch change effect may be added to the target of the hold batch change effect. In this case, the hold ball number symbol based on the new start winning may be added to the target of the hold batch change effect without fail, or may be added to the target of the hold batch change effect only under predetermined conditions. May be good. In addition, as a predetermined condition, for example, when the winning information corresponding to the new starting winning shows the jackpot expectation level higher than the super reach, it may be included in the execution target of the hold batch change effect. For example, as a configuration to be included in the execution target of the hold batch change effect only when the winning information corresponding to the variation type having a higher expectation than the hold ball in the range in which the hold batch change effect is set is newly notified. May be good. With this configuration, when the reserved ball number symbol based on the new start winning is added to the execution target of the reserved batch change effect, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be further improved.

In the processing of Z4052, when it is determined that the batch change flag 223qp is off (Z4052: No), then it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls is larger than 1 (Z4054), and the number of reserved balls is 1 or less. If it is determined that (Z4054: No), there is no possibility of executing the hold batch change effect, so the process of Z4060 for drawing the hold symbol mode of the hold ball number symbol corresponding to the new winning information is performed. Transition. On the other hand, in the processing of Z4054, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is larger than 1 (2 or more) (Z4054: Yes), the data of the winning information storage area and the data of the reserved symbol mode storage area 223r are obtained. , The change point is calculated according to the change point calculation table 222qd (Z4055), and it is determined whether or not the hold batch change effect can be executed according to the values of the calculated change point, the batch change lottery table 222qe, and the effect lottery counter. (Z4056). Next, it was determined whether or not the determination result by the processing of Z4056 was the determination result corresponding to the execution of the hold batch change effect (Z4057), and it was determined that the determination result was not the determination result corresponding to the execution of the hold batch change effect. In the case (Z4057: No), the process proceeds to the process of Z4060 for drawing the reserved symbol mode of the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the new winning information. On the other hand, in the processing of Z4057, if it is determined that the determination result corresponds to the execution of the hold batch change effect (Z4057: Yes), the execution of the hold batch change effect is set (Z4058), and the batch change flag 223qp is turned on. Set to (Z4059) to end this process.

In the processing of Z4060, the hold change lottery table 222qc (see FIG. 497 (a)) is read (Z4060), and the read hold change lottery table 222qc is determined according to the winning information notified by the command and the value of the staging lottery counter. The reserved symbol mode is determined (Z4061). Next, the data corresponding to the latest winning information in the reserved symbol mode storage area 223r is updated according to the reserved symbol embodiment determined in the processing of Z4061 (Z4062), and the reserved symbol embodiment of the aspect indicated by the updated data is updated. Set the display (Z4063) and end this process.

By executing this hold notice lottery process (see FIG. 530), various staging modes using the hold ball number symbol can be suitably set.

Next, the contents of the above-mentioned hit-related command processing 23 (Z3914) will be described with reference to FIG. 531. FIG. 531 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit-related command process 23 (Z3914). This hit-related command process 23 (Z3914) is executed by the command determination process 23 (see FIG. 528) of the voice lamp control device 113, and when a command related to the hit is received from the main control device 110. In addition, it is a process for performing control according to the type of the received command.

In the hit-related command processing 23 (see FIG. 531), first, it is determined whether or not the command received this time is an opening command (Z4101). If it is determined that the command received this time is an opening command (Z4101: Yes), a display opening command corresponding to the received opening command is set (Z4102), and then this process is terminated.

In the processing of Z4101, if it is determined that the command received this time is not the opening command (Z4101: No), then it is determined whether the command received this time is a round number command (Z4103), and the round number command is used. If it is determined to exist (Z4103: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the number of rounds indicated by the round number information included in the received round number command (Z4104), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the processing of Z4103 that the command received this time is not a round number command (Z4103: No), it is determined whether the command received this time is a jackpot end command (Z4105), and it is a jackpot end command. If it is determined (Z4105: Yes), the data in the game state storage area 223qf is updated (Z4106) according to the information indicating the game state after the end of the big hit included in the received jackpot end command, and the time saving guaranteed number counter 223qg. The value of is set to 100 (Z4107). Next, it is determined whether or not the right-handed winning flag 223qi is on (Z4108), and if it is determined that the right-handed winning flag 223qi is on (Z4108: Yes), the game is played by right-handed. It means that a big hit was made during the probable change state or the time saving state (that is, a so-called consecutive villa occurred), and it means that the big hit was made in the lottery of the second special symbol with a high ratio of the probable change big hit. , The rear mode for high expectation (see FIG. 473 (b)) is set (Z4110), and this process is terminated. Setting the back mode for high expectations uniformly makes it difficult to understand whether the time saving state is set or the probabilistic state is set, so that the player can predict the current game state. This is to realize it.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z4108, when it is determined that the winning flag 223qi during right-handed hitting is off (Z4108: No), it is a big hit in the normal state where the game is played by left-handed hitting (so-called first hit). This means that the lottery for the first special symbol, which has a low probability variation jackpot ratio, was a jackpot, so a rear mode for low expectations (see FIG. 473 (a)) was set (Z4109). After that, this process ends. Setting the back mode for low expectations uniformly makes it difficult to understand whether the time saving state is set or the probabilistic state is set, so that the player can predict the current game state. This is to realize it.

Further, when it is determined that the jackpot end command has not been received in the processing of Z4105 (Z4105: No), then it is determined whether the command received this time is an ending command (Z4111), and it is determined that the command is an ending command. If it is determined (Z4111: Yes), the display ending command is set (Z4112), and this process is terminated. If it is determined that the ending command has not been received in the Z4111 process (Z4111: No), the present process is terminated thereafter.

Next, the variation display setting process 23 (Z3115) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 532. FIG. 532 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 23 (Z3115). This variation display setting process 23 (Z3115) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 518) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. This is a process for generating and setting a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the variation display setting process 23 (Z3115), first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223qd provided in the RAM 223 is on (Z4201). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223qd is not on (that is, it is off) (Z4201: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so that the processing of Z4207 is performed. Move to. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223qd is on (Z4201: Yes), the variation start flag 223qd is turned off (Z4202), and the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the display variation pattern command is set to RAM223. (Z4203).

Next, the variation effect setting process 23 for setting the effect mode to be executed with the extracted variation pattern (variation time) is executed (Z4204). The contents of the variable staging setting process 23 will be described later with reference to FIG. 533. When the processing of Z4204 is completed, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the effect mode determined by the processing of Z4204 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (. Z4205). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area is shifted (Z4206). In this process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as 1st area → execution area, 2nd area → 1st area, 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area. After shifting the data, the process shifts to Z4207 processing.

In the processing of Z4207, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223qe provided in RAM 223 is on (Z4207). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223qe is not on (that is, it is off) (Z4207: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223qe is on (Z4207: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223qe is turned off (Z4208), and the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is set to RAM223. Obtained from (Z4209). Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (Z4210), and the process proceeds to Z4211.

In the process of Z4211, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (Z4211). .. When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled. After the processing of Z4211 is executed, this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 533, the contents of the variation effect setting process 23 (Z4204), which is one process in the variation display setting process 23 (see FIG. 532) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. do. FIG. 533 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation effect setting process 23 (Z4204). In this variation effect setting process 23 (Z4204), a process for setting a detailed effect mode (notice content) of the variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is executed.

In the variation effect setting process 23 (Z4204), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the charge state count counter 223qn is larger than 0 (Z4301), and when it is determined that the value of the charge state count counter 223qn is larger than 0 (Z4301). Z4301: Yes), the value of the charge state count counter 223qn is subtracted by 1 (Z4302), and the process proceeds to Z4303. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the charge state count counter 223qn is 0 in the processing of Z4301 (Z4301: No), the processing of Z4302 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z4303.

In the processing of Z4303, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving guaranteed number counter 223qg is larger than 0 (Z4303). If it is determined that the value of the time reduction guaranteed number counter 223qg is 0 (Z4303: No), the process proceeds to Z4311. On the other hand, in the processing of Z4303, when it is determined that the value of the time saving guaranteed number counter 223qg is larger than 0 (Z4303: Yes), the value of the time saving guaranteed number counter 223qg is subtracted by 1 (Z4304), and then after the subtraction. It is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction guarantee count counter 223qg is larger than 0 (Z4305). In the processing of Z4305, when it is determined that the value of the time saving guaranteed number counter 223qg after subtraction is 0 (Z4305: No), the process proceeds to the processing of Z4311. On the other hand, in the processing of Z4305, if it is determined that the value of the time saving guaranteed number counter 223qg after subtraction is larger than 0 (Z4305: Yes), then whether the value of the time saving guaranteed number counter 223qg after subtraction is larger than 4. Whether or not it is determined (Z4306). In the processing of Z4306, when it is determined that the value of the time saving guaranteed number counter 223qg after subtraction is larger than 4 (Z4306: Yes), the process proceeds to the processing of Z4312.

In the process of Z4311, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a probable change state (Z4311). Here, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a probabilistic state based on the data stored in the gaming state storage area 223qf. In the processing of Z4311, if it is determined that the current state is the probable change state (Z4311: Yes), it means that the probable change state continues more than 100 times after the end of the big hit, so a lottery in the back mode is performed. Therefore, the process shifts to Z4312 processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z4311 that the current state is not in the probable change state (Z4311: No), the processing of Z4312 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of Z4313.

In the processing of Z4312, in the game state (time saving state, probability change state) in which the game is played by right-handed, one back mode is drawn from among a plurality of back modes showing the expectation of the probability change state with a lottery probability according to the game state. The back mode lottery process is executed (Z4312), and the process shifts to the Z4313 process. The details of this back mode lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 535.

In the process of Z4313, an effect mode selection process for selecting an effect mode in the variable display effect is executed (Z4313), and then this process is terminated. The details of this effect mode selection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 536.

Further, in the variation effect setting process 23 in the 23rd embodiment, when it is determined in the process of Z4306 that the value of the time saving guaranteed number counter 223qg after subtraction is 4 or less (Z4306: No), the probability change continuation suggestion effect is produced. Since it means that it is the execution period (the fluctuation period of the 96th to 99th fluctuation display after the end of the jackpot), next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is the jackpot (Z4307). In the processing of Z4307, if it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (Z4307: Yes), the big hit effect mode dedicated to the execution period of the continuation suggestion effect is set as the current variation display mode (Z4308), and right-handed. The winning flag is set to ON (Z4309), and this process ends. As a jackpot effect mode dedicated to the execution period of the continuation suggestion effect, for example, an adventurer who breaks through the door 806 by the effect of breaking through the door 806 discovers a treasure on the other side of the door 806. , The effect of notifying the jackpot is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of Z4307, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol is not a big hit of the special symbol (Z4307: No), the continuation suggestion effect setting for setting the effect mode in the execution period of the probability change continuation suggestion effect. The process is executed (Z4310), and the present process is terminated. The details of this continuation suggestion effect setting process (Z4310) will be described later with reference to FIG. 534.

Next, with reference to FIG. 534, the content of the continuation suggestion effect setting process (Z4310), which is one of the processes in the variation effect setting process 23 (see FIG. 533) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. do. FIG. 534 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuation suggestion effect setting process (Z4310).

When the continuation suggestion effect setting process (Z4310) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving guarantee count counter 223qg is 4 (Z4401), and the value of the time saving guarantee count counter 223qg is not 4 (3). When it is determined (Z4401: No), the data in the continuation scenario storage area 223qh is read (Z4411), and it is determined whether or not the read scenario is a scenario for continuous enrichment (Z4412). If it is determined in the Z4412 process that the read scenario is not a scenario for continuous enrichment (Z4412: No), the process proceeds to the Z4415 process. On the other hand, in the processing of Z4412, if it is determined that the read scenario is a scenario for continuous enrichment (Z4412: Yes), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this special symbol is the lottery result of the fall (Z4412: Yes). Z4413) If it is determined that the result is not the lottery result of the fall (Z4413: No), the process proceeds to Z4415. On the other hand, in the processing of Z4413, if it is determined that it is the result of the lottery of the fall (Z4413: Yes), the production scenario is switched to "0CH" (Z4414), and the process proceeds to the processing of Z4415.

In the processing of Z4415, the effect mode of the number of fluctuations corresponding to the value of the time saving guaranteed number counter 223qg is read from the scenario read from the continuous scenario storage area 223qh (Z4415), and the read effect mode is used as the display mode of the current variation pattern. Set (Z4416). Next, if it is determined whether or not the final effect mode of the scenario is set (Z4417), and if it is determined that the final effect mode of the scenario is set (Z4417: Yes), the data of the continuous scenario storage area 223qh is determined. Is reset to "00H" (Z4418), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z4417, if it is determined that the final effect mode of the scenario is not set (Z4417: No), the process of Z4418 is skipped and the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z4401, when it is determined that the value of the time saving guaranteed number counter 223qg is 4 (Z4401: Yes), it means that it is the start timing of the probability change continuation suggestion effect (see FIG. 475). The process for determining the production scenario of the continuation suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a probabilistic state (Z4402). In the processing of Z4402, if it is determined that the current gaming state is a probable change state (Z4402: Yes), the data in the winning information storage area is read out (Z4403), and the winning information includes the lottery result of the fall. Whether or not it is determined (Z4404). If it is determined in the processing of Z4404 that the lottery result of the fall is not included in the winning information (Z4404: No), then whether the four winning information is stored (that is, the probability change continuation suggestion effect). It is determined whether or not the reserved ball until the end is already held (Z4405).

If it is determined in the processing of Z4405 that four winning information is stored (Z4405: Yes), the continuation suggestion effect scenario is referred to with reference to the continuation confirmation effect table in the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222qg (see FIG. 499). (Z4406), and the process proceeds to Z4409. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z4405 that the four winning information is not stored (Z4405: No), the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222qg (see FIG. 499) is referred to and the continuation suggestion is made. The production scenario is determined (Z4407), and the process proceeds to Z4409.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z4402, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not a probable change state (Z4402: No), and in the processing of Z4404, the lottery result of the fall is included in the winning information. (Z4404: Yes), the effect scenario is determined (Z4408) with reference to the discontinuity table in the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222qg (see FIG. 499), and the process is shifted to Z4409.

In the process of Z4409 executed after any of the processes of Z4406 to Z4408 is executed, the data indicating the selected staging scenario is stored in the continuation scenario storage area 223qh (Z4409), and the first variation in the determined scenario. (Z4410) is set as the effect mode of the current variation pattern, and the present process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 535, the contents of the rear mode lottery process (Z4312), which is one process in the variation effect setting process 23 (see FIG. 533) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. do. FIG. 535 is a flowchart showing the contents of the back mode lottery process (Z4312).

When the rear mode lottery process (Z4312) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern (Z4501). If it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern (Z4501: Yes), the jackpot fluctuation display mode is selected as the fluctuation display mode (Z4502), and the right-handed winning flag 223qi is set to ON. Then (Z4503), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z4501, when it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is not the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot (Z4501: No), then it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation state (Z4504). .. When it is determined that the current gaming state is not a probable change state (Z4504: No), the back mode is set by referring to the fallen table in the rear mode lottery table 222qb (see FIG. 496) and the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy. Is drawn by lottery (Z4505), and the process proceeds to Z4510.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z4504, if it is determined that the current gaming state is a probable change state (Z4504: Yes), the data in the winning information storage area is read out (Z4506), and then the lottery result of the fall in the winning information. Is included (Z4507). If it is determined in the processing of Z4507 that the lottery result of the fall is included in the winning information (Z4507: Yes), the table for non-fall in the rear mode lottery table 222qb (see FIG. 496) and the staging lottery counter 223qy. The back mode is drawn by lottery with reference to the value of (Z4508), and the process proceeds to Z4510.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z4507 that the lottery result of the fall is not included in the winning information (Z4507: No), the probability change continuation table in the rear mode lottery table 222qb (see FIG. 496) and the staging lottery. The back mode is drawn by lottery with reference to the value of the counter 223qy (Z4509), and the process proceeds to Z4510.

In the Z4510 process executed after any of the Z4505, Z4508, and Z4509 processes is executed, the lottery result of each process is a lottery result indicating a change to a rear mode different from the current rear mode. Whether or not it is determined (Z4510). In the processing of Z4510, if it is determined that the lottery result corresponds to the change of the rear mode (Z4510: Yes), a display rear change command indicating the changed rear mode is set (Z4511), and this processing is terminated. do. On the other hand, if it is determined that the back mode is not changed in the processing of Z4510 (Z4510: No), the processing of Z4511 is skipped and the main processing is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 536, the contents of the staging mode selection process (Z4313), which is one of the staging mode setting processes 23 (see FIG. 533) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. do. FIG. 536 is a flowchart showing the contents of the staging mode selection process (Z4313).

When the effect mode selection process (Z4313) is executed, it is first determined whether or not a variation pattern command including an additional time command (including an additional time command indicating an additional time of 7 seconds) has been received (Z4551). If it is determined that the variation pattern command including the additional time command has not been received (Z4551: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of Z4551 when it is determined that the variation pattern command including the additional time command is received (Z4551: Yes), the interrupt continuous hit lottery table 222qh (see FIG. 500) is read out (Z4552), and the effect lottery counter. It is determined whether or not the interrupt continuous hitting effect can be executed and the type according to the value of 223qy (Z4553), and then it is determined whether or not the lottery result corresponding to the execution of the interrupt continuous hitting effect is obtained (Z4554). If it is determined in the processing of Z4554 that the lottery result corresponds to the execution of the interrupt continuous hitting effect (Z4554: Yes), the data corresponding to the type of the interrupt continuous hitting effect to be executed is stored in the continuous hitting type storage area 223qj (Z4555). ), Next, it is determined whether or not the type of the interrupt continuous hitting effect is the type executed before the reach (Z4556). In the processing of Z4556, when it is determined that it is a type of interrupt continuous striking effect executed before reach (Z4556: Yes), the voice mode corresponding to the fluctuation time indicated by the basic time command is determined (Z4558), and Z4559 Move to processing.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z4556, when it is determined that the type of the determined interrupt continuous striking effect is not the type executed before the reach (Z4556: No), the fluctuation time indicated by the basic time command and the additional time command are displayed. The voice mode corresponding to the sum of the fluctuation time shown is determined (Z4557), and the process proceeds to Z4559.

In the processing of Z4559, the display mode corresponding to the fluctuation time indicated by the basic time command is determined (Z4559), and this processing is terminated. As described above, in the 23rd embodiment, it is possible to easily identify whether or not the variation type is 7 seconds longer depending on the presence or absence of the additional time saving command. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the variable type is the lottery target for whether or not the interrupt continuous hitting effect can be executed simply by checking the content of the additional time command. In addition, when it is decided to execute the interrupt continuous striking effect, the variation time can be just filled by setting the effect mode corresponding to the variation time (7 seconds shorter variation time) notified by the basic time command. can. Therefore, it is possible to easily match the end timing of the effect mode with the end timing of the variable display effect without preparing an effect mode dedicated to the interrupt continuous striking effect, so that a suitable effect mode can be provided.

On the other hand, in the process of Z4554, when it is determined that the interrupt continuous hitting effect is not executed (Z4554: No), the chance charge lottery table 222qf (see FIG. 498 (b)) is read out (Z4560), and the variation type of this time. It is determined whether or not the chance charge effect (see FIGS. 479 (b) and 480 (a)) can be executed according to the number of reserved balls and the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy (Z4561), and then the process of Z4561 is performed. It is determined whether or not the execution of the chance charge effect is determined by the determination (lottery) by (Z4562). If it is determined in the process of Z4562 that the execution of the chance charge effect has not been determined (Z4562: No), the effect mode corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (Z4566), and this process is terminated. ..

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z4562 that the execution of the chance charge effect is decided (Z4562: Yes), a value obtained by adding 1 to the number of reserved balls is set to the value of the charge number counter 223qm (Z4563), and the chance is reached. The charge standby flag 223qk is set to ON (Z4564), the effect mode including the chance charge effect is determined as the variation display mode this time (Z4565), and the present process is terminated. As described above, in the 23rd embodiment, when the execution of the chance charge effect is decided, the gauge amount of the spirit gauge KG accumulated by the chance charge effect (charge number counter 223qm) based on the number of reserved balls at the time of the determination. The value of) is determined. Then, after the chance charge effect is completed, the pace at which the chance-up effect is executed (that is, the spirit gauge is consumed) is changed in consideration of the lottery result of each reserved ball. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load (processing load when determining the number of gauges) at the start of the chance charge effect.

<Regarding the control process of the audio output device in the 23rd embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the 23rd embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 537 to 541. First, with reference to FIG. 537 (a), the main process executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. FIG. 537 (a) is a flowchart showing the contents of this main process.

When the main process of the voice output device 226 is executed, first, a command determination process for performing control according to various commands received from the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (2001). The details of this command determination process (Z20001) will be described later with reference to FIG. 538. After the processing of Z2001, the audio setting process for reproducing the audio data (audio file) according to the effect is executed (Z20002). The details of this voice setting process (Z20002) will be described later with reference to FIG. 541.

When the processing of Z20002 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 303 (Z20003). If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the Z20003 process (Z20003: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in progress flag are turned on (Z20005), and the power-off process is executed (Z20006). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (Z20007), and then the process is looped infinitely.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the processing of Z20003 (Z20003: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 303 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 303 (Z20004), and the RAM 303 is destroyed. If not (Z20004: No), the process returns to Z2001 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 303 is destroyed (Z20004: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. 537 (b). FIG. 537 (b) is a flowchart showing the contents of this command interrupt process. This command interrupt process (see FIG. 537 (b)) is a process executed every time a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the RAM 303 (Z20101), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read by the command determination processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 538, a command determination process (Z20001), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 537 (a)) executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226, will be described. FIG. 538 is a flowchart showing the contents of this command determination process (Z20001).

In the command determination process (Z20001), first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (Z20201), and if there is no unprocessed new command (Z20201: No), the command determination process is terminated. And return to the main process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (Z20201: Yes), the new command flag indicating that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (Z20202), and then the unprocessed new command is stored in the command buffer area. For all the processing commands, the type of the command is analyzed (Z2203).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a voice variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (Z20204). This voice variation pattern command is used when the display variation pattern command is output (see Z4205 in FIG. 532) in the variation display setting process 23 (see FIG. 532) of the voice lamp control device 113. It is set to notify the type of sound to be played and the output timing according to the display mode.

In the processing of Z20204, when it is determined that there is a variation pattern command for voice among the unprocessed commands (Z20204: Yes), the music and sound effect used during the execution of the notified variation pattern command are specified (Z20205). ), The specified music, the output channel of the sound effect, and the output timing are set (Z20206), and the process returns to Z20201.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no voice variation pattern command in the processing of Z20204 (Z20204: No), then it is determined whether or not the unprocessed command includes the voice continuous hit command (Z20204: No). Z20207), if the voice continuous striking command is included (Z20207: Yes), it means that the continuous striking operation has been performed by the player, so the continuous striking sound command processing for setting the reproduction (output) of the continuous striking sound. Is executed (Z20208), and the process returns to the processing of Z20201. The details of this continuous tapping sound command processing (Z20208) will be described later with reference to FIG. 539.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z20207, if it is determined that the unprocessed command does not include the continuous tapping sound command for voice (Z20207: No), then it is determined whether or not the interrupt command for voice is included. If it is determined that the unprocessed command includes a continuous tapping sound command for voice (Z20209: Yes), the interrupt command processing for setting the interruption and resumption of the BGM being played is performed. Execute (Z20210) and return to the processing of Z20201. The details of this suspend command process will be described later with reference to FIG. 540. On the other hand, in the processing of Z20201, if there is no voice interruption command among the unprocessed commands (Z20209: No), the processing corresponding to the other unprocessed commands is executed (Z20211), and the process returns to the processing of Z20201.

Next, the details of the continuous tapping sound command processing (Z20208) will be described with reference to FIG. 539. FIG. 539 is a flowchart showing the continuous tapping sound command processing (Z20208). This continuous tapping sound command process (Z20208) is executed in the command determination process (FIG. 538) in the MPU 301 of the voice output device 226, and is a process for setting the reproduction (output) of the continuous tapping sound as described above.

In this continuous tapping sound command processing (Z20208), first, it is determined whether or not "00H" is set in the value of the continuous tapping sound output flag 303a (Z20301). If it is determined in the processing of Z20301 that "00H" is set in the value of the continuous hitting sound output flag 303a (Z20301: Yes), the continuous hitting sound command for the first continuous hitting operation in the interrupt continuous hitting effect (see FIG. 482) is issued. Since it means that it has been received, it shifts to the processing of Z20305 in order to reproduce the first continuous tapping sound.

On the other hand, if it is determined that "00H" is not set in the value of the continuous tapping sound output flag 303a (Z20301: No), then whether or not "01H" is set in the value of the continuous tapping sound output flag 303a. (Z20302). In the process of Z20302, when it is determined that "01H" is not set in the value of the continuous tapping sound output flag 303a (that is, the value of the continuous tapping sound output flag 303a is "02H"), (Z20302: No), 1 Since it means that the continuous hitting sound output last time in the interrupt continuous hitting effect is the second continuous hitting sound, in this case as well, the process shifts to the Z20305 process in order to reproduce the first continuous hitting sound.

In the processing of Z20305, the reproduction of the voice file corresponding to the first continuous tapping sound is set for CN2 of the voice synthesis unit 306 (see FIG. 501) (Z20305), and the continuous tapping sound output flag 303a corresponds to the first continuous tapping sound. It is updated (set) to "01H" (Z20306), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z20302, when it is determined that "01H" is set in the value of the continuous hitting sound output flag 303a (that is, the repeated hitting sound output last time is the first continuous hitting sound) (Z20302: Yes). , The voice file reproduction corresponding to the second continuous tapping sound is set for CN3 of the voice synthesis unit 306 (see FIG. 501) (Z20303), and the continuous tapping sound output flag 303a is set to "02H" corresponding to the second continuous tapping sound. Update (set) to (Z20304), and this process ends.

By executing this continuous striking sound command processing, two types of audio data can be alternately reproduced for two channels each time the continuous striking operation is executed, so that the audio mode can be diversified. .. Further, in the case where the first continuous tapping sound and the second continuous tapping sound are reproduced alternately on a single channel (that is, the control of cutting off the output of one sound being played and outputting the other sound) is performed. Compared to the case of repeating configuration), it is possible to output the other sound while maintaining the state in which one sound is output (the first and second continuous tapping sounds are output in an overlapping manner). Therefore, it is possible to make the voice mode more lively during the execution of repeated hits. More specifically, in the case of a configuration in which the first continuous hitting sound and the second continuous hitting sound are alternately reproduced on a single channel, when a player who has a short continuous hitting interval performs a continuous hitting operation, the head portion of each voice data is performed. Only will be a monotonous voice mode that is repeated alternately. On the other hand, if a configuration is configured in which a plurality of audio data are sequentially reproduced on a plurality of channels, the output of one audio data reproduced on one channel is not interrupted, and other audio data on the other channel. Can be regenerated. That is, the voice based on one voice data and the voice based on other voice data can be combined and output. Therefore, since it can be configured so that the voice other than the head portion in each voice can be easily output, the voice mode can be further diversified. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the 23rd embodiment, each time a continuous striking operation is detected, two types of audio data (continuous striking sound) are alternately output to the two channels, but the present invention is not limited to this. A configuration may be configured in which three or more types of audio data are sequentially reproduced in CN1 and CN2. Thereby, the voice mode can be further diversified. Further, in this case, the number of channels for reproducing the audio data is not limited to two, and the audio data may be sequentially reproduced for three or more channels. With this configuration, from the time when one audio data is played for one channel until the next audio data is played for the same channel (the audio data being played is terminated). Since the period of can be made longer, the voice mode can be further diversified. Further, the type of the output voice data may be different depending on the interval of repeated hits. Specifically, for example, when a player playing a game with a relatively short interval of repeated hits (for example, an interval of 0.5 seconds or less), three types of voice modes are sequentially reproduced in three channels. On the other hand, when the player is playing a game with a relatively long interval of repeated hits (for example, an interval longer than 0.5 second interval), two types of audio data are sequentially transmitted to two channels. It may be configured to be reproduced (alternately). With such a configuration, it is possible to change the output mode of the sound according to the continuous striking interval, so that it is possible to realize the playability of adjusting the continuous striking interval. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the 23rd embodiment, any of the repeated hitting sounds is output in conjunction with the continuous hitting operation, but under predetermined conditions, the repeated hitting sound may be output even if the continuous hitting operation is not performed. .. More specifically, for example, when the last repeated hitting sound during the valid period of the continuous hitting operation is the first continuous hitting sound, the second continuous hitting sound may be output after the end. With this configuration, even though the first and second tapping sounds are output as a set according to the repeated tapping operation, the final output sound becomes the first continuous tapping sound. (That is, the paired second continuous tapping sound is not output), and it is possible to suppress that the voice mode is halfway. Therefore, the voice mode can be set more preferably. In this case, when the last output continuous hitting sound is the first continuous hitting sound, the control to output the second continuous hitting sound after the end is changed to the variable display corresponding to the predetermined variation type (lottery result) (lottery result). For example, it may be configured to be set only during execution of the jackpot fluctuation). With this configuration, for the player who wants to know whether or not it is a predetermined variation type, the continuous hitting sound that is output last during the interrupt continuous hitting effect is intentionally set to the first continuous hitting sound. It is possible to realize the playability. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the 23rd embodiment, the first continuous hitting sound and the second continuous hitting sound are output alternately regardless of the interval between the repeated hits of the player, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the continuous striking operation is detected in a state where the sound is not reproduced, the first continuous striking sound may be output without fail. That is, if the interval between repeated hits is too long and the interval between repeated hits is such that the next repeated hit operation is executed after the reproduction of one repeated hit sound is completed, only the first repeated hit sound is continuously output. It may be configured. With this configuration, the player who wants to diversify the voice mode can execute the continuous striking operation at a faster pace, and thus improve the player's willingness to participate in the interrupt continuous striking effect. be able to.

Next, the interruption command processing (Z20210) will be described with reference to FIG. 540. FIG. 540 is a flowchart showing this interruption command processing (Z20210). The interruption command process (Z20210) is executed in the command determination process (see Z20011 in FIG. 538) in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226, and is a process for setting the interruption and resumption of the BGM being played.

In the interruption command processing (Z20210), first, it is determined whether or not the received command is a command indicating the start of interruption (Z20401). If it is determined that the received command is a command indicating the start of interruption (Z20401: Yes), data indicating the reproduction position of the variable BGM being reproduced is stored in the reproduction position storage area 303b (Z20402), and the CN1 is used. Playback of the BGM for the interrupt continuous hitting effect is set (Z2403), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z20401 that the received command is not a command indicating the start of interruption (that is, a command indicating the end of interruption) (Z20401: No), the BGM for interrupt continuous striking effect The reproduction is ended (Z20404), the data in the reproduction position storage area 303b is read (Z20405), the reproduction of the variable BGM from the read reproduction position is restarted in CN1 (Z20406), and then this process is ended.

Next, the details of the voice setting process (Z20002) will be described with reference to FIG. 541. FIG. 541 is a flowchart showing the voice setting process (Z20002). This audio setting process (Z20002) is executed in the main process (FIG. 537) in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226.

In this audio setting process (Z20002), first, it is determined whether or not the current time is the output timing of the music (Z20501). If it is determined that the current timing is not the output timing of the music (Z20501: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z20501, if it is determined that the current time is the output timing of the music (Z20501: Yes), the audio file corresponding to the current music is read (Z2052), and the read audio file is played back on the corresponding channel. (Z20503), the music output flag 303c is set to ON (Z20504), and this process ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 23rd embodiment, when a jackpot is won, regardless of the jackpot type, after the jackpot ends, until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times, the time reduction of the normal symbol is shortened. The configuration is such that the state continues. That is, the probabilistic jackpot and the normal jackpot are configured to have the same operation (operation mode of the electric accessory 640a) until the lottery of 100 special symbols is executed after the jackpot ends. Then, only when the game state is in the probable change state at the time when the lottery of 100 special symbols is completed after the big hit is completed, the time saving state of the normal symbols is continued even after 100 times. That is, when the time saving state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit, and the probability change state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit, and the probability shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol within 100 times. In this case, the time saving state of the normal symbol is terminated at the timing when the 100th special symbol lottery is executed, and the normal symbol is changed to the normal state. With this configuration, a relatively disadvantageous time saving state is set after the big hit, or a low probability state is set within 100 times after the probability change state is set. However, until the lottery of 100 special symbols is executed, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the time saving state and the probabilistic state, so at least 100 special symbol lottery is executed. Until then, the player can continue to have a sense of expectation that the gaming state is in a probabilistic state.

Further, in the 23rd embodiment, when the normal symbol is in the time saving state at the time of winning the big hit, the game state is set to the normal state at the start of the variation display for indicating the big hit (the time saving state of the normal symbol). Is terminated). With this configuration, the case where the time saving state of the normal symbol is ended within 100 times after the end of the big hit can be limited to the case where the fluctuation pattern of the big hit is started. Therefore, 100 after the end of the big hit. Behavior that is likely to have ended the time saving state of the normal symbol during the execution of the variation display effect within the number of times (for example, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol exceeds 3 seconds, or the normal symbol is missed by lottery. In this case, or when the pattern of 0.2 seconds × 1 time is executed as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a), the player can be pleased. Therefore, after the big hit is completed, until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times, the game can be played by paying attention to the lottery result of the normal symbol, the operation mode of the electric accessory 640a, and the like.

Further, in the 23rd embodiment, the player can predict the possibility of the probabilistic state to some extent by the display mode of the third symbol display device 81. More specifically, in the cave search mode in which the expectation of the probabilistic state is relatively low, the temple search mode in which the expectation of the probabilistic state is relatively high, and the probabilistic state during the game state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set. There are three types of back modes of super temple search mode that confirm that there is a lottery result corresponding to the fall in the hold (at least the probable change state continues until the hold is exhausted). One of them is set at the time of executing the variable display effect based on the lottery result of the special symbol. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of predicting the current game state from the rear mode while the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, so that the player's interest in the game can be enjoyed. Can be improved. Also, by setting the super-temple search mode, it is confirmed that the game state is in the probable change state, so if the player shifts to the super-temple mode while predicting that it is in the probable change state, the player will be notified. On the other hand, it can make us happy that our predictions were correct. On the other hand, if the player shifts to the super-temple mode even though he has predicted that the special symbol is in a low-probability state, the player will be delighted that the game state has been set to be more advantageous than expected. You can make it happen. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Furthermore, by setting the super temple mode, it is confirmed that the lottery result corresponding to the fall is not included in the hold (at least the lottery for the number of hold balls can be executed with the jackpot probability of the probable change state). Therefore, it is possible to play the game with a stronger expectation that it will be a big hit in the hold.

Further, in the 23rd embodiment, regardless of the gaming state, over a specific range of variable display executed before the end of the 100 special symbol lottery in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is guaranteed ( That is, just before the end of the 100 special symbol lottery, the probability change continuation suggestion effect for notifying whether or not the probability change state is continued (over the 96th to 99th fluctuation display after the end of the big hit) is performed. It is configured to be executed. When starting this probability change continuation suggestion effect, the lottery results from the 96th to the 99th times, which is the execution range of the probability change continuation suggestion effect, are pre-read, and whether or not the probability change state continues until the 99th special symbol lottery. If the probabilistic state continues until the 99th special symbol lottery, the selection rate of the production scenario in which a high-expected attack pattern is likely to occur is high. On the other hand, if the player has fallen into a time-saving state before the 99th special symbol lottery is executed (or was in a time-saving state after the end of the previous jackpot), a low-expectation attack pattern occurs. The configuration is such that the selection rate of easy-to-use production scenarios is high. In this way, by setting the effect mode based on the game state at the end of the effect, it is possible to more accurately notify the game state after the end of the effect. Here, if the configuration is such that the probability change continuation suggestion effect is executed based only on the gaming state at the start of the effect, the probability change state falls to the low probability state during the execution of the probability change continuation suggestion effect, and the continuation of the probability change state is notified. Nevertheless, there is a risk that the time saving state will end with the start of the 100th special symbol lottery. In this case, there is a possibility that the player may feel distrust of the pachinko machine 10 or the hall due to the contradiction between the production content and the actual operation. In addition, as a countermeasure, it is conceivable to configure the probabilistic continuation suggestion effect by an effect that is completed by one variation, but with this method, it is difficult to secure a sufficient effect period, so there are various production modes. It becomes difficult to change. On the other hand, in the 23rd embodiment, the probability change continuation suggestion effect is executed over the last four fluctuation displays in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is guaranteed, and the notification content of the probability change continuation suggestion effect is provided. , It is configured to be determined based on the game state at the time when the lottery of the last special symbol in the execution range of the probabilistic continuation effect is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately notify the game state at the end of the production, and it is possible to diversify the production mode. If the ball is in a probable change state at the start of the effect and the reserved ball is not held until the end of the effect, the effect is configured so that an attack pattern with a relatively high expectation is likely to occur. ing. This is lower than the probability that the lottery result corresponding to the fall will be a big hit, and it is extremely rare to fall into the low probability state of the special symbol within the production period (the probability of the probability change state is relatively high). This is because the production ends as it is).

Further, in the 23rd embodiment, as a kind of hobby effect, the press stop effect in which the stop operation of each symbol row is executed is enabled according to the operation timing of the player's PUSH button 10317. This pressing stop effect is basically an effect that suggests that it may develop into a chance charge effect. In this pressing stop effect, if it does not develop into a chance charge effect, each symbol row is stopped and displayed in a mere combination of deviations according to the player's pressing timing, while if it develops into a chance charge effect, there is a chance. The charge symbol is (pseudo) stopped and displayed to notify the development of the chance charge effect. In this way, by making the stop timing of each symbol row variable according to the pressing timing of the player, the timing at which it is notified whether or not it develops into the chance charge effect can be set to the player's favorite timing. Can be adjusted. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Further, in the pressing / stopping effect that does not develop into the chance charge effect, at least the mode when the center symbol string is stopped is displayed is different depending on the timing at which the stop operation is performed for all the symbol rows. More specifically, if the stop operation is completed a specified number of times (three times) within a predetermined period (1 second) (that is, at a relatively early stage) after the start of the valid period of the stop operation, it is relatively effective. While the stop display of the central symbol row is performed by the chance charge fanning effect for a long time, if the stop operation of the specified number of times is completed after the predetermined period (1 second) has elapsed, the central symbol row is immediately removed. An effect (that is, a relatively short effect) that is stopped and displayed with a symbol is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the period after the stop display from becoming too long or conversely shortened depending on the completion timing of the stop operation of the player, regardless of the completion timing of the stop operation. It is possible to show the transition of the production mode up to the stop display of the off-design in a natural form. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a staging mode with less discomfort. Further, in the pressing stop effect in the 23rd embodiment, a separate button image and validity period gauge are displayed for each symbol row on the display screen, but in reality, the PUSH button 10317 is displayed by a single operation validity period. It is determined whether or not the operation of is valid. Then, the symbol string for which the stop display is set is changed according to the number of times the stop operation (pressed on the PUSH button 10317) is executed in the operation valid period of 1. It is determined whether the stop operation is executed for all the symbol strings. ) It is configured. As a result, it is possible to simplify the determination of whether or not the stop operation of each symbol row is valid, so that the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

Further, in the 23rd embodiment, the chance charge effect can be executed as a kind of the entertainment effect. This chance charge effect is the number of times (minimum guaranteed number of times) that a specific effect mode (chance-up effect) is performed within a predetermined number of fluctuations (until all the reserved balls held at the start of the effect are exhausted). It is an effect of suggesting (notifying) to the player in advance. The guaranteed number of chance-up effects (the number of gauges of the accumulated spirit gauge) notified in this chance charge effect causes some chance-up effect at each timing until the reserved ball is consumed at the start of the chance charge effect. Is consumed for. Here, the chance-up effect is an effect that raises the expectation of a big hit. For example, a change in the display mode of the reserved ball number symbol, a so-called pseudo-ream, a cut-in effect, or a red character. The occurrence of the dialogue of. The spirit gauge is configured to be consumed until it reaches 0. That is, it is configured so that it is not consumed and is not discarded. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp the remaining number of chance-up effects, so that the player can be expected to play the game while looking forward to what kind of chance-up effect will occur next. .. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. In the 23rd embodiment, the gauge amount of the spirit gauge accumulated in the chance charge effect is mainly determined based on the number of reserved balls at the start of the chance charge effect. Then, after the chance charge effect is completed, the pace at which the chance-up effect is executed (that is, the spirit gauge is consumed) is changed in consideration of the lottery result of each reserved ball. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load (processing load when determining the number of gauges) at the start of the chance charge effect.

Further, in the 23rd embodiment, the interrupt continuous hitting effect can be executed as a kind of the entertainment effect. This interrupted continuous striking effect is an effect of a display mode as if an effect different from the display effect displayed up to that point was suddenly interrupted during the normal variable display or the reach variation, and the player can see the effect. On the other hand, it is composed of an effect of an effect mode that prompts the PUSH button 10317 to be operated in a specific operation mode (continuous striking operation mode). In this interrupted continuous hitting effect, the more the stage of the effecting mode develops (the number of displayed monsters is reduced) according to the player's repeated hitting operation, the higher the expectation of a big hit is. be. As a result, the player can be made to positively perform the continuous striking operation, so that the player's willingness to participate in the interrupt continuous striking effect can be improved. This interrupt continuous hitting effect is performed when it is determined that the additional time command is not a command indicating 0 seconds (a command indicating 7 seconds) among the basic time command and the additional time command constituting the variation pattern command. It is a production that may be performed. Here, the fluctuation time is set by the sum of the basic time notified by the basic time command and the additional time notified by the additional time command. Then, when it is decided to execute the interrupt continuous hit effect, the interrupt continuous hit effect is executed for a period of the same length as the additional time notified by the additional time command, and the normal variable display effect (execution of the interrupt continuous hit effect) is executed. For the effect mode of the period other than the period), the effect mode of the period having the same length as the basic time notified by the basic time command is set. With this configuration, even if the variable display effect for which the interrupt continuous hit effect is set is executed, the effect mode corresponding to the basic time command can be reused, so that the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10 is reduced. can do.

Further, in the interrupt continuous striking effect in the 23rd embodiment, each time the continuous striking operation is executed, a plurality of types of voice data (voice data corresponding to the first continuous striking sound and voice data corresponding to the second continuous striking sound are used. ) Is configured to reproduce the audio data of 1. More specifically, when the even-numbered repeated hitting operation is detected during the valid period of the repeated hitting operation in the interrupt continuous hitting effect of 1, the voice data corresponding to the first repeated hitting sound is reproduced for CN2 in the voice synthesis unit 306. On the other hand, when the even-numbered repeated hitting operation is detected, the voice data corresponding to the second continuous hitting sound is reproduced for CN3 in the voice synthesis unit 306. In this way, each time the continuous striking operation is executed, one of a plurality of different audio data is output to one of a plurality of different channels (the first continuous striking sound and the second continuous striking sound are converted into CN1 and CN2). By making the configuration (output alternately), it is possible to diversify the voice mode during the continuous striking operation. In other words, since it is possible to suppress the voice mode from becoming monotonous, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game during the continuous striking valid period. Further, in the case where the first continuous tapping sound and the second continuous tapping sound are reproduced alternately on a single channel (that is, the control of cutting off the output of one sound being played and outputting the other sound) is performed. Compared to the case of repeating configuration), it is possible to output the other sound while maintaining the state in which one sound is output (the first and second continuous tapping sounds are output in an overlapping manner). Therefore, it is possible to make the voice mode more lively during the execution of repeated hits. More specifically, in the case of a configuration in which the first continuous hitting sound and the second continuous hitting sound are alternately reproduced on a single channel, when a player who has a short continuous hitting interval performs a continuous hitting operation, the head portion of each voice data is performed. Only will be a monotonous voice mode that is repeated alternately. On the other hand, if a configuration is configured in which a plurality of audio data are sequentially reproduced on a plurality of channels, the output of one audio data reproduced on one channel is not interrupted, and other audio data on the other channel. Can be regenerated. That is, the voice based on one voice data and the voice based on other voice data can be combined and output. Therefore, since it can be configured so that the voice other than the head portion in each voice can be easily output, the voice mode can be further diversified. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, in the interrupt continuous striking effect in the 23rd embodiment, the number of monsters subtracted increases as the pressing timing is delayed (the remaining time of the valid period decreases) in the valid period during which the continuous striking operation is effective (more). It is configured so that the production mode at the stage of high expectation can be easily set). As a result, even if the player presses the PUSH button 10317 at a fast pace, it is possible to prevent the player from being subdued early to the lower limit of the number of monsters. That is, it is possible to suppress that the subtraction of the number of monsters based on pressing is stopped at the remaining 10 bodies and the remaining 4 bodies, which are easily set in the case of a loss, and the player's expectation for a big hit is impaired. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. In addition, even when a player whose pressing pace is slow is playing a game, if the pressing is performed in the latter half of the continuous hitting valid period, a relatively large number of subjugation numbers can be easily selected, so that the number of monsters reaches the lower limit. The possibility can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the interrupting continuous hitting effect even for the player whose pressing pace is slow, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the 23rd embodiment, as a kind of hobby effect, a plurality of reserved ball number symbols are changed to a specific mode (display mode having a rock-like appearance) different from the normal reserved symbol mode. It is configured so that the hold batch change effect can be executed. In this hold batch change effect, after the plurality of hold ball number symbols are changed to a specific mode, the player performs a specific operation (pressing operation for the PUSH button 10317), so that at least one hold ball number symbol is performed. However, the effect of being changed to a mode having a higher degree of expectation than the reserved symbol mode before being changed to a specific mode is executed. By executing this hold batch change effect, it is confirmed that the degree of expectation indicated by at least one hold ball number symbol is increased, so that the player's expectation for a big hit can be improved. In addition, since it is not known until the PUSH button 10317 is pressed which hold ball number symbol changes (expectation increases), the operation for the PUSH button 10317 is looking forward to which hold ball number symbol changes. Can be done. Further, since the expectation degree is notified by pressing the PUSH button 10317, the notification timing can be adjusted to the player's favorite timing. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved.

In the 23rd embodiment, the voice mode is changed by alternately playing back two types of voice data for the two channels each time the pressing of the PUSH button 10317 is detected during the execution of the interrupt continuous hitting effect. The configuration is diversified, but the configuration is not limited to this, and a configuration may be used in which three or more types of audio data are sequentially reproduced in CN1 and CN2. Thereby, the voice mode can be further diversified. Further, in this case, the number of channels for reproducing the audio data is not limited to two, and the audio data may be sequentially reproduced for three or more channels. With this configuration, from the time when one audio data is played for one channel until the next audio data is played for the same channel (the audio data being played is terminated). Since the period of can be made longer, the voice mode can be further diversified. Further, the type of the output voice data may be different depending on the interval of repeated hits. Specifically, for example, when a player playing a game with a relatively short interval of repeated hits (for example, an interval of 0.5 seconds or less), three types of voice modes are sequentially reproduced in three channels. On the other hand, when the player is playing a game with a relatively long interval of repeated hits (for example, an interval longer than 0.5 second interval), two types of audio data are sequentially transmitted to two channels. It may be configured to be reproduced (alternately). With such a configuration, it is possible to change the output mode of the voice according to the continuous striking interval, so that it is possible to realize the playability of adjusting the continuous striking interval. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the 23rd embodiment, one of the continuous hitting sounds is output in conjunction with the continuous hitting operation during the execution of the interrupt continuous hitting effect, but under a predetermined condition, the continuous hitting sound is output even if the continuous hitting operation is not performed. It may be configured so that it can be output. More specifically, for example, when the last repeated hitting sound during the valid period of the continuous hitting operation is the first continuous hitting sound, the second continuous hitting sound may be output after the end. With this configuration, even though the first and second tapping sounds are output as a set according to the repeated tapping operation, the final output sound becomes the first continuous tapping sound. (That is, the paired second continuous tapping sound is not output), and it is possible to suppress that the voice mode is halfway. Therefore, the voice mode can be set more preferably. In this case, when the last output continuous hitting sound is the first continuous hitting sound, the control to output the second continuous hitting sound after the end is changed to the variable display corresponding to the predetermined variation type (lottery result) (lottery result). For example, it may be configured to be set only during execution of the jackpot fluctuation). With this configuration, for the player who wants to know whether or not it is a predetermined variation type, the continuous hitting sound that is output last during the interrupt continuous hitting effect is intentionally set to the first continuous hitting sound. It is possible to realize the playability. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the 23rd embodiment, the first continuous hitting sound and the second continuous hitting sound are alternately output regardless of the interval between the repeated hits of the player during the execution of the interrupt continuous hitting effect, but the configuration is limited to this. is not. For example, when the continuous striking operation is detected in a state where the sound is not reproduced, the first continuous striking sound may be output without fail. That is, if the interval between repeated hits is too long and the interval between repeated hits is such that the next repeated hit operation is executed after the reproduction of one repeated hit sound is completed, only the first repeated hit sound is continuously output. It may be configured. With this configuration, the player who wants to diversify the voice mode can execute the continuous striking operation at a faster pace, and thus improve the player's willingness to participate in the interrupt continuous striking effect. be able to.

In the 23rd embodiment, the voice data (voice file) corresponding to the first continuous hitting sound and the voice data (voice file) corresponding to the second continuous hitting sound are alternately switched to different channels each time the continuous hitting operation is detected. However, under predetermined conditions, the audio data may be reproduced differently (or the audio data may be subjected to predetermined processing). More specifically, for example, the reproduction speed may be changed (or the voice data is processed) so that the output period of each repeated hitting sound is changed according to the interval of the repeated hitting operation of the player. .. That is, when the interval between the repeated hitting operations of the player is longer than the predetermined interval (for example, 1 second interval), the output period may be longer (for example, 1.5 seconds or more). With this configuration, even when a player with a long continuous striking interval is playing a game, it is relatively easy to superimpose the other continuous striking sound on the output of one continuous striking sound. The voice mode can be diversified. In the 23rd embodiment, the first continuous tapping sound and the second continuous tapping sound are alternately output (reproduced) to different channels based on the execution of the continuous striking operation. Is not limited to the case based on the continuous striking operation. The same control may be executed when the start winning sound based on the starting winning is output, or when the winning sound based on the detection of the winning to the specific winning opening 65a is output. With such a configuration, the sound can be output more preferably, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. Further, this control can also be adopted simply when outputting a sound effect for which an output period is set in advance as a part of the variable display effect. With this configuration, when sound effects and the like are continuously output in a relatively short time, the sound can be output more preferably, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. can.

In the 23rd embodiment, if the execution timing of the interrupt continuous hitting effect is before the reach, both the display mode and the voice mode are interrupted to execute the interrupt continuous hitting effect, while the execution timing of the interrupt continuous hitting effect is during the reach effect. If this is the case, the configuration is such that only the display mode is interrupted and the interrupt continuous hitting effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the interrupt continuous striking effect executed before the reach, only the display mode is interrupted, while in the interrupt continuous striking effect executed after the reach occurs, both the display mode and the voice mode are interrupted. good. Since the sound output before the reach is relatively plain, it is difficult to interfere with the sound of the interrupt continuous striking effect without interrupting the output. On the other hand, since a flashy voice is likely to be output after the reach, it is possible to prevent the voice of the interrupt continuous striking effect from becoming difficult to hear by interrupting the voice mode. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably set the voice mode of the interrupt continuous striking effect. Further, for example, both the display mode and the voice mode may be interrupted regardless of the execution timing of the interrupt continuous hitting effect, or conversely, only the display mode may be interrupted regardless of the execution timing. .. Further, the control is not limited to the control of switching the target to be interrupted (at least one of the voice mode and the display mode) according to the execution timing of the interrupt continuous striking effect, and may be controlled to switch according to other conditions. .. More specifically, for example, at the start of the interrupt continuous striking effect, it may be configured to determine whether to interrupt both the voice and the display by lottery or to interrupt only one of them. In this case, the probability of being determined to interrupt both may be different depending on whether it is a big hit or a miss. With this configuration, it is possible to play the game by paying attention to whether both the voice and the display are interrupted or only one of them is interrupted. Therefore, the player's game at the start of the interrupt continuous striking effect. It is possible to improve the interest in. Further, in the 23rd embodiment, as the interrupt continuous striking effect, only the effect having an effect time of 7 seconds is provided, but a plurality of interrupt continuous striking effects having different effect times may be provided. In this case, by providing a command indicating an additional time different from 0 seconds and 7 seconds as the additional time command, the interrupt continuous striking effect of the effect time according to the additional time notified by the additional time command is executed. It may be configured as. As a result, the staging mode can be further diversified, and the player's interest in the game can be improved. Also, instead of or in addition to increasing the variation of the additional time that can be notified by the additional time command, the total notified by the variation pattern command (that is, the basic time notified by the basic time command and the additional time command). (Sum of the additional time notified by May be. More specifically, for example, when the fluctuation pattern of the deviation super reach B of 67 seconds is notified, the production time of the interrupt continuous striking effect is 37 seconds so that 30 seconds, which is the basic time of the deviation normal reach, remains. It may be configured to set. With this configuration, by simply setting the effect mode for 30 seconds, which is the basic time, the variable display effect can be terminated exactly at the end of the variable time, in addition to the effect time of the interrupt continuous hit effect. Therefore, it is possible to suitably set the effect mode of the variable display effect in which the interrupt continuous stroke effect is set, without providing the dedicated variable display mode of the interrupt continuous stroke effect. When this control (control that determines the effect time of the interrupt continuous stroke effect so that the fluctuation time for the basic time is left over) is adopted, the interrupt continuous stroke effect can be executed even if the additional time is 0 seconds. can. That is, it can be applied to the pachinko machine 10 having specifications such that the additional time command does not exist in the first place. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the chances of executing the interrupt continuous hitting effect, it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the game.

In the 23rd embodiment, when the number of lottery of the special symbol exceeds 100 times and the probability change state continues after the big hit is completed, the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained, and the special symbol is low. It was configured to fall to the stochastic state and end the time saving state of the normal symbol, but it is not limited to this. Even after the number of lottery of the special symbol exceeds 100 times, the condition for ending the time saving state of the normal symbol may be different from the condition for falling to the low probability state of the special symbol. Specifically, for example, the lottery for whether or not to fall from the time-saving state of the normal symbol to the normal state of the normal symbol may be configured to be executed at the start of the fluctuation separately from the fall lottery from the probable change state. good. Further, for example, when a specific lottery result is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol, only the time saving state may be terminated. By configuring in this way, even if the time saving state of the normal symbol is terminated, it can be configured so that the probabilistic state of the special symbol may continue. Therefore, immediately after the time saving state of the normal symbol is terminated. It is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game and to continue the game in the expectation that the probabilistic state of the special symbol will continue. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the 23rd embodiment, the number of reserved balls based on the start winning prize detected after the start of the hold batch change effect is uniformly set to the white hold hold symbol mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. For example, with respect to the new reserved ball number symbol, the lottery of the reserved symbol mode using the reserved change lottery table 222qc (see FIG. 497 (a)) may be executed. As a result, not only the reserved ball number symbol that is the target of the pending batch change effect, but also the reserved ball number symbol based on the new start winning can be expected to be a big hit. Further, for example, a new start prize detected after the start of the hold batch change effect may be added to the target of the hold batch change effect. In this case, the hold ball number symbol based on the new start winning may be added to the target of the hold batch change effect without fail, or may be added to the target of the hold batch change effect only under predetermined conditions. May be good. In addition, as a predetermined condition, for example, when the winning information corresponding to the new starting winning shows the jackpot expectation level higher than the super reach, it may be included in the execution target of the hold batch change effect. For example, as a configuration to be included in the execution target of the hold batch change effect only when the winning information corresponding to the variation type having a higher expectation than the hold ball in the range in which the hold batch change effect is set is newly notified. May be good. With this configuration, when the reserved ball number symbol based on the new start winning is added to the execution target of the reserved batch change effect, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be further improved.

<24th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 24th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 542 to 557. In the 23rd embodiment described above, the chance charge effect is feasible as a kind of entertaining effect. That is, during the production, the number of times (minimum guaranteed number of times) that a specific production mode (chance-up production) is performed within a predetermined number of fluctuations (until all the reserved balls held at the start of the production are exhausted) is performed. The effect of suggesting (notifying) to the player in advance by the number of gauges of the accumulated spirit gauge KG was configured to be feasible. By making the player know in advance the remaining number of chance-up effects by this chance charge effect, the player can realize the playability of predicting what kind of chance-up effect will occur next. I was trying to improve the interest in the game.

In addition to this, in the 24th embodiment, the number of gauges of the spirit gauge (the remaining number of times of the chance-up effect) acquired in the chance charge effect is changed according to the operation content of the player with respect to the PUSH button 10317. .. More specifically, in the chance charge effect, an effect mode for urging the player to operate (press) the PUSH button 10317 is displayed, and the player operates (presses) the PUSH button 10317 according to the length of the period. , The structure is such that the effect of increasing the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG is executed. The maximum number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG is determined at the start of the chance charge effect. The maximum number of gauges is determined based on the number of reserved balls at the time when the effect is started, as in the 23rd embodiment. By making the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG variable according to the operation (pressing) content of the player, it is possible to give the impression that the player decides the number of chance-up effects by himself / herself. can. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the chance charge effect.

Further, in the 23rd embodiment described above, after the jackpot ends, the state of 100 times or more is displayed over 96 to 99 times of variation display (the last 4 times of variation display in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is guaranteed). The configuration was such that a probability change continuation suggestion effect was executed to indicate whether the state was a probability change state or a transition to a normal state. This probability change continuation suggestion effect is the result of the effect (whether the continuation of the chance zone is notified or the end of the chance zone is notified) according to the game state at the time when the lottery of the last (99th) special symbol in the execution range of the effect is completed. Was notified) was configured to be variable.

In addition to this, in the 24th embodiment, the BGM is set in the variable display effect unit during the execution of the probability change continuation suggestion effect. That is, as the BGM for the probability change continuation suggestion effect, instead of setting the BGM over the fluctuation display period of 96 to 99 times of the fluctuation display, as a configuration in which the fluctuation display BGM according to the fluctuation time for each fluctuation display is set. There is. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the end timing of the variation display and the end timing of the variation display BGM from being deviated even when the variation is stopped in the execution range of the probability variation continuation suggestion effect. can do. More specifically, the probability change continuation suggestion effect is executed over the variation display period of the 96th to 99th variation display (that is, at a fixed timing) after the end of the jackpot, regardless of the situation of the reserved ball. It is an effect, and it is irrelevant whether or not the reserved balls for the minutes until the end of the effect (that is, the 99th variation display) are held at the start time of the effect (that is, the start time of the 96th variation display after the end of the jackpot). It is a production that is executed in. Therefore, there is a possibility that the reserved balls will disappear during the production, and the period from the start to the end of the production will be indefinite. Under such circumstances, if the BGM with a fixed playback period is played back with the start of the probabilistic continuation suggestion staging as an opportunity, the BGM playback end timing and the staging end timing do not match, and the player It may make you feel uncomfortable. On the other hand, by setting the BGM in the variable display unit, the end timing of the effect and the end timing of the BGM can be surely matched, so that the audio mode and the display mode can be preferably executed. can.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the 24th embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the 23rd embodiment is that the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the voice lamp control device. The configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the 113 are partially changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed. The 23rd regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the 23rd embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 542, a display mode when a long press effect (an effect of urging the player to operate a predetermined operation mode for the PUSH button 10317) is executed in the chance charge effect will be described. FIG. 542 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the time when the long press effect is started. As shown in FIG. 542 (a), in the 24th embodiment, when the chance charge effect is executed, the PUSH button 10317 is continuously pressed on the substantially central portion of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. An image (long press image NG) in a mode prompting to continue (long press) is displayed. More specifically, a long-press image NG composed of an image imitating the PUSH button 10317, an image of an arrow pointing in the direction pointing to the PUSH button 10317 from above, and the characters "long-press !!" is displayed. Will be done. In addition, the characters "Hold down to save energy !!" are displayed on the display area 805. From these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG increases by continuously pressing (holding down) the PUSH button 10317.

Further, as shown in FIG. 542 (a), the characters "remaining 10.00 seconds" are displayed on the right side of the front view in the display area 803. The display of the remaining number of seconds is counted down according to the elapsed time, and when the remaining number of seconds reaches 0.00, the long press effect is ended, and the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG at that time is reached. However, it is determined as the number of occurrences of the subsequent chance-up effect. As a result, the player can easily understand the end timing of the long press effect, so that it is possible to realize an effect that is easier for the player to understand. Since the other display contents are the same as the display contents of the chance charge effect in the 23rd embodiment (see FIG. 479 (b)), detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

FIG. 542 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode while the player is performing a long press in the long press effect. As shown in FIG. 542 (b), when the player continuously presses (holds) the PUSH button 10317, the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG increases. In the example of FIG. 542 (b), a state in which the number of gauges of the air gauge KG is increased to 2 gauges by long pressing is illustrated. In this way, by configuring the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG to increase according to the length of the period during which the PUSH button 10317 is pressed, the player wants to press the PUSH button 10317 for a longer time. I can remind you. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the long-pressing effect. In the 24th embodiment, the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG increases by 1 gauge each time the total pressing period for the PUSH button 10317 elapses for 1 second in the long pressing effect of 1. In addition, even if the long press is interrupted, the period of the long press is memorized, and when the long press is resumed, the count of the long press period is also restarted from the time when the long press is interrupted. is doing. This makes it possible to further improve the convenience of the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 543, the correspondence between the voice mode and the display mode during the execution of the long press effect in the 24th embodiment will be described. FIG. 543 (a) is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship when the PUSH button 10317 is continuously pressed in the long press effect. As shown in FIG. 543 (a), when the player continues to press and hold the PUSH button 10317 during the long press effect, the voice mode corresponding to the gauge number as the gauge number increases (synchronously). Is configured to be output. Specifically, while the number of gauges is 0 (while the long press period is less than 1 second), the voice "ta" is output three times in 1 second (0 gauge voice). .. Further, as shown in FIG. 543 (a), while the gauge number is 1 (the long press period is 1 second or more and less than 2 seconds), the voice "da" is output three times in 1 second. Voice mode (voice for 1 gauge). This 1-gauge voice is a flashier (larger) voice mode than the 0-gauge voice.

Further, as shown in FIG. 543 (a), while the gauge number is 2 (the long press period is 2 seconds or more and less than 3 seconds), the voice "do" is output three times in 1 second. Voice mode (voice for 2 gauge). This 2-gauge voice is a flashier (larger) voice mode than the 0-gauge voice and the 1-gauge voice. Similarly, for the subsequent (3 gauge to 5 gauge), as the number of gauges increases, a flashy (loud) voice is output as the voice output during the long press. As a result, not only the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG but also the number of gauges (number of chance-up effects) can be easily grasped by the player from the voice mode, so that the convenience of the player can be improved. Can be done.

FIG. 543 (b) shows the correspondence between the voice mode and the display mode when the long press is interrupted during the long press effect (while the gauge number is 1 gauge) and then the long press is restarted. It is a figure which showed. As shown in FIG. 543 (b), if the long press is interrupted during the long press effect, the output of the audio (1 gauge audio) is interrupted, while the display mode remains the display mode immediately before the interruption. Be maintained. That is, the output of the voice is stopped when the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG is 1. With these voice modes and display modes, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the increase in the number of gauges is interrupted by interrupting the long press. Further, as shown in FIG. 543 (b), when the long press is restarted, the voice is output from the continuation of the voice mode that was output at the time of interruption. With this configuration, the timing at which the number of gauges increases and the timing at which the voice mode is switched can be matched (synchronized) regardless of the presence or absence of interruption, so that the production mode of the long press effect is more preferable. Can be set to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 544, the transition of the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG at the time of the long press effect for each game method of the player will be described. FIG. 544 (a) shows a gauge in the case where the upper limit of the number of gauges is a long press effect of 4 gauges, and the long press on the PUSH button 10317 is continuously executed from the time when one second elapses to the end of the long press effect. It is a figure which showed the transition of the number.

As shown in FIG. 544, if the long press is continuously performed during the long press effect, the number of gauges increases by 1 every 1 second and reaches the upper limit of 4 gauges after 5 seconds. do. After that, the number of gauges is maintained at 4 until the end of the effect period (until 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of the long press effect).

FIG. 544 (b) is a diagram showing the transition of the number of gauges when the long press is interrupted in the middle of the long press and then the long press is restarted in the long press effect. In the example of FIG. 544 (b), when the long press is interrupted between 2.5 seconds and 3.5 seconds and from 5 seconds to 9.3 seconds after the start of the long press effect. It shows the transition of the number of gauges in. As shown in FIG. 544 (b), when the long press is continuously executed from the time when 1 second elapses to the time when 2.5 seconds elapses after the start of the long press effect, the number of gauges increases at the time when 2 seconds elapse. As it increases to 1 gauge, the voice for 1 gauge is output, and the state of 1 gauge is maintained until the lapse of 2.5 seconds. Then, when the player interrupts the long press at the time when 2.5 seconds have elapsed (that is, when 0.5 seconds have elapsed after shifting to the state of 1 gauge), the gauge number (display mode of the spirit gauge KG). ) Is maintained at 1 gauge, and the audio output is interrupted. That is, in conjunction with the interruption of the long press (pressing the PUSH button 10317), the audio output is also interrupted. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the increase in the number of gauges is interrupted by interrupting the long press without changing the display mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 544 (b), when the player resumes the long press, the output of the 1-gauge voice is resumed. At this time, the playback position of the resumed sound is set to the playback position where the previous playback was interrupted. That is, when the long press is interrupted, the playback position is stored (backed up), and when the long press is restarted, the long press sound is restarted from the backed up playback position. With this configuration, even if the long press is interrupted, the voice mode can be changed (developed) in synchronization with the change in the display mode (the number of gauges of the air gauge KG). The display mode can be preferably set. Therefore, the staging mode can be preferably set.

As shown in FIG. 544 (b), when the total long press period after the number of gauges has increased to 1 gauge reaches 1 second (that is, when 4 seconds have elapsed after the start of the long press effect). As the number of gauges increases to 2 gauges, the voice mode switches from 1-gauge voices to 2-gauge voices. That is, the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG is increased to 2 gauges, and the voice mode is switched to the voice for 2 gauges.

As shown in FIG. 544 (b), in a state where the number of gauges is 2 gauges, the sound for 2 gauges continues to be output (reproduced) while the player continues to press and hold. Then, when the player interrupts the long press 4.9 seconds after the start of the long press effect (0.9 seconds after the state of the 2 gauge is reached), the output of the 2-gauge voice is interrupted. On the other hand, the spirit gauge KG is maintained in the state of 2 gauge. This state (a state in which only the output (reproduction) of the voice mode is interrupted) is 9.3 seconds after the start of the long press effect until the player resumes the long press (in the example of FIG. 544 (b)). (Until time) will continue. Then, by restarting the long press, the output of the voice mode is restarted again. Although details will be described later, in the 24th embodiment, when the long press is restarted, the length of the remaining period (long press valid period) in which the long press can be executed and the upper limit in the long press effect this time are set. It is configured to discriminate from the number of gauges and change the increasing speed of the number of gauges (reproduction speed of voice mode and update speed of display mode). More specifically, each time the long press is restarted, the playback speed (update speed) that can be increased up to the maximum number of gauges by the end of the long press valid period is set up to the double speed. It has a structure. With this configuration, the chance charge effect can be ended when the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG is larger, so that the number of chance up effects that occur after the end of the chance charge effect can be increased. .. Therefore, the staging effect can be further improved.

In the example of FIG. 544 (b), at the time when the long press is restarted (at the time when 9.3 seconds have elapsed), the remaining long press valid period is 0.7 seconds, while the maximum number of gauges (4 gauges) is reached. It is a figure which showed the state which the remaining gauge number of 2 gauge remains. Until the long press is interrupted, the long press is executed for 0.9 seconds in the state of 2 gauge, so it is normally the remaining long press period to raise to 3 gauge 0 . If you do not continue to press for 1.1 seconds, which is the sum of 1 second and 1 second, which is the remaining long press period for raising from 3 gauge to 4 gauge, it will rise to the upper limit of 4 gauge. It becomes impossible to make it. That is, if the reproduction speed is not changed, it is impossible to increase the 2 gauge in the remaining 0.7 seconds. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 544 (b), by setting the playback speed to double speed after restarting the long press, the number of gauges can be increased to the upper limit of 4 gauges within 0.7 seconds. Is possible. That is, after restarting, it increases to 3 gauge when 0.05 seconds have passed (9.35 seconds after the start of the long press effect), and after increasing to 3 gauge, 0.5 seconds have passed (start of the long press effect). It is controlled to increase to 4 gauge after 9.85 seconds (usually, the playback speed that takes 1 second to increase 1 gauge is set, but it is 0 to increase 1 gauge. By setting the playback speed (playback speed to double speed) that requires .5 seconds), it is possible to increase the number of gauges up to the upper limit of 4 gauges within the range of the long press valid period. As a result, the chance charge effect can be ended when the number of gauges is larger, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Here, even if the reproduction speed is doubled, if it is impossible to increase the number of gauges to the upper limit, the reproduction speed is set to the normal reproduction speed. As a result, the reproduction speed becomes excessively high, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or uncomfortable.

In the 24th embodiment, if it is impossible to increase the number of gauges to the upper limit even if the speed is set to double, the playback is performed at the normal playback speed, but the speed is limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, even if it is impossible to increase the number of gauges to the upper limit, the speed may be set to double. With this configuration, even if the number of gauges is less than the upper limit, the chance charge effect can be terminated with a larger number of gauges, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 545 and 546, the correspondence between the voice mode and the display mode during the execution of the continuation suggestion effect of the 24th embodiment will be described. First, referring to FIG. 545 (a), all the lottery results of the special symbols within the execution period of the continuation suggestion effect are out of order, and the fluctuation display for four times is continuously (that is, the hold is cut off in the middle). It is a figure which showed the correspondence relation when it was executed (without). As shown in FIG. 545 (a), when the variation display is continuously executed during the continuation suggestion effect, the display mode of the probability variation continuation suggestion effect is synchronized with the variation display period in the variation display of the special symbol. (See FIG. 476) is displayed. Similarly, for the voice mode, the variable BGM is reproduced in synchronization with each variable display period of the four variable displays. In the 24th embodiment, the variable display period is a fixed period of 4.5 seconds when the lottery of the 96th to 99th special symbols, which is the execution period of the probability change continuation suggestion effect, is missed. It is configured to be. Therefore, as the display mode and the voice mode corresponding to each variation display during the execution of the continuous suggestion effect, it is sufficient to prepare only the mode for 4.5 seconds. Therefore, since the variation of the display mode and the voice mode can be minimized, the storage capacity of the display control device 114 and the voice output device 226 can be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 545 (a), during the fluctuation stop state during the execution period of the probability change continuation suggestion effect, the stop display of the third symbol is displayed as the display mode, and the fluctuation stop sound is output as the voice mode. (Reproduced). Since the fixed display period after the end of the fluctuation is uniformly set to 0.5 seconds, it is possible to minimize the variation of the display mode and the fluctuation stop sound at the time of stop display. Therefore, the storage capacity of the display control device 114 and the audio output device 226 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 545 (b), the correspondence between the display mode and the voice mode when the hold becomes 0 during the execution of the probability change continuation suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 545 (b) illustrates a case where the hold ball becomes 0 when the 96th special symbol lottery is executed, and the hold 0 state continues even after the end of the fluctuation. As shown in FIG. 545 (b), when the 96th fluctuation display is completed and the fluctuation is stopped (the holding ball is 0 and the special symbol lottery cannot be executed), the demonstration is performed as a display mode. Switch to the display mode. As this demo display mode, for example, a display mode of the continuation suggestion effect immediately before (96th time) and a display mode in which the stop symbol is continuously displayed are set. Further, as a voice mode, there is no sound after the 96th stop sound is output. Since the player can easily understand that the reserved ball is 0 by these display modes and voice modes, the game ball can be positively launched aiming at a new starting prize. .. As shown in FIG. 545 (b), when a start prize is generated during the demo display, the special symbol variation display is executed and the continuation suggestion effect is started continuously.

In this way, by configuring the voice mode to be output in the variable display unit, even if the reserved ball becomes 0 during the execution of the probability change continuation suggestion effect, the voice mode and the display mode are subsequently deviated from each other. It is possible to prevent it from being stored. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably set the effect of the probabilistic continuation suggestion effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 546, the correspondence between the display mode and the voice mode when a big hit is won during the execution of the probability change continuation suggestion effect will be described. Here, in the 23rd embodiment described above, regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol, one effect corresponding to the preset effect scenario is executed for each change display of 1 executed in the probability change continuation suggestion effect. It was configured to be. For this reason, if a big hit is made at an early stage (96th or 97th special symbol lottery) in the probabilistic continuation suggestion effect, the big hit will be notified shortly after the probabilistic continuation suggestion effect is fully enjoyed. There was a problem that it was difficult to improve the interest of the person.

On the other hand, in the 24th embodiment, when a big hit occurs during the execution of the probability change continuation suggestion effect, pseudo variation display is executed for the number of remaining probability change continuation suggestion effects during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation. It was configured so that the jackpot would be notified as a result of the probabilistic continuation suggestion effect. That is, when the door 806 is destroyed (breakthrough) in the probability change continuation suggestion effect, the jackpot can be notified. With this configuration, even if a big hit occurs in the middle of the probability change continuation suggestion effect, the effect for the number of times of the probability change continuation suggestion effect can be executed, so that the probability change continuation suggestion effect can be further enjoyed. ..

FIG. 546 is a diagram showing the correspondence between the display mode and the voice mode when the jackpot is achieved in the 97th special symbol lottery after the jackpot is completed. As shown in FIG. 546, in the 96th deviation variation, the first suggestion effect is displayed and the reproduction time (4.5 seconds) for one variation is displayed as in FIGS. 545 (a) and 545 (b). BGM for fluctuation of is reproduced (output). Then, in synchronization with the fluctuation stop of the special symbol, the third symbol is stopped and displayed for 0.5 seconds as the display mode, and the fluctuation stop sound is reproduced (output) as the voice mode. After that, when the 97th special symbol variation display (big hit variation) is executed, as shown in FIG. 546, three suggestion effects are simulated during the variation display period of one jackpot variation. , At the end of each suggestion effect, the third symbol is pseudo-stopped and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 546, the fluctuation display BGM and the fluctuation stop sound are pseudo-output (reproduced) in synchronization with the pseudo-suggestion effect. Then, in the fourth suggestion effect, an effect that succeeds in destroying the door 806 is displayed, and a big hit is notified. After the fluctuation stop period (0.5 seconds) of the jackpot fluctuation has elapsed, the jackpot is struck, the display mode for the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the BGM for the opening of the jackpot is displayed. It is output.

In addition, in the 24th embodiment, when a big hit is made during the execution of the probability change continuation suggestion effect, the same period as the case where the lottery of all the special symbols during the effect period of the probability change continuation suggestion effect is missed. The fluctuation time of the jackpot is set so that the probabilistic continuation suggestion effect ends. For example, in the case of a big hit in the 97th special symbol lottery after the big hit shown in FIG. 546, the fluctuation time of the big hit fluctuation is 3 times of deviation fluctuation fluctuation time (4.5 seconds × 3) and 2 The fluctuation time of 14.5 seconds, which is the total of the stop display periods (0.5 seconds × 2) for each time, is set. As a result, in the pseudo suggestion effect and the pseudo third symbol stop display executed during the jackpot fluctuation, the same display mode and effect mode as during the out-of-order fluctuation can be diverted, so that the display mode and the voice can be used. Variations in aspects can be minimized. Therefore, the storage capacity of the display control device 114 and the audio output device 226 can be reduced.

As described above, in the 24th embodiment, when the big hit is not obtained (they are missed four times in a row) during the execution of the probability change continuation suggestion effect, the voice mode (variable BGM) is output in the variable display unit. By doing so, even if the reserved ball becomes 0 during the execution of the probability change continuation suggestion effect, it is possible to prevent the voice mode and the display mode from being displaced thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably set the effect of the probabilistic continuation suggestion effect. Further, in the case of a big hit during the execution of the probability change continuation suggestion effect, the suggestion effect for the number of unexecuted times when the big hit is won is simulatedly executed during one big hit change. With this configuration, even if the jackpot is won, the probability change continuation suggestion effect can be confirmed to the end, so that the player's interest can be improved. Further, since the jackpot is notified in the same mode as the mode of notifying that the probability change state is continuing (the mode of destroying the door 806), the jackpot can be expected when the door 806 is destroyed. can. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the expectation for the probabilistic continuation suggestion staging.

<Electrical configuration in the 24th embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the 24th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 547. Here, the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 24th embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 23rd embodiment only in that the specified contents of the variation pattern selection 23 table 202qb are partially changed. .. Therefore, here, only the changes in the variation pattern selection 23 table 202qb will be described, and the details of other configurations of the ROM 202 will be omitted.

FIG. 547 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 24 table 202rb according to the 24th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 547 (a), the variation pattern selection 24 table 202rb in the 24th embodiment suggests the configuration of the variation pattern selection 23 table 202qb in the 23rd embodiment (see FIG. 492 (a)). The difference is that the production table 202r1 is added. This suggestion effect table 202r1 is referred to for selecting a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol for showing the lottery result of the 96th to 99th special symbols after the end of the jackpot, which is the execution period of the probability variation continuation suggestion effect. It is a data table to be created. That is, in the 24th embodiment, when the first to 95th special symbol lottery is executed after the big hit is completed, the variation pattern is determined with reference to the probability change / time saving table 202qb2, and 96 to 99 times. When the lottery of the special symbol of the times is executed, the variation pattern is determined with reference to the suggestion effect table 202r1. Then, after 100 times, the fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to either the normal table 202qb1 or the probability variation / time saving table 202qb2 according to the gaming state.

FIG. 547 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the suggestion staging table 202r1. As shown in FIG. 547 (b), the suggestion effect table 202r1 is selected for each of the lottery result of the special symbol (win / fail determination result) and the number of lottery of the special symbol after the big hit (96 to 99 times). Fluctuation patterns are specified in association with each other. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 547 (b), when the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit and the number of lottery of the special symbol is 96 times, the stop type selection counter C3 and the variable type counter CS1 Regardless of the value of, a special variation A per 19.5 seconds of variation time is defined as a variation pattern in association with each other. This fluctuation time of 19.5 seconds is the sum of the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation for 4 times (4.5 seconds x 4) and the stop display period for 3 times (0.5 seconds x 3) in the probability change continuation suggestion effect. Is the time to match. That is, it is composed of a period during which it is possible to execute exactly four (pseudo) deviation fluctuations and fluctuation suspensions, including the fluctuation suspension period of the actual jackpot fluctuation. For this reason, when a big hit is obtained in the first special symbol lottery after the start of the probabilistic continuation suggestion effect, the pseudo variation display is executed four times in the jackpot fluctuation, so that the normal probabilistic continuation suggestion effect can be achieved. Similarly, the suggestion effect can be executed four times.

Further, as shown in FIG. 547 (b), in the situation where the winning / failing determination result is a big hit and the number of lottery of the special symbol is 97 times, the values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variable type counter CS1 are used. Therefore, as a fluctuation pattern, a special fluctuation B per 14.5 seconds of fluctuation time is defined in association with the fluctuation pattern. This fluctuation time of 14.5 seconds is the sum of the fluctuation time of three deviation fluctuations (4.5 seconds x 3) and the stop display period of two times (0.5 seconds x 2) in the probabilistic continuation suggestion effect. Is the time to match. That is, it is composed of a period during which it is possible to execute exactly three (pseudo) deviation fluctuations and fluctuation suspensions, including the fluctuation suspension period of the actual jackpot fluctuation. For this reason, if the first special symbol lottery is missed and the second lottery is a big hit after the start of the probability change continuation suggestion effect, the pseudo-variation display is executed three times in the big hit fluctuation. As a result, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect four times in addition to the one deviation fluctuation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 547 (b), in the situation where the winning / failing determination result is a big hit and the number of lottery of the special symbol is 98 times, the values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variable type counter CS1 are used. Therefore, as a fluctuation pattern, a special fluctuation C per 9.5 seconds of fluctuation time is defined in association with the fluctuation pattern. This fluctuation time of 9.5 seconds corresponds to the sum of the fluctuation time of three deviation fluctuations (4.5 seconds x 2) and the stop display period of one time (0.5 seconds) in the probabilistic continuation suggestion effect. It's time to do it. That is, it is composed of a period during which it is possible to execute exactly two (pseudo) deviation fluctuations and fluctuation suspension, including the fluctuation suspension period of the actual jackpot fluctuation. For this reason, if the first and second special symbol lottery is missed and the third lottery is a big hit after the start of the probability change continuation suggestion effect, a pseudo change display is displayed in the big hit fluctuation. By executing it twice, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect four times in addition to the two deviation fluctuations.

Further, as shown in FIG. 547 (b), in the situation where the winning / failing determination result is a big hit and the number of lottery of the special symbol is 99 times, the values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variable type counter CS1 are used. Therefore, as a fluctuation pattern, a special fluctuation D per 4.5 seconds of fluctuation time is defined in association with the fluctuation pattern. This fluctuation time of 4.5 seconds is composed of the same fluctuation time as the deviation time, so by executing the suggestion effect in the same way as when the deviation occurs, the suggestion effect for 4 fluctuations is executed without discomfort. be able to.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 547 (b), when the result of the hit / fail judgment is wrong, the special fluctuation with the fluctuation time of 4.5 seconds is defined as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the number of lottery of the special symbol. Has been done. For this reason, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect for 5 seconds each time the special symbol lottery is performed 96 to 99 times after the end of the jackpot, which is the execution period of the probability change continuation suggestion effect. Therefore, since the probability change continuation suggestion effect can be executed at the same effect time each time, it is possible to realize an effect mode that is easier for the player to understand.

As described above, in the 24th embodiment, the total fluctuation time (and the stop display time) until the probabilistic continuation suggestion effect ends, regardless of whether the jackpot is achieved or not during the execution of the probabilistic continuation suggestion effect. Is configured to be 20 seconds. With this configuration, the effect period of the probabilistic continuation suggestion effect can be fixed each time, so that it is possible to provide an effect that is easier for the player to understand.

In the 24th embodiment, the effect period of the probabilistic continuation suggestion effect is fixed to 20 seconds, but the effect period is not necessarily limited to 20 seconds, and the suggestion effect of a specific number of times (4 times) is used. May be longer or shorter than 20 seconds, as long as it is feasible.

Next, with reference to FIG. 548, the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the 24th embodiment will be described. FIG. 548 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 222 in the 24th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 548 (a), the ROM 222 in the 24th embodiment has a reproduction speed selection table 222ra added to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the 23rd embodiment (see FIG. 495 (a)). Is different. Since other configurations are the same as the configurations of ROM 222 in the 23rd embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

The playback speed selection table 222ra started (resumes) the remaining long press period (A) required to increase the maximum number of gauges and the long press during the execution of the long press effect (see FIG. 542). It is a data table in which data for selecting the reproduction speed (display mode and voice mode) of the effect mode during long press is defined according to the remaining long press valid period (B) at the time point. The specified contents of the reproduction speed selection table 222ra will be described with reference to FIG. 548 (b).

FIG. 548 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the reproduction speed selection table 222ra. As shown in FIG. 548 (b), the playback speed selection table 222ra shows the remaining long press period (A) required to increase the maximum number of gauges, and the time when the long press is started (restarted). The reproduction speed (update speed) of the display mode and the voice mode is defined in association with each other for each correspondence with the remaining long press valid period (B). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 548 (b), when B is a period having a length of A or more (that is, by continuing the long press until the end of the long press effective period, the maximum number of gauges is increased. (When it is possible to make it possible) is configured so that 1x speed is selected as the reproduction speed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 548 (b), when B has a length less than A and a period having a length of 2/3 or more of A, 1.5 times speed is selected as the reproduction speed. It is configured as follows. Further, when B has a length less than 2/3 of A and a period having a length of half or more of A, double speed is selected as the reproduction speed. On the other hand, if B is less than half the length of A, 1x speed is selected as the reproduction speed.

As described above, in the 24th embodiment, by setting the reproduction speed with reference to the reproduction speed selection table 222ra, it is possible to increase the number of gauges to the upper limit within the remaining time of the long press valid period. The speed can be set. Therefore, in the chance charge effect, the effect can be ended with the number of gauges increased to a larger number, so that the number of times the chance-up effect is executed can be secured more. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 549, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the 24th embodiment will be described. FIG. 549 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the 24th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 549, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the 24th embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the 23rd embodiment (see FIG. 495 (b)) with the long press effect in progress flag 223ra and the long press period timer. 223rb, long press timer 223rc, long press execution flag 223rd, long press interruption flag 223re, air gauge counter 223rf, gauge rise timing storage area 223mg, pseudo fluctuation count counter 223rh, pseudo fluctuation timer 223rg. Is different in that is added.

The long-press effect in progress flag 223ra is a flag indicating whether or not the long-press effect (see FIG. 542) is being executed, and if it is on, it means that the long-press effect is being executed, while it is off. If so, it means that the long press effect is not being executed. The long-press effect during flag 223ra is set to on at the start timing of the long-press effect (see Z5902 in FIG. 551), and is set to off when the long-press valid period elapses (see Z5908 in FIG. 551).

The long press period timer 223rb is a timer for measuring the long press effective period in the long press effect, and a counter value corresponding to 10 seconds is set at the start of the long press effect (see Z5903 in FIG. 551). During this long press valid period, the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG is increased by the player performing the long press.

The long-pressed timer 223rc is a timer for measuring the total period (long-pressed period) in which the player operates the PUSH button 10317 during the long-pressed effect of 1. Basically, until the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG reaches the upper limit value, the gauge number increases by 1 every time the value of the long-pressed timer 223rc increases by 1 second. When the reproduction speed is 1.5 times or 2 times, the number of gauges increases at the timing according to the reproduction speed.

The long press execution flag 223rd is a flag for indicating whether or not the player is executing the long press in the long press effect. If the long press execution flag 223rd is on, it means that the player is executing the long press, and if it is off, it means that the long press is not being executed. This long press execution flag 223rd is set to on when a new operation (press) for the PUSH button 10317 is detected during the long press valid period (see Z6101 in FIG. 553), and turns off when the long press is interrupted. It is set (see Z6002 in FIG. 552).

The long press interruption flag 223re is a flag for indicating whether or not the long press is interrupted during the long press valid period of 1, and if it is on, it means that the long press is interrupted. If it is off, it means that the long press is not interrupted. This long press interruption flag 223re is set to on when the long press is interrupted (see Z6002 in FIG. 552) and turned off when the long press is resumed (see Z6105 in FIG. 553).

The spirit gauge counter 223rf is a counter for counting the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG actually increased by the player performing the long press during the long press effect. The initial value of the energy gauge counter 223rf is set to 0, and the value is incremented and updated by 1 each time the number of gauges of the energy gauge KG increases (see Z6007 in FIG. 552). At the end of this long press effect, the value of the energy gauge counter 223rf is overwritten with the value of the charge number counter 223qm (see Z5907 in FIG. 551). As a result, the number of gauges actually increased by the operation of the player can be reflected as the number of chance-up effects executed thereafter.

The gauge rise timing storage area 223 mg is a storage area for storing data indicating the remaining period until the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG increases during the execution of the long press effect. Whether or not to increase the number of gauges according to the data stored in the gauge increase timing storage area 223 mg and the value of the long press timer 223rc while the player is performing a long press in the long press effect. Is determined (see Z6005 in FIG. 552).

The pseudo fluctuation number counter 223rh is a counter for counting the number of remaining pseudo fluctuation effects (pseudo suggestion effects) to be executed during the jackpot variation in the probability change continuation suggestion effect. This pseudo-variation number counter 223rh is the value of the time reduction guaranteed number counter 223qg at the time of the big hit when a big hit is made by the lottery of the special symbol during the probability change continuation suggestion effect (that is, the rest of the probability change continuation suggestion effect). The number of effects) is set (see Z6202 in FIG. 557), and the value is decremented by 1 each time the pseudo-variation effect is executed (see Z6206 in FIG. 554). By counting the number of times of the pseudo-variation effect by the pseudo-variation number counter 223rh, it is possible to surely execute four suggestion effects in each probability change continuation suggestion effect. Therefore, the probability change continuation suggestion effect can be suitably executed.

The pseudo-variation timer 223rj is a timer for timing the remaining effect period in the pseudo-variation effect. In this pseudo-variation timer 223rj, a timer value corresponding to 5 seconds is set every time the start of the pseudo-variation effect is set (see Z6203 in FIG. 557). By managing the effect period of the pseudo-variation effect by the pseudo-variation timer 223rj, it is possible to execute one or a plurality of pseudo-variation effects that match the variation time of the jackpot variation. Therefore, the probability change continuation suggestion effect can be suitably executed.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the 24th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 550 to 557, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 24th embodiment will be described. In the process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 24th embodiment, the effect update process 23 (FIG. 519) is performed with respect to the various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 23rd embodiment. Z3111) is replaced with the effect update process 24 (Z3181 in FIG. 550), the variation display setting process 23 (Z3115 in FIG. 532) is replaced with the variation display setting process 24 (Z3182 in FIG. 555), and the variation effect setting process 23 (FIG. The difference is that the variable staging setting process 24 (Z4281 in FIG. 556) is executed instead of Z4204) in 533. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the staging update process 24 (Z3181) in the 24th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 550. This effect update process 24 (Z3181) is executed in place of the effect update process 23 (see FIG. 519) in the 23rd embodiment, and is variable display like the effect update process 23 (see FIG. 519) in the 23rd embodiment. This is a process for updating the effect mode of various effects executed during the execution of the effect.

Of the effect update processes 24 (see FIG. 550) in the 24th embodiment, each process of Z3201 to Z3206 is the same as each process of Z3201 to Z3206 of the effect update process 23 (see FIG. 519) in the 23rd embodiment, respectively. Processing is executed.

Further, in the effect update process 24 (see FIG. 550) in the 24th embodiment, when the process of Z3206 is completed, the long press effect process (Z3261) for updating the effect mode in the long press effect (see FIG. 542) is performed. This process is executed, and then a pseudo-variation setting process (Z3262) for updating the display mode during execution of the pseudo-variation effect (see FIG. 546) is executed, and this process is terminated. Details of these long-press effect processing (Z3261) and pseudo-variation setting processing (Z3262) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 551 to 553 and 554, respectively.

Next, the above-mentioned long press effect processing (Z3261) will be described with reference to FIG. 551. FIG. 551 is a flowchart showing the contents of the long press effect process (Z3261). As described above, this long-press effect process (Z3261) is a process for updating the effect mode in the long-press effect (see FIG. 542).

In this long-press effect process (Z3261), first, it is determined whether or not the present is the start timing of the long-press effect (Z5901). If it is determined that the current time is the start timing of the long press effect (Z5901: Yes), the long press effect in progress flag 223ra is set to ON (Z5902), and the value of the long press period timer 223rb corresponds to 10 seconds. The counter value is set (Z5903), and this process ends. Thereby, the long press effective period in the long press effect can be set to 10 seconds.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z5901 that the current time is not the start timing of the long press effect (Z5901: No), then whether the long press effect in progress flag 223ra is on (that is, the execution of the long press effect). Whether or not it is inside) is determined (Z5904). If it is determined that the long-press effect in progress flag 223ra is off (that is, the long-press effect is not being executed) (Z5904: No), there is no possibility of updating the effect mode related to the long-press effect, so that it is as it is. This process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z5904, when it is determined that the long press effect in progress flag 223ra is on (that is, the long press effect is being executed) (Z5904: Yes), the value of the long press period timer 223rb is subtracted. (Z5905) Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the long press period timer 223rb after subtraction is 0 (Z5906). When it is determined that the value of the long press period timer 223rb after subtraction is 0 (Z5906: Yes), it means that it is the end timing of the long press effect, so the value of the charge number counter 223qm is set to the value of the charge gauge counter 223rf. By overwriting the value of, the number of gauges actually increased (reached) in the long press effect is set as the number of subsequent chance-up effects (Z5907).

When the processing of Z5907 is completed, the values of the long press effect flag 223ra, the long press timer 223rc, the long press execution flag 223rd, the spirit gauge counter 223rf, and the long press interruption flag 223re are all reset (Z5908), and the chance charge is performed. The end of the effect is set (Z5909), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z5906, when it is determined that the timer value of the long press period timer 223rb after subtraction is not 0 (not the end timing of the long press effect) (Z5906: No), the long press execution flag 223rd is turned on. (That is, the player holds down the PUSH button 10317 for a long time) or not (Z5910). When it is determined that the long press execution flag 223rd is on (Z5910: Yes), the long press execution process for updating the effect mode while the player is performing the long press is executed (Z5911). , End this process. The details of this long press execution process (Z5911) will be described later with reference to FIG. 552.

On the other hand, in the process of Z5910, when it is determined that the long press execution flag 223rd is off (that is, the player does not press and hold the PUSH button 10317) (Z5910: No), then the PUSH button 10317 is displayed. It is determined whether or not the press is detected (Z5912). If it is determined that the pressing of the PUSH button 10317 is not detected (Z5912: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the press on the PUSH button 10317 is detected in the process of Z5912 (Z5912: Yes), the long press start process for setting the control for starting the long press is executed (Z5913). , End this process. The details of this long press start process (Z5913) will be described later with reference to FIG. 553.

Next, the long press execution process (Z5911) in the 24th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 552. FIG. 552 is a flowchart showing the contents of the long press execution processing (Z5911). As described above, this long press execution process (Z5911) is a process for updating the effect mode while the player is performing the long press.

In this long press execution process (Z5911), first, it is determined whether or not the PUSH button 10317 is pressed (Z6001), and if it is determined that the PUSH button 10317 is not pressed (Z6001: No), the length is long. The press execution flag 223rd is set to off, and the long press interruption flag 223re is set to on (Z6002). Then, the display and the pause of the sound are set (Z6003), and this process is terminated. More specifically, the interruption command is set for the display control device 114 and the audio output device 226, respectively.

On the other hand, in the process of Z6001, when it is determined that the PUSH button 10317 is pressed (Z6001: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the long-pressed timer 223rc to update (Z6004), and then the spirit gauge is used. It is determined whether or not the timer value corresponds to the timing of increasing the gauge number of the KG (Z6005). If it is determined in the processing of Z6005 that the timer value does not correspond to the timing of increasing the number of gauges (Z6005: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of Z6005, when it is determined that the timer value corresponds to the rise timing of the gauge number (Z6005: Yes), then the value of the air gauge counter 223rf is smaller than the value of the charge number counter 223qm. Whether or not it is determined (Z6006).

In the processing of Z6006, if it is determined that the value of the air gauge counter 223rf is smaller than the value of the charge number counter 223qm (Z6006: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the air gauge counter 223rf to update (Z6007). Execution of the display mode and the voice mode corresponding to the value of the later air gauge counter 223rf is set (Z6008), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z6006 that the value of the air gauge counter 223rf is equal to or greater than the value of the charge number counter 223qm (Z6006: No), the number of gauges cannot be increased any more in this long press effect. In order to mean that, the execution of the display mode and the voice mode corresponding to the value of the current air gauge counter 223rf is set (Z6009), and this process is terminated.

Next, the long press start process (Z5913) in the 24th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 553. FIG. 553 is a flowchart showing the contents of the long press start process (Z5913). As described above, the long press start process (Z5913) is a process for setting control for the player to start the long press.

In the long press start process (Z5913), first, the long press execution flag 223rd is set to ON (Z6101), and then it is determined whether or not the long press interruption flag 223re is ON (Z6104). When it is determined that the long press interruption flag 223re is off in the processing of Z6104 (Z6104: No), it means that the player has performed the operation for the PUSH button 10317 for the first time in the long press effect, so that the gauge rise timing. Data indicating an increase every second is stored in the storage area 223 rg (Z6102), the display mode and the voice mode for long press are reproduced at 1x speed (Z6103), and then this process is terminated. Setting 1x speed regardless of the cutting time with the first long press may make the player feel uncomfortable if the display and audio are played at 1.5x speed or 2x speed from the beginning. Since it has sex, it is intended to suppress this.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z6104, when it is determined that the long press interruption flag 223re is on (Z6104: Yes), the long press interruption flag 223re is set to off (Z6105), and the value of the charge number counter 223qm x 1 second. The value (A) obtained by subtracting the value of the long-pressed timer 223rc is calculated (Z6106). Next, the value (B) obtained by subtracting the value of the long press period counter from the timer value corresponding to 10 seconds is calculated (Z6107), and from the reproduction speed selection table 222ra (see FIG. 548 (b)), A and B are calculated. The reproduction speed corresponding to each value is selected (Z6108). Next, the data in the gauge rise timing storage area 223 rg is updated according to the reproduction speed selected from the reproduction speed selection table 222ra (Z6109), and the reproduction of the display mode and the voice mode at the selected reproduction speed is started (Z6110). ), End this process.

By executing this long press start process (see FIG. 553), a suitable playback speed can be set according to the timing at which the long press is restarted.

Next, the pseudo-variation setting process (Z3262) in the 24th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 554. FIG. 554 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pseudo-variation setting process (Z3262). As described above, the pseudo-variation setting process (Z3262) is a process for updating the display mode during execution of the pseudo-variation effect (see FIG. 546).

In the pseudo-variation setting process (Z3262), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the pseudo-variation number counter 223rh is larger than 0 (Z6201). If it is determined that the value of the pseudo-variation count counter 223rh is 0 in the processing of Z6201 (Z6201: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of Z6201 when it is determined that the value of the pseudo-variation count counter 223rh is larger than 0 (Z6201: Yes), the value of the pseudo-variation timer 223rj is subtracted by 1 (Z6202), and then the pseudo after subtraction is performed. It is determined whether or not the value of the variable timer 223rj is 0 (Z6203). If it is determined in the process of Z6203 that the value of the pseudo-variation timer 223rj after subtraction is not 0 (Z6203: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z6203, when it is determined that the value of the pseudo-variation timer 223rj after subtraction is 0 (Z6203: Yes), the pseudo-variation effect for 5 seconds corresponding to the value of the pseudo-variation count counter 223rh after subtraction. Set the start of (Z6204) and set the playback of the variable BGM for 5 seconds (Z6205). Next, the value of the pseudo-variation count counter 223rh is subtracted by 1 (Z6206), and this process is terminated.

By executing this pseudo-variation setting process (see FIG. 554), the pseudo-variation effect can be suitably executed when a big hit is won during the execution of the probability change continuation suggestion effect.

Next, the variation display setting process 24 (Z3182) in the 24th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 555. This variation display setting process 24 (Z3182) is executed in place of the variation display setting process 23 (see FIG. 532) in the 23rd embodiment, and is the same as the variation display setting process 23 (see FIG. 532) in the 23rd embodiment. , This is a process for executing the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81.

In each of the Z4201 to Z4203, Z4205, and Z4206-Z4211 processes of the variable display setting process 24 (Z3182), Z4201 to Z4203, Z4205, and Z4206 of the variable display setting process 23 (see FIG. 532) in the 23rd embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process of Z4211 is executed. Further, in the variation display setting process 24 (Z3182) in the 24th embodiment, when the processing of Z4203 is completed, the variation effect setting process 23 (see FIG. 533) in the 23rd embodiment is replaced with the variation effect setting process. 24 is executed (Z4281). The details of the variable staging setting process 24 (Z4281) will be described later with reference to FIG. 556.

Further, in the variation display setting process 24 (see FIG. 555) in the 24th embodiment, when the process of Z4205 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the value of the pseudo variation timer 223rj is larger than 0 (Z4282). When it is determined that the value of the pseudo fluctuation timer 223rj is 0 (Z4282: No), the reproduction of the fluctuation BGM according to the fluctuation time is set (Z4283), and the processing is shifted to Z4206. On the other hand, in the processing of Z4282, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo-variation timer 223rj is larger than 0 (Z4282: Yes), the processing of Z4283 is skipped and the processing is shifted to Z4206.

Next, with reference to FIG. 556, the variation effect setting process 24 (Z4281) in the 24th embodiment will be described. This variation effect setting process 24 (Z4281) is executed in place of the variation effect setting process 23 (see FIG. 533) in the 23rd embodiment, and is the same as the variation effect setting process 23 (see FIG. 533) in the 23rd embodiment. , This is a process for executing the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81.

Of the variation effect setting process 24 (Z4281), in each process of Z4301 to Z4307 and Z4310 to Z4313, each of Z4301 to Z4307 and Z4310 to Z4313 of the variation effect setting process 23 (see FIG. 533) in the 23rd embodiment, respectively. The same process as the process is executed. Further, in the variable effect setting process 24 (Z4281) in the 24th embodiment, if it is determined in the process of Z4307 that the lottery result is a big hit (Z4307: Yes), during the execution period of the probability change continuation suggestion effect. Since it means that the jackpot fluctuation is started, the winning process during the suggestion effect for setting the execution of the remaining unexecuted suggestion effect during the jackpot variation is executed (Z4381), and this process is terminated. The details of the winning process (Z4381) during the suggestion staging will be described with reference to FIG. 557.

FIG. 557 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning process (Z4381) during the suggestion staging. In this suggestion staging winning process (Z4381), first, the right-handed winning flag 223qi is set to ON (Z6201), and then the value of the time-saving guaranteed number counter 223qg is set to the value of the pseudo-variation number counter 223rh (Z6202). ). When the processing of Z6202 is completed, the timer value corresponding to 5 seconds is set in the value of the pseudo-variation timer 223rj (Z6203), the start of the pseudo-variation effect for 5 seconds is set (Z6204), and the variation for 5 seconds is set. By setting the reproduction of BGM (Z6205), the execution of the pseudo-variation effect for 5 seconds is set. Then, the value of the pseudo-variation count counter 223rh is subtracted by 1 (Z6206), and this process is terminated.

By executing the winning process (Z4381) during the suggestion effect, all the unexecuted suggestion effects can be completed while the jackpot fluctuation is being executed, so that the probability change continuation suggestion effect can be more preferably executed. ..

<Regarding the control process of the audio output device in the 24th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 558, the control process executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the 24th embodiment will be described. The 24th embodiment differs only in that the interruption command processing 24 (Z20221) is executed instead of the interruption command processing (see FIG. 540) in the 23rd embodiment described above. The details of the suspend command process 24 (Z20221) will be described with reference to FIG. 558. Since the other control processes executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the 23rd embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

FIG. 558 is a flowchart showing the suspend command process 24 (Z20221). The suspend command process 24 (Z20221) is a process executed in place of the suspend command process (see FIG. 540) in the above-described 23rd embodiment, and is the same as the suspend command process (see FIG. 540) in the 23rd embodiment. In addition, it is a process for performing control according to the interruption command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the interruption command processing 24 (see FIG. 558) in the 24th embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the interruption command corresponds to the variable BGM (Z20601), and the interrupt command corresponds to the variable BGM. If it is determined (Z20601), the variable BGM interruption process for setting the interruption and resumption of the variable BGM is executed (Z20602), and this process is terminated. In this variable BGM interruption process (Z20602), the same process as the interruption command process (see FIG. 540) in the 23rd embodiment is executed. Since the suspend command process (see FIG. 540) has already been described in the 23rd embodiment, the detailed description of the variable BGM suspend process (Z20602) having the same content as the suspend command process (see FIG. 540) is omitted. do.

Further, in the processing of Z20601, if it is determined that the command is not the interruption command corresponding to the variable BGM (Z20601: No), the audio mode (audio for long press effect) reproduced (output) during the long press effect is interrupted. Or, since it means that it is a suspend command for resuming, whether or not this suspend command is a command indicating the start of suspension (whether it is a command based on the player interrupting the long press). To determine. If it is determined in the processing of Z20603 that the command indicates the start of interruption (Z20603: Yes), data indicating the reproduction position of the long-pressed sound during reproduction is stored in the reproduction position storage area 303b (Z20604). , Set the interruption of the playback of the long-pressed effect sound (Z20605), and end this process.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z20603, when it is determined that the interruption command is not an interruption command indicating the start of interruption (that is, the interruption command indicates the restart of the long press effect sound) (Z20603: No), then the playback position. The data stored in the storage area 302b is read (Z20606), and the playback of the long-press effect sound at the playback speed notified by the interrupt command is restarted from the playback position indicated by the read data (Z20607). This process ends.

By executing this interruption command process 24 (see FIG. 558), the player synchronizes the timing at which the long press is interrupted and resumed during the execution of the long press effect, and the interruption and resumption of the long press effect voice are accurately performed. Can be set to. Therefore, the long press effect can be more preferably executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the 24th embodiment is configured to be capable of executing a long press effect that urges the player to continuously press the PUSH button 10317 (operation of a specific operation content). When this long press effect is executed, the effect that the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG is gradually increased according to the duration of the long press is executed. As a result, it is possible to realize a novel production mode that affects the number of gauges (the number of chance-up effects to be executed after that) according to the operation content of the player (duration of long press). Can be further improved. Further, in the 24th embodiment, while the player presses and holds the button for a long time, the voice mode is output in synchronization with the display of the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG. That is, each time the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG increases, the voice mode corresponding to the increased number of gauges is output. Then, in the 24th embodiment, when the player interrupts the long press in the long press effect, the reproduction position of the sound is stored, and when the player resumes the long press after that, the memory is stored. It is configured so that the sound is output from the set playback position. With this configuration, the timing at which the number of gauges increases and the timing at which the voice mode is switched can be matched (synchronized) regardless of whether or not the long press is interrupted. Can be set more preferably.

Further, in the 24th embodiment, when the long press is restarted in the long press effect, the remaining gauge up to the long press effective period and the upper limit gauge number that can be increased in the current long press effect. The number is discriminated, and the update speed (reproduction speed) of the voice mode and the display mode during the subsequent long press is changed according to the discrimination result. That is, when the remaining long press valid period is short, the configuration is controlled so that the maximum number of gauges can be increased as much as possible within the valid period by setting 1.5 times speed or 2 times speed. is doing. With this configuration, it is possible to end each long press effect with a larger number of gauges accumulated. Therefore, since it is possible to perform more chance-up effects after that, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, in the 24th embodiment, as in the 23rd embodiment described above, a series of story-like staging (probability change continuation suggestion staging) is executed over the 96th to 99th variable display periods after the end of the jackpot. It is configured to be. Further, during the execution period of the probability change continuation suggestion effect, the voice mode and the display mode are set in the variable display unit. In other words, instead of setting the display mode and voice mode over the fluctuation time of 4 fluctuations, the display mode and voice mode are set to end at the fluctuation time set at the start of the fluctuation for each fluctuation. .. With this configuration, even if the reserved ball becomes 0 during the execution of the probability change continuation suggestion effect, it is possible to prevent the voice mode and the display mode from being displaced thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably set the effect of the probabilistic continuation suggestion effect.

In the 24th embodiment, if the reserved ball becomes 0 during the execution of the probabilistic continuation suggestion effect, the probabilistic continuation suggestion effect is interrupted (the demo display is displayed), but this is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, even when the hold becomes 0, the variable display effect may be executed in a pseudo manner, and the display mode and the voice mode for the suggestion effect may be set accordingly. With such a configuration, the probabilistic continuation suggestion staging can be configured so as not to be interrupted, so that a staging with a better tempo can be realized. It should be noted that the pseudo variable display effect may be executed only when the result of the effect has already been determined. More specifically, only when the game state is a time-saving state and it is confirmed that the transition to the normal state is performed by executing the 100th special symbol lottery, the probability change continuation suggestion effect is simulated. It may be configured to end in. As a result, it is possible to prevent a contradiction between the content of the effect and the actual behavior, so that a more suitable mode of effect can be realized.

<Modified example of the 24th embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 24th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 559. In the 24th embodiment described above, in the probability change continuation suggestion effect, the voice mode and the display mode are set in the variable display unit. On the other hand, in this modification, at the timing of newly setting the effect, the effect mode (display mode and effect mode) up to the range in which the effect is reliably and continuously executed is collectively according to the situation of the reserved ball. It was configured to be set. In this case, the configuration is such that a continuous display mode and an effect mode are set over a range of continuous execution. As a result, it is possible to prevent the production from being interrupted in the variable display unit, so that it is possible to realize a production mode with a better tempo.

The correspondence between the voice mode and the display mode in the modified example of the 24th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 559. FIG. 559 is a diagram showing the correspondence between the display mode and the voice mode when the hold becomes 0 at the time when the second suggestion effect in the probability change continuation suggestion effect is set in the present modification. As shown in FIG. 559, in the situation where one reserved ball is present at the start of the first suggestion effect, the variable display, the display mode for the variable display corresponding to the reserved ball, and the audio mode are displayed. It is configured to be set collectively. That is, as shown in FIG. 559, the execution of the suggestion effect 1 and the suggestion effect 2 is set, and the BGM for variation of the reproduction time over the variation display for two times is set. With such a configuration, the story of the probabilistic continuation suggestion staging can be further emphasized, so that the staging effect can be enhanced. After the variable stop state is set, the demo display is set and the voice mode is stopped, and the execution of the suggestion effect is restarted with a new start prize as an opportunity, as in the 24th embodiment described above. To.

In this way, by setting the voice mode up to the suggestion effect in the range where the execution is confirmed, the story of the probabilistic continuation suggestion effect can be further emphasized. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the above-mentioned 24th embodiment and its modification, the BGM reproduced during the execution period of the probability change continuation suggestion effect is configured to end in the variable display unit, but the present invention is not limited to this. do not have. For example, at the start of the probabilistic continuation suggestion effect, a predetermined BGM loop reproduction is set (that is, the reproduction is started without setting the end timing), and it is determined that the reserved ball becomes 0 during the execution of the probabilistic continuation suggestion effect. In this case, a sharp reproduction position (for example, a reproduction position where the melody changes) is determined in a predetermined range before and after the end timing of the last variation display (for example, a range within 1 second before and after the end). Then, the display mode may be set so that the effect is interrupted at the discriminated reproduction position, and the interruption of the BGM may be set. With this configuration, it is not necessary to set the BGM in the variable display unit, so that the processing load during the execution of the probability change continuation suggestion effect can be reduced.

<25th Embodiment>
Next, the 25th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 560 to 579. In the 23rd embodiment and the 24th embodiment described above, an operation means (PUSH button 10317) that can be operated by the player is provided, and the operation to the operation means (PUSH button 10317) is effectively determined within the operation validity period. By operating the operating means (PUSH button 10317), it is possible to execute an operation effect that changes the effect mode of the effect being executed. More specifically, by operating the operation means (PUSH button 10317) a plurality of times within the operation valid period, it is possible to execute a continuous operation effect (so-called continuous hit effect) in which the effect mode is changed stepwise. ..

This continuous hitting effect is configured to suggest that the more variable the effect mode is, the more likely it is that a privilege that is advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit by a special symbol lottery) will be given. Each time the button 22 is pressed, it is determined whether or not to change the effect mode, and when it is determined that the effect mode is to be changed, the continuous striking effect is controlled so as to change the effect mode. there were.

However, in the continuous striking effect in each of the above-described embodiments, when the player enthusiastically operates (presses) the PUSH button 10317, the variable number of times of the effect mode reaches the upper limit number at an early stage, and the remaining operation is effective. No matter how many times the PUSH button 10317 is operated (pressed) within the period, there is a problem that the effect mode does not change. That is, in the continuous striking effect executed in each of the above-described embodiments, the player is ambitious even though the effect mode cannot be changed up to the maximum number of times unless the player presses the PUSH button 10317 a plurality of times. In addition, when the PUSH button 10317 is operated, there is a problem that the period in which the staging mode is not changed continues, and the motivation of the player to operate the PUSH button 10317 is reduced.

On the other hand, in the 25th embodiment, the effect mode is configured to limit the variable range (variable number of times and variable value) according to the elapsed state of the operation valid period. With this configuration, even if the same operation is executed for the operating means within the operation valid period, the variable contents of the effect mode based on the operation can be changed according to the elapsed state of the operation valid period. Can be different. Therefore, in addition to the operation content of the PUSH button 10317 executed during the operation effect, the player can be interested in the operation timing of the PUSH button 10317 during the operation valid period, and the operation effect to be executed can be performed. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored at an early stage.

Further, in the 25th embodiment, a plurality of restricted contents for limiting the variable range of the effect mode according to the elapsed state of the operation valid period are configured to be managed as a scenario, and the contents are different as the scenario type. It is configured to select one scenario type from the scenario types. Specifically, the scenario type in which the variable range of the effect mode can reach the upper limit only in the first operation valid period, which is the first half of the operation valid period, and the variable range of the effect mode are limited during the first operation valid period. , The scenario type and the like in which the variable range of the effect mode can reach the upper limit in the second operation valid period after the first operation valid period can be set. With this configuration, the degree of variability of the effect mode based on the number of operations of the operation means and the operation timing during the operation valid period can be easily changed according to the scenario type to be set. Variations can be easily diversified.

Therefore, as compared with the conventional configuration in which it is determined whether or not to change the effect mode each time the PUSH button 10317 is pressed, it is possible to give regularity to the variable pattern of the effect mode within the operation valid period. For example, by making the type of the scenario set according to the determination result of whether or not the privilege is granted different, the variable number of the staging mode is before reaching the upper limit, that is, Depending on the variable situation of the effect mode, it is possible to make it easier for the player to predict the effect result of the operation effect this time, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

In addition, in the 25th embodiment, the variable amount of the effect mode that can be changed according to one operation of the PUSH button 10317 is also limited. Specifically, it is configured so that an operation effect in which the effect mode can be changed in 5 stages is executed based on the operation to the PUSH button 10317, and a maximum of 3 operations can be performed by one operation of the PUSH button 10317. The variable amount is limited so that the staging mode can be changed only for each stage. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easy for the player to enthusiastically operate the PUSH button 10317 a plurality of times during the continuous striking effect.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the 25th embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the 24th embodiment described above is that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The point is that the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed. The 24th regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the 24th embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the content of the production in the 25th embodiment>
Here, with reference to FIGS. 560 to 562, the contents of the characteristic effects among the various effects executed in the 25th embodiment will be described. As described above, in the 25th embodiment, the content of the continuous striking effect (operation effect) is different from that of the 24th embodiment described above, and the content is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the continuous striking effect. The display mode to be displayed is also different in that it is different depending on the repeated striking effect to be performed. In addition, in explaining the effect content of the 25th embodiment, the detailed description of the same content as the 24th embodiment described above will be omitted. Further, the same reference numerals are given to the reference numerals attached to the same elements, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, a display mode when the continuous striking effect is executed will be described. In the 25th embodiment, as an effect period (continuous hitting effect period) in which the continuous hitting effect is executed, a waiting period for notifying the player that the effect of operating the operating means is executed, and the operating means are provided. Based on the execution period in which the operation validity period is set and the display mode (effect mode) is changed based on the operation result to the operation means, and the operation result to the operation means during the execution period. The result period for notifying the effect result of the continuous striking effect is divided into a standby effect, a continuous striking period effect during the execution period, and a result effect during the result period.

FIG. 560 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during the standby effect executed during the standby period in the continuous stroke effect period in which the above-mentioned continuous stroke effect is executed. This standby effect is an effect that is executed before the operation valid period is set, and is an effect for notifying the player in advance that the operation valid period is set. With such a configuration, it is easy to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the operation means (frame button 22) is forgotten to be operated or the desired operation cannot be executed without noticing that the operation validity period has been set. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 560 (a), in the 25th control example, when the standby effect is executed, the operation valid period set next is set in the substantially central portion of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The operation means to be operated is the PUSH button 10317, and an image NG in a display mode indicating that the operation to be executed by the player during the operation valid period is a continuous striking operation is displayed. More specifically, an image NG composed of an image imitating the PUSH button 10317 and the characters of "continuous hitting" is displayed. During the standby effect, the operation validity period is not set, and even if the player operates the operation means (PUSH button 10317), the effect mode does not change. On the other hand, a mode for prompting an operation to the operating means (PUSH button 10317) (for example, a character of "press", an image of an arrow pointing from above to an image imitating the PUSH button 10317, etc.) is displayed. There is no.

Further, on the left side of the front view of the image NG, the character 801 is displayed in a state of wearing the spirit (aura) of the initial mode, and on the right side of the front view, the operation means (PUSH button 10317) during the operation valid period is displayed. The spirit gauge KG, in which the number of gauges for indicating the accumulation of spirits based on the operation is displayed in five stages, is displayed. With these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the effect of increasing the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG will be executed soon by repeatedly hitting the PUSH button 10317.

Further, in the display area 805 displayed above the character 801 the characters "waiting for repeated hits" are displayed. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the current state is the state before the operation validity period is set. Further, the characters "2 seconds until the start of repeated button presses" are displayed on the display area 803.

Although a detailed explanation will be described later, the continuous striking effect is set as a variation effect pattern selected at the timing when the special symbol variation starts, and the standby effect is executed (the standby period is set). The timing, the timing at which the continuous striking period effect is executed (execution period is set), and the timing at which the result effect is executed (result period is set) are set to the elapsed time of the special symbol change (elapsed time of the variation effect). Correspondingly specified.

Therefore, since it is possible to determine after how many seconds the continuous striking period effect is executed based on the elapsed time of the special symbol variation (elapsed time of the variation effect), the display mode based on the determination result is displayed in the display area 803. Can be displayed in. Therefore, it is possible to make the player who understands the effect content of the standby effect not only execute the continuous hitting period effect in which the operation valid period is set, but also easily understand the execution timing. Although detailed description is omitted, the display mode of the remaining time display of the waiting period (displaying the remaining time until the continuous striking period effect is executed) displayed in the display area 803 during the waiting period is in seconds. It is configured to be updated, and further, there is no remaining time, that is, the display timing indicating 0 seconds is configured to be slightly before (0.5 seconds before) the execution timing of the continuous striking period effect. ing.

With this configuration, when the operation (continuous striking operation) to the operation means (PUSH button 10317) is started when the remaining time display displayed in the display area 803 during the standby effect becomes 0 seconds, Immediately after the operation validity period is set, the player can be made to operate the PUSH button 10317. The timing indicated by the remaining period display may be set based on the timing at which the continuous striking period effect is executed (the timing at which the operation valid period is set). For example, the timing at which the continuous striking period effect is executed (operation). It may be configured to indicate the timing at which the valid period is set as it is, or the timing slightly later than the timing at which the continuous striking period effect is executed (the timing at which the operation valid period is set) (for example, 0.5). It may be configured to indicate (after seconds). In addition, the timing at which the end timing of the standby effect and the elapsed time from the execution timing of the standby effect becomes a predetermined time is shown without being based on the timing at which the continuous striking period effect is executed (the timing at which the operation valid period is set). It may be configured in.

Further, in the 25th embodiment, the timing at which the continuous striking period effect is executed is configured to be predictable to the player by using the number of seconds, but the timing is not limited to this, and the timing at which the continuous striking period effect is executed is not limited to this. A mode in which the player can understand that the balloon is approaching, for example, a mode in which the balloon gradually inflates and the continuous striking period effect is executed when the balloon bursts, or a predetermined moving body is in the first position. You may use an aspect or the like indicating that the continuous striking period effect is executed when the moving body reaches the second position by gradually approaching the second position. That is, it suffices as long as it is possible for the player to understand (predict) the timing at which the continuous striking period effect is executed according to the update status of the display mode displayed in the display area 803 during the standby effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 560 (b), among the continuous striking effects, a display mode during the continuous striking period effect in which the operation valid period is set will be described. FIG. 560 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during the continuous striking period production. This continuous striking period effect is an effect executed in a state where the operation valid period is set, and is a first effect for notifying the player that the operation valid period is set, and a game. A second effect in which the effect mode is changed based on an operation on the operation means (PUSH button 10317) by a user, and a second effect for indicating that the player has operated the operation means (PUSH button 10317) during the operation valid period. The three effects are at least executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner by the first effect that the operation valid period is set. Further, since the effect mode of the second effect can be changed according to the operation of the operation means, the player can positively operate the operation means (PUSH button 10317) a plurality of times. In addition, by executing the third effect, even if the effect mode of the second effect does not change when the player operates the operation means (PUSH button 10317) during the operation valid period, the operation means can be used. It is possible to easily make the player understand that the operation has been effectively accepted.

Although a detailed description will be described later, in the 25th embodiment, when the operating means (PUSH button 10317) is operated during the operation valid period, a predetermined variable lottery is executed and the variable lottery is won. It is configured so that a variable condition for changing the effect mode of the second effect is satisfied. Therefore, even if the player operates the operation means (PUSH button 10317) a plurality of times during the operation valid period, a situation may occur in which the effect mode of the second effect is not variable.

In this way, when the number of operations to the operating means reaches a certain number of times, the effect mode of the second effect does not always change, but when the variable lottery executed based on the operation to the operating means is won. When the effect mode of the second effect is configured to be variable, at what timing the second effect changes for the player, and to what stage the effect mode changes in this continuous striking effect. Can be made difficult for the player to predict, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. However, if the variable lottery is not won for a long time even though the operation means is operated a plurality of times, the production mode of the second effect is not changed for a long time. Due to the failure of the pachinko machine 10, it seems that the operation to the operating means is not effectively accepted, and there is a problem that the motivation to operate the operating means is reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the third effect for indicating that the player has operated the operating means (PUSH button 10317) during the operation valid period is configured to be executable, the third effect can be executed for a long time. Even if a situation occurs in which the variable lottery is not won, the player can easily understand that the operation to the operating means is effectively accepted, so that the player's motivation to operate is reduced. Can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 560 (b), when the continuous striking period effect is executed, an image NG for prompting the continuous striking operation of the PUSH button 10317 is displayed near the center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. .. More specifically, an image imitating the PUSH button 10317, a character of "continuous hitting", and a plurality of arrow images for prompting the push of the PUSH button 10317 multiple times are displayed. Then, in the display area 805, the characters "Save your spirit by hitting repeatedly !!" are displayed. With these displays, the player can easily understand that the operation validity period is currently set. That is, the above-mentioned display mode corresponds to the first effect executed during the continuous striking period effect.

Further, in the display area 803, the remaining period of the execution period (the remaining period of the operation valid period) in which the continuous hitting period effect is executed is displayed. As a result, the length of the execution period of the continuous striking period effect can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. In the 25th embodiment, the remaining time is displayed in seconds in order to make the player understand the remaining period of the continuous striking period effect (the remaining period of the operation valid period). A configuration other than the above may be used, and a mode in which the player can understand that the end timing of the continuous striking period effect (operation valid period) is approaching, for example, the balloon gradually inflates and bursts. An aspect indicating that the period effect is completed, or an aspect indicating that the continuous striking period effect ends when a predetermined moving object gradually approaches the second position from the first position and the moving pair reaches the second position. Aspects and the like may be used. That is, it suffices as long as it is possible for the player to understand (predict) the timing at which the continuous striking period effect ends according to the update status of the display mode displayed in the display area 803 during the continuous striking period effect.

In the 25th embodiment, 10 seconds is set as the effect period (operation valid period) of the continuous striking period effect, and in the example shown in FIG. 560 (b), the continuous striking period effect is executed. The display mode at the time when 3.5 seconds have elapsed (after the operation valid period is set), that is, the display mode at the time when the remaining time of the continuous striking period effect (operation valid period) is 6.5 seconds is displayed. By repeatedly hitting the PUSH button 10317 during the operation validity period (3.5 seconds) that has already passed, the spirit gauge KG increases to the number of gauges in the second stage, and the spirit (aura) worn by the character 801 is worn. ) Is displayed in a mode corresponding to the number of gauges (a mode larger than the initial state (see FIG. 560 (a))). That is, the display mode of the character 801 and the variable mode for varying the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG correspond to the second effect executed during the continuous striking period effect.

Further, the image imitating the PUSH button 10317 displayed on the image NG is configured so that the mode is variably displayed based on the player operating (pressing) the PUSH button 10317. Specifically, when the player does not press the PUSH button 10317, it is displayed in the initial display mode shown in FIG. 560 (a), and when the player presses the PUSH button 10317, FIG. 560. As shown in (b), the image imitating the PUSH button 10317 is configured to be displayed in a dented pressing display mode rather than the initial display mode (see FIG. 560 (a)). That is, the variable mode of the image imitating the PUSH button 10317 displayed on the image NG corresponds to the third effect executed during the continuous striking period effect. As a result, the player can easily understand that the operation of the operating means by the player is effectively accepted even if the period in which the effect mode of the second effect is not changed continues.

In the 25th embodiment, when it is detected that the player operates (presses) the operation means (PUSH button 10317) in the state where the operation validity period is set, the PUSH displayed on the image NG is displayed. It is configured to display the pressed display mode as the display mode of the image imitating the button 10317, but if it is a configuration that can notify the player that the operation to the operating means is effectively determined. , Other configurations may be used, for example, the pressed display mode may continue for at least 0.5 seconds, and the initial display mode displayed after the pressed display mode may also continue for at least 0.5 seconds. The display may be controlled. In this case, it may be configured so that the presence or absence of the variable condition is not determined for 0.5 seconds after the variable condition of the display mode is satisfied. With this configuration, even if the operating means is operated multiple times in a short time, for example, even if the button is pressed at intervals of 0.1 seconds, the display image displayed in the image NG is initially displayed. Since the display mode and the pressed display mode are alternately and variablely displayed at intervals (0.5 second intervals) that the player can visually recognize, the operation of the operating means by the player is effectively accepted. Can be easily understood by the player.

Further, as the third effect executed during the above-mentioned continuous striking period effect, not only the display effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 but also the sound output device 226 (see FIG. 487) outputs. It may be configured to be able to execute a voice effect capable of notifying that the operation to the operation means by the player is effectively accepted by voice. In this case, the execution interval may be different between the display effect and the voice effect. For example, in the display effect, the effect mode is the first interval (0.5 second interval) regardless of the operation interval of the actual operation means. The voice effect may be configured to be executed according to the operation interval of the actual operation means.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the above-mentioned third effect, that is, as an effect mode for notifying that the operation of the player to the operation means is effectively accepted, the remaining period of the operation valid period and the remaining period of the operation valid period are used. The same effect mode is set regardless of the effect mode (variable situation) of the second effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the remaining period of the operation valid period and the effect mode of the second effect (the effect mode of the second effect). It may be configured so that different production modes can be set according to the variable situation). For example, the shorter the remaining period of the operation valid period, the easier it is for the player to understand the variable situation of the third production mode. The staging mode may be changed so as to be difficult to understand, or the staging mode of the second staging (variable situation) approaches the upper limit of the staging of the third staging. The effect mode may be changed so that the player can easily understand the variable state of the mode, or the effect mode may be changed so as to be difficult to understand.

Next, with reference to FIG. 561, the variable contents of the second effect during the continuous striking period effect will be described. In the 25th embodiment, the degree of variability of the second effect during the continuous striking period effect can be controlled. Specifically, the upper limit value that can be reached in this continuous striking effect is determined in advance, and the internal value can be determined up to the predetermined upper limit value according to the elapsed state of the operation valid period. is doing. When the variable condition of the second effect is satisfied, the effect mode of the second effect is changed up to the internal value at that time. With this configuration, immediately after the continuous striking period effect is executed, the variable condition of the second effect is satisfied multiple times, and the second effect reaches the upper limit with a large remaining period of the operation valid period. It is possible to suppress the change.

Further, in the 25th embodiment, as a scenario showing the degree of transfer of the internal value described above, one scenario can be set from a plurality of scenarios in which the transfer state of the internal value is different. As a result, the degree of variability of the second effect during the continuous striking period effect can be made different according to the set scenario, so that the player can perform the effect that the player does not get tired of.

In addition, in the 25th embodiment, if the type of fluctuation pattern in which the continuous striking effect is executed, that is, the selection ratio of the scenario indicating the degree of transfer of the internal value is different depending on the result of the special symbol lottery to be the effect. I'm letting you. That is, when the continuous hitting effect is executed as a part of the big hit variation effect which is won in the special symbol lottery, and when the continuous hitting effect is executed as a part of the missed variation effect which is won in the special symbol lottery. And, it is configured so that different scenarios can be easily set. With this configuration, the player is made to assume the set scenario type based on the variable situation of the second effect during the continuous hitting effect, and the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is obtained based on the assumed result. It is possible to make a prediction. Therefore, it is possible to make the player, especially the player who wants to grasp the result of the special symbol lottery as soon as possible, interested in the production content of the continuous striking effect and enthusiastically operate the operation means. It is possible to improve the interest of.

FIG. 561A shows a display mode in which the effect mode of the second effect (the display mode of the spirit gauge KG and the effect for changing the display mode of the character 801) during the continuous striking period effect has reached the internal value. It is a figure. As described above, in the 25th embodiment, the scenario is managed so that the internal value shifts (increases) according to the passage of time of the operation valid period set during the continuous striking period production, and the internal value at that time is set. It is configured to change the display mode of the second effect to the upper limit. Therefore, when the display mode of the second effect is variable to the display mode corresponding to the internal value, the effect mode of the second effect is the period until the internal value is updated (increased) with the passage of time. It is a non-variable period (variable suspension period).

In the 25th embodiment, as shown in FIG. 561 (a), when the variable interruption period is reached, the display mode is different from the normal execution period (the period during which the continuous striking period effect is executed), and the player can see the display mode. In this continuous striking period effect, the effect mode of the second effect may be further changed, that is, it is configured to suggest that the internal value can be changed (updated). As a result, even if the display mode of the second effect is not changed for a predetermined period (the period until the internal value is updated), the player is motivated to change the effect mode of the second effect. Can operate the operating means (PUSH button 10317).

Here, a display mode during the variable suspension period will be described with reference to FIG. 561 (a). The display mode during the variable suspension period is different from the display mode during the normal execution period (see FIG. 560 (b)) in that the display mode of the image NG and the display mode of the display area 805 are different. .. Other display modes are the same, and detailed description of the same display mode will be omitted.

More specifically, in the image NG, the image imitating the PUSH button 10317 is displayed in a size slightly reduced with respect to the display mode (see FIG. 560 (b)) during the normal execution period. Although detailed description is omitted, when a command for indicating that the present is a variable suspension period is output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the PUSH button 10317 is pressed on the display control device 114. As a control for displaying the imitated image, it is configured to execute a control to make the scale smaller than the normal time (for example, the scale ratio is 100% in the normal time and the scale ratio is 90% in the variable interruption). ing.

With this configuration, it is possible to easily set a display different from the display mode during the normal execution period without using dedicated image data for indicating that the variable suspension period is in progress. The amount of image data can be reduced. Further, since the display mode of the image NG is changed by changing the scale of the image imitating the PUSH button 10317, the display mode during the variable suspension period and the display mode during the normal execution period are relative to each other. It is possible to make it easier for a player who is playing a game to the extent that it can be discriminated to recognize that the current period is a variable suspension period based on the display mode of the image NG, rather than other players. It is possible to add value to a player who has been doing this for a long time.

In addition, the characters "Still hitting repeatedly !!" are displayed in the display area 805. With this configuration, even if the display mode of the second effect is not variable for a predetermined period (the period until the internal value is updated), the effect mode of the second effect can be changed for the player. It is possible to enthusiastically operate the operating means (PUSH button 10317).

As described above, in the display mode of the image NG and the display mode of the display area 805 described with reference to FIG. 561 (a), the staging mode of the second staging cannot be changed at present, but the staging period staging It corresponds to a suggestion mode for suggesting to the player that the internal value is updated during the remaining period, in other words, the mode of the second effect can be changed after a while.

In the 25th embodiment, it is determined whether or not the current internal value is the same as the upper limit value set for the continuous striking period effect during execution (whether or not it is small), and it is determined that the current internal value is not the same (small). In, it is determined that it is a variable interruption period, and the suggestion mode shown in FIG. 561 (a) is displayed. The above-mentioned suggestion mode may be displayed even in a part of the case where it is determined to be the same as the above. As a result, even when the effect mode of the second effect is changed to the display mode corresponding to the upper limit value, the player is enthusiastically expected that the effect mode of the second effect is further changed. The operating means (PUSH button 10317) can be operated. In this case, when the current internal value is not the same as the upper limit value set for the continuous striking period effect being executed, the current internal value is the same as the upper limit value set for the continuous striking period effect being executed. It is preferable to configure the above-mentioned suggestion mode so that it is easier to display than in some cases. As a result, it is possible to prevent the degree of expectation when the suggestion mode is displayed, that is, the degree of expectation that the effect mode of the second effect will be changed significantly in the future.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, in the 25th embodiment, it is determined that the current internal value is the same as the upper limit value set for the continuous striking period effect during execution, and the effect of the second effect is achieved. When the mode is changed to the display mode corresponding to the internal value, it is possible to execute the upper limit suggestion effect for suggesting to the player that the effect mode of the second effect is not changed any more in this continuous striking period effect. It is configured in. In this upper limit suggestion effect, the characters "I may not be able to accumulate more energy !?" are displayed in the display area 805, and as the display mode of the image NG, the PUSH button 10317 is further pressed than the display mode during the variable interruption period. A display mode in which the imitated image is reduced (for example, a scale ratio of 50%) is set. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from unnecessarily operating the PUSH button 10317.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned upper limit suggestion effect may be configured to be feasible even in a part when it is determined that the current internal value is different from the upper limit value set for the continuous striking period effect being executed. With this configuration, even when the upper limit suggestion effect is executed, there is a possibility that the effect mode of the second effect can be changed based on the operation to the operating means. On the other hand, it is possible to create an unexpected effect. In this case, if the current internal value is the same as the upper limit value set for the continuous striking period effect being executed, the current internal value is the same as the upper limit value set for the continuous striking period effect being executed. It is preferable to configure it so that the above-mentioned upper limit suggestion effect can be easily executed as compared with the case without it. As a result, it is possible to prevent the reliability when the upper limit suggestion effect is executed, that is, the reliability in which the effect mode of the second effect is not changed significantly in the future.

Next, with reference to FIG. 561 (b), the display content displayed when the player does not operate the operating means (PUSH button 10317) during the continuous striking period effect will be described. FIG. 561 (b) schematically shows a display mode when the player has never operated the operating means (PUSH button 10317) in a state where 4 seconds have passed since the continuous striking period effect was executed. It is a figure.

As described above, in the 25th embodiment, a scenario for shifting (updating) the internal value according to the elapsed time from the setting of the operation valid period is set during the continuous striking effect, and the effect of the second effect is achieved. When the variable condition for changing the mode is satisfied, the staging mode of the second effect can be changed within the range up to the internal value determined according to the content of the set scenario at that time. It was composed. That is, when the operation validity period is set, the internal value is configured to be migrated (updated) regardless of the operation status for the actual operation means.

Then, when the difference between the actually displayed display value (variability degree indicated by the effect mode of the second effect) and the internal value is a predetermined value (3 in the present embodiment) or more, the continuous striking period effect is performed. It is configured to display a specific display mode (pressing promotion mode) as an effect mode (display mode). With this configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the effect mode (display value) of the second effect is easily changed when the PUSH button 10317 is operated. The PUSH button 10317 can be enthusiastically operated.

Further, in the present embodiment, the selection ratio of the scenario type set during the operation valid period is configured to be different depending on whether the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the continuous hitting effect is a big hit or a miss. There is. Therefore, when the continuous striking period effect is executed, the type of the scenario set for the continuous striking period effect is set based on the timing at which the above-mentioned pressing promotion mode is displayed without intentionally operating the PUSH button 10317. It is also possible to provide a novel playability of discriminating and predicting the result of the special symbol lottery based on the discriminating result.

Specifically, the content of the pressing promotion mode will be described specifically with reference to FIG. 561 (b). In contrast to the display mode (see FIG. The difference is that the characters "Please do" are displayed and the characters "Continuous hits !!" are displayed on the image NG, and the rest are the same. In this way, by setting the pressing promotion mode so as to have a slight difference from the display mode (see FIG. 560 (b)) during the continuous striking period production during the normal operation, the game is played for a long time. It is possible to add value to a player who is present.

In the example shown in FIG. 561 (b), since the PUSH button 10317 has not been pressed even once since the operation period effect was executed, the effect mode of the second effect (the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG). ) Is the initial state (0th stage), and the display mode of the character 801 is also the initial state (the same aura as the initial state).

Next, the effect content of the result effect executed after the continuous hitting period effect is completed will be described with reference to FIG. 562. FIG. 562 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode of a result effect in a continuous striking effect. This result production is a production that displays the production result according to the spirit (variable state of the second production) acquired during the continuous striking period production, and the special symbol lottery corresponding to the player is performed according to the production content. It suggests the result.

As shown in FIG. 562, when the result effect is executed, the character 801 attacks the target icon 806 on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the result for showing the effect result from the destroyed target icon 806. The effect of displaying the display 806 is executed. The example shown in FIG. 562 shows an example in which the result effect is executed in a state where the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG is increased to the fourth stage, and is displayed on the right side of the display screen during the continuous striking period effect. The fire gauge KG that has been displayed is continuously displayed, and the character 801 is also displayed in a display mode (fourth stage aura) corresponding to the number of gauges of the fire gauge KG. Then, the character "great chance" is displayed on the result display 806. Further, in the display area 803, the characters "attack with accumulated spirit" are displayed as a guidance mode for guiding the production mode of the result effect.

With the above-mentioned display contents, it is possible to make the player understand in an easy-to-understand manner that the result effect is executed in the effect mode according to the energy (the number of gauges of the energy gauge KG) accumulated during the continuous striking period effect. Further, in the present embodiment, the upper limit value set during the continuous striking period effect is higher in the continuous striking effect corresponding to the special symbol variation in which the jackpot is won than in the continuous striking effect corresponding to the special symbol variation in which the jackpot is not won. It is configured so that it tends to be high (the variable amount tends to be large). Then, in the result production, the production mode (attack pattern of the character 801 and the display content of the result display 806a) is determined according to the spirit (the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG) accumulated during the continuous striking period production, not the lottery result of the special symbol. It is configured to decide.

With this configuration, the player is enthusiastically trying to increase the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG during the continuous striking period production (to change the production mode of the second production more). The PUSH button 10317 can be easily operated, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In the present embodiment, the effect mode of the result effect is determined according to the effect content of the continuous striking period effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it corresponds to the effect content of the continuous striking period effect. The result of the special symbol lottery to be performed may be determined in a complex manner to determine the production mode of the result production, or the production content during the continuous striking period production (the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG) and the continuous striking period production are set. It may be configured to determine the effect mode of the result effect based on the difference value between the upper limit value and the value.

In this case, for example, when the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG reaches the fourth stage during the continuous striking period production, it is determined whether the upper limit value is 4 or 5, and if the upper limit value is 4, the upper limit value is 4. It is determined that the PUSH button 10317 was actively operated during the continuous hitting period production, and the production result (for example, "great chance" display) that is advantageous to the player is displayed. It is determined that the PUSH button 10317 is not actively operated during the period production, and the production result is more disadvantageous to the player than when the upper limit value is 4 (for example, the expectation of winning a big hit rather than the "big chance". It may be configured to display the word "chance") indicating that is low. As a result, the player enthusiastically operates the PUSH button 10317 in order to increase the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG during the continuous striking period production (to change the production mode of the second production more). It can be made easy to make.

Further, a part of the effect mode of the result effect (for example, the display mode of the target icon 806) may be changed according to the number of operations to the operation means during the continuous striking period effect. In this way, regardless of the degree of increase in the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG, the player can enjoy purely operating the operating means by configuring the effect mode of the result effect to be variable depending on the number of operations to the operating means. Can be provided to. In the present embodiment, the effect mode of the result effect is determined according to the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG accumulated during the continuous striking period effect, but the effect of the result effect is based on other factors. The mode may be determined, and for example, the mode may be configured to determine the effect mode of the result effect based on the timing when the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG increases or the type of the set scenario. With this configuration, even if the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG stored during the continuous striking period production is the same, the production mode of the result production can be different. It is possible to make it easier for the player to be interested.

Next, with reference to FIG. 563, the flow of the continuous striking effect in the 25th embodiment will be described. FIG. 563 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the relationship between the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) and the continuous striking effect. As shown in FIG. 563, in the present embodiment, when the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) is executed, the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) for a predetermined period is executed, and the predetermined symbol is specified. It is configured so that the result of the special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed after the special symbol change of the period is completed. By configuring so that the result of the special symbol lottery is displayed after the period in which the special symbol change is executed in this way, it is suppressed that a large number of special symbol lottery is executed in a short time.

In addition, in order to prevent the player from getting tired of the game while the special figure change is being executed, the variation effect corresponding to the change period of the special figure change is executed. , The result of the special symbol lottery can be predicted by the player before the result of the special symbol lottery is actually stopped and displayed based on the effect mode of the variation effect. .. By configuring the variable effect so that it can be executed in this way, it is possible to pay attention to the effect mode of the variable effect during the special figure variation period, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game.

In the present embodiment, as in the 23rd embodiment described above, a special figure of 2 seconds to 150 seconds is executed as a period in which the special figure change is executed according to the result of the special symbol lottery and the set gaming state. The variation period is configured to be selected, and FIG. 563 shows an example in which a variation time of 60 seconds is set as the special figure variation (see FIG. 563 (a)). When the special map fluctuation time of 60 seconds is set, the variation effect of 60 seconds, which is the same length as the special map fluctuation time, is executed (see FIG. 563 (b)). Since the contents of various control processes from the execution of the special symbol lottery to the execution of the variation effect are the same as those of the 23rd embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the flow of determining the effect mode of the variable effect will be briefly described. When the special symbol lottery (discrimination by the discrimination means) is executed by the main control device 110, the special symbol variation for showing the result of the special symbol lottery (dynamic display of the identification symbol for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means). ) Fluctuation pattern (dynamic display period) is selected. Then, a variation pattern command including at least information for indicating the selected variation pattern (dynamic display period) and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery (discrimination result of the discrimination means) is controlled by the voice lamp from the main control device 110. It is output to the device 113.

In the voice lamp control device 113, the variation pattern command is used as the variation effect pattern of the third symbol (identification information) to be variablely displayed (dynamically displayed) by the third symbol display device 81 based on the reception of the variation pattern command. The variation effect pattern of the period corresponding to the dynamic display period included in is determined, and the variation effect is executed. That is, the effect mode of various variation effects executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is determined based on the result of the special symbol lottery executed by the main control device 110, and the special symbol variation is started. The variable effect is executed at the same timing.

Then, based on the elapsed time of the special symbol variation (variation effect), the variation effect is executed in the effect mode corresponding to the predetermined effect mode of the variation effect. Further, a process of changing the effect mode when a variable condition of the effect mode (for example, an operation by a player to an operation means or a winning information command is received from the main control device 110) is satisfied during the execution of the variable effect. Is executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 563, a flow is shown when a variation effect pattern in which a continuous striking effect is executed for 20 seconds from the lapse of 10 seconds is determined as the variation effect for 60 seconds. In this continuous striking effect, the effect of each display mode described above is executed with reference to FIGS. 560 to 562, and the effect mode is based on the operation of the player on the operation means (PUSH button 10317). It is a production that can be changed.

The 20-second effect period in which this continuous striking effect is executed is the standby effect (waiting period (5 seconds) in which reference to FIG. 560 (a) is executed) and the continuous striking period effect (see FIGS. 560 (b) to 561 (b)). ) Is executed (10 seconds), and the standby effect (see FIG. 562) is executed (see FIG. 562). It is configured so that the operation valid period (10 seconds) in which the operation of the above is effectively determined is set.

Next, the flow of determining the effect mode of each effect executed in the continuous striking effect will be described. First, at the timing of determining the overall variation effect pattern, that is, at the start timing of the variation effect, the execution timing of the continuous striking effect and the effect period are determined. Further, the effect mode of the standby effect (see FIG. 560 (a)) and the effect mode at the time of executing the continuous striking period effect are also determined. That is, the above-mentioned effect mode is a predetermined effect mode before the continuous striking effect is executed.

Then, when the PUSH button 10317 is operated during the continuous striking period effect (during the operation valid period) and the variable condition of the effect mode is satisfied, the variable effect mode is determined and determined as the effect mode of the continuous striking period effect. The effect mode is displayed (see FIGS. 560 (b) and 561 (a)). Further, even when the variable condition of the effect mode is satisfied based on the elapsed time of the continuous striking period effect, the effect mode after the change is determined as the effect mode of the continuous striking period effect, and the determined effect mode is displayed (FIG. 561). See (b)). That is, the above-mentioned effect mode is an effect mode determined according to the variable condition established during the continuous striking period effect.

Finally, the flow of determining the production mode of the standby effect will be described. The effect mode of the standby effect is configured to be determined when the execution period ends and the wait period is set. Specifically, the effect mode according to the effect mode (the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG) at the end of the execution period is determined, and the effect according to the determined effect mode is executed for a certain period (5 seconds). .. That is, the effect mode of the standby effect is an effect mode determined at a predetermined timing in the continuous striking effect, and corresponds to the effect content (the effect content of the continuous striking period effect) until the standby effect is executed among the continuous striking effects. It becomes a production mode in which different contents are determined.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 563, the period in which the continuous striking effect is executed is composed of three periods, a waiting period, an execution period, and a result period. It may consist of two or more periods. In this case, for example, the waiting period and the execution period may be set repeatedly, and the operation valid period may be set a plurality of times in one continuous striking effect. In addition, it is possible to set a part of the period constituting the continuous striking effect, for example, an interval period in which a predetermined effect mode is set before the continuous striking effect is executed, between the execution period and the result period. It may be configured. By providing the interval period in this way, for example, as a result effect, not only the display effect using the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 but also the movable accessory effect using the decorative accessory possessed by the pachinko machine 10 can be produced. In the case of execution, it is possible to execute the preparatory process for the result effect during the interval period, and the result effect can be smoothly executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect mode of the result effect is determined at the timing when the execution period ends. Therefore, for example, the length of the execution period (operation valid period) during the execution of the continuous striking effect. Even when the process of shortening or extending the length) is executed, the effect mode of the result effect can be appropriately set.

Further, as shown in FIG. 563, in the present embodiment, the lengths of the execution period and the operation valid period are the same, but the operation valid period may be included in the execution period. For example, the operation valid period may be set 0.2 seconds after the execution period is set, or the operation valid period end timing may be set before the end timing of the execution period. You may. Further, the operation valid period may be set a plurality of times during the execution period.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 564 to 566, the operation content to the operating means during the continuous striking period effect in the 25th embodiment and the variable state of the effect mode of the second effect (variable number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG). Situation) and the relationship with.

In the 25th embodiment, the operation valid period is set during the continuous striking period effect, and when the player operates the PUSH button 10317 during the operation valid period, the operation is effectively determined. , A variable lottery is performed to determine whether or not to change the effect mode (display value indicating the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG) of the second effect, and when the winner is won in the variable lottery, the display value indicating the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG. Is configured to raise.

Further, the upper limit value in the continuous striking period effect is set based on the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery, and the display value is configured not to rise to a value larger than the upper limit value during the continuous striking period effect. In addition, the internal value that can be updated (increased) can be determined so that the maximum value becomes the upper limit according to the passage of time of the operation validity period, and when the variable condition of the display value is satisfied, that time point. It is configured to update (increase) the displayed value up to the internal value in.

In the 25th embodiment, the transition status (transition status) of the internal value updated (increased) during the operation validity period is managed in a scenario, and a plurality of internal value transition statuses are different. By setting one scenario type among the scenario types, the internal value is configured to be updated according to the elapse of the operation valid period according to the set scenario type.

Here, a detailed description will be described later, but in the 25th embodiment, as the type of scenario for updating the internal value, an even type “scenario 1” in which the internal value increases in proportion to the passage of time is used. The latter half period (6 to 10 seconds) of the operation valid period (10 seconds) is the latter half type "scenario 2" in which the internal value is more likely to increase than the first half period (1 to 5 seconds), and the operation valid period (10 seconds). ), The first half type "Scenario 3", in which the internal value is more likely to increase in the first half period (1 to 5 seconds) than in the second half period (6 to 10 seconds), and the internal value increases regardless of the passage of time. The descending random type "scenario 4" and the descending random type "scenario 4" are configured to be configurable. In this way, by configuring to set one scenario from a plurality of scenario types (scenario 1 to scenario 4) having different tendencies to shift (update) the internal value, the display value during the continuous striking period production. It is possible to have various variations in the degree of increase (variable degree) of (the effect mode of the second effect), and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the 25th embodiment, the internal value migration data (migration line) is created and created based on the determined scenario type, the upper limit of the display value, and the length of the operation validity period. It is configured to migrate (update) internal values based on the migration data. Therefore, even when setting different length periods as the operation valid period or determining various upper limit values based on the result of the special symbol lottery, the transition data corresponding to each pattern is prepared in advance. It is possible to reduce the amount of data used to execute the effect as compared with the case.

Furthermore, as described above, since the internal value migration data is created every time the operation validity period is set, additional conditions are easily set for the internal value migration content (update content). For example, an additional condition that makes the start timing for migrating (updating) the internal value different from the setting timing of the operation validity period, an additional condition that changes the scenario type in the middle stage, and migrating (updating) the internal value. ) Is provided for an additional condition for a predetermined period, but it is possible to easily create the migration data of the internal value of the content including the additional condition.

FIG. 564 is a diagram schematically showing an effect pattern during the continuous striking period effect when "scenario 1" is set as the scenario type and "4" is set as the upper limit value. As shown in FIG. 564, during the continuous striking period effect (10 seconds) as the continuous striking effect (see FIG. 564 (a)), the operation valid period is set for 10 seconds (see FIG. 564 (b)). Then, the internal migration data is set at the same time as the operation validity period is set, and the migration (update) of the internal value is started (see FIG. 564 (c)).

FIG. 564D is a diagram showing a state in which the operating means (PUSH button 10317) is pressed by the player, is turned on when the player presses the PUSH button 10317, and is turned off when the player releases the PUSH button 10317. It becomes. In the 25th embodiment, it is determined that the operation of the operating means by the player is executed at the timing when the player releases the PUSH button 10317 (the timing of transition from on to off), and the determination timing is determined. When the operation is within the valid period, a lottery for whether or not to change the display value is executed.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 564 (d), even if the player operates the operation means in a situation where the operation valid period is not set, for example, during the waiting period (5 seconds) in which the standby effect is executed. (The first operation timing in FIG. 564 (d)), the operation is not effectively determined, and a lottery for whether or not to change the display value is not performed.

In the 25th embodiment, the length of the operation valid period used for the continuous striking effect and the upper limit value of the display value at the timing of setting the effect pattern of the variation effect, that is, the timing when the corresponding special symbol variation is executed. And the scenario type indicating the internal value migration status are determined, and the process of creating the internal value migration data is executed based on the determined various contents.

In the example shown in FIG. 564, the scenario type "scenario 1" in which the internal value increases evenly with the passage of time is set, "4" is set as the upper limit value, and "10 seconds" is set as the operation valid period. Based on these settings, internal value transfer data that raises the internal value to "4" is created as internal value transfer data within 9 seconds from the start. As a result, the internal value rises evenly immediately after the operation validity period is set, the internal value reaches "1" after 2.25 seconds, and the internal value becomes "2" after 4.5 seconds. , And the internal value reaches "3" after 6.75 seconds, and the internal value reaches "4" after 9 seconds.

In this embodiment, the internal value transition data is created so that the internal value reaches the upper limit value with the remaining time of the operation valid period remaining at least for a predetermined period (1 second). .. With this configuration, the operation validity period after the internal value reaches the upper limit value is short, and the display value is raised to the upper limit value for the player who is enthusiastically operating the operation means. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation that cannot be done.

For the length of the remaining period from the time when this internal value is raised to the upper limit value to the end of the operation valid period, a predetermined fixed value (for example, 1 second) may be used, or a set scenario. A value corresponding to the type may be used, a value set at random may be used, or a value corresponding to the length of the operation valid period may be used. When the length of 1 is selected from a plurality of lengths as the length of the residual period in this way, the length of the residual period is one of the additional conditions when creating the internal value migration data. It may be configured to set.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 564 (c) to (e), the relationship between the internal value during the continuous striking period effect, the operation status of the PUSH button 10317, and the variable status of the display value will be described. Since the internal value has not reached "1" until 2.25 seconds have elapsed after the operation valid period is set (after the continuous striking period effect is executed), in the second and third button operations. The displayed value does not change. Then, in the fourth button operation executed after 2.25 seconds have elapsed, that is, in the state where the internal value has reached "1" (the display value can be changed), the display value is changed. Since the winner was lost in the variable lottery for determining whether or not (indicated by a cross in the figure), the displayed value does not change in this fourth button operation.

Next, the fifth button operation is executed after 2.25 seconds have elapsed, and at the timing before 4.5 seconds have elapsed, that is, at the timing when the internal value is "1", and the winner is won by the variable lottery ( Since it is indicated by a circle in the figure), the displayed value is changed from "0" to "1". Here, when the display value is changed from "0" to "1", the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG shown in FIG. 560 (a) is in the initial state (the state in which the spirit gauge KG is all displayed in black). ) To the state of the gauge number 1 (the state where only the bottom frame of the spirit gauge KG is displayed in white), and the display mode of the character 801 is shown in the initial state (FIG. 560 (a)). The aspect of the aura) is variably displayed as an aspect in which the aspect of the aura is increased by one step.

Here, since the internal value "1" and the display value "1" become the same value by the fifth button operation, even if the button operation is executed until the internal value is updated (increased). Since the display value cannot be increased, the display mode shown in FIG. 561 (a) is displayed. Since the internal value remains "1" when the sixth button operation is executed, the button operation is executed while the display mode shown in FIG. 561 (a) is displayed. Therefore, the displayed value is not changed. Further, in the 7th button operation, the internal value is set to be larger than the displayed value as in the 4th button operation described above, but the displayed value is different because the variable lottery is won. It cannot be changed.

Next, the eighth button operation is won by a variable lottery as in the fifth button operation, and the display value changes from "1" to "2". After that, the display value changes from "2" to "3" by the 10th button operation based on the transition of the internal value with the passage of time, the button operation timing, and the lottery result of the variable lottery, and the 11th time. The display value changes from "3" to "4" by operating the button of.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the internal value is updated (increased) based on the internal migration data, and the degree of variability (increased degree) of the displayed value within the operation valid period is limited by the internal value. Since it is configured, it is possible to easily change the display value over the entire operation validity period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display value from reaching the upper limit in the first half of the operation valid period, causing the player to perform unnecessary operations during the remaining period of the operation valid period, and reducing the motivation to play. can do. In addition, in order to prevent the display value from reaching the upper limit only in the first half of the operation validity period, it is difficult to establish a variable condition for varying the display value for operations on the operation means during the operation validity period. By configuring the above, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the displayed value does not reach the upper limit value during the operation valid period.

Next, with reference to FIG. 565, the effect content when the button operation content by the player is different from the example shown in FIG. 564 under the same conditions as the example shown in FIG. 564 described above will be described. do. FIG. 565 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the flow of the effect when the player does not enthusiastically operate the operation means during the continuous hitting effect. FIG. 565 differs from FIG. 564 described above in that the button operation content (see FIG. 565 (d)) and the variable status of the displayed value (see FIG. 565 (e)) are different, and are otherwise the same. Is. The detailed description of the same content will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 565 (d), if the player does not execute the button operation until 6.75 seconds have elapsed from the execution of the continuous striking period effect, the display value remains "0" and is inside. The value will change to "3". In this case, since the difference between the displayed value and the internal value is a predetermined value or more (3 or more), the display mode of the pressing promotion mode shown in FIG. 561 (b) is displayed. In this way, by displaying the display mode of the pressing promotion mode, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the display value is likely to be variable (increased) when the PUSH button 10317 is pressed. can.

Then, in the second button operation (button operation executed between 6.75 seconds and 9 seconds after the operation validity period is set), the variable lottery is won and the display value is from "0" to "2". Variable to. Here, in the present embodiment, the variable amount of the display value that can be changed by one button operation is configured so that the upper limit is two steps. Therefore, when the display value is changed based on the second button operation in which the internal value is "3", the display value is changed only from "0" to "2" which is increased by two steps. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easy for the player to enthusiastically operate the PUSH button 10317 a plurality of times during the continuous striking period production.

In the present embodiment, when the variable condition for changing the display value is satisfied (when the winner is won by the variable lottery), if there is a difference between the display value and the internal value in a plurality of stages, the above description is made. It is configured to change the display value up to the upper limit of the variable amount, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable amount of the display value to be changed by one button operation may be determined by lottery. .. With this configuration, even if there is a difference between the displayed value and the internal value in multiple stages, it is possible to change the display mode in only one stage by operating one button. It is possible to make it easier for the player to experience many events in which the display value is variable.

Next, with reference to FIG. 566, an effect pattern during the continuous striking period effect when the scenario type “scenario 2” in which the transition tendency of the internal value is the latter half type is set will be described. FIG. 566 is a diagram schematically showing an effect pattern during the continuous striking period effect when "scenario 2" is set as the scenario type and "4" is set as the upper limit value. Of the contents shown in FIG. 566, the same parts as those described above with reference to FIG. 564 will be omitted in detail.

When the scenario type "scenario 2" is set, the internal value transition data in which the internal value rises sharply in the latter half period is created as compared with the case where the scenario type "scenario 1" is set (see FIG. 564). To. In this embodiment, the period until the internal value shifts to 1 is 2.25 seconds regardless of the set scenario type. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from easily determining the scenario type set this time immediately after the continuous hitting period effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 566, when the degree of migration of the internal value indicated by the scenario internal value migration data increases exponentially, the operation is specifically performed while the player operates the operating means a plurality of times. While winning a variable lottery executed based on an operation on the means, the internal value may increase more than once. In the present embodiment, when the variable lottery is won, an upper limit is set for the display value that can be increased once. FIG. 566 shows an example in which "2" is set as the upper limit of increase of the display value. That is, even if the displayed value and the internal value deviate from each other, the displayed value can be increased by only two steps at the maximum by one variable display. Therefore, when the variable lottery is won by the 11th button operation (operation to the PUSH button 10317), the internal value at that time has risen to "4", but the display value is "1". , The display value becomes "3".

With this configuration, unless the player operates the operating means (PUSH button 10317) a plurality of times during the continuous striking period production, it is possible to make it difficult to raise the display value to the upper limit value. , You can play the game enthusiastically.

<About the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device in the 25th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 567 to 571, the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 25th embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of the 25th embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the 23rd embodiment described above in that a part of the ROM 222 configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 and a part of the RAM 223 configuration are different. It differs in that it is set, and is the same in other respects. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of ROM 222 will be described with reference to FIG. 567. FIG. 567 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 567, in the 25th embodiment, the internal scenario table 222sa, the push lottery table 222sb, and the upper limit value selection table are used for the ROM 222 of the 23rd embodiment described above (see FIG. 495 (a)). It differs in that 222sc and the difference upper limit value selection table 222sd are added, and is the same except for the addition. The detailed description of the same content will be omitted.

The internal scenario table 222sa is a data table that is referred to when selecting the migration tendency of the internal value during the continuous striking period effect, and is configured to be able to select a plurality of scenario types having different internal value migration tendencies. There is. This internal scenario table 222sa is used in the basic staging mode selection process 25 (see Z4581 in FIG. 579) executed in the staging mode selection process 25 (see Z4353 in FIG. 578) executed for setting the variable staging. When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern of the above is included in the continuous striking effect (Z6701: Yes in FIG. 579), it is referred to for setting the effect mode of the continuous striking effect (see Z6702 in FIG. 579). Then, using the scenario type selected with reference to the internal scenario table 222sa, internal migration data indicating the transition status of the internal value during the operation valid period set during the continuous striking effect is created.

Here, the contents specified in the internal scenario table 222sa will be described with reference to FIG. 568 (a). FIG. 568 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the internal scenario table 222sa. As shown in FIG. 568 (a), in the internal scenario table 222sa, four types of scenarios (scenario 1 to scenario 4) are shown, the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the current fluctuation pattern, and the acquired scenario effect counter. It is defined in association with the value of 223sa.

Specifically, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, the value of the scenario effect counter 223sa is "scenario 1" in the range of "0 to 39" and "scenario" in the range of "40 to 69". "2" is defined as "Scenario 3" in the range of "70 to 89", and "Scenario 4" is defined in the range of "90 to 98". If the result of the special symbol lottery is out of order, "Scenario 1" is in the range of "0 to 59" and "Scenario 2" is in the range of "60 to 79". , "Scenario 3" is defined in the range of "80 to 89", and "Scenario 4" is defined in the range of "90 to 98".

Here, the contents of each scenario type specified in the internal scenario table 222sa will be described. As described above with reference to FIG. 564, "scenario 1" shows a transition tendency in which the internal value increases (variable) evenly with the lapse of the operation valid period. That is, when this "scenario 1" is selected, the continuous striking period effect that can evenly increase (variable) the display value over the entire range of the operation valid period is executed. Therefore, the display value reaches the upper limit value during the first half of the operation valid period, and the display value does not increase (variable) for a long time even though the PUSH button 10317 is operated multiple times. , It is possible to prevent the player's motivation to operate the operating means from being reduced.

Next, “Scenario 2” shows a transition tendency in which the internal value is more likely to increase (variable) in the latter half period than in the first half period of the operation valid period, as described above with reference to FIG. 566. That is, when this "scenario 2" is selected, the continuous striking period effect that makes it easier to raise (variable) the display value in the latter half period than in the first half period of the operation valid period is executed. Therefore, it is possible to operate the operation means while giving the player a sense of expectation until the end of the operation validity period. Further, in the present embodiment, since the scenario type is selected to determine the transition tendency of the internal value, as described above with reference to FIG. 566, until the internal value reaches "1". Is configured to follow the same course as "Scenario 1", and the update status of the internal value after that is configured to be created according to the tendency of "Scenario 2". Therefore, even when "Scenario 2" is selected, it is possible to prevent the display value from being unchanged for a long time during the first half of the operation valid period.

In addition, by configuring the process until the internal value reaches a predetermined value (for example, "1") to be the same as that of other scenario types, immediately after the operation valid period is set (the continuous striking period effect is produced). Immediately after it is executed), it is possible to prevent the scenario type adopted for this continuous striking period production from being specified.

"Scenario 3" shows the opposite tendency to the above-mentioned "Scenario 2", and shows a transition tendency in which the internal value is more likely to increase (variable) in the first half period than in the second half period of the operation valid period. .. That is, when this "scenario 3" is selected, the continuous striking period effect that makes it easier to raise (variable) the display value in the first half period than in the second half period of the operation valid period is executed. Therefore, the display value tends to increase immediately after the continuous hitting period effect is executed, and a large value (for example, "5") may be set as the upper limit value set in the continuous hitting period effect. It can be made easier to remind people.

Even when creating internal migration data based on this "scenario 3", it is configured to follow the same process as "scenario 1" until the internal value reaches "1", and the internal after that. The value update status may be configured to be created according to the tendency of "scenario 3". With this configuration, the process until the internal value reaches a predetermined value (for example, "1") is the same as that of other scenario types, and immediately after the operation valid period is set (continuous hitting period production is executed). Immediately after it is done), it is possible to prevent the scenario type adopted for this continuous hitting period production from being specified.

Finally, unlike other scenarios, "scenario 4" shows a transition tendency in which the internal value repeatedly rises and falls as the operation validity period elapses. That is, while the above-mentioned "scenario 1" to "scenario 3" are shown only by the tendency that the internal value increases with the lapse of the operation valid period, "scenario 4" is the operation valid period. There is a big difference in that the internal value may decrease with the passage of time.

That is, when this "scenario 4" is selected, the second timing (for example, 3.5 seconds) after the first timing of the operation valid period (for example, when 3 seconds have elapsed) and after the first timing. (At the elapsed time), the internal value will be smaller. Therefore, the degree of increase in the display value can be greatly different depending on the operation timing of the PUSH button 10317 during the continuous striking period production, so that it is difficult for the player to predict the upper limit value set in the continuous striking period production. Can be done.

When the above-mentioned "scenario 4" is selected, a state in which the internal value is smaller (lower) than the displayed value may occur. That is, in a state where the internal value changes to "3", the variable condition of the display value (winning of the variable lottery) is satisfied, and after the display value is changed to "3", the internal value becomes "2". May change to. In this case, the continuous striking period effect may be executed in a special mode suggesting that the internal value is smaller than the displayed value. As a result, it is possible to make the player predict that the internal migration data based on the "scenario 4" is set in the continuous hitting period production this time. Further, even when the internal value is smaller than the displayed value, the same mode as when the displayed value and the internal value are the same (see FIG. 561 (a)) may be displayed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict that the internal migration data based on the "scenario 4" is set in the continuous hitting period production this time.

As shown in FIG. 568 (a), in the 25th embodiment, if the selection ratio of each scenario type is different depending on the result (big hit, miss) of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the variable effect in which the continuous hit effect is executed. If you win the jackpot, the selection rate of "Scenario 1" is about 40%, the selection rate of "Scenario 2" is about 30%, the selection rate of "Scenario 3" is about 20%, and "Scenario 3". It is stipulated that the selection rate of "4" is about 10%, and if the jackpot is not won (if the winner is out of the game), the selection rate of "Scenario 1" is about 60% and the selection rate of "Scenario 2" is selected. It is stipulated that the ratio is about 20%, the selection ratio of "scenario 3" is about 10%, and the selection ratio of "scenario 4" is about 10%.

In other words, "Scenario 2" and "Scenario 3" are configured so that "Scenario 2" and "Scenario 3" are more easily selected when the jackpot is won than when the jackpot is not won (when the jackpot is won). Is configured to be difficult to select. With this configuration, the selected scenario type is determined by predicting the transition status of the internal value based on the internal migration data set during the continuous striking period effect, and the continuous striking effect is based on the determination result. Can provide the enjoyment of predicting the outcome of the corresponding special symbol draw before the end of.

In addition, it is stipulated that the selection rate of "Scenario 1" is lower when the jackpot is won than when the winner is lost, but the selection rate of "Scenario 1", which is defined as low, is the highest among each scenario type. Since it is stipulated that the selection ratio is set, every time the continuous hitting effect is executed, the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery may be easily grasped before the continuous hitting effect ends. Can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, the same scenario type can be selected depending on whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit or not, and the result of the special symbol lottery is obtained only by the selected scenario type. Although it is configured to be difficult to identify, the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific lottery result (for example, for example) at the lowest selection ratio (for example, 0.5%) in each scenario type. , A scenario type (for example, "scenario V") that can be selected only in the case of a big hit) may be specified.

With this configuration, when it is determined that "Scenario V" has been selected, the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery can be grasped before the continuous hitting effect ends, so that the continuous hitting period It is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting which scenario type is selected in the production. In addition, when the "scenario V" that can be selected only when it is a specific lottery result is provided in this way, the internal value of the scenario so that the internal migration data clearly different from other scenario types is created. It is good to specify the transition tendency of, for example, the restriction tendency that the internal value rises only to a predetermined value (for example, "2") regardless of the set upper limit value, the invalid tendency that the internal value does not rise at all, and the operation valid. Regardless of the passage of time, it is preferable to configure the system so that the internal value always shows a transition tendency such as an upper limit showing an upper limit. Thereby, when the internal value is changed based on the internal migration data created based on the "scenario V", it is possible to make it easy for the player to predict the selected scenario type.

In the 25th embodiment, as shown in FIG. 568 (a), the selection ratio of the scenario type is configured to be different based on the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery, that is, whether or not the jackpot is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the selection ratio of the scenario type may be different based on the length of the operation valid period, or the length of the effect period set for the corresponding variable effect may be set. It may be configured so that the selection ratio of the scenario type is different based on (the length of the fluctuation time of the special symbol), or based on the result of the winning information (look-ahead information) of the acquired special symbol hold. It may be configured so that the selection ratio of the scenario type is different. Further, if the pachinko machine 10 has a probability setting function that can set a value of 1 from a plurality of values having different probabilities as the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol (so-called pachinko machine 10 with a setting function), it is set. The selection ratio of the scenario type may be different depending on the value (set value) indicating the jackpot probability. That is, by grasping the selected scenario type, it is sufficient to make it possible to give a privilege that is advantageous to the player.

The pressed lottery table 222sb is a variable lottery for determining whether or not to change the display value (display mode) when the player operates the PUSH button 10317 (operation means) within the operation valid period during the continuous hitting effect. It is a data table used to execute, and is a lottery corresponding to the result (big hit, miss) of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the continuous hitting effect during execution and the value of the acquired lottery effect counter 223sb. The results (winning and losing) are specified respectively. When the result of the variable lottery executed using this pressed lottery table 222sb is a winning, the variable condition of the display value is satisfied, the display value can be changed, and the result of the variable lottery is out of order. In some cases, the display value cannot be changed without satisfying the variable condition of the display value.

In this way, when the operation of the player to the operating means is effectively determined during the operation valid period, the variable lottery is executed based on the operation, and the display mode (display value) is based on the variable lottery result. ) Is configured to satisfy the variable condition, so that the state in which the display value can be changed can be set irregularly, so that the display is displayed at a timing unexpected to the player. The aspect can be easily changed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Here, with reference to FIG. 568 (b), the contents specified in the push lottery table 222sb will be described. FIG. 568 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the pressed lottery table 222sb. As shown in FIG. 568 (b), the push lottery table 222sb shows "winning" and "missing" as the lottery results, the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the current fluctuation pattern, and the acquired lottery effect counter 223sb. It is specified in association with the value.

Specifically, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, the value of the lottery effect counter 223sb is "winning" in the range of "0 to 29" and "out of" in the range of "30 to 98". Are stipulated respectively. If the result of the special symbol lottery is out of order, the value of the lottery effect counter 223sb is defined as "winning" in the range of "0 to 19" and "out of order" in the range of "20 to 98". Has been done.

That is, it is configured so that when the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is a big hit, it is easier to win in the push lottery than when it is out of order. With this configuration, it is possible to easily predict the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery by the variable frequency of the display value during the continuous striking period production, and the player is interested in the production content during the continuous striking period production. Can be made easier to hold.

In this embodiment, when the operation to the operating means is effectively determined during the operation valid period during the continuous striking period effect, the press lottery table 222sb is always referred to to determine whether or not the variable condition is satisfied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a measuring means capable of measuring the number of consecutive deviations in the variable lottery executed by referring to the pressed lottery table 222sb is provided, and the measuring means is provided. When the measurement result by the above reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), the variable lottery may be configured to facilitate winning. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the effect of the continuous striking period effect is reduced without continuously winning the variable lottery.

Further, the winning probability of the variable lottery may be changed based on the number of winnings of the variable lottery within one operation valid period and the length of the remaining period of the operation valid period. For example, the operation valid period may be changed. When the remaining period of the variable lottery is a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) or more and the number of times the variable lottery is won reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times), the probability of winning the variable lottery may be low. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display value from reaching the upper limit value in a state where a large amount of the remaining operation valid period remains. Further, when the remaining period of the operation valid period is less than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) and the number of winnings of the variable lottery is a specific number of times (for example, 0 times), the winning probability of the variable lottery becomes high. It may be configured as follows. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the effect of the continuous striking period effect is reduced without continuously winning the variable lottery.

The upper limit value selection table 222sc is a data table that is referred to when setting the upper limit of the display value that can be displayed during the continuous hitting period effect, and is the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery and the acquired upper limit value effect counter 223sc. The upper limit is set in the range of "2" to "5" in correspondence with the value of.

This upper limit value is a display value displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the continuous striking period effect, specifically, the upper limit of the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG and the display mode of the character 801 (see FIG. 560). Is shown. Then, in the case where the big hit is won in the corresponding special symbol lottery, a large value (for example, "5") is more likely to be selected as the upper limit value than in the case where the big hit is not won. With this configuration, the more the display value is changed to a larger value during the continuous hitting period production, the higher the expectation that the corresponding special symbol lottery will be a big hit can be raised. It is possible to enthusiastically play the game so that the displayed value rises.

Here, with reference to FIG. 569 (a), the contents specified in the upper limit value selection table 222sc will be described. FIG. 569 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the upper limit value selection table 222sc. As shown in FIG. 569 (a), in the upper limit value selection table 222sc, the upper limit values "2" to "5" are acquired as the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the current fluctuation pattern (hit / fail judgment result). It is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223sc for the upper limit value.

Specifically, when the result of the special symbol lottery (win / fail judgment result) is a big hit, the value of the upper limit value effect counter 223sc is in the range of "0 to 39", and the upper limit value "5" is "40 to". "4" is defined in the range of "89", and the upper limit value "3" is defined in the range of "90 to 98". If the result of the special symbol lottery (win / fail judgment result) is out of order, the value of the upper limit value effect counter 223sc is in the range of "0-9" and the upper limit value "5" is "10-69". "4" is specified in the range, the upper limit value "3" is specified in the range of "70 to 89", and "2" is specified in the range of "90 to 98".

That is, when the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery (win / fail judgment result) is a big hit, the upper limit value "5" is set in about 40% of the hits, but when the win / fail judgment result is out of order. In, the upper limit value "5" is set only in about 10% of the cases. Therefore, when the display value rises (variable) to "5" during the continuous striking period production, the expectation that the corresponding special symbol lottery is a big hit can be increased, so that the display value is displayed to the player. Can be enthusiastically played so that

Further, as described above, in the 25th embodiment, the degree of increase in the display value during the continuous striking period effect is regulated not only by the set upper limit value but also by the internal value that changes according to the internal migration data. is doing. Therefore, even during the continuous striking period production in which the upper limit value "5" is set, the display value does not change to "5" until the internal value reaches "5". Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the game while expecting the display value to rise to "5" during the entire period of the continuous striking period production.

The difference upper limit value selection table 222sd is a data table that is referred to when a specified value (difference upper limit value) for the difference between the internal value and the display value is selected. This difference upper limit value is used when determining whether or not to display the pressing promotion mode (see FIG. 561 (b)) and when determining the amount of increase (variable amount) when the display value is increased (variable). Used for.

Here, with reference to FIG. 569 (b), the contents specified in the difference upper limit value selection table 222sd will be described. FIG. 569 (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the difference upper limit value selection table 222sd. In this difference upper limit value selection table 222sd, the difference upper limit values "2" to "4" are the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the current fluctuation pattern (win / fail judgment result) and the acquired difference value effect counter 223sd. It is specified in association with the value.

Specifically, when the result of the special symbol lottery (win / fail judgment result) is a big hit, the difference upper limit value "4" is set to "5" in the range where the value of the difference value effect counter 223sd is "0 to 4". The difference upper limit value "3" is defined in the range of "to 64", and the difference upper limit value "2" is defined in the range of "65 to 98". If the result of the special symbol lottery (win / fail judgment result) is out of the range, the value of the difference value effect counter 223sd is in the range of "0 to 59", and the difference upper limit value "3" is "60 to 98". "2" is specified in the range of.

That is, only when the result of the special symbol lottery (win / fail judgment result) is a big hit, "4" can be selected as the difference upper limit value, and the difference upper limit value "3" has the same ratio regardless of the win / fail judgment result. It is configured to be selected at (about 60%), and the difference upper limit value "2" is configured so that it is more difficult to be selected when the hit / fail determination result is a big hit than when it is out of order.

With this configuration, for example, when the display value is variably displayed during the continuous striking period production, the display value increases by 4 steps (for example, the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG increases from "0" to "4". ), The effect is equivalent to notifying that the jackpot has been won in the corresponding special symbol lottery. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the value of the display value displayed during the continuous striking period effect but also in the degree of variability of the display value, so that the effect of the continuous striking period effect can be further enhanced. Can be enhanced.

In the 25th embodiment, the value used for determining whether or not to display the pressing promotion mode (difference value between the internal value and the display value) and the display value are changed by one variable display. The variable amount (range) that can be used is the difference upper limit value selected in the difference upper limit value selection table 222sd, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to refer to different values. In this case, the display value is changed by a selection table in which the value (difference value between the internal value and the display value) used for determining whether or not to display the pressing promotion mode can be selected, and one variable display. It may be configured to provide a selection table in which a variable amount (range) that can be selected can be selected.

Further, in the present embodiment, the difference upper limit value determined with reference to the difference upper limit value selection table 222sd is configured to be used for the entire period of the continuous striking period effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the continuous striking period effect is not limited to this. The difference upper limit value may be changed according to the degree of progress, for example, the passage of time of the continuous striking period effect, the display content of the displayed value, and the transition state of the internal value.

Next, with reference to FIG. 570, the contents specified in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 25th embodiment will be described. FIG. 570 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the 25th embodiment. The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 25th embodiment has a scenario effect counter 223sa with respect to the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 23rd embodiment described above (see FIG. 495 (b)). , Lottery effect counter 223sb, upper limit value effect counter 223sc, difference value effect counter 223sd, upper limit value storage area 223e, difference upper limit value storage area 223sf, upper limit value storage area 223se, and difference upper limit value storage. The difference is that the area 223sf, the internal migration data storage area 223sg, the display value storage area area 223sh, and the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si are added, and the other points are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The scenario effect counter 223sa, the lottery effect counter 223sb, the upper limit value effect counter 223sc, and the difference value effect counter 223sd are counters for updating the random number value referred to when selecting the corresponding effect effect mode. Therefore, it is composed of a loop counter whose value is updated in the range of "0 to 99". The values of the various counters are updated in the counter update process (see Z3113 in FIG. 518) executed in the main process (see FIG. 518) of the voice lamp control device 113. Further, it is configured to be updated even if the remaining period generated when the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed is used. In the 25th embodiment, a process of selecting various production modes is performed by the time the main process (see FIG. 518) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed a plurality of times (until the counter update process is repeatedly executed). It is configured to run. That is, if there is only one counter for updating the random value referred to when selecting the effect mode, the same random value will be used when selecting various effect modes. , There is a problem that the combination of the selected production modes becomes monotonous. Further, in order to solve the problem, when a configuration is used in which the process of selecting the effect mode is executed only once each time the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, a plurality of effect modes are used. It takes a long time to select, and there is a new problem that smooth production cannot be performed.

On the other hand, in the 25th embodiment, when the effect mode is selected according to the number of effect mode selection processes that can be executed when the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed once. A counter that can update the referenced random number value is provided. As a result, different random number values can be used in the selection process of the effect mode that can be executed when the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed once, so that the combination of the selected effect modes can be varied. It can be held and the effect of production can be enhanced. Further, since a plurality of effect modes can be selected in one main process of the voice lamp control device 113, the effect can be smoothly executed (set).

The upper limit value storage area 223se is a storage area for temporarily storing the upper limit value of the display value that can be displayed during the continuous striking period effect, and the upper limit value selected by referring to the upper limit value selection table 222sc is stored. Will be done. Then, the internal migration data is created using the stored upper limit value. Further, when it is determined that the displayed value and the internal value at that time are the same when the variable condition of the displayed value is satisfied, it is based on the difference between the stored upper limit value and the internal value at that time. It is referred to when selecting the mode. After that, the stored value is cleared at the end timing of the continuous striking effect.

The difference upper limit storage area 223sf is a storage area for temporarily storing the difference upper limit value, which is a specified value for the difference between the internal value and the display value, and refers to the difference upper limit value selection table 222sd described above. The selected difference upper limit is temporarily stored. Then, when the variable condition of the display value is satisfied and the display value is variable (increased), the difference upper limit value stored for determining the variable amount of the display value is read out. Further, when determining whether or not to display the display mode of the pressing promotion mode, the difference upper limit value is read out as a determination criterion. After that, the stored value is cleared at the end timing of the continuous striking effect.

The internal migration data storage area 223sg is a storage area for temporarily storing the internal migration data in order to show the migration content of the internal value during the continuous striking period effect, and is a process for selecting the effect mode of the variable effect. , The created internal migration data is stored. Then, it is read at the start timing (setting timing of the operation valid period), and the internal value is migrated (updated) with the contents shown in the internal migration data. After that, the stored data is cleared at the end timing of the continuous striking effect.

The display value storage area 223sh is a storage area for temporarily storing the display value during the continuous striking period effect, that is, the value corresponding to the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. It is a storage area for storing the value already notified to the player. Then, it is read out when the variable condition of the display value is satisfied, and the display mode according to the internal value or the difference value from the upper limit value is determined. After that, the stored value is cleared at the end timing of the continuous striking effect.

The continuous striking effect setting flag 223si is a flag for managing the execution status of the continuous striking effect, and is configured to be able to determine the execution status of the continuous striking effect based on the setting status of the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si.

Here, the contents of the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si will be described with reference to FIG. 571. FIG. 571 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si. As shown in FIG. 571, the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si has a configuration in which six types of states of 00H to 05H can be set. As described above with reference to FIG. 563, in the 25th embodiment, it is determined that the continuous striking effect is executed as the variable effect as the execution status of the continuous striking effect, and "before the start" where the continuous striking effect is not executed. That is, the situation in which the variation effect in which the continuous hitting effect is executed is set in the effect mode selection process 25 (see Z4353 in FIG. 578) executed at the start timing of the special symbol variation, and the standby of the continuous hitting effects. The internal values are "Waiting", which is the situation where the effect is being executed, "Running", which is the situation where the continuous striking period effect is being executed, and "Result", which is the situation where the result effect is being executed. , "Special", which is a situation larger than the sum of the difference upper limit value and the display value, and "-", which is a situation where it is not certain that the repeated hitting effect will be executed, can be distinguished. There is.

As shown in FIG. 571, the value "00H" of the continuous hitting effect setting flag 223si high corresponds to the situation of "-", and "01H" corresponds to the situation of "before the start", and "02H". "Responds to the" waiting "situation," 03H "corresponds to the" running "situation," 04H "corresponds to the" result "situation, and" 05H ". "Corresponds to the" special "situation. By configuring the situation related to the continuous striking effect to be discriminable in this way, it is possible to easily change the effect mode (display mode) in each situation at various timings according to the effect result and the game result in other situations. can.

<Regarding the control content of the voice lamp control device in the 25th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 572 to 579, the content of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 25th embodiment will be described. The control processing content executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 25th embodiment is an effect update process with respect to the control processing content executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 24th embodiment described above. Instead of 24 (see Z3181 in FIG. 550), the effect update process 25 (Z3191 in FIG. 572) is replaced with the press detection process (Z3112 in FIG. 524), and the press detection process 25 (Z3192 in FIG. 576) is used. The difference is that the effect mode selection process 25 (Z4353 in FIG. 578) is executed instead of the selection process (Z4313 in FIG. 536), and the other processes are the same. The detailed description of the same content will be omitted. For the control processing content executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 24th embodiment described above, refer to the control processing content executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 23rd embodiment described above. Therefore, when explaining the content of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 25th embodiment, it is appropriately executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 23rd embodiment described above. The control processing content to be performed is used.

First, the contents of the staging update process 25 (Z3191) will be described with reference to FIG. 572. FIG. 572 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect update process 25 (Z3191). The effect update process 25 (Z3191) is configured to execute a process (Z3271) for updating various timers with respect to the passage of time of the effect for the effect update process 24 (see Z3181 in FIG. 550) described above. The difference is that the point and the process of the continuous striking effect process (Z3272) are added, and the other points are the same. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the continuous striking effect processing (Z3272) will be described with reference to FIG. 573. FIG. 573 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous striking effect processing (Z3272). In this continuous striking effect processing (Z3272), various controls in the continuous striking effect are executed.

When the continuous striking effect processing (Z3272) is executed, it is first determined whether the setting status of the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si is "00H", that is, whether or not any setting related to the continuous striking effect is made (Z6501). If it is determined to be "00H" in the processing of Z6501 (Z6501), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not "00H", that is, some information about the continuous striking effect is set (Z6501: No), then whether the setting status of the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si is "01H". That is, when it is determined whether the variable effect in which the continuous stroke effect is set is being executed and the start timing of the continuous stroke effect has not yet arrived (Z6502), and it is determined to be "01H". (Z6502: Yes) Next, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the continuous striking effect (Z6503).

In the Z6503 process, among the various timers updated in the effect update process 25 (see Z3191 in FIG. 572), the elapsed time of the variable effect starts the continuous hitting effect based on the value of the timer that updates the elapsed time of the variable effect. It is determined whether it is the timing. When it is determined that it is the start timing in the processing of Z6503 (Z6503: Yes), the setting status of the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si is set to "02H", that is, the setting status indicating the waiting period of the continuous striking effect (Z6504). The start of the continuous striking effect is set (Z6505), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z6503, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the continuous striking effect (Z6503: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

In the processing of Z6502, if it is determined that the setting status of the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si is not "01H" (Z6502: No), then it is determined whether the setting status of the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si is "02H". (Z6506), if it is determined to be "02H" (Z6506: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the continuous striking period (Z6507), and if it is determined to be the start timing of the continuous striking period (Z6507). : Yes), the timer value corresponding to the operation valid period is set to the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223qv (Z6508), and the setting status of the continuous hit effect setting flag 223si is set to "03H", that is, the continuous hit period (execution period). It is set to the setting status indicating that (Z6509), the internal migration data stored in the internal value migration data storage area 223sg is read (Z6510), and the internal value is migrated based on the read data (internal value migration data). Is started (Z6511).

Further, in the processing of Z6506, if it is determined that the setting status of the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si is not "02H" (Z6506: No), then the second continuous striking effect processing is executed (Z6512), and then this End the process.

Next, the contents of the second continuous striking effect processing (Z6512) will be described with reference to FIG. 574. FIG. 574 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second continuous striking effect process (Z6512). In this second continuous striking effect processing (Z6512), various processes are executed when the setting status of the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si is "03H".

When the second continuous striking effect processing (Z6512) is executed, first, it is determined whether the setting status of the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si is "03H" (Z6531), and if it is determined to be "03H" (Z6531). : Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223qv is 0 (Z6532).

In the processing of Z6532, when the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223qv is not 0, that is, when it is determined that the operation valid period is still in progress (Z6532: No), the data in the internal migration data storage area 223 sg and the continuous hit valid period The current internal value (A) is calculated (Z6533) based on the value of the timer 223qv, the display value (B) stored in the display value storage area 233sh is read out (Z6534), and the difference upper limit value storage area 223sf is read. Read the difference upper limit value (C) stored in (Z6535).

Then, it is determined whether the internal value (A) is larger than the total value of the display value (B) and the difference upper limit value (C) (Z6536), and if it is determined to be larger (Z6536: Yes), the button is pressed. (Z6537), set "05H" in the setting status of the continuous hitting effect setting flag 223si, and end this process.

Here, the display command set by the processing of Z6537 executes an effect of urging the player to press the PUSH button 10317 as shown in FIG. 561 (b).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223qv is 0 in the processing of Z6532 (Z6532: Yes), the setting status of the continuous hit effect setting flag 223si is set to "04H" (Z6539), and the display value is set. The display value stored in the storage area 223sh is read (Z6540), a display command for indicating the effect mode of the result effect corresponding to the read display value is set (Z6541), and this process is terminated.

Further, in the processing of Z6531, if it is determined that the setting status of the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si is not "03H" (Z6531: No), then the third continuous striking effect processing is executed (Z6542), and this processing is performed. finish.

Here, the contents of the third continuous striking effect processing (Z6542) will be described with reference to FIG. 575. FIG. 575 is a flowchart showing the contents of the third continuous striking effect process (Z6542). In this third continuous striking effect (Z6542), the setting status of the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si is "04H", that is, various processes for ending the continuous striking effect are executed.

When the third continuous striking effect processing (Z6542) is executed, first, it is determined whether the setting status of the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si is "05H", that is, whether it is a special situation (Z6571), and it is determined to be "05H". If so (Z6571: Yes), then it is determined whether the current internal value (A) is larger than the total value of the display value (B) and the difference upper limit value (C) (Z6572).

In the processing of Z6572, when it is determined that the internal value (A) is larger (Z6572: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223qv is 0 (Z6573), and when it is determined to be 0. (Z6573: Yes), "04H" is set in the setting status of the continuous hitting effect setting flag 223si (Z6574), the display value stored in the display value storage area 233sh is read (Z6575), and the read display value is read. 1 A display command for indicating the effect mode of the result effect for the subtracted value is set (Z6576), and this process is terminated.

That is, when the setting status of the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si is set to "05H", that is, the player does not enthusiastically operate the PUSH button 10317 during the continuous striking period, and the internal value value and the display value value. When there is a large deviation from the above, as a penalty, an effect mode corresponding to a display value smaller than the display value actually displayed is set as the effect mode of the result effect. With this configuration, the player can enthusiastically operate the operating means. In addition, for players who are not interested in the continuous hitting effect (players who operate the operating means lightly during the continuous hitting period), it is difficult to predict the degree of expectation of the jackpot winning depending on the content of the result effect of the repeated hitting effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being notified of unnecessary information and reducing the motivation to play.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, as a method of discriminating a player who is not enthusiastically participating in the continuous striking effect, the setting status of the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si is used to determine the value of the part value and the display value. A method of determining the degree of deviation from the value is used, but the method is not limited to this, and for example, within the operation valid period, based on the length of the period during which the player does not operate the operation means, the continuous striking effect is performed. A method of discriminating a player who is not enthusiastically participating may be used.

On the other hand, in the process of Z6572, when it is determined that the internal value (A) is not larger (Z6572: No), the setting status of the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si is set from "05H" indicating a special situation to "05H" indicating that it is being executed. It is changed to "03H" (Z6577), and this process is terminated. With this configuration, the internal value and the displayed value deviate from each other, and even a player who is in a special situation can be normal by actively operating the operating means thereafter. You can return to the situation. Therefore, the player who did not notice that the continuous hitting effect is being executed, or the internal based on the scenario tendency (for example, scenario types "2" and "3") in which the internal value greatly increases in a short period of time as internal migration data. When the migration data is created, it is appropriate for the player who has been continuously out of the variable lottery and has set a special situation even though he is enthusiastically operating the operation means. It is possible to provide a continuous hitting effect.

Further, in the processing of Z6571 when it is determined that the setting status of the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si is not "05H" (Z6571: No), then the setting status of the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si is "04H", that is, It is determined whether the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223qv is 0 (whether the operation valid period has ended) (Z6578), and if it is determined to be "04H" (Z6578: Yes), at the end timing of the continuous hit effect. It is determined whether or not there is (Z6579).

In the processing of Z6579, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the continuous striking effect, that is, the end timing of the result effect (Z6579: Yes), the setting status of the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si is set to "00H" (Z6580). The values stored in the upper limit value storage area 223se, the difference upper limit value storage area 223sf, the internal migration data storage area 223sg, and the display value storage area 233sh are cleared (Z6581), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z6578 that the setting status of the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si is not "04H" (Z6578: No), or when it is determined in the processing of Z6579 that it is not the end timing of the continuous striking effect (Z6579). Z6579: No) ends this process as it is.

Next, the contents of the press detection process 25 (Z3192) will be described with reference to FIG. 576. FIG. 576 is a flowchart showing the contents of the press detection process 25 (Z3192). This press detection process 25 (Z3192) is executed when it is determined that the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223qv is larger than 0 (Z3604: Yes) with respect to the above-mentioned press detection process (see Z3112 in FIG. 524). The process to be performed is different in that the continuous striking operation detection process (Z3605) is changed to the continuous striking operation detection process 25 (Z3651), and the other processes are the same. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the continuous striking operation detection process 25 (Z3651) will be described with reference to FIG. 577. FIG. 577 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous striking operation detection process 25 (Z3651). In this continuous striking operation detection process 25 (Z3651), various effects are executed based on the operation of the operating means (PUSH button 10317) during the continuous striking period (during measurement of the continuous striking valid period timer 223qv).

When the continuous hitting operation detection process 25 (Z3651) is executed, first, the pressing lottery is executed (Z6601) with reference to the pressing lottery table 222sb, and a notification command for indicating the button pressing is set (Z6602). That is, the notification command is set regardless of the result of the push lottery. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that it is properly determined that the PUSH button 10317 has been pressed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the push lottery has been won (Z6603), and if not (Z6603: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the user has won (Z6603: Yes), then the current internal value is extracted (Z6604) based on the data stored in the internal migration data storage area 223sg, and the display value is stored. The display value stored in the area 233sh is read out (Z6605), and it is determined whether the internal value and the display value are the same (Z6606).

When it is determined that they are not the same in the processing of Z6606 (Z6606: No), the difference upper limit value stored in the difference upper limit value storage area 223sf is read (Z6607), and the difference between the internal value and the display value is the difference upper limit. It is determined whether the value is larger than the value (Z6608), if it is determined not to be larger (Z6608: No), the difference value is added to the display value (Z6609), and the display value after the addition is displayed. A command is set (Z6610), a value indicating the added display value is set in the display value storage area 223sh (Z6611), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z6608, when it is determined that the difference between the internal value and the display value is larger than the difference upper limit value (Z6608: Yes), the value of the difference upper limit value is added to the display value (Z6612), and then. It shifts to the above-mentioned Z6610.

When it is determined that the internal value and the display value are the same in the processing of Z6606 (Z6606: Yes), the upper limit value stored in the upper limit value storage area 223se is read, and the display value and the upper limit value are the same. If it is determined whether it exists (Z6614) and if it is determined that they are not the same (Z6614: No), the display value cannot be updated at present, but the display value is changed by updating the internal value. Since it is possible to do so, a suggestion command for suggesting that the displayed value increases by continuous continuous hitting is set (Z6615), and this process is terminated.

Further, in the processing of Z6614, when it is determined that the displayed value and the upper limit value are the same (Z6614), a suggestion command for suggesting that it is difficult to further increase the displayed value is set (Z6614). Z6616), this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the staging mode selection process 25 (Z4353) will be described with reference to FIG. 578. FIG. 578 is a flowchart showing the contents of the staging mode selection process 25 (Z4353). When the effect mode selection process 25 (Z4353) determines that the variation pattern command including the additional time command has not been received for the effect mode selection process (see Z4313 in FIG. 536) described above (Z4551: No). In addition, the basic effect mode selection process 25 (Z4581) is configured to be executed, and the other points are the same. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the basic effect mode selection process 25 (Z4581) will be described with reference to FIG. 579. FIG. 579 is a flowchart showing the contents of the basic effect mode selection process 25 (Z4581). In the basic effect mode selection process 25 (Z4581), the initial setting process for the continuous striking effect when the variation pattern (variation effect pattern) including the continuous striking effect is extracted is executed.

When the basic effect mode selection process 25 (Z4581) is executed, first, it is determined whether the extracted variation pattern includes the continuous striking effect (Z6701), and if it is determined to be included (Z6701: Yes). , The internal scenario table 222sa is referred to to determine the internal scenario (Z6702). Then, the operation valid period set for this continuous hitting effect is extracted from the fluctuation pattern (Z6703), and the internal migration data is created and created based on the determined internal scenario and the extracted operation valid period (Z6704). The migrated data (internal migration data) is stored in the internal migration data storage area 223sg (Z6705).

After that, the upper limit value is determined with reference to the upper limit value selection table 222sc (S6706), the determined upper limit value is stored in the upper limit value storage area 223se (Z6707), and then the difference is made with reference to the difference upper limit value selection table 222sd. The upper limit value is determined (Z6708), the determined difference upper limit value is stored in the difference upper limit value storage area 223sf (Z6709), the setting status of the continuous hitting effect setting flag 223si is set to "01H", and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z6701 that there is no continuous striking effect (Z6701: No), the effect mode corresponding to the extracted variation pattern is determined (Z6711), and this process is terminated.

<About the 26th embodiment>
Next, the 26th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 580 to 594. In the 25th embodiment described above, internal migration data for migrating internal values according to the passage of time is created for one operation valid period, and the player operates the operation means during the operation valid period. By configuring the display value to be updated based on the content, the internal value indicated by the internal migration data, and the display value that has already been displayed, the effect of the operation effect for which the operation validity period is set is improved. It was something that could be made to do.

On the other hand, in the 26th embodiment, the internal value can be transferred over the operation validity period set a plurality of times. Specifically, as the jackpot middle effect executed during the jackpot game, it is possible to execute the jackpot middle effect in which the operation valid period is set multiple times, and the multiple operation valid set in one jackpot medium effect. The internal values are configured to be migrated (updated) so as to span the period.

With this configuration, when a plurality of operation valid periods are set within one effect period, the degree of variability of the effect mode (display value) within each operation valid period executed within one effect can be determined. Since it is possible to set according to the entire effect of 1, the operation effect can be executed a plurality of times without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

In addition, when the operation valid period is set multiple times within one effect period, the display value reaches the upper limit value during the operation valid period set earlier, and then the effect is meaningful. It is possible to prevent the effect of the effect from being lowered due to the setting of a valid operation period. Furthermore, since it is configured to create one internal migration data for the entire period of the plurality of operation validity periods, the effect mode (display value) does not increase during the operation validity period set earlier. Even so, while expecting that the internal migration data based on "Scenario 2", which is the latter half of the scenario type, is set, the operation means (PUSH button 10317) is enthusiastically operated during the remaining operation validity period. Can be made to.

Details will be described later, but in the 26th embodiment, in order to migrate (update) the internal value so as to span a plurality of operation valid periods, the transition period for migrating (updating) the internal value is a dedicated measuring means ( It differs from the 25th embodiment described above in that it is configured to be measured by the transition timer 223ta). That is, in the 25th embodiment described above, the internal value is migrated (updated) by using the measuring means (continuous hitting valid period timer 223qv) for measuring the passage of time of the set operation valid period. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated measuring means to transfer (update) the internal value, the manufacturing cost can be suppressed, and the control process related to the operation effect can be simplified. Since the period during which the internal value is transferred (updated) and the operation valid period are the same period, variations of the operation effect (particularly, a variable pattern of the effect mode executed based on the operation of the operation means) There was the problem of becoming scarce.

On the other hand, in the 26th embodiment, as described above, the transition period for migrating (updating) the internal value is configured to be measured by the dedicated measuring means (transition timer 223ta), so that the operation valid period It is possible to transfer (update) the internal value in a period different from the period in which is set. As a result, the internal value at the timing when the operation validity period is set can be made different, so that the variable state of the effect mode for the operation by the player to the operation means can be easily made different, and there are abundant variations. It is possible to facilitate the execution of the operation effect.

The pachinko machine 10 in the 26th embodiment has a part of the ROM 222 configuration of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, a part of the RAM 223 configuration, and a part of the RAM 223 configuration with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the 25th embodiment described above. A part of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed, and an effect executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 based on the above-mentioned changes. It differs in that the production mode is changed, and is the same except for that. The detailed description of the same element will be omitted. Further, among the points that need to be changed when the above-mentioned differences are used for the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 25th embodiment, the points that can be easily conceived by those skilled in the art will be omitted in detail. ..

<Regarding the content of the production in the 26th embodiment>
First, with reference to FIGS. 580 and 581, among the various effects performed by the pachinko machine 10 of the 26th embodiment, the effect during the jackpot game, which is a characteristic effect of the 26th embodiment (during the jackpot). I will explain the contents of the production).

FIG. 580 (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode when the first operation valid period is set as a big hit medium effect, and FIG. 580 (b) is a diagram showing the first operation valid period. It is a figure which showed typically an example of the display mode at the end of a period. FIG. 581 (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode suggesting that the second operation valid period is set as the big hit medium effect, and FIG. 581 (b) is a diagram showing schematically an example of the display mode. It is a figure which showed typically an example of the display mode in the case where the 2nd operation valid period is set.

Here, in the present embodiment, a probabilistic jackpot in which a probabilistic state that is advantageous to the player is set after the jackpot game ends, and a time-saving jackpot in which a time-saving state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the probabilistic state after the jackpot game ends are set. And, are configured to be feasible, and whether the winning jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot or a time-saving jackpot can be notified to the player in the stop display mode of the third symbol indicating the jackpot winning. .. Specifically, when the stop display mode (for example, "777") displayed with the same odd number symbol is displayed as the stop display mode of the third symbol indicating the jackpot winning, the winning jackpot is a probable variable jackpot. Notify the player that there is.

With this configuration, before the jackpot game is executed, the player can be made aware that this jackpot is a probable change jackpot, so the jackpot game can be executed while giving the player a sense of security. Can be made to.

On the other hand, if all notifications of whether the winning jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot or a time-saving jackpot are notified before the jackpot game is executed, the player's motivation to play the winning jackpot will decrease. , A part of the probabilistic jackpot, and when the time-saving jackpot is won, the stop display mode (for example, "666") displayed with the same even symbol is displayed as the stop display mode of the third symbol indicating the jackpot winning. By the operation round effect executed during the jackpot game, it is configured to execute the effect (so-called probabilistic promotion effect) that incites whether this jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot or a time-saving jackpot. There is.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to leave the possibility that this jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot until the jackpot game ends, so it is easier to play the game while maintaining the player's willingness to play. Can be done.

In the 26th embodiment, as the big hit middle effect executed during the big hit game, the operation round effect in which the operation valid period is set is executed in the specific round game. Further, the number of operation round effects executed within the effect period of one big hit medium effect is configured to be selected from 1 to 3 times. Further, it is configured to create internal migration data based on the cumulative operation valid period, which is the sum of the production periods of one big hit medium production.

By using these configurations, the ratio of the operation valid period set for one operation round effect to the cumulative operation valid period differs depending on the number of operation round effects executed during the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the effect result of the current big hit medium effect only by the variable state of the display value during the operation round effect of 1.

Further, in the 26th embodiment, the player is not notified (difficult to grasp) the number of operation round effects executed in one big hit medium effect. Therefore, even if the display mode does not change (raise) significantly in the operation round effect of 1, the jackpot game can be performed while expecting that the operation round effect is executed again.

First, when the operation round effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 580 (a), the player is instructed to repeatedly hit the PUSH button 10317 near the center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. An image KG for performing is displayed, and a display area 826b for showing the number of operation round effects executed in the current jackpot middle effect is formed above the image KG, and the first operation round effect is being performed. As a display mode indicating, the characters "First time !!" are displayed in the display area 826b.

Then, in the display area Ds10, "2 rounds" for indicating that the current number of rounds is the second round is displayed, and in the display area Ds3, the third symbol stopped and displayed at the time of winning the jackpot is displayed. "666" for indicating the stop display mode is displayed. That is, the state shown in FIG. 580 (a) is the second round of the jackpot game in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of "666", and the first operation round effect is performed as the probabilistic promotion effect. It is a diagram showing the state of execution.

On the right side of the display screen, a continuous striking gauge RG whose effect mode is changed during the operation round effect and an icon 826a for showing the effect result of the probabilistic promotion effect are displayed. Then, in the display area 803, the characters "accumulate the gauge and explode by repeatedly hitting the button !!" are displayed as a guidance display mode for guiding the effect content of the probabilistic promotion effect. In addition, the characters "right-handed" are displayed as the game guidance display mode 803a for guiding the player to the game method during the big hit game.

That is, in the 26th embodiment, the player repeatedly hits the PUSH button 10317 as a probabilistic promotion effect to increase the gauge number of the continuous hit gauge RG, and the gauge number of the continuous hit gauge RG is the upper limit value. When 5 ”is reached, the icon 826a explodes, and an effect of changing the display mode of the third symbol displayed in the display area Ds3 is executed.

By executing the effect of increasing the gauge number of the continuous striking gauge RG in this way, it is possible to inform the player of the progress of the probabilistic promotion effect in an easy-to-understand manner. It is possible to facilitate the continuous operation of the button 10317.

Here, when the content of the image NG displayed during the operation round effect is specifically described, it is the same as the image NG displayed during the continuous striking period effect in the 25th embodiment described above (see FIG. 560 (b)). In addition, an image imitating the PUSH button 10317, the character "repeated hit" to encourage the repeated hit operation, and a plurality of arrow images are displayed, and in addition, the length of the operation valid period set for this operation round effect. A remaining period gauge is displayed as a remaining period display mode for indicating the above.

Since the state shown in FIG. 580 (a) is immediately after the operation round effect is executed, it is displayed in a mode in which the remaining period gauge is not reduced (indicated in black in the figure), and the operation valid period is displayed. It is displayed in such a manner that the remaining period gradually decreases from the left side with the passage of time. Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, the operation valid period of 10 seconds is set during the operation round effect, and the round game targeted for the operation round effect is executed at the timing. The operation valid period is set, and the operation round effect is configured to end when 10 seconds have elapsed from the execution of the round game. Further, as in each of the above-described embodiments, as the end condition of the round game, the end condition that is satisfied when 30 seconds have passed and the case where 10 game balls win the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 470). It has an end condition that is satisfied, for example, if the end condition of the round game is satisfied before the elapse of 10 seconds (before the end of the operation round effect), that time point. It is configured so that the operation round effect ends with.

In addition, regarding the effect mode for increasing and displaying the gauge number of the continuous striking gauge RG used in the 26th embodiment and the control content, in order to increase and display the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG in the 25th embodiment described above. Since it is the same as the effect mode and the control content of the above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Then, when the first operation round effect is completed, the display mode shown in FIG. 580 (b) is displayed. The display mode shown in FIG. 580 (b) is a display mode at the time when the operation valid period (10 seconds) has elapsed in the first operation round effect, and the image NG shows the remaining time of the operation valid period. The remaining period gauge (displayed in white in the figure) indicating that it is 0 seconds is displayed together with the character "END" indicating that the operation valid period has expired, and the PUSH button 10317 is operated by the player. The image imitating the PUSH button 10317 is erased in order to show that it is in a state where it is not effectively determined even if it is not performed. The character "sorry" indicating that the value (5) was not reached is displayed.

Further, the continuous striking gauge RG displays a display mode (displayed in black in the figure) indicating that the number of gauges has increased to the second stage in the first operation round effect, and the display area 803 shows the present time. In the jackpot middle effect, the characters "Maybe there is a second time !!" are displayed as a suggestion mode for suggesting that the operation round effect is executed again.

The continuous striking gauge RG and the icon 826a are configured to be continuously displayed even after the end of the first operation round effect. When the second operation round effect is executed, the effect result of the first operation round effect, that is, the operation round that inherits the gauge number of the continuous striking gauge RG raised in the first operation round effect. It is configured so that the production is executed. Therefore, for the player who is executing the jackpot game while expecting that the second operation round effect is executed, even during the period when the operation round effect is not executed, the current continuous hit gauge RG The number of gauges can be easily grasped.

In the jackpot medium effect described above with reference to FIG. 580, the first operation round effect is executed in the second round (see FIG. 580 (a)), and the second operation round effect is executed in the fourth round. It is a medium production, and the timing before the start of the 4th round game in which the 2nd operation round production is executed, specifically, the timing when the 3rd round game is started, is the second time soon. Operation A notice display for notifying the player that the round effect is executed is executed.

As shown in FIG. 581 (a), the characters "3 rounds" are displayed in the display area Ds10 as a display mode indicating that the third round of the game is in progress, and as a notice display, "next" near the center of the display screen. The text "The second chance to hit repeatedly in the round will start !!" is displayed. As described above, the continuous striking gauge RG and the icon 826a are continuously displayed even during the period when the operation round effect is not executed, and the effect result of the first operation round effect executed in the second round (FIG. 580 (FIG. 580). b) See) is displayed as it is.

In the 26th embodiment, a notice is displayed that the operation round effect will be executed soon at the timing when the round (3 rounds) immediately before the round (4th round) in which the operation round effect is executed is executed. Is configured to notify the player using, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the notice display may be displayed at the timing when the third round game ends, or the third round may be displayed. It may be configured to display the notice display using the interval period set between the and the fourth round.

If the rounds in which the operation round effect is executed are continuous, the interval period set between the round in which the first operation round effect is executed and the round in which the second operation round effect is executed is executed. Alternatively, the notice display may be displayed during the period during which the first operation round effect is being executed. In this way, by notifying the player that the operation round effect is executed before the operation round effect is actually executed, the operation means during the operation valid period set during the operation round effect. Can be easily operated.

When the jackpot game progresses to the fourth round, the second operation round effect that inherits the effect result of the first operation round effect is executed, and the display mode shown in FIG. 581 (b) is displayed. In FIG. 581 (b), “4 rounds” are displayed in the display area Ds10 to indicate that the present is the 4th round, and the second operation round effect is executed in the display area 826b. The "second time" shown is displayed. Then, during the second operation round effect, the gauge number of the continuous hit gauge RG reaches the upper limit value "5", the icon 826a explodes, and the stop display mode of the third symbol displayed in the display area Ds3 is displayed. However, the display mode switched (promoted) to "777" indicating the probability change jackpot is displayed.

That is, in FIG. 581, an effect of increasing the number of gauges of the continuous striking gauge RG (probability change promotion effect) is executed across the two operation round effects, and as the effect result, the effect result indicating the success of the probability change promotion is displayed. There is. In this way, by configuring the effect of the probabilistic promotion effect to be displayable across a plurality of operation round effects, if the effect result of the one operation round effect is bad (for example, the continuous hit gauge RG). Even if the number of gauges is increased by only one step), it is possible to have expectations for the operation round effect to be executed next.

Further, in the 26th embodiment, the internal transition data for updating (increasing) the internal value capable of increasing the gauge number of the continuous striking gauge RG is set so as to straddle a plurality of operation round effects. In the probabilistic promotion effect performed during the jackpot game in which the jackpot is won, it is possible to intentionally create an effect mode in which the gauge number of the continuous hit gauge RG is unlikely to increase during the first operation round effect. Therefore, even if the effect result of one operation round effect is bad (for example, when the gauge number of the continuous hit gauge RG increases by only one step), the next operation round effect is expected. Can be given.

In addition, since the internal transition data that updates (increases) the internal value that can increase the gauge number of the continuous hit gauge RG is set so as to straddle multiple operation round effects, the time-saving jackpot winning jackpot game In the probabilistic promotion effect performed during the process, it is possible to intentionally create an effect mode in which the number of gauges of the continuous striking gauge RG is likely to increase during the first operation round effect. Therefore, even if the probabilistic promotion effect is not promoted, it is possible to provide a good state (for example, a state in which the number of gauges of the continuous striking gauge RG is increased by 4 steps) as an effect result of one operation round effect. It is possible to play the game while expecting to be promoted probabilistically until the final operation round effect in the jackpot medium effect is completed.

In addition, in the 26th embodiment, even if the number of gauges of the continuous striking gauge RG does not reach the upper limit value (5), the possibility of probable change promotion remains. In this case, the icon 826a does not explode in the probability change promotion effect, the effect of the probability change promotion failure is executed, and the player is notified that the probability change jackpot has occurred during the ending period of the jackpot game or after the jackpot game ends. It is configured in. With this configuration, it is possible to keep expecting a probabilistic jackpot until the game state is actually set after the jackpot game ends, so that the player is prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage. be able to.

In this case, as the timing for notifying whether the jackpot winning type is a probabilistic jackpot or a time-saving jackpot, the notification by the probabilistic promotion effect, that is, the notification at the timing when the jackpot game is executed is the most. It is preferable to configure it so that it is easy to be selected, and then it is easy to be selected in the order of the timing before the start of the big hit game, that is, the timing of notifying in the stop display mode of the third symbol indicating the big hit winning, and the timing near the end of the big hit game. .. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the probability change promotion ratio in the probability change promotion effect executed in order to encourage the player whether or not to promote the probability change over a long period of time, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 582, the flow of the effect executed during the jackpot game in the 26th embodiment will be described. FIG. 582 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the jackpot during the jackpot game executed during the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 582, if a big hit is won as a result of the special figure change (special symbol change), the round game from the first round to the final round is performed as a big hit game after the OP (opening) period. It is configured to be executed, and then, after an ED (ending) period, the jackpot game ends. Then, an interval period of a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) is set between each round game (see FIG. 582 (a)).

During the special symbol change, a variation effect for showing the result of the special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery) is executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Then, during the jackpot game, the jackpot middle production is executed. This jackpot effect is composed of an OP effect executed during the OP period, a round effect executed during the round game, an ED effect executed during the ED period, and an interval effect executed during the interval period (). See FIG. 52 (b)).

In the 26th embodiment, among the above-mentioned jackpot middle effects, in the round effect executed for each round game, a probability change promotion effect for notifying whether or not the current jackpot is a probability change jackpot is performed. It is configured to be feasible, and in the probabilistic promotion effect, it is configured to execute a continuous striking effect across a plurality of round games. Further, it is configured to execute the continuous hitting notice effect for notifying that the continuous hitting effect will be executed before the continuous hitting effect is executed.

Similar to the 25th embodiment described above, the operation valid period is set so as to be set during the continuous striking effect (see FIG. 582 (c)), and all the operation valid set in the jackpot medium effect. Period, in the example of FIG. 582, the degree of movement of the internal value is calculated with respect to the total operation valid period, which is the sum of the operation valid periods set for the two consecutive hitting effects executed in the second round and the fourth round. The internal value migration data shown is created, and the internal value is configured to be variable (increased) based on the created internal value migration data. The method of creating the internal value migration data in the 26th embodiment is the same as the 25th embodiment described above except that the calculation method of the operation validity period is different, so that the details thereof are detailed. The explanation is omitted.

Then, the internal value migration data is not updated from the end of one continuous striking effect (operation valid period) to the start of the next continuous striking effect (operation valid period) (Fig.). 582 (d)). With this configuration, the internal value transition data can be continuously updated even if the continuous hitting effect is executed at intervals in the big hit medium effect.

In the present embodiment, the update period of the internal value migration data is set as the period in which the operation valid period is set, but the period is not limited to this, and for example, the interval period after the end of the round game in which the continuous hitting effect is executed is also included. It may be configured to update the internal value migration data. By configuring the internal value to be updated based on the internal value migration data in a period different from the operation valid period in this way, the display value that is unexpected to the player in the next repeated hitting effect is displayed. It can be facilitated to provide a variable aspect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the internal value is updated (variable) with reference to the internal value migration data based on the passage of time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a continuous striking effect is executed. When the end timing of the round game is early, that is, when the end condition of the round game (winning 10 game balls) is satisfied early, the internal value update condition is satisfied and the internal value is established earlier than the actual time elapsed. It may be configured to advance the value migration data. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the round game in which the continuous hitting effect is executed ends early and the internal value cannot reach the upper limit value during the big hit game.

Furthermore, the cumulative total of the number of game balls (over-winning number) that have won more than the predetermined condition (for example, the number of winnings (10) for satisfying the end condition) during the jackpot game is the specific number (for example, the number of over-winning). When the condition) that is satisfied when 10) is reached, the forced update process for updating the internal value to the upper limit may be executed regardless of the content of the internal value transfer data. As a result, the internal value can be updated according to the game content of the jackpot game during the period when the continuous hitting effect is not executed, so that the player can enthusiastically play the game.

Further, in this case, it is preferable to execute a notification effect for notifying that the above-mentioned predetermined condition is satisfied and a notification effect for notifying the information until the predetermined condition is satisfied. This makes it possible for the player to enthusiastically play the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 583, among the effect contents of the continuous striking effect in the 26th embodiment, the points different from the effect content of the continuous striking effect in the 25th embodiment described above will be described. In the 25th embodiment described above, the created internal migration data is set according to the setting timing of the operation valid period, and the internal value is updated (increased) during the operation valid period based on the set internal migration data. It was configured to do. On the other hand, the 26th embodiment is different in that the timing for setting the created internal migration data is configured to be different from the timing for setting the operation validity period. Specifically, as the timing for setting the internal migration data, it is possible to set the internal migration data at a timing 2 seconds earlier or 10 seconds later than the reference timing with the setting timing of the operation valid period as the reference timing. It is configured so that it can be done.

By making the set timing of the internal migration data different in this way, even if the same internal migration data is created, it is possible to make the update status of the internal value different with respect to the passage of the operation validity period. .. Therefore, even when the same internal migration data is created and the player operates the operation means (PUSH button 10317) with the same operation content during the operation valid period, the degree of variation of the display value may be different. It can be done and the effect of production can be enhanced.

FIG. 583 is a diagram schematically showing an effect pattern during the continuous striking period effect when "scenario 1" is selected as the scenario type indicating the transition tendency of the internal value, and is a diagram of the 25th embodiment described above. It differs from the figure shown in 564 in that the timing at which the internal migration data is set is advanced by 2 seconds, and is the same except for the above. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 583 (c), since the internal migration data is set from 2 seconds before the timing when the operation valid period is set (execution timing of the continuous striking period effect), it is 0 after the operation valid period is set. After 25 seconds, the internal value reaches "1", 2.5 seconds later, "2", 4.75 seconds later, "3", and 7 seconds later, "4". That is, the earlier the set timing of the internal migration data is, the easier it is to update (increase) the internal value earlier within the operation valid period.

In the example shown in FIG. 583, since the set timing of the internal migration data is set to 2 seconds before the timing when the operation valid period is set, the timing when the internal value reaches the upper limit is also shown in FIG. 564. It is configured to be 2 seconds earlier than the 25th embodiment, but is not limited to this, for example, the timing at which the internal value reaches the upper limit value is fixed with respect to the remaining period of the operation valid period, and the timing thereof is fixed. The period between the fixed timing and the set timing of the internal migration data may be calculated as the update period of the internal value, and the internal migration data may be created according to the length of the update period.

Further, as described above, in the 26th embodiment, the timing at which the internal migration data is set can be delayed by 10 seconds from the setting timing of the operation valid period. Here, when the set timing of the internal migration data is delayed by 10 seconds, the operation valid period is 10 seconds, so that the internal value is not updated based on the internal migration data during the operation valid period. ing. Therefore, in this case, even if the operation means is operated during the continuous striking period performance (during the operation valid period), the internal value remains "0", so that the display value is not changed (updated).

In the 26th embodiment, the timing at which the internal migration data is set can be delayed by 10 seconds from the setting timing of the operation valid period only when the corresponding special symbol lottery is a big hit. Further, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, a value of at least "2" or more is selected as the upper limit value in the continuous striking period production.

Therefore, if the PUSH button 10317 is positively operated during the continuous striking period production, the display value can be updated (increased) to at least "2" regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, as described above. In addition, when the timing at which the internal migration data is set is delayed by 10 seconds from the setting timing of the operation valid period, the display value is from "0" no matter how the PUSH button 10317 is operated during the continuous striking period production. It is possible to set a state that is not variable (updated).

With this configuration, the more variable (updated) the display value is, the more advantageous the player is. In the continuous striking period production, the display value is variable (updated) even though the operating means is enthusiastically operated. Even if this is not done, it is possible to obtain an effect that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, with respect to the operation content to the operation means during the operation valid period and the variable state of the display value based on the operation to the operation means. It can make the player interested.

<About the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 26th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 584 to 586, the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the 26th embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 584, the configuration of the ROM 222 included in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the 26th embodiment will be described. FIG. 584 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of ROM 222 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 26th embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 584, the ROM 222 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 26th embodiment has the transition timer start timing selection table 222ta and the ROM 222 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 25th embodiment described above (see FIG. 567). It differs from the production number selection table 222tb in that it is added. Other elements are the same, and the same contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The migration timer start timing selection table 222ta is a data table that is referred to when selecting the timing for setting the internal migration data, and the set timing of the internal migration data is selected when setting the variation pattern (variation effect). The internal migration data is updated and variable based on the selected set timing.

The contents of the transition timer start timing selection table 222ta will be described with reference to FIG. 585. FIG. 585 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the transition timer start timing selection table 222ta. In the transition timer start timing selection table 222ta, the start timing of the transition timer (time measurement by the transition timer is started) in correspondence with the lottery result (win / fail determination result) of the corresponding special symbol and the acquired staging lottery counter 223y. As the timing), "-5 seconds", "origin", and "+10 seconds" are specified, respectively.

Specifically, when the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery (win / fail judgment result) is a big hit (hit), the value of the acquired effect lottery counter 223qy is in the range of "0 to 19", and the start timing is "-5". The "second" is defined as "origin" in the range of "20 to 94" and "+10 seconds" in the range of "95 to 98". On the other hand, when the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery (win / fail judgment result) is out of order, the value of the acquired effect lottery counter 223qy is in the range of "0-9", and the start timing is "-5 seconds" and "10". The "origin" is defined in the range of "~ 98".

In other words, when the result of the target special symbol lottery is "hit", it is easier to select "-5 seconds" as the start timing of the transition timer than when it is "missing", and further, "hit". Only in the case of "", "+ 10b seconds" is easily selected as the start timing of the transition timer. With this configuration, the timing at which the internal migration data is set is predicted based on the transition (variable) status of the display value during the continuous striking period production, and the determination result of the pass / fail determination means is determined based on the prediction result. It can provide fun to make people predict.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 585 (a), a timing different from the origin (timing for setting the operation valid period) can be selected as the set timing of the internal migration data. Specifically, the timing earlier than the origin (-2 seconds) and the timing later than the origin (+10 seconds) can be selected, but other timings may be selectable, for example. , Two or more different timings may be selectably configured as the timing earlier than the origin. Further, in the 26th embodiment, when a timing later than the origin is selected, the start timing is delayed to the extent that the internal value is not updated according to the internal migration data until the operation valid period ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the start timing (for example, +5 seconds) of the transition timer delayed within the range until the end of the operation validity period may be selectably configured.

In addition, in the 26th embodiment, the timing at which the operation valid period is set is set as the origin, and the start timing of the transition timer can be selected differently from the origin, but the operation valid period is set. Regardless of the set timing, for example, the start timing of the transition timer can be selected from a plurality of timings based on the elapsed time from the execution of the variation effect (the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation). Alternatively, a predetermined start condition (for example, a start condition that is satisfied based on an operation by the player on the operating means, or a start condition that is satisfied when a specific effect is executed as a variable effect) is satisfied. It may be configured to set the internal migration data based on the above. With this configuration, the pachinko machine 10 has an effect pattern in which there are a plurality of timings at which the operation valid period is set, and an effect pattern in which a different length can be selected as the length of the operation valid period of 1. Since the relationship between the update status of the internal value by the migration data and the elapsed status of the operation validity period can be further diversified, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The effect number selection table 222tb is a data table that is referred to when selecting the effect number of the operation round effect executed in the jackpot medium effect, and is a target jackpot type (probability variation jackpot, normal (short time) jackpot). ) And the acquired value of the effect counter 223qy, a different number of effects (1 to 3) is selected. The effect number selection table 222tb determines that the opening command has been received in the hit-related command process 26 (see Z3974 in FIG. 591) executed when the hit-related command is received (Z4101: Yes in FIG. 590). ) When it is determined in the hitting effect setting process (see Z4151 in FIG. 592) that the current jackpot symbol (the third symbol displayed as stopped) is not a probabilistic symbol (for example, "777"). (Z6801: No in FIG. 592), which is referred to for determining the number of repeated hits effects, which is an operation round effect (see Z6805 in FIG. 592).

Here, with reference to FIG. 585 (b), the contents specified in the effect number selection table 222tb will be described. FIG. 585 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect number selection table 222tb. As shown in FIG. 585 (b), the effect number selection table 222tb has a different number of effects based on the target jackpot type (probability variation jackpot, normal (short time) jackpot) and the acquired value of the effect counter 223qy. (1 to 3) are stipulated, and it is stipulated that the number of productions selected is more likely to be selected when the target jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot than when it is a normal (short time) jackpot. There is.

Specifically, the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot, and the number of staging "1" is in the range of "0 to 29" and the number of staging is in the range of "30 to 89" when the value of the acquired staging lottery counter 223qy is "0 to 29". In the range of "2" and "90 to 98", the number of productions "3" is defined. On the other hand, the jackpot type is a normal (short time) jackpot, and the number of staging "1" is in the range of "0 to 39" and the number of staging is in the range of "40 to 98" when the value of the acquired staging lottery counter 223qy is "0 to 39". "2" is specified.

That is, it is configured so that the number of effects "3" can be selected only when it is a probability variation jackpot, and the number of effects "2" is also easier to select for the probability variation jackpot than the normal (time saving) jackpot. It stipulates. In the 26th embodiment, one jackpot medium effect, that is, the number of operation round effects executed during one big hit game is determined with reference to the effect number selection table 222tb, and the determined number of times is determined. Throughout the operation round production, it is configured to execute a probabilistic promotion production to fuel whether or not this jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot.

By configuring in this way, the player can predict whether or not this jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot not only by the effect result of the probabilistic promotion effect but also by the number of operation round effects executed during the probabilistic promotion effect. It is possible to make it. Therefore, not only the effect of the probabilistic promotion effect but also the content of the probabilistic promotion effect can be interested in the player, so that the effect of the big hit middle effect can be enhanced.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the operation valid period of the operation round effect executed in the jackpot middle effect of 1 is added up, and 1 internal migration data is created for the total operation valid period. Since it is configured, the value of the internal value that is variable during the first operation round effect executed in the jackpot middle effect based on the probability variation jackpot can be made different according to the number of times the operation round effect is produced. Therefore, in the probabilistic promotion effect in which only one operation round effect is executed, the probable change state is set after the jackpot game ends even though the display value does not reach the upper limit, or multiple operation round effects are executed. Despite the probabilistic promotion effect, the display value reaches the upper limit in the first operation round effect, and the remaining operation round effect becomes meaningless, so the effect is effective. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation of deterioration.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the 26th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 586. FIG. 586 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the 26th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 586, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 26th embodiment is relative to the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 25th embodiment described above (see FIG. 570). , The transition timer 223ta, the effect count counter 223tb, the round effect storage area 223tc, the promoted flag 223td, and the transition timer interruption flag 223te are added, and the other points are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The migration timer 223ta is a timer for measuring the elapsed time since the internal migration data is set, and the current internal value is determined based on the content of the internal migration data and the elapsed time indicated by the migration timer 223ta. Will be done. When the transition timer 223ta is determined in the continuous striking effect process 26 (see Z3282 in FIG. 588) to be the transition start timing of the internal value, that is, the timing to set the internal migration data (Z6521: Yes in FIG. 588). ), When the value of 1 is set (Z6524 in FIG. 588) and it is determined in the effect update process 26 (see Z3198 in FIG. 587) that the value of the transition timer 223ta is 1 or more (Z3275 in FIG. 587:). Yes), the value is updated (Z3277 in FIG. 587). Then, in the continuous hit operation detection process 26 (see Z3761 in FIG. 590), when the push lottery is won (Z6603: Yes in FIG. 590), it is referred to in order to specify the internal value based on the internal migration data. Then, when the big hit middle effect ends (when the big hit game ends), the value of the transition timer 223ta is cleared to 0.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the internal value is updated based on the internal migration data over a plurality of operation valid periods, and after the operation valid period of 1 is completed, the next The value of the migration timer 223ta is not updated until the operation validity period is set. Therefore, when the continuous hitting effect (operation round effect) for which the operation valid period is set ends, the measurement of the elapsed time by the transition timer 223ta is interrupted, and the next continuous hitting effect (operation round effect) is started. The transition timer 223ta, which has been interrupted, restarts the measurement of the elapsed time. With this configuration, the internal value is updated by the internal migration data so as to span multiple operation valid periods, regardless of the length of the non-operation valid period provided between the multiple operation valid periods. can do.

The effect count counter 223tb is a counter for measuring the number of continuous hitting effects (operation round effects) executed in the jackpot medium effect, and the value corresponding to the number of effects selected in the effect number selection table 222tb is It is set and subtracted each time the continuous hitting effect (operation round effect) is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to set the number of consecutive hits (operation round effect) executed in the big hit medium effect and the effect mode corresponding to the remaining number of times, providing an easy-to-understand effect to the player. can do.

The round effect storage area 223tc is a storage area for temporarily storing the type of round effect executed for each round game in the jackpot game, and when the jackpot game is started (after the jackpot is won). The content of the round effect executed in each round game set in any period of the period until the first round game is executed is temporarily stored. Then, each time a new round game is started, the content of the stored round effect is read out, and the round effect based on the content is executed.

In the 26th embodiment, three types of round effects, a normal round effect, an operation round effect, and a notice round effect, are determined for each round game.

The promoted flag 223td is a flag for indicating that the probabilistic promotion is successful as a result of the probabilistic promotion effect executed during the jackpot game, and is set to on when the probabilistic promotion is successful and does not succeed. If so, it will be set to off. Then, when the setting status is determined (Z6901 in FIG. 593) by the round effect setting process (see Z4152 in FIG. 593) executed at the start timing of the new round game, and it is determined to be ON (FIG. 593). Z6901: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the display mode (see FIG. 581 (b)) indicating the success of the probabilistic promotion is already displayed as the effect of the probabilistic promotion effect, the probabilistic promotion is congratulated. When the round effect of the display mode is executed and it is determined to be off (Z6901: No in FIG. 593), that is, the display mode indicating the success of the probabilistic promotion is not displayed as the effect result of the probabilistic promotion effect. If it is determined, it is configured to execute a round effect corresponding to each round game, which is predetermined.

The promoted flag 223td is also referred to when setting the effect mode in the ending period of the jackpot game, and is executed when a command indicating the ending period of the jackpot game is received (FIG. 594). When it is determined in (see Z4153) that the promoted flag 223td is set to ON (Z4153: Yes in FIG. 594), there is an effect mode for indicating that the probability change state is set after the jackpot game is completed. If it is set (see Z7002 in FIG. 594) and it is determined that the promoted flag 223td is set to off (Z4153: No in FIG. 594), if the jackpot type this time is a probabilistic jackpot (FIG. 594). 594 Z7004: Yes), during the ending period, a staging mode indicating probabilistic promotion is set (Z7005 in FIG. 594), and when it is not a probabilistic jackpot, that is, it is a normal (time saving) jackpot (Z7004 in FIG. 594). : No), an effect mode for indicating that the non-probability change state (time saving state) is set is set (see Z7006 in FIG. 594).

In the 26th embodiment, even if the probability change jackpot is achieved depending on the degree of operation of the player to the PUSH button 10317 (operation means) during the probability change promotion effect or the degree of transfer of the internal migration data. During the probabilistic promotion effect (during the operation round effect), the display mode indicating the probabilistic promotion may not be displayed. Therefore, by making it possible to determine whether or not the display mode indicating the probabilistic promotion is displayed based on the setting status of the promoted flag 223td, it is possible to set a round effect corresponding to the effect content of the probabilistic promotion effect. It is possible to perform a big hit medium production without giving a sense of discomfort to the person.

The transition timer interruption flag 223te is a flag for interrupting the measurement of the passage of time by the transition timer 223ta, and is set to ON when interrupting the measurement of the passage of time by the transition timer 223ta. This transition timer interruption flag 223te is set to on when the continuous striking effect (operation round effect) for which the operation valid period is set ends, and is set to off when the next continuous striking effect (operation round effect) is started. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to measure the passage of time by the transition timer 223ta so as to straddle the plurality of operation valid periods.

<Regarding the control content of the voice lamp control device in the 26th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 587 to 594, the content of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 26th embodiment will be described. The control processing content executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 26th embodiment is an effect update process with respect to the control processing content executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 25th embodiment described above. Instead of 25 (see Z3191 in FIG. 572), the effect update process 26 (see Z3198 in FIG. 587) is replaced with the continuous striking effect process (see Z3272 in FIG. 573), and the continuous striking effect process 26 (see Z3282 in FIG. 588). Is replaced with the third continuous striking effect processing (see Z6542 in FIG. 575), and the third continuous striking effect processing 26 (see Z5692 in FIG. 589) is replaced with the continuous striking operation detection process 25 (see Z3651 in FIG. 577). The detection process 26 (see Z3761 in FIG. 590) is different in that the hit-related command process 26 (see Z3974 in FIG. 591) is executed instead of the hit-related command process, and is otherwise the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the staging update process 26 (Z3198) will be described with reference to FIG. 587. FIG. 587 is a flowchart showing the contents of the staging update process 26 (Z3198). The effect update process 26 (Z3198) differs from the above-mentioned effect update process 25 (see Z3191 in FIG. 572) in that a process is added when the value of the fluctuation time timer is 0, and other than that, the effect update process 26 (Z3198) is different. It is the same.

When the effect update process 26 (Z3198) is executed, it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time timer is larger than 0 (Z3201), and if it is determined to be large (Z3201: Yes), the effect update process 25 (Z3201: Yes) described above is performed. The same processing of Z3271 to Z3262 as in (see Z3191 of FIG. 572) is executed, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z3201, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time timer is 0 (Z3201: No), it is determined whether the current is a big hit (during a big hit game) (Z3274), and a big hit (Z3274). If it is determined that the game is a big hit (Z3274: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the transition timer 223ta is 1 or more (Z3275).

In the processing of Z3275, if it is determined that it is 1 or more (Z3275: Yes), it is determined whether the transition timer interruption flag 223te is set to ON (Z3276), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON, it is determined. (Z3276: No), the value of the transition timer 223ta is updated (Z3277), and this process is terminated. Further, in the processing of Z3274, when it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (Z3274: No) and when it is determined that the value of the transition timer 223ta is not 1 or more (Z3275: No), the transition timer interruption flag 223te is set to ON. If it is (Z3276: Yes), this process is terminated without executing the process of Z3277. As a result, the value of the migration timer 223ta for updating the internal migration data can be appropriately updated.

Next, the contents of the continuous striking effect processing 28 (Z3282) will be described with reference to FIG. 588. FIG. 588 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous striking effect processing 28 (Z3282). The continuous striking effect processing 28 (Z3282) differs from the above-mentioned continuous striking effect process (see Z3272 in FIG. 573) in that a process for setting the transition timer 223ta and the transition timer interruption flag 223te is added. , Other than that, it is the same.

When the continuous hitting effect process 28 (Z3282) is executed, first, it is determined whether it is the migration start timing of the internal value (Z6521), and if it is determined that it is the migration start timing (Z6521: Yes), then. The data (internal migration data) stored in the internal migration data storage area 223sg is read (Z6522), the migration of the internal value based on the read data (internal migration data) is started (Z6523), and the value of the migration timer 223ta is set. 1 is set (Z6524), and then the same processing of Z6501 to 6509 and Z6512 as the above-mentioned continuous hitting effect processing (see Z3272 in FIG. 573) is executed.

Then, when the processing of Z6509 is completed, it is next determined whether the transition timer interruption flag 223te is set to ON (Z6525), and if it is determined to be set to ON (Z6525: Yes), the transition timer is determined. The interruption flag 223te is set to off (Z6526), and this process ends. If it is determined that the Z6525 process is not set to ON (Z6525: No), the Z6526 process is skipped and the present process ends.

Next, the contents of the third continuous striking effect processing 26 (Z5692) will be described with reference to FIG. 589. FIG. 589 is a flowchart showing the contents of the third continuous striking effect processing 26 (Z5692). The third continuous striking effect processing 26 (Z5692) differs from the above-mentioned third continuous striking effect process (see Z6542 in FIG. 575) in that a process of setting the transition timer interruption flag 223te is added.

Specifically, in the processing of Z6579, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the continuous striking effect (Z6579: Yes), the transition timer interruption flag 223te is set to ON (Z6594), and the setting status of the continuous striking effect setting flag 223si. Is set to "01H" (Z6580), and then it is determined whether the value of the effect count counter tb is 1 or more (Z6595). That is, in the processing of Z6595, it is determined whether the continuous hitting effect executed this time is the last continuous hitting effect in the jackpot medium effect.

In the processing of Z6595, when it is determined that the value of the effect count counter tb is not 1 or more (0) (Z6595: No), since this is the last continuous stroke effect, the above-mentioned third continuous stroke effect (FIG. The same processing of Z6581 as (see Z6542 of 575) is executed, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z6595, when it is determined that the value of the effect count counter tb is 1 or more, that is, the next continuous hit effect is executed within the jackpot medium effect (Z6595: Yes), the effect number of times. The counter value of the counter tb is subtracted by 1 (Z6596), it is determined whether the value of the effect count counter tb after the subtraction is 0 (Z6597), and if it is determined to be 0 (Z6597: Yes), the display value. The effect mode corresponding to (Z6598) is set, and this process is terminated.

Further, in the processing of Z6597, when it is determined that the value of the effect count counter tb is not 0 (Z6597: No), an effect mode (see FIG. 580 (b)) suggesting that the continuous striking effect is continued is set. , End this process. In this way, when the entire effect of 1 is executed across a plurality of continuous stroke effects, when the continuous stroke effect of 1 is completed, it is determined whether or not the remaining continuous stroke effect exists, and the determination thereof is made. By configuring the display mode (effect mode) to be displayed at the end of the continuous striking effect based on the result, the entire effect of 1 can be smoothly executed as a series of effects.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 589, only the end timing of the last continuous striking effect is set according to the display value (the number of gauges of the continuous striking gauge RG), and the end timing of the other continuous striking effects is set. Is configured to suggest that the next continuous striking effect is executed, but is not limited to this, and the display value (gauge of the continuous striking gauge RG) is set at the end timing of the continuous striking effect other than the last continuous striking effect. It may be configured to set the effect mode according to the number). As a result, the player who enjoys the big hit middle effect is made to think that all the continuous hit effects executed as the big hit middle effect are finished, and then a further continuous hit effect is executed, which is a surprising effect. Can be provided.

Further, at the end timing of the last continuous striking effect, an effect mode suggesting that the next continuous striking effect is executed may be set. As a result, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting the player to execute a new continuous hitting effect until the end of the big hit middle effect.

In the present embodiment, the period during which the continuous hitting effect is executed in the jackpot medium effect is defined as the round game period, but the period is not limited to this, and the continuous hitting effect is executed during the jackpot interval period or the ending period. May be. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the continuous hitting effect is executed.

Next, the contents of the continuous striking operation detection process 26 (Z3761) will be described with reference to FIG. 590. FIG. 590 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous striking operation detection process 26 (Z3761). In this continuous hit operation detection process 26 (Z3761), a process related to a continuous hit effect (promotion effect) executed during a big hit (during a big hit game) is added to the above-mentioned continuous hit operation detection process 25 (see Z3651 in FIG. 577). It differs in that it is the same, otherwise it is the same. The same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the continuous striking operation detection process 26 (Z3761) is executed, the same processes of Z6601 to Z6616 as the continuous striking operation detection process 25 (see Z3651 in FIG. 577) are executed. Then, when the processing of Z6611 is completed, it is determined whether the display value after addition is 5 (Z6651), if it is determined to be 5, (Z6651: Yes), and then it is determined whether the jackpot is in progress. (Z6652).

In the process of Z6652, when it is determined that the jackpot is in progress, that is, when the display value reaches 5 in the jackpot middle effect (promotion effect) and the promotion screen shown in FIG. 581 (b) is displayed. (Z6652: Yes) sets the promoted flag 223td to ON (Z6653), and ends this process. In the present embodiment, when the promoted flag 223td is set to ON, the round effect is executed in the effect mode for indicating the promotion success (indicating the probable change jackpot) in the subsequent round games. There is. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the problem that the continuous hitting effect (promotion effect) is executed again in the subsequent round effect even though the promotion screen (see FIG. 581 (b)) is executed.

Next, the contents of the hit-related command process 26 (Z3974) will be described with reference to FIG. 591. FIG. 591 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit-related command process 26 (Z3974). The hit-related command process 26 (Z3974) is a part of the content of the process executed when each command is received for the hit-related command process 23 (see Z3914 in FIG. 531) in the 23rd embodiment described above. It differs in that it has changed. If the same processing is not performed, the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted.

When the hit-related command process 26 (Z3974) is executed, if it is determined that the opening command has been received in the Z4101 process (Z4101: Yes), the hit-time effect setting process is executed (Z4151), and the Z4102 process is executed. Then, this process is terminated. The detailed contents of the hitting effect setting process (Z4151) will be described later with reference to FIG. 592.

In the processing of Z4103, if it is determined that the round number command has been received (Z4103: Yes), the processing of Z4104 is executed, then the round effect setting processing is executed (Z4152), and this processing is terminated. The detailed contents of the round effect setting process (Z4152) will be described later with reference to FIG. 593.

Further, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received in the processing of Z4103 (Z4103: No), Z4105 to the same as the hit-related command processing 23 (see Z3914 in FIG. 531) in the above-mentioned 23rd embodiment. The processing of Z4111 is executed. Then, when it is determined that the ending command has been received in the processing of Z4111 (Z4111: Yes), the hitting effect end processing is executed (Z4153), the processing of Z4112 is executed, and this processing is terminated. The detailed contents of the hitting effect end process (Z4153) will be described later with reference to FIG. 594.

Next, the contents of the hit-in-the-middle effect setting process (Z4151) executed by the hit-related command process 26 (Z3974) described above will be described with reference to FIG. 592. FIG. 592 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hitting effect setting process (Z4151). In this hit-and-hit effect setting process (Z4151), the big-hit-middle effect executed during the current big-hit game is performed according to the type of the big-hit game and the type of the third symbol (probability variation symbol or normal symbol) indicating the big-hit winning. The process for setting the effect mode is executed.

When the hitting effect setting process (Z4151) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot symbol (third symbol) is a probabilistic symbol (Z6801). Here, in the present embodiment, a variation effect is executed in which the third symbol is variablely displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the period during which the special symbol variation is executed. Then, at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination indicating the jackpot winning, the third symbol is also stopped and displayed in the combination indicating the jackpot winning (for example, a combination of the same numbers (666, etc.)). As a combination indicating the jackpot winning of the third symbol, a combination that can also notify the jackpot type of the winning jackpot (probability variation jackpot, normal (time saving) jackpot, etc.) (for example, probability variation symbol "777" indicating probability variation jackpot) and It has a combination that does not notify the jackpot type (for example, a normal symbol "666" that can be displayed in either a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot). Then, when the stop display is made with the combination of the third symbols that do not notify the jackpot type, the jackpot type (probability variation jackpot, normal (short time) jackpot) of this time is notified by the jackpot medium effect executed during the jackpot game. It is configured to perform promotion effects.

With this configuration, the case of notifying the big hit type at the stop display timing of the third symbol (before the start of the big hit game) and the case of notifying the big hit type during the big hit game (during the execution of the big hit middle effect). And, since it is possible to provide the player, it is possible to play the game for a long period of time while expecting the player to win a more advantageous jackpot (probability variable jackpot), and it is possible to enhance the staging effect.

In the processing of Z6801, it is determined whether or not the player has already been notified that the jackpot is a probability variation jackpot before the start of the jackpot game, and the jackpot symbol is not a probability variation symbol, that is, it is determined to be a normal symbol. (Z6801: No), then determine whether the jackpot type this time is a probabilistic jackpot (Z6802), and if it is determined to be a probabilistic jackpot (Z6802: Yes), 5 in the upper limit storage area 223se. (Z6803), if it is determined that it is not a probabilistic jackpot, that is, if it is a normal (time saving) jackpot (Z6802: No), 4 is set in the upper limit storage area 223se (Z6804), respectively, Z6805. Move to the processing of.

As described above with reference to FIGS. 580 and 581, in the present embodiment, the continuous hitting effect is executed a plurality of times during the jackpot game, and the continuous hitting gauge RG is formed by the multiple repeated hitting effects. The number of gauges is increased, and when the number of gauges rises to 5, a promotion effect indicating that it is a probabilistic jackpot is executed. Therefore, as explained in the processing of Z6803 and Z6804, by setting 5 in the upper limit storage area 223se only when the jackpot this time is a probability variation jackpot, during a jackpot game other than the probability variation jackpot. , It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of gauges of the continuous striking gauge RG rises to 5.

Returning to FIG. 592, the description will be continued. In Z6805, the number of continuous hitting effects executed in the current hitting effect is determined with reference to the effect number selection table 222tb (Z6805), and the determined number of times is set as the value of the effect number counter tb (Z6806). .. Then, the number of rounds in which the repeated hitting effect is executed is determined, information indicating the round effect corresponding to each round is stored in the round effect storage area 223tc (Z6807), and the internal scenario is determined with reference to the internal scenario table 222sa. (Z6808), internal value migration data (internal value migration data) is created based on the number of repeated hits and the internal scenario (Z6809), and the created internal value migration data is stored in the internal migration data storage area 223sg (Z6809). Z6810), 5 is set in the difference upper limit storage area (Z6811), and this process is terminated.

As shown in the process of Z6811, in the 26th embodiment, unlike the 25th embodiment described above, the difference upper limit value is set to 5, which is the upper limit of the number of gauges of the continuous striking gauge RG. There is. That is, when it is a probabilistic jackpot and the internal value has risen to 5, for example, even if the current display value is 0, the probabilistic jackpot is based on one operation to the operating means. It is possible to display the indicated display value 5. As a result, it is possible to provide a player with an unexpected effect.

It should be noted that, as in the present embodiment, the technical idea that the displayed value can be increased to the upper limit value based on one operation to the operating means may be used in the above-mentioned 25th embodiment, or the above-mentioned second embodiment. The technical idea used in the 25th embodiment, that is, the technical idea in which the displayed value cannot be raised to the upper limit value by one operation to the operating means may be used in the 26th embodiment.

Further, in the case of the present embodiment, for example, until the internal value rises to 5, the continuous hitting effect is simply configured so as not to execute the effect of urging the player to operate the operating means. It can be changed to a one-time push effect. In this case, on the display screen shown in FIG. 580 (a), instead of the character "continuous hit", the character "blow PUSH" is used as a display mode for prompting the user to press the operating means once in the image NG. It may be displayed, and a guidance display indicating that the effect result of the promotion effect is displayed by one operation of the PUSH button 10317 may be displayed in the display area 803.

Further, in this way, when the continuous hitting effect and the one-time pressing effect can be executed as the big hit medium effect, the effect type to be executed by the player during the big hit game can be selected. Alternatively, the probability variation jackpot expectation may be different depending on the effect type, and the effect type to be executed may be determined by a predetermined lottery based on the actual jackpot type.

Returning to FIG. 592, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of Z6801 that the jackpot symbol is a probabilistic symbol (Z6801: Yes), then the effect mode of the hitting effect for showing the probabilistic jackpot is set (Z6812), and this processing is terminated. .. In other words, if the player is notified that the jackpot game has already been a probable change jackpot before the jackpot game is started, it is not necessary to execute the promotion effect in the jackpot medium effect (hit middle effect). , Different productions are performed.

With this configuration, when the probability change jackpot is won, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game does not change depending on the notification timing of the probability variation jackpot, but the production mode of the jackpot middle production is different. be able to. In this case, what is the jackpot type in the jackpot medium production that is executed when the player is notified that the jackpot is already a probability variation jackpot before the jackpot game starts (when the jackpot is hit with a probability variation symbol)? A production that can give special benefits to different players (for example, in the case of a pachinko machine 10 with specifications that can set the jackpot probability in multiple stages, the set value and the high probability state of the special symbol with the jackpot game in between If the pachinko machine 10 (so-called limit machine) has a specification that sets an upper limit on the number of times that can be set continuously, the remaining number of times until the upper limit (limit) is reached, the game state at the time of winning a big hit, etc. are notified. It is good to configure it to perform possible effects). As a result, when the same jackpot type (probability variable jackpot) is won, the benefits that the player can obtain (advantageous information that can be obtained from the staging) can be different depending on the timing at which the jackpot type is notified. It is possible to improve the interest of the game. When the above-mentioned technical idea is used, for example, in the remaining round game period after the probabilistic jackpot is notified in the promotion staging, it is possible to execute the staging mode of the jackpot middle staging when the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed. As an effect mode for the big hit middle effect when the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed, it is preferable to provide an effect mode in which the privilege is more likely to be given as the latter half goes. As a result, even when the promotion effect is executed, it is possible to create a situation that is advantageous to the player by promptly notifying the probabilistic jackpot, so that the player can enthusiastically use the operation means. It can be operated.

Next, the contents of the round effect setting process (Z4152) will be described with reference to FIG. 593. FIG. 593 is a flowchart showing the contents of the round effect setting process (Z4152). This round effect setting process (Z4152) is executed when a round number command is received in the above-mentioned hit-related command process 26 (see Z3974 in FIG. 591), and is stored in the round effect storage area 223 ct. Based on the existing round effect information, a process of setting an effect mode for a newly started round game is executed.

When the round effect setting process (Z4152) is executed, first, it is determined whether the promoted flag 223td is set to ON (Z6901), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (Z6901: Yes), The effect mode of the hitting effect for showing the probability variation jackpot is set (S6902), and this process is terminated. That is, as in the present embodiment, the promotion effect is executed so as to straddle a plurality of round games, and the effect result of the promotion effect (timing for notifying the probabilistic jackpot) is an operation by the player to the operating means. When configured to be based on the result, it is unclear at what timing the probabilistic jackpot notification is executed.

That is, as the promotion effect, even if the situation where the probability change jackpot can be notified, that is, the internal value transition data in which the internal value rises to 5, is set during the continuous hit effect executed in the second round, the second round If the player does not operate the operating means in the continuous hitting effect, the round game ends without the probability change jackpot notification being executed, and the next continuous hitting effect (for example, the fourth round) is executed. On the other hand, when the player enthusiastically operates the operating means in the second round, the probability change jackpot may be notified during the second round.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, each time a new round is started, it is determined whether the promoted flag 223td is set to ON, and if it is set to ON, a predetermined effect mode ( It is configured so that a dedicated effect mode different from the effect mode based on the information stored in the round effect storage area 223 ct) is set. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of discomfort with respect to the content of each round production in the jackpot middle production.

In this embodiment, when the promoted flag 223td indicating that the probability change jackpot notification has been executed is set to ON, the information stored in the predetermined effect mode (round effect storage area 223tc) is used. It is configured so that a dedicated production mode different from the original production mode) is set, but it is not limited to this, and the promotion production (continuous hitting production) should not be forcibly executed in the jackpot medium production. (Regulation flag) is provided, and even when it is determined that the regulation flag is set to ON, a predetermined effect mode (effect mode based on the information stored in the round effect storage area 223tc) is provided. ) May not be executed. In this case, for example, during the opening period of the jackpot game, a selection screen for the player to select whether or not to execute the promotion effect is displayed, and the player is promoted. If you choose not to perform the effect, you may configure it to turn on the regulation flag.

If it is determined in the processing of Z6901 that the promoted flag 223td is not set to ON (Z6901: No), then the information stored in the round staging storage area 223tc is read out to correspond to the number of rounds this time. The round effect to be performed is specified (Z6903), it is determined whether the specified round effect is a continuous hit effect (Z6904), and if it is determined to be a continuous hit effect (Z6904: Yes), the continuous hit effect setting flag 223si is set to "02H". "(Z6905), the start of the continuous striking effect is set (Z6906), and this process is terminated.

Further, in the processing of Z6904, when it is determined that the round effect is not the continuous hitting effect (Z6904: No), then it is determined whether the round effect is the continuous hitting notice effect (Z6907), and it is determined that the round effect is the continuous hitting notice effect. If so (Z6907: Yes), the start of the continuous hitting notice effect is set (Z6908), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the effect is not the continuous hit advance notice effect (Z6907: No), the start of the normal round effect is set (Z6909), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 594, the content of the hitting effect end process (Z4153) will be described. FIG. 594 is a flowchart showing the hitting effect end process (Z4153). This hit-in-time effect end process (Z4153) is executed when an ending command is received in the above-mentioned hit-related command process 26 (see Z3974 in FIG. 591), and is executed according to the setting status of the promoted flag 223td. A process for setting a different effect mode and a process for ending the big hit medium effect are executed.

When the winning effect end process (Z4153) is executed, first, it is determined whether the promoted flag 223td is set to ON (Z7001), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (Z7001; Yes). , The effect mode indicating the probability change state entry is determined (Z7002), the promoted flag 223td is set to off (Z7003), the process proceeds to the process of Z7007 described later, and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z7001 that the promoted flag 223td is not set to ON (Z7001: No), then it is determined whether the current jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot (Z7004), and the probabilistic jackpot is determined. If it is determined to be (Z7004: Yes), an effect mode indicating probabilistic promotion is determined (Z7005), the process proceeds to the process of Z7007 described later, and then this process is terminated.

Further, in the processing of Z7004, when it is determined that the hit is not a probable change jackpot (Z7004: No), the effect mode indicating the non-probability change state entry is determined (Z7006), and the upper limit value storage area 223se, the difference upper limit value storage area 223sf, The values of the internal migration data storage area 223sg, the display value storage area 233sh, the round staging storage area 223tc, and the migration timer are cleared (reset) (Z7007), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the 25th embodiment and the 26th embodiment described above, in the operation effect capable of executing the variable display in which the display mode is changed based on the operation of the operation means by the player, the target value is achieved. By setting (upper limit value) in advance and further defining the range of values (internal values) that can be variably displayed based on the elapsed time, the entire period of the operation effect (operation valid period) is set. Since the variable display can be continuously executed for the entire period), the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, as the transition degree of the value (internal amount) defined based on the elapsed time, as shown in FIG. 568 (a), various transition degrees based on different tendencies (mathematical expressions) can be created. It is possible to increase the variation of the production in the operation production.

In addition, in the 25th embodiment and the 26th embodiment described above, a specific transition degree is created for 1 effect period (total period of operation valid periods set during 1 effect period). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the degree of transition may be preferentially created for a part of the period and then the degree of transition may be created for another period.

Specifically, when creating a migration degree (internal migration data) for an operation effect with an operation validity period of 10 seconds and an upper limit set to 10, the priority internal migration data for the latter 5 seconds is first generated. create. In this case, the priority internal migration data is created under the condition that the internal value can be increased by up to 10 in 5 seconds. Then, when the priority internal migration data that increases the internal value by 8 in 5 seconds is created as the priority internal migration data, then the internal migration data that increases the internal value by 2 seconds with respect to the first 5 seconds. Will be created.

In this way, one effect period is divided into a plurality of sub-periods, internal migration data is created individually while giving priority to each sub-period, and finally, the upper limit of one effect period. By configuring the entire internal migration data that matches the value so that it can be created, for example, among the operation effects executed within one effect period, the period during which the player pays the most attention (for example, the final stage of the operation effect). It is possible to create internal migration data so that the internal value greatly increases for a period (a period during which an operation effect of an unusual mode is executed).

Therefore, the display mode can be easily changed (easily raised) by operating the operating means during the period in which the player is gazing, and the effect of the effect can be further enhanced. In each of the above-described embodiments, as an operation effect (continuous striking effect), a pattern for increasing the display mode (number of gauges of the continuous striking gauge RG) is described, but the display mode can be changed a plurality of times. However, for example, it may be configured to reduce the value indicated by the display mode, or a display mode having no concept of a value (for example, a plurality of display modes individually indicating a plurality of reach modes) may be used. , May be configured to be variable.

Further, in the 25th embodiment and the 26th embodiment described above, the internal migration data is created when the operation effect is executed, but the elapsed time of the operation effect is not limited to this. Depending on the situation, it may be configured to create internal migration data after the elapsed time. In this case, for example, a discriminating means capable of discriminating the operation result of the player in the first half period of the operation staging is provided, and the internal transition data in the second half period of the operation staging is created based on the result of the discriminating means. Well, specifically, whether or not the upper limit that can be variablely displayed (internal value after the first half period has elapsed) has been reached in the first half period (whether or not the player is enthusiastically operating the operating means). Internal transition that makes it easy for the internal value to reach the upper limit value (the upper limit value that can be variablely displayed during this operation effect period) in the latter half period when it is determined that the upper limit that can be variablely displayed has been reached. It is advisable to configure the data (internal migration data whose internal value tends to increase in the early part of the latter half period) to be created, or to increase the upper limit value.

With this configuration, the player can be made to actively play the game over the entire period of the operation effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 568, in the 25th embodiment and the 26th embodiment described above, one of the four types of internal scenarios is selected as the scenario showing the tendency of the degree of migration of the internal migration data. It is configured to enable and create internal migration data based on the trends indicated by the selected internal scenario, but is not limited to this, allowing multiple internal scenarios to be selected and multiple selected internals. After creating a fusion scenario that fuses the scenarios, the internal migration data may be created based on the fusion scenario.

Further, a processing means for processing the above-mentioned internal scenario is provided, and for example, the same internal scenario is performed by performing a processing process for expanding / contracting or increasing the curve (see FIG. 568 (a)) showing the tendency of each internal scenario. It may be configured to increase the variation of the internal migration data created when is selected.

Further, in the 25th embodiment and the 26th embodiment described above, the internal scenario is read out when the internal migration data is created, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the pachinko machine 10 is powered. Elapsed time since the input of, the fluctuation time since the special symbol fluctuation was executed in a specific fluctuation pattern, the elapsed time since the jackpot game started, and the elapsed time since the jackpot game ended. Or, when it is determined that the waveform indicating the internal scenario progresses based on the time measuring result measured by the time measuring means (for example, RTC) of the pachinko machine 10 and the internal migration data is created, the progress is made. It may be configured to create internal migration data based on the waveform inside. With this configuration, the internal migration data that is easy to create can be biased depending on the timing at which the operation effect is executed. Therefore, the display in the operation effect is displayed for the player who has been playing for a long time. It is possible to easily predict the relationship between the degree of variability of the embodiment and the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the operation effect.

<27th Embodiment>
Next, the 27th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 595 to 603. Conventionally, as in the 25th embodiment described above, an operation means (PUSH button 10317) that can be operated by the player is provided, and the operation to the operation means (PUSH button 10317) is effectively determined within the operation validity period. By operating the operation means (PUSH button 10317), there is one that executes an operation effect that changes the effect mode of the effect being executed. Then, as a part of the operation effect, there is a continuous operation effect (so-called continuous hit effect) in which the effect mode is changed stepwise by operating the operation means (PUSH button 10317) a plurality of times within the operation valid period. ..

This continuous hitting effect is configured to suggest that the more variable the effect mode is, the more likely it is that a privilege that is advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit by a special symbol lottery) will be given. Each time the means (PUSH button 10317) is operated (pressed), it is determined whether or not to change the effect mode, and when it is determined that the effect mode is to be changed, repeated hits are made so as to change the effect mode. The production was controlled. Then, every time the player operates the operating means (PUSH button 10317), an operation notification (for example, output of a pressing sound) for notifying the player that the operating means (PUSH button 10317) has been operated is executed. By doing so, when the effect mode is not changed even though the PUSH button 10317 is operated, the operating means fails by reliably notifying the player that the PUSH button 10317 has been operated (pressed). There is something that makes you understand what you are not doing.

However, when the above-mentioned conventional continuous striking effect is executed, it is configured to determine whether or not to change the effect mode each time the PUSH button 10317 is operated, so that the effect is short-term. When it is determined that the effect mode is changed in each of the operations to the PUSH button 10317 that are operated a plurality of times during the operation, the variable effect for changing the effect mode is before the end. There is a problem that the next variable effect is executed, and an operation effect that is difficult for the player to understand is executed.

On the other hand, in the 27th embodiment, when the operation means (PUSH button 10317) is operated within the operation valid period and the variable effect for changing the effect mode is executed based on the operation on the operation means. Is configured so that the next variable effect is not executed until the effect period of the variable effect has elapsed. With such a configuration, the variable effect executed based on the operation to the operating means is executed in duplicate, or the running variable effect is stopped and a new variable effect is executed. , It is possible to prevent the effect of the operation effect from being lowered.

Further, even during the effect period of the variable effect, the operation notification executed when the player operates the operation means can be executed. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the operation on the operating means executed by the player is correctly recognized within the operation valid period, so that a new variable effect is executed.

Further, in the 27th embodiment, when the player operates the operating means during the effect period of the variable effect, the variable effect is not executed, but an internal lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed. Based on the result of the internal lottery, the effect mode after the variable effect is completed is variably configured. Therefore, the player can enthusiastically operate the operating means even while the variable effect is being executed. Further, with such a configuration, even if the effect period of the variable effect is set to be long, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the motivation to operate the operation means.

The pachinko machine 10 in the 27th embodiment has a part of the ROM 222 configuration of the voice lamp control device 113, a part of the RAM 223 configuration, and a voice lamp control with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the 25th embodiment described above. The difference is that a part of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the apparatus 113 is changed, and the other parts are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the production content of the 27th embodiment>
With reference to FIGS. 595 to 596, characteristic effect contents among various effect contents executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the 27th embodiment will be described. Specifically, the content of the effect executed based on the player operating the operating means while the operation valid period is set will be described.

First, with reference to FIG. 595 (a), an aspect in which the effect mode is changed during the continuous striking effect will be described. FIG. 595 (a) is a diagram schematically showing a display mode when the effect is variable in the continuous striking effect. The content shown in FIG. 595 (a) is a diagram showing the same variable content as the display mode described with reference to FIG. 560 (b) in the above-mentioned 25th embodiment, and the player can use it. The display mode immediately after operating the operating means (after 0.1 seconds) is shown. In FIG. 595 (a), only the differences from FIG. 560 (b) described above will be described, and the description thereof will be omitted for the same contents.

When the player operates the operating means (PUSH button 10317) while the operation valid period is set, the voice output device 226 outputs a pressing sound (indicated by "duck" in the figure) for 0.1 seconds, and the spirit gauge is output. An effect display for varying (increasing) the number of gauges of the KG and an effect display for changing (increasing) the display mode of the aura worn by the character 801 are executed for 0.5 seconds. Since the figure shown in FIG. 595 (a) is immediately after the player operates the PUSH button 10317 (about 0.1 seconds later), the second-stage gauge of the spirit gauge KG is in the middle of displaying, and the character 801 is displayed. The display mode in the middle of the display for increasing the aura by one step is shown. Then, in the display area 803, the characters "remaining 6.50 seconds" indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period are displayed.

Then, in the 27th embodiment, the variable effect display for changing (increasing) the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG and the display mode of the aura worn by the character 801 are changed (largely) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. During the period (0.5 seconds) until the variable effect display is finished, even if the player operates the PUSH button 10317, only the pressing sound is output so that the new variable effect is not executed. It is composed. Therefore, since it is possible to prohibit the start of a new variable effect until the execution of the variable effect display is completed, the player is given the effect display executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It can be understood in an easy-to-understand manner.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, it is configured to take 0.15 seconds at the shortest in order to determine that the player has operated the PUSH button 10317. That is, even if the player repeatedly hits the PUSH button 10317 at intervals shorter than 0.15 seconds, the operation of pressing the PUSH button 10317 at the timing with an interval of 0.15 seconds or more is the target of the operation determination. It is configured in. With this configuration, the pressing interval of the PUSH button 10317 can be longer than the pressing sound output period (0.1 seconds), so that a situation in which a plurality of pressing sounds may be output in duplicate may occur. It is possible to physically suppress the occurrence.

Further, although a detailed description will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the operating means is operated during the period (0.5 seconds) in which the variable effect display is executed, that is, during the period in which the new variable effect is not executed. When the operating means is operated, the button display for changing the display mode of the image imitating the PUSH button 10317 displayed on the display screen is not the lottery for changing the mode of the variable effect display described above. The variable lottery is configured to be executable, and if the button display variable lottery is won, an image imitating the PUSH button 10317 displayed on the display screen is displayed after the running variable effect display is completed. It is configured to execute an effect display that changes the mode.

That is, in the present embodiment, the display mode of 1 (for example, the display mode of the character) is variably configured based on the operation of the operating means by the player, and the display mode of 1 is changed. (Variable period) is set to an invalid period in which the display mode of 1 is not changed even if the player operates the operating means, so that the situation where the display mode of 1 is duplicated and changed is prevented. is doing. Then, when the operating means is operated during the invalid period, as a process different from the process (variable) for changing the display mode of 1, in order to change another display mode different from the display mode of 1. It is configured to execute the processing of. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the display mode of 1 is duplicated and variable, and even during the period in which the display mode of 1 is variable (variable period). It is possible to make the player enthusiastically operate the operation means.

Next, with reference to FIG. 595 (b), a display mode when the variable effect display ends in a state where the button display variable lottery has been won will be described. FIG. 595 (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the display mode when the display mode of the PUSH button 10317 is changed, and is 0.4 seconds from the state shown in FIG. 595 (a) described above. It is a figure which showed the display mode which is displayed later.

As shown in FIG. 595 (b), when the variable effect display (effect display that changes the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG and the display mode of the character 801) is completed, the button display variable executed during the variable effect display period is variable. Based on the result of the lottery, the display mode of the image imitating the PUSH button 10317 displayed on the image NG is displayed in a mode different from the normal display mode (in the figure, the edge is painted black). Then, in the display area 803, the characters "remaining 6.10 seconds" are displayed.

The details will be described later, but in the button display variable lottery, the button display variable lottery for determining whether or not to change the display mode of the image imitating the PUSH button 10317 and the button display variable lottery for winning the display mode are selected. A display mode lottery for determining the type is executed. Then, when the button is won by the variable lottery, the variable condition of the display value is satisfied based on the operation to the first operation means executed after the end of the variable effect display (without executing the variable lottery). It is configured so that the player is given the privilege that the variable condition is always satisfied).

Further, in the display mode lottery, different display modes are displayed based on the type (big hit, miss) of the target special symbol lottery result (hit / fail judgment result) and the value of the upper limit value set for the continuous hitting effect. It is configured to be selected. That is, when the display mode of the image imitating the PUSH button 10317 is variable, it is possible to give a privilege that the player can predict the result of the target special symbol lottery depending on the type of the display mode. It is composed.

Therefore, even while the variable effect display is being executed, the player can enthusiastically operate the operating means. Further, as the effect period of the variable effect display becomes longer, the chance of newly changing the display value within the operation valid period, which is a limited period, decreases, and the effect of the effect decreases. However, by using the effect period of the variable effect display to enable the button variable lottery to be executed, it is possible to prevent the effect of the effect from being lowered during the operation valid period.

In this embodiment, when the player operates the operating means (PUSH button 10317) during the period when the new variable effect is not executed (additional variable invalid period), the player is made to predict the result of the special symbol lottery. It is configured to execute the possible effect by changing the display mode of the image imitating the PUSH button 10317, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when an additional variable invalid period is set. By displaying a new display mode (for example, a rock icon imitating a rock) on the image NG, an effect mode indicating that the operation to the operating means is restricted by the rock icon may be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player that the additional variable invalid period is set in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, the rock icon described above is configured to be variable based on the operation to the operating means during the additional variable invalid period, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the variable lottery is won), the rock icon is destroyed. It may be configured to display a display icon that can give a privilege advantageous to the player. In this case, as a privilege advantageous to the player, it is configured to give a privilege different from the privilege (big hit winning expectation degree) provided based on the result of the variable effect (the result of changing the spirit gauge KG). Well, for example, in the case of winning a big hit, a privilege suggesting a game state set after the end of the big hit game, a privilege suggesting the number of round games to be executed when the big hit is won, or a currently set game state. It is good to configure it to give a privilege that suggests.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from executing an effect that is difficult for the player to understand (overlapping variable effect) during the execution period of the continuous hitting effect, and it is advantageous for the player due to the plurality of effects. Since it is possible to provide a plurality of such benefits, the player can enthusiastically operate the operation means.

Next, with reference to FIG. 596, the contents of various effects executed in response to the operation to the operation means (PUSH button 10317) during the continuous hitting effect in which the operation valid period is set will be described. FIG. 596 is a timing chart showing the contents of various effects executed in response to the operation to the operation means (PUSH button 10317) during the continuous hitting effect in which the operation valid period is set.

As shown in FIG. 596, when the player presses the PUSH button 10317, a pressing sound of 0.1 seconds (indicated by "duck" in the figure) is output from the voice output device 226, and if the variable lottery is won, , A variable effect for 0.5 seconds (an effect of increasing the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG, an effect of changing the display mode of the character 801) is executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Then, while this variable effect is being executed, even if the player operates the PUSH button 10317, the additional variable invalid period is such that no new variable effect is executed.

Even during this additional variable invalid period, a pressing sound is output each time the PUSH button 10317 is pressed. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the pressing operation is properly recognized. Further, even during the additional variable invalid period, the variable lottery is configured to be executed based on the pressing operation of the PUSH button 10317, and if the variable lottery is won, it is internally variable. A state in which it is easy to win the lottery is set (corresponding to the fourth pressing of the PUSH button 10317 in FIG. 592 (a)).

Then, when a state in which it is easy to win the variable lottery is set internally, the variable effect is executed without executing the variable lottery when the PUSH button 10317, which is executed after the additional variable invalid period ends, is pressed. (See the black circle in FIG. 596 (a)). With this configuration, the player can enthusiastically operate the operating means (PUSH button 10317) even during the additional variable invalid period.

In the example shown in FIG. 596 (a), 0.5 seconds is set as the execution period of the variable effect, but the execution period of the variable effect is different depending on the type of the variable effect. ing. Specifically, the execution period of the variable effect when the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG shifts from the first stage to the second stage and from the second stage to the third stage is 0.5 seconds, from the third stage. The execution period of the variable effect at the time of transitioning from the 4th stage and the 4th stage to the 5th stage is configured to be 1 second. That is, the higher the expectation of the jackpot winning by the variable effect, the longer the execution period of the variable effect is configured, and the effect is configured to have a greater impact on the player.

With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the expected degree of jackpot winning in the variable production in an easy-to-understand manner. Further, as the variable effect progresses (as the number of gauges increases), the execution period of the variable effect becomes longer, so that the additional variable invalid period becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the operation period for executing an effect (effect for changing the display mode of the PUSH button 10317) different from the variable effect executed during the continuous striking effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the period during which the variable effect is executed and the period during which the additional variable invalid period is set are the same period, but the period is not limited to this, and the period during which the variable effect is executed is not limited to this. It may be configured so that the additional variable invalid period is longer than that. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the next variable effect from being executed immediately after the variable effect is completed.

Further, in the present embodiment, as an effect mode of the continuous striking effect, as shown in FIG. 595, an effect mode in which the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG increases is used, but the display is based on the operation by the player to the operation means. Any mode may be used as long as the mode is variable and the expected degree of granting a privilege (for example, big hit winning) that is advantageous to the player is different depending on the variable situation. Therefore, a specific value may be reduced, and an effect mode in which the degree of expectation of granting the privilege may be different depending on the amount of the reduction may be used, or the privilege may be changed depending on the number of times the display mode is changed based on the operation of the operating means by the player. It is also possible to use an effect mode in which the degree of expectation of granting is different. Further, as an idea opposite to the present embodiment, an effect mode may be used in which the expectation of granting the privilege is higher when the display mode is not variable, based on the operation of the operating means by the operating means.

Further, in the present embodiment, the player is configured to operate the operating means a plurality of times to execute an effect of changing the display mode a plurality of times, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a game. An effect of changing the display mode multiple times according to the length of the period during which the user continuously presses the operation means (long-press effect), or added to the operation means when the player operates the operation means. An effect of changing the display mode a plurality of times based on the strength and direction of the applied pressure (impact) may be used.

Further, as shown in FIG. 596, in the present embodiment, one type of "duck" is used as a voice indicating that the PUSH button 10317 has been operated (pressed) during the operation valid period. Not limited to this, for example, different voices are output when the operation means is operated in a period in which the display mode can be changed and when the operation means is operated in a period in which the display mode cannot be changed (additional variable invalid period). It may be configured as possible. With this configuration, it is effectively recognized that the operating means has been operated depending on the type of voice output when the operating means (PUSH button 10317) is operated, and the display mode is currently displayed. It is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner whether or not the period is variable.

Further, in the 27th embodiment, as a continuous striking effect, an effect capable of changing (raising) the display mode (the number of gauges of the air gauge KG) in a plurality of stages is configured, but the present invention is limited to this. The variable mode may be changed in an analog manner, or the degree of variability may be displayed as a percentage. Further, it may be configured so that the decrease in the display mode is advantageous to the player, or the larger the number of times the display mode is changed is, the more advantageous to the player.

<About the electrical configuration in the 27th embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the 27th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 597 and 598. The pachinko machine 10 in the 27th embodiment includes a part of the ROM 222 configuration of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 and a part of the RAM 223 configuration with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the 25th embodiment described above. The difference is in the change of, and the other electrical configurations are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of ROM 222 will be described with reference to FIG. 597 (a). FIG. 597 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of ROM 222 in the 27th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 597 (a), the 27th embodiment is different from the ROM 222 of the 25th embodiment described above in that the button display mode selection table 222ua is added, and is the same except for the addition. The description of the same element will be omitted.

The button display mode selection table 222ua is a data table referred to when selecting a display mode of an image imitating the PUSH button 10317 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and is a data table referred to when selecting a display mode. It is configured so that a plurality of types of display modes (display colors) are selected. In the button display mode selection table 222ua, the value of the effect timer 223ua described later is determined to be 0 in the effect timer process (see Z3281 in FIG. 601) (Z7102: Yes in FIG. 601), and the confirmation flag 223ub described later is turned on. When it is determined that the setting is set to (Z7103: Yes in FIG. 601), that is, when the variable effect display is finished, it is determined to change the display mode of the PUSH button 10317 during the variable effect display. In this case, it is referred to for selecting the display mode of the PUSH button 10317 (Z7104 in FIG. 601).

Here, the contents of the button display mode selection table 222ua will be described with reference to FIG. 597 (b). FIG. 597 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the button display mode selection table 222ua. In this button display mode selection table 222ua, the lottery result (win / fail determination result) of the target special symbol, the upper limit value set for the continuous hitting effect being executed, and the value of the acquired effect lottery counter 223qy are displayed. Corresponding to, four types of display modes (blue, yellow, red, rainbow) are defined respectively. The upper limit value is specified by reading the information stored in the upper limit value storage area 223sf.

Specifically, when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit (big hit) and "5" is set as the upper limit value, "yellow" is set in the range of "0 to 59" for the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy. If "red" is specified in the range of "60 to 89" and "rainbow" is specified in the range of "90 to 98", and "~ 4" (other than "5") is set as the upper limit, The value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined as "yellow" in the range of "0 to 59", "blue" in the range of "60 to 89", and "red" in the range of "90 to 98".

On the other hand, when the hit / fail judgment result is out of order and "5" is set as the upper limit value, the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy is in the range of "0 to 59", "yellow" is in the range of "60 to 89". If "blue" is specified in "blue" and "red" is specified in the range of "90 to 98" and "~ 4" (other than "5") is set as the upper limit, the value of the staging lottery counter 223qy. Is defined as "blue" in the range of "0 to 59", "yellow" in the range of "60 to 89", and "red" in the range of "90 to 98".

That is, four types of display modes that can be selected in the button display mode selection table 222ua are defined with different degrees of advantage for the player, and the display mode that is most disadvantageous to the player is "blue", and then The contents of the button display mode selection table 222ua are defined so that "yellow" and "red" gradually become more advantageous and "rainbow" becomes the most advantageous display mode for the player.

Explaining in detail, since the display mode "rainbow" is a display mode that can be selected only when the hit / fail determination result is "hit (big hit)", the display mode of the image imitating the PUSH button 10317 is "rainbow". ], It is possible to make the player understand that the hit / fail determination result is a hit (big hit) before the effect result of the continuous hitting effect being executed is displayed. Therefore, it is the most advantageous display mode for the player who wants to quickly grasp that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit.

Further, in the present embodiment, "rainbow" is displayed as the display mode only when the result of the target special symbol lottery (win / fail determination result) is a big hit and the set upper limit value is "5". Since it is configured so that it can be selected, when the display mode "rainbow" is selected, it is notified in advance that the display value is variable (increased) to the maximum "5" in the continuous striking effect during execution. Will be done. Therefore, even for a player who wants to change (raise) the display value to the maximum value during the continuous striking effect, it is possible to notify the player that the display value can be changed (raised) to the maximum value during the continuous striking effect. Therefore, the display mode is advantageous to the player.

Further, other display modes (“blue”, “yellow”, “red”) are defined so that the selection ratio differs depending on the result of the hit / miss judgment and the set upper limit value, and the player The display mode "blue" is most likely to be selected, followed by "yellow" and "red" when the result of the hit / fail judgment is unfavorable (outside) and the upper limit is unfavorable to the player (other than "5"). It is configured so that it is difficult to select in the order of ". Therefore, from the viewpoint of the selection ratio in the situation most disadvantageous to the player, the display mode "blue" is the display mode most disadvantageous to the player. The display mode "yellow" is more advantageous to the player than the display mode "blue", but is more disadvantageous than the display mode "red".

Even when the selection ratio of each display mode when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit (big hit) and the selection ratio of each display mode when the hit / fail judgment result is wrong are compared, the display mode is displayed. "Blue" is the most easily selected when the hit / fail judgment result is wrong, and is the most difficult to be selected when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit (big hit), followed by the display mode "yellow" and the display mode "red". In this order, it is stipulated that it will be easier to be selected at the time of winning. Therefore, even from the viewpoint of the selection ratio when the winning / failing judgment result is a result (hit) that is advantageous to the player, the selection ratio when the winning / failing judgment result is a result (missing) that is disadvantageous to the player. From the viewpoint, the display mode "blue" is the most disadvantageous display mode for the player. The display mode "yellow" is more advantageous to the player than the display mode "blue", but is more disadvantageous than the display mode "red".

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 27th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 598. FIG. 598 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 27th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 598, the RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 27th embodiment is determined to be a timer 223ua during production with respect to the configuration of the RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 25th embodiment described above (see FIG. 570). It differs from the flag 223ub in that it is added, and is the same except for that. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The effecting timer 223ua is a timer for measuring the effect period of the variable effect display executed during the operation valid period (during the continuous striking period effect), and is performed by the continuous striking operation detection process 27 (see Z3681 in FIG. 601). When a variable effect is executed in the executed normal operation process (see Z7206 in FIG. 602), a value corresponding to the effect period (0.5 seconds) of the variable effect is set. Then, the timer is updated every time the Z3271 process of the effect update process 27 (see Z3188 in FIG. 599) is executed. When the value of the effect timer 223ua is larger than 0, that is, when the variable effect display is being executed, the press lottery table 222sb is referred to in the continuous hit operation detection process 27 (see Z3681 in FIG. 601). The process of executing the variable lottery and the process of executing the variable effect display (effect display that changes the display value) (processes of Z7203 to Z7207 in FIG. 601) are skipped. Therefore, it is possible to reliably suppress the execution of a new variable effect display during the variable effect display.

Further, when the continuous striking operation detection process 27 (see Z3681 in FIG. 601) determines that the value of the timer 223ua during the effect is 1 or more (Z7202: Yes in FIG. 601), the above-mentioned PUSH button 10317 is displayed. An operation process during production (see Z7208 in FIG. 603) for executing a button variable lottery for changing the mode is executed.

Then, whether or not the value of the effecting timer 223ua is updated to 0 is determined by the effecting timer process (see Z3281 in FIG. 600) executed by the effect update process 27 (see Z3188 in FIG. 599), and is updated to 0. That is, when it is determined that the variable effect display has ended (Z7102: Yes in FIG. 600), a process for determining the display mode after the variable effect display ends is executed.

The confirmation flag 223ub is a flag for indicating that it is confirmed that the display mode of the PUSH button 10317 is variable, and is set to ON when it is confirmed that the display mode of the PUSH button 10317 is variable. This confirmation flag 223ub is changed when it is determined in the continuous hit operation detection process 27 (see Z3681 in FIG. 601) that the value of the timer 223ua during the production is 1 or more (Z7202: Yes in FIG. 601), that is, the present is variable. It is set to ON when the push lottery is won in the during-effect operation process (see Z7208 in FIG. 603) executed when it is determined that the effect is being displayed (see Z7354 in FIG. 603).

Then, in the effect timer process (see Z3281 in FIG. 600), the setting status is determined when the value of the effect timer 223ua becomes 0 (Z7102 in FIG. 600). Based on this determination result, the display mode of the PUSH button 10317 after the end of the variable effect display is determined. Further, when the player operates the operation means after the end of the variable effect display, it is referred to in the continuous hit operation detection process 27 (see Z3681 in FIG. 601) (see Z7203 in FIG. 601) and is set to ON. If it is determined, the normal operation process (see Z7206 in FIG. 602) is executed without executing the push lottery.

That is, in the 27th embodiment, the display mode after the end of the variable effect display is determined based on the setting status of the confirmation flag 223 ub, and the operation to the operation means by the player executed after the end of the variable effect display is based. It is configured to make the ease of variable display of the display value different. With this configuration, the operating means can be enthusiastically operated even during the period in which the new variable staging display is not executed.

<28th Embodiment>
Next, the 28th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 604 to 629. In the 28th embodiment, similarly to the 12th embodiment described above, even if one special symbol variation (for example, the first special symbol variation) is being executed, the other special symbol variation (for example, the first special symbol variation) is being executed. , The second special symbol change) is configured to be feasible. Then, in the twelfth embodiment described above, the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) is set as the most advantageous gaming state for the player who frequently executes the small hit game. On the other hand, in the 28th embodiment, the gaming state that is most advantageous to the player is the latent probability state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) as in the first embodiment described above. It is different in that it is set to be.

In addition, it is easier for the player to select the jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery than in the case where the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the latent state. It is configured in.

Further, when the small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery and the first special symbol for showing the lottery result (small hit winning) is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), the second special symbol lottery being executed (the second special symbol lottery (confirmed display)). If the jackpot is won, the second special symbol fluctuation that is won by the jackpot is forcibly stopped and displayed by the lottery result indicating the loss.

Then, in the 28th embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special symbol change set when the small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery is set when the big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery. It is configured to be shorter than the fluctuation time of.

With this configuration, if a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery during the latent state, the period until the change in the first special symbol that has won the small hit is stopped and displayed is set to the second. Even if you win a big hit in a special symbol lottery, you can invalidate the big hit. Therefore, it is possible to set a period during which the player can play the game with peace of mind without fearing that the latent state will end based on the jackpot winning.

In addition, in the 28th embodiment, as the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, a disadvantageous jackpot type in which a game state other than the latent state is set after the jackpot game ends and a jackpot game It is configured so that the advantageous jackpot type in which the latent state is set after the end can be set, and different fluctuation times are set according to the set jackpot type. Specifically, when the disadvantageous jackpot type is set, it is easier to set a longer fluctuation time than when the advantageous jackpot type is set, and in particular, the advantageous jackpot type is set. In this case, it is possible to set a fluctuation time (for example, 1 second) shorter than the fluctuation time set when the small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery.

As a result, the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol in which the jackpot type (advantageous jackpot type) that is advantageous to the player is set based on the small hit winning in the first special symbol lottery is disadvantageous to the player. It can be made more difficult to be discarded than the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol in which the jackpot type (disadvantageous jackpot type) is set.

More specifically, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol set when the small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery and the disadvantageous jackpot type are set when the big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery. It is configured so that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol has almost the same length (about 30 seconds). That is, if the disadvantageous big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the second special symbol change is executed in the fluctuation time of 30 seconds, and then the small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol is small. The jackpot of the second special symbol is configured to be stopped and displayed before the hit.

Therefore, after the unfavorable jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is executed, it is possible to suppress an irregular game in which a left-handed game is performed in order to discard the unfavorable jackpot fluctuation being executed.

The pachinko machine 10 in the 28th embodiment has a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 included in the main control device 110, the ROM 222 included in the voice lamp control device 113, and the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment described above. A part of the configuration of the RAM 223, a part of the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and a part of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. Different, otherwise identical. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the gaming state in the 28th embodiment will be briefly described. As described above, in the 28th embodiment, there are three gaming states, specifically, a normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) and a probabilistic state (high of special symbol). A probability state (high probability state of a normal symbol) and a latent state (high probability state of a special symbol, low probability state of a normal symbol) can be set.

The latent state is configured as the most advantageous gaming state for the player, and the normal state is configured as the most disadvantageous gaming state. Further, the probabilistic state is configured as a gaming state having a higher degree of advantage than the normal state. In the following description, the advantageous latent state will be referred to as "RUSH mode". Further, the disadvantageous normal state is referred to as "normal mode", and the relatively advantageous probabilistic state is referred to as "chance mode".

Here, with reference to FIG. 604, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 28th embodiment will be described. FIG. 604 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 28th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 604, the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 28th embodiment has the same configuration as the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 12th embodiment (see FIG. 317). There is.

That is, a central first ball entry port 64c is provided below the variable display unit 80. Further, below the central first ball entry port 64c, a small attacker 4650 that is opened when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol is provided. Since the small attacker 4650 is surrounded by nails and the central first winning opening 64c on the left, right, and above, it is extremely difficult to insert a game ball during the small hit opening period of the first special symbol. .. In the 28th embodiment, the small hit of the first special symbol is provided so that the game ball enters the second entrance 640 in a state other than the RUSH mode (for example, a chance mode in which a probability change state is set). If the ball is thrown and the second special symbol makes a long fluctuation, the purpose is to forcibly end the long fluctuation, and in the RUSH mode, the second special symbol lottery is disadvantageous to the player. When the lottery result is obtained and the second special symbol change (disadvantageous special figure 2 change) for showing the disadvantageous lottery result is executed, the disadvantageous special figure 2 change is forcibly terminated (in a stop display mode indicating a deviation). This is because it is installed for the purpose of forcibly stopping) and not for winning a prize ball.

That is, even if the second special symbol fluctuates for a long time, it is configured to win a small hit with a high probability (120/480) when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed. With the start of the game as a trigger (when the stop symbol indicating a small hit is confirmed and displayed), the second special symbol that has been fluctuating for a long time in a game state other than RUSH mode is forcibly stopped with a stop symbol that is out of the game. Can be made to. Further, in the RUSH mode, the second special symbol that is changing in the disadvantageous special figure 2 can be forcibly stopped by the off-stop symbol. Therefore, it is assumed that the ball has entered the second entrance 640 in a game state other than the RUSH mode (for example, a probable change state in which a right-handed game is executed), and a long fluctuation of the second special symbol has started. However, the long variation of the second special symbol can be terminated without waiting for the end of the long variation of the second special symbol.

In the 28th embodiment, when the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times) (when the time saving end condition is satisfied) without winning the jackpot in the state where the probability change state is set, the latent state is entered. It is configured to migrate to. Therefore, in the right-handed game executed in the state where the probability change state is set, the game ball vigorously flows down the right side area (the game area provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80), and the right electric accessory 64ra. There is a risk that the ball will jump over and enter the second entrance 640, and a long fluctuation of the second special symbol will be executed.

Further, since the first special symbol lottery is configured to be executed even while the long fluctuation of the second special symbol is being executed, the first special symbol lottery is executed a plurality of times. As a result, the above-mentioned time-saving end condition is satisfied, and the state can be changed from the probable change state to the latent state. In this case, even if the latent state (RUSH mode), which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, is set, the game ball is acquired in the RUSH mode unless a new lottery of the second special symbol is executed. (Because it is not possible to acquire a game ball by winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery), there is a problem that it is not possible to provide a RUSH mode that is advantageous to the player.

On the other hand, in the 28th embodiment, as in the 12th embodiment described above, the game ball is made to enter the right first entry slot 64r by the right-handed game during the probability change state, and the first special symbol lottery is performed. Even if the long fluctuation of the second special symbol is executed during the probabilistic change state, the long change of the second special symbol being executed by the first special symbol lottery mainly executed during the probabilistic change state is performed. It is possible to forcibly terminate the fluctuation. Therefore, when the time saving end condition is satisfied while the probability change state is set and the RUSH mode (latent state) that is advantageous to the player is set, a situation occurs in which the second special symbol fluctuates for a long time. Can be suppressed.

In the 28th embodiment, even if a specific jackpot (latent jackpot) is won in a special symbol lottery, the RUSH mode (latent state) is executed (set) after the jackpot game is completed. However, if the jackpot is won for both the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) (the jackpot game is executed), and the game is being executed. Since it is configured to forcibly terminate the special symbol change, if the RUSH mode (latent state) is set after the jackpot game ends, a new second special symbol change will be started, and the second special symbol change will be started. 2 It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the special symbol fluctuates for a long time.

In addition, in the 28th embodiment, the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed as compared with the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment described above, and a prize ball can be obtained by winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery. It is configured so that the first special symbol lottery can be easily executed during the game state (RUSH mode). Specifically, it is configured so that it is easy to win a normal symbol even in the RUSH mode (latent state) in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set.

Then, when the first special symbol lottery is executed and the small hit is won during the RUSH mode, the first special symbol variation is executed in a specific fluctuation time (30 seconds), and the small hit is won. 1 If the second special symbol fluctuation that is changing at the time when the special symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed is a small hit fluctuation, the small hit fluctuation is interrupted, and if it is a big hit fluctuation or an out-of-order fluctuation, a lottery is performed. It is configured to be forcibly stopped in a display mode indicating that the result is off.

With this configuration, even if a jackpot (disadvantageous jackpot) that can trigger the termination of the RUSH mode is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the RUSH mode, the disadvantageous jackpot is changing. By displaying the stop display (confirmed display) of the first special symbol with the symbol indicating the small hit winning, the disadvantageous big hit can be discarded.

Further, in the 28th embodiment, in the second special symbol lottery executed during the RUSH mode, the advantageous jackpot in which the RUSH mode (latent state) is set again after the jackpot game ends, and the normal jackpot after the jackpot game ends. It is configured so that you can win the unfavorable jackpot in which the mode (normal state) is set, and from the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation (advantageous special figure 2 fluctuation) set when you win the advantageous jackpot. However, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation (disadvantageous special figure 2 fluctuation) set when the unfavorable jackpot is won is configured to be longer.

As a result, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery during the RUSH mode, the fluctuation time can be longer in the case of winning the disadvantageous jackpot than in the case of winning the advantageous jackpot. It can be easily discarded based on the result of the symbol lottery. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from being reduced because the advantageous jackpot that is advantageous to the player is discarded.

Further, in the 28th embodiment, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery in the RUSH mode, a variation time of 30 seconds is selected as the variation time of the special symbol variation (special diagram 1 small hit variation). The above-mentioned disadvantageous special figure 2 fluctuation (second special symbol fluctuation set when the disadvantaged jackpot is won) is also configured so that the fluctuation time of 30 seconds can be easily selected. As a result, even if the disadvantaged jackpot is won in the newly executed second special symbol lottery during the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation period, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the disadvantaged jackpot. Before, the first special symbol can be stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a small hit. Therefore, the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation period can be set as a period (invincible period) in which the RUSH mode does not end.

Further, as described above, since the fluctuation time (30-second fluctuation) of the same length is easily executed between the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation and the disadvantageous special figure 2 fluctuation in the RUSH mode. For example, even if a small hit is won in the first special symbol after winning a disadvantageous jackpot in the second special symbol lottery during the RUSH mode, the disadvantageous special figure 2 fluctuation ends before the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation. It will be. Therefore, after determining that the disadvantageous special figure 2 fluctuation has been executed, it is possible to suppress the execution of the left-handed game and the irregular game of aiming for a small hit in the first special symbol lottery. can.

Further, as shown in FIG. 604, on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in the game board 13, a second entry port (through gate) 67 and a right first entry ball provided downstream of the through gate 67 are provided. The upper surface of the right electric accessory 64ra that can open and close the upper surface of the mouth 64r and the right first ball entry port 64r, and the upper surface of the right electric accessory 64ra while the right electric accessory 64ra is closed. A second entry port 640, which is provided at a position where a game ball that has passed through the above can enter, is provided. As shown in FIG. 604, the flow path of the game ball so that only the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can reach the second entry port 640 with the right electric accessory 64ra closed. Is set. That is, even if a right-handed hit is made in a high-probability state (probability-changing state) of a normal symbol in which the right electric accessory 64ra is likely to be opened, almost all the game balls that have passed through the through gate 67 enter the right first ball. Since the ball enters the mouth 64r, the game ball cannot enter the second entrance 640. With this configuration, it is possible to proceed with the right-handed game even in the probable change state (chance mode).

Although detailed description is omitted, the left-handed game is performed in the low-probability state of the normal symbol rather than the number of times of the first special symbol lottery that can be executed when the right-handed game is performed in the low-probability state of the normal symbol. In this case, the number of times of the first special symbol lottery that can be executed is likely to increase. As a result, it is possible to suppress the act of executing the right-handed game and executing the first special symbol lottery in the state where the normal mode (normal state) is set.

Further, in the 28th embodiment, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the RUSH mode, the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation is a period during which the RUSH mode cannot be terminated. It is configured to be able to execute a notification effect (invincible mode) to show the player that this is the case. As a result, during the period when the invincible mode is displayed, the second special symbol is positively changed without worrying that the disadvantageous jackpot game is executed, and the prize ball is won by the small hit game. Can be done.

On the other hand, in the RUSH mode, if an advantageous jackpot different from the disadvantageous jackpot is won, the fluctuation time of the advantageous special figure 2 fluctuation is shorter than the fluctuation time corresponding to the disadvantageous jackpot (for example, 1 second). Is configured to be easy to select. In this way, by changing the fluctuation state (variation time) of the special symbol according to the degree of advantage to the player, it is possible to display the variable mode of the second special symbol variation based on the special figure 1 small hit winning. can.

Further, in the 28th embodiment, when the RUSH mode is set, the RUSH mode is configured to continue until a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery. Then, if the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times) in the RUSH mode without winning the big hit, the above-mentioned invincible mode is easily executed (invincible mode high probability state). It is configured.

Specifically, as a fluctuation pattern table referred to when selecting the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation executed in the RUSH mode (latent state), the special symbol lottery is performed a predetermined number of times (50 times) in the RUSH mode. It has a first latent probability table that is referred to until it is executed, and a second latent probability table that is referred to after the special symbol lottery has been executed a predetermined number of times (50 times) during the RUSH mode. The first latent probability table is configured so that a long fluctuation time (30 seconds) can be easily selected when the first special symbol lottery is missed and the winner is won, as compared with the second latent probability table. That is, even though the small hit is not won, the number of times of the first special symbol lottery executed per unit time is reduced by executing the first special symbol fluctuation for a long time, and as a result, the unit It is configured so that the expectation of winning a small hit by the first special symbol lottery per hour is low.

Therefore, if the RUSH mode continues for a long time, it is possible to execute a game that is more advantageous to the player, so that it is possible to suppress the game in the RUSH mode from becoming monotonous, and the player can play the game early. It is possible to suppress getting bored with.

<Regarding the content of the production in the 28th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 605 and 606, among the various effect contents executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the 28th embodiment, the characteristic effect content is executed. In the 27th embodiment, a part of the effect content in the RUSH mode, which is executed when the gaming state (latent state) that is most advantageous to the player is set with respect to the 12th embodiment described above. It differs in that it is changed, and is the same except for that. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 605 (a), a display mode when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery in the RUSH mode will be described. FIG. 605 (a) is a display displayed when a special symbol change (special figure 1 small hit change) indicating that a small hit was won in the first special symbol lottery is executed during the latent state (RUSH mode). It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of an aspect.

As shown in FIG. 605 (a), when the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation is executed, a character 811 imitating a rabbit wearing a flame is displayed near the center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and is displayed below. Is displayed with the characters "Enter invincible mode !!". With these displays, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the jackpot game based on the disadvantageous jackpot is not executed. That is, the above-mentioned display mode is a guidance notification mode for notifying that the present is an advantageous period that is advantageous for the player.

Further, on the lower right side of the screen, the period during which the above-mentioned invincible mode continues, that is, the remaining period display for showing the remaining variation time of the special figure 1 small hit variation is displayed in the display area Dm28a. In FIG. 605 (a), since the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation has just started, the characters “remaining 30:00 seconds” indicating the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation are displayed. The value of this remaining period display decreases with the passage of time, and when 30 seconds have passed and "0:00 seconds remaining" is displayed, the first special symbol indicates a small hit. Stop display (confirmed display).

By displaying the remaining period by the display area Dm28a, the player can easily determine the remaining period of the invincible mode, so that the player can play the game more enthusiastically to execute the second special symbol lottery during the invincible period. Can be done. In the 28th embodiment, a small hit is won (special figure 2 small hit winning) in the second special symbol lottery executed during the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation, and the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation is stopped and displayed. When the second special symbol change (special figure 2 small hit fluctuation) indicating the special figure 2 small hit winning is stopped and displayed, the small hit game corresponding to the special figure 2 small hit winning is executed. During the small hit game period, the remaining period of the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation does not decrease, and after the end of the small hit game, the remaining period of the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation is reduced again. Therefore, even if a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery during the invincible mode, the remaining period of the invincible mode does not decrease during the small hit game, and the player can play the game in the invincible mode period. Can be entertained to the maximum.

Then, in the second special symbol lottery executed during the invincible mode period, if a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player, that is, a disadvantaged jackpot in which the normal state is set after the jackpot game is completed, that fact is announced. The exclusion effect for notifying the player is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 605 (b), the effect content of the exclusion effect will be described. FIG. 605 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display mode of the exclusion effect executed when a disadvantageous jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery during the invincible mode period.

As described above, in the 28th embodiment, it is easy to set a variation time of 30 seconds as the special figure 1 small hit variation executed when the small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery executed in the RUSH mode. Similarly, the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is easily set as the disadvantageous jackpot fluctuation executed when the disadvantageous jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery executed in the RUSH mode. In this way, by configuring the fluctuation time set for the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation to be the same as the fluctuation time set for the disadvantageous jackpot fluctuation, the second special during the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation. If the unfavorable jackpot is won in the symbol lottery, the unfavorable jackpot can be discarded by the special figure 1 small hit, so the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation period can be set as a period advantageous to the player (invincible mode). can.

However, if the disadvantageous jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery executed immediately after the invincible mode is set, the special symbol 1 small hit variation is disadvantageous as the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation is disadvantageous. Each of the big hit fluctuations is executed for about 30 seconds, and even though the RUSH mode is in progress, the small hit game is not executed for a continuous period, and there is a possibility that the player's motivation to play may decrease.

Therefore, when the unfavorable jackpot fluctuation is executed during the invincible mode, as shown in FIG. 605 (b), the exclusion for suggesting to the player that the unfavorable jackpot is discarded by the special figure 1 small hit. It is configured to perform the production. By providing the dedicated effect in this way, the player's attention can be drawn to the effect content executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, so that the period during which the small hit game is not executed continues. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play due to the above.

When the exclusion effect is executed, a rabbit-like character 811 chases the enemy character 860 that imitates a turtle at the bottom center of the display screen, and above that, "until the enemy is eliminated, XX seconds are left." Character is displayed. Then, the value of "10:00" displayed in the display area Dm28a indicating the remaining time of the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation is inserted and displayed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the remaining period until the disadvantageous jackpot is discarded is 10 seconds by the special figure 1 small hit.

Further, the display area Dm3 in which the guidance display mode “right-handed” for guiding the game method in the RUSH mode is displayed is displayed in a smaller size than the display in the normal RUSH mode (see FIG. 605 (a)). .. As a result, it is difficult to execute a new second special symbol lottery in the RUSH mode, that is, even if a right-handed game is performed, it is more disadvantageous to the player than in the normal RUSH mode. Can suggest to one. That is, the size of the display area Dm3 is configured to suggest to the player the degree of advantage when the game is played by the game method according to the guidance display mode.

In the 28th embodiment, the exclusion effect is configured to be executed only when the special figure 1 small hit is fluctuating in the RUSH mode and the disadvantageous big hit is won in the second special symbol. Not limited to this, for example, in a part of the case where the small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is configured to be selected, and the small hit fluctuation of 30 seconds is executed. In this case, the exclusion effect may be executed regardless of the presence or absence of the first special symbol change, or the fluctuation time of 30 seconds may be executed in a part of the case where the advantageous jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery. It may be configured to be selected, and when the advantageous jackpot fluctuation of 30 seconds is executed, the exclusion effect may be executed regardless of the presence or absence of the first special symbol fluctuation.

With this configuration, as a result of the exclusion effect, the special figure 1 small hit game (small hit game that opens the small attacker 4650) and the special figure 2 small hit game (the first variable winning device 65 are opened). Since it is possible to provide a small hit game) and a special figure 2 big hit game (a big hit game that opens the first variable winning device 65), even during the production period of the exclusion effect for the player, It is possible to play the game while expecting that a more advantageous game result will be provided.

In addition, it is configured to be able to execute a 30-second deviation change in a part of the case where the second special symbol lottery is won, and when this 30-second deviation change is executed, regardless of the presence or absence of the first special symbol change. Instead, it may be configured to execute the exclusion effect, and regardless of the result of the second special symbol lottery, the variation effect pattern of the special figure 1 small hit variation is in the middle of the change (for example, the special figure 1 small hit variation). A variable staging pattern may be configured such that the exclusion staging is executed from the timing when the remaining period of the staging is 20 seconds).

By configuring in this way, even if the second special symbol lottery does not actually result in a disadvantageous jackpot, the player is made to think that the disadvantaged jackpot was won and the disadvantaged jackpot was discarded during the invincible mode. Therefore, the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, in the RUSH mode, in order to prevent the player from being excessively awarded the prize ball in a short time, when the variation time of the deviation fluctuation of the second special symbol is set to be long, the variation time is set. Since the exclusion effect can be executed by using the fluctuation period of the deviation fluctuation, it is possible to suppress the player's motivation to play due to the execution of the deviation fluctuation for a long time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 606, the effect contents in the invincible mode high probability state set after the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times) in the RUSH mode will be described. FIG. 606 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed during the invincible mode high probability state.

In the 28th embodiment, when the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times) in the RUSH mode, the type of the variation pattern table referred to when selecting the variation time of the special symbol variation is switched. It is composed. Specifically, as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation, the small hit fluctuation is selected from the fluctuation pattern table (first latent probability table) in which the fluctuation of 30 seconds is selected at the time of the small hit fluctuation and a part of the deviation fluctuation. It is configured so that the fluctuation pattern table referred to is switched to the fluctuation pattern table (second latent probability table) in which the fluctuation of 30 seconds is selected only at the time.

Therefore, in a state where the second latent probability table is referred to (a state in which the special symbol lottery is executed more than a predetermined number of times (50 times) in the RUSH mode), the first special symbol variation other than the small hit variation is performed. Is completed early, so that the number of executions of the first special symbol lottery per unit time can be increased, and as a result, the ratio of the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation per unit time can be increased. (Invincible mode high probability state).

When the invincible mode high probability state is set, the characters "in high probability state" are displayed in the display area Dm28b at the bottom of the display screen, and the guidance mode for guiding the current game content below that. The text "It's easy to enter invincible mode !!" is displayed. With these displays, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the gaming state is more advantageous to the player in the RUSH mode.

<About the electrical configuration in the 28th embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the 28th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 607 to 613. The 28th embodiment has a partial configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, a partial configuration of the RAM 203, and a partial configuration of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 with respect to the 12th embodiment described above. And the partial configuration of the RAM 223 are different in that they are different from each other, and are the same except for the above. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 607 (a), the contents specified in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the 28th embodiment will be described. FIG. 607 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the 28th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 607 (a), the ROM 202 of the 28th embodiment is the first ROM 202 of the twelfth embodiment described above (see FIG. 321 (a)) instead of the first random number table 202a. The hit random number 28 table 202va is replaced with the small hit random number table 202b, the small hit random number 28 table 202vb is replaced with the big hit type selection table 202d, and the big hit type selection 28 table 202vd is replaced with the small hit type selection table 202e. The type selection 28 table 202ve is different in that the variation pattern selection 28 table 202vf is provided instead of the variation pattern selection table 202f, and the variation pattern scenario 28 table 202vg is provided instead of the variation pattern scenario table 202ka. be.

First, the contents of the random number 28 table 202va per first will be described with reference to FIG. 607 (b). FIG. 607 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the random number 28 table 202va per first. The first random number 28 table 202va has a special symbol state (low probability state, high probability state) with respect to the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 321 (b)) in the twelfth embodiment described above. The difference is that the value of the first random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit is specified differently, and the other points are the same. The detailed description of the same content will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 607 (b), regardless of the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), the first hit acquired as a value determined to be a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol. The value "7,8" of the random number counter C1 is defined, and the value "0 to 5" of the acquired first random number counter C1 is defined as the value determined to be a big hit in the high probability state of the special symbol. .. Since the range of values that the first random number counter C1 can take is "0 to 479", the jackpot probability is 2/480 (1/240) in the low probability state of the special symbol, and in the high probability state of the special symbol. The jackpot probability is 6/480 (1/80).

Next, the contents of the small hit random number 28 table 202vb will be described with reference to FIG. 607 (c). FIG. 607 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the small hit random number 28 table 202vb. As shown in FIG. 607 (c), the small hit random number 28 table 202vb is smaller than the first special symbol with respect to the small hit random number table 202b (see FIG. 322 (a)) in the twelfth embodiment described above. The difference is that the range of the value of the first random number counter determined to be a hit is changed, and the other points are the same. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

Specifically, for the first special symbol whose symbol type is the first special symbol, the small hit determination value is defined in the range where the value of the first random number counter C1 is "360 to 479" regardless of the probability state of the special symbol. For the second special symbol whose symbol type is the second special symbol, the small hit determination value is defined in the range where the value of 1 of the first random number counter C1 is "240 to 479" regardless of the probability state of the special symbol.

That is, in the 28th embodiment, the small hit is won with a probability of about 1/4 when the 1st special symbol lottery is executed, and the probability of about 1/2 when the 2nd special symbol lottery is executed. It is configured to win a small hit. In this embodiment, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, a small hit game is executed in which the small attacker 4650, which cannot (difficultly) win a ball during the small hit game, is opened. When a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the first variable winning device 65, which is opened during the big hit game, is configured to execute the small hit game. Therefore, even if it is set to win a small hit with a high probability in the first special symbol lottery, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively given a specific (prize ball). Further, in the second special symbol lottery, the small hit probability is set to be higher than the small hit probability of the first special symbol lottery, and the second special symbol lottery is easier to be executed than the first special symbol lottery. In the latent state, it is possible to frequently execute a small hit game, and it is possible to easily increase (difficult to decrease) the number of balls held by the player. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the 28th embodiment, the latent probability state is the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 608, the contents of the jackpot type selection 28 table 202vd will be described. FIG. 608 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the jackpot type selection 28 table 202vd. As shown in FIG. 608, the jackpot type selection 28 table 202vd changes the types of jackpot types that can be selected with respect to the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 323) in the twelfth embodiment described above. Is different. In addition, as the types of jackpot types that can be selected are changed, the setting values of the time reduction counter 203f and the setting contents of the probability change flag 203g specified for each jackpot type are also different, and each jackpot. The selection rate of the type is also different. Since the other elements, for example, the type of the variable winning device to be opened for the jackpot game and the opening operation content thereof, are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 608, in the 28th embodiment, three jackpot types of "big hit A28" to "big hit C28" are defined as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. Further, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, two jackpot types of "big hit D28" and "big hit E28" are defined.

As shown in FIG. 608, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 corresponds to the range of "0 to 34", and the jackpot type corresponds to "big hit A28". It is specified with. This "big hit A28" is a type of jackpot (8 rounds normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 and the normal mode (normal state) is set after the jackpot ends.

In the present embodiment, as in the twelfth embodiment described above, the value of the time saving counter 203f set at the end of the big hit game (after the end of the big hit game) is configured to be different depending on the game state at the time of winning the big hit. However, when this "big hit A28" is won, the value of the time saving counter 203f is set regardless of which game state (normal state, probable change state, latent state) is at the time of the big hit winning. 0 is set. Further, at the end of the big hit game (after the end of the big hit game), the probability change flag 203g is configured not to be set on (set to off). That is, after the jackpot game is completed, the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) is always set as the jackpot type. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the game state set after the jackpot game is completed, it is the most disadvantageous jackpot type for the player.

Next, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "35 to 79", and the jackpot type is defined in association with "big hit B28". ing. This "big hit B28" is a type of big hit (8 round probability variable big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds and the high probability state of the special symbol is set after the big hit ends.

When this "big hit B28" is won, a different value is set in the value of the time reduction counter 203f according to the game state at the time of the big hit, and the game state at the time of the big hit is in the normal state. In some cases, the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to 0, in the case of the probabilistic state, the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to 100, and in the case of the latent state, the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to 50. Is stipulated to be. Further, it is stipulated that the probability change flag 203g is set to ON at the end of the big hit game (after the end of the big hit game). That is, in the normal state, when the "big hit B28" is won, the latent probability state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) is set after the jackpot game ends, and the probability change state and the latent probability state are set. In the case of winning the "big hit B28", the probability change state (high probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) is set after the end of the jackpot game.

Further, the time saving counter 203f is configured to have a larger value when the "big hit B28" is won in the probability change state than when the "big hit B28" is won in the latent state. As described in the twelfth embodiment described above, the time reduction counter 203f is a counter for indicating a period during which the high probability state of the normal symbol continues, and is a counter value based on the execution of the special symbol lottery. Is subtracted and the low probability state of the normal symbol is set when the counter value becomes 0.

That is, when the "big hit B28" is won in the probabilistic state, the game state in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is hard to be set is set as compared with the case where the "big hit B28" is won in the latent state. .. In the 28th embodiment, since the latent probability state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, the "big hit B28" is won in the probability variation state. However, winning the "big hit B28" in the latent state is a big hit that is advantageous to the player.

Next, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "80 to 99", and the jackpot type is defined in association with "big hit C28". ing. This "big hit C28" is a type of jackpot (8 rounds probability variation jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 and a high probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends.

When this "big hit C28" is won, 10000 is set in the value of the time saving counter 203f regardless of which game state (normal state, probable change state, latent state) is at the time of the big hit winning. .. Further, it is stipulated that the probability change flag 203g is set to ON at the end of the big hit game (after the end of the big hit game). That is, after the jackpot game is completed, the probability variation state (high probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) is always set as the jackpot type.

As described above, in the 28th embodiment, when the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, "big hit A28" is selected at a rate of 35%, and "big hit B28" is selected at a rate of 45%. It is configured so that "big hit C28" is selected at a rate of 20%. And, regardless of which jackpot type is selected, the number of round games executed during the jackpot game is the same (8 rounds), so from the viewpoint of the prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game. , A jackpot game with no advantages or disadvantages is executed. Further, from the viewpoint of the degree of advantage of the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game, the "big hit A28" is the most disadvantageous to the player, and the "big hit B28" is the most advantageous jackpot type to the player. Further, the "big hit C28" is a jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player than the "big hit A28" and more disadvantageous to the player than the "big hit B28".

On the other hand, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 34", and the jackpot type is "big hit D28". ing. This "big hit D28" has the same contents as the "big hit A28" which is one of the big hit types of the first special symbol (special figure 1) described above. That is, when this "big hit D28" is won, 0 is set in the value of the time saving counter 203f regardless of which game state (normal state, probable change state, latent state) is at the time of the big hit winning. Will be done. Further, at the end of the big hit game (after the end of the big hit game), the probability change flag 203g is configured not to be set on (set to off). That is, after the jackpot game is completed, the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) is always set as the jackpot type. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the game state set after the jackpot game is completed, it is the most disadvantageous jackpot type for the player.

Next, "big hit E28" is defined as a big hit type in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "35 to 99". This "big hit E28" is a type of big hit (8 rounds probability variable big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds and the high probability state of the special symbol is set after the big hit is completed.

When this "big hit E28" is won, 100 is set in the value of the time saving counter 203f regardless of which game state (normal state, probable change state, latent state) is at the time of the big hit winning. .. Further, it is stipulated that the probability change flag 203g is set to ON at the end of the big hit game (after the end of the big hit game). That is, after the jackpot game is completed, the probability variation state (high probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) is always set as the jackpot type.

Next, with reference to FIG. 609, the contents of the small hit type selection 28 table 202ve in the 28th embodiment will be described. FIG. 609 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the small hit type selection 28 table 202ve. The small hit type selection 28 table 202ve defines the small hit type for the first special symbol with respect to the above-mentioned small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16B), and the small hit game. The difference is that the release target to be opened is changed, the symbol confirmation time is changed, and the control content to be performed for the special symbol change during execution is changed, and the other points are the same. .. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

To explain specifically the contents specified in the small hit type selection 28 table 202ve, the entire range "0 to 99" that the small hit type counter C5 can take is set for the first special symbol (special figure 1). On the other hand, "small hit A28" is associated with it. Since the range of possible values of the small hit type counter C5 is 100 of "0 to 99", the ratio of "small hit A28" selected at the time of winning the small hit of the first special symbol lottery is 100% ( It is configured to be 100/100).

When "small hit A28" is selected, a small hit game is executed in which the second attacker (small attacker) 4650 is opened for 0.1 seconds. As described above with reference to FIG. 604, the small attacker 4650 is arranged at a position where it is difficult for the game ball to win a prize even if the opening operation is executed, and the opening time is as short as 0.1 seconds. In the small hit game based on "small hit A28", the player can hardly win the prize ball.

Although detailed description is omitted, if a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, the third symbol display device is used until the small hit game (0.1 seconds) is completed. On the display surface of 81, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode (for example, "341") indicating that the first special symbol lottery was not won. That is, when the small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery in the normal state, the display mode for notifying the player that the small hit has been won and that the small hit game is being executed is displayed. It is configured not to. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the small hit game that cannot (difficultly) win the prize ball is executed (that is), so that the small hit game is executed. However, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the prize ball cannot be obtained and the player's motivation to play is reduced.

Further, when the "small hit A28" is won, the comparison is "0.1 seconds" as the symbol determination period of the first special symbol, that is, the period in which the stop display mode indicating the lottery result is continuously stopped and displayed. A short time is specified. As a result, the period from when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode indicating "small hit A28" to the end of the small hit game can be shortened, so that the period until the small hit game ends can be shortened. During that time, even if the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

Further, when "small hit A28" is selected, the processing of interruption or discard is executed for the second special symbol change (special figure 2 change) being executed. Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the 28th embodiment, when the small hit game is executed based on the result of one of the special symbol lottery (when the special symbol indicating the small hit is confirmed and displayed), it is being executed. The result of the special symbol lottery for the other special symbol change is discriminated, and the content of the control process executed for the other special symbol being changed is configured to be different based on the discriminant result.

More specifically, when the other special symbol is undergoing a jackpot fluctuation or a missed fluctuation, the other special symbol fluctuation (big hit fluctuation or the missed fluctuation) is discarded (forced in a display mode indicating the missed). If the other special symbol is a small hit fluctuation, the control to interrupt the small hit fluctuation (the subtraction of the fluctuation time is stopped until the small hit game is completed) is executed. It is configured to be possible.

With this configuration, for example, in the RUSH mode in which the latent state is set, if a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, and the second special symbol is in the big hit fluctuation, the big hit. It is possible to discard the fluctuation and not to discard the small hit fluctuation if the small hit fluctuation is in progress. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to stop and display the lottery result (big hit winning) of the second special symbol whose latent state can be terminated, so that the RUSH mode can be easily entertained by the player for a long time.

Further, in the 28th embodiment, when the big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the advantageous big hit in which the RUSH mode (latent state) is set again after the big hit game ends, and the normal mode (normal mode) after the big hit game ends. It is configured so that the fluctuation time of different length is set depending on the disadvantageous jackpot for which the normal state) is set. Specifically, the case where the advantageous jackpot is won is better than the case where the disadvantaged jackpot is won. Also, it is configured so that a short fluctuation time (1 second) can be easily selected.

As a result, it is possible to make it easier to stop and display the first special symbol in the display mode indicating the winning of the small hit during the special symbol change of the disadvantageous jackpot than during the special symbol change of the advantageous jackpot. That is, the disadvantageous jackpot can be more easily discarded than the advantageous jackpot. Therefore, in the latent state, a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, a prize ball is won by the small hit game, and a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, creating a situation where the disadvantageous big hit is easily discarded. It is possible to provide a novel playability that makes people expect to be played.

Here, the control content when interrupting the second special symbol change during execution based on the winning of the small hit of the first special symbol will be briefly described. When the control process for interrupting the second special symbol change during execution (special figure 2 variation) is executed, the process for interrupting the process for measuring the change time elapsed of the second special symbol change during execution is executed. Will be executed. Specifically, when the small hit game is executed, the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is set to on, and while the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is set to on, the second special symbol (special figure 2) is set. 2) The process of skipping the process of updating the value of the variable time counter 203n indicating the variable time (remaining variable time) of FIG. 2 is executed. Then, when the small hit game ends, the restart condition is satisfied (the temporary stop flag of the special figure 2 is set to off), and the process of updating the value of the interrupted special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is restarted. With this configuration, it is possible to prohibit the remaining fluctuation time of the second special symbol change during execution from being reduced while the small hit game is being executed (while the interruption condition is satisfied). Therefore, while the small hit game is being executed, for example, the winning second special symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed, and the winning game (big hit game, small hit game) is executed in duplicate. Can be banned. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

In addition, since the process of measuring the change time elapsed of the special symbol change during execution is only interrupted (skip), the second special symbol change that was executed before the small hit game after the restart condition is satisfied is satisfied. Can be restarted. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the player of the result of the special symbol lottery that has already been executed. In this embodiment, when the interruption condition is satisfied when the small hit is won, the process of interrupting the special symbol change during execution is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the special symbol change during execution may be continuously executed, and the stop display of the second special symbol change may be interrupted after the change time of the special symbol change has elapsed. That is, even if the interruption condition is satisfied, the update process for updating the fluctuation time of the special symbol change is continuously executed, and the update process is executed until the preset variation time elapses. If it is determined whether or not the condition is satisfied and it is determined that the interruption condition is satisfied, the stop display of the special symbol change may not be executed until the restart condition is satisfied. As a result, it is not necessary to interrupt the update process for updating the fluctuation time of the special symbol change in the middle, so that the processing load can be reduced.

Next, returning to FIG. 609, among the contents specified in the small hit type selection 28 table 202ve, the small hit type (“small hit C28”, small hit C28” that can be selected when the small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery. The contents of E28) will be explained. "Small hit C28" is associated with the value of the small hit type counter C5 in the range of "0 to 89", and "small hit E28" is associated with the range of "90 to 99". .. Since the range of possible values of the small hit type counter C5 is 100 from "0 to 99", the ratio of selecting "small hit C28" is 90% when the small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery. (90/100), the ratio of selecting "small hit E28" is configured to be 10% (10/100).

When "small hit C28" is selected, a small hit game is executed in which the first attacker (first variable winning device) 65 is opened for 1.5 seconds. In addition, "0.5 seconds" is selected as the symbol confirmation time of the special symbol. Further, even when "small hit E28" is selected, the same small hit game as the above-mentioned "small hit C28" is executed. That is, when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the small hit game is executed in which the first attacker 65 arranged at a position where the game ball is easily won is released for 1.5 seconds. A small hit game is performed in which a person can easily obtain a prize ball.

That is, in the 28th embodiment, the first small hit game in which the first attacker 65 is opened and the game ball is easily won, and the second attacker 4650 is opened and the game ball is won. The second small hit game, which is difficult to do, is configured to be feasible. In terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the small hit game, the first small hit game and the second small hit game are smaller in that the first small hit game is more advantageous than the second small hit game. It will be a winning game.

As shown in FIG. 609, the above-mentioned first small hit type (small hit C28, small hit E28) for executing the above-mentioned first small hit game (small hit game in which the first attacker 65 is opened) is the above-mentioned first. A symbol determination time (0.5 seconds) longer than that of the small hit type (small hit A28) for executing the two small hit game (small hit game in which the second attacker 4650 is opened) is specified. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a period during which the player can be aware that the small hit has been won and that the small hit game will be executed, and the player can easily understand the game. Can be provided. As described above, since the second small hit game is a small hit game in which a prize ball cannot be won (difficult), the symbol determination time should be shorter than the small hit type in which the first small hit game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the small hit is won and that the small hit game is executed.

Further, even when "small hit C28" and "small hit E28" are selected, control for suspending or discarding the other special symbol change during execution is executed as in the above-mentioned "small hit A28". Will be done. The control content in this case is different from the above-mentioned "small hit A28" only in that the type of the other special symbol is switched from the second special symbol to the first special symbol, and other than that. Are the same, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, when "small hit E28" is selected, the time saving end condition for shifting the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state is satisfied. With this configuration, for example, the second special symbol lottery is executed during the probability change state, which is the chance mode, and the "small hit E28" is selected. Based on the winning of the small hit, the "chance mode" is selected. It will shift to "RUSH mode".

In this way, by setting a time-saving end condition that can be satisfied even when the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed reaches a predetermined number of times, the player who is playing the "chance mode" is always in the "RUSH mode". Since it is possible to play the game while expecting the transition to "", it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the 28th embodiment, the small hit type (small hit E28) for which the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the small hit winning is specified only when the small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery. Not limited to this, even when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, a small hit type that can satisfy the time saving end condition may be selected. With this configuration, in the first special symbol lottery that is mainly executed during the "chance mode", it is possible to satisfy the time saving end condition regardless of the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed. It is possible to make it easier for a player who is playing the "mode" to expect a transition to the "RUSH mode".

Further, in the 28th embodiment, the time saving end condition is satisfied based on winning the small hit E28 once, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of times (not limited to this) for a specific small hit type ( For example, you may set a time saving end condition that is satisfied when you win 5 times). By providing such a time saving end condition, it is possible to increase the rate at which a specific small hit type is selected when the probability that the time saving end condition based on the small hit winning is satisfied is constant. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to have a variation in the period required until the time saving end condition is satisfied according to the game result of the player, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 having a time saving end condition that is satisfied when the specific small hit type is won a plurality of times (for example, 5 times), the number of times the specific small hit type is won and the time saving are obtained. It is preferable to configure the player to execute the number-of-times notification effect so that the player can grasp the number of remaining winnings required until the end condition is satisfied.

In addition, in the 28th embodiment, one kind of time saving end condition that can be satisfied based on the small hit winning is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of time saving ending conditions may be provided, for example, a specific time saving end condition. The first time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the first small hit type, which is one of the small hit types, is won five times, and the second, which is one of the specific small hit types and different from the first small hit type. A second time-saving end condition, which is satisfied when the small hit type is won twice, may be provided. Then, it is preferable to configure the first small hit type so that it is easier to select than the second small hit type. With this configuration, it is possible to expect the player to select a different small hit type while grasping which time-saving end clause is likely to be established.

In the 28th embodiment, one type of time saving end condition that can be satisfied based on the small hit winning is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the state in which the time saving ending condition is easily satisfied based on the small hit winning and the time saving ending condition are provided. A state in which the condition is difficult to be satisfied may be configured to be configurable. For example, in the jackpot type in which the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends, the jackpot type in which the time saving end condition is easily satisfied during the probability change state and the time reduction The jackpot type, which is difficult to satisfy the end condition, may be configured to be selectable.

More specifically, the first big hit type, which can set the probability variation state in which the time saving end condition is satisfied when the specific first small hit type is won five times, and the specific first small hit type are won three times. In some cases, a second jackpot type that can set a probable change state in which the time saving end condition is satisfied may be configured to be selectable. With this configuration, it is possible to make the ease of satisfying the time saving end condition different even for the jackpot types in which the same probability variation state is set. Further, in this case, it is preferable to perform an effect that makes it difficult for the player to understand which jackpot type is selected when the probability change state is set. For example, the time saving end condition that is most advantageous to the player. It is preferable to execute an effect of notifying the remaining number of times until is satisfied. Then, when the remaining number of times becomes 0, an effect of inciting whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied is executed, and when the jackpot type in which the time saving end condition most advantageous to the player is set is selected. Executes the effect of shifting to the RUSH mode as it is, and executes the effect of continuing the game in the probable change state when the time reduction end condition other than the time reduction end condition that is most advantageous to the player is set. It is good to configure it like this. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of entertaining the player when to shift to the latent probability state of the "RUSH mode" in the probability change state of the "chance mode".

Furthermore, the time saving end condition (small hit time saving end condition) that can be satisfied based on the small hit winning and the time saving end condition (variable number of time saving end conditions) that can be satisfied based on the number of executions of the special symbol lottery are set respectively. In the possible pachinko machine 10, the same time saving end condition (for example, 50 times) is set as the variation number time saving end condition, and only the small hit time saving end condition is made different according to the selected jackpot type as described above. Alternatively, the same time-saving end condition (for example, winning 5 times for a specific small hit type) is set as the small hit time-saving end condition, and only the variable number of time-saving end conditions are selected as the jackpot type as described above. It may be different depending on it. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the types of time-saving end conditions (small hit time-saving end conditions, variable number of time-saving end conditions) that are easy to be established different according to the selected jackpot type, and to further enhance the interest of the game. Can be improved.

Further, as a condition for shortening the number of fluctuations, in the 28th embodiment, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol (number of lottery) and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (number of lottery) are based on the total number of fluctuations. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a variable number time reduction end condition for counting only the number of changes (lottery number) of one special symbol may be set.

In the 28th embodiment, when one special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode showing a specific lottery result, it is possible to discard or interrupt the other special symbol change being executed. is doing. In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of discarding or interrupting the execution of the special symbol change, the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the number of times the change starts) and the number of times the special symbol is changed (in the manner of showing the lottery result). The number of times stopped is displayed) and may not match. In this case, the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed may be used as an element for satisfying the time saving end condition, or the number of times the special symbol change is executed (stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the lottery result). The number of times) may be used. In particular, when the latter number of times is used, for example, when the other special symbol change during execution is discarded, the number of times is not counted, and when the other special symbol change during execution is interrupted. Will be counted at the time when the special symbol change after the restart (for example, restarted after the end of the jackpot) is stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to understand at what timing the time saving end condition is satisfied, and it is possible to make the player play the game while being interested in it.

In the 28th embodiment, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is won in one special symbol lottery, the content of the control to be executed for the other special symbol change being executed is set in the other special symbol change lottery result. It is configured to be switchable based on, but it is not limited to this, and it may be configured to be switchable based on the fluctuation status (residual fluctuation time) of the other special symbol fluctuation, specifically, the other being executed. If the fluctuation pattern set for the special symbol fluctuation of is a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 30 seconds or more, the special symbol fluctuation is forcibly stopped (discarded) and has a fluctuation time of less than 30 seconds. In the case of a fluctuation pattern, the control content may be configured to be switchable so as to interrupt the special symbol fluctuation. By configuring as follows, whether or not to discard the lottery result of the running special symbol lottery is determined according to the fluctuation status of the running special symbol change, so the special symbol indicating the small hit winning is It is possible to make the player interested in the timing at which the stop display is displayed.

Further, in this case, since the content of the variation pattern, that is, the length of the variation time is set as a condition for switching the control content for the special symbol variation during execution, for example, the variation corresponding to the lottery result disadvantageous to the player. By simply defining the fluctuation pattern table so that the fluctuation time of the pattern becomes long, it is possible to make it easy to forcibly stop (discard) the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the lottery result which is disadvantageous to the player. The conditions used when determining the control content are not limited to this, and for example, the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol change during execution and whether or not the lottery result satisfies the specific condition are determined, and the determination result is determined. The result of the control content may be determined based on. Further, the control content to be executed for the executing first special symbol change may be determined based on the combination of the executing first special symbol change and the lottery result of the second special symbol won by the small hit. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 610, among the variation pattern selection 28 tables 202vf in the 28th embodiment, the first latency table 202vf1 and the second latency table 202vf2 referred to during the latency state Will be explained. First, FIG. 610 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the variation pattern selection 28 table 202vf. As shown in FIG. 610 (a), the variation pattern selection 28 table 202vf is referred to in the latent state with respect to the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 17) of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above. There is a difference between the change in the contents of the variation pattern table and the change in the name of the time reduction / probability change table 202f2 (see FIG. 17) to the probability change table 202f2 because the time reduction state is not set as the game state. Are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 610 (a), the variation pattern selection 28 table 202vf includes a normal table 202f1 referred to during the normal state, a probability change table 202f2 referred to during the probability change state, and a probability change table 202f2 referred to during the probability state. The first latent probability table 202vf1 and the second latent probability table 202vf2 to be referred to are defined.

In the 28th embodiment, the first latent probability table 202vf1 is referred to immediately after the latent probability state is set, and then, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the second latent probability table 202vf2 is referred to thereafter. It is configured to be done. The contents defined as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (special figure 1) are different between the first latent probability table 202vf1 and the second latent probability table 202vf2.

Here, the contents of the first latency table 202vf1 will be described with reference to FIG. 610 (a). FIG. 610 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the first latency table 202vf1. In the 28th embodiment, in the latent state (RUSH mode), the second special symbol lottery in which the lottery opportunity is established by letting the game ball enter the second entrance 640 by the right-handed game is mainly performed. It is configured so that a short fluctuation time is selected for the second special symbol fluctuation so as to be executed.

In addition, the electric accessory 64r is released when the player wins the game by hitting the right-handed game in the latent state (RUSH mode) and the game ball passes through the through gate 67. It operates, a game ball enters the right first entrance 64ra, and the first special lottery is executed. Then, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery (when "small hit A28" is selected), the second special symbol change during execution is interrupted or discarded.

To specifically explain the contents specified in the first latent probability table 202vf1, if the type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special diagram 1) and the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit, it is acquired. If the jackpot short variation with a variation time of 2 seconds is specified for the entire range (0 to 198) of the values that can be taken by the variation type counter CS1 and the hit / fail judgment result is a small hit, the acquired variation type counter CS1 is taken. If the small hit fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is specified for the entire range (0 to 198) of the obtained value and the hit / fail judgment result is incorrect, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149". On the other hand, an deviation short variation of 10 seconds is specified, and an deviation variation of 30 seconds is specified for the range of "150 to 198".

Further, when the type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the hit / fail judgment result is the jackpot type "big hit D28" which is a disadvantageous jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player, it is acquired. A jackpot variation with a variation time of 30 seconds is specified for the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the variation type counter CS1. In the case of the type "big hit E28", the big hit short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 1 second is specified for the entire range (0 to 198) of the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the hit / fail judgment result is a small hit. In that case, the small hit variation with a variation time of 1 second is specified for the entire range (0 to 198) of the values that can be taken by the acquired variation type counter CS1. The deviation time of 1 second is specified for the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the counter CS1.

In the 28th embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 609, when one special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the small hit winning, the other special symbol change during execution is the big hit change. In that case, it is configured to discard (forced stop) the jackpot fluctuation. Then, in the above-mentioned first latent probability table 202vf1, when a disadvantageous big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is selected, and a small hit in the first special symbol lottery. Even if the player wins, the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is selected.

That is, during the period when the small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery and the small hit fluctuation for 30 seconds is executed, even if the disadvantageous jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the disadvantageous jackpot fluctuation is surely performed. It is configured to be destroyed. Therefore, during the period in which the first special symbol fluctuation is executing the small hit fluctuation, it is an advantageous period in which the RUSH mode (latent state) is not won and the disadvantageous jackpot is not won. In the 28th embodiment, the "invincible mode" (see FIG. 605) can be executed as an effect for indicating that this advantageous period has arrived. This makes it possible to provide the player with a period in which he / she can play the game with peace of mind.

Further, in the 28th embodiment, the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is selected regardless of whether the disadvantageous big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery or the small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery. Therefore, for example, even if a player wins a disadvantage in the second special symbol lottery and wins a small hit in the first special symbol lottery during the second special symbol fluctuation period (disadvantageous jackpot fluctuation period) of 30 seconds, it is disadvantageous first. Since the jackpot is displayed as stopped, it is configured so that the disadvantageous jackpot fluctuation is not discarded. With this configuration, for example, after noticing that the second special symbol fluctuation for a long time (30 seconds) has been executed by the right-handed game, the left-handed game is executed and the first special symbol lottery is performed. It is possible to suppress the execution of irregular games such as aiming for a small hit.

Further, when the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, the fluctuation time longer than the fluctuation time selected when the small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery is selected. In the present embodiment, the second special symbol lottery is configured to win a small hit with a high probability (about 50%). Therefore, during the RUSH mode, the second special symbol lottery is continuously executed. , The jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol lottery can be almost eliminated. On the other hand, in the case of winning the advantageous jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, that is, the jackpot E28 which is the jackpot type in which the RUSH mode is set again after the jackpot game is completed, the second special symbol variation (advantageous) with a fluctuation time of 1 second. Since the jackpot fluctuation) is executed, it can be made more difficult to be discarded by the small hit of the first special symbol lottery than the disadvantageous jackpot fluctuation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 610 (b), in the first latent probability table 202vf1, the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is selected at a rate of about 1/4 when the first special symbol lottery is missed and won. It is configured as follows. In this way, by configuring the lottery result other than the small hit winning to be able to select a long fluctuation time, the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to the fluctuation time of the executed special symbol fluctuation. It is possible to suppress the determination based on the above. In addition, since the frequency of the first special symbol lottery executed during the latent state can be suppressed, it is possible to suppress the excessive setting of the "invincible mode" and the provision of an excessively advantageous game to the player. be able to.

Next, the contents of the second latent probability table 202vf2 will be described with reference to FIG. 610 (c). FIG. 610 (c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the second latency table 202vf2. In the present embodiment, when a specific transition condition is satisfied in the RUSH mode (latent state), the type of the variation pattern table referred to when selecting the variation time of the special symbol variation is configured to be switched. Until the specific transition condition is satisfied, the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is selected with reference to the above-mentioned first latent probability table 202vf1, and after the specific transition condition is satisfied, the second latent probability is satisfied. It is configured so that the fluctuation time of the special symbol variation is selected with reference to the table 202vf2.

The second latent probability table 202vf2 is different from the above-mentioned first latent probability table 202vf1 in that the length of the variable time that can be selected when the first special symbol lottery is missed and won is different. However, everything else is the same. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 610 (c), in the second latent probability table 202vf2, if the type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special diagram 1) and the hit / fail determination result is incorrect, the acquired variation is obtained. A short variation with a variation time of 1 second is specified for the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the type counter CS1. That is, if the player wins the game in the first special symbol lottery, the game is configured so that the game has a variation time of 1 second.

With this configuration, the first special symbol fluctuation executed during the RUSH mode will not be changed for a long time except for the small hit fluctuation (invincible mode), so that the first special symbol lottery per unit time will not occur. The number of times of execution can be increased from the state in which the fluctuation time is selected with reference to the first latent probability table 202vf1, and the length of the invincible mode period in the game period can be easily increased. can.

That is, in the RUSH mode, it is possible to set a second period that is more advantageous to the player than the first period in which the first latency table 202vf1 is referenced. Therefore, it is possible to make a player who is playing a game in the RUSH mode play a game while expecting that a specific transition condition is satisfied.

Further, in the 28th embodiment, as a transition condition for shifting from the first period in which the first latency table 202vf1 is referred to to the second period in which the second latency table 202vf2 is referred to, it is special. The number of times the symbol change is executed is specified. Specifically, the transition condition is satisfied when the special symbol change is executed 50 times, and the transition is made to the second period. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player in the RUSH mode with a novel game property of playing a game while expecting not to win a big hit. Further, when the second period is set, it becomes more difficult to win the big hit (a state in which the big hit fluctuation is easily discarded), so that the RUSH mode can be easily continued for a long period of time.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern scenario 28 table 202vg will be described with reference to FIG. 611. FIG. 611 is a diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the variation pattern scenario 28 table 202vg. As shown in FIG. 611, in the 28th embodiment, when the latent probability state is set, the fluctuation time is selected by referring to different fluctuation patterns according to the number of special symbol fluctuations (number of special symbol fluctuations). It is configured to do.

Specifically, the first latent probability table 202vf1 is referred to until the special symbol change is executed 50 times after the latent probability state is set, and after that, the second latent probability table 202vf2 is referred to. It is configured to be. That is, when the period of the latent probability state (RUSH mode) becomes long, the second latent probability table 202vf2, which is more advantageous to the player than the first latent probability table 202vf1, is referred to. As a result, the player in the RUSH mode can be enthusiastically played to continue the RUSH mode for a long period of time.

In the 28th embodiment, the contents of the variation pattern scenario 28 table 202vg are defined so that the player is more advantageous as the RUSH mode continues, but based on the fact that the transition condition is satisfied during the RUSH mode. Therefore, another configuration may be used based on the technical idea that the degree of advantage to the player is different. For example, immediately after the RUSH mode is set, the state that is most advantageous to the player is obtained. The contents of the variation pattern scenario 28 table 202vg may be specified in. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player who has entered the RUSH mode evenly execute the game in the advantageous state.

Further, in the 28th embodiment, the degree of advantage to the player is changed by changing the fluctuation pattern (variation time) selected when the player loses the prize by the first special symbol lottery, but the degree of advantage is limited to this. No, for example, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) selected when a small hit is won by the first special symbol lottery, that is, the degree of advantage to the player can be changed by changing the length of the invincible mode period. 2 By making the fluctuation pattern (variation time) selected when the advantageous jackpot is won by the special symbol lottery different, or by making the fluctuation pattern (variation time) selected when the disadvantageous jackpot is won, the game It may be configured to change the degree of advantage to the person.

In this case, for example, 30 seconds and 2 seconds can be selected as the variable time that can be selected when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, and further, a disadvantageous big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery. As the fluctuation time selected in this case, a fluctuation time longer than 30 seconds and a fluctuation time shorter than 30 seconds may be selectably configured. With this configuration, if the disadvantageous jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery during the small hit fluctuation of the first special symbol, the disadvantaged jackpot may or may not be discarded according to the selected fluctuation time. You can create cases. Then, in the advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the special symbol variation of 30 seconds is more likely to be selected when the small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery than in the disadvantageous state, and the disadvantageous jackpot is caused by the second special symbol variation. When winning, it is preferable to configure it so that a fluctuation time longer than 30 seconds can be easily selected.

Further, according to the above-mentioned example, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, a fluctuation time of 2 seconds can be selected. Therefore, for example, a disadvantageous jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery and the disadvantageous jackpot fluctuation Even after the above is executed, it is possible to discard the disadvantageous big hit fluctuation by winning the small hit in the first special symbol lottery. Therefore, it is possible to have the possibility of discarding the unfavorable jackpot fluctuation until the second special symbol indicating the unfavorable jackpot winning is stopped and displayed, and the player can be enthusiastically played the game.

In the 28th embodiment, two types of fluctuation pattern tables that are referred to during the latent probability state are provided, and the degree of advantage to the player differs depending on the type of the variable pattern table that is referred to. Three or more types of fluctuation pattern tables referred to during the state may be provided. Further, in the 28th embodiment, in the variation pattern scenario 28 table 202vg, an example in which one switching timing for switching the reference variation pattern table is provided is shown, but the variation is not limited to this, and the variation is performed at a plurality of timings. The scenario content may be specified so that the pattern table is switched.

Further, in the 28th embodiment, the number of executions of the special symbol variation is set as a transition condition for switching the variation pattern table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is established based on, for example, the result of the special symbol lottery. The fluctuation pattern table is switched based on the transition conditions to be performed, for example, the fluctuation pattern table is switched when a specific small hit is won, or the RUSH mode is continuously set across the jackpot game (number of consecutive villas). You may switch. Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of transition conditions, the fluctuation patterns referred to may be different depending on the order in which each transition condition is satisfied. For example, each of the pachinko machines 10 may be configured in a specific order. A special variation pattern table that can be referred to only when the transition condition is satisfied is provided so that the state in which the special variation pattern table is referred to is the most advantageous state or the most disadvantageous state for the player. It is advisable to specify the contents of the special fluctuation pattern table.

With this configuration, the player can be interested not only in the presence or absence of the transition conditions, but also in the order in which the transition conditions are satisfied.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 included in the main control device 110 according to the 28th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 612. FIG. 612 is a diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the RAM 203 included in the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 612, the RAM 203 of the 28th embodiment deletes the second special symbol execution area 203b with respect to the RAM 203 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 21) described above, and the second special symbol holding ball. A storage area 203va, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203vb, a special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203vc, a special figure 1 subtraction flag 203vd, a special figure 2 subtraction flag 203ve, and a time saving end wait flag 203vf are added. It differs in that it is the same, otherwise it is the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The second special symbol holding ball storage area 203vb is a storage area for temporarily storing the lottery right of the second special symbol. In the first embodiment described above, the lottery right of the first special symbol is memorable up to a predetermined number (4 pieces), but the lottery right of the second special symbol is not memorable. , If the execution of the second special symbol lottery is permitted at the time when the lottery right of the second special symbol is acquired, each value acquired is stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b, and the second special is immediately obtained. It was configured to execute a symbol lottery.

On the other hand, the 28th embodiment is different in that the lottery right is stored up to a predetermined number (4) even for the second special symbol. The content of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203vb is obtained only by changing the type of the special symbol to be stored with respect to the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a described above in the first embodiment. The contents other than are the same. That is, each of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the small hit type counter C5, and the variable type counter CS1 according to the timing of entering the second ball entry port 640. Each value is stored.

Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the hold first area of the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203va are shifted to the second special symbol execution area. , Special symbol variation based on various stored values is started.

As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol at the same time (in parallel), each special symbol is available. The holding ball storage area (first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, second special symbol holding ball storage area 203va) is configured to have an execution area, respectively. As a result, when the start condition of each special symbol is satisfied, the next special symbol change can be promptly executed.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203vb is a counter for measuring the number of lottery rights (reserved balls) of the second special symbol, and is counted with respect to the above-mentioned first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d. Is different in that the number of balls reserved for the first special symbol changes from the number of balls reserved for the second special symbol, and is the same except for the above.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203vb is based on the entry of a game ball into the second entry port 640, which is detected in the timer interruption process that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display effect (variable display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 up to four times. The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203vb is set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, each time the starting prize is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203vb is decremented by 1 each time the variation display effect is executed.

Further, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203vb (that is, the number of reserved balls) is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball based on the ball entering the second entry port 640 (starting prize). When the counter value is stored in the area 203va, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. The second special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203vb is incremented by 1. Is.

The special figure 1 subtraction flag 203vd is a flag indicating whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203f should be subtracted when the fluctuation is stopped in the fluctuation of the first special symbol. This special figure 1 subtraction flag 203vd is used when it is determined in the first special symbol change start processing 28 (see S10208 in FIG. 614) that the value of the time saving counter 203f is a value larger than 0 (S10301: Yes in FIG. 614). ), Set to on (S10302 in FIG. 614), and when it is determined in the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203vd that the time saving update flag 203vd is on, the value of the time saving counter 203f is subtracted and then set to off. Will be done.

If a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is set to off in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 28 (see S10221 in FIG. 620). Similarly, in the case of winning a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is set to off in the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 28 (not shown). In addition, by setting the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203vd to off when a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery, if the change of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped after the big hit game is completed, the change is changed. When the fluctuation is stopped after restarting, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203vd is off, and when it is determined that the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203vd is off, the value of the time saving counter 203f is subtracted. The process is skipped and the process to stop the fluctuation is executed.

The special figure 2 subtraction flag 203ve is a flag for indicating whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203f should be subtracted when the fluctuation is stopped in the fluctuation of the second special symbol. The detailed contents are different only in that the target is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol with respect to the above-mentioned special figure 1 subtraction flag 103vd, and other than that, they are the same. The explanation is omitted.

The time reduction end waiting flag 203vf is a flag indicating that the special figure change in which the end condition of the time reduction state is satisfied has been started. The time saving end wait flag 203vf determines whether the value of the time saving counter 203f is 1 (that is, the final change of the specified number of times in the time saving state) in the first special symbol change start processing 28 (see S10208 in FIG. 614). (S10303), when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 (S10303: Yes), it is set to ON (S10304 in FIG. 614).

Then, it is set to off when the time saving update process (see S10908 in FIG. 621), which is the timing for stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol, is executed. With this configuration, when the time reduction end wait flag 203vf is set to ON (that is, the standby state), when any time reduction end timing arrives, it is sure to correspond to each timing. Can execute the time saving end processing.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the 28th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 614 to 622, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the 28th embodiment will be described. In the 28th embodiment, the control processing content for updating the time saving counter 203f and the control processing executed when a small hit is won are performed with respect to the control processing of the main control device 110 in the 12th embodiment described above. The contents and the control processing contents corresponding to the above-mentioned differences are different. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the twelfth embodiment described above, the content of the control process of the main control device 110 is described with reference to the above-mentioned first embodiment. Therefore, the content of the control process of the main control device 110 in the 28th embodiment is described. In the description, the content of the control process of the main control device 110 according to the first embodiment will be described as appropriate.

First, the contents of the first special symbol change start processing 28 (S10208) will be described with reference to FIG. 614. FIG. 614 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol change start processing 28 (S10208). The first special symbol change start process 28 (S10208) is a game state update process (see S308 in FIG. 33) with respect to the first special symbol change start process (see S208 in FIG. 33) in the above-described first embodiment. Instead of, the processing is executed according to the value of the time saving counter 203f, and the other points are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the first special symbol change start process 28 (S10208) is executed, first, the same processes of S301 to S307 as the first special symbol change start process (see S208 of FIG. 33) in the above-described first embodiment are executed. do. Then, next, it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203f is a value larger than 0, that is, whether the current gaming state is in the time reduction (S10301). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203f is larger than 0 (S10301: Yes), the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203vd is set to ON (S10302), and the process proceeds to S10303. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S10301 that the value of the time reduction counter 203f is not a value larger than 0 (S10301: No), the game state is the normal state, and the present process is terminated as it is. In this way, when the value of the time reduction counter 203f is larger than 0, that is, when the time reduction is in progress, by setting the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203vd to ON, the time reduction is started during the time reduction when the fluctuation is stopped. It is possible to determine whether or not the fluctuation has occurred, and it is possible to update the end condition of the time reduction (subtract the value of the time reduction counter 203f) when the fluctuation is stopped.

After executing the process of S10302 described above, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203f is 1 (S10303). That is, it is determined whether the final fluctuation is the end condition of the time saving state. When it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 (S10303: Yes), the time reduction end wait flag 203vf is set to ON (S10304), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S10303 that the value of the time saving counter 203f is not 1, it is not the final change of the time saving game state, so the present processing is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 615, the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 28 (S10331) will be described. FIG. 615 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 28 (S10331). The first special symbol jackpot determination process 28 (S10331) performs a process based on the setting status of the time saving end wait flag 203vf for the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 34) of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the added point and the processing executed when the big hit is not won in the first special symbol lottery are changed, and the other points are the same.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 28 (S10331), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S401). Then, in order to determine whether the time reduction end condition is satisfied and the state is waiting, that is, whether the time reduction final change is being executed in the lottery of the second special symbol, the time reduction end is performed. It is determined whether the wait flag 203vf is set to ON (S10401). When it is determined that the time reduction end wait flag 203vf is on (S10401: Yes), the period of the time reduction state set this time has ended, so that the game state storage area of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 (S10401: Yes). (Not shown) is set to the normal state (S10402), and the time saving end wait flag 203vf and the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203ve are set to off (S10403). Next, the value of the time reduction counter 203f is set to 0 (S10404), a state command indicating that the gaming state has been switched to the normal state is set (S10405), and the process proceeds to S10406. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S10401 that the time saving end wait flag 203vf is not on (S10401: No), the final fluctuation of the time saving state is not executed, so the processing of S10402 to S10405 is skipped. The process proceeds to S10406.

In this way, in the state of waiting for the end of the time saving state (the state in which the final change of the time saving state is started in the other special symbol), the game is played before the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired. By setting the state to the normal state, even though the time-saving game state has ended, the time-saving game state with the other special symbol until the change of the special symbol in which the final change of the time-saving state is executed ends. It is possible to eliminate the problem of executing a game based on. Therefore, an appropriate game can be provided to the player.

Next, in the process of S10406, the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number 28 table 202va (S10406), it is determined whether the acquired lottery result is a big hit (S406), and if it is determined to be a big hit, (S406: Yes), the same processing of S407 to S410 as the first special symbol jackpot determination processing (S306 of FIG. 34) of the first embodiment described above is executed, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S406, if it is determined that the hit is not a big hit (off, a small hit) (S406: No), the special figure 1 out-of-bounds variation process 28 is executed (S10407), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 616, the contents of the special figure 1 deviation variation processing 28 (S10407) will be described. FIG. 616 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 deviation processing 28 (S10407). In the special figure 1 deviation variation processing 28, when the big hit is not won in the first special symbol lottery (when the loss is won), a process for determining whether or not the small hit is won is executed. The detailed contents differ only in that the processing target is switched from the second special symbol to the first special symbol with respect to the above-mentioned special figure 2 deviation processing (see S1011 in FIG. 41). Other than that, they are the same.

In the special figure 1 deviation variation processing 28 (S10407), first, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result (the lottery result of S406 in the first special symbol big hit determination process 28 (see FIG. 615)) is a small hit (S3111). ..

If it is determined in the processing of S3111 that a small hit has been won (S3111: Yes), information indicating a special figure 1 small hit is set for the small hit flag 203k (S3112), and a lottery for the first special symbol is made. The result is set to a small hit (S3113), then the small hit symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S3113), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3111, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a small hit, that is, it is out of order (S3111: No), the out-of-order symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. It is set (S3115), and this process is terminated.

As described above, the special symbol 1 deviation processing 28 (S10407 in FIG. 616) executed as one process of the first special symbol variation start processing 28 (see S10208 in FIG. 614), that is, the fluctuation of the special symbol (see S10208 in FIG. 614). By setting the small hit flag 203k to ON when it is determined that the small hit has been won in the process executed at the timing of starting the lottery), the small hit flag 203k is set at the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol. It is possible to easily execute the process corresponding to the small hit winning based on the setting status.

The small hit flag 203k used in the present embodiment has a special figure 1 area indicating that the small hit was won in the first special symbol lottery and a special figure 2 area indicating that the small hit was won in the second special symbol lottery. If you win a small hit in the first special symbol lottery, set the flag of the special figure 1 area to on, and if you win a small hit in the second special symbol lottery, , The flag of the special figure 2 area is configured to be set to on. As a result, even if a small hit is won in duplicate in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, the state can be easily stored.

Next, the contents of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 28 (S10332) will be described with reference to FIG. 617. FIG. 617 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 28 (S10332). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 28 (S10332) is a variation pattern other than the jackpot winning with respect to the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 35) executed in the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the process for selecting is added, and the rest is the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 28 (S10332) is executed, the same processes of S501 to S505 as in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 35) are executed, and this process is terminated. .. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S501 that the result of the lottery this time is not a big hit (S501: No), the special figure 1 deviation pattern selection process 28 is executed (S10501), and then the process proceeds to the process of S503 described above. do. The contents of the deviation pattern selection process 28 (S10501) in the special figure 1 will be described later with reference to FIG. 618.

Here, with reference to FIG. 618, the contents of the special figure 1 deviation pattern selection process 28 (S10501) will be described. FIG. 618 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 deviation pattern selection process 28 (S10501). In the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process 28 (S10501), the same processing content as the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (see S1207 in FIG. 43) of the above-described 7th embodiment is performed from the second special symbol. The process of switching to the first special symbol is executed.

When it is determined that the lottery result (special figure 1 lottery result) of the first special symbol this time is not a small hit when the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process 28 (S10501) is executed (S10591: No), The processing having the same contents as S1307 to S1309 of the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation pattern selection processing (see S1207 in FIG. 43) is executed by changing the processing target to the first special symbol (S10597 to S10599), and then this processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S10591 that it is a small hit (S10591: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired (S10592), and the small hit type is obtained based on the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5. Selection 28 The small hit type is selected with reference to the table 202ve (S10593). Next, the processing having the same contents as the processing of S1304 to S1306 of the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation pattern selection processing (see S1207 of FIG. 43) is executed by changing the processing target to the first special symbol (S10594 to S10596). End the process.

Next, the first special symbol variation in-execution process (S10205) will be described with reference to FIG. 619. In the 28th embodiment, the same processing of S701 to S705 as the processing during execution of the first special symbol change (see S205 in FIG. 37) of the first embodiment described above is executed. Therefore, detailed description will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 28 (S10221) will be described with reference to FIG. 620. FIG. 620 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 28 (S10221). The first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 28 (S10221) has determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is not set to ON for the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S207 in FIG. 38) described above. In the case of (S801: No), that is, when the first special symbol fluctuation to be stopped this time is an out-of-bounds fluctuation, the special figure 1 out-of-order stop processing 28 (S10801) is changed to be executed, and the special figure. The difference is that the processing content to be executed when it is determined that the 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S801: Yes) is changed. For convenience of explanation, the number (S number) assigned to each process and the wording of the process contents are different, but the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 38) in the above-described first embodiment. The same processing content as in S207) will be omitted in detail.

When the first special symbol change stop process 28 (S10221) is executed and it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S801: Yes), then the special figure 2 is changing, that is, It is determined whether or not the second special symbol change is being executed (S10802). Here, if it is determined that the special figure 2 is being changed (S10802: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop indicating that the special figure change is stopped. A command is set (S10803), the second special symbol of the first symbol display device is stopped and displayed with a missed symbol (S10804), the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is set to 0 (S10805), and the process proceeds to S10806. Transition.

That is, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lottery result indicating the big hit, the process for forcibly stopping the execution special symbol change due to the deviation is executed in the above-mentioned processes S10803 to S10805. .. In addition, in this embodiment, regardless of the lottery result of the special figure 2 change during execution, the special symbol change during execution is forcibly stopped at the time of deviation. With this configuration, after the jackpot game is over, when both the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol are held, both special symbol fluctuations can be executed at the same time.

In this embodiment, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lottery result indicating a big hit, it is configured to be forcibly stopped regardless of the lottery result of the change in the special figure 2 being executed. However, the control content may be changed according to the lottery result of the variation of the special figure 2.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S10802 that the second special symbol change is not executed (S10802: No), the process of S10803 to S10808 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S10809.

In the process of S10806, in order to determine whether the special figure 2 fluctuation determined to be changing in the process of S10802 is a jackpot variation, it is determined whether the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is on (S10806) and turned on. If it is determined to be (S10806: Yes), the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to off (S10807), the stored information for the special figure 2 jackpot is deleted (S10808), and the process proceeds to S10809. Further, in the process of S10806, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is not set to ON (S10806: No), the processes of S10807 and S10808 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S10809. That is, the processes of S10807 to S10808 are processes for discarding the result of the special symbol lottery that has won the big hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the information on the jackpot from remaining after the special figure 2 fluctuation during execution is deviated and the player is forcibly stopped.

In the processing of S10809, a jackpot scenario based on the jackpot winning in the first special symbol lottery is set (S10809), the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h, the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203vd, the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203ve, and the time saving end standby. The flag 203vf and the probability variation flag 203g are set to off, and the value of the time saving counter 203g is reset to 0 (S10810). After that, the jackpot middle flag 203o is set to ON (S10811), the special figure 1 confirmation command is set (S10812), and the fluctuation of the first special symbol of the first special symbol display device is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the jackpot. (S10813), this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 621, the special figure 1 disengagement stop process 28 (S10801) will be described. FIG. 621 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 disengagement stop process 28 (S10801). In the special figure 1 disengagement stop process 28 (S10801), the same process as the special figure 2 disengagement stop process (see S1508 of FIG. 46) of the first embodiment described above is performed, and the processing target is the first special from the second special symbol. The difference is that the small hit process 28 (S10902) is executed and the time saving update process (FIG. 10908) is executed while switching to the symbol, and the other points are the same. Is omitted.

Here, the small hit process 28 (S10902) executed in the special figure 1 disengagement stop process 28 (see S10801 in FIG. 621) will be described with reference to FIG. 622. FIG. 622 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit process 28 (S10902). In the small hit process 28 (S10902), various control processes corresponding to the winning small hit types are executed. Specifically, when a specific small hit type (small hit A, B, C) is won, processing (interruption processing, forced stop (discard) processing) according to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol change being executed is performed. It is configured to run.

When the small hit process 28 (S10902) is executed, first, the small hit type set for this special symbol variation is read (S11001), and the read small hit type is "small hit A or small hit C". (S11002). When it is determined that it is "small hit A" or "small hit C" (S11002: Yes), it is determined whether the special symbol is currently changing (the other special symbol is changing) (S11003). When it is determined that the figure change is in progress (S11003: Yes), then it is determined whether the special figure change is a small hit change (S11004).

Then, when it is determined in the processing of S11004 that the small hit fluctuation is in progress, the temporary stop flag indicating that the special symbol fluctuation being executed is interrupted (temporarily stopped), that is, the first special symbol is set in the current processing. If it is the small hit process 28 when the small hit is stopped, the temporary stop flag corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2 temporary stop flag), and this processing is the small when the second special symbol is stopped by the small hit. If it is the hit process 28, the temporary stop flag corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v) is set to on (S11005), and the temporary stop command indicating that the temporary stop flag is on is set (S11006). ), End this process.

Further, in the process of S11004, when it is determined that the small hit fluctuation is not in progress, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation or the deviation fluctuation is performed (S11004: No), it indicates that the special figure fluctuation during execution is stopped. A special symbol fluctuation stop command is set (S11007), the corresponding special symbol is stopped and displayed as a missed symbol on the first special symbol display device 37 (S11008), and the fluctuation time counter of the corresponding special symbol (special symbol) (S11007). The value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m or the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n) is set to 0 (S11009).

Next, it is determined whether the jackpot flag (special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h or special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i) is set to on based on the forced stop of the special figure fluctuation (S11010), and the jackpot flag is set to on. If it is determined to be present (S11010: Yes), the corresponding jackpot flag (special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h or special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i) is set to off (S11011), and the stored information for the jackpot is deleted (S11012). ), End this process.

If it is determined in the process of S11003 that the special figure is not changing (S11003: No), the process of S11004 to S11006 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S11002, when it is determined that it is not "small hit A" or "small hit C" (S11002: No), that is, when it is determined that it is "small hit B", the value of the time saving counter 203f. Is greater than 0, that is, it is determined whether the current state is in the high probability state of the normal symbol (S11013). When it is determined that the current state is in the high probability state of the normal symbol (S11013: Yes), it is next determined whether the time saving end wait flag 203vf is set to ON (S11014), and the time saving end waiting flag 203vf is set. When it is determined that it is not on (S11014: No), that is, when it is determined that it is not the final fluctuation of the probability change state, the time saving end wait flag 203vf is set to ON (S11015), and the process proceeds to the above-mentioned S11003 process. ..

As described above, in the 28th embodiment, when the small hit game is executed, the processing content is determined according to the content of the special symbol change being executed. More specifically, at the time when the small hit game is executed based on one special symbol lottery (when the special symbol indicating the small hit winning is stopped and displayed), the lottery result of the other special symbol change being executed is executed. If the lottery result is a specific lottery result (for example, missed, jackpot), the other special symbol change that is being executed is discarded (off forced stop), and if the lottery result is other than the specific lottery result. Is configured to be able to interrupt the other special symbol variation in progress. That is, when a specific condition for executing the special processing for the special symbol change during execution is satisfied, the processing content of the special processing is determined by referring to the lottery result of the special symbol being executed. ..

With this configuration, the player can be made to pay attention to the lottery result of the other special symbol change that is being executed at the time when the small hit is won (when the small hit is stopped) with one special symbol.

Not limited to this, for example, the content of the special processing determined when a specific condition is satisfied may be different according to the set gaming state. Specifically, when the normal state is set, even if a specific condition is satisfied, only "suspension" is determined as a special process, and when the probabilistic state is set, "suspension" or "suspension" or "suspension" is set. It may be configured so that "discard" is set. By making the determination content of the special process different according to the game state set in this way, it is possible to give diversity to the game playability in each game state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned small hit process 28 is executed regardless of whether the small hit is won by the first special symbol or the small hit is won by the second special symbol. The content of the special processing to be determined may be different depending on the type of the special symbol for which the specific condition is satisfied. For example, the second is higher than the case where the specific condition is satisfied for the first special symbol. It may be configured so that "discard" is more easily determined when a specific condition is satisfied in the special symbol. Specifically, the first special symbol lottery may be configured so that the specific conditions are more difficult to be satisfied than the second special symbol lottery (so that it is difficult to win a small hit), or the specific conditions are satisfied. In this case, the condition for determining "discard" is such that it is more difficult to satisfy the condition when the specific condition is satisfied in the first special symbol than when the specific condition is satisfied in the second special symbol. It may be configured. As a result, the content of the special processing can be different depending on which special symbol type the specific condition is satisfied, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the 28th embodiment is different from the above-mentioned 12th embodiment in that it is configured so that a small hit can be won in any of the 1st special symbol lottery and the 2nd special symbol lottery. There is. With this configuration, even if one of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery wins a big hit, the big hit can be discarded by the other small hit winning. Depending on the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, the ratio of the probable change jackpot at the time of winning the jackpot can be surely different.

In the 28th embodiment described above, the other special symbol is set as a condition (specific condition) that triggers the execution of special processing (interruption or destruction) for one special symbol variation (for example, the first special symbol variation). The conditions that are satisfied when a specific small hit is won in the fluctuation (for example, the second special symbol fluctuation) are shown, but other than this, an opportunity to establish the specific condition may be provided, for example, the ball is specified. It may be configured so that a specific condition is satisfied when the ball enters the entrance of the ball, or the power supplied to the pachinko machine 10 is not normal (for example, noise is generated and the power is temporarily supplied. May be configured so that a specific condition is satisfied when it is determined that the condition is rejected. Further, the game method executed by the player is an illegal game method (for example, a magnetic sensor for detecting the magnetic force is provided, and the game method when the magnetic sensor detects the magnetic force, or the impact detection for detecting the impact on the pachinko machine 10). A sensor may be provided so that a specific condition is satisfied when the impact detection sensor detects a predetermined amount of impact).

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, when the special symbol variation executed when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (when the probability variation state and the time saving state are set) is discarded (forced stop). , The number of time reductions (probability change number) is not added according to the discarded special symbol fluctuation. Specifically, in a gaming machine configured to set a latent probability state when the number of special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) while the probability change state is set. When the special symbol change executed during the probability change state is discarded (forced stop), the time reduction number (probability change number) is not added. In the pachinko machine 10 using such a configuration, for example, the display mode for showing the number of time reductions (the number of probability changes) until the probability change state ends on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is also synchronized with the number of time reductions. The display mode is not updated. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the special symbol variation has been discarded without updating the number of time reductions. In this case, for example, a pachinko machine configured to update the display mode for indicating the number of time reductions (probability variation number) displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 at the start timing of the special symbol change. In the case of the machine 10, the display mode is restored based on the fact that the special symbol variation is discarded (for example, if the remaining time reduction number is displayed, it is added, and if the elapsed time reduction number is displayed, it is displayed. If there is, subtract it).

In addition, as a transition condition for transitioning from the probabilistic state to the latent state (end condition for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol (time reduction end condition)), a plurality of time reduction end conditions (for example, the first special symbol). The first time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the total number of fluctuations and the second special symbol change reaches 100 times, and the second time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the second special symbol change is executed five times). In the pachinko machine 10 that has been set, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to the end condition that is most likely to be satisfied among the plurality of time-saving end conditions (for example, the second special symbol change 5 times). If the pachinko machine 10 is configured to notify the player of the game content in an easy-to-understand manner by displaying only "5"), the first special symbol change is executed immediately after the probability change state is set. However, the display mode of "5" displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is configured so as not to be updated. Then, when the first special symbol change is further executed 95 times after the probabilistic change state is set (when the 96th first special symbol change is executed), the first special symbol change is executed 95 times. , The display control for updating the display of "5" displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 to "4" is executed. In this way, it is determined whether or not to update the time reduction number display displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 according to the special symbol type in which the special symbol change is executed during the probability change (time reduction) state. This makes it possible to inform the player of the period until the probability change state ends in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Regarding the control content of the voice lamp control device in the 28th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 623 to 629, the control contents executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 28th embodiment will be described. The control content executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 28th embodiment is the variable display setting process 13 with respect to the control content executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the twelfth embodiment described above. Instead of (see S4121 in FIG. 334), the variable display setting process 28 (see S14121 in FIG. 623) is replaced with various counter update processes (see S4111 in FIG. 72), and various counter update processes 28 (see S14111 in FIG. 628) are replaced. (See) is different in that the small hit-related process 28 (see S14504 in FIG. 629) is executed for the small hit-related process (see S4504 in FIG. 65), and is otherwise the same. The detailed description of the same content will be omitted. In the twelfth embodiment described above, the content of the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 is described with reference to the first embodiment described above. Therefore, the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 28th embodiment is described. In explaining the contents, the control processing contents of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment will be described as appropriate.

First, the contents of the variable display setting process 28 (S14121) will be described with reference to FIG. 623. The variation display setting process 28 (S14121) is an effect mode corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the latent state with respect to the variation display setting process 13 (see S4121 in FIG. 334) described above. The variable display setting process 28 (S15102) for special figure 1 for setting the variable display content) and the special figure for setting the effect mode (variable display content) corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2) variation. The variation display setting process 28 (S15104) for 2 is different from the staging mode setting process 28 (S15105) that is executed regardless of the special symbol type, and the other contents are the same.

Here, the contents of the variation display setting process 28 (S15102) for the special figure 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 624. FIG. 624 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation display setting process 28 (S15102) for the special figure 1. In the variation display setting process 28 (S15102) for the special figure 1, the process of setting the effect mode during the small hit variation is executed for the variation display setting process for the special figure 1 (see S5104 of FIG. 70) described above. It differs in that.

When the variation display setting process 28 (S15102) for special figure 1 is executed, first, the same processes of S5201 and S5202 as the above-mentioned variation display setting process for special figure 1 (see S5104 of FIG. 70) are executed. Then, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation this time is a small hit fluctuation (S15201), and if it is determined to be a small hit fluctuation (S15201: Yes), a display command for indicating an invincible state is set. (S15202), the invincible flag 223va is set to ON (S15203), the latent probability variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is set based on the extracted variation pattern (S5203), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S15201, if it is determined that the fluctuation is not a small hit variation (S15201: No), the process proceeds to the process of S5206, and then the present process is terminated.

In this embodiment, as described above, when a small hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery during the latent state, a display command for indicating an invincible state is always set. However, it may be decided by lottery whether or not to set a display command to indicate the invincible state, the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation being executed, and the look-ahead result for the acquired special figure 2 hold. Based on (preliminary determination result), it may be configured to determine whether or not to set a display command for indicating an invincible state.

Specifically, by the time the special figure 1 fluctuation (small hit fluctuation) executed this time is stopped and displayed, the result of the special figure 2 lottery that can be stopped and displayed is determined (preliminary determination), and the special figure executed this time is executed. If it is determined that the result of the special figure 2 lottery is a big hit by the time the 1 fluctuation (small hit fluctuation) is stopped and displayed, it is preferable to configure so that the display command for indicating the invincible state is not set. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the disadvantageous jackpot game is executed even though the display mode (see FIG. 605 (a)) based on the display command for indicating the invincible state is displayed.

In the 28th embodiment described above, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in the display mode indicating that the lottery result of one special symbol lottery is a small hit, the other special symbol change during execution is performed. The lottery result was discriminated, and the processing content for the other special symbol change was determined according to the discriminating result. Then, it is advantageous by making the length of the variable time set in the other special symbol lottery different between the case where the jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player is won and the case where the jackpot that is advantageous to the player is won. By making it easier for the disadvantaged jackpot to be discarded based on the small hit winning than the jackpot, it was possible to set a specific period in which the disadvantaged jackpot is likely to be discarded before winning the disadvantaged jackpot. The configuration for setting a specific period is not limited to this, for example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in a display mode indicating that the lottery result of one of the special symbol lottery is a small hit. , The lottery result of the other special symbol change being executed is determined, and as the determination result, only when it is determined that the disadvantageous jackpot is won, the other special symbol change being executed is discarded (lottery indicating a loss). The result may be forcibly stopped).

Further, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, the invalid lottery process used during the jackpot fluctuation of the special symbol, that is, during the special symbol variation in which one special symbol is a jackpot winning, the jackpot winning in the other special symbol lottery. It may be configured to execute the process of controlling so as not to obtain during the special symbol change in which the small hit is won. Even in this case, it is safe for the player without fear that the latent state will end based on the big hit winning during the specific period when one of the special symbols fluctuates in the small hit. It is possible to set a period during which the game can be played with care. In this case, it is not possible to win a big hit in which a big hit type advantageous to the player is set in a special symbol lottery during a specific period, but a small hit can be won as in the first embodiment described above. Therefore, the game of winning the prize ball by the small hit game can be executed without worrying about the big hit winning.

In the above-described A embodiment, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, the special symbol change period corresponding to the small hit winning is a specific period in which the player cannot (difficultly) win the big hit that is disadvantageous to the player. It was configured to be. Then, if the small hit is not won in the first special symbol lottery, that is, if the big hit or the miss is won, the fluctuation time for a short time (1 second) is set. Therefore, for example, after the latent probability state is set, the left-handed game is executed in order to establish only the lottery opportunity of the first special symbol without establishing the lottery opportunity of the second special symbol, and the first special symbol is executed. When the fluctuation has passed for 1 second or more, there is a possibility that an irregular game of performing a right-handed game may be performed. That is, by executing the second special symbol lottery by the right-handed game only while the first special symbol fluctuates in a small hit, a game that makes it difficult to execute the disadvantageous big hit game during the latent state is performed. There was a problem.

In order to solve this problem, in the present A embodiment, when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the latent state, the first special symbol variation lottery establishes a lottery opportunity by a left-handed game. It is determined whether the lottery opportunity is established by the right-handed game or the lottery opportunity by the right-handed game, and when it is determined that the lottery opportunity is established by the right-handed game, the lottery opportunity is established by the left-handed game. It is configured so that it is easier to notify the player that a specific period has been set than when it is determined that there is.

As a result, whether or not the player who executes the first special symbol lottery in the left-handed game in the latent state has won a small hit for the first special symbol change being executed (during a specific period). Since it is possible to make it difficult to grasp (whether or not), it is possible to make it difficult to perform an irregular game (left-handed game) in the latent state.

As a method for determining whether the first special symbol change lottery to be executed has established the lottery opportunity by the left-handed game or the lottery opportunity by the right-handed game, for example, the main control The entry type for indicating whether the game ball has entered the central first entry slot 64c or the game ball has entered the right first entry slot 64r in the winning command output from the device 110. By configuring the information so that it can be set, the game ball enters any entry port (central first entry port 64c or right first entry port 64r) on the voice lamp control device 113 side. It may be configured so that it can be determined whether or not the winning command is set based on the above, or the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 corresponds to the special symbol fluctuation for which the fluctuation pattern is set this time. It may be configured to set the ball type information.

Further, based on various commands output from the main control device 110, on the voice lamp control device 113 side, to any entry port (central first entry port 64c or right first entry port 64r). It is not configured so that it can be determined whether or not the game ball has entered, but for example, a left-handed game detecting means for detecting that the player is playing a left-handed game and a right-handed game being performed. By providing a right-handed game detection means for detecting the above and configuring the voice lamp control device 113 to be able to receive the detection result of each detection means, the player's game status (right-handed game, left-handed game). May be configured so that the voice lamp control device 113 can be directly discriminated without going through the main control device 110. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing to be executed by the main control device 110, so that the processing load related to the main control device 110 can be reduced, and it is possible to facilitate smooth game provision. can.

Further, unlike the 28th embodiment, the same fluctuation time as when the small hit is won (for at least a part of the case where the first special symbol lottery executed during the latent state is missed or the big hit is won). For example, it is preferable to configure it so that 30 seconds) is set. With this configuration, it is difficult for the player who is executing the left-handed game during the latent state to grasp the lottery result based on the fluctuation time of the first special symbol change during execution. It is possible to make it more difficult to determine whether or not the present is in a specific period.

In addition, in another example using the above-mentioned variable time setting method, the player is notified that the specific period is in the case of winning a small hit than in the case of winning a small hit in the first special symbol lottery. It is preferable to configure it so that the notification effect for doing so can be easily executed. As a result, the player can be made to positively execute the right-handed game even though the specific period is not set internally.

In the 28th embodiment, a plurality of ball entry means (central first ball entry port 64c, right first ball entry) are used as starting winning openings for establishing a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol lottery on the game board 13. Mouth 64r) is provided, and the ball entry that establishes the lottery opportunity is the effect mode of the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 in response to the special symbol variation for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol. It is configured to be different depending on the type of means, but other than that, it may be different as long as it is different depending on the type of the ball entry means that established the lottery opportunity, for example, the same. Three or more ball entry means for establishing a lottery opportunity may be provided.

Further, even when the lottery opportunity is established based on the entry of the game ball into the same ball entry means, the effect mode of the variable effect may be different depending on the timing when the lottery opportunity is established. , The production mode of the variable effect may be different depending on the frequency at which the lottery opportunity is established. Further, a means capable of discriminating the process (for example, the flow path) until the game ball enters the ball entering means may be provided, and the effect mode of the variation effect may be different based on the discriminating result. In this case, for example, a pachinko machine is configured such that a plurality of flow paths are formed in the game area of the game board 13 and the game balls flowing down the game area can enter one ball entry means in various flow patterns. In the case of the machine 10, a detection means capable of detecting the type of the flow path through which the game ball flows is provided, and the process until the game ball enters the ball entry means based on the detection result of the detection means (for example,). It is preferable to configure it so as to discriminate the flow path).

Further, in the 28th embodiment, the game ball has entered the ball entry means (central first entry slot 64c or right first entry slot 64r) for establishing a lottery opportunity for a special symbol. We have explained the configuration in which the effect mode of the variable effect executed based on the above is different depending on the type of ball entry means, but if there are multiple ball entry means provided for the same purpose, a lottery of special symbols will be given. A ball entry means other than the ball entry means for establishing the opportunity may be targeted. For example, when a plurality of ball entry means (through gates 67) for establishing a lottery opportunity for a normal symbol are provided on the game board 13, for example, the right. The left area where the game ball fired by the left-handed game is easier to flow down than the game ball fired by the left-handed game, and the game ball fired by the right-handed game than the game ball fired by the left-handed game. If a through gate 67 is provided in the right side area where it is easier to flow down, the effect mode of the variable effect for showing the lottery result of the normal symbol is set, and the ball entry means that establishes the lottery opportunity of the normal symbol. (Through gate 67) may be configured to be different depending on the type, or a general entry port 63 for paying out a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls by inserting a game ball. If a plurality of game boards 13 are provided, the effect mode of the ball entry effect for indicating that the game ball has entered the general ball entry port 63 is set in the general ball entry port 63 in which the game ball has entered. It may be different depending on the type.

With this configuration, by grasping the production mode of various effects executed based on the entry of the game ball into the entry means, it is possible to determine which entry means the game ball has entered. Since it can be discriminated, it is possible to make the player understand the past game contents that he / she has played in an easy-to-understand manner.

<29th Embodiment>
Next, the 29th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 630 to 635. In the 29th embodiment, the variation pattern selected in the latent state (RUSH mode) is changed with respect to the 28th embodiment described above, and the voice lamp control device 113 has the first special symbol. The point that the type of the entrance where the lottery opportunity was established (central first entrance 64c or the right first entrance 64r) can be discriminated, and the entrance where the lottery opportunity for the first special symbol is established. There is a big difference in that the effect mode of the variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol variation is configured to be different depending on the type.

In the 28th embodiment described above, when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the latent state (RUSH mode) and the small hit is won (small hit A28 is won), the special symbol is changing (special figure 1 small). Even if the jackpot (big hit D28), which is disadvantageous to the player, is won in the second special symbol lottery, the jackpot is discarded. Then, by providing a first ball entrance (right first ball opening 64r) that triggers a lottery for the first special symbol in the game area (right area) where the game ball launched by the right-handed game can flow down. , The first special symbol lottery is periodically executed even during the right-handed game executed during the latent state. With this configuration, it is possible to set a special period (invincible mode period) in which the jackpot game that is disadvantageous to the player is not executed in the second special symbol lottery that is mainly executed during the latent state. It was possible to provide a period during which a player who is performing a game in a latent state can play with peace of mind.

However, in the 28th embodiment described above, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery during the latent state (RUSH mode), a special period is given to the player during the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation. Since it is configured to execute the effect for notifying that it is (invincible mode period), for example, the left-handed game, that is, the second special symbol lottery is not executed during the latent state. , An irregular game in which a game that enables only the first special symbol lottery to be executed is executed, a right-handed game is executed, and a second special symbol lottery is executed only when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery. There was a risk that it would be executed.

Further, in the 28th embodiment described above, a special period (invincible mode period) is made by facilitating the selection of a short-time (1 second) variable time when the player loses the prize in the first special symbol lottery during the latent state. ) Is not set, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation is shortened, and it becomes easier to set a special period (invincible mode period) during the latent state (easy to execute a new first special symbol lottery). However, in the case of such a configuration, a small hit is won when the first special symbol fluctuation with a fluctuation time longer than 1 second is executed in the state where the latent state is set. In this case, the notification effect for notifying the player that the special period (invincible mode period) is set is not executed because the player can easily grasp that the special symbol is changed. However, there is a problem that it is easy to determine whether or not a special period (invincible mode period) is set for the player.

On the other hand, in the 29th embodiment, the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is more likely to be selected when the player loses the prize in the first special symbol lottery executed during the latent state, as compared with the 28th embodiment described above. is doing. This makes it difficult for the player to determine whether the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery executed during the latent state is a small hit or a miss, based on the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. ..

Further, in the 29th embodiment, when the lottery opportunity of the first special symbol is established by the left-handed game (when the game ball is put into the central first entry slot 64c), the right-handed game is used. 1 When the lottery opportunity for the special symbol is established (when the game ball is inserted into the right first entry slot 64r), the effect mode of the variation effect executed in response to the change of the first special symbol is shown. It is configured to be different, and in the latent state, it is better to execute the first special symbol lottery by the right-handed game than to execute the first special symbol lottery by the left-handed game. It is configured to make it easy for the player to understand that the first special symbol change is being executed, that is, that a special period (invincible mode period) is set. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a left-handed game is executed in a state where a latent state is set.

In addition, in the 29th embodiment, when the lottery opportunity of the first special symbol is established by the left-handed game during the latent state (when the game ball is entered into the central first entry slot 64c). , Even if the lottery result of the 1st special symbol is out of order, the variable effect suggesting that the special period (invincible mode period) is set can be executed, while the lottery result of the 1st special symbol Even if it is a small hit, it is configured not to execute a variable effect that suggests that a special period (invincible period) is set.

As a result, in the case where the lottery opportunity of the first special symbol is established by the left-handed game during the latent state (when the game ball is put into the central first entrance 64c), the special period (invincible period) Since it is possible to make it more difficult to understand whether or not is set, it is possible to further suppress the situation where the left-handed game is executed in the state where the latent state is set.

First, with reference to FIG. 630, the structure of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 29th embodiment will be described. In the 29th embodiment, it is for detecting that a game ball has entered the central first entry port 64c with respect to the game board 13 (see FIG. 604) of the pachinko machine 10 of the 28th embodiment described above. The first detection sensor 64s1 and the second detection sensor 64s2 for detecting that a game ball has entered the right first ball entry port 64r are provided, and the other points are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the 29th embodiment, the detection result of each detection sensor (64s1, 64s2) is configured to be received by the voice lamp control device 113 without going through the main control device 110. With this configuration, it becomes possible on the voice lamp control device 113 side to determine which entry port the game ball has entered and the lottery opportunity for the first special symbol has been established, and the first special It is possible to set a variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol variation in an effect mode according to the type of the ball entrance that has established the symbol lottery opportunity.

Further, in the 29th embodiment, it is determined which entry port the game ball enters on the voice lamp control device 113 side without going through the main control device 110, and the lottery opportunity for the first special symbol is established. Since the determination can be made, the processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

<About the electrical configuration in the 29th embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the 29th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 631 and 632. The pachinko machine 10 of the 29th embodiment has a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 and the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 with respect to the pachinko machine 10 of the 28th embodiment described above. It differs in that a part of is changed. Specifically, the ROM 202 is provided with a variation pattern selection 29 table 202wf instead of the variation pattern selection 28 table 202vf, and the RAM 223 is configured with an irregular winning flag 223wa. ing. The other elements are the same as the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the 28th embodiment described above, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the variation pattern selection 29 table 202wf will be described with reference to FIG. 631. FIG. 631 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the variation pattern selection 29 table 202wf. As shown in FIG. 631 (a), the variation pattern selection 29 table 202wf is provided with the first latency 29 table 202wf1 in place of the first latency table 202vf1 for the above-mentioned variation pattern selection 28 table 202vf. It differs in that it is the same otherwise.

Here, the contents of the first latent probability 29 table 202wf1 will be described with reference to FIG. 631 (b). FIG. 631 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the first latent probability 29 table 202wf1. The first latent probability 29 table 202wf1 is defined so that the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is more easily selected than the above-mentioned first latent probability table 202vf1 when the hit / fail determination result of the first special symbol is wrong. They differ in that they do, and are otherwise the same. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

Specifically, when the hit / fail judgment result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is out of order, the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149" and the fluctuation time is out of 30 seconds. However, the deviation time of 1 second is specified in the range of "150 to 198". That is, when the first special symbol change is executed in the state where the latent probability state is set, the lottery result (win / fail judgment result) has the same fluctuation time depending on whether it is a small hit or a miss. (30 seconds) can be easily selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the result of the first special symbol lottery due to the fluctuation time of the first special symbol.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the 29th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 632. FIG. 632 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the 29th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 632, the 29th embodiment differs from the RAM 223 (see FIG. 613) of the pachinko machine 10 in the 28th embodiment described above in that an irregular winning flag 223wa is added, and other than that. It is the same.

The irregular winning flag 223wa is a flag for indicating that a special symbol lottery opportunity has been established by an inappropriate game for the set game state, and the special symbol lottery opportunity is caused by an inappropriate game. It is set to on when it is established. In the 29th embodiment, a left-handed game (a game in which a game ball is launched aiming at a game area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80) is used as an entrance for establishing a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol. A game launched by a right-handed game (a game in which a game ball is launched toward a game area formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80) and a central first entrance 64c in which a game ball launched by the player can win a prize. It has a right first ball entrance 64r, and a ball can win a prize.

Then, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the left-handed game becomes an advantageous gaming method for the player, and when the probabilistic state and the latent probable state are set, the right-handed game becomes the player. It is configured to be an advantageous game method.

This irregular winning flag 223wa is set to ON when it is detected that a game ball has entered the central first entry slot 64c in a state where the latent probability state is set. Specifically, it is set to ON when the first detection sensor 64s1 capable of detecting the game ball that has entered the central first ball entry port 64c detects the game ball. Then, it is referred to in the variation display setting process 29 for special figure 1 (see S15172 in FIG. 634) for determining the effect mode of the variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol variation, and the irregular winning flag 223wa is set to ON. If it is determined to be, it is set to off (see S15174 in FIG. 634), and an invincible state is set against a 30-second fluctuation regardless of the result of the first special symbol lottery (see S15202 in FIG. 634).

That is, in the 29th embodiment, the player's game method executed in the latent state can be discriminated, and the variation effect set for the same special symbol variation based on the discriminating result. It is configured to make the production mode of the above different. Specifically, if the irregular winning flag 223wa is not set to on in the latent state, the invincible state is set only when the small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, and the irregular winning flag 223wa is turned on. When set to, it is invincible when the fluctuation pattern for showing the result of the first special symbol lottery is a fluctuation of 30 seconds, that is, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a small hit win or a miss. It is configured so that the state can be set.

With this configuration, if a proper game (right-handed game) is not performed in the latent state, the invincible state is set in addition to the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation, so that the player can be invincible. On the other hand, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether or not the small hit is changing. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a game in which a left-handed game is executed in the latent state and a right-handed game is performed when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery (when an invincible state is set).

<Regarding the control processing content of the audio lamp control device in the 29th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 633 to 634, the content of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 29th embodiment will be described. The control processing content executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 29th embodiment is the main processing (main processing) with respect to the control processing content executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 28th embodiment described above. Instead of the main process 29 (see FIG. 633), the variation display setting process 28 for the special figure 1 (see S15102 in FIG. 624) is replaced with the variation display setting process 29 for the special figure 1 (see FIG. 634). The difference is that S15172) is executed, and the other points are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted. The content of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 28th embodiment described above is described with reference to the above-mentioned 1st embodiment and the 12th embodiment. In explaining the content of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 29th embodiment, the above-mentioned first embodiment and the twelfth embodiment will be described as appropriate.

First, the contents of the main process 29 will be described with reference to FIG. 633. FIG. 633 is a flowchart showing the contents of the main process 29. The main process 29 differs from the main process (see FIG. 59) in the first embodiment described above in that a winning opening determination process (S14101) is added, and is the same except for the addition. The contents of the winning opening determination process (S14101) will be described later with reference to FIG. 635.

Next, the contents of the variation display setting process 29 (S15172) for the special figure 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 634. FIG. 634 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation display setting process 29 (S15172) for the special figure 1. The variation display setting process 29 (S15172) for the special figure 1 is an effect mode in the first special symbol variation in the latent state with respect to the variation display setting process 28 for the special figure 1 (see S15102 in FIG. 624) described above. The difference is that the setting method (setting method of the invincible state) is different, and the other points are the same.

When the variation display setting process 29 (S15172) for special figure 1 is executed, the same processes of S5201 and S5202 as the above-mentioned variation display setting process 28 for special figure 1 (see S15102 of FIG. 624) are executed. After that, it is determined whether the irregular winning flag 223wa is set to on (S15173), and if it is determined to be set to on (S15173: Yes), the irregular winning flag 223wa is set to off (S15174). It is determined whether or not the fluctuation of the special figure 1 this time is a fluctuation of 30 seconds (S15175).

In the 29th embodiment, as shown in the first latent probability 29 table 202wf1 (see FIG. 631 (b)), all the cases where the result of the first special symbol lottery (special drawing 1 lottery) is a small hit. , It is configured so that the fluctuation of 30 seconds is selected in about 75% of the cases of losing and winning. Therefore, in the process of S15175, it is determined whether the fluctuation is a small hit fluctuation or a missed fluctuation (30 seconds). In the process of S15175, if it is determined that the fluctuation is 30 seconds (S15175: Yes), a display command for indicating an invincible state is set regardless of whether or not a small hit is won (S15202), and the invincible flag 223va is set. Is set to on (S15203), and the process proceeds to S5206. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S15173 that the irregular winning flag 223wa is not set to ON (S15173: No), it is the same as the above-mentioned variation display setting process 28 for special figure 1 (see S15102 in FIG. 624). The processing of S1521 to S15203 is executed, then the processing of S5206 is executed, and this processing is terminated.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the irregular winning flag 223wa is set to ON, that is, when the left-handed game is executed during the latent state, the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 lottery). Even if the result of is not a small hit, the effect of showing an invincible state (see FIG. 605 (a)) is configured to be executed. Therefore, after the latent state is set, only the special figure 1 lottery is executed by the left-handed game, and the right-handed game is performed only during the period when the special figure 1 lottery fluctuates in small hits (invincible period). FIG. 2 It is possible to make it difficult to execute an irregular game that prevents a disadvantageous jackpot from being won in a lottery.

Next, the contents of the winning opening determination process (S14101) will be described with reference to FIG. 635. FIG. 635 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning opening determination process (S14101). In this winning opening determination process (S14101), a process for determining whether an irregular game is being executed in the latent probability state is executed.

When the winning opening determination process (S14101) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (S14151), if it is determined to be the latent state (S141511: Yes), and then the first. 1 It is determined whether the ball entry sensor 64s1 (see FIG. 630) is on (S14152). When it is determined that the first ball entry sensor 64s1 is on (S14152: Yes), that is, when the game ball enters the central first ball entry port 64c during the latent state, the irregular winning flag 223wa is turned on. (S14153), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S14151, when it is determined that the latent state is not set (S141511: No), or in the process of S14152, it is determined that the first ball entry sensor 64s1 is not on (S14152: No). ), This process ends as it is.

In this embodiment, the irregular winning flag 223wa is set to off every time the first special symbol lottery is executed while the irregular winning flag 223wa is set to on. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the irregular winning flag 223wa may be set to off when the variation for 30 seconds is executed in the state where the irregular winning flag 223wa is set to on. With this configuration, when an irregular game is played, it is possible to always set an invincible state based on the fluctuation time (an invincible state executed regardless of the small hit winning). It is possible to make it difficult to execute an irregular game that prevents a disadvantageous jackpot from being won in a lottery.

Further, as a condition for turning off the irregular winning flag 223wa, the second ball entry sensor 64s2 (see FIG. 630) detects a predetermined number (10) of game balls in a situation where the irregular winning flag 223wa is set to on. In this case, a condition for setting the irregular winning flag 223wa to off may be provided. With this configuration, it is possible to set an invincible state (an invincible state executed regardless of a small hit win) for a player who has once executed an irregular game for a predetermined period and based on a fluctuation time. , It is possible to make it more difficult to execute an irregular game that prevents a disadvantageous jackpot from being won in the special figure 2 lottery.

Further, in the 29th embodiment, when it is determined that the first ball entry sensor 64s1 is on during the latent probability state, the process of setting the irregular winning flag 223wa to on is executed. Not limited to this, when the number of times that the first ball entry sensor 64s1 is determined to be on during the latent probability state reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times), the irregular winning flag 223wa is set to on. It may be configured. In this way, by providing an allowable range until the irregular winning flag 223wa is set to ON, the game ball flows down the left side region even though the right-handed game is played, and the first ball entry sensor 64s1 When it is turned on, the irregular winning flag 223wa can be set to be difficult to turn on. Therefore, it is possible to set an invincible state (an invincible state executed regardless of the small hit winning) based on the fluctuation time for a predetermined period only for the player who intentionally executes the irregular game. It is possible to make it more difficult to execute an irregular game that prevents a disadvantageous jackpot from being won in the special figure 2 lottery.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the lottery opportunity of the first special symbol lottery is configured to be established by a plurality of requirements, and the first special symbol lottery is performed according to the type of requirements for establishing the lottery opportunity. It is configured so that the production mode for showing the lottery result of the above is different. That is, different effects can be executed by different requirements for establishing the lottery opportunity.

In the 29th embodiment, an advantageous staging mode that is advantageous to the player (invincible state based on the small hit winning) and a disadvantageous staging mode that is disadvantageous to the player (invincible state based on the small hit winning) according to the type of requirement for establishing the lottery opportunity. (Invincible state based on fluctuation time) and is configured to be configurable, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an additional mode set for the same production mode may be changed.

In addition, it is not a technical idea to change the degree of advantage of the player, but based on the technical idea of improving the effect of the effect, to show the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery according to the requirement type for establishing the lottery opportunity. It may be configured so that the production mode is different. Further, in the present embodiment, the effect mode (variable effect) for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is configured to be different according to the requirement type for establishing the lottery opportunity, but the present invention is limited to this. However, for example, the effect mode (variable effect) for showing the lottery result of the ordinary symbol may be configured to be different according to the requirement type for establishing the lottery opportunity.

In addition, in the 29th embodiment, an example in which two elements for establishing a lottery opportunity are provided for the same lottery is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and elements for establishing a lottery opportunity are shown. 3 or more may be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, only when a specific gaming state (latent state) is set, the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery is shown according to the requirement type for establishing the lottery opportunity. When the production mode is configured to be different and a game state other than a specific game state (latent state) is set, the first special symbol lottery is performed according to the type of requirement for establishing the lottery opportunity. It is configured so that the effect mode for showing the lottery result is not different, but it is not limited to this, and regardless of the set game state, depending on the type of requirement for establishing the lottery opportunity, The production mode for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery may be different. Further, the types of different production modes may be configured to be further different according to the set gaming state.

<30th embodiment>
Next, the thirtieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 636 to 647. The thirtieth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth embodiment described above in that the mode of effect of the variable effect to be executed is different.

In the 16th embodiment described above, the jackpot game (design jackpot game) is executed based on the fact that the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery as an opportunity to execute the privilege game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player. A small hit is won by the opportunity (first opportunity) and a lottery of a special symbol, and the game ball is opened in a specific area during the small hit game (V winning device 650 (see FIG. 361) that is opened during the small hit game). It has two triggers, one is the trigger (second trigger) for the jackpot game (V jackpot game) to be executed based on the passage through the V area (not shown) provided inside, and further, the first The lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) was configured so that it was easier to win a small hit than the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1). Then, during the time saving state, which is a game state that can be set after the end of the big hit game, the lottery of the special figure 2 is easily executed.

As a result, in the time-saving state in which the lottery of the special figure 2 is mainly executed, it is possible to facilitate the establishment of the above-mentioned second opportunity, and it is possible to make it easier to execute the jackpot game than in the normal state. The time saving state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player can be enthusiastically played with the aim of setting the time saving state.

In addition, in the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, a maximum of 4 prize information of the 2nd special symbol (special figure 2) can be stored in a hold, and the lottery result of the final change of the special figure 2 in the time saving state can be obtained. Using the variable effect shown, it was configured to notify the player of the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 winning information stored on hold. More specifically, as an effect corresponding to the final variation of Special Figure 2 in the time saving state, a first effect (final variation effect), a second effect executed after the first effect (result notification effect), and Was configured to be feasible, and the effect mode of the final variation was set so as to be set based on the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 winning information stored on hold. That is, as a result of the effect of the variation effect executed during the time saving state, in addition to the lottery result of the special figure variation, the special figure 2 lottery executed after the gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state (to the normal state). It was configured to notify the result of the lottery for the winning information of the special figure 2 which was held and stored at the time of the transition.

However, the special figure 2 lottery (holding memory at the time of shifting to the normal state) executed after the gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state by the final fluctuation effect showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 final fluctuation in the time saving state. Since it was configured to notify the player (advance notification) of all the results of the lottery for the winning information of Special Figure 2 that has been done, the variation effect (final variation effect) for the final variation of Special Figure 2 in the time saving state However, if the final variation effect is executed in an effect mode that indicates that the player has not won, the player's motivation to play will drop at once. was there.

Further, in the 16th embodiment described above, the number of reserved special figures 2 acquired at the execution timing of the final variation effect is determined, and the effect mode of the final variation effect is set based on the determination result. Therefore, for example, the game is performed so as to acquire the upper limit of the special figure 2 hold just before the end of the special figure 2 final fluctuation period in the time saving state, that is, near the timing when the final fluctuation effect ends and the result notification effect is executed. Therefore, as an effect mode of the final variation effect, the special figure 2 lottery executed after the game state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state (the winning information of the special figure 2 held and stored at the time of shifting to the normal state). It was possible not to reflect the result of the lottery for the special figure 2), but in order not to reflect the result of all the special figure 2 lottery in the production mode of the final variation effect, the special figure 2 is reserved. Since it is necessary to delay the acquisition timing of, in the worst case, the special figure 2 hold will not be acquired up to the upper limit, and the time saving state will shift to the normal state, providing a disadvantageous game to the player. There was a problem that it would end up.

On the other hand, in the thirtieth embodiment, the look-ahead range to be the target of the final variation effect can be differently executed. Specifically, the production content of the final variation effect indicates the lottery result of the variation, the lottery result including a part of the acquired special figure 2 hold, and all the acquired special figure 2 It is configured to be either the case of showing the lottery result including the hold or the case of showing the lottery result. Then, the lottery result of the special figure 2 hold, which is not included in the effect content of the final variation effect, is executed across the special figure 2 final change period and the special figure 2 change period executed in the normal state. It is configured to notify the player by using the result notification effect (time saving result display effect).

With this configuration, even if the effect content of the final variation effect is an effect content that indicates an deviation, the range of the effect content that is targeted for the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold can be determined. Since it can be difficult for the player to understand, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the winning even during the period when the time saving result display screen is displayed.

Further, in the thirtieth embodiment, the range of the special figure 2 hold to be reflected in the effect content of the final variation effect is determined based on the operation content of the operating means by the player. With this configuration, the player can determine all or part of the range of the special figure 2 hold to be reflected in the production content of the final variation effect, so that the game content desired by the player can be determined. It is possible to easily set the effect mode of various effects (final variation effect, result notification effect) executed in the final variation of the special figure 2 in the effect mode according to the above.

Further, in the thirtieth embodiment, the range of the special figure 2 hold to be reflected in the effect content of the final variation effect is configured so as to be difficult for the player to grasp. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to understand how many lottery results (look-ahead results) of the second special symbol lottery are used to set the effect content of the final variation effect. Therefore, for example, the final variation. Even if the production content of the production is out of alignment, the production can be enjoyed to the end while expecting that the number of special figures 2 pending, which is the target of the result notification production, is large.

In addition, in the thirtieth embodiment, when the result notification effect is executed, the number of special figures 2 reserved that was not the target of the final variation effect can be notified to the player. With this configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the result notification effect while causing the player to predict the degree of expectation that the effect indicating the winning will be executed during the result notification effect.

<Regarding the content of the production in the 30th embodiment>
First, with reference to FIGS. 636 to 639, characteristic production contents among various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the thirtieth embodiment will be described. Specifically, among the effects executed during the final change in the time-saving state (Final change in FIG. 2), the main points are different from the effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment described above. I will explain.

First, with reference to FIG. 639, regarding the content of the effect executed during the final variation of FIG. 2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirtieth embodiment, the final of the special figure 2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth embodiment described above. The explanation will be focused on the differences from the effect content (see FIG. 364) executed during the fluctuation. FIG. 639 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the effect executed by the final variation of the special figure 2 in the time saving state.

As shown in FIG. 639, in the thirtieth embodiment, as in the case of the sixteenth embodiment described above with reference to FIG. A variable period of seconds is set, the first 5 seconds becomes a waiting period, and a waiting effect, which is an effect mode for encouraging the player to acquire a holding ball (special figure 2 holding) of the second special symbol, is performed. It is configured to run.

After that, the first period in which the operation valid period is set is set for 5 seconds. The contents of the effect (pressing effect) executed during this first period will be described later with reference to FIG. 636 (a). Then, when the first period elapses, a second period of 15 seconds is set. During this second period, a mission effect (reach effect) of a display mode based on the effect result of the pressing effect executed during the first period is executed. Since the content of the mission effect (reach effect) is the same as the effect shown in FIGS. 374 (b) and 375 (a) of the 16th embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Then, when the second period ends, the remaining period (5 seconds) of the final fluctuation of the special figure 2 and the fluctuation time (2 seconds) for digesting the special figure 2 hold (maximum 4 pieces) at the end of the time reduction are added. A third period is set, and during the third period, a result notification effect for displaying the game result during the time saving state is executed. The content of the result notification effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 638. In the 30th embodiment as well, as in the 16th embodiment described above, the variation time required when all the special figure 2 lottery results included in the special figure 2 hold at the end of the time reduction are out of order is also the special figure 2. The fluctuation time required when any of the special figure 2 lottery results included in the hold is a hit is also configured to be the same fluctuation time (2 seconds).

Specifically, in the 16th embodiment described above, four normal fluctuation pattern 16 tables 202le1 (see FIG. 385) referred to when selecting the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation in the normal state are used. The total fluctuation time (0.5 seconds x 4 times = 2 seconds) when all the special figure 2 holds are removed, and the fluctuation time (2 seconds) when the first special figure 2 hold is a hit, and 1 Total fluctuation time (0.5 seconds + 1.5 seconds = 2 seconds) when the second special figure 2 hold is off and the second special figure 2 hold is a hit, and the first and second special figure 2 hold The total fluctuation time (0.5 seconds x 2 times + 1 second = 2 seconds) when the special figure 2 hold is removed and the third special figure 2 hold is a hit is configured to be the same. ..

With this configuration, it is possible to set a fixed period as the third period regardless of the lottery result corresponding to the special figure 2 hold (4 pieces) acquired at the end of the time reduction.

Note that FIG. 639 shows an example in which the special figure 2 hold acquired at the end of the time reduction is the upper limit value (4 pieces), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special figure acquired at the end of the time reduction is not limited to this. Fig. 2 By making the variable time selected when the lottery result is out of order according to the number of holdings, all the special features are obtained regardless of the number of holdings of Special Figure 2 acquired at the end of the time reduction. FIG. 2 The fluctuation time (total fluctuation time) required to digest the hold may be configured to be 2 seconds.

For example, if there is only one special figure 2 hold acquired at the end of the time reduction, the variation time of 2 seconds is selected when the special figure 2 hold is out, and the time reduction ends. If there are two special figure 2 holds that are sometimes acquired and none of the lottery results are out of order, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation corresponding to the first special figure 2 hold is 0.5. The fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds may be selected as the fluctuation time of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 corresponding to the second special figure 2 hold. As a result, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation executed after the end of the time reduction is set regardless of the number of special figure 2 holds acquired at the end of the time reduction and the result of the special figure 2 lottery corresponding to each special figure 2 hold. Can be unified.

Next, with reference to FIG. 636 (a), the contents of the effect (pressing effect) executed in the first period (see FIG. 639) of the final variation of the special figure 2 will be described. FIG. 636A is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode displayed during the pressing effect. In the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment described above, the same contents as those displayed during the final variation of FIG. 2 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the content of the pressing effect will be described. In the present embodiment, an operation valid period during which the player can operate the frame button 22 (operation means) is set during the first period of the final change in FIG. 2, and the operation to the frame button 22 during the operation valid period is set. Based on the content, it is configured to be able to execute a pressing effect in which the effect mode can be changed.

As shown in FIG. 636 (a), when the pressing effect is executed, a button icon for indicating an operating means (frame button 22) to be operated by the player near the center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. 829a is displayed, and in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "release stock with button PUSH" are displayed as a guidance mode for explaining the effect content during the pressing effect. Further, in the display area Dm21, the number of pressing icons (872a to 872d) corresponding to the acquired number of reserved special figures 2 is displayed. FIG. 636 (a) shows a state in which “4” is displayed in the small display area Dm2a for indicating the number of special figure 2 hold, that is, a state in which four special figure 2 hold are acquired. Four pressing icons are displayed in the area Dm21.

When the player presses the frame button 22 during this pressing effect period, the display mode of the pressing icon is variably displayed in the order of the first pressing icon 872a, the second pressing icon 872b, the third pressing icon 872c, and the fourth pressing icon 872d. To. In the thirtieth embodiment, based on the player pressing the frame button 22 during the pressing effect, the pre-reading special figure 2 hold is determined by lottery from the acquired special figure 2 hold, and the determination is made. It is configured to set the display mode after the change based on the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 hold. Further, in the thirtieth embodiment, when the frame button 22 is pressed for each pressing icon, the pre-reading special figure 2 hold is determined in duplicate.

That is, the number of hold icons corresponding to the acquired special figure 2 hold number is displayed, and each time the player presses the frame button 22, each hold icon is variably displayed in a display mode showing the look-ahead result. , While each hold icon appears to be variably displayed in a display mode for indicating the look-ahead result of the corresponding special figure 2 hold, in reality, the special figure 2 hold is randomly selected (including duplicate selection). The hold icon can be variably displayed in a display mode showing the look-ahead result.

With this configuration, it is possible to execute a pressing effect that makes it difficult for the player to understand the number of special figure 2 holds that was actually pre-read, so that various effects executed in the final variation of special figure 2 can be performed. In addition to the lottery result of the fluctuation, it is possible to perform an effect in which it is difficult to grasp the range of the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 hold.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the pressing icons 872a to 872d are configured to be pressed in order, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the player can select the pressing order of the pressing icons 872a to 872d. In this case, the image 829a imitating the operation means may be configured, such as an image corresponding to the first pressing icon 872a, an image corresponding to the second pressing icon 872b, an image corresponding to the third pressing icon 872c, and a fourth. It is configured to display the image corresponding to the pressing icon 872d, the displayed plurality of images are configured to be selected in order, and the pressing icon 872a to correspond to the image selected at the time of operating the operation means. It is preferable to configure 872d so that it can be changed to a display icon.

Further, in this case, it is preferable to specify that the distribution of the special figure 2 hold that can be a target is changed for each of the pressed icons 872a to 872d. As a result, the selection ratio of the target special figure 2 hold can be changed by the operation of selecting the desired pressed icon from the pressed icons 872a to 872d by the player. When the player arbitrarily selects and operates the press icons 872a to 872d, even if the press icons 872a to 872d are configured to completely correspond to each special figure 2 hold. good.

Next, with reference to FIG. 636 (b), the effect content when the display modes of all (four) pressed icons are variably displayed during the pressing effect will be described. FIG. 636 (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode displayed when the display modes of all (four) pressing icons are variably displayed during the pressing effect.

As shown in FIG. 636 (b), the display mode of the character 851 is changed according to the display mode of the variablely displayed pressed icon. In FIG. 636 (b), the first pressing icon 872a is changed to the display mode indicating "chance", the second pressing icon 872b is changed to the display mode indicating "sword", and the third pressing icon 872c is "aura large". The display mode indicating "chance" is changed, and the fourth pressing icon 872d is changed to the display mode indicating "chance".

Then, the display mode of the character 851 is changed to a display mode corresponding to the display mode of each of the pressed icons displayed in a variable manner, and the display mode in which the character 851 wearing "aura large" is equipped with a sword is displayed. Has been done. Then, the character "chance" is displayed below the character 851. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "Clear the mission with the emission power" are displayed as a guidance display for indicating the content of the mission effect (effect mode during the second period) to be executed next to the press effect. Will be done.

In this case, the mission effect is executed in the effect mode including the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 hold determined for each pressed icon. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the special figure 2 hold to be read ahead is randomly determined for each pressed icon, the number of the special figure 2 hold to be read ahead is determined. Expectations for mission production can be different depending on the situation.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 636 (b), the types of display icons for each pressed icon are configured to be duplicated, but the same display icon is not selected without limitation. It may be configured as follows. With this configuration, the more the pressing icon is pressed, the more various display icons can be displayed, so that the player can enthusiastically operate the operating means.

On the other hand, in the state of FIG. 636 (a), when the first period (pressing effect period) elapses without the player pressing the frame button 22 even once, the display mode shown in FIG. 637 (a) is displayed. .. FIG. 637 (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode when the frame button 22 is never pressed (when the stock is not used) during the pressing effect. As shown in FIG. 637 (a), when the frame button 22 is not pressed during the pressing effect, the special drawing 2 hold to be read ahead is not determined for each pressing icon (872a to 872d). Since it is in the state, each pressing icon (872a to 872d) cannot be variably displayed in the display mode for showing the look-ahead result (lottery result) of the special figure 2 hold of the look-ahead target. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 637 (a), the display mode of each of the pressed icons (872a to 872d) is variably displayed in the display mode indicating "?".

In this case, since there is no special figure 2 hold to be read ahead, the mission effect executed after the pressing effect is executed in an effect mode corresponding to the lottery result of the variation. That is, even if four special figure 2 hold are acquired, by not pressing the frame button 22 during the press effect, the effect mode of the final variation effect (mission effect) can be read ahead of the special figure 2 hold. It can be set without using the result.

Although detailed description will be described later, in the present embodiment, the type of the character 851 whose display mode is changed during the pressing effect is determined based on the lottery result of the change (Final change in FIG. 2). It is composed. Specifically, the character (advantageous character) that is easier to select when the lottery result of the change (final change in Special Figure 2) is a hit (small hit or big hit) is easier to select than the case where the change is out of order, and the change. 1 from a plurality of characters including a character (disadvantageous character) that is easier to select when the lottery result of (Special Figure 2 final fluctuation) is a hit (small hit or big hit) than when it is a hit (small hit or big hit). Characters can be determined (selected).

With this configuration, it is possible for the player to select whether or not to press the frame button 22 during the pressing effect according to the type of the character 851 displayed as the pressing effect. For example, when an advantageous character is displayed in the pressing effect, even if the mission effect is executed only for the lottery result of the fluctuation, the effect result tends to be a winning effect, so that the effect result is likely to be a hit during the pressing effect. When a game in which the frame button 22 is not operated is selected, or conversely, when an advantageous character is displayed in the pressing effect, the pressing effect is to increase the probability that the effect result of the mission effect will be a winning effect. You can select a game to operate the frame button 22 inside.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the display mode of the character 851 displayed during the pressing effect is configured to be different as a suggestion effect suggesting the lottery result of the variation, but the present invention is not limited to this. , A specific character 851 may be determined without being related to the lottery result of the variation. In this case, the effect mode of the mission effect executed after the pressing effect may be different depending on the effect result of the variation. That is, in the present embodiment, after predicting the lottery result of the variation, the pre-reading target of the special figure 2 hold is configured to be different in the pressing effect, whereas the lottery result of the variation is predicted. In the pressing effect, the pre-reading target of the special figure 2 hold may be configured to be different without causing the pressing effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 637 (b), a display mode of the special pattern executed during the pressing effect will be described. FIG. 637 (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode displayed when a plurality of winning information indicating winning is included in the special figure 2 hold.

Although a detailed description will be described later, in the thirtieth embodiment, in a part of the case where the player operates the frame button 22 in order to change the display mode of the fourth pressing icon 872d, the special figure 2 to be read ahead. It is configured so that the number of holds is not one but multiple (all special figures 2 hold). Then, in the case where a plurality of special figure 2 hold is targeted, when it is determined that there are a plurality of special figure 2 hold having winning information indicating winning as a look-ahead result for the plurality of special figure 2 hold. , The display mode of each pressing icon is configured to be displayed in a special pattern for showing the player that there are a plurality of winnings in the special figure 2 hold.

When the display mode of the special pattern is displayed, as shown in FIG. 637 (b), the display mode showing "V" is displayed in the display area Dm21 as a special display mode in which each pressed icon is fused, and the character is displayed. The 851 is also displayed in a display mode with the "V" mark attached. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "premier item GET" are displayed as a guidance display mode for showing that the effect result of the pressing effect this time is a special effect result that is advantageous to the player. With these displays, it is possible to easily understand that the player is given a special privilege (multiple small wins).

As described above, in the thirtieth embodiment, as a condition for displaying the display mode of the special pattern, the acquired number of reserved special figures 2 is the upper limit (4 pieces), and the display mode of the fourth pressing icon 872d is displayed. A condition is set that is satisfied when the player operates the frame button 22 in order to change the value. Therefore, with the aim of displaying the display mode of the special pattern, the game is enthusiastically performed so that the number of holdings in Special Figure 2 reaches the upper limit, and the frame button 22 is actively operated during the pressing effect. Can be made to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 638, when the effect content indicating the deviation is executed in the mission effect, the effect content executed during the third period (see FIG. 639) will be described.

Here, the contents of the effect executed during the third period will be briefly described. This third period is an effect period set after the second period in which the mission effect is executed, as described above with reference to FIG. 639. Then, at the timing when the third period is started, the effect content is set according to the effect results up to the second period.

Specifically, when the result of the mission effect is the effect result indicating the winning, the effect mode (see FIG. 375 (b)) indicating the winning is set as it is, and the effect indicating that the result of the mission effect is out of order is set. In the case of a result, the result notification effect is configured to display a display screen (time saving end screen) indicating that the time saving state ends. Then, in the pressing effect executed during the first period, if the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 hold that was not included in the pre-reading target includes a winning effect, the effect indicating the winning effect during this result notification effect ( Resurrection production) is configured to be executed. With this configuration, the look-ahead result for the special figure 2 hold acquired at the time when the first period is set is notified during the second period or the third period according to the effect result of the pressing effect. Since it is determined whether or not to notify the player, the player can be allowed to play the game with the expectation of winning until the final variation effect of Special Figure 2 is completed.

FIG. 638 (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode displayed during the result notification effect executed during the third period. As shown in FIG. 638 (a), when the result notification effect is executed, the same time saving end screen as described above is displayed with reference to FIG. 377 of the 16th embodiment described above. Further, in the thirtieth embodiment, a number of treasure chest icons corresponding to the number of reserved special figures 2 that were not targeted for pre-reading in the pressing effect is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "Hmm? There is a treasure chest" are displayed to inform the player that there is a special figure 2 hold that has not yet been read ahead.

In the example shown in FIG. 638 (a), as a result of the pressing effect, the result notification effect is shown when only one special figure 2 hold look-ahead result is set as the look-ahead target. Three treasure chest icons 829b1 to 829b3 are displayed to indicate that the number of reserved special figures 2 that did not become three is three.

In this way, in the result notification effect, by configuring the special figure 2 hold number for which the look-ahead result is not yet reflected in the execution effect to be notified to the player, an effect indicating winning is executed during the result notification effect. The degree of expectation can be predicted by the player. Therefore, when many treasure chest icons are displayed, it is possible to draw attention to the result notification effect with the expectation of winning, and when the number of treasure box icons displayed is small, excessive expectations for the result notification effect. It is possible to play a game without having to have.

In the result notification effect, the effect of opening the displayed treasure box icons (three treasure box icons 829b1 to 829b3 in the figure) in order is executed, and the winning information indicating the winning in the special figure 2 hold that is the target of the result notification effect is executed. When there is a special figure 2 hold including the above, the display mode shown in FIG. 638 (b) is displayed. FIG. 638 (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode displayed when a winning result is shown in the result notification effect.

As shown in FIG. 638 (b), if there is a special figure 2 hold that includes winning information indicating winning in the special figure 2 hold that is the target of the result notification effect, the target treasure box icon (treasure box icon in the figure). 829b1) opens, and pseudo symbols 881a to 881c indicating that the player wins the prize are displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "Congratulations on the resurrection big hit" are displayed as a guidance display mode for notifying the winning (small hit winning).

The timing at which the display mode shown in FIG. 638 is displayed is during the final fluctuation period of FIG. 2 as shown in the small display area Dm2 and the small display area Dm2a. That is, the pseudo symbols 881a to 881c do not indicate the lottery result of the variation, but notify the result of the special figure 2 lottery to be executed later in advance. Therefore, in the thirtieth embodiment, as in the sixteenth embodiment described above, from the display of the pseudo symbols 881a to 881c in the result notification effect to the stop display of the special figure 2 fluctuation that is actually won. During that time, the pseudo symbols 881a to 881c are configured to swing and display (in the figure, they are displayed by curved arrows), and the pseudo symbols 881a to 881c are configured to stop and display the winning special figure 2 fluctuation. Is configured to be switched to and displayed as a third symbol (for example, 777) indicating winning.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the lottery result corresponding to the second special symbol change that is actually being executed from being mistakenly recognized as a winning result. That is, in the present embodiment, a symbol (pseudo symbol) for notifying the result of the special symbol lottery to be executed later and a symbol for notifying the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the execution of the special symbol change are notified. By displaying the (third symbol) and the display mode differently, it is configured so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game.

Although not shown, if the special figure 2 hold corresponding to the result notification effect does not include the winning information indicating the winning, all the treasure box icons will not open (in the figure, a cross mark is used). (Display) is displayed, and the time saving state ends as it is.

In the thirtieth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 638 (a), in the result notification effect, the special figure 2 hold number for which the look-ahead result is not yet reflected in the execution effect can be notified to the player. Not limited to this, for example, the display mode of the treasure box icon is configured to display one treasure box icon regardless of the number of reserved special figures 2 in which the look-ahead result is not yet reflected in the execution effect. It may be configured to be different based on the look-ahead result of the target special figure 2 hold.

In this case, for example, when there is a special figure 2 hold (winning special figure 2 hold) having winning information indicating winning in the special figure 2 hold which is the pre-reading target of the result notification effect, there is no winning special figure 2 hold. It is preferable to configure it so that it is possible to select an advantageous display mode that is easier to select than, and a disadvantageous display mode that is easier to select when there is no hit special figure 2 hold than when there is a hit special figure 2 hold. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to understand which effect used the special figure 2 hold as the look-ahead result in the final variation effect of the special figure 2. Further, as the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 hold, the display mode of the treasure box icon may be changed according to the number of hold numbers indicating the winning (big hit, small hit) winning.

<About the electrical configuration in the thirtieth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 640 to 642, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirtieth embodiment will be described. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the thirtieth embodiment is a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 and the RAM 223 with respect to the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth embodiment described above. It differs from a part of the configuration of, in that it is changed, and is the same except for that. The detailed description of the same content will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the thirtieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 640 (a). FIG. 640 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents specified in ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the thirtieth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 640 (a), in the present embodiment, the variation pattern selection 30 table 222xa is provided in place of the variation pattern selection 16 table 222la for the ROM 222 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment described above. The difference is that the character selection table 222xb, the target hold selection table 222xc, and the display icon selection table 222xd are added.

The variation pattern selection 30 table 222xa has two variation pattern selection tables associated with the gaming state, and specifically, the normal variation pattern selection 16 table referred to when the gaming state is the normal state. It has 222la1, a time saving variation pattern selection 30 table 222xa2 referred to in the case of a time saving state. Since the normal variation pattern selection 16 table 222la1 is the same as the 16th embodiment described above, the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the time saving variation pattern selection 30 table 222xa2 is based on the same technical concept as the variation pattern selection table described in each of the above-described embodiments, and is included in the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110. It is a data table in which a display variation pattern (effect mode) corresponding to a variation pattern (variation time, lottery result, symbol type) is selected, and a variation time of 30 seconds is specified as the final variation of the second special symbol in a time-saving state. It is different from the above-mentioned 16th embodiment in that the variation pattern is configured to be always selected, and is the same except for the above-mentioned embodiment. Therefore, the illustration and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the thirtieth embodiment, the final variation in the time saving state (the final variation in FIG. 2) is configured to be a variation of 30 seconds without fail. Therefore, it is possible to unify the effect pattern of the variation effect executed in response to the final variation of the special figure 2, and it is possible to reduce the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113. Further, when the first special symbol change is executed as the final change in the time saving state, the short change of 0.2 seconds is executed as in the above-mentioned 16th embodiment (see FIG. 386), and the short change is executed. As a variable effect corresponding to, the time saving end screen is displayed. That is, if an irregular game is played in the time saving state and the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the execution of the first special symbol change, the special figure 2 hold is acquired in the final change period in the time saving state. A sufficient period is not set for the effect, and the effect (standby effect) for prompting the acquisition of the special figure 2 hold is not executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the act of intentionally performing an irregular game during the time saving state.

The character selection table 222xb is a data table referred to when selecting the type of character 851 (see FIG. 636) to be displayed in the pressing effect executed during the first period of the effect period of the final change in FIG. Is. This character selection table 222xb is executed when it is determined to be the first period start timing in the final variation effect update process 30 (see C4596 in FIG. 643) executed for determining the effect mode of the final variation in the time saving state. It is referred to when the type of the character 851 is selected in the first period effect setting process (see C4882 in FIG. 644) (see C8001 in FIG. 644). The character selection table 222xb is defined so that the ratio of type selection of the character 851 is different depending on the result (win / fail determination result) of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the final change of the special figure 2.

Here, the contents specified in the character selection table 222xb will be described with reference to FIG. 641. FIG. 641 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the character selection table 222xb. As shown in FIG. 641, in the character selection table 222xb, there are three types of selected characters (3 types of selected characters) corresponding to the hit / fail determination result corresponding to the change (the final change in Special Figure 2) and the acquired value of the effect counter 223 lf. Character type) is specified.

Specifically, when the hit / fail judgment result corresponding to the change (final change in Special Figure 2) is a big hit, the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf is in the range of "0 to 49", and "rabbit" is set to ". When "Brave" is defined in the range of "50 to 98" and the hit / fail judgment result corresponding to the change (Final change in Special Figure 2) is a small hit, the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf is ". "Rabbit" is specified in the range of "0 to 49", "turtle" is specified in the range of "50 to 79", and "hero" is specified in the range of "80 to 98". If the result of the hit / fail judgment corresponding to (variation) is out of order, the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf is "turtle" in the range of "0 to 39" and "rabbit" in the range of "40 to 89". "Brave" is defined in the range of "90 to 98".

That is, of the three types of characters that can be selected with reference to the character selection table 222xb, "hero" is the most advantageous character type for the player, "turtle" is the most disadvantageous character type for the player, and "rabbit". Is a character type that is more disadvantageous to the player than "Brave" and more advantageous to the player than "Turtle".

In this way, by making the selected character type different based on the hit / fail determination result corresponding to the change (Final change in FIG. 2), the change is based on the type of the character 851 displayed as the pressing effect. It is possible to make the player predict the result of the hit / fail judgment corresponding to (Special Figure 2 Final Change). Therefore, it is possible to let the player select whether or not to operate the frame button 22 during the pressing effect according to the prediction result of the hit / fail determination result corresponding to the change (special figure 2 final change). 2 It is possible to easily increase the variation of the effect executed during the final fluctuation.

In this embodiment, regardless of which character type is selected, the content of the character selection table 222xb so that the possibility of "missing" remains as a result of the hit / fail judgment corresponding to the change (Final change in FIG. 2). However, the special character is not limited to this, and is selected only when, for example, the hit / fail judgment result corresponding to the change (final change in Special Figure 2) is a hit (big hit, small hit). For example, a character imitating an angel) may be configured to be selectable. With this configuration, the player can be made to select whether or not to operate the frame button 22 during the pressing effect, after understanding that the fluctuation is won. As a result, for example, a player who does not want to uselessly grasp the look-ahead result in advance can select a game in which the frame button 22 is not operated during the pressing effect, and the frame button 22 can be selected in the pressing effect. It is also possible to select a game for predicting the number of deviations included in the special figure 2 hold by positively operating the button and changing the display mode of the pressed icon.

The target hold selection table 222xc is referred to in order to change the display mode of each press icon when the player presses the frame button 22 with respect to the press icons 872a to 872d during the press effect. It is a data table for selecting the type of. In the target hold selection table 222xc, the pressing effect is executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 30 (see C3157 in FIG. 647) for periodically monitoring that the player operates the frame button 22. When it is determined that it is in one period (C8201: Yes in FIG. 647) and it is determined that there is a pressed icon whose display mode is not variable (C8202: Yes in FIG. 647), the target special figure is 2 Referenced for selecting a hold (see C8203 in FIG. 647). Then, the display mode after the change is selected by the display icon selection table 222xd described later according to the hit / fail determination result (look-ahead result) of the selected special figure 2 hold (target hold).

Here, the contents specified in the target hold selection table 222xc will be described with reference to FIG. 642 (a). FIG. 642 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the target hold selection table 222xc. As shown in FIG. 642 (a), in the target hold selection table 222xc, the type of the pressed icon to be selected this time, the acquired special figure 2 hold number, and the acquired effect counter 223 lf value are displayed. Correspondingly, the target hold (target special figure 2 hold) is stipulated.

The values of "1" to "4" defined as the target hold indicate the order in which they are stored in the winning information storage area 223la. For example, the target hold "1" is next to the second special. The special figure 2 hold (the first special figure 2 hold) in which the symbol lottery is executed is shown, and the target hold "2" is the special figure 2 hold (the second special figure 2 hold) in which the second special symbol lottery is executed next. (Fig. 2 hold) is shown. Hereinafter, the target hold "3" is the third special figure 2 hold, and the target hold "4" is the second special symbol lottery executed at the end of the acquired special figure 2 hold. The special figure 2 hold (the fourth special figure 2 hold) is shown.

Specifically, if the target is the first pressing icon 872a (the pressing icon whose display mode is first changed by the pressing effect), and the number of acquired special figure 2 holdings is one, the acquisition is performed. The target hold "1" is specified in the range where the value of the effect counter 223 lf is "0 to 79", and the target hold "-" is specified in the range of "80 to 98", that is, no target hold is specified. Further, when the number of acquired special figure 2 hold is 2, the target hold "1" is in the range of "0 to 39" and the target hold is in the range of "40 to 79" in the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf. "2" is defined as a target hold "-" in the range of "80 to 98", that is, no target hold. When the number of acquired special figure 2 hold is 3, the target hold "1" is in the range of "0 to 39" and the target hold "2" is in the range of "40 to 79". , "3" in the range of "80 to 89" and "-" in the range of "90 to 98", that is, no target hold is specified. When the number of acquired special figure 2 hold is 4, the target hold "1" is in the range of "0 to 39" and the target hold is "2" in the range of "40 to 79". , "3" is defined in the range of "80 to 89", and "4" is defined in the range of "90 to 98".

Next, when the second pressed icon 872b (the pressed icon whose display mode is changed second by the pressing effect) is the target and the acquired special figure 2 hold number is 2, the acquired effect is obtained. The target hold "2" is in the range of "0 to 39", the target hold "-" is in the range of "40 to 79", and the target hold "1" is in the range of "80 to 89". The target hold "-" is specified in the range of "90 to 98". When the number of acquired special figure 2 hold is 3, the target hold "2" is in the range of "0 to 39" and the target hold "3" is in the range of "40 to 79". , "1" is specified in the range of "80 to 89", and "-" is specified in the range of "90 to 98". When the number of acquired special figure 2 hold is 4, the target hold "2" is in the range of "0 to 39" and the target hold is "3" in the range of "40 to 79". , "1" is defined in the range of "80 to 89", and "4" is defined in the range of "90 to 98".

If the target is the third press icon 872c (the press icon whose display mode is changed third by the press effect) and the acquired special figure 2 hold number is 3, the acquired effect counter 223 lf. The target hold "3" is in the range of "0 to 39", the target hold "2" is in the range of "40 to 79", and the target hold "1" is in the range of "80 to 89". The target hold "-" is specified in the range of "~ 98". When the number of acquired special figure 2 hold is 4, the target hold "3" is in the range of "0 to 39" and the target hold "4" is in the range of "40 to 79". , "2" is specified in the range of "80 to 89", and "1" is specified in the range of "90 to 98".

Finally, when the fourth pressed icon 872d (the pressed icon whose display mode is changed at the end (fourth) by the pressing effect) is the target, and the number of acquired special figure 2 hold is four. , The target hold "2" is in the range of "0 to 39", the target hold "3" is in the range of "40 to 79", and the target hold is in the range of "80 to 89". "4" is defined as "all" on hold in the range of "90 to 98".

The target hold "all" that can be selected as the target hold for the fourth pressed icon 872d indicates that all the special figure 2 hold is set as the target hold. With this configuration, it is possible to determine the display mode after the change by referring to the hit / fail determination results of a plurality of special figure 2 hold for one pressed icon, so that one special figure 2 hold is held. As compared with the case where the display mode after the variable is determined by referring to the result of the hit / fail judgment, the probability that the winning / fail judgment result includes the winning can be increased. Can be easily selected.

Further, since it can be determined that a plurality of winnings are included in the winning / failing determination results of the plurality of special figures 2 hold, a special display mode (FIG. 637) indicating that the plurality of winnings are included. (B)) can be displayed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, as the pressing effect executed in a partial period (first period) of the final fluctuation of the special figure 2, the number of pressing icons 872a to 872d corresponding to the reserved number of the special figure 2 Is configured to be displayed, and when the player presses the operating means (frame button 22) during the first period, the display modes of the pressing icons 872a to 872d are variably displayed in order. Then, when the display mode of the pressed icons 872a to 872d is to be variably displayed, the target special figure 2 hold is randomly selected for each pressed icon, and based on the pre-reading result of the selected special figure 2 hold. It is configured to determine the effect mode after the variable display. Further, it is configured so that the special figure 2 hold which is the target of each pressed icon can be duplicated, and the display mode of the pressed icon can be changed without providing the target hold.

By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to understand how many pre-reading results of the special figure 2 hold are displayed in the display mode of the pressed icon variably displayed during the pressing effect. Even if the effect result of the mission effect executed after the pressing effect is an effect result indicating a deviation, there is a possibility that the mission effect that does not reflect the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold is executed, so the result is It is possible to play the game while expecting that the winning is notified by the notification effect.

Further, when a plurality of display modes that are easily selected at the time of winning are selected as the display modes of each pressed icon, is the plurality of display modes selected for the specific hit special figure 2 hold, or is it? Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether or not there are a plurality of hit special figure 2 reservations, it is possible to make the player interested in the game content to be executed in the future.

In this embodiment, either the special figure 2 hold of 1 or all the special figure 2 hold can be selected as the target hold of the press icon, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured so that two special figure 2 hold and three special figure 2 hold can be selected as the target hold. Further, in the present embodiment, depending on the selection result with reference to the target hold selection table 222xc, three or more pressing icons for which the same special figure 2 hold is the target hold can be generated. The number of pressed icons for which the same special figure 2 hold is the target hold may be set to an upper limit without limitation, or may be configured so as not to be duplicated. With this configuration, it is possible to easily match the number of times the player operates the operating means during the pressing effect with the number of holdings in Special Figure 2 that refers to the look-ahead result. It is possible to easily set the special figure 2 hold number used for the effect and the mission effect) and the special figure 2 hold number used for the result notification effect to the contents desired by the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, the more the player operates the operating means during the pressing effect, the more the number of special figures 2 held for the final variation effect (pressing effect and mission effect) increases. Not limited to this, for example, the more the player operates the operating means during the pressing effect, the more the special figure 2 hold number used for the final variation effect (pressing effect and mission effect) is configured to decrease. Is also good. In this case, on the start screen of the pressing effect shown in FIG. 636 (a), "Discard the stock with the button PUSH !!" is displayed, and by operating the frame button 22 during the pressing effect, the display area Dm21 is displayed. The effect of erasing the displayed pressed icons 872a to 872d in order is executed, and the target hold is applied to the pressed icons 872a to 872d displayed in the display area Dm21 at the end timing of the pressed effect, as in the present embodiment. It may be determined and configured to be variable to a display mode according to the result of the determination of whether or not the target is held.

With this configuration, it is possible to enthusiastically operate the frame button 22 for the player who does not want to reflect the look-ahead result in the special figure 2 hold in the final variation effect (pressing effect and mission effect). Become. Further, the first pressing effect and the second pressing effect are executably configured as the pressing effect, and as the first pressing effect, as in the present embodiment, the more the player operates the operating means, the more the final variation occurs. Special figure 2 used for the effect (pressing effect and mission effect) The pressing effect that increases the number of holdings is executed, and as the second pressing effect, the more the player operates the operating means, the more the final variable effect (pressing effect and mission). The special figure 2 used for the effect) may be configured to execute a pressing effect that reduces the number of holdings. As a result, even for a player who does not want to reflect the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 hold in the final variation effect (pressing effect and mission effect), the special figure 2 hold in the final variation effect (pressing effect and mission effect). It is possible to operate the frame button 22 during the pressing effect even for the player who wants to reflect the pre-reading result, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced, and for the player who does not want to operate the frame button 22. However, it is possible to execute the final variation effect in different modes, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The display icon selection table 222xd is a data table for selecting the display mode after the change of each pressed icon. Here, the contents specified in the display icon selection table 222xd will be described with reference to FIG. 642 (b). FIG. 642 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the display icon selection table 222xd. As shown in FIG. 642 (b), in the display icon selection table 222xd, the hit / fail determination result (look-ahead result) of the target hold of each of the pressed icons 872a to 872d selected with reference to the target hold selection table 222xc and the effect. A different display mode (display icon) is defined based on the value of the counter 223 lf.

Specifically, when the result of the hit / fail judgment is "hit", the display icon "large aura" is defined in the range where the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf is "0 to 49", and the range is "50 to 89". The display icon "sword" is defined in, and the display icon "chance" is defined in the range of "90 to 98". If the result of the hit / fail judgment is "off", the display icon "?" Is defined in the range of "0 to 39" for the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf, and the display icon "?" Is specified in the range of "40 to 79". "Sword" is defined, the display icon "chance" is defined in the range of "80 to 89", and the display icon "aura large" is defined in the range of "90 to 98".

Further, when the hit / fail determination result is "-", that is, when the target hold is not provided, the display icon "chance" is defined in the range where the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf is "0 to 49", and "50". The display icon "?" Is specified in the range of "~ 98". Further, when the winning / failing determination result is "multiple hits", that is, the target hold "all" is selected in the target hold selection table 222xc, and a plurality of small hit wins are selected in all the special figure 2 holds. If there is a hit / fail determination result (look-ahead result), the display icon "special V" is defined in the range of "0 to 98", which is the entire range that the acquired effect counter 223 lf can take.

In this way, by making the selection ratio of the selected display icon (display mode after variable) different according to the hit / fail judgment result (look-ahead result) of the target hold, it is based on the display mode displayed by the pressing effect. Therefore, it is possible to predict the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold. Therefore, for example, the operation means is operated for the first pressing icon 872a during the pressing effect, and the display mode of the pressing icon 872a is "large aura", that is, it is selected when the target hold is won. When the display mode is variable to an easy display mode, the operation to the operating means during the pressing effect at that time is stopped, or the operating means is further operated to display the second "aura large". It can provide the enjoyment of letting the player choose whether to aim for.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the thirtieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 640 (b). FIG. 640 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the thirtieth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 640 (b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the thirtieth embodiment has the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the above-mentioned sixteenth embodiment (see FIG. 387 (b)). On the other hand, the press counter 223xa, the used hold information storage area 223xb, the unused hold information storage area 223xc, and the completed flag 223xd are added, and the other points are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The pressing counter 223xa is a counter for measuring the number of pressing icons 872a to 872d displayed during the pressing effect. The press counter 223xa is the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223 lc when it is determined in the final variation effect update process 30 (see C4596 in FIG. 643) that the waiting period has elapsed timing (C4801: Yes in FIG. 643). A value corresponding to the number of reserved special figures 2 is set based on (see C4881 in FIG. 643). Then, it is subtracted when it is effectively determined that the frame button 22 is operated during the first period (during the pressing effect) (C8207 in FIG. 647). Further, the value of the pressing counter 223xa is determined at the end timing of the first period in which the pressing effect is executed (C4885 in FIG. 643), and the value is larger than 0, that is, the display mode is changed at the end of the pressing effect. When it is determined that there is no pressed icon (C4885: Yes in FIG. 643), the display mode of the pressed icon corresponding to the value of the pressed counter 223xa is variably displayed as "?", And then the value is cleared to 0. (See C4887 in FIG. 643).

The used hold information storage area 223xb and the unused hold information storage area 223xc are storage areas for storing information for managing the special figure 2 hold in which the look-ahead result is used in the pressing effect.

The completed flag 223xd is a flag for indicating that the effect indicating that the winner has been won has been executed in the final variation effect (pressing effect and mission effect), and the effect indicating that the winner has been won has been executed. Is set to on. Then, in the third period effect setting process (see C4891 in FIG. 646), the setting status is determined, and the effect mode is set based on the determination result. In other words, if an effect indicating that the winner is won is executed in the effect (final variation effect) executed in the first period and the second period, the effect of congratulating the winning is executed in the third period. (See C8111 in FIG. 646) and then set to off (C8112 in FIG. 646).

On the other hand, if the effect indicating that the winner is won is not executed in the effect (final variation effect) executed in the first period and the second period, the time saving end screen is displayed in the third period effect. It is determined whether or not to execute the result notification effect for the purpose of performing the result notification effect, and further determine whether or not to execute the revival effect during the result notification effect, and the effect mode according to the determination result. As a result, it is possible to execute a plurality of effects executed during the final variation period of Special Figure 2 as a series of effects without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

The first period flag 223xe is a flag for indicating that the final variation effect is in the first period, and is set to on when the first period is set. Then, it is set to off at the end timing of the first period.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the thirtieth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 643 to 647, the content of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the thirtieth embodiment will be described. The control processing content executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the thirtieth embodiment is a final variation effect with respect to the control processing content executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixteenth embodiment described above. Instead of the update process (see C4506 in FIG. 423), the final variation effect update process 30 (see C4596 in FIG. 643) is replaced with the frame button input monitoring / effect process (C3107), and the frame button input monitoring / effect process (see C3107). It differs in that it executes (see C3157 in FIG. 647), and is otherwise the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, the control processing contents of the voice lamp control device 113 are described with reference to the 1st embodiment. Therefore, in a part of explaining the content of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the thirtieth embodiment, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment as appropriate. The explanation will be given using the contents (details are the contents in which the S number is changed to the C number).

First, the contents of the final variation staging update process 30 (see C4596) will be described with reference to FIG. 643. FIG. 643 is a flowchart showing the contents of the final variation effect update process 30 (see C4596). In the final variation effect update process 30 (see C4596), the start or end timing of each effect is determined during the execution of the final variation effect (Special Figure 2 final variation effect), and the control process according to the determination result is performed. Will be executed.

When the final variation effect update process 30 (see C4596) is executed, first, it is determined whether the waiting period has elapsed timing (C4801), and if it is determined to be the waiting period elapsed timing (C4801: Yes), the special feature. FIG. 2 The value corresponding to the number of holds is set in the press counter 223xa (C4881), and this processing is terminated.

Further, in the processing of C4801, when it is determined that the waiting period has not elapsed timing (C4801: No), then it is determined whether it is the first period start timing (C4804), and it is the first period start timing. If it is determined (C4804: Yes), the first period effect setting process is executed (C4882), and this process is terminated. The first period effect setting process (C4882) will be described later with reference to FIG. 644.

In the processing of C4804, if it is determined that it is not the first period start timing (C4804: No), then it is determined whether it is the first period end timing (C4883), and it is determined that it is the first period end timing. If (C4883: Yes), the flag 223xe is set to off during the first period (C4884), it is determined whether the value of the press counter 223xa is larger than 0 (C4885), and it is determined that it is larger than 0. (C4885: Yes), a display command is set to display the pressing icon corresponding to the value of the pressing counter 223xa as "?" (C4886), and the value of the pressing counter 223xa is cleared to 0 (C4886). C4887), this process is terminated. Further, in the process of C4885, if it is determined that the value of the press counter 223xa is 0 (C4885: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, in the process of C4883, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the first period (C4883: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the second period (C4888), and it is the start timing of the second period. If it is determined (C4888: Yes), the second period effect setting process is executed (C4889), and this process is terminated. The second period effect setting process (C4889) will be described later with reference to FIG. 645. On the other hand, in the processing of C4888, when it is determined that it is not the second period start timing (C4888: No), then it is determined whether it is the third period start timing (C4890), and it is the third period start timing. If it is determined (C4890: Yes), the third period effect setting process is executed (C4891), and this process is terminated. The third period effect setting process (C4891) will be described later with reference to FIG. 646. Further, in the process of C4890, if it is determined that the timing is not the start timing of the third period (C4890: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, the contents of the first period staging setting process (C4882) will be described with reference to FIG. 644. FIG. 644 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first period effect setting process (C4882). In this first period effect setting process (C4882), a process for setting an effect mode for the first period, that is, an effect mode of the pressing effect is executed.

When the first period effect setting process (C4882) is executed, first, a character is selected with reference to the character selection table 222xb based on the result of determining whether or not the final variation is correct (C8001). Then, a display command indicating the selected character is set (C8002), then a display command indicating the press icons 872a to 872d corresponding to the value of the press counter 223xa is set (C8003), and the flag during the first period is set. Set 223x to on (C8004) and end this process.

Next, the contents of the second period staging setting process (C4889) will be described with reference to FIG. 645. FIG. 645 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second period effect setting process (C4889). In this second period effect setting process (C4889), a process for setting an effect mode corresponding to the second period, that is, an effect mode of a mission effect is executed.

When the second period effect setting process (C4889) is executed, first, the information in the use hold information storage area 223xb is read out (C8051), and it is determined whether or not there is hit information (C8052). Then, when it is determined that there is hit information (C8052: Yes), the effect mode indicating the winning is determined as the effect result of the mission effect (C8053), the completed flag 223xd is set to ON (C8054), and the determination is made. A display command indicating the effect mode is set (C8055), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of C8052 that there is no winning information (C8052: No), among the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223la, the number of holdings for the winning information that has not been used yet, and the winning / failing determination are made. Information indicating the result (pre-reading result) is stored in the unused pending information storage area 223xc (C8056), the production mode of the second period production (mission production) indicating the deviation is determined (C8057), and the process proceeds to C8055. After that, this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the third period effect setting process (C4891) will be described with reference to FIG. 646. FIG. 646 is a flowchart showing the contents of the third period effect setting process (C4891). In this third period effect setting process (C4891), a process for setting an effect mode corresponding to the third period, that is, an effect mode of the result notification effect is executed.

When the third period effect setting process (C4891) is executed, first, it is determined whether the completed flag 223xd is set to ON (C8101), and when it is determined that it is not set to ON, that is, for the mission effect. If it is determined that the effect indicating winning is not executed (C8101: No), the information stored in the unused hold information storage area 223xc is read (C8102), and the treasure box icon corresponding to the read hold number is read. The number of 829b is determined (C8103), and it is determined whether or not there is information in the information read in the process of C8102 (C8104).

In the processing of C8104, when it is determined that there is a hit information (C8104: Yes), an effect mode indicating a winning using the corresponding treasure box icon 829b is determined (C8105), and a display command indicating the determined effect mode is issued. Set (C8106) and end this process.

On the other hand, in the process of C8104, when it is determined that there is no hit information (C8104: No), the information stored in the winning information storage area 223la is read (C8107), and it is checked whether the read information contains the hit information. Discriminate (C8108).

Here, the processing content of C8108 will be described. In the present embodiment, at the start of the result notification effect, the treasure box icon 829b corresponding to the number of information stored in the unused pending information storage area 223xc is displayed, and the effect of hitting and notifying during the result notification effect can be executed. is doing. However, the timing at which the information is stored in the unused pending information storage area 223xc is the start timing of the second period. Therefore, for example, when the special figure 2 hold has not been acquired up to the upper limit number (4 pieces) at the start of the second period, the new special feature is stored after the information is stored in the unused hold information storage area 223xc. FIG. 2 Occurs when a hold is acquired.

Therefore, by the processing of C8108, the winning information corresponding to the special figure 2 holding that is not stored in the unused hold information storage area 223xc and is stored in the prize information storage area 223la is determined in advance, so that the time reduction ends. It is possible to execute the hit notification during the result notification effect for all the special figure 2 holdes that have already been acquired in.

In the process of C8108, if it is determined that there is a hit information (C8108: Yes), after displaying the out-of-order treasure box, the effect mode showing the winning is determined (C8109), and the process proceeds to the process of C8106. If it is determined that there is no hit information (C8108: No), the mode showing the winning is determined (C8110), and the process proceeds to C8106.

On the other hand, in the process of C8101, when it is determined that the completed flag 223xd is set to on (C8101: Yes), the effect mode for congratulating the hit is determined (C8111), and the completed flag 223xd is set to off (C8111). C8112), shift to the processing of C8106.

Next, the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 30 (C3157) will be described with reference to FIG. 647. FIG. 647 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 30 (C3157). In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 30 (C3157), a process for setting various effects to be executed based on the operation of the operating means (frame button 22) by the player is executed.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 30 (C3157) is executed, first, it is determined whether the flag 223xe is set to ON during the first period (C8201), and if it is determined that the flag 223x is set to ON, it is determined. (C8201: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the pressing counter 223xa is larger than 0, that is, whether the pressing icons 872a to 872d are displayed (C8202).

In the process of C8202, if it is determined that the value of the press counter 223xa is larger than 0 (C8202: Yes), the target hold is determined by referring to the target hold selection table 222xc (C8203), and the determined target hold is awarded. The display icon is determined by referring to the display icon selection table 222xd based on the information (C8204), and the display mode of the press icon 872 corresponding to the value of the press counter 223xa is determined to be the determined display icon (C8205) and displayed. The display mode of the character corresponding to the content of the icon is determined (C8206), the value of the press counter 223xa is subtracted by 1 (C8207), the display command corresponding to the determined content is set (C8208), and this process is performed. finish.

Further, in the process of C8202, when it is determined that the value of the pressing counter 223xa is 0, that is, when it is determined that all the displayed pressing icons 872 are variably displayed during the pressing effect (C8202). : No), the production mode for liveliness is determined (C8209), and the process proceeds to C8208. On the other hand, in the process of C8201 when it is determined that the flag 223xe is not set to ON during the first period (C8201: No), the process related to the other frame button input is executed (C8210), and the process proceeds to the process of C8208. ..

In the thirtieth embodiment, the look-ahead of the special figure 2 hold referred to in the plurality of effects (final variation effect, result notification effect) executed in the final variation (special figure 2 final variation) in the time saving state. It is configured so that the result is selected, but it is not limited to this, and as a variation effect corresponding to the special figure 2 variation executed during the time saving state, it corresponds to the special figure 2 variation other than the special figure 2 final variation. In the variable effect (non-final variable effect) to be performed, the effect mode may be variably configured based on the preliminary determination result of the special drawing 2 lottery executed after the gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state. Then, even if it is configured so that the player can grasp the number of winnings included in the special figure 2 hold that has already been acquired, based on the effect mode of the non-final variation effect and the effect mode of the final variation effect. good. Specifically, when the special variation effect is executed as the non-final variation effect, if the effect result of the special variation effect is the effect result indicating winning, the special figure corresponding to the non-final variation effect. 2 When the variation indicates that the variation is a hit variation and the effect result of the special variation effect is an effect result indicating a deviation, the special figure corresponding to the non-final variation effect 2 A plurality of special figures executed after the variation. 2 The lottery may be configured to indicate that a plurality of winnings are included.

With this configuration, when a special variation effect is executed, it is possible to provide the player with a novel effect of expecting the variation to be an out-of-range variation, and to enhance the interest of the game. Can be improved.

<31st Embodiment>
Next, the 31st embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 648 to 651. The 31st embodiment is different from the 30th embodiment described above in that the method for determining the effect mode of the time saving final variation is different, and is the same except for the above. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

In the thirtieth embodiment described above, at the end timing of the waiting period (start timing of the first period) in the final variation of the time saving state (final variation of special figure 2), according to the number of reserved special figures 2 acquired. When the display mode (pressing icons 872a to 872d) that can be operated (pressed) is displayed during the pressing effect and the operating means is operated during the pressing effect, any of the acquired special figure 2 holds is displayed. It was configured to notify the player of information for indicating the look-ahead result for the hold.

On the other hand, in the 31st embodiment, the pre-reading for the acquired special figure 2 hold is performed at the end timing (start timing of the first period) of the waiting period in the final change in the time saving state (special figure 2 final change). When it is executed and it is determined that there is a winning special figure 2 hold, the timing for notifying that the winning special figure 2 hold (winning special figure 2 hold) exists is configured to be determined by lottery. There is a big difference in that.

With this configuration, the execution timing of the effect (win effect) for notifying the existence of the hit special figure 2 hold, which is the effect content most desired by the player as the effect content of the time saving final fluctuation, is randomly set. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player to the end of the production of the time saving final fluctuation.

Here, with reference to FIG. 648, the effect content of the time saving final variation executed in the 31st embodiment will be described focusing on the points different from the 30th embodiment described above. FIG. 648 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the effect executed in the time saving final variation (special FIG. 2 final variation). As shown in FIG. 648, the effect of the time saving final variation executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the 31st embodiment is the effect of the time saving final variation executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the 30th embodiment described above (see FIG. 639). ), It differs in that the period in which the operation valid period for which the operation to the operation means by the player is effectively determined is set, that is, the period in which the pressing effect is executed is deleted, and the other points are the same. be. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

More specifically, in the time saving final variation (special figure 2 final variation), the second special symbol variation for 30 seconds is executed, and the player is made to acquire the special figure 2 hold in the first 5 seconds. A waiting period during which the prompting standby effect is executed is set, and then a first period of 20 seconds is set. During this first period, the mission effect (final variation effect) according to the thirtieth embodiment described above is executed, and then the result notification effect is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, as the effect of the time saving final variation, the final variation effect and the result notification effect are executed as in the above-mentioned thirtieth embodiment.

Then, if there is a winning special figure 2 hold (winning special figure 2 hold) in the acquired special figure 2 hold, whether to notify that fact by the final variation effect or the result notification effect. Is configured to be determined by lottery.

By configuring in this way, for example, at the time when the waiting period elapses, the special figure 2 hold is acquired up to the upper limit (4 pieces), and the special figure 2 hold exists in the acquired special figure 2 hold. However, it is possible to notify that fact not by the final fluctuation effect but by the result notification effect. Therefore, the player is expected to win the prize until all of the plurality of effects (the effect capable of notifying the player of the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 hold) executed in the final variation of the time reduction is completed. It is possible to easily maintain the feeling.

<About the electrical configuration of the 31st embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 649 and 650, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the 31st embodiment will be described. In the 31st embodiment, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device is partially changed from the 30th embodiment described above, and the configuration of the RAM 223 is partially deleted. Other than that, the configuration is the same. be. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. First, the contents specified in ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 649. FIG. 649 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 649, in the 31st embodiment, the character selection table 222xb, the target hold selection table 222xc, and the display icon selection table 222xd are deleted from the 30th embodiment described above, and the notification period selection 31 table 222ya is deleted. It differs in that it is added, and it is the same except for that.

The configuration of the RAM 223 is such that the press counter 223xa, the used hold information storage area 223xb, the unused hold information storage area 223xc, and the completed flag 223xd are deleted from the above-described 30th embodiment, that is, the configuration of the ROM 222 is changed. Along with this, there is a difference in that unnecessary flags and counters are deleted, but since the only difference is the deletion of the configuration, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Notification period selection 31 Table 222ya selects an effect (period) for notifying when there is a special figure 2 hold (winning special figure 2 hold) indicating winning in the special figure 2 hold in the time saving final fluctuation. It is a data table used to do so. The notification period selection 31 table 222ya stores the winning information when it is determined in the final variation effect update process 31 (see FIG. 651 in FIG. 651) that it is the start timing of the first period (C8301: Yes in FIG. 651). When the winning information corresponding to the special figure 2 hold is read from the area 223la and it is determined that there is winning information (winning special figure 2 hold) as the pre-determination result (look-ahead result) based on the read winning information (FIG. 651). C8303: Yes), referred to for selecting the notification period of the hit notification.

Here, the contents of the notification period selection 31 table 222ya will be described with reference to FIG. 650. FIG. 650 is a diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the notification period selection 31 table 222ya. As shown in FIG. 650, in the notification period selection 31 table 222ya, the pass / fail judgment result of the execution fluctuation (time saving final fluctuation), the special figure 2 hold type including the hit information, and the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf are displayed. , And the notification target period is specified.

Specifically, when the result of determining whether or not the fluctuation during execution is "hit" and the hit information exists in Hochi 1 (holding in the first special figure 2), the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf is "0". The range of "29" defines the "first period" as the notification target period, and the range of "30 to 98" defines the "second period" as the notification target period. Further, when the hit information exists in the maintenance 2 (holding in the second special figure 2), the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf is in the range of "0 to 39", and the "first period" is set to "1st period" as the notification target period. A "second period" is defined as a notification target period in the range of "40 to 98". Further, when the hit information exists in the maintenance 3 (holding in the third special figure 2), the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf is in the range of "0 to 49", and the "first period" is set to "1st period" as the notification target period. A "second period" is defined as a notification target period in the range of "50 to 98". Further, when the hit information exists in the maintenance 4 (holding in the fourth special figure 2), the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf is in the range of "0 to 69", and the "first period" is set to "1st period" as the notification target period. A "second period" is defined as a notification target period in the range of "70 to 98".

On the other hand, when the result of determining whether or not the fluctuation during execution is "missing" and the hit information exists in Hochi 1 (holding in the first special figure 2), the value of the acquired effect counter 223lf is "0 to 69". The range of "1st period" is defined as the notification target period, and the range of "70 to 98" is defined as the "second period" as the notification target period. Further, when the hit information exists in the maintenance 2 (holding in the second special figure 2), the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf is in the range of "0 to 59", and the "first period" is set to "1st period" as the notification target period. A "second period" is defined as a notification target period in the range of "60 to 98". Further, when the hit information exists in the maintenance 3 (holding in the third special figure 2), the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf is in the range of "0 to 49", and the "first period" is set to "1st period" as the notification target period. A "second period" is defined as a notification target period in the range of "50 to 98". Further, when the hit information exists in the maintenance 4 (holding in the fourth special figure 2), the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf is in the range of "0 to 39", and the "first period" is set to "1st period" as the notification target period. A "second period" is defined as a notification target period in the range of "40 to 98". In addition, when the execution fluctuation is "off", it is configured to determine whether there are multiple hit information, and when it is determined that there are multiple hit information (when there are multiple hit information), it is configured. A "first period" is defined as a notification target period for the entire range "0 to 98" that the value of the acquired effect counter 223 lf can take.

In the 31st embodiment, as described above, when the hit information (hit special figure 2 hold) exists in the special figure 2 hold, the notification target period is selected by lottery, and the notice is given. When the first period is selected as the target period, the winning is notified in the mission effect (see FIG. 375 (a)) which is the final variation effect, and when the second period is selected, the result is notified. It is configured to notify the winning in the production (see FIG. 638 (b)). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the effect indicating the winning is executed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the 31st embodiment, the notification target period is selected according to the storage location of the winning special figure 2 hold, that is, the order in which the winning special figure 2 hold is stored among the acquired special figure 2 hold. The proportions are different. Therefore, when the winning is actually notified, by determining whether the notification was made during the first period or the second period, it is possible to predict the number of winning special figures 2 held. It can be made easier.

In addition, in the 31st embodiment, as a general rule, for the acquired special figure 2 hold, the pre-reading process (winning special figure) is performed in order from the first special figure 2 hold (the hold in which the special figure 2 lottery is executed next). 2 Preliminary determination process for whether or not the book is on hold) is executed, and if it is determined that the special figure 2 is on hold, the look-ahead process is not executed for the subsequent special figure 2 hold. There is.

That is, when the hit special figure 2 hold is the first special figure 2 hold, the pre-reading process of the second special figure 2 hold to the fourth special figure 2 hold is not executed, and the hit special figure 2 is not executed. When the hold is the 4th special figure 2 hold, it means that the 1st special figure 2 hold to the 3rd special figure 2 hold are "off". Therefore, by predicting the type of winning special figure 2 hold (1st special figure 2 hold to 4th special figure 2 hold) based on the period during which the effect indicating the winning is executed, the remaining special figure 2 hold Since it is possible to make the expectation for winning the prize different, it is possible to make the player more interested in the production performed during the final change in time reduction.

Further, in the 31st embodiment, the notification target period is different according to the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation (the final change of the special figure 2) being executed, and the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation being executed is obtained. It is configured so that the notification target period that is easy to be selected differs depending on whether it is a hit or a miss. Specifically, if the special figure 2 fluctuation during execution is won, the look-ahead result that is advantageous to the player as the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold (the special figure 2 hold that is executed earlier is a hit special). (Fig. 2 hold), it is stipulated that the second period is easier to select, but if the special figure 2 fluctuation during execution is out of the range, the game is played as a look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold. It is stipulated that the pre-reading result (the earlier-executed special figure 2 hold is a hit and the special figure 2 hold) is more advantageous to the person, the easier it is to select the first period. With this configuration, in addition to the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold, the player can be interested in the lottery result of the change (time saving final change).

In addition, in the 31st embodiment, the look-ahead process is executed for all the special figure 2 hold only when the predetermined condition is satisfied, that is, only when the special figure 2 fluctuation during execution is out of alignment. When it is determined that there are a plurality of hit special figure 2 hold in the special figure 2 hold by the look-ahead process, the first period is always selected as the notification target period. It is composed. With this configuration, if the mission effect executed in the first period is the effect result indicating winning, and the lottery result of the change is out of order, the special figure 2 hold will be held. It is possible to increase the possibility that there are multiple.

In this case, when the result of the mission is to indicate the winning, it is possible to perform a suggestion effect that can suggest to the player which special figure 2 lottery result the effect result is intended for. It is good to configure it, and at least it is sufficient to make it possible to execute a suggestion effect that allows the player to grasp whether it is the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation being executed or the lottery result of the special figure 2 hold that has been acquired. ..

Further, without using the above-mentioned suggestion effect, for example, as described above with reference to FIG. 375, for showing the fluctuation status of the second special symbol (variably displaying the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the special diagram 2). By displaying the small display area Dm2 and the small display area Dm2a for showing the number of holdings of the second special symbol (the number of holdings of special figure 2) on the display screen, the result of this production is the lottery result of the time saving final fluctuation. A mode in which the player can determine after the fact whether it is shown or the lottery result of the special figure 2 hold may be used.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the 31st embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 651, the content of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the 31st embodiment will be described. The control processing content executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 31st embodiment is finally changed with respect to the control processing content executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 30th embodiment described above. The difference is that the final variation effect update process 31 (see C4599 in FIG. 651) is executed instead of the effect update process 30 (see C4596 in FIG. 643), and the rest is the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 651 is a flowchart showing the contents of the final variation effect update process 31 (see C4599). In the final variation effect update process 31 (see C4599), the processing content executed at the start timing of each period is different from the above-mentioned final variation effect update process 30 (see C4596 in FIG. 643). It's different.

When the final variation effect update process 31 (see C4599) is executed, first, it is determined whether it is the first period start timing (C8301), and when it is determined that it is the first period start timing (C8301: Yes). , The winning information is read from the winning information storage area 223la (C8302), and it is determined whether the winning information is included in the read winning information (C8303).

Then, in the process of C8303, when it is determined that the hit information is included (C8303), the first is referred to by referring to the notification period selection 31 table 222ya based on the hit / fail determination result of the change and the hit information. The period and the effect mode of the second period are determined (C8304), and the process proceeds to C8311. Further, in the processing of C8303, if it is determined that the hit information is not included (C8303: No), it is determined whether the fluctuation is a hit fluctuation (C8305), and if it is a hit fluctuation (C8305: Yes). ), The effect mode indicating winning is determined in the first period (C8306), and the process proceeds to C8311.

On the other hand, in the process of C8305, when it is determined that there is no hit fluctuation (C8305), the effect mode showing the deviation in the first period and the second period is determined (C8307), and the process proceeds to the process of C8311.

Further, in the processing of C8301 when it is determined that it is not the first period start timing (C8301: No), then it is determined whether it is the second period start timing (C8308), and it is the second period start timing. (C8308: Yes), it is determined whether or not a new special 2 hold, that is, a new special figure 2 hold (special 2 hold) has been acquired after the start timing of the first period (C8309). If it is determined that a new acquisition has been made (C8309: Yes), the re-read-ahead flag lr is set to ON (C8310), and the process proceeds to S8311. Since the contents of the re-reading flag rl and the contents of various processes executed based on the fact that the re-reading flag is set to ON are the same as those in the 16th embodiment described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the processing of C8308, it was determined that it was not the start timing of the second period (C8308: No), or in the processing of C8309, it was determined that a new special 2 hold (special figure 2 hold) was not acquired. In the case (C8309: No), the process of C8310 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of C8311.

In the process of C8311, a display command for indicating the effect mode determined in the above-mentioned various processes is set (C8311), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the 31st embodiment, with respect to the acquired special figure 2 hold at the end timing (start timing of the first period) of the waiting period in the final change in the time saving state (special figure 2 final change). When pre-reading is executed and it is determined that there is a winning special figure 2 hold, the timing for notifying that the winning special figure 2 hold (winning special figure 2 hold) exists is determined by lottery. There is a big difference in the composition.

With this configuration, the execution timing of the effect (win effect) for notifying the existence of the hit special figure 2 hold, which is the effect content most desired by the player as the effect content of the time saving final fluctuation, is randomly set. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player to the end of the production of the time saving final fluctuation.

In addition, in the time saving final variation (special figure 2 final variation), the second special symbol variation for 30 seconds is executed, and in the first 5 seconds, a standby effect is performed to urge the player to acquire the special figure 2 hold. The waiting period to be executed is set, and then the first period of 20 seconds is set. During this first period, the mission effect (final variation effect) according to the thirtieth embodiment described above is executed, and then the result notification effect is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, as the effect of the time saving final variation, the final variation effect and the result notification effect are executed as in the above-mentioned thirtieth embodiment.

Then, if there is a winning special figure 2 hold (winning special figure 2 hold) in the acquired special figure 2 hold, whether to notify that fact by the final variation effect or the result notification effect. Is configured to be determined by lottery.

By configuring in this way, for example, at the time when the waiting period elapses, the special figure 2 hold is acquired up to the upper limit (4 pieces), and the special figure 2 hold exists in the acquired special figure 2 hold. However, it is possible to notify that fact not by the final fluctuation effect but by the result notification effect. Therefore, the player is expected to win the prize until all of the plurality of effects (the effect capable of notifying the player of the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 hold) executed in the final variation of the time reduction is completed. It is possible to easily maintain the feeling.

As described above, in the thirtieth embodiment and the thirty-first embodiment described above, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation (special figure 2 final variation), which is the time-saving final variation, is fixed to 30 seconds (FIG. 639). , And FIG. 648), but the variation time is not limited to this, and the variation time of the special figure 2 variation (the final variation of the special figure 2), which is the time-saving final variation, can be selected and the variation time of a different length can be selected. May be. In this case, for example, 5 seconds and 25 seconds can be selected as the fluctuation time of the final fluctuation of the special figure 2, and when the fluctuation time of 5 seconds is selected, the result notification effect is produced when the final fluctuation of the special figure 2 is started. When a variation time of 25 seconds is selected, the standby effect (5 seconds) is omitted when the final variation of Special Figure 2 is started, and the final variation effect is executed. Then it is good. As a result, even when the fluctuation time of the final fluctuation of the special figure 2 is different, the effect using the same effect data can be executed, so that the amount of effect data can be reduced.

In addition, when a fluctuation time of 25 seconds to 30 seconds can be set as the fluctuation time of the final fluctuation in Special Figure 2, the fluctuation production in which the length of the period during which the above-mentioned standby effect is executed is changed is executed. It should be configured to do so. That is, as in the thirtieth embodiment and the thirty-first embodiment described above, at least the staging period including the final fluctuation period of FIG. 2 is divided into a plurality of periods (first period, second period, etc.), and each period. When different effects are configured to be executable, the effects executed for each period are prioritized, and when different lengths of effects are set, the high-priority effects are given. It is preferable to preferentially secure the length of the period to be executed and to change the length of the period during which the low-priority effect can be executed.

With this configuration, even when different lengths of effect period are set, it is possible to easily execute a high-priority effect using the same effect period. Further, by making it possible to execute a high-priority effect using the same effect period, it is possible to easily execute a high-priority effect using the same effect mode, so that the player can easily understand the effect. Can be provided.

Further, in the thirtieth embodiment and the thirty-first embodiment described above, the variable time of the second special symbol lottery executed after the normal state is set (the second special figure 2 hold acquired at the end of the time reduction). 2 As the variable time of the special symbol lottery), a fixed time (see FIG. 385 (b)) is set as in the 16th embodiment described above, but the time is not limited to this, and for example, different lengths are set. It may be configured so that the fluctuation time of the sword is selected.

In this case, the variation time of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the special figure 2 hold by changing the length of the specific period (for example, the waiting period) among the variation effects executed in the special figure 2 final variation. It may be configured to set the effect period including, for example, the fluctuation time of the final fluctuation of the special figure 2 is 30 seconds, and the total fluctuation time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol corresponding to the acquired special figure 2 hold. When it becomes 10 seconds, the effect period of the variation effect executed based on the start of the final variation in Special Figure 2 is set to 40 seconds, the standby effect period of 13 seconds, the final variation effect period of 20 seconds, and 7. It may be configured so that the result notification effect period is set to seconds.

With this configuration, the effect period of the variation effect executed based on the start of the final variation of the special figure 2 can be set to the period including the variation time of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the reservation of the special figure 2. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the time saving state is set for a long time. Further, since the length of the period (final variation effect period, result notification effect period) other than the specific period (standby effect period) can be fixed, the effect using the same effect data is used for different effect periods. Can be facilitated.

Further, among the variation effects executed based on the start of the final variation of the special figure 2, the length of the effect period of the effect (standby effect) executed first is changed to correspond to the hold of the special figure 2. 2 When the variation time of the special symbol lottery is different, the timing at which the effect to be executed later (final variation effect, result notification effect) is executed is the timing at which the time saving state ends and the normal state is entered. Can be.

With such a configuration, for example, when the time saving state is terminated before the result notification effect is executed, that is, when the result notification effect is executed after the transition to the normal state, the result is obtained. Since it is possible to make it difficult to acquire a new special figure 2 hold during the notification effect, the effect control that changes the effect mode of the result notification effect in the middle, that is, after the result notification effect is started in the effect mode indicating the deviation. , When a new special figure 2 hold is acquired and the pre-reading result of the newly acquired special figure 2 hold is a winning result, the effect mode of the result notification effect is changed to the effect mode indicating the winning. Control can be difficult to perform. Therefore, the processing load of the staging control can be reduced.

In the above-mentioned example, the case where the execution timing (start timing) of the result notification effect is in the normal state has been described, but the execution timing (start timing) of the final variation effect is not limited to this, and is in the normal state. The fluctuation time of the final fluctuation of the special figure 2 and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the reservation of the special figure 2 may be selectively configured so as to be possible after the transition to. In addition, instead of changing the length of the fluctuation time, the length of the production period can be changed by making the fixed time of each special figure change (the period during which the special symbol for showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed) different. It may be configured to be different.

In addition, the total period of the fluctuation time of the final fluctuation of the special figure 2 and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the reservation of the special figure 2, that is, the effect of the fluctuation effect executed at the start of the final fluctuation of the special figure 2. A period determination means for determining whether or not the length of the period is longer than the specific period (for example, 50 seconds) is provided, and when the period determination means determines that the period is longer than the specific period, a special effect is executed. It may be configured to set a possible special period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the various periods (standby effect period, final variable effect period, result notification effect period) set in the effect period from becoming unnecessarily long and the effect from being reduced. Can be done. Further, in this case, as the fluctuation time of the final fluctuation of the special figure 2 or the fluctuation time of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the reservation of the special figure 2, the case where the winning is won is higher than the case where the winning is not won. , It is good to configure so that a long fluctuation time is set. As a result, in the case of winning (winning), it is possible to make it easier to execute the specific effect by setting a longer effect period, so the expectation of winning when the specific effect is executed. You can increase the degree. Further, in this case, it is preferable to configure the special period to be set only when there are a plurality of winnings in the special figure 2 final change and the special figure 2 hold. With this configuration, the added value for special effects can be further increased.

In each of the above embodiments, every time the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main control device 110 (that is, when it increases or decreases), the reserved ball number command is used. Has been described for transmission from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the hold number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only when the value (N) of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d increases in the main control device 110. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to reduce the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 sends the hold number command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced, respectively. The control load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above embodiments, the winning of the first ball opening 64 and the passage of the through gate 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls in the variable display based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 is set by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is divided into four areas by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member notifies the number of reserved balls. It may be configured as.

Further, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbol as the identification information is scrolled vertically on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The design may be moved and displayed along a predetermined route such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol, or a wide variety of motion display or change display is performed separately from the symbol. It also includes the staging display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the third symbol display for showing the player the lottery result of each symbol is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for the display means for displaying the main symbol to be emphasized and displayed to the player and the display means for displaying the subordinate symbols. Further, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is executed in the game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player, and the left side area of the game board 13 is executed in the normal game state. It is configured so that the left-handed game aiming at is executed, but the target area of the game board 13 may be different depending on the game state, and the left-handed game is executed during the time saving state, and during the normal state. May perform a right-handed game. Further, the game may be configured to be playable in different game states while aiming at the same area.

In each of the above-described embodiments, as the operation means that can be operated by the player, the frame buttons 22 and 23 that determine that the operation means has been operated by the player's pressing operation are used, but other than that. The configuration may be used, and an operating means configured in a lever shape capable of determining that the player has been operated by tilting it to the left or right or back and forth, or that the player has been operated by contact or proximity. A touch sensor type operating means capable of discriminating, a wireless operating means capable of discriminating that the operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. Further, each of the movable valve 750, the storage device (first storage device 770, the second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c. A part or all of the operation control may be executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side instead of the main control device 110.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the voice lamp control device 113 performs a process for setting a display mode in the effect executed by using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the game (lottery) itself is a voice lamp. It is configured to be executed by the main control device 110 different from the control device 113, but is not limited to this, and the process for executing the game (lottery) and the result of the game (lottery) are displayed as an effect. The processing for this may be configured to be executed by the same control device. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a plurality of different processes with one control device.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple hits (for example, two or three times) including it occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which a combination of probabilities (commonly known as a setting) related to a big hit lottery is provided in a plurality of stages and the setting can be changed on the game store side. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In addition, as a pachinko machine provided with a setting of a plurality of stages, a combination of jackpot probabilities (combination of a jackpot probability in a low probability state and a jackpot probability in a probabilistic state) may be one of a plurality of stages (for example, 6 stages). A typical example is one that can be set to, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probabilities, for example, the ratio of each jackpot symbol (each jackpot type) determined when a jackpot is hit is implemented as a pachinko machine that can be changed according to the setting. You may. That is, the ratio of determining the type of jackpot that is advantageous to the player may be changed according to the setting, or the ratio of determining the type of jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player may be changed. More specifically, for example, the ratio at which the jackpot with a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) is determined can be changed according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds) is determined. The ratio may be changed according to the setting to change the degree of advantage for each setting. Further, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot to which a large number of time reductions (for example, 100 times) is given after the end of the jackpot can be changed according to the setting, or the jackpot to which a small number of time reductions (for example, 0 times) is given can be changed. The ratio at which is determined may be changed according to the setting. Further, the rate at which the jackpot that shifts to (or is easy to shift to) an advantageous gaming state (for example, a probable change state) after the end of the jackpot is determined can be changed according to the setting, or the disadvantageous gaming state (for example, the normal state) can be determined. ) May be changed according to the setting. In addition, a configuration may be provided in which a jackpot type is provided, in which the ratio determined only in a specific setting is significantly high (almost never determined in other settings). Specifically, for example, the setting is configured to be configurable in 6 steps from 1 to 6, and the most advantageous setting is set 6. In setting 6, the jackpot of 6 rounds is determined at a rate of 2% in the case of a jackpot, while in other settings, the jackpot of 6 rounds is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. It may be configured. With this configuration, when the jackpot ends in 6 rounds, the possibility of the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so the player is made to pay attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot to play the game. be able to. Further, instead of or in addition to this, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 time reductions are given after the jackpot is completed may be configured to be higher than other settings. With this configuration, it is possible to focus on the number of times the time saving state ends and play the game. In addition to or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or an accessory inside the jackpot) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during the execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured to be provided so that the jackpot type can be easily determined by a specific setting (the ratio of determination is high). In addition, when the combination of jackpot probabilities is changed according to the setting, in the low probability state, the jackpot probability is increased as the setting is advantageous to the player, while in the probabilistic state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. It may be configured to increase the jackpot probability as much as possible. This configuration is a type in which it is easy to increase the number of balls held as the number of lottery of special symbols increases (the number of prize balls to be paid out tends to be larger than the number of game balls fired), especially in the probabilistic state. It is effective in gaming machines. More specifically, for example, by applying it to a gaming machine of a type in which the probability change state continues until the next big hit is won, and the probability change state is a small hit with a high probability, the advantage of the high setting is achieved. You can improve your sex. That is, if the probability of becoming a big hit in the probable change state is low, the number of lottery until the next big hit tends to increase, so that there are many chances to win a prize ball as a small hit. Therefore, in the probable change state, it becomes easier to win more prize balls until the next big hit, which is advantageous for the player.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, a first special symbol and a second special symbol, are used as a plurality of special symbol types, but the types of special symbols are not limited to this, and three or more. The special symbol type may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a game property in which a lottery (variation) is performed according to a predetermined rule for a plurality of special symbols and a game property in which a lottery (variation) is individually performed independently are described. However, the playability described in each embodiment may be interchanged or combined.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Each of the above-described embodiments and control examples may be configured by combining all or a part thereof.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Characteristic A group> (Development control in meter control)
Based on the operation means that can be operated by the player, the validity period setting means that can set the validity period in which the operation of the operation means is effective, and the operation means that is operated within the validity period. The final effect of the effect that can be executed based on the operation of the operation means within the valid period in the gaming machine having the effect execution means capable of executing the effect. It is executed based on the information determination means capable of determining the information corresponding to the embodiment and the timing at which the operation means is operated within the valid period based on the information determined by the information determination means. The gaming machine A1 is characterized by having a setting means capable of setting setting information for determining an effect mode capable of the above.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. As an effect for notifying the lottery result, it is proposed that a notice effect that suggests the lottery result is executed in advance before the lottery result is notified by operating an operation means that can be operated by the player. (For example, Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). However, there was a demand for further improvement in the interest of games. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine A1, information corresponding to the final effect mode to be executed by operating the operating means within the valid period is determined, and at the timing when the operating means is operated based on the determined information. Since the staging mode that can be executed is determined based on the above, it is possible to make the staging mode to be executed up to the final staging mode different depending on the operation timing of the player. It is possible to perform a plurality of various effects by combining the frequency and timing at which the player operates the operating means, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

The gaming machine A1 has an updating means capable of adding or subtracting numerical information based on the operation of the operating means, and the effect executing means updates the numerical information to the updating means. Based on this, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the updated numerical information, and the information determining means determines the maximum value or the minimum value of the numerical information as the information. The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the setting means sets a value that can be updated by the updating means as the setting information in accordance with the timing at which the operating means is operated.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, a value that can be updated at the timing when the operating means is operated corresponds to the maximum value or the minimum value predetermined by the information determining means as setting information. Since it is set, it is possible to effectively use the validity period to update the numerical information to the maximum value or the minimum value, it is possible to execute the production that effectively uses the validity period, and the interest of the production using the operation means. Has the effect of improving.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the setting means can set a mathematical formula for the updating means to update the numerical information based on the time information corresponding to the timing when the operating means is operated. A game machine A3 characterized by being a machine.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1 or A2, there is an effect that the updating means can easily determine the numerical information for updating by setting the mathematical formula by the setting means. ..

<Characteristic B group> (Continuous hit detection control in repeated button hits)
It is executed by the effect executing means in a gaming machine having an operation means that can be operated by the player and an effect executing means that can execute the effect based on the operation of the operation means. When the effect is executed by the effect mode selection means capable of selecting the effect mode and the effect execution means, the effect is executed based on the operation of the operation means for a predetermined period. , A gaming machine B1 characterized by having a regulatory means that can be regulated.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. As an effect for notifying the lottery result, it is proposed that a notice effect that suggests the lottery result is executed in advance before the lottery result is notified by operating an operation means that can be operated by the player. (For example, Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). However, there was a demand for further improvement in the interest of games. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine B1, when the effect is executed, it is restricted that the effect is executed for a predetermined period, so that the operating means is operated while the effect is being executed. It has the effect of suppressing the problem that a new production is started and the interest of the production is lowered, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine B1 is characterized by having a period setting means capable of setting period information corresponding to the effect to be executed as the predetermined period when the effect is executed by the effect execution means. Game machine B2.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1, the period information corresponding to the effect to be executed is set as a predetermined period, so that the execution of the effect is restricted in the period corresponding to the effect to be executed. As a result, there is an effect that the execution interval of the production becomes long, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the interest of the game is lowered.

The gaming machine B1 or B2 has a notification means capable of notifying the notification mode each time the operation means is operated, and a lottery means capable of executing a predetermined lottery when the operation means is operated. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the effect executing means is configured to be able to execute the effect when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1 or B2, the notification mode is notified each time the operating means is operated, and a predetermined lottery is executed each time the operating means is operated, so that a specific lottery is executed. Since the effect is configured to be executed when the lottery result is, the player identifies that the operating means has been operated even when the lottery result is not a specific lottery result. It has the effect of being able to be recognized and suppressing problems that reduce the enjoyment of the game.

<Characteristic C group> (It makes it difficult for the unfavorable jackpot game to be executed during a part of the advantageous game state)
The first privilege game in which the first game state is set after the end of the privilege game and the privilege game based on the discrimination means capable of performing the discrimination and the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means being the specific discrimination result. In a gaming machine having a second privilege game in which a second game state is set, which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state after the end, and a privilege game execution means capable of executing the second privilege game, the second game When a predetermined condition is satisfied while the state is set, the gaming machine has a setting means capable of setting the first setting, and the first setting is set by the gaming machine. It is configured so that the first privilege game based on the specific determination result is more difficult to be executed than the case where the determination means is not set. Characteristic gaming machine C1.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine capable of setting an advantageous gaming state (probability changing state) that is advantageous to the player or a disadvantageous gaming state (normal state) that is disadvantageous to the player after the end of the privileged game according to the lottery result. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine wins when a privilege game (disadvantageous privilege game) in which a disadvantageous game state is set is executed after the end of the privilege game by a lottery executed in a state where an advantageous game state is set. If this is done, there is a problem that the disadvantageous privilege game is surely executed and the player's motivation to play is reduced. In particular, if the advantageous gaming state is set for a short period of time and the player wins when the disadvantageous privilege game is executed, the advantageous gaming state ends with almost no benefit from the advantageous gaming state. , There was a problem that the player's willingness to play was further reduced. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play and to provide a gaming machine having an improved interest in the game.

Further, conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a game property (so-called simultaneous fluctuation type) in which a plurality of lottery is executed at the same time. In a gaming machine having such playability, if the lottery result of one lottery is a win, a privileged game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and another lottery game being executed is forced out of the game. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-319221) has been proposed. By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine forcibly stops and displays other lottery due to the stop display of the lottery result in which the privilege game is executed regardless of the type of the privilege game. There was a problem of giving discomfort to the person. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having further improved the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine C1, by setting the first setting, it is possible to make it difficult to execute the first privilege game. Therefore, the first privilege game is given to the player who plays the game during the second game state. Can be enthusiastically played without fear of being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play and improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine C1 is characterized in that the gaming machine C1 has a notification means capable of executing a notification effect for notifying that the first setting is set.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1, the setting status of the first setting can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner by the notification effect executed by the notification means. There is an effect that the discrimination of the discrimination means in the second gaming state can be enthusiastically executed.

The gaming machine C2 has a notification condition determining means capable of determining whether or not the notification condition is satisfied when the first setting is set by the setting means, and the notification means is provided by the notification condition determining means. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the notification effect can be executed when it is determined that the notification condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C2, the notification effect is executed when it is determined that the notification condition is satisfied, so that it is possible to execute an appropriate notification effect for the player. effective.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the award game executing means has a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the result of the determination by the discrimination means on the display means. When the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that it is the specific determination result, the privilege game is executed, and the gaming machine is used. It has a stop control means capable of stopping and displaying the dynamic display executed at the timing when the first setting is completed with the identification information indicating a discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result. A gaming machine C4 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the pre-identification information indicating the discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result in the dynamic display executed at the timing when the first setting is completed. Since it can be stopped and displayed with, there is an effect that it is difficult to execute the first privilege game.

In the gaming machine C4, the dynamic display period of the identification information executed by the dynamic display means includes a first dynamic display period, a second dynamic display period shorter than the first dynamic display period, and a second dynamic display period. It has a dynamic display period setting means capable of setting one dynamic display period from a plurality of dynamic display periods including, and the discriminating means has, as the specific discriminating result, a first discriminating result and the first discriminating result. It is possible to discriminate at least a second discriminating result different from the result, and the privileged game executing means performs the first privileged game based on the result of the discriminating by the discriminating means being the first discriminating result. The second privilege game can be executed based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means being the second discrimination result, and the dynamic display period setting means shows the first discrimination result. As the dynamic display period of the identification information for this purpose, the first dynamic display period is easier to set than the dynamic display period of the identification information for showing the second discrimination result. A gaming machine C5 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C4, the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the discrimination result that the first privilege game is executed determines the discrimination result that the second privilege game is executed. Since it is possible to easily set a dynamic display period of a longer time than the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating, it is possible to make it more difficult to execute the first privilege game than the second privilege game by the stop control means. There is an effect.

<Characteristic D group> (Right-handed detection version: Even if the lottery results are the same, the production mode differs depending on the type of winning opening)
A first control means capable of executing main control related to the game, a second control means capable of executing control of the game based on the information output from the first control means, and a second control means capable of entering the game ball. It has one ball entry means and a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and the first control means has a game ball in the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means. Discrimination means capable of performing discrimination based on the entry of a ball, game information determination means capable of determining game information based on the result of the discrimination, and game information determined by the game information determination means. A game having a control signal output means capable of outputting a control signal for showing, and the second control means having an effect executing means capable of executing an effect for showing the determination result based on the control signal. In the machine, whether the first control means is the control signal based on entering the first ball entry means or the control signal based on entering the second ball entry means. The identification information that can be identified can be output to the second control means, and the effect executing means can execute a specific effect that is advantageous to the player during the period in which the effect is being executed based on the identification information. The gaming machine D1 characterized in that it is configured in.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. In addition, by executing an effect for showing the lottery result, there is a case where the game can be performed while expecting that the lottery result is a hit. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). Further, a plurality of starting ports are provided as a lottery opportunity for executing one lottery, and the lottery can be executed by various games, thereby improving the playability. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, no matter which starting port the gaming ball is awarded, the same production is executed, so that the production becomes monotonous and the player's motivation to play is reduced. there were. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play and to provide a gaming machine having an improved interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine D1, it is possible to identify whether the control signal is based on the entry of the game ball into the first entry means or the control signal based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. Since it is possible to execute an effect based on information, there is an effect that the variation of the effect can be increased and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine D1, the effect information executing means can make the execution frequency of the specific effect different based on the identification information.

According to the gaming machine D2, since the execution frequency of the specific effect can be different between the case of entering the first ball entry means and the case of entering the second ball entry means, the specific effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make any of the ball-entry means perform a game in which the game ball is inserted, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the main control means has a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result, and the effect executing means is said. The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that the specific effect can be executed when the determination result based on the control signal is the specific determination result.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1 or D2, when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result in which the privilege game is executed, the specific effect can be executed, so that the player can execute the specific effect. On the other hand, there is an effect that the game can be performed while expecting that the specific effect is executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine D3, when the effect executing means receives the control signal based on the ball entering the first ball entry means, the specific effect is performed only when the determination result is the specific determination result. When the control signal based on the ball entering the second ball entry means is received, the specific effect is performed when the discrimination result is different from the specific discrimination result. A gaming machine D4 characterized by being feasible.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D3, the conditions under which the specific effect is executed differ depending on whether the ball enters the first ball-entry means or the second ball-entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can predict the discrimination result of the discrimination means based on the type of the ball entry means into which the game ball is inserted.

<Characteristic E group> (SG time reduction final fluctuation control)
It is possible to store an entry means capable of entering a game ball, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry means, and information acquired by the acquisition means. A possible storage means, a discrimination means capable of discriminating based on the information stored in the storage means, and identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means are dynamically displayed on the display means. And a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is displayed in a mode for showing the specific determination result on the display means. In the gaming machine having A variable means that can be varied into a first state that makes it easier for the game ball to enter and a second state that makes it more difficult to enter the ball than the first state, a first game state, and the first state. The second game state is set by the game state setting means that can set the second game state that makes it easier for the variable means to change from the second state to the first state than the game state, and the game state setting means. If so, the effect is executed in response to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, which is started before the end condition set by the game state setting means is satisfied for the first game state. The effect executing means has, and the effect executing means has the identification information corresponding to a predetermined number of the information among the information stored in the storage means when the effect is executed. The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that the effect can be executed over a period until the dynamic display ends.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Further, there is a case in which a plurality of privilege games having different degrees of advantage are configured to be executable, a plurality of game states can be set, and the selection ratio of the privilege games is different depending on the set game states. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-13075). Further, in such a gaming machine, when a specific gaming state (for example, a time saving state) is set, it becomes easier to enter the ball than when another gaming state (for example, a normal state) is set. When a specific start port (for example, a start port with an electric accessory) is provided and a lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the specific start port is executed, and the game ball enters another start port. It is configured so that a privileged game with a higher degree of advantage (for example, a small hit) can be easily executed, and the right of a lottery to be executed based on the game ball entering a specific starting port is predetermined. There is one that can be stored on hold up to the maximum number. In the gaming machine configured in this way, when a specific gaming state is set, the player can efficiently execute a lottery executed based on the entry of the gaming ball into the specific starting port. Therefore, it was possible to enthusiastically play a game with the aim of setting a specific game state.

However, when the end condition of the specific game state is satisfied, it becomes difficult to perform the lottery executed based on the game ball entering the specific start port. Therefore, as the end of the specific game state approaches, the player There was a problem that the motivation to play was reduced. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by showing the player a long period in which a specific game state is set.

According to the gaming machine E1, the effect is executed across the dynamic display corresponding to the information stored in the storage means executed after the end condition is satisfied, so that even after the transition to the first gaming state, the first is performed. 2 It is possible to make the player think that the game state is continuously set, and by making the player think that the period of the second game state is set for a long time, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. effective.

In the gaming machine E1, the predetermined number is the number of all the information stored in the storage means. The gaming machine E2.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E1, the dynamic display of more identification information can be made to appear as if it is the dynamic display of 1, and the second gaming state is set. You can make them feel longer.

In the game machine E1 or E2, the pre-discrimination means capable of preliminarily discriminating the information stored in the storage means before the discrimination by the discriminating means based on the information is executed, and the staging execution means. The effect mode setting means is provided with an effect mode setting means capable of setting the effect mode of the effect executed by the above-mentioned effect, and the effect mode setting means is the above-mentioned thing with respect to the information stored in the storage means when the effect is executed. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that it is possible to set an effect mode based on the result of the pre-determination.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E1 or E2, the effect mode of the effect executed during the second gaming state is preliminarily determined for the information to be determined after the transition to the first gaming state. Since the setting can be made based on the result, it is possible to make the player think that the result of the determination executed during the second gaming state is the specific determination result with a higher probability than the set value. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically perform the game during the second game.

In the gaming machine E3, the effect executing means can at least execute the first effect and the second effect executed after the end of the first effect as the effect, and the effect mode setting means causes the effect to be executed. The gaming machine E4 is characterized by having a selection means capable of selecting the number of the information used for setting the effect mode of the first effect.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E3, the result of discrimination of the discriminating means becomes the specific discriminant result by making the number of information used for setting the staging mode of the first effect different. Can be set depending on whether the player is notified by the first effect or not. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while expecting that the privileged game is executed until the effect executed by the effect executing means is completed.

The gaming machine E4 has an operation means that can be operated by the player and an operation validity period setting means that can set an operation validity period for which the operation for the operation means is effectively determined. As the effect, it is possible to execute an operation effect in which the operation valid period is set before the first effect is executed, and the selection means is an operation content to the operation means during the operation effect. The gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the number of the information used for setting the effect mode of the first effect can be selected based on the above.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E4, the number of information used when setting the production mode of the first effect can be selected based on the operation of the operating means by the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily set the desired production mode of the player.

In the gaming machine E4 or E5, the effect mode setting means can set the effect mode of the second effect based on the result of the prior determination for the information not selected by the selection means. The gaming machine E6.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine E4 or E5, the effect mode of the second effect is set based on the preliminary determination result for the information that was not used when setting the effect mode of the first effect. Therefore, even if the effect mode of the first effect is an effect mode indicating a deviation, it is expected that the number of information used when setting the effect mode of the first effect is small, and the second effect is used. It can be noticed. Therefore, it can be expected that the privilege game will be executed until the effect executed by the effect executing means is completed.

In any of the gaming machines E4 to E6, those having a notification means capable of notifying the number of the information that was not used for setting the effect mode of the first effect by the time the second effect is started. The gaming machine E7, which is characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines E3 to E6, the number of information not used for setting the effect mode of the first effect is notified by the time the second effect is started. Therefore, there is an effect that the rest of the production can be properly enjoyed based on the number of notified information.

<Characteristic F group> (Right-handed detection version: Even if the lottery results are the same, the production mode will be different depending on the game situation)
A first control means capable of executing main control related to the game, a second control means capable of executing control of the game based on the information output from the first control means, and a first control means capable of flowing down the game ball. A game in which the flow path, the second flow path configured so that the game ball flowing down the first flow path is difficult to flow down, and the game ball flowing down the first flow path flow down the second flow path. A first ball entry means configured to be easier to enter than a ball, and a second entry means to allow a game ball flowing down the second flow path to enter the ball more easily than a game ball flowing down the second flow path. It has a ball means and a detection means capable of detecting a game ball flowing down the second flow path, and the first control means enters the game ball into the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means. A discrimination means capable of performing discrimination based on a sphere, an information determination means capable of determining information based on the result of the discrimination, and a control signal for indicating information determined by the information determination means. The second control means has an effect executing means capable of executing an effect for notifying the determination result indicated by the control signal, and has the effect executing means. Is configured to be capable of executing a specific effect that is advantageous to the player based on the detection result by the detection means during the period in which the effect is executed. F1.

<G group> (Transformation 1 of SG time reduction final fluctuation control (unused look-ahead number notification))
A predetermined number of the entry means capable of entering the game ball, the acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry means, and the information acquired by the acquisition means. The storage means that can be stored in the upper limit, the discrimination means that can be discriminated based on the information stored in the storage means, and the identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discriminating means are dynamically displayed in the display means. A privilege that can execute a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the dynamic display means that can be displayed and the identification information are displayed on the display means in a manner for showing the specific determination result. In a game machine having a game execution means, a privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege to a player by passing a game ball through a specific area during a period in which the privilege game is executed, and the above-mentioned input. A variable means that can be varied into a first state that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the ball means, a second state that makes it more difficult to enter the ball than the first state, and a first gaming state. A game state setting means capable of setting a second game state in which the variable means is more likely to be changed from the second state to the first state than the first game state, and a second game state by the game state setting means. Is set, the first game state is set by the game state setting means. The execution is started before the end condition is satisfied. The effect is corresponding to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information. The effect execution means that can be executed, the effect mode setting means that can set the effect mode of the effect executed by the effect execution means, and the information stored in the storage means are based on the information. It has a pre-discrimination means capable of pre-discrimination before the discriminating by the discriminating means is executed, and the effect mode setting means has the pre-discrimination for the information stored in the storage means. It is possible to set an effect mode based on at least a part of the result, and the gaming machine can provide a suggestion effect that can suggest the number of the information that is not used for setting the effect mode by the effect mode setting means. A game machine G1 characterized by being feasible.

According to the game machine G1, the suggestion effect can suggest the number of information that is not used for setting the effect mode of the effect executed by the effect execution means, so that even after the end of the effect, the privilege game Can be expected to be executed, and has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

<Group H> (Transformation 2 of SG time reduction final fluctuation control (suggestion of holding position))
A predetermined number of the entry means capable of entering the game ball, the acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry means, and the information acquired by the acquisition means. The storage means that can be stored in the upper limit, the discrimination means that can be discriminated based on the information stored in the storage means, and the identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discriminating means are dynamically displayed in the display means. A privilege that can execute a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the dynamic display means that can be displayed and the identification information are displayed on the display means in a manner for showing the specific determination result. In a game machine having a game execution means, a privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege to a player by passing a game ball through a specific area during a period in which the privilege game is executed, and the above-mentioned input. A variable means that can be varied into a first state that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the ball means, a second state that makes it more difficult to enter the ball than the first state, and a first gaming state. A game state setting means capable of setting a second game state in which the variable means is more likely to be changed from the second state to the first state than the first game state, and a second game state by the game state setting means. Is set, the first game state is set by the game state setting means. The execution is started before the end condition is satisfied. The effect is corresponding to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information. The effect execution means that can be executed, the effect mode setting means that can set the effect mode of the effect executed by the effect execution means, and the information stored in the storage means are based on the information. It has a pre-discrimination means capable of pre-discrimination before the discriminating by the discriminating means is executed, and the effect mode setting means has the pre-discrimination for the information stored in the storage means. The gaming machine H1 is characterized in that it is possible to set an effect mode in which the information whose result is the specific determination result can be identified.

According to the gaming machine H1, it is possible to predict the information that will be the specific determination result among the information stored in the storage means, based on the effect mode of the effect. As a result, by grasping whether other information stored in the storage means is determined before the privilege game is executed or after the privilege game is completed, the information is executed after the privilege game is completed. There is an effect that the content of the game can be predicted in advance and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic I group> (SG2)
It is possible to store an entry means capable of entering a game ball, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry means, and information acquired by the acquisition means. A possible storage means, a discrimination means capable of discriminating based on the information stored in the storage means, and identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means are dynamically displayed on the display means. And a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is displayed in a mode for indicating the specific determination result on the display means. In a gaming machine having It has an effect executing means capable of executing an effect based on a result, and a selection means capable of selecting information corresponding to an effect to be executed by the effect executing means among the information stored in the storage means. A game machine I1 characterized by being a thing.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been configured to display the result of a lottery result in a variable combination of symbols and then stop and display the combination corresponding to the lottery result. A configuration has been proposed in which the lottery result can be discriminated in advance before the variation display is started and the pre-discrimination result can be notified (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-13075). In such a gaming machine, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a game having an improved interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine I1, since the player can select the information used in the production, there is an effect that the range in which the player can intervene in the game is widened and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic J group> (SG3)
It is possible to store an entry means capable of entering a game ball, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry means, and information acquired by the acquisition means. A possible storage means, a discrimination means capable of discriminating based on the information stored in the storage means, and identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means are dynamically displayed on the display means. And a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is displayed in a mode for indicating the specific determination result on the display means. In a gaming machine having Other than the effect execution means capable of executing the effect based on the result and the information stored in the storage means, which is determined by the prior determination means corresponding to the effect executed by the effect execution means. The gaming machine J1 is characterized by having a suggestion means capable of suggesting suggestion information for showing the number information of the above.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been configured to display the result of a lottery result in a variable combination of symbols and then stop and display the combination corresponding to the lottery result. A configuration has been proposed in which the lottery result can be discriminated in advance before the variation display is started and the pre-discrimination result can be notified (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-13075). In such a gaming machine, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a game having an improved interest in the game.

According to the game machine J1, after the effect is executed, the number of information for which the effect based on the prior determination is not executed is notified. Therefore, even after the effect is executed, the information for which the effect is not executed is displayed. On the other hand, it has the effect of being able to have expectations and improving the interest of the game.

<Characteristic K group> (SG4)
It is possible to store an entry means capable of entering a game ball, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry means, and information acquired by the acquisition means. A possible storage means, a discrimination means capable of discriminating based on the information stored in the storage means, and identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means are dynamically displayed on the display means. And a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is displayed in a mode for indicating the specific determination result on the display means. In a gaming machine having It has an effect executing means capable of executing an effect based on a result, and the effect executing means can execute an effect based on a determination result by the prior determination means based on a plurality of information stored in the storage means. The gaming machine K1 characterized in that it is configured in.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been configured to display the result of a lottery result in a variable combination of symbols and then stop and display the combination corresponding to the lottery result. A configuration has been proposed in which the lottery result can be discriminated in advance before the variation display is started and the pre-discrimination result can be notified (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-13075). In such a gaming machine, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a game having an improved interest in the game.

According to the game machine K1, since the effect is executed based on the determination result of the pre-determination means based on a plurality of information, the effect can be diversified and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic L group> (SG5)
It is possible to store an entry means capable of entering a game ball, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry means, and information acquired by the acquisition means. A possible storage means, a discrimination means capable of discriminating based on the information stored in the storage means, and identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means are dynamically displayed on the display means. And a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is displayed in a mode for showing the specific determination result on the display means. In a gaming machine having It has an effect executing means capable of executing an effect based on the result, and the effect is variable based on the information corresponding to the order in which the information determined by the prior determination means is stored. A game machine L1 characterized by being present.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been configured to display the result of a lottery result in a variable combination of symbols and then stop and display the combination corresponding to the lottery result. A configuration has been proposed in which the lottery result can be discriminated in advance before the variation display is started and the pre-discrimination result can be notified (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-13075). In such a gaming machine, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a game having an improved interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine L1, since the production is changed according to the order in which the information is stored, the production can be diversified, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic A group> (Small hits are possible during specific special map fluctuations)
The first determination means capable of executing the first determination, the first display means for displaying the determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means. The dynamic display period setting means for dynamically displaying the first identification information, the dynamic display period setting means for setting the dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the first identification information, and the second determination can be executed. The second determination means, the second display means for displaying the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means, and the first for showing a specific first determination result to the first display means. 1 When the identification information is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for showing a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second privilege game is displayed. In a gaming machine having the privileged game executing means for executing the above, the first gaming state that makes it easier to execute the second determination than the first determination, and the first determination rather than the second determination are executed. The game state setting means has a game state setting means capable of setting a second game state for facilitating, and the game state setting means dynamically displays the first identification information when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine A1 characterized in that the first gaming state can be set during the target display period.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (probability changing state) that is advantageous to the player during the period from the end of the privileged game to the winning of the next big hit according to the lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766 (Ab. 2012). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, which is advantageous to the player, is changed by the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set, that is, it is executed during the advantageous gaming state. If the next win is won immediately by the lottery, the period for which the advantageous gaming state is set is shortened, and if the lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state does not immediately win the next hit, the advantageous gaming state is set. Will be set for a longer period. As described above, there is a problem that the period in which the advantageous gaming state to be provided to the player is set differs depending on the result of the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. Further, if the gaming machine has a game property of giving a privilege to the player during the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem that the privilege given to the player is significantly different. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having further improved the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine A1, the first gaming state in which the second determination is easily executed can be set during the period in which the first determination is dynamically displayed, so that the length of the period in which the first gaming state is set is set. Can be set in advance. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine A1, the second determination means is configured to determine the specific second determination result with a higher probability than the probability that the first determination means determines the specific first determination result. A gaming machine A2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are played. That is, the second privilege game executed based on the determination result of the second determination by the second determination means is executed rather than the first privilege game executed based on the determination result of the first determination by the first determination means. Therefore, the first gaming state can be set to a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play the game in the hope that the first game state is set, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, a first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second entry means different from the first entry means, the first entry means, and the second entry means. A third ball entry means different from the means, a first state in which the game ball can be guided to the second ball entry means, and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the second ball entry means than the first state. The first determination means has a variable means that can be changed into two states, and the first determination means is based on the fact that a game ball enters the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means. The second determination means is configured to be able to execute the determination, and the second determination means is configured to be able to execute the second determination based on the game ball entering the third ball entry means. The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the variable means is controlled so as to be more easily variable to the first state than the first gaming state.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A1 or A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is possible to make it more difficult to execute the first determination in the first gaming state than in the second gaming state. Therefore, in the state where the first game state is set, it is possible to facilitate the game of inserting the ball into the third ball entry means, and it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. ..

In the gaming machine A3, after the first privilege game is executed, the probability of being determined as the specific first determination result by the first determination can be set to a higher probability than usual. Having setting means, the gaming state setting means is displayed with the first identification information for showing the specific first determination result when the high probability is set by the high probability setting means. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the first gaming state is set based on the start of the dynamic display of the first identification information.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the high probability is set by the high probability setting means, the dynamic display of the first identification information that is displayed by the first identification information for showing the specific first determination result by the first determination. Since the first gaming state is set based on the start, the process until the first gaming state is set can be set step by step. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it easier for the player to continuously play the game.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the second privilege game is characterized in that the privilege that can be given to the player is set to be smaller than that of the first privilege game. Machine A5.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are played. That is, in the second privilege game, the privilege that can be given to the player is set to be less than that in the first privilege game, so that the player is given an excessive privilege during the period in which the first game state is set. There is an effect that it can be suppressed from being given.

<Characteristic B group> (Game content and special 1 and special 2 are set at once)
The first determination means capable of executing the first determination, the first display means on which the first identification information for showing the determination result by the first determination means is displayed, and the first identification information on the first display means. The first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the above, the first dynamic display period determining means for determining the period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the second determination. A second determination means capable of performing the above, a second display means for displaying the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means, and the second identification information dynamically displayed on the second display means. The second dynamic display means to be displayed, the second dynamic display period determining means for determining the period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means, and the first display means are specified. When the first identification information for showing the first determination result of the above is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and the second identification information for showing the specific second determination result to the second display means. Is displayed, the first identification information for showing the specific first determination result is displayed in the gaming machine having the privilege game execution means for executing the second privilege game. A period determination means for determining a dynamic display period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and a dynamic display of the second identification information executed during the dynamic display period determined by the period determination means. The gaming machine B1 is characterized by having an effect determining means for determining an effect corresponding to the above, and an effect executing means for executing the effect determined by the effect determining means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (probability changing state) that is advantageous to the player during the period from the end of the privileged game to the winning of the next big hit according to the lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766 (Ab. 2012). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, which is advantageous to the player, is changed by the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set, that is, it is executed during the advantageous gaming state. If the next win is won immediately by the lottery, the period for which the advantageous gaming state is set is shortened, and if the lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state does not immediately win the next hit, the advantageous gaming state is set. Will be set for a longer period. As described above, there is a problem that the period in which the advantageous gaming state to be provided to the player is set differs depending on the result of the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. Further, if the gaming machine has a game property of giving a privilege to the player during the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem that the privilege given to the player is significantly different. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having further improved the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine B1, since the staging determination means determines the effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the second identification information executed during the dynamic display period determined by the period determination means, the first identification information Since it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the second identification information in association with the dynamic display period, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the future game based on the effect to be executed. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine B1, the effect determining means determines the effect based on the dynamic display period determined by the period determining means and the game content of the first privilege game. Characteristic gaming machine B2.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B1, by grasping the effect executed by the effect execution means, the dynamic display period of the first identification information being executed and the game of the first privilege game It is possible to predict the content and. Therefore, since the player can pay attention to the production, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2, a first gaming state in which the second determination is easier to be executed than in the first determination, and a second gaming state in which the first determination is easier to be executed than in the second determination. The gaming state setting means has a configurable gaming state setting means, and the gaming state setting means dynamically displays the first identification information to be displayed by the first identification information for showing the specific first determination result. The gaming machine B3, characterized in that the first gaming state is executed during the dynamic display period.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines B1 or B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the first game state is set during the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the determination result at which the first privilege game is executed, the period until the first privilege game is executed is set. It can be used to perform a game aiming at the second privilege game. Further, by grasping the effect executed by the effect execution means, it is possible to predict the period in which the first game state is set, so that the game can be enthusiastically performed during the first game state. effective.

In the gaming machine B2 or B3, as the first privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the normal first privilege game and the small first privilege game in which the privilege given to the player is less than the normal first privilege game. The first dynamic display period determining means can determine a first period and a second period longer than the first period. In the staging determination means, the small first privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, and the second period is determined by the period determination means, and the normal second period is determined by the privilege game execution means. 1 The gaming machine B4, characterized in that the privileged game is executed and the production of the same aspect is determined in the case where the first period is determined by the period determining means.

According to the gaming machine B4, when the combination of the effects of the gaming machine B2 or B3 and the advantages of the two elements for determining the effect content is different, the effect determining means has the same embodiment. Since the effect is determined, it is possible to make the player predict a plurality of patterns of the future game situation by grasping the content of the effect executed by the effect execution means. Then, the accuracy of the prediction can be gradually improved depending on the progress of the first gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the enjoyment of predicting the player can be further enhanced and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine B4, the effect determining means determines a specific effect when the normal first privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means and the second period is determined by the period determination means. A gaming machine B5 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, by executing the specific effect, it is possible to notify the player that the most advantageous game content has been set, so that there is an effect that the player can be given a sense of superiority.

<Characteristic C group> (rush notification)
The first determination means capable of executing the first determination, the first display means on which the first identification information for showing the determination result by the first determination means is displayed, and the first identification information on the first display means. The first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the above, the first dynamic display period determining means for determining the period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the second determination. The second identification information is dynamically displayed on the second determination means capable of executing the above, the second display means for displaying the determination result by the second determination means, and the second display means. The second dynamic display means to be displayed, the second dynamic display period determining means for determining the period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means, and the first display means are specified. When the first identification information for showing the first determination result of the above is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and the second identification information for showing the specific second determination result to the second display means. When is displayed, the first gaming state in which the second determination is more likely to be executed than the first determination in the gaming machine having the privileged game executing means for executing the second privilege game, and the first game state. When the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means capable of setting the second gaming state that makes it easier to execute the first determination than the second determination, and the gaming state setting means, the second game state is set. It has a notification timing determining means for determining the notification timing for notifying the player of the notification mode for indicating to the player that the first gaming state has been set based on the situation in the dynamic display of the identification information. The gaming machine C1 characterized by.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Furthermore, according to the lottery result, an advantageous game state (probability change state) that is advantageous to the player is set during the period from the end of the privilege game to the next big hit, and the player is notified that the game state has changed. A gaming machine that performs such an effect has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, since the above-mentioned gaming machine is configured to execute an effect of notifying the player based on the setting of the advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player, for example, the advantageous gaming state is set. Despite this, even if a new lottery cannot be executed, the problem is that the player is informed that the game state is set, which makes the player uncomfortable. was there. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having further improved the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine C1, the notification timing for notifying that the first gaming state in which the second determination is easily executed is set can be determined based on the dynamic display status of the second identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from being uncomfortable with the notification timing for notifying that the first game state has been set.

In the gaming machine C1, the second dynamic display means can dynamically display the second identification information while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means.

According to the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1. That is, when the first gaming state set based on the determination result of the first determination means executed separately from the second determination means is set, the second identification information is notified based on the situation in the dynamic display. The timing is decided. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game by combining the first identification information and the second identification information that can be dynamically displayed at the same time.

The gaming machine C2 has a dynamic display determining means for determining whether or not the second identification information is dynamically displayed at the time when the first gaming state is set, and the notification timing determining means is the moving. When it is determined by the target display determination means that the second identification information is not dynamically displayed, the notification timing is determined based on the time when the first gaming state is set. Amusement machine C3.

According to the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C2. That is, if the second determination can be executed immediately after the first gaming state is set, it is immediately notified that the first gaming state has been set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game in the first game state for a longer time.

In the gaming machine C2 or C3, when the notification timing determining means determines that the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display determining means, the dynamic display of the second identification information ends. The gaming machine C4, characterized in that the notification timing is determined based on the timing of the notification.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines C2 or C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, even if the first gaming state is set, during the period when the second determination cannot be executed, it is not notified that the first gaming state has been set, and the second determination can be executed. In this case, it is notified that the first gaming state has been set. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the second determination cannot be executed even though it is notified that the first game state has been set, and it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. It has the effect of being able to do it.

The gaming machine C4 has a remaining period determining means for determining the period from the timing at which the dynamic display of the second identification information ends to the ending of the first gaming state, and is based on the determination result by the remaining period determining means. The gaming machine C5 is characterized by having a notification determination means for determining whether or not to determine the notification timing by the notification timing determination means.

According to the gaming machine C5, it is determined whether or not to determine the notification timing based on the period during which the second determination can be executed in the first gaming state. Therefore, for example, the second determination is made in the first gaming state. When the executable period becomes extremely short, it is possible to prevent the player from being notified that the first gaming state has been set. Therefore, even though the player is notified that the first gaming state has been set, it is possible to prevent the first gaming state from ending in a short period of time and causing discomfort to the player. It has the effect of being able to do it.

<Characteristic D group> (Large hit discard, small hit interruption due to simultaneous fluctuation)
The first determination means capable of executing the first determination, the first display means for displaying the determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means. The first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the above, the second determination means capable of executing the second determination, and the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means are displayed. The second display means, the second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means for a predetermined period, and the first for displaying a specific first determination result on the first display means. When the identification information is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for showing a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second privilege game is performed. In a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means to be executed and a second privilege game type setting means for setting the content of the second privilege game from a plurality of privilege contents, the second dynamic display means is the first. 1 The second identification information can be dynamically displayed in a state where the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the specific second identification information can be dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means. When the second identification information indicating that it is a determination result is stopped and displayed, the dynamic display by the first dynamic display means is performed based on the privilege content set by the second privilege game type setting means. D1 is a gaming machine D1 having a stop control means for executing stop control.

Conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a game property (so-called simultaneous fluctuation type) in which a plurality of lottery is executed at the same time. In a gaming machine having such playability, if the lottery result of one lottery is a win, a privileged game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and another lottery game being executed is forced out of the game. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-319221) has been proposed. By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine forcibly stops and displays other lottery due to the stop display of the lottery result in which the privilege game is executed regardless of the type of the privilege game. There was a problem of giving discomfort to the person. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having further improved the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine D1, the stop control content for the first dynamic display can be set according to the content of the second privilege game to be executed, so that the situation of causing discomfort to the player is suppressed. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine D1, the stop control means is a forced stop control that stops and displays the dynamic display by the first dynamic display means with the first identification information indicating a determination result different from the specific first determination result. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that it is capable of temporarily stopping the measurement of the period dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means until a predetermined restart condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are played. That is, it is possible to set whether to forcibly stop or temporarily stop the dynamic display by the first dynamic display means according to the content of the second privilege game to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessive privilege, and the privilege game to which a small privilege is given is executed, so that the privilege game to which a large privilege is given is discarded. It has the effect of being able to suppress this.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the second privilege game type setting means can set the first privilege type and the second privilege type that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege type, and is said to be stopped. The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that the control means executes the forced stop control when the second special type is set by the second privilege game type setting means.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines D1 or D2, the following effects are played. That is, when the second privilege type that is advantageous to the player is set, the dynamic display can be forcibly stopped by the first dynamic display means, so that an excessive privilege is given to the player. It has the effect of being able to suppress this.

In the gaming machine D3, when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, the dynamic display executed by the first dynamic display means ends, and the specific first determination is performed. Until the first identification information for showing the result is displayed on the first display means, the second privilege game type setting means has an invalid means for invalidating the setting of the second privilege type. A gaming machine D4 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D3, the following effects are played. That is, when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result, the setting of the second privilege type is invalidated by the invalidation means during the dynamic display. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first privilege game and the second privilege game in which the second privilege type is set from being continuously executed, and the player is given an excessive privilege. It has the effect of being able to be suppressed.

In the gaming machine D3 or D4, the second privilege game type setting means sets the first privilege type and the second privilege type based on the determination result of the second determination means. The gaming machine D5, characterized in that the first privilege type is easier to set than the second privilege type.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D3 or D4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the first privilege type is easier to set than the second privilege type, even if a lot of the second privilege games are executed, it is possible to suppress the excessive privilege being given to the player. There is.

<Other Thoughts 1> (The latent state can be set before and after the jackpot game)
The first determination means capable of executing the first determination, the first display means for displaying the determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means. A dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the above, a second determination means capable of executing the second determination, and a second display means for displaying the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means. When the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result is displayed on the first display means, the first privilege game is executed, and the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. When the second identification information for indicating is displayed, the second determination is more likely to be executed in the gaming machine having the privilege game execution means for executing the second privilege game than the first determination. The game state setting means has a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state that makes it easier for the first determination to be executed than the second determination, and the game state setting means is a predetermined first. When the condition is satisfied, the first gaming state is set during the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and when the predetermined second condition is satisfied, the first privilege game is completed. The gaming machine E1 characterized in that the first gaming state is set later.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (probability changing state) that is advantageous to the player during the period from the end of the privileged game to the winning of the next big hit according to the lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766 (Ab. 2012). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, which is advantageous to the player, is changed by the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set, that is, it is executed during the advantageous gaming state. If the next win is won immediately by the lottery, the period for which the advantageous gaming state is set is shortened, and if the lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state does not immediately win the next hit, the advantageous gaming state is set. Will be set for a longer period. As described above, there is a problem that the period in which the advantageous gaming state to be provided to the player is set differs depending on the result of the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. Further, if the gaming machine has a game property of giving a privilege to the player during the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem that the privilege given to the player is significantly different. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having further improved the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine E1, the timing at which the first gaming state is set can be divided into before and after the first privileged gaming, so that it is possible to provide a player with a surprising game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic G group> (Small hit RUSH during the symbol confirmation period)
The first determination means capable of executing the first determination, the first display means for displaying the determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means. A first stop display means for displaying a stop display, a stop display period setting means for setting a stop display period for displaying the first identification information by the first stop display means, and a second determination capable of executing a second determination. The means, the second display means for displaying the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for showing the specific first determination result to the first display means. Is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second privilege game is executed. In a gaming machine having the privileged game executing means, the first gaming state that makes it easier to execute the second determination than the first determination, and the first determination that makes it easier to execute the first determination than the second determination. The game state setting means has a game state setting means capable of setting two game states, and the game state setting means is said to have a stop display period during which the first identification information is stopped and displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine G1 characterized in that the first gaming state can be set.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (probability changing state) that is advantageous to the player during the period from the end of the privileged game to the winning of the next big hit according to the lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766 (Ab. 2012). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, which is advantageous to the player, is changed by the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set, that is, it is executed during the advantageous gaming state. If the next win is won immediately by the lottery, the period for which the advantageous gaming state is set is shortened, and if the lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state does not immediately win the next hit, the advantageous gaming state is set. Was set for a long period of time. That is, there is a problem that the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set differs depending on the result of the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. Further, if the gaming machine has a game property of giving a privilege to the player during the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem that the privilege given to the player is significantly different. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having further improved the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine G1, since the stop display period can be set in advance as the period in which the first gaming state is set, there is an effect that the period in which the first gaming state is executed can be appropriately managed. .. Further, since the first game state is set during the period in which the identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination is stopped and displayed, the player is informed in advance of the game content after the first game state is completed. It can be grasped. With this configuration, for example, when the first gaming state is set in a state where a specific determination result is displayed as the determination result of the first determination, after the first gaming state is completed, It is possible to know in advance that the first privilege game will be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that the stop display period setting means sets stop display periods of different lengths based on the determination result of the first determination means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1, the stop display period is set based on the determination result of the first determination means, so that the first privilege game is based on the determination result of the first determination means. The presence or absence of execution and the length of the stop display period are determined. Therefore, the player can be more closely watched by the determination result of the first determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G2, when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, the stop display period setting means has a longer stop display than when the determination result is other than the specific first determination result. The gaming machine G3 characterized in that the period can be easily set.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2, when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result, the stop display period is longer than the case other than the specific first determination result. Is easy to set, so that the first gaming state in which a longer period is set can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G2 or G3, the stop display period setting means can set a stop display period having a different length when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result. The gaming machine G4 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2 or G3, the length of the stop display period can be made different even in the case of a specific first determination result. Therefore, even in the case of a specific first determination result, since the period in which the first gaming state is set is different, the player is enthusiastically played so that the longer first gaming state is set. It has the effect of being able to make it.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the second determination means determines the specific second determination result with a higher probability than the probability that the first determination means determines the specific first determination result. The gaming machine G5, which is characterized in that it is configured in.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the following effects are played. That is, the second privilege game executed based on the determination result of the second determination by the second determination means is executed rather than the first privilege game executed based on the determination result of the first determination by the first determination means. Therefore, the first gaming state can be set to a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play the game in the hope that the first game state is set, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic H group> (Small hit RUSH with big hit winning when the end of working hours fluctuates)
A first determination means capable of executing the first determination, a first display means displaying the first identification information for showing the determination result by the first determination means, and a second determination means capable of executing the second determination. And the second display means for displaying the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for showing the specific first determination result to the first display means. The privilege of executing the first privilege game when displayed, and executing the second privilege game when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. In a gaming machine having a game executing means, a first gaming state that makes it easier to execute the second determination than the first determination, and a second that makes it easier to execute the first determination than the second determination. It has a gaming state setting means capable of setting a gaming state, and the gaming state setting means can execute the second determination when both the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are satisfied. The gaming machine H1 characterized in that the first gaming state can be set during the first period.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (probability changing state) that is advantageous to the player during the period from the end of the privileged game to the winning of the next big hit according to the lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766 (Ab. 2012). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, whether or not an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set is set only by one lottery result. Therefore, the process until the advantageous gaming state is set is given to the player. There was a problem that it was not possible to play a game while entertaining. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having further improved the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine H1, when both the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are satisfied, the first gaming state can be set for the first period, so that the second determination is made during the first gaming state. Can be reliably executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the first gaming state is terminated without executing the second determination even though the first gaming state is set, which gives the player a feeling of dissatisfaction. Can provide no games.

The gaming machine H1 has a first determination number measuring means capable of measuring the number of times of the first determination executed by the first determination means, and the first determination measured by the first determination number measuring means. The gaming machine H2 is characterized in that the first predetermined condition is satisfied when the number of times reaches a predetermined number of times.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H1, when the number of times of the first determination reaches a predetermined number, the first predetermined condition is satisfied, so that the first determination by the first determination means is executed. As a result, the game content can be reliably advanced toward the establishment of the first predetermined condition. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the state in which the first predetermined condition is not satisfied when the game is played for a long time, and it is possible to suppress the player from being uncomfortable.

The gaming machine H3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine H1 or H2, when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, the second predetermined condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1 or H2, when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result, the second predetermined condition is satisfied, so that the player can understand. It has the effect of being able to provide easy games.

In the gaming machine H2 or H3, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state even when the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied, and the gaming state setting means When the first gaming state is set based on the satisfaction of the first predetermined condition, the first gaming state is set during the second period in which it is difficult to execute the second determination. The gaming machine H4 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H2 or H3, when only the first predetermined condition is satisfied, the first gaming state is set only in the second period in which the second determination is difficult to execute. As a result, the first gaming state set when only the first predetermined condition is satisfied can be set to a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game so that both the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are satisfied.

In the gaming machine H4, when the first gaming state is set based on the satisfaction of the second predetermined condition, the gaming state setting means is shorter than the first period and the first. The gaming machine H5, characterized in that the first gaming state is set during the third period, which is longer than the two periods.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H4, when only the second predetermined condition is satisfied, the first gaming state is set during the third period, so that the first predetermined condition is higher than the first predetermined condition. There is an effect that the game can be enthusiastically played in order to satisfy the second predetermined condition first.

<Characteristic I group> (The expected degree of small hit RUSH rush is variable by the number of time reductions)
A first determination means capable of executing the first determination, a first display means displaying the first identification information for showing the determination result by the first determination means, and a second determination means capable of executing the second determination. And the second display means for displaying the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for showing the specific first determination result to the first display means. The privilege of executing the first privilege game when displayed, and executing the second privilege game when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. It is possible to set a game execution means, a first game state in which the second determination is easier to execute than the first determination, and a second game state in which the first determination is easier to execute than the second determination. In a gaming machine having the above-mentioned gaming state setting means, the gaming state setting means can set a third gaming state in which the first gaming state is more likely to be set than the second gaming state for a predetermined period. There is a third gaming state period setting means capable of setting a first period and a second period longer than the first period as a period in which the third gaming state is set, and the third gaming state is provided. The gaming machine I1 is characterized in that when the first period is set by the period setting means, it is easier to set the first gaming state than when the second period is set.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine capable of setting an advantageous gaming state (latent state) that is advantageous to the player by performing a game in which a plurality of gaming states are gradually shifted according to the lottery result (for example,). Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-058267). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, since the ease of setting the advantageous gaming state in the gaming state (quasi-advantageous gaming state) in which the advantageous gaming state is easily set is single, the aim is to set the advantageous gaming state. There was a problem that the content of the game played was monotonous. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having further improved the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine I1, the expectation that the first gaming state is set in the state where the third gaming state is set by differently setting the period for setting the third gaming state in which the first gaming state is easily set. Can be different. Therefore, since the player can be interested in the setting contents of the third game state, the player can enthusiastically play the game even in the game process until the first game state is set. It has the effect of being able to do it.

The gaming machine I1 has a progress determining means for determining the passage of the predetermined period set by the third gaming state period setting means, and the gaming state setting means has elapsed of the predetermined period by the progress determining means. The gaming machine I2 is characterized in that the first gaming state is set based on the establishment of the first setting condition that is satisfied when the above is determined.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I1, the first gaming state is set when the period in which the third gaming state is set elapses, so that an easy-to-understand game can be provided. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, when the gaming state setting means is in a state where the third gaming state is set and the first determination result by the first determination means is the specific first determination result. The gaming machine I3 is characterized in that the first gaming state is set based on the establishment of the second setting condition that is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1 or I2, even when a third gaming state in which the first setting condition is difficult to be satisfied, that is, a long-term third gaming state is set. During the third gaming state, the first gaming state can be set based on the determination result of the first determining means. Therefore, it is possible to aim for different transition conditions in order to set the first gaming state according to the period of the third gaming state to be set, and therefore, the motivation to play depends on the length of the period of the third gaming state to be set. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

In the gaming machines I2 and I3, the third gaming state period setting means can set a third period longer than the second period, and the progress determination means determines the progress of the third period. In this case, the gaming machine I4 is characterized by having a condition limiting means that does not satisfy the first setting condition.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1 or I2, when the passage of the third period is determined, the first setting condition is not satisfied by the condition limiting means, so that the first gaming state is set. You can definitely limit what you do. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the provision of an excessively advantageous state to the player.

In any of the gaming machines I2 to I4, the first gaming state period setting means for setting the period in which the first gaming state is set is provided, and the first gaming state period setting means is provided by the progress determination means. A gaming machine characterized in that when it is determined that the first period has elapsed, the period in which the first gaming state is set is set longer than when it is determined that the second period has elapsed. I5.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines I2 to I4, it is determined that the second period has elapsed for a longer period than the determination that the second period has elapsed. The game state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can pay attention to the determination result of the progress determination means.

<Characteristic J group> (Surely small hit RUSH for a predetermined period)
A first determination means capable of executing the first determination, a first display means displaying the first identification information for showing the determination result by the first determination means, and a second determination capable of executing the second determination. The means, the second display means for displaying the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for showing the specific first determination result to the first display means. Is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second privilege game is executed. In a gaming machine having the privileged game executing means, the first gaming state that makes it easier to execute the second determination than the first determination, and the first determination that makes it easier to execute the first determination than the second determination. 2 The game state can be set by the game state setting means, the advantageous period setting means for setting the advantageous period in which the first game state can be continuously set by the game state setting means, and the advantageous period setting means. A first termination condition that is satisfied when the set advantageous period has elapsed, or an termination means that terminates the first gaming state when a second termination condition different from the first termination condition is satisfied. A gaming machine J1 having an end limiting means for limiting the establishment of the second end condition when a predetermined continuation condition is satisfied.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine capable of setting an advantageous gaming state (latent state) that is advantageous to the player by performing a game in which a plurality of gaming states are gradually shifted according to the lottery result (for example,). Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-058267). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set changes based on the lottery result executed during the advantageous gaming state, so that the advantageous gaming state is provided to the player for a predetermined period. There is a problem that the advantageous gaming state is terminated in a short period of time even though the advantageous gaming state is set with difficulty, and the motivation for playing is reduced. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having further improved the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine J1, when a predetermined continuation condition is satisfied, the establishment of the second termination condition can be restricted by the termination limiting means. Therefore, it is possible to continuously set the first gaming state during the advantageous period set by the advantageous period setting means, and there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In the gaming machine J1, the gaming state setting means can set an advantageous first gaming state in which the predetermined continuation condition can be satisfied and a disadvantageous first gaming state in which the predetermined continuation condition cannot be satisfied. A gaming machine J2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J1, the advantageous first gaming state and the disadvantageous first gaming state can be set by the gaming state setting means, which is more advantageous than the gaming state setting means. There is an effect that the game can be enthusiastically performed so that the first game state is set.

The gaming machine J1 or J2 is characterized in that the predetermined continuation condition is satisfied when the result of the first determination of the first determination means is the specific first determination result. J3.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1 or J2, when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result, a predetermined continuation condition is satisfied, so that the first determination means is satisfied. There is an effect that the player can be enthusiastically played the game so that the determination result of the above is the specific first determination result.

The gaming machine J4 is characterized in that the gaming machine J2 or J3 has a notifying means for notifying that the advantageous first gaming state is set.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J2 or J3, the notification means notifies that the advantageous first gaming state is set, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. There is an effect.

In any of the gaming machines J2 to J4, there is a discriminating means for determining that the condition for satisfying the second end condition is satisfied during the period in which the advantageous first gaming state is set, and the discriminating means of the said discriminating means. The gaming machine J5 is characterized by having a second notifying means for notifying that the condition for satisfying the second ending condition is satisfied based on the determination result.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines J2 to J4, the second notification means that the condition for satisfying the second end condition is satisfied during the period in which the advantageous first gaming state is set. Therefore, if it is assumed that the first gaming state set this time is not the advantageous first gaming state but the disadvantageous first gaming state, whether or not the first gaming state has ended is determined. It can be discriminated by the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can experience the superiority of the advantageous first gaming state set this time.

<Characteristic K group> (Provide a period during which the number of time reductions is not subtracted during the time reduction state)
The first determination means capable of executing the first determination, the first display means on which the first identification information for showing the determination result by the first determination means is displayed, and the first identification information on the first display means. The first determination is made when the first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the above first period and the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result are displayed on the first display means. A gaming state setting means capable of setting an advantageous gaming state for a predetermined period, a period measuring means for measuring the period of the advantageous gaming state set by the gaming state setting means, and the predetermined period measuring means. An ending means for terminating the advantageous gaming state when the period is measured, and a measurement limiting means for limiting the measurement of the period of the advantageous gaming state by the period measuring means when a predetermined limiting condition is satisfied. The gaming machine K1 characterized by having the above.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player during the period from the end of the privileged game to the winning of the next big hit according to the lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766 (Ab. 2012). By the way, since the above-mentioned gaming machine is configured to set the period until the number of lottery reaches a predetermined number as the period in which the advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is set, the advantageous gaming state is set. There was a problem that the period could be easily predicted. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having further improved the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine K1, since the measurement for a predetermined period in which the advantageous gaming state is set can be restricted by the measurement limiting means, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set can be extended. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player with an unexpected game, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine K1, the second determination means capable of executing the second determination, the second display means for displaying the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means, and the second display means thereof. When the second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for a predetermined second period and the first identification information for showing a specific first determination result are displayed on the first display means. , When the second identification information for executing the first privilege game and indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the privilege game execution means for executing the second privilege game and the privilege game execution means. The second identification information can be dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. The gaming machine K2 is characterized in that, when the determination result of the second determination means is the specific second determination result, the predetermined restriction condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1, the second determination means can be dynamically displayed while the first identification information is dynamically displayed. When the determination result of is a specific second determination result, a predetermined restriction condition is satisfied. Thereby, the first determination by the first determination means can be executed in a state where the measurement of the period of the advantageous gaming state is restricted. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine K2, the measurement limiting means is in the advantageous gaming state by the period measuring means while the dynamic display corresponding to the specific second determination result is executed by the second dynamic display means. A gaming machine K3 characterized in that it limits the measurement of a period.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1, the period of the advantageous gaming state is measured while the dynamic display corresponding to the specific second determination result is executed by the second dynamic display means. Is restricted. Therefore, the first determination by the first determination means can be executed in a state where the measurement of the period of the advantageous gaming state is restricted. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

One of the gaming machines K1 to K3 is characterized by having a notification means for notifying that the measurement limiting means limits the measurement of the period of the advantageous gaming state by the period measuring means. Game machine K4.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the notification means notifies that the measurement of the period is restricted by the measurement limiting means, so that the game can be easily understood by the player. It has the effect of being able to provide.

<Characteristic L group> (Small hit RUSH with different end conditions)
A first determination means capable of executing the first determination, a first display means displaying the first identification information for showing the determination result by the first determination means, and a second determination means capable of executing the second determination. And the second display means for displaying the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for showing the specific first determination result to the first display means. The privilege of executing the first privilege game when displayed, and executing the second privilege game when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. In a gaming machine having a game executing means, a first gaming state that makes it easier to execute the second determination than the first determination, and a second that makes it easier to execute the first determination than the second determination. It has a gaming state setting means capable of setting a gaming state, and the gaming state setting means is when a predetermined first condition is satisfied or when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. The first game state is set in the above, and the first game state is set based on the condition of the second condition, rather than the first game state is set based on the condition of the first condition. The gaming machine L1 is characterized in that the case where the gaming state is set makes it easier for the first gaming state to continue.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine capable of setting an advantageous gaming state (latent state) that is advantageous to the player by performing a game in which a plurality of gaming states are gradually shifted according to the lottery result (for example,). Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-058267). By the way, since the above-mentioned gaming machine has a single end condition of the advantageous gaming state, the ease of continuing the set advantageous gaming state cannot be different, and the player in the advantageous gaming state cannot be different. There is a problem that the game to be provided becomes monotonous and the motivation to play is reduced. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having further improved the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine L1, the first gaming state can be set because the first gaming state that is easy to continuously set and the first gaming state that is difficult to continuously set can be set by the gaming state setting means. Even after the game is played, it is possible to play the game while expecting that the first game state will continue for a long period of time, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine L1, the gaming state setting means sets a gaming state different from the first gaming state when a predetermined end condition is satisfied in the state where the first gaming state is set. The case of setting the first gaming state based on the satisfaction of the second condition is better than the case of setting the first gaming state based on the satisfaction of the first condition. A gaming machine L2 characterized in that the conditions are difficult to be satisfied.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L1, the first game state is set based on the second condition being satisfied, rather than the first gaming state being set based on the first condition being satisfied. When the gaming state is set, it is possible to make it more difficult to end the first gaming state. Therefore, since it is possible to set a first game state that is easy to end and a first game state that is difficult to end for the player, the first game state that is difficult to end even after the first game state is set. It is possible to play the game while hoping that the game state is set, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine L2 has an end condition setting means capable of setting a first end condition and a second end condition different from the first end condition as the predetermined end condition, and the second condition is satisfied. The gaming machine L3 is characterized in that when the first gaming state is set based on the above, the first ending condition is not satisfied.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L2, when the first gaming state is set based on the satisfaction of the second condition, the first ending condition is not satisfied, so that it is difficult to end. The first gaming state can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game in order to satisfy the second condition.

In the gaming machine L3, the ending condition setting means sets the second ending condition when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result. L4.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L3, a second end condition is set when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result. As a result, when the first gaming state is terminated based on the satisfaction of the second termination condition, the privileged game can be provided. Therefore, even if the first game state ends, the player can be given a privilege, so that there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

The gaming machine L5 is characterized in that the gaming machine L3 or L4 has a notifying means for notifying that the first gaming state has been set based on the satisfaction of the second condition.

According to the gaming machine L5, since the notification means notifies that the first end condition is not satisfied, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

<Characteristic M group> (Set the fall invalid period of special figure high accuracy)
A first determination means capable of executing the first determination, a first display means for displaying the first identification information for showing the determination result by the first determination means, and a first determination specific to the first display means. The privilege game execution means for executing the first privilege game when the first identification information for showing the result is displayed, and the first determination means executed when a predetermined setting condition is satisfied. In a gaming machine having a gaming state setting means capable of setting an advantageous gaming state in which the result of the first determination is more likely to be the specific first determination result than the normal gaming state, the advantageous gaming state is achieved by the gaming state setting means. When the predetermined transition condition is satisfied in the state in which is set, the gaming state transition means for shifting the gaming state from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state and the establishment of the predetermined transition condition are restricted. A gaming machine M1 characterized by having a transition condition limiting means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, according to the lottery result, a predetermined lottery (probability change state) is set to be advantageous to the player during the period from the end of the privileged game to the next big hit. A gaming machine has been proposed that terminates an advantageous gaming state when a player wins a fall lottery. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-152). By the way, since the above-mentioned gaming machine is configured so that the falling lottery is executed based on the execution of the winning / failing lottery of the game, there is a sense of danger that the advantageous gaming state is always terminated for the player. There was a problem that it was not possible to play the game with peace of mind. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine in which a player can play a game with peace of mind and the interest of the game is improved.

According to the gaming machine M1, the transition from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state can be restricted by the transition condition limiting means, so that the gaming state shifts from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state. It is possible to set a non-playing period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a period for the player to play the game with peace of mind.

In the gaming machine M1, the first determination means executes the first determination when a predetermined first determination condition is satisfied, and when the predetermined first determination condition is satisfied, the first determination condition is satisfied. 1 It has a special determination means capable of executing a special determination different from the determination, and when the determination result by the special determination means is a specific special determination result, the predetermined transition condition is satisfied. Characterized gaming machine M2.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1, a special determination is executed when the first determination condition is satisfied, and a predetermined transition condition is determined when the determination result is a specific special determination result. Is established. Therefore, since the determination by the first determination means and the determination by the special determination means can be set in association with each other, there is an effect that an easy-to-understand game can be provided.

In the gaming machine M1, when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific second determination result different from the specific first determination result, the second privilege game different from the first privilege game is executed. A second privilege game execution means and a variable ball entry means in which the game ball is variably operated to an open state in which the game ball can enter the inside when the second privilege game is executed by the second privilege game execution means. , A variable control means for controlling the variable operation of the variable ball entry means, a specific area through which the game ball can pass is provided inside the variable ball entry means, and the game ball can pass through the specific area. The gaming machine M3, characterized in that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied when the machine passes through.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M1, a predetermined transition condition is satisfied when the gaming ball passes through a specific area. Therefore, since the transition condition can be satisfied at a timing different from the determination timing of the first determination means, it is possible to provide the player with a surprising game. Further, since it is possible to determine whether or not the transition condition is satisfied based on the game result of whether or not the player fires the game ball, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate can be increased.

In the gaming machine M3, the variable control means has a first variable control in which a ball entering the variable ball entry means easily passes through the specific region, and a first variable control means in which the ball is less likely to pass through the specific region than the first variable control. 2 Variable control and a gaming machine M4 characterized by being configurable.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M3, the variable control means provides a first variable control in which a ball entering the variable ball entry means easily passes through a specific region and a second variable control in which it is difficult to pass. Since it is possible to set and, it is possible to provide a player with a surprising game. Further, since it is possible to determine whether or not the transition condition is satisfied based on the game result of whether or not the player fires the game ball, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate can be increased.

The gaming machine M4 is characterized in that the gaming machine M4 has a notification means for notifying that the second variable control is set by the variable control means.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M4, it is notified that the second variable control is set by the notification means, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. be.

<Characteristic N group> (Selection of small hit games)
A first determination means capable of executing the first determination, a first display means for displaying the first identification information for showing the determination result by the first determination means, and a first determination specific to the first display means. When the first identification information for showing the result is displayed, the privilege game executing means for executing the first privilege game and the determination result of the first determination means are different from the specific first determination result. In the case of the second determination result of the above, the second privilege game is executed by the second privilege game execution means for executing the second privilege game different from the first privilege game and the second privilege game execution means. In this case, it has a variable ball entry means in which the game ball is variably operated to an open state in which the game ball can enter the inside, and a variable control means for controlling the variable operation of the variable ball entry means. A specific area through which a game ball can pass is provided inside the variable ball entry means, and a gaming state setting means capable of setting a disadvantageous gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player when the game ball passes through the specific area is provided. The gaming machine N1 characterized by being.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There has been proposed a gaming machine capable of setting an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to a player when an advantageous privileged game is executed and a gaming ball passes through a specific area during the privileged game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-152). In the above-mentioned gaming machine, since the advantageous gaming state is set when the gaming ball passes through the specific area, it is intended to pay attention to whether or not the gaming ball passes through the specific area. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having further improved the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine N1, when the gaming ball passes through a specific area, a disadvantageous gaming state is set, so that there is an effect that a novel game property can be provided to the player.

In the gaming machine N1, the variable control means has a first variable control in which a ball entering the variable entry means easily passes through the specific region, and a first variable control means in which the ball is less likely to pass through the specific region than the first variable control. 2 Variable control and a gaming machine N2 characterized in that it can be set.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N1, the first variable control in which the ball entering the variable ball entering means easily passes through the specific region by the variable control means, and the first variable control thereof Since either of the second variable control that is difficult to pass through the specific area is set, the launched game ball can pass through the specific area when the game ball is launched according to the variable control content to be executed. Gender can be different. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the enjoyment of the player deciding whether or not to launch the game ball.

In the gaming machine N2, the second privilege game executed by the second privilege game executing means has a notification means capable of notifying that the second variable control is set by the variable control means. A gaming machine N3 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine N2, the notification means notifies that the second variable control is set, so that when the player decides whether or not to launch the gaming ball. Information that can be used as a reference can be provided. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the enjoyment of the player deciding whether or not to launch the game ball.

In any of the game machines N1 to the game machine N3, the invalid means has a detection means for detecting that the game ball has passed through the specific area and an invalid means for invalidating the detection result by the detection means. The gaming machine N4 is characterized in that the detection result by the detection means is invalidated based on the determination result of the first determination means.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines N1 to N3, the detection result by the detecting means can be invalidated by the invalidating means, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine N4, the measuring means for measuring the number of gaming balls detected by the detecting means during the period in which the detection result by the detecting means is invalidated by the invalid means, and the measurement result of the measuring means. The gaming machine N5, characterized by having a measurement result notification means for notifying based information.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N4, the measurement result notification means notifies the information based on the measurement result of the measuring means during the period in which the detection result by the detecting means is invalidated, so that the information is invalid. The player can grasp the number detected by the detection means during the period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily feel the superiority.

<Characteristic O group> (End the time reduction based on the condition that was satisfied earlier among multiple conditions)
The first determination means capable of executing the first determination, the first display means for displaying the determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means. The privilege of executing the first privilege game when the first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying and the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result are stopped and displayed on the first display means. A game executing means, a first gaming state in which the first determination is easily executed, a second gaming state in which the first determination is more difficult to be executed than the first gaming state, and a game state setting means that can be set. The possessed gaming machine has an ending means for terminating the first gaming state when a predetermined first ending condition is satisfied or when a second ending condition different from the first ending condition is satisfied. The ending means is characterized in that the first gaming state is terminated based on the previously established termination condition among the first termination condition and the second termination condition. O1.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, a gaming machine capable of changing the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-12907). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the subtraction of the period in which the advantageous gaming state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set is the timing at which the special symbol changes, so that the advantageous gaming state should be set to the maximum. There was a problem that the player could not do it and the player was uncomfortable. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having further improved the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine O1, a first ending condition and a second ending condition are provided as conditions for ending the first gaming state, and when any of the ending conditions is terminated, the first gaming state is terminated. , There is an effect that the first gaming state can be surely ended.

In the gaming machine O1, the second determination means capable of executing the second determination, the second display means for displaying the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means, and the second display means thereof. The second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for a predetermined second period, and the privilege game execution means for showing the second display means a specific second determination result. When the second identification information is displayed, the second privilege game is executed, and the second movement is performed while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. The second identification information can be dynamically displayed by the target display means, and when the first determination means is executed, the first termination condition is satisfied and the second determination means is executed. The gaming machine O2 is characterized in that the second termination condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O1, the first termination condition is satisfied based on the first determination by the first determination means, and the second termination condition is established based on the second determination by the second determination means. This is a gaming machine capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information by the second dynamic display means while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. However, there is an effect that the first gaming state can be appropriately terminated.

In the gaming machine O2, the first execution number measuring means for measuring the number of executions of the first determination means, the second execution number measuring means for measuring the execution number of the second determination means, and the first execution number measuring means. The total number of times the first determination means is executed and the total number of times the first determination means is executed as the first period in which the first gaming state is continuously set. , The first period setting means for setting a predetermined number of times including the number of executions of the second determination means, and the dynamic display corresponding to the case where the number of executions of the first determination means becomes the predetermined number of times are being executed. The second determination means is executed by the second determination means in a state of having an execution determination means for determining that the slingshot is being executed and the state determination means determining that the dynamic display is being executed. When this is done, the gaming machine O3 is characterized in that the second termination condition is satisfied before the second determination is executed.

According to the game O3, in addition to the effect of the game machine O2, the second end condition can be satisfied even during the dynamic display in which the first end condition can be satisfied, so that the first game state can be appropriately satisfied. Has the effect of being able to terminate.

In the gaming machine O3, the first termination condition is that the number of executions of the first determination means is the number of executions of the first determination means after the dynamic display corresponding to the case where the number of executions of the first determination means becomes the predetermined number of times is completed. The gaming machine O4 is characterized in that it is established at any time until the first determination corresponding to the case where the number of times exceeds a predetermined number is executed.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O3, the first determination is made after the dynamic display corresponding to the case where the first determination means is executed a predetermined number of times is completed. Since the first determination corresponding to the case where the number of times of execution of the means becomes larger than the predetermined number of times is executed is established, the predetermined first period can be set longer. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from being uncomfortable.

In the gaming machine O4, the third determination means capable of executing the third determination, the third display means for displaying the third identification information for showing the determination result by the third determination means, and the third display means thereof. When the third dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the third identification information and the third identification information for indicating a specific third determination result to the third display means are stopped and displayed, the third privilege. It has a third privilege game execution means for executing a game, and the third determination means sets the second game state when the first game state is set by the game state setting means. The gaming machine O5 is characterized in that it is easier to execute than in the case of the above.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine O4, the first gaming state is set because it has a third determination means that makes it easier to execute when the first gaming state is set. By lengthening the period, the period during which the third determination means can be easily executed can be lengthened. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from being uncomfortable.

<Characteristic P group> (Special figure changes even during the opening period of the jackpot game)
A first determination means capable of executing the first determination, a first display means displaying the first identification information for showing the determination result by the first determination means, and a second determination means capable of executing the second determination. And the second display means for displaying the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for showing the specific first determination result to the first display means. Based on what is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and the second privilege game is based on the fact that the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. The second determination means is a gaming machine having the privileged game executing means for executing the above, and the second determination means is the second determination during a specific first period of the period during which the first privileged game is being executed. The gaming machine P1 is characterized in that the second determination is not executed in the second period different from the first period.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a plurality of types of special symbols are provided and a plurality of special symbols can be changed at the same time (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-226399). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, a plurality of special symbols are changed at the same time to allow a player to efficiently perform a lottery, but when one of the special symbols is won, the other special symbol is won. Since it is configured so that the fluctuation of is not executed, there is a problem that the motivation for playing is reduced when the lottery efficiency is lowered. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machines to suppress a decrease in motivation to play and to provide a gaming machine with an improved interest in playing.

According to the gaming machine P1, since the second determination can be executed while the first privilege game is being executed, it is possible to make the player execute more determinations. Therefore, there is an effect that the game efficiency can be improved.

In the gaming machine P1, the variable ball-entry means that can be varied between the first state in which the gaming ball can enter and the second state in which the gaming ball is more difficult to enter than the first state, and the first privilege. When the game is executed, the variable ball-entry means has a variable control means that variably controls the variable ball-entry means into the first state and the second state, and the variable ball-entry means is in the second state by the variable control means. The gaming machine P2, wherein the period variable to the above is the first period.

According to the gaming machine P2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1. That is, since the second determination is executed using the period during which the first privilege game is being executed and the game ball cannot enter the variable ball entry means, the game result of the first privilege game can be understood. The second determination can be performed without difficulty. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

In the gaming machine P1 or P2, the second determination means is more suitable for the player than the advantageous second determination result and the advantageous second privilege game executed based on the advantageous second determination result as the second determination result. It is possible to discriminate from the disadvantageous second determination result in which the disadvantageous second privilege game is executed, and the determination result of the second determination means executed during the first privilege game is the advantage second determination. The gaming machine P3, characterized in that it has a discrimination limiting means for limiting the result.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines P1 or P2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the second determination executed during the first privilege game is restricted by the determination limiting means so that the determination result does not become an advantageous second determination result, an excessive privilege is given to the player. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a situation. Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided to the player.

The gaming machine P3 is characterized by having a variable limiting means that limits the variable means from the second state to the first state by the variable control means during the disadvantageous second privilege game. Gaming machine P4.

According to the gaming machine P4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P3. That is, it is possible to limit the variable restriction means from changing the first privilege game to the first state while the disadvantageous second privilege game is being executed based on the determination result of the second determination means. can. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the provision of a game that is difficult to understand due to the duplicate execution of a plurality of privilege games.

In the gaming machine P4, when the variable limiting means restricts the variable adjustment of the first privileged game to the first state, the first privileged game is variable to the first state. Characterized gaming machine P5.

According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine P4, even if the variable limiting means restricts the first privileged game from being variable to the first state, the first state of the first privileged game Since the length of the period is not variable, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Further, while the second period of the first privilege game is set, there is an effect that the game can be enthusiastically performed in order to make the second determination until the end.

In any of the gaming machines P2 to P5, the variable control means variably controls the variable ball entry means so as to be in the second state when the first privilege game is executed. The gaming machine P6 is characterized in that the period from the execution of the first privileged game to the state in which the variable ball-entry means is in the first state is the first period.

According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines P2 to P5, the following effects are played. That is, since the second determination can be executed immediately after the first privilege game is executed, the second determination can be continuously executed from the period before the first privilege game is executed. This has the effect that the second determination can be executed during the first privilege game without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In the gaming machine P6, the first period is different from the second dynamic display setting means for dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the determination result of the second determination means for a predetermined period as the first privilege game. It has a first privilege game setting means capable of setting a plurality of the first privilege games, and the privilege game granting means grants the first privilege game set by the first privilege game setting means. The first privilege game setting means is at least longer than the period for dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the determination result of the second determination means set by the second dynamic display setting means. A shortened first privilege game in which the first period, which is shorter than the normal first privilege game in which the first period is set and the period for dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the determination result of the second determination means, is set. And, the gaming machine P7 characterized in that it can be set.

According to the gaming machine P7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P6. That is, when the first privilege game is normally set by the first privilege game setting means, it becomes possible to execute the second privilege game based on the determination by the second determination means during the first period, and the shortened first. When the privilege game is set, it can be configured so that it becomes difficult to execute the second privilege game based on the determination by the second determination means during the first period. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player interested in the first period, which is difficult to make the player interested in the privilege game, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage. effective.

In any of the gaming machines P1 to P7, there is a second dynamic display setting means for dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the determination result of the second determination means for a predetermined period, and the first privilege game is executed. The gaming machine P8 is characterized by having a forced stop means for forcibly stopping and displaying the identification information for showing the determination result of the second determination means that is dynamically displayed.

According to the gaming machine P8, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines P1 to P7, the following effects are played. That is, when the first privilege game is executed, the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the determination result of the second determination means is forcibly stopped and displayed, so that a new dynamic display is performed during the first period. Can be facilitated to start. Therefore, it is possible to easily provide the player with the determination by the second determination means executed during the first period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines P1 to P8, there is a specific area through which the gaming ball can pass, and the privileged game granting means indicates that the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result. The first privilege game is given when the game ball passes through the specific area while the identification information for the purpose is stopped and displayed, and the second determination means determines the first determination means. It is assumed that the period from when the identification information for indicating that the result is the specific first determination result is stopped and displayed until the game ball passes through the specific area is also during the first period. A gaming machine P9 characterized in that it executes a determination.

<Derivation of characteristic Pa group> (Small hit RUSH using special electric start port)
The determination means capable of performing the determination, the display means for displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the predetermined identification information for indicating the specific determination result are displayed on the display means. Based on this, based on the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game and the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the first state from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter is the first state. The variable ball-entry means that is variable to the second state in which the game ball is easier to enter, and the variable ball-in means to the second state by the privilege game execution means after the predetermined identification information is displayed. The gaming machine Pa1 is characterized by having a special game executing means capable of executing a special game that changes the variable ball entering means to the second state until the variable is changed.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a plurality of types of special symbols are provided and a plurality of special symbols can be changed at the same time (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-226399). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, a plurality of special symbols are changed at the same time to allow the player to efficiently draw a lottery. Since it is not possible to grant a privileged game, there is a problem that the interest of the game is reduced. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having an improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine Pa1, the variable ball-entry means can be changed to the second state by the special game execution means before the variable ball-entry means is changed to the second state by the privilege game execution means. , It is possible to provide a player with a surprising game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine Pa1, from the first state in which the ball can enter and the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter based on the ball entering the ball, the game ball is more than the first state. Has a second variable ball-entry means that is variable to a second state that facilitates ball entry, and the special game execution means is based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second variable ball-entry means. A gaming machine Pa2 characterized by executing a special game.

According to the gaming machine Pa2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Pa1. That is, since the special game is executed by inserting the game ball into the second variable ball entry means, there is an effect that an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player.

The gaming machine Pa2 has a special game setting means for setting the content of the special game executed by the special game executing means, and the special game setting means allows a game ball to enter the second variable ball entering means. A gaming machine characterized in that the variable ball-entry means sets one special game from a plurality of special games having different preparation periods until the variable ball entry means is changed to the second state. Pa3.

According to the gaming machine Pa3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Pa2. That is, depending on the special game to be executed, the preparation period from when the game ball enters the second variable entry means to when the variable entry means is changed to the second state can be different. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed while expecting that the special game with a short preparation period is executed.

The gaming machine Pa3 has a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state, and the special game setting means is said by the gaming state setting means. Pa4 is a gaming machine characterized in that when a first gaming state is set, it is easy to set a privileged game having a shorter preparation period than when the second gaming state is set.

According to the gaming machine Pa4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Pa3. That is, when the first game state is set, a short preparation period can be easily set, so that the concentrated special game can be executed during the period when the first game state is set, and the game can be executed. It has the effect of improving the interest.

In the gaming machine Pa4, the gaming machine Pa5 is characterized in that the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state based on the determination result by the determination means being the specific determination result. ..

According to the gaming machine Pa5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Pa4. That is, since the presence / absence of the privileged game and the setting of the gaming state are executed based on the determination result of the determination means, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the determination result of the determination means. ..

The gaming machine Pa5 has a waiting period setting means for setting a waiting period from the display of the predetermined determination result on the display means to the execution of the privileged game, and the special game setting means has. The gaming machine Pa6 is characterized in that when the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the special game in which the preparation period shorter than the waiting period is set is set.

According to the gaming machine Pa6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Pa5. That is, when the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the special game in which the preparation period shorter than the waiting period is set is set, so that the special game can be reliably executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic Q group> (Derived from P group)
A first determination means capable of executing the first determination, a first display means displaying the first identification information for showing the determination result by the first determination means, and a second determination means capable of executing the second determination. And the second display means for displaying the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for showing the specific first determination result to the first display means. Based on what is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and the second privilege game is based on the fact that the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. In a gaming machine having a privileged game executing means for executing the above, the second determination means makes the second determination during a specific first period of the period during which the first privileged game is being executed. The gaming machine Q1 which is executed and is characterized in that the second determination different from the first period is executed and the second determination is not executed.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a plurality of types of special symbols are provided and a plurality of special symbols can be changed at the same time (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-226399). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, a plurality of special symbols are changed at the same time to allow the player to efficiently draw a lottery. Since it is not possible to grant a privileged game, there is a problem that the interest of the game is reduced. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having an improved interest in gaming.

<Characteristic R group> (V winning rate is different depending on the fluctuation time of the special figure.)
By a discrimination means that performs discrimination when the discrimination condition is satisfied, a dynamic display means that causes the display means to dynamically display identification information for showing the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, and a dynamic display means thereof. A bonus game is granted based on the dynamic display period setting means for setting the dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the identification information and the stop display of the identification information indicating the first discrimination result on the display means. The game ball enters based on the fact that the special game granting means and the identification information indicating the second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result as a result of the discrimination by the discrimination means are stopped and displayed on the display means. It has a variable ball entry means that can be changed from a difficult first state to a second state that makes it easy to enter, and a specific area through which a game ball that has entered the variable entry means can pass. The means grants the privilege game even when the gaming ball passes through the specific area, and the dynamic display period setting means has the first period and the first period as the dynamic display period. It is possible to set a longer second period, and it is easier for the game ball to pass through the specific area when the second period is set than when the first period is set. The gaming machine R1 characterized by.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a specific game is executed when the lottery result is a specific lottery result, and a privilege game is executed even when the ball passes through a specific area during the specific game (for example). , Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-192067). By the way, since the above-mentioned gaming machine enables the privileged game to be executed at a plurality of triggers, it is possible to improve the interest of the game, but depending on the type of the specific game to be executed, the player can move to a specific area. Since the passing ratio of the ball is variable, the lottery result has a great influence on the content of the subsequent game, and there is a problem that the interest of the game is lowered. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having an improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine R1, the ease of passing the game ball to the specific area can be made different depending on the dynamic display period set by the dynamic display period setting means. There is no such thing, and the player can be made to pay attention until the timing when the identification information for showing the discrimination result is stopped and displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine R1, a period group storage means having a plurality of period groups in which a plurality of dynamic display periods that can be set by the dynamic display period setting means are defined, and a plurality of period group storage means stored in the period group storage means. It has a period group selection means for selecting one period group from the period group, and the dynamic display period setting means is defined in the one period group selected by the period group selection means. One of the plurality of dynamic display periods is set, and the period group storage means corresponds to the first period group and the second period rather than the first period group. The gaming machine R2 is characterized by having at least a second period group including a large number of dynamic display periods.

According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second period group in which the second period is easily set is set, the second period can be set more easily than in the case where the first period group is set, so that the second period can be set easily. While the group is set, there is an effect that the player can play a game that is advantageous to the player with peace of mind.

The gaming machine R2 has a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state as a gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state, and the period group selection means sets the gaming state. The gaming machine R3 is characterized in that the period group is selected according to the gaming state set by the means.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the period group is set according to the gaming state, once the second period group advantageous to the player is set, the second period group is set until a different gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. The two-period group will continue. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In the gaming machine R3, the dynamic display period setting means has the first discrimination result and the second discrimination result as a result of the discrimination by the discrimination means in a state where the second period group is set. The gaming machine R4 is characterized in that a special dynamic display period can be set based on the fact that the identification information indicating a different third determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means.

According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display period set when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the third discrimination result allows the player to understand that the currently set period group is the second period group advantageous to the player. Can be made to. Therefore, even if the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a discrimination result in which the privileged game cannot be executed, there is an effect that the player can be interested and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic S group> (R derivative)
By a discrimination means that performs discrimination when the discrimination condition is satisfied, a dynamic display means that causes the display means to dynamically display the identification information for showing the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, and the dynamic display means thereof. A bonus game is granted based on the dynamic display period setting means for setting the dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the identification information and the stop display of the identification information indicating the first determination result on the display means. The game ball enters based on the fact that the special game granting means and the identification information indicating the second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result as a result of the discrimination by the discrimination means are stopped and displayed on the display means. It has a variable ball entry means that can be changed from a difficult first state to a second state that makes it easy to enter, and a specific area through which a game ball that has entered the variable entry means can pass. The means grants the privilege game even when the game ball passes through the specific area, and the dynamic display period setting means has the first period and the first period as the dynamic display period. It is possible to set a longer second period, and it is easier for the game ball to pass through the specific area when the second period is set than when the first period is set. The gaming machine S1 characterized by.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a specific game is executed when the lottery result is a specific lottery result, and a privilege game is executed even when the ball passes through a specific area during the specific game (for example). , Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-192067). By the way, since the above-mentioned gaming machine enables the privileged game to be executed at a plurality of triggers, it is possible to improve the interest of the game, but depending on the type of the specific game to be executed, the player can move to a specific area. Since the passing ratio of the ball is variable, the lottery result has a great influence on the content of the subsequent game, and there is a problem that the interest of the game is lowered. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having an improved interest in gaming.

<Characteristic T group> (3 loops of 1 type and 2 types)
The discrimination means for discriminating when the discrimination condition is satisfied, the display means for displaying the discrimination information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the identification for showing the first discrimination result as the discrimination result on the display means. When the information is stopped and displayed, the privileged game granting means for granting the privileged game that is advantageous to the player, and the first game state and its A gaming state setting means capable of setting a second gaming state in which the privileged game is more likely to be granted than in the first gaming state, and a third gaming state in which the privileged game is less likely to be granted than in the first gaming state, and the above-mentioned game state setting means. Based on the fact that the identification information indicating the second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result is stopped and displayed on the display means as the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, the period during which the game ball can pass through the specific area is set. It has a possible period setting means, and the privilege game granting means grants the privilege game even when the gaming ball passes through the specific area, and the gaming machine is in the second gaming state. When the privilege game is granted in the state where is set, either the first game state or the second game state is more than the third game state after the end of the privilege game by the game state setting means. The gaming machine T1 characterized by being easy to set.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, when the lottery result is a specific lottery result, a specific game is executed, and when the ball passes through the specific area during the specific game, the privilege game is also executed, and the ball passes through the specific area. A gaming machine capable of setting an easy gaming state has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-192067). By the way, since the above-mentioned gaming machine enables the privileged gaming to be executed at a plurality of triggers, it has been possible to improve the interest of the gaming, but the gaming state in which the ball easily passes through a specific area is present. There was a problem that the game might end immediately and the interest of the game would be reduced. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having an improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine T1, when the second gaming state is set, the third gaming state is not set when the next privileged game is granted, so that it is easy to grant the privileged games one after another. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind in a state where the privilege game is easily given.

In the gaming machine T1, the gaming state setting means has a privilege game in a state where the first gaming state is set, as compared with a case where the privilege game is given in the state where the second gaming state is set. The gaming machine T2, characterized in that it is easier to set the third gaming state after the privileged gaming is completed.

According to the gaming machine T2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T2. That is, when the first game state is set, the third game state is easily set based on the grant of the privilege game, so that the game state advantageous to the player is set for a long period of time. Can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an appropriate game.

In the gaming machine T1 or T2, the gaming state setting means includes a first privilege game, which is given based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means among the privilege games, and the specific area. It is characterized in that the game state set according to the type of the privilege game given by the privilege game granting means is different from the second privilege game given based on the passage of the game ball. The gaming machine T3.

According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T2 or T3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the game state to be set can be different depending on whether the first privilege game is granted or the second privilege game is granted, which type of privilege game is executed for the player. You can be interested in whether it was done. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine T3, when the second gaming state is set, the gaming state setting means is more advantageous to the player when the second privilege game is given than when the first privilege game is given. A gaming machine T4 characterized by facilitating the setting of various gaming states.

According to the gaming machine T4, when the second gaming state is set, the player can be enthusiastically played the game so that the second privilege gaming is given. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine T3 or T4, in the state where the first gaming state is set, the player is given the first privilege game rather than the second privilege game. The gaming machine T5, which is characterized by facilitating the setting of an advantageous gaming state.

According to the gaming machine T5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T3 or T4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first game state is set, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game so that the player is given the first privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic U group> (Derived from T group)
The discrimination means for discriminating when the discrimination condition is satisfied, the display means for displaying the discrimination result indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the identification information indicating the specific discrimination result are stopped and displayed on the display means. In this case, after the privilege game granting means for granting the privileged game advantageous to the player and the privileged game granted by the privileged game granting means are completed, the first gaming state and the first gaming state A game state setting means capable of setting a second game state in which the privilege game is easily given and a third game state in which the privilege game is less likely to be given than the first game state, and a result of discrimination by the discrimination means. Based on the fact that the identification information indicating the second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, the game ball changes from the first state in which it is difficult to enter to the second state in which it is easy to enter. It has a variable ball-entry means that can be varied and a specific area through which the game ball that has entered the variable ball-entry means can pass, and the privilege game granting means is when the game ball passes through the specific area. Also, the privilege game is given, and when the privilege game is given while the second game state is set, the game state setting means is the first game after the privilege game is completed. A gaming machine U1 characterized in that any one of a state and the second gaming state can be easily set.

<Characteristic V group> (Small hit RUSH that does not require simultaneous fluctuation)
The first discriminating means capable of entering the game ball, the first discriminating means capable of executing the first discriminating based on the entering the ball into the first entering means, and the discriminating result by the first discriminating means are shown. The first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information for the purpose, the second ball entry means on which the game ball can enter, and the game ball entering the second ball entry means. The acquisition means for acquiring information based on the above, the second discrimination means capable of executing the second discrimination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the second for showing the discrimination result by the second discrimination means. A second dynamic display means that dynamically displays the identification information on the display means, a storage means that can store the information acquired by the acquisition means until the determination by the second discrimination means is executed, and the storage means. To the second privilege game granting means for granting the execution of the second privilege game when the second identification information for indicating the specific second discrimination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, and the second ball entry means. When the limiting means for restricting the entry of the gaming ball and the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result are stopped and displayed on the display means, at least the limiting means can be released. A gaming machine V1 characterized by having a first privilege game execution means for executing a first privilege game.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (time saving state) in which a ball can easily enter a specific entrance after the end of the privileged game according to the lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). Gazette). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that the ball can be easily entered into a specific entrance at any time during an advantageous gaming state, so that the gaming machine gets tired of the game at an early stage. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having further improved the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine V1, the ball can be entered into the ball-entry means only while the privilege game or the special privilege game is granted, so that the privilege game or the special privilege game is granted. There is an effect that the memory in the storage means can be restricted in the state where the memory is not used.

In the gaming machine V1, the second entry means in which the game ball can enter, the first position in which the game ball is allowed to enter the second entry means, and the entry of the game ball from the first position. It has a variable member that can be changed to a second position that regulates the ball, and the variable member is variably controlled when the privilege game or the special privilege game is executed. The gaming machine V2 is characterized in that the limiting means positions the variable member at the first position, and the limiting releasing means positions the variable member at the second position.

According to the gaming machine V2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the ease of entering the ball into the ball entry means can be changed according to the variable situation of the variable member executed in the privilege game or the special privilege game, the privilege game or the privilege game or The ball can be entered into the ball entry means in synchronization with the game of the special privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that the playability during the privilege game or the special privilege game can be improved.

In the gaming machine V1 or V2, it is easier to release the restriction by the restriction means by the restriction release means when the special privilege game is executed than when the privilege game is executed. Gaming machine V3.

According to the gaming machine V3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines V1 or V2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the ease of entering the ball into the ball entry means can be changed according to the type of the game in which the variable member is changed, the playability during the privilege game or the special privilege game is improved. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine V3, the gaming machine V4 is characterized in that the privileged game is more difficult to be executed than the special privileged game.

According to the gaming machine V4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, although the privilege game is more difficult to execute than the special privilege game, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the ball entry means during the game. Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically aim the player to execute the privileged game, and there is an effect that the operation of the game can be enhanced.

<Characteristic W group> (Ease of establishing multiple game conditions is variable depending on the character movement pattern)
A discriminant means capable of discriminating, a variable means variable from the first state to the second state when the discriminant result by the discriminant means is a specific discriminant result, and variable operation contents of the variable means are set. The variable operation setting means includes a variable operation setting means for controlling the variable operation means and a variable control means for controlling the variable operation content based on the variable operation content set by the variable operation setting means, and the variable control means is the first by the variable operation setting means. When 1 variable operation content is set, the variable operation means is variably controlled so that the first privilege is more easily given than the second privilege different from the first privilege, and the variable operation setting means. When a second variable operation content different from the first variable operation content is set, the variable means is variably controlled so that the second privilege is more easily given than the first privilege. The gaming machine W1 characterized by this.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (time saving state) in which a specific electric accessory is easily variably operated after the end of the privilege game according to the lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). .. By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machines, the privilege that can be given to the player by variably operating the electric accessory is always the same, and further, one privilege is given by different the variable operation contents of the electric accessory. Since it is only possible to set a state in which it is easy to play and a state in which it is difficult to play, there is a problem that the game gets tired early. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having further improved the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine W1, since the privilege to be given can be different based on the movable operation content set by the movable operation setting means, the player can pay attention to the variable state of the variable means. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine W1, the end condition setting means for setting a plurality of end conditions, the condition determination means for determining the establishment of the plurality of end conditions set by the end condition setting means, and the end condition by the condition determination means. Has a variable control end means for terminating the variable control of the variable means by the variable control means when it is determined that is satisfied, and is based on the fact that the specific end condition is satisfied among the plurality of end conditions. The gaming machine W2 is characterized in that when the variable control ending means ends the variable control, a special state is set in which the first privilege and the second privilege are easily given.

According to the gaming machine W2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine W1. That is, when the specific end condition is satisfied, the special state is set, so that the player can enthusiastically play the game so that the specific end condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine W2, the ball entering means, the second discriminating means capable of executing the second discriminating based on the ball entering the ball entering means, and the discriminating result by the second discriminating means are specific. A gaming machine W3 comprising a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game when it is a second determination result, wherein the first privilege is such that the second determination is executed.

According to the gaming machine W3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine W2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the second determination capable of executing the privilege game is given as the first privilege, the player is expected to set the first variable operation content in which the first privilege is easily given. You can play games while playing. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine W3, when the privileged game is executed by the privileged game executing means, the first state in which the gaming ball is difficult to enter is changed to the second state in which the gaming ball is easier to enter than the first state. The gaming machine W4 having a variable ball-entry means that can be operated, and the second privilege is that a game ball enters the variable ball-entry means.

According to the gaming machine W4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine W3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the privilege game is executed, the game can be performed while expecting that the second variable operation content in which the second privilege is easily given is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines W2 to W4, the ending condition setting means sets the granting of the first privilege as the specific ending condition of the gaming machine W5.

According to the gaming machine W5, in addition to the effect playing on any of the gaming machines W2 to W4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game while expecting that the first privilege is given so that the special state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic X group> (Can pass through during a hit game)
The discrimination is made by a first ball-entry means capable of entering a game ball, a discrimination condition-satisfying means for establishing a discrimination condition based on the game ball entering the first ball-entry means, and the discrimination condition-establishing means. The discrimination means capable of executing the discrimination when the condition is satisfied, the privilege game granting means for granting the privilege game based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result, and the privilege game granting means described above. Passing means that allow the game ball to pass while the privilege game is granted, judgment means that can execute a judgment based on the passage of the game ball through the passing means, and the judgment result is a specific judgment result. A variable means that is variably controlled from the first position to the second position based on the above, and when the variable means is in the second position, a gaming ball is inserted as compared with the case of the first position. It has a second ball-entry means that facilitates ball entry, and the discrimination condition-satisfying means is characterized in that the discrimination condition is satisfied even when a game ball enters the second ball-entry means. The gaming machine X1.

In the gaming machine X1, the second ball-entry means is provided at a position where a ball that has passed through the passing means can enter the gaming machine X2.

In the gaming machine X2, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for showing a determination result by the determination means and a dynamic display period for setting a period for dynamically displaying the identification information by the dynamic display means. The dynamic display period setting means has a setting means, and the dynamic display period setting means has a first period in which a ball that has passed through the passing means can enter the second ball entry means, and a ball entry rather than the first period. A gaming machine X3 characterized in that at least a difficult second period can be set.

In the gaming machine X3, the gaming machine X4 is characterized in that the first period is longer than the second period.

<Characteristic Y group> (Advantageous ending of Fuzu)
Having a determination means for executing the determination and a period determination means for determining a period for notifying the determination result by the determination means, the notification result for showing the specific determination result is notified. Based on this, in a gaming machine that is in an advantageous state advantageous to the player, the gaming machine has a setting means for setting a setting period until the next determination by the determination means can be executed after the advantageous state is completed. The gaming machine Y1 is characterized in that a first set period and a second set period that is more advantageous to the player than the first set period are set at least.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-226399). By the way, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous due to a long period until the hit game or the like is executed, which is advantageous to the player, and the game gets tired early. It has been required that the player can enjoy the game even during the period until the winning game is executed, and that the problem of getting tired of the game at an early stage is suppressed. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the player from getting bored of the game at an early stage.

According to the gaming machine Y1, when an advantageous state is set, the player can be expected to set a second setting period, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. effective.

The gaming machine Y1 has a first flow path through which the game ball can pass in the advantageous state, and when the second setting period is set, the first flow path is connected to the first flow path. 1 The gaming machine Y2 is characterized in that the gaming ball is configured to flow down more easily than when the set period is set.

According to the gaming machine Y2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Y1, when the second setting period is set, the gaming ball can be easily flowed down to the first flow path, and the second setting period is set. It has the effect of making you expect more to be set.

In the gaming machine Y1 or Y2, during the second setting period, the determination result by the next determination means in the advantageous state becomes the specific determination result and the advantageous state is reached, so that the first flow path is reached. The gaming machine Y3 is characterized in that it is set for a period in which the privilege is easily given by passing the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine Y3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Y1 or Y2, the setting of the second setting period can increase the value for setting the next advantageous state, and the advantageous state can be set. It has the effect of increasing expectations for being set.

In any of the gaming machines Y1 to Y3, the specific ball entering means is arranged at a position where the gaming ball flowing down the first flow path is possible, and when the gaming ball enters, at least a part of the privilege is given. A state setting means for setting a first state in which a pachinko ball can enter the specific ball entry means and a second state in which the ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. The gaming machine Y4 is characterized in that the second setting period is configured by a period during which the gaming ball can reach the specific ball-entry means during the period in which the first state is set.

According to the gaming machine Y4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines Y1 to Y3, it is easy for the gaming ball to reach the specific ball-entry means by setting the second setting period. Therefore, there is an effect that the expectation that the second setting period is set can be increased.

In the gaming machine Y4, a ball-entry means that allows a game ball to enter the ball in the advantageous state, and a specific determination means that executes a specific determination based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball-entry means. , A period determining means for determining a variable period for varying the period until the specific ball-entry means is set to the first state, based on the execution of the specific determination by the specific determining means. The gaming machine Y5 is characterized in that the period determining means is configured to be able to determine a period that is advantageous to the player even when the second setting period is not set.

According to the gaming machine Y5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Y4, even when the second setting period is not set by the period determining means, the period advantageous to the player is determined, which is advantageous to the player. There is an effect that it is possible to increase the state in which the player becomes tired of the game at an early stage, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

<Characteristic β group derivation> (advantageous per regular interval map)
The determination means for executing the determination, the period determination means for determining the period for notifying the determination result by the determination means, and the notification result for indicating the specific determination result are notified to the player. An advantageous state setting means for setting an advantageous advantageous state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a first flow path through which the game ball can pass when the advantageous state is set by the advantageous state setting means. The first flow path has a high probability of being able to pass when the interval at which the advantageous state is set is the first interval. Game machine β1.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-226399). By the way, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that further enhances the interest of gaming. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine with an improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine β1, when the interval in which the advantageous state is set is the first interval, the probability that it will be possible to pass through the first flow path is set high, so that after the advantageous state is executed, the next It has the effect of improving the interest of the game by making people interested in the intervals at which they are executed.

In the gaming machine β1, the ball-entry means on which the game ball can enter, the first position for guiding the game ball to the ball-entry means, and the second position for making it difficult to enter the ball-entry means. 2. The gaming machine β2, which comprises a variable means that can be changed, and the advantageous state setting means is for changing the variable means to the first position as the advantageous state.

According to the gaming machine β2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine β2, an advantageous state is set by changing the variable means to the first position, so that there is an effect that it is easy to understand that the advantageous state is achieved. ..

In the gaming machine β2, the advantageous state setting means cancels the setting of the advantageous state based on the fact that a predetermined number of game balls have entered the ball entry means when the advantageous state is set. The game is characterized in that, when the setting of the advantageous state is canceled, the gaming ball rolling on the predetermined range of the variable means is guided to the first flow path. Machine β3.

According to the gaming machine β3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine β2, it is possible to make the gaming ball on the variable means interested even when the advantageous state is released, and the expectation is also made for the cancellation of the advantageous state. It has the effect of being able to have it.

In any of the gaming machines β1 to β3, a specific region in which the gaming ball guided to the first flow path can enter is arranged, and the first state in which the gaming ball can enter the specific region. The state-variable means, which is set to the second state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the ball-in state, and the above-mentioned before the flow-down period in which the game ball flows down the first flow path elapses. The first variable control that changes the state-variable means to the first state and then changes to the second state, and the state-variable means that changes to the first state during the period when the flow-down period elapses. The gaming machine β4, characterized by having a variable control means for executing at least one of the second variable control.

According to the gaming machine β4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines β1 to β3, it can be expected that the second variable control is executed by the variable control means, and the effect of improving the interest of the game can be improved. be.

<Characteristic Z group> (attacker below the normal train)
A means for displaying a ball-entry means on which a game ball can enter, a determination means capable of executing a determination based on the entry into the ball-entry means, and identification information for indicating a determination result of the determination means. Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying, and privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. , A variable means that can be changed to a first state that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means and a second state that makes it more difficult for the game ball to enter the ball than the first state, and specific conditions. In a gaming machine having a variable control means that changes the variable means from the second state to the first state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, the variable means is in the first state. A specific flow path that is guided by the variable means and is variable to the second state before entering the first ball entry means, so that the game ball that has flowed down can enter the ball, and a specific flow thereof. It has a specific area in which a game ball flowing down the road can enter, and the privileged game execution means sets an entry state in which the game ball can enter the specific area until the end condition is satisfied. The gaming machine Z1 characterized in that the privileged gaming is executed.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-226399). By the way, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that further enhances the interest of gaming. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine with an improved interest in gaming.

According to the game machine Z1, even a game ball that could not be entered into the ball entry means by the variable means can be expected to enter the specific flow path, and the game can be played. Has the effect of improving.

The gaming machine Z1 has the dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period when the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display period determining means. The period is such that at least an advantageous dynamic display period in which the game ball easily enters the specific area and an unfavorable display period in which it is difficult to enter the specific area are set. Characterized gaming machine Z2.

According to the gaming machine Z2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Z1, the player can be interested in the dynamic display period of the identification information, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine Z1 or Z2, the privileged game executing means starts executing the setting of the ball entry state in the specific area according to a certain rule based on the execution start of the privileged game. Game machine Z3.

According to the gaming machine Z3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Z1 or Z2, a specific area is set to the ball entry state according to a certain rule based on the start of execution of the privilege game, so that it is fair to the player. It has the effect of keeping the sex constant.

<Characteristic AA group> (Special figure 2 production based on fluctuations)
A means for displaying a ball-entry means on which a game ball can enter, a determination means capable of executing a determination based on the entry into the ball-entry means, and identification information for indicating a determination result of the determination means. A dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information, a dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period for which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and a specific determination result on the display means. In a gaming machine having a specific ball-entry means that allows a game ball to enter until the end condition is satisfied when the identification information for indicating is stopped and displayed, the ball enters the specific ball-entry means. It has a detecting means capable of detecting a gaming ball flowing down a possible flow path and an effect executing means capable of executing an effect during the dynamic display period, and the effect executing means is the detecting means. The gaming machine AA1 characterized in that at least a part of the above-mentioned effect is executed based on the detection result by.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, when the lottery result is notified, the player can have high expectations for the lottery result by configuring the lottery result to be notified to the player after the effect suggesting the lottery result is executed for a predetermined period. A game machine has been proposed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-226399). By the way, since the effect is executed based on the lottery result determined in advance, the effect tends to be constant and the game becomes monotonous, and there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a player from getting tired of playing a game at an early stage.

According to the gaming machine AA1, a gaming ball flowing down a flow path that allows entry into a specific entry means is detected by the detection means, and at least a part of the effect executed based on the detection result is executed. Therefore, not only the dynamic display of the identification information but also the effect being executed can be executed so as to be variable by the flow of the game ball, the interest of the game is improved, and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. It has the effect of suppressing defects.

In the game machine AA1, at least the first dynamic display period set so that the game ball can easily enter the specific ball entry means is set in the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means. The gaming machine AA2 is characterized in that the effect executing means executes a specific effect on the condition that the first dynamic display period is determined.

According to the gaming machine AA2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AA1, the specific effect is executed on the condition that the first dynamic display period that is advantageous to the player is determined, so that the specific effect is executed. Is executed, there is an effect that it can be expected that the first dynamic display period is determined.

In the gaming machine AA2, the effect executing means is the same as the specific effect when the detection means does not detect the game ball even when the first dynamic display period is determined. Is a gaming machine AA3 characterized by performing different effects.

According to the gaming machine AA3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AA2, even when the first dynamic display period is determined, if the gaming ball is not detected by the detection means in the specific detection period, a specific effect is produced. Is not executed, so there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the execution of the specific effect is unnecessarily performed and the degree of expectation for the specific effect is lowered.

In any of the gaming machines AA1 to AA3, the specific entry means is provided with a specific area through which the entered game ball can pass, and based on passing through the specific area, the privileged game is played. The gaming machine AA4, characterized in that the setting for execution is executed.

According to the gaming machine AA4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines AA1 to AA3, the gaming ball passes through the specific area and the privileged game is executed when the gaming ball enters the specific entry means. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine AA4, a variable means that can be changed into a first state that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means and a second state that makes it more difficult for the game ball to enter the ball than the first state. And a variable control means that changes the variable means from the second state to the first state until the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the establishment of the specific condition, and the flow path is the variable means. Is guided to the variable means by being in the first state, and is changed to the second state before entering the first ball entry means so that the flowing game ball can flow in. AA5 gaming machine characterized by being played.

According to the gaming machine AA5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AA4, it is expected that the gaming ball that did not enter the ball entering means will flow into the flow path by changing the variable means. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine AA5, the specific entry means is configured so that a gaming ball that has flowed down the flow path and entered can easily pass through the specific area. ..

According to the gaming machine AA6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AA5, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation of passing through a specific area by flowing down the flow path, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AB group> (Public train non-winning balls can win special trains)
The first discriminating means capable of entering the game ball, the first discriminating means capable of executing the first discrimination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entering means, and the first discriminating means thereof. The first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information for showing the discrimination result on the display means for a predetermined period, the first state in which the game ball can enter, and the first state thereof. When the first variable ball-entry means that can be changed to the second state in which it becomes difficult to enter the ball and the discrimination result by the first discrimination means are specific discrimination results, the first variable ball-entry means is referred to as the second. A first variable control means that changes from a state to the first state, a first taxiway that can guide a game ball to the first variable ball entry means, and a second taxiway that allows the game ball to enter. A second discrimination means capable of performing a second discrimination based on a ball entering means, a game ball entering the second ball entering means, and a second discrimination for showing the discrimination result by the second discrimination means. A second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying information on the display means for a predetermined period, and a first state provided in the first taxiway where a game ball can enter and a first state thereof. When the second variable ball-entry means that can be changed to the second state in which it becomes difficult to enter the ball and the discrimination result by the second discrimination means are specific discrimination results, the second variable ball-entry means is referred to as the second variable ball-entry means. A game having a second variable control means for varying from a state to the first state, wherein the first variable ball entry means is the first lead without entering the second variable ball entry means. A gaming machine AB1 characterized in that a gaming ball flowing down a road can enter.

Here, for a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a variable display is executed for a predetermined period based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening, and the gaming ball is won to the first symbol and the second starting winning opening. There is a second symbol whose variation display is executed for a predetermined period based on the above, and each symbol can be varied at the same time. In such a gaming machine, when a predetermined lottery result (for example, a small hit) is obtained as a lottery result of the second symbol, a small privilege game (for example, a small hit game) that can give a small privilege to the player is provided. Some are configured to be executed, and a gaming state in which the lottery of the second symbol is easily executed and a gaming state in which it is difficult to be executed can be set. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-39398).

In such a conventional gaming machine, by making the length of the fluctuation time of the second symbol different, it is possible to set a gaming state in which the lottery of the second symbol is easy to be executed and a gaming state in which the lottery of the second symbol is difficult to be executed, as a result. , Since it is configured to set a game state in which the small privilege game is easy to be executed and a game state in which it is difficult to be executed, for example, in a state where the lottery of the second symbol is easy to be performed, the small privilege game is given to the player. There was a problem that it was not possible to make detailed settings such as different amounts of benefits, and the interest in the game was reduced. The purpose is to solve the above-exemplified problems.

According to the gaming machine AB, the number of gaming balls reaching the first variable entry means can be changed according to the situation of the second variable entry means, so that the number of balls reaching the first variable entry means can be changed. 2 It is possible to make adjustments according to the control content of the variable means. Therefore, since the amount of privilege given to the player in the game in which the first variable ball entry means is opened can be adjusted, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AB1, a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state, and the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display means. The dynamic display period setting means includes a dynamic display period setting means capable of setting the dynamic display period from different periods, and the dynamic display period setting means sets the first gaming state by the gaming state setting means. In addition, the gaming machine AB2 is characterized in that it facilitates setting a longer dynamic display period than when the second gaming state is set.

According to the gaming machine AB2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AB1. That is, the dynamic display period of the second dynamic display means can be changed according to the set gaming state. Further, when the first gaming state is set, it becomes easier to set a longer dynamic display period than when the second gaming state is set. Therefore, since the period during which the ball cannot enter the second variable ball entry means can be lengthened, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to reach the first variable ball entry means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the game machine AB2, the second variable ball entry means has at least an opening through which the game ball can enter and an opening / closing lid member for opening / closing the opening, and the opening / closing lid member has the opening. In the state where the portion is closed, the upper surface of the opening / closing lid member is configured to form a part of the first taxiway, and the dynamic display period setting means is the first by the gaming state setting means. The gaming machine AB3 is characterized in that when a gaming state is set, it is easy to set a dynamic display period longer than the passing time for the gaming ball to pass over the upper surface of the opening / closing lid member.

According to the gaming machine AB3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AB2 described above, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first gaming state is set, the ball can be reliably reached by the first variable ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine AB2 or AB3 has a variable pattern setting means capable of setting a variable pattern that is variably controlled by the second variable control means from among a plurality of different variable patterns, and the variable pattern setting means is in the gaming state. When the first gaming state is set by the setting means, a variable pattern is set in which the period in which the second variable ball-entry means is in the second state is longer than when the second gaming state is set. A gaming machine AB4 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine AB4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines AB2 or AB3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first gaming state is set, a variable pattern is set in which the period in which the second variable ball entry means is in the second state is longer than when the second gaming state is set. 1 The gaming state can be made into a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AC group> (Suggests the result of the special figure 1 lottery based on the special figure 2 lottery during the change of the special figure 1)
The first discrimination means capable of executing the first discrimination, the first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information for showing the discrimination result by the first discrimination means, and the first identification information are The first display means to be displayed, the second discrimination means capable of executing the second discrimination, and the second dynamic display for dynamically displaying the second identification information for showing the discrimination result by the second discrimination means for a predetermined period. Based on the means, the second display means on which the second identification information is displayed, and the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result on the first display means, the first identification information is stopped and displayed. 1 As a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game and executing a second privilege game based on the fact that the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is stopped and displayed on the second display means. , The discrimination result of the first discrimination means is suggested based on the fact that the discrimination of the second discrimination means is executed while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. AC1 is a gaming machine characterized by having a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect for the purpose.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, a gaming machine capable of changing the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-12907). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine executes a variation effect dedicated to the first special symbol in order to suggest the lottery result of the first special symbol, and is dedicated to the second special symbol in order to suggest the lottery result of the second special symbol. Since it is configured to execute a variable effect, the game using one special symbol lottery and the game using the other special symbol lottery become independent, and both special symbol lottery are enthusiastically executed. There was a problem that the motivation to try was reduced. Further, when a plurality of special symbols are fluctuating at the same time, there is a problem that the lottery result of each special symbol is incomprehensible to the player. In addition, since an independent variable effect is executed for each special symbol, there is a problem that an effect without a sense of unity is executed. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved by providing the player with a suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result of each special symbol in an easy-to-understand manner.

According to the gaming machine AC1, the discrimination result of the first discrimination means is suggested based on the discrimination of the second discrimination means executed while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. Since the suggestion effect for the purpose is executed, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game so that the player may execute the discrimination of the second discriminating means in order to grasp the discriminating result of the first discriminating means in advance. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AC1, the suggestion effect executing means executes the suggestion effect when the discrimination result of the first discriminating means is the specific first discrimination result. ..

According to the gaming machine AC2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AC1. That is, since the suggestion effect is executed when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result, there is an effect that the effect of the suggestion effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine AC2, from the time when the first discrimination means determines that the specific first discrimination result is obtained until the first identification information for indicating the specific first discrimination result is stopped and displayed. The gaming machine AC3, wherein the gaming machine AC3 has a limiting means for limiting the discrimination result of the second discriminating means to be the specific second discriminating result.

According to the gaming machine AC3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AC2. That is, when the discrimination result of the first discrimination means is a specific first discrimination result, it is executed because the limiting means limits the discrimination by the second discrimination means to be the specific second discrimination result. It is possible to prevent a privilege game different from the content of the suggestion effect from being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the reliability of the suggestion effect can be increased and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine AC1 or AC3, the suggestion effect executing means is characterized in that the suggestion effect is executed by using the display mode of the second identification information.

According to the gaming machine AC4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AC1 to AC3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the suggestion effect is executed using the display mode of the second identification information, the player can check the discrimination result of the second discrimination means by simply looking at the display mode of the second identification information. It is possible to predict the discrimination result of the discrimination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player pays close attention to the second identification information and can improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC4, a tabulation means for totaling the discrimination results of the second discriminating means and a condition establishment discriminating means for discriminating the establishment of the execution condition based on the discriminant result aggregated by the tabulation means. The gaming machine AC5, wherein the suggestion effect executing means executes the suggestion effect when it is determined by the condition establishment determining means that the execution condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine AC5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AC1 to AC4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the discrimination results of the second discrimination means are totaled and the suggestion staging is executed when the totalized results satisfy the execution conditions, the player is enthusiastically played the game in order to satisfy the execution conditions. Can be made. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC5, the effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the suggestion effect executed by the suggestion effect execution means is provided, and the effect mode setting means is the first suggestion mode and the first suggestion mode thereof. The gaming machine AC6 is characterized in that it is possible to set a second suggestion mode that suggests the discrimination result of the first discriminating means more difficultly than the first suggestion mode.

According to the gaming machine AC6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AC1 to AC5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, an easy-to-understand suggestion effect and a difficult-to-understand suggestion effect are executed depending on the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the discriminant result of the first discriminating means from being easily grasped by one suggestion staging. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be enthusiastically performed so as to execute the suggestion effect a plurality of times.

The gaming machine AC6 has a number of times measuring means for measuring the number of times the suggestion effect is executed executed by the suggestion effect execution means, and the effect mode setting means executes the suggestion effect measured by the number of times measuring means. The gaming machine AC7 is characterized in that it is easier to set the first suggestion mode when the number of times is a specific number of times larger than the predetermined number of times.

According to the gaming machine AC7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AC6. That is, since the suggestion effect that is easy for the player to understand is executed as the number of times the suggestion effect is executed increases, there is an effect that the game can be enthusiastically performed so as to execute the suggestion effect a plurality of times.

<Characteristic BA group> (The greater the number of consecutive first advantageous states, the easier it is to set a more advantageous second advantageous state).
A discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result. As the gaming state after the privileged game is completed, the first gaming state, the second gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the third gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. A first game state setting means capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a game state, and a predetermined specific condition established in the second game state are satisfied. Based on the above, the second gaming state setting means for setting the gaming state to the third gaming state is provided, and the specific condition is set based on the execution of the privileged game during the first gaming state. The second gaming state set based on the execution of the privileged game during the second gaming state is more likely to be established than the second gaming state. The gaming machine BA1 characterized by being a thing.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning result, the game shifts to a winning state. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest of winning by differentiating the game values that can be acquired (for example). , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 25144417).

In addition, some of the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines are configured so that the gaming state after the hit state ends can be different depending on the hit type, and after the hit state ends. There are also some that are trying to improve the interest in pachinko. Further, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, a relatively advantageous gaming state is set after the hitting state is completed, and the relatively advantageous gaming state is continuously lost by a specific number of lottery. In some cases, there are some that move to a more favorable state.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the transition condition from the relatively advantageous gaming state to the more advantageous gaming state is fixed regardless of the situation at the time when the relatively advantageous gaming state is reached. There is a problem that it is difficult to improve the expectation of the player at the time when the gaming state is set to be favorable, and it is difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BA1, it is advantageous for the player based on the discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition and the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes a specific discrimination result. As the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game and the game state after the privilege game is completed, the first game state, the second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and the second game state thereof. In the first gaming state setting means capable of setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including at least a third gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state, and in the second gaming state. A second gaming state setting means for setting a gaming state to the third gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition is provided, and the specific condition is the same during the first gaming state. The second game state set based on the execution of the privilege game during the second game state, rather than the second game state set based on the execution of the privilege game. Is configured so that it is easy to hold.

As a result, when the second gaming state is reached, it is more advantageous than the first gaming state, and it becomes easier to shift to the third gaming state, so that the player's expectation for the third gaming state is improved. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BA1, the specific condition is a game after the end of the privilege game, as compared with the case where the second game state is set based on the execution of the privilege game during the first game state. The gaming machine BA2 is characterized in that the state is configured so that it is more likely to be established when the second gaming state is continuously set for a specific number of times or more.

According to the gaming machine BA2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BA1, the specific condition is a case where the second gaming state is set based on the execution of the privileged game during the first gaming state. Rather, it is configured so that the second gaming state is more likely to be established when the second gaming state is continuously set a specific number of times or more as the gaming state after the end of the privileged game. Even if the privileged game is executed without satisfying the specific condition in the above, the expectation for the third game state can be further improved. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machines BA1 or BA2, the second gaming state setting means is the second gaming state when the second gaming state is set based on the execution of the privileged game during the first gaming state. The third gaming state is set based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is different from the specific discrimination result continuously over a predetermined first number of times in the gaming state. In the second gaming state, when the second gaming state is continuously set a specific number of times or more as the gaming state after the end of the privilege game, the second gaming state setting means The third gaming state is set based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is different from the specific discrimination result for the second number of times less than the first number of times. The gaming machine BA3, which is characterized by being a pachinko machine.

According to the gaming machine BA3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BA1 or BA2, the second gaming state setting means is based on the execution of the privileged game during the first gaming state. When the state is set, the discriminant result of the discriminating means is different from the specific discriminant result continuously over the predetermined first number of times in the second gaming state. The third game state is set based on the above, and the second game state setting means sets the second game state continuously for a specific number of times or more as the game state after the end of the privilege game. In the second gaming state, the discriminant result of the discriminating means is different from the specific discriminant result continuously over the second number of times less than the first number of times. Based on the above, the third gaming state is set.

As a result, in the second gaming state, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the deviation discrimination result is expected to be continuous rather than the specific discrimination result, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In any of the gaming machines BA1 to BA3, an entry means capable of entering a game ball, a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the entry of the game ball into the entry means, and a preceding means. A variable means that can be changed to a first position where the game ball can enter the entry ball means and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, and a discrimination result of the discrimination means. Is a variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the fact that the second determination result is different from the specific determination result. The gaming machine BA4 is characterized in that the third gaming state is configured so that the variable gaming is easier to be executed than the second gaming state.

According to the gaming machine BA4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines BA1 to BA3, it is determined based on the entry means in which the gaming ball can enter and the entry means in which the gaming ball enters the entry means. It is possible to change to a privilege granting means for granting the privilege of the above, a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. The variable means is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discriminant means is different from the specific discriminant result. The variable game execution means for executing the variable game to be performed is provided, and the third game state is configured so that the variable game can be executed more easily than the second game state.

As a result, in the third game state, there are many opportunities for the game ball to enter the ball entry means, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BA4, the discriminating means discriminates based on the establishment of a first discriminating means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the first discriminating condition and a second discriminating condition different from the first discriminating condition. It is composed of at least a second discriminating means for executing the above, and the discriminating by the second discriminating means has a higher probability of being the second discriminating result than the discriminating by the first discriminating means. The gaming machine BA5 is configured such that the third gaming state is configured so that the second discriminating condition is more easily satisfied than other gaming states.

According to the gaming machine BA5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BA4, the discriminating means is different from the first discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the establishment of the first discriminating condition and the first discriminating condition. It is composed of at least a second discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition, and the discrimination by the second discrimination means is more than the discrimination by the first discrimination means. 2 It is configured so that the probability of a discrimination result is high, and the third gaming state is configured so that the second discrimination condition is more likely to be satisfied than other gaming states. Is.

This has the effect that in the third gaming state, the game can be performed by paying attention to the discrimination result of the second discriminating means.

In any of the gaming machines BA1 to the gaming machine BA5, the first entry means on which the gaming ball can enter, the second entry means different from the first entry means, and the first entry means. The first discriminating condition is provided with a third position in which the game ball can enter, a fourth position in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the third position, and a second variable means that can be changed. Is established based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means, and the second determination condition is based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means. The gaming machine BA6, which is characterized by being established.

According to the gaming machine BA6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines BA1 to BA5, a first entry means capable of entering a game ball and a second entry means different from the first entry means thereof. A second variable means that can be changed to a third position where the game ball can enter the first ball entry means and a fourth position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the third position. , And the first determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the pachinko ball has entered the first ball entry means, and the second determination condition is to the second ball entry means. It is established based on the entry of a game ball.

As a result, since the variable position of the second variable means can be focused on, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BA6, the second gaming state is configured so that the second variable means can be more easily changed to the third position than the first gaming state and the third gaming state. The gaming machine BA7 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine BA7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BA6, in the second gaming state, the second variable means is changed to a third position as compared with the first gaming state and the third gaming state. Since it is configured to be easy, there is an effect that the degree of advantage of the second gaming state can be improved.

In the gaming machine BA6 or BA7, the third is the discrimination result of the passing means through which the game ball can pass, the passing discriminating means for executing the discrimination based on the passing of the passing means by the gaming ball, and the passing discriminating means. A variable control means for varying the second variable means in a predetermined variable pattern based on the determination result is provided, and the passage determination means is used when the determination is executed in the second gaming state. , The third discrimination result is obtained with the first probability, and when the discrimination is executed in the first gaming state and the third gaming state, the third discrimination is performed with a second probability lower than the first probability. The gaming machine BA8 characterized by being a result.

According to the gaming machine BA8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BA6 or BA7, a passing means through which the gaming ball can pass, a passing determining means for executing discrimination based on the passing of the passing means by the gaming ball, and a passing determining means for performing the discrimination. Based on the fact that the discrimination result of the passage discrimination means is the third discrimination result, the second variable means is provided with a variable control means for varying the second variable means in a predetermined variable pattern, and the passage discrimination means is the first. 2 When the discrimination is executed in the gaming state, the third discrimination result is obtained with the first probability, and when the discrimination is executed in the first gaming state and the third gaming state, the first probability The third determination result is obtained with a low second probability.

As a result, the game can be performed by paying attention to the determination result of the passage determination means, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic BB group> (The result of dynamic display is suggested in the production for notifying at least the content different from the result)
A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed based on the first discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition and the discrimination result of the first discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result. Based on the establishment of the privilege game executing means, the first effect executing means for executing the first effect for showing the determination result of the first determination means, and the second determination condition different from the first determination condition. 2. When the first effect and the second effect are executed in an overlapping manner by executing the second effect, the second effect executing means is indicated by the first effect in the second effect. The gaming machine BB1 is configured to be able to execute a specific effect mode capable of suggesting a discrimination result of the first discrimination means.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There is something to perform a winning game. Further, among the conventional gaming machines, a gaming machine capable of changing the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-12907). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine executes a variation effect dedicated to the first special symbol in order to suggest the lottery result of the first special symbol, and is dedicated to the second special symbol in order to suggest the lottery result of the second special symbol. Since it is configured to execute a variable effect, the game using one special symbol lottery and the game using the other special symbol lottery become independent, and both special symbol lottery are enthusiastically executed. There was a problem that the motivation to try was reduced. Further, when a plurality of special symbols are fluctuating at the same time, there is a problem that the lottery result of each special symbol is incomprehensible to the player. In addition, since an independent variable effect is executed for each special symbol, there is a problem that the effect cannot be appropriately executed.

On the other hand, according to the game machine BB1, the first discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the establishment of the first discriminating condition and the discriminating result of the first discriminating means are based on the specific discriminant result. The privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player, the first effect execution means for executing the first effect for showing the determination result of the first determination means, and the first determination condition. Can execute a second discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of different second discrimination conditions and a second effect for showing the discrimination result of the second discrimination means in an overlapping manner with the first effect. The second effect executing means includes a second effect executing means, and the second effect executing means is the second effect when the first effect and the second effect are executed in an overlapping manner by executing the second effect. In the staging, a specific staging mode capable of suggesting the discriminating result of the first discriminating means indicated by the first staging is feasible.

As a result, not only the discrimination result of the second discriminating means but also the discrimination result of the first discriminating means can be suggested by the second staging, so that there is an effect that a more suitable staging mode can be realized.

In the gaming machine BB1, the second staging execution means is configured to be able to execute the specific staging mode in the second staging before the discriminating result of the first discriminating means is shown by the first staging. The gaming machine BB2, which is characterized by being a machine.

According to the gaming machine BB2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BB1, the second staging execution means is performed in the second staging before the discriminating result of the first discriminating means is shown by the first staging. Since the specific effect mode is configured to be feasible, the determination result of the first determination means can be confirmed by confirming the second effect without confirming the first effect to the end. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be improved.

The gaming machine BB1 or BB2 includes a first ball-entry means on which a game ball can enter and a second ball-entry means different from the first ball-entry means, and the first determination condition is the first. 1 It is established based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry means, and the second determination condition is established based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means. A gaming machine BB3 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine BB3, in addition to the effect of the game machine BB1 or BB2, a first ball entry means on which the game ball can enter and a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means are provided. The first determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the first ball entry means, and the second determination condition is the game to the second entry means. It is established based on the fact that the ball has entered.

As a result, the game can be performed by paying attention to the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the game machines BB1 to BB3, the variable ball entry means that can be varied into a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. A second method in which the discriminating result of the second discriminating means is different from that of the specific discriminating means and the privilege giving means that grants a predetermined privilege based on the ball entering the variable ball entering means. Based on the determination result, the variable ball-entry means includes a variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the second state is changed to the first state for a predetermined period, and the second effect. The execution means is configured to be able to suggest the specific effect mode in the second effect executed based on the determination result of the second determination means becoming the second determination result. A gaming machine BB4 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine BB4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BB1 to BB3, the first state in which the gaming ball can enter and the second state in which the gaming ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. The discriminant result of the second discriminating means is the variable ball-entry means that can be changed according to the state, the privilege-giving means that grants a predetermined privilege based on the ball entering the variable ball-entry means, and the second discriminating means. A variable game in which the variable ball-entry means executes a variable game in which the second state is changed to the first state for a predetermined period based on the second determination result different from the specific determination result. The second effect executing means includes the execution means, and the second effect executing means is the specific effect in the second effect executed based on the determination result of the second determination means being the second determination result. It is configured so that the aspect can be suggested.

This has the effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the discrimination result of the second discrimination means will be the second discrimination result.

In the gaming machine BB4, as the gaming state after the end of the privileged game, the first gaming state in which the discrimination of the first discriminating means is easily executed and the discrimination of the second discriminating means are easier to be executed than the first gaming state. A game based on a game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a second game state and a predetermined specific condition established in the first game state. A gaming machine BB5 comprising: a gaming state changing means for changing a state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state.

According to the gaming machine BB5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BB4, as the gaming state after the end of the privileged game, the first gaming state in which the determination of the first discriminating means is easily executed and the first gaming state thereof are higher than those in the first gaming state. A gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including at least a second gaming state in which discrimination of the second discriminating means is easily executed, and a predetermined game state in the first gaming state. A gaming state changing means for changing the gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on the establishment of the specific condition is provided.

As a result, in the first game state, the game can be performed with the expectation that a specific condition is satisfied, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine BB1 or BB2, a variable ball entry means that can be changed into a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state, and its variable A privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the ball entering the ball entering means is provided, and the second discriminating means means whether the gaming ball has entered the variable ball entering means. The second effect is to determine whether or not the ball is present, and is characterized in that the second effect is composed of an effect of outputting a predetermined sound based on the fact that the game ball has entered the variable ball entry means. The gaming machine BB6.

According to the gaming machine BB6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BB1 or BB2, the first state in which the gaming ball can enter and the second state in which the gaming ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. The second discriminating means includes a variable ball-entry means that can be changed and a privilege-giving means that grants a predetermined privilege based on the ball entering the variable-ball-entry means. It is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the ball means, and the second effect is an effect of outputting a predetermined sound based on the fact that the game ball has entered the variable ball entry means. It is composed of.

As a result, it is possible to perform an auditory effect by voice, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In any of the gaming machines BB1 to BB6, when the first effect mode and the first effect for showing the specific determination result rather than the first effect mode are executed in the specific effect mode. The gaming machine BB7 is characterized in that at least a second effect mode in which the ratio of execution by the second effect execution means is increased is included.

According to the game machine BB7, in any of the game machines BB1 to BB6, the specific effect mode includes the first effect mode and the first effect for showing the specific determination result rather than the first effect mode. Is included, at least a second effect mode in which the ratio of execution by the second effect execution means is increased when is executed is included, so that the second effect mode is executed in the second effect. You can expect more strongly. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BB7, the specific effect mode includes a third effect mode that can be executed by the second effect execution means only when the first effect for showing the specific determination result is executed. A gaming machine BB8 characterized by being included at least.

According to the gaming machine BB8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BB7, the second effect is performed only when the first effect for showing the specific determination result is executed in the specific effect mode. Since at least the third effect mode that can be executed by the execution means is included, the player can be more pleased when the third effect mode is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

A gaming machine characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines BB1 to BB8, the second effect is executed in a manner that is easier for the player to see than the first effect for at least a predetermined period. BB9.

According to the gaming machine BB9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BB1 to BB8, the second effect is executed in a manner that is easier for the player to see than the first effect for at least a predetermined period. Therefore, by confirming the second effect that is easy to visually recognize, both the discrimination result of the second discrimination means and the discrimination result of the first discrimination means can be confirmed. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be improved.

<Characteristic BC group> (Transfer directly to the advantageous state based on the establishment of specific conditions that are at least different from the jackpot in the disadvantaged state)
A discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, a privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result, and a game. A second gaming state setting means for setting a second gaming state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a specific setting condition at least different from the execution of the privileged game during the first gaming state disadvantageous to the player. The second gaming state, the gaming machine is characterized by comprising an acquired game executing means for executing an acquired game in which a player can acquire a predetermined privilege each time a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. BC1.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning result, the game shifts to a winning state. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest of winning by differentiating the game values that can be acquired (for example). , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 25144417).

In addition, some of the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines are configured so that the gaming state after the hit state ends can be different depending on the hit type, and after the hit state ends. There are also some that are trying to improve the interest in pachinko. Further, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, a relatively advantageous gaming state is set after the hitting state is completed, and the relatively advantageous gaming state is continuously lost by a specific number of lottery. In some cases, there are some that move to a more favorable state.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is difficult to shift to a more advantageous gaming state unless it is shifted to a relatively advantageous gaming state, so that the interest in the disadvantageous gaming state is improved. There was a problem that it was difficult to make it.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BC1, a discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the establishment of the discriminating condition and a privilege that is advantageous to the player based on the discriminating result of the discriminating means becoming a specific discriminant result. A second game that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a specific setting condition that is at least different from the execution of the privilege game between the privileged game executing means for executing the game and the first game state that is disadvantageous to the player. A second game state setting means for setting a state, and an acquired game execution means for executing an acquired game in which a player can acquire a predetermined privilege each time a predetermined specific condition is satisfied in the second game state. And.

As a result, in the disadvantageous first game state, the game can be performed with the expectation that a specific setting condition is satisfied, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BC1, the entry means through which the gaming ball can enter, the first position in which the gaming ball can enter into the entry means, and the gaming ball become more difficult to enter than the first position. The second position, a variable means that can be changed, and a privilege giving means that grants the predetermined privilege based on the ball entering the ball entering means, and the acquired game executing means Assuming that the specific condition is satisfied that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is different from the specific discrimination result, the variable means is used as the acquisition game for a predetermined period from the second position to the second position. The gaming machine BC2 characterized in that it is controlled so as to be variable to one position.

According to the gaming machine BC2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BC1, the entry means through which the gaming ball can enter, the first position where the gaming ball can enter into the entry means, and the first position thereof. A variable means that can be changed to a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the position, and a privilege granting means that grants the predetermined privilege based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means. The variable means as the acquired game, assuming that the specific condition is satisfied that the discriminant result of the discriminating means is a second discriminating result different from the specific discriminating result. Is controlled so as to be variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period.

As a result, in the second game state, the game can be performed by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the ball entry means, so that the effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved. There is.

The gaming machine BC2 is characterized in that, when the acquired game is executed at least in the second gaming state, the second gaming state is maintained even after the execution of the acquired game is completed. Game machine BC3.

According to the gaming machine BC3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BC2, when the acquired game is executed at least in the second gaming state, the second gaming state remains even after the execution of the acquired game is completed. Since it is maintained, the degree of advantage of the second gaming state can be further increased. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine BC2 or BC3 includes a first ball-entry means on which a game ball can enter and a second ball-entry means different from the first ball-entry means, and the determination condition is the first ball entry means. It is composed of at least a first determination condition that is established based on the entry of the game ball into the means and a second determination condition that is established based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. The discrimination executed based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition has a higher probability of being the second discrimination result than the discrimination executed based on the satisfaction of the first discrimination condition. In the first gaming state, when the discrimination is executed based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition, the discrimination result is less likely to be obtained than in the second gaming state. A gaming machine BC4 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine BC4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BC2 or BC3, a first entering means into which the gaming ball can enter and a second entering means different from the first entering means thereof are provided. The discrimination condition is based on the first discrimination condition that is established based on the ball entering the first ball entry means and the game ball entering the second ball entry means. It is composed of at least a second discriminant condition that is satisfied, and the discriminant executed based on the fulfillment of the second discriminant condition is more than the discriminant executed based on the fulfillment of the first discriminant condition. It is configured so that the probability of the second discrimination result is high, and the first gaming state is the second gaming state when the discrimination is executed based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition. It is configured so that the discrimination result is harder to obtain than the state.

As a result, the degree of advantage in the second gaming state can be further improved, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines BC1 to BC4, the second gaming state is characterized in that the same gaming state is maintained at least until the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes the specific discrimination result. The gaming machine BC5.

According to the gaming machine BC5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines BC1 to BC4, the second gaming state is the same game until at least the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes the specific discrimination result. Since the state is maintained, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel playability that is expected not to result in a specific determination result in the second gaming state.

In the gaming machine BC5, the gaming machine BC6 is characterized in that the second gaming state has a lower probability of producing the specific determination result than the first gaming state.

According to the gaming machine BC6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BC5, the probability that the second gaming state will result in the specific determination result is lower than that of the first gaming state, so that the degree of advantage in the second gaming state is low. There is an effect that can be further enhanced.

The gaming machine BC5 or BC6 includes an initialization means for initializing the settings of the gaming machine, and the second gaming state is configured by a gaming state set when the initialization is performed by the initialization means. The gaming machine BC7, which is characterized by being a machine.

According to the gaming machine BC7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BC5 or BC6, an initialization means for initializing the settings of the gaming machine is provided, and the second gaming state is initialized by the initialization means. It is composed of the game states that are set when the game is played.

As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an extremely special gaming property different from that of a general gaming machine, that is, the gaming state set by the initialization becomes advantageous.

In the gaming machine BC7, the acquired game is executed from the time when the second gaming state is set based on the initialization performed by the initialization means until the predetermined specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine BC8, which is provided with a limiting means for limiting the difficulty of being played.

According to the gaming machine BC8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BC7, a predetermined specific condition is set after the second gaming state is set based on the initialization performed by the initialization means. Since the limiting means for limiting the acquired game is difficult to be executed until it is established, it is possible to prevent it from becoming too advantageous at the time of initialization. Therefore, there is an effect that it becomes excessively advantageous for the player after the initialization, and it is possible to suppress the disadvantage to the hole.

In the gaming machine BC8, the entry means through which the gaming ball can enter, the first position in which the gaming ball can enter into the entry means, and the gaming ball become more difficult to enter than the first position. The second position, a variable means that can be changed, and a privilege giving means that grants the predetermined privilege based on the ball entering the ball entering means, and the acquired game executing means Assuming that the specific condition is satisfied that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is different from the specific discrimination result, the variable means is used as the acquisition game for a predetermined period from the second position to the second position. The limiting means is controlled so as to be variable to one position, and the limiting means has a period from the discrimination result of the discrimination means to the second discrimination result to the start of the acquired game. The gaming machine BC9, characterized in that it is controlled to be longer than when it is not restricted by the limiting means.

According to the gaming machine BC9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BC8, the entry means in which the gaming ball can enter, the first position in which the gaming ball can enter into the entry means, and the first position thereof. A variable means that can be changed to a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the position, and a privilege granting means that grants the predetermined privilege based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means. The variable means as the acquired game, assuming that the specific condition is satisfied that the discriminant result of the discriminating means is a second discriminating result different from the specific discriminating result. Is controlled so as to be variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period, and the limiting means is acquired after the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes the second discrimination result. The period until the game is started is controlled to be longer than when the restriction by the restriction means is not performed.

This has the effect of reducing the degree of advantage of the second gaming state after initialization.

<Characteristic BD group> (The degree of advantage differs between the normal state at the time of RBAM clearing and the normal state that is transferred at another opportunity)
A first state setting means that can set the gaming state to a predetermined first gaming state based on the initialization of the setting of the gaming machine, and a predetermined specific that is at least different from turning on the power to the gaming machine. Based on the establishment of the setting condition, the first game state is set by the second state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of game states including at least the first game state, and the first state setting means. Based on the setting, the specific element regarding the degree of advantage is set to be equal to or less than the predetermined specific degree of advantage, and the first game state is set by the second state setting means. The gaming machine BD1 comprising: a specific element setting means for setting an element to be higher than the specific degree of advantage.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning result, the game shifts to a winning state. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest of winning by differentiating the game values that can be acquired (for example). , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 25144417).

In addition, some of the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines are configured so that the gaming state after the hit state ends can be different depending on the hit type, and after the hit state ends. There are also some that are trying to improve the interest in pachinko. Further, in the conventional gaming machine, a novel gaming state in which a gaming state having a lower degree of advantage than the gaming state (so-called normal state) set when the setting of the gaming machine is initialized is provided. There are also sex ones.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, if the degree of advantage of the gaming state after initialization is increased in an attempt to realize novel game performance, the initialization becomes excessively advantageous to the player. Therefore, there is a risk that the pachinko machine will be difficult to initialize for the hall.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BD1, a first state setting means capable of setting the gaming state to a predetermined first gaming state based on the initialization of the setting of the gaming machine, and a power supply for the gaming machine. A second state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of game states including at least the first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific setting condition at least different from the input, and the first state setting means. Based on the fact that the first gaming state is set by the one state setting means, a specific element related to the degree of advantage is set to be equal to or less than a predetermined specific degree of advantage, and the first gaming state is set by the second state setting means. The specific element setting means for setting the specific element to be higher than the specific advantage degree based on the setting of the specific element is provided.

As a result, the game can be performed with the expectation that the first game state will be set by the second state setting means rather than the first state setting means, so that the player's interest in the game can be expressed. It has the effect of being able to do.

In the gaming machine BD1, the specific element setting means sets the specific element based on the fact that a predetermined specific setting condition is satisfied during the first gaming state set by the first state setting means. The gaming machine BD2, characterized in that it is set to be higher than the specific degree of advantage.

According to the gaming machine BD2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BD1, the specific element setting means has specific setting conditions predetermined during the first gaming state set by the first state setting means. Since the specific element is set to be higher than the specific advantage degree based on the establishment, the game can be played with the expectation that the specific setting condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine BD1 or BD2, the ball entry means on which the game ball can enter, the first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means, and the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. A variable means that can be changed to a second position, a privilege granting means that grants a predetermined privilege based on the ball entering the ball entering means, and a discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. And the variable game in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means and the discrimination result of the discrimination means. The gaming machine BD3 comprising a variable game executing means, wherein the specific element setting means changes the ease of executing the variable game as the specific element.

According to the gaming machine BD3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines BD1 or BD2, the entry means on which the gaming ball can enter, the first position on which the gaming ball can enter the entry means, and the first position thereof. A variable means that can be changed to a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, and a privilege grant that grants a predetermined privilege based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means. Based on the means, the discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes a specific discrimination result, the variable means has the second position to the second position for a predetermined period. A variable game executing means for executing a variable game that is variable to one position is provided, and the specific element setting means changes the ease of executing the variable game as the specific element.

As a result, the ease with which the variable game can be executed can be changed in the first game state, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BD3, the display means capable of displaying the identification information, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means to the display means, and the dynamic display means thereof. The specific element setting means includes the dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information, and the first game state is set by the first state setting means. Based on this, the dynamic display period determining means controls so that a period having a length of a predetermined first period or longer can be easily set, and the second state setting means sets the first gaming state. Based on this, the gaming machine BD4 is characterized in that it is controlled so that a period having a length shorter than that of the first period can be easily set.

According to the gaming machine BD4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BD3, a display means capable of displaying identification information and a dynamic display means for displaying the identification information indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means are dynamically displayed. The display means and the dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means are provided, and the specific element setting means is provided by the first state setting means. Based on the setting of the first gaming state, the dynamic display period determining means controls so that a period having a length of a predetermined first period or longer can be easily set, and the second state setting is performed. Based on the fact that the first gaming state is set by the means, it is controlled so that a period shorter than the first period can be easily set.

This has the effect that the degree of advantage can be changed more reliably in the first gaming state.

The gaming machine BD4 includes a first ball-entry means capable of entering a game ball and a second ball-entry means different from the first ball-entry means, and the determination condition is to the first ball-entry means. It is composed of at least a first discriminant condition that is satisfied based on the fact that the ball has entered the ball and a second discriminant condition that is established based on the fact that the ball has entered the second ball entry means. As for the discrimination means, the specific discrimination result is obtained when the discrimination is executed based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition than when the discrimination is executed based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition. The specific element setting means is configured to have a high probability, and the second determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the first gaming state is set by the first state setting means. As the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the control, a period having a length equal to or longer than the first period is controlled so as to be easily set, and the first game is performed by the second state setting means. Based on the state being set, a period shorter than the first period is set as the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the satisfaction of the second determination condition. The gaming machine BD5, which is characterized in that it is controlled so as to be easily operated.

According to the game machine BD5, in addition to the effect of the game machine BD4, a first ball entry means on which the game ball can enter and a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means are provided. The discrimination conditions include a first discrimination condition that is established based on entering the first ball entry means, and a second discrimination condition that is established based on entering the second ball entry means. When the discrimination is executed based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition, rather than when the discrimination is executed based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition. Is configured so that the probability of obtaining the specific determination result is higher, and the specific element setting means has set the first gaming state by the first state setting means. Based on this, it is controlled so that a period having a length of the first period or more can be easily set as the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the establishment of the second determination condition. As the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the establishment of the second determination condition based on the setting of the first gaming state by the second state setting means, the first. It is controlled so that a period shorter than one period can be easily set.

This has the effect that the degree of advantage can be made different by making the determination execution interval of the second determination means different.

In the gaming machine BD5, based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a predetermined second determination result, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player and the end of the privilege game. As a later gaming state, the specific element is set to be more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state in which the specific element is set to be equal to or lower than the specific advantage degree, and the specific element is set to be higher than the specific advantage degree. The gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including at least a second gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the second state setting means are the second. The gaming machine BD6 is characterized in that the first gaming state is set by assuming that the predetermined changing condition is satisfied while the gaming state is set and the specific setting condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine BD6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BD5, a privileged game advantageous to the player is executed based on the determination result of the discrimination means being a predetermined second determination result. As the privilege game execution means and the game state after the end of the privilege game, the specific element is more advantageous to the player than the first game state in which the specific element is set to be equal to or less than the specific advantage degree, and the specific element is A gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including at least a second gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first gaming state set higher than the specific advantage. The second state setting means sets the first gaming state by assuming that the predetermined changing condition is satisfied while the second gaming state is set as the specific setting condition is satisfied.

As a result, in the second gaming state, the game can be performed with the expectation that a predetermined change condition is satisfied, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BD6, the first gaming state is configured such that the probability that the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes the second discrimination result is lower than that of the second gaming state. The gaming machine BD7.

According to the gaming machine BD7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BD6, in the first gaming state, the probability that the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes the second discrimination result is lower than that of the second gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel game property that the first gaming state is advantageous when it is set by the second state setting means even though the discrimination result of the discriminating means is low. effective.

In the gaming machine BD6 or BD7, the specific element setting means moves in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the establishment of the second determination condition based on the setting of the second gaming state. The gaming machine BD8 is characterized in that the target display period is controlled so that a period having a length of the first period or more can be easily set.

According to the gaming machine BD8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BD6 or BD7, the specific element setting means is executed based on the establishment of the second determination condition based on the setting of the second gaming state. Since the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information is controlled so that a period having a length equal to or longer than the first period can be easily set, it is difficult to satisfy the second determination condition in the second gaming state. It has the effect of being able to.

<Characteristic BE group> (Perform a specific effect from the transition to the small hit RUSH until the start of the small hit fluctuation)
In the entry means where the game ball can enter, the first position where the game ball can enter into the entry means, and the second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. Based on the variable means that can be changed, the discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes a specific discrimination result, the variable means is the first for a predetermined period. In a gaming machine provided with a variable game executing means for executing a variable game that is variable from two positions to the first position, the first game state in which the variable game is difficult to be executed based on the establishment of a specific setting condition. A game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a second game state in which the variable game is more likely to be executed than the first game state, and a game state setting thereof. The first effect executing means for executing the first effect based on the setting of the second game state by the means, and the discriminating means after the first effect is executed by the first effect executing means. The gaming machine BE1 is provided with a second effect executing means for executing a second effect having an effect mode different from that of the first effect, based on the determination result being the specific determination result.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, a variable display of symbols is performed on a display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a jackpot game advantageous to the player is given. Further, on the display device, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed in addition to the design, and the entertainment of the game is improved by executing a wide variety of entertainment effects (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886). Gazette).

In addition, some of the conventional gaming machines include an effect mode (preparation effect mode) indicating that a situation advantageous to the player is near in a predetermined gaming state, and a player during execution of the preparation effect mode. There are also things that can be performed as an advantageous situation effect that indicates that the situation has become advantageous when the situation becomes advantageous to the player.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, even if the preparatory staging mode is executed, the player only wants the advantageous situation staging to be executed as soon as possible, and the execution period of the preparatory staging mode becomes long. There was a problem that there was a risk of spoiling the interest of the player.

On the other hand, according to the game machine BE1, the ball-entry means on which the game ball can enter, the first position where the game ball can enter the ball-entry means, and the game ball from the first position. Based on the fact that the variable means that can be changed to the second position that makes it difficult to enter the ball, the discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the discrimination result of the discrimination means become a specific discrimination result. The variable means is provided with a variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period, and is based on the establishment of a specific setting condition. One game state is set from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state in which the variable game is difficult to be executed and a second game state in which the variable game is more likely to be executed than the first game state. The game state setting means to be performed, the first effect executing means for executing the first effect based on the setting of the second game state by the game state setting means, and the first effect execution means by the first effect executing means. Is executed, the second effect executing means for executing the second effect of the effect mode different from the first effect based on the determination result of the determination means becoming the specific determination result, and To prepare.

This has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.

In the gaming machine BE1, a privilege game advantageous to the player is provided based on the display means capable of displaying the identification information and the discrimination result of the discrimination means having a second discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result. The privilege game execution means to be executed and the dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means are provided, and the discrimination conditions are the first discrimination condition and the first discrimination. The dynamic display means is composed of at least a second discrimination condition different from the condition, and the dynamic display means dynamically displays the identification information based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition and the second discrimination condition. It is configured so that the dynamic display of the identification information based on the establishment of the above can be performed in duplicate, and the gaming machine has the first determination condition and the second determination condition. When the second discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination based on the satisfaction of one of the discrimination conditions, the other discrimination is performed at least during the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the second discrimination result. A game characterized by comprising a discrimination result control means for controlling discrimination to be performed based on the condition that a condition is satisfied so that the discrimination result is different from both the specific discrimination result and the second discrimination result. Machine BE2.

According to the gaming machine BE2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BE1, the discrimination result of the display means capable of displaying the identification information and the discrimination means is different from the specific discrimination result. Based on this, a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player and a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means are provided, and the discrimination condition is , The first discrimination condition and the second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition are at least configured, and the dynamic display means is the identification information based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition. The dynamic display of the above and the dynamic display of the identification information based on the establishment of the second determination condition can be performed in duplicate, and the gaming machine is configured to perform the first determination. Dynamic display of the identification information to show at least the second discrimination result when the second discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination based on the establishment of one of the condition and the second discrimination condition. During the dynamic display period in, the discrimination is executed based on the fact that the other discrimination condition is satisfied, and the discrimination is controlled so that the discrimination result is different from both the specific discrimination result and the second discrimination result. A result control means is provided.

This has the effect of suppressing the duplication of execution of the privilege game between the determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition and the determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition.

In the gaming machine BE2, the second gaming state is configured so that discrimination based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition is easier to be executed than the first gaming state, and the second discrimination condition is The discrimination executed based on the establishment of the above is characterized in that it is configured to be one of the specific discrimination result, the second discrimination result, and the deviation discrimination result. Game machine BE3.

According to the gaming machine BE3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BE2, the second gaming state is configured so that the discrimination based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition is more easily executed than the first gaming state. The discrimination executed based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition is one of the specific discrimination result, the second discrimination result, and the deviation discrimination result. It is configured as follows.

This has the effect that it can be expected that a specific determination result will be obtained in the second gaming state.

The gaming machine BE3 is provided with a gaming state changing means for changing the gaming state to the second gaming state based on the establishment of a specific condition at least different from the execution of the privileged game in the first gaming state. The gaming machine BE4 featuring.

According to the gaming machine BE4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BE3, the gaming state is changed to the second gaming state based on the establishment of a specific condition at least different from the execution of the privileged game in the first gaming state. Since the game state changing means for changing the state is provided, it is possible to play the game in the expectation that a specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BE4, the gaming state changing means does not execute the privileged game between the time when the first gaming state is set and the time when the determination by the determining means a predetermined number of times is executed. In this case, the gaming machine BE5 is characterized in that the gaming state is changed to the second gaming state.

According to the gaming machine BE5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BE4, the gaming state changing means is executed by the discriminating means a predetermined number of times after the first gaming state is set. If the privileged game is not executed in the meantime, the gaming state is changed to the second gaming state. Therefore, in the first gaming state, the game is played with the expectation that the privileged game will not be executed. It has the effect of realizing playability.

In the gaming machine BE5, the first gaming state is configured so that when the discrimination by the discriminating means is executed, the second discriminating result is obtained with the first probability, and the second gaming state is The second discrimination result is obtained with a second probability lower than the first probability when the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed, and the gaming state changing means is the first. When the privilege game is not executed between the time when the game state is set and the time when the determination by the determination means is executed a predetermined number of times, the second determination result is determined by the determination means. The gaming machine BE6 is characterized in that the gaming state is changed to the second gaming state by changing the probability of becoming from the first probability to the second probability.

According to the gaming machine BE6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BE5, the first gaming state is configured to have the second discrimination result with the first probability when the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed. The second gaming state is configured so that when the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed, the second discrimination result is obtained with a second probability lower than the first probability. , The game state changing means is a case where the privilege game is not executed between the time when the first game state is set and the time when the determination by the determination means a predetermined number of times is executed. The gaming state is changed to the second gaming state by changing the probability of the second discrimination result from the first probability to the second probability by the discrimination by the discrimination means.

As a result, it is possible to realize a novel playability that the lower the probability of the second discrimination result is, the more advantageous it is, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines BE1 to BE6, the gaming state is set to the second gaming state based on the initialization means for initializing the settings of the gaming machine and the initialization executed by the initialization means. In the second gaming state set by the initialization setting means and the initialization setting means, the variable game is less likely to be executed than in the second gaming state set by the gaming state setting means. The gaming machine BE7, characterized in that it is provided with a limiting means for limiting to.

According to the gaming machine BE7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines BE1 to BE6, the initialization means for initializing the settings of the gaming machine and the initialization means executed by the initialization means. , From the second gaming state set by the gaming state setting means in the initialization setting means for setting the gaming state to the second gaming state and the second gaming state set by the initialization setting means. Also provided with limiting means for limiting the variable game so that it is difficult to perform.

As a result, there is an effect that extremely special and novel game playability can be realized, in which the same gaming state as the state after initialization can be advantageous while suppressing the advantage after initialization too much.

<Characteristic BF group> (Multiple small hit RUSH states with different degrees of advantage)
In the entry means where the game ball can enter, the first position where the game ball can enter into the entry means, and the second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. A variable means that can be changed, a privilege giving means that grants a predetermined privilege based on the ball entering the ball entering means, a discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a discrimination means thereof. The discrimination result of the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes the first discrimination result, and the discrimination result of the discrimination means are different from the first discrimination result. Based on the result of the second determination, the variable game executing means for executing the variable game in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period, and the predetermined setting conditions are satisfied. In a plurality of states including a first state, a second state in which the variable game is more likely to be executed than the first state, and a third state which is more advantageous to the player than the second state. The gaming machine BF1 is provided with a state setting means capable of setting the state of 1 to 1.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning result, the game shifts to a winning state. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest of winning by differentiating the game values that can be acquired (for example). , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 25144417).

In addition, some of the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines are configured so that the gaming state after the hit state ends can be different depending on the hit type, and after the hit state ends. There are also some that are trying to improve the interest in pachinko. Further, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, as an advantageous state, a so-called small hit game is easily executed, and a state in which the game value can be acquired even if the hit state is not reached is installed. As a result, there are some that are trying to further improve the interest.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, if the small hit game is easily executed, the subsequent game becomes monotonous and simply continues to acquire the game value. There was a problem that it became difficult to improve the interest of the person.

On the other hand, according to the game machine BF1, the ball entry means in which the game ball can enter, the first position in which the game ball can enter the ball entry means, and the game ball from the first position. A variable means that can be changed to a second position where it is difficult to enter the ball, a privilege granting means that grants a predetermined privilege based on the ball entering the ball entering means, and a determination condition are satisfied. Discrimination between the discriminating means for executing the discrimination based on the discriminating means, the privileged game executing means for executing the privileged game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discriminating means becoming the first discriminating result, and the discriminating means. Based on the fact that the result is a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result, the variable means is variable to execute a variable game in which the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period. Based on the game execution means and the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, the first state, the second state in which the variable game is more easily executed than the first state, and the second state which is more advantageous to the player than the second state. It is provided with a state setting means capable of setting one state from a plurality of states including three states.

As a result, the game can be performed with the expectation that the second state or the third state will be reached, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BF1, the state at the time when the second determination result is obtained is at least maintained even after the end of the variable game executed based on the second determination result. The gaming machine BF2 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine BF2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BF1, the variable game executed based on the fact that the state at the time when the second discrimination result is obtained becomes the second discrimination result. Since it is maintained at least after the end of, the variable game can be executed a plurality of times in the second state. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of advantage of the second state can be improved.

In the gaming machine BF1 or BF2, the third state is a state in which the variable game is more likely to be executed than the second state.

According to the gaming machine BF3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BF1 or BF2, the variable game is more likely to be executed than the second state, so that the degree of advantage of the third state can be further improved. effective.

In the gaming machine BF3, the discriminating means discriminates based on the establishment of a first discriminating means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the first discriminating condition and a second discriminating condition different from the first discriminating condition. It is composed of at least a second discriminating means for executing the above, and the second state is such that the first discriminating condition is more likely to be satisfied than the second discriminating condition. In the third state, the second discrimination condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first discrimination condition, and the discrimination by the second discrimination means is more likely than the discrimination by the first discrimination means. However, the gaming machine BF4 is configured so that the probability of the second determination result being high is high.

According to the gaming machine BF4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BF3, the discriminating means is different from the first discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the establishment of the first discriminating condition and the first discriminating condition. It is composed of at least a second discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition, and the second state is the first discrimination condition rather than the second discrimination condition. Is more likely to be established, and the third state is such that the second discrimination condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first discrimination condition, and is more likely to be satisfied than the discrimination by the first discrimination means. Also, the discrimination by the second discrimination means is configured so that the probability of the second discrimination result is higher.

This has the effect that the game can be played with a stronger expectation that the second determination condition will be satisfied.

In any of the gaming machines BF1 to BF4, the state setting means sets one of the plurality of states as the gaming state after the execution of the privileged game by the privileged game executing means is completed. It is possible that the probability of the specific determination result in the second state is higher than the probability of the specific determination result in the third state. The featured gaming machine BF5.

According to the gaming machine BF5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BF1 to BF4, the state setting means is a plurality of gaming states after the execution of the privileged game by the privileged game executing means is completed. It is possible to set one state from the states, and the probability that the specific discrimination result will be obtained in the second state is higher than the probability that the specific discrimination result will be obtained in the third state. It is configured as follows.

As a result, since the probability that the specific determination result is obtained in the third state is lower, the advantageous third state can be configured so as to be easy to continue for a longer time. Therefore, when the third state is set, there is an effect that the player can have a greater sense of satisfaction.

In the game machine BF5, a first ball-entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball-entry means different from the first ball-entry means, and a game ball can enter the first ball-entry means. A third position, a fourth position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the third position, and a second variable means that can be changed, and the discriminating means is the first ball entry means. Alternatively, the determination is executed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means, and the second state and the third state are the second variable rather than the first state. The gaming machine BF6 is characterized in that the means is configured so as not to be variable to the third position.

According to the gaming machine BF6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BF5, a first entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second entry means different from the first entry means, and the first entry means described above. A second variable means that can be changed to a third position where the game ball can enter the ball means, a fourth position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the third position, and the above-mentioned The discriminating means executes discrimination based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means, and the second state and the third state are The second variable means is configured to be less likely to be variable to the third position than in the first state.

This has the effect of realizing a novel playability in which a state in which the second variable means is difficult to change is more advantageous than a state in which the second variable means is easily changed to the third position.

In the gaming machine BF4, as the gaming state after the execution of the privileged game is completed, from among a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state. The game state setting means for setting the game state of 1 is provided, and the state setting means sets the first state based on the setting of the first game state, and the second game state is set. The gaming machine BF7 is characterized in that one of the second state and the third state is set based on the above.

According to the gaming machine BF7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BF4, the gaming state after the execution of the privileged game is completed includes a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state. The game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of game states including at least, is provided, and the state setting means sets the first state based on the setting of the first game state. Then, based on the setting of the second gaming state, one of the second state and the third state is set.

As a result, as the second gaming state, a second gaming state in which the second state is set and a second gaming state in which the third state is set can be provided. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel game property that the degree of advantage is variable even though the game state is the same.

<Characteristic BG group> (The degree of advantage can be changed by subtracting the number of time reductions during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation)
Discrimination between a discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition and a privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result. A predetermined first in a gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying information and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means in the display means. Based on the fact that the first gaming state setting means for setting the first gaming state and the second setting condition predetermined in the first gaming state are satisfied, the above-mentioned setting condition is satisfied. A second gaming state setting means for setting a second gaming state having a different degree of advantage from the first gaming state is provided, and the second setting condition is the movement of the identification information for showing the specific determination result. The gaming machine BG1 characterized in that it can be established at least during the execution of the target display.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning result, the game shifts to a winning state. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest of winning by differentiating the game values that can be acquired (for example). , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 25144417).

In addition, some of the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines are configured so that the gaming state after the hit state ends can be different depending on the hit type, and after the hit state ends. There are also some that are trying to improve the interest in pachinko.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, even if it is set to an advantageous gaming state, it is advantageous because there is a possibility that the advantageous state may be changed to the disadvantageous state by winning the winning. There was a problem that it was difficult to improve the interest of the player when it was a hit in the state.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BG1, a discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the establishment of the discriminating condition and a privilege that is advantageous to the player based on the discriminating result of the discriminating means becoming a specific discriminant result. It is provided with a privilege game executing means for executing a game, a display means capable of displaying identification information, and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means in the display means. The first gaming state setting means for setting the first gaming state and the second predetermined gaming state in the first gaming state based on the establishment of the first predetermined setting condition. A second gaming state setting means for setting a second gaming state having a different degree of advantage from the first gaming state based on the establishment of the setting condition is provided, and the second setting condition is the specific It can be at least established during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the determination result.

As a result, even during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information for showing a specific determination result, the game can be performed with the expectation that the second setting condition is satisfied, so that the player's game can be played. It has the effect of improving the interest.

In the gaming machine BG1, the discriminating means discriminates based on the establishment of a first discriminating means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the first discriminating condition and a second discriminating condition different from the first discriminating condition. The dynamic display means dynamically displays the first identification information for showing the discrimination result of the first discrimination means. It is composed of at least a target display means and a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for showing the discrimination result of the second discrimination means, and is the second setting condition. Is executed by the second discriminant means while the first dynamic display means is dynamically displaying the identification information to indicate the specific discriminant result in the first gaming state. The gaming machine BG2, which is characterized by being configured under conditions that can be established based on the facts.

According to the gaming machine BG2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BG1, the discriminating means is different from the first discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the establishment of the first discriminating condition and the first discriminating condition. The dynamic display means is composed of at least a second discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the establishment of the second discriminating condition, and the dynamic display means is a first for showing the discriminating result of the first discriminating means. 1 It is composed of at least a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information and a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for showing the discrimination result of the second discrimination means. The second setting condition is that while the first dynamic display means is executing the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the specific determination result in the first gaming state. , It is configured under the conditions that can be satisfied based on the execution of the discrimination by the second discrimination means.

As a result, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the discrimination by the second discrimination means is positively executed while the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the specific discrimination result is executed. It has the effect of improving the interest in the game.

In the gaming machine BG2, the second setting condition is that after the first gaming state is set and before the privileged game is executed, a predetermined number of determinations are made by the determining means. The gaming machine BG3 characterized in that it is established based on what has been done.

According to the gaming machine BG3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BG2, the second setting condition is predetermined after the first gaming state is set and before the privilege game is executed. Since it is established based on the execution of the discrimination by the discrimination means of the specific number of times, the discrimination by the discrimination means of the specific number of times is performed while the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the specific discrimination result is executed. It has the effect of realizing a novel playability that aims to end.

In the gaming machine BG2 or BG3, the first dynamic display means has a length of a predetermined specific period or longer as a dynamic display of the identification information for showing the specific determination result in the first gaming state. The dynamic display of the identification information during the dynamic display period of the above is executed, and the second dynamic display means is shorter than the specific period as the dynamic display of the identification information in the first gaming state. The gaming machine BG4, characterized in that the dynamic display of the identification information during the dynamic display period of the length is executed.

According to the gaming machine BG4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BG2 or BG3, the first dynamic display means is used as a dynamic display of the identification information for showing the specific determination result in the first gaming state. , The dynamic display of the identification information for a dynamic display period having a length of a predetermined specific period or longer is executed, and the second dynamic display means is the identification information in the first gaming state. As the dynamic display, the dynamic display of the identification information for a dynamic display period shorter than the specific period is executed.

As a result, in the first gaming state, when the dynamic display of the identification information for showing a specific determination result is executed by the first dynamic display means, the dynamic display by the second dynamic display means is further performed. Since it can be executed in large numbers, there is an effect that it can be easily set in the second gaming state.

In any of the game machines BG1 to BG4, the ball entry means on which the game ball can enter, the first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means, and the game ball from the first position. Discrimination between the variable means that can be changed to the second position that makes it difficult to enter the ball, the privilege giving means that grants a predetermined privilege based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means, and the discrimination means. A variable game execution in which the variable means executes a variable game in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the result that the second determination result is different from the specific determination result. The gaming machine BG5 comprising means and means, wherein the second gaming state is one in which the variable gaming is more likely to be executed than the first gaming state.

According to the gaming machine BG5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines BG1 to BG4, a ball entry means capable of entering the ball, a first position in which the gaming ball can enter the ball entry means, and the first position thereof. A variable means that can be changed to a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, and a privilege grant that grants a predetermined privilege based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means. Based on the fact that the discrimination result of the means and the discrimination means is a second discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result, the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period. A variable game executing means for executing a variable game is provided, and the second game state is easier to execute the variable game than the first game state.

As a result, it is possible to form a state in which the variable game is easily executed during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating a specific determination result, so that the variable game can be played until the privilege game is executed. It has the effect of being entertaining.

In any of the gaming machines BG1 to BG5, as a gaming state after the end of the privileged game, one of a plurality of gaming states including at least the first gaming state and the second gaming state is set. The post-game setting means is provided, and when the privilege game is executed in the second game state, the privilege game is executed by the privilege post-game setting means, as compared with the case where the privilege game is executed in the first game state. The gaming machine BG6 is configured so that the second gaming state can be easily set.

According to the gaming machine BG6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BG1 to BG5, a plurality of gaming states including at least the first gaming state and the second gaming state as the gaming state after the end of the privileged game. When the privileged game is executed in the second gaming state, rather than when the privileged game is executed in the first gaming state, provided with the privileged game post-setting means for setting any of the gaming states. It is configured so that the second gaming state can be easily set by the privileged gaming post-setting means.

As a result, by shifting to the second game state before the privilege game is executed, the second game state can be easily set even after the end of the privilege game, so that the identification information for showing a specific determination result is shown. There is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel playability in which the determination by the second discrimination means is executed more positively during the execution of the dynamic display of.

<Concept of the invention using the projection plate member 620 of the projection unit 600 as an example>
It is provided with a light transmitting member formed from a light transmitting material in a plate shape and having a reflecting portion, and a light irradiating means for irradiating the side end surface of the light transmitting member with light, and is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. In a gaming machine in which the light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member, the ratio of the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member to the light emitted from the light irradiating means is high. The gaming machine A1 is provided with an emission increasing means for increasing emission, and the emission increasing means is arranged outside the display area.

Here, a light transmitting member formed from a light transmitting material in a plate shape and having a reflecting portion, and a light irradiating means for irradiating the side end surface of the light transmitting member with light are provided from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. A gaming machine is known in which incident light is reflected by a reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of a light transmitting member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-29735). According to this type of gaming machine, for example, by disposing a light transmitting member on the front side of the liquid crystal display device in the game area, the player can display the liquid crystal display device via the light transmitting member in a normal state. On the other hand, when a predetermined gaming state is formed, the light emitted from the light irradiating means is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member, and the light traveling inside the light transmitting member is reflected by the reflecting portion. Then, it is emitted from the front of the light transmitting member. In this case, a plurality of groups composed of a plurality of reflecting surfaces are arranged in the reflecting portion, and each group forms a pattern or a pattern. Therefore, the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member can be recognized by the player as a pattern or a pattern. That is, along with the display of the liquid crystal display device, a pattern or a pattern can be made to appear (display) on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device.

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member is weak. Therefore, it becomes difficult to clearly show (display) a pattern or a pattern. In this case, if the output of the light irradiation means is increased, not only the cost and power consumption are increased, but also the amount of heat generated is increased, which causes a problem that heat affects other members and devices.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, since the emission increasing means for increasing the ratio of the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member to the light emitted from the light irradiating means is provided, the light reflected by the reflecting portion is provided. The light emitted from the front of the transmissive member can be strengthened. As a result, patterns and patterns can be clearly highlighted (displayed). Further, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the light irradiation means, the calorific value can be reduced and the influence of heat on other members and devices can be suppressed. Further, since the emission increasing means is arranged outside the display area, it can be difficult for the player to see it, and it is possible to suppress deterioration of the appearance by that amount.

The position of forming the reflective portion of the light transmitting member may be, for example, the back surface of the light transmitting member or the inside of the light transmitting member.

In the gaming machine A1, the emission increasing means includes an outer edge member arranged along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine A2, since the emission increasing means includes an outer edge member arranged along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member, the light emitting means irradiates the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Not only the light that reaches directly but also the light that is emitted from the light irradiating means and reflected by the outer edge member can be incidented from the side end surface of the light transmitting member, and the light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member by that amount can be incident. The light collection efficiency can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the light that reaches the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member among the light emitted from the light irradiating means, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened. , Patterns and patterns can be clearly highlighted (displayed). Further, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the light irradiation means, the calorific value can be reduced and the influence of heat on other members and devices can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, when the emission increasing means includes the outer edge member arranged along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member, the other device in the game area emits light. Can prevent the outer edge member from blocking the light of the other device and being incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, when the light irradiating means is turned off (when the light is not incident on the light transmitting member and the pattern or pattern is not displayed on the front of the light transmitting member), the light from another device is incident on the light transmitting member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pattern or pattern from being displayed on the front of the light transmitting member.

In the gaming machine A2, the gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the outer edge member is arranged on each of the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect of the game machine A2, the outer edge members are arranged on the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member, respectively. The light that is not directly incident on the side end surface and that deviates to the front side of the light transmitting member and the light that deviates to the back side are reflected by the front outer edge member and the back outer edge member, respectively, and incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. be able to. Therefore, the light condensing efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be further improved by that amount.

Further, by providing the outer edge member on each of the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member in this way, even if the light emitted by another device in the gaming area arrives from either the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member. Since it can be blocked by each of the front outer edge member and the back outer edge member, it is possible to suppress the incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, when the light irradiating means is turned off (when the light is not incident on the light transmitting member and the pattern or pattern is not displayed on the front of the light transmitting member), the light from another device is incident on the light transmitting member. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably suppress the display of patterns and patterns on the front surface of the light transmitting member.

In the gaming machine A2 or A3, the gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the outer edge member is arranged so as to project outward from the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of the game machine A2 or A3, the outer edge member is arranged so as to project outward from the side end surface of the light transmitting member, so that the light emitted from the light irradiating means can be emitted. , It is possible to reflect the light at the overhanging portion of the outer edge member (the surface connected to the side end surface of the light transmitting member) so that the light can be easily incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the light condensing efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be further improved by that amount.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the outer edge member is formed of a material having a refractive index smaller than that of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine A5, in any of the effects of the game machines A2 to A4, the outer edge member is formed of a material having a refractive index smaller than that of the light transmitting member, and thus is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Light can be easily reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reached to the reflecting portion, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened to make the pattern or pattern clear. It can be highlighted (displayed).

That is, for example, when the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are formed of a material having the same refractive index, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member is less likely to be reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. It is easily transmitted to the outer edge member. The light transmitted to the outer edge member is totally reflected (or partially reflected) on the outer surface (boundary with air) of the outer edge portion and then returned to the light transmitting member, but the light returned from the outer edge member to the light transmitting member. Includes not only those traveling in the direction toward the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member but also those traveling in the direction toward the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the light that reaches the reflecting portion is reduced. On the other hand, like the game machine A4, by forming the outer edge member from a material having a refractive index smaller than that of the light transmitting member, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be collected from the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. Since it can be easily reflected (or can be totally reflected) at the boundary with and, it is possible to secure the light that reaches the reflecting portion.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A5, the gaming machine A6 is characterized in that the outer edge member is arranged in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine A6, in the effect of any of the game machines A2 to A5, the outer edge member is arranged in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member. Light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reflected by the front surface or the back surface (boundary with air) of the light transmitting member. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reached to the reflecting portion, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened to make the pattern or pattern clear. It can be highlighted (displayed).

That is, for example, when the refractive index of the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are the same or the difference in the refractive index is relatively small, if the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are in close contact with each other, the side end surface of the light transmitting member The incident light is less likely to be reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member, and is easily transmitted to the outer edge member. The light transmitted to the outer edge member is totally reflected (or partially reflected) on the outer surface (boundary with air) of the outer edge portion and then returned to the light transmitting member, but the light returned from the outer edge member to the light transmitting member. Includes not only those traveling in the direction toward the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member but also those traveling in the direction toward the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the light that reaches the reflecting portion is reduced. On the other hand, like the game machine A5, by arranging the outer edge member in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member, the light is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Since the light can be easily reflected (or can be totally reflected) on the front surface or the back surface (boundary with air) of the light transmitting member, the light reaching the reflecting portion can be secured.

In any of the game machines A2 to A6, a rotation mechanism for rotatably supporting the light transmitting member and applying a rotational driving force to the light transmitting member is provided, and the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape. , A curved rack gear is engraved along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface or the inner peripheral surface of the annular shape, and the rotation mechanism rotationally drives a pinion gear meshed with the curved rack gear of the outer edge member and the pinion gear. A game machine A7 characterized by being provided with a driving means.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A2 to A6, the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape and along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface or the inner peripheral surface of the annular shape. A curved rack gear is engraved, and the rotation mechanism includes a pinion gear meshed with the curved rack gear of the outer edge member and a drive means for rotationally driving the pinion gear. The rotation of the pinion gear can be transmitted to the outer edge member via the curved rack gear, whereby the light transmitting member can be rotated together with the outer edge member. Therefore, the pattern or pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member can be visually recognized by the player in a displaced (rotated) state.

In this case, the outer edge member has both the role of condensing the light emitted from the light irradiating means on the side end surface of the light transmitting member and the role of transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the light transmitting member to rotate the light. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts by that amount, reduce the product cost, and improve the reliability due to the simplification of the structure.

In any of the game machines A2 to A7, the light transmitting member is rotatably supported and a rotation mechanism for applying a rotational driving force to the light transmitting member is provided, and the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape. The gaming machine A8 is characterized in that a guide groove is recessed along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface of the annular shape, and the rotation mechanism includes a plurality of support rings guided along the guide groove.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A2 to A7, the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape, and the guide groove is formed along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface of the annular shape. Since the rotating mechanism is recessed and includes a plurality of support rings guided along the guide groove, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is exposed by the action of the guide groove and the support ring, that is, light. The light transmitting member can be rotatably supported in a state where light can be incident from the side end surface of the transmitting member. Therefore, by rotating the light transmitting member, the pattern or pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member can be visually recognized by the player in a displaced (rotated) state.

In this case, the outer edge member can have both the role of condensing the light emitted from the light irradiating means on the side end surface of the light transmitting member and the role of rotatably supporting the light transmitting member together with the support ring. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, the product cost can be reduced, and the reliability can be improved by simplifying the structure.

The support ring may be rotatably pivotally supported, or may be non-rotatably fixed. In this case, as the form in which the support ring is guided along the guide groove, the support ring rotatably supported by the shaft rolls along the guide groove or rolls while sliding, or becomes non-rotatable. An example is a mode in which a fixed support ring slides along a guide groove.

Further, in the gaming machine A8 which is subordinate to the gaming machine A7, the outer edge member in which the curved rack gear is engraved is on either the front or the back surface of the light transmitting member, and the outer edge member in which the guide groove is recessed is the light transmitting member. It is preferable to dispose of them on the other side of the front surface or the back surface, respectively. That is, by disposing the outer edge member on the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member, the light radiated from the light irradiating means is not directly incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member, and the front surface of the light transmitting member. This is because the light that deviates to the side and the light that deviates to the back side can be reflected by the outer edge member on the front surface and the outer edge member on the back surface, respectively, and incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Further, by disposing the outer edge member on the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member in this way, the light emitted by the other device in the game area reaches from either the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member. Even in this case, it can be blocked by each of the front outer edge member and the back outer edge member, and it is possible to suppress the incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

In the gaming machine A8, the outer peripheral side of the outer edge member is formed so as to face the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member at a predetermined interval, and the facing space between the outer edge member and the light transmitting member is the guide. A gaming machine A9 characterized by being a groove.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effect of the game machine A8, the outer peripheral side thereof is formed in a shape in which the outer peripheral side thereof faces the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member at a predetermined interval, and the outer edge member and the light transmitting member are formed. Since the space opposite to the guide groove is used as a guide groove, it is possible to reduce the size of the structure composed of the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. That is, by supporting one inner wall of the guide groove on the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member, it is not necessary to form the outer edge member in a U-shaped cross section, and the thickness dimension of the outer edge member can be reduced. Therefore, the size of the above-mentioned structure can be reduced accordingly.

Further, since the outer edge member is arranged in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member is directed to the front surface of the light transmitting member. Alternatively, it can be easily reflected on the back surface (boundary with air). As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reached to the reflecting portion, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened to make the pattern or pattern clear. It can be highlighted (displayed).

In any of the game machines A2 to A9, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is formed orthogonal to the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member, and the light irradiating means has a direction of irradiating light from the irradiating surface. The gaming machine A10 is characterized in that the irradiation surface is arranged so as to face the side end surface of the light transmitting member in a posture orthogonal to the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A2 to A9, the side end faces of the light transmitting member are formed orthogonal to the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member, and the light irradiating means thereof irradiates the light transmitting member. Since the irradiation surface is arranged so as to face the side end surface of the light transmitting member in a posture in which the irradiation direction of light from the surface is orthogonal to the side end surface of the light transmitting member, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is irradiated from the light irradiation means. The light incident from the light can be easily reflected by the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reached to the reflecting portion, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened to make the pattern or pattern clear. It can be highlighted (displayed).

<Concept of the invention using the irradiation unit 650 of the projection unit 600 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a target member to be irradiated with light and a plurality of light emitting means dispersedly arranged around the target member in a posture in which each of the target members faces an irradiation surface, the plurality of light emitting means. It is provided with one or a plurality of substrate members on which at least two or more of the light emitting means are mounted and elastically deformable, and a base member that holds the substrate member in a predetermined elastically deformed posture. Characteristic gaming machine B1.

Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a target member to be irradiated with light and a plurality of light emitting means arranged in such a posture that each of the target members faces an irradiation surface (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015). -29735 (publication). According to this gaming machine, by irradiating light from a light emitting means and incident light from the outer peripheral surface of the target member, the incident light is advanced inside the light transmitting member and reflected by a reflecting portion. It can be emitted from the front of the light transmitting member. In this case, the applicant of the present application forms the target member in a disk shape from a light-transmitting material and forms a reflective portion, while irradiating a plurality of light emitting means on the outer peripheral surface of the disk shape (target member). We devised a structure in which the light emitted from each light emitting means is incident from the outer peripheral surface of the target member (not known at the time of filing the present application).

However, it has been newly found that in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since it is necessary to dispose a plurality of light emitting means around the target member, there is a problem that the disposition work is troublesome. In particular, since it is necessary to dispose of the plurality of light emitting means in a posture in which each irradiation surface is directed toward the outer peripheral surface of the target member (that is, each has a different direction), the disposition work is troublesome from this point as well. ..

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, at least two or more light emitting means are mounted and one or a plurality of substrate members formed so as to be elastically deformable, and the substrate members are held in a predetermined elastically deformed posture. By arranging one substrate member on the base member, it is possible to complete the arranging work of at least two or more light emitting means. Therefore, the labor of arranging the light emitting means can be reduced accordingly.

Further, when the substrate member is arranged on the base member, the substrate member is held in a predetermined elastically deformed posture, so that the direction of the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be defined. That is, since it is not necessary to dispose of the plurality of light emitting means in a posture in which their irradiation surfaces are individually directed toward the outer peripheral surface of the target member, the labor of disposing the light emitting means can be suppressed from this point as well.

The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that the gaming machine B1 is provided with a block body which is formed to have higher rigidity than the substrate member and is arranged on the substrate member, and the block body is held by the base member.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the block body is formed to have higher rigidity than the board member and is provided on the board member, and the block body is held by the base member. , It is possible to suppress warpage and bending of the substrate member and easily define the posture of the substrate member. As a result, the posture of the light emitting means can be suppressed from being affected by the warp or bending of the substrate member, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be easily maintained.

In the gaming machine B2, the gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the light emitting means is arranged in a region of the substrate member where the block body is arranged.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, the light emitting means is arranged in the region where the block body is arranged in the substrate member, so that the posture of the light emitting means is the warp of the substrate member. It is possible to more reliably suppress the influence of bending and bending. Therefore, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the direction can be further easily maintained.

In the gaming machines B2 or B3, a plurality of the block bodies are arranged on the substrate members at predetermined intervals, and the base members are elastically deformed from the substrate members located between the block bodies. A gaming machine B4 characterized by being held by the body.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of the game machine B2 or B3, a plurality of block bodies are arranged on the board members at predetermined intervals, and the board members located between the block bodies are elastically arranged. Since it is held by the base body in a deformed (bent) posture, the posture of the light emitting means (direction of the irradiation surface) is stabilized as compared with the case where the substrate member in the elastically deformed posture is directly held by the base member. be able to.

In any of the gaming machines B2 to B4, the light emitting means is arranged in front of the substrate member facing the target member, and the block body is the substrate member on the opposite side to the target member. A gaming machine B5 characterized by being arranged on the back surface.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B2 to B4, the light emitting means is arranged in front of the substrate member facing the target member, and the block body is on the opposite side of the target member. Since it is arranged on the back surface of the substrate member, the light emitting means can be brought closer to the target member while obtaining the effect of stabilizing the posture of the substrate member by the block body.

In the gaming machine B5, the block body is fastened and fixed by screws from the front surface of the board member, and the head of the screw is projected to the front surface of the board member.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, the block body is fastened and fixed by screws from the front surface of the substrate member, and the head of the screw protrudes from the front surface of the substrate member, so that the light emitting means can be used. It can be protected by the head of the screw. That is, for example, when the movable member is displaced to the front surface of the substrate member, the head of the screw is brought into contact with the member, and it is possible to prevent the member from being in contact with the light emitting means and being damaged.

In the gaming machine B6, the block body is fastened and fixed by at least two screws, and the light emitting means is arranged between the heads of the two screws.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, the block body is fastened and fixed by at least two screws, and the light emitting means is arranged between the heads of the two screws. The light emitting means can be easily protected by the head of the screw.

It is preferable that the two screws are arranged along the displacement direction of the movable member. This is because by disposing the light emitting means between the heads of the screws arranged in this way, it is possible to easily bring the movable member into contact with the head of the screw, and it is possible to easily protect the light emitting means.

In any of the gaming machines B2 to B7, a protrusion is projected from one of the base body or the block body, and a fitting hole for receiving and fitting the protrusion is formed on the other side of the base body or the block body. A gaming machine B8 characterized by being recessed in.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of either the game machines B2 to B7, a protrusion is projected on one of the base body and the block body, and the protrusion is received and fitted to the one of the base body and the block body. Since the hole is recessed in the other side of the base body or the block body, the block body can be arranged in the base body by fitting the protrusion into the fitting hole, and the labor of the arrangement work can be suppressed. .. In particular, when a plurality of block bodies are arranged on a substrate member and are arranged in an elastically deformed (bent) posture between the block bodies, one of the block bodies is positioned (temporarily fixed) by fitting. ), The substrate member can be elastically deformed (bent) and the other block body can be fitted, so that the workability of the arrangement work can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines B2 to B8, the block body has a recess on the surface on the side where the board member is disposed, and the electronic component disposed on the substrate member is housed in the recess of the block body. A gaming machine B9 characterized by being played.

According to the gaming machine B9, in any of the gaming machines B2 to B8, the block body is provided with a recess on the surface on the side where the block body is disposed, and is disposed on the substrate member in the recess of the block body. Since the electronic parts are stored, the electronic parts can be covered and protected by the block body. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent a movable member from coming into contact with an electronic component and being damaged.

<Concept of the invention using the vertical displacement unit 800 as an example>
A game including a base member, a displacement member disposed on the base member and displaceably formed between the first position and the second position, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member to displace it. In the machine, the displacement member includes an elastic member that is elastically deformed as it is displaced from the first position to the second position, and the displacement member moves from the first position to the second position by the action of gravity. In a state of being disposed on the base member in a form of being displaced in the direction and the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released, at a predetermined position between the first position and the second position. A gaming machine C1 characterized in that the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced.

Here, the base member, the displacement member disposed on the base member and displaceably formed between the first position and the second position, and the driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member to displace it. A game machine is known to provide an effect by displacement of a displacement member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-239870). In this case, for example, in a normal state, the displacement member is placed in a retracted position (for example, either the first position or the second position) which is invisible to the player or is on the outer edge side of the game area, while a predetermined game. When the state is formed, the displacement member is displaced toward the overhanging position (the other of the first position or the second position) overhanging the game area, and the movement of the displacement member displaced toward the overhanging position is played. The production is performed so that the person can see it. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and the displacement member is displaced at a constant displacement speed, so that it is difficult to make the displacement member perform an interesting displacement. There was a problem that there was.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the displacement member is provided with an elastic member that is elastically deformed as the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position, and the displacement member is the first from the first position due to the action of gravity. It is arranged on the base member in a form of being displaced in the direction toward the two positions, and in a state where the driving force is released from the driving means to the displacement member, at a predetermined position between the first position and the second position. Since the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, the reciprocating displacement (approximately simple vibration) due to the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member around this equilibrium position (predetermined position). ) Can be performed by the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the displacement member in the gravity direction can be regarded as the normal projection motion of the constant velocity circular motion, and the displacement velocity can be changed, so that the displacement member can be displaced in an interesting manner.

On the other hand, if a driving force is applied from the driving means to the displacement member, the displacement member is displaced between the first position and the second position in a manner different from the above-mentioned displacement (movement of normal projection of constant velocity circular motion). It is possible to increase the variation of displacement accordingly. That is, the variation of displacement can be increased only by switching whether or not the driving force is applied from the driving means to the displacement member, and the structure and control do not need to be complicated, so that the product cost can be reduced and the reliability can be improved. It can be improved.

In the gaming machine C1, the displacement member is characterized in that one end side is rotatably supported by the base member and the other end side is moved up and down between the first position and the second position. Game machine C2.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, one end side is rotatably supported by the base member, and the other end side is moved up and down between the first position and the second position. , When the displacement member is made to perform reciprocating displacement (approximately simple vibration) due to the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member by releasing the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member. The displacement of the other end of the displacement member can be a displacement that combines not only a linear motion in the vertical direction but also a rotational motion centered on one end side. As a result, it is possible to make such a displacement member perform an interesting displacement.

The gaming machine C2 includes a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, and the transmitting means is a rotating member rotatably arranged on the base member and rotated by the driving force of the driving means. The gaming machine C3 is characterized by comprising a connecting member having one end rotatably connected to a position eccentric from the rotation center of the rotating member and the other end rotatably connected to the displacement member.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C2, the transmission means are rotatably arranged on the base member and rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the eccentricity from the rotation center of the rotating member. Since one end is connected to the displaced position and the other end is connected to the displacement member, the driving force applied to the displacement member is released from the driving means, and the action of gravity and the elastic recovery of the elastic member are released. When reciprocating displacement (approximately simple vibration) due to force is performed on the displacement member, the displacement member pushes and pulls the connecting member to rotate the rotating member, and the pushing and pulling causes the rotating member to rotate. Since the posture of the connecting member is changed, the magnitude of the force component in the direction of rotating the rotating member among the forces in the push-pull direction can be changed. That is, when the displacement member is reciprocally displaced, the magnitude of the resistance that the displacement member receives from the transmission means can be changed, and as a result, the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member can be changed. It is possible to make such a displacement member perform an interesting displacement.

In the game machine C3, at the predetermined position where the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, with respect to the direction connecting the rotation center of the rotating member and the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the directions connecting the connecting positions of the rotating member and the connecting member and the connecting positions of the connecting member and the displacement member are substantially orthogonal to each other.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of the game machine C3, at a predetermined position where the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, the rotation center of the rotating member and the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member are connected. Since the direction connecting the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member is substantially orthogonal to the direction connecting the and, the direction of rotating the rotating member among the forces in the push-pull direction. The magnitude of the force component can be maximized at the equilibrium position (predetermined position), and the force component can be reduced in any direction of pushing or pulling from the equilibrium position. That is, when the displacement member is reciprocally displaced, the resistance received by the displacement member from the transmission means can be changed substantially symmetrically with respect to the equilibrium position, so that the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member can be easily continued.

In the gaming machine C3 or C4, one of the rotating member or the connecting member includes a projecting portion projecting toward the other, and the predetermined position in the movable range between the first position and the second position. When the displacement member is displaced in the central range including the above, the projecting portion is made non-opposed to the other of the rotating member or the connecting member, and the first position or the second position is smaller than the central range. The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that when the displacement member is displaced in an outer range close to the above, the projecting portion faces the other of the rotating member or the connecting member so as to be abuttable.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C3 or C4, one of the rotating or connecting members comprises a protruding portion that projects towards the other and is between the first and second positions. When the displacement member is displaced in the central side range including the predetermined position in the movable range of the above, the projecting portion is made non-opposed to the other of the rotating member or the connecting member, and the first position or the first position from the central side range or When the displacement member is displaced in the outer range close to the second position, the projecting portion faces the other of the rotating member or the connecting member, so that the driving force applied from the driving means to the displacement member is released. , When the displacement member is made to perform reciprocating displacement centered on the equilibrium position (predetermined position), the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member is smoothed by avoiding the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the projecting portion in the central range. On the other hand, when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, the projecting portion is made to face the other of the rotating member or the connecting member so as to be abuttable in the outer range, and the displacement members are rotated. It is possible to suppress rattling between the member and the connecting member.

In the gaming machine C5, the outer range is set closer to the first position than the center side range, and the center side range is set to a range including the predetermined position and the second position. A gaming machine C6 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C5, the outer range is set closer to the first position than the central side range, and the central side range includes a predetermined position and a second position. Since it is set in the range, when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the posture of the displacement member can be changed by suppressing the rattling between the rotating member and the connecting member by using the projecting portion. On the other hand, when the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position by the driving force of the driving means, it is possible to avoid the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the projecting portion, which acts on the displacement member. It is possible to smoothly displace the displacement member while also utilizing gravity.

For example, when the first position is the retracted position where the displacement member is retracted to the outer edge side of the game area, and the second position is the overhang position where the displacement member projects toward the center side of the game area. At the first position (retracted position), rattling of the displacement member can be suppressed to improve the appearance and durability, and the effect of other members can be suppressed from being hindered, and the displacement member can be suppressed. Is displaced from the first position to the second position (overhanging position), it can be quickly extended (displaced) to the second position, and the effect of the overhanging operation can be enhanced. ..

In the gaming machine C6, at the second position, the rotation center of the rotating member, the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member are located substantially in a straight line. The gaming machine C7.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect of the game machine C6, at the second position, the rotation center of the rotating member, the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member are substantially straight. Since it is located on the line, even if the displacement member pushes and pulls the connecting member to rotate the rotating member, the pushing and pulling direction is toward the center of rotation of the rotating member, and the force component in the direction of rotating the rotating member is generated. A state that does not occur (that is, a dead point) can be formed. Therefore, when the displacement member is displaced toward the second position, the second displacement member can be smoothly (quickly) displaced while avoiding the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the projecting portion. After being placed at the position, the action of the dead center described above suppresses the rattling of the displacement member, and the appearance and durability can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines C3 to C7, the connecting member includes a contact portion formed so as to be able to contact the base member, and the contact portion is the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member and the rotation. It is characterized in that it is arranged on a substantially straight line connecting the connecting positions of the member and the connecting member, and is arranged on the side opposite to the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member with the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member interposed therebetween. Game machine C8.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C3 to C7, the connecting member includes a contact portion formed so as to be able to contact the base member, and the contact portion is a displacement member and a base. Since it is on a substantially straight line connecting the connecting position of the member and the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and is arranged on the opposite side of the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member across the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member. , When the displacement member rattles against the base member, the contact portion of the connecting member comes into contact with the base member, so that the connecting portion of the rotating member and the connecting member (one end of the rotating member and the connecting member can rotate). It is possible to easily suppress the inclination of the rotating shaft) with respect to the shaft support hole of the portion connected to. As a result, the driving force of the driving means can be smoothly transmitted to the displacement member via the transmitting means.

<Concept of the invention using the displacement unit 400 as an example>
In a gaming machine including a base member, a displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member, and a drive means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, the drive means are the first drive means and the first drive means. Two driving means are provided, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the first driving means, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the second driving means. The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that the displacement member is displaced in a different manner.

Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a base member, a displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, and performing an effect by displacement of the displacement member. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-239870). In this case, for example, in a normal state, the displacement member is placed in a retracted position that is invisible to the player or is on the outer edge side of the game area, while when a predetermined game state is formed, the displacement member is stretched over the game area. The displacement member is displaced toward the protruding position, and the player is made to visually recognize the operation of the displacement member displaced toward the overhanging position.

However, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that the effect of the effect due to the displacement of the displacement member is insufficient. Specifically, in the conventional gaming machine, the displacement mode (trajectory when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited to one, so the effect of the displacement of the displacement member is one pattern. Therefore, it was difficult to produce a surprising effect for the player. Even if the driving force of the driving means is changed by varying the strength, the displacement speed of the displacement member only increases or decreases, and the displacement mode (trajectory) is still constant. It was difficult to do.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the driving means includes a first driving means and a second driving means, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the first driving means. (2) Since the displacement member is displaced in a different manner depending on the case where the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the drive means, the effect of the effect of the displacement of the displacement member can be enhanced. That is, unlike the conventional product in which the displacement mode of the displacement member (trajectory when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited in one way, the effect is not one pattern, and at least two displacement members are used. Since the displacement can be performed according to the displacement mode, the player can perform a surprising effect by switching the displacement mode.

In the gaming machine D1, a first member that is slidably displaceable on the base member and is driven by the first drive means, and a second drive means that is slidably displaceable on the base member. A gaming machine D2 comprising a second member driven by the displacement member, wherein the first portion and the second portion of the displacement member are connected to the first member and the second member at least rotatably, respectively. ..

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the first member is displaceably displaced on the base member and is slidably displaceable on the base member and the first member driven by the first drive means. The first and second parts of the displacement member are at least rotatably connected to the first and second members, respectively, with a second member driven by the second drive means. When the first member is slidably displaced by the driving force of the first driving means, it is possible to form a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the second portion side, while the second member is displaced by the driving force of the second driving means. When the member is slidably displaced, it is possible to form a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the first portion side. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least two displacement modes, it is possible to perform a surprising effect of the player by switching the displacement mode.

In particular, according to the game machine D2, the two displacement modes are not formed by making the center of rotation the same and different the direction of rotation, but forming the center of rotation differently and the center of rotation differently. Therefore, the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member can be made large, and the player can easily perform a surprising effect.

In the gaming machine D2, the first member and the second member are disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a connecting pin protruding from the first portion of the displacement member or one of the first members is provided. A gaming machine D3 characterized in that it is rotatably and slidably inserted into a guide groove formed on the other side.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D2, the first member and the second member are arranged on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and one of the first part or the first member of the displacement member. Since the connecting pin projecting from is rotatably and slidably inserted into the guide groove formed on the other side, the first member is linearly displaced by the driving force of the first driving means or the driving force of the second driving means. A displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the second portion side and a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the first portion side are formed depending on whether the second member is linearly displaced. can. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least two displacement modes, it is possible to perform a surprising effect of the player by switching the displacement mode.

In this case, since the first member and the second member are arranged on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, it is not necessary to have a complicated structure as in the case of sliding displacement with a curved locus (with a curved locus). If there is, it is necessary to provide not only a mechanism for guiding the first member and the second member in a curved shape but also a mechanism for continuously applying a driving force to the first member and the second member that are displaced in a curved shape. (Given), for example, a rack pinion mechanism can be utilized and its structure can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost and improve the durability and the reliability of operation.

In the gaming machine D3, the gaming machine D4 is characterized in that the direction of the linear displacement of the first member and the direction of the linear displacement of the second member are substantially parallel to each other.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of the game machine D3, the direction of the linear displacement of the first member and the direction of the linear displacement of the second member are substantially parallel to each other. In addition to the displacement mode in which only one of the driving means is driven to rotate the entire displacement member, the displacement in which both the first driving means and the second driving means are driven to linearly displace (for example, traverse) the entire displacement member. Aspects can be formed. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least three different displacement modes, it is possible to easily perform a surprising effect of the player by switching such displacement modes.

In particular, according to the game machine D4, as the displacement mode of the displacement member, the type of displacement (rotation) is the same, but the type of displacement itself is different in addition to the one that makes the direction of rotation different from the position of the center of rotation. (That is, rotation and linear displacement can be formed), so that the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member can be further increased, and it is possible to further facilitate the surprising effect of the player.

In the gaming machine D4, when the first member and the second member are driven by the first driving means and the second driving means, respectively, the displacement speed of the first member and the displacement speed of the second member are different. A gaming machine D5 characterized by being speed.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of the game machine D4, when the first member and the second member are driven by the first drive means and the second drive means, respectively, the displacement speed of the first member and the second member. Since the displacement velocity is different from the displacement velocity of the member, the displacement of the displacement member can include the rotational motion and the linear motion. That is, the displacement member can be not only displaced (linear motion) in parallel with the direction of linear displacement of the first member and the second member while maintaining its posture, but can also be linearly moved while rotating its posture. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to perform a surprising effect.

It should be noted that it is impossible to displace the displacement member in a displacement mode that combines such rotational motion and linear motion with the conventional configuration in which the displacement member is slid along the slide groove by the driving force of one driving means. , It is possible for the first time to use the driving means of 2 as in the present invention.

In any of the game machines D1 to D5, a second displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member is provided, and when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the first driving means, the displacement thereof. The second displacement member is displaced together with the member, while the second displacement member is maintained in a stopped state when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the second driving means. Amusement machine D6.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D5, a second displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member is provided, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the first driving means. When the displacement member is displaced, the second displacement member is displaced together with the displacement member, while when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the second driving means, the second displacement member is maintained in the stopped state. , The device (change) between the displacement mode by the first drive means and the displacement mode by the second drive means can be increased. Therefore, by switching such a displacement mode, it is possible to easily perform a surprising effect of the player.

<Concept of the invention using the projection unit 5600 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a target member to be irradiated with light and a light irradiating means for irradiating the target member with light, at least one or both of the target member and the light irradiating means is formed displaceably. The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that the irradiation mode of the target member by the light irradiation means is changed by the displacement of one or both of the above.

Here, a game in which a displacement member displaceably formed between the first position and the second position and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member to displace the displacement member are provided, and an effect is produced by the displacement of the displacement member. The machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-239870). In this gaming machine, a light irradiation means (LED) is arranged inside the displacement member, and a translucent portion made of a light transmissive material is provided on the front surface (the surface on the player side) of the displacement member, and the translucency thereof is provided. By irradiating the light portion from the back surface with the light irradiating means, the player can visually recognize the form in which a part of the displacement member (translucent portion) is emitting light. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the irradiation mode of the target member is constant by the light irradiation means, there is a problem that there is little change in the mode visually recognized by the player, and it is difficult to have a hobby.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, at least one or both of the target member and the light irradiation means are formed so as to be displaceable, and the displacement of one or both changes the irradiation mode of the target member by the light irradiation means. It is possible to change the mode in which the player visually recognizes. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to have an interest.

As the form in which the light irradiation mode is changed, for example, the position of the target member irradiated by the light irradiation means is changed, and the distance from the irradiation surface of the light irradiation means to the irradiation position of the target member is changed. The form to be used, the form in which these are combined, and the like are exemplified.

The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that the gaming machine E1 includes a base member, the light irradiation means is fixed to the base member, and the target member is displaceably arranged on the base member.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the light irradiating means is fixed to the base member, and the target member is displaceably arranged on the base member. The target wiring can be fixed, and the occurrence of disconnection can be suppressed accordingly.

In the game machine E2, a shielding member having an opening and being arranged on the base member is provided, and a part of the target member is made visible to the player from the opening of the shielding member, and the target member is illuminated by light. Formed from a transmissive material in a plate shape and provided with a reflecting portion, the light emitted from the light irradiating means and incident from the side end surface is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the target member. A game machine E3 featuring.

Here, in the reflecting portion, a plurality of groups composed of a plurality of reflecting surfaces are arranged, and each group forms a pattern or a pattern. Therefore, the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member can be recognized by the player as a pattern or a pattern.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, a shielding member having an opening and arranged on the base member is provided, and a part of the target member is visually recognized by the player from the opening of the shielding member. By displacing the target member, different parts of the target member can be visually recognized by the player through the opening of the shielding member.

For example, a first position in which the first group of the plurality of groups constituting the reflective portion is visible through the opening and a second group different from the first group are the openings. When the target member is displaceable from the second position which becomes visible via While making the player visually recognize the first pattern or pattern to be formed, by displacing the target member from the first position to the second position, the pattern or pattern to be visually recognized by the player through the opening of the shielding member can be obtained. , Can be changed to a second pattern or pattern formed by the second group.

In this case, since the target member is formed of a light-transmitting material, when the target member is displaced in order to change the pattern or pattern visually recognized by the player, the light from the light irradiation means is not irradiated. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the target member is displaced.

In the game machine E3, the target member is formed in a circular shape or an annular shape in a front view, and is rotatably arranged on the base member with the center of the circular shape or the annular shape as a rotation center. Game machine E4 to play.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect of the game machine E3, the target member is formed in a front view circular shape or an annular shape, and can rotate to the base member with the center of the circular shape or the annular shape as the center of rotation. Since it is arranged in, the target member is arranged while ensuring the number of patterns and patterns to be visually recognized by the player through the opening of the shielding member, as compared with the case where the target member can be slidably displaced. Space required for can be suppressed.

In the game machine E2, the target member is formed of a light-transmitting material in the shape of a circular plate in front view and has a reflecting portion, and receives light emitted from the light irradiating means and incident from the side end surface. A plurality of light irradiation means are distributed and arranged around the target member in a posture in which the irradiation surface is directed toward the side end surface of the target member. The gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the target member is rotatably arranged on the base member with the center of the circular shape as the center of rotation.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of the game machine E6, the target member is formed of a light-transmitting material into a circular plate shape and has a reflecting portion, and is irradiated from the light irradiation means and from the side end surface. The incident light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the target member, and a plurality of light irradiation means are distributed around the target member in a posture in which the irradiation surface is directed to the side end surface of the target member. Therefore, by rotating the target member while irradiating light from the light irradiation means, the player can visually recognize the pattern or pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front of the target member in a rotated state. can.

In the gaming machine E5, the plurality of light irradiating means are distributed and arranged in the circumferential direction at positions equidistant from the rotation center of the target member.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effect of the game machine E5, the plurality of light irradiation means are distributed and arranged in the circumferential direction at positions equidistant from the rotation center of the target member, so that the rotation position of the target member ( Regardless of the phase), the light emitted from the front of the target member can be easily kept constant. That is, it is possible to stably form a pattern or a pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front surface of the target member.

The gaming machine E7 is characterized in that the gaming machine E1 includes a base member, and the light irradiation means and the target member are displaceably arranged on the base member.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the light irradiation means and the target member are displaceably arranged on the base member. It is possible to increase the variation of the change of the irradiation mode. Therefore, it is possible to further change the mode in which the player visually recognizes, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to have an interest.

The gaming machine E7 includes a driving means for applying a driving force to the target member to displace it, and the light irradiation means is brought into contact with the target member displaced by the driving force applied from the driving means. The gaming machine E8 is characterized in that it is displaced together with the target member.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E7, a driving means for applying a driving force to the target member to displace it is provided, and the light irradiation means is a target displaced by the driving force applied from the driving means. When the members are in contact with each other, they are displaced together with the target member, so that the drive means for displacing the target member can also be used, and it is not necessary to separately provide a drive means for displacing the light irradiation means. can.

<Characteristic F group> (Countdown notice can be set freely)
Among the different production periods, the effect period setting means for setting one effect period, the specific effect execution means for executing the specific effect in the specific period set within the one effect period, and the specific effect execution means are described above. A second information different from the first information, in which a notification effect execution means for executing a notification effect for notifying in advance that a specific effect is to be executed and a trigger for starting the notification effect are set based on a predetermined first information. The gaming machine F1 is characterized by having a notification effect setting means for setting an end trigger of the notification effect based on information.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable effect for a predetermined period to suggest to the player whether or not the player has won the prize. Then, among the effects executed for a predetermined period, a game in which a advance notification effect (countdown effect) that notifies the player in advance of the timing at which a specific effect (for example, a cut-in effect) is executed can be executed. There is a machine. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-198568).

In such a conventional gaming machine, by notifying the player in advance of the timing at which a specific effect is executed, it is possible to execute the variable effect while increasing the player's expectation for a big hit. However, when it is determined that the advance notification effect is to be executed, the period for executing the advance notification effect (that is, the start timing and the end timing) is set, so that the effect content becomes monotonous. There was a problem that the player got tired of the production early. Further, in the conventional gaming machine having the above-described configuration, the effect mode of the advance notification effect is changed (for example, a specific effect to be the target of the advance notification effect is changed while the advance notification effect is being executed. ), And there was a problem that the production effect could not be enhanced.

According to the gaming machine F1, a start trigger is set based on the first information by the notification effect setting means as an execution period of the notification effect for notifying that the specific effect is executed, and based on the second information. The end opportunity is set. As a result, since the period for executing the notification effect is set based on a plurality of different information, the period for executing the notification effect can be freely set, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine F1 has an execution information discriminating means for discriminating the execution information of the specific effect, and the notification effect setting means uses the execution information of the specific effect determined by the execution information discriminating means as the second information. A gaming machine F2 characterized by being a game machine.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1, the execution information for indicating that the specific effect is executed is set as the second information to set the end trigger of the notification effect, so that the execution information of the specific effect is set. It is possible to set a notification effect corresponding to. Therefore, while the period during which the notification effect is executed can be freely set, the notification effect corresponding to the specific effect to be executed can be executed, so that there is an effect that the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine F2, the execution information determining means is characterized in that at least the timing at which the specific effect is executed is determined.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F2, the execution information for indicating that the specific effect is executed is set as the second information to set the end trigger of the notification effect, so that the execution timing of the specific effect is set. It is possible to set a notification effect corresponding to. Therefore, while the period during which the notification effect is executed can be freely set, the timing at which the specific effect is executed can be accurately notified, which has the effect of enhancing the effect.

In the gaming machine F2 or F3, as the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means, there is a specific effect setting means for setting one of the specific effects having different execution timings. A gaming machine F4 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F2 or F3, it is possible to easily set a notification effect according to the timing at which the specific effect is executed for a plurality of specific effects having different execution timings. can. Therefore, while the period during which the notification effect is executed can be freely set, the period during which the specific effect is executed can be accurately notified, which has the effect of enhancing the effect.

In the gaming machines F1 to F4, the notification effect setting means is different from the timing of setting the start trigger of the notification effect based on the first information, and the end trigger of the notification effect based on the second information. The gaming machine F5, which is characterized by setting.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the execution period of the notification effect can be set at different timings, so that the period during which the notification effect is executed can be freely set. It has the effect of being able to enhance the staging effect.

In the gaming machine F5, the notification effect period setting means sets the end trigger of the notification effect based on the second information while the notification effect is being executed by the notification effect execution means. The featured gaming machine F6.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F5, it is possible to set the end trigger of the notification effect after the notification effect is executed, so that the notification effect is executed after the notification effect is executed. The execution period will be set. Therefore, it is possible to freely set the period during which the notification effect is executed, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In addition, since it is not set at what timing the notification effect is targeted at the time when the notification effect is executed, the content of the notification effect is predicted by the player in advance. It can be reliably prevented.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, an operation means that can be operated by the player, an operation effect execution means that executes an operation effect for operating the operation means, and the operation executed by the operation effect execution means. It has an operation determination means for determining that the operation means has been operated during the effect, and the notification effect setting means sets the effect mode of the notification effect based on the determination result of the operation determination means. The gaming machine F7 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the effect period of the notification effect is set based on the operation content of the operating means during the operation effect, so that the player participates in the effect. It has the effect of increasing motivation.

In any of the game machines F1 to F7, the notification effect setting means has a first notification effect period and a second notification effect period set after the first notification effect period as a period in which the notification effect is executed. The gaming machine F8 is characterized in that, at least, the second notification effect period is set based on the second information.

According to the gaming machine F8, in any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the second notification effect period can be set based on the second information among the periods during which the notification effect is executed, so that the notification effect period can be freely set. In the gaming machine that can be set to, it is possible to secure a period for executing the effect based on the second information, and there is an effect that the effect that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.

The gaming machine F8 is characterized in that the notification effect executing means executes a time-dependent effect that suggests a period until the specific effect is executed during the second notification effect period. Machine F9.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F8, the timekeeping effect can be executed during the second notification effect period, so that the player can be informed of the timing when the specific effect is executed in an easy-to-understand manner. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the game machine F9, based on the notification effect period determining means for determining the effect period of the notification effect set by the notification effect setting means and the length of the effect period determined by the notification effect period determination means. The gaming machine F10 is characterized by having a time-lapse effect period setting means for setting a period during which the time-lapse effect is executed.

According to the game machine F10, in addition to the effect played by the game machine F9, a period for executing the time-lapse effect is executed for a certain period by the time-lapse effect period setting means based on the length of the effect period in which the notification effect is executed. Since the timing obtained by subtracting a certain period from the execution timing of the specific effect is determined as an opportunity to execute the time-dependent effect, the start timing of the specific effect is accurate even if a different effect period is set by the effect period setting means. It has the effect of being able to suggest to the player.

In any of the game machines F8 to F10, the notification effect setting means sets an effect mode of the first effect executed during the first notification effect period based on the first information, and is the first. 1 The gaming machine F11 comprising a first effect mode changing means for changing the first effect mode when a predetermined effect variable condition is satisfied during the notification effect period.

According to the gaming machine F11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F8 to F10, the effect mode of the first effect executed during the first notification effect period is established while the first effect is being executed. It is variable when the possible effect variable condition is satisfied. As a result, after the notification effect is executed, the effect mode of the notification effect can be changed, so that there is an effect that the effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine F12 is characterized in that the effect variable condition is satisfied when the end trigger of the notification effect is set by the notification effect setting means.

According to the gaming machine F12, when the end trigger of the notification effect is set and the effect period of the notification effect is fixed, the effect mode of the first effect can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to execute the first effect corresponding to the set end trigger, and it is possible to suppress the player from giving a sense of discomfort.

In the game machine F1, the operation means that can be operated by the player, the operation effect execution means for executing the operation effect for operating the operation means, and the operation during the operation effect executed by the operation effect execution means. It has an operation determining means for determining that the means has been operated, and the operation effect executing means executes the operation effect while the notification effect is being executed by the notification effect executing means. The gaming machine F13 is characterized in that the notification effect setting means sets the second information based on the determination result by the operation determination means.

According to the gaming machine F13, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1, the end trigger of the notification effect is set based on the operation content for the operation effect executed during the notification effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect period of the notification effect can be changed by the operation of the player, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine F13 has a specific period setting means for setting the specific period based on the determination result by the operation determination means, and the notification effect setting means indicates the specific period set by the specific period setting means. The gaming machine F14, characterized in that the information for the purpose is the second information.

According to the game machine F14, in addition to the effect played by the game machine F13, a specific period in which the specific effect is executed is set based on the operation content for the operation effect executed during the notification effect, and the specific period is set. Since the effect period of the notification effect can be changed based on the effect, there is an effect that the notification effect corresponding to the specific effect to be executed can be executed.

In the gaming machine F14, the specific period setting means sets one predetermined period from a plurality of predetermined periods as the specific period, and the specific effect executing means is set by the specific period setting means. The gaming machine F15, characterized in that the specific effect corresponding to the specific period is executed.

According to the gaming machine F15, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F14, the specific effect corresponding to the specific period set by the specific period setting means is executed, so that the specific effect different depending on the operation content of the operating means is executed. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be enthusiastically participated.

In the game machine F15, the notification effect setting means sets a first notification effect period and a second notification effect period set after the first notification effect period as a period during which the notification effect is executed. The operation effect executing means executes the operation effect during the first notification effect period, and the length of the second notification effect period corresponds to the specific period set by the specific period setting means. It has a means for varying the effect period. A gaming machine F16 characterized by this.

According to the game machine F16, in addition to the effect played by the game machine F15, in the notification effect set from the first notification effect period and the second notification effect period, the operation effect is executed during the first notification effect period. The length of the notification effect is changed by changing the length of the second notification effect period based on the operation content to the operation means during the operation effect. Therefore, when the length of the notification effect is changed, the period during which the operation effect is executed can be secured, so that there is an effect that the effect that makes it easy for the player to operate the operation means can be executed.

<Characteristic G group> (Variations of HP display)
The variable effect is executed by the determination means that executes the determination based on the effect information, the variable effect execution means that executes the variable effect that changes the effect value based on the determination result by the determination means, and the effect execution means. When the first effect value is determined by the first effect value determining means for determining the first effect value for varying the effect value and the first effect value determining means, the effect value is determined. The gaming machine G1 is characterized by having a second effect value determining means for determining a second effect value different from the first effect value capable of varying the above.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable effect for a predetermined period to suggest to the player whether or not the jackpot has been won. Then, as a variable effect, a game machine that executes an effect (battle effect) in which the own character and the enemy character play against each other and notifies the result of whether or not the jackpot is won according to the value of each physical strength point at the end of the effect. be. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-9075).

In such a conventional gaming machine, the effect of reducing the physical strength points of the own character or the enemy character is performed multiple times during the battle effect, and it is specified whether or not the reduced physical strength points are won by the player as a big hit. By notifying the player in advance of the timing at which the effect of the above is executed, it was possible to execute the variable effect while increasing the expectation of the player for the jackpot. Further, by setting the physical strength points to be reduced during the battle production in detail, the production pattern of the battle production is increased, and the player is prevented from getting bored with the battle production. However, in the conventional gaming machine, the detailed physical strength points displayed on the display screen are managed, and the next physical strength points are set based on the managed physical strength points, so that the physical strength points are reduced. There is a problem that the amount of processing for management becomes enormous. It is possible to simplify the management of reducing physical strength points by reducing the number of patterns that reduce physical strength points during battle production, but in this case, the production pattern of battle production will decrease, and the player will be early. There was a problem of getting bored with.

According to the gaming machine G1, since the effect value is determined based on the values determined by a plurality of determination means, it is easier to increase the variation of the effect value as compared with the case where the effect value is determined by one determination means. It has the effect of being able to.

In the game machine G1, the effect value is set when the specific effect state is set by the effect state setting means capable of setting the specific effect state in which the variable effect is continuously executed and the effect state setting means. The effect value updating means includes a effect value updating unit that continuously and variably updates, and a first effect value storage unit that can store the first effect value determined by the first effect value determining unit. The gaming machine G2 is characterized in that the effect value is variably updated based on the first effect value stored in the first effect value storage means.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine G1, when the effect value determined based on the first effect value and the second effect value is variably updated, the effect value is not the sum of the effect values but the first effect value. Since only one effect value is stored and the effect value is variably updated based on the first effect value, the actually displayed effect value (the effect value obtained by adding the first effect value and the second effect value). With respect to the display pattern, it is possible to reduce the pattern of the value (first effect value) that is variably updated by the effect value update means, and there is an effect that the processing load can be reduced.

In the gaming machine G2, an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode based on a variable amount of the effect value that is variably updated by the effect value update means, and an effect for displaying the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means. A gaming machine G3 characterized by having an aspect display means.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G2, an effect mode based on a variable amount of the effect value variably updated by the effect update means is displayed. There is an effect that the variable amount of the effect value can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the gaming machine G3, the first effect value is a part of the effect value, the second effect value is composed of a value different from the first effect value, and the first effect and the effect value are described. The gaming machine G4 is characterized by having an effect value summing means for calculating the effect value by adding it to the second effect value.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G3, the first effect value which is a part of the effect value and the second effect value different from the first effect value are added up by the effect value summing means. Since the effect value is determined, there is an effect that the effect value can be further diversified.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, a discriminant means for executing the discriminant when a predetermined discriminant condition is satisfied and a privilege are granted based on the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means being a specific discriminant result. The gaming machine G5 is provided with a privilege granting means, and the first effect value is determined by the first effect value determining means when the determination by the determination means is executed.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines G1 to G4, the first effect value is determined and the effect value is variable when the determination by the discrimination means is executed. The effect can be executed so as to be related to the discrimination result of the discrimination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can pay attention to the variable situation of the effect value and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the second effect value determining means determines the second effect value based on the determination of the first effect value by the first effect value determining means. The gaming machine G6 featuring.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, when the first effect value is determined, the second effect value is determined, so that the first effect value and the second effect value are determined. The effect value that is the sum of the values is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the variable amount of the variable effect value due to the execution of the discrimination by the discrimination means, and it is possible to provide the fun of predicting.

In the gaming machine G5 or G6, the gaming machine G7 is characterized in that the first effect value determining means makes the discriminating means different the variable amount of the first effect value based on the discrimination result.

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G5 or G6, the variable amount of the effect value can be made different based on the determination result of the discrimination means, so that the variable amount of the effect value can be different for the player. It has the effect of being able to gaze at and enhance the effect of the production.

In the gaming machine G7, the first effect value determining means facilitates determination of the first effect value so that the variable amount becomes large when the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result. A gaming machine G8 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G7, the larger the variable amount of the effect value, the easier it is to give a privilege. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G8, as a selectable range in which the second effect value determined by the second effect value determining means can be selected, the first range or a second range different from the first range thereof. The second effect value determination means has a selection range storage means having the above, and a determination value determination unit for determining whether the first effect value determined by the first effect value determination unit is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. The means is to select one selection range from a plurality of selection ranges stored in the selection range storage means based on the determination result of the determination value determination means to determine the second effect value. The gaming machine G9 featuring.

According to the gaming machine G9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G1 to G8, if the selection range in which the second effect value is selected differs depending on whether or not the first effect value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. Can be made. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the effect value can be easily increased.

In the gaming machine G9, the selection range storage means has a first selection range in which a range in which the first effect value can be increased or decreased is stored as the second effect value, and a range in which the first effect value can be decreased. The second effect value determination means determines that the determination result of the determination value determination means is less than a predetermined value. The gaming machine G10 is characterized in that the second selection range is selected and the second effect value is set.

According to the gaming machine G10, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G9, when the first effect value is less than a predetermined value, the second effect value for reducing the first effect value is selected, so that the first effect is selected. It is possible to prevent the effect value, which is the sum of the value and the second effect value, from becoming larger than the first effect value. As a result, for example, when the lower limit value (for example, 0) is determined as the first effect value, it is possible to suppress the determination of a value larger than the lower limit value as the effect value, which gives the player a sense of discomfort. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the execution of the staging.

<Characteristic H group> (Notification of suggestion of advantageous period of fall lottery machine)
When the predetermined discrimination condition is satisfied, the first discrimination means for executing the discrimination and the privilege game execution for executing the privilege game when the first discrimination result by the first discrimination means is the predetermined first discrimination result. The means, the high-probability state in which the first discrimination result by the first discrimination means is likely to be the predetermined first discrimination result, and the first discrimination result by the first discrimination means are predetermined rather than the high-probability state. When the predetermined discrimination condition is satisfied in the state where the high probability state is set by the probability setting means that can set the low probability state that is unlikely to be the first discrimination result and the probability setting means. The probability setting means has a second discrimination means for executing the discrimination, and sets the low probability state when the second discrimination result by the second discrimination means is a predetermined second discrimination result. A gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state in which the predetermined discrimination condition is likely to be satisfied and a second gaming state in which the predetermined discrimination condition is less likely to be satisfied than in the first gaming state. In a gaming machine having a period effect executing means for executing a period effect for notifying the period in which the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the game state setting means is described as described above. In the state where the first gaming state is set, the second gaming state is set when the first condition is satisfied, and the period effect executing means determines whether or not the first condition is satisfied. The period effect including the first effect for showing and the second effect for determining the effect mode of the first effect is repeatedly executed, and the first condition is determined by the probability setting means. It is established when both the first requirement that the low-probability game is set and the second requirement that the determination is executed a predetermined number of times by the first determination means in the state where the first game state is set are satisfied. The gaming machine H1 is characterized by having a period effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode of the period effect in response to the establishment information of the first requirement or the second requirement.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the gaming state is set to an advantageous gaming state (for example, a probabilistic state in which the probability of winning is high) that is advantageous to the player based on the winning. There is a gaming machine that suggests to the player whether or not the period in which the gaming state continues ends by the result of the effect (for example, the battle effect). (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-143197).

In such a conventional gaming machine, when the winning pattern is won when the advantageous gaming state continues, the effect result of the winning pattern in which the own character wins is displayed, and when the winning is won when the advantageous gaming state ends, the own character is won. The production result of the defeat pattern that is defeated is displayed, and if the winning is not won (when the advantageous game state is still set), the production result of the draw pattern that does not win or lose is displayed. Since it is executed, the content of the battle effect can be watched by the player, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. However, when the game is executed without winning for a long period of time in the advantageous gaming state, it becomes easier to execute the battle effect in which the effect result of the draw pattern is displayed as a result, and the player for the battle effect. There was a problem that the degree of expectation of was lowered. Further, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when a specific variation pattern is drawn without winning as a result of the lottery, the battle effect of the draw pattern is executed. When a specific fluctuation pattern is continuously drawn, there is a problem that the battle effect of the draw pattern is continuously executed and the player's expectation for the battle effect is further lowered.

According to the gaming machine H1, among the period effects executed in the state where the first game state is set, the effect mode of the second effect is set corresponding to the establishment information of the first requirement and the second requirement. Therefore, it is possible to predict whether or not the first requirement and the second requirement are satisfied based on the effect mode of the second effect. As a result, even when the period effect is repeatedly executed, the player can predict the game state based on the effect mode of the second effect to be newly executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored early with respect to the period production.

The gaming machine H1 is characterized in that the period effect mode setting means has a first effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the first effect.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H1, the production mode of the first effect for showing whether or not the first condition is satisfied is, in addition to the effect result of the second effect, the first requirement or. Since it is set based on whether or not the second requirement is satisfied, it is necessary to predict the result of whether or not the first condition is satisfied and the situation until the first condition is satisfied, depending on the effect mode of the first effect. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be more closely watched by the effect mode of the first effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine H1 or H2, the gaming machine H3 is characterized in that the period effect mode setting means has a second effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the second effect.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1 or H2, the effect mode of the second effect for determining the effect mode of the first effect is based on the presence or absence of the first requirement or the second requirement. Therefore, it is possible to predict the situation until the first condition is satisfied, depending on the effect mode of the second effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can pay attention to the effect mode of the second effect and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the period effect mode setting means sets a different effect mode when any of the first requirement and the second requirement is satisfied. The featured gaming machine H4.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the effect of the period effect is changed by satisfying one of the plurality of requirements for satisfying the first condition. It is variable. Therefore, it is possible to predict the period until the first condition is satisfied depending on the effect mode of the period effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can pay attention to the effect mode of the period effect and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine H4 has a remaining period determining means for determining the remaining period until the second requirement is satisfied, and the period effect mode setting means is the remaining period determining means when the first requirement is satisfied. The gaming machine H5 is characterized in that it sets an effect mode of the period effect corresponding to the determination result.

According to the gaming machine H5, the effect mode of the period effect is set based on the remaining period until the first condition is satisfied. Thereby, it is possible to suggest the remaining period until the first condition is satisfied depending on the effect mode of the period effect. Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game while giving the player a sense of crisis, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the game machines H1 to H5, the period effect executing means switches the period effect being executed from the second effect to the first effect when a predetermined effect switching condition is satisfied. It is characterized in that the ease with which the effect switching condition is satisfied differs depending on whether the high probability state is set by the probability setting means and the case where the low probability state is set. Game machine H6.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the case where the high probability state is set by the probability setting means and the case where the low probability state is set are the first. Since the frequency at which one effect is executed can be made different, it is possible to predict the currently set probability state based on the frequency at which the first effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. There is an effect.

The gaming machine H6 is characterized in that the gaming machine H6 has a condition setting means for facilitating the establishment of the effect switching condition for a predetermined period after the first requirement is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H6, the first effect can be easily executed for a predetermined period after the low probability state is set by the probability setting means. Therefore, it is possible to make the player predict the currently set probability state based on the frequency at which the first effect is executed, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H7, the period effect executing means executes the first effect when the first determination result by the first determination means is the predetermined first determination result. The gaming machine H8 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H7, the first effect is executed even when the discrimination result of the first discrimination means is the discrimination result in which the privilege game is executed. Therefore, when the first effect is executed, the effect is watched while being aware of both whether or not the privilege game is won or whether or not the first condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the performance to be performed and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H8, there is a number measuring means for measuring the number of times of the period effect executed continuously while the first gaming state is continuously set by the gaming state setting means. The gaming machine H9 is characterized in that the second staging mode setting means sets the second staging mode based on the number of executions of the period staging measured by the number of times measuring means.

According to the gaming machine H9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H8, when the period effect is repeatedly executed, the second effect mode is set based on the number of times the period effect is repeated. When the gaming state is continuously set for a long period of time, it is possible to prevent the same effect mode from being repeatedly set as the second effect mode. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In any of the game machines H6 to H9, the staging period determining means for discriminating the staging period after the first staging is executed by the period staging executing means, and the staging period determining means in which the predetermined staging switching condition is satisfied. When the staging period determined by the staging period determining means is within a predetermined period, the staging controlling means for restricting the execution of the first staging by the period staging executing means is provided. The featured game machine H10.

According to the gaming machine H10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H6 to H9, even if the effect switching condition is satisfied, it is determined that the effect period after the first effect is executed is within a predetermined period. If so, the execution of the first staging is restricted by the staging regulating means. As a result, it is possible to suppress the frequent execution of the first effect, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the execution of the first effect.

In the gaming machine H10, the first effect executed when the first determination result by the first determination means is the predetermined first determination result is not regulated by the effect restricting means. The featured gaming machine H11.

According to the gaming machine H11, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H10, the first effect executed when the privileged game is executed is executed regardless of the determination result of the effect period determining means, so that the privileged game is performed. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the effect when it is executed. Further, when the first effect is executed again within a predetermined effect period after the previous first effect is executed, the expectation that the privilege game is executed can be increased, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. There is an effect.

<Characteristic J group> (The target effect is different depending on the notification timing of the expected increase effect)
The expectation display control means capable of displaying a plurality of expectation display modes capable of suggesting the expectation degree for indicating that a predetermined condition is satisfied in a stepwise manner on the display means, and the expectation display control means displayed by the expectation display control means. A display mode variable means for gradually changing the expectation display mode, a variable information setting means for setting variable information variable by the display mode variable means, and at least one expectation among the plurality of expectation display modes. It has a variable suggestion effect executing means for executing a variable suggestion effect suggesting that the degree display mode is variable, and the expectation degree display control means has at least one of the plurality of expectation degree display modes. The gaming machine J1 is characterized in that the display mode is displayed on the display means at different timings, and the game machine J1 has an execution timing setting means for setting a timing for executing the variable suggestion effect.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable effect for a predetermined period to suggest to the player whether or not the jackpot has been won. Then, as the display mode of the character displayed on the display screen in the effect executed for the predetermined period, there are a plurality of display modes corresponding to the expected degree of the jackpot, and the expected degree of the jackpot of the current variable effect is displayed. There is a gaming machine that notifies the player depending on the display mode of the character. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-248305).

In such a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to show the player the expectation of a big hit by the display mode of the character displayed during the variation effect, so that the player is interested in the effect content of the variation effect to be executed. And can enhance the staging effect. Further, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, among a plurality of display modes, a plurality of types of expectation display modes in which display modes corresponding to the expected degree of jackpot are displayed are provided, and the display modes of each expectation display mode are combined. Since it is possible to suggest the jackpot expectation to the player by making a specific judgment, it is possible to make the player predict the jackpot expectation based on the display modes of a plurality of types of expectation display modes, and the effect to be executed. It was possible to make the player pay close attention to the content and enhance the effect of the production. Further, in the gaming machine having the above-mentioned configuration, the suggestion effect for suggesting the display mode of the expectation degree display mode is configured to be executable, and which display mode is displayed as the expectation degree display mode is suggested. There is also a gaming machine that executes an expectation display mode prior suggestion effect that causes the player to predict in which display mode the expectation display mode is displayed as a variation effect. There is also a gaming machine in which the display mode of the expectation degree display mode is changed from the display mode once displayed on the display screen.

However, in a gaming machine having a plurality of types of expectation display modes, when the expectation display mode prior suggestion effect corresponding to a specific expectation display mode is executed, the expectation that the expectation display mode prior suggestion effect is not applied. There is a problem that the effect of the effect is deteriorated because it is implicitly denied that the display mode is variable.

According to the gaming machine J1, a variable suggestion effect suggesting that one of a plurality of expectation display modes displayed on the display means at different timings is variable is a variable suggestion effect execution means. Will be executed. Since the execution timing of the variable suggestion effect is set by the execution timing setting means, the execution timing of the variable suggestion effect can be different. This has the effect that even if the same effect mode is used as the variable suggestion effect, the expected degree display mode that is the suggestion target of the variable suggestion effect can be different.

In the gaming machine J1, a discrimination means for executing discrimination when a predetermined discrimination condition is satisfied, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result, and a privilege granting means. The gaming machine J2 is characterized in that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J1, when a privilege is given, the expectation degree display mode can easily show a high expectation degree, so that the player can display the expectation degree display mode. You will be watching the contents. Therefore, there is an effect that the staging effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine J3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine J1 or J2, the variable suggestion effect notifies variable information of a stepwise variable expectation degree display mode.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J1 or J2, the variable suggestion effect can be notified to the player by the variable suggestion effect, so that the variable information of the target expectation degree display mode can be notified. There is an effect that it can be watched and the effect of production can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine J3, the variable suggestion effect is characterized in that a plurality of variable quantities including at least a variable quantity for indicating the degree to which the expected degree display mode is actually varied are displayed. J4.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J3, a plurality of variable amounts are displayed as a variable suggestion effect, so that the larger variable amount is displayed among the plurality of variable amounts displayed for the player. It is possible to play the game with the expectation that the amount will be a real variable amount, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the machine having the target notification means for notifying the expectation degree display mode to be the target of the variable suggestion effect executed by the variable suggestion effect before the end of the variable suggestion effect. The gaming machine J5 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the variable execution is performed for the player by notifying the player in advance of the target of the variable suggestion effect to be executed this time. It has the effect of being able to entertain the suggestion production with peace of mind.

In any of the gaming machines J2 to J5, based on the expectation type setting means for setting the expectation type based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means, and the expectation type set by the expectation type setting means. , The expectation degree setting means for setting the expectation degree for each of the plurality of expectation degree display modes, and the expectation degree display control means is the plurality of expectation degree display modes set by the expectation degree setting means. The expected degree display mode for showing at least a part of the expected degree is displayed in advance, and the variable suggestion effect is set by the already displayed expected degree and the expected degree setting means. The gaming machine J6 is characterized in that the difference from the expected degree is suggested as the variable amount.

According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines J2 to J5, an effect of suggesting the difference between the already displayed expectation degree and the preset expectation degree as a variable amount is executed. Therefore, even if the variable amount displayed as the variable suggestion effect is small, the privilege is given if the variable suggestion effect is executed for the expectation degree display mode in which the high expectation degree is already displayed. It is possible to increase the possibility of Therefore, not only the effect content of the variable suggestion effect but also the display mode of the current expectation degree display mode is drawn by lottery, which has the effect of enhancing the effect.

In the gaming machine J2, the operation means that can be operated by the player, the operation effect execution means that executes the operation effect for operating the operation means, and the operation during the operation effect executed by the operation effect execution means. The display mode variable means has an operation discriminating means for determining that the means has been operated, and the display mode variable means changes the expectation degree display mode in response to the discriminating result by the operation discriminating means. The featured gaming machine J8.

According to the gaming machine J8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J2, the expected degree display mode is changed in response to the operation of the operating means, so that the player can enthusiastically operate the operating means. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine J8, a discrimination means for executing discrimination when a predetermined discrimination condition is satisfied, a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game when the result of discrimination by the discrimination means is a predetermined discrimination result, and a bonus game execution means. When a predetermined acquisition condition is satisfied, the acquisition means for acquiring the ball entry information and the ball entry information acquired by the acquisition means are stored up to a predetermined number until the predetermined determination condition is satisfied. A possible storage means, a pre-determination means that executes pre-discrimination based on the ball entry information stored in the storage means, and a number of ball entry information indicating the number of the ball entry information stored in the storage means. In a gaming machine having a ball entry information number display means to be displayed, when a predetermined additional condition is satisfied, the ball entry information number display means is displayed in response to the determination result by the operation determination means. The gaming machine J9 is characterized by having an additional effect executing means for executing an additional effect that changes a display mode for indicating the number of ball entry information.

According to the gaming machine J9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J8, the display mode for showing the number of ball entry information can be changed by the additional effect performed in response to the operation to the operating means. , There is an effect that the player can enthusiastically operate the operation means.

The gaming machine J9 has an effect condition determining means for determining whether the expected degree display mode displayed by the expected degree display control means satisfies a predetermined effect condition, and satisfies the effect condition by the effect condition determination means. The gaming machine J10, characterized in that the above-mentioned additional conditions are satisfied when it is determined that the above-mentioned additional conditions are not satisfied.

According to the gaming machine J10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J9, when the expected degree display mode displayed on the display means does not satisfy a predetermined effect condition, an additional effect is executed, so that a plurality of effects can be obtained. It has the effect of being able to have relevance and enhancing the staging effect.

The gaming machine J10 is characterized in that, when the expected degree display control means does not display a predetermined number of the expected degree display modes, the effect condition determination means determines that the effect condition is not satisfied. Game machine J11.

According to the game machine J11, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J10, the number of the effects to be executed can be complemented by executing the additional effect, so that the game motivation is increased by the small number of the effects to be executed. It has the effect of suppressing the decrease.

<Characteristic K group> (Big hit production at the time of holding consecutive times)
The discrimination means that executes the discrimination when a predetermined discrimination condition is satisfied, the privilege game execution means that executes the privilege game when the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means is the predetermined discrimination result, and the predetermined acquisition condition are When it is established, the acquisition means for acquiring the ball entry information and the storage means for storing the ball entry information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number until the predetermined determination condition is satisfied. In a gaming machine having a pre-discrimination means for executing pre-discrimination based on the ball entry information stored in the storage means, the pre-discrimination means satisfies at least the pre-discrimination condition during the privilege game. In this case, the pre-determination is executed, and the pre-discrimination means is characterized by having an effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode during the privilege game in response to the determination result of the pre-determination means. Game machine K1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a holding means that can acquire the ball entry information based on the ball entering the starting port and hold the ball entry information until the lottery condition is satisfied, and the lottery condition are established. It has a lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery based on the ball entry information, and an execution means for executing a winning game that is advantageous to the player when the lottery result of the lottery means is won. There is a game machine. Then, it has a pre-determination means for discriminating the ball entry information held in the hold means in advance before the lottery is performed by the lottery means, and the pre-determination means means that there is a hit in the hold at the end of the game. There is a gaming machine that continuously displays the display mode (number of rounds) during the winning game when it is determined. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-30737).

In such a conventional gaming machine, a special effect can be performed during the second hit game when the hit is won again in the hold, and the player can be satisfied. However, since it is configured to determine the winning information held at the end of the big hit and only the effect set at the time of winning is executed during the first winning game, for example, the winning is won during the first winning game. Even if the winning information is suspended, there is a problem that the effect for the first hit game cannot be changed and the effect of the effect cannot be enhanced.

Further, although the effect is configured to be continuous for a plurality of hit games, only the effect that the player can easily identify the break between the first hit game and the second hit game is executed. There is a problem that it is possible to easily predict how much the winning game will be executed during the production that is continuously executed during the winning game.

According to the gaming machine K1, the effect mode during the privilege game is set based on the determination result of the pre-determination means executed during the privilege game, so that the effect mode during the privilege game is set in advance as compared with the case where the effect mode during the privilege game is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load when setting the effect mode corresponding to the pre-determination result can be reduced.

In the gaming machine K1, the privileged game executed by the privileged game executing means is such that a plurality of small privileged games are executed, and the prior determination condition is satisfied when the small privileged game is executed. A gaming machine K2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K1, the pre-determination condition is satisfied when the small privilege game is executed, and the effect mode during the privilege game is set, so that the execution status of the small privilege game is set. It is possible to set the production mode of the privilege game according to the above. Therefore, even if the effect mode of the privilege game is set during the privilege game, there is an effect that the privilege game can be executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

In the gaming machine K2, as the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, there is a privilege game selection means for selecting one privilege game from a plurality of the privilege games in which a different number of small privilege games are executed. A gaming machine K3 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K2, as a privilege game, one privilege game is selected from a plurality of privilege games in which different numbers of small privilege games are executed. It has the effect of being able to change and improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine K3, when the pre-determination result is a predetermined pre-determination result, the storage means includes the entry information on which the privilege game is executed. The effect mode setting means determines in advance, and the effect mode setting means sets the effect mode during the privilege game according to the number of small privilege games executed in the privilege game previously determined by the advance determination means. A gaming machine K4 characterized by being a pachinko machine.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K3, the effect mode during the privileged game is set according to the number of small privileged games determined by the prior determination means, so that the player is in the privileged game. There is an effect that it is possible to pay attention to the production mode.

In the game machine K3 or K4, an execution number storage means for storing the number of small privilege games of the privilege game selected by the privilege game selection means, and the number of the small privilege games stored in the execution number storage means. Of these, the small privilege game number notification means for notifying at least a part, the number of the small privilege games stored in the execution number storage means, and the small privilege notified by the small privilege game number notification means. Notification for setting the number of the small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification means based on the determination result of the first difference determination means for determining the difference from the number of games and the first difference determination means. A gaming machine K5 characterized by having a number setting means.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K3 or K4, one privilege is provided by partially notifying the number of small privilege games (round games) executed during the privilege game (big hit). It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of small privilege games executed during the game, and while the privilege game is being executed, the game is performed while expecting more small privilege games to be executed. It has the effect of being able to make it.

The gaming machine K5 is characterized by having an addition means for adding the number of the small privilege games executed in the privilege game pre-determined by the pre-determination means to the execution number storage means. Machine K6.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K5, if it is determined in advance that the privileged game will be executed by the prior determination means during the privileged game (big hit), the predetermined privileged game The number of small privilege games to be executed is stored in the execution number storage means by the addition means. As a result, when a plurality of privilege games are executed at short intervals, the number of small privilege games notified while the previous privilege game is being executed is the number of small privilege games executed in the later privilege games. It can be set by adding the number of. Therefore, by looking at the number of small privilege games notified during the privilege game by the small privilege game number notification means, it is possible to predict whether or not the next privilege game will be executed, and one privilege game ends. There is an effect that it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the game after playing.

The gaming machine K5 or K6 has an update determination means for determining whether to update the number of the small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification means when the small privilege game is executed. A gaming machine K7 characterized by being there.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K5 or K6, the update determination means determines whether to update the number of small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification means, so that the number of notifications is notified. Even if the number of small privilege games is set by the setting means, the number of small privilege games may not be updated. Therefore, when a new small privilege game is executed, even if the number of small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification means is not updated, the next time the small privilege game is executed, the small privilege game is executed. It is possible to leave the possibility that the number of small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification means will be updated, and it is possible to play games while expecting more small privilege games to be executed. effective.

In the gaming machine K7, when the discrimination result by the first difference discriminating means satisfies the first condition, the forced updating means for updating the number of the small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification means is provided. A gaming machine K8 characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K7, when the discrimination result by the first difference discrimination means satisfies the first condition, it is notified by the forced update means and by the small privilege game number notification means. By forcibly updating the number of small privilege games, there is an effect that it is possible to set a period for the player to execute the privilege games with peace of mind.

In the gaming machine K7 or K8, the executed small privilege game number notification means for notifying the number of the small privilege games already executed, the number of the small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification means, and the number of the small privilege games. When the second difference discriminating means for discriminating the difference from the number of the small privilege games notified by the executed small privilege game number notification means and the discrimination result by the second difference discriminating means satisfy the second condition. The gaming machine K9 is characterized by having a compulsory updating means for updating the number of the small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification means.

According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K7 or K8, when the discrimination result by the second difference discrimination means satisfies the second condition, the forced update means is used to notify the small privilege game number notification means. Since the number of small privilege games that have been played is forcibly updated, it is possible to prevent the number of executed small privilege games from becoming larger than the number of small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification means. It has the effect of being able to.

In any of the gaming machines K5 to K9, the small privilege game number notification means preliminarily determines the ball entry information acquired by the acquisition means during a specific period during the period during which the privilege game is being executed. The gaming machine K10 is characterized in that when the result of the above is the predetermined predetermined result, the notification of a specific small privilege game number is executed.

According to the gaming machine K10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K5 to K9, the ball entry information acquired within a specific period during the period during which the privileged game is being executed is the result of the privileged game. If the player is elected, the specific small privilege game number notification is executed by the small privilege game number notification means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the enjoyment of acquiring the entry information during the privilege game.

In any of the gaming machines K5 to K10, the number of the small privilege games stored in the execution number storage means and the number of the small privilege games notified by the executed small privilege game number notification means. When the third difference discriminating means for discriminating the difference and the discriminant result of the third difference discriminating means satisfy the third condition in the state where the privileged game is completed, the privileged game is terminated. The gaming machine K11 is characterized by having an effect continuing means for continuing the effect executed during the privileged game from the time when the specific condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine K11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K5 to K10, if the discrimination result by the third difference discriminating means satisfies the third condition, it is executed during the privilege game by the staging continuation means. The effect is continuously displayed. As a result, when it is determined by the prior determination means that the privilege game is to be executed, there is an effect that the effect executed during the privilege game can be continuously displayed after the first privilege game is completed. be.

In the gaming machine K11, the gaming machine K12 is characterized in that the specific condition is not satisfied at least until the next privileged game is executed.

According to the gaming machine K12, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K11, it is executed during the privileged game during the period from the end of the first privileged game to the execution of the second privileged game by the means of continuing the production. It is possible to surely execute the effect to be performed. Therefore, since a series of effects can be executed for a plurality of privilege games, it is possible to perform the games while expecting more small privilege games to be executed while the effects are being executed. effective.

In any of the game machines K5 to K12, when the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means is a predetermined discriminating result, the storage number discriminating means for discriminating the number of the ball entry information stored in the storage means and the storage number discriminating means. It has an effect mode storage means for storing a plurality of effect modes executed during the privilege game, and is stored in the effect mode storage means based on the number of the ball entry means determined by the storage number determination means. The gaming machine K13 is characterized by having a privileged game effect mode selection means for selecting one effect mode from the plurality of effect modes.

According to the gaming machine K13, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K5 to K12, if it is a predetermined determination result, the effect mode during the privilege game is based on the number of ball entry information stored in the storage means. Is selected, it is possible to provide various effects to the player during the privileged game. Therefore, there is an effect that the staging effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine K13, the staging mode storage means, as the plurality of staging modes, states that the pre-discrimination result of the pre-discrimination means is the predetermined pre-discrimination result at the time when the privilege game is started. The gaming machine K14 is characterized in that at least a first effect mode that can be notified to a person and a second effect mode that can be notified to a player after the privilege game is completed are stored.

According to the gaming machine K14, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K13, it is notified that the result of the pre-determination of the pre-determining means is a predetermined pre-discrimination result by the effect mode selected by the privilege game effect mode selection means. Since the timing can be changed, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristic L group> (Change the production frequency in the game history)
A determination means for executing a determination when a determination condition is satisfied, an effect execution means for executing an effect for showing the determination result of the determination means, and an effect for showing a specific determination result by the effect execution means. It is executed by the privilege granting means that grants a privilege that is advantageous to the player when executed, the storage means that stores the corresponding game information as history information when a specific condition is satisfied, and the staging execution means. The gaming machine L1 is characterized by having a determination means for determining whether to execute a specific effect among the effects.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable effect for a predetermined period to suggest to the player whether or not the player has won the prize. Then, as a variable effect executed for a predetermined period, there is a gaming machine that executes an operation effect in which the effect mode is changed based on the operation result of the operation means that can be operated by the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-249877).

In such a conventional gaming machine, since the effect mode is changed based on the operation content of the player to the operating means, the player can be enthusiastically participated in the game. However, there is a problem that the player's willingness to play is reduced if the operation effect is frequently executed for the player who does not enthusiastically operate the operating means.

According to the gaming machine L1, since the execution of the specific effect is determined based on the history information, the execution frequency of the specific effect can be changed according to the progress of the game, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine L1 has an effect selection table storage means in which a plurality of effect selection tables set so that the selection rates of the specific effects are different, and the determination means corresponds to the history information. A gaming machine L2 characterized in that it determines a table.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L1, the selection rate of the specific effect can be switched by selecting the corresponding effect selection table, so that the selection rate of the specific effect can be changed by simple control. It has the effect of being able to.

The gaming machine L1 or L2 has an operation means operated by the player and an operation determination means capable of determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means. When the predetermined operation is discriminated by the operation discriminating means, an operation staging that changes the staging mode is set, and the specific condition is that at least one that the predetermined operation is discriminated by the operation discriminating means. The gaming machine L3, which is characterized in that it is set to the condition of.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L1 or L2, by operating the operating means in the operation effect, not only the effect mode is changed but also the specific condition is easily satisfied. Has the effect of being able to change and affect the execution rate of a specific effect.

In any of the gaming machines L1 to L3, at least the storage means capable of accumulating the history information, the setting means capable of setting the storage value up to a predetermined value based on the storage result by the storage means, and the setting means thereof. A selection means for selecting the accumulated privilege system corresponding to the set accumulated value from a plurality of accumulated privilege systems, and an accumulated privilege granting means for granting the accumulated privilege corresponding to the accumulated privilege system selected by the selection means. When a new accumulated value is set by the setting means, the accumulated privilege granting means grants a new accumulated privilege corresponding to the accumulated value privilege selected by the selection means. The gaming machine is characterized in that the selection means selects one storage privilege system from a plurality of storage privilege systems based on the history information stored in the storage means. F4.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines L1 to L3, the accumulated privilege system is selected based on the accumulated history information, and the accumulated privilege corresponding to the accumulated privilege system is given. As a result, both the setting of the frequency at which the specific effect is executed and the granting of the accumulated privilege are executed based on the history information. Therefore, there is an effect that the staging effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine L5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine L4, the accumulated privilege given by the accumulated privilege granting means is different for each of the accumulated privilege systems selected by the selection means.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine L4, the accumulation benefits given by the accumulation privilege system can be different, so that it is fun to acquire various accumulation benefits while differently operating the operation means. Can be provided to the player. Further, by making the operation contents of the operation means different, it is possible to make the effect frequency different, so that there is an effect that new enjoyment can be provided to the player for the effect to be performed.

The gaming machine L5 is characterized by having a history information erasing means capable of erasing the history information stored in the storage means to a state in which the storage privilege system different depending on the selection means can be selected. Game machine L6 to play.

According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L5, the history information can be deleted until a different storage privilege system can be selected. Therefore, as compared with the case where all the history information is deleted, the following It is possible to make it easier to select the accumulated privilege system. Therefore, there is an effect that the motivation to acquire other accumulated benefits can be increased.

In addition, since the accumulated value set by the setting means is also variable (decreased) based on the partial deletion of the history information by the history information erasing means, the accumulated value is a predetermined upper limit. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation in which the value is reached and the effect of the effect is reduced.

The gaming machine L7 is characterized in that any one of the gaming machines L4 to L6 has a guiding means for guiding the game content for selecting a specific accumulation privilege system by the selection means.

According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines L4 to L6, the game is played based on the game content guided by the guiding means, so that a specific accumulated privilege system is selected. Therefore, it is possible to give various accumulation benefits to the player, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine L8 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine L7, the guiding means guides the game content for selecting a specific accumulated privilege system by changing the effect mode of the operation effect.

According to the gaming machine L8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L7, the effect mode of the operation effect is changed by the guiding means, so that a different accumulation privilege system can be selected simply by operating the operation means according to the effect mode of the operation effect. Will be done. Therefore, it is possible to give various benefits to the player, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine L8, as the effect mode of the operation effect, the guide means has either a notification effect mode for notifying the operation means to perform the predetermined operation or a non-notification effect mode for not notifying the operation means. A gaming machine L9 characterized in that the game content is guided by using a machine.

According to the gaming machine L9, as the operation effect, it is possible to execute an effect mode in which a predetermined operation is easy to be performed on the operation means and an effect mode in which a predetermined operation is difficult to be performed. Just by operating it, different accumulated privilege systems will be selected. Therefore, it is possible to give various benefits to the player, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines L4 to L9, the player has a system selection means capable of selecting the specific storage privilege system corresponding to the game content guided by the guidance means from the plurality of storage privilege systems. A gaming machine L10 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine L10, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines L4 to L9, the game content can be notified so that the player can select the accumulated privilege system desired by the player, so that the effect of the game is further enhanced. It has the effect of being able to.

<Characteristic M group> (Measures for discrimination when small hits are confirmed)
A launching means capable of launching a game ball based on a player's operation, a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means, and a game ball entering the ball entry means. A determination means capable of executing a determination in a case, a display means for displaying identification information for showing the determination result by the determination means, and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means. And the dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the identification information for showing the specific determination result to the display means are stopped. In a game having a privileged game executing means capable of executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player when displayed, a game ball is inserted during the period in which the privileged game is executed by the privileged game executing means. A special ball-entry means that enables a ball, a specific area where a game ball that has entered the specific ball-entry means can enter, and a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the specific area. The privilege granting means to be granted, the privilege type determining means for determining the type of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means, and the privilege determined by the privilege type determining means when the identification information is stopped and displayed. A notification means for notifying the notification information that the player can identify the type of, and the specific input when the firing by the firing means is stopped for a predetermined period or more after the notification information is notified by the notification means. The gaming machine M1 is characterized by having a means for making it difficult to enter the ball means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a gaming ball into a starting port provided on the gaming board, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and a state after the hit game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous to the player is set depending on the type of the hit game. As the type of the winning game, when the lottery result is displayed by a symbol or the like and notified, the notification is made in a predetermined notification mode so that the fairness of the game can be maintained. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when a game ball enters a specific entrance or a specific area during a hit game, the hit game is further executed, and the game is set after that. Assuming that the state is determined by the type of the hit game in which the player is executed first, it is determined whether the state is the hit type to which the game state disadvantageous to the player is given, and a specific entrance or a specific area is determined. There is a risk that the disadvantage of the game store side will increase due to the game method in which the game is performed so that the game ball does not enter.

The present gaming machine M1 is made for solving the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing disadvantages on the gaming store side.

According to the gaming machine M1, when the player tries to avoid being given a specific privilege type by confirming the notification information indicating the type of the privilege determined by the privilege type determining means, another privilege type is used. Even in this case, it becomes difficult to enter the specific ball entry means, so that there is an effect that the disadvantage on the amusement shop side can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine M1, the dynamic display mode determining means determines one dynamic display mode among different dynamic display modes in which the pseudo-stop mode in which the identification information is dynamically displayed and then temporarily stopped is combined. A gaming machine M2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine M2, the temporary stop in the pseudo-stop mode makes it difficult to understand the final stop timing of the identification information, and when a specific privilege game is executed, the gaming ball is sent to the specific entry means. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the execution of a game method for avoiding the entry of a ball.

The gaming machine M3 is characterized in that the gaming machine M1 or M2 has a variable control means for varying the entry rate of a ball entering the specific area according to the type of the privileged game executed by the privileged game executing means.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M1 or M2, the entry rate of entering a specific area can be changed depending on the type of privileged game to be executed, so that the probability of entering a specific area can be changed. Has the effect of being able to be easily controlled.

<Characteristic N group> (Direct hit production part 2)
There are an entry means that allows a game ball to enter, a determination means that can execute a determination when a game ball enters the entry means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means. The display means to be displayed, the dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information, and the dynamic display for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. A second privilege game different from the first privilege game and the first privilege game, which is advantageous to the player when the mode determining means and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are stopped and displayed on the display means. In a game having a privilege game execution means capable of executing the privilege game, the game ball can be entered during the period in which the first privilege game or the second privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. A specific ball-entry means, a specific area in which a game ball that has entered the specific ball-entry means can enter, and a game when the first privilege game is executed and the game ball enters the specific area. A privilege granting means for granting a first privilege advantageous to a player and, when the second privilege game is executed, granting a second privilege advantageous to the player regardless of entering the specific area. And an effect executing means capable of executing an effect spanning a period from the start of dynamic display of the identification information for showing the specific determination result to the entry into the specific ball entry means. A gaming machine N1 characterized by having.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a gaming ball into a starting port provided on the gaming board, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and a state after the hit game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous to the player is set depending on the type of the hit game. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is a problem that the game is only produced up to the hit game, the game becomes monotonous, and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

The present gaming machine N1 is made for solving the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing early boredom of a game.

According to the gaming machine N1, when the identification information for showing a specific determination result is displayed, the effect is executed during the period from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information to the entry into the specific area. Therefore, it is possible to expect that the identification information not only indicates a specific determination result but also to enter a specific area by the staging, and there is an effect that the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine N1, the effect executing means is characterized in that the effect of 1 is executed based on the type of privileged game given by a plurality of effects.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine N1, there is an effect that various effects can be executed.

In the gaming machine N1 or N2, the effect executing means is characterized in that if the game ball does not enter the specific area even after a preset period has elapsed, the effect is switched to the specific effect and executed. The gaming machine N3.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine N1 or N2, if the ball does not enter the specific area, the ball can be switched to the specific effect, so that it is effective for the player not to enter the specific area. It has the effect of being able to notify the pachinko machine.

<Characteristic P group> (A delay device is provided above the V attacker to prevent choro hitting)
There are an entry means that allows a game ball to enter, a determination means that can execute a determination when a game ball enters the entry means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means. The display means to be displayed, the dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information, and the dynamic display for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. It has an aspect determining means and a privileged game executing means capable of executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. In a game, a specific ball-entry means that allows a game ball to enter during a period in which the privilege game is being executed by the privilege game execution means, and a specific ball that can enter a game ball that has entered the specific ball-entry means. An area, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player when the gaming ball enters the specific region, and a privilege type determining means for determining the type of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means. When the identification information is stopped and displayed, the notification means for notifying the information regarding the type of the privilege determined by the privilege type determining means and the position where the game ball can be guided to the specific ball entry means. A gaming machine P1 comprising: an adjusting means for reducing the amount of flow of a gaming ball guided to a specific ball entering means for a predetermined period.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a gaming ball into a starting port provided on the gaming board, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and a state after the hit game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous to the player is set depending on the type of the hit game. As the type of the winning game, when the lottery result is displayed by a symbol or the like and notified, the notification is made in a predetermined notification mode so that the fairness of the game can be maintained. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when a game ball enters a specific entrance or a specific area during a hit game, the hit game is further executed, and the game is set after that. Assuming that the state is determined by the type of the hit game in which the player is executed first, it is determined whether the state is the hit type to which the game state disadvantageous to the player is given, and a specific entrance or a specific area is determined. There is a risk that the disadvantage of the game store side will increase due to the game method in which the game is performed so that the game ball does not enter.

The present gaming machine P1 is made for solving the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing disadvantages on the gaming store side.

According to the gaming machine P1, the amount of flow down for a predetermined period guided to the specific ball entry means is reduced by the adjusting means, so that the information notified by the notification means is discriminated and the game ball is inserted into the specific ball entry means. It has the effect of making it difficult to distinguish whether or not to make a ball.

In the gaming machine P1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball into a gaming area, a firing intensity variable means capable of varying the firing intensity launched by the launching means by the operation of a player, and a first method in which the gaming ball can flow down. It has one flow path and a second flow path in which the game ball flowing down the first flow path is difficult to flow down, and the adjusting means enters the game ball flowing down the second flow path into the specific ball. The gaming machine P2 is characterized in that it is distributed at a predetermined ratio to a specific flow path capable of entering the means and a flow path having difficulty in entering the specific ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P1, the amount of the gaming balls flowing down the second flow path and guided to the specific entry means can be easily reduced. effective.

In the gaming machine P1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball into a gaming area, a firing intensity variable means capable of varying the firing intensity launched by the launching means by the operation of a player, and a first method in which the gaming ball can flow down. It has one flow path and a second flow path that makes it difficult for the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path to flow down, and the adjusting means rolls the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path for a predetermined period or longer. The gaming machine P3 is characterized by having a rolling means capable of moving the gaming ball and discharging the gaming ball into a flow path guided to the specific entry means.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine P1, the gaming ball that has flowed down the second flow path for a predetermined period or longer is rolled by the adjusting means, so that the player has stopped launching the gaming ball. However, there is an effect that the game ball can be guided to the specific ball entry means after a lapse of a predetermined period.

In any of the gaming machines P1 to P3, the period from when the identification information for showing the specific determination result is stopped and displayed until the specific ball-entry means can enter the ball is to the second flow path. The gaming machine P4 is characterized in that it is configured to be shorter than the period from launching the gaming ball to reaching the specific entry means through the adjusting means.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines P1 to P3, it is necessary to continuously launch the gaming ball in order to enter the specific ball entry means. There is an effect that it is possible to regulate the game method that does not allow the special game to enter the specific ball entry means.

<Characteristic Q group> (Countermeasures against cholo hitting 2)
There are an entry means that allows a game ball to enter, a determination means that can execute a determination when a game ball enters the entry means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means. The display means to be displayed, the dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information, and the dynamic display for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. It has an aspect determining means and a privileged game executing means capable of executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. In a game, a specific ball-entry means that allows a game ball to enter during a period in which the privilege game is being executed by the privilege game execution means, and a specific ball that can enter a game ball that has entered the specific ball-entry means. A region, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player when a gaming ball enters the specific region, and a privilege type determining means for determining the type of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means. The pachinko / pachinko ball is guided to the specific ball-entry means at a position where the game ball can be guided to the specific ball-entry means. Gaming machine Q1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a gaming ball into a starting port provided on the gaming board, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and a state after the hit game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous to the player is set depending on the type of the hit game. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a risk that the disadvantage on the gaming store side will increase because the gaming method is performed so that the gaming ball does not enter a specific entrance or a specific area. was there.

The present gaming machine Q1 is made for solving the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing disadvantages on the gaming store side.

According to the gaming machine P1, the amount of flow down for a predetermined period guided to the specific ball entry means is reduced by the adjusting means, so that the information notified by the notification means is discriminated and the game ball is inserted into the specific ball entry means. It has the effect of making it difficult to distinguish whether or not to make a ball.

In the gaming machine Q1, a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball into a gaming area, a firing intensity variable means capable of varying the firing intensity emitted by the launching means by the operation of a player, and a first method in which the gaming ball can flow down. It has one flow path and a second flow path in which the game ball flowing down the first flow path is difficult to flow down, and the adjusting means enters the game ball flowing down the second flow path into the specific ball. The gaming machine Q2 is characterized in that it is distributed at a predetermined ratio to a specific flow path capable of entering the means and a flow path having difficulty in entering the specific ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q1, the amount of the gaming balls that are guided to the specific entry means among the gaming balls flowing down the second flow path can be easily reduced. effective.

In the gaming machine Q1, a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball into a gaming area, a firing intensity variable means capable of varying the firing intensity emitted by the launching means by the operation of a player, and a first method in which the gaming ball can flow down. It has one flow path and a second flow path that makes it difficult for the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path to flow down, and the adjusting means rolls the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path for a predetermined period or longer. The gaming machine Q3 is characterized by having a rolling means capable of moving the gaming ball and discharging the gaming ball into a flow path guided to the specific entry means.

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q1, the gaming ball that has flowed down the second flow path for a predetermined period or longer is rolled by the adjusting means, so that the player has stopped the firing of the gaming ball. However, there is an effect that the game ball can be guided to the specific ball entry means after a lapse of a predetermined period.

In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the period from when the identification information for showing the specific determination result is stopped and displayed until the specific ball-entry means can enter the ball is to the second flow path. The gaming machine Q4 is characterized in that it is configured to be shorter than the period from launching the gaming ball to reaching the specific entry means through the adjusting means.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, it is necessary to continuously launch the gaming ball in order to enter the specific ball entry means. There is an effect that it is possible to regulate the game method that does not allow the special game to enter the specific ball entry means.

<Characteristic R group> (Direction until passing V in small hit and direct hit)
The entry means capable of entering the game ball, the determination means capable of executing the determination when the game ball enters the entry means, and the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means are provided. The display means to be displayed, the dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information, and the dynamic display for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. A second privilege game different from the first privilege game and the first privilege game, which is advantageous to the player when the mode determining means and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are stopped and displayed on the display means. In a game having a privilege game execution means capable of executing the privilege game, the game ball can be entered during the period in which the first privilege game or the second privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. A specific ball-entry means, a specific area in which a game ball that has entered the specific ball-entry means can enter, and a game when the first privilege game is executed and the game ball enters the specific area. A privilege granting means for granting a first privilege advantageous to a player and, when the second privilege game is executed, granting a second privilege advantageous to the player regardless of entering the specific area. And an effect executing means capable of executing an effect spanning a period from the start of dynamic display of the identification information for showing the specific determination result to the entry into the specific ball entry means. , And the effect executing means executes a suggestion effect suggesting that the method of launching the gaming ball is gradually switched before the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. A gaming machine R1 characterized by being a thing.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a gaming ball into a starting port provided on the gaming board, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and a state after the hit game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous to the player is set depending on the type of the hit game. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is a problem that the game is only produced up to the hit game, the game becomes monotonous, and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

The present gaming machine N1 is made for solving the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing early boredom of a game.

According to the gaming machine N1, when the identification information for showing a specific determination result is displayed, the effect is executed during the period from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information to the entry into the specific area. Therefore, it is possible to expect that the identification information not only indicates a specific determination result but also to enter a specific area by the staging, and there is an effect that the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine R1, the effect executing means is characterized in that the effect of 1 is executed based on the type of privileged game given by the plurality of effects.

According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine R1, there is an effect that various effects can be executed.

In the gaming machines R1 or R2, the effect executing means is characterized in that if the game ball does not enter the specific area even after a preset period has elapsed, the effect is switched to the specific effect and executed. The gaming machine R3.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine R1 or R2, if the ball does not enter the specific area, the ball can be switched to the specific effect, so that it is effective for the player not to enter the specific area. It has the effect of being able to notify the pachinko machine.

<Characteristic S group> (Switching between two types of control for small hits and symbol hits)
The entry means on which the game ball can enter, the determination means capable of executing the determination when the game ball enters the entry means, and the identification information for showing the determination result by the determination means. The display means to be displayed, the dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information, and the dynamic display for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. The first privilege game that is advantageous to the player and the second privilege game that is different from the first privilege game when the mode determination means and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are stopped and displayed on the display means. In a game having a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game, a game ball can be entered during a period in which the first privilege game or the second privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. A specific ball entry means, a specific area in which a game ball that has entered the specific ball entry means can enter, and a game when the first privilege game is executed and the game ball enters the specific area. A privilege granting means for granting a first privilege advantageous to a player and, when the second privilege game is executed, granting a second privilege advantageous to the player regardless of entering the specific area. In the first state where the taxiway that guides the gaming ball that has entered the specific ball entry means to the specific area can be guided to the specific area and the second state where it is difficult to guide the game ball to the specific area. When the switching means for switching and the first privilege game are executed, the first switching information for switching the taxiway by the switching means is set, and when the second privilege game is executed, the said The gaming machine S1 is characterized by having a setting means for setting a second switching information different from the first switching information.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a starting port provided in the game board, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. The game is executed, and the state after the hit game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous to the player depending on the type of the hit game. It has been proposed that when a gaming ball enters the area, benefits such as winning games are further granted. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-9795).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming.

The present gaming machine P1 is made for solving the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine S1, the control method of the taxiway is switched between the first privilege game and the second privilege game, so that the player can be shown the guidance mode to a different specific area, and the interest of the game can be improved. There is an effect.

The gaming machine S2 is characterized in that the taxiway can be switched to the first state by switching the guidance path according to the second switching information.

According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine S1, the taxiway is switched to the first state by the second switching information, so that in the second privilege game, the gaming ball can be easily entered into a specific area. Even if it is a second privilege game, there is an effect that the player can be made to think that the second privilege is given by entering the specific area.

In the gaming machine S1 or S2, the first switching information is set to a plurality of different information, and the information of 1 is determined based on a predetermined rule.

According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine S1 or S2, there is an effect that the first switching information can be diversified and the guidance state of the taxiway can be switched in various ways.

<Characteristic T group> (Switch between 2 types for small hits and symbol hits 2)
The entry means on which the game ball can enter, the determination means capable of executing the determination when the game ball enters the entry means, and the identification information for showing the determination result by the determination means. The display means to be displayed, the dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information, and the dynamic display for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. The first privilege game that is advantageous to the player and the second privilege game that is different from the first privilege game when the mode determination means and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are stopped and displayed on the display means. In a game having a privilege game execution means capable of executing the privilege game, the game ball can be entered during the period when the first privilege game or the second privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. A specific ball entry means, a specific area in which a game ball that has entered the specific ball entry means can enter, and a game when the first privilege game is executed and the game ball enters the specific area. A privilege granting means for granting a first privilege advantageous to a player and, when the second privilege game is executed, granting a second privilege advantageous to the player regardless of entering the specific area. In the first state where the taxiway for guiding the gaming ball that has entered the specific ball entry means to the specific area can be guided to the specific area and the second state where it is difficult to guide the taxiway to the specific area. When the switching means for switching and the first privilege game are executed, the first switching information for switching the taxiway by the switching means is set, and when the second privilege game is executed, the said The gaming machine T1 comprising: a setting means for setting a second switching information for switching the taxiway to the first state.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a starting port provided in the game board, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. The game is executed, and the state after the hit game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous to the player depending on the type of the hit game. It has been proposed that when a gaming ball enters the area, benefits such as winning games are further granted. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-9795).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming.

The present gaming machine P1 is made for solving the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine S1, the control method of the taxiway is switched between the first privilege game and the second privilege game, so that the player can be shown the guidance mode to a different specific area, and the interest of the game can be improved. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine T1, the gaming ball reaches the specific area by different taxiways depending on whether the second state is switched to the first state by the second switching information or the first state is switched by the first switching information. The gaming machine T2, which is characterized by being guided by.

According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T1, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored at an early stage because he / she is guided to a specific region by different guidance.

In the gaming machine T1 or T2, the first switching information is set to a plurality of different information, and the information of 1 is determined based on a predetermined rule.

According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine T1 or T2, there is an effect that the first switching information can be diversified and the guidance state of the taxiway can be switched in various ways.

<Characteristic group U> (The production mode is set based on the length of the period from the special 2 prize to the special 2 fluctuation)
When the first determination condition is satisfied, the first determination means for executing the first determination, the acquisition means for acquiring the acquisition information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the acquisition information acquired by the acquisition means are predetermined. A storage means that can store up to a number, a second discrimination means that executes the second discrimination based on the acquired information stored in the storage means when the second discrimination condition is satisfied, and the first discrimination. It has a first identification information for showing the discrimination result of the means, or a dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the second identification information for showing the discrimination result of the second discrimination means for a predetermined period. In the game machine, while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, the dynamic display of the second identification information is not started, and the predetermined effect condition is satisfied. When the period effect executing means for executing the period effect based on the method and the first identification information are dynamically displayed, the dynamic display of the second identification information is started after a predetermined start condition is satisfied. It has a period determining means for determining the period up to, and an effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode in the period effect executed by the period effect executing means based on the determination result of the period determination means. A game machine U1 characterized by being present.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Further, there is a case in which a plurality of starting openings are provided and different lottery is executed according to the starting openings in which the game ball enters. Then, there is a device that executes a suggestion effect suggesting the result of the winning / failing lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into each starting port (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-13075). In such a gaming machine, if a game ball enters the other starting port while a winning / failing lottery is being executed based on the entry of the game ball into one starting port, the winning / failing during execution is executed. By preventing the new winning / failing lottery from being executed until the lottery is completed, it was possible to prevent the player from executing the winning / failing lottery excessively.

However, the period from when the game ball enters one of the starting ports until the winning / failing lottery (suggesting effect) based on the entry is executed is based on the entry of the game ball into the other starting opening. Since it differs depending on the situation of the winning / failing lottery to be executed, for example, after the game ball enters the starting opening, a suggestion effect for showing the lottery result of the winning / failing lottery executed based on the entry is executed. If the period until the end is long, it becomes difficult for the player to understand which entry-based suggestion effect is being executed, the effect of the suggestion effect is reduced, and the motivation for playing is reduced. there were. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by providing an effect capable of suppressing a decrease in the player's motivation to play the game.

According to the gaming machine U1, the effect of the period effect executed by the period effect execution means is based on the length of the period from the establishment of the predetermined start condition to the start of the dynamic display of the second identification information. Since the mode can be set, even if the period until the dynamic display of the second identification information is started is different, the period effect that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play when the period until the dynamic display of the second identification information is started is long.

The gaming machine U1 has a remaining period determining means for determining the residual dynamic display period of the dynamic display period of the first identification information, and the period determining means has the remaining period determined by the remaining period determining means. The gaming machine U2, characterized in that the period is determined based on the above.

According to the gaming machine U2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U1, the second identification information is obtained after a predetermined start condition is satisfied based on the residual dynamic display period of the first identification information being executed by the period determining means. Since the period until the dynamic display of is started can be determined, the accuracy of the determination result can be improved. Therefore, there is an effect that the period effect can be executed according to the actual game content and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machines U1 or U2, the predetermined start condition is satisfied when the acquisition means acquires the acquisition information, and the period determination means is said after the predetermined start condition is satisfied. The gaming machine U3 is characterized in that the period until the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the acquired information for which the start condition is satisfied is started is determined.

According to the gaming machine U3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U1 or U2, the period from the acquisition of the acquired information to the start of the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the acquired information is determined. Since the discrimination is performed by means, the accuracy of the discrimination result can be improved. Therefore, there is an effect that the period effect can be executed according to the actual game content and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine U3, the period effect executing means includes at least a period from the acquisition of the acquired information to the start of the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the acquired information. A gaming machine U4 characterized in that the period effect is executed during the effect period.

According to the gaming machine U4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine U3, as an effect period in which the period effect is executed, at least after the acquisition means acquires the acquired information, the second identification information based on the acquired information is dynamically dynamic. Since the period until the display is started can be set, it is possible to set the effect mode corresponding to the actual gaming situation during the period corresponding to the actual gaming situation. Therefore, there is an effect that the staging effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine U1 or U2 has a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game in which the acquisition condition is easily satisfied when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, and the period determination means is the specific game execution means. The period from the execution of the specific game to the start of the dynamic display of the second identification information is determined, and the period effect executing means is at least after the predetermined execution condition is satisfied. The gaming machine U5 is characterized in that the period effect is executed during the effect period including the period until the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the acquired information is started.

According to the gaming machine U5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U1 or U2, it is possible to determine the period until the dynamic display of the second identification information is started before the acquisition condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to set an effect mode for a longer period based on the determination result of the period determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the staging effect of the period staging can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine U5, when the specific game is executed by the specific game execution means, the dynamic display determination means capable of determining whether or not the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the dynamic display determination means. When it is determined that the first identification information is not dynamically displayed, the second period determination means for executing the determination of the second period different from the period determination means is provided, and the second period determination is performed. The means determines the period from the acquisition of the acquired information to the start of the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the acquired information in the state where the first identification information is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine U6 characterized by being a pachinko machine.

According to the gaming machine U6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U5, when the first identification information is not dynamically displayed at the timing when the discrimination can be executed by the period determining means, the second identification information is performed at a timing different from that timing. It is possible to execute the determination of the period determination means. Therefore, since the period from the establishment of the predetermined start condition to the start of the dynamic display of the second identification information can be determined at a plurality of timings, the period effect according to the actual game content is executed. It has the effect of making it easier.

In any of the gaming machines U1 to U6, the period effect executing means has a first period effect executed in a predetermined first period and a second period effect executed after the first period as the period effect. The gaming machine U7 is characterized in that at least the second period effect executed in the period effect is executed, and the effect mode setting means is for setting the effect mode of the second period effect.

According to the gaming machine U7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines U1 to U6, the common first period effect can be executed regardless of the determination result of the period determination means, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. There is an effect that the period production can be executed without giving.

In the gaming machine U7, when the discrimination result by the period discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, the effect mode setting means is a part of the effect mode of the first period effect as the effect mode of the second period effect. The gaming machine U8, which is characterized by setting.

According to the gaming machine U8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine U7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the effect mode of the first period effect can be set as the effect mode of the second period effect, whether the first period effect is executed or the second period effect is executed for the player. It can be difficult to understand. Therefore, even when the second period is determined to be long by the period determination means, there is an effect that the period effect can be executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

<Characteristic group V> (When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the normal figure long opening suggestion effect is executed)
A variable ball-entry means that can be changed into a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state, and the game ball enters the variable ball-in means. A discrimination means that executes discrimination when a discrimination condition is satisfied based on a ball, and a privilege granting means that can grant a privilege to a player when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result. In a gaming machine having a determination means for executing a determination when a determination condition is satisfied, and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for showing the result of the determination based on the determination condition for a predetermined period. The staging execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode. The variable ball-entry means has a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game for a predetermined period of time to change the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period, and the effect execution means satisfies a predetermined effect condition. The gaming machine V1 is characterized in that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific display mode.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, the winner of the game is first drawn by lottery, and when the lottery result is a hit, the player There was a special game that was advantageous to the player. Further, a movable member is provided at the starting port, and when the game ball is won in the second lottery executed when the game ball passes through the starting gate, the movable member is moved so that the game ball enters the starting port. There is something that makes it easier. In addition, there is one configured to execute a suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result of the second lottery to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-13075). In such a gaming machine, since the lottery result of the second lottery can be suggested by the suggestion effect, the player is expected to play the game while expecting that the gaming ball can be easily inserted into the starting opening. It was possible to improve the interest of the game.

However, there is a high possibility that the effect mode in which the player stops the firing of the game ball by executing the suggestion effect and restarts the game based on the effect result of the suggestion effect is a winning effect. In that case, the game is stopped until the suggestion effect is completed, and the game is restarted at the timing when the movable member moves, or the suggestion effect is likely to be out of order. Is to the other starting port during the period from when the game ball enters one of the starting ports until the suggestion effect is completed until the winning / failing lottery (suggesting effect) is executed based on the entry. Since it differs depending on the situation of the winning / failing lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball, for example, the lottery result of the winning / failing lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball after the game ball enters the starting port. If the period until the suggestion effect for showing is executed becomes long, it becomes difficult for the player to understand which entry-based suggestion effect is being executed, and the effect of the suggestion effect is reduced. , There was a problem that the motivation to play was reduced. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by providing an effect capable of suppressing a decrease in the player's motivation to play the game.

According to the gaming machine V1, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, it is possible to notify that the specific game is executed by the specific game executing means in the effect executed by the effect executing means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be enthusiastically played a game for establishing the staging condition, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine V1, as the types of the specific games executed by the specific game execution means, the first type corresponding to the first specific game that is advantageous to the player and the first type that is more disadvantageous than the first specific game. 2 It has a game type setting means capable of setting a second type corresponding to a specific game, and the effect executing means executes the effect when the first type is set by the game type setting means. A gaming machine V2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine V2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine V1, when the first specific game that is advantageous to the player is executed, the effect by the effect executing means is executed, so that the effect can be enhanced. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the gaming machines V1 or V2, a condition discriminating means capable of discriminating whether or not the staging condition is satisfied and a dynamic display of specific identification information for showing the result of the discriminating executed by the discriminating means are dynamically displayed for a predetermined period. It has a display means, and the condition determination means determines that the effect condition is satisfied when the specific identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. The gaming machine V3.

According to the gaming machine V3, since the effect condition can be satisfied when the specific identification information is dynamically displayed, the player is motivated to play the game of dynamically displaying the specific identification information. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine V3, it is determined whether the information holding means capable of holding the execution information indicating that the discrimination has been executed by the discriminating means and the execution information held by the information holding means satisfy the valid conditions. It has an effective condition determining means, and the condition determining means determines that the effect condition is satisfied even when it is determined by the effective condition determining means that the effective condition is satisfied. A gaming machine V4 characterized by being there.

According to the gaming machine V4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine V3, even if the specific identification information is not dynamically displayed, the staging condition can be satisfied as long as the execution information satisfies the valid condition. Therefore, even if a timing occurs in which the specific identification information is not dynamically displayed even though the game is performed in which the specific identification information is dynamically displayed, it is possible to execute the effect by the effect executing means. .. Therefore, it is possible to stably perform the production for the player who is enthusiastically playing the game, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In either of the gaming machines V3 or V4, an acquisition means capable of acquiring acquisition information when the acquisition condition is satisfied, and a storage means capable of storing the acquired information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number. When the determination condition is satisfied, the determination means makes the determination based on the acquisition information stored in the storage means, and the condition determination means is the acquisition means. Executes the first condition determination based on the acquisition of the acquired information, and executes the second condition determination based on the determination being executed by the determination means. A gaming machine characterized in that the effect is executed when it is determined that the effect condition is satisfied in either the result of the first condition determination or the result of the second condition determination. V5.

According to the gaming machine V5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine V3 or V4, it is possible to determine the establishment of the staging condition at a plurality of timings by the condition determining means, so that the player who is enthusiastically playing the game can be determined. There is an effect that the production can be performed stably and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine V1 or V5, the effect executing means is characterized in that, as the effect, a timing notification effect for notifying the timing at which the variable ball entry means becomes the first state can be executed. Machine V6.

According to the gaming machine V6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine V1 or V5, depending on the effect executed by the effect executing means, not only the determination result of the determination means but also the timing when the variable ball entry means becomes the first state is the game. Since the person is notified, the game can be enthusiastically performed so that the effect by the effect execution means is executed, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine V6, the effect executing means can execute a pseudo timing notification effect for notifying a timing different from the timing at which the variable ball entry means becomes the first state when the effect condition is not satisfied. A gaming machine V7 characterized by being a game machine.

According to the gaming machine V7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the effect condition is not satisfied, a timing different from the timing at which the variable ball entry means becomes the first state is notified, so that the game in which only the determination condition is satisfied without satisfying the effect condition is performed. There is an effect that the player who plays can be made to play a disadvantageous game.

The gaming machine V8 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines V1 to V7, the determination condition is more likely to be satisfied than the staging condition.

According to the gaming machine V8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines V1 to V7, the determination condition is easier to be satisfied than the production condition, so that the game is performed more enthusiastically in order to satisfy the production condition. It has the effect of being able to make it.

<Characteristic group W> (Notify the advantageous small hit winning with a higher probability than the distribution ratio during the time saving in the small hit winning production during the time saving)
When the acquisition means for acquiring the acquisition information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the storage means for storing the acquisition information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number, and the predetermined determination condition are satisfied, the above-mentioned A discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the acquired information stored in the storage means, and a first privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the first discrimination result are executed. In a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means capable of executing a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game when the second determination result is different from the first determination result. The game state setting means capable of setting the first game state after the end of the first privilege game or the second privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, and the acquisition information stored in the storage means are referred to. During the first game state, a pre-determination means for pre-determining before the determination based on the acquired information and a suggestion effect for indicating that the first privilege game or the second privilege game is executed are performed. The game state setting means has the effect execution means that can be executed, and the game state setting means has the first game state and the first game state based on the fact that a predetermined end condition is satisfied in the state where the first game state is set. Is to set a different second gaming state, and the effect executing means is based on the result of the prior determination corresponding to the acquired information in which the determination is executed after the predetermined end condition is satisfied. The gaming machine W1 characterized in that it is capable of performing suggestive effects.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, the winner of the game is first drawn by lottery, and when the lottery result is a hit, the player There was a special game that was advantageous to the player. Further, there is a case in which a plurality of privilege games having different degrees of advantage are configured to be executable, a plurality of game states can be set, and the selection ratio of the privilege games is different depending on the set game states. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-13075). Further, in recent gaming machines, in order to improve the soundness of the game, the ratio (so-called continuation rate) in which the gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, the time saving state or the probable change state) is set after the jackpot game is completed is low. (For example, 65% or less) There is something that suppresses the gambling of the game by setting it.

In such a gaming machine, for example, even if a hit (for example, a big hit or a small hit) is won in a state where an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is set, the advantageous gaming state is again set after the winning game is completed. Since the set ratio is suppressed, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to give a sense of expectation to the hit notification effect during the advantageous gaming state, and the motivation for playing is reduced. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by suppressing a decrease in the player's motivation to play the game.

According to the gaming machine W1, the suggestion effect executed during the first gaming state causes the first privileged game or the second privileged game, which is more advantageous than the first privileged game, to be executed based on the result of the preliminary determination. Is suggested. Then, since the suggestion effect can be executed based on the pre-discrimination result corresponding to the discrimination result of the discrimination means executed after the second game state is set, the privilege game is executed during the first game state. It can be easily suggested. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine W1, in the effect executing means, the pre-discrimination result corresponding to the acquired information in which the discrimination is executed after the predetermined end condition is satisfied is before the second discrimination result is shown. The gaming machine W1 is characterized in that the case where the pre-article discrimination result is obtained is easier to execute the suggestion effect than the case where the pre-discrimination result for showing the first discrimination result is obtained.

According to the gaming machine W2, the pre-discrimination result corresponding to the acquired information in which the discrimination is executed after the second gaming state is set based on the satisfaction of the end condition of the first gaming state indicates the second discrimination result. In the case, the suggestion effect by the effect execution means is more likely to be executed than in the case of showing the first determination result. As a result, when the suggestion effect is executed during the first game state, in addition to the determination result of the determination means executed during the first game state, the determination means executed after the second game state is set. In the configuration in which the suggestion effect is executed based on the pre-discrimination result corresponding to the determination result, the ratio of the second privilege game being executed when the first suggestion effect is executed can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine W2 has a ratio setting means capable of setting a ratio in which the discrimination result by the discrimination means becomes the first discrimination result and a ratio in which the second discrimination result becomes the second discrimination result, and the ratio setting means The feature is that the ratio of the second determination result is larger when the second gaming state is set than when the first gaming state is set. The gaming machine W3.

According to the gaming machine W3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine W1, it is possible to make it easier to obtain the second determination result in the second gaming state than in the first gaming state. As a result, it is possible to increase the ratio of the second privilege game being executed when the first suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines W1 to W3, the staging execution means has a period until the determination corresponding to the acquired information for which the pre-discrimination has been performed is executed by the pre-discrimination means as an effect period. A gaming machine W4 characterized by being capable of performing a suggestion effect.

According to W4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines W1 to W3, the suggestion effect is executed with the period until the determination corresponding to the pre-determined acquisition information is executed as the effect period. It has the effect of being able to increase.

<Characteristic X group> (When the condition for transitioning from the time saving state to the normal state is satisfied, the notification for executing a lot of special figure 2 fluctuations in the normal state is executed during the time saving state)
When the acquisition means for acquiring the acquisition information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the storage means for storing the acquisition information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number, and the predetermined determination condition are satisfied, the above-mentioned A discriminating means that executes a discriminant based on the acquired information stored in the storage means, and a privileged game that executes a privileged game that is advantageous to the player when the discriminating result by the discriminating means is a specific discriminating result. A game having an execution means, a first game state in which the acquisition means is easy to acquire the acquisition information, a second game state in which the acquisition means is more difficult to acquire than the first game state, and a game state setting means that can be set. In the machine, the game state setting means sets the second game state at least when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied while the first game state is set, and the storage means is used for the second game state. A notification mode setting that can set a storage number discriminating means that can discriminate the number of stored information and a notification mode based on the discrimination result of the storage number discriminating means in a state where the first gaming state is set. It has a means and a notification executing means capable of executing a notification operation in the notification mode set by the notification mode setting means, and the notification mode setting means has at least the storage at a specific timing of the first gaming state. The gaming machine X1 is characterized in that the notification mode is set based on the determination result of the number determination means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Further, there is a case in which a plurality of privilege games having different degrees of advantage are configured to be executable, a plurality of game states can be set, and the selection ratio of the privilege games is different depending on the set game states. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-13075). Further, in such a gaming machine, when a specific gaming state is set, a specific starting port is provided, which makes it easier to enter the ball than when another gaming state is set, and the game is played at the specific starting port. When a lottery based on the entry of a ball is executed, it is configured so that a privileged game with a higher degree of advantage is more likely to be executed than when a game ball enters another starting port, and further specified. There is a structure in which the right of lottery executed based on the entry of a game ball into the starting opening can be held and stored up to a predetermined number. In the gaming machine configured in this way, when a specific gaming state is set, the player can efficiently execute a lottery executed based on the entry of the gaming ball into the specific starting port. Therefore, it was possible to enthusiastically play a game with the aim of setting a specific game state.

However, when the end condition of the specific game state is satisfied, it becomes difficult to perform the lottery executed based on the game ball entering the specific start port. Therefore, as the end of the specific game state approaches, the player There was a problem that the motivation to play was reduced. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by suppressing a decrease in the player's motivation to play the game.

According to the gaming machine X1, the mode of notification executed by the notification executing means can be set according to the number of stored information stored in the storage means in the specific period of the first gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play a game for varying the number of stored information so that the notification execution means executes various modes of notification operation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. effective.

In the game machine X1, the notification executing means executes acquisition suggestion notification suggesting that the acquired information is acquired during the first gaming state, and the notification mode setting means is the storage number determination means. The gaming machine X2 is characterized in that, when it is determined that the acquired information stored in the storage means is not more than a predetermined number, a notification mode corresponding to the acquisition suggestion notification is set.

According to the gaming machine X2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine X1, the acquisition suggestion notification is executed when the number of acquired information stored in the storage means in the storage means in the first gaming state is equal to or less than a predetermined number. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game. Further, when the number of acquired information stored in the storage means in the first game state is larger than the predetermined number in a specific period, for example, when the storage means stores the upper limit number of acquired information, the acquisition suggestion is made. Since the notification can be configured not to be executed, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the content of the notification executed by the notification executing means.

In the gaming machine X1 or X2, based on the discrimination number measuring means for measuring the number of times of the discrimination executed by the discrimination means in the state where the first gaming state is set, and the measurement result by the discrimination number measuring means. , A transition condition determining means for determining whether the transition condition is satisfied, and the notification executing means from the time when the transition condition determining means determines that the transition condition is satisfied until the transition condition is satisfied. The gaming machine X3, characterized in that the notification effect is executed within a specific period of the above.

According to the gaming machine X3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine X2. That is, since the notification effect is executed after it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied, the player is made to play the game for acquiring the acquired information within a limited period of time. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game until the final period in which the first game state is set.

The game machine X3 has a period setting means capable of setting at least a first period and a second period set after the first period as the specific period, and the notification executing means has at least. , The notification effect is executed in the first period, and the second period effect is executed during the second period based on the determination result of the storage number determination means at the end timing of the first period. It has a period effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the above, and a second period effect execution means for executing the second period effect in the effect mode set by the period effect mode setting means. Characterized game machine X4.

According to the gaming machine X4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine X3, the effect mode of the second period effect is set based on the number of acquired information stored in the storage means after the notification effect is executed. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the staging effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine X4, the number of the acquired information stored in the storage means at the time when the first period is set and the acquired information stored in the storage means at the end of the first period. The period effect mode setting means has an increase number determining means capable of discriminating the number of acquired information stored in the storage means during the first period based on the number of the increase number. The gaming machine X5, characterized in that the effect mode is set based on the determination result of the means.

According to the game machine X5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine X4, the production mode of the second period effect is set based on the number of acquired information stored during the first period, so that the first period is set. By adjusting the number of acquired information stored at a certain point in time by the player, the number of acquired information stored during the first period can be varied, so that the production mode of the second period effect can be changed. .. Therefore, since it is possible to execute different effects according to the game content executed by the player, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine X4 or X5 has a pre-discrimination means for preliminarily discriminating the acquired information stored in the storage means before the discrimination based on the acquired information is executed, and the period effect mode setting means. The gaming machine X6 is characterized in that the effect mode is set based on the determination result of the advance determination means.

According to the gaming machine X6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine X5, the effect mode of the second period effect can be set based on the pre-determination result of the acquired information stored in the storage means, so that the player can set the effect mode. On the other hand, there is an effect that the second period production can be more interesting.

In the gaming machine X6, the second period effect executing means is a case where the discrimination result of the discriminating means being executed is other than the specific discriminating result, and the discriminating result of the pre-discriminating means is a specific discriminant result. When it is shown, it is characterized in that the second period effect is executed until the discrimination result of the discrimination means based on the acquisition information which is the specific discrimination result is notified. Game machine X7.

According to the gaming machine X7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine X6, when the discrimination result of the pre-discrimination means is a specific discriminant result, the staging execution means is used until the identification information corresponding to the pre-discrimination is stopped and displayed. The production is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can pay attention to the effect performed during the second period.

In the gaming machine X7, the effect mode setting means indicates a suggestion effect mode that suggests that the determination result of the pre-discrimination means is a specific determination result until the dynamic display being executed is stopped and displayed. A gaming machine X8 characterized by being set.

According to the gaming machine X8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine X7, it is suggested that the discrimination result of the pre-discrimination means is a specific discrimination result depending on the suggestion effect mode until the dynamic display during execution is stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which discrimination results in a specific discrimination result. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic Y group> (Multiple time-saving end conditions are set, and different benefits are given according to the established time-saving end conditions)
A discrimination means that executes discrimination when a predetermined discrimination condition is satisfied, and a privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result. A game having a game state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state in which the discrimination is easily executed by the discrimination means and a second gaming state in which the discrimination is more difficult to be executed than in the first gaming state. In the machine, the gaming state setting means sets the second gaming state at least based on the fact that a predetermined transition condition is satisfied while the first gaming state is set, and the transition is performed. As a condition, a transition condition setting means capable of setting a first transition condition and a second transition condition different from the first transition condition, and the transition condition set by the transition condition setting means are satisfied. Based on this, it has a privilege granting means capable of granting a predetermined privilege that is advantageous to the player, and the privilege granting means grants the first privilege when the first transition condition is satisfied, and the second privilege. The gaming machine Y1 is characterized in that a second privilege different from the first privilege is given when the transition condition is satisfied.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, the winner of the game is first drawn by lottery, and when the lottery result is a hit, the player There was a special game that was advantageous to the player. Further, a movable member is provided at the starting port, and when the game ball is won in the second lottery executed when the game ball passes through the starting gate, the movable member is moved so that the game ball enters the starting port. There is something that makes it easier. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-13075). In addition, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, when a specific gaming state is set, the fluctuation period of the second lottery is set shorter than when other gaming states are set, so that the specific gaming state is set. Is configured to execute more second lottery during the set period.

However, since the fluctuation period of the second lottery set in the specific gaming state is constant, there is a problem that the game in the specific gaming state becomes monotonous and the player's motivation to play is reduced. there were. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by suppressing a decrease in the player's motivation to play the game.

According to the gaming machine Y1, when the first gaming state in which the acquired information is easily acquired is set, it differs depending on the established transition condition among the plurality of transition conditions for transitioning from the first gaming state to the second gaming state. Benefits can be granted. Therefore, even though the first game state is set, it is possible to make it difficult to generate a situation in which the first game state ends without obtaining a privilege. Therefore, the first game state is set for the player. There is an effect that the game for setting can be enthusiastically performed and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine Y1, the transition condition setting means satisfies the condition that the determination number of the determination means executed in the state where the first gaming state is set reaches a predetermined number of times. 1 The gaming machine Y2 characterized in that it is set as a transition condition.

According to the gaming machine Y2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Y1, it is possible to set a limit on the number of discriminations of the discrimination means executed during the period in which the first gaming state is set, which is excessive for the player. It has the effect of suppressing the granting of benefits.

In the gaming machine Y1 or Y2, a variable ball entering means that can be varied into a first state in which the gaming ball can enter and a second state in which the gaming ball is more difficult to enter than the first state, and a predetermined execution. When the condition is satisfied, the variable ball-entry means has a specific game execution means for executing a specific game that can be changed to the first state for a predetermined period, and the discriminating means is the variable ball-entry means. The determination is executed based on the entry of the game ball, and the first game state set by the game state setting means is a game in which the specific game is more easily executed than the second game state. A gaming machine Y3 characterized by being in a state.

In the gaming machine Y3, the privilege granting means grants a gaming state in which the specific game is more easily executed than the first gaming state as the first privilege granted when the first transition condition is satisfied. The gaming machine Y4 characterized by being.

In the gaming machine Y4, a determination means capable of executing a determination when a determination condition is satisfied, and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination executed by the determination means for a predetermined period. , A dynamic display period setting means capable of setting a dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the predetermined execution condition is a display in which the identification information is specific. It is established when the stop display is performed in the mode, and the dynamic display period setting means is shorter when the first privilege is given than when the first privilege is not given. The gaming machine Y5, which is characterized by facilitating the setting of a target display period.

In the gaming machines Y1 or Y5, the transition condition setting means has a special discrimination result in which the discrimination result of the discrimination means executed in the state where the first gaming state is set is different from the specific discrimination result. The gaming machine Y6 is characterized in that a condition that is satisfied based on the number of times reaching a predetermined number of times is set as the second transition condition.

According to the gaming machine Y6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Y1 or Y2, the first gaming state shifts to the second gaming state according to the determination result of the discrimination means executed during the period in which the first gaming state is set. Therefore, the period during which the first gaming state continues can be indefinite. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting the first game state to continue for a long period of time, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AA group> (It makes it difficult for the player to understand the opportunity until the jackpot game is executed)
A privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the satisfaction of a predetermined execution condition, a first determination means for executing the first determination when the first determination condition is satisfied, and a first determination means. A second discriminant means for executing a second discriminant when a second discriminant condition different from the first discriminating condition is satisfied, a determination means for executing a determination when the determination condition is satisfied, and a gaming ball enter the ball. When the variable ball entry means that can be varied from the difficult first state to the second state in which the game ball is easier to enter than the first state, and the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific determination result. In a gaming machine having a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game that causes the variable ball entry means to be variable to the second state for a predetermined period, the second determination condition is that the variable ball entry means has a game ball. The first execution condition, or the first execution condition, which is established when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, can be established based on the fact that the ball has entered the ball. The privilege game is executed based on the establishment of the second execution condition that can be satisfied based on the determination result of the second determination means, and the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first. Execution of an effect for notifying the first information indicating that the determination result is the determination result or the second information indicating that the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result, using the same effect mode. The effect executing means has means, the period from the execution of the effect to the execution of the privilege game based on the satisfaction of the first execution condition, and the period from the execution of the effect to the execution of the effect. The gaming machine AA1 is characterized in that the effect is executed so that the period until the privileged game is executed based on the establishment of the second execution condition is the same.

Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a gaming ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the gaming board, a first lottery is executed in which the winning or losing of the game is drawn, and the lottery result is a hit. In some cases, a privileged game that is advantageous to the player is performed. Further, a movable member is provided at the starting port, and when the game ball is won in the second lottery executed when the game ball passes through the starting gate, the movable member is moved so that the game ball enters the starting port. There is something that makes it easier. Then, a first suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result of the first lottery to the player and a second suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result of the second lottery to the player can be executed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-115411). In such a gaming machine, by executing the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect, the player can play the game while giving a sense of expectation to both the first lottery and the second lottery. I was able to do it, and I was able to improve the interest of the game.

However, since the production mode of the effect executed by the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect is different, there is a problem that the player can easily determine the game situation and the player's motivation to play is reduced. .. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by suppressing a decrease in the player's motivation to play the game.

According to the gaming machine AA1, regardless of which execution condition is satisfied, the period from the execution of the effect to the execution of the privileged game by the effect execution means can be the same, so that the player can use the same period. It is possible to make it difficult to understand which execution condition the privileged game to be executed is based on. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AA1, the second execution condition is satisfied after the effect for notifying the second information indicating that the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result is executed by the effect execution means. The gaming machine AA2 is characterized by having a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect when it cannot be performed.

According to the game machine Z2, after the effect is executed by the effect execution means, the special effect can be executed when the privilege game cannot be executed, so that the player can easily understand the effect. It has the effect of being able to enhance the staging effect.

In the gaming machines AA1 to AA2, the gaming machine having a gaming area in which the gaming ball can flow down and a launching means capable of causing the gaming ball to reach the gaming area with variable firing intensity. The gaming area includes at least a first gaming area in which a gaming ball launched by the launching means at one firing intensity can flow down, and a gaming ball launched at a predetermined firing intensity different from the one firing intensity. A first ball-entry means that has a second game area different from the first game area that can flow down, and the first determination condition is satisfied by the game ball entering the first game area. And the specific ball-entry means for which the determination condition is satisfied when the game ball enters, and the variable ball-entry means and the privilege game execution means for the privileged game in the second game area. Is executed, the specific variable ball-entry means that can be changed from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the game ball is easier to enter than the first state is arranged. The gaming machine AA3 is characterized in that the effect executing means executes the effect in an effect mode including a variable firing notification for launching a game ball with the predetermined firing intensity.

According to the gaming machine AA3, since the notification for changing the firing intensity is executed based on the effect executed by the effect executing means, the timing for changing the firing intensity can be the same. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it more difficult to understand the execution opportunity of the specific game.

In the gaming machine AA3, the first period required for the gaming ball flowing down the second gaming area to reach the variable entry means and the gaming ball flowing down the second gaming area become the specific variable entry means. The gaming machine AA4 characterized in that the second period required to reach it is different from that of the second period.

According to the gaming machine AA4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AA3, the timing at which the ball flowing down the second gaming area enters the second variable entry means and the timing at which the ball enters the specific variable entry means are different. Therefore, it is possible to confirm in order whether the gaming ball flowing down the second gaming area enters the variable ball entry means or the specific variable entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the flow situation of the game ball can be more enjoyed.

In any of the gaming machines AA1 to AA4, the privileged game executing means has the dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result of the first discriminating means, and the privilege game executing means is the dynamic display means. When the identification information dynamically displayed by the player is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode indicating the specific determination result, the privilege game is executed, and the effect executing means is the dynamic display means. The gaming machine AA5 is characterized in that the effect is executed during the period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed.

<Characteristic AB group> (Provide a period to increase the number of special figure fluctuations that can be executed by opening the electric chew once)
A variable ball-entry means that can be changed into a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state, and when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied. The specific game execution means for executing the specific game in which the variable ball entry means can be changed to the first state for a predetermined period, and the discrimination condition that can be established based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means. When it is established, the discrimination means capable of executing the discrimination, the dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means for a predetermined period, and the dynamic display execution means thereof. When the dynamic display period setting means for setting the dynamic display period of the identification information to be executed and the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means are stopped and displayed in a specific display mode. In a gaming machine having a privileged game executing means capable of executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player, the variable input is performed by the specific game as the dynamic display period set by the dynamic display period setting means. The gaming machine AB1 is characterized in that the ball means has a specific period setting means capable of setting a specific period in which a short dynamic display period shorter than a predetermined period variable to the first state is easily set.

According to the gaming machine AB1, when the specific period is set by the specific period setting means, it becomes easy to set a dynamic display period shorter than the period in which one specific game is executed. This makes it possible to execute the determination of the discrimination means a plurality of times during one specific game period. It is possible to make the player play the game while expecting that a specific period is set, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AB1, the second discrimination means capable of executing a predetermined second discrimination and the second identification information for showing the result of the second discrimination executed by the second discrimination means are dynamically displayed for a predetermined period. As the dynamic display period of the second dynamic display means and the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display means, one of a plurality of dynamic display periods can be set. The second dynamic display period setting means is provided, and the predetermined execution condition is satisfied when the result of the second determination executed by the second determination means is a specific second determination result. The first gaming state in which the dynamic display period of the first period can be set by the second dynamic display period setting means, and the second period longer than the first gaming state. The gaming machine AB2 is characterized by having a second gaming state in which is easy to set, and a state setting means capable of setting at least.

According to the gaming machine AB2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AB1, there is an effect that the number of determinations by the determination means per unit time can be increased in the first gaming state than in the second gaming state.

In the gaming machines AB1 or AB2, the gaming state setting means is set as the first gaming state for an advantageous first gaming state that can be set for the first period and a second period shorter than the advantageous first gaming state. At least the possible disadvantageous first gaming state can be set, and the execution condition is satisfied when the advantageous first gaming state is set than when the disadvantaged first gaming state is set. A gaming machine AB3 characterized by being easy to use.

According to the gaming machine AB3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines AB1 or AB2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is easier to execute the special game if the first game state is set for a long period of time, so that the privilege game is executed during the first game state even though the first game state is set for a long period of time. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

In any of the gaming machines AB1 to AB3, there is a transition condition determining means capable of determining whether or not a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, and the gaming state setting means is in a state where the first gaming state is set. The second gaming state is set when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, and the execution condition is satisfied when it is determined by the transition condition determining means that a specific transition condition is satisfied. The gaming machine AB4 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine AB4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AB1 to AB3, a special game can be executed when a specific transition condition is satisfied and the first gaming state ends. It has the effect of allowing a person to play the game enthusiastically until the end.

The gaming machine AB4 is characterized by having a suggestion effect executing means that can execute the suggestion effect suggesting that the specific transition condition is satisfied while the first game state is set. Amusement machine AB5.

According to the gaming machine AB5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AB1 or AB2, a suggestion effect suggesting that a specific transition condition is satisfied while the first gaming state is set is executed, so that the suggestion effect is performed. When is executed, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

<Characteristic BA group> (BGM is reset when the power is restored)
A power supply means capable of supplying a predetermined power, a notification means capable of executing notification for indicating that the power has been supplied by the power supply means, and after the notification executed by the notification means is completed. In a gaming machine having an effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect and a voice output means capable of outputting voice based on voice data for a predetermined period, the voice output means can be notified by the notification means. It is determined that the voice is output from the start position of the voice data during the execution notification period, and the voice is output from a predetermined position of the voice data when the effect is executed by the effect executing means. Characterized game machine BA1.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and after a predetermined fluctuation time, the lottery result is a hit. Was performing a privileged game that was advantageous to the player. Further, if the power is turned off during the predetermined fluctuation time, the subtraction of the fluctuation time is stopped, the return screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and the subtraction of the stopped fluctuation time is restarted (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016). -No. 005505). In such a gaming machine, it was possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the power was turned on by displaying the return screen. There was a problem that it was not possible to clearly notify that the subtraction of the fluctuation time was resumed. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of notifying a player of a gaming situation at the time of power recovery in an easy-to-understand manner.

According to the gaming machine BA1, the sound output during the period during which the predetermined effect is being executed can be output even while the notification for indicating that the power is supplied is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the period for notifying that the power is supplied can be related to the subsequent period. In addition, at the timing when the notification for indicating that the power is supplied ends and the predetermined effect is started, the voice based on the voice data for the predetermined period is output from the specific position of the voice data. Since it is configured, it is possible to output the sound with the content corresponding to the effect executed after the period when the notification for indicating that the power is supplied is completed. Therefore, there is an effect that the sound can be output without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

When the above-mentioned gaming machine BA1 is used, it is between a determination means for determining whether or not the special figure fluctuation is executed when the power is turned off and a predetermined period in which the determination result is turned off. A memorable storage means is further provided, and when the power is supplied, if it is determined that the power is turned off during the fluctuation of the special figure, the special feature is provided during the notification period for notifying that the power is supplied. It is preferable to configure the BGM to be output during the fluctuation of the figure. As a result, it is possible to notify the player by voice that the special figure fluctuation is being executed while the notification for indicating that the power is supplied is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

Further, it is preferable to configure the period for notifying that the power is supplied to be continuously set until the start-up process is completed for the various control devices of the pachinko machine 10. With this configuration, it is possible to shorten the period for notifying that power has been supplied. If the power is turned off during the special map fluctuation, or if the special map fluctuation is started during the period for notifying that the power has been supplied, the period for notifying that the power has been supplied ends. , There is a possibility that the special figure fluctuation will straddle the timing when the normal display screen is displayed. In this case, the period from the time when the normal display screen is displayed until the end of the special figure fluctuation during execution is determined, and the variation effect (residual variation time corresponding effect) is set based on the determination result. Good to configure. As a result, it is possible for the player to easily understand the suggestion effect that suggests the lottery result of the special figure variation.

If the determination result of the remaining fluctuation time is within a predetermined time (for example, within 1 second), it is preferable to delay the end timing of the effect of notifying that the power is supplied by a predetermined time (1 second). .. As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of the residual variation time-corresponding effect only for a short period of time, which makes it difficult for the player to identify, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect.

<Characteristic BB group> (Background change timing is different according to the pattern fluctuation speed when the button is operated)
It is dynamically displayed by the discrimination means that executes a predetermined discrimination, the dynamic display execution means that causes the display means to dynamically display the identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the dynamic display execution means. A privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the above-mentioned identification state being stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, an operating means that can be operated by the player, and a predetermined operation being performed on the operating means. It is possible to execute an operation discriminating means capable of discriminating, a staging mode variable means for varying the staging mode based on the discriminating result of the operation discriminating means, and a staging corresponding to the staging mode variable by the staging mode variable means. Variable timing setting for setting the timing for changing the effect mode based on the effect execution means and the dynamic display speed of the identification information when it is determined by the operation determination means that the predetermined operation has been performed. A gaming machine BB1 characterized by having means and means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and after a predetermined fluctuation time, the lottery result is a hit. Was performing a privileged game that was advantageous to the player. Further, there is also one in which an operation means that can be operated by the player is provided and various effects are set based on the operation content of the player with respect to the operation means (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-18274). In such a gaming machine, by executing the operation effect, the effect mode can be changed according to the operation result of whether or not the player operates the operation means. Therefore, the operation means can be provided to the player. It was possible to operate enthusiastically, that is, to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game, but when the player participated in the game (when the operation means was operated in the operation production). Since there are few production modes to be executed, it has been desired to make it possible to set a wider variety of production modes and enhance the production effect.

According to the gaming machine BB, since the effect mode can be changed according to the fluctuation speed of the identification information at the timing when the player operates the operating means, it is possible to provide various effects. In the above-mentioned gaming machine BB, as the effect mode changed by the effect mode variable means, for example, the display mode of the background mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be considered. This makes it possible to change the timing at which the background mode is variably set according to the dynamic display speed of the identification information. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the background mode from being variably set in a state where the dynamic display speed of the identification information is slow, that is, a state immediately before the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, it is preferable to provide a notification means for notifying the player of the dynamic display speed of the current identification information. Thereby, when the operating means is operated to change the effect mode, the player can determine whether or not the effect mode is changed immediately afterwards. Further, when the period from the operation of the operating means by the player to change the effect mode to the change of the effect mode is longer than a predetermined period, the player can change the effect mode after the predetermined period elapses. It is good to configure to display the comment shown in. This makes it possible for the gaming company to easily grasp whether or not the gaming machine accepts the operation when the operation for changing the effect mode is executed.

Further, when an interval of a predetermined period or longer is provided from the operation of the operating means to the change of the staging mode, for example, the predetermined period is set up to the timing when the next special figure change is executed. Then it is good. With this configuration, it is possible to change the effect mode while the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the lottery result of the special drawing lottery is not executed.

<Characteristic BC group> (Switches the development effect according to the button operation timing and the number of operations)
An operation means that can be operated by the player, an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and a timing at which the operation determination means determines that the predetermined operation has been performed. The operation timing discriminating means capable of discriminating, the operation number measuring means capable of measuring the number of times the predetermined operation is determined to be performed by the operation discriminating means, the discriminating result of the operation timing discriminating means, and the operation number of times. Having an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode based on the measurement result of the measurement means, and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect according to the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means. The featured gaming machine BC1.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and after a predetermined fluctuation time, the lottery result is a hit. Was performing a privileged game that was advantageous to the player. Further, there is also one in which an operation means that can be operated by the player is provided and various effects are set based on the operation content of the player with respect to the operation means (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-18274). In such a gaming machine, the effect mode is set based on the operation content or the number of operations for the operating means. With the gaming machine configured in this way, it is difficult to set various production modes according to the operation content of the operating means, so that the production effect can be enhanced, but more various productions are possible. There has been a demand for a gaming machine whose mode can be set.

According to the gaming machine BC1, since the effect mode can be changed based on both the operation timing for the operation means and the number of operations, more various effects can be set and the effect can be enhanced. ..

In addition, in the gaming machine having the configuration of the gaming machine BC1, the continuous operation effect in which the effect mode changes in response to the operation to the operation means a plurality of times is configured to be executable, and the continuous operation effect is executed. Of these, it is preferable to set the effect mode variable timing of the subsequent continuous operation effect according to the operation timing of the predetermined number of times. Specifically, based on the operation timing for the first operation means during the period during which the continuous operation effect is being executed, the easiness of changing the effect mode for the second and subsequent operations for the operation means is different. Good to configure. With this configuration, various production modes can be set without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, in this case, regardless of the operation timing of the first operation means, it is preferable to set the same effect mode set for the first operation of the operation means. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the difference in the operation timing to the first operation means.

In addition, the effect mode to be executed after the continuous operation effect may be changed according to the effect mode of the continuous operation effect displayed in the state where the continuous operation effect is completed. As a result, the player can be enthusiastically participated in the continuous operation production. In addition, the continuous operation effect is configured to be executable based on the special figure change, and the effect mode to be executed after the continuous operation effect is set based on the effect result of the continuous operation effect and the lottery result of the special figure change. The effect mode variable condition (operation) of the continuous operation effect is based on the lottery result of the special figure variation and the operation timing of the predetermined number of times (for example, the first time) during the continuous operation effect period. It may be configured to set the number of operations of the means, the operation method, etc.).

<Characteristic BD group> (Provides a state in which the hold number display displayed on the liquid crystal is synchronized with the actual number of hold balls and a state in which the hold number is not synchronized).
The acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the discrimination means for executing the determination when the determination condition is satisfied based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the said acquisition means. To indicate a storage means that can store information up to a first predetermined number up to an upper limit, an effect execution means that can execute a predetermined effect a plurality of times, and a predetermined number until at least the determination condition for the information is satisfied. The display means includes a mode display means for displaying the display mode of the above, and the mode display means indicates the number of the information stored in the storage means when the first condition is satisfied. The first aspect for this purpose is displayed on the display means as the display mode, and when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, the effect is executed by the effect executing means. The gaming machine BD1 is characterized in that a second aspect for indicating the number of times is displayed on the display means as the display mode.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. The privilege game that became was executed. Further, a plurality of rights to execute the lottery are memorable so that the game can be played efficiently. Then, in a gaming machine configured to be able to store a plurality of rights (holds) for executing a lottery, there is one that displays a hold symbol for indicating the stored number of holds to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-18274). In such a gaming machine, since the player can easily grasp the current number of holdings, the game content can be determined based on the number of holdings, and efficient gaming can be performed. In addition, the stored hold has a function to determine the lottery result in advance before the lottery is actually executed, and the number of stored holds is a specific number. In that case, there was a case where a series of effects (continuous effects) were executed by using the period during which the lottery corresponding to the specific number of holds was executed. In such a continuous effect, the result of pre-determination for a plurality of holds can be executed by using a series of effects, so that the target lottery includes a hit rather than the effect based on one lottery result. It is possible to increase the possibility and make the player pay close attention to the production. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, when a new hold is acquired during the period during which the continuous effect is being executed, a hold symbol corresponding to the new hold is added to the hold symbol indicating the hold that is the target of the continuous effect. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to determine which reserved symbol is the target of the continuous effect, and there is a problem that the effect of the effect is reduced. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of notifying a player of a reserved symbol to be directed in an easy-to-understand manner.

According to the gaming machine BD1, the display mode indicating the storage number displayed on the display means displays the case where the storage number stored in the storage means is displayed according to the condition to be established, and the information indicating the number of times of the effect is displayed. Since it can be variably set depending on the case of playing, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Further, in the gaming machine having the configuration of the gaming machine BD1, it is preferable to provide a second display means capable of constantly displaying the stored number stored in the storage means separately from the display means. As a result, it is possible to reliably notify the player of the number of stored memories of the storage means that affect the result of the game. In this case, the second display means may be provided in the vicinity of the above-mentioned display means (for example, in the same liquid crystal display device), or may be configured to notify by the light emitting mode of the light emitting means such as an LED. Is also good.

Further, the display means may be configured to display the number of storages stored in the storage means by the second display means during the period in which the information indicating the number of times of the effect is displayed. Further, the second display means may be configured to be less conspicuous than the display means. With such a configuration, the player can be made to pay attention to the display mode displayed on the display means, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, when the display means displays information indicating the number of times of the effect, the display means may be configured to display the number of stored storage means corresponding to the number of determinations executed during the effect period, or the effect period. It may be configured to display based on the length of (for example, one display every 30 seconds). Further, a display indicating the number of times the third symbol is stopped (including a temporary stop) during the effect period may be used.

<Characteristic BE group> (Notice effect that is executed only when the background is changed)
An effect mode in which an effect mode is changed based on an operation means that can be operated by a player, an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and a determination result of the operation determination means. When the variable means, the effect executing means for executing the effect changed by the effect mode variable means, and the variable timing in which the effect mode is changed by the effect mode variable means satisfy specific conditions. , A game machine BE1 characterized by having a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. The privilege game that became was executed. In addition, there was a suggestion effect for the player to play the game while expecting the player to win the lottery result. Then, in order to increase the variation of the effect mode of the suggestion effect, there is one that variably configures the mode in which the suggestion effect is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-21399). Further, there is also one that changes the mode (background) in which the suggestion effect is executed based on the player operating the operating means. In such a gaming machine, by providing a variety of effects to the player by executing a dedicated suggestion effect according to the set mode, the effect of the effect can be enhanced. However, there is a problem that the player enthusiastically operates the operation means after seeing the special production corresponding to each mode, and the motivation to change the mode is reduced. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of causing a player to enthusiastically change a mode in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine BE1, since it is configured to be able to execute a dedicated effect when the effect mode is changed, it is possible to experience even if a long-term game is performed during the period in which each mode is set. It is possible to execute an effect that cannot be performed at the mode switching timing. Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically operate the operation means for the player who wants to experience various effects.

<Characteristic BF group> (A period for notifying the current mode and a period for not notifying are provided, and the current mode can be grasped by button operation even during the non-notifying period).
A mode setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of effect modes, an effect execution means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the effect mode set by the mode setting means, and a mode setting means. It has an effect mode notification means capable of notifying the effect mode, an operation means that can be operated by the player, and an operation determination unit that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means. , The staging mode notifying means determines that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means by the operation determination means during a predetermined first period or a second period different from the first period. The gaming machine BF1 is characterized in that, when the mode is set, information for indicating the effect mode set by the mode setting means is notified. According to the gaming machine BF1, a period for notifying the effect mode and a period for not notifying the effect mode are set, and the effect mode can be notified based on the operation to the operating means even during the period without notifying the effect mode. Therefore, the player can enthusiastically operate the operation means in order to grasp the effect mode. In this case, if a predetermined operation is not performed on the operating means during the second period, it may be configured to notify another information about the game. For example, the dynamic display of the identification information may be performed. It is preferable to notify the speed and the suggestion information suggesting the discrimination result of the discrimination means. Thereby, during the second period, the game information desired by the player can be selected based on the operation of the player to the operating means.

<Characteristic BG group> (Step up of button vibrator)
An operation means that can be operated by the player, an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, a vibration means that can vibrate the operation means, and a vibration means thereof. It is possible to change the vibration amount by the vibration amount changing means that can change the vibration amount that vibrates the operation means to a different vibration amount, and the vibration amount changing means based on the discrimination result of the operation discrimination means. It is characterized by having a period setting means for setting a possible variable period, and a suggestion effect executing means for executing a suggestion effect suggesting that the variable period is set by the period setting means. Game machine BG1. According to the gaming machine BG1, since the suggestion effect suggesting that the vibration amount of the operating means is variable is executed, the player can enthusiastically operate the operating means.

<Characteristic BH group> (The color of the button informs the speed of pattern fluctuation)
It is dynamically displayed by the discrimination means that executes a predetermined discrimination, the dynamic display execution means that causes the display means to dynamically display the identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the dynamic display execution means. A privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the above-mentioned identification state being stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, an operating means that can be operated by the player, and a predetermined operation being performed on the operating means. It has an operation discriminating means capable of discriminating, an operation staging executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the discriminating result of the operation discriminating means, and a mode variable means capable of varying the mode of the operation means. The mode-variable means is the mode in which the dynamic display speed of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is changed from a first speed to a second speed slower than the first speed. BH1 is a gaming machine characterized in that the speed is variable. According to the gaming machine BH1, the dynamic display speed of the identification information can be grasped depending on the mode of the operating means.

<Characteristic BI group> (Background changes depending on the combination of stop symbols)
The discrimination means that executes a predetermined discrimination, the dynamic display execution means that causes the display means to dynamically display the identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the discrimination result of the discrimination means are specific discrimination results. If this is the case, the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, and if the discrimination result of the discrimination means is other than the specific discrimination result, the identification information is displayed in a predetermined manner different from the specific display mode. In a gaming machine having a stop display means for displaying a stop in a display mode and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in the specific display mode by the stop display means. The stop display means can stop and display a plurality of display modes as the predetermined display mode, and the effect mode is changed based on the predetermined display mode stopped and displayed by the stop display means. The gaming machine BI1 is characterized by having a variable means and an effect executing means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the effect mode changed by the effect mode variable means. According to the gaming machine B11, even if the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined identification information, it is possible to pay attention to the display mode. In this case, when the player stops and displays the identification information in a predetermined stop display mode, the stop display mode may be selected. Specifically, it may be configured so that the player can select one stop display mode from a plurality of stop display modes by operating an operable operating means.

<Characteristic BJ group> (Prevention of leading by preparatory drive for accessory movement)
A display means for executing a predetermined effect display, an effect display control means for causing the display means to execute the effect display based on a predetermined effect scenario, a movable means for executing a predetermined effect operation, and the predetermined effect. It has an effect motion control means for causing the movable means to execute the effect operation based on the effect scenario, and an effect scenario setting means capable of setting one effect scenario from a plurality of effect scenarios as the effect scenario. The movable means is configured to be movable from at least the first position to a second position different from the first position, and is prepared to move the movable means to the initial position of the staging operation. The preparatory movement control means has a feasible preparatory movement control means, and the preparatory movement control means executes the preparatory movement before the effect display is executed by the effect display control means based on the effect scenario. A game machine BJ1 characterized by this. According to the gaming machine BJ1, by performing the preparatory movement in advance, it is possible to surely execute the production based on the production scenario. Furthermore, since the preparatory movement control is configured to be performed separately from the staging operation based on the staging scenario, the preparatory movement can be performed regardless of whether the staging operation is executed or not. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether or not the staging operation is executed even if the movable means is preparatory and movable.

<Characteristic BK group> (Replace the look-ahead result according to the operating state of the accessory)
Acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of acquisition conditions, discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and identification information for showing the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means. In a display means that can be displayed and a gaming machine to which a privilege is given when the identification information is stopped and displayed on the display means in a specific display mode, the information acquired by the acquisition means is at least the said for the information. Until the determination is executed, the storage means that can store up to the first predetermined number and the information stored in the storage means until the dynamic display of the identification information based on the information is started. A pre-determination means capable of pre-determining, an effect mode setting means capable of setting an effect mode of a specific effect based on the result of the pre-determination by the pre-determination means, and the effect set by the effect mode setting means. The specific effect executing means capable of executing the specific effect corresponding to the embodiment at a predetermined timing, and the specific effect executing means when the specific condition is satisfied at the timing when the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect. As the effect mode of the specific effect executed by the above-mentioned method, the effect mode replacement means for setting a replacement effect mode different from the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means is provided. Game machine BK1 to play. According to the gaming machine BK1, the effect mode set based on the determination result of the pre-discrimination means can be replaced with the replacement effect mode, so that the effect according to the situation can be executed and the effect of the effect is enhanced. be able to. In this case, as the effect mode in which the effect mode setting means can be set, the movable mode of the movable means that can move a predetermined range is used, and the effect mode is changed by the effect mode changing means based on the position information of the movable means. It is good to configure it so that it can be replaced. Specifically, when the position information of the movable means acquires the position where it is difficult to execute the movable mode, for example, the position information indicating a position different from the initial position of the movable mode, the movable means is used by the staging mode changing means. An effect mode that is not used, for example, an effect mode that uses only the display means may be set as a replacement effect mode. Further, by providing a movable control means for moving the above-mentioned movable means based on the operation of the operation means that can be operated by the player, and by using the above-mentioned technical idea for the gaming machine having enhanced the effect of the effect, the effect mode can be changed. The effect is more pronounced in the means.

<Characteristic BL group> (During the demo, the setting timing of the operation validity period differs depending on the game state)
The discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination, the dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information for showing the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, and the identification by the dynamic display execution means. A first gaming state in which a first period is easily set as a dynamic display period in which information is dynamically displayed, and a second gaming state in which a second period, which is a dynamic display period shorter than the first period, is easily set. , And a standby for setting a standby state when a predetermined standby condition is satisfied in a state where the dynamic display of the identification information is not executed by the dynamic display execution means. A predetermined state setting means, an operation means that can be operated by the player, an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and a predetermined result based on the determination result of the operation determination means. It has an operation effect executing means capable of executing an effect, and a valid period setting means for setting an operation valid period that can effectively determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means. In the case where the second period is set by the gaming state setting means, the valid period setting means sets the valid period after the standby state is set, as compared with the case where the first period is set. The gaming machine BL1 characterized in that the start timing of the valid period is set so that the period until the setting is long. According to the gaming machine BL1, the setting timing of the operation valid period for effectively determining the operation to the operating means can be changed according to the set gaming state, so that the operation is carelessly executed. Can be suppressed. Further, when the notification means for notifying the player that the operation valid period has been set is provided, it is possible to suppress the frequent notification by the notification means. In addition, while the second gaming state is set, it is preferable to configure the discriminating means so that the discriminating means can be easily executed. As a result, the second gaming state can be set to a more advantageous gaming state than the first gaming state. In this case, even if the standby state is set during the second gaming state, the standby state can be terminated in a short period of time.

<Characteristic BM group>
It is executed by a power supply means capable of supplying electric power to the game machine, a notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification based on the start of supply of the electric power by the power supply means, and the notification means thereof. The effect execution means capable of executing the predetermined effect based on the end of the notification, and the reproduction reproducible of the predetermined voice data based on the start of the supply of the electric power by the power supply means. In a gaming machine having a means and an audio output means capable of outputting audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the reproduction means, the notification is set as a reproduction start position of the audio data reproduced by the reproduction means. The gaming machine BM1 is provided with a reproduction start position setting means for setting a reproduction start position according to the mode of the notification by the means.

Conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines display an initial screen for notifying the player that the power has been turned on when the power is turned on (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-005505). In such a gaming machine, it has been required to make the gaming situation at the time of turning on the power easier to understand. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

According to the game machine BM1, a power supply means capable of supplying electric power to the game machine and a notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification based on the start of supply of the electric power by the power supply means. , The effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the end of the notification executed by the notification means, and the predetermined power supply means based on the start of the supply of the electric power. It has a reproduction means capable of reproducing audio data and an audio output means capable of outputting audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the reproduction means, and the audio data reproduced by the reproduction means. As the reproduction start position, the reproduction start position setting means for setting the reproduction start position according to the mode of the notification by the notification means is provided. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

In the gaming machine BM1, the reproduction start position setting means sets the reproduction start position so that the reproduction position at the end of the voice data is reproduced in accordance with the end timing of the notification. Game machine BM2.

According to the gaming machine BM2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BM1, there is an effect that the sound can be output more preferably.

In the gaming machine BM1 or BM2, the reproducing means is characterized in that the audio data is repeatedly reproduced at least until the predetermined effect is completed.

According to the gaming machine BM3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BM1 or BM2, the reproduction means repeatedly reproduces the audio data at least until the predetermined effect is completed, so that the audio is output more preferably. It has the effect of being able to.

In any of the gaming machines BM1 to BM3, an execution determination means for determining whether or not the execution condition of the predetermined effect is satisfied based on the start of the supply of the electric power by the electric power supply means is provided. The gaming machine BM4 is characterized in that the reproduction means reproduces the voice data based on the determination that the execution condition is satisfied by the execution determination means.

According to the gaming machine BM4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BM1 to BM3, the execution condition of the predetermined effect is satisfied based on the start of the power supply by the power supply means. The reproduction means is provided with an execution determination means for determining whether or not the presence or absence is present, and the reproduction means reproduces the audio data based on the determination that the execution condition is satisfied by the execution determination means. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

<Characteristic BN group>
It is dynamically displayed by the discrimination means that executes a predetermined discrimination, the dynamic display execution means that causes the display means to dynamically display the identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the dynamic display execution means. A privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, an operating means that can be operated by the player, and a predetermined operation being performed on the operating means. As a dynamic display speed of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means in a gaming machine having an operation discriminating means capable of discriminating between, at least a first speed and a second speed slower than the first speed thereof. A speed setting means capable of setting a speed, and a period shortening means for shortening a first period for dynamically displaying the identification information at the first speed when the discrimination result of the operation discrimination means is a specific discrimination result. The gaming machine BN1 characterized by having and.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some in which advantageous privilege games are executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). With such a gaming machine, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine BN1, a discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination, a dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a dynamic display thereof. A privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the identification state dynamically displayed by the executing means being stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, an operating means that can be operated by the player, and predetermined operating means for the operating means. The operation discriminating means capable of discriminating that the operation of the above operation has been performed, the staging mode variable means for varying the staging mode based on the discriminating result of the operation discriminating means, and the staging mode variable by the staging mode variable means. The effect mode is changed based on the effect execution means capable of executing the corresponding effect and the dynamic display speed of the identification information when it is determined by the operation determination means that the predetermined operation has been performed. It has a variable timing setting means for setting the timing. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine BN1 has an effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means, and the effect executing means is provided by the speed setting means. The gaming machine BN2 is characterized in that a different effect is executed according to the dynamic display speed of the identification information to be set.

According to the gaming machine BN2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BN1, different effects are executed according to the dynamic display speed of the identification information, so that the player can positively operate the operating means. .. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the gaming machine BN2, a second operation means different from the operation means, a second operation determination means capable of determining that a predetermined second operation has been performed on the second operation means, and the first period. The gaming machine BN3 is characterized by having a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect when the second operation is performed in a state where is set.

According to the gaming machine BN3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BN2, the player can be made to select whether to operate the operating means or the second operating means during the first period, and the player's game. You can increase your motivation to participate in. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic BO group>
An operation means that can be operated by the player, an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the predetermined operation by the operation determination means within a predetermined first period. Based on the operation timing determination means capable of determining the operation timing determined to have been performed and the determination result of the operation timing determination means, the effect mode during the second period set after the first period is set. The staging mode setting means is provided, and the staging execution means that can execute the staging according to the staging mode set by the staging mode setting means is provided, and the staging execution means is set by the staging mode setting means. BO1 is a gaming machine BO1 characterized in that a suggestive effect suggesting an effect mode during the second period is executed during the first period.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some in which advantageous privilege games are executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). With such a gaming machine, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the game machine BO1, the operation means that can be operated by the player, the operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the operation within a predetermined first period. A second set after the first period based on the operation timing discriminating means capable of discriminating the operation timing determined by the discriminating means and the discriminating result of the operation timing discriminating means. The effect execution means includes an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode during a period and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect according to the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means. The suggestion effect suggesting the effect mode during the second period set by the effect mode setting means is executed during the first period. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine BO1 has a measuring means for measuring the number of discriminations determined that the predetermined operation has been performed within the first period, and the staging mode setting means has the number of discriminations measured by the measuring means. The gaming machine BO2 is characterized in that the effect mode during the second period is set based on the operation timing in which is a specific number of times.

According to the gaming machine BO2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BO1, different effects are executed according to the dynamic display speed of the identification information, so that the player can positively operate the operating means. .. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the gaming machine BO2, the effect executing means is set by the effect mode setting means during the second period when the determination number of times measured by the measuring means is a predetermined number less than the specific number of times. The gaming machine BO3, which is characterized by performing a unified production that does not suggest a production mode.

According to the gaming machine BO3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BO2, it is possible to prevent the player from early grasping the effect mode set in the second period. Therefore, there is an effect that the staging effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristic BP group>
The discrimination means for acquiring information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the discrimination means for executing the discrimination when the discrimination condition is satisfied based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the discrimination result of the discrimination means are specified. A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the above, a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect for showing the determination result of the determination means, and the acquisition means. A storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the above method up to a first predetermined number up to a predetermined number, a display means capable of displaying a predetermined display mode, and a display means thereof, at least until the determination condition for the information is satisfied. As a display mode to be displayed on the screen, a specific display mode is displayed based on the fact that the number of information of the information stored in the storage means becomes a second predetermined number equal to or less than the first predetermined number. A third predetermined number of the second predetermined number or less among the display control means capable of the display and the information stored in the storage means at the time when the specific display mode is displayed by the display control means. The game BP1 is characterized by comprising an aspect ending means for terminating the display of the specific display aspect based on at least the information used in the discrimination by the discriminating means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some in which advantageous privilege games are executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). With such a gaming machine, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the game machine BP1, the acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the determination means for executing the determination based on the establishment of the determination condition based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the determination means thereof. A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result, and a specific effect for executing a specific effect for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means. It is possible to display the execution means, the storage means that can store the information acquired by the acquisition means up to a first predetermined number up to a predetermined number, and a predetermined display mode until at least the discrimination condition for the information is satisfied. As a display means and a display mode to be displayed on the display means, it is specified based on the fact that the number of information of the information stored in the storage means becomes a second predetermined number equal to or less than the first predetermined number. The second predetermined number of the display control means capable of displaying the display mode of the above and the information stored in the storage means at the time when the specific display mode is displayed by the display control means. It is provided with a mode ending means for terminating the display of the specific display mode based on at least the use of the following third predetermined number of the information for the discrimination by the discriminating means. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine BP1 is provided with a second display control means for causing the display means to display a number-of-times suggestion mode suggesting the number of discriminating counts of the remaining discriminating means executed by the end of the specific display mode. A gaming machine BP2 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine BP2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BP1, the number of times suggestion mode suggesting the number of times of discrimination of the remaining discriminating means executed by the end of the specific display mode is provided to the display means. Since the second display control means for displaying is provided, there is an effect that a display mode that is easier for the player to understand can be realized.

In the gaming machine BP2, when the specific display mode is not displayed, the information number suggestion mode suggesting the number of information of the information stored in the storage means is difficult to distinguish from the number suggestion mode. The gaming machine BP3, which comprises a third display control means for displaying.

According to the gaming machine BP3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BP2, the information number suggestion mode suggesting the number of information of the information stored in the storage means when the specific display mode is not displayed. Since the third display control means for displaying in a mode that is difficult to distinguish from the number-of-times suggestion mode is provided, there is an effect that the player can easily understand the meaning of the number-of-times suggestion mode.

In the gaming machine BP2 or BP3, the second display control means sets a predetermined specific condition when new information is stored in the storage means while the specific display mode is displayed. If is satisfied, the gaming machine BP4 is characterized in that the number of times suggested by the number-of-times suggestion mode is increased.

According to the gaming machine BP4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BP2 or BP3, the second display control means stores new information in the storage means while the specific display mode is displayed. In this case, if a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the number of times suggested by the number-of-times suggestion mode is increased, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Characteristic BQ group>
A privilege game that executes a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition and the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes a predetermined specific discrimination result. The specific effect of the specific effect is based on the fact that the execution means, the specific effect execution means for executing the specific effect for showing the determination result of the discriminating means, and the predetermined specific condition are satisfied during the execution of the specific effect. A gaming machine BQ1 comprising: a suggestion effect execution means for executing a suggestion effect capable of suggesting a type.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some in which advantageous privilege games are executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). With such a gaming machine, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine BQ1, the discriminant means for executing the discriminant based on the establishment of the discriminant condition and the discriminant result of the discriminant means are advantageous to the player based on the predetermined specific discriminant result. The privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game, the specific effect execution means for executing the specific effect for showing the determination result of the determination means, and the predetermined specific condition are satisfied during the execution of the specific effect. Based on this, a suggestion effect execution means for executing a suggestion effect capable of suggesting the type of the specific effect is provided. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the game machine BQ1, as the types of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means, the first specific effect in which the first effect mode is executed after at least a specific period has elapsed from the start of the specific effect, and the specific effect. One type is determined from a plurality of types including at least a second specific effect in which a second effect mode different from the first effect mode is executed after at least the specific period has elapsed from the start of the effect. A gaming machine comprising a type determining means, wherein the suggestion effect executing means executes the suggestion effect based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied before the specific period elapses. BQ2.

According to the game machine BQ2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine BQ1, as a type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means, the first effect mode is set after at least a specific period has elapsed from the start of the specific effect. A plurality of including at least a first specific effect to be executed and a second specific effect in which a second effect mode different from the first effect mode is executed after at least the specific period has elapsed from the start of the specific effect. A type determining means for determining one type from the types of the above is provided, and the suggestion effect executing means executes the suggestion effect based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied before the specific period elapses. It is something to do. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

The gaming machine BQ3 is characterized in that the gaming machine BQ1 or BQ2 is provided with an operating means that can be operated by a player, and the specific condition is satisfied based on an operation on the operating means.

According to the gaming machine BQ3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BQ1 or BQ2, an operating means that can be operated by the player is provided, and the specific condition is satisfied based on the operation of the operating means. , It is possible to positively operate the operation means for the player who wants to execute the suggestion effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to realize an effect mode according to the preference of the player.

<Characteristic BR group>
A mode setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of effect modes, an effect execution means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the effect mode set by the mode setting means, and a mode setting means. Based on the effect mode notification means capable of notifying the effect mode and the predetermined first condition being satisfied, the suppression period during which the effect mode notification means suppresses the notification of the effect mode is set. It is provided with a suppression period setting means and a notification control means for notifying the effect mode notification means of the effect mode based on the fact that a predetermined second condition is satisfied during the suppression period. A game machine BR1 characterized by being present.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some in which advantageous privilege games are executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). With such a gaming machine, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the game machine BR1, a mode setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of effect modes, and an effect executing means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the effect mode set by the mode setting means. , The notification of the effect mode by the effect mode notification means is suppressed based on the fact that the effect mode notification means capable of notifying the effect mode set by the mode setting means and the predetermined first condition are satisfied. A notification control for notifying the effect mode notification means of the effect mode based on the suppression period setting means for setting the suppression period and a predetermined second condition being satisfied during the suppression period. It is provided with means. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine BR1, the first operation for the operating means is detected during a specific period included in the staging period as the type of the operating means that can be operated by the player and the staging executed by the staging executing means. The effect type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least a specific effect in which a predetermined effect mode is executed based on the above means, and the suppression period setting means is provided for at least the specific period. The suppression period is set, and the effect mode notifying means notifies the effect mode based on the detection of the first operation on the operation means during a period different from the suppression period. A gaming machine BR2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine BR2, in addition to the effect of the game machine BR1, the operation means that can be operated by the player and the type of the effect executed by the effect execution means are the above-mentioned during a specific period included in the effect period. The suppression includes an effect type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least a specific effect in which a predetermined effect mode is executed based on the detection of the first operation on the operation means. The period setting means sets the suppression period at least for the specific period, and the effect mode notification means detects the first operation on the operation means during a period different from the suppression period. The effect mode is notified based on the above. This has the effect of improving the convenience of the player.

The gaming machine BQ3 is characterized in that the second condition is satisfied when a second operation different from the first operation is executed for the operating means.

According to the gaming machine BQ3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BQ2, the second condition is satisfied when a second operation different from the first operation is executed for the operating means. There is an effect that the convenience of the player can be further improved.

<Characteristic BS group>
Between the operation means that can be operated by the player, the specific effect execution means that executes the specific effect for which the effective period for treating the operation for the operation means as effective is set during the effect period of 1, and the effective period. The specific control execution means that executes a specific control based on the operation on the operation means, and the first control and the second control as the types of the specific control executed by the specific control execution means. When a control type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least, and a specific number of operations for the operating means are performed in the valid period of 1 as the type of the specific effect. A plurality of types including at least a first type in which the first control is easily executed, and a second type in which the second control is more likely to be executed when the operation is performed a specific number of times than the first type. The gaming machine BS1 is provided with a specific effect type determining means for determining one type from among the types.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some in which advantageous privilege games are executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). With such a gaming machine, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine BS1, an operation means that can be operated by the player, a specific effect execution means that executes a specific effect in which an effective period for treating the operation for the operation means as effective is set during the effect period of 1, and a specific effect execution means. The first is a specific control executing means that executes a specific control based on the operation performed on the operating means during the valid period, and a specific control type executed by the specific control executing means. A control type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least a control and a second control, and a specific number of operations for the operating means in the valid period of 1 as the type of the specific effect. The first type in which the first control is easily executed when the first control is performed, and the second type in which the second control is more likely to be executed when the operation is performed a specific number of times than the first type. It is provided with a specific effect type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine BS1, in the specific effect, the correspondence relationship between the number of operations for the operation means during the valid period and the type of control that is easily determined by the control type determination means is determined in advance for each type of the specific effect. The gaming machine BS2 characterized by being defined.

According to the gaming machine BS2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BS1, the specific effect corresponds to the number of operations for the operating means during the valid period and the type of control that is easily determined by the control type determining means. Since the relationship is predetermined for each type of the specific effect, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine BS1 or BS2, the first control is a control for vibrating the operating means with the first vibration intensity, and the second control is different from the first vibration intensity of the operating means. The gaming machine BS3 characterized in that it is a control for vibrating with a second vibration intensity.

According to the game machine BS3, in addition to the effect of the game machine BS1 or BS2, the first control is a control for vibrating the operating means with the first vibration intensity, and the second control is the operation. Since the means is controlled to vibrate with a second vibration intensity different from the first vibration intensity, it is possible to easily understand the type of the specific effect by checking the vibration intensity of the operating means. effective.

In any of the gaming machines BS1 to BS3, the specific effect has a correspondence relationship between the number of operations for the operation means during the valid period and the type of control that is easily determined by the control type determination means. The gaming machine BS4, which is characterized in that it is predetermined for each type of.

According to the gaming machine BS4, in addition to the effect of any one of BS1 to BS3, the display means capable of displaying the display mode and the specific control execution for the display means during the execution period of one specific effect. The display control means for displaying the history of the control executed by the means is provided. As a result, the type of the executed specific effect can be easily understood by the player, which has the effect of improving the convenience of the player.

<Characteristic BT group>
An operation means that can be operated by the player, an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and a predetermined operation effect can be executed based on the determination result of the operation determination means. The operation effect setting means for setting one of the operation effects from a plurality of the operation effects and the operation means as the operation effect executed by the operation effect execution means in the gaming machine having the operation effect execution means. The mode-variable means comprises a mode-variable means in which the mode of the above-mentioned can be changed, and the mode-variable means changes the mode of the operation means to a mode suggesting the one operation effect set by the operation effect setting means. The gaming machine BT1 characterized by being.

Here, conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on a game board surface, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, There are some that perform privileged games that are advantageous to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, there was a demand for further improvement in the interest of games. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine BT1, based on the operation means that can be operated by the player, the operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the determination result of the operation determination means. It has an operation effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined operation effect, and as the operation effect executed by the operation effect execution means, one operation effect is set from a plurality of the operation effects. The mode-variable means has a setting means and a mode-variable means in which the mode of the operation means can be changed, and the mode-variable means sets the mode of the operation means to the one operation effect set by the operation effect setting means. It is variable to the suggested embodiment. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine BT1 is characterized in that it has a light emitting means for emitting light in a region visible to the player in the operating means, and the mode changing means changes the light emitting mode of the light emitting means. BT2.

According to the gaming machine BT2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BT1. That is, it has a light emitting means for emitting light in a region visible to the player in the operating means, and the mode changing means changes the light emitting mode of the light emitting means. This has the effect of notifying the player who intends to operate the operating means of the current situation in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the gaming machine BT1 or BT2, a discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination, a dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a dynamic display thereof. The operation effect setting means has a privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the identification state dynamically displayed by the executing means being stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, and the identification information is dynamically displayed in the operation effect setting means. The gaming machine BT3 is characterized in that different operation effects can be set during the displayed period.

According to the gaming machine BT3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines BT1 or BT2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the discrimination means that executes a predetermined discrimination, the dynamic display execution means that causes the display means to dynamically display the identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the dynamic display execution means that dynamically displays the identification information. The operation effect setting means has a privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the displayed identification state being stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, and the operation effect setting means is during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed. It is possible to set different operation effects.

As a result, different operation effects are set during one dynamic display period, so that the player can enjoy the timing of operating the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic BU group>
A privilege to execute a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the display means capable of displaying the identification information, the discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination, and the discrimination result of the discrimination means to be a specific discrimination result. The dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the game execution means, the identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means in the display means, and the dynamic display as the type of the dynamic display by the dynamic display means. The first dynamic display type in which the first aspect is displayed after at least a specific period has elapsed from the start of the display, and the second aspect different from the first aspect after the specific period has elapsed are displayed. A mode selection means for selecting one mode from a plurality of types including at least a second dynamic display type, and between the start of the dynamic display of the identification information and the elapse of the specific period. A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect, and a first specific effect capable of suggesting that the first aspect is displayed as a type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. BU1 is a gaming machine comprising:, a second specific effect capable of suggesting that the second aspect is displayed, and a specific effect type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of including at least. ..

Here, conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on a game board surface, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, There are some that perform privileged games that are advantageous to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, there was a demand for further improvement in the interest of games. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine BU1, it is advantageous for the player based on the display means capable of displaying the identification information, the discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination, and the discrimination result of the discrimination means to be a specific discrimination result. The privilege game executing means for executing the privileged game, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means in the display means, and the dynamic display by the dynamic display means. As the type of, the first dynamic display type in which the first aspect is displayed after at least a specific period has elapsed from the start of the dynamic display, and the first aspect after the specific period has elapsed. A mode selection means for selecting one mode from a plurality of types including at least a second dynamic display type in which a different second mode is displayed, and the identification after the dynamic display of the identification information is started. It is suggested that the first aspect is displayed as a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect until the period elapses and a type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. It is provided with a specific effect type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of possible first specific effects and a second specific effect that can suggest that the second aspect is displayed. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the game machine BU1, the specific effect executing means can display a deviation effect mode showing an deviation determination result different from the specific determination result a plurality of times during the execution period of the specific effect of 1. The first specific effect is the combination of the off-effect modes displayed during the execution period of the specific effect of 1, and the second specific effect is the first combination. The gaming machine BU2 is characterized in that the combination of the deviation effect modes displayed during the execution period of the specific effect of 1 is a second combination different from the first combination.

According to the gaming machine BU2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BU1. That is, the specific effect executing means is configured to be able to display the deviation effect mode showing the deviation determination result different from the specific determination result a plurality of times during the execution period of the specific effect 1. In the first specific effect, the combination of the off-effect modes displayed during the execution period of the specific effect of 1 is the first combination, and the second specific effect is 1. The combination of the deviation effect modes displayed during the execution period of the specific effect is a second combination different from the first combination. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Characteristic BV group>
In a gaming machine having an effect control means capable of executing an effect control for executing a predetermined effect, the effect control means includes an effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the effect and an effect mode setting means thereof. It has an output means capable of outputting the effect information indicating the effect mode set by the above, and is a predetermined first with respect to the first effect means based on the effect information output by the output means. Based on the first effect control means for executing the effect operation and the effect information output by the output means, a predetermined second effect operation is executed by a second effect means different from the first effect means. The first staging control means has a second staging control means, and the first staging control means can output specific information included in the staging information output by the output means to the second staging control means. The gaming machine BV1 characterized by having the above.

Here, conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on a game board surface, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, There are some that perform privileged games that are advantageous to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, there was a demand for further improvement in the interest of games. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

According to the game machine BV1, in a game machine having an effect control means capable of executing an effect control for executing a predetermined effect, the effect control means is an effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the effect. And an output means capable of outputting the effect information indicating the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means, and based on the effect information output by the output means, the first effect means. A predetermined first effect control means for executing a predetermined first effect operation, and a second effect means different from the first effect means based on the effect information output by the output means. It has a second staging control means for executing a second staging operation, and the first staging control means transfers specific information included in the staging information output by the output means to the second staging control means. It has a specific information output means that can be output. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the game machine BV1, the effect mode setting means can set an overlapping effect mode using at least the first effect operation and the second effect operation, and the output means indicates the overlap effect mode. The effect information is output to the first effect control means, and the specific information output means outputs information indicating the second effect operation as the specific information to the second effect control means among the overlapping effect modes. A game machine BV2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine BV2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BV1. That is, the staging mode setting means can set an overlapping staging mode using at least the first staging operation and the second staging operation, and the output means has the staging information indicating the overlapping staging mode. Is output to the first staging control means, and the specific information output means outputs the information indicating the second staging operation to the second staging control means as the specific information in the overlapping staging mode. .. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine BV2, the effect mode setting means is characterized in that the overlap effect mode is set so that the start timing of the first effect operation is earlier than the start timing of the second effect operation. Game machine BV3.

According to the gaming machine BV3, the staging mode setting means sets the overlapping staging mode so that the start timing of the first staging operation is earlier than the start timing of the second staging operation. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Characteristic BW group>
When the first effect condition is satisfied while the first effect period is being set by the effect period setting means capable of setting a predetermined effect period and the effect period setting means, at least from the first position. While the first effect executing means capable of executing the first effect using the effect member movable to the second position different from the first position and the first effect period are set, the first effect is set. In a gaming machine having a second effect executing means capable of executing a second effect different from the first effect using a display means when a second effect condition different from the effect condition is satisfied, the first effect. A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect using the effect member and the display means, a movable state determining means for determining the movable state of the effect member, and the above-mentioned movable state determining means in the specific effect period within the effect period. It is characterized by having a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect different from the specific effect during the specific effect period when the determination result of the movable state determining means is a specific determination result. Game machine BW1 to play.

Here, conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on a game board surface, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, There are some that perform privileged games that are advantageous to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, there was a demand for further improvement in the interest of games. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

According to the game machine BW1, when the first effect condition is satisfied while the first effect period is set by the effect period setting means capable of setting a predetermined effect period and the effect period setting means. A first effect executing means capable of executing a first effect using an effect member movable from at least the first position to a second position different from the first position, and the first effect period are set. In the middle of the process, it has a second effect executing means that can execute a second effect different from the first effect using the display means when a second effect condition different from the first effect condition is satisfied. In the game machine, in the specific effect period within the first effect period, the specific effect execution means capable of executing the specific effect using the effect member and the display means, and the movable state of the effect member are determined. It has a movable situation determining means and a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect different from the specific effect during the specific effect period when the determination result of the movable state determining means is a specific determination result. It is a thing. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine BW1 is characterized in that the movable state discriminating means discriminates from the specific discriminant result when the staging member is not located at the first position.

According to the gaming machine BW2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BW1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the movable state discriminating means discriminates from the specific discriminant result when the staging member is not located at the first position. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine BW1 or BW2, the gaming machine BW3 is characterized in that the special effect executing means is for executing the special effect using the display means.

According to the gaming machine BW3, the special effect executing means executes the special effect using the display means. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In any of the gaming machines BW1 to BW3, the first one has an operating means that can be operated by the player and an operation determining means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means. The effect condition is satisfied when it is determined by the operation determining means that the predetermined operation has been performed.

According to the gaming machine BW4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BW1 to BW3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it has an operation means that can be operated by the player and an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the first effect condition is the operation determination means. It is established when it is determined that the predetermined operation has been performed. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine BW4, the valid period setting means capable of setting the operation valid period for which it is effectively determined that the predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means by the operation determining means, and the valid period setting means thereof. It has a period display means for causing the display means to display that the operation valid period is set.

According to the gaming machine BW5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BW4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it has an operation means that can be operated by the player and an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the first effect condition is the operation determination means. It is established when it is determined that the predetermined operation has been performed. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine BW4, the valid period setting means capable of setting the operation valid period for which it is effectively determined that the predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means by the operation determining means, and the valid period setting means thereof. It has a period display means for causing the display means to display that the operation valid period is set. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Characteristic BX group>
The discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination, the dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information for showing the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, and the identification by the dynamic display execution means. A first gaming state in which a first period can be set as a dynamic display period in which information is dynamically displayed, and a second gaming state in which a second period, which is a dynamic display period shorter than the first period, can be set. , A game state setting means that can set, a standby state setting means that sets a standby state when a predetermined standby condition is satisfied, an operation means that can be operated by a player, and a predetermined operation means. The operation discriminating means has an operation discriminating means capable of discriminating that the operation of the above operation has been performed, and an operation staging executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the discriminating result of the operation discriminating means. When the standby state is set by the standby state setting means, it is effectively determined that the predetermined operation has been performed, and the game state is set based on the game state setting means. The gaming machine BX1 having a standby condition variable setting means capable of variably setting the standby condition.

Here, conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on a game board surface, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, There are some that perform privileged games that are advantageous to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, there was a demand for further improvement in the interest of games. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine BX1, a discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination, a dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information for showing the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, and an operation thereof. A first game state in which the first period can be set as a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the target display execution means, and a second period, which is a dynamic display period shorter than the first period, are set. A game state setting means that can set a possible second game state, a standby state setting means that sets a standby state when a predetermined standby condition is satisfied, an operation means that can be operated by the player, and an operation means that can be operated by the player. It has an operation determining means capable of determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means, and an operation effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the discrimination result of the operation determining means. The operation determining means effectively determines that the predetermined operation has been performed when the waiting state is set by the waiting state setting means, and is set by the gaming state setting means. It has a standby condition variable setting means capable of variablely setting the standby condition based on the gaming state. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine BX1, the standby condition is satisfied when the length of the period during which the identification information is not dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means is a predetermined period, and the standby condition variable setting is established. The means is to variably set the waiting condition so that the waiting condition is less likely to be satisfied when the second gaming state is set than when the first gaming state is set. A gaming machine BX2 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine BX2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BX1. That is, the waiting condition is satisfied when the length of the period during which the identification information is not dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means is a predetermined period, and the waiting condition variable setting means is satisfied. The waiting condition is variably set so that the waiting condition is less likely to be satisfied when the second gaming state is set than when the first gaming state is set. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine BX1 or BX2, the gaming machine BX3 is characterized in that the second gaming state is easier to be discriminated by the discriminating means than the first gaming state.

According to the gaming machine BX3, the second gaming state is easier to discriminate by the discriminating means than the first gaming state. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Point where the player's pushing direction is from the back to the front>
In an operating device having an operating means for a player to push in, the operating device is arranged in a first state in a normal state and a position where the operating means projects from the first state with respect to the player. It is possible to configure two states, and it is provided with an urging means that urges the operating means from the first state to the second state, and the pushing direction of the operating means in the second state is from the back side to the front side for the player. A gaming machine A1 characterized in that it is oriented toward the side.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14421).
See Publication No. 8). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the effect is performed in a manner that raises the expectation of the big hit to the player at the advance position, the player can easily operate the operation means at the advance position with a large acceleration. , It was necessary to design the strength of the operating means to be high. In this case, there is a problem that the operating means becomes heavy as a whole and the driving means for driving the operating means becomes large.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, when the pushing operation is performed in the second state, the pushing direction of the operating means is the direction from the back side to the front side for the player, so that the player moves straight up and down. Then, the momentum of pushing can be released by causing the part that cannot be operated as a slip between the player's hand and the operating means.

In addition, when the operating means is pushed around the shoulders and elbows from the player's playing posture,
Since it becomes difficult to apply a force toward the front, the force applied by the player to the operating means can be naturally weakened.

In the gaming machine A1, the operating device is configured to be rotatable around a shaft rod arranged on the back side of the player, and can be tilted up and down around the shaft rod, and has the operating means. A gaming machine A2 comprising tilting means, the tilting means arranging the operating means in the second state toward the opposite direction of the player.

According to the gaming machine A2, the tilting means having the operating means is configured to rotate, and the operating means are arranged in the opposite direction of the player in the second state, so that the game can be played in the second state. It is possible to prevent a person from hitting an operating means.

In addition, by placing the hand near the shaft rod and tilting the hand with that position as the fulcrum, the operating means can be easily pushed in, so it is possible to provide a new pushing operation method in which the acceleration of pushing is hard to be attached. , It is possible to prevent the operating device from being damaged by the pushing operation of the player.

As a new pushing operation method, for example, the outer side surface of the left little finger is placed near the shaft rod, and the palm is placed near the operating means with the palm raised in the vertical direction, and the thumb side is directed toward the operating means. Examples include a method of operating by tilting the palm, and a method of dropping the palm toward the operating means from a state where the tip of the middle finger is placed near the shaft rod and the palm is placed facing the operating means. Will be done.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the gaming machine A3 is characterized in that, in the first state, the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means is the vertical direction.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means in the first state is the vertical direction, so that the second state is ensured while ensuring the operability in the first state. It is possible to prevent destruction by pushing in the state.

In the gaming machine A3, the operating device includes a driving means for generating the driving force for the automatic operation while the operating means is configured to be automatically operable, and the driving force of the driving device is pushed by the player. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that it acts in the direction in which it acts and does not act in the opposite direction.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3, the driving force of the driving means for automatically operating the operating device acts only in the pushing operation direction, so that the driving force is in the direction facing the operating direction of the player. Can be prevented from acting. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being damaged by the operation of the player.

For example, by adopting a configuration in which only the button can be pushed in, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being pulled from the player in the opposite direction when performing the operation of retracting the button and receiving a high load on the driving means.

In the gaming machine A4, a maintenance state for maintaining the operation device in the first state or the second state can be formed, and a maintenance means operated by the drive means is provided, and the drive means is said to be via an eccentric portion. The operating means has a rotating means for transmitting a driving force, and the rotating means can change the phase between the first phase and the second phase different from the first phase while keeping the maintaining means in the maintenance state. In the first phase and the second phase, the range in which the operating means can move is changed when the maintenance state is released, and in both the first phase and the second phase, the movable range is changed.
A gaming machine A5 configured to be able to release the maintenance state by the same rotation.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A4, the phase of the driving means can be changed while the maintenance means is kept in the maintenance state, and the movement for releasing the maintenance state is rotated in the phase after the change. By making it a means, it is possible to change the movement width in which the operating device moves by the urging means. Therefore, it is possible to configure a plurality of operation modes by the urging means.

In the gaming machine A5, the maintenance means is movable in the urging direction of the urging means in the maintenance state, and the moving speed of the maintaining means increases or decreases according to the rotation speed of the rotating means. A6 gaming machine configured in such a manner that the operating means moves following the movement of the maintaining means.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A5, the movement of the urging means in the direction of the urging force is caused only by the urging force, so that the mode of movement is limited to one. Since it is possible to add a movement mode of moving following the maintenance means to the operation means, it is possible to increase the types of movement modes of the operation means. As a result, the degree of attention of the operating device can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the second state is provided with a light emitting means disposed inside the operating device and irradiating light toward the player, as compared with the first state. However, from the player's point of view, the gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the area of the operating means is reduced and the irradiation range of the light emitted by the light emitting means is expanded.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, a light emitting means is provided, and the second state is irradiated by the light emitting means from the player's point of view as compared with the first state. Since the irradiation range of the light to be emitted is expanded and the area of the operating means is reduced, the player can pay attention to the light and the effect of the effect can be improved, and it is difficult to press the operating means without aiming. It is possible to reduce the power of the player at the time of operation.

In the gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transparent material, and the area of the exposed portion of the light emitting means changes as the operating means moves away from the display means in close proximity to the display means. A featured gaming machine A8.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A7, the operating means is composed of a non-transparent material, and the operating means moves away from the display means in close proximity to the display means. Since the area of the exposed portion of the above changes, it is possible to prevent the emitted light from being reflected on the display means and making the image of the display means difficult to see.

<Points where the repulsive force during normal times is small while making it possible to respond to repeated hits>
In an operating device having an operating means capable of allowing the player to operate up to the terminal position, the first state and the second state in which the range of motion of the operation up to the terminal position is wider than that of the first state.
It is provided with a first driving means capable of forming a state and generating a driving force for moving from the second state to the first state, and provided with an urging means for generating an urging force for moving from the first state to the second state. The gaming machine B1 is characterized by comprising a second driving means for generating a driving force for moving the operating means from the first state to the second state according to the operation of the player.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14421).
See Publication No. 8). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the force for returning the operating means to the initial position is generated by the spring, and the driving motor automatically operates the operating means. However, it is better to lower the elastic constant of the spring to drive the motor. However, in that case, the return of the operating means is delayed, and when the player's operation is fast, the operating means does not follow the player's operation, which makes it difficult for the player to perform the continuous striking operation. There was a problem.

According to the gaming machine B1 2
By pushing back the operating means with the driving means, the return can be speeded up, so that the player can enjoy the continuous striking operation.

The gaming machine B1 is provided with a continuous striking discriminating means for determining whether or not a continuous striking operation is performed based on the sensor detection value of the stroke operating means within a predetermined time, and the second driving means is determined by the detection value of the continuous striking discriminating means. A gaming machine B2 characterized by determining whether or not to drive it.

According to the gaming machine B2, since it is determined whether or not to drive the second driving means based on the detection value of the continuous hitting discrimination means, the player does not perform the continuous hitting operation (for example, a single push operation or a long press). It is possible to prevent the player from feeling the load of pushing the hand back by operating the second driving means even when the player is performing an operation or the like.

In the gaming machine B2, the terminal detecting means for detecting the position of the operating means and detecting whether or not the operating means is arranged at the terminal position, and whether or not the operating means is arranged at a position changed by a predetermined amount from the terminal position. The movement direction determining means is provided with a position difference detecting means for detecting and a moving direction determining means for determining the moving direction of the operating means from the time relationship between the detection value of the terminal detecting means and the detection value of the position difference detecting means. The gaming machine B3, characterized in that the second driving means is driven when the direction of movement determined by the above is the direction of returning from the push-in end to the first state.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, when the direction of movement determined by the moving direction determining means is the direction of returning from the push end to the first state, that is, the player's hand is from the button. Since the second driving means is driven at the timing of moving in the direction of separation, it is possible to generate a load that pushes back the operating means in a form synchronized with the movement of the player.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second drive device from operating in the direction facing the moving direction of the player's hand and applying a high load to the player's hand.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the second driving means is characterized by being composed of a voice coil motor that vibrates and displaces along the direction connecting the first state and the second state of the operating means. Gaming machine B4.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the vibration displacement of the voice coil motor can be effectively used to generate a driving force for moving the operating means.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, a support frame for supporting the operation means is provided, and the second drive means elastically supports a drive motor for rotating the eccentric weight and the drive motor on the support frame. A mode in which a support means is provided, and the closer the operating means is to the terminal position, the greater the driving force for moving the operating means from the position of the first state to the position of the second state. The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the eccentric weight abuts on the support frame in a state where the operating means is arranged at the terminal position to generate a driving force.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the driving force by the second driving means is generated by the driving force generated by the supporting means and the contact between the eccentric weight and the support frame. By generating it separately from the driving force, it is possible to adjust the driving force given to the operating means while maintaining the rotation of the driving motor. At this time, it is not necessary to control the start or stop of the rotation of the drive motor, and the rotation of the drive motor can be maintained.

In the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight moves close to the support frame in the moving direction of the operation means based on the operation means being arranged at the terminal position, and abuts on the support frame. A gaming machine B6 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight moves close to the support frame in the moving direction of the operating means and comes into contact with the support frame, so that the repulsive force generated by the contact is used. Then, the drive motor can be moved in the direction away from the support frame in the moving direction of the operating means. As a result, the supporting means that supports the driving motor moves in a direction away from the support frame (direction close to the operating means), so that the driving force that pushes back the operating means can be further increased.

<Points of using VCM as a braking device and a vibration effecting device>
A detection sensor for detecting a position near the terminal position of the operating means is provided, and the detection sensor is composed of a plurality of sensors, a measuring means for measuring the speed of the operating means from the detection interval of the detection sensor, and the measuring means thereof. The threshold determination means is provided with a threshold determination means for determining whether or not the measured value measured by the above is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold, and a repulsion means for generating a driving force in the direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operating means. When the measured threshold value is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value, the driving force generated by the repulsive means increases as compared with the case where the threshold value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or lower than the predetermined threshold value. Characteristic gaming machine C1.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14421).
See Publication No. 8). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, if the player emphasizes light operation, the operation resistance becomes low and the operation means may be damaged by the operation of the player, while if the operation means is firmly supported, the movement of the operation means itself is affected. It is possible to reduce the speed and the possibility that the operating means will be damaged, but there is a problem that the force required for the player's operation increases and the operation of the operating means becomes a burden for the weak player. ..

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the threshold value determining means determines whether the speed of the operating means is equal to or higher than the threshold value, and if the speed is equal to or higher than the threshold value, the driving force generated by the repulsive means is increased. Therefore, the operation resistance can be reduced when the speed of the operation means is equal to or less than the threshold value, and the operation means can be decelerated only when necessary. Therefore, the repulsive means can improve the operability and prevent the destruction.

In the game machine C1, the repulsive means includes a voice coil motor that generates a driving force in the direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operating means, and the threshold measured by the threshold determining means is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold. Before the control for pushing the voice coil motor to the extended position is executed and the operating means is arranged in a position where the voice coil motor can be in contact with the voice coil motor.
A gaming machine C2 characterized in that the voice coil motor is driven in advance.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, the voice coil motor can be driven and controlled to decelerate the operating means, and the operating means are arranged at a position where they can come into contact with the voice coil motor. By driving the voice coil motor before the operation, the impact generated between the operating means and the voice coil motor can be suppressed.

The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that, after the operating means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other, the gaming machine C1 or C2 is controlled to increase the current flowing through the voice coil motor.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the operating means is controlled by increasing the current flowing through the voice coil motor after the operating means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other. It is possible to gradually improve the degree of braking of the operating means while suppressing the generation of a large load at the moment of contact with the voice coil motor, and it is possible to reduce the discomfort felt by the player during operation.

In the gaming machine C1, the repulsive means is arranged so as to be in contact with the operating means, and the gaming machine C4 is characterized in that a driving force corresponding to a deformation amount deformed by the movement of the operating means is generated by spring elasticity. ..

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the repulsive means generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation by spring elasticity, so that the driving force is not delayed even when the moving speed of the operating means is high. Can be generated.

In the gaming machine C4, the repulsion means is compared when the value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold value and when the value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold value. The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that the movable region of the end portion of the repulsive means, which is the end portion on the opposite side to the operating means, is narrowed.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C4, the movable area of the end of the repulsive means on the opposite side of the side that comes into contact with the operating means is narrowed, so that the operating means can be operated. When the speed is high, the elastic force generated by the repulsive means can be increased.

<Prevents damage to the driving means by blocking the transmission of driving force with a clutch>
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device includes a driving means for generating a driving force for operating the operating means, a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means. A release means for releasing the transmission of the driving force is provided, and the release means is provided with the driving force when the load generated between the driving means and the operating means via the transmitting means becomes a predetermined amount or more. A gaming machine D1 characterized by canceling transmission.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14421).
See Publication No. 8). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the operating means is automatically operated for staging, if the operating means is operated during the automatic operation, a large load may be generated on the drive system. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the releasing means is configured to release the transmission of the driving force when the load generated between the driving means and the operating means via the transmitting means becomes a predetermined amount or more. Therefore, even if the player operates the operating means when the operating means is automatically operated, the transmission of the load to the drive system is canceled (disconnected), and the load applied to the drive system can be suppressed. can.

In the gaming machine D1, the driving means is capable of driving in the first direction and driving in the second direction opposite to the first direction, and is being driven in the first direction. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the release by the release means functions regardless of whether the drive is in the second direction.

Here, when it is determined whether or not the transmission of the driving force can be canceled depending on the operating direction of the driving means,
If the operating means is operated by the player when the driving means is driven in an operating direction in which the transmission of the driving force cannot be released, a large load may be generated on the driving means. Therefore, the degree of freedom in the production when the operation means is operated to produce the effect is reduced.

When the button is driven between the first position and the second position, the lock member that locks the button is moved in the release direction or in the release direction depending on whether the drive means rotates in the forward direction or in the reverse direction. Switch whether to move in the opposite direction. In this case, it is possible to create two modes of button operation (two patterns, a release pattern and a non-release pattern), but it is necessary that the driving force is interrupted in both of them.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the transmission of the driving force can be canceled (disconnected) in both directions of the driving direction regardless of the driving direction of the driving means. , It is possible to improve the degree of freedom of operation of the effect of automatically operating the operation means.

As a method of releasing the transmission, the clutch moves in a direction intersecting the operating direction of the driving means. The crossing direction is intended to exclude, for example, the circumferential direction when the driving means rotates, and the clutch may move in the rotation axis direction or in the radial direction.

The gaming machine D1 or D2 includes an urging means for urging the driving means and the transmitting means to a state in which the driving force can be transmitted, and the releasing means is a contact portion between the driving means and the transmitting means. Each of the convex portions is provided with engaging teeth that transmit a driving force in a state where they are engaged with each other, and the engaging teeth have both sides facing the operating direction of the driving means from the contact surface. The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that it is configured to have a shape that is inclined with respect to the contact surface in a manner that tapers as the distance increases.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the urging means presses the driving means and the transmitting means, and the releasing means exerts a driving force in a meshed state on the pressed contact surface. On the other hand, since both sides facing the operating direction of the driving means are provided with engaging teeth that are inclined so as to taper away from the contact surface, the transmitting means can be transmitted from the driving means by engaging the engaging teeth with each other. It can be separated, thereby canceling the transmission of the driving force.

Further, an urging force by the urging means is constantly applied between the driving means and the transmitting means, and when the transmitting means separates from the driving means, the urging force is applied to the operating direction of the driving means via the engaging teeth. A load is applied. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change in the load applied to the driving means between the state in which the driving force is transmitted and the state in which the transmission is released.

The size of the engaging portion of the engaging tooth becomes smaller in the circumferential direction of the transmitting means as the transmitting means moves away from the driving means. Therefore, when the phase difference between the transmission means and the driving means becomes large, it is possible to prevent the load generated in the circumferential direction of the transmission means from becoming excessive.

In addition, in the released state, the resistance does not disappear completely at a distance, but the resistance is periodically restored. As a result, when the player releases his hand, the button can be started to operate within a short time.

That is, when the button is driven, "as an effect", if the player holds the button,
One phase of button operation has passed. And if the player releases his hand in the middle and moves from the end of the one phase, the period when the button is stopped becomes long, and "
The feeling that "it started to move because the load on the player was released" is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D3, the operating means can be started within a short time after the player releases the hand and the load is released. As a result, it is possible to produce a feeling of movement because the load on the player has been released.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the engaging surface between the transmitting means and the releasing means is
A gaming machine D4 characterized in that it is formed from a sawtooth shape that engages with each other.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, when the load from the player is released, the releasing means can be easily returned to the engagement position with the transmitting means at an early stage.
That is, when the tip of the engaging surface has a plane parallel to the direction in which the transmitting means and the releasing means are close to each other, the transmitting means and the releasing means abut on the plane and the transmitting means of the releasing means are transmitted. It is possible to prevent the movement of the means from being stopped in the direction of proximity and separation. Therefore, the operation means can be started at an early stage after the load from the player is released.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the operation mode of the operating means differs depending on whether the driving means is continuously operated in the forward direction or the driving means is continuously operated in the reverse direction. The gaming machine D5 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, while preparing a plurality of operating modes of the operating means, the driving force transmission is released without being limited to any of the operating modes. It can be carried out.

In the gaming machine D5, when there is a difference in whether the driving means operates in the forward direction or the reverse direction, the operation mode of the operating means is the operation mode for a predetermined period from the start of the operation of the driving means. Similarly, the gaming machine D6 is characterized in that the operation after the lapse of a predetermined period is different.

According to the gaming machine D6, when there is a difference in the operating direction of the driving means in the operating mode of the operating means in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D5, the operating mode of the driving means is the same for a predetermined period from the start of the operation. Since the operation after the lapse of the predetermined period is different, the player's attention to the operating means can be improved.

Here, by entwining the difference in the operation mode of the operation means with information that is beneficial to the player, such as the jackpot expectation degree, the operation of the operation means is performed by the player for a predetermined period until the operation mode of the operation means changes. You can watch over.

Further, since this difference in the operation mode is caused by the difference in the operation direction of the drive means, if the operation direction of the drive means can be confirmed in advance, the player can grasp the difference in the jackpot expectation degree without watching the operation of the operation means. Can be done. However, since the driving means is usually hidden from the player and the difference in the operating direction cannot be recognized from the vibration sound or the like, the operating direction of the driving means cannot be confirmed in advance, and the player cannot confirm the operating direction. Can be watched over by the operation of the operating means.

<Change the position of the cam protrusion based on the rotation of the cam>
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device includes a driving means for generating a driving force for operating the operating means, a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, and a transmission means. The operating means is configured to operate between the first position and a second position different from the first position, and is a first means for suppressing the position of the operating means from changing from the first position. An urging means that urges the operating means from the first position toward the second position, and an operating means that moves the operating means from the first position to the second position by the urging force of the urging means. In a gaming machine including a terminal means for forming a movable end of the above in a variable manner, the first means suppresses a change in the position of the operating means by engaging with the operating means. A release load means for giving a load for disengaging the engagement of one means to the operation means to the first means is provided, disengagement by the release load means, and movement termination of the operation means in the termination means. The gaming machine E, characterized in that the change is performed by a single driving means.
1.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a movable operating means operated by a cam is fixed at the first position, and the fixing is released by a release load means, so that the urging force of the urging means is used to extend the movement. , There is a gaming machine in which the displacement amount of the overhanging motion can be changed by a terminal means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the displacement amount of the overhanging operation of the operating means is changed depending on the phase of the cam at the time of releasing the fixing, the phase of the cam at the time of releasing the fixing is changed in various ways. The cam for moving the means and the release load means for releasing the fixing were operated by different driving forces. Therefore, there is a problem that a plurality of driving means are required and the space for arranging the driving means becomes large.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine E1, the release load means for releasing the fixing of the operating means is driven by the driving means for driving the operating means. As a result, the number of drive means can be reduced because the drive means for changing the end position of the operation means by the end means and the drive means for moving the release load means can be used in combination.

In the gaming machine E1, the gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the change in the position of the releasing load means is performed based on the operation of the transmitting means.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, a change in the position of the releasing load means can be generated based on the operation of the transmitting means. The state of the load means can be determined. As a result, the number of arrangements of the detection means such as the position sensor for detecting the state of the release load means can be reduced, and the number of parts can be reduced.

As a method of switching the state of the release load means, when the transmission means is composed of a cam and the release load means is composed of a protrusion that rotates coaxially with the cam, a method of shifting the rotation cycle between the cam and the protrusion is used. , When the cam is placed in a predetermined phase, the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the protrusion are out of sync, and in other phases, the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the protrusion are synchronized.
Illustrated.

In the gaming machine E2, the release load means is subjected to a load given by the first means.
The gaming machine E3 is operably arranged with respect to the transmission means, and the operation of the release load means switches whether or not the release load means and the transmission means operate synchronously.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, the releasing load means is operably arranged with respect to the transmitting means by the load from the first means, and the releasing load means is operated by the operation of the releasing load means. Since it is switched whether or not the transmission means and the transmission means operate in synchronization, the synchronization state between the release load means and the transmission means can be changed without adding a member.

In the game machine E2, the transmission means includes a rotating first rotating member, the operating means is supported eccentrically with respect to the rotation axis of the first rotating member, and the release load means rotates a second rotation. A gaming machine E4 comprising a member, wherein the first rotating member and the second rotating member have different rotation cycles.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, the first rotating member and the second rotating member are operated by a single driving means, but since the rotation cycles are different, the second rotating means is predetermined. It is possible to prepare a plurality of types of phases of the first rotating member when the first means is released by abutting with the first means in phase.

According to this configuration, it is possible to prepare a plurality of types of terminal positions when the operation of the first means is released from the state where the operating means is maintained at the first position and the operation means is moved toward the second position. ,
The range of production can be expanded. For example, an effect of gradually moving the terminal position away from the first position and an effect of gradually moving the terminal position closer to the first position can be realized with the same configuration.

<Vibration device supported by soft case>
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device includes a first position of the operating means and a second position reached by the operating means when the player operates from the first position. In a gaming machine including a vibrating means configured to be movable between and having a vibrating vibrating portion and a receiving means arranged so as to be in contact with the vibrating portion, the operating means is arranged at the first position. Then, the vibrating portion is in a separated state in which it cannot abut on the receiving means, while when the operating means is arranged at the second position, the vibrating portion can abut on the receiving means. A gaming machine F1 characterized by being in contact with each other.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with an operating means that can be operated by the player and a vibration means that transmits vibration to the player via the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine (for example,).
See Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the vibrating means vibrates regardless of whether or not the operating means is operated, the vibration is transmitted to the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine. Or, since it is transmitted to the player who touches the frame of the gaming machine, when performing an effect of transmitting vibration immediately after operating the operating means,
It is necessary to operate the vibrating means after detecting the operation of the operating means. Therefore, after the player operates the operating means, it is necessary to operate the vibrating means before releasing the hand from the operating means, and the operation mode of the player (for example, an operation such as releasing the operating means at the moment when the operating means is pushed in). In some cases, the vibration may not start in time before the player releases the vibration, and there is a problem that the vibration may not be noticed by the player.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, whether or not the vibrating portion comes into contact with the receiving means depends on whether the operating means is arranged in the first position or is operated by the player and arranged in the second position. Since it changes, even when the vibrating portion is continuously vibrated, the player can feel the vibration for the first time by operating the operating means. Further, since the vibration of the vibrating portion is generated before the player pushes in, the vibrating portion can be vibrated before the player releases the hand, regardless of the mode of the player's operation. Vibration can be transmitted to a person.

In the gaming machine F1, the vibrating means is arranged so as to project over an occupied area occupied when the operating means is arranged at the second position in the separated state, and the operating means moves to the second position. The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the vibrating means is brought out of the occupied area to change to the contact state.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, the vibration means moves based on the movement of the operating means, so that the separated state changes to the contact state. Therefore, depending on the degree of movement of the operating means. The contact strength between the operating means or receiving means and the vibrating part can be changed.
The intensity of the transmitted vibration can also be changed. Therefore, the effect of changing the strength of the transmitted vibration with respect to the operation strength of the player can be performed by vibrating the vibrating means in the same manner without any particular change in the driving mode.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the vibrating means is supported by the receiving means via a supporting means having spring elasticity.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the support means can perform positioning with respect to the receiving means while suppressing the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the receiving means. As a result, the receiving means and the vibrating means can be separated from each other to prevent the transmission of vibration, and the displacement generated in the vibrating means during vibration can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine F3, the gaming machine F4 is characterized in that the supporting means expands and contracts based on the vibration of the vibrating portion in the contact state.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, the elasticity of the supporting means can be used to increase the load generated when the vibrating portion and the receiving means come into contact with each other. That is, the expansion and contraction of the support means can give momentum when the vibrating portion moves in a direction close to the receiving means.

In the gaming machine F3, the supporting means has a deformation resistance along the operating direction of the operating means.
The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that it is lowered as compared with the deformation resistance in the direction perpendicular to the operating direction of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, the direction in which the supporting means is deformed can be finely set when the operating means is operated and interferes with the supporting means due to the difference in the deformation resistance of the supporting means. can.

As a result, even if the difference in the amount of movement of the operating means is slight, the amount of expansion and contraction of the supporting means can be made different, and the load generated between the vibrating portion and the receiving means can be made different. ..

As a method of making the deformation resistance different, when the supporting means is composed of a rubber member surrounding the vibrating means, a method of extending the rubber legs along the operating direction of the operating means, or a method of supporting the supporting means surrounding the vibrating means. In the case of being composed of rubber members, a method of manufacturing the rubber members by two-color molding and changing the deformation resistance in each direction, and a rail that guides the operating means so that the operating means move in the direction along the operating direction. , A method of configuring the coil spring that urges the vibrating means along the operating direction of the operating means, and the like are exemplified.

The gaming machine F6 is characterized in that a portion of the gaming machine F3 with which the vibrating portion abuts is the receiving means, and the receiving means is configured as a means different from the operating means.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, the vibration is not transmitted to the player through the operating means, but is transmitted to the player through the receiving means which is a means different from the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the driving means via the operating means and the transmitting means, so that it is possible to suppress the state in which the driving means is loaded. This makes it possible to improve the durability of the drive means.

Further, since the vibration can be suppressed from being transmitted to the hand of the player who operates the operating means, it is possible to prevent the player who is surprised by the vibration from stopping the operation during the operation.

As the receiving means, for example, in the frame part of the game machine, the part near the upper plate to which the game ball is supplied, the edge part of the glass frame, etc., the player does not notice during the game. Examples include a part that may be touched by a hand, a storage part that partially surrounds the operating means, and the like.

<One-touch mounting of cam and shaft. Shape deformation (elastic deformation) is possible at the mounting part>
In an operation device having an operation means operated by a player, the operation device is configured so that the operation means can move between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and the operation means can be used. It is characterized by comprising a driving means for generating a driving force to be driven and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, and the transmitting means includes a deformed portion elastically deformed by an overload. Game machine G1 to play.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an operating means that can be operated by a player, a driving means that generates a driving force for driving the operating means, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force from the driving means to the operating means are provided. There is a gaming machine provided (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218).
.. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the operating means is gripped and fixed by the player, when the driving means generates a driving force for driving the operating means, the connecting portion between the transmitting means and the operating means or
There is a problem that a load is accumulated in the connecting portion between the transmitting means and the driving means, and these connecting portions may be damaged.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, when the operating device is overloaded, the deformed portion of the transmitting means is elastically deformed, so that the connecting portion between the operating means and the transmitting means and the driving means and the transmitting means are connected. The load given to the connecting portion with and can be relaxed.

In the gaming machine G1, the transmission means includes a cam member that is rotatably supported, the deformed portion constitutes a connecting portion with the rotating shaft of the cam member, and the elasticity of the deformed portion causes the rotation shaft. The gaming machine G2, which is characterized in that a fixing force of the above is generated.

According to the game machine G2, the deforming portion plays a role as a part responsible for elastic deformation of the cam member with respect to the rotation shaft of the transmission means, and a role as a part for generating a bearing force of the cam member with respect to the rotation shaft.
To prepare for. Therefore, the configuration of the transmission member can be simplified by combining the functions. For example, individual fixing members such as e-rings can be omitted.

In the game machine G2, the cam member includes a convex portion that is convexly provided in parallel with the axis of rotation, and the convex portion and the operating means are connected to each other, and the elastic deformation of the deformed portion is applied to the cam member. On the other hand, the gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the rotation axis is tilted.

Here, the elastic deformation of the transmission means can also be performed, for example, by displacing the convex portion along the circumferential direction of the cam member. However, in this case, it becomes difficult to form the cam member and the convex portion with one member, and the number of members may increase.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2, the elastic deformation of the deformed portion is such that the rotation axis is tilted with respect to the cam member, so that the convex portion is used as the cam member. On the other hand, as compared with the case of sliding movement, the cam member can be easily configured from a single member, and the member can be simplified.

In the game machine G3, the resistance of the elastic deformation of the deformed portion is compared with the rotating shaft in the first rotation direction in which the cam member is rotated about the straight line connecting the rotating shaft and the convex portion. A gaming machine characterized in that the deformation resistance is larger in the second rotation direction in which the straight line connecting the convex portion and the straight line perpendicular to both the extension direction of the rotation axis are rotated about the axis. G4.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effect of the game machine G3, by making the deformation resistance of the deformed part different for each direction, the state after the deformed part is elastically deformed in the direction of the rotation axis is better. Compared with the state before elastic deformation, the convex tip of the convex portion can be displaced in the direction along the circumferential direction of the cam member. As a result, the convex portion can be displaced along the direction in which the convex portion of the cam member tends to move, so that the load generated between the convex portion and the operating means due to the elastic deformation of the deformed portion is alleviated. can do.

The gaming machine G3 or G4 includes a friction member that is spaced apart by a predetermined distance along a direction parallel to the rotation axis of the cam member, and the deformed portion is elastically deformed to change the posture of the cam member. The gaming machine G5, characterized in that the cam member and the friction member come into contact with each other.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G3 or G4, when an overload is applied to the operating means, the deformed portion is elastically deformed, so that the cam member changes its posture, and the cam member and the friction member Can increase the operating resistance of the cam member itself, thereby reducing the load applied to the connecting portion between the cam member and the operating means.

A gaming machine G6 comprising a detection means for detecting that at least a part of the cam member is tilted and displaced with respect to an axis in any of the gaming machines G3 to G5.

Here, in a situation where the operating device is overloaded and the driving means is operating but the operating means is not operating, for example, the displacement expected due to the driving of the driving means and the actual displacement of the operating means. When detecting that an overload has occurred on the basis of the deviation from the above, it is necessary to drive the driving means for a predetermined period before detecting the occurrence of the overload. This period can be shortened as the arrangement interval of the detection means for detecting the displacement shift is smaller, but the smaller the arrangement interval of the detection means, the more complicated the configuration of the detection means becomes and the more expensive it becomes. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to configure the configuration so that the occurrence of overload can be detected at an early stage at low cost.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G3 to G5, the detecting means detects whether or not at least a part of the cam member is tilted and displaced with respect to the axis. Therefore, it is possible to determine that an overload has occurred at the same time that the detecting means detects at least a part of the cam member without having to drive the driving means for a predetermined period while suppressing the additional number of the detecting means. This makes it possible to reduce the load applied to the drive means when an overload occurs.

<Structure to prevent ball goat with thread. Pachinko machine H>
In a gaming machine provided with a foul ball passage through which a foul ball returning to the launching device can pass among the gaming balls launched into the game area, the foul ball passage allows the flowing game ball to pass through. The gaming machine H1 is provided with a one-way obstructing means for obstructing the progress of a backflowing object.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a fraudulent act performed by arranging a thread cutting blade inside a guide path for guiding the game ball from the upper plate to the launcher and driving the game ball to which the thread is connected into the game area. There is a gaming machine having a function of preventing (cutting a thread) (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-02).
See Publication No. 4179). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the thread is pressed against the thread trimming teeth at the time of firing, and the thread is cut by the tension generated at that time. However, when the firing strength of the gaming ball is weak, the gaming ball cannot be completely cut. It may be returned to the player as a foul ball.
Therefore, for example, an illegal tool with a game ball connected to both ends of the thread is prepared, and one of the game balls connected to one end of the thread is fired at a low firing strength to flow into the foul ball passage and returned to the player side. By driving the other game ball connected to the other end of the thread into the game area while holding one of the game balls, the thread can be removed from the guide path and one through the foul ball passage. Since it is possible to create a state in which the game ball of 1 and the other game ball are connected by a thread, a load is applied to the thread connected to the other game ball from the outside, and the other game ball arranged in the game area. There was a problem that there was a risk of being able to gain fraudulent profits by manipulating.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, even if a fraudulent act of applying a load to the other gaming ball is performed by using the thread guided to the gaming area through the foul ball passage, the one-way obstruction means. However, by obstructing the movement of the thread in the backflow direction of the game ball, it is possible to make it difficult to generate fraudulent profits.

In the gaming machine H1, the foul ball passage is provided with a bent portion that bends the flow path of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1, the thread guided along the path of the gaming ball can be rubbed against the bent portion, so that the thread can be cut at an early stage.

In the game machine H2, the bent portion is provided with a load means on the inner angle side of the bend, which does not give a load to the flowing game ball but gives a load to the backflowing object.
..

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H2, a load can be applied to a backflowing object (for example, a thread-shaped member) by the loading means.

In the gaming machine H3, the loading means is arranged in a recessed portion having a width smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H3, by preventing the gaming ball from entering the recess of the recessed portion, the loading means and the gaming ball are prevented from colliding with each other, and the loading means is damaged. It can be prevented from doing so.

The gaming machine H5 is characterized in that the gaming machine H3 or H4 is provided with a regulating means for restricting the movement of the loading means to the outside of the foul ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H3 or H4, the regulation means restricts the movement of the loading means to the outside of the foul ball passage, so that between the thread-like member and the loading means. When a load is generated, the load means is deformed to the outside of the foul ball passage, so that it is possible to prevent the load applied to the member on the yarn from being weakened.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, a receiving dish, which is a dish on which the foul ball first reaches on the front side of the front door, is provided, and the receiving dish is a portion for discharging the game ball to be paid out from the payout device. The gaming machine H6 is characterized in that the ball discharging portion is arranged above the discharging side outlet of the foul ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the gaming ball discharged from the payout device passes in front of the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage, so that the game ball passes through the foul ball passage. When a fraudulent act of applying a load to the other game ball is performed using the thread guided to the game area, the game ball to be paid out is intentionally applied to apply a load and reduce the durability of the thread. be able to.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the lower end of the payout ball ejection portion, which is a portion for discharging the game ball to be dispensed from the payout device, is to the receiving dish, which is the dish on which the foul ball first reaches on the front side of the front door. , The gaming machine H7, characterized in that it is located below the lower end of the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, a fraudulent act of imposing a load on the other gaming ball was performed using the thread guided to the gaming area through the foul ball passage. In some cases, the payout ball can make it easier to damage the thread.

<Structure of board retainer. Pachinko machine I>
A gaming means used during a game and a receiving means having an opening on one side facing the gaming means and being able to accept the gaming means from that one side are provided, and the receiving means includes the gaming means. A state changing means capable of changing the gaming means from an unusable state, which is an unusable state, to a usable state, which is a usable state, is provided, and the state changing means puts the gaming means into the used state. The gaming machine I1 is provided with a proximity means that is close to the gaming means from one side.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, it is possible to rotate in a rotation direction parallel to the front surface of the game board, and the state changes between a fixed state in which the game board is fixed to the inner frame and a release state in which the game board can be removed from the inner frame. There is a gaming machine provided with a fixing means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-230420). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the fixing means is configured so that the fixing means can be changed only after the gaming board is pushed into the position in the used state. Therefore, when the gaming board is pushed halfway, it is pushed again. There is a problem that it is necessary to perform the repetitive work, and the work efficiency may be lowered.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, the state changing means is provided with a proximity means that is close to the gaming means from the receiving side (one side) when the gaming means is put into use, so that the gaming board is pushed in. Even if it is halfway, the proximity means comes into contact with the game board and applies a pushing force, so that
It has the effect of pushing the game board to the position where it is in use.

In the gaming machine I1, the state changing means is characterized in that the gaming means is displaced to the one side as the state changes to an unusable state that makes the gaming means unusable. ..

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1, the gaming means is displaced to the receiving side (one side) as the gaming means is changed to an unusable state, so that the gaming means is removed. It has the effect of improving the work efficiency of the work.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the state changing means is characterized in that the proximity means retracts to the outside of the gaming means as the gaming means becomes unusable. Game machine I3 to play.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1 or I2, the proximity means is retracted to the outside of the gaming means, so that the work efficiency of the removal work of the gaming means can be improved and it is a game. Since it is performed by disabling the means, the work efficiency can be further improved.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the state changing means is a gaming machine I4 including a contacting means that receives a load from the gaming means when the state changes to a usable state.

According to the gaming machine I4, when the contacting means receives a load from the gaming means, the state changing means changes to a usable state. Therefore, by pressing the gaming means against the state changing means, the state changing means can be used as a series of flows. The state can be changed to.

In the gaming machine I4, the gaming means is supported around one side of the receiving means and is configured to be accepted by the receiving means by being brought close to the other side, and the state changing means is the receiving means. The gaming machine I5, characterized in that it is arranged on the other side of the above.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I4, the width dimension of the gaming means is used.
A load can be efficiently applied to the contacting means via the gaming means.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, a closing means for closing the opening on one side of the receiving means is provided, and the closing means cannot be used by the state changing means so that the gaming means cannot be used. The gaming machine I6 is provided with a closing restricting unit that makes it impossible to close the opening on one side of the gaming means when maintaining the state.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the state changing means can use the gaming means depending on whether or not the closing means can close the opening on one side of the gaming means. It is possible to determine whether or not to do so. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the closing means closes the opening on one side of the gaming means even though the gaming means remains unusable.

<The reverse cup and harness band prevent the piano wire from getting stuck. Pachinko machine J>
A gaming means used during a game and a receiving means having an opening on one side facing the gaming means and being able to accept the gaming means from that one side are provided, and the receiving means is the above-mentioned gaming means. The gaming machine J1 is provided with an arranging means arranged in a path communicating with the outside, and the arranging means is configured to be able to suppress the entry of an object from the outside at a plurality of places.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines provided with a fraud prevention unit for preventing fraud against fraudulent acts of inserting a piano wire from the rotation axis side of the front frame (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-).
See Publication No. 26573). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that the fraud prevention unit is only in one place and the fraud prevention effect is not sufficient.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine J1, an arrangement means is arranged in a path where the piano wire may be inserted, and the arrangement means is configured to be able to suppress the entry of the piano wire at a plurality of places, thus preventing fraud. The effect of can be improved.

In the gaming machine J1, the arranging means includes a first means for suppressing the entry of a member from the outside at a first place and a second means for suppressing the entry of a member from the outside at a second place.
A gaming machine J2 characterized in that the entry of members from the outside is suppressed by different methods.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1, the method of suppressing the entry of the member from the outside differs between the first place and the second place, so that the placement means is simply placed. Compared with the case where the number of members is increased, the entry of members from the outside can be further suppressed.

The method of suppressing the invasion from the outside is not limited at all. For example, a method of suppressing entry by blocking the route may be used, or a method of suppressing fraudulent activity by detecting heat and sounding an alarm may be used.

The gaming machine J3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine J1 or J2, the arranging means includes an intrusion control portion formed from a cup shape that is opened toward the outside of the receiving means.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1 or J2, the intrusion restricting portion is formed from the cup shape, so that the invading member can be prevented from further invading.

In the gaming machine J3, the arranging means includes a supporting means for supporting the electric wiring, and the supporting means is arranged on the downstream side of the entry restricting portion in the route from the outside to the gaming means. Characterized gaming machine J4.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J3, when an illegality occurs in which the entry restricting portion is penetrated by high heat, changes (such as disconnection due to heat) caused in the wiring due to the high heat are detected from the outside. It is possible to easily generate the effect of suppressing the entry of the member.

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the arranging means refers to a member that has entered from the outside.
The gaming machine J5 is provided with a eliminating means for guiding to a eliminating area far from the gaming means.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the members entering from the outside are guided to the elimination area far from the gaming means by the arranging means, so that the members entering from the outside enter. Even if the degree becomes stronger, it is possible to prevent the member that has entered from the outside from reaching the gaming means.

<Structure of a decorative board with a five-sheet structure. Involved in fraud prevention. Pachinko machine K>
The first and second means are arranged so as to face each other along the first direction and at least one side is connected, and the first means and the second means are arranged along the first direction. In a gaming machine including the first means and the second means, a connecting portion for connecting the first means and the second means is provided, and the connecting direction of the connecting portion is set to a second direction intersecting with the first direction. The gaming machine K1 characterized by this.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the first means and the second means are arranged so as to face each other and are connected by at least one side, and are arranged between the first means and the second means along the first direction. There is a gaming machine provided with a third means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26573).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, each member is connected by an existing method such as bonding or screwing, but when the first means and the second means are connected, a load along the first direction is applied. There is a problem that the third means may be damaged by being applied to the three means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, since the connecting direction of the connecting portion connecting the first means and the second means is set to the second direction intersecting the first direction, the first direction is set to the third means. It is possible to reduce the load applied from the machine. This makes it possible to prevent the third means from being damaged.

The gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the connecting portion is arranged apart from the third means in the gaming machine K1.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied from the connecting portion to the third means.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the connected means to be connected and fixed to the other side of the first means and the second means is provided, and the one side of the first means and the second means is connected to the connected means. The gaming machine K3 is characterized in that the second means is displaced with respect to the first means in a third direction close to each other and fitted to each other to be connected to each other.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1 or K2, the connected means to be connected to the other sides of the first means and the second means is provided, and one side of the first means and the second means is provided. Is connected and fixed by the fitting generated by displacing the second means with respect to the first means in the third direction close to the connected means, so that the first means and the first means oriented in the direction intersecting the third direction and The resistance to decomposition of the second means can be improved.

In the gaming machine K3, the gaming machine K4 is characterized in that the one side of the first means and the second means is exposed to the outside and arranged.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K3, one side of the first means and the second means is exposed to the outside and arranged, so that the state of the fitting portion can be easily confirmed. be able to.
As a result, even when a fraudulent act of destroying the fitting portion and disassembling the first means and the second means occurs, the detection of the fraudulent act can be accelerated.

In the gaming machine K3 or K4, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed to the connected means, and the direction of fastening and fixing thereof is the same as the third direction. ..

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K3 or K4, the fastening direction between the first means and the second means and the connected means is set to be the same as the third direction. The tightening strength can reinforce the fitting strength.

In any of the gaming machines K3 to K5, one of the light irradiating means, which irradiates light toward the first means or the second means side and is fixed to the connected means, and the first means or the second means. The gaming machine K6 is characterized by comprising a light guide means fixed to the member of the above-mentioned member and configured to be able to introduce the light irradiated by the light irradiating means into the inside.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K3 to K5, it is possible to prevent the misalignment between the first means and the second means and the light guide means.

The gaming machine K6 is characterized in that the gaming machine K6 is provided with a contacting means that abuts on a surface in a region facing the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K6, the distance between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means is maintained by the size of the contacting means. Can be done.
This prevents the distance between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means from changing when the first means or the second means receives a load in the opposite direction and is displaced. Can be done.

This prevents the positional relationship between the first means, the second means, and the light guide means from changing even if a load is applied in the opposite direction when the first means or the second means illegally attempts to disassemble. can do.

<Point L for utilizing the curved light guide means. As a point, it has not been reached>
The light guide means formed in a curved wave shape in the irradiation direction of the light passing through the inside, and the projected means arranged facing the light guide means and projecting the light passing through the light guide means are provided. The gaming machine L1 is characterized in that the projected means includes a concave facing portion arranged to face the concave portion of the light guide means, and a convex facing portion facing the convex portion of the light guide means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a light guide plate that uniformly emits light emitted from an end surface (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26573). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the light guide plate is formed in the shape of a flat plate, it is necessary to change the intensity of the incident light in order to partially change the intensity of the light emitted from the surface. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, since the projected means includes the concave facing portion and the convex facing portion, even if the intensity of the light incident on the light guide means is constant, the concave facing portion and the convex facing portion are opposed to each other. With the club
The emission intensity of the projected means can be changed.

In the gaming machine L1, the projected means is characterized in that the concave facing portion is made of a light-transmitting material, and the convex facing portion is made of a material that is less likely to transmit light than the concave facing portion. The gaming machine L2.

According to the game machine L2, in addition to the effect of the game machine L1, the light emitted from the light guide means is focused on the concave facing portion by consciously weakening the intensity of the light transmitted through the convex facing portion. It is possible to improve the effect of the effect of the light.

The game machine L2 includes a counter-projection means that is arranged on the opposite side of the light-guiding means with the light-guiding means and is projected with light that has passed through the light-guiding means, and the counter-projecting means is the guiding means. The gaming machine L3 is characterized in that a portion facing the concave surface portion of the light means and a portion facing the convex surface portion of the light guide means are formed of materials having substantially the same light transmission property.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L2, the portion of the counter-projection means that is arranged to face the concave portion of the light guide means and the portion that is arranged to face the convex portion of the light guide means are light. Since the transparency is formed from substantially the same material, by incident the same light on the light guide means, the light effect mode to be visually recognized through the projected means and the light effect mode to be visually recognized through the counterprojection means. Can be different.

<Bass reflex speaker layout structure. Pachinko machine M>
The first and second means that are arranged facing each other and fixed to each other to form an internal space, and the acoustic means that is arranged with at least a part of the internal space entering the internal space, and the above-mentioned. The gaming machine M1 is provided with a bending means for forming a bending path in an internal space.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which speakers are arranged at both left and right ends of a front frame and an effect is produced by the sound output from the speakers (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-1).
See Publication No. 6088). Then, in such a gaming machine, the vibration wave traveling toward the back side of the speaker body is advanced to the left and right center positions of the gaming machine and transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine.
There is a problem that the path length of the vibration wave is defined by the left-right width of the gaming machine, where it is easy to produce a low-pitched sound.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, the bending means forms a bending path in the internal spaces of the first means and the second means. Therefore, by forming a path longer than the length of one piece, the gaming machine can be used. It is possible to cancel the regulation of the left-right width and allow the vibration wave to travel at any distance.

In the gaming machine M1, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed in such a manner that a load is applied in opposite directions, and the bending means is ribbed from at least one of the first means or the second means toward the other. The gaming machine M2 is provided with a projecting portion projecting from the pachinko machine M2, wherein the projecting tip of the projecting portion abuts on the other of the first means or the second means.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1, the protruding tip of the protruding portion and the other of the first means or the second means in the direction in which the fastening force is applied to the first means and the second means. By abutting against each other, it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the projecting portion and the other of the first means or the second means due to the fastening and fixing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fluid such as a vibration wave from passing through the gap of the bending path.

The gaming machine M1 or M2 is provided with an opening for connecting the internal space and the outside, and the opening is passed to the internal space and the outside through the opening and is connected to the acoustic means. A gaming machine M3 characterized by being blocked by.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1 or M2, the opening is closed by the passing member connected to the acoustic means, so that it is not necessary to prepare an additional closing member. The walls constituting the internal space can be appropriately closed while the passing member is passed from the internal space to the outside.

In the gaming machine M3, the gaming machine M4 is characterized in that the opening is arranged on a side closer to the acoustic means than the protruding portion.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M3, when the wiring of the acoustic means is passed from the internal space to the outside through the opening, the wiring of the acoustic means is prevented from being pinched by the projecting portion and broken. be able to.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, a support fastening means to which at least one of the first means or the second means is fastened and fixed, and a staging means arranged below the support fastening means and producing an effect associated with the game. The gaming machine M5 is characterized in that the effect means supports the support fastening means from below.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, the support fastening means is supported by the staging means from below, so that the support fastening means is weighted without squeezing the space used for the staging. Things can be adopted.

<Movable unit, flower that rotates in the opposite direction. Petals that stop on the way. Pachinko machine N>
A base member, a first displacement means displaceably supported by the base member, a drive means for applying a driving force to the first displacement means, and a follow-up state in which the first displacement means is displaced in the displacement direction. A second switchable state in which the first displacement means is displaced in a direction different from the displacement direction of the first displacement means.
In a gaming machine provided with a displacement means, a third displacement means that is displaced in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means by the driving force of the drive means at least when the second displacement means is in a follow-up state. A gaming machine N1 characterized by being provided with.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the second displacement means is displaced in the expansion / contraction operation direction of the first displacement means as the first displacement means expands / contracts, while the first displacement means operates near the extension end portion. There is a gaming machine in which the second displacement means is displaced in a direction different from the expansion / contraction operation direction of the first displacement means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229580). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the first displacement means expands and contracts, the displacement directions of the first displacement means and the second displacement means are the same, so that the effect is slow and the effect is not sufficient. There was a point.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, at least in the follow-up state of the second displacement means, the third
Since the displacement means is displaced in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means, the displacement speed of the second displacement means can be visually recognized as a speed with respect to the third displacement means. Therefore, the speed of the second displacement means that the player feels can be increased as compared with the speed at which the second displacement means is actually driven.

The gaming machine N1 is provided with a resistance means for generating resistance to the displacement of the second displacement means, and the resistance means is characterized in that the switching point between the following state and the non-following state can be changed. Gaming machine N2 to play.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N1, the following state in which the second displacement means follows the first displacement means and the non-following state in which the second displacement means deviates from the following state due to the action of the resistance means. Since the switching point can be changed, it is possible to increase the types of displacement modes of the second displacement means with respect to the first displacement means. As a result, the effect of the effect can be improved.

In the gaming machine N2, the resistance means is characterized in that the state of the second displacement means can be changed by utilizing the driving force when the second displacement means is operated in the non-following state. Gaming machine N3.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N2, a driving force for switching the state of the second displacement means can be generated by the driving means for driving the first displacement means, so that the driving means is also used. be able to.

In the gaming machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is arranged so as to be visible from the front surface of the gaming machine N4.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is configured to be visible so that the resistance means can be visually recognized by the player and the function of changing the state of the first displacement means. It can also be used as a function as a staging device.

The gaming machine N4 includes a rod-shaped shaft means fixed to the base member, and the shaft means pivotally supports the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means coaxially and rotatably. The gaming machine N5.

According to the game machine N5, in addition to the effect of the game machine N4, the shaft means that functions as the rotation axis of the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means is fixed to the base member, so that the first displacement means, As the posture of either the second displacement means or the resistance means changes, the postures of the other members or means also change accordingly, so that the displacement resistance should be prevented from increasing excessively. Can be done.

<Use of shell buttons and holes. As a point, it has not been reached>
In a gaming machine including a first means and a storage means configured to accommodate the first means, the storage means is an opening for receiving the first means when the first means is housed. The gaming machine O1 is characterized by comprising one opening and a second opening having a width equal to or larger than the width of the gap between the first opening and the first means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with an operating means that can be operated by a player and an upper plate that covers the operating means from below, and the operating means moves up and down with respect to the upper plate (for example, special feature). Kai 2012-048970 (see Japanese Patent Publication No. 2012-048970). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that when a foreign substance is inserted in the gap between the upper plate and the operating means, the foreign substance may remain inside and induce a malfunction. ..

On the other hand, since the gaming machine O1 includes a second opening formed with a width equal to or larger than the width of the gap between the first opening of the accommodating means and the first means, foreign matter is accommodated through the second opening. It can be easily removed to the outside of the means. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which foreign matter remains inside.

The gaming machine O1 is characterized in that the accommodating means includes a support portion for supporting the first means, and the second opening is arranged on the opposite side of the support portion with the first means interposed therebetween. Pachinko machine O2.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O1, the second opening can be formed while maintaining the supporting strength of the supporting portion.

In the gaming machine O1 or O2, the accommodating means includes a low water resistant portion having a low water resistance, and the second opening is arranged around the low water resistant portion.

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O1 or O2, the water can be discharged to the outside along the second opening before the water reaches the low water resistant portion. That is, it can be used for both the purpose of passing a predetermined solid object through the second opening and the purpose of discharging a liquid such as water.

In any of the gaming machines O1 to O3, a plurality of the second openings are formed, and the plurality of second openings are composed of a shape based on a shape projected in different directions of the solid object. A game machine O4 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines O1 to O3, a plurality of second machines are used.
Since the opening is formed of a shape based on the shape of the solid object in a different direction, it is possible to easily remove the solid object through the second opening.

In any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the gaming machine O5 is characterized in that the second opening is arranged closer to the player than the first means.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the shadow of the solid object is visually recognized by the player in a state where the solid object is partially blocked by the second opening. Can be made to. As a result, the player can be made aware that the solid object is inserted between the first means and the accommodating means, so that the possibility that the solid object will continue to remain can be reduced. ..

<Points related to devising the shape of the bottom of the glass frame (front frame)>
A gaming machine including a first means and a first supporting means for supporting the first means, wherein the first supporting means includes a protruding shape portion projecting from a lower surface. P1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a glass frame (front frame) on which an operation handle is arranged is removable from an outer frame on which a gaming board is arranged (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. (See 2015-159837). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the bottom surface of the glass frame is formed from a flat shape, there is a risk of slipping when holding the bottom surface with a finger, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of ease of handling. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine P1, the protruding shape portion projecting from the bottom surface of the first supporting means functions as a portion on which a finger is hung, thereby suppressing the occurrence of a situation in which the first supporting means slips off the hand. Therefore, it can be improved from the viewpoint of ease of handling.

The arrangement of the projecting shape portion is not limited at all, and may be any as long as it is projecting to the outside of the first support means. For example, it may be projected in the vertical direction or may be projected to the front side.

The gaming machine P1 includes the second support means that detachably supports the first support means, and the projecting shape portion is separated from the support position where the first support means is supported by the second support means. The gaming machine P2, which is characterized in that it is arranged.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P1, the protruding shape portion is projected downward from the lower bottom surface at a position away from the position where the weight of the first supporting means is centrally applied as the supporting position. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to hold the first support means. This makes it possible to easily attach / detach the first support means to / from the second support means.

The position away from the support position is not limited at all. For example, the first
The position may be closer to the front side when the support means is supported on the front side of the second support means, or closer to the other end when the first support means is pivotally supported by the second support means at one end. It may be a position, or it may be a position opposite to the shaft support position with respect to the plate for storing the game ball.

In the gaming machine P1 or P2, the first supporting means includes a recessed shape portion recessed from the inside to the outside, and the first means has a gap between the recessed shape portion and the recessed shape portion. A gaming machine P3 characterized in that it is arranged to face the concave shape portion.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P1 or P2, a part of the supporting position between the first means and the first supporting means is made a gap by the recessed shape portion, so that the first means can be used. Powder (shavings, dust) that may be generated when the first means and the first support means rub against each other due to misalignment.
However, the amount of generation can be reduced. That is, it is possible to prevent the powder from accumulating and clogging the movable portion to cause a malfunction, or the powder from accumulating at the detection point of the detection device and erroneously detecting the powder.

In this way, the recessed shape portion is not only when it is not operating (for example, when the glass frame is opened to clear an error, when maintenance, or when the glass frame is replaced), but also when it is operating (for example, when playing a game). It is also effective in the middle or in the game waiting state (demo screen display state).

The gaming machine P4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine P3, the recessed shape portion is arranged inside a range in which the protrusion shape portion is provided.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P3, the portion where the concave shape portion is formed becomes extremely thin as compared with other portions, and it is possible to prevent the strength from becoming insufficient. can. Further, since the concave shape portion is formed behind the protrusion shape portion, the protrusion shape portion can be bent and deformed in the inward and outward directions, so that even if a large load is applied to the protrusion shape portion, the protrusion is formed. It is possible to suppress cracking of the shape portion.

The load applied to the projecting shape portion includes, for example, the weight of the first supporting means that may be applied during transportation or temporary placement, the load applied when moving the first supporting means, and the first.
An example is a load applied by a collision of something moved by a player or a clerk (such as a Senryobako) near a support means.

In the gaming machine P4, the first means is a portion of the first support means on the outside of the recessed shape portion, and is supported in such a manner that it abuts on an overlapping portion that overlaps the protrusion shape portion in the inward and outward directions. A gaming machine P5 comprising a contacting means and an operating unit positioned by the contacting means and configured to be operable by a player.

According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P4, the effect of the recessed shape portion can be maintained, and the supporting thickness of the overlapping position for supporting the abutting means can be sufficiently secured. It is possible to prevent the first support means from being deformed during operation.

In the gaming machine P5, the contact means is provided with impact damping means which is continuously formed between the contact means and the operation portion so as to be able to attenuate the impact, and the impact damping means is the recessed shape portion. A gaming machine P6 characterized in that it is formed with a width shorter than the width.

According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P5, the impact transmitted from the operating portion to the abutting means can be attenuated by the impact damping means, and a distance is provided between the impact damping means and the overlapping portion. Therefore, the impact can be attenuated by the deformation (deflection) of the abutting means.

Various aspects are exemplified as the impact damping means. For example, it may be a mass member formed of a flexible material, an elastic member such as a coil spring, a device such as a damper, or a damping device.

In any of the gaming machines P3 to P6, the recessed shape portion includes a first portion facing the first means and a second portion extending from the first portion of the first portion. The gaming machine P7 is characterized in that the degree of recession is larger than that of the second portion.

According to the gaming machine P7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines P3 to P6, a sufficient space is prepared in the first part where a large load is expected to be applied, and compared with the first part. By forming the space of the second portion, which is expected to have a small load, to be small, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the recessed shape portion while maintaining high durability.

The degree of denting is exemplified by, for example, the depth of denting (the larger the degree of denting, the deeper) and the width of denting (the larger the degree of denting, the wider).

If the structure of the first means is complicated and the load applied to the portion facing the first means is smaller than that of the other portions, the concave shape corresponding to the other portions. The degree of recession of the portion may be formed to be large.

Further, the recessed shape portion may be designed based on the magnitude of the load generation frequency, for example, without being limited to the magnitude of the load. In this case, the frequency of occurrence of the load may be based on the magnitude of the frequency of occurrence during the entire business hours of the gaming store, or the frequency of occurrence in a predetermined state of the gaming machine (a predetermined production state or a gaming state such as a specific gaming state). It may be based on the size of.

In any of the gaming machines P1 to P7, the projecting shape portion is formed along the front-rear direction below the bottom surface portion of the first support means, and the formation range becomes wider toward the front. The gaming machine P8.

According to the gaming machine P8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines P1 to P7, it is possible to improve the load capacity of the front portion where the load is concentrated when the first supporting means is made to stand alone. (1) Even in a storage method in which the support means is placed on the floor alone, the first support means can be stored for a long period of time without the first support means falling down.

It should be noted that what is considered when designing the projecting shape portion is not limited to the weight of the first support means. For example, the shape of the projecting shape portion may be designed by considering the magnitude of the load generated during the operation of the first means and the frequency of load generation.

In any of the gaming machines P1 to P8, the gaming machine P9 is characterized in that the lower surface of the first supporting means is formed as an inclined surface that ascends and inclines in a direction away from the second supporting means.

According to the gaming machine P9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines P1 to P8, the first supporting means can be easily self-supported by itself, and the contact portion with the floor is limited to the projecting shape portion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the portion other than the projecting shape portion from becoming dirty.

<Points regarding deformation mode based on the support structure and shape of the scarf>
In a gaming machine including an operating means that can be operated by a player, a first supporting means that supports the operating means, and a second supporting means that supports the first supporting means or at least one of the operating means. The gaming machine Q1 is characterized in that the first supporting means is configured to be deformable in a direction that narrows the gap between the operating means and the second supporting means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which an operating means such as an effect button is supported by a glass frame (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-106830). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the countermeasure against the misalignment that occurs in the area around the operating means due to the load at the time of operating the operating means is insufficient, and it is called the countermeasure against the misalignment that occurs in the area around the operating means. There was a problem that there was room for improvement from the viewpoint.

For example, when the weight of the player is applied to the operating means and the operating means is lowered, the second supporting means is also lowered at the same time. At this time, the descending distance of the front side portion of the second supporting means tends to be longer than the descending distance of the operating means. At this time, due to the difference in descent distance, in the front side part,
There may be a gap between the operating means and the second supporting means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine Q1, even if the second supporting means is lowered excessively, the deformation of the first supporting means suppresses the formation of a gap between the operating means and the second supporting means. can do. That is, since the operating means can tolerate an extra descent (sinking),
It is possible to simplify the support mode of the operating means.

The operation direction is not limited at all. For example, it may be a descending direction, an ascending direction, a pushing direction along the front-rear direction, a rotation (rotation) direction, or a combination thereof.

Further, as the mode of contact from the operation direction, various modes are exemplified in addition to the case where the normal extending from the contact surface coincides with the operation direction. For example, the contact surface may be formed as a surface that spreads in a mortar shape (V-shaped cross section) with respect to the operation direction. In this case, the operation direction can be moved toward the center side of the bottom of the mortar (V-shaped) formed by the contact surface, and in addition, the reaction force increases toward the center side of the bottom, so that the support of the operation means is effective. Can be done.

Further, a common support means that commonly supports the first support means and the second support means may be provided. In this case, the first support means and the second support means may be connected (coupled, fitted) at a position opposite to the support position supported by the common support means.

In the gaming machine Q1, the first supporting means is made of a flexible material, and is configured to be able to hold a support portion that supports the operating means and a gaming ball, and the operating means via the first supporting means. A gaming machine Q2 characterized by having a gaming ball holding portion connected to the gaming machine Q2.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q1, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the operating means and the gaming ball holding portion.

Further, when the first supporting means is composed of a flexible member or is connected to the operating means or the game ball holding portion by a floating structure, the vibration when the operating means is operated is held as it is. Since it is possible to prevent the game ball from being transmitted to the unit, it is possible to prevent the game ball held by the game ball holding unit from being displaced and generating an abnormal noise each time the operating means is operated.

Various aspects are exemplified as the structure for preventing (suppressing) vibration transmission. For example, the first
The vibration transmission may be prevented in the direction of 1, while the vibration transmission may be maintained in the second direction. In this case, by generating the vibration in the second direction, it is possible to intentionally generate an abnormal sound, and it is possible to execute the effect by the sound.

In the gaming machine Q2, the operating means includes an operating unit configured to be operable by the player.
The first supporting means is such that the connection position with the game ball holding portion is farther from the operating portion.
A gaming machine Q3 characterized by being arranged on the front side.

In the game machine Q3, in addition to the effect of the game machine Q2, in the vicinity of the operation unit, which is a position where the position is likely to shift due to the operation, the connection position is moved to the back side to reduce the absolute amount of the position shift. While suppressing the generation of gaps between the ball holding portion and the first supporting means, by arranging the connecting position on the front side (closer to the player) in the distant position of the operating portion, which is a position where the position is unlikely to shift due to the operation. , It is possible to improve the design.

In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the operating means includes an operating unit configured to be operable by a player, a main body portion supported by the first supporting means, and the operating unit and the main body portion. The operation unit is formed wider than the connection portion, and the first support means is formed from a plurality of divided bodies and can be attached and detached in a direction sandwiching the connection portion. Even the gaming machine Q4, which is configured to surround the connecting portion.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, it is possible to facilitate the assembly of the first support means while ensuring a sufficient size of the operation unit.

Various aspects of the method for fixing the first support means formed from the divided body are exemplified.
For example, a plurality of divided bodies may be connected to the operating means, respectively, or include one divided body connected to the operating means among the plurality of divided bodies and another divided body connected to the divided body. You may let me.

In addition, various embodiments are exemplified as the fixing position and the fixing mode of the divided body. For example, it may be fitted or fastened.

In the case of fastening, by fixing the divided body at a plurality of positions along the operation direction of the operation unit, the impact generated when the operation unit is operated can be dispersed and handled at the plurality of fixed positions. Since the durability of fixing the divided body can be improved, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of misalignment of the first support means.

Furthermore, by setting the fastening direction to a direction that intersects (for example, orthogonally) with the operation direction of the operation unit, the direction of the load due to the operation of the operation unit and the direction of tightening the fastening screw can be made different. It is possible to prevent the fastening screw from loosening due to the impact during operation.

In the gaming machine Q4, the gaming machine Q5 is characterized in that the fastening directions of the fastening means for fastening the divided bodies intersect with the operating direction of the operating unit.

According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q4, it is possible to suppress the load applied to the fastening direction during the operation of the operation unit, so that the fastening by the fastening means is loosened during the operation.
It is possible to prevent the split body from being unfixed.

In addition, various aspects are exemplified as the direction which intersects with the operation direction. For example, when the operation direction is a rotation direction along a circle centered on a predetermined rotation axis, the direction intersecting the operation direction is a direction intersecting a plane orthogonal to the predetermined rotation axis (for example, a predetermined direction). Direction along the axis of rotation) is exemplified.

Further, for example, when the operation direction is along a predetermined straight line (pushing operation or pulling operation), the direction intersecting the operating direction is along a plane intersecting the predetermined straight line. The direction is illustrated.

In this case, if a plurality of predetermined straight lines (straight lines along the operation direction having a high ratio (frequency) in the operation) are assumed during the game, at least among the plurality of planes intersecting each straight line, at least. The fastening direction may be set in a direction along one plane, or the fastening direction may be set in a direction intersecting any of a plurality of plane intersections, that is, a plurality of predetermined straight lines.

In the gaming machine Q4 or Q5, the fastening points of the split body are configured at a plurality of points, and the first plane including one fastening point and the second plane including the other fastening points are configured as different planes. A game machine Q6 featuring.

According to the gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q4 or Q5, even when a large load is applied to one fastening point (including the first plane), a large load is applied to the other fastening points at the same time. Since it is possible to prevent the split body from being hung, it is possible to prevent the split bodies from being displaced at the same time at both fastening points or the fastening being loosened.

The fastening portion of the split body may be arranged at a location where the load is concentrated when the operation unit is operated. Even in this case, since another fastening point is arranged on a plane different from the plane on which the load is concentrated, the split body may be displaced or the fastening may be loosened due to the load during operation. Can be prevented.

In any of the gaming machines Q4 to Q6, the operating means include a detecting means configured to be able to detect a predetermined operation of the operating unit, and the detecting means is arranged at a position away from the split position of the split body. A gaming machine Q7 characterized by being installed.

According to the gaming machine Q7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines Q4 to Q6, the holding force tends to be insufficient at the divided position, and the operating unit moves when the operating unit is operated at the divided position. And the divided body rub against each other, and powder (dust, etc.) may be generated. Since the detection means is arranged away from the divided position, it is possible to prevent the detection means from detecting the powder (dust, etc.). can do. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of erroneous detection.

In any of the gaming machines Q4 to Q7, the operating means interferes with the split body in the split direction view on the side that separates in the split direction (proximity separation direction) of the split body when the game is possible. A gaming machine Q8 characterized by being equipped with.

According to the gaming machine Q8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines Q4 to Q7, the interference means can suppress the displacement of the operating means with respect to the divided body in the dividing direction.

The interfering means may be formed so as not to interfere with the operating means in the assembled state, but before the assembled state, for example, during the assembling work. For example, when the split body is formed of a flexible material, the split body can be bent during the assembling operation, so that interference with the interference means can be easily avoided and the ease of assembly is maintained. can do.

Further, for example, even when the divided body is formed of a hard material, it may be configured so as not to interfere with the interfering means in the process of assembling. That is, it may be formed from a shape that does not interfere in the assembly direction view (for example, the direction view in the direction in which the divided bodies are brought closer to each other for assembly) before fastening. In this case, it is possible to suppress the misalignment of the divided body when the game is possible while ensuring the ease of assembly.

In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q8, the second supporting means includes a receiving recessed portion that is recessed so as to accept the first supporting means.

According to the gaming machine Q9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q8, the first supporting means is received in the receiving recess, so that the first supporting means is affected by the misalignment of the operating means. Even if the position is displaced, the operating means and the first support means can be returned to their original positions at an early stage by the repulsive force from the receiving recessed portion.

In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q9, the first supporting means is formed in a curved shape along a circle in which the center of the radius of curvature is arranged on the operating portion side of the operating means. Q10.

According to the gaming machine Q10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q9, a large area where the operation unit can be arranged can be secured, and in addition, when the player grips the operation unit, it is cramped. It is possible to prevent feeling. As a result, it is possible to improve the design of the operation unit and improve the operability of the operation unit.

In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q10, the first support means includes a streak portion that is processed into a streak shape for reinforcement, and the extension direction of the streak portion is formed in a different direction for each region. A gaming machine Q11 characterized by being played.

According to the gaming machine Q11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q10, the extending direction of the streaks is different for each region, so that the first supporting means having anisotropy in rigidity is used. Can be configured.

The design criteria for the extension direction of the streaks are not limited at all. For example, the shape of the first support means may be designed as an extension direction with a good yield, or when the load generated during the operation of the operating means acts in a different manner for each region, it is the best response to the load. The extension direction of the streak may be designed as the direction.

<Points regarding the support structure between the speaker and the board>
A vibration means, a light emitting means arranged at a position where the vibration is transmitted and configured to be capable of emitting light, and a light emitting means.
The gaming machine R1 is characterized in that the light emitting means has a displaceable width with respect to the vibrating means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a speaker and a light emitting element are arranged side by side (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-16588). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of light emission effect.

More specifically, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, a light emitting element (LED, fluorescent lamp, discharge tube, etc.) is arranged behind the speaker in order to prevent the substrate from receiving the vibration of the speaker, and the speaker is arranged. It will be dark because it is not possible to produce light emission at the places where it is used. in this case,
In the front area where the gaming machine is easily visible, the area that can be produced brilliantly becomes narrow. In the first place, the size of gaming machines such as pachinko machines is roughly determined by the standard, so
It is recognized that securing a light emitting effect area is an important issue.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine R1, since the light emitting means has a displaceable width with respect to the vibrating means, the light emitting means can pass the vibration of the vibrating device, and the light emitting means is arranged at the vibration generation location of the vibrating means. Can be approached to. As a result, the front region can be visually recognized brightly regardless of the vibration generation location of the vibrating means, which can be improved from the viewpoint of light emission effect.

The mode of the vibrating means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be an acoustic means configured to be able to output sound, or an operating means having a built-in vibration device. Further, the means is not limited to the means capable of actively vibrating, and any means configured to be vibrable (passively vibrable) with respect to a load of an external force may be used.

Various aspects are exemplified as the acoustic means. For example, the vibrating membrane of the speaker,
For example, an discharge port where the back pressure of the vibration of the speaker, which is seen in a bass reflex type speaker, is discharged, and a path connected from the vibration portion to the discharge port are exemplified.

The vibrating device may be a rotationally driven vibrating device (for example, a vibrator).
A vibration device (for example, a voice coil motor) that generates vibration by linear drive may be used.

The aspect of the proximity arrangement is not limited in any way, and any aspect may be used as long as the player can visually recognize the light of the light emitting means. For example, the light emitting means may be stacked and arranged on the vibrating means.
In that case, the stacking direction may be a front-rear direction, a direction inclined upward or downward with respect to the front-rear direction, or a direction inclined inward from the left-right end.

The gaming machine R1 is characterized in that a plurality of the vibrating means are provided, a light emitting substrate on which the light emitting means is arranged is provided, and the light emitting substrate is laminated and arranged on the plurality of the vibrating means. ..

According to the game machine R2, in addition to the effect of the game machine R1, the light emitting substrate tends to be displaced (vibration, misalignment, etc.) due to the influence of vibration generated when the vibration means outputs sound. Where the effect mode of the light emitting means can be changed, the displacement mode of the light emitting substrate can be changed by changing the vibration means that outputs the sound, so that the type of change (variation) of the effect mode of the light emitting means can be changed. ) Can be increased.

The number of light emitting substrates may be one or a plurality. In the case of a plurality of sheets, at least one light emitting substrate may be laminated and arranged on a plurality of vibrating means. In this case, since it is possible to provide a combination of the light emitting substrate that is displaced by the vibration generated from the vibrating means and the light emitting substrate that is not displaced, it is possible to further increase the types of changes in the effect mode of the light emitting means.

The gaming machine R2 includes holding means for holding the vibration means, the light emitting substrate is not fixed to the holding means in the stacking direction, and the holding means emits light along the stacking direction. The gaming machine R3 is configured to generate a load in a direction that suppresses displacement of the board.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R2, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the light emitting substrate and the displacement of the holding means.

The non-fixed mode is not limited to the case where the light emitting substrate and the holding means are not mechanically connected. For example, even if the light emitting substrate and the holding means are connected by screws, it can be said that they are not fixed if the fastening force does not act (for example, simply to prevent them from coming off).

Moreover, the expression "non-fixed" does not assume that a large displacement is allowed. For example, by fixing two plate members that define the front-rear position of the light-emitting substrate to the holding means, the front-rear position of the light-emitting substrate is specified (the front-back position is stable and small vibration is allowed), and the shape of the light-emitting substrate is determined. By surrounding the direction orthogonal to the front-back direction with a frame member having a slightly larger frame shape, it is possible to suppress displacement in a direction different from the front-back direction (up / down / left / right).

As a result, the influence of the vibration generated by the vibrating means on the light emitting substrate can be reduced as compared with the case where the light emitting substrate is fixed to the holding means as in the case of the vibrating means, so that the position stability of the light emitting substrate can be reduced. Can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine R2 or R3, the first member and the second member arranged on both sides of the light emitting substrate in the stacking direction, the fixing means for fixing the first member and the second member to the holding means, and the said. A regulating means for restricting the moving direction of the first member and the second member in the stacking direction is provided, and the fixing means advances toward the holding means along a direction inclined with respect to the stacking direction. The gaming machine R4 featuring.

According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R2 or R3, the direction in which the first member and the second member are laminated does not match the traveling direction of the fixing means, and the first member and the second member Since the movement of the fixing means in the traveling direction is restricted, even if the fixing by the fixing means is loosened (even if some fixing means are loosened), the displacement is compared with the displacement of the fixing means. Therefore, the displacement of the first member and the second member can be reduced.

This makes it easy to maintain the positional relationship between the first member and the second member. In other words, it is possible to prevent the first member and the second member from being separated or approached more than expected.

In addition, various aspects are exemplified as the aspect which progresses. For example, a rod-shaped member may be inserted into the through hole, or a fastening screw may be fastened to the screw hole.

In any of the gaming machines R2 to R4, the light emitting substrate includes a first displacement region configured to be displaceable and a second displacement region in which displacement is suppressed as compared with the first displacement region. The gaming machine R5 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine R5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines R2 to R4, the change in the light emitting mode when the light emitting substrate is displaced due to the influence of the vibration of the vibrating means is changed for each region of the light emitting substrate. Can be made to.

Thereby, by designing the mode of the light emitting effect in the first displacement region and the mode of the light emitting effect in the second displacement region in different modes, an excellent effect can be obtained. For example, as the first refraction means for receiving and refracting the light emitted from the first displacement region, a surface light emitting means for producing a uniform light emission effect by surface emission is arranged, while receiving and refracting the light emitted from the second displacement region. As the second refraction means, an edge light emitting means for showing the player high-intensity light by totally reflecting the light incident from one end (edge) and emitting it from the other end (edge) is arranged. This makes it possible to perform a novel light emission effect in which the light emission mode (for example, brightness) is different for each region.

The mode of suppressing the displacement is not limited in any way. For example, the mode may be a mode of suppression defined by the positional relationship between the light emitting substrate and the plurality of vibration means, or a mode defined by the mode of holding the light emitting substrate.

For example, as for the positional relationship between the plurality of vibrating means and the light emitting substrate, the region that is equidistant from each vibrating means is such that the influence from one vibrating means is canceled by the influence from the other vibrating means. , Displacement may be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines R1 to R5, a fastening screw for fastening and fixing and a facing portion arranged to face the head of the fastening screw are provided, and when the fastening screw becomes loose, the head of the fastening screw is provided. The gaming machine R6 is characterized in that the portions and the facing portions are arranged so as to be in contact with each other.

According to the gaming machine R6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines R1 to R5, the advancement of the fastening screw is restricted by the facing portion, so that the fastening relationship is further deteriorated when the fastening screw becomes loose. Can be prevented from doing so.

In addition, various aspects are exemplified as the correspondence after the tightening screw becomes loose. For example, when the fastening screw is loosened, the loosening may be detected electrically, or the fastening screw may be loosened by forming the facing portion on the surface of the vibrating device. If it is vibrated when it is vibrated, an abnormal noise may be generated and the looseness may be noticed, or the loosened part may be repaired by regular maintenance without providing a special notification.

In any of the gaming machines R1 to R6, the first member and the second member arranged on both sides of the light emitting substrate and the connecting means to be fastened and fixed to the first member and the second member are provided.
The connecting means is configured in such a manner that the deformation in the direction intersecting the connecting direction is more easily caused than the deformation in the connecting direction connecting the first member and the second member. The featured gaming machine R7.

Here, when the connecting means is configured in such a manner that the deformation in the connecting direction easily occurs, the interval between the connecting positions is changed in both directions such as extension and contraction, and the favorable influence and the disadvantageous influence are periodic. It becomes unfavorable.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine R7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines R1 to R6, the connecting means is deformed in the direction intersecting the connecting direction, so that only the side where the interval between the connecting positions is shortened is changed. It is possible to preferentially generate a load in a direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other.

As a result, it is possible to increase the load in the direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other only in the situation where the connecting means is deformed (for example, the situation where a load is generated in the connecting means). While setting the load in the opposite direction of the member and the second member to be low, the load in the direction of pressing the first member and the second member against each other can be increased only when the light emitting substrate is easily shaken by the vibration by the vibration means, and the light is emitted. It is possible to suppress the shaking of the board.

It should be noted that the mode in which deformation easily occurs in a predetermined direction is not limited at all. For example, the shape of the connecting means may be formed so that the thickness differs from direction to direction, or the magnitude of the load generated on the connecting means may change from direction to direction.

Further, the mode of switching the loads in the pressing direction is not limited at all. For example, a drive device that displaces either the first member or the second member may be provided. According to this, the load in the direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other can be changed at an arbitrary timing by controlling the drive device.

In any of the gaming machines R1 to R7, the vibration means is configured so that the direction of vibration can be changed between a first direction along the displaceable width and a second direction intersecting the first direction. The featured gaming machine R8.

According to the gaming machine R8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines R1 to R7, a plurality of types of actions of the vibration means on the light emitting means can be configured.

<Technical concept of light emitting means on the side. Edge light travels to the sides and back of the member>
A first aspect comprising a light emitting means configured to emit light and a light guiding means capable of guiding light, the light guiding means guides the light emitted from the light emitting means in the first aspect. The gaming machine S1 includes a light guide means and a second light guide means that guides the light emitted from the light emitting means in a mode different from that of the first mode.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured to incident LED light from an end portion of the plate-shaped member and emit it from the surface of the plate-shaped member (for example, JP-A-2015-).
See 159875A). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the effect of the light emitting effect.

More specifically, when the LED substrate formed from a flat plate is used for light emission effect as in the conventional gaming machine described above, the price of the substrate can be reduced, which is useful for cost reduction, but as it is, it is a three-dimensional light emission effect. It was difficult to achieve both.

That is, the effect tends to be reduced due to the difference in the light emitting mode (brightness, intensity, brightness, etc.) between the near position and the far position with respect to the LED, and the light emitting mode is weak in order to eliminate this. It is possible to increase the number of LEDs in the part that tends to be (dark), but in that case, the number of LED elements required for the effect increases with respect to the area of the LED substrate, which results in hindering cost reduction. It will be. Therefore, it was unavoidable to select whether to improve the staging effect or reduce the cost.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine S1, since the light guiding means is configured to be able to guide the light from the light emitting means in different modes, the effect of the effect is reduced even if the distance with respect to the light emitting means is different. It can suppress (changing). Therefore, it is possible to improve from the viewpoint of the effect of the light emission effect while reducing the cost.

As the mode of the light guide means, various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be a light-transmitting member made of a colorless or colored transparent member, a member that emits light in a nearly uniform surface such as rubbed glass, or formed by curing a resin or the like of a milky white material. It may be a white member that is made to be colorless, a member that allows light to pass through a gap similar to a screen door or a shoji screen, a member that is similar to a transmissive liquid crystal and whose display is projected (projected) on the member itself, and others. It may be a member of the above aspect.

The gaming machine S1 is characterized in that the light guide means is configured so that the light emitting means changes stepwise in response to a difference in distance from the light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine S1, the light guiding means is configured in a plate shape forming a curved surface even when the substrate on which the light guiding means is arranged is formed of a flat plate. If so,
It is possible to perform an effect of making the curved surface emit light uniformly (uniformly).

In the gaming machine S1 or S2, the accommodating means for accommodating the light emitting means and the light emitting substrate on which the light emitting means is arranged are provided, and the accommodating means supports the light emitting substrate and the light guide means. The support means is fixed at least in the first position, and the shielding means configured to shield between the light guide means and the player, and the first position is outside the outer shape of the shielding means. A gaming machine S3 characterized in that it is arranged in a direction.

In the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine S1 or S2, the fixing at the first position can be loosened while the shielding means is still attached, so that the position of the light guiding means with respect to the supporting means can be easily positioned. Can be adjusted. Therefore, it becomes easy to repair the positional deviation between the light emitting means and the light guiding means, and the maintainability can be improved.

The mode of shielding of the shielding means is not limited at all. For example, the light guide means may be shielded so that the player cannot touch the light guide means, while the light guide means may be visible, or the player may not be able to touch or see the light guide means. You may.

When the first position is formed at a plurality of places, all the first positions may be arranged outside the outer shape of the shielding means, or at least one of the plurality of first positions may be arranged. It may be arranged outside the outer shape of the shielding means.

In the gaming machine S3, the light emitting substrate is not fixed to the support means and the light guide means, the light guide means has a long plate shape, and the first position is the light guide means. A gaming machine S4 characterized in that it is arranged at an end in a long direction.

According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine S3, the light guide means has a long plate shape.
Since the first position is arranged at the end in the long direction, the position shift of the light guide means can be easily corrected by loosening the fixing of the first position and applying a load in the lateral direction of the light guide means. ..

More specifically, the correction of the misalignment of the light guide means can be supplemented by the deformation of the light guide means in the lateral direction.
The position of the light guide means even when the fixation is loosened only at one end in the longitudinal direction and the fixation is maintained at the other end by compensating for slippage due to applying a strong load. The deviation can be easily repaired.

Further, in the case of the support mode in which the light emitting substrate is pressed against the support means by the light guide means, the degree of supporting the light emitting substrate by the support means can be weakened due to the bending deformation of the light guide means.
Therefore, even if the light guide means is not removed from the support means, the degree of support of the light emitting substrate can be weakened by loosening the fixing at the first position and bending and deforming the light guide means, and the load is applied to the light emitting substrate in that state. By giving, it is possible to correct the misalignment of the light emitting substrate.

The adjustment range of the position adjustment is not limited at all. For example, the basis of the design is that the portion to be irradiated by the light guide means is mechanically regulated so as not to be completely displaced in the irradiation direction from the outer shape of the light emitting means arranged on the light emitting substrate. The adjustment width may be sufficient to correct the misalignment in the light (adjustment width is small), or the part to be irradiated by the light guide means from the outer shape of the light emitting means is the irradiation direction based on the design that secures a large adjustment width in advance. The position of the light guide means may be adjustable to a position that is completely out of sight (large adjustment range).

In this case, the light emitting means and the light guiding means have the same structure, and the mode of the light emitting effect visually recognized at the same time of the effect can be changed. In this case, for example, when a gaming machine having the same configuration is prepared so that it can be played with different playability (for example, when a gaming machine having different specifications is configured),
Since the mode of the light emitting effect can be changed by adjusting the position of the light guide means without significantly changing the mechanical configuration of each part, the burden (for example, cost) related to the manufacture of the gaming machine can be reduced.

The non-fixed mode is not limited in any way. For example, a mode other than the case of being fixed by a fixing tool such as a fastening screw may be generally expressed as non-fixing. Further, the end portion is an expression of intention to avoid being limited to the end portion. That is, the first position may be arranged at a position including the periphery of the long direction end.

In the gaming machine S3 or S4, the shielding means is fixed to the supporting means, and the light guide means and the shielding means are configured to reduce the relative positional deviation as the distance between them is shortened. A gaming machine S5 comprising a portion, wherein the misalignment prevention portion includes a fixing portion with the support means.

Here, where it is necessary to connect wiring that conducts electricity to the light emitting board, misalignment or chipping of the wiring directly affects the malfunction of the light emitting means, so for the purpose of preventing it, it is also for light emitting. It is preferable to configure the board so that the positional deviation between the substrate and the supporting means does not easily occur.

Considering the effect of staging, it is preferable that the light guide means is easy to align when the misalignment occurs on the premise that the misalignment with the light emitting substrate does not easily occur. It is also considered that it is better to hold it on the support means side. On the other hand, if the position shift occurs between the light guide means and the shielding means, the light guiding means and the shielding means may collide with each other and the appearance may be deteriorated, and it is considered good to hold the light guiding means on the shielding means side.

Since the shielding means is a place that the player can touch, it is preferable to fix it to the supporting means as a base in consideration of the strength. As described above, the support mode expected for each means was various.

According to the gaming machine S5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine S3 or S4, the action of the misalignment prevention unit facilitates mutual alignment at the time of assembly without directly fixing the light guide means and the shielding means. Not only can this be done, but it is also possible to facilitate the maintenance of the positional relationship between the light guide means and the shielding means during the game.

The mode of the misalignment prevention unit is not limited at all. For example, the unevenness that can be fitted with the same shape may be used, or the unevenness that can be fitted may be such that the shape along the assembling direction is invariant, and the side closer to the mating member is tapered. It may be composed of a shape and an expanding concave shape.

In any of the gaming machines S1 to S5, the light guide means corresponds to the main body portion, the separation extension portion extending from the main body portion to the side separated from the light emitting means, and the outer shape of the extension portion. The light emitting means is provided with a facing extension portion extending toward the light emitting means in a cross-sectional shape, and the light emitting means is arranged in such a manner that the light incident on the facing extending portion is totally reflected. A gaming machine S6 characterized by having a section.

According to the gaming machine S6, since it is possible to suppress the light emitted from the total reflection light emitting portion from entering the portion other than the facing extension portion, the separation extension portion, the facing extension portion, and the other portions. The boundary between the light and the light can be clarified, and the effect of changing the mode of light (separating the light) can be performed at the boundary of a short width.

The mode of total internal reflection is not limited to any one. For example, the positional relationship between the light guiding means and the light emitting means, the direction of the irradiated light, the width of the irradiated light, the material and shape of the light guiding means,
And can be specified by a combination thereof and the like.

In the gaming machine S6, the light guide means forms an lining portion to be overlaid on the light emitting substrate and an outer shape of the lining portion, and is formed from a frame shape having the same shape as the outer shape of the light emitting substrate. A gaming machine S7 comprising a frame portion to be formed, and the facing extending portion extending from the covering portion and being coupled to the frame portion.

According to the gaming machine S7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine S6, light can be incident on the frame portion from the joint portion, so that the effect of the light emitting effect of the frame portion can be improved, and the facing extension portion is provided. By functioning as a reinforcing rib, the strength of the light guide means can be improved.

According to this, if the frame portion extends to the back of the light emitting means along the direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means, it is possible to perform an effect of shining the opposite side of the light emitting direction.

In the gaming machine S7, the facing extension portion is formed in an elongated shape along the covering portion, is connected to the frame portion at one end in the longitudinal direction, and is connected to the frame portion at the other end portion from the frame portion. A gaming machine S8 characterized by being separated.

According to the gaming machine S8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S7, based on the design of the facing extension portion,
Since it is possible to configure an end portion in which light can be incident on the frame portion in the longitudinal direction and an end portion in which light incident is restricted, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing a light emitting effect using the frame portion.

In any of the gaming machines S6 to S8, the light emitting means is arranged at the projection positions of the facing extension portion and the separation extension portion, and the inclination angle of the tip shape of the separation extension portion with respect to the irradiation direction is set. The gaming machine S9 is characterized in that the smaller the size, the closer to the end of the cross-sectional shape of the facing extension portion and the separation extending portion.

According to the gaming machine S9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines S6 to S8, even if the tip shape of the detached extension portion is inclined with respect to the plane of the light emitting substrate, the light emitting intensity of the light emitting means It is possible to produce light emission without giving a sense of discomfort to the player while keeping the same. That is, the entire cross-sectional shape of the detached extension portion can be made to emit light to the same extent.

<Technical concept of top light emitting means. Point to change the way of shining depending on the distance from the light emitting means>
A light emitting means configured to emit light and a light receiving means capable of receiving light are provided, and the light receiving means includes a first light receiving means for receiving light emitted from the light emitting means in the first aspect. The gaming machine T1 is provided with a second light receiving means that receives light emitted from the light emitting means in a mode different from that of the first aspect.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, LED light is incident from the edge of the planar member.
There is a gaming machine configured to emit light from the surface of the planar member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015).
-Refer to 159875 (see). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the effect of the light emitting effect.

More specifically, when the LED substrate formed from a flat plate is used for light emission effect as in the conventional gaming machine described above, the price of the substrate can be reduced, which is useful for cost reduction, but as it is, it is a three-dimensional light emission effect. It was difficult to achieve both.

That is, the effect tends to be reduced due to the difference in the light emitting mode (brightness, intensity, brightness, etc.) between the near position and the far position with respect to the LED, and the light emitting mode is weak in order to eliminate this. It is possible to increase the number of LEDs in the part that tends to be (dark), but in that case, the number of LED elements required for the effect increases with respect to the area of the LED substrate, which results in hindering cost reduction. It will be. Therefore, it was unavoidable to select whether to improve the staging effect or reduce the cost.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine T1, since the light receiving means is configured to be able to receive the light from the light emitting means in different modes, the effect of the effect is reduced even if the distance with respect to the light emitting means is different (change). ) Can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to improve from the viewpoint of the effect of the light emission effect while reducing the cost.

As the mode of the light receiving means, various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be a light-transmitting member made of a colorless or colored transparent member, a member that emits light in a nearly uniform surface such as rubbed glass, or formed by curing a resin or the like of a milky white material. It may be a white member that is made to be colorless, a member that allows light to pass through a gap similar to a screen door or a shoji screen, a member that is similar to a transmissive liquid crystal and whose display is projected (projected) on the member itself, and others. It may be a member of the above aspect.

2.

According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T1, even when the substrate on which the light receiving means is arranged is formed of a flat plate, the light receiving means is formed in a plate shape forming a curved surface. To,
It is possible to perform an effect of making the curved surface emit light uniformly (uniformly).

The gaming machine T1 or T2 includes an accommodating means for accommodating the light emitting means and a light emitting substrate on which the light emitting means is arranged, and the accommodating means is arranged to face one surface of the light emitting substrate. The gaming machine T3 is provided with a partitioning means for partitioning a region, and the light receiving means is configured so that the lighting method changes for each region partitioned by the partitioning means.

According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T1 or T2, the frame of the partitioning means is arranged at the boundary where the lighting method of the light receiving means changes, so that the lighting method of the light receiving means changes abruptly. It is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity given to the player when the player is allowed to play. As a result, even when the number of light emitting substrates is small, it is possible to improve the effect of the light emitting effect using the light emitting substrates.

In the gaming machine T3, the gaming machine T4 is characterized in that the light emitting substrate is aligned by being supported by the partitioning means from a direction that opposes the urging force applied to the light emitting substrate.

According to the gaming machine T4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T3, it is possible to facilitate the assembly work by facilitating the alignment between the light emitting substrate and the partitioning means, and in addition, the light emitting substrate at the time of use. And the partitioning means can be prevented from being displaced from each other.

In the gaming machine T3 or T4, the partition means includes a through hole formed corresponding to the shape of a light emitting portion arranged on the light emitting substrate, and the light receiving means is inserted through the through hole. A gaming machine T5 characterized by having a section.

According to the gaming machine T5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T3 or T4, the distance between the light emitting portion and the light receiving means can be narrowed without being affected by the dimensions of the partition means, and the light incident on the inside of the insertion portion can be reduced. It becomes easy to totally reflect the light, and it is possible to prevent the intensity of the light emitted from the light emitting means from decreasing.

In the gaming machine T5, the partition means is bored corresponding to the shape of the light emitting portion arranged on the light emitting substrate, and includes a non-insertion through hole that does not accept the insertion portion, and the non-insertion through hole is provided. ,
The gaming machine T6 is formed in such a manner that the opening expands as it separates from the light emitting substrate, and is brought into surface contact with the light receiving means from the opposite side of the light emitting substrate.

According to the gaming machine T6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T5, the through hole through which the insertion portion is not inserted can be configured as a means for emitting the light emitted from the light emitting portion at a wide angle, and in addition, the light receiving means. Light leakage can be suppressed by narrowing the gap between the two.

In any of the gaming machines T1 to T6, the light receiving means is characterized in that the outer shape of the cross-sectional shape is formed larger on the side far from the light emitting means than on the side closer to the light emitting means. T7.

According to the gaming machine T7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines T1 to T6, the area where the player sees the light through the light receiving means is made larger than the area where the light emitting means is formed. Can be done.

In the gaming machine T7, the light receiving means includes a light conducting portion extending from the light emitting means side and a punching boundary surface portion intersecting the light conducting portion, and the punching boundary surface thereof is a light conducting portion. The gaming machine T8 is characterized in that the front-rear direction surface portion in the extension direction is arranged at a position shorter than the inclined surface portion.

According to the gaming machine T8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T7, even when the light receiving means is formed in such a manner that the outer shape of the cross-sectional shape becomes larger toward the front, the punched boundary surface portion is formed. However, it is possible to easily make the wall thickness of the light conducting portion uniform. This makes it easy to maintain total reflection over the extending direction of the optical conduction portion.

In the gaming machine T7 or T8, the light receiving means includes a light conducting portion extending from the light emitting means side, and the light conducting portion is formed in a line shape including a base end portion of the insertion portion. The featured gaming machine T9.

According to the game machine T9, in addition to the effect of the game machine T7 or T8, the light emitted from the LED of the light emitting means can be easily visually recognized as line-shaped light (light mixed with light from a point light source). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the feeling of a point light source without increasing the number of LEDs arranged.

<Points consisting of two directions in which the fastening direction is inclined>
In a gaming machine including a first means and a second means fixed to the first means by a fixing means, the fixing means includes a first fixing means for generating a fixing force in a first direction and the first fixing means. A gaming machine U1 comprising: a second fixing means for generating a fixing force in a second direction inclined with respect to a direction.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a front frame is configured by combining a plurality of structures with fastening screws inserted in the front-rear direction (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-41185). .. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the shape of the structure is defined by the arrangement of the fixing means, and the degree of freedom in designing the structure is lowered.

For example, when a fastening screw to be inserted in the front-rear direction is inserted into the fixing means, it is not possible to arrange a light emitting member such as an LED at a position where the fastening screw interferes with the fastening screw in a front view in one cross section through which the fastening screw is inserted. That is, since the region where the fixing means can be arranged substantially coincides with the limit position of the outer shape of the light emitting member, the size of the structure is limited to the position where the fixing means can be arranged.

In other words, the shape of the support plate that supports the light emitting substrate from the back side needs to be formed larger than the light emitting substrate by the amount in which the fixing means is arranged. The size of the light emitting substrate will be limited.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine U1, the insertion direction of the fastening screw for fixing the fixing means is composed of the first direction and the second direction in which they are inclined to each other, so that all the fixing means are along the front-rear direction. Compared with the case of being inserted, it is possible to secure a wider production area on the side to be visually recognized by the player.

In the gaming machine U1, the fixing means is characterized in that a first surface formed along the first direction and a second surface formed along the second direction are provided on the outer surface. Gaming machine U2
..

According to the gaming machine U2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine 1, the outer surface is formed along the direction of the fixing force applied to the fixing means, so that even if the outer surface is likely to be deformed by an external force, sufficient resistance is obtained. A force can be generated and deformation of the outer surface can be suppressed.

The gaming machine U3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine U1 or U2, at least one of the fixing portions of the fixing means is provided with a suppressing means for suppressing a decrease in the fixing force.

Here, assuming that the first means and the second means are made of a resin molded product and the drawing direction of the resin mold for manufacturing is one direction, the first direction or the second direction inclining each other and the pulling direction are different. Since it will be tilted, there is a risk that the fixing force will be weakened by the first or second fixing means corresponding to the tilted side.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine U3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U1 or U2, a decrease in the fixing force can be suppressed by the suppressing means, so that the fastening screw used for fastening the fixing means is used as a common part. can do.

The configuration of the suppressing means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a loosening preventing means for preventing the loosening of the fixing, or a loosening regulating means for restricting further loosening when the loosening of the fixing occurs.

In the gaming machine U3, the suppressing means is provided with a notification means capable of notifying a fixing defect of the fixing means.

According to the gaming machine U4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U3, the notification means notifies the fixing failure of the fixing means, so that it is possible to quickly detect that the fastening screw has loosened.

The configuration of the notification means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a means for electrically notifying, such as a detection means such as a sensor, or a structural means for causing a change in appearance.
As structural means, for example, a transmission changing means for changing the transmission intensity of vibration generated inside the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine, a light effect changing means for blocking light emission from the inside and generating a shadow that can be seen from the outside, and a light effect changing means. An example is a vibration notification means that makes the player notice by contacting the vibrating part of the vibrating device to generate an abnormal noise or strengthen the vibration.

In any of the gaming machines U2 to U4, a third means disposed between the first means and the second means is provided, and the third means has the first surface and the second surface. A gaming machine U5 characterized in that it is arranged between them.

According to the gaming machine U5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines U2 to U4, the directions in which the first means and the second means can generate a resistance force as the component direction of the fixing force of the fixing means are set to a plurality of directions. Therefore, it is possible to easily hold the third means safely.

The configuration of the third means is not limited at all. For example, the third means may be configured such that the first means side is made visible to the player, while the second means side is not made visible to the player. In this case, the side where the distance between the first surface and the second surface is widened is the first means side, and the side where the distance between the first surface and the second surface is narrowed is the second means side. The area occupied by the composition can be narrowed.

The gaming machine U5 includes a fourth means arranged on the opposite side of the third means with the first surface interposed therebetween, and the first surface is formed so as to be inclined with respect to the front-rear direction. Gaming machine U
6.

According to the gaming machine U6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U5, the area occupied by the third means and the area occupied by the fourth means in front view can interfere with each other, so that the third means and the fourth means can interfere with each other. It is possible to secure a large area where the pachinko machine can be placed.

A gaming machine U7, wherein in any of the gaming machines U1 to U6, the first fixing means and the second fixing means are arranged in a set at predetermined intervals, respectively.

According to the gaming machine U7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines U1 to U6, the first fixing means and the second fixing means are arranged in a set at predetermined intervals, so that the one fixing means is used. It is possible to prevent deformation along the generation direction of the fixing force from occurring in the other fixing means. That is, since deformation in the direction intersecting the direction in which the fixing force is generated can be suppressed, it is possible to avoid loosening of the fixing means.

<The rigidity of the game board assists the decrease in rigidity due to the notch (through hole) on the side of the rear case>
In a gaming machine including a gaming board and facing means having edges arranged facing each other on the gaming board, the facing means is provided with a proximity portion arranged close to the gaming board on the left and right edges. , The gaming machine ZA1 characterized in that the formation mode of the proximity portion is asymmetrical.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine including a gaming board constituting a gaming area and a back case in which a movable unit or the like is arranged (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-77627). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the internal space of the rear case is eroded by the space occupied by the connection position between the gaming board and the rear case, so that a sufficient space for arranging movable units and the like can be secured. There was a problem that it became difficult.

In particular, in a right-handed machine that plays a right-handed game in a probabilistic state (high probability state) or a jackpot game (special game state), the player's line of sight is often concentrated on the right side of the game area, so the right side. It has been required to secure the internal space of the back case on the back side of the flow path (the flow path on the right side of the liquid crystal device) through which the struck game ball flows down.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZA1, the formation mode of the proximity portion is asymmetrical.
Since the arrangement of the left and right edges of the facing means with respect to the game board can be asymmetrical, the internal area of either the left or right facing means is secured instead of sacrificing the internal area of either the left or right facing means. Can be facilitated. As a result, the degree of freedom in arranging the facing means with respect to the game board can be improved, a sufficient space for arranging the movable unit and the like can be secured, and the degree of freedom in the effect of making the player visually recognize through the game board is improved. be able to. For example, the vicinity of the end portion of the game board (for example, a right-handed flow path) can be illuminated by a light emitting means of a mobile accessory, or can be illuminated by light emitted from a liquid crystal display device.

The mode of forming the proximity portion is not limited in any way. For example, it may be in contact with the game board, may be arranged away from the game board, or may be a combination thereof.

The mode of forming the proximity portion is not limited at all. For example, it is possible to secure a region in which the connecting portion (contact portion) used for connecting to the game board is not formed in a wide range.
The connecting portion (contact portion) may be arranged after suppressing the area occupied by the connecting portion (contact portion).

Further, the aspect of left-right asymmetry is not limited at all. For example, the area where the proximity portion is formed may be asymmetric, the direction of formation of the proximity portion may be left-right asymmetric, and the functional portion (female screw to which the fastening screw is fastened and fixed) arranged in the proximity portion may be asymmetric. The formation position, formation direction (for example, the direction in which the insertion direction of the fastening screw is set in the front-rear direction, the left-right direction, or another direction) or the number of formations may be asymmetrical.

In the gaming machine ZA1, the facing means includes an arrangement portion in which the proximity portion is formed at an end portion on the game board side and is arranged facing each other in the left-right direction, and the proximity portion is formed in a left-right direction with respect to the arrangement portion. The gaming machine ZA2, which is characterized by being asymmetrically configured.

According to the gaming machine ZA2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZA1, the area between the arrangement portions can be configured to be asymmetrical with respect to the gaming board. It should be noted that the mode in which the formation direction is asymmetrical is not limited at all. For example, the formation direction may be opposite to the symmetrical direction (the same direction for both left and right), or the formation direction may be a direction that intersects left and right (for example, an orthogonal direction).

Further, as the forming direction, for example, an extension direction in which the plate-shaped portion is extended (direction in which the plate-shaped portion is provided), a recessed direction in which the recessed portion is recessed as a notch (direction of cutting), and the like are exemplified.

In the gaming machine ZA1 or ZA2, the proximity portion includes a facing surface which is a surface facing the gaming board and an facing side which is a side facing the gaming board, and is compared with a portion of the gaming board with respect to the left side portion. The gaming machine ZA3 is characterized in that the portion of the gaming board with respect to the right side portion has a larger proportion of the facing sides than the facing surface.

According to the gaming machine ZA3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZA1 or ZA2, the left-right width occupied by the proximity portion can be narrowed on the right side portion of the gaming board as compared with the left side portion of the gaming board.

The gaming machine ZA4 is characterized in that any one of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA3 is provided with a suppressing means for suppressing the displacement of the gaming board or the facing means in the facing direction.

According to the gaming machine ZA4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA3, the rigidity of the opposing means can be reinforced by the suppressing means. The arrangement of the suppressing means is not limited at all. For example, it may be arranged at a position away from the game board (including a position where it abuts on the opposing means), or may be arranged at a position away from the facing means (including a position where it abuts on the game board). However, it may be arranged at a position between the game board and the facing means (including a position where the game board or the facing means is in contact with at least one of them).

In the gaming machine ZA4, the suppressing means is arranged on the gaming board side of the gaming machine ZA5.

According to the gaming machine ZA5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZA4, it is possible to maintain the strength (ensure the rigidity) of the gaming unit as a whole without providing a special member in the facing means.

In the gaming machine ZA4 or ZA5, the suppressing means includes an overlapping portion that overlaps with the outermost surface of the facing means in a front view. The gaming machine ZA6.

According to the gaming machine ZA6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZA4 or ZA5, it is possible to prevent the sacrifice of the design freedom inside the gaming board, so that the space of the right-handed flow path in the gaming area can be secured. It is possible to maintain the strength (ensure the rigidity) of the game unit as a whole.

In any of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA6, the facing means is provided with a non-contacting portion that is non-contacting with the gaming board at the edge portion on the gaming board side of the outermost surface in the predetermined direction. Characterized gaming machine ZA7.

According to the gaming machine ZA7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA6, the gap between the gaming board and the non-contact portion can be used as a place for arranging the driving device of the variable winning opening, or the driving device thereof. It can be effectively used by using it as a wiring path connected to a winning sensor or a light emitting device, or by using it as a place for arranging a light emitting device.

In any of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA7, the gaming board is formed of a resin material.
The facing means is provided with an effect means arranged between the facing means and the gaming board, and the front end of the effect means can be arranged on the front side of the front end of the facing means. ZA8
..

According to the gaming machine ZA8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA7, the space for arranging the staging means can be expanded to the front side.

<Various light emission modes for movable accessories>
A light emitting means that irradiates a predetermined light emitting region with light, and a displacement means configured so that a first position that at least partially overlaps the light emitting region in a predetermined direction is included in at least a part of the displacement section.
The gaming machine ZB1 is characterized in that the light emitting region includes a possible region that is visibly configured in a plurality of types of light emitting modes corresponding to the arrangement of the displacement means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that a light emitting means and a displacement means overlap each other in a front view (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-159178). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the light emitting means and the displacement means are only visually recognized independently, and the staging effect utilizing the overlap is insufficient. That is, the displacement means is arranged in front of the light emitting means so that the light emitting means is hidden by the displacement means.
There was a problem that the staging effect was insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZB1, since the light emitting means is configured to be visually recognizable in a different light emitting mode in connection with the mode of the displacement means, it is possible to diversify the staging mode.

The modes of the displacement means include, for example, the arrangement mode of the displacement means, the displacement mode of the displacement means, the direction (posture) of the displacement means, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means arranged in the displacement means, and the like. Illustrated. Examples of the arrangement mode of the displacement means include a case where a part of the displacement means overlaps with the light emitting means and a case where the entire displacement means overlaps with the light emitting means. As the displacement mode of the displacement means,
Examples thereof include a case where the displacement means is displaced toward the light emitting means side, and a case where the displacement means is displaced away from the light emitting means. The orientation (posture) of the displacement means includes a case where the front surface of the displacement means faces the light emitting means side, a case where the back surface of the displacement means faces the light emitting means side, and a case where the surface in between faces the light emitting means side. Illustrated.

As the light emitting mode of the light emitting means, a mode in which the light emitting means that emits light toward the displacement means side is turned on, blinks or extinguished, a mode in which the light emitting means that emits light toward the side away from the displacement means is turned on, blinks or extinguished, and the like. Is exemplified.

In the gaming machine ZB1, the possible region includes a first state in which the displacement means is arranged in the first position and a second state in which the displacement means is arranged in a second position different from the first position. The gaming machine ZB2 is characterized in that it can be configured when the light emitting mode visually recognized from the predetermined direction is different.

According to the gaming machine ZB2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZB1, the light emitting mode can be changed by changing the position of the displacement means, so that the impression given to the player while keeping the light emitting mode of the displacement means alone the same. Can be changed suddenly.

In the gaming machine ZB1 or ZB2, the light emitting means includes a substrate on which a light emitting portion is arranged and a refracting means in which the light emitted from the light emitting portion is refracted so as to be refractable. The gaming machine ZB3 is arranged outside the possible region in a directional view, and the refraction means includes a first refraction portion that overlaps the possible region in a predetermined directional view.

According to the gaming machine ZB3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZB1 or ZB2, the mode of the light visually recognized through the first refracting portion is a combination of the light emitted from the light emitting portion and the color or light / darkness based on the displacement means. Can be revealed by.

Further, by narrowing the forming range of the substrate, it is possible to secure a region for arranging a driving device for generating a driving force of other constituent members, for example, a displacement means, and a space for the displacement means to be displaced.

In the gaming machine ZB3, the displacement means is characterized in that the displacement at a position overlapping the possible region in the predetermined direction is larger than the displacement at other positions.

According to the game machine ZB4, in addition to the effect of the game machine ZB3, the displacement of the displacement means is suppressed at the position where the light emitting means occupies a large space, and the displacement of the displacement means is increased at the position where the space occupied by the light emitting means is small. Therefore, it is possible to secure the maximum degree of freedom of displacement of the displacement means while suppressing the space occupied jointly by the light emitting means and the displacement means.

The magnitude of the displacement is not limited in any way. For example, the absolute value of the displacement of the displacement means may be used for comparison, positive or negative may be provided in opposite directions for comparison, or the displacement of the displacement means in a predetermined direction (component) may be used for comparison. The comparison may be made including the number of members that are configured in the displacement means and are displaced.

In any of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB4, the displacement means includes a second light emitting means that emits light in a manner that can be visually recognized from the predetermined direction, and a transmitting means that transmits light emitted from the second light emitting means. The gaming machine ZB5 is characterized in that the transmission means has a shape in which the width in a direction intersecting the displacement direction of the displacement means changes.

According to the gaming machine ZB5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB4, the position of the displacement means in the displacement section is the width of the light of the second light emitting means visually recognized through the possible region. Can be changed by.

A gaming machine ZB6, wherein in any of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB5, the possible area is arranged on the center side of a window portion in which a liquid crystal display area is visually opened.

According to the gaming machine ZB6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB5, the change in the light emitting mode of the possible region can be used to guide the player's line of sight toward the liquid crystal display region side.

It should be noted that the arrangement mode of the possible region is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified.
For example, it may be scattered around the window portion (including the case where there is only one possible area).
It may be in the shape of a circle (arc) surrounding the window.

In any of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB6, a substrate on which the light emitting means is arranged is provided.
The gaming machine ZB7 is characterized in that the substrate is not provided with fastening means for fastening at the end portion on the possible region side.

According to the gaming machine ZB7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB6, it is possible to secure a space for arranging the light emitting means on the side of the possible region, and a shadow of the fastening means is generated in the possible region. It can be avoided.

The gaming machine ZB 7 is characterized in that the gaming machine ZB 7 is provided with an lining means that is covered in a manner of covering between the possible region and the substrate in the predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine ZB8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZB7, the boundary position between the possible area and the substrate is hidden by the lining means, so that the visibility of light deteriorates near the end of the substrate. Even if there is, it is possible to avoid showing it to the player.

In the gaming machine ZB7 or ZB8, a substrate holding means for holding the substrate is provided, and the substrate holding means includes a gap forming portion for forming a gap in order to facilitate assembly of the substrate.
The gaming machine ZB9 is characterized in that the gap forming portion is closed in the assembled state.

According to the gaming machine ZB9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZB7 or ZB8, it is possible to avoid problems such as light leaking from the gap forming portion while achieving the effect of facilitating the assembly of the substrate by the gap forming portion. .. Further, this gap forming portion may be used for engagement with other members and may be used for alignment of other members.

In any of the gaming machines ZB7 to ZB9, the board includes a connector portion to which wiring is connected, and the connector portion is disposed at a position away from the end portion on the possible region side. Game machine ZB10.

According to the gaming machine ZB10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines ZB7 to ZB9, a load is applied to the wiring connected to the connector portion to generate a moment starting from the end portion on the possible region side. Therefore, the substrate can be easily taken out even in a situation where the substrate cannot be taken out directly.

<Transmission of driving force to multiple members, switching between transmission and interruption>
A displacement means configured to be displaceable, a drive means for generating a driving force for displace the displacement means, and a drive means generated by the drive means can be transmitted to the displacement means in a predetermined state. In a gaming machine comprising a transmission means, the transmission means includes a transmission unit that transmits a driving force to a predetermined transmitted portion of the displacement means, and the transmission unit is transmitted by the transmission unit in a driving state of the driving means. The gaming machine ZC1 is characterized in that the displacement of the displacement means can be suppressed when the portion is not abutted.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a cylindrical portion used for driving force transmission is guided to a concave portion of a displacement member, and the arrangement of the cylindrical portion and the posture of the displacement member correspond to each other (for example). See JP-A-2010-234152). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above,
Since the posture of the displacement member is maintained by the support by the columnar portion, there is a problem that it is difficult to perform other effects using the columnar portion while the posture of the displacement member is maintained.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZC1, since the transmission unit is configured to be able to suppress the displacement of the displacement means even in the non-contact state, the transmission unit can be used for other effects while maintaining the posture of the displacement means. It can be used.

The mode of the transmission means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a single gear or a plurality of gears arranged between the displacement means and the drive means, or may be an embodiment exemplified by a mechanism such as a slider crank or a cam in which a plurality of members interact with each other.

The mode in which the displacement can be suppressed is not limited at all. For example, it may be urged by gravity or an elastic force based on a spring member, or it may be locked (engaged) by a claw-shaped member, or it may be in contact with a member having a function as a stopper to suppress it. It may be the mode that is done. Further, examples of the mode that can be suppressed include a mode in which the displacement of the displacement means is reduced, a mode in which the displacement of the displacement means is prevented (regulated), and the like.

In the gaming machine ZC1, the transmission means includes a forming portion formed along the movement locus of the transmission portion, and the forming portion is such that the transmission portion is not in the moving direction of the displacement means with respect to the displacement means. The gaming machine ZC2 is configured to be able to come into contact with the displacement means in a state of being in contact with the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine ZC2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZC1, the displacement of the displacement means can be suppressed by the contact between the forming portion and the displacement means, so that the stability of the arrangement of the displacement means with respect to the external force is improved. be able to.

In the gaming machine ZC2, the forming portion is extended from the transmission portion along the displacement direction of the transmission means, and the distance between the transmission unit and the displacement means becomes longer than the distance between the transmission unit and the displacement means. The gaming machine ZC3, which is characterized by being configured in such a manner.

According to the gaming machine ZC3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZC2, a portion where a load is generated when the driving force is transmitted and a portion where the load is generated when the displacement is suppressed are partially in the facing direction between the displacement means and the transmission means. Can be displaced.

In the gaming machine ZC3, the displacement means has a one-sided functional portion formed on one side of the displacement means in the moving direction with respect to the transmitted portion and the other side in the moving direction of the displacement means with respect to the transmitted portion. The one-sided functional portion is configured in the same plane as the movement locus of the forming portion, and the other-side functional portion is located outside the moving locus of the forming portion. A gaming machine ZC4 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine ZC4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZC3, the moving direction in which the movement is suppressed by the forming portion can be set to one side.

In any of the gaming machines ZC1 to ZC4, the displacement means includes a first displacement means and a second displacement means different from the first displacement means, and the transmission means are the first displacement means and the second displacement means. The gaming machine ZC5 is characterized in that the transmission mode to the displacement means can be changed for each operation section.

The method of switching the transmission mode is not limited at all. For example, when the driving force is transmitted to one of the first displacement means and the second displacement means, the transmission of the driving force to the other may be cut off, or the driving force may be transmitted to the first displacement means and the second displacement means. It may be an embodiment in which the ratio of the driving force to be applied is changed.

According to the gaming machine ZC5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZC1 to ZC4, a plurality of displacement means can be displaced in different displacement modes by one transmission means.

In the gaming machine ZC5, the gaming machine ZC6 is characterized in that the first displacement means is arranged on one side of the transmission means, and the second displacement means is arranged on the other side of the transmission means.

According to the gaming machine ZC6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZC5, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in setting the combination of the displacement modes of the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

The combination of the displacement modes of the first displacement means and the second displacement means is not limited at all. For example, it may include a timing in which the first displacement means and the second displacement means are displaced in synchronization, or the transmission or interruption of the driving force to the first displacement means and the second displacement means is configured to be reversed and synchronized. It may be the one that does not displace.

Further, when the timing of synchronous displacement is included, the displacement mode may be changed by changing the relative speeds of the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

In the gaming machine ZC5 or ZC6, the gaming machine ZC7 is characterized in that the direction of displacement of the first displacement means and the direction of displacement of the second displacement means are set in opposite directions.

According to the gaming machine ZC7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZC5 or ZC6, the first displacement means and the second displacement means can be mutually recognized in a common area, so that the first displacement means and the second displacement means can be visually recognized. Even when the effect area in which the means is displaced is narrow, effective effect can be performed.

The mode of the first displacement means and the second displacement means is not limited at all. for example,
A plurality of displacement means laminated in the front-rear direction may be extended to a common area at different timings, or the initial arrangement is configured so as to pass through a common range while the plurality of movable members are moving while being laminated in the front-rear direction. May be.

<The load generating part catches up and comes into contact with each other to prevent the stop position from shifting>
In a gaming machine including a first displacement means configured to be displaceable and a second displacement means configured to displace the first displacement means by being displaced in a predetermined direction, the second displacement means is
The first displacement means includes a load generating portion that applies a load in a direction along the predetermined direction in order to displace the first displacement means, and the first displacement means includes a loaded portion that receives a load from the load generating portion and generates the load. The gaming machine is characterized in that the portion is separated from the loaded portion during displacement along the predetermined direction and can be brought into contact with a predetermined portion different from the loaded portion of the first displacement means. ZD1
..

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a cylindrical portion used for driving force transmission is guided to a concave portion of a displacement member, and the arrangement of the cylindrical portion and the posture of the displacement member correspond to each other (for example). See JP-A-2010-234152). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above,
If the cylindrical portion moves excessively due to a defect in drive transmission, the position of the displacement member may shift from the moving end, which may give a sense of discomfort to the player.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZD1, the load generating portion separates from the loaded portion during displacement and comes into contact with a predetermined portion different from the loaded portion, so that excessive displacement occurs in the second displacement means. However, it is possible to prevent the first displacement means from being placed in an unintended position.

In the gaming machine ZD1, the load generating portion applies a load directed from the other side to one side in the predetermined direction in a state where the first displacement means is arranged at one end of the displaceable section. The gaming machine ZD2, which is configured to be able to be given to a pachinko machine.

According to the gaming machine ZD2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZD1, when the first displacement means is arranged at one end in a predetermined direction, the load generating portion is in a predetermined direction with respect to the first displacement means. Since the load in the direction from the other side to the one side is applied, the first displacement means can be pressed against the end portion on one side in the predetermined direction by the load.

The gaming machine ZD1 or ZD2 includes a driving means configured to be able to drive the second displacement means, and the load generating portion is the first on the other side of the loaded portion in the predetermined direction.
A gaming machine ZD3 characterized by abutting on a displacement means.

According to the gaming machine ZD3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZD1 or ZD2, the second displacement means can be mechanically stopped by the contact between the load generating portion and the first displacement means, so that the driving force is stopped. Even if the timing accuracy is low, the terminal positions of the first displacement means and the second displacement means can be easily made constant. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first displacement means and the second displacement means from being displaced from the terminal positions while abruptly setting the stop of the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

In addition, the part that takes measures against the rare event that the second displacement means moves excessively
By providing it at a location different from the loaded portion that receives the load each time the driving force is transmitted, the fail-safe function can be exhibited without any problem even if the loaded portion is deformed.

A gaming machine ZD4, wherein any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD3 is provided with a regulating means capable of regulating the first displacement means at one end in the predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine ZD4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD3, the second displacement means is regulated by the regulating means at one end in a predetermined direction. 1 It can be displaced independently of the displacement means.

The mode of the regulatory means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a claw-shaped member that enters and exits in a direction intersecting the displacement direction of the first displacement means and engages with it, or it may be regulated by gravity or an urging force by an elastic member, or a part of the second displacement means. May be configured by.

In any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD4, the first displacement means is provided with a detection means configured to be able to detect that the first displacement means is arranged at one end in the predetermined direction, and the first displacement means is a method.
The gaming machine ZD5 is characterized in that the detection means includes a detected portion whose position is detected, and the load generating portion comes into contact with the detected portion.

According to the gaming machine ZD5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD4, the portion damaged by the load at the time of contact can be limited to the detected portion.

By linking the life that can be calculated from the number of displacements (number of drives) of the second displacement means and the durability of the detection piece, it is possible to determine the detection failure due to the damage of the detection piece. It is possible to grasp the replacement time (maintenance time) of the displacement means.

In any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD5, the direction of the load applied from the load generating portion to the predetermined portion intersects with the direction of the load applied from the load generating portion to the loaded portion. The gaming machine ZD6 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine ZD6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD5, the first
It is possible to facilitate a plurality of operating directions of the displacement means.

In any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD6, the loaded portion and the predetermined portion are arranged at predetermined intervals in a direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction.
..

According to the gaming machine ZD7, in any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD6, the loaded portion and the predetermined portion are arranged at the same position when visually recognized from a direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction.
The area required for the arrangement of the loaded portion and the predetermined portion can be narrowed.

<Technical concept to maintain by utilizing the flexibility of the following means>
In a gaming machine provided with a displacement means configured to be able to displace a predetermined area and a following means for following the displacement of the displacement means, prevention of preventing a predetermined portion of the following means from entering the predetermined area side. The gaming machine ZE1 characterized by being provided with means.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which flexible wiring is routed along the direction of displacement of the displacement means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-157474).
.. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, by setting the length of the wiring in comparison with the displacement means, there is an advantage that the wiring is less likely to bend when the displacement means is displaced, but the wiring is caught in the displacement means. In addition to the need to form temporary fixing parts that temporarily fix the wiring so that the wiring does not displace relative to each other, the displacement means are placed in place while the wiring is laid on the temporary fixing part. It usually takes time to assemble because it is assembled while doing it.
This has a problem that the degree of freedom in design and the assembly efficiency may be lowered.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZE1, the preventing means prevents the following means exemplified for wiring or the like from being displaced toward a predetermined region side, so that the following means is rubbed against the displacement means and damaged. It can be suppressed. This makes it possible to eliminate the need to form a plurality of temporary fixing portions in the displacement means, improve the degree of freedom in designing the displacement means, and improve the assembly efficiency.

In the gaming machine ZE1, the preventing means is characterized in that the following means is supported so as to be relatively displaceable in a predetermined direction in which a change in distance from the displacement means occurs due to the displacement of the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine ZE2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZE1, the preventing means supports the following means in a manner capable of being displaced in a direction in which the distance between the preventing means and the displacement means changes with the displacement of the displacement means. , The load applied to the following means can be reduced as compared with the case where the position of the following means is fixed by a fixing member such as a binding band.

The mode of the preventive measures is not limited at all. For example, it may be a columnar portion around which the following means can be wound, or a claw-shaped portion on which the following means can be sandwiched. Further, when the preventive means is formed as a columnar portion, for example, the columnar portion may be formed as a fastening portion used when fastening and fixing the members to each other, or may be used for positioning when assembling the members to each other. It may be formed as a positioning portion.

Moreover, the mode of the following means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an electric wiring that supplies electricity to the displacement means, or it is a band-shaped member that is displaced based on the displacement of the displacement means, and a figure or pattern is drawn on the surface, and the figure or pattern is made visible to the player. A band-shaped effect member that assists the effect may be used, or an elastic means such as a coil spring that generates an urging force that assists the displacement of the displacement means may be used.

In the gaming machine ZE1 or ZE2, the following means is configured to be able to supply electricity to the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine ZE3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZE1 or ZE2, electricity can be satisfactorily supplied to the displacement means.

In any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE3, the predetermined direction is a direction intersecting the direction in which the displacement means is displaced, and the following means is configured to surround the prevention means. The gaming machine ZE4.

According to the gaming machine ZE4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE3, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the following means greatly overhangs to one side. That is, since the range in which the following means can be displaced can be arranged on both sides of the preventing means, the area where it is necessary to avoid interference between the following means and other members can be limited to the range around the preventing means. ..

Further, it is not necessary to configure a relief portion for allowing the following means to enter from the displacement end of the displacement means to the outside in the displacement direction. As a result, the displacement means can be arranged in a small space.

In any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE4, a shielding means for shielding at least a part of the displacement means is provided, and the following means is connected to the displacement means at an inner position of the shielding means. The gaming machine ZE5.

According to the gaming machine ZE5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE4, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the connecting portion between the following means and the displacement means by the shielding means. In addition, the inward direction here means the inward direction when the edge portion in the front view is used as the outer shape.

In the gaming machine ZE5, the displacement means is configured to be rotatable about a first axis, and the first axis is arranged at an outer edge portion of the shielding means.

According to the gaming machine ZE6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZE5, a large amount of protrusion from the outer shape (outer edge portion) of the shielding means of the displacement means is secured while keeping the following means out of the player's field of view. be able to.

In the gaming machine ZE5 or ZE6, the prevention means is a straight line that equally divides the rotatable angle of the displacement means about the first axis, and is arranged on a straight line passing through the first axis. ZE7, a gaming machine featuring.

According to the gaming machine ZE7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZE5 or ZE6, the absolute value of the displacement amount of the following means can be suppressed.

In any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE7, the displacement means is provided with a guide portion for guiding the following means in a direction away from the displacement locus.

According to the gaming machine ZE8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE7, it is possible to prevent the displacement means from rubbing against each other, and it is possible to improve the durability of the following means.

In the gaming machine ZE8, the guiding portion is extended in a direction orthogonal to the outer shape of the predetermined region.

According to the gaming machine ZE9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZE8, the area occupied by the following means in the vicinity of the displacement means can be narrowed, and the area of the void through which the following means can pass can be narrowed. It is possible to improve the rigidity of the external means for holding the displacement means as compared with the case where the gap is large.

In any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE9, the following means is formed in a string shape or a band shape, one end is connected to the displacement means, the other end is connected to the gaming machine, and the following ends are directed toward both ends. The gaming machine ZE10 is characterized in that it is guided from one side of the predetermined area.

According to the gaming machine ZE10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE9, a load in a direction of pulling from one side of a predetermined region can be applied at both ends of the following means. As a result, the entire following means can be balanced with the load given by the guide unit.

In any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE10, the following means is configured to be wound around the preventive means in a loosening direction by shifting the displacement means from the position before the displacement to the position after the displacement. Machine ZE11.

According to the gaming machine ZE11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE10,
By absorbing the displacement of the displacement means by the looseness (slack) of the following means, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an excessive load on the following means.

In any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE11, an arranging means in which the following means is arranged between the ZE1 and ZE11 is provided, and an arranging portion for aligning the arranging means is provided. A gaming machine Z characterized in that it is arranged outside the movement trajectory of the following means.
E12.

According to the gaming machine ZE12, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE11,
Since it is possible to prevent the alignment portion from eroding the displacement space of the tracking means, it is possible to minimize the load applied to the following means due to the displacement of the displacement means.

In the gaming machine ZE12, the following means is configured to be wound around the preventing means, and the following means is set to have a first displacement portion (weak displacement portion) and a displacement larger than that of the first displacement portion. The gaming machine ZE13 is provided with a second displacement portion (strong displacement portion), and the first displacement portion is arranged between the second displacement portion and the arrangement means.

According to the gaming machine ZE13, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZE12, it is possible to limit the locations where damage is likely to occur due to contact with the arranging means of the following means. Therefore, it is possible to limit the locations that require reinforcement, and it is possible to improve durability at low cost.

The mode of comparing the magnitudes of the displacements of the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion is not limited at all. For example, the linear distances of the positions before and after the displacement may be compared, or when the displacement occurs in a plurality of directions, the comparison may be limited to the displacement in a predetermined direction (or on a predetermined surface).

In the gaming machine ZE12 or ZE13, the preventing means includes a protruding portion projecting from the arranging means, and the following means is wound around the projecting portion.

According to the gaming machine ZE14, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZE12 or ZE13, the fixing means can be assembled to the arranging means from above while supporting the following means dripping by its own weight by the arranging means. And the fixing means can be easily assembled.

<Technical concept in which the displacement mode (transmission mode) changes with forward and reverse rotation>
In a gaming machine including a driving means, a displacement means configured to be displaceable by the driving force of the driving means, and a transmitting means configured to be able to transmit the driving force generated by the driving means to the displacement means. The driving means has a first driving mode for generating a driving force in the first direction and the first driving mode.
The displacement means is configured to be operable in a second driving mode that generates a driving force in a second direction different from the direction, and the displacement means is driven by the first displacement mode and the second driving mode. The gaming machine ZF1 is characterized in that it is configured to be displaceable by a second displacement mode to be driven.

A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a first displacement means and a second displacement means that are displaced by a driving force of a common drive device, and the direction of displacement is reversed by reversing the drive direction of the drive device in the forward and reverse directions. There is a gaming machine configured as such (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-146413).
.. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the first is due to the length of driving the drive device in the positive direction.
Even if the displacement modes of the displacement means and the second displacement means change, and the drive directions of the drive devices are exchanged in the forward and reverse directions, both the first displacement means and the second displacement means are displaced. Therefore, there is a problem that the degree of improvement of the staging effect is insufficient by adopting a device that can be driven in the forward and reverse directions as the drive device.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZF1, the displacement mode of the displacement means can be changed by changing the direction in which the driving force is generated. Therefore, a driving device capable of setting a plurality of driving force generation directions is provided. The effect of the effect used can be sufficiently improved.

The gaming machine ZF1 is provided with a light emitting means that emits light toward the displacement means, and the displacement means is configured to be displaceable so as to pass through an optical axis of light emitted from the light emitting means. The gaming machine ZF2.

According to the gaming machine ZF2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZF1, the position where the light emitted from the light emitting means intersects the displacement means can be changed during the displacement of the displacement means, so that the illuminated position of the displacement means can be changed. Can produce a gorgeous effect that changes over time.

The gaming machine ZF1 or ZF2 includes a displacement suppressing means for suppressing displacement of at least a part of the transmission means, and the transmission means is the driving means in at least one of the first driving mode and the second driving mode. The gaming machine ZF3 includes a suppression region in which transmission of a driving force is suppressed, and the displacement suppressing means is configured to be capable of suppressing a predetermined displacement in the suppression region.

According to the gaming machine ZF3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZF1 or ZF2, the displacement suppressing means causes the transmission means to be unintentionally displaced when the transmission of the driving force is suppressed, thereby causing displacement in an unintended displacement mode. It is possible to prevent the means from being displaced.

Further, the visibility of the displacement means can be maintained high as compared with the case where the displacement means is stopped by directly contacting the displacement means with another member. Therefore, it is possible to easily configure the displacement means having an appropriate displacement mode from the player.

The mode of the displacement suppressing means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an engaging device that generates viscous resistance such as a damper device, a resistance device that generates resistance by its own weight, or a case where the resistance by its own weight tends to be insufficient (for example, displacement of the displacement means). (When the direction is along the horizontal direction), the idling operation cannot be suppressed by the gravitational force, so for example, a device such as a torque limiter whose resistance is variable according to the displacement mode may be used.

The game machine ZF3 includes a detecting means configured to be able to detect the displacement of the displacement suppressing means, and the displacement suppressing means generates resistance when the operating speed of the transmitting means in the suppressing region is lower than a predetermined speed. The resistance is suppressed when the operating speed of the transmission means in the suppression region is equal to or higher than a predetermined speed, and the detection means is a detected portion of the displacement suppression means at a position where the displacement suppression means generates resistance. ZF4 is a gaming machine characterized in that it is arranged so as to be detectable.

According to the gaming machine ZF4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZF3, is the detection means functioning well in detecting the stop position of the displacement suppressing means and suppressing the displacement in the suppressing region of the transmission means in the displacement suppressing means? It can be used for both detection and detection.

In any of the game machines ZF1 to ZF4, the displacement means includes a first displacement means that is rotationally displaced around the first axis, and a second displacement means that is rotationally displaced outside the first displacement means around the first axis. The gaming machine ZF5 is provided with a displacement means, and is configured to be capable of suppressing the displacement of the second displacement means in the first drive mode or the second drive mode.

According to the gaming machine ZF5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF4, the first
In the drive mode or the second drive mode, the displacement of the second displacement means can be suppressed, and in this suppressed state, the second displacement means is arranged between the player and the first displacement means and the view is visible. It is possible to configure two production modes, one is to block the second displacement means and the other is to dispose the second displacement means outward between the player and the first displacement means so as not to block the view. In addition, the second displacement means can be configured. Since the displacement is possible even in the drive mode in which the displacement of the above is not suppressed, it is possible to configure the effect by the displacement means in a total of three displacement modes.

In any of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF5, the transmitting means is provided with a light transmitting means formed of a light transmitting material on a connection position side with the displacement means.
..

According to the gaming machine ZF6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF5, the effect of facilitating the assembly of the displacement means by the light transmitting means and the light emission effect by conducting the light toward the displacement means. It can play the effect that makes it possible.

In any of the game machines ZF1 to ZF6, the displacement means includes a first displacement means that is rotationally displaced about the first axis and a transmission means that is rotationally displaced about the first axis and is the first displacement means. It is provided with a second displacement means connected to the transmission means outside the connection position of the above, and the second displacement means is configured to overlap with the first displacement means in the first axial direction. Characteristic gaming machine ZF7.

According to the gaming machine ZF7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF6, the second
The first displacement means can be used to prevent the displacement means from coming off. This makes it possible to eliminate the need for a separate arrangement of the retaining member.

<Vibration device next to the device (P9 policy 1)>
For the first operating means configured to be operable by the player, the second operating means arranged at a position different from the first operating means and configured to be operable by the player, and the first operating means. The second
The gaming machine ZG1 is provided with a load generating means which is arranged on the operating means side and is configured to be able to generate a load toward the first operating means and the second operating means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine including a plurality of operating devices and a driving device for driving the operating devices (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-159).
See 178). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the vibration device is arranged in each operation device, the space required for arranging each operation device is large, and the number of operation devices that can be arranged is easily limited. In addition, there is a problem that the cost increases due to an increase in the number of drive devices.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZG1, since the load generating means is arranged on the second operating means side with respect to the first operating means, the load generating means is used as the first operating means and the second operating means (that is,). , Multiple operating means) can also be used to drive. As a result, the space required for arranging the first operating means and the second operating means can be reduced, and the upper limit of the number of arrangable operating means can be raised. In addition, since the number of load generating means can be reduced, the cost for configuring the gaming machine can be suppressed.

The mode of the load generating means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a means configured to enable vibration (high-speed repetitive displacement), a means to generate a load at a predetermined cycle such as a pump, or a means composed of an arm member whose posture changes due to the displacement of a cam. good. Moreover, the mode of the load is not limited in any way. For example, a load that is mechanically transmitted in a contact state may be used, or a load that is transmitted in a non-contact state (wind pressure, sound pressure, high pressure, etc.) may be used.

In the gaming machine ZG1, the load generating means is arranged between the first operating means and the second operating means. The gaming machine ZG2.

According to the gaming machine ZG2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZG1, the load can be transmitted to both the first operating means and the second operating means to the same extent.

In the gaming machine ZG1 or ZG2, the first operating means is operated to launch a gaming ball toward a gaming area, and the load generating means covers the first operating means at least partially from a predetermined direction. The gaming machine ZG3, which is characterized in that it is arranged in the setting means.

According to the gaming machine ZG3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZG1 or ZG2, the load generating means is arranged at a position where the finger of the player who operates the first operating means is sandwiched between the first operating means. Therefore, the load generated from the load generating means can be easily transmitted to the player's fingers.

For example, in the process of moving the player's fingers by moving the fingers closer to the first operating means and releasing the fingers from the first operating means after the operation is completed, the lining means is arranged at a position where the player's fingers can easily pass. By (arranging the lining means so as to cover from a direction that easily interferes with the fingers), it is possible to configure the device so that the load of the load generating means can be easily transmitted to the player during the movement of the fingers.

Further, for example, by arranging the lining means at a position where the fingers come into contact with each other with a high probability when the player operates the first operating means, the load of the load generating means can be increased during the operation of the first operating means. It is possible to configure a state that can be easily transmitted to the player.

It should be noted that this idea is different from the idea of arranging the load generating means in the first operating means.
That is, since the load generating means is arranged on the second operating means side with respect to the first operating means, the load generating means is arranged at a position different from that of the first operating means.

In the gaming machine ZG3, an intervening means configured to intervene between the load generating means and the first operating means and the second operating means so that the load can be transmitted to the first operating means and the second operating means. The gaming machine ZG is characterized in that the intervening means is configured such that the strength of vibration transmission to the first operating means is higher than the strength of vibration transmission to the second operating means.
4.

According to the gaming machine ZG4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZG3, the load transmission can be concentrated on the first operating means side.

The gaming machine ZG4 is characterized in that the intervening means is configured so that the strength of load transmission can be changed by displacing the load generating means with the driving of the load generating means.

According to the gaming machine ZG5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZG4, the strength of the load transmitted via the intervening means is improved when the load generating means is driven as compared with when the load generating means is not driven. Therefore, while suppressing the degree to which the first operating means and the second operating means interlock with each other (vibration) due to the load given to the pachinko machine by the player, the first operation is performed when the load generating means is driven.
It is possible to perform an effect of strongly operating (vibrating) the operating means and the second operating means.

In any of the gaming machines ZG1 to ZG5, the gaming machine ZG6 is provided with a holding means for holding the load generating means in a displaceable manner, and the holding means is provided with a guide unit for guiding the displacement of the load generating means. ..

According to the gaming machine ZG6, the safety of the player can be ensured by defining the displacement direction of the load generating means in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZG1 to ZG5. That is, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem such as an unintentional collision of the displaced member displaced by the vibration of the load generating means with the player.

In addition, regardless of the structure of the load generating means itself, the load generating means can be displaced in the desired direction by guiding it in the desired direction, so that the load generation adopted to realize the desired operation (vibration) effect is adopted. The degree of freedom of means can be improved.

In the gaming machine ZG6, the holding means is configured to allow displacement of the load generating means in a crossing direction intersecting the direction guided by the guide portion.
G7.

According to the gaming machine ZG7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZG6, the load generating means can be configured to be displaced in the crossing direction when switching between the non-driving state and the driving state, and the switching state and the driving state (stable state) can be configured. The load generating means can be displaced in different ways. As a result, the effect of the load generation means can be improved.

In addition, various aspects are exemplified as the aspect which allows displacement. For example, a second holding means for guiding the holding means may be provided so that the guiding direction by the second holding means intersects the guiding direction of the guide portion, or the load generating means may be located between the holding means and the holding means. It may be configured so as to interpose a flexible member, and displacement may occur due to deformation of the flexible member.

<Vibration means for lining means (P9 policy 2)>
The lining includes a frame means formed in a frame shape, an lining means for covering at least a part of the frame means from the front side, and a vibrating means arranged in the lining means and configured to be vibrable. The means is
The gaming machine ZH1 is provided with an allowable portion to which displacement is allowed, and is configured to be able to transmit the vibration of the vibrating means through the allowable portion.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine including a front frame and a vibrating means disposed on the front side of the front frame (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-159837). but,
In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is necessary to suppress the vibration of the vibrating means to the extent that the vibration of a predetermined strength or more is not transmitted to the front frame side (internal mechanism side), and there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of vibration production. was there.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZH1, since the vibrating means is arranged in the lining means and the displacement of the lining means is allowed, the vibration can be transmitted to the player side via the lining means. On the other hand, by absorbing the vibration by the displacement of the lining means, it is possible to suppress the transmission of the vibration to the frame means side.
Thereby, the allowable degree as the vibration strength of the vibration means can be increased.

The mode of the permissible portion is not limited in any way. For example, it may be configured in a connection mode premised on the displacement of slides, phosphorus, gears, etc., and displacement may occur due to the operation of slides, links, gears, etc. It may be flexible and may be displaced by being overloaded.

In the gaming machine ZH1, the lining means is configured such that the allowable amount of displacement in the vertical direction is smaller than the allowable amount of displacement in the horizontal direction.
..

According to the gaming machine ZH2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZH1, the effect of the permissible portion is maintained by the displacement in the horizontal direction, and the player puts his / her hand on the lining means in the direction of gravity with respect to the lining means. When a load is applied, it is possible to prevent the lining means from being excessively displaced and disturbing the posture of the player. That is, by keeping the allowable amount of displacement in the vertical direction small, it is possible to stabilize the structure of the product.

In the gaming machine ZH1 or ZH2, the lining means is configured in a bag shape with the frame means side open.

According to the gaming machine ZH3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZH1 or ZH2, since the frame means side is configured in an open bag shape, the edge of the bag and the frame means are arranged to face each other.
The contact area between the lining means and the frame means, which are in contact with each other and transmit vibration, can be reduced. As a result, the vibration transmission to the frame means side can be suppressed, so that it is possible to avoid the vibration being transmitted to the main substrate, the ball passage, and the main electric configuration arranged on the frame means side.

In any of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH3, the vibrating means includes an arrangement portion arranged on the frame means side, and the frame means includes a support portion for supporting the arrangement portion, and the arrangement is provided. The department is
The gaming machine ZH4 is characterized in that the deformation resistance is lower than that of the support portion.

According to the gaming machine ZH4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH3, the displacement range of the vibrating means is limited while maintaining the suppression of the vibration transmission to the frame means side, and the arrangement portion further provides. It is possible to cause biting by utilizing the fact that the deformation resistance is low as compared with the case where the structure is rigid, and it is possible to secure a large absolute value of the displacement amount of the vibrating means to the frame means side. As a result, it is possible to easily displace the lining means in which the vibrating means is arranged.

In any of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH4, the lining means includes a first lining portion and a second lining portion having a lower deformation resistance than the first lining portion, and the vibration means is a vibration means. The gaming machine ZH5, which is connected to the first lining portion and the second lining portion and is provided with a contact portion capable of locally contacting the first lining portion.

According to the gaming machine ZH5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH4, the contact position is obtained by locally contacting the first covering portion having high deformation resistance and the contact portion. Can be used as a fixed point (reference point) for vibration. That is, the absolute value of the displacement of the vibrating means and the second lining portion with respect to the contact position can be increased.

In any of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH5, a ball launching operating means operated for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area is provided, and the lining means is at least between the gaming machines and the ball launching operating means. A gaming machine ZH6 characterized by passing through a predetermined member.

According to the gaming machine ZH6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH5, vibration transmission to the ball launching operating means can be suppressed.

<Points characterized by blocking the light itself by the displacement of the accessory>
In a gaming machine including a light emitting means and an irradiated means to which light from the light emitting means is irradiated, the appearance of the irradiated means is changed while leaving the outer shape of the irradiated means in a predetermined direction. The featured gaming machine ZI1.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine equipped with a light emitting means mounted on a movable accessory and capable of executing a light emitting effect (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-208360).
.. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, a member that is displaced so as to interfere with the optical axis of the light emitting means is not arranged, and it is necessary to control the light emitting means in order to change the mode of the light emitting effect. There is a problem that there is room for improvement in the method of realizing the light emission effect because the data capacity is compressed due to the control and the size of the substrate is increased.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZI1, for example, the displacement means is configured so that the first position and the second position can be displaced, and the displacement means interferes with the light emitted from the light emitting means. By configuring it so that it can be configured, the mode of the light emitting effect can be switched by the displacement of the displacement means. Therefore, it is possible to change the mode of the light emitting effect without controlling the light emitting means, and it is possible to reduce the size of the substrate by eliminating the need for control data or the control circuit. can. This makes it possible to improve the method for realizing the light emission effect.

The mode of displacement is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be rotated, it may be a linear slide, or it may be a displacement along a predetermined curve. When the displacement of the displacement means is a linear slide, the case where the direction of the slide coincides with the predetermined direction is better than the case where the directions of the slide intersect with the predetermined direction. It is possible to easily maintain the outer shape.

The mode of the irradiated means is not limited at all. For example, it is configured to rotate on a rotation axis that intersects the optical axis, and the projected area may change due to the difference in posture. The relative projected area may change due to the displacement.

The mode of the displacement means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be configured to be rotationally displaced around the irradiated means, or it may be slid on a plane so as to enter the side of the irradiated means (between the light emitting means).

Further, the mode in which the outer shape of the displacement means is left is not limited at all.
For example, the displacement means may be visually recognized as stopped, or the absolute value of the displacement amount may be smaller than that of the irradiated means so that the displacement of the displacement means is not recognized by the player. It may be an embodiment.

Further, the displacement means may be displaced in relation to the light emitting means. The light emitting means may be configured to face the irradiated means at any timing of the displacement.

The mode of the light emitting means is not limited in any way. For example, the position may be fixed, or it may be configured to be displaceable. The light emitting means may be arranged in the displacement means in a displaceable state, or the light emitting means and the displacement means may be displaced separately (independently). Further, the irradiation direction may be fixed, or the irradiation direction may be variable.

The displacement of the light emitting means may be such that the optical axis is directed to the irradiated means and slides in a manner of being close to and separated from the irradiated means, or the light emitting means is moved around the irradiated means with the optical axis directed to the irradiated means. It may be a rotating one.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be the one that keeps the lighting state at all times, or the one that can switch between lighting and extinguishing.

The gaming machine ZI1 is characterized in that the difference in the appearance of the irradiated means is caused by the irradiation means reflecting the light emitted from the light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine ZI2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZI1, the difference in the irradiated means can be recognized immediately after the light emitting means irradiates the light, so that the attention to the timing of the light irradiation can be improved. .. According to this, even if the irradiated means is a displaceable means,
It may be a non-displaceable means.

The gaming machine ZI3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine ZI1 or ZI2, the degree of difference in the appearance of the irradiated means changes based on the displacement of the irradiated means.

According to the gaming machine ZI3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines ZI1 or ZI2, it is possible to improve the attention to the irradiated means.

The mode of displacement, which is the basis of the difference in the appearance of the irradiated means, is not limited at all. For example, it may be a constant (periodic) displacement that continues at a constant speed, or it may be an irregular displacement. Further, it may be a momentary displacement, or it may be a slow speed (a slow speed that makes it difficult for the player to grasp the displacement, for example, a displacement of 1 [mm / min] or the like.

A gaming machine ZI4, wherein in any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, the irradiated means can be configured to change the direction in which the light from the light emitting means is reflected.

According to the gaming machine ZI4, in any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, it is possible to make the spots stand out by being illuminated by the light reflected through the irradiated means while maintaining the outer shape of the irradiated means.

In any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, the gaming machine ZI5 is characterized in that the irradiated means can be configured to reflect light in the same direction, but at least one of the light amount and the color of the light is different. ..

According to the gaming machine ZI5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, it is possible to improve the attention to the light emitting mode of the irradiated means.

In any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI5, the irradiated means can be irradiated with light in an irradiation mode in which the optical axis does not interfere with the movement locus of the displacement means arranged around the irradiated means. The gaming machine ZI6, which comprises a shielding light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine ZI6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI5, by irradiating light from the unshielded light emitting means, it is possible to irradiate the irradiated means regardless of the arrangement of the displacement means. , It is possible to prevent the irradiated means from being visually recognized darker than necessary.

In any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI6, the irradiated means is the first irradiated means and
The first irradiated means is provided with a second irradiated means configured so that the light emitted from the light emitting means can be arranged at a shielding position toward the first irradiated means, and the first irradiated means is the light emitting means. The area of the optical axis in the direction of the optical axis is smaller when the second irradiated means is arranged at the shielded position than when the second irradiated means is not arranged at the shielded position. A gaming machine ZI7 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine ZI7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI6, the first
It is possible to make it difficult for light to reach the irradiated means. That is, the effect of shielding light can be improved. It should be noted that the change in the area of the first irradiated means may occur only when the light is irradiated from the light emitting means.

In any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI7, the light emitting means is configured to irradiate the irradiated means with light on a plurality of optical axes, and the irradiated means can intersect the plurality of optical axes at a predetermined position. A gaming machine ZI8 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine ZI8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI7, the amount of light received by the irradiated means is increased by increasing the optical axis of the light emitting means (for example, increasing the number of LEDs). Can be made to.

In any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI8, the irradiated means is provided with a driving means configured to be able to synchronously drive the irradiated means and the displacement means arranged around the irradiated means, and the irradiated means is being displaced. The gaming machine ZI9 is configured such that a predetermined first surface faces the same side, and the displacement means is configured to periodically displace the first position and the second position.
..

According to the gaming machine ZI9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI8, the light emitting mode of the irradiated means caused by the arrangement of the displacement means while suppressing a large change in the visibility of the irradiated means ( For example, the switching timing of light and dark) can be changed by changing the speed of the displacement means.

The displacement mode of the irradiated means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a slide displacement or a rotational displacement. The rotational displacement may be, for example, a rotational displacement that occurs on a rotational axis along the display surface of the display device, or a rotational displacement that occurs on a rotational axis that is orthogonal to the display surface of the display area.

In any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI9, the displacement means arranged around the irradiated means or at least one of the irradiated means has a surface on the light emitting means side, and the displacement means is arranged at the second position. The gaming machine ZI10 is characterized in that the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be changed to the player side.

According to the gaming machine ZI10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI9, the displacement means is irradiated from the light emitting means depending on whether the displacement means is arranged at the first position or the second position. It is possible to increase the difference in the degree to which the light travels toward the player.

<Characteristic AA group> (Lever UP control)
It has an operation means that can be operated by at least a player from a predetermined first position in a first direction, and an effect execution means that can execute an effect corresponding to the operation based on the operation of the operation means. In the gaming machine, the notification means capable of notifying the operation suggestion mode suggesting that the operation means is operated in the first direction, and the state in which the release condition is satisfied after the operation in the first direction is satisfied. The gaming machine AA1 is characterized by having a specific effect setting means capable of setting a specific effect when the operation unit is not located at a specific position.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Then, before the lottery result is notified, an operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means can be executed as a suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result, and a period until the lottery result is notified is set. There was something to entertain the player. Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is a gaming machine in which a player is allowed to operate the operating means in a state where the operating means is moved from an initial position in order to further enhance the effect of the effect (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). In such a gaming machine, when the player does not operate the operating means even though the operating means is moved from the initial position, the operating means in the movable state is initially set regardless of the player's operation. It is necessary to execute the control to return to the position, and there is a problem that the effect of the production is lowered and the interest of the game is lowered. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a game having an improved interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine AA1, when the operation means is not located at the specific position in the state where the release condition is satisfied, the specific effect is set by the specific effect setting means, so that the operation means is located at the specific position. If there is no such thing, it will be possible to provide the player with the effect. Therefore, even if the operating means is not operated after the operating means is moved, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the staging effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine AA1, it is possible to move the urging means that constantly urges the operating means toward the specific position and the operating means from the specific position to the first position different from the specific position. The gaming machine AA2 is characterized in that the operating means is located at the specific position by operating the operating means from the first position in the first direction.

According to the gaming machine AA2, when the player operates the operating means located at the first position, the operating means can be moved to a specific position. Therefore, it is fun to let the player operate the operating means. , The act of moving the operating means to a specific position can be executed at the same time. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation effect can be smoothly performed and the effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine AA2 has a second operating means that can be operated by a player different from the operating means, and the specific effect includes at least a suggestion mode suggesting that the second operating means is operated. A gaming machine AA3 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine AA3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AA2, a specific effect including a suggestion mode suggesting that the second operating means is operated is executed, so that the second operating means can be easily operated. It becomes possible. Therefore, since the player can easily move the operating means to a specific position by the urging means by releasing his / her hand from the operating means, the operating means can be easily positioned at a predetermined position, and the operation effect can be produced. It has the effect of making it easier to execute.

The gaming machine AA4 is characterized in that any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA3 has a fixing means for fixing the operating means at the specific position so as to be difficult to operate.

According to the gaming machine AA4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, when the operating means is located at a specific position, the movement of the operating means is restricted by the fixing means. Can prevent the operating means from being operated regardless of. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the operating means from being operated unnecessarily and causing a failure.

In any of the gaming machines AA1 to AA4, there is a launching means capable of launching the gaming ball based on the operation of the player, and the specific effect includes an embodiment for encouraging the player to launch the gaming ball. AA5 gaming machine characterized by being a pachinko machine.

According to the gaming machine AA5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA4, an aspect for urging the player to launch a gaming ball as a specific effect is included, and therefore, when the specific effect is executed, the specific effect is executed. It is possible to actively encourage the player to launch a game ball. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect that makes it easier for the player to take his / her hand off the operating means, so that the operating means can be easily moved to a specific position, and thus the operating means can be easily positioned at a predetermined position. This has the effect of facilitating the execution of operation effects.

<Characteristic AB group> (combined control of pending PUSH and PUSH notice)
An acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, a determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and the determination means thereof. A display means for displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and an identification symbol corresponding to the information stored in the storage means. In a gaming machine having an identification symbol display means to be displayed on the display means, an operation means that can be operated by a player and an operation that can execute an operation effect in which an effect mode is changed by operating the operation means. The effect executing means, the identification symbol effect executing means capable of executing the identification symbol effect that can change the mode of the identification symbol displayed by operating the operation means, and the operation effect and the above. The gaming machine AB1 characterized by having a regulatory means for restricting execution of the identification symbol effect in an overlapping period.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Then, before the lottery result is notified, an operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means can be executed as a suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result, and a period until the lottery result is notified is set. There was something to entertain the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). Further, in some gaming machines having the above-mentioned configuration, a plurality of conditions for executing an operation effect are provided in order to further enhance the effect. In this case, there is a problem that a plurality of operation effects are duplicated and the effect is difficult for the player to understand, and the interest of the game is lowered. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a game having an improved interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine AB1, it is possible to regulate that the operation effect and the identification symbol effect are executed in the overlapping period by the regulating means, so that it is possible to prevent the plurality of operation effects from being executed in duplicate. Is possible. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AB1, the regulating means sets a period for restricting the execution of the operation effect mode during the period when the identification information is dynamically displayed, and is configured to execute the identification symbol effect within that period. A game machine AB2 characterized by being a game machine.

According to the gaming machine AB2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AB1, a period for restricting the execution of the operation effect mode is set by the regulating means during the period when the identification information is dynamically displayed, and the identification is performed within that period. Since the symbol effect is executed, it is possible to smoothly execute a plurality of operation effects. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily perform a plurality of operation effects, and there is an effect that the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machines AB1 or AB2, during the period in which the operation effect is executed, the mode variable effect in which the mode of the identification symbol is variably displayed without the operation means being operated is configured to be feasible. The gaming machine AB3, which is characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine AB3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machines AB1 or AB2, since the mode variable effect is configured to be executable during the period when the operation effect is executed, it is possible to identify whether the mode variable effect is executed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the design effect is executed, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AC group> (Controlling the end of electric support by falling)
Variable that can be changed to a ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter, a first state in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than the first state. A member, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry means, a discrimination means capable of performing discrimination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and a discrimination means thereof. In order to show a display means for displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result by the display means, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and a specific discrimination result of the display means. When the identification information of is displayed, a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege advantageous to the player, a first probability as a probability of being discriminated from the specific discrimination result, and a second probability higher than the first probability. When the second probability is set by the probability setting means capable of setting the probability and the probability setting means, the determination means capable of executing the determination and the determination means determine the specific determination result. A probability control means for setting the first probability based on the above, a setting means capable of setting a specific gaming state in which the variable member is more likely to be changed from the second state to the first state than in the normal gaming state, and a setting means thereof. In a gaming machine having an end condition determining means for determining the establishment of an end condition for setting the normal gaming state when a special gaming state is set by the setting means, the setting means has the second probability. When the special gaming state is set, the special gaming state can be set, and the end condition determining means has a predetermined period after the special gaming state is set, and the second probability is described. AC1, a gaming machine characterized in that it is determined that the end condition is satisfied based on the setting of the first probability.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Then, in order to make it possible to set a high-probability state in which it is easy to win as a game state and a low-probability state in which it is difficult to win, and to shift the game state to a low-probability state when the high-probability state is set. There was one that executed the lottery (so-called fall lottery). Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is a configuration in which a specific gaming state in which the winning / failing lottery of the game is easily executed and a normal gaming state in which it is difficult to be executed can be set. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-269007). However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is no relation between the timing of transitioning from the high-probability state to the low-probability state and the timing of transitioning from the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state, and the player can understand the transition status of each gaming state. There was a problem that it became difficult and the interest of the game was reduced. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a game having an improved interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine AC1, the normal gaming state is set when the first probability is set by the probability control means, so that the setting status of the probability setting means and the setting status of the setting means can be varied in association with each other. can. Therefore, there is an effect that the transition state of the game state can be easily understood by the player and the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine AC1 is characterized in that the determination means executes the determination when the determination condition for executing the determination is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine AC2, it is possible to execute the determination by the determination means when the determination condition is satisfied, so that it is possible to prevent the determination means from excessively executing the determination while the second probability is set. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided to the player.

The gaming machine AC2 is characterized in that the determination means executes a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means before the dynamic display of the identification information is started. Machine AC3.

According to the gaming machine AC3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AC2, the determination by the determination means is executed before the dynamic display of the identification information is started, so that the determination is executed based on the fact that the determination condition is satisfied. It is possible to dynamically display the identification information for showing the result of the determined determination based on the determination result of the determination means. As a result, when the determination means determines that the determination result is specific, the determination means that is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition that triggered the determination can be determined with the first probability. Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided to the player.

In any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC3, the probability control means determines the first probability before the start of dynamic display of the identification information when the determination means determines the specific determination result. A gaming machine AC4 characterized by being set.

According to the gaming machine AC4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC3, when the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result, the probability control means starts the dynamic display of the identification information. The first probability is set before. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the dynamic display of the identification information based on the second probability from being executed after the specific determination result is determined, so that an appropriate game can be provided to the player. effective.

In any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC4, the setting means sets the normal gaming state based on the determination from the specific determination result in the state where the special gaming state is set. The gaming machine AC5 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine AC5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC4, even when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, the normal gaming state is set by the setting means, so that the setting is made. When the normal gaming state is set by the means, it may be difficult for the player to understand whether the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result or the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result. It can and can provide predictive fun. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AD group> (burst interruption effect)
A period during which an effect is executed by the effect executing means in a gaming machine having an effect executing means capable of executing the effect and an effect period determining means for determining an effect execution period executed by the effect executing means. A specific effect executing means capable of interrupting at least a part of the effect executed by the effect executing means to execute the specific effect, and the effect executing means executed by the effect executing means when the specific effect is executed. The gaming machine AD1 is characterized by having a setting means capable of changing and setting the effect to be interrupted according to the state of the effect.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Then, before the lottery result is notified, the suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result can be executed, and the player can enjoy the period until the lottery result is notified. Further, as a suggestion effect, there is a gaming machine in which the effect of the suggestion effect is further enhanced by executing various effects at various timings (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-209952). In such a gaming machine, even while one suggestion effect is being executed, another suggestion effect can be executed, so that the types of effects to be executed can be increased and the effect can be enhanced. be. However, since the above-mentioned gaming machine is configured to execute another suggestion effect regardless of the effect status of one suggestion effect being executed, the player suddenly switches the suggestion effect to be executed. There was a problem that the player's motivation to play was reduced. Further, when the suggestion effect being executed indicates a predetermined process change (for example, story development), the predetermined process change mode ends in the middle by switching the suggestion effect. Therefore, there was a problem that the player was more confused. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by executing various suggestion effects without confusing the player.

According to the gaming machine AD1, since the mode of the effect interrupted by the execution of the specific effect can be changed by the setting means, the effect is interrupted during the execution and the player is confused. It can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand effect in a gaming machine that can execute a plurality of effects in an overlapping manner.

In the gaming machine AD1, the effect executed by the effect executing means includes an effect by voice, and the setting means interrupts the effect by voice depending on the state of the effect, and the above. The gaming machine AD2 is characterized in that it sets a case where the production by voice is not interrupted.

According to the gaming machine AD2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AD1, when the production is interrupted, it is interrupted because it is possible to set a case where only the sound is continued and a case where the sound is also interrupted. It is possible to change the interruption mode of the production according to the content of the production. Therefore, it is possible to make the degree of interest of the player different in the interrupted production, and there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In this case, it may be determined whether or not to interrupt the output of the sound based on the effect mode of the specific effect and the effect mode of the interrupted effect, and the sound set as the effect mode of the specific effect may be determined. When the type and the sound type set as the effect mode of the effect to be interrupted are the same sound type, it is preferable to configure the sound output to be interrupted. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the sound of the interrupted effect from being output and being confused with the sound set as the effect mode of the specific effect to provide an effect that is difficult to understand.

Further, it may be configured to determine whether or not to interrupt the audio output according to the interruption timing of the effect. In this case, when the remaining period of the effect to be interrupted is a predetermined period or less (for example, 1 second or less), only the sound can be output to the end even if the effect is interrupted. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the production has been interrupted.

In the gaming machines AD1 or AD2, a display means in which a plurality of identification symbols are dynamically displayed as one of the effects executed by the effect execution means, and a case where the identification symbols are displayed in a specific combination on the display means. The setting means has a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player, and the setting means has another identification symbol in a state where one identification symbol is dynamically displayed among the plurality of identification symbols. The gaming machine AD3 is characterized in that the effect of being interrupted is changed and set depending on whether or not the reach display mode displayed in a combination capable of being a specific combination is displayed. ..

According to the gaming machine AD3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AD1 or AD2, the effect can be changed depending on whether the interrupted effect is before or after the reach display. That is, it is possible to change the mode of the effect set by the setting means based on the interruption timing of the effect executed by the effect executing means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from being confused by the interruption of the production.

In the gaming machine AD3, the setting means interrupts the effect by voice when the effect executed by the effect means is interrupted before the reach display mode is displayed, and the reach display mode is interrupted. AD4 is a gaming machine AD4 characterized in that the effect is set so that the effect by voice is not interrupted when the effect is interrupted after is displayed.

According to the gaming machine AD4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AD3, if the effect is interrupted before the reach display mode is displayed, the sound is interrupted, and if the effect is interrupted after the reach display mode is displayed, the effect is interrupted. You can prevent the audio from being interrupted. Therefore, even if the production is interrupted after the reach display mode is displayed, the sound can be continuously output, which confuses the player that the reach display mode is discarded in the middle. It has the effect of suppressing the loss.

<Characteristic AE group> (button repeated tapping sound control)
In a gaming machine having an operation means that can be operated by a player and an effect execution means whose effect is variable based on the operation of the operation means, a first operation is performed each time the operation means is operated. The gaming machine AE1 is characterized by having a voice control means capable of alternately outputting a sound and a second operation sound different from the first operation sound.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Then, before the lottery result is notified, an operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means can be executed as a suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result, and a period until the lottery result is notified is set. There was something to entertain the player (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, when the player operates the operating means, there is one that outputs an operation sound in order to notify that the operation has been accurately accepted. In such a gaming machine, whether or not the player was able to operate the operating means could be easily determined from the output operation sound, but until the output of one operation sound is completed. When the next operation is executed during the period, that is, when the continuous striking operation is performed, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to hear the operation sound output corresponding to each operation. In addition, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous if the output operation sound is one sound. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by making it easier for the player to hear the output operation sound and outputting a wide variety of operation sounds.

According to the gaming machine AE1, when the player operates the operating means a plurality of times, the first operation sound and the second operation sound are output alternately, so that only one type of operation sound is output. It has the effect of being able to output a wide variety of operation sounds. In addition, since different operation sounds are output alternately, even if the operation means is operated at short intervals (intervals shorter than the output period of one operation sound), the player has operated the operation means. Can be easily identified by the operation sound. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AE1, the voice control means is operated to output the first operation sound during the first period, and then to output the first operation sound before the first period elapses. In this case, the gaming machine AE2 is characterized in that the first operation sound being output is stopped and the output of the first operation sound is newly started.

According to the gaming machine AE2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AE1, if the next first operation sound is output within the first period in which the first operation sound is output, the first operation sound being output is output. Is stopped and a new first operation sound is output, so that there is an effect that the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the new operation has been executed.

In the gaming machine AE1 or AE2, the voice control means outputs the second operation sound during the second period, and then the second operation sound is output before the second period elapses. If this is the case, the gaming machine E3 is characterized in that the second operation sound being output is stopped and the output of the second operation sound is newly started.

According to the gaming machine AE3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AE1 or AE2, if the next second operation sound is output within the second period during which the second operation sound is output, the second operation sound being output is being output. Since the operation sound is stopped and a new second operation sound is output, there is an effect that the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the new operation has been executed.

In any of the gaming machines AE1 to AE3, the effect executing means is configured to be capable of executing a continuous operation effect in which the mode of the effect is variable in response to the operation of the operating means a plurality of times in succession. A gaming machine AE4 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine AE4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AE1 to AE3, the continuous operation effect is executed in response to the operation of the operating means a plurality of times in succession, so that the effect mode can be changed. It is possible to notify the player that the operating means has been operated. As a result, it becomes possible to determine from the operation sound and the effect that the operation to the operation means has been accepted. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

<Characteristic AF group> (Hold notice)
An acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, a determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and the determination means thereof. A display means for displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and an identification symbol corresponding to the information stored in the storage means. In a gaming machine having an identification symbol display means to be displayed on the display means, an operation means that can be operated by a player and an operation that can execute an operation effect in which an effect mode is changed by operating the operation means. It has an effect executing means and an identification symbol effect executing means capable of executing an identification symbol effect that can change the mode of the identification symbol displayed by operating the operation means. The gaming machine AF1 characterized in that the identification symbol effect executing means executes the identification symbol effect on two or more of the identification symbols when a plurality of identification symbols are displayed on the display means. ..

Conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a variable display of symbols based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening, and notify the player of the result of the lottery after the variable display is completed. Furthermore, the lottery executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening is configured to be hold-stored multiple times, the hold symbol corresponding to the hold storage number is displayed, and the displayed hold symbol is displayed. There is one that can be used to execute a hold notice effect that can notify the information about the corresponding lottery in advance (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-297071). In the above-mentioned gaming machine, by changing the color and shape of the reserved symbol, the expected degree of a big hit in the variable display corresponding to the reserved symbol is suggested, and the game is played before the variable display is started. It was possible to raise the expectations of those who were. However, when the hold notice effect is generated, it becomes difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation for the hold symbol that is not the target of the hold notice, and there is a problem that the player's motivation to play is reduced. The purpose is to solve the above-exemplified problems.

According to the gaming machine AF1, since the identification symbol effect is configured to be executed for two or more identification symbols as one identification symbol effect, the target range of the identification symbol effect can be expanded and the identification can be performed. It is possible to reduce the number of identification symbols that are not subject to the symbol effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine AF1 has a pre-discrimination means capable of executing the discrimination before the information stored in the storage means is discriminated by the discriminating means, and the identification symbol effect executing means is the above-mentioned thing. The gaming machine AF2 is characterized in that the mode of the identification symbol is changed based on the discrimination result by the pre-discrimination means.

According to the gaming machine AF2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AF1, the mode of the identification symbol can be changed based on the discrimination result of the pre-discrimination means, so that the player is interested in the effect result of the identification symbol effect. Can be given. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machines AF1 or AF2, the identification symbol effect executing means changes the mode of the two or more identification symbols based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied by operating the operation means. The featured gaming machine AF3.

According to the gaming machine AF3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AF1 or AF2, the mode of two or more identification symbols can be changed based on the operation to the operating means, so that the effect executed for the player is performed. It has the effect of increasing the motivation to participate in.

In any of the gaming machines AF1 to AF3, the identification symbol effect executing means executes the identification symbol effect over a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed a plurality of times, and the identification symbol effect is performed. The gaming machine AF4 is characterized by having a regulation period setting means for setting a regulation period in which the operation of the operation means is not valid during the period in which the operation means is executed.

According to the gaming machine AF4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines AF1 to AF3, the identification symbol effect is executed over a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed multiple times, and further, the identification symbol effect is performed. During the execution period, there is a regulation period in which the operation on the operating means is not determined to be valid. As a result, it is possible to entertain the player at what timing the operation means is operated, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine AF5 is characterized in that, among the periods during which the identification symbol effect is executed, the specific effect is executed during a period other than the restricted period.

According to the gaming machine AF5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AF4, by executing a specific effect, it is possible to determine whether or not the operation of the operating means is currently in a restricted period during the identification symbol effect. Since it can be easily discriminated by a player, there is an effect that a player can easily perform an effect that is easy to understand.

<Characteristic AG group>
Variable that can be changed into a ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter, a first state in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than the first state. A member, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry means, a discrimination means capable of performing discrimination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and a discrimination means thereof. In order to show a display means for displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result by the display means, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and a specific discrimination result of the display means. When the identification information of is displayed, the privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege advantageous to the player, the first probability as the discrimination probability to be discriminated from the specific discrimination result, and the first probability higher than the first probability. Probability setting means capable of setting two probabilities, and as a gaming state, a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is more likely to be changed from the second state to the first state than the normal gaming state. In a gaming machine having a settable setting means, the probability setting means sets the first probability when the first transition condition is satisfied while the second probability is set. The setting means sets the normal gaming state when the second transition condition is satisfied while the specific gaming state is set, and the first transition condition and the second transition condition are set. It has an effect mode setting means capable of setting different effect modes based on the order of establishment of the above, and an effect execution means capable of executing the effect based on the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means. The gaming machine AG1 characterized by this.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Then, in order to make it possible to set a high-probability state in which it is easy to win as a game state and a low-probability state in which it is difficult to win, and to shift the game state to a low-probability state when the high-probability state is set. There was one that executed the lottery (so-called fall lottery). Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is a configuration in which a specific gaming state in which the winning / failing lottery of the game is easily executed and a normal gaming state in which it is difficult to be executed can be set. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-269007). However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is no relation between the timing of transitioning from the high-probability state to the low-probability state and the timing of transitioning from the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state, and the player can understand the transition status of each gaming state. There was a problem that it became difficult and the interest of the game was reduced. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a game having an improved interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine AG1, the effects are executed in different production modes based on the order in which the first transition condition and the second transition condition are established. Therefore, the current game situation is predicted based on the execution contents. This has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine AG1, the discriminating means can discriminate the special discriminating result different from the specific discriminating result, and the second transition condition is that the discriminating result of the discriminating means is the special discriminating result. The gaming machine AG2, which is characterized in that it is established based on the above.

According to the gaming machine AG2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AG1, the second transition condition is satisfied based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means. Therefore, the discrimination by the discrimination means may be more advantageous for the player. , It is possible to provide a case where the determination result is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the discrimination result of the discrimination means and the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine AG2 has a counting means capable of counting the number of times that the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes the special discrimination result in the state where the specific gaming state is set, and the second transition condition is the counting. The gaming machine AG3 is characterized in that the second transition condition is satisfied when the result of the counting by the means is a predetermined counting result.

According to the gaming machine AG3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AG2, the second transition condition is satisfied when the number of times the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes the special discrimination result reaches a predetermined number of times, so that the discrimination means is discriminated. By discriminating that the result is a special discrimination result, it is possible to provide fun for predicting the period until the second transition condition is satisfied, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines AG1 to AG3, the effect mode setting means is based on the discrimination probability set by the probability setting means and the game state set by the setting means. The gaming machine AG4, which is characterized by setting the above.

According to the gaming machine AG4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AG1 to AG3, the effect mode is set based on the set discrimination probability and the game state, and therefore, the effect mode is set based on the effect to be executed. It can provide fun to predict the current game situation, and has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine AG4, the effect mode setting means includes a first gaming state in which the first probability is set by the probability setting means and the normal gaming state is set by the setting means, and the probability setting means. The gaming machine AG5 is characterized in that the same effect mode is set in the second gaming state in which the second probability is set and the normal gaming state is set by the setting means.

According to the gaming machine AG5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AG4, the first gaming state in which the first probability is set and the normal gaming state is set, and the second gaming state in which the second probability is set are set and the normal gaming state is set. Since the same effect mode is set for the second gaming state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish between the first gaming state and the second gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the current game situation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine AG5 has a determination means capable of executing the determination when the second probability is set by the probability setting means, and the determination means determines the determination for the determination means to execute the determination. The gaming machine AC6 is characterized in that the determination is executed when the condition is satisfied, and the first transition condition is satisfied when the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result. ..

According to the gaming machine AC6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AG5, the determination by the determination means can be executed when the determination condition is satisfied, so that the determination means excessively performs the determination when the second probability is set. It is possible to suppress the determination from being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided to the player.

In the gaming machine AG5 or AG6, the staging mode setting means suggests the discrimination probability set by the probability setting means when a predetermined period elapses after the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means. The gaming machine AC7, which is characterized in that it sets a suggestion effect mode for the purpose.

According to the gaming machine AC7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AG5 or AG6, the suggestion effect mode is set when a predetermined period elapses after the privilege is given by the privilege giving means, so that the first gaming state is set. Alternatively, when the second gaming state is set, the player can be made to grasp the current gaming state based on the content of the suggestion effect mode. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to continue the game until a predetermined period elapses, and there is an effect that the operation of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AH group> (Development of combined control of pending PUSH and PUSH notice)
An acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, a determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and the determination means thereof. A display means for displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and an identification symbol corresponding to the information stored in the storage means. In a gaming machine having an identification symbol display means to be displayed on the display means, an operation means that can be operated by a player and an operation that can execute an operation effect in which an effect mode is changed by operating the operation means. The effect executing means, the identification symbol effect executing means capable of executing the identification symbol effect that can change the mode of the identification symbol displayed by operating the operation means, and the operation effect and the above. When the identification symbol effect is executed in an overlapping period, the specific effect executing means capable of executing the specific effect based on the operation of the operation means in the overlapping period is provided. A game machine AH1 characterized by being present.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Then, before the lottery result is notified, an operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means can be executed as a suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result, and a period until the lottery result is notified is set. There was something to entertain the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). Further, in some gaming machines having the above-mentioned configuration, a plurality of conditions for executing an operation effect are provided in order to further enhance the effect. In this case, there is a problem that a plurality of operation effects are duplicated and the effect is difficult for the player to understand, and the interest of the game is lowered. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a game having an improved interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine AH1, when the operation effect and the identification symbol effect are executed in the overlapping period, the specific effect is executed. Therefore, even if the operation effect and the identification symbol effect overlap, the player It is possible to perform an easy-to-understand effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of directing can be enhanced and the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine AH1 has a setting means for setting the operation effect or the identification symbol effect to be changed when the operation means is operated in the overlapping period, and the specific effect includes the operation. The AH2 is characterized by including a suggestion mode indicating the operation effect or the identification symbol effect to be changed by operating the means.

According to the gaming machine AH2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AH1, it is possible to suggest to the player an effect to be changed when the operating means is operated by the effect specifying effect played by the gaming machine AH. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of performing an easy-to-understand effect to the player.

In the gaming machines AH1 or AH2, the number of operations for which the operation effect or the identification symbol effect is changed is set to be different based on the operation of the operation means in the overlapping period. AH3, a gaming machine characterized by.

According to the gaming machine AH3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines AA1 or AA2, the variable number of operations differs depending on whether the operation effect or the variable operation effect is executed independently or in duplicate. It will be possible to make it. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of the specific effect can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines AH1 to AH3, when the operation effect and the identification symbol effect are executed in an overlapping period, at least one of them is changed by operating the operation means a plurality of times. The gaming machine AH4, characterized in that it has a switching setting means for setting such as.

According to the gaming machine AH4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines AH1 to AH3, when the operation effect and the identification symbol effect are executed in the overlapping period, at least the number of operations corresponding to one of the operation effects is performed. Can be increased, so that it is possible to easily grasp that a specific effect is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the specific effect from being completed in a short period of time and the effect that is difficult for the player to understand to be executed.

The gaming machine AH4 is characterized in that the specific effect includes a game machine in which the execution period of the operation effect mode after being changed is set to be longer than a normal time.

According to the gaming machine AH5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AH4, the execution period of the operation effect mode is set longer than usual during the specific effect, so that the specific effect is executed for the player. Since it is possible to notify the fact in an easy-to-understand manner, there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristic AI group> (Development of pending notice)
An acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, a determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and the determination means thereof. A display means for displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and an identification symbol corresponding to the information stored in the storage means. In a gaming machine having an identification symbol display means to be displayed on the display means, an operation means that can be operated by a player and an operation that can execute an operation effect in which an effect mode is changed by operating the operation means. The effect executing means, the identification symbol effect executing means capable of executing the identification symbol effect capable of changing the mode of the identification symbol displayed by operating the operation means, and the identification symbol effect execution. By means, the effect mode variable means for varying the effect mode of the discriminating symbol effect being executed based on the fact that a predetermined change condition is satisfied during the period during which the identification symbol effect is being executed. A game machine AI1 characterized by being present.

Conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a variable display of symbols based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening, and notify the player of the result of the lottery after the variable display is completed. Furthermore, the lottery executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening is configured to be hold-stored multiple times, the hold symbol corresponding to the hold storage number is displayed, and the displayed hold symbol is displayed. There is one that can be used to execute a hold notice effect that can notify the information about the corresponding lottery in advance (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-297071). In the above-mentioned gaming machine, by changing the color and shape of the reserved symbol, the expected degree of a big hit in the variable display corresponding to the reserved symbol is suggested, and the game is played before the variable display is started. It was possible to raise the expectations of those who were. However, since the content of the hold notice effect cannot be made to correspond to the change in the game situation after the hold notice effect occurs, the player may have a sense of expectation for the content of the hold notice effect. There was a problem that it became difficult and the motivation for playing was reduced. The purpose is to solve the above-exemplified problems.

According to the gaming machine AI1, when the change condition is satisfied during the execution of the identification symbol effect, the effect of the identification symbol effect being executed can be changed, so that the effect of the identification symbol effect can be enhanced. can. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in the motivation to play and improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine AI1 is characterized in that the change condition is satisfied based on the fact that new information is stored in the storage means during the period during which the identification symbol effect is being executed. AI2.

According to the gaming machine AI2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1, it is possible to change the effect mode of the identification symbol effect based on the storage of new information in the storage means, so that the identification symbol effect is being executed. Also, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game in order to store new information in the storage means, and the operation of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine AI2 has a pre-discrimination means capable of executing the discrimination before the information stored in the storage means is discriminated by the discriminating means, and the identification symbol effect executing means is the above-mentioned thing. The gaming machine AI3 is characterized in that the mode of the identification symbol is changed based on the discrimination result by the pre-discrimination means.

According to the gaming machine AI3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AI2, the mode of the identification symbol is changed based on the discrimination result of the pre-discrimination means. There is an effect that the effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine AI3 is characterized in that the effect mode changing means changes the effect mode based on the determination result of the advance determination means for the information that triggers the establishment of the change condition. Machine AI4.

According to the gaming machine AI4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AI3, it is possible to change the effect mode of the identification symbol effect based on the result of the preliminary determination for the newly stored information. It is possible to target a range of identification symbols wider than the range of the identification symbols indicated by the identification symbol effect in. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to have a sense of expectation for the identification pattern production, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines AI1 to AI4, the identification symbol effect executing means executes the identification symbol effect over a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed a plurality of times, and the identification symbol effect is executed. AI5 is a gaming machine AI 5 having a regulation period setting means for setting a regulation period during which the operation of the operation means is not valid.

According to the gaming machine AI5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines AI1 to AI4, the identification symbol effect is executed over a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed multiple times, and further, the identification symbol effect is performed. During the execution period, there is a regulation period in which the operation on the operating means is not determined to be valid. As a result, it is possible to entertain the player at what timing the operation means is operated, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine AI6 is characterized in that, among the periods during which the identification symbol effect is executed, the specific effect is executed during a period other than the restricted period.

According to the gaming machine AI6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AI5, by executing a specific effect, it is possible to determine whether or not the operation of the operating means is currently in a restricted period during the identification symbol effect. Since it can be easily discriminated by a player, there is an effect that a player can easily perform an effect that is easy to understand.

<Characteristic AJ group> (button repeated tapping sound control)
In a gaming machine having an operation means that can be operated by a player and an effect execution means whose effect is variable based on the operation of the operation means, each time the operation means is operated, an operation sound is generated. , At least a voice control means capable of outputting a first operation sound and a second operation sound different from the first operation sound, and a type of the operation sound output by the voice control means can be set. The voice setting means has a voice setting means and a voice discriminating means capable of discriminating the type of the operation sound output by the voice control means, and the voice setting means is said to have the discriminating result of the voice discriminating means. A game machine AJ1 characterized in that it sets the type of operation sound.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Then, before the lottery result is notified, an operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means can be executed as a suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result, and a period until the lottery result is notified is set. There was something to entertain the player (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, when the player operates the operating means, there is one that outputs an operation sound in order to notify that the operation has been accurately accepted. In such a gaming machine, whether or not the player was able to operate the operating means could be easily determined from the output operation sound, but until the output of one operation sound is completed. When the next operation is executed during the period, that is, when the continuous striking operation is performed, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to hear the operation sound output corresponding to each operation. In addition, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous if the output operation sound is one sound. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by making it easier for the player to hear the output operation sound and outputting a wide variety of operation sounds.

According to the gaming machine AJ1, since a new operation sound type can be set based on the type of the operation sound actually output, it is possible to output an operation sound that is easy for the player to understand, and the game can be played. It has the effect of improving the taste.

The gaming machine AJ1 is characterized in that the voice setting means sets the operation sound of a type different from the type of the operation sound determined by the voice discrimination means.

According to the gaming machine AJ2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AJ1, it is possible to set an operation sound of a type different from the type of the operation sound actually output, so that various operation sounds are output. As a result, it is possible to perform a variety of productions, which has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine AJ1 or AJ2 is characterized in that the voice setting means sets the first operation sound when it is determined by the voice discriminating means that the operation sound is not output. Machine AJ3.

According to the gaming machine AJ3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AJ1 or AJ2, when the operation sound is not output, the first operation sound is set by the voice setting means. Therefore, it is possible to output the operation sound with a predetermined regularity for the operation of the operation means, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines AJ1 to AJ3, the operation status discriminating means capable of discriminating the interval between the operations performed on the operating means is provided, and the voice setting means has a discriminating result of the operation status discriminating means. The gaming machine AJ4 is characterized in that the first operation sound and the third operation sound different from the second operation sound can be set when a specific situation determination result is obtained.

According to the gaming machine AJ4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines AJ1 to AJ3, the third operation sound can be set based on the discrimination result of the operation status discriminating means, so that the player can be operated. It can provide the enjoyment of manipulating the means. Therefore, there is an effect that the motivation of the player to participate in the game can be increased.

The gaming machine AJ4 is characterized in that the operation status determination means discriminates from the specific status determination result when the interval between the operations performed on the operation means is shorter than a predetermined period. Gaming machine AJ5.

According to the gaming machine AJ5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AJ4, the third operation sound is output when the interval between the operations performed on the operating means is shorter than the predetermined period. It has the effect of increasing the motivation of the player to participate in the game.

In any of the game machines AJ1 to AJ5, the effect executing means executes the effect during a predetermined effect period, and is based on the discrimination result of the voice discriminating means at the time when the effect period elapses. The voice control means can also output the pseudo voice set by the pseudo voice setting means. A game machine AJ6 featuring.

According to the gaming machine AJ6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines AJ1 to AJ5, it is possible to output a pseudo sound based on the type of operation sound output when the production period elapses, so that the production period ends. Regardless of the type of operation sound output at that time, there is an effect that the voice output control can be terminated without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

In the gaming machine AJ6, the pseudo voice setting means sets a pseudo voice corresponding to the second operation sound when the voice discriminating means determines a type of the operation sound different from the second operation sound. A game machine AJ7 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine AJ7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AJ6, when the type of the operation sound output after the lapse of the production period is other than the second operation sound, the second operation sound is corresponded to by the pseudo voice. Since the voice is output, it is possible to unify the end voice of the voice to be output by the voice control means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player.

In the gaming machine AJ7, the discrimination means capable of executing the discrimination when the discrimination condition is satisfied, the display means for displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the identification information are predetermined to the display means. The dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the period and the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means are stopped and displayed in a specific display mode indicating that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result. The effect period is set during the dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display. The pseudo voice setting means is more than a case where the identification information dynamically displayed while the effect is being executed is stopped and displayed in the specific display mode, as compared with a case where the identification information is not stopped and displayed in the specific display mode. , A game machine AJ8 characterized by facilitating the setting of the pseudo voice.

According to the gaming machine AJ8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AJ7, the pseudo voice is performed during the dynamic display period of the identification information indicating that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result. Since it is easy to output, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the end content of the voice output by the voice control means.

<Characteristic AK group> (design voice)
The effect execution is performed on a gaming machine having an effect execution means capable of executing the effect and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player when the specific effect is executed by the effect execution means. A voice control means capable of outputting a voice corresponding to a first effect executed by the means, a voice information determining means for determining the voice information output by the voice output means from a plurality of voice information, and a voice information determining means thereof. The gaming machine AK1 comprising: a regulating means capable of regulating the type of voice information determined by the voice information determining means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. When notifying the lottery result, it has been proposed that a plurality of symbol rows are variablely displayed so that the lottery result is notified by a combination of the stopped and displayed symbols (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013). -090780 (Ab.). In addition, some of the above-mentioned gaming machines are configured to give sharpness to the effect of notifying the lottery result by outputting a sound effect when a plurality of variablely displayed symbol rows are stopped and displayed. .. However, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous due to repeated monotonous sound effects, and the player gets tired of the game. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game in which a player can be prevented from getting tired of the game at an early stage by suppressing repeated output of monotonous sound effects in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine AK1, by restricting the type of voice information determined by the voice information determining means, the type of voice information can be easily determined as intended at the time of design, and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. It has the effect of suppressing defects.

The gaming machine AK1 has a storage means capable of storing the voice information determined by the voice information determining means as history information, and the regulation means corresponds to the history information stored in the storage means. The gaming machine AK2, which regulates the type of the voice information determined by the voice information determining means.

According to the game machine AK2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine AK1, the determined voice information is stored in the storage means as history information, and the voice determined by the voice information determining means corresponding to the stored history information. By restricting the type of information, it is possible to control the voice information determined in response to the history information, and it is possible to make the type of the determined voice information suitable.

In the gaming machine AK2, the regulating means regulates that the same type as the type of the voice information stored before a predetermined number of times is determined.
According to the gaming machine AK3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AK2, it is possible to suppress the continuous determination of the same type of voice information, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the game becomes monotonous.

The gaming machine AK4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AK1 or AK2, the regulating means regulates the determination of the type of the voice information determined a specific number of times or more in a predetermined period.

According to the gaming machine AK4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines AK1 or AK2, it is possible to suppress a defect in which the same voice information type is excessively determined in a predetermined period, and it is possible to suppress a defect in which the game becomes monotonous. There is an effect.

In any of the gaming machines AK1 to AK4, the effect executed by the effect executing means includes a symbol effect in which a plurality of identification symbols are dynamically displayed, and the first effect is the plurality of identifications. Among the symbols, the gaming machine AK5 is characterized in that the identification symbol of 1 is stopped and displayed.

According to the gaming machine AK5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines AK1 to AK4, various sounds are output when the identification symbol is stopped and displayed, so that various effects when the identification symbol is stopped and displayed are output. It is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

A determination means capable of executing a determination in any of the gaming machines AK1 to AK5, and a privilege granting means capable of imparting a privilege advantageous to the player based on the determination result by the determination means being a specific determination result. The gaming machine AK6 is characterized in that the voice information determination means can determine the voice information based on the determination result by the determination means.

According to the gaming machine AK6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines AK1 to AK5, the determination result can be identified by the voice output corresponding to the first effect, so that the output voice can be identified. It has the effect of making the game interesting to the type.

The game machine AK6 has an acquisition means capable of acquiring information and an information storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the determination means is the information stored in the information storage means. The gaming machine has a pre-determination means that executes a pre-determination prior to the determination means based on the information stored in the information storage means. The gaming machine AK7 is characterized in that the voice information determining means is configured to be able to determine the voice information based on the preliminary determination result by the prior determination means.

According to the gaming machine AK7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AK6, the result of the preliminary determination can be identified by the type of the output voice, so that the type of the output voice can be interested. It has the effect of being able to do it.

<Characteristic AL group> (Image quality control)
The amount of data in at least two or more of the display information determining means for determining the display information of the display mode to be displayed by the display means from the plurality of display information and the display information determined by the display information determining means. It has a data amount discriminating means for discriminating the corresponding information, and a variable control means for variablely controlling the display mode to be displayed on the display means based on the discriminating result determined by the data amount discriminating means. A game machine AL1 characterized by being there.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. As an effect for notifying the lottery result, a display device configured to display various images and moving images has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). However, since the notice display mode is randomly displayed, there is a problem that the displayed image data becomes excessive and the addition to the display control or the like increases. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game capable of reducing a control load in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine AL1, the display mode displayed is variably controlled based on the result determined by the data amount determining means, so that the display control can be performed according to the data amount, and the control load can be reduced. It has the effect of being able to reduce it.

In the gaming machine AL1, the data amount determining means determines whether or not a specific condition is satisfied based on the total value of the information corresponding to the data amount of the display mode displayed in the predetermined first period. The gaming machine AL2 featuring.

According to the gaming machine AL2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AL1, it is determined whether or not the specific condition is satisfied based on the total value of the data amount of the display mode displayed in the predetermined first period. It is possible to suppress the problem that the control load increases in.

In the gaming machines AL1 or AL2, when the determination means capable of executing the determination, the effect executing means capable of executing the effect based on the determination result of the determination means, and the specific effect are executed by the effect executing means, It has a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to a player, and the display information determining means determines a display mode displayed in the effect executed by the effect executing means. The gaming machine AL3.

According to the gaming machine AL3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AL1 or AL2, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the effect notified by the determination result cannot be stably executed due to an increase in the amount of data.

In any of the gaming machines AL1 to AL3, the display mode displayed by the display mode determining means is such that the status information corresponding to the data amount is set as the information corresponding to the data amount. The gaming machine AL4 is characterized in that the data amount determining means determines whether or not the total value to which the status information is added is equal to or greater than a predetermined value.

According to the gaming machine AL4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines AL1 to AL3, the effect that the data amount can be easily determined by setting the status information corresponding to the data amount is set. be.

In any of the gaming machines AL1 to AL4, the variable control means corresponds to the display information determined by the display information determining means so that the total value of the data amount of the display mode displayed on the display means is reduced. The gaming machine AL5, characterized in that the display mode is variable.

According to the gaming machine AL5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines AL1 to AL4, the amount of data is suppressed, so that there is an effect that the control load can be reduced. The game machine AL5 is characterized in that the variable control means sets a display mode in which the number of pixels of the display mode corresponding to at least one display information determined by the display information determination means is reduced. Game machine AL6 to play.

According to the gaming machine AL6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AL5, the amount of data can be suppressed by setting a small number of pixels in the existing display mode, and the problem that the display data becomes excessive can be suppressed. There is.

<Characteristic AM group> (Multiple pressing effects)
A discrimination means capable of performing discrimination, a display means for displaying identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means. , The dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the identification information for showing the specific discrimination result on the display means are displayed. In this case, in a gaming machine having a privilege granting means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player, an operation that can be operated by the player as a dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. An operation dynamic display mode in which the display mode is changed by operating the means is set, and when the operation dynamic display mode is set, the validity period in which the operation of the operation means is valid is set. A valid period setting means to be set, and a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect based on the remaining period of the set valid period when the operating means is operated within the valid period. And, the gaming machine AM1 characterized by having.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. As an effect for notifying the lottery result, a method has been proposed in which the player can directly participate in the game by changing the effect by operating an operation means that can be operated by the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). However, since the method such as the timing of operating the operating means and the period of operation is not fixed depending on the player, there is a problem that the interest in executing the production is lowered. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machines to provide gaming machines that can improve the interest.

According to the gaming machine AM1, when the operating means is operated, it is possible to execute a specific effect based on the remaining period of the valid period, so that the valid period is set to be long and the game is widely played. Even if a person is configured to be able to operate the operating means, a specific effect is executed based on the remaining period of the valid period, so that various effects can be executed, and the interest of the game can be enjoyed. It has the effect of being able to improve.

In the gaming machine AM1, the suggestion mode setting means for setting the suggestion mode suggesting that the operation means is operated a plurality of times within the valid period set by the validity period setting means, and the suggestion mode setting means for setting the suggestion mode setting means. The effect period setting means for setting a predetermined effect period within the valid period for the suggestion mode corresponding to the operation of 1 and the remaining period of the effect period set by the effect period setting means. The gaming machine AM2, which comprises a notifying means capable of notifying the remaining period mode indicating the above.

According to the gaming machine AM2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AM1, the player can be made to think that the validity period is set for each of the multiple operations, so that the multiple operations can be performed. It has the effect of being able to inform you of what to do in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the gaming machine AM1 or AM2, the identification information is configured by combining a plurality of identification symbols, and the dynamic display means dynamically displays the plurality of identification symbols, respectively, to show the discrimination result. The plurality of identification symbols are stopped in combination, and the operation dynamic display mode is displayed in a specific mode by operating the operation means for at least a part of the plurality of identification symbols. When the remaining period is equal to or longer than a predetermined period as the specific effect, the specific effect executing means is configured to follow the dynamically displayed identification information. The gaming machine AM3, characterized in that it executes an effect corresponding to the information reflected in the dynamic display of the identification information at which the dynamic display is started.

According to the gaming machine AM3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AM1 or AM2, by operating the operating means so that the remaining period is equal to or longer than the predetermined period, it is reflected in the dynamic display after the dynamic display. By executing the effect to be performed, there is an effect that the operating means can be enthusiastically operated in a short period of time.

<Characteristic AN group> (Cosmo up)
An acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, a discrimination means capable of performing discrimination based on the information stored by the storage means, and a discrimination means thereof. The display means for displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result by the display means, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and the dynamic display means for the dynamic display means. When the dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information and the identification information for indicating the specific discrimination result are displayed on the display means, a privilege advantageous to the player is provided. In a gaming machine having a privilege granting means to be granted, an effect executing means capable of executing an effect during a period in which the dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed, and a specific effect executed by the effect executing means. The effect executed by the effect executing means at the start of the dynamic display of the identification information based on the specific information storage means in which the specific information based on the above is stored and the specific information stored in the specific storage means. The gaming machine AN1 characterized by having a special effect determining means for determining a special effect as at least a part of the above.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. As an effect for notifying the lottery result, it has been proposed that a advance notice effect suggesting the lottery result is executed before the lottery result is notified (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). ). However, there was a need for further improvement in interest. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machines to provide gaming machines that can improve the interest.

According to the gaming machine AN1, the special effect is determined based on the specific information stored when the specific effect is executed, so that the effect to be executed thereafter can be changed by executing the specific effect. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game by providing different games for each player.

Based on that, in the gaming machine AN1, the suggestion means for suggesting the suggestion mode corresponding to the specific information stored in the specific information storage means and the special effect determined by the special effect determination means are executed. Further, it has a suggestion mode variable means for varying the suggestion mode, and when the suggestion mode is a predetermined mode, the residual dynamic display period of the identification information is configured to be a predetermined period or longer. The gaming machine AN2, which is characterized by being a machine.

According to the gaming machine AN2, it can be determined that the identification information is not the timing to be displayed in the mode for showing the discrimination result according to the suggestion mode, and there is an effect that the problem of overlooking the discrimination result can be suppressed.

In the game machine AN1 or AN2, the effect determined by the special effect determining means, which has an operation means that can be operated by the player, is composed of an operation effect in which the effect mode is changed by operating the operation means. The gaming machine AN3 is characterized in that the number of times the operation effect is executed is set in response to the specific information stored in the specific information storage means.

According to the gaming machine AN3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AN1 or AN2, the number of times the operation effect is executed is set by the stored specific information, so that the number of times the player can operate the operating means. It has the effect of suppressing the problem of misunderstanding.

<Characteristic AO group> (3 operations)
It has an operation means that can be operated by the player and an operation effect setting means that can set an operation effect in which the effect is executed based on the operation of the operation means, and is set by the operation effect setting means. The operation effect that can be performed is set to a plurality of operation effects in which a specific operation effect is executed in response to a plurality of operations, and when the plurality of operation effects are set, the plurality of operations effects are set. The gaming machine AO1 is characterized in that the suggestion mode of the number corresponding to the number of operations set in the operation effect is displayed.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. As an effect for notifying the lottery result, a method has been proposed in which the player can directly participate in the game by changing the effect by operating an operation means that can be operated by the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). However, there is a problem that the interest is lowered in performing the production based on the operation of the operating means. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machines to provide gaming machines that can improve the interest.

According to the gaming machine AO1, when a plurality of operation effects are set, the suggestion mode of the number corresponding to the number of operations is displayed, so that an easy-to-understand game can be provided and the interest of the game can be improved. be.

In the gaming machine AO1, when the plurality of operation effects are set, the validity period setting means for setting the validity period in which the operation of the operation means is valid and the validity period set by the validity period setting means are set. The gaming machine AO2 is characterized by having a variable display means for setting a variable display mode that is variably displayed in response to a decrease in the valid period for each of the suggested modes.

According to the gaming machine AO2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AO1, the variable display mode makes it seem as if the valid period is set for each suggestion mode, and the timing of each operation is variablely displayed. It can be operated according to the embodiment, and there is an effect that the timing at which the operation effect is displayed can be optimized.

In the gaming machine AO1 or AO2, the plurality of operating effects is characterized in that the operating effects executed according to the number of times the operating means are operated are preset.

According to the gaming machine AO3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AO1 or AO2, there is no need to individually set a plurality of operation effects, and there is an effect that the control of being operated a plurality of times can be easily performed.

<Characteristic AP group> (Burst Challenge)
The operation effect can be executed based on the operation means that can be operated by the player, the validity period setting means that sets the validity period in which the operation of the operation means is effective, and the operation of the operation means within the validity period. In a gaming machine having an operation effect executing means, the information determining means for determining information corresponding to the operation effect that can be executed in the predetermined period of the valid period, and the operation means are operated within the predetermined period. The gaming machine AP1 is characterized by having an operation mode determining means for determining an mode of the operation effect to be executed based on the remaining period of the predetermined period.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. As an effect for notifying the lottery result, it has been proposed that a advance notice effect suggesting the lottery result is executed before the lottery result is notified (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). ). However, there was a need for further improvement in interest. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machines to provide gaming machines that can improve the interest.

According to the gaming machine AP1, the information corresponding to the operation effect that can be executed in the predetermined period within the valid period is determined in advance, and the mode of the operation effect is determined based on the remaining period, so that the operation means is operated. Even if there are differences in the player such as frequency and interval, the effect of improving the interest of the game by effectively using the valid period by executing the operation effect according to the player's operation and notifying the information. There is.

In the gaming machine AP1, the operation effect executing means is configured to be able to execute the operation effect each time the operation means operates within the predetermined period, and the information determination means is executed within the predetermined period. The gaming machine AP2, characterized in that the information corresponding to the mode of the final operation effect that can be performed is determined.

According to the gaming machine AP2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AP1, the final operation effect is predetermined, so that each time the operation means is operated, the process until the final operation effect is executed is enjoyed. It has the effect of being able to.

It is shown that when the specific operation effect is executed in the gaming machine AP1 or AP2, a privilege advantageous to the player is given, and the operation effect executed in the predetermined period includes the operation effect. , The process operation effect corresponding to the process until the specific operation effect is displayed is set, and the operation mode determining means is the specific operation mode when the remaining period of the predetermined period is equal to or less than the predetermined period. The gaming machine AP3 is characterized in that the operation effect is determined, and when the remaining period is equal to or longer than a predetermined period, the process operation effect corresponding to the remaining period is determined.

According to the gaming machine AP3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AP1 or AP2, the process operation effect can make the player gradually recognize that the final operation effect will be achieved, which can enhance the interest of the player. It has the effect of being able to do it.

The gaming machine AP3 has an update means for updating the effect value based on the operation of the operation means, and the update means currently sets a value for updating the effect value as the remaining period of the predetermined period. The operation mode determination means determines the mode of the operation effect corresponding to the effect value updated by the update means. The gaming machine AP4 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine AP4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AP3, the mode of the operation effect can be easily determined by the effect numerical value, and there is an effect that the control load can be reduced.

<Characteristic AQ group> (Derived from Cosmo Up)
An acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, a discrimination means capable of performing discrimination based on the information stored by the storage means, and a discrimination means thereof. The display means for displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result by the display means, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and the dynamic display means for the dynamic display means. When the dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information and the identification information for indicating the specific discrimination result are displayed on the display means, a privilege advantageous to the player is provided. In a gaming machine having a privilege granting means to be granted, an effect executing means capable of executing an effect during a period in which the dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed, and a specific effect executed by the effect executing means. A special effect is determined as at least a part of the effect executed by the effect executing means based on the specific information storage means in which the specific information based on the above is stored and the specific information stored in the specific storage means. A game machine AQ1 characterized by having a special effect determining means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. As an effect for notifying the lottery result, it has been proposed that a advance notice effect suggesting the lottery result is executed before the lottery result is notified (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). ). However, there was a need for further improvement in interest. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machines to provide gaming machines that can improve the interest.

According to the gaming machine AQ1, the special effect is determined based on the specific information stored when the specific effect is executed, so that the effect to be executed thereafter can be changed by executing the specific effect. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game by providing different games for each player.

<Characteristic AR group> (Derived from Burst Challenge)
The operation effect can be executed based on the operation means that can be operated by the player, the validity period setting means that sets the validity period in which the operation of the operation means is effective, and the operation of the operation means within the validity period. In a gaming machine having an operation effect executing means, an information determining means for determining information corresponding to the operation effect that can be executed in the valid period, and when the operation means is operated within the predetermined period, The gaming machine AR1 comprising: an operation mode determining means for determining an aspect of the operation effect to be executed based on the remaining period of the valid period.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. As an effect for notifying the lottery result, it has been proposed that a advance notice effect suggesting the lottery result is executed before the lottery result is notified (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). ). However, there was a need for further improvement in interest. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machines to provide gaming machines that can improve the interest.

According to the gaming machine AR1, the information corresponding to the operation effect that can be executed within the valid period is determined in advance, and the mode of the operation effect is determined based on the remaining period, so that the frequency and interval of operating the operation means are determined. Even if there is a difference between the players, such as, by executing the operation effect according to the player's operation and notifying the information, there is an effect that the valid period can be effectively used and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic BA group> (Gameability that is advantageous if there is no pending ream)
The first discrimination information is obtained based on the first ball entry means arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can easily enter and the game ball entering the first ball entry means. The first discrimination information acquisition means to be acquired and the first discrimination means for executing the first discrimination based on the first discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means are different from the first direction. The second discrimination information is obtained based on the second ball entry means arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can easily enter and the game ball entering the second ball entry means. The second discrimination information acquisition means to be acquired, the second discrimination means for executing the second discrimination based on the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means, and the second discrimination information acquisition means. The second discrimination information is stored up to a predetermined number of information from the acquisition of the second discrimination information to the execution of the second discrimination based on the acquired second discrimination information. A possible discrimination information storage means and a first state in which the game ball launched in the second direction is arranged at a position where it is easy to enter, and a first state in which the game ball is easy to enter, and a ball that is more difficult to enter than the first state. A variable ball-entry means that can be changed to the second state, a privilege-giving means that grants a predetermined privilege based on the ball entering the variable ball-entry means, the first discriminating means, or the first discriminating means. A variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable ball-entry means is changed to a first state a predetermined number of times based on a specific judgment result obtained by the discrimination by the second discrimination means, and a variable game execution means thereof. As a gaming state after the execution of the variable game by the means is completed, one of a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. The game state setting means includes a game state setting means for setting the game state of the above, and the game state setting means has the specific determination result by the second determination means rather than the specific determination result by the first determination means. The gaming machine BA1 is characterized in that the ratio of setting the first gaming state as the gaming state after the execution of the variable game is completed is higher.

According to the game machine BA1, the first ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can easily enter, and the game ball enters the first ball entry means. The first discrimination information is acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means. The first discrimination is executed by the first discrimination means based on the first discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means. Based on the fact that the second ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction different from the first direction can easily enter, and the game ball enters the second ball entry means. The second discrimination information is acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means. The second discrimination is executed by the second discrimination means based on the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means. The second discrimination information is stored by the discrimination information storage means from the acquisition of the second discrimination information by the second discrimination information acquisition means until the second discrimination based on the acquired second discrimination information is executed. It is stored up to a predetermined number of information. A variable ball entry means that can be changed between the first state where the game ball is easy to enter and the second state where it is more difficult to enter than the first state, the game ball launched in the second direction enters the ball It is located in a position that is easy to do. A predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means based on the fact that the game ball enters the variable ball entering means. A variable game in which the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state a predetermined number of times is executed by the variable game execution means based on the fact that the determination by the first determination means or the second determination means results in a specific determination. .. As a game state after the execution of the variable game by the variable game execution means is completed, among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. The game state of 1 to 1 is set by the game state setting means. The first game state as the game state after the execution of the variable game is completed by the game state setting means when the specific judgment result is obtained by the second judgment means rather than the specific judgment result by the first judgment means. The ratio of setting is high.

As a result, when the game ball is launched in the second direction in order to obtain a predetermined privilege during the execution of the variable game, the game ball enters the second ball entry means and the second discrimination information is stored. .. When a specific discrimination result is obtained by the second discrimination based on the second discrimination information, the ratio of being set to the first gaming state, which has a lower advantage than the second gaming state, is high, so that it is stored during the execution of the variable game. In the second discrimination based on the second discrimination information, the player can be made to play the game with the expectation that a specific discrimination result will not be obtained. Therefore, there is an effect that a novel playability can be realized.

In the gaming machine BA1, as the variable pattern of the variable ball entry means, at least a plurality of first variable patterns and a second variable pattern in which the game ball is more difficult to enter the variable ball entry means than the first variable pattern. The variable pattern setting means is provided with the variable pattern setting means for setting any of the variable patterns of the above, and the variable pattern setting means is said to be more than the second variable pattern when the specific determination result is obtained by the discrimination by the first discrimination means. The ratio of setting the first variable pattern becomes high, and when the specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the second discriminating means, the ratio of setting the second variable pattern becomes higher than that of the first variable pattern. A gaming machine BA2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine BA2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BA1. That is, as the variable pattern of the variable ball entry means, any of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which the game ball is more difficult to enter the variable ball entry means than the first variable pattern. Is set by the variable pattern setting means. When a specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the first discrimination means, the ratio of setting the first variable pattern by the variable pattern setting means is higher than that of the second variable pattern. On the other hand, when a specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the second discrimination means, the ratio of setting the second variable pattern by the variable pattern setting means is higher than that of the first variable pattern.

As a result, when a specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the second discrimination means, it becomes easy to set the second variable pattern in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the variable entry means. Therefore, the variable game is being executed. The second discrimination based on the second discrimination information stored in the above has an effect that it is possible to make a stronger expectation that a specific discrimination result is not obtained.

In the gaming machines BA1 or BA2, based on the start of the variable game, the variable pattern of the variable ball entry means is a first variable pattern and a game ball in the variable ball entry means rather than the first variable pattern. The pachinko ball is provided with a variable pattern setting means for setting at least one of a plurality of variable patterns including a second variable pattern in which the ball is difficult to enter, and the gaming ball is in the period from the start to the end of the first variable pattern. When it continues to be launched in the second direction, it is configured to have a period at least longer than the period until the second discrimination information of the predetermined number of information is acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means. The gaming machine BA3 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine BA3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines BA1 or BA2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the start of the variable game, as the variable pattern of the variable ball entry means, the first variable pattern and the second variable in which the game ball is harder to enter the variable ball entry means than the first variable pattern. Any of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a pattern is set by the variable pattern setting means. During the period from the start to the end of the first variable pattern, when the game ball continues to be launched in the second direction, the second discrimination information acquisition means acquires a predetermined number of second discrimination information. It consists of at least a longer period than the period until the information is reached.

As a result, when the player keeps firing the game ball in the second direction in order to obtain a predetermined privilege during the execution of the variable game in which the first variable pattern is set, the second is at least a predetermined number of information or more. Discrimination information is acquired. Therefore, after the end of the variable game, the second determination of the upper limit number of times is executed each time. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to play the game with the expectation that all the second determinations of the upper limit number of times do not result in a specific determination result.

In any of the gaming machines BA1 to BA3, the second discrimination by the second discriminating means is executed with priority over the first discriminating by the first discriminating means. Gaming machine BA4.

According to the gaming machine BA4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines BA1 to BA3, the second discrimination by the second discriminating means is executed with priority over the first discriminating by the first discriminating means. Even if the gaming ball enters the first ball entry means in a state where the second discrimination information is stored in the discrimination information storage means, it is possible to suppress the execution of the first discrimination. Therefore, there is an effect that attention can be drawn by the second discrimination.

In any of the gaming machines BA1 to BA4, the gaming ball launched in the second direction is arranged at a reachable position, and the reached gaming ball is passed to the first flow path provided with the second ball entry means. The gaming machine BA5 is provided with a distribution means for distributing the ball to the second flow path provided with the variable ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine BA5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines BA1 to BA4, a first flow path provided with a second ball entry means and a second flow path provided with a variable ball entry means. Since the distribution means for distributing the game balls is arranged at a position where the game balls launched in the second direction can be reached, the flow direction of the game balls launched in the second direction is biased. It has the effect of being able to prevent it.

In the gaming machine BA5, the gaming machine BA6 is characterized in that the distribution means alternately distributes game balls to the first flow path and the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine BA6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BA5, the gaming balls are alternately distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path by the distribution means, so that the game is played during the execution of the variable game. The ball can be alternately entered into the second entry means and the variable entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game ball launched in the second direction from entering the second ball entry means or the variable entry means in a biased manner.

In any of the game machines BA1 to BA6, the game ball enters the first position where the game ball can easily enter the first ball entry means, and the game ball enters the first ball entry means as compared with the first position. A variable means that can be changed to a second position that makes it difficult to play a ball and a variable control means that controls the variable operation of the variable means are provided. It is difficult to change to one position, and the second gaming state is characterized in that the variable means is more likely to be changed to the first position by the variable control means as compared with the first gaming state. Game machine BA7.

According to the gaming machine BA7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines BA1 to BA6, the first position at which the gaming ball can easily enter the first ball entry means and the first position compared to the first position. The variable means is variable to the second position where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means. The variable operation of the variable means is controlled by the variable control means. In the first gaming state, the variable means is less likely to be changed to the first position by the variable control means, and in the second gaming state, the variable means is more likely to be changed to the first position by the variable control means than in the first gaming state. ..

As a result, in the first game state, the variable means can be easily changed to the first position, so that the game ball can easily enter the first ball entry means. Therefore, in the first gaming state, the game can be played more efficiently, so that there is an effect that the game can be played with the expectation that the first gaming state will be reached.

In any of the gaming machines BA1 to BA7, in the first gaming state, the probability that the specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the first discrimination means and the second discrimination means is set as the first probability. In the second gaming state, the probability that the specific discrimination result will be obtained by the discrimination by the first discrimination means and the second discrimination means is set to a second probability lower than the first probability. A gaming machine BA8 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine BA8, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines BA1 to BA7, the following effects are played. That is, in the first gaming state, the probability that a specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the first discrimination means and the second discrimination means is set as the first probability. On the other hand, in the second gaming state, the probability that a specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the first discrimination means and the second discrimination means is set to the second probability lower than the first probability.

As a result, in the first game state, the probability that a specific determination result will be obtained is higher than in the second game state, so that the variable game can be easily executed again with a relatively small number of determinations after the variable game is completed. Therefore, in the first gaming state, it is expected that more predetermined benefits will be acquired in a relatively short period of time, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic BB group> (Perform a specific effect using the ending period of the jackpot and the pending digestion period)
A discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, a privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means, and a privilege thereof. A plurality of games including at least a first game state and a second game state in which the player has a higher degree of advantage than the first game state, as the game state after the execution of the privileged game by the game execution means is completed. A game state setting means for setting one game state from among the states, a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means, and predetermined during execution of the privilege game. Based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied, the period until the end of the privilege game and the period until the dynamic display of one or more of the identification information executed after the end of the privilege game ends. The specific effect is provided with a specific effect execution means for executing the specific effect, and the specific effect is an effect capable of suggesting to the player whether or not the gaming state after the specific effect is completed is the second gaming state. The gaming machine BB1 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine BB1, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the privilege game is executed in favor of the player based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a specific discrimination result. Performed by means. A plurality of games including at least a first game state and a second game state in which the player has a higher degree of advantage than the first game state as the game state after the execution of the privilege game by the privilege game execution means is completed. One of the gaming states is set by the gaming state setting means. The identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means. Dynamic display of one or more identification information executed after the end of the award game and the period until the end of the award game based on the fact that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the award game. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means in the period until the end of. The specific effect is composed of an effect that can suggest to the player whether or not the game state after the end of the specific effect is the second game state.

As a result, the specific effect can be executed over the period from the establishment of the specific condition to the end of the dynamic display of one or more identification information, and thus the period until the end of the privilege game. Or, there is an effect that the degree of freedom of the specific effect can be improved as compared with the case where the specific effect is executed in the dynamic display time in the dynamic display of the identification information of 1.

In the gaming machine BB1, the specific effect executing means is based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied when the gaming state after the execution of the privileged game is set to the second gaming state. The gaming machine BB2, which is characterized by executing the above.

According to the gaming machine BB2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BB1, when the gaming state after the execution of the privilege game is completed is set to the second gaming state, the specific effect is based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied. Is executed by the specific effect executing means, so that the second game state is suggested in the specific effect unless a specific determination result is obtained and the state shifts to the first game state during the execution of the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that a specific determination result will not be obtained during the execution of the specific effect.

In the game machine BB1 or BB2, the discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the discrimination means and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means are obtained by the discrimination information acquisition means based on a predetermined specific opportunity. Until the discrimination condition for the acquired discrimination information is satisfied, the discrimination information storage means that can store up to a predetermined number of information and the discrimination information storage means based on the satisfaction of the specific condition are stored. Based on the determination means for determining whether or not the discrimination information corresponding to the specific discrimination result is included in the discrimination information, and the determination result by the determination means, the effect mode of the specific effect is determined. The gaming machine BB3 is provided with an effect mode determining means, and the specific effect executing means is for executing a specific effect of the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means.

According to the gaming machine BB3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BB1 or BB2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on a predetermined specific opportunity, the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is the discrimination for the acquired discrimination information. Until the condition is satisfied, the information is stored by the discriminant information storage means up to a predetermined number of information. Based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied, the determination means determines whether or not the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means includes the discrimination information corresponding to the specific discrimination result. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the effect mode of the specific effect is determined by the effect mode determining means. The specific effect of the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means is executed by the specific effect execution means.

As a result, since the discrimination result by the discrimination means can be determined in advance, there is an effect that it is possible to set an effect mode according to the result of the determination actually executed by the discrimination means.

In the game machine BB3, as the types of the privilege games executed by the privilege game execution means, the first privilege game in which the game state after the execution is completed is set to the first game state by the game state setting means, and The determination means is provided with a type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types of award games including at least a second privilege game in which the game state after the execution is completed is set to the second game state. Is to determine whether the discrimination information corresponding to the first privilege game is included in the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means, and the effect mode determining means is the determination. Based on the determination that the determination information corresponding to the first privilege game is included by the means, an effect mode suggesting that the game state after the specific effect is completed is the first game state. A gaming machine BB4 characterized by being determined.

According to the gaming machine BB4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BB3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the types of privilege games executed by the privilege game execution means, the first privilege game in which the game state after the execution is completed is set to the first game state by the game state setting means, and the first privilege game after the execution is completed. One type is determined by the type determining means from a plurality of types of privilege games including at least a second privilege game in which the game state is set to the second game state. It is determined by the determination means whether or not the discrimination information corresponding to the first privilege game is included in the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means. Based on the determination by the determination means that the determination information corresponding to the first privilege game is included, the effect mode suggesting that the game state after the end of the specific effect is the first game state is produced. It is determined by the mode determining means.

As a result, it is possible to provide a novel game property in which the game is performed with the expectation that the first privilege game is not included. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines BB1 to BB4, the specific effect is characterized in that a predetermined specific period is set as the effect period regardless of the effect mode.

According to the gaming machine BB5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines BB1 to BB4, a predetermined specific period is set as the production period of the specific production regardless of the production mode, so that the production period is long. Therefore, it becomes difficult to predict the result of the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can pay attention to the result of the specific effect until the end.

In the gaming machine BB5, the display means for displaying the identification information, the dynamic display execution means for executing the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the dynamic display execution means executed by the dynamic display execution means. The dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information is provided based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the specific period is the privilege game after the specific condition is satisfied. Is determined by the dynamic display period determining means when the period until the end of the process and the determination by the discrimination means for a predetermined specific number of times are all different from the specific discrimination result. The gaming machine BB6, which is the sum of the dynamic display period for a specific number of times.

According to the gaming machine BB6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BB5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the identification information is displayed on the display means. The dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means. The dynamic display time in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is determined by the dynamic display period determining means based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means. The dynamic display period is determined when the period from the establishment of the specific condition to the end of the award game and the discrimination by the predetermined number of discrimination means are all different from the specific discrimination result. The sum of the dynamic display period for a specific number of times determined by the means is set as the specific period.

As a result, the specific effect can be ended at the timing when the dynamic display of the identification information for a specific number of times is completed, so that there is an effect that the specific effect can be ended clearly.

In the gaming machine BB6, after the end of the privilege game, the dynamic display period determination means is at least until the end of the specific period when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination means within the specific number of times. The gaming machine BB7 is characterized in that a period equal to or longer than the remaining period of the above is determined as the dynamic display period.

According to the gaming machine BB7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BB6, if a specific discrimination result is obtained by discrimination by a discrimination means within a specific number of times after the end of the privilege game, at least the remaining until the end of the specific period. Since the period longer than the period is determined as the dynamic display period by the dynamic display period determining means, if a specific determination result is obtained by the determination within a specific number of times, the award game is performed before the end of the specific period. Can be suppressed from being started. Therefore, by starting the privilege game before the end of the specific effect, it is possible to prevent the result of the specific effect from being known in advance, so that there is an effect that the specific effect can be more noticed.

In any of the gaming machines BB1 to BB7, an expectation degree suggestion effect executing means for executing an effect indicating an expectation degree for the second game state to be suggested by the specific effect is provided during the execution of the privilege game. BB8, a gaming machine characterized by.

According to the gaming machine BB8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines BB1 to BB7, an effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the second gaming state is suggested by the specific effect during the execution of the privilege game is the expected degree suggestion effect execution means. Since it is executed by, it is possible to give the player the impression that the effect mode during the execution of the privilege game and the specific effect are a series of effects. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game during the execution of the privilege game can be improved.

<Characteristic BC group> (It is difficult to determine from the attacker's operation whether or not a hold ream occurs)
A privileged ball entry means in which a predetermined privilege is given based on the entry of a game ball, a first position in which the game ball can enter the privilege entry means, and a game from the first position. Based on the variable means that changes to the second position where the ball is difficult to enter, the discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the discrimination by the discrimination means that the first discrimination result is obtained. Based on the fact that the first variable control means for controlling the variable means to be variable in the first variable mode and the second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result in the discrimination by the discrimination means. Then, based on the gaming state setting means capable of setting a gaming state different from the gaming state at the time when the discrimination is executed and the second discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means, the specified number of times In the second variable mode, which includes at least a specific variable mode having an appearance that is difficult to distinguish from the first variable mode of the specific number of times, which is executed when all the discrimination by the discriminating means results in the first discriminating result. The gaming machine BC1 comprising: a second variable control means for controlling the variable means to be variable.

According to the gaming machine BC1, a predetermined privilege is given by the privilege entering means based on the entry of the gaming ball, and the first position where the gaming ball can enter the privilege entering means and its position. The variable means is variable to the second position where the gaming ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. The first variable control means is such that the variable means is variable in the first variable mode based on the fact that the discrimination is executed by the discriminant means based on the establishment of the discriminant condition and the discriminant result is a specific discriminant result. Controlled by. Based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means results in the second discrimination result, it is distinguished from the first variable mode of the specific number of times executed when all the discriminations by the discrimination means of the specific number of times result in the first discrimination result. In the second variable mode, which includes at least a specific variable mode having a difficult appearance, the variable means is controlled to be variable by the second variable control means.

As a result, it becomes difficult to distinguish whether the first discrimination result is obtained or the second discrimination result is obtained from the variable mode of the variable means. Therefore, it is determined whether or not different gaming states are set. It has the effect of making it difficult for a person to identify.

In the gaming machine BC1, the gaming state setting means can set one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the first gaming state. When the second discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means, the ratio of setting the second gaming state is set higher than the ratio of setting the first gaming state. A gaming machine BC2 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine BC2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BC1. That is, one gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means from a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the first gaming state. When the second determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination means, the rate at which the second game state is set by the game state setting means is set higher than the rate at which the first game state is set.

As a result, when the second determination result is obtained, the disadvantageous second gaming state is likely to be set, so that there is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the first determination result will be obtained.

The gaming machine BC3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine BC1 or BC2, the ratio of the first discrimination result in the discrimination by the discrimination means is set higher than the ratio of the other discrimination results.

According to the gaming machine BC3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BC1 or BC2, the ratio of the first discrimination result in the discrimination by the discrimination means is set higher than the ratio of the other discrimination results. There is a high possibility that the first determination result will be continuously obtained over the number of times. Therefore, even when the variable means is controlled in the second variable mode as the second determination result, it can be made to think that the first determination result may be continuous over a specific number of times. Therefore, there is an effect that it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not different gaming states are set.

In any of the gaming machines BC1 to BC3, the discriminating means executes discrimination when either the first discriminating condition or the second discriminating condition different from the first discriminating condition is satisfied. When the second discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition, the gaming state setting means is set at a high rate of setting the first gaming state, and the second discrimination condition is set. A gaming machine characterized in that when the second determination result is obtained by the determination based on the establishment, the ratio of setting the second gaming state, which is more disadvantageous than the first gaming state, is set. BC4.

According to the gaming machine BC4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines BC1 to BC3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when either the first discrimination condition or the second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition is satisfied, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means. When the second determination result is obtained by the determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition, the rate at which the first game state is set by the game state setting means is set high. On the other hand, when the second determination result is obtained by the determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition, the ratio of setting the second gaming state which is more disadvantageous than the first gaming state is set.

As a result, when the second discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition, the first gaming state having a higher degree of advantage than the second gaming state is likely to be set, so that the first discrimination condition is set. The game can be played with the expectation that it will be established. Therefore, when the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed, there is an effect that the type of the discrimination condition that triggered the execution of the discrimination can be focused on.

In the gaming machine BC4, when the discrimination by the discriminating means results in the second discriminating result and the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the privilege ball entering means is used rather than the second variable mode. A gaming machine BC5 comprising a third variable control means for controlling the variable means to be variable in a third variable mode in which a gaming ball is easy to enter.

According to the gaming machine BC5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BC4, the discrimination by the discriminating means results in the second discriminating result, and when the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the second variable mode is used. Since the third variable control means controls the variable means so that the variable means is variable in the third variable mode in which the gaming ball is easily entered into the privileged ball entry means, the second determination is made based on the establishment of the first determination condition. The degree of advantage when the result is obtained can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to play the game in the expectation that the first determination condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machines BC4 or BC5, the first ball-entry means arranged at a position where the gaming ball launched in the first direction can easily enter, and the gaming ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction. A second ball-entry means arranged at a position where it is easy to enter the ball is provided, and the first determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball enters the first ball-entry means. The second determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means, and the privilege entry means has the game ball launched in the second direction. A gaming machine BC6 characterized in that it is provided at a position where it is easy to ball.

According to the gaming machine BC6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BC4 or BC5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, while the first ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can easily enter, the second ball is located at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can easily enter. A ball entry means and a privilege ball entry means are provided. The first determination condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the first entry means, whereas the second determination condition is established based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. Is established.

As a result, when the privilege entry means is changed to the first position and the game is launched in the second direction in an attempt to obtain a predetermined privilege, the game ball enters the second entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to form a state in which discrimination based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition is easily executed after the privilege ball entry means is changed to the first position.

In the gaming machine BC6, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means, it is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the discrimination means and the discrimination information acquisition means. The gaming machine BC7 is provided with a discrimination information storage means that can store the discrimination information at least until the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed, up to a predetermined number of information.

According to the gaming machine BC7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BC6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means, the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is obtained. Up to a predetermined number of information, it is stored at least by the discrimination information storage means until the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed.

As a result, when the ball entering the second ball entry means is detected in a situation where the discrimination by the discrimination means cannot be started, the discrimination information used for the discrimination can be stored by the discrimination information storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the wasteful entry of the ball to the second entry means.

In any of the gaming machines BC4 to BC7, the determination executed based on the establishment of the second determination condition is prioritized over the determination executed based on the establishment of the first determination condition. A gaming machine BC8 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine BC8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines BC4 to BC7, the discrimination executed based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition is based on the discrimination executed based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition. Is executed with priority, so that when the discrimination based on the satisfaction of the second discrimination condition is executed, it is possible to pay attention to the result of the discrimination.

<Characteristic BD group> (Structure in which special 2 start prizes are likely to occur during big hits and are unlikely to occur during normal times)
The first discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition, the second discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition, and the first discrimination. A privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game advantageous to the player based on the means or the discrimination by the second discriminating means, and the privileged game executed by the privileged game executing means. As the type of, the type determination of one privilege game is determined from a plurality of types including at least the first privilege game and the second privilege game having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first privilege game. Based on the means and the discrimination by the first discrimination means or the second discrimination means, a specific discrimination result is set, and the first state in which the second discrimination condition is easily satisfied is set, and the privilege game is performed. Based on the fact that the end condition is satisfied, the second state is provided with a state setting means for setting a second state in which the second determination condition is less likely to be satisfied as compared with the first state, and the type determination means is the second state. It can be seen that the rate of determining the second privilege game is higher when the determination by the first discrimination means results in the specific discrimination result than when the discrimination by the discrimination means results in the specific discrimination result. Characterized gaming machine BD1.

According to the gaming machine BD1, the discrimination is executed by the first discrimination means based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition, and the discrimination is executed by the second discrimination means based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition. Will be done. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the scoring game executing means based on the fact that the determination by the first determination means or the second determination means yields a specific determination result. As the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, there are at least a plurality of types including the first privilege game and the second privilege game having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first privilege game. The type of privilege game 1 is determined by the determination means. The state setting means sets a first state in which the second discrimination condition is likely to be satisfied, based on the fact that the discrimination by the first discrimination means or the second discrimination means yields a specific discrimination result. On the other hand, based on the fact that the end condition of the privilege game is satisfied, the second state in which the second determination condition is less likely to be satisfied as compared with the first state is set by the state setting means. The type determination means is such that the ratio of determining the second privilege game is higher when the determination by the first discrimination means results in a specific discrimination result than when the discrimination by the second discrimination means results in a specific discrimination result. It is configured.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the second determination condition from being satisfied in a state other than the execution of the privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that the opportunity for the first privilege game having a low degree of advantage to be executed can be limited.

In the gaming machine BD1, the discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring the discrimination information to be used for the discrimination by the second discrimination means based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means. BD2 is a gaming machine BD2 comprising: a discrimination information storage means for storing a predetermined number of information as an upper limit until it is used for discrimination by the second discrimination means.

According to the gaming machine BD2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BD1. That is, based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition, the discrimination information to be used for the discrimination by the second discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means. The discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is stored by the discrimination information storage means up to a predetermined number of information until it is used for the discrimination by the second discrimination means.

As a result, when the second discrimination condition is satisfied a plurality of times before the discrimination by the second discrimination means is executed, the plurality of discrimination information acquired according to the satisfaction of the second discrimination condition for the plurality of times is satisfied. Is stored by the discrimination information storage means, so that there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the discrimination is not executed even though the second discrimination condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machine BD2, the second discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means during the execution of the privilege game, and based on the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means, after the end of the privilege game. The gaming machine BD3, which is characterized by performing discrimination.

According to the gaming machine BD3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BD2, the privilege is obtained by the second discrimination means based on the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means during the execution of the privilege game and stored in the discrimination information storage means. Since the determination is executed after the end of the game, the opportunity for the determination by the second determination means to be executed can be concentrated after the end of the privileged game. Therefore, after the end of the privileged game, the game can be performed with the expectation that the discrimination by the second discrimination means will not result in a specific discrimination result. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines BD1 to BD3, the entry means in which the second determination condition is satisfied based on the entry of the gaming ball, and the first position in which the gaming ball is difficult to enter into the entry means. , The variable means that can be changed to a second position that makes it easier for the gaming ball to enter than the first position, and the variable means from the first position to the first position based on the establishment of a specific determination condition. The variable means is variable to the second position based on the specific determination means for determining whether to change to two positions and the determination by the specific determination means to change from the first position to the second position. The variable control means is provided with a variable control means for controlling such as the above, and the variable control means is the specific determination means in the second state rather than the case where the specific determination means is determined to change the variable means in the second state. The gaming machine BD4 is characterized in that when it is determined that the variable means is variable, the variable means is controlled so that the period during which the variable means is variable to the second position is longer.

According to the gaming machine BD4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines BD1 to BD3, the following effects are played. That is, the first position where the game ball is difficult to enter into the ball entry means where the second determination condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball, and the game ball is easier to enter than the first position. The variable means is variable to the second position. Based on the fact that the specific determination condition is satisfied, the specific determination means determines whether to change the variable means from the first position to the second position. Based on the determination that the variable means is variable from the first position to the second position by the specific determination means, the variable control means is controlled so that the variable means is variable to the second position. When it is determined that the variable means is variable by the specific discriminant means in the second state, the variable means is in the second position than when it is determined that the variable means is variable by the specific discriminant means in the second state. It is controlled by the variable control means so that the variable period becomes long.

As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry means in the first state than in the second state. Therefore, in the first state, there is an effect that the second discrimination condition can be more easily satisfied than in the second state.

In any of the gaming machines BD1 to BD4, the entry means in which the second determination condition is satisfied based on the entry of the gaming ball, and the first position in which the gaming ball is difficult to enter into the entry means. , The variable means that can be changed to a second position that makes it easier for the gaming ball to enter than the first position, and the variable means from the first position to the first position based on the establishment of a specific determination condition. The variable means is variable to the second position based on the specific determination means for determining whether to change to two positions and the determination by the specific determination means to change from the first position to the second position. In the first state, the period from the start to the end of the discrimination of 1 by the specific discrimination means tends to be shorter than in the second state. A gaming machine BD5 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine BD5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines BD1 to BD4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first position where the game ball is difficult to enter into the ball entry means where the second determination condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball, and the game ball is easier to enter than the first position. The variable means is variable to the second position. Based on the fact that the specific determination condition is satisfied, the specific determination means determines whether to change the variable means from the first position to the second position. Based on the determination that the variable means is variable from the first position to the second position by the specific determination means, the variable control means is controlled so that the variable means is variable to the second position. The first state is configured such that the period from the start to the end of the determination of 1 by the specific determination means is more likely to be shorter in the first state than in the second state.

As a result, in the first state, the period required for the specific discrimination means to perform the same number of discriminations is shorter than in the second state. Therefore, since the variable means can be changed to the second position more times, there is an effect that the game ball can be easily entered in the first state.

In any of the game machines BD1 to BD3, the ball entry means provided in the specific flow path and the second determination condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball, and the game ball is difficult to flow down the specific flow path. An opening / closing means that can be changed between a closed state that closes so as to be closed and an open state that allows the game ball to flow down, and the opening / closing means thereof are set to the open state based on the first state. BD6 is a gaming machine provided with an opening / closing control means for setting the closed state based on the second state.

According to the gaming machine BD6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines BD1 to BD3, the following effects are played. That is, a ball entry means for satisfying the second determination condition based on the entry of the game ball is provided in the specific flow path. The opening / closing means is changed between a closed state in which the specific flow path is closed so that the game ball is difficult to flow down and an open state in which the game ball can flow down. The opening / closing means is set to the open state by the opening / closing control means based on the first state, while the opening / closing means is set to the closed state by the opening / closing control means based on the second state. ..

This has the effect of more reliably preventing the second determination condition from being satisfied in the second state.

The gaming machine BD6 is characterized in that, when the opening / closing means is set to the closed state, a specific number of gaming balls can be stopped on the upstream side of the opening / closing means. Machine BD7.

According to the gaming machine BD7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BD6, when the opening / closing means is set to the closed state, a specific number of gaming balls can be stopped on the upstream side of the opening / closing means. Therefore, when the open state is set, the stopped game ball can be entered into the ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the second determination condition can be more easily satisfied in the first state in which the open state is set.

<Characteristic BE group> (The fluctuation pattern command from the main to the sub includes information according to the remaining number of fluctuations until the end of the specific effect)
In a gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying an effect mode, a main control means for performing main control regarding the game, and a secondary control means for controlling the game based on a command output from the main control means. , The main control means executes a discriminant means that executes a discriminant based on the establishment of a discriminant condition, and a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the discriminant result by the discriminant means becomes a specific discriminant result. The operation in the dynamic display of the privilege game executing means, the dynamic display executing means for executing the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means, and the dynamic display executing means. The dynamic display time determining means for determining the target display time, the information corresponding to the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means, and the specific information different from the information corresponding to the dynamic display time. The subordinate control means includes a command output means for outputting a dynamic display time command including at least information to the subordinate control means, and the subordinate control means receives the dynamic display time command output by the command output means. Based on the command receiving means for specifying the dynamic display time command received by the command receiving means, the dynamic display time specifying means for specifying the dynamic display time and the predetermined specific conditions are satisfied. Based on this, the specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect that can be executed over the one or more dynamic display times in the display means, and the specific information included in the dynamic display time command. Based on this, the specific effect end determination means for determining whether or not to end the specific effect and the specific effect end determination means determined to end the specific effect were used for the determination. It is characterized by comprising a specific effect ending means for terminating the specific effect before the end of the dynamic display time specified by the dynamic display time specifying means based on the dynamic display time command. Game machine BE1 to play.

According to the gaming machine BE1, in the main control means, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the discrimination result by the discrimination means becomes a specific discrimination result, which is advantageous to the player. The privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. The dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means. The dynamic display time in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is determined by the dynamic display time determining means. A dynamic display time command that includes at least information corresponding to the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means and specific information different from the information corresponding to the dynamic display time is generated by the command output means. It is output to the slave control means. In the subordinate control means, the dynamic display time is dynamic based on the fact that the dynamic display time command output by the command output means is received by the command receiving means and the dynamic display time command is received by the command receiving means. Display time is specified by the means. Based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition, a specific effect that can be executed over one or a plurality of dynamic display times is executed by the specific effect executing means in the display means. Based on the specific information included in the dynamic display time command, whether or not to end the specific effect is determined by the specific effect end determination means. Dynamic display time based on the dynamic display time command used for the determination triggered by the determination that the specific effect is to be terminated by the specific effect end determination means, the dynamic display time specified by the specific effect end determination means ends. In the meantime, the specific production is completed by the specific production main hot water amount means.

This has the effect that the specific effect can be suitably ended.

In the gaming machine BE1, when it is determined by the specific effect end determination means that the specific effect is to be terminated, the specific effect is specified based on the information according to the determination result by the determination means included in the dynamic display time command. The gaming machine BE2 is provided with an effect mode determining means for determining an effect mode until the specific effect is ended by the effect end means.

According to the gaming machine BE2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BE1, when it is determined that the specific effect is to be terminated by the specific effect end determination means, it corresponds to the determination result by the determination means included in the dynamic display time command. Based on the information, the effect mode until the specific effect is ended by the specific effect end means is determined by the effect mode determining means, so that the effect mode can be determined in consideration of the determination result by the discriminating means. .. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect mode of the specific effect can be preferably set.

In the gaming machine BE1 or BE2, the slave control means is included in the dynamic display time command when the power-on determination means for determining the power-on to the gaming machine and the power-on determination means are determined by the power-on determination means. Based on the specific information obtained, the special effect is executed by the cutoff determination means for determining whether or not the time when the power of the gaming machine is cut off was during the execution of the specific effect, and the cutoff time determination means. The gaming machine BE3 is provided with a post-input effect executing means for executing the specific effect based on the determination that the specific effect is inside.

According to the gaming machine BE3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BE1 or BE2, when the power supply to the gaming machine is determined by the power-on determination means and the power-on is determined by the power-on determination means in the slave control means. In addition, based on the specific information included in the dynamic display time command, it is determined by the shutoff time determination means whether or not the time when the power of the gaming machine is cut off is during the execution of the specific effect. Based on the determination that the specific effect was being executed by the cutoff determination means, the specific effect is executed by the post-input effect execution means.

As a result, even if the power is cut off during the execution of the specific effect, the specific effect can be restarted, so that the effect mode differs before and after the power is cut off, which suppresses the player from being confused. It has the effect of being able to.

The gaming machine BE4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine BE3, the specific effect ending means ends the specific effect executed by the effect executing means after the input.

According to the gaming machine BE4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BE3, the specific effect executed by the effect executing means after the input is terminated by the specific effect ending means, so that the power of the gaming machine is turned on during the execution of the specific effect. Even when it is blocked, there is an effect that the specific effect can be suitably ended.

The gaming machine BE5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine BE4, the specific effect executing means sets a predetermined specific period as the effect period of the specific effect.

According to the gaming machine BE4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BE5, a specific period predetermined by the specific effect executing means is set as the effect period of the specific effect, so that a simple process is required when setting the specific effect. There is an effect that it can be set with.

In any of the game machines BE1 to BE5, the main control means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the discrimination means and the discrimination information acquisition means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. The discriminant information storage means is provided with discriminant information storage means that can store the discriminated information at least until it is used for discrimination by the discriminant means, up to a predetermined number of information, and the command output means stores the discriminant information in the discriminant information storage means. An information number command including information corresponding to the number of information of the discrimination information is output to the slave control means, and the specific effect executing means is the discrimination information included in the information number command. The gaming machine BE6 is characterized in that the specific effect is executed over the dynamic display of the identification information a number of times equal to or less than the number of information.

According to the gaming machine BE6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines BE1 to BE5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the main control means, the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. The discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is stored in at least the discrimination information storage means until it is used for the discrimination by the discrimination means, up to a predetermined number of information. The information number command including the information corresponding to the number of information of the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is output to the slave control means by the command output means. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means over the dynamic display of the identification information a number of times equal to or less than the number of information of the discrimination information included in the number of information commands.

As a result, the specific effect can be executed within the range of the number of information of the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means or less, so that the specific effect can be specified even though the dynamic display of the discrimination information is not executed. It has the effect of suppressing the continuation of the production.

In the game machine BE6, the information according to the number of information of the discrimination information is obtained from the time when the specific condition is satisfied until all the discrimination based on the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is completed. The gaming machine BE7 is characterized in that it is composed of information corresponding to the number of information of the remaining discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means.

According to the game machine BE7, in addition to the effect of the game machine BE6, all the discrimination based on the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means after the specific condition is satisfied, the information according to the number of information of the discrimination information is satisfied. Is composed of information according to the number of remaining discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means until the end of the process, so that the specific effect is more reliably stored in the discrimination information storage means. There is an effect that it can be executed within the range of the number of information of the discrimination information or less.

<Characteristic BF group> (The ease with which the special drawing lottery on the disadvantaged side can be executed is changed according to the winning symbol)
The first discrimination information is obtained based on the first ball entry means arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can easily enter and the game ball entering the first ball entry means. What is the first discrimination means for executing the first discrimination using the first discrimination information acquisition means to be acquired and the first discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means, and the first direction? Second discrimination information based on the second ball entry means arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a different second direction can easily enter, and the game ball entering the second ball entry means. The second discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring the above and the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means are used to determine a second discrimination that tends to result in a more disadvantageous discrimination result than the first discrimination. A discriminant information storage means that can store the second discriminating means to be executed and the second discriminating information acquired by the second discriminating information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of information, the first discriminating means, or the first discriminating means. As a type of privileged game execution means for executing a privileged game advantageous to the player and a privileged game executed by the privileged game executing means based on the determination by the second discrimination means. The first privilege game in which it is more likely to be advantageous to launch the game ball in the first direction than in the second direction at least for a predetermined period, and the game ball in the second direction rather than the first direction in the predetermined period. The gaming machine BF1 is provided with a type determining means for determining the type of the privileged game 1 from a plurality of types including the second privileged game which is more likely to be launched.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning result, the game shifts to a winning state. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest of winning by differentiating the game values that can be acquired (for example). , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 25144417). In addition, some conventional gaming machines are advantageous by replacing or in addition to the number of rounds, by differently giving different game states after hitting, or by differently different numbers of prize balls that can be obtained in each round. Some have different degrees. However, it has been required to further increase the difference in the degree of advantage according to the hit type.

On the other hand, according to the game machine BF1, the first ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can easily enter. The first discrimination information is acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means, and the first discrimination information acquired by the first information acquisition means is used. , The first determination is executed by the first determination means. The second ball entry means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction can easily enter. The second discrimination information is acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means. Using the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means, the second discrimination means is executed by the second discrimination means, which tends to give a more disadvantageous discrimination result than the first discrimination. The second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means is stored in the discrimination information storage means up to a predetermined number of information. Based on the determination result obtained by the first determination means or the second determination means, the privilege game execution means executes the privilege game advantageous to the player. As the types of privilege games executed by the privilege game execution means, the first privilege game in which it is more advantageous to launch the game ball in the first direction than in the second direction at least in a predetermined period, and the first privilege game in a predetermined period from the first direction. Also, one type of privileged game is determined by the type determining means from a plurality of types including the second privileged game in which it is more likely to be advantageous to shoot the game ball in the second direction.

As a result, it is difficult for the first privilege game, which is advantageous by firing the game ball in the first direction, to execute the second determination, which tends to result in a disadvantageous determination result. Therefore, the first privilege game and the second privilege It is possible to increase the difference in the degree of advantage from the game. Therefore, since it can be expected that the first privilege game is determined by the type determination means, it is possible to pay attention to the type of the privilege game when the specific determination result is obtained. There is.

In the game machine BF1, the game ball launched in the first direction is arranged at a position where it is easy to enter, and the first state can be changed between a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter. The variable ball entry means and the game ball launched in the second direction are arranged at a position where the ball can easily enter, and the game ball can be changed into a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter. The two variable ball entry means and the privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the ball entering the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means are provided. The first privilege game is more likely to be changed to a state in which the first variable ball entry means can enter the ball than the second variable ball entry means, and the second privilege game is the first privilege. The gaming machine BF2 is characterized in that the second variable ball entering means is more likely to be changed to a state in which a ball can be entered than a game.

According to the gaming machine BF2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BF1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a first variable ball entry means that can be changed between a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can easily enter. Has been done. A second variable ball entry means that can be changed between a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can easily enter. There is. A predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means based on the fact that the game ball enters the first variable ball entering means or the second variable ball entering means. The first privilege game is more likely to be changed to a state in which the first variable ball entry means can enter the ball than the second variable ball entry means. The second privilege game is more likely to be changed to a state in which the second variable ball entry means can enter the ball than the first privilege game.

This has the effect that during the execution of the privilege game, the game can be performed by paying attention to whether or not the launched game ball enters the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means. be.

In the gaming machine BF1 or BF2, as the gaming state after the privileged gaming is completed, one of a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. The game state setting means for setting the game state of the above is provided, and the first game state is after the privileged game executed based on the specific determination result obtained by the determination by the second determination means. The gaming machine BF3, characterized in that the ratio set as the later gaming state is higher than that of the second gaming state.

According to the gaming machine BF3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines BF1 or BF2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the gaming state after the privileged game is completed, one of a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state is the gaming state. It is set by the setting means. The ratio of the first gaming state set as the gaming state after the privileged game executed based on the result of the discrimination by the second discrimination means is higher than that of the second gaming state. It is configured to be.

As a result, when the discrimination by the second discrimination means is executed, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the game is played with the expectation that a specific discrimination result will not be obtained. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BF3, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state by the ratio of setting the second gaming state as the gaming state after the first privilege game or the second privilege game is completed. The gaming machine BF4, which is characterized in that it is higher than the ratio of the game.

According to the gaming machine BF4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BF3, the ratio in which the second gaming state is set as the gaming state after the first privilege game or the second privilege game is completed is the ratio of the first gaming state. Since it is configured to be higher than the set ratio, the second determination executed based on launching the game ball in the second direction in a predetermined period results in a specific determination result, and the first gaming state is obtained. Can be made to remind the player to avoid being set. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the second determination will not result in a specific determination result after the end of the second privilege game.

In any of the game machines BF1 to BF4, a suggestion effect executing means for executing a suggestion effect suggesting a discrimination result by the first discriminating means or the second discriminating means, and the suggestion executed by the suggestion effect executing means. As the effect, when the first privilege game is determined by the type determination means, either the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect different from the first suggestion effect is determined, and the type determination means determines. The game machine BF5 is provided with a suggestion effect determining means for determining the first suggestion effect when the second privilege game is determined.

According to the gaming machine BF5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines BF1 to BF4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the suggestion effect suggesting the discrimination result by the first discriminating means or the second discriminating means is executed by the suggestion effect executing means. As the suggestion effect executed by the suggestion effect execution means, either the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect different from the first suggestion effect is suggested when the first privilege game is determined by the type determination means. It is determined by the production determining means. On the other hand, when the second privilege game is determined by the type determination means, the first suggestion effect is determined by the suggestion effect determination means.

As a result, when the second suggestion effect is executed, it is determined that the game is the first privilege game, so that the game can be performed with the expectation that the second suggestion effect will be executed as the suggestion effect. There is an effect. Further, since the first suggestion effect may be executed in the first privilege game, when the first suggestion effect is executed, the game can be performed with the expectation that it is the first privilege game. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine BF5, when the first suggestion effect is executed based on the determination of the first privilege game by the type determination means, the suggestion effect execution means is described after the end of the first suggestion effect. A gaming machine BF6 characterized in that it executes a second suggestion effect.

According to the gaming machine BF6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BF5, when the first suggestion effect is executed based on the fact that the first privilege game is determined by the type determining means, after the end of the first suggestion effect. Since the second suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution means, when the first suggestion effect is executed, the game is performed with the expectation that the second suggestion effect will be executed after the end of the first suggestion effect. It has the effect of being able to make it.

In any of the gaming machines BF1 to BF6, when the gaming ball is continuously launched in the second direction during the predetermined period, the second discrimination information acquisition means at least the predetermined number of information or more. The gaming machine BF7, characterized in that it is a period of length for which the discrimination information of the above is acquired.

According to the gaming machine BF7, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines BF1 to BF6, it becomes a second privilege game, and when the gaming ball is continuously launched in the second direction in a predetermined period, the discrimination information storage means is used. Since the second determination information of the predetermined number of information, which is the upper limit, is stored, there is an effect that the second determination of the number of times corresponding to the upper limit can be executed after the end of the second privilege game.

In the gaming machine BF7, the gaming ball launched in the second direction is arranged at a position where it is easy to enter, and it is variable between a first state in which the gaming ball can enter and a second state in which the gaming ball is difficult to enter. A gaming ball enters the second variable ball-entry means, the variable control means for changing the state of the second variable ball-entry means to the first state in the predetermined period, and the second variable ball-entry means. A privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the ball, and a game ball launched in the second direction are arranged at a reachable position, and the reached game ball is provided by the second ball entry means. The gaming machine BF8 is provided with a distribution means for distributing to either the first flow path provided and the second flow path provided with the second variable ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine BF8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BF7, the following effects are exhibited. A second variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state in which the game ball can enter a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can easily enter and a second state in which the game ball is difficult to enter. Is placed. The state of the second variable ball entry means is changed to the first state in a predetermined period by the variable control means. A predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means based on the fact that the game ball enters the second variable ball entering means. A first flow path provided with a second ball entry means and a second flow path provided with a second variable ball entry means at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can reach. A distribution means for distributing to either of the above is arranged.

This has the effect of suppressing the flow direction of the game ball launched in the second direction from being biased.

In the gaming machine BF8, the distribution means is characterized in that the gaming balls are alternately distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine BF9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BF8, the gaming balls launched in the second direction during a predetermined period in the second privilege game are used as the second entering means and the second variable entering means. You can enter the ball alternately. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably prevent the game ball launched in the second direction from entering the second ball entry means or the second variable entry means in a biased manner.

<Characteristic BG group> (Notify the jackpot type based on V winning)
A discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, a privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means, and a game ball. Can be changed to a ball-entry means that allows the ball to enter, a first position that allows the ball to enter the ball, and a second position that makes it more difficult to enter the ball than the first position. The variable control means for varying the means and the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the privilege game, and the privilege game are completed. As a later game state, a first game state that is advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the ball entry means during the execution of the privilege game is set, and the ball entry is performed during the execution of the privilege game. A game state setting means for setting a second game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state when the game ball does not enter the means, and a privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means. As a type, a type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game, and a type determining means thereof. When at least the first privilege game or the second privilege game is determined, the game ball has entered the ball entry means with a suggestion effect suggesting the type of the determined privilege game. A gaming machine BG1 characterized by comprising a suggestion staging execution means that can be executed based on the above.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is known. In this conventional gaming machine, a variable display of symbols is performed on a display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a winning game advantageous to the player is given. In addition, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device in addition to the design, and the entertainment of the game is improved by performing a wide variety of entertainment effects (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886 (Ab. 2003-325886). In addition, among the conventional gaming machines, there is also a gaming machine that does not notify the gaming state after the hit at the time of winning, and executes an effect suggesting the gaming state after the hit during the hit state. Are known. However, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that the remaining winning games become monotonous after the effect suggesting the gaming state after the hit is executed.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BG1, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the player is determined by the privilege game execution means based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means yields a specific discrimination result. A privileged game that is advantageous to the player is executed. The variable means is variable to a first position where the game ball can enter into the ball entry means where the game ball can enter, and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. Based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the privilege game, the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period by the variable control means. As the game state after the privilege game is completed, when the game ball enters the ball entry means during the execution of the privilege game, the game state setting means sets the first game state which is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the game ball does not enter the ball entry means during the execution of the privilege game, the game state setting means sets the second game state, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state. As the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, one type is selected from a plurality of types including at least the first privilege game and the second privilege game which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. It is determined by the type determination means. When at least the first privilege game or the second privilege game is determined by the type determination means, the effect suggesting the type of the determined privilege game is suggested. The game ball enters the ball entry means by the effect execution means. It is executed based on.

As a result, even after the game ball enters the ball entry means and the setting of the advantageous first game state is confirmed, pay attention to the type of privileged game suggested by the suggestion effect executed by the suggestion effect execution means. Can be played. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous after the game ball is inserted into the ball entry means.

In the gaming machine BG1, the discriminating means has a first discriminating means that executes the first discriminating based on the establishment of the first discriminating condition as the discriminating condition, and a second discriminating means different from the first discriminating condition. It has a second discriminating means for executing a second discriminating based on the satisfaction of the condition, and the type determining means has obtained the specific discriminating result in the first discriminating by the first discriminating means. As the type of the privilege game executed based on the above, one type is determined from a plurality of types including at least the first privilege game and the second privilege game, and the second by the second determination means. As the type of the privileged game executed based on the determination of the specific determination result, the ball entry means during the execution of the privileged game rather than the first privileged game and the second privileged game. One type is determined from a plurality of types including at least a third privilege game in which the pachinko ball is difficult to enter, and the first privilege game is more than the second privilege game. The gaming machine BG2 is characterized in that the second determination is easily executed in a predetermined period after the end of the game.

According to the gaming machine BG2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BG1, in the discrimination means, the first discrimination is executed by the first discrimination means based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition. The second determination is executed by the second determination means based on the establishment of the second determination condition different from the first determination condition. As a type of privilege game executed based on the result of a specific determination in the first determination by the first determination means, a plurality of privilege games including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game by the type determination means. One type is determined from the types. On the other hand, as a type of award game executed based on the fact that a specific determination result is obtained by the second determination by the second determination means, the first award game and the award game rather than the second award game are being executed. One type is determined by the type determining means from a plurality of types including at least a third privilege game in which it is difficult to enter the ball entering means. In the first privilege game, the second determination is more likely to be executed in a predetermined period after the privilege game is completed than in the second privilege game.

As a result, when the first privilege game is completed, the disadvantageous second determination is likely to be executed in a predetermined period, so it is more strongly expected that the second privilege game will be determined when a specific determination result is obtained. Can be made to. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can pay attention to the type of the privileged game and play the game.

In the gaming machine BG1 or BG2, a specific effect is executed from the start of the first privilege game or the second privilege game to at least the period from the start of the game ball to the ball entering means. The gaming machine BG3 comprising means, wherein the suggestion effect executing means executes an effect suggesting the type of the privileged game as a result of the specific effect.

According to the gaming machine BG3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines BG1 or BG2, the following effects are exhibited. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means at least during the period from the start of the first privilege game or the second privilege game until the game ball enters the ball entering means. As a result of the specific effect, the effect suggesting the type of the privilege game is executed by the suggestion effect execution means.

As a result, the specific effect and the effect suggesting the type of the privileged game can be shown as a series of effects, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BG2 or BG3, the display means capable of displaying the identification information, the dynamic display means for displaying the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means in the display means, and the dynamic display means thereof. Identification information that can determine one identification information from a plurality of identification information including at least a first identification information and a second identification information different from the first identification information as the identification information dynamically displayed by The identification information determination means includes a determination means, and the identification information determination means obtains the specific determination result by discrimination by the discrimination means, and the first identification information is determined when the first privilege game is determined by the type determination means. The gaming machine BG4 is characterized in that the first identification information or the second identification information is determined when the second privilege game is determined.

According to the gaming machine BG4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines BG2 or BG3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the display means capable of displaying the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means is displayed by the dynamic display means. As the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, one identification information is the identification information from a plurality of identification information including at least the first identification information and the second identification information different from the first identification information. It is determined by the deciding means. When the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a specific discrimination result and the first privilege game is determined by the type determination means, the identification information determining means determines the first identification information. On the other hand, when the second privilege game is determined, the first identification information or the second identification information is determined by the identification information determining means.

As a result, it is possible to confirm the dynamic display of the identification information in the expectation that the second identification information, which is determined only in the advantageous second privilege game, will be displayed by the dynamic display. In addition, by configuring the configuration so that the first identification information can be displayed even in the case of the second privilege game, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for the second privilege game when the first identification information is displayed. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the gaming machine BG4, the suggestion effect executing means executes the suggestion effect when the first identification information is displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display means. The types of the suggestion effect include a first suggestion effect in which the first identification information displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information is maintained as the first identification information, and the first identification information is the second. The gaming machine BG5 is characterized in that a second suggestion effect that is variable to the identification information is provided at least.

According to the gaming machine BG5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BG4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first identification information is displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display means, the suggestion effect execution means executes the suggestion effect. The types of suggestion effects include a first suggestion effect in which the first identification information displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information is maintained as the first identification information, and the first identification information is changed to the second identification information. At least a second suggestion effect is provided.

This has the effect that when the first identification information is displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information, the game can be performed with the expectation that the second suggestion effect will be executed.

The game machine BG5 includes a suggestion effect execution determination means for determining whether or not to execute the suggestion effect when the first privilege game or the second privilege game is determined by the type determination means. The identification information determining means determines the first identification information based on the determination that the suggestion effect execution determination means executes the suggestion effect, and the suggestion effect execution means determines the type determination means. The first suggestion effect is determined, and when it is determined by the suggestion effect execution determination means that the suggestion effect is to be executed, the first suggestion effect is executed, and the second privilege game is determined by the type determination means. The gaming machine BG6 is characterized in that the second suggestion effect is executed when it is determined by the suggestion effect execution determination means to execute the suggestion effect.

According to the gaming machine BG6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BG5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first privilege game or the second privilege game is determined by the type determination means, whether or not to execute the suggestion effect is determined by the suggestion effect execution determination means. The first identification information is determined by the identification information determining means based on the determination that the suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution determining means. When the first identification information is determined by the type determining means and it is determined by the suggestion effect execution determining means that the suggestion effect is to be executed, the first suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution means. On the other hand, when the second privilege game is determined by the type determining means and it is determined by the suggestion effect execution determining means that the suggestion effect is to be executed, the suggestion effect execution means executes the second suggestion effect.

As a result, since the second suggestion effect is executed only when the second bonus game is determined, there is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the second suggestion effect will be executed.

In the gaming machine BG6, the suggestion effect execution determining means executes the suggestion effect when the second privilege game is determined than when the first privilege game is determined by the type determination means. The gaming machine BG7 characterized in that the discrimination rate is high.

According to the gaming machine BG7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BG6, when the second privilege game is determined, the suggestion effect executing means is used rather than when the first privilege game is determined by the type determining means. Since the rate of determination is high when the suggestion effect is executed, there is an effect that the expectation for the second privilege game can be improved when the suggestion effect is started.

The display means capable of displaying the identification information in the gaming machines BG1 or BG2, the dynamic display execution means for executing the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means in the display means, and the dynamic display thereof. A period of dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result executed by the executing means and a period of at least the period from the start of the privilege game until the variable means is changed to the first position. The specific effect executing means is provided with the specific effect executing means, and the suggestion effect executing means executes the suggestion effect suggesting the type of the privilege game as a result of the specific effect. Game machine BG8.

According to the gaming machine BG8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines BG1 or BG2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the display means capable of displaying the identification information, the period of dynamic display of the identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means and at least from the start of the privilege game until the variable means is biased to the first position or two. Over the period, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means. As a result of the specific effect, a suggestion effect suggesting the type of the privilege game is executed by the suggestion effect execution means.

As a result, the specific effect and the effect suggesting the type of the privileged game can be shown as a series of effects, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic BH group> (The ease of predicting the presence or absence of pending consecutive occurrences varies depending on the jackpot type)
A discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, a privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means, and a privilege game execution means thereof. As the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, one type is determined from a plurality of types including at least the first privilege game and the second privilege game different from the first privilege game. The first variable mode and the first variable thereof are based on the means, the variable means that can be changed in a predetermined variable mode, and the discriminant result different from the specific discriminant result in the discrimination by the discriminating means. The specific discrimination result is obtained by the first variable control means for varying the variable means in any one of the plurality of variable modes including at least the second variable mode different from the mode, and the discrimination by the discrimination means. Based on this, the second variable control means for varying the variable means in the third variable mode including at least the specific variable mode having an appearance that is indistinguishable from the first variable mode, and the first privilege game are completed. During the period from the time when the predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the first variable control means sets the first variable state in which the variable means is easily changed in the first variable mode, and the second privilege game is performed. From the end to the time when the specific condition is satisfied, the variable state setting means for setting the second variable state in which the variable means is more likely to be changed in the second variable mode than the first variable state. A gaming machine BH1 characterized by being provided.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest of winning by differentiating the game values that can be acquired (for example). , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 25144417). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, in addition to being notified of the hit at the time of hit, the hit type is also notified, so that after the notification is made, it is simply notified. In some cases, the game became monotonous because it became like a task of just digesting the hit. In addition, in some conventional gaming machines, it is difficult to distinguish between a hit state and a small hit, which is a type of hit, from the production mode and the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening. The constructed gaming machines are also known, and there are also known gaming machines that can be expected to be hit even after the winning game is completed. However, with such a gaming machine, it takes too much time to grasp whether it is a hit or a small hit, and there is a risk that the player's interest in the game will be impaired.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BH1, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. Based on the result of the determination by the determination means, the privilege game execution means executes the privilege game advantageous to the player. As the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, one type is selected by the type determination means from a plurality of types including at least the first privilege game and the second privilege game different from the first privilege game. It is determined. A plurality of variable modes including at least a first variable mode and a second variable mode different from the first variable mode, based on the fact that the discrimination by the discriminating means results in an outlier discrimination result different from the specific discriminant result. In any one of the variable modes, the variable means is changed by the first variable control means. Based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means yields a specific discrimination result, the variable means is provided by the second variable control means in the third variable mode including at least the specific variable mode having an appearance that is difficult to distinguish from the first variable mode. It is variable. From the end of the first privilege game until the predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the variable state is easily changed by the first variable control means by the first variable control means, and the first variable state is easily changed by the variable state setting means. Set. On the other hand, from the end of the second privilege game until the specific condition is satisfied, the variable state is set by the variable state setting means so that the variable means is more likely to be changed in the second variable mode than the first variable state. Will be done.

As a result, it becomes difficult to distinguish the appearance of the variable mode of the variable means between the case where the deviation determination result is obtained after the end of the first privilege game and the case where the specific determination result is obtained, so that at least a specific condition is satisfied. Until then, it can be difficult to identify whether or not the privilege game is executed from the variable mode of the variable means. On the other hand, if the deviation determination result is obtained after the end of the second privilege game, the second variable mode is set, so that the player can relatively identify whether or not the deviation determination result is obtained from the variable aspect of the variable means. It will be easier. Therefore, since the ease of identifying the deviation determination result until the specific condition is satisfied can be changed according to the type of the privileged game, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine BH1 is provided with a ball-entry means through which the game ball can enter, and the variable means has a first position in which the game ball can enter the ball-entry means and a game ball from the first position. Is variable to a second position where it becomes difficult to enter the ball, and in the first variable mode, the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the passage of the first period. The second variable mode is a variable mode in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the passage of a second period different from the first period. The gaming machine BH2 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine BH2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BH1. That is, the variable means is variably configured to be a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. The first variable mode is configured in a variable mode in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the passage of the first period, and the second variable mode is a second variable mode different from the first period. The variable means is configured in a variable manner in which the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the passage of the period.

This has the effect that the player can easily identify whether the variable means is the first variable mode or the second variable mode by confirming the interval until the variable means is changed to the first position. There is.

In the gaming machine BH1 or BH2, the discriminating means includes a first discriminating means that executes the first discriminating based on the establishment of the first discriminating condition, and a second discriminating condition different from the first discriminating condition. The first variable control means includes a second discriminating means for executing the second discriminating based on the establishment, and the first variable control means is said to be based on the fact that the discriminating by the first discriminating means results in the misaligned discriminating result. The variable means is variable in any one of a plurality of variable modes including at least one variable mode and the second variable mode, and the second variable control means is the first discriminating means. The gaming machine BH3 is characterized in that the variable means is variable in the third variable mode based on the determination by the above-mentioned specific determination result.

According to the gaming machine BH3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines BH1 or BH2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first determination is executed by the first determination means based on the establishment of the first determination condition. The second determination is executed by the second determination means based on the establishment of the second determination condition different from the first determination condition. The first variable control is performed in any one of a plurality of variable modes including at least the first variable mode and the second variable mode, based on the fact that the discrimination by the first discriminating means results in an outlier discrimination. Variable means are variable by means. The variable means is varied in the third variable mode by the second variable control means based on the fact that the discrimination by the first discriminant means results in a specific discriminant result.

As a result, the variable mode of the variable means is changed in the case where the discrimination by the first discriminating means results in a misjudgment, depending on the type of the privilege game. Therefore, the first discriminating means is used until the specific condition is satisfied. There is an effect that the game can be performed by paying attention to the variable mode of the variable means each time the determination is executed.

In the gaming machine BH3, the type determination means determines the type of the privileged game to be executed based on the specific determination result obtained by the second determination by the second determination means. A gaming machine BH4 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine BH4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BH3, the type of the privileged game executed based on the specific discrimination result obtained by the second discrimination by the second discrimination means is determined by the type determination means. Since it is determined, when the second determination by the second determination means is executed, it is possible to pay attention to whether the first privilege game is determined or the second privilege game is determined. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the gaming machine BH3 or BH4, the first discriminating condition is characterized in that it is easier to be satisfied than the second discriminating condition from the end of the privileged game until the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine BH5.

According to the gaming machine BH5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BH3 or BH4, the first determination condition is satisfied more than the second determination condition from the end of the privilege game until the specific condition is satisfied. Since it becomes easy, there is an effect that the game can be played by paying attention to the variable mode of the variable means until the specific condition is satisfied.

In any of the gaming machines BH3 to BH5, the gaming ball launched in the first direction was launched in a second direction different from the first direction and a first entering means provided at a position where the ball can enter. A second ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball can enter, and a predetermined position based on the fact that the game ball launched in the first direction is provided at a position where the ball can easily enter and the game ball enters. Based on the start of the above-mentioned privilege game, the state of the privilege entry means to which the privilege of the above is given and the state of the privilege entry means are changed from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter. A variable control means that changes a predetermined number of times to a possible second state is provided, and the first determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means. The gaming machine BH6 is characterized in that the second determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the second entry means.

According to the gaming machine BH6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines BH3 to BH5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can enter, and the first ball can enter the position where the game ball launched in the second direction different from the first direction can enter. 2 Ball entry means are provided. A privilege entry means is provided at a position where a game ball launched in the first direction can easily enter, and a predetermined privilege is given based on the entry of the game ball. The state of the privilege ball entering means is changed by the variable control means a predetermined number of times from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the game ball can enter based on the start of the privilege game. The first determination condition is established based on the entry of the game ball into the first entry means, and the second determination condition is based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. Is established.

As a result, by launching the game ball aiming at the privilege ball entry means during the execution of the privilege game, the game ball can also be entered into the first ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the first determination condition can be easily satisfied when the privilege game is executed.

In the game machine BH6, the first discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring the first discrimination information used for the discrimination by the first discrimination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means, and the first 1 The discrimination information storage means that can store the first discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of information is provided, and the specific condition is the discrimination information at the end of the privilege game. The gaming machine BH7 is characterized in that it is established based on the execution of discrimination based on all the first discrimination information stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine BH7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BH6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means, the first discrimination information used for the discrimination by the first discrimination means is acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means. The first discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means is stored by the discrimination information storage means up to a predetermined number of information. The specific condition is satisfied based on the fact that the discrimination based on all the first discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is executed at the end of the privilege game.

As a result, the first discrimination information acquired during the execution of the privilege game is stored in the discrimination information storage means, so that there is an effect that the first discrimination can be efficiently executed.

In the gaming machine BH7, as the gaming state after the privileged gaming is completed, from among a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. The game state determining means for determining the game state of 1 is provided, and the type determining means is the game state as a type of privileged game executed based on the result of the specific determination in the first determination. The first type determining means in which the ratio of determining the third privileged game in which the first gaming state is determined by the determining means is higher than the ratio of determining the type of the other privileged game, and the above-mentioned identification by the second discrimination. As the type of the privilege game executed based on the determination result of, the second type is determined from a plurality of types including at least the first privilege game and the second privilege game. The game state determining means has a determination means, and when the first privilege game or the second privilege game is reached, the second game state is set as a game state after the privilege game is completed. A gaming machine BH8 characterized by being determined.

According to the gaming machine BH8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BH7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as a gaming state after the privileged game is completed, one gaming state is selected from a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. Is determined by the game state determination means. As a type of privilege game executed based on the result of a specific determination in the first determination, the third privilege game in which the first game state is determined by the game state determination means is determined by the first type determination means. The percentage to be played is higher than the percentage to determine the type of other privilege games. As the type of the privilege game executed based on the result of the specific determination in the second determination, one type is the first among a plurality of types including at least the first privilege game and the second privilege game. It is determined by two types of determination means. In the case of the first privilege game or the second privilege game, the second game state is determined by the game state determining means as the game state after the privilege game is completed.

As a result, when a specific discrimination result is obtained in the first discrimination, the ratio of the first gaming state being determined after the end of the privilege game is high, so that the first discrimination stored in the discrimination information storage means during the execution of the privilege game is performed. Based on the information, it is possible to perform the game in the hope that all the first determinations executed after the end of the privileged game will be out of order and the determination result will be. Therefore, since it is possible to realize a novel game property that makes one want to avoid a specific determination result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic BI group> (Easiness of holding reams varies depending on the jackpot type)
The first discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition, the second discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition, and the above. Based on the discrimination by the first discrimination means or the discrimination by the second discrimination means, a specific discrimination result is obtained, and the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player and the privilege game execution means thereof. As the type of the privileged game to be executed, the first privileged game and the first privileged game are determined by the second discriminating means from the end of the privileged game to the time when the specific condition is satisfied. A first gaming state as a type determining means for determining the type of one of the privileged games including at least a second privileged game that tends to be a specific determination result, and a gaming state after the privileged game is completed. A game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of states including at least a second game state different from the first game state, the first privilege game and the second privilege game. The gaming machine BI1 is characterized in that, as a gaming state after the privileged game is completed, the setting ratio of the first gaming state is higher than that of the second gaming state.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning result, the game shifts to a winning state. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest of winning by differentiating the game values that can be acquired (for example). , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 25144417). In addition, some conventional gaming machines are advantageous by replacing or in addition to the number of rounds, by differently giving different game states after hitting, or by differently different numbers of prize balls that can be obtained in each round. Some have different degrees. However, it has been required to further increase the difference in the degree of advantage according to the hit type.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BI1, the discrimination is executed by the first discriminating means based on the establishment of the first discriminating condition, and the second discriminating condition different from the first discriminating condition is satisfied. 2 The discrimination is executed by the discrimination means. Based on the determination by the first determination means or the determination by the second determination means resulting in a specific determination result, the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. As the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the first privilege game and the discrimination by the second discrimination means from the end of the privilege game to the establishment of the specific condition rather than the first privilege game. The type of one privileged game is determined by the type determining means from a plurality of privileged games including at least the second privileged game that tends to give a specific determination result. As the game state after the privilege game is completed, one game state is set by the game state setting means from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state. .. In both the first privilege game and the second privilege game, the setting ratio of the second game state is higher than that of the second game state as the game state after the privilege game is completed.

As a result, depending on whether the game is the first privilege game or the second privilege game, there is a difference in the possibility that the discrimination by the second discrimination means will result in a specific discrimination result until the specific condition is satisfied. There is an effect that the game can be played by paying attention to the type of the privilege game determined by the type determination means.

In the game BI1, the type determining means includes at least the first privilege game, the second privilege game, and the third privilege game which is more disadvantageous to the player than the other types of the privilege game. 1 to 1 is to determine the type of the privileged game, and the third privileged game is the case where the specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the second determination means rather than the determination by the first determination means. The gaming machine BI2, characterized in that the ratio determined by the type determining means is high.

According to the gaming machine BI2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BI1. That is, the type of the privilege game is one of a plurality of types including at least the first privilege game, the second privilege game, and the third privilege game which is more disadvantageous to the player than the other privilege game types. Is determined by. The rate at which the third privilege game is determined by the type determination means is higher than the determination by the first determination means when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the second determination means.

As a result, if a specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the second discrimination means, the rate at which the disadvantageous third privilege game is determined increases, so that it is hoped that the discrimination by the second discrimination means does not result in a specific discrimination result. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that it will be the first privilege game, rather than the second privilege game in which the discrimination by the second discrimination means tends to produce a specific determination result.

In the gaming machine BI1 or BI2, the probability that the first gaming state will be the specific discrimination result when the discrimination by the first discriminating means or the discrimination by the second discriminating means is executed is the second gaming state. The second determination condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first determination condition from the end of the second privilege game until the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine BI3 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine BI3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines BI1 or BI2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first gaming state is configured so that the probability that a specific discrimination result will be obtained when the discrimination by the first discrimination means or the discrimination by the second discrimination means is executed is higher than that in the second gaming state. .. From the end of the second privilege game until the specific condition is satisfied, the second determination condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first determination condition.

As a result, in the first gaming state, the probability that a specific determination result will be obtained is higher than in the second gaming state, so that it is easy to continuously become a privileged game at relatively short intervals. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved when the first game state is reached.

In any of the game machines BI1 to BI3, a discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the second discrimination means based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, and the discrimination information acquisition means acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means. Based on the discrimination information storage means that can store the discrimination information up to a predetermined number of information and the discrimination information 1 stored in the discrimination information storage means used for the discrimination by the second discrimination means. The identification information is provided with an erasing means for erasing the discrimination information of the above 1 from the discrimination information storage means, and the specific condition is that the number of information of the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means becomes 0. The gaming machine BI4, which is characterized by being established based on the above.

According to the gaming machine BI4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines BI1 to BI3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the establishment of the predetermined acquisition condition, the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the second discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means. The discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is stored in the discrimination information storage means up to a predetermined number of information. Based on the fact that the discrimination information of 1 stored in the discrimination information storage means is used for the discrimination by the second discrimination means, the discrimination information of the 1 is erased from the discrimination information storage means by the erasing means. The specific condition is satisfied based on the fact that the number of information of the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means becomes 0.

As a result, until the number of information of the discrimination information becomes 0, it is easy to obtain a specific discrimination result by the discrimination by the second discrimination means. Therefore, the game is played by paying attention to the number of information stored in the discrimination information storage means. It has the effect of being able to.

In any of the gaming machines BI1 to BI4, the first ball entering means arranged at a position where the gaming ball launched in the first direction can enter, and the gaming ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction. A second ball entry means arranged at a position where the game ball can enter is provided, and the first determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means. The second determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means, and the second privilege game has started the privilege game. The gaming machine BI5 is characterized in that it is easier for a player to launch a gaming ball in the second direction than in the first direction at least for a predetermined period later.

According to the gaming machine BI5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines BI1 to BI4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can enter. The second ball entry means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction can enter. The first determination condition is established based on the entry of the game ball into the first entry means, while the second determination condition is that the game ball has entered the second entry means. It is established based on. In the second privilege game, it is more advantageous for the player to launch the game ball in the second direction than in the first direction at least for a predetermined period after the privilege game is started.

As a result, in the case of the second privilege game, the game ball can be entered into the second entry means by launching the game ball in the second direction in a predetermined period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to form a state in which the second determination condition is easily satisfied after the end of the privilege game.

In the game machine BI5, the first game ball launched in the first direction is arranged at a position where the ball can enter, and the first state can be changed between a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter. The variable ball entry means and the game ball launched in the second direction are arranged at a position where the ball can enter, and the state in which the game ball can enter and the state in which the game ball is difficult to enter can be changed. The first variable ball entry means is provided with a first variable ball entry means or a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the ball entering the second variable ball entry means. 2. The game machine BI6 is characterized in that the variable ball entry means is changed so that the game ball can enter the ball during at least the predetermined period during the execution of the second privilege game.

According to the gaming machine BI6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BI5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a first variable ball entry means that can be changed between a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can enter. Has been done. A second variable ball entry means that can be changed between a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can enter. There is. A predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means. The second variable ball entry means is changed to a state in which the game ball can be entered during at least a predetermined period during the execution of the second scoring game.

As a result, during a predetermined period during the execution of the second privilege game, the player who wants to obtain the predetermined privilege can launch the game ball in the second direction. Therefore, there is an effect that a larger number of game balls can be entered into the second entry means during a predetermined period.

In the gaming machine BI6, the first variable ball-entry means is characterized in that during the execution of the first privilege game, the game ball is changed to a state in which the game ball can be entered at least during the predetermined period. Pachinko machine BI7.

According to the gaming machine BI7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BI6, during at least a predetermined period during the execution of the first scoring game, the first variable ball-entry means is variable to a state in which the game ball can be entered. Therefore, during a predetermined period during the execution of the first privilege game, the player who wants to obtain the predetermined privilege can launch the game ball in the first direction. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second ball entry means during a predetermined period during the execution of the first privilege game.

A discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the second discrimination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means in any of the gaming machines BI5 to BI7, and a discrimination information acquisition means thereof. A discrimination information storage means capable of storing the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of information is provided, and the gaming ball is continuously launched in the second direction for the predetermined period. In this case, the gaming machine BI8 is characterized in that the period is such that at least the predetermined number of information or more of the second discrimination information is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means.

According to the gaming machine BI8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines BI5 to BI7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means, the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the second discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means. The discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is stored by the discrimination information storage means up to a predetermined number of information. The predetermined period is configured to have a length in which at least a predetermined number of information or more of the second discrimination information is acquired by the discrimination information storage means when the game ball is continuously launched in the second direction.

As a result, in the case of the second privilege game, there is an effect that the discrimination information can be surely stored in the discrimination information storage means up to the upper limit number of information.

In the gaming machine BI8, the gaming ball launched in the second direction is subjected to a first flow path provided with the second ball entry means and a second flow path provided with the second variable ball entry means. The gaming machine BI9 is provided with a distribution means capable of distributing to either of the above.

According to the gaming machine BI9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BI8, the gaming ball launched in the second direction has a first flow path provided with a second entry means and a second variable entry means. Since the pachinko ball is distributed to either of the provided second flow paths by the distribution means, the gaming ball launched in the second direction is biased toward the second entry means, or conversely, the second. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the ball from being biased toward the variable ball entry means.

<Characteristic BJ group> (As a state in which a game is played in Special 1, a state in which a time reduction is easily given and a state in which a time reduction is difficult to be given are provided).
In the entry means where the game ball can enter, the first position where the game ball can enter into the entry means, and the second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. A second variable means in which the variable means and the variable means are less likely to allow the gaming ball to enter the first variable pattern and the first variable pattern based on the establishment of a specific variable condition. It is based on a variable control means that changes the variable pattern by one of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a variable pattern, a discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the ball entering the ball entering means, and the discrimination means. As a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on at least a specific determination result in the discrimination, and a game state after the execution of the privilege game by the privilege game execution means is completed. , 1 of a plurality including at least a first gaming state, a second gaming state different from the first gaming state, and a third gaming state different from both the first gaming state and the second gaming state. The game state setting means for setting the game state is provided, and the first game state and the second game state are the variable means in the first variable pattern by the variable control means rather than the third game state. BJ1 is a gaming machine characterized in that the rate at which is variable is low.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of such gaming machines are set to either a normal gaming state or an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when the hit state ends (for example, Patent Document 1: Special Patent Document 1: Kai 2006-000392).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, if the advantageous gaming state is not set when the hit state ends, the motivation of the player for the game is lowered, and it becomes easy to quit the game. There was a problem.

In particular, in a type of gaming machine that is not equipped with a so-called probability fluctuation function and is provided with only two types of gaming states, a time-saving gaming state and a normal gaming state, the normal gaming state is set after the time-saving gaming state. In that case, there is a risk that the player will be satisfied with the game because the game can be played in the short-time game state, and it will be difficult to make the player think that the game will be continued in the normal game state after that.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BJ1, the first position where the gaming ball can enter into the entry means where the gaming ball can enter, and the first position where the gaming ball can enter more difficult than the first position. The variable means is variably configured at the second position. Based on the establishment of a specific variable condition, the variable means has a first variable pattern by the variable control means and a second variable pattern in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means than the first variable pattern. It is variable by one of a plurality of variable patterns including at least one. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means at least based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means executed based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means results in a specific discrimination result. Will be done. As the game state after the execution of the privilege game by the privilege game execution means is completed, both the first game state, the second game state different from the first game state, and the first game state and the second game state are both. A gaming state of at least one of a plurality including different third gaming states is set by the gaming state setting means. The first gaming state and the second gaming state are configured so that the rate at which the variable means is changed in the first variable pattern by the variable control means is lower than that in the third gaming state.

This makes it difficult to distinguish between the first gaming state and the second gaming state from the variable ratio of the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BJ1, the first gaming state and the second gaming state are characterized in that the probability that the specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means is a common specific probability. Machine BJ2.

According to the gaming machine BJ2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BJ1, the probability that the first gaming state and the second gaming state become a specific discrimination result by discrimination by the discrimination means becomes a common specific probability. Since it is configured, there is an effect that it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to distinguish between the first gaming state and the second gaming state.

In the game machine BJ1 or BJ2, a second ball entry means different from the ball entry means, a second discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means, and the second discriminating means thereof. The second privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game based on the determination result by the second determination means is provided, and the first game state is determined by the second determination means. When the specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination, the third gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means at the first ratio, and the second gaming state is discriminated by the second discriminating means. The gaming machine BJ3 is characterized in that the third gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means at a second ratio higher than the first ratio when the specific determination result is obtained. ..

According to the gaming machine BJ3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines BJ1 or BJ2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the discrimination is executed by the second discriminating means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means different from the ball entering means. The privilege game is executed by the second privilege game execution means based on the fact that the discrimination by the second determination means yields a specific determination result. When a specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the second discrimination means in the first game state, the third game state is set at the first ratio by the game state setting means, while the second game state is set in the second game state. When a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination means, the game state setting means sets the third gaming state at a second ratio higher than the first ratio.

As a result, in the second game state, the third game state is more likely to be set as the game state after the execution of the privilege game is completed than in the first game state. There is an effect that the game can be played with a stronger expectation of becoming.

In the gaming machine BJ3, when the privilege game is executed, the third gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means at a third ratio higher than the first ratio. A gaming machine BJ4 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine BJ4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BJ3, when the privilege game is executed in the third gaming state, the third gaming state is higher than the first ratio by the gaming state setting means. Since it is set in, the privilege game and the third game state are likely to be repeated in the third game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can have a great sense of satisfaction when the third game state is reached.

In the gaming machine BJ4, in the second gaming state, a game that shifts the gaming state to the first gaming state based on the fact that at least a predetermined specific condition different from the specific determination result is satisfied. The third gaming state is provided with a state transition means, and when the privilege game is executed, either the second gaming state or the third gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. A gaming machine BJ5 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine BJ5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BJ4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the second gaming state, the gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state by the gaming state transition means based on the fact that a predetermined specific condition that is at least different from the specific determination result is satisfied. When the privilege game is executed in the third game state, either the second game state or the third game state is set by the game state setting means.

As a result, when a specific determination result is obtained in the third gaming state, the first gaming state is not set. Therefore, even after the third gaming state is completed, at least, the gaming state transition means is used. 2 It is possible to make the player think that the game will be continued until the game state is changed to the first game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the gaming machine BJ5, the gaming state transition means, as the specific condition, is based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means continuously results in a deviation discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result for a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine BJ6 is characterized by shifting from the second gaming state to the first gaming state.

According to the gaming machine BJ6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BJ5, as a specific condition, the discriminant result is different from the specific discriminant result continuously for a predetermined number of times by the discriminating means. Since the second gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state by the gaming state transition means, it is possible to pay attention to the number of consecutive times of the disengagement determination result to play the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BJ6, as the type of the second gaming state set by the gaming state setting means, the gaming state shifts based on the result of the deviation determination over the first determination by the discrimination means. The first type is shifted to the first gaming state by the means, and the first type is shifted to the first gaming state, and the deviation determination result is obtained over the discrimination of the second number of times, which is larger than the first number of times. A gaming machine BJ7 comprising: a type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least a second type shifted to one gaming state.

According to the gaming machine BJ7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BJ6, as the type of the second gaming state set by the gaming state setting means, the discriminant result is obtained over the first number of discriminations by the discriminating means. By the gaming state transition means based on the fact that the first type is shifted to the first gaming state by the gaming state transition means based on Since one type is determined by the type determination means from a plurality of types including at least the second type that is transferred to the first gaming state, it is decided that the second gaming state continues over a larger number of discriminations. You can expect it. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BJ7, it is possible to display the first effect mode on the display means when the first game state is set by the display means capable of displaying the effect mode and the game state setting means. When the second game state is set by the first display control means and the game state setting means, it is possible to cause the display means to display a second effect mode different from the first effect mode. The first effect mode is displayed from the time when the second game state is set by the second display control means and the game state setting means until the deviation determination result is obtained over the second number of times. The gaming machine BJ8, which comprises a limiting means for limiting the number of machines.

According to the gaming machine BJ8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BJ7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the first display control means displays the first effect mode to the display means. When the second game state is set by the game state setting means, the second display control means displays the display means with a second effect mode different from the first effect mode. From the time when the second game state is set by the game state setting means until the result of the deviation determination is obtained for the second number of times, the display of the first effect mode is restricted by the limiting means.

As a result, even if the deviation determination result is obtained over the first number of times after the second game state is set, the first effect mode is not displayed until the second number of times, so that the player can use the second game. It becomes difficult to distinguish whether it is the second gaming state of one type or the second gaming state of the second type. Therefore, regardless of the type of the second gaming state, it is possible to make the player think that the game is to be continued at least until the determination of the second number of times is executed, so that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved. be.

In the gaming machine BJ8, the first effect mode is displayed based on the fact that the deviation determination result is obtained over the second number of times after the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. A gaming machine BJ9 characterized by being provided with display control means.

According to the gaming machine BJ9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BJ8, the third display is based on the fact that the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means and the deviation determination result is obtained for the second number of times. Since the first effect effect mode is displayed by the control means, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the period in which it is unknown whether the player is in the first gaming state or the second gaming state is too long.

A gaming machine BJ10, characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines BJ4 to BJ9, the second ratio is higher than the third ratio.

According to the gaming machine BJ10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines BJ4 to BJ9, the second ratio is configured to be higher than the third ratio, so that a specific determination result can be obtained in the second gaming state. It has the effect of making you expect more strongly.

<Characteristic BK group> (Structure that makes it difficult for Special 2 to turn during a short time)
Based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, a first gaming state, a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and a third gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. A game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of including at least, a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, and a first method in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means. A variable means that can be changed to a position, a second position that makes it more difficult for the game ball to enter than the first position, and a variable operation of the variable means to the ball entry means in the first gaming state. Controlled by the first control that makes it difficult for the gaming ball to enter, and controlled by the second control that makes it difficult for the gaming ball to enter the ball entry means in the second gaming state, in the third gaming state. The gaming machine BK1 is characterized by comprising a variable control means controlled by a third control that makes it easier for the gaming ball to enter the ball entry means than the first control and the second control.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of such gaming machines are set to either a normal gaming state or an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when the hit state ends (for example, Patent Document 1: Special Patent Document 1: Kai 2006-000392).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, if the advantageous gaming state is not set when the hit state ends, the motivation of the player for the game is lowered, and it becomes easy to quit the game. There was a problem.

In particular, in a type of gaming machine that is not equipped with a so-called probability fluctuation function and is provided with only two types of gaming states, a time-saving gaming state and a normal gaming state, the normal gaming state is set after the time-saving gaming state. In that case, there is a risk that the player will be satisfied with the game because the game can be played in the short-time game state, and it will be difficult to make the player think that the game will be continued in the normal game state after that.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BK1, the first gaming state, the second gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the second gaming state are based on the establishment of the predetermined setting conditions. A third gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player, and one gaming state from a plurality of including at least one are set by the gaming state setting means. Variable means are variably configured in the first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and the second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. There is. The variable operation of the variable means is controlled by the variable control means in the first control that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means in the first game state, and the game ball enters the ball entry means in the second game state. Is controlled by the variable control means in the second control that makes it difficult for the ball to enter, and is controlled by the variable control means in the third control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry means in the third game state.

As a result, the degree of advantage differs between the first game state and the second game state in which control that makes it difficult to enter the ball entry means is executed, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the gaming machine BK1, the second control is characterized in that the variable means is more likely to be arranged at the first position than the first control.

According to the gaming machine 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BK1, the second control is configured so that the variable means can be more easily arranged at the first position than the first control. Although the variable means is more likely to be arranged at the first position than the first control, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel operation that makes it difficult to enter the ball entry means as in the first control.

The gaming machine BK2 includes a passing means through which the game ball can pass and a discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the passing of the passing means by the gaming ball, and the variable control means is discriminating by the discriminating means. The variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the result of the specific determination, and the first gaming state is determined by the determination means. The specific discrimination result is obtained with a probability of 1, and the second gaming state and the third gaming state are determined by the discrimination means and have a second probability higher than the first probability. The gaming machine BK3, which is characterized by having a specific determination result.

According to the gaming machine BK3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BK2. That is, the discrimination is executed by the discriminating means based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing means through which the game ball can pass. The variable control means changes the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the result of the determination by the determination means. In the first gaming state, the discrimination by the discriminating means results in a specific discrimination result with the first probability, while in the second gaming state and the third gaming state, the discrimination by the discriminating means is higher than the first probability. A specific discrimination result is obtained with a probability of 2.

As a result, it is possible to realize a novel operation in which the ease of entering the ball into the ball entry means is different even though the probability of obtaining a specific discrimination result is common between the second game state and the third game state. There is an effect.

The gaming machine BK3 is provided with a firing means capable of firing a game ball at a firing interval of a predetermined interval or longer, and the second gaming state is determined by the discriminating means after the specific discriminating result is obtained, and then the variable means is described. The period until the variable means is changed to the first position is set as the first period, and the period from when the variable means is changed to the first position to when the variable means is changed to the second position is set as the second period. The period from when the pachinko ball passes through the passing means until the passed game ball reaches the entering means is likely to be shorter than the first period. The period from when the pachinko ball passes through the passing means until the pachinko ball launched by the launching means reaches the variable means at the predetermined interval after the passing gaming ball is the first period. The gaming machine BK4 is characterized in that it tends to be longer than the sum of one period and the second period.

According to the gaming machine BK4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BK3. That is, the game ball is launched by the launching means at a firing interval of a predetermined interval or more. In the second gaming state, the period from the determination by the discrimination means to the change of the variable means to the first position is set as the first period, and the variable means is variable to the first position. The period from the time when it is changed to the time when it is changed to the second position is set as the second period. The period from when the game ball passes through the passing means until the passing game ball reaches the entering means tends to be shorter than the first period. The first period and the first period from when one game ball passes through the passing means until the game ball launched by the launching means reaches the variable means at a predetermined interval next to the passed game ball. It tends to be longer than the sum of the two periods.

As a result, even if the game ball is continuously fired at the passing means in the second game state, the game ball is made to reach the ball entry means while the variable means is changed to the first position. Can be difficult. Therefore, there is an effect that the second game state can be set to a special state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means even though the variable means is easily changed to the first position.

In the gaming machine BK4, in the third gaming state, the period from the specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means until the variable means is changed to the first position is from the first period. Is also set to a long third period, and the period from when the variable means is changed to the first position to when the variable means is changed to the second position is set to the second period, and the passage is set. The period from the passage of the pachinko ball through the means to the arrival of the passed pachinko ball at the ball entry means is longer than the third period, and the third period and the second period. The gaming machine BK5, which is characterized in that it tends to be shorter than the sum of.

According to the gaming machine BK5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BK4. That is, in the third gaming state, the period from the determination by the discrimination means to the change of the variable means to the first position is set to the third period, which is longer than the first period. The period from when the variable means is changed to the first position to when it is changed to the second position is set as the second period. The period from the passage of the game ball through the passing means to the arrival of the passed game ball at the entry means is longer than the third period, and the sum of the third period and the second period. It tends to be shorter than.

As a result, in the third game state, when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination executed based on the passage through the passing means, the game ball that has passed through the passing means is directly entered into the entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the game in the third game state can be efficiently advanced.

In any of the game machines BK1 to BK5, the second ball entry means, which is different from the ball entry means and allows the game ball to enter, and the game ball enters the ball entry means. The first discrimination means for executing the first discrimination, the second discrimination means for executing the second discrimination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means, and the first discrimination means. The game state is provided with a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination or the determination result of the first determination predetermined by the determination by the second determination means. The setting means is the first game state after the end of the privileged game executed based on the result of the first determination in the second determination in the first gaming state. As the game state after the end of the privilege game executed based on the setting of the three game states and the result of the first determination in the second determination in the second game state, the first The gaming machine BK6 is characterized in that the third gaming state is set at a second ratio higher than the ratio.

According to the gaming machine BK6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines BK1 to BK5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first determination is executed by the first determination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry means. The second determination is executed by the second determination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means different from the entry means. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the determination by the first determination means or the determination result of the first determination predetermined by the determination by the second determination means. As the game state after the end of the privilege game executed based on the result of the first determination in the second determination in the first game state, the third game state is set at the first ratio by the game state setting means. Set. As a game state after the end of the privilege game executed based on the result of the first judgment in the second judgment in the second game state, the game state is set at a second ratio higher than the first ratio. The third gaming state is set by means.

This has the effect that the game can be played with a strong expectation that a specific determination result will be obtained during the second game state.

In the gaming machine BK6, the gaming state setting means is used as a gaming state after the end of the privileged game executed based on the result of the first determination in the first determination in the third gaming state. The gaming machine BK7, characterized in that the third gaming state is determined at a third ratio higher than the first ratio.

According to the gaming machine BK7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BK6, as a gaming state after the end of the privileged game executed based on the first determination result in the first determination in the third gaming state. Since the third gaming state is determined by the gaming state setting means at a third ratio higher than the first ratio, in the third gaming state, the third gaming state is likely to occur again after the end of the privileged game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can have a great sense of satisfaction when the third game state is reached.

In the gaming machine BK7, the gaming machine BK8 is characterized in that the second ratio is higher than the third ratio.

According to the gaming machine BK8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BK7, the second ratio is configured to be higher than the third ratio, so that the first discrimination result is obtained in the second gaming state. There is an effect that the game can be played with a stronger expectation.

<Characteristic BL group> (Mechanism that can be played by a game method that makes it easy to be distributed to two routes alternately by a distribution means and a game method that makes it easy to distribute to one route)
An operating means that can be operated by the player, a launching means that can launch a gaming ball according to the operation content for the operating means, a first flow path through which the gaming ball launched by the launching means can pass, and a first channel thereof. While the second flow path different from the first flow path and the first condition that can be satisfied by performing the operation of the first operation content on the operation means are satisfied, the game ball reached is the first. The second condition that can be satisfied by performing the operation of the second operation content different from the operation of the first operation content is satisfied because it becomes easy to distribute the first flow path and the second flow path alternately. The gaming machine BL1 is provided with a distribution means that makes it easier to distribute the reached game ball to the first flow path than while the first condition is satisfied.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a distribution member for distributing the game ball to either of the two types of flow paths provided on the board surface. In the conventional game machine, the game balls that have reached the distribution member are distributed to two types of flow paths one by one, so that the game balls can flow down into the two types of flow paths in a well-balanced manner. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-231902).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, the gaming balls that have reached the distribution member are alternately distributed to the two types of flow paths regardless of the gaming method of the player, so that there is room for the skill of the player to intervene. There was a risk that the player's interest in the game would be reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BL1, the gaming ball is launched by the launching means according to the operation content for the operating means that the player can operate. A first flow path through which the game ball launched by the launching means can pass and a second flow path different from the first flow path are provided. While the first condition that can be satisfied by performing the operation of the first operation content on the operation means is satisfied, the game ball that the state of the distribution means has reached is the first flow path and the second. It becomes easy to distribute to the flow path alternately. While the second condition that can be satisfied by performing the operation of the second operation content different from the first operation content is satisfied, the state of the distribution means is from the time when the first condition is satisfied. The game ball that has reached is easily distributed to the first flow path.

As a result, it is possible to make the method of distributing the game balls by the distribution means different according to the operation content of the player, so that there is an effect that the operation of the operation means can be devised.

In the gaming machine BL1, the operation of the first operation content is executed so that the gaming ball is launched by the launching means at the first firing interval, and the operation of the second operation content is executed. The gaming machine BL2 is characterized in that the gaming ball is launched by the launching means at a second firing interval longer than the first firing interval.

According to the gaming machine BL2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BL1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the operation of the first operation content is executed, the game ball is fired at the first firing interval by the firing means. When the operation of the second operation content is executed, the game ball is launched by the launching means at a second firing interval longer than the first firing interval. As a result, it is possible to easily change the way the game balls are distributed by the distribution means simply by changing the firing interval, which has the effect of enhancing the convenience of the player.

In the gaming machine BL2, the distribution means has at least a first movable range in which the reached game ball is easily distributed to the first flow path and a second movable range in which the reached game ball is easily distributed to the second flow path. The distribution means is configured to be movable in a specific movable range including the above-mentioned second. It is configured to be easy to move in the movable range, and to be easily moved to the first movable range by distributing the game ball to the second flow path in a state of being arranged in the second movable range. A gaming machine BL3 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine BL3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BL2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the distribution means can move a specific movable range including at least a first movable range in which the reached game ball can be easily distributed to the first flow path and a second movable range in which the reached game ball can be easily distributed to the second flow path. do. By distributing the game ball to the first flow path while being arranged in the first movable range, the distribution means can be easily moved to the second movable range. Further, by distributing the game ball to the second flow path while being arranged in the second movable range, the distribution means can be easily moved to the first movable range.

This has the effect that the game balls can continuously reach the distribution means to alternately distribute the game balls to the first flow path and the second flow path.

In the gaming machine BL3, when the gaming ball is distributed to the first flow path and moved within the second movable range, the distribution means is shorter than the length of the second firing interval and is the first. BL4 is a gaming machine characterized in that it can move up to the first movable range in a period longer than the length of the firing interval of.

According to the gaming machine BL4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BL3, when the gaming ball is distributed to the first flow path and the sorting means moves within the second movable range, it is shorter than the length of the second firing interval. Moreover, since the sorting means can move to the first movable range in a period longer than the length of the first firing interval, when the gaming ball is continuously fired at a firing interval equal to or longer than the second firing interval, the sorting means is distributed. There is an effect that the movable range of the means can be surely set to the first movable range.

In the gaming machine BL4, the distribution means becomes easy to move from the first movable range to the second movable range due to the mass of the game ball distributed to the first flow path, and is distributed to the second flow path. The gaming machine BL5 is characterized in that it is easy to move from the second movable range to the first movable range depending on the mass of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine BL5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BL4, the mass of the gaming ball distributed to the first flow path makes it easier for the distribution means to move from the first movable range to the second movable range. Since the mass of the gaming balls distributed to the two flow paths makes it easier for the distribution means to move from the second movable range to the first movable range, it is possible to eliminate the need for a power source for moving the distribution means. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine BL4 or BL5, the sorting means is configured so that the predetermined position in the first movable range becomes the initial arrangement, and returns to the predetermined position when the gaming ball does not reach the predetermined period. The gaming machine BL6, which is characterized in that it is configured in.

According to the gaming machine BL6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BL4 or BL5, the sorting means is configured so that the predetermined position in the first movable range is the initial arrangement, and the gaming ball is used as the sorting means. On the other hand, since the distribution means is configured to return to the predetermined position when the predetermined period is not reached, the distribution means is maintained in the first movable range unless the game balls are distributed. Therefore, there is an effect that the game ball that first reaches the distribution means can be reliably distributed to the first flow path.

In any of the game machines BL1 to BL6, a passing means provided at a position where the game balls distributed to the second flow path can pass, a game ball flowing down the first flow path, and the second flow path. A ball-entry means provided at a position where a game ball flowing down a flow path can enter, a first position where a game ball can enter the ball-entry means, and a position before the first position. A variable means that can be changed to a second position that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the entry ball means, a discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the passage of the passing means by the game ball, and a discrimination means thereof. BL7 is a gaming machine comprising: a variable control means for changing the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the result of the determination according to the above.

According to the gaming machine BL7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines BL1 to BL6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the passing means is provided at a position where the game balls distributed in the second flow path can pass. A ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the first flow path and the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter. The variable means can be changed to the first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and the second position where the game ball becomes more difficult to enter the ball entry means than the first position. Has been done. Discrimination by the discriminating means is executed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing means. The variable control means changes the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the result of the determination by the determination means.

As a result, the game can be performed by paying attention to the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BL7, based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, the first gaming state, the second gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the second gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. The variable control means includes, in the first gaming state, a gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including at least a third gaming state. In the first variable mode in which the ball is difficult to enter, the variable means is controlled to be variable, and in the second gaming state, the game ball is difficult to enter into the ball entry means. The variable means is controlled to be variable, and in the third variable mode, the game ball is more likely to enter the ball entry means than the first variable mode and the second variable mode. The gaming machine BL8, characterized in that the variable means is controlled so as to be variable.

According to the gaming machine BL8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BL7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the establishment of the predetermined setting conditions, the first gaming state, the second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the third that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. A gaming state and one gaming state from a plurality including at least are set by the gaming state setting means. In the first game state, the variable control means is controlled so that the variable means is variable in the first variable mode in which the game ball is difficult to enter into the ball entry means. In the second gaming state, the variable control means is controlled so that the variable means can be changed in the second variable mode in which it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means. In the third game state, the variable control means is controlled so that the variable means is variable in the third variable mode in which the game ball is more likely to enter the ball entering means than in the first variable mode and the second variable mode.

As a result, since a plurality of game states having different ease of entering the ball are provided, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine BL8, the first gaming state is the specific discrimination result with the first probability by the discriminating means, and the second gaming state is higher than the first probability by the discriminating means. The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific discrimination result is obtained with a high second probability, and the three gaming states are those in which the discrimination means results in the specific discrimination result with the second probability. BL9.

According to the gaming machine BL9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BL8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the first gaming state, a specific discrimination result is obtained with a first probability by the discrimination means. In the second gaming state, a specific discrimination result is obtained with a second probability higher than the first probability by the discrimination means. In the third gaming state, a specific discrimination result is obtained with a second probability by the discrimination means.

As a result, although the probability of a specific discrimination result is common between the second gaming state and the third gaming state, a novel operation of making the ease of entering the ball into the ball entry means different is realized. It has the effect of being able to.

<Characteristic BM group> (It is more advantageous to get out of the time saving)
A discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, a privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game advantageous to the player based on at least a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means, and a privilege game execution means thereof. One of a plurality of gaming states including at least one of the first gaming state and the second gaming state which is more advantageous than the first gaming state as the gaming state after the execution of the privileged game by the privileged game executing means is completed. In a state where the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means for setting the gaming state of the above and the gaming state setting means, a specific transition condition at least different from the end of the execution of the privileged game is satisfied. The gaming machine BM1 is provided with a gaming state transition means for transitioning from the first gaming state to the second gaming state.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of such gaming machines are set to either a normal gaming state or an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when the hit state ends (for example, Patent Document 1: Special Patent Document 1: Kai 2006-000392).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the normal gaming state is set when the hit state ends, the disadvantageous state continues at least until the next hit state, so that when the normal gaming state is reached. There was a problem that it was not possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, in the conventional gaming machine, in addition to the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state, a third gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state and more disadvantageous than the advantageous gaming state is provided. After the hit state ends, by configuring so that either the advantageous gaming state or the third gaming state is set, the game is attempted to continue the game until at least the third gaming state ends. There are also things that can make people think. However, in such a gaming machine, when the lottery for a predetermined number of times is completed in the third gaming state, it is normal to shift from the third gaming state to the normal gaming state, so that the gaming machine shifts to the normal gaming state. After that, there was a problem that it became difficult to improve the interest of the player.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BM1, the privilege game execution means is advantageous to the player, at least based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means executed based on the establishment of the discrimination condition yields a specific discrimination result. The game is executed. As a game state after the execution of the privilege game by the privilege game execution means is completed, one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous than the first game state. The game state is set by the game state setting means. From the first game state to the second game state based on the fact that a specific transition condition at least different from the end of the execution of the privilege game is satisfied while the first game state is set by the game state setting means. It is transferred by the game state transition means.

As a result, the game can be performed with the expectation that a specific transition condition will be satisfied in the first game state, so that there is an effect that the game in the first game state can be suppressed from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine BM1, the specific transition condition is a discrimination by the discriminating means executed after being set to the first gaming state, a predetermined specific number of times, and a deviation discriminating result different from the specific discriminating result. The gaming machine BM2, which is characterized in that it is established when becomes.

According to the gaming machine BM2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BM1, the discrimination by the discrimination means executed after being set to the first gaming state is a predetermined number of times and a deviation discrimination different from the specific discrimination result. Since a specific transition condition is satisfied when a result is obtained, in the first gaming state, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which each time the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed, it is expected that the discrimination result will be out of alignment. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine BM1 or BM2, the ball-entry means on which the game ball can enter, the first position where the game ball can enter the ball-entry means, and the ball-entry means from the first position. A variable means that can be changed to a second position where the game ball is difficult to enter, and a first variable control that makes it easy for the variable means to be changed to the first position in the first game state are executed, and the first variable control is executed. 2 In the gaming state, the variable control means is provided with a variable control executing means for executing a second variable control in which the variable means is less likely to be changed to the first position than in the first gaming state, and the discriminating condition is set to the ball entry means. The gaming machine BM3 is characterized in that it is established based on the entry of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine BM3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BM1 or BM2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable means is variable between the first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and the second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter the ball entry means than the first position. In the first gaming state, the first variable control that makes it easier for the variable means to be changed to the first position is executed by the variable control executing means, and in the second gaming state, the variable means is changed to the first position rather than the first gaming state. The second variable control, which is difficult to perform, is executed by the variable control executing means. The discrimination condition is established based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry means.

This has the effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the variable means will be variable to the first position.

In the gaming machine BM3, the gaming state setting means is among a plurality of gaming states including at least the first gaming state, the second gaming state, and the third gaming state which is more advantageous than the second gaming state. 1 is to set the game state, and the variable control executing means is easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry means in the third game state than the first variable control and the second variable control. The gaming machine BM4, characterized in that it executes the third variable control.

According to the gaming machine BM4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BM3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, one of a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state, a second gaming state, and a third gaming state that is more advantageous than the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. .. In the third game state, the variable control executing means executes the third variable control, which makes it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entering means than the first variable control and the second variable control.

As a result, in the third gaming state, the discrimination by the discriminating means is easily executed, so that the game can be efficiently performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the game will be in the third game state.

In the gaming machine BM4, when the specific determination result is obtained in the first gaming state, the gaming state setting means has the third gaming state at the first ratio as the gaming state after the privileged game is completed. Is set, and when the specific determination result is obtained in the second gaming state, the third gaming state is set at a second ratio higher than the first ratio. Game machine BM5.

According to the gaming machine BM5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BM4, when a specific determination result is obtained in the first gaming state, the first ratio is determined by the gaming state setting means as the gaming state after the privileged game is completed. On the other hand, when a specific determination result is obtained in the second gaming state, the third gaming state is set at a second ratio higher than the first ratio, so that the second gaming state is set. When a specific determination result is obtained in the gaming state, it becomes easier to set the third gaming state as the gaming state after the end of the privileged game. Therefore, in the first gaming state, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the game is played with the expectation that a specific transition condition is satisfied, rather than a specific determination result.

In the gaming machine BM5, the gaming state setting means sets the third gaming state at a third ratio higher than the first ratio as the gaming state after the end of the privileged game executed in the third gaming state. A gaming machine BM6 characterized by being set.

According to the gaming machine BM6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BM5, the gaming state after the end of the privileged game executed in the third gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means at a third ratio higher than the first ratio. Since the third gaming state is set, in the third gaming state, it is easy to enter the third gaming state again after the end of the privileged game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be greatly satisfied by being in the third gaming state.

In any of the gaming machines BM1 to BM6, a second privileged game executing means for executing the privileged game based on the entry area where the game ball can enter and the game ball entering the entry area. The gaming machine BM7, which is characterized by being provided with.

According to the gaming machine BM7, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines BM1 to BM6, the privileged game is executed by the second privileged game executing means based on the fact that the gaming ball enters the entry area. , It is possible to play the game by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the ball entry area. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic BN group> (Small hits that tend to be disadvantageous after the end of small hits if you win during the short time)
A discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a first advantageous game execution that executes a first advantageous game that is advantageous to the player based on the first discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means. As the type of the first advantageous game executed by the means and the first advantageous game executing means, one of a plurality of types including at least a first type and a second type different from the first type. A second discriminating result that is different from the first discriminating result in the discriminating by the discriminating means and the type determining means for determining the type of the first is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous game. 2 As a game state after the execution of the second advantageous game by the second advantageous game execution means for executing the advantageous game and the execution of the second advantageous game by the second advantageous game execution means is completed, the first game state and the first game state thereof. Is a discrimination between a gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from a plurality of different second gaming states including at least one and the discriminating means executed in the first gaming state, other than the second discriminating result. If the predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the game state ending means for terminating the first gaming state is provided, and the specific condition is determined by the discrimination means. The first discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination means, and the first discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination means, and the first discrimination result is obtained by the classification determination means, as compared with the case where the first type is determined by the type determination means. The gaming machine BN1 is characterized in that it is configured so that it is easier to establish when two types are determined.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has an entry port that allows the ball to enter when the electric accessory is opened (or movable), and the game ball enters the entry port. A game ball that has entered the inside of the V-winning device that is opened during a specific game (small hit game, etc.) executed based on the above-mentioned has a specific area (winning switch, etc.) provided in the V-winning device. A pachinko machine has been proposed that enables a privileged game (big hit game, etc.) to be given to a player by passing through the pachinko machine (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-010741).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, even if the small hit game is executed, the privilege game is not executed unless the game ball can be put into the inside of the V winning device. Therefore, the game is played in the V winning device. If the ball could not be inserted, there was a risk that the player's interest in the game would be impaired.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BN1, the first advantageous game that is advantageous to the player is the first based on the fact that the first discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means executed based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. It is executed by the advantageous game execution means. As the type of the first advantageous game executed by the first advantageous game execution means, one is selected from a plurality of types including at least a first type and a second type different from the first type by the type determining means. The type is determined. Based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result, the second advantageous game execution means executes the second advantageous game that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous game. To. As a game state after the execution of the second advantageous game by the second advantageous game execution means is completed, a game is selected from a plurality of states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state. The game state of 1 is set by the state setting means. When the discrimination by the discrimination means executed in the first gaming state results in a discrimination result other than the second discrimination result, if a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the first gaming state is the gaming state ending means. Is terminated by. The discrimination by the discrimination means results in the first discrimination result, and the discrimination by the discrimination means results in the first discrimination result, and the classification by the classification means determines the second type, as compared with the case where the type determination means determines the first type. Is configured so that the specific condition is more likely to be satisfied when is determined.

This has the effect that when the first determination result is obtained, the game can be performed with the expectation that the first type will be determined.

In the gaming machine BN1, the second gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the gaming state ending means is the first gaming state if the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine BN2, which is characterized by shifting from the second gaming state to the second gaming state.

According to the gaming machine BN2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BN1. That is, the second gaming state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. If the specific condition is satisfied, the game state ending means shifts from the first game state to the second game state.

As a result, it is possible to play the game in the first game state with the expectation that a specific condition is satisfied, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine BN1 or BN2 includes a ball-entry area in which a game ball can enter based on the execution of the first advantageous game, and the second advantageous game execution means plays a game in the ball-entry area. The second advantageous game is executed based on the ball entering, and the gaming state ending means is the first number of times the first advantageous game of the first type is performed in the first gaming state of 1. Based on the execution, the first gaming state is terminated, and in the first gaming state of 1, the first advantageous game of the second type is executed a second number of times less than the first number of times. The gaming machine BN3, characterized in that the first gaming state is terminated based on the above.

According to the gaming machine BN3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines BN1 or BN2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second advantageous game is executed by the second advantageous game executing means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the entry area where the ball can be entered based on the execution of the first advantageous game. .. The first game state is terminated by the game state end means based on the fact that the first advantageous game of the first type is executed the first time in the first game state of 1, while the first game state of 1 is the first. The first gaming state is terminated by the gaming state ending means based on the fact that the first advantageous game of the two types is executed the second number of times less than the first number of times.

As a result, during the execution of the first advantageous game, the game ball is entered into the entry area to execute the second advantageous game, or the specific condition is satisfied without entering the entry area. There is an effect that it is possible to realize playability that allows the player to select whether to expect or not.

In the gaming machine BN3, the gaming state setting means executes the second advantageous game based on the fact that the gaming ball enters the ball entry area during the execution of the first advantageous game of the second type. In this case, the gaming machine BN4 is characterized in that the first gaming state is determined as the gaming state after the end of the second advantageous game.

According to the gaming machine BN4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BN3, the second advantageous game is executed based on the fact that the gaming ball enters the entry area during the execution of the first advantageous game of the second type. In this case, since the first game state is set by the game state setting means as the game state after the end of the second advantageous game, it is determined whether the first advantageous game is the first type or the second type. Select whether to predict more seriously and let the pachinko ball enter the entry area to execute the second advantageous game, or to expect that a specific condition is satisfied without entering the entry area. Can be made to. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BN4, the gaming state setting means executes the second advantageous game based on the fact that the gaming ball enters the ball entry area during the execution of the first advantageous game of the first type. In this case, the gaming machine BN5 is characterized in that the second gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the second advantageous game.

According to the gaming machine BN5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BN4, the second advantageous game is executed based on the fact that the gaming ball enters the entry area during the execution of the first advantageous game of the first type. In this case, the second advantageous game is set as the game state after the end of the second advantageous game by the game state setting means. Therefore, if the first advantageous game is the first type, the ball is not allowed to enter the ball entry area. As a result, there is a possibility that a specific condition is satisfied and the game shifts to the second gaming state. On the other hand, in the case of the second type, the second advantageous game is executed by entering the ball into the ball entry area, and further, the second advantageous game is executed. 2 Move to the gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the type of the first advantageous game can be predicted more seriously.

In the gaming machine BN5, a common specific effect is executed regardless of the type of the first advantageous game determined by the type determination means based on the determination result of the first determination by the discrimination means. BN6 is a gaming machine characterized by being provided with a specific effect executing means.

According to the gaming machine BN6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BN5, it does not depend on the type of the first advantageous game determined by the type determining means based on the first discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means. Since a common specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means, it becomes difficult to distinguish between the first type and the second type from the effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to predict more seriously whether it is the first type or the second type.

In any of the gaming machines BN1 to BN6, the gaming state setting means is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, the second gaming state, the first gaming state, and the second gaming state. The game state is set by setting one of a plurality of game states including at least three game states, and the game state setting means is a game after the second advantageous game executed in the first game state is completed. As the state, the third gaming state is set at the first ratio, and the gaming state after the second advantageous game executed in the second gaming state is completed is a second higher than the first ratio. The gaming machine BN7, characterized in that the third gaming state is set at the ratio of.

According to the gaming machine BN7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines BN1 to BN6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, one of a plurality of game state setting means including at least a first game state, a second game state, and a third game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state and the second game state. The game state is set. As the gaming state after the second advantageous game executed in the first gaming state is completed, the third gaming state is set at the first ratio by the gaming state setting means, while the third gaming state is set in the second gaming state. As the gaming state after the second advantageous game is completed, the third gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means at a second ratio higher than the first ratio.

This has the effect that the game can be performed with a stronger expectation that the second advantageous game will be executed in the second game state.

In the gaming machine BN7, the gaming state setting means has a third ratio higher than the first ratio as a gaming state after the second advantageous game executed in the third gaming state is completed. 3 A gaming machine BN8 characterized by setting a gaming state.

According to the gaming machine BN8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BN7, the gaming state after the second advantageous game executed in the third gaming state is completed is higher than the first ratio by the gaming state setting means. Since the third gaming state is set at a ratio of 3, when the third gaming state is reached, the second advantageous gaming and the third gaming state are likely to be repeated. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be more satisfied when the third game state is reached.

In the gaming machine BN8, the gaming machine BN9 is characterized in that the second ratio is higher than the third ratio.

According to the gaming machine BN9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BN8, the ratio is higher than the ratio of the second ratio tooth third, so that when the second gaming state is reached, the second advantageous game is played. There is an effect that the game can be played with a stronger expectation that is executed.

<Characteristic CA group> (Invincible zone for fall lottery)
An acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, a discrimination means capable of performing discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means, and a discrimination means thereof. A display means for displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result by the above, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and a first method based on the discrimination result. A state setting means capable of setting at least one of a gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the storage means before the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means. In a gaming machine having a pre-discrimination means capable of executing discrimination based on the information stored in the computer, the gaming machine has an effect executing means capable of performing an effect during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed. The effect executing means is configured to be able to execute a period effect corresponding to a specific period in which the second gaming state is continuously set in response to the result of the determination by the prior determination means. A game machine CA1 characterized by.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. By setting a game state that is advantageous to the player, such as increasing the lottery probability, the interest in switching to the game state that is advantageous to the player and the continuous setting of the advantageous game state. It has been proposed that the game is configured so that the interest of the game is improved by the expectation of the above (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). In such a gaming machine, by utilizing a configuration in which a gaming state advantageous to the player is set, the gaming state advantageous to the player is continuously set by the player at an accurate and early timing, or is disadvantageous. There has been a demand for a gaming machine that can further improve the interest of gaming by suggesting information related to switching to the gaming state. In the present invention, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the period in which the game state advantageous to the player is set is determined in advance, and the effect based on the information on the determination result is executed. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can improve the interest.

According to the gaming machine CA1, the period effect corresponding to the specific period is executed according to the determination result of the pre-determination means, so that the period in which the second gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set by the executed period effect. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

The gaming machine CA1 is characterized in that the period effect is executed corresponding to a period in which the identification information of 1 is dynamically displayed.

According to the gaming machine CA2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CA1, the period effect is executed corresponding to the dynamic display period of the identification information of 1, so that the period during which the identification information of 1 is dynamically displayed is The content of the period effect is valid (for example, when the period effect suggesting that the setting of the second gaming state is continued is executed, the identification information of 1 being executed is dynamically displayed until the end of the period. , It is possible to recognize at an early stage that the second gaming state is continuously set), which has the effect of making it easy to understand.

In the gaming machines CA1 or CA2, when the second gaming state is set, the state setting means is before the dynamic display of the identification information is started based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means. CA3 is a gaming machine that is configured to be capable of setting the first gaming state.

In the gaming machine CA3, since the second gaming state is set before the dynamic display of the identification information is started, the player determines whether the gaming state has been changed each time the identification information is dynamically displayed. It has the effect of making you interested in.

<Characteristic CB group> (New game characteristics based on the number of counts in the normal map)
The first information based on the first ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, the second entering means different from the first entering means, and the game ball entering the first entering means. The first information acquisition means capable of acquiring the second information, and the second information acquisition means capable of acquiring the second information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means. The first determination is executed based on the storage means in which the first information and the second information are stored, and the first information stored in the storage means, and the second information is based on the second information. The first privilege can be given based on the discrimination means capable of performing the discrimination and the result of the first discrimination by the discrimination means being a specific first discrimination result, and the result of the second discrimination is specific. In a gaming machine having a privilege granting means capable of granting the second privilege different from the first privilege based on the second determination result, a specific entry ball into which a game ball can enter is possible. The flow path switching means includes a means and a flow path switching means capable of switching a flow path through which the game ball flows down according to the number of game balls that have entered the specific ball entry means. The first guidance state for guiding the game ball to the first ball entry means and the second guidance state for guiding the game ball to the second ball entry means can be set by switching the flow path. The gaming machine CB1 characterized by being a machine.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. There are multiple entrances on the surface of the game board that allow the game balls to enter, and the game machines that have improved the interest of the game by making the entrances for the balls different depending on the flow path through which the game balls flow down. It has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233181). In such a gaming machine, the flow path through which the gaming ball flows tends to be constant, and there is a problem that the gaming becomes monotonous. In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, by switching the flow path through which the pachinko ball flows according to the conditions, and by switching the entrance for the pachinko ball to enter, a wide variety of pachinko balls can be entered. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the game from becoming monotonous by allowing the ball to enter the ball mouth and suppressing the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

According to the gaming machine CB1, the first guidance state and the second guidance state are switched depending on the number of game balls that have entered the specific entry means, so that the guidance state is determined by the number of game balls that are entered into the specific entry means. There is an effect that the fun of the game can be improved by controlling the ball-entry means for entering the ball by arbitrarily switching.

In the gaming machine CB1, a variable means that can be changed into an open state in which a game ball is easy to enter into a specific ball entry means and a closed state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the open state, and the variable means thereof. It has a variable control means that changes from the closed state to the open state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the variable control means is variable during a period in which a first number or more of balls can be entered into the specific ball entry means. It is possible to switch between a first opening that changes the means to the open state and a second opening that changes the variable means to the open state during a period in which it is difficult for the first number to enter the ball. The gaming machine CB2, which is characterized by being the one that has been used.

According to the gaming machine CB2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CB1, it is possible to switch between a state in which the first number or more of balls can be entered and a state in which it is difficult to enter the ball. It has the effect of being able to control the number.

A gaming machine CB3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine CB2, the variable control means executes the first opening when the second induction state is set.

According to the gaming machine CB3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine CB2, when the second guidance state is set, it is possible for the player to enter the first number or more into the specific entry means. There is an effect that the guidance state can be intentionally switched easily.

<Characteristic CC group> (Control of count number in normal map)
The first information based on the first ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, the second entering means different from the first entering means, and the game ball entering the first entering means. The first information acquisition means capable of acquiring the second information, and the second information acquisition means capable of acquiring the second information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means. The first determination is executed based on the storage means in which the first information and the second information are stored, and the first information stored in the storage means, and the second information is based on the second information. The first privilege can be given based on the discrimination means capable of executing the discrimination and the result of the first discrimination by the discrimination means being a specific first discrimination result, and the result of the second discrimination is specific. A specific entry ball to which a game ball can enter in a gaming machine having a privilege granting means capable of granting the second privilege different from the first privilege based on the second determination result. It has means, and has means for changing the acquisition ratio, which changes the acquisition ratio of the first information and the second information according to the number of game balls that have entered the specific ball entry means. The gaming machine CC1 featuring.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. There are multiple entrances on the surface of the game board that allow the game balls to enter, and the game machines that have improved the interest of the game by making the entrances for the balls different depending on the flow path through which the game balls flow down. It has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233181). In such a gaming machine, the flow path through which the gaming ball flows tends to be constant, and there is a problem that the gaming becomes monotonous. In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, by switching the flow path through which the pachinko ball flows according to the conditions, and by switching the entrance for the pachinko ball to enter, a wide variety of pachinko balls can be entered. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the game from becoming monotonous by allowing the ball to enter the ball mouth and suppressing the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

According to the gaming machine CC1, since the acquisition ratios of the first information and the second information can be different depending on the number of gaming balls that have entered the specific ball entry means, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine CC1, a variable means that can be changed into an open state in which the game ball easily enters the specific ball entry means and a closed state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the open state, and the variable means thereof. It has a variable control means that changes from the closed state to the open state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the variable control means is variable during a period in which a first number or more of balls can be entered into the specific ball entry means. It is possible to switch between a first opening that changes the means to the open state and a second opening that changes the variable means to the open state during a period in which it is difficult for the first number to enter the ball. The gaming machine CC2, which is characterized by being a pachinko machine.

According to the gaming machine CC2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CC1, it is possible to switch between a state in which the first number or more of balls can be entered and a state in which it is difficult to enter the ball. It has the effect of being able to control the number.

In the gaming machine CC2, the variable means also regulates the entry of a gaming ball into the first entry means or the second entry means when the variable means is in the open state. Game machine CC3.

According to the gaming machine CC3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CC2, when the variable means is in the open state, the entry of the gaming ball into the first entry means or the second entry means is restricted. Therefore, the entry of the game ball into the specific entry means and the entry of the game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means occur at the same time, which suppresses the execution of an incomprehensible game. It has the effect of being able to.

<Characteristic CD group> (Preliminary development control when the symbol is stopped)
In order to show a specific discrimination result by the discrimination means capable of executing a predetermined discrimination, the display control means for dynamically displaying the discrimination information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means and then stopping the display, and the display control means. In a gaming machine having a privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to a player when the identification information is stopped and displayed, the display control means dynamically displays a plurality of display modes as the identification information. A voice control means for displaying and stopping and displaying the plurality of display modes at different timings, and capable of outputting voice based on the stop display of the display mode by the display control means, and a voice control means thereof. It has a voice information determining means for determining the voice information output by the voice output means from a plurality of voice information, and a regulating means capable of regulating the type of the voice information determined by the voice information determining means. A game machine CD1 characterized by this.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. When notifying the lottery result, it has been proposed that a plurality of symbol rows are variablely displayed so that the lottery result is notified by a combination of the stopped and displayed symbols (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013). -090780 (Ab.). In addition, some of the above-mentioned gaming machines are configured to give sharpness to the effect of notifying the lottery result by outputting a sound effect when a plurality of variablely displayed symbol rows are stopped and displayed. .. However, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous due to repeated monotonous sound effects, and the player gets tired of the game. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game in which a player can be prevented from getting tired of the game at an early stage by suppressing repeated output of monotonous sound effects in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine CD1, by restricting the type of voice information determined by the voice information determining means, the type of voice information can be easily determined as intended at the time of design, and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. It has the effect of suppressing defects.

The gaming machine CD1 has a storage means capable of storing the voice information determined by the voice information determining means as history information, and the regulation means corresponds to the history information stored in the storage means. The gaming machine CD2, which regulates the type of the voice information determined by the voice information determining means.

According to the game machine CD2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine CD1, the determined voice information is stored in the storage means as history information, and the voice determined by the voice information determining means corresponding to the stored history information. By restricting the type of information, it is possible to control the voice information determined in response to the history information, and it is possible to make the type of the determined voice information suitable.

The gaming machine CD3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine CD2, the regulating means regulates that the same type as the type of the voice information stored before a predetermined number of times is determined.

According to the gaming machine CD3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine CD2, it is possible to suppress the continuous determination of the same type of voice information, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the game becomes monotonous.

The gaming machine CD4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine CD1 or CD2, the regulating means regulates the determination of the type of the voice information determined a specific number of times or more in a predetermined period.

According to the gaming machine CD4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CD1 or CD2, it is possible to suppress a problem that the same voice information type is excessively determined in a predetermined period, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the game becomes monotonous. There is an effect.

In any of the gaming machines CD1 to CD4, the effect executed by the effect executing means includes a symbol effect in which a plurality of identification symbols are dynamically displayed, and the first effect is the plurality of identifications. Among the symbols, the gaming machine CD5 is characterized in that the identification symbol of 1 is stopped and displayed.

According to the gaming machine CD5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines CD1 to CD4, various sounds are output when the identification symbol is stopped and displayed, so that various effects when the identification symbol is stopped and displayed are output. It is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

A determination means capable of executing a determination in any of the gaming machines CD1 to CD5, and a privilege granting means capable of imparting a privilege advantageous to the player based on the determination result by the determination means being a specific determination result. The gaming machine CD6, wherein the voice information determining means can determine the voice information based on a determination result by the determination means.

According to the gaming machine CD6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines CD1 to CD5, the determination result can be identified by the voice output corresponding to the first effect, so that the output voice can be identified. It has the effect of making the game interesting to the type.

The game machine CD6 has an acquisition means capable of acquiring information and an information storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the determination means is the information stored in the information storage means. The gaming machine has a pre-determination means that executes a pre-determination prior to the determination means based on the information stored in the information storage means. The gaming machine CD7 is characterized in that the voice information determining means is configured to be able to determine the voice information based on the preliminary determination result by the prior determination means.

According to the gaming machine CD7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine CD6, the result of the preliminary determination can be identified by the type of the output voice, so that the type of the output voice can be interested. It has the effect of being able to do it.

<Characteristic CE group> (Pixel number switching control depending on the display content)
The amount of data in at least two or more of the display information determining means for determining the display information of the display mode to be displayed by the display means from the plurality of display information and the display information determined by the display information determining means. It has a data amount discriminating means for discriminating the corresponding information, and a variable control means for variablely controlling the display mode to be displayed on the display means based on the discriminating result determined by the data amount discriminating means. The game machine CE1 is characterized in that the display information determining means determines the display information at at least two or more timings.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. As an effect for notifying the lottery result, a display device configured to display various images and moving images has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). However, since the notice display mode is randomly displayed, there is a problem that the displayed image data becomes excessive and the addition to the display control or the like increases. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game capable of reducing a control load in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine CE1, since the display mode displayed is variably controlled based on the result determined by the data amount determination means, it is possible to perform display control according to the data amount, and the control load can be reduced. It has the effect of being able to reduce it.

In the gaming machine CE1, the data amount determining means determines whether or not a specific condition is satisfied based on the total value of the information corresponding to the data amount of the display mode displayed in the predetermined first period. The gaming machine CE2 featuring.

According to the gaming machine CE2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CE1, it is determined whether or not the specific condition is satisfied based on the total value of the data amount of the display mode displayed in the predetermined first period. It is possible to suppress the problem that the control load increases in.

In the gaming machine CE1 or CE2, when the determination means capable of executing the determination, the effect execution means capable of executing the effect based on the determination result of the determination means, and the specific effect are executed by the effect execution means. It has a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to a player, and the display information determining means determines a display mode displayed in the effect executed by the effect executing means. Game machine CE3.

According to the gaming machine CE3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine CE1 or CE2, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the effect notified by the determination result cannot be stably executed due to an increase in the amount of data.

In any of the gaming machines CE1 to CE3, the display mode displayed by the display mode determining means is such that status information corresponding to the data amount is set as information corresponding to the data amount. The gaming machine CE4 is characterized in that the data amount determining means determines whether or not the total value to which the status information is added is equal to or greater than a predetermined value.

According to the gaming machine CE4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines CE1 to CE3, the effect that the data amount can be easily determined by setting the status information corresponding to the data amount is set. be.

In any of the gaming machines CE1 to CE4, the variable control means corresponds to the display information determined by the display information determining means so that the total value of the data amount of the display mode displayed on the display means is reduced. CE5 is a gaming machine characterized in that the display mode is variable.

According to the gaming machine CE5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines CE1 to CE4, the amount of data is suppressed, so that there is an effect that the control load can be reduced. The game machine CE5 is characterized in that the variable control means sets a display mode in which the number of pixels of the display mode corresponding to at least one display information determined by the display information determination means is reduced. Game machine CE6.

According to the gaming machine CE6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CE5, the amount of data can be suppressed by setting a small number of pixels in the existing display mode, and the problem that the display data becomes excessive can be suppressed. There is.

<Characteristic CF group> (Variable effect when the button is pressed)
A discrimination means capable of performing discrimination, a display means for displaying identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means. , The dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the identification information for showing the specific discrimination result on the display means are displayed. In this case, in a gaming machine having a privilege granting means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player, an operation that can be operated by the player as a dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. An operation dynamic display mode in which the display mode is changed by operating the means is set, and the validity period setting means for setting the validity period during which the operation on the operation means is valid, and the validity period The gaming machine CF1 characterized by having a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect based on the remaining period.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. As an effect for notifying the lottery result, a method has been proposed in which the player can directly participate in the game by changing the effect by operating an operation means that can be operated by the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). However, since the method such as the timing of operating the operating means and the period of operation is not fixed depending on the player, there is a problem that the interest in executing the production is lowered. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machines to provide gaming machines that can improve the interest.

According to the gaming machine CF1, when the operating means is operated, a specific effect can be executed based on the remaining period of the valid period, so that the valid period can be set long and the game can be played widely. Even if a person is configured to be able to operate the operating means, a specific effect is executed based on the remaining period of the valid period, so that various effects can be executed, and the interest of the game can be enjoyed. It has the effect of being able to improve.

In the gaming machine CF1, the suggestion mode setting means for setting the suggestion mode suggesting that the operation means is operated a plurality of times within the validity period set by the validity period setting means, and the suggestion mode setting means for setting the suggestion mode setting means. The effect period setting means for setting a predetermined effect period within the valid period for the suggestion mode corresponding to the operation of 1 and the remaining period of the effect period set by the effect period setting means. CF2 is a gaming machine having a notification means capable of notifying the remaining period mode indicating the above.

According to the gaming machine CF2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CF1, it is possible to make the player think that the validity period is set for each of the multiple operations, so that the multiple operations can be performed. It has the effect of being able to inform you of what to do in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the gaming machine CF1 or CF2, the identification information is configured by combining a plurality of identification symbols, and the dynamic display means dynamically displays the plurality of identification symbols, respectively, to show the discrimination result. The plurality of identification symbols are stopped in combination, and the operation dynamic display mode is displayed in a specific mode by operating the operation means for at least a part of the plurality of identification symbols. When the remaining period is equal to or longer than a predetermined period as the specific effect, the specific effect executing means is configured to follow the dynamically displayed identification information. The gaming machine CF3, characterized in that it executes an effect corresponding to the information reflected in the dynamic display of the identification information at which the dynamic display is started.

According to the gaming machine CF3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CF1 or CF2, by operating the operating means so that the remaining period is equal to or longer than the predetermined period, the effect is reflected during the dynamic display after the dynamic display. By executing the effect to be performed, there is an effect that the operating means can be enthusiastically operated in a short period of time.

<Characteristic CG group> (3 operations)
It has an operation means that can be operated by the player and an operation effect setting means that can set an operation effect whose effect mode changes based on the operation of the operation means, and is set by the operation effect setting means. In the operation effect that can be performed, a plurality of operation effects that change the effect mode according to the number of operations of the operation means are set, and when the plurality of operation effects are set, the plurality of operations effects are set. The gaming machine CG1 is characterized in that the suggestion mode of the number corresponding to the number of operations set in the operation effect is displayed.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. As an effect for notifying the lottery result, a method has been proposed in which the player can directly participate in the game by changing the effect by operating an operation means that can be operated by the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). However, there is a problem that the interest is lowered in performing the production based on the operation of the operating means. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machines to provide gaming machines that can improve the interest.

According to the gaming machine CG1, when a plurality of operation effects are set, the suggestion mode of the number corresponding to the number of operations is displayed, so that an easy-to-understand game can be provided and the interest of the game can be improved. be.

In the gaming machine CG1, when the plurality of operation effects are set, the validity period setting means for setting the validity period in which the operation of the operation means is valid and the validity period set by the validity period setting means are set. The gaming machine CG2 is characterized by having a variable display means for setting a variable display mode that is variably displayed in response to a decrease in the valid period for each of the suggested modes.

According to the gaming machine CG2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CG1, the variable display mode makes it seem as if the valid period is set for each suggestion mode, and the timing of each operation is variablely displayed. It can be operated according to the embodiment, and there is an effect that the timing at which the operation effect is displayed can be optimized.

In the gaming machine CG1 or CG2, the plurality of operating effects is characterized in that the operating effects executed according to the number of times the operating means are operated are preset.

According to the gaming machine CG3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine CG1 or CG2, there is no need to individually set a plurality of operation effects, and there is an effect that the control of being operated a plurality of times can be easily performed.

<Characteristic CH group> (Cosmo up)
An acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, a discrimination means capable of performing discrimination based on the information stored by the storage means, and a discrimination means thereof. The display means for displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result by the display means, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and the dynamic display means for the dynamic display means. When the dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information and the identification information for indicating the specific discrimination result are displayed on the display means, a privilege advantageous to the player is provided. The effect executing means having the privilege granting means and capable of executing the effect during the period when the identification information is dynamically displayed, and the specific information based on the specific effect executed by the effect executing means. The gaming machine CH1 is characterized by having a specific information storage means to be stored and a special effect determination means for determining a special effect based on the specific information stored in the specific storage means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. As an effect for notifying the lottery result, it has been proposed that a advance notice effect suggesting the lottery result is executed before the lottery result is notified (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). ). However, there was a need for further improvement in interest. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machines to provide gaming machines that can improve the interest.

According to the gaming machine CH1, the special effect is determined based on the specific information stored when the specific effect is executed, so that the effect to be executed thereafter can be changed by executing the specific effect. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game by providing different games for each player.

Based on the suggestion means in which the suggestion mode corresponding to the specific information stored in the specific information storage means is suggested and the special effect determined by the special effect determination means are executed in the gaming machine CH1. Further, it has a suggestion mode variable means for varying the suggestion mode, and when the suggestion mode is a predetermined mode, the residual dynamic display period of the identification information is configured to be a predetermined period or longer. The gaming machine CH2, which is characterized by being a machine.

According to the gaming machine CH2, it is possible to determine that the identification information is not the timing to be displayed in the aspect for showing the discrimination result according to the suggestion mode, and there is an effect that the problem of overlooking the discrimination result can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine CH1 or CH2, the effect determined by the special effect determining means, which has an operation means that can be operated by the player, is composed of an operation effect in which the effect mode is changed by operating the operation means. CH3 is a gaming machine CH3, wherein the number of times the operation effect is executed is set in response to the specific information stored in the specific information storage means.

According to the gaming machine CH3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine CH1 or CH2, the number of times the operation effect is executed is set by the stored specific information, so that the number of times the player can operate the operating means. It has the effect of suppressing the problem of misunderstanding.

<Characteristic CI group> (Pseudo light guide plate production)
In a gaming machine having a display means and a display control means capable of displaying a second display mode different from the first display mode from the first display mode, the second display mode is the first display mode. On the other hand, it is configured in a display mode in which the focal position is variable, and the display control means is configured so that the first display mode and the second display mode can be displayed in an overlapping manner. The gaming machine CI1 characterized by this.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. After the symbol for showing the lottery result is variablely displayed on the display means, it is stopped and displayed by the combination of the symbols indicating the lottery result, and during the variable display, a notice effect suggesting the lottery result is executed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). In such a gaming machine, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a driving object, a light emitting device such as an LED, or the like is arranged on a gaming board or the like and operated in relation to a display mode to further improve the interest of the game. In such a configuration, the cost of the gaming machine becomes excessive, and there is a demand for a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game while reducing the cost. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming in order to solve the above-mentioned problems.

According to the gaming machine CI1, by displaying the display modes with variable focal positions in an overlapping manner, it is possible to make the display mode look like a perspective display to the player, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved. ..

The gaming machine CI1 is characterized in that the second display mode includes a mode in which the display object displayed in the first display mode is out of focus.

According to the gaming machine CI2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CI1, the aspect in which the display object is out of focus is included, so that the first display aspect and the second display aspect can be overlapped with each other. It has the effect of providing a perspective effect.

In the gaming machine CI1 or CI2, the display control means displays the first display mode for the first period, and then displays the second display mode a plurality of times on the front side of the first display mode. The gaming machine CI3 is configured so that the second state to be hidden can be repeatedly displayed.

According to the gaming machine CI3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CI1 or CI2, the second display mode is repeatedly displayed and hidden on the front side of the first display mode in a short time, so that an afterimage and a first display mode are repeated. There is an effect that it is possible to make it seem as if the first display mode is overhanging on the front side by combining the above.

<Characteristic CJ group> (Control of production using hold information and inside information)
An acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, a discrimination means capable of performing discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means, and a discrimination means thereof. A display means for displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and a first method based on the discrimination result. A state setting means capable of setting at least one of a gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the storage means before the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means. A staging execution means capable of executing an effect on a gaming machine having a pre-determination means capable of executing a pre-determination based on the information stored in the above, and an effect mode of the effect executed by the effect execution means. It has a staging selection means capable of selecting one staging mode group from a plurality of staging mode groups including at least, and a group switching means for switching the staging mode group selected by the staging selection means. The gaming machine CJ1 is characterized in that the group switching means determines the type of the staging mode group based on the discrimination result of the pre-discrimination means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Then, it is possible to set a game state in which it is easy to win in a winning / losing lottery and a game state in which it is difficult to win, and a game with a different degree of expectation of winning is provided to the player according to the set game state. Things have been proposed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). By performing an effect to make it difficult for the player to understand the currently set gaming state on such a gaming machine, the game is played while expecting that the gaming state advantageous to the player is set. There was something to be done, but in this case, even if the gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set, the player thinks that the gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player is set, and the game is played. There was a problem that motivation was reduced. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by performing an effect capable of appropriately suggesting a set game state.

According to the gaming machine CJ1, the effect mode group is switched based on the determination result of the prior determination means, and the effect is executed by the effect execution means based on the switched effect mode group, so that the effect is based on the effect mode to be executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to predict the later game situation. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine CJ1, the effect executed by the effect executing means includes a suggestion effect suggesting that the two gaming states are set, and the group switching means is the pre-determination means. It is determined whether or not the second gaming state can be switched to the first gaming state by the prior determination according to the above, and the effect mode group from which the suggestion effect corresponding to the determination result can be selected is determined. The gaming machine CJ2 featuring.

According to the gaming machine CJ2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CJ1, it is determined based on the staging mode group corresponding to the determination that the gaming state is switched from the second gaming state to the first gaming state by the prior determination means. Since the effect can be executed by the effect execution means, it is possible to predict the currently set game state or the game state that can be set later based on the effect mode of the effect to be executed. .. Further, since the effect mode group is switched based on the prior determination information that the game state actually shifts, it is possible to execute the effect with high reliability for the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can pay attention to the effect to be executed and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine CJ1 or CJ2, the state setting means is set by switching to the first gaming state at the start of dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the specific determination result. Machine CJ3.

According to the gaming machine CJ3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CJ1 or CJ2, the state setting means sets the switching from the second gaming state to the first gaming state at the start of the dynamic display of the identification information. It has the effect of making it difficult for the player to understand the timing of switching states.

In any of the gaming machines CJ1 to CJ3, a period until at least a predetermined number of discrimination results are displayed by the identification information for indicating the discrimination result based on the setting of the second gaming state. The advantageous period setting means for setting an advantageous period that is advantageous to the player, and the suggestion mode are the gaming states set by the state setting means at the time when the period until the determination of the predetermined number of times is displayed has elapsed. The gaming machine CJ4, which is characterized by suggesting.

According to the gaming machine CJ4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines CJ1 to CJ3, the suggestion mode is displayed based on the elapsed status of the set advantageous period, so that the suggestion is made immediately after the advantageous period is set. It is possible to suppress the display of the aspect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from immediately decreasing and to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic CK group> (meter sound control)
In a gaming machine having an operation means that can be operated by a player and an operation effect execution means that can execute an operation effect based on operating the operation means, the operation effect execution means is used for a specific period of time. In addition, the specific operation effect is configured to be executable when the operation means is operated, and the specific operation effect corresponds to the operated period when the operation means is operated during the specific period. The gaming machine CK1 is configured to perform different aspects.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Then, before the lottery result is notified, an operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means can be executed as a suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result, and a period until the lottery result is notified is set. There was something to entertain the player. Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machines, there are those that allow the player to operate the operating means in order to further enhance the effect of the effect (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). In such a gaming machine, the same operation effect is executed regardless of the timing at which the operation means is operated, so that there is a problem that the effect of the effect is lowered and the interest of the game is lowered. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a game having an improved interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine CK1, when the operating means is operated, the specific operation effect can be executed in different modes corresponding to the operated period, so that the specific operation executed when the operating means is operated can be executed. There is an effect that the variation of the production can be increased and the fun of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine CK1, the specific operation effect is at least a display effect in which the display mode is changed stepwise according to the period in which the operation means is operated, and a voice effect corresponding to the variable display effect. A gaming machine CK2 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine CK2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine CK1, a display effect in which the display mode is changed stepwise as a specific operation effect and a voice effect corresponding to the variable display effect are executed. It has the effect of enhancing the staging effect.

In the gaming machine CK2, the voice effect is a reproduction process in which reproduction of the corresponding audio data is started when the operation means is operated, and the audio data executed in the reproduction process is executed. The reproduction is continued for a predetermined reproduction period, or when the operation means performs a predetermined operation before the reproduction period is continued, the reproduction of the audio data is stopped or the audio is reproduced. The gaming machine CK3, characterized in that the process of stopping the output of the game is executed.

According to the game machine CK3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine CK2, the voice effect in which the voice data is reproduced is stopped when the operation means is operated in advance, so that the display effect and the voice effect can be combined. It is possible to perform a production with a sense of unity, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine CK3, after the processing of stopping the reproduction of the audio data or stopping the output of the audio is executed, the reproduction is stopped or the output of the audio is stopped based on the operation of the operating means. The gaming machine CK4, characterized in that the reproduction is started or the sound output is executed from the position where the game was played.

According to the gaming machine CK4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CK3, the reproduction of the stopped audio data can be restarted again based on the operation of the operating means, so that the display effect and the audio effect give a sense of unity. There is an effect that it is possible to execute the production with the above, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic CL group> (Variation straddle voice control)
A discrimination means capable of performing discrimination, a display means for displaying identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and a dynamic display means thereof. When the dynamic display period determining means dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are stopped and displayed, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player can be executed. In a game machine having a game execution means, a display effect execution means capable of executing a display effect during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, and a display effect execution means during a period in which the display effect is executed by the display effect execution means. It has a voice effect executing means capable of executing a voice effect, and the display effect executing means performs 1 display effect in a period until the identification information for showing the determination result of a predetermined number of times is stopped and displayed. The specific display effect to be executed is configured to be executable, and the voice effect execution means is configured to be able to execute the specific voice effect corresponding to the period during which the specific display effect is executed, and the specific voice effect is executed. When it is executed, the process of stopping the reproduction of the specific voice effect based on the stop display of the identification information and restarting it in correspondence with the start of the dynamic display of the identification information is executed. The game machine CL1 characterized by this.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). Further, some of the above-mentioned gaming machines are configured so that a specific effect can be executed in a specific period until the winning / failing lottery is executed a predetermined number of times, and the effect differs depending on the period in which the winning / failing lottery is executed. There was something that enhances the staging effect by providing the player with. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, there are cases where the winning / failing lottery is executed without interruption during a specific period, and there are cases where the winning / failing lottery is interrupted during the specific period. There was a problem that it was not possible to give a sense of unity to the effect to be performed, and it was not possible to enhance the effect of the effect. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest by enhancing the effect of production.

According to the gaming machine CL1, the specific voice effect executed during the period in which the specific display effect is executed is stopped based on the stop display of the identification information, and the dynamic display of the identification information is started. Since it is restarted based on the above, it is possible to give a sense of unity between the specific display effect and the specific audio effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of directing can be enhanced and the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine CL1 is characterized in that the voice effect executing means is configured to output a special sound when the reproduction of the specific sound effect is stopped. According to the gaming machine CL2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine CL1, a special voice is output when the specific voice effect is stopped, so that the next identification information is dynamically displayed after the identification information is stopped and displayed. When the period until the start is short, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the specific voice production is interrupted, and there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

It is preferable that the special voice output by the voice effect executing means is at least continuously output from the time when the identification information is stopped and displayed until a predetermined period elapses. This makes it easier for the player to think that the specific voice effect is continuously executed over the dynamic display of the identification information a plurality of times.

In the gaming machine CL1 or CL2, the specific display effect is characterized in that an effect corresponding to the end of the dynamic display period of the identification information of 1 is preset.

According to the gaming machine CL3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine CL1 or CL2, an effect corresponding to the end of the dynamic display period of the identification information of 1 is set in advance as a specific display effect, so that the dynamic display period There is an effect that the effect corresponding to the end can be surely executed and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines CL1 to CL3, the display effect executing means displays the specific display effect based on the fact that the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped during the period when the specific display effect is executed. The gaming machine CL4 characterized by being interrupted.

According to the gaming machine CL4, in addition to any effect played by the gaming machines CL1 to CL3, the display of the specific display effect can be interrupted based on the stop of the dynamic display of the identification information, so that the specific display can be interrupted. It is possible to perform a staging with a sense of unity by the staging and the specific voice staging, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. The identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time, provided that the prize is won (or passed through the operating port). Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a winning game when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of these gaming machines are designed to improve the interest of the player's game by making it possible to execute a plurality of games having different degrees of advantage for the player and playing a game aiming at a winning game in various games. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-038007).
However, there is a need for further improvement in interest.
The present technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball and an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry means of the game ball entering the ball entry means. A storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, a discrimination means capable of discriminating based on the information stored in the storage means, and a discrimination by the discrimination means. When the dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the result on the display means and the identification information being displayed on the display means in an manner for showing the specific discrimination result. It has a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player, and can execute the determination based on the information stored in the storage means before the determination by the determination means. Corresponds to the effect executed by the effect execution means among the information stored in the pre-determination means, the effect execution means capable of executing the effect based on the determination result by the pre-determination means, and the storage means. It has a suggestion means capable of suggesting suggestive information for showing a number of information other than the information discriminated by the prior discriminant means.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, the entry means capable of entering a game ball, the acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry means, and the acquisition. To show a storage means capable of storing information acquired by the means, a discrimination means capable of discriminating based on the information stored in the storage means, and a discrimination result by the discriminating means. It is advantageous to the player when the identification information can be dynamically displayed on the display means and when the identification information is displayed on the display means in a manner for showing the specific determination result. A pre-discrimination means that has a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game, and can execute discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means before being discriminated by the discrimination means. And, among the information stored in the storage means, the effect executing means capable of executing the effect based on the determination result by the pre-determination means, and the advance corresponding to the effect executed by the effect executing means. It has suggestion means capable of suggesting suggestive information for showing numerical information other than the information discriminated by the discriminating means.
This has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
112 Launch control device (launch means in the twelfth embodiment)
640 Second ball entry port (ball entry means)
C213 Discrimination means C308 Acquisition means C310 Storage means C4104 Production execution means
S406 Part of the discriminating means in the twelfth embodiment
S408 Part of the privilege game execution means in the twelfth embodiment
S1006 Part of the discriminating means in the twelfth embodiment
Part of the privilege game execution means in the 12th embodiment of S1008
S1101 Part of the discriminating means in the twelfth embodiment
S1103 Specific game execution means in the twelfth embodiment
S13404 First staging execution means in the twelfth embodiment
S13503 Second staging execution means in the twelfth embodiment

Claims (1)

The means of entry that allows the game ball to enter,
An acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry means,
A storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and a storage means.
A discriminating means capable of discriminating based on the information stored in the storage means, and
A dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means on the display means, and
In a gaming machine having a privileged game executing means capable of executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is displayed on the display means in an manner for showing the specific determination result.
A pre-discrimination means capable of performing discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means before being discriminated by the discriminating means.
An effect execution means capable of executing an effect based on the determination result by the prior determination means, and an effect execution means.
Among the information stored in the storage means, it is possible to suggest suggestive information for showing a number of information other than the information discriminated by the pre-discrimination means corresponding to the staging executed by the staging execution means. A gaming machine characterized by having a suggestion means.

Images